08-10 Honda Accord SM

INTRODUCTION
- How to Use Thi s Manual

Thi s manual is divided into multiple sections, The first page of
each section is marked with a black tab that lines up with its
corresponding thumb index tab on this page and the back cover.
You can quickly find the first page of each section without
looking through a full table of contents. The symbols printed at
the top corner of each page can also be used as a quick
reference system.
Each section includes;
1. A table of contents, or an exploded view index showing;
Parts di sassembly sequence.
Bolt torques and thread si zes.
Page references to descriptions in text.
2. Di sassembly/assembly procedures and tools.
3. Inspection.
4. Testing/troubleshooting.
5. Repair.
6. Adjustments.
- Safety Messages ^ ^
Your safety, and the safety of others, is very important. To help
you make informed deci si ons, we have provided safety
messages, and other safety information throughout this manual.
Of course, it is not practical or possible to warn you about all the
hazards associated with servicing this vehicle. You must use
your own good judgment.
You will find important safety information in a variety of forms
including:
9
Saf et y Labels on the vehicle.
Saf et y Messages preceded by a safety alert symbol and
one of three signal words, DANGER, WARNING, or CAUTION.
These signal words mean:
' " t : 2 M? S i 3
Y o u
WILL be KILLED or SERIOUSLY HURT if
you don't follow instructions.
L ^ MS?i ^ ^ 3 You CAN be KILLED or SERIOUSLY HURT if
l / l \ @^ i 5 n | You CAN be HURT if you don't follow
instructions.
0
Instructions how to service this vehicle correctly and safely.
Gener al Informati on
Speci f i cat i ons
Mai nt enance
*Engi ne El ect ri cal
Engi ne Mechani cal
Engi ne Cool i ng
Fuel and Emi ssi ons
*Tr ansaxl e
All information contained in this manual is based on the latest
product information available at the time of printing. We reserve
the right to make changes at anytime without notice. No part of
this publication may be reproduced, or stored in a retrieval
system, or transmitted, in any form by any means, electronic,
mechanical, photocopying, recording, or otherwise, without the
prior written permission of the publisher. Thi s includes text,
figures, and tables.
As you read this manual, you will find information that is
preceded by a | NOT ICE] symbol. The purpose of this message is
to help prevent damage to your vehi cle, other property, or the
environment.
First Edition
All Rights Reserved
Specifications apply to USA and Canada
HONDA MOTOR CO., LTD.
Servi ce Publication Office
As sect i ons wi t h * i ncl ude S RS component s;
special pr ecaut i ons ar e requi red when ser vi ci ng.
marked sections are not included in this
manual, see Volume 2.
2008-10 Accord
Vol. 1
SUPPL EMENTAL RESTRAINT S YS TE M (SRS)
The Ac c or d S RS Incl udes a dr i ver ' s ai r bag in t he st eer i ng wheel hub, a passenger ' s ai r bag In t he dashboar d
above t he gl ove box, seat belt t ensi oner s i n t he f ront seat belt r et r act or s, si de cur t ai n ai r bags i n t he si des of t he
roof, and si de ai r bags i n t he f ront seat -bac ks. Inf ormat i on nec essar y to saf el y ser vi c e t he S RS i s i ncl uded i n t hi s
Ser vi c e Manual . It ems mar ked wi t h an ast er i sk (*) on t he cont ent s page i ncl ude or ar e l ocat ed near S RS
c omponent s. Ser vi c i ng, di sassembl i ng, or r epl aci ng t hese i t ems r equi r es spec i al pr ecaut i ons and t ool s, and
shoul d be done by an aut hor i zed Honda deal er .
To avoi d r ender i ng t he S RS i noper at i ve, whi c h coul d l ead to per sonal i nj ury or deat h in t he event of a sever e
f ront al or si de c ol l i si on, all S RS ser vi c e wor k shoul d be done by an aut hor i zed Honda deal er .
Impr oper ser vi c e pr oc edur es, i ncl udi ng i ncor r ect r emoval and i nst al l at i on of t he S RS , coul d l ead to per sonal
i nj ury c aused by uni nt ent i onal depl oyment of t he ai r bags, si de ai r bags, and/or si de cur t ai n ai r bags.
Do not bump or i mpact t he S RS uni t, front i mpact s ens or s , si de i mpact s ens or s , or r ear saf i ng sensor ,
espec i al l y when t he i gni t i on swi t c h i s in ON (II), or f or at l east 3 mi nut es after t he i gni ti on swi t c h i s t ur ned to
L OCK (0); ot her wi se, t he syst em may fai l i n a c ol l i si on, or t he ai r bags may depl oy.
S RS el ect ri cal c onnec t or s ar e i dent i f i ed by yel l ow col or c odi ng. Rel at ed c omponent s ar e l ocat ed in t he
st eer i ng c ol umn, cent er c onsol e, dashboar d, dashboar d l ower c over , in t he dashboar d above t he gl ove box,
in t he f ront seat s, in t he roof si de, and ar ound t he f l oor. Do not use el ect ri cal t est equi pment on t hese ci r cui t s.
General Information
Ch as s i s and Pai nt Co d es
' 08 4-door Model 1-2
' 09 4-door Mo d el . 1-4
' 09 2-door Mo d el . . 1-5
Ident i f i cat i on Number L oc at i ons 1-8
Danger / War ni ng/ Caut i on L abel L oc at i ons 1-9
Under -hood Emi s s i o n Cont r ol L ab el . . . . . . 1- 12
Li ft and S uppor t Poi nt s 1-13
To wi ng 1-14
Par t s Mar ki ng 1-16
General Information
Chassi s and Pai nt Codes - '08 4-door Model
Vehi c l e Ident i f i cat i on Number
1HGCP2 5 3 * 8 A 000001
r r r r r r r i
a b c d e f g h
a. Manuf ac t ur er , Make, and Type of Vehi c l e
1HG: Honda of Amer i c a Mf g., Inc.
Honda passenger vehi c l e
J HM: Honda Mot or Co. , Lt d.
b. L i ne, Body, and Engi ne Type
CP2: Ac c or d/K24Z2, K24Z3
c . Body Type and Tr ansmi ssi on Type
5: 4-door Sedan/5-speed Manual
6: 4-door Sedan/5-speed Aut omat i c
d. Vehi c l e Gr ade (Ser i es)
US A model s Canada model s
3: L X, L X PZEV 3: L X
4: L X-P, L X-P PZEV 4: L X-P
7: EX, E X PZEV 7: E X
8: EX- L , EX- L PZEV 8: EX- L
e. Chec k Di gi t
f. Model Year
8: ' 08
g. Fac t or y Code
A: Mar ysvi l l e, Ohi o Fact or y i n U S. A.
C: Sai t ama Fact or y i n J apan
h. Ser i al Number
0 0 0 0 0 1 U S A model s
800001 : Canada model s
Vehi c l e Ident i f i cat i on
Number , Feder al Mot or
Vehi c l e Saf et y St andar d
Cer t i f i c at i on, and
Pai nt Code L abel .
Number , Canadi an Mot or
PAINT CODE INTERIOR COL OR CODE
Engi ne Number
K24Z2 - 1000001
a
a. Engi ne Type
K24Z2: 2.4 L DOHC i -VTEC Sequent i al Mult i port
Fuel -i nj ect ed, 177HP engi ne
b. Ser i al Number
1000001 : Al l model s except PZEV pr oduced i n
Mar ysvi l l e
1400001 : Al l model s except PZEV pr oduced i n
Sai t ama
1500001 - : PZEV pr oduced i n Mar ysvi l l e
1700001 - : PZEV pr oduced i n Sai t ama
Tr ansmi ssi on Number
88E5 - 8000001
a
b
Tr ansmi ssi on Type
88E5: 5-speed Manual
M91 A: 5-speed Aut omat i c
B90A: 5-speed Aut omat i c
Ser i al Number
1000001- : M91A, B90A
8000001- : 88E5
Pai nt Code
Code Col or USA Canada
models models
B-92P Ni ght hawk Bl ack Pear l
O O
B-536P Royal Bl ue Pear l
O o
G-530M Myst i c Gr een Met al l i c.
o o
NH-578 Taf f et a Whi t e
o o
NH-603P Whi t e Di amond Pear l
o o
NH-700M Al abast er Si l ver Met al l i c
o o
NH-737M Pol i shed Met al Met al l i c
o o
R-530P Basque Red Pearl
o o
YR-574M Bol d Bei ge Met al l i c
o o
NH-731P Cr yst al Bl ack Pearl
o o
1-2
D
Vehi cl e Identi fi cati on Number
1HG CS1 1 3 * 8 A 000001
c d e g h
b.
h.
Manuf act ur er , Make, and Type of Vehi c l e
1HG: Honda of Amer i c a Mf g., Inc.
L i ne, Body, and Engi ne Type
CS 1: Ac c or d Coupe/K24Z3
Body Type and Tr ansmi ssi on Type
1: 2-door Coupe/5-speed Manual
2: 2-door Coupe/5-speed Aut omat i c
Vehi c l e Gr ade (Ser i es)
US A model s
3: L X, L X PZEV
7: EX, EX PZEV
8: EX- L , EX- L PZEV
Chec k Di gi t
Model Year
8: ' 08
Fac t or y Code
A: Mar ysvi l l e, Ohi o Fact or y i n U.S.A
Ser i al Number
000001- : US A model s
800001 - : Canada model s
Canada model s
7: EX
8: EX- L
Pai nt Code Label .
Engi ne Number
K24Z3 - 1000001
a
b
a. Engi ne Type
b. Ser i al Number
1000001- : Except PZEV
1500001- : PZEV
8000001
a to
a. Tr ansmi ssi on Type
b. Ser i al Number
1000001- : B90A
8000001- : 88E5
Pai nt Code
models models
B-92P Ni ght hawk Bl ack Pearl
O O
G-551P Bel i ze Bl ue Pearl
o o
o o
o o
NH-737M Pol i shed Metal Met al l i c
o o
R-94 S an Mari no R-
o o
1 - 3
General Informati on
Vehicle Identification Number
1HG CP2 5 3 * 9 A 000001
r r r r r r r i
a b c d e f g h
a. Manuf act ur er , Make, and Type of Vehi c l e
1HG: Honda of Amer i c a Mfg., i nc.
Honda passenger vehi cl e .
J HM: Honda Mot or Co., Lt d.
Honda passenger vehi cl e
3. Li ne, Body, and Engi ne Type
c. Body Type and Tr ansmi ssi on Type
5: 4-door Sedan/ 5-speed Manual
6: 4-door Sedan/ 5-speed Aut omat i c
1 Vehi c l e Gr ade (Ser i es)
US A model s
3: L X, L X PZEV
4: L X-P, LX-P PZEV
7: EX, EX PZEV
e. Chec k Di gi t
f. Model Year
9: '09
g. Fact or y Code
A: Mar ysvi l l e, Ohi o Fact or y in U.S.A.
C: Sai t ama Fact or y in J apan
h. Ser i al Number
0 0 0 0 0 1 U S A model s
800001 - : Canada model s
Canada model s
3: L X
4: L X-P
7: EX
8: EX- L
Cer t i f i cat i on, and
V. I . N
r z i c n r z n
Engi ne Number
K24Z2 - 2000001
Engi ne Type
K24Z2: 2.4 L DOHC i -VTEC Sequent i al Multi port
Ser i al Number
2000001 -
2400001 -
2450001 -
2500001 -
2700001 -
.2800001 -
K24Z2 pr oduced in Mar ysvi l l e
K24Z2 pr oduced i n Sai t ama
K24Z3 pr oduced in Sai t ama
PZEV pr oduced in Mar ysvi l l e
PZEV pr oduced in Sai t ama
88E5 8200001
a
b.
M91A: 5-speed Aut omat i c
Ser i al Number
2 0 0 0 0 0 1 M9 1 A , B90A
8 2 0 0 0 0 1 8 8 E 5
Pai nt Code
Code ' Col or USA Canada
models models
NH-731P Cr yst al Bl ack Pearl O O
B-536P Royal Bl ue Pearl
o o
G-530M Myst i c Gr een Met al l i c
o o
o o
NH-603P Whi t e Di amond Pearl
o o
o o
o o
R-530P Basque Red Pearl
o o
YR-574M Bol d Bei ge Met al l i c
o o
1 - 4
Vehi c l e Ident i f i cat i on Number
1HG CS1 1 3 * 9 A 000001
a
b c d e
h
1HG; Honda of Amer i c a Mf g., Inc.
L i ne, Body, and Engi ne Type
1: 2-door Coupe/5-speed Manual
2: 2-door Coupe/5-speed Aut omat i c
Vehi c l e Gr ade (Ser i es)
US A model s
3: L X, L X PZEV
7: EX, EX PZEV
Chec k Di gi t
Model Year
9: ' 09
Fac t or y Code
A: Mar ysvi l l e, Ohi o Fact ory i n U.S.A.
Ser i al Number
Canada model s
3: L X
7: EX
8: EX- L
Pai nt Code Label .
Pai nt Code Label .
Engi ne Number
K24Z3 - 2800001
a
Engi ne Type
Ser i al Number
2500001- : PZEV
2800001- : Except PZEV
88E5 8200001
b
Ser i al Number
2000001- : B90A
8200001- : 88E5
Pai nt Code
models models
B-551P Bel i ze Bl ue Pearl
O O
NH-578 Taffeta Whi t e
o O
o o
o o
R-94 San Mari no Red
o o
1 - 5
meml Inf or mat i on
Vehicle Identi fi cati on Number
1HG CP2 E 3 * A A 000001
r r r r r r r i
a b c d e f g h
a. Manuf act ur er , Make, and Type of Vehi c l e
1HG: Honda of Amer i c a Mfg., Inc.
J HM: Honda Motor Co., Lt d.
b. L i ne, Body, and Engi ne Type
c . Body Type and Tr ansmi ssi on Type
E: 4-door Sedan/5-speed Manual
F: 4-door Sedan/5-speed Aut omat i c
US A model s Canada model s
3: L X, L X PZEV 3: L X
4: L X-P, LX-P PZEV 4: L X-P
7: EX, EX PZEV 7: EX
8: EX- L , EX- L PZEV 8: EX- L
e. Chec k Di gi t
f. Model Year
A: i O
g. Fact or y Code
A: Mar ysvi l l e, Ohi o Fact ory in U.S.A.
C: Sai t ama Fact ory in J apan
h. Ser i al Number
- 000001- : US A model s
PAINT CODE INTERIOR COLOR CODE
Engi ne Number
K24Z2 - 3000001
a
Engi ne Ty pe
Ser i al Number
3000001 -
3400001 -
3450001 -
3500001 -
3700001 -
3750001~
K24Z2 pr oduced i n Mar ysvi l l e
PZEV pr oduced i n Mar ysvi l l e
PZEV pr oduced in Sai t ama
88E5 - 8400001
M91 A: 5-speed Aut omat i c
Ser i al Number
3000001. M91A, B90A
8400001- : 88E5
Pai nt Code
Code Col or
USA
models
Canada
models
NH-731P Cr yst al Bl ack Pearl o o
B-536P Royal Bl ue Pearl o
G-530M Myst i c Gr een Met al l i c o o
NH-578 Taf f et a Whi t e o o
NH-700M Al abast er Si l ver Met al l i c o o
NH-737M Pol i shed Met al Met al l i c o o
R-530P Basque Red Pearl o o
YR-574M Bol d Bei ge Met al l i c o o
1-6
Chassi s and Pai nt Codes -
f
10 2-door Model
Vehi cl e Ident i f i cat i on Number
11 A 000001
c .
e f g
1HG: Honda of Amer i c a Mfg., Inc.
Honda passenger vehi cl e
Li ne, Body, and Engi ne Type
A: 2-door Coupe/5-speed Manual
B: 2-door Coupe/5-speed Aut omat i c
US A model s
3: L X, LX PZEV, L X- S
7: EX, EX PZEV
Chec k Di gi t
Model Year
A: ' 10
Fac t or y Code
A: Mar ysvi l l e, Ohi o Fact ory in U.S.A.
Ser i al Number
Canada model s
3: L X
7: EX
8: EX- L

Engi ne Number
K24Z3 - 3750001
I i I 5
a. Engi ne Type
b. Ser i al Number
3500001 --: PZEV
3750001 -: Exc ept PZEV
88E5 .8400001
a b
. Tr ansmi ssi on Type
>. Ser i al Number
3000001- : B90A
8400001- : 88E5
Pai nt Code
models models
B-551P Bel i ze Bl ue Pearl
O O
O O
o o
NH-731P Cr yst al Bl ack Pearl
o o
o o
R-94 S an Mar i no Red
o o
1 - 7
Identi fi cati on Number Locat i ons
1-8
Danger /War ni ng/Caut i on Label Locat i ons
4-door Model
Fr ont Passenger ' s Compar t ment ;
S TEERI NG COL UMN NOTI CE MONITOR NOTI CE TENS I ONER CAUTI ON
St eer i ng Wheel : Rear Passenger ' s Compar t ment :
('08-09 models)
(cont' d)
1-9
Danger /War ni ng/Caut i on Label Locat i ons (cont'd)
2-door Model
Fr ont Pas s enger ' s Compar t ment :
S TEERI NG COL UMN NOTI CE ' MONITOR NOTI CE TENS I ONER CAUTI ON
St eer i ng Wheel : Rear Passenger ' s Compar t ment :
{'08-09 models)
1-10
4-door SV9odel:
S RS WARNI NG EMI S S I ON CONTROL INFORMATION
(' 08-09 model s) and ENGI NE COOL ANT INFORMATION
Loc at ed on dr i ver ' s door j amb
2-door Model :
S RS WARNI NG EMI SSI ON CONTROL INFORMATION
(' 08-09 model s) and ENGI NE COOL ANT INFORMATION
Loc at ed on dr i ver ' s door j amb
1-11
Under-hood Emi ssi on Cont rol Label
Emi ssi on Gr oup Ident i f i cat i on
Exampl e:
I NFORMA TI ON
MHE FACTOIW W8FAUB IflNCWR
MOUNT mmmmmm ACCOMUMTO
V E HI CL E E MI S S I ON CON T ROL I NFORMA TI ON I NFORMA TI ON
MHE FACTOIW W8FAUB IflNCWR
MOUNT mmmmmm ACCOMUMTO
CONFORMS TO REGULATIONS: 2008MY
mAT tt YEARS WHWKVaOWES BUT.
mmmmBimswm.
^<nmmmmmimiamm.cmMir,
ummummmicmmvmz
j> CHECK OH ADD TOE COOUOT
AT TK HESBtVE TAW, NOT THE MMATOB,
U.S. EPA: T2B5LDV OBO: CAOBDI1 FUEL: GASOLINE
ARB: LEVI! ULEV PC OBD: CAOBDII FUEL: GASOLINE
mmmmBimswm.
ummummmicmmvmz
WU-TWC, TWC, A/F SENSOR, HOZS, SFI
mmmmBimswm.
ummummmicmmvmz
(H) CD
HONDAMOTORCO., LTD.
R 4 0
'
A 0 0
BHNXV02.4TKR
CHNJ-R01SCBBA
08 Model
COMFORMS TO REGUL ATI ONS : 2008 MY
09 Model
' 10 Model
Test Gr oup and Evapor at i ve Fami l y
Tes t Gr oup:
A HMX V 02.4 MBS
a b c d
a. Model Year
8: '08
9: ' 09
A: "10
b. Manuf act ur er Subc ode
HNX: HONDA
c . Fami l y Type
V: LDV
d. Di spl ac ement Gr oup
e. Sequenc e Char ac t er s
TKR: ' 08 model (ULEV)
EMC: ' 08 model (SUL EV/ PZEV)
YB3: ' 09 model (ULEV)
TC3: ' 09 model (SUL EV/ PZEV)
MB3: ' 10 model (ULEV)
. KC3: ' 10 model (SUL EV/ PZEV)
Evapor at i ve Fami l y:
A HNX R 0156 VEA
a b e d e
a. Model Year
8: '08
9: ' 09
A: "10
b. Manuf act ur er Subc ode
HNX: HONDA
c . Fami l y Type
R: Ref uel i ng
d. Cani st er Wor ki ng Capac i t y Gr oup
e. Sequenc e Char ac t er s
BCA, BBA: ' 08 model
VEA, VZA: ' 09-10 model s
1 - 1 2
Lift and Suppor t Poi nts
NOTE: If you ar e goi ng t o r emove heavy c omponent s
suc h as suspensi on or t he f uel t ank f r om t he r ear of t he
vehi c l e, f i rst suppor t t he front of t he vehi cl e wi t h t al l
saf et y st ands. When subst ant i al wei ght i s r emoved f r om
t he r ear of t he vehi c l e, t he cent er of gravi t y c an c hange,
c ausi ng t he vehi c l e to ti p f or war d on t he lift.
Vehi c l e Li ft
1. Posi t i on t he lift bl ocks (A) under t he vehi c l e' s f ront
suppor t poi nt s (B) and rear suppor t poi nt s (C).
2. Rai se t he lift a f ew i nc hes, and rock t he vehi c l e gent l y
t o be sur e it i s f i rml y suppor t ed.
3. Rai se t he lift t o its full hei ght , and i nspect t he vehi c l e
suppor t poi nt s f or sol i d cont act wi t h t he lift bl ocks.
Saf et y St ands
To suppor t t he vehi c l e on saf et y st ands, use t he s ame
suppor t poi nt s as f or a vehi cl e lift. Al ways use saf et y
st ands when wor ki ng on or under any vehi c l e t hat i s
onl y suppor t ed by a j ack.
Fl oor J ac k
1. When lifting t he f ront of t he vehi c l e, set t he parki ng
br ake. When lifting t he r ear of t he vehi c l e, put t he shi ft
l ever i n r ever se f or manual t r ansmi ssi on, or in t he P
posi t i on f or aut omat i c t r ansmi ssi on.
2. Bl ock t he wheel s t hat ar e not bei ng li fted.
3. Posi t i on t he f l oor j ac k under t he f ront j acki ng bracket
(A) or t he rear j acki ng br acket (B). Cent er t he j acki ng
bracket on t he j ac k lift pl at f orm (C), and j ack up t he
vehi c l e hi gh enough to fit t he saf et y st ands under it.
4. Posi t i on t he saf et y st ands under t he suppor t poi nt s,
and adj ust t hem s o t he vehi c l e i s l evel .
5. Lower t he vehi c l e ont o t he st ands.
1-13
Towi ng
If t he vehi c l e needs to be towed, cal l a pr of essi onal
t owi ng ser vi c e. Never tow t he vehi c l e behi nd anot her
vehi cl e wi t h j ust a r ope or c hai n It i s ver y danger ous.
Emer genc y Towi ng
Ther e ar e t hr ee popul ar met hods of t owi ng a vehi c l e.
Fl at -bed To w Tr ac k Equi pment The oper at or l oads t he
vehi c l e on t he back of a f l at -bed t ow t ruck. Thi s i s t he
best way of t r anspor t i ng t he vehi c l e.
To ac c ommodat e t he f l at -bed tow t ruck equi pment , t he
vehi c l e i s equi pped wi t h front towing hooks (A), f ront t i e
down hook sl ot s (B)
f
a r ear towing hook (C), and r ear t i e
down hook sl ot s (D).
The towing hooks c an be used wi t h a wi nc h to pul l t he
vehi cl e onto t he f l at -bed tow t ruck, and t he t i e down
hook sl ot s c an be used t o sec ur e t he vehi c l e to t he
f l at -bed t ow t ruck.
Fr ont :
Rear :
1-14
Wheel Li f t Equi pment The t ow t ruck uses t wo pi vot i ng
ar ms t hat go under t he t i res (front or rear) and lifts t hem
off t he gr ound. The ot her t wo wheel s r emai n on t he
gr ound. Thi s i s an ac c ept abl e way of towing t he vehi c l e.
Sl i ng-t ype Equi pment The t ow t ruck uses met al c abl es
wi t h hooks on t he ends. These hooks go ar ound par t s of
t he f r ame or s us pens i on, and t he c abl es lift that end of
t he vehi c l e off t he gr ound. The vehi c l e' s suspensi on and
body c an be ser i ousl y damaged if t hi s met hod of t owi ng
i s at t empt ed. Thi s met hod of t owi ng t he vehi c l e i s
unac c ept abl e.
If t he vehi c l e c annot be t r anspor t ed by a f l at -bed t ow
t ruck, it shoul d be t owed wi t h t he front wheel s off t he
gr ound. If t he vehi c l e i s damaged, and must be t owed
wi t h t he front wheel s on t he gr ound, or wi t h al l f our
wheel s on t he gr ound, do t hi s:
( N OT I CE ..
Impr oper t owi ng preparat i on wi l l damage t he
t r ansmi ssi on. Fol l ow t he above pr ocedur e exact l y. If
you cannot shi ft t he t r ansmi ssi on or st art t he engi ne
(aut omat i c t r ansmi ssi on), t he vehi c l e must be
t r anspor t ed on a f l at -bed t ow t ruck.
Tr yi ng to lift or t ow t he vehi c l e by t he bumper s wi l l
c aus e ser i ous damage. The bumper s ar e not desi gned
to suppor t t he vehi c l e' s wei ght .
Manual Tr ansmi ssi on
Rel ease t he parki ng brake.
Shi f t t he t r ansmi ssi on i n neut ral .
L eave t he i gni t i on swi t ch i n A CCE S S ORY (I) so t he
st eer i ng wheel does not lock.
Make sur e al l ac c essor i es ar e t ur ned off to mi ni mi ze
bat t ery cur r ent dr aw.
Aut omat i c Tr ansmi ssi on
Rel ease t he parki ng brake.
St ar t t he engi ne.
. Shi f t to D, t hen to N.
Tur n off t he engi ne.
. Leave t he i gni ti on swi t ch in A CCE S S ORY (I) so t he
st eer i ng wheel does not lock.
Make sur e al l ac c essor i es ar e t ur ned off to mi ni mi ze
battery cur r ent dr aw.
It i s best t o t ow t he vehi cl e no f art her t han 50 mi l es
(80 km), and keep t he vehi c l e speed bel ow 35 mph
(55 km/h).
1-15
General Information
Part s Marki ng
To det er vehi c l e theft, cer t ai n maj or c omponent s ar e mar ked wi t h t he vehi c l e i dent i f i cat i on number (VIN). Or i gi nal part s
have sel f -adhesi ve l abel s. Repl ac ement body part s have gener i c sel f -adhesi ve l abel s. Thes e l abel s shoul d not be
r emoved. The ori gi nal engi ne or t r ansmi ssi on VIN pl at es ar e not t r ansf er abl e t o t he r epl acement engi ne or
t r ansmi ssi on.
NOTE; Be car ef ul not t o damage t he part s mar ki ng l abel s dur i ng body repai r. Mask t he l abel s bef ore r epai r i ng t he part.
1-16
Specifications
St andar ds and Ser vi ce L i mi l s . . . .2-2
Desi gn Speci f i cat i ons 2-18
Body Spec i f i c at i ons 2-22
St andar ds and Servi ce Li mi t s
Engine Electrical
Item Measur ement Qual i f i cat i on St andar d or New ServesUazlt
Ignition coi l Rated voltage 12V Ignition coi l
F iring order 1 - 3 - 4 - 2
Spark plug Type (All models except PZEV) NGK ILZKR7B-11S Spark plug Type (All models except PZEV)
DENSO SXU22HCR11S
Spark plug
Type (PZEV) NGK DILZKR7A11GS
Spark plug
Gap 1.0-1.1 mm (0.039-0.043 in) | -
Ignition ti mi ng At idle
Check the red mark
M/T in neut ral ,
A/ Ti n N or P
8 2 BTDC
Drive belt Tension Auto-tensi oner
Alternator Output At 13.5 V and
normal engi ne
t emperat ure
105 A Alternator
Coil (rotor) resistance At 68 F (20 C) 3. 4- 3. 8 Q
Alternator
Sl i p ring O.D. 14.4 mm (0.57 in) 14.0 mm (0.55 in)
Alternator
Brush length 10.5 mm (0.41 i n) 1.5 mm (0.06 in)
Alternator
Brush spring tension 3.24 N (0.33 kgf, 0.73 Ibf)
Starter Output 1.6 kW Starter
Commut at or mi ca depth 0.40-0.50 mm (0.016-0.020 in) 0.15 mm (0.006 in)
Starter
Commut at or runout 0.02 mm (0.001 in) max. 0.05 mm (0.002 in)
Starter
Commut at or O.D. 28.0-28.1 mm (1.10-1.11 in) 27.5 mm (1.08 in)
Starter
Br ush length 11. 1-11. 5 mm (0.44-0.45 in) 4.3 mm (0.17 in)
Engine Assembly
Item Measur ement Qual i f i cat i on St andar d or New Ser vi ce Li mi t
Compression Pr essur e (check the engi ne wi th the
starter cranki ng)
Mi ni mum
_
932 kPa (9.5 kgf /cm
2
,
135 psi )
Compression Pr essur e (check the engi ne wi th the
starter cranki ng)
Maxi mum
vari ati on
196 kPa (2.0 kgf/c-^

?
.
28 psi )
Cylinder Head
Item . Measurement Quali fi cati on St andar d or New Ser vi ce Li mi t
Head Warpage
-
0.05 mm (0.002 in) Head
Height 103.95-104.05 mm (4.093-4.096 in) 103.8 mm (4.087 in)
Camshaft End play 0.05-0.20 mm (0.002-0.008 in) 0.4 mm (0.02 in) Camshaft
Camshaft-to-holder oil clearance No. 1 journal 0.030-0.069 mm (0.0012-0.0027 in) 0.15 mm (0.006 in)
Camshaft
Camshaft-to-holder oil clearance
No. 2 journal 0.060-0.099 mm (0.0024-0.0039 in) 0.15 mm (0.006 in)
Camshaft
Camshaft
No. ^journal 0.060-0.099 mm (0.0024-0.0039 in) 0.15 mm (0.006 in)
Camshaft
Camshaft
Total runout 0.03 mm (0.001 in) max. 0.04 mm (0.002 in)
Camshaft
Cam lobe height (All models except
PZEV)
Intake PRI 33.744 mm (1.3285 in)
-
Camshaft
PZEV)
Intake MID 35.456 mm (1.3959 in) -
Camshaft
PZEV)
Intake SEC 33.744 mm (1.3285 in) -
Camshaft
PZEV)
Exhaust 34.291 mm (1.3500 in)
_
Camshaft
Cam lobe height (PZEV) Intake PRI 33.744 mm (1.3285 in)
_
Camshaft
Cam lobe height (PZEV)
Intake MID 35.456 mm (1.3959 in)
_
Camshaft
Intake SEC 33.744 mm (1.3285 in)
-
Camshaft
Exhaust PRI 34.232 mm (1.3477 in)
_
Valve Clearance (cold) Intake 0.21 - 0. 25 mm (0.008-0.010 in) Valve Clearance (cold)
Exhaust 0.25-0.29 mm (0.010-0.011 in)
Valve
Stem O.D. Intake 5.475-5.485 mm (0.2156-0.2159 in) 5.445 mm (0.2144 in)
Valve
Stem O.D.
Exhaust
r
5.450-5.460 mm (0.2146-0.2150 in) 5.42 mm (0.213 in)
Valve
Stem-to-guide clearance Intake 0.030-0.055 mm (0.0012-0.0022 in) 0.08 mm (0.003 in)
Valve
Stem-to-guide clearance
Exhaust 0.055-0.080 mm (0.0022-0.0031 in) 0.11 mm (0.004 in)
Valve seat Width Intake 1.25-1.55 mm (0.049-0.061 in) 2.00 mm (0.079 in) Valve seat Width
Valve seat
Stem installed height Intake 44.0-44.5 mm (1.73- 1.75 in) 44.7 mm (1.76 in)
Valve seat
Stem installed height
Valve guide I.D. Intake 5.515-5.530 mm (0.2171 -0.2177 in) 5.55 mm (0.219 in) Valve guide I.D.
Exhaust 5.515-5.530 mm (0.2171 -0.2177 in) 5.55 mm (0.219 in)
Valve guide
Installed height Intake 15.2-16.2 mm (0.60-0.64 in)
Valve guide
Installed height
Exhaust 15.5-16.5 mm (0.61 - 0.65 in)
_
Rocker arm Arm-to-shaft clearance (All models
except PZEV)
Intake 0.018-0.059 mm (0.0007-0.0023 in) 0.08 mm (0.003 in) Rocker arm Arm-to-shaft clearance (All models
except PZEV)
Rocker arm
Arm-to-shaft clearance (PZEV) Intake 0.018-0.059 mm (0.0007-0.0023 in) 0.08 mm (0.003 in)
Rocker arm
Arm-to-shaft clearance (PZEV)
2 - 3
St andar ds and Ser vi ce Li mi t s
Engine Block
Item Measur ement Quali fi cati on St andar d or New Ser vi ce Li mi t
Block Warpage of deck 0.07 mm (0.003 in) max. 0.10 mm (0.004 in) Block
Bore diameter A or I 87.010-87.020 mm (3.4256-3.4260
in)
87.070 mm (3.4279
in)
Block
Bore diameter
B orl l 87.000-87.010 mm (3.4252-3.4256
in)
87.070 mm (3.4279
in)
Block
Bore taper
_
0.02 mm (0.001 in)
Block
Reboring limit
-
0.25 mm (0.010 in)
Piston Skirt O.D. at 13 mm (0.5 in) from
bottom of skirt
No letter or A 86.980-86.990 mm (3.4244-3.4248
in)
86.930 mm (3.4224
in)
Piston Skirt O.D. at 13 mm (0.5 in) from
bottom of skirt
Letter B 86.970-86.980 mm (3.4240-3.4244
in)
86.920 mm (3.4220
in)
Piston
Clearance in cylinder 0.020-0.040 mm (0.0008-0.0016 in) 0.05 mm (0.002 in)
Piston ring Ring-to-groove clearance Top 0.060-0.085 mm (0.0024-0.0033 in) 0.13 mm (0.005 in) Piston ring Ring-to-groove clearance
Second 0.040-0.065 mm (0.0016-0.0026 in) 0.13 mm (0.005 in)
Piston ring
Ring end gap Top 0.20-0.35 mm (0.008-0.014 in) 0.60 mm (0.024 in)
Piston ring
Ring end gap
Second 0.50-0.65 mm (0.020-0.026 in) 0.70 mm (0.028 in)
Piston ring
Ring end gap
Oil 0.20-0.70 mm (0.008-0.028 in) 0.75 mm (0.030 in)
Piston pin O.D. 21.961-21.965 mm (0.8646-0.8648
in)
21.953 mm (0.8643
in)
Piston pin
Pin-to-piston clearance -0.005-0.002 mm (-0.0002-0.0001 in) 0.005 mm (0.0002 in)
Connecting rod Pin-to-rod clearance 0.005-0.015 mm (0.0002-0.0006 in) 0.02 mm (0.001 in) Connecting rod
Small-end bore diameter 21.970-21.976 mm (0.8650-0.8652
in)

Connecting rod
Large-end bore diameter 51.0 mm (2.01 in) _
Connecting rod
End play 0.15-0.35 mm (0.006-0.014 in) 0.40 mm (0.016 in)
Crankshaft Main journal diameter No. 1 journal 54.984-55.008 mm (2.1647-2.1657
in)
Crankshaft Main journal diameter
No. 2 journal 54.984-55.008 mm (2.1647-2.1657
in)

No. 3 journal 54.976-55.000 mm (2.1644-2.1654
in)

No. 4 journal 54.984-55.008 mm (2.1647-2.1657
in)

No. 5 journal 54.984-55.008 mm (2.1647-2.1657
in)

Crankshaft
Rod journal diameter 47.976-48.000 mm (1.8888-1.8898
in)

Crankshaft
Rod/main journal taper 0.005 mm (0.0002 in) max. 0.010 mm (0.0004 in)
Crankshaft
Rod/main journal out-of-round 0.004 mm (0.0002 in) max. 0.010 mm (0.0004 in)
Crankshaft
End play 0.10-0.35 mm (0.004-0.014 in) 0.45 mm (0.018 in)
Crankshaft
Total runout 0.03 mm (0.001 in) max. 0.04 mm (0.002 in)
Crankshaft
bearing
Main bearing-to-journal oil clearance No. 1 journal 0.017-0.041 mm (0.0007-0.0016 in) 0.050 mm (0.0020 in) Crankshaft
bearing
Main bearing-to-journal oil clearance
Crankshaft
bearing
Crankshaft
bearing
Crankshaft
bearing
Crankshaft
bearing
Connecting rod bearing-to-journal oil
clearance
0.032-0.066 mm (0.0013-0.0026 in) 0.077 mm (0.0030 in)
2-4
Engine Lubrication
Item Measur ement Qualification St andar d or New Ser vi ce Li mi t
Engine oil Capacity ('08-09 models) Engine overhaul 5.3 L (5.6 US qt)
-
Engine oil Capacity ('08-09 models)
Oil change
including filter
4.2 L (4.4 US qt)
Engine oil Capacity ('08-09 models)

Oil change
without filter
4.0 L (4.2 US qt)
Engine oil
Capacity ('10 model) Engine overhaul 5 1 L (5.4 US qt)
Engine oil
Capacity ('10 model)
Oil change
including filter
4.0 L (4.2 US qt)
Engine oil
Capacity ('10 model)
Oil change
without filter
3.8 L (4.0 US qt)
Oil pump Inner rotor-to-outer rotor radial

clearance
0.050-0.150 mm (0.0020-0.0059 in) 0.19 mm (0.007 in) Oil pump
Pump housing-to-outer rotor radial
clearance
0.150-0.210 mm (0.0059-0.0083 in) 0.23 mm (0.009 in)
Oil pump
Pump housing-to-outer rotor axial
clearance
0.035-0.070 mm (0.0014-0.0028 in) 0.12 mm (0.005 in)
Oil pump
Balancer shafts, journal diameter No. 1 journal,
front shaft
19.938-19.950 mm (0.7850-0.7854
in)
19.92 mm (0.784 in)
Oil pump
Balancer shafts, journal diameter
No. 1 journal,
rear shaft
23.938-23.950 mm (0.9424-0.9429
in)
23.92 mm (0.942 in)
Oil pump
No. 2 journal,
front shaft
32.949-32.961 mm (1.2972-1.2977
in)
32.93 mm (1.296 in)
Oil pump
No. 2 journal,
rear shaft
32.949-32.961 mm (1.2972-1.2977
in)
32.93 mm (1.296 in)
Oil pump
Balancer shafts, journal taper 0.005 mm (0.0002 in) max.
_
Oil pump
Balancer shafts, end play F ront 0.063-0.108 mm (0.0025-0.0043 in) 0.14 mm (0.006 in)
Oil pump
Balancer shafts, end play
Rear 0.063-0.108 mm (0.0025-0.0043 in) 0.14 mm (0.006 in)
Oil pump
Balancer shafts, shaft-to-bearing
clearance
No. 1 journal,
front shaft
0.050-0.082 mm (0.0020-0.0032 in) 0.10 mm (0.004 in)
Oil pump
clearance
No. 1 journal,
rear shaft
0.050-0.082 mm (0.0020-0.0032 in) 0.10 mm (0.004 in)
Oil pump
clearance
No. 2 journal,
front shaft
0.060-0.120 mm (0.0024-0.0047 in) 0.15 mm (0.006 in)
Oil pump
clearance
No. 2 journal,
rear shaft
0.060-0.120 mm (0.0024-0.0047 in) 0.15 mm (0.006 in)
Oil pump
Balancer shaft bearings, I.D. No. 1 journal,
front shaft
20.000-20.020 mm (0.7874-0.7882
in)
20.03 mm (0.789 in)
Oil pump
Balancer shaft bearings, I.D.
No. 1 journal,
rear shaft
24.000-24.020 mm (0.9449-0.9457
in)
24.03 mm (0.946 in)
Oil pump
No. 2 journal,
front shaft
33.021-33.069 mm (1.3000-1.3019
in)
33.09 mm (1.303 in)
Oil pump
No. 2 journal,
rear shaft
33.021-33.069 mm (1.3000-1.3019
in)
33.09 mm (1.303 in)
Oil pump
Relief valve, oil pressure with oil
temperature at 176 F (80 C)
At idle 69 kPa (0.7 kgf/cm
2
,10.0 psi)
Oil pump
Relief valve, oil pressure with oil
temperature at 176 F (80 C)
At 3,000 rpm 304 kPa (3.1 kgf/cm
2
, 44 psi)
2-5
St andards and Ser vi ce Li mi t s
Cooling System
Radiator Coolant capacities (including engine,
heater, hoses, and reservoir) ('08-09
Engine overhaul
(M/T: DENSO)
8.2 L (2.17 US gal)
models)
Engine overhaul
(M/T: TRAD)
8.1 L (2.14 US gal)
' Engine overhaul
(AT: DENSO)
8.1 L (2.14 US gal)
Engine overhaul
(A/T: TRAD)
8.0 L (2.11 US gal)
Coolant change
(M/T: DENSO)
6.1 L(1.61 US gal) .
Coolant change
(M/T: TRAD)
6.0 L (1.59 US gal)
Coolant change
(A/T: DENSO)
. 6.0 L (1.59 US gal)
Coolant change
(A/T: TRAD)
5.9 L (1.56 US gal)
Coolant capacities (including engine,
heater, hoses, and reservoir) ('10
Engine overhaul
(M/T: DENSO)
7.3 L (1.93 US gal)
model)
Engine overhaul
(M/T: TRAD)
7.2 L (1.90 US gal)
Engine overhaul
(A/T: DENSO)
7.2 L (1.90 US gal)
Engine overhaul
(A/T: TRAD)
7.1 L(1.88 US gal)
Coolant change
(M/T: DENSO)
6.1 L(1.61 US gal)
Coolant change
(M/T- TRAD)
6.0 L (1.59 US gal)
Coolant change
(A/T: DENSO)
6.0 L (1.59 US gal)
Coolant change
(A/T: TRAD)
5.9 L (1.56 US gal)
Coolant type
NOTE: If the vehicle is regularly driven
in very low temperatures (under -31 F
(-35 C)), a 60% concentraction of
coolant should be used (see page 10-6)
Honda Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2
Coolant
reservoir
Coolant capacity 0.68 L (0.180 US gal)
Radiator cap Opening pressure 93- 123 kPa (0.95-1.25 kgf/cm
2
, 13.5
18 psi)

Thermostat Opening temperature Begins to open 169-176 F (76- 80 C)
F ully open 194 F (90 C)
Valve lift at fully open 8.0 mm (0.31 in) min.
_
Fuel and Emi ssi ons
Fuel pressure
regulator
Pressure with fuel pressure gauge
connected
330-380 kPa (3.4-3.9 kgf/cm
2
, 48-55
psi)

Fuel tank Capacity 70 L (18.5 US gal)
Engine idle Idle speed without load A/Tin N or P 800 50 rpm
M/T in neutral 780 50 rpm
Idle speed with high electric load A/Tin N or P 800 50 rpm
(A/C switch on, temperature set to max
cool, blower fan on high, rear window
defogger on, and headlights on high
beam)
M/T in neutral 780 50 rpm
Clutch
Item Measur ement Quali fi cati on St andar d or New Service Li mi t
Clutch pedal Height from floor 174 mm (6.9 in)
Stroke 130-140 mm (5.1-5.5 in)
2 - 6
tin UP
Clutch (cont'd)
Item Measurement Quali fi cati on St andar d or New Servi ce Limit
F lywheel Runout on clutch mating surface 0.05 mm (0.002 in) max. 0.15 mm (0.006 in)
Clutch disc Rivet head depth 1.15-1.75 mm (0.045-0.069 in) 0.7 mm (0.03 in) Clutch disc
Thickness 7.30-7.90 mm (0.287-0.311 in) 6.0 mm (0.24 in)
Pressure plate Warpage 0.03 mm (0.001 in) max. 0 15 mm (0.006 in) Pressure plate
Evenness of the height of the
diaphragm spring fingers
0.6 mm (0.02 in) max. 0.8 mm (0.03 in)
Manual Transmission and M/T Differential
Item Measurement Quali fi cati on St andar d or New Service Li mi t
Manual
transmission
fluid
Capacity : use genuine Honda MTF F luid change 1.9 L (2.0 US qt) _ Manual
transmission
fluid
Capacity : use genuine Honda MTF
Overhaul 2.0 L (2.1 USqt)
-
Mainshaft End play 0.11 - 0.17 mm (0.004-0.007 in) Adjust Mainshaft
Diameter of bushing contact area 20.80-20.85 mm (0.819-0.821 in) 20.75 mm (0.817 in)
Mainshaft
Diameter of ball bearing contact area
(clutch housing side)
27.977-27.990 mm (1.1015-1.1020
in)
27.92 mm (1.099 in)
Mainshaft
Diameter of needle bearing contact
area
38.984-39.000 mm (1.5348-1.5354
in)
38.93 mm (1.533 in)
Mainshaft
(transmission housing side)
27.987-28.000 mm (1.1018-1.1024
in)
27.93 mm (1.100 in)
Mainshaft
Diameter of 4th/5th gears distance
collar contact area
31.984-32.000 mm (1.2592-1.2598
in)
31.93 mm (1.257 in)
Mainshaft
Runout 0.02 mm (0.001 in) max. 0.05 mm (0.002 in)
Mainshaft 3rd,
4th, 5th gear
I.D. 44.009-44.025 mm (1.7326-1.7333
in)
44.08 mm (1.735 in) Mainshaft 3rd,
4th, 5th gear
Clearance 2nd-3rd 0.06-0.16 mm (0.002-0.006 in) 0.25 mm (0.010 in)
Mainshaft 3rd,
4th, 5th gear
End play (distance collar side) 4th, 5th 0.06-0.16 mm (0.002-0.006 in) 0.25 mm (0.010 in)
Mainshaft 3rd,
4th, 5th gear
Thickness 23.92-23.97 mm (0.942-0.944 in) 23.80 mm (0.937 in)
Mainshaft 4th,
5th gear distance
collar
I.D. 32.00-32.01 mm (1.2598-1.2602 in) 32.02 mm (1.261 in) Mainshaft 4th,
5th gear distance
collar
O.D. 38.989-39.000 mm (1.5350-1.5354
in)
38.94 mm (1.533 in)
Mainshaft 4th,
5th gear distance
collar
Overall Length 51.95-52.05 mm (2.045-2.049 in)
-
Mainshaft 4th,
5th gear distance
collar
Length of needle bearing contact area 4th, 5th 24.03-24.08 mm (0.946-0.948 in) _
MBS distance
collar
I.D. 28.00-28.10 mm (1.102-1.106 in) : 28.12 mm (1.107 in) MBS distance
collar
Length 23.95-24.05 mm (0.943-0.947 in)
Countershaft Diameter of needle bearing contact
area (clutch housing side)
40.000-40.015 mm (1.5748-1.575-4
in)
39.95 mm (1.573 in) Countershaft
(transmission housing side)
30.020-30.033 mm (1.1819-1.1824
in)
29.97 mm (1.180 in)
Countershaft
Diameter of 1st gear distance collar
contact area
39.937-39.950 mm (1.5723-1.5728
in)
39.88 mm (1.570 in)
Countershaft
Runout 0.02 mm (0.001 in) max. 0.05 mm (0.002 in)
Countershaft
35 mm shim-to-bearing inner race
clearance
0.04-0.10 mm (0.002-0.004 in) Adjust
2-7
Manual Transmission and M/T Differential (cont'd)
Item Measur ement Quali fi cati on St andard or New Ser vi ce Li mi t
Countershaft 1st,
2nd gear
I.D. 52.010-52.029 mm (2.0476-2.0484
in)
52.08 mm (2.050 in) Countershaft 1st,
2nd gear
Clearance 2nd-3rd 0.06-0.16 mm (0.002-0.006 in) 0.25 mm (0.010 in)
Countershaft 1st,
2nd gear
End play (distance collar side) 1st 0.06-0.16 mm (0.002-0.006 in) 0.25 mm (0.010 in)
Countershaft 1st,
2nd gear
Thickness 1st 22.92-22.97 mm (0.902-0.904 in) 22.87 mm (0.900 in)
Countershaft 1st,
2nd gear
Thickness
2nd 27.92-27.97 mm (1.099-1.101 in) 27.87 mm (1.097 in)
Countershaft 1st,
2nd gear
distance collar
I.D. 39.95-39.96 mm (1.5728-1.5732 in) 39.97 mm (1.574 in) Countershaft 1st,
2nd gear
distance collar
O.D. 46.989-47.000 mm (1.8500-1.8504
in)
46.94 mm (1.848 in)
Countershaft 1st,
2nd gear
distance collar
Length 1st 23.03-23.08 mm (0.907-0.909 in)
-
Countershaft 1st,
2nd gear
distance collar
Length
2nd 28.03-28.08 mm (1.104-1.106 in)
-
Reverse idler
gear
I.D. 20.016-20.043 mm (0.7880-0.7891
in)
20.90 mm (0.823 in) Reverse idler
gear
Gear-to-reverse gear shaft clearance 0.036-0.084 mm (0.0014-0.0033 in) 0.16 mm (0.006 in)
Synchro ring Ring-to-gear clearance (ring pushed
against gear)
0.70-1.49 mm (0.028-0.059 in) 0.4 mm (0.02 in)
Double cone
synchro
Outer synchro ring-to-synchro cone
clearance (ring pushed against gear)
3rd gear 0.46-0.97 mm (0.018-0.038 in) 0.3 mm (0.01 in) Double cone
synchro
4th gear 0.70-1.19 mm (0.028-0.047 in) 0.3 mm (0.01 in)
Double cone
synchro
Synchro cone-to-gear clearance (ring
pushed against gear)
3rd gear 0.51-1.07 mm (0.020-0.042 in) 0.3 mm (0.01 in)
Double cone
synchro
4th gear 0.50-1.04 mm (0.020-0.041 in) 0.3 mm (0.01 in)
Double cone
synchro
Outer synchro ring-to-gear clearance
(ring pushed against gear)
0.95-1.68 mm (0.037-0.066 in) 0.6 mm (0.02 in)
Triple cone
synchro
0.70-1.19 mm (0.028-0.047 in) 0.3 mm (0.01 in) Triple cone
synchro
0.50-1.04 mm (0.020-0.041 in) 0.3 mm (0.01 in)
Triple cone
synchro
Outer synchro ring-to-gear clearance
(ring pushed against gear)
0.95-1.68 mm (0.037-0.066 in) 0.6 mm (0.02 in)
Shift fork F inger thickness 7.4-7.6 mm (0.29-0.30 in) Shift fork
F ork-to-synchro sleeve clearance 0.35-0.65 mm (0.014-0.026 in) 1.0 mm (0.04 in)
Reverse shift
fork
F inger width 13.4-13.7 mm (0.53-0.54 in)
-
Reverse shift
fork
F ork-to-reverse idler gear clearance 0.20-0.59 mm (0.008-0.023 in) 1.2 mm (0.05 in)
Shift arm I.D. 13.973-14.000 mm (0.5501-0.5512
in)
Shift arm
F ingerwidth 16.9-17.0 mm (0.665-0.669 in)
-
Shift arm
Shift arm-to-shift fork clearance 0.2-0.5 mm (0.01 - 0.02 in) 0.6 mm (0.02 in)
Select lever F inger width 14.85-14.95 mm (0.585-0.589 in) -
Change lever Shaft-to-select lever clearance 0.05-0.25 mm (0.002-0.010 in) 0.50 mm (0.020 in) Change lever
Groove width 15.00-15.10 mm (0.591 -0.594 in)
-
Change lever
Shaft-to-shift arm clearance 0.013-0.070 mm (0.0005-0.0028 in) 0.1 mm (0.00 in)
M/T differential
carrier
Backlash 0.05-0.15 mm (0.002-0.006 in)
M/T differential
80 mm shim
80 mm shim-to-bearing outer race
clearance in transmission housing
00.10 mm (0.0-0.004 in) Adjust
2-8
Automatic Transmission and A/T Differential
Item Measur ement Quali fi cati on St andard or New Ser vi ce Li mi t
Automatic Capacity: use genuine Honda ATF-Z1 F luid change 2.5 L (2.6 US qt) -
transmission
fluid
Overhaul 6.5 L (6.9 US qt)
-
ATF pressure Line pressure At 2,000 rpm in N
or P
927-985 kPa (9.45-10.05 kgf/cm
2
,134
- 143 psi)
877 kPa (8.95 kgf/cm
2
,
127 psi)
1st clutch pressure At 2,000 rpm in 1 917-995 kPa (9.35-10.15 kgf/cm
2
,133
144 psi)
2
,
126 psi)
2nd clutch pressure At 2,000 rpm in 2 917-995 kPa (9.35-10.15 kgf/cm
2
,133
144 psi)
2
,
126 psi)
3rd clutch pressure At 2,000 rpm in
3rd gear in D
917-995 kPa (9.35-10.15 kgf/cm
2
,133
144 psi)
2
,
126 psi)
4th clutch pressure At 2,000 rpm in
4th gear in D
917-995 kPa (9.35-10.15 kgf/cm
2
,133
144 psi)
2
,
126 psi)
5th clutch pressure At 2,000 rpm in
5th gear in D
917-995 kPa (9.35-10.15 kgf/cm
2
,133
- 144 psi)
2
,
126 psi)
Torque Stall speed 2,100 rpm -
converter Check with vehicle on level ground
Service limit 1,950-2,250 rpm -
Clutch Clearance between clutch end-plate 1st 1.38-1.58 mm (0.054-0.062 in)
and top disc
2nd 1.14-1.34 mm (0.045-0.053 in)
_
3rd 1.23-1.43 mm (0.048-0.056 in)
-
4th, 5th 0.93-1.13 mm (0.037-0.044 in)
_
Clutch return spring free length 1st, 2nd, 3rd 45.1 mm (1.78 in) 43.1 mm (1.70 in)
4th, 5th 33.5 mm (1.32 in) 31.5 mm (1.24 in
Clutch disc thickness 1.94 mm (0.076 in)
Clutch plate thickness 1st, 3rd 1.6 mm (0.063 in) When discolored
2nd, 4th, 5th 2.0 mm (0.079 in) When discolored
Clutch wave-plate phase difference 1st <2P LCS> 0.15-0.25 mm (0.006-0.010 in) 0.13 mm (0.005 in)
2nd, 3rd, 4th, 5th
<2P LCS>
0.10-0.20 mm (0.004 -0.008 in) 0.08 mm (0.003 in)
1 st clutch end-plate thickness Mark 1 2.6 mm (0.102 in) When discolored
Mark 2 2.7 mm (0.106 in) When discolored
2nd clutch end-plate thickness Mark 1 2.6 mm (0.102 in) When discolored
3rd, 4th and 5th clutch end-plate Markl 2.1 mm (0.083 in) When discolored
thickness
2-9
St andards and Servi ce Li mi t s
Automatic Transmi ssi on and A/T Differential (cont'd)
Mainshaft Diameter at needle bearing contact
area
Stator shaft 22.984-23.000 mm (0.9049-0.9055
in)
When worn or
damaged
5th gear 51.975-51.991 mm (2.0463-2.0469
in)
When worn or
damaged
4th gear collar 33.975-33.991 mm (1.3376-1.3382
in)
When worn or
damaged
I.D. of gears 4th gear 40.000-40.016 mm (1.5748-1.5754
in)
When worn or
damaged
5th gear 57.000-57.019 mm (2.2441 -2.2448
in)
When worn or
damaged
Axial clearance of gears 4th gear 0.10-0.22 mm (0.004-0.009 in)
5th gear 0.04-0.10 mm (0.002-0.004 in)
-
41 x 68 mm thrust washer thickness No. 1 4.450 mm (0.1752 in) When worn or
damaged
No. 2 4.475 mm (0.1762 in) When worn or
damaged
damaged
damaged
damaged
damaged
damaged
damaged
damaged
damaged
damaged
damaged
damaged
No. 14 4:775 mm (0.1880 in) When worn or
damaged
damaged
4th gear collar length 66.3-66.4 mm (2.610-2.614 in) _
Length of 4th gear collar flange from
end
19.15-19.30 mm (0.754-0.760 in) When worn or
damaged
Sealing ring thickness 1.91-1.97 mm (0.075-0.078 in) 1.86 mm (0.073 in)
Sealing ring groove width 2.025-2.060 mm (0.0797-0.0811 in) 2.080 mm (0.0819 in)
Clutch feed pipe O.D. 7.97-7.98 mm (0.3138-0.3142 in) 7.95 mm (0.313 in)
Feed pipe bushing I.D. 8.000-8.015 mm (0.3150-0.3156 in) 8.030 mm (0.3161 in)
Automatic Transmission and A/ T Differential Icont' d)
Item Measurement Quali fi cati on Standard or New Ser vi ce Li mi t
Countershaft Diameter at needle bearing contact
area
# -
Torque
converter
housi ng beari ng
36.005-36.015 mm (1.4175-1.4170
in)
When worn or
. damaged
area
# -
4th gear 34.982-34.998 mm (1.3772-1.3779
in)
When wor n or
damaged
area
# -
Rever se gear 39.979-40.000 mm (1.5740-1.5748
i n)
When wor n or
damaged
Countershaft
I.D. of gears 4th gear 41.000-41.016 mm (1.6142-1.6148
in)
When worn or
damaged
Countershaft
I.D. of gears
Reverse gear 46.000-46.016 mm (1.8110-1.8116
in)
When worn or
damaged
Countershaft
Axial clearance of gears 4th gear 0.04-0.12 mm (0.002-0.005 in)
_
Countershaft
Axial clearance of gears
5th gear 00.48 mm (00.019 in)
-
Countershaft
Axial clearance of gears
Rever se gear 0.10-0.25 mm (0.004-0.010 in)
Countershaft
Col l ar, 35 x 47 x 7.8 mm t hi ckness 7.8 mm (0.31 in) _
Countershaft
Collar, 37 x 41 x 54.3 mm length 54.25-54.30 mm (2.136-2.138 in)
Countershaft
Reverse selector hub wi dth 25.45-25.65 mm (1.002-1.010 in)
Countershaft
Reverse selector hub O.D. 55.87-55.90 mm (2.200-2.201 in) When worn or
damaged
2-11
St andar ds and Servi ce Li mi t s
Automatic Transmi ssi on and A/ T Differential (cont'd)
Secondary shaft Diameter at needle bearing contact
area
1st gear 39.986-39.999 mm (1.5742-1.5748
in)
When worn or
damaged
2nd gear 39.986-39.999 mm (1.5742-1.5748
in)
When worn or
damaged
3rd gear collar 36.975-36.991 mm (1.4557-1.4563
in)
When worn or
damaged
I.D. of gears 1st gear 47.000-47.016 mm (1.8504-1.8510
in)
When worn or
damaged
2nd gear 46.000-46.016 mm (1.8110-1.8116
in)
When worn or
damaged
3rd gear 43.000-43.016 mm (1.6929-1.6935
in)
When worn or
damaged
Axial clearance of gears 1st gear 0.04-0.12 mm (0.002-0.005 in)
-
2nd gear 0.04-0.12 mm (0.002-0.005 in)
3rd gear 0.10-0.22 mm (0.004-0.009 in)
37 x 58 mm thrust washer thickness No. 1 3.900 mm (0.154 in) When worn or
damaged
damaged
damaged
damaged
damaged
damaged
damaged
damaged
damaged
damaged
damaged
damaged
damaged
damaged
damaged
damaged
damaged
damaged
damaged
damaged
2-12
Automatic Transmi ssi on and A/ T Differential: (cont'd)
Item Measurement Quali fi cati on St andar d or New Ser vi ce Li mi t
Secondary shaft
(cont'd)
40 x 51.5 mm thrust washer thickness No. 1 4.80 mm (0.189 in) When worn or
damaged
Secondary shaft
(cont'd)
40 x 51.5 mm thrust washer thickness
damaged
Secondary shaft
(cont'd)
damaged
Secondary shaft
(cont'd)
damaged
Secondary shaft
(cont'd)
damaged
Secondary shaft
(cont'd)
damaged
Secondary shaft
(cont'd)
3rd gear collar length 43.9-44.0 mm (1.728-1.732 in)
-
Secondary shaft
(cont'd)
Length'of 3rd gear collar flange from
end
5.25-5.40 mm (0.207-0.213 in) When worn or
damaged
Secondary shaft
(cont'd)
Sealing ring thickness 1.91-1.97 mm (0.0752-0.0776 in) 1.86 mm (0.0732 in)
Secondary shaft
(cont'd)
Sealing ring groove width 2.025-2.060 mm (0.0797-0.0811 in) 2.080 mm (0.0819 in)
Secondary shaft
(cont'd)
Clutch feed pipe O.D. 1st 6.97-6.98 mm (0.2744-0.2748 in) 6.95 mm (0.2736 in)
Secondary shaft
(cont'd)
Clutch feed pipe O.D.
3rd 11.47-11.48 mm (0.4528-0.4535 in) 11.45 mm (0.4508 in)
Secondary shaft
(cont'd)
Feed pipe bushing I.D. 1st clutch 7.018-7.030 mm (0.2763-0.2768 in) 7.045 mm (0.2774 in)
Secondary shaft
(cont'd)
Feed pipe bushing I.D.
3rd clutch 11.500-11.518 mm (0.4528-0.4535
in)
11.530 mm (0.4539
in)
Secondary shaft
(cont'd)
ATF guide collar of sealing ring contact
I.D.
29.000-29.021 mm (1.1417-1.1426
in)
29.05 mm (1.144 in)
Idler gear shaft Diameter at needle bearing contact
area
End cover side 32.003-32.013 mm (1.2600-1.2604
in)
When worn or
damaged
Idler gear shaft
Thickness of cotters 1.39-1.42 mm (0.055-0.056 in)
Reverse Idler
gear
Reverse idler gear shaft diameter at
needle bearing contact area
14.99-15.00 mm (0.590-0.591 in) When worn or
damaged
Reverse Idler
gear
I.D. 20.007-20.020 mm (0.7877-0.7882
in)
When worn or
damaged
Reverse Idler
gear
I.D. of transmission housing of gear
shaft contact area
14.800-14.818 mm (0.5827-0.5834
in)
Reverse Idler
gear
I.D. of reverse idler gear shaft holder 14.800-14.824 mm (0.5827-0.5836
in)
When worn or
damaged
ATF pump ATF pump thrust clearance 0.03-0.06 mm (0.001 -0.002 in) 0.07 mm (0.003 in) ATF pump
Clearance between ATF pump gear
and main valve body
Drive gear 0.210-0.265 mm (0.0083-0.0104 in)
__
ATF pump
Clearance between ATF pump gear
and main valve body
Driven gear 0.070-0.125 mm (0.0028-0.0049 in)
ATF pump
ATF pump driven gear I.D. 14.016-14.034 mm (0.5518-0.5525
in)
When worn or
damaged
ATF pump
ATF pump driven gear shaft O.D. 13.980-13.990 mm (0.5504-0.5508
in)
When worn or
damaged
Stator shaft I.D. at needle bearing contact area Torque
converter side
27.000-27.021 mm (1.0630-1.0638
in)
When worn or
damaged
Stator shaft I.D. at needle bearing contact area
ATF pump side 29.000-29.021 mm (1.1417-1.1426
in)
Stator shaft
I.D. at mainshaft sealing ring contact
area
29.000-29.021 mm (1.1417-1.1426
in)
29.05 mm (1.144 in)
Reverse shift
fork
Fork finger thickness 5.90-6.00 mm (0.232-0.236 in) 5.40 mm (0.213 in)
Park gear and
pawl
When worn or damaged
Servo body Shift fork shaft bore I.D. 14.000-14.010 mm (0.5512-0.5516
in)
Servo body
Shift fork shaft valve bore I.D. 37.000-37.039 mm (1.4567-1.4582
in)
37.045 mm (1.4585
in)
Regulator valve
body
Mainshaft sealing ring contact I.D. 29.000-29.021 mm (1.1417-1.1426
in)
29.05 mm (1.144 in)
2-13
St andards and Ser vi ce Li mi t s
Automatic Transmi ssi on and A/ T Differential (cont'd)
Item Measur ement Quali fi cati on St andar d or New Servi ce Li mi t
Main valve body Shift valve A spring Wire diameter 0.8 mm (0.031 in)
_
spring (see page
14-277)
O.D. 5.6 mm (0.220 in)
_
spring (see page
14-277)
Free length 28.1 mm (1.106 in)
-
No. of coil 15.9
Shift valve B spring Wire diameter 0.8 mm (0.031 in)
-
O.D. 5.6 mm (0.220 in)
_
-
No. of coil 15.9
Shift valve C spring Wire diameter 0.8 mm (0.031 in)
-
O.D. 5.6 mm (0.220 in)
_
_
No. of coil 15.9
Shift valve E spring Wire diameter 0.8 mm (0.031 in)
*
O.D. 5.6 mm (0.220 in)
-
No. of coil 15.9
Relief valve spring Wire diameter 1.0 mm (0.039 in)
O.D. 9.6 mm (0.378 in)
-
No. of coil 10.2
Lock-up control valve spring Wire diameter 0.65 mm (0.026 in)
O.D. 7.1 mm (0.280 in)
-
No. of coil 12.7
Cooler check valve spring Wire diameter 0.85 mm (0.033 in)
-
O.D. 6.6 mm (0.260 in)
-
No. of coil 11.3
Servo control valve spring Wire diameter 0.7 mm (0.028 in)
-
O.D. 6.6 mm (0.260 in)
No. of coil 17.2
2 - 1 4
Automatic Transmission and A/T Differential (cont'd)
It em Measur ement Qualification St andar d or New Service Li mi t
Regulator valve 1 st accumulator spring A Wire diameter 2.4 mm (0.094 in)
_
body spring (see
page 14-279)
O.D. 18.6 mm (0.732 in)
body spring (see
page 14-279)
No. of coil 7.1
1 st accumulator spring B Wire diameter 2.3 mm (0.091 in)
O.D. 12.2 mm (0.480 in)
No. of coil 6.6
3rd accumulator spring Wire diameter 2.5 mm (0.098 in)
-
O.D. 14.6 mm (0.575 in)
-
_
No. of coil 4.9
Regulator valve spring A Wire diameter 1.85 mm (0.073 in)

O.D. 14.7 mm (0.579 in)
-
No. of coil 14.9
Regulator valve spring B Wire diameter 1.6 mm (0.063 in)
-
O.D. 9.2 mm (0.362 in)
-
No. of coil 12.5
Stator reaction spring Wire diameter 4.5 mm (0.177 in)
-
O.D. 35.4 mm (1.394 in)
-
-
No. of coil 1.92
Lock-up shift valve spring Wire diameter 1.0 mm (0.039 in)
-
O.D. 6.6 mm (0.260 in)
No. of coil 18.2
Torque converter check valve spring Wire diameter 1.2 mm (0.047 in)
_
O.D. 8.6 mm (0.339 in)
-
-
No. of coil 12.2
Servo body 2nd accumulator spring A Wire diameter 2.1 mm (0.083 in)
spring (see page
14-280)
O.D. 16.6 mm (0.654 in)
-
spring (see page
14-280)
No. of coil 8.4
2nd accumulator spring B Wire diameter 2.1 mm (0.083 in)
O.D. 10.8 mm (0.425 in)
-
Free length 34.0 mm (1.339 in) -
No. of coil 8.2
4th accumulator spring A Wire diameter 2.4 mm (0.094 in)
-
O.D. 18.6 mm (0.732 in)
No. of coil 7.1
4th accumulator spring B Wire diameter 2.3 mm (0.091 in)
-
O.D. 12.2 mm (0.480 in) -
Free length 31.5 mm (1.240 in) -
No. of coil 6.6
5th accumulator spring Wire diameter 2.5 mm (0.098 in)
-
O.D. 14.6 mm (0.575 in)
-
No. of coil 4.9
Shift valve D spring Wire diameter 0.8 mm (0.031 in)
_
O.D. 5.6 mm (0.220 in)
-
-
No. of coil 15.9
2-15
Automatic Transmission and A/ T Differential (cont'd)
A/T differential
carrier
Pinion shaft contact area I.D. 18.000-18.025 mm (0.7087-0.7096
in)
A/T differential
carrier
Driveshaft contact area I.D. 28.021-28.051 mm (1.1032-1.1044
in)
A/T differential
carrier
Clearance between carrier and pinion
shaft
0.013-0.054 mm (0.0005-0.0021 in) 0.1 mm (0.004 in)
A/T differential
carrier
Clearance between carrier and
driveshaft
0.071 -0.117 mm (0.0028-0.0046 in) 0.12 mm (0.005 in)
A/T differential
carrier
Tapered roller bearing starting torque
(preload)
For new bearing 2.7-3.9 N-m (0.28-0.40 kgf-m, 2. 0-
2.9 ibf-ft)
Adjust
A/T differential
carrier
Tapered roller bearing starting torque
(preload)
For reused
bearing
2.5-3.6 N-m (0.25-0.37 kgf-m, 1.8-
2.7 Ibf-ft)
Adjust
A/T differential
carrier
F inal driven gear backlash 0.086-0.142 mm (0.0034-0.0056 in) 0.2 mm (0.008 in)
A/T differential
pinion gear
Backlash 0.05-0.15 mm (0.002-0.006 in)
_
A/T differential
pinion gear
I.D. 18.042-18.066 mm (0.7103-0.7113
in)
A/T differential
pinion gear
Clearance between pinion gear and
pinion shaft
0.055-0.095 mm (0.0022-0.0037 in) 0.12 mm (0.005 in)
Steering
Steering wheel Rotational play measured at outside
edge
010 mm (0-0.39 in) Steering wheel
Initial turning load measured at
outside edge with engine running
29 N (3.0 kgf, 6.6 ibf)
Gearbox Angle of rack guide screw loosened

from locked position
155
Pump Output pressure with shut-off valve
closed
8, 140-8, 830 kPa (83- 90 kgf/cm
2
,
1,180-1,280 psi)
Power steering
fluid
Capacity: use Honda power steering
fluid
System capacity 1.05 L (1.11 USqt)
_
Power steering
fluid
Capacity: use Honda power steering
fluid
Reservoir
capacity
0.32 L (0.34 US qt)
Suspensi on
Wheel alignment Camber F ront 000'
+ 3 0
' _ 4 5 - Wheel alignment Camber
Rear - 1 00'
+3 0
'_ 4 5 .
Wheel alignment
Caster F ront (4-door)
3 o
4 8
.
+
o-25
n n h
Wheel alignment
Caster
F ront (2-door) 3 47 '
+ 0
2 5
' , - 0 5 -
Wheel alignment
Total toe-in F ront 02 mm (0+0.08 in)
Wheel alignment
Total toe-in
Rear 22 mm (0.08+0.08 in)
Wheel alignment
F ront wheel turning angle Inward 39 00' 2
Wheel alignment
F ront wheel turning angle
Outward
(reference)
31 50'
Wheel Aluminum wheel runout Axial 0- 0.7 mm (0-0.03 in) 2.0 mm (0.08 in) Wheel Aluminum wheel runout
Radial 00.7 mm (00.03 in) 1.5 mm (0.06 in)
Wheel
Steel wheel runout Axial 01.0 mm (0-0.04 in) 2.0 mm (0.08 in)
Wheel
Steel wheel runout
Radial 0- 1. 0 mm (0-0.04 in) 1.5 mm (0.06 in)
Wheel bearing End play F ront 00.05 mm (0-0.002 in)
-
Wheel bearing End play
Rear . 00.05 mm (0-0.002 in)
-
2-16
Brakes
Item Measurement Quali fi cati on St andar d or New Servi ce Li mi t
Parking brake Number of clicks when lever pulled
with 196 N (20 kgf, 44 Ibf) offeree
7 to 9 clicks
Brake pedal Pedal height (carpet moved aside) M/T 156 mm (6.1 in)
A/T 155 mm (6.1 in)
Free play 1 5 mm (0.040.20 in)
-
Brake disc Thickness F ront (NISSIN) 27.9-28.1 mm (1.10-1.11 in) 26.0 mm (1.02 in)
F ront
(AKEBONO)
22.9-23.1 mm (0.90-0.91 in) 21.0 mm (0.83 in)
Rear 8.9-9.1 mm (0.35-0.36 in) 8.0 mm (0.31 in)
Runout
-
0.04 mm (0.0016 in)
Parallelism 0.015 mm (0.0006 in)
Brake pad Thickness F ront (NISSIN) 10.5-11.2 mm (0.41 - 0. 44 in) 1.6 mm (0.06 in)
F ront
(AKEBONO)
10.5-10.8 mm (0.41 - 0. 43 in) 1.6 mm (0.06 in)
Rear 8.3-9.0 mm (0.33-0.35 in) 1.0 mm (0.04 in)
Air Conditioning
Item Measurement Quali fi cati on St andar d or New Servi ce Li mi t
Refrigerant Type HF C-134a(R-134a)
Capacity of system 400-450 g (14.1-15.9 oz)
Refrigerant oil Type DENSO ND-OIL 8 (P/N 38897-PR7-A01AH or 38999-PR7-A01)
Capacity of components Condenser 35 ml (1 1/5 fl-oz)
Evaporator 35mL(1 1/5 fl-oz)
Each line and
hose
10 mL (1/3 fl-oz)
Receiver/Dryer 10mL(1/3 fl-oz)
Compressor 70- 82 mL (2 3/8- 2 7/9 fl-oz)
Compressor Field coil resistance At 68 F (20 C) 3.9-4.3 0
PuIley-to-armature plate clearance 0.35-0.60 mm (0.014-0.024 in) | -
2-17
Des i gn S pec i f i c at i ons
Item Measurement Qual i f i cat i on Speci f i cat i on
DIMENSIONS
(4-door)
Overall length 4,930 mm (194.1 in) DIMENSIONS
(4-door)
Overall width 1,847 mm (72.7 in)
DIMENSIONS
(4-door)
Overall height 1,475 mm (58.1 in)
DIMENSIONS
(4-door)
Wheelbase 2,800 mm (110.2 in)
DIMENSIONS
(4-door)
Track F ront (16 inch wheels) 1,580 mm (62.2 in)
DIMENSIONS
(4-door)
Track
F ront (17 inch wheels) 1,590 mm (62.6 in)
DIMENSIONS
(4-door)
Track
Rear (16 inch wheels) 1,580 mm (62.2 in)
DIMENSIONS
(4-door)
Track
Rear (17 inch wheels) 1,590 mm (62.6 in)
DIMENSIONS
(4-door)
Seating capaci ty Five (5)
DIMENSIONS
(2-door)
Overall length 4,849 mm (190.9 in) DIMENSIONS
(2-door)
Overall width 1,848 mm (72.7 in)
DIMENSIONS
(2-door)
Overall height 1,432 mm (56.3 in)
DIMENSIONS
(2-door)
Wheelbase 2,740 mm (107.9 in)
DIMENSIONS
(2-door)
Track F ront 1,580 mm (62.2 in)
DIMENSIONS
(2-door)
Track
Rear 1,580 mm (62.2 in)
DIMENSIONS
(2-door)
Seating capacity Five (5)
WEIGHT
(4-door)
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR)
USA models
LX, LX-P, LX PZEV, LX-P PZEV 1,950 kg (4,299 lbs) WEIGHT
(4-door)
(GVWR)
USA models
EX, EX-L, EX PZEV, EX-L PZEV 2,010 kg (4,431 lbs)
WEIGHT
(4-door)
(GVWR)
Canada models
LX, LX-P 1,970 kg (4,343 lbs)
WEIGHT
(4-door)
(GVWR)
Canada models
EX, EX-L 2,030 kg (4,475 lbs)
WEIGHT
(2-door)
(GVWR)
USA models
LX, LX-S, LX PZEV 1,950 kg (4,299 lbs) WEIGHT
(2-door)
(GVWR)
USA models
EX, EX-L, EX PZEV, EX-L PZEV 2,000 kg (4,409 lbs)
WEIGHT
(2-door)
(GVWR)
Canada models
LX 1,970 kg (4,343 lbs)
WEIGHT
(2-door)
(GVWR)
Canada models
EX, EX-L 2,020 kg (4,453 lbs)
ENGINE Type Water cooled, 4-stroke DOHC i-VTEC gasoline engine ENGINE
Cylinder arrangement Inline 4-cylinder, transverse
ENGINE
Bore and stroke 87 x 99 mm (3.43 x 3.90 in)
ENGINE
Displacement 2,354 cm
3
(144 cu in)
ENGINE
Compression ratio 10.5
ENGINE
Valve train Chain drive, DOHC i-VTEC 4 valves per cylinder
ENGINE
Lubrication system F orced, wet sump, with trochoid pump
ENGINE
Fuel required Regular UNLEADED gasoline with 87 Pump Octane
Number or higher
STARTER Type Gear reduction STARTER
Nominal output 1.6 kW
STARTER
Nominal voltage 12 V
STARTER
Hour rating 30 seconds
STARTER
Rotation of direction Clockwise as viewed from drive end
2-1S
Item Measurement Quali fi cati on Speci f i cat i on
CLUTCH Type Single plate dry, diaphragm spring
MANUAL
TRANSMISSION
Type Synchronized, five-speed forward, one reverse MANUAL
TRANSMISSION
Primary reduction Direct 1:1
MANUAL
TRANSMISSION
Gear ratio 1st 3.267
MANUAL
TRANSMISSION
Gear ratio
2nd 1.778
MANUAL
TRANSMISSION
Gear ratio
3rd 1.154
MANUAL
TRANSMISSION
Gear ratio
4th 0.870
MANUAL
TRANSMISSION
Gear ratio
5th 0.647
MANUAL
TRANSMISSION
Gear ratio
Reverse 3.583
MANUAL
TRANSMISSION
F inal reduction Type Single helical gear
MANUAL
TRANSMISSION
F inal reduction
Gear ratio 4.389
AUTOMATIC
TRANSMISSION
Type Electronically-controlled automatic, five-speed forward,
one reverse, three-element torque converter with lock-up
clutch
AUTOMATIC
TRANSMISSION
Primary reduction Direct 1:1
AUTOMATIC
TRANSMISSION
Gear ratio 1st 2.651
AUTOMATIC
TRANSMISSION
Gear ratio
2nd K24Z2 1.516
AUTOMATIC
TRANSMISSION
Gear ratio
2nd
K24Z3 1.613
AUTOMATIC
TRANSMISSION
Gear ratio
3rd K24Z2 1.037
AUTOMATIC
TRANSMISSION
Gear ratio
3rd
K24Z3 1.081
AUTOMATIC
TRANSMISSION
Gear ratio
4th K24Z2 0.738
AUTOMATIC
TRANSMISSION
Gear ratio
4th
K24Z3 0.772
AUTOMATIC
TRANSMISSION
Gear ratio
5th 0.566
AUTOMATIC
TRANSMISSION
Gear ratio
Reverse 2.000
AUTOMATIC
TRANSMISSION
Final reduction Type Single helical gear
AUTOMATIC
TRANSMISSION
Final reduction
Gear ratio 4.437
STEERING Type Hydraulic power-assisted rack and pinion STEERING
Overall ratio 13.1
STEERING
Turns, lock-to-lock 2.56
STEERING
Steering wheel diameter 370 mm (14.6 in)
SUSPENSION Type F ront Independent double wishbone with stabilizer, coil spring SUSPENSION Type
Rear Independent multilink with stabilizer, coil spring
SUSPENSION
Shock absorber F ront Telescopic, hydraulic, nitrogen gas-filled
SUSPENSION
Shock absorber
Rear Telescopic, hydraulic, nitrogen gas-filled
TIRES Size (4-door) F ront and rear (LX, LX-P,
LX PZEV, LX-P PZEV)
P215/60R16 94H TIRES Size (4-door)
F ront and rear (EX, EX-L,
EX PZEV, EX-L PZEV)
P225/50R17 93V
TIRES Size (4-door)
Spare T135/80D16101M
TIRES
Size (2-door) F ront and rear P225/50R17 93V
TIRES
Size (2-door)
Spare T135/80D16101M
WHEEL
ALIGNMENT
Camber F ront 000' WHEEL
ALIGNMENT
Camber
Rear - 1 00 '
WHEEL
ALIGNMENT
Caster F ront (4-door) 348'
WHEEL
ALIGNMENT
Caster
F ront (2-door) 3 47'
WHEEL
ALIGNMENT
Total toe-in F ront 0 mm (0 in)
WHEEL
ALIGNMENT
Total toe-in
Rear 2 mm (0.08 in)
WHEEL
ALIGNMENT
F ront wheel turning angle Inward 39
0
00'
WHEEL
ALIGNMENT
F ront wheel turning angle
Outward (reference) 31 50'
2-19
Desi gn Speci f i cat i ons
Item Measurement Qual i f i cat i on Speci f i cat i on
BRAKES Type of service brake F ront Power-assisted self-adjusting ventilated disc
Type of service brake
Rear Power-assisted self-adjusting solid disc
Type of parking brake
Mechanical actuating, rear wheels
Pad friction surface area F ront: (NISSIN) 50.6 cm
2
(7.84 sq in) x 2
(swept area)
F ront: (AKEBONO) 45.7 cm
2
(7.08 sq in) x 2
Rear 27.3 cm
2
(4.23 sq in) x 2
AIR Compressor Type Swash plate/DENSO
CONDITIONING
Compressor
Capacity 154.4 mL (9.42 cu in)/rev
Maximum speed 8,400 rpm
Lubricant capacity 70mL(2 3/8fl-oz)
Lubricant type DENSO ND-OIL 8
Condenser Type Corrugated fin
Evaporator Type Corrugated fin
Blower Type Stabilized swirling flow
Motor type 216W/12 V
Speed control Infinitely variable
Maximum capacity 505 m
3
(17,834 cu ft)/h
Temperature control
Air-mix type
Compressor clutch Type Dry, single plate, poly V-belt drive
Compressor clutch
Electrical power consumption
at 68 F (20 C)
35 W maximum at 12 V
Refrigerant Type HF C-134a(R-134a) Refrigerant
Capacity 400-450 g (14.1-15.9 oz)
2-20
Item Measur ement Quali fi cati on Speci f i cat i on
ELECTRICAL
RATINGS
Battery USA 4-door model s except
PZEV
12 V - 4 5 Ah/20 HR (12 V - 3 6 Ah/5 HR),
12 V - 4 7 Ah/20 HR (12 V - 3 6 Ah/5 HR),
12 V - 4 5 Ah/20 HR (12 V - 3 8 Ah/5 HR)
USA 2-door models,
'08 Canada model s
12 V - 4 7 Ah/20 HR (12 V - 3 8 Ah/5 HR)
USA models PZEV,
'09-10 Canada model s
12 V - 6 5 Ah/20 HR (12 V - 5 2 Ah/5 HR)
Fuse Under-hood f use/rel ay box 100 A, 60 A, 50 A, 40 A, 30 A, 20 A, 15 A, 7.5 A
Dri ver' s under-dash f use/rel ay
box
20 A, 15 A, 10 A, 7.5 A
Passenger ' s under-dash
f use/relay box
20 A, 15 A, 10 A, 7.5 A
Light bulbs Headlight high beam 1 2 V- 6 0 W
Headlight low beam (4-door) 12V- 51 W
Headlight low beam (2-door) 1 2 V- 5 5 W
Front turn si gnal/parki ng lights
(4-door)
12V- 21/ 5W
Front turn si gnal/parki ng lights
(2-door)
12 V- 24/ 2. 2 CP
Front si de marker lights
(4-door)
12 V - 3 C P
Front si de marker lights
(2-door)
1 2 V - 5 W
Rear turn si gnal li ghts 12V- 21 W
Brake/taillights 12V- 21/ 5W
High mount brake light 12 V- 21 W
Back-up lights 12V- 21 W
Li cense plate li ghts 1 2 V - 5 W
Cei li ng light 1 2 V - 8 W
Trunk light 12V - 5W
Front map light 1 2 V - 8 W
Ambi ent light LED
Vani ty mirror lights 12V- 1. 1 W
Gl ove box light 1 2 V - 2 CP
Door courtesy light 1 2 V - 2 CP
Gauge lights LED
Indicator lights LED
Washer reservoi r Capaci ty (USA model s) 2.5 L (2.64 US qt)
Capaci ty (Canada model s) 4.5 L (4.75 US qt)
2-21
Desi gn Speci f i cat i ons
Body Speci f i cat i ons
4-door Model :
4,930 mm (194.1 i n)
*1 16 i nc h wh eel s
* 2. 17 i nc h wheel s
2-22
Model :
2-23
Maintenance
Lubri cant s a n d Fl ui ds 3-2
Mai nt enance Mi nder
Gener al Inf or mat i on 3-4
Mai nt enanc e Mai n It ems 3-7
Mai nt enanc e S ub It ems 3-8
Lubri cant s and Flui ds
For t he det ai l s of t he l ubri cat i on poi nt s and t he t ype of l ubr i cant s to be appl i ed, refer to t he i l l ust rat ed i ndex and t he
var i ous wor k pr ocedur es (such as As s embl y / Reas s embl y , Repl ac ement Over haul , Inst al l at i on, etc.) cont ai ned in eac h
sec t i on.
Appl i cat i on Lubr i c ant of Fl ui d
A Engi ne Honda Mot or Oi l :
Amer i c an Honda P/N 08798-9023 (5W-20)
Honda Canada P/N CA66806 (5W-20)
Look for t he API cert i f i cat i on seal on the oi l cont ai ner . Make sur e
it s ay s " For Gasol i ne Engi ne." S AE Vi scosi t y: S ee chart .
B Manual Tr ansmi ssi on Honda Manual Tr ansmi ssi on Fl ui d (MTF):
Amer i c an Honda P/N 08798-9031
Honda Canada P/N 08798-9031C
Al ways use Honda MTF. Usi ng mot or oi l c an c ause sti ffer shiftit c
bec ause it does not cont ai n t he proper addi t i ves.
Aut omat i c Tr ansmi ssi on Honda Aut omat i c Tr ansmi ssi on Fl ui d (ATF-Z1):
Honda Canada P/N CA66689
Al ways use Honda ATF-Z1. Usi ng a non-Honda ATF can affect
shi ft qual i t y.
C
D
Br ake syst em (i ncl udi ng VS A l i nes)
Cl ut ch syst em (manual t r ansmi ssi on)
Honda DOT 3 Br ake Fl ui d: P/N 08798-9008
Al ways use Honda DOT 3 Br ake Fl ui d. Usi ng a non-Honda brake
f l ui d c an c ause cor r osi on and dec r ease t he life of t he syst em.
E Shi f t l ever (manual t r ansmi ssi on) Super Hi gh Temp Ur ea Gr ease: P/N 08798-9002
F
G
H
1
J
K
L
Br ake boost er c l evi s pi n
Cl ut ch mast er cyl i nder c l evi s pi n
(manual t r ansmi ssi on)
Rel ease fork (manual t r ansmi ssi on)
Battery t er mi nal s
Hood hi nges and hood latch
Fuel fill door
Tr unk hi nges
Mul t i pur pose Gr ease
M
N
Shi f t cabl e ends (manual t r ansmi ssi on)
Cal i per pi st on boot s, cal i per pi st on s eal s ,
cal i per pi ns, and cal i per pin boot s
Honda Si l i c one Gr ease: P/N 08C30-B0234M
0 Power st eer i ng syst em Honda Power St eer i ng Fl ui d:
Honda Canada P/N 08206-9002C
Al ways use Honda Power St eer i ng Fl ui d. Usi ng any ot her t ype of
power st eer i ng f l ui d or aut omat i c t r ansmi ssi on f l ui d c an c ause
i nc r eased wear and poor st eer i ng i n col d weat her .
P Ai r condi t i oni ng c ompr essor Compr essor Oi l : DENS O ND-OIL 8 (P/N 38897-PR7-A01AH or
38899-PR7-A01) for ref ri gerant HFC-134a (R-134a)
Q Cool ant syst em Honda Long Li fe Ant i f r eeze/Cool ant -Type 2: P/N OL999-9001
Honda Ext r eme Col d Weat her Ant i f r eeze/Cool ant Type 2:
P/N OL999-9020
NOTE:
* Lubr i cat e t he f ol l owi ng ar eas usi ng t he r ec ommended l ubr i cant s and f l ui ds.
In c or r osi ve ar eas, mor e f r equent l ubri cat i on i s nec essar y.
O A J E L
B N C P G P N K
3-3
Mai nt enance Di spl ay
The mai nt enanc e mi nder i s an i mport ant f eat ur e of t he i nf ormat i on di spl ay. Bas ed on engi ne and t r ansmi ssi on
oper at i ng c ondi t i ons, t he Ac c or d' s onboar d c omput er (ECM/PCM) c al c ul at es t he r emai ni ng engi ne oi l and t he
t r ansmi ssi on f l ui d li fe. The syst em al so di spl ays t he r emai ni ng engi ne oi l li fe al ong wi t h t he code(s) f or ot her sc hedul ed
mai nt enance i t ems needi ng ser vi c e. -
MAI NTENANCE MINDER INDICATOR
INFORMATION DI S PL AY S E L / RE S E T K NOB
3-4
Ser vi c e Informati on
1. The r emai ni ng engi ne oi l life on t he engi ne oi l life
i ndi cat or (A) i s di spl ayed as a per cent age on t he
i nf ormat i on di spl ay. To see t he cur r ent engi ne oi l li fe,
t urn t he i gni ti on swi t ch to ON (II), t hen push and
r el ease t he S E L / RE S E T knob repeat edl y unti l t he
engi ne oi l life i s di spl ayed.
m o r a
2. When t he r emai ni ng engi ne oi l life i s 15 % to 6 %, t he
engi ne oi l life i ndi cat or wi l l be di spl ayed f or sever al
sec onds when t he i gni ti on swi t ch i s ON (II).
The mai nt enance mi nder i ndi cat or (A) wi l l al so c ome
on, and t he mai nt enance i tem code(s) f or ot her
sc hedul ed mai nt enance i t ems needi ng ser vi c e wi l l
appear in t he i nf ormat i on di spl ay.
Compl et e li st of mai nt enance mai n i t ems (B) (see
page 3-7).
Compl et e li st of mai nt enance sub i t ems (C) (see
page 3-8).
3. When t he r emai ni ng engi ne oi l life i s 5 % to 1 %, t he
mai nt enanc e message ' ' S E RVI CE " (A) appear s al ong
wi t h t he s ame mai nt enanc e i t em c ode(s), when t he
i gni ti on swi t ch i s ON (II).
4. When t he r emai ni ng engi ne oi l life i s 0 %, t he engi ne
oi l life i ndi cat or bl i nks.
Thi s di spl ay c omes on when t he i gni ti on swi t ch i s ON
(II). At t hi s poi nt, t he i ndi cat ed mai nt enance must be
done as soon as possi bl e.
1
5. If t he i ndi cat ed mai nt enance i s not done, t he engi ne
oi l life i ndi cat or s hows a negat i ve mi l eage, for
exampl e " 10" bl i nki ng on t he di spl ay. A negat i ve
mi l eage wi l l di spl ay after t he vehi cl e i s dr i ven
10 mi l es (for US A model s) or 10 km (for Canada
model s) after t he di spl ay begi ns to bli nk.
Thi s means that t he i ndi cat ed mai nt enance i tem
shoul d have been done 10 mi l es (for US A model s) or
10 km (for Canada model s) ago.
= 1 0
(cont' d)
Gener al Informati on (cont' d)
Reset t i ng t he Mai nt enance Inf ormat i on
Di spl ay
NOTE:
* The vehi c l e must be st opped to r eset .
If t he r equi r ed ser vi c e i s done and t he di spl ay i s not
r es et or if t he di spl ay i s r eset wi t hout doi ng t he
ser vi c e, t he syst em wi l l not s how t he pr oper
mai nt enanc e t i mi ng. Thi s c an l ead to ser i ous
mec hani c al pr obl ems bec ause t her e wi l l be no r ecor d
of when mai nt enanc e i s needed.
1. Tur n t he i gni t i on swi t c h ON (II).
2. If oi l life i s mor e t han 15 %, pr ess t he S E L / RE S E T knob
r epeat edl y unti l t he engi ne oi l life i s di spl ayed.
3. Pr ess t he S E L / RE S E T knob f or about 10 s ec onds . The
engi ne oi l life and t he mai nt enanc e i t em c ode(s) wi l l
bli nk.
NOTE: If you ar e reset t i ng t he di spl ay when t he
engi ne oi l life i s mor e t han 15%, make sur e t he
mai nt enanc e i t ems r equi r i ng ser vi c e have been done
bef ore reset t i ng t hi s di spl ay.
4. Pr ess t he S E L / RE S E T knob f or anot her 5 s ec onds . The
mai nt enanc e i t em code(s) wi l l di sappear and t he
engi ne oi l life wi l l r eset to " 100."
Reset t i ng Indi vi dual Mai nt enance It ems
1. Connec t t he Honda Di agnost i c Sy s t em (HDS) t o t he
dat a link connect or (DLC) (see st ep 2 on page 11-3).
2. Tur n t he i gni t i on swi t c h to ON (II).
3. Make sur e t he HDS c ommuni c at es wi t h t he vehi c l e
and t he engi ne cont rol modul e/power t r ai n cont rol
modul e (ECM/PCM). If it doesn' t c ommuni c at e,
t r oubl eshoot t he DL C ci rcui t (see page 11-181).
4. Sel ec t GA UGE S in t he BODY EL ECTRI CAL wi t h t he
HDS.
5. Sel ec t ADJ US TMENT i n t he GA UGE S wi t h t he HDS.
6. Sel ec t S ERVI CE REMINDER in t he ADJ US TMENT wi t h
t he HDS.
7. Sel ec t RE S E T in t he S ERVI CE REMINDER wi t h t he
HDS.
8. Sel ec t t he i ndi vi dual mai nt enance i t em you wi s h to
r eset .
3-6
Mai nt enance Mai n It ems
If message "SERVICE" does not appear more than 12 months after the display is reset change the engine oil every year.
NOTE:
Independent of the maintenance messages in the smart maintenance display, replace the brake fluid every 3 years.
Inspect idle speed every 160,000 miles (256,000 km).
Adjust the valves during services A, B, 1, 2, or 3 if they are noisy.
Symbol Mai nt enance Mai n It ems
A Replace engine oil (see page 8-11)
Engine oil capacity without oil filter.
'08-09 models: 4.0 L (4.2 US qt)
'10 model: 3.8 L (4.0 US qt)
B Replace engine oil and oil filter (see page 8-12)
Engine oil capacity with oil filter.
'08-09 models: 4.2 L (4.4 US qt)
'10 model: 4.0 L (4.2 US qt)
Check front and rear brakes (see page 19-3)
Check pads and discs for wear (thickness), damage, and cracks.
Check calipers for damage, leaks, and tightness of mounting bolts.
Check parking brake adjustment (see page 19-8)
Check the number of clicks (7 to 9) when the parking brake lever is pulled with 196 N (20 kgf, 44 Ibf) of force.
Inspect tie-rod ends, steering gearbox, and gearbox boots (see page 17-5)
Check steering linkage.
Check boots for damage and leaking grease.
Check fluid lines for damage or leaks.
Inspect suspension components (see page 18-3)
Check bolts for tightness.
Check condition of ball joint boots for deterioration and damage.
Inspect driveshaft boots (see page 16-4)
Check boots for cracks and boot bands for tightness.
Inspect brake hoses and lines including VSA lines (see page 19-46)
Check the master cylinder and VSA modulator-control unit for damage and leakage.
Inspect all fluid levels and condition of fluids
Engine coolant (see page 10-6)
Clutch fluid (see page 12-6)
Manual transmission fluid (MTF) (see page 13-5)
Automatic transmission fluid (ATF) (see page 14-191)
Power steering fluid (see page 17-28)
Brake fluid (see page 19-9)
Windshield washer fluid
Inspect exhaust system* (see page 9-9)
Check catalytic converter heat shields, exhaust pipes, and muffler for damage, leaks, and tightness.
Inspect fuel lines* (see page 11-310) and connections* (see page 11-313)
Check for loose connections, cracks, and deterioration; retighten loose connections and replace damaged parts.
NOTE: According to state and federal regulations, failure to do the maintenance items marked with an asterisk (*) will not void the customer's
emissions warranties. However, Honda recommends that all maintenance services be done at the recommended interval, to ensure long-term
reliability.
3-7
Mai ntenance Mi nder
Mai nt enance Sub It ems
Number Mai nt enance Sub It ems
1 Rotate tires, and check tire inflation and condition
F ollow the pattern shown in the Owner's Manual.
2 Replace air cleaner element (see page 11-333}
If the vehicle is driven primarily in dusty conditions, replace every 15,000 miles (24,000 km).
Replace dust and pollen filter (see page 21-79)
If the vehicle is driven mostly in areas that have high concentrations of dust, pollen, or soot in the air, replace every 15,000
miles (24,000 km).
Replace the filter whenever airflow from the heating and air conditioning system is less than normal.
Inspect drive belt (see page 4-29)
Look for cracks and damage, then check the position of the drive belt auto-tensioner indicator.
3 Replace manual transmission fluid (MTF) (see page 13-5)
Capacity: 1.9 L (2.0 US qt); use Honda MTF .
Replace automatic transmission fluid (ATF) (see page 14-192)
Capacity: 2.5 L (2.6 US qt); use Honda ATF -Z1.
Driving in mountainous areas at very low vehicle speeds results in higher transmission temperatures. This requires
transmission fluid changes more frequently than recommended by the maintenance minder. If the vehicle is regularly driven
under these conditions, change the transmission fluid at 60,000 miles (100,000 km), then every 30,000 miles (48,000 km).
4 Replace spark plugs (see page 4-20)
. Use ILZKR7B-11S (NGK) or SXU22HCR11S (DENSO) for all models except PZEV.
Use DILZKR7A11GS (NGK) for PZEV.
Inspect valve clearance (cold)
Except PZEV model (see page 6-9)
PZEV model (see page 6-58)
Intake: 0.21 - 0. 25 mm (0.008-0.010 in), Exhaust: 0.25-0.29 mm (0.010-0.011 in).
5 Replace engine coolant (see page 10-6)
Capacity (including reservoir/DENSO):
M/T 6.1 L (1.61 US gal)
A/T 6.0 L (1.59 US gal)
Capacity (including reservoir/TRAD):
M/T 6.0 L (1.59 US gal)
ATT 5.9 L (1.56 US gal)
Use Honda Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2, and add Honda Extreme Cold Weather Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2
in severe cold temperature.
3-8
S UPPL EMENTAL RESTRAINT S YS TE M (SRS) {if engi ne el ect r i cal mai nt enance is. requi red)
The Ac c or d S RS i ncl udes a dr i ver ' s ai r bag i n t he st eer i ng wheel hub, a passenger ' s ai r bag i n t he dashboar d
roof, and si de ai r bags i n t he front seat -bac ks. Inf ormat i on nec essar y to saf el y ser vi c e t he S RS i s Incl uded i n t hi s
shoul d be done by an aut hori zed Honda deal er .
To avoi d r ender i ng t he S RS i noper at i ve, whi c h c oul d l ead t o per sonal i nj ury or deat h i n t he event ot a sever e
Impr oper ser vi c e pr oc edur es, i ncl udi ng i ncor r ect r emoval and i nst al l at i on of t he S RS , coul d l ead t o per sonal
Do not bump or i mpact t he S RS uni t , f ront i mpact s ens or s , si de i mpact s ens or s , or r ear saf i ng sensor ,
espec i al l y when t he i gni ti on swi t c h i s i n ON (II), or f or at l east 3 mi nut es after t he i gni t i on swi t c h Is t ur ned to
L OCK (0); ot her wi se, t he syst em may f ai l In a c ol l i si on, or t he ai r bags may depl oy.
S RS el ect r i cal c onnec t or s ar e i dent i f i ed by yel l ow col or c odi ng. Rel at ed c omponent s ar e l ocat ed i n t he
st eer i ng c ol umn, cent er c onsol e, dashboar d, dashboar d l ower c over , In t he dashboar d above t he gl ove box,
In t he f ront seat s, i n t he roof si de, and ar ound t he f l oor. Do not use el ect r i cal t est equi pment on t hese ci r cui t s.
Engine Electrical
engi ne El ect ri cal
S pec i al To o l s . . 4-2
St art i ng Syst em
Co mpo nent L oc at i on I nd ex . . . . 4- 3
S y mpt o m Tr oubl es hoot i ng
I nd ex . . . . . . 4-4
Ci r c ui t Di agr am 4-5
St ar t er S y s t em Ci r c ui t
Tr oubl es hoot i ng 4-7
Cl ut c h Int er l ock S wi t c h Tes t . . . 4-9
Cl ut c h Int er l ock S wi t c h
Re p l ac e me n t . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..4-10
St ar t er Per f or manc e Tes t 4-10
St ar t er Remo v al and
Inst al l at i on 4-11
St ar t er Ov er haul 4-13
Ignition Syst em
Co mpo nent L oc at i on Index 4-18
Igni t i on Ti mi ng Inspec t i on 4-19
Igni t i on Coi l and Spar k Pl ug
Removal / Inst al l at i on 4-20
Spar k Pl ug Inspec t i on 4-20
Chargi ng Syst em
Co mpo nent L oc at i on I nd ex . . . . 4-22
Index . 4-23
Ci r c ui t Di agr am . 4-24
Char gi ng S y s t em Indi c at or
Ci r c ui t Tr oubl es hoot i ng 4-25
Al t er nat or and Regul at or
Al t er nat or Cont r ol Ci r c ui t
Dr i ve Bel t Inspec t i on 4-29
Drive Belt
Dr i ve Bel t Aut o-t ens i oner
Inspec t i on 4-30
Dr i ve Bel t Aut o-t ens i oner
Tens i o ner Pul l ey
Repl ac ement ..4-32
Al t er nat or Remo v al and
Al t er nat or Ov er haul 4-34
Cr ui se Cont rol
Index 4-40
Cr ui s e Cont r ol Input Tes t 4-43
* Cr ui s e Cont r ol Combi nat i on
S wi t c h Tes t / Repl ac ement . .. 4-45
Cl ut c h Pedal Posi t i on S wi t c h
Test . . . 4- 45
Repl ac ement ... ..4-46
Engi ne Mount Cont rol
Syst em
Engi ne El ect ri cal
Speci al Tool s
Ref .No. Tool Number Descr i pt i on Qt y

(D
07746-0010300
07749-0010000
Bear i ng Dr i ver At t achment , 42 x 47 mm
Dr i ver Handl e, 15 x 135L
1
1

1-2
St art i ng Syst em
Component Locat i on Index
. S TA RTE R CUT RE L AY
Test, page 22-93
DRI VER' S UNDER-DASH
FUS E / RE L A Y BOM
CL UTCH I NTERL OCK SWI TCH (M/ T model )
Test, page 4-9
Replacement, page 4-10
BATTERY
Test, page 22-90
S TARTER
Circuit Diagram, page 4-5
Starter System Circuit Troubleshooting, page 4-7
Performance Test, page 4-10
Removal and Installation, page 4-11
Overhaul, page 4-13
TRANS MI S S I ON RANGE SWI TCH
(A/ T model )
Test , page 14-238
Repl ac ement , page 14-240
St art i ng Syst em
Sympt om Troubl eshoot i ng Index
Sy mpt om Di agnost i c pr oc edur e Al so c hec k f or
Engi ne does not cr ank 1. Chec k f or l oose battery t er mi nal s or c onnec t i ons.
2. Test t he battery f or a l ow st at e of c har ge (see page
22-90).
3. Check t he PGM-FI mai n r el ays (see page 22-93).
4. Chec k t he st art er (see page 4-7).
5. Chec k t he st art er cut rel ay (see page 22-93).
6. Chec k t he t r ansmi ssi on r ange swi t c h (A/T model ) (see
page 14-238).
7. Chec k t he cl ut ch i nt erl ock swi t c h (M/T model ) (see
page 4-9).
8. Chec k t he i gni ti on swi t ch and i ts rel at ed ci r cui t s (see
page 22-106).
Poor gr ound at G101
(A/T model ) or G302
(M/T model )
Engi ne c r anks, but does
not st art
1. Chec k f or PGM-FI DTCs (see page 11-3).
2. Chec k f or IMMOBI st at us and f unct i on (see page
22-433).
3. Chec k t he f uel pr essur e (see page 11 -308).
4. Chec k for a pl ugged or damaged f uel li ne (see page
11-310).
5. Chec k f or a pl ugged f uel fi lter (see page 11-324).
6. Chec k t he throttle body (see page 11 -335).
7. Chec k f or l ow engi ne c ompr essi on:
Al l model s except PZEV (see page 6-6)
8. Chec k f or a damaged or broken c am c hai n.
9. Do t he engi ne cont rol modul e (ECM)/power t r ai n
cont rol modul e (PCM) reset i n t he PGM-FI
INSPECTION menu to c anc el AL L I NJ ECTORS S TOP
wi t h t he Honda Di agnost i c Sy s t em (HDS).
Weak or f oul ed spar k
pl ugs
Engi ne i s har d to st art 1. Chec k for PGM-FI DTCs (see page 11-3).
2. Chec k t he f uel pr essur e (see page 11-308).
3. Chec k for a pl ugged or damaged f uel li ne (see page
11-310).
4. Chec k f or a pl ugged f uel fi lter (see page 11-324).
Weak or f oul ed spar k
pl ugs
Engi ne cr anks sl owl y 1. Chec k for l oose battery t er mi nal s or c onnec t i ons.
2. Test t he battery f or a l ow st at e of char ge (see page
22-90).
3. Chec k t he st art er f or bi ndi ng (see page 4-13).
4. Chec k for exc essi ve dr ag in t he engi ne.
4-4
Ci rcui t Di agram
M/ T model
UNDER- HOOD F US E / RE L A Y B OX
DRIVER'S UNDER-DASH
F US E / RE L A Y B OX
No. 1-1 (100 A) No. 3-1 (50 A)
F 16 C1
IGNITION SWI TCH
2 / " B A T "
S T HOT i n S TA RT (III)
DRIVER'S
UNDER-DASH
F US E / RE L A Y
BOX
1 CL UTCH
A \ I NTERL OCK
P
* S WI TCH
(ON: Pedal
2 pr es s ed)
_ l
G302
St art i ng Syst em
Ci rcui t Di agram (cont' d)
A / T modeS
3 I Icni
<+>
No. 1-1 (100 A) No. 3-1 (50 A)
-cr\jo_ crvo
B L K / YE L
- WH T
DRI VE R' S UNDE R- DA S H
F US E / RE L A Y B OX I GNI TI ON S WI TCH
1
F16 C1
S T HOT i n S TA RT (III)
S TA RTE R
CUT
RE L A Y
DRI VER' S
UNDE R- DAS H
F US E / RE L A Y
B OX
BL K / WHT L T GRN
4 TRA NS MI S S I ON
FN RA NGE
p J S WI TCH
1 0 (ON: P. N)
G101
4-6
St ar t er Syst em Ci rcui t Troubl eshoot i ng
Spec i al Tool s Requi r ed
Al t er nat or , Regul at or , Bat t ery and St ar t er OTC3131 *
Avai l abl e t hr ough t he Honda Tool and Equi pment
Pr ogr am 888-424-6857
NOTE:
Ai r t emper at ur e must be wi t hi n 59100 F (1538 C).
dur i ng t hi s pr ocedur e,
After t hi s i nspect i on, you must r eset t he engi ne
cont rol modul e (ECM)/power t r ai n cont rol modul e
(PCM). Ot her wi se, t he ECM/ PCM wi l l cont i nue to st op
t he f uel i nj ect ors f r om operat i ng.
The bat t ery must be i n good condi t i on and f ully
c har ged.
1. Connec t t he al t ernat or, regul at or, battery & st art er
t est er (OTC3131) t o t he battery as s hown.
NOTE: The probe i s not used f or battery t est i ng.
OTC3131
2. Do t he BATTERY TES T.
Does the display indicate GOOD or GOOD, LOW
CHARGE?
YE S - Th e battery i s OK. Go to st ep 3. .
NO-l f t he di spl ay i ndi cat es BAD BATTERY, r epl ace
t he bat t ery, t hen ret est . If t he di spl ay i ndi cat es
CHARGE & RETES T, char ge t he bat t ery, t hen ret est .
3. Connec t t he Honda Di agnost i c Syst em (HDS) to t he
dat a li nk c onnec t or (DLC) (see st ep 2 on page 11-3).'
and t he ECM/ PCM. If it does not c ommuni c at e,
t r oubl eshoot t he DL C ci r cui t (see page 11-181).
6. Sel ec t AL L I NJ ECTORS S TOP in the PGM-FI
INSPECTION menu wi t h t he HDS.
7. Set t he parki ng br ake, t hen wi t h t he shi f t l ever in N or
P (A/T model ) or t he cl ut ch pedal pr essed (M/T
model ), t ur n t he i gni t i on swi t c h t o.START (III) to cr ank
t he engi ne.
Does the starter crank the engine normally? -
YE S - Th e st art i ng syst em i s OK . Go to st ep 15.
NO- Go to st ep 8.' ,
8. Tur n t he i gni t i on swi t c h to L OCK (0).
9. Chec k t he el ect r i cal c onnec t i ons at t he bat t ery, t he
negat i ve battery c abl e to t he body, t he engi ne gr ound
c abl es, and t he st ar t er f or l ooseness and c or r osi on,
t hen try cr anki ng t he engi ne agai n.
Does the starter crank the engine normally?
YES-Repai r i .ng t he l oose connect i on cor r ect ed t he
pr obl em. The st art i ng syst em i s OK. Go to st ep 15.
NO- Bas ed on t he f ol l owi ng sympt oms, take t he
appr opr i at e ac t i o n : !
If t he st art er does not cr ank t he engi ne at al l , go to
st ep 10.
If t he st art er c r anks t he engi ne errat i cal l y or t oo
sl owl y, go to st ep 12.
If t he st art er does not di sengage f r om t he f l ywheel
ri ng gear (M/T model ) or t orque conver t er ri ng gear
(A/T model ) when you r el ease t he key, r epl ace t he
st ar t er , or r emove and di sassembl e it, and check for
t he f ol l owi ng:
- St ar t er sol enoi d and swi t ch mal f unct i on
- Di rty dr i ve gear or damaged over r unni ng cl ut ch
(cont' d)
4-7
St art i ng Syst em
St ar t er Syst em Ci rcui t Troubl eshoot i ng (cont' d)
10. Make sur e t he shi f t l ever i s in N or P (A/T model ) or
neut ral (M/T model ), t hen di sc onnec t t he engi ne wi r e
har ness 1P c onnec t or (A). Connec t a j umper wi r e
f r om t he battery posi t i ve t er mi nal to t he st art er
subhar ness 1P connect or (B).
Does the starter crank the engine?
YE S - Go t o st ep 11.
NO-Chec k t he st ar t er subhar ness. If t he wi r e i s OK,
r emove t he st art er (see page 4-11), t hen repai r or
r epl ace (see page 4-13) it as nec es s ar y . H
11. Chec k t he f ol l owi ng i t ems i n t he or der l i st ed unti l you
f i nd t he pr obl em i n t he ci rcui t :
NOTE: Af t er t he pr obl em i n t he ci rcui t i s f ound and
r epai r ed, go to st ep 15.
Chec k f or an open or shor t i n t he YE L wi r e and
c onnec t or s bet ween t he dr i ver ' s under -dash f use/
r el ay box and t he i gni t i on swi t c h.
Chec k f or an open or shor t in t he BL K / WHT wi r e and
c onnec t or s bet ween t he dr i ver ' s under -dash
f use/r el ay box and t he engi ne wi r e har ness TP
connect or .
Chec k f or an open or shor t in t he ORN wi r e and
c onnec t or s bet ween t he dr i ver ' s under -dash f use/
r el ay box and t he cl ut ch i nt erlock swi t ch (M/T
model ).
Chec k f or an open or shor t in t he L T GRN wi r e,
BL U/ WHTwi r e and c onnec t or s bet ween t he dr i ver ' s
under -dash f use/r el ay box and t he t r ansmi ssi on
r ange swi t ch (A/T model ).
Chec k f or poor gr ound at G302 (M/T model ) or G101
(A/T model ).
Chec k f or a f ault y i gni t i on swi t c h (see page 22-106).
Chec k f or a f ault y cl ut ch i nt erlock swi t c h (M/T
model ) (see page 4-9).
Chec k f or a f ault y t r ansmi ssi on r ange swi t c h (A/T
model ) (see page 14-238).
Chec k f or a f ault y st art er cut r el ay (see page 22-93).
4 - B
Cl ut ch Interlock Swi t c h Test
12. Connec t t he al t ernat or, regul at or, bat t ery & st art er
t est er (OTC3131) to t he battery.
NOTE: The probe i s used f or st art er t est i ng.
13. Do t he STARTI NG TES T.
Does the display indicate cranking voltage is greater
than or equal to 8.5 V and is the current draw less than or
equal to 380 A ?
YE S - Go to st ep 14.
NO-Repl ac e the st art er (see page 4-11), or r emove
and di sassembl e it (see page 4-13), and check f or
t hese pr obl ems:
Dr ag in the st art er ar mat ur e
Shor t in the ar mat ur e wi ndi ng
o Exc essi ve dr ag i n t he engi ne
Open ci rcui t in st art er ar mat ur e commut at or
segment s
Exc essi vel y wor n st art er br ushes
Open ci rcui t i n t he st art er br ushes
Di rty or damaged hel i cal spl i nes or dr i ve gear
Faul t y over r unni ng cl ut ch
14. Remove t he st art er, and i nspect its dr i ve gear and t he
f l ywheel ri ng gear (M/T model ) or t he t or que
conver t er ri ng gear (A/T model ) f or damage. Repl ace
any damaged part s.
15. Sel ec t ECM/ PCM r eset (see page 11-4) i n t he PGM-FI
INSPECTION menu to c anc el AL L I NJ ECTORS S TOP
wi t h t he HDS.
M/T model
1. Di sc onnec t t he cl ut ch i nt erl ock swi t ch connect or (A).
2. Remove t he cl ut ch i nt erl ock swi t ch (B).
3. Chec k f or cont i nui t y bet ween t he t er mi nal s accor di ng
to t he t abl e.
If t he cont i nui t y i s not as speci f i ed, repl ace the
cl ut ch i nt erl ock swi t c h (see page 4-10).
If OK, i nst al l t he cl ut ch i nterlock swi t ch and adj ust
t he pedal hei ght (see page 12-7).
y Ter mi nal
1 2
Posi t i on ^
1 2
( PRES S ED)
o o
( REL EAS ED)
4-9
St art i ng Syst em
Cl ut ch Interlock Swi t c h
Repl acement
M/T model
1, Di sc onnec t t he cl ut ch i nt erl ock swi t c h c onnec t or (A).
2. Loosen t he l ocknut (B), t hen r emove t he cl ut ch
i nt erlock swi t c h (C).
3. Inst al l t he cl ut ch i nt erl ock swi t c h, and adj ust t he pedal
hei ght (see page 12-7).
St ar t er Perf ormance Test
1. Remove t he st art er (see page 4-11).
2. Fi r ml y c l amp t he st art er in a vi se.
3. Make a connect i on f or t hi s t est usi ng t he t hi ckest
(gauge) wi r e possi bl e (pref erabl y t he s ame gauge as
used on t he vehi c l e).
NOTE: To avoi d damagi ng t he st ar t er , never l eave t he
battery connect ed f or mor e t han 5 sec onds.
I G
4. Connec t t he battery as s hown, and c hec k f or
cont i nui t y bet ween t he B t er mi nal and t he st art er
body. If t her e i s cont i nui t y, it i s wor ki ng properl y.
5. Di sc onnec t t he bat t ery f r om t he body, and c hec k f or
cont i nui t y bet ween t he B t er mi nal and t he st art er
body. If t her e i s no cont i nui t y, it i s wor ki ng properl y.
4-10
Starter Removal and Installation
6. Connec t t he st art er to t he battery as s hown, and
conf i r m t hat t he mot or r uns.
7. If t he el ect r i c cur r ent meet s t he speci f i cat i on when t he
battery vol t age i s at 11.5 V, t he st ar t er i s wor ki ng
properl y.
Spec i f i c at i on
El ec t r i c Cur r ent : 80 A or l ess
Removal
1 Do the battery r emoval pr ocedur e (see page 22-92).
2. Remove t he i nt ake mani f ol d (see page 9-4).
3. Di sconnect t he posi t i ve st art er c abl e (A) f rom t he B
t er mi nal , and t he S t er mi nal connect or (B).
(cont' d)
4-11
St art i ng Syst em
Starter Removal and Installation (cont'd)
i nst al l at i on
1. Inst al l t he st ar t er , t hen t i ght en t he t wo bol t s.
(4.5 kgf -m, 33 Sbfft) 12 x 1.25 mm
64 N m
(6.5 kgf -m, 47 Ibfft)
2. Inst al l t he har ness c l amp (A).
3. Connec t t he posi t i ve st ar t er c abl e (B) to t he B
t er mi nal , and t he S t er mi nal c onnec t or (C) Make sur e
t he c r i mped si de of t he ri ng t er mi nal f ac es away f r om
t he st art er when you c onnec t it.
4. Install t he i ntake mani f ol d (see page 9-6).
5. Do t he battery i nst al l at i on pr ocedur e (see page 22-92).
6. St ar t t he engi ne to make sur e t he st art er wor ks
properl y.
4 - 1 2
Starter Overhaul
Di s as s embl y / Reas s embl y
RING GEAR HOL DER
Apply molybdenum disulfide.
(cont ' d)
4-13
St art i ng Syst em
Starter Overhaul (cont'd)
Ar mat ur e Inspect i on and Tes t
1. Remove t he st art er (see page 4-11).
2. Di sassembl e t he st art er as s hown in t he Expl oded
Vi ew.
3. Inspect t he ar mat ur e for wear or damage f r om cont act
wi t h t he per manent magnet . If t her e i s wear or
damage, r epl ace t he ar mat ur e.
4. Chec k t he commut at or (A) sur f ac e, if t he sur f ac e i s
di rty or burnt , r esur f ace it wi t h an emer y cl ot h or a
lat he to t he speci f i cat i ons in st ep 5, or r econdi t i on
wi t h #500 or #600 sandpaper (B).
5. Chec k t he commut at or di amet er wi t h an el ect r oni c
di gi tal cal i per or di al t ype cal i per . If t he di amet er i s
. bel ow t he ser vi c e li mi t , r epl ace t he ar mat ur e.
Commut at or Di amet er
St andar d (New): 28. 0-28. 1 mm (1.10-1.11 i n)
Ser vi c e Li mi t : 27.5 mm (1.08 i n)
6. Measur e t he commut at or (A) runout .
If t he c ommut at or runout i s wi t hi n t he ser vi c e li mi t,
check t he commut at or f or car bon dust or br ass
c hi ps bet ween t he segment s.
If t he commut at or runout i s not wi t hi n t he ser vi c e
li mi t, r epl ace t he ar mat ur e.
Commut at or Runout
St andar d (New): 0.02 mm (0.001 i n) max.
A
4-14
7. Us e a di gi tal cal i per or di al cal i per t o check t he mi ca
dept h (A). If the mi ca dept h i s bel ow t he ser vi c e l i mi t
r epl ace t he ar mat ur e.
Commut at or Mi ca Dept h
St andar d (New): 0. 40- 0. 50 mm (0. 016-0. 020 i n)
8. Us e an ohmmet er to check f or cont i nui t y bet ween t he
segment s of t he commut at or . If t her e i s an open
ci r cui t bet ween any of the segment s, r epl ace the
ar mat ur e.
9. Pl ace t he ar mat ur e (A) on an ar mat ur e t est er (B). Hol d
a hac ksaw bl ade (C) on t he ar mat ur e c or e. If t he bl ade
i s at t ract ed to t he cor e or vi br at es whi l e t he cor e i s
t ur ned, t he ar mat ur e i s shor t ed. Repl ace t he
ar mat ur e.
10. Us e an ohmmet er to check f or cont i nui t y bet ween t he
c ommut at or (A) and t he ar mat ur e coi l cor e (B), and
bet ween t he commut at or and t he ar mat ur e shaf t (C).
If t here i s cont i nui t y, r epl ace t he ar mat ur e.
(cont' d)
4-15
St art i ng Syst em
Starter Overhaul (cont'd)
St ar t er Br ush Inspec t i on
11. Measur e t he br ush l engt h. If it i s shor t er t han t he
ser vi c e l i mi t , r epl ace t he br ush hol der assembl y.
Br ush Lengt h
St andar d (New): 11. 1- 11. 5 mm ( 0. 44- 0. 45 i n)
St ar t er Br ush Hol der Tes t
12. Chec k f or cont i nui t y bet ween t he { +) br ushes (A) and
t he () br ushes (B). If t her e i s cont i nui t y, r epl ace t he
br ush hol der assembl y.
P l anet ar y deatr i nspect i on
13. Chec k t he pl anet ary gear s (A) and t he i nt ernal ri ng
gear (B). Repl ac e t hem if t hey ar e wor n or damaged.
A
4-16
Over r unni ng Cl ut ch Inspec t i on
14. Whi l e hol di ng t he dr i ve gear (A), t ur n t he gear
shaf t (B) count er cl ockwi se. Chec k t hat t he dr i ve gear
c omes out to t he ot her end. If t he dr i ve gear does not
move smoot hl y, r epl ace t he gear c over assembl y.
B
15. Whi l e hol di ng t he dr i ve gear , t urn t he gear shaf t
c l oc kwi se. The gear shaf t shoul d t urn f r eel y. If t he
gear shaf t does not t urn f r eel y, r epl ace t he gear cover
assembl y.
16. If t he dri ve gear i s wor n or damaged, r epl ace t he
over r unni ng cl ut ch assembl y; t he gear Is not avai l abl e
separ at el y.
Chec k t he condi t i on of t he f l ywheel r i ng gear (M/T
model ) or t he t or que conver t er ri ng gear (A/T model )
to s ee If t he dr i ve gear teeth ar e damaged.
St ar t er Reassembl y
17. Install t he br ush Into t he br ush hol der, and set t he
ar mat ur e (A) In t he br ush hol der (B).
NOTE: To seat t he new br ushes, sl i p a st ri p of #500 or
#600 sandpaper , wi t h t he gri t si de up, bet ween t he
commut at or and eac h br ush, and smoot hl y t urn t he
ar mat ur e. The cont act sur f ace of t he br ushes wi l l be
sanded to t he s ame cont our as t he commut at or .
18. Whi l e squeezi ng a spr i ng (C), i nsert it in t he hol e on
t he br ush hol der , and push it unti l it bot t oms. Repeat
t hi s f or t he ot her t hr ee spr i ngs (D, E, and F).
19. Inst al l t he ar mat ur e and t he br ush hol der assembl y
i nto t he housi ng.
NOTE: Make sur e t he ar mat ur e st ays in t he hol der.
4-17
Ignition Syst em
Component Locat i on i ndex
4-18
Ignition Ti mi ng Inspecti on
dat a li nk c onnec t or (DLC) (see st ep 2 on page 11-3).
and t he engi ne cont r ol modul e (ECM)/power t r ai n
cont rol modul e (PCM). If it does not c ommuni c at e,
4. Chec k f or DTCs (see page 11-3). If a DTC i s pr esent ,
di agnose and r epai r t he c ause bef ore cont i nui ng wi t h
t hi s t est .
5. St ar t t he engi ne. Hol d t he engi ne speed at 3,000 r pm
wi t h no l oad (in N or P (A/T model ) or neut ral (M/T
model )) unti l t he radi at or f an c omes on, t hen let it i dl e.
6. Chec k t he i dl e speed (see page 11-292).
7. J ump t he S CS l i ne wi t h t he HDS.
NOTE: Thi s st ep must be done to protect t he
ECM/ PCM f r om damage.
8. Connec t t he t i mi ng li ght to t he ser vi c e l oop (whi t e
t ape).
9. Ai m t he light t owar d t he poi nt er (A) on t he c am c hai n
c as e. Check t he i gni ti on t i mi ng under a no l oad
condi t i on (headl i ght s, bl ower f an, r ear wi ndow
def ogger , and ai r condi t i oner ar e t ur ned off).
NOTE: The ot her poi nter (C) i s not us ed.
Igni t i on Ti mi ng:
M/T model : 8 2 BTDC (RED mar k (B)) at i dl e i n
neut r al
A / T model : 8 2 BTDC (RED mar k (B at i dl e i n
No r P
10. If t he i gni ti on t i mi ng di ffers f r om t he speci f i cat i on,
check the c am t i mi ng. If the c am t i mi ng i s OK , updat e
t he ECM/ PCM if it does not have t he l at est sof t war e
(see page 11-203), or subst i t ut e a known-good
ECM/ PCM (see page 11-7), t hen r ec hec k. If t he syst em
wor ks properl y, and t he ECM/ PCM was subst i t ut ed,
r epl ace t he ori gi nal ECM/ PCM (see page 11-204).
11. Di sconnect t he HDS and t he t i mi ng li ght.
4-19
Ignition Syst em
Ignition Coil and Spark Plug
Removal/Installation
1. Remove t he i gni ti on coi l cover (A).
, 6x1. 0 mm
12 N m (1.2 kgf-m, 8.7 I bfft)
6 x 1.0 mm
12 N m
(1.2 kgf m,
8.7 I bfft)
2. Di sc onnec t t he i gni ti on coi l c onnec t or s (B), t hen
r emove t he i gni ti on coi l s (C).
3. Remove t he spar k pl ug and i nspect t hem (see page
4-20).
4. Appl y a smal l amount of ant i -sei ze c ompound to t he
pl ugs i nto t he cyl i nder head, f i nger ti ght. Toque t hem
t o 18N- m( 1. 8 kgf-m, 13 Ibf f t ).
5. Inst al l t he i gni ti on c oi l s, t hen c onnec t t he i gni t i on coi l
c onnec t or s.
6. Install t he i gni ti on coi l c over .
Spar k Plug Inspect i on
1. Remove t he i gni ti on coi l s (see page 4-20).
2. Remove t he spar k pl ugs, t hen i nspect t he el ect r odes
and t he c er ami c i nsul at or .
Bur ned or wor n el ect r odes may be c aused by t hese
condi t i ons:
- Advanc ed i gni ti on t i mi ng
- L oose spar k pl ug
- Pl ug heat r ange t oo hot
- Insuf f i ci ent cool i ng
Foul ed pl ugs may be c aused by t hese condi t i ons:
- Ret ar ded i gni ti on t i mi ng
- Oi l in c ombust i on c hamber
- Incorrect spar k pl ug gap
- Pl ug heat r ange t oo col d
- Ex c es s i v e i dl i ng/l ow speed r unni ng
- Cl ogged ai r c l eaner el ement
- Det eri orat ed i gni t i on coi l s
Worn or deformed
electrodes
Damaged
gasket
Cracked
insulator
I mproper gap
Oil-fouling
Carbon deposits
Cracked center
electrode insulator
3. If t he spar k pl ug el ect r ode i s di rty or c ont ami nat ed,
c l ean t he el ect r ode wi t h a pl ug cl eaner .
NOTE:
Do not use a wi r e br ush or sc r ape t he i r i di um
el ect r ode si nc e t hi s wi l l damage t he el ect r ode.
When usi ng a sand bl ast er spar k pl ug c l eaner , do
not c l ean f or mor e t han 20 sec onds to avoi d
damagi ng t he el ect r ode.
4-20
4. Replace the plug at the specified interval, or if the
center electrode i s rounded (A), or if the spark plug
gap (B) is out of specification. Use only the spark
plugs listed.
NOTE: Do not adjust the gap of iridium tip plugs.
Al l model s exc ept PZEV
Spar k Pl ugs
NGK: I I ZK R7B-11S
DENSO: SXU22HCR11S
El ect r ode Gap
St andar d (New): 1.0-1.1 mm ( 0. 039- 0.043 i n)
PZEV model
Spar k Pl ugs
NGK: DIL ZK R7A11GS
El ect r ode Gap
St andar d (New): 1.0-1.1 mm (0. 039-0. 043 i n)
A B
PZEV model
5. Apply a small amount of anti-seize compound to the
plug threads, and screw the plugs into the cylinder
head, finger-tight. Torque them to 18 Nm (1.8 kgf-m,
13 Ibf f t ).
Chargi ng Syst em
Component Location IndeM
CHARGI NG S YS TE M INDICATOR
(i n t he gauge cont r ol modul e)
UNDER-HOOD F US E / RE L A Y BOX
{Has bui l t -i n EL ECTRI CAL L OAD
DETECTOR (ELD))
DRI VE B E L T AUTO- TENS I ONER
Inspec t i on, page 4-30
Removal /Inst al l at i on, page 4-31
Pul l ey Repl ac ement , page 4-32
DRI VE B E L T
BATTERY
Test , page 22-90
AL TERNATOR
Ci r cui t Di agr am, page 4-24
Char gi ng Sy s t em Indi cat or Ci r cui t
Tr oubl eshoot i ng, page 4-25
Al t er nat or and Regul at or Ci r cui t
Al t er nat or Cont r ol Ci r cui t
Removal and Inst al l at i on, page 4-32
Over haul , page 4-34
4-22
Sy mpt om Di agnost i c pr ocedur e Al so c hec k f or
Char gi ng syst em
i ndi cat or does not c ome
on wi t h t he i gni t i on
swi t ch i n ON (II)
Tr oubl eshoot t he char gi ng syst em i ndi cat or ci r cui t (see
page 4-25).
Char gi ng syst em
i ndi cat or st ays on
1. Tr oubl eshoot t he char gi ng syst em i ndi cat or ci r cui t
(see page 4-25).
2. Chec k t he dri ve belt aut o-t ensi oner (see page 4-30).
3. Chec k for a broken dri ve belt (see page 4-29).
Battery di sc har ged 1. Chec k for a poor connect i on at the battery t er mi nal .
2. Chec k for a broken dri ve belt (see page 4-29).
3. Test t he battery (see page 22-90).
4. Tr oubl eshoot t he al t ernat or and regul at or ci r cui t (see
page 4-27).
5. Chec k t he dr i ve belt aut o-t ensi oner (see page 4-30).
6. Chec k for exc essi ve par asi t i c el ect ri cal cur r ent dr aw
wi t h t he i gni ti on swi t ch i n L OCK (0), and t he key
r emoved. The mul t i pl ex cont rol uni t s may t ake up to
10 mi nut es to turn off (sl eep mode) f or s ome model s.
Bat t ery over c har ged 1. Test t he battery (see page 22-90).
2. Tr oubl eshoot t he al t ernat or and regul at or ci r cui t (see
page 4-27).
4-23
Chargi ng Syst em
Ci rcui t Di agram
UNDE R- HOOD F US E / RE L A Y B OX
B A TTE RY
No. 1-1 (100 A)
cr\j>-
No. 3-1 (50 A)
C T X j O
F USE/RELAY B OX IGNITION S WI TCH
F16 C1
IG1 HOT i n ON (II)
and S TA RT (III)
B L K / RE D -
GA UGE CONTROL MODUL E
BL K
G301
E CM/ PCM I A3
Q
5 V
30
I
I
1
RE D
I
I
I
A4
O
F -CANH_
F -CAN L
CHARGI NG
S YS T E M
I NDI CATOR
1 1 *
A L TE RNA TOR
BL K
B
RECTI FI ER
ik ik ik ik ik ik
VOL TA GE RE GUL A TOR
ik ik ik ik ik
No . 7 lUo. 5
(15 A) ( (7.5 A)
DRI VER' S
UNDE R- DAS H
F US E / RE L A Y
BOX
BL K / RE D
1
WHT/ B L U w . w v j . , , *
L I I
22
I
0 1 0 1
17
4-24
ENGINE
Charging Syst em Indicator Circuit Troubleshooting
NOTE: Chec k f or st or ed DTCs in t he PGM-FI bef ore
t r oubl eshoot i ng t he c har gi ng syst em i ndi cat or.
1. Tur n t he i gni ti on swi t c h to ON (II).
Does the charging system indicator come on?
NO- Go to st ep 14.
2. St ar t t he engi ne. Hol d t he engi ne speed at 2,000 rpm
f or 1 mi nut e.
Does the charging system indicator go off?
YES - Ch ar g i ng syst em i ndi cat or ci r cui t i s OK. Go to
t he al t ernat or and r egul at or ci r cui t t r oubl eshoot i ng
(see page 4-27 ) .
NO- Go to st ep 3.
3. Do t he gauge cont rol modul e sel f -di agnost i c f unct i on
pr ocedur e (see page 22-332).
Does the charging system indicator flash?
NO-Repl ac e t he gauge cont rol modul e (see page
22-351 ) .
4. Tur n t he i gni ti on swi t c h to L OCK (0).
5. Di sc onnec t t he al t ernat or 4P connect or .
NOTE: The char gi ng syst em i ndi cat or may c ome on
and t hen go off.
Does the charging system indicator go off?
YES - Repl ac e t he al t ernat or (see page 4-32), or repai r
t he al t ernat or (see page 4-34).H
NO- Go t o st ep 7.
8. Connec t t he Honda Di agnost i c Syst em (HDS) t o t he
dat a li nk connect or (DLC) (see st ep 2 on page 11-3).
9. Tur n t he i gni ti on swi t c h t o ON (II).
and t he engi ne cont rol modul e (ECM)/power t r ai n
cont r ol modul e (PCM). If it does not c ommuni c at e,
11. J ump t he S CS l i ne wi t h t he HDS, t hen t ur n t he i gni t i on
swi t c h to L OCK (0).
NOTE: Thi s st ep must be done to prot ect t he
12. Di sc onnec t ECM/ PCM connect or B (49P).
13. Chec k f or cont i nui t y bet ween ECM/ PCM connect or
t er mi nal B46 and body gr ound.
CS1/PCSV1 CONNECTOR B (49P)
1 1/1 3 j 4 1/ 1/ 1 7 1 8 | 9~J lO
22
29
12
23
13 14 15
24
31 3233
16
25
34
17 18
35 36
19
26 27
38
21
28
[40 I Xl / 143 L / | 45146l47|48M
AL T L
^ (WHT/ BL U)
Terminal side of female terminals
Is there continuity?
YES - Repai r shor t t o gr ound i n t he wi r e bet ween
al t ernat or 4P connect or t er mi nal No. 3 and ECM/ PCM
c onnec t or t er mi nal B 4 6 . i l
NO-Updat e t he ECM/ PCM if it does not have t he l at est
sof t war e (see page 11-203), or subst i t ut e a
known-good ECM/ PCM (see page 11-7), t hen r echeck.
If t he sympt om/i ndi cat i on goes away wi t h a
known-good ECM/ PCM, r epl ace t he ori gi nal
ECM/ PCM (see page 11-204).H
(cont ' d)
4-25
Chargi ng Syst em
Charging System Indicator Circuit Troubleshooting (cont'd)
Does the charging system indicator flash?
YE S - Go t o s t ep 15.
22-351 ) .
16. Di sconnect t he al t ernat or 4P connect or .
17. Connec t al t ernat or 4P connect or t er mi nal No. 3 to
body gr ound wi t h a j umper wi r e.
AL TERNATOR 4P CONNECTOR
L
(WHT/ BL U)
f i 2
1
L
(WHT/ BL U)
V V
J UMPER
WI RE
Wire side of female terminals
Does the charging system indicator come on?
t he al t ernat or (see page 4- 34) .
NO-Di sc onnec t t he j umper wi r e, t hen go t o st ep 19.
20. Connec t t he HDS to t he DL C (see st ep 2 on page 11-3).
23. J ump t he S CS li ne wi t h t he HDS, t hen t urn t he i gni ti on
t er mi nal B46 and al t ernat or 4P connect or t er mi nal
No. 3.
ECM/ PCM CONNECTOR B (49P)
I / Mr ' 8 9 1101
a
11 12 13 1 4 1 5 16 17 18 19
/
21
a 22 23 24 25
><
26 27 28
29
/
31 3 2 3 3 34 3 5 3 6
/
38
/
4 0 /
/ \ 431/145146
47
AL T L
(WHT/ BL U)
(WHT/ BL U)
YES - Upd at e t he ECM/ PCM if it does not have t he
l at est sof t war e (see page 11-203), or subst i t ut e a
ECM/ PCM (see page 11-204).B
NO-Repai r open in t he wi r e bet ween al t ernat or 4P
connect or t er mi nal No. 3 and ECM/ PCM connect or
t er mi nal B 4 6 . i l
4-26
Alternator and Regulator Circuit Troubleshooting
Al t er nat or , Regul at or , Bat t ery, and St ar t er Test er
OTC3131*
^ Avai l abl e t hr ough t he Honda Tool and Equi pment
Pr ogr am 888-424-6857
1. Make sur e t he battery c onnec t i ons ar e good and t he
battery i s suf f i ci ent l y c har ged.
2. Connec t t he al t ernat or, regul at or, bat t ery & st art er
t est er (OTC3131) to t he battery as s hown.
NOTE: The probe i s used f or al t ernat or t est i ng.
3. St art t he engi ne. Hold t he engi ne speed at 3,000 r pm
wi t h no l oad (in N or P (A/T model ) or neut ral (M/T
model )) unti l t he radi at or f an c omes on, t hen let it i dl e.
4. Do t he CHARGING S YS TE M TE S T.
Does the display indicate voltage within 13.515.1 V
and amperage of 87.5 A or more?
NO-l f t he vol t age i s l ess t han 13.5 V, go to al t ernat or
cont rol ci rcui t t r oubl eshoot i ng (see page 4-28). If t he
vol t age i s over 15.1 V and amper age i s l ess t han
87.5 A, r epl ace t he al t ernat or (see page 4-32) or repai r
t he al t ernat or (see page 4-34).
5. Chec k t he di ode condi t i on on t he di spl ay.
Does the display indicate GOOD?
YE S - Th e di ode i s OK . Tr oubl eshoot i ng i s c o mpl et e.ll
NO-l f t he di spl ay i ndi cat es BAD, r epl ace t he
al t ernat or (see page 4-32) or r epai r t he al t ernat or (see
page 4-34), t hen r et est .B
NOTE If t he di spl ay i ndi cat es N/A, t he di ode pat t ern
c oul d not be di agnosed. Repeat t he t est . If N/A
appear s r epeat edl y, r epl ace t he al t ernat or.
4-27
Chargi ng Syst em
Alternator Control Circuit Troubleshooting
NOTE: Do t hi s t r oubl eshoot i ng if, i n st ep 5 of t he
al t ernat or and regul at or ci rcui t t r oubl eshoot i ng (see
page 4-27), t he battery vol t age i s l ess t han 13.5 V.
* 1. Connec t t he Honda Di agnost i c Sy s t em (HDS) to t he
2. Tur n t he i gni t i on swi t ch to ON (II).
4. Chec k for DTCs (see page 11-3). If a DTC i s pr esent ,
di agnose and repai r t he c ause bef ore cont i nui ng wi t h
t hi s t est .
6. St ar t t he engi ne, and t urn on t he headl i ght s to hi gh
beam.
7. Measur e t he vol t age bet ween al t ernat or 4P c onnec t or
t er mi nal No. 2 and t he posi t i ve t er mi nal of t he bat t ery.
BATTERY
C (WHT/GRIM)
Is there less than 1 V?
NO- Go to st ep 8.
8. J ump t he S CS li ne wi t h t he HDS, t hen t urn t he i gni t i on
E CM/ PCM CONNECTOR B (49P)
11 12
22
29
23
3j 4kVl 7
13 14 15 16 17 18
24 25
31 3233 34 35 36
19
9 10
27
38
21
28
40 \ / \ / \ 43TXl 45146 [47 j 48 [/ I
AL T C
1Q) (WHT/ GRN)
YES - Repai r shor t to gr ound in t he wi r e bet ween
al t ernat or 4P connect or t er mi nal No. 2 and ECM/ PCM
connect or t er mi nal B 4 5 . l l
ECM/ PCM (see page 11 -204).B
12. Di sconnect ECM/ PCM connect or B (49P).
4-28
,._r""i . j
Dri ve Belt inspection
13. Chec k f or l oose t er mi nal and c onnec t or s, t hen c hec k
f or cont i nui t y bet ween ECM/ PCM connect or t er mi nal
B45 and al t ernat or 4P connect or t er mi nal No. 2.
E CM/ PCM CONNECTOR i (49P)
FT?
3
4 l / W
8 9 Mo|
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
/
21
22 23 24
><
25
><
26 27 28
29
/
31 3 2 3 3 34 3 5 3 6
/
38
/
| 4 0 ^
431/ | 45146
47
48 M
f i
2
i
l 3
(WHT/ GRN)
C (WHT/ GRN)
t he al t ernat or (see page 4- 34) .
NO-Repai r open in t he wi r e bet ween al t ernat or 4P
t er mi nal B45.B
1. Inspect t he belt f or c r ac ks or damage. If t he belt i s
c r ac ked or damaged, r epl ace it (see page 4-30).
2. Chec k t he posi t i on of t he aut o-t ensi oner i ndi cat or ' s
poi nt er (A) i s wi t hi n t he st andar d r ange (B) as s hown.
If it i s out of t he st andar d r ange, r epl ace t he dr i ve belt
(see page 4-30).
4-29
Chargi ng Syst em
Driwe Belt Removal /Inst al l at i on
Bel t Tensi on Rel ease Tool Snap-on YA9317 or
equi val ent , c ommer c i al l y avai l abl e
1. Move t he aut o-t ensi oner (A) wi t h t he bel t t ensi on
r el ease t ool (B) i n t he di r ect i on of t he rot at i on ar r ow t o
rel i eve t ensi on f r om t he dr i ve belt (C), t hen r emove
t he dr i ve belt.
2. Inst al l t he new dr i ve belt i n t he r ever se or der of
r emoval .
Dri ve Belt Aut o-t ensi oner
Inspection
Bel t Tensi on Rel ease Tool Snap-on YA9317 or
equi val ent , c ommer c i al l y avai l abl e
1. Tur n t he i gni ti on swi t ch to ON (II), and make sur e to
t urn t he A/ C swi t ch OFF. Tur n t he i gni ti on swi t ch to
L OCK (0).
2. Chec k t he posi t i on of t he aut o-t ensi oner i ndi cat or ' s
poi nt er (A). St ar t t he engi ne, t hen check t he posi t i on
agai n wi t h t he engi ne i dl i ng. If t he posi t i on of t he
i ndi cat or moves or f l uct uat es ver y muc h, r epl ace t he
aut o-t ensi oner (see page 4-31).
3. Chec k f or abnor mal noi se f r om t he t ensi oner pul l ey. If
you hear abnor mal noi se, r epl ace t he aut o-t ensi oner
pul l ey (see page 4-32).
4. Remove t he dr i ve belt (see page 4-30).
5. Move t he aut o-t ensi oner wi t hi n i ts li mi t wi t h t he belt
t ensi on r el ease tool i n t he di rect i on of t he rotati on
ar r ow. Chec k that t he aut o-t ensi oner moves smoot hl y
and wi t hout any abnor mal noi se. If t he aut o-t ensi oner
does not move smoot hl y, or if you hear abnor mal
noi se, r epl ace t he aut o-t ensi oner (see page 4-31).
4-30
6. Remove t he aut o-t ensi oner (see page 4-31).
7. Cl amp t he aut o-t ensi oner (A) by usi ng t wo 8 mm bolts
(B) and a vi se (C) as shown. Do not c l amp t he
aut o-t ensi oner i tself.
8. At t ach t he t orque wr enc h (D) on t he pul l ey bolt, and
al i gn it as shown.
9. Al i gn t he aut o-t ensi oner i ndi cat or ' s poi nt er (E) on t he
aut o-t ensi oner base wi t h Max. belt posi t i on mark (F)
on t he aut o-t ensi oner ar m by usi ng t he t or que
wr enc h, and measur e t he t or que. If t he t or que val ue i s
out of speci f i cat i on, r epl ace t he aut o-t ensi oner (see
page 4-31).
NOTE: If t he aut o-t ensi oner i ndi cat or ' s poi nt er
exc eeds t he Max. belt posi t i on mark, r echeck t he
t or que.
Drive Belt Auto-tensioner
2. Remove t he power st eer i ng (P/S) f l ui d r eser voi r f r om
t he hol der .
3. Remove t he P/S pump (A) wi t hout di sconnect i ng t he
P/S hos es , t hen r emove t he P/S hose bracket (B).
10 x 1.25 mm
44 Nm (4.5 kgf-m, 33 Ibf f t )
4. Remove t he aut o-t ensi oner .
5. Install t he aut o-t ensi oner i n t he r ever se or der of
r emoval .
Aut o-t ensi oner Spr i ng Tor que:
33.1 - 4 0 . 5 N-m (3. 38-4. 13 kgf -m, 24. 4- 29. 9 Ibf f t )
4-31
Chargi ng Syst em
4
Tensi oner Pulley Replacement
2. Cl amp t he aut o-t ensi oner (A) by usi ng t wo 8 mm bol t s
(B) and a vi se (C) as s hown. Do not c l amp t he
aut o-t ensi oner i t sel f , t hen r emove t he t ensi oner
pul l ey bolt (D), t hen r emove t he t ensi oner pul l ey (E).
3. Inst al l t he t ensi oner pul l ey i n t he r ever se or der of
r emoval .
Alternator Removal and Installation
Removal -
1. Do t he bat t ery t er mi nal di sconnect i on pr ocedur e (see
page 22-91).
3. Remove t he t wo bol t s sec ur i ng t he al t ernat or.
4. Di sc onnec t t he al t ernat or connect or (A) and t he
posi t i ve al t ernat or cabl e (B), and r emove t he har ness
c l amp (C), t hen r emove t he al t ernat or.
4-32
Inst al l at i on
1. Inst al l t he al t ernat or, t hen connect t he al t ernat or
connect or (A) and t he posi t i ve al t ernat or cabl e (B),
and i nst all t he har ness c l amp (C). Make sur e t he
cr i mped si de of t he r i ng t er mi nal f ac es away f r om t he
al t ernat or when you connect it.
6x 1. 0 mm
8 N-m
(.8 k g f m, 6 Ibf-ft) A' C
2. Ti ght en t he t wo bol t s sec ur i ng t he al t ernat or.
8 x 1.25 mm
22 N-m
(2.2 k g f m,
16 Ibf-ft)
10 x 1.25 mm
44 N-m
(4.5 k g f m,
33 Ibf-ft)
3. Inst al l t he dri ve belt (see page 4-30).
4. Do t he battery t er mi nal r econnect i on pr ocedur e (see
page 22-91).
Chargi ng Syst em
Al t ernat or Overhaul
Expl oded Vi ew
FRONT BEARING RETAINER
4-34
Dri ver Handl e, 15 x 135L 07749-0010000
Bear i ng Dri ver At t achment , 42 x 47 mm 07746-0010300
NOTE: Ref er to t he Expl oded Vi ew as needed dur i ng t hi s
pr ocedur e.
1. Test t he al t ernat or and regul at or bef ore you r emove
t hem (see page 4-27).
2. Remove t he al t ernat or (see page 4-32).
3. If t he front bear i ng needs r epl aci ng, r emove t he
pul l ey locknut wi t h a 10 mm wr enc h (A) and a 22 mm
wr enc h (B). If nec essar y, use an i mpact wr enc h.
4. Remove t he har ness st ay and t he t hr ee f l ange nut s
f r om t he al t ernat or.
5. Remove t he end cover .
6. Remove t he br ush hol der assembl y (A).
(cont ' d)
1-35
Chargi ng Syst em
Alternator Overhaul (cont' d)
7. Remove t he f our t hr ough bol t s, t hen r emove t he r ear
housi ng assembl y (A) and t he was her (B).
8. If you ar e not r epl aci ng t he f ront bear i ng, go t o
st ep 13. Remove t he rot or f r om t he dr i ve-end
housi ng.
9. Inspect t he rotor shaf t f or sc or i ng, and Inspect t he
bear i ng j our nal sur f ac e in t he dr i ve-end housi ng for
sei zur e mar ks.
If t he rotor Is damaged, r epl ace t he rotor assembl y.
If t he rotor i s OK, go to st ep 10.
10. Remove t he front bear i ng ret ai ner.
11. Dri ve out t he f ront bear i ng wi t h a br ass drift and a
hammer .
4-36
12. Install a new f ront bear i ng i n t he dr i ver -end housi ng
wi t h a hammer , t he dr i ver handl e, 15 x 135L, and t he
bear i ng dri ver at t achment , 42 x 47 mm.
Al t er nat or Br ush Inspect i on
13. Measur e t he length of both br ushes (A) wi t h a veni er
cal i per (B).
If ei t her br ush i s shor t er t han t he ser vi c e li mi t,
r epl ace t he br ush hol der assembl y.
If t he br ush length i s OK , go to st ep 14.
Al t er nat or Br ush Lengt h
St andar d (New): 10.5 mm (0.41 i n)
Rot or Sl i p Ri ng Tes t
14. Chec k f or cont i nui t y bet ween t he sl i p ri ngs (A).
If t her e i s cont i nui t y, go to st ep 15.
If t here i s no cont i nui t y, r epl ace t he rotor assembl y.
B
15. Chec k for cont i nui t y bet ween eac h sl i p ri ng and t he
rotor (B) and t he rotor shaf t (C).
If t here i s no cont i nui t y, r epl ace t he rear housi ng
assembl y, t hen go to st ep 16.
If t here i s cont i nui t y, r epl ace t he rotor assembl y.
(cont' d)
4-37
Chargi ng Syst em
Al t ernat or Overhaul (cont'd)
Al t er nat or Reassembl y
16. If you r emoved t he pul l ey, put t he rotor i n t he
dr i ve-end housi ng, t hen t or que i ts l ocknut to 110 N-m
(11.2 kgf -m, 81.0 Ibf f t ).
17. Remove any gr ease or oi l f r om t he sl i p r i ngs.
18. Put t he r ear housi ng assembl y and t he dr i ve-end
housi ng/r ot or assembl y t oget her , and t i ght en t he f our
t hr ough bol t s.
19. Push t he br ushes (A) i n, t hen i nser t a pi n or dri l l bit (B)
(about 1.6 mm (0.06 i n) di amet er ) t o hol d t hem t her e.
A
20. Inst al l t he br ush hol der assembl y, and pul l out t he pi n
or dri ll bit.
21. Inst al l t he end cover .
22. Af t er assembl i ng t he al t ernat or, t urn t he pul l ey by
hand to make sur e t he rotor t ur ns smoot hl y and
wi t hout noi se.
23. Inst al l t he al t ernat or (see page 4-33) and t he dr i ve belt
(see page 4-30).
4-38
Crui se Control
j I B l |
Component Location Index
CL UTCH PEDAL POSITION SWI TCH (M/ T model ) Test, page 22-241
Test, page 4-45 Pedal Height Adjustment, page 19-6
Clutch Pedal Adjustment page 12-7
TRANS MI S S I ON RANGE SWI TCH (A/ T model ) Cruise Control Input Test, page 4-43
Test, page 14-238
4-39
Cr ui s e Cent r e
Symptom Troubl eshoot i ng Index
Cr ui se cont rol cannot be
s et
1. Chec k t he No. 10 (20 A) f use in t he under -hood
f use/r el ay box, and t he No. 7 (15 A) f use i n t he dr i ver ' s
under -dash f use/r el ay box.
3. Do t he c r ui se cont r ol combi nat i on swi t c h t est (see
page 4-45).
4. Do t he cr ui se cont r ol i nput t est (see page 4-43).
Poor gr ound G101
(A/T model ) or G302
(M/T model )
Cr ui se cont rol c an be set ,
but t he c r ui se mai n
on
3. Do t he c r ui se cont rol i nput t est (see patj e 4-43). Test
t he c r ui se cont rol mai n swi t c h si gnal i nput .
Faul t y gauge cont rol
modul e
Cr ui se cont rol c an be set ,
but t he c r ui se cont rol
on
(see page 22-332).
3. Do t he c r ui se cont rol i nput t est (see page 4-43). Test
t he c r ui se cont rol i ndi cat or si gnal i nput .
Faul t y gauge cont rol
modul e
Vehi c l e does not
accel er at e accor di ngl y
when t he r esume/ac c el
button i s pr essed
1. Chec k for PGM-FI DTCs (see page 11 -3).
2. Do t he c r ui se cont rol combi nat i on swi t c h t est (see
page 4-45).
t he r esume/ac c el swi t c h si gnal i nput .
Open ci r cui t , l oose or
di sconnect ed
t er mi nal s: GRY or
L TGRN wi r e, L T BL U or
GRY wi r e
Set speed does not c anc el
when t he brake pedal i s
pr essed
1. Chec k for PGM-FI DTCs (see page 11-3).
2. Do t he brake pedal posi t i on swi t ch t est (see page
19-6).
3. Do t he cr ui se cont rol i nput t est (see page 4-43). Test
t he brake pedal posi t i on swi t c h si gnal i nput .
Shor t to power on t he
ORN wi r e
Faul t y brake pedal
posi t i on swi t ch
(engi ne rpm st ays hi gh)
when t he cl ut ch pedal i s
pr essed (M/T model )
1. Chec k f or PGM-FI DTCs (see page 11 -3).
2. Do t he cl ut ch pedal posi t i on swi t ch t est (see page
4-45).
t he cl ut ch pedal posi t i on swi t c h si gnal i nput .
e Shor t to gr ound in
t he BRN wi r e
Faul t y cl ut ch pedal
when t he c r ui se cont rol
mai n button i s pr essed
page 4-45).
t he c r ui se cont rol mai n swi t c h si gnal i nput.
Shor t to power on t he
L TGRN o r YE L wi r e
when t he c anc el button i s
pr essed
. page 4-45).
t he c anc el swi t ch si gnal i nput.
di sconnect ed
t er mi nal s: GRY or
L TGRN wi r e, L T BL U or
GRY wi r e
Set speed does not
r esume when t he
r esume/ac c el button i s
pr essed (wi th t he c r ui se
cont rol mai n swi t c h
t ur ned on, and set speed
t empor ar i l y c anc el ed by
pr essi ng t he brake pedal )
1. Chec k f or PGM-FI DTCs (see page 11 -3).
2. Chec k t he brake pedal posi t i on swi t ch adj ust ment
(see page 19-6).
3. Do t he c r ui se cont rol combi nat i on swi t ch t est (see
page 4-45).
t he c r ui se cont rol r esume/ac c el swi t c h si gnal i nput.
Test t he brake pedal posi t i on swi t c h si gnal i nput .
Faul t y brake pedal
posi t i on swi t c h
di sconnect ed
t er mi nal s: L T BL U or
GRY wi r e
S y mpt om Di agnost i c pr oc edur e Al s o c hec k f or
Set speed does not
r esume when t he
pr essed (wi th t he c r ui se
cont rol mai n swi t c h
t ur ned on, and set speed
t empor ar i l y c anc el ed by
pr essi ng t he cl ut ch pedal )
(M/T model )
2. Chec k t he cl ut ch pedal posi t i on swi t c h adj ust ment
(see page 12-7).
3. Do t he c r ui se cont r ol combi nat i on swi t c h t est (see
page 4-45).
4. Do t he c r ui se cont r ol i nput t est (see page 4-43). Test
t he r esume/ac c el swi t c h si gnal i nput . Test t he cl ut ch
pedal posi t i on swi t c h si gnal i nput.
di sc onnec t ed
t er mi nal s: L T BL U or
GRY wi r e
9 Faul t y cl ut ch pedal
posi t i on swi t c h
Wi t h t he i gni t i on swi t c h i n
ON (II), and t he li ghti ng
swi t ch t ur ned on, t he
c r ui se cont rol
combi nat i on swi t c h
i l l umi nat i on does not
c ome on
Chec k t he c r ui se cont r ol combi nat i on swi t c h t est (see
page 4-45).
4-41
Crui se Control
Ci rcui t Di agram
UNDER-HOOD FUSE/RELAY BOX
OUTPUT SHAFT
(COUNTERSHAFT)
SPEED SENSOR
, BRN
|
| BLU/YEL g -
; L CLUTCH I
J I
PEDAL
' (r\
POSITION
1
\bJ
SWITCH
' 13
(ON: pedal 1
1 released) I I i
BLK
i BLK L
! A ; A
[_ G302
_ J
; Gfoi
TRANSMISSION
RANGE SWITCH
(Closed: D, D3, 2)
-42
Cruise Control input Test
NOTE: Al ways make sur e t hat you have t he l at est Honda Di agnost i c Syst em (HDS) sof t war e.
1. Connec t t he HDS to t he dat a link connect or (DLC) (see st ep 2 on page 11 -3).
2. Tur n t he i gni ti on swi t ch to ON (II).
3. Make sur e t he HDS c ommuni c at es wi t h t he vehi c l e and t he engi ne cont rol modul e (ECM)/power t r ai n cont rol modul e
(PCM). If it does not c ommuni c at e, t r oubl eshoot t he DLC ci rcui t (see page 11-181).
4. Go to PGM-FI, and check f or DTCs (see page 11-3).
5. Do t he f ol l owi ng t est s whi l e moni t ori ng par amet er s in t he PGM-FI DATA L I ST wi t h t he HDS.
NOTE: Intermi ttent f ai l ur es ar e often c aused by l oose ci rcui t c onnec t i ons. Whi l e moni t ori ng c r ui se cont rol i nput s, f lex
t he ci rcui t wi r es, and note if any of t he t est r esul t s c hange.
Si gnal t o be
t est ed
Tes t condi t i on Par amet er : Desi r ed
r esul t
Possi bl e c aus e if r esul t i s not obt ai ned
Br ake pedal
posi t i on
swi t c h si gnal
Br ake pedal pr essed,
t hen r el eased
CRUI S E BRAK E S W
shoul d i ndi cat e OFF
when t he brake pedal i s
pr essed and ON when
t he brake pedal i s
r el eased.
Faul t y brake pedal posi t i on swi t ch
Bl own No. 7 (15 A) f use in t he dr i ver ' s
under -dash f use/r el ay box
An open in t he wi r e bet ween t he
ECM/ PCM and t he brake pedal posi t i on
swi t ch
A wi r e shor t ed to gr ound or power
bet ween t he ECM/ PCM and t he brake
pedal posi t i on swi t ch
Cl ut ch pedal
posi t i on
swi t ch si gnal
(M/T model )
Cl ut ch pedal pr essed,
t hen r el eased
SHI FT/ CL UTCH S W
shoul d i ndi cat e ON
when t he cl ut ch pedal
i s pr essed and OFF
when t he cl ut ch pedal
i s r el eased.
Faul t y cl ut ch pedal posi t i on swi t ch
An open in t he wi r e bet ween t he ECM
and t he cl ut ch pedal posi t i on swi t ch
A wi r e shor t ed to gr ound bet ween t he
ECM and t he cl ut ch pedal posi t i on swi t c h
Poor gr ound G302
Tr ansmi ssi on
r ange swi t c h
si gnal (A/T
model )
Shi f t l ever i n D and
D3
SHI FT/ CL UTCH S W
shoul d i ndi cat e ON i n P,
R, N, 2, and 1 and OFF
i n D and D3.
Faul t y t r ansmi ssi on r ange swi t ch
An open in t he wi r e bet ween t he PCM
and t he t r ansmi ssi on r ange swi t ch
PCM and t he t r ansmi ssi on range swi t ch
o Poor gr ound G101
Cr ui se cont rol
mai n swi t c h
si gnal
Cr ui se cont rol mai n
button pr essed and
r el eased
CRUI S E MASTER
(MAIN) S W shoul d
i ndi cat e ON when t he
c r ui se cont rol mai n
button i s pr essed and
OFF when t he c r ui se
cont rol mai n button i s
r el eased.
o Faul t y c r ui se cont rol mai n swi t ch
An open in t he wi r e bet ween t he gauge
cont rol modul e and t he c r ui se cont rol
mai n swi t ch
gauge cont rol modul e and t he c r ui se
cont rol mai n swi t ch
An open i n t he wi r e bet ween t he cr ui se
cont rol combi nat i on swi t ch and t he
gr ound G501
Set swi t ch
si gnal
Set /decel button
pr essed and r el eased
CRUI S E S E T S W
when t he set /decel
OFF when t he set /decel
button i s r el eased.
o Faul t y cr ui se cont rol combi nat i on swi t ch
combi nat i on swi t ch
cont rol combi nat i on swi t ch
Resume
swi t c h si gnal
Resume/ac c el button
CRUI S E RES UME S W
when t he r esume/ac c el
OFF when t he
r el eased.
o f aul t y cr ui se cont rol combi nat i on swi t ch
(cont' d)
4-43
Cr ui se Control
Cr ui se Cont rol Input Test (cont' d)
Si gnal t o be
t est ed
Tes t condi t i on Par amet er : Desi r ed
r esul t
Possi bl e c aus e if r esul t i s not obt ai ned
Canc el swi t c h
si gnal
Canc el button
CRUI S E CANCEL S W
when t he c anc el button
i s pr essed and OFF
when t he c anc el button
i s r el eased.
^ j l t y c r ui se cont roi combi nat i on swi t ch
An open i n t he wi r e bet ween t he gauge
cont rol modul e and t he cr ui se cont rol
Cr ui se cont r ol
i ndi cat or
si gnal
St ar t t he engi ne,
pr ess t he c r ui se
cont rol mai n button
on, and dr i ve t he
vehi c l e to speeds
over 25 mph
(40 km/h). Set and
c anc el t he c r ui se
cont r ol .
CRUI S E INDICATOR
when t he c r ui se cont rol
i s set and OFF when t he
c r ui se cont r ol i s
c anc el ed.
Faul t y gauge cont rol modul e
Faul t y c r ui se cont rol combi nat i on swi t ch
An open i n t he wi r e bet ween t he gauge
4-44
Cruise Control Combination Switch
Test/Replacement
S RS c omponent s ar e l ocat ed in t hi s ar ea. Revi ew t he
S RS component l ocat i ons:
2-door f see page 24-23)
4-door (see page 24-21)
Pr ecaut i ons and pr ocedur es (see page 24-25), i n t he S RS
before doi ng repai rs or ser vi c e.
1. Remove t he dr i ver ' s ai r bag (see page 24-211).
2. Di sconnect t he cabl e reel subhar ness 20P connect or .
Wire side of
- female terminals
3. Check f or cont i nui t y bet ween t he t er mi nal s in each
cr ui se cont rol combi nat i on swi t ch posi t i on accor di ng
to t he t abl e.
If t her e i s cont i nui t y, and it mat ches t he t abl e, but
t he c r ui se cont rol combi nat i on swi t ch f ai l ure
occur r ed on t he c r ui se cont rol i nput t est , check and
repai r t he wi r e har ness on t he swi t ch ci rcui t .
If t here i s no cont i nui t y in one or both posi t i ons,
r epl ace t he c r ui se cont rol combi nat i on swi t ch (see
page 17-7).
Cl ut ch Pedal Posi ti on Switc.
M/T model
1. Di sc onnec t t he cl ut ch pedal posi t i on swi t ch 3P
c onnec t or (A).
Terminal side of
male terminals
2. Remove t he cl ut ch pedal posi t i on swi t ch (B).
3. Chec k f or cont i nui t y bet ween t he t er mi nal s accor di ng
to t he t abl e.
If t he cont i nui t y i s not as spec i f i ed, r epl ace t he
cl ut ch pedal posi t i on swi t ch (see page 4-46).
If OK, i nst al l t he cl ut ch pedal posi t i on swi t c h and
adj ust t he pedal hei ght (see page 12-7).
\ Ter mi nal
Posi t i on \
1 2 3
( PRES S ED) o- -o
( REL EAS ED)
\ Terminal
Position \
3 4 8 9 10 11 12
Cruise control
main (ON)
r\
A Cruise control
main (ON)
K J
Cruise control
main (OFF)
Set/decel
(PRESSED)
r\ Set/decel
(PRESSED)
Resume/accel
(PRESSED)
Resume/accel
(PRESSED)
CANCEL
(PRESSED)
r\
CANCEL
(PRESSED)
a
-w
J
Combination
light switch
(SMALL)
a - o
4-45
Crui se Control
Clutch Pedal Position Switch Replacement
M/T model
1 Di sc onnec t t he cl ut ch pedal posi t i on swi t c h c onnec t or
(A).
2. L oosen t he l ocknut (B), t hen r emove t he cl ut ch pedal
posi t i on swi t ch (C).
3. Inst al l t he cl ut ch pedal posi t i on swi t c h, and adj ust t he
pedal hei ght (see page 12-7).
4-46
Engi ne Mount Control Syst em
ENGI NE MOUNT CONTROL
S OL ENOI D VA L VE
Troubleshooting, page 4-49
ENGI NE CONTROL MODUL E ( ECM) /
POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODUL E (PCM)
FRONT ENGI NE MOUNT
4-47
Ci rcui t Di agram
No. 1-1 (100 A)
C T X j O
No. 3-1 (50 A)
C T X j O
F16
DRI VER' S
UNDER-DASH
F USE/RELAY
BOX
C1
( B A T \ IGNITION
IG1 / S WI TCH
Q
IG1 HOT i n ON (II)
and S TA RT (III)
B L U
C5
DRI VER' S
1 No. 7 UNDE R- DAS H
C (15 A)
F US E / RE L A Y
B OX
F14
B L K / RE D
22
C101
17
B L K / YE L
2
ENGI NE MOUNT
CONTROL S OL E NOI D
VA L VE
4-48
Troubleshooting
Vac uum Pump/Gauge, 030 i nHg Snap-on YA4000A or
equi val ent c ommer c i al l y avai l abl e
NOTE:
Chec k t he vac uum hoses and t he l i nes for damage and
pr oper connect i ons bef ore t r oubl eshoot i ng.
Chec k t he li qui d f i l l ed engi ne mount for damage. The
r ubber mount shoul d have di mpl es in it. Thi s i s
nor mal . If t he i nt ernal bl adder r upt ur es, t he rubber
mount l ooks like it i s bul gi ng, r epl ace it (see page
5-23).
Fol l ow t hi s pr ocedur e if t he engi ne vi br at es exc essi vel y
when i dl i ng.
1. Chec k t he i dle speed (see page 11-292).
2. Rai se t he engi ne speed f r om i dl i ng to 2,000 r pm.
3. Chec k t he MOUNT CTRL S OL in t he PGM-FI DATA
L I ST wi t h t he Honda Di agnost i c Sy s t em (HDS).
Is ON indicated at idling and OFF indicated at
2,000 rpm?
NO-Updat e t he engi ne cont rol modul e (ECM)/
power t r ai n cont rol modul e (PCM) if it does not have
t he l at est sof t ware (see page 11-203), or subst i t ut e a
If t he engi ne mount cont rol syst em wor ks pr oper l y,
and t he ECM/ PCM was updat ed, t he t r oubl eshoot i ng
i s compl et e. If t he ECM/ PCM was subst i t ut ed, r epl ace
t he ori gi nal ECM/ PCM (see page 11-204).B
5. Di sc onnec t t he engi ne mount cont rol sol enoi d val ve
2P connect or f r om t he engi ne mount cont rol sol enoi d
val ve.
7. Measur e t he vol t age bet ween engi ne mount cont rol
sol enoi d val ve 2P connect or t er mi nal No. 2 and body
gr ound.
S OL ENOI D VA L VE 2P CONNECTOR
1 2
1G1
( BL K / YEL )
Wire side of ft male terminals
Is there battery voltage?
NO-Repai r open i n t he wi r e bet ween engi ne mount
cont rol sol enoi d val ve 2P connect or t er mi nal No. 2
and t he No. 7 (15 A) f use in t he dr i ver ' s under -dash
f use/r el ay box . H
8. St ar t t he engi ne, and let it i dl e.
(cont ' d)
4-49
Troubleshooting (cont'd)
sol enoi d val ve 2P connect or t er mi nal s No. 1 and No. 2
wi t h t he engi ne at i dl e.
S OL ENOI D VA L VE 2P CONNECTOR
MCS
( BL U/ YEL )
1 2
IG1
( BL K / YEL )
NO-Repai r open i n t he wi r e bet ween ECM/ PCM
connect or t er mi nal C40 and engi ne mount cont rol
sol enoi d val ve 2P connect or t er mi nal No. 1. If t he wi r e
i s OK, updat e t he ECM/ PCM if it does not have t he
known-good ECM/ PCM (see page 11-7), and r echeck.
If t he engi ne mount cont rol syst em wor ks pr oper l y,
and t he ECM/ PCM was updat ed, t he t r oubl eshoot i ng
i s compl et e. If t he ECM/ PCM was subst i t ut ed, r epl ace
t he ori gi nal ECM/ PCM (see page 11-204).B
10. Rai se t he engi ne speed above 2,000 r pm.
sol enoi d val ve 2P connect or t er mi nal s No. 1 and
No. 2.
S OL ENOI D VAL VE 2P CONNECTOR
MCS
( BL U/ YEL )
IG1
( BL K / YEL )
YES - Repai r shor t to body gr ound in t he wi r e bet ween
ECM/ PCM connect or t er mi nal C40 and engi ne mount
cont rol sol enoi d val ve 2P connect or t er mi nal No. 1. If
t he wi r e i s OK, updat e t he ECM/ PCM if it does not
have t he l at est sof t war e (see page 11-203), or
subst i t ut e a known-good ECM/ PCM (see page 11-7),
and r echeck. If t he engi ne mount cont rol syst em
wor ks pr oper l y, and t he ECM/ PCM was updat ed, t he
t r oubl eshoot i ng i s compl et e. If t he ECM/ PCM was
subst i t ut ed, r epl ace t he ori gi nal ECM/ PCM (see page
11-204).B
NO- Go to st ep 12.
12. Tur n t he i gni ti on swi t ch to LOCK (0).
4-50
13. Di sconnect t he upper v ac uum hose (A) f r om t he
engi ne mount cont rol sol enoi d val ve (B), and connect
a vac uum pump/gauge, 030 i n Hg, to t he hose.
Appl y about 20 i n Hg of v ac uum, and wai t 20 sec onds.
Does the engine mount hold vacuum?
NO-Ei t her t he vac uum hose or t he engi ne mount has
a vac uum l eak. Repai r as n e e d e d . !
14. St art t he engi ne and let it i dl e.
15. Rel ease t he vac uum, t hen appl y v ac uum agai n.
Is there a noticeable change in idle smoothness with and
without vacuum applied?
NO-Repl ac e the front engi ne mount (see page
5-23).B
16. Connec t a vac uum pump/gauge, 030 i n Hg, to t he
vac uum hose (A).
Is there manifold vacuum at idle, and a decrease in
manifold vacuum when you raise the engine speed
above 2,000 rpm?
YE S - Th e syst em i s OK .B
NO-Repai r t he vac uum hose (B) bet ween t he i nt ake
mani f ol d and t he engi ne mount cont rol sol enoi d
val ve. If t he vac uum i s OK , r epl ace t he engi ne mount
cont rol sol enoi d v al v e.B
4-51
Engine Mechanical
Cyl i nder Head
Al l Model s Except PZEV 6-1
PZEV Model 6-49
Engi ne Block 7-1
Engi ne Lubri cat i on 8-1
Intake Mani fold and Exhaust Syst em 9-1
.Engine Mechanical
i ngi ne Assembl f
Special Tool s. ... .5-2
Engine Removal 5-3
Engine Installation .5-12
Engine Mount Replacement 5-23
Engi ne Assembl y
Speci al Tool s

(D
070AG-SJ AA10S
07AAIOSNAA120
Subf r ame Al i gnment Pi n
Uni ver sal Li fti ng Eyel et
1
1

5-2
Engine Removal
. Uni ver sal Li fti ng Eyel et 07AAK -SNAA120
Engi ne Hanger Adapt er VSB02C000015*
Engi ne Suppor t Hanger , A and Reds AAR-T1256*
Subf r ame Adapt er VSB02C000016*
*Avai l abl e t hr ough t he Honda Tool and
Equi pment Pr ogr am, 888-424-6857
NOTE:
Use f ender c over s t o avoi d damagi ng pai nt ed
sur f ac es.
To avoi d damagi ng t he wi r i ng and t er mi nal s, unpl ug
t he wi r i ng c onnec t or s caref ul l y whi l e hol di ng t he
connect or port i on.
Mark all wi r i ng and hos es to avoi d mi sc onnec t i on.
Al so, be sur e t hat t hey do not cont act ot her wi r i ng or
hoses, or i nt erf ere wi t h ot her par t s.
1. Remove t he hood suppor t r od, t hen use it as shown to
prop t he hood i n t he wi de-open posi t i on.
2. Remove t he front gri l l e cover :
3. Remove t he st rut br ace (if equi pped) (see page
20-306).
4. Rel i eve t he f uel pr essur e (see page 11-306).
5. Do t he battery r emoval pr ocedur e (see page 22-92).
6. Remove t he i ntake ai r duct (see st ep 2 on page 10-12).
7. Remove t he ai r c l eaner assembl y (see page 11-332).
8. Remove t he har ness c l amps (A), t hen r emove t he
battery base (B).
11. Di sc onnec t t he har ness connect or (B), and r emove
t he har ness connect or f rom t he bracket (C).
(cont' d)
5-3
Engi ne Assembl y
Engine Removal (cont'd)
12. Remove t he engi ne cont r ol modul e (ECM)/power t r ai n
cont rol modul e (PCM) c over (A), t hen r emove t he
t hr ee bol t s (B) sec ur i ng t he ECM/ PCM.
13. Di sc onnec t t he ECM/ PCM c onnec t or s (A) and t he
engi ne wi r e har ness connect or (B).
14. Remove t he har ness c l amps (C) and t he bracket (D).
15. Di sconnect t he evapor at i ve emi ssi on (EVAP) cani st er
hose (A) and t he brake boost er vac uum hose (B).
16. Remove t he qui ck-connect fi tti ng c over (A), t hen
di sc onnec t t he f uel f eed hose (B) (see page 11-314).
5-4
18. Remove t he power st eer i ng (P/S) pump (A) wi t hout
di sconnect i ng t he P/S hos es , and t he P/S hose bracket
(B).
A
19. Wai t unti l t he engi ne i s c ool , t hen car ef ul l y r emove
t he radi at or c ap.
20. Remove t he A/ C c ondenser f an shr oud assembl y (see
page 10-13).
21. M/T model : Remove t he t hr ee bol t s sec ur i ng t he shi ft
cabl e hol der , t hen r emove t he shi f t cabl e and t he
sel ect c abl e. Do not bend t he c abl es exc essi vel y.
22. M/T model : Remove t he cl ut ch sl ave cyl i nder and t he
cl ut ch li ne bracket mount i ng nut. Do not oper at e t he
cl ut ch pedal onc e t he sl ave cyl i nder has been
r emoved (see st ep 6 on page 13-7).
23. Rai se t he vehi c l e on t he lift.
24. Remove t he f ront wheel s.
25. Remove t he spl ash shi el d.
26. Loosen t he dr ai n pl ug in t he radi at or, and dr ai n t he
engi ne cool ant (see page 10-6).
27. Dr ai n t he engi ne oi l (see page 8-11).
28. Dr ai n t he t r ansmi ssi on f l ui d:
Manual t r ansmi ssi on (see page 13-5)
Aut omat i c t r ansmi ssi on (see page 14-192)
29. Remove exhaust pi pe A.
(cont ' d)
5-5
Engi ne Assembl y
Engine Removal (cont' d)
30. A/ T model : Remove t he shi ft c abl e. Do not bend t he
shi f t cabl e exc essi vel y:
Vehi c l es wi t h J HM VINs (see st ep 46 on page
14-200).
Vehi c l es wi t h 1HG VINs (see st ep 48 on page
14-200).
31. Remove t he damper fork (see page 18-31).
32. Separ at e t he knuckl es f r om t he l ower ar ms (see st ep
11 on page 18-15).
33. Remove t he dr i veshaf t s (see page 16-4). Coat al l
pr eci si on-f i ni shed sur f ac es wi t h new engi ne oi l . Ti e a
pl ast i c bag over t he dr i veshaf t ends.
34. Remove t he bolt (A) sec ur i ng t he P/S f l ui d l i ne
br ac ket and unc l amp t he P/S f l ui d l i ne c l amp (B) on
t he f ront subf r ame.
A i
35. Remove t he bolts sec ur i ng t he st eer i ng gear box
mount i ng bracket (A) and t he heat shi el d (B). (ri ght
si de)
5-6
38. Remove t he bol t s sec ur i ng t he st eer i ng gear box
st i f f eners (A) and t he was her s (B). (left si de)
40. Di sconnect t he heat er hoses (A) and t he upper
radi at or hose (B).
(cont ' d)
5-7
Engi ne Assembl y
43. Inst al l t he engi ne suppor t hanger (AAR-T1256), t hen 46. M/T model : Remove t he r ear engi ne mount ,
at t ach t he hook t o t he sl ot t ed hol e i n t he engi ne
44. Di sc onnec t t he vac uum hose (A) and r emove t he front
engi ne mount st op (B), t hen r emove t he front engi ne 47. A/ T model : Remove t he rear engi ne mount (A), t hen
mount bolt (C). r emove t he rear engi ne mount upper bracket (B).
5-8
49. Remove t he nut s sec ur i ng t he l ower t r ansmi ssi on
mount .
50. Di sc onnec t t he A/ C c ompr essor cl ut ch connect or (A),
t hen r emove t he A/ C c ompr essor (B) wi t hout
di sconnect i ng t he A/ C hoses. Do not bend t he A/ C
hoses exc essi vel y.
51. Remove t he subf r ame mi ddl e mount s.
52. At t ach t he subf r ame adapt er (VSB02C000016) to t he
subf r ame by l oopi ng t he belt (A) over t he front
subf r ame (B), t hen sec ur e t he belt wi t h its st op (C).
VSB02C000016
53. Rai se t he j ack and li ne up t he sl ot s in t he subf r ame
adapt er ar ms wi t h t he bolt hol es on t he j ack base,
t hen sec ur el y at t ach t hem wi t h f our bol t s.
(cont' d)
5-9
Engi ne Assembl y
54. Remove t he f ront subf r ame mount i ng bol t s (A), t he
f our 12 x 1.25 mm bol t s (B),(C) sec ur i ng f our st i f f ener s
(D), t hen l ower t he f ront subf r ame (E).
A
Replace.
55. Lower t he vehi c l e on t he lift.
56. Remove t he gr ound c abl e (A).
57. Remove t he si de engi ne mount bracket (B).
58. Inst al l t he uni ver sal lifting eyel et (07AAK-SNAA120).
07AAK-SNAA120
59. At t ach a chai n hoi st (A) to t he uni ver sal lifting eyel et
(B) and t he t r ansmi ssi on hook (C), t hen lift t he engi ne/
t r ansmi ssi on unti l it i s sec ur el y suppor t ed by t he
c hai n hoi st , and r emove t he engi ne suppor t hanger .
A/T model
M/T model
5-10
u
J iv, ooco ^.
60. Remove t he upper t r ansmi ssi on mount bracket
mount i ng bolts (A).
NOTE: Do not r emove t he TORX bolt (B) f rom t he
upper t r ansmi ssi on mount . If t he TORX bolt i s
r emoved, t he upper t r ansmi ssi on mount must be
r epl aced as an assembl y.
M/ T model
A
Replace
A / T model
Repl
61. Remove t he gr ound c abl e (C).
62. Chec k t hat t he engi ne/t r ansmi ssi on i s compl et el y f ree
of t he v ac uum hos es , t he f uel hoses, t he cool ant
hos es , and t he el ect r i cal wi r i ng.
63. Sl owl y l ower t he engi ne/t r ansmi ssi on about 150 mm
(6 i n). Chec k onc e agai n t hat all t he hoses and t he
el ect r i cal wi r i ng ar e di sc onnec t ed and f r ee f r om t he
engi ne/t r ansmi ssi on, t hen l ower it all t he way.
64. Di sc onnec t t he c hai n hoi st f r om t he engi ne/
t r ansmi ssi on.
65. Rai se t he vehi c l e, and r emove t he
engi ne/t r ansmi ssi on f r om under t he vehi c l e.
5-11
Engi ne Assembl y
Engine Installation
Uni ver sal Li fti ng Eyel et 07AAK -SNAA120
. Engi ne Hanger Adapt er VSB02C000015*
Engi ne Suppor t Hanger , A and Reds AAR-T-1256*
. Subf r ame Adapt er VSB02C000016*
. Subf r ame Al i gnment Pi n 070AG-SJ AA10S
Avai l abl e t hr ough t he Honda Tool and Equi pment Pr ogr am, 888-424-6857
1. Inst al l t he engi ne mount bracket s and t he ac c essor y br acket s, and t i ght en t hei r bol t s to t he speci f i ed t or que.
REAR ENGI NE
MOUNT BRACK ET (A/ T model)
A / C COMPRES S OR BRACK ET
5 12
2. Rai se t he vehi c l e on t he lift, and posi t i on t he engi ne/
t r ansmi ssi on under t he vehi c l e. Lower t he vehi c l e,
and at t ach t he uni ver sal lifting eyel et
(07AAK-SNAA120) and t he c hai n hoi st t o t he
uni ver sal lifting eyel et and t he t r ansmi ssi on hook,
t hen lift t he engi ne i nto posi t i on i n t he vehi c l e.
NOTE: Rei nst al l t he mount i ng bol t s and t he suppor t
nut s i n t he sequenc e gi ven i n t he f ol l owi ng st eps.
Fai l ur e to f ol l ow t hi s sequenc e may c aus e exc essi ve
noi se and vi br at i on, and r educe engi ne mount li fe.
A/ T model
M/T model
3. At t ach t he engi ne hanger adapt er (VSB02C000015) to
t he t hr eaded hol e in t he cyl i nder head.
VSB02C000015
4. Inst al l t he engi ne suppor t hanger (AAR-T1256), t hen
at t ach t he hook to t he sl ot t ed hol e i n t he engi ne
hanger adapt er. Ti ght en t he wi ng nut (A) by hand to
lift and suppor t t he engi ne/t r ansmi ssi on.
NOTE: Be caref ul when wor ki ng ar ound t he
wi ndshi el d.
(cont ' d)
5-13
Engi ne Assembl y
Engine installation (cont' d)
5. Ti ght en t he new upper t r ansmi ssi on mount bracket
mount i ng bol t s (A) to t he speci f i ed t or que.
M/T model
(1.2 k g f m, 8.7 ibf-ft)
6. Install t he gr ound c abl e (B).
7. Remove t he c hai n hoi st .
8. Remove t he uni ver sal lifting eyel et .
9. Install t he si de engi ne mount bracket (A), t hen t i ght en
t he new si de engi ne mount bracket mount i ng bolts
(B).
12 x 1.25 mm
64 N-m (6.5 k g f m, 47 Ibf-ft)
10. Inst al l t he gr ound cabl e (C).
5-14
12. Sppor t t he front subf r ame (A) wi t h t he subf r ame
adapt er (VSB02C000016) and a j ac k, r ai se t he front
subf r ame up to t he body.
C D B
12x 1. 25 mm 12 m 1.25 mm 14x 1. 5 mm
54 N-m 93 N-m 103 N-m
(5.5 k g f m, (9.5 k g f m, 69 Ibf-ft) (10.5 k g f m, 75.9 Ibf-ft)
40 Ibf-ft) Repl ac e. Repl ac e.
13. Loosel y i nst al l t he new front subf r ame mount i ng
bol t s (four) (B), t he 12 x 1.25 mm bol t s (four) (C) (D),
and t he st i f f eners (four) (E).
14. Install t he subf r ame mi ddl e mount (A), t hen l oosel y
t i ght en t he new subf r me mi ddl e mount mount i ng
bol t s (B).
15. Remove t he j ack and t he subf r ame adapt er.
16. Insert t he subf r ame al i gnment pi n (070AG-SJAA1 OS)
t hr ough t he posi t i oni ng sl ot (A) on t he right r ear
st i f f ener, t hr ough t he posi t i oni ng hol e (B) on t he
subf r ame, and i nto t he posi t i oni ng hol e (C) on t he
body, t hen l oosel y t i ght en t he subf r ame ri ght r ear
mount i ng bolt.
070AG- S J AA10S
NOTE: Us e 15.7 mm si de.
17. Insert t he subf r ame al i gnment pi n t hr ough t he
posi t i oni ng sl ot on t he left rear st i f f ener, t hr ough t he
posi t i oni ng hol e on t he subf r ame, and into t he
posi t i oni ng hol e on t he body, t hen l oosel y ti ghten t he
subf r ame left r ear mount i ng bolt.
18. Wi t h t he subf r ame al i gnment pi n i n pl ace, t i ght en t he
subf r ame ri ght rear mount i ng bolt.
19. Wi t h t he subf r ame al i gnment pi n i n pl ace, t i ght en t he
subf r ame left r ear mount i ng bolt.
20. Ti ght en t he st i f f ener mount i ng bol t s to t he speci f i ed
t or que.
21. Ti ght en t he f ront and rear subf r ame mount i ng bol t s to
t he speci f i ed t or que.
22. Chec k that t he posi t i oni ng sl ot s on t he right/left r ear
st i f f ener, t he posi t i oni ng hol es on t he subf r ame, and
t he posi t i oni ng hol es on t he body ar e al i gned usi ng
t he subf r ame al i gnment pi n.
(cont' d)
5-15
Engi ne Assembl y
Engi ne Inst al l at i on (cont'd)
23. Ti ght en t he bol t s sec ur i ng t he subf r ame mi ddl e
mount s.
24. Ti ght en t he nut s sec ur i ng t he l ower t r ansmi ssi on
mount .
10 x 1.2S mm
44 N-m (4.5 kgf-m, 33 Ibfft)
26. Remove t he engi ne suppor t hanger and t he engi ne
hanger adapt er .
27. Ti ght en t he new front engi ne mount bolt (A), t hen
i nst al l t he front engi ne mount st op (B) and connect
t he vac uum hose (C).
28. A/ T model : Install t he aut omat i c t r ansmi ssi on f l ui d
(ATF) c ool er li ne br acket s (D).
29. M/T model : Install t he rear engi ne mount (A),then
t i ght en t he new rear engi ne mount mount i ng bol t s i n
t he number ed sequenc e s hown.
5-16
30. A/ T model : Inst al l t he rear engi ne mount upper
bracket (A). Inst al l t he rear engi ne mount (B), t hen
ti ghten t he new rear engi ne mount mount i ng bolts in
t he number ed sequenc e shown.
12 x 1.25 mm
54 N
(5.5 kgf
Replace
1 0 x 1 . 2 5 mm
m
k g f m,
ft)
ace.
31 Loosen t he mount i ng bolts f or t he si de engi ne mount
bracket , t hen ret i ght en t he bol t s i n t he number ed
sequenc e shown.
x 1.25 mm
N-m
5 kgf -m,
Ibf-ft)
Replace.
(I 12x 1. 25 mm
64 N m (6.5 k g f m, 47 Ibf-ft)
32. Loosen t he mount i ng bolts for t he upper t r ansmi ssi on
mount bracket , t hen reti ghten t hem to t he speci f i ed
t or que.
M/T model
12 x 1.25 mm
59 N-m , . / /
(6.0 k g f m, 43 Ibf-ft) \j ^>
A / T model
12 x 1.25 mm
59 N-m (6.0 kgf -m, 43 Ibf-ft)
Icont ' d)
5-17
Engi ne Assembl y
Engine Installation (cont'd)
33. Connec t t he qui ck connect or to t he t her most at c over
(see st ep 11 on page 10-8).
34. Connec t t he heat er hoses (A) and t he upper radi at or
hose (B).
35. A/ T model ; Connec t t he ATF cool er hoses (A), and
sec ur e t he hoses wi t h t he cl i ps (B) (see page 14-220).
B A
B A
36. Inst al l t he bol t s sec ur i ng t he st eer i ng gear box
st i f f eners (A) and t he washer s (B). (left si de)
10 x 1.25 mm
59 N-m (6.0 kgf -m, 43 ibf-ft)
37. Inst al l t he t wo bolts (A) sec ur i ng t he power st eer i ng
(P/S) f l ui d l i ne br acket s.
5-18
39. Inst al l t he bolts sec ur i ng t he st eer i ng gear box
mount i ng bracket (A) and t he heat shi el d (B). (ri ght
si de)
A
40. Install t he P/S f l ui d li ne bracket (A)
r
and sec ur e t he
hose wi t h t he hose cl amp (B).
Sic 1.0 mm
12 Nm (1.2 kgf m, 8.7 Ibfft) B
41. Inst al l t he A/ C c ompr essor (A), t hen c onnec t t he A/ C
c ompr essor cl ut ch connect or (B).
42. Inst al l a new set ri ng on t he end of eac h dr i veshaf t ,
t hen i nst al l t he dr i veshaf t s (see page 16-19). Make
sur e eac h ri ng " c l i c k s " into pl ace in t he di fferenti al
and t he i nt er medi at e shaf t .
43. Connec t t he l ower ar ms to t he knuckl es (see st ep 5 on
page 18-21).
44. Inst al l t he damper fork (see st ep 3 on page 18-21).
45. A/ T model : i nst al l t he shi ft cabl e. Do not bend t he shi ft
c abl e exc essi vel y:
14-209).
Vehi c l es wi t h 1HG VINs (see st ep 36 on page
14-210).
(cont' d)
5-19
Engi ne Assembl y
Engine Installation (cont' d)
46. Install exhaust pi pe A usi ng new gasket s (B) and new
sel f -l ocki ng nut s (C).
8x 1. 25 mm (3.4 kgf -m, 24 Ibf-ft)
22 N-m. (2.2 kgf -m, 16 Ibf-ft) Replace.
47. Inst al l t he spl ash shi el d.
48. Inst al l t he front wheel s.
50. M/T model : Install t he cl ut ch sl ave cyl i nder and t he
cl ut ch li ne bracket mount i ng nut (see st ep 49 on page
13-23).
51. M/T model : Install t he shi ft cabl e and t he sel ect c abl e,
t hen t i ght en t he t hr ee bol t s secur i ng t he shi ft cabl e
hol der. Do not bend t he c abl es exc essi vel y (see st ep
47 on page 13-22).
52. Inst al l t he A/ C c ondenser f an shr oud assembl y (see
page 10-15).
53. Install t he P/S pump (A), and t he P/S hose bracket (B).
10 x 1.25 mm
44 N-m (4.5 k g f m, 33 Ibf-ft)
54. Install t he dr i ve belt (see page 4-30).
5-20
55. Connec t t he f uel f eed hose (A) (see page 11-316), t hen
i nst al l t he qui ck-connect fi tti ng cover (B).
56. Connec t t he evapor at i ve emi ssi on (EVAP) c ani st er
57. Connec t t he engi ne cont r ol modul e (ECM)/power t r ai n
cont rol modul e (PCM) c onnec t or s (A) and t he engi ne
wi r e har ness connect or (B).
6x 1.0 mm
Ibfft)
58. Inst al l t he har ness c l amps (C) and t he bracket (D).
59. Install t he ECM/ PCM (A), t hen i nst al l t he ECM/ PCM
c over (B).
6x 1.0 mm
1.2 N-m (1.2 kgf-m, 8.7 Ibfft)
(cont' d)
5-21
Engi ne Assembl y
Engine installation (cont' d)
80. Connec t t he battery c abl es (A) to t he under -hood f use/
rel ay box.
61. Connec t t he har ness connect or (B), and Install t he
har ness connect or to t he bracket (C).
62. Install t he wat er separ at or (see st ep 10 on page 9-8).
63. Install t he battery base (A), t hen i nst al l t he har ness
c l amps (B).
64. Install t he ai r c l eaner assembl y (see page 11-332).
65. Install t he i ntake ai r duct (see st ep 2 on page 10-12).
66. Install t he st rut br ace (if equi pped) (see page 20-306).
67. i nst al l t he front gri l l e cover :
69. Inspect f or f uel l eaks. Tur n t he i gni ti on swi t ch to ON
(II) (do not oper at e t he st art er) so t he f uel pump r uns
f or about 2 sec onds and pr essur i zes t he f uel l i ne.
Repeat t hi s oper at i on t hr ee t i mes, t hen check f or f uel
l eakage at any poi nt in t he f uel l i ne.
70. Refi ll t he engi ne wi t h t he r ec ommended engi ne oi l
(see page 8-11).
71. Refi ll t he t r ansmi ssi on wi t h f l ui d:
72. A/ T model : Move t he shi ft l ever to eac h gear , and
veri f y that t he A/ T gear posi t i on i ndi cat or f ol l ows t he
t r ansmi ssi on r ange swi t c h.
73. M/T model : Chec k that t he t r ansmi ssi on shi f t s i nto all
gear s smoot hl y.
74. Refi ll t he radi at or wi t h engi ne cool ant , and bl eed t he
ai r f r om t he cool i ng syst em (see st ep 5 on page 10-6).
75. Do t he ECM/ PCM r eset pr ocedur e (see page 11-4).
76. Do t he ECM/ PCM i dle l earn pr ocedur e (see page
11-293).
77. Do t he cr ankshaf t posi t i on (CKP) pattern c l ear /CKP
pattern l ear n pr ocedur e (see page 11-5).
78. Inspect t he i dle speed (see page 11-292).
79. Inspect t he i gni t i on t i mi ng (see page 4-19).
80. Chec k t he wheel al i gnment (see page 18-5).
5-22
_5Z3_
Engine Mount Replacement
12 x 1 25 mm
64 N-m
(6.5 k g f m, 47 ibf-ft)
10 x 1.25 mm
54 N-m (5.5 kgf -m, 40 ibf-ft)
Replace.
REAR ENGI NE MOUNT ( A/ T model )
10 x 1.25 mm
54 N-m
(5.5 kgf -m, 40 Ibf-ft)
REAR ENGI NE MOUNT (M/ T model )
12 x 1.25 mm
64 N-m (6.5 kgf -m, 47 Ibf-ft)
Replace.
FRONT ENGI NE MOUNT
10x 1
64 N-m
(6.5 kgf
Replace,
L OWER TRANSMISSI*
MOUNT (A/ T model )
12 x 1.25 mm
78 N-m
(8.0 k g f m, 58 Ibf-ft)
Replace.
UPPER TRANS MI S S I ON
MOUNT (A/ T model )
10 x 1.25 mm
54 N-m
(5.5 kgf -m, 40 Ibf-ft)
Replace.
10 x 1.25 mm
54 N-m (5.5 k g f m, 40 Ibf-ft)
Replace.
Do not remove.
10 x 1.25 mm
54 N-m
(5.5 kgf -m, 40 Ibf-ft)
Replace.
not remove.
UPPER TRANS MI S S I ON
MOUNT (M/ T model )
10 x 1.25 mm
L OWER TRANS MI S S I ON 54 N-m (5.5 k g f m, 40 Ibf f t )
MOUNT (M/T model ) Replace.
5-23
Cylinder Head -Al l Models Except PZEV
Cyl i nder Head
S pec i al To o l s ...6-2
Co mpo nent L oc at i on I ndex . . . . . .....6- 3
Engi ne Co mpr es s i o n Inspec t i on 6-6
VTE C Roc ker Ar m Tes t ..6-7
VTC Ac t uat or Inspec t i on 6-8
Val v e Cl ear anc e Adj us t ment . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
Cr ankshaf t Pul l ey Remo v al and I nst al l at i on. ...6- 12
Cam Chai n Remo v al 6-13
Cam Chai n Inst al l at i on. .. ....6-15
Cam Chai n Aut o-t ens i oner Remov al and Inst al l at i on. 6-20
Cam Chai n Cas e Oi l S eal Inst al l at i on 6-22
Cam Chai n I ns pec t i on. 6-23
Cy l i nder Head Co v er Remov al 6-24
Cy l i nder Head Co v er Inst al l at i on 6-25
Cy l i nder Head Remov al 6-27
CMP Pul se Pl at e A Repl ac ement . 6-29
CMP Pul s e Pl at e B Repl ac ement . 6-30
VTC Ac t uat or , Ex h aus t Cams h af t Spr oc k et
Repl ac ement 6-30
Cy l i nder Head Inspec t i on f or War pag e 6-31
Roc k er Ar m As s emb l y Remo v al . 6-32
Roc ker Ar m and Shaf t Di s as s emb l y / Reas s emb l y . ....6-33
Roc ker Ar m and Shaf t Inspec t i on 6-34
Cams haf t Inspec t i on 6-35
Val v e, S pr i ng , and Val v e S eal Remo v al 6-37
Val v e Inspec t i on 6-38
Val v e S t em-t o-Gui de Cl ear anc e Inspec t i on ...6-38
Val v e Gui de Repl ac ement . 6-39
Val v e S eat Rec ondi t i oni ng . 6-41
Val v e, S pr i ng , and Val v e S eal Inst al l at i on 6-42
Roc ker Ar m As s emb l y Inst al l at i on 6-43
Cy l i nder Head Inst al l at i on 6-44
S eal i ng Bol t Inst al l at i on .6-48
Cyli nder Head
Spec i al Tool s

07742-0010100 Val ve Gui de Dr i ver , 5.35 x 9.7 mm 1

07746-0010400 At t achment , 52 x 55 mm 1
07749-0010000 Dri ver Handl e, 15 x 135L 1

07757-PJ1010A Val ve Spr i ng Compr essor At t achment 1
07AAB-RJAA100 Cr ankshaf t Pul l ey Hol der 1

07AAB-RWCA120 Camshaf t Lock Pi n Set 1
07AAJ-PNAA101 Ai r Pr essur e Regul at or 1

07AAJ-RWCA100 Cam Chai n Inspect i on Gauge 1

07HAH-PJ7A100 Val ve Gui de Reamer , 5.5 mm 1
07JAA-001020A Soc ket , 19 mm 1
07JAB-001020B Handl e, 6-25-660L 1

07MAA-PR70110 Adj ust er 1
07MAA-PR70120 Locknut Wr enc h 1
07PAD-0010000 St em Seal Dr i ver , 30 mm 1
07ZAJ-PNAA101 VTEC Ai r Adapt er
07ZAJ-PNAA200 VTEC Ai r St opper 1
07ZAJ-PNAA300 Ai r Joi nt Adapt er 1

IGNITION COIL COVER
CYLINDER HEAD COVER
Removal , page 6-24
Inst al l at i on, page 6-25
CAM CHAIN
Removal , page 6-13
Inspect i on, page 6-23
CAM CHAIN GUIDE B
CAM CHAIN GUIDE A
O-RING
VARIABLE VALVE
TIMING CONTROL
(VTC) OIL CONTROL
SOLENOID VALVE
TENSIONER ARM
CRANKSHAFT PULLEY
Removal and
Installation, page 6-12
CAM CHAIN AUTO-TENSIONER
Removal and Inst al l at i on, page 6-20 O-RING
CHAIN CASE
Oi l Seal
CHAIN CASE COVER
CRANKSHAFT
PULLEY BOLT
Removal and
(c onf
Cyli nder Head
Component Locat i on Index (cont' d)
CAMSHAFT HOLDERS
DOWEL PINS
CMP PULSE PLATE
Repl ac ement
CAM CHAIN GUIDE B
EXHAUST CAMSHAFT SPROCKET
Repl ac ement page 6-30
CMP PULSE PLATE A
VTC ACTUATOR
EXHAUST CAMSHAFT
DOWEL PINS
SEALING BOLT
ROCKER ARM ASSEMBLY
VTEC Rocker Ar m Test , page 6-7
Removal , page 6-32
Roc ker Ar m and Shaf t
Di sassembl y/ Reassembl y, page 6-33
Roc ker Ar m and Shaf t Inspec t i on, page 6-34
6-4
VALVE COTTERS
SPRING RETAINER
EXHAUST VALVE SPRING
ROCKER ARM OIL CONTROL
SOLENOID FILTER
HEAT SHIELD
CY LINDER HEAD BOLT
Inspection, step 6 on page 6-45
INTAK E VALVE SPRING
Removal, page 6-37
INTAK E VALVE SEAL
Removal, page 6-37
INTAK E VALVE GUIDE
Valve Stem to Guide
Clearance Inspection, page 6-38
LOST MOTION ASSEMB LY
STRAINER
VTC FILTER
CY LINDER HEAD
Removal, page 6-27
Inspection, page 6-31
EXHAUST VALVE
Removal, page 6-37
ROCKER ARM OIL
CONTROL SOLENOID
CY LINDER HEAD GASK ET
COOLANT SEPARATOR
6
Cyli nder Head
Engine Compression Inspection
NOTE: Af t er t hi s i nspec t i on, you must r eset t he engi ne
cont rol modul e (ECM)/power t r ai n cont rol modul e
(PCM), ot her wi se t he ECM/ PCM wi l l cont i nue to st op t he
f uel i nj ect or s f r om oper at i ng.
1. War m up t he engi ne to nor mal oper at i ng t emper at ur e
(cool i ng f an c omes on).
2. Tur n t he i gni ti on swi t c h t o L OCK (0).
3. Connec t t he Honda Di agnost i c Sy s t em (HDS) to t he
6. Sel ec t AL L I NJ ECTORS S TOP i n t he PGM-FI,
7. Tur n t he i gni ti on swi t ch to L OCK (0).
8. Remove t he f our i gni ti on coi l s (see page 4-20).
9. Remove t he f our spar k pl ugs (see page 4-20).
10. At t ach a c ompr essi on gauge to t he spar k pl ug hol e.
11. St ep on t he accel er at or pedal to open t he throttle
f ul l y, t hen cr ank t he engi ne wi t h t he st art er mot or, and
measur e t he c ompr essi on.
Compr essi on Pr essur e:
Above S32 kPa (9.5 k gf / c m
2
r
135 psi )
12. Measur e t he c ompr essi on on t he r emai ni ng c yl i nder s.
Maxi mum Var i at i on:
Wi t hi n 196 kPa (2.0 k gf / c m
2
, 28 psi )
13. If t he c ompr essi on i s not wi t hi n speci f i cat i ons, check
t he f ol l owi ng i t ems, t hen r emeasur e t he
c ompr essi on.
Incorrect val ve c l ear anc e
Conf i r mat i on of c am t i mi ng
Damaged of wor n c am l obes
Damaged or wor n val ves and seat s
Damaged cyl i nder head gasket
Damaged or wor n pi st on ri ngs
Damaged or wor n pi st on and cyl i nder bore
14. Remove t he c ompr essi on gauge f r om t he spar k pl ug
hol e.
15. Inst al l t he f our spar k pl ugs (see page 4-20).
16. Inst al l t he f our i gni t i on coi l s (see page 4-20).
17. Sel ec t ECM/ PCM r eset (see page 11-4) i n t he PGM-FI,
INSPECTION menu t o c anc el AL L I NJ ECTORS S TOP
wi t h t he HDS.
6-6
VTEC Rocker Ar m Test
. VTEC Ai r St opper 07ZAJ-PNAA200
. VTEC Ai r Adapt er 07ZAJ-PNAA101 (2)
. Ai r Joi nt Adapt er 07ZAJ-PNAA300
Ai r Pr essur e Regul at or 07AAJ-PNAA101
1. St art t he engi ne, and let it run for 5 mi nut es, t hen t urn
t he i gni ti on swi t ch to L OCK (0).
2. Remove t he cyl i nder head cover (see page 6-24).
3. Set t he No. 1 pi st on at t op dead cent er (TDC) (see st ep
5 on page 6-13).
4. Move t he sec ondar y rocker ar m (A) f or t he No. 1
cyl i nder . The sec ondar y rocker ar m shoul d move
i ndependent l y of t he mi d rocker ar m (B).
If t he sec ondar y rocker ar m moves f r eel y, go to st ep
5.
If t he sec ondar y rocker ar m does not move
i ndependent l y, r emove t he mi d, pr i mar y, and
sec ondar y rocker ar ms as an assembl y, and check
t hat t he pi st ons in t he rocker ar ms move smoot hl y.
If any rocker ar m needs r epl aci ng, r epl ace t he mi d,
pr i mar y, and sec ondar y rocker ar ms as an
assembl y, t hen ret est .
5. Repeat st ep 4 on t he r emai ni ng sec ondar y rocker
ar ms wi t h eac h pi st on at TDC. When all t he sec ondar y
rocker ar ms pass t he t est , go to st ep 6.
6. Check t hat t he ai r pr essur e on t he shop ai r
c ompr essor gauge i ndi cat es over 400 kPa
(4.0 kgf /c m
2
, 57 psi ).
7. Inspect t he val ve c l ear anc e (see page 6-9).
8. Remove t he seal i ng bolt (A) f rom t he rel i ef hol e, and
i nst al l t he VTEC ai r st opper (B).
07ZAJ-PNAA101
9. Remove t he No. 2 and No. 3 c amshaf t hol der bol t s,
and i nst al l t he VTEC ai r adapt er s (C) f i nger-t i ght .
10. Connec t t he ai r j oi nt adapt er (D) and t he ai r pr essur e
regul at or (E).
11. Loosen t he val ve on t he ai r pr essur e regul at or, and
appl y t he speci f i ed ai r pr essur e.
Spec i f i ed Ai r Pr essur e:
290 kPa (3.0 k gf / c m
2
, 42 psi )
NOTE: If t he rocker ar m pi st on does not move after
appl yi ng ai r pr essur e; move t he rocker ar m up and
down manual l y by rotati ng t he cr ankshaf t c l oc kwi se.
(cont' d)
6-7
Cyli nder Head
WEC Rocker Arm Test (cont'd)
12. Wi t h t he speci f i ed ai r pr essur e appl i ed, move t he
sec ondar y rocker ar m (A) f or t he No. 1 cyl i nder . The
mi d rocker ar m (B), t he pr i mar y rocker ar m (C), and
t he sec ondar y rocker ar m shoul d move t oget her .
If t he mi d, pr i mar y, and sec ondar y r ocker ar ms
move t oget her, go to st ep 13.
If t he mi d and pr i mar y r ocker ar ms do not move
t oget her wi t h t he sec ondar y rocker ar m, r emove
t he mi d, pr i mar y, and t he sec ondar y r ocker ar ms as
an assembl y, and c hec k t hat t he pi st ons in t he
rocker ar ms move smoot hl y. If any rocker ar m
needs r epl aci ng, r epl ace t he mi d, t he pr i mar y, and
t he sec ondar y r ocker ar ms as an assembl y, t hen
ret est .
13. Repeat st ep 12 on t he r emai ni ng sec ondar y rocker
ar ms wi t h eac h pi st on at TDC. When all t he sec ondar y
rocker ar ms pass t he t est , go to st ep 14.
14. Remove t he ai r pr essur e r egul at or , t he ai r j oi nt
adapt er , t he VTEC ai r adapt er s, and t he VTEC ai r
st opper .
15. Tor que t he c amshaf t hol der mount i ng bol t s to 22 N-m
(2.2 kgf-m, 16 Ibf-ft).
16. Tor que t he seal i ng bolt to 10 N-m (1.0 k g f m, 7.4 Ibf-ft).
17. Inst al l t he cyl i nder head c over (see page 6-25).
WTC Actuator Inspection
1. Remove t he c am chai n (see page 6-13).
2. Loosen t he rocker ar m adj ust i ng s c r ews (see st ep 2 on
page 6-32).
3. Remove t he c amshaf t hol der (see st ep 3 on page
6-32).
4. Remove t he i ntake c amshaf t .
5. Chec k that t he var i abl e val ve t i mi ng cont rol (VTC)
act uat or i s l ocked by t urni ng t he VTC act uat or
c ount er c l oc kwi se. If it i s not l ocked, t urn t he VTC
act uat or c l oc kwi se unti l it st ops, t hen r echeck it. If it i s
sti ll not l ocked, r epl ace t he VTC act uat or.
6. Seal t he ret ard hol es (A) i n t he No. 1 c amshaf t j our nal
wi t h t ape and a wi r e t i e.
A
7. Seal one of t he advanc e hol es (A) wi t h t ape.
6-8
Waive Clearance Adjusting i
8. Appl y ai r to t he unseal ed advanc e hol e to r el ease t he
lock.
9. Chec k that t he VTC act uat or moves smoot hl y. If t he
VTC act uat or does not move smoot hl y, r epl ace t he
VTC act uat or.
10. Remove t he wi r e t i e, t he t ape, and t he adhesi ve
r esi due f r om t he camshaf t j our nal .
11. Make sur e t he punch mar ks on t he VTC act uat or and
t he exhaust c amshaf t spr ocket ar e f aci ng up, t hen set
t he c amshaf t s in t he cyl i nder head (see st ep 7 on page
6-44).
12. Set t he c amshaf t hol der s and c am c hai n gui de B i n
pl ace (see st ep 8 on page 6-44).
13. Ti ght en t he c amshaf t hol der bol t s to t he speci f i ed
t or que (see st ep 9 on page 6-44).
14. Hol d t he c amshaf t , and t urn t he VTC act uat or
c l oc kwi se unti l you hear it cl i ck. Make sur e to lock t he
VTC act uat or by t urni ng it.
15. Install t he c am c hai n (see page 6-15).
16. Adj ust t he val ve cl ear ance (see page 6-9).
. Locknut Wr enc h 07MAA-PR70120
. Adj ust er 07MAA-PR70110
NOTE: Connec t t he Honda Di agnost i c Syst em (HDS) to
t he dat a link connect or (DLC) and moni t or t he engi ne
cool ant t emper at ur e (ECT) sensor 1 wi t h t he HDS. Adj ust
t he val ve c l ear anc e onl y when t he E CT sensor 1
t emper at ur e i s l ess t han 100 F (38 C).
1. Remove t he cyl i nder head c over (see page 6-24).
2. Set t he No. 1 pi st on at t op dead cent er (TDC). The
punc h mark (A) on t he var i abl e val ve t i mi ng cont rol
(VTC) act uat or and t he punch mark (B) on t he exhaust
c amshaf t spr ocket shoul d be at t he t op. Al i gn the TDC
mar ks (C) on t he VTC act uat or and t he exhaust
c amshaf t spr ocket .
(cont ' d)
6-9
Cyli nder Head
Val ve Clearance Adjustment (cont'd)
3. Sel ec t t he cor r ect f eel er gauge for t he val ve c l ear anc e
. you ar e goi ng to check.
Val ve Cl ear anc e
Int ake: 0.21 - 0 . 2 5 mm (0. 008-0. 010 i n}
Exhaust : 0. 25- 0. 29 mm (0.010-0.011 i n)
E XHAUS T
No. 1 No. 2 No. 3 No. 4
No. 1 No. 2 No. 3 No. 4
I NTAK E
4. Insert t he f eel er gauge (A) bet ween t he adj ust i ng
s c r ew (B) and t he end of t he val ve st em, and sl i de it
back and f ort h; you shoul d f eel a sl i ght amount of
dr ag.
5. If you f eel too muc h or t oo little dr ag, l oosen t he
l ocknut wi t h t he locknut wr enc h and t he adj ust er , and
t urn t he adj ust i ng sc r ew unti l t he dr ag on t he f eel er
gauge i s cor r ect .
07MAA-PR70110
07MAA-PR70120
6. Ti ght en t he l ocknut to t he speci f i ed t or que, and
r echeck t he c l ear anc e. Repeat t he adj ust ment if
nec essar y.
Spec i f i ed Tor que
Int ake:
7 x 0.75 mm
14 N-m (1.4 kgf -m, 10 Ibf f t )
Appl y new engi ne oi l t o t he nut t hr eads.
Exhaust :
7 x 0.75 mm
14 N-m (1.4 kgf -m, 10 Ibf f t )
6-10
7, Rot at e t he cr ankshaf t 180 cl ockwi se (camshaf t pul l ey
t ur ns 90 ).
8. Chec k and, if nec essar y, adj ust t he val ve c l ear anc e on
t he No. 3 cyl i nder .
9. Rot at e t he cr ankshaf t 180 c l oc kwi se (camshaf t pul l ey
t ur ns 90 ).
t ur ns 90 ).
6-11
Cyli nder Head
Crankshaft Pulley Removal and Installation
. Handl e, 6-25-660L 07JAB-001020B
. Cr ankshaf t Pul l ey Hol der 07AAB-R J AA100
Soc ket , 19 mm 07JAA-001020A or equi val ent
Removal .
1. Remove t he front wheel s.
2. Remove t he spl ash shi el d (see st ep 25 on page 5-5).
4. Hol d t he pul l ey wi t h t he handl e, 6-25-660L (A) and t he
cr ankshaf t pul l ey hol der (B).
5. Remove t he bolt wi t h a socket , 19 mm (C) and a
br eaker bar , t hen r emove t he cr ankshaf t pul l ey.
Inst al l at i on
1. Cl ean t he cr ankshaf t pul l ey (A), t he cr ankshaf t (B), t he
bolt (C), and t he was her (D). Lubr i cat e wi t h new
engi ne oi l as shown.
O: Cl ean
%: Lubr i c at e
2. Inst al l t he cr ankshaf t pul l ey, and hol d t he pul l ey wi t h
t he handl e (A) and t he cr ankshaf t pul l ey hol der (B).
3. Tor que t he bolt to 49 N-m (5.0 k g f m, 36 Ibf-ft) wi t h a
t or que wr enc h and soc ket , 19 mm (C). Do not use an
i mpact wr enc h. If t he pul l ey bolt or cr ankshaf t ar e
new, t or que t he bolt to 177 N-m (18.0 kgf -m, 130 Ibf-ft),
t hen r emove t he bolt and t or que it to 49 N-m (5.0
k g f m, 36 Ibf-ft).
4. Ti ght en t he pul l ey bolt an addi t i onal 90 .
5. Inst al l t he dr i ve belt (see page 4-30).
6. Inst al l t he spl ash shi el d (see st ep 47 on page 5-20).
6-12
Cam Chain Removal
NOTE: Keep t he c am chai n away f r om magnet i c f i el ds.
punch mark (A) on t he var i abl e val ve t i mi ng cont rol
c amshaf t spr ocket shoul d be at t he t op. Al i gn t he TDC
camshaf t spr ocket .
C
6. Di sconnect t he VTC oi l cont rol sol enoi d val ve
connect or (A) and r emove t he har ness c l amp (B).
7 Remove t he VTC oi l cont rol sol enoi d val ve (see page
11-273).
8. Remove t he cr ankshaf t pul l ey (see page 6-12).
9. Suppor t t he engi ne wi t h a j ac k and a wood bl ock
under t he oi l pan.
10. Remove t he gr ound cabl e (A), t hen r emove t he si de
engi ne mount bracket (B).
11. Remove t he si de engi ne mount bracket mount i ng
bol t s.
(c ont d)
6-13
Cyli nder Head
Cam Chai n Removal (cont'd)
12. Remove t he c am c hai n c as e (A) and t he spac er (B).
13. Loosel y i nst al l t he cr ankshaf t pul l ey.
14. Tur n t he cr ankshaf t c ount er c l oc kwi se to c ompr ess t he
aut o-t ensi oner .
15. Al i gn t he hol es on t he lock (A) and t he aut o-t ensi oner
(B), t hen i nser t a 1.2 mm (0.05 in) di amet er pi n or lock
pi n (P/N 14511-PNA-003) (C) into t he hol es. Tur n t he
cr ankshaf t c l oc kwi se t o sec ur e t he pi n.
NOTE: Chec k t he aut o-t ensi oner c am posi t i on. If t he
posi t i on ar e not al i gned, set t he f i rst c am to t he fi rst
edge of t he rack.
6-14
Cam Chai n Installation
17. Remove c am chai n gui de B.
18. Remove c am c hai n gui de A and t he t ensi oner ar m (B).
19. Remove t he c am c hai n.
Camshaf t Lock Pi n Set 07AAB-RWCA120
Keep t he c am chai n away f r om magnet i c f i el ds.
Bef ore doi ng t hi s pr oc edur e, check that t he var i abl e
val ve t i mi ng cont rol (VTC) act uat or i s l ocked by
t urni ng t he VTC act uat or c ount er c l oc kwi se. If not
l ocked, t urn the VTC act uat or c l oc kwi se unti l it st ops,
t hen r echeck it. If it i s sti ll not l ocked, r epl ace t he VTC
act uat or.
1. Set t he cr ankshaf t to t op dead cent er (TDC). Al i gn t he
TDC mar k (A) on t he cr ankshaf t spr ocket wi t h t he
poi nt er (B) on t he engi ne bl ock.
2. Set t he c amshaf t s to TDC. The punch mar k (A) on t he
VTC act uat or and t he punch mark (B) on t he exhaust
(cont ' d)
6-15
Cyli nder Head
Cam Chain installation (cont'd)
3. To hol d t he i ntake c amshaf t , i nser t a c amshaf t lock pi n
set (07AAB-RWCA120) (A) i nto t he mai nt enanc e hol e
i n c amshaf t posi t i on (CMP) pul se plate A (B) and
t hr ough t he No. 5 rocker shaf t hol der (C).
4. To hol d t he exhaust c amshaf t , i nser t a c amshaf t l ock
pi n (A) into t he mai nt enanc e hol e i n CMP pul se pl at e B
(D) and t hr ough t he No. 5 rocker shaf t hol der (C).
5. Inst al l t he c am chai n on t he cr ankshaf t spr ocket wi t h
t he col or ed link plate (A) al i gned wi t h t he mar k (B) on
t he cr ankshaf t spr ocket .
6. Inst al l t he c am chai n on t he VTC act uat or and t he
exhaust c amshaf t spr ocket wi t h t he punch mar ks (A)
al i gned wi t h t he cent er of t he t wo col or ed link pl at es
(B).
B tf
7. Inst al l c am c hai n gui de A and t he t ensi oner ar m (B).
(2.2 k g f m,
16 Ibf-ft)
6-16
8. Inst al l c am chai n gui de B.
9. Compr es s t he aut o-t ensi oner when r epl aci ng t he c am
c hai n. Remove t he pi n (P/N 14511-PNA-003) (A) f r om
t he aut o-t ensi oner t hat was i nst al l ed duri ng r emoval .
Tur n t he plate (B) c ount er c l oc kwi se, to r el ease t he
l ock, t hen pr ess t he rod (C), and set t he f i rst c am (D) to
t he f i rst edge of t he rack (E). Insert t he 1.2 mm (0.05 i n)
di amet er pi n or lock pi n into t he hol es (F).
NOTE: If t he c hai n t ensi oner i s not set up as desc r i bed,
t he t ensi oner wi l l bec ome damaged.
10. Inst al l t he aut o-t ensi oner .
(1.2 kgf-m, 8.7 Ibfft)
11. Remove t he pi n or lock pi n f r om t he aut o-t ensi oner .
(cont ' d)
6-17
Cyli nder Head
Cam Chain Installation (cont'd)
12. Remove t he c amshaf t lock pi n s et
13. Chec k t he c hai n c as e oi l seal f or damage. If t he oi l seal
i s damaged, r epl ace t he c hai n c as e oi l seal (see page
6-22).
14. Remove t he ol d l i qui d gasket f r om t he c hai n c as e
mat i ng sur f ac es, t he bol t s, and t he bolt hol es.
15. Cl ean and dr y t he c hai n c as e mat i ng sur f ac es.
16. Appl y l i qui d gasket , P/N 8717-0004,08718-0003, or
08718-0009, t o t he engi ne block mat i ng sur f ace of t he
c hai n c as e, and to t he i nsi de edge of t he t hr eaded bolt
hol es. Inst al l t he c omponent wi t hi n 5 mi nut es of
appl yi ng t he l i qui d gasket .
NOTE;
Appl y a 3 mm (0.12 i n) di amet er bead of l i qui d
gasket al ong t he broken li ne (A).
If too muc h t i me has passed after appl yi ng t he
l i qui d gasket , r emove t he ol d l i qui d gasket and
r esi due, t hen r eappl y new l i qui d gasket
) ' " "
K v
B,C
T
c
11 mm
(.43 i n)
" 3 mm
- f@.12 i n)
17. Appl y l i qui d gasket t o t he engi ne bl ock upper sur f ac e
cont act ar eas (B) on t he c hai n case, and l ower bl ock
upper sur f ace cont act ar eas (C) on t he c hai n c as e.
08718-0009 to t he oi l pan mat i ng sur f ac e of t he c hai n
c as e, and t o t he i nsi de edge of t he t hr eaded bolt
NOTE:
If t oo muc h t i me has passed after appl yi ng t he
r esi due, t hen r eappl y new l i qui d gasket .
I II 11 i ij ~
r
~.
3 mm
(0.12 in)
6-18
19. Inst al l t he spac er (A), t hen Install t he new O-ri ng (B)
on t he chai n c as e. Set t he edge of t he chai n c ase (C) to
t he edge of t he oi l pan (D), t hen i nst al l t he chai n c as e
on t he engi ne block (E). Wi pe off t he ex c es s l i qui d
gasket on t he oi l pan and c hai n c as e mat i ng sur f ac e.
NOTE:
When i nst al l i ng t he chai n c as e, do not sl i de t he
bottom sur f ace onto t he oi l pan mount i ng sur f ac e.
Wai t at l east 30 mi nut es bef ore f i lli ng t he engi ne
wi t h oi l .
Do not run t he engi ne f or at l east 3 hour s after
i nst al l i ng t he chai n c as e.
20. Inst al l t he si de engi ne mount br acket , t hen t i ght en t he
si de engi ne mount bracket mount i ng bol t s.
21. Ti ght en t he new si de engi ne mount bracket mount i ng
bol t s in t he number ed sequenc e s hown.
12x 1. 25 mm
64 N-m (6.5 kgf m, 47 Ibf-ft)
22. Inst al l t he gr ound c abl e.
23. Remove t he j ack and t he wood bl ock.
(cont ' d)
6-19
Cyli nder Head
Cam Chain Installation (cont'd)
24. Inst al l t he cr ankshaf t pul l ey { see page 6-12).
25. Inst al l t he VTC oi l cont rol sol enoi d val ve (see page
11-273).
26. Connec t t he VTC oi l cont rol sol enoi d val ve connect or
(A) and i nst al l t he har ness c l amp (B).
31. Do t he cr ankshaf t posi t i on (CKP) pat t ern c l ear /CKP
pattern l earn pr ocedur e (see page 11-5).
Cam Chain Auto-tensioner Removal
and Installation
Removal
1. Remove t he c hai n c as e cover .
2. Tur n t he cr ankshaf t count er cl ockwi se to c ompr ess t he
aut o-t ensi oner .
6-20
(B), t hen i nsert a 1.2 mm (0.05 in) di amet er pi n or lock
cr ankshaf t cl ockwi se to sec ur e t he pi n.
B
Inst al l at i on
posi t i on i s not al i gned, set t he f i rst c am t o t he f i rst
edge of t he rack (see st ep 9 on page 6-17).
6 x 1 0 mm
12 N-m (1.2 kgf -m, 8.7 Ibf f t )
2. Remove t he 1.2 mm (0.05 i n) di amet er pi n or lock pi n
(P/N 14511- PNA-003) f r om t he aut o- t ensi oner .
3. Remove all of t he ol d l i qui d gasket f r om t he chai n
c as e c over mat i ng sur f ac es, t he bol t s, and t he bolt
hol es.
4. Cl ean and dry t he chai n c as e c over mat i ng sur f ac es.
(cont' d)
6-21
Cyli nder Head
Cam Chai n Aut o-t ensi oner Removal
and Inst al l at i on (cont' d)
08718-0009 to t he c hai n c ase mat i ng sur f ac e of t he
c hai n c as e c over , and t o t he i nsi de edge of t he
t hr eaded bolt hol es. Inst al l t he c omponent wi t hi n 5
mi nut es of appl yi ng t he li qui d gasket .
NOTE:
gasket al ong t he br oken li ne (A).
6. Inst al l t he chai n c as e cover .
NOTE:
Wai t at l east 30 mi nut es bef ore f i l l i ng t he engi ne
wi t h oi l .
i nst al l i ng t he c hai n c as e c over .
6x 1.0 mm
12 N-m
(1.2 kgf m, 8.7 Ibf-ft)
Cam Chai n Case Oi l Seal
Inst al l at i on
Dr i ver Handl e, 15 x 135L 07749-0010000
At t achment , 52 x 55 mm 07746-0010400
1. Cl ean and dry t he cr ankshaf t oi l seal .
2. Appl y a li ght coat of new engi ne oi l to t he lip of t he
c hai n c ac e oi l seal .
3. Us e t he dr i ver handl e, 15 x 135L and t he at t achment ,
52 x 55 mm t o dr i ve a new oi l seal squar el y i nto t he
c hai n c as e t o t he speci f i ed i nst al l ed hei ght .
07749-0010000
07746-0010400
4. Measur e t he di st ance bet ween t he c hai n c as e sur f ac e
(A) and t he oi l seal (B).
Oi l S eal Inst al l ed Hei ght :
32. 4- 33. 1 mm (1. 28-1. 30 i n)
32.433.1 mm
(1.28-1.30 in)
6-22
Cam Chai n Inspect i on
Speci al Tools Required
Cam Chai n Inspect i on Gauge 07AAJ-RWCA100
1. Remove t he f ront wheel s .
4. Rotate t he cr ankshaf t pul l ey t wo t urns c l oc kwi se.
punch mar k (A) on t he var i abl e val ve t i mi ng cont rol
(VTC) act uat or and t he punc h mar k (B) on t he exhaust
camshaf t spr ocket shoul d be at t he t op. Al i gn t he TDC
C
6. Measur e t he c l ear anc e bet ween t he c am c hai n (A) and
t he t ensi oner ar m (B) wi t h t he c am chai n i nspect i on
gauge (07AAJ-RWCA100).
If t he c l ear anc e i s OK , go to st ep 17.
If t he c l ear anc e i s mor e t han t he ser vi c e li mi t , go t o
st ep 7.
Chai n-t o-Ar m Cl ear anc e
Ser vi c e Li mi t :
MIL on wi t h P0341: 4.3 mm (0.17 i n)
Wi t hout MIL: 5.5 mm (0.22 i n)
07AAJ-RWCA100
7. Remove t he oi l pan (see page 7-11).
8. Suppor t t he engi ne wi t h a j ack and a wood bl ock
under t he engi ne block.
NOTE: Do not hi t t he oi l pump and t he baffle plate
when pl aci ng t he j ack on t he edge of t he engi ne block.
9. Remove t he c am c hai n (see page 6-13), and c hec k t he
t eet h on t he cr ankshaf t spr ocket , t he VTC act uat or ,
and t he exhaust c amshaf t spr ocket f or wear and
damage. If any of t hem ar e wor n or damaged, r epl ace
if nec essar y.
10. Chec k t he oi l passage on t he aut o-t ensi oner f or c l ogs.
If t he aut o-t ensi oner i s c l ogged, r epl ace it.
(cont ' d)
6-23
Cyli nder Head
Cam Chain inspection (cont' d)
11. Measur e t he lengt h of t he oi l pump chai n
aut o-t ensi oner r od.
Oi l Pump Chai n Aut o-Tensi oner Rod Lengt h
Ser vi c e Li mi t : 13 mm (0.51 i n)
12. If t he l engt h i s over t he ser vi c e l i mi t r epl ace t he oi l
pump c hai n (see page 8-25). When r epl aci ng, c hec k
t he t eet h on t he cr ankshaf t spr ocket and t he oi l pump
spr ocket f or wear and damage. If any of t hem ar e
wor n or damaged, r epl ace if nec essar y.
13. Chec k t he oi l passage on t he oi l pump c hai n
aut o-t ensi oner f or c l ogs. If t he aut o-t ensi oner i s
c l ogged, r epl ace it.
14. i nst al l t he new c am c hai n (see page 6-15).
15. Remove t he j ac k and t he wood bl ock.
16. Inst al l t he oi l pan (see page 7-30).
17. Inst al l t he c yl i nder head c over (see page 6-25).
19. Inst al l t he f ront wheel s.
Cyl i nder Head Cover Removal
20-306).
2. Remove t he engi ne cover .
3. Remove t he f our i gni ti on coi l s (see page 4-20).
4. Remove t he di pst i ck (A) and t he power st eer i ng (P/S)
hose bracket (B) and di sconnect t he br eat her hose (C)
and t he brake boost er vac uum hose (D).
B
5. Remove t he t wo bol t s (E) sec ur i ng t he evapor at i ve
emi ssi on (EVAP) cani st er purge val ve bracket .
6-24
Cyl i nder Head" Cover Instalk'Soou'o
6. Remove t he cyl i nder head cover .
1. Thor oughl y c l ean t he head cover gasket and t he
gr oove.
2. Install t he head c over gasket (A) i n t he gr oove of t he
cyl i nder head c over (B).
3. Check that t he mat i ng sur f ac es ar e c l ean and dry.
4. Appl y li qui d gasket , P/N 08717-0004, 08718-0003, or
08718-0009, on t he chai n c ase and t he No. 5 rocker
shaf t hol der mat i ng ar eas (A). Inst al l t he component
wi t hi n 5 mi nut es of appl yi ng t he l i qui d gasket .
NOTE: If too muc h t i me has passed after appl yi ng t he
li qui d gasket , r emove t he ol d li qui d gasket and
A A
(cont' d)
6-25
Cyli nder Head
Cylinder Head Cover Installation (cont'd)
5. Set t he spar k plug seal s (A) on t he spar k pl ug t ubes.
Pl ace t he cyl i nder head c over (B) on t he cyl i nder head,
t hen sl i de t he c over sl i ght l y back and forth to seat t he
head c over gasket .
6. Inspect t he c over was her s (C). Repl ace any was her
that i s damaged or det er i or at ed.
7. Tor que t he bol t s in t hr ee st eps. In t he f i nal st ep
t i ght en all bol t s, i n sequenc e, to 12 N-m (1.2 kgf -m,
8.7 i bf f t ).
NOTE:
Wai t at l east 30 mi nut es bef ore fi lli ng t he engi ne
wi t h oi l .
i nst al l i ng t he head cover .
0 > o Q o o
8. Install t he t wo bolts (A) sec ur i ng t he evapor at i ve
9. Connec t t he breat he hose (B) and t he brake boost er
vac uum hose (C) and i nst al l t he power st eer i ng (P/S)
hose bracket (D), and t he di pst i ck (E).
10. Install t he f our i gni ti on coi l s (see page 4-20).
11. Install t he engi ne c over .
6 x 1.0 mm
12 N-m
(1.2 kgf -m,
8.7 Ibf f t )
12. Inst al l t he st rut br ace (if equi pped) (see page 20-306).
6-26
Cyl i nder Head Removal
NOTE:
Us e f ender c over s to avoi d damagi ng pai nt ed
sur f ac es,
To avoi d damage, unpl ug t he wi r i ng connect or s
car ef ul l y whi l e hol di ng t he connect or port i on.
Connec t t he Honda Di agnost i c Sy s t em (HDS) to t he
dat a link connect or (DLC), and moni t or t he engi ne
cool ant t emper at ur e (ECT) sensor 1. To avoi d
damagi ng t he cyl i nder head, wai t unti l t he ECT s ens or
1 t emper at ur e dr ops bel ow 100 F (38 C) bef ore
l ooseni ng t he cyl i nder head bol t s.
Mark al l wi r i ng and hoses to avoi d mi sc onnec t i on.
Al s o, be sur e t hat t hey do not cont act ot her wi r i ng or
hos es , or i nterfere wi t h any ot her par t s.
1. Remove t he strut br ace (if equi pped) (see page
20-306).
3. Drai n t he engi ne cool ant (see page 10-6).
4. Remove t he dri ve belt (see page 4-30).
5. Remove t he i ntake mani f ol d (see page 9-4).
6. Remove t he cat al yt i c conver t er (see page 11-339).
7. Di sconnect t he evapor at i ve emi ssi on (EVAP) c ani st er
hose (A).
A
c
(cont ' d)
6-27
Cyl i nder Head
Cylinder Head Removal (cont'd)
10. Remove t he f our bol t s sec ur i ng t he EVAP c ani st er
pur ge val ve bracket .
12. Remove t he t wo bolts (A) sec ur i ng t he connect i ng
Pi pe.
13. Di sc onnec t t he wat er bypass hose (B).
14. Di sc onnec t t he f ol l owi ng engi ne wi r e har ness
c onnec t or s, and r emove t he wi r e har ness c l amps
f r om t he cyl i nder head:
Engi ne cool ant t emper at ur e (ECT) sensor 1
connect or
Camshaf t posi t i on (CMP) sensor A (Intake)
connect or
Camshaf t posi t i on (CMP) sensor B (Exhaust )
connect or
Rocker ar m oi l cont rol val ve connect or
Rocker ar m oi l pr essur e swi t c h connect or
EVAP cani st er purge val ve connect or
Var i abl e val ve t i mi ng cont rol (VTC) oi l cont rol
sol enoi d val ve connect or
Engi ne oi l pr essur e swi t ch connect or
6-28
16. Remove t he r ocker ar m assembl y (see page 6-32).
17. Remove t he cyl i nder head bol t s. To pr event war page,
l oosen t he bol t s i n sequenc e 1/3 t urn at a t i me; repeat
t he sequenc e unti l all bol t s ar e l oosened.
. <D (D

18. Remove t he cyl i nder head.
CMP Pulse Plate A Replacement'
1. Remove t he cyl i nder head cover (see page 6-24).
2. Remove c amshaf t posi t i on (CMP) sensor A (see page
11-274).
3. Hol d t he c amshaf t wi t h an open-end wr enc h, t hen
l oosen t he bolt.
4. Remove CMP pul se plate A.
Apply new engine oil to
the bolt threads.
5. Inst al l CMP pul se pl at e A in t he r ever se order of
r emoval .
6-29
Cyli nder Head
CMP Pul se Plate B Repl acement
2. Remove c amshaf t posi t i on (CMP) sensor B (see page
11-198).
l oosen t he bolt.
4. Remove CMP pul se plate B.
the bolt threads.
VTC Act uat or , Exhaust Camshaf t
Spr ocket Repl acement
Removal
2. Hold t he c amshaf t wi t h an open-end wr enc h, t hen
l oosen t he var i abl e val ve t i mi ng cont rol (VTC)
act uat or mount i ng bolt and t he exhaust c amshaf t
spr ocket mount i ng bolt.
3. If t he VTC act uat or wi l l be r eused, do t hese st eps.
-1. Remove t he i ntake c amshaf t , and seal t he retard
hol es in t he No. 1 c amshaf t j our nal wi t h t ape and a
wi r e t i e (see st ep 6 on page 6-8).
-2. Seal one of t he advanc e hol es wi t h t ape (see st ep 7
on page 6-8).
-3. Appl y ai r to t he unseal ed advanc e hol e to r el ease
t he lock (see st ep 8 on page 6-9).
-4. Remove t he t ape and adhesi ve r esi due f r om t he
c amshaf t j our nal .
4. Remove t he VTC act uat or and t he exhaust c amshaf t
spr ocket .
5. Install CMP pul se pl at e B in t he r ever se or der of
r emoval .
6-30
Cyl i nder Head inspection m
r
r
Warpage
i nst al l at i on
1. Install t he VTC act uat or and t he exhaust c amshaf t
spr ocket .
NOTE: i nst al l t he VTC act uat or whi l e i n t he unl ocked
. posi t i on.
2. Appl y new engi ne oi l t o t he t hr eads of t he VTC
mount i ng bolt, t hen i nst al l t hem.
3. Hol d t he camshaf t wi t h an open-end wr enc h, t hen
t i ght en t he bol t s.
VTC Ac t uat or Mount i ng i o l t :
12 x 1.25 mm
113 N m (11.5 kgf -m, 83 Ibf f t )
Exhaust Camshaf t Spr oc ket Mount i ng Bol t :
10 x 1.25 mm
72 N-m (7.3 kgf -m, 53 Ibf f t )
4. Hol d t he camshaf t , and t urn t he VTC act uat or
VTC act uat or by t ur ni ng it.
5. Install t he c am c hai n (see page 6-15).
1. Remove t he cyl i nder head (see page 6-27).
2. Inspect t he c amshaf t (see page 6-35).
3. Chec k t he cyl i nder head f or war page. Measur e al ong
t he edges, and t hree way s ac r oss t he cent er .
If war page i s l ess t han 0.05 mm (0.002 i n) cyl i nder
head r esur f aci ng i s not r equi r ed.
If war page i s bet ween 0.05 mm (0.002 i n) and
0.2 mm (0.008 i n), r esur f ace t he cyl i nder head.
The maxi mum r esur f ace li mi t i s 0.2 mm (0.008 in)
based on a hei ght of 104 mm (4.09 i n).
Cyl i nder Head Hei ght
St andar d (New): 103.95104.05 mm
(4. 093-4. 096 i n)
6-31
Cyli nder Head
Rocker Arm Assembl y Removal
2. Loosen t he rocker ar m adj ust i ng s c r ews (A).
A
3, Remove t he c amshaf t hol der bol l s. To pr event
damagi ng t he c amshaf t s, l oosen t he bol t s, i n
sequenc e, t wo t ur ns at a t i me.
NOTE: Bolt CD i s not on all engi nes.
@ @
4. Remove c am c hai n gui de B (A), t he c amshaf t hol der s
(B), and t he c amshaf t s (C).
5. Insert t he bol t s (A) i nto t he rocker shaf t hol der , t hen
r emove t he rocker ar m assembl y (B).
6-32
Rocker Ar m and Shaf t Di sassembl y/Reassembl y
NOTE:
Identi fy eac h part as it i s r emoved so t hat eac h i tem c an be r ei nst al l ed i n its or i gi nal l ocat i ons.
Inspect t he rocker ar m shaf t and rocker ar ms (see page 6-34).
If r eused, t he rocker ar ms must be i nst al l ed i n t he ori gi nal l ocat i ons.
When r emovi ng, or i nst al l i ng t he rocker ar m assembl y, do not r emove t he c amshaf t hol der bol t s. The bol t s wi l l keep
t he hol der s and rocker ar ms on t he shaf t .
Pri or to r eassembl i ng, cl ean al l t he part s in sol vent , dry t hem, and appl y new engi ne oi l to any cont act poi nt s.
Bundl e t he i ntake rocker ar ms wi t h rubber bands to keep t hem t oget her as a set .
When r epl aci ng t he i ntake rocker ar m assembl y, r emove t he f ast eni ng har dwar e f r om t he new i ntake rocker ar m
assembl y.
EXHAUST ROCKER
SHAFT
EXHAUST ROCKER ARM
ASSEMBLY
No. 1
ROCKER
SHAFT HOLDER
No. 5
ROCKER
SHAFT HOLDER
RUBBER BAND
No. 2 No. 3 No. 4 I N T A K E R O P K F R
ROCKER SHAFT ROCKER SHAFT ROCKER SHAFT ARM A S S E MB L Y
HOLDER HOLDER HOLDER ARM A S S E MB L Y
INTAKE ROCKER SHAFT
6-33
Cyli nder Head
locker Arm and Shaft inspection
1. Remove t he rocker ar m assembl y (see page 6-32).
2. Di sassembl e t he rocker ar m assembl y (see page
6-33).
3. Measur e t he di amet er of t he shaf t at t he f i rst r ocker
l ocat i on.
4. Zer o t he gauge (A) to t he shaf t di amet er .
5. Measur e t he i nsi de di amet er of the rocker ar m, and
check it f or an out -of -round condi t i on.
Roc ker Arm-to-Shaffc Cl ear anc e
St andar d (New):
Int ake: 0. 018-0. 059 mm
(0.0007-0.0023 i n)
Exhaust : 0. 018-0. 056 mm
(0.0007-0.0022 i n)
6. Repeat f or ai l rocker ar ms and both shaf t s. If t he
c l ear anc e i s beyond t he ser vi c e li mi t, r epl ace t he
rocker shaf t and all out of ser vi c e li mi t rocker ar ms. If
any VTEC rocker ar m needs r epl acement , r epl ace t he
rocker ar ms (pr i mar y, mi d, and sec ondar y), as a set .
7. Inspect t he rocker ar m pi st ons (A). Push on eac h
pi st on manual l y. If it does not move smoot hl y,
r epl ace t he rocker ar m set .
NOTE: Appl y new engi ne oi l to t he rocker ar m pi st ons
when r eassembl i ng.
8. Reassembl e t he rocker ar m assembl y (see page 6-33).
9. Install t he rocker ar m assembl y (see page 6-43).
6-34
Camshaft inspection
NOTE: Do not rotate t he camshaf t duri ng i nspect i on.
6-33).
4. Put t he rocker shaf t hol der s, t he camshaf t , and t he
c amshaf t hol der s on the cyl i nder head, t hen t i ght en
t he bol t s, in sequenc e, to t he speci f i ed t orque.
NOTE: If t he engi ne does not have bolt @, ski p it and
cont i nue t he t orque sequenc e.
8 x 1.25 mm 22 N-m (2.2 kgf -m, 16 i bf f t )
6 x 1.0 mm 12 N-m (1.2 kgf -m, 8.7 Ibf f t )
6x 1. 0 mm Bol t s: , @, @
@ @ @
@ @ @ @
5. Seat t he camshaf t by pushi ng it away f r om t he
c amshaf t pul l ey end of t he cyl i nder head.
6. Zer o t he di al i ndi cat or agai nst t he end of t he
c amshaf t , t hen push t he camshaf t back and f ort h, and
r ead t he end pl ay. If t he end pl ay i s beyond t he ser vi c e
l i mi t , repl ace t he cyl i nder head and r echeck. If it i s sti ll
beyond t he ser vi c e li mi t , r epl ace t he camshaf t .
Camshaf t End Pl ay
(cont' d)
Cyli nder Head
Camshaft inspection (cont'd)
7. Loosen t he c amshaf t hol der bol t s t wo t ur ns at a t i me,
in a c r i ssc r oss pat t ern. Then r emove t he c amshaf t
hol der s f r om t he cyl i nder head.
8. Lift t he c amshaf t s out of t he cyl i nder head, and wi pe
t hem c l ean, t hen i nspect t he lift r amps. Repl ac e t he
c amshaf t if any l obes ar e pi t t ed, sc or ed, or
exc essi vel y wor n.
9. Cl ean t he c amshaf t j our nal sur f ac es in t he cyl i nder
head, t hen set t he c amshaf t s back i n pl ace. Pl ace a
pl ast i gage st ri p ac r oss eac h j our nal .
10. Install t he c amshaf t hol der s, t hen t i ght en t he bol t s t o
t he speci f i ed t or que as shown i n st ep 4.
11. Remove t he c amshaf t hol der s. Measur e t he wi dest
porti on of pl ast i gage on eac h j our nal .
If t he camshaf t -t o-hol der c l ear anc e i s wi t hi n t he
ser vi c e l i mi t s, go to st ep 13.
If t he camshaf t -t o-hol der c l ear anc e i s beyond t he
ser vi c e li mi t , and t he c amshaf t has been r epl ac ed,
r epl ace t he cyl i nder head.
ser vi c e li mi t , and t he c amshaf t has not been
r epl ac ed, go to st ep 12.
Camshaf t -t o-Hol der Oi l Cl ear anc e
St andar d (New):
No. 1 J our nal : 0.0300.069 mm
- (0.0012-0.0027 i n)
No. 2, 3, 4, 5 J our nal s: 0.0600.099 mm
(0.0024-0.0039 i n)
12. Chec k t he total runout wi t h t he c amshaf t suppor t ed
on V-bl ocks.
If t he total runout of t he c amshaf t i s wi t hi n t he
ser vi c e li mi t, r epl ace t he cyl i nder head.
If t he total runout i s beyond t he ser vi c e li mi t,
r epl ace t he c amshaf t and r echeck t he
camshaf t -t o-hol der oi l c l ear anc e. If t he oi l c l ear anc e
i s sti ll beyond t he ser vi c e li mi t, r epl ace t he cyl i nder
head.
Camshaf t Tot al Runout
13. Measur e t he c am l obe hei ght .
Cam Lobe Hei ght St andar d (New):
INTAKE EXHAUS T
PRI 33.744 mm
(1.3285 in)
34.291 mm
(1.3500 in)
MID 35.456 mm
(1.3959 in)
34.291 mm
(1.3500 in)
S E C 33.744 mm
(1.3285 in)
34.291 mm
(1.3500 in)
PRI: Pr i mar y MID: Mi d S E C: Sec ondar y
C/ C: Cam Chai n
INTAK E
PRI MID S E C
6-36
alve
#
Spring^ and alve Seal Removal
Val ve Spr i ng Compr essor At t achment 07757-PJ1010A
Identify t he val ves and t he val ve spr i ngs as t hey ar e
r emoved so t hat eac h i tem can be r ei nst al l ed i n i ts
ori gi nal posi t i on.
3. Usi ng an appr opr i at e-si zed socket (A) and a pl ast i c
mal l et (B), li ghtly t ap t he spr i ng ret ai ner to l oosen t he
val ve cot t er s.
4. Install t he val ve spr i ng c ompr essor at t achment and
t he val ve spr i ng c ompr essor . Compr ess t he spr i ng,
and r emove t he val ve cot t er s.
5. Remove t he val ve spr i ng c ompr essor and t he val ve
spr i ng c ompr essor at t ac hment t hen r emove t he
spr i ng ret ai ner, t he val ve spr i ng, and t he val ves.
6. Inst al l t he val ve gui de seal r emover .
7. Remove t he val ve seal .
Cyl i nder Head
Waive Inspection
1. Remove t he val ves (see page 6-37).
2. Measur e t he val ve i n t hese ar eas.
Int ake Val ve Di mensi ons .
A St andar d (New): 35.8536.15 mm
(1. 411-1. 423 i n)
B St andar d (New): 108.5-109.1 mm
(4. 272-4. 295 i n)
C St andar d (Mew}: 5.4755.485 mm
(0.2156-0.2159 In)
C Ser vi c e Li mi t : 5.445 mm (0.2144 i n)
Ex haus t Val ve Di mensi ons
A St andar d (New): 30. 85- 31. 15 mm.
(1. 215-1. 226 i n)
B St andar d (New): 108.4109.0 mm
(4.268-4.291 i n)
C St andar d (New): 5. 450-5. 460 mm
(0.2146-0.2150 i n)
Val ve St em-t o-Qyi de Cl ear ance
Inspect i on
2. Subt r act t he O.D. of t he val ve st em, measur ed wi t h a
mi cr omet er , f rom t he I.D. of t he val ve gui de,
measur ed wi t h an i nsi de mi cr omet er or a bal l gauge.
Take t he measur ement s i n t hr ee pl ac es al ong t he
val ve st em and t hree pl ac es i nsi de t he val ve gui de.
The di f f erence bet ween t he l ar gest gui de
measur ement and t he smal l est st emmeasur ement
shoul d not exc eed t he ser vi c e li mi t.
Int ake Val ve St em-t o-Gui de Cl ear anc e
St andar d (New): 0.0300.055 mm
(0.0012-0.0022 i n)
Ser vi c e Li mi t : . 0.08 mm (0.003 i n)
Exhaust Val ve St em-t o-Gui de
Cl ear anc e
(0.0022-0.0031 i n)
6-38
Val ve Gui de Repl acement
Val ve Gui de Dri ver, 5.35 x 9.7 mm 07742-0010100
Val ve Gui de Reamer , 5.5 mm 07HAH-PJ7A100
1. Inspect t he val ve st em-t o-gui de c l ear anc e (see page
6-38).
2. As i l l ust r at ed, use a c ommer c i al l y avai l abl e ai r -i mpact
val ve gui de dri ver (A) modi f i ed to fit t he di amet er of
t he val ve gui des. In most c as es , t he s ame pr ocedur e
c an be done usi ng t he val ve gui de dr i ver , 5.35 x 9.7
mm and a convent i onal hammer .
5.3 mm
(0.21 in)
87 mm
(3.43 in)"
57 mm
(2.24 in)
10.8 mm
(0.43 in)
3. Sel ec t t he proper r epl acement gui des, and chi l l t hem
i n t he f r eezer sect i on of a ref ri gerat or f or at l east an
hour.
4. Us e a hot plate or oven t o evenl y heat t he cyl i nder
head to 300 F (150 C). Moni t or t he t emper at ur e wi t h
a cooki ng t her momet er . Do not get t he head hotter
t han 300 F (150 C); exc essi ve heat may l oosen t he
val ve seat s.
5. Wor ki ng f r om t he c amshaf t si de, use t he dr i ver and an
ai r hammer t o dr i ve t he gui de about 2 mm (0.1 i n)
t owar ds t he c ombust i on c hamber . Thi s wi l l knock off
s ome of t he c ar bon and make r emoval easi er . Hol d
t he ai r hammer di rect l y in li ne wi t h t he val ve gui de to
pr event damagi ng t he dri ver.
6. Tur n t he head over , and dr i ve t he gui de out t owar d
t he c amshaf t si de of t he head.
7. If a val ve gui de wi l l not move, dri ll it out wi t h an 8 mm
(5/16 i n) bi t, t hen try agai n.
NOTE: Dri ll gui des onl y i n ext r eme c as es ; you coul d
damage t he cyl i nder head if t he gui de br eaks.
8. Remove t he new gui de(s) f r om t he f reezer, one at a
t i me, as you need t hem.
(cont ' d)
6-39
Cyli nder Head
Valve Guide Replacement (cont'd)
9. Appl y a t hi n coat of new engi ne oi l to t he out si de of
t he new val ve gui de. Inst al l t he gui de f r om t he
c amshaf t si de of t he head; use t he val ve gui de dr i ver
to dri ve t he gui de i n t o t he speci f i ed i nst al l ed hei ght
(A) of t he gui de (B). If you have all 16 gui des to do, you
may have to reheat t he head.
Val ve Gui de Inst al l ed Hei ght
Int ake: 15. 2- 16. 2 mm ( 0. 60- 0. 64 i n)
Exhaust : 15. 5- 16. 5 mm (0.61 - 0 . 6 5 i n)
11. Rot at e t he val ve gui de r eamer c l oc kwi se t o t he full
l engt h of t he val ve gui de bor e.
12. Cont i nue to rotate t he r eamer c l oc kwi se whi l e
r emovi ng it f r om t he bore.
13. Thor oughl y was h t he gui de i n det ergent and wat er to
r emove any cutti ng r esi due.
14. Chec k t he c l ear anc es wi t h a val ve (see page 6-38).
Veri f y t hat a val ve sl i des i nto t he i ntake and exhaust
val ve gui des wi t hout st i cki ng.
15. Inspect t he val ve seat i ng, if nec essar y r enew t he val ve
seat usi ng a val ve seat cut t er (see page 6-41).
10. Coat both t he val ve gui de r eamer , 5.5 mm and t he
val ve gui de wi t h cut t i ng oi l .
6-40
Waive Seat Recondi t i oni ng
6-38). If t he val ve gui des ar e wor n, r epl ace t hem (see
page 6-39) bef ore cut t i ng t he val ve seat s.
2. Renew t he val ve seat s in t he cyl i nder head usi ng a
val ve seat cut t er.
3. Car ef ul l y cut a 45 seat , r emovi ng onl y enough
mat eri al to ensur e a smoot h and concent r i c seat .
4. Bevel t he upper and l ower edges at t he angl es shown
i n t he i l l ust rat i on.Check t he wi dt h of t he seat and
adj ust accor di ngl y.
INTAK E: 35
5. Make one mor e ver y li ght pass wi t h t he 45 cut t er to
r emove any possi bl e bur r s c aused by t he ot her
cut t er s.
Val ve Seat Wi dt h
St andar d (New): 1. 25- 1. 55 mm (0.049-0.061 i n)
6. After r esur f aci ng t he seat , i nspect f or even val ve
seat i ng. Appl y Pr ussi an Bl ue c ompound (A) to t he
val ve f ac e. Insert t he val ve in its or i gi nal l ocat i on in
t he head, t hen lift it and snap it c l osed agai nst t he seat
sever al t i mes.
B
7. The act ual val ve seat i ng sur f ace (B), as shown by t he
bl ue c ompound, shoul d be cent er ed on t he seat .
If it i s t oo hi gh (cl oser to t he val ve st em), you must
make a sec ond cut wi t h t he 67.5 cut t er to move it
down, t hen one mor e cut wi t h t he 45 cut t er to
rest ore seat wi dt h.
If it i s t oo l ow (cl ose to t he val ve edge), you must
make a sec ond cut wi t h t he 35 cut t er (i ntake si de)
or t he 30 cut t er (exhaust si de) to move it up, t hen
make one mor e cut wi t h t he 45 cut t er to rest ore
seat wi dt h.
NOTE: The f i nal cut shoul d al ways be made wi t h t he
45 cutter.
(cont' d)
6-41
Cyli nder Head
Val ve Seat Reconditioning (cont'd)
8. Insert t he Intake and exhaust val ves In t he head, and
measur e t he val ve st em i nst al l ed hei ght (A).
Int ake Wai ve S t em i nst al l ed Hei ght
St andar d (New); 44. 0- 44. 5 mm ( 1. 73- 1. 75 In)
Ser vi c e Li mi t ; 44.7 mm (1.76 i n)
Exhaust Val ve St em Inst al l ed Hei ght
9. If val ve st em Inst al l ed hei ght i s beyond t he ser vi c e
li mi t, r epl ace t he val ve and r echeck, If it Is sti ll beyond
t he ser vi c e li mi t, r epl ace t he cyl i nder head; t he val ve
seat In t he head i s t oo deep.
Val ve, Spr i ng, and Valve Seal
Installation
St em Seal Dr i ver , 30 mm 07PAD-0010000
Val ve Spr i ng Compr essor At t achment 07757-PJ101 OA
1. Coat t he val ve st ems wi t h new engi ne oi l . Install t he
val ves i n t he val ve gui des.
2. Chec k t hat t he val ves move up and down smoot hl y.
3. Install t he spr i ng seat s on t he cyl i nder head.
4. Inst al l t he new val ve seal s (A) usi ng t he 5.5 mm si de
of t he st em seal dr i ver , 30 mm (B).
NOTE: The exhaust val ve seal (C) has a bl ack spr i ng
(D), and t he i ntake val ve seal (E) has a whi t e spr i ng (F).
They ar e not i nt er changeabl e.
F D
E . C
6-42
km
Rocker Arm Assembly Installation
5. Inst al l t he wai ve spr i ng and t he spr i ng ret ai ner. Pl ac e
t he end of t he val ve spr i ng wi t h t he c l osel y wound
coi l s t owar d t he cyl i nder head.
6. Inst al l t he val ve spr i ng c ompr essor at t achment and
t he val ve spr i ng c ompr essor . Compr es s t he spr i ng,
and i nst al l t he val ve cot t ers.
07757-PJ1010A
spr i ng c ompr essor at t achment .
8. Li ght l y t ap t he end of eac h val ve st em t wo or t hr ee
t i mes wi t h a pl ast i c mal l et (A) t o ensur e proper
seat i ng of t he val ve and t he val ve cot t er s. Tap t he
val ve st em onl y al ong its axi s s o you do not bend t he
st em.
1 Reassembl e t he rocker ar m assembl y (see page 6-33).
2. Cl ean and dry t he No. 5 rocker shaf t hol der mat i ng
sur f ac e.
08718-0009 to t he cyl i nder head mat i ng sur f ace of t he
No. 5 rocker shaf t hol der , and to t he i nsi de edge of t he
t hr eaded bolt hol es. Inst al l t he c omponent wi t hi n 5
mi nut es of appl yi ng t he l i qui d gasket .
NOTE:
Appl y a 3 mm (0.12 in) di amet er bead of li qui d
3 mm
(0.12 in)
A 1
4. Inst al l t he l ost mot i on assembl y i n t he cyl i nder head.
5. Insert t he bolts (A) i nto t he rocker shaf t hol der, t hen
i nst al l t he rocker ar m assembl y (B) on t he cyl i nder
head.
6. Remove t he bolts f r om t he rocker shaf t hol der.
(cont ' d)
6-43
Cyli nder Head
Rocker Arm Assembl y Installation
(cont'd)
7. Make sur e the punch mar ks on t he var i abl e val ve
t i mi ng cont rol (VTC) act uat or and t he exhaust
c amshaf t spr ocket ar e f aci ng up, t hen set t he
c amshaf t s (A) in t he hol der . Appl y new engi ne oi l to
t he camshaf t j our nal s and l obes.
8. Set t he camshaf t hol der s (B) and c am chai n gui de B
(C) in pl ace.
9. Ti ght en t he bolts to t he speci f i ed t or que.
NOTE: If t he engi ne does not have bolt @, ski p it and
cont i nue t he t orque sequenc e.
8x 1. 25 mm 22 N-m (2.2 k g f m, 16 Ibf-ft)
6 x 1.0 mm 12 N-m (1.2 k g f m, 8.7 Ibf-ft)
6x 1. 0 mm Bol t s: @, ,
m m
@ @ @ @
10. Inst al l t he c am chai n (see page 6-15), t hen adj ust t he
val ve c l ear anc e (see page 6-9).
Cyl i nder Head Inst allat i on
1. Install a new cool ant separ at or (A) in t he engi ne bl ock
whenever t he engi ne block i s r epl ac ed.
2. Cl ean t he cyl i nder head and t he engi ne bl ock sur f ac e.
3. Install t he new cyl i nder head gasket (A) and t he dowel
pi ns (B) on t he engi ne bl ock. Al ways us e a new
cyl i nder head gasket .
6-44
. Set t he cr ankshaf t to top dead cent er (TDC). Al i gn t he
TDC mark (A) on t he cr ankshaf t spr ocket wi t h t he
5. Inst al l t he cyl i nder head on t he engi ne bl ock.
6. Measur e t he di amet er of eac h cyl i nder head bolt at
poi nt A and poi nt B.
50 mm (2.0 in)
45 mm (1.8 in)
7. If ei t her di amet er i s l ess t han 10.6 mm (0.42 i n),
r epl ace t he cyl i nder head bolt.
8. Appl y new engi ne oi l t o t he t hr eads and under t he bolt
heads of all cyl i nder head bol t s.
9. Tor que t he cyl i nder head bol t s i n sequenc e to 39 N-m
(4.0 kgf -m, 29 Ibf-ft). Us e a beam-t ype t or que wr enc h.
When usi ng a pr eset cl i ck-t ype t or que wr enc h, be
sur e to t i ght en sl owl y and do not over t i ght en. If a bolt
makes any noi se whi l e you ar e t or qui ng i t, l oosen t he
bolt and reti ghten it f r om t he f i rst st ep.
10. Af t er t or qui ng, t i ght en all cyl i nder head bol t s in t wo
st eps (90 per st ep) usi ng t he sequenc e s hown i n st ep
9. If you ar e usi ng a new cyl i nder head bolt, t i ght en
t he bolt an ext ra 90 .
NOTE: Remove t he cyl i nder head bolt if you t i ght ened
it beyond t he speci f i ed angl e, and go back to st ep 6 of
t he pr ocedur e. Do not l oosen it back to t he speci f i ed
angl e.
FI RST S TE P
THIRD S TEP
(New bol t )
S ECOND S TE P
(c ont d)
6-45
Cyli nder Head
Cyl i nder Head installation (cont'd)
11. Inst al l t he rocker ar m assembl y (see page 6-43).
12. Inst al l t he c am c hai n (see page 6-15).
13. Connec t t he f ol l owi ng engi ne wi r e har ness
c onnec t or s, and i nst al l t he wi r e har ness c l amps t o t he
cyl i nder head:
c onnec t or
connect or
Camshaf t posi t i on (CMP) s ens or B (Exhaust )
connect or
Rocker ar m oi l cont rol sol enoi d connect or
Rocker ar m oi l pr essur e swi t c h connect or
Evapor at i ve emi ssi on (EVAP) c ani st er pur ge val ve
c onnec t or
Var i abl e val ve t i mi ng cont rol (VTC) oi l cont r ol
14. Inst al l t he t wo bolts (A) sec ur i ng t he connect i ng pi pe.
A
6x 1.0 mm
12 N-m (1.2 k g f m, 8.7 Ibf-ft)
.25 mm
m,
1.6 Ibf-ft)
15. Connec t t he wat er bypass hose (B).
16. Connec t t he upper radi at or hose (A), t he heat er hos es
(B), and t he wat er bypass hose (C).
17. Inst al l t he f our bol t s sec ur i ng t he EVAP c ani st er pur ge
val ve bracket .
6 x 1.0 mm
12 N-m
kgf -m,
Ibf-ft)
6-46
18. Connect t he f our f uel i nj ect or c onnec t or s (A), t he
engi ne mount cont rol sol enoi d val ve connect or (B),
and i nst al l t he gr ound c abl es (C).
6 x 1.0 mm
12 N-m
A
(1.2 kgf-m, 8.7 Ibfft)
i nst all t he qui ck-connect fi tti ng c over (B).
20. Connec t t he EVAP cani st er hose (A).
A
21. Inst al l t he cat al yt i c conver t er (see page 11-339).
22. Inst al l t he i nt ake mani f ol d (see page 9-6).
25. Af t er i nst al l at i on, c hec k that all t ubes, hoses, and
connect or s ar e i nst al l ed cor r ect l y.
26. Inspect for f uel l eaks. Tur n t he i gni ti on swi t ch to
ON (II) (do not oper at e t he st ar t er ) so t he f uel pump
r uns f or about 2 sec onds and pr essur i zes t he f uel l i ne.
Repeat t hi s oper at i on t hr ee t i mes, t hen c hec k f or f uel
l eakage at any poi nt in t he f uel l i ne.
28. Chec k for f l ui d l eaks.
29. Do t he engi ne cont rol modul e (ECM)/power t r ai n
cont rol modul e (PCM) i dle l ean pr ocedur e (see page
11-293).
pattern l ean pr ocedur e (see page 11-5).
32. Inspect t he i gni ti on t i mi ng (see page 4-19).
6-47
Cyli nder Head
Seal i ng Bolt Inst al l at i on
NOTE: When i nst al l i ng t he seal i ng bolt, al ways use a
new washer .
74 N-m (7.5 kgf-m, 54 Ibfft)
6-48
Cylinder Head - PZEV Model
Cylinder Head
Special Tools . 6-50
Co mpo nent L oc at i on I ndex . ... .6-51
Engi ne Co mpr es s i o n Inspec t i on 6-54
VTE C Roc ker Ar m Tes t . .6-55
VTC Ac t uat or Inspec t i on 6-57
Val v e Cl ear anc e Adj us t ment 6-58
Cr ankshaf t Pul l ey Remo v al and Inst al l at i on. 6-61
Cam Chai n Remo v al . 6-62
Cam Chai n Inst al l at i on. . 6-64
Cam Chai n Aut o-t ens i oner Remov al and I ns t al l at i on. 6-69
Cam Ch ai n Cas e Oi l S eal Inst al l at i on . ..6-71
Cam Chai n Inspec t i on 6-72
Cy l i nder Head Cov er Remo v al . .. 6-73
Cy l i nder Head Cov er Inst al l at i on .6-74
Cy l i nder Head Remov al ..6-76
CMP Pul s e Pl at e A Repl ac ement . . 6-78
CMP Pul s e Pl at e B Repl ac ement . 6-79
VTC Ac t uat or , Ex h aus t Cams h af t Spr oc k et
Repl ac ement 6-79
Cy l i nder Head Inspec t i on f or War pag e .6-80
Roc ker Ar m As s emb l y Remo v al 6-81
Roc ker Ar m and Shaf t Di s as s emb l y / Reas s emb l y 6-82
Roc ker Ar m and Shaf t Inspec t i on 6-83
Cams h af t Inspec t i on 6-84
Val v e, S pr i ng , and Val v e S eal Remo v al 6-86
Val v e I ns pec t i o n. . 6-87
Val v e S t em-t o-Gui de Cl ear anc e Inspec t i on 6-88
Val v e Gui de Repl ac ement 6-88
Val v e S eat Rec ondi t i oni ng 6-90
Val v e, S pr i ng , and Val v e S eal Inst al l at i on 6-92
Roc ker Ar m As s emb l y Inst al l at i on .6-93
Cy l i nder Head Inst al l at i on 6-94
S eal i ng Bol t Inst al l at i on . 6-97
Cyli nder Head
Speci al Tool s
Ref .No. Tool Number Desc r i pt i on Ot y
07742-0010100 Val ve Gui de Dr i ver , 5.35 x 9.7 mm 1

07746-0010400 At t achment , 52 x 55 mm 1
07749-0010000 Dr i ver Handl e, 15x 135L 1

07757-PJ1010A Val ve Spr i ng Compr es s or At t achment 1
07AAB-RJ AA100 Cr ankshaf t Pul l ey Hol der 1
07AAB-RWCA120 Camshaf t Lock Pi n Set 1

07AAJ-PNAA101 Ai r Pr essur e Regul at or 1

07AAJ -RWCA100 Cam Chai n Inspect i on Gauge 1

07HAH-PJ7A100 Val ve Gui de Reamer , 5.5 mm 1
07JAA-001020A Soc ket , 19 mm 1

07JAB-001020B Handl e, 6-25-660L 1
07MAA-PR70110 Adj ust er 1
07MAA-PR70120 Locknut Wr enc h 1
07PAD-0010000 St em Seal Dr i ver , 30 mm 1
07ZAJ-PNAA101 VTE C Ai r Adapt er
07ZAJ-PNAA200 VTE C Ai r St opper 1
07ZAJ-PNAA300 Ai r Joi nt Adapt er 1
<D
. .
@ @

6-50
IGNITION COIL COVER
CYLINDER HEAD COVER
Removal , page 6-73
CAM CHAIN
Removal , page 6-62
CAM CHAIN GUIDE B
CAM CHAIN GUIDE A
O-RING
VARIABLE VALVE
TIMING CONTROL
(VTC) OIL CONTROL
SOLENOID VALVE
TENSIONER ARM
CAM CHAIN AUTO-TENSIONER
CRANKSHAFT PULLEY
Removal and
CHAIN CASE
Oi l Seal Inst al l at i on, page 6-71
CHAIN CASE COVER
CRANKSHAFT
PULLEY BOLT
Removal and
(cont ' d)
6-51
Cyli nder Head
Component Location Index (cont'd)
CAMS HAFT HOL DERS
DOWEL PINS
CMP PUL S E PL ATE B
EXHAUST CAMS HAFT SPROCKET
CMP PUL S E PL ATE A
CAM CHAIN GUI DE B
VTC ACTUATOR
Repl ac ement , page 6- 79
DOWEL PINS
ROCK ER ARM A S S E MB L Y
VTEC Rocker Ar m Test , page 6- 55
Removal , page 6-81
S EAL I NG BOL T
r0m n e m u v ai , page o-o i
X)\ Rocker Ar m and Shaf t
M Di sassembl y/ Reassembl y, page 6- 82
1 Rocker Ar m and Shaf t Inspec t i on, page 6- 83
Inst al l at i on, page 6- 93
6-52
VA L VE COTTERS
S PRI NG RETAI NER
E XHAUS T VA L VE S PRI NG (gF
CY LINDER HEAD BOL T
Inspection, step 6 on page 6-94
I NTAK E VA L VE SPRING
Removal, page 6-86
i j / I NTAK E VAL VE S E A L
S gS ' Removal, page 6-86
mjif Installation, page 6-92
^ INTAK E VA L VE GUI DE
Valve Stem to Guide
Clearance Inspection, page 6-88
L OS T MOTION A S S E MB L Y
ROCK ER ARM OI L CONTROL
S OL ENOI D FI L TER
HEAT SHI EL D
STRAI NER
VTC FIL TER
CYL I NDER HEAD
Removal, page 6-76
EXHAUS T VA L VE
Removal, page 6-86
J nsepction, page 6-87
ROCK ER ARM OIL
CONTROL S OL ENOI D
CYL I NDER HEAD GA S K E T
COOL ANT S EPARATOR
6-
Cyli nder Head
Engine Compression Inspection
NOTE; Af t er t hi s i nspec t i on, you must r eset t he
power t r ai n cont rol modul e (PCM), ot her wi se t he PCM
wi l l cont i nue to st op t he f uel i nj ect ors f r om oper at i ng.
1. War m up t he engi ne t onor mal operat i ng t emper at ur e
(cool i ng f an c omes on).
dat a.l i nk connect or (DLC) (see st ep 2 on page 11-3).
5. Make sur e t he HDS c ommuni c at es, wi t h t he vehi c l e
and t he PCM. If it does not c ommuni c at e,
6. Sel ec t AL L I NJ ECTORS S TOP i n t he PGM-FI,
8. Remove t he f our i gni t i on coi l s (see page 4-20).
9. Remove t he f our spar k pl ugs.
10. At t ach a c ompr essi on gauge to t he spar k pl ug hol e.
11. St ep.on t he accel er at or pedal to open t he throttle
f ul l y, t hen cr ank t he engi ne wi t h t he st art er mot or , and
measur e t he c ompr essi on.
Compr essi on Pr essur e:
Above 932 kPa (9.5 k gf / c m
2
, 135 psi )
12. Measur e t he c ompr essi on on t he r emai ni ng c yl i nder s.
Maxi mum Var i at i on: .'
Wi t hi n 196 kPa (2,0 k gf / c m
2
, 28 psi )
13. If t he c ompr essi on i s not wi t hi n speci f i cat i ons, check
t he f ol l owi ng i t ems, t hen r emeasu r at he
c ompr essi on.
Incorrect val ve c l ear anc e
Conf i r mat i on of c am t i mi ng
Damaged of wor n c am l obes
Damaged or wor n
;
val ves and seat s
Damaged or wor n pi st on r i ngs
Damaged or wor n pi st on and cyl i nder bore
14. Remove t he c ompr essi on gauge f rom t he spar k pl ug
hol e.
15. Install t he f our spar k pl ugs. *
16. Inst al l t he f our i gni ti on coi l s (see page 4-20).
17. Sel ec t PCM r eset (see page 11-4) in t he PGM-FI,
. INSPECTION menu AL L I NJ ECTORS S TOP wi t h t he
HDS.
6-54
VTEC locker Arm Test
VTEC Ai r St opper 07ZAJ-PNAA200
. VTEC Ai r Adapt er 07ZAJ-PNAA101 (2)
Ai r Joi nt Adapt er 07ZAJ-PNAA300
-Ai r Pr essur e Regul at or 07AAJ-PNAA101
1. St art t he engi ne, and let it run f or 5 mi nut es, t hen t urn
t he i gni ti on swi t ch to L OCK (0).
2. Remove t he cyl i nder head cover {see page 6-73).
3. Set t he No. 1 pi st on at t op dead cent er (TDC) (see st ep
5 on page 6-62).
4. Intake si de: Move t he sec ondar y rocker ar m (A) f or t he
No. 1 cyl i nder . The sec ondar y rocker ar m shoul d
move i ndependent l y of t he mi d rocker ar m (B).
If t he sec ondar y rocker ar m moves f r eel y, go to st ep
5.
i ndependent l y, r emove t he mi d, pr i mar y, and
sec ondar y rocker ar ms as an assembl y, and check
that t he pi st ons i n t he rocker ar ms move smoot hl y.
If any rocker ar m needs r epl aci ng, r epl ace t he mi d,
pr i mar y, and sec ondar y rocker ar ms as an
5. Exhaust si de: Move t he sec ondar y rocker ar m (A) f or
t he No. 1 cyl i nder . The sec ondar y rocker ar m shoul d
move i ndependent l y of t he pr i mar y rocker ar m (B).
If t he sec ondar y rocker ar m moves f r eel y, go t o st ep
6.
i ndependent l y, r emove t he pr i mar y and t he
sec ondar y rocker ar ms as an assembl y, and c hec k
t hat t he pi st ons in t he rocker ar ms move smoot hl y.
If any rocker ar m needs r epl ac i ng, r epl ace t he
pr i mar y and t he sec ondar y rocker ar ms as an
6. Repeat st ep 4 t hr ough 5 on t he r emai ni ng sec ondar y
rocker ar ms wi t h each pi st on at TDC. When all t he
sec ondar y rocker ar ms pass t he t est , go to st ep 7.
7. Chec k that t he ai r pr essur e on t he shop ai r
c ompr essor gauge i ndi cat es over 400 kPa
(4.0 kgf /cm
2
, 57 psi ).
8. Inspect t he val ve cl ear ance (see page 6-58).
(cont' d)
6-55
Cyli nder Head
VTEC Rocker Ar m Test (cont' d)
9. Remove t he seal i ng bolt (A) f r om t he rel i ef hol e, and
i nst al l t he VTEC ai r st opper (B).
B C
07ZAJ-PNAA200 07ZAJ-PNAA101
10. Remove t he No. 3 c amshaf t hol der bol t s, and i nst al l
t he VTE C ai r adapt er s (C) f i nger-t i ght .
11. Connec t t he ai r j oi nt adapt er (D) and t he ai r pr essur e
r egul at or (E).
12. L oosen t he val ve on t he ai r pr essur e regul at or, and
appl y t he speci f i ed ai r pr essur e.
Spec i f i ed Ai r Pr essur e:
290 kPa (3.0 k g f / c m
2
, 42 psi )
NOTE: If t he rocker ar m pi st on does not move after
appl yi ng ai r pr essur e; move t he r ocker ar m up and
down manual l y by rotati ng t he cr ankshaf t c l oc kwi se.
13. Intake si de: Wi t h t he speci f i ed ai r pr essur e appl i ed,
move t he sec ondar y rocker ar m (A) for t he No. 1
cyl i nder . The mi d rocker ar m (B), t he pr i mar y rocker
ar m (C), and t he sec ondar y rocker ar m shoul d move
t oget her .
If t he mi d, t he pr i mar y, and t he sec ondar y rocker
ar ms move t oget her, go to st ep 14.
If t he mi d and pr i mar y rocker ar ms do not move
t oget her wi t h t he sec ondar y rocker ar m, r emove
t he mi d, pr i mar y, and sec ondar y rocker ar ms as an
assembl y, and c hec k that t he pi st ons in t he rocker
ar ms move smoot hl y. If any rocker ar m needs
r epl ac i ng, r epl ace t he mi d, pr i mar y, and sec ondar y
r ocker ar ms as an assembl y, t hen ret est .
6-56
VTC Actuator Inspection
14. Exhaust si de: Wi t h t he speci f i ed ai r pr essur e appl i ed,
move t he sec ondar y rocker ar m (A) f or t he No. 1
cyl i nder . The pr i mar y rocker ar m (B) and t he
sec ondar y rocker ar m shoul d move t oget her.
If t he pr i mar y and t he sec ondar y rocker ar ms move
t oget her, go to st ep 15.
If t he pr i mar y rocker ar ms do not move t oget her
wi t h t he sec ondar y rocker ar m, r emove t he pr i mar y
and t he sec ondar y rocker ar ms as an assembl y, and
check t hat t he pi st ons i n t he rocker ar ms move
smoot hl y. If any r ocker ar m needs r epl aci ng,
r epl ace t he pr i mar y and t he sec ondar y rocker ar ms
as an assembl y, t hen ret est .
15. Repeat st ep 13 t hr ough 14 on t he r emai ni ng
sec ondar y rocker ar ms wi t h each pi st on at TDC. When
all t he sec ondar y rocker ar ms pass t he t est , go to st ep
16.
16. Remove t he ai r pr essur e regul at or, t he ai r j oi nt
adapt er , t he VTEC ai r adapt er, and t he VTEC ai r
st opper .
17. Tor que t he c amshaf t hol der mount i ng bol t s to 22 N-m
(2.2 k gf m, 16 Ibfft).
18. Tor que t he seal i ng bolt to 10 Nm (1.0 kgf-m, 1 A Ibf f t ).
19. Install t he cyl i nder head cover (see page 6-74).
2. Loosen t he r ocker ar m adj ust i ng s c r ews (see st ep 2 on
page 6-81).
3. Remove t he c amshaf t hol der (see st ep 3 on page
6-81).
4. Remove t he i nt ake camshaf t .
5. Check t hat t he var i abl e val ve t i mi ng cont rol (VTC)
act uat or i s l ocked by t urni ng t he VTC act uat or
c ount er c l oc kwi se. If it i s not l ocked, t ur n t he VTC
act uat or c l oc kwi se unti l it st ops, t hen r echeck it. If it i s
sti ll not l ocked, r epl ace t he VTC act uat or.
6. Seal t he ret ard hol es (A) in t he No. 1 c amshaf t j our nal
wi t h t ape and a wi r e t i e.
7. Seal one of t he advanc e hol es (A) wi t h t ape.
A
(cont' d)
6-57
Cf Under Head
VTC Actuator Inspection (cont' d) Val ve Clearance Adj ust ment
8. Appl y ai r to t he unseal ed advanc e hol e to r el ease t he
lock.
9. Chec k that t he VTC act uat or moves smoot hl y. If t he
VTC act uat or does not move smoot hl y, r epl ace t he
VTC act uat or.
10. Remove t he wi r e t i e, t he t ape, and t he adhesi ve
r esi due f r om t he No. 1 c amshaf t j our nal .
11. Make sur e t he punch mar ks on t he VTC act uat or and
t he exhaust c amshaf t spr ocket are f aci ng up, t hen set
t he c amshaf t s in t he cyl i nder head (see st ep 7 on page
6-93).
12. Set t he c amshaf t hol der s and c am c hai n gui de B i n
pl ace (see st ep 8 on page 6-93).
13. Ti ght en t he c amshaf t hol der bolts to t he speci f i ed
t or que (see st ep 9 on page 6-93).
VTC act uat or by t urni ng it.
15. Inst al l t he c am chai n (see page 6-64).
16. Adj ust t he val ve c l ear anc e (see page 6-58).
. Locknut Wr enc h 07MAA-PR70120
. Adj ust er 07MAA-PR70110
NOTE: Connec t t he Honda Di agnost i c Sy s t em (HDS) to
t he dat a link connect or (DLC) and moni t or t he engi ne
cool ant t emper at ur e (ECT) sensor 1 wi t h t he HDS. Adj ust
t he val ve c l ear anc e onl y when t he ECT sensor 1
t emper at ur e i s l ess t han 100 F (38 C).
punch mark (A) on t he var i abl e val ve t i mi ng cont rol
8-58
3. Sel ec t t he cor r ect f eel er gauge for t he val ve c l ear anc e
you ar e goi ng to check.
Val ve Cl ear anc e
i nt ake: 0.21 - 0 . 2 5 mm (0. 008-0. 010 In)
Ex h aus t 0. 25- 0. 29 mm (0.010-0.011 i n)
No. 1
EXHAUS T
No. 2 No. 3 No. 4
No. 1 No. 2 No. 3
INTAK E
No. 4
4. Insert t he f eel er gauge (A) bet ween t he adj ust i ng
s c r ew (B) and t he end of t he val ve st em, and sl i de it
back and f ort h; you shoul d f eel a sl i ght amount of
dr ag.
5. If you f eel t oo muc h or t oo little dr ag, l oosen t he
l ocknut wi t h t he l ocknut wr enc h and t he adj ust er , and
t urn t he adj ust i ng s c r ew unti l t he dr ag on t he f eel er
gauge i s cor r ect .
07MAA-PR70110
07MAA-PR70120
6. Ti ght en t he l ocknut to t he speci f i ed torque, and
r echeck t he c l ear anc e. Repeat t he adj ust ment if
nec essar y.
Int ake:
7 x 0.75 mm
14 N-m (1.4 kgf -m, 10 Ibf f t )
Exhaust :
7 x 0.75 mm
14 N-m (1.4 kgf -m, 10 Ibf f t )
(cont ' d)
8-53
Cyli nder Head
Val ve Clearance Adjustment (cont'd)
t ur ns 90 ).
t ur ns 90 ).
t ur ns 90 ).
6-60
Crankshaft Pulley Removal and Installation
. Handl e, 6-25-660L 07JAB-001020B
. Cr ankshaf t Pul l ey Hol der 07AAB-RJAA100
Soc ket , 19 mm 07JAA-001020A or equi val ent
Removal
1 . Remove t he front wheel s.
4. Hold t he pul l ey wi t h t he handl e, 6-25-660L (A) and t he
cr ankshaf t pul l ey hol der (B).
5. Remove t he bolt wi t h a socket , 19 mm (C) and a
br eaker bar, t hen r emove t he crankshaf t pul l ey.
Inst al l at i on
1. Cl ean t he cr ankshaf t pul l ey (A), t he crankshaf t (B), t he
bolt (C), and t he was her (D). Lubr i cat e wi t h new
engi ne oi l as s hown.
O : Cl ean
0 : Lubr i c at e
2. Install the cr ankshaf t pul l ey, and hol der t he pul l ey
wi t h t he handl e (A) and t he cr ankshaf t pul l ey hol der
(B).
3. Tor que t he bolt to 49 N-m (5.0 kgf-m, 36 Ibf-ft) wi t h a
t orque wr enc h and socket , 19 mm (C). Do not use an
i mpact wr enc h. If t he pul l ey bolt or crankshaf t ar e
new, t orque t he bolt to 177 N-m (18.0 kgf-m, 130 Ibf-ft),
t hen r emove t he bolt and t or que it to 49 N-m (5.0
kgf-m, 36 Ibf-ft).
4. Ti ght en t he pul l ey bolt an addi t i onal 90 .
6. Install t he spl ash shi el d (see st ep 47 on page 5-20).
7. Install t he front wheel s.
6-61
Cyli nder Head
Cam Chain Removal
NOTE: Keep t he c am chai n away f r om magnet i c f i el ds.
punch mark (A) on t he var i abl e val ve t i mi ng cont r ol
(VTC) act uat or and t he punc h mar k (B) on t he exhaust
C
6. Di sconnect t he VTC oi l cont rol sol enoi d val ve
connect or (A) and r emove t he har ness c l amp (B).
B
7. Remove t he VTC oi l cont rol sol enoi d val ve (see page
11-273).
8. Remove t he cr ankshaf t pul l ey (see page 6-61).
9. Suppor t t he engi ne wi t h a j ack and a wood block
under t he oil pan.
10. Remove t he gr ound cabl e (A), t hen r emove t he si de
engi ne mount bracket (B).
11. Remove t he si de engi ne mount bracket mount i ng
bol t s.
6-82
12. Remove t he c am chai n c as e (A) and spac er (B).
13. Loosel y i nst all t he cr ankshaf t pul l ey.
14. Tur n t he crankshaf t count er cl ockwi se to c ompr ess t he
aut o-t ensi oner .
pi n (P/N 14511-PNA-003) (C) i nto t he hol es. Tur n t he
cr ankshaf t c l oc kwi se to sec ur e t he pi n.
(cont ' d)
6-63
Cyli nder Head
Cam Chain Removal (cont' d)
17. Remove c am c hai n gui de B.
18. Remove c am c hai n gui de A and t he t ensi oner ar m (B).
19. Remove t he c am c hai n.
Cam Chain Installation
Camshaf t Lock Pi n Set 07AAB-RWCA120
NOTE:
Keep t he c am c hai n away f r om magnet i c f i el ds.
Bef ore doi ng t hi s pr ocedur e, check that t he var i abl e
val ve t i mi ng cont r ol (VTC) act uat or i s l ocked by
t urni ng t he VTC act uat or count er cl ockwi se. If not
l ocked, t urn t he VTC act uat or c l oc kwi se unti l it st ops,
t hen r echeck it. If it i s sti ll not l ocked, r epl ace t he VTC
act uat or.
2. Set t he c amshaf t s to TDC. The punch mark (A) on t he
VTC act uat or and t he punch mark (B) on t he exhaust
6-64
3. To hol d t he i ntake c amshaf t , i nsert a c amshaf t lock pi n
set (P/N 07AAB-RWCA120) (A) into t he mai nt enance
hol e in camshaf t posi t i on (CMP) pul se plate A (B) and
t hr ough t he No. 5 r ocker shaft hol der (C).
07AAB-RWCA120
4. To hol d t he exhaust camshaf t , i nsert a c amshaf t lock
pi n (A) into t he mai nt enance hol e in CMP pul se plate B
(D) and t hrough t he No. 5 rocker shaf t hol der (C).
5. Install t he c am chai n on t he cr ankshaf t spr ocket wi t h
t he col or ed link plate (A) al i gned wi t h t he mark (B) on
t he cr ankshaf t spr ocket .
6. Install t he c am chai n on t he VTC act uat or and t he
exhaust c amshaf t spr ocket wi t h t he punch mar ks (A)
al i gned wi t h t he cent er of t he t wo col or ed link pl at es
(B).
7. Install c am chai n gui de A and t he t ensi oner ar m (B).
6 x 1.0 mm
12 N m
(1.2 kgf-m,
8.7 i bf f t )
8 x 1.25 mm
22 N-m
(2.2 kgf-m,
16 Ibf f t )
(cont' d)
6-65
Cf li nder Head
Cam Chain installation (cont'd)
8. Inst al l c am c hai n gui de B.
9. Compr es s t he aut o-t ensi oner when r epl aci ng t he c am
c hai n. Remove t he pi n (P/N 1451 t -PNA-003).(A) f r om
t he aut o-t ensi oner t hat was i nst al l ed dur i ng r emoval .
Tur n t he pl at e f B) c ount er c l oc kwi se, to r el ease t he
l ock, t hen pr es s t he rod (C), and set t he f i rst c am (D) to
t he f i r st edge of t he rack (E). Inser t t he 1.2 mm (0.05 i n)
di amet er pi n or l ock pi n i nto t he hol es (F).
(1.2 kgf m, 8.7 Ibf-ft)
11 Remove t he pi n or lock pi n f r om t he aut o-t ensi oner .
6-66
12. Remove t he c amshaf t lock pi n set .
13. Check t he chai n c as e oi l seal f or damage. If t he oi l seal
i s damaged, r epl ace t he chai n c ase oi l seal { see page
6-71).
15. Cl ean and dry t he c hai n c ase mat i ng sur f ac es.
16. Appl y l i qui d gasket , P/N 08717-0004, 08718-0003, or
08718-0009 t o the engi ne block mat i ng sur f ac e of t he
c hai n c as e, and to t he i nsi de edge of t he t hr eaded bolt
hol es, i nst al l t he component wi t hi n 5 mi nut es of
appl yi ng t he li qui d gasket .
NOTE:
Appl y a 3 mm (0.12 in) di amet er bead of l i qui d
l i qui d gasket , r emove t he old l i qui d gasket and
r esi due, t hen reappl y new li qui d gasket .
H? d 3 mm 7 '
(
'
4 3 m )
[ ) (0.12 i n) r " 3 mm
I r - ^ - L
T
i- (0.12 i n)
' A ' B,C
1
17. Appl y l i qui d gasket to t he engi ne bl ock upper sur f ace
cont act ar eas (B) on t he chai n c as e and l ower block
upper sur f ace cont act ar eas (C) on t he chai n c ase.
08718-0009 to t he oi l pan mat i ng sur f ace of t he chai n
c as e, and to t he i nsi de edge of t he t hr eaded bolt
hol es. Install t he component wi t hi n 5 mi nut es of
appl yi ng t he li qui d gasket .
NOTE:
l i qui d gasket , r emove t he old l i qui d gasket and
r esi due, t hen reappl y new l i qui d gasket .
_lv ) _ (0.12 i n)
A '
(cont' d)
6-67
Cyli nder Head
Cam Chai n i nst allat i on (cont' d)
19. Inst al l t he spac er (A), t hen i nst all t he new O-r i ng (B)
on t he c hai n c as e. Set t he edge of t he c hai n c as e (C) to
t he edge of t he oi l pan {D), t hen i nst al l t he c hai n c as e
on t he engi ne bl ock (E). Wi pe off t he ex c es s l i qui d
gasket on t he oi l pan and chai n c ase mat i ng sur f ac e.
NOTE:
When i nst al l i ng t he chai n c as e, do not sl i de t he
bottom sur f ac e onto t he oi l pan mount i ng sur f ac e.
wi t h oi l .
i nst al l i ng t he c hai n c as e.
20. Inst al l t he si de engi ne mount bracket , t hen t i ght en t he
si de engi ne mount bracket mount i ng bol t s.
21. Ti ght en t he new si de engi ne mount bracket mount i ng
bolts in t he number ed sequenc e shown.
1 2 x 1 . 2 5 mm
64 N m {6.5 kgf -m, 47 Ibf f t )
22. Install t he gr ound cabl e.
6-68
and installation
24. Inst al l t he cr ankshaf t pul l ey (see page 6-61).
25. Install t he VTC oi l cont rol sol enoi d val ve (see page
11-273).
26. Connec t t he VTC oi l cont rol sol enoi d val ve connect or
(A) and i nst al l t he har ness c l amp (B).
27. Install t he cyl i nder head c over (see page 6-74).
30. Install t he f ront wheel s.
pattern l earn pr ocedur e (see page 11-5).
Removal
1 _ Remove t he c hai n c as e c over .
aut o-t ensi oner .
(cont' d)
6-69
Cf Under Head
cr ankshaf t c l oc kwi se to sec ur e t he pi n.
and i nst al l at i on (cont' d)
Inst al l at i on
posi t i on ar e not al i gned, set t he f i rst c am to t he f i rst
edge of t he rack (see st ep 9 on page 6-66).
6 x 1.0 mm
12 N-m (1.2 k g f m, 8.7 Ibf-ft)
2. Remove t he 1.2 mm (0.05 in) di amet er pi n or lock pi n
(P/N 14511-PNA- 003) f r om t he aut o-t ensi oner .
c over mat i ng sur f ac es, t he bol t s, and t he bolt hol es.
4. Cl ean and dry t he c hai n c ase c over mat i ng sur f ac es.
6-70
Cam Chai n Case Oi l Seal
Inst al l at i on
5. Appl y li qui d gasket , P/N 08717-0004,08718-0003, or
08718-0009 to t he chai n c ase mat i ng sur f ace of t he
chai n c ase c over , and to t he i nsi de edge of t he
t hr eaded bolt hol es. Inst al l t he component wi t hi n 5
mi nut es of appl yi ng t he li qui d gasket .
NOTE:
li qui d gasket , r emove t he ol d li qui d gasket and
r esi due, t hen r eappl y new li qui d gasket .
6. Install t he chai n c ase cover .
NOTE:
wi t h oi l .
Do not run t he engi ne for at l east 3 hour s after
i nst al l i ng t he chai n c as e cover .
. Dri ver Handl e, 15 x 135L 07749-0010000
At t achment , 52 x 55 mm 07746-0010400
1. Cl ean and dry t he cr ankshaf t oi l seal .
c hai n c as e oi l seal .
3. Us e t he dr i ver handl e, 15 x 135L and t he at t achment ,
52 x 55 mm to dr i ve a new oi l seal squar el y into t he
chai n c as e t o t he speci f i ed i nst al l ed hei ght .
4. Measur e t he di st ance bet ween t he c hai n c as e sur f ace
(A) and t he oi l seal (B).
Oil Seal Installed Height:
32.4-33.1 mm (1.28-1.30 in)
32.433.1 mm
( 1. 28- 1. 30 i n)
6-71
Cf linder Head
Cam Chain Inspection
Cam Chai n i nspect i on Gauge 07AAJ-RWCA100
4. Rot at e t he cr ankshaf t pul l ey t wo t ur ns c l oc kwi se.
punch mark (A) on t he var i abl e val ve t i mi ng cont r ol
c
6. Measur e t he c l ear anc e bet ween t he c am c hai n (A) and
t he t ensi oner ar m (B) wi t h t he c am c hai n i nspect i on
gauge (07AAJ-RWCA100).
If t he c l ear anc e i s OK, go to st ep 17.
If t he c l ear anc e i s mor e t han t he ser vi c e li mi t, go t o
st ep 7.
Chai n-t o-Ar m Cl ear anc e
MIL on wi t h P0341: 4.3 mm (0.17 i n)
Wi t hout MIL: 5.5 mm (0.22 i n)
07AAJ -RWCA100
under t he engi ne block.
NOTE: Do not hit t he oi l pump and t he baffle plate
when pl aci ng t he j ack on t he edge of t he engi ne bl ock.
9. Remove t he c am chai n (see page 6-62), and check t he
t eet h on t he cr ankshaf t spr ocket , t he VTC act uat or ,
and t he exhaust c amshaf t spr ocket f or wear and
damage. If any of t hem ar e wor n or damaged, r epl ace
if nec essar y.
10. Chec k t he oi l passage on t he aut o-t ensi oner f or c l ogs.
. If t he aut o-t ensi oner i s c l ogged, r epl ace it.
6-72
11 _ Measur e t he length of t he oi l pump chai n
aut o-t ensi oner r od.
12. If t he lengt h i s over t he ser vi c e l i mi t , r epl ace t he oi l
pump chai n (see page 8-25). When r epl aci ng, c hec k
t he t eet h on t he cr ankshaf t spr ocket and t he oi l pump
spr ocket for wear and damage, if any of t hem ar e
wor n or damaged, r epl ace if nec essar y.
13. Chec k t he oi l passage on t he oi l pump chai n
aut o-t ensi oner f or c l ogs. If t he aut o-t ensi oner i s
c l ogged, r epl ace it.
14. Inst al l t he new c am c hai n (see page 6-64).
17. Inst al l t he cyl i nder head cover (see page 6-74).
Cf Under Head Cover Mmmmm
20-306).
2. Remove t he engi ne c over .
3. Remove t he f our i gni t i on coi l s (see page 4-20).
4. Remove t he di pst i ck (A), and t he power st eer i ng (P/S)
hose bracket (B) and di sc onnec t t he breat her hose (C)
and t he brake boost er vac uum hose (D).
B
5. Remove t he t wo bol t s (E) sec ur i ng t he evapor at i ve
(cont ' d)
6-73
Cyli nder Head
Cyl i nder Head Cover Removal
(cont' d)
6. Remove t he cyl i nder head cover .
Cyl i nder Head Cover Installati on
1. Thor oughl y cl ean t he head cover gasket and t he
gr oove.
2. Inst al l t he head c over gasket (A) in t he gr oove of t he
cyl i nder head c over (B). -
3. Chec k that t he mat i ng sur f ac es are c l ean and dry.
4. Appl y li qui d gasket , P/N 08717-0004, 08718-0003, or
08718-0009, on t he chai n c ase and t he No. 5 rocker
shaf t hol der mat i ng ar eas (A). Install t he c omponent
wi t hi n 5 mi nut es of appl yi ng t he li qui d gasket .
NOTE: If t oo muc h t i me has passed after appl yi ng t he
l i qui d gasket , r emove t he ol d li qui d gasket and
6-74
5. Set t he spar k pl ug seal s (A) on t he spar k pl ug t ubes.
Pl ace t he c yl i nder head cover (B) on t he cyl i nder head,
t hen sl i de t he c over sl i ght l y back and forth to seat t he
head c over gasket .
6. Inspect t he c over was her s (C). Repl ac e any was her
t hat i s damaged or det eri orat ed.
7. Ti ght en t he bol t s i n t hree st eps. In t he f i nal st ep
t or que al l bol t s, i n sequenc e, to 12 N-m (1.2 kgf -m,
8.7 Ibf f t ).
NOTE:
wi t h oi l .
i nst al l i ng t he head cover .
8. Inst al l t he t wo bol t s (A) sec ur i ng t he evapor at i ve
emi ssi on (EVAP) cani st er pur ge val ve bracket .
9. Connec t t he br eat her hose (B) and t he brake boost er
vac uum hose (C) and i nst al l t he power st eer i ng (P/S)
hose bracket (D), and t he di pst i ck (E).
10. Inst al l t he f our i gni ti on coi l s (see page 4-20).
11. Inst al l t he engi ne cover .
6 x 1.0 mm
12Nm
(1.2 kgf-m,
8.7 Ibfft)
6-75
Cyli nder Head
Cf Under Head Removal
NOTE:
Us e f ender c over s t o avoi d damagi ng pai nt ed
sur f ac es.
To avoi d damage, unpl ug t he wi r i ng c onnec t or s
car ef ul l y whi l e hol di ng t he connect or port i on.
Connec t t he Honda Di agnost i c Syst em (HDS) to t he
dat a link connect or (DLC), and moni t or t he engi ne
cool ant t emper at ur e (ECT) sensor 1. To avoi d
damagi ng t he cyl i nder head, wai t unti l t he E CT sensor
1 t emper at ur e dr ops bel ow 100 F (38 C) bef ore
l ooseni ng t he cyl i nder head bol t s.
Mark all wi r i ng and hos es to avoi d mi sc onnec t i on.
Al s o, be sur e t hat t hey do not cont act ot her wi r i ng or
hos es , or i nt erf ere wi t h any ot her part s.
20-306).
3. Dr ai n t he engi ne cool ant (see page 10-6).
6. Remove t he cat al yt i c conver t er (see page 11-339).
7. Di sc onnec t t he evapor at i ve emi ssi on (EVAP) cani st er
hose (A).
A
9. Di sc onnec t t he f our f uel i nj ect or c onnec t or s (A), t he
and r emove t he gr ound c abl es (C).
6-76
10. Remove t he f our bolts sec ur i ng t he EVAP c ani st er
purge val ve bracket.
11. Di sconnect t he upper radi at or hose (A), t he heat er
hoses (B), and t he wat er bypass hose (C).
12. Remove t he t wo bol t s (A) sec ur i ng t he connect i ng
pi pe.
13. Di sconnect t he wat er bypass hose (B).
14. Di sconnect t he f ol l owi ng engi ne wi r e har ness
c onnec t or s, and r emove t he wi r e har ness c l amps
f r om t he cyl i nder head:
connect or
connect or
Camshaf t posi t i on (CMP) s ens or B (Exhaust )
connect or
Two rocker ar m oi l cont rol sol enoi d connect or s
Two rocker ar m oi l pr essur e swi t ch connect or s
EVAP cani st er purge val ve connect or
Engi ne oi l pr essur e swi t c h connect or
(cont' d)
6-77
Cyli nder Head
Cyl i nder Head Removal (cont'd)
17. Remove t he cyl i nder head bol t s. To pr event war page,
l oosen t he bol t s i n sequenc e 1/3 t ur n at a t i me; r epeat
t he sequenc e unti l all bol t s are l oosened.

18. Remove t he cyl i nder head.
CMP Pul se Plate A Repl acement
2. Remove c amshaf t posi t i on (CMP) sensor A (see page
11-274).
l oosen t he bolt.
4. Remove CMP pul se plate A.
Apply new engine oil to
the bolt threads.
5. Inst al l CMP pul se plate A i n t he r ever se or der of
r emoval .
6-78
CMP Pulse Plate B Replacement
2. Remove c amshaf t posi t i on (CMP) sensor B (see page
11-198).
3. Hold t he camshaf t wi t h an open-end wr enc h, t hen
l oosen t he bolt.
4. Remove CMP pul se plate B.
the bolt threads.
5. Install CMP pul se pl at e B i n t he r ever se or der of
r emoval .
VTC Act uat or , Exhaust Camshaf t
Spr ocket Repl acement
Removal
1. Remove t he c am c hai n (see page 6-62).
l oosen t he var i abl e val ve t i mi ng cont rol (VTC)
3. If t he VTC act uat or wi l l be r eused, do t hese st eps.
-1. Remove t he i ntake c amshaf t , and seal t he ret ard
hol es i n t he No. 1 c amshaf t j our nal wi t h t ape and a
wi r e t i e (see st ep 6 on page 6-57).
-2. Seal one of t he advanc e hol es wi t h t ape (see st ep 7
on page 6-57).
-3. Appl y ai r t o t he unseal ed advanc e hol e t o r el ease
t he lock (see st ep 8 on page 6-58).
-4. Remove t he t ape and adhesi ve r esi due f r om t he
No. 1 c amshaf t j our nal .
4. Remove t he VTC act uat or and t he exhaust c amshaf t
spr ocket .
(cont ' d)
6-79
Cyli nder Head
VTC Act uat or , Exhaust Camshaft
Sprocket Replacement (cont'd)
Inst al l at i on
1. Inst al l t he VTC act uat or and t he exhaust c amshaf t
spr ocket .
NOTE: Inst al l t he VTC act uat or whi l e i n t he unl ocked
posi t i on.
2. Appl y new engi ne oi l to t he t hr eads of t he VTC
mount i ng bolt, t hen i nst al l t hem.
t i ght en t he bol t s.
VTC Ac t uat or Mount i ng Bol t :
12 x 1.25 mm
113 N-m (11.5 k g f m, 83 Ibf-ft)
Exhaust Camshaf t Spr oc ket Mount i ng Bol t :
10x 1. 25 mm -
72 N-m (7.3 k g f m, 53 Ibf-ft)
c l oc kwi se unti l you hear it cl i ck. Make sur e t o lock t he
VTC act uat or by t ur ni ng it.
5. Inst al l t he c am c hai n (see page 6-64).
Cyl i nder Head Inspect i on for
Warpage
2. Inspect t he c amshaf t (see page 6-84).
3. Chec k t he cyl i nder head for war page. Measur e al ong
t he edges, and t hr ee way s ac r oss t he cent er .
If war page i s l ess t han 0.05 mm (0.002 i n) cyl i nder
head r esur f aci ng i s not r equi r ed.
If war page i s bet ween 0.05 mm (0.002 i n) and
0.2 mm (0.008 i n), r esur f ace t he cyl i nder head.
The maxi mum r esur f ace li mi t i s 0.2 mm (0.008 in)
based on a hei ght of 104 mm (4.09 i n).
Cyl i nder Head Hei ght
St andar d (New): 103. 95-104. 05 mm
(4. 093-4. 096 i n)
6-80
Rocker Arm Assembly Removal
1 Remove t he c am c hai n (see page 6-62).
2. Loosen t he r ocker ar m adj ust i ng s c r ews (A).
A
3. Remove t he c amshaf t hol der bol t s. To pr event
damagi ng t he c amshaf t s, l oosen t he bol t s, i n
sequenc e, t wo t ur ns at a t i me.
NOTE: Bolt i s not on all engi nes.
@ @ @

4. Remove c am c hai n gui de B (A), t he c amshaf t hol der s
(B), and t he c amshaf t s (C).
5. Insert t he bolts (A) i nto t he rocker shaf t hol der , t hen
r emove t he rocker ar m assembl y (B).
6-81
Cyli nder Head
Rocker Arm and Shaft Disassembly/Reassembly
NOTE:
Identi fy eac h part as it i s r emoved so t hat eac h i t em c an be r ei nst al l ed i n its or i gi nal l ocat i ons,
a Inspect t he r ocker ar m shaf t and rocker ar ms (see page 6-83).
If r eused, t he r ocker ar ms must be i nst al l ed i n t he or i gi nal l ocat i ons.
When r emovi ng, or i nst al l i ng t he rocker ar m assembl y, do not r emove t he c amshaf t hol der bol t s. The bol t s wi l l keep
t he hol der s and r ocker ar ms on t he shaf t .
Pri or to r eassembl i ng, c l ean al l t he part s i n sol vent , dry t hem, and appl y new engi ne oi l to any cont act poi nt s.
Bundl e t he r ocker ar ms wi t h r ubber bands to keep t hem t oget her as a set .
When r epl aci ng t he VTEC r ocker ar m as s embl y , r emove t he f ast eni ng har dwar e f r om t he new VTEC rocker ar m
assembl y.
EXHAUS T ROCK ER
S HAFT
RUBBER BAND E XHAUS T ROCK ER ARM
A S S E MB L Y
No. 1
ROCK ER
S HAFT HOL DER
No. 5
ROCK ER
S HAFT HOL DER
RUBBER BAND
No. 2 No. 3 No. 4
ROCK ER S HAFT ROCK ER S HAFT ROCK ER S HAFT
HOL DER HOL DER HOL DER
I NTAK E ROCK ER
ARM A S S E MB L Y
_ P l .
INTAK E ROCK ER S HAFT
6-82
Rocker Arm and Shaf t i nspect i on
6-82).
3. Measur e t he di amet er of t he shaf t at t he f i rst rocker
l ocat i on.
4. Zer o t he gauge (A) to t he shaf t di amet er .
5. Measur e t he i nsi de di amet er of t he rocker ar m, and
c hec k it f or an out -of -round condi t i on.
Roc ker Ar m-t o-Shaf t Cl ear anc e
(0.0007-0.0023 i n)
6. Repeat for all i ntake rocker ar ms and i ntake shaf t . If
t he c l ear anc e i s beyond t he ser vi c e li mi t, repl ace t he
r ocker shaf t and all out of ser vi c e li mi t rocker ar ms. If
i nt ake rocker ar ms (pri mary, mi d, and sec ondar y), as
a set .
7. Repeat f or all exhaust rocker ar ms and exhaust shaf t .
If t he c l ear anc e i s beyond t he ser vi c e li mi t, r epl ace t he
r ocker shaf t and all out of ser vi c e li mi t rocker ar ms. If
exhaust rocker ar ms (pri mary and sec ondar y), as a
set .
(cont' d)
6-83
Cyli nder Head
Rocker Ar m and Shaf t Inspect i on
(cont' d)
8. Inspect t he rocker ar m pi st ons (A). Push on eac h
pi st on manual l y. If it does not move smoot hl y,
r epl ace t he rocker ar m set .
NOTE: Appl y new engi ne oi l to t he r ocker ar m pi st ons
when r eassembl i ng.
Int ake si de
Exhaust si de
10. Inst al l t he rocker ar m assembl y (see page 6-93).
Camshaf t Inspect i on
NOTE: Do not rotate t he c amshaf t dur i ng i nspect i on.
6-82).
4. Put t he r ocker shaf t hol der s, t he c amshaf t , and t he
c amshaf t hol der s on t he cyl i nder head, t hen t i ght en
t he bol t s, i n sequenc e, to t he speci f i ed t or que.
NOTE: If t he engi ne does not have bolt , ski p it and
cont i nue t he t or que sequenc e.
8 x 1.25 mm 22 N-m (2.2 kgf -m, 16 Ibf-ft)
6x 1. 0 mm 12 N-m (1.2 k g f m, 8.7 Ibf-ft)
6x 1. 0 mm Bol t s: , ,
6-84
5. Seat t he c amshaf t by pushi ng it away f r om t he
c amshaf t pul l ey end of t he cyl i nder head.
6. Zer o t he di al i ndi cat or agai nst t he end of t he
c amshaf t , t hen push t he c amshaf t back and f or t h, and
r ead t he end pl ay. If t he end pl ay i s beyond t he ser vi c e
li mi t , r epl ace t he cyl i nder head and r echeck. If it i s sti ll
beyond t he ser vi c e li mi t, r epl ace t he camshaf t .
Camshaf t End Pl ay
St andar d (New): 0.050.20 mm (0. 002-0. 008 i n)
7. Loosen t he c amshaf t hol der bol t s t wo t ur ns at a t i me,
i n a c r i ssc r oss pat t ern. Then r emove t he c amshaf t
hol der s f r om t he cyl i nder head.
8. Li ft t he c amshaf t s out of t he cyl i nder head, wi pe t hem
c l ean, t hen i nspec t t he lift r amps. Repl ace t he
c amshaf t if any l obes ar e pi t t ed, sc or ed, or
exc essi vel y wor n.
9. Cl ean t he c amshaf t j our nal sur f ac es i n t he cyl i nder
head, t hen set t he c amshaf t s back i n pl ace. Pl ace a
pl ast i gage st ri p ac r oss eac h j our nal .
10. Inst al l t he c amshaf t hol der s, t hen t i ght en t he bol t s t o
t he speci f i ed t or que as s hown i n st ep 4.
11. Remove t he c amshaf t hol der s. Measur e t he wi dest
por t i on of pl ast i gage on eac h j our nal .
If t he camshaf t -t o-hol der c l ear anc e i s wi t hi n t he
ser vi c e l i mi t s, go to st ep 13.
ser vi c e l i mi t ,; and t he c amshaf t has been r epl ac ed,
r epl ace t he cyl i nder head.
If t he camshaf t -t o-hol der c l ear anc e i s beyond t he *
ser vi c e l i mi t , and t he c amshaf t has not been
r epl ac ed, go to st ep 12.
Camshaf t -t o-Hol der Oi l Cl ear anc e
St andar d (New):
No. 1 Jour nal : .3i .OSS mm
(0.0012-0.0027 i n)
No. 2, 3, 4, 5 Jour nal s: 0.060' 0.099 mm
(0.0024*-0.0039l n)
(cont' d)
6-85
Cyli nder Head
Camshaft Inspection (cont'd)
12. Chec k t he total runout wi t h t he camshaf t suppor t ed
on V-bl oc ks.
If t he total runout of t he c amshaf t i s wi t hi n t he
ser vi c e li mi t , r epl ace t he cyl i nder head.
If t he total runout i s beyond t he ser vi c e l i mi t ,
r epl ace t he c amshaf t and r echeck t he
camshaf t -t o-hol der oi l c l ear anc e. If t he oi l c l ear anc e
i s sti ll beyond t he ser vi c e li mi t, r epl ace t he c yl i nder
head.
Camshaf t Tot al Runout
13. Measur e t he c am l obe hei ght .
Cam Lobe Hei ght St andar d (New):
INTAKE EXHAUS T
PRI 33.744 mm
(1.3285 in)
34.232 mm
(1.3477 i n)
MID 35.456 mm
(1.3959 in)
S E C 33.744 mm
(1.3285 i n)
ZERO LIFT
PRI: Pr i mar y MID: Mi d S E C: Sec ondar y
C/ C: Cam Chai n
INTAK E EXHAUS T
PRI MID SEC PRI S E C
ZERO LIF T)
Valve, Spr i ng, and Val ve Seal
Removal
Identi fy t he val ves and t he val ve spr i ngs as t hey ar e
r emoved s o t hat eac h i tem c an be rei nst al l ed i n its
ori gi nal posi t i on.
3. Usi ng an appr opr i at e-si zed socket (A) and a pl ast i c
mal l et (B), li ghtly tap t he spr i ng ret ai ner to l oosen t he
val ve cot t er s.
4. Install t he val ve spr i ng c ompr essor at t achment and
t he val ve spr i ng c ompr essor . Compr ess t he spr i ng,
and r emove t he val ve cot t er s.
spr i ng c ompr essor at t achment , t hen r emove t he
spr i ng ret ai ner, and t he val ve spr i ng and t he val ves.
6-86
6. Install t he val ve gui de seal r emover .
7. Remove t he val ve seal .
Val ve Inspect i on
2. Measur e t he val ve in t hese ar eas.
Int ake Val ve Di mensi ons
A St andar d (New): 35.8536.15 mm
(1. 411-1. 423 i n)
B St andar d (New): 108.5-109.1 mm
(4.272 - 4. 295 i n)
C St andar d (New): 5.4755.485 mm
(0.2156-0.2159 i n)
Exhaust Val ve Di mensi ons
A St andar d (New): 30. 85- 31. 15 mm
(1. 215-1. 226 i n)
B St andar d (New): 108. 4-109. 0 mm
(4.268-4.291 i n)
C St andar d (New): 5. 450-5. 460 mm
(0.2146-0.2150 i n)
6-87
Cyli nder Head
alve Stem-to-Guide Clearance
Inspection
2. Subt r ac t t he O.D. of t he val ve st em, measur ed wi t h a
mi cr omet er , f r om t he I.D. of t he val ve gui de,
measur ed wi t h an i nsi de mi cr omet er or a ball gauge.
Take t he measur ement s in t hr ee pl ac es al ong t he
val ve st em and t hr ee pl ac es i nsi de t he val ve gui de.
The di f f erence bet ween t he l ar gest gui de
measur ement and t he smal l est st em measur ement
shoul d not exc eed t he ser vi c e l i mi t .
Int ake Val ve St em-t o-Gui de Cl ear anc e
St andar d (New): 0. 030-0. 055 mm
(0.0012 - 0. 0022 i n)
Exhaust Val ve St em-t o-Gui de
Cl ear anc e
(0.0022-0.0031 i n)
Waive Guide Replacement
Val ve Gui de Dri ver, 5.35 x 9.7 mm 07742-0010100 .
Val ve Gui de Reamer , 5.5 mm 07HAH-PJ7A100
6-88).
2. As i l l ust r at ed, use a c ommer c i al l y avai l abl e ai r -i mpact
val ve gui de dr i ver (A) modi f i ed t o fit t he di amet er of
t he val ve gui des. In most c as es , t he s ame pr ocedur e
c an be done usi ng t he val ve gui de dr i ver , 5.35 x 9.7
mm and a convent i onal hammer .
5.3 mm
(0.21 i n)
3C
I 87 mm
f (3.43 i n)"
57 mm
" (2.24 i n)
110.8 mm
(0.42 i n)
3. Sel ec t t he pr oper r epl acement gui des, and chi l l t hem
i n t he f r eezer sect i on of a ref ri gerat or f or at l east an
hour .
4. Us e a hot plate or oven to evenl y heat t he cyl i nder
head t o 300 F (150 C). Moni t or t he t emper at ur e wi t h
a cooki ng t her momet er . Do not get t he head hotter
t han 300 F (150 C); exc essi ve heat may l oosen t he
val ve seat s.
6-88
5. Wor ki ng f rom t he camshaf t si de, use t he dr i ver and an
ai r hammer to dr i ve t he gui de about 2 mm (0.1 i n)
t owar ds t he combust i on chamber . Thi s wi l l knock off
s ome of t he car bon and make r emoval easi er . Hold
t he ai r hammer di rect l y in li ne wi t h t he val ve gui de t o
pr event damagi ng t he dri ver.
6. Tur n t he head over , and dri ve t he gui de out t owar d
t he camshaf t si de of t he head.
7. If a val ve gui de won' t move, dri ll it out wi t h an 8 mm
(5/16 in) bit, t hen try agai n.
NOTE: Drill gui des onl y in ext r eme c as es ; you coul d
damage t he cyl i nder head if t he gui de br eaks.
8. Remove t he new gui de(s) f rom t he f r eezer , one at a
t i me, as you need t hem.
9. Appl y a t hi n coat of new engi ne oi l t o t he out si de of
t he new val ve gui de. Inst al l t he gui de f r om t he
c amshaf t si de of t he head; use t he val ve gui de dr i ver
to dr i ve t he gui de in to t he speci f i ed i nst al l ed hei ght
(A) of t he gui de (B). If you have all 16 gui des to do, you
may have to r eheat t he head.
Val ve Gui de Inst al l ed Hei ght
Int ake: 15. 2- 16. 2 mm (0. 60-0. 64 i n)
Exhaust : 15. 5- 16. 5 mm (0.61 - 0 . 6 5 i n)
(cont ' d)
6-89
Cyli nder Head
Valve Guide Replacement (cont'd)
10. Coat both t he val ve gui de r eamer ,-5.5 mm and t he
val ve gui de wi t h cut t i ng oi l .
11. Rot at e t he val ve gui de r eamer c l oc kwi se to t he full
l engt h of t he val ve gui de bore.-
12. Cont i nue to rotate t he r eamer c l oc kwi se whi l e
r emovi ng it f r om t he bor e.
13. Thor oughl y was h t he gui de in det er gent and wat er t o
r emove any cut t i ng r esi due.
14. Chec k t he c l ear anc es wi t h a val ve (see page 6-88). -
Veri f y that a val ve sl i des i nto t he i ntake and exhaust
val ve gui des wi t hout st i cki ng.
15. Inspect t he val ve seat i ng, if nec essar y r enew t he val ve
seat usi ng a val ve seat cut t er (see page 6-90).
Valve Seat Reconditioning
6-88). If t he val ve gui des ar e wor n, r epl ace t hem (see
page 6-88) bef ore cut t i ng t he val ve seat s.
2. Renew t he val ve seat s in t he cyl i nder head usi ng a
val ve seat cut t er.
3. Car ef ul l y cut a 45 seat , r emovi ng onl y enough
mat er i al t o ensur e a smoot h and concent r i c seat .
4. Bevel t he upper and l ower edges at t he angl es shown
i n t he i l l ust r at i on.Check t he wi dt h of t he seat and
adj ust accor di ngl y.
INTAKE: 35
6-90
5. Make one mor e ver y li ght pas s wi t h t he 45 cut t er t o
r emove any possi bl e bur r s c aused by t he ot her
cut t er s.
Val v e Seat Wi dt h
St andar d (New): 1. 25-1. 55 mm (0.049-0.061 In)
6. Af t er r esur f aci ng t he seat , i nspect f or even val ve
seat i ng. Appl y Pr ussi an Bl ue c ompound (A) to t he
val ve f ace. Inser t t he val ve i n its or i gi nal l ocat i on i n
t he head, t hen lift it and snap it c l osed agai nst t he seat
sever al t i mes.
B
7. The act ual val ve seat i ng sur f ac e (B), as shown by t he
bl ue c ompound, shoul d be cent er ed on t he seat .
If it i s t oo hi gh (cl oser to t he val ve st em), you must
make a sec ond cut wi t h t he 67.5 cut t er t o move it
down, t hen one mor e cut wi t h t he 45 cut t er t o
r est or e seat wi dt h.
If it i s t oo l ow (cl ose to t he val ve edge), you must
make a sec ond cut wi t h t he 35 cut t er (i ntake si de)
or t he 30 cut t er (exhaust si de) to move it up, t hen
make one mor e cut wi t h t he 45 cut t er to r est or e
seat wi dt h.
NOTE: The f i nal cut shoul d al ways be made wi t h t he
45 cut t er.
8. Insert t he i nt ake and exhaust val ves i n t he head, and
measur e t he val ve st em i nst al l ed hei ght (A).
Int ake Val ve S t em Inst al l ed Hei ght
Ser vi c e Li mi t : 44.7 mm (1.76 i n J
Ex haus t Val ve S t em Inst al l ed Hei ght
9. If val ve st em i nst al l ed hei ght i s beyond t he ser vi c e
li mi t , r epl ace t he val ve and r echeck. If it i s st i l l beyond
t he ser vi c e l i mi t , r epl ace t he cyl i nder head; t he val ve
seat i n t he head i s t oo deep.
6-91
Cyli nder Head
Val ve, Spr i ng, and Val ve Seal Inst al l at i on
St em Seal Dr i ver , 30 mm 07PAD-0010000
1. Coat t he val ve st ems wi t h new engi ne oi l . Inst al l t he
val ves i n t he val ve gui des.
2. Chec k t hat t he val ves move up and down smoot hl y.
3. Inst al l t he spr i ng seat s on t he cyl i nder head.
4. Inst al l t he new val ve seal s (A) usi ng t he 5.5 mm si de
of t he st em seal dr i ver , 30 mm (B).
NOTE: The exhaust val ve seal (C) has a bl ack spr i ng
(D), and t he i ntake val ve seal (E) has a whi t e spr i ng (F).
They ar e not i nt er changeabl e.
F D
5. Inst al l t he val ve spr i ng and t he spr i ng ret ai ner. Pl ace
t he end of t he val ve spr i ng wi t h t he c l osel y wound
c oi l s t owar d t he cyl i nder head.
6. Inst al l t he val ve spr i ng c ompr essor at t achment and
t he val ve spr i ng c ompr essor . Compr es s t he spr i ng,
and i nst al l t he val ve cot t er s.
spr i ng c ompr essor at t achment .
8. Li ght l y t ap t he end of eac h val ve st em t wo or t hr ee
t i mes wi t h a pl ast i c mal l et (A) to ensur e proper
seat i ng of t he val ve and t he val ve cot t er s. Tap t he
val ve st em onl y al ong i ts axi s so you do not bend t he
st em.
6-92
Rocker Arm Assemblf Installation
2. Cl ean and dry t he No. 5 rocker shaf t hol der mat i ng
sur f ac e.
3. Appl y l i qui d gasket P/N 08717-0004, 08718-0003, or
08718-0009 to t he cyl i nder head mat i ng sur f ace of t he
No. 5 rocker shaf t hol der , and to t he i nsi de edge of t he
t hr eaded bolt hol es. Install t he c omponent wi t hi n 5
mi nut es of appl yi ng t he l i qui d gasket .
NOTE:
gasket al ong t he broken l i ne (A).
r esi due, t hen reappl y new li qui d gasket .
rrrrn rrrm
s
^
A
|
* L v * 3 mm
( j (0.12 in)
i A I
4. Inst al l t he lost mot i on assembl y i n t he cyl i nder head.
5. Insert t he bolts (A) into t he rocker shaf t hol der, t hen
i nst al l t he rocker ar m assembl y (B) on t he cyl i nder
head.
6. Remove t he bolts f rom t he rocker shaf t hol der.
7. Make sur e t he punch mar ks on t he var i abl e val ve
t i mi ng cont rol (VTC) act uat or and t he exhaust
camshaf t spr ocket ar e f aci ng up, t hen set t he
c amshaf t s (A) in t he hol der. Appl y new engi ne oi l to
t he camshaf t j our nal s and l obes.
8. Set t he c amshaf t hol der s (B) and c am c hai n gui de B
(C) in pl ace.
9. Ti ght en t he bolts to t he speci f i ed t or que.
NOTE: If t he engi ne does not have bolt , ski p it and
cont i nue t he t or que sequenc e.
8x 1. 25 mm 22 N-m (2.2 kgf -m, 16 Ibf f t )
6x 1. 0 mm 12 N-m (1.2 kgf -m, 8.7 Ibf f t )
6x 1. 0 mm Bol t s: , @,
@) @ @ @
@ @ CD
10. Install t he c am chai n (see page 6-64), t hen adj ust t he
val ve c l ear anc e (see page 6-58).
6-93
Cyli nder Head
Cyl i nder Head Installation
1. Inst al l a new cool ant separ at or (A) In t he engi ne bl ock
whenever t he engi ne bl ock i s r epl ac ed.
2. Cl ean t he cyl i nder head and t he engi ne bl ock sur f ac e.
3. Inst al l t he new cyl i nder head gasket (A) and t he dowel
pi ns (B) on t he engi ne bl ock. Al way s use a new
cyl i nder head gasket .
poi nt er (B) on t he engi ne block.
5. Inst al l t he cyl i nder head on t he engi ne block.
6. Measur e t he di amet er of eac h cyl i nder head bolt at
50 mm (2.0 In)
45 mm (1.8 i n)
7. If ei t her di amet er i s l ess t han 10.6 mm (0.42 i n),
r epl ace t he cyl i nder head bolt.
6-94
8. Appl y new engi ne oi l to t he t hr eads and under t he bolt
heads of all cyl i nder head bol t s.
9. Tor que t he cyl i nder head bol t s i n sequenc e to 39 N-m
{4.0 kgf -m, 29 Ibf-ft). Use a beam-t ype t or que wr enc h.
When usi ng a preset cl i ck-t ype t or que wr enc h, be
sur e to t i ght en sl owl y and do not over t i ght en. If a bolt
makes any noi se whi l e you ar e t or qui ng it, l oosen t he
bolt and reti ghten it f r om t he f i rst st ep.
10. Af t er t or qui ng, t i ght en all cyl i nder head bol t s i n t wo
st eps (90 per st ep) usi ng t he sequenc e shown in st ep
9. If you ar e usi ng a new cyl i nder head bol t , t i ght en
t he bolt an ext ra 90 .
NOTE: Remove t he cyl i nder head bolt if you t i ght ened
it beyond t he speci f i ed angl e, and go back to st ep 6 of
t he pr ocedur e. Do not l oosen it back to t he speci f i ed
angl e.
FI RST STf cP
THIRD S TE P
(New bol t )
S ECOND S TE P
11. Inst al l t he r ocker ar m assembl y (see page 6-93).
12. Inst al l t he c am chai n (see page 6-64).
13. Connec t t he f ol l owi ng engi ne wi r e har ness
c onnec t or s, and i nst al l t he wi r e har ness c l amps to t he
cyl i nder head:
Engi ne cool ant t emper at ur e (ECT) s ens or 1
connect or
c onnec t or
Camshaf t posi t i on (CMP) sensor B (Exhaust )
connect or
Two r ocker ar m oi l cont rol sol enoi d c onnec t or s
Two r ocker ar m oi l pr essur e swi t ch c onnec t or s
Evapor at i ve emi ssi on (EVAP) cani st er pur ge val ve
connect or
14. Inst al l t he t wo bol t s (A) sec ur i ng t he connect i ng pi pe.
A
6 x 1.0 mm
12 N-m (1.2 kgf m, 8.7 Ibf-ft)
8x 1. 25 mm
22 N-m
(2.2 k g f m,
16 Ibf-ft)
15. Connec t t he wat er bypass hose (B).
(cont' d)
6-95
Cyli nder Head
Cyl i nder Head Installation (cont'd)
16. Connec t t he upper radi at or hose (A), t he heat er hoses
(B), and t he wat er bypass hose (C).
18. Connec t t he f our f uel i nj ect or c onnec t or s (A), t he
and i nst al l t he gr ound c abl es (C).
6x 1.0 mm
i nst al l t he qui ck-connect fi tti ng c over (B).
6-96
20. Connect t he EVAP cani st er hose (A).
21. Install t he cat al yt i c conver t er (see page 11-339).
22. Install t he i nt ake mani f ol d (see page 9-6).
25. After i nst al l at i on, check that all t ubes, hos es , and
connect or s ar e i nst al l ed correct l y.
26. Inspect for f uel l eaks. Tur n t he i gni ti on swi t ch to
ON (II) (do not oper at e t he st art er) so t he f uel pump
r uns f or about 2 sec onds and pr essur i zes t he f uel li ne.
Repeat t hi s oper at i on t hree t i mes, t hen c hec k f or f uel
l eakage at any poi nt in t he fuel l i ne.
28. Check for f l ui d l eaks.
29. Do t he power t r ai n cont rol modul e (PCM) i dl e l ear n
pattern l ean pr ocedur e (see page 11-5).
Sealing Bolt Installation
NOTE: When i nst al l i ng t he seal i ng bolt, al ways use a
new washer .
22 x 1.5 mm
74 N-m (7.5 kgf -m, 54 Ibf f t )
6-97
Engine Mechanical
Engine Block
S pec i al To o l s .7-2
Co mpo nent L oc at i on Index .7-3
Connec t i ng Rod and Cr ank s haf t End Pl ay I ns pec t i o n. 7-5
Cr ankshaf t Mai n Bear i ng Repl ac ement 7-6
Connec t i ng Rod Bear i ng Repl ac ement .7-9
Oi l Pan Remo v al . 7-11
Cr ankshaf t and Pi st on Remo v al .7-14
Cr ankshaf t Inspec t i on 7-16
Bl oc k and Pi st on Inspec t i on 7-17
Cy l i nder Bor e Honi ng 7-19
Pi s t on, Pi n, and Connec t i ng Rod Repl ac ement 7-19
Pi st on Ri ng Repl ac ement 7-22
Pi st on Inst al l at i on 7-24
Connec t i ng Rod Bol t Inspec t i on 7-26
Cr ankshaf t I n s t al l at i o n . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-26
CK P Pul s e Pl at e Repl ac ement 7-30
Oi l Pan Inst al l at i on. 7-30
Tr ans mi s s i o n End Cr ank s haf t Oi l S eal Inst al l at i on - In
Car . . . . . . . . . . . 7- 33
S eal i ng Bol t Inst al l at i on .7-34
Engi ne Block
Speci al Tool s
Ref .No. Tool Number Descr i pt i on Of f
07746-0010700 At t ac hment 24 x 26 mm 1
07749-0010000 Dr i ver Handl e, 15 x 135L 1
(D 07ZAD-PNAA100 Oi l Seal Dri ver At t achment , 96 mm 1
7-2
OIL PAN
Removal, page 7-11
CK P PUL S E PL ATE
O-RING / Replacement, page 7-30
BAFFL E PL ATE
CRANK S HAFT POSITION
(CKP) S E NS OR
OI L PUMP CHAIN
TENS I ONER
MAIN BEARI NGS
Oil Clearance Inspection, page 7-6
Selection, page 7-7
TRANS MI S S I ON END
CRANK S HAFT OIL S E A L
Installation, step 23 on page 7-28
Installation -
in Car, page 7-33
THRUS T WAS HERS
CRANK S HAFT
End Play, page 7-5
Removal, page 7-14
ENGI NE BL OCK
(cont' d)
7-3
Engi ne Block
PISTON RINGS
CONNECTI NG ROD B OL TS
7-4
Connecting Rod and Crankshaft End Play Inspection
1. Remove t he oi l pump (see page 8-16).
2. Remove t he baffle plate (see st ep 8 on page 7-14).
3. Measur e t he connect i ng rod end pl ay wi t h a f eel er
gauge bet ween t he connect i ng rod and t he
crankshaf t .
Connec t i ng Rod End Pl ay
4. If t he connect i ng rod end pl ay i s beyond t he ser vi c e
li mi t, i nst al l a new connect i ng r od, and r echeck. If it i s
sti ll beyond t he ser vi c e l i mi t r epl ace t he crankshaf t
(see page 7-14).
5. Push t he cr ankshaf t f i r ml y away f rom t he di al
i ndi cat or , and zero t he di al agai nst t he end of t he
cr ankshaf t . Then pull t he cr ankshaf t f i r ml y back
t owar d t he i ndi cat or; t he di al readi ng shoul d not
exc eed t he ser vi c e li mi t.
Cr ankshaf t End Pl ay
St andar d (New): 0. 10- 0. 35 mm ( 0. 004- 0.014 i n)
6. If t he end pl ay i s beyond t he ser vi ce li mi t , r epl ace t he
t hrust was her s and r echeck, if it i s sti ll beyond t he
ser vi c e li mi t , r epl ace t he crankshaf t (see page 7-14).
7-5
Engi ne Block
Crankshaft Mai n Bearing Replacement
Mai n Bear i ng Cl ear anc e Inspect i on
1. To c hec k t he mai n bear i ng-t o-j our nal oi l c l ear anc e,
r emove t he l ower bl ock and t he bear i ng hal ves (see
page 7-14).
2. Cl ean eac h mai n j our nal and t he bear i ng hal f wi t h a
c l ean shop t owel .
3. Pl ace one st ri p of pl ast i gage ac r oss eac h mai n
j our nal .
4. Rei nst al l t he bear i ngs and t he l ower bl ock, t hen
t or que t he bolts to 29 N-m (3.0 kgf -m, 22 Ibf f t ).
NOTE:
Appl y new engi ne oi l to t he bolt t hr eads and
f l anges.
Do not rotate t he cr ankshaf t dur i ng i nspec t i on.

5. Ti ght en t he bear i ng c ap bol t s an addi t i onal 48 .
6. Remove t he l ower bl ock and t he bear i ngs agai n, and
measur e t he wi dest part of t he pl ast i gage.
Mai n Bear i ng-t o-Jour nal Oi l Cl ear anc e
No. 1, 2, 4, 5 J our nal s:
St andar d (New): 0.017-0.041 mm
(0.0007-0.0016 i n)
No. 3 J our nal :
St andar d (New): 0. 025-0. 049 mm
(0.0010-0.0019 i n)
7. If t he pl ast i gage measur es t oo wi de or t oo nar r ow,
r emove t he cr ankshaf t , and r emove t he upper hal f of
t he bear i ng. Inst al l a new, compl et e beari ng wi t h t he
appr opr i at e col or c ode(s), and r echeck t he c l ear anc e.
Do not f i l e, s hi m, or sc r ape t he bear i ngs or t he c aps t o
adj ust c l ear anc e.
8. If t he pl ast i gage s hows t he c l ear anc e i s sti ll i ncor r ect ,
try t he next l arger or smal l er bear i ng (the col or l i st ed
above or bel ow t he cur r ent one), and c hec k agai n. If
t he pr oper c l ear anc e cannot be obt ai ned by usi ng t he
appr opr i at e l ar ger or smal l er bear i ngs, r epl ace t he
cr ankshaf t and st art over .
7-6
Mai n Bear i ng Sel ect i on
M a i n
J our nal
C o d e
Loc at i on
Cr ankshaf t Bor e Code Loc at i on
z T h e m a i n
J
o u r n a l c o d e s a r e
st amped on t he
cr ankshaf t in ei t her l ocat i on.
1. Number s, l et t ers, or bar s have been st amped on t he
end of t he l ower block as a c ode f or t he si ze of eac h of I
t he f i ve mai n j our nal bor es. Wri t e down t he cr ank i 1
:
1 '
bore c odes.
No. 5 J OURNAL No. 1 J OURNAL
(cont' d)
7-7
Engi ne Block
Crankshaft Main Bearing Replacement (cont'd)
3. Us e t he cr ank bore c odes and t he cr ank j our nal c odes
t o sel ec t t he appr opr i at e r epl acement bear i ngs f r om
t he f ol l owi ng t abl e.
NOTE:
The col or c ode i s on t he edge of t he bear i ng.
When usi ng bear i ng hal ves of di f f erent c ol or s, it
does not mat t er whi c h col or i s used i n t he t op or
bot t om.
K24Z2 engi ne
Mai n
j oi nal
c ode
Crank
bor e
code
Lar ger bl ock bor e
1 or 2 or 3 or 4 or
A or S B o r ll C or 111 D or HIl
H> Smal l er bear i ng (Thi cker )
6
Pink
Pi nk/
Yel l ow
Yel l ow Gr een
Pi nk/
Yel l ow
Yel l ow Gr een
Gr een/
Br own
Yel l ow Gr een
Gr een/
Br own
Br own
Gr een
Gr een/
Br own
Br o wn Bl ack
Gr een/
Br own
Br own Bl ac k
Bl ac k/
Bl ue
Br own Bl ac k
Bl ac k /
Bl ue
Bl ue
Smal l er Smal l er
mai n bear i ng
j our nal (Thi cker )
K2423 engi ne
Mai n
j oi nal
c ode
Crank Larger block bore
bore
code
1 or
A or I
2 or
B or II
3 or | 4 or
Cor III Dor i l l
- Smaller bearing (Thicker)
t
Smal l er Smal l er
mai n bear i ng
Red
Red /
Pi nk
Pink
Y ellow
Y ellow
Y ellow/
Green
Red /
Pink
Pi nk
Pink
Y ellow
Y ellow
Y ellow/
Green
Pink Y ellow
Y ellow/
Green
Green
Y ellow
Y ellow/
Green
Green B rown
Y ellow/
Gr een
Gr een B rown
B rown/
Black
Gr een B rown
B rown/
Black
Black
7-8
Connecting Rod Bearing Replacement
Connect i ng Rod Bear i ng Cl ear anc e Inspect i on
2. Remove t he baffle plate (see st ep 8 on page 7-14).
3. Remove t he connect i ng rod c ap and t he bear i ng half.
4. Cl ean t he cr ankshaf t rod j our nal and t he bear i ng hal f
wi t h a c l ean shop t owel .
5. Pl ace pl ast i gage ac r oss t he rod j our nal .
6. Rei nst al l t he bear i ng hal f and t he c ap, and t or que t he
bol t s to 41 N m (4.2 kgf -m, 30 i bf f t ) +120 .
NOTE:
Appl y new engi ne oi l to t he bolt t hr eads and
f l anges.
Do not rotate t he cr ankshaf t dur i ng i nspec t i on.
7. Remove t he rod c ap and t he bear i ng hal f , and
measur e t he wi dest part of t he pl ast i gage.
Connec t i ng Rod Beari ng-t o-Journaf i Oi l
Cl ear anc e
St andar d (Mew): 0. 032-0. 066 mm
(0.0013 - 0. 0026 i n)
8. If t he pl ast i gage measur es t oo wi de or t oo nar r ow,
r emove t he c ap, and t he upper hal f of t he bear i ng,
i nst al l a new, compl et e bear i ng wi t h t he appr opr i at e
col or c ode(s), and r echeck t he c l ear anc e. Do not f i l e,
s hi m, or sc r ape t he bear i ngs or t he c aps to adj ust
c l ear anc e.
9. If t he pl ast i gage s hows t he c l ear anc e i s sti ll i ncor r ect ,
try t he next l arger or smal l er bear i ng (the col or l i st ed
above or bel ow t he cur r ent one), and check c l ear anc e
agai n. If t he pr oper c l ear anc e c annot be obt ai ned by
usi ng t he appr opr i at e l arger or smal l er bear i ng,
r epl ace t he cr ankshaf t and st art over .
(cont ' d)
7-9
Engi ne Block
Connecting Rod Bearing Replacement (cont'd)
Connect i ng Rod Bear i ng Sel ec t i on
1. Inspect eac h connect i ng rod f or c r ac ks and heat
damage.
Connec t i ng Rod Bi g End Bor e Code Loc at i ons
2. Eac h connect i ng rod has a t ol er ance r ange f r om 0 to
0.024 mm (0.0009 i n), in 0.006 mm (0.0002 i n)
i nc r ement s, dependi ng on t he si ze of i ts bi g end bor e.
It i s t hen st amped wi t h a number or bar ( 1, 2, 3, or 4/I,
l l , 111, or llll) i ndi cat i ng t he r ange. You may f i nd any
combi nat i on of number s and bar s in any engi ne. (Half
t he number or bar i s st amped on t he bear i ng c ap, t he
ot her half i s on t he rod.)
If you cannot r ead t he code bec ause of an
accumul at i on of oi l and var ni sh, do not sc r ub it wi t h a
wi r e br ush or sc r aper . Cl ean it onl y wi t h sol vent or
det ergent .
Lar ge-end Bor e Si z e: 51.0 mm (2.01 i n)
Connec t i ng Rod Jour nal Code Loc at i on
3. The connect i ng rod j our nal c odes ar e st amped on t he
cr ankshaf t in ei t her l ocat i on.
No. 4 J OURNAL No. 1 J OURNAL
7-10
Oil Pan Remowal
4. Use t he bi g end bor e c odes and t he rod j our nal c odes
to sel ec t appropri at e r epl acement bear i ngs f r om t he
f ol l owi ng t abl e.
NOTE:
The col or c ode i s on t he edge of t he bear i ng.
When usi ng bear i ng hal ves of di fferent c ol or s, it
does not mat t er whi c h col or i s used in t he top or
bot t om.
Rod
j our nal
c ode
Bi g end
bor e
c ode
Lar ger bi g end bor e
A
B
C
f
D
f
1
1 or I 2 or II 3 or III 4 or lli l
Smal l er bear i ng (Thi cker )
Red Pi nk
Pi nk/
Yel l ow
Yel l ow
Pi nk Yel l ow
Yel l o w/
Gr een
Gr een
Yel l ow Gr een
Gr een/
B rown
Br own
Gr een Br own
Br o wn/
Bl ac k
Bl ack
Smal l er Smal l er
r od bear i ng
1. If t he engi ne i s al r eady out of t he vehi c l e, go to st ep
19.
20-306).
3. Do t he bat t ery r emoval pr ocedur e (see page 22-92).
5. Remove t he har ness c l amps , t hen r emove t he battery
base (see st ep 8 on page 5-3).
6. Remove t he f ront engi ne mount st op (A), t hen r emove
t he f ront engi ne mount bolt (B).
(cont' d)
7-11
Engi ne Block
Oli Pan Removal (cont' d)
7. L oosen t he r ear engi ne mount mount i ng bol t s (A),
M/ T model
A
A / T model
8. L oosen t he upper t r ansmi ssi on mount bracket
mount i ng bol t s (A).
8VS/T model
A / T model
7-12
9. Rai se t he vehi cl e on t he lift.
10. Remove t he left f ront wheel .
12. Drai n t he engi ne oi l (see page 8-11).
13. Separ at e t he left si de knuckl e f r om t he l ower ar m (see
st ep 5 on page 18-21).
14. Remove t he left si de damper fork (see st ep 3 on page
18-21).
15. Remove t he left si de dr i veshaf t (see page 16-4). Coat
all pr eci si on-f i ni shed sur f ace wi t h new engi ne oi l . Ti e
a pl ast i c bag over t he dr i veshaf t end.
16. Remove t he nut s sec ur i ng t he l ower t r ansmi ssi on
mount (see st ep 49 on page 5-9).
17. A/ T model : Remove t he shi ft cabl e bracket .
Vl ehi c l es wi t h J HM VINs (see st ep 46 on page
14-200).
Vehi c l es wi t h 1 HG VINs (see st ep 48 on page
14-200).
18. Us e a t r ansmi ssi on j ack to lift t he t r ansmi ssi on
3 0 - 4 0 mm ( 1. 2- 1. 6 i n).
19. Remove t he cl ut ch/t or que conver t er c over (A), and
r emove t he t wo bol t s sec ur i ng t he t r ansmi ssi on.
20. Remove t he bolts sec ur i ng t he oi l pan.
21. Usi ng a flat bl ade sc r ewdr i ver , separ at e t he oi l pan
f r om t he engi ne block i n t he pl ac es s hown.
4 -
22. Remove t he oi l pan.
7-13
Engi ne Block
Crankshaft and Piston Remowal
1 Remove t he engi ne/t r ansmi ssi on (see page 5-3).
2. Remove t he t r ansmi ssi on:
m Aut omat i c t r ansmi ssi on (see page 14-194)
3. M/T model : Remove t he f l ywheel (see st ep 17 on page
12-18).
4. A/ T model : Remove t he dr i ve pl at e (see page 14-204).
7. Remove t he cyl i nder head:
8. Remove t he baffle pl at e.
9. Remove t he 8 mm bol t s.

@
10. Remove t he bear i ng c ap bol t s. To pr event war page,
l oosen t he bol t s i n sequenc e 1/3 t urn at a t i me; repeat
t he sequenc e unti l all bol t s ar e l oosened.

7-14
o o o o
11. Remove t he l ower bl ock and t he bear i ngs. Keep all t he
bear i ngs in or der .
12. Remove t he rod c aps/bear i ngs. Keep all t he
c aps/bear i ngs in or der .
13. Lift t he cr ankshaf t out of t he engi ne. Be car ef ul not to
damage t he j our nal s and t he CK P pul se pl at e.
14. Remove t he CK P pul se plate f r om t he cr ankshaf t (see
page 7-30).
15. Remove t he upper beari ng hal ves f r om t he
connect i ng r ods, and set t hem asi de wi t h t hei r
r espect i ve c aps .
16. If you c an f eel a ri dge of met al or har d car bon ar ound
t he t op of eac h cyl i nder , r emove it wi t h a ri dge r eamer
(A). Fol l ow t he r eamer manuf ac t ur er ' s i nst r uct i ons. If
t he ri dge i s not r emoved, it may damage t he pi st ons
as t hey ar e pushed out.
A
17. Us e t he wooden handl e of a hammer (A) to dri ve out
t he pi st on/connect i ng rod assembl y (B).
A
18. Rei nst al l t he l ower bl ock and t he bear i ngs on t he
engi ne block in t he pr oper or der .
19. Rei nst al l t he connect i ng rod bear i ngs and t he c aps
after r emovi ng eac h pi st on/connect i ng rod assembl y.
20. Mark eac h pi st on/connect i ng rod assembl y wi t h its
cyl i nder number to make sur e t hey ar e rei nst al l ed i n
t he ori gi nal or der .
NOTE: The exi st i ng number on t he connect i ng rod
does not i ndi cat e its posi t i on i n t he engi ne, it i ndi cat es
t he rod bore si ze.
7-15
Engi ne Block
Crankshaft Inspection
Out -of -Round and Taper
1. Remove t he cr ankshaf t f r om t he engi ne bl ock (see
page 7-14).
2. Remove t he cr ankshaf t posi t i on (CKP) pul se pl at e
f r om t he cr ankshaf t (see page 7-30).
3. Cl ean t he cr ankshaf t oi l passages wi t h pi pe c l eaner s
or a sui t abl e br ush.
4. Cl ean t he keyway and t hr eads, and c hec k f or damage.
5. Measur e t he out -of -round at t he mi ddl e of eac h rod
and t he mai n j our nal i n t wo pl ac es. The di f f erence
bet ween measur ement s on eac h j our nal must not be
mor e t han t he ser vi c e li mi t.
J our nal Out -of -Round
St andar d (New); 0.004 mm (0.0002 i n) max.
St r ai ght ness
7. Pl ace t he V-bl ocks on a flat sur f ac e.
8. Check t he total runout wi t h t he cr ankshaf t suppor t ed
on V-bl oc ks.
9. Measur e t he runout on all mai n j our nal s. Rot at e t he
cr ankshaf t t wo compl et e r evol ut i ons. The di f f erence
bet ween measur ement s on eac h j our nal must not be
mor e t han t he ser vi c e li mi t.
Cr ankshaf t Tot al Runout
6. Measur e t he t aper at t he edges of eac h rod and t he
mai n j our nal . The di f f erence bet ween measur ement s
on eac h j our nal must not be mor e t han t he ser vi c e
li mi t.
J our nal Taper
7-16
Block and Piston inspection
1. Remove t he crankshaf t and t he pi st ons (see page
7-14).
2. Chec k t he pi st on f or di st ort i on or c r ac ks.
3. Measur e t he pi st on di amet er at a poi nt 13 mm (0.5 in)
f r om t he bottom of t he ski rt. Ther e ar e t wo
st andar d-si ze pi st ons (No Letter or A, and B). The
letter i s st amped on t he top of t he pi st on. Let t ers ar e
al so st amped on t he engi ne block as t he cyl i nder bore
si zes.
Pi st on Ski r t Di amet er
St andar d (New);
No Let t er (or A):
B:
Ser vi c e Li mi t -
No Let t er (or A):
B:
86.98086.990 mm
(3.4244-3.4248 In)
86.97086.980 mm
(3.4240-3.4244 i n)
86.930 mm (3.4224 i n)
86.920 mm (3.4220 i n)
Over si ze Pi st on Ski r t Di amet er
0.25: 87. 230-87. 240 mm (3.4342 - 3. 4346 i n)
13 mm
(0.5 i n
Pi st on Skirt Di amet er
4. Measur e t he wear and t aper i n di r ect i on X and Y at
t hr ee l evel s i nsi de eac h cyl i nder as shown. If t he
measur ement s i n any cyl i nder ar e beyond t he
Over si ze Bor e Ser vi c e Li mi t , r epl ace t he engi ne block.
If t he engi ne bl ock i s bei ng r ebor ed, refer to st ep 7
after r ebor i ng.
Cyl i nder Bor e S i z e
St andar d (New):
A or I- 87. 010-87. 020 mm
(3.4256-3.4260 i n)
B or II: 87. 000-87. 010 mm
(3.4252-3.4256 i n)
Over si ze Bor e
0.25: 87. 250-87. 260 mm (3.4350-3.4354 i n)
Rebor i ng Li mi t : 0.25 mm (0.010 i n) max.
Bor e Taper
Li mi t (Di f f erence bet ween f i r st 0.02 mm (0.001 i n)
and t hi r d measur ement ):
6 mm (0.2 i n)
i ,
T
Fi r st Measur ement
Sec ond Measur ement
Thi r d Measur ement
6 mm (0.2 i n)
No. 1
(cont' d)
7-17
Engi ne Block
Block and Pi st on Inspect i on (cont' d)
5. Sc or ed or sc r at c hed cyl i nder bor es must be honed.
6. Chec k t he t op of t he engi ne bl ock f or war page.
Measur e al ong t he edges and ac r oss t he cent er as
shown.
Engi ne Bl ock War page
St andar d (New); 0.07 mm (0.003 i n) max.
PRECI SI ON S TRAI GHT E DGE
7. Cal cul at e t he di f f erence bet ween t he cyl i nder bore
di amet er and t he pi st on di amet er . If t he c l ear anc e i s
near or exc eeds t he ser vi c e li mi t, i nspect t he pi st on
and t he cyl i nder bore f or exc essi ve wear .
Pi st on-t o-Cyl i nder Bor e Cl ear anc e
(0.0008-0.0016 i n)
S E RVI CE LIMIT
0.05 mm (0.002 i n)
W
/
/
/
/
/
M

i
1
1^
x v s l
7-18
Cf Hinder Bore Honing
Onl y a sc or ed or sc r at c hed cyl i nder bore must be honed.
1. Measur e t he cyl i nder bor es (see page 7-17).
If t he engi ne bl ock i s to be r eused, hone t he c yl i nder s,
and r emeasur e t he bor es.
2. Remove t he oi l j et s (see page 8-14).
3. Hone t he cyl i nder bor es wi t h honi ng oi l and a f i ne
(400 gri t) st one i n a 60 degr ee c r oss-hat c h pattern (A).
Use onl y a ri gi d hone wi t h 400 gri t or f i ner st one suc h
as Sunnen, Ammc o, or equi val ent . Do not use st ones
that ar e wor n or br oken.
4. When honi ng i s compl et e, t hor oughl y cl ean t he
engi ne block of all met al par t i cl es. Was h t he cyl i nder
bor es wi t h hot soapy wat er , t hen dry and oil t hem
i mmedi at el y to pr event r ust i ng. Never use sol vent , it
wi l l onl y redi st ri but e t he gri t on t he cyl i nder wal l s.
5. If sc or i ng or sc r at c hes ar e sti ll pr esent i n t he cyl i nder
bor es after honi ng t he engi ne block to t he ser vi c e
li mi t, r ebor e t he engi ne block. S o me li ght vert i cal
sc or i ng and scr at chi ng i s accept abl e if it i s not deep
enough to cat ch your f i nger nai l , and does not run t he
full lengt h of t he bor e.
6. Install t he oi l j et s (see page 8-14).
Piston
#
Pin
#
and Co n f y s s f e g EQC
Replacement
Di sassembl y
1. Remove t he pi st on f r om t he engi ne bl ock (see page
7-14).
2. Appl y new engi ne oi l to t he pi st on pi n snap ri ngs (A),
and t urn t hem i n t he ri ng gr ooves unti l t he end gaps
are l i ned up wi t h t he cut out s in t he pi st on pi n bor es
(B).
NOTE: Take c ar e not to damage t he ri ng gr ooves.
A
3. Remove both snap r i ngs. St ar t at t he cut out in t he
pi st on pi n bor e. Remove t he snap r i ngs caref ul l y so
t hey do not go f l yi ng or get l ost . Wear eye prot ect i on.
(cont' d)
7-19
Engi ne Bl oc k
Pi st on. Pi n, and Connect i ng Rod Repl acement (cont' d)
4. Heat t he pi st on and t he connect i ng rod as s embl y to
about 158 F (70 C), t hen r emove t he pi st on pi n.
Inspect i on
NOTE: Inspect t he pi st on, t he pi st on pi n, and t he
connect i ng rod when t hey ar e at r oom t emper at ur e.
1. Measur e t he di amet er of t he pi st on pi n.
Pi st on Pi n Di amet er
St andar d (New): 21.961 - 21. 965 mm
(0.8646-0.8648 i n)
7-20
3. Chec k t he di f f erence bet ween t he pi st on pi n di amet er
and t he pi st on pin hol e di amet er in t he pi st on.
Pi st on Pi n-t o-Pi st on Cl ear anc e
St andar d (New): -0.0050.002 mm
(-0.0002-0.0001 i n)
Ser vi c e L i mi t: 0.005 mm (0.0002 i n)
4. Measur e t he pi st on pi n-t o-connect i ng rod c l ear anc e.
Pi st on Pi n-t o-Connect i ng Rod Cl ear anc e
(0.0002-0.0006 i n)
Reassembl y
1. Inst al l a pi st on pi n snap ri ng (A).
2. Coat t he pi st on pi n bore in t he pi st on, t he bore in t he
connect i ng r od, and t he pi st on pi n wi t h new engi ne
oi l .
3. Heat t he pi st on to about 158 F (70 C).
(cont' d)
7-21
Engi ne Block
Piston^ Pin
#
and Connecting Rod
Replacement (cont' d)
4. As s embl e t he pi st on (A) and t he connect i ng rod (B)
wi t h t he ar r ow (C) and t he embos s ed mark (D) on t he
s ame si de. Inst al l t he pi st on pi n (E).
5. Inst al l t he r emai ni ng snap ri ng (F).
8. Tur n t he snap r i ngs i n t he ri ng gr ooves unti l t he end
gaps ar e posi t i oned at t he bot t om of t he pi st on.
Piston Ring Replacement
1. Remove t he pi st on f r om t he engi ne bl ock (see page
7-14).
2. Usi ng a ri ng expander (A), r emove t he ol d pi st on
r i ngs (B).
B
3. Cl ean all ri ng gr ooves t hor oughl y wi t h a squar ed-of f
broken ri ng or ri ng gr oove c l eaner wi t h a bl ade to fit
t he pi st on gr ooves.
The t op and 2nd ri ng gr ooves ar e 1.2 mm (0.05 i n)
wi de. The oi l ri ng gr oove i s 2.0 mm (0.08 in) wi de.
Fi l e down a bl ade if nec essar y.
Do not use a wi r e br ush to cl ean t he ri ng gr ooves, or
cut t he ri ng gr ooves deeper wi t h t he cl eani ng t ool s.
NOTE: If t he pi st on i s to be separ at ed f r om t he
connect i ng r od, do not i nst al l t he new r i ngs yet .
7-22
4. Usi ng a pi st on t hat has i ts ri ngs r emoved, push a new
ri ng (A) i nto t he cyl i nder bore 1520 mm (0.60.8 i n)
f r om t he bot t om.
5. Measur e t he pi st on ri ng end-gap (B) wi t h a f eel er
gauge:
If t he gap i s t oo s mal l , check to see if you have t he
proper ri ngs f or your engi ne.
If t he gap i s t oo l ar ge, r echeck t he cyl i nder bor e
di amet er agai nst t he wear l i mi t s (see page 7-17).
If t he bore i s beyond t he ser vi c e li mi t , t he engi ne
block must be re bo r ed.
Pi st on Ri ng End-Gap
Top Ri ng:
St andar d (New): 0. 20- 0. 35 mm ( 0. 008- 0.014 i n)
Sec ond Ri ng:
Oi l Ri ng:
6. Inst al l t he t op ri ng and t he sec ond ri ng as s hown. The
t op ri ng (A) has a 1R mar k, and t he s ec ond ri ng (B) has
a 2RN mar k. The manuf act ur i ng mar ks (C) must f ace
upwar d.
Piston Ring Dimensions
, , Top Ring (Standard):
A: 2.7 mm (0.11 in)
B B: 1.2 mm (0.05 in)
A__ Second Ring (Standard):
> A: 3.4 mm (0.13 in)
- d
B: 1.2 mm (0.05 in)
(cont ' d)
7-23
Engi ne Block
Piston Ring Replacement (cont'd)
7. Af t er i nst al l i ng a new set of r i ngs, measur e t he
ri ng-t o-groove c l ear anc es:
Top l i n g Cl ear anc e
(0.0024-0.0033 i n)
Ser vi c e Li mi t : .13 mm (0.005 In)
Sec ond Ri ng Cl ear anc e
(0.0016-0.0026 i n)
8. Rot at e t he r i ngs i n t hei r gr ooves to make sur e t hey do
not bi nd.
9. Posi t i on t he ri ng end gaps as shown.
About 90
PI STON PIN
Pi st on Installati on
If t he Cr ankshaf t i s Al r eady Inst al l ed
1. Set t he cr ankshaf t to bottom dead cent er (BDC) f or
eac h cyl i nder as its pi st on i s i nst al l ed.
2. Remove t he connect i ng rod c aps , t hen i nst al l t he ri ng
c ompr essor , and check t hat t he bear i ng i s sec ur el y i n
pl ace.
3. Appl y new engi ne oi l to t he pi st on, t he i nsi de of t he
ri ng c ompr essor , and t he cyl i nder bor e, t hen at t ach
t he ri ng c ompr essor to t he pi st on/connect i ng rod
assembl y.
4. Posi t i on t he mar k (A) to f ace t he c am c hai n si de of t he
engi ne block.
A
5. Posi t i on t he pi st on in t he cyl i nder , and t ap it i n usi ng
t he wooden handl e of a hammer (A).
Push down on t he ri ng c ompr essor (B) to pr event t he
r i ngs f r om expandi ng bef ore ent eri ng t he cyl i nder
bor e.
7-24
8. St op after t he ri ng c ompr essor pops f r ee, and check
t he connect i ng rod-t o-rod j our nal al i gnment bef ore
pushi ng t he pi st on i nto pl ace.
7. Chec k t he connect i ng rod bear i ng c l ear anc e wi t h
pl ast i gage (see page 7-9).
8. Inspect t he connect i ng rod bol t s (see page 7-28).
9. Appl y new engi ne oi l to t he bol t t hr eads, t hen i nst al l
t he connect i ng rod c aps wi t h bear i ngs. Tor que t he
bol t s to 41 N-m (4.2 k gf m, 30 Ibf-ft).
10. Ti ght en t he connect i ng rod bol t s an addi t i onal 120 .
NOTE: Remove t he connect i ng r od bolt if you
t i ght ened it beyond t he speci f i ed angl e, and go back
t o st ep 8 of t he pr ocedur e. Do not l oosen it back to t he
speci f i ed angl e.
If t he Cr ankshaf t i s Not Inst al l ed
1. Remove t he connect i ng rod c aps , t hen i nst al l t he ri ng
c ompr essor , and check t hat t he bear i ng i s sec ur el y i n
pl ace.
2. Appl y new engi ne oi l to t he pi st on, t he i nsi de of t he
ri ng c ompr essor , and t he c yl i nder bor e, t hen at t ach
t he ri ng c ompr essor t o t he pi st on/connect i ng rod
assembl y.
3. Posi t i on t he mar k (A) to f ace t he c am c hai n si de of t he
engi ne bl ock.
A
4. Posi t i on t he pi st on in t he cyl i nder , and t ap it in usi ng
t he wooden handl e of a hammer (A).
Push down on t he ri ng c ompr essor (B) to prevent t he
r i ngs f r om expandi ng bef ore ent er i ng t he cyl i nder
bor e.
5. Posi t i on al l pi st ons at top dead cent er (TDC).
7-25
Engi ne Block
Connecting Rod iolt Inspection Crankshaft Installation
1. Measur e t he di amet er of eac h connect i ng rod bolt at
2. Cal cul at e t he di f f erence in di amet er bet ween poi nt A
and poi nt B.
Poi nt APoi nt B = Di f f erence i n Di amet er
Di f f er ence i n Di amet er
Spec i f i c at i on: 00.1 mm (00.004 i n)
3. If t he di f f erence in di amet er i s out of speci f i cat i on,
r epl ace t he connect i ng rod bolt.
. Dri ver Handl e, 15 x 135L 07749-0010000
At t achment , 24 x 26 mm 07746-0010700
. Oi l Seal Dri ver At t achment , 96 mm 07ZAD-PNAA100
1. M/T model : Install t he cr ankshaf t end bushi ng when
r epl aci ng t he cr ankshaf t . Usi ng t he dri ver and t he
bear i ng dri ver at t achment , 24 x 26 mm, dri ve in t he
cr ankshaf t end bushi ng unti l t he dr i ver handl e, 15 x
135L and t he at t achment bot t om agai nst t he
cr ankshaf t .
2. Check t he connect i ng rod bear i ng c l ear anc e wi t h
pl ast i gage (see page 7-9).
3. Check t he mai n bear i ng c l ear anc e wi t h pl ast i gage
(see page 7-6).
4. Install t he bear i ng hal ves in t he engi ne block and t he
connect i ng r ods.
5. Appl y a coat of new engi ne oi l to t he mai n bear i ngs
and t he rod bear i ngs.
6. Inst al l t he cr ankshaf t posi t i on (CKP) pul se plate to t he
cr ankshaf t (see page 7-30).
7. Hold t he cr ankshaf t so rod j our nal No. 2 and rod
j our nal No. 3 are st rai ght up, and l ower t he cr ankshaf t
into t he engi ne block. Be caref ul not to damage t he
j our nal s and t he CK P pul se plate.
7-26
8. Appl y new engi ne oi l to t he t hr ust was her sur f ac es.
Inst al l t he t hrust was her s (A) in t he No. 4 j our nal of t he
engi ne block.
B
9. Inspect t he connect i ng rod bol t s (see page 7-26).
10. Appl y new engi ne oi l to t he t hr eads of t he connect i ng
rod bol t s.
11. Seat t he rod j our nal s i nto connect i ng rod No. 1 and
connect i ng rod No. 4. Li ne up t he mark (B) on t he
connect i ng rod and t he c ap, t hen i nst al l t he c aps and
bol t s f i nger-t i ght .
12. Rotate t he cr ankshaf t c l oc kwi se, and seat t he j our nal s
into connect i ng rod No. 2 and connect i ng rod No. 3.
Li ne up t he mark on t he connect i ng r od and t he c ap,
t hen i nst al l t he c aps and bol t s f i nger-t i ght .
13. t orque t he connect i ng r od bolts to 41 N-m (4.2 kgf-m,
30 Ibf-ft).
14. Ti ght en t he c onnec t i ng rod bol t s an addi t i onal 120 .
NOTE: Remove t he connect i ng rod bolt if you
t i ght ened it beyond t he speci f i ed angl e, and go back
to st ep 9 of t he pr ocedur e. Do not l oosen it back to t he
speci f i ed angl e.
15. Remove all of t he ol d li qui d gasket f rom t he l ower
block mat i ng sur f ac es, t he bol t s, and t he bolt hol es.
16. Cl ean and dry t he l ower bl ock mat i ng sur f ac es.
08718-0009 to t he engi ne bl ock mat i ng sur f ace of t he
l ower bl ock, and to t he i nsi de edge of t he t hr eaded
bolt hol es. Inst al l t he component wi t hi n 5 mi nut es of
NOTE:
Appl y a*3 mm (0.12 in) di amet e bead of l i qui d
l i qui d gasket , r emove t he old li qui d gasket and
A
(cont ' d)
7-27
Engi ne Block
Crankshaft Installation (cont' d)
18. Put t he l ower bl ock on t he engi ne bl ock.
19. Appl y new engi ne oi l to t he t hr eads of t he bear i ng c ap
bol t s. Tor que t he bear i ng c ap bol t s i n s equenc e, t o
29 N-m (3.0 k g f m, 22 Ibf-ft).
21. Tor que t he 8 mm bol t s i n sequenc e to 22 N-m
(2.2 kgf-m, 16 Ibf-ft).

C D
cr ankshaf t oi l seal .
23. Us e t he dr i ver handl e and t he oi l seal dr i ver
at t achment 96 mm to dr i ve a new cr ankshaf t oi l seal
squar el y i nto t he engi ne bl ock to t he speci f i ed
i nst al l ed hei ght .
7-28
24. Measur e t he di st ance bet ween t he engi ne block (A)
and t he crankshaf t oi l seal (B).
Cr ankshaf t Oi l S eal Inst al l ed Hei ght
0. 2- 1. 2 mm (0. 008-0. 047 i n)
0.21.2 mm
(0. 008-0. 047 i n)
25. Inst al l t he baffle pl at e.
i x 1.0 mm
12 N-m
(1.2 kgf-m, 8.7 Ibf-ft)
26. Inst al l t he oi l pump (see page 8-23).
28. Inst al l t he cyl i nder head:
29. M/T model : Inst al l t he f l ywheel (see st ep 18 on page
12-18), t he cl ut ch di sc (see st ep 26 on page 12-19), and
t he pr essur e plate (see st ep 27 on page 12-19).
30. A/ T model : Inst al l t he dr i ve plate (see page 14-204).
31. Inst al l t he t r ansmi ssi on:
32. Inst al l t he engi ne/t r ansmi ssi on (see page 5-12).
NOTE: Whenever any cr ankshaf t or connect i ng rod
bear i ng i s r epl ac ed, run t he engi ne at i dl e unti l it
r eac hes nor mal oper at i ng t emper at ur e, t hen cont i nue
to run it f or about 15 mi nut es.
7-29
Engi ne Block
CKP Pulse Plate Replacement
1. Remove t he cr ankshaf t f r om t he engi ne bl ock (see
page 7-14).
2. Remove t he CK P pul se plate (A) f r om t he cr ankshaf t .
3. Install t he CK P pul se plate i n t he r ever se or der of
r emoval .
Oil Pan Installation
1. Remove all of t he ol d li qui d gasket f r om t he oi l pan
2. Cl ean and dry t he oi l pan mat i ng sur f ac es.
08718-0009 to t he engi ne bl ock mat i ng sur f ac e of t he
oi l pan, and to t he i nsi de edge of t he t hr eaded bolt
hol es. Inst al l t he component wi t hi n 5 mi nut es of
NOTE:
Appl y a 3 mm (0.12 in) di amet e bead of l i qui d
I A 1
4. Inst al l t he oi l pan.
7-30
5. Ti ght en t he bol t s in t hree st eps. In t he f i nal st ep,
t orque all bol t s, in sequenc e, to 12 N-m (1.2 kgf -m,
8.7 Ibf f t ). Wi pe off t he exc ess l i qui d gasket on t he
eac h si de of cr ankshaf t pul l ey and t he f l ywheel /dr i ve
plate.
NOTE:
Wai t at l east 30 mi nut es bef ore fi lli ng t he engi ne
wi t h oi l .
i nst al l i ng t he oi l pan.
@ @ (D
6. Install t he cl ut ch/t orque conver t er c over (A) and t he
t r ansmi ssi on mount i ng bolts (B).
7. If t he engi ne i s sti ll in the vehi c l e, do st eps 8 t hr ough
24.
8. Lower t he t r ansmi ssi on j ack f r om t he t r ansmi ssi on.
9. A/ T model : Install t he shi ft cabl e bracket .
14-209).
Vehi c l es wi t h 1 HG VINs (see st ep 37 on page
14-210).
10. Ti ght en t he nut s sec ur i ng t he l ower t r ansmi ssi on
mount (see st ep 24 on page 5-16).
11. Install a new set ri ng on t he end of dr i veshaf t , t hen
i nst al l t he dri veshaf t (see page 16-19). Make sur e t he
ri ng " c l i c ks" into pl ace in t he di f f erent i al .
12. Connect the l ower ar m to t he left si de knuckl e (see
13. Install the left si de damper fork (see st ep 3 on page
18-21).
15. Install t he left front wheel .
16. Lower t he vehi cl e on t he lift.
(cont' d)
7-31
Engi ne Block
Oil Pan installation (c ont ' d)
17. Ti ght en t he upper t r ansmi ssi on mount br acket
mount i ng bol t s to t he speci f i ed torque.
MIT model
A / T model
12x 1. 25 mm
SS N-m (6.0 k g f m, 43 Ibf-ft)
Replace.
18. Ti ght en t he r ear engi ne mount mount i ng bol t s to t he
speci f i ed torque.
M/ T model
12 k 1.25 mm
78 N-m (8.0 kgf -m, 58 Ibf-ft)
Replace.
7-32
Transmission End Crankshaft Oil
Seal Installation - In Car. .
19. Ti ght en t he f ront engi ne mount bolt (A), t hen i nst al l
t he f ront engi ne mount st op (B).
12x 1. 25 mm
54 N-m
(5.5 kgf -m, 40 Ibf f t )
Replace.
20. Inst al l t he battery base, t hen i nst al l t he har ness
c l amps (see st ep 63 on page 5-22).
21. Install t he ai r cl eaner assembl y (see page 11-332).
24. Refi ll t he engi ne wi t h t he r ec ommended engi ne oi l
(see page 8-10).
. Dri ver Handl e, 15 x 135L 07749-0010000
. Oi l Seal Dri ver At t achment , 96 mm 07ZAD-PNAA100
1 Remove t he t r ansmi ssi on:
2. M/T model : Remove t he f l ywheel (see st ep 17 on page
3. A/ T model : Remove t he dri ve plate (see page 14-204).
4. Cl ean and dry t he cr ankshaf t oi l seal housi ng.
cr ankshaf t oi l seal .
6. Us e t he dr i ver handl e, 15 x 135L and t he oi l seal dr i ver
at t achment 96 mm to dr i ve a new cr ankshaf t oi l seal
squar el y i nto t he engi ne bl ock to t he speci f i ed
i nst al l ed hei ght .
07749-0010000
(cont' d)
7-33
Engi ne Block
Transmission End Crankshaft Oil Sealing Bolt Installation
Seal Installation - In Car (cont'd)
7. Measur e t he di st ance bet ween t he engi ne block (A) NOTE: When i nst al l i ng t he seal i ng bolt (A), al ways use a
and t he cr ankshaf t oi l seal (B). new washer .
Oi l Seal Inst al l ed Hei ght : 0. 2- 1. 2 mm A
(0.008-0.047 In) mAf^m""
18x 1. 0 mm (10.0 kgf -m, 72.3 Ibf f t )
8. M/T model : Install t he f l ywheel (see st ep 18 on page
9. A/ T model : Install t he dr i ve plate (see page 14-204).
10. Install t he t r ansmi ssi on:
7-34
Engine Mechanical
Engine Lubrication
Special Tools .8-2
Component Location I ndex . .8-3
S ymptom Troubleshooting I ndex 8-5
Low Oil Pressure I ndicator Circuit Diagram 8-6
Low Oil Pressure I ndicator Circuit Troubleshooting
(Open) 8-7
Low Oil Pressure I ndicator Circuit Troubleshooting
(Short) 8-8
Oil Pressure Switch Test 8-9
Oil Pressure Switch Replacement 8-9
Oil Pressure Test ....8-10
Engine Oil Level Check ...8-10
Engine Oil Replacement . ..8- 11
Engine Oil F ilter Replacement . 8-12
Oil F ilter Base Repl acement. . . . . . 8-13
Oil F ilter F eed Pipe Replacement 8-13
Engine Oil Gallery Cap Replacement 8-14
Oil J et Replacement ..8-14
Oil J et I nspection ..8-15
Oil P ump Overhaul . 8-16
Oil P ump Chain I nspection 8-24
Oil P ump Chain Replacement. 8-25
Engi ne Lubri cati on
Speci al Tool s
Ref .No. Tool Number Desc r i pt i on Qt y
07AAA-PLCA100 Oi l Fi lter Wr enc h 1
8-2
(cont ' d)
8-3
OIL PAN
Removal , page 7-11
Engine OH Level Check, page 8-10
Engine Oil Replacement, page 8-11
WASHER
DRAIN BOLT
OIL PUMP CHAIN
TENS I ONER
OIL CONTROL ORIFICE
BAFFL E PL ATE
OIL PUMP CHAIN
OIL J E T BOL TS
OIL FIL TER
OIL J E T S
OIL FIL TER FEED PIPE
OIL FILTER B A S E
OI L PRE S S URE S WI TCH
L ow Oi l Pr essur Indi cat or ci r cui t Di agr am, page 8-6
Tr oubl eshoot i ng (Open), page 8-7
Tr oubl eshoot i ng (Shor t ), page 8-8
Test , page 8-9
Oi l Pr essur e Test , page 8-10
ENGI NE OIL GAL L E RY CAP
8-4
Symptom Troubleshooting Index
Sy mpt om Di agnost i c pr oc edur e
Al s o c hec k f or
Ex c es s i v e engi ne oi l
c onsumpt i on
1. Veri f y t he engi ne oi l f i l l er c ap, t he oi l dr ai n bol t ,
and t he oi l fi lter are ti ght.
Chec k f or oi l l eaks.
2. Chec k f or wor n val ve gui de(s):
or wor n val ve seal (s):
3. Chec k f or damaged or wor n pi st on ri ng(s) (see
page 7-22).
4. Chec k f or damaged or wor n engi ne i nt ernal
part s (cyl i nder wal l , pi st ons, et c.) (see page
7-17).
L ow oi l pr essur e i ndi cat or does
not c ome on wi t h t he i gni ti on
swi t ch i n ON (II)
1. Do t he l ow oil pr essur e i ndi cat or ci rcui t
t r oubl eshoot i ng (Open) (see page 8-7).
2. Test t he oi l pr essur e swi t c h (see page 8-9).
An open i n t he wi r e
bet ween t he engi ne
cont rol modul e
(ECMJ/power t r ai n
cont rol modul e (PCM)
and t he oi l pr essur e
swi t ch
L ow oi l pr essur e i ndi cat or st ays
on
1. Chec k t he engi ne oi l l evel (see page 8-10).
2. Do t he l ow oi l pr essur e i ndi cat or ci rcui t
t r oubl eshoot i ng (Short ) (see page 8-8).
3. Test t he oi l pr essur e swi t c h (see page 8-9).
4. Chec k t he engi ne oi l pr essur e (see page 8-10).
5. Chec k t he oi l fi lter f or c l oggi ng.
6. Check t he oi l sc r een f or c l oggi ng.
7. Chec k t he reli ef val ve (see page 8-16).
8. Test t he oi l pump (see page 8-18).
A wi r e shor t ed to
gr ound bet ween t he
ECM/ PCM and t he oi l
pr essur e swi t ch
Low Oi l Pr essur e Indi cator Ci rcui t Di agram
BATTERY
No. 1-1 (100 A) No. 3-1 (50 A)
DRIVER'S UNDER-DASH
- W H T -
F 16 CI
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
W H T
i
I
1A3_
IGNITION SWI TCH
IG1
IG1 HOT i n ON (II)
and S TA RT (111)
I No. 5
(7.5 A)
DRI VER' S
UNDE R- DAS H
P20
BRN
32
RE D
F - CANH
F- CAN L
i - 1
L OW OI L
PRE S S URE
I NDI CATOR
5V
F- CAN L
Y EL/RED
OI L PRE S S URE S WI TCH
(Open: Nor mal oi l pr es s ur e)
( Cl o s ed : L o w or l ost pr es s ur e)
8-6
Low Oil Pressure Indicator Circuit Troubleshooting (Open)
1 Connec t t he Honda Di agnost i c Sy s t em (HDS) to t he
dat a Jink c onnec t or (DIG) (see st ep 2 on page 11-3).
2. Tur n t he i gni t i on swi t c h to ON (ll).
cont rol modul e (PCM). If It does not c ommuni c at e,
4. Chec k f or DTCs (see page 11-3). If a DTC Is pr esent ,
di agnose, and repai r t he c ause bef ore cont i nui ng wi t h
t hi s t est .
5. Chec k t he OIL PRE S S URE SWITCH in t he PGM-FI
DATA L I ST wi t h t he HDS.
Is ON Indicated?
YES - Repl ac e t he gauge cont rol modul e (see page
22-351 ) .
NO-Go t o st ep 6.
6. Tur n t he i gni t i on swi t c h t o L OCK (0).
7. Chec k t he oi l pr essur e swi t c h (see page 8-9).
Is the oil pressure switch OK ?
NO-Repl ac e t he oi l pr essur e swi t ch (see page 8- 9) .
8. Tur n t he i gni t i on swi t c h t o ON (II), and j ump t he S CS
l i ne wi t h t he HDS, t hen t ur n t he i gni t i on swi t c h t o
L OCK (0).
NOTE: Thi s st ep must be done t o prot ect t he
9. Di sc onnec t ECM/ PCM connect or B (49P) and t he oi l
pr essur e swi t c h connect or .
10. Chec k f or cont i nui t y bet ween ECM/ PCM c onnec t or
t er mi nal B7 and t he oi l pr essur e swi t c h connect or .
Ter mi nal si de of f emal e t er mi nal s
11
22
29
12
23
OPS W ( YEL / RED)
13
31
1415
32 33
16
34
1718 19
40I XVI 43\ / \ 45146147
9 10
21
27 28
38
32l
OPS W ( YEL / RED)
OI L PRE S S URE S WI TCH CONNECTOR
Wi r e si de of f emal e t er mi nal
known-good ECM/ PCM, r epl ace t he or i gi nal
NO-Repai r open i n t he wi r e bet ween t he oi l pr essur e
swi t c h c onnec t or and ECM/ PCM connect or t er mi nal
B7.B
I
8-7
Low Oil Pressure Indicator Circuit Troubleshooting (Short)
4. Chec k f or DTCs (see page 11-3). If a DTC i s pr esent ,
di agnose, and repai r t he c aus e bef ore cont i nui ng wi t h
t hi s t est .
5. St ar t t he engi ne, and check t he OIL PRE S S URE
SWITCH i n t he PGM-FI DATA L I ST wi t h t he HDS.
Is OFF indicated? .
YES - Reo l ac e t he gauge cont r ol modul e (see page
22-351 ) . ~ ' ' .
NO- Go to st ep 6.
7. Di sc onnec t t he oi l pr essur e swi t c h connect or .
8. St ar t t he engi ne, and check t he OIL PRE S S URE
SWI TCH i n t he PGM-FI DATA L I S T wi t h t he HDS.
Is OFF indicated?
YE S - Tur n t he i gni t i on swi t c h t o L OCK (0), t hen go to
st ep 9.
NO-Tur n t he i gni ti on swi t ch to L OCK (0), t hen go t o
st ep 10.
9. Chec k t he oi l pr essur e swi t c h (see page 8-9).
Is the oil pressure switch OK ?
YE S - Do t he oi l pr essur e t est (see page 8-10).
NO-Repl ac e t he oi l pr essur e swi t c h (see page 8- 9) .
10. Tur n t he i gni t i on swi t c h to ON (II), and j ump t he S CS
li ne wi t h t he HDS, t hen t urn t he i gni ti on swi t c h t o
L OCK (0).
12. Chec k f or cont i nui t y bet ween t he oi l pr essur e swi t ch
connect or and body gr ound.
OIL PRESSURE SWITCH CONNECTOR '
1
T OP S W
( YEL / RED)
Wire side of female terminal
YES - Repai r shor t t o gr ound i n t he wi r e bet ween t he
oi l pr essur e swi t c h and ECM/ PCM connect or t er mi nal
B 7. B
8-8
Oil Pressure Switch Test Oil Pressure Switch Replacement
1 Di sconnect t he oi l pr essur e swi t ch connect or (A) f rom
t he oi l pr essur e swi t ch (B).
2. Chec k f or cont i nui t y bet ween t he oi l pr essur e swi t ch
t er mi nal and t he engi ne (ground). Ther e shoul d be
cont i nui t y wi t h t he engi ne st opped. Ther e shoul d be
no cont i nui t y wi t h t he engi ne r unni ng.
1. Di sc onnec t t he oi l pr essur e swi t c h connect or (A), t hen
r emove t he oi l pr essur e swi t ch (B).
18 N-m
(1.8 kgf-m, 13 Ibfft)
2. Remove any ol d l i qui d gasket f r om t he swi t c h and
swi t c h mount i ng hol e.
3. Appl y a ver y smal l amount of l i qui d gasket to t he oi l
pr essur e swi t ch t hr eads, t hen i nst al l t he oi l pr essur e
swi t c h.
NOTE: Usi ng t oo muc h li qui d gasket may c ause li qui d
gasket to ent er t he oi l passage or t he end of t he new
oi l pr essur e swi t c h.
8-9
Oil Pressure Test
NOTE: If t he l ow oi l pr essur e war ni ng i ndi cat or s t ay s on
wi t h t he engi ne r unni ng, check t he engi ne oi l l evel . If t he
oi l l evel i s cor r ect , do t he f ol l owi ng t est .
1. Wi t h t he engi ne st opped, r emove t he oi l pr essur e
swi t c h (see page 8-9), and i nst al l an oi l pr essur e -
gauge (A).
2. St ar t t he engi ne. Shut it off i mmedi at el y if t he gauge
r egi st er s no oi l pr essur e. Repai r t he pr obl em bef or e
cont i nui ng..'
3. Al l ow t he engi ne to r each oper at i ng t emper at ur e (fan
c omes on at l east t wi c e). The pr essur e shoul d be:
Engi ne Oi l Temper at ur e: 176 F (80 C)
Engi ne Oi l Pr essur e:
At i dl e: 69 kPa (0.7 kgf / c m
2
, 10. 0 psi ) mi n.
At 3,000 r pm: 304 kPa (3.1 k gf / c m
2
, 44 psi ) mi n.
4. If t he oi l pr essur e i s out of speci f i cat i ons, i nspect
t hese i t ems:
Bl ocki ng of oi l fi lter.
Bl ocki ng of oi l sc r een.
Inspect t he oi l pr essur e reli ef val ve (see page 8-16).
Inspect t he oi l pump (see page 8-18).
Engine Oil Lewel Check
1. Park t he vehi c l e on l evel gr ound, and st art t he engi ne.
Hol d t he engi ne speed at 3,000 r pm wi t h no l oad (in N
or P (A/T model ) or Neut ral (M/T model )) unti l t he
radi at or f an c omes on, t hen t urn off t he engi ne, and
wai t a f ew mi nut es. ...
2. Remove t he di pst i ck, and wi pe off t he di pst i ck, t hen
rei nst al l t he di pst i ck.
3. Remove t he di pst i ck, and c hec k t he engi ne oi l l evel . It
should" be bet ween t he upper mar k (A) and t he l ower
mark (B).
4. If t he engi ne oi l l evel i s near er bel ow t he l ower mar k,
add t he r ec ommended engi ne oi l to bri ng it bet ween
t he upper and l ower mar ks. ,
8-10
Engine Oil Replacement
1. War m up t he engi ne.
2 Remove t he dr ai n bolt (A), and dr ai n t he engi ne oi l .
B 39 Nm
Replace. (4.0 kgf-m, 29 Ibf f t )
Do not overtighten.
3. Rei nst al l t he dr ai n bolt wi t h a new washer (B).
4. Refi ll t he engi ne wi t h t he r ec ommended oi l (see page
3-2).
Capac i t y (' 0809 model s)
At Oi l Change: 4.0 L (4.2 US qt )
At Oi l Change Incl udi ng Fi l t er: 4.2 L (4.4 US qt )
Af t er Engi ne Over haul : 5.3 L (5.6 US qt )
Capac i t y ('10 model )
At Oi l Change: 3.3 L (4.0 US qt )
At Oi l Change Incl udi ng Fi l t er: 4.0 L (4.2 US qt )
Af t er Engi ne Over haul : 5.1 L (5.4 US qt)
6. If t he mai nt enanc e mi nder r egui r ed engi ne oi l
r epl ac ement , r eset t he mai nt enanc e mi nder (see page
3-4), and t hi s pr ocedur e i s compl et e. If t he
mai nt enanc e mi nder di d not r egui r e engi ne oi l
r epl ac ement , go to st ep 7.
8 Connec t t he Honda Di agnost i c Sy s t em (HDS) to t he
dat a link c onnec t or (DLC) (see st ep 2 on page 11-3).
and t he engi ne cont r ol modul e (ECM)/power t r ai n
HDS.
12. Sel ec t ADJ US TMENT in t he GA UGE S wi t h t he HDS.
13. Sel ec t MAINTENANCE MINDER i n t he ADJ US TMENT
wi t h t he HDS.
14 Sel ec t RE S E T i n t he MAINTENANCE MINDER wi t h t he
HDS.
15. Sel ec t RES ETTI NG THE ENGINE OIL LIFE wi t h t he
HDS.
NOTE: If you c hanged t he aut omat i c t r ansmi ssi on
f l ui d (ATF) at t he s ame t i me wi t h t he engi ne oi l , sel ec t
RES ETTI NG THE ENGINE OIL LIFE AND ATF wi t h t he
HDS i nst ead.
5. Run t he engi ne f or mor e t han 3 mi nut es, t hen c hec k
f or oi l l eakage.
8-11
Engine Oil Filter Replacement
Oi l Fi lter Wr enc h 07 AAA-PL C A100
1. Drai n t he engi ne oi l (see page 8-11).
2. Remove t he oi l fi lter wi t h t he oi l fi lter wr enc h.
3. Inspect t he fi lter to make sur e t he r ubber seal i s not
st uck to t he oi l fi lter seat i ng sur f ace of t he engi ne.
4. Inspect t he t hr eads (A) and t he r ubber seal (B) on t he
new fi lter. Cl ean t he seat on t he oi l fi lter base, t hen
appl y a li ght coat of new engi ne oi l t o t he fi lter rubber
s eal . Us e onl y f i l t ers wi t h a bui lt-i n bypass s y s t em.
5. Inst al l t he oi l fi lter by hand.
6. Af t er t he r ubber seal seat s, t i ght en t he oi l fi lter
c l oc kwi se wi t h t he oi l fi lter wr enc h.
Ti ght en: 3/ 4 Tur n Cl oc k wi s e
Ti ght eni ng Tor que: 12 N-m (1.2 kgf -m, 8.7 Ibf-ft)
7. If f our number s or mar ks (1 to 4 or to ) ar e
pri nt ed ar ound t he out si de of t he fi lter, use t he
f ol l owi ng pr ocedur e to t i ght en t he fi lter.
Spi n t he fi lter on unti l its seal li ghtly seat s agai nst
t he oi l fi lter base, and not e whi c h number or mar k i s
at t he bot t om.
Ti ght en t he fi lter by t urni ng it c l oc kwi se t hr ee
number s or mar ks f r om t he one you not ed. For
exampl e, if number 2 i s at t he bottom when t he seal
i s seat ed, t i ght en t he fi lter unti l t he number 1 c omes
ar ound t he bot t om.
Number when r ubber Number af t er t i ght eni ng,
seal i s seat ed.
Number or
Mark when
rubber seal
i s seated
1
or
w
2
or
3
or
; 4
or

Number or 4 1 2 3
Mark after or or or or
tightening
8. Refi ll wi t h new engi ne oi l (see st ep 4 on page 8-11)
t hen, run t he engi ne for mor e t han 3 mi nut es, t hen
c hec k f or oi l l eaks.
8-12
Oil Filter Base Replacement Oil Filter Feed Pipe Replacement
1. Remove t he oi l fi lter (see page 8-12).
2. Remove t he exhaust pi pe bracket (A), t hen r emove
t he oi l f i lt er base (B).
C 10 x 1.25 mm
Replace. 44 N-m
(4.5 kgf -m, 33 Ibf f t )
3. Cl ean t he O-ri ng gr ooves and t he mat i ng sur f ace wi t h
t he oi l fi lter base.
4. Inst al l t he oi l fi lter base wi t h new O-r i ngs (C).
5. Install t he oi l fi lter (see page 8-12).
1. Remove t he oi l fi lter base (see page 8-13).
2. Remove t he oi l fi lter f eed pi pe.
3. Inst al l t he t wo 20 x 1.5 mm nut s (A) onto t he new oi l
fi lter f eed pi pe. Hol d one nut wi t h a wr enc h, t hen use a
sec ond wr enc h to t i ght en t he ot her nut.
A
4. Appl y new engi ne oi l to t he oi l fi lter f eed pi pe t hr eeds,
t hen t or que t he oi l fi lter f eed pi pe to t he oi l fi lter base
t o 35 N m (3.6 kgf -m, 26 Ibf f t ).
5. Remove t he nut s f r om t he oi l fi lter f eed pi pe, t hen
i nst al l t he oi l fi lter base (see page 8-13).
8-13
Engine Lubrication
Engine Oil Gallery Cap Replacement
1. Remove t he har ness br acket (A), t hen r emove t he
engi ne oi l gal l er y c ap (B).
A B
22 Nm 41 N-m
(2.2 kgf-m, 16 Ibfft) (4.2 kgf m, 30 Ibfft)
2. Cl ean t he O-ri ng gr oove and mat i ng sur f ac e wi t h t he
engi ne oi l gal l er y c ap.
3. Appl y new engi ne oi l to new O-r i ngs (C). Inst al l t he
engi ne oi l gal l er y c ap wi t h O-r i ngs, t hen i nst al l t he
har ness bracket .
Oil Jet Repl acement
2. Remov e t he baffle plate (see st ep 8 on page 7-14).
3. Remove t he oi l j et bol t s (A), t hen r emove t he oi l j et s
(B).
4. Car ef ul l y i nst al l t he oi l j et s, and t i ght en t he oi l j et
bol t s.
5. Inst al l t he baffle pl at e (see st ep 25 on page 7-29).
6. Inst al l t he oi l pump (see page 8-23).
8-14
Oil Jet Inspection
1. Remove t he oi l j et (see page 8-14), and i nspect it as
f ol l ows.
Make sur e that a 1.2 mm (0.05 i n) di amet er dri ll wi l l
go t hr ough t he nozzle hol e (A) (1.31 mm (0.052 in)
di amet er ).
Insert t he ot her end of a 1.9 mm (0.07 i n) dri ll into
t he oi l i ntake (2.0 mm (0.079 in) di amet er ). Make
sur e t he check ball (B) moves smoot hl y and has a
st roke of about 2.0 mm (0.079 i n).
Check t he oi l j et operat i on wi t h an ai r nozzl e. It
shoul d t ake at l east 325 kPa (3.9 kgf /c m
2
, 47psi ) to
unseat t he check bal l .
NOTE: Repl ace t he oi l j et assembl y, if t he nozzle i s
damaged or bent.
1.31 mm (0.052 i n)
2. Car ef ul l y i nst al l t he oi l j et . The mount i ng t or que i s
cri t i cal .
Spec i f i ed Tor que: 16 N-m (1.6 kgf -m, 12 Ibf f t )
8-15
Oil Pump Overhaul
Expl oded Vi ew
8 x 1.25 mm
27 N-m (2.8 kgf -m, 20 Ibf-ft)
Appl y new engi ne oi l t o t he bolt t hr eads.
10x 1. 25 mm
44 N-m
(4.5 kgf -m, 33 Ibf-ft)
Appl y new engi ne oi l
t o t he bolt t hr eads.
6x 1.0 mm
12 N-m
( 12 kgf m, 8.7 Ibf-ft)
S x 1.0 mm
12 N-m
(1.2 k g f m, 8.7 Ibf-ft)
BAFHJE PL ATES
DOWEL PIN
O-RING
Replace.
UPPER BAL ANCER
S HAFT HOL DER
REAR BAL ANCER
S HAFT
FRONT BAL ANCER
S HAFT
BAL ANCER S HAFT
BEARI NGS
S EAL I NG BOL T
39 N-m
(4.0 kgf -m, 29 Ibf-ft)
REL I EF VA L VE
Valve must slide freely
in housing bore.
Replace the oi l pump
as assembly if scored.
DOWEL PIN
L OWER BAL ANCER
S HAFT HOL DER
8-16
Oi l Pump Removal
1. Tur n t he cr ankshaf t pul l ey so i ts t op dead cent er (TDC)
mar k (A) l i nes up wi t h t he poi nt er (B).
NOTE: The ot her poi nt er (C) i s not used.
3. To hol d t he rear bal ancer shaf t , i nsert a 6 mm l ong pi n
punch (A) (Snap-on PPC108LA or equi val ent ) i nto t he
mai nt enance hol e i n t he bal ancer shaf t hol der and
t hr ough t he r ear bal ancer shaf t .
5. Al i gn t he hol es on t he lock (A) and t he oi l pump c hai n
aut o-t ensi oner (B), t hen i nser t a 3.0 mm (0.12 i n)
di amet er pi n (C) i nto t he hol es. Tur n t he cr ankshaf t
c l oc kwi se to sec ur e t he pi n.
6. L oosen t he oi l pump spr ocket mount i ng bolt (A).
VP> a-, A \ \ <i k f k \ v a
oi l pump c hai n aut o-t ensi oner .
(cont' d)
8-17
Oi l Pump Overhaul (cont'd)
7. Remove t he oil pump spr ocket (A) and t he oil pump
(B) , t hen r emove t he oi l pump chai n aut o-t ensi oner
(C) .
8-18
Oi l Pump Inspect i on
1. Remove t he pump housi ng.
i A I : _ _ :~ ... K/+
r
^rt*k / A v ,,-.iu /r\
. # ..%# . . . . . w. l y i y i i u y u i %r%t wi . n .i . i %%**# wi
out er rotor, t hen check t he i nner-t o-out er rotor radi al
c l ear anc e bet ween t he i nner rotor and t he out er rotor.
If t he i nner-t o-out er rotor radi al c l ear anc e exc eeds t he
ser vi c e li mi t, r epl ace t he oi l pump.
i nper Rot or -t o-Out er Rot or Radi al
Cl ear anc e
(0.0020-0.0059 i n)
3. Check t he pump housi ng-t o-r ot or axi al c l ear anc e
bet ween t he rotor (A) and t he pump housi ng (B). If the
pump housi ng-t o-rot or axi al c l ear anc e exc eeds t he
ser vi ce li mi t , r epl ace t he oi l pump.
Pump Housi ng-t o-Rot or Axi al Cl ear anc e
(0.0014-0.0028 i n)
4. Chec k t he pump housi ng-t o-out er rotor r adi al
c l ear anc e bet ween t he out er rotor (A) and t he pump
housi ng (B). If t he pump housi ng-t o-out er rot or radi al
c l ear anc e exc eeds t he ser vi c e li mi t , r epl ace t he oi l
pump.
. Pump Housi ng-t o-Out er Rot or Radi al
Cl ear anc e
(0.0059-0.0083 i n)
Bal ancer Shaf t Inspect i on
1. Seat t he bal ancer shaf t by pushi ng it away f r om t he oi l
pump spr ocket end of t he oi l pump.
2. Zer o t he di al i ndi cat or agai nst t he end of t he bal ancer
shaf t , t hen push t he bal ancer shaf t back and f ort h and
r ead t he end pl ay.
Bal anc er Shaf t End Pl ay
Fr ont Bal anc er Shaf t :
St andar d (New): 0.063 - 0. 108 mm
( 0. 0025- 0.0043 i n)
3. Remove t he pump housi ng.
(cont ' d)
8-19
Oil Pump Overhaul (cont'd)
4. Remove t he upper bal ancer shaf t hol der (wi th
bear i ngs) (A) and t he baffle pl at es (B), t hen r emove
t he f ront bal ancer shaf t (C) and t he r ear bal anc er shaf t
(D).
5. Measur e t he i nner di amet er of t he No. 1 bear i ng f or
t he f ront bal anc er shaf t hol e and t he No. 2 bear i ng f or
t he r ear bal anc er shaf t hol e.
Bear i ng Inner Di amet er
Fr ont : . .
St andar d (New):
Rear :
St andar d (New):
Fr ont
20.00020.020 mm
(0.7874-0.7882 i n)
20.03 mm (0.789 i n)
24. 000-24. 020 mm
(0.9449-0.9457 i n)
24.03 mm (0.946 i n)
Rear
8-20
6. Measur e t he di amet er s of t he No. 1 j our nal on t he
front bal ancer shaf t and t he No. 2 j our nal on t he rear
bal ancer shaf t .
Jour nal Di amet er
Fr ont :
St andar d (News-
s er v i c e Li mi t :
Rear :
St andar d (New):
Fr ont
19.938-19.950 mi n
(0.7850-0.7854 i n)
19.92 mm (0.784 i n)
23. 938-23. 950 mm
(0.9424-0.9429 i n)
23.92 mm (0.942 i n)
Rear
7. Cl ean t he front bal anc er shaf t No. 2 j our nal , t he rear
bar ancer shaf t No. 3 j our nal and t he beari ng hal ves
wi t h a cl ean shop t owel , t hen pl ace both bal ancer
shaf t s into t he bal ancer hol der .
8. Pl ace one st ri p of pl ast i gage ac r oss t he No. 2 j our nal
and the No. 3 j our nal s.
9. Rei nst al l t he bear i ngs and t he upper bal ancer shaf t
hol der , t hen t i ght en t he bol t s.
NOTE: Do not rotate t he bal ancer shaf t s duri ng
i nspect i on.
6 x 1.0 mm
12 N-m
(1.2 k g f m,
8.7 Ibf-ft)
8 x 1.25 mm
27 Nm
(2.8 k g f m,
20 Ibf-ft)
(cont ' d)
8-21
Oil Pump Overhaul (cont' d)
10. Remove t he upper bal anc er shaf t hol der and t he
bear i ngs agai n, and measur e t he wi dest part wi t h t he
pl ast i gage. If t he f ront bal anc er shaf t No. 2 and/or t he
r ear bal ancer shaf t No. 3 j our nal s oi l c l ear anc e i s
out -of -t ol er ance, i nst al l new bear i ngs, and r echeck. If
it i s sti ll out -of -t ol er ance, r epl ace t he bal anc er shaf t s.
Fr ont No. 2 and Rear No. 3 J our nal s Oi l
Cl ear anc e
St andar d (New): 0. 060-0. 120 mm
(0.0024-0.0047 i n)
No. 3 J OURNAL
11. Al i gn t he punch mark on t he rear bal ancer shaf t in t he
cent er of t he t wo punch mar ks on t he front bal ancer
shaf t , t hen i nst al l t he bal anc er shaf t s on t he l ower
bal ancer shaf t hol der.
12. Appl y new engi ne oi l to t he t hr eads of t he 8 mm bolts
(A).
13. Inst al l t he upper bal ancer shaf t hol der (B) wi t h a new
O-ri ng (C).
14. Inst al l t he pump housi ng.
Vi.d. Kg t - m,
8.7 Ibf f t )
8-22
Oi l Pump Inst al l at i on
1. Make sur e t he No. 1 pi st on t op dead cent er (TDC)
mar k (A) l i nes up wi t h t he poi nt er (B).
NOTE: The ot her poi nt er (C) i s not used.
2. Al i gn t he dowel pi n (A) on t he r ear bal anc er shaf t wi t h
t he mar k (B) on t he oi l pump.
3. To hol d t he r ear bal anc er shaf t , i nser t a 6 mm l ong pi n
punc h (A) (Snap-on PPC108LA or equi val ent ) i nto t he
mai nt enanc e hol e i n t he bal anc er shaf t hol der and
t hr ough t he rear bal anc er shaf t .
A
4. Tur n t he pl at e (A) c ount er c l oc kwi se, to r el ease t he
l ock, t hen push t he oi l pump c hai n aut o-t ensi oner ar m
( B l an d set t he f i rst c am (C) to t he f i rst edge of t he rack
(D). Insert a 3.0 mm (0.12 i n) di amet er pi n (E) into t he
hol e (F).
(cont' d)
8-23
Oi l Pump Over haul (cont'd)
5. Install t he oi l pump c hai n aut o-t ensi oner (A).
D IM-m
10 x 1.25 mm (2.2 kgf -m, 16 Ibf f t )
44 N m (4.5 kgf -m, 33 Ibf f t )
6. Appl y new engi ne oi l to t he t hr eads of t he oi l pump
mount i ng bol t s (B) and t he oi l pump spr ocket
mount i ng bolt (C), t hen l oosel y i nst al l t he oi l pump (D)
wi t h a new O-ri ng (E), t hen i nst al l t he oil pump
spr ocket (F).
7. Ti ght en t he oi l pump mount i ng bolts and t he oi l pump
8. Remove t he 6 mm pi n punch (G).
9. Remove t he 3.0 mm (0.12 in) di amet er pi n (A) f r om t he
Oil Pump Chai n i nspect i on
2. Measur e t he oi l pump chai n aut o-t ensi oner rod
l engt h. If t he l engt h i s over the ser vi c e li mi t, r epl ace
t he oi l pump chai n (see page 8-25).
8-24
Oil Pump Chain Replacement
NOTE: Keep t he oi l pump c hai n away f r om magnet i c
f i el ds.
Removal
2. Remove the oi l pan (see page 7-11).
under t he edge of t he engi ne bl ock.
NOTE: Do not hi t t he oi l pump and baffle plate when
pl aci ng t he j ack on t he edge of t he engi ne block.
4. Remove t he c am c hai n:
5. Loosel y i nst al l t he cr ankshaf t pul l ey.
6. To hol d t he rear bal anc er shaf t , i nsert a 6 mm l ong pi n
punc h (A) (Snap-on PPC108LA or equi val ent ) i nto t he
8. Remove t he cr ankshaf t pul l ey.
9. Al i gn t he hol es on t he lock (A) and t he oi l pump c hai n
aut o-t ensi oner (B), t hen i nsert a 3.0 mm (0.12 in)
di amet er pi n (C) i nto t he hol es. Tur n t he cr ankshaf t
c l oc kwi se t o sec ur e t he pi n.
10. Loosen t he oi l pump spr ocket mount i ng bolt (A).
(cont' d)
8-25
Oil Pump Chain Replacement (cont'd)
11. L oosen t he l ower oi l pump c hai n aut o-t ensi oner bolt
(A), t hen r emove t he upper oi l pump c hai n
aut o-t ensi oner bolt (B), t hen t urn t he oi l pump chai n
aut o-t ensi oner c l oc kwi se (C).
12. Remove t he oi l pump spr ocket (A) and t he oi l pump
c hai n gui de (B).
C
13. Remove t he oi l pump c hai n (C).
Inst al l at i on
1. Set t he cr ankshaf t to top dead cent er (TDC). Al i gn t he
TDC mar k (A) on t he cr ankshaf t spr ocket wi t h t he
2. i nst al l t he oi l pump c hai n on t he cr ankshaf t spr ocket
wi t h t he col or ed link plate (A) al i gned wi t h t he TDC
mar k (B) on t he cr ankshaf t spr ocket .
8-26
3. Set t he oi l pump c hai n on t he oi l pump chai n spr ocket
(A) wi t h t he punch mar k (B) al i gned wi t h t he cent er of
t he col or ed li nk pl at es (C), t hen i nst al l t he oi l pump
c hai n spr ocket to t he oi l pump.
4. To hol d t he r ear bal ancer shaf t , i nser t a pi n dr i ver (D)
(Snap-on PPC108LA or equi val ent ) i nto t he
5. Appl y new engi ne oi l to t he t hr eads of t he oi l pump
spr ocket mount i ng bolt (E), t hen i nst al l t he oi l pump
spr ocket mount i ng bolt and t he oi l pump c hai n gui de
(F).
6. Remove t he 6 mm l ong pi n punc h.
7. Check t he aut o-t ensi oner c am posi t i on. If t he posi t i on
i s not al i gned, set t he f i rst c am t o t he f i rst edge of t he
rack (see st ep 4 on page 8-23).
8. Tur n t he oi l pump chai n aut o-t ensi oner (A)
c ount er c l oc kwi se, t hen i nst al l t he upper oi l pump
c hai n aut o-t ensi oner bolt (B), and t i ght en t he l ower oi l
pump chai n aut o-t ensi oner bolt (C).
C
S x 1.0 mm
12 N-m (1.2 kgf m, 8.7 Ibf-ft)
9. Remove t he 3.0 mm (0.12 in) di amet er pi n (A) f r om t he
oi l pump chai n aut o-t ensi oner .
10. Install t he c am c hai n:
11. Remove t he wood block and t he j ack.
12. Install t he oi l pan (see page 7-30).
13. Install t he dri ve belt (see page 4-30).
8-27
Engine Mechanical
Intake Manifold and Exhaust System
Int ake Mani f ol d Remo v al and Inst al l at i on 9-3
Ex h aus t Pi pe and Muf f l er Repl ac ement . . . 9- 9
Intake Manifold and Exhaust Syst em
Intake Manifold Removal and Installation
Expl oded Vi ew
S OL ENOI D VA L VE
I NJ ECTOR B A S E
Replace if cracked or
if mating surface is damaged.
8 x 1.25 mm
22 N-m
(2.2 kgf -m, 16 Ibf f t )
6x1. 0
12 N-m
(1.2 kgf
8.7 Ibf "
I UE L
8 x 1.25 mm
22 N-m
(2.2 kgf m, 16 Ibf f t )
I NJ ECTOR
THROTTL E BODY
8 x 1.25 mm
22 N-m
12 2 kgf -m, 16 Ibf f t )
5 x 0.8 mm
3.4 N-m
(0.35 kgf -m, 2.5 Ibf f t )
INTAK E MANIFOLD
Replace if cracked or
if mating surface is damaged.
MANIFOLD A B S OL UTE
PRE S S URE (MAP) S E NS OR
6 x 1.0 mm
12 N-m
(1.2 kgf -m, 8.7 Ibf f t )
INTAK E MANIFOLD BRACK ET
8 x 1.25 mm
22 N-m (2.2 kgf -m, 16 Ibf f t )
(cont' d)
Intake Manifold Removal and Installation (cont'd)
Removal
2. Remove t he f ront gri l l e c over :
3. Remove t he wat er separ at or (A) and t he i ntake ai r
duct (B).
6. Di sc onnec t t he br eat her pi pe (A), t hen r emove t he
i nt ake ai r duct (B).
9-4
7, Di sc onnec t t he evapor at i ve emi ssi on (EVAP) c ani st er 10. Remove t he i ntake mani f ol d bracket ,
8. Di sconnect t he wat er bypass hos es (C), t hen pl ug t he 11. Di sc onnec t t he v ac uum hose (A) f r om t he i ntake
wat er bypass hos es . mani f ol d.
(cont ' d)
9-5
i nt ake Mani fold Removal and Installati on (cont' d)
12. Remove t he Intake mani f ol d (A), t hen di sc onnec t t he
posi t i ve c r ankc ase vent i l at i on (PCV) hose (B) f r om t he
Intake mani f ol d.
Inst al l at i on
1. Connec t t he posi t i ve c r ankc ase vent i l at i on (PCV) hose
(A) to t he i ntake mani f ol d, t hen i nst al l t he i ntake
mani f ol d (B) wi t h new gasket s (C), and t i ght en t he
bolts and nut s i n a c r i ssc r oss pattern i n t hr ee st eps,
begi nni ng wi t h t he i nner bolt.
8 x 1.25 mm
22 N m
(2.2 kgf-m, 16 Ibfft)
2. Connec t t he vac uum hose (A) to t he i ntake mani f ol d.
9-6
3. Install t he i ntake mani f ol d bracket .
4. Connec t t he mani f ol d absol ut e pr essur e (MAP)
sensor connect or (A) and t he throttle act uat or
connect or (B), t hen i nst al l t he wi r e har ness c l amps
(C).
5. Connec t t he wat er bypass hoses (A).
6. Connec t t he evapor at i ve emi ssi on (EVAP) cani st er
hose (B) and t he brake boost er vac uum hose (C).
7. Inst al l t he i ntake ai r duct (A), t hen connect t he
br eat her pi pe (B).
NOTE: When t i ght eni ng t he sc r ew of t he hose band
(C), al i gn t he edge of t he hose band (D) wi t h t he mark
(E) pai nt ed on t he hose band. If you t i ght en t he s c r ew
over t he mark, r epl ace t he hose band.
(cont' d)
9-7
i ntake Manifold and Exhaust Syst em
Intake Mani fold Removal and Installation (cont'd)
8. Inst al l t he engi ne cover .
9. Install t he battery base, t hen i nst al l t he har ness
c l amps {see st ep 63 on page 5-22).
10. Inst al l t he wat er separ at or (A) and t he i ntake ai r duct
(B).
11. Inst al l t he f ront gri l l e cover :
13. Af t er i nst al l at i on, check t hat al l t ubes, hos es , and
c onnec t or s ar e i nst al l ed cor r ect l y.
14. Cl ean up any spi l l ed engi ne cool ant .
9-8
Exhaust Pipe and Muffler Replacement
NOTE: Us e new gasket s and sel f -l ocki ng nut s when r eassembl i ng.
8 x 1 25 mm
3 3 m
'
m
<
3
4
kgf -m, 25 Ibf f t )
22 N m (2.2 kgf -m, 16 Ibf f t ) Replace.
Tighten the bolts in steps, alternating side-to-side.
Engine Cooling
Cooling Sy stem
Co mpo nent L oc at i on Index . . . . 10- 2
Radi at or Cap Tes t 10-3
Radi at or Tes t . . . . . 10-3
Fan Mot or Tes t ...10-4
Ther mos t at Tes t * 10-4
Wat er Pump Inspec t i on . . . . 10-5
Wat er Pump Repl ac ement ......10- 5
Cool ant Chec k ..10-6
Cool ant Repl ac ement 10-6
Ther mos t at Repl ac ement . . . 10-8
Wat er Pas s ag e Repl ac ement 10-9
Wat er Out l et Remo v al and Inst al l at i on .10-12
Connec t i ng Pi pe Repl ac ement ... 10-13
Fan, Fan Mot or , and S h r o ud Remo v al and
Radi at or Repl ac ement . 10-16
Fan Cont rol s
Co mpo nent L oc at i on I nd ex . .10-19
S y mpt o m Tr oubl es hoot i ng Index 10-20
Ci r c ui t Di agr am ... 10-22
Radi at or Fan Ci r c ui t Tr oubl es hoot i ng .. 10-24
Radi at or Fan Hi gh S peed Ci r c ui t Tr o ub l es h o o t i ng . ...10-26
Cooli ng S f st em
Component Location index
WATER PUMP
WATER PASSAGE
Replacement page 10-9
WATER OUTL ET
Removal and
CONNECTI NG PIPE
F AN, F AN MOTOR, and SHROUD
F an Motor Test page 10-4
ENGINE COOLANT
RADIATOR
Test, page 10-3
Coolant Check, page 10-6
Coolant Replacement page 10-6
TEMPERATURE (ECT) SENSOR 2 ' Replacement, page 10-16
10-2
Radiator Cap Test Radiator Test
t he radi at or c ap (A). Wet t he radi at or c ap seal wi t h
engi ne cool ant , t hen i nst al l it on a c ommer c i al l y
avai l abl e pr essur e t est er (B).
B
2. Appl y a pr essur e of 93- 123 kPa
(0. 95-1. 25 k g f / c m
2
, 14- 18 psi ).
3. Chec k for a drop i n pr essur e.
4. If t he pr essur e dr ops, r epl ace t he radi at or c ap.
t he radi at or c ap and fill t he r adi at or wi t h engi ne
cool ant to t he base of t he f i l l er neck.
2. At t ach a c ommer c i al l y avai l abl e pr essur e t est er (A) to
t he radi at or, and appl y a pr essur e of 93123 kPa
(0. 95-1. 25 k g f / c m
2
, 14- 18 psi ).
3. Inspect f or engi ne cool ant l eaks and a drop i n
pr essur e.
4. Remove t he t est er .
5. Chec k for engi ne oi l in t he cool ant and/or cool ant i n
t he engi ne oi l .
6. Inst al l t he radi at or c ap.
10-3
Cooli ng Syst em
Fan Motor Test
1. Di sconnect t he 2P c onnec t or s f r om t he radi at or f an
mot or and t he A/ C c ondenser f an mot or.
2. Test t he mot or by connect i ng battery power to
t er mi nal No. 2 and gr ound to t er mi nal No. 1.
3. If t he mot or f ai l s to run or does not run smoot hl y,
r epl ace it (see page 10-13).
Ther most at Test
Repl ac e t he t her most at (see page 10-8) if it i s st uck i n t he
open posi t i on at r oom t emper at ur e.
To t est a c l osed t her most at .
1. Sus pend t he t her most at (A) i n a cont ai ner of wat er .
Do not let t he t her most at and t he t her momet er (B)
t ouch t he bottom of t he hot cont ai ner .
2. Heat t he wat er , and check t he t emper at ur e wi t h a
t her momet er . Chec k t he t emper at ur e at when t he
t her most at f i rst opens, t hen c hec k t he t emper at ur e
agai n when t he t her most at i s f ul l y open.
3. Measur e t he lift hei ght of t he t her most at when it i s
f ul l y open. If t he t her most at i s not wi t hi n t he
speci f i cat i on, r epl ace it.
St andar d Ther most at
Li ft Hei ght : Above 8.0 mm (0.31 i n)
St ar t s Openi ng: 169- 176 F ( 76- 80 C)
Ful l y Open: 194F (90C)
10-4
Water Pump Inspection Water Pump Replacement
2. Tur n t he wat er pump pul l ey c ount er c l oc kwi se, and
check t hat it t ur ns f r eel y and smoot hl y. If it does not
t urn smoot hl y, r epl ace t he wat er pump (see page
10-5).
NOTE: When you check t he wat er pump, you may see
a smal l amount of " weepi ng" f r om t he bl eed hol es
(A). Thi s i s nor mal .
A
3. Install t he dri ve belt (see page 4-30).
3. Remove t he t ensi oner pul l ey (see page 4-32).
4. Remove t he wat er pump pul l ey (A).
5. Remove t he si x bol t s sec ur i ng t he wat er pump, t hen
r emove t he wat er pump (B).
6. Inspect and c l ean t he O-ri ng gr oove and t he mat i ng
sur f ac e of t he wat er passage.
7. Inst al l t he wat er pump wi t h a new O-ri ng (C) and t he
wat er pump pul l ey.
9. Inst al l t he t ensi oner pul l ey (see page 4-32).
10-5
Cooli ng S y s t em
Coolant Check
1. Chec k t he cool ant l evel i n t he cool ant r eser voi r . Make
sur e it i s bet ween t he MAX mark (A) and t he MIN
mar k(B).
2. If t he cool ant l evel i n t he cool ant r eser voi r i s at or
bel ow t he MIN mar k, add cool ant to bri ng it up to t he
MAX mar k, t hen i nspect t he cool i ng syst em f or l eaks.
Coolant Replacement
t he radi at or c ap.
2. Loosen t he dr ai n pl ug (A), and dr ai n t he cool ant .
A
3. After t he cool ant has dr ai ned, t i ght en t he radi at or
drai n pl ug sec ur el y.
4. Remove, dr ai n, and rei nst al l t he cool ant r eser voi r .
5. Fi ll t he cool ant r eser voi r to t he MAX mar k (A) wi t h
Honda Long Li f e Ant i f r eeze/Cool ant Type 2.
10-6
6. Pour Honda Long Li f e Ant i f r eeze/Cool ant Type 2 into
t he radi at or up to t he base of t he f i l l er neck.
NOTE:
Al ways use Honda Long Li fe Ant i f r eeze/Cool ant
Type 2. Usi ng a non-Honda cool ant c an r esul t in
c or r osi on, c ausi ng t he cool i ng syst em to
mal f unct i on or f ai l .
Honda Long Li fe Ant i f r eeze/Cool ant Type 2 i s a
mi xt ure of 50 % ant i f reeze and 50 % wat er . Do not
add wat er .
If t he vehi c l e i s r egul ar l y dr i ven in ver y l ow
t emper at ur es (under - 31 F, - 3 5 C) a 60 %
concent r at i on of cool ant shoul d be used. To
ac c ompl i sh t hi s, pour 1.6 L (0.4 US gal ) of Honda
Ext r eme Col d Weat her Ant i f r eeze/Cool ant Type 2
into t he radi at or f i r st , t hen add Honda Long Li fe
ant i f r eeze/Cool ant Type 2 unti l t he radi at or i s f ul l .
Engi ne Cool ant Ref i l l Capac i t i es (Incl udi ng t he
cool ant r eser voi r c apac i t y of 0.68 L (0.180 US gal))
At Cool ant Change:
DENS O TRAD
M/T
model
6.1 L(1.61 US gal ) 6.0 L (1.59 US gal )
A/ T
model
6.0 L (1.59 US gal ) 5.9 L (1.56 US gal )
Af t er Engi ne Over haul ('08-09 model s):
DENS O TRAD
M/T
model
8.2 L (2.17 US gal) 8.1 L (2.14 US gal )
A/ T
model
8.1 L (2.14 US gal ) 8.0 L (2.11 US gal )
Af t er Engi ne Over haul ('10 model ):
. DENS O - AD
M/T
model
7.3 L (1.93 US gal) 7.21(1.90 US gal )
A/ T
model
7.2 L (1.90 US gal ) 7.1 L(1.88 US gal )
7. Loosel y i nst al l t he radi at or c ap.
8. St ar t t he engi ne, and let it run unti l it war ms up (the
radi at or f an c omes on at l east t wi ce).
9. Tur n off t he engi ne. Check t he l evel in t he radi at or,
and add Honda Long Li fe Ant i f r eeze/Cool ant Type 2, if
needed.
10. Put t he radi at or cap sec ur el y, t hen st art t he engi ne
agai n, and check for l eaks.
12. If t he mai nt enance mi nder requi red engi ne cool ant
r epl acement , r eset t he mai nt enance mi nder (see page
3-6), and t hi s pr ocedur e i s compl et e. If t he
mai nt enance mi nder di d not requi re engi ne cool ant
r epl acement , go to st ep 13.
16. Make sur e t he HDS c ommuni c at es wi t h t he vehi cl e
t r oubl eshoot t he DLC ci rcui t (see page 11-181).
HDS.
18. Sel ec t ADJ US TMENT in t he GA UGE S wi t h t he HDS.
19. Sel ec t MAINTENANCE MINDER in t he ADJ US TMENT
' wi t h t he HDS.
20. Sel ec t RE S E T in t he MAINTENANCE MINDER wi t h t he
HDS.
21. Sel ec t MAINTENANCE S UB ITEM 5 RE S E T wi t h t he
HDS.
10-7
Cooli ng S f st em
Thermostat Replacement
1. Dr ai n t he engi ne c ool ant (see page 10-6).
2. Cl ean any di rt off t he qui ck connect or (A), t he
t her most at c over , and t he l ower radi at or hose.
3. Pull out t he lock (B) by hand, t hen wi ggl e t he qui ck
connect or l oose, and r emove it f r om t he t her most at
c over . Do not use any t ool s to r emove t he qui ck
connect or .
4. Remove t he t her most at assembl y (A).
6 m 1.0 mm
12 N m (1.2 kgf -m, 8.7 Ibf f t )
5. Inst al l a new t her most at wi t h a new O-ri ng (B).
6. Chec k t he qui ck connect or (A) and t he set ri ng (B) f or
c r ac ks or damage. If t he connect or and/or t he set ri ng
ar e c r ac ked or damaged, r epl ace t he connect or .
C
Replace.
7. Wake sur e t he set ri ng Is i n pl auw i nsi de t he qyi ck
connect or . If t he set ri ng i s off t he connect or , r epl ace
t he qui ck connect or .
8. Repl ac e a new O-ri ng (C) i n t he qui ck connect or .
9. Chec k t he lock (D). If t he lock i s damaged or def or med,
r epl ace it. When i nst al l i ng t he new lock to t he
connect or , push it st r ai ght down al ong t he gr oove.
10. Cl ean t he connect i ng sur f ace of t he t her most at c over
(E), t hen appl y cl ean engi ne cool ant ar ound t he
connect i ng sur f ac e.
11. Push t he lock (A) down, t hen push t he qui ck connect or
(B) ont o t he t her most at c over unti l you hear it cl i ck.
10-8
Wat er Passage Repl acement
3. Cl ean any dirt off t he qui ck connect or (A), t he
t her most at cover , and t he l ower radi at or hose.
4. Pull out t he lock (B) by hand, t hen wi ggl e t he qui ck
connect or l oose, and r emove it f r om t he t her most at
cover . Do not use any t ool s to r emove t he qui ck
connect or .
5. Remove t he A/ C c ompr essor wi t hout di sconnect i ng
t he A/ C hoses. Take car e not to bend t he hose
exc essi vel y (see st ep 50 on page 5-9).
6. Remove t he alt ernat or (see page 4-32).
7. Remove t he dri ve belt aut o-t ensi oner (see page 4-31).
9. Remove t he connect i ng pi pe mount i ng bol t s (A)
sec ur i ng t he connect i ng pi pe (B).
10. Remove t he connect i ng pi pe and di sc onnec t t he
wat er bypass hose (C) and t he posi t i ve c r ankc ase
vent i l at i on (PCV) hose (D).
11. Remove t he wat er passage (A).
12. Remove t he t her most at housi ng (B).
13. Remove t he wat er pump (see page 10-5).
14. Inst al l t he wat er pump (see page 10-5).
(cont' d)
10-9
Cooli ng Syst em
Water Passage Replacement (cont'd)
15. Inst al l t he t her most at housi ng (A) wi t h a new O-ri ng
(B).
6x 1. mm
12 N-m
(1.2 kgf m, 8.7 Ibf f t )
16. Cl ean and dry t he wat er passage mat i ng sur f ac es.
17. Appl y l i qui d gasket , P/N 08717-0004, 08718-0003, or
08718-0009 to t he engi ne bl ock mat i ng sur f ac e of t he
wat er passage, and to t he i nsi de of t he t hr eaded bolt
NOTE:
gasket al ong t he broken l i ne (A).
3 mm
(0.12 i n)
18. Install t he wat er passage (A) wi t h a new O-ri ng (B).
NOTE:
wi t h cool ant .
i nst al l i ng t he wat er passage.
B
Replace.
10x1.25 mm
44 N m (4.5 kgf -m, 33 Ibf f t )
19. Connec t t he wat er bypass hose (A) and t he PCV hose
(B).
6 x 1.0 mm
12 N-m (1.2 kgf -m, 8.7 Ibf f t )
6 x 1.0 mm
22 N-m (2.2 kgf -m, 16 Ibf f t )
20. Inst al l t he connect i ng pi pe (C) wi t h a new O-ri ng (D),
t hen t i ght en t he connect i ng pi pe mount i ng bol t s (E)
sec ur i ng t he connect i ng pi pe.
10-10
0 5
21. Inst al l t he i ntake mani f ol d (see page 9-6).
22. Install t he dr i ve belt aut o-t ensi oner (see page 4-31).
23. Install t he al t ernat or (see page 4-33).
24. Install t he A/ C c ompr essor (see st ep 41 on page 5-19).
26. Chec k t he qui ck connect or (A) and t he set ri ng (B) f or
c r ac ks or damage. If t he connect or and/or t he set ri ng
ar e cr acked or damaged, r epl ace t he connect or .
E A
27. Make sur e t he set ri ng i s i n pl ace i nsi de t he qui ck
connect or . If t he set ri ng i s off t he connect or , r epl ace
t he qui ck connect or .
28. Repl ace t he O-ri ng (C) i n t he qui ck connect or .
29. Check t he lock (D). If t he lock i s damaged or def or med,
r epl ace it. When i nst al l i ng t he new lock on t he
connect or , push it st rai ght down al ong t he gr oove.
30. Cl ean t he connect i ng sur f ac e of t he t her most at c over
(E), t hen appl y cl ean engi ne cool ant ar ound t he
connect i ng sur f ac e.
31. Push t he lock (A) down, t hen push t he qui ck connect or
(B) onto t he t her most at c over unti l you hear it cl i ck.
32. Ref i l l t he radi at or wi t h engi ne cool ant , and bl eed t he
10-11
Cooli ng Syst em
Water Outlet Removal and Installation
2. Di sc onnec t t he br eat her pi pe (A), t hen r emove t he
i ntake ai r duct (B).
NOTE: When t i ght eni ng t he s c r ew of t he hose band
(C), al i gn t he edge of t he hose band (D) wi t h t he mar k
(E) pai nt ed on t he hose band. If you t i ght en t he s c r ew
over t he mark, r epl ace t he hose band.
3. Di sconnect t he upper radi at or hose (A), t he heat er
hose (B), and t he wat er bypass hose (C).
5. Remove t he connect i ng pi pe mount i ng bolts (A), t hen
r emove t he connect i ng pi pe (B).
A
6 x 1.0 mm
Replace. 8 x 1.25 mm
22 N-m (2.2 k g f m, 16 Ibf-ft)
6. Di sconnect t he engi ne cool ant t emper at ur e (ECT)
sensor 1 connect or (A), t hen r emove t he wat er outlet
(B).
7. Install t he wat er outlet wi t h a new O-ri ng (C).
8. Install t he ot her part s in t he r ever se or der of r emoval .
10-12
Connecting Pipe Replacement
3. Remove t he connect i ng pi pe mount i ng bol t s (A), t hen
r emove t he connect i ng pi pe (B).
A
6 x 1 m m
12 N-m (1.2 kgf-m, 8.7 Ibfft) ~
C 8 x 1.25 mm
Repl ac e. 22 N-m (2.2 kgf-m, 16 Ibfft)
4. Install t he connect i ng pi pe wi th a new O-ri ng (C).
5. Refi ll t he radi at or wi t h engi ne cool ant , and bl eed the
ai r f r omt he cool i ng syst em (see st ep 50 on page 5-9).
Fan, Fan Mot or, and Shr oud
Removal and Inst al l at i on
Removal
3. Remove t he front gri l l e c over :
duct (B).
5. Remove t he cool ant r eser voi r .
(cont' d)
10-13
Cooling Syst em
f an
#
Fan Motor
#
and Shroud Removal and Installation (cont'd)
6. Di sc onnec t t he f an mot or c onnec t or s (A), t hen
r emove t he har ness c l amp (B).
7. Remove t he A/ C c ondenser f an shr oud assembl y (A),
t hen r emove t he radi at or f an shr oud assembl y (B).
NOTE: Move t he radi at or f an shr oud assembl y t owar d
t he ri ght si de of t he vehi c l e t o al l ow enough spac e t o
lift it up and away f r om t he A/ C c ondenser f an shr oud
assembl y.
8. Di sassembl e t he f an shr ouds.
10-14
Inst al l at i on
1. Reassembl e t he f an shr ouds.
6 N- m
(0.6 kgf -m, 4.4 ibfft)
4 N-m (0.4 kgf -m, 2 9 Ibf f t )
2. Install t he radi at or f an shr oud assembl y (A), t hen
i nst al l t he A/ C c ondenser f an shr oud assembl y (B).
3. Connec t t he f an mot or connect or s (A), t hen i nst al l t he
har ness c l amp (B).
4. Inst al l t he cool ant r eser voi r .
(cont' d)
10-15
Cooli ng S y s t em
Fan, Fan Motor, and Shroud
Removal and Installation (cont'd)
5. i nst al l t he wat er separ at or (A) and t he i nt ake ai r duct
(B).
A
6. i nst al l t he front gri l l e cover :
7. Install t he battery base, t hen i nst al l t he har ness
c l amps (see st ep 63 on page 5-22).
Radi at or Repl acement
1 _ Do t he bat t ery r emoval pr ocedur e (see page 22-92).
2. Remove t he har ness c l amps, t hen r emove t he battery
duct (B).
7. A/T model : Di sconnect t he aut omat i c t r ansmi ssi on
f l ui d (ATF) cool er hoses (A) (see page 14-220), t hen
plug t he c ool er hoses and t he l i nes.
8. Di sconnect t he l ower radi at or hose (B) f r om t he
radi at or.
10-16
9. Di sconnect t he f an mot or connect or s (A) and engi ne
cool ant t emper at ur e (ECT) sensor 2 connect or (B),
t hen r emove t he har ness c l amps (C).
Cooli ng Syst em
Radiator Replacement (cont 'd)
11. Remove t he radi at or.
12. Remove t he f an shr oud assembl i es f r om t he radi at or.
13. Install t he radi at or i n t he r ever se or der of r emoval . Make sur e t he upper and l ower c ushi ons (4) are set sec ur el y.
15. Fi ll t he radi at or wi t h engi ne c ool ant and bl eed t he ai r f r om t he cool i ng syst em (see st ep 5 on page 10-6).
10-18
Fan Cont rol s
RADIATOR FAN REL AY ('10 model )
(In t he r el ay ci r cui t hoard)
Test, page 22-93
A / C CONDENS ER FAN REL AY ('8-1 model s)
(In t he r el ay ci r cui t boar d)
Test, page 22-93
FAN CONTROL REL AY (10 model )
(In t he r el ay ci r cui t boar d)
Test , page 22-93
UNDER-HOOD
FUS E / RE L A Y BOX
RADIATOR FAN REL AY
(' 08-09 model s)
Tes t , page 22-93
A / C CONDENS ER FAN A S S E MB L Y
Fan Mot or Test , page 10-4
ENGI NE COOL ANT TEMPERATURE
(ECT) S E NS OR 2
Repl ac ement page 11 -200
ENGI NE COOL ANT TEMPERATURE
(ECT) S E NS OR 1
Repl ac ement page 11 -200
RADIATOR FAN A S S E MB L Y
F an Mot or Test , page 10-4
Ci r cui t Di agr am, page 10-22
Radi at or Fan Ci r cui t Tr oubl eshoot i ng (' 08-09model s), page 10-24
Radi at or Fan Hi gh Speed Ci r cui t Tr oubl eshoot i ng ('10 model ), page 10-26
10-19
Fan Cont rol s
' 08-09 models
Symptom Diagnostic procedure Also check for
Engi ne over heat s 1 Chec k t he cool ant l evel .
2 Chec k f or engi ne cool ant l eaks (from gasket s,
hos es , O-r i ngs, et c.).
3 Chec k f or di rt, l eaves, or i nsec t s on radi at or
and A/ C c ondenser .
4. Chec k f or det er i or at ed cool ant .
5. Chec k f or damaged or def or med f an shr oud.
6. Inspect t he f an mot or s (see page 10-4) or
radi at or f an r el ay (see page 22-93).
7. Chec k t he radi at or c ap (see page 10-3).
8. Chec k t he t her most at (see page 10-4).
9. Inspect t he wat er pump (see page 10-5).
10. Chec k f or c l ogged or det er i or at ed radi at or
hoses.
11. Chec k f or c l ogged heat er cor e or hoses.
12. Chec k f or a damaged cyl i nder head gas k et
Pr oper radi at or and
c ondenser f an
cont rol and oper at i on
The radi at or f an does not run at all 1 Chec k f or PGM-FI DTCs (see page 11-3).
2. Radi at or f an ci r cui t t r oubl eshoot i ng (see
page 10-24).
Cl eanl i ness and
t i ght ness of all
connect or s
The A/ C c ondenser f an does not
run at all
A/ C c ondenser f an ci rcui t t r oubl eshoot i ng (see
page 21-46).
Gener al
t r oubl eshoot i ng
(see page 21-9)
Cl eanl i ness and
t i ght ness of all
connect or s
10-20
' 10 model
Sy mpt om Diagnostic procedure Also check for
Engi ne over heat s 1. Chec k t he cool ant l evel .
2. Chec k for engi ne cool ant l eaks (from gasket s,
hoses, O-r i ngs, et c.).
3. Chec k f or di rt, l eaves, or i nsec t s on radi at or
and A/ C c ondenser .
4. Chec k f or det eri orat ed cool ant .
5. Chec k f or damaged or def or med f an shr oud.
6 Inspect the f an mot or s (see page 10-4) or
radi at or f an rel ay (see page 22-93).
7 Chec k t he radi ator c ap (see page 10-3).
8. Check t he t her most at (see page 10-4).
9. Inspect the wat er pump (see page 10-5).
10. Chec k f or cl ogged or det eri orat ed radi at or
hoses.
11. Chec k f or cl ogged heat er cor e or hoses.
12. Chec k f or a damaged cyl i nder head gasket .
Pr oper radi at or and
c ondenser f an
cont rol and operat i on
The radi at or f an does not run at
hi gh speed
1 Chec k f or PGM-FI DTCs (see page 11-3).
2. Radi at or f an hi gh speed ci rcui t
t r oubl eshoot i ng (see page 10-26).
Cl eanl i ness and
t i ght ness of all
connect or s
Both t he radi at or f an and t he A/ C
c ondenser f an does not run at l ow
speed
Radi at or and A/ C c ondenser f ans l ow speed
ci r cui t t r oubl eshoot i ng (see page 21-48)
Cl eanl i ness and
t i ght ness of all
connect or s
The A/ C c ondenser f an does not
run at hi gh speed
A/ C c ondenser f an hi gh speed ci rcui t
Gener al
(see page 21-9)
Cl eanl i ness and
t i ght ness of all
connect or s
10-21
Fan Cont rol s
Ci rcui t Di agram
' 08-09 model s
0 -
No. 1-1 (100 A)
C T \ W O
No. 5( 20 A)
No 3-1 ( 0 A)
CTXJ D
DRI VER' S UNDE R- DA S H
F USE/RELAY B OX
IGNITION S WI TCH
1G2 HOT i n ON (II)
) No . 16
(7.5 A)
DRIVER'S
UNDER-DASH
F US E / RE L A Y
BOX
No. 14 (15 A)
<r\jj
PGM-FI
SUB RE L A Y
No. 3-6 (30 A)
C T Xj D
Qj _Q-
GRN
C1
No. 21 (7.5 A)
I f
A/C
CONDE NS E R
FAN RE L A Y
C3
B L U/ B L K
2
% A / C
(M) CONDE NS E R
v
' FAN MOTOR
\ RADI ATOR
YE L
f
F
FAN MOTOR
I
ENGI NE COOL A NT
TE MPE RA TURE
( ECT) S E NS OR 1
ENGI NE COOL A NT
TE MPE RA TURE
( ECT) S E NS OR 2
10 22
' 10 model
DRI VER' S UNDER- DAS H , n N I T i n N q W . T r H
F US E / RE L A Y BOX IGNITION S WI TCH
" VA A
2 1
ENGI NE COOL A NT
TE MPE RA TURE
( ECT) S E NS OR 1
ENGI NE COOL A NT
TE MPE RA TURE
( ECT) SENSOR 2
10-23
Fan Cont rol s
Radiator Fan Circuit Troubleshooting
' 08-09 model s
1. Chec k t he No. 3 - 6 (30 A) f use in t he under -hood
f use/r el ay box and No. 16 (7.5 A) f use i n t he dr i ver ' s
Are the fuses OK ?
NO-Repl ac e t he f use(s) and r echeck. If t he f use
cont i nues t o bl ow, l ocat e and repai r t he shor t i n t he
ci rcui t bet ween t he under -hood f use/r el ay box and t he
radi at or f an mot or and dr i ver ' s under -dash f use/r el ay
box connect or t er mi nal F26 and under -hood
f use/r el ay box connect or t er mi nal B6.
2. Remove t he radi at or f an r el ay and di sc onnec t and
r emove t he rel ay ci r cui t boar d f r om t he under -hood
f use/r el ay box, and t est it (see page 22-93).
Is the relay and/or the relay circuit board OK ?
NO-Repl ac e t he radi at or f an rel ay and/or t he r el ay
ci rcui t b o ar d . !
3. Measur e t he vol t age bet ween radi at or f an r el ay 4P
socket t er mi nal No. 1 and body gr ound.
RADIATOR FAN RE L AY 4P S OCK E T
1
2
4 3
(\
NO-Repl ac e t he under -hood f use/r el ay box.l
4. Connec t radi at or f an r el ay 4P socket t er mi nal s No. 1
and No. 2 wi t h a j umper wi r e.
RADIATOR FAN REL AY 4P S OCK E T
J UMPER
WI RE
DOQS t he radiat or fan run?
NO- Go to st ep 5.
5. Test t he radi at or f an mot or (see page 10-4).
Is the motor OK ?
NO-Repl ac e t he radi at or f an mot or (see page 10-13).
6. Di sconnect t he radi at or f an mot or 2P connect or .
7. Chec k f or cont i nui t y bet ween radi at or f an r el ay 4P
socket t er mi nal No. 2 and radi at or f an mot or 2P
connect or t er mi nal No. 2.
1
2
4 3
1
B L U/ B L K
RADIATOR FAN MOTOR 2P CONNECTOR
Wi r e si de of f emal e t er mi nal s
NO-Repai r open i n t he wi r e bet ween t he under -hood
f use/r el ay box and radi at or f an mot or 2P connect or
t er mi nal No. 2M
10-24
8. Check f or cont i nui t y bet ween radi at or f an mot or 2P
connect or t er mi nal No. 1 and body gr ound.
RADIATOR F AN MOTOR 2P CONNECTOR
J ZZL
1 2
BL K
YES - Ch ec k f or poor connect i ons or l oose t er mi nal s at
t he under -hood f use/r el ay box, t he radi at or f an mot or
and body gr ound G2 0 1 . l l
NO-Repai r open in t he wi r e bet ween radi at or f an
mot or 2P connect or t ermi nal No. 1 and body gr ound.
If t he wi r e i s OK, check f or a poor gr ound at G201 .
9. Di sconnect t he j umper , and t urn t he i gni ti on swi t c h to
ON (II). Chec k for vol t age bet ween radi at or f an rel ay
4P socket t er mi nal No. 4 and body gr ound.
1
2
4 3
NO-Repai r open in t he wi r e bet ween t he under -hood
f use/r el ay box and t he dr i ver ' s under -dash f use/r el ay
box.HI
10. Di sconnect under -hood f use/r el ay box c onnec t or B
(14P).
11. Chec k for*conti nui ty bet ween radi at or f an rel ay 4P
socket t er mi nal No. 3 and under -hood f use/r el ay box
connect or t er mi nal B8.
n
1
2 3 4 5
r
6
7
j -
8 9 10 11 12 13 14
UNDER-HOOD FUS E / RE L A Y BOX CONNECTOR B (14P)

NO-Repai r open i n t he wi r e bet ween radi at or f an
r el ay 4P socket t er mi nal No. 3 and under -hood
f use/r el ay box connect or t er mi nal B8.
t r oubl eshoot the DL C ci rcui t (see page 11-181).
swi t ch to L OCK (0).
(cont' d)
10-25
Fan Cont rol s
Radi at or Fan Ci rcui t
Troubl eshoot i ng (cont' d)
17. Di sc onnec t ECM/ PCM connect or A (49P)/t hen c hec k
f or cont i nui t y bet ween under -hood f use/r el ay box
connect or t er mi nal B7 and ECM/ PCM connect or
t er mi nal A6.
p
1
2 3
F=l
4 5
r
6
7
U I
8 9 10 11 12 13 14
L
YE L
FANC (YEL )
ll il
3 I 4 I 5 I
i,i
3 | 7 | /
9 1101
11
/ / /115
16 17|18|19 20 21
r
i
22 23 24 25 ><] 2 6 27 28
r
i
29 30 321/ 34 35|36|/
/ /
r
i
1/141
42
j
431441/ | 4 6 1 /
A A
ECM/ PCM CONNECTOR A (49P)
known-good ECM/ PCM (see page 11-7), t hen r ec hec k.
If t he sympt om/i ndi cat i on goes away wi t h a known
good ECM/ PCM, r epl ace t he or i gi nal ECM/ PCM (see
page 11-204).B
NO-Repai r open in t he wi r e bet ween ECM/ PCM
connect or t er mi nal A6 and under -hood f use/r el ay box
connect or t er mi nal B7M
Radi ator Fan High Speed Ci rcui t
Troubl eshoot i ng
'10 model
1. Chec k t he No. 3 - 8 (30 A) f use i n t he under -hood
Are the fuses OK ?
YES-Rei ns t al l t he f use(S), t hen got o st ep 2.
NO-Repl ac e t he f use(s) and r echeck. If t he f use
cont i nues to bl ow, l ocat e and repai r t he shor t in t he
ci rcui t bet ween t he under -hood f use/r el ay box and t he
r el ay ci rcui t boar d, t he under -hood f use/r el ay box and
t he radi at or f an mot or, t he dr i ver ' s under dash
f use/r el ay box connect or t er mi nal F26 and t he
under -hood f use/r el ay box connect or t er mi nal B10. H
2. Remove t he radi at or f an rel ay and di sconnect and
r emove t he rel ay ci rcui t boar d f r om t he under -hood
Is the relay and/or the relay circuit board OK ?
NO-Repl ac e t he radi at or f an rel ay and/or t he rel ay
ci rcui t boar d. i l
3. Test t he radi at or f an mot or (see page 10-4).
Is the motor OK ?
NO-Repl ac e t he radi at or f an mot or (see page 10-13).
4. Measur e t he vol t age bet ween under -hood f use/ rel ay
box connect or t er mi nal B1 and body gr ound.
CRN
1 2 3 4 5 6
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
NO-Repl ac e t he under -hood f use/r el ay box.
10-26
6. Measur e t he vol t age bet ween under -hood f use/ rel ay
box connect or t er mi nal B10 and body gr ound.
n
1
2 3
F= l
4 5
n
6
7
U
8 9 10 11 12 13 14
L
L T GRN
NO-Repai r open in t he wi r e bet ween dr i ver ' s
under -dash f use/r el ay box connect or t er mi nal F26
and under -hood f use/r el ay box connect or t er mi nal
B10.B
8. Check f or cont i nui t y bet ween radi at or f an mot or 2P
connect or t er mi nal No. 2 and under -hood f use/r el ay
box connect or t er mi nal C4.
UNDER HOOD FUS E / RE L A Y BOX CONNECTOR C (5P)
Wire side of
female terminals
n
1
n
2
3
u
4
l
5
Wire side of
female terminals
NO-Repai r open in t he wi r e bet ween radi at or f an
mot or 2P connect or t er mi nal No. 2 and under -hood
f use/r el ay box connect or t er mi nal No.4.H
9. Chec k f or cont i nui t y bet ween under -hood f use/ rel ay
box connect or t er mi nal C3 and radi at or f an mot or 2P
UNDER-HOOD FUS E / RE L A Y BOX CONNECTOR C (5P)
| " L _
Wire side of
female terminals
Wire side of
female terminals
NO-Repai r open i n t he wi r e bet ween t he under -hood
f use/r el ay box connect or t er mi nal C3 and radi at or f an
mot or 2Pconnect or t er mi nal No.2.11
10. Chec k f or cont i nui t y bet ween under -hood f use/ rel ay
box connect or t er mi nal C5 and body gr ound.
UNDER-HOOD FUS E / RE L A Y BOX CONNECTOR C (5P)
1 2
3 4 5
NO-Repai r open in t he wi r e bet ween under -hood
f use/r el ay box connect or t er mi nal C5 and body
gr ound. If t he wi r e i s OK, check f or a poor gr ound
G301.B
(cont' d)
10-27
Fan Cont rol s
Radi at or Fan High Speed Circuit Troubleshooting (cont'd)
11. Connec t t he Honda Di agnost i c Sy s t em (HDS) t o t he
dat a link c onnec t or (DLC) (see st ep 2 on page 11-3).
cont r ol modul e (PCM). If it does not c ommuni c at e,
14. J ump t he S CS l i ne wi t h t he HDS, t hen t urn t he i gni t i on
15. Di sc onnec t ECM/ PCM connect or A (49P).
16. Chec k f or cont i nui t y bet ween under -hood f use/r el ay
box connect or t er mi nal B8 and ECM/ PCM connect or
t er mi nal A5.
UNDER-HOOD FUSE/RELAY BOX CONNECTOR B (14P)
n
1
2 3
F=l
4 5
. _r
6
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
u u
GRN I ,
FANL (GRN)
. h i /
3 4 | 9 110
11
/ /
16 1 71 8 19 20 21
22 23 24 25
><
26 27 28
29 30
/
3 2 L / 34 35 36
M 4 1 4 2 | 4 3 | 4 4 L / | 4 6 | r /
/ v
ECM/PCM CONNECTOR A (49P)
connect or t er mi nal A5 and under -hood f use/r el ay box
connect or t er mi nal B8.B
box c onnec t or t er mi nal B11 and ECM/ PCM c onnec t or
t er mi nal A6.
UNDER-HOOD FUSE/RELAY BOX CONNECTOR B (14P)
1
1 2 3
F=l
4 5
n
6
7
u'
8 9 10 11 12 13 14
' L
p
11
\77\m
22
29
23
YEL
FANH (YEL)
1 | 4 I s l e
24
30M32lX
. 7pT9
16| 17[ 18 19 20121
2 5 L > <| 2 6 | 2 7| 2 8
34
4 2 l 4 3 | 4 4 L ^ J 4 6
known-good ECM/ PCM (see page 11-7), t hen r ec hec k.
If t he sympt om/i ndi cat i on goes away wi t h a known
good ECM/ PCM, r epl ace t he ori gi nal ECM/ PCM (see
page11-204).B
c onnec t or t er mi nal A6 and under -hood f use/r el ay box
c onnec t or t er mi nal B11.B
10-28
Fuel and Emissions
Fuel and Emissions Systems
S pec i al To o l s 11-2
Gener al Tr oubl es hoot i ng I nf or mat i on. 11-3
DTC Tr oubl es hoot i ng Index 11-9
S y s t em Desc r i pt i on 11-16
Ho w t o S et Read i nes s Co d es 11-65
PGM-FI S y s t em
DTC Tr oubl es hoot i ng 11-70
F- CAN Ci r c ui t Tr oubl es hoot i ng 11-172
MIL Ci r c ui t Tr oubl es hoot i ng 11-180
DL C Ci r c ui t Tr oubl es hoot i ng 11-181
Inj ec t or Repl ac ement . 11-195
A / F S ens o r Repl ac ement 11-197
S ec o nd ar y H0 2 S Repl ac ement 11-197
CMP S ens o r B Rep l ac emen t . . . . . . 11-198
CK P S ens o r Repl ac ement 11-198
MAP S ens o r Repl ac ement 11-199
MAF S ens o r / I AT S ens o r Repl ac ement . 11-199
E CT S ens o r 1 Rep l ac emen t . . . 11-200
E CT S ens o r 2 Repl ac ement 11-200
Out put Shaf t (Count er shaf t ) S peed
S ens o r Repl ac ement 11-201
K noc k S ens o r Repl ac ement 11-201
E L D Repl ac ement 11-202
E CM/ PCM Updat e 11-203
E CM/ PCM Repl ac ement . 11-204
El ec t r oni c Thr ot t l e Cont r ol S y s t em
DTC T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-208
A PP S ens o r S i gnal I n s p e c t i o n . . . . . . . . . 11-239
Ac c el er at or Pedal Modul e
Removal / I nst al l at i on 11-240
VTE C/ VTC
Co mpo nent L oc at i on I n d e x . . . . . . . . . . . 11-241
DTC Tr oubl es hoot i ng . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-242
VTC Oi l Cont r ol S o l eno i d Val v e
Remov al / Tes t / l ns t al l at i on 11-273
CMP S ens o r A Repl ac ement 11-274
Roc k er Ar m Oi l Cont r ol Val v e
Remov al / I ns t al l at i on. . . 11-274
Roc k er Ar m Oi l Pr es s ur e S wi t c h
Roc k er Ar m Oi l Pr es s ur e S wi t c h A
Roc k er Ar m Oi l Pr es s ur e S wi t c h B
Idle Cont r ol S y s t em
A / C S i gnal Ci r c ui t Tr o u b l es h o o t i n g . . . . 11-287
Al t er nat or FR S i gnal Ci r c ui t
PS P S wi t c h Si gnal Ci r c ui t
Br ake Pedal Posi t i on S wi t c h S i gnal
Ci r c ui t Tr o u b l e s h o o t i n g . . . . . . . . 11-290
Idl e S peed Inspec t i on 11-292
E CM/ PCM Idl e L ear n P r o c e d u r e . . . . . . . 11-293
Fuel Suppl y S y s t em
DTC Tr oubl es hoot i ng . 11-296
Fuel Pump Ci r c ui t Tr oubl es hoot i ng 11-301
Fuel Pr es s ur e Rel i evi ng . . . . . . . . . . . 11-306
Fuel Pr es s ur e Tes t 11-308
Fuel Tank Dr ai ni ng . . 11-309
Fuel L i ne Inspec t i on 11-310
Fuel L i ne/ Qui c k -Connec t Fi t t i ng
Pr ec aut i ons 11-313
Remo v al 11-314
Fuel Tank Uni t Remo v al and
Fuel Pul sat i on Damper Repl ac ement . . 11-323
Fuel Pr es s ur e Regul at or Repl ac ement . 11-323
Fuel Fi l t er Repl ac ement 11-324
Fuel Pump/ Fuel Gaug e S end i ng Uni t
Re p l ac e m e n t . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-324
Fuel Tank Repl ac ement 11-325
Fuel Fi l l Pi pe Removal / Inst al l at i on 11-327
r-uel Gaug e S end i ng Uni t Tes t 11-328
L o w Fuel Indi c at or T e s t . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-329
Int ake Ai r S y s t em
Thr ot t l e Body Tes t 11-331
Thr ot t l e Body Cl eani ng 11-332
Ai r Cl eaner Removal / Inst al l at i on 11-332
Ai r Cl eaner El ement
I n s p e c t i o n / Re p l ac e m e n t . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-333
Int ake Ai r Res onat or
Re m o v al / I n s t al l at i o n . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-333
Thr ot t l e Body Removal / Inst al l at i on 11-335
Thr ot t l e Body
Di s as s emb l y / Reas s emb l y 11-336
Cat al yt i c Conver t er S y s t em
Co mpo nent L oc at i on Index . 11-337
DTC Tr oubl es hoot i ng . . 11-338
War m Up TWC Removal / Inst al l at i on . . .11-339
Und er - f l o o r TWC Removal / I nst al l at i on .11-340
PCV S y s t em
Co mpo nent L oc at i on I n d e x . . . . . . . . . . . 11-341
PCV Val v e Inspec t i on 11-342
PCV Val v e Repl ac ement 11-342
EVAP Sf stem
DTC Tr oubl es hoot i ng * . . 11-344
Fuel Cap War ni ng Mes s ag e S y s t em
E VA P Cani s t er Repl ac ement 11-369
FTP S ens o r Rep l ac emen t . . . 11-370
E VA P Cani s t er Vent S h ut Val v e
Repl ac ement 11-371
E VA P Cani s t er Pur ge Val v e
Fuel and Emi ssi ons Syst ems
Speci al Tool s

07406-004000B Fuel Pr essur e Gauge 1
07406-0070301 A/ T L ow Pr essur e Gauge W/Panel 1
07AAA-S0XA100 Fuel Sender Wr enc h 1
0
07AAJ-PY4A100 A T Pr essur e Test Hose 1

07AAJ-S6MA150 Fuel Pr essur e Gauge At t achment Set 1
07JAZ-001000B Vac uum/ Pr essur e Gauge, 04 In.Hg, 1
07MAJ-PY40120 A/ T Pr essur e Adapt er 1

07NAJ-P07010A Pr essur e Gauge Adapt er 1

07ZAJ-S5AA200 Oi l Pr essur e Hose 1
.
11-2
General Troubleshooting Information
Int ermi t t ent Fai l ur es
The t er m Intermi ttent f ai l ure means a syst em may have
had a f ai l ur e, but it c hec ks OK now. If t he mal f unct i on
i ndi cat or l amp (MIL) on t he dash does not c ome on,
check f or poor c onnec t i ons or l oose t er mi nal s at all
connect or s rel at ed t o t he ci rcui t t hat you ar e
t r oubl eshoot i ng. If t he MIL was on but t hen went out , t he
ori gi nal pr obl em may have been i nt ermi t t ent .
Ser vi c e Inf ormat i on
Per i odi cal l y, new ECM/ PCM sof t war e or new ser vi c e
pr ocedur es may bec ome avai l abl e. Al way s c hec k onl i ne
f or t he l at est sof t war e or ser vi c e i nf ormat i on rel at ed to
t he DTCs or sympt oms you ar e t r oubl eshoot i ng.
Opens and Shor t s
Open and shor t ar e c ommon el ect ri cal t er ms. An open i s
a break i n a wi r e or at a connect i on. A shor t i s an
acci dent al connect i on of a wi r e to gr ound or t o anot her
wi r e. In si mpl e el ect r oni cs, t hi s usual l y means
somet hi ng won' t wor k at al l . Wi t h c ompl ex el ect r oni cs
(such as ECMs or PCMs) t hi s can somet i mes mean
somet hi ng wor ks, but not t he way i t ' s supposed t o.
How t o Use t he HDS (Honda Di agnost i c
Syst em)
i t he MIL (mal f unct i on i ndi cat or l amp) has c ome on
1. St ar t t he engi ne, and check t he MIL (A).
NOTE: If t he i gni t i on swi t ch i s t ur ned to ON (II), and
t he engi ne i s not st ar t ed, t he MIL st ays on f or 1520
sec onds (see page 11-65).
2. If t he MIL st ays on, c onnec t t he HDS to t he dat a li nk
c onnec t or (DLC) (A) l ocat ed under t he dr i ver ' s si de of
t he dashboar d.
A
4. Make sur e t he HDS c ommuni c at es wi t h t he ECM/ PCM
and ot her vehi c l e s y s t ems . If it doesn' t , go to t he DL C
ci rcui t t r oubl eshoot i ng (see page 11-181).
5. Chec k t he di agnost i c t roubl e c ode (DTC) and not e it.
Al so check t he f r eeze dat a and/or on-boar d snapshot
dat a, and downl oad any dat a f ound. Then ref er t o t he
i ndi cat ed DTCs t r oubl eshoot i ng, and begi n t he
appropri at e t r oubl eshoot i ng pr ocedur e.
NOTE:
Fr eeze dat a i ndi cat es t he engi ne condi t i ons when
t he f i rst syst em mal f unct i on, mi sf i r e, or f uel t ri m
mal f unct i on t hat act i vat ed t he MIL was det ect ed.
The HDS c an r ead t he DTC, t he f reeze dat a, t he
on-boar d snapshot , t he cur r ent dat a, and ot her
engi ne cont rol modul e (ECM) or powert rai n cont rol
modul e (PCM) dat a.
For speci f i c oper at i ons, refer to t he user ' s manual
t hat c ame wi t h t he HDS.
6. If no DTCs ar e f ound, go to t he MIL ci rcui t
(cont ' d)
11-3
General Troubleshooting Informati on (cont'd)
If t he MIL di d not st ay on
If t he MIL di d not st ay on but t here i s a dri veabi l i t y
pr obl em, do t he sympt om t r oubl eshoot i ng.
If you c an' t dupl i cat e t he DTC
S ome of t he t r oubl eshoot i ng r equi r es you to r eset t he
ECM/ PCM and try to dupl i cat e t he DTC. If t he pr obl em i s
i nt ermi t t ent and you can' t dupl i cat e t he c ode, do not
cont i nue t hr ough t he pr ocedur e. To do so wi l l onl y resul t
in c onf usi on and possi bl y, a needl essl y r epl aced
ECM/ PCM.
HDS Cl ear Command
The ECM/ PCM st or es var i ous speci f i c dat a to cor r ect t he
syst em even if t her e i s no el ect ri cal power suc h as when
t he battery negat i ve t er mi nal or No. 17 Fl MAIN (15 A)
f use ar e di sc onnec t ed. St or ed dat a based on f ai l ed part s
shoul d be cl ear ed by usi ng t he CL EAR COMMAND of t he
HDS, if par t s are r epl aced.
The HDS has t hr ee ki nds of cl ear c ommands to meet t hi s
pur pose. They ar e DTC cl ear , ECM/ PCM r eset , and CK P
pattern cl ear . The DTC cl ear c ommand er ases all st or ed
DTC c odes , f reeze dat a, on-boar d snapshot , and
r eadi ness c ddes. Thi s must be done wi t h t he HDS after
r epr oduci ng t he DTC duri ng t r oubl eshoot i ng.
The ECM/ PCM r eset c ommand er ases all st or ed DTC
c odes, f r eeze dat a, on-boar d snapshot , r eadi ness c odes,
and all speci f i c dat a to cor r ect t he syst em except CK P
pat t ern. If t he CK P pattern dat a in the ECM/ PCM was
c l ear ed, you must do t he CK P pattern l earn pr ocedur e.
The CK P pat t ern cl ear c ommand er ases onl y CK P pattern
dat a. Thi s c ommand i s f or repai r of a mi sf i r e or t he CK P
sensor .
Sc an Tool Cl ear Command
If you ar e usi ng a gener i c sc an tool to cl ear c ommands ,
be awar e t hat t here i s onl y one set t i ng f or cl ear i ng t he
ECM/ PCM, and it cl ear s all c ommands at t he s ame t i me
(CKP pat t ern l ear n, i dle l ear n, r eadi ness c odes, f reeze
dat a, on-boar d snapshot , and DTCs). After you cl ear all
c ommands , you t hen need to do t hese pr oc edur es, in
t hi s order: ECM/ PCM i dle l earn pr ocedur e; (see page
11-293) CK P pattern l earn pr ocedur e; t est -dr i ve to set
r eadi ness c odes to compl et e (see page 11-65).
DTC Cl ear
1. Cl ear t he DTC wi t h t he HDS whi l e t he engi ne i s
st opped.
3. Tur n t he i gni ti on swi t ch to ON (II), and wai t
30 sec onds.
4. Tur n t he i gni ti on swi t ch to LOCK (0), and di sc onnec t
t he HDS f r om t he DL C.
E CM/ PCH Reset
1. Reset t he ECM/ PCM wi t h t he HDS whi l e t he engi ne i s
st opped.
3. Tur n t he i gni ti on swi t ch to ON (II), and wai t
30 sec onds.
4. Tur n t he i gni ti on swi t ch to L OCK (0), and di sc onnec t
11-293).
11 ~4
CKP Pat t ern Cl ear / CK P Pat t ern Lear n
Cl ear /Lear n Pr ocedur e (wi t h t he HDS)
1. Connect t he HDS to t he dat a link connect or (DLC) (A)
l ocat ed under t he dr i ver ' s si de of t he dashboar d.
and ot her vehi c l e syst ems. If it doesn' t , go t o t he DL C
ci rcui t t r oubl eshoot i ng (see page 11-181).
4. Sel ec t CRANK PATTERN in t he ADJ US TMENT MENU
wi t h t he HDS.
5. Sel ec t CRANK PATTERN LEARNING wi t h t he HDS,
and f ol l ow t he sc r een pr ompt s.
Lear n Pr ocedur e (wi t hout t he HDS)
1. St ar t t he engi ne. Hold t he engi ne speed at 3,000 rpm
wi t hout l oad (A/T i n P or N, M/T i n neut ral ) unti l t he
radi at or f an c omes on.
2. Test -dr i ve t he vehi c l e on a l evel r oad: Decel er at e (wi th
t he throttle f ul l y cl osed) f r om an engi ne speed of
2,500 r pm down to 1,000 rpm wi t h t he A/ T i n 2, or t he
M/T in 2nd.
3. Repeat st ep 2 sever al t i mes.
4. Tur n t he i gni t i on swi t ch t o L OCK (0).
5. Tur n t he i gni t i on swi t ch to ON (II), and wai t
30 sec onds.
How t o End a Tr oubl eshoot i ng Sessi on
(requi red after any t r oubl eshoot i ng)
1. Reset t he ECM/ PCM wi t h t he HDS.
2. Do t he ECM/ PCM i dl e l earn pr ocedur e (see page
11-293).
4. Di sconnect t he HDS f r om t he DL C.
NOTE: The ECM/ PCM i s part of t he i mmobi l i zer
syst em. If you r epl ace t he ECM/ PCM, f or t he engi ne to
st art , you must use t he HDS t o i nst r uct t he new
ECM/ PCM and t he i mmobi l i zer -keyl wss cont rol uni t to
recogni ze eac h ot her ' s uni que ser i al c ode.
(cont' d)
11-5
General Troubleshooting Information (cont'd)
How t o Tr oubl eshoot Ci r cui t s at t he
ECM/ PCM Connec t or s
NOTE: The ECM/ PCM over wr i t es dat a and moni t or s t he
EVAP syst em f or about 40 mi nut es after t he i gni ti on
swi t ch i s t ur ned to L OCK (0). J umpi ng t he S CS li ne after
t urni ng t he i gni t i on swi t c h to L OCK (0) c anc el s t hi s
f unct i on. Di sconnect i ng t he ECM/ PCM dur i ng t hi s
f unct i on, wi t hout j umpi ng t he S CS li ne f i r st , c an damage
t he ECM/ PCM.
2. Remove t he bol t s (D).
D
9.8 N-m
(1.0 kgf m, 7.2 l bfft)
5. Connec t one si de of t he pat ch c or d' s t er mi nal s (A) to a
c ommer c i al l y avai l abl e di gi tal mul t i met er (B), and
c onnec t t he ot her si de of t he t er mi nal s (C) to a
c ommer c i al l y avai l abl e banana j ack (Pomona
El ec t r oni c s Tool No. 3563 or equi val ent ) (D).
6. Gent l y cont act t he pi n probe (mal e) at t he t er mi nal
t est port f r om t he t er mi nal si de. Do not f or ce t he t i ps
into t he t er mi nal s.
INOTICEI
For accur at e r esul t s, al ways use t he pi n probe
(mal e).
To pr event damage to t he connect or t er mi nal s, do
not i nser t t est equi pment pr obes, paper c l i ps, or
ot her subst i t ut es as t hey c an damage t he t er mi nal s.
Damaged t er mi nal s c ause a poor connect i on and
an i ncor r ect measur ement .
Do not punct ur e t he i nsul at i on on a wi r e. Punct ur es
c an c ause poor or i ntermi ttent el ect ri cal
c onnec t i ons.
3. Di sconnect ECM/ PCM c onnec t or s A, B, and C.
4. When di agnosi s/t r oubl eshoot i ng i s done at t he
ECM/ PCM connect or , use t he t er mi nal t est port (A)
above t he t er mi nal you need t o check.
11-6
Subst i t ut i ng t he ECM/ PCM
Honda di agnost i c syst em (HDS) t abl et t est er
Honda Interface Modul e (HIM) and an i N wor kst at i on
wi t h t he latest HDS sof t war e ver si on
HDS pocket t est er
GNA600 and an iN wor kst at i on wi t h t he latest HDS
sof t war e ver si on
Any one of t he above updat i ng t ool s c an be used.
NOTE: Us e t hi s pr ocedur e when you have to subst i t ut e a
known-good ECM/ PCM dur i ng t r oubl eshoot i ng
pr ocedur e.
1. Connec t t he HDS to t he dat a link connect or (DLC) (A)
and ot her vehi cl e s y s t ems . If it doesn' t , go to t he DL C
ci rcui t t r oubl eshoot i ng (see page 11-181). If you ar e
ret urni ng f rom DL C ci rcui t t r oubl eshoot i ng, ski p st eps
4 and 5, and t he c l ean t he throttle body after
subst i t ut i ng t he ECM/ PCM (see page 11-332).
4. Sel ec t t he INSPECTION MENU wi t h t he HDS.
5. Sel ec t t he ETCS TE S T, t hen sel ect t he TP POSITION
, CHECK , and f ol l ow t he sc r een pr ompt s.
NOTE: If t he TP POSITION CHECK i ndi cat es FAIL ED,
cont i nue t hi s pr ocedur e.
7. J ump t he S CS li ne wi t h t he HDS.
10. Di sc onnec t ECM/ PCM connect or s A, B, and C, t hen
r emove t he ECM/ PCM assembl y (E).
NOTE: ECM/ PCM c onnec t or s A, B, and C have
symbol s (A= D, B= A, C= 0) embossed on t hem for
i dent i f i cat i on.
11_ Remove t he c over (A) and t he bracket (B) f r om t he
ECM/ PCM (C).
(cont' d)
11-7
General Troubleshooting Information (cont' d)
12. Inst al l a known-good ECM/ PCM i n t he r ever se or der of
r emoval .
NOTE: DTC P0630 (VIN Not Pr ogr ammed or
Mi smat ch) may be st or ed bec ause t he VIN has not
been pr ogr ammed i nto t he ECM/ PCM; i gnore it, and
15. Manual l y i nput t he VIN to t he ECM/ PCM wi t h t he HDS.
16. Sel ec t t he IMMOBI S YS TE M wi t h t he HDS.
17. Ent er t he i mmobi l i zer ECM/ PCM c ode that you got
f r om i N, and use t he ECM/ PCM r epl acement
pr ocedur e in t he IMMOBI MENU of t he HDS; it al l ows
you to st art t he engi ne,
18. If t he TP POSITION CHECK f ai l ed in st ep 5, c l ean t he
throttle body (see page 11-332).
20. Updat e t he ECM/ PCM if it does not have t he l at est
sof t war e (see page 11-203).
11-293).
22. Do t he CK P pattern c l ear /CKP pattern l earn pr ocedur e.
OBD St at us
The OBD st at us s hows t he cur r ent syst em st at us of each
DTC and all of t he par amet er s. Thi s f unct i on i s used t o
see if t he repai r was suc c essf ul l y c ompl et ed. The r esul t s
of di agnost i c t est s f or t he DTC ar e di spl ayed as :
PAS S ED: The on boar d di agnosi s i s suc c essf ul l y
f i ni shed.
FAILED: The on boar d di agnosi s has f i ni shed but
f ai l ed.
EXECUTI NG: The vehi c l e i s in enabl e cri t eri a
condi t i ons of t he DTC and t he on boar d di agnosi s i s
r unni ng.
NOT COMPL ETED: The on boar d di agnosi s was
r unni ng but i s out of t he enabl e condi t i ons of t he DTC.
OUT OF CONDITION: The vehi cl e has st ayed out of t he
zr.zblz c c r .di t br .c c f t he DTC.
11-8
DTC Troubl eshoot i ng Index
D T C ;
f MIL indication*!
Two Drive Cycle
Detection
Detection Item MIL : Note
P0010(56) Variable Valve Timing Control (VTC) Oil Control Solenoid Valve
Malfunction
ON DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-242)
POOH (56) O Variable Valve Timing Control (VTC) System Malfunction ON DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-244)
P0101 (50) o .
Mass Air F low (MAF) Sensor Circuit Range/Performance Problem ON DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-70)
P0102 (50) Mass Air F low (MAF) Sensor Circuit Low Voltage ON DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-71)
P0103 (50) Mass Air F low (MAF) Sensor Circuit High Voltage ON DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-73)
P0107 (3) Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor Circuit Low Voltage ON DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11 -75)
P0108 (3) Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor Circuit High Voltage ON DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-77)
P0111 (10) o
Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor Circuit Range/Performance
Problem
(see page 11-79)
P0112(10) o
Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor Circuit Low Voltage ON DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-80)
P dri 3(i o) o
Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor Circuit High Voltage ON DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-82)
P0116(86) o
Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor 1 Range/Performance
Problem
(see page 11-84)
P01-17'(6) Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor 1 Circuit Low Voltage ON DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-85)
P0118(6) Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor 1 Circuit High Voltage ON DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-87)
P0122 (7) Throttle Position (TP) Sensor A Circuit Low Voltage ON DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-208)
P0123 (7) Throttle Position (TP) Sensor A Circuit High Voltage ON DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-210)
P0125 (86) o
Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor 1 Malfunction/Slow
Response
(see page 11-89)
P0128 (87) o
Cooling System Malfunction ON DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-89)
P0133(61) o
Air Fuel Ratio (A/F) Sensor (Sensor 1) Malfunction/Slow Response ON DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-91)
P0134(41) o
Air Fuel Ratio (A/F) Sensor (Sensor 1) Heater System Malfunction ON DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-92)
P0135-(41) o
Air Fuel Ratio (A/F) Sensor (Sensor 1) Heater Circuit Malfunction ON DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-93)
P0137 (63) o
Secondary Heated Oxygen Sensor (Secondary H02S (Sensor 2))
Circuit Low Voltage
(see page 11-96)
P0138 (63) D Secondar/ Heated Oxygen Sensor (Secondary H02S (Sensor 2))
Circuit High Voltage
(see page 11-98)
P0139(63) o
Slow Response
(see page 11-101)
P0141 (65) o
Heater Circuit Malfunction
(see page 11-102)
P0171 (45) o Fuel System Too Lean ON DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-105)
P0172 (45) o Fuel System Too Rich ON DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-105)
P0222 (7) Throttle Position (TP) Sensor B Circuit Low Voltage ON DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-212)
NOTE: The above DTCs are indicated when the PGM-FI system is selected with the HDS. Some automatic transmission DTCs cause the MIL to
come on. If the MIL is on and no DTCs are indicated in the PGM-FI system, select the A/T system, and check for automatic transmission DTCs.
*: These DTCs are indicated by a blinking MIL when the SCS line is jumped with the HDS. Some DTCs do not cause the MILto blink when the
SCS line is jumped. The last four characters of these DTCs are shown in the gauge display.
* 1: A/T
*2: M/T
*3: '08-09 models
*4:'10 model
*5: All models except PZEV
*6: PZEV model
(cont' d)
11-9
DTC Troubl eshoot i ng Index (cont' d)
DTC
(MIL indication*)
Two Drive Cycle
Detection
Det ect i on It em MIL Note
P0223 (7) Throttle Posi ti on (TP) Sensor B Circuit High Voltage ON DTC Troubleshooti ng
(see page 11-214)
P0300
( 7 5 H 2 1 1 P
and any
combination of
the following:
P0301 (71)
P0302 (72)
P0303 (73)
P0304 (74)
O Random Mi sfi re Detected ON DTC Troubleshooti ng
(see page 11-106)
P0301 (71) o No. 1 Cyl i nder Mi sfi re Detected ON DTC Troubleshooti ng
(see page 11-109)
(see page 11-109)
(see page 11-109)
P0304(74) o No. 4 Cyl i nder Mi sfi re Detected ON DTC Troubleshooti ng
(see page 11-109)
P0325 (23) o Knock Sensor Ci rcui t Malfuncti on ON DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-115)
P0335(4) Crankshaft Posi ti on (CKP) Sensor No Si gnal ON DTC Troubleshooti ng
(see page 11-117)
P0339 (4) Crankshaft Posi ti on (CKP) Sensor Ci rcui t Intermittent Interruption ON DTC Troubleshooti ng
(see page 11-119)
P0340 (57)
o
Camshaf t Posi ti on (CMP) Sensor A No Si gnal ON DTC Troubleshoot i ng
(see page 11-245)
P0341 (57) o Camshaf t Posi ti on (CMP) Sensor A and Crankshaft Posi ti on (CKP)
Sensor Incorrect Phase Detected
ON DTC Troubleshooti ng
(see page 11-247)
P0344 (57) o Camshaf t Posi ti on (CMP) Sensor A Ci rcui t Intermittent
Interruption
' (see page 11-249)
P0351 (71) No. 1 Cyl i nder Ignition Coi l Ci rcui t Malfuncti on ON DTC Troubleshoot i ng
(see page 11-120)
P0352 (72) No. 2 Cyli nder Ignition Coi l Ci rcui t Malfuncti on ON DTC Troubleshooti ng
(see page 11-120)
P0353 (73) No. 3 Cyl i nder Ignition Coi l Ci rcui t Malfuncti on ON DTC Troubleshooti ng
(see page 11-120)
P0354 (74) No. 4 Cyl i nder Ignition Coi l Ci rcui t Malfuncti on ON DTC Troubleshooti ng
(see page 11-120)
P0365 (8) Camshaf t Posi ti on (CMP) Sensor B Ci rcui t No Si gnal ON DTC Troubleshooti ng
(see page 11-124)
P0369 (8) Camshaf t Posi ti on (CMP) Sensor B Ci rcui t Intermittent
Interruption
(see page 11-126)
P0420(67) o Cat al yst Syst em Effi ci ency Bel ow Thr eshol d ON DTC Troubleshooti ng
(see page 11-338)
P0443 (92) o Evaporat i ve Emi ssi on (EVAP) Cani st er Purge Val ve Ci rcui t
Malfunction
(see page 11 -344)
P0451 (91) o Fuel Tank Pr essur e (FTP) Sensor Ci rcui t Range/Perf ormance
Problem
(see page 11-347)
P0452 (91) o Fuel Tank Pr essur e (FTP) Sensor Ci rcui t Low Voltage ON DTC Troubleshooti ng
(see page 11-348)
P0453 (91) o F uel Tank Pr essur e (FTP) Sensor Ci rcui t High Voltage ON DTC Troubleshoot i ng
(see page 11 -350)
P0455(90) o Evaporat i ve Emi ssi on (EVAP) Syst em Large Leak Detected ON DTC Troubleshooti ng
(see page 11 -353)
NOTE: The above DTCs are i ndi cated when the PGM-FI syst em i s sel ect ed wi th the HDS. Some automati c t r ansmi ssi on DTCs cause the MIL to
come on. If the MIL i s on and no DTCs are i ndi cated in the PGM-FI syst em, sel ect t he A/T syst em, and check for automati c t r ansmi ssi on DTCs.
*: These DTCs are i ndi cated by a blinking MIL when the S CS line i s j umped wi th t he HDS. Some DTCs do not cause the MIL to blink when the
S CS li ne is j umped. The last four charact ers of t hese DTCs are shown in the gauge di spl ay.
*1: A/T
*2: M/T
*3: '08-09 model s
*4: '10 model
*5: All model s except PZEV
*6: PZEV model
11-10
DTC
(MIL indication*)
Two Drive Cycle
Detection
Detection Item MIL Note
P0456(90) O Evaporative Emission (EVAP) System Very Small Leak Detected ON DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-353)
P0457 Evaporative Emission (EVAP) System Leak Detected/F uel Fill Cap
Loose or Missing
OFF DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-357)
P0461 Fuel Level Sensor (Fuel Gauge Sending Unit) Circuit
Range/Performance Problem
(see page 11-296)
P0462 O Fuel Level Sensor (Fuel Gauge Sending Unit) Circuit Low Voltage OFF DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-296)
P0463 o Fuel Level Sensor (Fuel Gauge Sending Unit) Circuit High Voltage OFF DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-298)
P0496(92) o Evaporative Emission (EVAP) System High Purge F low Detected ON DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-358)
P0497(90) o Evaporative Emission (EVAP) System Low Purge F low Detected ON DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-359)
P0498 017) o Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Canister Vent Shut Valve Circuit
Low Voltage
(see page 11-362)
P0499(117) o Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Canister Vent Shut Valve Circuit
High Voltage
(see page 11 -364)
P0506(14) o Idle Control System RPM Lower Than Expected ON DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-279)
P0507 (14) o Idle Control System RPM Higher Than Expected ON DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-281)
P050A(167) o Cold Start Idle Air Control System Performance Problem ON DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-127)
P050B (167) o Cold Start Ignition Timing Control System Performance Problem ON DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-129)
P0532*
4
o A/C Pressure Sensor Circuit Low Voltage OFF DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-282)
P0533
M
o
A/C Pressure Sensor Circuit High Voltage OFF DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11 -284)
P0562 Charging System Low Voltage OFF DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-131)
P0563 - o Engine Control Module (ECM)/Powertrain Control Module (PCM)
Power Source Circuit Unexpected Voltage
(see page 11-132)
P0602(196) Engine Control Module (ECM)/Powertrain Control Module (PCM)
Programming Error
(see page 11-134)
P0606 (--) Engine Control Module (ECM)/Powertrain Control Module (PCM)
Processor Malfunction
(see page 11-135)
P 060A031P Powertrain Control Module (PCM) (A/T System) Internal Control
Module Malfunction
(see page 11-135)
P062F (131) Engine Control Module (ECM)/Powertrain Control Module (PCM)
Internal Control Module Keep Alive Memory (KAM) Error
(see page 11-136)
P0630(139) VIN Not Programmed or Mismatch ON DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-136)
P0685(135)
o Engine Control Module (ECM)/Powertrain Control Module (PCM)
Power Control Circuit/Internal Circuit Malfunction
(see page 11-137)
P0720(122P o Output Shaft (Countershaft) Speed Sensor Circuit Malfunction ON DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-138)
P1009(56) Variable Valve Timing Control (VTC) Advance Malfunction ON DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-250)
P1109(13) o Barometric Pressure (BARO) Sensor Circuit Out of Range High ON DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-140)
P1116(86) o Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor 1 Circuit
(see page 11-141)
come on. if the MIL is on and no DTCs are indicated in the PGM-FI system, select the A/T system, and check for automatic transmission DTCs.
*: These DTCs are indicated by a blinking MIL when the SCS line is jumped with the HDS. Some DTCs do not cause the MIL to blink when the
*1:A/T
*2: M/T
*3: '08-09 models
*4:'10 model
*6: PZEV model
(cont' d)
11-11
DTC
(MIL indication*)
Two Drive Cycle
Detection
Det ect i on Item MIL Note
P1128 (5)
O
Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor Signal Lower Than
Expected
(see page 11-142)
P1129 (5)
o
Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor Signal Higher Than
Expected
(see page 11-143)
P1157 (48)
o
Air F uel Ratio (A/F) Sensor (Sensor 1) AF S Circuit High Voltage ON DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-145)
P1172 (61)
o
Air F uel Ratio (A/F) Sensor (Sensor 1) Circuit Out of Range High ON DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-146)
P1297 o Electrical Load Detector (ELD) Circuit Low Voltage OFF DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-147)
P1298
o
Electrical Load Detector (ELD) Circuit High Voltage OFF DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-148)
P1454 (91)
o
Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) Sensor Circuit Range/Performance
Problem
(see page 11-365)
P145C (90)
o
Evaporative Emission (EVAP) System Purge F low Malfunction ON DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-367)
P1549 Charging System High Voltage OFF DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-150)
P1658 (40) Electronic Throttle Control System (ETCS) Control Relay ON
Malfunction
o m
DTC Trcublcchccting
(see page 11-216)
P1659 (40) Electronic Throttle Control System (ETCS) Control Relay OFF
Malfunction *
(see page 11-217)
P1683 (40) Throttle Valve Default Position Spring Performance Problem ON DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-220)
P1684 (40) Throttle Valve Return Spring Performance Problem ON DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-221)
P16BB Alternator B Terminal Circuit Low Voltage OFF DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-150)
P16BC Alternator FR Terminal Circuit/IGP Circuit Low Voltage OFF DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-151)
P2101 (40) Electronic Throttle Control System (ETCS) Malfunction ON DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-222)
P2118(40) Throttle Actuator Current Range/Performance Problem ON DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-224)
P2122 (37) Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor A (Throttle Position (TP)
Sensor D) Circuit Low Voltage
(see page 11-226)
P2123 (37) Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor A (Throttle Position (TP)
Sensor D) Circuit High Voltage
(see page 11-229)
P2127 (37) Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor B (Throttle Position (TP)
Sensor E) Circuit Low Voltage
(see page 11-230)
P2128 (37) Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor B (Throttle Position (TP)
Sensor E) Circuit High Voltage
(see page 11-233)
P2135 (7) Throttle Position (TP) Sensor A/B Incorrect Voltage Correlation ON DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-234)
P2138 (37) Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor A/B (Throttle Position
(TP) Sensor D/E) Incorrect Voltage Correlation
(see page 11-236)
P2176 (40) Throttle Actuator Control System Idle Position Not Learned ON DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-237)
P2183 092)
o
Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor 2 Circuit
(see page 11-154)
P2184 092)
o
Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor 2 Circuit Low Voltage ON DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-155)
P2185(192)
o
Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor 2 Circuit High Voltage ON DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-157)
*: These DTCs are indicated by a blinking MIL when the SCS line is jumped with the HDS. Some DTCs do not cause the MIL to blink when the
* 1 : A/T
*2: M/T
*3: '08-09 models
*4: '10 model
*6: PZEV model
11-12
DTC
(MIL indication*)
Two Drive Cycle
Detection
Detecti on Item MIL Note
P2195 (48)
O
Air Fuel Ratio (A/F) Sensor (Sensor 1) Signal Stuck Lean ON DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-159)
P2227 03)
o
Barometric Pressure (BARO) Sensor Circuit Range/Performance
Problem
(see page 11-160)
P2228(13)
o
Barometric Pressure (BARO) Sensor Circuit Low Voltage ON DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-162)
P2229(13)
o
Barometric Pressure (BARO) Sensor Circuit High Voltage ON DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-162)
P2238 (48)
o
Air Fuel Ratio (A/F) Sensor (Sensor 1) AF S+ Circuit Low Voltage ON DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-163)
P2252 (48)
o
Air Fuel Ratio (A/F) Sensor (Sensor 1) AFS Circuit Low Voltage ON DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-164)
P2422(117)
o
Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Canister Vent Shut Valve Stuck
Closed Malfunction
(see page 11-365)
P2610(132) Engine Control Module (ECM)/Powertrain Control Module (PCM)
Ignition Off Internal Timer Malfunction
(see page 11-166)
P2646 (22P Rocker Arm Oil Pressure Switch Circuit Low Voltage ON DTC Troubleshooting
. (see page 11-251)
P2646 (22P Rocker Arm Oil Pressure Switch A Circuit Low Voltage ON DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-253)
P2647 (22p Rocker Arm Oil Pressure Switch Circuit High Voltage ON DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-256)
P2647 (22P Rocker Arm Oil Pressure Switch A Circuit High Voltage ON DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-253)
P2648 (21P Rocker Arm Oil Control Solenoid Circuit Low Voltage ON DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-258)
P2648 (21P Rocker Arm Oil Control Solenoid A (Intake Valve Side) Circuit Low
Voltage
(see page 11-259)
P2649 (21P Rocker Arm Oil Control Solenoid Circuit High Voltage ON DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-261)
P2649 (21P
Rocker Arm Oil Control Solenoid A (Intake Valve Side) Circuit High
Voltage
(see page 11-263)
P2651 (52P
o Rocker Arm Oil Pressure Switch B Circuit Low Voltage ON DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-265)
P2652 (52p
o Rocker Arm Oil Pressure Switch B Circuit High Voltage ON DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-265)
P2653 (51P o
Rocker Arm Oil Control Solenoid B (Exhaust Valve Side) Circuit
Low Voltage
(see page 11-269)
P2654 (51P
o
Rocker Arm Oil Control Solenoid B (Exhaust Valve Side) Circuit
High Voltage
(see page 11-270)
P2A00 (61)
o Air Fuel Ratio (A/F) Sensor (Sensor 1) Circuit Range/Performance
Problem
(see page 11-166)
U0029(126) F-CAN Malfunction (BUS-OFF (Engine Control Module
(ECM)/Powertrain Control Module (PCM)))
(see page 11-167)
U0122 F-CAN Malfunction (Engine Control Module (ECM)/Powertrain
Control Module (PCM)-VSA Modulator-Control Unit)
(see page 11-168)
U0155(126) F-CAN Malfunction (Engine Control Module (ECM)/Powertrain
Control Module (PCM)-Gauge Control Module)
(see page 11-169)
U0300(131P PGM-FI System and A/T System Program Version Mismatch ON DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-171)
*: These DTCs are indicated by a blinking MIL when the SCS line is jumped with the HDS. Some DTCs do not cause the MILto blink when the
* 1 : A/T
#
2:M/T
*3: '08-09 models
*4:'10 model
*6: PZEV model
11-13
When t he vehi c l e has one of t hese sympt oms, check f or a di agnost i c t roubl e c ode (DTC) wi t h t he HDS. If t here i s no DTC,
do t he di agnost i c pr ocedur e f or t he sympt om, i n t he sequenc e l i st ed, unti l you f i nd t he c ause.
Engi ne wi l l not st art
(MIL wor ks OK , no DTCs set )
1. Test t he bat t ery (see page 22-90).
2. Test t he st art er (see page 4-10).
4. Tr oubl eshoot t he f uel pump ci r cui t (see page
11-301).
Low c ompr essi on
No i gni ti on spar k
Intake ai r l eaks
Locked up engi ne
Br oken c am c hai n
Fuel cont ami nat i on
(MIL c omes on and st ays on, no
DTCs set )
Tr oubl eshoot t he DL C ci rcui t (see page 11-181). No power to ECM/ PCM
No gr ound to ECM/ PCM
Shor t ed r ef er ence
vol t age
MIL c omes on and st ays on, or
never c omes on at al l , no DTCs
set
Tr oubl eshoot t he MIL ci rcui t (see page 11-180).
(mIL wor ks OK, no DTCs set ,
i mmobi l i zer i ndi cat or st ays on
or f l ashes)
Chec k t he i mmnh i l i w eye*? (c c c pc ^ c 22-423).
Engi ne st art s but st al l s
i mmedi at el y
(MIL wor ks OK, no DTCs set ,
i mmobi l i zer i ndi cat or st ays on
or f l ashes)
Chec k t he i mmobi l i zer syst em (see page 22-429).
Engi ne i s hard to st art
(MIL wor ks OK, no DTCs set )
3. Cl ean t he throttle body (see page 11-332).
L ow c ompr essi on
Intake ai r l eaks
Weak spar k
Col d f ast i dle t oo l ow
1. Do t he ECM/ PCM i dle l ear n pr ocedur e (see page
11-293).
3. Cl ean t he throttle body (see page 11-332).
Col d f ast i dle t oo hi gh
11-293).
3. Do t he throttle posi t i on l ear ni ng c hec k (see page
11-331).
Intake ai r l eaks
Idle speed f l uct uat es
11-293).
3. Do t he c ar bon accumul at i on c hec k (see page
11-331).
4. Tr oubl eshoot t he A/ C si gnal ci r cui t (see page
11-287).
Incorrect val ve t i mi ng or
c l ear anc e adj ust ment
Intake ai r l eaks
Af t er war mi ng up, i dl e speed i s
bel ow speci f i cat i on wi t hout
l oad
1. Tr oubl eshoot t he al t ernat or FR si gnal ci rcui t (see
page 11-288).
2. Do t he c ar bon accumul at i on c hec k (see page
11-331).
Incorrect val ve adj ust ment
After war mi ng up, i dl e speed i s
above speci f i cat i on wi t hout
l oad
1. Tr oubl eshoot t he al t ernat or FR si gnal ci rcui t (see
page 11-288).
2. Inspect t he APP sensor (see page 11-239).
Intake ai r l eaks
11-14
S y mpt om Di agnost i c pr oc edur e Al s o c hec k f or
Af t er war mi ng up, i dle speed
dr ops when st eer i ng wheel i s
t ur ned
1. Do t he ECM/ PCM i dl e l ear n pr ocedur e (see page
11-293).
2. Tr oubl eshoot t he PSP swi t c h si gnal ci rcui t (see
page 11-288).
3. Do t he car bon accumul at i on c hec k (see page
11-331).
Power st eer i ng syst em
pr obl ems
L ow power
Chec k t he f uel pr essur e (see page 11-308). Low c ompr essi on
Incorrect c amshaf t
t i mi ng
Incorrect engi ne oi l l evel
Exhaust rest ri ct i on
Engi ne st al l s
11-293).
2. Check t he f uel pr essur e (see page 11-308).
3. Check t he i dl e speed (see page 11-292).
4. Tr oubl eshoot t he brake pedal posi t i on swi t ch
si gnal ci rcui t (see page 11-290).
Intake ai r l eaks
Faul t y har ness and
sensor c onnec t i ons
Di ffi cult to ref uel
1. Check t he f uel vent t ube bet ween t he EVAP
cani st er and t he f uel t ank.
2. Check t he f uel t ank vapor r eci r cul at i on t ube
bet ween t he f uel pi pe and t he f uel t ank.
3. Repl ace t he f uel t ank (see page 11-325).
Mal f unct i oni ng gas st at i on
fi lli ng nozzl e.
Fuel over f l ows dur i ng ref uel i ng
(No DTCs set )
Repl ace t he f uel t ank (see page 11-325). Mal f unct i oni ng gas st at i on
f i lli ng nozzl e.
Fuel c ap war ni ng message
st ays on
Tr oubl eshoot t he f uel c ap war ni ng mes s age syst em
(see page 11-367).
HDS does not c ommuni c at e
wi t h t he ECM/ PCM or t he
vehi c l e
Tr oubl eshoot t he DL C ci rcui t (see page 11-181). Cor r ect HDS sof t war e
11-15
Sf stem Description
f uel and Emi ssi ons S f s t ems Di agr am
AIR F UEL RATIO (A/ F) S E NS OR ( S ENS OR 1)
SECONDARY HEATED OXYGE N SENSOR
(SECONDARY H02S) (SENSOR 2)
(D MANIF OLD A B S OL UTE PRE S S URE (MAP) S E NS OR
ENGI NE COOL ANT TEMPERATURE (ECT) S E NS OR 1
MA S S AIR FL OW (MAF) S E NS OR/
INTAK E AIR TEMPERATURE (IAT) S E NS OR
CRANK S HAFT POSITION (CKP) S E NS OR
K NOCK S E NS OR
CAMS HAFT POSITION (CMP) S E NS OR B
CAMS HAFT POSITION (CMP) S E NS OR A
THROTTL E BODY
I NJ ECTOR
FUEL PRE S S URE REGUL ATOR
FUEL FIL TER
@ FUE L PUMP
FUE L TA NK
AIR CL EANER
@ INTAK E AIR RES ONATOR
POSI TI VE CRANK CAS E VENTI L ATI ON (PCV) VA L VE
WARM UP THREE WAY CATAL YTI C CONVERTER (WU-TWC)
UNDER-FL OOR THREE WAY CATAL YTI C CONVERTER (TWC)
EVAPORATI VE EMI S S I ON (EVAP) CANI S TER PURGE VA L VE
EVAPORATI VE EMI SSI ON (EVAP) CANI S TER
EVAPORATI VE EMI S S I ON (EVAP) CANI S TER
VENT S HUT VA L VE
FUEL TANK PRE S S URE (FTP) S E NS OR
FUEL TANK VAPOR CONTROL VA L VE
11-16
Vac uum Hose Rout i ng
11-17
Sf stem Description (cont'd)
El ect r oni c Cont r ol S f st ems
The f unct i ons of t he f uel and emi ssi on cont rol s y s t ems ar e managed by t he engi ne cont rol modul e (ECM) on vehi c l es
wi t h manual t r ansmi ssi ons or t he power t r ai n cont rol modul e (PCM) on vehi c l es wi t h aut omat i c t r ansmi ssi ons.
Sel f -di agnosi s
The ECM/ PCM det ect s t he f ai l ure of a si gnal f r om a sensor or f r om anot her cont rol uni t and st or es a Pendi ng DTC or a
Conf i r med DTC. Dependi ng on t he f ai l ur e, a Conf i r med DTC i s st or ed i n ei t her t he f i rst or t he sec ond dr i ve c yc l e. When a
Conf i r med DTC i s st or ed, t he ECM/ PCM t ur ns on t he mal f unct i on i ndi cat or l amp (MIL) by a si gnal sent to t he gauge vi a
F-CAN.
One Dr i ve Cyc l e Det ect i on Met hod
When an abnor mal i t y oc c ur s in t he si gnal f r om a sensor or f r om anot her cont rol uni t , t he ECM/ PCM st or es a
Conf i r med DTC and t ur ns on t he MIL i mmedi at el y.
Two Dr i ve Cyc l e Det ect i on Met hod
When an abnor mal i t y oc c ur s in t he si gnal f r om a sensor or f r om anot her cont r ol uni t i n t he f i rst dri ve c yc l e, t he
ECM/ PCM st or es a Pendi ng DTC. The MIL does not c ome on at t hi s t i me. If t he f ai l ure cont i nues in t he sec ond dr i ve
c yc l e, t he ECM/ PCM st or es a Conf i r med DTC and t ur ns on t he MIL.
When an abnor mal i t y oc c ur s i n t he si gnal f r om a sensor or f r om anot her cont rol uni t , t he ECM/ PCM i gnor es that si gnal
and subst i t ut es a pr e-pr ogr ammed val ue f or t hem t hat al l ows t he engi ne t o cont i nue r unni ng. Thi s c auses a Conf i r med
DTC t o be st or ed and t he MIL to c ome on.
MIL Bul b Chec k and Readi ness Code Condi t i on
When t he i gni t i on swi t ch i s t ur ned to ON (II), t he ECM/ PCM t ur ns on t he MIL vi a t he F-CAN ci rcui t f or about 15 to
20 sec onds to c hec k t he bul b condi t i on. If any r eadi ness c odes ar e not set to c ompl et e, t he MIL f l ashes f i ve t i mes. If all
r eadi ness c odes ar e set to compl et e, t he MIL goes off.
Sel f Shut Down (SSD) Mode
After t he i gni t i on swi t ch i s t ur ned to L OCK (0), t he ECM/ PCM st ays on (about 40 mi nut es). If t he ECM/ PCM connect or i s
di sc onnec t ed dur i ng t hi s t i me, t he ECM/ PCM may be damaged. To c anc el t hi s mode, di sc onnec t t he negat i ve cabl e f r om
t he battery or j ump t he S CS li ne wi t h t he HDS after t he i gni ti on swi t c h i s t ur ned t o L OCK (0).
11-18
ECM/ PCM Input s and Out put s at ECM/ PCM Connect or A ( ) (49P)
Ter mi nal
number
Wi re color Ter mi nal name Descri pt i on Si gnal
r
1
RED VBSOL (POWER SOURCE
FOR SOLENOID VALVES)
Power sour ce for sol enoi d
val ves
Wi th ignition swi t ch ON (II): battery voltage
3 WHT CANH (CAN
COMMUNICATION
SIGNAL HIGH)
Sends communi cat i on
si gnal
Wi th ignition swi t ch ON (II): pul ses (about 2.5 V)
4 RED CANL (CAN
COMMUNICATION
SIGNAL LOW)
Sends communi cat i on
si gnal
Wi th ignition swi t ch ON (II): pul ses (about 2.5 V)
5*
3
GRN FANL (RADIATOR FAN
CONTROL)
Dri ves A/C condenser fan
relay
Wi th condenser fan runni ng: about 0 V
Wi th condensor fan st opped: battery voltage
YEL FANC (RADIATOR FAN
CONTROL)
Dri ves radi ator fan relay Wi th radi ator fan runni ng: about 0 V
Wi th radi ator fan st opped: battery voltage
6*
3
YEL FANH (RADIATOR FAN
CONTROL)
Dri ves radi ator fan relay Wi th radi ator fan runni ng at hi gh speed: about 0 V
Wi th radi ator f an stopped or runni ng at low
speed: battery voltage
7 RED/BLK MRLY (PGM-FI MAIN
RELAY 1)
Dri ves PGM-FI mai n relay
1
Power sour ce for DTC
memory
Wi th ignition swi t ch ON (II): about 0 V
Wi th ignition swi t ch in LOCK (0): battery voltage
9 YEL / BL K IGP (POWER SOURCE) Power sour ce for
ECM/PCM ci rcui t
Wi th ignition swi t ch ON (II): battery voltage
10 BLK SG6 (SENSOR GROUND) Sensor ground Less than 0.2 V at all t i mes
11 RED VSV (EVAPORATIVE
EMISSION (EVAP)
CANISTER VENT SHUT
VALVE)
Dri ves EVAP cani st er vent
shut val ve
With ignition swi t ch ON (II): battery voltage
15 PUR ACC (A/C COMPRESSOR
CLUTCH RELAY)
Dri ves A/C compr essor
clutch relay
Wi th compr essor ON: about 0 V
Wi th compr essor OFF: battery voltage
16 GRY IMOFPR (IMMOBILIZER
FUEL PUMP RELAY)
Dri ves PGM-FI mai n relay
2 (FUEL PUMP)
About 0 V for 2 seconds after turni ng ignition
swi t ch ON (II), then battery voltage
With engi ne runni ng: about 0 V
A/T
'08-09 model s
'10 model
(cont ' d)
11-19
Syst em Descri pt i on (cont' d)
Termi nal Wi re color Ter mi nal name Descri pt i on Siqnal
17*
3
BLU ACPD (A/C PRESSURE
SENSOR)
Detects A/C Pressure
sensor signal
With A/C switch ON: about 1.44.8 V (depending
on A/C pressure)
18 YEL APSA (ACCELERATOR
PEDAL POSITION (APP)
SENSOR A)
Detects APP sensor A
signal
With ignition switch ON (II) and accelerator pedal
pressed: about 4.8 V
released: about 1.0 V
19 ORN APSB (ACCELERATOR
SENSOR B)
Detects APP sensor B
signal
pressed: about 2.4 V
released: about 0.5 V
20 YEL VCC6 (SENSOR VOLTAGE) Provides sensor reference
voltage
With ignition switch ON (II): about 5.0 V
21 WHT ETCSRLY (ELECTRONIC
THROTTLE CONTROL
SY STEM (ETCS)
CONTROL RELAY)
Drives electronic throttle
control system (ETCS)
control relay
With ignition switch ON (II): aboMt 0 V
22 RED/YEL SUBRLY (PGM-FI
SUBRLY )
Drives PGM-F I subrelay With ignition switch ON (II): about 0 V
23 PNK PSPSW (POWER
STEERING PRESSURE
SWITCH SIGNAL)
Detects PSP switch signal At idle with steering wheel in straight ahead
position: about 0 V
At idle with steering wheel at full lock: battery
voltage
24 BLU/BLK ELD (ELECTRICAL LOAD
DETECTOR (ELD))
Detects ELD signal With ignition switch ON (II): about 0.1 - 4. 8 V
(depending on electrical load)
*3: '10 model
11-20
Termi nal
number
Wi re col or Termi nal name Descri pt i on Si gnal
25 BRN VCC5 (SENSOR VOLTAGE) Provides sensor reference
voltage
26 RED VCC4 (SENSOR VOLTAGE) Provides sensor reference
voltage
27 LTGRN FTP (FUEL TANK
PRESSURE (FTP)
SENSOR)
Detects FTP sensor signal With ignition switch ON (II) and fuel fill cap
removed: about 2.5 V
28'
1
PNK SLS (SHIFT LOCK
SOLENOID)
Drives shift lock solenoid With ignition switch ON (II), in P, brake pedal
pressed, and accelerator pedal released: about
0V
29 BLU NEP (ENGINE SPEED
SIGNAL)
Outputs engine speed
signal
With engine running: pulses
30 BLU VSSOUT (VEHICLE SPEED
SIGNAL OUTPUT)
Sends vehicle speed signal Depending on vehicle speed: pulses
32 ORN SCS (SERVICE CHECK
SIGNAL)
Detects service check
signal
With service check signal shorted using the HDS:
about 0V
With service check signal opened: about 5.0 V
34 YEL/RED ECT2 (ENGINE COOLANT
TEMPERATURE (ECT)
SENSOR 2)
Detects ECT sensor 2
signal
With ignition switch ON (11): about 0.1 - 4. 8 V
(depending on engine coolant temperature)
35 GRN SG5 (SENSOR GROUND) Sensor ground Less than 0.2 V at all times
36 BLU SG4 (SENSOR GROUND) Sensor ground Less than 0.2 V at all times
* 1 : A/T
(cont ' d)
11-21
Terminal
number
Wi r e color ipiioii Signal
41 ORN BKSWNC (BRAKE PEDAL
POSITION SWITCH)
Detects brake pedal
position switch signal
With ignition switch ON (II) and brake pedal
released: battery voltage
With ignition switch ON (II) and brake pedal
pressed: about 0 V
42 LTGRN BKSW (BRAKE PEDAL
POSITION SWITCH)
Detects brake pedal
With brake pedal released: about 0 V
With brake pedal pressed: battery voltage
43*4 BRN CRMTCLS (CRUISE
CLUTCH PEDAL POSITION
SWITCH SIGNAL)
Detects clutch pedal
With ignition switch ON (II) and clutch pedal
released: about 0 V
With ignition switch ON (II) and clutch pedal
pressed: battery voltage
44 RED WEN (WRITE ENABLE
SIGNAL)
Detects write enable signal With ignition switch ON (II): about 0 V
46 LTGRN S-NET5V (SERIAL
COMMUNICATION FOR
IMMOBILIZER)
Sends serial
communication signal
With ignition switch ON (II): pulses
With key removed from the ignition switch: about
1.4V
*4: M/T
11-22
ECM/ PCM Input s and Out put s at ECM/ PCM Connect or B ( A ) (49P)
Termi nal
number
Wire col or Ter mi nal name Descri pti on Si gnal
1 BLK PG2 (POWER GROUND) Ground circuit for
ECM/PCM
Less than 0.2 V at all times
3 Y EL/BLU PCS (EVAPORATIVE
EMISSION (EVAP)
CANISTER PURGE VALVE)
Drives EVAP canister
purge valve
With engine running, engine coolant below 131 F
(55 C): battery voltage
With engine running, engine coolant above 131 F
(55 C): duty controlled
4 BLK/WHT S02SHTC (SECONDARY
HEATED OXY GEN
SENSOR (SECONDARY
H02S) (SENSOR 2)
HEATER)
Drives secondary H02S
(sensor 2) heater
With ignition switch ON (II): battery voltage
With warmed up engine running: duty controlled
7 YEL/RED OPSW (OIL PRESSURE
SWITCH)
Detects engine oil
pressure signal
With ignition switch ON (II): about 0 V
With engine running: battery voltage
8*
1
BLU/RED OP2SW (TRANSMISSION
FLUID PRESSURE SWITCH
A (2ND CLUTCH))
Detects transmission fluid
pressure switch A (2nd
clutch) input
With ignition switch ON (II):
Without 2nd clutch pressure: about 5.0 V
With 2nd clutch pressure: about 0 V
9*
1
BLU/WHT OP3SW (TRANSMISSION
FLUID PRESSURE SWITCH
B (3RD CLUTCH))
Detects transmission fluid
pressure switch B (3rd
clutch) input
Without 3rd clutch pressure: about 5.0 V
With 3rd clutch pressure: about 0 V
10 BLK PG1 (POWER GROUND) Ground circuit for
ECM/PCM
BLU/BLK SHA (SHIFT SOLENOID
VALVE A)
Drives shift solenoid
valve A
With engine running in R, D (in 1st, 4th, and 5th
gears) D3 (in 1st gear), and 1: battery voltage
With engine running in P, N, D, and D3 (in 2nd and
3rd gears) and 2: about 0 V
12
#1
GRN/WHT SHB (SHIFT SOLENOID
VALVE B)
valve B
With engine running in P, R, N, D, and D3 (in 1st
and 2nd gears), 2, and 1: battery voltage
With engine running in D (in 3rd, 4th, 5th gears),
D3 (in 3rd gear), 2 and 1: about 0 V
13*
1
RED/BLK ATPN (TRANSMISSION
RANGE SWITCH N)
Detects transmission
range switch N position
signal
In N: about 0 V
In any position other than N: about 5.0 V
14*
1
BLU/BLK ATPP (TRANSMISSION
RANGE SWITCH P)
range switch P position
signal
In P: about 0 V
In any position other than P: about 5.0 V
15*
1
WHT ATPR (TRANSMISSION
RANGE SWITCH R)
range switch R position
signal
In R: about 0 V
In any position other than R: about 5.0 V
16*
1
RED ATPD3 (TRANSMISSION
RANGE SWITCH D3)
range switch D3 position
signal
In D3: about 0 V
In any position other than D3: battery voltage
* 1 : A/T
(cont' d)
1
P G 2
3
P C S
4
S 0 2 S
H T C
15
ATPR
7
OP S W OP2S W
9 10
OP3S W PG1
11
S H A
22
ATPD
29
ATP
FWD
12
S H B
IS
ATP
RVS
13
ATPN
24
E CT1
31
V G +
14
ATPP
32
I AT
33
V G -
16
ATP
D3
2
S H E
34
S G 2
17
ATP
2-1
18
NM
19
V CC2
35
V T S ,
W
26"
L S C
" 2 7 "
S HD
" 4 7
A L T F
38
NC
21
S H C
TATF
43 45
VTP
SWB A L T C
46
A L T L
48
L S A
IT
11-23
ECM/ PCM Input s and Out put s at ECM/ PCM Connec t or B f A ) (49P)
Terminal
rsumoer
Wire color Description Signal
17*
1
GRN/RED ATP2-1 (TRANSMISSION
RANGE SWITCH 2-1)
range switch 2 and 1
position signals
In 2 and 1: about OV
In any position other than 2 and 1: battery voltage
18*
1
WHT/RED NM (INPUT SHAF T
(MAINSHAF T) SPEED
SENSOR)
Detects input shaft
(mainshaft) speed sensor
signal
With ignition switch ON (II): about 0 V or about
5.0 V
With engine idling in N position: about 2.5 V
(pulses)
19
#1
Y EL/BLU VCC2 (SENSOR VOLTAGE) Provides sensor reference
voltage
21*
1
GRN SHC (SHIFT SOLENOID
VALVE C)
valve C
With engine running in N, D (in 1st, 3rd, and 5th
gears), D3 (in 1st and 3rd gears), and 1: battery
voltage
With engine running in P, R, D (in 2nd and 4th
gears), D3 (in 2nd gear), and 2: about 0 V
22*
1
Y EL/GRN ATPD (TRANSMISSION
RANGE SWITCH D)
range switch D position
signal
In D: about 0 V
In any position other than D: battery voltage
23*
1
RED/WHT ATPRVS (TRANSMISSION
RANGE SWITCH RVS)
signal
In R: about 0 V
In any position other than R: battery voltage
24 RED/WHT ECT1 (ENGINE COOLANT
TEMPERATURE (ECT)
SENSOR 1)
Detects ECT sensor 1
signal
With ignition switch ON (II): about 0.1 ~4.8 V
(depending on engine coolant temperature)
25*
1
YEL SHE (SHIFT SOLENOID
VALVE E)
Drives shift solenoid valve
E
With engine running in P and R: battery voltage
With engine running in , N, D and D3 (in 1st gear),
2, and 1: about 0 V
26*
1
BLU/YEL LSC (A/T CLUTCH
PRESSURE CONTROL
SOLENOID VALVE C)
Drives A/T clutch pressure
control solenoid valve C
With ignition switch ON (II): current controlled
27"
1
GRN/RED SHD (SHIFT SOLENOID
VALVE D)
valve D
With engine running in D (in 2nd and 5th gears),
D3 (in 2nd gear), and 2: battery voltage
With engine running in P, R, N, D (in 1st, 3rd and
4th gears), D3 (in 1st and 3rd gears), and 1: about
OV
28*
1
RED/YEL TATF (ATF
TEMPERATURE SENSOR)
Detects ATF temperature
sensor signal
With ignition switch ON (II): about 0.2-4.8 V
(depending on ATF temperature)
29*
1
BLU/YEL ATPF WD
(TRANSMISSION RANGE
SWITCH F WD)
range switch D, D3, 2
positions signal
In D, D3, and 2 positions: about 0 V
In any position other than D, D3, and 2: battery
voltage
* 1: A/T
11-24
ECM/ PCM Input s and Out put s at ECM/ PCM Connect or B ( A ) (49P)
Termi nal
number
Wi re color Te mi nal name Descri pt i on Si gnal
31 RED/BLK VG+ (MASS AIR FLOW
(MAF ) SENSOR +SIDE)
Detects MAF sensor signal At idle with warmed up engine and no electrical
load: about 1.3 V
32 RED/YEL IAT (INTAKE AIR
TEMPERATURE (IAT)
SENSOR)
Detects IAT sensor signal With ignition switch ON (II): about 0.1 4.0 V
(about 1.8 V at normal operating temperature)
33 BLK/BLU V G - (MASS AIR FLOW
(MAF ) SENSOR -SIDE)
Ground for MAF sensor
signal
34 GRN/BLK SG2 (SENSOR GROUND) Sensor ground Less than 0.2 V at all times
35 GRN/YEL VTS (VTSA)*
5
(ROCKER
ARM OIL CONTROL
SOLENOID (A)*
5
)
Drives rocker arm oil
control solenoid (A)*
5
At idle: about 0 V
36 WHT/RED SH02S (SECONDARY
HEATED OXY GEN
SENSOR (SECONDARY
H02S) SENSOR 2)
Detects secondary H02S
(sensor 2) signal
With throttle fully opened from idle with warmed
up engine: above 0.8 V
While throttle quickly closed: below 0.1 V
38 BLK/WHT NC (OUTPUT SHAF T
(COUNTERSHAFT) SPEED
SENSOR)
Detects output shaft
(countershaft) speed
sensor signal
With ignition switch ON (II): about 0 V or about
5.0 V
While driving: about 2.5 V (pulses)
40*
1
BRN LSB (A/T CLUTCH
PRESSURE CONTROL
SOLENOID VALVE B)
control solenoid valve B
43*
5
BLU VTPSWB (ROCKER ARM
OIL PRESSURE SWITCH B)
Detects rocker arm oil
pressure switch B signal
At idle: about 0 V
45 WHT/GRN ALTC (ALTERNATOR
CONTROL)
Sends alternator control
signal
With warmed up engine running: about 7.5 V
46 WHT/BLU ALTL (ALTERNATOR L
SIGNAL)
Detects alternator L signal With ignition switch ON (II): about 0 V
With engine running: battery voltage
47 WHT/RED ALTF (ALTERNATOR FR
SIGNAL)
Detects alternator FR
signal
With engine running: about 0.52.7 V
48'
1
RED/BLK LSA (A/T CLUTCH
PRESSURE CONTROL
SOLENOID VALVE A)
control solenoid valve A
* 1 : A/T
*5: PZEV model
(cont' d)
11-25
"uel and Emi ssi ons Syst ems
ECM/ PCM Input s and Out put s at ECM/ PCf Connect or C CO) (49P)
Termi nal Wi re color Ter mi nal name Descri pt i on
1 YEL7GRN IG1ETCS (IGNITION
SIGNAL ETCS)
Detects ignition signal With ignition switch ON (II): battery voltage
2 BLK PGMETCS (POWER
GROUND ETCS)
Ground circuit for
ECM/PCM
3 GRN/YEL E TCSM- (THROTTLE
ACTUATOR -SI DE)
Ground for throttle
actuator
4 BLU/RED ETCSM + (THROTTLE
ACTUATOR -f-SIDE)
Drives throttle actuator With ignition switch ON (II): about 0 V
5 BRN INJ 1 (No. 1 INJ ECTOR) Drives No. 1 injector With ignition switch ON (II): battery voltage
At idle: duty controlled
6 RED INJ 2 (No. 2 INJ ECTOR) Drives No. 2 injector
7 BLU INJ 3 (No. 3 INJ ECTOR) Drives No. 3 injector
8 YEL INJ 4 (No. 4 INJ ECTOR) Drives No. 4 injector
9 GRN AF SHTC (AIR FUEL RATIO
(A/F) SENSOR (SENSOR 1)
HEATER CONTROL)
Drives A/F sensor (sensor
1) heater
With warmed up engine running: pulses
10 BLK/RED IG1 (IGNITION SIGNAL) Detects ignition signal With ignition switch ON (II): battery voltage
11 GRN/RED MAP (MANIF OLD
ABSOLUTE PRESSURE
(MAP) SENSOR)
Detects MAP sensor signal With ignition switch ON (II): about 3.0 V
At idle: about 1.0 V (depending on engine speed)
12 BLU VCC3 (SENSOR VOLTAGE) Provides sensor reference
voltage
13 YEL/RED VCC1 (SENSOR VOLTAGE) Provides sensor reference
voltage
14 GRN/WHT SG1 (SENSOR GROUND) Sensor ground Less than 0.2 V at all times
15 Y EL/GRN IGPLS1 (No. 1 IGNITION
COIL PULSE)
Drives No. 1 ignition coil With ignition switch ON (II): about 0 V
16 BLU/RED IGPLS2 (No. 2 IGNITION
COIL PULSE)
Drives No. 2 ignition coil
17 WHT/BLU IGPLS3 (No. 3 IGNITION
COIL PULSE)
18 BRN IGPLS4 (No. 4 IGNITION
COIL PULSE)
20 RED/BLK TPSA (THROTTLE
POSITION (TP) SENSOR A)
Detects TP sensor A signal With throttle fully open: about 3.9 V
With throttle fully closed: about 0.8 V
21 RED/BLU TPSB (THROTTLE
POSITION (TP) SENSOR B)
Detects TP sensor B signal With throttle fully open: about 4.1 V
With throttle fully closed: about 1.7 V
11-26
ECM/ PCM Input s and Out put s at ECM/ PCM Connect or C (O) (49P)
1
IG1
E T CS
2
PGM
E T CS
n
3
E T CS
M-
n
4 5 6 7 8 9 10
E TCS A F S
M+ I NJ 1 I N J 2 I NJ 3 I N J 4 HTC I G1
Ter mi nal
number
Wi re color Ter mi nal name Descri pti on Si gnal
22 BLU/BLK VTPSW (VTPSWA)"
5
(ROCKER ARM OIL
PRESSURE SWITCH (A)*
5
)
Detects rocker arm oil
pressure switch (A)*
5
signal
At idle: about 0 V
23 BLU/WHT VTC (VTC OIL CONTROL
SOLENOID VALVE)
Drives VTC oil control
solenoid valve
- 24*
5
GRN/RED VTSB (ROCKER ARM OIL
CONTROL SOLENOID B)
Drives rocker arm oil
control solenoid B
At idle: about 0 V
29 RED AF S+ (AIR FUEL RATIO
+SIDE)
Detects A/F sensor
(sensor 1) signal
At idle: about 2.2 V
30 RED/YEL AF S - (AIR FUEL RATIO
-SI DE)
Detects A/F sensor
(sensor 1) signal
At idle: about 1.8 V
31 GRN CMPB (CAMSHAF T
POSITION (CMP) SENSOR
B)
Detects CMP sensor B
signal
32 BLU/YEL CKP (CRANKSHAF T
POSITION (CKP) SENSOR)
Detects CKP sensor signal With engine running: pulses
40 BLU/YEL MCS (ENGINE MOUNT
CONTROL SOLENOID
VALVE)
Drives engine mount
control solenoid
At idle: about 0 V
Above idle: battery voltage
43 GRN SG3 (SENSOR GROUND) Sensor ground Less than 0.2 V at all times
44 BRN/YEL LG1 (LOGIC GROUND) Ground circuit
f
or
ECM/PCM
45 BLU/WHT CMPA (CAMSHAF T
POSITION (CMP) SENSOR
A)
Detects CMP sensor A
signal
46 RED/BLU KS (KNOCK SENSOR) Detects knock sensor
signal
With engine knocking: pulses
48 BRN/YEL LG2 (LOGIC GROUND) Ground circuit for
ECM/PCM
*5: PZEV model
(cont' d)
11-2
Fuel and Emi ssi ons S f st ems
ECM/ PCM El ect r i cal Connect i ons
IGNITION COI L
RE L A Y
UNDER- HOOD
FUS E / RE L A Y BOX:
(DNo. 1 BATTERY (100 A)
N o . 17 FI MAIN (15 A)
(DNo. 3-1 IG MAIN (50 A)
N o . 15 BACK UP (10 A)
N o . 10 HORN/ S TOP (20 A)
N o . 13 IG COI L (15 A)
DRI VER' S UNDER- DAS H
@No . 7A CG( 1 5 A )
N o . 9 FUE L PUMP (20 A)
N o . 16 A/ C (7.5 A)
N o . 10 VB S OL (10 A)
UNDER- HOOD
N o . 14 FI S UB (15 A)
N o . 21 FAN RL Y (7.5 A)
N o . 18 DBW ( ETCS ) (15 A)
* 1: M/ T
* 2: A/ T
11-28
No. 11NJ ECTOR
No. 2 I NJ ECTOR
No. 3 I NJ ECTOR
No. 4 I NJ ECTOR
CMP S E NS OR B
CK P S E NS OR
*2:A/T
C8 I NJ 4
B A RO S E NS OR
(Bui l t i nt o
t he ECM/ PCM)
C31 CMPB
S GI C14
NC B38
ECT1 B24 0-
OPS W B7
MAP S E NS OR
N | | | 0
OUT PUT S HA F T
( COUNTE RS HAFT)
S PE E D S E NS OR
MAF S E NS OR
IAT S E NS OR
E CT S E N S OR 1
K NOCK S E NS OR
OI L PRE S S URE
S WI TCH
1
(c ont d)
11-29
EVAP CANISTER
VENT SH UT VALVE
EVAP CANISTER
PURGE VALVE
1
ALTERNATOR
SPARK
T o ^
SPARK
PLUG
ICM
No. 1 IGNITION COIL
No. 2 IGNITION COIL
T o
r
F ^
SPARK
No. 3 IGNITION COIL
SPARK
ICM
No. 4 IGNITION COIL
*3: PZEV model
AF SHTC C9 <
AF S+C29 c
) A11 VSV
AF S+C29 c
) A11 VSV
AF S - C30 I AF S - C30 I
> B3 PCS
S H 02S B 36c
S02SH TC B4 (
) B46 ALTL LG1 C44 <
>B 47ALTF LG2 C48 <
>B45 ALTC
CM PA C45 <
>C15I GP LS1
VTC C23 <
) C16I GP LS2
VTP SW C22 J
(VTP SWA)*
3
1
>C17 IGPLS3
>C18I GP LS4
VTS B 35 J
(VTSA)*
3
1
S-NET5V A46 <
SECONDARY
H 02S
CMP SENSOR A
VTC OIL CONTROL
SOLENOID VALVE
r
ROCK ER AR M
OIL PRESSURE
SWI TCH (A)*
3
ROCK ER AR M
OIL CONTROL
SOLENOID (A)*
To DRIVER'S MI CU,
IMMOB ILIZER-K EY LESS
CONTROL UNI T
11-30
FTP S E NS OR
ECT S E NS OR 2
A/ C PRE S S URE
S E NS OR
To F-CAN
CI RCUI T
DATA L I NK
CONNE CTOR
To K-LINE <r
CI RCUI T
*1:IWT
*5: '10 model
A27 FTP
B K S W A42
B K S WNCA 41
V S S OUT A30
NE PA 29
CRMTCL S A43
PS PS W A23
A 3 2 S C S
B RA K E PE DA L
POS I TI ON S WI TCH
To NAVI GATI ON UNI T,
AUDI O UNI T
- To AUDI O UNI T (wi t h ANC)
CL UTCH PEDAL
r
PS P S WI TCH
ENGI NE MOUNT
CONTROL
S OL E NOI D
VA L VE
(cont' d)
11-31
5
B Q 1 A Q
THROTTLE
ACTUATOR
THROTTLE BODY
RADI ATOR
FAN RELAY
L - oi o6
A/C CONDENSER
FAN RELAY
D
L5
RADIATOR
FAN RELAY
L^
A/C CONDENSER _
FAN RELAY
D
L^
To FAN
CONTROL
RELAY
44-
*3: PZEV model
*4: '08-09 models
*5:'10 model
C 1 2 V C C 3
C21 T P S B
C 4 3 S G 3
C 4 E T C S M+
C 3 E T C S M-
A 6 F A N C
A 6 F A NH
V C C 4 A 2 6
A P S A A 1 8
S G 4 A 3 6
V C C 5 A 2 5
A P S B A 1 9
S G 5 A 3 5
V T P S WB B 4 3
V T S B C 2 4
r
r
A PP S E N S OR A / B
ROCK E R A RM
OI L P R E S S U R E
S WI T CH B
ROCK E R A RM
OI L CON T ROL
S OL E NOI D B
11-32
TRANSMISSION FLUID
PRESSURE SWITCH A
(2ND CLUTCH)
r
r
TRANSMISSION FLUID
PRESSURE SWITCH B
(3RD CLUTCH)
To 4.
SHIFT LOCK SOLENOID ^
El ?
INPUT SHAFT
(MAINSHAFT)
SPEED SENSOR
ATF TEMPERATURE SENSOR
A
A
SHIFT SOLENOID
VALVE A
SHIFT SOLENOID
VALVE B
l
1
- U P -
SHIFT SOLENOID
VALVE C
1
SHIFT SOLENOID
VALVE D
1
SHIFT SOLENOID
VALVE E
1
A/T CLUTCH
PRESSURE
CONTROL
SOLENOID
VALVE A
A/T CLUTCH
PRESSURE
CONTROL
SOLENOID
VALVE B
A/T CLUTCH
PRESSURE
CONTROL
SOLENOID
VALVE C
*2:/VT
ECM/PCM A O (49P)
. h i 7>
3 | 4 I 5 | 6 | 7
/
9| 10|
1
11
/
/ / I
1 5
16
1
71
5
19 20 21 1
1

1
22 23 24 25
> ^
26 27 28
1
1

1
29 30 3 2 | / 34 35 36
/ /
1
1

M 41 42143144 l / l 4 6 | /
V\
ECM/PCM B (A) (49P)
J1L
^ 3 1 4 1 / 1 / 1 7 1 8 9 110|
1
11 1213 16 1718 19
/
21
1
1 1
22
23J24 25 26 27 28
1
1 1
29 / 131 32 33 34 3536
/
38
/
1
1
1401/1/
43| / | 45| 46 47
r
J 4 * 1 / 1
ECM/PCM C (0)(49P)
J 112
3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 T8 9 hot
1
11 12 13 14 15 16 1718
/
20 21
1
1
22 23 24
/ / / /
1
1
29 30 31
/ A? / / /
1
| 4 0 | /
A
43| 44| 45| 46l /
TERMINAL LOCATIONS
(cont ' d)
11-33
ECM/ PCM Ci r cui t Di agr am
77T
5 V
i Nj r
I NJ 2
C7
RE D
I NJ 4
CMPB
GRN
B L U/ YE L
24P J UNCTI ON
CONNE CTOR
1111111
i Y E I / Rl K 1
YE L / B L K
No. 1 I NJ ECTOR
No. 2 I NJ ECTOR
No. 3 I NJ ECTOR
No. 4 I NJ E CTOR
CMP S E NS OR A
YE L / B L K
B RN/ YE L
CMP S E NS OR B
CK P S E NS OR
Y E L / YE L / BRN/
BL K BL K Y E L
E F G
-34
*1:PZEV model
*3: A/T
(cont' d)
11-35
- r
J -
1
LG1
C48
B RN/ YE L
- RE D/ B L U
B K S WNC
*1:PZEV model
*2: M/T
B RN/ YE L
B RN/ YE L
C101
H D h
LT GRN -
RED
BLK /RED -
ORN
K NOCK SENSOR
Brake pedal pressed: closed
Brake pedal released: open
Brake pedal pressed: open
Brake pedal released: closed
B RA K E PE DA L
r
1
- - O O-j
Cl ut c h pedal pr es s ed : open
Cl ut c h pedal r el eas ed: c l os ed
CL UTCH PE DA L
G302
11-36
X
VG+
B33
V G -
B32
IAT
B34
B24
ECT1
B38
NC
C13
VCC1
C11
MAP
C14
S GI
MCS
RE D/ B L K
B L K / B L U
RED/Y E L
Y EL/RED
- GRN/RED
-GRNAA/ HT
J
24P
J UNCTI ON
CONNE CTOR
RE D/ BL K -
- B L K / B L U -
YE L / B L K -
GRN/ B L K -
- RE D/ YE L -
MAF
S E NS OR
^ Wi j I A T
- GRN/ B L K
- RE D/ WHT
E CT S E N S OR 1
- YE L / RE D -
- GRN/ RE D -
- GR N/ WHT -
3
MAP S E NS OR
- Y EL/RED -
- BL K / WHT
- GR N/ WHT -
OUTPUT S HAFT
( COUNTERS HAFT)
S PE E D S E NS OR
B L U/ YE L
B L K / YE L
ENGI NE MOUNT
VA L VE
*3:A/T
(cont d)
11-37
B3
B47
A L TF
B45
A L TC
C16
I GPL S 2
C18
I GPL S 4
- WH T/RED -
- W H T / GR N-
- WH T / B L U -
B L K / YE L -
20
i I
24P J UNCTI ON
CONNECTOR
B L K / YE L
YE L / B L U
*~ B L K / YE L -
V V H T / B L U -
WHT / RE D-
WHT/ GRN -
C102
3
- B L K / YE L -
- WHT / B L U -
- WHT / RE D -
- WHT/ GRN -
24P J UNCTI ON
CONNE CTOR
I I I I I
10
BL K / WHT
- BL K / WHT -
- YE L / GRN -
- B L K
E VA P CANI S TER
PURGE VA L VE
AL TE RNATOR
S PA RK
'
No. 1 I GNI TI ON COI L
, C101
- BL K / WHT -
B L U/ RE D -
BL K
J 3 R
1
^T o
S PA RK
PL UG
- BL K / WHT -
- WH T / B L U -
BL K
BL K / WHT -
BRN
BL K
I rjfx
/ f t p T o
S PA RK
PL UG
No. 3 IGNITION COI L
1
^
4^ - O F ^- ^T o
S PA RK
PL UG
2 . J
B LK /WH T
JL
T
BL K
1
G102
11-38
3L
S HB
SHC
SHD
SHE
LSA
VCC2
- WHT/ RED -
C105
WHT pWÎ
- WHT I '
A TF TE MPE RA TURE
S E NS OR
BLU
O R N
S HI FT S OL E NOI D
VA L VE A
[ " [
SI
4:
VA L VE B
S H I F T S O L E N O I D A
V A L V E C
Y E L 1"[
r
f f l P -
S HI FT S OL E NOI D ,
V A L V E D A
. R E D 1"[ns^-
VA L VE E
RED/ BL K
BL K
BRN
BLK
A/ T CL UTCH PRE S S URE
CONTROL S OL E NOI D VA L VE A
1
B L U/ YE L
BL K -
CONTROL S OL E NOI D VA L VE B
1 r - f
A / T CL UTCH PRE S S URE
CONTROL S OL E NOI D VA L VE C
- GRN/ BL K -
I NPUT S HA FT
(MAI NSHAFT)
S PE E D S E NS OR
*3:A/T
(cont' d)
11-39
*3
n
"Si*
"So*
1
B 1 4
ATPP
B 1 5
BLU/BLK
81 9
BLU/
BLK
I L
ATPR
B13
ATPN
B16
ATPD3
B17
B29
ATPFWD
B23
OP2SW
OP3SW
13
, 0|
WHT
-BLU/WHT-
- BLU/BLK -
- WHT
- RED/BLK -
- YEL/GRN -
- RED
C106
7
- GRN/RED -
- BLU/YEL -
- RED/WHT -
BLK
BLU/WHT-
BLK/BLU
- WHT
RED/BLK
- PNK
- BLU
- BRN -
YEL/RED
WHT/RED
- BLK -
TRANSMISSION
RANGE SWITCH
TRANSMISSION FLUID
PRESSURE SWITCH A
{2ND CLUTCH)
- BLU/RED
1
TRANSMISSION FLUID
PRESSURE SWITCH B
(3RD CLUTCH)
-BLU/WHT
-4^
1
11
LTGRN
*2:M/T
*3:A/T
r
G302
ORN
BLK
111
Clutch pedal pressed: closed
Clutch pedal released: open
CLUTCH
INTERLOCK
SWITCH
11-40
X
t :
7TF
C12
VCC3
C20
T PS A
C21
TPS B
C43
S G3
C4
E TCS M+
- B L U/ RE D -
E T C S M-
C29
A F S +
C30
RE D
A F S -
C9
A F S HTC
B36
RE D/ YE L
GRN
SH02S"
B4
S 0 2 S HT C
B7
OPS W
A26
YE L / RE D
VCC4
A18
A PS A
A36
S G4
A25
VCC5
A19
A PS B
A35
B L U
- RED/ BL K
- RE D/ B L U
- GRN
B L U/ RE D
GRN/ YE L -
TP S E NS OR
H( M) h [
THROTTL E
A CTUA TOR
THROTTL E BODY
WHT
RE D/ YE L
GRN
1
B RN/
Y E L
- WHT/ RE D =
A / F S E NS OR
( S E NS OR 1)
B L K / YE L
- v w|
S E CONDA RY
H 02S
( S E NS OR 2)
OIL PRE S S URE
S WI TCH
1
RED -
YE L -
B L U -
BRN
ORN
GRN
APP S E NS OR A/ B
(cont' d)
11-41
X
E CT2
A10
S G6
A20
VCC6
Y E L
A CPD
Y EL/RED
ECT SENSOR 2
, YEL
BLU
BLK
A/C PRESSURE SENSOR
_ 1 _
RED
NEP
A30
B L U
*5: '10 model
C304
W H T -
L T GR N
F TP SENSOR
. RED -
- W H T -
E VA P CA NI S TE R
VENT SHUT VALVE
- T o AUDIO UNI T
(with ANC)
- >To NAVI GATI ON UNI T,
AUDIO UNI T
^ To DRIVER'S MICU,
- > IMMOBILIZER-KEYLESS
CONTROL UNIT
r' PSP SWITCH
11-42
YEL/ YEU
BLK BLK
A9
IGP
A6
YEL/BLK - J
FANC
ETCSRLY
A7
MRLY
A22
SUBRLY
A15
ACC
AA
1
-YEL / GRN
- YEL -
L TGRN
YEL/BLK
RED/BLK
RED/YEL
PUR
,.T_
BLK/WHT-
C101
- BLU
YEL/BLK
- WH T
AC
- WHT -
jr u ^r X
AE
BLK/RED
BLU/BLK
A3
BLK
-CTXJ O-
HHPi
ELECTRONIC
THROTTLE
CONTROL
SYSTEM
(ETCS)
CONTROL
RELAY
RADIATOR
FAN RELAY
*4
-cr roI A/C
CONDENSER
FAN RELAY
ro-J IGNITION
COIL
RELAY
PGM-FI
MAIN
RELAY 1

- C T X J O -
3
PGM-FI
SUBRELAY
A/C
COMPRESSOR
CLUTCH
RELAY
- cr\- o-
ELD
AF
G301
G1
BATTERY
*4: '08-'09 models
(cont' d)
11-43
UNDER- HOOD F US E / RE L A Y BOX
I T
I T
^_ |e 0)
*5: "10 model
11-44
1 CIO
cioi[x!
IMOFPR
GRY
A B A C A E
DRI VER' S UNDE R- DA S H F US E / RE L A Y BOX
T
L T GRN
( ORN) *
2
B L K / RE D
RE D -
- WHT -
- Y E L -
- GRY
F16
F2
CANH
A 4
- WHT -
YE L / B L K
L T GRN
WHT -
RE D -
A G AH
UNDER-HOOD FUSE/RELAY BOX:
(DNo. 18DBW (ETCS) (15 A)
No. 13I G COIL (15 A)
(DNo. 17 Fl MAIN (15 A)
No. 14 Fl SUB (15 A)
No. 21 FAN RLY (7.5 A)
No. 15 BACK UP (10 A)
No. 3-1 IG MAIN (50 A)
No. 10 HORN/STOP (20 A)
No. 1 BATTERY (100 A)
DRIVER'S
UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX:
No.7ACG(15A)
(D)No. 10VB SOL (10 A)
No. 9 FUEL PUMP (20 A)
No. 16 A/C (7.5 A)
@No. 5 METER (7.5 A)
WHT
P9
BRN
P18
W H T
P14
RE D
P13
PNK
D10
:
WHT
CJ _
B L U
C5
ORN
C4
Y E L
C2
IGNITION S WI TCH
IG1 HOT i n ON (II)
and S TA RT (III)
L T B L U 1J^
<r
-OTP
3
S TA RTE R
CUT RE L A Y
( S T CUT)
PGM-FI MAIN
RE L A Y 2
( FUE L PUMP)
MI CU
r
PNK
BL K
(cont ' d)
11-45
DRI VER' S
J UNCTI ON BOX 1
I MMOB I L I ZE R- K E YL E S S
CONTROL UNI T
*3: A/T
*6: Wire color may be BLU or BRN
11 "46
P A S S E N G E R ' S
U N D E R - D A S H
F U S E / R E L A Y B OX
H 1 4
A O
R E D -
- W H T -
- W H T -
RE D -
- W H T
- W H T
- R E D
- F E _
T_
"1 C 2 0 2
1 2 P J U N C T I O N
C O N N E C T O R
m r r
L T B L U
W H T
- RE D -
4 | 5 6 10 11 12
W H T -
R E D -
V S A M O D U L A T O R -
C O N T R O L U N I T
N A V I G A T I O N
U N I T
U N D E R - D A S H
F U S E / R E L A Y B O X
1 4 T
4
"1 C 2 0 2
L T B L U
W H T
- R E D -
V S A M O D U L A T O R -
D R I V E R ' S
J U N C T I O N B O X 2
J
A N ]
R E D -
- W H T -
- W H T -
- R E D -
TT
R E D W H T
- W H T -
- R E D -
Y A W R A T E - L A T E R A L
A C C E L E R A T I O N S E N S O R
*7: With navigation
*8: Without navigation
*9: L X model
*10: All except LX model
11-47
PGM-FI S f st em
The pr ogr ammed f uel i nj ect i on (PGM-FI) syst em i s a
sequent i al mul t i port f uel i nj ect i on s y s t em.
Al t er nat or Cont r ol
The al t ernat or si gnal s t he ECM/ PCM dur i ng c har gi ng.
The ECM/ PCM t hen cont r ol s t he vol t age gener at ed at t he
al t ernat or accor di ng to t he el ect r i cal l oad det er mi ned by
t he el ect r i cal l oad det ect or (ELD) and t he dr i vi ng mode.
Thi s r educ es engi ne l oad t o i mpr ove f uel ec onomy.
Ai r Condi t i oni ng (A/ C) Compr es s or Cl ut c h Rel ay
When t he ECM/ PCM r ec ei ves a demand f or cool i ng f r om
t he A/ C s y s t em, it del ays t he c ompr essor f r om bei ng
ener gi zed, and enr i c hes t he mi xt ure to assur e a smoot h
t r ansi t i on to t he A/ C mode.
Ai r Fuel Rat i o (A/ F) S ens or
The A/ F sensor oper at es over a wi de ai r/f uel r ange. The
A/ F sensor i s i nst al l ed upst r eam of t he WU- TWC, and
sends si gnal s to t he ECM/ PCM whi c h var i es t he dur at i on
of f uel i nj ect i on accor di ngl y.
HEATER
TERMI NAL S
Bar omet r i c Pr essur e (BARO) S ens or
The BARO sensor i s i nsi de t he ECM/ PCM. It c onver t s
at mospher i c pr essur e i nto a vol t age si gnal that i s used
by t he ECM/ PCM to modi f y t he basi c durat i on of t he f uel
i nj ect i on di sc har ge.
Camshaf t Posi t i on Sens or B
The CMP sensor B det ect s t he posi t i on of t he No. 1
cyl i nder as a r ef er ence f or sequent i al f uel i nj ect i on to
eac h cyl i nder .
TERMI NAL
Cr ankshaf t Posi t i on (CKP) Sens or
The CK P sensor det ect s cr ankshaf t s peed, and i s used by
t he ECM/ PCM to det er mi ne i gni ti on t i mi ng, t i mi ng f or
t he f uel i nj ect i on of each cyl i nder , and engi ne mi sf i r e
det ect i on.
TERMI NAL
11-48
Engi ne Cool ant Temper at ur e (1 CT) Sensor s 1 and 2
ECT sensor s 1 and 2 ar e t emper at ur e dependent
r esi st or s (t her mi st or s). The r esi st ance dec r eases as t he
engi ne cool ant t emper at ur e i nc r eases.
TERMI NAL
7 THERMI STOR
O-RING
Igni t i on Ti mi ng Cont r ol
The ECM/ PCM cont ai ns t he memor y for basi c i gni ti on
t i mi ng at var i ous engi ne speeds and mani f ol d absol ut e
pr essur es. It al so adj ust s t he t i mi ng accor di ng to engi ne
cool ant t emper at ur e and i ntake ai r t emper at ur e.
Inj ect or Ti mi ng and Dur at i on
The ECM/ PCM cont ai ns t he memor y for basi c di sc har ge
durat i on at var i ous engi ne speeds and mani f ol d
pr essur es. The basi c di schar ge dur at i on, after bei ng
read out f r om t he memor y, i s f urt her modi f i ed by si gnal s
sent f rom var i ous sensor s to obt ai n t he f i nal di sc har ge
durat i on.
By moni t ori ng l ong t er m f uel t r i m, t he ECM/ PCM det ect s
long t erm mal f unct i ons in t he f uel syst em and set s
di agnost i c t r oubl e c odes (DTCs) if needed.
Knoc k Sens or
The knock cont rol syst em adj ust s t he i gni t i on t i mi ng to
mi ni mi ze knock.
Mal f unct i on Indi cat or L amp (MIL) Indi cat i on (In r el at i on
t o Readi ness Codes)
The vehi cl e has cer t ai n r eadi ness c odes t hat are part of
t he on-boar d di agnost i cs f or t he emi ssi ons syst ems. If
t he vehi c l e' s battery has been di sc onnec t ed or gone
dead, if DTCs have been c l ear ed, or if t he ECM/ PCM has
been r eset , t hese c odes ar e r eset . In s ome st at es, part of
t he emi ssi ons t est i ng i s to make sur e t hese c odes ar e set
t o compl et e. If all of t hem ar e not set to compl et e, t he
vehi c l e may f ai l t he t est , or t he t est cannot be f i ni shed.
To check if t he r eadi ness c odes ar e set to compl et e, t urn
t he i gni ti on swi t c h to ON (II), but do not st art t he engi ne.
The MIL wi l l c ome on for 1520 sec onds. If it t hen goes
off, t he r eadi ness c odes ar e compl et e. If it f l ashes f i ve
t i mes, one or mor e r eadi ness c odes ar e not compl et e.
To set eac h c ode, dri ve t he vehi c l e or run t he engi ne as
desc r i bed i n t he pr ocedur es (see page 11-65).
(cont' d)
11-49
Mani f ol d Absol ut e Pr essur e (WAP) Sens or
The MAP sensor conver t s mani f ol d absol ut e pr essur es
Into el ect r i cal si gnal s that ar e sent to t he ECM/ PCM.
TERMINAL
O-RING
Mas s Ai r Fl ow (MAF) Sensor / Int ake Ai r Temper at ur e
(1AT) Sens or
The mas s ai r f l ow (MAF) sensor /i nt ake ai r t emper at ur e
(IAT) sensor cont ai ns a hot wi r e sensor , a col d wi r e
sensor and a t her mi st or . It i s in t he i ntake ai r passage.
The r esi st anc e of t he hot wi r e sensor , t he col d wor e
sensor and t he t her mi st or c hanges due to i ntake ai r
t emper at ur e and ai r f l ow. The cont rol ci rcui t i n t he MAF
sensor cont r ol s t he cur r ent to keep t he hot wi r e at a set
t emper at ur e. The cur r ent i s conver t ed to vol t age i n t he
cont rol ci r cui t , t hen output to t he ECM/ PCM.
O-RING
COLD WIRE
SENSOR
U ^ IAT S E NS OR
(THERMISTOR)
Out put Shaf t (Count er shaf t ) Speed Sens or
Thi s sensor det ect s count er shaf t speed.
TERMINAL
O-RINGS
M/T model shown
Secondary Heat ed Oxygen Sensor (Secondary H02S)
The sec ondar y H02S det ect s t he oxygen cont ent in t he
exhaust gas downst r eam of t he war m up t hree way
cat al yt i c conver t er (WU-TWC), and s ends si gnal s to t he
ECM/ PCM. To st abi l i ze i ts out put , t he sensor has an
i nt ernal heat er. The ECM/ PCM c ompar es t he H02S
out put wi t h t he A/ F sensor output to det er mi ne cat al yst
ef f i ci ency. A sec ondar y H02S i s i nst al l ed downst r eam of
t he WU-TWC.
Zi RCONIA
E L t ME NT HEATER
S E NS OR
TERMI NAL S
HEATER
TERMI NAL S
11-50
Electronic Throt t l e Cont r ol System
Thr ot t l e Body
The throttle i s el ect r oni cal l y cont r ol l ed. Ref er to t he
syst em di agr am to see a f unct i onal l ayout of the syst em.
Idle cont r ol : When t he engi ne i s i dl i ng, t he ECM/ PCM
cont r ol s t he throttle act uat or to mai nt ai n t he proper i dle
speed accor di ng to engi ne l oads.
Accel er at i on cont r ol : When t he accel er at or pedal i s
pr essed, t he ECM/ PCM opens t he throttle val ve based on
t he accel er at or pedal posi t i on (APP) sensor si gnal .
Cr ui se cont r ol : The ECM/ PCM cont r ol s t he throttle
act uat or to mai nt ai n t he set speed when t he cr ui se
cont rol i s oper at i ng. The throttle act uat or t akes t he pl ace
of t he c r ui se cont rol act uat or.
Ac c el er at or Pedal Posi t i on (APP) S ens or
As t he accel er at or pedal posi t i on c hanges, t he sensor
var i es t he si gnal vol t age to t he ECM/ PCM whi c h t hen
cont r ol s t he throttle posi t i on.
The throttle body i s a si ngl e-bar r el si de draft t ype. The
l ower porti on of t he throttle val ve i s heat ed by engi ne
cool ant f r om t he cyl i nder head to pr event i ci ng of the
throttle pl at e.
(cont ' d)
11-51
Electronic Thr ot t l e Cont r ol System Diagram
The el ect r oni c throttle cont rol syst em c onsi st s of t he throttle act uat or , throttle posi t i on (TP) sensor A/ B, accel er at or
pedal posi t i on (APP) sensor A/ B, t he el ect r oni c throttle cont rol syst em (ETCS) cont rol rel ay, and t he ECM/ PCM.
TP SENSOR A
T P S E NS ORB
THROTTLE
ACTUATOR
11-52
M
\ A !
VTEC/ VTC
The i-VTEC syst em has a variable val ve t i mi ng cont rol (VTC) mechanism on t he i ntake camshaft i n addi t i on to t he
usual VTEC.
Thi s syst em improves f uel efficiency and reduces exhaust emissions at all l evel s of engi ne speed, vehicle speed, and
engine load.
The VTEC system changes the intake valve lift and timing by using more than one cam profile.
PZEV model: The VTEC system pauses one side of the exhaust valves in addition to changing the intake valve lift and
timing.
The VTC system changes the phase of the intake camshaft via oil pressure. It changes the intake valve timing
continuously.
HIGH
TNGINE
L OAD
LOW
HIGH S PE E D CAM
TORQUE CURVE
S I
Y '

LOW- ENGI NE S PE E D HIGH
Dri vi ng Condi t i on VTC Cont r ol Descr i pt i on
Light-load Base Position For stable combustion the cam angle is retarded, and
reduces the entry of exhaust gas into the cylinder.
Medium/high-load Advance Control Cam phase angle is controlled to optimize valve
timing, improving fuel efficiency and reducing
emissions.
(D High speed
Advance-Base Position To reduce pumping loss, the intake valve is closed
quickly. This gives the air/fuel mixture a charging
effect that helps to maximize engine power.
(cont'd)
11-53
VTC S y s t em
The VTC syst em makes cont i nuous i ntake val ve t i mi ng c hanges based on oper at i ng condi t i ons.
Intake val ve t i mi ng i s opt i mi zed t o al l ow t he engi ne to pr oduce maxi mum power .
Cam angl e i s advanc ed to obt ai n t he EGR effect and r educ e pumpi ng l oss. The i ntake val ve i s c l osed qui ckl y to r educe
t he ent ry of t he ai r/f uel mi xt ure i nto t he i ntake port and i mpr ove t he char gi ng effect.
The syst em r educ es t he c am advanc e at i dl e, st abi l i zes c ombust i on, and r educ es engi ne speed.
If a mal f unct i on oc c ur s, t he VTC syst em cont rol i s di sabl ed and t he val ve t i mi ng i s f i xed at t he f ul l y ret arded posi t i on.
TDC
11-54
VTC Syst em Di agr am
The VTC oi l cont rol sol enoi d val ve cont r ol s oi l pr essur e to t he advanc e chamber /r et ar d c hamber of t he VTC act uat or
accor di ng to a si gnal f r om t he ECM/ PCM. When t he VTC act uat or vanes rotate to t he advanc e or ret ard posi t i on, t he
i ntake camshaf t t i mi ng i s c hanged.
CMP sensor A det ect s t he i ntake c amshaf t angl e and sends t he i nf ormat i on to t he ECM/ PCM. The ECM/ PCM cont r ol s t he
VTC oi l cont rol sol enoi d val ve as t he i ntake c amshaf t angl e c hanges.
VANE ROTATION
F rom
OIL PUMP
(cont' d)
11-55
VTEC Sy s t em
Int ake val ve si de (Al l model s)
The VTE C syst em c hanges t he c am profi le to c or r espond to engi ne speed. It maxi mi zes torque at l ow engi ne speed
and out put at hi gh engi ne speed.
The l ow lift c am i s used at l ow engi ne s peeds , and t he hi gh lift c am i s used at hi gh engi ne speeds.
The r ocker ar m oi l cont rol sol enoi d (rocker ar m oi l cont rol sol enoi d A) swi t c hes t he i ntake val ve si de of t he VTEC
syst em on and off; t he sol enoi d i s cont r ol l ed by t he ECM/ PCM.
The r ocker ar m oi l pr essur e swi t c h (rocker ar m oi l pr essur e swi t c h A) det ect s VTEC syst em oi l pr essur e (i ntake val ve
si de) and sends t hi s i nf ormat i on to t he ECM/ PCM.
Exhaust val ve si de (PZEV model )
The VTEC syst em swi t c hes t he oper at i on of one of t he exhaust val ves t o pause and lift t he val ve.
At i dl e and l ow engi ne s peed, one si de of t he exhaust val ves i s paused, and t he val ve lifts when t he engi ne speed goes
up.
The syst em r educ es hydr oc ar bons (HC) exhaust emi ssi ons at l ow engi ne speed.
Rocker ar m oi l cont rol sol enoi d B swi t c hes t he exhaust val ve si de of t he VTEC syst em on and off; t he sol enoi d i s
cont r ol l ed by t he PCM.
Rocker ar m oi l pr essur e swi t c h B det ect s t he VTEC syst em oi l pr essur e (exhaust val ve si de), and s ends t hi s
i nf ormat i on to t he PCM.
Al l model s exc ept PZEV (Int ake val ve VTEC)
ENGI NE S PE E D ROCK ER ARM OIL CONTROL
SOL ENOI D
ROCK ER ARM OIL PRE S S URE
SWI TCH
INTAK E VAL VE LIFT
L OW OFF ON L OW
HIGH ON OFF HIGH
11-56
PZEV model (Int ake and exhaust val ve VTEC)
ENGINE ROCK ER ARM ROCK ER ARM INTAKE ROCK ER ARM ROCK ER ARM EXHAUS T
-. S PEED OIL CONTROL OIL PRE S S URE VAL VE LIFT - OIL CONTROL OIL PRE S S URE VAL VE 2
SOL ENOI D A SWITCH A SOL ENOI D B SWITCH B OPERATION
IDLE-LOW
OFF
ON
LOW
OFF ON PAUS E
MID
OFF
ON
LOW
ON OFF LIFT
HIGH ON OFF HIGH ON OFF LIFT
I D L E - L OW ENGI NE S PEED ROCK ER ARM
OIL CONTROL VA L VE
(PZEV model )
(cont' d)
11-57
VTEC S f st em Oper at i on
Intake val ve s i de
At l ow engi ne s peed , t he r oc ker ar m oi l cont r ol sol enoi d (r ocker ar m oi l cont r ol sol enoi d A) i s t ur ned off by t he ECM/ PCM. Oi l pr essur e
f r om t he r ocker ar m oi l cont r ol val ve does not ent er t he i nt ake r ocker shaf t . Eac h i nt ake r oc ker ar m i s separ at ed by a r et ur n spr i ng and
li fted by eac h l ow lift c am l obe.
L OW LIFT CAM L OBE
L OW LIFT CAM L OBE
INTAK E
ROCK ER S HAFT
VTE C SWI TCHI NG
PI STON
VA L VE
I NTAK E PRIMARY
ROCK ER ARM
INTAK E MID ROCK ER ARM
INTAK E
S ECONDARY
ROCK ER ARM
At hi gh engi ne s peed , t he r oc ker ar m oi l cont r ol sol enoi d (r ocker ar m oil cont r ol sol enoi d A) i s t ur ned on by t he ECM/ PCM. Oi l
pr essur e f r om t he r ocker ar m cont r ol sol enoi d ent er s t he pr i mar y i nt ake r ocker ar m vi a t he i nt ake r ocker shaf t , and it mov es t he VTE C
swi t c hi ng pi st on i n t he r ocker ar m.
Thi s c aus es t he VTE C swi t c hi ng pi st on t o sl i de i nto t he i nt ake mi d r ocker ar m and t he i nt ake s ec ondar y r ocker ar m, l ocki ng t he r ocker
ar ms t oget her . Bot h i nt ake r oc ker ar ms ar e li fted by t he hi gh lift c am l obe.
HIGH LIFT CAM L OBE
INTAK E
ROCK ER S HAFT
ROCK ER ARM
OIL CONTROL
S OL ENOI D (A)
ECM/ PCM
Fr om
VTE C SWI TCHI NG f \ OIL PUMP
PI STON / INTAK E
I NTAK E PRIMARY ^SY.
ROCK ER ARM ROCK ER ARM
I NTAK E MID ROCK ER ARM
VA L VE
11-58
Ex haus t v al v e si de (PZEV model )
At idle and low engine speed, rocker arm oil control solenoid B is turned off by the PCM. Oil pressure from the rocker arm oil control
valve does not enter the exhaust rocker shaft. Each exhaust rocker arm is separated by a return spring, and lifted by each cam lobe.
The exhaust primary rocker arm is moved by the normal lift cam lobe (valve active), and the exhaust secondary rocker arm is moved
by the no lift cam lobe (valve pause).
NO LIFT CAM LOBE
( VAL VE PAUS E) NORMAL Lif-T CAM LOBE
VAL VE
EXHAUS T S ECONDARY VTE C SWI TCHI NG
ROCK ER ARM PI STON
When the engine speed reaches 2,500 rpm or more, rocker arm oil control solenoid B is turned on by the PCM. Oil pressure from the
rocker arm oil control solenoid enters the primary exhaust rocker arm via the exhaust rocker shaft, and it moves the VTEC switching
piston in the rocker arm. This causes the VTEC switching piston to slide into the exhaust secondary rocker arm, locking the exhaust
rocker arms together. Both exhaust rocker arms are moved by the normal lift cam lobe (valve active).
11-59
Idle Cont r ol S f st em
When t he engi ne i s c ol d, if t he A/ C c ompr essor i s on, t he
t r ansmi ssi on i s in gear , t he brake pedal i s pr es s ed, t he
power st eer i ng l oad i s hi gh, or t he al t ernat or i s c har gi ng,
t he ECM/ PCM cont r ol s cur r ent to t he throttle act uat or to
mai nt ai n t he cor r ect i dle speed.
Br ake Pedal Posi t i on S wi t c h
The brake pedal posi t i on swi t ch si gnal s t he ECM/ PCM
when t he brake pedal i s pr essed.
Power St eer i ng Pr essur e (PSP) S wi t c h
The PSP swi t c h si gnal s t he ECM/ PCM when t he power
st eer i ng l oad i s hi gh.
Fuel Suppl f S f st em
Fuel Cut of f Cont r ol
Dur i ng decel er at i on wi t h t he throttle val ve c l osed,
cur r ent to t he i nj ect ors i s cut off to i mpr ove f uel
ec onomy at engi ne speeds over 850 rpm (A/T) or
1,000 rpm (M/T). Fuel cutoff al so oc c ur s when t he engi ne
speed exc eeds 7,000 r pm (LX) or 7,300 r pm (EX),
r egar dl ess of t he posi t i on of t he throttle val ve, to protect
t he engi ne f r om over -r evvi ng. When t he vehi c l e i s
st opped, t he ECM/ PCM cut s t he f uel at engi ne speeds
over 5,000 rpm (A/T), 7,000 rpm (' 08-09 model s L X M/T),
or 7,100 rpm (' 08-09 model s EX M/T), or 4,000 rpm ('10
model M/T). The engi ne speed of f uel cut i s l ower on a
col d engi ne.
Fuel Pump Cont r ol
When t he i gni ti on swi t c h i s t ur ned to ON (II), t he
ECM/ PCM gr ounds PGM-FI mai n rel ay 2 (FUEL PUMP)
whi c h f eeds cur r ent to t he f uel pump f or 2 sec onds to
pr essur i ze t he f uel syst em. When t he engi ne st ar t s, t he
ECM/ PCM gr ounds PGM-FI mai n rel ay 2 (FUEL PUMP)
and f eeds cur r ent to t he f uel pump. When t he engi ne i s
not runni ng and t he i gni ti on i s ON (II), t he ECM/ PCM cut s
gr ound to PGM-FI mai n rel ay 2 (FUEL PUMP) whi c h cut s
cur r ent to t he f uel pump.
PGM-FI Mai n Rel ays 1 and 2
PGM-FI mai n rel ay 1i s ener gi zed whenever t he i gni ti on
swi t c h i s ON (II) to suppl y battery vol t age to t he
ECM/ PCM, power to t he i nj ect or s, and power for PGM-FI
mai n rel ay 2 (FUEL PUMP). PGM-FI mai n rel ay 2 (FUEL
PUMP) i s ener gi zed to suppl y power to t he f uel pump f or
2 sec onds when t he i gni ti on swi t ch i s t ur ned to ON (II),
and when t he engi ne i s cr anki ng or r unni ng.
11-60
Cat al yt i c Conver t er Sy s t em
War m Up Thr ee Way Cat al yt i c Conver t er (WU-TWC)
and Under -f l oor Thr ee Way Cat al yt i c Conver t er
(Under -f l oor TWC)
The WU-TWC/Under -f l oor TWC conver t s hydr ocar bons
(HQ, c ar bon monoxi de (CO), and oxi des of ni t rogen
(NOx) in t he exhaust gas to car bon di oxi de ( C0
2
) ,
ni t rogen (N
2
), and wat er vapor .
WU-TWC (ATTACHED TO THE CYL INDER HEAD)
UNDER-FL OOR TWC
HOUSI NG
FRONT OF
VEHI CL E
UNDER-FL OOR
THREE WAY
CATAL YS T
Posi t i ve Cr ankc ase Vent i l at i on (PCV) Sy s t em
The PCV val ve pr event s bl ow-by gas s es f r om esc api ng
i nto t he at mospher e by vent i ng t hem i nto t he i ntake
mani f ol d.
11-61
Evapor at i ve Emi ssi on (EVAP) Cont rol Sy s t em
Ref er to t he syst em di agr am to see a f unct i onal l ayout of
t he syst em.
EVAP Cani st er
The EVAP c ani st er t empor ar i l y st or es f uel vapor f r om
t he f uel tank unti l it c an be pur ged back into t he engi ne
and bur ned.
EVAP Cani st er Pur ge Val ve
When t he engi ne cool ant t emper at ur e i s bel ow 131 F
(55 C), t he ECM/ PCM t ur ns off t he EVAP cani st er pur ge
val ve whi c h c ut s vac uum to t he EVAP cani st er .
OUT
TERMINAL COIL
f
EN
Fuel Tank Pr essur e (FTP) S ens or
The FTP sensor conver t s f uel t ank absol ut e pr essur e i nto
an el ect r i cal i nput to t he ECM/ PCM.
S E NS OR UNIT
EVAP Cani st er Vent S hut Val ve
The EVAP cani st er vent shut val ve i s on t he EVAP
cani st er .
The EVAP cani st er vent shut val ve cont r ol s t he vent i ng
of t he EVAP cani st er .
O-RING VA L VE O-RING
11-62
Evapor at i ve Emi ssi on (EVAP) Cont r ol Di agr am
The EVAP cont r ol s mi ni mi ze t he amount of f uel vapor esc api ng to t he at mospher e. Vapor f r om t he f uel t ank i s
t empor ar i l y st or ed in t he EVAP cani st er unti l it c an be pur ged f r om t he cani st er i nto t he engi ne and bur ned.
The EVAP c ani st er i s pur ged by dr awi ng f r esh ai r t hr ough it and into a port on t he i ntake mani f ol d.
The purgi ng vac uum i s cont rol l ed by t he EVAP cani st er pur ge val ve, whi c h oper at es whenever engi ne cool ant
t emper at ur e i s above 131 F (55 C).
(cont' d)
11-63
Sf stem Description (cont' d)
Fuel Cap War ni ng Message
The ECM/ PCM det ect s a l oose or mi ssi ng f uel fi ll c ap as
an evapor at i ve syst em l eak, and al ert s t he dr i ver by
showi ng a war ni ng message i n t he gauge di spl ay.
The f i rst t i me a l eak i s det ect ed, a CHECK FUEL CAP
message appear s on t he gauge di spl ay (A). To scr ol l to
anot her mes s age, pr ess t he sel ect /r eset but t on. The
CHECK FUEL CAP message appear s eac h t i me you
rest art t he engi ne unti l t he syst em t ur ns t he mes s age
off. Tur n t he engi ne off, t hen r epl ace or t i ght en t he f uel
fi ll c ap unti l it cl i cks at l east onc e.
Shows CHECK F UEL CAP
in the gauge display.
To make t he message go off (wi t h t he HDS);
1. Ti ght en t he f uel fi ll c ap unti l it cl i cks.
2. Cl ear t he Pendi ng DTC wi t h t he HDS.
3. Veri f y t her e i s no l eak by doi ng t he EVAP FUNCTION
TE S T i n t he INSPECTION MENU wi t h t he HDS.
To make t he message go off (wi t hout t he
HDS);
1. Ti ght en t he f uel fi ll c ap unti l it cl i cks.
2. St ar t t he engi ne, t hen t urn t he i gni ti on swi t ch to
L OCK (0).
3. Repeat st ep 2 t wo mor e t i mes.
11-64
How to Set Readiness Codes
Mal f unct i on Indi cat or Lamp (MIL) Indi cat i on
(In rel at i on t o Readi ness Codes)
The vehi cl e has cert ai n r eadi ness c odes t hat ar e part of
t he on-boar d di agnost i cs f or t he emi ssi ons s y s t ems , If
t he vehi c l e' s battery has been di sc onnec t ed or gone
dead, if DTCs have been c l ear ed, or if t he ECM/ PCM has
been r eset , t hese r eadi ness c odes ar e r eset to
i ncompl et e. In s ome st at es, part of t he emi ssi ons t est i ng
i s to make sur e t hese c odes ar e set to compl et e. If all of
t hem ar e not set to compl et e, t he vehi cl e may fai l t he
emi ssi on t est , or t he t est cannot be f i ni shed.
To check if t he r eadi ness c odes ar e set to compl et e, t urn
t he i gni ti on swi t ch to ON (II), but do not st art t he engi ne.
The MIL c omes on f or 1520 sec onds. If it t hen goes off,
t he r eadi ness c odes ar e set to compl et e. If it f l ashes f i ve
t i mes, one or mor e r eadi ness c odes ar e not set to
compl et e. To set r eadi ness c odes f r om i ncompl et e to
compl et e, do t he pr ocedur e f or t he appropri at e c ode.
To check t he st at us of a speci f i c DTC s y s t em, c hec k t he
OBD st at us i n t he DTC MENU wi t h t he HDS (see page
11-8). Thi s sc r een di spl ays t he DTC, t he cur r ent dat a li st
of t he enabl e cr i t er i a, and t he st at us of t he r eadi ness
t est i ng.
Cat al yt i c Conver t er Moni t or and Readi ness
Code
NOTE:
Duri ng t he pr oc edur e, do not t urn t he i gni ti on swi t c h
to ACC (I) or L OCK (0).
Al l r eadi ness c odes ar e cl ear ed when t he battery i s
di sc onnec t ed, if DTCs have been c l ear ed, or if t he
ECM/ PCM i s r eset wi t h t he HDS.
L ow ambi ent t emper at ur es or exc essi ve st op-and-go
traffi c may i nc r ease t he dri ve t i me needed to swi t ch
t he r eadi ness c ode f r om i ncompl et e to compl et e.
The r eadi ness c ode wi l l not swi t c h to compl et e unti l all
t he enabl e cri t eri a ar e met .
If a fault i n t he sec ondar y H02S syst em c aused t he
MIL to c ome on, t he r eadi ness c ode cannot be set to
compl et e unti l you cor r ect t he fault.
Enabl e Cr i t er i a
ECT S ENS OR 1 at 158 F (70 C) or mor e.
IAT S ENS OR at 20 F ( - 7 C) or mor e.
Vehi cl e speed above 25 mph (40 km/h).
Pr ocedur e
1. Connec t t he HDS t o t he vehi c l e' s dat a link connect or
(DLC), and bri ng up t he READI NES S CODEs sc r een f or
Cat al yst i n t he DTCs MENU.
2. St ar t t he engi ne.
3. Test -dr i ve t he vehi c l e under st op-and-go condi t i ons
wi t h shor t per i ods of st eady c r ui se. After about
5 mi l es (8 km), t he r eadi ness c ode shoul d swi t c h to
compl et e.
4. If t he r eadi ness c ode i s sti ll not set to compl et e, check
f or a Pendi ng DTC wi t h t he HDS. If t here i s no DTC,
one or mor e of t he enabl e cri t eri a wer e probabl y not
met ; repeat t he pr ocedur e.
(cont' d)
11-65
How to Set Readiness Codes (cont'd)
Evapor at i ve Emi ssi on (EVAP) Cont r ol Sy s t em
Moni t or and Readi ness Code
NOTE: AH r eadi ness c odes ar e c l ear ed when t he battery
i s di sc onnec t ed, if DTCs have been c l ear ed, or if t he
ECM/ PCM i s r eset wi t h t he HDS.
Bat t ery vol t age i s mor e t han 10.5 V.
Engi ne at i dl e.
ECT S ENS OR 1 and S ENS OR 2 bet ween 176 F (80 C)
and 212 F (100 C).
MAP sensor l ess t han 46.6 kPa (14 i nHg, 350 mmHg).
Vehi cl e speed 0 mph (0 km/h).
IAT S ENS OR bet ween 32 F (0 C) and 212 F (100 C).
FVc^ edi i r e
1. Connec t t he HDS to t he DL C.
2. St art t he engi ne.
3. Sel ec t EVAP TE S T in t he INSPECTION MENU wi t h t he
HDS, t hen sel ect t he FUNCTION TE S T in t he EVAP
TE S T MENU.
If t he r esul t i s nor mal , r eadi ness i s compl et e.
If t he resul t i s not nor mal , go to t he next st ep.
4. Chec k f or a Pendi ng DTC. If t her e i s no DTC, one or
mor e of t he enabl e cri t eri a wer e pr obabl y not met ;
repeat t he pr ocedur e.
Ai r Fuel Rat i o (A/F) Sensor Moni t or and
Readi ness Code
NOTE:
Dur i ng t he pr ocedur e, do not t urn t he i gni ti on swi t ch
to ACC (I) or L OCK (0).
Al l r eadi ness c odes are cl ear ed when t he battery i s
di sc onnec t ed, if DTCs have been c l ear ed, or if t he
ECM/ PCM i s r eset wi th t he HDS.
ECT S ENS OR 1 at 140 F (60 C) or mor e.
Pr ocedur e
2. Test -dr i ve t he vehi cl e under st op-and-go condi t i ons
wi t h shor t per i ods of st eady c r ui se. Duri ng t he dr i ve,
decel er at e (wi th t he throttle f ul l y cl osed) for
5 sec onds. After about 3.5 mi l es (5.6 km), t he
r eadi ness c ode shoul d swi t ch f rom i ncompl et e to
compl et e.
3. Chec k t he r eadi ness c odes sc r een f or t he AIR FUEL
RATIO (A/F) S ENS OR in t he DTCs MENU wi t h t he
HDS.
If t he sc r een s hows compl et e, r eadi ness i s
compl et e.
If t he sc r een s hows not compl et e, go to t he next
st ep.
4. Chec k for a Pendi ng DTC. If t her e i s no DTC, t he
enabl e cri t eri a was probabl y not met . Sel ec t t he DATA
L I S T MENU. Chec k t he ECT S ENS OR 1 in t he AL L
DATA L IST wi t h t he HDS. If t he ECT S ENS OR 1 i s l ess
t han 140 F (60 C), run t he engi ne unti l it i s mor e t han
140 F (60 C), t hen repeat t he pr ocedur e.
11-66
Ai r Fuel Rat i o (A/F) Sensor Heat er Moni t or
Readi ness Code
NOTE: Al l r eadi ness c odes ar e cl ear ed when t he bat t ery
i s di sc onnec t ed, if DTCs have been c l ear ed, or if t he
ECM/ PCM i s r eset wi t h t he HDS,
Pr ocedur e
1. St ar t t he engi ne, and let it i dle f or 1 mi nut e. The
r eadi ness c ode shoul d swi t c h f r om Incompl et e to
compl et e.
2. If t he r eadi ness c ode i s sti ll not set to compl et e, c hec k
f or a Pendi ng DTC. If t her e i s no DTC, repeat t he
pr ocedur e.
Mi sf i re Moni t or and Readi ness Code
m Thi s r eadi ness code Is al ways set to avai l abl e bec ause
mi sf i r i ng i s cont i nuousl y moni t or ed.
Moni t ori ng pauses, and t he mi sf i r e count er r eset s, If
t he vehi c l e Is dr i ven over a r ough r oad.
Moni t ori ng al so pauses, and t he mi sf i r e count er hol ds
at Its cur r ent val ue, If t he throttle posi t i on c hanges
mor e t han a pr edet er mi ned val ue, or If dr i vi ng
condi t i ons f al l out si de t he r ange of any rel at ed enabl e
cr i t er i a.
Fuel S f st em Moni t or and Readi ness Code
Thi s r eadi ness c ode Is al ways set to avai l abl e bec ause
t he f uel syst em i s cont i nuousl y moni t or ed dur i ng
c l osed l oop oper at i on.
Moni t ori ng pauses when t he cat al yt i c conver t er , EVAP
cont rol s y s t em, and A/ F sensor moni t or s ar e act i ve.
Moni t ori ng al so pauses when any rel at ed enabl e
cri t eri a ar e not bei ng met . Moni t ori ng r esumes when
t he enabl e cri t eri a i s agai n bei ng met .
Compr ehensi ve Component Moni t or and
Readi ness Code
Thi s r eadi ness c ode i s al ways set to avai l abl e bec ause
t he c ompr ehensi ve component moni t or i s cont i nuousl y
r unni ng whenever t he engi ne i s cr anki ng or r unni ng.
PGM-FI S f st em
IGNITION COILS
CAMSHAFT POSITION (CMP)
SENSOR B (EXHAUST SIDE)
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE
(ECT) SENSOR 1
PGM-FI MAIN RELAY 1
PGM-FI SUBRELAY
IGNITION COIL RELAY
ELECTRICAL LOAD
DETECTOR (ELD)
MASS AIR FLOW (MAF)
SENSOR/INTAKE AIR
TEMPERATURE (IAT)
SENSOR
OUTPUT SHAFT
(COUNTERSHAFT)
SPEED SENSOR (M/T)
ENGINE CONTROL
MODULE (ECM)/
POWERTRAIN CONTROL
MODULE (PCM)
Update, page 11-203
Substitution, page 11-7
Replacement, page 11 -204
INJECTORS
KNOCKSENSOR
CRANKSHAFT POSITION (CKP)
SENSOR
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE
(ECT) SENSOR 2
11-68
SECONDARY HEATED OXYGEN
SENSOR (SECONDARY H02S)
(SENSOR 2)
(FUEL PUMP) DATA LINK CONNECTOR (DLC)
Gener al Tr oubl eshoot i ng Inf or mat i on, page 11-3
Ci r cui t Tr oubl eshoot i ng, page 11-181
11-69
PGM-FI S f st em
DTC Troubleshooting
DTC P0101: MAF Sensor Ci rcui t
Range/Per f or mance Probl em
NOTE:
Bef or e you t r oubl eshoot , r ecor d all f r eeze dat a and
any on-boar d snapshot , and r evi ew t he gener al
t r oubl eshoot i ng i nf ormat i on (see page 11-3).
If DTC P1128, P1129, P2228, and/or P2229 ar e st or ed at
t he s ame t i me as DTC P0101, t r oubl eshoot t hose DTCs
f i rst , t hen r echeck f or DTC P0101.
1. Chec k f or poor c onnec t i ons or damage to t hese par t s:
PCV hose
Intake ai r duct
Ai r c l eaner
Pur ge (PCS) li ne
w Cr ake boost er
Br ake boost er hose
Are t he part s OK?
NO-Repai r or r epl ace t he damaged par t (s), t hen go t o
st ep 15.
2. Chec k f or damage or l ooseness at t he ai r duct i n t he
ai r cl eaner .
Is it OK?
NO-Rec onnec t or r epl ace t he ai r duct i n t he ai r
c l eaner , t hen go to st ep 15.
3. Chec k f or a di rty ai r c l eaner el ement .
Is it dirt y?
YES - Repl ac e t he ai r c l eaner el ement (see page
11 -333), t hen go to st ep 15.
NO- Go to st ep 4.
6. Chec k t he MAF S ENS OR in t he DATA L I S T wi t h t he
HDS.
7 St ar t t he engi ne.
8. Var y t he engi ne speed bet ween 2,000 r pm and
3,000 r pm.
9. Chec k t he MAF S ENS OR i n t he DATA L I ST wi t h t he
HDS.
Does t he reading change?
NO- Go to st ep 13.
10. Hol d t he engi ne speed at 3,000 rpm wi t hout l oad (A/T
i n P or N, M/T i n neut ral ) unti l t he radi at or f an c omes
on, t hen let it i dl e.
11. Test -dr i ve t he vehi c l e f or sever al mi nut es i n t he r ange
of t hese r ecor ded f r eeze dat a par amet er s:
ENGINE S PEED
v s s
MAP S ENS OR
MAF S ENS OR
12. Moni t or t he OBD S TATUS f or DTC P0101 i n t he DTCs
MENU wi t h t he HDS.
Does t he screen indicat e FAILED?
NO-l f t he sc r een i ndi cat es PAS S ED, i ntermi ttent
f ai l ur e, t he syst em i s OK at t hi s t i me. Chec k f or poor
c onnec t i ons or l oose t er mi nal s at t he MAF sensor /IAT
sensor and t he ECM/ PCM. If t he sc r een i ndi cat es NOT
COMPL ETED, go to st ep 11 and r echeck.
Is t here about 0.2 gm/s or 0.5 V?
NO- Go to st ep 13.
11-70
14. Repl ace t he MAF sensor /IAT sensor (see page
11-199).
11-293).
of t hese r ecor ded f reeze dat a par amet er s:
ENGINE S PE E D
v s s
MAP S ENS OR
MAF S ENS OR
19. Chec k f or Pendi ng or Conf i r med DTCs wi t h t he HDS.
Is DTC P0101 indicat ed?
YE S - Ch ec k f or poor connect i ons or l oose t er mi nal s at
t he MAF sensor /IAT sensor and t he ECM/ PCM, t hen
go to st ep 1.
NO- Go to st ep 20.
Does t he screen indicat e PASSED?
YES-Tr oubl eshoot i ng i s compl et e. If any ot her
Pendi ng or Conf i r med DTCs wer e i ndi cat ed i n st ep 19,
go to t he i ndi cat ed DTCs t r oubl es hoot i ng.
NO-l f t he sc r een i ndi cat es FAIL ED, check f or poor
c onnec t i ons or l oose t er mi nal s at t he MAF sensor /IAT
sensor and t he ECM/ PCM, t hen go to st ep 1. If t he
sc r een i ndi cat es NOT COMPL ETED, go to st ep 18.
DTC P0102: MAF Sensor Ci rcui t Low Vol t age
NOTE: Bef ore you t r oubl eshoot , r ecor d all f r eeze dat a
and any on-boar d snapshot , and r evi ew t he gener al
1. Tur n t he i gni t i on swi t c h to ON (II), and wai t 2 sec onds.
2. Check t he MAF S ENS OR i n t he DATA L I ST wi t h t he
HDS.
Is about 0 gm/s, or0.1 V or less indicat ed?
NO-l nt er mi t t ent f ai l ur e, t he syst em i s OK at t hi s t i me.
Chec k f or poor c onnec t i ons or l oose t er mi nal s at t he
MAF sensor /IAT sensor and t he E CM/ PCM.
4. Di sconnect t he MAF sensor /IAT sensor 5P connect or .
6. Measur e t he vol t age bet ween MAF sensor /IAT sensor
5P connect or t er mi nal No. 3 and body gr ound.
MAF S E NS OR/ I AT S E NS OR 5P CONNECTOR
1 2 3 4 5
IGP ( YEL / BL K )
Is t here bat t ery volt age?
NO-Repai r open i n t he wi r e bet ween PGM-FI mai n
rel ay 1 and t he MAF sensor /IAT sensor , t hen go to
st ep 19.
7. Tur n t he i gni t i on swi t ch to L OCK (0).
(cont' d)
11-71
PGM-FI S f st em
DTC Troubl eshoot i ng (cont'd)
8. Measur e t he r esi st anc e bet ween MAF sensor /IAT
sensor 5P connect or t er mi nal No. 1 and body gr ound.
V G + (RED/BLK)
Is t here 190-210 kQ?
NO- Go to st ep 9.
iLh H^ l ^ W
l
7
t
i
T^ ?
f 11 12 13 14[ 15 16 17| 18 1 9 t / | 2 1 22 23 24 > < 25
2 9 J X 31 J 32| 33| 34| 35| 36
40 \ y\ X\ 43 A 45146J47148p1
27 28
38j7
VG+ ( RED/ BL K )
Is t here cont inuit y?
YES - Repai r shor t i n t he wi r e bet ween t he ECM/ PCM
(B31) and t he MAF sensor / IAT sensor , t hen go to st ep
20.
NO- Go to st ep 12.
12. Chec k f or cont i nui t y bet ween MAF sensor /IAT sensor
5P connect or t er mi nal No. 1 and ECM/ PCM connect or
t er mi nal B31.
MAF S E NS OR/ I A T S E NS OR 5P CONNECTOR
1 2 3 4 5
V G + ( RED/ BL K )
j i i y
9 | 1 0 | |
11 12 13 16 1 71 8 19
/
21
I
22 23 24
X
25
><
26 27 28
I
29
/
31 3 2 3 3 34 3 5 3 6
/
38
/
I
| 4 0 | /
1431/| 45146147
4 8 | / |
V G + ( RED/ BL K )
NO-Repai r open i n t he wi r e bet ween t he ECM/ PCM
(B31) and t he MAF sensor /IAT sensor , t hen go to st ep
20.
13. Subst i t ut e a known-good MAF sensor /IAT sensor (see
page 11-199).
14. Rec onnec t all c onnec t or s.
16. Cl ear t he DTC wi t h t he HDS.
17. St ar t t he engi ne. Hold t he engi ne speed at 2,000 r pm
wi t hout l oad (A/T i n P or N, M/T i n neut ral ).
YES -Rei ns t al l t he ori gi nal MAF sensor /IAT sensor ,
t hen go to st ep 26.
NO-Repl ac e t he ori gi nal MAF sensor /IAT sensor (see
page 11-199), t hen go to st ep 19.
11-72
19. Tur n t he Igni ti on swi t ch to L OCK (0).
20. Rec onnec t ai l c onnec t or s.
11-293).
24. Check for Pendi ng or Conf i r med DTCs wi t h t he HDS.
YE S - Ch ec k for poor connect i ons or l oose t er mi nal s at
go t o st ep 1.
NO-Tr oubl eshoot i ng i s compl et e. If any ot her
Tempor ar y DTCs or DTCs ar e i ndi cat ed, go to t he
i ndi cat ed DTCs t r oubl es hoot i ng.
known-good ECM/ PCM (see page 11-7).
YES - Ch ec k for poor connect i ons or l oose t er mi nal s at
t he MAF sensor /IAT sensor and t he ECM/ PCM. If t he
ECM/ PCM was updat ed, subst i t ut e a known-good
ECM/ PCM (see page 11-7), t hen r echeck. If t he
ECM/ PCM was subst i t ut ed, go to st ep 1.
NO-l f t he ECM/ PCM was updat ed, t r oubl eshoot i ng i s
compl et e. If t he ECM/ PCM was subst i t ut ed, r epl ace
t he ori gi nal ECM/ PCM (see page 11-204). If any ot her
Pendi ng or Conf i r med DTCs ar e i ndi cat ed, go to t he
i ndi cat ed DTCs t r oubl eshoot i ng
DTC P0103: MAF Sensor Circuit High Voltage
NOTE: Bef or e you t r oubl eshoot , r ecor d all f reeze dat a
1. Tur n t he i gni ti on swi t ch to ON (II), and wai t 2 s ec onds .
2. Chec k t he MAF S ENS OR in t he DATA L IST wi t h t he
HDS.
Is about 202 gmls, or 4.89 V or more indicat ed?
Chec k f or poor connect i ons or l oose t er mi nal s at t he
MAF sensor /IAT sensor and t he ECM/ PCM. B
5. Di sc onnec t t he MAF sensor /IAT sensor 5P connect or .
7. Chec k f or cont i nui t y bet ween MAF sensor /IAT sensor
t er mi nal B33.
MAF S ENS OR/ I AT S E NS OR 5P CONNECTOR
1 2 3 4 5
V G - ( BL K / BL U)
\/h\ 4 i y f ^T 8 ) 9 h o i i
1i112| 13| j 4| 15j 16| l l \ 18119 /\211 ' 22 23 24
31 3 2 l 3 3 ] 3 4 l 3 5 | 3 6 l / 38 [ / | ' -J
26
l yVI 43 M45[ 46 J 4 7 ] 481/1
27 28
V G - ( BL K / BL U)
NO-Repai r open in t he wi r e bet ween t he ECM/ PCM
15.
8. Rec onnec t ECM/ PCM connect or B (49P).
(cont' d)
11-73
PGM-FI S f st em
PTC Troubleshooting (cont'd)
9. Connec t MAF sensor /IAT sensor 5P c onnec t or
t er mi nal s No. 1 and No. 2 wi t h a j umper wi r e.
V G + ( RED/ BL K ) V G - ( BL K / BL U)
J UMPER WI RE
12. Chec k f or Pendi ng or Conf i r med DTCs wi t h t he HDS
NO- Go to st ep 13.
14. Repl ac e t he MAF sensor /IAT sensor (see page
11-199).
16. Tur n t he i gni t i on swi t c h t o ON (II).
11-293).
YE S - Ch ec k f or poor c onnec t i ons or l oose t er mi nal s at
t he MAF sensor /IAT s ens or and t he ECM/ PCM, t hen
go t o st ep 1.
NO-Tr oubl eshoot i ng i s c ompl et e. If any ot her
Tempor ar y DTCs or DTCs ar e i ndi cat ed, go t o t he
i ndi cat ed DTCs t r oubl es hoot i ng. !
YE S - Ch ec k for poor c onnec t i ons or l oose t er mi nal s at
ECM/ PCM (see page 11 -7), t hen r echeck. If t he
c ompl et e. If t he ECM/ PCM was subst i t ut ed, r epl ace
t he or i gi nal ECM/ PCM (see page 11-204). If any ot her
11-74
DTC P0107: MAP Sensor Ci rcui t Low Vol t age
NOTE: Bef ore you t r oubl eshoot r ecor d all f reeze dat a
2. Chec k t he MAP S ENS OR in t he DATA L I ST wi t h t he
HDS.
Is about 3 kPa (1.0 inHg, 26 mmHg), or 0.23 V or less
indicat ed?
MAP sensor and t he ECM/ PCM. H
4. Di sconnect t he MAP sensor 3P connect or .
HDS.
indicat ed?
NO- Go to st ep 7.
7. Measur e t he vol t age bet ween MAP sensor 3P
connect or t er mi nal s No. 1 and No. 3.
MAP S E NS OR 3P CONNECTOR
V CC1 ( YEL / RED) S GI (GRN/ WHT)
10. Di sc onnec t ECM/ PCM connect or C (49P).
t er mi nal C13 and MAP sensor 3P c onnec t or t er mi nal
No. 1.
1
VCC1 ( YEL / RED) Wire side of female terminals
VCC1 ( YEL / RED) E CM/ PCM CONNECTOR C (49P)
(C13) and t he MAP sensor , t hen go to st ep 18.
14. Di sconnect ECM/ PCM connect or C (49P).
Is t here about 5 V?
NO- Go to st ep 8.
(cont' d)
PGM-FI S f st em
DTC Troubl eshoot i ng (cont' d)
15. Chec k f or cont i nui t y bet ween MAP sensor 3P
MAP (GRN/ RED)
NO- Go to st ep 23.
17. Repl ac e t he MAP sensor (see page 11 -199).
11-293).
t he MAP sensor and t he ECM/ PCM, t hen go to st ep 1.
t he MAP sensor and t he ECM/ PCM. If t he ECM/ PCM
was updat ed, subst i t ut e a known-good ECM/ PCM
(see page 11-7), t hen r echeck. If t he ECM/ PCM was
subst i t ut ed, go to st ep 1.
Pendi ng or Ccnf ; r r r ,ed DTC* ar e Indi cat ed, go to t he
i ndi cat ed DTCs t r oubl eshoot i ng.!
11-76
DTC P0108: MAP Sensor Ci rcui t High Vol t age
NOTE: Bef ore you t r oubl eshoot , r ecor d all f reeze dat a
2. Chec k t he MAP S ENS OR in t he DATA L IST wi t h t he
HDS.
Is about 160 kPa (47.1 inHg, 1,197 mmHg), or 4.49 V or
more Indicat ed?
NO-l nt er mi t t ent f ai l ur e, the syst em i s OK at t hi s t i me.
MAP sensor and t he ECM/ PCM. H
4. Di sconnect t he MAP sensor 3P connect or .
5. Connec t MAP sensor 3P connect or t er mi nal s No. 2
1
MAP (GRN/ RED) SG1 (GRN/ WHT)
J UMPER WI RE
9. Measur e t he vol t age bet ween MAP sensor 3P
1
VCC1 ( YEL / RED) SG1 (GRN/ WHT)
42H
NO- Go to st ep 10.
7. Chec k t he MAP S ENS OR in t he DATA LIST wi t h t he
HDS.
Is about 160 kPa (47.1 inHg, 1,197 mmHg), or 4.49 V or
more indicat ed?
NO- Go to st ep 18.
8. Remove t he j umper wi r e f r om t he MAP sensor 3P
connect or .
(cont ' d)
11-77
PGM-FI S f st em
DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd)
13, Chec k f or cont i nui t y bet ween ECM/ PCM c onnec t or
t er mi nal C14and MAP s ens or 3P connect or t er mi nal
No. 3.
MAP SENSOR 3P CONNECTOR
1
Wire side of female terminals S GI (GRN/ WHT)
ECM/PCM
CONNECTOR C(49P)
(C14) and t he MAP sensor , t hen go t o st ep 20.
16. Di sconnect ECM/ PCM c onnec t or C (49P).
17. Chec k for cont i nui t y bet ween ECM/ PCM connect or
t er mi nal C11 and MAP sensor 3P connect or t er mi nal
No. 2.
1
MAP ( GRN/ RED) Wire side of female terminals
MAP (GRN/ RED) E CM/ PCM CONNECTOR C (49P)
HE 5L
12
22
3 | 4 | 5 J 6 I 7
14[ 15 13 16 17 18
140 43144145J 46 LXl 48 M
9 10
20 21
19. Repl ac e t he MAP sensor (see page 11-199).
11-293).
Pendi ng or Conf i r med DTCs ar e i ndi cat ed, go t o t he
11-78
26. Updat e t he ECM/ PCM If It does not have t he latest
Is DTC P0108 Indicat ed?
t he MAP sensor and t he ECM/ PCM. If t he ECM/ PCM
i ndi cat ed DTCs t r oubl eshoot i ng.H
DTC P0111: IAT Sensor Ci rcui t
1. Chec k for poor connect i ons or l oose t er mi nal s at ECT
s ens or s 1 and 2, and t he MAF sensor /IAT sensor .
Are t he connect ions and t erminals OK?
NO-Repai r t he connect i ons or t er mi nal s, t hen go to
st ep 15.
2. Remove t he MAF sensor /IAT s ens or (see page
11-199).
3. Al l ow MAF sensor /IAT sensor to cool to t he ambi ent
t emper at ur e.
4. Note t he ambi ent t emper at ur e.
5. Connec t t he MAF sensor /IAT sensor to its 5P
connect or , but do not i nst al l it.
7. Note t he val ue of t he IAT S ENS OR qui ckl y in t he
DATA L IST wi t h t he HDS.
8. Compar e t he val ue of t he IAT S ENS OR to t he ambi ent
t emper at ur e.
Does t he value of t he IAT SENSOR differ 5.4 F (3 C) or
more from t he ambient t emperat ure?
NO- Go to st ep 9.
9. Di sconnect t he MAF sensor /IAT sensor f rom i ts 5P
connect or .
10. Usi ng a heat gun, bl ow hot ai r on t he MAF sensor /IAT
sensor for a f ew sec onds. Do not appl y t he heat
l onger t han a f ew sec onds or you wi l l damage t he
sensor .
11. Connec t t he MAF sensor /IAT sensor to its 5P
connect or , but do not i nst all it.
12. Chec k t he IAT S ENS OR i n t he DATA L IST wi th t he
HDS.
Does t he IAT SENSOR change 63 F (35 C) or more?
YES-l nt er mi t t ent f ai l ur e, t he syst em i s OK at t hi s t i me.
Chec k for poor connect i ons or l oose t er mi nal s at t he
MAF sensor /IAT sensor and t he ECM/PCM.IK
NO- Go to st ep 13.
(cont' d)
11-79
PGM-FI Syst em
14. Repl ac e t he MAF sensor /IAT s ens or (see page
11-199).
11-293).
go t o st ep 1.
i ndi cat ed DTCs t r oubl eshoot i ng-^
DTC P0112: IAT Sensor Ci rcui t Low Vol t age
2. Chec k t he IAT S ENS OR i n t he DATA L IST wi t h t he
HDS.
Is about 356 F (180 C) or more, or 0.08 V or less
indicat ed?
MAF sensor /IAT sensor and t he ECM/ PCM. H
4. Di sc onnec t t he MAF sensor /IAT sensor 5P connect or .
6. Chec k t he IAT S ENS OR in t he DATA L IST wi t h t he
HDS.
indicat ed?
NO- Go to st ep 11.
11-80
10. Chec k for cont i nui t y bet ween MAF sensor /IAT sensor
1 2 3 4 5
IAT ( RED/ YEL )
YES - Repai r shor t in t he wi r e bet ween t he MAF
sensor /IAT sensor and t he ECM/ PCM (B32), t hen go to
st ep 13.
NO- Go to st ep 18.
11-199).
13. Rec onnec t all connect or s.
16. Do t he ECM/ PCM i dle l earn pr ocedur e, (see page
11-293)
go t o st ep 1.
Pendi ng or Conf i r med DTCs are i ndi cat ed, go to t he
sof t war e (see page 11 -203), or subst i t ut e a
11-81
PGM-FI S f st em
DTC P0113: l AT Sensor Ci rcui t High Vol t age
NOTE: Bef ore you t r oubl eshoot r ecor d all f r eeze dat a
. and any on-boar d snapshot , and r evi ew t he gener al
t r oubl eshoot i ng i nf ormat i on { see page 11-3).
2. Chec k t he IAT S ENS OR i n t he DATA L I ST wi t h t he
HDS.
Is about -40 F (-40 C) or less, or 4.92 V or more
indicat ed?
MAF sensor /IAT sensor and t he E CM/ PCM.
3.
T
' -' " ^ *hc Izr.ltzr. cv.l t ch to LGCIx (0).
4. Di sconnect t he MAF sensor /IAT sensor 5P connect or .
5. Connec t MAF sensor /IAT sensor 5P connect or
SG2 (GRN/BLK ) IAT ( RED/ YEL )
J UMPER WI RE
11. Measur e t he vol t age bet ween MAF sensor /IAT sensor
1 2 3 4 5
lAT (RED/Y EL)
NO- Go to st ep 16.
7. Chec k t he IAT S ENS OR i n t he DATA L IST wi t h t he
HDS.
Is about -40 F(-40 C) or less, or 4.92 V or more
indicat ed?
NO- Go to st ep 20.
9. Remove t he j umper wi r e f r om t he MAF sensor /IAT
s ens or 5P connect or .
11-82
15. Check f or cont i nui t y bet ween MAF sensor /IAT sensor
t er mi nal B34.
/ \
1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5
SG2 ( GRN/ BL K ) IAT ( RED/ YEL )
22
2 9 31
12 13 14) 15
2 3 2 4 ^
32| 33
16
2 5
3 4
1 7 ) 1 8
3 5 3 6
1 9 / 2 1
2 6
140 L ^l ^l 4 3 L^fl45146J 47"
1 0
2 7
38
2 8
iSlZL
SG2 ( GRN/ BL K )
22.
19. Chec k f or cont i nui t y bet ween MAF sensor / IAT sensor
5P c onnec t or t er mi nal No. 5 and ECM/ PCM connect or
t er mi nal B32.
LLVJ
3
J ^W,
7
I
8
l
9
J
1
?l J
11 1 9 1 3 1 4 MR 1f i 1 7 1f t 1Q / 0 1 "I
1 1 1 2 1 3 1 4 | 1 5 1 6 1 7 1 8 1 9
/
2 1
22 23J 24
><
2 5
><
2 6 2 7 2 8
29 / 1 3 1 3 2 | 3 3 3 4 3 5 | 3 6
/
3 8
/
4 0 }3 IX! 45146J 47148Vj
IAT ( RED/ YEL )
22.
11-199).
11-293).
go to st ep 1.
i ndi cat ed DTCs t r oubl eshoot i ng.B
(cont ' d)
11-83
PGM-FI Syst em
29. Check f or Pendi ng or Conf i r med DTCs wi t h t he HDS.
YES - Ch ec k f or poor c onnec t i ons or l oose t er mi nal s at
P<3| - | f j f Qf Confirnnorf HlTPo ore inHIir*safesrl n r \ to tho
i ndi cat ed DTCs t r oubl eshoot i ng.
DTC P0116: ECT Sensor 1 Ci rcui t
t r oubl eshoot i ng i nf ormat i on (see page 11 -3).
2. Check ECT S ENS OR 1 in t he DATA L IST wi t h t he HDS.
indicat ed?
NO- Go to st ep 3.
3. Note t he val ue of ECT S ENS OR 1 in t he DATA L IST
wi t h t he HDS.
4. St art t he engi ne. Hold t he engi ne speed at 3,000 rpm
wi t hout l oad (A/T i n P or N, M/T in neut ral ) unti l t he
radi at or f an c omes on, t hen let it i dle.
5. Chec k ECT S ENS OR 1 in t he DATA L IST wi t h t he HDS.
Does ECT SENSOR 1 change 18 F (10 C) or more?
Chec k for poor connect i ons or l oose t er mi nal s at ECT
sensor 1 and t he E CM/ PCM.
NO- Go to st ep 11.
6. Note t he val ue of ECT S ENS OR 1 in t he DATA L I ST
wi t h t he HDS.
8. Open t he hood, and let t he engi ne cool f or 3 hour s.
10. Check ECT S ENS OR 1 in t he DATA L IST wi t h t he HDS.
Does ECT SENSOR 1 change 18F(10 C) or more?
Chec k f or poor connect i ons or l oose t er mi nal s at E CT
sensor 1 and t he ECM/ PCM. B
NO- Go to st ep 11.
11-84
12. Repl ac e ECT s ens or 1 (see page 11-200).
11-293).
16. Chec k for Pendi ng or Conf i r med DTCs wi t h t he HDS.
E CT sensor 1 and t he ECM/ PCM, t hen go to st ep 1.
DTC P0117: ECT Sensor 1 Ci rcui t Low Vol t age
2. Chec k ECT S ENS OR 1 i n t he DATA L IST wi t h t he HDS.
indicat ed?
Chec k f or poor c onnec t i ons or l oose t er mi nal s at E CT
sensor 1 and t he E CM/ PCM. !
4. Di sconnect t he E CT sensor 1 2P connect or .
indicat ed?
NO- Go to st ep 11.
7. Tur n t he i gni ti on swi t c h to LOCK (0).
(cont' d)
11-85
PGM-FI Syst em
10. Chec k f or cont i nui t y bet ween E CT s ens or 1 2P
E CT S E NS OR 1 2P CONNECTOR
1
ECT1 (RED/ WHT)
YES - Repai r shor t in t he wi r e bet ween ECT sensor 1
and t he ECM/ PCM (B24), t hen go to st ep 13.
NO- Go to st ep 18.
12. Repl ac e E CT sensor 1 (see page 11-200).
11-293).
i ndi cat ed DT Cs t r oubl es hoot i ng.
ECT sensor 1 and t he ECM/ PCM. If t he ECM/ PCM was
updat ed, subst i t ut e a known-good ECM/ PCM (see
page 11-7), t hen r echeck. If t he ECM/ PCM was
thA nr i ni n.i ECM/ r Cm ;
&
ee page i 1-204). If any ot her
11-86
DTC P0118: ECT Sensor 1 Ci rcui t Hi gh Vol t age
NOTE: Bef ore you t r oubl eshoot , r ecor d al l f r eeze dat a
2. Chec k ECT S ENS OR 1 in t he DATA L I ST wi t h t he HDS.
Is about 40 F (-40 C) or less, or 4.92 V or more
Indicat ed?
Chec k f or poor connect i ons or l oose t er mi nal s at ECT
sensor 1 and t he ECM/ PCM. H
4. Di sconnect t he ECT sensor 1 2P connect or .
5. Connec t ECT sensor 1 2P connect or t er mi nal s No. 1
E CT S ENS OR 1 2P CONNECTOR
ECT1 (RED/ WHT) SG2 ( GRN/ BL K )
J UMPER WI RE
Is about -40 F (-40 C) or less, or 4.92 Vor more
indicat ed?
NO- Go to st ep 20.
9. Remove t he j umper wi r e f r om t he ECT sensor 1 2P
connect or .
11. Measur e t he vol t age bet ween E CT s ens or 1 2P
ECT1 (RED/ WHT)
NO- Go to st ep 16.
15. Chec k for cont i nui t y bet ween E CT sensor 1 2P
t er mi nal B34.
ECT SENSOR 1 2P CONNECTOR
1 2
S G2 (GRN/ BL K )
11| 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 1 9 / 1 2 1
1
22
29
23
401
24 26
31 32| 33 34 35| 36 /
38| X| H
4 3 \ A \ 45146147
27 28
S G2 (GRN/ BL K )
(B34) and ECT sensor 1, t hen go to st ep 22.
(cont' d)
11-87
PGM-FI S f st em
19. Chec k f or cont i nui t y bet ween ECT sensor 1 2P
connect or t er mi nal No. 1 and ECM/ PCM c onnec t or
t er mi nal B24.
ECT S E NS OR 1 2P CONNECTOR
A
1 2
ECT1
uCivi/r*ivi lAJNIMti; I UK B (49P)
1 L / 13I 4 M X | 7 | 8 ) 9 | 1 Q
11 12
H 29
I 1 Z
13|14|15|16|17118|19 /TJ lT'
31 3 2 3 3 34 35 36
2 4 ^ 25
43 [/145146147 j48 L/1
27
3 8 [ /
ECT1 (RED/ WHT)
27. Reconnect all c onnec t or s.
t he ori gi nal ECM/ PCM ( C A O
I 1
22
A
.). If . ,
y
u u .
c
.
(B24) and E CT sensor 1, t hen go to st ep 22.
21. Repl ac e ECT s ens or 1 (see page 11 -200).
11-293).
ECT sensor 1 and t he ECM/ PCM, t hen go to st ep 1.
11-88
DTC P0125: ECT Sensor 1 Mal f unct i on/Sl ow
Response
NOTE: Bef ore you t r oubl eshoot , r ecor d all f reeze data
and any on-boar d s naps h o t and r evi ew t he gener al
1. St art t he engi ne, and let it i dle f or 5 mi nut es or more.
2. Chec k ECT S ENS OR 1 In t he DATA L I ST wi t h t he HDS.
Is about 0F (-18 C) or less Indicat ed?
ECT sensor 1, ECT sensor 2, and t he ECM/ PCM. If the
c onnec t i ons and t er mi nal are OK, r epl ace ECT sensor
1 (see page 11-200), t hen go to st ep 9.
NO- Go to st ep 3.
4. Al l ow t he engi ne to cool to 104 F (40 C) or l ess.
5. St art t he engi ne, and let it i dle unti l ECT S ENS OR
1goes up to about 158 F (70 C).
Does ECT SENSOR 2 also read about 158 F (70 C)?
sensor 1, ECT sensor 2, and t he ECM/ PCM. B
6. Chec k t he t her most at (see page 10-4).
Is t he t hermost at OK?
ECT sensor 1, ECT sensor 2, and t he ECM/ PCM. If t he
c onnec t i ons and t er mi nal are OK, r epl ace ECT sensor
1 (see page 11-200), t hen go to st ep 7.
NO-Repl ac e t he t her most at (see page 10-8), t hen go
to st ep 7.
10. Al l ow t he engi ne to cool to 104 F (40 C) or l ess.
11. St ar t t he engi ne, and let it i dle unti l ECT S ENS OR
1 goes up to about 158 F (70 C).
Does ECT SENSOR 2 also read about 158 F (70 C)?
YE S - Go to st ep 1 and recheck.
NO-Tr oubl eshoot i ng i s c o mpl et e.
DTC P0128: Cool i ng Syst em Malfuncti on
NOTE: Bef or e you t r oubl eshoot , r ecor d all f r eeze dat a
3. Make sur e t he bl ower swi t c h i s off.
4. Chec k t he FAN CTRL i n t he DATA LIST wi t h t he HDS.
Is it OFF?
NO-Wai t unti l t he FAN CTRL i s off, t hen go to st ep 5.
5. Chec k t he radi at or f an oper at i on.
Does t he radiat or fan keep running?
YES - Ch ec k t he radi at or f an ci rcui t (see page 10-26),
and t he radi at or fan rel ay (see page 22-93). If t he
ci r cui t s and t he rel ay ar e OK, go to st ep 19.
NO- Go to st ep 6.
6. Let t he engi ne cool unti l t he cool ant t emper at ur e i s
104 F (40 C) or l ess.
7. Note t he val ue of ECT S ENS OR 1 and ECT S ENS OR 2
in t he DATA L IST wi t h t he HDS.
8. St art t he engi ne, and let it i dl e.
9. Let t he engi ne i dle unti l ECT S ENS OR 1 goes up 41 F
(23 C) or mor e f rom t he r ecor ded t emper at ur e.
10. Check ECT S ENS OR 2 i n t he DATA L IST wi t h t he HDS.
11. Compar e t he r ecor ded val ue of ECT S ENS OR 2 and
t he pr esent val ue of ECT S ENS OR 2.
Did t he t emperat ure rise 14 F (8 C) or more?
YE S - Tes t t he t her most at (see page 10-4), t hen go to
st ep 12.
sensor 1, ECT sensor 2, and t he E CM/ PCM.
(cont' d)
11-89
Z I raubleshooting (cont' d)
12. Tur n t he i gni ti on swi t c h to ON (11).
bet ween 21 F ( - 6 C) and 104 F (40 C).
11-293).
18. Test -dr i ve at a st eady speed bet ween 1575 mph
( 24- 120 km/h) f or 10 mi nut es.
YE S - Ch ec k t he cool i ng s y s t em, t hen go to st ep 19.
NO- Go to st ep 18.
1C. r/.v/.MLOi um O D U D i A i US for DTC P0128 i n t he DTCs
MENU wi t h the HDS.
NO-l f t he sc r een i ndi cat es FAIL ED, c hec k t he cool i ng
s y s t em, t hen go to st ep 19. If t he sc r een i ndi cat es NOT
COMPL ETED, go to st ep 14.
bet ween 21 F ( - 6 C) and 104 F (40 C).
radi at or f an c omes on, t hen let it i dl e.
( 24- 120 km/h) f or 10 mi nut es.
is DTC P0128 indicat ed?
ECT sensor 1, ECT sensor 2, and t he ECM/ PCM. If t he
ECM/ PCM (see page 11-7), t hen go to st ep 20. If t he
NO- Go to st ep 24.
YE S - l f t he ECM/ PCM was updat ed, t r oubl eshoot i ng i s
Pendi ng or Conf i r med DTCs wer e i ndi cat ed in st ep 23,
go t o t he i ndi cat ed DTCs t r oubl es hoot i ng.
c onnec t i ons or l oose t er mi nal s at ECT sensor 1, ECT
sensor 2, and t he ECM/ PCM. If t he ECM/ PCM was
page 11-7), t hen go to st ep 20. If t he ECM/ PCM was
subst i t ut ed, go to st ep 1. If t he sc r een i ndi cat es NOT
11-90
DTC P0133: A/F Sensor (Sensor 1)
Mal f unct i on/Sl ow Response
NOTE: Bef ore you t r oubl eshoot record all f reeze data
4. Test -dr i ve under t hese condi t i ons:
Engi ne cool ant t emper at ur e (ECT S ENS OR 1) above
158 F (70 C)
A/ Ti n D, M/T in 3r d or 4th
Dr i ve t he vehi c l e at 25 mph (40 km/h) or l ess f or
5 mi nut es, t hen dr i ve at a st eady speed about
32 mph (52 km/h) or mor e
5. Moni t or t he OBD S TATUS for DTC P0133 i n t he DTCs
connect i ons or l oose t er mi nal s at t he A/ F sensor
(Sensor 1) and t he ECM/ PCM. If the sc r een i ndi cat es
EXECUTI NG, keep dri vi ng unti l a r esul t c omes on. If
t he sc r een i ndi cat es OUT OF CONDITION or NOT
7. Repl ac e t he A/ F sensor (Sensor 1) (see page 11-197).
11-293).
11. St art t he engi ne. Hold t he engi ne speed at 3,000 r pm
wi t hout l oad (A/T in P or N, M/T in neut ral ) until t he
158F( 70 C)
A/ Ti n D, in 3rd or 4t h
Dr i ve t he vehi cl e at 25 mph (40 km/h) or l ess f or
5 mi nut es, t hen dri ve at a st eady speed about
32 mph (52 km/h) or mor e
YES - Ch ec k for poor c onnec t i ons or l oose t er mi nal s at
t he A/ F sensor (Sensor 1) and t he ECM/ PCM, t hen go
to st ep 1.
NO- Go to st ep 14.
14. Moni t or t he OBD S TATUS for DTC P0133 in t he DTCs
go to t he i ndi cat ed DTCs t r oubl eshoot i ng.H
NO-l f t he sc r een i ndi cat es FAIL ED, check for poor
(Sensor 1) and t he ECM/ PCM, t hen go to st ep 1. If t he
sc r een i ndi cat es EXECUTI NG, keep dri vi ng unti l a
resul t c omes on. If t he sc r een i ndi cat es OUT OF
CONDITION or NOT COMPL ETED, go to st ep 11.
11-SI
PGM-FI S f st em
DTC P0134: A/F Sensor (Sensor 1) Heater
Syst em Malfuncti on
NOTE:
Bef ore you t r oubl eshoot , r ecor d all f r eeze dat a and
t r oubl eshoot i ng i nf or mat i on (see page 11-3).
If t he vehi cl e was out of f uel and t he engi ne st al l ed
bef ore t hi s DTC was st or ed, ref uel and cl ear t he DTC
wi t h t he HDS.
If DTC P0135 i s st or ed at t he s ame t i me as DTC P0134,
t r oubl eshoot DTC P0135 f i rst , t hen r echeck f or DTC
P0134.
3. St ar t t he engi ne, and let it i dle wi t hout l oad (A/T i n P or
N, M/T in neut ral ) unti l t he radi at or f an c omes on.
A/ F sensor (Sensor 1), t he PGM-FI subr el ay, and t he
ECM/ PCM. H
6. Repl ac e t he A/ F s ens or (Sensor 1) (see page 11 -197).
11-293).
t he A/ F sensor (Sensor 1), t he PGM-FI subr el ay, and
t he ECM/ PCM, t hen go to st ep 1.
NO- Go to st ep 11.
11. Moni t or t he OBD S TATUS f or DTC P0134 in t he DTCs
c onnec t i ons or l oose t er mi nal s at t he A/ F sensor
(Sensor 1), t he PGM-FI subr el ay, and t he ECM/ PCM,
t hen go to st ep 1. If t he sc r een i ndi cat es NOT
COMPL ETED, keep i dl i ng unti l a resul t c omes on.
11 92
DTC P0135: A/ F Sensor (Sensor 1) Heater
Ci rcui t Malfuncti on
NOTE; Bef ore you t r oubl eshoot r ecor d all f r eeze dat a
and any on-boar d s naps hot and r evi ew t he gener al
wi t hout l oad (A/T in P or N, M/T i n neut ral ) unti l t he
A/ F sensor (Sensor 1), t he PGM-FI subr el ay, and t he
. ECM/ PCM.B
6. Check t he No. 14 FI S UB (15 A) f use in t he under -hood
f use/r el ay box.
Is t he fuse OK?
NO- Go to st ep 19.
7. Remove t he PGM-FI subr el ay (A) f r om t he
under -hood f use/r el ay box.
8. Test t he PGM-FI subr el ay (see page 22-93).
Is t he relay OK?
NO-Repl ac e t he PGM-FI subr el ay, t hen go to st ep 24.
9. Di sc onnec t t he A/ F sensor (Sensor 1) 4P c onnec t or .
10. At t he sensor si de, measur e t he r esi st anc e bet ween
A/ F sensor (Sensor 1) 4P connect or t er mi nal s No. 3
and No. 4.
A / F S E NS OR ( S ENS OR 1) 4P CONNECTOR
-f-B
1 2
- 3 4 -
AFS HTC
Ter mi nal si de of mal e t er mi nal s
Is t here 2.02.7 O at room t emperat ure?
NO- Go to st ep 23.
11. At t he sensor si de, check f or cont i nui t y bet ween A/ F
sensor (Sensor 1) 4P connect or t er mi nal s No. 2 and
No. 3, and bet ween t er mi nal s No. 2 and No. 4
i ndi vi dual l y.
A FS
+B
1 2
o A
o
AFS HTC
NO- Go to st ep 12.
(cont ' d)
11-93
PGM-FI S f st em
t er mi nal C9 and body gr ound.
ECM/PCM CONNECTOR C (49P)
AFS HTC (GRN)
1 2
29
12
30
5 6 7
1 3 1 4 | 1 5 16 1 7 I 1 8 /
40 U4/J 43144] 451*46
M l
2l T
MA
(C9) and t he A/ F sensor (Sensor 1), t hen go to st ep 24.
NO- Go to st ep 15.
15. Chec k f or cont i nui t y bet ween A/ F sensor (Sensor 1) 4P
t er mi nal C9.
1 2
3 4
Wire side of female terminals AFS HTC (GRN)
ECM/ PCM CONNECTOR C (49P) AFS HTC (GRN)
J 1 | 2 3 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 | 8 9 Hoi
11 12 13 14)15 16 17)18 20 21
I
1
22 23 24
I
1
29 30 31 3 2 | /
/ /
I
1
/
43144145146
/ 48 H
I erminal side of female terminals
connect or t er mi nal No. 3 and PGM-FI subr el ay 4P
1 2
3 4
+B (WHT/BLK ) Wire side of female terminals
PGM-FI S UB RE L A Y 4P CONNECTOR
1
2
si
NO-Repai r open i n t he wi r e bet ween t he A/ F sensor
(Sensor 1) and t he PGM-FI subr el ay, t hen got o st ep
24.
(C9) and t he A/ F sensor (Sensor 1), t hen go to st ep 24.
11-94
18. Chec k f or cont i nui t y bet ween PGM-FI subr el ay 4P
t er mi nal A22.
PGM-FI SUBRELAY 4P CONNECTOR
Ter mi nal si de of
f emal e t er mi nal s
SUBRLY
SUBRLY
(RED/YEL) ECM/PCM CONNECTOR A (49P)
II II
v
l
J 1
X |3|4|5|6|7l
/
9|10|
1
1
X|15
161718 19 20 21

i 1
22 23^4 25 262728

i 1
2S 301/ 32|/ 343536
/
/
/

i
|/|41142|43|44|/| 46 \ /
A/ \
(A22) and t he PGM-FI subr el ay, t hen go to st ep 24.
19. Remove t he PGM-FI subr el ay (A) f r om t he
20. Di sconnect t he A/ F sensor (Sensor 1) 4P connect or .
21. Di sconnect t he EVAP cani st er vent shut val ve 2P
connect or .
A/ F SENSOR (SENSOR 1) 4P CONNECTOR
1 2
3 4
+B (WHT/BLK)
YES - Repai r shor t i n t he wi r e bet ween t he PGM-FI
subr el ay, t he A/ F sensor (Sensor 1), and t he EVAP
cani st er vent shut val ve. Al so r epl ace t he No. 14 FI
S UB (15 A) f use, t hen go to st ep 24.
NO-Chec k t he under -hood f use/r el ay box, and r epl ace
it if needed (see page 22-85), t hen go t o st ep 24.
23. Repl ace t he A/ F sensor (Sensor 1) (see page 11-197).
11-293).
t he A/ F sensor (Sensor 1), t he PGM-FI subr el ay, and
NO- Go to st ep 29.
(cont ' d)
11-95
PGM-FI Syst em
go to t he i ndi cat ed DTCs t r oubl es hoot i ng. !
NO-l f t he sc r een i ndi cat es FAIL ED, c hec k f or poor
c onnec t i ons or l oose t er mi nal s at t he A/ F s ens or
(Sensor 1), t he PGM-FI subr el ay, and t he ECM/ PCM,
t he A/ F s ens or (Sensor 1), t he PGM-FI subr el ay, and
t he ECM/ PCM. If t he ECM/ PCM was updat ed,
t hen go to st ep 32. If t he ECM/ PCM was subst i t ut ed,
go to st ep 1.
NO- Go to st ep 34.
NO-l f t he sc r een i ndi cat es FAI L ED, c hec k f or poor
c onnec t i ons or l oose t er mi nal s at t he A/ F s ens or
(Sensor 1), t he PGM-FI subr el ay, and t he ECM/ PCM. If
t he ECM/ PCM was updat ed, subst i t ut e a known-good
ECM/ PCM was subst i t ut ed, go t o st ep 1. If t he sc r een
i ndi cat es NOT COMPL ETED, keep i dli ng unti l a r esul t
c omes on.
DTC P0137: Sec ondar y H02S (Sensor 2)
Ci rcui t Low Vol t age
NOTE: Bef or e you t r oubl eshoot , r ecor d al l f r eeze dat a
and any oh-boar d snapshot , and r evi ew t he gener al
4. Chec k H02S S 2 i n t he DATA L I ST wi t h t he HDS.
Does t he volt age st ay at 0.05 V or less?
NO-l nt er mi t t ent f ai l ur e, t he s y s t em i s OK at t hi s t i me.
Chec k f or poor c onnec t i ons or l oose t er mi nal s at
sec ondar y H02S (Sensor 2) and t he ECM/ PCM.B
6. Di sc onnec t t he sec ondar y H02S (Sensor 2) 4P
connect or .
8. Chec k H02S S 2 i n t he DATA L I S T wi t h t he HDS.
Does t he volt age st ay at 0.05 V or less?
NO- Go to st ep 13.
11. Di sc onnec t ECM/ PCM c onnec t or B (49P).
11-96
12. Chec k f or cont i nui t y bet ween sec ondar y H02S
(Sensor 2) 4P connect or t er mi nal No. 2 and body
gr ound.
S ECONDARY H02S (SENSOR 2) 4P CONNECTOR
1 2 -
3 4
S H02S (WHT/ RED)
Terminal side of male terminals
YES - Repai r shor t in t he wi r e bet ween t he ECM/PCM
(B36) and sec ondar y H02S (Sensor 2), t hen go to st ep
15.
NO- Go to st ep 23.
14. Repl ac e sec ondar y H02S (Sensor 2) (see page
11-197).
11-293)
19. St ar t t he engi ne, and let it i dle wi t hout l oad (A/T in P or
N, M/T in neutral) unti l t he radi at or f an c omes on.
158F( 70 C)
A/ T in D, M/T i n 4th
Engi ne speed bet ween 1,5003,000 rpm
Dri ve about 1 mi nut e or mor e
sec ondar y H02S (Sensor 2) and t he ECM/ PCM, t hen
go to st ep 1.
NO- Go to st ep 22.
connect i ons or l oose t er mi nal s at sec ondar y H02S
r esul t c omes on. If t he sc r een i ndi cat es OUT OF
25. St ar t t he engi ne, and let it i dle wi t hout l oad (A/T in P or
158 F (70 C)
Dri ve 1 mi nut e or mor e
sec ondar y H02S (Sensor 2) and t he ECM/ PCM. If the
NO- Go to st ep 28.
(cont' d)
11-97
PGM-FI Syst em
go to t he i ndi cat ed DTCs t r oubl eshoot i ng-^
NO-l f t he sc r een i ndi cat es FAI L ED, c hec k f or poor
c onnec t i ons or l oose t er mi nal s at sec ondar y H02S
(Sensor 2) and t he ECM/ PCM. If t he ECM/ PCM was
page 11 -7), t hen go to st ep 25. If t he ECM/ PCM was
subst i t ut ed, go t o st ep 1. If t he sc r een i ndi cat es
EXECUTI NG, keep dr i vi ng unti l a r esul t c omes on. If
Ci rcui t Hi gh Vol t age
Does t he volt age st ay at 1.27 V or more?
sec ondar y H02S (Sensor 2) and t he ECM/ PCM. B
connect or .
7. Connec t sec ondar y H02S (Sensor 2) 4P connect or
S ECONDARY H02S ( S ENS OR 2) 4P CONNECTOR
J UMPER WI RE
S G2 ( GRN/ BL K )
-1 2 -
3 4
S H02S (WHT/ RED)
NO- Go to st ep 19.
11-98
11. Remove the. j umper wi r e f r om t he sec ondar y H02S
(Sensor 2) 4P connect or .
12. Connec t secondar y; H02S (Sensor 2) 4P connect or
t er mi nal No. 2 t o body gr ound wi t h a j umper wi r e.
SECONDARY H02S (SENSOR 2) 4P CONNECTOR
1 2 -
3 4
S H02S (WHT/RED)
14. Chec k H02S S 2 i n t he DATA L I S T wi t h t he HDS.
' . YES - Go to st ep 15.
21.
18. Chec k f or cont i nui t y bet ween ECM/ PCM connect or ,
B E
22
29
12
23
13
24
1 4 ) 1 5
3 2 3 3
16
3 4
17 18
35 36
19
26
40 \ / \ / \ 4 3 | ^ 4 5 J 4 # I 7
9 10
21
27 28
38
S H0 2 S (WHT/ RED)
Ter mi nal si de, of f emal e t er mi nal s'
21.
20. Repl ac e sec ondar y H02S (Sensor 2) (see page
11-197).
11-293). . .
25. St ar t t he engi ne, and let it i dle wi t hout l oad (A/T i n P or
N, M/T i n neut ral ) unti l t he radi at or f an c omes on.
158 F (70 C)
o A/ Ti n D, M/T i n 4th
Engi ne speed bet ween 1,5003,000 r pm
Dr i ve about 1 mi nut e or mor e
go to st ep 1.
NO- Go to st ep 28.
(cont ' d)
11-99
PGM-FI S f st em
DTC Troubleshooting (cont' d)
Does the screen indicate PASSED?
Pendi ng or Conf i r med DTCs wer e Indi cat ed i n st ep 27,
go to t he i ndi cat ed DTCs t r o ub l es h o o t i ng . !
NO-l f t he sc r een i ndi cat es FAI L ED, c hec k for poor
sc r een i ndi cat es EXECUTI NG, keep dr i vi ng unti l a
31. St art t he engi ne, and let it i dle wi t hout l oad (A/T In P or
N, M/T i n neut ral ) unti l t he radi at or f an c omes on.
158F( 70 C)
A/T in D, M/T in 4th
Engi ne speed bet ween 1,5003,000 r pm
Dri ve about 1 mi nut e or mor e
Is DTC P0138 indicated?
sec ondar y H02S (Sensor 2) and t he ECM/ PCM. If t he
NO- Go to st ep 34.
page 11 -7), t hen go to st ep 31. If t he ECM/ PCM was
subst i t ut ed, go to st ep 1. If t he sc r een i ndi cat es
EXECUTI NG, keep dri vi ng unti l a resul t c omes on. If
11-100
DTC P013S; Sec ondar y H02S (Sensor 2) Sl ow
Response
NOTE: Bef ore you t r oubl eshoot , r ecor d ai l f reeze dat a
wi t hout l oad (A/T i n Po r N, M/T i n neut ral ) unti l t he
158 F (70 C)
Dri ve at a st eady speed bet ween 5575 mph
(88120 km/h) f or 1 mi nut e, t hen decel er at e (wi th
throttle f ully c l osed) f or 10 sec onds
f ai l ur e, t he syst em i s OK at t hi s t i me. Check f or poor
(Sensor 2) and t he ECM/ PCM. If t he sc r een i ndi cat es
7. Repl ace sec ondar y H02S (Sensor 2) (see page
11-197).
11-293).
11. St art t he engi ne, and let it i dle wi t hout l oad (A/T i n P or
N, M/T i n neut ral ) unti l t he radi ator f an c omes on.
158F (70 C)
A/ T i n D, M/T in 4th
(88120 km/h) f or 1 mi nut e, t hen decel er at e (wi th
throttle f ul l y c l osed) f or 10 sec onds
go t o st ep 1.
NO- Go to st ep 14.
NO-l f t he sc r een i ndi cat es FAILED, c hec k for poor
11-101
PGM-FI S f st em
Heater Ci rcui t Mal f unct i on
NOTE: Bef or e you t r oubl eshoot , r ecor d ai l f r eeze dat a
Chec k f or p ^cr ccr.r.ccl^ no u i i uuse t er mi nal s at
sec ondar y H02S (Sensor 2) and t he ECM/ PCM. H
6. Chec k t he No. 7 A CG (15 A) f use i n t he under -dash
f use/r el ay box.
Is t he fuse OK?
NO-Repai r shor t i n t he wi r e bet ween sec ondar y
H02S (Sensor 2) and t he No. 7 A CG (15 A) f use. Al so
r epl ace t he No. 7 A CG (15 A) f use, t hen go to st ep 23.
connect or .
8. At sec ondar y H02S (Sensor 2) si de, measur e t he
r esi st anc e bet ween sec ondar y H02S (Sensor 2) 4P
S 02S HTC
1 2
3 4
IG1
Is t here 5.47.3 O at room t emperat ure?
NO- Go to st ep 22.
9. At sec ondar y H02S (Sensor 2) si de, c hec k f or
cont i nui t y bet ween body gr ound and sec ondar y
H02S (Sensor 2) 4P connect or t er mi nal s No. 3 and
No. 4 i ndi vi dual l y.
S 02S HTC
1 2
3 4
1G1
NO- Go to st ep 10.
11-102
11 . Meas ur e t he vol t age bet ween sec ondar y H02S
(Sensor 2) 4P connect or t er mi nal s No. 3 and No. 4.
S ECONDARY H 02S ( S ENS OR) 4P CONNECTOR
S 02S HTC (BLK/WHT)
1 2
- 3 4 -
IG1 ( BL K / YEL )
NO- Go to st ep 16.
15. Check for cont i nui t y bet ween ECM/ PCM connect or
t er mi nal B4and body gr ound.
' ~~ ~~ S 02S HTC (BL K / WHT)
22
29
12
23
TT7f3| 4|XI Xl7t8
13
24
31
14|15~
Si
3 2 3 3
16 17 18
3 5 3 6
19
m ^ ^ 4J \ / \ 45146 J 4 7
9 10
27
38
28
23.
NO- Go to st ep 29.
16. Measur e t he vol t age bet ween sec ondar y H02S
(Sensor 2) 4P c onnec t or t er mi nal No. 4 and body
gr ound.
1 2
3 4 -
IG1 ( BL K / YEL )
NO-Repai r open i n t he wi r e bet ween sec ondar y H02S
(Sensor 2) and t he No. 7 ACG (15 A) f use, t hen go to
st ep 23.
20. Connec t sec ondar y H02S (Sensor 2) 4P connect or
t er mi nal No. 3 to body gr ound wi t h a j umper wi r e.
1 2
3 4
S02SHTC (BL K /WHT)
J UMPER WI RE
(cont ' d)
11-103
PGM-FI S f st em
ECM/PCM CONNECTOR B (49P)
S02SH TC (BLK /WHT)
29
23
3233 34
17 18
3536
19
26
40 \ yjy] 43 \ / \ 45146j 47
21
27 28
38
12L
(B4) and sec ondar y H02S (Sensor 2), t hen go t o st ep
23.
22. Repl ace sec ondar y H02S (Sensor 2) (see page
11-197).
11-293).
go to st ep 1.
NO- Go to st ep 28.
sc r een i ndi cat es NOT COMPL ETED, keep i dl i ng unti l a
resul t c omes on.
sec ondar y H02S (Sensor 2) and t he ECM/ PCM. If t he
ECM/ PCM (see page 11 -7), t hen go to st ep 31. If t he
NO- Go to st ep 33.
33. Moni t or t he uou S ' I MT U S Tor DTC FG141 in t ne DTC*
connect i ons or l oose t er mi nal s at t he sec ondar y
H02S (Sensor 2) and t he ECM/ PCM. If t he ECM/ PCM
(see page 11-7), t hen go to st ep 31. If t he ECM/ PCM
was subst i t ut ed, go to st ep 1. If t he sc r een i ndi cat es
NOT COMPL ETED, keep i dl i ng unti l a resul t c omes on.
11-104
DTC P0171: Fuel Syst em Too Lean
DTC P0172: Fuel Syst em Too Ri ch
NOTE:
Bef ore you t r oubl eshoot , record all f reeze dat a and
any on-boar d s naps h o t and r evi ew t he gener al
Poor f uel qual i t y c an al so c ause DTC P0171.
If any of t he DTCs l i st ed bel ow ar e st or ed at t he s ame
t i me as DTC P0171 and/or P0172, t r oubl eshoot t hose
DTCs f i rst , t hen r echeck for P0171 and/or P0172.
P0101, P0102, P0103: MAF sensor
P0107, P0108, P1128, P1129: MAP sensor
P0133, P1172, P1157, P2195, P2238, P2252, P2A00: A/ F
sensor (Sensor 1)
P0134, P0135: A/ F sensor (Sensor 1) heat er
P0137, P0138, P0139: Sec ondar y H02S (Sensor 2)
P0141: Sec ondar y H02S (Sensor 2) heat er
P2646, P2647, P2648, P2649: VTEC syst em
P0443, P0496: EVAP cani st er purge val ve
Is t he fuel pressure OK?
NO-Chec k f or t hese i t ems:
If t he pr essur e i s too hi gh, r epl ace t he f uel pr essur e
regul at or (see page 11-323), t hen go to st ep 7.
If t he pr essur e i s t oo l ow, check t he f uel pump, t he
f uel f eed pi pe and t he f uel fi lter. If t hey ar e OK,
r epl ace t he f uel pr essur e regul at or (see page
11 -323), t hen go to st ep 7.
2. Chec k f or vac uum l eaks at t hese part s:
e PCV val ve
PCV hose
EVAP cani st er purge val ve
Throt t l e body
Intake mani f ol d
Brake boost er
Brake boost er hose
Intake ai r duct
Are t he part s OK?
NO-Repai r or r epl ace part s wi t h l eaks, t hen go to st ep
7.
4. Chec k under t hese condi t i ons:
158 F (70 C)
A/ T in N, M/T i n neut ral
Al l el ect r i cal l oads off
5. Moni t or t he ENGINE S PE E D i n t he DATA L I ST wi t h t he
HDS, and hol d t he engi ne speed at 2,500 r pm. Onc e
t he engi ne speed i s met , hol d t he accel er at or pedal
st eady f or mor e t han 10 sec onds.
Did t he engine speed vary more t han 100 rpm from
2,500 rpm?
YES - Repeat st ep 5.
NO- Go to st ep 6.
6. Whi l e hol di ng t he engi ne speed at 2,500 r pm, check
t he MAF S ENS OR i n t he DATA L IST wi t h t he HDS.
Is t here about 5.6-7.8 gm/s (M/T) or 6.5-9.1 gm/s
(AIT)?
YES - Ch ec k t he engi ne val ve c l ear anc es, and adj ust
t hem if needed (see page 6-9). If t he val ve c l ear anc es
ar e OK, r epl ace t he i nj ect or s (see page 11-195), t hen
go to st ep 7.
NO-Repl ac e t he MAF sensor /IAT sensor (see page
11-199), t hen go to st ep 7.
(cont' d)
11-105
PGM-FI Syst em
7. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
8. Reset the ECM/PCM with the HDS.
9. Do the ECM/PCM idle learn procedure (see page
11-293).
10. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at 3,000 rpm
without load (A/T in P or N, M/T in neutral) until the
radiator fan comes on, then let it idle.
11. Test-drive under these conditions:
Engine coolant temperature (ECT SENSOR 1) above
158F(70C)
Drive at a steady speed between 1575 mph
(24120 km/h) for 15 minutes
NOTE: DTC P0171 and/or P0172 may take up to
80 minutes of test driving to set. Using the HDS,
monitor the air fuel feed back average (AF FB AVE). If
the AF FB AVE stays within 0.801.25, there is no
problem at this time.
12. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS.
Is DTC P0171 or P0172 indicated?
YES-Go to step 1.
NO-Troubleshooting is complete. If any other
Pending or Confirmed DTCs are indicated, go to the
indicated DTCs t roubl eshoot i ng.!
DTC P0300: Random Mi sfi re and Any
Combi nat i on of t he Fol l owi ng:
DTC P0301: No. 1 Cyl i nder Mi sf i re Det ect ed
Pressure Gauge Adapter 07NAJ-P07010A
. A/T Low Pressure Gauge W/Panel 07406-0070301
AT Pressure Test Hose 07AAJ-PY4A100
. A/T Pressure Adapter 07MAJ-PY40120
. Oil Pressure Hose 07ZAJ-S5AA200
NOTE:
Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and
any on-board snapshot, and review the general
troubleshooting information (see page 11 -3).
If the misfire is frequent enough to trigger detection of
increased emi ssi ons during two consecutive driving
cycles, the MIL will come on, and DTC P0300 (and
some combination of P0301 through P0304) will be
stored.
If the misfire i s frequent enough to damage the
catalyst, the MIL will blink whenever the misfire
occurs, and DTC P0300 (and some combination of
P0301 through P0304) will be stored. When the misfire
stops, the MIL will remain on.
If any of the DTCs listed below are indicated at the
same time as the random misfire DTCs, troubleshoot
those DTCs first, then recheck for random misfire
DTCs:
P0101, P0102, P0103: MAF sensor
P0107, P0108: MAP sensor
P0171, P0172: Fuel system
P0335, P0339: CKP sensor
P0365, P0369: CMP sensor B
P0506, P0507: Idle control system
P2646, P2647, P2648, P2649: VTEC system
11-106
. / f t
3. St ar t t he engi ne, and let it i dl e wi t hout l oad (A/T i n P or
N, M/T i n neut ral ).
4. Moni t or t he OBD S TATUS f or DTC P030T, P0302,
P0303, or P0304 i n t he DTCs MENU wi t h t he HDS.
YES - Go t o st ep 9.
NO-l f t he sc r een i ndi cat es PAS S ED, go t o st ep 5. If t he
sc r een i ndi cat es EXECUTI NG, keep i dl i ng unti l a
CONDITION or NOT COMPL ETED, wai t f or sever al
mi nut es, t hen r echeck.
5. Chec k t he CYL1 MISFIRE, CYL 2 MISFIRE, CYL 3
MISFIRE, and/or CYL 4 MISFIRE i n t he DATA L I ST f or
10 mi nut es wi t h t he HDS.
Does t he CYL1 MISFIRE, CYL2 MISFIRE, CYL3
MISFIRE, and/or CYL4 MISFIRE show misfire count s?
NO-Go to st ep 6.
ENGI NE S PEED
VS S
RE L TPS E NS OR
CL V (cal cul at ed l oad val ue)
APP S ENS OR
7. Moni t or t he OBD S TATUS f or DTC P0301, P0302,
NO-lf t he sc r een i ndi cat es PAS S ED, go t o st ep 8. If t he
CONDITION or NOT COMPL ETED, go t o st ep 6 and
r echeck.
8. Chec k t he CYL1 MISFIRE, CYL 2 MI SFI RE, CYL 3
MISFIRE, and/or CYL 4 MISFIRE i n t he DATA L I S T f or
NO-l nt er mi t t ent f ai l ur e, t he syst em i s OK at t hi s
t i me . l
10. Chec k t he f uel qual i t y.
Is t he qualit y good?
NO-Dr ai n t he f uel t ank and fi ll it wi t h known-good
f uel , t hen go to st ep 25.
11. Inspect t he spar k pl ugs (see page 4-20). If t he spar k
pl ugs ar e f oul ed or wor n, r epl ace t hem.
ENGINE S PEED
VS S
RE L TPS E NS OR
APP S ENS OR
MISFIRE, and/or CYL 4 MISFIRE i n t he DATA L I ST f or
YES - Go to st ep 14.
NO-Go to st ep 25.
14. Check t he f uel pr essur e (see page 11-308).
Is t he fuel pressure OK?
NO-
If t he f uel pr essur e i s t oo hi gh, r epl ace t he f uel
pr essur e regul at or (see page 11-323), t hen go to
st ep 25.
If t he f uel pr essur e i s t oo l ow, c hec k t he f uel pump,
t he f uel f eed l i ne, and t he f uel fi lter. If t hey ar e OK ,
r epl ace t he f uel pr essur e regul at or (see page
11 -323), t hen go t o st ep 25.
(cont ' d)
11-107
PGM-FI S y s t em
15. St ar t t he engi ne. Hol d t he engi ne speecj at 3,000 r pm
wi t hout l oad (A/T in P or N, M/T i n neut ral ) unt i l t he
176 F (80 C)
A/ T i n P or N, M/T in neut ral
Al l el ect r i cal l oads off
17. Moni t or t he ENGI NE S PEED i n t he DATA L I ST wi t h t he
HDS, and hol d t he engi ne speed at 2,500 r pm. Onc e
t he engi ne speed i s met , hol d t he accel er at or pedal
st eady f or mor e t han 10 sec onds.
Did t he engine speed vary more t han 100 rpm from
2,500 rpm?
YES - Repeat st ep 17.
NO- Go to st ep 18.
18. Whi l e hol di ng t he engi ne speed at 2,500 r pm, check
t he MAF S ENS OR i n t he DATA L IST wi t h t he HDS.
Is t here about 5.67.8 gmls (MIT) or 6.59.1 gm/s
(A/T)?
20. Remove t he r ocker ar m oi l pr essur e swi t ch (see page
11 -276) (PZEV model : Remove rocker ar m oi l pr essur e
swi t c h A) (see page 11 -276).
21. At t ach t he spec i al t ool s to t he rocker ar m oi l cont rol
val ve as s hown, t hen at t ach t he rocker ar m oi l
pr essur e swi t ch (A) to t he pr essur e gauge adapt er (B).
07406-0070301
07MAJ-PY40120
A
22 Nm
(2.2 kgf m,
16 Ibf ft)
07NAJ-P07010A
07J AZ-S5AA20C
A
22 N-m
(2.2 kgf-m,
16 Ibf-ft)
07NAJ-P07010A
07JAZ-S5AA200
22. Rec onnec t t he rocker ar m oi l pr essur e swi t c h (rocker
ar m oi l pr essur e swi t c h A) 2P connect or .
11-108
24. Chec k t he oi l pr essur e at engi ne speeds of 1,000 rpm
and 2,000 r pm.
Is the oil pressure below 49 kPa (0.5 kgf/cm
2
, 7 psi)?
NO-l nspec t t he VTEC s y s t em, t hen go to st ep 25.
11-293).
28. Do t he CK P pattern c l ear /CKP pattern l earn pr ocedur e
(see page 11-5).
29. Test -dr i ve t he vehi c l e f or sever al mi nut es in t he range
ENGINE S PEED
VS S
RE L TPS E NS OR
A PPS E NS OR
Is DTC P0300, P0301, P0302, P0303, or P0304
indicat ed?
t he i gni ti on c oi l s, t he i nj ect or s, and t he ECM/ PCM,
t hen go to t he t r oubl eshoot i ng f or DTC P0301, P0302,
P0303, or P0304 (see page 11 -109).
NO- Go to st ep 31.
31. Moni t or t he OBD S TATUS for DTC P0301, P0302,
NO-l f t he sc r een i ndi cat es FAIL ED, go to st ep 1 and
r echeck. If t he sc r een i ndi cat es EXECUTI NG, keep
dr i vi ng unti l a r esul t c omes on. If t he sc r een i ndi cat es
OUT OF CONDITION or NOT COMPL ETED, go to st ep
29.
DTC P0301: No. 1 Cylinder Misfire Detected
t r oubl eshoot i ng i nf or mat i on (see page 11-3).
3. St ar t t he engi ne, and let it i dle wi t hout load (A/T in Po r
N, M/T i n neut ral ).
NO-l f t he sc r een i ndi cat es PAS S ED, go to st ep 5. If t he
sc r een i ndi cat es EXECUTI NG, keep i dli ng unti l a
CONDITION or NOT COMPL ETED, wai t for sever al
mi nut es, and r echeck.
. 5. Chec k t he CYL1 MISFIRE, CYL 2 MISFIRE, CYL 3
MISFIRE, and/or CYL 4 MISFIRE in t he DATA L IST for
NO- Go to st ep 6.
(cont' d)
11-109
PGM-FS S f st em
DTC Troubl eshoot i ng ( c ont ' d)
6. Test -dr i ve t he vehi cl e f or sever al mi nut es in t he r ange
of t hese r ecor ded f r eeze dat a par amet er s;
ENGINE S PEED
vss
REL TP S ENS OR
APP S ENS OR
7. Moni t or t he OBD S TATUS for DTC P0301, P0302, .
P0303, or P0304 in t he DTCs MENU wi t h t he HDS.
Does the screen indicate FAILED?
NO-l f t he sc r een i ndi cat es PAS S ED, go to st ep 8. If t he
resul t C OmeS On, If the c r r o f o n inHirata<s OUT OF
CONDITION or NOT COMPL ETED, go to st ep 6 and
r echeck.
MISFIRE, and/or CYL 4 MISFIRE in t he DATA L IST f or
Does the CYL1 MISFIRE, CYL2 MISFIRE, CYL3
MISFIRE, and/or CYL4 MISFIRE show misfire counts?
Chec k f or poor c onnec t i ons or l oose t er mi nal s i n t he
f uel syst em and t he i gni ti on syst em.II
10. Exc hange t he i gni ti on coi l f rom t he pr obl em cyl i nder
wi t h one f r om anot her cyl i nder .
ENGINE S PEED
VS S
REL TP S ENS OR
APPS ENS OR
MISFIRE, and/or CYL 4 MISFIRE in t he DATA LIST f or
NO-l nt er mi t t ent mi sf i r e due to poor cont act at t he
i gni ti on coi l connect or (no mi sf i r e at t hi s t i me). Make
sur e t hat t he i gni ti on coi l c onnec t or s ar e sec ur e.H
13. Det er mi ne whi c h cyl i nder had t he mi sf i r e,
Does the misfire occur in the cylinder where the ignition
coil was exchanged?
YES - Repl ac e t he f ault y i gni ti on coi l (see page 4-20),
NO- Go to st ep 14.
14. Tu.rn t he i gni t i on swi t c h to L OCK (0).
15. Exc hange t he spar k pl ug f r om t he pr obl em cyl i nder
16. Test -dr i ve t he vehi c l e f or sever al mi nut es in t he r ange
ENGINE S PE E D
VS S
REL TP S ENS OR
A PPS E NS OR
17. Check t he CYL1 MISFIRE, CYL 2 MISFIRE, CYL 3
MISFIRE, and/or CYL 4 MISFIRE in t he DATA L IST f or
NO-l nt er mi t t ent mi sf i r e due to spar k pl ug f oul i ng (no
. mi sf i r e at t hi s t i me) .
18. Det er mi ne whi c h cyl i nder had t he mi sf i r e.
Does the misfire occur in the cylinder where the spark
plug was exchanged?
YES - Repl ac e t he faulty spar k pl ug, t hen go to st ep 40.
NO- Go to st ep 19.
11-110
20. Exc hange t he i nj ect or f rom t he pr obl em cyl i nder wi th
one f r om t he anot her cyl i nder .
21. St ar t t he engi ne, and let it i dle f or 2 mi nut es.
22. Test -dr i ve t he vehi c l e for sever al mi nut es i n t he range
ENGINE S PEED
VS S
RE L TP S ENS OR
A PPS E NS OR
MISFIRE, and/or CYL 4 MISFIRE in t he DATA L IST for
NO-l nt er mi t t ent mi sf i r e due to bad cont act at t he
i nj ect or connect or (no mi sf i r e at t hi s t i me). Chec k for
poor c onnec t i ons or l oose t er mi nal s at t he i nj ect or, A
24. Det er mi ne whi c h cyl i nder had t he mi sf i r e.
Does t he misfire occur in t he cylinder where t he inject or
was exchanged?
YES - Repl ac e t he faulty i nj ect or (see page 11-195),
NO- Go to st ep 25.
25. Do an engi ne c ompr essi on and a cyl i nder l eakdown
t est (see page 6-6).
Did t he engine pass bot h t est s?
NO-Repai r t he engi ne, t hen go to st ep 40.
26. Do t he VTEC rocker ar m t est (see page 6-7).
Did t he engine pass t he t est ?
NO-Repai r t he VTEC rocker ar m (see page 6-34), t hen
go to st ep 40.
31. Measur e t he vol t age bet ween body gr ound and t he
appr opr i at e ECM/ PCM connect or t er mi nal of t he
pr obl em cyl i nder (see t abl e).
PROBL EM DTC ECM/ PCM WIRE
CYL I NDER TERMI NAL COL OR
No. 1 P0301 C5 BRN
No. 2 P0302 C6 RED
No. 3 P0303 C7 BL U
No. 4 P0304 C8 YE L
ECM/ PCM CONNECTOR C (49P)
NO- Go to st ep 32.
33. Di sconnect t he i nj ect or 2P connect or f rom t he
pr obl em cyl i nder .
(cont' d)
11-111
PGM-FI S f st em
35. Measur e t he vol t age bet ween i nj ect or 2P c onnec t or
t er mi nal No. 1 and body gr ound.
INJECTOR 2P CONNECTOR
IGP (YEL/BLK)
NO-Repai r open i n t he wi r e bet ween t he i nj ect or and
PGM-FI mai n r el ay 1, t hen go to st ep 40.
37. Chec k f or cont i nui t y bet ween body gr ound and t he
ECM/ PCM connect or t er mi nal of t he pr obl em cyl i nder
(see t abl e).
CYL INDER TERMINAL COL OR
No. 1 P0301 C5 BRN
No. 2 P0302 C6 RED
No. 3 P0303 C7 BL U
No. 4 P0304 C8 YE L
INJ2 (RED)
INJ1 (BRN)
INJ3 (BLU)
8NJ4 (YEL)
Li 1 1 2
l <
3 | r | 8 9 | 1 0 |
r
1
13 I 4 h f ; l i 6 l l 7 l l 8 l /
120|21| 1
yy\ J
22 23 24
><
/
120|21| 1
yy\ J
29 30 31
/
A//
'AA
t
/|43|44|45|46|/'
and t he i nj ect or, t hen go to st ep 40.
NO- Go to st ep 38.
11-112
38. Check f or cont i nui t y bet ween appr opr i at e i nj ect or 2P
connect or t ermi nal No. 2 and t he ECM/ PCM connect or
t er mi nal of t he pr obl em cyl i nder (see t abl e).
No. 1 P0301 C5 BRN
No. 2 P0302 C6 RED
No. 3 P0303 C7 BL U
No. 4 P0304 C8 YE L
I NJ ECTOR 2P CONNECTOR
1 2
Wire side of female terminals INJ
INJ2 (RED) INJ3 ( BL U)
1
INJ1 (BRN)
ECM/PCM
CONNECTOR C (49P)
INJ4 (YEL )
NO-Repai r open in t he wi r e bet ween t he E CM/ PCM
and t he i nj ect or, t hen go to st ep 40.
39. At t he i nj ect or si de, measur e t he r esi st ance bet ween
i nj ect or 2P connect or t er mi nal s No. 1 and No. 2.
I NJ ECTOR 2P CONNECTOR
IGP INJ
Is t here 10-13 Q?
NO-Repl ac e t he i nj ect or (see page 11-195), t hen go to
st ep 40.
11-293).
(see page 11-5).
ENGINE S PEED
VS S
REL TP S ENS OR
CLV (cal cul at ed l oad val ue)
A PPS E NS OR
Is DTC P0301, P0302, P0303, or P0304 indicat ed?
t he i gni ti on c oi l s, t he i nj ect or s, and the ECM/ PCM,
t hen go to t he t r oubl eshoot i ng for DTC P0300, P0301,
P0302, P0303, or P0304 (see page 11 106)
NO- Go to st ep 48.
(cont' d)
11-113
PGM-FI S f st em
P0303, or P0304 in t he DTCs MENU wi t h t he HDS.
c onnec t i ons or l oose t er mi nal s at t he i gni ti on c oi l s,
t he i nj ect or s, and t he ECM/ PCM, t hen go to st ep 1. If
t he sc r een i ndi cat es EXECUTI NG, keep dri vi ng unti l a
*o ? ir>/~fatotho p r y / p r w if it cloes not have t he l at est
51. Test -dr i ve t he vehi c l e for sever al mi nut es in t he r ange
ENGINE S PE E D
VS S
RE L TP S ENS OR
A PPS E NS OR
52. Chec k for Pendi ng or Conf i r med wi t h t he HDS.
is DTC P0301, P0302, P0303, or P0304 indicat ed?
t he i gni ti on c oi l s, t he i nj ect or s, and t he ECM/ PCM. If
NO- Go to st ep 53.
- Does t he screen indicat e PASSED?
YES - l f t h e ECM/ PCM was updat ed, t r oubl eshoot i ng i s
t he or i gi nal ECM/ PCM (see page 11-204). if any ot her
c onnec t i ons or l oose t er mi nal s at t he i gni ti on c oi l s,
t he i nj ect or s, and t he ECM/ PCM. If t he ECM/ PCM was
subst i t ut ed, go to st ep 1. If t he sc r een i ndi cat es
11-114
DTC P0325: Knock Sensor Ci rcui t Malfuncti on
NOTE: Bef ore you t r oubl eshoot , r ecor d al l f r eeze data
t r oubl eshoot i ng i nf ormat i on (see page 11 -3).
1. Tur n t he Igni ti on swi t c h to ON (II).
wi t hout l oad (A/T i n P or N, M/T In neut ral ) unt i l t he
4. Hol d t he engi ne speed bet ween 3,0004,000 r pm f or
at l east 10 sec onds.
Is DTC P0325 indicated? '. .
knock sensor and t he E CM/ PCM.
8. Di sc onnec t t he knock sensor 1P connect or (see page
11-201).
.hi *
3J4|5I.6 I 7[8 9 |10|
11 12 13 1 4 1 5 16 1718
/
20 21
I
22 23 24
></
><
/ / /
I
29 30 31 32U
/
A/
/ /
I
/ / | 4 3 | 4 4 | 4 5 | 4 6 | /
K S ( RED/ BL U)
YES - Repai r shor t in t he wi r e bet ween t he ECM/ PCM
(C46) and t he knock sensor , t hen go to st ep 14.
NO- Go to st ep 11.
11. Connec t t he knock s ens or 1P connect or t er mi nal to
- K NOCK S E NS OR 1P CONNECTOR
K S ( RED/ BL U)
J UMPER WI RE
12. Check f or cont i nui t y bet ween ECM/PCM connect or
ECM/ PCM CONNECTOR C |4SP)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
29 30
13 14 15 16 17 1 8 / 2 0 21 1
43 44 45 46
K S ( RED/ BL U)
(C46) and t he knock sensor , t hen go to st ep 14.
;^ ont d)
11-115
PGM-FI S f st em
13. Repl ace t he knock sensor (see page 11 -201).
11-293).
18. Hold t he engi ne speed bet ween 3,0004,000 rpm f or
YES-Tr oubl eshoot i ng is c ompl et e. If any ot her
go to t he i ndi cat ed DTCs t r oubl eshoot i ng.
NO-l f t he sc r een i ndi cat es FAI L ED, check f or poor
connect i ons or l oose t er mi nal s at t he knock sensor
and t he ECM/ PCM, t hen go to st ep 1. If t he sc r een
i ndi cat es NOT COMPL ETED, go to st ep 18.
22. Hold t he engi ne speed bet ween 3, 000-4, 000 rpm f or
t he knock sensor and t he ECM/ PCM. If t he ECM/ PCM
was subst i t ut ed, go to st ep 1.
NO- Go to st ep 24.
c onnec t i ons or l oose t er mi nal s at t he knock sensor
and t he ECM/ PCM. If t he ECM/ PCM was updat ed,
go to st ep 1. If t he sc r een i ndi cat es NOT COMPL ETED,
go to st ep 22.
11-116
DTC P033S: CKP Sensor No Si gnal
NOTE; Bef ore you t r oubl eshoot r ecor d all f reeze dat a
CK P sensor and t he E CM/ PCM.
6. Di sconnect t he CK P sensor 3P connect or .
8. Measur e t he vol t age bet ween CK P sensor 3P
CK P S E NS OR 3P CONNECTOR
IGP ( YEL / BL K )
NO-Repai r open in t he wi r e bet ween t he CK P sensor
and PGM-FI mai n rel ay 1, t hen go to st ep 19.
CK P (BLU)
Is there about 5 V?
NO- Go to st ep 11.
1
L G ( BRN/ YEL ) | | IGP ( YEL / BL K )

NO-Repai r open i n t he wi r e bet ween t he CKP sensor
and G101; M/T (see page 22-20), A/ T (see page 22-22),
(cont ' d)
11-117
PGSVI-FI S f st em
l r =
11 12
29 30
3 I 4 | 5 | 6 1/Tj"
I i l 4 l l 5 | l 6| l 7| l 8t /
31
14 15 16 17 1 8 / 2 0 21
40 \ / \ / \ *3144145146j/ j 48' | / |
9 10
CK P ( BL U/ YEL )
ierminai side of femaie-terminais
(C32) and t he CK P sensor , t hen go to st ep 19.
NO- Go to st ep 15.
15. Connec t CK P sensor 3P c onnec t or t er mi nal No. 1 t o
CK P (BL U)
J UMPER WI RE
E CM/ PCM CONNECTOR C (49P)
J -i I a 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 | 8 9 hoi
11 12 13 14(15 16 17(18 20 21
i
L
22 23 24
i
L
29 30 31 3 2 | /
A/ /
i
L
A
^3144145146J^l 481/1
CK P ( BL U/ YEL )
(C32) and t he CK P sensor , t hen go to st ep 19.
18. Repl ace t he CK P sensor (see page 11-198).
20. Tur n t he i gni t i on swi t ch to ON (I I ).
11-293).
(see page 11-5).
t he CK P sensor and t he ECM/ PCM, t hen go to st ep 1.
11-118
sof t war e { see page 11-203), or subst i t ut e a
t he CK P sensor and t he ECM/ PCM. If t he ECM/ PCM
DTC P0339: CK P Sensor Ci rcui t Intermi ttent
Interrupti on
3. St ar t t he engi ne, and let it i dle f or 10 sec onds.
4. Chec k t he CK P NOISE in t he DATA L IST wi t h t he HDS.
Are 0 count s indicat ed?
NO- Go to st ep 5.
5. Test -dr i ve t he vehi c l e f or sever al mi nut es in t he r ange
ENGINE S PEED
VS S
6. Chec k t he CK P NOISE in t he DATA L IST wi t h t he HDS.
CK P sensor and t he E CM/ PCM.
7. Chec k for poor connect i ons or l oose t er mi nal s at
t hese l ocat i ons:
CK P sensor
ECM/ PCM
Engi ne gr ound
Body gr ound
st ep 11.
8. Remove t he c am chai n c ase (see page 6-13), and
check f or damage on t he CK P pul se plate.
Is t he pulse plat e damaged?
YES - Repl ac e t he CK P pul se plate (see page 7-30),
NO- Go to st ep 9.
(cont' d)
11-119
PGM-FI S f st em
10. Repl ac e t he CK P sensor (see page 11 -198).
11-293).
14. Do t he CK P pattern c l ear /CKP pattern l ear n pr ocedur e
(see page 11-5).
15. St art t he engi ne, and let it i dle f or 10 sec onds.
v p s _ rho^ i <f or poor c onnec t i ons or l oose t er mi nal s at
t he CK P sensor and t he ECM/ PCM, t hen go to st ep 1.
DTC P0351: No. 1 Cyl i nder Igni ti on Coi l Ci rcui t
Malfuncti on
DTC P0352: No. 2 Cyl i nder Ignition Coi l Ci rcui t
Malfuncti on
Malfuncti on
Malfuncti on
Is DTC P0351, P0352, P0353, and/or P0354 indicat ed?
i gni ti on coi l and t he ECM/ PCM. B
6. Exc hange t he i gni ti on coi l f r om t he pr obl em cyl i nder
Is an ignit ion coil DTC indicat ed at t he exchanged
cylinder?
YES - Repl ac e t he f ault y i gni ti on coi l (see page 4-20),
t hen go t o st ep 25.
NO- Go to st ep 9.
10. Check t he No. 13 IG COIL (15 A) f use i n t he
Is t he fuse OK?
NO- Go to st ep 12.
11-120
11. Test t he i gni t i on coi l rel ay (A) i n t he under -hood
f use/r el ay box (see page 22-93).
Is the Ignition coil relay OK ?
NO-Repl ac e t he i gni ti on coi l r el ay, t hen go to st ep 25.
12. Remove t he i gni ti on coi l rel ay (A) f r om t he
13. Di sconnect all i gni ti on coi l 3P c onnec t or s.
14. Chec k f or cont i nui t y bet ween No. 1 i gni t i on coi l 3P
No.1 IGNITION COI L 3P CONNECTOR
A .
+B (BL K / WHT)
YES - Repai r shor t in t he wi r e bet ween t he i gni ti on
coi l s and t he i gni ti on coi l r el ay. Al so r epl ace t he
No. 13 IG COIL (15 A) f use, t hen go to st ep 25.
NO-Chec k t he under -hood f use/r el ay box, and r epl ace
it if needed (see page 22-85), t hen go t o st ep 25.
15. Rei nst al l t he i gni ti on coi l r el ay.
16. Di sconnect t he i gni ti on coi l 3P connect or f r om t he
pr obl em cyl i nder .
(cont' d)
11-121
3M-FI S f st em
[DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd)
18. Measur e t he vol t age bet ween i gni ti on coi l 3P
connect or t er mi nal No. 3 of t he pr obl em cyl i nder and
body gr ound (see t abl e).
PROBL EM DTC
CYL I NDER
No. 1 P0351
No. 2 P0352
No. 3 P0353
No. 4 P0354
No.1 IGNITION COI L 3P CONNECTOR
+B (BL K / WHT)
NO-Repai r open i n t he wi r e bet ween t he i gni t i on coi l
and t he i gni ti on coi l r el ay, t hen go to st ep 25.
20. Chec k f or cont i nui t y bet ween i gni ti on coi l 3P
connect or t er mi nal No. 2 of t he pr obl em cyl i nder and
body gr ound (see t abl e).
PROBL EM DTC
CYL I NDER
No. 1 P0351
No. 2 P0352
No. 3 P0353
No. 4 P0354
IGNITION COI L 3P CONNECTOR
GND (BLK)
NO-Repai r open i n t he wi r e bet ween t he i gni ti on coi l
11-122
ECM/ PCM connect or t er mi nal of t he pr obl em cyl i nder
(see t abl e).
PROBL EM DTC ECM/ PCM WI RE
No. 1 P0351 C15 YEL / GRN
No. 2 P0352 C16 BL U/ RED
No. 3 P0353 C17 WHT/ BL U
No. 4 P0354 C18 BRN
I GPL S2 (BL U/ RED) I GPL S3 (WHT/ BL U)
YES - Repai r shor t in the wi r e bet ween t he ECM/ PCM
and t he i gni ti on c oi l , t hen go to st ep 25.
NO- Go t o st ep 24.
24. Chec k f or cont i nui t y bet ween appr opr i at e i gni t i on coi l
3P c onnec t or t er mi nal No. 1 and t he ECM/ PCM
c onnec t or t er mi nal of t he pr obl em cyl i nder (see
t abl e).
CYL I NDER TERMI NAL COL OR
No. 1 P035T"
1
C15 YEL / GRN
No. 2 P0352 C16 I BL U/ RED
No. 3 P0353 C17 WHT/ BL U
No. 4 P0354 C18 BRN
IGNITION COIL 3P CONNECTOR
IGPLS Wire side of female terminals
IGPLS2 1GPLS3
(BLU/RED) (WH T/B LU)
IGPLS1 (Y EL/GRN)
E CM/ PCM
CONNECTOR C (49P)
1 12
12
23
13 16
IGPLS4 (BRN)
17 18 20
43 44 45 46
9 1101
and t he i gni t i on c oi l , t hen go to st ep 25.
(cont' d)
PGM-FI S f st em
11-293).
t he i gni ti on coi l and t he ECM/ PCM, t hen go to st ep 1.
t he i gni ti on coi l and t he ECM/ PCM. If t he ECM/ PCM
DTC P0365: CMP Sensor B Ci rcui t No Si gnal
Chec k for poor connect i ons or l oose t er mi nal s at CMP
sensor B and t he E CM/ PCM.
6. Di sc onnec t t he CMP sensor B 3P connect or .
8. Measur e t he vol t age bet ween CMP sensor B 3P
CMP SENSOR B 3P CONNECTOR
1 2
IGP (Y EL/BLK )
NO-Repai r open in t he wi r e bet ween CMP sensor B
and PGM-FI mai n rel ay 1, t hen go to st ep 18.
11-124
9. Measur e t he vol t age bet ween CMP sensor B 3P
connect or t ermi nal No. 1 and body gr ound.
CMP SENSOR B 3P CONNECTOR
CMPB (GRN)
NO- Go to st ep 11.
10. Measur e t he vol t age bet ween CMP sensor 3P
CMP S E NS OR B 3P CONNECTOR
1
16 ( BRN/ YEL ) | [ IGP ( YEL / BL K )

NO-Repai r open i n t he wi r e bet ween CMP sensor B
J l | 2
3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 | 8 9| 10|
1
11 12 13 14(15 16 17)18 20 21 1
1
1
22 23 24
1
1
1
29 30 31 3 2 L /
/
1
1
| 4 0 | /
] 431441451461/^
48M
CMPB (GRN)
. (C31) and CMP sensor B, t hen go to st ep 18.
NO- Go to st ep 15.
15. Chec k f or cont i nui t y bet ween CMP sensor B 3P
t er mi nal C31.
CMP S E NS OR B 3P CONNECTOR
CMPB (GRN)
J l | 2
3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 8 9 hol
1
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
/
20 21 1
: 1
22 23 24
><
/
><
/ /
/
1
: 1
29 30 31
/
AA
/ /
1
:
| 4 0 | /
/
1 4 3 | 4 4 | 4 5 | 4 6 | /
481/|
CMPB (GRN)
(C31) and CMP sensor B, t hen go to st ep 18.
(cont ' d)
11-125
PGM-FI S f st ei n
17. Repl ac e CMP sensor B (see page 11-198).
11-293).
Is DTC P0365 Indicated?
CMP sensor B and t he ECM/ PCM, t hen go to st ep 1.
CMP sensor B and t he ECM/ PCM. If t he ECM/ PCM was
DTC P0369: CMP Sensor B Ci rcui t Intermi ttent
Interrupti on
NOTE: Bef or e you t r oubl eshoot , record all f reeze dat a
4. Chec k t he CMP B NOISE in t he DATA L I ST wi t h t he
HDS.
Are 0 counts indicated?
NO- Go to st ep 5.
ENGINE S PEED
VS S
6. Check t he CMP B NOISE i n t he DATA L I ST wi t h t he
HDS.
Are 0 counts indicated?
Check f or poor c onnec t i ons or l oose t er mi nal s at CMP
sensor B and t he ECM/ PCM. B
7. Chec k f or poor c onnec t i ons or l oose t er mi nal s at
CMP sensor B
ECM/ PCM
Engi ne gr ound
9 Body gr ound
Are the connections and terminals OK ?
NO-Repai r t he c onnec t or s or t er mi nal s, t hen go to
st ep 11.
8. Check f or damage on t he CMP pul se plate B (see page
6-30).
Is the pulser plate damaged?
YES - Repl ac e t he CMP pul se plate B (see page 6-30),
NO- Go to st ep 9.
11-126
10. Repl ac e CMP sensor B (see page 11-198).
11-293).
CMP sensor B and t he ECM/ PCM, t hen go to st ep 1.
DTC P050A: Col d St art Idle Ai r Cont rol Syst em
Perf ormance Probl em
and any on-boar d snapshot , and r evi ew t he genej al
2. Chec k f or Pendi ng or Conf i r med DTCs wi t h t he HDS,
Are any Pending or Confirmed DTCs ot her t han P050A
indicat ed?
YE S - Go to t he i ndi cat ed DTCs t r oubl eshoot i ng,II
NO- Go to st ep 3.
3. Chec k f or poor connect i ons or a bl ockage at t he i ntake
ai r duct .
Is it OK?
NO-Rec onnec t or repai r t he i ntake ai r duct , t hen go to
st ep 19.
4. Chec k f or damage at t he ai r c l eaner housi ng.
Is it OK?
NO-Repl ac e t he ai r cl eaner housi ng (see page
11 -332), t hen go to st ep 19.
5. Chec k for di rt or debr i s in t he ai r cl eaner el ement .
Is it dirt y?
YES - Repl ac e t he ai r cl eaner el ement or r emove t he
debr i s (see page 11-333), t hen go to st ep 19.
NO- Go to st ep 6.
(cont' d)
11-127
PGM-FI S f st em
6. Let t he engi ne cool unti l t he val ue of ECT S ENS OR 1 i s
122 F (50 C) or l ess.
8. St ar t t he engi ne, and let it i dle f or 10 sec onds or mor e.
9. Moni t or t he OBD S TA TUS for DTC P050A i n t he DTCs
YE S - Go to st ep. 10.
NO-l f t he sc r een i ndi cat es PAS S E D, i nt ermi t t ent
f ai l ur e, t he syst em i s OK at t hi s t i me. Chec k for poor
c onnec t i ons or l oose t er mi nal s at t he throttle body,
t he MAF sensor /IAT sensor , and t he ECM/ PCM. If t he
10. Do t he E TCS TE S T in t he INSPECTION MENU wi t h t he
HDS.
Is the THROTTLE ACTUATOR CONTROL VALVE
normal?
NO-Repl ac e t he t hrot t l e body (see page 11-335), t hen
go to st ep 19.
11. St ar t t he engi ne. Hol d t he engi ne s peed at 3,000 r pm
12. Whi l e hol di ng t he engi ne speed at 2,500 rpm f or 30
s ec onds , check t he MAF S ENS OR in t he DATA L IST
wi t h t he HDS.
Is there about 5.6-7.8 gm/s (M/T) or 6.5-9.1 gm/s
(A/T)?
14. Al l ow t he engi ne to cool to ambi ent t emper at ur e.
17. Note t he val ue of IAT S ENS OR qui ckl y i n t he DATA
L I ST wi t h t he HDS.
18. Compar e t he val ue of t he IAT S ENS OR and t he
ambi ent t emper at ur e.
Does the value of the IAT SENSOR differ 5.4 F (3 C) or
more?
YES - Repl ac e t he MAF sensor /IAT sensor (see page
11 -199), t hen go to st ep 19.
NO-Chec k for di rt, c ar bon, or damage in t he throttle
bor e. If t her e i s di rt or c ar bon, cl ean t he throttle body
(see page 11 -332), t hen go to st ep 19. If t her e i s
damage in t he throttle bor e, r epl ace t he throttle body
(see page 11-335), t hen go to st ep 19.
11-293).
122 F (50 C) or l ess.
23. St ar t t he engi ne, and let it i dle for 10 sec onds or mor e.
Is DTC P050A indicated?
t he throttle body, t he MAF sensor /IAT sensor , and t he
ECM/ PCM, t hen go to st ep 1.
NO- Go to st ep 25.
25. Moni t or t he OBD S TATUS for DTC P050A i n t he DTCs
c onnec t i ons or l oose t er mi nal s at t he throttle body,
t he MAF sensor /IAT sensor , and t he ECM/ PCM, t hen
go to st ep 1. If t he sc r een i ndi cat es EXECUTI NG, keep
i dl i ng unti l a resul t c omes on. If t he sc r een i ndi cat es
22.
11-128
DTC P050B: Col d St art Ignition Ti mi ng Control
Syst em Perf ormance Probl em
Are any Pending or Confirmed DTCs ot her t han P050B
indicat ed?
YE S - Go to t he i ndi cat ed DTCs t r oubl es hoot i ng.
NO- Go to st ep 3.
3. Check for poor connect i ons or a bl ockage at t he i ntake
ai r duct .
Is it OK?
NO-Rec onnec t or repai r t he i ntake ai r duct , t hen go to
st ep 24.
4. Check for damage at t he ai r c l eaner housi ng.
Is it OK?
NO-Repl ac e t he ai r cl eaner housi ng (see page
11 -332), t hen go to st ep 24.
5. Chec k f or di rt or debr i s in t he ai r c l eaner el ement .
Is it dirt y?
YES - Repl ac e t he ai r cl eaner el ement or r emove t he
debr i s (see page 11 -333), t hen go t o st ep 24.
NO- Go to st ep 6.
122 F (50 C) or l ess.
9. Moni t or t he OBD S TATUS for DTC P050B in t he DTCs
f ai l ur e, t he syst em i s OK at t hi s t i me. Check f or poor
connect i ons or l oose t er mi nal s at t he CK P sensor , t he
throttle body, t he MAF sensor /IAT sensor , ECT sensor
1, E CT sensor 2, and t he ECM/ PCM. If t he sc r een
i ndi cat es EXECUTI NG, keep i dl i ng unti l a r esul t
c omes on. If t he sc r een i ndi cat es OUT OF CONDITION
or NOT COMPL ETED, go to st ep 6.
Is t he ignit ion t iming OK?
NO- Go to st ep 11.
11. Check f or damage at t he CK P sensor (see page
11-198) and t he CK P pul se plate (see page 7-30).
Is t he CKP sensor and/or t he CKP pulse plat e damaged?
YES - Repl ac e t he CK P sensor (see page 11-198) and/or
t he CK P pul se plate (see page 7-30), t hen go to st ep 6.
NO- Go to st ep 31.
12. Do t he ETCS TE S T i n t he INSPECTION MENU wi t h t he
HDS.
Is t he THROTTLE ACTUATOR CONTROL VALVE
normal?
NO-Repl ac e t he throttle body (see page 11-335), t hen
go to st ep 24.
(cont' d)
11-129
PGM-FI S f st em
14. Whi l e hol di ng t he engi ne speed at 2,500 rpm f or 30
s ec onds , c hec k t he MAF S ENS OR in t he DATA L I ST
wi t h t he HDS.
Is t here about 5.6-7.8 gm/s (M/T) or 6.5-9.1 gm/s
(A/T)?
11 -199), t hen go to st ep 24.
16. Drai n t he cool ant (see page 10-6).
17. Remove ECT sensor 1 (see page 11-200), and ECT
sensor 2 (see page 11 -200).
18. Al l ow t he s ens or s to cool to ambi ent t emper at ur e.
20. Connec t ECT sensor 1 and ECT sensor 2 to t hei r 2P
c onnec t or s, but do not i nst al l t hem.
22. Note t he val ue of E CT S ENS OR 1 and E CT S ENS OR 2
qui ckl y in t he DATA L IST wi t h t he HDS.
23. Compar e t he val ue of ECT S ENS OR 1 and t he ambi ent
t emper at ur e, and t he val ue of ECT S ENS OR 2 and t he
ambi ent t emper at ur e i ndi vi dual l y.
Does eit her sensor differ more t han 5.4 F (3 C) from t he
ambient t emperat ure?
YES - Repl ac e t he sensor t hat di f f ered mor e t han 5.4 F
(3 C) f r om t he ambi ent t emper at ur e, t hen go to st ep
24.
NO-Chec k and repai r any pr obl ems wi t h t he
f ol l owi ng i t ems. Repai r or r epl ace t hem if needed,
t hen go to st ep 24. If all of t he i t ems ar e OK, go to st ep
31.
Engi ne c ompr essi on and cyl i nder l eakdown
VTEC syst em
Engi ne oi l
A/ C syst em
Power st eer i ng
26. Do t he ECM/ PCM i dle l earn pr ocedur e (see page '
11-293).
122 F(50 C) or l ess.
28. St art t he engi ne, and let it i dle f or 10 sec onds or mor e.
Is DTC P050B indicat ed?
t he CK P sensor , t he throttle body, t he MAF sensor /IAT
sensor , ECT sensor 1, ECT sensor 2, and t he
ZC%lTZtm
f
Lhen go to st ep 1. '
NO- Go to st ep 30.
30. Moni t or t he OBD S TATUS for DTC P050B in t he DTCs
connect i ons or l oose t er mi nal s at t he CK P sensor , t he
throttle body, t he MAF sensor /IAT sensor , ECT sensor
1, ECT sensor 2, and t he ECM/ PCM, t hen go to st ep 1.
If t he sc r een i ndi cat es EXECUTI NG, keep i dl i ng unti l a
11-130
- c"
31. Updat e t he ECM/ PCM If It does not have t he l at est
11-293).
122 F (50 C) or l ess.
Is DTC P050B indicated?
t he CK P sensor , t he throttle body, t he MAF sensor /IAT
sensor , ECT sensor 1, ECT s ens or 2, and t he
ECM/ PCM. If t he ECM/ PCM was updat ed, subst i t ut e a
known-good ECM/ PCM (see page 11 -7), t hen go t o
st ep 33. If t he ECM/ PCM was subst i t ut ed, go t o st ep 1.
NO- Go to st ep 36.
36. Moni t or t he OBD S TATUS f or DTC P050B i n t he DTCs
YES - l f t h e ECM/ PCM was updat ed, t r oubl eshoot i ng i s
NO-l f t he sc r een i ndi cat es FAI L ED, check for poor
c onnec t i ons or l oose t er mi nal s at t he CK P sensor , t he
throttle body, t he MAF sensor /IAT sensor , E CT
sensor 1, E CT sensor 2, and t he ECM/ PCM. If t he
ECM/ PCM was subst i t ut ed, go to st ep 1. If t he sc r een
i ndi cat es EXECUTI NG, keep i dl i ng unti l a resul t
or NOT COMPL ETED, go to st ep 33.
DTC P0562: Char gi ng Syst em Low Vol t age
NOTE:
9 Bef or e you t r oubl eshoot , r ecor d all f reeze dat a and
If any hi gh cur r ent l oad ac c essor i es ar e i nst al l ed, t hi s
DTC c an be set .
If DTC P16BB and/or P16BC i s st or ed at t he s ame t i me
as DTC P0562, t r oubl eshoot DTC P16BB and/or P16BC
f i r st , t hen r echeck f or DTC P0562.
A / Co n
Temper at ur e cont rol at maxi mum cool
Bl ower f an at maxi mum speed
Rear wi ndow def ogger on
Headl i ght s on hi gh beam
5. Hol d t he engi ne speed at 2,000 r pm (A/T i n P or N, M/T
i n neut ral ) f or 1 mi nut e.
YES - Repl ac e t he al t ernat or (see page 4-32), t hen go to
st ep 7.
al t ernat or and t he under -hood f use/r el ay box, and
check t he battery per f or mance (see page 22-90).K
(cont ' d)
11-131
PGIViF! Swstei
DTC Traubleshootimg (cont' d)
- 9. Do the ECM/ PCM i dle l earn pr ocedur e (see page
11-293).
11. Check under t hese condi t i ons:
A/ C on
@ Temper at ur e cont rol at maxi mum cool
12. Hold t he engi ne speed at 2,000 rpm (A/T in P or N, M/T
in neut ral) f or 1 mi nut e.
t he al t ernat or and t he under -hood f use/r el ay box,
i ndi cat ed DTCs t roubl eshoot i ng.
DTC P0563: ECM/PCM Power Sour c e Ci rcui t
Unexpect ed Vol t age
4. Wai t 10 sec onds.
5. Tur n the i gni ti on swi t ch to ON (II).
Check for poor connect i ons or l oose t er mi nal s at
PGM-FI mai n rel ay 1 and t he E CM/ PCM.
9. Di sconnect ECM/ PCM connect or A (49P).
10. Measur e the vol t age bet ween ECM/ PCM connect or
t er mi nal A7 and body gr ound.
MRLY (RED/BLK )
J 1 1 /
3
4
I
5
I
6
I
7
1/
9 1101
3
11
/
/ / | 1 5 16 17 18 19 20 21
3
22 23 24
><
25
><
26 27 28
3
29 30
/
3 2 / 34 35 36
/ /
| / ] 4 1 421431441^] 4 6 1 / / / I
NO~Go to st ep 11.
11-132
11 Remove PGM-FI mai n r el ay 1 (A) f r om t he under -hood
f use/r el ay box.
MRL Y ( RED/ BL K )
He
22
29
23
30
J 2 i T
25
34
17|18
> < 26j27j28j '
42|43|44|X[46
19
20
21
(A7) and PGM-FI mai n r el ay 1, t hen go to st ep 16.
NO- Go to st ep 15.
13. Remove PGM-FI mai n r el ay 1 (A) f r om t he under -hood
f use/r el ay box.
14. Measur e t he vol t age bet ween ECM/ PCM connect or
IGP ( YEL / BL K )
, h l /
3|4|5l 6 | 7 | > 9 hoi
1
11
/ /
/ l i s 16 1718 19 20 21
i

i
1
22 2324 25
><
262728
i

i
1
29 30
/
32l/ 343536
/
i

i
1/1*1
42
i
43144M 46 | X
AA
YES - Repai r shor t to power in t he wi r e bet ween t he
ECM/ PCM (A9) and PGM-FI mai n rel ay 1, t hen go to
st ep 16.
NO- Go to st ep 15.
15. Test PGM-FI mai n rel ay 1 (see page 22-93).
Is PGM-FI main relay 1 OK ?
NO-Repl ac e PGM-FI mai n rel ay 1, t hen go t o st ep 16.
(cont' d)
11-133
PGM-FI Syst em
11-293).
21. Wai t 10 s ec onds .
PGM-FI mai n r el ay 1 and t he ECM/ PCM, t hen go to
st ep 1.
PGM-FI mai n r el ay 1 and t he ECM/ PCM. If t he
DTC P0602: ECM/PCM Pr ogr ammi ng Er r or
NOTE:
Bef ore you t r oubl eshoot , r ecor d all f reeze dat a and
Thi s DTC i s i ndi cat ed when an ECM/ PCM updat e i s not
c ompl et ed.
Do not t ur n t he i gni ti on swi t ch to ACC (I) or L OCK (0)
whi l e updat i ng t he ECM/ PCM. If you do, t he ECM/ PCM
c an be damaged.
1. Do t he ECM/ PCM updat e pr ocedur e (see page
11-203).
YES - Repl ac e t he ori gi nal ECM/ PCM (see page
11-204).B
NO-Updat e i s compl et e. If any ot her Pendi ng or
Conf i r med DTCs ar e i ndi cat ed, go to t he i ndi cat ed
DTCs t r oubl eshoot i ng B
11-134
DTC P; ECM/PCM Pr ocessor Malfuncti on
t i me. B
9. Tur n t he i gni ti on swi t ch t o ON (II).
YE S - l f t he ECM/ PCM was updat ed, subst i t ut e a
known-good ECM/ PCM (see page 11-7), t hen go t o
st ep 8. If t he ECM/ PCM was subst i t ut ed, go to st ep 1.
DTC P060A: PCM (A/T syst em) Internal Control
Modul e Malfuncti on
Is DTC P060A indicat ed?
t i me. H
4. Updat e t he PCM if it does not have t he latest sof t war e
(see page 11-203), or subst i t ut e a known-good PCM
(see page 11-7).
5. Chec k f or Pendi ng or Conf i r medDTCs wi t h t he HDS.
Is DTC P060A indicat ed?
YE S - l f t he PCM was updat ed, subst i t ut e a
known-good PCM (see page 11-7), t hen r echeck. If t he
PCM was subst i t ut ed, go to st ep 1.
NO-l f t he PCM was updat ed, t r oubl eshoot i ng i s
compl et e. If t he PCM was subst i t ut ed, r epl ace t he
ori gi nal PCM (see page 11-204). If any ot her Pendi ng
or Conf i r med DTCs ar e i ndi cat ed, go to t he i ndi cat ed
DTCs t r oubl es hoot i ng.
11-135
PGM-FI Syst em
DTC P062F: ECM/PCM Internal Cont rol
Modul e Keep Al i ve Memor y (KAM) Er r or
NOTE; Bef or e you t r oubl eshoot r ecor d all f r eeze data
Is DTC P062F Indicated?
t i me. B
Is DTC P062F indicated?
If t he ECM/ PCM was subst i t ut ed, go to st ep 1.
DTC P0630: VIN Not Pr ogr ammed or
Mi smat ch
NOTE:
9 Bef ore you t r oubl eshoot , r ecor d all f r eeze dat a and
Thi s DTC i s st or ed onl y when t he ECM/ PCM does not
have t he VIN i nf ormat i on of t he vehi c l e. Us e t he HDS
to i nput t he mi ssi ng VIN i nf ormat i on.
2. Chec k t he VIN wi t h t he HDS.
Does the HDS show the vehicle's VIN?
NO- Go to st ep 3.
3. Input t he VIN to t he ECM/ PCM wi t h t he HDS.
Does the screen show COMPLETE?
NO- Go t o st ep 4.
4. Chec k f or DTCs wi t h t he HDS.
Is DTC P062F indicated?
YE S - Go to t he DTC P062F t r oubl eshoot i ng (see page
11-136)J I
NO- Go to st ep 9.
7. Tur n t he i gni ti on swi t c h to ON (II), and wai t 5 sec onds.
ttme.i l
11-136
sof t ware (see page 11-203), or subst i t ut e a
known-good ECM/ PCM (see page 11 -7).
10. Check f or Pendi ng or Conf i r med DTCs wi th t he HDS.
If t he ECM/ PCM. was subst i t ut ed, go to st ep 1.
i ndi cat ed DTCs t roubl eshoot i ng.HI -
DTC P0685: ECM/PCM Power Control
Ci rcui t/Internal Ci rcui t Malfuncti on
NOTE:
Bef or e you t r oubl eshoot , r ecor d all f reeze dat a and
any on-boar d snapshot , and r evi ew t he gener al .
If t he pr obl em doesn' t ret urn after you c l ear t he DTC,
or it t hi s DTC i s st or ed i nt ermi t t ent l y, check f or l oose
t er mi nal s at t he IGP l i ne connect or s bef ore r epl aci ng
t he ECM/ PCM.
t i me. 1
12. St ar t t he engi ne, and let it i dle for 30 sec onds.
14. Tur n the i gni ti on swi t ch to ON (II).
YE S - l f the ECM/ PCM was updat ed, subst i t ut e a
known-good ECM/ PCM (see page 11-7), t hen go to
NO-l f the ECM/ PCM was updat ed, t r oubl eshoot i ng i s
compl et e. If the ECM/ PCM was subst i t ut ed, r epl ace
11-137
PGM-FI S f st em
DTC P0720: Output Shaf t (Countershaft)
Speed Sensor Ci rcui t Malfuncti on (M/T
model )
NOTE: Bef or e you' t r oubl eshoot , r ecor d all f r eeze dat a
1. St art t he engi ne. Hol d t he engi ne speed at 3,000 r pm
wi t hout l oad (in neut ral ) unti l t he radi at or f an c omes
2. Test -dr i ve sever al mi nut es.
3. Chec k t he C S HAFT S PD i n t he DATA L I ST wi t h t he
HDS.
Is any vehicle speed indicated?
out put shaf t (count ershaf t ) speed sensor and t he
E C M. I
NO- Go to st ep 4.
5. Di sc onnec t t he out put shaf t (count ershaf t ) speed
sensor 3P connect or .
7. Measur e t he vol t age bet ween output shaf t
(count ershaf t ) speed sensor 3P connect or t er mi nal
No. 1 and body gr ound.
OUTPUT S HAFT (COUNTERS HAFT)
S PE E D S E NS OR 3P CONNECTOR
1
VCC1 ( YEL / RED)
Is there about 5 V?
NO-Repai r open in t he wi r e bet ween t he ECM (C13)
and t he out put shaf t (count ershaf t ) speed sensor ,
(count ershaf t ) speed sensor 3P connect or t er mi nal
NC (BL K / WHT)
Is there about 5 V?
NO- Go to st ep 10.
(count ershaf t ) speed sensor 3P connect or t er mi nal s
No. 1 and No. 3.
VCC1 ( YEL / RED)
H2H
S GI (GRN/ WHT)
Is there about 5 V?
NO-Repai r open in t he wi r e bet ween t he ECM (C14)
and t he out put shaf t (count ershaf t ) speed sensor ,
12. Di sc onnec t ECM connect or B (49P).
11-138
13. Check f or cont i nui t y bet ween ECM connect or t er mi nal
B38 and body gr ound.
ECM CONNECTOR B (49P)
TJ J 71
02
32J33 34 35 36
47
NC (BL K / WHT)
Is there cont inuit y?
YES - Repai r shor t in t he wi r e bet ween t he ECM (B38)
and t he out put shaft (count ershaf t ) speed sensor ,
NO- Go to st ep 14.
14. Connec t out put shaft (count ershaf t ) speed sensor 3P
connect or t er mi nal No. 2 to body gr ound wi t h a
j umper wi r e.
OUTPUT S HAFT (COUNTERSHAFT)
S PE E D S ENS OR 3P CONNECTOR
NC (BL K / WHT)
J UMPER WIRE
15. Check for cont i nui t y bet ween ECM c onnec t or t er mi nal
ECM CONNECTOR B (49P)
J 1 l /
3
TJ /71/ / /Ho!
1
/ V
/ /V
/
/V V y
E
1
/ /
24
><
/
x:
/ /
E
1
/ /
31 3 2 3 3 34 35 36
/
38
E
| / / | 4 5 | 4 6 j _ 4 7
1/1
NC (BL K / WHT)
NO-Repai r open in t he wi r e bet ween t he ECM (B38)
and t he output shaf t (count ershaf t ) speed sensor ,
17. Repl ace t he output shaf t (count ershaf t ) speed sensor
(see page 11-201).
18. Reconnect all connect or s.
20. Reset t he ECM wi t h t he HDS.
21. Do t he ECM i dle l earn pr ocedur e (see page 11 -293).
176 F (80 C)
Tr ansmi ssi on in 5th
Engi ne speed bet ween 2,000 3,000 rpm
Dri ve f or sever al mi nut es, t hen decel er at e (wi th t he
throttle fully cl osed) for 8 sec onds
t he output shaf t (count ershaf t ) speed sensor and t he
ECM, t hen go to st ep 1.
NO- Go to st ep 24.
(cont' d)
11-139
PGM-FI S f stem
YES-Tr oubl es hoot i ng i s compl et e. If any ot her
c onnec t i ons or l oose t er mi nal s at t he out put shaf t
(count er shaf t ) speed sensor and t he ECM, t hen go to
st ep 1. If t he sc r een i ndi cat es NOT COMPL ETED, go t o
st ep 22.
26. Updat e t he ECM if it does not have t he l at est sof t war e
(see page 11-203), or subst i t ut e a known-good ECM
(see page 11-7).
176 F (80 C)
Tr ans mi s s i on in 5th
Dri ve f or sever al mi nut es, t hen decel er at e (wi th t he
throttle f ully c l osed) for 8 sec onds
t he out put shaf t (count ershaf t ) speed sensor and t he
ECM. If t he ECM was updat ed, subst i t ut e a
known-good ECM (see page 11-7), t hen go to st ep 27.
If t he ECM was subst i t ut ed, go to st ep 1.
NO- Go to st ep 29.
YE S - l f t he ECM was updat ed, t r oubl eshoot i ng i s
c ompl et e. If t he ECM was subst i t ut ed, r epl ace t he
or i gi nal ECM (see page 11-204). If any ot her Pendi ng
or Conf i r med DTCs wer e i ndi cat ed in st ep 28, go to
t he i ndi cat ed DTCs t r oubl es hoot i ng.
c onnec t i ons or l oose t er mi nal s at t he out put shaf t
(count ershaf t ) speed sensor and t he ECM. If t he ECM
was updat ed, subst i t ut e a known-good ECM (see
page 11-7), t hen go to st ep 27. If t he ECM was
DTC P1109: BARO Sensor Ci rcui t Out of Range
High
t i me.
4. Updat e t he ECM/ PCM if it does not have t he latest
11-140
1
DTC PUI S : ECT Sensor 1 Ci rcui t
Range/Perf ormance Probl em
NOTE:
c Bef ore you t r oubl eshoot , r ecor d all f reeze dat a and
P1116.
1. Check for poor connect i ons or l oose t er mi nal s at ECT
sensor 1 and ECT sensor 2.
NO-Repai r t he c onnec t or s or t er mi nal s, t hen go to
st ep 27.
Are DTC P1116 and P2183 indicat ed at t he same t ime?
NO- Go to st ep 4.
. 4. St art t he engi ne, and let it i dle f or 10 mi nut es.
5. Chec k ECT S ENS OR 1 in t he DATA L I ST wi t h t he HDS.
Is about 113 F (45 C) or less indicat ed?
YES - Repl ac e ECT sensor 1 (see page 11-200), t hen go
t o st ep 27.
NO- Go to st ep 6.
8. Remove ECT sensor 1 (see page 11-200).
9. Al l ow ECT sensor 1 to cool to ambi ent t emper at ur e.
11. Connec t ECT sensor 1 to its 2P connect or , but do not
i nst al l it.
13. Note t he val ue of ECT S ENS OR 1 qui ckl y in t he DATA
L IST wi t h t he HDS.
t emper at ur e.
Does t he value of ECT SENSOR 1 differ 5.4 F (3 C) or
more from t he ambient t emperat ure?
YES - Repl ac e ECT sensor 1 (see page 11 -200), t hen go
to st ep 27.
Rei nst al l ECT sensor 1 (see page 11-200). Chec k f or
poor connect i ons or l oose t er mi nal s at E CT sensor 1,
ECT sensor 2, and t he ECM/ PCM. B
15. St art t he engi ne, and let it i dle f or 10 mi nut es.
16. Check ECT S ENS OR 1 in t he DATA L I ST wi t h t he HDS.
YES - Repl ac e ECT sensor 1 (see page 11 -200), t hen go
to st ep 27.
NO- Go to st ep 17.
17. Let t he engi ne i dle 10 mi nut es.
Is about 113F (45 C) or less indicat ed?
to st ep 27.
NO- Go to st ep 19.
(cont' d)
11-141
PGM-FI S f st em
21. Remove ECT sensor 1 (see page 11-200) and ECT
sensor 2 (see page 11-200).
22. Al l ow t he sensor s t o cool to ambi ent t emper at ur e.
24. Connec t ECT sensor 1 and ECT s ens or 2 to t hei r 2P
c onnec t or s, but do not i nst al l t hem.
25. Note t he val ue of ECT S ENS OR 1 and E CT S ENS OR 2
qui ckl y i n t he DATA L I ST wi t h t he HDS.
Does one of t he sensors differ more t han 5.4 F (3 C)
from t he ambient t emperat ure?
YES - Repl ac e t he s ens or t hat di f f ered mor e t han 5.4 F
(3 C) f r om t he ambi ent t emper at ur e. Refi ll t he cool i ng
syst em (see page 10-6), t hen go to st ep 27.
Rei nst al l ECT sensor 1 (see page 11-200) and ECT
sensor 2 (see page 11 -200). Chec k f or poor
connect i ons or l oose t er mi nal s at ECT sensor 1, E CT
sensor 2, and t he E CM/ PCM.
11-293).
ECT sensor 1, ECT s ens or 2, and t he ECM/ PCM, t hen
go to st ep 1.
i ndi cat ed DTCs t r oubl eshoot i ng,
DTC PI 128: MAP Sensor Si gnal Lower Than
Expect ed
NOTE:
Bef or e you begi n check f or poor connect i ons or
bl ockage at t he i ntake ai r duct .
HDS.
Is less t han 54.1 kPa (16.0 inHg, 406 mmHg), or 1.61 V
held for more t han 5 seconds?
NO- Go to st ep 3.
158 F (70 C)
A/ Ti n D, M/T in 3rd
Vehi c l e speed accel er at ed f rom 1631 mph
(25 50 km/h) under half throttle
c onnec t i ons or l oose t er mi nal s at t he MAP sensor and
t he ECM/ PCM. If t he sc r een i ndi cat es NOT
11-142
8. Repl ace t he MAP sensor (see page 11-199).
11 Do t he ECM/ PCM i dle l earn pr ocedur e (see page
11-293).
158 F (70 C)
A/ T in D, M/T in 3rd
Vehi cl e speed accel er at ed f r om 1631 mph
( 2 5 - 50 km/h) under half throttle
NO- Go to st ep 15.
15. Moni t or t he OBD S TATUS f or DTC I 1128 in t he DTCs
t he ECM/ PCM, t hen go to st ep 1. If t he sc r een i ndi cat es
NOT COMPL ETED, go to st ep 12.
DTC PI129: MAP Sensor Si gnal Hi gher Than
Expect ed
1. Chec k f or vac uum l eaks in t hese part s:
PCV val ve
PCV hose
EVAP cani st er pur ge val ve
Throt t l e body
Intake mani f ol d
Brake boost er
Are there any vacuum leaks?
YES - Repai r or r epl ace part s wi t h vac uum l eaks, t hen
go to st ep 9.
NO- Go to st ep 2.
3. Chec k t he MAP S ENS OR in t he DATA L IST wi t h t he
HDS.
Is more than 36.9 kPa (11.0 inHg, 277 mmHg), or 1.1 V
held for more than for 5 seconds?
NO- Go to st ep 4.
(cont' d)
11-143
PGM-FI S f st em
5. Test -dr i ve under t hese condi t i ons;
158 F (70 C)
A/ T in D, M/T in 5th
(88120 km/h) f or 10 sec onds
Dur i ng t he dr i ve, decel er at e (wi th throttle f ul l y
c l osed) f or at l east 2 sec onds
NO-l f t he sc r een i ndi cat es PAS S E D, i nt ermi t t ent
c onnec t i ons or l oose t er mi nal s at t he MAP s ens or and
8. Repl ac e t he MAP sensor (see page 11-199).
11-293).
wi t hout l oad (A/T i n P or N, M/T i n neut ral ) unt i l t he
158 F (70 C)
A/ T i n D, M/T i n 5th
Dr i ve at a st eady speed bet ween 5575 mph
( 88- 120 km/h) for 10 sec onds
Dur i ng t he dr i ve, decel er at e (wi th throttle f ul l y
c l osed) f or at l east 2 sec onds
t he MAP sensor and t he ECM/ PCM, t hen go t o st ep 1.
NO- Go to st ep 15.
go t o t he i ndi cat ed DTCs t r oubl es hoot i ng. !
11-144
DTC P1157: A/F Sensor (Sensor 1) AFS Ci rcui t
High Voltage
2. Cl ear the DTC wi t h t he HDS.
3. St art t he engi ne, and wai t 1 mi nut e.
NO-l nt ermi t t ent f ai l ur e, t he syst em i s OK at t hi s t i me.
Check for poor connect i ons or l oose t er mi nal s at t he
A/ F sensor (Sensor 1) and t he E CM/ PCM.
9. Check f or cont i nui t y bet ween A/ F sensor (Sensor 1) 4P
t ermi nal C29.
A / F S ENS OR ( S ENS OR 1) 4P CONNECTOR
A F S + (RED)
1 2
3 4
22
40
29 30
3 4 5
13|l4ll5jl6jl7lt8j7'
^3
43 44 45 46
m7\
A F S + (RED)
(C29) and t he A/ F sensor (Sensor 1), t hen go to st ep
12.
10. Check f or cont i nui t y bet ween A/ F sensor (Sensor 1) 4P
t er mi nal C30.
A F S - ( RED/ YEL )
12.
11. Repl ace t he A/ F sensor (Sensor 1) (see page 11 -197).
11-293).
to st ep 1. If t he connect or and t ermi nal fi ts ar e OK, go
to st ep 18.
NO- Go to st ep 17.
(cont ' d)
11-145
PGM-FI Syst em
resul t c omes on.
known-good ECM/ PCM (see page 11 -7), t hen go t o
NO- Go to st ep 21.
NO-l f t he sc r een i ndi cat es FAI L ED, go to st ep 1. If t he
ECM/ PCM was subst i t ut ed, go t o st ep 1. If t he sc r een
i ndi cat es NOT COMPL ETED, keep i dl i ng unti l a r esul t
c omes on.
DTC P1172: A/ F Sensor (Sensor 1) Ci rcui t Out
of Range High
EXECUTI NG, keep i dl i ng unti l a r esul t c omes on. If t he
sc r een i ndi cat es OUT OF CONDITION or NOT
6. Repl ac e t he A/ F sensor (Sensor 1) (see page 11-197).
11-293).
wi t hout l oad (A/T i n
a
P or N, M/T i n neut ral ) unti l t he
to st ep 1.
NO- Go to st ep 12.
11-146
sc r een i ndi cat es EXECUTI NG, keep i dl i ng until a
CONDITION or NOT COMPL ETED, go t o st ep 10.
DTC P1297: EL D Ci rcui t Low Vol t age
2. Check t he EL D i n t he DATA L IST wi t h t he HDS.
Is 72 A or more indicat ed?
EL D and t he E CM/ PCM. B
4. Di sconnect t he EL D 3P connect or .
6. Check t he EL D i n t he DATA L IST wi t h t he HDS.
Is 72 A or more indicat ed?
NO- Go to st ep 11.
10. Check f or cont i nui t y bet ween ECM/ PCM connect or
E CM/ PCM CONNECTOR A (49P)
33ZZI
23
29 30
15 16 17)18 19
S 3
34 3 5 3 6
\y\41\A 2| 431144 \/\46
20 21
27
EL D ( BL U/ BL K )
(A24) and t he EL D, t hen go to st ep 13.
NO- Go to st ep 20.
(cont' d)
11-147
PGM-FI S f st em
12. Repl ace t he EL D (see page 11 -202).
11-293).
17 St art t he engi ne.
18. Tur n on t he headl i ght s.
t he EL D and t he ECM/ PCM
f
23. Tur n on t he headl i ght s.
t he EL D and t he ECM/ PCM. If t he ECM/ PCM was
DTC P1298: EL D Ci rcui t High Vol t age
2. Chec k t he EL D i n t he DATA L I ST wi t h t he HDS.
Is 0.2 A or less indicated?
EL D and t he ECM/ PCM. B
4. Di sconnect t he EL D 3P connect or .
6. Measur e t he vol t age bet ween EL D 3P connect or
ELD 3P CONNECTOR
1 2 3
I IG1 (BLK /RED)
X)
NO-Chec k t he No. 7 ACG (15 A) f use in t he dr i ver ' s
under -dash f use/r el ay box. If t he f use i s OK, repai r
open i n t he wi r e bet ween t he No. 7 ACG (15 A) f use
and t he EL D, t hen go to st ep 13.
11-148
10. Chec k f or cont i nui t y bet ween EL D 3P connect or
t er mi nal No. 3 and ECM/ PCM connect or t ermi nal A24.
EL D 3P CONNECTOR
EL D ( BL U/ BL K )
11
Il ^3|4|5|6|7^13l0j1
XX/115 16 17| 18 19 20 21
1
22 23
30
2M
24 25
SI
]32t/|34|35|36
^ 2| 43| 44|XT46
26 27 28
EL D ( BL U/ BL K )
(A24) and t he EL D, t hen go to st ep 13.
11. Chec k f or cont i nui t y bet ween EL D 3P connect or
ELD 3P CONNECTOR
GND (BLK)
NO-Repai r open in t he wi r e bet ween t he EL D and
G301 (see page 22-28), t hen go t o st ep 13.
12. Repl ace t he EL D (see page 11 -202).
15. Reset the ECM/ PCM wi t h the HDS.
11-293).
NO-Tr oubl eshoot i ng i s compl et e. If any other
18. Updat e t he ECM/ PCM if it does not have the l at est
t he EL D and t he ECM/ PCM. If t he ECM/ PCM was
updat ed, subst i t ut e a known-good ECM/PCM (see
11-149
PGM-FI S f st em
DTC P1549: Chargi ng Syst em Hi g h Vol t age
NOTE:
If a hi gh vol t age battery (24 V, etc.) i s c onnec t ed to t he
vehi c l e, t hi s DTC can be st or ed.
A/ C off
Headl i ght s off
Rear wi ndow def ogger off
5. Hol d t he engi ne speed at 2,000 rpm (A/T in P or N, M/T
in neut ral ) f or 1 mi nut e.
st ep 7.
al t ernat or and t he under -hood f use/r el ay box . H
11-293).
A/ C off
Headl i ght s off
Rear wi ndow def ogger off
12. Hold t he engi ne speed at 2,000 rpm (A/T in P or N, M/T
DTC P16BB: Alt ernat or B Ter mi nal Ci rcui t Low
Vol t age
2. Cl ear t he DTC wi t h HDS.
3. St ar t the engi ne.
A/ C on
5. Hol d t he engi ne speed at 2,000 rpm (A/T in P or N, M/T
in neut ral ) f or 1 mi nut e.
Is DTC P16BB indicated?
Chec k for poor c onnec t i ons or l oose t er mi nal s at t he
al t ernat or and t he under -hood f use/r el ay box, and
c hec k t he battery per f or mance (see page 22- 90) .
7. Chec k for poor connect i ons or l oose t er mi nal s at t he
al t ernat or and t he under -hood f use/r el ay box
( +Bl i ne).
Are the connections and terminals OK ?
NO-Repai r t he connect i ons or t he t er mi nal s, t hen go
to st ep 9.
8. Chec k for an open in t he wi r e bet ween t he al t ernat or
and t he under -hood f use/r el ay box at t he st art er
subhar ness.
Is the harness OK ?
st ep 9.
NO-Repai r open in t he wi r e bet ween t he al t ernat or
and t he under -hood f use/r el ay box, t hen go to st ep 9.
11-150
7\
11
11-293).
A/ C on
14. Hold t he engi ne speed at 2,000 rpm (A/T i n P or N, M/T
i n neut ral) f or 1 mi nut e.
Is DTC P16BB indicat ed?
DTC P16BC: Al t ernat or FR Ter mi nal
Ci rcui t /IGP Ci rcui t Low Vol t age
NOTE: Bef ore you t r oubl eshoot , r ecor d al l f reeze dat a
1 Chec k f or poor c onnec t i ons or l oose t er mi nal s at t he
al t ernat or 4P connect or .
NO-Repai r t he c onnec t i ons or t er mi nal s, t hen go to
st ep 18.
2. Chec k t he al t ernat or mount i ng sur f ac e for c or r osi on.
Is t he mount ing surface corroded?
YES - Remo v e t he al t ernat or (see page 4-32). Cl ean all
mount i ng sur f ac es, rei nst al l t he al t ernat or, t hen go to
st ep 18.
NO- Go to st ep 3.
A/ C on
7. Hold t he engi ne speed at 2,000 r pm (A/T in P or N, M/T
Is DTC P16BC indicat ed?
al t er nat or .H
(cont' d)
11-151
PGM-FI S f st em
12. Measur e t he vol t age bet ween al t ernat or 4P connect or
IG1 (BLK /Y EL)
1 2
3 4
NO-Repai r open in t he wi r e bet ween t he al t ernat or
(IG1 l i ne) and t he No. 7 A CG (15 A) f use in t he dr i ver ' s
under -dash f use/r el ay box, t hen go to st ep 18.
13. Measur e t he vol t age bet ween al t ernat or 4P connect or
17. Check for cont i nui t y bet ween al t ernat or 4P connect or
t ermi nal No. 4 and ECM/ PCM connect or t er mi nal B47.
1 2
3 4
AL TF (WHT/ RED)
I L 11 \ /
3 | 4 | / | > 1 7 | 8 9| 1 0|
11 12 13 14 15 16 1718 19
/
21

i
22 23 24
><
25
><
26 27 28

i
31 3233 34 3 5 3 6
v\
38
/

i
| | 4 0 | /
/ ] 431/| 45146147
AL TF (WHT/ RED)
(B47) and t he al t ernat or, t hen go to st ep 18.
st ep 18.
NO- Go to st ep 14.
16. Di sconnect ECM/ PCM c onnec t or B (49P).
11-152
11-293).
A/ C on
25. Hold t he engi ne speed 2,000 rpm (A/T in P or N, M/T in
neutral) for 1 mi nut e.
26. Chec k for Pendi ng or Conf i r med DTCs wi th t he HDS.
Is DTC P16BC indicated?
t he al t ernat or and t he ECM/ PCM, t hen go to st ep 1.
A/ Co n
31. Hol d the engi ne speed 2,000 rpm (A/T in P or N, M/T in
neut ral ) f or 1 mi nut e.
Is DTC P16BC indicated?
t he al t ernat or and t he ECM/ PCM. If t he ECM/ PCM was
11-153
PGM-FI Syst em
DTC P2183: ECT Sensor 2 Ci rcui t
NOTE:
Bef ore you t r oubl eshoot , r ecor d al l f r eeze dat a and
P2183.
1. Chec k f or poor connect i ons or l oose t er mi nal s at ECT
sensor 1 and ECT sensor 2.
NO-Repai r t he c onnec t or s or t er mi nal s, t hen go t o
st ep 27.
NO- Go to st ep 4.
5. Chec k ECT S ENS OR 2 i n t he DATA L I ST wi t h t he HDS.
Is about 113 F (45 C) indicat ed?
to st ep 27.
NO- Go to st ep 6.
7. Dr ai n t he cool ant (see page 10-6).
8. Remove ECT sensor 2 (see page 11 -200).
9. Al l ow E CT sensor 2 to cool t o t he ambi ent
t emper at ur e.
10. Not e t he ambi ent t emper at ur e.
11. Connec t ECT sensor 2 t o its 2P connect or , but do not
i nst al l it.
13. Not e t he val ue of ECT S ENS OR 2 qui ckl y i n t he DATA
t emper at ur e.
Does ECT SENSOR 2 differ 5.4 F (3 C) or more from t he
ambient t emperat ure?
to st ep 27.
Rei nst al l ECT sensor 2 (see page 11-200). Chec k f or
poor c onnec t i ons or l oose t er mi nal s at ECT sensor 1,
ECT sensor 2, and t he ECM/ PCM. B
to st ep 27.
NO- Go to st ep 17.
17. Let t he engi ne i dl e 10 mi nut es.
18. Chec k E CT S ENS OR 2 i n t he DATA L IST wi t h t he HDS.
to st ep 27.
NO- Go to st ep 19.
11-154
21. Remove ECT sensor 1 (see page 11-200) and ECT
sensor 2 (see page 11-200).
22. Al l ow t he sensor s to cool to ambi ent t emper at ur e.
24. Connec t ECT sensor 1 and ECT sensor 2 to t hei r 2P
c onnec t or s, but do not i nst all t hem.
25. Note t he val ue of ECT S ENS OR 1 and ECT S ENS OR 2
qui ckl y i n t he DATA LIST wi t h t he HDS.
Does one of t he sensors differ more t han 5.4 F (3 C)
from t he ambient t emperat ure?
YES - Repl ac e t he sensor that di f f ered mor e t han 5.4 F
(3 C) f r om t he ambi ent t emper at ur e. Refi ll t he cool i ng
syst em (see page 10-6), t hen go to st ep 27.
Rei nst al l ECT sensor 1 (see page 11-200) and ECT
sensor 2 (see page 11 -200). Chec k for poor
c onnec t i ons or l oose t er mi nal s at ECT sensor 1, ECT
sensor 2, and t he E CM/ PCM.
11-293).
ECT sensor 1, ECT sensor 2, and t he ECM/ PCM, t hen
go to st ep 1.
DTC P2184: ECT Sensor 2 Ci rcui t Low Vol t age
indicat ed?
Check for poor c onnec t i ons or l oose t er mi nal s at E CT
sensor 2 and t he ECM/ PCM. B
4. Di sconnect t he ECT sensor 2 2P connect or .
indicat ed?
NO- Go to st ep 11.
(cont' d)
11-155
PGM-FI Syst em
10. Check for cont i nui t y bet ween ECT sensor 2 2P
1 1 2
I ECT2 ( YEL / RED)
YES - Repai r shor t i n t he wi r e bet ween ECT sensor 2
and t he ECM/ PCM (A34), t hen go to st ep 13.
NO- Go to st ep 18.
12. Repl ac e ECT s ens or 2 (see page 11 -200).
11-293).
ECT sensor 2 and t he ECM/ PCM, t hen go to st ep 1.
DTCs wi t h t he HDS.
page 11-7), t hen recheck. If t he ECM/ PCM was
Pendi ng o r Conf i r med DTCs ar e i ndi cat ed, go to t he
E CT S E NS OR 2 2P CONNECTOR 20. Chec k for Pendi ng or Conf i r med
11-156
DTC P2185: ECT Sensor 2 Ci rcui t Hi gh Vol t age
NOTE: Bef ore you t r oubl eshoot r ecor d al l f r eeze dat a
Is about 40 F (40 C) or less, or 4.92 V or more
indicat ed?
Chec k f or poor c onnec t i ons or l oose t er mi nal s at ECT
sensor 2 and t he E CM/ PCM.
4. Di sc onnec t t he ECT s ens or 2 2P connect or .
5. Connec t ECT sensor 2 2P connect or t er mi nal s No. 1
ECT S E NS OR 2 2P CONNECTOR
ECT2 ( YEL / RED) S G6 (BLK)
J UMPER WIRE
Is about 40 F (-40 C) or less, or 4.92 V or more
indicat ed?
NO- Go to st ep 20.
9. Remove t he j umper wi r e f r om t he E CT sensor 2 2P
connect or .
11. Measur e t he vol t age bet ween E CT s ens or 2 2P
c onnec t or t ermi nal No. 1 and body gr ound.
ECT S ENS OR 2 2P CONNECTOR
ECT2 ( YEL / RED)
NO- Go to st ep 16.
15. Chec k f or cont i nui t y bet ween ECT s ens or 2 2P
c onnec t or t er mi nal No. 2 and ECM/ PCM connect or
t er mi nal A10.
ECT S ENS OR 2 2P CONNECTOR
1
Wi r e si de of f emal e t er mi nal s $G6 [BLK)
E CM/ PCM CONNECTOR A (49P) S G6 (BLK)
r, i i A
9 IK
A
11
/ /
/ 1 5 16 1718 19 20 21
1 i
1
1
22 23 24
><
25
><
26 27 28
1 i
1
1
29 30
/
3 2 / 34 35 36
/ /
1 i
1
1
| / | 4I 421431441/ | 4 6 | /
AA
(A10) and ECT sensor 2, t hen go to st ep 22.
(cont' d)
11-157
PGM-FI S y s t em
PTC Troubleshooting (cont' d)
19. Chec k f or cont i nui t y bet ween E CT sensor 2 2P
t er mi nal A34.
i
ECT2 ( YEL / RED)
H I I
111 \A ai A Y ^ Y ^ V ^
" \\\y 71^ 15| 16| 17| 18 19l ? n l 9l l '
22 23
29 30
24 X 2 5
321/| 34 j 35136
\ A41142143144j /1 MAA\ A
26 27 28
ECT2 ( YEL / RED)
E CT sensor 2 and t he ECM/ PCM. If t he ECM/ PCM was
(A34) and ECT sensor 2, t hen go t o st ep 22.
21. Repl ace ECT sensor 2 (see page 11 -200).
11-293).
11-158
DTC P219S: A/F Sensor (Sensor 1) Si gnal
St uck Lean
NOTE:
If the vehi cl e was out of f uel and the engi ne st al l ed
before t hi s DTC was st or ed, ref uel , and cl ear t he DTC
wi t h t he HDS.
If DTC P2101, P2118, P2135, P2138, P2176, or a
combi nat i on of P2122 and P2127, P2122, and P2138, or
P2127 and P2138 i s st or ed at t he same t i me as DTC
P2195, t r oubl eshoot t hem f i rst , t hen recheck for DTC
P2195.
1. Check f or dirt or debr i s on t he MAF sensor /IAT sensor .
Is it dirt y?
YES - Remo v e t he debr i s. If needed, repl ace t he MAF
sensor /IAT sensor , (see page 11-199) t hen go to st ep
9.
NO- Go to st ep 2.
2. Check t he i nst al l at i on of t he A/ F sensor (Sensor 1).
Is t he A/F sensor loose or disconnect ed from t he exhaust
pipe?
NO- Go to st ep 3.
5. St art t he engi ne, and let it i dle wi t hout l oad (A/T i n P or
N, M/T in neut ral ) until t he radi at or f an c omes on.
t he A/F sensor (Sensor 1) and t he ECM/ PCM, t hen go
to st ep 14.
A/ F sensor (Sensor 1) and t he ECM/ PCM. If any ot her
8. Rei nst al l t he A/ F sensor (Sensor 1) (see page 11-197).
11-293).
to st ep 1.
NO- Go to st ep 13.
sc r een i ndi cat ed NOT COMPL ETED, keep i dli ng unti l a
resul t c omes on.
15. St art t he engi ne, and let it i dle wi t hout l oad (A/T in Po r
t he A/ F sensor (Sensor 1) and t he ECM/ PCM. If t he
NO- Go to st ep 17.
(cont ' d)
11-159
PGIVI-FS S f st em
17. Moni t or t he OBD S TATUS f or DTC P2195 In t he DTCs
DTC P2227: BARO Sensor Ci rcui t
NOTE:
If DTC P0107, P0108, P1128, and/or P1129 ar e st or ed at
t he s ame t i me as DTC P2227, t r oubl eshoot t hose DTCs
f i rst , t hen r echeck f or DTC P2227.
1. Tur n t he i gni t i on swi t ch to ON (II), and wai t 2 sec onds.
2. Chec k t he BARO S ENS OR i n t he DATA L I ST wi t h t he
HDS.
Is about 101 kPa (29.9 inHg, 760 mmHg), or about 2.9 V
at sea level indicat ed?
NO- Go to st ep 7.
158 F (70 C)
A/ Ti n D, M/T i n 4th
REL TP S ENS OR bet ween 16 and 28 degr ees f or at
l east 3 sec onds
NO-l f t he sc r een i ndi cat es PAS S E D, i ntermi ttent
f ai l ur e, t he syst em i s OK at t hi s t i me. Chec k f or
somet hi ng t hat may have c l ogged t he i ntake ai r
syst em. If t he sc r een i ndi cat es NOT COMPL ETED, go
t o st ep 4 and r echeck.
7. Chec k t he i ntake ai r syst em f or cl oggi ng or
r est r i ct i ons (forei gn mat er i al , di rty ai r c l eaner
el ement , et c.).
Is t he int ake air syst em clogged or rest rict ed?
YES - Remo v e t he cl og or r est r i ct i on, t hen go to st ep 8.
NO- Go to st ep 15.
11-160

11-293)
11 St ar t t he engi ne. Hol d t he engi ne speed at 3,000 rpm
wi t hout load (A/T i n P or N, M/T in neut ral ) unti l t he
158 F (70 C)
A/ Ti n D, M/T in 4th
REL TP S ENS OR bet ween 16 and 28 degr ees f or at
l east 3 sec onds
Is DTC P2227 indicated? -
NO- Go to st ep 14.
c onnec t i ons or l oose t er mi nal s at t he ECM/ PCM, t hen
got o st ep 1. If t he sc r een i ndi cat es NOT COMPL ETED,
go to st ep 11.
wi t hout l oad (A/T i n P or N, M/T in neut ral ) until t he
17 Test -dr i ve under t hese condi t i ons:
158 F (70 C)
e REL TP S ENS OR bet ween 16 and 28 degr ees for at
l east 3 sec onds
go to st ep 1.
NO- Go to st ep 19.
19. Moni t or the OBD S TATUS for DTC P2227 in the DTCs
compl et e. If t he ECM/ PCM was subst i t ut ed, repl ace
connect i ons or l oose t er mi nal s at t he ECM/ PCM. If t he
ECM/ PCM was subst i t ut ed, go to st ep 1. If the sc r een
11-161
PGM-FI S f st em
DTC P2228: BARO Sensor Ci rcui t Low Vol t age
2. Chec k t he BARO S ENS OR i n t he DATA L I ST wi t h t he
HDS.
indicated?
t i me. B
t hen r echeck. If t he ECM/ PCM was subst i t ut ed, go to
st ep 1.
DTC P2229: BARO Sensor Ci rcui t High Vol t age
2. Chec k t he BARO S ENS OR in t he DATA L IST wi t h t he
HDS.
Is about 160 kPa (47.2 inHg, 1,200 mmHg), or 4.5 Vor
more indicated?
t i me. B
t hen r echeck. If t he ECM/ PCM was subst i t ut ed, go to
st ep 1.
i ndi cat ed DT Cs t r oubl es hoot i ng.
11-162
DTC P2238: A/ F Sensor (Sensor 1) A F S +
NOTE: Bef ore you t r oubl eshoot , r ecor d al l f reeze data
t r oubl eshoot i ng Inf ormat i on (see page 11-3).
1. Tur n t he i gni t i on swi t c h to ON. (II).-
A/ F sensor ' (Sensor 1) and t he ECM/ PCM. H
4. Tur n t he Igni ti on swi t c h to L OCK (0).
6. Di sc onnec t t he A/ F s ens or (Sensor 1) 4P connect or .
1 | 2 [ 3 | 4 I 5 I 6 | 7 | 8 j 9 | 10|
11
22
12
23
13 14|15 16 17| 18X 20 21
43 44 45 46
A F S + (RED)
(C29) and t he A/ F s ens or (Sensor 1), t hen go to st ep
12.
NO- Go t o st ep 9.
9. Rec onnec t ECM/ PCM connect or C (49P).
11. Measur e t he vol t age bet ween A/ F s ens or (Sensor 1)
4P c onnec t or t er mi nal No.1 and body gr ound.
A F S + (RED)
1 2
3 4
Is t here about 2.2 V?
YES - Repl ac e t he A/ F sensor (Sensor 1) (see page
11 -197), t hen go to st ep 12.
11-293).
t he A/ F s ens or (Sensor 1) and t he ECM/ PCM, t hen go
t o st ep 1. If t he connect or and t er mi nal fi ts ar e OK, go
to st ep 18.
NO- Go to st ep 17.
. sc r een i ndi cat es NOT COMPL ETED, keep i dli ng until a
r esul t c omes on.
(cont' d)
11-163
19. St art t he engi ne, and let it i dle.
NO- Go to st ep 21.
Does t he screen indicate PASSED?
NO-l f t he sc r een i ndi cat es FAIL ED, go to st ep 1. If t he
, ECM/ PCM was updat ed, subst i t ut e a known-good
ECM/ PCM (see page 11 -7), t hen go to st ep 19. if t he
ECM/ PCM was subst i t ut ed, go to st ep 1. If t he sc r een
i ndi cat es NOT COMPL ETED, keep i dl i ng unti l a r esul t
c omes on.
DTC P2252: A/F Sensor (Sensor 1) AFS - Ci rcui t
Low Vol t age
2. Cl ear t he DTC wi t h the HDS.
wi t hout l oad (A/T in P or N, M/T in neut ral ) unti l t he
radi at or fan c omes on.
A/ F sensor (Sensor 1) and t he E CM/ PCM.
J 1 I 2
3 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 8
9 1101
1
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
/
20 21
1
22 23 24
><
/
X
/ / /
1
29 30 31
/ A/ /
4 0 1/
/ | 4 3 | 4 4 | 4 5 | 4 6
/
4 8 | / |
AF S (RED/Y EL)
11.
NO- Go to st ep 10.
10. Repl ace t he A/ F sensor (Sensor 1) (see page 11 -197).
11-164
12 Tur n t he i gni ti on swi t ch t o ON (II).
11-293).
to st ep 1. If t he connect or and t er mi nal f i t s ar e OK, go
to st ep 17.
NO- Go to st ep 16.
resul t c omes on.
18. St ar t t he engi ne, and let it i dle.
YE S - Go to st ep 1 and r echeck.
t he ori gi nal ECM/ PCM. If any ot her Pendi ng or
Conf i r med DTCs was i ndi cat ed in st ep 19, go to t he
NO-l f t he sc r een i ndi cat es FAIL ED, go to st ep 1. If the
sc r een i ndi cat es NOT COMPL ETED, keep i dli ng unti l a
resul t c omes on.
NO- Go to st ep 20.
11-165
PGM-FI S f st em
DTC P2610: ECM/PCM Ignition Off Internal
Ti mer Malfuncti on
If any ot her Pendi ng or Conf i r med DTCs ar e i ndi cat ed,
go to t he i ndi cat ed DTC' a t r oubl eshoot i ng.3
known-good ECM/ PCM (see page 11 -7), t hen r echeck.
DTC P2A00: A/F Sensor (Sensor 1) Ci rcui t
158 F (70 C)
A/ T in D,-M/T in 3rd
Vehi c l e speed bet ween 2555 mph (4088 km/h)
f or 5 mi nut es
(88120 km/h) f or 10 s ec onds , t hen decel er at e
(wi th throttle f ul l y c l osed) f or 5 sec onds
5. Moni t or t he OBD S TATUS f or DTC P2A00 i n t he DTCs
11-166
7. Repl ace t he A/ F sensor (Sensor 1) (see page 11-197).
11-293).
158 F (70 C)
A/ Ti n D, M/T i n 3rd
f or 5 mi nut es
(88120 km/h) f or 10 sec onds, t hen decel er at e
(wi th throttle f ul l y c l osed) f or 5 sec onds
Is DTC P2A00 indicat ed?
to st ep 1.
NO-Go to st ep 13.
13. Moni t or t he OBD S TATUS for DTC P2A00 i n t he DTCs
NO-lf t he sc r een i ndi cat es FAIL ED, check f or poor
DTC U0029: F-CAN Malfuncti on (BUS-OFF
(ECM/PCM))
NOTE: Bef or e you t r oubl eshoot , r ecor d ai l f reeze dat a
Is DTC U0029 indicat ed?
NO-l nt ermi t t ent f ai l ur e, t he syst em i s OK at t hi s
t i me. B
NO-lf t he ECM/ PCM was updat ed, t r oubl eshoot i ng i s
11-167
PGM-FI S f st em
DTC U122: F-CAN Mal f unct i on
{ ECM/PCM-VSA Modui at or-Cont roi Uni t)
Are DTC U0029 and U0122 indicated at the same time?
YE S - Go to t he t r oubl eshoot i ng f or DTC U0029 (see
page11-167).H
NO- Go to st ep 3.
4. Chec k f or Pendi ng.or Conf i r med DTCs wi t h t he HDS.
Is DTC U0122 indicated?
VS A modul at or -cont r ol uni t and t he E CM/ PCM. B
5. Chec k f or c ommuni c at i on t o t he VS A syst em wi t h t he
HDS.
Does the HDS communicate with the VSA
modulator-control unit?
NO- Go to t he VS A syst em sympt om t r oubl eshoot i ng
f or ABS i ndi cat or, brake syst em i ndi cat or , and VS A
i ndi cat or do not go off (see page 19- 128) .
8. Di sc onnec t t he VS A modul at or -cont r ol uni t 36P
connect or .
t er mi nal A3 and VS A modul at or -cont r ol uni t 36P
VS A MODUL ATOR-CONTROL UNIT 36P CONNECTOR
CANH
(WHT)
| 1 | / | 3 | 4 | / | 6 | / | 8 | 9 | 1 0 | 1 1 |
12 13
J 1 4 | / | / I / | 1 8 | 1 9 | / 1 2 1 | / 1 2 3 | / |
12 13
| 2 5 | 2 6 | 2 7 | / | / | 3 0 | / | / ! / | 3 4 |
35 36
J
CANH (WHT)
I 22 23
- j 29 3C
I T M4 / J /\ / l i e 1<
24 25
34
3 0
17|18
> < 26| 27) 28|
1
421431441/146"
19 20
9 10
21
(A3) and t he VS A modul at or-cont rol uni t , t hen go to
st ep 12.
11-168
* t er mi nal A4 and VS A modul at or-cont rol uni t 36P
CA NL ,
(RED)
H i I / | 3| 4| / | 6| / | 8| 9| 10| 11|
12
>
13
|14| / 1 /|/|18|19|/|21|/|23|/|
12
>
13
|25|26|27|/1/|30|/|/|/!34|
35 36
j
CANL (RED)
. h i /
3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 LX 9 | 1 0 |
11
/ /
/ J 1 5 16 17 18 19 20 21
E
i
22 23 24 25
><
26 27 28
E
i
29 30
/
3 2 | / 34 35 36
/ /
E
i
/141 42 431441/| 46
/ / l / l
YES - Upd at e t he VS A modul at or-cont rol uni t if it does
not have t he l at est sof t war e (see page 19-135), or
subst i t ut e a known-good VS A modul at or-cont rol uni t
(see page 19-136), t hen go to st ep 12 and r echeck. If
DTC U0122 i s not i ndi cat ed after subst i t ut i on, repl ace
t he ori gi nal VS A modul at or -cont r ol uni t (see page
(A4) and t he VS A modul at or-cont rol uni t, t hen go to
st ep 12.
11-293).
t he VS A modul at or -cont r ol uni t and t he ECM/ PCM,
NO-Tr oubIeshoot i ng i s compl et e. If any ot her
Pendi ng or Conf i r med DTCs ar e i ndi cat ed, go to the
DTC U0155: F-CAN Malfunction
(ECM/PCM-Gauge Control Module)
gauge cont rol modul e and t he E CM/ PCM.
4. Check for body el ect ri cal DTCs in t he DTCs MENU
wi t h t he HDS.
Is DTC U0029 and/or U0100 indicated?
NO-Do t he gauge cont rol modul e i nput t est (see page
22-347).H
B. Tur n t he i gni ti on swi t ch to L OCK (0).
7. Remove t he gauge cont rol modul e (see page 22-351).
8. Di sconnect t he gauge cont rol modul e 32P connect or .
(cont' d)
11-169
PGM Fl S f st em
t er mi nal A3 and gauge cont rol modul e 32P c onnec t or
t er mi nal No.30.
GAUGE CONTROL MODULE 32P CONNECTOR
1|2]/W|6 /|8 |9 |10 /U1l3|/H"l6|
|l7|l8|l9|/l/i22|23|24|25|26|27|28|29|30(/|32
CANH (WHT)
li il \
J 11/
3 | 4 | 5| 6 | 7
/
9I10II
3
11
/ /
y ] i 5 16 17 18 19 20
21|T
3
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 1
3
29 30 ' 32I / 34 3536
/ /
M 4 1 421431441/1461/
v\\
NO-Repai r open i n t he wi r e bet ween t he ECM/ PCM ,
(A3) and t he gauge cont rol modul e, t hen go to st ep 12.
t er mi nal A4 and gauge cont rol modul e 32P c onnec t or
t er mi nal No.29.
GAUGE CONTROL MODULI: 32P CONNECTOR
1T2IA1/16 /18|9|10 /V113|/|/116|
|17|18|19[/V|22|23|24|25|26|27|28|29|30L/|32
|CANL (RED)
CANL (RED)
I L 1 1 1 / "
3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 | > 9|10|
If
\
" "1
1/
I/ J15
16 1718 19 20 21

1
If
\
22 23 24 25
><
26 27 28

1
If
\
29 30
/
32L/ 34 3536
/ /

1
42|43| 44H46^
AA
YES-Subs t i t ut e a known-good gauge cont rol modul e
(see page 22-351), t hen go to st ep 12 and r echeck. If
DTC U0155 i s not i ndi cat ed after subst i t ut i on, r epl ace
t he or i gi nal gauge cont rol modul e (see page 22-351),
(A4)and t he gauge cont rol modul e, t hen go to st ep 12.
11-293).
t he gauge cont rol modul e and t he ECM/ PCM, t hen go
to st ep 1.
11-170
DTC U0300: PGM-F I System and A/T System
Program Version Mi smat ch (A/T model)
NOTE:
Do not turn t he i gni t i on swi t ch to ACC (I) or L OCK (0)
whi l e updat i ng t he PCM. If you do, t he PCM wi l l be
damaged.
1. Do t he PCM updat e pr ocedur e (PGM-FI syst em and
A/T-syst em) (see page 11-203).
YES - Repl ac e t he ori gi nal PCM (see page 11-204).H
PGiVI-FI S f st em
F-CAPJ Ci rcui t Troubl eshoot i ng
2. J ump t he S CS li ne wi th t he HDS.
4. Measur e t he r esi st ance bet ween ECM/ PCM connect or
t er mi nal s A3 and A4.
CANH (WHT) CANL (RED)
II 11
. h i /
3 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 l / 9 110 J
s
11
/ /
/ | 1 5 16 17|18 19 20 21
s
22 23 24
><
25
><
26 27 28
s
29 30
/
3 2 / 34 35 36
/ / /
|/ |41 42
i
43| 44| ^46j ^ j ^ [J
Is t here about 88-111 O?
NO- Go to st ep 5.
5. Di sconnect t hese connect or s:
Gauge cont rol modul e 32P (see page 22-351).
VS A modul at or-cont rol uni t 36P (see page 19-136).
Yaw rat e-l at eral accel er at i on sensor 5P (see page
19-133).
S RS uni t A (39P) (see page 24-228).
TPMS cont rol uni t (20P) (see page 18-83).
Navi gat i on uni t B (32P) (if equi pped) (see page
23-238).
, h l /
3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 |
/
9 |10|
1
11
/ /
/ | 1 5 16 17 18 19 2 0 2 1
1

1
1
22 23 24 25
><
26 27 28
1

1
1
29 30 32L/ 34 3536
/
I /
1
1

1
l / | 41
42143144|/| 46 /
A A
YES - Repai r shor t in t he wi r es bet ween ECM/ PCM
connect or t er mi nal s A3 and A 4.i l
NO- Go to st ep 7.
t er mi nal A3 and gauge cont rol modul e 32P connect or
t er mi nal No. 30.
GA UGE CONTROL MODUL E 32P CONNECTOR
1T2I/L/I/I6/ | 8| 9| 10
/I/|13I /1/T16|
|17|18|19|/|/|22|23|24|25|26|27|28|29|30|/132
CANH ( WHl )
CANH (WHT)
II II ,1
. h i /
3
| 4 | 5 J 6 | 7 J Z
9|10|
3
11
/
16 17 18 19 20 21 j
1 3
22 23 24
><
25
><
26 27 28
j
1 3
29 30
/
' 3 2 / 34 3536
/ / /
j
1
|/ |41
^MA^L
/ l / l
(A3) and t he gauge cont rol mo d ul e.
11-172
t er mi nal A3 and VS A modul at or -cont r ol uni t 36P
CANH
(WHT)
| 1| / | 3| 4L / | 6| / | 8| 9| 10| 11|
12
-\
13
|14|/ |/ |/ |18|19|/ |21|/ 123|/ |
12
-\
13
I 25l 26|27l / |/ |30|/ l / l / |34l
35 36
J
Wire side of female terminal.
(A3) and t he VS A modul at or-cont rol uni t .B
t er mi nal A4 and gauge cont rol modul e 32P connect or
t er mi nal No. 29.
GA UGE CONTROL MOD UL E 32P CONNECTOR
/ 18|9|10 / V1 l 3 l / !/ i l 6|
h 7|18|19|/l/]22|23|24|25|26|27|28|29|30|/]32
CANL (RED)
(A4) and t he gauge cont rol mo d u l e.
(cont' d)
11-173
PGM-FI S f st em
F-CASM Circuit Troubleshooting (cont' d)
10, Chec k for cont i nui t y bet ween ECM/ PCM c onnec t or
t er mi nal A4 and VS A modul at or-cont rol uni t 36P
VSA MODULATOR-CONTROL UNIT 36P CONNECTOR
CANL t
(RED)
H 1| / | 3| 4| / | 6| / | 8| 9| 10| 11|
12
1
13
|14|/H /|18|19H 21|/123H
12
1
13
| 25| 26| 27| / M30| / | / | / | 34|
35 36
J
CANL (RED)
3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 l / 9 | 1 0 | I
3
11
/ /
/ | 1 5 16 17| 18 19 20 21
i
i 3
22 23 24 25
><
26 27 28
i
i 3
29 30
/
3 2 [ / 34 3 5 3 6
/ /
i
i
| / l 4 1 42
i
431441/J46
A
AA
(A4) and t he VS A modul at or -cont r ol uni t .G
11. Rec onnec t t he gauge cont rol modul e 32P connect or .
J 1 l /
3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 t / 9 | 1 0 |
a
11
/ /
/ | 1 5 16 17 18 19 20 21
i a
22 23 24 25
><
26 27 28
i a
29 30
/
3 2 J / 34 3 5 3 6
/ /
i
| / | 4 1 42
431441/| 46
/
Is t here about 2.34-2.86 kO?
NO-Subst i t ut e a known-good gauge cont rol modul e
(see page 22-351), and r econnect ECM/ PCM
connect or A (49P). If t he HDS i dent i f i es t he vehi c l e,
r epl ace t he ori gi nal gauge cont rol modul e (see page
22-351 ) .
14. Reconnect t he VS A modul at or-cont rol uni t 36P
connect or .
11-174
15. Measur e t he r esi st ance bet ween ECM/ PCM c onnec t or
FT
7
*
3 | 4 | 5 | e | 7 j y 9 1101
i
11
/ /
/|15 16 17 18 19 20 21
i
e
i
i
22 23 24 25
><
26 27 28
i
e
i
i
29 30 32|/ 34 3536
/ /
i
e
i
| / | 4 1
421431441/ | 4 6 1 / A/\
Is t here about 108-132 O?
NO-Subst i t ut e a known-good VS A modul at or -cont r ol
uni t (see page 19-136), and r econnect ECM/ PCM
connect or A (49P). If t he HDS i dent i f i es t he vehi c l e,
r epl ace t he ori gi nal VS A modul at or-cont rol uni t (see
page 19-136).B
16. Di sconnect t he VS A modul at or-cont rol uni t 36P
connect or .
17. Reconnect t he yaw rat e-l at eral accel er at i on sensor 5P
connect or .
CANH (WHfTI f CANL (RED)
J l l
7*
3
TtrsTeTzI
/
9| 1 0|
1
11
/
/ / I
1 5
16 17 18 19 20 21
i

i
1
22 23 24 25
><
26 27 28
i

i
1
29 30
/
3 2 l / 34 3536
\ /
i

i
M 4 1
421431441/ | 4 6 1 / A A
NO-Subst i t ut e a known-good y aw rat e-l at eral
accel er at i on sensor (see page 19-133), and r econnect
ECM/ PCM connect or A (49P). If t he HDS i dent i f i es t he
vehi c l e, r epl ace t he ori gi nal y aw rat e-l at eral
accel er at i on sensor (see page 19- 133) .
19. Di sc onnec t t he yaw-r at e lateral accel er at i on sensor 5P
connect or .
20. Rec onnec t S RS uni t connect or A (39P).
(cont' d)
11-175
PGM-FI S f st em
F-CAN Circuit Troubleshooting (cont'd)
ECM/P CM CONNECTOR A (49P)
Is there about 2.34-2,86 kD?
YES-Go to st ep 22.
NO-Subst i t ut e a known-good S RS uni t (see page
24-228), and r econnect ECM/ PCM connect or A (49P). If
t he HDS i dent i f i es t he vehi c l e, r epl ace t he ori gi nal
S RS uni t (see page 24-228).B
22. Di sc onnec t S RS uni t c onnec t or A (39P).
23. Rec onnec t t he TPMS cont rol uni t 20P connect or .
t er mi nal s A3 and A4 .
CANH (WHT)
l = = ]
CANL (RED)
YES-
Wi t h navi gat i on: Go to st ep 25.
Wi t hout navi gat i on: Updat e t he ECM/ PCM if it does
t hen r echeck. If t he HDS i dent i f i es t he vehi c l e and
t he ECM/ PCM was updat ed, t r oubl eshoot i ng i s
compl et e. If t he HDS i dent i f i es t he vehi c l e and t he
ECM/ PCM was subst i t ut ed, r epl ace t he or i gi nal
ECM/ PCM (see page 11- 204) .
NO-Subst i t ut e a known-good TPMS cont rol uni t (see
page 18-83), and r econnect ECM/ PCM c onnec t or A
(49P). If t he HDS i dent i f i es t he vehi c l e, r epl ace t he
or i gi nal TPMS cont rol uni t (see page 18-83).H
25. Di sc onnec t t he TPMS cont rol uni t 20P connect or .
26. Rec onnec t navi gat i on uni t connect or B (32P).
11-176
CANH (WHT)
Is t here about 2.34-2,86 kD?
if t he HDS i dent i f i es t he vehi c l e and t he ECM/ PCM
was updat ed, t r oubl eshoot i ng i s compl et e. If t he HDS
i dent i f i es t he vehi c l e and t he ECM/ PCM was
11-204).B ; -
NO-Subst i t ut e a known-good navi gat i on uni t (see
page 23-238), and r econnect ECM/ PCM connect or A
(49P). If t he HDS i dent i f i es t he vehi c l e, r epl ace t he
ori gi nal navi gat i on uni t (see page 23-238).T'
28. Di sconnect t hese c onnec t or s:
m Gauge cont rol modul e 32P (see page 22-351).
VS A modul at or -cont r ol uni t 36P (see page 19-136).
Yaw rat e-l at eral accel er at i on sensor 5P (see page
19-133).
S RS uni t A (39P) (see page 24-228).
TPMS cont rol uni t (20P) (see page 18-83).
Navi gat i on uni t B (32P) (if equi pped) (see page
23-238).
CANH (WHT)
f II II
J 1 l /
3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 | / 9 h 0 |
11
/
/
' / 1 5 16 17 18 19 20 21
i
i
22 23 24
><
25
><
26 27 28
i
i
29 30
/
' 3 2 / 34 3 5 3 6
/ /
i
i
1/ 141 421431441/1461/
A A
(A3) and t he gauge cont rol modul e, t he VS A
modul at or-cont rol uni t , t he y aw rat e-l at eral
accel er at i on sensor , t he S RS uni t , t he TPMS cont rol
uni t , t he navi gat i on uni t , or t he DL C. i l
NO- Go to st ep 30.
(cont ' d)
11-177
PGM-FI S f st em
P-CAW Ci rcui t Troubleshooting (cont'd)
CANL (RED)
M /
3 | 4 |
5
I 6 I 7 I
/
9 | 1 0 |
i
11
/ /
/ | 1 5 16 17 18 19 20 21
a
i
i i
22 23 24 25
><
26 27 28
a
i
i i
29 30
/
3 2 | / 34 3 5 3 6
/ /
a
i
i
1/141 42
4 3 14 4 1/ | 46 AA
(A4) and t he gauge cont rol modul e, t he VS A
modul at or -cont r ol uni t , t he yaw rat e-l at eral
accel er at i on sensor , t he S RS uni t , t he TPMS cont rol
uni t , t he navi gat i on uni t , or t he D L C . I
NO- Go to st ep 31.
32. Connec t t he HDS to t he DL C (see page 11-3).
33. Di sc onnec t t he gauge cont r ol modul e 32P connect or .
34. Tur n t he i gni ti on swi t c h to ON (II), and r ead t he HDS.
Does t he HDS ident ify t he vehicle?
22-351 ) .
NO- Go to st ep 35.
36. Rec onnec t t he gauge cont r ol modul e 32P connect or .
37. Di sconnect t he VS A modul at or -cont r ol uni t 36P
connect or .
38. Tur n t he i gni ti on swi t c h to ON (II), and r ead t he HDS.
YES - Repl ac e t he VS A modul at or -cont r ol uni t (see
page 19-136).H
NO- Go to st ep 39.
40. Rec onnec t t he VS A modul at or-cont rol uni t 36P
connect or .
41. Di sc onnec t t he y aw rat e-l at eral accel er at i on sensor 5P
connect or .
42. Tur n t he i gni ti on swi t ch to ON (II), and read t he HDS.
YES - Repl ac e t he yaw rat e-l at eral accel er at i on sensor
(see page 19-133).H
NO- Go to st ep 43.
44. Rec onnec t t he y aw rat e-l at eral accel er at i on sensor 5P
connect or .
45. Di sconnect S RS uni t connect or A (39P).
46. Tur n t he i gni ti on swi t ch to ON (II), and r ead t he HDS.
YES - Repl ac e t he S RS uni t (see page 24-228).H
NO- Go to st ep 47.
48. Rec onnec t S RS uni t connect or A (39P).
49. Di sconnect t he TPMS cont rol uni t 20P connect or .
50. Tur n t he i gni ti on swi t ch to ON (II), and r ead t he HDS.
YES - Repl ac e t he TPMS cont rol uni t (see page
18- 83) . !
NO-
Wi t h navi gat i on: Go to st ep 51.
Wi t hout navi gat i on: Updat e t he ECM/ PCM if it does
t hen r echeck. If t he HDS i dent i f i es t he vehi cl e and
t he ECM/ PCM was updat ed, t r oubl eshoot i ng i s
compl et e. If t he HDS i dent i f i es t he vehi cl e and t he
ECM/ PCM was subst i t ut ed, r epl ace t he ori gi nal
11-178
52. Rec onnec t t he TPMS cont rol uni t 20P connect or .
53. Di sconnect navi gat i on uni t connect or B (32P).
54. Tur n t he i gni ti on swi t ch to ON (l l )
f
and r ead t he HDS.
YES - Repl ac e t he navi gat i on uni t (see page 23- 238) .
If t he HDS i dent i f i es t he vehi c l e and t he ECM/ PCM
was updat ed, t r oubl eshoot i ng i s compl et e. If t he HDS
i dent i f i es t he vehi cl e and t he ECM/ PCM was
11-204J.B
PGIVI-FS S f st em
MIL Circuit Troubleshooting
2. Do t he gauge sel f -di agnost i c f unct i on (see page
22-332).
Does t he MIL indicat or flash?
NO-Subst i t ut e a known-good gauge cont rol modul e,
and r echeck. If t he sympt om/i ndi cat i on goes away
wi t h a known-good gauge cont rol modul e, r epl ace t he
or i gi nal gauge cont rol modul e (see page 22-351 ) .
4. Chec k t he S CS i n t he DATA L I ST wi t h t he HDS.
Is a short indicat ed?
If t he sympt om/i ndi cat i on goes away and t he
ECM/ PCM was updat ed, t r oubl eshoot i ng i s c ompl et e.
6. Di sc onnec t ECM/ PCM connect or A (49P), t hen
di sc onnec t t he HDS.
Tr==ir
J 1 l /
3 4 | 5 | 6 i 7 | / 9 | "101 j
11
/ /
/ | 1 5 16 17 18 19 20 21
i [
i
i
22 23 24 25
><
26 27 28
i [
i
i
29 30
/
321/
34 3 5 3 6
/
i [
i
i
1 / 1 4 1 42
r
1
' 3 | 4 4 | / j 4 6 | /
A A
SCS(ORN)
(A32) and t he DL C. B
ECM/ PCM was updat ed, t r oubl eshoot i ng i s compl et e.
11-180
DLC Circuit Troubleshooting
NOTE: If you suspec t t he HDS or t he HDS DL C cabl e may
be t he sour c e of t he c ommuni c at i on pr obr em, veri f y that
t hey ar e wor ki ng properl y by connect i ng t hem to a
known-good, like vehi cl e and s y s t em, and checki ng f or a
c ommuni c at i on pr ebl em.
NOTE: Make sur e t he HDS i s properl y connect ed to
t he DL C.
3. Tur n t he i gni ti on swi t ch t o ON (II), and r ead t he HDS.
4. Chec k f or Pendi ng or Conf i r med DTCs i n t he PGM-FI
syst em wi t h t he HDS.
Are any Pending or Confirmed DTCs indicat ed?
YE S - Go to t he i ndi cat ed DTCs t r oubl es hoot i ng^
NO-
If t he HDS does not c ommuni c at e wi t h t he S RS , go
to st ep 5.
If t he HDS does not c ommuni c at e wi t h t he VS A
s y s t em, go to st ep 7.
If t he HDS does not c ommuni c at e wi t h t he TPMS ,
go to st ep 9.
If t he HDS does not c ommuni c at e wi t h t he IMMOBI
(i mmobi l i zer) syst em, go to st ep 11.
If t he HDS does not c ommuni c at e wi t h t he BODY
EL ECTRI CAL syst em, go to st ep 13.
6. Tur n t he i gni ti on swi t ch to ON (II), and wat c h t he S RS
i ndi cat or.
Does t he SRS indicat or come on and go off?
8. Tur n t he i gni ti on swi t c h to ON (II), and wat c h t he VS A
i ndi cat or.
Does t he VSA indicat or come on and go off?
NO- Go to t he VS A syst em sympt om t r oubl eshoot i ng
f or A B S i ndi cat or, brake syst em i ndi cat or, VS A
i ndi cat or do not go off (see page 19-129).
10. Tur n t he i gni t i on swi t ch to ON (II), and wat c h t he
TPMS i ndi cat or.
Does t he TPMS indicat or come on and go off?
NO- Go to t he TPMS sympt om t r oubl eshoot i ng f or
TPMS i ndi cat or does not go off, and no DTCs ar e
st or ed (see page 18-80).
12. Tur n t he i gni t i on swi t ch to ON (II), and wat c h t he
i mmobi l i zer i ndi cat or.
Does t he immobilizer indicat or st ay on or flash?
YE S - Go to t he i mmobi l i zer syst em' s t r oubl eshoot i ng
(see page 22-429).B
NO- Go to st ep 15.
13. Do t he gauge sel f -di agnost i c f unct i on (see page
22-332).
14. Check t he gauge di spl ay.
Is Error 2 indicat ed?
YES - Ch ec k for B-CAN syst em DTCs (see page
22-109).H
NO- Go to st ep 15.
NO- Go to t he S RS gener al t r oubl eshoot i ng
i nf ormat i on (see page 24- 36) .
(cont' d)
11-181
PGM-FI Syst em
DLC Circuit Troubleshooting (cont'd)
15. Tur n t he i gni ti on swi t c h to L OCK (0), t hen do t he
battery t er mi nal di sc onnec t i on pr ecedur e (see page
22-91), and wai t at l east 3 mi nut es bef ore st art i ng
work.
17. Chec k f or cont i nui t y bet ween DL C t er mi nal No. 7 and
body gr ound.
DATA LINK CONNECTOR (DLC)
K L I NE (LT BL U)
4 5 6 7
/ )
/
12
/
14
/
1 6 /
NO- Go to st ep 19.
18. Cont i nue to check f or cont i nui t y bet ween DL C
t er mi nal No. 7 and body gr ound whi l e di sconnect i ng
t hese c onnec t or s, one at a t i me:
S RS uni t connect or A (39P)
VS A modul at or -cont r ol uni t 36P connect or
TPMS cont rol uni t 20P connect or
Immobi l i zer -keyl ess cont rol uni t 7P connect or
Audi o uni t connect or A (24P)
Dr i ver ' s under -dash f use/r el ay box connect or Q
(20P)
Does cont inuit y go away when one of t he above
connect ors is disconnect ed?
YES - Repl ac e t he part t hat c aused an open when it
was d i s c o nnec t ed .
NO-Repai r shor t in t he wi r e bet ween t he DL C (K-l i ne)
and t he VS A modul at or -cont r ol uni t , t he S RS uni t , t he
TPMS cont rol uni t , t he i mmobi l i zer -keyl ess cont rol
uni t , t he audi o uni t , or t he dr i ver ' s under -dash
f use/r el ay box.H
19. Connec t DL C t er mi nal No. 7 t o body gr ound wi t h a
j umper wi r e.
K L I NE (LT BL U)
1 2
20. Chec k f or cont i nui t y bet ween body gr ound and t hese
c onnec t or t er mi nal s:
Connec t or Ter mi nal
S RS uni t A(39P) No. 18( L TBL U)
VS A modul at or-cont rol uni t
36P
No. 3 (LT BLU)
TPMS cont rol uni t 20P No. 7 (LT BLU)
Immobi l i zer -keyl ess cont rol
uni t 7P
No. 5 (LT BLU)
Audi ouni t A(24P) No. 3 (LT BLU)
Dr i ver ' s under -dash
f use/r el ay box Q (20P)
No. 16( L TBL U)
Is t here cont inuit y bet ween body ground and each of t he
t erminals in t he chart ?
YES - Repl ac e t he part t hat does not c ommuni c at e
wi t h t he HDS.11
NO-Repai r open in t he wi r e bet ween t he DL C (K-l i ne)
and t he appropri at e c onnec t or .H
11-182
21. Chec k for B-CAN syst em DTCs wi t hout t he HDS (see
page 22-138).
Is DTC U0029 and/or U0100 indicat ed?
NO- Go to st ep 22.
24. Measur e t he vol t age bet ween DL C t er mi nal No. 16
and body gr ound.
NO-Repai r open in t he wi r e bet ween DL C t er mi nal
No. 16 and t he No. 15 BACK UP (10 A) f use i n t he
under -hood f use/r el ay b o x . l l
25. Measur e t he vol t age bet ween DL C t er mi nal s No. 4
and No. 16.
GND (BLK)
y
/
4 5 6 7
/)
\ 9
/
12
/
14
/
16/
+ B(WHT)
NO-Repai r open in t he wi r e bet ween DL C t er mi nal
No. 4 and body ground (G502) (see page 22-34).H
26. Connec t t he HDS to t he DLC (see page 11-3).
29. Di sc onnec t t he HDS f r om t he DL C.
(cont' d)
11-183
PGM-FI S f st em
30. Chec k for cont i nui t y bet ween ECM/ PCM c onnec t or
t er mi nal A3 and DL C t er mi nal No.6.
' CANH (WHT)
CANH (WHT)
3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 | / 9 ] 10|
1
11
/ /
/ | 1 5
16 1 7 1 8 1 9 2 0 21
i
B
1 1
2 2 2 3 24 2 5
><
2 6 27 28
i
B
1 1
29 30
/
32 V?
34 3 5 3 6
/ /
i
B
1
H 4 1
4 2 S 4 3 | 4 4 ^ J 4 6 ^
A A
' Is t here cont inuit y?
(A3) and DL C t er mi nal No. 6.11
t er mi nal A4 and DL C t er mi l al No.14.
CANL (RED)
CANL (RED)
(A4) and DL C t er mi nal No. 14.11
11-184
32. Tr y to st art the engi ne.
Does the engine start and idle smoothly?
YE S - Go to t he F-CAN ci rcui t t r oubl eshoot i ng (see
page11-172). B
NO- Go to st ep 33.
34. Chec k t he No. 3-1 IG MAIN (50 A) f use in t he
Is t he fuse OK?
YES - Repai r open i n t he wi r e bet ween t he No. 3-1 IG
MAIN (50 A) f use and t he i gni ti on swi t c h. If t he wi r e i s
OK, go to st ep 35.
NO-Repai r shor t i n t he wi r e bet ween t he No. 3-1 IG
MAIN (50 A) f use and t he i gni ti on swi t c h. Al so r epl ace
t he No. 3 IG MAIN (50 A) f us e. B
35. Inspect t he No. 17 Fl MAIN (15 A) f use i n t he
Is t he fuse OK?
NO- Go to st ep 36.
36. Remove t he bl own No. 17 Fl MAIN (15 A) f use f r om
t he under -hood f use/r el ay box.
37. Remove PGM-FI mai n rel ay 1 (A) f r om t he under -hood
f use/r el ay box.
A
38. Chec k f or cont i nui t y bet ween body gr ound and
PGM-FI mai n r el ay 1 4P c onnec t or t er mi nal s No. 1 and
PGM-FI MAIN RELAY 1 4P CONNECTOR
YES - Repl ac e t he under -hood f use/r el ay box (see
page 22-85). Al so r epl ace t he No. 17 Fl MAIN (15 A)
f us e. B
NO- Go to st ep 39.
(cont' d)
11-185
PGIVI-FI Syst em
39. Whi l e di sconnect i ng eac h of t he part s or c onnec t or s
bel ow, one at a t i me, check f or cont i nui t y bet ween
PGM-FI mai n rel ay 1 4P connect or t er mi nal No. 2 and
body gr ound:
PGM-FI mai n rel ay 2 (FUEL PUMP)
ECM/ PCM connect or A (49P)
Eac h i nj ect or 2P connect or
Camshaf t posi t i on (CMP) sensor B 3P connect or
Cr ankshaf t posi t i on (CKP) s ens or 3P connect or
MAF sensor /IAT sensor 5P connect or
El ect r oni c throttle cont rol syst em (ETCS) cont rol
rel ay
PGM-FI MAIN REL AY 1 4P CONNECTOR
Does cont inuit y go away when one of t he above part s or
YES - Repl ac e t he part that made t he shor t to body
gr ound go away when di sc onnec t ed. If t he part i s t he
ECM/ PCM, updat e t he ECM/ PCM if it does not have
t he l at est sof t war e (see page 11-203), or subst i t ut e a
ECM/ PCM (see page 11-204). Al so r epl ace t he No. 17
Fl MAIN (15 A) f us e. B
NO- Go to st ep 40.
40. Di sc onnec t t he c onnec t or s f r om t hese c omponent s:
PGM-FI mai n rel ay 2 (FUEL PUMP)
ECM/ PCM connect or A (49P)
Inj ect ors
9 Camshaf t posi t i on (CMP) sensor B
MAF sensor /IAT sensor
Cr ankshaf t posi t i on (CKP) sensor
El ect r oni c throttle cont rol syst em (ETCS) cont rol
rel ay
41. Chec k for cont i nui t y bet ween PGM-FI mai n rel ay 1 4P
YES - Repai r shor t in t he wi r e bet ween PGM-FI mai n
r el ay 1 and eac h part. Al so r epl ace t he No. 17 Fl MAIN
(15 A) f us e. B
NO-Repl ac e PGM-FI mai n rel ay 1. Al so r epl ace t he
No. 17 Fl MAIN (15 A) f us e. B
42. Inspect t he No. 9 FUEL PUMP (20 A) f use in t he
dr i ver ' s under -dash f use/r el ay box.
Is t he fuse OK?
NO- Go to st ep 43.
43. Remove t he bl own No. 9 FUEL PUMP (20 A) f use f r om
t he dr i ver ' s under -dash f use/r el ay box.
11-186
44. Remove PGM-FI mai n rel ay 2 (FUEL PUMP) (A) f rom
45 Test PGM-FI mai n r el ay 2 (FUEL PUMP) (see page
22-93).
Is t he relay OK?
NO-Repl ac e PGM-FI mai n rel ay 2 (FUEL PUMP). Al so
r epl ace t he No. 9 FUEL PUMP (20 A) f us e. B
46. Chec k f or cont i nui t y bet ween PGM-FI mai n rel ay 2
(FUEL PUMP) 4P connect or t er mi nal No. 2 and body
gr ound.
PGM-FI MAIN REL AY 2 (FUEL PUMP) 4P CONNECTOR
IG1 ( BL K / RED)
1 2
22
29
12
23
30
401
3 4 5 7 8
31
16
44 45 46
9 10
17 1 8 / 20 21 '
3ZL
Terminal side of female terminUs
YES - Repai r shor t i n t he wi r e bet ween t he No. 9 FUEL
PUMP (20 A) f use and t he ECM/ PCM (C10), bet ween
t he No. 9 FUEL PUMP (20 A) f use and PGM-FI mai n
r el ay 2 (FUEL PUMP), or bet ween t he No. 9 FUEL
PUMP (20 A) f use and t he i mmobi l i zer cont rol uni t.
Al so r epl ace t he No. 9 FUEL PUMP (20 A) f us e. B
NO-Repl ac e t he No. 9 FUEL PUMP (20 A) f use, and
updat e t he ECM/ PCM if it does not have t he l at est
(cont ' d)
11-187
PGM-FI S f st em
50. Remove t he r ear seat c ushi on (see page 20-241).
51. Remove t he ac c es s panel f r om t he f l oor (see page
11-320).
52. Di sconnect t he f uel pump 4P connect or .
53. Chec k f or cont i nui t y bet ween f uel pump 4P c onnec t or
F UEL PUMP 4P CONNECTOR
1 2
3 4
FUE L PUMP (PNK)
YES - Repai r shor t i n t he wi r e bet ween t he f uel pump
and PGM-FI mai n rel ay 2 (FUEL PUMP). Al so r epl ace
t he No. 9 FUEL PUMP (20 A) f us e. B
NO-Chec k t he f uel pump, and r epl ace it if nec essar y
(see page 11-324). Al so r epl ace t he No. 9 FUEL PUMP
(20 A) f us e. B
55. Di sconnect ECM/ PCM c onnec t or s A (49P) and C (49P).
SG1 ( BL K / RED)
1 2
12
29
23
30
13
31
4 | 5 | 6 7 8
20 21 14( 1516 17| 18
40| >^ 43| 44| 46| 4ej ^
9 10
ma.
NO-Repai r open i n t he wi r e bet ween t he No. 9 FUEL
PUMP (20 A) f use and t he ECM/ PCM (C10).B
MRL Y ( RED/ BL K )
| 4 2 | 4 3 | 4 4 M 4 6 p 1 >V l
NO- Go to st ep 59.
11-188
60. Remove PGM-FI mai n r el ay 1 (A) from t he under -hood
f use/r el ay box.
61. Measur e t he vol t age-bet ween PGM-FI mai n r el ay 1 4P
PGM-F I MAI N RELAY 1 4P CONNECTOR
NO-Repl ac e t he under -hood f use/r el ay box (see page
22-85).B
62. Chec k f or cont i nui t y bet ween PGM-FI mai n r el ay 1 4P
connect or t er mi nal No. 3 and ECM/ PCM c onnec t or
t er mi nal A7.
Terminal side of
female terminals
ECM/PCM
CONNECTOR A (49P)
MRL Y
MRL Y ( RED/ BL K )
YE S - Tes t PGM-FI mai n r el ay 1 (see page 22-93). If t he
rel ay i s OK , updat e t he ECM/ PCM if it does not have
t he latest sof t war e (see page 11-203), or subst i t ut e a
ECM/ PCM (see page 11 -204). B
(A7) and PGM-FI mai n r el ay 1 .
(cont' d)
11-189
PGM-FI S y s t em
64. Remove PGM-FI mai n r el ay 1 (A) f r om t he under -hood
f use/r el ay box.
65. Measur e t he vol t age bet ween PGM-FI mai n rel ay 1 4P
+B
1
2
22-85).B
66. Chec k f or cont i nui t y bet ween PGM-FI mai n r el ay 1 4P
t er mi nal A9.
IGP
Terminal side of
female terminals
ECM/ PCM
CONNECTOR A (49P) IGP ( YEL / BL K )
II II
J 11/
3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 | / 9
Nil
1
11
/
/ ] 1 5 16 17 18 19 20 21
1
22 23 24 25
><
26 27 28
1
29 30
/
3 2 / 34 3 5 3 6
/ /
421431441/| 4 6 1/
A A \
(A9) and PGM-FI mai n rel ay 1. B
67. Test PGM-FI mai n rel ay 1 (see page 22-93).
Is PGM-FI main relay 1 OK?
NO-Repl ac e PGM-FI mai n rel ay 1. B
11-190
ECM/ PCM connect or t er mi nal s B1, B10, C2, C44, and
C48 i ndi vi dual l y.
PG2 (BLK) PG1 (BLK)
. h i /
3| 4 L / V l 7 | 8 9 ho
i
11 12 1314|15161718 19
/
21
i
22 2324 25
><
262728
i
29
/
31 323334 3536
/
38
/
I
4 0
K
1431^145146147 481/
PGMETCS (BLK)
HH
11
12
29 30
3| 4| 5| 6| 7| 8] 9 |10[
13|14|15|16| 17|18JyJ20|21
40 431441451A%\^7 4 8 0
LG1
(BRN/Y ELi
L G2
(BRN/ YEL )
(B1, B10, C2, C44, C48) and G101; M/T (see page
22-20), A/T (see page 22-22).H
VCC1 ( YEL / RED)
22
12
23
30
40
J
4
, l 5 | 6 | 7 8
2 P
1314J1516 17J18X20 21
43444546
9 10
NO-
A/T: Go to st ep 72.
M/T: Go to st ep 74.
71. Cont i nue to check f or cont i nui t y bet ween ECM/ PCM
connect or t er mi nal C13 and body gr ound, whi l e
di sconnect i ng t hese c onnec t or s, one at a t i me:
MAP sensor 3P connect or
Out put shaf t (count ershaf t ) speed sensor 3P
connect or
YES - Repl ac e t he part that c aused cont i nui t y to go
away when it was d i s c o nnec t ed .
NO-Repai r shor t i n t he wi r e bet ween t he ECM/ PCM
(C13) and t he MAP sensor , or t he output shaf t
(count ershaf t ) speed s ens o r . H
(cont' d)
11-191
PGM-FI S f st em
72. Check f or cont i nui t y bet ween ECM/ PCM c onnec t or
VCC2 ( YEL / BL U)
H E
1 | / 1 3 | 4 M / 1 7
12
22
29/31
13
2324
14|15
161718
^2 5 ^2 6
19
40|/1xl 43\ / \ 45146J47
10
21
MA
NO- Go to st ep 74.
connect or t er mi nal B19 and body gr ound whi l e
di sconnect i ng t he i nput shaf t (mai nshaf t ) speed
(B19) and t he i nput shaf t (mai nshaf t ) speed s ens o r . B
NO-Repl ac e t he i nput shaf t (mai nshaf t ) speed s ens or
(see page 14-187).
VCC3 (BL U)
22
12
23
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
1314)1516 17118/20 21
4 0 k V | 4 3 | 4 4 | 4 5 | 4 6 j /
NO- Go to st ep 76.
75. Cont i nue to c hec k f or cont i nui t y bet ween ECM/ PCM
connect or t er mi nal C12 and body gr ound whi l e *
di sconnect i ng t he throttle body 6P connect or .
(C12) and t he throttle body . H
NO-Repl ac e t he throttle body (see page 11-335).U
11-192
9 > v
VCC4 (RED)
NO- Go to st ep 78.
connect or t ermi nal A26 and body gr ound whi l e
di sconnect i ng t he APP sensor 6P connect or .
is there continuity?
(A26) and t he APP s ens or .H
NO-Repl ac e t he accel er at or pedal modul e (see page
11-240).H
78. Chec k for cont i nui t y bet ween ECM/ PCM c onnec t or
NO- Go to st ep 80.
connect or t er mi nal A25 and body gr ound whi l e
di sconnect i ng t he APP sensor 6P connect or .
(A25) and t he APP s ens or .H
NO-Repl ac e t he accel er at or pedal modul e (see page
11-240).H
(cont ' d)
11-193
PGM-FI S f st em
VCC6 (Y EL)
Il H
3|4|5l_6|7l/ _
|10||
i
11
/ /
/J1516 1718 19 2 0 21
1
1 i
22 23 24 25 262 728
1
1 i
29 30
/
321/ 34 3536
/ /
1
1
1/141 42|43|44|/l46|X,
AA
ECM/ PCM (see page 11 -204). B
81. Cont i nue to c hec k f or cont i nui t y bet ween ECM/ PCM
c onnec t or t er mi nal A20 and body gr ound, whi l e
di sc onnec t i ng t hese c onnec t or s, one at a t i me:
FTP sensor 3P connect or
A/ C pr essur e sensor 3P connect or ('10 model )
YES - Repl ac e t he part t hat c aused cont i nui t y to go
away when it d i s c o nnec t ed .
NO-Repai r shor t i n t he wi r e bet ween t he ECM/ PCM
(A20) and t he FTP sensor , or t he A/ C pr essur e s ens or
( ' I Omodel ) . B
11-194
Injector Replacement
2. Remove t he engi ne c over ,
3. Di sconnect t he qui ck-connect fi tti ng (A).
4. Di sc onnec t t he Inj ect or c onnec t or s (B) and t he engi ne mount cont rol sol enoi d val ve connect or (C).
5. Remove t he gr ound c abl e bol t s (G101 and G102) (D).
6. Remove t he f uel rai l mount i ng nut s (E) f r om t he f uel rai l (F).
7. Remove t he f uel rai l and t he Inj ect ors f r om t he Inj ect or base.
8. Remove t he Inj ect or cl i ps (G) f r om t he f uel r ai l
9. Remove t he i nj ect ors f r om t he f uel rai l .
(cont' d)
11-195
PGM-FI Syst em
Inj ector Repl acement (cont' d)
10. Coat t he new 0-r i ngs (bl ack) (A) wi t h c l ean engi ne oi l , and i nser t t he i nj ect or s (B) i nto t he f uel rai l (C).
11. Inst al l t he i nj ect or c l i ps (D).
12. Coat t he new i nj ect or O-r i ngs (br own) (E) wi t h c l ean engi ne oi l .
13. Inst al l t he f uel rai l and t he i nj ect or s i n t he i nj ect or base (F).
14. Inst al l t he f uel rai l mount i ng nut s (G) and t he gr ound cabl e bol t s (G101 and G102).
15. Connec t t he i nj ect or c onnec t or s and t he engi ne mount cont rol sol enoi d val ve connect or .
16. Connec t t he qui ck-connect fi tti ng.
17. Tur n t he i gni ti on swi t c h to ON (II), but do not oper at e t he st art er. Af t er t he f uel pump r uns f or about 2 s ec onds , t he f uel
rai l wi l l be pr essur i zed. Repeat t hi s t wo or t hr ee t i mes, t hen make sur e t her e ar e no f uel l eaks.
18. Rei nst al l t he engi ne cover .
11-196
A/F Sensor Replacement Secondar y H02S Replacement
02 Sens or Wr enc h Snap-on S6176 or equi val ent ,
c ommer c i al l y avai l abl e
1. Di sc onnec t t he A/ F sensor 4P connect or (A), t hen
r emove t he A/ F sensor (B).
2. Inst al l t he part s i n t he r ever se or der of r emoval .
02 S ens or Wr enc h Snap-on S6176 or equi val ent ,
1. Di sc onnec t t he sec ondar y H02S 4P c onnec t or (A),
t hen r emove t he sec ondar y H02S (B).
2. Inst al l t he part s in t he r ever se or der of r emoval .
11-197
PGM-FI Syst em
CMP Sensor B Repl acement
1. Di sconnect t he c onnec t or (A) and hos es (B) f r om t he
EVAP cani st er pur ge val ve (C), t hen r emove t he EVAP
cani st er pur ge val ve assembl y.
2. Di sconnect t he CMP sensor B connect or (A).
A
12 Nm
(1.2 kgf m,
8.7 Ibf-ft)
3. Remove CMP s ens or B (B).
4. Install t he part s i n t he r ever se or der of r emoval wi t h a
new O-ri ng (C).
CKP Sensor Repl acement
1. Rai se t he vehi c l e on a lift.
NOTE: Make sur e t he vehi c l e i s l evel , bec ause engi ne
oi l wi l l dri p out when you r emove t he sensor .
2. Remove t he CK P s ens or c over (A).
3. Di sc onnec t t he CK P sensor c onnec t or (B).
4. Remove t he CK P s ens or (C).
5. Inst al l t he par t s i n t he r ever se or der of r emoval wi t h a
new O-ri ng (D).
6. Do t he CK P pat t ern c l ear /CKP pat t ern l earn pr ocedur e
( s eepage 11-5).
7. Chec k t he engi ne oi l l evel , and add mor e oi l if needed.
11-198
MAP Sensor Replacement
1. Di sconnect t he MAP sensor connect or (A).
2. Remove t he MAP sensor (B).
3. Install t he part s i n t he r ever se or der of r emoval wi t h a
new O-ri ng (C).
MAF Sensor /IAT Sensor
Replacement
1. Di sc onnec t t he MAF sensor /IAT sensor connect or (A).
2. Remove t he s c r ews (B).
3. Remove t he MAF sensor /IAT s ens or (C).
4. Inst al l t he part s i n t he r ever se or der of r emoval wi t h a
new O-ri ng (D).
11-199
PGIVI-FI S f st em
ECT Sensor 1 Replacement
2. Di sc onnec t t he ECT sensor 1 connect or (A).
3. Remove ECT sensor 1 (B).
4. Inst al l t he par t s in t he r ever se or der of r emoval wi t h a
new O-ri ng (C), t hen refi ll t he radi at or wi t h engi ne
cool ant (see page 10-6).
ECT Sensor 2 Repl acement
1. Remove t he f ront spl ash shi el d, (see page 20-291)
3. Di sc onnec t t he ECT sensor 2 connect or (A), t hen
r emove ECT sensor 2 (B).
A
4. Inst al l ECT sensor 2 wi t h a new O-ri ng (C).
5. Inst al l t he f ront spl ash shi el d, (see page 20-291)
6. Refi ll t he radi at or wi t h engi ne cool ant (see page 10-6).
11-200
Out put Shaf t (Countershaft) Speed
Sensor Repl acement
NOTE: For A/ T model s (see page 14-188).
M/T
1. Di sc onnec t t he output shaf t (count ershaf t ) speed
s ens or 3P connect or (A).
C
2. Remove t he output shaf t (count ershaf t ) speed sensor
(B).
new O-ri ng (C).
Knock Sensor Repl acement
2. Di sc onnec t t he knock sensor connect or (A).
A
3. Remove t he knock sensor (B).
4. Install t he part s in t he r ever se or der of r emoval .
11-201
PGM-FI S f st em
ELD Replacement
1. Do t he battery t er mi nal di sconnect i on pr ocedur e (see
page 22-91).
2. Remove t he upper c over (A), t hen r emove t he t wo
posi t i ve ( +) t er mi nal s (B).
3. Remove t he under -hood f use/r el ay box (C) f r om t he
bracket .
4. Remove t he l ower c over (A).
A .
5. Di sconnect t he EL D 3P connect or (B).
6. Remove t he f uses (A) and (B).
7. Rel ease t he t hr ee lock t abs (A), t hen r emove t he EL D
(B).
8. Install t he part s i n t he r ever se or der of r emoval .
page 22-91).
11-202
ECM/ PCM Updat e
Honda di agnost i c syst em (HDS) t abl et t est er
Honda Interface Modul e (HIM) and an iN wor kst at i on
wi t h t he l at est HDS sof t war e ver si on
HDS pocket t est er
GNA600 and an iN workst at i on wi t h t he latest HDS
Any one of above updat i ng t ool s c an be used.
NOTE:
Make sur e t he HDS/i N workst at i on has t he l at est
sof t war e ver si on.
Bef ore you updat e t he ECM/ PCM, make sur e t he
battery i n t he vehi c l e i s fully c har ged, and c onnec t a
j umper battery (not a battery char ger ) to mai nt ai n
syst em vol t age.
Never t urn t he i gni ti on swi t ch to A CC (I) or L OCK (0)
duri ng t he updat e. If t here i s a pr obl em wi t h t he
updat e, l eave t he i gni ti on swi t ch i n ON (II).
To prevent ECM/ PCM damage, do not operat e
anyt hi ng el ect ri cal (headl i ght s, audi o syst em, br akes,
A/ C, power wi ndows, moonr oof (if equi pped), door
l ocks, et c.) dur i ng t he updat e.
To ensur e t he l at est pr ogr am i s i nst al l ed, do an
ECM/ PCM updat e whenever t he ECM/ PCM i s
subst i t ut ed or r epl aced.
You cannot updat e an ECM/ PCM wi t h a pr ogr am it
al r eady has. It wi l l onl y accept a new pr ogr am.
Hi gh t emper at ur e in t he engi ne compar t ment mi ght
c ause t he ECM/ PCM to become t oo hot to run t he
updat e. If t he engi ne has been r unni ng bef ore t hi s
pr ocedur e, open t he hood and cool t he engi ne
compar t ment .
If you need to di agnose t he Honda i nt erf ace modul e
(HIM) bec ause t he HIM' s red (#3) li ght c ame on or was
f l ashi ng dur i ng t he updat e, l eave t he i gni ti on swi t ch in
ON (II) when you di sconnect t he HIM f r om t he dat a link
connect or (DLC). Thi s wi l l pr event ECM/ PCM damage.
1. Tur n t he i gni ti on swi t c h to ON (II), but do not start t he
engi ne.
2. Connec t t he HDS to t he dat a link c onnec t or (DLC) (A)
A
and ot her vehi cl e syst ems. If it doesn' t , go to t he DL C
ret urni ng f r om t he DL C ci rcui t t r oubl eshoot i ng, ski p
st eps 4 and 5, and c l ean t he throttle body after
updat i ng t he ECM/ PCM (see page 11-332).
5. Sel ec t t he ETCS TE S T, t hen sel ec t t he TP POSITION
CHECK , and f ol l ow t he HDS sc r een pr ompt s.
NOTE: If the TP POSITION CHECK i ndi cat es FAIL ED,
6. Exi t t he HDS di agnost i c s y s t em, t hen sel ect t he
updat e mode, and f ol l ow t he sc r een pr ompt s to
updat e the ECM/ PCM.
(cont' d)
11-203
PGM-FI S f st em
ECM/ PCM Updat e (cont' d)
ECM/ PCM Replacement
7. If t he sof t war e In t he ECM/ PCM Is t he l at est
di sc onnec t t he HDS/HIM/GNA600 f r om t he DL C, and
go back to t he pr ocedur e that you wer e doi ng. If t he
sof t war e i n t he ECM/ PCM Is not t he l at est , f ol l ow t he
Inst r uct i ons on t he sc r een. If pr ompt ed to c hoose t he
PGM-FI syst em or t he A/ T syst em, make sur e you
updat e bot h.
NOTE: If t he ECM/ PCM updat e syst em r equi r es you t o
cool t he ECM/ PCM, f ol l ow t he i nst r uct i ons on sc r een.
If you run i nto a pr obl em dur i ng t he updat e pr ocedur e
(pr ogr ammi ng t akes over 15 mi nut es, st at us bar goes
over 100 %, D or i mmobi l i zer Indi cat or f l ashes, HDS
t abl et f r eezes, et c.), f ol l ow t hese st eps to mi ni mi ze t he
c hanc e of damagi ng t he ECM/ PCM:
Leave t he i gni t i on swi t c h in ON (II).
Connec t a j umper bat t ery (do not connect a battery
Shut down t he HDS.
Di sc onnec t t he HDS f r om t he DL C.
Reboot t he HDS.
Rec onnec t t he HDS to t he DL C, and do t he updat e
pr ocedur e agai n.
8. If t he TP POSITION CHECK f ai l ed in st ep 5, c l ean t he
throttle body (see page 11-332).
11-293).
10. Do t he CK P pat t ern c l ear /CKP pattern l earn pr ocedur e.
Honda di agnost i c syst em (HDS) t ablet t est er
Honda Int erf ace Modul e (HIM) and an i N wor kst at i on
HDS pocket t est er
GNA600 and an i N wor kst at i on wi t h t he l at est HDS
Any one of above updat i ng t ool s c an be used.
and ot her vehi c l e syst ems. If it doesn' t , go to t he DLC
ret urni ng f r om t he DL C ci rcui t t r oubl eshoot i ng, ski p
st eps 4 t hr ough 9, 20 t hr ough 25, and 28 t hr ough 30,
and do t hi s after r epl aci ng t he ECM/ PCM:
Repl ac e t he engi ne oi l (see page 8-10) and t he
engi ne oi l fi lter (see page 8-12).
i Repl ac e t he ATF (A/T model ) (see page 14-192).
Cl ean t he throttle body (see page 11-332).
11-204
4. Sel ec t t he PGM-FI syst em wi t h t he HDS.
6. Sel ec t t he ETCS TES T, t hen sel ec t t he TP POSITION
CHECK , and f ol l ow t he sc r een pr ompt s.
NOTE: If the TP POSITION CHECK i ndi cat es FAIL ED,
cont i nue wi t h t hi s pr ocedur e.
7. Sel ec t t he REPL ACE ECM/ PCM MENU, t hen READ
DATA, and f ol l ow t he sc r een pr ompt s.
NOTE:
Doi ng t hi s st ep c opi es (READS) t he engi ne oi l life
dat a f rom t he ori gi nal ECM/ PCM so you c an l at er
downl oad (WRITES) it into t he new ECM/ PCM.
If READ DATA i ndi cat es FAIL ED, cont i nue wi t h t hi s
pr ocedur e.
8. A/ T model s: Sel ec t t he A/ T syst em wi t h t he HDS.
9. A/ T model s: Sel ec t t he REPL ACE TCM/ PCM MENU,
t hen sel ect READ DATA, and f ol l ow t he sc r een
pr ompt s.
NOTE:
Doi ng t hi s st ep c opi es (READS) t he ATF life dat a
f r om t he or i gi nal PCM so you c an later downl oad
(WRITES) it into t he new PCM.
If READ DATA i ndi cat es FAIL ED, cont i nue wi t h t hi s
pr ocedur e.
D
9.8 N-m
(1.0 kgf m, 7.2 Ibf-ft)
14. Di sc onnec t ECM/ PCM connect or s A, B, and C, t hen
r emove t he ECM/ PCM assembl y (E).
NOTE: ECM/ PCM connect or s A, B, and C have
symbol s (A= D, B= A, C= 0) embos s ed on t hem f or
(cont ' d)
11-205
PGM-FI S f st em
ECM/PCM Replacement (cont
f
d)
15. Remove t he c over (A) and t he bracket (B) f r om t he
ECM/ PCM (C).
16. Install t he ECM/ PCM i n t he r ever se or der of r emoval .
19. Manual l y i nput t he VIN to t he ECM/ PCM wi t h t he HDS.
NOTE: DTC P0630 VIN Not Pr ogr ammed or Mi smat ch
may be st or ed bec ause t he VIN has not been
pr ogr ammed into t he ECM/ PCM; i gnor e it, and
20. If t he READ DATA (engi ne oi l life) f ai l ed in st ep 7, go to
st ep 23 (A/T model ) or st ep 26 (M/T model ).
Ot her wi se, go to st ep 21.
21. Sel ec t t he PGM-FI syst em wi t h t he HDS.
22. Sel ec t t he REPL ACE ECM/ PCM MENU, t hen sel ect
WRITE DATA, and f ol l ow t he sc r een pr ompt s.
NOTE: If t he WRITE DATA i ndi cat es FAI L ED, cont i nue
wi t h t hi s pr ocedur e.
23. A/ T model s: If t he READ DATA (ATF life) f ai l ed i n st ep
9, go to st ep 26. Ot her wi se go to st ep 24.
24. A/ T model s: Sel ec t t he A/ T S YS TE M wi t h t he HDS.
25. A/ T model s: Sel ec t t he REPL ACE TCM/ PCM MENU,
t hen sel ec t WRITE DATA, and f ol l ow t he sc r een
pr ompt s.
NOTE: If t he WRITE DATA i ndi cat es FAIL ED, cont i nue
wi t h t hi s pr ocedur e.
26. Sel ec t IMMOBI syst em wi t h t he HDS.
27. Ent er t he i mmobi l i zer ECM/ PCM c ode that you got
f r om t he i N, and uset he ECM/ PCM r epl acement
pr ocedur e i n t he IMMOBI MENU of t he HDS; it al l ows
you to st art t he engi ne.
28. If t he TP POSITION C! fmmdIn st ep 6 c l ean t he
throttle body (see page 11-332), t hen go to st ep 29.
29. If t he READ DATA f ai l ed i n st ep 7 or t he WRITE DATA
f ai l ed i n st ep 22, r epl ace t he engi ne oi l (see page 8-10)
and engi ne oi l fi lter (see page 8-12), t hen go to st ep 30
(A/T model ) or st ep 31 (M/T model ).
30. If t he READ DATA f ai l ed in st ep 9 or t he WRITE DATA
f ai l ed i n st ep 25, r epl ace t he ATF (see page 14-192),
t hen got o s t ep31.
31. Sel ec t PGM-FI s y s t em, and reset t he ECM/ PCM wi t h
t he HDS.
sof t war e (see page 11-203).
11-293).
(see page 11-5).
11-206
Electroni c Throttle Control Syst em
THROTTLE ACTUATOR and Updat e, page 11 -203
THROTTLE POSITION (TP) SENSOR Subst i t ut i on, page 11 -7
ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION (APP) SENSOR ACCELERATOR PEDAL MODULE
Si gnal Inspec t i on, page 11 -239 Removal /Inst al l at i on, page 11 -240
11-207
El ect roni c Throttle Cont rol Syst em
DTC Troubl eshoot i ng
DTC P0122: TP Sensor A Ci rcui t Low Vol t age
3. Chec k TP S ENS OR A i n t he DATA L I ST wi t h t he HDS.
Is t here about 0.3 V or less?
throttle body and t he E CM/ PCM. B
NO- Go to st ep 5.
6. Di sc onnec t t he throttle body 6P connect or .
9. Chec k f or cont i nui t y bet ween throttle body 6P
10. Measur e t he vol t age bet ween throttle body 6P
THROTTLE BODY 6P CONNECTOR
1 2 3 4 5 6
VCC3(BLU)
NO- Go t o s t ep11.
THROTTL E BODY 6P CONNECTOR
1 | 2 | 3 | 4 1 s | e
TPS A ( RED/ BL K )
YES - Repai r shor t in t he wi r e bet ween t he throttle
body and t he ECM/ PCM (C20), t hen go to st ep 18.
NO- Go to st ep 23.
11-208
t er mi nal C12 and throttle body 6P connect or t er mi nal
No. 2.
1 4
VCC3 (BLU) I Wire side of female terminals
T
VCC3 (BLU) ECI WPCM CONNECTOR C (49P)
3
I 4 | S
6 7 8 9 10
11 12 13 14J15 16 17)18 20 21
22 23 24
1
29 30 31 32 L/
/
| 4 0 | /
/
1431441451461^/
48
l / l
t he throttle body and t he ECM/ PCM. If t he ECM/ PCM
NO-Repai r open in t he wi r e bet ween t he throttle body
and t he ECM/ PCM (C12), t hen go to st ep 18.
17. Repl ace t he throttle body (see page 11-335).
11-293).
t he throttle body and t he ECM/ PCM, t hen go to st ep 1.
11-209
Elect roni c Throttle Cont rol Syst em
DTC P0123: TP Sensor A Ci rcui t High Vol t age
3. Chec k TP S ENS OR A in t he DATA L I ST wi t h t he HDS.
Is t here about 4.8 Vor more?
throttle body and t he E CM/ PCM.
NO- Go to st ep 5.
6. Di sc onnec t t he throttle body BP connect or .
1HROTTL E BODY 6P CONNECTOR
1 2 3 4 5 6
TPSA (RED/BLK )
NO- Go to st ep 9.
No. 1.
/\
3j 4
TPS A ( RED/ BL K ) I Wire side of female terminals
E CM/ PCM CONNECTOR C (49P) TPS A ( RED/ BL K )
NO-Repai r open i n t he wi r e bet ween t he throttle body
14. Di sconnect t he throttle body 6P connect or .
11-210
No. 4.
1 2 3 4 5 6
SG3 (GRN)
I S
J 1 | 2
3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 8 9 10
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
/
2 0 21
1
22 2 3 2 4 X
/
><
/ / /
1
29 30 3 1 : J 2L/
/
A/
/
A
/
1
A
4 3 | 4 4 | 4 5 | 4 6 | / '
SG3 (GRN)
(see page 11 -7), t hen r echeck. If t he ECM/ PCM was
subst i t ut ed, go t o st ep 1.
i ndi cat ed DTCs t r o ub l es h o o t i ng ^
11-293).
11-211
El ect roni c Throttle Control Syst em
DTC P0222: TP Sensor B Ci rcui t Low Vol t age
3. Chec k TP S ENS OR B i n t he DATA L I ST wi t h t he HDS.
4. Chec k f or Pp.pHi nn or Cn rrr. ed n y c c wi t h t he I ! DC.
NO- Go to st ep 5.
c onnec t or t er mi nal No. 3 and body gr ound.
1HROTTL E BODY 6P CONNECTOR
1 2 3 4 5 6
VCC3 (BLU)
NO- Go to st ep 11.
1
C
M
3 4 5 6
TP SB ( RED/ BL U)
YES - Repai r shor t in t he wi r e bet ween t he throttle
body and t he ECM/ PCM (C21), t hen go to st ep 18.
NO- Go to st ep 23.
11-212

No. 2.
THROTTL E BODY i P CONNECTOR
VCC3 (BLU)
VCC3 (BL U)
1 2
J E
12
3 4 5 6 7 8
13 14(15 16 1 7 | 1 8 / 2 0
|40lyl/l43|44|45|46
9 10
UZL
17. Repl ac e t he throttle body (see page 11 -335).
11-293).
11 -213
Elect roni c Throttle Control S y s t em
DTC P0223: TP Sensor B Ci rcui t High Vol t age
3. Chec k TP S ENS OR B in t he DATA L I ST wi t h t he HDS.
Is t here about 4.8 V or more?
Check f or poor c onnec t i ons or l oose t er mi nal s at t he
throttle body and t he ECM/ PCM. B
Are DTC P0123 and P0223 Indicat ed at t he same t ime?
NO- Go to st ep 5.
TPS B ( RED/ BL U)
NO- Go to st ep 9.
No. 3.
3 j 4
TPSB (RED/BLU) I Wi r e si de of f emal e t er mi nal s
ECM/PCM CONNECTOR C (49P) TPSB (RED/BLU)
22
29
12
23
30
3 | 4 | 5 | 6 \ 7 ] B \ 9 |
13h4|l ^ 16J17h8L/ 201
24
31
4 0 |X^ 4 3 | 4 4 | 4 5 | 4 6
21
ZZ
48J2L
and t he ECM/ PCM (C21), t hen go t o st ep 20.
11-214
No. 4.
1 2 3 4 5 6
SG3 (GRN)
II ll
1 2
11 12
4 5 6 7
^3
13 14| 15 16 1 7 1 1 8 / 2 0 21
43 44 45 46
10
48M
SG3 (GRN)
11-293).
11-215
Elect roni c Throttle Control Syst em
DTC P1658: ETCS Cont rol Rel ay ON
Malfuncti on
2. Do t he E TCS TE S T i n t he INSPECTION MENU wi t h t he
HDS.
Is t he RELA Y circuit OK?
E TCS cont rol r el ay and t he E CM/ PCM.
NO- Go to st ep 3.
4. Remove t he E TCS cont rol r el ay (A) f r om t he
5. Test t he E TCS cont rol rel ay (see page 22-93).
Is t he ETCS cont rol relay OK?
NO-Repl ac e t he E TCS cont rol r el ay, t hen go to st ep
13.
E TCS RL Y (WHT)
(A21) and t he E TCS cont rol r el ay, t hen go to st ep 13.
NO- Go to st ep 9.
I G1ETCS ( YEL / GRN)
22
29
23
30
3 4 5 6 7
24
14I 151161T7J 18J /
43 44 45 46
9 10
1321
YES - Repai r shor t to power i n t he wi r e bet ween t he
ECM/ PCM (C1) and t he ETCS cont rol r el ay, t hen go to
st ep 12.
NO- Go to st ep 18.
11-216
13. Rec onnec t al l connect or s.
18. Do t he ECM/ PCM idle, l earn pr ocedur e (see page
11-293).
:
,
t he E TCS cont r ol r el ay and t he ECM/ PCM, t hen go to
st ep 1.
NO^ Tr oubl eshoot i ng i s compl et e. If any ot her
Pendi ng or Conf i r med-DTCs ar e i ndi cat ed, go to t he
i ndi cat ed DTCs t r oubl eshoot i ng.! !
19. Rec onnec t al l c onnec t or s.
20. Updat e the. ECM/ PCM if it does not have t he l at est
t he E TCS cont rol r el ay and t he ECM/ PCM. If t he
ECM/ PCM (see page 11 -7), t hen r echeck. If t he
ECM/ PCM was subst i t ut ed, go t o st ep 1.
DTC P18SS: ETCS Cont rol Rel ay OFF
Malfuncti on
E TCS cont rol r el ay and t he ECM/ PCM. B
5. Chec k t he No. 18 DBW (ETCS) (15 A) f use i n t he
Is t he fuse OK?
YE S - Go to st ep 6..
NO- Go to st ep 17.
6. Remove t he E TCS cont rol rel ay (A) f r om t he
A
7. Test t he E TCS cont rol rel ay (see page 22-93).
Is t he ETCS cont rol relay OK?
NO-Repl ac e t he ETCS cont rol r el ay, t hen go to st ep
23.
(cont ' d)
11-217
9. Measur e t he vol t age bet ween E TCS cont rol r el ay 4P
E TCS CONTROL REL AY 4P CONNECTOR
IGP
10. Measur e t he vol t age bet ween E TCS cont rol r el ay 4P
E TCS CONTROL RE L A Y 4P CONNECTOR
+B
1
13. Di sc onnec t ECM/ PCM c onnec t or C (49P).
14. Chec k f or cont i nui t y bet ween E TCS cont rol rel ay 4P
t er mi nal C1.
I G1ETCS
Ml
Terminal side of
female terminals
I G1ETCS
( YEL / GRN) E CM/ PCM CONNECTOR C (49P)
1 2
11 12
29
40
3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7
13114|15|16|17T18LX 20 21
24
9 hoi,
(C1) and t he E TCS cont rol rel ay, t hen go to st ep 23.
11-218
18. Chec k f or cont i nui t y bet ween E TCS cont rol rel ay 4P
t er mi nal A21.
1
2
4
X
3
Terminal side of
female terminals
E TCS RL Y
Hf = f
E TCS RL Y
(WHT)
(A21) and t he E TCS cont r ol r el ay, t hen go to st ep 23.
17. Remove t he E TCS cont rol rel ay (A) f r om t he
I G1ETCS ( YEL / GRN)
12
23
40
13 14 15 16 17 18 20
i f "
1
(C1) and t he E TCS cont rol r el ay, t hen go to st ep 23.
NO- Go to st ep 21.
21. Chec k for cont i nui t y bet ween ETCS cont rol r el ay 4P
+ B
1
4M3
YES - Repl ac e t he under -hood f use/r el ay box (see
NO- Go to st ep 28.
(cont' d)
11-219
Electroni c Throttle Cont rol Syst em
24. Tur n t he Igni ti on swi t ch to ON (II).
26. Do t he ECM/ PCM Idle l ear n pr ocedur e (see page
11-293).
t he E TCS cont rol rel ay and t he ECM/ PCM, t hen go t o
st ep 1.
29. Updat e t he ECM/ PCM If It does not have t he l at est
t he E TCS cont rol rel ay and t he ECM/ PCM. If t he
NO-l f t he ECM/ PCM was updat ed, t r oubl eshoot i ng Is
Pendi ng or Conf i r med DTCs ar e Indi cat ed, go to t he
Indi cat ed DTCs t r oubl es hoot i ng.
DTC P1683: Throttle Val ve Default Posi ti on
Spr i ng Perf ormance Probl em
Do not i nsert your f i nger s i nto t he i nst al l ed throttle
body when you t urn t he i gni ti on swi t c h to ON (II) or
whi l e t he i gni ti on swi t c h i s i n ON (II). If you do, you
wi l l ser i ousl y i nj ure your f i nger s if t he throttle val ve i s
act i vat ed.
Cb ar f h c DTC v/ . u. . nDS .
4. Tur n t he i gni ti on swi t c h to L OCK (0), and wai t
10 sec onds.
8. Di sc onnec t t he i nt ake ai r duct f r om t he throttle body
(see page 11-335).
11-220
9. Push t he throttle val ve c l osed as s hown.
10. Rel ease t he throttle val ve.
Does the throttle valve return?
YE S - Cl ean t he throttle body (see page 11 -332), t hen
go to st ep 12 and recheck. If DTC P1683 i s i ndi cat ed,
go t o st ep 11.
NO- Go to st ep 11.
11. Repl ac e t he throttle body (see page 11-335).
11-293).
15. Tur n t he i gni ti on swi t ch to L OCK (0), and wai t
10 sec onds.
DTC P1684: Throttle Val ve Return Spr i ng
Perf ormance Probl em
Do not i nser t your f i nger s into t he i nst al l ed throttle
body when you turn t he i gni ti on swi t ch to ON (II) or
whi l e t he i gni ti on swi t c h i s in ON (II). If you do, you
act i vat ed.
10 sec onds.
throttle body and t he ECM/ PCM. H
8. Di sconnect t he i ntake ai r duct f r om t he throttle body
(see page 11-335).
(cont' d)
11-221
9. Push t he throttle val ve open as s hown.
10. Rel ease t he throttle val ve.
Does the throttle valve return?
YE S - Cl ean t he throttle body (see page 11-332), t hen
go to st ep 12 and r echeck. If DTC P1684 i s i ndi cat ed,
go to st ep 11.
NO- Go to st ep 11.
11. Repl ac e t he throttle body (see page 11 -335).
11-293).
15. Tur n t he i gni t i on swi t ch to L OCK (0), and wai t
10 s ec onds .
DTC P2101: El ect roni c Throttle Control
Syst em (ETCS) Malfuncti on
Do not i nsert your f i nger s into t he i nst al l ed throttle
whi l e t he i gni ti on swi t ch i s i n ON (II). If you do, you
wi l l ser i ousl y i nj ure your f i nger s if the throttle val ve i s
act i vat ed.
2. Cl ear t he DTC wi t h t he HDS.,
HDS.
NO- Go to st ep 5.
5. Test -dr i ve t he vehi cl e f or sever al mi nut es in t he r ange
ENGINE S PEED
VS S
A PPS E NS OR
throttle body and t he ECM/ PCM, t hen c l ean t he
throttle body (see page 11-332).H
11-222
(see page 11-335).
HDS.
12. Vi sual l y check t he throttle val ve oper at i on.
Does t he t hrot t le valve operat e smoot hly?
go to st ep 22 and r echeck. If DTC P2101 i s i ndi cat ed,
go to st ep 19.
NO- Go to st ep 13. .
17. Connec t throttle body 6P connect or t er mi nal s No. 5
1
C
M
3 4 5 6
ETCS M -
( GRN/ YEL )
E TCS M+
( BL U/ RED)
J UMPER WI RE
t er mi nal s C3 and C4.
E T C S M- ( GRN/ YEL ) ETCS M + (BL U/RED)
1 2 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 8 9 110 I
1
11 1 2 1 3 1 4 ) 1 5 1 6 1 7 | 1 8 2 0 2 1
1
2 2 2 3 2 4
/ /
1
2 9 3 0 31 321/
/ / /
| 4 0 | / 1 ] 4 3 | 4 4 | 4 5 | 4 6 | / 4 8 | / |
NO-Repai r open in t he wi r es bet ween t he throttle
body and t he ECM/ PCM (C3, C4), t hen go to st ep 21.
11-293).
ENGINE S PEED
VS S
A PPS E NS OR
26. Chec k f or Pendi ng or Conf i r med DTCs wi th t he HDS.
t he throttle body and t he ECM/ PCM, t hen cl ean t he
throttle body (see page 11-332), and go to st ep 1.
NO-Tr oubl eshoot i ng i s compl et e. If any other
(cont' d)
11 i2ii3
Elect roni c Throttle Control S f st em
ENGINE S PEED
VS S
APP S ENS OR
was updat ed, subst i t ut e s known-good ECM/ PCM
(see page 11 -7), t hen go to st ep 29. If t he ECM/ PCM
DTC P2118: Throttle Act uat or Current
3. Sl owl y pr ess t he accel er at or pedal to t he f l oor.
*' C-i nt er mi t t ent f ai l ur e, t he syst em i s OK at t hi s t i me.
8. Di sc onnec t PCM connect or C (49P).
t er mi nal C43 and throttle body BP connect or t er mi nal
No. 4.
1 2 3 4 5 6
SG3 (GRN)
J 1 | 2
3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 8 9 | 1 0 |
3
11 12 13 14(15 16 17 18
/
20 21
1
1
3
22 23 24
><
/
><
/ /
1
1
3
29 30 31
/
A/
/ /
1
1
4 0 / / | 4 3 | 4 4 | 4 5 | 4 6 | / 48 M
SG3 (GRN)
and t he ECM/ PCM (043), t hen go to st ep 14.
11-224
1HK OTTL E BODY 6P CONNECTOR
1 2 3 4 5 6
E TCS M ( GRN/ YEL ) E TCS M+ ( BL U/ RED)
\
Is t here continuity?
YES - Repai r shor t in t he wi r es bet ween throttle body
6P connect or t er mi nal No. 5 ( ETCS li ne) and No. 6
( E TCS + l i ne), t hen go to st ep 14.
NO- Go to st ep 11.
11_ Check f or cont i nui t y bet ween body gr ound and
throttle body 6P connect or t er mi nal s No. 5 and No. 6
i ndi vi dual l y.
3 4 5 6
ETCS M -
( GRN/ YEL )
E TCS M+
( BL U/ RED)
YES - Repai r shor t in t he wi r e bet ween throttle body 6P
connect or and body gr ound, t hen go to st ep 14.
NO- Go to st ep 12.
12. At t he throttle body si de, measur e t he r esi st anc e
bet ween throttle body 6P connect or t er mi nal s No. 5
and No. 6 wi t h t he throttle f ully c l osed.
E TCS M- E TCS M +
Is t here about 1.0 Dor less?
NO- Go to st ep 22.
11-293).
20. Sl owl y pr ess t he accel er at or pedal to t he f l oor.
t he throttle body and the ECM/ PCM, t hen go to st ep 1.
(cont' d)
11-225
26. Sl owl y pr ess t he accel er at or pedal t o t he f l oor.
(see page 11 -7), t hen go to st ep 26. If t he ECM/ PCM
was subst i t ut ed, go t o st ep 1.
DTC P2122; APP Sensor A (TP Sensor D)
1
2. Chec k APP S ENS OR A in t he DATA L I ST wi t h t he HDS.
APP sensor and t he ECM/ PCM. B
4. Di sc onnec t t he APP sensor 6P connect or .
6. Measur e t he vol t age bet ween APP sensor 6P
APP S E NS OR 6P CONNECTOR
SG4 (BLU)
3 J 4 J 5 J 6
VCC4 (RED)
NO- Go to st ep 17.
7 Tur n t he i gni t i on swi t c h to L OCK (0).
11-226
10. Check f or cont i nui t y bet ween APP sensor 6P
APP SENSOR 6P CONNECTOR
1 2 3 4 5 6
J APS A (YEL )
(Q)
(A18) and t he APP sensor , t hen go to st ep 24.
NO- Go to st ep 11.
11. Connec t APP sensor 6P connect or t er mi nal No. 1 to
1
C
M
3 4 5 6
APS A (YEL )
J UMPER WI RE
APS A (YEL )
3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7
/
9 | 1 0 |
1
11
/ /
/ 1 5 16 1718 19 20 21
i
1
22 23 24 25
X
26 27 28
i
1
29 30
/
3 2 / 34 3 5 3 6
/ /
M 4 1
421431441/ | 46 | /
AA\
13. Reconnect ECM/ PCM connect or A (49P).
14. Connect APP sensor 6P connect or t er mi nal s No. 1 and
No. 3 wi t h a j umper wi r e.
APS A (YEL )
1 2 3 4 5 6
L) VCC4 (RED)
J UMPER WI RE
16. Check APP S ENS OR A in t he DATA L IST wi t h t he HDS.
Is t here about 0.2 Vor less?
NO- Go to st ep 22.
(cont' d)
11-227
20. Connec t APP s ens or 6P connect or t er mi nal No. 3 to
1 2 3 4 5
6|
VCC4 (RED)
J UMPER WI RE
J l l /
3 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 | / 9 | 10|
1
11
/ /
16 1718 19 20 21

i

1
22 23 24 25
><
26 27 28

i

1
29 30
/
3 2 l / 34 3536
/

i

M 4 1 42|43|44|/|46|^ '
A A
VCC4 (RED)
23. Repl ac e t he accel er at or pedal modul e (see page
11-240).
11-293).
t he APP sensor and t he ECM/ PCM, t hen go to st ep 1.
i *0-Tr oubl eshoot i ng Is compl et e. If any ot her
t he APP sensor and t he ECM/ PCM. If t he ECM/ PCM
11-228
DTC P2123: APP Sensor A (TP Sensor D)
Ci rcui t High Voltage
NOTE: Bef or e you t r oubl eshoot r ecor d al l f r eeze dat a
2. Chec k APP S ENS OR A in t he DATA L I ST wi t h t he HDS.
Is there about 4.9 Vor more?
APP sensor and t he ECM/ PCM. B
4. Di sconnect t he APP sensor 6P connect or .
1 2 3 4 5 6
S G4 (BLU)
Is there about 5 V?
NO- Go to st ep 7.
7 Tur n t he i gni ti on swi t c h to L OCK (0).
1 2 3 4 5 6
SG4 (BLU)
J UMPER WIRE
22 25
32|/1yl35|36"
15 16 17(18 19
M 4 1 4 2 |43i 44M4fl >|/1y1
20 21
rnTfiTiTs i e i r \/\ 9 Ti opj
Hi / / / 11^T^fiTr/Tl ftl 1QITfvT? i l l )
SG4 (BLU)
33)
NO-Repai r open i n t he wi r e bet ween the ECM/PCM
(cont'd)
11-229
13. Repl ace t he accel er at or pedal modul e (see page
11-240).
11-293).
t he APP s ens or and t he ECM/ PCM, t hen go to st ep 1.
NC-Tr oubi eshoot i ng i s compl et e. If any ot her
t he APP s ens or and t he ECM/ PCM. If t he ECM/ PCM
DTC P2127: APP Sensor B (TP Sensor E)
2. Chec k APP S ENS OR B i n t he DATA L I ST wi t h t he HDS.
APP sensor and t he ECM/ PCM.H
1 2 3 4 5 6
SG5 (GRN) VCC5 (BRN)
NO- Go to st ep 17.
11-230
10. Chec k f or cont i nui t y bet ween APP sensor 6P
APS B (ORN)
(A19) and t he APP sensor , t hen go t o st ep 24.
NO- Go to st ep 11.
11. Connect APP sensor BP connect or t er mi nal No. 4 to
1 l 3 4 5 6
APSB ( ORN)
J UMPER WI RE
APS B( ORN)
13. Rec onnec t ECM/ PCM connect or A (49P).
14. Connec t APP sensor 6P connect or t er mi nal s No. 4 and
No. 6 wi th a j umper wi r e.
1
APS B( ORN) V C C 5 (BRN)
J UMPER WI RE
16. Chec k APP S ENS OR Bi n t he DATA L IST wi t h t he HDS.
Is there about 0.2 V or less?
NO-Go to st ep 22.
(cont ' d)
11-231
El ect roni c Throttle Cont rol S f st em
20. Connec t APP sensor 6P c onnec t or t er mi nal No. 6 to
VCC5 (BRN)
J UMPER WIRE
1
' / i
3
J
4
J
5
'
6
L
7
' / 1
9
.
| 1 0 >
W 71
22
29 30
24
15 16 17 18 19
7j32|/ i M35|36l7
2 5 > <2 6
1X141 W\^m/\m\AA/\
27 28
VCC5 (B RN)
11-240).
11-293).
11-232
DTC P2128: APP Sensor B (TP Sensor E)
Ci rcui t High Vol t age
NOTE: Bef ore you t r oubl eshoot r ecor d al l f r eeze dat a
2. Check APP S ENS OR B in t he DATA L I ST wi t h t he HDS.
YES-Go to st ep 3.
NO-l nt er mi t t ent f ai l ure, t he syst em i s OK at t hi s t i me.
Check f or poor connect i ons or l oose t er mi nal s at t he
APP sensor and t he E CM/ PCM.
3. Tur n t he i gni t i on swi t ch t o LOCK (0).
S G5 (GRN) VCC5 (BRN)
(g)
NO- Go to st ep 7.
1
H
3 4 5
c
o

S G5 (GRN)
J UMPER WI RE
1V
_3 4j5T6T 7HZ
sTToj
I
1 1
/ /
/ 1 5 1 6 17 18 1 9 20 2 1 1
1

I
2 2 2 3 2 4 2 5
><
2 6 2 7 2 8
1
1

I
2 9 3 0
/
32L / 3 4 3 5 | 3 6
/ /
1
1

1/1*1,
4 2
1
431441/ <146
A
/ l / l
S G5 (GRN)
(cont' d)
11-233
Electroni c Throttle Control Syst em
13. Repl ace t he accel er at or pedal modul e (see page
11-240).
11-293).
DTC P2135: TP Sensor A/B Incorrect Vol t age
Correl at i on
Do not i nser t your f i nger s into t he i nst al l ed throttle
whi l e t he i gni ti on swi t ch i s in ON (II). If you do, you
wi l l ser i ousl y i nj ure your f i nger s if the throttle val ve i s
act i vat ed.
3. Do t he E TCS TE S T in t he INSPECTION MENU wi t h t he
HDS.
(see page 11-335).
8. Vi sual l y check t he throttle val ve operat i on whi l e you
cl ear t he DTC wi t h t he HDS.
Does t he valve t emporarily move t o it s fully closed
posit ion?
NO- Go to st ep 9.
11-234
TPSA
(RED/BLK )
TPSB
( RED/ BL U)
NO- Go to st ep 22.
TPS A
( RED/ BL K )
TPS B
( RED/ BL U)
11-293).
YES - Repai r shor t i n t he wi r es bet ween ECM/ PCM
connect or t er mi nal C20 (TPSA li ne) and t he C21 (TPSB
l i ne), t hen go to st ep 17.
NO- Go to st ep 15.
11-235
Elect roni c Throttle Control Syst em
DTC P2138: APP Sensor A/B (TP Sensor D/E) -
Incorrect Voltage Correlation
NOTE; Bef ore you t r oubl eshoot , r ecor d al l f reeze dat a
2. Cl ear t he DTC wi t h HDS.
3. Pr ess t he accel er at or pedal to t he f l oor.
APP sensor and t he ECM/ PCM. H
5. Chec k APP S ENS OR A and APP S ENS OR B i n t he
Are t hey t he same volt age?
NO- Go to st ep 12.
E CM/ PCM CONNECTOR A (49P) -
APS A (YEL )
HE
22
29
23
30
25
34
17 18
E3
3536
A PS B (ORN)
20
26
\ / \ 41142143144 \ / \ AG\/\7\7\
27
nr-i
28
NO- Go to st ep 22.
10. Di sc onnec t t he APP sensor 6P connect or .
<3>
APSA (YEL )
z z
30J Z
4 I 5 | 6
16 17| 18
I K
APS B( ORN)
19
2 0
26
3 5 l 3 6 | / 7 l 7 r
ESI
28
YES - Repai r shor t in t he wi r es bet ween ECM/ PCM
connect or t er mi nal s A18 (APSA li ne) and A19 (APSB
l i ne), t hen go t o st ep 14.
NO- Go to st ep 13.
11-240).
11-293).
11-236
23. Updat e t he ECM/ PCM If it does not have t he l at est
DTC P2176: Throttle Actuator Control Syst em
Idle Position Not Lear ned
Do not Insert your f i nger s into t he i nst al l ed throttls-
body when you t urn t he i gni ti on swi t ch to ON (II) or
whi l e t he i gni t i on swi t ch i s in ON (II). If you do, you
act i vat ed.
NOTE:
P2176.
4. Tur n t he i gni t i on swi t c h to ON (II), and wai t
10 sec onds.
throttle body and t he ECM/ PCM, t hen cl ean t he
throttle body (see page 11- 332) .
7. Di sc onnec t t he i ntake ai r duct f r om t he throttle body
(see page 11-335).
10. Vi sual l y check t he throttle val ve operat i on whi l e doi ng
t he E TCS TE S T in t he INSPECTION MENU wi t h t he
HDS.
Does t he t hrot t le valve move t o it s fully closed posit ion?
NO- Go to st ep 12.
(cont' d)
11 -237
DTC Troubleshooting {cont'd)
11. Chec k f or sl udge or car bon on t he throttle val ve.
Is t here sludge or carbon on t he t hrot t le valve?
go to st ep 21 and r echeck.
NO- Go to st ep 18.
13. Di sc onnec t t he throttle body BP connect or .
16. Connec t throttle body 6P connect or t er mi nal s No. 5
E T C S M-
( GRN/ YEL )
E TCS M+
( BL U/ RED)
J UMPER WI RE
E T C S M- ( GRN/ YEL ) ETCS M + ( BL U/ RED)
J 1 I 2
3 I 4 I 5 I 6 I 7 8 9 1101
8
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
/
20 21
I
8
22 23 24
><
/
><
/ / /

I
8
29 30 31
/
A/
/ /

I
| / /
43| 44| 45J 46
/
48 M
I erminal side of female terminals
NO-Repai r open in t he wi r es bet ween t he throttle
body and t he ECM/ PCM (C3, C4), t hen go to st ep 20.
11-293).
25. Tur n t he i gni t i on swi t ch to ON (II), and wai t
10 sec onds.
t he throttle body and t he ECM/ PCM, t hen cl ean t he
throttle body (see page 11-332), and go to st ep 1.
11-238
APP Sensor Signal Inspection
NOTE:
Thi s pr ocedur e c hec ks t he APP s ens or in its f ul l y
c l osed posi t i on. In any ot her posi t i on, t he APP sensor
st or es DTCs whi c h ar e c over ed i n ot her
t r oubl eshoot i ng pr oc edur es.
Chec k f or Pendi ng or Conf i r med DTCs wi t h t he HDS
bef ore doi ng t hi s pr ocedur e. If any DTCs ar e i ndi cat ed,
t r oubl eshoot t hem f i r st , t hen do t hi s pr ocedur e.
Pr ess t he accel er at or pedal sever al t i mes, to check its
oper at i on. If it does not operat e smoot hl y, check t he
pedal . If you f i nd a pr obl em, r epl ace t he accel er at or
pedal modul e (see page 11-240).
1. Connec t t he HDS t o t he data link connect or (DLC) (A)
3. Make sur e t he HDS c ommuni c at es wi t h t he
ECM/ PCM. If it doesn' t , go to t he DL C ci rcui t
4. Make sur e t he accel er at or pedal i s not pr essed, t hen
c hec k t he APP S ENS OR in t he DATA L I ST wi t h t he
HDS.
If it i s 0 %, t he APP sensor i s OK.
If it i s not 0 %, updat e t he ECM/ PCM if it does not
have t he l at est sof t war e (see page 11-203), or
5. Make sur e t he accel er at or pedal i s not pr essed, t hen
check t he APP S ENS OR in t he DATA L IST wi t h t he
HDS.
If it i s 0 %, t he APP sensor i s OK.
If it i s not 0 %, r epl ace t he accel er at or pedal modul e
(see page 11 -240), t hen go to st ep 1.
11-239
Accelerator Pedal Module Removal /Inst al l at i on
1. Di sc onnec t t he APP sensor c onnec t or (A).
2. Remove t he accel er at or pedal modul e (B).
NOTE: The APP sensor i s not avai l abl e separ at el y. Do
not di sassembl e t he accel er at or pedal modul e.
11-240
WE C / WC
l x r (
'
274
PZEV model
-274
11-241
WE C / WI C
DTC Troubleshooting
DTC P0010: VTC Oi l Cont rol Sol enoi d Val ve
Malfuncti on
t r oubl eshoot i ng Inf ormat i on (see page 11-3).
4. Do t he VTC TE S T i n t he INSPECTION MENU wi t h t he
HDS.
VTC oi l cont rol sol enoi d val ve and t he E CM/ PCM.
7. Di sc onnec t t he VTC oi l cont rol sol enoi d val ve 2P
connect or .
8. At t he sol enoi d val ve si de, measur e t he r esi st anc e
bet ween VTC oi l cont rol sol enoi d val ve 2P connect or
t er mi nal s No. 1 and No. 2.
VTC OIL CONTROL S OL ENOI D VA L VE 2P CONNECTOR
1 2
GND | JVTC
Is t here 6.758.25 Q at room t emperat ure?
NO- Go to st ep 14.
9. Chec k f or cont i nui t y bet ween VTC oi l cont rol sol enoi d
val ve 2P connect or t er mi nal No. 1 and body gr ound.
GND (BLK)
NO-Repai r open i n t he wi r e bet ween t he VTC oi l
cont rol sol enoi d val ve and G101; M/T (see page
22-20), A/ T (see page 22-22), t hen go to st ep 15.
J 1 I 2 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 8j 9| 1 0 |
1
11 12 13 14)15 16 17)18 20 21
1
1
1
22 23 24
/ /
1
1
1
29 0 31 3 2 | /
/ /
/
1
1
/
| 43| 44| 45| 46| y ^
VTC (BL U/ WHT)
(C23) and t he VTC oi l cont rol sol enoi d val ve, t hen go
to st ep 15.
NO- Go to st ep 13.
11-242

13. Check f or cont i nui t y bet ween VTC oi l cont rol sol enoi d
val ve 2P connect or t er mi nal No. 2 and ECM/ PCM
connect or t er mi nal C23.
VTC OIL CONTROL S OL ENOI D VAL VE 2P CONNECTOR
1 2
VTC (BL U/ WHT)
(C23) and t he VTC oi l cont rol sol enoi d val ve, t hen go
t o st ep 15.
14. Repl ace t he VTC oi l cont rol sol enoi d val ve (see page
11-273).
16. Tur n t he i gni t i on swi t ch t o ON (II).
11-293).
HDS.
Is DTC PQ010 indicat ed?
t he VTC oi l cont rol sol enoi d val ve and t he ECM/ PCM,
NO- Go to st ep 21.
connect i ons or l oose t er mi nal s at t he VTC oi l cont rol
sol enoi d val ve and t he ECM/ PCM, t hen go to st ep 1. If
t he sc r een i ndi cat es NOT COMPL ETED, go to st ep 19.
24. Do t he VTC TE S T in t he INSPECTION MENU wi t h t he
HDS.
t he VTC oi l cont rol sol enoi d val ve and t he ECM/ PCM.
If t he ECM/ PCM was updat ed, subst i t ut e a
known-good ECM/ PCM (see page 11 -7), t hen go to
NO- Go to st ep 26.
sol enoi d val ve and t he ECM/ PCM. If t he ECM/ PCM
11-243
VTEC/ VTC
DTC P0011: VTC Syst em Malfuncti on
I . Tur n t he i gni ti on swi t ch to ON (II).
. 2. Cl ear t he DTC wi t h t he HDS.
4. Wat c h t he l ow oi l pr essur e i ndi cat or wi t h t he engi ne
r unni ng.
Is t he low oil pressure indicat or on?
YE S - Ch ec k t he oi l pr essur e (see page 8-10), t hen go to
st ep 15.
?G-Go to st ep 5.
HDS.
Is t he result OK?
NO- Go to st ep 9.
( 30- 60 km/h) f or 10 mi nut es.
7. Chec k t he VTC S TATUS in t he DATA L I ST wi t h t he
HDS.
Does it indicat e ON?
NO- Go to st ep 6 and r echeck.
NO-l f t he sc r een i ndi cat es PAS S ED, i nt ermi t t ent
f ai l ur e, t he syst em i s OK at t hi s t i me. If t he sc r een
i ndi cat es NOT COMPL ETED, go to st ep 5 and r echeck.
11. Remove t he VTC st r ai ner (A), and check it f or
cl oggi ng.
Is t he st rainer OK?
NO-Cl ean t he VTC st r ai ner , r epl ace t he engi ne oi l
fi lter and t he engi ne oi l , t hen go to st ep 14.
12. Test t he VTC oi l cont rol sol enoi d val ve (see page
11-273).
Is t he VTC oil cont rol solenoid valve OK?
NO-Repl ac e t he VTC oi l cont rol sol enoi d val ve (see
page 11-273), t hen go t o st ep 14.
13. Inspect t he VTC act uat or (see page 6-8).
Is t he VTC act uat or OK?
YES - Ch ec k t he VTC syst em oi l pas s ages , t hen go t o
st ep 14.
NO-Repl ac e t he VTC act uat or (see page 6-30), t hen go
to st ep 14.
11-244
16. Do t he ECM/ PCM i dle l ear n procedure (see page
11-293).
(see page 11-5).
HDS.
go to t he i ndi cat ed DT Cs t r oubl es hoot i ng.
NO-l f t he sc r een i ndi cat es FAILED, check f or poor
c onnec t i ons or l oose t er mi nal s at t he VTC oi l cont rol
DTC P0340: CMP Sensor A No Si gnal
Chec k f or poor connect i ons or l oose t er mi nal s at CMP
sensor A and t he E CM/ PCM.
6. Di sc onnec t t he CMP sensor A 3P connect or .
8. Measur e t he vol t age bet ween CMP sensor A 3P
CMP SENSOR A 3P CONNECTOR
IG1 (BLK /Y EL)
NO-Repai r open in t he wi r e bet ween CMP sensor A
and t he No. 7 ACG (15 A) f use, t hen go to st ep 18.
(cont' d)
11-245
WE C / WC
9. Measur e t he vol t age bet ween CMP sensor A 3P
CMP SENSOR A 3P CONNECTOR
1
I CMPA (BL U/ WHT)
Is there about 5 V?
NO- Go to st ep 11.
10. Measur e t he vol t age bet ween CMP s ens or A 3P
CMP S E NS OR A 3P CONNECTOR
1
L G ( BRN/ YEL ) | | IG1 ( BL K / YEL )
NO-Repai r open in t he wi r e bet ween CMP s ens or A
CMPA (BL U/ WHT)
Terminal side of female terr, , Y
(C45) and CMP sensor A, t hen go to st ep 18.
NO- Go to st ep 15. .
15. Chec k f or cont i nui t y bet ween CMP sensor A 3P
t er mi nal C45.
CMP S E NS OR A 3P CONNECTOR
1 2 3
CMPA (BL U/ WHT)
TP ===r
22
1 2
23
30
3 j 4 | 5 l 6 j 7 j 8
13
24
141151617118/20 21
iHi.
143j44145146
9 10
$21
CMPA (BL U/ WHT)
(C45) and CMP sensor A, t hen go to st ep 18.
11-246
17. Repl ace CMP sensor A (see page 11-274).
21. Do the ECM/ PCM i dle l earn pr ocedur e (see page
11-293).
CMP sensor A and t he ECM/ PCM, t hen go to st ep 1.
CMP sensor A and t he ECM/ PCM. If t he ECM/ PCM was
page 11 -7), t hen r echeck. If t he ECM/ PCM was
NO-l f the ECM/ PCM was updat ed, t r oubl eshoot i ng i s
DTC P0341: CMP Sensor A and CKP Sensor
Incorrect Phase Detected
NOTE: Bef ore you t r oubl eshoot , r ecor d all f r eeze data
L Tu r n t he i gni ti on swi t ch to ON (II).
( 30- 60 km/h) f or 10 mi nut es.
NO- Go to st ep 5.
HDS.
Is t he result OK?
NO- Go to st ep 9.
(3060 km/h) f or 10 mi nut es.
7. Chec k t he VTC S TATUS i n t he DATA L I ST wi t h t he
HDS.
8. Moni t or the OBD S TATUS f or DTC P0341 in t he DTCs
MENU wi th t he HDS.
sol enoi d val ve and t he ECM/ PCM. If t he sc r een
i ndi cat es NOT COMPL ETED, go to st ep 6 and r echeck.
(cont ' d)
11-247
VTEC/ VTC
11-273).
Is t he VTC oil cont rol solenoid valve OK?
11. Chec k t he camshaf t t i mi ng (see st ep 2 on page 6-9).
Is t he camshaft t iming OK?
NO-Res et t he c amshaf t t i mi ng (see st ep 2 on page
12. Chec k for damage or st ret ch at t he c am c hai n (see
page 6-23).
Is t he cam chain damaged or st ret ched?
YES - Repl ac e t he c am chai n (see page 6-13) and t he
aut o-t ensi oner (see page 6-20), t hen go to st ep 14.
NO- Go to st ep 13.
Is t he act uat or OK?
to st ep 14.
11-293).
(see page 11-5).
( 30- 60 km/h) f or 10 mi nut es.
NO- Go to st ep 20.
c onnec t i ons or l oose t er mi nal s at t he VTC oi l cont rol
11-248
DTC P0344: CMP Sensor A Ci rcui t Intermittent
Interrupti on
4. Chec k t he CMPA NOI SE in t he DATA L IST wi t h t he
HDS.
NO- Go t o st ep 5.
ENGINE S PEED
VS S
6. Chec k t he CMP A NOISE in t he DATA L IST wi t h t he
HDS.
Chec k f or poor connect i ons or l oose t er mi nal s at CMP
sensor A and t he E CM/ PCM.
7. Chec k f or poor connect i ons or l oose t er mi nal s at
CMP sensor A
ECM/ PCM
Engi ne gr ound
Body gr ound
st ep 11.
8. Chec k f or damage on t he CMP pul se plate A (see page
6-29).
Is t he pulser plat e damaged?
YES - Repl ac e t he CMP pul se plate A (see page 6-29),
NO- Go to st ep 9.
10. Repl ac e CMP sensor A (see page 11 -274).
11-293).
14. St art t he engi ne, and let it i dle for 10 sec onds.
CMP sensor A and t he ECM/ PCM, t hen go to st ep 1.
Pendi ng or Conf i r med DTCs are i ndi cat ed, go t o t he
11-249
VTEC/ VTC
DTC P1009: VTC Advance Malfuncti on
NOTE:
P0341.
t i me. H
7. Remove t he VTC st r ai ner (A), and check it f or
cl oggi ng.
; Is t he st rainer OK?
NO-Cl ean t he VTC st r ai ner , r epl ace t he engi ne oi l
fi lter and t he engi ne oi l , t hen go to st ep 10.
11-273).
Is t he valve OK?
Is t he act uat or OK?
YE S - Ch ec k t he VTC syst em oi l pas s ages , t hen go t o
st ep 10.
to st ep 10.
11-293).
(see page 11-5).
YE S - Ch ec k t he oi l pas s ages at t he VTC s y s t em, t hen
go t o st ep 1.
11-250
DTC P2646: Rocker Ar m Oi l Pr essur e Swi t ch
Ci rcui t Low Voltage (All model s except PZEV)
. Pr essur e Gauge Adapt er 07NAJ-P07010A
. A/ T Low Pr essur e Gauge W/Panel 07406-0070301
. AT Pr essur e Test Hose 07AAJ-PY4A100
. A/ T Pr essur e Adapt er 07MAJ-PY40120
Oi l Pr essur e Hose 07ZAJ-S5AA200
NOTE:
Bef ore you t r oubl eshoot r ecor d all f reeze dat a and
any on-boar d s naps hot and r evi ew t he gener al
If DTC P2648 and/or P2649 ar e st or ed at t he s ame t i me
as DTC P2646, t r oubl eshoot t hose DTCs f i r st t hen
r echeck for DTC P2646.
1. Check t he engi ne oi l l evel .
Is t he level OK?
NO-Adj ust t he engi ne oi l to t he proper l evel , t hen go
to st ep 20.
4. Do t he VTEC TE S T i n t he INSPECTION MENU wi t h t he
HDS.
Is t he result OK?
rocker ar m oi l pr essur e swi t c h, t he rocker ar m oi l
cont rol sol enoi d, and t he E CM/ PCM.
NO- Go to st ep 5.
6. Di sconnect the rocker ar m oi l pr essur e swi t ch 2P
connect or .
8. Chec k t he VTEC PRES S W i n t he DATA L IST wi t h t he
HDS.
Is SWITCH ON indicat ed?
10. Remove t he rocker ar m oi l pr essur e swi t c h (A), and
at t ach t he speci al t ool s as s hown, t hen at t ach t he
r ocker ar m oi l pr essur e swi t ch to t he oi l pr essur e
gauge adapt er (B).
11. Rec onnec t t he rocker ar m oi l pr essur e swi t ch 2P
connect or .
13. Do t he VTEC TE S T in t he INSPECTION MENU wi t h t he
HDS.
14. Chec k t he oil pr essur e.
Does t he oil pressure increase t o at least 392 kPa
(4.0 kgf/cm
2
, 56.9 psi)?
YES - Repl ac e t he rocker ar m oi l pr essur e swi t ch (see
NO-l nspec t t he VTEC syst em. If it i s OK , r epl ace t he
rocker ar m oi l cont rol val ve (see page 11-274), t hen go
to st ep 19.
NO- Go to st ep 9.
(cont ' d)
11-251
VTEC/ VTC
DTC Troubleshooting (cont ' d)
HI
11 12
22 23
13
4 5 6 7 8
1 4 | l 5 | l 6 | l 7 | l 8 | / 2 0 21
a n
4( 43144145\ 4G\ / \ 4S\ / \
9 1101
VTPS W (BL U/B LK )
(C22) and t he rocker ar m oi l pr essur e swi t c h, t hen go
to st ep 19.
NO- Go to st ep 25.
11-293).
HDS.
t he rocker ar m oi l pr essur e swi t c h, t he rocker ar m oi l
cont rol sol enoi d and t he ECM/ PCM, t hen go st ep 1.
HDS.
cont r ol sol enoi d and t he ECM/ PCM. If t he ECM/ PCM
11 ""252
DTC P2646: Rocker Ar m Oi l Pr essur e Swi t ch A
Ci rcui t Low Vol t age (PZEV model)
DTC P2647: Rocker Ar m Oi l Pr essur e Swi t ch A
Ci rcui t High Vol t age (PZEV model )
Pr essur e Gauge Adapt er 07NAJ-P07010A
. A/ T L ow Pr essur e Gauge W/Panel 07406-0070301
1
A/ T Pr essur e Adapt er 07MAJ-PY40120
. Oi l Pr essur e Hose 07ZAJ-S5AA200
NOTE:
as DTC P2646 and/or P2647, t r oubl eshoot t hose DTCs
f i r st , t hen r echeck f or DTC P2646 and/or P2647.
1. Chec k t he engi ne oi l l evel .
Is t he level OK?
NO-Adj ust t he engi ne oi l l evel to t he pr oper l evel ,
4. Sel ec t t he VTEC TE S T in t he INSPECTION MENU wi t h
t he HDS, and do t he VTEC TES T.
Are VTECIN-0 and VTECEX-0 indicat ed?
Chec k for poor c onnec t i ons or l oose t er mi nal s at
rocker ar m oi l pr essur e swi t ch A, rocker ar m oi l
cont rol sol enoi d A, and t he PCM. B
NO-l f t he r esul t i s
VTECI N-1: Go to st ep 5.
VTECIN-3: Go to st ep 14.
VTECIN-3 and VTECEX- 3 i ndi cat ed at t he s ame
t i me: Check t he oi l passage bet ween t he engi ne oi l
pr essur e swi t c h and t he rocker ar m oi l cont rol val ve
fi lter. If it i s OK , go to st ep 14.
VTECIN-2, VTECIN-4: Inspect t he i ntake val ve si de
of t he VTEC s y s t em. If it i s OK, r epl ace t he r ocker
ar m oi l cont rol val ve (see page 11-275), t hen go to
st ep 29.
VTECEX- 1, 2, 3, 4: The exhaust val ve si de VTEC
syst em i s f aul t y. Go to t he t r oubl eshoot i ng f or
P2651/P2652 (see page 11-265).
6. Di sc onnec t t he rocker ar m oi l pr essur e swi t c h A 2P
connect or .
7. At rocker ar m oi l pr essur e swi t c h A si de, check f or
cont i nui t y bet ween i ts 2P connect or t er mi nal s.
ROCK ER ARM OIL PRE S S URE SWI TCH A 2P CONNECTOR
VTPSWA
GND
NO-Repl ac e rocker ar m oi l pr essur e swi t c h A (see
9. Measur e t he vol t age bet ween rocker ar m oi l pr essur e
swi t c h A 2P connect or t er mi nal No. 1 and body
gr ound.
VTPSWA ( BL U/ BL K )
YES - Repai r open i n t he wi r e bet ween rocker ar m oi l
pr essur e swi t ch A and G101 (see page 22-22), t hen go
t o st ep 28.
NO- Go to st ep 10.
(cont' d)
11-253
VTEC/WTG
13. Chec k for cont i nui t y bet ween rocker ar m oi l pr essur e
swi t c h A 2P connect or t er mi nal No. 1 and PCM
VTPS WA ( BL U/ BL K )
cont rol sol enoi d A, and t he PCM. If t he c onnec t i ons
and t er mi nal s ar e OK, go to st ep 35.
NO-Repai r open in t he wi r e bet ween rocker ar m oi l
pr essur e swi t ch A and t he PCM (C22), t hen go to st ep
29.
15. Di sc onnec t t he rocker ar m oi l pr essur e swi t ch A 2P
connect or .
-16. Tur n t he i gni t i on swi t ch t o ON (II).
17. Chec k ROCK ER ARM OIL PRE S S URE SWITCH A i n t he
NO- Go to st ep 18.
19. Remove rocker ar m oi l pr essur e swi t ch A (see page
11-276), t hen rei nst al l t he rocker ar m oi l cont rol val ve
and its fi lter (see page 11-275) wi t hout i nst al l i ng
rocker ar m oi l pr essur e swi t ch A.
20. At t ach t he speci al t ool s to t he rocker ar m oi l cont rol
val ve as s hown, t hen at t ach rocker ar m oi l pr essur e
swi t ch A to t he oi l pr essur e gauge adapt er (B).
07406-0070301
07MAJ-PY40120
07AAJ -
PY4A100
A
22 N m
(2.2 k g f i
07NAJ-P07010A
07ZAJ -S5AA200
21. Rec onnec t t he rocker ar m oi l pr essur e swi t ch A 2P
connect or .
23. Check t he oi l pr essur e duri ng t he Hi gh V/T/LIFT (TEST
S TATUS 4).
(2.0 kgf/cm
2
, 27.7 psi)?
YES - Repl ac e rocker ar m oi l pr essur e swi t ch A (see
NO-l nspec t t he i ntake val ve si de of t he VTEC syst em.
If it i s OK, r epl ace t he rocker ar m oi l cont rol val ve (see
26. Di sconnect PCM connect or C (49P).
11-254
27. Check for cont i nui t y bet ween PCM connect or t ermi nal
C22 and body gr ound.
PCM CONNECTOR C (49P)
1 I 2
11 1 2
22
;4C
2 3
3 4 5 6 7
13| 14| 15 1 6 J 7 [ 1 8
43 44 45 4 6
VTPS WA ( BL U/ BL K )
YES - Repai r shor t in t he wi r e bet ween t he PCM (C22)
and rocker ar m oi l pr essur e swi t ch A, t hen go to st ep
29.
NO-Chec k f or poor connect i ons or l oose t er mi nal s at
cont rol sol enoi d A, and t he PCM. If t he connect or s
and t he t er mi nal s are OK, go to st ep 35.
31. Reset t he PCM wi t h t he HDS.
32. Do t he PCM i dle l earn pr ocedur e (see page 11-293).
33. Sel ect t he VTEC TE S T in t he INSPECTION MENU wi t h
cont rol sol enoi d A, and t he PCM, t hen go to st ep 1.
YE S - l f any ot her Pendi ng or Conf i r med DTCs ar e
i ndi cat ed, go to t he i ndi cat ed DTCs
t r oubl es hoot i ng.
(see page 11-7).
NO-l f t he PCM was updat ed, subst i t ut e a known-good
PCM (see page 11-7), t hen r echeck. If t he PCM was
or i gi nal PCM (see page 11-204).B
11-255
VTEC/ VTC
DTC P2647: Rocker Ar m Oi l Pr essur e Swi t ch
Ci rcui t High Vol t age (All model s except PZEV)
NOTE:
Bef or e you t r oubl eshoot r ecor d all f r eeze dat a and
any on-boar d s naps h o t and r evi ew t he gener al
as DTC P2647, t r oubl eshoot t hose DTCs f i r st , t hen
r echeck f or DTC P2647.
Is t he level OK?
NO-Adj ust t he engi ne oi l t o t he proper l evel , t hen go
HDS.
NOTE: if DTC st or ed dur i ng VTEC TE S T, check f or
DTCs MENU. If DTC P2647 i ndi cat ed, go to st ep 6. If
any ot her Pendi ng or Conf i r med DTCs ar e i ndi cat ed,
go to t he i ndi cat ed DT Cs t r oubl eshoot i ng.
Is t he result OK?
rocker ar m oi l pr essur e swi t c h, t he rocker ar m oi l
cont rol sol enoi d, and t he E CM/ PCM.
NO- Go to st ep 5.
5. Chec k t he resul t of st ep 4.
VTEC Swi t c h Fai l ur e
VTEC Swi t c h Open
VTEC Swi t c h SI G Li ne Open
VTEC Swi t c h GND Li ne Open
Is t he t est result any of t hose above?
NO-Chec k f or poor c onnec t i ons or l oose t er mi nal s at
t he rocker ar m oi l pr essur e swi t c h. If it i s OK, r epl ace
t he rocker ar m oi l cont rol val ve (see page 11-274),
t hen, go to st ep 15.
7. Di sc onnec t t he rocker ar m oi l pr essur e swi t ch 2P
connect or .
8. At t he rocker ar m oi l pr essur e swi t ch si de, check f or
cont i nui t y bet ween its 2P connect or t er mi nal s.
VTPS W
GND
NO-Repl ac e t he rocker ar m oi l pr essur e swi t c h (see
9. Tur n t he i gni ti on swi t c h to ON (I I ).
swi t c h 2P connect or t er mi nal No. 1 and body gr ound.
ROCK ER ARM OIL PRE S S URE S WI TCH A 2P CONNECTOR
VTPS W ( BL U/ BL K )
YES - Repai r open i n t he wi r e bet ween t he r ocker ar m
oi l pr essur e swi t ch and G101; M/T (see page 22-20),
A/ T (see page 22-22), t hen go to st ep 15.
NO- Go to st ep 11.
11-256
14. Check f or cont i nui t y bet ween rocker ar m oi l pr essur e
swi t ch 2P connect or t er mi nal No. 1 and ECM/ PCM
ROCK ER ABM OIL PRE S S URE SWI TCH 2P CONNECTOR
VTPS W ( BL U/ BL K ) ,
11 12
28 30
3 4 5 6 7
13 14 15 16 17 18
4fJ 43144145146JX| 48 \ / \
VTPS W ( BL U/ BL K )
cont rol sol enoi d, and t he ECM/ PCM. If t he ECM/ PCM
Pendi ng or Conf i r med DTCs wer e i ndi cat ed, go to t he
(C22) and t he rocker ar m oi l pr essur e swi t c h, t hen go
to st ep 16.
11-293).
t he rocker ar m oi l pr essur e swi t c h, t he r ocker ar m oi l
cont rol sol enoi d, and t he ECM/ PCM, t hen go to st ep 1.
Pendi ng or Conf i r med DTCs wer e i ndi cat ed, go t o t he
VTEC/ VTC
DTC P2648: Rocker Ar m Oi l Cont rol Sol enoi d
Ci rcui t Low Vol t age (All model s except PZEV)
NOTE: Bef ore you t r oubl eshoot r ecor d al l f reeze dat a
HDS.
Is t he result OK?
rocker ar m oi l cont rol sol enoi d and t he E CM/ PCM.
NO- Go t o st ep 4.
5. Di sc onnec t t he rocker ar m oi l cont rol sol enoi d 2P
connect or .
6. Measur e t he r esi st ance bet ween r ocker ar m oi l
cont rol sol enoi d 2P connect or t er mi nal s No. 1 and
No. 2.
ROCK ER ARM OIL CONTROL SOLENOID 2P CONNECTOR
GND VTS
(Q
Is t here 1430 O at room t emperat ure?
NO- Go to st ep 10.
Ll 11/
3 | 4 | / M 7 | 8 9 1101
11 12 13 14| 15 16 1 71 8 19
/
21
22 23 24 25
><
26 27 28
29
/
31 32 33 34 35| 36
/
38
/
llK
4 3 | / | 4 >|46 47
i
4 * l / l
VTS ( GRN/ YEL )
(B35) and t he rocker ar m oi l cont rol sol enoi d, t hen go
t o st ep 11.
NO- Go to st ep 18.
10. Repl ace t he rocker ar m oi l cont rol val ve (see page
11-274).
11-293).
HDS.
t he rocker ar m oi l cont rol sol enoi d and t he ECM/ PCM,
NO- Go to st ep 17.
11-258
c onnec t i ons or l oose t er mi nal s at t he rocker ar m oi l
cont rol sol enoi d and t he ECM/ PCM, t hen go to st ep 1.
If t he sc r een i ndi cat es NOT COMPL ETED, go to st ep
15.
HDS.
t he rocker ar m oi l cont rol sol enoi d and t he ECM/ PCM.
NO- Go to st ep 22.
go to t he i ndi cat ed DT Cs t r oubl es hoot i ng.
cont rol sol enoi d and t he ECM/ PCM. If t he ECM/ PCM
NOT COMPL ETED, go t o st ep 20.
DTC P2848: Rocker Ar m Oi l Cont rol Sol enoi d
A (Intake Val ve Si de) Ci rcui t Low Vol t age
(PZEV model )
3. Sel ec t t he VTEC TE S T i n t he INSPECTION MENU wi t h
t he HDS, and do t he Sol enoi d Val ve ACTIVATION of
t he ROCK ER ARM S OL ENOI D A.
rocker ar m oi l cont rol sol enoi d A and t he PCM. H
6. Di sconnect t he rocker ar m oi l cont rol sol enoi d A 2P
connect or .
7. Measur e t he r esi st anc e bet ween rocker ar m oi l
cont rol sol enoi d A 2P connect or t er mi nal s No. 1 and
No. 2.
ROCK ER ARM OIL CONTROL S OL ENOI D A 2P CONNECTOR
Is t here 1430 Q at room t emperat ure?
NO- Go to st ep 11.
9. Di sconnect PCM connect or B (49P).
(cont ' d
11-259
VTEC/ VTC
10. Chec k for cont i nui t y bet ween PCM connect or t er mi nal
PCM CONNECTOR B (49P)
J 1l /
3 4JZL47J8
s h o t
11 12 13 14 15 16 1 7 1 8 19
/
21
22 23 24
><
25
><
26 27 28
29
/
31 3233 34 3536
/
38
/
| 4 0 | / 7T4317T4 i i | 4 6 | 4 7
VTS A ( GRN/ YEL )
YES - Repai r shor t in t he wi r e bet ween t he PCM (B35)
and rocker ar m oi l cont rol sol enoi d A, t hen go to st ep
12.
t he PCM and r ocker ar m oi l cont rol sol enoi d A, t hen
go to st ep 19.
11. Repl ace t he r ocker ar m oil cont rol val ve (see page
11-275).
15. Do t he PCM i dle l ear n pr ocedur e (see page 11-293).
t he ROCK ER ARM SOL ENOI D A.
rocker ar m oi l cont r ol sol enoi d A and t he PCM, t hen
go to st ep 1.
NO- Go to st ep 18.
r echeck. If the sc r een i ndi cat es NOT COMPL ETED, go
t o st ep 16.
20. Updat e t he PCM if it does not have t he l at est sof t war e
(see page 11-7).
91 . Qo i ^ t t h a U T C P J E S T :r. z IN' CPECTICN JVICMU wi i h
t he ROCK ER ARM SOL ENOI D A.
rocker ar m oi l cont rol sol enoi d A and t he PCM. If t he
PCM was updat ed, subst i t ut e a known-good PCM (see
page 11 -7), t hen go to st ep 21. If t he PCM was
NO- Go to st ep 23.
YE S - l f t he PCM was updat ed, t r oubl eshoot i ng i s
compl et e. If the PCM was subst i t ut ed, r epl ace t he
or i gi nal PCM (see page 11-204). If any ot her Pendi ng
or Conf i r med DTCs wer e i ndi cat ed i n st ep 22, go t o
c onnec t i ons or l oose t er mi nal s at rocker ar m oi l
cont rol sol enoi d A and t he PCM. If t he PCM was
updat ed, subst i t ut e a known-good PCM (see page
11-7), t hen go to st ep 21. If t he PCM was subst i t ut ed,
go to st ep 21.
11-260
DTC P2649: Rocker Ar m Oil Control Sol enoi d
Ci rcui t High Vol t age (All model s except PZEV)
NOTE: Bef ore you t r oubl eshoot r ecor d all f r eeze data
and any on-boar d s naps hot and r evi ew t he gener al
wi t hout l oad (A/T i n P or N, M/T in neut ral) unti l t he
Check f or poor connect i ons or l oose t er mi nal s at t he
rocker ar m oi l cont rol sol enoi d and t he E CM/ PCM.
6. Di sconnect t he rocker ar m oi l cont rol sol enoi d 2P
connect or .
7. Measur e t he r esi st anc e bet ween rocker ar m oi l
cont rol sol enoi d 2P connect or t er mi nal s No. 1 and
No. 2.
ROCK ER ARM OIL CONTROL SOL ENOI D 2P CONNECTOR
1
GND I j VTS
Is t here 1430 D at room t emperat ure?
NO- Go to st ep 12.
8. Chec k for cont i nui t y bet ween r ocker ar m oi l cont rol
sol enoi d 2P connect or t er mi nal No. 1 and body
gr ound.
ROCK ER ARM OIL CONTROL S OL ENOI D 2P CONNECTOR
GND (BLK)
NO-Repai r open i n t he wi r e bet ween t he rocker ar m
oi l cont rol sol enoi d and G101; M/T (see page 22-20),
A/ T (see page 22-22), t hen go to st ep 13.
(cont ' d)
11-261
t er mi nal B35 and rocker ar m oi l cont rol sol enoi d 2P
ROCKER ARM OIL CONTROL SOLENOID 2P CONNECTOR
1 2
VTS (GRN/Y EL)
(B35) and t he rocker ar m oi l cont rol sol enoi d, t hen go
to st ep 13.
11-274).
11-293).
t he rocker ar m oil cont rol sol enoi d and t he ECM/ PCM,
NO- Go to st ep 18.
cont rol sol enoi d and t he ECM/ PCM, t hen go to st ep 1.
If t he sc r een i ndi cat es NOT COMPL ETED, keep i dl i ng
unti l a resul t c omes on.
t he rocker ar m oil cont rol sol enoi d and t he ECM/ PCM.
NO- Go to st ep 23.
YE S - l f t he ECM/ PCM was updat ed t r oubl eshoot i ng i s
connect i ons or l oose t er mi nal s at t he rocker ar m oi l
cont rol sol enoi d and t he ECM/ PCM. If t he ECM/ PCM
COMPL ETED, keep i dli ng unti l a resul t c omes on.
11-262
DTC P2649: Rocker Ar m Oi l Control Sol enoi d
A (Intake Val ve Si de) Ci rcui t High Voltage
(PZEV model)
2. Cl ear t he DTC wi th t he HDS.
wi t hout l oad (in P or N) unti l t he radi at or f an c omes
4. Chec k for Tempor ar y DTCs or DTCs wi t h t he HDS.
Chec k f or poor connect i ons or l oose t er mi nal s at
rocker ar m oi l cont rol sol enoi d A and t he PCM. H
6. Di sconnect t he rocker ar m oi l cont rol sol enoi d A 2P
connect or .
7. Measur e t he r esi st ance bet ween rocker ar m oi l
cont rol sol enoi d A 2P connect or t er mi nal s No. 1 and
No. 2.
8. Check f or cont i nui t y bet ween rocker ar m oi l cont rol
sol enoi d A 2P connect or t er mi nal No. 1 and body
gr ound.
ROCK ER ARM OIL CONTROL S OL ENOI D A zr CONNECTOR
GND (BLK)
NO-Repai r open in t he wi r e bet ween t he rocker ar m
oi l cont rol sol enoi d A and G101 (see page 22-22), t hen
got o st ep 13.
1
GNDj j VTS A
NO- Go to st ep 12.
(cont' d)
11-263
VTEC/ VTC
11. Chec k f or cont i nui t y bet ween PCM connect or t er mi nal
B35 and rocker ar m oi l cont rol sol enoi d A 2P
c onnec t or t er mi nal No. 2.
1 2
VTSA (GRN/Y EL)
Wire si de of f emal e t er mi nal s
NO-Repai r open i n t he wi r e bet ween t he PCM (B35)
and t he rocker ar m oi l cont rol sol enoi d A, t hen go t o
st ep 13.
12. Repl ac e t he rocker ar m oi l cont rol val ve { see page
11-275).
16. Do t he PCM i dl e l earn pr ocedur e (see page 11-293).
r ocker ar m oi l cont rol sol enoi d A and t he PCM, t hen
go t o st ep 1.
NO- Go to st ep 18.
r echeck. If t he sc r een i ndi cat es NOT COMPL ETED,
keep i dl i ng until a resul t c omes on.
(see page 11-7).
rocker ar m oi l cont rol sol enoi d A and t he PCM. If t he
page 11-7), t hen r echeck. If t he PCM was subst i t ut ed,
go to st ep 1.
NO- Go to st ep 23.
or Conf i r med DTCs wer e i ndi cat ed i n st ep 22, go to
cont rol sol enoi d A and t he PCM. If t he PCM was
updat ed, subst i t ut e a known-good PCM, t hen r echeck.
If t he PCM was subst i t ut ed, go to st ep 1. If t he sc r een
i ndi cat es NOT COMPL ETED, keep i dli ng unti l a resul t
c omes on.
11 -264
DTC P2651: Rocker Ar m Oi l Pr essur e Swi t ch B
Ci rcui t Low Vol t age (PZEV model)
DTC P2652: Rocker Ar m Oi l Pr essur e Swi t ch B
Ci rcui t High Vol t age (PZEV model)
. Pr essur e Gauge Adapt er 07NAJ-P07010A
A/ T Low Pr essur e Gauge W/Panel 07406-0070301
A/ T Pr essur e Adapt er 07MAJ-PY40120
Oi l Pr essur e Hose 07ZAJ-S5AA200
NOTE:
m Bef ore you t r oubl eshoot , r ecor d all f r eeze dat a and
as DTC P2651 and/or P2652, t r oubl eshoot t hose DTCs
f i rst , t hen r echeck f or DTC P2651 and/or P2652.
Is t he level OK?
NO-Adj ust t he engi ne oi l l evel t o t he proper l evel ,
Are VTECEX-0 and VTECIN-0 Indicat ed?
YES-Int er mi t t ent f ai Iur e, t he syst em i s OK at t hi s t i me.
r ocker ar m oi l pr essur e swi t ch B, and rocker ar m oi l
cont rol sol enoi d B, and t he PCM.
NO-l f t he resul t i s
e VTECEX- 1: Go to st ep 5.
VTECEX- 3: Go to st ep 14.
m VTECEX- 3 and VTECIN-3 i ndi cat ed at t he s ame
t i me: Check t he oi l passage bet ween t he engi ne oi l
pr essur e swi t c h and t he rocker ar m oi l cont rol val ve
fi lter. If it i s OK , go to st ep 14.
* VTECEX- 2, VTECEX- 4: Inspect t he exhaust si de of
t he VTEC syst em. If it i s OK, r epl ace t he rocker ar m
oi l cont rol val ve (see page 11-275), t hen go to st ep
29.
VTECI N- 1, 2, 3, 4: The i ntake val ve si de VTEC
syst em i s f aul t y. Go to t he t r oubl eshoot i ng f or
P2646/ P2647 (see page 11-253).
6. Di sconnect t he r ocker ar m oi l pr essur e swi t ch B 2P
connect or .
(cont ' d)
11-265
WE C / WI C
7. At t he rocker ar m oi l pr essur e swi t c h B si de, c hec k f or
cont i nui t y bet ween its 2P connect or t er mi nal s.
ROCK ER ARM OIL PRE S S URE SWI TCH B 2P CONNECTOR
VTPS WB
GND
NO-Repl ac e r ocker ar m oi l pr essur e swi t c h B (see
swi t c h B 2P c onnec t or t ermi nal No. 1 and body
gr ound.
ROCK ER ARM OIL PRE S S URE SWI TCH B 2P CONNECTOR
VTPS WB (BLU)
YES - Repai r open i n t he wi r e bet ween r ocker ar m oi l
pr essur e swi t c h B and G101 (see page 22-22), t hen go
to st ep 28.
NO- Go to st ep 10.. ,
12. Di sc onnec t PCM connect or B (49P).
11-266
13. Chec k f or cont i nui t y bet ween rocker ar m oi l pr essur e
swi t ch B 2P connect or t er mi nal No. 1 and PCM
connect or t er mi nal B43.
ROCK ER ARM OIL PRE S S URE S WI TCH B 2P CONNECTOR
VTPS WB (BLU)
L . 29
ili9li3 14J151617|18|19 / bi T T l
23 24 25
31 3233 343536
40 \ / \ / \ 431/1 45146J47[48 M
28
38| / j J
VTPS WB (BLU)
rocker ar m oi l pr essur e swi t c h B, rocker ar m oi l
cont rol sol enoi d B, and t he PCM. If t he c onnec t i ons
and t er mi nal s ar e OK, go t o st ep 35.
NO-Repai r open in t he wi r e bet ween rocker ar m oi l
pr essur e swi t ch B and t he PCM (B43), t hen go to st ep
29.
15. Di sconnect t he rocker ar m oi l pr essur e swi t c h B 2P
connect or .
17. Check t he ROCK ER ARM OIL PRES S URE SWITCH B i n
t he DATA L I ST wi t h t he HDS.
NO- Go to st ep 18.
19. Remove rocker ar m oi l pr essur e swi t ch B (see page
11-277), t hen rei nst al l t he rocker ar m oi l cont rol val ve
and its fi lter (see page 11-275) wi t hout i nst al l i ng
rocker ar m oi l pr essur e swi t c h B.
20. At t ach t he spec i al t ool s to t he r ocker ar m oi l cont rol
val ve as s hown, t hen at t ach r ocker ar m oi l pr essur e
swi t ch B to t he oi l pr essur e gauge adapt er (A).
07406-0070301
07MAJ-PY40120
07AAJ -
PY4A100
B
22 N-m
(2.2 k g f m,
16 Ibf-ft)
07NAJ-P07010A
07ZAJ -S5AA200
21. Reconnect t he rocker ar m oi l pr essur e swi t ch B 2P
connect or .
t he HDS, and do t he VTEC TE S T.
23. Check t he oi l pr essur e dur i ng t he L ow V/T/LIFT and
t he Hi gh V/T/LIFT (TES T S TATUS 3 and 4).
(2.0 kgf/cm % 27.7 psi)?
YES - Repl ac e rocker ar m oi l pr essur e swi t ch B (see
page 11 -277), t hen go to st ep 29.
NO-l nspec t t he VTEC syst em. If it i s OK, r epl ace t he
rocker ar m oi l cont rol val ve (see page 11-275), t hen go
to st ep 29.
(cont ' d)
11-267
WE C / WC
PCM CONNECTOR B (4SP)
| M / l 3 i 4| X M7T 8| 9 l l 0 ] l
1
|11|12 13 14|15 16 17J18 19/ I 21I
B |
22
29
23 24
31 3233 34 35 36
26 27
38
28
40 l y p l î 1X145 j 46|4714S\ /\
VTPS WB (BL U)
u
YES - Repai r shor t in t he wi r e bet ween t he PCM (B43)
and rocker ar m oi l pr essur e swi t c h B, t hen go t o st ep
29.
rocker ar m oi l pr essur e swi t c h B, r ocker ar m oi l
cont rol sol enoi d B, and t he PCM. If t he c onnec t i ons
and t he t er mi nal s ar e OK , go to st ep 35.
32. Do t he PCM i dle l ear n pr ocedur e (see page 11-293).
t he HDS, and do t he VTEC TE S T.
Are VTECEX-0 and VTECIN-0 indicat ed?
r ocker ar m oi l pr essur e swi t c h B, r ocker ar m oi l
cont rol sol enoi d B, and t he PCM, t hen go to st ep 1.
NO-Tr oubl eshoot i ng i s c ompl et e. i l
(see page 11-7).
Are VTECEX-0 and VTECIN-0 indicat ed?
NO-l f t he PCM was updat ed, subst i t ut e a known-good
PCM (see page 11-7), t hen r echeck. If t he PCM was
Are any Pending or Conft m^ri nrr.fi mrifcatario
i ndi cat ed, go t o t he i ndi cat ed DTCs
t r o ub l es h o o t i ng . !
or i gi nal PCM (see page 11-204J.B
11-268
DTC P2653: Rocker Ar m Oil Cont rol Sol enoi d
B (Exhaust Val ve Si de) Ci rcui t Low Voltage
and any on-boar d s naps hot and r evi ew t he general
3. Sel ec t t he VTEC TE S T i n the INSPECTION MENU, and
do t he Sol enoi d Val ve ACTIVATION of ROCK ER ARM
SOL ENOID B wi t h t he HDS.
Check for poor connect i ons or l oose t er mi nal s at
rocker ar m oi l cont rol sol enoi d B and t he PCM.
6. Di sconnect t he rocker ar m oi l cont rol sol enoi d B 2P
connect or .
cont rol sol enoi d B 2P connect or t er mi nal s No. 1 and
No. 2.
ROCK ER ARM OIL CONTROL S OL ENOI D B 2P CONNECTOR
1
GND I | VTS B
<>
Is t here 1430 D at room t emperat ure?
NO- Go to st ep 11.
10. Chec k for cont i nui t y bet ween PCM c onnec t or t er mi nal
C24 and body gr ound.
H e
1 | 2 |" 3 I 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 | 8 9 | 10
11 12
4 0 0
13 14 15 16 17 18
43 44 45 46
IZZ0
VTS B (GRN/ RED)
YES - Repai r shor t i n t he wi r e bet ween t he PCM (C24)
and rocker ar m oi l cont rol sol enoi d B, t hen go to st ep
12.
NO-Chec k for poor connect i ons or l oose t er mi nal s at
t he PCM and rocker ar m oil cont rol sol enoi d B, t hen
got o st ep 19.
11-275).
t he ROCK ER ARM SOL ENOID B.
rocker ar m oi l cont rol sol enoi d B and t he PCM, t hen
go to st ep 1.
NO- Go to st ep 18.
(cont' d)
VTEC/ VTC
r echeck. If t he sc r een i ndi cat es NOT COMPL ETED, go
to st ep 16.
(see page 11-7).
21. Sel ec t t he VTEC TUCT ;r. t he I N C I T C M C M hmiiU wi t h
t he ROCK ER ARM SOL ENOI D B.
r ocker ar m oi l cont rol sol enoi d B and t he PCM. If t he
NO- Go to st ep 23.
23. Moni t or t he OBD S TATUS f or DTC P2653 in the DTCs
c onnec t i ons or l oose t er mi nal s at r ocker ar m oi l
cont rol sol enoi d B and t he PCM. If t he PCM was
11-7), t hen got o st ep 21. If t he PCM was subst i t ut ed,
go to st ep 21.
DTC P2654: Rocker Ar m Oi l Control Sol enoi d
B (Exhaust Val ve Si de) Ci rcui t High Vol t age
wi t hout l oad (in P or N) unti l t he radi at or f an c omes
Chec k f or poor connect i ons or l oose t er mi nal s at
rocker ar m oi l cont rol sol enoi d B and t he PCM. H
6. Di sc onnec t t he rocker ar m oi l cont rol sol enoi d B 2P
connect or .
cont rol sol enoi d B 2P connect or t er mi nal s No. 1 and
No. 2.
NO- Go to st ep 12.
11-270
8. Chec k for conti nui ty bet ween rocker ar m oi l cont rol
sol enoi d B 2P connect or t er mi nal No. 1 and body
gr ound.
ROCK ER ARM OIL CONTROL SOL ENOI D B 2P CONNECTOR
GND (BLK)
NO-Repai r open i n t he wi r e bet ween t he rocker ar m
oi l cont rol sol enoi d B and G101 (see page 22-22), t hen
go to st ep 14.
C24 and rocker ar m oi l cont rol sol enoi d B 2P
NO-Repai r open i n t he wi r e bet ween t he PCM (C24)
and t he rocker ar m oi l cont rol sol enoi d B, t hen go to
st ep 14.
(cont ' d)
11-271
VTEC/ VTC
12. Repl ac e t he rocker ar m oi l cont rol val ve { see page
11-275).
rocker ar m oi l cont rol sol enoi d B and t he PCM
r
t hen
go to st ep 1.
NO- Go to st ep 18.
r echeck. If t he sc r een i ndi cat es NOT COMPL ETED,
keep i dl i ng unti l a r esul t c omes on.
(see page 11-7).
rocker ar m oil cont r ol sol enoi d B and t he PCM. If t he
page 11 -7), t hen r echeck. If t he PCM was subst i t ut ed,
go to st ep 1.
NO- Go to st ep 23.
cont rol sol enoi d B and t he PCM. If t he PCM was
11-7), t hen r echeck. If t he PCM was subst i t ut ed, go to
st ep 1. If t he sc r een i ndi cat es NOT COMPL ETED, keep
i dli ng unti l a r esul t c omes on.
11-272
VTC Oil Control Solenoid Val ve Removal /Test /l nst al l at i on
1 Di sconnect t he VTC oi l cont rol sol enoi d val ve 2P
connect or (A).
2. Remove t he bolt (B) and t he VTC oi l cont rol sol enoi d
val ve (C).
3. Connect VTC oi l cont rol val ve 2P connect or t er mi nal
No. 2 to t he battery posi t i ve t er mi nal wi t h a j umper
wi r e. Connect VTC oi l cont rol sol enoi d val ve 2P
connect or t er mi nal No. 1 to t he battery negat i ve
t er mi nal wi t h a j umper wi r e.
4. Measur e t he c l ear anc e of t he val ve (A). The c l ear anc e
shoul d be at l east 0.05 i n (1.2 mm)
If t he c l ear anc e i s as spec i f i ed, t he val ve i s OK;
rei nst al l it wi t h a new O-ei ng.
If t he c l ear anc e i s not as speci f i ed, i nst al l a new
val ve and O-r i ng.
NOTE
Bef ore you i nst al l t he val ve, make sur e its mat i ng
sur f ace to t he cyl i nder head i s c l ean and dry.
Coat t he O-ri ng wi t h engi ne oi l bef ore you i nst al l it.
Do not i nst al l t he val ve whi l e wear i ng cl ot h f i br ous
gl oves. Be car ef ul not to cont ami nat e t he cyl i nder
head openi ng.
GND VTC
4 e @v
BATTERY
11-273
WE G/ VTC
CMP Sensor A Replacement
1. Di sc onnec t t he CMP sensor A 3P connect or (B).
12 N-m
(1.2 kgf -m,
8.7 Ibf-ft)
2. Remove CMP sensor A f r om t he i ntake c amshaf t si de
of t he cyl i nder head.
3. Inst al l t he par t s i n t he r ever se or der of r emoval wi t h a
new O-ri ng (C).
Rocker Ar m Oi l Cont rol Val ve
Removal /Inst al l at i on
Al l model s except PZEV
1. Remove t he st rut br ace (see page 20-306).
2. Di sconnect t he rocker ar m oi l cont rol sol enoi d
connect or (A) and t he rocker ar m oi l pr essur e swi t c h
connect or (B).
D
12 N-m
(1.2 kgf -m,
8.7 Ibf-ft)
3. Remove t he har ness c l amps (C) and t he bol t s (D).
4. Remove t he rocker ar m oi l cont rol val ve assembl y (E)
and t he rocker ar m oi l cont rol val ve fi lter (F).
5. Remove t he engi ne wi r e har ness bracket (A) (al so (B)
(if equi pped)) f r om t he rocker ar m oi l cont rol val ve (C).
6. Install t he part s in t he r ever se or der of r emoval wi t h a
new rocker ar m oi l cont rol val ve fi lter.
11-274
PZEV model
1. Remove t he st rut br ace (see page 20-306).
2. Di sconnect t he rocker ar m oi l cont rol sol enoi d A
connect or -(A), t he rocker ar m oi l cont rol sol enoi d B
connect or (B), t he rocker ar m oi l pr essur e swi t c h A
connect or (C), and t he rocker ar m oi l pr essur e swi t c h
B connect or (D).
3. Remove t he har ness c l amps (E) and the bol t s (F).
4. Remove t he rocker ar m oi l cont rol val ve assembl y (G)
and t he r ocker ar m oi l cont rol val ve fi lter (H).
5. Remove t he engi ne wi r e har ness bracket (A) (al so (B)
(if equi pped)) f r om t he rocker ar m oi l cont rol val ve (C).
6. Inst al l t he part s in t he r ever se or der of r emoval wi t h a
new rocker ar m oi l cont rol val ve fi lter.
11-275
VTEC/ VTC
locker Arm Oil Pressure Switch
1. Di sc onnec t t he rocker ar m oi l pr essur e swi t c h
connect or (A).
2. Remove t he rocker ar m oi l pr essur e swi t c h (B).
new O-ri ng (C).
Rocker Ar m Oil Pr essur e Swi t c h A
PZEV model
1. Remove t he rocker ar m oi l cont rol val ve (see page
11-275).
2. Remove rocker ar m oi l pr essur e swi t ch A.
new O-ri ng (B).
11-276
Rocker Arm Oil Pressure Switch B Removal/Installation
PZEV model
1. Remove t he rocker ar m oi l cont r ol val ve (see page
11-275).
2. Remove r ocker ar m oi l pr essur e swi t c h B. . '
3. Inst al l t he part s in t he r ever se or der of r emov al wi t h a
new O-ri ng (A),
11-277
idle Control Syst em
11 278
DTC Troubleshooting
DTC P0506: idle Cont rol Syst em RPM Lower
Than Expect ed
NOTE: Bef or e you t r oubl eshoot record all f reeze dat a
wi t hout load (A/T i n Po r N, M/T in neut ral ) until t he
4. Chec k under t hese DATA L IST par amet er condi t i ons
wi t h t he HDS:
ECT S ENS OR 1 above 156 F (70 C)
IAT S ENS OR above 32 F (0 C)
VS S i s 0 mph (0 km/h)
S T FUEL TRIM bet ween 0.69 and 1.47
FS S i s CL OS ED
NO-l f t he sc r een i ndi cat es PAS S ED, go to st ep 15. If
t he sc r een i ndi cat es EXECUTI NG, keep i dl i ng unti l a
r echeck.
6. Remove t he i ntake ai r duct f r om t he throttle body (see
page 11-335).
7. Chec k f or di rt, c ar bon, or damage in t he throttle bore.
Is t here dirt , carbon, or damage in t he t hrot t le bore?
YE S - l f t her e i s dirt or c ar bon, cl ean t he throttle body
(see page 11-332). Al so check for damage to t he ai r
c l eaner el ement (see page 11 -333), t hen go to st ep 9. If
t her e i s damage in t he throttle bor e, go to st ep 8.
FSSO-Check t he A/ C syst em or power st eer i ng s y s t em,
8. Repl ac e t he throttle body (see page 11-335).
11-293).
wi t hout l oad (A/T in P or N, M/T i n neut ral) unti l t he
12. Chec k under t hese DATA L I ST par amet er condi t i ons
wi t h t he HDS:
E CT S ENS OR 1 above 156 F (70 C)
. IAT S ENS OR above 32 F (0 C)
S T FUEL TRIM bet ween 0.69 and 1.47
FS S i s CL OS ED
NO- Go to st ep 14.
sc r een i ndi cat es EXECUTI NG, keep i dli ng unti l a
r echeck.
15. Remove t he i ntake ai r duct f r om t he throttle body (see
page 11-335).
16. Check f or di rt, c ar bon, or damage i n t he throttle bor e.
Is t here dirt , carbon, or damage in t he t hrot t le bore?
YE S - l f t her e i s di rt or c ar bon, cl ean t he throttle body
(see page 11 -332). Al so check f or damage to t he ai r
cl eaner el ement (see page 11 -333), t hen go to st ep 9. If
t here i s damage in t he throttle bor e, go to st ep 8.
NO- Go to st ep 17.
(cont' d)
11-279
Idle Control S f st em
17. Rec hec k wi t h di fferent l oad condi t i ons (turn on t he
headl i ght s, t he bl ower mot or , t he r ear wi ndow
def ogger and/or A/ C, c hange t he gear posi t i on, et c.).
YES-l nt er mi t t ent f ai l ur e, t he syst em i s OK at t hi s
t i me. B
NO-l f t he sc r een i ndi cat es FAIL ED, c hec k t he A/ C
syst em and/or power st eer i ng s y s t em, t hen go to st ep
1 and r echeck. If t he sc r een i ndi cat es EXECUTI NG,
keep i dl i ng unti l a r esul t c omes on. If t he sc r een
i ndi cat es OUT OF CONDITION or NOT COMPL ETED,
go to st ep 17.
19. Updat e t he ECm/rCmif it r.Gt hzvz t he Ist cct
20. St ar t t he engi ne. Hol d t he engi ne s peed at 3,000 r pm
21. Chec k under t hese DATAL I ST par amet er condi t i ons
wi t h t he HDS:
e ECT S ENS OR 1 above 156 F (70 C)
IAT S ENS OR above 32 F (0 C)
ST FUEL TRIM bet ween 0.69 and 1.47
FSS i s CL OS ED
NO- Go to st ep 23.
23. Moni t or t he OBD S TA TUS f or DTC P0506 i n t he DTCs
got o t he i ndi cat ed DTCs t r oubl es hoot i ng.
c onnec t i ons or l oose t er mi nal s at t he throttle body
i dl i ng unti l a r esul t c omes on. If t he sc r een i ndi cat es
20.
11-280
DTC P0507: Idle Control Syst em RPM Hi gher
Than Expect ed
radi at or f an c omes on, t hen let it i dle f or at l east
20 sec onds.
i ndi cat es EXECUTI NG, keep i dl i ng unti l a r esul t
or NOT COMPL ETED, r echeck wi t h di fferent l oad
condi t i ons (el ect r i cal , A/ C, gear posi t i on, et c.), t hen go
to st ep 3.
5. Chec k f or vac uum l eaks at t hese part s:
PCV val ve
PCV hose
EVAP cani st er purge val ve
Throt t l e body
Intake mani f ol d
Br ake boost er
Are t here any leaks?
YES - Repai r or r epl ace t he l eaki ng par t (s), t hen go t o
st ep 6.
NO- Go to st ep 6.
11-293).
radi at or f an c omes on, t hen let it i dle f or at l east
20 sec onds.
NO- Go to st ep 11.
CONDITION or NOT COMPL ETED, r echeck wi t h
di fferent l oad condi t i ons (turn on t he headl i ght s,
bl ower mot or, or A/ C; c hange t he gear posi t i on, et c.),
radi at or f an c omes on, t hen let it i dle f or at l east 20
sec onds.
NO- Go to st ep 15.
(cont ' d)
11-281
Idle Control S f st em
c onnec t i ons or l oose t er mi nal s at t he throttle body
i dli ng unti l a resul t c omes on. If t he sc r een i ndi cat es
GUT O r CONDITION u i NOT C u i v i r L t "i t o , go to st ep
13.
DTC P0532: A/C Pr essur e Sensor Ci rcui t Low
Vol t age
2. Tur n t he bl ower swi t ch on.
3. Tur n t he A/ C swi t ch on.
4. Chec k t he A/ C PRES S URE S ENS OR in t he DATA L I ST
wi t h t he HDS.
A/ C pr essur e sensor and t he E CM/ PCM.
6. Di sc onnec t t he A/ C pr essur e sensor 3P connect or .
8. Chec k t he A/ C PRE S S URE S ENS OR i n t he DATA L IST
wi t h t he HDS.
NO- Go to st ep 9.
9. Measur e t he vol t age bet ween A/ C pr essur e sensor 3P
A / C PRE S S URE S E NS OR 3P CONNECTOR
1
VCC6 (YEL )
H2H
SG6 (BLK)
NO- Go to st ep 14.
11 -282
13. Check f or cont i nui t y bet ween A/ C pr essur e sensor 3P
ACPD (BLU)
(A17) and t he A/ C pr essur e sensor , t hen go to st ep 20.
NO- Go to st ep 27.
17. Chec k f or cont i nui t y bet ween A/ C pr essur e sensor 3P
t er mi nal A20.
/ \
1 2 3
VCC6 (Y EL)
NO-Repai r open i n t he wi r e bet ween t he ECM/PCM
19. Repl ace t he A/ C pr essur e sensor (see page 21-7).
22. Reset t he ECM/ PCM wi th t he HDS.
11-293), t hen let t he engi ne i dl e.
25. Tur n t he A/ C swi t c h on.
t he A/ C pr essur e sensor and t he ECM/ PCM, t hen go to
st ep 1.
(cont' d)
11-283
Idle Control Syst em
28. Updat e t he ECM/ PCM If it does not have t he l at est
30. Tur n t he bl ower swi t c h on.
t he A/ C pr essur e sensor and t he ECM/ PCM. If t he
DTC P0533: A/ C Pr essur e Sensor Ci rcui t Hi gh
Vol t age
4. Chec k t he A/ C PRE S S URE S ENS OR i n t he DATA L I ST
wi t h t he HDS.
A/ C pr essur e sensor and t he E CM/ PCM.
6. Di sc onnec t t he A/ C pr essur e sensor 3P connect or .
7. Connec t A/ C pr essur e sensor 3P connect or t er mi nal s
No. 2 and No. 3 wi t h a j umper wi r e.
1 2 3
ACPD (BLU) s
J UMPER WI RE
9. Chec k t he A/ C PRE S S URE S ENS OR i n t he DATA L I ST
wi t h t he HDS.
NO- Go to st ep 22.
11. Remove t he j umper wi r e f r om t he A/ C pr essur e
11-284
13. Measur e t he vol t age bet ween A/ C pr essur e sensor 3P
connect or t er mi nal No. 1 and No. 3.
VCC6 (YEL ) I ^ I SG6 (BLK)
<2>
NO- Go to st ep 18.
17. Chec k for cont i nui t y bet ween A/ C pr essur e sensor 3P
t er mi nal A17.
A / C PRE S S URE S ENS OR 3P CONNECTOR
1 2 3
ACPD (BLU)
ACPD (BLU)
22
29
IZE
3 4 5
3 2 [ / | 3 4
16
25
17 18
26
42| 43|44lyT46L
9 10
20 21
27 28 '
(cont ' d)
11-285
Idle Control Syst em
21. Chec k f or cont i nui t y bet ween A/ C pr essur e sensor 3P
t er mi nal A10.
1 2 3
SG6 (BLK)
SG6 (BLK)
29
033
115 16 17 18
3 5 3 6
^ |43|44|y- i 46 _
10
3 1 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 IXI 9 110"
\2A
is t here cont inuit y?
23. Repl ac e t he A/ C pr essur e sensor (see page 21-7).
11-293), t hen let t he engi ne i dl e.
t he A/ C pr essur e sensor and t he ECM/ PCM, t hen go t o
st ep 1.
35. Tur n t he A/ C swi t ch on.
t he A/ C pr essur e sensor and t he ECM/ PCM. If t he
11-286
A/C Signal Circuit Troubleshooting
2. Tur n t he bl ower swi t c h on.
4. Chec k t he A/ C CL UTCH i n t he DATA L I ST wi t h t he
HDS.
NO-Do t he A/ C syst em t est (see page 21-89).B
5. Chec k t he A/ C syst em.
Does t he A/C syst em operat e?
YE S - Th e ai r condi t i oni ng syst em ci rcui t i s OK .B
NO- Go to st ep 6.
8. Act i vat e t he A/ C CL UTCH i n t he INSPECTION MENU
wi t h t he HDS.
Is t here a clicking noise from t he A/C compressor clut ch?
YE S - Do t he A/ C syst em t est (see page 21-89).f l
NO- Go to st ep 9.
13. Moment ar i l y connect ECM/ PCM c onnec t or t er mi nal
A15 to body gr ound wi t h a j umper wi r e sever al t i mes.
22
29 30
J2HT
4 j 5 | 6 | 7 \ /\ 9 [ 1 0
15 16 17 18 19
m
oil ' 7I5E
42 43
20 21
26
j34|35|36l7
7
/ H /1'
M| >l 46 |>[7|7l
27
ACC (PUR)
J UMPER WIRE
Is t here a clicking noise from t he A/C compressor clut ch?
t he A/ C c ompr essor cl ut ch r el ay and t he ECM/ PCM. If
t he c onnec t i ons ar e OK, check t he A/ C c ompr essor
cl ut ch rel ay (see page 22-93). If needed, repai r open in
t he wi r e bet ween t he ECM/ PCM (A15), t he A/ C
c ompr essor cl ut ch r el ay, or ot her part s i n t he A/ C
s y s t ems .B
11-287
idle Control S f st em
Alternator FR Signal Circuit
Troubleshooting
2. Moni t or t he AL TERNATOR in t he DATA L I ST wi t h t he
HDS.
3. Chec k if t he i ndi cat ed per cent age var i es when t he
headl i ght swi t c h i s t ur ned on.
Does the percentage wary?
YE S - Th e al t ernat or si gnal ci rcui t i s OK.gH
NO- Go to st ep 4.
4. Tur n t he headl i ght swi t c h off and i gni t i on swi t c h to
L OCK (0).
6. Di sc onnec t t he al t ernat or 4P connect or .
ECM/PCM CONNECTOR B (49P)
22
29
23
3 4
24
31
RT7f7t
S I
3233
16
34
S I
3536
40y4X| 43 \/\ 45 j 46J47
27
38
28
ALTF (WHT/RED)
(B47) and t he al t er nat or .i l
PSP Swi t c h Si gnal Ci rcui t
Troubl eshoot i ng
2. Al i gn t he st eer i ng wheel st rai ght ahead.
3. Chec k t he PS P SWITCH in t he DATA L I ST wi t h t he
HDS.
NO- Go to st ep 14.
4. Tur n t he st eer i ng wheel t o t he full lock posi t i on.
5. Chec k t he PS P SWITCH in t he DATA L I ST wi t h t he
HDS.
Does it change t o OFF?
YE S - Th e PS P swi t c h si gnal ci rcui t i s OKM
NO- Go to st ep 6.
7. Di sc onnec t t he PSP swi t ch 2P connect or .
9. Chec k t he PSP SWITCH in t he DATA L I ST wi t h t he
HDS.
Does it change t o OFF?
YES - Repl ac e t he PSP swi t ch (see page 17-29).B
NO- Go to st ep 10.
11-288
1
13. Chec k f or cont i nui t y bet ween PSP swi t c h 2P
PSP SWITCH 2P CONNECTOR
PS PS W (PNK )
(A23) and t he PS P s wi t c h . B
known-good ECM/ PCM (see page 11 -7), t hen r echeck.
^ ECM/ PCM (see page 11-204).B
15. Di sc onnec t t he PSP swi t ch 2P connect or .
16. Connec t PSP swi t ch 2P connect or t er mi nal s No. 1 and
No. 2 wi t h a j umper wi r e, t hen st art t he engi ne.
PS P SWI TCH 2P CONNECTOR
PS PS W (PNK)
J UMPER WI RE
GND (BLK)
17. Chec k t he PS P SWITCH i n t he DATA L I ST wi t h t he
HDS.
Does it change t o ON?
YES - Repl ac e t he PSP swi t c h (see page 17-29).B
NO- Go to st ep 18.
19. Remove t he j umper wi r e f r om t he PSP swi t c h 2P
connect or .
22. Connec t PS P swi t ch 2P connect or t er mi nal No. 1 t o
PSP S WI TCH 2P CONNECTOR
PS PS W (PNK)
J UMPER WI RE
3 I 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 J X 9 10|
/ !
16 17 18 19 20 21
i

24
X
25
><
26 27 28
i

/
3 2 / 34 35 36
/
i

421431441/| 46 | /
A A
PS PS W (PNK)
NO-Repai r open in t he wi r e bet ween t he PSP swi t ch
and t he ECM/ PCM (A23).B
(cont' d)
11-289
Idle Cont rol S f st em
PSP Switch Signal Circuit
24. Chec k f or cont i nui t y bet ween PSP swi t c h 2P
1 5>P SWITCH 2P CONNECTOR
GND (BLK)
ECM/ PCM was updat ed, t r oubl eshoot i ng i s c ompl et e.
If t he sympt om/ i ndi cat i on goes away and t he
NO-Repai r open in t he wi r e bet ween t he PS P swi t c h
and G201 (see page 22-26) J B
Brake Pedal Position Switch Signal
Circuit Troubleshooting
2. Chec k t he BRAK E SWITCH in t he DATA L I ST wi t h t he
HDS.
Does it indicat e OFF?
NO-l nspec t t he brake pedal posi t i on swi t c h (see page
19-6).B
3. Pr ess t he brake pedal , and check t he BRAK E SWITCH
i n t he DATA L IST wi t h t he HDS.
Does it change t o ON?
YE S - Th e brake pedal posi t i on swi t ch si gnal ci rcui t
(BK SW li ne) i s OK .B
NO- Go to st ep 1.
6. Di sc onnec t t he brake pedal posi t i on swi t c h 4P
connect or .
H 3 l 4 l 5 l 6 i 7 ^| 9 W l
\\AAA\s 16 17 18 19 ?ntoil f
22 23
29 30
E E
24 25
SI
32| X| 34| 35| 36
42143144 L^ J 46
20 21
26 27 28
1
m
B K S W ( L TGRN)
(A42) and t he brake pedal posi t i on swi t c h. Repl ace t he
No. 10 HORN/ STOP (20 A) f us e. B
NO- Go to st ep 9.
11-290
9. Connec t brake pedal posi t i on swi t c h 4P connect or
t er mi nal No. 2 t o body gr ound wi t h a j umper wi r e.
BRAK E PEDAL POSITION SWI TCH 4P CONNECTOR
B K S W (LT GRN)
1
J UMPER WI RE
YES - Repai r open i n t he wi r e bet ween t he brake pedal
posi t i on swi t ch and t he No. 10 HORN/ STOP (20 A)
f use. Inspect t he brake pedal posi t i on swi t ch (see
page19-6). B
(A42) and t he brake pedal posi t i on s wi t c h . B
Idle Cont rol S f st em
Idle Speed Inspect i on
NOTE:
Bef or e c hec ki ng t he i dle s peed, check t hese i t ems:
- The mal f unct i on i ndi cat or l amp (MIL) has not been
r epor t ed on, and t her e ar e no DTCs .
- Igni ti on t i mi ng
- Spar k pl ugs
- Ai r c l eaner
- PCV syst em
Appl y t he parki ng br ake, and make sur e t he headl i ght s
ar e off.
1. Di sc onnec t t he evapor at i ve emi ssi on (EVAP) c ani st er
purge val ve connect or .
A
ECM/ PCM. If it doesn' t , go to t he DL C ci r cui t
t r oubl eshoot i ng (see page 11- 181).
5. Chec k t he i dle speed wi t hout l oad condi t i ons:
headl i ght s, bl ower f an, radi at or f an, and ai r
condi t i oner off.
Idle speed shoul d be:
M/ T 780 50 rpm
A/T 800 50 rpm (in P or N)
6. Let t he engi ne i dle f or 1 mi nut e wi t h hi gh el ect r i c l oad
(A/C on, t emper at ur e set to max c ool , bl ower f an on
hi gh, headl i ght s on hi gh beam).
Idle speed shoul d be:
I M/T I 780 50 mm
l A / T I 800 50 rpm (in P or N)
NOTE: If t he i dl e speed i s not wi t hi n speci f i cat i on, do
t he ECM/ PCM i dl e l ear n pr ocedur e (see page 11-293).
If t he i dle speed i s st i l l not wi t hi n speci f i cat i on, go to
t he sympt om t r oubl eshoot i ng.
7. Rec onnec t t he EVAP c ani st er purge val ve connect or .
11-292
ECM/PCM idle Learn Procedure
The i dle l earn pr ocedur e must be done so t he ECM/ PCM
can l earn t he engi ne i dle char act er i st i cs.
Do t he i dle l earn pr ocedur e whenever you do any of
t hese act i ons:
Repl ace ECM/ PCM.
Reset ECM/ PCM.
Updat e ECM/ PCM.
Repl ace or c l ean t he throttle body.
Di sassembl e t he engi ne or t he t r ansmi ssi on.
NOTE: Er asi ng DTCs wi t h t he HDS does not requi re you
to do t he i dle l earn pr ocedur e.
Procedure
1. Make sur e all el ect ri cal i t ems (A/C, audi o, l i ght s, etc.)
ar e off.
3. Tur n t he i gni ti on swi t ch to ON (II), and wai t 2 sec onds.
radi at or f an c omes on, or unti l t he engi ne cool ant
t emper at ur e r eac hes 194 F (90 C).
5. Let t he engi ne i dl e f or about 5 mi nut es wi t h t he
throttle f uj ly c l osed.
NOTE: If t he radi at or f an c omes on, do not i ncl ude its
runni ng t i me i n t he 5 mi nut es.
11-293
Fuel Suppl y Syst em
f FUE L PUL S ATI ON DAMPER
(PZEV model )
Repl ac ement page 11-323
FUE L RAIL
FUE L TA NK
Dr ai ni ng, page 11- 309
FUE L TANK UNIT
FUE L PUMP
FUE L GA UGE S ENDI NG UNIT
Test , page 11- 328
FUE L PRE S S URE REGUL ATOR
FUE L FI L TER
Repl ac ement , page 11 -324
FUE L FIL L CAP
F UEL F ILL PIPE
F UEL LINE/
QUICK -CONNECT F ITTING
Pr ec aut i ons, page 11-313
Removal , page 11- 314
F UEL LINE/
QUICK -CONNECT F ITTING
Pr ec aut i ons, page 11-313
Removal , page 11-314
F UEL VAPOR LINE
11-294
PGM-FI MAIN RELAY 1
PGM-FI MAI N RELAY 2
(F UEL PUMP)
11-295
DTC Troubleshooting
DTC P0461: Fuel Level Sensor (Fuel Gauge
Sendi ng Unit) Ci rcui t Range/Per f or mance
Probl em
NOTE:
Bef ore you t r oubl eshoot r ecor d all f r eeze dat a and
Bec ause it r equi r es 162 mi l es (260 km) of dr i vi ng
wi t hout ref uel i ng to compl et e t hi s di agnosi s, DTC
P0461 cannot be dupl i cat ed dur i ng t hi s
t r oubl eshoot i ng.
1. Test t he f uel gauge sendi ng uni t (see page 11 -328).
Is the fuel gauge sending unit OK ?
t he f uel gauge sendi ng uni t and t he gauge cont rol
mo d u l e.
NO-Repl ac e t he f uel gauge sendi ng uni t (see page
11-293).
Are any Pending or Confirmed DTCs indicated?
YE S - Go to t he i ndi cat ed DTCs t r oubl eshoot i ng.
NO-Tr oubl eshoot i ng i s c ompl et e. B
Sendi ng Uni t) Ci rcui t Low Vol t age
2. Cl ear t he DTC wi t h t he HDS, and wai t 5 sec onds.
cet sgc c ent r e! modul e ari d t he fuel gauge sendi ng
uni t .H
5. Remove t he rear seat c ushi on (see page 20-241).
11-320).
7. Di sc onnec t t he f uel t ank uni t 4P connect or .
YES - Repl ac e t he f uel gauge sendi ng uni t (see page
NO- Go to st ep 11.
11-296
11. Measur e t he vol t age bet ween f uel tank uni t 4P
HJf cL TANK UNIT 4P CONNECTOR
S I GNAL (PUR)
1 2
3 4
NO- Go to st ep 12.
15. Chec k f or cont i nui t y bet ween f uel tank uni t 4P
FUEL TANK UNIT 4P CONNECTOR
S I GNAL (PUR)
1 2
3 4
YES - Repai r shor t i n t he wi r e bet ween t he gauge
cont rol modul e (si gnal l i ne) and t he f uel gauge
sendi ng uni t , t hen go to st ep 24.
17. Remove t he f uel t ank uni t (see page 11-320).
18. Connec t t he f uel tank uni t 4P connect or .
21. Set t he f l oat (A) to the E posi t i on.
J HE1
0.6 in x ( ]=
(15.9 mm ) i
%
-
J
22. Check t he f uel gauge.
Does the gauge move to the empty position?
25. Rei nst al l all r emoved part s i n t he r ever se or der of
r emoval .
11-293).
t he gauge cont rol modul e and t he fuel gauge sendi ng
uni t, t hen go to st ep 1.
(cont' d)
11 I2II^" I7
Fuel Suppl y S y s t em
r emoval .
t he gauge cont rol modul e and t he f uel gauge sendi ng
uni t. If t he ECM/ PCM was updat ed, subst i t ut e a
Sendi ng Uni t) Ci rcui t High Vol t age
Check f or poor c onnec t i ons or l oose t er mi nal s at t he
gauge cont rol modul e and t he f uel gauge sendi ng
u n i t !
11-320).
7. Di sc onnec t t he f uel t ank uni t 4P connect or .
9. Measur e t he vol t age bet ween f uel t ank uni t 4P
FUE L TANK UNIT 4P CONNECTOR
I S I GNAL (PUR)
, r ~i
1 2
3 4
GND (ORN)
NO- Go to st ep 10.
10 Tur n t he i gni t i on swi t c h to L OCK (0).
11-298
11. Connect f uel t ank uni t 4P connect or t er mi nal No. 3 to
F UEL TANK UNIT 4P CONNECTOR
1 2
3 4
GND (ORN)
J UMPER WIRE
14. Check f or cont i nui t y bet ween gauge cont rol modul e
/ 1 8 | 9 | 10| / M13J/ M16L
|17|18|19|/|/|22|23|24|25|26|27|28|29|30|/]32
GND (ORN)
NO-Repai r open in t he wi r e bet ween t he gauge
cont rol modul e (GND li ne) and t he f uel gauge sendi ng
uni t , t hen go to st ep 27.
15. Connec t f uel t ank uni t 4P connect or t ermi nal No. 1 to
FUf cL TANK UNIT 4P CONNECTOR
S I GNAL (PUR)
1 2
3 4
J UMPER WI RE
16. Chec k for cont i nui t y bet ween gauge cont rol modul e
1 |2|/I /V| 6 /]8|9|10
/[/|13T>I416|
|17|18|19|/|/|22|23|24|25|26|27|28|29|30|/|32
S I GNAL (PUR)
NO-Repai r open in t he wi r e bet ween t he gauge
cont rol modul e (si gnal li ne) and t he fuel gauge
sendi ng uni t , t hen go to st ep 27.
18. Remove t he f uel tank uni t (see page 11-320).
19. Test t he f uel gauge sendi ng uni t (see page 11-328).
Is the fuel gauge sending unit OK ?
NO-Repl ac e t he f uel gauge sendi ng uni t (see page
11 -324), t hen go to st ep 26.
20. Connec t t he f uel tank uni t 4P connect or .
(cont' d)
11-299
21. Rec onnec t t he gauge cont rol modul e 32P connect or .
24. Set t he float (A) to t he F posi t i on.
25. Chec k t he f uel gauge.
Does the gauge move to the full position?
r emoval .
11-293).
uni t , t hen go to st ep 1.
Tempor ar y DTCs or DTCs ar e i ndi cat ed, go to t he
34. Rei nst al l all r emoved part s in t he r ever se or der of
r emoval .
uni t . If t he ECM/ PCM was updat ed, subst i t ut e a
11-300
Fuel Pump Circuit Troubleshooting
If you suspec t a pr obl em wi t h t he f uel pump, check that
t he f uel pump act ual l y r uns; when it i s on, you wi l l hear
s ome noi se if you l i st en to t he f uel fi ll port wi t h t he fuel
fi ll cap r emoved. The f uel pump shoul d run f or
2 sec onds when t he i gni ti on swi t ch i s t ur ned to ON (II). If
t he f uel pump does not make noi se, check as f ol l ows:
2. Remove t he dr i ver ' s dashboar d l ower c over (see page
20-166).
3. Remove PGM-FI mai n rel ay 2 (FUEL PUMP) (A) f rom
5. Measur e t he vol t age bet ween PGM-FI mai n rel ay 2
gr ound.
PGM-FI MAIN REL AY 2 (FUEL PUMP) 4P, CONNECTOR
IGP
4 4
2 1
o
7. Remove PGM-FI mai n r el ay 1 (A) and t he E TCS cont rol
r el ay (B) f r om t he under -hood f use/r el ay box.
9. Di sc onnec t ECM/ PCM c onnec t or A (49P).
10. Di sc onnec t engi ne wi r e har ness connect or C101 at
t he left si de of t he engi ne compar t ment .
11. Di sc onnec t t he dr i ver ' s under -dash f use/r el ay box
connect or F (33P).
12. Connec t PGM-FI mai n rel ay 1 4P connect or t er mi nal
No. 2 to body gr ound wi t h a j umper wi r e.
I GP
J UMPER WI RE
NO- Go t o st ep 6.
(cont ' d)
11-301
f uel Suppl y S f st em
Fuel Pump Circuit Troubleshooting (cont'd)
13. Chec k for cont i nui t y bet ween dr i ver ' s under -dash
f use/r el ay box connect or F (33P) t er mi nal No. 31 and
body gr ound.
DRIVER'S UNDER-DASH h Us E / RE L A Y BOX
CONNECTOR F (33P)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
T p i s f i e j i j j i s
19
20 21 22 23 24 25 27 28 29 30 31 32 '" 33
IGP (Y EL/BLK )
YES - Repl ac e t he dr i ver ' s under -dash f use/r el ay box;
US A model s (see page 22-86), Canaf da model s (see
page 22- 87) .
NO-
Repai r open in t he wi r e bet ween t he under -hood
f use/r el ay box and t he dr i ver ' s under -dash
f use/r el ay box.H
If t he wi r e i s OK, r epl ace t he under -hood f use/r el ay
box (see page 22-86).H
14. Measur e t he vol t age bet ween PGM-FI mai n rel ay 2
gr ound.
IG1
NO-
Check t he No. 9 FUEL PUMP (20 A) f use in t he
dr i ver ' s under -dash f use/r el ay box.H
If t he f use i s OK, r epl ace t he dr i ver ' s under -dash
f use/r el ay box; US A model s (see page 22-86),
Canada model s (see page 22- 87) .
16. Connec t PGM-FI mai n rel ay 2 (FUEL PUMP) 4P
connect or t er mi nal No. 3 to body gr ound wi t h a
j umper wi r e.
x
1
IMOFPR
J UMPER WI RE
11-302
ECM/ PCM connect or t er mi nal A16.
IMOFPR (GRY)
29 30
J Z E
3 4 5
7m7\
16
25
17 18 19
35I 36J /
42|43|44|/
7
[46"
20
9 10
26 27 28
1
m
21
NO-Repai r open in t he wi r e bet ween PGM-FI mai n
rel ay 2 (FUEL PUMP) and t he ECM/ PCM (A16).H
20. Rei nst al l PGM-FI mai n rel ay 2 (FUEL PUMP).
21. Connec t ECM/ PCM connect or t er mi nal A7 to body
gr ound wi t h a j umper wi r e.
IMOFPR (GRY)
J l l /
3 I 4 | 5 I 6 I 7 1 / 9 1101
1
11
/
/
/ 1 5 16 17 18 19 20 21
1
22 23 24
><
25
><
26 27 28
1
29 30
/
3 2 ^ 34 35 36
/ 7
1/141
42
431441/| 46 / A\A
NO-Repl ac e PGM-FI mai n r el ay 2 (FUEL PUMP).I
MRL Y ( RED/ BL K )
J l l /
3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 I
/
9 1101
11
/ /
/I
1 5
16 17 18 19 20 21
22 23 24 25
><
26 27 28
29 30
/
3 2 l / 34 35 36
/ /
1/141
421431441/| 46 ( /
7\A
J UMPER WI RE
(cont' d)
11-303
Fuel Pump Ci rcui t Troubleshooting (cont'd)
28. Tur n t he i gni ti on swi t ch to ON (II), and measur e t he
vol t age bet ween dr i ver ' s under -dash f use/r el ay box
connect or F (33P) t er mi nal No. 22 and body gr ound
wi t hi n 2 sec onds.
DRI VER' S UNDER-DASH F US E / RE L A Y BOX
CONNECTOR F (33P)
19
33
1
1 2 3 4 5 6 i 7 ( 8 9 (10 11 12 13 14
-j | 1 5 J 1 6 J 1 7J 1 8
19
33
1
20 21 22 23 24 25| 26| 27 28J29 30 31 32
19
33
IMOF PR (GRY)
YES - Upd at e the ECM/ PCM if it does not have t he
l at est sof t war e (see page 11 -203), or subst i t ut e a
NO- Go to st ep 27.
27. Tur n t he i gni t i on swi t c h to ON (II), and measur e t he
vol t age bet ween dr i ver ' s under -dash f use/r el ay box
connect or F (33P) t er mi nal No. 22 and body gr ound
after 2 s ec onds .
DRI VE RS UNDER-DAS H FUS E / RE L A Y BOX
CONNECTOR F (33P)
19
33
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
> - j | l 5 | l 6 | l 7 | l 8
19
33 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
31 32
19
33
IMOFPR (GRY)
NO-Repl ac e t he dr i ver ' s under -dash f use/r el ay box;
US A model s (see page 22-86), Canada model s (see
page 22-87).
11-320).
31. Tur n t he i gni t i on swi t ch to ON (II), and measur e t he
vol t age bet ween f uel tank uni t 4P connect or t er mi nal
No. 2 and body gr ound wi t hi n 2 sec onds.
1
C
M

3 4
FUEL PUMP (PNK)
NO- Go to st ep 32.
11-304
32. Tur n t he Igni ti on swi t ch t o L OCK (0).
33. Remove PGM-FI mai n rel ay 2 (FUEL PUMP).
34. Connec t PGM-FI mai n r el ay 2 (FUEL PUMP) 4P
connect or t er mi nal s No. 1 and No. 2 wi t h a j umper
wi r e.
PGM-FI MAI N RELAY 2 (F UEL PUMP) 4P CONNECTOR
3
IG1 FUEL PUMP
J UMPER WIRE
vol t age bet ween f uel tank uni t 4P connect or t er mi nal
37. Chec k f or cont i nui t y bet ween f uel t ank uni t 4P
GND (BLK)
YES - Repl ac e t he f uel pump (see page 11-324).
NO-Repai r open i n t he wi r e bet ween t he f uel tank uni t
4P connector and G603; 4-door (see page 22-50),
2-door (see page 22-52).H
FUEL TANK UNIT 4P CONNECTOR
1 2
3 4
FUE L PUMP (PNK)
YES - Repl ac e PGM-FI mai n rel ay 2 (FUEL PUMP).H
NO-
Repai r open in t he wi r e bet ween t he dr i ver ' s
under -dash f use/r el ay box (D10) and t he f uel t ank
uni t 4P c onneet or .i l
If t he wi r e i s OK , r epl ace t he dr i ver ' s under -dash
f use/r el ay box (see page 22-86).H
11-305
Fuel Pressure Rel i evi ng
Bef or e di sconnect i ng f uel l i nes or hos es , rel i eve
pr essur e f r om t he syst em by di sabl i ng t he f uel pump,
r unni ng t he engi ne unti l it st al l s, t hen and di sc onnec t i ng
t he f uel l i ne/qui ck c onnec t fi tti ng in t he engi ne
compar t ment .
Wi t h t he HDS
1. Connec t t he HDS t o t he dat a link connect or (DLC) (A)
A
5. Remove t he f uel fi ll c ap to r el i eve t he pr essur e i n t he
f uel t ank.
7. Fr om t he INSPECTION MENU of t he HDS, sel ect Fuel
Pump OFF, t hen st art t he engi ne, and let it i dle unti l it
st al l s.
NOTE:
Do not al l ow t he engi ne to i dle above 1,000 r pm or
t he ECM/ PCM wi l l cont i nue to oper at e t he f uel
pump.
Pendi ng or Conf i r med DTC may be set dur i ng t hi s
pr ocedur e. Check f or DTCs , and cl ear t hem as
needed (see page 11-4).
page 22-91).
10. Remove t he qui ck-connect fi tti ng c over (A) (see page
11-314).
11. Chec k t he f uel qui ck-connect fi tti ng for di rt, and cl ean
it if needed.
12. Pl ace a rag or shop t owel over t he qui ck-connect
fitting (A).
A
11-306
13. Di sconnect t he qui ck-connect fi tti ng (A): Hol d t he
connect or (B) wi t h one hand, and squeeze t he ret ai ner
t abs (C) wi t h t he ot her hand t o r el ease t hem f r om t he
l ocki ng t abs (D). Pul l t he connect or off.
NOTE:
Be car ef ul not t o damage t he l i ne (E) or ot her part s.
Do not use t ool s.
If t he connect or does not move, keep t he ret ai ner
t abs pr essed down, and al t ernat el y pull and push
t he connect or unti l it c omes off easi l y.
Do not r emove t he ret ai ner f r om t he l i ne; onc e
r emoved, t he ret ai ner must be r epl aced wi t h a new
one.
14. Af t er di sconnect i ng t he qui ck-connect f i t t i ng, check it
f or di rt or damage (see st ep 5 on page 11 -315).
page 22-91).
Wi t hout t he HDS
20-166).
2. Remove PGM-FI mai n r el ay 2 ( FUEL PUMP) (A) f r om
3. St ar t t he engi ne, and let it i dl e unti l it st al l s.
NOTE: If any DTCs ar e st or ed, c l ear and i gnor e t hem.
5. Remove t he f uel fi ll c ap t o r el i eve t he pr essur e i n t he
f uel tank.
page 22-91).
7. Remove t he qui ck-connect fi tti ng c over (A) (see page
11-314).
8. Chec k t he f uel qui ck-connect fi tti ng f or di rt, and cl ean
it if needed.
(cont ' d)
11-307
Fuel Pr essur e Rel i evi ng (cont' d)
9. Pl ac e a rag or shop t owel over t he qui ck-connect
fi tti ng (A).
A
10. Di sc onnec t t he qui ck-connect fi tti ng (A): Hol d t he
c onnec t or (B) wi t h one hand, and squeeze t he ret ai ner
t abs (C) wi t h t he ot her hand t o r el ease t hem f r om t he
l ocki ng t abs (D). Pul l t he connect or off.
NOTE:
Be car ef ul not t o damage t he l i ne (E) or ot her par t s.
Do not use t ool s.
If t he c onnec t or does not move, keep t he ret ai ner
r emoved, t he r et ai ner must be r epl aced wi t h a new
one.
11. Af t er di sc onnec t i ng t he qui ck-connect f i t t i ng, check it
f or di rt or damage (see st ep 5 on page 11-315).
page 22-91).
Fuel Pr essur e Test
Fuel Pr essur e Gauge 07406-004000B
Fuel Pr essur e Gauge At t achment Set 07AAJ-S6MA150
2. At t ach t he f uel pr essur e gauge set and t he f uel
pr essur e gauge.
If t he engi ne st ar t s, go to st ep 5.
If t he engi ne does not st art , go t o st ep 4.
4. Chec k t o s ee if t he f uel pump i s r unni ng: Li st en t o t he
f uel f i l l er port wi t h t he f uel fi ll c ap r emoved. The f uel
pump shoul d run f or 2 sec onds when t he i gni t i on
swi t c h i s f i rst t ur ned t o ON (II).
If t he pump r uns, go t o st ep 5.
If t he pump does not r un, do t he f uel pump ci rcui t
5. Read t he f uel pr essur e gauge. The pr essur e shoul d be
333- 382 kPa ( 3. 4- 3. 9 k g f / c m
2
, 48- 55 psi ).
If t he pr essur e i s OK , t he t est i s c ompl et e.
If t he pr essur e i s out of speci f i cat i on, r epl ace t he
f uel pr essur e regul at or (see page 11-323) and t he
f uel fi lter (see page 11 -324), t hen r echeck t he f uel
pr essur e.
11-308
Fuel Tank Draining
1. Remove t he fuel t ank uni t (see page 11 -320).
2. Usi ng a hand pump, a hose, and a cont ai ner sui t abl e
f or f uel , dr aw t he f uel f r om t he f uel t ank.
3. Rei nst al l t he f uel t ank uni t (see page 11-321).
Fuel Suppl y S f st em
Fuel Line Inspection
Chec k t he f uel syst em l i nes and hoses f or damage, l eaks, and det eri orat i on, i. Repl ace any damaged par t s.
Make sure the connections are
secure and the quick-connect
fitting covers are firmly locked in place.
11-310
Chec k all c l amps, and make sur e t hey ar e properl y posi t i oned and t i ght ened.
FUE L TANK UNIT L OCK NUT
Repl ac e.
L OCK NUT PL ATE
Repl ac e.
To FUE L RAIL
To EVAPORATI VE
EMI SSI ON (EVAP)
CANI S TER PURGE VAL VE
115
L E FTS I DE OF
THE VEHI CL E
Make sur e t he c l amp
posi t i oned as shown.
B A S E GA S K E T
Repl ac e.
When i nst al l i ng t he f uel fi ll
neck t ube, al i gn t he mark on
t he t ube wi t h t he pr oj ect i on
on t he f uel fill neck f i t t i ng.
Ther e shoul d be
no c l ear anc e.
Make sur e t he c l amp i s
posi t i oned as shown.
C:
120'
Make sur e t he c l amp i s
posi t i oned as s hown.
Make sur e t he c l amp is
posi t i oned as s hown.
To EVAP CANI S TER
PURGE VAL VE To PURGE PIPE
(cont' d)
11-31
Fuel Line Inspection (cont'd)
Chec k all c l amps , and make sur e t hey ar e pr oper l y posi t i oned and t i ght ened.
PZEV model
F UEL TANK UNIT L OCK NUT
Replace.
To EVAP CANI S TER f
PURGE VA L VE To PURGE PIPE
11-312
Fuel Li ne/Qui ck-Connect Fi tti ng Precaut i ons
The f uel l i ne/qui ck-connect fi tti ngs (A, B, C, D, E, and F)
connect t he f uel rai l (G) t o t he f uel f eed hose (H), t he f uel
f eed hose t o t he f uel l i ne (I), t he f uel l i ne (J) t o t he f uel
t ank uni t (K), t he f uel vapor l i ne (L) t o t he EVAP c ani st er
(M), and t he f uel t ank vapor r eci r cul at i on t ube (N) (PZEV
model , and f uel fi ll neck t ube (O)) t o t he f uel fi ll pi pe (P).
When r emovi ng or i nst al l i ng t he f uel f eed hose, t he f uel
t ank uni t , or t he f uel t ank, when
di sconnect i ng/connect i ng t he qui ck-connect f i t t i ngs, pay
attenti on t o t he f ol l owi ng:
The f uel f eed hos es , f uel l i ne, and qui ck-connect
fi tti ngs ar e not heat -r esi st ant ; be car ef ul not t o
damage t hem dur i ng wel di ng or ot her
heat -gener at i ng pr oc edur es.
The f uel f eed hos es , f uel l i ne, and qui ck-connect
fi tti ngs ar e not aci d-pr oof ; do not t ouch t hem wi t h a
shop t owel t hat was used f or wi pi ng battery
el ect rol yt e. Repl ac e t hem if t hey c ome i n cont act wi t h
el ect rol yt e or somet hi ng si mi l ar .
When connect i ng or di sconnect i ng t he f uel f eed
hos es , f uel l i ne, and qui ck-connect f i t t i ngs, be car ef ul
not t o bend or t wi st t hem exc essi vel y. Repl ac e t hem if
t hey ar e damaged.
PZEV model shown
(cont ' d)
11-313
Fuel Li ne/Qui ck-Connect Fitting
Precautions (cont'd)
A di sc onnec t ed qui ck-connect fi tti ng c an be
r ec onnec t ed, but the ret ai ner on t he mat i ng l i ne cannot
be r eused onc e it has been r emoved f r om t he l i ne.
Repl ac e t he ret ai ner when:
@ r epl aci ng t he f uel rai l .
r epl aci ng t he fuel l i ne.
r epl aci ng t he f uel pump.
r epl aci ng t he f uel fi lter.
r epl aci ng t he EVAP cani st er .
r epl aci ng t he f uel fi ll pi pe.
r epl aci ng t he f uel t ank.
it has been r emoved f r om t he l i ne.
it i s damaged.
Us e t he s ame manuf act ur er r et ai ner and t he s ame si ze
when t he r epl aci ng t he ret ai ner.
Locat i on
Manufacturer
Ret ai ner
col or
Li ne
di amet er
A Tokai Bl ue
gr een
0.3 i n
(8 mm)
B Tokai Gr een 0.2 i n
(6.3 mm)
C Sanoh Whi t e 0.4 in
(9.5 mm)
D Sanoh Whi t e 0.5 in
(12 mm)
E Tokai Nat ural 0.5 i n
(12 mm)
F( PZEV
model )
Tokai Gr een 1.1 i n
(28.6 mm)
Fuel Li ne/Qui ck-Connect Fi tti ng
Remowal
NOTE: Bef or e you wor k on t he f uel l i nes and f i t t i ngs,
r ead t he Fuel Li ne/Qui ck-Connect Fi tti ng Pr ecaut i ons
(see page 11-313).
1. If equi pped, r emove t he qui ck-connect fi tti ng c over
f r om t he f uel l i ne. Rai se t he c over (A) f r om t he f uel l i ne
(B), and r emove it as shown.
2. Rel i eve t he f uel pr essur e (see page 11 -306).
3. Chec k t he f uel qui ck-connect f i t t i ngs (A) f or di rt , and
c l ean t hem if needed.
11-314
4. Pl ace a rag or shop t owel over t he qui ck-connect
fi tti ng. Hol d t he connect or (A) wi t h one hand, and
squeeze t he ret ai ner t abs (B) wi t h t he ot her hand to
r el ease t hem f r om t he l ocki ng t abs (C). Pull t he
connect or off.
NOTE:
Be car ef ul not to damage t he li ne (D) or ot her part s.
Do not use t ool s.
If t he connect or does not move, keep t he ret ai ner
r emoved, t he ret ai ner must be r epl aced wi t h a new
(cont' d)
11-315
-Fuel Suppl f Syst em
Removal (cont'd)
6. To pr event damage and keep f or ei gn mat t er out ,
c over t he di sc onnec t ed c onnec t or and l i ne ends wi t h
pl ast i c bags (A).
NOTE: The r et ai ner cannot be r eused onc e it has been
r emoved f r om t he l i ne.
Repl ac e t he r et ai ner when:
r epl aci ng t he f uel r ai l .
r epl aci ng t he f uel l i ne.
r epl aci ng t he f uel fi ll pi pe.
r epl aci ng t he f uel t ank.
it has been r emoved f r om t he l i ne.
9 it i s damaged.
Fuel Line/Quick-Connect Fitting
Installation
NOTE: Bef or e you wor k on t he f uel l i nes and f i t t i ngs,
r ead t he Fuel Li ne/Qui c k-Connec t Fi tti ng Pr ecaut i ons
(see page 11-313).
1. Chec k t he cont act ar ea (A) of t he li ne (B) f or di rt or
damage, and c l ean it if needed.
2. Insert a new ret ai ner (A) i nto t he connect or (B) if t he
r et ai ner i s damaged, or after:
r epl aci ng t he f uel rai l .
r epl aci ng t he f uel l i ne.
r epl aci ng t he f uel fill pi pe.
r epl aci ng t he f uel tank.
r emovi ng t he ret ai ner f r om t he l i ne.
Us e t he s ame manuf act ur er ret ai ner and t he s ame
si ze when t he r epl aci ng t he ret ai ner (see page 11-314).
11-316
f uel Suppl y S f st em
Fuel Line/Quick-Connect Fitting Installation (cont'd)
4. Al i gn t he qui ck-connect fi tti ngs wi t h t he li ne (A), and
al i gn t he ret ai ner l ocki ng t abs (B) wi t h t he connect or
gr ooves (C). Then pr ess t he qui ck-connect fi tti ngs
ont o t he li ne unti l both ret ai ner t abs lock wi t h a
. cl i cki ng sound.
NOTE: If it i s har d to c onnec t put a smal l amount of
new engi ne oi l on t he l i ne end.
Connec t i on wi t h new r et ai ner
Connec t i on wi t h new r et ai ner : Fuel f i l l neck t ube
(PZEV model )
C
Connec t i on t o new f uel l i ne
Sanoh-made
Tokai -made
Connec t i on t o new f uel l i ne: Fuel fi ll nec k t ube
(PZEV model )
11-318
Reconnect eon t o exi st i ng r et ai ner 5. When you r econnect t he connect or wi th t he ol d
ret ai ner, make sur e t he connect i on i s sec ur e and t he
t abs (A) ar e f i r ml y l ocked i nto pl ace; check vi sual l y
and al so by pul l i ng t he connect or (B). When you
r epl ace t he f uel li ne wi t h a new one, make sur e you
r emove t he ri ng pull (C) upwar ds after you conf i r m
t he connect i on i s sec ur e.
NOTE: Bef or e you r emove t he ri ng pul l , make sur e t he
f uel li ne connect i on i s sec ur e. If t he connect i on i s not
sec ur e, t he ri ng pull coul d break when you try to
r emove it.
Connec t i on t o new f uel l i ne
C
(cont' d)
11-319
Installation (cont'd)
6. Rec onnec t t he negat i ve c abl e to t he bat t ery, and t ur n
t he i gni ti on swi t c h to ON (11) (but do not oper at e t he
st art er mot or). The f uel pump r uns for about 2
s ec onds , and f uel pr essur e r i ses. Repeat t hi s t wo or
t hr ee t i mes, t hen make sur e t her e are no f uel l eaks,
7. If equi pped, i nst al l t he qui ck-connect fi tti ng c over . Set
t he gr oove of t he c over (A) on t he f uel li ne (B) as
s hown, t hen i nst al l it. Make sur e t he cover i s f i r ml y
l ocked in pl ace.
Fuel Tank Uni t Removal and
Installati on
Fuel Sender Wr enc h 07AAA-S0XA100
Removal
1. Rel i eve the f uel pr essur e (see page 11-306).
2. Remove t he f uel fill c ap.
4. Remove t he ac c es s panel (A) f r om t he f l oor.
5. Di sc onnec t t he f uel t ank uni t 4P connect or (B).
6. Di sc onnec t t he qui ck-connect fi tti ng (C) f r om t he f uel
t ank uni t.
7. Usi ng t he spec i al t ool , l oosen t he l ocknut (A).
07AAA-S0XA100
11-320
(cont' d)
11-321
fuel Suppl f S f stem
Fuel Tank Unit Removal and Installation (cont'd)
2. Tr ansf er t he base gasket (A) f r om t he f uel t ank uni t to
t he f uel t ank.
3. Al i gn t he mar ks (B) on t he f uel t ank and f uel t ank uni t ,
t hen i nser t t he f uel t ank uni t i nto t he f uel t ank unti l t he
f uel t ank uni t r est s on t op of t he base gasket .
NOTE: To avoi d a f uel l eak, c hec k t he base gasket ,
vi sual l y or by hand, to make sur e it i s not pi nc hed.
4. Ti ght en a new l ocknut (A) by hand wi t h a new l ocknut
plate (B).
NOTE: Bef or e t i ght eni ng, al i gn t he mar k (C) on t he
l ocknut t o t he st art of t he t hr ead (D).
5. Usi ng t he spec i al t ool , t i ght en t he l ocknut t o t he
speci f i ed t or que.
NOTE:
Af t er t i ght eni ng, make sur e t he mar ks (A) ar e sti ll
al i gned.
After i nst al l at i on, check t he base gasket , vi sual l y or
by hand, t o make sur e it i s not pi nc hed.
6. Connec t t he f uel t ank uni t 4P connect or , t hen c onnec t
t he qui ck-connect fi tti ng.
7. Rec onnec t t he negat i ve cabl e t o t he bat t ery, and t ur n
t he i gni ti on swi t c h to ON (II) (but do not oper at e t he
st art er mot or). The f uel pump r uns f or about 2
s ec onds , and f uel pr essur e r i ses. Repeat t hi s t wo or
t hr ee t i mes, t hen make sur e t her e ar e no f uel l eaks.
8. Inst al l t he ac c es s panel .
9. Install t he rear seat c ushi on.
10. Inst al l t he f uel fi ll c ap.
11-322
Fuel Pulsation Damper
Replacement
PZEV model
3. Pl ace a wr enc h (A) on t he f uel rai l (B).
4. Pl ace a wr enc h (C) on t he f uel pul sat i on damper (D),
and l oosen i t
5. Remove t he f uel pul sat i on damper (A) f r om t he f uel
rai l (B).
A
22 N m
(2.2 kgf -m,
16 Ibf f t )
6. Install t he part s in t he r ever se or der of r emoval wi t h a
new seal i ng was her (C).
7. Tur n t he i gni ti on swi t ch to ON (II), but do not oper at e
t he st art er mot or. After t he f uel pump r uns f or about
2 sec onds, and t he f uel pr essur e r i ses. Repeat t hi s t wo
or t hree t i mes, t hen make sur e t her e ar e no f uel l eaks.
Fuel Pressure Regulator
Replacement
2. Remove t he r eser voi r (A).
3. Remove the bracket (B).
4. Remove t he f uel pr essur e regul at or (C).
5. Inst al l t he part s i n t he r ever se or der of r emoval wi t h
new O-r i ngs (D) and a new bracket . When i nst al l i ng
t he f uel tank uni t , al i gn t he mar ks on t he uni t and t he
f uel tank (see page 11-321).
NOTE:
Coat t he O-r i ngs wi t h cl ean engi ne oi l ; do not use
any ot her oi l s or f l ui ds,
o Do not pi nch t he O-r i ngs dur i ng i nst al l at i on.
Us e all t he new part s suppl i ed in t he pr essur e
regul at or r epl acement kit.
11-323
Fuel Suppl y S f st em
Fuel Filter Replacement
The f uel fi lter shoul d be r epl aced whenever t he f uel
pr essur e dr ops bel ow t he speci f i ed val ue (see page
11-308), after maki ng sur e that t he f uel pump and t he
f uel pr essur e regul at or ar e OK.
2. Remove t he f uel fi lter set (A).
3. Chec k t hese i t ems bef ore i nst al l i ng t he f uel t ank uni t
When connect i ng t he wi r e har ness (B), make sur e
t he connect i on i s sec ur e and t he c onnec t or s ar e
f i r ml y l ocked i nto pl ace.
When i nst al l i ng t he f uel gauge sendi ng uni t (C),
make sur e t he connect i on i s sec ur e and t he
connect or i s f i rml y l ocked i nto pl ace. Be car ef ul not
to bend or t wi st it exc essi vel y.
new O-r i ngs (D) and a new bracket (E). When
i nst al l i ng t he f uel t ank uni t , al i gn t he mar ks on t he uni t
and t he f uel t ank (see page 11-321).
NOTE:
Coat t he O-r i ngs wi t h c l ean engi ne oi l ; do not use
any ot her oi l or f l ui d.
Do not pi nch t he O-r i ngs dur i ng i nst al l at i on.
Us e al l t he new part s suppl i ed i n t he f uel fi lter
r epl acement kit.
Fuel Pump/Fuel Gauge Sendi ng
Unit Replacement
1. Remove t he f uel tank uni t (see page 11 -320).
2. Remove t he f uel l evel sensor (fuel gauge sendi ng
uni t) (A) f r om t he f uel t ank uni t (B).
3. Check t hese i t ems bef ore i nst al l i ng t he f uel t ank uni t:
When connect i ng t he wi r e har ness, make sur e t he
connect i on i s sec ur e and t he connect or (C) i s f i r ml y
l ocked into pl ace.
When i nst al l i ng t he f uel gauge sendi ng uni t , make
sur e t he connect i on i s sec ur e. Be car ef ul not to
bend or t wi st it exc essi vel y.
4. Install t he part s in t he r ever se or der of r emoval . When
i nst al l i ng t he f uel tank uni t , al i gn t he mar ks on t he uni t
and t he f uel t ank (see page 11 -321).
11 "324
Fuel Tank Repl acement
1. Drai n t he f uel t ank (see page 11 -309).
2. Rei nst al l t he f uel t ank uni t wi t hout connect i ng t he fuel
t ank uni t 4P connect or and t he qui ck-connect fi tti ng
(see page 11-321).
3. Remove t he f uel fi ll pi pe c over (see page 11-327).
4. Di sconnect t he qui ck-connect fi tti ngs (A) (see page
11-314) (and on all model s except PZEV, di sc onnec t
t he f uel fill t ube (B) f r om t he f uel fill pi pe).
Sl i de back t he c l amps, t hen t wi st t he hose as you pull
t o avoi d damagi ng t hem.
All models except PZEV
6. Di sc onnec t t he hose (A) f r om t he EVAP cani st er .
7. Remove t he hose (B) f r om t he c l amp (C).
NOTE: Be car ef ul not to damage t he hose.
8. Remove t he exhaust pi pe (see page 9-9).
9. Remove t he ri ght si de mi ddl e f l oor under c over (see
page 20-293).
(cont ' d)
11-325
Fuel Tank Replacement (cont' d)
10. Remove t he f uel t ank prot ect or (A).
B
11. Remove t he ri ght parki ng brake cabl e mount i ng bol t s (see page 19-42).
12. Pl ace a j ack or ot her suppor t under t he fuel tank (B).
13. Remove t he st r ap bol t s (C) and t he st r aps (D).
14. Remove t he f uel tank.
NOTE:
New fuel t anks have a ri ng pull (E) at t he f uel vapor hose connect or (F). When you connect t he hose and conf i r m that
t he connect i on i s sec ur e, r emove t he ri ng pull by pul l i ng it down.
Bef ore connect i ng t he f uel fill pi pe and t he qui ck-connect f i t t i ng, check f or di rt, and c l ean t hem if needed, t aki ng
c ar e not to damage t he f uel fill pi pe and ot her par t s.
When i nst al l i ng t he f uel t ank prot ect or, make sur e to i nser t it into t he cl i p (G) in t he di rect i on shown.
11-326
Fuel Fill Pipe Removal /Inst al l at i on
1. Drai n t he f uel t ank (see page 11-309).
3. Remove t he left r ear wheel .
4. Remove t he f uel fill pi pe c over (A).
5. Di sconnect t he qui ck-connect f i t t i ngs (A) (see-page
.1.1-314) (and on all model s except PZEV, di sc onnec t
t he f uel fi ll t ube (B) f r om t he f uel fi ll pi pe. Sl i de back
t he c l amp, t hen t wi st t he hose as you pul l t o avoi d
damagi ng t hem).
PZEV model
S. Remove t he f uel fi ll pi pe (C).
7. Inst al l t he par t s i n t he r ever se or der of r emoval .
NOTE; Bef ore connect i ng t he f uel fi ll pi pe and
qui ck-connect f i t t i ng, c hec k f or di rt , and c l ean it if
needed, t aki ng c ar e not to damage t he f uel fi ll pi pe
and ot her par t s.
8. After i nst al l i ng t he par t s, measur e t he c l ear anc e (A)
bet ween t he f uel f i l l er pi pe c over (B) and t he left rear
damper spr i ng out l i ne (C) at a poi nt 5.9 i n (150 mm) to
8.2 in (210 mm) f r om t he left r ear damper spr i ng base
(D). Make sur e t he c l ear anc e (A) i s mor e t han 0.81 i n
(20.7 mm).
NOTE: To measur e t he c l ear anc e, r ai se t he vehi c l e on
t he lift.
11-327
Fuel Gauge Sending Unit Test
NOTE: For t he f uel gauge syst em ci r cui t di agr am, ref er
to t he Gauges Ci r cui t Di agr am (see page 22-336).
1. Chec k t he No. 5 METER (7.5 A) f use i n t he dr i ver ' s
under -dash f use/r el ay box bef or e t est i ng.
2. Chec k f or body el ect ri cal syst em DTCs .
If no pr obl em i s f ound, go to st ep 3.
If DTC B1175 or B1176 i s i ndi cat ed, go to t he
5. Remove t he ac c es s panel (A) f r om t he f l oor.
6. Di sc onnec t t he f uel tank uni t 4P c onnec t or (B).
7. Measur e t he vol t age bet ween f uel t ank uni t 4P
c onnec t or t er mi nal s No. 1 and No. 3 wi t h t he i gni t i on
swi t c h t ur ned to ON (II). Ther e shoul d be battery
vol t age.
If t he vol t age i s OK , go to st ep 8.
If t he vol t age i s not as spec i f i ed, c hec k for:
- a shor t i n t he PUR wi r e to gr ound.
- an open i n t he PUR or ORN wi r e.
PUR
1 2
3 4
ORN
9. Remove t he f uel t ank uni t f r om t he f uel t ank (see page
11-320).
11-328
Low Fuel Indicator Test
10. Measur e t he r esi st ance bet ween f uel tank uni t 4P
connect or t er mi nal s No. 1 and No. 3 wi t h t he float at E
(EMPTY), L OW (LOW FUEL INDICATOR), 1/2 (HALF
FUL L ), and F (FULL) posi t i ons.
If you do not get t he f ol l owi ng r eadi ngs, repl ace t he
f uel gauge sendi ng uni t (see page 11-324).
Fl oat
Posi t i on
F
6.1 in
(155.2 mm)
1/2
3.8 in
(97.6 mm)
LOW
1.6 in
(40.8 mm)
E
0.6 in
(15.9 mm)
Resistance
(0)
19 to 21 196.7 to
206.7
503.8 to
589.4
772 to
788
Terminal side of
male terminals
11 Reconnect t he f uel tank unit 4P connect or .
12 Remove t he No. 15 BACK UP (10 A) f use f rom t he
under -hood f use/r el ay box for at l east 10 sec onds,
t hen rei nst al l it.
14. Chec k that t he poi nt er of t he f uel gauge i ndi cat es F
wi t h t he float at F.
If t he poi nt er of t he fuel gauge does not i ndi cat e F,
r epl ace t he gauge cont rol modul e.
If t he gauge i s OK, t he t est i s compl et e.
NOTE:
The poi nter of t he fuel gauge ret urns to t he bottom
of t he gauge di al when t he i gni ti on swi t ch i s t ur ned
to ACC (I) or L OCK (0), r egar dl ess of t he f uel l evel .
Remove t he No. 15 BACK UP (10 A) f use f r om t he
under -hood f use/r el ay box f or at l east 10 sec onds
after compl et i ng t r oubl eshoot i ng, ot her wi se it may
take up to 20 mi nut es for t he f uel gauge to i ndi cat e
t he correct f uel l evel .
1. Do t he gauge sel f -di agnost i c t est (see page 22-332).
If t he l ow f uel i ndi cat or f l ashes, go t o st ep 2.
If t he l ow f uel i ndi cat or does not f l ash, r epl ace t he
gauge cont rol modul e (see page 22-351).
2. Chec k f or body el ect r i cal syst em DTCs .
If any DTCs ar e i ndi cat ed, do t he i ndi cat ed DTCs
If no DTCs are i ndi cat ed, go to st ep 3.
3. Do t he f uel gauge sendi ng uni t t est (see page 11-328).
11-329
Intake Ai r Syst em
THROTTLE BODY
Test page 11-331
Cleaning, page 11-332
Removal/Installation, page 11-335
Disassembly/Reassembly, page 11-336
11-330
Throttle Body Test
Car bon Accumul at i on Check
NOTE: If t he mal f unct i on i ndi cat or l amp (MIL) has been
report ed on, c hec k f or di agnost i c t r oubl e c odes (DTCs).
1. Connec t t he HDS to t he data link connect or (DLC) (A)
5. Chec k t he REL TP S ENS OR in t he DATA L I ST wi t h t he
HDS. The r eadi ng shoul d be bel ow 2.46 per cent . If it i s
not, cl ean t he throttle body (see page 11-332).
Thr ot t l e Posi t i on Lear ni ng Chec k
NOTE: If t he mal f unct i on i ndi cat or l amp (MIL) has been
r epor t ed on, check f or di agnost i c t r oubl e c odes (DTCs).
1. Connec t t he HDS t o t he dat a link connect or (DLC) (A)
3. Make sur e t he HDS c ommuni c at es wi th t he
5. Do t he TP POSITION CHECK in t he ETCS TES T. If
needed, cl ean t he throttle body (see page 11-332).
11-331
Ai r Cl eaner Removal /Inst al l at i on
L AI mm
Do n o t i n s e r t : your f i nger s into t he i nst al l ed t h r o v e
body when you t urn t he i gni ti on swi t ch to ON (II) or
whi l e t he i gni t i on swi t ch i s i n ON (II). If you do, you
act i vat ed.
1. Chec k f or damage to t he ai r c l eaner el ement . If t he ai r
c l eaner el ement i s damaged, r epl ace it (see page
11-333).
2. Remove t he throttle body (see page 11-335).
3. Cl ean off t he car bon f r om t he throttle val ve and i nsi de
t he throttle body wi t h a paper t owel soaked in throttle
plate c l eaner .
NOTE:
Remove t he throttle body to cl ean it.
Be car ef ul not to pi nch your f i nger s.
To avoi d r emovi ng t he mol ybdenum coat i ng, do
not c l ean t he bear i ng ar ea of t he throttle shaf t (A).
Do not spr ay throttle plate c l eaner di rect l y on t he
throttle body.
Us e Honda genui ne throttle plate cl eaner .
4. Inst al l t he throttle body (see page 11-335).
5. Reset t he ECM/ PCM wi t h t he HDS (see page 11-4).
6. Tur n t he i gni t i on swi t c h to ON (II), and wai t 2 sec onds.
11-293).
1. Di sc onnec t t he MAF sensor /IAT sensor connect or (A).
C
9.8 N m
(1.0 kgf-m, 7.2 I bfft)
2. Remove t he har ness c l amps (B) and t he bol t s (C).
3. Loosen t he band (D), t hen r emove t he ai r c l eaner
housi ng (E).
NOTE: When t or quei ng t he s c r ew of t he hose band
(F), al i gn t he edge of t he hose band (G) wi t h t he mark
(H) pai nt ed on t he hose band.
11 "332
Air Cleaner Element
Inspection/Replacement -
1. Open t he ai r cl eaner housi ng cover (A).
A
2. Remove t he ai r c l eaner el ement (B) f r om t he ai r
cl eaner housi ng (C).
3. Check t he ai r c l eaner el ement f or damage or cl oggi ng.
If it i s damaged or c l ogged, r epl ace it.
NOTE: Do not use c ompr essed ai r to c l ean t he ai r
c l eaner el ement .
4. Cl ean and r emove any debr i s f r om i nsi de t he ai r
cl eaner .
Intake Air Resonator
2. Remove t he ai r c l eaner (see page 11-332).
3. Remove t he battery base (A)
4. Remove t he f ront gri lle c over .
ai r
5. Install t he part s i n t he r ever se or der of r emoval .
If you di d not r epl ace t he ai r cl eaner el ement , t hi s
pr ocedur e i s compl et e.
If t he mai nt enance mi nder r equi r ed ai r c l eaner
r epl acement , r eset t he mai nt enance mi nder (see
page 3-7).
If t he i dle speed f l uct uat es, do t he i dle speed
i nspect i on (see page 11-292).
5. Remove t he wat er separ at or (A) and t he i ntake
duct (B).
6. Remove t he front bumper (see page 20-255).
(cont' d)
11-333
Intake Ai r Syst em
intake Air Resonator Removal /Inst al l at i on (cont'd)
7. Remove t he i ntake ai r r esonat or (A).
9.8 N-m
(1.0 k gf m,
7.2 Ibf f t )
11-334
Throttle Body Removal/Installation
TIF"
7.0 nc: i r s er : yciv: ri ggers into t he i nst al l ed throttle body when you t urn t he i gni ti on swi t c h to ON (II) or whi l e t he
i gni ti on swi t ch i s in ON (II). If you do, you wi l l ser i ousl y i nj ure your f i nger s if t he throttle val ve i s act i vat ed.
NOTE: If you ar e repl aci ng or cl eani ng the throttle body, st art at st ep 1. If you ar e r emovi ng t he throttle body, st art at
st ep 4.
1. Connec t t he HDS to t he DL C whi l e t he engi ne i s st opped.
2. Sel ec t t he INSPECTION MENU on the HDS.
3. Do t he TP POSITION CHECK in t he ETCS TES T.
5. Remove t he i ntake ai r duct (A).
22 N-m
(2.2 k g f m, 16 Ibf-ft)
6. Di sconnect t he throttle body connect or (B).
7. Di sconnect and plug t he wat er bypass hoses (C).
8. Remove t he throttle body (D).
9. Install t he part s in t he r ever se or der of r emoval wi t h a new gasket (E).
NOTE: When t or quei ng t he sc r ew of t he hose band (F), al i gn t he edge of t he hose band (G) wi t h t he mark (H) pai nt ed
on t he hose band.
Af t er i nst al l i ng t he t hrot t l e body, do t hese i t ems:
Refi ll t he radi at or wi t h engi ne cool ant (see page 10-6).
Do t he ECM/ PCM i dle l earn pr ocedur e (see page 11-293).
11 ""335
Intake Ai r Syst em
Throt t l e Body Di sassembl y/Reassembl y
THROTTL t BODY
11-336
Cat al yt i c Converter Syst em
ENGI NE CONTROL MODUL E ( ECM) /
POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODUL E (PCM)
Update, page 11-203
WARM UP THREE WAY
CATAL YTI C CONVERTER
11-337
Cat al yt i c Convert er Syst em
DTC Troubleshooting
DTC P0420: Cat al yst Syst em Ef f i ci ency Bel ow
Thr eshol d
NOTE:
If s ome of t he DTCs l i st ed bel ow ar e st or ed at t he
s ame t i me as DTC P0420, t r oubl eshoot t hem f i rst , t hen
r echeck f or DTC P0420.
P0137, P0138: Sec ondar y H02S (Sensor 2)
P0141: Sec ondar y H02S (Sensor 2) heat er
P0300: Random mi sf i r e
P0301- P0304: No. 1, No. 2, No. 3, or No. 4 cyl i nder
mi sf i r e det ect ed
Poor qual i t y f uel may c aus e t hi s DTC.
158 F (70 C)
Vehi cl e speed bet ween 45 75 mph (72 120 km/h)
f or 5 mi nut es or mor e wi t h c r ui se cont rol set
f or 10 s ec onds , t hen decel er at e (wi th t he throttle
f ully c l osed). Repeat t hi s t hr ee or mor e t i mes
Mai nt ai n t he vehi cl e speed at 55 mph (88 km/h) f or
5 mi nut es or mor e wi t h c r ui se cont rol set
NO-l f t he sc r een i ndi cat es PA S S E D, i ntermi ttent
i ndi cat es EXECUTI NG, keep dr i vi ng unti l a r esul t
or NOT COMPL ETED, go to st ep 4 and r echeck.
7. Repl ac e t he WU-TWC (see page 11-339).
11-293).
11. Test -dr i ve f or about 10 mi nut es, var yi ng t he vehi cl e
speed.
12. Chec k t he CATA MONITOR CONDITION i n t he DATA
Is the condition OK ?
158 F (70 C)
f or 10 sec onds, t hen decel er at e (wi th t he throttle
f ul l y c l osed). Repeat t hi s t hree or mor e t i mes.
Mai nt ai n t he vehi cl e speed at 55 mph (88 km/h) f or
5 mi nut es or mor e wi t h c r ui se cont rol set
' YE S - Ch ec k t he f uel qual i t y, t hen go to st ep 1.
NO- Go to st ep 15.
NO-l f t he sc r een i ndi cat es FAIL ED, check t he f uel
qual i t y, t hen go to st ep 1. If t he sc r een i ndi cat es
11 -338
War m Up TWC Removal /Inst al l at i on
2. Remove t he sec ondar y H02S (Sensor 2) (see page
11-197).
3. Remove t he bol t s (A).
33 Ibfft)
4. Remove t he WU-TWC bracket (B).
5. Lower t he vehi c l e.
6. Remove t he f r ame br ace (see page 20-306).
7. Remove t he A/ F sensor (Sensor 1) (see page 11-197).
8. Remove t he upper conver t er c over (A).
9. Remove t he WU- TWC (B) and t he gasket s (C).
10. Remove t he conver t er c over (A).
new gasket s.
11-339
Cat al yt i c Converter Syst em
Under-floor TWC Removal /Inst al l at i on
2. Remove t he exhaust pi pe hanger s (A).
C
3. Remove t he under -f l oor TWC (B).
4. Inst al l t he part s in t he r ever se or der of r emoval wi t h
new gasket s (C) and new sel f -l ocki ng nut s (D).
11-340
PCW S f st em
PCVVA L VE
11-341
PCV Syst em
PCV Val ve Inspect i on PCV Val ve Repl acement
1. Chec k t he PCV val ve (A), hoses (B), and c onnec t i ons
f or l eaks or r est r i ct i ons.
- p - f
<L. I UI C , I i curve; oui i <o u I C I o i o a oi i ^rvi i O<J HJ I I U 11 ut i 1.110
PCV val ve when t he hose bet ween t he PCV val ve and
i nt ake mani f ol d i s li ghtly pi nched (A) wi t h your f i nger s
or pl i er s.
If t her e i s no cl i cki ng s ound, c hec k t he PCV val ve
was her f or c r ac ks or damage. If t he was her i s OK ,
r epl ace t he PCV val ve and r echeck.
1. Di sconnect t he PCV hose.
2. Remove t he PCV val ve (A).
A
45 N m
(4.6 kgfnv
new was her (B).
11-342
EVAP Syst em
POWERTRA1N CONTROL MODUL E (PCM)
Update, page 11-203
Replacement, page 11 -204
FUEL TANK VAPOR CONTROL VA L VE
EVAPORATI VE EMI S S I ON CANI STER VENT
(EVAP) CANI S TER SHUT VAL VE
Replacement, page 11-369 Replacement, page 11-371
11-343
EAP S f st em
DTC Troubleshooting
DTC P0443: EVAP Cani st er Purge Val ve Ci rcui t
Malfuncti on
Vac uum Pump/ Gauge, 0 - 3 0 In.Hg, Snap-on YA4000A
or equi val ent c ommer c i al l y avai l abl e
1 Tur n t he i gni t i on swi t c h to ON (II).
wi t hout l oad (A/T in P or N, M/T in neut ral ) unti l t he
EVAP c ani st er pur ge val ve and t he E CM/ PCM.
5. Tur n t he i gni t i on swi t c h to L OCK (0), and al l ow t he
engi ne to cool t o bel ow 131 F (55 C).
6. Di sc onnec t t he v ac uum hose (A) f r om t he pur ge val ve
(B) in t he engi ne c ompar t ment , and c onnec t a v ac uum
pump/gauge, 030 i n.Hg, to t he hose.
B
Is t here vacuum?
NO- Go to st ep 14.
9. Di sc onnec t t he EVAP cani st er pur ge val ve 2P
connect or .
10. Chec k f or cont i nui t y bet ween EVAP cani st er pur ge
EVAP CANI S TER PURGE VA L VE 2P CONNECTOR
1 2
PCS ( YEL / BL U)
NO- Go to st ep 23.
13. Chec k f or cont i nui t y bet ween EVAP c ani st er pur ge
EVAP CANI S TER PURGf c VA L VE 2P CONNECTOR
1 2
PCS ( YEL / BL U)
YES - Repai r shor t i n t he wi r e bet ween t he EVAP
c ani st er purge val ve and t he ECM/ PCM (B3), t hen go
t o st ep 24.
NO- Go to st ep 30.
11-344
15. Di sc onnec t t he EVAP cani st er pur ge val ve 2P
connect or .
17. Measur e t he vol t age bet ween EVAP cani st er pur ge
IG1 ( BL K / YEL )
NO-Repai r open i n t he wi r e bet ween t he EVAP
c ani st er pur ge val ve and t he No. 7 A CG (15 A) f use i n
t he dr i ver ' s under -dash f use/r el ay box, t hen go t o st ep
24.
t er mi nal B3 and EVAP cani st er pur ge val ve 2P
1
Wire side of female terminals PCS ( YEL / BL U)
PCS ( YEL / BL U)
22
29
12
23
24
14fl5
S I
32J33
16
34
17 18 19
35|36J/
40| > V i 431/145146147
21
27
28
DZL
c ani st er purge val ve and t he ECM/ PCM (B3), t hen go
t o st ep 24.
22. At t he val ve si de, measur e t he r esi st anc e bet ween
EVAP cani st er pur ge val ve 2P connect or t er mi nal s
No. 1 and No. 2.
1
IG1 I | PCS
Is there about 2326 Q at room temperature?
NO- Go to st ep 23.
(cont ' d)
11-345
EVAP S f st em
23. Repl ac e t he EVAP c ani st er pur ge val ve (see page
11-371).
11-293).
t he EVAP cani st er pur ge val ve and t he ECM/ PCM,
NO- Go to st ep 29.
YES-Tr oubl eshoot i ng i s c ompl et e. If any ot her
c onnec t i ons or l oose t er mi nal s at t he EVAP c ani st er
pur ge val ve and t he ECM/ PCM, t hen go to st ep 1. If t he
sc r een i ndi cat es EXECUTI NG, OUT OF CONDITION,
or NOT COMPL ETED, keep i dl i ng unti l a r esul t c omes
on.
t he EVAP c ani st er pur ge val ve and t he ECM/ PCM. If
NO- Go to st ep 34.
go t o t he i ndi cat ed DTCs troubleshooti ng.SI
pur ge val ve and t he ECM/ PCM. If t he ECM/ PCM was
page 11-7), t hen go t o st ep 32. If t he ECM/ PCM was
subst i t ut ed, go t o st ep 1. If t he sc r een i ndi cat es
EXECUTI NG, OUT OF CONDITION, or NOT
uui VIPLc i t u , K e e p i dl i ng unti l a r esul t c omes on.
11 -346
DTC P0451: FTP Sensor Ci rcui t
Range/Perf ormance Probl em
NOTE:
t r oubl eshoot DTC P2422 f i rst , t hen recheck f or DTC
P0451.
3. St art t he engi ne, and let it i dle f or 1 mi nut e.
connect i ons or l oose t er mi nal s at t he FTP sensor and
6. Repl ace t he FTP sensor (see page 11-370).
11-293).
10. St art t he engi ne, and let it i dle f or 1 mi nut e.
t he FTP sensor and t he ECM/ PCM, t hen go to st ep 1.
NO- Go to st ep 12.
c onnec t i ons or l oose t er mi nal s at t he FTP sensor and
NOT COMPL ETED, keep i dli ng unti l a resul t c omes on.
11-347
EVAP Syst em
DTC P0452: FTP Sensor Ci rcui t Low Vol t age
4. Remove t he f uel fi ll c ap.
6. Check t he FTP S ENS OR in t he DATA L I ST wi t h t he
HDS.
Is about 7.3 kPa (-2.16 InHg, -55 mmHg), or 0.3 Vor
less indicst ed?
NO- Go t o st ep 7.
7. i nst al l t he f uel fi ll c ap.
Does the screen Indicate FAILED?
c onnec t i ons or l oose t er mi nal s at t he FTP s ens or and
11. Di sconnect t he FTP sensor 3P connect or .
13. Chec k t he FTP S ENS OR in t he DATA L I S T wi t h t he
HDS.
Is about - 7.3 kPa (-2.16 inHg, -55 mmHg), or 0.3 Vor
less indicated?
NO- Go to st ep 14.
14. Measur e t he vol t age bet ween FTP sensor 3P
FTP S E NS OR 3P CONNECTOR
I VCC6 (YEL )
Is there about 5 V?
NO- Go to st ep 15.
18. Connec t FTP sensor 3P c onnec t or t er mi nal No. 1 to
VCC6 (YEL )
J UMPER WI RE
11-348
VCC6 (YEL )
(A20) and t he FTP sensor , t hen go to st ep 26.
23. Chec k f or cont i nui t y bet ween FTP sensor 3P
FTP S ENS OR 3P CONNECTOR
FTP (LT GRN)
NO- Go to st ep 32.
25. Repl ac e t he FTP sensor (see page 11-370).
. 27. Tur n t he i gni ti on swi t ch to ON (II).
11-293).
t he FTP sensor and t he ECM/ PCM, t hen go t o st ep 1.
NO- Go to st ep 31.
NOT COMPL ETED, keep i dl i ng unti l a r esul t c omes on.
is DTC P0452 indicated?
t he FTP sensor and t he ECM/ PCM. If t he ECM/ PCM
NO- Go to st ep 36.
(cont' d)
11-349
EVAP S f st em
go t o st ep 1. if t he sc r een i ndi cat es NOT COMPL ETED,
DTC P0453: FTP Sensor Ci rcui t High Vol t age
6. Chec k t he FTP S ENS OR in t he DATA L I ST wi t h t he
HDS.
is about 7.3 kPa (2.16 inHg, 55 mmHg), or 4.7 V or more
indicated?
NO- Go to st ep 7.
7. Install t he f uel fill c ap.
11. Di sc onnec t t he FTP sensor 3P connect or .
11-350
12. Connec t FTP sensor 3P connect or t er mi nal s No. 2 and
No. 3 wi t h a j umper wi r e.
FTP SENSOR 3P CONNECTOR
1
FTP (LT GRN) SGS (BLK)
J UMPER WI RE
14. Chec k t he FTP S ENS OR in t he DATA L I ST wi t h t he .
HDS.
Is about 7.3 kPa (2.16 InHg, 55 mmHg), or 4.7 Vor more
indicat ed?
NO- Go to st ep 26.
15. Measur e t he vol t age bet ween FTP sensor 3P
VCC6( YI L ) I ^ I SGb (BLK)
NO- Go to st ep 16.
19. Connec t FTP sensor 3P c onnec t or t er mi nal No. 3 to
A
SG6 (BLK)
J UMPER WI RE
SG6 (BLK)
J l l /
3 4 ! 5 1 6 I T ]
/
9 |1(
1
11
/ / /I
15 16 17 18 19 20 21
1
22 23 24 25
X
26 27 28
1
29 30
/
3 2 L / 34 3 5 3 6
/ /
| / | 4 1
421431441/146 L X A A
(cont' d)
11-351
EVAP S f st em
24. Connec t FTP s ens or 3P c onnec t or t er mi nal No. 2 to
F TP SENSOR 3P CONNECTOR
FTP ( L TGRN)
J UMPER WIRE
j 35| 36[ 7
4 2 | 4 3 | 4 4 M 4 6 p
FTP ( L TGRN)
(A27) and t he FTP s ens or , t hen go to st ep 28.
27. Repl ac e t he FTP sensor (see page 11-370).
11-293).
t he FTP sensor and t he ECM/ PCM, t hen go to st ep 1.
NO- Go to st ep 33.
NOT COMPL ETED, keep i dli ng unti l a resul t c omes on.
t he FTP sensor and t he ECM/ PCM. If t he ECM/ PCM
NO- Go to st ep 38.
11-352
38. Moni t or t he OBD S TATUS f or DTC P0453 in the DTCs
compl et e. If t he ECM/ PCM was subst i t ut ed, repl ace
t he ori gi nal ECM/ PCM (see page 11-204). If any other
keep i dli ng unti l a resul t c omes on.
DTC P0455: EVAP Syst em Large Leak
Detected
DTC P0456: EVAP Syst em Ver y Smal l Leak
Detected
NOTICE
The f uel syst em i s desi gned to al l ow speci f i ed maxi mum
vac uum and pr essur e condi t i ons. Do not devi at e f r om
t he vac uum and pr essur e t est s as i ndi cat ed in t hese
pr oc edur es. Ex c es s i v e pr essur e/vac uum woul d damage
t he EVAP c omponent s or c ause event ual fuel t ank
f ai l ur e.
Speci al Tool s Required
Vac uum Pump/Gauge, 0 - 3 0 i n.Hg, Snap-on YA4000A
or equi val ent , c ommer c i al l y avai l abl e
NOTE:
Fr esh fuel has a hi gher vol at i l i t y that wi l l cr eat e
gr eat er pr essur e/vac uum. The best condi t i on f or
t est i ng i s l ess t han a full tank of f r esh f uel . If possi bl e,
to assi st in leak det ect i on, add 1 gal l on of f r esh f uel to
t he t ank (as l ong as it wi l l not fill t he t ank), j ust bef ore
st art i ng t hese pr oc edur es.
1. Chec k t he f uel fill c ap (the cap must say TIGHTEN TO
CL ICK ). It shoul d t ur n 1/4 turn after i t' s ti ght, t hen it
cl i cks.
Is t he correct fuel fill cap inst alled and properly
t ight ened?
NO-Repl ac e or t i ght en t he c ap, t hen go to st ep 29.
(cont' d)
11-353
EVAP Syst em
2. Chec k t he f uel fill c ap seal (A) and t he f uel fi ll pi pe
mat i ng sur f ac e (B). Ver i f y that t he f uel fi ll c ap t et her
cor d (C) i s not caught under t he c ap.
C
Is the fuel fill cap seal missing or damaged, Is the fuel fill
pipe damaged, or Is the tether cord caught under the
cap?
YES - Repl ac e t he f uel fi ll c ap or t he f uel fi ll pi pe, t hen
go to st ep 29.
NO- Go to st ep 3.
5. Do t he EVAP FUNCTION TE S T in t he INSPECTION
Is the result OK?
FTP sensor , t he EVAP cani st er pur ge val ve, or t he
EVAP cani st er vent shut val ve, and t he ECM/ PCM. B
NO- Go to st ep 6.
7 Chec k f or a poor connect i on or damage at t he f uel
t ank vapor r eci r cul at i on t ube.
Is the tube OK ?
NO-
Repl ac e t he f uel t ank vapor reci rcul at i on t ube, t hen
go t o st ep 29.
If nec essar y, r epl ace t he f uel tank (see page 11 -325),
8. Di sc onnec t t he f uel t ank vapor reci rcul at i on t ube (A)
and f r esh ai r hose (B) f r om t he EVAP cani st er (C), and
pl ug t he EVAP cani st er port (D).
B
11 -354
9. Di sconnect t he vac uum hose (engi ne si de) (A) f r om
t he EVAP cani st er purge val ve (B) i n t he engi ne
compar t ment , and connect a v ac uum pump/gauge,
030 i n.Hg, to t he purge val ve as s hown.
A
11. Sel ec t EVAP PCS ON i n t he INSPECTION MENU wi t h
t he HDS.
12. Appl y vac uum to t he hose unti l t he FTP r eads 1.90 V
( - 0. 59 i nHg, - 15. 1 mmHg).
NOTE: Be car ef ul not t o exc eed t he v ac uum. If you do,
t he FTP sensor c an be damaged.
13. Sel ec t EVAP PCS OFF i n t he INSPECTION MENU wi t h
t he HDS, and di sconnect t he vac uum pump/gauge.
14. Moni tor t he FTP S ENS OR i n t he DATA L I ST f or
1 mi nut e wi t h t he HDS.
Does t he volt age increase more t han 0.2 V (0.1 inHg,
2.5 mmHg)?
NO- Go to st ep 20.
15. Rec onnec t t he vac uum hose (engi ne si de) to t he EVAP
cani st er purge val ve.
16. Di sc onnec t t he vac uum hose (EVAP c ani st er si de) (A)
f r om t he EVAP c ani st er purge val ve (B) i n t he engi ne
c ompar t ment , and connect t he v ac uum pump/gauge
t o t he vac uum hose as shown.
A
17. Appl y vac uum t o t he hose unti l t he FTP r eads 1.90 V
( - 0. 59 i nHg, 15.1 mmHg).
NOTE: Be car ef ul not to exc eed t he v ac uum. If you do,
18. Moni t or t he FTP S ENS OR in t he DATA L IST f or
I mi nut e wi t h t he HDS.
2.5 mmHg)?
NO-Repl ac e t he EVAP cani st er pur ge val ve (see page
I I -371), t hen go to st ep 28.
19. Chec k f or a l oose or damaged EVAP cani st er purge
l i ne bet ween t he EVAP cani st er and t he EVAP cani st er
purge val ve, or a l eaki ng EVAP cani st er .
Are t he line and t he EVAP canist er OK?
YES-Repl ac e t hese par t s, t hen go to st ep 28:
FTP sensor O-ri ng
EVAP cani st er vent shut val ve O-ri ng
EVAP cani st er
NO-Rec onnec t or repai r t he EVAP cani st er purge l i ne,
(cont' d)
11-355
EVAP Syst em
20. Rec onnec t t he f r esh ai r hose (A) to t he EVAP c ani st er
(B).
21. Rec onnec t t he vac uum hose (engi ne si de) to t he EVAP
cani st er purge val ve.
22. Di sconnect t he vac uum hose (EVAP cani st er si de) (A)
f r om t he EVAP cani st er pur ge val ve (B) i n t he engi ne
c ompar t ment , and connect t he v ac uum pump/gauge
to t he vac uum hose as shown.
A
23. Sel ec t EVAP CVS ON in t he INSPECTION MENU wi t h
t he HDS.
24. Appl y vac uum to t he hose unti l t he F TP r eads 1.90 V
( - 0. 59 i nHg, - 15. 1 mmHg).
NOTE: Be caref ul not to exc eed t he vac uum. If you do,
25. Moni t or t he FTP S ENS OR i n t he DATA L IST f or
1 mi nut e wi t h t he HDS.
2.5 mmHg)?
YES - Repl ac e t he EVAP cani st er vent shut val ve (see
NO- Go to st ep 26.
26. Sel ec t EVAP CVS OFF in t he INSPECTION MENU wi t h
t he HDS.
27. Chec k t hese part s f or l ooseness or damage:
Fuel fill pi pe
Fuel vapor ret urn pi pe
Are t he part s OK?
YES - Ch ec k t he f uel t ank uni t base gasket (see page
11-321), and check t he f uel t ank, t hen go to st ep 28.
NO-Repai r or r epl ace t he damaged par t s, t hen go to
st ep 28.
28. Rec onnec t all hoses and c onnec t or s.
11-293).
Is t he result OK?
YES-Tr oubl eshoot i ng i s c ompl et e. ! !
t he FTP sensor , t he EVAP cani st er purge val ve, t he
EVAP cani st er vent shut val ve, and t he ECM/ PCM,
11-356
DTC P0457: EVAP Syst em Leak Det ect ed/Fuel
Fi ll Cap Loose or Mi ssi ng
NOTE: Bef ore you t r oubl eshoot , r ecor d al l f r eeze data
1. Chec k t he f uel fi ll c ap (the c ap must s ay TIGHTEN TO
CL ICK ). It shoul d t ur n 1/4 t urn after i t ' s t i ght , t hen it
cl i cks.
Is t he correct fuel fill cap inst alled and properly
t ight ened?
2. Chec k t he f uel fi ll c ap seal (A) and t he f uel fi ll pi pe
mat i ng sur f ac e (B). Ver i f y t hat t he f uel fi ll c ap t et her
cor d (C) i s not caught under t he c ap.
Is t he fuel fill cap seal missing or damaged, is t he fuel fill
pipe damaged, or is t he t et her cord caught under t he
cap?
YES - Repl ac e t he f uel fi ll c ap or t he f uel fi ll pi pe, t hen
got o st ep 19.
NO- Go t o st ep 3.
5. Do t he EVAP FUNCTION TE S T i n t he INSPECTION
Is t he result OK?
FTP sensor or t he EVAP cani st er vent shut val ve and
t he ECM/ PCM.B
NO- Go to st ep 6.
7. Remove t he EVAP cani st er vent shut val ve f r om t he
EVAP cani st er (see page 11-371).
8. Connec t t he 2P connect or to t he EVAP cani st er vent
shut val ve.
t he HDS.
11. Check t he EVAP cani st er vent shut val ve (A)
oper at i on.
A
Does t he valve operat e?
YES - Ch ec k t he routi ng of t he EVAP cani st er vent
t ube, t hen go to st ep 18.
NO- Go to st ep 12.
(cont' d)
11-357
EVAP S f st em
13. Repl ac e t he EVAP c ani st er vent shut val ve (see page
11-371).
11-293).
Is t he result OK?
YES-Tr oubl eshoot i ng i s c o mpl et e.
t he FTP sensor , t he EVAP cani st er vept *
o ,
v e , 2nd
18. Rei nst al l t he EVAP c ani st er vent shut val ve.
11-293).
Is t he result OK?
YES-Tr oubl eshoot i ng i s compl et e.
t he FTP sensor , t he EVAP cani st er vent shut val ve, and
DTC P0496: EVAP System High Purge F low
Detected
2. Cl ear t he DTC wi t h t he HDS .
Is t he result OK?
FTP sensor , t he EVAP cani st er pur ge val ve.-t h* R' A P
c ani st er vent shut val ve, and t he E CM/ PCM.
NO- Go to st ep 4.
5. Repl ac e t he EVAP cani st er purge val ve (see page
11-371).
11-293).
Is t he result OK?
YES-Tr oubl eshoot i ng i s c o mpl et e.
t he FTP sensor , t he EVAP cani st er purge val ve, t he
EVAP cani st er vent shut val ve, and t he ECM/ PCM,
11-358
DTC P0497: EVAP Syst em Low Purge Fl ow
Detected
Vac uum/Pr essur e Gauge, 04 In.Hg, 07JAZ-001000B
Vac uum Pump/Gauge, 0 - 3 0 In.Hg, Snap-on YA4000A
1. Turn t he i gni ti on swi t ch to ON (II).
Is t he result OK?
EVAP cani st er purge val ve, t he FTP sensor , and t he
ECM/ PCM. H
NO-Go to st ep 4.
5. Chec k for poor c onnec t i ons, bl ockage, or damage i n
t he EVAP cani st er purge li ne bet ween t he throttle
body and t he EVAP cani st er .
Is t he line OK?
NO-Rec onnec t or repai r t he EVAP cani st er purge l i ne,
6. Di sc onnec t t he vac uum hose (A) f r om t he EVAP
c ani st er purge val ve (B).
A
B
(cont ' d)
11-359
EVAP Syst em
7. Di sconnect t he vac uum hose (A) f r om t he pur ge l i ne
(at t he EVAP c ani st er si de), t hen c onnec t a T-f i t t i ng
(B), a vac uum gauge, and a vac uum pump/gauge,
030 i n.Hg, to t he hose as s hown.
9. Appl y about 2 kPa (0.6 i nHg, 15 mmHg) of vac uum to
t he hose.
t he HDS.
Does t he vacuum release immediat ely?
NO- Go to st ep 11.
11. Sel ec t EVAP PCS OFF i n t he INSPECTION MENU wi t h
t he HDS.
c ani st er pur ge val ve (B). Connec t a T-fi tti ng (C), t he
vac uum gauge, and t he vac uum pump/gauge t o t he
EVAP c ani st er pur ge val ve as s hown.
B
13. Appl y about 2 kPa (0.6 i nHg, 15 mmHg) of vac uum to
t he hose.
t he HDS.
Does t he vacuum release immediat ely?
YE S - Ch ec k f or a bl ockage in t he EVAP cani st er pur ge
l i ne bet ween t he EVAP cani st er pur ge val ve and t he
EVAP cani st er , t hen go to st ep 24.
NO-Repl ac e t he EVAP c ani st er purge val ve (see page
11-360
15. Connec t t he vac uum pump/gauge to t he v ac uum
hose (A) as shown.
A
Is there vacuum?
NO-Chec k f or a bl ockage at t he EVAP purge li ne
bet ween t he throttle body and t he EVAP cani st er
purge val ve, t hen go to st ep 24.
18. Remove t he FTP sensor wi t h i ts connect or connect ed
(see page 11-370).
19. Connec t a T-fi tti ng (A) to t he v ac uum pump/gauge,
t hen c onnec t t he vac uum pump to t he FTP s ens or (B)
as s hown.
21. Chec k and r ecor d t he FTP S ENS OR readi ng in t he
22. Sl owl y appl y about 1.3 kPa (0.4 i nHg, 10 mmHg) of
vac uum to t he hose.
HDS.
Does t he value change?
YES - Ch ec k for debr i s or bl ockage at t he EVAP
cani st er port, t hen go to st ep 24.
NO-Repl ac e t he FTP sensor (see page 11-370), t hen
go to st ep 24.
11-293).
Is t he result OK?
YES-Tr oubl eshoot i ng i s c ompl et e.i l
t he EVAP c ani st er purge val ve, t he FTP sensor , and
11-361
EVAP Syst em
PTC Troubl eshoot i ng (cont' d)
i ^ p ; D4S 8: EVAP Canis t er Vent Sh ut Valve
Circuit L ow Volt age
NOTE: Bef ore you t roubl eshoot ,. r ecor d all f r eeze dat a
1. Tur n t he i gni t i on swi t c h to ON (ll).
NO- Go to s t e p 4.
t he HDS.
ftaO-lntermittent f ai l ur e, t he syst em i s OK at t hi s t i me.
Cneck f or poor c onnec t i ons or l oose t er mi nal s at t he
EVAP cani st er vent shut val ve and t he E CM/ PCM.
7. Di sconnect t he EVAP cani st er vent shut val ve 2P
connect or .
8. Tur n t he i gni ti on swi t ch to ON (ll).
9. Measur e t he vol t age bet ween EVAP cani st er vent shut
EVAP CANISTER VENT SHUT VALVE 2P CONNECTOR
1 2
+ BI WHT)
Is t here battery volt age?
c ani st er vent shut val ve and t he PGM-FI subr el ay,
11. At t he val ve si de, measur e t he r esi st ance bet ween
EVAP cani st er vent shut val ve 2P connect or t er mi nal s
No. 1 and No. 2.
EVAP CANISTER VENT SHUT VALVE 2P CONNECTOR
1 2
Is t here about 2530 0 at room t emperat ure?
NO- Go to st ep 17.
" VS V (RED)
YES - Repai r shor t in t he wi r e bet ween t he EVAP
cani st er vent shut val ve and t he ECM/ PCM (A11), t hen
go to st ep 18.
NO- Go to st ep 15.
15. Connec t EVAP cani st er vent shut val ve 2P connect or
EVAP CANI S TER VENT S HUT VA L VE 2P CONNECTOR
1
VS V (RED)
J UMPER WI RE
" VS V (RED)
J 1 7^
3 4 | 5 | 6 | 7
/
" 1101
1
11
/
/
/ | 15 1617 18 19 20 21
1
22 2324 25
><
262728
1
29 30
/
32|/ 343536
/
/
42
431441/| 46I X
AA
cani st er vent shut val ve and t he ECM/ PCM (A11), t hen
got o st ep 18.
17. Repl ace t he EVAP cani st er vent shut val ve (see page
11-371).
11-293).
t he HDS.
t he EVAP c ani st er vent shut val ve and t he ECM/ PCM,
NO- Go to st ep 24.
(cont' d)
11-363
EVAP Syst em
vent shut val ve and t he ECM/ PCM, t hen go to st ep 1. If
t he HDS.
is DTC P0498 indicated?
YES - Ch ec k f or poor c onnec t i ons or l oose t er mi nal s.at
t he EVAP cani st er vent shut val ve and t he ECM/ PCM.
st ep 27. If t he ECM/ PCM was subst i t ut ed, go t o st ep 1.
NO- Go to st ep 29.
c onnec t i ons or l oose t er mi nal s at t he EVAP cani st er
vent shut val ve and t he ECM/ PCM. If t he ECM/ PCM
DTC P0499: EVAP Cani st er Vent Shut Val ve
Ci rcui t High Vol t age
t he HDS.
EVAP cani st er vent shut val ve and t he E CM/ PCM.
t he HDS.
t he EVAP cani st er vent shut val ve and t he ECM/ PCM.
NO- Go to st ep 8.
c onnec t i ons or l oose t er mi nal s at t he EVAP cani st er
vent shut val ve and t he ECM/ PCM. If the ECM/ PCM
(see page 11-7), t hen go to st ep 6. If the ECM/ PCM was
11-364
DTC P14S4: FTP Sensor Range/Per f or mance
Probl em
DTC P2422; EVAP Cani st er Vent Shut Val ve
St uck Cl osed Malfuncti on
N O T E : Bef ore you t r oubl eshoot r ecor d all f r eeze dat a
t r oubl eshoot i ng i nf ormat i on { see page 11-3).
4. Remove t he f uel fill c ap, and wai t 1 mi nut e.
HDS.
Is it bet ween -0.67 and 0.67 kPa (-0.2 and 0.2 inHg, -
5 and 5 mmHg), or 2.4 and 2.6 V?
NO- Go to st ep 18.
7. Inst al l t he f uel fill c ap.
c onnec t i ons or l oose t er mi nal s at t he FTP sensor , t he
EVAP cani st er vent shut val ve, and t he ECM/ PCM.
Al so check for a bl ockage in t he vent hoses and t he
dr ai n j oi nt . If t he sc r een i ndi cat es NOT COMPL ETED,
13. Remove t he EVAP cani st er vent shut val ve f r om t he
EVAP cani st er (see page 11-371).
14. Connec t t he 2P connect or to t he EVAP cani st er vent
shut val ve.
16. Sel ec t EVAP CVS ON i n t he INSPECTION MENU wi t h
t he HDS.
17. Chec k t he EVAP c ani st er vent shut val ve (A)
oper at i on.
A
Does t he valve operat e?
YE S - Ch ec k f or a bl ockage i n t he EVAP c ani st er , vent
hos es , and dr ai n j oi nt , t hen rei nst al l t he EVAP cani st er
vent shut val ve, and go to st ep 24.
NO-Repl ac e t he EVAP c ani st er vent shut val ve (see
18. Di sc onnec t t he ai r t ube (A) f r om t he FTP sensor (B).
HDS.
Is it bet ween -0.67 and 0.67 kPa (-0.2 and 0.2 inHg, -
5 and 5 mmHg), or 2.4 and 2.6 V?
YES - Ch ec k f or a bl ockage i n t he FTP sensor ai r t ube
or vent , t hen go t o st ep 24.
NO- Go to st ep 20.
(cont' d)
11-365
EVAP Syst em
21. Remove t he FTP sensor (A) f r om t he EVAP c ani st er
wi t h i ts connect or c onnec t ed (see page 11-370).
23. Chec k t he FTP S ENS OR i n t he DATA L I S T wi t h t he
HDS.
Is it between 0.67 kPa and 0.67 kPa (0.2 and
0.2 inHg, -5 and 5 mmHg), or 2.4 and 2.6 V?
YE S - Ch ec k f or debr i s or cl oggi ng at t he EVAP c ani st er
and t he FTP sensor port , t hen go to st ep 24.
NO-Repl ac e t he FTP s ens or (see page 11-370), t hen
go to st ep 24.
11-293).
Is DTC P1454 and/or P2422 indicated?
t he FTP sensor , t he EVAP cani st er vent shut val ve, and
t he ECM/ PCM, t hen go t o st ep 1.
NO- Go to st ep 28.
connect i ons or l oose t er mi nal s at t he FTP sensor , t he
EVAP c ani st er vent shut val ve, and t he ECM/ PCM,
11-366
DTC P14SC: EVAP Syst em Purge Fl ow
Malfuncti on
NOTE;
If DTC P145C i s i ndi cat ed al one, do t he
t r oubl eshoot i ng f or DTC P0496 and P0497 usi ng f reeze
dat a for P145C.
If DTC P0497 and P145C ar e st or ed at t he s ame t i me,
check f or a poor c onnec t i on, a bl ockage, or damage at
t he EVAP cani st er purge li ne bet ween t he EVAP
cani st er purge val ve and t he EVAP cani st er . Al so
c hec k f or a st uck c l osed EVAP cani st er purge val ve.
If any of t he DTCs l i st ed bel ow are i ndi cat ed at t he
s ame t i me as DTC P145C, t r oubl eshoot t hose DTCs
f i rst , t hen r echeck for P145C.
P0496, P0497: EVAP syst em purge f l ow
Fuel Cap Warni ng Message Sf wmm
Troubl eshoot i ng
Vac uum Pump/Gauge, 0 - 3 0 In.Hg, Snap-on YA4000A
Vac uum/ Pr essur e Gauge, 0 - 4 In.Hg, 07JAZ-001000B
Do t hi s pr ocedur e if t he f uel c ap war ni ng mes s age
c omes on f r equent l y, or if t he message does not go off
after t he f uel fill cap i s t i ght ened and t he vehi c l e i s dr i ven
sever al days.
1. Check t he f uel fill c ap (the c ap must say TIGHTEN TO
CL ICK ), it shoul d t urn 1/4 after i t' s t i ght , t hen it cl i cks.
Is the correct fuel fill cap installed and properly
tightened?
2. Chec k t he f uel fill c ap seal (A) and t he f uel fill pi pe
mat i ng sur f ace (B). Veri f y t hat t he f uel fill cap t et her
cor d (C) i s not caught under the c ap.
Is the fuel fill cap seal missing or damaged, is the fuel fill
pipe damaged, or is the tether cord caught under the
cap?
YES - Repl ac e the f uel fi ll cap or the f uel fill pi pe, t hen
go to st ep 13.
NO- Go to st ep 3.
(cont' d)
11-367
EVAP S f st em
Fuel Cap Warning Message Sf stem Troubleshooting (cont'd)
3. Rei nst al l and t i ght en t he f uel fill c ap.
radi at or f an c omes on, t hen let it i dle f or 1 mi nut e.
6. Test dri ve at 45 mph (72 km/h) f or 1 mi nut e or mor e.
Does fuel cap warning message come on?
t i me. H
cani st er purge val ve (B) i n t he engi ne c ompar t ment ,
t hen connect a T-f i t t i ng (C), a vac uum gauge, and a
v ac uum pump/gauge, 0-30 i n.Hg, t o t he EVAP
c ani st er purge val ve as shown.
10. Appl y about 2 kPa (0.6 i nHg, 15 mmHg) of vac uum t o
t he hose.
11. Sel ec t t he EVAP PCS ON i n t he INSPECTION MENU
wi t h t he HDS.
Does the vacuum release immediately?
YES - Ch ec k f or a bl ockage in t he EVAP c ani st er purge
l i ne bet ween t he EVAP c ani st er purge val ve and t he
EVAP c ani st er , t hen go t o st ep 12.
NO-Repl ac e t he EVAP c ani st er pur ge val ve (see page
12. Rec onnec t all hoses.
11-293).
radi at or f an c omes on, t hen let it i dle f or 1 mi nut e.
17. Test -dr i ve at 45 mph (72 km/h) f or 1 mi nut e or mor e.
Does the fuel cap message come on?
YE S - Go to st ep 1 and r echeck.
11 -368
EVAP Canister Replacement
2. Remove t he wheel sensor har ness c l amps (A)
B
103 N-m
(10.5 kgf-m, 76 Ibf-ft)
Replace.
B
103 N-m
(10.5 kgf m, 76 Ibf-ft)
Replace.
27 N-m
(2.8 kgf m, 20 Ibf-ft)
3. Suppor t t he r ear subf r ame wi t h a t r ansmi ssi on j ack
and a wooden block as shown.
4. Remove t he r ear subf r ame mount i ng bol t s (B) and (C).
5. Lower t he t r ansmi ssi on j ack and r ear subf r ame about
50 mm.
NOTE: Be car ef ul not to damage t he connect i ng part s.
6. Remove t he bolt (A), and di sc onnec t t he hos es (B), t he
EVAP c ani st er vent shut val ve 2P connect or (C), and
t he FTP sensor 3P connect or (D).
A
9.8 N-m
(1.0 kgf m,
7.2 Ibf-ft)
E
9.8 N-m
(1.0 kgf m,
7.2 Ibf-ft)
7. Remove t he bol t s (E), t hen r emove t he EVAP cani st er
assembl y (F).
8. Remove t he EVAP cani st er (A) f r om t he EVAP cani st er
bracket (B).
, 9.8 N-m
(1.0 kgf m, 7.2 Ibf-ft)
(cont ' d)
11-369
EVAP Syst em
EVAP Cani st er Repl acement
(cont' d)
9. Remove t he EVAP c ani st er vent shut val ve (A) and
FTP sensor (B) f r om t he c ani st er (C).
10. Reassembl e t he EVAP cani st er wi t h new O-r i ngs (D)
and a new ret ai ner (E), t hen i nst al l t he EVAP c ani st er
bracket .
NOTE: Do not coat t he O-r i ngs wi t h oi l .
11. Inst al l t he EVAP c ani st er assembl y t o t he body.
NOTE: At t ach t he br acket ar m (A) t o t he body as
s hown.
12. Inst al l t he par t s i n t he r ever se or der of r emoval . Us e
new bol t s when you i nst al l t he r ear subf r ame.
FTP Sensor Repl acement
1. Remove t he bolt (A), and di sc onnec t t he EVAP
c ani st er vent shut val ve 2P connect or (B), t he FTP
sensor 3P connect or (C), and t he hoses (D).
A
9.8 N-m
(1.0 kgf -m
7.2 Ibf f t )
E
9.8 N-m
(1.0 kgf -m,
7.2 Ibf f t )
2. Remove t he bol t s (E), and move t he EVAP c ani st er
assembl y (F) to t he r ear .
3. Remove t he FTP sensor (A).
A
new O-ri ng (B) and a new ret ai ner (C).
11-370
EVAP Canister Went Shut Waiw
Replacement
1 o Di sconnect t he EVAP cani st er vent shut val ve 2P
connect or (A).
2. Remove t he c ap (B).
3. Remove t he EVAP c ani st er vent shut val ve (C).
4. Inst al l t he par t s i n t he r ever se or der of r emoval wi t h
new O-r i ngs (D) and a new c ap.
NOTE: Do not coat t he O-r i ngs wi t h oi l .
EVAP Cani st er Purge Val ve
Repl acement
1. Di sc onnec t t he E V A P c ani st er pur ge val ve 2P
c onnec t or ( A ) .
B
C
2. Di sc onnec t t he hoses ( B ) , t hen r emove t he I V A P
cani st er pur ge val ve ( C ) .
11-371
Transaxle
Cl ut c h. 12-1
Manual Tr ansmi ssi on . 13-1
Aut omat i c Tr ansmi ssi on 14-1
Dri vel i ne/Axi e . . . . . . . . 16-1
Transaxle
Cl ut ch
Co mpo nent L oc at i on Index .12-3
Cl ut c h Hydr aul i c S y s t em Bl eedi ng 12-6
Cl ut c h Pedal , Cl ut c h Pedal Posi t i on S wi t c h , and
Cl ut c h Int er l ock S wi t c h Adj us t ment 12-7
Cl ut c h Pedal A s s emb l y Repl ac ement 12-8
Cl ut c h Mast er Cy l i nder Repl ac ement 12-9
S l av e Cy l i nder Repl ac ement 12-12
Cl ut c h Hos e Repl ac ement 12-13
Cl ut c h Repl ac ement 12-15
Cl ut ch
Speci al Tool s
07746-0010800 At t ac hment 22 x 24 mm
07749-0010000 Dr i ver Handl e, 15x 135L 1
07936-3710100 Remover Handl e 1

07936-371020A Sl i de Hammer 1
07936-3710600 Bear i ng Remover Shaf t Set , 20 mm 1
07JAF-PM7011A Cl ut ch Al i gnment Di sc 1

07LAB-PV00100 or 07924-PD20003 Ri ng Gear Hol der 1
07PAF-0020000 Cl ut ch Al i gnment Tool Set 1

07PAF-0020370 Cl ut ch Al i gnment Pi l ot , 21 mm 1

07ZAF-PR8A100 Cl ut ch Al i gnment Shaf t 1

12-2
CLUTCH MASTER CY LINDER
Clutch Hydraulic System B leeding, page 12-6
CL UTCH A S S I S T S PRI NG
CLUTCH PEDAL ASSEMB LY
CL UTCH I NTERL OCK
SWITCH
Test, page 4-9
Adjustment, page 12-7
CL UTCH PEDAL
POSITION SWITCH
Test , page 4-45
Adj ust ment , page 12-7
CL EVI S PIN
CL UTCH MAS TER
CYL I NDER S E A L
Repl ac e.
CL UTCH PEDAL
CL UTCH L INE
CRANK S HAFT PIL OT
BUS HI NG
Inspect i on, st ep 20 on page 12-18
Repl ac ement , st ep 22 on page 12-19
/ O-RI NG
* Repl ac e.
CL UTCH DI S C
Inspect i on and
Remo v al , st ep 8 on page 12-16
Inst al l at i on, st ep 24 on page 12-19
PRE S S URE PL ATE
Inspect i on and
Remo v al , st ep 1 on page 12-15
ROL L PINS
Repl ac e.
S L A VE CYL I NDER
FL YWHEEL
Repl ac ement , st ep 16 on page 12-18
CL UTCH HOS E CL I PS
CL UTCH HOS E
R e p , a C e
'
RE L E A S E BEARI NG
Removal , st ep 1 on page 12-20
12-3
Cl ut ch
Sf stem Description
Del ay Ori f i ce Mec hani sm
Func t i on
The del ay ori f i ce mec hani sm i mpr oves cl ut ch oper at i on by del ayi ng t he sl ave cyl i nder r el ease speed when t he cl ut ch
pedal i s suddenl y r el eased. The del ay ori f i ce mec hani sm i s bui l t i nto t he sl ave cyl i nder .
D E L A Y ORI F I CE ME C H A N I S M
I S TON C Y L I N D E R
PISTON
S L A V E C Y L I N D E R
12-4
Fl ui d Fl ow Oper at i on
When t he cl ut ch pedal i s pr essed, t he flui d pr essur e f rom t he mast er cyl i nder moves t he one-way val ve in t he di rect i on
shown in t he i l l ust rat i on. The flui d f l ows t hrough t wo passages: t he ori f i ce part and t he fi lter part. It t hen f l ows out to t he
pi st on cyl i nder to r el ease t he pr essur e plate and cl ut ch di sc j oi nt .
FL UID f r om
MAS TER CYL I NDER
ORIFICE PART of FL OW ONE-WAY VAL VE
FL OW t o PI STON CYL I NDER
FIL TER PART of FL OW (Bl ocked)
When t he cl ut ch pedal i s r el eased, t he f l ui d pr essur e f rom t he pi st on cyl i nder moves t he one-way val ve in t he di rect i on
shown i n t he i l l ust rat i on. The one-way val ve bl ocks t he fi lter-part passage and del ays t he cl ut ch r el ease speed by
ret urni ng t he f l ui d to t he mast er cyl i nder t hr ough onl y t he ori f i ce-part passage.
ORIFICE PART of FL OW
FL UID t o
MAS TER CYL I NDER
FILTER PART of FL OW (Bl ocked)
12-5
Cl ut ch
Cl ut ch Hydrauli c Syst em Bl eedi ng
NOTE:
Do not r euse t he dr ai ned f l ui d. Al ways use Honda
DOT 3 Br ake Fl ui d f r om an unopened cont ai ner . Usi ng
a non-Honda brake f l ui d c an c aus e cor r osi on and
shor t en t he life of t he s y s t em.
Make sur e no di rt or ot her f or ei gn mat t er i s al l owed to
cont ami nat e t he brake f l ui d.
Do not spi l l brake f l ui d on t he vehi c l e; it may damage
t he pai nt or pl ast i c. If br ake f l ui d does cont act t he pai nt
or pl ast i c, was h it off i mmedi at el y wi t h wat er .
It may be nec essar y to li mi t t he movement of t he
r el ease fork wi t h a bl ock of wood t o r emove al l t he ai r
f r om t he syst em.
sur f ac es.
2. Make sur e t he brake f l ui d l evel i n t he cl ut ch r eser voi r
(A) i s at t he MAX (upper) l evel l i ne (B).
3. At t ach one end of a c l ear t ube t o t he bl eeder s c r ew
(A), and put t he ot her end i nto a cont ai ner . Loosen t he
bl eeder s c r ew t o al l ow ai r to esc ape f r om t he syst em.
A
8 N-m
(0.8 kgf m,
Slfofft)
4. Make sur e t her e i s an adequat e suppl y of f l ui d i n t he
r eser voi r , t hen sl owl y push t he cl ut ch pedal all t he
way down. Bef or e r el easi ng t he pedal , have an
assi st ant t empor ar i l y t i ght en t he bl eeder sc r ew.
L oosen t he bl eeder s c r ew, and push t he cl ut ch pedal
down agai n. Repeat t hi s st ep unti l no mor e bubbl es
appear at t he c l ear t ube.
NOTE: Make sur e t he f l ui d l evel on t he r eser voi r does
not go bel ow MIN.
5. Ti ght en t he bl eeder s c r ew sec ur el y.
6. Ref i l l t he brake f l ui d i n t he r eser voi r to t he MAX
(upper) l evel l i ne.
12-6
Cl ut ch Pedal Cl ut ch Pedal Position Swi t c h, and Cl ut ch Interlock Switch
Adjustment
NOTE:
For a cr ui se cont rol pr obl em, c hec k t he cl ut ch pedal
posi t i on swi t c h (see page 4-45).
For a cl ut ch i nterlock operat i on pr obl em, c hec k t he
cl ut ch i nterlock swi t ch (see page 4-9).
Remove t he dr i ver ' s f l oor mat bef ore adj ust i ng t he
cl ut ch pedal .
If t her e i s no c l ear anc e bet ween t he mast er cyl i nder
pi st on and t he pushr od, t he r el ease bear i ng wi l l be
hel d agai nst t he di aphr agm spr i ng, whi c h c an r esul t in
cl ut ch sl i ppage or ot her cl ut ch pr obl ems.
1 Di sconnect t he cl ut ch pedal posi t i on swi t c h connect or
and t he cl ut ch i nt erlock swi t ch connect or .
2. Loosen t he cl ut ch pedal posi t i on swi t ch l ocknut (A),
and back off t he cl ut ch pedal posi t i on swi t c h (B) unti l
it no l onger t ouc hes t he cl ut ch pedal (C).
3. Loosen t he cl ut ch pushr od l ocknut (D), and t ur n t he
pushr od (E) i n or out to get t he speci f i ed hei ght (F),
and t he st roke (G) at t he cl ut ch pedal . If adj ust i ng t he
pushr od c auses t he cl ut ch pedal to cont act t he cl ut ch
pedal posi t i on swi t c h, back off t he swi t c h f urt her.
F Cl ut c h Pedal Hei ght : 174 mm (6.9 i n)
G Cl ut c h Pedal St r oke: 130- 140 mm (5.1 - 5 . 5 i n)
4. Ti ght en t he cl ut ch pushr od l ocknut (A).
(1.7 kgf m, 12 Ibf f t )
5. Wi t h t he cl ut ch pedal r el eased, turn in t he cl ut ch pedal
posi t i on swi t c h (B) unti l it cont act s t he cl ut ch pedal .
6. Tur n i n t he cl ut ch pedal posi t i on swi t ch an addi t i onal
3/4 to 1 t ur n. Make sur e t he cl ut ch pedal hei ght di d not
c hange.
7. Whi l e hol di ng t he cl ut ch pedal posi t i on swi t c h,
t i ght en t he l ocknut (C).
(cont' d)
12-7
Cl ut ch
Cl ut ch Pedal , Cl ut ch Pedal Posi ti on Swi t c h, and
Cl ut ch Interlock Swi t ch Adj ust ment (cont'd)
8. L oosen t he cl ut ch i nt erlock swi t c h l ocknut (A).
A
12 x 1.25 mm
9.8 N m
(1.0 k g f m, 7.2 Ibf f t )
Cl ut ch Pedal Assembl y
Repl acement
mm
- 0 . 4 7 i n)
9. Ful l y pr ess t he cl ut ch pedal to t he f l oor , t hen r el ease
t he cl ut ch pedal 912 mm (0.350.47 in) and hol d it
t her e.
10. Adj ust t he posi t i on of t he cl ut ch i nt erl ock swi t c h (B) s o
t he engi ne st ar t s wi t h t he cl ut ch pedal i n t hi s posi t i on.
11. Whi l e hol di ng t he cl ut ch i nt erl ock swi t c h, t i ght en t he
l oc knut
12. Chec k t he cl ut ch oper at i on.
13. Connec t t he cl ut ch pedal posi t i on swi t c h connect or
and t he cl ut ch i nt erl ock swi t ch c onnec t or , t hen c hec k
t he c r ui se cont rol and t he cl ut ch i nt erl ock oper at i on.
1. Di sconnect t he cl ut ch pedal posi t i on swi t ch connect or
(A) and t he cl ut ch i nt erl ock swi t c h connect or (B).
2. Pry out t he lock pi n (C), and pull t he c l evi s pi n (D) out
of t he c l evi s.
3. Remove t he mast er cyl i nder mount i ng nut s (E) and
t he cl ut ch pedal mount i ng bolt (F).
4. Remove t he cl ut ch pedal assembl y (G).
5. Remove t he cl ut ch pedal posi t i on swi t ch (H) and t he
cl ut ch i nt erl ock swi t c h (I).
6. Loosel y i nst al l t he cl ut ch pedal posi t i on swi t c h (A)
and t he cl ut ch i nt erl ock swi t c h (B).
12-8
7. Inst al l t he cl ut ch pedal assembl y (A).
B
8 x 1.25 mi n
22 N m
kgf m, 16 Ibf-ft)
8. Inst al l t he cl ut ch pedal mount i ng bolt (B) and t he
mast er cyl i nder mount i ng nut s (C).
9. Appl y mul t i pur pose gr ease to t he c l evi s pi n (D), and
t he mat i ng sur f ac es (E) of the c l evi s and t he pedal .
Sl i de t he cl evi s pi n i nto t he c l evi s, t hen i nst al l t he lock
pin (F).
10. Adj ust t he cl ut ch pedal , t he cl ut ch pedal posi t i on
swi t c h, and t he cl ut ch i nt erl ock swi t c h (see page 12-7).
NOTE: Connect t he swi t ch c onnec t or s (G) after
adj ust i ng t hem.
11. Chec k t he cl ut ch oper at i on.
Cl ut ch Mast er Cyl i nder
Repl acement
NOTE:
o Us e f ender c over s t o avoi d damagi ng pai nt ed
sur f ac es.
t he pai nt or pl ast i c. If brake f l ui d does cont act t he pai nt
1. Remove and di sc ar d t he brake f l ui d f r om t he cl ut ch
mast er cyl i nder r eser voi r wi t h a syr i nge or ot her
sui t abl e devi ce.
2. Pry out t he lock pi n (A), and pull t he c l evi s pi n (B) out
of t he c l evi s. Remove t he mast er cyl i nder mount i ng
nut s (C).
(cont' d)
12-9
Cl ut ch
Clutch Master Cylinder Replacement (cont'd)
3. Remove t he r eser voi r mount i ng bolt (A) and t he
r et ai ni ng cl i p (B), t hen di sc onnec t t he cl ut ch l i ne (C)
f r om t he cl ut ch mast er cyl i nder (D), and r emove t he
O-r i ng (E). Pl ug or wr ap t he end of t he cl ut ch l i ne wi t h
a c l ean shop t owel to pr event brake f l ui d f r om c omi ng
out .
E
4. Remove t he mast er cyl i nder (A) and t he cl ut ch mast er
c yl i nder seal (B).
5. Inst al l a new mast er cyl i nder seal (A), t hen i nst al l t he
mast er cyl i nder (B).
A
Replace.
6. Inst al l a new O-ri ng (A) on t he cl ut ch li ne (B), t hen
i nst al l t he cl ut ch li ne in t he cl ut ch mast er cyl i nder (C)
wi t h a new ret ai ni ng cl i p (D). Install t he mast er
cyl i nder r eser voi r mount i ng bolt (E).
NOTE:
Appl y si l i cone gr ease (P/N 08C30- B0234M) to t he
O-ri ng and t he end of t he cl ut ch l i ne.
Make sur e not to get any si l i c one gr ease on t he
t er mi nal part of t he connect or s and swi t c hes,
espec i al l y if you have si l i cone gr ease on your hands
or gl oves.
6 x 1.0 mm
A D 9.8 N-m
(P/N 08C30-B0234M)
12-10
7. To prevent the ret ai ni ng cl i p (A) f r om c omi ng off, pry
apart t he tip of t he ci i p (B) wi t h a scr ewdr i ver .
A
8. Make sur e t he hose c l amps (A) ar e posi t i oned on t he
mast er cyl i nder (B) and r eser voi r (C) as s hown.
9. Inst al l t he mast er cyl i nder mount i ng nut s (A).
10. Appl y mul t i pur pose gr ease to t he c l evi s pin (B) and
t he mat i ng sur f ac es (C) of t he c l evi s and t he pedal .
Sl i de t he c l evi s pi n into t he c l evi s, t hen i nst all t he lock
pi n (D).
11. Bl eed t he cl ut ch hydr aul i c syst em (see page 12-6).
12. Adj ust t he cl ut ch pedal , t he cl ut ch pedal posi t i on
swi t c h, and t he cl ut ch i nterlock swi t ch (see page 12-7).
13. Chec k t he cl ut ch oper at i on, and check f or l eaks.
14. Test -dr i ve t he vehi c l e.
12-11
Cl ut ch
Sl ave Cyl i nder Repl acement
NOTE:
sur f ac es.
Do not spi lt br ake f l ui d on t he vehi c l e; it may damage
Make sur e not t o get any si l i c one gr ease on t he
t er mi nal part of t he c onnec t or s and swi t c hes,
especi al l y if you have si l i c one gr ease on your hands or
gl oves.
2. Remove t he mount i ng bol t s (A), t he bracket mount i ng
nut (B), and t he sl ave c yl i nder (C).
4. Inst al l a new O-ri ng (A) on t he cl ut ch li ne (B), i nst al l
t he cl ut ch l i ne i n t he sl ave cyl i nder (C), and i nst al l new
roll pi ns (D).
GRE AS E V)
(P/N08C30-B0234M)
3. Remove t he roll pi ns (A). Di sc onnec t t he cl ut ch l i ne
(B), and r emove t he O-ri ng (C). Pl ug or wr ap t he end of
t he cl ut ch l i ne wi t h a c l ean shop t owel t o pr event
brake f l ui d f r om c omi ng out .
12-12
Cl ut ch Hose Repl acement
5. Pull back t he boot (A), and appl y si l i cone gr ease
(P/N 08C30- B0234M) t o t he boot and t he sl ave
cyl i nder . Rei nst al l t he boot .
(P/ N 08C30-B0234M) (P/ N 08798-9002)
6. Appl y a li ght coat of super hi gh t emp ur ea gr ease
(P/N 08798- 9002) to t he end of t he sl ave cyl i nder
pushr od. Inst al l t he sl ave cyl i nder mount i ng bol t s and
t he bracket mount i ng nut.
8. Chec k t he cl ut ch oper at i on, and c hec k f or l eaks.
9. Do t he bat t ery i nst al l at i on pr ocedur e (see page 22-92).
NOTE:
Repl ac e t he cl ut ch hose if it i s t wi st ed, c r ac ked, or
l eaks.
sur f ac es.
2. Remove t he battery base bol t s (A), l oosen t he t wo
bol t s (B), r emove t he cabl e c l amp (C), and t he har ness
bracket bolt (D), t hen r emove t he battery base (E).
3. Di sc onnec t t he cl ut ch hose (A) f r om t he cl ut ch l i nes
(cont ' d)
12-13
Cl ut ch
Cl ut ch Hose Repl acement (cont' d)
4. Remove and di sc ar d t he cl ut ch hose cl i ps (A) f r om t he
cl ut ch hose (B).
5. Remove t he cl ut ch hose f r om cl ut ch hose br acket s.
6. Inst al l t he cl ut ch hose (A) into t he cl ut ch hose br acket s
wi t h new cl ut ch hose cl i ps (B).
7. Connec t t he cl ut ch l i nes (A) to t he cl ut ch hose (B).
15 N-m (1.5 k g f m, 11 Ibf-ft)
9. Do t he f ol l owi ng c hec ks:
Chec k t he cl ut ch hose and li ne j oi nt f or l eaks, and
t i ght en if nec essar y.
Chec k t he cl ut ch hose f or i nt erf erence and t wi st i ng.
10. Inst al l t he bat t ery base (A) and t he c abl e c l amp (B).
(1.0 kgf -m, 7.2 Ibf-ft) 16 Ibf-ft)
12-14
Cl ut ch Repl acement
Special Tools Required
. Cl ut ch Al i gnment Di sc 07JAF-PM7011A
. Ri ng Gear Hol der 07LAB-PV00100 or 07924-PD20003
Cl ut ch Al i gnment Tool Set 07PAF-0020000
Cl ut ch Al i gnment Pi l ot , 21 mm 07PAF-0020370
. Cl ut ch Al i gnment Shaf t 07ZAF-PR8A100
At t ac hment 22 x 24 mm 07746-0010800
Dri ver Handl e, 15 x 135L 07749-0010000
Remover Handl e 07936-3710100
Bear i ng Remover Shaf t S e t 20 mm 07936-3710600
Sl i de Hammer 07936-371020A
Engi ne Si de
Pressure Plate Inspection and Removal
1. Remove t he t r ansmi ssi on (see page 13-7).
2. Chec k t he evenness of t he hei ght of t he di aphr agm
spr i ng f i nger s usi ng t he cl ut ch al i gnment di sc (A), t he
cl ut ch al i gnment shaf t (B), t he r emover handl e (C),
and a f eel er gauge (D). If t he hei ght di f f er ence i s mor e
t han t he ser vi c e li mi t , r epl ace t he pr essur e pl at e.
Standard (New): 0.6 mm (0.02 in) max.
Service Limit: 0.8 mm (0.03 in)
3. Inst al l t he ri ng gear hol der (A), t he cl ut ch al i gnment
t ool set (B), and t he 21 mm cl ut ch al i gnment pi lot (C).
4. To pr event war pi ng, l oosen t he pr essur e pl at e
mount i ng bol t s (D) i n a c r i ssc r oss pat t ern i n sever al
st eps, t hen r emove t he pr essur e pl at e (E).
5. Inspect t he f i nger s of t he di aphr agm spr i ng (A) for
wear at t he r el ease bear i ng cont act ar ea.
A
(cont ' d)
12-15
Cl ut ch
Clutch Replacement (cont'd)
6. Inspect t he pr essur e pl at e sur f ace (A) f or wear , c r ac ks,
and bur ni ng.
7
Inspec t f c r Vw" c ; pyC U O I ' M ^ a o u a i y i u t j uy e \ M; and a
f eel er gauge (B). Measur e ac r oss t he pr essur e pl at e
(C), If t he most measur ement di f f erence i s mor e t han
t he ser vi c e li mi t , r epl ace t he pr essur e pl at e.
St andar d (New): 0.03 mm (0401; i n) .max.
Ser vi c e Li mi t : 0.15 mm (0.006 i n) "
Cl ut c h Di sc Inspect i on and Removal
8. Remove t he cl ut ch di sc (A), t he cl ut ch al i gnment t ool
set (B), and t he 21 mm cl ut ch al i gnment pi lot (C).
9. Inspect t he l i ni ng of t he cl ut ch di sc f or si gns of
sl i ppage or oi l . If t he cl ut ch di sc l ooks burnt or i s-oi l
soaked, r epl ace t he cl ut ch di sc . If t he cl ut ch di sc i s oi l
soaked, f i nd and r epai r t he sour c e of t he oi l leak. .
10. Measur e t he cl ut ch di sc t hi c kness. If t he
measur ement i s l ess t han t he ser vi c e li mi t, r epl ace
t he cl ut ch di sc .
St andar d (New): 7. 30- 7. 90 mm (0.287-0.311 i n)
Ser vi c e Li mi t : '6.0 mm (0.24 i n)
12-16
11. Measur e t he dept hs of t he ri vet s f r om t he cl ut ch di sc
l i ni ng sur f ace (A) to t he ri vet s (B) on both si des. If t he
measur ement i s l ess t han t he ser vi c e l i mi t , r epl ace
t he cl ut ch di sc .
Standard (New): 1.151.75 mm
(0.045-0.069 in)
Servi ce Limit: 0.7 mm (0.03 in)
Flywheel Inspection
12. Remove t he ri ng gear hol der .
13. Inspect t he ri ng gear t eet h f or wear and damage.
14. Inspect t he cl ut ch di sc mat i ng sur f ace on t he f l ywheel
f or wear , c r ac ks, and bur ni ng.
15. Measur e t he f l ywheel (A) r unout usi ng a di al i ndi cat or
(B). Thr ough at l east t wo f ul l t ur ns wi t h pushi ng
agai nst t he f l ywheel eac h t i me you t ur n it t o t ake up
t he cr ankshaf t t hr ust was her c l ear anc e. If t he
measur ement i s not wi t hi n t he st andar d, r epl ace t he
f l ywheel , and r echeck t he runout ; t hen go t o st ep 16.
Standard (New): 0.05 mm (0.002 in) max.
Servi ce Limit: 0.15 mm (0.006 in)
A B
- : l t _ l \ -
(cont ' d)
12-17
Cl ut ch
Cl ut ch Repl acement (cont'd)
Fl ywheel Repl ac ement
16. Install t he ri ng gear hol der (A).
17. Loosen t he f l ywheel mount i ng bol t s in a c r i ssc r oss
pattern in sever al st eps. Remove t he bol t s, t hen
r emove t he f l ywheel and t he ri ng gear hol der.
18. Inst al l t he f l ywheel on t he cr ankshaf t , and i nst al l t he
mount i ng bolts f i nger-t i ght .
19. Inst al l t he ri ng gear hol der (A), t hen t or que t he
f l ywheel mount i ng bol t s (B) in a c r i s s c r os s pattern i n
sever al st eps.
Cr ankshaf t Pi l ot Bushi ng Inspect i on
20. Inspect t he cr ankshaf t pi lot bushi ng f or wear and
damage.
21. Inspect t he i nsi de sur f ace of t he cr ankshaf t pi lot
bushi ng wi t h your f i nger. If t he cr ankshaf t pi lot
bushi ng i s not smoot h, r epl ace it; t hen go t o st ep 22.
12-18
0
Crankshaft Pilot Bushing Replacement
22. Remove t he cr ankshaf t pi lot bushi ng (A) usi ng t he
sl i de hammer (B), t he r emover handl e (C), and t he
20 mm bear i ng r emover shaf t set (D).
23. Inst al l a new cr ankshaf t pi lot bushi ng (A) into t he
cr ankshaf t usi ng t he 15 x 135L dr i ver handl e (B) and
t he 22 x 24 mm at t achment (C).
Clutch Disc and Pressure Plate Installation
24. Tempor ar i l y i nst al l t he cl ut ch di sc ont o t he spl i nes of
t he t r ansmi ssi on mai nshaf t . Make sur e t he cl ut ch di sc
sl i des f r eel y on t he mai nshaf t .
25. Appl y a li ght coat of super hi gh t emp ur ea gr ease (P/N
08798-9002) t o t he cr ankshaf t pi lot bushi ng (A).
D =
07PAF-0020000 07PAF-0020370
26. Appl y super hi gh t emp ur ea gr ease (P/N 08798-9002)
t o t he spl i nes (B) of t he cl ut ch di sc (C), t hen i nst al l t he
cl ut ch di sc usi ng t he cl ut ch al i gnment t ool set (D), and
t he 21 mm cl ut ch al i gnment pi lot (E).
27. Inst al l t he pr essur e plate (A) and t he mount i ng bol t s
(B) f i nger-t i ght .
(cont ' d)
12-19
Clutch
Clutch Replacement (cont'd)
28. Tor que t he mount i ng bol t s (A) i n a c r i s s c r os s pat t ern.
Ti ght en t he bol t s i n sever al st eps to pr event war pi ng
t he di aphr agm spr i ng.
Spec i f i ed Tor que: 25 N-m (2.6 k g f m, 19 Ibf-ft)
29. Remove t he ri ng gear hol der (B), t he cl ut ch al i gnment
t ool set (C), and t he 21 mm cl ut ch al i gnment pi lot.
30. Make sur e t he di aphr agm spr i ng f i nger s ar e al l t he
s ame hei ght .
31. Do t he r el ease bear i ng i nspec t i on, and r epl ace it if
nec essar y.
32. Inst al l t he t r ansmi ssi on (see page 13-15).
Tr ansmi ssi on Si de
Rel ease Bear i ng Removal
1. Remove t he t r ansmi ssi on (see page 13-7).
2. Remove t he r el ease fork boot (A) f r om t he cl ut ch
housi ng (B).
3. Remove t he r el ease fork (C) f r om t he cl ut ch housi ng
by squeezi ng t he r el ease fork set spr i ng (D) wi t h
pl i er s. Remove t he r el ease bear i ng (E).
Rel ease Bear i ng Inspect i on
4. Chec k t he pl ay of t he r el ease bear i ng by spi nni ng it by
hand. If t her e i s exc essi ve pl ay or noi se, r epl ace t he
r el ease bear i ng.
NOTE: The r el ease bear i ng i s packed wi t h gr ease. Do
not was h it i n sol vent .
12-20
Release Bearing Installation
5. Appl y super hi gh t emp ur ea gr ease (P/N 08798-9002)
t o t he r el ease fork (A), t he r el ease fork bolt (B), t he
r el ease bear i ng (C), and t he r el ease bear i ng gui de (D)
i n t he shaded ar eas, t hen set t he r el ease fork set
spr i ng (E).
NOTE: Repl ace t he r el ease fork bolt if nec essar y.
(P/N 08798-9002) (P/ N 08798-9002)
0. 4- 1. 0 g
(0.01 - 0 . 0 4 oz)
6. Wi t h t he r el ease fork (A) sl i d bet ween t he r el ease
bear i ng pawl s (B), i nst al l t he r el ease bear i ng on t he
mai nshaf t whi l e i nser t i ng t he r el ease fork t hr ough t he
hol e (C) in t he cl ut ch housi ng.
E
7. Al i gn t he det ent (D) of t he r el ease fork wi t h t he r el ease
fork bolt (E), t hen pr ess t he det ent of t he r el ease fork
over t he r el ease fork bolt squar el y.
8. Install t he r el ease fork boot (F). Make sur e t he boot
seal s ar ound t he r el ease fork and t he cl ut ch housi ng.
9. Move t he r el ease fork (A) ri ght and left to make sur e
t hat it f i t s pr oper l y agai nst t he r el ease bear i ng (B) and
t hat t he r el ease beari ng sl i des smoot hl y. Wi pe off any
ex c es s gr ease.
10. Inst al l t he t r ansmi ssi on (see page 13-15).
12-21
Transaxle
Manual Transmission
Special Tools . 13-2
Component Location I ndex. . ..13-3
S ymptom Troubleshooting Index 13-4
Transmission F luid Inspection and Replacement. ....13- 5
B ack-up Light Switch Test . 13-6
Transmission Removal 13-7
Transmission I nstallation 13-15
Transmission Disassembly 13-24
Reverse Shift F ork Clearance I nspection. 13-29
Change Lever Clearance I nspection. ... 13-29
Change Lever Assembl y Disassembly/Reassembly. . 13-30
Shift F ork Clearance Inspection 13-31
Shift F ork Disassembly/Reassembly 13-32
Mainshaft Assembl y Clearance I nspection 13-33
Mainshaft Disassembly. 13-35
Mainshaft I nspection 13-36
Mainshaft Reassembly - 13-38
Countershaft Assembl y Clearance I nspection 13-42
Countershaft Disassembly 13-44
Countershaft I nspection 13-45
Countershaft Reassembly 13-46
Synchro Sleeve and H ub I nspection and
Reassembly . 13-51
Synchro Ring and Gear I nspection 13-52
Mainshaft B earing and Oil Seal Replacement. 13-54
Countershaft B earing Replacement 13-55
Mainshaft Thrust Clearance Adjustment ..13-56
Transmission Reassembly. 13-59
Gearshift Mechani sm Replacement. 13-64
Shift Lever H ousing Replacement. 13-65
M/T Differential
Component Location I ndex. 13-67
B acklash I nspection. 13-68
Differential Carrier/F inal Driven Gear Replacement. . 13-68
Carrier B earing Replacement. 13-69
Oil Seal Replacement 13-70
Differential Thrust Clearance Adjustment 13-71
Spec i al Tool s
070AG-SJ AA10S Subf r ame Al i gnment Pi n
07736-A01000B Adj ust abl e Bear i ng Pul l er , 2040 mm 1
07746-0010300 Bear i ng Dr i ver At t achment , 42 x 47 1

07746-0030100 Dr i ver Handl e, 40 mm I.D. 1

07746-0030300 Bear i ng Dr i ver At t achment , 30 mm 1

07749-0010000 Dr i ver Handl e, 15x 135L 1
* 07GAJ-PG20110 Mai nshaf t Hol der 1
* 07GAJ-PG20130 Mai nshaf t Base 1
07JAD-PL90100 Oi l S eal Dr i ver , 65 1
07NAD-P20A100 Oi l S eal Dri ver At t achment 1
* : Part of Mai nshaf t Inspect i on Tool Set , 07GAJ-PG20102.
* * : Must be used wi t h c ommer c i al l y avai l abl e 3/8" -16 UNF Sl i de Hammer . *
(D .. '

13-2
TRANSMISSION FLUID
Inspect i on and Repl ac ement , page 13-5
GEARSHIFT MECHANISM
SHIFT LEVER HOUSING
BACK-UP LIGHT SWITCH
Test , page 13-6
TRANSMISSION
Removal , page 13-7
Di sassembl y, page 13-24
Reassembl y, page 13-59
CHANGE LEVER
Cl ear anc e Inspect i on, page 13-29
MAINSHAFT
Bear i ng and Oi l S eal Repl ac ement , page 13-54
Thr ust Cl ear anc e Adj ust ment , page 13-56
SYNCHRO SLEEVE and HUB
Inspect i on and Reassembl y, page 13-51
SYNCHRO RING and GEAR
CHANGE LEVER ASSEMBLY
Di sassembl y/ Reassembl y, page 13-30
SHIFT FORK
Di s as s embl y / Reas s embl y , page 13-32
DIFFERENTIAL
COUNTERSHAFT ASSEMBLY
COUNTERSHAFT
Bear i ng Repl ac ement , page 13-55
MAINSHAFT ASSEMBLY
REVERSE IDLER GEAR
13-3
Sy mpt om Di agnost i c pr ocedur e
Hard to shi f t i nto 1st gear 1. Chec k and/or r epl ace t he MTF (see page 13-5).
2. Chec k t he cl ut ch (see page 12-15).
3. Chec k t he c hange l ever assembl y (see page 13-29).
4. Chec k t he 1st sync hr o ri ng and 1st gear (see page 13-52).
5. Chec k t he 1st /2nd sync hr o sl eeve and hub (see page 13-51).
Hard to shi ft into 2nd gear 1. Chec k and/or r epl ace t he MTF (see page 13-5).
3. Chec k t he 2nd sync hr o ri ng and 2nd gear (see page 13-52).
4. Chec k t he 1st /2nd sync hr o sl eeve and hub (see page 13-51).
Hard to shi ft into 3rd gear 1. Chec k and/or r epl ace t he MTF (see page 13-5).
3. Chec k t he 3rd sync hr o ri ng and 3rd gear (see page 13-52).
4. Chec k t he 3rd/4th sync hr o sl eeve and hub (see page 13-51).
Hard to shi f t into 4th gear 1. Chec k and/or r epl ace t he MTF (see page 13-5).
3. Chec k t he 4th sync hr o ri ng and 4th gear (see page 13- 52) .
A. Chec k t he 3rd/4?!i ayi J . u olceve and hub (see page 1 3 - 5 1 ) .
Hard to shi ft into 5th gear 1. Chec k and/or r epl ace t he MTF (see page 13-5).
3. Chec k t he 5th sync hr o ri ng and 5th gear (see page 13-52).
4. Chec k t he 5th sync hr o sl eeve and hub (see page 13-51).
Hard to shi f t into r ever se 1. Chec k and/or r epl ace t he MTF (see page 13-5).
2. Chec k t he cl ut ch (see page 12-15).
4. Chec k t he r ever se shi ft fork and r ever se i dler gear (see page 13-29).
5. Chec k r ever se gear s.
Noi se f r om t he t r ansmi ssi on 1. Chec k and/or r epl ace t he MTF (see page 13-5).
2. Chec k t he MTF l evel (unfi lled or in sur pl us t he t r ansmi ssi on wi t h t he
MTF).
3. Chec k t he t r ansmi ssi on gear s.
4. Chec k t he t r ansmi ssi on bear i ngs.
5. Chec k t he di fferenti al car r i er , t he fi nal dr i ven gear , and t he car r i er
bear i ngs.
Shi f t l ever does not operat e
smoot hl y
1. Chec k and/or r epl ace t he MTF (see page 13-5).
2. Chec k t he shi ft c abl es and t hei r j oi nt s (see page 13-64).
3. Chec k t he shi ft l ever housi ng wi t h t he shi ft l ever shaf t .
Tr ansmi ssi on j umps out of gear 1. Chec k and/or r epl ace the MTF (see page 13-5).
2. Chec k t he det ent ball spr i ngs (see page 13-24).
3. Chec k t he teeth of t he sync hr o r i ngs and t he gear s (see page 13-52).
4. Chec k for bent , def or m, or damage of t he shi ft f orks.
13-4
Transmission Fluid Inspection and Replacement
1. Rai se t he vehi cl e on a lift, and make sur e it i s sec ur el y
suppor t ed.
2. Remove t he front spl ash shi el d (see page 20-291).
3. Remove t he oi l f i l l er plug (A) and t he seal i ng washer
(B), check t he condi t i on of t he MTF, and make sur e it i s
at t he proper l evel (C).
A
4. If t he f l ui d i s di rty, r emove t he dr ai n pl ug (A) and t he
seal i ng washer (B), and drai n t he MTF.
5. Install t he dr ai n pl ug wi t h a new seal i ng was her , and
refill t he t r ansmi ssi on wi t h MTF to t he pr oper l evel .
Al ways use Honda Manual Tr ansmi ssi on Fl ui d (MTF).
Fl ui d Capac i t y:
1.9 L (2.0 US qt ) at f l ui d c hange
2 0 L (2.1 US qt ) at over haul
6. Install t he f i l l er pl ug (C) wi t h a new seal i ng was her (D).
7 Install t he f ront spl ash shi el d (see page 20-291).
9. Connect t he Honda Di agnost i c Sy s t em (HDS) to t he
dat a link connect or (DLC) (see st ep 2 on page 11-3). '
and t he engi ne cont rol modul e (ECM). If it does not
c ommuni c at e, go t o t he DL C ci rcui t t r oubl eshoot i ng
(see page 11-181).
12. Sel ec t GAUGE MENU i n t he BODY EL ECTRI CAL wi t h
t he HDS.
13. Sel ec t ADJ US TMENT i n t he GA UGE S MENU wi t h t he
HDS.
14. Sel ec t MAINTENANCE MINDER i n t he ADJ US TMENT
wi t h t he HDS.
15. Sel ec t RE S E T i n t he MAINTENANCE MINDER wi t h t he
HDS.
16. Sel ec t RES ETTI NG THE MTF LIFE wi t h t he HDS.
13-5
Back-up Light Switch Test
1. Di sc onnec t t he back-up li ght swi t c h 2P c onnec t or (A).
2. Chec k f or cont i nui t y bet ween back-up li ght swi t c h 2P
connect or t er mi nal s No. 1 and No. 2. Ther e shoul d be
cont i nui t y onl y when t he shi ft l ever i s in r ever se.
If t her e i s no cont i nui t y, go to st ep 3.
BACK -UP LIGHT SWITCH 2P CONNECTOR
1
C
M

3. Remove t he back-up li ght swi t ch (A). Chec k for
cont i nui t y bet ween back-up li ght swi t ch 2P connect or
t er mi nal s No. 1 and No. 2. Ther e shoul d be cont i nui t y
when t he swi t c h end (B) i s pr essed, and no cont i nui t y
when t he swi t c h end i s r el eased.
If t her e i s cont i nui t y, check t he r ever se shi ft
mec hani sm in t he t r ansmi ssi on.
If t here i s no cont i nui t y, r epl ace t he back-up li ght
swi t c h.
BACK -UP LIGHT SWITCH 2P CONNECTOR
, 1=1 .
1 2
4. Appl y l i qui d gasket (P/N 08717-0004, 08718-0001,
08718-0012,08718-0003, or 08718-0009) to t he
t hr eads of t he back-up li ght swi t c h, and i nst al l it on
t he t r ansmi ssi on housi ng.
5. Connec t t he back-up li ght swi t ch 2P connect or .
13-6
Transmission Removal
* Engi ne Suppor t Hanger , A and Reds AAR-T1256*
*: Ar e avai l abl e t hr ough t he Honda Tool and Equi pment
Pr ogr am 888-424-6857.
NOTE: Us e f ender c over s to avoi d damagi ng pai nt ed
sur f ac es.
1 Sec ur e t he hood i n t he wi de open posi t i on wi t h t he
suppor t st rut .
2. Remove t he f ront gri l l e c over .
5. Remove t he battery base bol t s (A), l oosen t he t wo
bol t s ( B)
f
r emove t he cabl e c l amp (C) and t he har ness
bracket bolt (D), t hen r emove t he bat t ery base (E).
6. Remove t he sl ave cyl i nder mount i ng bol t s (A) and t he
bracket mount i ng nut ( B) , t hen car ef ul l y move t he
sl ave cyl i nder out of t he way to avoi d bendi ng t he
cl ut ch l i ne.
NOTE: Do not pr ess t he cl ut ch pedal after t he sl ave
cyl i nder has been r emoved.
(cont' d)
13-7
Tr ansmi ssi on Removal (cont'd)
7. Remove t he nut (A) and t he c l amp (B), t hen move t he
under -hood f use/r el ay box (C) out of t he way.
8. Remove t he l ock pi ns (A), t he shi f t cabl e bracket bol t s
(B), and t he shi f t c abl e bracket (C), t hen di sc onnec t t he
shi f t c abl es (D) f r om t he c hange l ever assembl y (E).
Car ef ul l y r emove both c abl es and t he bracket
t oget her to avoi d bendi ng t he c abl es.
9. Di sc onnec t t he out put shaf t (count ershaf t ) speed
sensor c onnec t or (A), t he back-up li ght swi t c h
c onnec t or (B), and t he har ness c l amp (C).
10. Remove t he bol t s (A), t he har ness c l amp (B), and t he
bracket (C).
13-8
11. Remove t he hose f r om t he c l amp (A) and t he nut s (B), 13. At t ach t he engi ne hanger adapt er (VSB02C000015) to
t hen r emove t he strut br ac e (C). t he t hr eaded hol e in t he c yl i nder head.
12. Remove t he evapor at i ve emi ssi on (EVAP) c ani st er
1 4
-
l n s t a l 1 t h e e n
9n e suppor t hanger (AAR-T1256) to t he
vehi c l e, and at t ach t he hook (A) t o t he engi ne hanger
(cont ' d)
13-9
Transmission Removal (cont'd)
15. Remove t he f ront engi ne mount st op nut s (A), t he
f ront engi ne mount st op (B), and t he vac uum hose
bracket (C), t hen r emove t he f ront engi ne mount bolt
(D)
r
and di sc onnec t t he vac uum hose (E).
17. Remove t he power st eer i ng li ne hol der mount i ng
bol t s (A).
18. Remove t he t wo heat shi el d bol t s (A), t he heat shi el d
(B), and t he t wo power st eer i ng gear box mount i ng
bracket bol t s (C), t hen r emove t he power st eer i ng
gear box mount i ng bracket (D).
13-10
19. Remove t he power st eer i ng gear box st i f f ener bolts
(A) and t he power st eer i ng sti ffener pl at es (B).
20. Remove t he upper t r ansmi ssi on mount bracket bol t s
(A).
NOTE: Do not r emove t he TORX bolt (B) f r om t he
21. Remove t he t hr ee upper t r ansmi ssi on mount bracket
bol t s (A), t he upper t r ansmi ssi on mount bracket (B),
t he gr ound c abl e mount bolt (C), and t he gr ound c abl e
(D).
22. Remove t he upper t r ansmi ssi on mount bol t s (A).
23. Rai se t he vehi c l e on a lift, and make sur e it i s sec ur el y
suppor t ed.
(cont' d)
13-11
Tr ansmi ssi on Removal (cont' d)
25. Remove t he f ront spl ash shi el d.
26. Dr ai n t he MTF. Rei nst al l t he drai n pl ug usi ng a new
seal i ng was her (see page 13-5).
27. Remove t he damper f ork (see st ep 4 on page 18-31).
28. Separ at e t he knuckl e bal l j oi nt f r om t he l ower ar m
(see page 18-21).
29. Remove exhaust pi pe A and t he gasket s (B).
30. Remove t he r ear engi ne mount bracket bol t s.
31. Remove t he subf r ame mi d mount bol t s (A) and t he
subf r ame mi d mount (B) f r om both si des.
13-12
32. Remove t he l ower t r ansmi ssi on mount mount i ng
nut s (A).
33. Remove the power st eer i ng li ne hol der bolt (A) and
t he power st eer i ng l i ne f rom t he c l amp (B).
f ront subf r ame and hang t he belt of t he subf r ame
adapt er over t he f ront of t he subf r ame, t hen sec ur e
t he belt wi t h its st op.
VSB02C000016
35. Rai se t he j ack and l i ne up t he sl ot s in t he subf r ame
adapt er ar ms wi t h t he bolt hol es on t he j ack base,
t hen secur el y at t ach t hem wi t h f our bol t s.
36. Remove the f our f ront sti ffener bol t s (A), t he front
st i f f eners (B), t he f our rear st i f f ener bol t s (C), and t he
r ear st i f f eners (D), t hen r emove t he front subf r ame
( E) .
(cont ' d)
13-13
37. Remove t he l ower t r ansmi ssi on mount bol t s (A) and
t he l ower t r ansmi ssi on mount (B).
38, Pry t he left dri ve^ hrrfi Ir.bczrd j ci r .t (A) f r om t he
di f f erent i al usi ng a pr ybar .
NOTE:
Do not pull on t he dr i veshaf t , or t he i nboar d j oi nt
may c ome apart . Pull t he i nboar d j oi nt st r ai ght out
t o avoi d damagi ng t he oi l seal .
Be car ef ul not to damage t he oi l seal and t he end of
t he i nboar d j oi nt wi t h t he pr ybar .
39. Dr i ve t he i nboar d j oi nt (A) of t he ri ght dr i veshaf t off of
t he i nt er medi at e shaf t usi ng a drift punch and a
hammer .
NOTE:
may c ome apart .
Be car ef ul not to damage t he end of t he i nboar d
j oi nt wi t h t he drift punc h.
A
40. Remove t he i nt er medi at e shaf t (see page 16-22).
41. Remove t he cl ut ch c over (A) and t he CK P sensor
c over (B).
42. Sec ur el y suppor t t he t r ansmi ssi on wi t h a
t r ansmi ssi on j ack.
13-14
Tr ansmi ssi on Inst al l at i on
43. Remove t he l ower t r ansmi ssi on mount i ng bol t s.
Fr ont si de
44. Pul l t he t r ansmi ssi on away f r om t he engi ne unti l t he
t r ansmi ssi on mai nshaf t c l ear s t he cl ut ch pr essur e
pl at e.
45. Sl owl y l ower t he t r ansmi ssi on about 150 mm (6 i n).
Chec k onc e agai n t hat all hoses and har nesses ar e
di sc onnec t ed and f r ee f rom t he t r ansmi ssi on, t hen
l ower it compl et el y.
. Engi ne Hanger Adapt er VSB02C000015*
Subf r ame Al i gnment Pi n 070AG- S J AA10S
*: Ar e avai l abl e t hr ough t he Honda Tool and Equi pment
Pr ogr am 888-424-6857.
NOTE: Us e f ender c over s t o avoi d damagi ng pai nt ed
sur f ac es.
1. Chec k t he r el ease bear i ng, and r ei nst al l t he r el ease
bear i ng and t he r el ease fork wi t h t he appropri at e
gr ease (see page 12-20).
2. Make sur e t he t wo dowel pi ns (A) ar e i nst al l ed i n t he
cl ut ch housi ng.
A
3. Pl ace t he t r ansmi ssi on on t he t r ansmi ssi on j ack, and
r ai se it to engi ne l evel .
4. Al i gn t he t r ansmi ssi on mai nshaf t and t he cl ut ch
pr essur e pl at e, t hen move t he t r ansmi ssi on i nwar d
unti l t her e i s no gap bet ween t he t r ansmi ssi on
housi ng and t he engi ne block.
(cont ' d)
13-15
Transmission Installation (cont'd)
5. Install t he l ower t r ansmi ssi on mount i ng bol t s.
Fr ont si de
12 x 1.25 mm
4 N-m
(S.5 kgf- m,
47 Ibf -ft)
12x 1.25 mm
64 N-m
(6.5 k g f m,
47 ibf-ft)
Rear si de
10 K 1.25 mm
44 N-m
(4.5 kgf-m,
33 Ibf-ft)
12 x 1.25 mm
64 N-m
(6.5 k g f m,
47 Ibf-ft)
10 x 1.25 mm
44 N-m
(4.5 k g f m,
33 Ibf-ft)
6. Inst al l t he cl ut ch c over (A) and t he CK P sensor c over
(B).
6 K 1.0 mm
12 N-m
(1.2 kgf-m,
8.7 Ibf-ft)
6 x 1.0 mm
12 N-m
(1.2 k g f m,
8.7 Ibf-ft)
7. Inst al l t he i nt er medi at e shaf t (see page 16-28).
8. Inst al l both dr i veshaf t s (see page 16-19).
9. Inst al l t he l ower t r ansmi ssi on mount (A) wi t h new
bol t s, t hen r emove t he t r ansmi ssi on j ack.
10x 1.25 mm
54 N-m
(5.5 kgf -m,
40 Ibf-ft)
Replace.
13-16
10. Suppor t t he front subf r ame wi t h t he subf r ame
adapt er (VSB02C000016) and a j ack.
VSB02C000016
11. Posi t i on t he st eer i ng gear box was her s (A) on t he front
subf r ame (B), and lift t he subf r ame up to t he body.
12 x 1.25 mm
93 Nm
(9.5 kgf-m,
69 Ibfft)
Repl ac e.
12x1.25 mm
54 N-m
(5.5 kgf m,
40 Ibfft)
C
14 x 1.5 mm
103 Nm
(10.5 kgf-m,
75.9 Ibfft)
Repl ac e.
12x1.25 mm
54 N-m
(5.5 kgf-m,
40 Ibfft)
12. Loosel y i nst al l new subf r ame mount i ng bol t s (C), new
r ear st i f f ener mount i ng bolts (D), t he f ront st i f f ener
mount i ng bol t s (E), t he f ront st i f f eners (F), and t he
rear st i f f eners (G).
13. Part i al l y t i ght en t he ri ght r ear subf r ame mount i ng
bolt (A); i nser t t he subf r ame al i gnment pi n t hr ough
t he posi t i oni ng sl ot (B) on t he r ear st i f f ener, t hr ough
t he posi t i oni ng hol e (C) on t he subf r ame, and into t he
posi t i oni ng hol e on t he body, t hen t i ght en t he
subf r ame mount i ng bolt.
A
14 x 1.5 mm
103 N-m (10.5 kgf m, 75.9 Ibfft)
Repl ac e.
12 x 1.25 mm
93 N-m (9.5 kgf m, 69 Ibfft)
Repl ac e.
070AG-S JAA1 OS
14. Part i al l y t i ght en t he left r ear subf r ame mount i ng bolt
i n t he s ame manner as i n st ep 13.
15. Part i al l y t i ght en t he ri ght and left f ront subf r ame
mount i ng bol t s.
16. Ti ght en t he ri ght rear mount i ng bolt to t he speci f i ed
t or que wi t h t he subf r ame al i gnment pi n i n t he
posi t i oni ng hol e.
17. Ti ght en t he left r ear mount i ng bolt to t he speci f i ed
t orque wi t h t he subf r ame al i gnment pi n i n t he
posi t i oni ng hol e.
18. Ti ght en t he ri ght and left f ront mount i ng bolt to t he
19. Check that t he posi t i oni ng hol es and sl ot s ar e al i gned
usi ng t he subf r ame al i gnment pi n.
20. Ti ght en t he rear and f ront st i f f ener mount i ng bolts to
t he speci f i ed t orque.
21. Remove t he j ack and subf r ame adapt er.
(cont ' d)
13-17
Tr ansmi ssi on Inst al l at i on (cont' d)
22. Inst al l t he power st eer i ng li ne hol der bolt (A) and t he 24. Inst al l t he subf r ame mi d mount on both si des wi t h
power st eer i ng l i ne to t he c l amp (B). new bol t s.
23. Inst al l t he l ower t r ansmi ssi on mount mount i ng nut s.
25. Inst al l t he r ear engi ne mount bracket bol t s wi t h new
12x 1. 25 mm
88 N-m (9.0 k g f m, 65 Ibf-ft)
Replace.
13-18
26. Install exhaust pi pe A wi t h new gasket s (B), t he bol t s,
t he spr i ngs, and new nut s as shown.
8 x 1.25 mm (3.4 kgf-m,
22 Nm 25 Ibfft)
(2.2 kgf m, 16 Ibfft) Repl ac e.
27. Connec t t he knuckl e bal l j oi nt ont o t he l ower ar m (see
page 18-21).
28. Inst al l t he damper f ork (see st ep 4 on page 18-33).
29. Refi ll t he t r ansmi ssi on f l ui d t o t he pr oper l evel (see
page 13-5).
30. Inst al l t he f ront spl ash shi el d.
31. Inst al l t he f ront wheel s, and set t hem i n t he
st r ai ght -ahead posi t i on.
32. L ower t he vehi c l e on t he lift.
33. Inst al l t he upper t r ansmi ssi on mount bol t s (A).
12x1.25 mm
64 N-m
(6.5 kgf m, 47 Ibfft)
34. Inst al l t he upper t r ansmi ssi on mount br acket (A) wi t h
new bol t s, and c onnec t t he gr ound c abl e (B) by
i nst al l i ng i ts mount i ng bolt.
12x1.25 mm
54 N-m
(5.5 kgf m,
40 Ibfft) 6x1.0 mm
Repl ac e. 9.8 N-m
(cont' d)
13-19
Tr ansmi ssi on i nst al l at i on (cont' d)
35. Inst al l new upper t r ansmi ssi on mount bracket bol t s
(A).
NOTE:
If t he TORX bolt (B) was r emoved by mi st ake dur i ng
r emoval , t he upper t r ansmi ssi on bracket must be
36. Inst al l t he st eer i ng st i f f ener pl at es (A), and l oosel y
t i ght en new power st eer i ng gear box mount i ng bol t s
(B) and t he st i f f ener plate bol t s (C).
NOTE: Make sur e t he l ower was her s pl aced in st ep 11
ar e cor r ect l y posi t i oned bef ore i nst al l i ng t he bol t s.
37. Inst al l t he power st eer i ng gear box mount i ng bracket
(A), and t i ght en t he bolts to t he speci f i ed t or que, t hen
i nst al l t he heat shi el d (B).
38. Ti ght en t he dr i ver ' s si de of t he power st eer i ng gear
box mount i ng bolts and t he st i f f ener plate bol t s to t he
speci f i ed t orque al t ernat el y i n t wo st eps.
39. Inst al l t he rear power st eer i ng li ne hol der s (A).
6 x 1.0 mm
9.8 N-m
(1.0 kgf -m,
7. 2 Ibf-ft)
A
13-20
40. Install t hr ee new r ear engi ne mount bol t s (A) and t wo
new rear engi ne mount bracket bol t s (B).
12 x 1.25 mm
78 N m
(8.0 kgf -m,
58 Ibf f t )
Repl ac e.
B
12x 1. 25 mm
88 N-m
(9.0 kgf -m,
65 Ibf f t )
Repl ac e.
41. Install a new front engi ne mount bolt (A), t he front
engi ne mount st op (B), and t he vac uum hose bracket
(C) wi t h new nut s, t hen c onnec t t he vac uum hose (D).
10x 1. 25 mm
54 N-m
(5.5 kgf -m,
40 Ibf f t )
Repl ac e.
12 x 1.25 mm
78 N-m
(8.0 kgf -m,
58 Ibf f t )
Repl ac e.
42. Remove t he engi ne suppor t hanger and t he engi ne
hanger adapt er f r om t he engi ne.
43. Inst al l t he evapor at i ve emi ssi on (EVAP) cani st er hose
(A) and t he br ake boost er vac uum hose (B).
44. Inst al l t he st rut br ace (A) wi t h t he nut s (B), t hen i nst al l
t he hose to t he c l amp (C).
B
8 x 1.25 mm
22 N-m
(2.2 kgf m, 16 Ibf f t )
8 x 1.25 mm
22 N-m
(2.2 kgf m,
(cont ' d)
13-21
45. Install the bracket (A) and the harness clamp (B).
46. Install the harness clamp (A). Connect the output shaft
(countershaft) speed sensor connector (B) and the
back-up light switch connector (C).
B
47. Apply a light coat of silicone grease (P/N
08C30-B0234M) to the cable ends (A) and connect the
cable end to the change lever assembly (B), then
install the shift cable bracket (C) and the lock pins (D).
Do not bend or damage the shift cables.
NOTE: Make sure not to get any silicone grease on the
terminal part of the connectors and swi tches,
especially if you have silicone grease on your hands
or gloves.
8x 1. 25 mm
48. Install the under-hood fuse/relay box (A).
A
13-22
49. Appl y a li ght coat of super hi gh t emp ur ea gr ease (P/N
08798-9002) to t he end of t he sl ave cyl i nder pushr od.
Inst al l t he sl ave cyl i nder and t he bracket mount i ng
nut. Be caref ul not to bend t he cl ut ch l i ne.
50. Inst al l t he battery base (A) and t he cabl e c l amp (B).
(1.0 kgf.m, 7.2 I bfft) 16 I bfft)
51. Install t he ai r c l eaner assembl y (see page 11-332).
53. Inst al l t he front gri l l e c over .
55. Chec k t he shi ft l ever and t he cl ut ch oper at i on.
13-23
Tr ansmi ssi on Disassembly
Expl oded Vi ew-Cl ut c h Housi ng
DI FFERENTI AL A S S E MB L Y
SHIF T F ORK ASSEMB LY
6 mm F LANGE BOLT
13 N-m (1.3 kgf -m, 9.4 Ibf-ft)
BEARI NG S E T PL ATE
COUNTERSHAF T ASSEMB LY
NEEDLE BEARING
OIL GUIDE PLATE C
1 4 x 2 0 mm DOWEL PIN
MAGNET
MAI NSHAFT A S S E MB L Y
28 mm WASHER
28 mm SPRING WASHER
BALL BEARI NG
28 x 43 x 7 mm OIL SEAL
Repl ac e.
RE VE RS E IDLER GEAR S HAFT
RE VE RS E IDLER GEAR
@6 m m S PECI AL BOL T
15 N-m (1.5 k g f m, 11 Ibf-ft)
RE VE RS E SHIFT FORK
RE VE RS E L OCK CAM
35 x 58 x 8 mm OIL S E A L
Replace.
BACK -UP L IGHT SWI TCH
29 N-m (3.0 kgf -m, 22 Ibf-ft)
CL UTCH HOUSI NG
@ BAFFL E PL ATE
72 mm S NAP RING
13-24
TRANSMISSION HOUSING
1mm SEALING WASHER
Replace.
(D 1 mm FLANGEBOLT
44 N-m (4.5 kgf-m, 33 Ibf f t )
8 mm FLANGEBOLT
27 N m (2.8 kgf -m, 20 Ibf f t )
TRANSMISSION HANGER A
INTERLOCK BOLT
39 N-m (4.0 kgf-m, 29 Ibf f t )
OI L GUI DE PLATEM
7 2 mm SH I M
O I L GUTTER PLATE
8mm SHIM
8 x 1 4 mm DOWELPIN
CHANGE LEVER ASSEMBLY
6 mm FLANGEBOLT
12 N-m (1.2 kgf -m, 8.7 Ibf f t )
DETENT BOL T
22 N-m (2.2 kgf -m, 16 Ibf f t )
12 mm S EAL I NG WAS HER
Replace.
SPRI NG
S TE E L BAL L
@ TRANS MI S S I ON HANGER B
@ TRANS MI S S I ON HANGER C
Replace.
FI L L ER PL UG
44 N-m (4.5 kgf -m, 33 Ibf f t )
40 x 56 x 8 mm OIL S E A L
Replace.
Replace.
@ DRAIN PL UG
39 N m (4.0 kgf -m, 29 Ibf f t )
32 mm S EAL I NG CAP
34 N m (3.5 kgf -m, 25 Ibf f t )
10 mm FL ANGE BOL T
44 N-m (4.5 kgf -m, 33 Ibf f t )
20 mm BOL T
44 N m (4.5 kgf -m, 33 Ibf f t )
Replace.
OUTPUT S HAFT (COUNTERSHAFT)
S PE E D S E NS OR
O-RING
Replace.
PLAIN WAS HER
6 mm FL ANGE BOL T
12 N-m (1.2 kgf -m, 8.7 Ibf f t )
(cont'd)
13-25
Transmission Disassembly (cont'd)
NOTE: Pl ace t he cl ut ch housi ng on t wo pi eces of wood
t hi ck enough to keep t he mai nshaf t f r om hi tti ng t he
wor kbenc h.
1. Remove t he r el ease bear i ng and t he r el ease fork (see
page 12-20).
2. Remove t he det ent bol t s (A), t he 12 mm seal i ng
was her s (B), t he spr i ngs (D), t he st eel bal l s (E), and t he
back-up li ght swi t c h (F).
3. Remove t r ansmi ssi on hanger C, t he 20 mm bolt (G),
and t he 20 mm seal i ng was her (H).
4. Remove t he i nt erl ock bolt (A), t he c hange l ever
assembl y (B), and t he 8x 1 4 mm dowel pi ns (C).
5. Remove t he dr ai n pl ug (A), t he f i l l er pl ug (B), t he
10 mm f l ange bolt (C), and t he seal i ng was her s (D).
6. Remove t he out put shaf t (count ershaf t ) speed s ens or
(E), t he pl ai n was her (F), and t he O-ri ng (G).
7. L oosen t he 8 mm f l ange bol t s i n a c r i s s c r os s pattern
i n sever al st eps, t hen r emove t hem wi t h t r ansmi ssi on
hanger A and t r ansmi ssi on hanger B.
A
13-26
8. Remove t he 32 mm seal i ng c ap (A).
D
9. Whi l e expandi ng t he 72 mm snap ri ng (B) on t he
count er shaf t bal l bear i ng wi t h snap ri ng pl i er s, lift t he
t r ansmi ssi on housi ng (C). Rel ease t he snap ri ng
pl i er s, and r emove t he t r ansmi ssi on housi ng and t he
t hr ee 14 x 20 mm dowel pi ns (D).
10. Remove t he baffle pl at e (A).
11. Remove t he r ever se lock c am (A).
12. Remove t he r ever se i dl er gear (A) and t he r ever se
i dl er gear shaf t (B).
13. Remove t he r ever se shi ft fork (A).
(cont' d)
13-27
Manual Tr ans mi s s i o n
Transmission DIsassemblf (cont'd)
14. Appl y t ape to t he mai nshaf t spl i nes t o prot ect t he s eal ,
t hen r emove t he mai nshaf t assembl y (A) and t he
count er shaf t assembl y (B) wi t h t he shi ft fork
assembl y (C) f r om t he cl ut ch housi ng (D).
15. Remove t he 28 mm spr i ng was her (E) and t he 28 mm
was her (F).
16. Remove t he di fferenti al assembl y (A) and t he magnet
(B).
17 Remove t he oi l gutter plate (A), t he 72 mm shi m (B),
and oi l gui de plate M.
13-28
Reverse Shift Fork Clearance
Inspection
1. Measur e t he c l ear anc e bet ween t he r ever se Idler gear
(A) and t he r ever se shi ft fork (B) wi t h a f eel er gauge
(C). If t he c l ear anc e exc eeds t he ser vi c e li mi t , go to
st ep 2.
St andar d; 0.20-0.59 mm (0.008-0.023 In)
. Measur e t he wi dt h of t he r ever se shi f t fork.
If t he wi dt h i s not wi t hi n t he st andar d, r epl ace t he
r ever se shi ft fork.
If t he wi dt h i s wi t hi n t he st andar d, r epl ace t he
r ever se i dl er gear .
St andar d: 13.4-13.7 mm (0.53-0.54 i n)
Change Lever Clearance Imsps^to^
1. Measur e t he c l ear anc e bet ween t he c hange l ever (A)
and t he sel ect l ever (B) wi t h a f eel er gauge (C). If t he
c l ear anc e exc eeds t he ser vi c e li mi t, go to st ep 2.
St andar d: 0.050.25 mm (0.0020.010 i n)
2. Measur e t he gr oove wi dt h of t he c hange l ever.
If t he gr oove wi dt h i s not wi t hi n t he st andar d,
r epl ace t he c hange l ever.
If t he gr oove wi dt h i s wi t hi n t he st andar d, r epl ace
t he sel ect l ever.
St andar d: 15.00-15.10 mm (0.591-0.594 i n)
13-29
Change Lever Assembl y Disassembly/Reassembly
NOTE: Pri or t o r eassembl i ng, c l ean all t he part s i n sol vent , dry t hem, and appl y gr ease to cont act sur f ac es as s h o w n . Do
not was h t he r ubber part s wi t h sol vent .
DUST SEAL
Replace.
SELECT LEVER
Be careful not to damage the dust seal
when installing i t
6 x 1.0 mm
12N-m
(1.2 kgfm, 8.7 Ibf-ft)
BREATHER CAP
Turn it toward the front , ,,
of the vehicle, then install it. AjO
SHIF T ARM COVER
1ST/2ND SELECT SPRING
SELECT STOP PLATE
INTERLOCK
CHANGE LEVER COVER
8 mm SPECIAL BOLT
31 N-m
(3.2 kgfm, 23 ibf-ft)
8 mm SPRING WASHER
REVERSE LOCK CAM STRIKER
13-30
Shift Fork Clearance Inspection
1. Measur e t he cl ear ance bet ween eac h shi ft fork (A)
and its mat chi ng sync hr o sl eeve (B). If t he c l ear anc e
exc eeds t he ser vi c e li mi t, go t o st ep 2.
St andar d: 0. 35- 0. 65 mm (0. 014-0. 026 i nj
B
A
2. Measur e t he t hi ckness of t he shi f t fork f i nger s.
If t he t hi c kness i s not wi t hi n t he st andar d, r epl ace
. t he shi ft f or k.
If t he t hi c kness i s wi t hi n t he st andar d, r epl ace t he
sync hr o sl eeve and t he sync hr o hub as a set .
If one ar m of t he shi ft fork s hows mor e wear t han
ot her s, t he fork may be bent and needs to be
r epl aced.
St andar d: 7. 4- 7. 6 mm (0. 29-0. 30 i n)
3. Measur e t he c l ear anc e bet ween t he shi ft fork (A) and
t he shi ft ar m (B). If t he c l ear anc e exc eeds t he ser vi c e
l i mi t , go to st ep 4.
St andar d: 0. 2- 0. 5 mm (0.01 - 0 . 0 2 in)
4. Measur e t he wi dt h of t he shi ft ar m.
If t he wi dt h i s not wi t hi n t he st andar d, r epl ace t he
shi ft ar m.
If t he wi dt h i s wi t hi n t he st andar d, repl ace t he shi ft
fork.
St andar d: 16. 9- 17. 0 mm (0. 665-0. 669 i n)
13-31
Shi f t Fork Di sassembl y/Reassembl y
NOTE: Pri or to r eassembl i ng, c l ean all t he par t s i n sol vent , dry t hem, and appl y MTF to all cont act sur f ac es.
5TH SHI FT FORK
13-32
Mainshaft Assembly Clearance Inspection
1. Suppor t t he bear i ng Inner r ace wi t h an appr opr i at e
si zed socket ( A ) , and push down on t he mai nshaf t ( B ) .
E
2. Measur e t he cl ear ance bet ween 2nd gear (C) and 3rd
gear (D) wi t h a f eel er gauge (E).
If t he c l ear anc e exc eeds t he ser vi c e li mi t, go t o
st ep 3.
If t he c l ear anc e i s wi t hi n t he ser vi c e li mi t, go t o
st ep 4.
St andar d: 0. 06- 0. 16 mm (0. 002-0. 006 i n)
3. Measur e t he t hi ckness of 3rd gear .
If the t hi c kness i s l ess t han t he ser vi c e l i mi t , r epl ace
3rd gear .
If t he t hi c kness i s wi t hi n t he ser vi c e li mi t, r epl ace
t he 3rd/4th sync hr o hub and t he 3rd/4th sync hr o
sl eeve as a set .
St andar d: 23. 92-23. 97 mm (0. 942-0. 944 i n)
4. Measur e t he c l ear anc e bet ween 4th gear ( A ) and t he
4th/5th gear di st ance col l ar ( B ) wi t h a di al i ndi cat or
( C) .
If t he c l ear anc e exc eeds t he ser vi c e l i mi t , go t o
st ep 5.
e If t he c l ear anc e i s wi t hi n t he ser vi c e li mi t , go t o
st ep 7.
St andar d: 0.060.16 mm (0. 002-0. 006 i n)
5. Measur e t he lengt h of t he 4th/5th gear di st anc e
col l ar as shown.
If t he l engt h i s not wi t hi n t he st andar d, r epl ace
t he 4th/5th gear di st ance col l ar ,
e If t he l engt h i s wi t hi n t he st andar d, go to st ep 6.
St andar d: 24. 03- 24. 08 mm (0. 946-0. 948 i n)
(cont ' d)
13-33
l ai oshaf t Assembly Clearance Inspection ( c ont ' d)
6. Measur e t he t hi c kness of 4th gear ,
m If t he t hi c kness i s l ess t han t he ser vi c e l i mi t , r epl ace
4th gear .
Sf t he t hi c kness i s wi t hi n t he ser vi c e li mi t, r epl ace
t he 3rd/4th sync hr o hub and t he 3rd/4th sync hr o
sl eeve as a set .
St andar d: 23. 92- 23. 97 mm (0. 942-0. 944 i n)
7. Measur e t he c l ear anc e bet ween t he 4th/5th gear
di st ance col l ar (A) and 5th gear (B) wi t h a di al
i ndi cat or (C).
If t he c l ear anc e exc eeds t he ser vi c e li mi t , go to
st ep 8.
If t he c l ear anc e i s wi t hi n t he ser vi c e li mi t, go t o
st ep 10.
St andar d: 0. 06- 0. 16 mm (0. 002-0. 006 i n)
8. Measur e t he length @ of t he 4th/5th gear di st ance
col l ar as s hown.
If t he lengt h i s not wi t hi n t he st andar d, r epl ace
t he 4th/5th gear di st ance col l ar .
If t he lengt h i s wi t hi n t he st andar d, go to st ep 9.
St andar d: 24. 03-24. 08 mm (0. 946-0. 948 i n)
0
0
9. Measur e t he t hi ckness of 5th gear .
If t he t hi ckness i s l ess t han t he ser vi c e li mi t , r epl ace
5th gear .
t he 5th sync hr o hub and 5th sync hr o sl eeve as a set .
St andar d: 23. 92-23. 97 mm (0. 942-0. 944 i n)
13-34
i
Mai nshaf t Disassembly
10. Measur e t he length of t he MBS di st ance col l ar . If the
length i s not wi t hi n st andar d, r epl ace t he MBS
di st ance col l ar.
St andar d: 23. 95-24. 05 mm (0. 943-0. 947 i n)
1
NOTE: Ref er to t he Expl oded Vi ew i n t he Mai nshaf t
Reassembl y, as needed, when r emovi ng c omponent s
pr essed ont o t he mai nshaf t (see page 13-38).
1. Remove t he angul ar ball bear i ng (A) and t he t aper ed
c one ri ng usi ng a c ommer c i al l y avai l abl e bear i ng
separ at or (B) and a c ommer c i al l y avai l abl e bear i ng
pul l er (C). Make sur e t he bear i ng separ at or i s under
t he t aper ed c one ri ng.
2. Suppor t 5th gear (A) on st eel bl ocks, and pr ess t he
mai nshaf t out of t he 5th sync hr o hub (B) and 5th gear .
NOTE: Do not use a j aw-t ype pul l er; it can damage t he
gear t eet h.
(cont' d)
13-35
Mai nshaf t Di sassembl y (cont'd) Mai nshaf t Inspect i on
3. Suppor t 3rd gear (A) on st eel bl oc ks, and pr ess t he
mai nshaf t out of t he 3r d/ 4t h sync hr o hub (B) and
3r d gear .
NOTE: Do not use a j aw-t ype pul l er; it c an damage t he
gear t eet h.

1. Inspect t he gear and bear i ng cont act ar eas f or wear
and damage, t hen measur e t he mai nshaf t at poi nt s A,
B, C, D, and E. If any part of t he mai nshaf t i s l ess t han
t he ser vi c e li mi t , r epl ace it.
Standard:
A Ball Bearing Contact Area
(Transmission Housing Si de):
27.987-28.000 mm (1.1018-1.1024 in)
B 4th/5th Gear Distance Collar Contact Area:
31.984-32.000 mm (1.2592-1.2598 in)
C Needl e Bearing Contact Area:
38.984-39.000 mm (1.5348-1.5354 in)
D Ball Bearing Contact Area (Clutch Housing Si de):
27.977-27.990 mm (1.1015-1.1020 in)
E Bushing Contact Area:
20.80-20.85 mm (0.819-0.821 in)
Ser wi ce Limit:
A: 27.93 mm (1.100 in)
B: 31.93 mm (1.257 in)
C: 38.93 mm (1.533 in)
D: 27.92 mm (1.099 in)
E: 20.75 mm (0.817 in)
13-36
2. Inspect t he runout by suppor t i ng both ends of t he
mai nshaf t . Then rotate t he mai nshaf t t wo compl et e
t ur ns whi l e measur i ng wi t h a di al gauge. If t he runout
exc eeds t he ser vi c e l i mi t , r epl ace t he mai nshaf t .
St andar d: 0.02 mm (0.001 i n) max.
Mainshaft Reassembl y
Expl oded Vi ew
3RD/ 4TH
SY NCHRO
SLEEVE
Note the direction
of installation.
3RD/ 4TH
S YNCHRO HUB
Note the direction
of installation.
SY NCHRO S PRI NG
S YNCHRO RI NG*
INNER RI NG*
3RD GEAR
NE E DL E BEARI NG
Check for wear and
operation.
MAI NSHAFT
4TH/ 5TH GEAR DI S TANCE COL L AR
ANGUL AR BAL L BEARI NG
Check for wear and
operation.
Note the direction of
installation.
TAPERED CONE RING
MBS DI S TANCE COL L AR
S YNCHRO RING
S YNCHRO S PRI NG
5TH S YNCHRO S L E E VE
rvAe the direction
of installation.
5TH S YNCHRO HUB
S YNCHRO SPRI NG
S YNCHRO RING
5TH GEAR
NEEDL E BEARI NGS
Check for wear and
operation.
4TH GEAR
INNER RI NG*
S YNCHRO CONE *
S YNCHRO RI NG*
S YNCHRO S PRI NG
*: The components of the double cone synchro assembly.
13-38
Dri ver Handl e, 40 mm I.D. 07746-0030100
Beari ng Dr i ver At t achment , 30 mm 07746-0030300
NOTE: Ref er t o t he Expl oded Vi ew, as needed, dur i ng
t hi s pr ocedur e.
1. Cl ean al l t he part s i n sol vent , dry t hem, and appl y MTF
to all cont act sur f ac es.
2. Install t he needl e bear i ng (A) and 3r d gear (B) ont o t he
mai nshaf t (C).
B
3. Install t he doubl e c one sync hr o assembl y (A) wi t h t he
sync hr o spr i ng (B) by al i gni ng t he sync hr o c one
f i nger s (C) wi t h t he hol es (D) i n 3r d gear .
4. Inst al l t he 3rd/4t h sync hr o hub (A) by al i gni ng t he
sync hr o ri ng f i nger s (B) wi t h t he gr ooves (C) i n t he
3rd/4th sync hr o hub.
NOTE: Make sur e t o i nst al l t he 3rd/4t h sync hr o hub i n
t he di r ect i on s hown.
A
5. Pr ess on t he 3rd/4t h sync hr o hub (A) usi ng t he 40 mm
I.D. dr i ver handl e (B) and a pr ess (C).
A
(cont ' d)
13-39
Mainshaft Reassembly (cont' d)
6. Inst al l t he 3rd/4t h sync hr o sl eeve (A) by al i gni ng t he
st ops (B) of t he 3rd/4t h sync hr o sl eeve and t he 3rd/4t h
sync hr o hub. Af t er i nst al l i ng, check t he oper at i on of
t he 3rd/4t h sync hr o hub set .
7. Inst al l t he doubl e c one sync hr o assembl y (A) wi t h t he
sync hr o spr i ng (B) by al i gni ng t he sync hr o ri ng
f i nger s (C) wi t h t he gr ooves (D) i n t he 3rd/4t h sync hr o
hub.
8. Install 4th gear (A) by al i gni ng t he sync hr o c one
f i nger s (B) wi t h t he hol es (C) in 4th gear .
9. Install t he 4th/5th gear di st ance col l ar (A) wi t h t he
needl e bear i ngs (B) and 5th gear (C).
10. Inst al l t he sync hr o ri ng (D) wi t h t he sync hr o spr i ng (E)
onto 5th gear .
13-40
11. Inst al l t he 5th sync hr o hub (A) by al i gni ng t he sync hr o
ri ng f i nger s (B) wi t h t he gr ooves (C) i n t he 5th sync hr o
hub.
12. Pr ess on t he 5th sync hr o hub (A) usi ng t he 40 mm I.D.
dr i ver handl e (B), t he 30 mm bear i ng dr i ver
at t achment (C), and a pr ess (D).
B
07746-0030100
0/746-0030300
13. Inst al l t he 5th sync hr o sl eeve (A) by al i gni ng t he sl ot s
of t he 5th sync hr o sl eeve and t he 5th sync hr o hub (B).
After i nst al l i ng, check t he oper at i on of t he 5th sync hr o
hub set .
NOTE: Make sur e to al i gn t he sl ot s i n t he 5th sync hr o
hub as s hown.
14. Install t he sync hr o ri ng (A) wi t h t he sync hr o spr i ng (B)
by al i gni ng t he sync hr o ri ng f i nger s (C) wi t h t he
gr ooves (D) in t he 5th sync hr o hub.
15. Install t he MBS di st ance col l ar (E) and t he t aper ed
cone ri ng (F).
(cont' d)
13-41
Mainshaft Reassembl y (cont'd)
16. Pr ess on a new angul ar ball bear i ng (A) usi ng t he
40 mm I.D. dr i ver handl e (B), t he 30 mm bear i ng
dr i ver at t achment (C), and a pr ess (D).
Countershaft Assembly Clearance
Inspection
NOTE: Bef or e i nspect i on, make sur e t he spec i al bolt i s
t i ght ened to t he speci f i ed t or que (see page 13-46).
1. Measur e t he c l ear anc e bet ween 1st gear (A) and t he
1st gear di st ance col l ar (B) wi t h a f eel er gauge (C).
If t he c l ear anc e exc eeds t he ser vi c e li mi t , go to
st ep 2.
If t he c l ear anc e i s wi t hi n t he ser vi c e li mi t, go to
st ep 4.
St andar d: 0. 06- 0. 16 mm (0. 002-0. 006 i n)
r ^ z 3
2. Measur e t he length of t he 1st gear di st ance col l ar as
s hown.
If t he l engt h i s not wi t hi n t he st andar d, r epl ace t he
1st gear di st ance col l ar .
# If t he l engt h i s wi t hi n t he st andar d, go to st ep 3.
St andar d: 23. 03-23. 08 mm (0. 907-0. 909 i n)
13*42
3. Measur e t he t hi ckness of 1 st gear .
If t he t hi c kness i s l ess t han t he ser vi c e li mi t, r epl ace
1st gear . *
If t he t hi ckness i s wi t hi n t he ser vi c e li mi t , repl ace
t he 1s t / 2nd sync hr o hub and t he r ever se gear as a
set .
St andar d: 22.92~22.97 mm (0. 902-0. 904 In)
4. Measur e t he cl ear ance bet ween 2nd gear (A) and 3rd
gear (B) wi t h a f eel er gauge (C). If t he c l ear anc e
exc eeds t he ser vi c e li mi t, go to st ep 5.
St andar d: 0. 06- 0. 16 mm f i . i i 2 - i . i i 6 i n)
5. Measur e t he length of t he 2nd gear di st ance col l ar .
If t he l engt h i s not wi t hi n t he st andar d, r epl ace t he
2nd gear di st ance col l ar .
If t he lengt h i s wi t hi n t he st andar d, go to st ep 6.
St andar d: 28. 03- 28. 08 mm (1. 104-1. 106 i n)
I
6. Measur e t he t hi ckness of 2nd gear .
If t he t hi ckness i s l ess t han t he ser vi ce li mi t, r epl ace
2nd gear .
t he 1s t / 2nd sync hr o hub an d r ever se gear as a set .
St andar d: 27. 92- 27. 97 mm (1. 099-1. 101 i n)
13-43
Countershaft Disassembly
NOTE: Ref er to t he Expl oded Vi ew in t he Count er shaf t
Reassembl y, as needed, when r emovi ng c omponent s
pr essed ont o t he count er shaf t (see page 13-46).
1. Sec ur el y c l amp t he count er shaf t assembl y In a benc h
vi se wi t h wood bl ocks.
2. Remove t he spec i al bolt (left-hand t hr eads).
3. Suppor t t he bal l bear i ng (A) on st eel bl ocks ( B) , t hen
use a pr ess (C) and an at t achment (D) to pr ess t he
count er shaf t out of t he bal l bear i ng.
4. Remove t he 35 mm shi m and t he di st ance col l ar .
5. Suppor t 4th gear (A) on st eel bl ocks (B), t hen use a
pr ess (C) and an at t achment (D) to pr ess t he
count er shaf t (E) out of 4th gear and 5th gear .
13-44
Countershaft Inspection
1. Inspect t he gear and beari ng cont act ar eas f or wear
and damage, t hen measur e t he count er shaf t at poi nt s
A, B, and C. If any part of t he count er shaf t i s l ess t han
t he ser vi c e li mi t, r epl ace it.
St andar d:
A Bal l Bear i ng Cont ac t Ar ea
(Tr ansmi ssi on Housi ng Si de):
30. 020-30. 033 mm (1.1819-1.1824 i n)
B 1st Gear Di st anc e Col l ar Cont ac t Ar ea:
39. 937-39. 950 mm (1.5723-1.5728 i n)
C Needl e Bear i ng Cont ac t Ar ea
(Cl ut ch Housi ng Si de):
40. 000-40. 015 mm (1.5748-1.5754 i n)
A: 29.97 mm (1.180 i n)
B: 39.88 mm (1.570 i n)
C: 39.95 mm (1.573 i n)
2. Inspect t he runout by suppor t i ng both ends of t he
count er shaf t . Then rotate t he count er shaf t t wo
compl et e t ur ns whi l e measur i ng wi t h a di al gauge. If
t he runout exc eeds t he ser vi c e li mi t , r epl ace t he
count er shaf t .
St andar d: 0.02 mm (0.001 i n) max.
Countershaft Reassembly
Expl oded Vi ew
REVERSE GEAR .
(1ST/ 2ND S YNCHRO S L E E VE )
1ST/2ND
S YNCHRO HUB
Not e t he di r ect i on
of i nst al l at i on.
SY NCHRO SPRING
S YNCHRO RING*
S YNCHRO CONE*
INNER RI NG*
1S T GEAR
NEEDLE BEARING
Chec k f or wear
and operation.
1ST GEAR
DI S TANCE COL L AR
COUNTERS HAFT
S PECI AL BOL T
NOTE: Lef t -hand t hr eads.
119 N-m (12.1 k g f m, 87.5 Ibf-ft)
Repl ac e.
BAL L BEARI NG
Chec k f or wear and oper at i on.
Not e t he di r ect i on of
i nst al l at i on.
35 mm SHIM
DI S TANCE COL L AR
5TH GEAR
4TH GEAR
3RD GEAR
2ND GE AR
NEEDLE BEARI NG
Chec k f or wear and
oper at i on.
2ND GEAR
DI STANCE COL L AR
FRICTION DAMPER
Chec k f or wear and damage.
Not e t he di r ect i on of i nst al l at i on.
INNER RI NG*
S YNCHRO CONE *
S YNCHRO RI NG*
S YNCHRO SPRI NG
*: The c omponent s of t he t ri pl e c one sync hr o as s embl y .
13-46
. Dri ver Handl e, 40 mm I.D. 07746-0030100
Bear i ng Dr i ver At t achment , 30 mm 07746-0030300
NOTE: Ref er to t he Expl oded Vi ew, as needed, duri ng
t hi s pr ocedur e.
1. Cl ean all t he part s in sol vent , dry t hem, and appl y MTF
to all cont act sur f ac es.
2. Install t he 1st gear di st ance col l ar (A) wi t h t he needl e
beari ng (B) and 1st gear (C) onto t he count er shaf t (D).
3. Install t he tri ple c one sync hr o assembl y (A) wi t h t he
sync hr o spr i ng (B) by al i gni ng the sync hr o c one
f i nger s (C) wi t h t he gr ooves (D) in 1st gear .
4. Inst al l t he 1st /2nd sync hr o hub (A) by al i gni ng t he
sync hr o ri ng f i nger s (B) wi t h t he gr ooves (C) i n t he
1st /2nd sync hr o hub.
5. Inst al l t he r ever se gear (A) by al i gni ng t he sl ot s of t he
r ever se gear and t he 1st /2nd sync hr o hub (B). Af t er
i nst al l i ng, check t he operat i on of t he 1st /2nd sync hr o
hub set .
NOTE: Make sur e to al i gn t he sl ot s in t he 1 st /2nd
sync hr o hub as shown.
(cont ' d)
13-47
Countershaft Reassembl y (cont' d)
6. Inst al l t he tri ple c one sync hr o assembl y (A) wi t h t he 8. Inst al l t he needl e bear i ng (A),
sync hr o spr i ng (B) by al i gni ng t he sync hr o ri ng
7. Inst al l t he 2nd gear di st ance col l ar (A) and t he fri cti on
9
-
l n s t a l 1 2 n d
9
e a r
^
b
V al i g ni ng t he sync hr o c one
damper (B) by al i gni ng t he f ri ct i on damper f i nger s (C) f i nger s (C) wi t h t he gr ooves (D) in 2nd gear .
wi t h t he gr ooves (D) i n t he 1s t / 2nd sync hr o hub.
1 0
. Suppor t t he count er shaf t (A) on st eel bl ocks, t hen
13-48
11. Pr ess on 4th gear (A) usi ng t he 40 mm I.D. dr i ver
handl e (B) and a pr ess (C).
NOTE: Do not exc eed t he maxi mum pr essur e.
C
25,480 N
(2,600 kgf ,
5,730 Ibf)
max.
07746-0030100
A
12. Pr ess on 5th gear (A) usi ng t he 40 mm I.D. dri ver
handl e (B) and a pr ess (C).
NOTE: Do not exc eed t he maxi mum pr essur e.
.c
25,480 N
M (2,600 kgf,
5,730 Ibf)
max.
07746-0030100
A
13. Install t he di st ance col l ar (A), t he 35 mm shi m (B), and
t empor ar i l y pr ess on t he used ol d ball bear i ng (C)
usi ng t he 40 mm I.D. dr i ver handl e (D), t he 30 mm
bear i ng dr i ver at t achment (E), and a pr ess (F).
NOTE:
Us e any si ze of 35 mm s hi m, and note t he si ze you
used. Measur ement s t aken in t he f ol l owi ng st eps
wi l l det er mi ne t he cor r ect shi m to use f or f i nal
assembl y.
Make sur e t he ball bear i ng i s i nst al l ed i n t he correct
di rect i on.
07746-0030100
(cont' d)
13-49
IVSanuaf Tr ansmi ssi on
Countershaft Reassembly (cont' d)
14. Measur e t he c l ear anc e bet ween t he ball bear i ng (A)
and t he 35 mm shi m (B) wi t h a f eel er gauge (C).
St andar d: 0. 04- 0. 10 mm (0.002 - 0. 004 i n)
15. If t he measur ed c l ear anc e i n st ep 14 i s not wi t hi n t he
st andar d, sel ec t anot her sui t abl e 35 mm shi m f r om
t he t abl e, t hen go to next st ep to r epl ace t he 35 mm
shi m and t he ball bear i ng wi t h new ones. If t he
measur ed c l ear anc e in st ep 14 i s wi t hi n t he st andar d,
go to t he next st ep to r epl ace onl y t he ball bear i ng
wi t h a new one.
35 mm Shi m
Type Thi c kness
A u 87 mm (0.034 in)
AA 0.91 mm (0.036 in)
B C.95 mm (0.037 in)
AB 99 mm (0.039 i n)
C ' 03 mm (0.041 i n)
AC ' 07 mm (0.042 in)
n
. - . M M (0.G44 i n)
AD 1.15 mm (0.045 in)
E 1.19 mm (0.047 in)
AE 1.23 mm (0.048 in)
F 27 mm (0.050 in)
AF 1.31 mm (0.052 in)
G \ 35 mm (0.053 in)
AG 1.39 mm (0.055 in)
H 43 mm (0.056 i n)
AH 1.47 mm (0.058 in)
J 1.51 mm (0.060 in)
AJ 55 mm (0.061 in)
K 59 mm (0.063 in)
AK 1.63 mm (0.064 i n)
L 1.67 mm (0.066 in)
AL 1.71 mm (0.067 in)
M 1.75 mm (0.069 in)
AM 1.79 mm (0.070 in)
N 1.83 mm (0.072 i n)
AN 1.87 mm (0.074 in)
P 1.91 mm (0.075 in)
AP 1.95 mm (0.077 in)
Q 1.99 mm (0.078 in)
16. Remove t he ball bear i ng and t he 35 mm shi m usi ng a
pr ess (see st ep 3 on page 13-44).
13-50
<3
17. Inst al l t he cor r ect 35 mm shi m (A) and new ball
bear i ng (B) usi ng t he 40 mm I.D. dr i ver handl e (C), t he
30 mm bear i ng dr i ver at t achment (D), and a pr ess (E).
NOTE:
If nec essar y, r epl ace t he 35 mm shi m wi t h t he
cor r ect one sel ec t ed i n st ep 15.
Make sur e t he bal l bear i ng i s i nst al l ed i n t he cor r ect
di r ect i on.
18. Chec k t he c l ear anc e bet ween t he bal l bear i ng and t he
35 mm shi m wi t h a f eel er gauge.
19. Sec ur el y c l amp t he count er shaf t assembl y in a bench
vi se wi t h wood bl ocks (A).
A
20. Ti ght en a new spec i al bolt (B) (left-hand t hr eads).
NOTE: Appl y new MTF t o t he bolt t hr eads and f l ange.
Sync hr o Sl eeve and Hub Inspect i on
and Reassembl y
1. Inspect t he gear t eet h on all sync hr o hubs and
sync hr o sl eeves f or wear (r ounded off c or ner s).
2. Inst al l eac h sync hr o hub (A) i n i ts mat i ng sync hr o
sl eeve (B), and c hec k f or f ree movement . Make sur e to
mat ch t he t hr ee set s of l onger t eet h (C) (120 degr ees
apart ) on t he sync hr o sl eeve wi t h t he t hr ee set s of
deeper gr ooves (D) i n t he sync hr o hub.
NOTE:
Do not i nst al l t he sync hr o sl eeve wi t h its l onger
t eet h i n t he 1st /2nd and 5th sync hr o hub sl ot s (E)
bec ause it wi l l damage t he spr i ng r i ng.
If r epl acement i s r equi r ed, al ways r epl ace t he
sync hr o sl eeve and t he sync hr o hub as a set .
B
B
13-51
Synchr o Ring and Gear Inspection
1. Inspect t he sync hr o r i ngs f or sc or i ng, c r ac ks, and
damage (A).
Ex ampl e of sync hr o r i ng t eet h
GOOD WORN
2. Inspect t he i nsi de of eac h sync hr o ri ng (B) f or wear .
Inspect t he t eet h (C) on eac h sync hr o ri ng f or wear
(r ounded off).
3. Inspect t he t eet h (A) on eac h sync hr o sl eeve and
mat chi ng t eet h on eac h gear f or wear (r ounded off).
Ex ampl e of sync hr o s l e e v e teeth and gear t eet h
GOOD WORN
4. Inspect t he sync hr o t eet h on gear f or sc or i ng, c r ac ks,
and damage (A).
5. Inspect t he t hr ust sur f ace (B) on eac h gear hub f or
wear .
6. Inspect t he c one sur f ac e (C) on eac h gear hub f or wear
and r oughness.
7. Inspect t he t eet h on all gear s (D) f or uneven wear ,
sc or i ng, and c r ac ks.
8. Coat t he c one sur f ace of eac h gear wi t h MTF, and
pl ace i ts sync hr o ri ng on it. Rotate t he sync hr o r i ng,
maki ng sur e t hat it does not sl i p.
13-52
9. Measur e t he cl ear ance bet ween eac h gear (A) and its
sync hr o ri ng (B) all ar ound t he gear . Hol d t he sync hr o
ri ng agai nst t he gear evenl y whi l e measur i ng t he
c l ear anc e. If t he c l ear anc e i s l ess t han t he ser vi ce
l i mi t r epl ace the sync hr o ri ng and gear .
Sync hr o Ri ng-t o-Gear Cl ear anc e
St andar d: 0. 70- 1. 49 mm (0. 028-0. 059 in)
Doubl e Cone Sync hr o and Tr i pl e Cone
Sync hr o-t o-Gear Cl ear anc e
St andar d:
: Out er Sync hr o Ri ng (B) t o Sync hr o Cone (C)
Doubl e Cone Sync hr o (3rd gear )
0. 46- 0. 97 mm (0. 018-0. 038 i n)
Doubl e Cone Sync hr o (4t h gear )
0. 70- 1. 19 mm (0. 028-0. 047 i n)
Tr i pl e Cone Sync hr o
0. 70- 1. 19 mm (0. 028-0. 047 i n)
: Sync hr o Cone (C) t o Gear (A)
Doubl e Cone Sync hr o (3rd gear )
0. 51- 1. 07 mm (0. 020-0. 042 i n)
Doubl e Cone Sync hr o (4th gear )
0. 50- 1. 04 mm (0.020-0.041 i n)
Tr i pl e Cone Sync hr o
0. 50- 1. 04 mm (0.020-0.041 in)
CD: Out er Sync hr o Ri ng (B) t o Gear (A)
0. 95- 1. 68 mm (0. 037-0. 066 i n)
: 0.3 mm (0.01 i n)
: 0.3 mm (0.01 i n)
@: 0.6 mm (0.02 i n)
Sy nc hr o r i ng-t o-gear
Doubl e c one sync hr o and t r i pl e c one sync hr o-t o-gear
B
I m S
13-53
Mai nshaf t Beari ng and Oi l Seal Repl acement
. Oi l Seal Dr i ver , 65 07JAD-PL90100
Adj ust abl e Bear i ng Pul l er , 2040 mm 07736-A01000B
Bear i ng Dr i ver At t achment , 42 x 47 07746-0010300
. Dr i ver Handl e, 15 x 135L 07749-0010000
Sl i de Hammer 3/8" -16 UNF, c ommer c i al l y avai l abl e
1. Remove t he ball bear i ng (A) f r om t he cl ut ch housi ng
(B) usi ng t he 2040 mm adj ust abl e bear i ng pul l er (C)
and a c ommer c i al l y avai l abl e 3/8" -16 UNF sl i de
hammer (D).
2. Remove t he oi l seal (A) f r om t he cl ut ch housi ng. Be
car ef ul not to damage t he cl ut ch housi ng when
r emovi ng t he oi l s eal .
3. Dr i ve i n a new oi l seal f r om t he t r ansmi ssi on si de
usi ng t he 15 x 135L dr i ver handl e (A) and t he 42 x 47
bear i ng dr i ver at t achment (B).
07749-0010000
07746-0010300
4. Dr i ve i n a new ball bear i ng (A) f r om t he t r ansmi ssi on
si de usi ng t he 65 oi l seal dr i ver (B).
07JAD-PL90100
13-54
Countershaft Bearing Replacement
. Oi l Seal Dr i ver , 65 07JAD-PL90100
Adj ust abl e Bear i ng Pul l er, 2040 mm 07736-A01000B
Sl i de Hammer 3/8" -16 UNF, c ommer c i al l y avai l abl e
1. Remove t he bear i ng set plate (A) f r om t he cl ut ch
housi ng (B).
2. Remove t he needl e beari ng (A) usi ng t he 2040 mm
adj ust abl e bear i ng pul l er (B) and a c ommer c i al l y
avai l abl e 3/8" -16 UNF sl i de hammer (D), t hen r emove
oi l gui de plate C.
C
3. Posi t i on oi l gui de plate C and a new needl e bear i ng
(A) i n t he bor e of t he cl ut ch housi ng ( B) .
4. Inst al l t he needl e bear i ng usi ng t he 65 oi l seal dri ver
(D).
5. Inst al l t he bear i ng set plate (A) wi t h bol t s (B).
13=55
Mainshaft Thrust Clearance Adjustment
. Mai nshaf t Hol der 07GAJ-PG20110
. Mai nshaf t Base 07GAJ-PG20130
1. Remove t he 72 mm shi m (A) and oi l gui de pl at e M
f r om t he t r ansmi ssi on housi ng (B).
2. Thor oughl y c l ean t he 28 mm spr i ng washer (A) and
t he 28 mm washer (B) bef ore i nst al l i ng t hem on t he
cl ut ch housi ng si de ball beari ng (C). Note t he
i nst al l at i on di rect i on of t he spr i ng washer .
^ ^ B
3. As s embl e all of t he mai nshaf t c omponent s.
NOTE: Ref er to t he Expl oded Vi ew, as needed, dur i ng
t he assembl y (see page 13-38).
4. Install t he mai nshaf t assembl y i nto t he cl ut ch
housi ng.
5. Pl ace t he t r ansmi ssi on housi ng over t he mai nshaf t
and onto t he cl ut ch housi ng.
6. Ti ght en t he cl ut ch and t r ansmi ssi on housi ngs wi t h
sever al 8 mm bol t s.
NOTE: It i s not nec essar y to use seal i ng agent
bet ween t he housi ngs f or t hi s pr ocedur e.
7. Li ght l y t ap on t he mai nshaf t usi ng a pl ast i c hammer .
13-56
I
8. At t ach t he mai nshaf t hol der (A) and t he mai nshaf t
base (B) to t he mai nshaf t as f ol l ows:
e Back out t he mai nshaf t hol der bolt (C), and l oosen
t he t wo hex bol t s (D).
Fit t he hol der over t he mai nshaf t so its lip i s t owar ds
t he t r ansmi ssi on.
Al i gn t he mai nshaf t hol der lip ar ound t he gr oove at
t he i nsi de of t he mai nshaf t spl i nes, t hen t i ght en t he
hex bol t s.
07GAJ-PG20130
9. Ful l y seat t he mai nshaf t by t appi ng its end usi ng a
pl ast i c hammer .
10. Thr ead t he mai nshaf t hol der bolt in unti l it j ust
cont act s t he wi de sur f ace of t he mai nshaf t base.
11. Zer o a di al gauge (A) on t he end of t he mai nshaf t .
A
07GAJ -PG20110
07GAJ-PG20130
12. Tur n t he mai nshaf t hol der bolt (B) c l oc kwi se; st op
t ur ni ng when t he di al gauge has r eac hed its
maxi mum movement . The r eadi ng on t he di al gauge
i s t he amount of mai nshaf t t hr ust c l ear anc e.
NOTE: Do not t urn t he mai nshaf t hol der bolt mor e
t han 60 degr ees after t he needl e of t he di al gauge
st ops movi ng. Appl yi ng mor e pr essur e wi t h t he
mai nshaf t hol der bolt coul d damage t he
t r ansmi ssi on.
(cont' d)
13-57
SHainshaft Thrust Clearance Adjustment (cont' d)
13. If t he readi ng i s wi t hi n t he st andar d, t he c l ear anc e i s
cor r ect . If t he readi ng i s not wi t hi n t he st andar d, sel ec t
t he appropri at e shi m needed f r om t he t abl e, and
r echeck t he t hrust c l ear anc e.
St andar d: 0. 11- 0. 17 mm (0. 004-0. 007 i n)
(Exampl e)
Measur e r eadi ng: 1.93 mm (0.076 i n)
Subt r act t he total c l ear anc e measur ement f r om t he
mi d d l e of t he c l ear anc e st andar d 0.14 m m (0.0056 i n).
1.93 - 0.14 (0.076-0.006) = 1.79 mm (0.070 i n)
Sel ec t t he shi m c l osest to t he amount c al c ul at ed, f or
exampl e t he 1.80 mm (0.071 i n) s hi m.
14. Wi t h oi l gui de plate M and t he appr opr i at e si ze shi m
i nst al l ed in t he t r ansmi ssi on housi ng, c hec k t he t hr ust
c l ear anc e agai n to veri t y t he c l ear anc e i s wi t hi n t he
st andar d.
72 mm Shi m
Type Thi c kness
A J 60 mm (0.024 i n)
B 0.63 mm (0.025 i n)
C 0.66 mm (0.026 i n)
D 0.69 mm (0.027 i n)
E 0.72 mm (0.028 i n)
F 75 mm (0.030 i n)
G 78 mm (0.031 i n)
H 81 mm (0.032 i n)
I 0.84 mm (0.033 in)
J 0.87 mm (0.034 i n)
K 0.90 mm (0.035 in)
L 0 93 mm (0.037 i n)
M 3.96 mm (0.038 i n)
N 0.99 mm (0.039 i n)
0 1.02 mm (0.040 i n)
P 1.05 mm (0.041 i n)
Q 1.08 mm (0.043 in)
R 1.11 mm (0.044 i n)
S 1 14 mm (0.045 in)
T 1.17 mm (0.046 i n)
U 1,20 mm (0.047 i n)
V 1.23 mm (0.048 i n)
w 1 26 mm (0.050 i n)
X 1.29 mm (0.051 i n)
Y 1. 32 mm (0.052 i n)
Z 1,35 mm (0.053 i n)
(cont ' d)
72 mm S h i m (cont ' d)
Type Thi c kness
AA
1.38 mm (0.054 in)
AB 1.41 mm (0.056 in)
AC 1.44 mm (0.057 i n)
AD 1.47 mm (0.058 in)
AE 1.50 mm (0.059 i n)
AF 1.53 mm (0.060 in)
AG 1.56 mm (0.061 in)
AH 1.59 mm (0.063 i n)
Al 1.62 mm (0.064 i n)
AJ 1.65 mm (0.065 in)
AK 1.68 mm (0.066 in)
AL 1.71 mm (0.067 i n)
AM 1.74 mm (0.069 i n)
AN 1.77 mm (0.070 in)
AU 1.80 mm (0.071 i n)
AP 1.83 mm (0.072 in)
AQ 1.86 mm (0.073 in)
AR 1.89 mm (0.074 in)
A S 1.92 mm (0.076 in)
AT 1.95 mm (0.077 i n)
AV 1.98 mm (0.078 in)
AW
2.01 mm (0.079 i n)
AX
2.04 mm (0.080 i n)
AY 2.07 mm (0.081 in)
AZ 2.10 mm (0.083 i n)
BA 2.13 mm (0.084 i n)
BB 2.16 mm (0.085 i n)
BC 2.19 mm (0.086 in)
BD 2.22 mm (0.087 i n)
BE 2.25 mm (0.089 in)
13-58
Transmission Reassembly
NOTE: Pri or to r eassembl y, cl ean all t he part s in sol vent ,
dry t hem, and appl y MTF to any cont act sur f ac es.
1. Install t he magnet (A) and t he di fferenti al assembl y
(B).
NOTE: Cl ean t he magnet anyt i me t he t r ansmi ssi on i s
di sassembl ed.
2. Install t he 28 mm spr i ng washer (A) and t he 28 mm
washer (B) over t he ball bear i ng (C). Note t he
i nst al l at i on di rect i on of t he spr i ng washer .
3. Appl y vi nyl t ape to t he mai nshaf t spl i nes (D) to prot ect
t he seal . Install t he mai nshaf t assembl y (E) and t he
count er shaf t assembl y (F) wi t h t he shi ft fork assembl y
(G), as an assembl y.
4. Inst al l t he r ever se shi f t fork (A).
6 x 1.0 mm
15 N-m (1.5 k g f m, 11 Ibf f t )
5. Install t he r ever se i dl er gear (A) and t he r ever se i dl er
gear shaf t (B) by al i gni ng t he mar k (C) on t he cl ut ch
housi ng wi t h t he r ever se i dl er gear shaf t hol e (D).
(cont' d)
13-59
Tr ansmi ssi on Reassembl y (cont' d)
6. Inst al l t he r ever se lock c am (A).
6x 1.0 mm
15 N-m
(1.5 kgf-m.
7. Inst al l t he baffle pl at e (A).
8. Sel ec t t he pr oper si ze 72 mm shi m (A) accor di ng t o
t he measur ement s made dur i ng t he Mai nshaf t Thr ust
Cl ear anc e Adj ust ment (see page 13-56). Inst al l t he oi l
gut t er plate (B), oi l gui de pl at e M, and t he 72 mm shi m
i nto t he t r ansmi ssi on housi ng (C).
9. Cl ean any di rt or oi l f r om t he t r ansmi ssi on housi ng
seal i ng sur f ac e.
10. Appl y l i qui d gasket , P/N 08717-0004,08718-0001,
08718-0003, or 08718-0009 evenl y t o t he cl ut ch
housi ng mat i ng sur f ace of t he t r ansmi ssi on housi ng.
Inst al l t he c omponent wi t hi n 5 mi nut es of appl yi ng
t he l i qui d gasket .
NOTE:
If appl y l i qui d gasket P/N 08718-0012, t he
c omponent must be i nst al l ed wi t hi n 4 mi nut es.
Liquid gasket
13-60
11. Inst al l t he t hr ee 14 x 20 mm dowel pi ns (A). 14. Make sur e t he 72 mm snap ri ng (A) i s sec ur el y seat ed
i n t he gr oove of t he count er shaf t bear i ng.
12. Set t he t aper ed cone ri ng (B) as s hown. Pl ace t he 16. Install t he 8 mm f l ange bol t s f i nger-t i ght wi t h
t r ansmi ssi on housi ng on t he cl ut ch housi ng, maki ng t r ansmi ssi on hanger A and t r ansmi ssi on hanger B.
sur e to li ne up t he shaf t s.
13. Whi l e expandi ng t he 72 mm snap ri ng (C) on t he
count er shaf t ball bear i ng usi ng snap ri ng pl i er s, push
t he t r ansmi ssi on housi ng down to st art t he
count er shaf t ball bear i ng t hr ough t he snap ri ng.
Rel ease t he pl i er s, and push down t he housi ng unti l it
bot t oms and t he snap ri ng snaps i n pl ace i n t he
count er shaf t ball bear i ng snap ri ng gr oove.
NOTE: Inst al l t he 32 mm seal i ng c ap (D) after set t i ng
i n t he 72 mm snap ri ng.
(cont' d)
13-61
Transmission Reassembly (cont'd)
17. Ti ght en t he 8 mm f l ange bol t s i n a c r i s s c r os s pat t ern
i n sever al st eps.
' Spec i f i ed Tor que: 8 x 1.25 mm
27 N m (2.8 kgf -m, 20 Ibf f t )
18. Cl ean any di rt or oi l f r om t he c hange l ever assembl y
seal i ng sur f ac e.
19. Appl y l i qui d gasket , P/N 08717-0004,08718-0001,
08718-0003, or 08718-0009 evenl y t o t he t r ansmi ssi on
housi ng mat i ng sur f ac e of t he c hange l ever assembl y.
Inst al l t he c omponent wi t hi n 5 mi nut es of appl yi ng
t he l i qui d gas k et
NOTE;
If appl y l i qui d gasket P/N 08718-0012, t he
c omponent must be i nst al l ed wi t hi n 4 mi nut es.
Li qui d gasket
20. Inst al l t he 8 x 1 4 mm dowel pi ns (A) and t he c hange
l ever assembl y (B).
6x
21. Appl y l i qui d gasket (P/N 08717-0004,08718-0001,
08718-0012,08718-0003, or 08718-0009) to t he
t hr eads of t he i nt erl ock bolt (C), and i nst al l it on t he
t r ansmi ssi on housi ng.
22. Inst al l t he f i l l er pl ug (A) wi t h a new was her
f i nger-t i ght , and i nst al l t he dr ai n pl ug (B) and t he
10 mm f l ange bolt (C) wi t h new seal i ng was her s (D).
B
39 N-m
12 N-m (1.2 kgf- m, 8.7 I bf f t)
23. Appl y MTF to a new O-ri ng (E), t hen i nst al l t he O-r i ng,
t he pl ai n was her (F), and t he out put shaf t
(count ershaf t ) speed sensor (G).
13-62
24. Inst al l t he st eel bal l s (A), t he spr i ngs (B), t he det ent
bol t s (D) wi t h new 12 mm seal i ng was her s (E).
D
22 N-m
(2.2 k g f m,
l i l bf f t ) 10x 1. 25 mm
44 N-m
(4.5 kgf-m,
33 Ibf f t )
G
Replace.
F
(4.5 kgf -m,
33 Ibfft)
H
29 N-m
(3.0 k g f m,
22 Ibf f t )
25. Inst al l t he 20 mm bolt (F) wi t h a new 20 mm seal i ng
was her (G), and t r ansmi ssi on hanger C.
26. Appl y l i qui d gasket (P/N 08717-0004,08718-0001,
08718-0012, 08718-0003, or 08718-0009) to t he
t hr eads of t he back-up li ght swi t ch (H), and i nst al l it i n
13-63
Gearshift Mechani sm Replacement
NOTE: Make sur e not to get any si l i cone gr ease on t he t er mi nal part of t he connect or s and swi t c hes, especi al l y if you
have si l i cone gr ease on your hands or gl oves.
LOCK PINS
SHIF T LEVER K NOB
S - S N- m
( 0. 6- 0. 9 kgf m, 4 - 7 Ibf-ft)
GREAS EK I
(P/N 08C30-B0234M)
8x1. 25 mm
22 N-m
(2.2 kgf -m, 16 Ibf-ft)
8 x 1.25 mm
27 N-m
(2.8 kgf -m, 20 Ibf-ft)
6x 1.0 mm
9.8 N-m
(1.0 k g f m, 7.2 Ibf-ft)
. When installing the shift cable (shift lever side),
position the serrated side facing up.
13=64
Shift Lever Housing Replacement
N O T E :
Use t he appropri at e t ool f rom t he K TC t ri m t ool set to
avoi d damage when r emovi ng c omponent s.
Take car e not to scr at ch t he cent er c onsol e,
dashboar d, and rel at ed part s.
1. Remove t he cent er c onsol e panel (see page 20-157).
2. Remove t he har ness c l amps.
3. Remove t he cot t er pi n (A), t he was her (B), and t he
bol t s.
B A
G0
4. Unl ock t he ret ai ner lock (A).
5. Rot at e t he socket hol der ret ai ner (B) count er cl ockwi se
(C) unti l it st ops, and push t he ret ai ner lock (D) i nto t he
socket hol der ret ai ner to lock t he ret ai ner.
6. Sl i de t he socket hol der (E) and t he shi ft cabl e (F) out of
t he shi ft cabl e bracket (G). Do not r emove t he shi ft
c abl e by pul l i ng t he shi ft cabl e gui de (H).
7. Remove t he shi ft l ever assembl y (A) f r om t he shi ft
c abl es (B).
(cont ' d)
13-65
Shift Layer Housing Replacement (cont' d)
8. Al i gn t he socket hol der (A) on t he shi ft c abl es (B) wi t h
t he sl ot in t he bracket base (C), t hen sl i de t he hol der
into t he base. Inst al l t he shi ft cabl e ends (D) to t he shi f t
l ever assembl y (E) t hen i nstall t he shi ft l ever
assembl y.
NOTE; When i nst al l i ng t he shi ft cabl e (shi ft l ever
si de), posi t i on t he ser r at ed si de (F) f aci ng up.
9. Install t he bol t s, t he washer (A), and t he cot t er pi n (B),
t hen bend t he cot t er pi n ends.
NOTE: You c an i nst al l a new cot t er pi n f r om ei t her
di r ect i on.
8 x 1.25 mm
22 N-m (2.2 k g f m, 16 Ibf f t )
8x 1 25 mm
22 N m (2.2 k g f m, 16 Ibf f t )
B
Replace.
10. Inst al l t he har ness c l amps.
11. Inst al l t he cent er c onsol e panel (see page 20-157).
13-6
M/T Differential
4 0 x 5 6 x 8 mm OIL S E A L
13-67
M/T Differential
Backlash Inspection
1. Pl ace t he di fferenti al as s embl y on V-bl ocks (A), and
i nst al l t he i nt ermedi at e shaf t (B) and t he left dr i veshaf t
( C) .
2. Measur e t he backl ash of both pi ni on gear s (D) wi t h a
di al i ndi cat or (E). If t he bac kl ash i s not wi t hi n t he
st andar d, check t he di f f erent i al car r i er condi t i on, and
r epl ace it if nec essar y.
(0. 002-0. 006 i n)
Di fferenti al Car r i er /Fi nal Dri ven
Gear Repl acement
1. Loosen t he bolts in a c r i ssc r oss pattern i n sever al
st eps, t hen r emove t he bolts and t he f i nal dr i ven gear
(A) f r om t he di fferenti al car r i er (B).
11 x 1.0 mm (10)
121 N-m (12.3 k g f m, 89.0 Ibf-ft)
2. Install t he f i nal dr i ven gear wi t h t he c hamf er on t he
i nsi de di amet er f aci ng t he car r i er . Ti ght en t he bolts in
a c r i ssc r oss pattern in sever al st eps.
13 68
[ p i
LJ
Carrier Bearing Replacement
Dr i ver Handl e, 40 mm I.D. 07746-0030100
1. Check t he car r i er bear i ngs f or wear and r ough
rot at i on. If t hey rotate smoot hl y and t hei r r ol l er s show
no si gns of wear , t he bear i ngs ar e OK.
2. Remove t he car r i er bear i ngs (A) wi t h a c ommer c i al l y
avai l abl e beari ng pul l er (B).
3. Install new bear i ngs (A) usi ng t he 40 mm I.D. dr i ver
handl e (B) and a pr ess (C). Pr ess on eac h bear i ng unti l
it bot t oms. Ther e shoul d be no c l ear anc e bet ween t he
bear i ngs and t he di fferenti al car r i er .
NOTE: Pl ace t he seal part (D) of t he bear i ng t owar ds
t he out si de of t he di f f erent i al , t hen i nst al l it.
07746-0030100
07746-0030100
13-69
M/T Differential
Oil Seal Replacement
. Dr i ver Handl e, 15 x 135L 07749-0010000
. Oi l Seal Dr i ver At t achment 07NAD-P20A100
1. Remove t he oi l seal (A) f r om t he t r ansmi ssi on
housi ng (B).
NOTE: Be car ef ul not to damage t he t r ansmi ssi on
housi ng whi l e r emovi ng t he oi l seal .
2. Remove t he oi l seal (A) f r om t he cl ut ch housi ng (B).
NOTE: Be car ef ul not to damage t he cl ut ch housi ng
whi l e r emovi ng t he oi l seal .
3. Inst al l a new oi l seal f l ush wi t h t he t r ansmi ssi on
housi ng usi ng t he 15 x 135L dr i ver handl e (A) and t he
oi l seal dr i ver at t achment (B).
4. Inst al l a new oi l seal f l ush wi t h cl ut ch housi ng usi ng
t he 15 x 135L dr i ver handl e (A) and t he oi l seal dr i ver
at t achment (B).
13-70
o
Differential Thrust Clearance Adjustment
1 Remove tri e left dr i veshaf t si de oi l seal f r om t he
t r ansmi ssi on housi ng (see page 13-70).
2. If you r emoved t he 80 mm shi m f r om t he
t r ansmi ssi on housi ng, rei nst al l t he s ame si zed s hi m.
3. Install t he di fferenti al assembl y into t he cl ut ch
housi ng.
4. Install t he t r ansmi ssi on housi ng ont o t he cl ut ch
housi ng, t hen t i ght en t he 8 mm f l ange bol t s i n a
c r i ssc r oss pattern i n sever al st eps (see st ep 17 on
page 13-62).
Spec i f i ed Tor que: 8 x 1.25 mm
27 N-m (2.8 k g f m, 20 Ibf f t )
5. Use t he 40 mm I.D. dr i ver handl e to bot t om t he
di fferenti al assembl y i n t he cl ut ch housi ng.
07746-0030100
6. Measur e t he c l ear anc e bet ween 80 mm shi m and t he
bear i ng out er r ace in t he t r ansmi ssi on housi ng.
St andar d: 0- 0. 10 mm ( 0. 0- 0 004 In)
(cont' d)
13-71
M/T Differential
Differential Thrust Clearance Adjustment (cont'd)
7. If t he c l ear anc e exc eeds t he st andar d, sel ec t a new
80 mm shi m f r om t he f ol l owi ng t abl e. If t he c l ear anc e
measur ed i n st ep 6 i s wi t hi n t he st andar d, go to
st ep 10.
80 mm Shi m
Type Thi c k nes s
A 1.00 mm (0.039 in)
B 1.10mm (0.043i n)
C 1.20 mm (0.047 in)
D 1.30 mm (0.051 in)
E 1.40 mm (0.055 in)
F 1.50 mm (0.059 i n)
G 1.60 mm (0.063 i n)
H 1.70 mm (0.067 in)
J 1.80 mm (0.071 in)
K 1.05 mm (0.041 in)
L 1.15 mm (0.045 i n)
M 1.25 mm (0.049 i n)
N 1.35 mm (0.053 in)
P 1.45 mm (0.057 i n)
Q 1.55 mm (0.061 in)
R 1.65 mm (0.065 in)
S 1.75 mm (0.069 in)
8. Remove t he bolts and t he t r ansmi ssi on housi ng.
9. Repl ac e t he t hr ust shi m sel ec t ed i n st ep 7, t hen
r echeck t he c l ear anc e.
10. Inst al l a new left dr i veshaf t si de oi l seal t o t he
11. Rei nst al l t he t r ansmi ssi on housi ng.
13-72
SUPPL EMENTAL RESTRAINT S YS TE M (SRS) f if aut omat i c t r ansmi ssi on mai nt enance i s
requi red).
The Ac c or d S RS i ncl udes a dr i ver ' s ai r bag i n t he st eer i ng wheel hub, a passenger ' s ai r bag in t he dashboar d
above t he gl ove box, seat belt t ensi oner s i n t he front seat belt r et r act or s, si de cur t ai n ai r bags in t he si des of t he
roof, and si de ai r bags i n t he front seat -bac ks. Inf ormat i on nec essar y to saf el y ser vi c e t he S RS i s i ncl uded i n t hi s
Ser vi c e Manual . Items mar ked wi t h an ast er i sk (*) on t he cont ent s page i ncl ude or ar e l ocat ed near S RS
To avoi d r ender i ng t he S RS i noper at i ve, whi c h coul d l ead t o per sonal i nj ury or deat h in t he event of a sever e
frontal or si de col l i si on, all S RS ser vi c e wor k shoul d be done by an aut hor i zed Honda deal er .
Impr oper ser vi c e pr ocedur es, i ncl udi ng i ncor r ect r emoval and i nst al l at i on of t he S RS , coul d l ead to per sonal
Do not bump or i mpact t he S RS uni t, f ront i mpact s ens or s , si de i mpact s ens or s , or r ear saf i ng sensor ,
espec i al l y when t he i gni ti on swi t ch i s i n ON (II), or f or at l east 3 mi nut es after t he i gni t i on swi t c h i s t ur ned to
L OCK (0); ot her wi se, t he syst em may f ai l i n a col l i si on, or t he ai r bags may depl oy.
S RS el ect ri cal connect or s ar e i denti fi ed by yel l ow col or c odi ng. Rel at ed c omponent s ar e l ocat ed in t he
st eer i ng c ol umn, cent er c onsol e, dashboar d, dashboar d l ower c over , i n t he dashboar d above t he gl ove box,
i n t he f ront seat s, in t he roof si de, and ar ound t he f l oor. Do not use el ect r i cal t est equi pment on t hese ci r cui t s.
Transaxle
DTC Tr oubl es hoot i ng I n d e x . . . 14-9
Co mpo nent L oc at i on Index . . . 14-23
DTC Tr oubl es hoot i ng . . . . . 14-77
Road Tes t . 14-170
St al l S peed Tes t . 14-174
Pr es s ur e Tes t . . 14-175
Shi f t S o l eno i d Val v e Tes t ,
Repl ac ement , and Shi f t S o l eno i d
Wi r e Har nes s Repl ac ement . . 14-179
A/ T Cl ut c h Pr es s ur e Cont r ol S o l eno i d
Val v e A Tes t 14-182
Val v e A Repl ac ement . . 14-184
Val v e B and C Tes t . 14-184
Val v e B and C Repl ac ement 14-186
Input Shaf t (Mai nshaf t ) S peed S ens o r
Out put Shaf t (Count er shaf t ) S peed
S ens o r Repl ac ement . . . 14-188
Tr ans mi s s i o n Fl ui d Pr es s ur e S wi t c h A
(2nd Cl ut c h) Repl ac ement 14-188
Tr ans mi s s i o n Fl ui d Pr es s ur e S wi t c h B
(3r d Cl ut c h) Repl ac ement 14-189
A TF Temper at ur e S ens o r
Tes t / Repl ac ement 14-189
A TF L ev el Ch ec k 14-191
A TF Repl ac ement 14-192
Tr ans mi s s i o n Re mo v al . . 14-194
Dr i ve Pl at e Remo v al and I ns t al l at i o n. . . 14-204
Tr ans mi s s i o n I ns t al l at i on. 14-205
A TF Cool er Cl eani ng . . . 14-217
A TF Cool er Ho s e Repl ac ement 14-220
A TF Fi l t er Repl ac ement 14-221
Shi f t L ev er Remo v al 14-222
Shi f t L ev er Inst al l at i on 14-224
Shi f t L ev er Di s as s emb l y / Reas s emb l y . . 14-227
Shi f t Cab l e Repl ac ement . . 14-229
Shi f t Cab l e Ad j us t ment 14-232
A / T Gear Posi t i on i ndi cat or
Tr ans mi s s i o n Rang e S wi t c h Tes t 14-238
Tr ans mi s s i o n Rang e S wi t c h
A/ T Gear Posi t i on Indi c at or Panel Li ght
Har nes s Repl ac ement 14-242
A / T i nt er l ock S y s t em
Shi f t L oc k S y s t em Ci r c ui t
Tr o ub l es h o o t i ng . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-249
Shi f t L oc k S ol enoi d Tes t 14-253
Shi f t L oc k S ol enoi d Repl ac ement 14-254
Shi f t L oc k St op/ Shi f t L oc k St op Cus h i o n
Rep l ac emen t . . . 14-256
Shi f t L oc k Rel eas e, Rel eas e S pr i ng , and
Rel eas e Shaf t Repl ac ement 14-257
Par k Pi n S wi t c h Repl ac ement 14-258
Tr ansmi ssi on End Cover
End Co v er Remov al 14-263
Par k L ev er S t op Inspec t i on and
A d j u s t men t . . . 14-265
Idl er Gear Shaf t Bear i ng Repl ac ement . 14-265
S el ec t or Cont r ol Shaf t Oi l S eal
S o l o o t e r Cent r e! Shc f t C C G; *; ; , ^
R e p l a c e m e n t . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-266
A TF Feed Pi pe Repl ac ement . . . . 14-267
Tr ansmi ssi on Housi ng
Hous i ng and Shaf t As s emb l y Remo v al . 14-268
Bear i ng Remo v al . 14-270
Bear i ng Inst al l at i on 14-271
Rev er s e Idl er Gear Remo v al and
Val ve Body
Val v e Bo d y and A TF St r ai ner Remo v al . 14-273
Val v e Body Repai r 14-275
Val v e Body Val v e Inst al l at i on 14-276
Mai n Val v e Body Di s as s emb l y ,
I ns pec t i on, and Reas s emb l y 14-277
A TF Pump I ns pec t i o n. 14-278
Regul at or Val v e Body Di s as s emb l y ,
I ns pec t i on, and Reas s emb l y 14-279
S er v o Body Di s as s emb l y , I nspec t i on,
and Reas s emb l y 14-280
Shi f t S ol enoi d Val v e Remo v al and
Tor que Conver t er Housi ng
Mai nshaf t Bear i ng and Oi l S eal
Count er s haf t Bear i ng Repl ac ement . . ' . . 14-283
S ec o nd ar y Shaf t Bear i ng
S el ec t or Cont r ol Shaf t Oi l S eal
Repl ac ement . . 14-285
Shaf t s and Cl ut c hes
Mai nshaf t Di s as s emb l y , I ns pec t i on,
Mai nshaf t 5t h Gear Ax i al Cl ear anc e
Inspec t i on 14-287
Count er s haf t Di s as s emb l y , I nspec t i on,
Countershaft Reverse Selector Hub and
3r d Gear Remo v al 14-290
Countershaft Reverse Selector Hub and
3r d Gear Inst al l at i on . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-290
S ec o nd ar y Shaf t Di s as s emb l y ,
Inspection, and Reassembly 14-292
Secondary Shaft Idler Gear Removal
and Installation 14-293
Secondary Shaft 2nd Gear Axial
Clearance Inspection . . 14-294
Secondary Shaft 1 st Gear Axial
Clearance Inspection . 14-295
Idler Gear Shaft Removal and
Installation 14-297
Idler Gear/Idler Gear Shaft
Replacement . . 14-297
Clutch Disassembly 14-298
Clutch Inspection . . . 14-303
Clutch Wave-plate Phase Difference
Inspection 14-304
Clutch Clearance Inspection 14-304
1st , 2nd , and 3r d Clutch Reassembly.. 14-308
4t h and 5t h Clutch Reassembly 14-311
Val ve Body
Valve Body and ATF Strainer
Installation 14-315
Shaft Assembly and Housing
Installation . . . 14-317
End Cover Installation . * 14-321
A / T Di f f erent i al
Component Location Index 14-327
Backlash Inspection 14-328
Carrier Bearing Replacement 14-328
Differential Carrier and Final Driven
Gear Replacement 14-329
Oi l Seal Replacement . 14-329
Carrier Bearing Outer Race
Replacement 14-330
Carrier Bearing Preload Inspection 14-332
Speci al Tool s
070AG-S J AA1 OS Subf r ame Al i gnment Pi n

07406-0020400 or 07406-0020401 A/ T Oi l Pr essur e Gauge Set 1
07736-A01000B Adj ust abl e Bear i ng Pul l er , 2540 mm 1

07746-0010100 At t ac hment , 32 x 35 mm 1
07746-0010400 At t ac hment , 52 x 55 mm 1
07746-0010500 At t ac hment , 62 x 68 mm 1
07746-0010600 At t ac hment , 72 x 75 mm 1
07746-001A800 At t ac hment , 22 x 24 mm 1
07746-0030100 Dr i ver Handl e, 40 mm I.D. 1
07749-0010000 Dr i ver Handl e, 15x 135L 1
07947-SD90101 Oi l Seal Dr i ver At t achment 1
07947-ZV00100 Oi l Seal Dri ver At t achment 1
07GAB-PF50101 Mai nshaf t Hol der 1
@ 07HAC-PK40102 Housi ng Pul l er 1
07HAJ-PK40201 Pr el oad Inspect i on Tool 1
07JAD-PH80101 Oi l Seal Dri ver At t achment 1
07LAD-PW50601 At t ac hment , 40 x 50 mm 1
07LAE-PX40000 Cl ut ch Spr i ng Compr essor Set 1

07MAJ-PY4011A A/ T Pr essur e Hose, 2,210 mm 1
07MAJ-PY40120 A/ T Pr essur e Adapt er 1
@ 07NAD-PX40100 At t achment , 78 x 80 mm 1
07QAD-P0A0100 At t achment , 42 mm I.D. 1
07ZAE-PRP0100 Cl ut ch Compr essor At t achment 1
: Must be used wi t h c ommer c i al l y avai l abl e 3/8" -16 sl i de hammer .
14-2
How to Chec k for DTCs wi t h t he Honda
Di agnost i c S f st em (HDS)
When t he power t r ai n cont r ol modul e (PCM) s ens es an
abnor mal i t y i n t he i nput or out put s y s t em, t he D
i ndi cat or (A) i n t he gauge cont rol modul e ( i ) wi l l usual l y
bli nk.
i
When t he Honda Di agnost i c Syst em (HDS) i s c onnec t ed
to t he dat a li nk connect or (DLC) (A) l ocat ed under t he
dr i ver ' s si de of t he dashboar d, it wilt i ndi cat e t he
di agnost i c t r oubl e c ode (DTC) when t he i gni t i on swi t c h
i s t ur ned t o ON (11) and t he appr opr i at e menu i s sel ec t ed.
A
If t he D i ndi cat or or t he mal f unct i on i ndi cat or l amp (MIL)
has been report ed on, or if a dri veabi l i t y pr obl em i s
suspec t ed, f ol l ow t hi s pr ocedur e:
1. Connec t t he HDS t o t he DL C. (See t he HDS user ' s
manual f or speci f i c i nst r uct i ons.)
2. Tur n t he i gni t i on swi t c h to ON (II). Make sur e t he HDS
c ommuni c at es wi t h t he PCM. If it does not , go to t he
DL C ci r cui t t r oubl eshoot i ng (see page 11-181).
4. Rec or d t he f r eeze dat a and t he on-boar d snapshot s
f or al l f uel and emi ssi ons DTCs and A/ T DTCs.
5. If t her e i s a f uel and emi ssi ons DTC, f i rst check t he f uel
and emi ssi ons syst em as i ndi cat ed by t he DTC,
6. Cl ear t he DTC and t he dat a.
7. Dri ve t he vehi c l e f or sever al mi nut es under t he s ame
condi t i ons as t hose i ndi cat ed by t he f r eeze dat a, and
t hen r echeck f or a DTC. If t he A/ T DTC r et ur ns, go to
t he i ndi cat ed DTCs t r oubl eshoot i ng. If t he DTC does
not r et ur n, t her e was an i ntermi ttent pr obl em wi t hi n
t he ci r cui t . Make sur e al l pi ns and t er mi nal s i n t he
ci rcui t ar e t i ght .
Sympt om Tr oubl eshoot i ng Ver sus DTC
Tr oubl eshoot i ng
S o me sympt oms wi l l not set DTCs or c ause t he D
i ndi cat or to bli nk. If t he MIL was report ed ON or t he D
i ndi cat or has been bl i nki ng, c hec k f or DTCs . If t he vehi cl e
has an abnor mal sympt om, and t here ar e no DTCs
st or ed, do t he sympt om t r oubl eshoot i ng. Chec k t he li st
of pr obabl e c ause(s) f or t he sympt om, i n t he sequenc e
l i st ed, unti l you f i nd t he pr obl em.
14-4
How to Check for DTCs wi t h t he S CS Mode
(ret ri evi ng t he f l ash codes)
NOTE: The pref erred met hod Is to use t he HDS to
ret ri eve t he DTCs.
When t he PCM s ens es an abnor mal i t y i n t he i nput or
output s y s t em, t he D i ndi cat or (A) in t he gauge cont rol
modul e (B) wi l l usual l y bli nk.
B
When t he D i ndi cat or has been report ed on, connect t he
HDS to t he DL C (A) l ocat ed under t he dr i ver ' s si de of t he
dashboar d. Tur n t he i gni ti on swi t c h to ON (II), sel ec t S CS
mode, t hen t he D i ndi cat or wi l l i ndi cat e (bli nk) t he DTC.
If t he D i ndi cat or and t he MIL c ome on at t he s ame t i me,
or if a dri vabi l i t y pr obl em i s suspec t ed, f ol l ow t hi s
pr ocedur e:
1. Connec t t he HDS to t he DL C. (See t he HDS user ' s
manual f or speci f i c i nst r uct i ons.)
2. Tur n t he i gni t i on swi t ch to ON (II). Make sur e t he HDS
c ommuni c at es wi t h t he PCM. If it does not, go to t he
DL C ci rcui t t r oubl eshoot i ng (see page 11-181).
3. Sel ec t S CS mode, t hen obser ve t he D i ndi cat or i n t he
gauge cont rol modul e. Codes 1 t hr ough 9 ar e
i ndi cat ed by i ndi vi dual shor t bl i nks. Code 10 and
above ar e i ndi cat ed by a ser i es of long and shor t
bl i nks. One l ong blink equal s 10 shor t bl i nks. Add t he
l ong and shor t bl i nks t oget her to det er mi ne t he c ode.
Exampl e: DTC P0705 (5)
Short blinks (five)
k
ONj - | r-| r-| r-. r-
OFF 1 L I LJ LJ LJ _ _ _ _ _ .
Exampl e: DTCP0717(15)
L ong bl i nk (one) Shor t bl i nks (fi ve)
OFF
ON
~ m
ON
10 + 5 a 15
4. Rec or d all f uel and emi ssi ons DTCs and A/ T DTCs.
5. If t here i s a f uel and emi ssi ons DTC, fi rst check t he f uel
and emi ssi ons syst em as i ndi cat ed by t he DTC.
6. Cl ear t he DTC and t he dat a.
7. Dri ve t he vehi c l e for sever al mi nut es under t he s ame
condi t i ons as t hose i ndi cat ed by t he f reeze dat a, and
t hen r echeck f or DTCs. If t he A/ T DTC r et ur ns, go to
t he i ndi cat ed DTCs t r oubl eshoot i ng. If t he DTC does
not r et ur n, t her e was an i ntermi ttent pr obl em wi t hi n
t he ci rcui t . Make sur e all pi ns and t er mi nal s i n t he
ci rcui t ar e ti ght.
(cont ' d)
14-5
How to Tr oubl eshoot Ci r cui t s at t he PCM
Connec t or s
NOTE: The PCM over wr i t es dat a and moni t or s t he EVAP
syst em f or about 40 mi nut es after t he i gni ti on swi t c h i s
t ur ned to L OCK (0). J umpi ng t he S CS li ne after t ur ni ng
t he i gni t i on swi t ch t o L OCK (0) c anc el s t hi s f unct i on.
Di sconnect i ng t he PCM dur i ng t hi s f unct i on, wi t hout
j umpi ng t he S CS l i ne f i rst , c an damage t he PCM.
D
9.8 N-m
(1.0 kgf-m, 7.2 Ibf-ft)
3. Di sc onnec t PCM c onnec t or s A, B, and C.
NOTE: PCM c onnec t or s A, B, and C have symbol s
( A= 0, B= A, C= 0) embos s ed on t hem f or
4. When di agnosi s/t r oubl eshoot i ng i s done at t he PCM
connect or , use t he t er mi nal t est port (A) above t he
t er mi nal you need t o check.
5. Connec t one si de of t he pat ch cor d t er mi nal s (A) to a
c ommer c i al l y avai l abl e di gi tal mul t i met er (B), and
connect t he ot her si de of t he pat ch cor d t er mi nal s (C)
to a c ommer c i al l y avai l abl e banana j ack (Pomona
El ect r oni cs Tool No. 3563 or equi val ent ) (D).
6. Gent l y i nser t t he pi n probe (mal e) into t he t er mi nal
t est port f r om t he t er mi nal si de. Do not f or ce t he t i ps
i nto t he t er mi nal s.
[ NOTICE!
For accur at e r esul t s, al ways use t he pi n pr obe
(mal e).
To prevent damage to t he connect or t er mi nal s, do
not i nsert t est equi pment pr obes, paper c l i ps, or
ot her subst i t ut es as t hey c an damage t he t er mi nal s.
Damaged t er mi nal s c ause a poor connect i on and
an i ncor r ect measur ement .
Do not punct ur e t he i nsul at i on on a wi r e. Punct ur es
c an c ause poor or i ntermi ttent el ect ri cal
c onnec t i ons.
14-6
Cl ear A/ T DTCs Pr ocedur e
1. Connec t t he HDS to t he DL C (A) l ocat ed under t he
dr i ver ' s si de of t he dashboar d. *
3. Make sur e t he HDS c ommuni c at es wi t h the PCM. If it
does not, go to t he DL C ci rcui t t r oubl eshoot i ng (see
page 11-181).
4. Cl ear t he DTC(s) wi t h t he HDS.
OBD St at us
The OBD st at us s hows t he current syst em st at us of each
DTC and all of t he par amet er s. Thi s f unct i on i s used to
see if a repai r was suc c essf ul l y c ompl et ed. The r esul t s of
di agnost i c t est s for t he DTC are di spl ayed as:
PAS S ED: The on-boar d di agnosi s i s suc c essf ul l y
compl et ed.
FAILED: The on-boar d di agnosi s i s f i ni shed but f ai l ed.
NOT COMPL ETED: The on-boar d di agnosi s was
runni ng but i s out of t he enabl e condi t i ons of t he DTC.
How t o End a Tr oubl eshoot i ng Sessi on
(requi red after any t r oubl eshoot i ng) '
NOTE: Reset t he PCM/ TCM wi t h t he HDS whi l e t he
engi ne i s st opped.
2. Tur n t he i gni ti on swi t c h to ON (II), and wai t f or
30 s ec onds .
3. Tur n t he i gni ti on swi t c h to L OCK (0), and di sc onnec t
4. St ar t t he engi ne wi t h t he shi ft l ever in P or N, and
war m it up to nor mal oper at i ng t emper at ur e (the
radi at or f an c omes on).
5. To veri f y that t he pr obl em i s r epai r ed, t est -dri ve t he
vehi c l e f or sever al mi nut es at speeds over 31 mph
(50 km/h) or under t he s ame condi t i ons as t hose
i ndi cat ed by t he f r eeze dat a.
PCM/TCM Reset
NOTE: To r eset t he PCM/ TCM, i ni ti ali ze onl y t he
aut omat i c t r ansmi ssi on memor y st or ed i n t he PCM or
t he TCM.
1. Sel ec t t he A/ T syst em wi t h t he HDS.
2. Reset t he PCM/TCM wi t h t he HDS whi l e t he engi ne i s
st opped.
4. Tur n t he i gni ti on swi t c h to ON (II), and wai t f or 30
* sec onds.
5. Tur n t he i gni ti on swi t c h to L OCK (0), and di sc onnec t
t he HDS f rom t he DL C.
(cont ' d)
14-7
Fai l ur e Reproduction Technique
Make sur e to f ol l ow t hese poi nt s whi l e t he vehi c l e i s
r ai sed on a lift f or t he t est -dr i ve.
Di sabl e t he VS A by pr essi ng t he VS A OFF but t on.
ABS or VS A DTC(s) may c ome on when t est -dri vi ng on
a lift. If t he ABS or VS A DTC(s) c ome on, cl ear t he DTC
(s) wi t h t he HDS.
14-8
DTC Troubleshooting Index
NOTE: Bef ore you t r oubl eshoot r ecor d all f reeze dat a and any on-boar d snapshot wi t h t he HDS, and r evi ew Gener al
Tr oubl eshoot i ng Inf ormat i on (see page 14-4). ^
DTC*
l 1)
Two Drive
Cycle
Detection
D
Indi cat or
MIL * Det ect i on It em Page
P062F (0) Bl i nks ON or
OFF*
( 3 )
Power t r ai n Cont r ol Modul e (PCM)
Internal Cont r ol Modul e Keep Al i ve
Memor y (KAM) Er r or
DTC Tr oubl eshoot i ng
(see page 14-77)
P0705 (5)*
( 2)
Bl i nks ON Shor t i n Tr ansmi ssi on Range Swi t c h
Ci rcui t (Multi ple Shi f t -posi t i on Input)
(see page 14-78)
P0706 (6)
# ( 2 )
O
OFF ON Open in Tr ansmi ssi on Range Swi t c h
Ci rcui t
(see page 14-79)
P0711 (28)*
( 2 )
*
<4)
Bl i nks OFF Pr obl em i n ATF Temper at ur e Sensor
Ci rcui t
(see page 14-80)
P0711 ( 2 8 P
) #
(5)
o
Bl i nks OFF Pr obl em i n ATF Temper at ur e Sens or
Ci rcui t
(see page 14-80)
P0712( 28P
2 )
*
(4)
Bl i nks OFF Shor t in ATF Temper at ur e Sens or
Ci rcui t
(see page 14-82)
P0712(28P
, #
(5)
o
Bl i nks OFF Shor t i n ATF Temper at ur e Sensor
Ci rcui t
(see page 14-82)
P0713(28f
(2)#
(4)
Bl i nks OFF Open in ATF Temper at ur e Sensor
Ci rcui t
(see page 14-83)
P0713(28r
( 2 )
*
(5)
o
Bl i nks OFF Open in ATF Temper at ur e Sensor
Ci rcui t
(see page 14-83)
P0716(15r
( 2 )
Bl i nks ON Pr obl em in Input Shaf t (Mai nshaf t )
Speed Sens or Ci r cui t
(see page 14-86)
P0717(15)
# ( 2 )
Bl i nks ON Pr obl em i n Input Shaf t (Mai nshaf t )
Speed S ens or Ci r cui t (No Si gnal Input)
(see page 14-87)
P0718(15)
#( 2 )
o
Bl i nks ON Input Shaf t (Mai nshaf t ) Speed Sensor
Intermi ttent Fai l ur e
(see page 14-87)
P0721 m
n2) Bl i nks ON Pr obl em i n Out put Shaf t (Count ershaf t )
Speed Sens or Ci r cui t
(see page 14-86)
P0722 (9)*
( 2)
* Bl i nks ON Pr obl em i n Out put Shaf t (Count ershaf t )
Speed Sens or Ci rcui t (No Si gnal Input)
(see page 14-89)
P0723 (9)
#( 2 )
o
Bl i nks ON Out put Shaf t (Count ershaf t ) Speed
Sens or Intermi ttent Fai l ur e
(see page 14-89)
P0731(64)
o
Bl i nks OFF Pr obl em in 1st Cl ut ch and 1st Cl ut ch
Hydr aul i c Ci r cui t
(1st Gear Incorrect Rati o)
(see page 14-91)
P0732 (64)
o
Bl i nks OFF Pr obl em in 2nd Cl ut ch and 2nd Cl ut ch
(2nd Gear Incorrect Rati o)
(see page 14-92)
P0733 (64)
o
Bl i nks OFF Pr obl em i n 3rd Cl ut ch and 3rd Cl ut ch
(3rd Gear Incorrect Rati o)
(see page 14-93)
NOTE:
* 1: The DTC in par ent heses i s t he f l ash c ode t he D i ndi cat or i ndi cat es when t he dat a link connect or (DLC) i s
connect ed to t he HDS, and i n t he S CS mode.
*2: Thi s c ode i s c aused by an el ect ri cal ci rcui t pr obl em and cannot be c aused by a mechani cal pr obl em in t he
t r ansmi ssi on.
* 3: The MIL c omes on when t he PGM-FI syst em det ect s t he same f ai l ure.
*4: ' 08-09 model s
* 5: '10 model
(cont' d)
14-9
DTC Troubleshooting Index (cont'd)
DTC
> ( 1 )
Two Drive
Cycle
Detection
D
Indi cat or
MIL Det ect i on It em Pag
P0734 (64) O Bl i nks OFF Pr obl em in 4th Cl ut ch and 4th Cl ut ch
(4th Gear Incorrect Rat i o)
(see page 14-94)
P0735 (64)
o
Bl i nks OFF Pr obl em in 5th Cl ut ch and 5th Cl ut ch
(5th Gear Incorrect Rat i o)
(see page 14-95)
P0741 (40)
o
Bl i nks OFF Tor que Conver t er Cl ut ch Hydr aul i c
Ci r cui t St uck OFF
(see page 14-96)
P0747 (76)
o
Bl i nks ON A/ T Cl ut ch Pr essur e Cont r ol Sol enoi d
Val ve A St uck ON
(see page 14-97)
P0752 (70)
o
Bl i nks ON Shi f t Sol enoi d Val ve A St uck ON DTC Tr oubl eshoot i ng
(see page 14-98)
P0756 (71) o
Bl i nks ON Shi f t Sol enoi d Val ve B St uck OFF DTC Tr oubl eshoot i ng
(see page' 14-99)
P0757(71)
o
n i : - i -
Shi f t Sol enoi d Val ve B St uck ON DTC Tr oubl eshoot i ng
(see page 14-99)
P0761 (72)
o
Bl i nks ON Shi f t Sol enoi d Val ve C St uck OFF DTC Tr oubl eshoot i ng
(see page 14-100)
P0771 (74)
o
Bl i nks ON Shi f t Sol enoi d Val ve E St uck OFF DTC Tr oubl eshoot i ng
(see page 14-101)
P0776 (77)
o
Val ve B St uck OFF
(see page 14-102)
P0777 (77)
o
Val ve B St uck ON
(see page 14-102)
P0780 (45)
o
Bl i nks ON Shi f t Cont rol Syst em DTC Tr oubl eshoot i ng
(see page 14-103)
P0796 (78)
o
Val ve C St uck OFF
(see page 14-104)
P0797 (78)
o
Val ve C St uck ON
(see page 14-104)
P0842 (25P
2
'
o
Bl i nks ON Shor t in Tr ansmi ssi on Fl ui d Pr essur e
Swi t c h A (2nd Cl ut ch) Ci r c ui t or
Tr ansmi ssi on Fl ui d Pr essur e Swi t c h A
(2nd Cl ut ch) St uck ON
(see page 14-105)
P0843 (25)
o
Bl i nks ON Open in Tr ansmi ssi on Fl ui d Pr essur e
Swi t c h A (2nd Cl ut ch) Ci r cui t , or
Tr ansmi ssi on Fl ui d Pr essur e Swi t c h A
(2nd Cl ut ch) St uck OFF
(see page 14-107)
P0847 (26)
#( 2 )
o
* Bl i nks OFF Shor t in Tr ansmi ssi on Fl ui d Pr essur e
Swi t c h B (3rd Cl ut ch) Ci r cui t , or
Tr ansmi ssi on Fl ui d Pr essur e Swi t c h B
(3rd Cl ut ch) St uck ON
(see page 14-110)
NOTE:
*1: The DTC i n par ent heses i s t he f l ash c ode t he D i ndi cat or i ndi cat es when t he dat a link connect or (DLC) i s
c onnec t ed to t he HDS, and i n t he S CS mode.
* 2: Thi s c ode i s c aused by an el ect ri cal ci r cui t pr obl em and cannot be c aused by a mec hani c al pr obl em i n t he
t r ansmi ssi on.
* 3: The MIL c omes on when t he PGM-FI syst em det ect s t he s ame f ai l ur e.
*4: ' 08-09 model s
*5: ' 10 model
14-10
DTC*
{ 1 )
Two Drive
Cycle
Detection
D
Indi cat or
MIL Det ect i on It em Page
P0848 (26) O Bl i nks OFF Open in Tr ansmi ssi on Fl ui d Pr essur e
Swi t ch B (3rd Cl ut ch) Ci r c ui t or
Tr ansmi ssi on Fl ui d Pr essur e Swi t c h B
(3rd Cl ut ch) St uck OFF
(see page 14-112)
K 0962(16r
( 2 )
Bl i nks ON Pr obl em in A/ T Cl ut ch Pr essur e Cont rol
Sol enoi d Val ve A Ci r cui t
(see page 14-115)
K 0y 63 (16)*
( 2)
Sol enoi d Val ve A
(see page 14-118)
P0966 (23)*
( 2)
Bl i nks ON Probl em in A/ T Cl ut ch Pr essur e Cont rol
Sol enoi d Val ve B Ci r cui t
(see page 14-120)
P0967 (23)*
( 2)
Sol enoi d Val ve B
(see page 14-123)
P0970 (29)*
( 2)
Bl i nks ON Probl em in A/ T Cl ut ch Pr essur e Cont rol
Sol enoi d Val ve C Ci r cui t
(see page 14-125)
P0971 ( 29P
2 )
Sol enoi d Val ve C
(see page 14-128)
P0973 (7)*
( 2)
Bl i nks ON Shor t in Shi f t Sol enoi d Val ve A Ci r cui t DTC Tr oubl eshoot i ng
(see page 14-130)
P0974 (7)*
( 2)
Bl i nks ON Open in Shi f t Sol enoi d Val ve A Ci rcui t DTC Tr oubl eshoot i ng
(see page 14-133)
P0976 ( 8P
2 )
Bl i nks ON Shor t in Shi f t Sol enoi d Val ve B Ci rcui t DTC Tr oubl eshoot i ng
(see page 14-136)
P0977 (8)*
( 2)
Bl i nks ON Open in Shi f t Sol enoi d Val ve B Ci rcui t DTC Tr oubl eshoot i ng
(see page 14-138)
P0979 (22)*
( 2)
Bl i nks ON Shor t i n Shi f t Sol enoi d Val ve C Ci r cui t DTC Tr oubl eshoot i ng
(see page 14-141)
P0980 (22)*
( 2)
Bl i nks ON Open in Shi f t Sol enoi d Val ve C Ci rcui t DTC Tr oubl eshoot i ng
(see page 14-144)
P0982 (60)*
( 2)
Bl i nks ON Shor t in Shi f t Sol enoi d Val ve D Ci rcui t DTC Tr oubl eshoot i ng
(see page 14-148)
P0983 (60)*
( 2)
Bl i nks ON Open in Shi f t Sol enoi d Val ve D Ci r cui t DTC Tr oubl eshoot i ng
(see page 14-151)
P0985 (61K
( 2 )
Bl i nks ON Shor t in Shi f t Sol enoi d Val ve E Ci rcui t DTC Tr oubl eshoot i ng
(see page 14-154)
P0986 (61)*
( 2)
Bl i nks ON Open in Shi f t Sol enoi d Val ve E Ci r cui t DTC Tr oubl eshoot i ng
(see page 14-157)
P16C0 (99) OFF ON PCM A/ T Cont rol Sy s t em Incompl et e
Updat e
(see page 14-160)
P1717(62)*
( 2 )
O Bl i nks OFF Open in Tr ansmi ssi on Range Swi t c h
ATP RVS Swi t c h Ci r cui t
(see page 14-160)
NOTE:
*1: The DTC i n par ent heses i s t he f l ash code t he D i ndi cat or i ndi cat es when t he dat a link connect or (DLC) i s
c onnec t ed to t he HDS, and i n t he S CS mode.
*2: Thi s code i s c aused by an el ect ri cal ci rcui t pr obl em and cannot be c aused by a mec hani c al pr obl em in t he
t r ansmi ssi on.
*3: The MIL c omes on when t he PGM-FI syst em det ect s t he same f ai l ur e.
*4: ' 08-09 model s
*5: ' 10 model
(cont' d)
14-11
DTC*
( 1 )
Two Drive
Cycle
Detection
D
Indi cat or
MIL Detection Item Page
P1730 (45) O Bl i nks ON Pr obl em i n Shi f t Cont r ol Sy s t em:
Shi f t Sol enoi d Val ves A or D St uck
OFF
Shi f t Sol enoi d Val ve B St uck ON
Shi f t Val ves A, B, or D St uck
(see page 14-162)
P1731 (45)
o
Bl i nks ON Pr obl em i n Shi f t Cont r ol Sy s t em:
Shi f t Sol enoi d Val ve E St uck ON
e Shi f t Val ve E St uck
e A/ T Cl ut ch Pr essur e Cont rol Sol enoi d
Val ve A St uck OFF
(see page 14-163)
P1732 (45)
o
Shi f t Sol enoi d Val ves B or C St uck ON
e Shi f t Val ves B or C St uck
(see page 14-164)
P1733 (45)
o
Bl i nks ON Pr obl em in Shi f t Cont r ol Sy s t em:
- Sh:ft C G J ^ . I O I J vdi ve u bt uck ON
Shi f t Val ve D St uck
A/ T Cl ut ch Pr essur e Cont r ol Sol enoi d
Val ve C St uck OFF
DTC T r o n W o c t ^- ^^
(see page 14-165)
P1734 (45)
o
Shi f t Sol enoi d Val ves B or C St uck
OFF
Shi f t Val ves B o r C St uck
(see page 14-166)
U0029(107) Bl i nks
0N*
<3
> or
OFF
F-CAN Mal f unct i on (F-CAN BUS - OFF
(PCM))
(see page 14-167)
110122(107) Bl i nks OFF F-CAN Mal f unct i on (PCM-VSA
Modul at or -Cont r ol Uni t)
(see page 14-168)
1)0155(107) Bl i nks
ON*
!3
or
OFF
F-CAN Mal f unct i on (PCM-Gauge
Cont r ol Modul e)
(see page 14-169)
NOTE:
* 1: The DTC in par ent heses i s t he f l ash c ode t he D i ndi cat or i ndi cat es when t he dat a link connect or (DLC) i s
connect ed to t he HDS, and i n t he S CS mode.
* 2: Thi s c ode i s c aused by an el ect ri cal ci r cui t pr obl em and cannot be c aused by a mec hani c al pr obl em i n t he
t r ansmi ssi on.
* 3: The MIL c omes on when t he PGM-FI syst em det ect s t he s ame f ai l ur e.
*4: ' 08-09 model s
* 5: ' 10 model
14-12
Sympt om Troubleshooting Index
NOTE: Do an all DTC check wi t h t he HDS and t r oubl eshoot t hose f i rst bef ore f ol l owi ng t he repai r pr ocedur es l i st ed in t he
i ndex.
Sy mpt om Pr obabl e Cause(s) Not es
HDS does not
c ommuni c at e wi t h t he
PCM
DL C ci rcui t er r or Tr oubl eshoot t he DLC ci rcui t (see page 11-181).
When you t urn t he
i gni ti on swi t ch to ON (II),
t he D i ndi cat or c omes on
and st ays on i n all shi ft
l ever posi t i ons, or it never
c omes on at all
F-CAN c ommuni c at i on l i ne
er r or
Gauge cont rol modul e
def ect i ve
PCM def ect i ve
Check t he F-CAN c ommuni c at i on l i ne (see page
11-172).
Chec k t he A/ T gear posi t i on i ndi cat or dr i ve ci rcui t
i n t he gauge cont rol modul e by usi ng t he gauge
cont rol modul e sel f -di agnost i c f unct i on (see page
22-332).
A/ T gear posi t i on
on whi l e t he shi ft l ever i s
i n t hat posi t i on; shi ft
i ndi cat or does not wor k
F-CAN c ommuni c at i on li ne
error
def ect i ve
PCM def ect i ve
& Tr ansmi ssi on r ange swi t c h
def ect i ve or out of adj ust ment
~~ec k t h s F-CAN c ommuni c at i on li ne (see page
11-172).
Chec k t he F-CAN c ommuni c at i on li ne by usi ng t he
gauge cont rol modul e sel f -di agnost i c f unct i on
(see page 22-332).
Chec k t he A/ T gear posi t i on i ndi cat or dr i ve ci rcui t
i n t he gauge cont rol modul e by usi ng t he gauge
cont rol modul e sel f -di agnost i c f unct i on (see page
22-332).
9 Inspect t he t r ansmi ssi on r ange swi t ch (see page
14-238).
Speedomet er and
odomet er do not wor k
Out put shaf t (count ershaf t )
speed sensor def ect i ve
9 Inspect t he t r ansmi ssi on r ange swi t ch oper at i on.
Chec k t he out put shaf t (count ershaf t ) speed
sensor i nst al l at i on.
Shi f t l ever cannot be
moved f r om P whi l e
pr essi ng on t he brake
pedal
Accel er at or pedal posi t i on
sensor ci r cui t
Accel er at or pedal posi t i on
sensor def ect i ve
Br ake pedal posi t i on swi t c h
ci rcui t
Br ake pedal posi t i on swi t c h
def ect i ve
Shi f t lock sol enoi d def ect i ve
Shi f t lock sol enoi d cont rol
ci rcui t
Shi f t lock mec hani sm
def ect i ve
Throt t l e body def ect i ve
Tr ansmi ssi on r ange swi t c h
ATPP swi t ch st uck OFF
ATPP swi t c h ci r cut open
PCM def ect i ve
Inspect t he APP sensor si gnal (see page 11-239).
Tr oubl eshoot t he shi f t lock syst em ci rcui t (see
page 14-249).
Test t he shi ft lock sol enoi d (see page 14-253).
Inspect t he t r ansmi ssi on r ange swi t ch (see page
14-238).
Igni ti on swi t c h cannot be
moved f r om A CCE S S ORY
(1) to L OCK (0) (key i s
pushed i n, t he shi ft l ever
i n P)
Interlock cont rol syst em ci r cui t
Key i nt erl ock sol enoi d st uck
ON
Park pi n swi t c h st uck OFF
Tr oubl eshoot t he key i nterlock syst em ci rcui t (see
page 22-100).
Inspect t he t r ansmi ssi on range swi t ch (see page
14-238).
(cont ' d)
14-13
Sympt om Troubl eshoot i ng Index (cont' d)
Engine runs, but vehicle
does not move in any gear
L ow ATF l evel
Shi f t cabl e br oken or out of
adj ust ment
Connect i on bet ween t he shi ft
cabl e and t r ansmi ssi on or
body i s wor n
ATF pump wor n or bi ndi ng
Regul at or val ve st uck or
spr i ng wor n
ATF st r ai ner c l ogged
Mai nshaf t wor n or damaged
Fi nal gear s wor n or damaged
Tr ansmi ssi on-t o-engi ne
assembl y error
Axl e di sengaged
Tor que conver t er def ect i ve
Chec k t he ATF l evel , and check t he ATF cool er
l i nes f or l eaks and l oose c onnec t i ons. If nec essar y,
cl ean t he ATF cool er l i nes.
Chec k f or a l oose shi f t cabl e at t he shi f t l ever and
t he sel ect or cont rol l ever.
Improper al i gnment of t he ATF pump and t he
t or que conver t er housi ng may c ause ATF pump
sei zur e. The sympt oms ar e most l y an r pm-r el at ed
t i cki ng noi se or a hi gh pi t ched squeak.
Check t he l i ne pr essur e (see page 14-175).
Be caref ul not to damage t he t orque conver t er
housi ng when r epl aci ng t he mai n ball bear i ng.
You may al so damage t he ATF pump when you
t orque down t he mai n val ve body. Thi s wi l l resul t
. in ATF pump sei zur e if not det ect ed. Use t he
proper t ool s.
Install t he mai n seal f l ush wi t h t he t or que
conver t er housi ng. If you push it into t he t or que
converter K o . . c ; n g -jr.:;! l l b o t t o m s out , it wi l l block
t he f l ui d ret urn passage and resul t in damage.
Chec k t he ATF st r ai ner f or debr i s. If t he ATF
st r ai ner i s cl ogged wi t h part i cl es of st eel or
al umi num, i nspect t he ATF pump. If t he ATF pump
i s OK, f i nd t he damaged c omponent s t hat c aused
t he debr i s. If no c ause for cont ami nat i on i s f ound,
r epl ace t he t orque conver t er .
Inspect t he di fferenti al pi ni on gear s f or wear . If t he
di fferenti al pi ni on gear s ar e wor n, r epl ace t he
di fferenti al assembl y, r epl ace t he ATF st r ai ner ,
t hor oughl y cl ean t he t r ansmi ssi on, and cl ean t he
t orque conver t er , cool er , and l i nes.
Vehi c l e moves in 2 and Ft,
but not i n D, D3, or 1
1st accumul at or def ect i ve
1st gear s wor n or damaged
1st cl ut ch def ect i ve
c Check t he 1st cl ut ch pr essur e (see page 14-175).
Inspect t he cl ut ch pi st on, t he cl ut ch pi st on check
val ve, and t he O-r i ngs. Chec k t he spr i ng ret ai ner
and t he ret ai ner seal for wear and damage. Inspect
t he c l ear anc e bet ween t he cl ut ch end-pl at e and
t he top di sc . If t he c l ear anc e i s out of t ol er ance,
i nspect t he cl ut ch di sc s and t he pl at es f or wear
and damage. If t he di sc s ar e wor n or damaged,
r epl ace t hem as a set . Inspect t he cl ut ch
wave-pl at e hei ght . If t he hei ght i s out of t ol er ance,
r epl ace t he wave-pl at e. If t he di sc s and t he pl at es
ar e OK, adj ust t he c l ear anc e wi t h t he cl ut ch
end-pl at e.
Inspect t he 1st cl ut ch f eed pi pe. If t he 1st cl ut ch
f eed pi pe i s sc or ed, r epl ace t he end c over .
Repl ace t he sec ondar y shaf t if t he bushi ng f or t he
1st cl ut ch f eed pi pe i s l oose or damaged.
Vehi c l e moves i n D, D3, 1,
and R, but not i n 2
2nd ac c umul at or def ect i ve
2nd gear s wor n or damaged
2nd cl ut ch def ect i ve
Check t he 2nd cl ut ch pr essur e (see page 14-175).
val ve, and t he O-r i ngs. Check t he spr i ng ret ai ner
end-pl at e.
14-14
Sympt om Pr obabl e Cause(s) Not es
Vehi cl e moves i n D, D3, 2,
and 1, but not i n R
Shi f t sol enoi d val ve E
def ect i ve
Shi f t fork shaf t st uck
Shi f t val ve E def ect i ve
4t h/r ever se accumul at or
def ect i ve
4th cl ut ch def ect i ve
Rever se gear s wor n or
damaged
Check t he 4th cl ut ch pr essur e (see page 14-175).
Inspect shi ft sol enoi d val ve E f or sei zur e, and t he
O-r i ngs f or wear and damage.
Check f or a mi ssi ng shi ft fork bolt on t he shi ft fork
shaf t .
for wear and damage. Inspect t he c l ear anc e
bet ween t he cl ut ch end-pl at e and t he t op di sc . If
the cl ear ance i s out of t ol er ance, i nspect the cl ut ch
di sc s and t he pl at es f or wear and damage. If t he
di sc s ar e wor n or damaged, r epl ace t hem as a set .
Inspect t he cl ut ch wave-pl at e hei ght . If t he hei ght
i s out of t ol er ance, r epl ace t he wave-pl at e. If t he
di sc s and t he pl at es ar e OK, adj ust t he c l ear anc e
wi t h t he cl ut ch end-pl at e.
Inspect t he r ever se sel ect or gear t eet h c hamf er s,
and i nspect t he engagement teeth c hamf er s of t he
count ershaf t 4th gear and t he r ever se gear.
Repl ace t he r ever se gear s and t he r ever se sel ect or
if t hey ar e wor n or damaged. If t he t r ansmi ssi on
makes a cl i cki ng, gr i ndi ng, or whi r r i ng noi se, al so
r epl ace t he mai nshaf t 4th gear , t he r ever se i dl er
gear , and t he count er shaf t 4th gear .
Poor accel er at i on; f l ar es
when st art i ng off i n D, D3,
and R; st al l speed hi gh in 2
and 1, and in D and D3 in
1st and 2nd
L ow ATF l evel
Shi f t cabl e broken or out of
adj ust ment
Regul at or val ve st uck or
spr i ng wor n
ATF st r ai ner cl ogged
Tor que conver t er check val ve
def ect i ve
Check t he ATF l evel , and check t he ATF cool er
Chec k f or a l oose shi ft cabl e at t he shi ft l ever and
Improper al i gnment of t he ATF pump and t he
t orque conver t er housi ng may c ause ATF pump
sei zur e. The sympt oms are most l y an r pm-r el at ed
ti cki ng noi se or a hi gh pi t ched squeak.
Check t he ATF st r ai ner f or debr i s. If t he ATF
st r ai ner i s cl ogged wi t h par t i cl es of st eel or
i s OK, fi nd t he damaged c omponent s that c aused
t he debr i s. If no c ause for cont ami nat i on i s f ound,
r epl ace t he t or que conver t er .
Poor accel er at i on; f l ar es
and R; st al l speed hi gh
when st art i ng off in 2
L ow ATF l evel
9 Check t he ATF l evel , and check t he ATF cool er
l i nes for l eaks and l oose c onnec t i ons. If nec essar y,
Check t he 2nd cl ut ch pr essur e (see page 14-175).
t he cl ear ance bet ween t he cl ut ch end-pl at e and
t he top di sc . If t he cl ear ance i s out of t ol er ance,
i nspect t he cl ut ch di sc s and t he pl at es for wear
repl ace t hem as a set . Inspect t he cl ut ch
wave-pl at e hei ght . If the hei ght i s out of t ol er ance,
repl ace t he wave-pl at e. If t he di sc s and t he pl at es
are OK, adj ust t he cl ear ance wi t h t he cl ut ch
end-pl at e.
(cont ' d)
14-15
Poor ac c el er at i on; f l ar es
and R; st al l speed hi gh in
R
L ow ATF l evel
adj ust ment
c l ean t he ATF cool er l i nes.
t he sel ec t or cont rol l ever.
Chec k t he 4th cl ut ch pr essur e (see page 14-175).
e Inspect t he cl ut ch pi st on, t he cl ut ch pi st on check
f or wear and damage. Inspect t he c l ear anc e
t he c l ear anc e i s out of t ol er ance, i nspect t he cl ut ch
di sc s and t he pl at es for wear and damage. If t he
di sc s and t he pl at es ar e OK , adj ust t he c l ear anc e
Poor accel er at i on; st al l
speed l ow i n 2 and 1, and
i n D and D3 i n 1st ? ! ? d 2~d ;
t he engi ne does not rev to
hi gh r pm, and t he
t r ansmi ssi on onl y
upshi f t s at l ow r pm (engi n
at nor mal oper at i ng
t emper at ur e)
Engi ne out put l ow
_8_JC JI *
Tor que conver t er one-way
cl ut ch def ect i ve
Tor que conver t er cl ut ch pi st on
def ect i ve
Lock-up shi f t val ve def ect i ve
O-r i ngs f or wear and dam^r.
Chec k f uel pr essur e (see page 11-308).
Chec k f or exhaust rest ri ct i on.
Chec k f or i ntake rest ri ct i on.
Chec k t he VTEC rocker ar ms (see page 6-7).
Repl ac e t he t orque conver t er .
Poor accel er at i on; st al l
speed l ow i n R
Tor que c onver t er cl ut ch pi st on
def ect i ve
Chec k f uel pr essur e (see page 11-308).
Chec k f or exhaust rest ri ct i on.
Chec k f or i ntake rest ri ct i on.
Chec k t he VTEC rocker ar ms (see page 6-7).
Repl ac e t he t or que conver t er .
Engi ne i dle vi br at i on;
engi ne st al l s, i dl es l ow or
rough
L ow ATF l evel
Wor n engi ne or t r ansmi ssi on
mount s
def ect i ve
Dri ve plate def ect i ve or
t r ansmi ssi on mi sassembl ed
def ect i ve
Ti ght val ves
l i nes f or l eaks and l oose connect i ons. If nec essar y,
Chec k t he engi ne and t he t r ansmi ssi on mount s.
Impr oper al i gnment of t he ATF pump and t he
t or que conver t er housi ng may c ause ATF pump
sei zur e. The sympt oms ar e most l y an r pm-r el at ed
Inspect t he ATF st r ai ner f or cl oggi ng wi t h par t i cl es
of st eel or al umi num. If t he ATF st r ai ner i s
c l ogged, r epl ace it, and c l ean t he t orque
conver t er , t he cool er , and t he l i nes.
Inspect shi f t sol enoi d val ve E f or sei zur e, and t he
Chec k f or a mi si nst al l ed/damaged dri ve pl at e.
Check t hat t he i dle rpm in gear i s t he speci f i ed i dle
speed (see page 11-292). If t he i dle speed i s
cor r ect , adj ust t he engi ne and t he t r ansmi ssi on
mount s.
Repl ac e t he t or que conver t er .
Chec k val ve adj ust ment .
14-16
Vehi cl e moves i n N Ex c es s i v e ATF
For ei gn mat eri al i n separ at or
pl at e ori f i ce
Rel i ef val ve def ect i ve
3r d cl ut ch def ect i ve
Cl ear anc e bet ween t he cl ut ch
end-pl at e and t he t op di sc
i ncor r ect
Needl e bear i ng sei zed, wor n,
or damaged
Thr ust washer sei zed, wor n, or
damaged
Chec k t he ATF l evel , and drai n t he ATF if it i s
over -f i l l ed.
Chec k t he 1st , 2nd, 3r d, 4t h, and 5th cl ut ch
pr essur es (see page 14-175).
Chec k t he ATF st r ai ner f or debr i s. If t he ATF
st r ai ner i s cl ogged wi t h par t i cl es of st eel or
i s OK , f i nd t he damaged c omponent s that c aused
t he debr i s. If no c ause f or cont ami nat i on i s f ound,
r epl ace t he t or que conver t er .
and t he ret ai ner seal (1st , 2nd, and 3rd) for wear
and damage. Inspect t he c l ear anc e bet ween t he
cl ut ch end-pl at e and t he top di sc . If t he cl ear ance
i s out of t ol er ance, i nspect t he cl ut ch di sc s and t he
pl at es f or wear and damage. If t he di sc s ar e wor n
or damaged, r epl ace t hem as a set . Inspect t he
cl ut ch wave-pl at e hei ght . If t he hei ght i s out of
t ol er ance, r epl ace t he wave-pl at e. If t he di sc s and
t he pl at es ar e OK, adj ust t he c l ear anc e wi t h t he
cl ut ch end-pl at e.
f eed pi pe i s sc or ed, r epl ace t he end cover .
Inspect t he 3rd cl ut ch f eed pi pe. If t he 3rd cl ut ch
f eed pi pe i s sc or ed, r epl ace it and t he O-ri ng under
t he f eed pi pe gui de.
1st or t he 3rd cl ut ch f eed pi pe i s l oose or
damaged.
Inspect t he 5th cl ut ch f eed pi pe. If t he 5th cl ut ch
Repl ac e t he mai nshaf t if t he bushi ng for t he 5th
cl ut ch f eed pi pe i s l oose or damaged
(cont' d)
14-17
Del ayed engagement
after shi f t i ng f r om N to D
and D3, or exc essi ve
shoc k when shi f t ed i nto D
and D3
Wor n or damaged engi ne or
t r ansmi ssi on mount s
def ect i ve
A/ T cl ut ch pr essur e cont rol
sol enoi d val ve A def ect i ve
sol enoi d val ve B def ect i ve
sol enoi d val ve C def ect i ve
adj ust ment
Connect i on bet ween t he shi f t
body i s wor n
out of adj ust ment
Input shaf t (mai nshaf t ) speed
sensor def ect i ve
m n..+p..+chcft ( c Gu i i l e i b i i ah . )
ATF t emper at ur e sensor
def ect i ve
For ei gn mat er i al i n separ at or
plate ori f i ce
Ser vo cont rol val ve def ect i ve
1st ac c umul at or def ect i ve
1st check ball st uck
Lock-up shi ft val ve def ect i ve
Inspect A/ T cl ut ch pr essur e cont rol sol enoi d
val ves A, B, and C f i l t er/gasket and t he O-r i ngs f or
wear and damage, and i nspect t he sol enoi d val ves
f or sei zur e.
Chec k t he i nput shaf t (mai nshaf t ) speed sensor
and t he out put shaf t (count ershaf t ) speed sensor
i nst al l at i on.
Check f or a l oose shi f t cabl e at t he shi ft l ever and
9 Check t he 1st cl ut ch pr essur e (see page 14-175).
i nspect t he cl ut ch di sc s and t he pl at es for wear
end-pl at e.
f eed pi pe i s s c or ed, r epl ace t he end cover .
Check t he t r ansmi ssi on r ange swi t c h adj ust ment .
Del ayed engagement
after shi f t i ng f r om N to R,
or exc essi ve shoc k when
shi f t ed into R
o Wor n or damaged engi ne or
def ect i ve
A/T cl ut ch pr essur e cont rol
adj ust ment
Loose or poor connect i on
bet ween t he shi f t cabl e and
t r ansmi ssi on or body i s wor n
out of adj ust ment
sensor def ect i ve
def ect i ve
Shi f t fork shaf t st uck
For ei gn mat er i al in separ at or
plate ori f i ce
Shi f t val ve E def ect i ve
4t h/r ever se accumul at or
def ect i ve
Check t he engi ne and t he t r ansmi ssi on mount s.
O-ri ngs f or wear and damage.
Inspect A/ T cl ut ch pr essur e cont rol sol enoi d val ve
A f i l t er/gasket and t he O-r i ngs f or wear and
damage, and i nspect t he sol enoi d val ves f or
sei zur e.
Check t he i nput shaf t (mai nshaf t ) speed sensor
i nst al l at i on.
Check f or a l oose shi f t cabl e at t he shi f t l ever and
t he sel ect or cont rol l ever .
t he c l ear anc e i s out of t ol er ance, i nspect t he cl ut ch
di sc s are wor n or damaged, r epl ace t hem as a set .
i s out of t ol er anc e, r epl ace t he wave-pl at e. If t he
Check f or a mi ssi ng shi f t fork bolt on t he shi ft fork
shaf t .
Check t he 4th cl ut ch pr essur e (see page 14-175).
Inspect t he ser vo val ve and t he O-r i ng.
Check t he t r ansmi ssi on r ange swi t ch adj ust ment .
14-18
Sy mpt om Pr obabl e Cause(s)
Tr ansmi ssi on does not
shi ft
sensor def ect i ve
Output shaf t (count ershaf t )
Engi ne output l ow
and t he output shaf t (count ershaf t ) s peed sensor
i nst al l at i on.
Check t he engi ne cont rol syst em.
Check f uel pr essur e (see page 11-308).
Check f or exhaust rest ri ct i on.
Check f or i ntake rest ri ct i on.
Exc essi ve shoc k or f l ar es
on all upshi f t s and
downshi f t s
sensor def ect i ve
def ect i ve
plate ori f i ce
val ves B and C f i l t er/gasket and t he O-r i ngs f or
wear and damage, and i nspect the sol enoi d val ves
f or sei zur e.
and t he output shaf t (count ershaf t ) speed sensor
i nst al l at i on.
Exc essi ve shock or f l ar es
on 1-2 upshi f t or 2-1
downshi f t
def ect i ve
Tr ansmi ssi on f l ui d pr essur e
swi t ch A (2nd cl ut ch) def ect i ve
plate ori f i ce
1st ac c umul at or def ect i ve
2nd accumul at or def ect i ve
1st check bal l st uck
2nd check ball st uck
Inspect shi ft sol enoi d val ve E for sei zur e, and t he
O-r i ngs for wear and damage.
Inspect A/T cl ut ch pr essur e cont rol sol enoi d
val ves A, B, and C f i l t er/gasket and t he O-r i ngs f or
for sei zur e.
Check t he 1 st and the 2nd cl ut ch pr essur es (see
page 14-175).
the top di sc . If the c l ear anc e i s out of t ol er ance,
i nspect the cl ut ch di sc s and the pl at es f or wear
and damage. If the di sc s ar e wor n or damaged,
ar e OK, adj ust t he c l ear anc e wi th t he cl ut ch
end-pl at e.
f eed pi pe i s sc or ed, r epl ace t he end c over .
(cont' d)
14-19
Automatic? Imm&'xot i
Sy mpt om Pr obabl e Gause(s) "V-,,-;
Ex c es s i v e shoc k or f l ar es
downshi f t
a Wor n or damaged engi ne or
Tr ansmi ssi on f l ui d pr essur e
swi t ch B (3rd cl ut ch) def ect i ve
For ei gn mat er i al i n separ at or
plate ori f i ce
2nd ac c umul at or def ect i ve
3rd ac c umul at or def ect i ve
2nd check bal l st uck
e 2nd cl ut ch def ect i ve
3rd cl ut ch def ect i ve
i nspect A/ T cl ut ch pr essur e cont rol sol enoi d
val ves B and C f i l t er/gasket and t he O-ri ngs f or
f or sei zur e.
Chec k t he 2nd and t he 3rd cl ut ch pr essur es (see
page 14-175).
and t he ret ai ner seal f or wear and damage. Inspect
wave-pl at e hei ght , if t he hei ght i s out of t ol er ance,
ar e OK, adj ust t he cl ear ance wi t h t he cl ut ch
end-pl at e,
9 Inspect t he 3rd cl ut ch f eed pi pe. If t he 3rd cl ut ch
3rd cl ut ch f eed pi pe i s l oose or damaged.
Ex c es s i v e shoc k or f l ar es
downshi f t
o A/ T cl ut ch pr essur e cont rol
* For ei gn mat er i al in separ at or
plate ori f i ce
3rd ac c umul at or def ect i ve
4t h/r ever se ac c umul at or
def ect i ve
3rd cl ut ch def ect i ve
f or sei zur e.
Chec k t he 3rd and t he 4th cl ut ch pr essur es (see
page 14-175).
i nspect t he cl ut ch pi st on, t he cl ut ch pi st on check
and t he ret ai ner seal (3rd) f or wear and damage.
Inspect t he c l ear anc e bet ween t he cl ut ch end-pl at e
and t he top di sc . If t he c l ear anc e i s out of
t ol er ance, i nspect t he cl ut ch di sc s and t he pl at es
f or wear and damage. If t he di sc s ar e wor n or
damaged, r epl ace t hem as a set . Inspect t he cl ut ch
end-pl at e.
Inspect t he 3rd cl ut ch f eed pi pe. If t he 3rd cl ut ch
3rd cl ut ch f eed pi pe i s l oose or damaged.
14-20
Sy mpt om Pr obabl e C a u s e ( s ) No: : ss
Exc essi ve shoc k or f l ar es
downshi f t
Forei gn mat er i al i n separ at or
plate ori f i ce
4t h/r ever se ac c umul at or
def ect i ve
5th accumul at or def ect i ve
for sei zur e.
Check t he 4th and t he 5th cl ut ch pr essur es (see
page 14-175).
the c l ear anc e i s out of t ol er ance, i nspect t he cl ut ch
Inspect t he 5th cl ut ch f eed pi pe. If t he 5th cl ut ch
Repl ace t he mai nshaf t if t he bushi ng f or t he 5th
cl ut ch f eed pi pe i s l oose or damaged.
Noi se f r om t r ansmi ssi on
in all shi f t l ever posi t i ons
Mai nshaf t bear i ng,
count er shaf t bear i ng, or
sec ondar y shaf t bear i ng
def ect i ve
Impr oper al i gnment of t he ATF pump and t he
t orque conver t er housi ng may c ause ATF pump
sei zur e. The sympt oms ar e most l y an rpm-rel at ed
Be car ef ul not to damage t he t or que conver t er
housi ng when r epl aci ng t he mai n ball bear i ng.
You may al so damage t he ATF pump when you
t or que down t he mai n val ve body. Thi s wi l l resul t
in ATF pump sei zur e if not det ect ed. Us e t he
proper t ool s.
Install t he mai n seal f l ush wi t h t he t or que
conver t er housi ng. If you push it into t he t or que
conver t er housi ng unti l it bot t oms out, it wi l l block
t he f l ui d ret urn passage and resul t in damage.
Inspect t he ATF st r ai ner f or cl oggi ng wi t h part i cl es
of st eel or al umi num. If t he ATF st r ai ner i s
c l ogged, r epl ace it, and cl ean t he t or que
conver t er , cool er , and l i nes.
Inspect t he mai nshaf t , t he count er shaf t , and t he
sec ondar y shaf t f or wear or damage.
Vehi cl e does not
accel er at e above 31 mph
(50 km/h)
Repl ace t he t orque conver t er .
Vi brat i on i n all shi ft l ever
posi t i ons
Wor n engi ne or t r ansmi ssi on
mount s
Tor que conver t er def ect i ve
ATF pump wor n or def ect i ve
Dri ve plate def ect i ve or
t r ansmi ssi on mi sassembl ed
Chec k f or a mi si nst al l ed/damaged dri ve plate.
Chec k that t he i dle rpm i n gear i s t he speci f i ed i dle
speed (see page 11-292). If t he i dle speed i s
cor r ect , adj ust t he engi ne and t he t r ansmi ssi on
mount s.
Shi f t l ever does not
oper at e smoot hl y
adj ust ment
Connect i on bet ween t he shi ft
body i s wor n
Shi ft l ever mec hani sm wor n
or def ect i ve
Inspect t he t r ansmi ssi on r ange swi t ch operat i on.
(cont' d)
14-21
Sy mpt om Pr obabl e Cause(s) NoCos
di s mi s s i on does not
shi ft into P
adj ust ment
body i s wor n
Park mec hani sm def ect i ve
c Check f or a l oose shi ft cabl e at t he shi f t l ever and
t he t r ansmi ssi on cont rol shaf t .
Chec k t he park pawl spr i ng i nst al l at i on and t he
park l ever spr i ng i nst al l at i on. If i nst al l at i on i s
i ncor r ect , i nst al l t he spr i ng cor r ect l y. Make sur e
t hat t he park l ever st op i s not i nst al l ed upsi de
down. Chec k t he di st ance bet ween t he park pawl
shaf t and t he park l ever rol l er pi n. If t he di st ance i s
out of t ol er ance, adj ust t he di st ance wi t h t he park
l ever st op.
Tor que conver t er cl ut ch
does not operat e
smoot hl y; t or que
conver t er cl uch dose not
engage or di sengage
def ect i ve
A/ T cl ut ch pr essur e cont r ol
def ect i ve
Tor que conver t er c hec k val ve
def ect i ve
Luck-up cont rol valve
def ect i ve
sensor def ect i ve
Out pur shaf t (count ershaf t )
speed s ens or def ect i ve
Inspect shi ft sol enoi d val ve E operat i on wi t h t he
HDS (see page 14-179).
A wi t h t he HDS (see page 14-182).
A f i l t er/gasket and t he O-r i ngs f or wear and
damage, and i nspect t he sol enoi d val ves for
sei zur e.
Chec k t he i nput shaf t (mai nshaf t ) speed sensor
i nst al l at i on.
Repl ace the t or que conver t er .
A/ T gear posi t i on
i ndi cat or does not
i ndi cat e shi ft l ever
posi t i ons
e Shi f t cabl e broken or out of
adj ust ment
body i s wor n
Inspect t he t r ansmi ssi on range swi t ch oper at i on.
t he sel ect o r cont rol I eve r.
14-22
DRIVER'S UNDER-DASH
F USE/RELAY BOX
DATA LINK
CONNECTOR (DLC)
PARK PIN SWI TCH
SHIF T L OCK S OL ENOI D
TRANMI SSI ON F LUID
PRESSURE SWITCH
A (2ND CLUTCH)
A/T CLUTCH PRESSURE
CONTROL SOLENOID VA L VE C
Test, page 14-184
A/T CLUTCH PRESSURE
CONTROL SOLENOID
VALVE i
Test page 14-184
SHIF T SOLENOID WIRE
HARNESS
S HI FT S OL ENOI D
VA L VE E
(Behind shift solenoid
valve cover)
Test, page 14-179
OUTPUT SHAF T (COUNTERSHAF T)
SPEED SENSOR
INPUT SHAF T (MAINSHAFT)
SPEED SENSOR
POWERTRAI N CONTROL
MODULE (PCM)
A/T CLUTCH PRESSURE
CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE A
Test, page 14-182
TRANS MI S S I ON
RANGE S WI TCH
TRANS MI S S I ON FLUID
PRE S S URE SWI TCH
B (3RD CL UTCH)
SHIFT S OL ENOI D
VAL VE C
(Behi nd shi f t sol enoi d
val ve c over )
Test, page 14-179
SHIFT S OL ENOI D
VAL VE B
(Behi nd shift sol enoi d
val ve c over )
Test, page 14-179
SHIFT S OL ENOI D
VAL VE A
(Behi nd shi f t sol enoi d
SHIF T SOLENOID \ 1 ,70
VAL VE D \
T e s t
' P
a
9e 14-179
(Behind shift solenoid \ Replacement, page 14-179
valve c over ) ATF TEMPERATURE S E NS OR
Test, page 14-179 (Behi nd shi f t sol enoi d val ve c over )
Replacement page 14-179 Test/Replacement, page 14-189
14-23
Sf st em Description
Gener al Descr i pt i on
The aut omat i c t r ansmi ssi on i s a t r ansver se-mount ed t hr ee-shaf t desi gn, i mpl emet i ng an el ect r oni cal l y cont rol l ed
hydr aul i c ci rcui t t hat pr ovi des f i ve f or war d s peeds and one i n r ever se. Engi ne power i s t r ansmi t t ed t hr ough t he t or que
conver t er , a combi nat i on of shaf t s whi c h hol d gear s and cl ut ches and a di fferenti al t hat t r ansmi t s power to t he dr i vi ng
wheel s.
Shaf t , Gear s and Cl ut c hes
Thr ee paral l el shaf t s hol d gear s and c l ut c hes. The gear s on t he i nput shaf t (mai nshaf t ) and sec ondar y shaf t ar e i n
const ant mesh wi t h t hose on t he out put shaf t (count ershaf t ). When speci f i c gear s ar e engaged by t he c l ut c hes, power i s
t r ansmi t t ed t hr ough t he mai nshaf t , to t he sec ondar y shaf t , and/or t he count er shaf t , t hen to t he f i nal dr i ve gear of t he
di fferenti al to provi de dr i ve.
Shi f t Cont r ol Mec hani sm
To shi f t gear s, t he PCM cont r ol s shi f t sol enoi d val ves A, B, C, D and E, and aut omat i c t r ansmi ssi on (A/T) cl ut ch pr essur e
cont rol sol enoi d val ves A
r
B, and C. The shi ft sol enoi d val ves c hange t he posi t i ons of t he shi ft val ves in t he val ve body
whi c h open and c l ose port s to send hydr aul i c pr essur e to t he appropri at e cl ut ch. A/T cl ut ch pr essur e cont rol sol enoi d
val ves A, B, and C c hange t he posi t i on of CPC val ves A, B and C to cont rol hydr aul i c pr c c c j r c gui.
i y
iu me dut c hes,
w h i c h o ! ! c v3 omuui!) bilifts bet ween gear s.
El ec t r oni c Cont r ol
Shi f t i ng' and l ock-up i s ac hi eved by a syst em of sol enoi d val ves dri ven by t he PCM to cont rol ATF f l ow t hr ough var i ous
val ves in t he val ve bodi es to sel ec t t he appr opr i at e gear s f or ai l dri vi ng condi t i ons.
Hydaul i c Cont r ol
The val ve bodi es i ncl ude t he mai n val ve body, t he regul at or val ve body, t he sec ondar y val ve body. They ar e mount ed t o
t he t or que conver t er housi ng. Fl ui d f r om t he regul at or val ve pas s es t hr ough t he manual val ve to t he var i ous cont rol
val ves. Al l t he cl ut ches r ecei ve f l ui d f r om t he i nt ernal hydr aul i c ci rcui t .
Tor que Conver t er
The t or que conver t er i s a f l ui d c oupl i ng, whi c h al l ows t he engi ne to spi n i ndependent l y of t he t r ansmi ssi on yet c onnec t s
t hem t oget her as needed. It i s an assembl y t hat c onsi st s of an i mpel l er (pump), t ur bi ne, st at or and l ock-up cl ut ch, whi c h
uses aut omat i c t r ansmi ssi on flui d (ATF) to t r ansmi t engi ne power to t he i nput shaf t (mai nshaf t ), and act s as a f l ywheel
to hel p t he engi ne run smoot hl y. Dur i ng cer t ai n condi t i ons t he l ock-up cl ut ch i s engaged by t he PCM to mechani cal l y
connect t he engi ne' s cr ankshaf t wi t h t he i nput shaf t (mai nshaf t ) whi c h i mpr oves fuel ec onomy. Ar ound t he out si de of
t he t or que conver t er housi ng i s a ri ng gear whi c h mes hes wi t h t he st art er ri ng gear , when t he engi ne i s bei ng st ar t ed.
Loc k-up Mec hani sm .
The l ock-up mec hani sm c aus es t he i nput shaf t (mai nshaf t ) t o rotate at t he s ame speed as t he engi ne cr ankshaf t .
Pr essur i zed ATF i s dr ai ned f rom bet ween t he t or que conver t er c over and t he t or que conver t er cl ut ch pi st on t hr ough a
f l ui d passage, c ausi ng t he t or que conver t er cl ut ch pi st on to be hel d agai nst t he t orque conver t er housi ng. Toget her wi t h
t he hydr aul i c cont r ol , t he PCM opt i mi zes t he t i mi ng and degr ee of l ock-up. The l ock-up mec hani sm oper at es i n D (2nd,
3r d, 4t h, and 5th gear s) and D3 (1st , 2nd, and 3rd gear s).
14-24
' r
Gear Sel ec t i on
The shi f t l ever has seven posi t i ons; P: PARK, R: RE VE RS E , N: NEUTRAL , D: 1st t hr ough 5th gear r anges, D3: 1st t hr ough
3r d gear r anges, 2: 2nd gear , and 1:1 st gear .
Posi t i on Descr i pt i on
P: PARK Front wheel s l ocked; t he park pawl engaged wi t h t he park gear on count er shaf t . Al l cl ut ches ar e
r el eased.
R: REVERS E Rever se; t he r ever se sel ect or engaged wi t h t he count er shaf t r ever se gear and t he 4th cl ut ch
engaged.
N: NEUTRAL Al l cl ut ches ar e r el eased.
D: DRIVE
(1st t hr ough 5th)
Gener al dr i vi ng; st art s off i n 1st gear , shi f t s aut omat i cal l y to 2nd, 3r d, 4t h, t hen 5th gear ,
dependi ng on t he vehi cl e speed and t he throttle posi t i on. Downshi f t s t hr ough 4t h, 3r d, 2nd, and
1st on decel er at i on to st op. The l ock-up mec hani sm oper at es in 2nd, 3r d, 4t h, and 5th gear s.
D3: DRIVE
(1st t hr ough 3rd)
Used f or rapi d accel er at i on at hi ghway speeds and gener al dr i vi ng; up-hi l l and down-hi l l
dr i vi ng; st ar t s off in 1st gear , shi f t s aut omat i cal l y to 2nd, t hen 3r d, dependi ng on t he vehi c l e
speed and t he throttle posi t i on. Downshi f t s t hr ough 2nd t o 1st on decel er at i on to st op. The
l ock-up mec hani sm oper at es in 2nd and 3r d gear s.
2: S ECOND Used f or engi ne braki ng or better t ract i on st art i ng off on l oose or sl i pper y sur f ac es; st ays in 2nd
gear ; does not shi ft up or down.
1: FI RST Used f or engi ne braki ng; st ays in 1st gear ; does not shi ft up.
St art i ng i s possi bl e onl y in P and N bec ause of a neut ral -saf et y swi t c h.
Aut omat i c Tr ansmi ssi on (A/T) Gear Posi t i on Indi cat or
The A/ T gear posi t i on i ndi cat or i n t he gauge cont rol modul e s hows whi c h shi f t l ever posi t i on has been sel ec t ed.
14-25
Clut ch es and Gears
The f i ve-speed aut omat i c t r ansmi ssi on us es hydr aul i cal l y-act uat ed cl ut ches to engage or di sengage t he t r ansmi ssi on
gear s. When hydr aul i c pr essur e i s i nt r oduced into t he cl ut ch dr um, t he cl ut ch pi st on moves. Thi s pr esses t he f ri ct i on
di sc s and t he st eel pl at es t oget her , l ocki ng t hem s o t hey do not sl i p. Power i s t hen t r ansmi t t ed t hr ough t he engaged
cl ut ch pack to its hub-mount ed gear . L i k ewi s e/ when t he hydr aul i c pr essur e i s bl ed f r om t he cl ut ch pack, t he pi st on
r el eases t he f ri ct i on di sc s and t he st eel pl at es, and t hey ar e f r ee to sl i de past eac h ot her. Thi s al l ows t he gear to spi n
i ndependent l y on i ts shaf t , t r ansmi t t i ng no power .
1st Cl ut c h
The 1st cl ut ch engages/di sengages 1st gear , and i s l ocat ed at t he mi ddl e of t he sec ondar y shaf t . The 1st cl ut ch i s j oi ned
back-t o-back to t he 3rd cl ut ch. The 1st cl ut ch i s suppl i ed hydr aul i c pr essur e by its ATF f eed pi pe wi t hi n t he sec ondar y
shaf t .
2nd Cl ut c h
The 2nd cl ut ch engages/di sengages 2nd gear , and i s l ocat ed at t he end of t he sec ondar y shaf t , opposi t e t he end c over .
The 2nd cl ut ch i s suppl i ed hydr aul i c pr essur e by a ci rcui t c onnec t ed to t he i nt ernal hydr aul i c c i r c ui t
Si J Cl ut c h
The 3rd cl ut ch engages/di sengages 3rd gear , and i s l ocat ed at t he mi ddl e of t he sec ondar y shaf t . The 3rd cl ut ch i s j oi ned
back-t o-back to t he 1st cl ut ch. The 3rd cl ut ch i s suppl i ed hydr aul i c pr essur e by its ATF f eed pi pe wi t hi n t he sec ondar y
shaf t .
4t h Cl ut c h
The 4th cl ut ch engages/di sengages 4th gear , as wel l as r ever se gear , and i s l ocat ed at t he mi ddl e of t he mai nshaf t . The
4th cl ut ch i s j oi ned back-t o-back to t he 5th cl ut ch. The 4th cl ut ch i s suppl i ed hydr aul i c pr essur e by i ts ATF f eed pi pe
wi t hi n t he mai nshaf t .
5t h Cl ut c h
The 5th cl ut ch engages/di sengages 5th gear , and i s l ocat ed at t he mi ddl e of t he mai nshaf t . The 5th cl ut ch i s j oi ned
back-t o-back to t he 4th cl ut ch. The 5th cl ut ch i s suppl i ed hydr aul i c pr essur e by its ATF f eed pi pe wi t hi n t he mai nshaf t .
Gear oper at i on
Gear s on t he mai nshaf t ;
4th gear engages/di sengages wi t h t he mai nshaf t by t he 4th cl ut ch.
5th gear engages/di sengages wi t h t he mai nshaf t by t he 5th cl ut ch.
Rever se gear engages/di sengages wi t h t he mai nshaf t by t he 4th cl ut ch,
o Idl er gear i s spl i ned wi t h t he mai nshaf t , and rot at es wi t h t he mai nshaf t .
Gear s on t he count er shaf t :
Fi nal dri ve gear i s i nt egral wi t h t he count er shaf t .
1 st , 2nd, 3r d, 5t h, and park gear s ar e spl i ned wi t h t he count er shaf t , and rotate wi t h t he count er shaf t .
4th gear and r ever se gear rotate f r eel y f r om t he count er shaf t . The r ever se sel ect or engages 4th gear and r ever se gear
wi t h t he r ever se sel ect or hub. The r ever se sel ect or hub i s spl i ned t o t he count er shaf t s o t hat 4th gear and t he r ever se
gear engage wi t h t he count er shaf t .
Gear s on t he sec ondar y shaf t :
1s t gear engages/di sengages wi t h t he sec ondar y shaf t by t he 1 st cl ut ch.
@ 2nd gear engaj es / di s engages wi t h t he sec ondar y shaf t by t he 2nd cl ut ch.
3r d gear engages/di sengages wi t h t he sec ondar y shaf t by t he 3rd cl ut ch.
Idler gear i s spl i ned wi t h t he sec ondar y shaf t , and rot at es wi t h t he sec ondar y shaf t .
The i dl er gear on t he i dl er shaf t t r ansmi t s power bet ween t he mai nshaf t and t he sec ondar y shaf t .
The r ever se i dl er gear t r ansmi t s power f r om t he mai nshaf t r ever se gear t o t he count er shaf t r ever se gear , and c hanges
rot at i onal di rect i on of t he count er shaf t to r ever se.
Tr ansmi ssi on Cut away Vi ew
COUNTERS HAFT 3RD GEAR TORQUE CONVERTER
RING GEAR
RE VE RS E
IDLER GEAR
MAINSH AF T
IDLER GEAR
IDLER S HAFT
MAINSHAF T
COUNTERS HAFT
C ^ r FINAL DRIVE
bT " GEAR
IDLER SHAF T
IDLER GEAR
S ECONDARY
S HAFT IDLER
GE AR
RE VE RS E
S EL ECTOR
HUB
COUNTERS HAFT
1TH GEAR
COUNTERS HAFT
2ND GE AR
S ECONDARY
S HAFT
COUNTERS HAFT
S T GEAR
2ND CL UTCH
S ECONDARY
S HAFT
2ND GEAR
COUNTERS HAFT
RE VE RS E GEAR
COUNTERS HAFT
4TH GEAR
S ECONDARY
S HAFT 3RD GEAR
DIFFERENTIAL
A S S E MB L Y
S ECONDARY
S HAFT
1S T GEAR
FINAL DRIVEN
GEAR
14-27
Power Fl ow
P Posi t i on
Hydr aul i c pr essur e i s not appl i ed to t he c l ut c hes. Power i s not t r ansmi t t ed to t he count er shaf t . The count er shaf t i s
l ocked by t he park pawl i nt erl ocki ng t he park gear .
N Posi t i on
Engi ne power t r ansmi t t ed f r om t he t or que conver t er dr i ves t he mai nshaf t i dl er gear , t he i dl er shaf t i dl er gear , and t he
sec ondar y shaf t i dl er gear , but hydr aul i c pr essur e i s not appl i ed to t he c l ut c hes. Power i s not t r ansmi t t ed to t he
count er shaf t .
In t hi s posi t i on, t he posi t i on of t he r ever se sel ect or di f f ers ac c or di ng to whet her t he shi ft l ever shi f t ed f r om D or R:
When shi f t ed f r om D, t he r ever se sel ect or engages wi t h t he count er shaf t 4t h gear and t he r ever se sel ect or hub, and
4t h gear engages wi t h t he count er shaf t .
When shi f t ed f r om R, t he r ever se sel ect or engages wi t h t he count er shaf t r ever se gear and t he r ever se sel ect or hub,
and t he r ever se gear engages wi t h t he count er shaf t .
14-28
In 1st Gear
Hydr aul i c pr essur e i s appl i ed t o t he 1st c l ut c h, t hen t he 1st cl ut ch engages t he sec ondar y shaf t 1st gear wi t h t he
sec ondar y shaf t .
The mai nshaf t i dl er gear dr i ves t he sec ondar y shaf t vi a t he i dl er shaf t i dler gear and t he sec ondar y shaf t i dl er gear .
The sec ondar y shaf t 1st gear dr i ves t he count er shaf t 1st gear and t he count er shaf t .
Power i s t r ansmi t t ed to t he f i nal dr i ve gear , whi c h i n t urn dr i ves t he fi nal dr i ven gear .
(cont' d)
14-29
Power Fl ow (cont ' d)
In 2nd Gear
Hydr aul i c pr essur e i s appl i ed to t he 2nd cl ut ch, t hen t he 2nd cl ut ch engages t he sec ondar y shaf t 2nd gear wi t h t he
The mai nshaf t i dl er gear dr i ves t he sec ondar y shaf t vi a t he i dl er shaf t i dl er gear and t he sec ondar y shaf t i dl er gear .
The sec ondar y shaf t 2nd gear dr i ves t he count er shaf t 2nd gear and t he count er shaf t .
Power i s t r ansmi t t ed to t he f i nal dr i ve gear , whi c h i n t urn dr i ves t he f i nal dr i ven gear .
14-30
In 3rd Gear
Hydr aul i c pr essur e i s appl i ed to t he 3rd c l ut c h, t hen t he 3rd cl ut ch engages t he sec ondar y shaf t 3rd gear wi t h t he
o The mai nshaf t i dler gear dr i ves t he sec ondar y shaf t vi a t he i dl er shaf t i dl er gear and t he sec ondar y shaf t i dl er gear.
The sec ondar y shaf t 3r d gear dr i ves t he count er shaf t 3rd gear and t he count er shaf t .
Power i s t r ansmi t t ed to t he f i nal dri ve gear , whi c h in turn dr i ves t he f i nal dr i ven gear .
(cont ' d)
14-31
Syst em Description (cont' d)
Power Fl ow (cont' d)
In 4t h Gear
Hydr aul i c pr essur e i s appl i ed to t he ser vo val ve t o engage t he r ever se sel ect or wi t h t he count er shaf t 4th gear and t he
r ever se sel ect or hub whi l e t he shi ft l ever i s i n f or war d r ange (D, D3 , 2 , and 1).
Hydr aul i c pr essur e i s al so appl i ed to t he 4th c l ut c h, t hen t he 4th cl ut ch engages t he mai nshaf t 4th gear wi t h t he
mai nshaf t .
The mai nshaf t 4th gear dr i ves t he count er shaf t 4th gear and t he count er shaf t .
Power i s t r ansmi t t ed to t he f i nal dri ve gear , whi c h i n t ur n dr i ves t he f i nal dr i ven gear .
14-32
In 5t h Gear
Hydr aul i c pr essur e i s appl i ed to t he 5th cl ut ch, t hen t he 5th cl ut ch engages t he mai nshaf t 5th gear wi t h t he mai nshaf t .
The mai nshaf t 5th gear dr i ves t he count er shaf t 5th gear and t he count er shaf t .
Power i s t r ansmi t t ed to t he fi nal dr i ve gear , whi c h i n t urn dr i ves t he f i nal dr i ven gear .
(cont' d)
14-33
Power Fl ow (cont' d)
R Posi t i on
Hydr aul i c pr essur e i s appl i ed t o t he ser vo val ve to engage t he r ever se sel ect or wi t h t he count er shaf t r ever se gear and
t he r ever se sel ect or hub whi l e t he shi ft l ever i s i n R.
Hydr aul i c pr essur e i s al so appl i ed to t he 4th c l ut c h, t hen t he 4t h cl ut ch engages t he mai nshaf t r ever se gear wi t h t he
mai nshaf t .
The mai nshaf t r ever se gear dr i ves t he count er shaf t r ever se gear vi a t he r ever se i dler gear .
The rotati on di rect i on of t he count er shaf t r ever se gear i s c hanged by t he r ever se i dl er gear . .
The count er shaf t r ever se gear dr i ves t he count er shaf t vi a t he r ever se sel ect or , whi c h dr i ves t he r ever se sel ect or hub.
Power i s t r ansmi t t ed to t he f i nal dr i ve gear , whi c h i n t ur n dr i ves t he f i nal dr i ven gear .
REVERSE
IDLER GEAR
MAINSHAFT
REVERSE GEAR
4TH CLUTCH
EH IB
MAINSHAFT
TORQUE
CONVERTER
FINAL DRIVE
GEAR
COUNTERSHAFT
SECONDARY
SHAFT
REVERSE SELECTOR HUB
FINAL DRIVEN GEAR
14-34
.....l ^ : I
El ect r oni c Cont r ol S f st em
El ec t r oni c Cont r ol
The el ect r oni c cont rol syst em c onsi st s of t he power t r ai n cont rol modul e (PCM), s ens or s , and sol enoi d val ves.
Func t i onal Di agr am
The PCM r ec ei ves i nput si gnal s f r om sensor s, swi t c hes, and ot her cont rol uni t s, pr oc esses dat a, and out put s si gnal s f or
t he engi ne cont rol syst em and t he A/ T cont rol syst em. The A/ T cont rol syst em i nc l udes shi ft cont r ol , gr ade l ogi c cont r ol ,
cl ut ch pr essur e cont r ol , and l ock-up cont r ol . The PCM swi t c hes t he shi ft sol enoi d val ves and t he A/ T cl ut ch pr essur e
cont rol sol enoi d val ves to cont rol shi f t i ng t r ansmi ssi on gear s and l ock-up t or que conver t er cl ut ch.
Engi ne RPM Si gnal
Ac c el er at or Pedal Posi t i on
S ens o r Si gnal
Thr ot t l e Posi t i on
S ens o r Si gnal
Engi ne Cool ant
Temper at ur e Sensor Si gnal
Bar omet r i c Pr essur e
S ens or Si gnal
Mani fold Absolute
Pr essur e Sensor Si gnal
ATF Temper at ur e
S ens o r Si gnal
Ser vi c e Chec k Si gnal
Tr ansmi ssi on
Range
Swi tch
Si gnal
Input Shaf t (Mainshaft)
Speed Sensor Si gnal
Out put Shaf t (Countershaft)
Tr ans mi s s i o n Fl ui d Pr es s ur e
SwitchA (2nd Cl ut c h) S i gnal
Tr ans mi s s i o n Fl ui d Pr es s ur e
S wi t c h B (3r d Cl ut c h) S i gnal
Br ake Pedal Posi t i on
S wi t c h Si gnal
Cr ui s e Cont r ol Downshi f t
Reques t Si gnal
PCM
PGM-FI Cont r ol
S y s t em
A / T Cont r ol S y s t em
Shi f t Cont r ol
Gr ade L ogi c Cont r ol
As c endi ng Cont r ol
Desc endi ng Cont r ol
Cl ut c h Pr essur e
Cont r ol
Loc k-up Cont r ol
Sel f -di agnosi s
Fai l -saf e Func t i on
Communi c at i on and
Out put Func t i on
Shi f t Loc k Cont r ol
Gauge Cont r ol Modul e
A / T Gear Posi t i on Indi cat or
Shi f t Sol enoi d Val v e A
Shi f t Sol enoi d Val v e B
Shi f t Sol enoi d Val ve C
Shi f t Sol enoi d Val ve D
Shi f t Sol enoi d Val ve E
A / T Cl ut c h Pr es s ur e
Cont r ol Sol enoi d Val v e A
Cont r ol Sol enoi d Val v e B
Cont r ol Sol enoi d Val v e C
Vehi c l e S peed Si gnal
Dat a Li nk Connec t or
Aut omat i c
Fi ve-speed
and Rever se
Loc k-up
ON/ OFF
Loc k-up
Condi t i ons
Shi f t Loc k Sol enoi d
(cont' d)
14-35
El ect r oni c Cont r ol S f st em (cont' d)
Shi f t Cont r ol
The PCM i nst ant l y det er mi nes whi c h gear shoul d be sel ect ed by var i ous si gnal s sent f r om s ens or s and swi t c hes, and it
act uat es shi ft sol enoi d val ves A, B, C, D, and E to cont rol gear sel ect i on.
The PCM t ur ns shi ft sol enoi d val ves A, B, C, D, and E ON and OFF to cont rol gear sel ec t i on. AH shi f t sol enoi d val ves ar e
nor mal l y c l osed (ON-OPEN/ OFF-CL OSED). The shi f t sol enoi d val ve port opens t o al l ow ATF to pas s t hr ough when t he
PCM t ur ns it ON, and t he port c l os es , bl ocki ng f l ui d f l ow when t ur ned ON. The combi nat i on of dr i vi ng si gnal s to shi f t
sol enoi d val ves A, B, C, D, and E f or eac h year ar e in t he f ol l owi ng t abl e.
Posi t i on Gear Posi t i on Shi f t Sol enoi d Val v es
A B C D E
D, D3 Shi f t i ng f r om N OFF ON ON OFF OFF
St ays i n 1st ON ON ON OFF OFF
Shi f t i ng gear s bet ween 1st and 2nd OFF ON ON OFF OFF
St ays i n 2nd OFF ON OFF ON OFF or ON
Cl -["f f t r> f * <<"*ssatr l" */rvfrAi/Skirar* O-/4 or H *3t-*4 rice
A M
St ays in 3rd OFF OFF ON OFF OFF or ON
D Shi f t i ng gear s bet ween 3rd and 4th OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF or ON
St ays i n 4th ON OFF OFF OFF OFF or ON
Shi f t i ng gear s bet ween 4th and 5th ON OFF OFF ON OFF or ON
St ays i n 5th ON OFF ON ON OFF or ON
2 2nd gear OFF ON OFF ON OFF
1 1st gear ON ON ON OFF OFF
R Shi f t i ng f r om P and N OFF ON OFF OFF ON
St ays i n r ever se ON ON OFF OFF ON
Rever se i nhi bi t OFF OFF ON OFF OFF
P Park OFF ON OFF OFF ON
N Neut ral OFF ON ON OFF OFF
14-36
Shi f t Cont r ol -Gr ade Logi c
A grade logic control system is used to control shifting in D and D3. The PCM compares actual driving conditions with
programmed driving conditions, based on the input from the accelerator pedal position sensor, the engine coolant
temperature sensor, the barometric pressure sensor, the brake pedal position switch signal, and the shift lever position
signal, to improve shifting control while the vehicle is as
PCM Gauge Control Module
Engi ne RPM Signal
p
R
Transmission
N
Range "D
S wi t c h Signal
D
2
1
Ac c el er at or Pedal
Posi t i on S ens or Si gnal
Out put Shaf t (Countershaft)
Input Shaf t (Mai nshaf t )
S peed S ens o r Si gnal
ATF Temper at ur e
S ens or Si gnal
Br ake Pedal Posi t i on
S wi t c h Si gnal
Engi ne Cool ant
Temper at ur e
S ens or Si gnal
Engi ne RPM Cont r ol
Shi f t Position
Cont r ol
Fai l -saf e Control
Actual Driving
Shift Position
Read of ATF
Temper at ur e
Mast er Tar get of
Shi f t i ng Posi t i on
Cor r ec t i on t o
Shi f t i ng Mode
Cal c ul at i on of
Gr adi ent
Correction for Engine
Coolant Temperature
Sensor Signal Data
Barometric
Pressure
Sensor Signal
Gr ade Logi c Cont r ol
Asc endi ng Mode
Desc endi ng Mode
C
m
a
E
o
o
A/ T Gear Posi ti on
Indi cator
s
E
@
0
m
Shift Solenoid
Valve A
Shift Solenoid
Valve A
Shift Solenoid
Valve B
Shift Solenoid
Valve B
Shift Solenoid
Valve C
Shift Solenoid
Valve C
Shift Solenoid
Valve D
Shift Solenoid
Valve D
Shift Solenoid
Valve E
Shift Solenoid
Valve E
(cont'd)
14-37
Sf stem Descri pt i on (cont ' d)
El ect r oni c Cont r ol S f st em f cont ' d)
Gr ade Logi c .Cont rol : Asc endi ng Cont r ol
When t he PCM det er mi nes that t he vehi c l e i s cl i mbi ng a hi ll i n D and D3, t he syst em ext ends t he engagement ar ea of
2nd, 3r d, and 4th gear s to pr event t he t r ansmi ssi on f r om f r equent l y shi f t i ng bet ween 2nd and 3rd gear s, bet ween 3rd
and 4th gear s, and bet ween 4th and 5th gear s, so t he vehi c l e c an run smoot h and have mor e power when needed.
Shi f t pr ogr ams st or ed in t he PCM bet ween 2nd and 3rd gear s, bet ween 3r d and 4th gear s, and bet ween 4th and 5th
gear s, enabl e t he PCM to aut omat i cal l y sel ec t t he most sui t abl e gear based on t he st eepness of t he gr ade.
1%
AS CENDI NG MODE: Upshi f t Sc hedul e
4TH
c
Q.
O
m%
5
o
50 -
STH
FL AT ROAD MODE
GRADUAL AS CENDI NG MODE
MEDIUM AS CENDI NG MODE
S TE E P AS CENDI NG MODE
HEAVY S TE E P AS CENDI NG MODE
Vehi c l e s peed
Gr ade Logi c Cont r ol : Desc endi ng Cont r ol
When t he PCM det er mi nes that t he vehi c l e i s goi ng down a hi ll i n D and D3, t he upshi ft speed f r om 4th to 5th gear , f r om
3rd to 4th gear , and f r om 2nd to 3rd gear (when t he throttle i s c l osed) bec omes hi gher t han t he set speed f or f l at road
dr i vi ng to ext end t he 4th gear , 3rd gear , and 2nd gear dr i vi ng ar ea. Thi s , in combi nat i on wi t h engi ne braki ng f r om t he
decel er at i on l ock-up, ac hi eves smoot h dri vi ng when t he vehi c l e i s desc endi ng. Ther e ar e t hr ee desc endi ng modes
st or ed in t he PCM wi t h di fferent 4th gear , 3rd gear , and 2nd gear dr i vi ng ar eas based on t he st eepness of t he gr ade.
When t he vehi c l e i s i n 5th g ear o r 4th gear , and t he vehi cl e i s decel er at i ng whi l e appl yi ng t he br akes on a st eep hi l l , t he
t r ansmi ssi on wi l l downshi f t to l ower gear . When you accel er at e, t he t r ansmi ssi on wi l l t hen return to a hi gher gear .
100%
DES CENDI NG MODE: Downshi f t Sc hedul e
5TH
c
(D
ft,
O
o
50
FL AT ROAD MODE
GRADUAL DES CENDI NG MODE
MEDIUM DES CENDI NG MODE
S TE E P DES CENDI NG MODE
Vehi c l e s peed
14-38
Shi f t -Hol d Cont r ol
When dri vi ng on wi ndi ng r oads, t he throttle i s suddenl y r el eased and t he br akes ar e appl i ed, as i s t he c ase when
decel er at i ng at t he ent r ance of a c ur ve, shi f t -hol d cont rol keeps t he t r ansmi ssi on i n its cur r ent (l ower) rati o as it
negot i at es t he cor ner and accel er at es out .
When t he vehi c l e i s dr i ven aggr essi vel y on a wi ndi ng r oad, t he PCM ext ends t he engagement t i me of 3rd gear and 4th
gear to pr event t he t r ansmi ssi on f rom f r equent l y shi fti ng bet ween 3r d, 4t h, and 5th gear s.
The PCM moni t or s t he aver age c hange i n t he vehi cl e speed and throttle over t i me. When t hese val ues exc eed t hose for
nor mal dr i vi ng condi t i ons, t he upshi ft f r om 3r d t o 4th gear and 4th to 5th gear i s del ayed. Thi s gi ves mor e cont rol over
power , and t he engi ne br aki ng. The t r ansmi ssi on r esumes t he nor mal upshi f t pattern after t he PCM det er mi nes that
nor mal dr i vi ng has r esumed.
: Throttle released and brakes applied
Operation pattern of
accelerator
Shift pattern of
conventional
automatic transmission
Shift pattern of
Shift-hold Control
automatic transmission
3r d
(c ont ' d)
14-39
Automatic Transmission
Sf stem Description (cont'd!
Electronic Cont r ol S f st em (cont' d)
Cl ut c h Pr essur e Cont r ol
The PCM act uat es A/ T cl ut ch pr essur e cont rol sol enoi d val ves A , B, and C t o cont rol t he cl ut ch pr essur e. When shi f t i ng
bet ween l ower and hi gher gear s, t he cl ut ch pr essur e r egul at ed by A/T cl ut ch pr essur e cont rol sol enoi d val ves A, B, and
C engages and di sengages t he cl ut ch smoot hl y.
The PCM r ec ei ves i nput si gnal s f r om t he var i ous s ens or s and swi t c hes, pr oc esses dat a, and out put s cur r ent to A/ T
cl ut ch pr essur e cont rol sol enoi d val ves A, B, and C.
PCM
Input Shaf t (Mai nshaft)
Out put Shaf t
I (Count er shaf t )
S peed S ens o r Si gnal
Posi t i on S ens or
Si gnal
Mani fold Absol ut e
Pressure Sensor Si gnal
Engi ne RPM Si gnal
Tr ans mi s s i on Fl ui d
Pr es s ur e S wi t c h
A (2nd Cl ut c h) S i gnal
Tr ans mi s s i o n Fluid
Pr es s ur e S wi t c h
B (3rd Cl ut c h) Si gnal
Engi ne Cool ant
Temper at ur e
S ens or Si gnal
ATF Temper at ur e
S ens o r Si gnal
Igni t i on Ti mi ng
Requi r ement
r
PGM-FI
Cont r ol
S y s t em
Ac t ual
Dr i vi ng Shi f t
Posi t i on
Dec i si on of
Shifting
Mode
Mast er Tar get of
Cont r ol l i ng Cur r ent
Cor r ec t i on f or Engi ne
Tor que Si gnal Dat a
Cor r ec t i on f or Hydr aul i c
Pr essur e Appl yi ng
Timing
Cor r ec t i on f or Engine
Cool ant Temper at ur e
S ens or Dat a
Cor r ec t i on f or ATF
Temper at ur e Sens or
Signal Dat a
Cur r ent
Feedbac k
w
%?
o
2
A / T Cl ut c h
Pr essur e Cont r ol
Sol enoi d Val v es
A , B , an d C
14-40
Loc k-up Cont r ol
Shi f t sol enoi d val ve E cont r ol s t he hydr aul i c pr essur e to swi t ch t he l ock-up shi ft val ve ON and OFF, The PCM act uat es
shi ft sol enoi d val ve E and A/ T cl ut ch pr essur e cont rol sol enoi d val ve A, l ock-up st art . A/ T cl ut ch pr essur e cont rol
sol enoi d val ve A appl i es and r egul at es hydr aul i c pr essur e to t he i ock-up cont rol val ve to cont rol t he vol ume of t he
l ock-up.
The l ock-up mec hani sm oper at es in D (2nd, 3r d, 4t h, and 5th gear s), and in D3 (2nd and 3rd gear s).
Engi ne Cool ant
Temper at ur e
S ens o r Si gnal
Tr ans mi s s i on Range
S wi t c h Si gnal
Posi t i on S ens or Si gnal
Out put Shaf t
(Count er shaf t )
Speed Sens or Si gnal
Input Shaf t
(Mai nshaf t )
S peed S ens or Si gnal
ATF Temper at ur e
S ens o r Si gnal
Engi ne RPM Si gnal
_ Shi f t i ng Posi t i on
Cont r ol
Barometric
Pressure
Sensor
Signal
PCM
Engine Coolant
Temper at ur e Cont r ol
Gr adi ent Cont r ol
by Magni t ude
F ail-safe Cont r ol
Ac t ual
Dr i vi ng
Shi f t
Posi t i on
-Us*.
Correction
from ATF
Temperature
Sensor Data
Driving
Shift
Position
Information
Loc k-up Cont r ol
Loc k-up ON/ OFF
Cont r ol
Loc k-up Condi t i on
Cont r ol
Mast er Tar get of
Cont r ol l i ng Current
Cur r ent Feedbac k
Shi f t Sol enoi d
Val ve E
A / T Cl ut c h Pr essur e
Cont r ol Sol enoi d
Val ve A
(cont' d)
14-41
El ect r oni c Cont r ol S f st em (cont ' d) '
Sel f -di agnosi s
If t he PCM det ect s t he f ai l ure of a si gnal f r om a s ens or , a swi t c h, a sol enoi d val ve, or f r om anot her cont rol uni t , it st or es a
Pendi ng or Conf i r med DTC. Dependi ng on t he f ai l ur e, a Conf i r med DTC i s st or ed i n ei t her t he f i rst or t he sec ond dr i ve
c yc l e. When a DTC i s st or ed, t he PCM bl i nks t he D i ndi cat or and/or t ur ns on t he mal f unct i on i ndi cat or l amp (MIL) by a
si gnal sent to t he gauge cont rol modul e vi a F-CAN.
One Dr i ve Cyc l e Det ect i on Met hod:
When an abnor mal i t y oc c ur s i n t he si gnal f r om a s ens or , a swi t c h, a sol enoi d val ve, or f r om anot her cont rol uni t , t he
PCM st or es a Conf i r med DTC f or t he f ai l ur e and bl i nks t he D i ndi cat or and/or t ur ns on t he MIL i mmedi at el y.
Two Dr i ve Cyc l e Det ect i on Met hod:
When an abnor mal i t y oc c ur s i n t he si gnal f r om a s ens or , a swi t c h, a sol enoi d val ve, or f r om anot her cont rol uni t i n t he
f i rst dr i ve c yc l e, t he PCM st or es a Pendi ng DTC. The D i ndi cat or and t he MIL do not t ur ns on at t hi s t i me. If t he f ai l ure
c ont i nues i n t he sec ond dr i ve c yc l e, t he PCM st or es a Conf i r med DTC and bl i nks t he D i ndi cat or and/or t ur ns on t he
MIL.
Fai l -saf e Funct i on
When an abnor mal i t y oc c ur s in t he si gnal f r om a sensor , a swi t c h, a sol enoi d val ve, or f r om anot her cont rol uni t , t he
PCM i gnor es it and subst i t ut es a pr e-pr ogr ammed val ue f or t hat si gnal to al l ow t he aut omat i c t r ansmi ssi on to cont i nue
oper at i ng. Thi s c aus es a DTC to be st or ed and t he D i ndi cat or to bli nk and/or t he MIL to c ome on. The t r ansmi ssi on may
not shi f t nor mal l y dur i ng f ai l -saf e oper at i on. Do not run t he t est dr i vi ng di agnosi s when t he MIL i s ON, or t he D i ndi cat or
i s bl i nki ng.
14-42
PCMA/ T Cont r ol S f st em El ect r i cal Connec t i ons
IGNITION SWI TCH
B A T / "3 \ | G1
TRA NS MI S S I ON
RA NGE S WI TCH
C48
ATPP
ATPR
ATPN
ATPD
ATPD3
ATP2-1
ATPFWD
A TPRVS
PG1
PG2
LG1
L G2
S HCO-
S G2
NM
VCC2
SG1
NC
VCC1
OP3S W
B26
B28
PCM Connec t or Ter mi nal L oc at i ons
l l l l
II II
3
4 j 5J 6 I 7 1 /
9| 10|
J 11/1 3 | 4 7171 7 1 8 9| 10|
11
7
/
/ J 15 16 1718 19 20 21 11 1213 1415 16 19
/
21
22 23 24 25
><
26 27 28 22 23J 24
X
25
' X
26 27 28
29 30
/
3 2 | / 34 3536
/ /
29
731
32I3334 3536
/
38
7
1/141
^ 4 3 ) | 4^X | 46L 7
/ V I
14017|7
(43)|7l45|46|47
48| 7|
A (49P) B (49P)
Ter mi nal s i de of f emal e t er mi nal s
VA L VE A f -^ p
A / T CL UT CH PRE S S URE
VA L VE B ^
A ^ CL UTCH PRE S S URE
V A L V E C
0 ^
VA L VE A
- .
VA L VE B
OHP
V A L V E C
HHp
V A L V E D
r ^p
VA L VE E
A TF
TE MPE RA TURE
S E NS OR
I NPUT S HA FT
(MAI NS HAFT)
S PE E D S E NS OR
OUTPUT S HAFT
( COUNTE RS HAFT)
S PE E D S E NS OR
TRA NS MI S S I ON FL UI D
PRE S S URE S WI TCH
x A (2ND CL UTCH)
D X)
TRA NS MI S S I ON FL UI D
B (3RD CL UTCH)
1
( c o nt ' d)
14-43
Aut omat ic Tr ansmi ssi on
PCMA/ T Cont r ol S f st em Input s and Out put s at PCM Connec t or A (49P)
Terminal
Number
Wi r e Col or Ter mi nal Name Descr i pt i on Si gnal
A1 RED VBS OL { POWER
S OURCE FOR
SOL ENOI D VAL VES )
Power sour c e f or
sol enoi d val ves
Wi t h i gni ti on swi t ch ON (II): battery vol t age
A3 WHT CANH (CAN
COMMUNICATION
SI GNAL HIGH)
S ends and r ecei ves
c ommuni c at i on
si gnal
Wi t h i gni ti on swi t ch ON (II):
pul ses (about 2.5 V)
A4 RED CANL (CAN
COMMUNICATION
S I GNAL LOW)
S ends and r ecei ves
c ommuni c at i on
si gnal
Wi t h i gni ti on swi t ch ON (II):
pul ses (about 2.5V)
A7 RED/ BL K MRL Y (PGM-FI MAIN
REL AY 1)
Dr i ves PGM-FI
mai n r el ay 1
Power sour c e f or
DTC memor y
Wi t h i gni ti on swi t ch ON (II): about 0 V
Wi t h i gni ti on swi t ch L OCK (0): battery vol t age
A9 YEL / BL K IGP (POWER
S OURCE)
Power sour c e f or
PCM ci rcui t
Wi t h i gni ti on swi t ch ON (II): battery vol t age
A28 PNK S L S (SHIFT L OCK
SOL ENOID)
Dr i ves shi ft lock
sol enoi d
Wi t h i gni ti on swi t ch ON (II), i n P, brake pedal
pr essed, and accel er at or pedal r el eased:
about 0 V
A32 ORN S CS (SERVICE
CHECK SIGNAL )
Det ect s ser vi c e
check si gnal
Wi t h t he ser vi c e check si gnal shor t ed usi ng
HDS: about 0 V
Wi t h t he ser vi c e check si gnal opened:
about 5.0 V
A42 L TGRN BK S W (BRAKE
PEDAL POSITION
SWITCH)
Det ect s brake pedal
si gnal
Wi t h brake pedal r el eased: about 0 V
Wi t h brake pedal pr essed: battery vol t age
14-44
PCMA/ T Cont r ol S f st em Input s and Out put s at PCH Connec t or B A | 49P)
3 -
I
1
/
3 4
A/
7 8 9 id
3 -
I
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
/
21
3 -
I
22 23 24
X
25
X
26 27 28
3 -
I
29
/
31 32 33 34 35 36
/
38
/
40 (43 ^ 4 5 46 47 48
Terminal
Number
Wi re Color Termi nal Name Descri pti on Si gnal
B1 BLK PG2 (PCM GROUND) Ground circuit for PCM Less than 0,2 V at all t i mes
B8 BLU/RED OP2SW
(TRANSMISSION FLUID
PRESSURE SWITCH A
(2ND CLUTCH))
Detects t ransmi ssi on
fluid pressure swi tch A
(2nd clutch) si gnal
o Without 2nd clutch pressure: about 5.0 V
o With 2nd clutch pressure: about 0 V
B9 BLU/WHT OP3SW
(TRANSMISSION FLUID
PRESSURE SWITCH B
(3RD CLUTCH))
fluid pressure swi tch B
(3rd clutch) si gnal
o Without 3rd clutch pressure: about 5.0 V
o With 3rd clutch pressure: about 0 V
B10 BLK PG1 (PCM GROUND) Ground ci rcui t for PCM Less than 0.2 V at all times
B11 BLU/BLK SHA (SHIFT SOLENOID
VALVE A)
Dri ves shift sol enoi d
val ve A
With engine running in R, D (in 1st, 4th, and 5th gears),
D3 (in 1st gear), and 1: battery voltage
With engine running in P, N, D and D3 (in 2nd and 3rd
gears), and 2: about 0 V
B12 GRN/WHT SHB (SHIFT SOLENOID
VALVE B)
Dri ves shift sol enoi d
val ve B
With engine running in P, R, N, D and D3 (in 1st and 2nd
gears), 2, and 1: battery voltage
With engine running in D (3rd, 4th, and 5th gears) and
D3 (3rd gear): about 0 V
B13 RED/BLK ATPN (TRANSMISSION
RANGE SWITCH N
POSITION)
range swi tch N posi ti on
si gnal
In N: about 0 V
In any position other than N: more than 5.0 V
B14 BLU/BLK ATPF (TRANSMISSION
RANGE SWITCH P
POSITION)
range swi tch P position
si gnal
In P: about 0 V
In any position other than P: more than 5.0 V
B15 WHT ATPR (TRANSMISSION
RANGE SWITCH R
POSITION)
range swi tch R position
si gnal
In R: about 0 V
In any position other than R: more than 5.0 V
B16 RED ATPD3 (TRANSMISSION
RANGE SWITCH D3
POSITION)
range swi tch D3
posi ti on si gnal
In D3: about 0 V
In any position other than D3: battery voltage
B17 GRN/RED ATP2-1 (TRANSMISSION
RANGE SWITCH 2-1
POSITION)
Detects transmi ssi on-
range swi tch 2 and 1
position si gnal s
In 2 and 1: about 0 V
In any position other than 2 and 1: battery voltage
B18 WHT/RED NM (INPUT SHAFT
(MAINSHAFT) SPEED
SENSOR)
Detects input shaft
(mainshaft) speed
sensor si gnal
With ignition switch ON (II): about 0 V or about 5.0 V
With engi ne running in N: about 2.5 V (pulses)
B19 YEL / BL U VCC2 (SENSOR
VOLTAGE)
Provi des sensor
voltage
With ignition switch LOCK (0): about 0 V
(c ont ' d)
14-45
PCMA / I Cont r ol S y s t em Input s and Out put s at PCSVI Connec t or B A (49P)
1
/
3 4
/
7 8 9 10
i
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
/
21
1
1
i
22 23 24
><
25
X
26 27 28
1
1
i
29
/
31 32 33 34 35 36
/
38
/
1
1
40
/
(43: 45 46 47 48
/
Terminal
Number
Wire Color Terminal Name Description Signal
B21 GRN SHC (SHIFT SOLENOID
VALVE C)
valve C
With engine running in N, D (in 1st, 3rd, and 5th gears),
D3 (in 1st and 3rd gears), and 1: battery voltage
With engine running in P, R, D (in 2nd and 4th gears),
D3 (in 2nd gear), and 2: about 0 V
B22 YEL/GRN ATPD (TRANSMISSION
RANGE SWITCH D
POSITION)
range switch D position
signal
In D: about OV
In any position other than D: battery voltage
B23 RED/WHT ATPRVS
(TRANSMISSION
RANGE SWITCH RVS)
signal
In R: about OV
In any position other than R: battery voltage
B25 YEL SHE (SHIFT SOLENOID
VALVE E)
valve E
With engine running in P and R: battery voltage
With engine running in N, D and D3 (in 1st gear), 2, and
1- about 0 V
B26 BLU/YEL LSC (A/T CLUTCH
PRESSURE CONTROL
SOLENOID VALVE C)
Drives A/T clutch
pressure control
solenoid valve C
B27 GRN/RED SHD (SHIFT SOLENOID
VALVE D)
valve D
With engine running in D (in 2nd and 5th gears), D3 (in
2nd gear), and 2: battery voltage
With engine running in P, R, N, D (in 1st, 3rd, and 4th
gears), and D3 (in 1st and 3rd gears): about 0 V
B28 RED/YEL TATF (ATF
TEMPERATURE
SENSOR)
Detects ATF
temperature sensor
signal
With ignition switch ON (II): about 0.24.8 V depending
on ATF temperature
With ignition switch LOCK (0): about 0 V
B29 BLU/YEL ATPF WD
(TRANSMISSION
RANGE SWITCH FWD)
range switch D, D3, and
2 position signals
In D, D3, and 2: about OV
In any position other than D, D3, and 2: battery voltage
B34 GRN/BLK SG2 (SENSOR GROUND) Sensor ground Less than 0.2 V at all times
B38 BLK/WHT NC (OUTPUT SHAF T
(COUNTERSHAFT)
SPEED SENSOR)
Detects output shaft
(countershaft) speed
sensor signal
With ignition switch ON (II): about 0 V or about 5.0 V
With driving: about 2.5 V (pulses)
B40 BRN LSB (A/T CLUTCH
PRESSURE CONTROL
SOLENOID VALVE B)
Drives A/T clutch
pressure control
solenoid valve B
B48 RED/BLK LSA (A/T CLUTCH
PRESSURE CONTROL
SOLENOID VALVE A)
Drives A/T clutch
pressure control
solenoid valve A
14-46
PCMA/ T Cont r ol S f st em i nput s and Out put s at PCM Connec t or C O (49P)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
/
20 21
22 23 (24)
/
/
/
29 30 31 32
/
40
J
43 44 45 46
i.
48
/
1
Terminal
Number
Wi r e Col or Ter mi nal Name Descr i pt i on Si gnal
C10 BL K / RED IG1 (IGNITION
SIGNAL )
Det ect s i gni ti on
swi t ch si gnal
Wi t h i gni ti on swi t c h ON (II): battery vol t age
Wi t h i gni ti on swi t ch L OCK (0): about 0 V
C13 YEL / RED VCC1 (S ENS OR
VOL TAGE)
Pr ovi des sensor
vol t age
Wi t h i gni ti on swi t c h ON (II): about 5.0 V
Wi t h i gni ti on swi t c h L OCK (0): about 0 V
C14 GRN/WHT SG1 (SENSOR
GROUND)
Sensor gr ound L es s t han 0.2 V at all t i mes
C44 BRN/ YEL LG1 (LOGIC
GROUND)
Gr ound ci rcui t for
PCM
L es s t han 0.2 V at all t i mes
C48 BRN/ YEL LG2 (LOGIC
GROUND)
Gr ound ci rcui t for
PCM
14-47
System Description (cont'd)
Hydraul i c Cont r ol s
Val ve Bodi es
The val ve body i nc l udes t he mai n val ve body, t he regul at or val ve body, and t he ser vo body. The ATF pump i s dr i ven by
spl i nes on t he end of t he t or que conver t er whi c h i s at t ached to t he engi ne. Fl ui d f l ows t hr ough t he regul at or val ve to
mai nt ai n speci f i ed pr essur e t hr ough t he mai n val ve body t o t he manual val ve, di rect i ng pr essur e to t he shi f t val ves and
to eac h of t he cl ut ches vi a t he sol enoi d val ves. Shi f t sol enoi d val ves A, B, C, D, and E ar e bolted on t he ser vo body. A/ T
cl ut ch pr essur e cont rol sol enoi d val ves A, B, and C ar e mount ed on t he out si de of t he t r ansmi ssi on housi ng.
SHI FT S OL ENOI D
VA L VE A
S HI FT S OL ENOI D
VA L VE D
SHI FT S OL ENOI D
VA L VE B
, A / T CL UTCH PRE S S URE
CONTROL S OL ENOI D
VA L VE B
CONTROL S OL ENOI D
VA L VE C
CONTROL S OL ENOI D
VAL VE A
MAIN VA L VE BODY
14-48
Mai n Val ve Body
The mai n val ve body cont ai ns t he manual val ve, shi ft val ves A, B, C, and E, t he reli ef val ve, t he l ock-up cont rol val ve, t he
cool er c hec k val ve, t he ser vo cont rol val ve, and t he ATF pump gear s. The pr i mar y f unct i on of t he mai n val ve body i s to
swi t ch f l ui d pr essur e on and off and t o cont rol hydr aul i c pr essur e goi ng to t he hydr aul i c cont rol s y s t em.
MAIN VA L VE BODY SHI FT VA L VE A
CHECK VAL VE
ATF PUMP DRI VEN GEAR
Regul at or Val ve Body
The regul at or val ve body cont ai ns t he regul at or val ve, t he t or que conver t er check val ve, t he l ock-up shi ft val ve, and t he
1st and 3r d ac c umul at or s.
(cont ' d)
14-49
Hydraul i c Cont r ol s (cont ' d)
Regul at or Val ve
The regul at or val ve mai nt ai ns const ant hydr aul i c pr essur e f r om t he ATF pump to t he hydr aul i c cont rol s y s t em, whi l e
al so provi di ng flui d to t he l ubri cat i on syst em and t he t or que conver t er . The f l ui d f r om t he ATF pump f l ows t hr ough B
and C. Fl ui d ent eri ng f r om B f l ows t hr ough t he val ve ori f i ce to t he A cavi t y. Thi s pr essur e in t he A cavi t y pushes t he
regul at or val ve t owar d t he val ve spr i ng si de, and t hi s movement of t he regul at or val ve unc over s t he f l ui d port to t he
t or que conver t er and t he rel i ef val ve. The f l ui d f l ows out to t he t orque conver t er and t he reli ef val ve, and t he regul at or
val ve ret urns under spr i ng f or ce. Ac c or di ng to t he l evel of t he hydr aul i c pr essur e t hr ough B, t he posi t i on of t he r egul at or
val ve c hanges, and t he amount of f l ui d f r om C t hr ough t or que conver t er al so c hanges. Thi s oper at i on i s c ont i nuous,
mai nt ai ni ng t he li ne pr essur e.
O M R
REGUL ATOR VA L VE
To TORQUE To L UBRI CATI ON and
CONVERTER To REL I EF VA L VE
VA L VE S PRI NG
Fr om ATF PUMP
Inc r eases i n hydr aul i c pr essur e accor di ng t o t or que ar e r egul at ed by t he regul at or val ve usi ng st at or t orque r eact i on.
The st at or shaf t i s spl i ned wi t h t he st at or i n t he t or que conver t er , and t he st at or shaf t ar m end cont act s t he regul at or
spr i ng c ap. When t he vehi cl e i s accel er at i ng or cl i mbi ng (t orque conver t er r ange), st at or t or que r eact i on act s on t he
st at or shaf t , and t he st at or shaf t ar m pushes t he regul at or spr i ng c ap i n t he di rect i on of t he ar r ow i n proport i on to t he
r eact i on. The st at or react i on spr i ng c ompr es s es , and t he regul at or val ve moves t o i nc r ease t he li ne pr essur e whi c h i s
r egul at ed by t he regul at or val ve. The li ne pr essur e r eac hes its maxi mum when t he st at or t orque react i on r eac hes i ts
maxi mum.
TORQUE CONVERTER
S TATOR S HAFT
ARM END
14-50
Ser v o Body
The ser vo body cont ai ns t he ser vo val ve, shi ft val ve D, t he accumul at or s for 2nd, 4t h, and 5t h, and shi ft sol enoi d val ves
A, B, C, D, and E.
Ac c umul at or
The accumul at or s ar e l ocat ed in t he regul at or val ve body and t he ser vo body. The regul at or val ve body cont ai ns t he 1st
and 3r d ac c umul at or s, and t he ser vo body cont ai ns t he 2nd , 4t h, and 5th ac c umul at or s.
14-51
Syst em Descri pt i on (cont'd)
Hydraul i c Fl ow
Di st r i but i on of Hydr aul i c Pr essur e
As t he engi ne t ur ns, t he ATF pump st art s to oper at e. Aut omat i c t r ansmi ssi on f l ui d (ATF) i s dr awn t hr ough t he ATF
st r ai ner (filter) and di sc har ged into t he hydr aul i c ci rcui t . Th en, ATF f l owi ng f r om t he ATF pump bec omes li ne pr essur e
that i s r egul at ed by t he regul at or val ve. Tor que conver t er pr essur e f r om t he r egul at or val ve ent er s t he t or que conver t er
t hr ough t he l ock-up shi ft val ve, and it i s di sc har ged f r om t he t or que conver t er . The t or que conver t er c hec k val ve
pr event s t or que conver t er pr essur e f r om r i si ng.
The PCM t ur ns t he shi ft sol enoi d val ves ON and OFF. The shi f t sol enoi d val ve i nt er cept s l i ne pr essur e f r om t he ATF
pump vi a t he manual val ve when t he shi f t sol enoi d val ve i s OFF. When t he shi ft sol enoi d val ve i s t ur ned ON by t he PCM,
l i ne pr essur e c hanges to shi f t sol enoi d val ve pr essur e at t he shi f t sol enoi d val ve, t hen t he shi f t sol enoi d val ve pr essur e
f l ows to t he shi ft val ve. Appl yi ng shi ft sol enoi d pr essur e t o t he shi f t val ves moves t he posi t i on of t he shi f t val ve, and
swi t c hes t he port of t he hydr aul i c ci rcui t . The PCM al so c ont r ol s A/ T cl ut ch pr essur e cont r ol sol enoi d val ves A, B, and C.
The A/ T cl ut ch pr essur e cont rol sol enoi d val ves regul at e hydr aul i c pr essur e, and appl i es t he pr essur e to t he c l ut c hes t o
engage smoot hl y. The c l ut c hes r ecei ve opt i mum cl ut ch pr essur e whi c h i s r egul at ed by t he A/ T cl ut ch pr essur e cont rol
sol enoi d val ves f or comf or t abl e dri vi ng and shi f t i ng under al l condi t i ons.
Hydraulic pressure at the port for use in the hydraulic circuit
Port
No.
Hydr aul i c Pressure Port
No.
Hydraulic Pressure
1 Li ne S B Shi f t sol enoi d val ve B
3 Li ne S C Shi f t sol enoi d val ve C
3' Li ne S D Shi f t sol enoi d val ve D
4 Li ne S E Shi f t sol enoi d val ve E
4' Li ne 10 1st cl ut ch
4" Li ne 20 2nd cl ut ch
7 Li ne 30 3r d cl ut ch
1A Li ne or A/ T cl ut ch pr essur e cont rol sol enoi d
val ve A
40 4th cl ut ch
1B Li ne 50 5th cl ut ch
3A Li ne 55 A/ T cl ut ch pr essur e cont rol sol enoi d val ve A
3B Li ne 55' A/ T cl ut ch pr essur e cont rol sol enoi d val ve A
3C Li ne 56 A/ T cl ut ch pr essur e cont rol sol enoi d val ve B
5A Li ne 57 A/ T cl ut ch pr essur e cont r ol sol enoi d val ve C
5B Li ne 90 Tor que conver t er
5C Li ne 91 Tor que conver t er
5D Li ne 92 Tor que conver t er
5E Li ne or A/ T cl ut ch pr essur e cont rol sol enoi d
val ve B
93 ATF c ool er
5F Li ne or A/ T cl ut ch pr essur e cont rol sol enoi d
val ve A or B
94 Tor que conver t er
5G A/ T cl ut ch pr essur e cont rol sol enoi d val ve B 95 Lubr i cat i on
5H A/ T cl ut ch pr essur e cont rol sol enoi d val ve C 96 Tor que conver t er
5J A/ T cl ut ch pr essur e cont rol sol enoi d val ve C 97 Tor que conver t er
5K A/ T cl ut ch pr essur e cont rol sol enoi d val ve C 99 Suc t i on
5L A/ T cl ut ch pr essur e cont r ol sol enoi d val ve C X Drai n
5N A/ T cl ut ch pr essur e cont r ol sol enoi d val ve C HX Hi gh posi t i on dr ai n
S A Shi f t sol enoi d val ve A A X Ai r dr ai n
14-52
/ ^. ---o-'-N !
Q. . S
/
( ))c\
A( OX& ^ S '
N Posi t i on
The PCM cont r ol s t he shi ft sol enoi d val ves. The condi t i ons of t he shi ft sol enoi d val ves and t he posi t i ons of t he shi f t
.val ves ar e as f ol l ows:
Shi f t sol enoi d val ve A: OFF, and shi ft val ve A r emai ns on t he ri ght si de
Shi f t sol enoi d val ve B: ON, and shi ft val ve B moves to t he left si de
Shi f t sol enoi d val ve C: ON, and shi ft val ve C moves to t he left si de
Shi f t sol enoi d val ve D: OFF, and shi ft val ve D r emai ns on t he left si de
Shi f t sol enoi d val ve E; OFF, and shi ft val ve E r emai ns on t he left si de
Li ne pr essur e (1) f l ows to t he shi f t sol enoi d val ves and A/ T cl ut ch pr essur e cont r ol sol enoi d val ve A. Under t hi s
condi t i on, hydr aul i c pr essur e i s not appl i ed to t he cl ut ches.
NOTE: When us ed, " l ef t " or " r i ght " i ndi cat es di rect i on on t he hydr aul i c ci r cui t .
TRANSMISSION
FLUID PRES S URE
SWITCH
B (3RD CLUTCH) ^
CL UTCH CL UTCH ACCUMULATOR
4TH 5TH 5TH
CL UTCH CL UTCH ACCUMUL ATOR
2ND
CLUTCH
TRANSMISSION
FLUID PRES S URE
SWITCH
A (2ND CLUTCH)
(cont' d)
14-53
Hydraul i c Fl ow {cont' d)
D Posi t i on; 1st gear shi f t i ng f rom N posi t i on
The shi f t sol enoi d val ves r emai n t he s ame as i n N when shi f t i ng to D f r om N. The manual val ve i s moved t o D, and
unc over s t he li ne pr essur e port (4) l eadi ng t o A/ T cl ut ch pr essur e cont rol sol enoi d val ve C. Hydr aul i c pr essur e to t he 1st
cl ut ch f r om A/ T cl ut ch pr essur e cont rol sol enoi d val ve A i s cr eat ed as shi ft sol enoi d val ve A i s OFF, B and C r emai n ON.
A/T cl ut ch pr essur e cont rol sol enoi d val ve A pr essur e (55) c hanges to 1st cl ut ch pr essur e (10) at shi ft val ve B, and f l ows
to t he 1st cl ut ch. The 1st cl ut ch i s engaged gent l y when shi f t i ng to D f r om N.
NOTE: When us ed, " l ef t " or " r i ght " i ndi cat es di rect i on on t he hydr aul i c ci rcui t .
14-54
D Posi t i on: Dri vi ng i n 1st gear
The PCM t urns shi ft sol enoi d val ve A ON, B and C r emai n ON, and D and E r emai n OFF. Shi f t sol enoi d val ve A pr essur e
(SA) i s appl i ed to t he ri ght si de of shi ft vaj ve A. Shi f t val ve A i s moved to t he left si de to unc over t he l i ne pr essur e port
l eadi ng to t he 1st c l ut c h, and to cover t he A/ T cl ut ch pr essur e cont rol sol enoi d val ve pr essur e port.
Fl ui d f l ows to t he 1 st cl ut ch by way of:
Li ne pr essur e (1) - + Shi f t val ve DLi ne pr essur e (1A) Shi f t val ve AL i ne pr essur e (1B) Manual val veL i ne
pr essur e (5A) Shi f t val ve CL i ne pr essur e (5B) -+Shi f t val ve B 1st cl ut ch pr essur e (10) 1st cl ut ch
1st cl ut ch pr essur e (10) i s appl i ed to t he 1st cl ut ch, and the 1st cl ut ch i s engaged sec ur el y.
NOTE: When used, " l ef t " or " r i ght " i ndi cat es di rect i on on t he hydr aul i c ci rcui t .
(cont ' d)
14-55
Syst em Description (cont' d)
Hydraul i c Fl ow (cont ' d)
D Posi t i on; Shi f t i ng bet ween 1st gear and 2nd gear
As t he speed of t he vehi c l e r eac hes t he pr ogr ammed val ue, t he PCM t ur ns shi f t sol enoi d val ve A OFF, B and C r emai n
ON, and D and E r emai n OFF. Shi f t sol enoi d val ve A pr essur e (SA) in t he ri ght si de of shi ft val ve A i s r el eased. Shi f t val ve
A moves to t he ri ght si de uncover i ng t he A/ T cl ut ch pr essur e cont rol sol enoi d val ve pr essur e port l eadi ng to t he 1st and
2nd c l ut c hes. The PCM cont r ol s t he A/ T cl ut ch pr essur e cont rol sol enoi d val ves to regul at e hydr aul i c pr essur e. A/ T
cl ut ch pr essur e cont rol sol enoi d val ve A pr essur e (55) c hanges t o 1 st cl ut ch pr essur e (10) at shi ft val ve B, and A/ T cl ut ch
pr essur e cont rol sol enoi d val ve B pr essur e (66) c hanges to 2nd cl ut ch pr essur e (20) at shi ft val ve A. The 1st and 2nd
cl ut ches ar e engaged gent l y.
14-56
D Posi t i on; Dr i v i ng i n 2nd g ear
The PCM t ur ns shi ft sol enoi d val ves C OFF, D ON, A and E r emai n OFF, and B r emai ns ON. Shi f t sol enoi d val ve C
pr essur e (SC) in t he ri ght si de of shi ft val ve C i s r el eased. Shi ft val ve C moves to t he ri ght si de to swi t c h t he port s. Thi s
movement c over s t he port s to block t he A/T cl ut ch pr essur e cont rol sol enoi d val ve pr essur e at shi ft val ves C and A, and
uncover t he li ne pr essur e port l eadi ng to t he 2nd cl ut ch.
Fl ui d f l ows to 2nd cl ut ch by way of:
Li ne pr essur e (1) Manual val veLi ne pr essur e (4) -*> Shi ft val ve CL i ne pr essur e (5E) Shi f t val ve B Li ne pr essur e
(5F) - + Shi f t val ve A2nd cl ut ch pr essur e (20) 2nd cl ut ch
2nd cl ut ch pr essur e (20) i s appl i ed to t he 2nd cl ut ch, and t he 2nd cl ut ch i s engaged sec ur el y.
(cont' d)
14-57
Sf stem Description f cont' d)
Hydraul i c Fl ow (cont' d)
D Posi t i on: Shi f t i ng bet ween 2nd gear and 3rd gear
As t he speed of t he vehi c l e r eac hes t he pr ogr ammed val ue, the PCM t ur ns shi f t sol enoi d val ve C ON, A and E r emai n
OFF, and B and D r emai n ON. Shi f t sol enoi d val ve C pr essur e (SC) i s appl i ed to t he ri ght si de of shi ft val ve C. Shi f t val ve
C moves to t he left si de uncover i ng t he A/ T cl ut ch pr essur e cont rol sol enoi d val ve pr essur e port s l eadi ng to t he 2nd and
3rd c l ut c hes. The PCM cont r ol s t he A/ T cl ut ch pr essur e cont rol sol enoi d val ves to regul at e hydr aul i c pr essur e. A/ T cl ut ch
pr essur e cont rol sol enoi d val ve B pr essur e (56) c hanges to 2nd cl ut ch pr essur e (20) at shi ft val ve A, and A/ T cl ut ch
pr essur e cont rol sol enoi d val ve C pr essur e (57) c hanges to 3rd cl ut ch pr essur e (30) at shi ft val ve A. The 2nd and 3rd
cl ut ches ar e engaged gent l y.
14-58
D Posi t i on: Dri vi ng i n 3rd gear
The PCM t ur ns shi ft sol enoi d val ves B and D OFF, A and E r emai n OFF, and C r emai ns ON. Shi f t sol enoi d val ve B
pr essur e (SB) in t he right si de of shi f t val ve B i s r el eased, and shi f t val ve B moves to t he ri ght si de. Shi f t sol enoi d val ve D
pr essur e (SD) in t he left si de of shi f t val ve D i s r el eased, and shi f t val ve D i s moved to t he left si de. Thi s val ve movement
c aus es A/ T cl ut ch pr essur e cont rol sol enoi d val ve C pr essur e to be di rect ed to t he port l eadi ng to t he 3rd cl ut ch.
A/ T cl ut ch pr essur e cont rol sol enoi d val ve C pr essur e (57) c hanges to (5J) at shi ft sol enoi d val ve D and to (5K) at shi f t
val ve B, and bec omes 3rd cl ut ch pr essur e (30) at shi ft val ve A. 3rd cl ut ch pr essur e (30) i s appl i ed to t he 3rd cl ut ch, and
t he 3rd cl ut ch i s engaged sec ur el y.
(cont' d)
14-59
Sf stem Description f cont'd)
D Posi t i on; Shi f t i ng bet ween 3r d gear and 4t h gear
As t he speed of t he vehi cl e r eac hes t he pr ogr ammed val ue, t he PCM t ur ns shi ft sol enoi d val ve C OFF, and A, B, D, and E
r emai n OFF. Shi f t sol enoi d val ve C pr essur e (SC) in t he ri ght si de of shi ft val ve C i s r el eased. Shi f t val ve C i s moved to t he
ri ght si de uncover i ng t he A/ T cl ut ch pr essur e cont rol sol enoi d val ve B and C pr essur e port s l eadi ng to t he 3rd and 4th
c l ut c hes. The PCM cont r ol s t he A/ T cl ut ch pr essur e cont rol sol enoi d val ves to regul at e hydr aul i c pr essur e. A/ T cl ut ch
pr essur e cont rol sol enoi d val ve C pr essur e (57) c hanges to 3rd cl ut ch pr essur e (30) at shi ft val ve A, and A/ T cl ut ch
pr essur e cont rol sol enoi d val ve B pr essur e (56) c hanges to 4th cl ut ch pr essur e (40) at shi ft val ve B. The 3rd and 4th
c l ut c hes ar e engaged gent l y.
S F
S
"
E
S B CLUTCH ACCUMULATOR CIUTCH HUTCH SSUMUUTOB J S SWITCH
B (3RD CLUTCH)
FLUID PRES S URE
SWITCH
A {2ND CLUTCH)
14-60
D Position: Driving in 4th gear
The PCM t ur ns shi f t sol enoi d val ve A ON, and B, C, 0, and re* aaifi OFF. Shi f t sol enoi d tfalve A pr essur e (SA) i s appl i ed
t o t he ri ght si de of shi f t val ve A. Shi f t val ve A i s moved to the left si de t o c over t he PJ T cl ut ch pr essur e cont r ol sol enoi d
val ve A and C pr essur e port s l eadi ng t o t he 2nd and 3rd c l ut c hes.
A/ T cl ut ch pr essur e cont rol sol enoi d val ve B pr essur e (56) c hanges t o ibd) at shi f t val ve C. and bec omes 4t h cl ut ch
pr essur e (40) at shi ft val ve B. 4t h cl ut ch pr essur e (40) i s hel d h'.gh 'by A T c i ui c h pr essur e cont r ol sol enoi d val ve B, and
t he 4th cl ut ch i s engaged sec ur el y.
NOTE: When us ed, " l ef t " or " r i ght " i ndi cat es di rect i on on t r .s hydr aul i c ci rcui t
(cont ' d)
14-61
Sf stem Description (cont'd!
D Posi t i on: Shi f t i ng bet ween 4t h gear and 5t h gear
As t he speed of t he vehi c l e r eac hes t he pr ogr ammed val ue, t he PCM t ur ns shi ft sol enoi d val ve D ON, A r emai ns ON, and
B, C, and E r emai n OFF. Shi f t sol enoi d val ve D pr essur e (SD) i s appl i ed to t he left si de of shi ft val ve D. Shi f t val ve D i s
moved to t he ri ght si de uncover i ng t he A/ T cl ut ch pr essur e cont rol sol enoi d val ve C pr essur e port l eadi ng to t he 5th
cl ut ch. A/ T cl ut ch pr essur e cont rol sol enoi d val ve B pr essur e (56) c hanges to 4th cl ut ch pr essur e (40) at shi ft val ve B. A/ T
cl ut ch pr essur e cont r ol sol enoi d val ve C pr essur e (57) c hanges to (5L) at shi ft val ve D and to (5N) at shi ft val ve B, and
bec omes 5th cl ut ch pr essur e (50) at shi ft val ve A. The 4th and 5th cl ut ches are engaged gent l y.
14-62
D Posi t i on; Dri vi ng i n 5t h gear
The PCM t urns shi ft sol enoi d val ve C ON, A and D r emai n ON, and B and E r emai n OFF. Shi f t sol enoi d val ve C pr essur e
(SC) i s appl i ed to t he ri ght si de of shi ft val ve C. Shi ft val ve C i s moved to t he left si de. Thi s di rect s A/T cl ut ch pr essur e
cont rol sol enoi d val ve B pr essur e to shi ft val ve B wher e it i s bl ocked. The pr essur e in t he 4th cl ut ch i s r el eased t hr ough
shi ft val ve C.
5th cl ut ch pr essur e (50) i s hel d hi gh by A/ T cl ut ch pr essur e cont rol sol enoi d val ve C, and t he 5th cl ut ch i s engaged
sec ur el y.
NOTE: When used, " l ef t " or " r i ght " i ndi cat es di rect i on on t he hydr aul i c ci r cui t .
TRANSMISSION
FLUID PRES S URE
SWITCH
B (3RD CLUTCH)
CLUTCH CL UTCH ACCUMULATOR
4TH 5TH 5TH
CL UTCH TRANSMISSION
FLUID PRES S URE
SWITCH
A (2ND CL UTCH)
A / T CL UT CH P R E S S U R E
CONT ROL S OL E NOI D V A L V E S
(cont' d)
14-63
2 Posi t i on
The PCM t ur ns t he shi ft sol enoi d val ves OFF and ON. The condi t i ons of t he shi ft sol enoi d val ves and t he posi t i ons of t he
shi ft val ves ar e as f ol l ows:
Shi f t sol enoi d val ve A: OFF, and shi f t val ve A r emai ns on t he i n ri ght si de
Shi f t sol enoi d val ve C: OFF, and shi f t val ve C r emai ns on t he i n ri ght si de
Shi f t sol enoi d val ve D: ON, and shi ft val ve D moves to t he ri ght si de
Shi f t sol enoi d val ve E: OFF, and shi f t val ve E r emai ns on t he in left si de
Li ne pr essur e (1) c hanges t o li ne pr essur e (4) at t he manual val ve, and f l ows to shi ft val ve C. Li ne pr essur e (4) f l ows to
shi f t val ve A vi a shi f t val ve B, and bec omes 2nd cl ut ch pr essur e (20), 2nd cl ut ch pr essur e (20) i s appl i ed to t he 2nd c l ut c h,
and t he 2nd cl ut ch i s engaged.
14-64
1 Posi t i on
The PCM t ur ns t he shi f t sol enoi d val ves OFF and ON, The condi t i ons of t he shi ft sol enoi d val ves and t he posi t i ons of t he
shi ft val ves are as f ol l ows:
Shi f t sol enoi d val ve A: ON, and shi f t val ve A moves to the left si de
Shi f t sol enoi d val ve C: ON, and shi ft val ve C moves to t he left si de
Shi f t sol enoi d val ve D: OFF, and shi f t val ve D r emai ns on the in left si de
Shi f t sol enoi d val ve E: OFF, and shi ft val ve E r emai ns on t he in left si de
Li ne pr essur e (1) bec omes 1st cl ut ch pr essur e (10) at shift val ve B.
Fl ui d f l ows to 1st cl ut ch by way of:
Li ne Pr essur e (1) Shi ft Vai ve D - Li ne Pr essur e (1A) Shi f t Val ve A - Li ne Pr essur e (1B) Manual Val ve - Li ne
Pr essur e (5A) -> Shi ft Val ve C - Li ne Pr essur e (5B) Shi ft Val ve B - 1st Cl ut ch Pr essur e (10) - 1st Cl ut ch
1st cl ut ch pr essur e (10) i s appl i ed to t he 1st cl ut ch, and the 1st cl ut ch i s engaged.
TRANSMISSION
FLUID PRES S URE
SWITCH
B (3RD CLUTCH)
4TH 5TH 5TH
2ND
CL UTCH
TRANSMISSION
FLUID PRES S URE
SWITCH
A (2ND CL UTCH)
T O R Q U E I
CONVERTER
CHECK
VALVE
A/T CLUTCH PRESSURE
CONTROL SOLENOID VALVES
(cont' d)
14-65
1 Posi t i on; Shi f t i ng to R posi t i on f r om P or N posi t i on
When shi f t i ng t o R, t he PCM t ur ns shi ft sol enoi d val ves B and E ON, and A, C, and D ar e t ur ned OFF. Shi f t sol enoi d val ve
B pr essur e (SB) i s appl i ed to t he ri ght si de of shi f t val ve B, and shi ft val ve B i s moved to t he left si de. Shi f t sol enoi d val ve
E pr essur e (SE) i s appl i ed to t he left si de of shi f t val ve E, and shi ft val ve E i s moved to t he ri ght si de. Li ne pr essur e (1)
c hanges to (3) at t he manual val ve, and f l ows to t he ser vo val ve vi a shi ft val ve E. The ser vo val ve i s moved to t he r ever se
r ange posi t i on. Movement of shi ft val ves B and E, and t he ser vo val ve cr eat es 4th cl ut ch li ne pr essur e bet ween t he 4th
cl ut ch and A/ T cl ut ch pr essur e cont rol sol enoi d val ve A. 4th cl ut ch pr essur e (40) i s appl i ed to t he 4th cl ut ch, and t he 4th
cl ut ch i s engaged gent l y.
TRANSMISSION
FLUID PRES S URE
SWITCH
B (3RD CLUTCH)
CLUTCH CL UTCH ACCUMUL ATOR
" i j Di i f !
4TH BTH 5TH
CL UTCH TRANSMISSION
FLUID PRES S URE
SWITCH
A (2ND CLUTCH)
r n
TORQUE
CONVERTER
CHECK
VALVE
E: ON
A/T CLUTCH PRESSURE
CONTROL SOLENOID VALVES
| A TF
| COOLER
14-66
1 Posi t i on: Dri vi ng i n r ever se gear
Af t er st art i ng off in r ever se gear , t he PCM t ur ns shi ft sol enoi d val ve A ON, B and E r emai n ON, and C and D r emai n OFF.
Shi f t sol enoi d val ve A pr essur e (SA) i s appl i ed to t he ri ght si de of shi ft val ve A to c over t he A/ T cl ut ch pr essur e cont rol
sol enoi d val ve A pr essur e port, and unc over s t he li ne pr essur e port l eadi ng to t he 4th cl ut ch creat i ng full li ne pr essur e.
The 4th cl ut ch i s engaged sec ur el y wi t h li ne pr essur e.
Rever se Inhi bi t or Cont r ol
When R i s sel ect ed whi l e t he vehi c l e i s movi ng f or war d, t he PCM c ommands shi ft sol enoi d val ve A to t urn OFF, and E to
r emai n OFF. Shi ft sol enoi d val ve A pr essur e (SA) i s not appl i ed to shi ft val ve A so that l i ne pr essur e (3A) i s not appl i ed to
t he ser vo val ve. Al so shi ft sol enoi d val ve E pr essur e (SE) i s not appl i ed to shi ft val ve E so that l i ne pr essur e (3') i s not
appl i ed to t he ser vo val ve. The ser vo val ve cannot be shi f t ed to t he r ever se posi t i on, and hydr aul i c pr essur e i s not
appl i ed to t he 4th cl ut ch f rom t he ser vo val ve f or r ever se; as a r esul t , power i s not t r ansmi t t ed to t he r ever se di rect i on.
(cont' d)
14-67
Hydraul i c Fl ow (cont ' d)
P Posi t i on
The PCM t ur ns shi ft sol enoi d val ves 8 and E OM and A, C, and .0 OFF- Li ne pr essur e (1) f l ows to t he shi ft sol enoi d val ves
and A/ T cl ut ch pr essur e cont r ol sol enoi d val ve A, Li ne pr essur e (3) c hanges to (3' ) at shi ft val ve E, and f l ows to t he ser vo
val ve. The ser vo val ve i s moved to t he r ever se/par k posi t i on. Hydr aul i c pr essur e i s not appl i ed to t he c l ut c hes.
14-68
L._.";Cird
Lock-up S f st em
The l ock-up mec hani sm of t he t orque conver t er cl ut ch oper at es in D (2nd, 3r d, 4t h, and 5th gear s), and i n D3 (2nd and
3rd gear s). The pr essur i zed flui d i s dr ai ned f r om t he back of t he t or que conver t er t hr ough a f l ui d pas s age, c ausi ng t he
torque conver t er cl ut ch pi st on to be hel d agai nst t he t orque conver t er c over . As t hi s t akes pl ace, t he mai nshaf t rot at es at
t he s ame speed as t he engi ne cr ankshaf t . Toget her wi t h t he hydr aul i c cont r ol , t he PCM opt i mi zes t he t i mi ng and amount
of t he l ock-up mec hani sm. When shi ft sol enoi d val ve E i s t urned on by t he PCM, shi ft sol enoi d val ve E pr essur e swi t c hes
t he l ock-up shi ft val ve on. A/ T cl ut ch pr essur e cont rol sol enoi d val ve A and t he l ock-up cont rol val ve cont rol t he amount
of t he l ock-up.
Tor que Conver t er Cl ut c h Lock-up ON (Engagi ng Tor que Conver t er Cl ut c h)
Fl ui d in t he c hamber bet ween t he t or que conver t er cover and t he t or que conver t er cl ut ch pi st on i s dr ai ned off, and f l ui d
ent eri ng f r om t he c hamber bet ween t he pump and t he st at or exer t s pr essur e t hr ough t he t or que conver t er cl ut ch pi st on
agai nst t he t orque conver t er cover . The t or que conver t er cl ut ch pi st on engages wi t h t he t or que conver t er cover ; t he
t orque conver t er cl ut ch lock-up ON, and t he mai nshaf t rotates at t he s ame speed as t he engi ne.
MAINSHAF T
Tor que Conver t er Cl ut c h Loc k-up OFF (Di sengagi ng Tor que Conver t er Cl ut c h)
Fl ui d ent er s into t he c hamber bet ween t he t orque conver t er c over and t he t orque conver t er cl ut ch pi st on and passes
t hr ough t he t orque conver t er and goes out t hr ough t he c hamber s bet ween t he t urbi ne and t he st at or, and bet ween t he
pump and t he st at or. As a resul t , t he t orque conver t er cl ut ch pi st on moves away f r om t he t orque conver t er cover , and
t he t orque conver t er cl ut ch l ock-up i s r el eased; t he t orque conver t er cl ut ch lock-up OFF.
[ Po wer f l o w | TURBINE
I 1 \
x
PUMP
MAINSHAFT
(cont ' d)
14-69
L ock-up Sf s t em(cont 'd)
No Loc k-up
The PCM t ur ns shi ft sol enoi d val ve E OFF, and shi f t sol enoi d val ve E pr essur e (SE) i s not appl i ed to t he l ock-up shi ft
val ve. The l ock-up shi ft val ve r emai ns to t he ri ght uncover i ng t he t or que conver t er pr essur e port s l eadi ng to t he left si de
of t he t or que conver t er and r el easi ng pr essur e f r om t he ri ght si de of t he t or que conver t er . Tor que conver t er pr essur e
(92) c hanges to (94) at t he l ock-up shi ft val ve, and ent er s i nto t he left si de of t he t or que conver t er to di sengage t he t orque
conver t er c l ut c h. Thi s keeps t he t or que conver t er cl ut ch pi st on keeps away f r om t he t or que conver t er c over and t he
t or que conver t er cl ut ch l ock-up i s OFF.
NOTE: When used, " l ef t " or " r i ght " i ndi cat es di rect i on on t he hydr aul i c ci r cui t .
14-70
Part i al Loc k-up
As the speed of t he vehi cl e r eac hes t he pr ogr ammed val ue, t he PCM t ur ns shi ft sol enoi d val ve E ON, and shi ft sol enoi d
val ve E pr essur e (SE) i s appl i ed to t he right si de of t he lock-up shi ft val ve. The l ock-up shi ft val ve i s moved to t he left si de
to swi t ch t he t or que conver t er pr essur e (91) port, whi ch goes to t he ri ght si de of t he torque conver t er , and t or que
conver t er pr essur e (94) i s r el eased f rom t he left si de of t he t or que conver t er . Tor que conver t er pr essur e (91) f l ows to t he
ri ght si de of t he t or que conver t er to engage t he t orque conver t er cl ut ch. The PCM al so cont r ol s A/ T cl ut ch pr essur e
cont rol sol enoi d val ve A to regul at e A/T cl ut ch pr essur e cont rol sol enoi d val ve A pr essur e (55) whi c h i s appl i ed to t he
l ock-up shi f t val ve and t he l ock-up cont rol val ve. The posi t i on of t he l ock-up cont rol val ve depends on A/ T cl ut ch
pr essur e cont rol sol enoi d val ve A pr essur e (55) and t orque conver t er pr essur e r el eased f r om t he t or que conver t er . The
l ock-up cont rol val ve cont r ol s t he amount of t orque convert er cl ut ch l ock-up unti l f l ui d bet ween t he cl ut ch pi st on and t he
t orque conver t er c over i s fully r el eased; t he t orque convert er cl ut ch i s in parti al l ock-up.
(cont' d)
14-71
Lock-up S f st em (cont'd)
Ful l Loc k-up
When t he vehi c l e speed i nc r eases, t he PCM c ommands A/ T cl ut ch pr essur e cont rol sol enoi d val ve A to i ncr ease A/T
cl ut ch pr essur e cont rol sol enoi d val ve A pr essur e (55), and t he l ock-up cont rol val ve i s moved to t he left by t he i nc r eased
pr essur e. Then t orque conver t er pr essur e (94) f r om t he left si de of t he t or que conver t er i s compl et el y r el eased at t he
l ock-up cont rol val ve, and t or que conver t er pr essur e (91) engages t he t orque conver t er cl ut ch sec ur el y; t he t orque
conver t er cl ut ch i s in full l ock-up.
.MGID V A L V E A
VALVE
14-72
Shi f t Lock Sy s t em
The shift lock system prevents the shift lever from mis-shifting moving unless certain conditions aer met. The shift lock
solenoid is normally OFF. After starting the engine in P, the shift lever cannot move to any other position from P because
the shift lock stop stops the lock pin. When the brake pedal is pressed and the accelerator pedal is not pressed, the PCM
commands the shift lock solenoid ON; the shift lock solenoid plunger in the shift lock solenoid pulls the shift lock stop to
release the lock pin. Pressing the shift lever button, allows the shift lever to move to any other position. When the brake
pedal and the accelerator pedal are pressed at the same time, the PCM commands the solenoid OFF and the shift lock
system is locked.
SHI FT L OCK S OL ENOI D: OFF SHI FT L OCK S OL ENOI D: ON
*: Thi s i l l ust rat i on shows t he Type B shift l ever .
(cont'd)
14-73
Shi f t Lock S f st em (cont' d)
When t he shi ft lock syst em does not oper at e due t o a mec hani c al or el ect r i cal pr obl em, you c an unl ock t he shi ft lock
t empor ar i l y by i nser t i ng t he i gni ti on key i nto t he shi f t lock r el ease hol e and pr ess t he shi ft lock r el ease. When t he shi f t
lock r el ease i s pr essed, t he shi ft lock st op r el eases t he lock pi n, and t he shi f t l ever c an move to any ot her posi t i on.
*: This illustration shows the Type B shift lever.
14-74
Ci r cui t Di agr am - PCM A / T Cont r ol S f st em
DRI VER' S UNDE R- DAS H F US E / RE L A Y BOX
B LU
IG1 HOT i n ON (II)
and S TA RT (III)
C5
No. 9 (20 A)
F2
No. 10 (10 A) F12
No. 5 (7.5 A)
P20
Y E L
RE D
BRN
F I T '
3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 | >
9 110 J
11
/ / /I
15 16 1718 19 20 21
22 23 24 25
><
26 27 28
29 30
/
32|X
34 3536
/ /
/
1/141
42k 43) | 44| / | 46
73 1 32J33
2 4 ^ 2 5 ^
7^21
40 \AA(îA\45 J46J47
9 j l 0 l
48171
(24)
SI
"40 lAfA 53144145146
9 hp
A (49P) B . i - (49P)
C O (49P)
(cont'd)
14-75
Syst em Descri pt i on (cont ' d)
Circuit Diagram - PCM A/ T Control Syst em (cont'd)
OUTPUT SHAFT
(COUNTERSHAFT)
SPEED SENSOR
5
- YEL/RED -
- BLK/WHT-
GRN/WHT -
B38
C14
INPUT SHAFT
(MAINSHAFT)
SPEED SENSOR
- GRN/BLK - f GRN/BLK
ATF
TEMPERATURE
SENSOR
- W HT H
- W H T H
T
3RN/B
J
B34
GRN/BLK
SHIFT SOLENOID
VALVE A
/ f f l Tu - BLU H
SHIFT SOLENOID
VALVE B
Of i P ORN H
SHIFT SOLENOID
VALVE C
GRN - j
SHIFT SOLENOID
VALVE D
YEL H
SHIFT SOLENOID
VALVE E
RED H
6 B28
RED/YEL <
BLU/BLK
2 B12
GRN/WHT 1
G R N - H I
8 B27
GRN/RED i
^ Y E L - 22
NC
SG1
SG2
1
SHB
SHD
SHE
OP2SW
OP3SW
12V
TF
TF
TF
TF
L S B
LSC
PG1
PG2
LG1
LG2
BLU/RED
848
RED/BLK
B40
BRN
B26
BLU/YEL
B10
BRN/YEL
TRANSMISSION FLUID
PRESSURE SWITCH
A (2ND CLUTCH)
1
TRANSMISSION FLUID
PRESSURE SWITCH
B (3RD CLUTCH)
1
BLK
~3
BLK '
G101
A/TCLUTCH
PRESSURE
CONTROL
SOLENOID
VALVE A
A/TCLUTCH
PRESSURE
CONTROL
SOLENOID
VALVE B
A/TCLUTCH
PRESSURE
CONTROL
SOLENOID
VALVE C
PCM Connector Terminal Locations
J 1 l / l 3 I 4 | 5 | 6 | 7
/
9 M 01
11 / | 15 16 1718 19 20 21
22 2Z\24 25
><
26 27 28
29 3 0 / 32| / 34 3536
/
| /| 41| 42| (43)| 44| /| 46^ /
A A
AD(49P) B A (49P)
J 1 | 2 3 I 4 | 5 | 6 | 7?8 9|10|
11 12 13 1415 18
i
71
5
/
20 21
22 23 C24)
>S
/ / /
A
29 30 31
/
A?
/ / /
| 40L /
I
43|44|45|46
4
48| / l
C O (49P)
14-76
DTC P062F: Powert rai n Cont rol Modul e (PCM)
Internal Control Modul e Keep Al i ve Memory
(KAM) Error
and any on-boar d snapshot wi t h t he HDS, and r evi ew
Gener al Tr oubl eshoot i ng Inf ormat i on (see page 14-4).
S YS TE M wi t h t he HDS.
Is DTC P062F indicat ed in t he PGM-FI SYSTEM?
YES - Go to t he DTC P062F t r oubl eshoot i ng i n t he
PGM-FI Syst em (see page 11 - 136) .
NO-Go to st ep 4.
4. Chec k f or Pendi ng or Conf i r med DTCs i n t he A/ T
Is DTC P062F indicat ed in t he AIT SYSTEM?
If any ot her Pendi ng or Conf i r med DTCs wer e
t r oubl es hoot i ng. !
(see page 11-7).
6. St ar t t he engi ne, and wai t f or at l east 2 mi nut es.
Is DTC P062F indicat ed in t he A/T SYSTEM?
YES -Chec k f or poor connect i ons or l oose t er mi nal s at
t he PCM. If t he PCM was updat ed, subst i t ut e a
known-good PCM (see page 11 -7), t hen go to st ep 6. If
t he PCM was subst i t ut ed, go t o st ep 1.
NO- Go to st ep 8.
8. Moni t or t he OBD S TA TUS f or P062F i n t he DTCs
Does t he HDS indicat e PASSED?
YES-l f t he PCM was updat ed, t r oubl eshoot i ng i s
c ompl et e. If t he PCM was subst i t ut ed, r epl ace t he
or Conf i r med DTCs wer e i ndi cat ed i n st ep 7, go to t he
NO-l f t he HDS i ndi cat es FAIL ED, c hec k f or poor
c onnec t i ons or l oose t er mi nal s at t he PCM. If t he PCM
was updat ed, subst i t ut e a known-good PCM (see
page 11-7), t hen go t o st ep 6. If t he PCM was
subst i t ut ed, go to st ep 1. If t he HDS i ndi cat es NOT
14-77
DTC P0705: Shor t in Tr ansmi ssi on Range
Swi t ch Ci rcui t (Multi ple Shi f t -posi t i on Input)
NOTE:
any on-boar d snapshot wi t h t he HDS, and r evi ew
Thi s c ode i s c aus ed by an el ect r i cal ci r cui t pr obl em
and cannot be c aus ed by a mec hani c al pr obl em i n t he
t r ansmi ssi on.
1. Tu r n t he i gni t i on swi t c h to ON (II).
2. Compar e t he ATPP, ATPR, ATPN, ATPD, ATPD3,
ATP2-1, ATPFWD, and ATPRVS i nput s wi t h t he HDS
to t he f ol l oi ng t abl e, i n eac h shi ft l ever posi t i on.
ATP ATP ATP ATP
u
ATP
U6
ATP
2-1
ATP
FWD
ATP
RVS
P
o
X X X X X X X
R X
O
X X X X X
O
N X X
O
X X X X X
D X X X
o
X X
o
X
D3 X X X X
O
X
O
X
2 X X X X X
o O
X
1 X X X X X
O
X X
O: 0N X- . OFF
Do t he t ransmission range swit ch signals mat ch?
t i me.H
NO-Go to st ep 3.
to t he t abl e in st ep 2, i n eac h shi ft l ever posi t i on.
Are any t ransmission range swit ch signals ON in all shift
lever posit ion?
NO-Go to st ep 4.
5. Di sconnect t he t r ansmi ssi on r ange swi t c h connect or .
6. Connec t t he t r ansmi ssi on r ange swi t ch connect or
t er mi nal t hat i ncor r ect l y i ndi cat es ON i n st ep 3 to
to t he t abl e in st ep 2.
Do mult iple t ransmission range swit ch signals indicat e
ON? .
YES - Repai r shor t in t he wi r es bet ween t he
t r ansmi ssi on r ange swi t ch and t he PCM, refer to t he
ATP ATP ATP ATP ATP ATP ATP ATP
P R N D D3 2-1
FWD
RVS
PCM B14 B15 B13 B22 B16 B17 B29 B23
Range
swi t ch
6 7 2 8 3 9 5 1
14-240).B
10. Di sc onnec t t he t r ansmi ssi on r ange swi t ch connect or .
12. Chec k t he abnor mal t r ansmi ssi on r ange swi t ch si gnal
t hat r emai ned on wi t h t he HDS.
Do any t ransmission range swit ch signals remain ON?
* NO-Repl ac e t he t r ansmi ssi on r ange swi t ch (see page
14-240).
13. Chec k for cont i nui t y to body gr ound i n t he ci rcui t
whi c h r emai ned ON, see t abl e i n st ep 2.
Does t he circuit t hat indicat ed ON have cont inuit y t o
ground?
t he t r ansmi ssi on r ange swi t ch and t he PCM.H
NO-Repl ac e t he PCM (see page 11-204).B
14-78
DTC P0706: Open in Transmission Range
Swi t ch Circuit
NOTE:
Thi s c ode i s c aused by an el ect ri cal ci rcui t pr obl em
and cannot be c aused by a mec hani c al pr obl em in t he
t r ansmi ssi on.
1. Make sur e t he shi ft cabl e i s adj ust ed properl y (see
page 14-232).
t o t he f ol l owi ng t abl e.
ATP
P
ATP
R
ATP
N
ATP
D
ATP
D3
ATP
2-1
ATP
FWD
ATP
RVS
p o
X X X X X X X
R X
O
X X X X X O
N X X
O
X X X X X
D X X X O X X
O X
D3 X X X X
o
X o X
2 X X X X X
o
o X
1 X X X X X
o
X X
O: ON X-. OFF
Do t he t ransmission range swit ch signals mat ch?
t i me.B
N O- G o to st ep 4.
to t he t abl e i n st ep 3, in eac h shi ft l ever posi t i on
Do all shift posit ions remain OFF?
N O - G o to st ep 5.
6. Di sconnect t he t r ansmi ssi on range swi t c h connect or .
7. Connect t he t r ansmi ssi on r ange swi t ch connect or
t er mi nal whi c h di d not i ndi cat e ON i n st ep 4 to body
gr ound wi t h a j umper wi r e.
9. Chec k t he t r ansmi ssi on range swi t ch si gnal s that di d
not i ndi cat e ON wi t h the HDS.
Does t he t ransmission range swit ch indicat e ON?
YES - Repl ac e t he t r ansmi ssi on range swi t ch (see
page 14-240).
11. Check for cont i nui t y bet ween t he t r ansmi ssi on r ange
swi t ch ci rcui t t er mi nal and t he PCM t er mi nal of t he
i nput whi ch i ndi cat ed OFF, refer to t he f ol l owi ng t abl e.
ATP ATP ATP ATP ATP ATP ATP ATP
P R N D D3 2-1 FWD RVS
PCM B14 B15 B13 B22 B16 B17 B29 B23
Range 6 7 2 8 3 9 5 1
swi t ch
YES - Repl ac e t he PCM (see page 11-204).B
NO- Repai r open i n t he wi r e bet ween t he t r ansmi ssi on
range swi t ch and t he PCM.B
13. Di sconnect t he t r ansmi ssi on range swi t ch connect or .
14. Check for cont i nui t y bet ween t r ansmi ssi on r ange
swi t ch connect or t er mi nal No. 10 and body gr ound.
TRANS MI S S I ON RANGE SWI TCH CONNECTOR
1 2 3 4 5
6 7 8 9 10
GND (BLK)
IT
YES - Repl ac e t he t r ansmi ssi on range swi t ch (see
page 14-240).
NO- Repai r open in t he wi r e bet ween t he t r ansmi ssi on
range swi t ch and body gr ound (G101) (see page
22-18), or repai r poor body gr ound (G101).B
14-79
DTC P0711: Probl em in ATF Temper at ur e
Sensor Ci rcui t
NOTE:
any on-boar d snapshot wi t h t he HDS, ari d r evi ew
Thi s c ode i s c aused by an el ect r i cal ci rcui t pr obl em
and cannot be c aused by a mec hani c al pr obl em i n t he
t r ansmi ssi on.
1. Tur n t he i gni ti on swi t ch to ON (II), and wai t f or 20
sec ounds.
2. Chec k t he ATF t emper at ur e wi t h t he HDS in t he A/ T
Dat a Li st .
Does t he ATF Temperat ure wit h indicat e 4 F
(-20 C)crbc!cv*?
NO- Go to st ep 5.
3. St ar t t he engi ne, and war m it up to nor mal oper at i ng
t emper at ur e (the radi at or f an c omes on).
4. Chec k t he ATF Temper at ur e wi t h t he HDS i n t he A/ T
Dat e Li st .
Does t he ATF Temperat ure remain 4 F (20 C) or
below?
YES - Repl ac e t he ATF t emper at ur e sensor (see page
If t her e i s an abnor mal t emper at ur e r i se i n t he ATF
t emper at ur e sensor , go to st ep 16.
5. Chec k t he ATF Temper at ur e wi t h t he HDS i n t he A/ T
Dat a Li st .
Does t he ATF t emperat ure exceed 230 F (110 C)?
NO-l nt er mi t t ent f ai l ur e, t he s y s t em i s OK at t hi s t i me.
6. Leave t he engi ne off unti l t he Engi ne Cool ant
Temper at ur e r eads 122 F (50 C) wi t h t he HDS in t he
A/ T Dat e Li st .
7. Chec k t he ATF Temper at ur e wi t h t he HDS in t he A/ T
Dat a Li st .
Does t he ATF t emperat ure remain 230 F(110 C) or
higher?
If t here i s an abnor mal t emper at ur e r i se in t he ATF
t emper at ur e sensor , go to st ep 16.
10. St ar t t he engi ne, and war m it up to nor mal operat i ng
11. I urn t he i gni t i on swi t ch to L OCK (0), and al l ow t he
engi ne to cool ant cool to t he out si de ai r t emper at ur e
(the Engi ne Cool ant Temper at ur e r eads t he s ame as
t he out si de ai r t emper at ur e).
12. Bl ock t he r ear wheel s and r ai se t he front of t he
vehi c l e, make sur e it i s sec ur el y suppor t ed, and al l ow
t he f ront wheel s to rotate f r eel y, or r ai se t he vehi c l e
on a lift.
13. Tur n t he i gni ti on swi t ch to ON (II), and wai t for
20 sec onds, t hen st art t he engi ne. War m t he engi ne
up to nor mal operat i ng t emper at ur e (the radi at or f an
c omes on). St ar t off in D, accel er at e wi t h t he throttle
opened at l east 4 degr ees, and run t he vehi cl e at
speeds over 19 mph (30 km/h) f or at l east 5 mi nut es.
Or t est -dri ve t he vehi c l e f or at l east 20 sec onds whi l e
t he ATF t emper at ur e r eads - 4 F to 230 F ( - 20 C to
110 C) by moni t or i ng wi t h t he HDS. Sl ow down, and
st op t he wheel s.
YES - Ch ec k f or poor connect i ons or l oose t er mi nal s
bet ween t he ATF t emper at ur e sensor and t he PCM,
NO- Go to st ep 15.
14-80
15. Moni t or t he OBD st at us f or P0711 in t he DTCs MENU
wi t h t he HDS.
Does the HDS indicate PASSED?
NO-l f t he HDS i ndi cat es FAIL ED, check f or poor
c onnec t i ons and l oose t er mi nal s at t he ATF
t emper at ur e sensor and t he PCM, t hen go to st ep 1. If
t he HDS i ndi cat es NOT COMPL ETED, go to st ep 10.
(see page 11-7).
17. Tur n t he i gni ti on swi t ch to ON (II). St ar t t he engi ne,
and war m t he engi ne up to nor mal oper at i ng
18. Tur n t he i gni ti on swi t ch to L OCK (0), and al l ow t he
engi ne to cool ant cool to t he ambi ent ai r t emper at ur e
(the ECT S ENS OR r eads t he s ame as t he ambi ent ai r
t emper at ur e).
19. Bl ock t he rear wheel s and r ai se t he f ront of t he
t he f ront wheel s to rotate f r eel y, or r ai se t he vehi cl e
on a lift.
20. Tur n t he i gni ti on swi t ch to ON (II), and wai t f or
20 s ec onds , t hen start t he engi ne. War m t he engi ne
up to nor mal operat i ng t emper at ur e (the radi at or f an
c omes on). St ar t off in D, accel er at e wi t h t he throttle
opened at l east 4 degr ees, and run t he vehi c l e at *
speeds over 19 mph (30 km/h) f or at l east 5 mi nut es.
Or t est -dr i ve t he vehi cl e f or at l east 20 sec onds whi l e
t he ATF t emper at ur e r eads - 4 F to 230 F ( - 20 C to
110 C) by moni t ori ng wi t h t he HDS. Sl ow down, and
st op t he wheel s.
YE S - Ch ec k for poor connect i ons or l oose t er mi nal s
bet ween t he ATF t emper at ur e sensor and t he PCM. If
t he PCM was updat ed, subst i t ut e a known-good PCM
(see page 11-7), t hen go to st ep 20. If t he PCM was
NO- Go to st ep 22.
22. Moni t or t he OBD st at us f or P0711 i n t he DTCs MENU
wi t h t he HDS.
NO-l f t he HDS i ndi cat es FAI L ED, check f or poor
connect i ons or l oose t er mi nal s bet ween t he ATF
t emper at ur e sensor and t he PCM. If t he PCM was
go to st ep 1. If t he HDS i ndi cat es NOT COMPL ETED,
go to st ep 17.
14-81
DTC P0712: Shor t in ATF Temper at ur e Sensor
Ci rcui t
NOTE:
Thi s c ode i s c aused by an el ect r i cal ci r cui t pr obl em
t r ansmi ssi on.
2. Chec k t he ATF Temp S ens or (V) i n t he Dat a Li st wi t h
t he HDS.
Is t he ATF Temp Sensor (V) 0.07 V or less?
Chec k f or an i nt ermi t t ent shor t to body gr ound i n t he
wi r e bet ween t he ATF t emper at ur e s ens or and t he
PCM. B
4. Di sconnect t he shi f t sol enoi d wi r e har ness connect or .
6. Chec k t he ATF Temp Sens or (V) i n t he Dat a Li st wi t h
t he HDS.
Is t he ATF Temp Sensor (V) 0.07 V or less?
NO- Repl ac e t he ATF t emper at ur e sensor (see page
9. Di sconnect PCM c onnec t or B (49P).
10. Chec k f or cont i nui t y bet ween shi ft sol enoi d wi r e
har ness c onnec t or t er mi nal No. 6 and body gr ound.
SHI FT S OL ENOI D WI RE HARNES S CONNECTOR
1 2 3
/
5 6 7 8
TATF ( RED/ YEL )
YES - Repai r shor t t o body gr ound i n t he wi r e bet ween
PCM c onnec t or t er mi nal B28 and shi ft sol enoi d wi r e
har ness c onnec t or t er mi nal No. 6, t hen go t o st ep 11.
NO- Go to st ep 17.
14. St ar t t he engi ne wi t h t he shi f t l ever i n P, and wai t f or
at l east 20 s ec onds .
YE S - Ch ec k f or i nt ermi t t ent shor t t o body gr ound i n
t he wi r e bet ween t he ATF t emper at ur e sensor and t he
PCM, t hen go to st ep 1.
16. Moni t or t he OBD S TATUS f or P0712 i n t he DTCs
NO-l f t he HDS i ndi cat es FAI L ED, check f or
i nt ermi t t ent shor t to body gr ound i n t he wi r e bet ween
t he ATF t emper at ur e sensor and t he PCM, t hen go to
st ep 1. If t he HDS i ndi cat es NOT COMPL ETED, go t o
st ep 14.
14-82
(see page 11-7).
19. St ar t t he engi ne wi t h t he shi ft l ever in P, and wai t f or
YES - Ch ec k f or i ntermi ttent shor t to body gr ound in
t he wi r e bet ween t he ATF t emper at ur e sensor and t he
PCM. If t he PCM was updat ed, subst i t ut e a
known-good PCM (see page 11-7), t hen go to st ep 19.
If t he PCM was subst i t ut ed, go to st ep 1.
NO- Go to st ep 21.
21. Moni t or t he OBD S TATUS for P0712 i n t he DTCs
NO-l f t he HDS i ndi cat es FAIL ED, c hec k f or
i ntermi ttent shor t to body gr ound in t he wi r e bet ween
t he ATF t emper at ur e sensor and t he PCM. If t he PCM
page 11-7), t hen go to st ep 19. If t he PCM was
DTC P0713: Open in ATF Temper at ur e Sensor
Ci rcui t
NOTE:
Thi s code i s c aused by an el ect ri cal ci rcui t pr obl em
t r ansmi ssi on.
2. Chec k t he ATF Temp Sens or (V) in t he Data Li st wi t h
t he HDS.
Does t he ATF Temp Sensor (V) exceed 4.93 V?
Chec k f or poor connect i ons or l oose t er mi nal s
bet ween t he ATF t emper at ur e sensor and t he PCM.Si
4. Di sconnect t he shi ft sol enoi d wi r e har ness connect or .
5. Connec t shi ft sol enoi d wi r e har ness connect or
SHI FT SOL ENOI D WI RE HARNES S CONNECTOR
1 2 3
/
5 6 7 8
TATF ( RED/ YEL )
J UMPER WI RE
7. Chec k t he ATF Temp Sensor (V) in t he Data Li st wi t h
t he HDS.
Does t he ATF Temp Sensor (V) read 0.07 V or below?
NO- Go to st ep 13.
(cont ' d)
14-83
9. Remove t he j umper wi r e f r om t he shi ft sol enoi d wi r e
har ness connect or .
10. Connec t shi ft sol enoi d wi r e har ness c onnec t or
t er mi nal s No. 6 and No. 7 wi t h a j umper wi r e
SHIFT SOLENOID WIRE HARNESS CONNECTOR
1 2 3
/
5 6 7 8
TATF (RED/YEL) SG2 (GRN/BLK)
12. Chec k t he ATF Temp S ens or (V) i n t he Dat a Li st wi t h
t he HDS.
Does t he ATF Temp Sensor (V) read 0.07 V or below?
NO-Repai r open in t he wi r e bet ween PCM connect or
t er mi nal B34 and t he shi f t sol enoi d wi r e har ness
connect or t er mi nal No.7, t hen go to st ep 17.
B28 and shi ft sol enoi d wi r e har ness connect or
t er mi nal No. 6.
SHIFT SOLENOID WIRE
HARNESS CONNECTOR
1 2 3
/
8 1
a
O
TATF
(RED/YEL)
-7 3 | 4 | / | / | 7 | 8 9 hoi
11 12 13 14J15 16 17| 18 19
/
21
. I22
4
29
23
24 X
25 27 21 . I22
4
29
/
31132|33 34 3 5 | 3 6 | / 38
/
4 0 / / N l / ] 45146147 481
TATF (RED/YEL)
Wire side of Terminal side of
female terminals female terminals
YE S - Ch ec k f or poor c onnec t i ons or l oose t er mi nal s
t he c onnec t i ons ar e OK, go to st ep 23.
NO-Repai r open i n t he wi r e bet ween PCM connect or
t er mi nal B28 and t he shi ft sol enoi d wi r e har ness
connect or t er mi nal No.6, t hen go to st ep 17.
14-84
20. St art the engi ne wi t h t he shi ft l ever in P, and wai t f or
YES - Ch ec k for poor c onnec t i ons or l oose t er mi nal s
bet ween t he ATF t emper at ur e sensor and t he PCM,
NO- Go to st ep 22.
t emper at ur e sensor and the PCM, t hen go to st ep 1. If
(see page 11-7).
NO- Go to st ep 27.
27. Moni t or t he OBD S TATUS for P0713 in t he DTCs
NO-l f t he HDS i ndi cat es FAIL ED, check for poor
t emper at ur e sensor and t he PCM. If t he PCM was
go to st ep 25.
14-85
DTC P0716: Probl em In Input Shaf t (Mai nshaft)
Speed Sensor Ci rcui t
DTC P0721: Probl em in Output Shaf t .
(Count ershaf t ) Speed Sensor Ci rcui t
NOTE:
Bef ore you t r oubl eshoot , r ecor d all f r eeze dat a and.
Thi s c ode i s c aused by an el ect ri cal ci r cui t pr obl em
and c annot be c aus ed by a mec hani c al pr obl em i n t he
t r ansmi ssi on.
3. Rioou t he r ear Vwli^cis and r ai se t he f ront of t he
t he f ront wheel s to rotate f r eel y, or r ai se t he vehi c l e
on a lift.
4. St art t he engi ne, di sabl e t he VS A by pr essi ng t he VS A
OFF but t on, run t he vehi c l e wi t h t he shi f t l ever i n D,
and at s peeds over 12 mph (20 km/h) f or at l east
10 sec onds. Sl ow down, and st op t he wheel s .
Is DTC P0718 or P0723 indicat ed?
YE S - Go to t he DTC P0718 t r obl eshoot i ng (see page
14-87) or t he DTC P0723 t r obl eshoot i ng (see page
. 14-89).B
t i me.B
7. Check t he i nput shaf t (mai nshaf t ) speed sensor or t he
output shaf t (count ershaf t ) speed sensor f or poor
connect i on and pr oper i nst al l at i on.
Is t he connect ion and inst allat ion OK?
YES - Repl ac e t he i nput shaf t (mai nshaf t ) speed sensor
(see page 14-187) or t he out put shaf t (count ershaf t )
speed sensor (see page 14-188), t hen go to st ep 8.
N0- Connec t t he speed sensor connect or and rei nst al l
t he speed sensor , t hen go to st ep 8.
8. Tur n t he i gni ti on swi t c h to ON (II),
10. St ar t t he engi ne, di sabl e t he VS A by pr essi ng t he VS A
OFF but t on, run t he vehi c l e wi t h t he shi ft l ever in D,
and at speeds over 12 mph (20 km/h) f or at l east
10 sec onds. Sl ow down, and st op t he wheel s.
NO-Tr obl eshoot i ng i s c o mpl et e.
NO- Go to st ep 6.
14-86
DTC P0717: Probl em In Input Shaf t (Mai nshaft)
Speed Sensor Ci rcui t (No Si gnal Input)
DTC P0718: Input Shaf t (Mai nshaft) Speed
Sensor Intermittent Fai l ure
NOTE:
o Bef ore you t r oubl eshoot , r ecor d all f reeze dat a and
t r ansmi ssi on.
1. Turn t he i gni ti on swi t ch to ON (II).
t he front wheel s to rotate f r eel y, or r ai se t he vehi c l e
on a lift.
OFF but t on, run t he vehi c l e wi t h t he shi ft l ever i n D,
10 sec onds. Compar e t he Input Shaf t (Mai nshaf t )
Speed and t he Output Shaf t (Count ershaf t ) Speed i n
t he Dat a Li st wi t h t he HDS. Sl ow down, and st op t he
wheel s.
Aret he speeds about t he same?
t i me.H
NO- Go to st ep 5.
6. Di sconnect t he i nput shaf t (mai nshaf t ) speed sensor
connect or .
7 Tur n t he i gni ti on swi t ch t o ON (II).
8. Measur e t he vol t age bet ween i nput shaf t (mai nshaf t )
speed s ens or connect or t er mi nal No. 1 and body
gr ound.
INPUT S HAFT (MAINSHAFT)
S PE E D S E NS OR CONNECTOR
1 2 3
VCC2 ( YEL / BL U)
2)
t er mi nal B19 and t he i nput shaf t (mai nshaf t ) speed
sensor , t hen go to st ep 16.
9. Measur e t he vol t age bet ween i nput shaf t (mai nshaf t )
speed sensor connect or t er mi nal No. 2 and body
gr ound.
1 2 3
NM (WHT/ RED)
NO- Go to st ep 12.
(cont' d)
14-87
11. Chec k f or cont i nui t y bet ween i nput shaf t (mai nshaf t )
gr ound.
INPUT SHAF T (MAINSHAF T)
S G2 (GRN/BLK )
YES - Repl ac e t he i nput shaf t (mai nshaf t ) speed sensor
NO-Repai r open in t he wi r e bet ween t he i nput shaf t
(mai nshaf t ) speed sensor connect or and t he PCM
connect or t er mi nal B34, t hen go to st ep 16.
13. J ump t he S CS li ne wi t h the HDS.
15. Chec k f or cont i nui t y bet ween i nput shaf t (mai nshaf t )
gr ound.
1 ? 3
NM (WHT/ RED)
PCM connect or t er mi nal B18 and t he i nput shaf t
(mai nshaf t ) speed sensor connect or , t hen go to st ep
16.
t er mi nal B37 and t he i nput shaf t (mai nshaf t ) speed
s ens or , t hen go to st ep 16.
10 sec onds. Compar e t he Input Shaf t (Mai nshaf t )
Speed and t he Out put Shaf t (Count ershaf t ) Speed i n
t he Dat a Li st wi t h t he HDS. Sl ow down, and st op t he
wheel s.
Arethe speeds about the same?
YES-Tr obl eshoot i ng i s c o mpl et e.
NO- Go to st ep 1.
14-88
DTC P0722: Probl em in Output Shaf t
(Countershaft) Speed Sensor (No Si gnal
Input)
DTC P0723: Output Shaf t (Countershaft)
Speed Sensor Intermittent Fai l ure
NOTE:
Bef ore you t r oubl eshoot , r ecor d all f reeze dat a ari d
t r ansmi ssi on.
t he front wheel s to rotate f r eel y, or r ai se t he vehi c l e
on a lift.
OFF but t on, run t he vehi cl e wi t h t he shi ft l ever in D,
wi t h t he engi ne speed above 2,000 rpm f or at l east
10 sec onds. Compar e t he Output Shaf t (Count ershaf t )
Speed and t he Input Shaf t (Mai nshaf t ) Speed i n t he
Data Li st wi t h t he HDS. Sl ow down, and st op t he
wheel s.
YES-l nt er mi t t ent f ai l ure, t he syst em i s OK at t hi s
time.11
NO- Go to st ep 5.
6. Di sconnect t he output shaf t (count ershaf t ) speed
sensor connect or .
(count ershaf t ) speed sensor connect or t er mi nal No. 1
and body gr ound.
OUTP UT SHAFT ( MAI NSHAFT)
SPEED SENSOR CONNECTOR
VCC1 (YEL/ RED)
t er mi nal C13 and t he output shaf t (count ershaf t )
speed sensor , t hen go to st ep 16.
(count ershaf t ) speed sensor connect or t ermi nal No. 2
and body gr ound.
OUTP UT SHAFT ( MAI NSHAFT)
NC ( BLU/ WHT)
NO- Go to st ep 12.
(cont' d)
14-89
11. Chec k f or cont i nui t y bet ween output shaf t
and body gr ound.
OUTPUT SHAF T (MAINSHAFT)
SG1 (GRN/ WHT)
YES - Repl ac e t he output shaf t (count ershaf t ) speed
sensor (see page 14-188), t hen go to st ep 19.
NO-Repai r open i n t he wi r e bet ween t he PCM
connect or t er mi nal C14 and t he output shaf t
(count ershaf t ) speed sensor , t hen go to st ep 16.
15. Check f or cont i nui t y bet ween output shaf t
and body gr ound.
OUTPUT S HAFT (MAINSHAFT)
NC (BLK /WHT)
YES - Repai r shor t to body gr ound i n t he wi r e bet ween
PCM connect or t er mi nal B38 and t he out put shaf t
(count ershaf t ) speed sensor connect or , t hen go to
st ep 16.
t er mi nal B38 and out put shaf t (count ershaf t ) speed
sensor , t hen go to st ep 16.
wi t h t he engi ne speed above 2,000 rpm f or at l east
10 sec onds. Compar e t he Out put Shaf t (Count ershaf t )
Speed and t he Input Shaf t (Mai nshaf t ) Speed in t he
Dat a Li st wi t h t he HDS. Sl ow down, and st op t he
wheel s.
YES-Tr obl eshoot i ng i s c ompl et e.H
NO- Go to st ep 1.
14-90
DTC P0731: Probl em in 1st Cl ut ch and 1st
Clutch Hydraul i c Ci rcui t (1st Gear Incorrect
Ratio)
1. War m up t he engi ne to nor mal operat i ng t emper at ur e
(the radi at or f an c omes on).
2. Make sur e t hat t he t r ansmi ssi on i s f i l l ed to t he proper
l evel , and c hec k f or f l ui d l eaks.
3. Drai n t he ATF (see st ep 3 on page 14-192) t hr ough a
st rai ner. Inspect t he st r ai ner f or met al debr i s or
exc essi ve cl ut ch mat er i al .
Does t he st rainer have met al debris or excessive clut ch
mat erial?
YES - Repl ac e t he t r ansmi ssi on, t hen go to st ep 12.
NO-Repl ac e t he ATF (see page 14-192), t hen go to
st ep 4.
4. Test st al l speed in D (see page 14-174).
Is t he st all speed wit hin t he service limit s?
NO-Shi f t val ves A and D ar e st uck. Repai r t hese
val ves and t he rel at ed hydr aul i c ci r cui t , or r epl ace t he
t r ansmi ssi on, t hen go to st ep 12.
5. Measur e t he l i ne pr essur e (see page 14-175).
Is t he line pressure wit hin t he service limit ?
NO-Repai r t he ATF pump and t he regul at or val ve, or
r epl ace t he t r ansmi ssi on, t hen go to st ep 12.
6. Measur e t he 1st cl ut ch pr essur e (see page 14-175).
Is t he 1st clut ch pressure wit hin t he service limit s?
NO-Shi f t val ves B and C ar e st uck. Repai r t hese
9. Test -dr i ve t he vehi c l e i n 1st gear , wi t h t he shi f t l ever in
D, at speeds over 7 mph (12 km/h), and wi t h t he
engi ne speed above 1,000 r pm f or at l east 12 sec onds.
YES - Repai r t he 1 st cl ut ch, or r epl ace t he
NO- Go to st ep 11.
11. Moni t or t he OBD S TATUS f or P0731 in t he DTCs
NO-l f t he HDS i ndi cat es FAIL ED, repai r t he 1st cl ut ch,
or r epl ace t he t r ansmi ssi on, t hen go to st ep 12. If t he
HDS i ndi cat es NOT COMPL ETED, go to st ep 9.
12. Test -dr i ve t he vehi c l e i n 1 st gear , wi t h t he shi f t l ever in
D, at speeds over 7 mph (12 km/h), and wi t h t he
bet ween t he i nput shaf t (mai nshaf t ) speed sensor and
NO- Go to st ep 14.
connect i ons or l oose t er mi nal s bet ween t he i nput
shaf t (mai nshaf t ) speed sensor and t he out put shaf t
(count ershaf t ) speed sensor and t he PCM, t hen go to
st ep 4. If t he HDS i ndi cat es NOT COMPL ETED, go to
st ep 12.
14-91
DTC P0732: Probl em in 2nd Cl ut ch and 2nd
Cl ut ch Hydraul i c Ci rcui t (2nd Gear Incorrect
Rati o)
2. Make sur e t hat t he t r ansmi ssi on i s f i l l ed to t he pr oper
st r ai ner . Inspect t he st r ai ner f or met al debr i s or
Does t he st rainer have met ai debris or excessive dut ch
mat erial?
st ep 4.
4. Test st al l speed i n D (see page 14-174).
Is t he st all speed wit hin t he service limit s?
NO-Shi f t val ve C i s st uck. Repai r shi f t val ve C and t he
hydr aul i c ci r cui t , or r epl ace t he t r ansmi ssi on, t hen go
t o st ep 12.
5. Measur e t he l i ne pr essur e (see page 14-175).
Is t he line pressure wit hin t he service limit ?
6. Measur e t he 2nd cl ut ch pr essur e (see page 14-175).
Is t he 2nd clut ch pressure wit hin t he service limit s?
NO-Shi f t val ves A and B ar e st uck. Repai r t hese
9. Test -dr i ve t he vehi c l e in 2nd gear , wi t h t he shi f t l ever
i n D, at speeds over 7 mph (12 km/h), and wi t h t he
YES - Repai r t he 2nd cl ut ch, or r epl ace t he
NO- Go to st ep 11.
NO-l f t he HDS i ndi cat es FAIL ED, repai r t he 2nd c l ut c h,
12. Test -dr i ve t he vehi c l e i n 2nd gear , wi t h t he shi ft l ever
engi ne speed above 1,000 rpm f or at l east 12 sec onds.
YES - Ch ec k f or poor c onnec t i ons or l oose t er mi nal s
NO- Go to st ep 14.
c onnec t i ons or l oose t er mi nal s bet ween t he i nput
st ep 12.
14-92
DTC P0733: Problem in 3rd Cl ut ch and 3rd
Cl ut ch Hydraul i c Ci rcui t (3rd Gear Incorrect
Rati o)
l evel , and c hec k for f l ui d l eaks.
st r ai ner , i nspect the st r ai ner f or met al debr i s or
mat erial?
st ep 4.
4. Measur e t he li ne pr essur e (see page 14-175).
Is t he line pressure wit hin t he service limit s?
5. Measur e t he 3rd cl ut ch pr essur e (see page 14-175).
Is t he 3rd clut ch pressure wit hin t he service limit s?
YE S - Go to s t e p 6,
NO-Shi f t val ves A and D ar e st uck. Repai r t hese
val ves and t he rel at ed hydr aul i c ci rcui t , or r epl ace t he
8. Test -dr i ve t he vehi c l e in 3rd gear , wi t h t he shi ft l ever
engi ne speed above 1,000 rpm f or at l east 12 sec onds.
9. Chec k f or Pendi ng or Conf i r med DTCs wi th t he HDS.
YES - Repai r t he 3rd c l ut c h, or r epl ace t he
NO- Go t o s t ep10.
NO-l f t he HDS i ndi cat es FAIL ED, repai r t he 3rd cl ut ch,
11. Test -dr i ve t he vehi c l e in 3rd gear , wi t h t he shi ft l ever
shaf t (mai nshaf t ) speed sensor and t he output shaf t
st ep 11.
14-93
DTC P0734: Probl em in 4th Cl ut ch and 4th
Cl ut ch Hydraul i c Ci rcui t (4th Gear Incorrect
Rati o)
NOTE: Bef or e you t r oubl eshoot r ecor d all f r eeze dat a
2. Make sur e that t he t r ansmi ssi on i s f i l l ed to t he pr oper
l evel , and check for f l ui d l eaks.
Does the strainer have met al debris or excessive clut ch
mat erial?
st ep 4.
5. Measur e t he 4th cl ut ch pr essur e (see page 14-175).
Is t he 4t h clut ch pressure wit hin t he service limit s?
NO-Shi f t val ves B and C, and t he ser vo cont rol val ve
ar e st uck. Repai r t hese val ves and t he rel at ed
to st ep 11.
8. Test -dr i ve t he vehi c l e in 4th gear , wi t h t he shi ft l ever
in D, at speeds over 7 mph (12 km/h), and wi t h t he
engi ne speed above 1,000 rpm f or at l east 12 s ec onds .
YES - Repai r t he 4th cl ut ch, or r epl ace t he
NO-l f t he HDS i ndi cat es FAIL ED, repai r t he 4th c l ut c h,
11. Test -dr i ve t he vehi c l e in 4th gear , wi t h t he shi f t l ever
bet ween t he i nput shaf t (mai nshaf t ) speed s ens or and
NO- Go to st ep 13.
shaf t (mai nshaf t ) speed sensor and t he output shaf t
st ep 11.
14-94
DTC P0735: Problem in 5th Cl ut ch and 5th
Clutch Hydraul i c Ci rcui t (5th Gear Incorrect
Ratio)
2. Make sur e that t he t r ansmi ssi on i s f i l l ed to t he proper
st r ai ner . Inspect t he st r ai ner for met al debr i s or
mat erial?
YES - Repl ac e t he t r ansmi ssi on, t hen go t o st ep 11.
st ep 4.
5. Measur e t he 5th cl ut ch pr essur e (see page 14-175).
Is t he 5t h clut ch pressure wit hin t he service limit s?
NO-Shi f t val ves A, B, and/or D ar e st uck. Repai r t hese
8. Test -dr i ve t he vehi cl e in 5th gear , wi t h t he shi f t l ever
YES - Repai r t he 5th cl ut ch, or r epl ace t he
NO- Go to st ep 10.
NO-l f t he HDS i ndi cat es FAI L ED, repai r t he 5th cl ut ch,
HDS i ndi cat es NOT COMPL ETED, go t o st ep 8.
11. Test -dr i ve t he vehi cl e in 5th gear , wi t h t he shi f t l ever
t he output shaf t (count ershaf t ) speed sensor and t he
NO- Go to st ep 13.
connect i ons or l oose t er mi nal s bet ween t he i nput
st ep 11.
14-95
DTC P0741: Tor que Conver t er Cl ut ch
Hydraul i c Ci rcui t St uck OFF
l evel , and check f or f l ui d l eaks.
mat erial?
YE S - Re p l ac e t he t r ansmi ssi on, t hen go to st ep 13.
st ep 4.
6. Sel ec t Shi f t Sol enoi d Val ve E in t he Mi sc el l aneous
Test Menu, and c hec k t hat shi f t sol enoi d val ve E
oper at es wi t h t he HDS.
Is a clicking sound heard?
Y E S - G o to st ep 7.
NO-Repl ac e shi ft sol enoi d val ve E (see page 14-179),
7. Run t he engi ne unti l t he E CT S ens or t emper at ur e
r eac hes 176 F (80 C).
8. Sel ec t Cl ut ch Pr essur e Cont r ol (Li near ) Sol enoi d
Val ve A in t he Mi sc el l aneous Test Menu, and t est A/ T
cl ut ch pr essur e cont rol sol enoi d val ve A wi t h t he
HDS.
Does t he HDS indicat e NORMAL?
NO-Fol l ow t he i nst r uct i ons i ndi cat ed on t he HDS
accor di ng to t he t est r esul t . Go to st ep 11 if any part i s
r epl aced.
9. Test -dr i ve t he vehi c l e on a l evel road wi th a st eady
speed at 60 km/h (96 mph) f or at l east 20 sec onds.
10. Moni t or t he OBD S TATUS f or P0741 i n t he DTCs .
Does t he HDS indicat e FAILED?
YES - Repai r t he f aul t y t or que conver t er cl ut ch
mec hani s m, t he t or que conver t er cl ut ch hydr aul i c
ci rcui t , t he l ock-up shi ft val ve, or t he l ock-up cont rol
val ve, or r epl ace t he t r ansmi ssi on, t hen go to st ep 13.
NO-l f t he HDS i ndi cat es PAS S ED, i ntermi ttent f ai l ur e,
t he syst em i s OK at t hi s t i me. If t he HDS i ndi cat es NOT
12. Cicart he u i C wi t h t he HDS.
13. Test -dr i ve t he vehi c l e on a l evel road wi t h a st eady
speed at 60 mph (96 km/h) f or at l east 20 sec onds, or
t est -dr i ve t he vehi c l e f or sever al mi nut es under t he
s ame condi t i ons as t hose i ndi cat ed by t he f r eeze dat a.
YE S - Go to st ep 5. .
NO- Go to st ep 15.
go to t he i ndi cat ed DTCs t roubl eshoot i ng.HI
NO-l f t he HDS i ndi cat es FAIL ED, go to st ep 5. If t he
14-96
DTC P0747: A/T Cl ut ch Pr essur e Cont rol
Sol enoi d Val ve A St uck ON
mat erial?
st ep 4.
6. Test -dr i ve t he vehi cl e wi t h t he shi ft l ever in D, and let
t he t r ansmi ssi on shi f t t hr ough all f i ve gear s.
9. Sel ec t Cl ut ch Pr essur e Cont rol (Li near) Sol enoi d
HDS.
10. Inspect A/ T cl ut ch pr essur e cont rol sol enoi d val ve A
(see page 14-182).
Does A/T clut ch pressure cont rol solenoid valve A work
properly?
YES - Repai r t he hydr aul i c syst em rel at ed to shi ft
val ves B and E, or r epl ace t he t r ansmi ssi on, t hen go to
st ep 13.
NO-Repl ac e A/ T cl ut ch pr essur e cont rol sol enoi d
val ve A (see page 14-184), t hen go to st ep 11.
13. Test -dr i ve t he vehi c l e wi t h t he shi ft l ever in D, and let
t he t r ansmi ssi on shi ft t hr ough all f i ve gear s.
t i me. B
accor di ng to t he t est r esul t , if t he HDS has not
det er mi ned t he c ause of t he f ai l ur e, go to st ep 10. If
any part i s r epl aced, go to st ep 11.
14-97
DTC P0752: Shi ft Sol enoi d Val ve A St uck ON
Gener al Tr oubl eshoot i ng Inf ormat i on (see page 1 4 - 4 ) .
mat erial?
YE S ncpSace t he t r ansmi ssi on, t hen go to st ep 14.
st ep 4.
6. Test -dr i ve t he vehi cl e wi t h t he shi ft l ever i n D, and let
9. Sel ec t Shi f t Sol enoi d Val ve A in t he Mi sc el l aneous
Test Menu, and check t hat shi ft sol enoi d val ve A
NO-Repl ac e shi ft sol enoi d val ve A (see page 14-179),
11 Moni t or t he OBD S TATUS for P0752 i n t he DTCs
YES - Repai r shi ft val ve A, or r epl ace t he t r ansmi ssi on,
NO- Go to st ep 16.
14-98
DTC P7; Shi ft Sol enoi d' Val ve B St uck OFF
DTC P77; Shi ft Sol enoi d Val ve B St uck ON
NOTE; Bef ore you t r oubl eshoot r ecor d all f reeze dat a
1. War m up t he engi ne to normal operat i ng t emper at ur e
l evel , and check f or flui d l eaks.
st r ai ner . Inspect t he st rai ner for met al debr i s or
Does t he st rainer have met ai debris or excessive clut ch
mat erial?
st ep 4.
t he t r ansmi ssi on shi ft t hrough all f i ve gear s.
7. Moni t or t he OBD S TATUS for P0756 or P0757 i n t he
DTCs MENU wi t h t he HDS.
9. Sel ec t Shi f t Sol enoi d Val ve B in t he Mi sc el l aneous
Test Menu, and check that shi ft sol enoi d val ve B
NO-Repl ac e shi ft sol enoi d val ve B (see page 14-179),
11. Moni t or t he OBD S TATUS for P0756 or P0757 i n t he
YES - Repai r shi ft val ve B, or r epl ace t he t r ansmi ssi on,
16. Moni t or t he OBD S TATUS for P0756 or P0757 in t he
14-99
DTC P0761: Shi ft Sol enoi d Val ve C St uck OFF
mat erial?
Y E S - R e pl a c e t h e t r ansmi ssi on, t hen go t o st ep 14.
st ep 4.
6. Test -dr i ve t he vehi c l e wi t h t he shi ft l ever i n D, and let
NO-l f t he HDS i ndi cat es PAS S ED, i nt ermi t t ent f ai l ur e,
9. Sel ec t Shi f t Sol enoi d Val ve C i n t he Mi sc el l aneous
Test Menu, and check t hat shi f t sol enoi d val ve C
NO-Repl ac e shi ft sol enoi d val ve C (see page 14-179),
YES - Repai r shi ft val ve C, or r epl ace t he t r ansmi ssi on,
14 Test dr i ve t h e ve hi c l e wi t h t he shi ft l ever in D, and let
Is DTC P0761indicat ed?
NO- Go to st ep 16.
14-100
00
DTC P0771: Shi f t Sol enoi d Val ve E St uck OFF
1. War m up t he engi ne t o nor mal oper at i ng t emper at ur e
st rai ner. Inspect t he st r ai ner f or met al debr i s or
Does t he st rainer have met ai debris or excessive clut ch
mat erial?
st ep 4.
7. Moni tor t he OBD S TATUS f or P0771 in t he DTCs
9. Sel ec t Shi f t Sol enoi d Val ve E i n t he Mi sc el l aneous
Test Menu, and check t hat shi ft sol enoi d val ve E
NO-Repl ac e shi f t sol enoi d val ve E (see page 14-179),
10. Test -dr i ve t he vehi c l e wi t h t he shi f t l ever i n D, and let
YES - Repai r shi f t val ve E, or r epl ace t he t r ansmi ssi on,
NO-l f t he HDS i ndi cat es PAS S E D, i ntermi ttent f ai l ur e,
t he t r ansmi ssi on shi ft t hr ough 1st to 3rd gear s, t hen
dr i ve t he vehi c l e at speeds over 19 mph (30 km/h) f or
NO- Go to st ep 16.
14-101
Sol enoi d Val ve B St uck OFF
DTC P0777: A/ T Cl ut ch Pr essur e Cont rol
Sol enoi d Val ve B St uck ON
3. Dr ai n t he ATF (see st ep 3 on page 14-192) t hr ough a
mat erial?
st ep 4.
t he t r ansmi ssi on shi f t t hr ough al l f i ve gear s.
7. Moni t or t he OBD S TA TUS f or P0776 or P0777 i n t he
9. Sel ec t Cl ut ch Pr essur e Cont r ol (Li near) Sol enoi d
Val ve B i n t he Mi sc el l aneous Test Menu, and t est A/ T
cl ut ch pr essur e cont rol sol enoi d val ve B wi t h t he
HDS.
t i me. B
10. Inspect A/ T cl ut ch pr essur e cont r ol sol enoi d val ve B
(see page 14-184).
Does A/T clut ch pressure cont rol solenoid valve B work
properly?
YES - Repai r t he hydr aul i c syst em rel at ed to shi ft val ve
B, or r epl ace t he t r ansmi ssi on, t hen go t o st ep 13.
val ve B (see page 14-186), t hen go to st ep 11.
NO- Go t o s t ep 15.
15. Moni t or t he OBD S TATUS f or P0776 or P0777 i n t he
HDS i ndi cat es NOT COMPL ETED, got o st ep 13.
NO- Fol l owt he i nst r uct i ons i ndi cat ed on t he HDS
ac c or di ng to t he t est r esul t , if t he HDS has not
any part was r epl ac ed, go to st ep 11.
14-102
DTC P78: Shi ft Control Syst em
NOTE:
o Bef ore you t r oubl eshoot r ecor d all f reeze dat a and
Thi s c ode i s st or ed whenever DTCs P1730, P1731,
P1732, P1733, and P1734 ar e det ect ed.
4. Chec k f or ot her Pendi ng or Conf i r med DTCs i ndi cat ed
al ong wi t h DTC P0780.
NOTE: DTC P0780 means t her e i s one or mor e A/ T
DTCs r egar di ng t he shi ft cont rol syst em.
Are t here ot her DTCs?
YE S - Go to t he i ndi cat ed DTCs t r oubl es hoot i ng. !
P1730 (see page 14-162)
P1731 (see page 14-163)
P1732 (see page 14-164)
9 P1733 (see page 14-165)
9 P1734 (see page 14-166)
NO- Go to st ep 5.
(see page 11 -203), or subst i t ut e a known-good PCM
(see page 11-7).
YE S - l f t he PCM was updat ed, subst i t ut e a
known-good PCM (see page 11-7), t hen go to st ep 6. If
t he PCM was subst i t ut ed, go to st ep 1.
NO- Go t o st ep 8.
i ndi cat ed DT Cs t r oubl es hoot i ng. !
NO-l f t he PCM was updat ed and t he HDS i ndi cat es
FAIL ED, subst i t ut e a known-good PCM (see page
11-7), t hen go to st ep 6. If t he PCM was subst i t ut ed, go
to st ep 1. If t he HDS i ndi cat es NOT COMPL ETED, got o
st ep 6.
14-103
DTC P0796: A/T Cl ut ch Pr essur e Control
Sol enoi d Val ve C St uck OFF
Sol enoi d Val ve C St uck ON
st r ai ner . Inspect t he st rai ner for met al debr i s or
mat erial?
st ep 4.
t he t r ansmi ssi on shi f t t hrough all f i ve gear s.
7. Moni t or t he OBD S TATUS f or P0796 or P0797 in t he
Val ve C in t he Mi sc el l aneous Test Menu, and t est A/ T
cl ut ch pr essur e cont r ol sol enoi d val ve C wi t h t he
HDS.
10. Inspect A/ T cl ut ch pr essur e cont rol sol enoi d val ve C
(see page 14-184).
Does A/T clut ch pressure cont rol solenoid valve C work
properly?
val ves B and C, or r epl ace t he t r ansmi ssi on, t hen go to
st ep 13.
val ve C (see page 14-186), t hen go to st ep 11.
NO- Go to st ep 15.
15. Moni t or t he OBD S TATUS for P0796 or P0797 in t he
t i me. H
14-104
DTC P0842: Short In Tr ansmi ssi on Flui d
Pr essur e Swi t ch A (2nd Clutch) Ci rcui t , or
Tr ansmi ssi on Flui d Pr essur e Swi t ch A (2nd
Cl ut ch) St uck ON
NOTE:
Bef or e you t r oubl eshoot ,r ecor d all f r eeze dat a and any
on-boar d snapshot wi t h t he HDS, and r evi ew Gener al
Tr oubl eshoot i ng Inf ormat i on (see page 14-4).
t r ansmi ssi on.
L Tu r n t he i gni ti on swi t ch to ON (II).
3. Chec k t he 2nd Pr essur e Swi t ch in t he Dat a Li st wi t h
t he HDS when not i n 2nd gear.
Is t he 2nd Pressure Swit ch OFF?
NO- Go to st ep 7.
t emper at ur e (the radi at or fan c omes on).
5. Test -dr i ve t he vehi c l e in 4th gear wi t h t he shi ft l ever in
D f or at l east 2 sec onds.
t he syst em i s OK at t hi s t i me. Check f or i nt ermi t t ent
shor t to body gr ound i n the wi r e bet ween t he
t r ansmi ssi on f l ui d pr essur e swi t ch A (2nd Cl ut ch) and
t he PCM. If t he HDS i ndi cat es NOT COMPL ETED, got o
st ep 4.
8. Di sc onnec t t he t r ansmi ssi on f l ui d pr essur e swi t c h A
(2nd cl ut ch) connect or .
10. Chec k t he 2nd Pr essur e Swi t c h i n t he Dat a Li st wi t h
t he HDS.
Is t he 2nd Pressure Swit ch OFF?
YES - Repl ac e t he t r ansmi ssi on f l ui d pr essur e swi t c h A
(2nd cl ut ch) (see page 14-188), t hen go to st ep 15.
NO- Go to st ep 11.
OP2SW (BLU/RED)
22
29
23
1
11 12 13 14)15 16 17118 1<
24 25
31p2|33| y |35|36[ 7
26
9 10
21
27
38
28
iiDZL
YES - Repai r short to body gr ound in t he wi r e bet ween
PCM connect or t er mi nal B8 and t he t r ansmi ssi on f l ui d
pr essur e swi t ch A (2nd cl ut ch), t hen go to st ep 15.
NO- Go to st ep 22.
(cont' d)
14-105
16. Tur n t he i gni ti on swi t c h to ON (ll).
18. St ar t t he engi ne, and war m it up t o nor mal oper at i ng
19. Test -dr i ve t he vehi c l e i n 2nd gear wi t h t he shi f t l ever
i n D f or at l east 2 s ec onds , t hen dr i ve i n 4th gear f or at
l east 2 sec onds.
YE S - Ch ec k f or i ntermi ttent shor t t o body gr ound i n
t he wi r e bet ween t he t r ansmi ssi on f l ui d pr essur e
swi t c h A (2nd cl ut ch) and t he PCM, t hen go t o st ep 1.
NO- Go to st ep 21.
NO-l f t he HDS i ndi cat es FAI L ED, c hec k f or
i nt ermi t t ent shor t t o body gr ound i n t he wi r e bet ween
t he t r ansmi ssi on f l ui d pr essur e swi t c h A (2nd cl ut ch)
and t he PCM, t hen go to st ep 1. If t he HDS i ndi cat es
(see page 11-7).
25. Test -dr i ve t he vehi c l e in 2nd gear wi t h t he shi ft l ever
i n D f or at l east 2 s ec onds , t hen dri ve in 4th gear f or at
l east 2 sec onds.
YE S - Ch ec k f or i nt ermi t t ent shor t to body gr ound i n
owiu,ii AU n a cl ut ch)and t he PCM. If t he PCM was
go to st ep 1.
NO- Go to st ep 27.
NO-l f t he HDS i ndi cat es FAIL ED, check f or
t he t r ansmi ssi on f l ui d pr essur e swi t ch A (2nd cl ut ch)
and t he PCM. If t he PCM was updat ed, subst i t ut e a
If t he PCM was subst i t ut ed, go to st ep 1. If t he HDS
14-106
DTC P0843: Open in Tr ansmi ssi on Flui d
Pr essur e Swi t ch A (2nd Cl ut ch) Ci rcui t , or
Tr ansmi ssi on Flui d Pr essur e Swi t ch A (2nd
Cl ut ch) St uck OFF
3. St art t he engi ne, and war m it up to nor mal operat i ng
t emper at ur e (the radi at or fan c omes on).
4. Shi f t to 2 whi l e pr essi ng t he brake pedal , and check if
t he Shi f t Cont rol i ndi cat es 2 i n t he Dat a Li st wi t h t he
HDS.
5. Chec k t he 2nd Pr essur e Swi t c h i n t he Dat a Li st wi t h
t he HDS .
Is t he 2nd Pressure Swit ch ON?
NO- Go to st ep 8.
6. Test -dr i ve t he vehi cl e in 2nd gear wi t h t he shi ft l ever
in D f or at l east 2 sec onds.
t he syst em i s OK at t hi s t i me. Chec k for poor
connect i ons or l oose t er mi nal s bet ween t he
t r ansmi ssi on f l ui d pr essur e swi t c h A (2nd Cl ut ch) and
t he PCM. If t he HDS i ndi cat es NOT COMPL ETED, got o
st ep 6.
9. Di sconnect t he t r ansmi ssi on f l ui d pr essur e swi t ch A
(2nd Cl ut ch) connect or .
10. Connec t a j umper wi r e bet ween t he t r ansmi ssi on
f l ui d pr essur e swi t c h A (2nd cl ut ch) connect or
t er mi nal and body gr ound.
TRANS MI S S I ON FLUID PRE S S URE SWI 1CH
A (2ND CL UTCH) CONNECTOR
1
OP2S W ( BL U/ RED)
J UMPER WI RE
12. Chec k t he 2nd pr essur e swi t ch si gnal wi t h t he HDS in
t he A/ T Dat a Li st .
Is t he 2nd Pressure Swit ch ON?
NO- Go to st ep 16.
(cont' d)
14-107
13. Rec onnec t t he t r ansmi ssi on f l ui d pr essur e swi t c h A
(2nd cl ut ch) connect or .
15. Measur e t he 2nd cl ut ch pr essur e (see page 14-175).
Is t he 2nd clut ch pressure wit hin t he service limit s?
YES - Repl ac e t he t r ansmi ssi on f l ui d pr essur e swi t c h A
(2nd cl ut ch) (see page 14-188), t hen got o st ep 21.
NO-Repai r shi ft val ves A, B, and C, and t he rel at ed
to st ep 24.
16. Remove t he j umper wi r e, t hen measur e t he vol t age
bet ween t he t r ansmi ssi on f l ui d pr essur e swi t c h A
(2nd cl ut ch) connect or t er mi nal and body gr ound.
TRANS MI S S I ON FLUID PRE S S URE SWI TCH
A (2ND CL UTCH) CONNECTOR
OP2S W ( BL U/ RED)
Is t here about 5V?
20. Check for cont i nui t y bet ween PCM connect or t er mi nal
B8 and t he t r ansmi ssi on f l ui d pr essur e swi t ch A (2nd
cl ut ch) connect or t er mi nal .
TRANS MI S S I ON
FLUID
A (2ND CL UTCH)
CONNECTOR
OP2SW ( BL U/ RED)
29
j j l | ^ 3 l 4 b Vl 7g
IT 11 12 13 1dllfi 1fi 1711ft 1C
13 14|15J16|17|18 19
24
S I
32|33l34l35|36|/
/
40l XVi ( 43) | Xl 45146J47
9 10
38
I2l
UP2S W
( BL U/ RED)
Terminal side of
female terminals
Wire side of
female terminals
t er mi nal B8 and t he t r ansmi ssi on f l ui d pr essur e
swi t ch A (2nd cl ut ch), t hen go to st ep 21.
14-108
21. Reconnect al l c onnec t or s.
25. Test -dr i ve t he vehi cl e i n 2nd gear wi t h t he shi f t l ever
i n D f or at l east 2 sec onds, t hen dr i ve i n 4th gear f or at
l east 2 sec onds.
bet ween t he t r ansmi ssi on f l ui d pr essur e swi t c h A
(2nd cl ut ch) and t he PCM, t hen go to st ep 1.
NO- Go to st ep 27.
wi t h t he HDS.
t r ansmi ssi on f l ui d pr essur e swi t c h A (2nd cl ut ch) and
t he PCM, t hen go to st ep 1. If t he HDS i ndi cat es NOT
(see page 11 -7).
31. Test -dr i ve t he vehi c l e in 2nd gear wi t h t he shi ft l ever
i n D f or at l east 2 s ec onds , t hen dri ve in 4th gear f or at
l east 2 sec onds.
bet ween t he t r ansmi ssi on f l ui d pr essur e swi t ch A
(2nd cl ut ch) and t he PCM. If t he PCM was updat ed,
subst i t ut e a known-good PCM (see page 11-7), t hen
go to st ep 30. If t he PCM was subst i t ut ed, go to st ep 1.
NO- Go to st ep 33.
wi t h t he HDS.
t he i ndi cat ed DTCs t r oubl eshoot i ng '
t r ansmi ssi on f l ui d pr essur e swi t c h A (2nd cl ut ch) and
14-109
DTC P0847: Shor t in Tr ansmi ssi on Fl ui d
Pr essur e Swi t ch B (3rd Cl ut ch) Ci rcui t , or
Tr ansmi ssi on Flui d Pr essur e Swi t ch B (3rd
Cl ut ch) St uck ON
NOTE:
Bef or e you t r oubl eshoot r ecor d all f r eeze dat a and
Thi s c ode i s c aused by an el ect ri cal ci r cui t pr obl em
t r ansmi ssi on.
3. Chec k t he 3rd Pr essur e Swi t c h i n t he Dat a Li st wi t h t he
HDS when t he t r ansmi ssi on i s not i n 3rd gear .
Is t he 3rd Pressure Swit ch OFF?
NO- Go to st ep 7.
5. Test -dr i ve t he vehi c l e i n 4th gear wi t h t he shi f t l ever i n
D f or at l east 2 sec onds.
t he syst em i s OK at t hi s t i me. Chec k f or i nt ermi t t ent
shor t to body gr ound i n t he wi r e bet ween t he
t r ansmi ssi on f l ui d pr essur e swi t c h B (3rd Cl ut ch)and
t he PCM. If t he HDS i ndi cat es NOT COMPL ETED, go t o
st ep 4.
8. Di sc onnec t t he t r ansmi ssi on f l ui d pr essur e swi t ch B
(3rd Cl ut ch) connect or .
10. Chec k t he 3r d Pr essur e Swi t c h i n t he Dat a Li st wi t h t he
HDS.
1$ t he 3rd Pressure Swit ch OFF?
YES - Repl ac e t he t r ansmi ssi on f l ui d pr essur e swi t ch B
(3rd Cl ut ch) (see page 14-189), t hen go t o st ep 15.
NO- Go to st ep 11.
OP3S W (BL U/ WHT)
I
i i i i
I J i L A 3 I 4 | / | / | 7 | 8
9 l i o l
I
i
11 12 13 1415 16 1718 19
/
21
1
I
i
22 23J24
X
25
X
26 27 28
1
I
i
29 32I3334 35I36
/
38
1
1401/ ^ 1(43)| / | 45146147
PCM c onnec t or t er mi nal B9 and t he t r ansmi ssi on f l ui d
pr essur e swi t c h B (3rd cl ut ch), t hen go to st ep 15.
NO- Go to st ep 22.
14-110
15. Reconnect al l c onnec t or s. 22. Rec onnec t all c onnec t or s.
19. Test -dr i ve t he vehi c l e i n 3r d gear wi t h t he shi f t l ever i n
D f or at l east 2 s ec onds , t hen dr i ve i n 4th gear f or at
l east 2 sec onds.
swi t ch B (3rd cl ut ch)and t he PCM, t hen go to st ep 1.
go to t he i ndi cat ed DT Cs t r oubl es hoot i ng. !
i nt ermi t t ent shor t to body gr ound in t he wi r e bet ween
t he t r ansmi ssi on f l ui d pr essur e swi t ch B (3rd cl ut ch)
and t he PCM, t hen go t o st ep 1. If t he HDS i ndi cat es
(see page 11-7).
25. Test -dr i ve t he vehi c l e in 3rd gear wi t h t he shi f t l ever in
D f or at l east 2 s ec onds , t hen dri ve i n 4th gear f or at
l east 2 sec onds.
YES - Ch ec k f or i ntermi ttent shor t to body gr ound i n
swi t ch B (3rd cl ut ch)and t he PCM. If t he PCM was
11-7), t hen go t o st ep 24. If t he PCM was subst i t ut ed,
go to st ep 1.
NO- Go to st ep 27.
t he i ndi cat ed DTCs t r oubl es hoot i ng. !
t he t r ansmi ssi on f l ui d pr essur e swi t ch B (3rd cl ut ch)
14-111
DTC P0848: Open in Tr ansmi ssi on Fl ui d
Pr essur e Swi t ch B (3rd clut ch) Ci rcui t , or
Tr ansmi ssi on Fl ui d Pr essur e Swi t ch B (3rd
cl ut ch) St uck OFF
4. Test -dr i ve t he vehi c l e i n 3rd gear wi t h t he shi f t l ever i n
D, and c hec k if t he Shi f t Ct r
C
i i - d l c c t Oo G i n urn uat a
L i s t wi t h t he HDS.
5. Chec k t he 3rd Pr essur e Swi t c h i n t he Dat a Li st wi t h t he
HDS. .
Is t he 3rd Pressure Swit ch ON?
NO- Go to st ep 8.
6. Test -dr i ve t he vehi c l e i n 3r d gear wi t h t he shi ft l ever i n
D f or at l east 2 s ec onds .
7. Moni t or t he OBD S TA TUS f or P0848 i n t he DTCs
t he syst em i s OK at t hi s t i me. Check for poor
c onnec t i ons or l oose t er mi nal s bet ween t he
t r ansmi ssi on f l ui d pr essur e swi t c h B (3rd cl ut ch) and
t he PCM. If t he HDS i ndi cat es NOT COMPL ETED, go to
st ep 6.
9. Di sc onnec t t he t r ansmi ssi on f l ui d pr essur e swi t ch B
(3rd cl ut ch) connect or .
10. Connec t a j umper wi r e bet ween t he t r ansmi ssi on
f l ui d pr essur e swi t ch B (3rd cl ut ch) connect or
t er mi nal and body gr ound.
TRANS MI S S I ON FL UID PRE S S URE S WI TCH
- URD CL UTCH) CONNECTOR
1
J UMPER WIRE
12. Chec k t he 3rd pr essur e swi t ch si gnal wi t h t he HDS i n
t he A/ T Dat a Li st .
Is t he 3rd Pressure Swit ch ON?
14-112
13. Rec onnec t t he t r ansmi ssi on flui d pr essur e swi t c h B
(3rd cl ut ch) connect or .
15. Measur e t he 3rd cl ut ch pr essur e (see page 14-175).
Is the 3rd clutch pressure within the service limits?
YES - Repl ac e t he t r ansmi ssi on f l ui d pr essur e swi t c h B
(3rd cl ut ch) (see page 14-189), t hen go to st ep 21.
NO-Repai r shi ft val ves A, B, and C, and t he rel at ed
hydr aul i c ci rcui t , or r epl ace t he t r ansmi ssi on, t hen go
to st ep 24.
16. Remove t he j umper wi r e, t hen measur e t he vol t age
bet ween t he t r ansmi ssi on flui d pr essur e swi t c h B (3rd
cl ut ch) connect or t er mi nal and body gr ound.
TRANS MI S S I ON FLUID PRE S S URE S WI TCH
B (3RD CL UTCH) CONNECTOR
OP3SW (BL U/ WHT)
YES - Repl ac e t he t r ansmi ssi on f l ui d pr essur e swi t ch B
(3rd cl ut ch) (see page 14-189), t hen go to st ep 28.
NO- Go to st ep 17.
20. Check f or cont i nui t y bet ween PCM connect or t er mi nal
B9 and t he t r ansmi ssi on f l ui d pr essur e swi t c h B (3rd
cl ut ch) connect or t er mi nal .
PCM CONNECTOR B (49P) THANSMI SSI ON
FLUID
PRE S S URE SWI TCH
B (3RD CL UTCH)
CONNECTOR
OP3S W (BL U/ WHT)
11
22
29
12
23
40
13 14 15 16 17 18 19
24 > < 25 > < 26
3l [ 32| 33| 34l 35| 36
[(43)]/45146J 47
9 10
21
27
38
28
J Z L
OP3S W
(BL U/ WHT)
Terminal side of
female terminals
Wire side of
female terminals
t er mi nal B9 and t he t r ansmi ssi on f l ui d pr essur e
swi t ch B (3rd cl ut ch), t hen go to st ep 21.
(cont' d)
14-113
25. Test -dr i ve t he vehi c l e in 3rd gear wi t h t he shi ft l ever i n
D f or at l east 2 s ec onds , t hen dr i ve in 4th gear f or at
l east 2 sec onds.
bet ween t he t r ansmi ssi on f l ui d pr essur e swi t c h B (3rd
cl ut ch) and t he PCM, t hen go to st ep 1.
NO- Go to st ep 27.
wi t h t he HDS.
t r ansmi ssi on flui d pr essur e swi t ch B (3rd cl ut ch) and
t he PCM, t hen go to st ep 1. If t he HDS i ndi cat es NOT
(see page 11-7).
31. Test -dr i ve t he vehi c l e i n 3rd gear wi t h t he shi ft l ever i n
D f or at l east 2 s ec onds , t hen dri ve i n 4th gear f or at
l east 2 s ec onds .
bet ween t he t r ansmi ssi on f i u i H pr ec c ^ r c *wi u,i i B (3ra
cl ut ch) and t he PCM. If t he PCM was updat ed,
go to st ep 30. If t he PCM was subst i t ut ed, go to st ep 1.
NO- Go to st ep 33.
wi t h t he HDS.
t r ansmi ssi on f l ui d pr essur e swi t ch B (3rd cl ut ch) and
14-114
DTC P0962: Probl em in. A/T Cl ut ch Pr essur e
Cont rol Sol enoi d Val ve A Ci rcui t
NOTE:
Thi s code i s c aused by an el ect r i cal ci rcui t pr obl em
t r ansmi ssi on.
3. St ar t t he engi ne, and wai t f or at l east 1 sec ond.
NO- Go to st ep 5.
HDS.
NO- Go to st ep 8.
6. In t he Cl ut ch Pr essur e Cont r ol Sol enoi d Val ve Cont r ol
menu, sel ect A/ T cl ut ch pr essur e cont rol sol enoi d
val ve A at 1.0 A.
t he syst em i s OK at t hi s t i me. Chec k f or poor
connect i ons or l oose t er mi nal s bet ween A/ T cl ut ch
pr essur e cont rol sol enoi d val ve A and t he PCM. If t he
10. Di sconnect PCM connect or A (49P).
12. Measur e t he vol t age bet ween PCM connect or
t er mi nal A1 body gr ound.
PCM CONNECTOR A (49P)
VB SOL (RED)
NO-Chec k f or a bl own No. 10 f use (10 A) in t he
dr i ver ' s under -dash f use/r el ay box. If t he f use i s OK ,
repai r open i n t he wi r e bet ween PCM connect or
t er mi nal A1 and t he dr i ver ' s under -dash f use/r el ay
box, t hen go to st ep 21.
(cont ' d)
14-115
14. Di sc onnec t t he A/ T cl ut ch pr essur e cont rol sol enoi d
val ve A connect or .
15. Measur e t he r esi st anc e bet ween A/ T cl ut ch pr essur e
cont rol sol enoi d val ve A c onnec t or t er mi nal s No. 1
and No. 2.
A / T CL UTCH PRE S S URE CONTROL
S OL ENOI D VA L VE A CONNECTOR
1 2
Is t here 310 Q?
val ve A (see page 14-184), t hen go to st ep 21.
16. Chec k f or cont i nui t y bet ween A/ T cl ut ch pr essur e
cont rol sol enoi d val ve A c onnec t or t er mi nal No. 2 and
body gr ound.
cont r ol sol enoi d val ve A connect or t er mi nal No. 1 and
body gr ound.
A/ T CLUTCH PRESSURE CONTROL
SOLENOID VALVE A CONNECTOR
LSA (RED/BLK)
A/ T cl ut ch pr essur e cont rol sol enoi d val ve A
c onnec t or t er mi nal No. 1 and body gr ound, t hen go t o
st ep 21.
NO- Go to st ep 20.
GND (BLK)
NO-Repai r open in t he wi r e bet ween A/ T cl ut ch
pr essur e cont rol sol enoi d val ve A and body gr ound
(G101) (see page 22-20), or repair poor ground (G101),
14-116
cont rol sol enoi d val ve A connect or t er mi nal No. 1 and
PCM connect or t ermi nal B48.
PCM CONNECTOR B (4SP) A/T CL UTCH PRESSURE
CONTROL SOLENOID
VAL VE A CONNECTOR
T r T
1IXj 3 | 4 Mx T 7 l 8 | 9 | l O
22
29
23
13 14 15 16 17 18 19
24
31 3 2 3 3 34 35 36
[ (43)| X| 45146147j m\/\
27
21
28
0
L S A ( RED/ BL K )
Terminal side of
female terminals
l | 2 j
L S A
( RED/ BL K )
Wire side of
female terminals
pr essur e cont rol sol enoi d val ve A connect or t er mi nal
No. 1 and PCM connect or t er mi nal B48, t hen go to
st ep 21.
25. Chec k for Pendi ng or Conf i r med DTC. wi t h t he HDS.
YE S - Ch ec k for poor c onnec t i ons or l oose t er mi nal s
bet ween A/ T cl ut ch pr essur e cont rol sol enoi d val ve A
and t he PCM, t hen go t o st ep 1.
NO- Go to st ep 26.
NO-l f t he HDS i ndi cat es FAI L ED, check for poor
c onnec t i ons or l oose t er mi nal s bet ween A/ T cl ut ch
pr essur e cont rol sol enoi d val ve A and t he PCM, t hen
go to st ep 24.
(cont' d)
14-117
(see page 11-7).
29. St art t he engi ne, and wai t f or at l east 1 sec ond.
YE S - Ch ec k f or poor connect i ons or l oose t er mi nal s
NO- Go to st ep 31.
DTC P0963: Probl em in A/T Cl ut ch Pr essur e
Cont rol Sol enoi d Val ve A
NOTE:
t r ansmi ssi on.
A r h o o u w p
C
; - j ; ,
i y o r
Conf i r med DTCs wi t h t he HDS.
NO- Go to st ep 5.
HDS.
Does the HDS indicate NORMAL?
NO- Go to st ep 8.
6. In t he Cl ut ch Pr essur e Cont rol Sol enoi d Val ve Cont r ol
val ve A at 0.2 A.
Does the HDS indicate FAILED?
14-118
9. Di sconnect t he A/ T cl ut ch pr essur e cont rol sol enoi d
cont rol sol enoi d val ve A connect or t er mi nal s No. 1
and No. 2.
SOL ENOI D VA L VE A CONNECTOR
1 2
Is t here 3-10 Q?
val ve A (see page 14-184), t hen go t o st ep 12.
cont rol sol enoi d val ve A connect or t er mi nal No. 2 and
body gr ound.
GND (BLK)
pr essur e cont rol sol enoi d val ve A and body gr ound
and t he PCM, t hen go to st ep 1.
NO- Go to st ep 17.
pr essur e cont rol sol enoi d val ve A and t he PCM, t hen
go to st ep 15.
(cont' d)
14-119
(see page 11-7).
bet ween A/ T cl ut ch pr essur e cont r ol sol enoi d val ve A
If t he PCM was subst i t ut ed, go t o st ep 1.
NO- Go to st ep 22.
t he i ndi cat ed DT Cs t r oubl eshoot i ng-^
NO-l f t he HDS i ndi cat es FAI L ED, c hec k f or poor
Cont rol Sol enoi d Val ve B Ci rcui t
NOTE:
t r ansmi ssi on.
NO- Go to st ep 5.
cl ut ch pr essur e cont r ol sol enoi d val ve B wi t h t he
HDS.
NO- Go to st ep 8.
6. In t he Cl ut ch Pr essur e Cont r ol Sol enoi d Val ve Cont r ol
menu, sel ec t A/ T cl ut ch pr essur e cont rol sol enoi d
val ve B at 1.0 A.
pr essur e cont rol sol enoi d val ve B and t he PCM. If t he
14-120
PA
8. Tur n t he i gni ti on swi t ch t o L OCK (0).
val ve B connect or .
10. Measur e t he r esi st ance bet ween A/T cl ut ch pr essur e
cont rol sol enoi d val ve B connect or t er mi nal s No. 1
and No. 2.
S OL ENOI D VA L VE B CONNECTOR
Is t here 3-10 Q?
11. Check f or cont i nui t y bet ween A/T cl ut ch pr essur e
cont rol sol enoi d val ve B connect or t er mi nal No. 2 and
body gr ound.
12. J ump t he S CS li ne wi th t he HDS.
body gr ound.
1 2
LSB (BRN)
A/ T cl ut ch pr essur e cont rol sol enoi d val ve B
connect or t er mi nal No. 1 and body gr ound, t hen go to
st ep 16.
NO- Go to st ep 15.
SOLENOID VAL VE B CONNECTOR
pr essur e cont rol sol enoi d val ve B and body gr ound
(cont' d)
14-121
15. Chec k f or cont i nui t y bet ween A/T cl ut ch pr essur e
PCM connect or t er mi nal B40.
PCM CONNECTOR B (49P) A / T CL UTCH PRE S S URE
CONTROL S OL ENOI D
VA L VE B CONNECTOR
111 1^ 3 I 4 M / l 7 T 8 [ 9 l l 0 | j |
1
| 11| 12 1 3 | 1 4 | 1 5 | 1 6 | 1 7| 1 8| 1 9 / | 2 1 |
22
29
23 25
31 3 2 3 3 34 35 36
40 M/(43)[y14 5 1 4 6 J 4 7 j 48\ / \
27 28
3S\7
L S B (BRN)
L b B (BRN)
Terminal side of
female terminals
Wire side of
female terminals
pr essur e cont rol sol enoi d val ve B connect or t er mi nal
No. 1 and PCM connect or t er mi nal B40, t hen go to
st ep 16.
bet ween A/ T cl ut ch pr essur e cont rol sol enoi d val ve B
NO- Go to st ep 21.
MENU wi t h the HDS,
pr essur e cont rol sol enoi d val ve B and t he PCM, t hen
got o st ep 19.
14-122
(see page 11-7).
24. St art t he engi ne, and wai t f or at l east 1 sec ond.
bet ween A/ T cl ut ch pr essur e cont rol sol enoi d val ve 6
NO- Go to st ep 26.
Control Sol enoi d Val ve B
NOTE:
and cannot be c aus ed by a mec hani c al pr obl em in t he
t r ansmi ssi on.
NO- Go to st ep 5.
cl ut ch pr essur e cont rol sol enoi d val ve B wi t h t he
HDS.
NO- Go to st ep 8.
val ve B at 0.2 A.
(cont ' d)
14-123
Aut o mat i c Tr ansmi ssi on
val ve B connect or ,
10. Measur e t he r esi st ance bet ween A/ T cl ut ch pr essur e
cont r ol sol enoi d val ve B c onnec t or t er mi nal s No. 1
and No. 2.
A/T CLUTCH PRESSURE CONTROL
SOLENOID VALVE B CONNECTOR
I i
1 2
(0)
is t here 3-10Q?
Y E S - G o to st ep 11..
cont r ol sol enoi d val ve B c onnec t or t er mi nal No. 2 and
body gr ound.
bet ween A/ T cl ut ch pr essur e cont rol sol enoi d val ve B
and t he PCM, then: go to st ep 1.
MF N" wi t h the ! IDC.
NO-l f t he HDS i ndi cat es FAI L ED, c hec k f or poor
pr essur e cont rol sol enoi d val ve B and t he PCM, t hen
go to st ep 15.
NO-Repai r open i n t he wi r e bet ween A/ T cl ut ch
pr essur e cont r ol sol enoi d val ve B and body gr ound
14-124
(s eepage 11-7).
bet ween A/ T cl ut ch pr essur e cont r ol sol enoi d val ve B
known-good PCM (see page 11-7), t hen go t o st ep 20.
If t he PCM was subst i t ut ed, go t o st ep 1.
t he i ndi cat ed DTCs t r oubl eshoot i ng.! !
Cont rol Sol enoi d Val ve C Ci rcui t
NOTE:
* Bef or e you t r oubl eshoot , r ecor d all f r eeze dat a and
any on-boar d snapshot wi t h t he HDS, ari d r evi ew
Thi s c ode i s c aus ed by an el ect r i cal ci rcui t pr obl em
and c annot be c aus ed by a mec hani c al pr obl em i n t he
t r ansmi ssi on.
3. St ar t t he engi ne, and wai t f or at l east 1 s ec ond.
NO- Go to st ep 5.
Val ve C i n t he Mi sc el l aneous Test Menu, and t est A/ T
cl ut ch pr essur e cont rol sol enoi d val ve C wi t h t he
HDS.
NO- Go to st ep 8.
menu, sel ec t A/T cl ut ch pr essur e cont rol sol enoi d
val ve Cat 1.0 A.
MENU wi t h t he HDS,
pr essur e cont rol sol enoi d val ve C and t he PCM. If t he
(cont ' d)
14-125
val ve C connect or .
cont rol sol enoi d val ve C connect or t er mi nal s No. 1
and No. 2.
S OL ENOI D VA L VE C CONNECTOR
1 2
Is t here 3-10 Q?
11 Chec k f or cont i nui t y bet ween A/ T cl ut ch pr essur e
cont rol sol enoi d val ve C connect or t er mi nal No. 2 and
body gr ound.
body gr ound.
L S C ( BL U/ YEL )
A/ T cl ut ch pr essur e cont rol sol enoi d val ve C
connect or t er mi nal No. 1 and body gr ound, t hen go to
st ep 16.
NO- Go to st ep 15.
NO-Repai r open i n t he wi r e bet ween A/T cl ut ch
pr essur e cont rol sol enoi d val ve C and body gr ound
14-126
15. Chec k for cont i nui t y bet ween A/T cl ut ch pr essur e
PCM connect or t ermi nal B26.
PCM CONNECTOR B (49P) A / T CL UTCH PRE S S URE
CONTROL S OL ENOI D
VA L VE B CONNECTOR
1 l l X|3l 4MX|7
11 12
22
29
13 14 15 16 17 18
IS
31 32l 33| 34| 35[ 36| /
UK
19
26
40 l / ^ ( 4 3 ) [ / l 4514614
L S C ( BL U/ YEL )
9 10
27
38
21
28
LSC
( BL U/ YEL )
Terminal side of
female terminals
Wire side of
female terminals
pr essur e cont rol sol enoi d val ve C connect or t er mi nal
No. 1 and PCM connect or t ermi nal B26, t hen go to
st ep 16.
bet ween A/ T cl ut ch pr essur e cont rol sol enoi d val ve C
pr essur e cont rol sol enoi d val ve C and t he PCM, t hen
got o st ep 19.
(cont' d)
14-127
(see page 11-7).
2C. r/ , v >, ; ^ u^ Gou S I M I u o for P0970 i n t he DTCs
subst i t ut ed, go t o st ep 1. If t he HDS i ndi cat es NOT
DTC P0971: Probl em In A/T Cl ut ch Pr essur e
Cont rol Sol enoi d Val ve C
NOTE:
Thi s c ode i s c aus ed by an el ect ri cal ci rcui t pr obl em
t r ansmi ssi on.
4. Chec k for Pendi ng or Conf i r med D T Cs wi t h t he HDS.
NO- Go to st ep 5.
Val ve C in t he Mi sc el l aneous Test Menu, and t est A/ T
HDS.
NO- Go to st ep 8.
6. In t he Cl ut ch Pr essur e Cont rol Sol enoi d Val ve Cont rol
val ve C at 0.2 A.
c onnec t i ons or l oose t er mi nal s bet ween A/T cl ut ch
14-128
val ve C connect or .
cont rol sol enoi d val ve C connect or t er mi nal s No. 1
and No. 2.
S OL ENOI D VAL VE C CONNECTOR
Is t here 3-10 D?
body gr ound.
NO- Go to st ep 17.
pr essur e cont rol sol enoi d val ve C and t he PCM, t hen
go t o st ep 1. If t he HDS i ndi cat es NOT COMPL ETED,
go t o st ep 15.
S OL ENOI D VAL VE C CONNECTOR
GND (BLK)
pr essur e cont rol sol enoi d val ve C and body gr ound
(cont' d)
14-129
{ see page 11-203), or subst i t ut e a known-good PCM
(see page 11 -7).
YE S - Ch ec k f or poor c onnec t i ons or l oose t er mi nal s,
22. Moni t or t he OBD S TATUS for P0971 i n the D T Cs .
DTC P0973: Shor t in Shi f t Sol enoi d Val ve A
Ci rcui t
NOTE:
t r ansmi ssi on.
3. Test -dr i ve t he vehi c l e i n 1st gear wi t h t he shi ft l ever in
D f or at l east 1 sec ond.
1. Chs c k f or Pendi ng or Conf i r med DTCs wi t h t he HDS.
NO- Go to st ep 5.
5. Sel ec t Shi f t Sol enoi d Val ve A i n t he Mi sc el l aneous
Test Menu, and t est shi ft sol enoi d val ve A wi t h t he
HDS.
NO- Go to st ep 8.
D for at l east 1 sec ond.
t he syst em i s OK at t hi s t i me. Chec k f or i ntermi ttent
shor t to body gr ound i n t he wi r e bet ween shi ft
sol enoi d val ve A and t he PCM. If t he HDS i ndi cat es
NOT COMPL ETED, got o st ep 5.
14-130
11 _ Measur e t he r esi st ance bet ween PCM c onnec t or
SHA ( BL U/ BL K )
f
II Il 1
J l 7
3 l 4 | ZM7l 8 s hoi
1
11 12 13 14|15 16 17 18 19
/
21
1
22 23 24
><
25
><
26 27 28
1
2%
>/
31 3233 34 3536
/
38
N /
/|(43) | / ] 45| 46| 47 4 8M
Is t here less t han 12 D?
NO- Go to st ep 22.
12. Di sc onnec t t he shi f t sol enoi d wi r e har ness connect or .
S HA ( BL U/ BL K )
11 12
22
29
13 14 15 16 17 18
I X I X
31 3233 34 35 36
401/1/1(43)1/145146^
19
26
9 10
21
27
38
28
<2lZl
PCM connect or t er mi nal B11 and t he shi ft sol enoi d
wi r e har ness connect or , t hen go to st ep 16.
NO- Go to st ep 14.
14. Inspect shi ft sol enoi d val ve A and t he shi ft sol enoi d
wi r e har ness (see page 14-179).
15. Repl ac e ei t her shi ft sol enoi d val ve A or t he shi f t
sol enoi d wi r e har ness (see page 14-179), whi c hever
f ai l ed t he t est , t hen go to st ep 16.
(cont' d)
14-131
at l east 1 sec ond. Then t est -dri ve t he vehi c l e i n 1st
gear wi t h t he shi f t l ever i n D f or at l east 1 sec ond.
YE S - Ch ec k f or i nt ermi t t ent shor t to body gr ound in
t he wi r e bet ween shi f t sol enoi d val ve A and t he PCM,
go to t he i ndi cat ed DT Cs t r oubl eshoot i ng-^
shi f t sol enoi d val ve A and t he PCM, t hen go to st ep 1.
If t he HDS i ndi cat es NOT COMPL ETED, go t o st ep 19.
(see page 11 -203), or subst i t ut e a known-good PCM
(see page 11-7).
24. St ar t t he engi ne wi t h t he shi ft l ever i n P, and wai t f or
at l east 1 sec ond. Then t est -dr i ve t he vehi c l e i n 1st
gear wi t h t he shi f t l ever i n D f or at l east 1 sec ond.
YES - Ch ec k f or i nt ermi t t ent shor t to body gr ound i n
t he wi r e bet ween shi ft sol enoi d val ve A and t he PCM.
If t he PCM was updat ed, subst i t ut e a known-good
PCM (see page 11-7), t hen go to st ep 24. If t he PCM
was subst i t ut ed, go to step 1.
NO- Go to st ep 26.
t he i ndi cat ed DTCs t r oubl eshoot i ng.! !
i ntermi ttent shor t to body gr ound i n t he wi r e bet ween
shi ft sol enoi d val ve A and t he PCM. If t he PCM was
11 -7), t hen go to st ep 24. If t he PCM was subst i t ut ed,
go t o st ep 24.
14-132
DTC P0974: Open in Shi ft Solenoid Vai ve A
Ci rcui t
NOTE;
t r ansmi ssi on.
3. St art t he engi ne wi t h t he shi ft l ever i n P, and wai t f or
at l east 1 sec ond.
Is DTC P0974 Indicated?
NO-Go to st ep 5.
5. Sel ec t Shi f t Sol enoi d Val ve A in t he Mi sc el l aneous
Test Menu, and t est shi ft sol enoi d val ve A wi t h t he
HDS.
NO-Go to st ep 8.
6. St art t he engi ne wi t h t he shi ft l ever in P, and wai t f or
7. Moni tor t he OBD S TATUS f or P0974 in t he DTCs
NO-lf t he HDS i ndi cat es PAS S ED, i ntermi ttent f ai l ur e,
t he syst em i s OK at t hi s t i me. Check for poor
connect i ons or l oose t er mi nal s bet ween shi ft
sol enoi d val ve A and t he PCM. If t he HDS i ndi cat es
11. Measur e t he r esi st anc e bet ween PCM connect or
t er mi nal s B11 and body gr ound.
SHA ( BLU/ BLK)
22
29
12
23
13 14 15 16 17 18
24
31 3 2 3 3 34 35 36
40 \/Y^mx\ 45146
19
26
47
9 10
27
\ZMA
21
28
i I 0
is there 12-25 Ct?
NO-Go to st ep 12.
(cont' d)
14-133
t er mi nal No. 5.
SHIFT SOLENOID WIRE
HARNESS CONNECTOR
1 2 3
/
5 6 7 8
SHA (BLU/BLK)
22
12
23
1 3
2 4
1 4 1 5 1 6
2 5
1 7 1 8
SI
1 9
45146 4 7
721
1
2 7 2 8
SHA ( BL U/ BL K )
connect or , t hen go to st ep 16.
14. Remove t he shi ft sol enoi d wi r e har ness (see page
14-179).
har ness connect or t er mi nal No. 5 and t he shi ft
sol enoi d val ve A connect or t er mi nal .
SHIFT SOLENOID
VALVE A
CONNECTOR
SHIFT SOLENOID WIRE
HARNESS CONNECTOR
1
C
M
3
/
5 6 7 8
SHA (BLU)
female terminals male terminals
YES - Repl ac e shi ft sol enoi d val ve A (see page 14-179),
NO-Repl ac e t he shi f t sol enoi d wi r e har ness (see page
14-134
at l east 1 sec ond. Then t est -dri ve t he vehi c l e i n 1st
gear wi t h t he shi ft l ever in D f or at l east 1 sec ond.
Y E S - C h e c k for poor connect i ons or l oose t er mi nal s
bet ween shi ft sol enoi d val ve A and t he PCM, t hen go
to st ep 1.
YES - Tr o ub l es h o o t i ng i s compl et e. If any ot her
sol enoi d val ve A and t he PCM, t hen go to st ep 1. If t he
(see page 11-7).
at l east 1 sec ond. Then t est -dr i ve t he vehi c l e in 1st
gear wi t h t he shi ft l ever i n D f or at l east 1 sec ond.
25. Chec k f or Pendi ng or Conf i r med DTC wi t h t he HDS.
Y E S - C h e c k f or poor c onnec t i ons or l oose t er mi nal s
bet ween shi ft sol enoi d val ve A and t he PCM. If t he
NO- Go to st ep 26.
Y E S - l f t he PCM was updat ed, t r oubl eshoot i ng i s
t he i ndi cat ed DTCs t r oubl eshoot i ng. <
c onnec t i ons or l oose t er mi nal s bet ween shi ft
sol enoi d val ve A and t he PCM. If t he PCM was
go to st ep 24.
14-135
DTC P0976: Shor t in Shi f t Sol enoi d Val ve B
Circuit
NOTE:
Thi s c ode i s c aus ed by an el ect r i cal ci rcui t pr obl em
t r ansmi ssi on.
at l east 1 s ec ond.
4. Chec k f or Pendi ng or Conf i r med DTCs wi t h ttz I \DC.
NO- Go to st ep 5.
5. Sel ec t Shi f t Sol enoi d Val ve B i n t he Mi sc el l aneous
Tes t Menu, and t est shi f t sol enoi d val ve B wi t h t he
HDS.
NO- Go to st ep 8.
shor t to body gr ound in t he wi r e bet ween shi f t
sol enoi d val ve B and t he PCM. If t he HDS i ndi cat es
11. Measur e t he r esi st ance bet ween PCM connect or
J Lkt
22
29
SHB (GRN/ WHT)
E L
12
3
. K k V l .
7 8
13 14 15 16 17 18 19
31 3233 34 35 36
40 45146J47
9 101
21
Is t here less t han 12 Q?
NO- Go to st ep 22.
14-136
11 12
22
S HB (GRN/ WHT)
23
291/
40
3 1 4 M / 1 7 1 8
13 1415161718 19
24
Si
2 p
31 J32|33|34i35|36|^
143)1/145146147
^ 2 6
9 10
21
2728
38|7l
NO-Got o st ep 14.
14. Inspect shi ft sol enoi d val ve B and t he shi ft sol enoi d
15. Repl ace ei t her shi ft sol enoi d val ve B or t he shi ft
19. St ar t t he engi ne wi t h t he shi ft l ever in P, and wai t for
at l east 1 sec ond. Test -dr i ve t he vehi c l e wi t h t he shi ft
l ever in D t hr ough 1st to 3rd gear s, t hen dri ve in 3rd
gear for at l east 1 sec ond.
YE S - Ch ec k for i nt ermi t t ent shor t to body gr ound in
t he wi r e bet ween shi ft sol enoi d val ve B and t he PCM,
NO-Go to st ep 21.
go to t he i ndi cat ed DTCs t roubl eshoot i ng.IS
NO-l f t he HDS i ndi cat es FAIL ED, check for
shi f t sol enoi d val ve B and t he PCM, t hen go to st ep 1.
If t he HDS i ndi cat es NOT COMPL ETED, go to st ep 19.
(cont' d)
14-137
(see page 11-7).
at l east 1 sec ond. Test -dr i ve t he vehi c l e wi t h t he shi f t
l ever i n D t hr ough 1st to 3rd gear s, t hen dr i ve i n 3r d
gear f or at l east 1 sec ond.
YE S - Ch ec k f or i ntermi ttent shor t to body gr ound i n
t he wi r e bet ween shi f t sol enoi d val ve B and t he PCM.
NO- Go to st ep 26.
or Conf i r med DTCs wer e i ndi cat ed in st ep 25, go t o
shi f t sol enoi d val ve B and t he PCM. If t he PCM was
go to st ep 24.
DTC P0977: Open in Shi ft Sol enoi d Val ve B
Ci rcui t
NOTE:
t r ansmi ssi on.
3. Test -dr i ve t he vehi c l e wi t h t he shi ft l ever i n D t hr ough
1st to 3r d gear s, t hen dri ve in 3r d gear f or at l east 1
sec ond.
NO- Go to st ep 5.
5. Sel ec t Shi f t Sol enoi d Val ve B i n t he Mi sc el l aneous
Test Menu, and t est shi ft sol enoi d val ve B wi t h t he
HDS.
is a clicking sound heard?
NO- Go to st ep 8.
6. Test -dr i ve t he vehi c l e wi t h t he shi f t l ever i n D t hr ough
1st to 3rd gear s, t hen dri ve i n 3r d gear f or at l east 1
sec ond.
c onnec t i ons or l oose t er mi nal s bet ween shi f t
sol enoi d val ve B and t he PCM. If t he HDS i ndi cat es
14-138
9. J ump t he S CS li ne wi th the HDS.
11. Measur e t he r esi st ance bet ween PCM connect or
S HB ( GRN/WHT)
22
12
23
40
13 14 15 16 17 18 19
24
I K
26
29l/ )3l |32l33ly|35l36|/]38C7
l XM( 4 3 ) M45l 46f 47
9 10
21
27 28
Is t here 12-25O?
NO- Go to st ep 12.
t er mi nal No. 2.
S HI FT S OL ENOI D WI RE
HARNES S CONNECTOR
S HB ( GRN/WHT)
1 2 3
\/
5 6 7 8
22
S HB ( GRN/WHT)
12
23
13 14 15
31
3233
16
34
17 18
2 K
3536
19
26
" 1101
21
27 28
14-179).
(cont ' d)
14-139
15. Chec k f or cont i nui t y bet ween shi f t sol enoi d wi r e
har ness connect or t er mi nal No. 2 and t he shi f t
sol enoi d val ve B c onnec t or t er mi nal .
SHIFT SOLENOID
VALVE B
CONNECTOR
SHIFT SOLENOID WIRE
HARNESS CONNECTOR
SHB (ORN)
1 2 3
/
5 6 7 8
Wire side of
female terminals
Terminal side of
male terminals
YES-Repl ac e shi f t sol enoi d val ve B (see page 14-179),
NO-Repl ac e t he shi ft sol enoi d wi r e har ness (see page
at l east 1 s ec ond. Test -dr i ve t he vehi c l e wi t h t he shi f t
l ever i n D t hr ough 1st t o 3rd gear s, t hen dr i ve i n 3rd
YES - Chec k f or poor c onnec t i ons or l oose t er mi nal s
bet ween shi f t sol enoi d val ve B and t he PCM, t hen go
t o st ep 1.
NO- Go to st ep 21.
sol enoi d val ve B and t he PCM, t hen go t o st ep 1. If t he
14-140
(see page 11-7).
at l east 1 sec ond. Test -dr i ve t he vehi c l e wi t h t he shi f t
l ever i n D t hr ough 1st t o 3r d gear s, t hen dr i ve i n 3r d
YES-Chec k f or poor c onnec t i ons or l oose t er mi nal s
bet ween shi f t sol enoi d val ve B and t he PCM. If t he
page 11-7), t hen go t o st ep 24. If t he PCM was
NO-Go t o st ep 26.
YES-l f t he PCM was updat ed, t r oubl eshoot i ng i s
NO-lf t he HDS i ndi cat es FAIL ED, c hec k f or poor
sol enoi d val ve B and t he PCM. If t he PCM was
11 -7), t hen go t o st ep 24. If t he PCM was subst i t ut ed,
got o st ep 1. If t he HDS i ndi cat es NOT COMPL ETED,
go t o st ep 24.
DTC P0979: Shor t in Shi ft Sol enoi d Val ve C
Ci rcui t
NOTE:
Bef or e you t r oubl eshoot , r ecor d al l f reeze dat a and
t r ansmi ssi on.
3. Test -dr i ve t he vehi c l e i n 1 st gear wi t h t he shi ft l ever in
NO-Go to st ep 5.
5. Sel ec t Shi f t Sol enoi d Val ve C in t he Mi sc el l aneous
Test Menu, and t est shi f t sol enoi d val ve C wi t h t he
HDS.
NO-Go to st ep 8.
NO-lf t he HDS i ndi cat es PAS S ED, i ntermi ttent f ai l ur e,
shor t to body gr ound i n t he wi r e bet ween shi ft
sol enoi d val ve C and t he PCM. If t he HDS i ndi cat es
(cont' d)
14-141
8. Chec k for a bl own No. 10 (10 A) f use i n t he dr i ver ' s
Is t he No. 10 (10 A) fuse OK?
NO-Repl ac e t he f use, t hen go to st ep 22. If t he f use
bl ows agai n, repai r shor t t he No.10 (10A) f use ci r cui t ,
Then go to st ep 19.
11 Di sc onnec t PCM c onnec t or B (49P).
rCrJi CCniniico l UfS 15(49P)
S HC (GRN)
i *\AAA%
22
29
12
23
13 14 15 16 17 18 19
2 1 ^ 2 5 ^
31 3 2 3 3 34 35 36
40 AAfJ Xl 45146|47
9 10
3 8 | / | -I
IZL
NO- Go to st ep 27.
S HC (GRN)
B E
TT71
22
29
12
23
3 | 4 | / [ / | 7 | 8
13 14 15 16 17 18 19
24
31 3 2 3 3 34 35 36
3 ^ 3 ^ 2 6
40 l / j / i N / l 45146J47
9 10
21
27 28
NO- Go to st ep 15.
15. Inspect shi f t sol enoi d val ve C (see page 14-179).
Is shift solenoid valve C OK?
NO-Repl ac e shi ft sol enoi d val ve C or t he shi ft
sol enoi d wi r e har ness (see page 14-179), t hen go to
st ep 21.
14-142
VB S OL (RED)
3
| 4 |e I
3 | T
/
9
10
11
/
/
/ | 1 5 16 17| 18 19 20 21 E
22 23 24 2 5
><
26 27 28
1
29 30 3 2 l / 34 3 5 3 6
/
\ A
41 4 2 | ( 4 3 ) | 4 4 | / | 4 6
/
NO-Repai r open in t he wi r es bet ween PCM connect or
t er mi nal A1 and t he sr i ver ' s under -dash f use/r el ay
at l east 1 sec ond. Then t est -dri ve t he vehi c l e in 1st
gear wi t h t he shi ft l ever in D for at l east 1 sec ond.
YES - Ch ec k f or i ntermi ttent shor t to body gr ound i n
t he wi r e bet ween shi ft sol enoi d val ve C and t he PCM,
NO- Go to st ep 26.
26. Moni t or t he OBD st at us for P0979 i n t he DTCs MENU
wi t h t he HDS.
shi ft sol enoi d val ve C and t he PCM, t hen go to st ep 1.
(cont' d)
14-143
(see page 11-7).
at l east 1 sec ond. Then t est -dr i ve t he vehi c l e i n 1st
gear wi t h t he shi ft l ever in D f or at l east 1 s ec ond.
YE S - Ch ec k f or i nt ermi t t ent shor t to body gr ound in
t he wi r e bet ween shi f t sol enoi d val ve C and t he PCM.
NO- Go to st ep 31.
wi t h t he HDS.
c ompl et e. If t he PCM was subst i t ut ed, r epl ace t he
shi f t sol enoi d val ve C and t he PCM. If t he PCM was
go to st ep 29.
DTC P0980: Open in Shi ft Sol enoi d Val ve C
Ci rcui t
NOTE:
Thi s c ode i s c aused by an el ect r i cal ci rcui t pr obl em
t r ansmi ssi on.
4. Ci ' i eck for Pendi ng or Conf i r med Ui Cs wi t h t he HDS.
NO- Go to st ep 5.
Test Menu, and t est shi ft sol enoi d val ve C wi t h t he
HDS.
NO- Go to st ep 8.
sol enoi d val ve C and t he PCM. If t he HDS i ndi cat es
14-144
12. Measur e the vol t age bet ween PCM connect or
NO-Chec k f or a bl own No. 10 f use (10 A) in t he
dr i ver ' s under -dash f use/r el ay box. If t he f use i s
bl own, r epl ace it. If it bl ows agai n, r epai r shor t in t he
No.10 (10 A) dr i ver ' s under -dash f use ci rcui t . If t he
f use i s OK, repai r open i n t he wi r e bet ween PCM
connect or t er mi nal A1 and t he dr i ver ' s under -dash
f use/r el ay box, t hen go to st ep 21.
15. Di sc onnec t PCM c onnec t or B (49P).
16. Measur e t he r esi st anc e bet ween PCM c onnec t or
S HC (GRN)
22
29
12
23
401
13 14 15 16 17 18
00
3lJ 32|33|a4|35|36j7'
1<
4
3)L^145146147
19
26
9 10
21
27 28
381/1 '
Is t here 12-25 O ?
NO- Go to st ep 17.
(cont ' d)
14-145
t er mi nal No. 1.
SHIFT S OL ENOI D WI RE
HARNES S CONNECTOR
S HC (GRN)
SHC (GRN)
1 2 3
/
5 6 7 8
f I i i l
!
. h i /
3 | 4 | / | / I 7 | 8 9|l
!
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
A
21 1
!
22 2 3 24
><
25
><
26 27 28
!
29
/
31 3 2 3 3 34 3 5 3 6
/
38
/
" t
/
f
| f 43)l ^145 l4S 147
i K ' M' T *a
4
^ i / I I
14-179).
har ness connect or t er mi nal No. 1 and t he shi ft
sol enoi d val ve C connect or t er mi nal .
SHI FT S OL ENOI D
VA L VE C
CONNECTOR
SHIIhT SOL ENOI D WI RE
HARNES S CONNECTOR
SHC (GRN)
1 2 3
/
5 6 7 8
female terminals rndc t c r i . H H U I O
YES - Repl ac e shi ft sol enoi d val ve C (see page 14-179),
NO-Repl ac e t he shi f t sol enoi d wi r e har ness (see page
14-146
at l east 1 sec ond. Then t est -dri ve t he vehi cl e i n 1st
bet ween shi ft sol enoi d val ve C and t he PCM
f
t hen go
to st ep 1.
NO- Go to st ep 26.
sol enoi d val ve C and t he PCM, t hen go to st ep 1. If t he
(see page 11-7).
at l east 1 sec ond. Then t est -dr i ve t he vehi cl e in 1st
bet ween shi ft sol enoi d val ve C and t he PCM. If t he
page 11 -7), t hen go to st ep.29. If t he PCM was
NO- Go to st ep 31.
- compl et e. If the PCM was subst i t ut ed, r epl ace t he
sol enoi d val ve C and t he PCM. If t he PCM was
go to st ep 29.
14-147
PTC PSS82: Shor t i n Shi f t Sol enoi d Val ve D
Circuit
NOTE;
Bef or e you t r oubl eshoot , r ecor d al l f r eeze dat a and
Gener al Tr oubl eshoot i ng Inf ormat i on (see page 14-4),
Thi s c ode i s c aused by an el ect r i cal ci r cui t pr obl em
t r ansmi ssi on.
i n D f or a1 l east 1 sec ond.
4. Chec k f or Pendi ng or Co n f i r m^
n T
<> wi t h thz ^.22.
NO- Go to st ep 5.
5. Sel ec t Shi f t Sol enoi d Val ve D i n t he Mi sc el l aneous
Test Menu, and t est shi f t sol enoi d val ve D wi t h t he
HDS. '
NO- Go to st ep 8.
i n D f or at l east 1 sec ond.
shor t to body gr ound i n t he wi r e bet ween shi f t
sol enoi d val ve D and t he PCM. If t he HDS i ndi cat es
8. Chec k f or a bl own No. 10 (10 A) f use i n t he dr i ver ' s
Is t he No. 7 (15 A) fuse OK?
NO-Repl ac e t he f use, t hen go t o st ep 22. If t he f use
bl ows agai n, r epai r shor t t he No.10 (10A) f use ci r cui t ,
Then go to st ep 19.
22
29
23
13 14| 15[ 16[ 17| 18| 19
24
31 3 2 3 3 34
26
35|36|/3 3l7
4 0 X ^^) | y ^ 4 5 l 4 6 J 4 7
9 10
21
27
SHD (GRN/ RED)
28
NO- Go to st ep 27.
14-148
14. Check for cont i nui t y bet ween PCM connect or t ermi nal
' |11|12 13|14|15|16|17|18|19/121|
22
29
23 24 25
31 32 33 34 35 36
26
4 0 4 5 1 4 6 J 4 7 p 8J/]
27
SHD (GRN/ RED)
28
PCM connect or t ermi nal B27 and t he shi ft sol enoi d
NO- Go to st ep 15.
15. Inspect shi ft sol enoi d val ve D (see page 14-179).
Is shift solenoid valve D OK?
NO-Repl ac e shi ft sol enoi d val ve D or t he shi ft
sol enoi d wi r e har ness (see page 14-179), t hen go to
st ep 21.
18. Di sc onnec t PCM connect or A (49P).
NO-Repai r open in t he wi r es bet ween PCM connect or
t er mi nal A1 and t he dr i ver ' s under -dash f use/r el ay
(cont' d)
14-149
23. Cl ear the DTC wi t h t he HDS. ,
at l east 1 sec ond. Then t est -dr i ve t he vehi c l e i n 2nd
gear wi t h t he shi ft l ever i n D f or at l east 1 s ec ond.
t he wi r e bet ween shi f t sol enoi d val ve D and t he PCM,
NO- Go to st ep 26.
26. Moni t or t he OBD st at us f or P0982 in the DTCs MENU
wi t h t he HDS.
shi f t sol enoi d val ve D and t he PCM, t hen go to st ep 1.
28. Updat e t he PCM if it does not have the latest sof t war e
(see page 11-7).
29. St art t he engi ne wi t h t he shi f t l ever in P, and wai t for
at l east 1 sec ond. Then t est -dr i ve the vehi cl e in 2nd
YES - Ch ec k f or i ntermi ttent shor t to body gr ound in
t he wi r e bet ween shi ft sol enoi d val ve D and t he PCM.
PCM (see page 11-7), t hen go to st ep 29. if t he PCM
was subst i t ut ed, go to et ar * -J _
NO- Go to st ep 31.
wi t h t he HDS.
shi f t sol enoi d val ve D and t he PCM. If t he PCM was
go to st ep 29.
14-150
<3
DTC P0983: Open In Shi ft Sol enoi d Val ve D
Ci rcui t
NOTE:
t r ansmi ssi on.
3. St art t he engi ne wi t h t he shi f t l ever i n P, and wai t for
NO- Go to st ep 5.
5. Sel ec t Shi f t Sol enoi d Val ve D i n t he Mi sc el l aneous
Test Menu, and t est shi ft sol enoi d val ve D wi t h t he
HDS.
NO- Go to st ep 8.
t he syst em i s OK at t hi s t i me. Chec k for poor
sol enoi d val ve D and t he PCM. If t he HDS i ndi cat es
8. Tur n t he i gni t i on swi t c h to LOCK (0).
12. Measur e t he vol t age bet ween PCM c onnec t or
t ermi nal A1 and body gr ound.
NO-Chec k for a bl own No. 10 f use (10 A) i n t he
dr i ver ' s under -dash f use/r el ay box. If t he f use i s
bl own, r epl ace it. If it bl ows agai n, r epai r shor t i n t he
No.10 (10 A) dr i ver ' s under -dash f use ci r cui t . If t he
f use i s OK , r epai r open i n t he wi r e bet ween PCM
connect or t er mi nal A1 and t he dr i ver ' s under -dash
(cont ' d)
14-151
15. Di sc onnec t PCM c onnec t or B (49P).
16. Measur e t he r esi st anc e bet ween PCM c onnec t or
1
11 12 13 14M5 16 17118 19
22
29
23 24
S I
31l 32l 33l 34l 35i 36t/
5^1
40 \/\7w{X\ 45146J 47
9 10
21
27
33
S HD (GRN/ RED)
28
0
Is t here 12-25 O?
NO- Go to st ep 17.
t er mi nal No. 8.
SHIF T S OL ENOI D WI RE
HARNE S S CONNECTOR
1 2 3
/
5 6 7 8
S HC
( GRN/ RED)
J 1 l /
' 3 | 4 | / ! / | 7 | 8 9 11011|
1
11 12 13 1 4 1 5 16 1 7 1 8 19
/
'21
1
22 23 24
><
25
><
26 27 28
1
29
/
31 3 2 3 3 34 3 5 3 6
/
3
/
4 0 | / / l ( 4 3 ) [ / | 4 5 | 4 6 | 4 7 4
l /1l
Wire side of
female terminals
S HC (GRN/RED!
Terminal side of
female terminals
c onnec t or , t hen go to st ep 21.
14-179).
14-152
20. Chec k for cont i nui t y bet ween shi ft sol enoi d wi r e
har ness connect or t ermi nal No. 8 and t he shi ft
sol enoi d val ve D connect or t er mi nal .
SHIF T SOLENOID WIRE
HARNESS CONNECTOR
SHIF T SOLENOID
VALVE D
CONNECTOR
1 3
/
5 6 7
c
o

-
SHD (Y EL)
Terminal side of
male terminals
Wire side of
female terminals
YES - Repl ac e shi ft sol enoi d val ve D (see page 14-179),
24. St ar t t he engi ne wi t h t he shi ft l ever in P, and wai t for
at l east 1 sec ond. Then t est -dr i ve t he vehi c l e in 2nd
gear wi t h t he shi ft l ever in D for at l east 1 sec ond.
bet ween shi ft sol enoi d val ve D and t he PCM, t hen go
to st ep 1.
NO- Go to st ep 26.
sol enoi d val ve D and t he PCM, t hen go to st ep 1. If t he
(cont' d)
14-153
(see page 11-7).
29. St ar t t he engi ne wi t h t he shi ft l ever in P, and. wai t f or
at l east 1 sec ond. Then t est -dri ve t he vehi c l e i n 2nd
bet ween shi ft sol enoi d val ve D and t he PCM. If t he
PCM was updat ed, subst i t ut e a known-good PCM,
t hen go to st ep 29. If t he PCM was subst i t ut ed, go t o
st ep 1. (see page 11-7)
NO- Go to st ep 31.
or Conf i r med DTCs wer e i ndi cat ed in st ep 30, go t o
sol enoi d val ve D and t he PCM. If t he PCM was
go to st ep 29.
DTC P0985: Shor t in Shi f t Sol enoi d Val ve E
Ci rcui t
NOTE:
Thi s c ode i s c aus ed by an el ect ri cal ci rcui t pr obl em
t r ansmi ssi on.
NO- Go to st ep 5.
Test Menu, and t est shi ft sol enoi d val ve E wi t h t he .
HDS.
NO- Go to st ep 8.
6. St art t he engi ne wi t h t he shi ft l ever i n P, and wai t f or
shor t to body gr ound in t he wi r e bet ween shi ft
sol enoi d val ve E and t he PCM. If t he HDS i ndi cat es
14-154
9. J ump t he S CS li ne wi t h the HDS.
1 ^
3 | 4 M / J 7 ! 8 9 | 1 0 |
1
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
/
21
1
22 23 24
><
25
><
26 27 28
1
29
/
31 3 2 3 3 J4 3 5 3 6
/
38
/
/ Ml /
] 45| 46| 47
481/ |
SHE (Y EL)
Is t here less t han 12 O?
NO- Go to st ep 22.
12. Di sc onnec t t he shi ft sol enoi d wi r e har ness connect or .
13. Chec k for cont i nui t y bet ween PCM c onnec t or t er mi nal
( j l l / | 3 | 4 M / | J i p M
f |11 12 13 14 15 16 17| 18 1 9 / | 2 1
22 23
29 / 31 32 33 34 35 36
25
SHE (Y EL)
40 l / l / | ( 4 3 ) p 145146^ 47148\/ \
27 28
3 8 /
PCM c onnec t or t er mi nal B25 and t he shi ft sol enoi d
NO- Go to st ep 14.
14. Inspect shi ft sol enoi d val ve E and t he shi ft sol enoi d
15. Repl ac e ei t her shi ft sol enoi d val ve E or t he shi ft
(cont' d)
14-155
at l east 1 sec ond. Then shi ft t o N, and wai t f or at l east
1 sec ond.
YE S - Ch ec k f or i ntermi ttent shor t to body gr ound i n
t he wi r e bet ween shi f t sol enoi d val ve E and t he PCM,
NO- Go to st ep 21.
shi f t sol enoi d val ve E and t he PCM, t hen go to st ep 1.
If t he HDS i ndi cat es NOT COMPL ETED, go t o st ep 19.
(see page 11-7).
at l east 1 sec ond. Then shi f t t o N, and wai t f or at l east
1 s ec ond.
YE S - Ch ec k f or i nt ermi t t ent shor t t o body gr ound i n
t he wi r e bet ween shi f t sol enoi d val ve E and t he PCM.
shi f t sol enoi d val ve E and t he PCM. If t he PCM was
go to st ep 24.
14-156
DTC P0986: Open in Shi ft Sol enoi d Val ve E
Ci rcui t
NOTE:
Bef ore you t r oubl eshoot , record all f r eeze dat a and
t r ansmi ssi on.
3. St art t he engi ne wi t h t he shi ft l ever in N, and wai t f or
NO- Go to st ep 5.
Test Menu, and t est shi ft sol enoi d val ve E wi t h t he
HDS.
NO- Go to st ep 8.
6. St ar t t he engi ne wi t h t he shi ft l ever in N, and wai t f or
sol enoi d val ve E and t he PCM. If t he HDS i ndi cat es
B E
_hl/f3|4|/W
8 9 Mo |
1
11 1213 14|15 16
!
7 1
5
19
/
21
1
22 23J24 25
><
26 27 28
1
29 /J 31 32|33 J4 35 36
/
38
l
4 0
I / ]/
145| 46| 47
S HE (YEL )
Is t here 12-25 D?
NO- Go to st ep 12.
(cont ' d)
14-157
B25 and shi f t sol enoi d wi r e har ness connect or
t er mi nal No. 3.
SHIFT S OL ENOI D WI RE
HARNES S CONNECTOR
S HE
1 2 3
/
5 6 7 8
Terminal side of
female terminals
Wire side of
female terminals
14-179).
15. Chec k for cont i nui t y bet ween shi f t sol enoi d wi r e
har ness connect or t er mi nal No. 3 and t he shi f t
sol enoi d val ve E connect or t er mi nal .
SHI FT S OL ENOI D WI RE
HARNES S CONNECTOR
SHI FT S OL ENOI D
VA L VE E
CONNECTOR
S HE (RED)
1
C
M
3
/
5
C
D
7 8
Terminal side of Wire side of
female terminals
YES - Repl ac e shi ft sol enoi d val ve E (see page 14-179),
14-158
19. St art t he engi ne, wi t h t he shi f t l ever in P, and wai t f or
at l east 1 sec ond. Then shi f t to N, and wai t f or at l east
1 sec ond.
bet ween shi f t sol enoi d val ve E and t he PCM, t hen go
to st ep 1.
NO- Go to st ep 21.
connect i ons or l oose t er mi nal s bet ween shi f t
sol enoi d val ve E and t he PCM, t hen go to st ep 1. If t he
(see page 11-7).
24. St ar t t he engi ne, wi t h t he shi f t l ever in P, and wai t for
at l east 1 sec ond. Then shi ft to N, and wai t f or at l east
1 sec ond.
bet ween shi ft sol enoi d val ve E and t he PCM. If t he
NO- Go to st ep 26.
NO-l f t he HDS i ndi cat es FAI L ED, check for poor
sol enoi d val ve E and t he PCM. If the PCM was
go to st ep 24.
14-159
DTC P16C0: PCM A/T Cont rol Syst em
Incompl et e Updat e
NOTE:
Thi s code i s i ndi cat ed when PCM updat i ng i s
i ncompl et e.
Do not t ur n t he i gni ti on swi t c h t o L OCK (0) or
A CCE S S ORY (I) whi l e updat i ng t he PCM. If you t urn
t he i gni t i on swi t c h to L OCK (0) or A CCE S S ORY (I)
bef ore c ompl et i on, t he PCM c an be damaged.
1. Updat e t he PCM (see page 11-203).
Is DTC P16C0 indicat ed?
YES - Repl ac e t he PCM (see page 11- 204) . !
NO-PCM updat i ng i s c o mpl et e. !
DTC P1717: Open in Tr ansmi ssi on Range
Swi t ch ATPRVS Swi t ch Ci rcui t
NOTE:
t r ansmi ssi on.
2. Shi f t to R, and check t he A/ T R Swi t c h i n t he Dat a Li st
wi t h t he HDS.
Is t he A/T R Swit ch ON?
r- - * .- . .- *+
NO-Chec k f or proper t r ansmi ssi on range swi t ch
i nst al l at i on (see page 14-240), adj ust t he shi ft cabl e
(see page 14-232), t hen r ec h ec k . !
3. Chec k t he Rever se Swi t c h (ATPRVS) in t he Dat a Li st
wi t h t he HDS.
Is t he Reverse Swit ch (ATPRVS) ON?
t i m e . !
NO- Go to st ep 4.
5. Di sconnect t he t r ansmi ssi on r ange swi t ch connect or .
14-160
7. Measur e t he vol t age bet ween t r ansmi ssi on r ange
swi t ch connect or t er mi nal s No. 1 and No. 10.
ATPRVS (WHT/ RED)
10
GND (BLK)
t er mi nal B23 and t he t r ansmi ssi on r ange swi t c h, t hen
go to st ep 9.
8. Chec k f or cont i nui t y bet ween t r ansmi ssi on r ange
swi t ch connect or t er mi nal s No. 1 and No. 10 when t he
shi ft l ever i s in R, and when t he shi ft l ever i s shi f t ed to
any posi t i on ot her t han R.
12. St ar t t he engi ne wi t h t he shi f t l ever in P. Shi f t to N
f r om P, t hen shi ft to R, and wai t for at l east 2 sec onds.
bet ween t he t r ansmi ssi on r ange swi t ch and t he PCM,
NO- Go to st ep 14.
t r ansmi ssi on range swi t ch and t he PCM, t hen go to
st ep 12.
ATPRVS
1 2 3 4 5
6 7 8 9 10
GND
Is t here cont inuit y when t he shift lever is in R, and no
cont inuit y when t he shift lever is shift ed t o any posit ion
ot her t han R?
NO-Repl ac e t he t r ansmi ssi on range swi t c h (see page
(cont' d)
14-161
1 5 . Rec onnec t all c onnec t or s.
16. Updat e t he PCM If it does not have t he l at est sof t war e
(see page 11-7).
17. St art t he engi ne wi t h t he shi f t l ever in P. Shi f t to N
f r om P, t hen shi ft to R, and wai t f or at l east 2 s ec onds .
bet ween t he t r ansmi ssi on r ange swi t c h and t he PCM.
PCM (see page 11 -7), t hen go to st ep 17. If t he PCM
NO- Go to st ep 19,
YE S - l f t he PCM was updat ed, t r oubl eshoot i ng j s
t r ansmi ssi on r ange swi t ch and t he PCM. If t he PCM
page 11 - 1 ) , t hen go to st ep 17. If t he PCM was
DTC P1730; Probl em in Shi f t Control Syst em:
Shi f t Sol enoi d Val ves A or D St uck OFF
Shi f t Sol enoi d Val ve B St uck ON
Shi f t Val ves A, B, or D St uck
t he Gener al Tr oubl eshoot i ng Inf ormat i on (see page
14-4).
st r ai ner , ms puui the st r ai ner f or met al debr i s or
mat erial?
st ep 4.
9. Sel ec t Shi f t Sol enoi d Val ve A i n t he Mi sc el l aneous
Test Menu, and check t hat shi ft sol enoi d val ve A
NO-Repl ac e shi f t sol enoi d val ve A (see page 14-179),
14-162
Test Menu, and c hec k that shi ft sol enoi d val ve B
11. Sel ec t Shi f t Sol enoi d Val ve D in t he Mi sc el l aneous
Test Menu, and c hec k that shi ft sol enoi d val ve D
NO-Repl ac e shi f t sol enoi d val ve D (see page 14-179),
t he t r ansmi ssi on shi f t t hrough al l f i ve gear s.
YES - Repai r t he hydr aul i c syst em rel at ed t o shi ft
val ves A, B, and D, or r epl ace t he t r ansmi ssi on, t hen
go to st ep 16.
16. Test -dr i ve t he vehi c l e wi th t he shi ft l ever in D, and let
t he t r ansmi ssi on shi f t t hrough al l f i ve gear s.
NO- Go to st ep 18.
NO-l f t he HDS i ndi cat es FAIL ED, go t o st ep 8. If t he
DTC P1731: Probl em in Shi ft Cont rol Syst em:
Shi f t Sol enoi d Val ve E St uck ON
Shi f t Val ve E St uck
A/T Cl ut ch Pr essur e Cont r ol Sol enoi d Val ve A St uck
OFF
3. Dr ai n t he ATF (see st ep 3 on page 14-192) t hrough a
mat erial?
st ep 4.
6. Test -dr i ve t he vehi cl e wi t h t he shi f t l ever in D, and let
t he t r ansmi ssi on shi ft t hr ough al l f i ve gear s.
NO-l f t he HDS i ndi cat es PAS S ED, i ntermi ttent f ai l ure,
8. Cl ear t he DTC wi th t he HDS.
Test Menu, and check that shi ft sol enoi d val ve E
oper at es wi t h the HDS.
NO-Repl ac e shi ft sol enoi d val ve E (see page 14-179),
(cont' d)
14-163
HDS.
t i me. B
accor di ng t o t he t est r esul t , if t he HDS has not
det er mi ned t he c aus e of t he f ai l ur e, go t o st ep 11. If
11. Inspect AfT cl ut ch pr essur e cont rol sol enoi d val ve A
(see page 14-182).
Does A/T dut ch pressure cont rol solenoid valve A work
properly?
YES - Repai r t he hydr aul i c syst em rel at ed to shi f t val ve
E, or r epl ace t he t r ansmi ssi on, t hen go to st ep 14.
NO-Repl ac e AfT cl ut ch pr essur e cont rol sol enoi d
val ve A (see page 14-184), t hen go t o st ep 12.
Is DTC P1731indicat ed?
NO- Go to st ep 16.
NO-l f t he HDS i ndi cat es FAI L ED, go t o st ep 8. If t he
Shi f t Sol enoi d Val ves B or C St uck ON
Shi f t Val ves B or C St uck
NOTE: Bef or e you t r oubl eshoot , r ecor d ai l f r eeze dat a
l evel , and c hec k for f l ui d l eaks.
mat erial?
st ep 4.
Test Menu, and check t hat shi ft sol enoi d val ve B
14-164
10. Sel ec t Shi f t Sol enoi d Val ve C in t he Mi sc el l aneous
Test Menu, and check that shi f t sol enoi d val ve C
st ep 15.
NO- Go to st ep 17.
Shi f t Sol enoi d Val ve D St uck ON
Shi f t Val ve D St uc k
A/ T Cl ut ch Pr essur e Cont r ol Sol enoi d Val ve C St uck
OFF
3. Drai n t he ATF (see st ep 3 on page 14-192) t hrough a
mat erial?
st ep 4.
NO-l f t he HDS i ndi cat es PAS S ED, i ntermi ttent f ai l ure,
t he syst em i s OK at t hi s t i me. If the HDS i ndi cat es NOT
9. Sel ec t Shi f t Sol enoi d Val ve D in t he Mi scel l aneous
Test Menu, and c hec k that shi ft sol enoi d val ve D
NO-Repl ac e shi ft sol enoi d val ve D (see page 14-179),
(cont' d)
14-165
Val ve C i n t he Mi sc el l aneous Test Menu, and t est A/ T
HDS.
11. Inspect A/ T cl ut ch pr essur e cont rol sol enoi d val ve C
(see page 14-184).
Does AIT clut ch pressure cont rol solenoid valve C work
properly?
YES - Repai r t he hydr aul i c syst em rel at ed t o shi ft val ve
D, or r epl ace t he t r ansmi ssi on, t hen go to st ep 14.
NO-Repl ac e A/ T cl ut ch pr essur e cont rol sol enoi d C
NO- Go to st ep 16.
Shi f t Sol enoi d Val ves B o r C St uck OFF
Shi f t Val ves B o r C St uck
mat erial?
st ep 4.
Test Menu, and check that shi ft sol enoi d val ve B
14-166
Test Menu, and check t hat shi ft sol enoi d val ve C
st ep 15.
NO- Go to st ep 17.
DTC U0029: F-CAN Malfuncti on (F-CAN
BUS-OFF (PCM))
3. Chec k for Pendi ng or Conf i r med DTCs in t he PGM-FI
Syst em wi t h t he HDS.
Is DTC U0029 indicat ed in t he PGM-FI SYSTEM?
YE S - Go to t he DTC U0029 t r oubl eshoot i ng in t he
PGM-FI S YS TE M (see page 11-167)J I
NO- Go to st ep 4.
4. Chec k for Pendi ng or Conf i r med DTCs in t he A/ T
Is DTC U0029 indicat ed in t he AIT SYSTEM?
(see page 11-7).
7. Check for Pendi ng or Conf i r med DTCs in t he A/ T
NO- Go to st ep 8.
(c ont ' d)
14-167
8. Moni t or t he OBD S TATUS for U0029 in t he DTCs
c onnec t i ons or l oose t er mi nal s at t he PCM. If t he PCM
DTC U0122: F-CAN Malfuncti on (PCM-VSA
Modul at or-Cont rol Unit)
Sy s t em wi t h t he HDS.
Is DTC U0122 indicated in the PGM-FI SYSTEM?
PGM-FI S YS TE M (see page 11-168).B
N O- G" tn c t o n A
4. Chec k f or Pendi ng or Conf i r med DTCs in t he A/T
Is DTC U0122 indicated in the AIT SYSTEM?
i ndi cat ed, go to t he i ndi cat ed DTCs -
(see page 11-7).
7. Chec k f or Pendi ng or Conf i r med DTCs i n t he A/T
Is DTC U0122 indicated in the AIT SYSTEM?
bet ween t he VS A modul at or-cont rol uni t and t he
PCM. If t he PCM was updat ed, subst i t ut e a
NO- Go to st ep 8.
14-168
8. Moni t or t he OBD S TATUS for U0122 in t he DTCs
or Conf i r med DTCs wer e i ndi cat ed in st ep 7, go to t he
connect i ons or l oose t er mi nal s bet ween t he VS A
modul at or-cont rol uni t and t he PCM. If t he PCM was
11-7), t hen go to st ep 6. If t he PCM was subst i t ut ed, go
t o st ep 1. If t he HDS i ndi cat es NOT COMPL ETED, got o
st ep 6.
DTC U0155: F-CAN Malfuncti on (PCM-Gauge
Cont rol Module)
Syst em wi t h t he HDS.
Is DTC U0155 indicat ed in t he PGM-FI SYSTEM?
PGM-FI S YS TE M (see page 11-169)11
NO- Go to st ep 4.
4. Chec k for Pendi ng or Conf i r med DTCs in t he A/ T
Is DTC U0155 indicat ed in t he A/T SYSTEM?
(see page 11-7).
bet ween t he gauge cont rol modul e and t he PCM. If
NO- Go to st ep 8.
(cont' d)
14-169
8. Moni t or t he OBD S TATUS f or U0155 i n t he DTCs
or Conf i r med DTCs wer e i ndi cat ed i n st ep 7, go t o t he
c onnec t i ons or l oose t er mi nal s bet ween t he gauge
cont r ol modul e and t he PCM. If t he PCM was updat ed,
go to st ep 6. If t he PCM was subst i t ut ed, go t o st ep 1. If
Road Test
1. Appl y t he parki ng br ake, and bl ock both rear wheel s.
St art t he engi ne, and war m it up t o nor mal oper at i ng
2. Shi f t to D whi l e pr essi ng t he brake pedal . Pr ess t he
accel er at or pedal , and r el ease it suddenl y; t he engi ne
shoul d not st al l .
3. Repeat st ep 2 i n ai l shi ft l ever posi t i ons.
4. Connec t t he HDS t o t he DL C (A) l ocat ed under t he
dr i ver ' s si de of t he dashboar d.
A
5. Tur n t he i gni t i on swi t ch to ON (II), and go to t he A/ T
Dat a Li st . Make sur e t he HDS c ommuni c at es wi t h t he
PCM. If it does not, go to t he DL C ci rcui t
14-170
6. Prepare t he HDS to take a HIGH S PEED S NAPS HOT
(refer to t he HDS user ' s gui de for mor e det ai l s if
needed):
Sel ec t t he Hi gh Speed i con.
Sel ec t t hese par amet er s:
- Vehi cl e Speed
- Out put Shaf t (Count ershaf t ) Speed (rpm)
- Input Shaf t (Mai nshaf t ) Speed (rpm)
- Engi ne Speed
- TP Sensor
- A
n D
Sensor A (V)
- ETR
- Bat t e.y Vol t age
- Shi f t Cont rol
- Br ake Swi t ch
Set t he Tr i gger Type to Par amet er .
Adj ust t he Par amet er setti ng to APP Sens or A
above 1.2 V.
Set t he recordi ng t i me to 60 sec onds.
Set t he t ri gger poi nt to 30 sec onds.
7. Fi nd a sui t abl e l evel r oad. When you ar e r eady to
begi n t he t es t pr ess OK on t he HDS.
8. Moni t or the HDS and accel er at e qui ckl y unti l t he APP
Sens or A r eads 1.3 V. Mai nt ai n a st eady throttle unti l
t he t r ansmi ssi on shi f t s to 5th gear , t hen sl ow t he
vehi c l e and c ome to a st op.
9. S av e t he snapshot if t he enti re event was r ecor ded or
i nc r ease t he recordi ng t i me set t i ng as nec essar y and
repeat st ep 8.
10. Adj ust t he par amet er setti ng to 2.4 V. Test -dr i ve t he
vehi c l e agai n. Whi l e moni t ori ng t he HDS, accel er at e
qui ckl y unti l t he APP Sensor A r eads 2.5 V. Mai nt ai n a
st eady throttle until t he t r ansmi ssi on shi f t s to 5th gear
(or r easonabl e speed), t hen sl ow t he vehi cl e and
c ome to a st op.
11. Sav e t he snapshot if the ent i re event was r ecor ded or
i ncr ease t he r ecor di ng t i me set t i ng as nec essar y and
repeat st ep 10.
12. Accel er at e qui ckl y until t he accel er at or pedal i s to t he
f l oor. Mai nt ai n a st eady pedal unti l t he t r ansmi ssi on
shi f t s to 3rd gear , t hen sl ow t o a st op, and save t he
snapshot .
13. Revi ew eac h snapshot i ndi vi dual l y, and c ompar e t he
Shi f t Cont r ol , t he APP S ens or A vol t age, and the
Vehi cl e Speed to t he f ol l owi ng t abl e:
' 08-09 model s wi t h t he K24Z2 engi ne
Upshi f t : D posi t i on
APP S ens or A vol t age: 1.3 V
1s t 2nd 9- 11 mph ( 14- 18 km/h)
2nd 3r d 17- 21 mph ( 27- 33 km/h)
3rd 4th 2 5 - 3 0 mph (41 - 4 9 km/h)
4th 5th 3 9 - 4 5 mph ( 62- 72 km/h)
Lock-up ON 3 0 - 3 5 mph ( 48- 56 km/h)
1s t 2nd 19- 23 mph ( 31- 37 km/h)
2nd 3rd 3 8- 4 4 mph ( 61- 71 km/h)
3rd 4th 5 5 - 6 3 mph ( 89- 101 km/h)
4th 5th 109- 119 mph ( 176- 192 km/h)
Lock-up ON 116- 126 mph ( 186- 202 km/h)
Ful l y-opened t hr ot t l e
1s t 2nd 3 7- 4 3 mph ( 59- 69 km/h)
2nd 3rd 6 7- 73 mph ( 106- 118 km/h)
3rd 4th 102- 112 mph ( 164- 180 km/h)
Downshi f t : D posi t i on
Lock-up OFF 2 9 - 3 4 mph ( 47- 55 km/h)
5th 4th 2 9 - 3 5 mph ( 47- 57 km/h)
4th 3rd 18- 22 mph ( 29- 35 km/h)
3rd 1st 4 - 8 mph ( 7- 13 km/h)
Lock-up OFF | 71 - 8 0 mph ( 115- 129 km/h)
5th 4th 113- 123 mph ( 182- 198 km/h)
4th 3rd 86 - 9 4 mph ( 138- 152 km/h)
3rd 2nd 5 1 - 5 8 mph ( 82- 94 km/h)
2nd 1st 25- 31 mph ( 40- 50 km/h)
(cont ' d)
14-171
Read Test (cont' d)
' 08-09 model s wi t h t he K24Z3 engi ne
1s t - * 2nd 9- 11 mph ( 14- 18 km/h)
2nd - * 3rd 17- 21 mph ( 27- 33 km/h)
3rd 4th 2 5 - 3 0 mph (41 - 4 9 km/h)
4th - * 5th 3 9 - 4 5 mph ( 62- 72 km/h)
Lock-up ON 3 0 - 3 5 mph ( 48- 56 km/h)
APP Sens or A raStage: 2.5 V
1s t - * 2nd 21 - 2 5 mph ( 34- 40 km/h)
2nd 3rd 4 0 - 4 5 mph ( 64- 72 km/h)
3rd - * 4th 6 5 - 72 mph ( 104- 116 km/h)
4th - * 5th 114- 124 mph ( 184- 200 km/h)
Lock-up ON 119- 130 mph ( 192- 210 km/h)
1s t - * 2nd 3 9 - 4 5 mph ( 62- 72 km/h)
2nd - * 3rd fiR-72 mph ( 104- 116 km/h)
3rd 4th 102- 112 mph ( 164- 180 km/h)
5th ~* 4th 2 9 - 3 5 mph ( 47- 57 km/h)
4th - * 3rd 1 8- 2 2 mph ( 29- 35 km/h)
3rd ~* 1st 4 - 8 mph ( 7- 1 3 km/h)
APP S ens o r A vol t age: 2.5 V
Lock-up OFF | 84 - 9 3 mph ( 135- 149 km/h)
5th - * 4th 113- 123 mph ( 182- 198 km/h)
4th - * 3rd 83- 91 mph ( 133- 147 km/h)
. 3rd 2nd 51 - 5 8 mph ( 82- 94 km/h)
2nd 1st 25- 31 mph ( 40- 50 km/h)
' 10 model wi t h t he K24Z2 engi ne
APP S ens o r A vol t age: 1.3 V
1s t - * 2nd 9- 11 mph ( 14- 18 km/h)
2nd ~* 3rd 17- 21 mph ( 27- 33 km/h)
3rd - * 4th 2 5 - 3 0 mph (41 - 4 9 km/h)
4th - * 5th 3 9 - 4 5 mph ( 62- 72 km/h)
Lock-up ON 3 0 - 3 5 mph ( 48- 56 km/h)
1s t - * 2nd 19- 23 mph ( 31- 37 km/h)
2nd ~* 3rd 3 8- 4 4 mph (61 - 71 km/h)
3rd - * 4th 5 5 - 6 3 mph ( 89- 101 km/h)
4th - * 5th 109- 119 mph ( 176- 192 km/h)
Lock-up ON 116- 126 mph ( 186- 202 km/h)
1s t - * 2nd 3 7- 4 3 mph ( 60- 70 km/h)
2nd - * 3rd 6 6 - 74 mph ( 107- 119 km/h)
3rd - * 4th 103- 113 mph ( 166- 182 km/h)
5th - * 4th 2 9 - 3 5 mph ( 47- 57 km/h)
4th - * 3rd 2 0 - 2 4 mph ( 32- 38 km/h)
3rd 1st 4 - 8 mph ( 7- 13 km/h)
Lock-up OFF | 6 7- 75 mph ( 108- 120 km/h)
APP Sens or A vol t age: 4.5 V
5th - * 4th 113- 123 mph ( 182- 198 km/h)
4th 3rd 86 - 9 4 mph ( 138- 152 km/h)
3rd - * 2nd 51 - 5 8 mph ( 82- 94 km/h)
2nd - * 1st 25- 31 mph ( 40- 50 km/h)
14-172
' 10 model wi t h t he K24Z3 engi ne
APP S ens or A voltage: 1.3
1st 2nd 9- 11 mph ( 14- 18 km/h)
2nd Sr d 17- 21 mph ( 27- 33 km/h)
3rd 4th 2 5 - 3 0 mph (41 - 4 9 km/h)
4th 5th 3 9 - 4 5 mph ( 62- 72 km/h)
Lock-up ON 3 0 - 3 5 mph ( 48- 56 km/h)
APP Sensor A voltage: 2.5 V
1st 2nd 1 9 - 2 3 mph (31 - 3 7 km/h)
2nd 3rd 3 8- 4 4 mph ( 61- 71 km/h)
3rd 4th 5 5 - 6 3 mph ( 89- 101 km/h)
4th 5th 109- 119 mph ( 176- 192 km/h)
Lock-up ON 116- 126 mph ( 186- 202 km/h)
Fully-opened throttle
1st 2nd 3 9 - 4 5 mph ( 62- 72 km/h)
2nd 3rd 70 - 78 mph ( 113- 125 km/h)
3rd 4th 103- 113 mph ( 166- 182 km/h)
Downshift: D position
5th 4th 2 9 - 3 5 mph ( 47- 57 km/h) .
4th 3rd 2 0 - 2 4 mph ( 32- 38 km/h)
3rd 1st 4 - 8 mph ( 7- 13 km/h)
Lock-up OFF | 6 7- 75 mph ( 108- 120 km/h)
Fully-opened throttle
5th 4th 113- 123 mph ( 182- 198 km/h)
4th 3r d 86 - 9 4 mph ( 138- 152 km/h)
3rd 2nd 5 1 - 5 8 mph ( 82- 94 km/h)
2nd 1s t 25- 31 mph ( 40- 50 km/h)
14. Dri ve t he vehi c l e i n 4t h or 5th gear wi t h t he shi ft l ever
i n D, t hen shi f t t o 2. The vehi c l e shoul d i mmedi at el y
begi n t o sl ow down f r om t he engi ne br aki ng.
15. Shi f t t o 1, accel er at e f r om a st op to full t hrot t l e, and
check f or abnor mal noi se and cl ut ch sl i ppage.
Upshi f t s shoul d not oc c ur i n t hi s posi t i on.
16. Shi f t t o 2, accel er at e f r om a st op to full t hrot t l e, and
c hec k f or abnor mal noi se and cl ut ch sl i ppage.
Upshi f t s and downshi f t s shoul d not oc c ur i n t hi s
posi t i on.
17. Shi f t t o R, accel er at e f r om a st op at full throttle
moment ar i l y, and c hec k f or abnor mal noi se and
cl ut ch sl i ppage.
18. Park t he vehi c l e on an upwar d sl ope (about
16-degr ees), appl y t he br ake, and shi ft i nto P. Rel ease
t he br ake; t he vehi c l e shoul d not move.
NOTE: Al way s use t he parki ng brake t o hol d t he
vehi c l e when st opped on an i ncl i ne i n gear .
Dependi ng on t he gr ade of t he i ncl i ne, t he vehi c l e
c oul d roll bac kwar ds if t he brake i s r el eased.
14-173
StaSS Speed Test
1. Wake sur e t he t r ansmi ssi on f l ui d i s f i l l ed to t he pr oper
l evel (see page 14-191).
2. Appl y t he parki ng br ake, and bl ock all f our wheel s.
3. Connect t he HDS to t he DL C (A) l ocat ed under t he
A
4. Tur n t he i gni ti on swi t c h to ON (II), and go to t he A/ T
PCM. if it does not, go to t he DL C ci r cui t
5. Make sur e t he A/ C swi t c h i s OFF.
7. Shi f t to 2 whi l e pr essi ng t he brake pedal f i r ml y, t hen
pr ess t he accel er at or pedal f or 6 to 8 s ec onds , and
note t he engi ne speed. Do not move t he shi ft l ever or
t ake your foot off of t he brake pedal , whi l e r ai si ng t he
engi ne speed.
8. Al l ow 2 mi nut es f or c ool i ng, t hen repeat t he t est wi t h
t he shi ft l ever in D, 1, and R.
NOTE:
Do not t est st al l speed f or mor e t han 10 sec onds at a
t i me.
St al l speed t est s shoul d be used for di agnost i c
pur poses onl y.
St al l speed t est r esul t s shoul d be t he s ame in D, 2, 1,
and R.
Do not t est st al l speed wi t h t he A/ T oi l pr essur e
gauges i nst al l ed.
St al l Speed rpm
Spec i f i c at i on: 2,100 r pm
Ser vi c e Li mi t : 1,9502,250 r pm
S. if t he st al l speeds ar e out of t he ser vi c e li mi t, refer to
t he pr obl ems and pr obabl e c aus es l i st ed in t he t abl e.
Pr obl em Pr obabl e Caus es
St al l speed rpm hi gh
i n D, 2, 1, and R
ATF pump output l ow
Cl ogged ATF st r ai ner
Regul at or val ve st uck
Sl i ppi ng cl ut ch
i n 1
Sl i ppage of 1st cl ut ch
i n 2
Sl i ppage of 2nd cl ut ch
i n R
Sl i ppage 4th cl ut ch
St al l speed rpm l ow
i n D, 2, 1, and R
Engi ne output l ow
Engi ne throttle val ve
c l osed
Tor que conver t er
one-way cl ut ch
sl i ppi ng
14-174
^/ y / ^
1
Pressure Test
. A/ T Oi l Pr essur e Gauge Set 07406-0020400 or
07406-0020401
. A/ T Pr essur e Hose, 2,210 mm 07MAJ-PY4011A
. A/ T Pr essur e Adapt er 07MAJ-PY40120
NOTE:
Di sabl e t he VS A (if equi pped) by pr essi ng t he VS A
OFF button.
A B S or VS A DTC(s) may c ome on duri ng t he
t est -dr i ve. If t he A B S or VS A DTC(s) c ome on, c l ear t he
DTC(s) wi t h t he HDS.
1. Make sur e t he t r ansmi ssi on f l ui d i s f i l l ed to t he pr oper
l evel (see page 14-191).
2. Rai se t he vehi c l e on a lift, or appl y t he parki ng br ake,
bl ock both r ear wheel s , and r ai se t he front of t he
vehi c l e. Make sur e it i s sec ur el y suppor t ed.
3. Al l ow t he front wheel s to rotate f reel y.
6. Tur n t he i gni ti on swi t ch t o ON (II), and go to t he A/ T
PCM. If it does not , go to t he DL C ci rcui t
7. Connec t t he A/ T oi l pr essur e gauge to t he li ne
pr essur e i nspect i on port (A). Do not al l ow dust or
ot her f orei gn par t i cl es to ent er t he port whi l e
connect i ng t he gauge.
A / T OIL PRE S S URE
GA UGE S E T
07406-0020400 or
07406-0020401
o o o
A / T PRE S S URE
HOS E, 2,210 mm
07MAJ-PY4011A
(3 r equi r ed)
A / T PRE S S URE
ADAPTER
07MAJ-PY40120
(3 r equi r ed)
(cont' d)
14-175
Pressure Test (cont'd)
9. Hol d t he engi ne speed at 2,000 r pm wi t h t he shi f t l ever
in Po r N.
10. Measur e t he li ne pr essur e at t he l i ne pr essur e
i nspect i on port (A).
NOTE: Hi gher pr essur e may be not i ced if
measur ement s ar e t aken wi t h t he shi f t l ever i n any
posi t i on ot her t han P or N.
Pr essur e Fl ui d Pr essur e Pr essur e
St andar d Ser vi c e Li mi t
Li ne (A) 927- 985 kPa
(9. 45-10. 05 kgf /c m
2
,
134- 143 psi )
877 kPa
(8.95 kgf /c m
2
,
127 psi )
11. Tur n t he engi ne off, t hen di sc onnec t t he A/ T oi l
pr essur e gauge f r om t he l i ne pr essur e i nspect i on
port.
12. Install t he seal i ng bolt in t he li ne pr essur e i nspect i on
port wi t h a new seal i ng was her , and t i ght en t he
seal i ng bolt to 18 N-m (1.8 k g f m, 13 Ibf f t ). Do not
r euse t he ol d seal i ng washer .
13. Connec t t he A/ T oi l pr essur e gauge to t he 1st cl ut ch
pr essur e i nspect i on port (B).
14. Remove t he i ntake ai r duct and t he ai r cl eaner
housi ng, and connect t he A/ T oi l pr essur e gauge to
t he 2nd cl ut ch pr essur e i nspect i on port (C). Then
t empor ar i l y i nst al l t he ai r c l eaner housi ng and t he
i ntake ai r duct .
14-176
0
15. St ar t t he engi ne, and shi ft to D.
16. Shi f t t o 1st gear , and measur e t he 1st cl ut ch pr essur e
at t he 1st cl ut ch pr essur e i nspect i on port (B) whi l e
hol di ng t he engi ne speed at 2,000 r pm.
17. Shi f t up to 2nd gear , and measur e t he 2nd cl ut ch
pr essur e at t he 2nd cl ut ch pr essur e i nspect i on port (C)
whi l e hol di ng t he engi ne speed at 2,000 r pm.
1st cl ut ch
(B)
2nd cl ut ch
(C)
927- 985 kPa
(9. 45-10. 05 kgf /c m
2
,
134- 143 psi )
867 kPa
(8.85 kgf /c m
2
,
126 psi )
18. Tur n t he engi ne off, t hen di sc onnec t t he A/ T oi l
pr essur e gauges f r om t he 1st cl ut ch pr essur e and t he
2nd cl ut ch pr essur e i nspect i on port s.
19. Inst al l t he seal i ng bol t s i n t he 1st cl ut ch pr essur e and
t he 2nd cl ut ch pr essur e i nspect i on port s wi t h new
seal i ng was her s , and t i ght en t he seal i ng bol t s to
18 N-m (1.8 k gf m, 13 Ibf-ft). Do not r euse t he ol d
seal i ng was her s .
20. Inst al l t he ai r c l eaner housi ng and t he i ntake ai r duct .
21. Connec t t he A/ T oi l pr essur e gauge t o t he 3r d cl ut ch
pr essur e i nspect i on port (D) and t he 5th cl ut ch
pr essur e i nspect i on port (F).
22. Connec t t he A/ T oi l pr essur e gauge t o t he 4t h cl ut ch
pr essur e i nspect i on port (E).
(cont ' d)
14-177
Pressure Test (cont'd)
23. St art t he engi ne wi t h t he shi f t l ever in P, whi l e
pr essi ng t he brake pedal .
24. Shi f t t o D, and r el ease t he brake pedal ; t he
t r ansmi ssi on i s in 1st gear .
25. Pr ess t he accel er at or pedal to i nc r ease t he engi ne
speed to 2,500 r pm, t hen shi f t to 2nd gear .
26. Rel ease t he accel er at or pedal sl owl y to c l ose t he
throttle over 5 sec onds; t he engi ne speed dec r eases
to 1,000 rpm wi t h t he t r ansmi ssi on in 2nd gear .
27. Pr ess t he accel er at or pedal ver y sl owl y to i nc r ease t he
engi ne speed to 2,000 rpm over 5 s ec onds , and hol d
t he accel er at or . Shi f t t o Sr d gear , and measur e t he 3r d
cl ut ch pr essur e at t he Sr d cl ut ch pr essur e i nspect i on
port (D) whi l e hol di ng t he engi ne speed at 2,000 r pm.
28. Shi f t to 4th gear , and measur e t he 4th cl ut ch pr essur e
at t he 4th cl ut ch pr essur e i nspect i on port (E).
29. Shi f t to 5th gear , and measur e 5th cl ut ch pr essur e at
t he 5th cl ut ch pr essur e i nspect i on port (F) whi l e
hol di ng t he engi ne speed at 2,000 r pm.
3rd cl ut ch 917- 995 kPa 867 kPa
(D) (9. 35-10. 15 kgf /c m
2
, (8.85 kgf /c m
2
,
4th cl ut ch 133- 144 psi ) 126 psi )
(E)
5th cl ut ch
(F)
30. Bri ng t he engi ne back to an i dl e, t hen appl y t he brake
pedal to st op t he wheel s f r om rot at i ng.
31, Shi f t t o R, t hen r el ease t he brake pedal . Rai se t he
engi ne speed to 2,000 r pm, and measur e 4th cl ut ch
pr essur e at t he 4th cl ut ch pr essur e i nspect i on port (E).
4th cl ut ch
(E) in R
917- 995 kPa
(9. 35-10. 15 kgf /cm
2
,
133- 144 psi )
867 kPa
(8.85 kgf /c m
2
,
126 psi )
32. Tur n t he engi ne off, t hen di sconnect t he A/ T oi l
pr essur e gauges f r om t he 3r d, 4t h, and 5th cl ut ch
pr essur e i nspect i on port s.
33
34
Install t he seal i ng bolts i n t he 3r d, 4t h, and 5th cl ut ch
pr essur e i nspect i on port s wi t h new seal i ng was her s ,
and t i ght en t he seal i ng bol t s to 18 N-m (1.8 kgf -m,
13 Ibf-ft). Do not r euse t he ol d seal i ng was her s .
If any of t he pr essur es ar e out of the ser vi c e li mi t, ref er
to t he pr obl ems and pr obabl e c aus es l i st ed i n t he
t abl e.
Pr obl em Pr obabl e c aus es
No or l ow li ne
pr essur e
Tor que conver t er
ATF pump
Regul at or val ve
Tor que conver t er
c hec k val ve
Cl ogged ATF st r ai ner
No or l ow 1st cl ut ch
pr essur e
1st cl ut ch
O-r i ngs
No or l ow 2nd cl ut ch
pr essur e
2nd cl ut ch
O-r i ngs
No or l ow 3rd cl ut ch
pr essur e
3r d cl ut ch
O-r i ngs
No or l ow 4th cl ut ch
pr essur e
4th cl ut ch
O-r i ngs
pr essur e
5th cl ut ch
O-r i ngs
pr essur e i n R
Ser vo val ve
4th cl ut ch
O-r i ngs
35. Install t he spl ash shi el d.
36. Chec k t he ATF l evel (see page 14-191).
14-178
00
Shi f t Sol enoi d Val ve Test , Repl acement , and Shi f t Sol enoi d Wi re Har ness
Repl acement
1. Connect t he HDS t o t he DL C (A) l ocat ed under t he
2. Tur n t he i gni ti on swi t c h to ON (II). Make sur e t he HDS
c ommuni c at es wi t h t he PCM. If it does not go t o t he
3. Sel ec t Shi f t Sol enoi d Val ves A, B, C, D, or E i n t he
Mi sc el l aneous Test Menu on t he HDS.
4. Chec k that shi f t sol enoi d val ves A, B, C, D, or E
operat e wi t h t he HDS. A cl i cki ng sound shoul d be
hear d.
If a cl i cki ng sound i s hear d, t he val ves ar e OK. The
t est i s compl et e, di sc onnec t t he HDS.
If no cl i cki ng sound i s hear d, go t o st ep 5.
block both r ear wheel s , and r ai se t he f ront of t he
8. Measur e t he r esi st ance bet ween eac h of t he f ol l owi ng
t er mi nal s and body gr ound:
No. 1 t er mi nal : Shi f t sol enoi d val ve C
No. 2. t er mi nal : Shi f t sol enoi d val ve B
No. 3 t er mi nal : Shi f t sol enoi d val ve E
No. 5 t er mi nal : Shi f t sol enoi d val ve A
No. 8 t er mi nal : Shi f t sol enoi d val ve D
St andar d: 1 2 - 2 5 0
If t he r esi st ance i s wi t hi n t he st andar d, go t o st ep 9.
If t he r esi st ance i s out of st andar d, go to st ep 10.
9. Connec t a j umper wi r e f r om t he battery posi t i ve
t er mi nal to eac h shi f t sol enoi d wi r e har ness
connect or t er mi nal i ndi vi dual l y. A cl i cki ng sound
shoul d be hear d.
If a cl i cki ng sound i s hear d, t he val ves ar e OK. The
t est i s compl et e, r econnect t he connect or , t hen
i nst al l t he spl ash shi el d.
(cont ' d)
14-179
Shi f t Sol enoi d Val ve Test , Repl acement , and Shi f t Sol enoi d Wi re Har ness
Repl acement (cont' d)
10. Remove t he dr ai n pl ug (A), and dr ai n t he ATF.
A
18x1.5 mm
49 N-m
(5.0 kgf-m, 36 Ibf-ft)
11. Rei nst al l t he dr ai n pl ug wi t h a new seal i ng was her (B).
13. Remove t he shi f t sol enoi d val ve c over (A), t he dowel
pi ns (B), and t he gasket (C).
6x1. 0 mm
12 Nm
(1.2 kgf m, 8.7 Ibf-ft)
14. Di sc onnec t t he shi f t sol enoi d val ve c onnec t or s f r om
t he shi f t sol enoi d val ve(s) t hat di d not cl i ck.
15. Measur e t he r esi st anc e of eac h shi ft sol enoi d val ve
bet ween t he connect or t er mi nal s and body gr ound:
St andar d: 1 2 - 2 5 0
If t he r esi st anc e i s wi t hi n t he st andar d, go t o st ep
16.
If t he r esi st anc e i s out of st andar d, go t o st ep 18.
16. Connec t a j umper wi r e f r om t he battery posi t i ve
t er mi nal t o eac h shi f t sol enoi d val ve connect or
t er mi nal i ndi vi dual l y. A cl i cki ng sound shoul d be
hear d.
If a cl i cki ng sound i s hear d, go to st ep 17.
17. Remove t he bolt sec ur i ng t he shi f t sol enoi d wi r e
har ness (A), r epl ace t he shi f t sol enoi d wi r e har ness
and t he O-ri ng (B), t hen go t o st ep 23.
6x 1.0 mm
12 N-m
(1.2 kgf-m,
8.7 Ibf-ft)
14-180
18. Remove t he shi f t sol enoi d val ve mount i ng bol t s (F),
t hen hol d t he shi f t sol enoi d val ve body, and r emove
t he af f ect ed shi f t sol enoi d val ves.
NOTE: Do not hol d t he shi f t sol enoi d val ve c onnec t or
to r emove t he shi f t sol enoi d val ves. Be sur e t o hol d
t he shi ft sol enoi d val ve body.
19. Inst al l new O-r i ngs (two O-r i ngs per shi f t sol enoi d
val ve) (G) on t he shi ft sol enoi d val ves.
NOTE: A new shi ft sol enoi d val ve c omes wi t h new
O-r i ngs. If you i nst al l a new shi f t sol enoi d val ve, us e
t he O-r i ngs pr ovi ded wi t h it.
20. If shi f t sol enoi d val ve C, D, or E was r epl aced, i nst al l
shi f t sol enoi d val ve C (br own connect or ), shi ft
sol enoi d val ve D (bl ack c onnec t or ), or shi ft sol enoi d
val ve E (black connect or ) by hol di ng t he shi ft sol enoi d
val ve body; make sur e t he mount i ng bracket cont act s
t he ser vo body. ,
NOTE: Do not hol d t he shi f t sol enoi d val ve connect or
to i nst al l t he shi f t sol enoi d val ve. Be sur e to hol d t he
shi f t sol enoi d val ve body.
21. If shi f t sol enoi d val ve A was r epl ac ed, i nstall shi f t
sol enoi d val ve A (br own connect or ) by hol di ng t he
shi f t sol enoi d val ve body; make sur e t he mount i ng
bracket cont act s t he bracket of shi f t sol enoi d val ve D.
NOTE: Do not i nst al l shi f t sol enoi d val ve A bef ore
i nst al l i ng shi ft sol enoi d val ve D. If shi ft sol enoi d val ve
A i s i nst al l ed bef or e i nst al l i ng shi f t sol enoi d val ve D, it
may damage t he hydr aul i c cont rol syst em.
22. If shi ft sol enoi d val ve B was r epl ac ed, i nstall shi ft
sol enoi d val ve B (br own connect or ) by hol di ng t he
shi f t sol enoi d val ve body; make sur e t he mount i ng
bracket cont act s t he bracket of shi f t sol enoi d val ve E.
NOTE: Do not i nst al l shi f t sol enoi d val ve B bef ore
i nst al l i ng shi f t sol enoi d val ve E. If shi ft sol enoi d val ve
B i s i nst al l ed bef ore i nst al l i ng shi ft sol enoi d val ve E, it
may damage t he hydr aul i c cont rol syst em.
23. Connec t t he shi f t sol enoi d val ve connect or s:
RED wi r e c onnec t or to shi ft sol enoi d val ve E.
GRN wi r e c onnec t or t o shi ft sol enoi d val ve C.
ORN wi r e c onnec t or t o shi ft sol enoi d val ve B.
BL U wi r e c onnec t or to shi ft sol enoi d val ve A.
YE L , WHT, and WHT wi r e connect or to shi ft
sol enoi d val ve D.
24. Inst al l a new gasket , t he dowel pi ns, and t he shi f t
sol enoi d val ve c over .
25. Chec k t he c onnec t or f or rust , di rt, or oi l , and c l ean or
repai r if nec essar y, t hen connect or t he connect or
sec ur el y.
26. Ref i l l t he t r ansmi ssi on wi t h ATF (see st ep 4 on page
14-192).
28. Inst al l t he left f ront wheel .
14-181
A/ T Cl ut ch Pr essur e Cont rol Sol enoi d Val ve A Test
c ommuni c at es wi t h t he PCM. If it does not , go t o t he
DL C ci r cui t t r oubl eshoot i ng (see page 11-181).
Val ve A i n t he Mi sc el l aneous Test Menu on t he HDS.
4. Test A/ T cl ut ch pr essur e cont r ol sol enoi d val ve A wi t h
t he HDS.
If t he val ve t est s OK , t he t est i s compl et e.
Di sc onnec t t he HDS.
If t he val ve does not t est OK , f ol l ow t he i nst r uct i ons
on t he HDS.
If t he val ve does not t est OK , and t he HDS does not
det er mi ne t he c aus e, go t o st ep 5.
5. Remove t he i ntake ai r duct .
cont rol sol enoi d val ve A connect or t er mi nal s No. 1
and No. 2.
St andar d: 310O
If t he r esi st anc e i s wi t hi n t he st andar d, go to st ep 8.
If t he r esi st anc e i s out of st andar d, r epl ace A/ T
cl ut ch pr essur e cont rol sol enoi d val ve A (see page
14-184).
8. Connec t a j umper wi r e f r om t he battery negat i ve
t er mi nal to A/ T cl ut ch pr essur e cont rol sol enoi d val ve
A connect or t er mi nal No. 2, and connect anot her
j umper wi r e f r om t he battery posi t i ve t er mi nal t o A/ T
cl ut ch pr essur e cont rol sol enoi d val ve A c onnec t or
t er mi nal No. 1.
If a cl i cki ng sound i s hear d, t he val ve i s OK, and t he
t est i s c ompl et e, go to st ep 18.
If no cl i cki ng sound i s hear d, go to st ep 9.
14-182
9. Remove t he bolts sec ur i ng t he ATF cool er li ne
br acket s (B), t hen r emove A/ T cl ut ch pr essur e cont rol
sol enoi d val ve A.
6 x 1.0 mm
12 N m
(1.2 k g f m, 8.7 Ibf f t )
6 x 1.0 mm
12 N-m
(1.2 k g f m, 8.7 Ibf f t )
10. Remove t he ATF pi pe (C), t he ATF j oi nt pi pes (D), t he
O-r i ngs (E), and t he gasket (F).
11. Chec k t he f l ui d passage of A/ T cl ut ch pr essur e cont rol
sol enoi d val ve A f or cont ami nat i on.
A connect or t er mi nal No. 2, and connect anot her
j umper wi r e f rom t he bat t ery posi t i ve t er mi nal to A/ T
cl ut ch pr essur e cont r ol sol enoi d val ve A c onnec t or
t er mi nal No. 1. Make sur e A/ T cl ut ch pr essur e cont rol
sol enoi d val ve A moves.
13. Di sconnect one of t he j umper wi r es, and check t he
val ve movement at t he f l ui d passage i n t he val ve
body mount i ng sur f ac e. If t he val ve bi nds or moves
sl uggi shl y, or if t he sol enoi d val ve does not oper at e,
r epl ace A/ T cl ut ch pr essur e cont rol sol enoi d val ve A.
14. Cl ean t he mount i ng sur f ace and t he f l ui d passage of
t he A/ T cl ut ch pr essur e cont rol sol enoi d val ve body
and t he t r ansmi ssi on housi ng.
15. Inst al l a new gasket on t he t r ansmi ssi on housi ng, and
i nst al l t he ATF pi pe and t he ATF j oi nt pi pes. Inst al l
new O-r i ngs over t he ATF j oi nt pi pes.
NOTE: Be sur e to i nst al l a new gasket wi t h t he bl ue
si de t owar d t he t r ansmi ssi on housi ng.
16. Install A/ T cl ut ch pr essur e cont rol sol enoi d val ve A.
17. Sec ur e t he ATF cool er l i ne bracket s wi t h t he bol t s.
18. Check t he connect or f or r ust , di rt, or oi l , and c l ean or
repai r if nec essar y. Then connect t he connect or
sec ur el y.
19. Inst al l t he i ntake ai r duct .
14-183
A/T Clutch Pressure Control
Solenoid Valve A Replacement
1. Remove t he i ntake ai r duc t
3. Remove t he bolts sec ur i ng t he ATF c ool er li ne
bracket s (B), t hen r emove A/ T cl ut ch pr essur e cont rol
sol enoi d val ve A.
4. Remove t he ATF pi pe (C), t he ATF j oi nt pi pes (D), t he
O-r i ngs (E), and t he gasket (F).
5. Cl ean t he mount i ng sur f ace and t he f l ui d pas s ages of
6. Install a new gasket on t he t r ansmi ssi on housi ng, and
i nst al l t he ATF pi pe and t he ATF j oi nt pi pes. Inst al l
new O-r i ngs over t he ATF j oi nt pi pes.
7. Install a new A/ T cl ut ch pr essur e cont rol sol enoi d
val ve A.
8. Sec ur e t he ATF cool er i nlet bracket s wi t h t he bol t s.
9. Chec k t he connect or f or r ust , di rt, or oi l , and c l ean or
repai r if nec essar y. Then connect t he connect or
sec ur el y.
10. Inst al l t he i ntake ai r duct .
A/ T Cl ut ch Pr essur e Cont rol
Sol enoi d Val ve B and C Test
A
2. Tur n t he i gni ti on swi t ch to ON (II). Make sur e t he HDS
Val ve B or Cl ut ch Pr essur e Cont r ol (Li near ) Sol enoi d
Val ve C i n t he Mi sc el l aneous Test Menu on t he HDS.
4. Test A/ T cl ut ch pr essur e cont rol sol enoi d val ve B or C
wi t h t he HDS.
If t he val ve t est s OK, t he t est i s compl et e.
Di sconnect t he HDS.
If t he val ve does not t est OK, f ol l ow t he i nst r uct i ons
on t he HDS.
If t he val ve does not t est OK , and t he HDS does not
det er mi ne t he c aus e, go to st ep 5.
6. Remove t he battery base (see st ep 8 on page 5-3).
14-184
val ve B and C c onnec t or s.
8. Measur e t he r esi st ance bet ween A/ T cl ut ch pr essur e
cont rol sol enoi d val ve B or C connect or t er mi nal s
No. 1 and No. 2.
St andar d: 3 - 1 0 O
If t he r esi st anc e i s wi t hi n t he st andar d, go to st ep 9.
If t he r esi st ance i s out of st andar d, r epl ace A/ T
cl ut ch pr essur e cont rol sol enoi d val ve B and C (see
page 14-186).
B or C connect or t er mi nal No. 2, and connect anot her
j umper wi r e f r om t he battery posi t i ve t er mi nal to A/ T
cl ut ch pr essur e cont rol sol enoi d val ve B or C
If a cl i cki ng sound i s hear d, t he val ve i s OK, and t he
t est i s compl et e, go to st ep 18.
If no cl i cki ng sound i s hear d, go to st ep 10.
10. Remove A/ T cl ut ch pr essur e cont rol sol enoi d val ves B
and C.
(1.2 k g f m, 8.7 Ibf f t )
11. Remove t he ATF j oi nt pi pes (A), t he O-r i ngs (D), and
t he gasket (E).
12. Chec k t he f l ui d passage of A/T cl ut ch pr essur e cont rol
sol enoi d val ves B and C f or cont ami nat i on.
(cont' d)
14-185
A/ T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoi d
Valve B and C Test (cont'd)
B or C c onnec t or t er mi nal No. 2, and connect anot her
j umper wi r e f r om t he bat t ery posi t i ve t er mi nal to
c onnec t or t er mi nal No. 1. Make sur e A/ T cl ut ch
pr essur e cont rol sol enoi d val ve B or C moves.
14. Di sc onnec t one of t he j umper wi r es , and check t he
val ve movement at t he f l ui d passage i n t he val ve
body mount i ng sur f ac e. If t he val ve bi nds or moves
sl uggi shl y, or if t he sol enoi d val ve does not oper at e,
r epl ace A/ T cl ut ch pr essur e cont rol sol enoi d val ves B
and C.
15. Cl ean t he mount i ng sur f ac e and t he f l ui d passage of
t he A/ T cl ut ch pr essur e cont rol sol enoi d val ve body
16. Inst al l a new gasket on t he t r ansmi ssi on housi ng, and
i nst al l t he ATF j oi nt pi pes. Inst al l new O-r i ngs over t he
ATF j oi nt pi pes.
17. Inst al l A/ T cl ut ch pr essur e cont rol sol enoi d val ves B
and C.
18. Chec k t he c onnec t or s f or r ust , di rt, or oi l , and c l ean or
r epai r if nec essar y. Then c onnec t t he c onnec t or s
sec ur el y.
19. Inst al l t he bat t ery base (see st ep 63 on page 5-22).
A/ T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoi d
Valve B and C Replacement
2. Remove t he battery base (see st ep 8 on page 5-3).
val ves B and C c onnec t or s.
4. Remove N T cl ut ch pr essur e cont rol sol enoi d val ves B
and C.
(1.2 kgf -m, 8.7 Ibf-ft)
5. Remove t he ATF j oi nt pi pes (A), t he O-r i ngs (D), and
t he gasket (E).
14-186
-A O J û-
3
6. Cl ean t he mount i ng sur f ac e and t he f l ui d pas s ages of
7. Install a new gasket on t he t r ansmi ssi on housi ng, and
i nst al l t he ATF j oi nt pi pes. Inst al l new O-r i ngs over t he
ATF j oi nt pi pes.
8. Install new A/ T cl ut ch pr essur e cont rol sol enoi d
val ves B and C.
9. Chec k t he c onnec t or s f or r ust , di rt, or oi l , and c l ean or
repai r if nec essar y. Then connect t he c onnec t or s
secur el y.
10. Install t he battery base (see st ep 63 on page 5-22).
Input Shaft (Mainshaft) Sro@d
Sensor Replacement
1. Remove t he nut sec ur i ng t he under -hood f use/r el ay
box, and swi ng it out of t he way.
2. Remove t he i ntake ai r duct and t he ai r c l eaner
housi ng.
3. Di sconnect t he i nput shaf t (mai nshaf t ) speed sensor
connect or , and r emove t he i nput shaf t (mai nshaf t )
speed sensor (A).
6 x 1.0 mm
12 N-m
(1.2 k g f m,
8.7 Ibf f t )
B
Replace.
4. Inst al l a new O-ri ng (B) on a new i nput shaf t
(mai nshaf t ) speed sensor , t hen i nst al l t he i nput shaf t
(mai nshaf t ) speed sensor i n t he t r ansmi ssi on
housi ng.
5. Chec k t he connect or f or r ust , di rt, or oi l , and cl ean or
repai r if nec essar y, t hen connect t he connect or
sec ur el y.
6. Inst al l t he i ntake ai r duct and t he ai r cl eaner housi ng.
7. Inst al l t he under -hood f use/r el ay box.
14-187
Out put Shaf t (Count ershaf t ) Speed
Sensor Repl acement
1. Remove the nut securing the under-hood fuse/relay
box, and swing it out of the way.
2. Remove the intake air duct and the air cleaner
housing.
3. Disconnect the output shaft (countershaft) speed
sensor connector, and remove the output shaft
(countershaft) speed sensor (A).
4. Install a new O-ring (B) on a new output shaft
(countershaft) speed sensor with the speed sensor
washer (C), then install the output shaft (countershaft)
speed sensor in the transmission housing.
5. Check the connector for rust, dirt, or oil, and clean or
repair if necessary, then connect the connector
securely.
6. Install the intake air duct and the air cleaner housing.
7. Install the under-hood fuse/relay box.
Tr ansmi ssi on Flui d Pr essur e Swi t c h
A (2nd Cl ut ch) Repl acement
1. Remove the intake air duct.
2. Disconnect the connector (A) from the transmission
fluid pressure switch A (2nd clutch) (B), and remove
the transmission fluid pressure switch A (2nd clutch).
3. Install a new transmission fluid pressure switch A
(2nd clutch) with a new sealing washer (C), and
tighten the transmission fluid pressure switch A (2nd
clutch) to the specified torque by turning the metal
part, not the plastic part.
4. Check the connector for rust, dirt, or oil, and clean or
repair if necessary, then connect the connector
securely.
5. Install the intake air duct.
14-188
Transmission Fluid Pressure Switch
B (3rd Clutch) Replacement
1. Rai se t he vehi cl e on a lift, or appl y t he parki ng br ake,
bl ock both rear wheel s, and r ai se t he f ront of t he
3. Di sconnect t he connect or (A) f r om t he t r ansmi ssi on
fluid pr essur e swi t ch B {3rd cl ut ch) (B), t hen r emove
t he t r ansmi ssi on f l ui d pr essur e swi t c h B (3rd cl ut ch).
B
20 Urn
(2.0 kgf-m,
14 I bfft)
C
Replace.
4. Inst al l a new t r ansmi ssi on f l ui d pr essur e swi t c h B (3rd
cl ut ch) wi t h a new seal i ng washer (C), and t i ght en t he
t r ansmi ssi on f l ui d pr essur e swi t c h B (3rd cl ut ch) to
t he speci f i ed torque by t urni ng t he met al part , not t he
pl ast i c part.
5. Chec k t he connect or f or rust , di rt, or oi l , and c l ean or
repai r if nec essar y, t hen connect t he connect or
sec ur el y.
6. Inst al l t he splasTi shi el d.
ATF Temper at ur e Sensor /
Test /Repl ac ement
bl ock bot h rear wheel s , and r ai se t he f ront of t he
4. Measur e t he ATF t emper at ur e sensor r esi st ance
bet ween shi ft sol enoi d wi r e har ness connect or
St andar d: 50 0 - 2 5 kO
If t he r esi st ance i s wi t hi n t he st andar d. The t est i s
compl et e, r econnect t he connect or , t hen i nst al l t he
spl ash shi el d.
If t he r esi st anc e i s out of t he st andar d, got o st ep 5.
(cont ' d)
14-189
ATF Temper at ur e Sensor Test /Repl ac ement (cont' d)
A
18x1.5 mm
49 N-m
6. Rei nst al l t he dr ai n pl ug wi t h a new seal i ng was her (B).
8. Remove t he shi f t sol enoi d val ve c over (A), t he dowel
pi ns (B), and t he gasket (C).
6x 1.0 mm
12 Nm
(1.2 kgf-m, 8.7 Ibf-ft)
9. Remove t he bolt sec ur i ng t he shi f t sol enoi d wi r e
har ness (A), t hen r emove t he shi ft sol enoi d wi r e
har ness (B) f r om t he t r ansmi ssi on housi ng.
6x 1.0 mm
12 N-m
(1.2 kgf-m, 8.7 Ibf-ft)
14-190
10. Di sconnect t he c onnec t or s f r om t he shi ft sol enoi d
val ves. Then r epl ace t he ATF t emper at ur e sensor and
t he O-ri ng (F) wi t h new ones.
NOTE: The ATF t emper at ur e sensor i s not avai l abl e
separ at el y f r om t he shi f t sol enoi d wi r e har ness (Q).
12 N-m
(1.2 k g f m, 8.7 Ibf-ft)
11. Connec t t he shi f t sol enoi d val ve c onnec t or s:
BL U wi r e c onnec t or t o shi f t sol enoi d val ve A.
ORN wi r e c onnec t or to shi f t sol enoi d val ve B.
GRN wi r e c onnec t or to shi f t sol enoi d val ve C.
YE L , WHT, and WHT wi r e connect or to shi f t
sol enoi d val ve D
RED wi r e c onnec t or t o shi f t sol enoi d val ve E.
12. Install a new gasket , t he dowel pi ns, and t he shi ft
sol enoi d val ve cover .
13. Check t he connect or f or r ust , di rt, or oi l , and c l ean or
repai r if nec essar y, t hen c onnec t t he connect or
sec ur el y.
14. Refi ll t he t r ansmi ssi on wi t h ATF (see st ep 4 on page
14-192).
15. Install t he spl ash shi el d.
16. Install t he left f ront wheel .
ATF Level Check
NOTE:
Keep all f or ei gn par t i cl es out of t he t r ansmi ssi on.
Chec k t he ATF l evel wi t hi n 6090 sec onds after
t ur ni ng t he engi ne off.
Hi gher ATF l evel may be i ndi cat ed if t he radi at or f an
c omes on t wi c e or mor e.
1. Park t he vehi c l e on l evel gr ound.
(the radi at or f an c omes on), and t ur n t he engi ne off.
3. Remove t he ATF di pst i ck (yel l ow l oop) (A) f r om t he
t r ansmi ssi on, and wi pe it wi t h a c l ean cl ot h.
4. Insert t he di pst i ck i nto t he t r ansmi ssi on.
5. Remove t he di pst i ck, and c hec k t he ATF l evel . It
shoul d be bet ween t he upper mar k (A) and t he l ower
mar k (B).
(cont ' d)
14-191
ATF Level Check (cont' d)
6. If t he ATF l evel Is bel ow t he l ower mar k, c hec k f or f l ui d
l eaks at t he t r ansmi ssi on, t he ATF c ool er hos es , t he
l i ne j oi nt s, and t he c ool er l i nes. If a pr obl em i s f ound,
f i x it bef ore f i l l i ng t he t r ansmi ssi on wi t h ATF.
NOTE: If t he vehi c l e i s dr i ven when t he ATF l evel i s
bel ow t he l ower mar k, one or mor e of t hese
sympt oms may occur :
Tr ansmi ssi on damage.
Vehi c l e does not move i n any gear .
Vehi c l e ac c el er at es poor l y, and f l ar es when st ar t i ng
off i n D and R.
The engi ne vi br at es at i dl e.
7. If t he l evel i s above t he upper mar k, dr ai n t he ATF t o
pr oper l evel (see st ep 3 on page 14-192).
NOTE: If t he vehi c l e i s dr i ven when t he ATF l evel i s
above t he upper mar k, t he vehi c l e may c r eep f or war d
i n N, or have pr obl ems shi f t i ng.
8. If nec essar y, fi ll t he t r ansmi ssi on wi t h ATF t hr ough
t he di pst i ck hol e to bri ng t he f l ui d l evel bet ween t he
upper mar k and t he l ower mar k of t he di pst i ck. Do not
fi ll t he f l ui d above t he upper mar k. Al way s us e Honda
ATF-Z1 aut omat i c t r ansmi ssi on f l ui d (ATF). Usi ng a
non-Honda ATF c an af f ect shi f t qual i t y.
9. Inser t t he di pst i ck (A) back i nto t he t r ansmi ssi on wi t h
t he l et t ers " A TF" poi nt i ng t owar d t he f ront of t he
vehi c l e.
ATF Repl acement
NOTE: Keep al l f or ei gn par t i cl es out of t he t r ansmi ssi on.
1. Park t he vehi c l e on l evel gr ound.
(the radi at or f an c omes on), and t ur n t he engi ne off.
3. Remove t he dr ai n pl ug (A), and dr ai n t he ATF. Then
r ei nst al l t he dr ai n pl ug wi t h a new seal i ng was her (B).
NOTE: If ATF cool er cl eani ng i s nec essar y, refer to
ATF cool er cl eani ng (see page 14-217).
4. Remove t he ATF di pst i ck, and refi ll t he t r ansmi ssi on
wi t h t he r ecor r i mended f l ui d amount t hr ough t he
di pst i ck hol e t o bri ng t he f l ui d l evel bet ween t he upper
mar k and t he l ower mar k of t he di pst i ck. Al ways use
Honda ATF-Z1 aut omat i c t r ansmi ssi on f l ui d (ATF).
Usi ng a non-Honda ATF c an affect shi f t qual i t y.
Automatic Transmi ssi on Fluid Capacity:
2.5 L (2.6 US qt) at change
6.5 L (6.9 qt) at overhaul
14-192
5. i nser t t he di psti ck (A) back i nto t he t r ansmi ssi on wi t h
t he letters " ATF" poi nt i ng t owar d t he f ront of t he
vehi c l e.
6. Chec k t he ATF l evel (see page 14-191).
7. If t he mai nt enance mi nder r ec ommends r epl aci ng t he
ATF, r eset t he mai nt enance mi nder (see page 3-7),
and t hi s pr ocedur e i s compl et e. If t he mai nt enance
mi nder di d not requi re you to r ec ommends r epl ace
t he ATF, go to st ep 8.
9. Tur n t he i gni t i on swi t c h t o ON (II). Make sur e t he HDS
10. Sel ec t BODY EL ECTRI CAL wi t h t he HDS.
11. Sel ec t ADJ US TMENT i n t he GAUGE MENU wi t h t he
HDS.
12. Sel ec t RE S E T in t he MAINTENANCE MINDER wi t h t he
HDS.
13. Sel ec t MAINTENANCE S UB ITEM 3 RE S E T, and r eset
t he ATF life wi t h t he HDS.
14-193
Transmission Removal
- Subf r ame Adapt er VSB02C000016*
* : Avai l abl e t hr ough t he Honda Tool and Equi pment
Pr ogr am 888-424-6857.
NOTE:
sur f ac es.
Spec i al t ool Reds engi ne suppor t hanger AAR-T1256
must be used wi t h t he si de engi ne mount i nst al l ed.
1. Sec ur e t he hood i n t he wi de open posi t i on wi t h t he
suppor t r od.
3. Remove t he f ront gri l l e c over .
4. Remove t he st rut br ace (A).
A
5. Remove t he ai r c l eaner housi ng (see page 11-332) and
t he i nt ake ai r duct .
6. Remove t he nut sec ur i ng t he under -hood f use/r el ay
box, and swi ng it out of t he way.
7. Remove t he bat t ery base (see st ep 8 on page 5-3).
8. Rai se t he vehi c l e on a lift, and make sur e it i s sec ur el y
suppor t ed.
12. Rei nst al l t he dr ai n pl ug wi t h a new seal i ng washer (B).
val ve A c onnec t or (A) and t he t r ansmi ssi on f l ui d
pr essur e swi t c h A (2nd cl ut ch) connect or (B), and
r emove t he har ness c l amps (C) f r om t he c l amp
br acket s (D).
14-194
14. Remove the transmission range switch subharness
connector (A) from the connector bracket (B), then
disconnect it.
B
15. Remove the A/F sensor connector (C) from the
connector bracket (D), then disconnect it.
16. Disconnect the input shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor
connector (E) and the output shaft (countershaft)
speed sensor connector (F).
17. Remove the harness cover bracket bolt, and remove
the engine wire harness cover bracket (G) from the
ATF filter bracket (H).
18. Disconnect the shift solenoid wire harness connector
(A), the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve B
connector (B), the A/T clutch pressure control
solenoid valve C connector (C), and remove the
harness clamp (D) from the clamp bracket (E).
19. Disconnect the ATF cooler hoses (A) from the ATF
cooler lines (B). Turn the ends of the ATF cooler hoses
up to prevent ATF from flowing out, then plug the ATF
cooler hoses and the lines.
20. Check for any signs of leakage at the hose joints.
(cont'd)
14-195
21. Di sc onnec t t he t r ansmi ssi on f l ui d pr essur e swi t c h B
(3rd cl ut ch) c onnec t or (A), and r emove t he har nes s
c l amp (B) f r om t he c l amp br acket (C).
22. Di sc onnec t t he v ac uum hose (A).
23. Di sc onnec t t he ATF c ool er hose (A) f r om t he ATF
c ool er l i ne (B). Tur n t he end of t he ATF c ool er hose up
t o pr event ATF f r om f l owi ng out , t hen pl ug t he hose
and l i ne.
24. Remove t he ATF cool er hose (C) f r om t he hose c l amp
(D).
25. Remove t he upper t r ansmi ssi on mount br acket bol t s.
NOTE: Do not r emove t he TORX bolt (A) f r om t he
A
14-196
00
t he t hr eaded hol e l ocat ed on t he rear si de of t he
cyl i nder head.
27. Inst al l t he engi ne suppor t hanger (AAR-T1256) t o t he
vehi c l e, and at t ach t he hook (A) to t he sl ot t ed hol e in
t he engi ne hanger adapt er (VSB02C000015). Ti ght en
t he wi ng nut (B) by hand to lift and suppor t t he engi ne.
NOTE:
Be car ef ul when wor ki ng ar ound t he wi ndshi el d.
Be caref ul not to damage t he hood opener c abl e
when i nst al l i ng t he engi ne suppor t hanger
(AAR-T1256) at t he front bul khead.
28. Remove t he vac uum hose (A) f r om t he hose c l amp
(B).
29. Remove t he f ront engi ne mount st op (C) and t he
c l amp bracket (D), and r emove t he f ront engi ne
mount bolt (E).
30. Remove t he heat shi el d mount i ng bol t s (A), t hen
r emove t he heat shi el d (B).
C
(cont ' d)
14-197
Tr ansmi ssi on Removal (cont'd)
32. Remove t he power st eer i ng (P/S) f l ui d ret urn hose
c l amp bolt (A).
33. Remove t he P/S f l ui d i nl et l i ne c l amp bolt (B).
34. Remove t he r ear engi ne mount bol t s (A), t hen r emove
t he r ear engi ne mount (B).
35. Remove t he bol t s (A), t hen r emove t he r ear engi ne
mount upper bracket (B).
36. Remove t he st eer i ng gear box st i f f ener s.
14-198
<3
37. Remove t he P/S f l ui d return l i ne c l amp bolt (A).
38. Rel ease t he P/S f l ui d ret urn l i ne (B) f r om t he ret urn
l i ne c l amp (C).
39. Remove t he bol t s (B), and t he sel f -l ocki ng nut s (C).
40. Remove exhaust pi pe A.
41. Remove t he damper pi nch bol t s (A), t he damper fork
mount i ng nut s (B), t he bol t s (C), and t he damper f orks
(D) (see st ep 3 on page 18-21).
A
B
42. Remove t he cot t er pi ns (H) and t he nut s (I), t hen
separ at e t he t i e-rod end ball j oi nt s f r om t he knuckl es
43. Remove t he cot t er pi ns (E) and t he cast l e nut s (F) (see
44. Separ at e t he knuckl e ball j oi nt s (G) f r om t he l ower
ar ms (see st ep 6 on page 18-21).
(cont ' d)
14-199
Tr ansmi ssi on Removal (cont ' d)
45. Remove t he t or que conver t er c over (A), and r emove
t he dr i ve pl at e bol t s (B) (8) whi l e rotati ng t he
cr ankshaf t pul l ey.
B
46. Vehi c l es wi t h J HM VINs: Remove t he shi f t c abl e c over
(A).
47. Vehi c l es wi t h J HM VINs: Remove t he spr i ng cl i p (B)
and t he cont rol pi n (C), and separ at e t he shi ft c abl e
end (D) f r om t he sel ect or cont rol l ever (E). Remove
t he t wo bol t s sec ur i ng t he shi f t c abl e bracket (F).
48. Vehi c l es wi t h 1HG VINs: Remove t he shi ft cabl e c over
(A), and r emove t he t wo bol t s sec ur i ng t he shi ft c abl e
bracket (B).
49. Vehi c l es wi t h 1HG VINs: Pry up t he lock t ab of t he lock
was her (C), and r emove t he lock bolt (D) and t he l ock
was her , t hen separ at e t he shi f t c abl e (E) f r om t he
sel ec t or cont rol shaf t (F).
50. Hang t he shi f t c abl e t o t he body wi t h a st r ap.
NOTE: Do not bend t he shi ft c abl e exc essi vel y.
51. Remove t he t r ansmi ssi on l ower mount nut s.
14-200
52. Remove both si des f ront subf r ame mi d-mount bol t s.
53. Suppor t t he st eer i ng gear box on both si des wi t h
nyl on st r aps.
54. At t ach t he f ront subf r ame adapt er (VSB02C000016) to
t he f ront subf r ame by l oopi ng t he st r ap (A) over t he
f ront of t he f ront subf r ame, t hen sec ur e t he st rap wi t h
t he st op (B), t hen t i ght en t he wi ng nut (C).
VSB02C000016
55. Rai se a j ack and l i ne up t he sl ot s i n t he ar ms wi t h t he
bolt hol es on t he cor ner of t he j ack bas e, t hen t i ght en
t he bol t s.
56. Remove t he f our bol t s (A) sec ur i ng t he st i f f ener s, and
r emove t he f our bol t s (B) sec ur i ng t he f ront subf r ame,
t hen l ower t he f ront subf r ame.
B B
57. Pl ace a j ack under t he t r ansmi ssi on.
58. Remove t he t r ansmi ssi on l ower mount .
(cont ' d)
14-201
59. Remove t he left si de dr i veshaf t f r om t he di fferenti al
and t he ri ght si de dr i veshaf t f r om t he i nt er medi at e
shaf t . Coat al l pr eci si on mac hi ned sur f ac es wi t h c l ean
engi ne oi l , t hen put pl ast i c bags over t he dr i veshaf t
ends. Suppor t t he dr i veshaf t s on both si des wi t h
nyl on st r aps.
60. Remove t he i nt er medi at e shaf t . Coat al l pr ec i si on
mac hi ned sur f ac es wi t h c l ean engi ne oi l , t hen put
pl ast i c bags over t he i nt er medi at e shaf t ends.
61. Remove t he r ear engi ne mount bracket .
62. Remove t he f ront engi ne mount bracket .
63. Remove t he j ack.
14-202
64. Remove t he upper t r ansmi ssi on housi ng mount i ng
bol t s.
65. Lower t he t r ansmi ssi on by l ooseni ng t he wi ng nut on
t he engi ne suppor t hanger , and ti lt t he engi ne j ust
enough f or t he t r ansmi ssi on t o c l ear t he si de f r ame.
Chec k t hat t he t r ansmi ssi on i s compl et er y f ree of t he
ATF cool er hos es , t he vac uum hos es , and t he
el ect ri cal wi r i ng.
66. Pl ace t he j ack under t he t r ansmi ssi on.
67. Remove t he f ront and l ower t r ansmi ssi on housi ng
mount i ng bol t s.
68. Remove t he cr ankshaf t posi t i on (CKP) sensor c over .
69. Remove t he r ear t r ansmi ssi on housi ng mount i ng
bol t s.
NOTE: Be caref ul not t o damage t he CK P sensor and
t he sensor har ness.
70. Chec k once agai n t hat t he t r ansmi ssi on i s f ree of t he
vac uum hos es , t he ATF cool er hos es , and t he
el ect ri cal wi r i ng.
71. Sl i de t he t r ansmi ssi on away f r om t he engi ne to
r emove it f r om t he vehi c l e.
(cont ' d)
14-203
72. Remove t he t or que conver t er , t he O-r i ng, and t he
dowel pi ns.
73. Inspect the drive plate, and replace it if it is damaged.
Drive Plate Removal and
Inst allat i on
1. Remove t he t r ansmi ssi on assembl y (see page
14-194).
2. Remove t he dri ve plate (A) and t he washer (B) f r om
t he engi ne.
12 x 1.0 mm
74 N-m (7.5 k g f m, 54 Ibf-ft)
3. Install t he dr i ve plate and t he washer on t he engi ne,
and t i ght en t he ei ght bol t s i n a c r i ssc r oss pat t ern in at
l east t wo st eps.
4. Install t he t r ansmi ssi on assembl y (see page 14-205).
14-204
Transmission installation
Subf r ame Adapt er VSB02C000016*
Subf r ame Al i gnment Pi n 070AG-SJ AA10S
*: Avai l abl e t hr ough t he Honda Tool and Equi pment
Pr ogr am 888-424-6857.
NOTE: Us e f ender c over s to avoi d damagi ng pai nt ed
sur f ac es.
1. If you di d not c l ean t he ATF cool er when you r emoved
t he t r ansmi ssi on, and you are i nst al l i ng an
over haul ed or r emanuf act ur ed t r ansmi ssi on, c l ean
t he ATF cool er (see page 14-217).
2. Inst al l a new O-ri ng (A) on t he t or que conver t er (B),
t hen i nst al l t he t orque conver t er on t he mai nshaf t (C).
NOTE: Make sur e t he t or que conver t er i s f ul l y
engaged on t he mai nshaf t , st art er shaf t and t he ATF
pump gear . Fai l ur e to do so wi l l resul t in sever e
t r ansmi ssi on or engi ne damage.
3. Install t he 14x 20 mm dowel pi ns (D) i n t he t or que
conver t er housi ng.
4. Pl ace t he t r ansmi ssi on on a j ack, and r ai se t he
t r ansmi ssi on to t he engi ne l evel , t hen fit t he
t r ansmi ssi on to t he engi ne.
5. Inst al l t he r ear t r ansmi ssi on housi ng mount i ng bol t s.
NOTE: Be car ef ul not to damage t he cr ankshaf t
posi t i on (CKP) sensor and t he s ens or har ness.
12 x 1.25 mm
64 N-m (6.5 k g f m, 47 Ibf-ft)
6. Inst al l t he CK P sensor cover .
6 x 1.0 mi n
12 N-m (1.2 k g f m, 8.7 Ibf-ft)
(cont' d)
14-205
7. Inst al l t he front and l ower t r ansmi ssi on housi ng
mount i ng bol t s.
10x1.25 mm
44 N-m (4.5 kgf m, 33 Ibfft)
12 x 1.25 mm
64 N-m
8. Remove t he j ack.
9. Inst al l t he upper t r ansmi ssi on housi ng mount i ng
bol t s.
12 x 1.25 mm
64 N-m (6.5 kgf m, 47 Ibfft)
10. Pl ac e t he j ack under t he t r ansmi ssi on.
11. Inst al l t he f ront engi ne mount bracket wi t h new bol t s.
12x1.25 mm
64 N-m
(6.5 kgf m,
47 Ibfft)
Repl ac e.
12. Inst al l t he r ear engi ne mount bracket wi t h new bol t s.
12x1.25 mm
88 Nm
Repl ac e.
14-206
13. Install a new set ri ng (A) on t he i nt ermedi at e shaf t (B). 19. Inst al l t he t r ansmi ssi on l ower mount s wi t h new bol t s.
Be sur e not t o al l ow dust or ot her f or ei gn par t i cl es t o 20. Remove t he j ack,
ent er t he t r ansmi ssi on.
21. At t ach t he f ront subf r ame adapt er (VSB02C000016) to
15. Install a new set ri ng (A) on t he left dr i veshaf t (B).
t h e f r o n t s u b f r a m
e by l oopi ng t he st r ap (A) over t he
sur e not to al l ow dust or ot her f orei gn par t i cl es to
ent er t he t r ansmi ssi on. Tur n t he st eer i ng knuckl e f ul l y
out war d, and sl i de t he dr i veshaf t i nto t he di fferenti al
unti l you f eel t he set ri ng f ul l y engage t he si de gear .
17. Appl y t he r ec ommended gr ease to t he ri ght
dr i veshaf t i nboar d j oi nt spl i nes (see st ep 4 on page
16-20).
18. Sl i de t he ri ght dr i veshaf t over t he i nt ermedi at e shaf t
spl i nes unti l you f eel t he dr i veshaf t f ul l y engage t he
i nt ermedi at e shaf t set r i ng.
(c onf d)
14-207
22. Rai se t he f ront subf r ame up t o t he body, t hen l oosel y
i nst al l new f ront subf r ame mount i ng bol t s (A), t he
st i f f ener mount i ng bol t s (B), and new st i f f ener
mount i ng bol t s (C).
NOTE: Be car ef ul when c onnec t i ng t hese i t ems:
Front engi ne mount and i ts br acket
Tr ansmi ssi on l ower mount and f ront subf r ame
Knuc l e bal l j oi nt s and l ower ar ms
Replace. Replace.
23. Loosel y t i ght en t he f ront subf r ame mount i ng bolt (A)
i n t he ri ght r ear st i f f ener unti l t he front subf r ame
i nsul at or cont act s t he body; i nser t t he subf r ame
al i gnment pi n (070AG-SJAA1 OS) t hr ough t he
posi t i oni ng sl ot (B) on t he ri ght r ear st i f f ener, t hr ough
t he posi t i oni ng hol e (C) on t he f ront subf r ame, and
i nto t he posi t i oni ng hol e on t he body.
C
24. Loosel y t i ght en t he f ront subf r ame mount i ng bolt i n
t he left r ear st i f f ener i n t he s ame manner in st ep 23.
25. Rei nser t t he subf r ame al i gnment pi n t hr ough t he
posi t i oni ng sl ot on t he ri ght r ear st i f f ener, t hr ough t he
posi t i oni ng hol e on t he f ront subf r ame, and into t he
posi t i oni ng hol e on t he body, t hen t i ght en t he f ront
subf r ame mount i ng bolt to t he speci f i ed t or que.
26. Ti ght en t he f ront subf r ame mount i ng bolt i n t he left
r ear st i f f ener i n t he s ame manner i n st ep 25.
27. Ti ght en t he front subf r ame mount i ng bol t s i n t he ri ght
f ront st i f f ener and t he left f ront st i f f ener to t he
28. Chec k t hat t he posi t i oni ng hol es and sl ot s ar e al i gned
usi ng t he subf r ame al i gnment pi n.
29. Ti ght en t he rear and f ront st i f f ener mount i ng bolts to
t he spec i f i ed t or que.
30. Remove t he j ack and t he f ront subf r ame adapt er.
14-208
31. Repl ac e both si des f ront subf r ame mi d-mount
mount i ng bol t s.
10x1.25 mm
49 N-m (5.0 kgf m, 36 Ibfft)
Repl ac e.
32. Inst al l t he t r ansmi ssi on l ower mount nut s.
10x1.25 mm
44 N-m (4.5 kgf m, 33 Ibfft)
33. Vehi c l es wi t h J HM VINs: Appl y mol ybdenum gr ease
t o t he hol e i n t he bushi ng (A) i n t he shi f t cabl e end (B).
At t ach t he shi f t c abl e end to t he sel ect or cont rol l ever
(C), t hen i nser t t he cont r ol pi n (D) i nto t he cont rol l ever
hol e t hr ough t he shi f t c abl e end, and sec ur e t he
cont r ol pi n wi t h t he spr i ng cl i p (E). Do not bend t he
shi f t c abl e exc essi vel y.
6x1.0 mm
12 Nm
(1.2 kgf m, 8.7 Ibfft)
9.8 Nm
(1.0 kgf m,
7.2 Ibfft)
34. Vehi c l es wi t h J HM VINs: Inst al l t he shi f t cabl e bracket
(F) wi t h t he t wo bol t s (G).
35. Vehi c l es wi t h J HM VINs: Install t he shi f t cabl e c over
(H).
(cont ' d)
14-209
36. Vehi c l es wi t h 1 HG VINs: Inst al l t he sel ect or cont r ol
l ever (A) over t he sel ec t or cont r ol shaf t (B). Sec ur e t he
cont rol l ever wi t h a new lock was her (C) and t he l ock
bolt (D), t hen bend t he lock t ab of t he lock was her
agai nst t he bolt head.
D
6x 1.0 mm
14 N-m
(1.4 kgf m,
10.1 Ibfft)
6x1.0 mm
12 N-m (1.2 kgf-m, 8.7 Ibfft)
6x1.0 mm
9.8 N-m
(1.0 kgf m,
7.2 Ibfft)
37. Vehi c l es wi t h 1 HG VINs: Inst al l t he shi f t cabl e bracket
(E) wi t h t he t wo bol t s (F).
38. Vehi c l es wi t h 1 HG VINs: Inst al l t he shi f t cabl e c over
(G).
39. At t ach t he t or que conver t er to t he dr i ve pl at e wi t h t he
ei ght bol t s (A). Rot at e t he cr ankshaf t pul l ey as
nec essar y t o t i ght en t he bol t s t o hal f of t he speci f i ed
t or que, t hen to t he f i nal t or que, i n a c r i ssc r oss pat t ern.
Af t er t i ght eni ng t he l ast bol t , check t hat t he cr ankshaf t
rot at es f r eel y.
A
6x1.0 mm
12 N-m (1.2 kgf m, 8.7 Ibfft)
- 6x 1.0 mm
12 N-m (1.2 kgf m, 8.7 Ibfft)
40. Inst al l t he t or que conver t er c over (B).
41. Inst al l exhaust pi pe A wi t h t he bol t s, new sel f -l ocki ng
nut s, and new gasket s (B) (C).
C
Repl ac e
10x1.25 mm
33 N-m
(3.4 kgf m,
25 Ibfft)
Repl ac e.
8 x 1.25 mm
22 N-m
(2.2 kgf m,
16 Ibfft)
14-210
42. Install t he damper f orks (A) over t he dr i veshaf t and
ont o t he l ower ar ms (B) (see st ep 4 on page 18-33).
Loosel y i nst al l t he damper pi nch bol t s (C) i nto t he
damper f or ks.
10x1.25 mm
49 N-m (5.0 kgf m, 36 Ibf-ft)
F
Repl ac e.
12 x 1.25 mm
64 N-m
(6.5 kgf m,
47 Ibf-ft)
Repl ace.
12x1.25 mm
54 Nm
(5.5 kgf m,
40 Ibf-ft)
J
Repl ac e.
FRONT
FRONT
14x1.5 mm
78- 88 N-m
(8.0-9.0 kgf-m, 58- 65 Ibf-ft)
43. Inst al l t he knuckl e ball j oi nt s (D) on t he l ower ar ms
wi t h t he cast l e nut s (E) (see page 18-21).
44. Connec t t he damper f orks and t he l ower ar ms wi t h
new damper f ork mount i ng bol t s (F), t hen l oosel y
t i ght en a new mount i ng nut s (G).
45. Ti ght en t he cast l e nut s to t he l ower t or que
speci f i cat i on, t hen t i ght en it onl y f ar enough t o al i gn
t he sl ot wi t h t he knuckl e ball j oi nt pi n hol e. Do not
al i gn t he cast l e nut s by l ooseni ng it.
NOTE: Insert new cot t er pi ns (H) i nto t he bal l j oi nt pi n
hol es f r om t he f ront to t he r ear of t he vehi c l e, and
bend its end as shown. Chec k t he ball j oi nt pi n hol e
di rect i on bef ore connect i ng t he ball j oi nt .
46. Inst al l t he t i e-rod end ball j oi nt s to eac h knuckl e wi t h
t he nut s (I) and new cotter pi ns (J) (see st ep 32 on
page 17-64).
47. Posi t i on t he st eer i ng gear box on t he rear engi ne
mount base bracket .
48. Inst al l t he P/S f l ui d return l i ne c l amp (A) wi t h t he bolt.
6x 1.0 mm
9.8 N-m
(1.0 kgf m, 7.2 Ibf-ft)
49. Sec ur e t he P/S f l ui d return li ne (B) wi t h t he c l amp (C).
(cont ' d)
14-211
Tr ansmi ssi on Installati on (cont' d)
50. Inst al l t he was her s (A) bet ween t he st eer i ng gear box
and t he r ear engi ne mount base bracket , t hen i nst al l
t he gear box st i f f eners (B) and t he bol t s on t he left si de
of t he st eer i ng gear box, and l oosel y t i ght en t he bol t s.
14x 1. 5 mm
74 N-m
(7.5 k g f m, 54 Ibf f t )
10x 1. 25 mm
59 N-m
43 Ibf f t )
14 x 1.5 mm
74 N-m
(7.5 k g f m, 54 Ibf f t )
51. Inst al l t he st eer i ng gear box mount i ng bracket bol t s
(A), t hen t i ght en t he bol t s on t he left si de of t he
st eer i ng gear box to t he speci f i ed t or que.
10x 1. 25 mm
38 N-m (3.9 k g f m, 28 Ibf f t )
C
6 x 1.0 mm
9.8 N-m (1.0 k g f m, 7.2 Ibf f t )
52. i nst al l t he heat shi el d (B) wi t h t he bol t s (C).
53. Inst al l t he r ear engi ne mount upper bracket (A), t he
bol t s (B), and a new bolt (C), and t i ght en t he bol t s.
,25 mm
54. Inst al l t he rear engi ne mount wi t h new bol t s (A).
A
10x 1. 25 mm
54 N-m (5.5 k g f m, 40 Ibf f t )
Repl ac e.
12 x 1.25 mm
78 N-m (8.0 k g f m, 58 Ibf f t )
Repl ac e.
55. Loosel y i nst al l a new r ear engi ne mount bolt (B).
14-212
00
56. Sec ur e t he P/S f l ui d i nlet li ne c l amp bracket (A) and
t he P/S f l ui d ret urn hose c l amp bracket (B) wi t h t he
bol t s.
6x 1.0 mm
9.8 N-m (1.0 kgf m, 7.2 Ibf-ft)
57. Loosel y i nst al l a new front engi ne mount bolt (A).
A
10 x 1.25 mm
Repl ac e.
58. Loosel y i nst al l new t r ansmi ssi on upper mount
bracket bol t s.
12 x 1.25 mm
59 N-m (6.0 kgf m, 43 Ibf-ft)
Repl ac e.
59. Remove t he engi ne suppor t hanger .
60. Remove t he engi ne hanger adapt er (VSB02C000015)
f r om t he cyl i nder head.
VSB02C000015
(cont ' d)
14-213
61. Ti ght en t he f ront engi ne mount bolt (A).
62. Inst al l t he f ront engi ne mount st op (B) and t he c l amp
br acket (C).
63. Inst al l t he vac uum hose (D) on t he hose c l amp (E) at
t he mar k (F).
64. Ti ght en t he r ear engi ne mount bolt t o 78 N-m
(8.0 kgf -m, 58 Ibf-ft).
65. Ti ght en t he t r ansmi ssi on upper mount bol t s t o
59 N-m (6.0 k g f m, 43 Ibf-ft).
66. Connec t t he ATF c ool er hose (A) to t he ATF cool er l i ne
(B), and sec ur e t he hose wi t h t he cl i p (see page
14-220).
67. Install t he ATF cool er hose (C) on t he hose c l amp (D)
at t he mar k (E).
68. Connec t t he vac uum hose (A).
14-214
69. Connec t t he t r ansmi ssi on f l ui d pr essur e swi t ch B (3rd
cl ut ch) connect or (A), and i nst al l t he har ness c l amp
(B) on t he c l amp bracket (C).
70. Connec t t he ATF c ool er hoses (A) t o t he ATF cool er
l i nes (B), and sec ur e t he hoses wi t h t he c l i ps (see page
14-220).
71. Connec t t he shi f t sol enoi d wi r e har ness c onnec t or
(A), t he A/ T cl ut ch pr essur e cont rol sol enoi d val ve B
c onnec t or (B), and t he A/ T cl ut ch pr essur e cont rol
sol enoi d val ve C c onnec t or (C), and i nst al l t he har ness
c l amp (D) on t he c l amp bracket (E).
72. Connec t t he out put shaf t (count ershaf t ) speed sensor
connect or (A) and t he i nput shaf t (mai nshaf t ) speed
s ens or connect or (B).
(cont ' d)
14-215
Tr ansmi ssi on Installati on (cont' d)
73. Connec t t he A/ F s ens or connect or (C), t hen i nst al l it on
t he connect or br acket (D).
74. Connec t t he t r ansmi ssi on r ange swi t ch subhar ness
connect or (E), t hen i nst al l it on t he connect or bracket
(F).
75. Inst al l t he engi ne wi r e har ness c over bracket (G) on
t he ATF fi lter bracket (H).
76. Connec t t he A/ T cl ut ch pr essur e cont rol sol enoi d
val ve A c onnec t or (A) and t he t r ansmi ssi on f l ui d
pr essur e swi t c h A (2nd cl ut ch) connect or (B), and
i nst al l t he har ness c l amps (C) on t he c l amp br acket s
(D).
C
77. Inst al l t he under -hood f use/r el ay box.
14-192).
79. Inst al l t he battery base (see st ep 63 on page 5-22).
80. Inst al l t he ai r c l eaner housi ng (see page 11-332) and
t he i ntake ai r duct .
82. Loosel y i nst al l t he st rut br ace mount i ng nut s (A) on
t he st rut br ace (B), and i nst al l t he hose (C) on i ts
c l amps (D).
83. Set t he parki ng brake. St ar t t he engi ne, and shi ft t he
t r ansmi ssi on t hr ough all gear s t hr ee t i mes.
84. Chec k t he shi ft l ever oper at i on, t he A/ T gear posi t i on
i ndi cat or oper at i on, and t he shi f t cabl e adj ust ment .
85. Pl ace a f l oor j ack under t he l ower ar m, and r ai se t he
f ront suspensi on to l oad it wi t h t he vehi c l e' s wei ght .
Do not pl ace t he j ack agai nst t he bal l j oi nt pi n of t he
knuckl e.
Ti ght en t he damper pi nch bolt and t he damper fork
mount i ng nut whi l e hol di ng t he mount i ng bolt t o t he
86. Ti ght en t he l ower ar m mount i ng cast l e nut s to t he
speci f i ed t or que, t hen i nst al l t he new cot t er pi ns ont o
t he cast l e nut s (see st ep 5 on page 18-21).
87. Ti ght en t he st rut br ace mount i ng nut s t o
22 N-m (2.2 k gf m, 16 Ibf f t ).
90. Inst al l t he f ront gri l l e c over .
91. Chec k and adj ust t he f ront wheel al i gnment (see page
18-5).
92. St ar t t he engi ne wi t h t he shi f t l ever i n P or N, and
war m it up t o nor mal oper at i ng t emper at ur e (the
radi at or f an c omes on).
93. Tur n t he engi ne off, and check t he ATF l evel (see page
14-191).
94. Do t he r oad t est (see page 14-170).
14-216
<3
ATF Cool er Cl eani ng
. ATF Cool er Cl eaner GHTTTCF6H*
Magnet i c Nonbypass Spi n-On Fi l t er GTHGNBP2*
Pr ogr am 888-424-6857.
Bef ore i nst al l i ng an over haul ed or r emanuf act ur ed
aut omat i c t r ansmi ssi on, you must t hor oughl y cl ean.t he
ATF cool er t o pr event syst em cont ami nat i on. Fai l ur e t o
do so c oul d c ause a r epeat aut omat i c t r ansmi ssi on
f ai l ur e.
The cl eani ng pr ocedur e i nvol ves heat ed ATF-Z1
del i ver ed under hi gh pr essur e (100 psi ). Check t he
secur i t y of all hoses and c onnec t i ons. Al ways wear
saf et y gl asses or a f ace shi el d, al ong wi t h gl oves and
prot ect i ve cl ot hi ng. If you get ATF i n your eyes or on
your ski n, r i nse wi t h wat er i mmedi at el y.
^ WARNING
Impr oper use of t he ATF cool er cl eaner c an r esul t i n
bur ns and ot her ser i ous i nj ur i es.
Al ways wear eye prot ect i on and prot ect i ve
cl ot hi ng, and f ol l ow t hi s pr ocedur e.
1. Chec k t he f l ui d i n t he cool er c l eaner t ank. (The f l ui d
l evel shoul d be 4.5 i nc hes f r om t he t op of t he f i l l er
neck.) Adj ust t he l evel if needed; do not overf i l l . Us e
onl y Honda ATF-Z1; do not use any addi t i ves.
. FI L TER/ BREATHER
TUB E
TANK
FI L L ER
NECK
2. Pl ug t he cool er c l eaner i nto a 110 V gr ounded
el ect r i cal outlet.
INOTICEI
Make sur e t he out l et has no ot her appl i anc es (li ght
f i xt ur es, dr op l i ght s, ext ensi on cor ds) pl ugged i nto it.
Al s o, never pl ug t he cool er c l eaner i nto an ext ensi on
cor d or dr op li ght; you coul d damage t he uni t.
RED HOS E
BL UE HOS E
110V
EL ECTRI CAL
OUTL ET
AIR PURGE
VA L VE
SHOP
AIR LINE
3. Fl i p t he HEAT t oggl e swi t ch to ON; t he gr een i ndi cat or
above t he t oggl e swi t c h c omes on. Wai t 1 hour f or t he
c ool er c l eaner to r each i ts operat i ng t emper at ur e.
(The c ool er c l eaner i s r eady to use when t he
t emper at ur e gauge r eads 140 Ft o 150 F.)
NOTE: If t he red i ndi cat or above t he HEAT t oggl e
swi t c h c omes on, t he f l ui d l evel i n t he t ank i s t oo l ow
f or t he t ank heat er t o wor k (see st ep 1 of t hi s
pr ocedur e).
(cont ' d)
14-217
ATF Cool er Cl eani ng (cont' d)
4. Sel ec t t he appr opr i at e pai r of f i t t i ngs, and at t ach t hem
t o t he radi at or, to t he hos es , or to t he banj o bol t s f or
f l ow t hr ough t he ATF cool er c l eaner .
TO HOS E TO BANJ O BOL T
5. Connec t t he r ed hose to t he cool er out l et l i ne (the l i ne
t hat nor mal l y goes to t he ext er nal fi lter on t he
t r ansmi ssi on).
6. Connec t t he bl ue hose to t he cool er i nl et l i ne.
7. Connec t a shop ai r hose (regul at ed t o 100 to 125 psi )
to t he ai r pur ge val ve.
INOTICEI
The qui ck-connect fi tti ng has a one-way check val ve
t o keep ATF f r om ent er i ng your shop' s ai r syst em. Do
not r emove or r epl ace t he fi tti ng. At t ach t he coupl er
pr ovi ded wi t h t he cool er c l eaner to your shop ai r l i ne
if your coupl er i s not compat i bl e.
8. Fl i p t he MOTOR t oggl e swi t c h t o ON; t he gr een
i ndi cat or above t he t oggl e swi t c h c omes on. Let t he
pump r un f or 5 mi nut es. Whi l e t he pump i s r unni ng,
open and c l ose t he ai r pur ge val ve per i odi cal l y t o
c aus e agi t at i on and i mpr ove t he c l eani ng pr oc ess.
Al way s open t he val ve sl owl y. At t he end of t he
5-mi nut e cl eani ng per i od, l eave t he ai r pur ge val ve
open.
NOTE: Whi l e t he pump i s r unni ng wi t h t he ai r pur ge
val ve open, it i s nor mal t o see vapor c omi ng f r om t he
f i l l er/breat her t ube vent s.
9. Wi t h t he ai r pur ge val ve open, f l i p t he MOTOR t oggl e
swi t c h t o OFF; t he gr een i ndi cat or goes off. Leave t he
ai r pur ge val ve open f or at l east 15 sec onds t o pur ge
t he l i nes and hoses of r esi dual ATF, t hen c l ose t he
val ve.
10. Di sc onnec t t he r ed and bl ue hoses f r om t he ATF
cool er . Now c onnec t t he r ed hose to t he cool er i nlet
l i ne.
11. Now c onnec t t he bl ue hose to t he c ool er out l et l i ne.
12. Fl i p t he MOTOR t oggl e swi t c h t o ON, and let t he pump
run f or 5 mi nut es. Whi l e t he pump i s r unni ng, open
and c l ose t he ai r pur ge val ve per i odi cal l y. Al ways
open t he val ve sl owl y. At t he end of t he 5-mi nut e
c l eani ng per i od, l eave t he ai r pur ge val ve open.
NOTE: Whi l e t he pump i s r unni ng wi t h t he ai r pur ge
val ve open, it i s nor mal t o s ee vapor c omi ng f r om t he
f i l l er/breat her t ube vent s.
14-218
13. Wi t h t he ai r pur ge val ve open, f l i p t he MOTOR t oggl e
swi t c h to OFF. Leave t he ai r pur ge val ve open f or at
l east 15 sec onds to pur ge t he l i nes and hoses of
r esi dual ATF, t hen c l ose t he val ve.
14. Di sconnect t he red and bl ue hoses f r om t he ATF
c ool er l i nes.
15. Connec t t he r ed and bl ue hoses to eac h ot her.
16. Di sconnect t he shop ai r f r om t he ai r purge val ve.
Di sconnect and st ow t he coupl er if used.
17. Di sconnect and st ow t he fi tti ngs f r om t he ATF c ool er
i nl et and outlet l i nes.
18. Unpl ug t he cool er c l eaner f r om t he 110 V out l et .
Tool Mai nt enanc e
Fol l ow t hese i nst r uct i ons to keep t he ATF c ool er c l eaner
wor ki ng properl y:
Repl ace t he t wo magnet i c nonbypass spi n-on f i l t ers
after ever y 20 hour s or of use, based on t he hour
met er , or when you not i ce a rest ri ct i on i n t he ATF
f l ow.
Chec k t he l evel and t he condi t i on of t he f l ui d i n t he
t ank bef ore eac h use.
Repl ace t he ATF in t he t ank when it l ooks dark or di rty.
\ MAGNETI C
\ NONBYPAS S
TANK SPIN-ON FIL TER
HEATER
14-219
ATF Cool er Hose Repl acement
Expl oded Vi ew
X ^ \ YQl
Q ^Tn -
*7 T
fl
*7 T >
NOTE: When i nst al l i ng t he hose c l amps , make sur e t hey do not i nt erf ere wi t h t he sur r oundi ng par t s.
1. Inst al l t he ATF c ool er hoses over t he ATF c ool er l i nes wi t h t he cl i ps at appr opr i at e poi nt s i n r ef er ence t o t he f ol l owi ng
l i st . Al i gn t he pi nk pai nt mar k (J) poi nt i ng up, and t he whi t e pai nt mark (K) poi nt i ng down.
Poi nt Di st anc e f r om Hose End t o Cl i p (L) Hose End Cont ac t Poi nt
A 6 - 8 mm (0.24-0.31 i n) ATF Fi l t er
B 6 - 8 mm (0.24-0.31 i n) Bul ge
C
6 - 8 mm (0.24-0.31 i n) Bul ge
D
6 - 8 mm (0.24-0.31 i n) Bul ge
E
6 - 8 mm (0.24-0.31 i n) Bul ge
F
6 - 8 mm (0.24-0.31 i n) Bul ge
G
6 - 8 mm (0.24-0.31 i n) Bul ge
H 24 mm (0.080.16 i n) Bul ge
I
24 mm (0.080.16 i n) Bul ge
2. Sec ur e t he ATF c ool er hose wi t h t he c l amp (M) at t he pi nk pai nt l i ne (N).
3. Refi ll t he t r ansmi ssi on wi t h ATF t o t he pr oper l evel (see page 14-191).
14-220
ATF Filter Repl acement
NOTE: The ATF fi lter i s not a sc hedul ed mai nt enanc e
i t em. Repl ac e t he fi lter onl y if it i s l eaki ng, or
c ont ami nat ed, or when t he t r ansmi ssi on i s bei ng
over haul ed or r epl aced wi t h a r emanuf act ur ed uni t.
bl ock t he r ear wheel s, and r ai se t he f ront of t he
2. Remove t he spl ash shi el d. *
4. Rei nst al l t he dr ai n pl ug wi t h a new seal i ng washer (B).
5. Di sconnect t he ATF cool er hoses (A) f r om t he ATF
fi lter (B).
A
6. Remove t he ATF fi lter hol der (C).
7. Repl ace t he ATF fi lter, t hen sec ur e it wi t h t he ATF fi lter
hol der and t he bolt.
8. Connec t t he ATF cool er hoses t o t he ATF fi lter, and
sec ur e t he hoses wi t h t he cl i ps (see page 14-220).
14-192).
14-221
Shi f t Lever Removal
1. Remove t he cent er c onsol e (see page 20-158).
2. Move t he shi f t l ever t o R.
3. Remove t he nut sec ur i ng t he shi f t c abl e end.
4. Unl ock t he r et ai ner (A).
5. Rot at e t he soc ket hol der ret ai ner (A) count er cl ockwi se
(B) unti l it st ops, and push t he ret ai ner lock (C) i nto t he
socket hol der ret ai ner t o l ock t he ret ai ner.
A
6. Sl i de t he soc ket hol der (A) away f r om t he bracket as
shown t o r emove t he shi f t c abl e (B) f r om t he shi f t
c abl e bracket (C). Do not r emove t he shi f t cabl e by
pul l i ng t he shi f t c abl e gui de (D).
c
14-222
0
7. Di sconnect t he shi ft lock sol enoi d connect or (A) and
t he park pi n swi t c h/A/T gear posi t i on i ndi cat or panel
li ght connect or (B).
Type A Shi f t Lever
Type B Shi f t Lever
8. Remove t he shi f t lock sol enoi d connect or , t he park pi n
swi t c h/A/T gear posi t i on i ndi cat or panel li ght
connect or , and t he har ness c over (C) f r om t he shi f t
l ever br acket base.
9. Remove t he shi ft l ever mount i ng bol t s (D), t hen
r emove t he shi f t l ever assembl y (E).
14-223
Shi f t Lever Installati on
1. Inst al l t he shi f t l ever assembl y (A).
Ty pe B Shi f t L ever
2. Connec t t he shi ft l ock sol enoi d c onnec t or (B) and t he
park pi n swi t c h/A/T gear posi t i on i ndi cat or panel li ght
c onnec t or (C), and i nst al l t he har ness c over (D) on t he
shi ft l ever bracket base.
3. Push t he shi f t cabl e (A) unti l it st ops, t hen r el ease it.
Pul l t he shi ft c abl e back one st ep s o t hat t he shi ft
posi t i on i s i n R. Do not hol d t he shi f t c abl e gui de (B) t o
adj ust t he shi f t c abl e.
4. Tur n t he i gni t i on swi t ch t o ON (II), and c hec k t hat t he R
posi t i on i ndi cat or c omes on.
14-224
6. Pl aee t he shi f t l ever i n R, t hen i nser t a 6.0 mm (0.24 i n)
pi n (A) i nto t he posi t i oni ng hol e (B) on t he shi f t l ever ,
t hr ough t he posi t i oni ng hol e on t he shi f t l ever , and
i nto t he posi t i oni ng hol e on t he br acket . Us e onl y a
6.0 mm (0.24 i n) pi n wi t h no bur r s.
Ty pe B Shi f t Lever
7. Al i gn t he shi f t c abl e sl ot (A) bet ween t he soc ket hol der
(B) and t he soc ket hol der r et ai ner (C) wi t h t he openi ng
(D) i n t he shi f t c abl e br acket (E), t hen sl i de t he hol der
i nto t he br acket whi l e i nst al l i ng t he shi ft c abl e end (F)
over t he mount i ng st ud (G) by al i gni ng i t s squar e hol e
(H) wi t h t he squar e fi tti ng (I) at t he bot t om of t he st ud.
Do not i nst al l t he shi f t c abl e by hol di ng t he shi f t c abl e
gui de (J).
NOTE: When t he socket hol der i s i nst al l ed i n t he shi ft
cabl e br acket , t he r et ai ner l ock i s unhi nged and
r el eases t he hol der r et ai ner l ock, t hen t he hol der
ret ai ner r et ur ns under spr i ng f or ce to sec ur e t he shi ft
c abl e.
8. Push t he ret ai ner l ock (A) f ul l y t o lock t he socket
hol der ret ai ner (B), and make sur e t hat t he ret ai ner
l ock f i t s i nto t he hi nged-j oi nt (C). If t he ret ai ner lock
does not fi t wi t h t he edge of t he hi nged-j oi nt , rotate
t he hol der ret ai ner c ount er c l oc kwi se whi l e pushi ng
t he r et ai ner lock unti l it l ocks.
(cont ' d)
14-225
Shi f t Lever Inst al l at i on (cont' d)
9. Make sur e t he shi f t c abl e end (A) i s pr oper l y i nst al l ed
on t he mount i ng st ud (B).
If t he c abl e end i s out of posi t i on on t he mount i ng
st ud, r emove t he shi f t c abl e f r om t he shi f t c abl e
braket , and r ei nst al l t he shi f t c abl e. Do not i nst al l
t he shi f t c abl e end on t he mount i ng st ud whi l e t he
shi f t c abl e i s on t he shi f t c abl e braket .
If t he c abl e end r i des on t he bot t om of t he mount i ng
st ud, rotate t he st ud and al i gn t he squar e fi tti ng
wi t h t he hol e.
Improperly installed:
m
Shi f t c abl e end
posi t i ons
out of t he
mount i ng st ud.
Shi f t c abl e end
r i des on
t he bot t om
of t he mount i ng
st ud.
Properly installed:
A
10. Inst al l and t i ght en t he nut (A) on t he shi f t c abl e end.
8 x 1.25 mm
22 Nm (2.2 kgf-m, 16 Ibf f t }
11. Remove t he 6.0 mm (0.24 i n) pi n (B) t hat was i nst al l ed
t o hol d t he shi f t l ever .
12. Tur n t he i gni t i on swi t c h t o ON (II). Move t he shi f t l ever
t o eac h posi t i on, and c hec k t hat t he A/ T gear posi t i on
i ndi cat or f ol l ows t he t r ansmi ssi on r ange swi t c h.
13. Shi f t t he shi f t l ever to P, and c hec k t hat t he shi f t lock
wor ks pr oper l y. Push t he shi ft lock r el ease, and c hec k
t hat t he shi f t l ever r el eases, and al so c hec k t hat t he
shi f t l ever l ocks when it i s shi f t ed back t o P.
14. Rei nst al l t he cent er c onsol e (see page 20-158).
14-226
Shi f t Lever Di sassembl y/Reassembl y
NOTE: Make sur e not to get any si l i cone gr ease on t he t er mi nal part of t he c onnec t or s and swi t c hes, espec i al l y if you
have si l i cone gr ease on your hands of gl oves.
, SCREWS
5x0.8 mm
3 N-m (0.3 kgf m, 2 Ibf-ft)
Repl ac e.
SHIFT LEVER KNOB
SHIFT LEVER ROD
RELEASE SPRING
A/T GEAR POSITION
INDICATOR PANEL
SCREW
0.4 N-m
(0.04 kgf m, 0.29 Ibf-ft)
Repl ac e.
HARNESS
WIRE TIES
A/T GEAR POSITION
INDICATOR PANEL
BASE
8x1.25 mm
22 N-m
(2.2 kgf m, 16 Ibf ft)
SHIFT LOCK
SOLENOID
PLUNGER
SPRING
SHIFT LOCK
SOLENOID
PLUNGER
8 x 1.25 mm
22 N-m
(cont ' d)
14-227
Shi f t Lever Di sassembl y/Reassembl y (cont' d)
NOTE: Make sur e not to get any si l i c one gr ease on t he t er mi nal part of t he c onnec t or s and swi t c hes, espec i al l y i f you
have si l i c one gr ease on your hands of gl oves.
SCREWS
5 x 0.8 mm
3Nm (0.3 kgf m, 2 Ibfft)
Repl ac e.
SHIFT LEVER KNOB
SHIFT LEVER ROD
A/ T GEAR POSITION
INDICATOR PANEL
LIGHT BULB
SHIFT LOCK
STOP
A/ T GEAR POSITION
INDICATOR PANEL
LEVER COVER
A/ T GEAR POSITION
INDICATOR PANEL BASE
SHIFT LOCK
SOLENOID
PLUNGER
SPRING
SHIFT LOCK
SOLENOID
PLUNGER
8 x 1.25 mm
22 Nm
SHIFT LEVER
BRACKET BASE
8x1.25 mm
22 Nm
14-228
Shi f t Cabl e Repl acement
2. Move t he shi ft l ever t o R.
3. Remove t he nut sec ur i ng t he shi f t c abl e end.
5. Rotate t he socket hol der r et ai ner (A) count er cl ockwi se
(B) unti l it st ops, and push t he r et ai ner lock (C) i nto t he
socket hol der ret ai ner to l ock t he ret ai ner.
A
6. Sl i de t he socket hol der (A) away f r om t he bracket as
shown to r emove t he shi f t c abl e (B) f r om t he shi ft
cabl e bracket (C). Do not r emove t he shi ft cabl e by
pul l i ng t he shi f t cabl e gui de (D).
c
bl ock both r ear wheel s, and r ai se t he front of t he
(cont ' d)
14-229
Shi f t Cabl e Repl acement (cont' d)
8. Vehi c l es wi t h J HM VINs: Remove t he shi f t c abl e c over
(A).
9. Vehi c l es wi t h J HM VINs: Remove t he spr i ng cl i p (B)
and t he cont rol pi n (C), and separ at e t he shi f t c abl e
end (D) f r om t he sel ect or cont r ol l ever (E). Remove
t he t wo bol t s sec ur i ng t he shi f t c abl e bracket (F).
10. Vehi c l es wi t h 1HG VINs: Remove t he shi ft c abl e c over
(A), and r emove t he t wo bol t s sec ur i ng t he shi f t c abl e
br acket (B).
11. Vehi c l es wi t h 1HG VINs: Pry up t he lock t ab of t he lock
was her (C), and r emove t he lock bolt (D) and t he lock
was her , t hen separ at e t he shi f t c abl e (E) f r om t he
cont r ol shaf t (F).
12. Remove t he heat shi el d.
14-230
13. Remove t he bol t s sec ur i ng t he shi ft c abl e bracket (A).
6x 1.0 mm
9.8 N-m
{1.0 kgf m, 7.2 Ibf-ft)
14. Remove t he shi f t c abl e gr ommet (B), and pull out t he
shi f t c abl e (C).
15. Insert a new shi f t c abl e t hr ough t he gr ommet hol e (D),
and i nst al l t he gr ommet i n i ts hol e. Do not bend t he
16. Inst al l t he shi ft c abl e bracket .
17. Inst al l t he heat shi el d.
18. Vehi c l es wi t h J HM VINs: Appl y mol ybdenum gr ease
t o t he hol e i n t he bushi ng (A) i n t he shi ft cabl e end (B).
At t ach t he shi f t c abl e end to t he sel ect or cont rol l ever
(C), t hen i nser t t he cont r ol pi n (D) into t he cont rol l ever
hol e t hr ough t he shi f t c abl e end, and sec ur e t he
cont rol pi n wi t h t he spr i ng cl i p (E). Do not bend t he
6x 1.0 mm
12 N-m
(1.2 kgf m, 8.7 Ibf ft)
9.8 N-m
(1.0 kgf m,
7.2 Ibfft)
19. Vehi c l es wi t h J HM VINs: Install t he shi ft cabl e bracket
(F) wi t h t he t wo bol t s (G).
20. Vehi c l es wi t h J HM VINs: Install t he shi ft cabl e c over
(H).
(cont ' d)
14-231
Shi f t Cabl e Repl acement (cont' d) Shi f t Cabl e Adj ust ment
21. Vehi c l es wi t h 1 HG VINs: Inst al l t he sel ect or cont rol
l ever (A) over t he sel ec t or cont rol shaf t (B). Sec ur e t he
cont rol l ever wi t h a new lock washer (C) and t he lock
bolt (D), t hen bend t he lock t ab of t he lock was her
agai nst t he bolt head. Do not bend t he shi f t c abl e
exc essi vel y.
D
6 x 1.0 mm
14 N m
(1.4 k g f m,
10.1 Ibf f t )
6x 1. 0 mm
12 N-m (1.2 kgf -m, 8.7 Ibf f t )
6 x 1.0 mm
9.8 N m
(1.0 kgf -m,
7.2 Ibf f t )
22. Vehi c l es wi t h 1 HG VINs: Inst al l t he shi f t c abl e bracket
(E) wi t h t he t wo bol t s (F).
23. Vehi c l es wi t h 1 HG VINs: Inst al l t he shi f t c abl e c over
(G).
24. Install t he shi f t c abl e on t he shi ft l ever , and adj ust t he
shi f t c abl e (see page 14-232).
25. Inst al l t he cent er c onsol e (see page 20-158).
2. Move t he shi f t l ever to R.
3. Remove t he nut sec ur i ng t he shi ft cabl e end.
4. Unl ock t he ret ai ner (A).
14-232
5. Rot at e t he socket hol der ret ai ner (A) count er cl ockwi se
(B) unti l it st ops, and push t he ret ai ner lock (C) i nto t he
socket hol der ret ai ner to lock t he ret ai ner.
A
6. Sl i de t he socket hol der (A) away f r om t he bracket as
s hown to r emove t he shi f t cabl e (B) f r om t he shi f t
c abl e bracket (C). Do not r emove t he shi ft cabl e by
pul l i ng t he shi f t c abl e gui de (D).
c
7. Push t he shi f t cabl e (A) unti l it st ops, t hen r el ease it.
Pull t he shi f t cabl e back one st ep s o t hat t he shi f t
posi t i on i s i n R. Do not hol d t he shi f t c abl e gui de (B) t o
adj ust t he shi f t c abl e.
8. Tur n t he i gni ti on swi t c h to ON (II), and c hec k t hat t he R
posi t i on i ndi cat or c omes on.
(cont ' d)
14-233
Shift Cabl e Adj ust ment (cont' d)
10. Pl ace t he shi ft l ever i n R, t hen i nser t a 6.0 mm (0.24 i n)
pi n (A) into t he posi t i oni ng hol e (B) on t he shi f t l ever ,
t hr ough t he posi t i oni ng hol e on t he shi f t l ever , and
i nto t he posi t i oni ng hol e on t he bracket . Us e onl y a
6.0 mm (0.24 i n) pi n wi t h no bur r s.
Ty pe A Shi f t Lever
11_ Al i gn t he shi ft c abl e sl ot (A) bet ween t he socket hol der
(B) and t he socket hol der ret ai ner (C) wi t h t he openi ng
(D) i n t he shi ft c abl e bracket (E), t hen sl i de t he hol der
i nto t he bracket whi l e i nst al l i ng t he shi f t cabl e end (F)
over t he mount i ng st ud ( G) by al i gni ng its squar e hol e
(H) wi t h t he squar e fi tti ng (I) at t he bot t om of t he st ud.
Do not i nst al l t he shi f t cabl e by hol di ng t he shi ft cabl e
gui de (J).
NOTE: When t he socket hol der i s i nst al l ed i n t he shi f t
c abl e br acket , t he ret ai ner lock i s unhi nged and
r el eases t he hol der ret ai ner l ock, t hen t he hol der
ret ai ner r et ur ns under spr i ng f or ce to sec ur e t he shi f t
c abl e.
14-234
12. Push t he ret ai ner lock (A) f ully to lock t he socket
hol der ret ai ner (B), and make sur e that t he ret ai ner
lock f i t s i nto t he hi nged-j oi nt (C). If t he ret ai ner lock
does not fit wi t h t he edge of t he hi nged-j oi nt , rotate
t he hol der ret ai ner count er cl ockwi se whi l e pushi ng
t he ret ai ner lock unti l it l ocks.
13. Make sur e t he shi ft cabl e end (A) i s properl y i nst al l ed
on t he mount i ng st ud (B).
If t he cabl e end i s out of posi t i on on t he mount i ng
st ud, r emove t he shi ft cabl e f r om t he shi ft c abl e
bracket , and rei nst al l t he shi f t cabl e. Do not i nst al l
t he shi f t cabl e end on t he mount i ng st ud whi l e t he
shi f t cabl e i s on t he shi ft cabl e bracket .
If t he cabl e end r i des on t he bottom of t he mount i ng
st ud, rotate t he st ud and al i gn t he squar e fi tti ng
wi t h t he hol e.
Improperly installed:
Shi f t c abl e end
posi t i ons
out of t he
mount i ng st ud.
Shi f t c abl e end
r i des on
t he bot t om
of t he mount i ng
st ud.
Properly installed:
14. Inst al l and t i ght en t he nut (A) on t he shi f t c abl e end.
8x1.25 mm
22 N m (2.2 kgf m, 16 Ibf ft)
15. Remove t he 6.0 mm (0.24 i n) pi n (B) t hat was i nst al l ed
to hol d t he shi f t l ever .
16. Tur n t he i gni t i on swi t c h to ON (II). Move t he shi ft l ever
t o eac h posi t i on, and check t hat t he A/ T gear posi t i on
i ndi cat or f ol l ows t he t r ansmi ssi on r ange swi t c h.
17. Shi f t t he shi f t l ever to P, and check t hat t he shi ft lock
wor ks pr oper l y. Push t he shi f t lock r el ease, and check
t hat t he shi f t l ever r el eases, and al so c hec k t hat t he
shi f t l ever l ocks when it i s shi f t ed back t o P.
14-235
A/ T Gear Posi ti on Indi cator
14-236
Ci rcui t Di agram
UNDER-HOOD
FUSE/RELAY BOX DRIVER' S UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY BOX
*1: Type A shift lever
*2: Type B shift lever
G101
PCM Connector Terminal Locations
H
7" 8 9| 10|
11
12 13 16 19
/
21
2 2 23 24
>^
25
><
26 27 28
29
/
31 3233 34 3536
/
38
/
I
(43)j /l 45|46 47
48M
BA(49P)
C O (49P)
I DK BE 1E I BBK QE E ]!
16j17|18l19 20121
^ 2 3 g p > <
29l30bl32L/
1/141142 M 44 \y\461/
14-237
A/ T Gear Posi ti on i ndi cator
Transmission Range Switch Test
bl ock t he r ear wheel s, and r ai se t he f ront of t he
. vehi c l e. Make sur e it i s sec ur el y suppor t ed.
2. Remove t he left front wheel .
3. Di sc onnec t t he t r ansmi ssi on r ange swi t ch
subhar ness connect or (A), t hen r emove t he connect or
f r om t he connect or bracket (B).
Wi r e si de o f male terminals
4. Remove t he har ness c l amps (C) f r om t he c l amp
bracket (D).
5. Chec k f or cont i nui t y bet ween t he t er mi nal s at t he
subhar ness connect or . Ther e shoul d be cont i nui t y
bet ween t he t er mi nal s in t he f ol l owi ng t abl e f or eac h
swi t c h posi t i on.
Tr ansmi ssi on Range Swi t c h Subhar nes s Connec t or
Posi t i on/ Connec t or Ter mi nal / Si gnal Connec t i ons
U3
GND
o
o
o
u-
1 o~o
ATP
2-1
o +o
o
o
ATP
FWD
O
o
o
o
7
ATP
NP
O
o
8
D3
O
O
10
ATP
RVSj
O
6. Tr ansmi ssi on r ange swi t ch t est i s compl et ed if t he
t est r esul t s ar e OK , go to st ep 13.
If t her e i s no cont i nui t y bet ween any t er mi nal s, go to
st ep 7.
7. Remove t he t r ansmi ssi on r ange swi t c h cover .
V ' / / 6 x 1 . 0 m m
> > ^ / 12 N-m
(fo^j^ (1.2 k g f m,
i ^r 8.7 ibf-ft)
14-238
9. Chec k for cont i nui t y bet ween t he t er mi nal s at t he
t r ansmi ssi on r ange swi t c h connect or . Ther e shoul d
be cont i nui t y bet ween t he t er mi nal s i n t he f ol l owi ng
t abl e f or eac h t r ansmi ssi on r ange swi t ch posi t i on.
Tr ansmi ssi on Range Swi t c h Connec t or
Position/Connector Terminal/Signal Connections
N
D
D3
2
1
ATP
RVS
a
a
D3
o
ATP
NP
ATP
FWD
O
o
a
a
a
6
a
o
8
o
ATP
2-1
1
GND
O
O
o
-o
o
a - o
o-o
10. If t he t r ansmi ssi on r ange swi t ch cont i nui t y check i s
OK, r epl ace t he f aul t y t r ansmi ssi on range swi t ch
subhar ness.
If t her e i s no cont i nui t y bet ween any t er mi nal s, go to
st ep 11.
11. Remove t he t r ansmi ssi on r ange swi t c h, and check t he
end of t he sel ect or cont rol shaf t (A).
Sel ec t or Cont r ol Shaf t Spec i f i c at i ons:
Wi dt h (B): 6.1 - 6 . 2 mm (0. 240-0. 244 i n)
End Gap (C): 1. 8- 2. 0 mm (0. 07-0. 08 i n)
12. If t he measur ement s of the sel ect or cont rol shaf t end
are wi t hi n t he st andar d, r epl ace t he t r ansmi ssi on
r ange swi t c h (see page 14-240). If t he measur ement s
ar e out of t he st andar d, repai r t he sel ect or cont rol
shaf t end, and r echeck t he t r ansmi ssi on range swi t ch
cont i nui t y.
13. Chec k t he c onnec t or s f or r ust , di rt, or oi l , and cl ean or
r epai r if nec essar y. Then connect t he connect or
sec ur el y.
14. Inst al l t he har ness c l amps to t he c l amp bracket .
15. Inst al l t he t r ansmi ssi on range swi t ch c over .
16. Inst al l t he left front wheel .
14-239
Tr ansmi ssi on Range Swi t c h Repl acement
bl ock t he r ear wheel s , and r ai se t he f ront of t he
3. Move t he shi f t l ever to N.
4. Remove t he t r ansmi ssi on r ange swi t c h c over .
5. Di sc onnec t t he t r ansmi ssi on r ange swi t c h connect or .
6. Remove t he t r ansmi ssi on r ange swi t c h.
7. Make sur e t he sel ect or cont rol shaf t i s i n t he N
posi t i on. If nec essar y, move t he shi ft l ever f r om P to
N.
NOTE: Do not use t he sel ect or cont rol shaf t t o adj ust
t he shi f t posi t i on. If t he sel ect or cont rol shaf t t i ps ar e
squeezed t oget her it wi l l c aus e a f aul t y si gnal or
posi t i on due t o pl ay bet ween t he sel ect or cont rol
shaf t and t he t r ansmi ssi on r ange swi t c h.
8. Set a new t r ansmi ssi on r ange swi t c h (A) to t he N
posi t i on. Al i gn t he cut out s (B) on t he rot ary-f rame
wi t h t he neut ral posi t i oni ng cut out s (C) on t he
t r ansmi ssi on r ange swi t c h. Then put a 2.0 mm
(0.08 i n) f eel er gauge bl ade (D) i n t he cut out s to hol d
t he t r ansmi ssi on r ange swi t c h i n t he N posi t i on.
NOTE: Be sur e t o us e a 2.0 mm (0.08 i n) bl ade or
equi val ent t o hol d t he t r ansmi ssi on r ange swi t c h i n
t he N posi t i on.
14-240
9. Inst al l t he t r ansmi ssi on r ange swi t ch (A) gent l y on t he
sel ect or cont r ol shaf t (B) whi l e hol di ng it i n t he N
posi t i on wi t h t he 2.0 mm (0.08 in) bl ade (C).
10. Ti ght en t he bol t s on t he t r ansmi ssi on r ange swi t c h
whi l e you cont i nue t o hol d t he N posi t i on. Do not
move t he t r ansmi ssi on r ange swi t ch when t i ght eni ng
t he bol t s. Then r emove t he bl ade.
6 x 1.0 mm
12 N m (1.2 k g f m, 8.7 Ibf-ft)
11. Chec k t he connect or f or r ust , di rt , or oi l , and c l ean or
r epai r if nec essar y. Then c onnec t t he t r ansmi ssi on
r ange swi t ch connect or sec ur el y.
12. Tur n t he i gni ti on swi t c h t o ON (II). Move t he shi f t l ever
t hr ough all posi t i ons, and ver i f y t he t r ansmi ssi on
r ange swi t c h mat ch wi t h t he A/ T gear posi t i on
i ndi cat or.
13. Chec k t hat t he engi ne wi l l st ar t wi t h t he shi ft l ever i n P
and N, and wi l l not st art i n any ot her shi ft l ever
posi t i on.
14. Chec k t hat t he back-up l i ght s c ome on when t he shi f t
l ever i s i n R.
15. Al l ow t he front wheel s t o rotate f r eel y, t hen st art t he
engi ne, and c hec k t he shi f t l ever oper at i on.
16. Inst al l t he t r ansmi ssi on r ange swi t c h c over (A).
6x 1. 0 mm
12 N-m (1.2 k g f m, 8.7 Ibf-ft)
17. Inst al l t he left f ront wheel .
14-241
A/ T Gear Posi t i on Indi cator Panel Li ght Har ness Repl acement
NOTE: The A/ T gear posi t i on i ndi cat or panel li ght
har ness and t he park pi n swi t c h ar e not avai l abl e
separ at el y. Repl ac e t he A/ T gear posi t i on i ndi cat or panel
li ght har ness and t he park pi n swi t c h as a set .
2. Remove t he shi f t l ever assembl y (see page 14-222).
3. Wr ap t he end of a flat-ti p sc r ewdr i ver wi t h t ape, pry
t he shi f t l ever knob c over l ocks, t hen r emove t he shi f t
l ever knob c over (A).
4. Remove t he s c r ews (B), and r emove t he shi f t l ever
knob (C) f r om t he shi f t l ever .
5. Remove t he A/ T gear posi t i on i ndi cat or panel li ght
socket (D) f r om t he i ndi cat or panel base (E).
har ness f r om t he har ness gui des of t he i ndi cat or
panel base.
7. Remove t he A/ T gear posi t i on i ndi cat or panel bas e,
t hen di sassembl e t he i ndi cat or panel (F) and t he
i ndi cat or panel base.
8. Rel ease t he lock (A) of t he shi f t lock r el ease, and
r emove t he shi f t lock r el ease and t he r el ease spr i ng
(B).
14-242
9. Remove t he s c r ew (A), and cut t he har ness wi r e ti e
(B), and r emove t he li ght bul b (C) f r om t he socket .
B
10. Remove t he park pi n swi t c h/A/T gear posi t i on
i ndi cat or panel li ght har ness (D).
11. Install a new park pi n swi t c h/A/T gear posi t i on
i ndi cat or panel li ght har ness, and sec ur e t he park pi n
swi t ch wi t h a new sc r ew.
12. Ti e t he park pi n swi t c h/A/T gear posi t i on i ndi cat or
panel li ght har ness and t he shi ft lock sol enoi d har ness
at t he gui de wi t h a new har ness wi r e t i e.
13. Install t he A/ T gear posi t i on i ndi cat or panel li ght bul b
in t he socket .
14. Install t he r el ease spr i ng (A) i n t he shi f t lock r el ease
(B).
15. Install t he shi f t lock r el ease and t he r el ease spr i ng on
t he r el ease shaf t end.
16. Make sur e t hat t he r el ease spr i ng end (A) i s i nst al l ed
i n t he shi f t l ock r el ease (B), and t he hooked end (C) i s
on t he st op (D).
c
(cont ' d)
14-243
Ml Gear Posi ti on i ndi cator
A/T Gear Position Indicator Panel Light Harness Replacement (cont'd)
17. Install t he A/ T gear posi t i on i ndi cat or panel base (A). 21. Appl y si l i cone gr ease t o t he t op (D) of t he shi ft l ever
r od.
NOTE: Make sur e not to get any si l i cone gr ease on t he
espec i al l y if you have si l i c one gr ease on your hands
of gl oves.
22. Inst al l t he shi ft l ever knob (E) over t he shi ft l ever.
23. Inst al l t he shi ft l ever knob c over (F) on t he shi ft l ever
knob wi t h new s c r ews (G).
24. Inst al l t he shi f t l ever (see page 14-224).
18. Rout e t he park pi n swi t c h/A/T gear posi t i on i ndi cat or
panel li ght har nesses. Take t he sl ac k out of t he
har nes s es , and sec ur e t he har nes s es wi t h t he har ness
wi r e ti e at t he har ness gui des.
19. Install t he A/ T gear posi t i on i ndi cat or panel li ght
socket (B) in t he i ndi cat or panel base.
20. Inst al l t he A/ T gear posi t i on i ndi cat or panel (C).
14-244
separ at el y. Repl ace t he A/ T gear posi t i on i ndi cat or panel
li ght har ness and t he park pi n swi t ch as a set .
2. Remove t he shi ft l ever assembl y (see page 14-222).
t he shi f t l ever knob c over l ocks, t hen r emove t he shi f t
l ever knob cover (A).
knob (C) f r om t he shi f t l ever.
socket (D) f r om t he i ndi cat or panel (E).
panel base.
7. Remove t he A/ T gear posi t i on i ndi cat or panel base (F),
t hen di sassembl e t he i ndi cat or panel and t he
8. Remove t he li ght bul b (A) f r om t he socket .
i ndi cat or panel li ght har ness (B) and t he shi ft lock
sol enoi d har ness (C) f r om t he har ness gui de (D).
10. Inst al l a new park pi n swi t c h/A/T gear posi t i on
i ndi cat or panel li ght har ness.
panel li ght har ness and t he shi ft lock sol enoi d har ness
i n t he har ness gui de.
12. Inst al l t he A/ T gear posi t i on i ndi cat or panel li ght bul b
i n t he socket .
(cont ' d)
14-245
A/ T Gear Posi ti on i ndi cator
A/T Gear Position Indicator Panel Light Harness Replacement (cont'd)
13. Install t he A/ T gear posi t i on i ndi cat or panel base (A).
G
Replace.
14. Insert t he A/ T gear posi t i on i ndi cat or panel li ght
socket (B) t hr ough t he i ndi cat or panel base hol e, t hen
i nst al l t he socket i n t he i ndi cat or panel ( C ) .
panel li ght har nesses. Take t he sl ack out of t he
har nes s es , and sec ur e t he har nesses i n t he har ness
gui des.
16. Install t he A/ T gear posi t i on i ndi cat or panel .
17. Appl y si l i cone gr ease to t he t op (D) of t he shi ft l ever
r od.
NOTE; Make sur e not to get any si l i cone gr ease on t he
especi al l y if you have si l i cone gr ease on your hands
of gl oves.
18. i nst al l t he shi ft l ever knob (E) over t he shi f t l ever .
19. Install t he shi ft l ever knob c over (F) on t he shi ft l ever
knob wi t h new s c r ews ( G) .
20. Inst al l t he shi ft l ever assembl y (see page 14-224).
14-246
00
A/ T Interlock Syst em
DRIVER'S UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY BOX
BRAKE PEDAL POSITION SWITCH
Shi f t Loc k S y s t em Ci r cui t
DATA LINK CONNECTOR
(DLC)
SHIFT LOCK SOLENOID
Shi f t Lock S y s t em Ci r cui t
Test , page 14-253
Shi f t Lock St op/Shi f t Lock St op Cushi on
Shi f t Lock Rel ease, Rel ease Spr i ng and
Rel ease Shaf t Repl ac ement , page 14-257
ACCELERATOR
SENSOR
PARK PIN SWITCH
POWERTRAIN CONTROL
MODULE (PCM)
TRANSMISSION
RANGE SWITCH
14-247
Circuit Diagram
IGNITION SWITCH
B A T
DRIVER'S UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY BOX
. h i /
3 | 4 i 5 l 6 | 7 l > 9 110l
1
11
/ /
/|15 16 1718 19 20 21
1
22 23 24 25
><
26 27 28
1
29 30
/
32| / 34 3536
/
/
1/141 42
r
(43)144 M 46
i T T J ' a j 4 1 X1 / 1 7 18)9 1101
* i I HI HOIH Û r U o U T - U o U r i / I o n I
1
13|14|15|16|17|18|19 /J 21
1 4 ^ 2 5 ^
31j 32l33l34l35j 36
27 28
A (49P)
140 l / p Wt / ^S 146J47J48l/l
A (49P)
3 4 5 6 7 8
11 12 13 14|15 16 17 )18 /20 21
22 2 3 ( 2 4 ) ^ / ^ 7 7 /
9 10
140 l /j /l 43144j 45146pl48
C O (49P)
14~248
Shift Lock Sf stem Circuit Troubleshooting
2. Tur n t he i gni ti on swi t ch to ON (II). Make sur e t he HDS
c ommuni c at es wi t h t he PCM. If it does not, go to t he
3. Sel ec t Shi f t Lock Sol enoi d Test in t he Mi sc el l aneous
Test Menu, and check that t he shi f t lock sol enoi d
Does t he shift lock solenoid work properly?
NO- Go to st ep 4.
6. Di sc onnec t t he shi ft lock sol enoi d connect or (see
page 14-254).
8. Measur e t he vol t age bet ween shi ft lock sol enoi d
SHI FT L OCK S OL ENOI D CONNECTOR
IG1 (RED)
(Type A Shi f t Lever )
IG1 (BRN)
(Type B Shi f t Lever )
NO-Chec k f or a bl own No. 5 (7.5 A) f use in t he dr i ver ' s
open i n t he wi r e bet ween t he shi ft lock sol enoi d
c onnec t or and t he dr i ver ' s under -dash f use/r el ay . -
box . H
(cont' d)
14-249
Shift Lock Sf stem Circuit Troubleshooting f cont' d)
9. Shi f t t he shi f t l ever to P, and pr ess t he brake pedal . Do
not pr ess t he accel er at or .
10. Measur e t he vol t age bet ween shi ft lock sol enoi d
connect or t er mi nal s No. 1 and No. 2 whi l e pr essi ng
t he brake pedal .
PHIF T L OCK S OL ENOI D CONNECTOR
IG1 (RED)
G1 (BRN)
S L S (BLK)
SL S (PNK)
NO- Go to st ep 12.
11. Rel ease t he brake pedal , and measur e t he vol t age
bet ween shi ft lock sol enoi d connect or t er mi nal s No. 1
and No. 2. The shi f t l ever must be in P.
SHI FT L OCK S OL ENOI D CONNECTOR
IG1 (RED)
1G1 (BRN)
S L S (BLK)
S L S (PNK)
14. Di sc onnec t PCM connect or A (49P).
15. Check for cont i nui t y bet ween PCM c onnec t or t er mi nal
A28 and shi f t lock sol enoi d connect or t er mi nal No. 2.
SHI FT L OCK
S OL ENOI D CONNECTOR
S L S (BLK)
S L S (PNK)
n
1
2
YES - Upd at e t he PCM if it does not have t he l at est
* sympt om goes away wi t h a known-good PCM,
r epl ace t he ori gi nal PCM (see page 11-204).B
t er mi nal A28 and t he shi ft lock sol enoi d c onnec t or .i l
16. Moni t or t he Br ake Swi t c h i n t he Dat a Li st wi t h t he
HDS, and pr ess t he brake pedal .
Is the Brake Switch ON?
NO-l f t he brake li ght s c ome on, go to st ep 17. If t he
brake li ghts do not wor k, repai r t he faulty brake li ght
ci rcui t .
PCM connect or t er mi nal A28 and t he shi f t lock
s o l eno i d .
NO-Chec k t he shi f t lock mec hani sm. If t he
mec hani sm i s OK , r epl ace t he shi ft lock sol enoi d (see
page14-254). B
14-250
t er mi nal A42 and body gr ound when pr essi ng t he
brake pedal and when t he brake pedal i s r el eased.
J1I
3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 | > 9 | 1 0 |
i
11
/ /
/ | 1 5 16 1718 19 20 21
i
22 23 24 25
><
26 27 28
i
29 30
/
3 2 l / 34 3536
/
42| (43)| 44| / / | 46|X AA
BK S W (LT GRN)
Is t here bat t ery volt age when pressing t he brake pedal,
and about 0 V when t he pedal is released?
known-good PCM (see page 11 -7), t hen r echeck. If t he
sympt om goes away wi t h a known-good PCM,
r epl ace t he ori gi nal PCM (see page 11-204).H
t er mi nal A42 and t he brake pedal posi t i on swi t c h.
22. Moni t or t he A/ T P Swi t c h in t he Dat a Li st wi t h t he HDS
wi t h t he shi ft l ever in P.
Is t he A/T P Swit ch ON?
NO- Go to st ep 23.
26. Measur e t he vol t age bet ween t r ansmi ssi on r ange
swi t ch connect or t er mi nal s No. 6 and No. 10.
TRANS MI S S I ON RANGE S WI TCH CONNECTOR
ATPP ( BL K / BL U)
10
GND (BLK)
NO- Go to st ep 28.
27. Inspect t he t r ansmi ssi on r ange swi t c h (see page
14-238).
Is t he t ransmission range swit ch OK?
t he t r ansmi ssi on r ange s w i t c h .
NO-Repl ac e t he t r ansmi ssi on r ange swi t ch (see page
14-240).B
(cont' d)
14-251
Shift Lock Sf stem Circuit Troubleshooting (cont' d)
ATPP (BLU/BLK)
K kV.
7
14 15
I 4 W
17 18
13
38
PCM connect or t er mi nal B14 and t he t r ansmi ssi on
r ange swi t c h c onnec t or . B
NO- Go to st ep 32.
32. Check for cont i nui t y bet ween PCM connect or t er mi nal
B14 and t r ansmi ssi on r ange swi t ch connect or
t er mi nal No. 6.
TRANSMISSION RANGE
SWITCH CONNECTOR
22
29
23
40
ATPP (BLU/BLK)
T.
1314|151617|18
31 32| 33l 34| 35j 36
1>V| ( 4 3 ) M4 5 l 4 6
19
26
9 10
21
1)
1 2 3 4 5
r
6 7 8 9 10
ATPP(B LK /B LU)
Terminal side of
female terminals
Wire side of
female terminals
t er mi nal B14 and t he t r ansmi ssi on r ange swi t c h
c onnec t or .B
14-252
Shift Lock Solenoid Test
33. Chec k f or cont i nui t y bet ween t r ansmi ssi on r ange
swi t c h c onnec t or t er mi nal No. 10 and body gr ound.
1 2 3 4 5
6
7 8 9 10
( (BLK)
r epl ace t he or i gi nal PCM (see page 11-204).B
NO-Repai r open i n t he wi r e bet ween t r ansmi ssi on
r ange swi t c h c onnec t or t er mi nal No. 10 and body
gr ound (G101), or r epai r poor gr ound (G101).H
34. Check t he APP S ens or A (Y) i n t he Dat a Li st wi t h t he
HDS. Do not pr ess t he accel er at or .
Is t he APP sensor A opening 5 % and more, or 1.16 Vor
higher?
YE S - Ch ec k t he APP Sensor (see page 11-239).B
NO-Updat e t he PCM if it does not have t he l at est
r epl ace t he or i gi nal PCM (see page 11-204).H
A
3. Sel ec t Shi f t Lock Sol enoi d Test i n t he Mi sc el l aneous
Test Menu, and check that t he shi ft lock sol enoi d
4. Chec k that t he shi ft l ever c an be moved out of P when
t he Shi f t Lock Sol enoi d i s ON. Move t he shi f t l ever
back to P, and check that it l ocks wi t h t he Shi f t Lock
Sol enoi d i s OFF.
5. Chec k that t he shi ft lock r el eases when t he shi ft lock
r el ease i s pushed, and check that it l ocks when t he
shi f t lock r el ease i s r el eased.
6. If t he shi ft lock sol enoi d does not wor k pr oper l y, go to
t he shi ft lock syst em t r oubl eshoot i ng (see page
14-249).
' 10 model
Shi f t Lock Sol enoi d Repl acement
2. Rel ease t he l ock t abs (A) ret ai ni ng t he shi ft l ock
sol enoi d usi ng t hi n-bl aded sc r ewdr i ver s.
3. Insert a 6.0 mm (0.24 i n) pi n (A) i nto t he gui de hol e (B)
(' 08-09 model s), and push t he shi f t lock sol enoi d (C)
out .
' 08-09 model s
D
4. Di sc onnec t t he shi f t l ock sol enoi d connect or (D).
5. Repl ac e t he shi f t lock sol enoi d, t he sol enoi d pl unger
(E), and t he pl unger spr i ng (F) assembl y.
6. Appl y si l i cone gr ease t o t he t i p (G) of t he shi ft lock
st op and t he sol enoi d pl unger .
NOTE: Make sur e not t o get any si l i c one gr ease on t he
or gl oves.
7. Connec t t he shi f t l ock sol enoi d connect or .
8. Inst al l t he shi f t lock sol enoi d by al i gni ng t he j oi nt of
t he shi ft lock sol enoi d pl unger wi t h t he ti p of t he shi f t
lock st op, t hen push t he shi ft l ock sol enoi d i nto t he
shi f t l ever sec ur el y.
9. Inst al l t he shi f t l ever assembl y (see page 14-224).
14-254
2. Remove t he A/ T gear posi t i on i ndi cat or panel f r om
t he shi ft l ever (see page 14-228).
3. Remove t he shi ft lock sol enoi d har ness (A) f r om t he
har ness gui des.
A
4. Rel ease t he lock t ab (B) ret ai ni ng t he shi ft lock
sol enoi d usi ng a t hi n-bl aded sc r ewdr i ver .
5. Repl ace t he shi ft lock sol enoi d (C), t he sol enoi d
pl unger (D), and t he pl unger spr i ng (E) assembl y.
6. Appl y si l i cone gr ease to t he ti p (F) of t he shi f t lock st op
and t he sol enoi d pl unger.
t er mi nal part of t he connect or s and swi t c hes,
especi al l y if you have si l i cone gr ease on your hands
or gl oves.
7. Install t he shi ft lock sol enoi d by al i gni ng t he j oi nt of
t he shi ft lock sol enoi d pl unger wi t h t he tip of t he shi ft
lock st op, t hen push t he shi f t lock sol enoi d i nto t he
shi ft l ever sec ur el y.
8. Install t he shi ft lock sol enoi d har ness i n t he har ness
gui des.
9. Install t he A/ T gear posi t i on i ndi cat or panel on t he
shi ft l ever (see page 14-228).
14-255
Shift Lock Stop/Shift Lock Stop Cushion Replacement
1. Remove t he shi ft l ock sol enoi d (see page 14-254).
2. Remove t he shi ft lock st op (A) and t he st op c ushi on
(B) as a set .
3. Appl y si l i c one gr ease t o t he pi n (C) of t he shi f t l ever
bracket , t hen i nst al l t he shi f t l ock st op over t he pi n.
NOTE: Make sur e not t o get any si l i c one gr ease on t he
espec i al l y if you have si l i c one gr ease on your hands
or gl oves.
4. Inst al l a new shi f t l ock st op.
5. Inst al l t he shi f t lock sol enoi d (see page 14-253).
t he shi f t l ever (see page 14-228).
3. Rel ease t he lock t ab (A) ret ai ni ng t he shi ft lock
sol enoi d usi ng a t hi n-bl aded sc r ewdr i ver .
4. Remove t he shi f t lock st op (B) and t he st op c ushi on
(C) as a set .
5. Appl y si l i cone gr ease to t he pi n (D) of t he shi ft l ever
br acket , t hen i nst al l t he shi ft lock st op over t he pi n.
NOTE: Make sur e not t o get any si l i cone gr ease on t he
t er mi nal part of .the connect or s and swi t c hes,
or gl oves.
6. Inst al l a new shi ft lock st op.
7. Inst al l t he shi ft lock sol enoi d by al i gni ng t he j oi nt of
t he shi f t lock sol enoi d pl unger wi t h t he ti p of t he shi ft
lock st op, t hen push t he shi ft lock sol enoi d into t he
shi f t l ever sec ur el y.
8. Inst al l t he A/ T gear posi t i on i ndi cat or panel on t he
shi f t l ever (see page 14-228).
14-256
Shi ft Lock Rel ease, Rel ease Spr i ng, and Rel ease Shaf t Repl acement
t he shi ft l ever (see page 14-227).
3. Rel ease t he lock (A) of t he shi ft lock r el ease, and
r emove t he shi ft lock r el ease and t he r el ease spr i ng
(B).
4. Rel ease t he lock (C) of t he r el ease shaf t , and r emove
t he shaf t (D).
5. Repl ace t he shi ft lock r el ease, t he r el ease spr i ng, or
t he r el ease shaf t .
6. Inst al l t he r el ease spr i ng (A) in t he shi f t l ock r el ease
(B).
7. Inst al l t he r el ease shaf t (C) in t he shi ft l ever , and i nst al l
t he shi ft lock r el ease and t he r el ease spr i ng on t he
r el ease shaf t end.
8. Make sur e t hat t he r el ease spr i ng end (A) i s i nst al l ed
in t he shi f t lock r el ease (B), and t he hooked end (C) i s
on t he st op (D).
9. Inst al l t he A/ T gear posi t i on i ndi cat or panel on t he
shi ft l ever (see page 14-227).
14-257
A/ T Interlock S y s t em
Park Pin Switch Replacement
NOTE: The AfT gear posi t i on i ndi cat or panel l i ght
separ at el y. Repl ac e t he A/ T gear posi t i on i ndi cat or panel
3. Wr ap t he end of a flat-ti p sc r ewdr i ver wi t h t ape, pr y
t he shi f t l ever knob c over l oc ks, t hen r emove t he shi f t
knob (C) f r om t he shi ft l ever.
socket (D) f r om t he i ndi cat or panel base (E).
6. Remove t he AfT gear posi t i on i ndi cat or panel li ght
panel base.
7. Remove t he AfT gear posi t i on i ndi cat or panel base,
t hen di sassembl e t he i ndi cat or panel (F) and t he
8. Rel ease t he lock (A) of t he shi ft lock r el ease, and
r emove t he shi ft lock r el ease and t he r el ease spr i ng
(B).
B
14-258
9. Remove t he screw (A), and cut t he har ness wi r e ti e 16. Make sure that t he r el ease springend (A) i s i nst al l ed
(B), and r emove t he light bulb (C) f r om t he socket . in t he shi f t lock r el ease (B), and t he hooked end (C) i s
on t he st op (D).
i ndi cat or panel li ght har ness (D).
11. Install a new park pi n swi t c h/A/T gear posi t i on
i ndi cat or panel li ght har ness, and sec ur e t he park pi n
swi t ch wi t h a new sc r ew.
12. Ti e t he park pi n swi t c h/A/T gear posi t i on i ndi cat or
panel light har ness and t he shi ft lock sol enoi d har ness
at t he gui de wi t h t he a new har ness wi r e t i e.
i n t he socket .
14. Install t he r el ease spr i ng (A) i n t he shi ft lock r el ease
(B).
15. Install t he shi f t lock r el ease and t he r el ease spr i ng on
t he r el ease shaf t end.
(cont d)
14-259
panel li ght har nes s es . Take t he sl ack out of t he
har nes s es , and sec ur e t he har nesses wi t h t he har ness
wi r e ti e at t he har ness gui des
19. Install t he A/ T gear posi t i on i ndi cat or panel li ght
socket (B) i n t he i ndi cat or panel base.
21. Appl y si l i cone gr ease to t he top (D) of t he shi ft l ever
r od.
N O T E : Make sur e not to get any si l i cone gr ease on t he
or gl oves.
22. Inst al l t he shi f t l ever knob (E) over t he shi f t l ever .
23. Inst al l t he shi ft l ever knob c over (F) on t he shi ft l ever
knob wi t h new s c r ews (G).
Park Pin Switch Repl acement (cont' d)
17. Inst al l t he A/ T gear posi t i on i ndi cat or panel base (A).
20. Inst al l t he A/ T gear posi t i on i ndi cat or panel (C).
14-260
har ness and t he park pi n swi t ch ar e not avai l abl e
separ at el y. Repl ace t he A/T gear posi t i on i ndi cat or panel
t he shi ft l ever knob c over l ocks, t hen r emove t he shi ft
I
4. Remove t he s c r ews (B), and r emove t he shi ft l ever
knob (C) f r om t he shi ft l ever.
socket (D) f r om t he i ndi cat or panel (E).
har ness f r om t he har ness gui des of the i ndi cat or
panel base.
7. Remove t he A/ T gear posi t i on i ndi cat or panel base (F),
t hen di sassembl e t he i ndi cat or panel and t he
8. Remove t he li ght bul b (A) f r om t he socket .
i ndi cat or panel li ght har ness (B) and t he shi ft lock
sol enoi d har ness (C) f rom t he har ness gui de (D).
10. Inst al l a new park pi n swi t c h/A/T gear posi t i on
i ndi cat or panel li ght har ness.
panel light har ness and t he shi ft lock sol enoi d har ness
i n t he har ness gui de.
i n t he socket .
(cont' d)
14-261
Park Pin Switch Replacement (cont'd)
13. Inst al l t he A/ T gear posi t i on i ndi cat or panel base (A).
G
Repl ac e.
14. Inst al l t he A/ T gear posi t i on i ndi cat or panel li ght
socket (B) t hr ough t he i ndi cat or panel base hol e, t hen
i nst al l t he socket i n t he i ndi cat or panel (C).
panel li ght har nesses. Take t he sl ack out of t he
har nes s es , and sec ur e t he har nesses i n t he har ness
gui des.
16. Inst al l t he A/ T gear posi t i on i ndi cat or panel .
17. Appl y si l i cone gr ease to t he t op (D) of t he shi ft l ever
r od.
or gl oves.
18. Inst al l t he shi ft l ever knob (E) over t he shi f t l ever.
19. Inst al l t he shi f t l ever knob c over (F) on t he shi f t l ever
knob wi t h new sc r ews (G).
14-262
Transmi ssi on End Cover
End Cover Removal
Mai nshaf t Hol der 07GAB-PF50101
1. Remove t he t hr ee bolts (D) sec ur i ng t he ATF cool er i nlet l i ne br acket s, t he ATF fi lter bracket bol t s (E), t he ATF c ool er
li ne banj o bol t s (F), and r emove t he ATF cool er l i ne/ATF fi lter (G) and t he fi lter br acket s (H).
2. Remove t he ATF cool er out l et li ne (I).
3. Remove A/ T cl ut ch pr essur e cont rol sol enoi d val ve A, t he ATF j oi nt pi pes, t he O-r i ngs, t he ATF pi pe, and t he gasket .
4. Remove A/ T cl ut ch pr essur e cont rol sol enoi d val ves B and C wi t h t he har ness br acket s, t he ATF j oi nt pi pes, t he
O-r i ngs, and t he gasket .
5. Remove t he t r ansmi ssi on r ange swi t ch c over (J).
6. Remove t he t r ansmi ssi on r ange swi t ch har ness c l amps (K) f r om t he c l amp bracket (L), t hen r emove t he t r ansmi ssi on
r ange swi t c h (M).
7. Remove t he end c over (N), t he dowel pi ns, t he O-r i ngs, and t he end c over gasket .
(cont' d)
14-263
End Cover Removal (cont' d)
8. Inst al l t he mai nshaf t hol der ont o t he mai nshaf t .
9. Engage t he park pawl wi t h t he park gear .
10. Cut t he l ock t ab (A) of t he eac h shaf t l ocknut (B) usi ng
a c hi sel (C). Then r emove t he l ocknut s and t he c oni c al
spr i ng was her s f r om eac h shaf t .
NOTE:
Count er shaf t and sec ondar y shaf t l ocknut s have
l ef t -hand t hr eads.
Keep all of t he c hi sel ed par t i cl es out of t he
t r ansmi ssi on.
Cl ean t he ol d mai nshaf t and t he ol d count er shaf t
l ocknut s; t hey ar e used t o i nst al l t he pr ess fit i dl er
gear on t he mai nshaf t , and t he park gear on t he
count er shaf t .
11. Remove t he mai nshaf t hol der f r om t he mai nshaf t .
12. Set a t wo-j aw (or t hr ee-j aw) pul l er (A) on t he
count er shaf t (B) wi t h a spac er (C) bet ween t he pul l er
and t he count er shaf t , t hen r emove t he park gear (D).
13. Inst al l a pul l er (A) wi t h t wo 6 x 1.0 mm bol t s (B) on t he
mai nshaf t i dl er gear (C). Set a spac er (D) bet ween t he
pul l er and t he mai nshaf t (E), t hen r emove t he
mai nshaf t i dl er gear .
14. Remove t he park pawl (F), t he park pawl spr i ng (G),
t he park pawl shaf t (H), and t he st op shaf t (I).
15. Remove t he park l ever (J) f r om t he sel ect or cont rol
shaf t (K).
14-264
Park Lever St op Inspecti on and
Adj ust ment
1. Set t he park l ever i n t he P posi t i on.
2. Measur e t he di st ance (A) bet ween t he park pawl shaf t
(B) and t he park l ever rol l er pi n (C).
St andar d: 57. 7- 58. 7 mm (2.27-2.31 i n)
3. If t he measur ement i s out of st andar d, sel ec t and
i nst al l t he appropri at e park l ever st op (A) f r om t he
t abl e.
PARK L EVER S TOP
Mar k B C
1 11.00 mm (0.433 i n) 11.00 mm (0.433 i n)
2 10.80 mm (0.425 i n) 10.65 mm (0.419 i n)
3 10.60 mm (0.417 i n) 10.30 mm (0.406 i n)
4. Af t er r epl aci ng t he park l ever st op, make sur e t he
di st ance i s wi t hi n t ol er ance.
Idler Gear Shaf t Beari ng
Repl acement
Adj ust abl e Bear i ng Pul l er , 2540 mm 07736-A01000B
. Dri ver Handl e, 15 x 135L 07749-0010000
At t achment , 52 x 55 mm 07746-0010400
1. Remove t he i dl er gear shaf t bear i ng (A) f r om t he end
c over (B) usi ng t he 2540 mm adj ust abl e bear i ng
pul l er and a c ommer c i al l y avai l abl e 3/8 " -16 sl i de
hammer (C).
2. Install a new bear i ng i n t he end cover usi ng t he dr i ver
handl e and t he 52 x 55 mm at t achment .
14-265
Selector Control Shaf t Oil Seal
Replacement
. Dri ver Handl e, 15 x 135L 07749-0010000
. At t ac hment 22 x 24 mm 07746-001A800
1. Remove t he oi l seal (A) f r om t he end c over (B).
2. Install a new oi l seal f l ush to t he end c over usi ng t he
dr i ver handl e and t he 22 x 24 mm at t achment .
Selector Control Shaf t Bearing
Replacement
. Dri ver Handl e, 15 x 135L 07749-0010000
At t achment , 22 x 24 mm 07746-001A800
1. Remove t he oi l seal f r om t he end c over , t hen r emove
t he bear i ng.
2. Inst al l a new bear i ng f l ush to t he end c over usi ng t he
dr i ver handl e and t he 22 x 24 mm at t achment .
3. Inst al l a new oi l s eal .
14-266
ATF Feed Pi pe Repl acement
1. Remove the snap rings (A), the ATF feed pipes (B),
and the feed pipe flanges (C) from the end cover (D).
NOTE: Replace the end cover, if the 1st clutch ATF
feed pipe (E) replacement is required.
2. Install new O-rings (F) over the ATF feed pipes.
3. Install the ATF feed pipes in the end cover by aligning
the feed pipe tabs with the indentations in the end
cover.
4. Install new O-rings (G) in the end cover, then install
the feed pipe flanges over the ATF feed pipes.
5. Secure the ATF feed pipes and the feed pipe flanges
with the snap rings.
14-267
Housi ng and Shaf t Assembl y Removal
Housi ng Pul l er 07HAC-PK40102
1. Remove t he ATF f eed pi pe (A) f r om t he i dl er gear shaf t , and r emove t he ATF l ubri cat i on pi pe (B) f r om t he
2. Remove t he shi ft sol enoi d val ve c over (C), t he dowel pi ns (D), and t he gasket (E).
3. Di sc onnec t t he c onnec t or s f r om t he shi f t sol enoi d val ves, and r emove t he shi f t sol enoi d wi r e har ness (F) wi t h t he
O-r i ng.
4. Remove t he i nput shaf t (mai nshaf t ) speed sensor (G) wi t h t he O-r i ng, and r emove t he out put shaf t (count ershaf t )
speed sensor (H) wi t h t he O-ri ng and t he was her (I).
5. Remove t he t r ansmi ssi on housi ng mount i ng bol t s (19 bol t s) (J) and t he t r ansmi ssi on hanger (K).
14-268
8, Al i gn t he spr i ng pin (A) on t he sel ect or cont rol shaf t
(B) wi t h t he t r ansmi ssi on housi ng gr oove (C) by
t urni ng t he sel ec t or cont rol shaf t wi t h t he sel ect or
cont rol l ever.
NOTE: Do not squeeze t he end of t he sel ect or cont rol
shaf t t i ps t oget her when t urni ng t he sel ect or cont rol
shaf t .
7. Install t he housi ng pul l er over t he mai nshaf t , t hen
r emove t he t r ansmi ssi on housi ng.
8. Remove t he count er shaf t r ever se gear and t he needl e
bear i ng.
9. Remove t he lock bolt sec ur i ng t he r ever se shi f t fork,
t hen r emove t he r ever se shi ft fork wi t h t he r ever se
sel ect or t oget her.
10. Remove t he sel ect or cont rol l ever f r om t he sel ect or
cont rol shaf t .
11. Unl ock t he det ent spr i ng (A) f r om t he det ent ar m (B).
12. Remove t he sel ect or cont rol shaf t (A) f r om t he t or que
13. Tur n t he det ent ar m (B) away f r om t he
count er shaf t (C).
14. Remove t he mai nshaf t subassembl y (A), t he
count er shaf t subassembl y (B), and t he sec ondar y
shaf t subassembl y (C) t oget her. Do not bump t he
count er shaf t on t he baffle plate (D).
C
15. Remove t he baffle plate.
16. Remove t he di fferenti al assembl y (E).
14-269
Bearing Removal
- At t achment , 78x 80 mm 07NAD-PX40100
Dri ver Handl e, 15 x 135L 07749-0010000
1. Remove t he i dl er gear shaf t (see page 14-297) when
r emovi ng t he mai nshaf t bear i ng and t he i dl er gear
shaf t bear i ng.
NOTE: If you ar e onl y r emovi ng t he count er shaf t
bear i ng, t he i dl er gear shaf t r emoval i s not needed.
2. To r emove t he mai nshaf t bear i ng and t he
count er shaf t bear i ng f r om t he t r ansmi ssi on housi ng,
expand eac h snap ri ng usi ng snap ri ng pl i er s, t hen
dri ve t he bear i ng out usi ng t he dri ver handl e and t he
78 x 80 mm at t achment .
NOTE: Do not r emove the s n ap r i ng i m i w ? ifc
nec essar y to c l ean t he gr ooves in t he t r ansmi ssi on
housi ng.
3. To r emove t he sec ondar y shaf t beari ng and t he i dl er
gear shaf t bear i ng, expand eac h snap ri ng usi ng snap
ri ng pl i er s, t hen dri ve t he bear i ng out usi ng t he dri ver
handl e and t he 42 x 47 mm bear i ng dri ver at t achment .
14-270
Bearing Installation
At t achment , 78 x 80 mm 07NAD-PX40100
Dri ver Handl e, 15 x 135L 07749-0010000
1. Install t he bear i ngs i n t he di rect i on shown.
2. Expand eac h snap ri ng usi ng snap ri ng pl i er s, and
i nst all t he mai nshaf t bear i ng (A) and t he count er shaf t
beari ng (B) part -way i nto t he housi ng usi ng t he dri ver
handl e and t he 78 x 80 mm at t achment .
3. Rel ease t he snap ri ng pl i er s, t hen push t he bear i ng
down i nto t he t r ansmi ssi on housi ng unti l t he snap
ri ng s naps i n pl ace ar ound it.
4. Expand t he snap ri ng of t he sec ondar y shaf t bear i ng
(A) and handl e t he i dler gear shaf t bear i ng (B) usi ng
t he snap ri ng pl i er s, and i nstall t he bear i ng par t -way
i nto t he housi ng usi ng t he dri ver handl e and t he
42 x 47 mm bear i ng dri ver at t achment .
B 07749-0010000
5. Rel ease t he snap ri ng pl i er s, t hen push t he bear i ngs
down into t he t r ansmi ssi on housi ng unti l t he snap
ri ng snaps i n pl ace ar ound it.
6. After i nst al l i ng t he bear i ngs c hec k that t he snap ri ngs
(A) are seat ed in t he beari ng and t he t r ansmi ssi on
housi ng gr ooves, and that t he snap ri ng end gaps (B).
ar e cor r ect .
B: 0 - 7 mm (00.28 in)
7. Install t he i dl er gear shaf t (see page 14-297).
14-271
Rever se Idler Gear Removal and Inst al l at i on
Removal
1. Remove t he bolt (A) sec ur i ng t he r ever se i dl er gear
shaf t hol der (B).
2. Inst al l a 5 x 0.8 mm bolt (C) i n t he r ever se i dl er gear
shaf t (D), and pull it t o r emove t he r ever se i dl er gear
shaf t and t he r ever se i dl er gear shaf t hol der t oget her.
3. Remove t he r ever se i dl er gear (A).
Inst al l at i on
1. Inst al l t he r ever se i dl er gear i n t he t r ansmi ssi on
housi ng.
2. Li ght l y coat t he r ever se i dl er gear shaf t (A), t he needl e
bear i ng (B), and new O-r i ngs (C) wi t h l i t hi um gr ease.
Repl ac e.
3. As s embl e O-r i ngs and t he needl e bear i ng on t he
r ever se i dl er gear shaf t , t hen i nst al l t he r ever se i dler
gear shaf t i n t he r ever se i dl er gear shaf t hol der (D).
Al i gn t he D-shaped cut out (E) of t he r ever se i dl er gear
shaf t wi t h t he D-shaped ar ea (F) of t he r ever se i dl er
gear shaf t hol der .
4. Inst al l t he r ever se i dl er gear shaf t /hol der assembl y on
14-272
Val ve Body
Val ve Body and ATF St r ai ner Removal
1. Remove t he ATF f eed pi pes (A) and t he ATF j oi nt pi pes (B).
2. Remove t he ATF st r ai ner (C) (two bol t s).
3. Remove t he regul at or val ve body (D) (ei ght bol t s).
(cont ' d)
14-273
Waive Body
Valve Body and ATF Strainer Removal (cont'd)
4. Remove t he st at or shaf t (E) and t he st at or shaf t st op
(F), t hen r emove t he regul at or separ at or plate (G) and
t he t wo dowel pi ns (H).
5. Remove t he ser vo body (I) (12 bol t s), t hen r emove t he
ser vo separ at or pl at e (J) and t he t wo dowel pi ns (K).
6. Remove t he cool er check val ve spr i ng (L) and t he
c ool er check val ve (M), t hen r emove t he mai n val ve
body (N) (three bol t s). Do not let t he t wo check bal l s
(O) f al l out , and do not use a magnet to r emove t he
c hec k bal l s, it may magnet i ze t hem.
7. Remove t he ATF pump dri ven gear shaf t (P), t hen
r emove t he ATF pump dr i ven gear (Q) and t he ATF
pump dr i ve gear (R).
8. Remove t he mai n separ at or plate (S) and t he t wo
dowel pi ns (T).
9. Remove t he ATF magnet (U), c l ean and rei nst al l it in
t he t or que conver t er housi ng (V).
10. Cl ean t he i nlet openi ng (A) of t he ATF st r ai ner (B)
t hor oughl y wi t h c ompr essed ai r , then c hec k that it i s
i n good condi t i on and that t he i nlet openi ng i s not
c l ogged.
B
A
11. Test t he ATF st r ai ner by pouri ng cl ean ATF t hr ough
t he i nlet openi ng, and r epl ace it if it i s cl ogged or
damaged.
12. Remove t he O-r i ngs (W) (X) f r om t he st at or shaf t and
t he ATF st r ai ner . Inst al l new ones when i nst al l i ng t he
val ve bodi es.
14-274
Valve Body Repair
NOTE: Thi s repai r i s onl y nec essar y if one or mor e of t he
val ves in a val ve body do not sl i de smoot hl y in t hei r
bor es. Use t hi s pr ocedur e to f ree t he val ves.
1. Soak a sheet of #600 abr asi ve paper i n ATF for about
30 mi nut es.
2. Caref ul l y tap t he val ve body so t he st i cki ng val ve
dr ops out of its bore. It may be nec essar y to use a
smal l sc r ewdr i ver to pry t he val ve f r ee. Be caref ul not
to scr at ch t he bore.
3. Inspect t he val ve for any scuf f mar ks. Us e t he
ATF- s o ak ed #600 abr asi ve paper to pol i sh off any
burrs that are on t he val ve, t hen was h t he val ve in
sol vent and dry it wi t h c ompr essed ai r.
4. Roll up half a sheet of ATF-soaked #600 abr asi ve
paper and i nser t it in t he val ve bore of t he st i cki ng
val ve.
Twi st t he paper sl i ght l y, so that it unr ol l s and fi ts t he
bore t i ght l y, t hen pol i sh t he bore by t wi st i ng t he paper
as you push it in and out.
NOTE: The val ve body i s al umi num and does not
requi re much pol i shi ng to r emove any bur r s.
5. Remove t he #600 abr asi ve paper . Thor oughl y was h
t he ent i re val ve body in sol vent , t hen dry it wi t h
c ompr essed ai r.
6. Coat t he val ve wi t h ATF, t hen dr op it into its bore. It
shoul d drop to t he bottom of t he bore under its own
wei ght . If not, r epeat st ep 4, t hen ret est . If t he val ve
st i l l st i c ks, r epl ace t he val ve body.
7. Remove t he val ve, and t hor oughl y cl ean it and t he
val ve body wi t h sol vent . Dry al l part s wi t h
c ompr essed ai r , t hen r eassembl e usi ng ATF as a
l ubri cant .
Val ve Body
Val ve Body Val ve Inst al l at i on
1. Coat all part s wi t h ATF bef ore assembl y.
2. Inst al l t he val ves and t he spr i ngs in t he sequenc e
s hown f or t he mai n val ve body (see page 14-277), t he
regul at or val ve body (see page 14-279), and t he ser vo
body (see page 14-280). Ref er t o t he f ol l owi ng val ve
c ap i l l ust r at i ons, and i nst al l eac h val ve c ap so t he end
s hown f aci ng up wi l l be f aci ng t he out si de of t he val ve
body.
3. Inst al l all t he spr i ngs and t he seat s. Insert t he spr i ng
(A) i n t he val ve, t hen i nst al l t he val ve i n t he val ve body
(B) . Push t he spr i ng i n usi ng a sc r ewdr i ver , t hen
i nst al l t he spr i ng seat (C).
14-276
Mai n Val ve Body Di sassembl y, Inspect i on, and Reassembly
1. Cl ean all part s t hor oughl y in sol vent , and dry t hem wi t h c ompr essed ai r. Bl ow out all passages.
2. Do not use a magnet to r emove t he check bal l s, it may magnet i ze t he bal l s.
3. Inspect t he val ve body for sc or i ng and damage.
4. Check all val ves f or f ree movement . If any fai l to sl i de f r eel y, do t he val ve body repai r pr ocedur e (see page 14-275).
5. Coat all part s wi t h ATF duri ng assembl y.
SPRING SPECI FI CATI ONS
Spr i ngs St andar d (New)-Uni t : mm (in) Spr i ngs
Wi r e Di amet er O.D. Fr ee Lengt h No. c/; 'S<rns
A Shi f t val ve A spr i ng 0.8 (0.031) 5.6 (0.220) 28.1 (1.106) Vo3
B Shi f t val ve B spr i ng 0.8 (0.031) 5.6 (0.220) 28.1 (1.106) 15.9
C Shi f t val ve C spr i ng 0.8 (0.031) 5.6 (0.220) 28.1 (1.106) 15.9
D Rel i ef val ve spr i ng 1.0 (0.039) 9.6 (0.378) 34.1 (1.343) 10.2
E Lock-up cont rol val ve spr i ng 0.65 (0.026) 7.1 (0.280) 23.1 (0.909) 12.7
F Cool er check val ve spr i ng 0.85 (0.033) 6.6 (0.260) 27.0(1.063) 11.3
G Ser vo cont rol val ve spr i ng 0.7 (0.028) 6.6 (0.260) 35.7(1.406) 17.2
H Shi f t val ve E spr i ng 0.8 (0.031) 5.6 (0.220) 28.1 (1.106) 15.9
14-277
Val ve Body
ATF Pump Inspection
1. Inst al l t he ATF pump dri ve gear (A), t he dr i ven gear
(B), and t he ATF pump dr i ven gear shaf t (C) i n t he
mai n val ve body (D). Lubr i cat e all part s wi t h ATF, and
i nst al l t he ATF pump dr i ven gear wi t h its gr ooved and
c hamf er ed si de f aci ng up.
A B
D
2. Measur e t he si de c l ear anc e of t he ATF pump dr i ve
gear (A) and t he dr i ven gear (B).
ATF Pump Gear s Si de (Radi al ) Cl ear anc e
St andar d (New)
ATF Pump Dr i ve Gear :
0. 210-0. 265 mm (0.0083-0.0104 i n)
ATF Pump Dr i ven Gear :
0. 070-0. 125 mm (0.0028-0.0049 i n)
3. Remove t he ATF pump dr i ven gear shaf t . Measur e t he
t hr ust c l ear anc e bet ween t he ATF pump dr i ven gear
(A) and t he mai n val ve body (B) usi ng a st rai ght edge
(C) and a f eel er gauge (D).
ATF Pump Dr i ve/Dr i ven Gear Thr ust (Axi al )
Cl ear anc e
St andar d (New): 0. 03- 0. 06 mm (0.001 - 0. 002 i n)
C B
14"278
Regulator Valve Bodf Disassembly, Inspection, and Reassembly
1. Cl ean al l parts t hor oughl y in s ol v ent and dry t hem wi t h c ompr essed ai r. Bl ow out all pas s ages .
2. Inspect t he val ve body f or scor i ng and damage.
3. Chec k al l val ves for f r ee movement . If any fai l to sl i de f r eel y, do t he val ve body repai r pr ocedur e (see page 14-275).
4. Hol d t he regul at or spr i ng c ap in pl ace whi l e r emovi ng t he st op bolt. The regul at or spr i ng c ap i s spr i ng l oaded.
5. Coat al l part s wi t h ATF dur i ng assembl y.
6. Repl ac e t he O-ri ngs wi t h new ones.
7. When r eassembl i ng t he val ve body, al i gn t he hol e i n t he regul at or spr i ng c ap wi t h t he hol e i n t he val ve body, t hen
pr ess t he spr i ng cap into t he val ve body, and t i ght en t he st op bolt.
SPRI NG SPECI FI CATI ONS
Spr i ngs St andar d (New)-Uni t : mm (i n) Spr i ngs
Wi r e Di amet er O.D. Fr ee Lengt h No. of Coi l s
A St at or r eact i on spr i ng 4.5 (0.177) 35.4(1.394) 30.3(1.193) 1.92
B Regul at or val ve spr i ng A 1.85 (0.073) 14.7 (0.579) 83.0 (3.268) 14.9
C Regul at or val ve spr i ng B 1.6 (0.063) 9.2 (0.362) 44.0(1.732) 12.5
D Tor que conver t er check val ve spr i ng 1.2 (0.047) 8.6 (0.339) 33.8(1.331) 12.2
E Lock-up shi f t val ve spr i ng 1.0 (0.039) 6.6 (0.260) 35.5(1.398) 18.2
F 3rd ac c umul at or spr i ng 2.5 (0.098) 14.6 (0.575) 29.4(1.157) 4.9
G 1st ac c umul at or spr i ng A 2.4 (0.0.94) 18.6 (0.732) 49.0(1.929) 7.1
H 1st ac c umul at or spr i ng B 2.3 (0.091) 12.2 (0.480) 31.5(1.240) 6.6
14-279
Val ve Body
Servo Body Di sassembl y, i nspect i on, and Reassembl y
1. Cl ean all part s t hor oughl y i n sol vent , and dr y t hem wi t h c ompr essed ai r. Bl ow out all passages.
2. Inspect t he val ve body f or sc or i ng and damage.
3. Chec k shi f t val ve D f or f r ee movement . If it f ai l s to sl i de f r eel y, do t he val ve body repai r pr ocedur e (see page 14-275).
4. When r emovi ng and i nst al l i ng t he shi f t sol enoi d v al v es , refer t o t he shi f t sol enoi d val ves r emoval and i nst al l at i on (see
page 14-281).
5. Coat all part s wi t h ATF dur i ng assembl y.
6. Repl ac e t he O-r i ngs wi t h new ones.
SPRI NG SPECI FI CATI ONS
Spr i ngs St andar d (New)-Uni t : mm (i n) Spr i ngs
Wi r e Di amet er O.D. Fr ee Lengt h No. of Coi l s
A Shi f t val ve D spr i ng 0.8 (0.031) 5.6 (0.220) 28.1 (1.106) 15.S
B 4th ac c umul at or spr i ng B 2.3 (0.091) 12.2 (0.480) 31.5(1.240) 6.6
C 4th ac c umul at or spr i ng A 2.4 (0.094) 18.6 (0.732) 49.0(1.929) 7.1
D 2nd accumul at or spr i ng B 2.1 (0.083) 10.8 (0.425) 34.0(1.339) . 8.2
E 2nd ac c umul at or spr i ng A 2.1 (0.083) 16.6 (0.654) 48.7(1.917) 8.4
F 5th ac c umul at or spr i ng 2.5 (0.098) 14.6 (0.575) 29.9(1.177) 4.9
14-280
Shift Solenoid Valve Removal and Installation
NOTE:
Do not hol d t he shi ft sol enoi d val ve connect or to
r emove and to i nst all t he shi ft sol enoi d val ves. Hol d
t he shi f t sol enoi d val ve b o d y . . '
Do not i nst al l t he shi ft sol enoi d val ve A bef ore
i nst al l i ng t he shi ft sol enoi d val ve D, and do not Inst al l
shi ft sol enoi d val ve B bef ore shi ft sol enoi d val ve E. If
shi ft sol enoi d val ves A and B ar e i nst al l ed bef ore shi ft
sol enoi d val ves D and E, it may damage t he hydr aul i c
cont rol syst em.
1. Remove t he shi ft sol enoi d val ve mount i ng bolt, t hen
r emove t he shi ft sol enoi d val ves by hol di ng t he
sol enoi d val ve body. -
:
2. Inst al l new O-r i ngs (two O-ri ngs per shi ft sol enoi d
val ve) (F) on t he shi ft sol enoi d val ves.
NOTE: A new sol enoi d val ve c omes wi t h new O-r i ngs.
If you i nst al l a new sol enoi d val ve, use t he O-r i ngs
pr ovi ded wi t h It.
3. Inst al l shi f t sol enoi d val ve D by hol di ng t he shi ft
sol enoi d val ve body; be sur e t hat t he mount i ng
bracket cont act s t he ser vo body.
4. i nst al l shi f t sol enoi d val ve A by hol di ng t he shi ft
bracket cont act s t he bracket on shi ft sol enoi d val ve D.
5. Inst al l shi ft sol enoi d val ve E by hol di ng t he shi ft
6. Inst al l shi f t sol enoi d val ve B by hol di ng t he shi ft
sol enoi d val ve body; be sur e that t he mount i ng
bracket cont act s t he br acket on shi ft sol enoi d val ve E.
7. Inst al l shi f t sol enoi d val ve C by hol di ng t he shift-
sol enoi d val ve body; be sur e that t he mount i ng
8. Inst al l t he shi ft sol enoi d val ve mount i ng bol t s.
14-281
Torque Convert er Housi ng
Mai nshaf t Beari ng and Oi l Seal Repl acement
Adj ust abl e Bear i ng Pul l er, 2 5 - 4 0 mm 07736-A01000B
Dr i ver Handl e, 15 x 135L 07749-0010000
At t achment , 62 x 68 mm 07746-0010500
At t achment , 72 x 75 mm 07746-0010600
1. Remove t he mai nshaf t bear i ng and t he oi l seal usi ng
t he 2540 mm adj ust abl e bear i ng pul l er and a
c ommer c i al l y avai l abl e 3/8 " -16 sl i de hammer (A).
3. Inst al l a new oi l seal f l ush wi t h t he t or que conver t er
housi ng usi ng t he dr i ver handl e and t he 72 x 75 mm
at t achment .
NOTE: Do not dr i ve t he oi l seal i nto t he t or que
conver t er housi ng unti l it bot t oms out ; it wi l l bl ock t he
f l ui d ret urn passage and c aus e t r ansmi ssi on damage.
07749-0010000
2. Inst al l a new mai nshaf t bear i ng unti l it bot t oms i n t he
t or que conver t er housi ng usi ng t he dr i ver handl e and
t he 62 x 68 mm at t achment .
07749-0010000 07746-0010500
14-282
<2&>
Count ershaf t Beari ng Repl acement
Adj ust abl e Bear i ng Pul l er , 2 5 - 4 0 mm 07736-A01000B
Dri ver Handl e, 15 x 135L 07749-0010000
At t achment , 62 x 68 mm 07746-0010500
1. Remove t he count er shaf t bear i ng usi ng t he
2540 mm adj ust abl e beari ng pul l er and a
c ommer c i al l y avai l abl e 3/8 " -16 sl i de hammer (A).
07736-A01000B
2. Remove t he ATF gui de pl at e (A), and c hec k it f or wear
and damage. If t he gui de pl at e i s wor n or damaged,
r epl ace it.
4. Inst al l t he count er shaf t bear i ng sec ur el y i n the t or que
conver t er housi ng usi ng t he dr i ver handl e and t he
5. Make sur e t hat t he bear i ng out er r ace not ch-cut (A) i s
i nst al l ed at a hei ght of 00.05 mm (00.002 i n) (B)
above t he t or que conver t er housi ng sur f ace (C). Do
not i nst al l t he count er shaf t bear i ng hi gher t han
0.05 mm (0.002 i n) above t he t or que conver t er
housi ng sur f ac e.
A
3. Install t he ATF gui de pl at e i n t he t or que conver t er
housi ng, and i nst al l a new count er shaf t bear i ng (B).
14-283
Torque Convert er Housi ng
Secondar y Shaf t Beari ng Repl acement
- Dr i ver Handl e, 15 x 135L 07749-0010000
. At t achment , 62 x 68 mm 07746-0010500
1. Remove t he set plate bolt, t hen r emove t he lock
was her (A) and t he bear i ng set pl at e (B).
6 x 1 . 0 mm
12 N-m
(1.2 k g f m, 8.7 Ibf-ft)
2. Remove t he sec ondar y shaf t bear i ng (A) by heat i ng
t he t or que conver t er housi ng to about 212 F (100 C)
usi ng a heat gun (B). Do not heat t he t or que conver t er
housi ng mor e t han 212 F (100 C).
NOTE: Let t he t or que conver t er housi ng cool to
nor mal t emper at ur e bef ore i nst al l i ng t he sec ondar y
shaf t bear i ng.
3. Remove t he ATF gui de col l ar wi t h t he O-r i ngs. Cl ean
and dry t he ATF gui de col l ar sur f ac es and t he t or que
conver t er housi ng if nec essar y.
4. Inst al l new O-r i ngs (A) on t he ATF gui de col l ar (B),
t hen i nst al l t he ATF gui de col l ar i n t he t or que
5. Inst al l a new sec ondar y shaf t bear i ng (C) i n t he
di r ect i on s hown.
6. Inst al l t he sec ondar y shaf t bear i ng usi ng t he dr i ver
handl e and t he 62 x 68 mm at t achment , and i nst al l it
sec ur el y i n t he t or que conver t er housi ng.
07749-0010000
07746-0010500
7. Chec k t hat t he bear i ng gr oove al i gns wi t h t he t or que
conver t er housi ng sur f ac e, t hen i nst al l t he bear i ng set
pl at e wi t h al i gni ng t he bear i ng gr oove.
8. Inst al l a new lock washer and t he set pl at e bol t , t hen
bend t he lock t ab of t he lock was her agai nst t he bolt
head.
14-284
Sel ect or Control Shaft Oil Seal Replacement
. Dr i ver Handl e, 15 x 135L 07749-0010000
Oi l Seal Dri ver At t ac hment 07947-ZV00100
1. Remove t he oi l s eal (A) f r om t he t or que c onver t er
housi ng (B).
2. Install a new oi l seal (A) in t he t or que c onver t er
housi ng t o a dept h (B) of 0. 5- 1. 5 mm ( 0. 02- 0. 06 in)
bel ow t he t or que conver t er housi ng sur f ac e usi ng t he
dri ver handl e and t he oi l seal dr i ver at t achment .
74?-2W1
Shaf t s and Cl ut ches
Mainshaft Di sassembl y, Inspect i on, and Reassembly
1. Inspect t he t hr ust needl e bear i ngs and t he needl e bear i ngs f or gal l i ng and r ough mov ement
L OCK NUT ( FL ANGE NUT)
24 x 1.25 mm
22S N-m (23.0 k g f m, 166 Ibf f t )-* ~*
2. Inspect t he spl i nes f or exc essi ve wear and damage.
3. Check t he shaf t bear i ng sur f ace f or sc or i ng and exc essi ve wear .
4. Bef ore i nst al l i ng new O-r i ngs, wr ap t he shaf t spl i nes wi t h t ape to pr event t he O-ri ng damage.
5. Lubr i cat e all par t s wi t h ATF dur i ng assembl y.
6. Install t he coni cal spr i ng was her and t he 41 x 68 mm t hr ust was her i n t he di rect i on s hown.
7. Repl ace t he l ocknut and t he coni cal spr i ng washer wi t h new ones when assembl i ng t he t r ansmi ssi on.
8. Chec k t he c l ear anc e of 5th gear (see page 14-287).
14-286
Mainshaft Sth Gear Axial Clearance Inspection
1. Remove t he mai nshaf t t r ansmi ssi on housi ng bear i ng
(s eepage 14-270).
2. Install t he t hr ust needl e bear i ng ( A ) , 5th gear ( B ) , t he
needl e bear i ng (C), t he t hr ust needl e beari ng (D), t he
41 x 68 mm t hrust was her (E), t he 4th/5th cl ut ch (F),
t he 4th gear col l ar (G), and t he t r ansmi ssi on housi ng
beari ng ( H ) on t he mai nshaf t ( I ) . Do not i nst al l t he
O-ri ngs dur i ng i nspect i on.
24 x 1.25 mm
29 N-m
(3.0 k g f m,
22 l bf f t )
IEPJ E
3. Install t he i dl er gear (J) on t he mai nshaf t wi t h a pr ess,
t hen i nst al l t he coni cal spr i ng was her (K) and t he
l ocknut (L).
4. Ti ght en t he l ocknut to 29 N-m (3.0 k gf m, 22 Ibf-ft).
5. Set a di al i ndi cat or ( A ) on 5th gear ( B ) .
(cont' d)
14-287
Mainshaft 5th Gear Axial Clearance inspection (cont' d)
6. Lift 5th gear (A) up whi l e hol di ng t he mai nshaf t , and
use t he di al i ndi cat or (B) to r ead t he 5th gear axi al
c l ear anc e.
7. Measur e t he 5th gear axi al c l ear anc e in at l east t hr ee
pl ac es whi l e movi ng 5th gear . Us e t he aver age as t he
act ual c l ear anc e.
St andar d: 0. 04- 0. 10 mm (0. 002-0. 004 In)
8. If t he c l ear anc e i s out of st andar d, r emove t he
41 x 68 mm t hrust washer and measur e its t hi ckness
(A).
3. Sel ec t and i nst al l a new t hr ust washer , t hen r echeck.
THRUS T WAS HER, 41 x 68 mm
No. Thi c kness
1 4.450 mm (0.1752 in)
2 4.475 mm (0.1762 in)
3 4.500 mm (0.1772 in)
4 4.525 mm (0.1781 in)
5 4.550 mm (0.1791 in)
6 4.575 mm (0.1801 in)
7 4.600 mm (0.1811 in)
8 4.625 mm (0.1821 in)
9 <,?50 mm (0.1831 in)
10 ' o75mm (0.1841 in)
11 4.700 mm (0.1850 in)
12 4,725 mm (0.1860 in)
13 4.750 mm (0.1870 in)
14 4.775 mm (0.1880 in)
15 4.800 mm (0.1890 in)
10. Af t er r epl aci ng t he t hrust washer , make sur e t he
c l ear anc e i s wi t hi n t he st andar d.
11. Di sassembl e t he i nst al l ed part s f r om t he mai nshaf t .
12. Rei nst al l t he t r ansmi ssi on housi ng beari ng in t he
14-288
Count ershaf t Di sassembl y, Inspect i on, and Reassembl y
1. Inspect t he needl e bear i ngs f or gal l i ng and r ough movement .
RE VE RS E GEAR
NEEDL E BEARI NG
RE VE RS E S E L E CTOR HUB
4TH GEAR
NEEDL E BEARI NG
S E T RING
COTTE RS , 31 mm
COL L AR,
37 x 41 x 54.3 mm
24 x 1.25 mm
226 N-m (23.0 k g f m, 166 Ibf f t ) 0
167 N-m (17.0 k g f m, 123 Ibf ft)
Repl ac e.
Lef t -hand t hr eads
CONI CAL S PRI NG
WAS HER
Repl ac e.
PARK GEAR
TRANS MI S S I ON
HOUS I NG BEARI NG
2ND GEAR
COUNTERS HAFT
3. Chec k t he shaf t bear i ng sur f ace f or scor i ng and exc essi ve wear .
4. Lubr i cat e all part s wi t h ATF duri ng assembl y.
5. Inst al l t he coni cal spr i ng washer , t he r ever se sel ect or , t he 35 x 47 x 7.8 mm col l ar , and all gear s in t he di rect i on shown.
6. Repl ac e t he locknut and t he coni cal spr i ng was her wi t h new ones when assembl i ng t he t r ansmi ssi on. The
count er shaf t l ocknut has left-hand t hr eads.
7. S o me r ever se sel ect or hubs and 3rd gear s ar e pr ess-f i t t ed to t he count er shaf t ; spec i al t ool s are needed to r emove
t hem (see page 14-290) and to i nst all t hem (see page 14-290).
14-289
Countershaft Reverse Selector Hub
and 3rd Gear Removal
1. Inst al l a c ommer c i al l y avai l abl e bear i ng separ at or on
4th gear (A). Set t he count er shaf t (B) on a pr ess wi t h a
spac er (C) bet ween t he pr ess and t he count er shaf t ,
and r emove t he r ever se sel ect or hub (D).
NOTE: S o me r ever se sel ect or hubs ar e not
pr ess-f i t t ed, and c an be r emoved wi t hout usi ng t he
bear i ng separ at or and a pr ess.
2. Remove t he needl e bear i ng, t he set r i ng, t he
35 x 47 x 7.8 mm col l ar , and t he 31 mm cot t er s.
3. Set t he count er shaf t (A) on t he pr ess wi t h t he spac er
(B) bet ween t he pr ess and t he count er shaf t , and
r emove 3rd gear (C).
Countershaft Reverse Selector Hub
and 3rd Gear Installation
1. Install 2nd gear , 1st gear , 5th gear , and t he
37 x 41 x 54.3 mm col l ar on t he count er shaf t .
2. Sl i de 3rd gear (A) over t he count er shaf t , and pr ess it
i n pl ace usi ng t he 40 mm dr i ver and a pr ess.
3. Install t he 31 mm cot t er s, t he 35 x 47 x 7.8 mm col l ar ,
t he set r i ng, t he needl e bear i ng, and 4th gear .
4. Remove t he 37 x 41 x 54.3 mm col l ar , 5th gear , 1st
gear , and 2nd gear .
14-290
4. Sl i de t he r ever se sel ect or hub (A) over t he
count er shaf t , t hen pr ess it i n pl ace usi ng t he 40 mm
dr i ver and t he pr ess.
NOTE: Some r ever se sel ect or hubs ar e not
pr ess-f i t t ed, and c an be i nst al l ed wi t hout usi ng t he
40 mm dri ver and a pr ess.
A
Secondar y Shaft Di sassembl y, Inspect i on, and Reassembly
1. Inspect t he t hrust needl e bear i ngs a n d t he needl e bear i ngs f or ga l l i ng and rough mov ement
THRUS T NEEDL E BEARI NG
3RD GEAR
SEALING RINGS,
29 mm
Replace.
THRUST NEEDLE
BEARI NG
NEEDLE BEARING
2ND GEAR
THRUST NEEDLE
BEARI NG
THRUST WASHER,
37 x 58 mm
Selective p a r t
O-RINGS
Repl ac e.
2ND CLUTCH
SET RING
24 x 1.25 mm
226 N m
(23 k g f m, 166 Ibf f t ) -
167 N-m (17.0 k g f m, 123 Ibf f t )
Repl ac e.
Lef t -hand t hr eads
IDL ER GEAR
gyp PHI fp R C A P S W
THRUS T NEEDL E
BEARI NG
3RD GEAR COL L AR
1S T/ 3RD CL UTCH
O-RI NGS
Repl ac e.
THRUS T WAS HER,
40 x 51.5 mm
Sel ec t i ve part
1S T GEAR
NEEDL E BEARI NG
CONI CAL
S PRI NG
WAS HER
Repl ac e.
TRANS MI S S I ON
HOUS I NG BEARI NG
3. Chec k t he shaf t bear i ng sur f ac e f or sc or i ng and exc essi ve wear .
4. Bef ore i nst al l i ng new O-r i ngs, wr ap t he shaf t spl i nes wi t h t ape t o pr event O-ri ng damage.
5. Lubr i cat e all part s wi t h ATF dur i ng assembl y.
6. Install t he coni cal spr i ng was her , and t he i dl er gear in t he di rect i on s hown.
7. Repl ace t he l ocknut and t he c oni c al spr i ng was her wi t h new ones when assembl i ng t he t r ansmi ssi on. The l ocknut has
8. Chec k t he c l ear anc e of 2nd gear (see page 14-294) and 1st gear (see page 14-295).
14-292
Secondary Shaft idler Gear Removal and Installation
At t ac hment 42 mm I.D. 07QAD-P0A0100
Removal
Pl ace a spac er (A) on t he sec ondar y shaf t (B), and set a
pul l er (C) under t he i dl er gear (D), t hen r emove t he i dl er
gear .
Inst al l at i on
Inst al l t he i dl er gear (A) i n t he di rect i on shown on t he
sec ondar y shaf t (B) usi ng t he 42 mm at t achment and a
pr ess.
07QAD-P0A0100
14-293
Secondary Shaft 2nd Gear Axi al Clearance Inspection
1. Inst al l t he t hr ust needl e bear i ng (A), t he needl e
bear i ng (B), 2nd gear (C), t he t hr ust needl e bear i ng
(D), t he 37 x 58 mm t hr ust was her (E), and t he 2nd
cl ut ch (F) on t he sec ondar y shaf t (G), t hen sec ur e
t hem wi t h t he set ri ng (H ) . Do not i nst al l t he O-r i ngs
dur i ng i nspect i on.
2. Measur e t he c l ear anc e bet ween t he set ri ng (A) and
t he 2nd cl ut ch gui de (B) usi ng a f eel er gauge (C), i n at
l east t hr ee pl ac es. Us e t he aver age as t he act ual
c l ear anc e.
St andar d: 0. 04- 0. 12 mm (0. 002-0. 005 i n)
14-294
3. If t he c l ear anc e i s out of st andar d, r emove t he
37 x 58 mm t hrust washer , and measur e i ts t hi c kness.
4. Sel ec t and i nst al l a new t hrust washer , t hen r echeck.
THRUST WASHE R, 37 x 58 mm
No. Th icknes s
1 3.900 mm (0.154 i n)
2 3.925 mm (0.155 i n)
3 3.950 mm (0.156 i n)
4 3.975 mm (0.156 i n)
5 4.000 mm (0.157 i n)
6 4.025 mm (0.158 i n)
7 4.050 mm (0.159 i n)
8 4.075 mm (0.160 i n)
9 4.100 mm (0.161 i n)
10 4.125 mm (0.162 i n)
11 4.150 mm (0.163 i n)
12 4.175 mm (0.164 i n)
13 4.200 mm (0.165 i n)
14 4.225 mm (0.166 i n)
15 4.250 mm (0.167 i n)
16 4.275 mm (0.168 i n)
17 4.300 mm (0.169 i n)
18 4.325 mm (0.170 in)
19 4.350 mm (0.171 in)
20 4.375 mm (0.172 i n)
5. Af t er r epl aci ng t he t hr ust washer , make sur e t he
c l ear anc e i s wi t hi n st andar d.
6. Di sassembl e t he i nst al l ed part s f r om t he sec ondar y
shaf t .
Secondar y Shaf t 1st Gear A)
Cl ear ance Inspecti on
At t achment , 42 mm I.D. 07QAD-P0A0100
1. Remove t he sec ondar y shaf t t r ansmi ssi on housi ng
bear i ng (see page 14-270).
2. Inst al l t he t hr ust needl e beari ng (A), t he needl e
bear i ng (B), 1st gear (C), t he t hr ust needl e bear i ng (D),
t he 40 x 51.5 mm t hrust washer ( E) , t he 1 st/3r d cl ut ch
(F), and t he 3rd gear col l ar (G) on t he sec ondar y shaf t
(H). Do not i nst al l t he O-ri ngs dur i ng i nspect i on.
L
24 x 1.25 mm
29 N m (3.0 k g f m, 22 Ibf f t )
(cont' d)
14-295
Secondary Shaft 1st Gear Axial Clearance Inspection (cont'd)
07QAD-POA0100
3. Install t he i dler gear (I), t hen i nst al l t he t r ansmi ssi on
housi ng bear i ng (J) on t he i dl er gear usi ng t he 42 mm
I.D. at t achment and a pr ess.
4. Install t he coni cal spr i ng was her (K) and t he l ocknut
(L), t hen ti ghten t he l ocknut to 29 N-m (3.0 k g f m,
22 Ibf-ft).
5. Tur n t he sec ondar y shaf t assembl y upsi de down, and
set a di al i ndi cat or (A) on 1st gear (B).
6. Lift 1st gear (A) up whi l e hol di ng t he sec ondar y shaf t ,
and use t he di al i ndi cat or (B) to r ead t he 1 st gear axi al
c l ear anc e.
7. Measur e t he 1st gear axi al c l ear anc e in at l east t hr ee
pl ac es whi l e movi ng 1st gear . Us e t he aver age as t he
act ual c l ear anc e.
. St andar d: 0. 04- 0. 12 mm (0. 002-0. 005 i n)
8. If t he cl ear ance i s out of st andar d, r emove t he
40 x 51.5 mm t hr ust washer and measur e its
t hi c kness.
9. Sel ec t and i nst al l a new t hrust washer , t hen r echeck.
THRUS T WAS HER, 40 x 51.5 mm
No. Thi c kness
1 4.80 mm (0.189 in)
2 4.85 mm (0.191 in)
3 4.90 mm (0.193 i n)
4 4.95 mm (0.195 i n)
5 5.00 mm (0.197 i n)
6 5.05 mm (0.199 i n)
10. Af t er r epl aci ng t he t hrust washer , make sur e t he
c l ear anc e i s wi t hi n st andar d.
11. Di sassembl e t he i nst al l ed part s f rom t he sec ondar y
shaf t .
12. Rei nst al l t he t r ansmi ssi on housi ng bear i ng in t he
14-296
Idler Gear Shaf t Removal and
Installati on
1. Remove t he snap ri ng (A), t he cot t er ret ai ner (B), and
t he 17 mm cot t ers (C). Do not di st ort t he snap r i ng.
2. Remove t he i dl er gear shaf t /i dl er gear assembl y (D)
f r om t he t r ansmi ssi on housi ng.
3. Chec k t he snap ri ng and t he cot t er ret ai ner f or wear
and damage. Repl ace t hem if t hey ar e wor n, di st or t ed,
or damaged.
4. Inst al l t he i dler gear shaf t /i dl er gear assembl y i n t he
r ever se or der of r emoval .
Idler Gear /Idl er Gear Shaf t
Repl acement
Dr i ver Handl e, 15 x 135L 07749-0010000
At t achment , 32 x 35 mm 07746-0010100
1. Remove t he snap ri ng f r om t he i dler gear /i dl er shaf t
assembl y. Do not di st ort t he snap ri ng.
2. Chec k t he snap ri ng f or wear and damage. Repl ace it if
it i s wor n, di st or t ed, or damaged.
3. Remove t he i dl er gear shaf t (A) f r om t he i dl er gear (B)
usi ng t he dr i ver handl e, t he 32 x 35 mm at t achment ,
and a pr ess.
(cont' d)
14-297
Idler Gear /Idl er Gear Shaf t
Replacement f cont
f
d)
4. Repl ac e t he i dler gear and/or t he i dl er gear shaf t , and
at t ach t he i dler gear shaf t to t he i dler gear .
6. Install t he i dl er gear shaf t (A) i n t he i dl er gear (B) usi ng
t he dr i ver handl e, t he 32 x 35 mm at t achment , and a
pr ess.
6. Install t he snap ri ng.
Clutch Disassembly
Cl ut ch Spr i ng Compr essor Set 07LAE-PX40000
1. Remove t he snap ri ng usi ng a sc r ewdr i ver .
2. Remove t he cl ut ch end-pl at e (A), t he cl ut ch di sc s (B)
(5), t he cl ut ch wave-pl at es (C) (4), t he cl ut ch flat-plate
(D), and t he wav ed spr i ng (E) f r om t he 1st cl ut ch dr um
(F).
F
3. Make a r ef er ence mar k on t he cl ut ch f l at -pl at e.
14-298
4. Remove t he cl ut ch end-pl at e (A), the cl ut ch di sc s (B)
(D), and t he waved spr i ng (E) f rom t he 2nd cl ut ch
dr um (F).
D
5. Make a ref erence mark on cl ut ch t he f lat -plat e.
(D), and t he waved spr i ng (E) f r om t he 3rd cl ut ch dr um
(F).
7. Make r ef er ence mar ks on t he cl ut ch f l at -pl at e.
(4), t he cl ut ch wave-pl at es (C) (4), and t he waved
spr i ng (D) f r om t he 4th cl ut ch dr um (E).
(cont' d)
14-299
Clutch Di sassembl y (cont' d)
9. Remove t he cl ut ch end-pl at e (A), t he cl ut ch di sc s (B) 11. Set t he cl ut ch spr i ng c ompr essor (A) on t he spr i ng
(4), t he cl ut ch wave-pl at es (C) (4), and t he wav ed ret ai ner (B) of t he 1st , 2nd, and Srd cl ut ches so that it
spr i ng (D) f r om t he 5th cl ut ch dr um (E). pushes on t he cl ut ch ret urn spr i ng (C).
10. Install t he cl ut ch spr i ng c ompr essor . 12. Be sur e t he cl ut ch spr i ng c ompr essor (A) i s adj ust ed
to make full cont act wi t h t he spr i ng ret ai ner (B) on t he
4th and 5th c l ut c hes.
14-300
13. Chec k t he pl acement of t he cl ut ch spr i ng c ompr essor .
If ei t her end of t he cl ut ch spr i ng c ompr essor i s set
over an ar ea of t he spr i ng ret ai ner whi c h i s
unsuppor t ed by t he ret urn spr i ng, t he spr i ng ret ai ner
may be damaged.
14. Compr es s t he ret urn spr i ng unti l t he snap ri ng c an be
r emoved.
15. Remove t he snap ri ng usi ng snap ri ng pl i er s.
(cont ' d)
14-301
Cl ut ch Di sassembl y (cont' d)
18. Wr ap a shop rag ar ound t he cl ut ch dr um (A), and
appl y ai r pr essur e t o t he f l ui d pas s age to r emove t he
pi st on (B). Pl ace a f i nger t i p on t he ot her passage
whi l e appl yi ng ai r pr essur e.
19.1st , 2nd, and 3rd c l ut c hes:
Remove t he cl ut ch pi st on (A), t hen r emove t he O-ri ng
(B) f r om t he cl ut ch pi st on, and r emove t he O-ri ng (C)
f r om t he cl ut ch dr um (D).
20.4t h and 5th cl ut ches:
Remove t he cl ut ch pi st on (A), t hen r emove t he out er
O-ri ng (B) and t he i nner O-ri ng (C) f r om t he cl ut ch
pi st on.
14-302
Clutch Inspection
1. Inspect t he 4th and 5th cl ut ch pi st ons and t he cl ut ch
pi st on check val ves (A).
2. If t he cl ut ch pi st on check val ve i s l oose or damaged,
r epl ace t he cl ut ch pi st on.
3. Chec k t he spr i ng ret ai ner f or wear and damage.
4. If t he spr i ng ret ai ner i s wor n or damaged, r epl ace it.
5. Chec k t he oi l seal (A) on t he spr i ng ret ai ner of t he 1st ,
2nd, and 3rd cl ut ches for wear , damage, and peel i ng.
7. Inspect t he cl ut ch di sc s, t he cl ut ch pl at es, and t he
cl ut ch end-pl at e f or wear , damage, and di scol or at i on.
Cl ut c h Di sc s f or Al l Model s
St andar d Thi c kness: 1.94 mm (0.076 i n)
Cl ut c h Pl at es
St andar d Thi c kness:
1 s t Cl ut c h Wave-pl at es: 1.6 mm (0.063 i n)
Fl at -pl at es: 1.6 mm (0.063 i n)
2nd Cl ut c h Wave-pl at es: 2.0 mm (0.079 i n)
Fl at -pl at e: 2.0 mm (0.079 i n)
3r d Cl ut c h Wave-pl at es: 1.6 mm (0.063 i n)
Fl at -pl at es: 1.6 mm (0.063 i n)
4t h Cl ut c h (wave-pl at es): 2.0 mm (0.079 i n)
5t h Cl ut c h (wave-pl at es): 2.0 mm (0.079 i n)
8. If t he cl ut ch di sc s ar e wor n or damaged, r epl ace t hem
as a set . If t he cl ut ch di sc s are r epl ac ed, do t he cl ut ch
c l ear anc e i nspect i on (see page 14-304).
9. If any cl ut ch plate i s wor n, damaged, or di sc ol or ed,
r epl ace t he damaged plate wi t h a new pl at e, and
i nspect t he ot her wave-pl at es f or a phase di f f erence
(see page 14-304). If t he cl ut ch plate i s r epl aced, do
t he cl ut ch c l ear anc e i nspect i on (see page 14-304).
10. If t he cl ut ch end-pl at e i s wor n, damaged, or
di sc ol or ed, do t he cl ut ch c l ear anc e i nspect i on (see
page 14-304), t hen repl ace t he cl ut ch end-pl at e.
6. If t he oi l seal i s wor n, damaged, or peel i ng, r epl ace
t he spr i ng ret ai ner.
14-303
Cl ut ch Wave-pl at e Phase Di fference
Inspect i on
1. Pl ace t he cl ut ch wave-pl at e (A) on a sur f ac e pl at e, and
set a di al i ndi cat or (B) on t he wave-pl at e.
2. Fi nd t he bottom (C) of a phase di f f erence of t he
wave-pl at e, zer o t he di al i ndi cat or and make a
r ef er ence mark on t he bot t om of t he wave-pl at e.
3. Rot at e t he wave-pl at e about 60-degr ees apart f r om
t he bottom whi l e hol di ng t he wave-pl at e by i ts
c i r c umf er enc e. The di al i ndi cat or shoul d be at t he t op
(D) of a phase di f f erence. Do not rotate t he wave-pl at e
whi l e hol di ng i ts sur f ac e, al ways rotate it whi l e
hol di ng its edges.
4. Read t he di al i ndi cat or. The di al i ndi cat or r eads t he
phase di f f erence (E) of t he wave-pl at e bet ween
bottom and t op.
St andar d Phase Di f f erence:
1st Cl ut c h: 0. 15- 0. 25 mm (0. 006-0. 010 i n)
2nd Cl ut c h: 0. 10- 0. 20 mm (0. 004-0. 008 i n)
3r d Cl ut c h: 0. 10- 0. 20 mm (0. 004-0. 008 i n)
4t h Cl ut c h: 0. 10- 0. 20 mm (0. 004-0. 008 i n)
5t h Cl ut c h: 0. 10- 0. 20 mm (0. 004-0. 008 i n)
5. Rot at e t he wave-pl at e about 60-degr ees. The di al
i ndi cat or shoul d be at t he bot t om of a phase
di f f erence (F and G), and zero t he di al i ndi cat or.
6. Measur e t he phase di f f erence at t he ot her t wo t ops
(H and I) of t he wave-pl at e by f ol l owi ng st eps 3 t hr u 5.
7. If t wo of t he t hr ee measur ement s ar e wi t hi n t he
st andar d, t he wave-pl at e i s OK. If t wo of t he t hr ee
measur ement s ar e out of t he st andar d, r epl ace t he
wave-pl at e.
Cl ut ch Cl ear ance Inspect i on
Cl ut ch Compr essor At t achment 07ZAE-PRP0100
1. Inspect t he cl ut ch pi st on, t he cl ut ch di s c s , t he cl ut ch
pl at es, and t he cl ut ch end-pl at e f or wear and damage
(see page 14-303), and i nspect t he cl ut ch wave-pl at e
phase di f f erence (see page 14-304), if nec essar y.
2. Inst al l t he cl ut ch pi st on i n t he cl ut ch dr um. Do not
i nst al l t he O-r i ngs dur i ng i nspect i on.
. Inst al l t he waved spr i ng (A) i n t he 1st cl ut ch dr um (B).
Inst al l t he cl ut ch f lat -plat e (C), t hen st art i ng wi t h t he
cl ut ch di sc , al t ernat el y i nst al l t he cl ut ch di sc s (D) (5)
and t he cl ut ch wave-pl at es (E) (4), t hen i nst al l t he
cl ut ch end-pl at e (F) wi t h t he flat si de t owar d t he t op
di sc .
14-304
4. Inst al l t he waved spr i ng (A) in t he 2nd cl ut ch dr um (B).
Inst al l t he cl ut ch f l at -pl at e (C), t hen st art i ng wi t h t he
cl ut ch di sc , al t ernat el y i nst all t he cl ut ch di sc s (D) (6)
and t he wave-pl at es (E) (5), t hen i nst al l t he cl ut ch
end-pl at e (F) wi t h t he flat si de t owar d t he top di sc .
5. Inst al l t he waved spr i ng (A) i n t he 3r d cl ut ch dr um (B).
and t he cl ut ch wave-pl at es (E) (5), t hen i nst al l t he
cl ut ch end-pl at e (F) wi t h t he flat si de t owar d t he t op
di sc .
6. Inst al l t he waved spr i ng (A) i n t he 4th cl ut ch dr um (B).
St ar t i ng wi t h t he cl ut ch wave-pl at e, al t ernat el y i nst al l
t he cl ut ch wave-pl at es (C) (4) and t he cl ut ch di sc s (D)
(4), t hen i nst al l t he cl ut ch end-pl at e (E) wi t h t he flat
si de t owar d t he t op di sc .
(cont' d)
14-305
Clutch Clearance Inspection (cont'd)
7. Inst al l t he waved spr i ng (A) in t he 5th cl ut ch dr um (B).
St ar t i ng wi t h t he cl ut ch wave-pl at e, al t er nat el y i nst al l
t he cl ut ch wave-pl at es (C) (4) and t he cl ut ch di sc s (D)
(4), t hen i nst al l t he cl ut ch end-pl at e (E) wi t h t he f l at
si de t owar d t he top di sc .
8. Inst al l t he snap ri ng usi ng a sc r ewdr i ver .
9. Set a di al i ndi cat or (A) on t he cl ut ch end-pl at e (B).
10. Zer o t he di al i ndi cat or wi t h t he cl ut ch end-pl at e li fted
up to t he snap ri ng (C).
14-306
11. Rel ease t he cl ut ch end-pl at e to l ower t he cl ut ch
end-pl at e, t hen put t he cl ut ch c ompr essor at t achment
on t he cl ut ch end-pl at e (A).
07ZAE-PRP0100
12. Pr ess t he cl ut ch c ompr essor at t achment down wi t h
147 N (15 kgf, 33 Ibf) (B) usi ng a f or ce gauge, and r ead
t he di al i ndi cat or (C).
13. The di al i ndi cat or r eads t he c l ear anc e (D) bet ween t he
cl ut ch end-pl at e and t he t op di sc (E). Take
measur ement s in at l east t hr ee pl ac es, and use t he
aver age as t he act ual c l ear anc e.
Cl ear anc e bet ween Cl ut c h End-Pl at e and Top
Di sc
St andar d:
1st Cl ut c h:
2nd Cl ut c h:
3r d Cl ut c h:
4t h Cl ut c h:
5t h Cl ut c h:
1. 38-1. 58 mm (0. 054-0. 062 i n)
1. 14-1. 34 mm (0. 045-0. 053 i n)
1. 23-1. 43 mm (0. 048-0. 056 i n)
0. 93- 1. 13 mm (0. 037-0. 044 i n)
0. 93- 1. 13 mm (0. 037-0. 044 i n)
14. If t he c l ear anc e i s out of t he st andar d, sel ec t a new
cl ut ch end-pl at e f rom t he f ol l owi ng t abl e.
c z r
T
1ST CL UTCH END-PL ATES
Mar k Thi c kness (t)
1 2.6 mm (0.102 in)
2 2.7 mm (0.106 in)
3 2.8 mm (0.110 in)
4 2.9 mm (0.114 i n)
5 3.0 mm (0.118 in)
6 3.1 mm (0.122 i n)
7 3.2 mm (0.126 in)
8 3.3 mm (0.130 in)
9 3.4 mm (0.134 in)
(cont ' d)
14-307
Cl ut ch Cl ear ance Inspect i on
(cont' d)
2ND CL UTCH END- PL ATES
Mark Tl hod^ ess (t)
10 2.4 mm (0.094 i n)
11
2.5 mm (0.098 i n)
1 2.6 mm (0.102 i n)
2
2.7 mm (0.106 i n)
3
2.8 mm (0.110 i n)
4 2.9 mm (0.114 i n)
5 3.0 mm (0.118 i n)
6 Z 'i v,m (0.122 i n)
7 3.2 mm (0.126 in)
3RD, 4TH, and STH CL UTCH END- PL ATES
Mark
r
" I S S (t)
1 2.1 mm (0.083 i n)
2 2.2 mm (0.087 i n)
2.3 mm (0.091 i n)
4 2.4 mm (0.094 i n)
5 2.5 mm (0.098 i n)
6 2.6 mm (0.102 i n)
7 2.7 mm (0.106 i n)
8 2.8 mm (0.110 i n)
9 2.9 mm (0.114 i n)
15. Install a new cl ut ch end-pl at e
f
and r echeck t he
c l ear anc e. If t he t hi ckest cl ut ch end-pl at e i s i nst al l ed,
but t he c l ear anc e i s sti ll over t he ser vi c e li mi t , r epl ace
t he cl ut ch di sc s and t he cl ut ch pl at es.
1st 2nd, and 3rd Clutch
Reassembl y
Cl ut ch Spr i ng Compr essor Set 07LAE-PX40000
NOTE: Hol d t he spr i ng c ompr essor i n a vi se wi t h soft
j aws . Be car ef ul not to damage t he cl ut ch dr um.
1 Soak t he cl ut ch di sc s t hor oughl y in ATF f or at l east
30 mi nut es.
2. Inst al l a new O-ri ng (A) i n t he 1st , 2nd, and 3r d cl ut ch
pi st ons (B), and i nst al l a new O-ri ng (C) on t he cl ut ch
dr ums (D).
3. Inst al l t he cl ut ch pi st on (A) i n t he cl ut ch dr um (B).
Appl y pr essur e and rotate to ensur e pr oper seat i ng.
Lubr i cat e t he pi st on O-ri ng wi t h ATF bef ore i nst al l i ng
Do not pi nch t he O-ri ng by i nst al l i ng t he pi st on wi t h
t oo muc h f or ce.
14-308
4. Set t he return spr i ng (A) and t he spr i ng ret ai ner (B) on
t he cl ut ch pi st on, and posi t i on t he snap ri ng (C) on t he
spr i ng ret ai ner.
5. Install t he cl ut ch spr i ng c ompr essor .
07LAE-PX40000
6. Set t he cl ut ch spr i ng c ompr es s or (A) on the spr i ng
ret ai ner (B) so t hat it c ompr es s es t he cl ut ch ret urn
spr i ng (C).
NOTE: Coat t he c i r c umf er enc e of t he spr i ng r et ai ner
and ar eas wher e t he spr i ng ret ai ner cont act s t he
cl ut ch pi st on wi t h ATF bef or e i nst al l at i on.
. Compr ess t he ret urn spr i ng car ef ul l y unti l t he snap
ri ng c an be i nst al l ed. Chec k t hat t he spr i ng ret ai ner (A)
i s properl y i nst al l ed on t he cl ut ch hub (B). If
i mpr oper l y i nst al l ed, c hange t he posi t i on of t he
spr i ng c ompr essor and t he spr i ng ret ai ner.
NOTE: Insert t he spr i ng r et ai ner so it can be adj ust ed
(cent er of t ol er ance) to pr event damagi ng t he spr i ng
ret ai ner oi l s eal .
o
(cont ' d)
14-309
1st , 2nd, a n d Srd Cl ut ch Reassembl y ( c o n t ' d )
8. Install t he snap ri ng usi ng snap ri ng pl i er s.
9. Remove t he cl ut ch spr i ng c ompr essor ,
10. Make sur e t he oi l seal of t he spr i ng ret ai ner (A) i s
properl y i nst al l ed on t he cl ut ch pi st on (B). If t he oi l
seal was damaged or c r ac ked, r epl ace t he spr i ng
ret ai ner.
Impr oper l y i nst al l ed:
Pr oper l y i nst al l ed:
11. Inst al l t he wave spr i ng (A) i n t he 1 st cl ut ch dr um (B).
Inst al l t he cl ut ch flat-plate (C), t hen st art i ng wi t h t he
and t he wave-pl at es (E) (4). Install t he cl ut ch end-pl at e
(F) wi t h t he flat si de t owar d t he top di sc .
12. Install t he wave spr i ng (A) i n t he 2nd cl ut ch dr um (B).
Install t he cl ut ch flat-plate (C), t hen st art i ng wi t h t he
(F) wi t h t he flat si de t owar d t he t op di sc .
14-310
4th and 5th Clutch ReassesnralbEv
13. Inst al l t he wave spr i ng (A) i n t he 3rd cl ut ch dr um (B).
(F) wi t h t he flat si de t owar d t he t op di sc .
14. Inst al l t he snap ri ng usi ng a sc r ewdr i ver to sec ur e t he
15. Chec k t hat t he cl ut ch pi st on moves by appl yi ng ai r
pr essur e into f l ui d passage.
Cl ut ch Spr i ng Compr essor Set 07LAE PX40000
1. Soak t he cl ut ch di sc s t hor oughl y in ATF f or at l east
30 mi nut es.
2. Install new O-r i ngs (A) on t he cl ut ch pi st on (B). Do not
t wi st t he O-r i ngs.
3. Install t he cl ut ch pi st on (A) in t he cl ut ch dr um (B)
whi l e appl yi ng pr essur e and rotati ng to ensur e proper
seat i ng. Do not pi nch t he O-ri ng.
(cont' d)
14-311
4th and 5th Clutch Reassembly (cont 'd)
4. Set t he ret urn spr i ng (A) and t he spr i ng ret ai ner (B) on
t he cl ut ch pi st on, and posi t i on t he snap ri ng (C) on t he
spr i ng ret ai ner.
6. Be sur e t he cl ut ch spr i ng c ompr essor (A) i s adj ust ed
to make f u l l cont act wi t h t he spr i ng ret ai ner ( B) .
A
B
7. Check the placement of the clutch spring compressor,
If either end of t he clutch spring compressor is set
over an area of t he spring retainer that is unsupported
by the return spring, the retainer may be damaged.
14-312
8. Compr ess t he return spr i ng unti l t he snap ri ng c an be
i nst al l ed.
9. Install t he snap ri ng usi ng snap ri ng pl i er s.
10. Remove t he cl ut ch spr i ng c ompr essor .
11. Inst al l t he wav e spr i ng (A) in t he 4th cl ut ch dr um (B).
t he wave-pl at es (C) (4) and t he cl ut ch di sc s (D) (4).
Inst al l t he cl ut ch end-pl at e (E) wi t h t he flat si de t owar d
t he t op di sc .
12. Inst al l t he wav e spr i ng (A) in t he 5th cl ut ch dr um (B).
t he wave-pl at es (C) (4) and t he cl ut ch di sc s (D) (4).
Inst al l t he cl ut ch end-pl at e (E) wi t h t he flat si de t owar d
t he t op di sc .
E
(cont ' d)
14-313
4th and 5th Clutch Reassembly (cont'd)
13. Install t he snap ri ng usi ng a sc r ewdr i ver to sec ur e t he
14. Chec k t hat t he cl ut ch pi st on moves by appl yi ng ai r
pr essur e i nto f l ui d passage.
14-314
Val ve Body
Val ve Body and ATF St r ai ner Installati on
Expl oded Vi ew
Torque Specifications:
6 x 1.0 mm: 12 N-m (1.2 kgf m, 8.7 Ibfft)
8 x 1.25 mm: 18 N-m (1.8 kgf m, 13 Ibfft)
6x 1.0 mm
Eight Bolts
ATF STRAINER
6x1.0 mm
12 Bolts
SERVO BODY
DOWEL PIN,
Two Pins
ATF FEED PIPES,
8 x 198 mm
O-RING
Replace.
STATOR SHAFT STOP
STATOR SHAFT
REGULATOR
SEPARATOR PLATE
DOWEL PIN,
Two Pins
COOLER CHECK
VALVE SPRING
COOLER CHECK
VALVE
MAIN VALVE BODY
ATF PUMP DRIVEN
GEAR SHAFT
ATF PUMP DRIVEN
GEAR
DOWEL PIN,
Two Pins
MAIN
SEPARATOR
PLATE
TORQUE CONVERTER HOUSING
(cont ' d)
14-315
Val ve Body
Valve Body and ATF Strainer Installation (cont' d)
NOTE: Ref er to t he Expl oded Vi ew as needed dur i ng t he
f ol l owi ng pr oc edur es.
1. Make sur e t hat t he ATF magnet i s c l ean and i nst al l ed
i n t he t or que conver t er housi ng.
2. Inst al l t he mai n separ at or plate (A) and t he t wo dowel
pi ns on t he t or que conver t er housi ng. Then i nst al l t he
ATF pump dr i ve gear (B), t he ATF pump dr i ven gear
(C), and t he ATF pump dr i ven gear shaf t (D). Inst al l t he
ATF pump dr i ven gear wi t h i ts gr ooved and
c hamf er ed si de f aci ng down.
3. Inst al l t he mai n val ve body (t hree bol t s).
4. Make sur e t he ATF pump dr i ve gear (A) rot at es
smoot hl y i n t he nor mal oper at i ng di r ect i on, and t he
ATF pump dr i ven gear shaf t (B) moves smoot hl y in
t he axi al and nor mal oper at i ng di r ect i on.
5. If t he ATF pump dr i ve gear and t he ATF pump dr i ven
gear shaf t do not move smoot hl y, l oosen t he mai n
val ve body bol t s. Real i gn t he ATF pump dr i ven gear
shaf t , and ret i ght en t he bolts to t he speci f i ed t or que,
t hen r echeck. Fai l ur e to al i gn t he ATF pump dr i ven
gear shaf t cor r ect l y wi l l resul t i n a sei zed ATF pump
dr i ve gear or ATF pump dr i ven gear shaf t .
6. Make sur e that t he t wo check bal l s and t he cool er
c hec k val ve ar e in t he mai n val ve body, t hen i nst al l
t he cool er check val ve spr i ng i n t he cool er check
val ve.
7. Inst al l t he ser vo separ at or plate and t he t wo dowel
pi ns on t he mai n val ve body.
8. Inst al l t he ser vo body (12 bol t s).
S. ii i si ai i a new O-ri ng on t he ATF st r ai ner , and i nst al l t he
ATF st r ai ner (two bol t s) on t he ser vo body.
BAFFL E PL ATE BOL T HOL E
ATF STRAI NER BOL T HOL E
6 x 1.0 mm
12 N-m (1.2 k g f m, 8.7 ibf-ft)
10. Inst al l t he regul at or separ at or plate and t he t wo dowel
pi ns on t he mai n val ve body.
11. Inst al l a new O-ri ng on t he st at or shaf t , and i nst al l t he
st at or shaf t and t he st at or shaf t st op.
12. Inst al l t he regul at or val ve body (ei ght bol t s).
13. Inst al l t he ATF j oi nt pi pes (one bolt).
14. Inst al l t he ATF f eed pi pes i n t he regul at or val ve body
and t he ser vo body.
14-316
O
Tr ansmi ssi on Housing
Shaft Assembl y and Housing Installation
Expl oded Vi ew
6x 1. 0 mm: 12 N-m (1.2 kgf -m, 8.7 Ibf-ft)
6 x 1. 0 mm
14 N-m
(1.4 kgf -m, 10 Ibf-ft)
TRANS MI S S I ON HOUS I NG
MOUNTING BOL TS
10 x 1.25 mm
44 N-m (4.5 k g f m, 33 Ibf-ft)
19 Bol t s
ATF FEED PIPE
ATF L UBRICATION PIPE
SHIFT S OL ENOI D
VAL VE COVER
COUNTERS HAFT
S UB A S S E MB L Y
INPUT S HAFT
(MAINSHAFT)
S PE E D S E NS OR
OUTPUT S HAFT
(COUNTERSHAFT)
S PE E D S E NS OR
DETENT
SPRI NG
S HI FT S OL ENOI D
WI RE HARNES S
TRANS MI S S I ON
HANGER
MAI NSHAFT
S UB A S S E MB L Y
O-RING
Replace.
S E NS OR WAS HER
6 x 1.0 mm
S ECONDARY
S HAFT
S UB A S S E MB L Y
6 x 1.0 mm
14 N m
(1.4 kgf -m,
10 Ibf-ft)
TORQUE CONVERTOR HOUSI NG
(cont'd)
14-317
Shaf t Assembl y and Housi ng Installation(cont'd)
f ol l owi ng pr ocedur e.
1. Inst al l t he di fferenti al assembl y i n t he t or que
2. Inst al l t he baffle pl at e on t he ser vo body.
3. As s embl e t he mai nshaf t , t he count er shaf t , and t he
4. J oi n t he mai nshaf t subassembl y (A), t he count er shaf t
subassembl y (B), and t he sec ondar y shaf t
subassembl y (C) t oget her. Then i nst al l t hem i n t he
t or que conver t er housi ng. Do not bump t he
count er shaf t on t he baffle pl at e (D).
C
5. Make sur e t he count er shaf t s ubas s embl y and t he
di fferenti al assembl y (E) are c l ear of t he baffle pl at e.
6. If t he det ent ar m was r emoved, i nst al l t he det ent ar m
(A) wi t h t he ar m col l ar (B) on t he ser vo body (C), and
i nst al l a new lock was her (D) by al i gni ng its cut out (E)
wi t h t he proj ect i on (F) of t he ser vo body. Install and
t i ght en t he bol t , t hen bend t he lock t ab of t he lock
was her agai nst t he bolt head.
7. Install t he sel ec t or cont rol shaf t (A) in t he t orque
conver t er housi ng al i gni ng t he manual val ve l ever pi n
(B) on t he sel ect or cont rol shaf t wi t h t he gui de of t he
manual val ve (C). Pull t he manual val ve gent l y when
al i gni ng t he manual val ve wi t h t he sel ect or cont rol
shaf t .
B
14-318
8. Hook t he det ent spr i ng (A) t o t he det ent ar m (B).
9. Tur n t he shi ft fork shaf t (A) so t he l arge c hamf er ed
hol e (B) i s f aci ng t he fork bolt hol e (C) of t he r ever se
shi f t fork (D).
10. Install t he r ever se shi ft fork and t he r ever se sel ect or
t oget her on t he shi ft fork shaf t and t he count er shaf t
subassembl y. Sec ur e t he r ever se shi ft fork to t he shi ft
fork shaf t wi t h t he lock bolt and a new lock washer (E),
t hen bend t he lock t ab of t he lock washer agai nst t he
bolt head.
11. Install t he needl e bear i ng and t he count er shaf t
r ever se gear on t he count er shaf t subassembl y.
14. Inst al l t he t hr ee dowel pi ns (A) and a new gasket (B)
on t he t or que conver t er housi ng (C).
10 x 1.25 mm
44 N-m (4.5 kgf -m, 33 Ibf f t )
19 Bol t s
15. Al i gn t he spr i ng pi n of t he sel ect or cont rol shaf t (D)
wi t h t he t r ansmi ssi on housi ng gr oove (E) by t urni ng
t he sel ect or cont rol shaf t . Do not squeeze t he end of
t he sel ect or cont rol shaf t t i ps t oget her when t urni ng
t he sel ect or cont rol shaf t . If t he t i ps ar e squeezed
t oget her , it wi l l c aus e a f ault y shi f t posi t i on si gnal or
posi t i on due to t he pl ay bet ween t he sel ect or cont rol
shaf t and t he t r ansmi ssi on r ange swi t c h.
16. Pl ace t he t r ansmi ssi on housi ng (F) on t he t or que
conver t er housi ng. Do not i nst al l t he mai nshaf t and
count er shaf t speed s ens or s bef ore i nst al l i ng t he
t r ansmi ssi on housi ng on t he t or que conver t er
housi ng.
12. Install t he r ever se i dler gear in t he t r ansmi ssi on
housi ng (see page 14-272), if it was r emoved.
13. Inst al l t he i dler gear shaf t /i dl er gear assembl y (see
page 14-297), if it was r emoved.
(cont ' d)
14-319
Shaft Assembly and Housing Installation (cont'd)
17. Wr ap a sc r ewdr i ver ti p wi t h t ape t o pr event damage
t o t he r ever se i dl er gear t eet h. Engage t he r ever se
i dl er gear wi t h r ever se gear s by rotati ng t he r ever se
i dl er gear usi ng t he sc r ewdr i ver .
18. Inst al l t he t r ansmi ssi on housi ng mount i ng bol t s, and
t i ght en t he 19 bol t s to 44 N-m (4.5 kgf -m, 33 Ibf-ft) in at
l east t wo st eps, i n a c r i ssc r oss pat t ern.
19. Inst al l a new O-ri ng (A) on t he i nput shaf t (mai nshaf t )
speed sensor (B), and i nst al l t he i nput shaf t
(mai nshaf t ) speed sensor i n t he t r ansmi ssi on
housi ng.
20. Inst al l a new O-ri ng (C) on t he out put shaf t
(count ershaf t ) speed sensor (D), and i nst al l t he out put
shaf t (count ershaf t ) speed sensor wi t h t he was her (E).
21. Inst al l t he shi ft sol enoi d wi r e har ness (F) i n t he
t r ansmi ssi on housi ng wi t h a new O-ri ng ( G) .
22. Connec t t he shi ft sol enoi d wi r e har ness connect or s to
t he shi f t sol enoi d val ves:
" BL U wi r e connect or to shi ft sol enoi d val ve A.
ORN wi r e connect or to shi ft sol enoi d val ve B.
GRN wi r e connect or to shi ft sol enoi d val ve C.
YE L , WH T, and WH T wi r e connect or to shi ft
sol enoi d val ve D.
RED wi r e connect or to shi ft sol enoi d val ve E.
23. Inst al l a new gasket (A) and t he dowel pi ns (B), t hen
sec ur e t he shi ft sol enoi d val ve c over (C) wi t h t he
bol t s.
14-320
Transmi ssi on End Cover
End Cover Installation
Expl oded Vi ew
6 x 1.0 mm: 12 Nm (1.2 kgf m, 8.7 Ibfft)
6x 1.0 mm
TRANSMISSION RANGE
SWITCH COVER
TRANSMISSION
RANGE SWITCH
LOCK WASHER
Repl ace.
PARK PAWL
PARK PAWL SPRING
PARK PAWL SHAFT
6x 1.0 mm
SHIFT CABLE PARK LEVER
COVER BRACKET SPRING
SPECIAL BOLTS
28 Nm (2.9 kgf m, 21 Ibfft)
6x 1.0 mm
12 Bolts
TRANSMISSION END COVER
CONICAL SPRING WASHER
Repl ac e.
A/TCLUTCH
PRESSURE CONTROL
SOLENOID VALVES B and C
HARNESS CLAMP
BRACKETS
6x 1.0 mm
28 Nm
(2.9 kgf m,
21 Ibfft)
6x 1.0 mm
A/T CLUTCH
PRESSURE CONTROL
SOLENOID VALVE A
6x 1.0 mm
ATF PIPE
28 Nm
(2.9 kgf m, 21 Ibfft) ATF FILTER BRACKETS
(cont ' d)
14-321
End Cower Installati on (cont' d)
Mai nshaf t Hol der 07GAB-PF50101
1. Install t he mai nshaf t hol der onto t he mai nshaf t .
2. Lubr i cat e t he f ol l owi ng part s wi t h ATF:
Spl i nes and t hr eads of t he mai nshaf t .
Spl i nes of t he mai nshaf t i dl er gear .
The ol d coni cal spr i ng was her and t he ol d l ocknut .
3. Inst al l t he mai nshaf t i dler gear (A), t he ol d c oni c al
spr i ng was her (B), and t he ol d locknut (C) on t he
mai nshaf t (D), and t i ght en t he locknut to 226 N-m
(23.0 k gf m, 166 Ibf-ft).
NOTE:
Do not t ap t he mai nshaf t i dl er gear to i nst al l .
Use a t or que wr enc h to t i ght en t he l ocknut . Do not
use an i mpact wr enc h.
4. Install t he park l ever spr i ng (A), t he park l ever (B)
f
and
t he park l ever st op (C) on t he sel ect or cont rol shaf t (D),
t hen i nst al l t he lock bolt wi t h a new lock was her (E).
Do not bend t he lock t ab of t he lock was her unti l st ep
18.
5. Install t he park pawl shaf t (F), t he park pawl spr i ng (G),
t he park pawl (H), and t he st op shaf t (I) on t he
6. Lubr i cat e t he f ol l owi ng part s wi t h ATF:
Thr eads and spl i nes of t he count er shaf t .
The ol d coni cal spr i ng was her and t he ol d l ocknut .
Ar eas wher e t he park gear cont act s t he coni cal
spr i ng washer .
7. Inst al l t he park gear (J), t he ol d coni cal spr i ng washer
(K), and t he ol d l ocknut (L) on t he count er shaf t (M).
8. Lift t he park pawl up, and engage it wi t h t he park gear ,
t hen t i ght en t he l ocknut to 226 N-m (23.0 kgf -m,
166 Ibf-ft).
NOTE:
Do not t ap t he park gear to i nst al l .
Us e a t or que wr enc h t o t i ght en t he l ocknut . Do not
Count er shaf t l ocknut has l ef t -hand t hr eads.
9. Remove t he l ocknut s and t he coni cal spr i ng was her s
f r om t he mai nshaf t and t he count er shaf t .
10. Lubr i cat e t he t hr eads of t he shaf t s, new l ocknut s, and
new coni cal spr i ng was her s wi t h ATF.
14-322
11 Install coni cal spr i ng was her s (A) wi t h f aci ng st amped
mark si de up in t he di rect i on s hown, and i nst al l t he
mai nshaf t l ocknut (B), t he count er shaf t locknut (C),
and t he sec ondar y shaf t locknut (D).
Repl ac e.
12. Ti ght en t he l ocknut s to 167 N-m (17.0 kgf -m,
123 Ibf f t ).
NOTE:
Be sur e to i nst al l t he coni cal spr i ng was her s i n t he
di rect i on shown.
Us e a t or que wr enc h to t i ght en t he l ocknut . Do not
Count er shaf t and sec ondar y shaf t l ocknut s have
13. Remove t he mai nshaf t hol der f r om t he mai nshaf t .
14. St ake t he l ocknut s i nto t he shaf t s to a dept h (A) of
0. 7- 1. 3 mm (0. 03-0. 05 i n) usi ng a 3.5 mm punch (B).
15. VIN begi ns wi t h J HM: Inst al l t he sel ect or cont rol l ever
(A) on t he sel ect or cont rol shaf t (B), and i nst al l t he bolt
wi t h a new l ock washer (C), t hen bend t he lock t ab of
t he lock was her agai nst t he bolt head.
16. Set t he park l ever i n t he P posi t i on, t hen check that t he
park pawl (A) engages t he park gear (B).
17. If t he park pawl does not engage f ul l y, do t he park
l ever st op i nspect i on and adj ust ment (see page
14-265).
18. Ti ght en t he lock bolt (C), and bend t he lock t ab of t he
lock was her (D) agai nst t he bolt head.
(cont ' d)
14-323
End Cower Installation fcont'd)
19. Inst al l t he ATF f eed pi pe (A) i nto t he i dl er gear shaf t ,
and i nst al l t he ATF l ubri cat i on pi pe (B) i nto t he
20. Inst al l a new gasket (A) on t he t r ansmi ssi on housi ng,
and i nst al l t he t wo dowel pi ns (B) and new O-r i ngs (C)
over t he t op of t he ATF f eed pi pes.
21. Inst al l t he end c over (D), and t i ght en t he t hr ee spec i al
bol t s (E) and t he 6 x 1.0 mm bol t s (F) (12 bol t s).
22. Inst al l t he har ness c l amp bracket (G) on t he end c over
wi t h t he bolt (H).
23.-Move t he sel ect or cont rol shaf t (A) f rom t he P posi t i on
to t he N posi t i on by t ur ni ng t he sel ect or cont rol shaf t
on t he t or que conver t er si de.
NOTE: Do not squeeze t he end of t he sel ect or cont rol
shaf t t i ps together when t urni ng t he shaf t . If t he t i ps
ar e squeezed t oget her it wi l l c ause a f ault y shi ft
posi t i on si gnal or posi t i on due to t he pl ay bet ween t he
sel ect or cont rol shaf t and t he t r ansmi ssi on r ange
swi t c h.
24. Al i gn t he cut out s (A) on t he rot ary-f rame wi t h t he
neut ral posi t i oni ng cut out s (B) on t he t r ansmi ssi on
r ange swi t c h (C), t hen put a 2.0 mm (0.08 in) f eel er
gauge bl ade (D) i n t he cut out s to hol d in t he N
posi t i on.
NOTE: Be sur e to use a 2.0 mm (0.08 i n) bl ade or
equi val ent to hol d t he t r ansmi ssi on range swi t c h i n
t he N posi t i on.
14-324
25. Inst al l thei ransmi ssi on r ange swi t ch (A) gent l y on'the
sel ect or cont rol shaf t (B) whi l e hol di ng it i n t he N
posi t i on wi t h the 2.0 mm .(6.08i n) bl ade (C).
C
26. Ti ght en t he bolts on t he t r ansmi ssi on r ange swi t ch
whi l e you cont i nue to hol d it i n t he N posi t i on. Do not
move t he t r ansmi ssi on range swi t c h when t i ght eni ng
t he bol t s. Remove t he f eel er gauge. -
6 x 1.0 mm
12 N m
. (1.2 k g f m, 8.7 Ibf f t ) "
27. Connec t t he t r ansmi ssi on r ange swi t c h c onnec t or (A)
sec ur el y, t hen i nst al l t he har ness c l amps (B) on t he
clamp bracket (C).
28. Inst al l t he t r ansmi ssi on r ange swi t c h c over (D).
A/ T cl ut ch pr essur e cont rol sol enoi d val ve A and t he
(cont' d)
14-325
End Cover Installati on (cont' d)
30. Inst al l a new gasket (B) on t he t r ansmi ssi on housi ng,
and i nst al l t he ATF pi pe (C) and t he ATF j oi nt pi pes (D).
6x1.0 mm
12 N-m (1.2 kgf m, 8.7 Ibfft)
31. Inst al l new O-r i ngs (E) over t he ATF j oi nt pi pes, and
i nst al l A/ T cl ut ch pr essur e cont rol sol enoi d val ve A.
A/ T cl ut ch pr essur e cont rol sol enoi d val ves B and C
33. Inst al l a new gasket (A) and t he ATF j oi nt pi pes (D) on
t he t r ansmi ssi on housi ng, and i nst al l new O-r i ngs (E)
over t he ATF j oi nt pi pes.
6x 1.0 mm
12 Nm (1.2 kgf m, 8.7 Ibfft)
E
Repl ac e.
A
Repl ac e.
34. Inst al l A/ T cl ut ch pr essur e cont r ol sol enoi d val ves B
and C wi t h t he har ness c l amp br acket s (F).
35. Inst al l t he ATF fi lter br acket (A) on t he t r ansmi ssi on
housi ng, t hen i nst al l t he ATF cool er l i ne/ATF fi lter (B)
wi t h t he l i ne banj o bolt (C) and new seal i ng was her s
(D). Sec ur e t he ATF fi Iter wi t h i ts bracket (E).
H
28 N-m
D
Repl ace.
C
28 Nm
6x 1.0 mm
12 Nm
(1.2 kgf m,
8.7 Ibfft)
36. Sec ur e t he l i ne br acket s (F) wi t h t hr ee bol t s.
37. Inst al l t he ATF c ool er out l et l i ne (G) wi t h t he l i ne banj o
bolt (H) and new seal i ng was her s (I).
38. Inst al l t he br eat her c ap (A) on t he br eat her pi pe (B).
39. Inst al l t he di pst i ck.
14-326
s 0 A/ T Differential
THRUST SH I M, 76 mm
Pr el oad Inspect i on, page 14-332
THRUST WASHER, 76.2 mm
BEARI NG OUTER RACE
CARRIER BEARI NG
FINAL DRI VEN GEAR
DIF F ERENTIAL CARRIER
Bac kl ash Inspect i on, page 14-328
CARRIER BEARI NG
BEARI NG OUTER RACE
THRUS T WAS HER, 80 mm
14-327
A/ T Differential
Backlash Inspect i on
1. Inst al l both axl es i nto t he A/ T di f f erent i al , t hen pl ace
t he axl es on V-bl ocks.
2. Chec k t he backl ash of t he pi ni on gear s (A) usi ng a di al
i ndi cat or (B).
St andar d: 0. 05- 0. 15 mm (0. 002-0. 006 i n)
3. If t he bac kl ash i s out of st andar d, r epl ace t he
di fferenti al car r i er (see page 14-329).
Carri er Beari ng Repl acement
At t achment , 40 x 50 mm 07LAD-PW50601
NOTE:
The bear i ng and t he bear i ng out er r ace shoul d be
r epl aced as a set .
* Inspect and adj ust t he car r i er bear i ng pr el oad
whenever bear i ng i s r epl ac ed.
Check t he bear i ng f or wear and rough rot at i on. If t he
bear i ng i s OK , r emoval i s not nec essar y.
1. Remove t he car r i er bear i ng (A) usi ng a c ommer c i al l y
avai l abl e pul l er (B), a bear i ng separ at or (C), and a
spac er (D).
2. Install new car r i er bear i ngs usi ng t he 40 x 50 mm
at t achment wi t h t he smal l end and a pr ess. Pr ess t he
car r i er bear i ng on sec ur el y so t here i s no c l ear anc e
bet ween t he car r i er bear i ng and t he di fferenti al
carri er.
14-328
Differential Carrier and Final Driven
Gear Replacement
1. Remove t he f i nal dr i ven gear (A) f r om t he di fferenti al
car r i er (B).
NOTE: Di fferenti al car r i er bol t s have left-hand
t hr eads.
2. Inst al l t he f i nal dr i ven gear i n t he di rect i on shown on
t he di fferenti al car r i er .
3. Sec ur e t he f i nal dr i ven gear and t he di fferenti al car r i er
wi t h t he bol t s. Ti ght en t he bol t s to t he speci f i ed
t or que i n a c r i ssc r oss pattern i n at l east t wo st eps.
Oi l Seal Repl acement
. Dri ver Handl e, 15 x 135L 07749-0010000
. Oi l Seal Dri ver At t achment 07947-SD90101
Oi l Seal Dri ver At t achment 07JAD-PH80101
1. Remove t he oi l seal f r om t he t r ansmi ssi on housi ng.
2. Remove t he oi l seal f r om t he t or que conver t er
housi ng.
(cont' d)
14-329
A/ T Differential
Oi l Seal Repl acement (cont'd)
3. Inst al l a new oi l seal (A) f l ush wi t h t he t r ansmi ssi on
housi ng usi ng t he dr i ver handl e and t he oi l seal dr i ver
at t achment .
Carrier Beari ng Outer Race
Repl acement
Dr i ver Handl e, 15 x 135L 07749-0010000
At t achment , 78 x 80 mm 07NAD-PX40100
At t achment , 72 x 75 mm 07746-0010600
NOTE:
The bear i ng and t he bear i ng out er r ace shoul d be
r epl aced as a set .
Repl ac e t he beari ng wi t h a new one whenever t he
out er r ace i s r epl aced.
Do not use t he t hrust shi m f r om t he t or que conver t er
housi ng.
Adj ust bear i ng pr el oad after r epl aci ng t he bear i ng and
t he out er r ace.
Cost al l part s wi t h ATF dur i ng i nst al l at i on.
1, Remove tho
K
?2r:rig c ut er r c c c (A), Lie 76.2 mm
t hr ust washer (B), and t he 76 mm t hrust shi m (C) f r om
t he t r ansmi ssi on housi ng (D) by heat i ng t he
t r ansmi ssi on housi ng to about 212 F (100 C) usi ng a
heat gun (E). Do not heat t he t r ansmi ssi on housi ng
mor e t han 212 F (100 C).
NOTE: Let t he t r ansmi ssi on housi ng cool to r oom
t emper at ur e bef ore i nst al l i ng t he bear i ng out er r ace.
14-330
<S0
2. Remove t he beari ng out er r ace (A) and t he 80 mm
t hr ust was her (B) f r om t he t or que conver t er housi ng
(C).
3. Inst al l t he 80 mm t hrust was her and a new bear i ng
out er r ac e i n t he t or que conver t er housi ng.
4. Inst al l t he beari ng out er r ace sec ur el y i n t he t or que
conver t er housi ng usi ng t he dr i ver handl e and t he
5. Inst al l t he 76 mm t hrust shi m (A), t he 76.2 mm t hr ust
was her (B), and a new bear i ng out er r ace (C) i n t he
t r ansmi ssi on housi ng (D).
NOTE: Be sur e to i nst al l t he 76.2 mm t hr ust was her
wi t h t he " 41382 RK Y" mar k f aci ng downwar d.
6. Inst al l t he beari ng out er r ac e sec ur el y s o t her e i s no
c l ear anc e bet ween t he bear i ng out er r ac e, t he
76.2 mm t hr ust washer , t he 76 mm t hr ust s hi m, and
t he t r ansmi ssi on housi ng, usi ng t he dr i ver handl e and
14-331
A/ T Differential
Carrier Bearing Preload Inspection
. Dri ver Handl e, 15 x 135L 07749-0010000
. At t achment , 72 x 75 mm 07746-0010600
. Pr el oad Inspect i on Tool 07HAJ-PK40201
NOTE;
If t he t r ansmi ssi on housi ng, t he torque conver t er
housi ng, t he di fferenti al car r i er , t he car r i er bear i ng,
and t he out er r ac e, or t he t hr ust shi m wer e r epl ac ed,
t he bear i ng pr el oad must be adj ust ed.
Coat all part s wi t h ATF dur i ng i nst al l at i on.
Do not use t he t hrust shi m f r om t he t or que conver t er
housi ng.
1. Remove t he bear i ng out er r ace (A), t he 76.2 mm
t hr ust washer ( B) , and t he 76 mm t hr ust shi m (C) f r om
t he t r ansmi ssi on housi ng (D) by heat i ng t he
t r ansmi ssi on h o us i ^ c
t r
* **b?i :t 212 F {100 C) usi ng a
heat gun (E). Do not heat t he t r ansmi ssi on housi ng
mor e t han 212 F (100 C).
NOTE: Let t he t r ansmi ssi on housi ng cool to r oom
t emper at ur e bef ore adj ust i ng t he bear i ng pr el oad.
2. Inst al l t he 76 mm t hr ust shi m (A) i n t he t r ansmi ssi on
housi ng (B). If you r epl ace t he 76 mm t hr ust shi m wi t h
a new one, use t he s ame t hi c kness shi m as t he ol d
one.
3. Inst al l t he 76.2 mm t hr ust washer (C) and t he bear i ng
out er r ace (D) i n t he t r ansmi ssi on housi ng.
NOTE: Be sur e to i nst al l t he 76.2 mm t hr ust was her
wi t h t he " 41382 RK Y" mark f aci ng downwar d.
4. Inst al l t he bear i ng out er r ace sec ur el y s o t her e i s no
c l ear anc e bet ween t he bear i ng out er r ac e, t he
76.2 mm t hrust was her , t he 76 mm t hr ust s hi m, and
t he t r ansmi ssi on housi ng, usi ng t he dr i ver handl e and
07749-0010000
07746-0010600
14-332
5. Install t he di fferenti al assembl y (A) in t he t or que
conver t er housi ng (B), and i nst al l t he gasket (C) and
t he dowel pi ns (D) on t he t orque conver t er housi ng.
10 x 1.25 mm
44 N-m (4.5 k g f m, 33 Ibf-ft)
19 Bol t s
6. Inst al l t he t r ansmi ssi on housi ng (E) and t he
t r ansmi ssi on hanger (F), t hen t i ght en t he bol t s.
7. Rot at e t he di fferenti al assembl y in both di r ect i ons to
seat t he bear i ngs.
8. Measur e t he st art i ng t or que of t he di fferenti al
assembl y i n both di r ect i ons usi ng t he pr el oad
i nspect i on t ool , a t or que wr enc h (A), and a socket (B)
at nor mal r oom t emper at ur e.
St andar d
New Bear i ng: 2.73.9 N-m
( 28- 40 k g f c m, 2 4 - 3 5 Ibf-i n)
Reused Bear i ng: 2.53.6 N-m
( 2 5 - 3 / k g f c m, 2 2 - 3 2 Ibf i n)
07HAJ-PK40201
(cont' d)
14-333
A/ T Di f f erent i al
Carrier Bearing Preload Inspection (cont'd)
9. If t he st art i ng t or que i s out of st andar d, r emove t he
76 mm t hr ust shi m and sel ec t a 76 mm t hr ust shi m
f r om t he f ol l owi ng t abl e. Inst al l a new 76 mm t hr ust
s hi m, and r echeck. To i nc r ease t he st art i ng t or que,
i nc r ease t he t hi c kness of t he 76 mm t hr ust s hi m. To
dec r ease t he st art i ng t or que, dec r ease t he t hi c kness
of t he 76 mm t hr ust s hi m. Changi ng t he 76 mm t hr ust
shi m to t he next si ze wi l l i nc r ease or dec r ease st art i ng
t or que about 0. 3- 0. 4 N-m ( 3 - 4 kgf -cm, 2 - 3 Ibf i n).
TYPE A THRUS T SHIfVS, 76 mm
No. Thi c kness
S 2.05 mm (0.081 i n)
T 2.10 mm (0.083 i n)
U 2.15 mm (0.085 in)
A 2.20 mm (0.087 in)
B 2.25 mm (0.089 in)
C 2.30 mm (0.091 in)
V 2.35 mm (0.093 in)
E 2.40 mm (0.094 in)
F 2.45 mm (0.096 in.)
G 2.50 mm (0.098 i n)
H 2.55 mm (0.100 in)
1 2.60 mm (0.102 in)
J 2.65 mm (0.104 in)
K 2 70 mm (0.106 in)
L 2.75 mm (0.108 in)
M 2.80 mm (0.110 in.)
N 2.85 mm (0.112 in)
0 2.90 mm (0.114 in)
P 2.95 mm (0.116 in)
Q 3.00 mm (0.118 in)
R 3.05 mm (0.120 in)
OA 1.55 mm (0.061 in)
OB 1.60 mm (0.063 in)
0C 1.65 mm (0.065 in)
0D 1.70 mm (0.067 in)
0E 1.75 mm (0.069 in)
OF 1.80 mm (0.071 in)
0G 1.85 mm (0.073 i n.)
OH 1.90 mm (0.075 in)
01 1.95 mm (0.077 in)
0J 2.00 mm (0.079 in)
TYPE B THRUS T SHIM, 76 mm
No. Thi c kness
A 1.575 mm (0.062 in)
B 1.625 mm (0.064 in)
C 1.675 mm (0.066 in)
D 1.725 mm (0.068 i n.)
E 1.775 mm (0.070 i n)
F 1.825 mm (0.072 i n.)
G 1.875 mm (0.074 i n)
H 1.925 mm (0.076 in)
I '\ .975 mm (0.078 i n)
J 2.025 mm (0.080 in)
K 2.075 mm (0.082 i n)
L 2.125 mm (0.084 in)
M 2.175 mm (0.086 in)
N 2.225 mm (0.088 in)
0 2.275 mm (0.090 in)
P 2.325 mm (0.092 i n)
Q 2.375 mm (0.094 i n)
R 2.425 mm (0.095 in)
S 2.475 mm (0.097 in)
T 2.525 mm (0.099 in)
U 2.575 mm (0.101 i n)
V 2.625 mm (0.103 in)
W 2.675 mm (0.105 in)
X 2.725 mm (0.107 in)
Y 2.775 mm (0.109 in)
Z 2.825 mm (0.111 i n)
OA 2.875 mm (0.113 in)
0B 2.925 mm (0.115 in)
OC 2.975 mm (0.117 in)
0D 3.025 mm (0.119 in)
14-334
Transaxle
Priweline/Ajcle
S pec i al To o l s ..16-2
Co mpo nent L oc at i on Index ..16-3
Dr i veshaf t Inspec t i on .16-4
Dr i veshaf t Remo v al 16-4
Dr i veshaf t Di s as s emb l y 16-7
Dy nami c Damper Repl ac ement 16-10
Dr i veshaf t Reas s emb l y 16-11
Dr i veshaf t Inst al l at i on .16-19
Int er medi at e Shaf t Remo v al . . . . . . . . . . . 16-22
Int er medi at e Shaf t Di s as s emb l y 16-23
Int er medi at e Shaf t Reas s emb l y .16-25
Int er medi at e Shaf t Inst al l at i on .16-28
Dri vel i ne/Axl e
Speci al Tool s
07746-0010400 At t ac hment 52 x 55 mm 1
07746-0030400 At t ac hment 35 mm I.D. 1
(D
07749-0010000 Dr i ver Handl e, 15x 135L 1
07947-SB00100 Oi l Seal Dr i ver , 44.5 mm 1
07AAE-SJ AA100 Bal l Joi nt Thr ead Prot ect or, 14 mm 1

07GAD-PH70201 Oi l Seal Dr i ver 1
07MAC-SL 0A202 Bal l Joi nt Remover , 28 mm 1
07MAD-PR90100 At t achment , 45 x 55 mm 1
07NAF-SR30101 Half Shaf t Base 1
07XAC-001030A Thr eaded Adapt er , 26 x 1.5 mm 1

16-2
o
DYNAMIC DAMPER
I NTERMEDI ATE SHAFT
DRI VES HAFT
Remov al , page 16-4
Di s as s embl y , page 16-7
Reas s embl y , page 16-11
16-3
Dri vel i ne/Axl e
Dri veshaf t Inspection
1. Chec k t he i nboar d boot (A) and t he out boar d boot (B)
on t he dr i veshaf t (C) f or c r ac ks, damage, l eaki ng
gr ease, and l oose boot bands (D). If any damage i s
f ound, r epl ace t he boot and t he boot bands.
C
2. Chec k t he dr i veshaf t f or c r ac ks and damage. If any
damage i s f ound, r epl ace t he dr i veshaf t .
3. Chec k t he i nboar d j oi nt (E) and t he out boar d j oi nt (F)
for c r ac ks and damage. If any damage i s f ound,
r epl ace t he i nboar d j oi nt or t he out boar d j oi nt as an
assembl y.
4. Hol d t he i nboar d j oi nt and t ur n t he f ront wheel by
hand, t hen make sur e t he j oi nt i s not exc essi vel y
l oose. If nec essar y, r epl ace t he i nboar d j oi nt or t he
out boar d j oi nt as an assembl y.
Driveshaft Removal
Bal l Joi nt Thr ead Prot ect or, 14 mm 07AAE-SJ AA100
Bal l Joi nt Remover , 28 mm 07MAC-SL0A202
1. Rai se and suppor t t he vehi c l e, (see page 1-13)
3. Pry up t he st ake (A) on t he spi ndl e nut (B), t hen
r emove t he nut.
4. Drai n t he t r ansmi ssi on f l ui d, t hen rei nst al l t he dr ai n
pl ug wi t h a new seal i ng washer :
5. Hold t he st abi l i zer link j oi nt pi n (A) usi ng a hex wr enc h
(B), and r emove t he f l ange nut (C). Separ at e t he f ront
st abi l i zer link (D) f r om t he l ower ar m.
16-4
6. Remove t he damper fork mount i ng nut (A), t he
damper fork mount i ng bolt (B), and t he damper pi nch
bolt (CL t hen r emove t he damper fork (D).
7, Remove t he cot t er pi n (A) f r om t he knuckl e bal l j oi nt ,
t hen r emove t he cast l e nut (B). Separ at e t he bal l j oi nt
f r om t he l ower ar m (C) usi ng t he 28 mm bal l j oi nt
r emover and t he 14 mm ball j oi nt t hr ead prot ect or
(see page 18-10).
NOTE:
Be car ef ul not to damage t he ball j oi nt boot when
i nst al l i ng t he r emover .
Do not f or ce or hammer on t he l ower ar m, or pry
bet ween t he l ower ar m and t he knuckl e. You coul d
damage t he ball j oi nt .
7AAE-SJAA100
07MAC- SL0A202
8. Pull t he knuckl e out war d, and separ at e t he out boar d
j oi nt f r om t he front hub usi ng a pl ast i c hammer .
9. Left dr i veshaf t : Pry t he i nboar d j oi nt (A) f r om t he
di fferenti al usi ng a prybar. Remove t he dr i veshaf t (B)
as an assembl y.
NOTE:
may c ome apart . Pull t he i nboar d j oi nt st r ai ght out
to avoi d damagi ng t he oi l seal .
Be car ef ul not to damage t he oi l seal or t he end of
t he i nboar d j oi nt usi ng t he prybar.
(cont' d)
16-5
Dri vel i ne/Axl e
Driveshaft Removal (cont'd)
10. Ri ght dr i veshaf t : Dri ve t he i nboar d j oi nt (A) off of t he
i nt er medi at e shaf t usi ng a drift punch and a hammer .
Remove t he dr i veshaf t ( B) as an assembl y.
NOTE: Do not pull on t he dr i veshaf t , or t he i nboar d
j oi nt may c ome apart .
11. Remove t he set ri ng (A) f r om t he left dr i veshaf t
i nboar d j oi nt .
12. Remove t he set ri ng (A) f r om t he i nt ermedi at e shaf t .
16-6
Driveshaft Dlsassemblf
Special'Tools Required
*Thr eaded Adapt er , 26 x 1.5 mm 07XAC-001030A
Sl i de Hammer 5/8
M
-18 UNF, c ommer c i al l y avai l abl e
Bear i ng Pul l er , c ommer c i al l y avai l abl e
- Boot Band Pl i er s, c ommer c i al l y avai l abl e
Inboard Joi nt Si de
1. Remove t he boot bands. Be car ef ul not to damage t he
boot.
If t he boot band i s a wel ded t ype (A), cut t he boot
band.
If t he boot band i s a doubl e l oop t ype (B), lift up t he
band end (C), and push It i nto t he cl i p (D).
If t he boot band i s a l ow prof i l e t ype (E), pi nch t he
boot band usi ng c ommer c i al l y avai l abl e boot band
pl i er s (F).
Welded type
Low prof i l e type
F
2. Make mar ks (A) on eac h rol l er (B) and t he i nboar d
j oi nt (C) t o i denti fy t he l ocat i ons of t he r ol l er s to t he
gr ooves i n t he i nboar d j oi nt .
NOTE: Do not engr ave or sc r i be any mar ks on t he
rol l i ng sur f ac e.
3. Remove t he i nboar d j oi nt on a c l ean shop t owel (D).
Be car ef ul not t o dr op t he r ol l er s when separ at i ng
t hem f r om t he i nboar d j oi nt .
(cont ' d)
16-7
Dri vel i ne/Axl e
Driveshaft Disassembly (cont'd)
4 . Make mar ks (A) on t he spi der (B) t hat mat ch t he mar ks
on t he r ol l er s, t hen r emove t he r ol l er s.
NOTE: Do not engr ave or sc r i be any mar ks on t he
rol l i ng sur f ac e.
5. Remove t he ci rcl i p (C).
6. Make mar ks (D) on t he spi der and t he dr i veshaf t (E) to
i denti fy t he posi t i on of t he spi der on t he shaf t .
7. Remove t he spi der .
NOTE: If nec essar y, use a c ommer c i al l y avai l abl e
pul l er whi l e bei ng car ef ul not to damage t he spi der .
8. Wr ap t he spl i nes on t he dr i veshaf t wi t h vi nyl t ape (A)
to pr event damagi ng t he i nboar d boot.
9. Remove t he i nboar d boot . Be car ef ul not to damage
t he boot.
10. Remove t he vi nyl t ape.
Out boar d Joi nt Si de
1 Remove t he boot bands (A). Lift up t he t hr ee t abs (B)
usi ng a sc r ewdr i ver , t hen r el ease t he band. Be car ef ul
not to damage t he boot.
2. Sl i de t he out board boot (A) part i al l y t owar d the
i nboar d j oi nt si de. Be caref ul not to damage t he boot .
A
3. Wi pe off t he gr ease to expose t he dr i veshaf t and t he
out boar d j oi nt i nner r ace.
16-8
4. Make a mark (A) on t he dr i veshaf t (B) at t he s ame l evel 8. Remove t he st op ri ng f r om t he dr i veshaf t .
as t he out board j oi nt end ( C) .
9. Wr ap t he spl i nes on t he dr i veshaf t wi t h vi nyl t ape (A)
5. Sec ur el y c l amp t he dr i veshaf t in a benc h vi se wi t h a t o pr event damagi ng t he out boar d boot,
shop t owel wr apped ar ound t he dr i veshaf t .
7. Remove t he dr i veshaf t f r om t he benc h vi se.
16-9
Dri vel i ne/Axl e
Dynamic Damper Repl acement
1. Remove t he Inboar d j oi nt (see page 16-7).
2. Remove t he dynami c damper band (see st ep 1 on
page 16-7).
3. Remove t he dynami c damper (A).
Lef t dr i veshaf t
Ri ght dr i veshaf t
4. Inst al l a new dynami c damper .
NOTE; Be caref ul not t o swap t he dynami c damper s.
Chec k t he t ype of dynami c damper by i t s shape.
5. Adj ust t he speci f i ed di st ance (A) bet ween t he
out boar d j oi nt si de and t he dynami c damper edge.
NOTE: Chec k t he t ype of dynami c damper by i ts
shape.
Lef t dr i veshaf t
A: 298. 5- 303. 5 mm (11. 75-11. 95 i n)
1
A: 292. 5- 297. 5 mm (11.52-11.71 i n)
6. Inst al l t he dynami c damper band (see st ep 10 on page
16-14).
7. Install t he i nboar d j oi nt (see page 16-12).
16-10
Driveshaft Reassembl y
Expl oded Vi ew
INBOARD J OI NT
SPIDER
ROL L E RS
S E T RING
Replace.
INBOARD J OI NT
DOUBL E L OOP BANDS
(Repl ac ement par t s onl y)
Replace.
I GREASES
Use the grease included
in the inboard boot set.
DYNAMIC DAMPER
L OW PROF ILE BANDS
Replace.
DOUBL E L OOP BAND
(Replacement part only)
Replace.
DRIVESHAF T
DYNAMIC DAMPER
INBOARD BOOT
in the inboard boot set.
S TOP RING
Replace.
EAR CL AMP BANDS
Replace.
in the outboard boot set.
(cont'd)
16-11
Dri vei i ne/Axl e
Dri veshaf t Reassembly (cont ' d)
Boot Band Tool KD-3191 or equi val ent , c ommer c i al l y
avai l abl e
. Seal Cl amp Tool Kent -Moor e J-35910 or equi val ent ,
Boot Band Pl i er s, c ommer c i al l y avai l abl e
NOTE: Ref er to t he Expl oded Vi ew, as needed, dur i ng
t hi s pr ocedur e.
Inboard Joi nt Si de
1. Wr ap t he spl i nes wi t h on t he dr i veshaf t vi nyl t ape (A)
to pr event damagi ng t he i nboar d boot.
2. Inst al l t he i nboar d boot onto t he dr i veshaf t , t hen
r emove t he vi nyl t ape. Be car ef ul not to damage t he
i nboar d boot .
3. Install t he spi der (A) ont o t he dr i veshaf t by al i gni ng
t he mar ks (B) you made on t he spi der and t he end of
t he dr i veshaf t .
4. Inst al l a new ci r cl i p (C) i nto t he dr i veshaf t gr oove.
Al way s rotate t he ci r cl i p i n i t s gr oove to make sur e it i s
f ul l y seat ed.
5. Fi t t he r ol l er s (A) ont o t he spi der (B) as s hown, and
not e t hese i t ems:
Rei nst al l t he r ol l er s i n t hei r ori gi nal posi t i ons on t he
spi der by al i gni ng t he mar ks (C) you made.
Hol d t he dr i veshaf t poi nt ed up t o pr event t he rol l ers
f r om f al l i ng off.
16-12
6. Pack t he i nboar d j oi nt wi t h t he j oi nt gr ease i ncl uded i n
t he new i nboar d boot set .
Gr eas e quant i t y
Inboard j oi nt :
Model Year Quant i t y
K24Z2
engi ne
model
M/ T ' 08-09 150- 160 g ( 5. 3- 5. 6 oz) K24Z2
engi ne
model
M/ T
' 10 110- 120 g ( 3. 9- 4. 2 oz)
K24Z2
engi ne
model
A / T ' 08-09 130- 140 g ( 4. 6- 4. 9 oz)
K24Z2
engi ne
model
A / T
' 10 100- 110 g ( 3. 5- 3. 9 oz)
K24Z3 engi ne
model
08-09 150- 160 g ( 5. 3- 5. 6 oz) K24Z3 engi ne
model
' 10 110- 120 g ( 3. 9- 4. 2 oz)
8. Fi t t he boot ends (A) ont o t he dr i veshaf t (B) and t he
i nboar d j oi nt (C).
7 Fit t he i nboar d j oi nt onto t he dr i veshaf t , and not e
t hese i t ems:
Rei nst al l t he i nboar d j oi nt ont o t he dr i veshaf t by
al i gni ng t he mar ks (A) you made on t he i nboar d
j oi nt and t he r ol l er s.
Hold t he dr i veshaf t so t he i nboar d j oi nt i s poi nt i ng
up to pr event it f r om f al l i ng off.
A
(cont' d)
16-13
Drsvei i ne/Axle
Driveshaft Reassembly (cont'd)
9. Adj ust t he l engt h (A) of t he dr i veshaf t s to t he f i gure as
s hown, t hen adj ust t he boot s to hal f way bet ween full
c ompr essi on and full ext ensi on. Bl eed ex c es s ai r f r om
t he boot s by i nser t i ng a f lat -t i pped sc r ewdr i ver
bet ween t he boot and t he j oi nt
Lef t dr i veshaf t
A
l i g h t dr i veshaf t
Model Lef t /Ri ght
Dr i veshaf t
Spec i f i ed Lengt h
JA)
K24Z2
engi ne
model
M/T Left 554559 mm
(21.81-22.01 i n)
K24Z2
engi ne
model
M/T
Ri ght 480485 mm
(18. 90-19. 09 in)
K24Z2
engi ne
model
A/ T . Left 554559 mm
(21.81-22.01 i n)
K24Z2
engi ne
model
A/ T .
Ri ght 477- 482 mm
(18. 78-18. 98 i n)
K24Z3 engi ne
model
Left 554559 mm
(21.81-22.01 i n)
K24Z3 engi ne
model
Ri ght 480- 485 mm
(18. 90-19. 09 i n)
10. Install new boot bands.
For t he doubl e l oop t ype, go to st ep 11.
For t he l ow prof i l e t ype, go t o st ep 20.
11. Fi t t he boot ends onto t he dr i veshaf t and t he i nboar d
j oi nt , t hen i nst al l a new doubl e loop band (A) ont o t he
boot (B).
NOTE: Pass t he end of t he doubl e loop band t hr ough
t he cl i p (C) t wi ce i n t he di rect i on of t he f or war d
rotati on of t he dr i veshaf t .
A
Replace.
12. Pul l up t he sl ac k i n t he band by hand.
13. Mark a l i ne (A) on t he band 1 0 - 1 4 mm ( 0. 4- 0. 6 i n)
f r om t he cl i p (B).
16-14
14. Thr ead t he f r ee end of t he band t hr ough t he nose
sect i on of t he c ommer c i al l y avai l abl e boot band tool
(KD-3191 or equi val ent ) (A), and into t he sl ot on t he
wi ndi ng mandr el (B).
15. Usi ng a wr enc h on t he wi ndi ng mandr el of t he boot
band t ool , t i ght en t he band unti l t he mar ked l i ne (C)
on t he band meet s t he edge of t he cl i p.
16. Lift up t he boot band t ool t o bend t he f r ee end of t he
band 90 degr ees t o t he cl i p. Cent er -punch t he cl i p,
t hen f ol d over t he r emai ni ng tai l ont o t he cl i p.
17. Unwi nd t he boot band t ool , and cut off t he ex c es s f r ee
end of t he band t o l eave a 510 mm (0.20.4 i n) tai l
prot rudi ng f r om t he cl i p.
18. Bend t he band end (A) by t appi ng it down usi ng a
hammer .
NOTE:
Make sur e t he band and t he cl i p do not i nt erf ere
wi t h anyt hi ng on t he vehi c l e, and t he band does not
move.
Cl ean any gr ease r emai ni ng on the sur r oundi ng
sur f ac es.
A
19. Repeat st eps 11 t hr ough 18 f or t he band on t he ot her
end of t he boot.
(cont ' d)
16-15
Driweline/Axle
Driveshaft Reassembl y (cont'd)
20. Inst al l a new l ow profi le band (A) onto t he boot (B),
t hen hook t he t ab (C) of t he band.
A
Replace.
21. Cl ose t he hook porti on of t he band usi ng
c ommer c i al l y avai l abl e boot band pl i er s (A), t hen
hook t he t abs (B) of t he band.
22. Inst al l t he boot band on t he ot her end of t he boot , and
repeat st eps 20 and 21.
Out boar d Joi nt Si de
1. Wr ap t he spl i nes on t he dri veshaf t wi t h vi nyl t ape (A)
to pr event damagi ng t he out board boot.
B
Replace.
2. Inst al l new ear c l amp bands (B) and t he out boar d boot
ont o t he dr i veshaf t , t hen r emove t he vi nyl t ape. Be
car ef ul not t o damage t he out boar d boot .
3. Make sur e to check t he si ze of a new st op ri ng.
I NOTICE I
To avoi d dr i veshaf t and vehi c l e damage, make sur e
you i nst al l a new st op r i ng.
St op ri ng spec i f i c at i ons
Model Overall.... Wi r e Di amet er
Di amet er (B)
(A!
K24Z2 M/T 27.5 mm 2.0 mm (0.08 i n)
engi ne (1.08 i n)
model A / T 26.0 mm
(1.02 i n)
2.0 mm (0.08 i n)
K24Z3 engi ne
model
27.5 mm
(1.08 i n)
2.0 mm (0.08 i n)
16-16
4. Install t he st op ri ng (A) i nto t he dr i veshaf t gr oove (B).
A
Replace.
5. Pack about 35 g (1.2 oz) of gr ease i ncl uded in t he new
out boar d boot set i nto t he dr i veshaf t hol e i n t he
out boar d j oi nt .
NOTE* If you ar e i nst al l i ng a new out boar d j oi nt , t he
gr ease i s al r eady i nst al l ed.
6. Insert t he dr i veshaf t (A) i nt o t he out boar d j oi nt (B)
unti l t he st op ri ng (C) i s c l ose to t he j oi nt .
7. To compl et el y seat t he out boar d j oi nt , pi ck up t he
dri veshaf t and t he j oi nt , and t ap or hit t he assembl y
ont o a har d sur f ace f r om a hei ght of about 10 c m
(4 i n).
NOTE: Do not use a hammer , as exc essi ve f or ce may
damage t he dr i veshaf t . Be caref ul not t o damage t he
t hr eaded sect i on (A) of t he out boar d j oi nt .
A
10 c m
(4 i n)
(cont' d)
16-17
Dri vefi ne/Axle
Driveshaft Reassembly (cont'd)
8. Chec k t he al i gnment of t he pai nt mar k (A) you made
wi t h t he out boar d j oi nt end ( B) .
To avoi d dr i veshaf t and vehi c l e damage, t he shaf t
must be all t he way i nto t he out boar d j oi nt t o ensur e
t he st op ri ng i s properl y seat ed.
9. Pack t he out boar d j oi nt (A) wi t h t he r emai ni ng j oi nt
gr ease i ncl uded i n t he out boar d boot s et
Tot al gr ease quant i t y
Out boar d pi nt :
Model Quant i t y
K24Z2
engi ne
model
M/T 140- 150 g ( 4. 9- 5. 3 oz) K24Z2
engi ne
model
A/ T 105- 115 g (3. 7-4. 1 oz)
K24Z3 engi ne
model
140- 150 g ( 4. 9- 5. 3 oz)
in the outboard boot set.
10. Fi t t he boot ends (A) onto t he dr i veshaf t (B) and t he
out boar d j oi nt (C). Bl eed any ex c es s ai r f r om t he boot
by i nser t i ng a f l at -t i pped sc r ewdr i ver bet ween t he
boot and t he j oi nt .
11. Inspect t he lengt h (A) of t he dr i veshaf t s to t he f i gure
as s hown, t hen adj ust t he boot s to hal f way bet ween
full c ompr essi on and full ext ensi on.
Lef t dr i veshaf t
A
Model Lef t /Ri ght
Dr i veshaf t
Spec i f i ed Lengt h
(A)
K24Z2
engi ne
model
M/T Left 554559 mm
(21.81-22.01 i n)
K24Z2
engi ne
model
M/T
Ri ght 480- 485 mm
(18.90-19.09 in)
K24Z2
engi ne
model
A/ T Left 554559 mm
(21.81-22.01 i n)
K24Z2
engi ne
model
A/ T
Ri ght 477- 482 mm
(18. 78-18. 98 in)
K24Z3 engi ne
model
Left 554- 559 mm
(21.81-22.01 i n)
K24Z3 engi ne
model
Ri ght 480485 mm
(18.90-19.09 in)
16-18
Driveshaft Installation
12. Cl ose t he ear porti on (A) of t he band usi ng a
c ommer c i al l y avai l abl e seal c l amp t ool (Kent -Moore
J-35910 or equi val ent ) (B).
13. Chec k t he c l ear anc e bet ween t he c l osed ear porti on of
t he band. If t he c l ear anc e i s not wi t hi n t he st andar d,
c l ose t he ear port i on of t he band t i ght er.
6.0 mm
3.0 m m (0.12 in) MAX.
14. Repeat st eps 12 and 13 for t he band on t he ot her end
of t he boot
NOTE: Bef or e st art i ng Inst al l at i on, make sur e t he mat i ng
sur f ac es of t he j oi nt and t he spl i ned sect i on ar e c l ean.
1 Appl y about 5 g (0.18 oz) of mol y 60 past e
(P/N 08734-0001) to t he cont act ar ea (A) of t he
out boar d j oi nt and t he f ront wheel bear i ng.
NOTE: The past e hel ps pr event noi se and vi br at i on.
2. Inst al l a new set ri ng (A) into t he set ri ng gr oove (B) of
t he left dr i veshaf t i nboar d j oi nt .
Replace.
(cont' d)
16-19
Dri vel i ne/Axl e
Driveshaft Installation (cont' d)
3. Inst al l a new set ri ng (A) i nto t he set ri ng gr oove (B) of
t he i nt er medi at e shaf t .
4. Appl y 0.51.0 g ( 0. 02- 0. 04 oz) of super hi gh t emp
ur ea gr ease (P/N 08798-9002) to t he whol e spl i ned
sur f ac e (A) of t he ri ght dr i veshaf t . Af t er appl yi ng
gr ease, r emove t he gr ease f r om t he spl i ned gr ooves
at i nt er val s of 23 spl i nes and f r om t he set r i ng
gr oove (B) so t hat ai r c an bl eed f r om t he i nt er medi at e
shaf t .
B
5, Cl ean t he ar eas wher e t he dr i veshaf t cont act s t he
di fferenti al t hor oughl y wi t h s ol v ent and dr y t hen wi t h
c ompr essed ai r.
NOTE: Do not was h t he rubber part s wi t h sol vent .
6. Insert t he i nboar d end (A) of t he dr i veshaf t i nto t he
di fferenti al (B) or i nt er medi at e shaf t (C) unti l t he set
ri ng (D) l ocks i n t he gr oove (E).
NOTE: Insert t he dr i veshaf t hori zont al l y t o pr event
damagi ng t he oi l s eal .
Lef t
A D
16-20
7. Install t he out board j oi nt (A) i nto t he front hub on t he
knuckl e.
A
8. Wi pe off any gr ease cont ami nat i on f r om t he bal l j oi nt
t aper ed sect i on and t hr eads, t hen i nst al l t he knuckl e
(A) onto t he l ower ar m (B). Be caref ul not t o damage
t he ball j oi nt boot (C). Wi pe off t he gr ease bef ore
t i ght eni ng t he nut at t he ball j oi nt . Tor que t he cast l e
nut (D) to t he l ower t or que speci f i cat i on, t hen t i ght en
it onl y f ar enough to al i gn t he sl ot wi t h t he ball j oi nt
pi n hol e.
NOTE:
Make sur e t he ball j oi nt boot i s not damaged or
cr acked.
Do not al i gn t he nut by l ooseni ng it.
9. Install a new cot t er pi n (E) into t he ball j oi nt pi n hol e,
and bend t he cot t er pi n as shown.
10. Inst al l t he damper fork (A) over t he dr i veshaf t and
onto t he l ower ar m. Install t he damper i n t he damper
fork so t he al i gni ng t ab (B) i s al i gned wi t h t he sl ot i n
t he damper fork. Loosel y i nst al l t he damper pi nch bolt
( C) .
B
Replace.
11. Loosel y i nst al l a new damper fork mount i ng bolt (D)
and a new damper fork mount i ng nut (E).
12. Connec t t he f ront st abi l i zer link (A) to t he l ower ar m,
and l oosel y i nst al l a new f l ange nut (B). Hold t he
st abi l i zer link j oi nt pi n (C) usi ng a hex wr enc h (D), and
t i ght en t he f l ange nut.
(4.0 k g f m,
29 Ibf f t )
Replace.
(cont' d)
16-21
Dri vel i ne/Axl e
Driveshaft Installation (cont'd) Intermediate Shaft Removal
13. Pl ace a f l oor j ac k under t he l ower ar m, and r ai se t he
suspensi on t o l oad it wi t h t he vehi c l e' s wei ght .
NOTE: Do not put t he f l oor j ac k under t he bal l j oi nt
14. Ti ght en t he damper pi nch bolt and t he damper fork
mount i ng nut whi l e hol di ng t he damper fork
mount i ng bolt t o t he speci f i ed t or que v al ues , t hen
r emove t he f l oor j ack.
15. Appl y a smal l amount of engi ne oi l to t he seat i ng
sur f ac e of a new spi ndl e nut (A).
A
26 x 1.5 mm
329 N-m
133.5 k g f m,
242 Ibf f t )
Replace.
1
16. Inst al l t he spi ndl e nut , t hen t i ght en it. After t i ght eni ng,
use a drift to st ake t he spi ndl e nut shoul der (B) agai nst
t he dr i veshaf t .
17. Cl ean t he mat i ng sur f ac es of t he brake di sc and t he
wheel , t hen i nst al l t he f ront wheel s .
18. Tur n t he wheel by hand, and make sur e t her e i s no
i nt erf erence bet ween t he dr i veshaf t and sur r oundi ng
par t s.
19. Ref i l l t he t r ansmi ssi on wi t h t he r ec ommended
t r ansmi ssi on f l ui d:
* Aut omat i c t r ansmi ssi on (see page 14-192)
20. Lower t he vehi c l e.
21. Chec k t he wheel al i gnment , and adj ust it if nec essar y
(see page 18-5).
1. Dr ai n t he t r ansmi ssi on f l ui d. Rei nst al l t he dr ai n pl ug
usi ng a new seal i ng washer :
2. Remove t he ri ght dr i veshaf t (see page 16-4).
3. Remove t he f l ange bolt (A) and t he t wo dowel bol t s
(B).
4. Remove t he i nt er medi at e shaf t (A) f r om t he
di f f erent i al . Hol d t he i nt er medi at e shaf t hori zont al l y
unti l it i s c l ear of t he di fferenti al to pr event damagi ng
t he oi l seal (B).
16-22
Intermediate Shaft Di sassembl y
. Half Shaf t Base 07NAF-SR30101
Oi l Seal Dri ver, 44.5 mm 07947-SB00100
1. Remove t he heat shi el d (A).
'; " ^ X "
3. Pr ess t he i nt er medi at e shaf t (A) out of t he
i nt ermedi at e shaf t bear i ng (B) usi ng t he hal f shaf t
base (C) and a pr ess. Be car ef ul not t o damage t he
bear i ng suppor t ri ng (D) on t he i nt ermedi at e shaf t
dur i ng di sassembl y.
PRESS
07NAF-SR30101
4. Remove t he i nt ernal snap ri ng (A) f r om t he bear i ng
suppor t (B).
(cont' d)
16-23
Dri vel i ne/Axl e
Intermediate Shaft Disassembly (cont'd)
5. Pr ess t he i nt er medi at e shaf t bear i ng (A) out of t he
bear i ng suppor t (B) usi ng t he 44. 5 mm oi l seal dr i ver
(CL t he hal f shaf t base (D), and t he pr ess.
16-24
Intermedi ate Shaf t Reassembl y
Expl oded Vi ew
FL ANGE BOL T
$ x 1.0 mm
9.8 N-m
(c ont ' d)
16-25
Dri vel i ne/Axi e
Intermediate Shaft Reassembly (cont' d)
Oi l Seal Dr i ver 07GAD-PH70201
Half S h af t Base 07NAF-SR30101
At t ac hment 52 x 55 mm 07746-0010400
At t ac hment 35 mm I.D. 07746-0030400
Dri ver Handl e, 15 x 135L 07749-0010000
At t ac hment 45 x 55 mm 07MAD-PR90100
NOTE; Ref er to t he Expl oded Vi ew, as needed, dur i ng
t hi s pr oc edur e.
1. Cl ean t he di sassembl ed part s wi t h sol vent , and dry
t hem wi t h c ompr essed ai r.
NOTE: Do not was h t he rubber part s wi t h sol vent .
2. Pr ess a new i nt ermedi at e shaf t bear i ng (A) i nto t he
bear i ng suppor t (B) usi ng t he 52 x 55 mm at t achment
(CV t h o i K v i d r i v e r h c ~d! c [2), t h e h^ f J ,au u a , c
(E), and a pr ess.
PRESS
3. Inst al l t he i nt ernal snap ri ng (A) into t he gr oove (B) of
t he bear i ng suppor t .
4. Pr ess t he i nt ermedi at e snat t | A) i nto t he shaf t bear i ng
(B) usi ng t he 35 mm at t achment (C) and t he pr ess.
PRESS m
16-26
5. Inst al l t he ext er nal snap ri ng (A) i nto t he gr oove of t he
i nt ermedi at e shaf t ( B) .
. Inst al l a new out er seal (A) into t he beari ng suppor t
(B) usi ng t he 45X55 mm at t achment (C), t he oi l seal
dr i ver (D), t he hal f shaf t base (E), and t he pr ess. Pr ess
i n t he seal unti l it i s 4 0.2 mm (0.16 0.008 i n) (F)
bel ow t he sur f ace of t he bear i ng suppor t end.
PRESS
A
Replace.
O ) Pack the interior
of the outer seal.
07MAD-PR90100
07NAF-SR30101
7. Inst al l t he heat shi el d (A).
6 x 1.0 mm
9.8 N-m
(1.0 kgf m, 7.2 I bfft)
16-27
Dri vel i ne/Axl e
Intermediate Shaft Installation
1. Cl ean t he ar eas wher e t he Int ermedi at e shaf t cont act s
t he di fferenti al t hor oughl y wi t h sol vent , and dr y t hen
wi t h c ompr essed ai r.
NOTE: Do not was h t he r ubber part s wi t h sol vent .
2. Inst al l a new set ri ng (A) ont o t he set ri ng gr oove (B) of
t he i nt er medi at e shaf t (C).
3. Insert t he i nt ermedi at e shaf t into t he di f f erent i al
cor r ect l y.
NOTE: Insert t he i nt er medi at e shaf t car ef ul l y to
pr event damagi ng t he oi l seal (D).
4. Inst al l t he f l ange bolt (A) and t he t wo dowel bol t s (B).
B
10 x 1.25 mm A
39 N m (4.0 kgf m, 29 I bfft) To* 1 25 mm
i i n n \ n \\
5. Inst al l t he ri ght dr i veshaf t (see page 16-19).
6. Refi ll t he t r ansmi ssi on wi t h t he r ec ommended
t r ansmi ssi on f l ui d:
(see page 18-5).
16-28
N OT E S
N OT E S
N OT E S
N OT E S
INTRODUCTION
- How t o Use Thi s Manual -
Thi s manual is divided into multiple sect i ons.The first page of
each section is marked with a black tab that lines up with its
corresponding thumb index tab on this page and the back cover.
You can quickly find the first page of each section without
.looking, through a full table of contents.The: symbols printed at
the top corner of each page can also be used as a quick
r ef er ence-syst emv." ' -
Each section includes:
1. A table of contents, or an exploded view index showing-;
.. Parts di sassembly sequence. .
Bolt torques and thread si zes. .
Page references to. descriptions, in text.
2. Di sassembly/assembly procedures and tools.
3. Inspection.
4. Testing/troubleshooting.
5. Repair.
6. Adjustments.
r~Saf et y Messages ^ -
Your safety, and the safety of others, is very important. To help
you make informed deci si ons, we have provided safety
messages, and other safety information throughout this manual.
. Of course, it i s not ' pr ac t i c al or possible t o war n you about all the
hazards associated with servicing this vehi cle. You must use
your own good judgment.
You will find important safety information in a variety of forms
including:
Saf et y L abel s on the vehi cle.
Saf et y Mes s ag es preceded by a safety alert symbol & and
one of three signal words, DANGER, WARNING, or CAUTION.
These signal words mean:
WfWfMM^ You WILL be KILLED or SERIOUSLY HURT if
^ ^ ^ ^ ^ You CAN be KILLED or SERIOUSLY HURT if
. _ you don't follow instructions.
frfBJMiiRiyi You CAN be HURT if y ou don't follow
instructions.
Inst r uc t i ons how to servi ce this vehicle correctly and safely.
All information contained in this manual is based on the latest
product information available at the time of printing. We reserve
the right to make changes at anytime without notice. No part of
thi s publication may be reproduced, or stored in a retrieval
syst em, or transmitted, in any form by any means, electronic,
mechani cal, photocopying, recording, or otherwi se, without the
prior written permission of the publisher. Thi s includes text,
fi gures, and tables.
As you read thi s manual, you will find information that is
preceded by a [NOTICE | symbol. The purpose of this message is
to help prevent damage to your vehi cle, other property, or the
environment.
First Edition 11/2008
All Rights Reserved
Specifications apply to USA and Canada
HONDA MOTOR CO., LTD.
Service Publication Office
As sec t i ons wi t h * i ncl ude S RS c omponent s;
speci al pr ecaut i ons ar e r equi r ed when ser vi ci ng.
. marked sections are not included in this
manual, see Volume 1.
*St eer i ng
Suspensi on
(Incl udi ng TPMS)
Br akes
(Incl udi ng VSA)
*Body
*Body El ect r i cal
^ Rest r ai nt s
*Heat i ng, Vent i l at i on,
and Ai r Condi t i oni ng
*Audi o, Navi gat i on,
and Tel emat i c s
^1
H I
! 3007 I .
l i l t j M l l
A
2008-10 Accord
' Vol. 2
SUPPL E ME NTAL RE STRAINT SYSTE M (SRS) (if s t eering maint enanceis required)
The Ac c or d S RS i ncl udes a dr i ver ' s ai r bag i n t he st eer i ng wheel hub, a passenger ' s ai r bag in t he dashboar d
roof, and si de ai r bags in t he f ront seat -bac ks. Inf ormat i on nec essar y to saf el y ser vi c e t he S RS i s i ncl uded i n t hi s
i nj ury c aused by uni nt ent i onal depl oyment of t he ai r bags, si de ai r bags, and/or si de curt ai n ai r bags.
Do not bump or i mpact t he S RS uni t , f ront i mpact s ens or s , si de i mpact s ens or s , or rear saf i ng sensor ,
espec i al l y when t he i gni ti on swi t ch i s in ON (II), or f or at l east 3 mi nut es after t he i gni ti on swi t c h i s t ur ned to
S RS el ect r i cal c onnei ,U/i i*e i dent i f i ed by yc ! ! c \v c e! er c od!
R < a l a t o H
c omponent s ar e l ocat ed i n t he
i n t he f ront seat s, i n t he roof si de, and ar ound t he f l oor. Do not use el ect ri cal t est equi pment on t hese ci r cui t s.
S t e e r i n g
Steering
Co mpo nent Location I nd ex . . . . . . . .17-3
Steering Wh eel Rotational Play Ch ec k , 17-4
P ower As s i s t Check 17-4
Steering Linkage and Gearbox I nspection. 17-5
#
S teeri ng Wheel Removal 17-6
Steering Wh eel Disassembly/Reassembly 17-7
* Steering Wheel I nstallation. .17-9
* Steering Col umn Removal and Installation 17-10
Steering Col umn I nspection .17-14
Steering Lock Replacement 17-16
Rack Guide Adj ustment. . . . . . 17- 17
Tie-rod End Ball J oint B oot Replacement 17-18
Gearbox Mount Cushion Replacement 17-19
Hydrauli c Power St eeri ng Component s
Component Location I ndex ..17-20
S ymptom Troubleshooting I ndex. . 17-21
S ymptom Troubleshooting . ..17-24
Pump Pressure Test wi th T/N 07406-0010001 17-25
P ump Pressure Test wi th T/N 07406-001000A or T/N
07406-001A101 17-26
F luid Leakage I nspection 17-27
F luid Replacement. 17-28
P ower Steering H ose, Line, and Pressure Switch
Replacement. .. 17-29
P ump Replacement 17-30
P ump Overhaul 17-31
* Steering Gearbox Removal . 17-37
Steering Gearbox Overhaul 17-45
* Steering Gearbox Installation 17-60
St eeri ng
Speci al Tool s
070AG-S J AA10S Subf r ame Al i gnment Pi n
07406-0010001 P/S Pr essur e Gauge 1
07406-001000A or 07406-001A101 P/S Pr essur e Gauge 1

0 07746-0010100 At t achment , 32 x 35 mm 1
07746-0030300 Bear i ng Dr i ver At t achment , 30 mm 1

07749-0010000 Dr i ver Handl e, 15 x 135L 1
07965-SA50500 Bear i ng Dr i ver At t achment , 36 1
07AAF-SDAA100 Bal l Joi nt Thr ead Prot ect or, 12 mm 1

07HAG-SF1020A or 07HAG-SF10200 Si zi ng Tool , 42 1
07JAD-PL9A100 Oi l Seal Dr i ver , 65 1
@ 07MAA-SL00100 or 07916-SA50001 Locknut Wr enc h, 40 mm 1
07MAC-SL 0A202 Bal l Joi nt Remover , 28 mm 1
07NAG-SR3090A Val ve Seal Ri ng Si zi ng Tool 1

07RAK-S040111 or 07RAK S04Q110 Pump Joi nt Adapt er 1
07RAK-S040122 Hose Joi nt Adapt er 1
07TAF-SZ50100 Cyl i nder End Seal Remover At t achment 1
07XAG-S0K A200 Pi st on Seal Ri ng Gui de 1
07YAG-S2X0100 Sl eeve Seal Gui de, 35.9 x 37 1
@ 07ZAG-S5A0100 Si zi ng Tool , 36 1

17-2
STEERING WHEEL
Removal, page 17-6
Disassembly/Reassembly, page 17-7
/DRIVER'S AI RBAG
/ Replacement, page 24-211
POWER S TEERI NG GEARBOX
Rack Guide Adjustment, page 17-17
Tie-rod End Ball J oint Boot Replacement, page 17-18
Gearbox Mount Cushion Replacement, page 17-19
17-3
St eeri ng
Steering Wheel Rotational Play
Check
1. Set t he f ront wheel s i n t he st rai ght ahead posi t i on.
2. Measur e how f ar you c an t urn t he st eer i ng wheel left
an d ri ght wi t hout movi ng t he front wheel s.
If t he pl ay i s wi t hi n t he li mi t, t he st eer i ng gear box
and t he st eer i ng l i nkages ar e OK.
If t he pl ay exc eeds t he li mi t, adj ust t he rack gui de
(see page 17-17). If t he pl ay i s sti ll exc essi ve after
rack gui de adj ust ment , i nspect t he st eer i ng l i nkage
and st eer i ng gear box (see page 17-5).
Rot at i onal ' pl ay; 010 mm (00.39 In)
Power Assist Check
NOTE: Thi s t est shoul d be done wi t h ori gi nal equi pment
t i res and wheel s at t he cor r ect ti re pr essur e.
1. Check t he power st eeri ng f l ui d l evel (see page 17-28).
2. St art t he engi ne, let it i dl e, and turn t he st eer i ng wheel
f r om lock to lock sever al t i mes to war m up t he f l ui d.
3. At t ach a commer ci al l y avai l abl e spr i ng sc al e (A) to t he
st eer i ng wheel . Wi t h t he engi ne i dli ng and t he vehi c l e
on a c l ean, dry f l oor, pull t he sc al e as shown and r ead
it as soon as t he t i res begi n to t ur n.
If t he sc al e r eads no mor e t han t he speci f i cat i on, t he
st eer i ng gear box and pump ar e OK.
If t he sc al e r eads mor e t han t he speci f i cat i on,
t r oubl eshoot t he st eer i ng syst em (see page 17-24).
Ini t i al t ur ni ng l oad: 2S N {3.0 kgf, S.S Stiff
17-4
Steering Linkage and Gearbox Inspection
S TEERI NG COL UMN
Inspect for l oose
mount i ng har dwar e.
BOOT
Inspect for damage and deterioration,
STEERING J OINTS
Check for loose joint bol t
or faulty movement.
TI E-ROD END
BAL L J OI NT BOOT
Inspect for damage
and deterioration.
S TEERI NG GEARBOX
Inspect for loose mounting hardware.
GEARBOX MOUNTI NG CUS HI ONS
Inspect f or det er i or at i on.
TIE-ROD END L OCK NUT
Chec k f or l oose l ocknut .
TIE-ROD END BAL L J OI NT
Inspect f or f aul t y mov ement .
and damage.
17-5
St eeri ng
Steering Wheel Removal
S RS c omponent s are l ocat ed i n t hi s ar ea. Revi ew t he
S RS component l ocat i ons: 4-door {see page 24-21),
2-door (see page 24-23) and t he pr ecaut i ons and
pr ocedur es (see page 24-25) bef ore doi ng r epai r s or
ser vi c e.
page 22-91).
2. Set t he f ront wheel s i n t he st rai ght ahead posi t i on,
t hen r emove t he dr i ver ' s ai r bag f rom t he st eer i ng
wheel (see page 24-211).
3. Di sconnect t he cabl e reel subhar ness connect or (A).
4. Loosen t he st eer i ng wheel bolt (B) t hr ee t ur ns.
5. Install a c ommer c i al l y avai l abl e st eer i ng wheel pul l er
(A) on t he st eer i ng wheel (B). Fr ee t he st eer i ng wheel
f rom t he st eer i ng c ol umn shaf t by t urni ng t he
pr essur e bolt (C) of t he pul l er.
Note t hese i t ems when r emovi ng t he st eer i ng wheel :
Do not t ap on t he st eer i ng wheel or t he st eer i ng
col umn shaf t when r emovi ng t he st eer i ng wheel .
If you t hr ead t he pul l er bolts (D) into t he wheel hub
mor e t han f i ve t hr eads, t he bolts wi l l hit t he cabl e
reel and damage it. To prevent t hi s, i nst all a pai r of
j am nut s f i ve t hr eads up on eac h pul l er bolt.
6. Remove t he st eer i ng wheel pul l er, t hen r emove t he
st eeri ng wheel bolt and st eer i ng wheel f r om t he
st eeri ng c ol umn.
17-6
Steering Wheel Di sassembl y/Reassembl y
4-door
A : S c r ew, 3 B : S c r ew, S c : S c r ew, 2 D : S c r ew, 5 E S c r ew, 2 F S c r ew, 1
ACCESS PANEL
*: With Navi gat i on
(c ont ' d)
17-7
Steering
St eer i ng Wheel Di sassembl y/Reassembl y (cont'd)
2-door
A ^ : S c r ew, 3 i : S c r ew, 6 c : S c r ew, 2 D ' . S c r ew, S E : S c r ew, 2 F S c r ew, 1
COVER CABL E RE E L SUBHARNESS
DAMPER
2.5 N m HARNESS GUIDE
(0.25 kgf m,
1.8 I bfft)
REAR COVER
S TEERI NG WHEEL TRIM
CRUI S E CONTROL
COMB INATION SWI TCH
A CCE S S PANEL
*: Wi t h Navi gat i on
17-8
Steering Wheel Installation
S RS c omponent l ocat i ons: 4-door {see page 24- 21) ,
ser vi c e.
1 Bef ore i nst al l i ng t he st eer i ng wheel , make sur e t he
front wheel s ar e poi nt i ng st rai ght ahead, t hen cent er
t he cabl e reel (A). Do t hi s by f i rst rotati ng t he cabl e
reel c l oc kwi se unti l it st ops. Then rotate it
count er cl ockwi se about t hree full t ur ns. The ar r ow
mark (B) on t he cabl e reel l abel shoul d poi nt st rai ght
up.
B A
2. Posi t i on t he t wo t abs (A) of t he t urn si gnal cancel i ng
sl eeve (B) as s hown. Install t he st eer i ng wheel on to
t he st eer i ng col umn shaf t , maki ng sur e t he st eer i ng
wheel hub (C) engages t he pi ns (D) of t he cabl e reel
and t abs of t he t urn si gnal cancel i ng sl eeve. Do not
t ap on t he st eer i ng wheel or st eeri ng c ol umn shaf t
when i nst al l i ng t he st eer i ng wheel .
3. Inst al l t he st eer i ng wheel bolt (A), and t i ght en it to t he
speci f i ed t or que. Connec t t he cabl e reel subhar ness
c onnec t or (B). Make sur e t he wi r e har ness i s rout ed
and f ast ened properl y.
4. Inst al l t he dr i ver ' s ai r bag (see page 24-211).
5. Do t he battery t er mi nal r econnect i on pr ocedur e {see
page 22-91), and check t hese i t ems:
Tur n t he i gni ti on swi t ch to ON (II) and check that t he
S RS i ndi cat or c omes on f or about 6 sec onds, and
t hen goes off.
Make sur e t he horn and t urn si gnal swi t c hes wor k
properl y.
Make sur e t he st eer i ng wheel swi t c hes wor k
properl y.
6. After i nst al l at i on, check t he st eer i ng wheel spoke
angl e. If t he st eer i ng spoke angl es to t he ri ght and left
ar e not equal (st eeri ng wheel i s not cent er ed), cor r ect
t he engagement of t he wheel /c ol umn shaf t spl i nes.
17-9
St eeri ng
Steering Column Removal and Installation
S RS c omponent s are l ocat ed in t hi s ar ea. Revi ew t he
S RS c omponent l ocat i ons: 4-door (see page 24-21 )
f
ser vi c e.
Removal
1. Adj ust t he st eer i ng c ol umn to t he full tilt down
posi t i on, and to t he full t el escopi c out posi t i on.
page 22-91).
3. Remove t he dr i ver ' s ai r bag (see page 24-211), and t he
st eer i ng wheel (see page 17-6).
4. Remove t he st eer i ng c ol umn c over s (see page
20-181).
5. Remove t he st eer i ng j oi nt cover (A).
A
6. Loosen t he upper st eer i ng j oi nt bolt (A), and r emove
t he l ower st eer i ng j oi nt bolt (B). Di sc onnec t t he
st eer i ng j oi nt (C) by sl i di ng t he st eer i ng j oi nt into t he
c ol umn shaf t (D). Ti ght en t he upper st eer i ng j oi nt bolt
to hol d t he st eer i ng j oi nt i n pl ace.
NOTE:
Do not di sc onnec t t he st eer i ng j oi nt f r om t he
c ol umn shaf t .
If t he cent er gui de (E) i s i n pl ace and has not moved,
l eave it i n pl ace.
If t he cent er gui de has c ome off, di sc ar d it.
17-10
7. Di sconnect t he wi r e har ness connect or s f r om t he combi nat i on swi t ch assembl y/c abl e reel (A).
8x 1.25 m m
16 N m (1.6 kgf -m, 12 Ibfft)
8. Remove t he combi nat i on swi t ch assembl y/c abl e reel f r om t he st eer i ng c ol umn shaf t by r emovi ng t he t hr ee
sc r ews (B).
9. Di sconnect t he connect or s f r om t he i gni ti on swi t c h, and r el ease t he wi r e har ness cl i ps f r om t he st eer i ng c ol umn.
10. Make sur e t hat t he lock l ever (C) i s in t he l ocked posi t i on. Remove t he st eer i ng c ol umn (D) by r emovi ng t he at t achi ng
nut s and bol t s, and caref ul l y gui de it out of t he dashboar d.
NOTE: Do not r el ease t he lock l ever unti l t he st eer i ng c ol umn i s i nst al l ed. If t he lock l ever i s r el eased bef ore
i nst al l at i on, adj ust t he st eer i ng c ol umn (see page 17-15) after i nst al l at i on.
(cont' d)
17-11
St eeri ng
Steering Column Removal and Installation (cont'd)
Installation
1. Inst al l t he st eer i ng c ol umn i n t he r ever se or der of
r emoval , and note t hese i t ems:
Make sur e t he wi r es ar e not caught or pi nched by
any par t s.
Ti ght en t he t hr ee s c r ews (A) i n t he sequenc e
s hown.
2. Cent er t he st eer i ng rack wi t hi n its st roke.
3. L oosen t he upper st eer i ng j oi nt bolt (A), and sl i p t he
l ower end of t he st eer i ng j oi nt (B) on to t he pi ni on
shaf t (C).
NOTE:
Pi ni on shaf t wi t h cent er gui de: Install t he st eer i ng
j oi nt by al i gni ng t he cent er gui de.
Pi ni on shaf t wi t hout cent er gui de: Posi t i on t he
st eer i ng c ol umn by al i gni ng t he gap (D) wi t hi n t he
angl e.
FRONT
t
4. Al i gn t he bolt hol e (A) on t he st eer i ng j oi nt wi t h t he
gr oove (B) ar ound t he pi ni on shaf t , t hen l oosel y
i nst al l t he l ower st eer i ng j oi nt bolt (C). Be sur e that t he
j oi nt bolt i s sec ur el y in t he gr oove in t he pi ni on shaf t .
5. Pull on t he st eer i ng j oi nt to make sur e t hat t he
st eer i ng j oi nt i s f ul l y seat ed, t hen t i ght en t he l ower
j oi nt bolt to t he speci f i ed t or que.
6. Ti ght en t he upper st eer i ng j oi nt bolt (D) to t he
speci f i ed t orque.
17-12
7. Install t he st eer i ng j oi nt c over (A).
A
8. Inst al l t he st eer i ng col umn c over s (see page 20-181).
9. Inst al l t he st eer i ng wheel (see page 17-9), and t he
dr i ver ' s ai r bag (see page 24-211).
Tur n t he i gni ti on swi t ch to ON (II), and check that
t he S RS i ndi cat or c omes on for about 6 s ec onds ,
and t hen goes off.
properl y.
properl y.
11. Af t er i nst al l at i on, check t hese i t ems:
Check t he st eer i ng wheel spoke angl e. If t he
st eer i ng spoke angl es to t he right and left are not
equal (st eeri ng wheel and rack ar e not cent er ed),
correct t he engagement of t he j oi nt /pi ni on shaf t
spl i nes.
Set t he st eer i ng c ol umn to t he cent er tilt posi t i on,
and to t he cent er t el escopi c posi t i on, t hen do t he
front t oe i nspect i on (see page 18-5).
St eeri ng
St eeri ng Col umn Inspect i on
Inspect i on
1. Remove t he st eer i ng c ol umn (see page 17-10).
2. Chec k t hese i t ems;
Check for l oose bear i ng mount i ng nut s (A). If t hey are l oose, r epl ace the c ol umn as an assembl y.
Chec k t he st eer i ng c ol umn bal l bear i ngs (B) and t he st eer i ng j oi nt s (C) f or pl ay and pr oper movement . If any
bear i ng i s noi sy or has exc essi ve pl ay, r epl ace t he st eer i ng c ol umn as an assembl y.
Check t he sl i di ng c apsul es (D) f or di st ort i on or br eakage. If t her e i s di st ort i on or br eakage, r epl ace t he st eer i ng
c ol umn as an assembl y.
Chec k t he tilt mec hani sm and t el escopi c mec hani sm f or movement and damage.
3. Install t he st eer i ng c ol umn (see page 17-12).
17-14
Check of Ti l t i ng For ce
1. Set t he st eer i ng wheel in t he strai ght ahead dri vi ng
posi t i on, and l oosen t he lock lever fully.
2. At t ach a c ommer c i al l y avai l abl e spr i ng sc al e (A) to t he
hi ghest poi nt of t he st eer i ng wheel , and tilt t he
st eer i ng c ol umn to t he l owest posi t i on.
3. Pull t he spr i ng sc al e st rai ght up, and r ead t he f orce
r equi r ed to move t he st eer i ng c ol umn.
4. At t ach t he spr i ng sc al e to t he l owest poi nt of the
st eer i ng wheel .
5. Pull t he spr i ng sc al e st rai ght down, and r ead t he f orce
requi red to move t he st eer i ng c ol umn.
Ti l t i ng f or ce (upwar d/downwar d):
St andar d: 70 N (7.1 kgf, 15 Ibf) max.
6. If t he measur ement i s hi gher t han speci f i ed, or if t he
tilt f unct i on f eel s r ough, do t he f ol l owi ng.
Loosen t he at t achi ng nut s so t hey ar e fi nger-ti ght.
Rel ease t he lock l ever , and tilt and t el escope t he
st eer i ng c ol umn sever al t i mes.
Ti lt t he c ol umn down, t hen ti ghten t he lock l ever.
Tor que t he upper nut s, t hen t orque t he l ower bol t s.
7. Test t he ti lti ng f or ce agai n. If t he f orce i s sti ll hi gher
t han t he speci f i cat i on, r epl ace t he st eer i ng col umn as
an assembl y (see page 17-10).
Chec k of Tel escopi ng For ce
1. Set t he st eer i ng wheel in t he st rai ght ahead dri vi ng
posi t i on, and l oosen t he lock l ever f ul l y, and push i n
t he st eer i ng wheel to t he f ul l y t el escoped i n posi t i on.
2. At t ach a c ommer c i al l y avai l abl e spr i ng sc al e (A) to t he
cent er poi nt of t he st eer i ng wheel as s hown.
3. Pull t he spr i ng sc al e, and r ead t he f or ce r equi r ed to
move t he st eer i ng c ol umn dur i ng t el escopi ng out.
Tel esc opi ng f or ce:
St andar d: 135 N (13.8 kgf, 30.3 Ibf) max.
4. If t he measur ement i s hi gher t han spec i f i ed, r epl ace
t he st eer i ng c ol umn as an assembl y (see page 17-10).
(cont' d)
17-15
St eeri ng
Steering Column Inspection
(cont'd)
Ch eck of L ock L ever force
1. Move t he lock l ever (A) f r om t he l oosened posi t i on to
t he l ocked posi t i on t hr ee to f i ve t i mes, t hen r el ease
t he l ock l ever. Adj ust t he st eer i ng c ol umn to t he
cent er tilt posi t i on and al so to t he f ul l t el esc opi c out
posi t i on, and hol d t he st eer i ng wheel .
2. Usi ng a c ommer c i al l y avai l abl e push-pul l gauge,
push up t he lock l ever 10 m m (0.39 i n) i n f r om i ts end,
and measur e t he f or ce r equi r ed to move t he lock
l ever .
Loc k l ever f or ce:
5085 N (5.1 ~8.7 kgf, 11 - 1 9 Ibf) mi n.
3. If t he measur ement i s hi gher t han spec i f i ed, r epl ace
t he st eer i ng c ol umn as an assembl y (see page 17-10).
Steering Lock Replacement
1. Remove t he st eer i ng c ol umn (see page 17-10).
2. Cent er -punch both of t he t wo shear bol t s, and dri ll
t hei r heads off wi t h a 5 mm (0.20 i n) dri ll bit. Be car ef ul
not to damage t he st eer i ng lock when r emovi ng t he
shear bol t s.
3. Remove t he shear bol t s f r om t he st eer i ng l ock, t hen
r emove t he st eer i ng lock.
4. Remove t he i mmobi l i zer -keyl ess cont rol uni t f r om t he
st eer i ng lock, t hen i nst al l it on t he new st eer i ng lock
(see page 22-440)..
5. Inst al l t he st eer i ng lock wi t hout t he key i nser t ed.
6. Loosel y ti ghten t he new shear bol t s.
7. Insert t he i gni ti on key, and check f or pr oper oper at i on
of t he st eer i ng wheel lock and t hat t he i gni ti on key
t ur ns f reel y.
8. Ti ght en t he shear bol t s (A) unti l t he hex heads (B)
t wi st off.
A
9. Inst al l t he st eer i ng c ol umn (see page 17-12).
10. Rewr i t e all new keys to t he i mmobi l i zer -keyl ess
cont rol uni t (see page 22-439), and make sur e t he
i mmobi l i zer syst em wor ks properl y.
17-18
Rack Guide Adjustment
Locknut Wr enc h, 40 mm 07MAA-SL00100 or Locknut
Wr enc h, 41 mm 07916-SA50001
1. Set t he f ront wheel s in t he st rai ght ahead posi t i on.
2. Loosen t he rack gui de s c r ew locknut (A) wi t h the
l ocknut wr enc h, t hen r emove t he rack gui de sc r ew
(B).
3. Remove t he old seal ant f r om t he rack gui de sc r ew (A),
and appl y new seal ant (Three Bond 1215 or
Loct i t e 5699) to t he mi ddl e of t he t hr eads (B). Loosel y
i nst al l t he rack gui de sc r ew on t he st eer i ng gear box.
NOTE; If mor e t han 5 mi nut es have passed after
appl yi ng t he seal ant , r emove t he old seal ant and
r esi due, and reappl y new seal ant .
4. Ti ght en t he rack gui de sc r ew (A) to 25 N-m (2.5 k gf m,
18 Ibf-ft), t hen l oosen it.
1 5 5
5. Ret i ght en t he rack gui de sc r ew to 3.9 N-m (0.4 kgf-m,
2.9 Ibf-ft), t hen back it off to t he speci f i ed angl e.
Spec i f i ed r et ur n angl e: 15+5
6. Hol d t he rack gui de s c r ew st at i onary wi t h a wr enc h,
and t i ght en t he locknut by hand unti l i t' s fully seat ed.
7. Inst al l t he locknut wr enc h on t he locknut (B), and hold
t he rack gui de sc r ew st at i onary wi t h a wr enc h.
Ti ght en t he locknut to t he speci f i ed t orque.
8. Chec k f or unusual st eer i ng effort t hr ough t he
compl et e t urni ng r ange.
9. Chec k t he st eer i ng wheel rotati on play (see page 17-4)
and t he power assi st (see page 17-4).
17-17
St eeri ng
Tie-rod End Ball Joint Boot Replacement
Bear i ng Dri ver At t achment , 36 07965-SA50500
1 Di sconnect t he t i e-rod end bal l j oi nt f r om t he knuckl e
2. Remove t he t i e-rod end f r om t he rack end.
3. Remove t he bal l j oi nt boot f r om t he t i e-rod end, and
wi pe t he ol d gr ease off t he ball pi n.
4. Pack t he l ower ar ea of t he bal l pi n (A) wi t h f r esh
mul t i pur pose gr ease.
5. Pack t he i nt eri or of t he new ball j oi nt boot (B) and
lip (C) wi t h f r esh mul t i pur pose gr ease.
Note t hese i t ems when i nst al l i ng new gr ease:
Keep gr ease off t he boot mount i ng ar ea (D) and t he
t aper ed sect i on (E) of t he ball pi n.
Do not al l ow dust , di rt, or ot her f orei gn mat er i al s to
ent er t he boot .
6. Inst al l t he ball j oi nt boot (A) usi ng t he beari ng dri ver
at t achment . The boot must not have a gap at t he boot
i nst al l at i on sec t i ons (B). After i nst al l i ng t he boot,
check t he bal l pi n t aper ed sect i on f or gr ease
cont ami nat i on, and wi pe it if nec essar y.
07965-SA50500
7. Inst al l t he t i e-rod end to t he rack end.
8. Connec t t he t i e-rod end ball j oi nt to t he knuckl e (see
(see page 18-5).
17-18
Gearbox Mount Cushion Replacement
1. Remove t he st eer i ng gear box (see page 17-37).
2. Posi t i on a 40 mm socket (A) on t he f l ange part of the
gear box housi ng wi t h a washer (B), a 10 x 150 mm
f l ange bolt (C), and a 10 mm nut (D) as shown.
3. Hol d t he f l ange bolt wi t h a wr enc h, and t i ght en t he nut
wi t h a wr enc h. Remove the gear box mount c ushi on
( E ) .
4. Appl y a mi l d soap and wat er sol ut i on to t he new
gear box mount c ushi on sur f ace (A), t hen pl ace t he
mount c ushon on t he gear box mount i ng c ushi on
hol e.
5. Posi t i on a 40 mm socket on t he f l ange part of t he
gear box housi ng wi t h a washer , a f l ange bolt, and a
nut as shown.
6. Inst al l t he gear box mount c ushi on by t i ght eni ng t he
nut unti l t he mount c ushi on edge (A) properl y fi ts on
t he gear box f l ange sur f ace (B).
7. Install t he st eer i ng gear box (see page 17-60).
17-19
POWER STEERING FL UID RES ERVOI R
F luid Leakage Inspection, page 17-27
F luid Replacement, page 17-28
Power Steering Hose, One, and
Pressure Switch Replacement, page 17-29
f POWER STEERING PUMP
Drive Belt Inspection, page 4-29
Drive Belt Replacement, page 4-30
Pump Pressure Test
with T/N 07406-0010001, page 17-25
Pump Pressure Test
wi t h T/N 07406-001000A or 07406-001A101, page 17-26
Pump Repl ac ement , page 17-30
Pump Over haul , page 17-31
POWER S TEERI NG GEARBOX
Over haul , page 17-45
17-20
I
Sympt om TroubleshootingIndex
Fi nd t he sympt om in t he chart bel ow, and do t he related pr ocedur es i n t he or der l i st ed unti l you f i nd t he c aus e.
Sympt om ?j oc edur e(s) Al so c hec k f or
Hard st eer i ng Tr oubl eshoot t he syst em (see page 17-24). Modi f i ed suspensi on
Damaged suspensi on
Incorrect ti re si zes, ti re
var i et i es, and ai r
pr essur e
Assi st
(excessi vel y light
st eer i ng at hi gh
speed)
Check t he rack gui de adj ust ment (see page 17-17). Fr ont wheel al i gnment
(see page 18-5)
Shoc k or
vi brat i on when
t he st eeri ng
wheel i s t ur ned
to full lock
1. Check t he dri ve belt for sl i ppage (see page 4-29).
2. Check t he power st eer i ng pump flui d pr essur e wi t h T/N 07406-
0010001 (see page 17-25), T/N 07406-001000A or T/N
07406-001A101 (see page 17-26).
3. Check t he rack gui de adj ust ment (see page 17-17).
4. Over haul t he st eer i ng gear box (see page 17-45).
St eer i ng wheel
wi l l not ret urn
smoot hl y
1. Check cyl i nder l i nes f or def ormat i on (see page 17-29).
2. Check t he ball j oi nt s f or bi ndi ng.
3. Check wheel al i gnment (see page 18-5).
4. Over haul t he st eer i ng gear box (see page 17-45).
Damaged suspensi on
Uneven or rough
st eeri ng
1. Check for l ow flui d l evel in t he power st eer i ng r eser voi r due to
possi bl e l eaks in syst em (see page 17-28).
2. Check t he dri ve belt (see page 4-29).
3. Check f or l ow or errat i c engi ne i dle speed (see page 11-292).
4. Check f or ai r in t he power st eeri ng syst em due to ai r ent er i ng t he
inlet si de of t he pump.
5. Check t he rack gui de adj ust ment (see page 17-17).
6. Over haul the st eer i ng gear box (see page 17-45).
St eer i ng wheel
ki cks back duri ng
wi de t ur ns
1. Check for l ow flui d l evel in t he power st eer i ng r eser voi r due to
possi bl e l eaks in the syst em (see page 17-28).
2. Check t he dri ve belt (see page 4-29).
3. Check t he power st eer i ng pump flui d pr essur e wi t h T/N 07406-
0010001 (see page 17-25), T/N 07406-001000A or T/N
07406-001A101 (see page 17-26).
(cont' d)
17-21
Hydraulic Power St eeri ng Component s
Symptom Troubl eshoot i ng Index (cont' d)
, Sympt om Pr ocedur e(s) Al so c hec k f or
Hummi ng noi se
f rom t he power
st eer i ng syst em
1. Chec k when t he noi se oc c ur s:
9 If t he noi se i s hear d dur i ng t he f i rst 23 mi nut es after st art i ng
t he engi ne in col d weat her , t hi s i s nor mal .
If t he noi se i s hear d when t he wheel i s t ur ned wi t h t he vehi cl e
st opped, t hi s i s nor mal due to t he f l ui d pul sat i on.
2. Chec k f or ai r bubbl es in t he power st eer i ng f l ui d, leak on t he i nlet
si de of t he pump.
3. Chec k f or part i cl e cont ami nat i on of f l ui d and a rest ri ct ed fi lter i n
t he r eser voi r .
4. Chec k f or t he hi gh-pr essur e hose t ouchi ng t he subf r ame or body.
5. Chec k f or aut omat i c t r ansmi ssi on t or que conver t er noi se.
Pump pr essur e
Fl ui d cont ami nat i on
- Rest ri ct i on in t he
hi gh-pr essur e li ne
- Rest ri ct i on in t he
l ow-pr essur e li ne
Power st eer i ng
rack rattle or
chat t eri ng
1. Chec k f or l oose st eer i ng c omponent s {ti e-rod and bal l j oi nt s).
Ti ght en or r epl ace as nec essar y.
2. Chec k t he st eer i ng c ol umn shaf t f or wobbl i ng. If t he st eer i ng
c ol umn wobbl es, r epl ace t he st eer i ng c ol umn assembl y (see page
17-10).
3. Chec k t he power st eer i ng pump pul l ey on t he shaf t c omp, f or
damage and det er i or at i on, r epl ace t he shaf t cor np. If nec essar y
(see page 17-30).
4. Chec k t he rack gui de adj ust ment (see page 17-17).
Hi ssi ng f r om t he
power st eer i ng
syst em/f oami ng
flui d
Chec k t he flui d l evel . If l ow, fill t he r eser voi r to t he pr oper l evel , and
check for l eaks (see page 17-27).
Check t he r eser voi r f or l eaks.
Chec k f or c r ushed i nlet hose or l oose hose c l amp al l owi ng ai r into
t he suct i on si de of t he syst em (see page 17-29).
Chec k t he power st eer i ng pump shaf t oi l seal f or l eaks.
Ai r in t he P/S f l ui d
Noi se f r om t he
power st eer i ng
pump
Compar e t he pump noi se at nor mal oper at i ng t emper at ur e to
anot her like vehi c l e (pump noi se dur i ng t hef i r st 23 mi nut es after
st art i ng t he engi ne in col d weat her i s nor mal ).
Remove and i nspect t he pump f or wear and damage (see page
17-31).
P/S pump pr essur e
Ai r in t he P/S f l ui d
Squeaki ng f rom
t he power
st eer i ng pump
Check t he dri ve belt (see page 4-29).
Fl ui d l eaks f rom
t he st eer i ng
gear box
Fl ui d l eaks f rom t he top of t he val ve body uni t. Over haul t he val ve
body uni t (see page 17-45).
Fl ui d l eaks f rom t he dr i ver ' s si de boot . Repl ace t he val ve oi l seal on
t he pi ni on shaf t . Repl ac e t he cyl i nder end seal on t he gear box si de
(see page 17-45).
Fl ui d l eaks f rom t he passenger ' s si de boot. Repl ace t he cyl i nder
end seal on t he cyl i nder si de (see page 17-45).
Fl ui d l eaks f r om pi ni on shaf t near t he l ower st eer i ng j oi nt bolt.
Over haul t he val ve body uni t (see page 17-45).
Fl ui d l eaks f rom t he st eer i ng dampi ng val ve c over s on t he val ve
body uni t. Repl ace t he val ve housi ng (see page 17-45).
Sy mpt om Pr ocedur e(s) Al so c hec k f or
Fl ui d l eaks f r om
t he power
st eer i ng l i ne
Fl ui d l eaks f rom t he cyl i nder li ne connect i ons (flare nut s). Ti ght en
t he connect i on (see page 17-29), and ret est .
Fl ui d l eaks f rom a damaged cyl i nder l i ne(s). Repl ac e t he cyl i nder
l i ne(s) (see page 17-29).
Fl ui d l eaks f rom t he pump outlet hose or ret urn li ne fi tti ng on t he
val ve body uni t (flare nut s). Ti ght en t he fi tti ng and ret est . If it sti ll
l eaks, r epl ace t he hose, t he li ne (see page 17-29), or val ve body
uni t as nec essar y.
t he power
st eer i ng pump
Fl ui d l eaks f rom t he pump seal . Repl ace t he pump seal (see page
17-31).
Fl ui d l eaks f r om t he power st eer i ng pump housi ng. Repl ac e t he
l eaki ng O-r i ngs or seal s (see page 17-31), and if nec essar y r epl ace
t he power st eeri ng pump (see page 17-30).
t he power
st eer i ng
r eser voi r
Fl ui d l eaks f rom ar ound t he r eser voi r c ap bec ause f l ui d l evel i s too
hi gh. Drai n t he r eser voi r to t he proper l evel (see page 17-28). If t he
f l ui d i s f oami ng c hec k f or an ai r leak on t he i nlet si de of t he pump.
Fl ui d l eaks f r om t he r eser voi r . Check t he r eser voi r f or c r ac ks, and
r epl ace as nec essar y.
t he power
st eer i ng pump
outlet hose
(hi gh-pr essur e)
Chec k t he fitting f or l oose bol t s. If t he bolts ar e ti ght, r epl ace t he
fi tti ng O-ri ng (see page 17-31).
Fl ui d l eaks at t he swagged j oi nt . Repl ac e t he pump out l et hose (see
page 17-31).
t he power
st eer i ng pump
i nlet hose
(l ow-pr essur e)
Chec k t he hose f or damage, det eri orat i on, or i mpr oper assembl y
(see page 17-29). Repl ac e or repai r as nec essar y.
Hui d cont ami nat i on
17-23
Sympt om Troubleshooting
Hard St eer i ng
NOTE:
Compar e to a known-good vehi c l e t hat i s t he s ame
t ri m l evel .
Chec k for suspensi on damage.
mChec k t he st eer i ng al i gnment .
Chec k t he ti re condi t i on and pr essur e.
1. Chec k t he power assi st (see page 17-4).
Is the Initial turning load more than 29.4 N (3.0 kgf,
6.6 Ibf)?
YE S - Go to st ep 2. -
NO-Power assi st i s OK at t hi s t i me. Compar e to a
known-good vehi c l e.B
2. Connec t t he pump j oi nt adapt er or P/S j oi nt adapt er
(pump), hose j oi nt adapt er , and P/S pr essur e gauge
T/N 07406- 0010001 (see page 17-25), T/N 07406-
001000A or T/N 07406-001A101 (see page 17-26) to
t he pump.
3. Measur e st eady-st at e f l ui d pr essur e f r om t he pump at
i dl e.
Is the pressure 1,470 kPa (15 kgf/cm
2
, 213 psi) or less?
NO-Go to st ep 8.
4. Measur e t he pump rel i ef pr essur e at i dl e.
Is the pressure 8,140-8,830 kPa (83-90 kgf/cm
2
,
1,180-1,280 psi) or more?
NO-Repl ac e t he pump assembl y (see page 17- 30) . !
5. Usi ng a spr i ng sc al e, measur e t he power assi st i n
both di r ect i ons, to t he left and to t he ri ght.
Are the two measurements within 5.0 N (0.51 kgf,
1.12 Ibf) of each other?
NO-Go to st ep 9.
6. Measur e t he f l ui d pr essur e wi t h both pr essur e gauge
val ves open (if so equi pped), whi l e t urni ng t he
st eer i ng wheel f ully to t he left and f ul l y to t he ri ght.
Is the pressure 8,140-8,830 kPa (83-90 kgf/cm
2
,
1,1801,280 psi) or more in both directions?
NO-Faul t y st eer i ng gear box. Over haul t he st eer i ng
gear box (see page 17-45).H
7. Adj ust t he rack gui de (see page 17-17), and ret est .
Is the steering OK ?
YES - Repai r i s c o mpl et ed .
NO-Faul t y st eer i ng gear box. Over haul t he st eer i ng
gear box (see page 17- 45) .
8. Chec k t he outlet and return hoses and t he l i nes
bet ween t he pump and t he st eer i ng gear box f or
cl oggi ng and def or mat i on.
Are the lines clogged or deformed?
YES - Repl ac e t he l i nes . S
NO-Faul t y val ve body uni t. Over haul t he val ve body
uni t (see page 17-45).H
9. Chec k t he cyl i nder l i nes f or def ormat i on (see page
17-29).
Are any of the line(s) deformed?
YES - Repl ac e t he def or med l i ne(s).H
NO-Go to st ep 10.
10. Chec k for a bent rack shaf t or mi sadj ust ed rack gui de
(too ti ght).
Is the rack shaft bent or the rack guide adjusted too tight?
YES - Repl ac e t he rack shaf t , or r eadj ust t he rack gui de
pr el o ad .
NO-Faul t y val ve body uni t. Over haul t he val ve body
uni t (see page 17- 45) . !
17-24
Pump Pressure Test wi t h T/N 07406-0010001
Pump Joi nt Adapt er 07RAK-S040111 or P/S Joi nt
Adapt er (pump) 07RAK-S040110
Hose Joi nt Adapt er 07RAK-S040122
P/S Pr essur e Gauge 07406-0010001
Chec k t he f l ui d pr essur e as f ol l ows to det er mi ne
whet her t he t roubl e i s in t he pump or st eer i ng gear box.
1. Chec k t he power st eer i ng flui d l evel (see page 17-28).
2. Di sconnect t he pump out l et hose (A) f r om the pump
outlet wi t h car e so as not to spi l l t he power st eer i ng
f l ui d on t he f r ame and ot her par t s, t hen i nst all t he
pump j oi nt adapt er or P/S j oi nt adapt er (pump) on t he
pump outlet (B).
3. Connec t t he hose j oi nt adapt er to t he P/S pr essur e
gauge, t hen c onnec t t he pump outlet hose to t he hose
j oi nt adapt er.
4. Inst al l t he P/S pr essur e gauge to t he pump j oi nt
adapt er or P/S j oi nt adapt er (pump).
5. Ful l y open t he shut-off val ve (A).
6. Ful l y open t he pr essur e cont rol val ve (B).
8. Tur n t he st eer i ng wheel f r om lock to lock sever al
t i mes to war m t he f l ui d to operat i ng t emper at ur e at
158 F (70 C).
9. Measur e st eady-st at e f l ui d pr essur e whi l e t he engi ne
i s i dl i ng. If t he pump i s i n good condi t i on, t he gauge
shoul d read no mor e t han 1,470 kPa (15 kgf /c m
2
,
213 psi ).
If t he readi ng i s hi gh, c hec k for:
Cl ogged or def or med i nlet or ret urn l i ne bet ween
t he pump and t he st eer i ng gear box.
Cl ogged val ve body uni t.
10. Cl ose t he shut-off val ve, t hen c l ose t he pr essur e
cont rol val ve gr adual l y unti l t he pr essur e gauge
needl e i s st abl e. Read t he pr essur e.
[NOTICEI
Do not keep t he shut -of f val ve c l osed mor e t han 5
sec onds or t he pump coul d be damaged by
over -heat i ng.
11. Immedi at el y open t he shut -of f val ve f ul l y.
If t he pump i s in good condi t i on, t he gauge shoul d
read at l east 8, 140-8, 830 kPa ( 83- 90 kgf /cm
2
,
1,1801,280 psi ). A l ow readi ng means t he pump
output i s too l ow f or full assi st . Repai r or repl ace t he
pump.
17-25
Pump Pressure Test with T/ N 07406-001 QQOA or T/ N 0740-001A1@1
. Pump Joi nt Adapt er 07RAK-S040111 or P/S Joi nt
Adapt er (pump) 07RAK-S040110
. Hose Joi nt Adapt er 07RAK-S040122
- P/S Pr essur e Gauge 07408-001000A or 07406-001A101
Chec k t he f l ui d pr essur e as f ol l ows to det er mi ne
whet her t he t roubl e i s in t he pump or st eer i ng gear box.
1. Chec k t he power st eer i ng f l ui d l evel (see page 17-28).
2. Di sconnect t he pump outlet hose (A) f rom t he pump
outlet wi t h c ar e s o as not to spi l l t he power st eer i ng
f l ui d on t he f r ame and ot her par t s, t hen i nst al l t he
pump j oi nt adapt er or P/S j oi nt adapt er (pump) on t he
pump outlet (B).
6 x 1.0 mm
11 N-m (1.1 kgf-m, 8. Ibf-ft)
07406-001000A or
07406-001A101
A
07RAK-S040122
RAK-S040111 or
07RAK-S040110
6 x 1.0 mm
11 Nm
(1.1 kgf -m,
8.0 Ibf-ft)
3. Connec t t he hose j oi nt adapt er to t he P/S pr essur e
gauge, t hen connect t he pump outlet hose to t he hose
j oi nt adapt er.
4. Install t he P/S pr essur e gauge to t he pump j oi nt
adapt er or P/S j oi nt adapt er (pump).
5. Ful l y open t he shut-off val ve (A).
A
t i mes to war m t he f l ui d to operat i ng t emper at ur e at
158 F (70 C).
8. Measur e st eady-st at e f l ui d pr essur e whi l e t he engi ne
i s i dl i ng. If the pump i s i n good condi t i on, t he gauge .
shoul d r ead no mor e t han 1,470 kPa (15 kgf /cm
2
,
213 psi ).
If t he r eadi ng i s hi gh, check for:
Cl ogged or def or med i ni et or return li ne bet ween
t he pump and t he st eer i ng gear box.
Cl ogged val ve body uni t.
9. Let t he engi ne i dl e, and gr adual l y c l ose t he shut -of f
val ve and i mmedi at el y r ead t he pr essur e.
NOTICE
Do not keep t he shut -of f val ve c l osed mor e t han
5 sec onds or t he pump coul d be damaged by
over -heat i ng.
10. Immedi at el y open t he shut -of f val ve f ul l y.
If t he pump i s in good condi t i on, t he gauge shoul d
r ead at l east 8, 140-8, 830 kPa ( 83- 90 kgf /c m
2
,
1,180 1,280 psi ). A l ow readi ng means t he pump
out put i s t oo l ow f or full assi st . Repai r or repl ace t he
pump.
Flui d Leakage Inspecti on
PUMP ASSEMBLY
Check for leaks at the pump
seal, and the inlet and outlet fittings.
HOS E S and L I NES
Inspect hoses for damage, leaks, interference, and twisting.
Inspect fluid lines for damage, rusting, and leaks.
Check for leaks at the hose and line joints, and at the connections.
GEARBOX and
VA L VE BODY UNIT
Check for leaks
at the mating surface
and flare nut connections.
HOS E S and L I NES
Inspect hoses for damage, leaks, interference, and twisting.
Inspect fluid lines for damage, rusting, and leaks.
Check for leaks at hose and the line joints, and at the connections.
17-27
Fluid Replacement
Check t he r eser voi r (A) at r egul ar i nt er val s, and add t he
r ec ommended f l ui d as nec essar y. Al ways use Honda
Power St eer i ng Fl ui d. Usi ng any ot her t ype of power
st eer i ng f l ui d or aut omat i c t r ansmi ssi on f l ui d c an c ause
i nc r eased wear , f l ui d l eaks, and poor st eer i ng i n col d
weat her .
NOTE; If t he f l ui d i s cont ami nat ed, t he sc r een i n t he
r eser voi r may be part i al l y bl ocked. Inspect t he r eser voi r
sc r een f or any debr i s. If t he r eser voi r sc r een i s c l ogged,
r epl ace t he r eser voi r , and check f or t he sour c e of t he
cont ami nat i on.
S f st em capaci t y;
1.05 L (1.11 US qt ) at di sassembl y
Reser voi r capaci t y:
0.32 L (0.34 US qt )
1. Remove t he r eser voi r f r om its hol der. Rai se t he
r eser voi r , t hen di sconnect t he return hose (A) to dr ai n
t he r eser voi r . Take car e not to spi l l t he f l ui d on t he
vehi c l e. Wi pe off any spi l l ed f l ui d at onc e.
NOTE: Inspect t he r eser voi r sc r een f or any debr i s. If
t he r eser voi r sc r een i s c l ogged, r epl ace t he r eser voi r ,
and check f or t he sour c e of t he cont ami nat i on.
2. Connec t a hose (B) of sui t abl e di amet er to t he
di sc onnec t ed return hose, and put t he hose end i n a
sui t abl e cont ai ner .
3. St ar t t he engi ne, let it run at i dl e, and t urn t he st eer i ng
wheel f r om lock to lock sever al t i mes. When f l ui d
st ops runni ng out of t he hose, shut off t he engi ne.
Di sc ar d t he f l ui d.
NOTE: St op t he engi ne i mmedi at el y once t he f l ui d
st ops runni ng out of t he hose to prevent pump
damage.
4. Rei nst al l t he return hose on t he r eser voi r .
5. Fi ll t he r eser voi r to t he upper l evel li ne (C).
6. St ar t t he engi ne, and run it at i dl e. Tur n t he st eer i ng
f r om lock to lock sever al t i mes to bl eed ai r f r om t he
syst em.
7 Recheck t he f l ui d l evel and, add s ome if nec essar y. Do
not fill t he r eser voi r beyond t he upper l evel l i ne.
8. If t he flui d i s cont ami nat ed, dark, or di sc ol or ed, r epeat
t he pr ocedur e as nec essar y unti l t he syst em i s c l ean.
17-28
Power Steering Hose, Line, and Pressure Switch Replacement
Note t hese i t ems dur i ng installation:
Connec t eac h hose to the cor r espondi ng li ne sec ur el y until it cont act s the st op on t he l i ne. Install the c l amp <
adj ust abl e c l amp at t he speci f i ed di st ance f rom t he hose end as shown.
Check all c l amps for det eri orat i on or def or mat i on; repl ace t he c l amps wi th new ones if nec essar y.
Add t he r ec ommended power st eer i ng flui d to t he speci f i ed l evel on the r eser voi r , and c hec k for l eaks.
ADJ US TABL E HOS E CL AMP (A)
_D I a
2.55.5 mm
( 0. 10- 0. 22 i n)
J .
3-
2. 0- 4. 0 m m
( 0. 08- 0. 16 i n)
HOS E CL AMP (B)
2.55.5 mm
( 0. 10- 0. 22 In)
POWER S TEERI NG
PRE S S URE SWI TCH
12 N m (1.2 k g f m, 8.7 Ibf f t )
6 x 1.0 mm
11 IM-m
(1.1 k g f m, 8.0 Ibf f t )
6 x 1.0 mm
9.8 N-m
(1.0 k g f m, 7.2 Ibf f t )
INLET L INE
RETURN LINE
16x 1.5 mm
28 N-m (2.9 k g f m, 21 Ibf f t )
RETURN HOS E
18 x 1.5 mm
47 N-m
(4.8 k g f m, 35 Ibf f t )
17 N-m
(1.7 k g f m, 12 Ibf f t )
6 x 1.0 mm
9 8 N-m
(1.0 k g f m, 7.2 Ibf f t )
17-29
Hydrauli c Power SteeringComponent s
Pomp Repl acement
1. Pl ace a sui t abl e cont ai ner under t he vehi c l e to cat ch
any spi l l ed f l ui d.
2. Drai n t he power st eer i ng f l ui d f r om t he r eser voi r (see
page 17-28).
3. Remove t he dr i ve belt ( A ) f r om t he pump pul l ey (see
page 4-30).
4. Cover t he aut o-t ensi oner , t he al t ernat or, and t he A/ C
c ompr essor wi t h sever al shop t owel s to prot ect t hem
f r om spi l l ed power st eer i ng f l ui d. Di sc onnec t t he
pump i nlet hose (B) and t he pump out l et hose (C)
f r om t he pump (D), and pl ug t hem. Take car e not to
spi l l t he f l ui d on t he vehi c l e. Wi pe off any spi l l ed f l ui d
at onc e. Do not t urn the st eer i ng wheel wi t h t he pump
r emoved.
5. Remove t he pump mount i ng bol t s (E), t hen r emove
t he pump.
6. Cover t he openi ng of t he pump wi t h a pi ece of t ape to
pr event f orei gn mat eri al f r om ent er i ng t he pump.
7. Tr ansf er t he pump i nlet hose and t he pump outlet
hose f r om t he ori gi nal pump ont o t he new pump wi t h
a new O-ri ng (F).
8. Loosel y i nst al l t he pump in t he pump bracket wi t h t he
mount i ng bol t s, t hen t i ght en t he pump fi tti ngs to t he
9. Ti ght en t he pump mount i ng bol t s to t he speci f i ed
t or que.
10. Inst al l t he dr i ve belt (A) (see page 4-30).
Note t hese i t ems dur i ng dr i ve belt i nst al l at i on:
Inspect t he belt f or wear and c r ac ks. Repl ac e t he
belt if nec essar y.
Make sur e t hat t he belt i s properl y posi t i oned on t he
pul l eys (B).
Do not get power st eer i ng f l ui d or gr ease on t he
aut o-t ensi oner , t he al t ernat or, t he A/ C c ompr essor ,
and t he dr i ve belt, or t he pul l ey f ac es. Cl ean off any
flui d or gr ease bef ore i nst al l at i on.
11. Fi ll t he r eser voi r to t he upper l evel li ne (see page
17-28).
12. St art t he engi ne, and c hec k f or l eaks.
17-30
Pump Overhaul
Expl oded Vi ew
Replace the pump as an assembly if any of the parts indicated with an asterisk (*) are worn or damaged.
8 K 1 25 mm
2N-m
(2.0 k g f m, 14 ibf-ft)
14.8 x 1.9 mm
O-RING
Replace.
S x 1.0 mm
11 N-m
(1.1 k g f m, 8.0 ibf-ft)
I NL ET J OI NT
* VA NE S (S plates)
SLIPPER SEAL
(Whi t e col or !
Repl ac e.
RUBBER S E A L
(Bl ac k col or )
Replace.
O-RING
Repl ace.
57.2 x 1.9 mm
O-RING
Repl ace.
* PUMP HOUSI NG CAP
9 N-m (0.9 kgf m, 7 Ibf-ft)
*PUMP HOUSI NG
* PRE S S URE CONTROL
VAL VE SPRI NG
16.7 x 1.8 mm
O-RING
Repl ac e.
PRE S S URE CONTROL VA L VE
* PRE S S URE CONTROL VA L VE CAP
49 N-m (5.0 k g f m, 36 Ibf-ft)
( c o nt ' d)
17-31
Pump Overhaul (cont'd) -
At t achment , 32 x 35 mm 07746-0010100
. Dri ver Handl e, 15 x 135L 07749-0010000
Di sassembl y
1. Remove t he power st eer i ng pump (see page 17-30).
2. Drai n t he r emai ni ng f l ui d f r om t he power st eer i ng
pump.
3. Remove t he i nlet j oi nt and t he O-r i ng.
4. Remove t he pr essur e cont rol val ve c ap, t he O-r mg,
t he pr essur e cont rol val ve, and t he spr i ng.
5. Remove t he pump housi ng c ap and t he pump pr el oad
spr i ng.
6. Remove t he pump c over , t he pump c over s eal , and
t he O-r i ngs.
7. Remove t he snap r i ng, t hen r emove t he rotor, t he
v anes , t he c am r i ng, t he out er c as e, t he si de pl at e, and
t he O-r i ngs.
8. Remove t he shaf t c omp. by t appi ng t he shaf t end wi t h
a sof t f ac e hammer .
9. Remove t he pump seal f r om t he pump housi ng.
Inspec t i on
10. Chec k t he pr essur e cont rol val ve for wear , bur r s, and
ot her damage to t he edges of the gr ooves in t he val ve.
f PTTt
11. Inspect t he bore of t he pr essur e cont rol val ve on t he
pump housi ng for sc r at c hes and wear .
12. Sl i p t he pr essur e cont rol val ve back i n t he pump
housi ng, and check that it moves in and out smoot hl y.
If OK, go to st ep 13; if not, r epl ace t he pump as an
assembl y. The pr essur e cont rol val ve (A) i s not
avai l abl e separ at el y.
17-32
13. At t ach a hose (A) to t he end of t he pr essur e cont rol
val ve (B) as shown. Then submer ge t he pr essur e
cont rol val ve i n a cont ai ner of power st eer i ng f l ui d (C),
and appl y c ompr essed ai r in t he hose.
If ai r bubbl es leak t hrough t he val ve at l ess t han
98 kPa (1.0 kgf /c m
2
,14.2 psi ), r epl ace t he pump as
an assembl y. The pr essur e cont rol val ve i s not
avai l abl e separ at el y.
If t he pr essur e cont rol val ve i s OK, set it asi de f or
r eassembl y later.
Reassembl y
14. Inst al l t he new pump seal (A) (wi th its gr ooved si de
f aci ng i n) i nto t he pump housi ng (B) by hand f i rst ,
t hen dr i ve it i n usi ng t he dr i ver handl e and at t achment
unti l t he pump seal i s f l ush wi t h t he pump housi ng,
and t he seal i s fully seat ed in t he pump housi ng.
07746-0010100 07749-0010000
15. Install t he shaf t c omp. i nto t he pump housi ng.
16. Coat t he new O-ri ng (A) wi t h power st eer i ng f l ui d, and
i nst al l i t i nto t he gr oove i n t he pump housi ng (B).
(cont' d)
17-33
Pump Overhaul (cont ' d)
17. Coat t he new 57.2 mm O-ri ng (A) wi t h power st eer i ng
f l ui d, and i nstall it into t he gr oove in t he si de plate (B).
18. Set t he si de plate wi t h t he sl ot (C) f aci ng up, and al i gn
t he hol e (D) i n t he si de plate and t he sl ot (E) in t he
pump housi ng.
19. Install t he out er c ase (A) by al i gni ng t he sl ot (B) i nsi de
t he pump housi ng wi t h t he roll pi n hol e (C) on t he si de
pl at e.
20. Install t he roll pi n (D) i nto t he set hol e.
21. Inst al l t he c am ri ng (A) by al i gni ng t he sl ot (B) out si de
of t he c am ri ng wi t h t he sl ot (C) i n t he out er c ase.
Replace.
22. Appl y power st eer i ng f l ui d to t he r ubber seal (D)
(black) and sl i pper seal (E) (whi t e), and i nst al l t hem i n
t he sl ot (F) of t he c am ri ng.
23. Inst al l t he roll pi n (A) i nto t he sl ot s bet ween t he c am
ri ng (B) and out er c as e (C), t hen push t he roll pi n into
t he set hol e.
17-34
24. Install t he rotor (A) in t he c am ri ng (B).
25. Set t he 9 vanes (C) into the gr ooves in t he rotor. Make
sur e that t he gol d-col ored ends (D) of t he vanes are in
cont act wi t h t he sl i di ng sur f ace of t he c am ri ng.
26. Install t he snap ri ng (A).
27. Coat t he new 13.0 mm O-ri ngs (A) wi t h power
st eer i ng f l ui d, and i nst al l t hem i nto t he gr ooves i n t he
pump housi ng (B).
28. Push i n t he c am ri ng (A) f rom t he pump housi ng c ap
hol e (B) wi t h a flat-ti p sc r ewdr i ver to make sur e t he
c am ri ng i s f ully seat ed agai nst t he out er c as e.
B
(cont' d)
17-35
Pump Overhaul (cont'd)
29. Coat t he new pump c over seal (A) wi t h power st eer i ng
f l ui d, and i nst al l it into t he gr oove in t he pump c over
( B) .
30. Install t he pump c over assembl y over t he pump
housi ng (C).
31. Al i gn t he bolt hol es in t he cover (A) wi t h t he t hr eaded
hol es i n t he pump housi ng. Install t he f l ange bol t s
l oosel y f i rst , t hen ti ghten t he f l ange bol t s to t he
speci f i ed t or que al t ernat el y in t wo or mor e st eps.
8 x 1.25 mm
20 N-m (2.0 kgf-m, 14 Ibf-ft)
A
32. Install t he pump pr el oad spr i ng (A) in t he pump
housi ng (B).
I n c t a l l t h e n n mn hmi c i rs t f "!C *"**jrT*P
housi ng, and t i ght en it to t he speci f i ed t orque.
NOTE: Be caref ul not to damage t he pump outlet hose
connect i ng sur f ace (D) pump housi ng when i nst al l i ng
t he housi ng c ap.
34. Install t he spr i ng (A) in t he pump housi ng.
35. Coat t he pr essur e cont rol val ve (B) wi t h power
st eer i ng f l ui d, and i nst al l it in t he pump housi ng.
36. Coat t he new 16.7 mm O-ri ng (C) wi t h power st eer i ng
f l ui d, and i nst al l it on t he pr essur e cont rol val ve cap
(D).
37. Install t he pr essur e cont rol val ve cap on t he pump
housi ng, and t i ght en it to t he speci f i ed t orque.
17-36
Steering Gearbox Removal
38. Coat t he new 14.8 mm O-ri ng (A) wi t h power st eer i ng
f l ui d, and i nst al l it on t he i nl et j oi nt (B). Install t he i nlet
j oi nt wi t h a f l ange bolt (C) on t he pump housi ng, and
t i ght en t o t he speci f i ed t or que.
C
6x 1.0 mm
11 N-m
(1.1 kgf-m.
B
39. Chec k t hat t he power st eer i ng pump t ur ns smoot hl y
by t ur ni ng t he pul l ey by hand. If it t ur ns har d, l oosen
t he f our f l ange bol t s on t he pump c over , t hen
reti ghten t hem in t he s ame manner as i n st ep 31.
Ret est . if t he power st eer i ng pump i s sti ll har d to t ur n,
r epl ace t he power st eer i ng pump.
40. Rei nst al l t he power st eer i ng pump (see page 17-30).
. Engi ne Suppor t Hanger , A and Reds AAR-T1256*
. Bal l Joi nt Thr ead Prot ect or, 12 mm 07AAF-SDAA100
Pr ogr am, 888-424-6857.
S RS c omponent s ar e l ocat ed i n t hi s ar ea. Revi ew t he
S RS c omponent l ocat i ons: 4-door (see page 24-21),
2-door (see page 24-23) and t he pr ecaut i ons (see page
24-25) and pr ocedur es before doi ng r epai r s or ser vi c e.
Note t hese i t ems duri ng r emoval :
Usi ng c l ean sol vent and a br ush, was h any oi l and di rt
off t he val ve body uni t , i t' s l i nes, and t he end of t he
st eer i ng gear box. Bl ow dry wi t h c ompr essed ai r.
Be sur e to r emove t he st eer i ng wheel bef ore
di sconnect i ng t he st eeri ng j oi nt , or damage to t he
cabl e reel c an occur .
Lower t he front subf r ame f r om t he body, and r emove
t he st eer i ng gear box t hrough t he gap pr oduced by
l oweri ng t he front subf r ame.
1. Drai n t he power st eer i ng f l ui d (see page 17-28).
2. Do t he battery t ermi nal di sconnect i on pr ocedur e (see
page 22-91).
3. Rai se and suppor t t he vehi cl e (see page 1-13).
5. Remove t he dr i ver ' s ai rbag (see page 24-211), and t he
st eer i ng wheel (see page 17-6).
6. Remove st eer i ng j oi nt cover (A).
A
(cont' d)
17-37
Steering Gearbox Removal (cont'd)
7. Loosen t he upper st eer i ng j oi nt bolt (A), and r emove
t he l ower st eer i ng j oi nt bolt (B). Di sconnect t he
st eer i ng j oi nt (C) by sl i di ng t he st eer i ng j oi nt i nto t he
c ol umn shaf t (D). Ti ght en t he upper st eer i ng j oi nt bolt
to hol d t he st eer i ng j oi nt i n pl ace.
NOTE: Do not di sc onnec t t he st eer i ng j oi nt f r om t he
c ol umn shaf t .
8. Remove t he cent er gui de (A) (if equi pped) f r om t he
t op of t he pi ni on shaf t (B), and di sc ar d it.
9. Appl y vi nyl t ape to t he spl i nes on t he pi ni on shaf t .
10. Remove t he hood suppor t r od, t hen use it as s hown to
prop t he hood i n t he wi de-open posi t i on.
11. E c r ^ c v c t he f ront gr;!!c cover :
20-306).
13. Remove t he P/S heat shi el d (A).
17-38
t he t hr eaded hol e i n t he cyl i nder head.
VSB02C000015
at t ach t he hook to t he sl ot t ed hol e i n t he hanger
t
adapt er . Ti ght en t he wi ng nut (A) by hand to lift and
suppor t t he engi ne/t r ansmi ssi on.
NOTE: Be caref ul when wor ki ng ar ound t he
wi ndshi el d.
VSB02C000015
AAR-T1256
16. Remove t he rear engi ne mount (A).
M/ T
12 x 1.25 mm
Replace.
12 x 1.25 mm
Replace.
12 x 1.25 mm
Replace.
A / T
10 x 1.25 mm
Replace.
(cont' d)
17-39
17. A/T: Remove t he r ear engi ne mount upper br acket (A)
f r om t he base bracket (B).
12x1.25 mm
12x 1. 25 mm
Replace.
18. Remove t he i nlet li ne c l amp bolt (A) and t he ret urn
li ne c l amp bolt (B).
6K 1.0 mm 18x 1.5 mm
A
6 x 1.0 mm
16 x 1.5 mm
19. Loosen t he f l are nut s, and di sconnect t he i nlet l i ne (C)
and t he ret urn li ne (D).
20. Remove t he i nlet li ne c l amp bolt (A) and t he ret urn
hose c l amp bolt (B).
21. Rel ease t he ret urn hose c l amp (C)
f
and r emove t he
ret urn hose (D).
22. Remove t he return l i ne c l amp bolt (A).
23. Rel ease t he return l i ne c l amp (B), and r emove t he
ret urn li ne (C).
17-40
24. Remove t he f l ange bol t s f r om t he passenger ' s si de of
t he st eer i ng gear box, t hen r emove t he gear box
mount i ng bracket (A) and mount i ng c ushi on (B).
10 x 1.25 mm
25. Remove t he mount i ng bolts (A) and t he f l ange bol t s
(B) f r om t he dr i ver ' s si de of t he st eer i ng gear box, and
r emove t he st i f f ener pl at es (C) and t he was her s (D).
A
14x 1.5 mm
Replace.
26. Remove cot t er pi n (A) f rom t he t i e-rod end ball j oi nt ,
t hen r emove t he nut (B) on both si des.
07AAF-SDAA100
07MAC-SL 0A202
. 12 x 1.25 mm
A
Replace.
27. Di sc onnec t t he t i e-rod end ball j oi nt f r om t he knuckl e
usi ng t he ball j oi nt t hr ead prot ect or and t he ball j oi nt
r emover on both si de (see page 18-10).
NOTE: Be car ef ul not to damage t he ball j oi nt boot
when i nst al l i ng t he r emover .
28. Rai se t he vehi c l e.
29. Remove t he f ront spl ash shi el d (see page 20-291).
30. Remove exhaust pi pe A (see page 9-9).
31. Remove t he damper fork mount i ng nut (A) and t he
mount i ng bolt (B).
12 x 1.25 mm
Replace.
(cont' d)
17-41
32. At t ach t he front subf r ame adapt er (VSB02C000016) to
t he subf r ame by l oopi ng t he st r ap (A) over t he front of
t he subf r ame, t hen sec ur e t he st r ap wi t h t he st op (B),
t hen t i ght en t he wi ng nut (C).
33. Remove t he front subf r ame mi ddl e mount i ng bol t s on
t he passenger ' s si de.
34. Remove t he front subf r ame mi ddl e mount (A) on t he
dr i ver ' s si de.
35. Remove t he f l ange nut s (A) f r om t he l ower
t r ansmi ssi on mount .
10 x 1.25 mm
17-42
36. Remove t he f l ange bol t s (A) f r om t he front subf r ame
front st i f f eners (B).
37. Loosen t he front subf r ame mount i ng bol t s (C) so t hey
ar e about 20 mm (0.79 i n) f r om t he mount i ng sur f ace.
Do not l oosen t he f ront subf r ame mount i ng bol t s
mor e t han nec essar y.
38. Remove t he f l ange bol t s (A) and front subf r ame
mount i ng bolts (B) f r om t he f ront subf r ame rear
st i f f eners (C).
Replace. Replace.
39. Lower t he j ack sl owl y unti l t he f ront subf r ame has
dr opped about 69 mm (2.71 i n).
40. Car ef ul l y move t he st eer i ng gear box (A) t owar d t he
dr i ver ' s si de unti l t he pi ni on shaf t c l ear s t he
f ender wel l openi ng on t he body.
(cont ' d)
17-43
Steering Gearbox Removal (cont' d)
41. Remove t he st eer i ng gear box (A) t hrough t he
f ender wel l openi ng on t he dr i ver ' s si de.
43. Af t er r emovi ng t he st eer i ng gear box, make sur e that
no power st eer i ng f l ui d get s on t he gear box mount
c ushi ons, t he gear box housi ng, t he sur f ace of t he
front subf r ame, and st i f f ener. Wi pe off any spi l l ed
f l ui d at onc e.
17-44
Steering Gearbox Overhaul
Expl oded Vi ew
CYL I NDER L INE A
FL ARE NUTS
17 N m
(1.7 kgf-m, 12 Ibff-ft).-
F LARE NUTS
26 N-m
(2.7 k g f m, 20 Ibf f t )
CYL I NDER END S E A L
Replace.
BACK UP RING
Replace.
S NAP RING
Replace. v
S L E E VE SEAL
RI NGS
Replace.
VA L VE OIL S E A L
RING
Replace. .
PINION S HAFT
CYL I NDER END
98.1 N-m
(10.0 k g f m, 72.3 Ibf f t )
L OCK NUT
GEARBOX MOUNTING
CUSHI ON
Inspect for damage
and deterioration.
TIE-ROD END
LOCK NUT
44 N-m
(4.5 k g f m, 33 Ibf f t )
TIE-ROD END
-TIE ROD END
BAL L J OI NT BOOT
Inspect for damage and deterioration.
O-RING
Replace.
PISTON S E A L RING
Replace.
BOOT
Inspect for damage and deterioration.
(cont'd)
17-45
Hydr aul i c Power St eeri ng Component s
Steering Gearbox Overhaul (cont'd)
Cyl i nder End Seal Remover At t achment
07TAF-SZ50100
Val ve Seal Ri ng Si zi ng Tool 07NAG-SR3090A
. Sl eeve Seal Gui de, 35.9 x 37 07YAG-S2X0100
- Si zi ng Tool , 36 07ZAG-S5A0100
. Dr i ver Handl e, 15x 135L 07749-0010000
. Oi l Seal Dr i ver , 65 07JAD-PL9A100
. Bear i ng Dr i ver At t achment , 30 mm 07746-0030300
Pi st on Seal Ri ng Gui de 07XAG-S0K A200
Si zi ng Tool , 42 07HAG-SF1020A or 07HAG-SF10200
Pi ncer s Oet i ker 1098, c ommer c i al l y avai l abl e
Di sassembl y
1. Remove t he st eer i ng gear box (see page 17-37).
2. Remove t he t i e-rod end f r om t he rack end.
3. Dri ll a 4.0 mm (0.16 i n) di amet er hol e about 2.5
3.0 mm (0.100.12 i n) i n dept h in t he st aked poi nt s
(A) on t he end pl ug (B) and t he gear box housi ng (C).
4. Remove t he end pl ug (A) f r om t he gear box housi ng,
t hen r emove t he sel f -l ocki ng nut (B) f r om t he pi ni on
shaf t end.
5. Remove t he boot bands (A) and t i e-rod cl i ps (B). Pull
t he boot away f r om t he ends of t he st eer i ng gear box.
B
17-46
6. Hol d t he gear box housi ng usi ng a C-c l amp (A) and
wooden bl ocks (B) t o a wor k benc h as s hown. Do not
c l amp t he cyl i nder part of t he gear box housi ng i n a
vi se.
7. Unbend t he lock washer s (A).
8. Hol d t he flat sur f ac e sec t i ons (A) of t he st eer i ng rack
(B) wi t h one wr enc h, and unsc r ew both rack ends (C)
wi t h anot her wr enc h. Be caref ul not to damage t he
rack sur f ace wi t h t he wr enc h.
9. Remove t he lock was her (D) and r ubber st op (E).
10. L oosen t he l ocknut (A), t hen r emove t he rack gui de
s c r ew (B).
11. Remove t he spr i ng (C), and t he rack gui de (D) f rom t he
gear box housi ng.
(cont ' d)
17-47
Steering Gearbox Overhaul (cont' d)
12. Remove cyl i nder li ne A and B f r om t he st eer i ng
gear box.
13. Drai n t he f l ui d f r om t he cyl i nder fi tti ngs by sl owl y
movi ng t he st eer i ng rack back and f ort h.
14. Remove t he t wo f l ange bol t s, t hen r emove t he val ve
body uni t (A) f rom t he gear box housi ng (B). Remove
t he O-ri ng (C).
15. Appl y vi nyl t ape (A) to t he end of t he st eer i ng rack and
t he gear box housi ng. Dri ll a 3.04.0 mm
(0.120.16 i n) di amet er hol e about 2.53.0 mm
(0.100.12 i n) i n dept h i n t he st aked poi nt (B) on t he
cyl i nder . Do not al l ow met al shavi ngs to ent er t he
cyl i nder si de on t he gear box housi ng. Af t er r emovi ng
t he cyl i nder end (C), r emove any bur r s at t he st aked
poi nt.
NOTE: Appl y vi nyl t ape (D) to t he dri l l , and do not dri ll
t he dept h mor e t han nec essar y.
16. Hold t he gear box housi ng usi ng a C-c l amp (A) and
wooden bl ocks (B) t o a wor k bench as s hown. Do not
vi se. Remove t he vi nyl t ape. Then r emove t he
cyl i nder end (C).
17-48
17. Inst al l a c ommer c i al l y avai l abl e beari ng separ at or (A)
on t he gear box housi ng as shown.
18. Pl ace an appropri at e si ze deep socket (B) on t he
st eer i ng rack (C).
19. Set t he st eer i ng gear box i n a pr ess so t he gear box
housi ng si de poi nt s upwar d, t hen pr ess t he cyl i nder
end seal (D) and st eer i ng rack out of t he st eer i ng
gear box. Hold the st eer i ng rack to keep it f r om f al l i ng
when pr essed cl ear . Be caref ul not to damage t he
i nner sur f ace of t he cyl i nder si de on t he gear box
housi ng wi t h t he t ool .
20. Car ef ul l y pry t he pi st on seal ri ng (A) and O-ri ng (B) off
t he rack pi st on. Be caref ul not to damage t he i nsi de of
t he seal ri ng gr oove and pi st on edges when r emovi ng
t he seal ri ng.
A
Replace.
21. Tur n t he cyl i nder end seal r emover at t achment so it
fi ts t hr ough t he rack gui de hol e of t he gear box
housi ng, t hen posi t i on t he seal r emover on t he
backup ri ng (A). Make sur e t hat t he seal r emover i s
sec ur el y posi t i oned on t he backup r i ng.
07TAF-SZ50100
22 . Insert a 24" l ong 3/8" dr i ve ext ensi on (A), on t he
cyl i nder end seal r emover at t achment . Pl ace t he
gear box housi ng i n a pr ess, t hen r emove t he backup
ri ng (B) and cyl i nder end seal (C) f r om t he gear box
housi ng by pr essi ng on t he 24" l ong 3/8" dr i ve
ext ensi on.
Note t hese i t ems when pr essi ng t he backup ri ng and
cyl i nder end seal :
Keep t he t ool st rai ght to avoi d damagi ng t he
cyl i nder wal l . Chec k t he t ool angl e, and cor r ect it if
nec essar y, when r emovi ng t he backup ri ng and
cyl i nder end seal .
Us e a pr ess to r emove t he backup ri ng and cyl i nder
end seal . Do not try t o r emove t he backup ri ng and
cyl i nder end seal by st ri ki ng t he t ool ; st ri ki ng t he
t ool woul d break t he backup ri ng and cyl i nder end
s eal , and t he backup ri ng and cyl i nder end seal
woul d r emai n i n t he gear box housi ng.
07TAF-SZ50100
B
Replace.
(cont' d)
17-49
St eer i ng Gearbox Over haul (cont' d)
23. Appl y vi nyl t ape (A) to t he spl i nes on t he pi ni on shaf t .
24. Separ at e t he val ve housi ng (A) f r om t he pi ni on
shaf t /sl eeve (B) and t he val ve oi l seal (C).
25. Wi t h your f i nger , check t he i nner wal l of t he val ve
housi ng wher e t he seal ri ng sl i des. If t her e i s a st ep in
t he wal l , t he housi ng i s wor n, r epl ace it.
26. Chec k f or wear , bur r s, and ot her damage to t he edges
of t he gr ooves in t he sl eeve.
NOTE: The pi ni on shaf t and sl eeve ar e a pr eci si on
mat c hed set . If ei t her t he pi ni on shaf t or sl eeve must
be r epl ac ed, r epl ace both part s as a set .
17-50
27. Remove t he snap ri ng (A) and t he sl eeve (B) f r om t he
pi ni on shaf t (C).
28. Usi ng a cut t er or an equi val ent t ool , cut and r emove
t he f our seal r i ngs (A) f r om t he sl eeve. Be car ef ul not
t o damage t he edges of t he sl eeve gr ooves and out er
sur f ace when r emovi ng t he seal r i ngs.
29. Usi ng a cutter or an equi val ent t ool , cut t he val ve seal
ri ng (A) and O-ri ng (B) at t he cut t i ng gr oove posi t i on
(C) in t he pi ni on shaf t . Remove t he val ve seal ri ng and
O-r i ng. Be caref ul not to damage t he edges of t he
pi ni on shaf t gr oove and out er sur f ace when r emovi ng
t he val ve seal ri ng and O-r i ng.
Replace. ^
A
Replace.
30. Remove the val ve oi l sea! (A) and roller bear i ng (B)
out of t he val ve housi ng usi ng a hydr aul i c pr ess and
an appropri at e si ze s oc k et
B
Replace.
31. Cl ean t he di sassembl ed part s wi t h sol vent , and dry
t hem wi t h c ompr essed ai r. Do not di p rubber part s in
t he s ol v ent
(cont' d)
17-51
Hydrauli c Power Steering Components
Reassembl y
32. Appl y vi nyl t ape (A) to t he spl i nes and st epped port i on
of t he shaf t , and coat t he sur f ace of t he vi nyl t ape wi t h
power st eer i ng f l ui d.
Replace.
33. Fit t he new O-ri ng (B) in t he gr oove of t he pi ni on shaf t .
Then sl i de t he new val ve seal ri ng (C) over t he shaf t
and in t he gr oove on t he pi ni on shaf t .
34. Remove t he vi nyl t ape, and appl y power st eer i ng f l ui d
to t he sur f ace of t he val ve seal ri ng (A).
35. Appl y power st eer i ng f l ui d to t he i nsi de of t he val ve
seal ri ng si zi ng t ool . Set t he l arger di amet er end of t he
si zi ng tool over t he val ve seal ri ng, and move t he
si zi ng tool up and down sever al t i mes to make t he
val ve seal ri ng fit in t he pi ni on shaf t gr oove.
36. Remove t he si zi ng t ool , turn it over , sl i de t he smal l er
di amet er end over t he val ve seal ri ng. Move it up and
down sever al t i mes to make t he val ve seal ri ng fit
snugl y in t he pi ni on shaf t gr oove.
37. Appl y power st eer i ng f l ui d to t he sur f ace of t he sl eeve
seal ri ng gui de. Sl i p t wo new seal r i ngs (A) over t he
ri ng gui de f rom t he smal l er di amet er end, and expand
t hem. Install onl y t wo r i ngs at a t i me f r om each end of
t he pi ni on shaf t sl eeve (B).
Note t hese i t ems when i nst al l i ng t he seal ri ng:
Do not over -expand t he seal ri ng. Install t he r esi n
seal ri ngs wi t h c ar e so as not to damage t hem. Af t er
i nst al l at i on, make sur e you cont ract t he seal ri ngs
usi ng t he si zi ng t ool .
Ther e are t wo t ypes of sl eeve seal r i ngs; black and
br own. Do not mi x t he di fferent t ypes of ri ngs as
t hey are not compat i bl e.
A
38. Al i gn t he ri ng gui de wi t h each gr oove i n t he sl eeve,
and sl i de a sl eeve seal ri ng into each gr oove. After
i nst al l at i on, c ompr ess t he seal ri ngs wi t h your f i nger s
t empor ar i l y.
39. Appl y power st eer i ng f l ui d to t he seal r i ngs on t he
sl eeve, and to t he enti re i nsi de sur f ace of t he sl eeve
seal ri ng si zi ng t ool , t hen sl owl y i nsert t he sl eeve into
t he si zi ng t ool .
40. Move t he sl eeve back and forth sever al t i mes to make
sur e t he seal r i ngs fit snugl y in t he sl eeve. Make sur e
t he seal ri ngs are not t wi st ed.
17-52
41. Appl y power st eer i ng f l ui d to t he sur f ace of t he pi ni on
shaf t (A). Sl i de t he sl eeve (B) ont o t he pi ni on shaf t by
al i gni ng t he l ocat i ng pi n (C) on t he pi ni on shaf t wi t h
t he cut out (D) in t he sl eeve. Then i nst al l t he new snap
ri ng (E) sec ur el y in t he pi ni on shaf t gr oove. Be caref ul
not to damage t he val ve seal ri ng when i nst al l i ng t he
sl eeve.
C
42. Appl y power st eer i ng flui d to t he seal ri ng lip of t he
new val ve oi l seal (A), t hen i nst al l t he seal in t he val ve
housi ng (B) usi ng a hydr aul i c pr ess and dr i ver handl e.
Install t he seal wi t h its gr ooved si de f aci ng t he t ool .
43. Pr ess t he new rol l er beari ng (C) into t he val ve housi ng
wi t h a hydr aul i c pr ess and at t achment .
44. Appl y vi nyl t ape (A) to t he pi ni on shaf t /sl eeve (B), t hen
coat t he vi nyl t ape wi t h power st eer i ng f l ui d.
45. Insert t he pi ni on shaf t /sl eeve i nto t he val ve housi ng
(C). Be caref ul not to damage t he val ve seal ri ngs (D).
46. Remove t he vi nyl t ape f r om t he pi ni on shaf t , t hen
r emove any r esi due f r om t he t ape adhesi ve.
47. Pr ess t he new val ve oi l seal (A) into t he val ve housi ng
wi t h a hydr aul i c pr ess. Chec k that t he pi ni on
shaf t /sl eeve t ur ns smoot hl y by hand after i nst al l i ng it.
48. Coat t he pi st on seal ri ng gui de wi t h power st eeri ng
f l ui d, t hen sl i de it onto t he rack, bi g end fi rst.
(cont' d)
17-53
Hydr aui e Po wer St eeri ng Component s
Steering Gear box Overhaul fcont' d)
49. Posi t i on t he new O-ri ng (A) and new pi st on seal ri ng
(B) on t he pi st on seal ri ng gui de, t hen sl i de t hem
down t owar d t he bi g end of t he t ool .
Note t hese i t ems dur i ng r eassembl y:
Do not over expand t he r esi n seal r i ngs. Inst al l t he
r esi n seal r i ngs wi t h c ar e s o as not to damage t hem
Af t er i nst al l at i on, make sur e you cont ract t he seal
ri ng usi ng t he si zi ng t ool .
Repl ac e t he pi st on' s O-ri ng and seal ri ng as a set .
50. Pull t he O-ri ng off into t he pi st on gr oove, t hen pull t he
pi st on seal ri ng off into t he pi st on gr oove on top of t he
O-r i ng.
51. Coat t he pi st on seal ri ng (A) and t he i nsi de of t he
pi st on seal ri ng si zi ng t ool wi t h power st eer i ng f l ui d,
t hen car ef ul l y sl i de t he t ool onto t he rack and over t he
pi st on seal ri ng.
07HAG-SF 1O2OA or
07HAG-SF 10200
52. Move t he si zi ng t ool back and forth sever al t i mes to
make t he pi st on seal ri ng fit snugl y i n t he pi st on.
53. Wr ap vi nyl t ape ar ound t he rack t eet h and rack end
edges, t hen coat t he sur f ace of t he t ape wi t h power
st eer i ng f l ui d. Make sur e t hat t he vi nyl t ape i s
wr apped car ef ul l y s o that t her e i s no st epped port i on.
54. Coat t he i nsi de sur f ace of t he new cyl i nder end seal
(A) wi t h power st eer i ng f l ui d, t hen i nst all it onto t he
st eer i ng rack wi t h i ts gr ooved si de t owar d t he pi st on.
When i nst al l i ng t he cyl i nder end s eal , be caref ul not to
damage t he lip of t he s eal wi t h t he edges or t eet h of
t he st eer i ng rack.
A
Replace.
55. Remove t he vi nyl t ape f r om t he st eer i ng rack, t hen
r emove any adhesi ve r esi due.
17-54
58. Install t he new backup ri ng (A) on t he st eer i ng rack,
t hen pl ace t he backup r i ng and cyl i nder end seal (B)
agai nst t he pi st on (C).
Repl,
57. Appl y st eer i ng gr ease to t he st eer i ng rack t eet h, t hen
i nsert t he st eer i ng rack into t he gear box housi ng. Be
caref ul not to damage t he i nner sur f ace of t he cyl i nder
wal l wi t h t he rack edges.
58. Insert an appr opr i at e si ze socket (A) onto t he st eer i ng
rack as s hown.
59. Inst al l t he backup ri ng (B) and cyl i nder end seal (C)
into t he bottom of t he cyl i nder by pr essi ng on t he t ool
wi t h a pr ess. Do not push on t he tool wi t h exc essi ve
f or ce as it may damage t he backup ri ng and cyl i nder
end seal .
60. Remove t he t ool , and cent er t he st eer i ng rack.
61. Coat t he i nsi de sur f ace of the new cyl i nder end seal
(A) and st eer i ng rack wi t h power st eer i ng f l ui d, t hen
i nst al l t he cyl i nder end seal onto t he st eer i ng rack
wi t h its gr ooved si de t owar d t he cyl i nder .
62. Push in t he cyl i nder end seal wi t h your f i nger. Be
caref ul not to damage the sur f ace of t he seal wi t h t he
t hr eads and bur r s at the st aked posi t i on of t he
cyl i nder housi ng.
(cont ' d)
17-55
wooden bl ocks (B) t o a wor k bench as s hown. Do not
vi se.
64. Coat t he i nsi de sur f ac e of t he cyl i nder end (A) wi t h
power st eer i ng f l ui d, t hen i nst al l t he cyl i nder end by
sc r ewi ng it into t he cyl i nder (B). Ti ght en t he cyl i nder
end to t he speci f i ed t or que.
65. St ake t he poi nt of t he cyl i nder s hown (opposi t e f r om
wher e t he st ake was r emoved dur i ng di sassembl y).
66. Coat t he new O-ri ng (A) wi t h st eer i ng gr ease, and
caref ul l y fit it on t he val ve housi ng.
D
67. Appl y st eer i ng gr ease to t he ball bear i ng (B) i n t he
gear box housi ng, t hen i nst al l t he val ve body uni t (C)
by engagi ng t he gear s. Note t he val ve body uni t
i nst al l at i on posi t i on (di rect i on of t he li ne
c onnec t i ons).
68. Loosel y i nst al l t he f l ange bol t s (D).
69. Install cyl i nder li ne A and B to t he st eer i ng gear box.
Note t hese i t ems duri ng r eassembl y:
Thor oughl y cl ean t he j oi nt s of t he cyl i nder l i nes.
The j oi nt s must be f ree of f or ei gn mat er i al .
Install t he cyl i nder l i nes by t i ght eni ng t he f l are nut s
by hand f i rst , t hen t i ght en t he f l are nut s to t he
A
(1.7 kgf-m, 12 I bfft)
17-56
70. Appl y st eer i ng gr ease to t he sl i di ng sur f ace of t he rack
gui de (A), and i nst al l it onto t he gear box housi ng.
B
25 N-m
(2.5 kgf m, 18 I bfft)
71. Remove t he ol d seal ant f rom t he rack gui de sc r ew (B),
t hen appl y new seal ant (Three Bond 1215 or
Loct i t e 5699) to t he mi ddl e of t he t hr eads. Install the
spr i ng (C), rack gui de sc r ew, and locknut (D).
NOTE: If mor e t han 5 mi nut es have passed after
appl yi ng t he seal ant , r emove t he ol d seal ant and
r esi due, and r eappl y new sealant,. .
72. Adj ust t he rack gui de s c r ew (see page 17-17). After
adj ust i ng, check t hat t he rack moves smoot hl y by
sl i di ng it ri ght and left.
wooden bl ocks (B) to a wor k bench as s hown. Do not
c l amp t he cyl i nder part of t he gear box housi ng in a
vi se.
74. Install a new rubber st op (A) and a new lock washer
(B). Al i gn t he lock washer t abs (C) wi th t he sl ot s (D) on
t he rack end (E) whi l e hol di ng the lock washer in
pl ace. Repeat t hi s st ep f or t he other si de of the rack.
Replace.
75. Hold t he flat sur f ace sec t i ons of the st eeri ng rack wi t h
one wr enc h, and ti ghten both rack ends wi t h anot her
wr enc h. Be caref ul not to damage the rack sur f ace
wi t h t he wr enc h.
76. Bend t he lock washer (A) back agai nst the flat spot s
on t he rack end j oi nt housi ng.
(cont' d)
17-57
Steering Gearbox Overhaul (cont'd)
77. Appl y mul t i pur pose gr ease to t he c i r c umf er enc e of
t he rack end j oi nt housi ng (A).
78. Appl y d n y n i . uudi uf si l i cone gr ease (P/N 08798-9013)
to t he boot gr ooves (B) on t he rack end.
t er mi nal part of t he c onnec t or s, espec i al l y if you have
si l i cone gr ease on your hands or gl oves.
79. Cent er t he st eer i ng rack wi t hi n its st r oke.
80. Install t he new sel f -l ocki ng nut (A) ont o t he pi ni on
shaf t end, and t i ght en to t he speci f i ed t or que.
A
30 N-m
(3.1 k g f m, 22 Ibf f t )
Replace.
C
70 N m
(7.1 k g f m, 51 Ibf f t )
Replace.
81, Remove t he ol d seal ant f r om t he t hr eads on t he
gear box housi ng (B), and appl y new seal ant (Thr ee
Bond 1215 or Loct i t e 5699) all t he way ar ound t he
t hr eads on t he gear box housi ng and t he new end pl ug
(C). Inst al l t he end pl ug onto t he gear box housi ng, and
t i ght en it to t he speci f i ed t or que.
NOTE: If mor e t han 5 mi nut es have passed after
appl yi ng t he seal ant , r emove t he ol d seal ant and
r esi due, and r eappl y new seal ant .
82. Ti ght en t he f l ange bol t s (A) t o t he speci f i ed t or que.
20 N-m (2.0 k g f m, 14 Ibf f t )
3 . Af t er t i ght eni ng, use a drift to st ake (A) t he gear box
housi ng shoul der agai nst t he end pl ug (B).
1.0 mm
(0.04 i n)
B
Replace,
17-58
84. Cl ean off any gr ease or cont ami nat i on f r om t he boot
i nst al l at i on gr ooves (A) ar ound t he gear box housi ng.
Install t he boot s (B) on t he rack ends wi t h t he t i e-rod
cl i ps (C), and fit t he boot end i n t he i nst al l at i on
gr ooves i n t he housi ng properl y.
D
85. After i nst al l i ng t he boot s, wi pe t he gr ease off t he
t hr eaded sect i on (D) of t he rack end.
86. Install t he new boot bands (A) by al i gni ng t he t abs (B)
wi t h t he hol es (C) on t he band.
A
Replace.
87. Cl ose t he ear porti on (A) of t he boot band (B) wi t h
c ommer c i al l y avai l abl e pi nc er s, Oet i ker 1098 or
equi val ent (C).
88. Sl i de t he rack ri ght and left to be cert ai n that t he boot s
ar e not def or med or t wi st ed.
89. Inst al l t he t i e-rod end to t he rack end.
90. Inst al l t he st eer i ng gear box (see page 17-60).
1 3
Steering Gearbox installation
Spec i al To o l s Requi r ed
Pr ogr am, 888-424-6857.
S RS c omponent l ocat i ons: 4-door (see page 24-21),
ser vi c e.
1. Bef ore i nst al l i ng t he st eer i ng gear box, make sur e that
no power st eer i ng f l ui d i s on t he mat i ng sur f ac e of t he
st eer i ng gear box and t he front subf r ame. To pr event
t he gear box mount i ng bolts f r om l ooseni ng after t he
i nst al l at i on, r emove any power st eer i ng f l ui d f r om t he
mount c ushi ons and t he bolt hol es.
2. Wr ap vi nyl t ape over t he spl i nes on t he pi ni on shaf t
(A).
3. Install t he pi ni on shaf t gr ommet (B). Al i gn t he sl ot ,(C)
i n t he pi ni on shaf t gr ommet wi t h t he lug porti on (D)
on t he val ve housi ng. Make sur e t her e i s no gap
bet ween t he gr ommet and t he val ve housi ng.
4. Tur n t he lip (A) of t he pi ni on shaf t gr ommet .
5. Sl i de t he st eer i ng gear box (B) bet ween t he front
subf r ame and t he body f r om t he dr i ver ' s si de.
6. Car ef ul l y move t he st eer i ng gear box (A) t owar d t he
passenger ' s si de unti l t he pi ni on shaf t c l ear s t he
f ender wel l openi ng on t he body.
7. Cont i nue movi ng t he gear box t owar d t he passenger ' s
si de unti l t he st eer i ng gear box i s in posi t i on.
17-60
8. Install t he was her s (A), t he sti ffener pl at es (B), t he new
mount i ng bol t s ( C) , and t he f l ange bol t s (D) on t he
dr i ver ' s si de of the gear box. Then l oosel y i nst al l t he
mount i ng bol t s and t he f l ange bol t s.
10 x 1.25 mm
59 N m (6.0 k g f m, 43 Ibf f t )
14 x 1.5 mm
74 N m
(7.5 k g f m,
54 Ibf f t )
Replace.
10 x 1.25 mm
59 N m
(6.0 k g f m,
43 Ibf f t )
9. Posi t i on t he cut out (A) on t he mount i ng c ushi on (B) as
s hown, and i nst al l it on t he passenger ' s si de of t he
st eer i ng gear box.
25 mm
10. Install t he gear box mount i ng bracket (C) over t he
mount i ng c ushi on, and t i ght en t he f l ange bol t s (D) to
t he speci f i ed t or que.
11. Ti ght en t he f l ange bol t s on t he dr i ver ' s si de of t he
st eer i ng gear box to t he speci f i ed t orque al t ernat el y in
t wo st eps.
12. Install t he f ront subf r ame front st i f f eners (A) and t he
front subf r ame rear st i f f eners (B), t hen l oosel y i nst al l
t he new front subf r ame mount i ng bolts (C), t he new
f l ange bolts (D), and t he f l ange bol t s ( E) .
12 x 1.25 mm
14 x 1.5 mm
Replace.
VSB02C000016
14x 1.5 mm
Replace.
12 x 1.25 mm
Replace.
12 x 1.25 mm
Replace.
14 x 1.5 mm
Replace.
13. Al i gn the f ront subf r ame usi ng t he 15.7 mm end of t he
subf r ame al i gnment pi n. Ver t i cal l y i nst al l t he
subf r ame al i gnment pi n, and al i gn t he ri ght r ear
cor ner of t he f ront subf r ame and t he vehi c l e f r ame
hol es, t hen l oosel y ti ghten t he subf r ame mount i ng
bolt (A) until t he front subf r ame cont act s t he body
f r ame.
070AG-S J AA10S
/ \ ^ / ^ rs^ i \
14 x 1.5 mm
Replace.
14. Loosel y t i ght en t he left rear subf r ame mount i ng bolt
wi t h t he s ame pr ocedur e as t he ri ght rear usi ng t he
subf r ame al i gnment pi n.
(cont' d)
17-61
Steering Gearbox installation (cont' d)
15. Ti ght en t he ri ght rear subf r ame mount i ng bolt (A) to
t he speci f i ed t or que wi t h t he subf r ame al i gnment pi n
i nst al l ed.
16. Ti ght en t he left r ear subf r ame mount i ng bolt to t he
speci f i ed torque wi t h t he subf r ame al i gnment pi n
i nst al l ed.
17. Ti ght en t he subf r ame mount i ng bolts (A) to t he
(10.5 k g f m, 75.9 Ibf f t )
Replace.
18. Ti ght en t he f l ange bolts (B) to t he speci f i ed t or que.
19. Ti ght en t he f l ange bol t s (A) t o t he speci f i ed t or que.
20. Inst al l t he f l ange nut s (A) to t he l ower t r ansmi ssi on
mount , and t i ght en t hem to t he speci f i ed t or que.
A
10 x 1.25 mm
44 N-m (4.5 kgf-m, 33 Ibf f t )
17-62
21. Install t he new f ront subf r ame mi ddl e mount i ng bolts 24. A/T: Install t he rear engi ne mount upper bracket (A) to
on t he dr i ver ' s si de, and t i ght en t hem to t he speci f i ed t he base bracket (B) wi t h a new mount i ng bolt (C) and
t or que. mount i ng bol t s (D), and t i ght en t hem to t he speci f i ed
t or que.
44 N m (4.5 kgf m, 33 I bfft)
Replace.
22. Install t he new front subf r ame mi ddl e mount i ng bol t s
on t he passenger ' s si de, and ti ghten t hem to t he
23. Lower t he t r ansmi ssi on j ack support i ng t he f ront
subf r ame.
(cont' d)
17-63
Steering Gearbox Installati on (cont' d)
25. Install t he rear engi ne mount (A) wi t h new mount i ng
bol t s, and li ghtly t i ght en t hem.
M/ T
12 x 1.25 mm 12 x 1.25 mm
78 N m (8.0 kgf -m, 58 Ibf f t ) 78 N m
Replace. (8.0 k g f m, 58 Ibf f t )
26. Remove t he engi ne suppor t hanger , t he hanger
bal ance bar, and t he hanger adapt er set .
27. Ti ght en t he rear engi ne mount mount i ng bol t s to t he
28. i nst al l t he new damper fork mount i ng bolt (A) and t he
new mount i ng nut (B), and l oosel y t i ght en t he nut.
64 N-m
(6.5 k g f m, 47 Ibf f t )
Replace.
29. Install exhaust pi pe A (see page 9-9).
30. Install t he front spl ash shi el d (see page 20-291).
31. Lower t he vehi cl e.
32. On both si des, wi pe off any gr ease cont ami nat i on
f rom t he ball j oi nt t aper ed sect i on and t hr eads.
Rec onnec t t he ti e-rod end ball j oi nt (A) to t he knuckl e.
Install t he nut (B), and ti ghten it to t he speci f i ed
t or que.
(5.5 k g f m, 40 Ibf f t )
33. Install a new cotter pi n (C), and bend it as shown.
34. Loosel y connect t he return li ne and i nlet li ne to t he
val ve housi ng by hand.
17-64
35. Inst al l t he return li ne cl amp bolt (A), and ti ghten it t o
^ A
6 M 1.0 mm
9.8 N-m (1.0 kgf m, 7.2 Ibf-ft)
C
36. Inst al l t he return li ne (B) to t he ret urn hose c l amp (C),
and c l amp it.
37. Inst al l t he i nlet li ne c l amp bracket bolt (A) and t he
ret urn hose cl amp bracket bolt (B), and ti ghten t hem
to t he speci f i ed t orque.
38. Inst al l t he return hose (C) to t he ret urn hose c l amp (D),
and c l amp it.
39. Install t he i nlet li ne c l amp bracket bolt (A) and t he
ret urn li ne c l amp bolt (B), and t i ght en t hem to t he
(4.8 k g f m, 35 Ibf-ft) (2.9 k g f m, 21 Ibf-ft)
40. Ti ght en t he f l are nut s to t he speci f i ed t or que.
41. Install t he P/S heat shi el d (A) wi t h t he f l ange bol t s, and
t i ght en t hem to t he speci f i ed t or que.
6 x 1.0 mm
9.8 N-m
(1.0 k g f m,
7.2 Ibf-ft)
42. Install t he st rut br ace (see page 20-306).
43. Install t he front gri l l e cover :
44. Pl ace a f loor j ack under t he l ower ar m, and r ai se t he
suspensi on t o l oad it wi t h t he vehi c l e' s wei ght .Do not
pl ace t he j ack agai nst t he ball j oi nt pi n of t he knuckl e.
45. Ti ght en t he damper fork mount i ng nut whi l e hol di ng
t he mount i ng bol d t o t he speci f i ed t orque (see st ep
28).
(cont' d)
17-65
Steering Gear box installation (cont' d)
46. Install t he front wheel s , t hen set t he wheel s i n t he
st rai ght ahead posi t i on.
NOTE: Bef ore i nst al l i ng t he wheel , cl ean t he mat i ng '
sur f ac es of t he brake di sc and t he i nsi de of t he wheel .
47. Cent er t he st eer i ng rack wi t hi n its st roke.
48. Loosen t he upper st eer i ng j oi nt bolt (A), and sl i p t he
l ower end of t he st eer i ng j oi nt (B) onto t he pi ni on
shaf t (C) t aki ng car e to al i gn t he gap (D) wi t hi n t he
angl e.
NOTE: Pi ck up t he t abs (E) of t he pi ni on shaf t
gr ommet , and t urn up t he lip of t he pi ni on shaf t
gr ommet sec ur el y in pl ace. Make sur e t hat li ght does
not ent er f r om t he spac e bet ween t he pi ni on shaf t
gr ommet and t he body.
49. Al i gn t he bolt hol e (A) on t he st eeri ng j oi nt wi t h t he
gr oove (B) ar ound t he pi ni on shaf t , t hen l oosel y
i nst al l t he l ower st eer i ng j oi nt bolt (C). Be sur e that t he
j oi nt bolt i s sec ur el y in t he gr oove in t he pi ni on shaf t .
50. Pull on t he st eer i ng j oi nt to make sur e that t he
st eer i ng j oi nt i s f ully seat ed, t hen ti ghten t he l ower
j oi nt bolt to t he speci f i ed t or que.
51. Ti ght en t he upper st eer i ng j oi nt bolt (D) to t he
speci f i ed t or que,
52. Inst al l t he st eer i ng j oi nt c over (A).
53. Install t he st eer i ng wheel (see page 17-9), and t he
dr i ver ' s ai r bag (see page 24-211).
17-66
54. Do t he bat t ery t er mi nal r econnect i on pr ocedur e (see
Tur n t he i gni t i on swi t ch to ON (II) and check t hat t he
S RS i ndi cat or c omes on f or about 6 s ec onds , and
t hen goes off.
properl y.
properl y.
55. Fi ll t he syst em wi t h power st eer i ng f l ui d, and bl eed ai r
f r om t he syst em (see page 17-28).
56. Af t er i nst al l at i on, check t hese i t ems.
St ar t t he engi ne, al l ow it to i dl e, and t urn t he
st eer i ng wheel f r om lock to lock sever al t i mes to
war m up t he f l ui d. Check t he gear box f or l eaks (see
page 17-27).
Chec k t he st eer i ng wheel spoke angl e.
If st eer i ng spoke angl es to t he ri ght and left ar e not
equal (st eer i ng wheel and rack ar e not cent er ed),
cor r ect t he engagement of t he j oi nt /pi ni on shaf t
ser r at i ons.
Set t he st eer i ng col umn to t he cent er tilt posi t i on,
and to t he cent er t el escopi c posi t i on, t hen do t he
f ront t oe i nspect i on (see page 18-5).
Suspension
Suspensi on
TPMS
Suspension
Front and Rear Suspensi on
:
Special Tools ..18-2
Co mpo nent Location I n d e x : . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18- 3 .
Wheel Al i gnment .. 18-5
Wheel B earing E nd Play I ns pecti on. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-8
Wheel Runout I ns pecti on. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-8
Wheel B olt R epl acement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-9
B al l J oi nt R emoval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-10
Ball J oint B oot I nspecti on/Repl acement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-11
Front Suspensi on
:
K nuckle/ Hub /Wheel B earing Repl acement. . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-13
Upper Arm R epl acement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-19
Lower Arm Removal /I nstal l ati on. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-21
Stabilizer Link Removal/I nstallation 18-24
Stabilizer Bar R epl acement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18- 25
Damper/Spring Removal and I ns t al l at i o n- ............. 18-31
Damper/Spring Disassembly, I nspection, and
Reassembly. 18-34
Rear Suspensi on
K nuckle/ Hub B earing Unit Replacement. 18-38
Upper Arm R epl acement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-43
Lower Arm A Replacement. 18-45
Control Arm R epl acement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18- 46
- Lower Arm B Repl ac ement 18-47
Stabilizer Link Removal/I nstallation 18-47
Stabilizer Bar Replacement 18-48
Damper/Spring Removal and I ns tal l ati on. . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-49
Damper/Spring Disassembly, I nspection, and
Reassembly 18-52
Speci al Tool s
070AF-TA0A100 Bushi ng Dr i ver
070AF-TA0A220 Bushi ng Rec ei ver Set 1
070AG-SJA0300 Cl i p Gui de, 45 mm 1
070AG-S J AA1 OS Subf r ame Al i gnment Pi n 1
07746-0010600 At t achment , 72 x 75 mm 1
07749-0010000 Dri ver Handl e, 15 x 135L 1
07965-SD90100 Suppor t Base 1
07974-SA50700 Cl i p Gui de, 41 mm 1

07AAE-S J AA100 Bal l Joi nt Thr ead Prot ect or, 14 mm 1
07AAF-SDAA100 Bal l Joi nt Thr ead Prot ect or, 12 mm 1
07AAF-SECA120 Bal l Joi nt Thr ead Prot ect or, 10 mm 1
07GAF-SD4A100 Hub Di s/ Assy Tool 1

07MAC-SL0A102 Bal l Joi nt Remover , 32 mm 1
07MAC-SL0A202 Bal l Joi nt Remover , 28 mm 1
07ZAD-PNA0100 . Oi l Seal Dri ver At t achment , 96 mm 1

18-2
l r o . t Suspensi on
DAMPER/ S PRI NG
Di sassembl y, Inspec t i on, and Reas s embl y , page 18-34
UPPER ARM
BAL L J OI NT
Boot Inspec t i on/Repl ac ement , page 18-11
K NUCK L E / HUB /
WHEEL BEARI NG
(MAGNETI C ENCODER)
Knuckl e/Hub Repl ac ement , page 18-14
Wheel Bear i ng Repl ac ement , page 18-17
BAL L J OI NT
STABI L I ZER BAR
STABI L I ZER LINK
L OWER ARM
Compl i anc e Bushi ng Repl ac ement , page 18-23
WHEEL BOL T
18-3
Rear Suspensi on
DAMPER/SPRING
Di sassembl y, Inspect i on, and Reassembl y, page 18-52
UPPER ARM
BALL JOINT
KNUCKLE/
HUB BEARING UNIT
(MAGNETIC ENCODER)
Hub Bear i ng Uni t Repl ac ement , page 18-39
Knuckl e Repl ac ement , page 18-40
STABILIZER BAR
STABILIZER LINK
LOWER ARM B
LOWER ARM A
CONTROL ARM
WHEEL BOLT
18-4
Wheel Al i gnment
The suspensi on can be adj ust ed f or front and rear t oe.
Pre-Al i gnment Chec ks
For proper i nspect i on and adj ust ment of t he wheel ;
al i gnment , do t hese c hec ks:
1. Rel ease t he parki ng brake-to avoi d an Incorrect
measur ement .
2. Make sur e t he suspensi on is not modi f i ed.
3. Make sur e t he fuel tank i s f ul l , and t hat t he spar e t i re,
t he j ack, and t he tool s ar e in pl ace on t he vehi c l e.
4. Check t he t i re si ze and tire pr essur e.
Ti r e si ze (4-door):
IX, L X- P, L X PZ E V, and LX-P PZEV model s:
Front / Rear: P215/ 60R16 94H ..
E X, EX- L , E X PZ E V, and EX- L PZEV model s:
Front/Rear:-P225/50B.i7 93V
Ti r e si ze (2-door):
Front / Rear: P225/ 50R17 93V
Tire pres s ure(4-door) (at cold):
L X, L X- P, LX PZEV, and L X-P PZEV models :
Front / Rear: 210 kPa(2.1 kgf/ cm
2
,30 ps i)
EX, EX- L , EX PZEV, and EX- L PZEV models :
2
,32 ps i) "
. Tire pres s ure(2-door) (at cold):
2
,32 ps i)
5. Check t he runout of t he wheel s and t i res (see page
18-8).
6. Chec k t he suspensi on ball j oi nt s (Rai se and suppor t
t he vehi c l e (see page 1-13). Hol d a ti re wi t h your
hands, and move it up and down and ri ght and left to
check for movement) .
7. Bef ore doi ng al i gnment i nspec t i ons, be sur e t o
r emove all ext r a wei ght f r om t he vehi c l e, and no one
shoul d be i nsi de t he vehi cl e (dri ver or passenger s).
8. Lower t he vehi c l e to gr ound. Bounc e t he vehi c l e up
and down sever al t i mes to st abi l i ze t he suspensi on.
9. Check t hat t he st eer i ng c ol umn i s set at t he cent er tilt
and t el esc opi c posi t i on.
Cast er Inspect i on
Us e c ommer c i al l y avai l abl e comput er i zed f our wheel
al i gnment equi pment to measur e wheel al i gnment
(cast er , c amber , t oe, and t urni ng angl e). Fol l ow t he
equi pment manuf act ur er ' s i nst r uct i ons.
1. Check t he c ast er angl e.
Cas t er angle:
4-door: 3 48 '
+0
2 5
-, 0 05-
2-door: 3 47
, + 0
2 5
, o0 5
(Maximumdifference bet ween t h e righ t and left
si de: 0 45 *)
If t he measur ement i s wi t hi n speci f i cat i ons,
measur e t he c amber angl e.
If t he measur ement i s not wi t hi n speci f i cat i ons,
check f or bent or damaged suspensi on
c omponent s.
(cont' d)
18-5
Wheel Alignment (cont'd)
Camber Inspect i on
Us e c ommer c i al l y avai l abl e comput er i zed f our wheel
1. Chec k t he c amber angl e.
Camber angl e:
Fr ont : 0 00
, + 3
-
4 5
Rear : - 1 0 0
, + m

(Maxi mum di f f er ence bet ween t he r i ght and left
si de: 0 30 ')
If t he measur ement i s wi t hi n spec i f i c at i ons,
measur e t he t oe-i n.
If t he measur ement i s not wi t hi n speci f i cat i ons,
check f or bent or damaged suspensi on
c omponent s.
Front Toe Inspect i on/Adj ust ment
Use c ommer c i al l y avai l abl e comput er i zed f our wheel
al i gnment equi pment t o measur e wheel al i gnment
1. Set t he st eer i ng c ol umn to t he mi ddl e tilt and
t el esc opi c posi t i ons. Cent er t he st eer i ng wheel
spokes, and i nst al l a st eer i ng wheel hol der t ool .
2. Chec k t he t oe wi t h t he wheel s poi nt ed st rai ght ahead.
Fr ont t oe-i n: 0 2 mm ( 00. 08 i n)
If adj ust ment i s r equi r ed, go to st ep 3.
If no adj ust ment i s r equi r ed, go to rear t oe
i nspect i on/adj ust ment .
3. Loosen t he t i e-rod l ocknut s (A) whi l e hol di ng t he flat
sur f ace sec t i ons (B) of t he t i e-rod end wi t h a wr enc h,
and t ur n both t i e-r ods (C) unti l t he f ront t oe i s wi t hi n
speci f i cat i ons.
4. Af t er adj ust i ng, t i ght en t he t i e-rod l ocknut s to t he
speci f i ed t or que. Reposi t i on t he r ack-end boot if it i s
t wi st ed or di spl ac ed.
5. Go to r ear t oe i nspect i on/adj ust ment .
18-6
Rear Toe I ns pect ion/ Adj us t ment
Use commer ci al l y avai l abl e comput er i zed f our wheel
alignment equipmentto measure wheel alignment
equi pment manuf act ur er ' s i nst ruct i ons.
1. Rel ease t he parki ng brake to avoi d an i ncor r ect
measur ement .
2. Check the t oe.
Rear t oe-i n: 2 2 mm (0.08 +0.08 i n)
If adj ust ment i s r equi r ed, go to st ep 3.
If no adj ust ment i s r equi r ed, go to t ur ni ng angl e
i nspect i on.
3. Hold t he adj ust i ng bolt (A) on t he rear cont rol ar m (B),
and l oosen t he sel f -l ocki ng nut (C).
B
4. Repl ace t he sel f -l ocki ng nut wi t h a new one, and
li ghtly ti ghten it.
NOTE: Al ways use a new sel f -l ocki ng nut whenever it
has been t i ght ened to t he speci f i ed t orque.
5. Adj ust the rear toe by t urni ng t he adj ust i ng bolt unti l
t he t oe i s correct .
6. Ti ght en t he sel f -l ocki ng nut whi l e hol di ng t he
adj ust i ng bolt to t he speci f i ed t or que.
Turni ngAngl e Inspect i on
Use c ommer c i al l y avai l abl e comput er i zed f our wheel
(cast er , c amber , t oe, and t urni ng angl e). Fol l ow the
equi pment manuf act ur er ' s i nst ruct i ons.
1. Tur n t he wheel ri ght and left whi l e appl yi ng t he brake,
and measur e t he t urni ng angl e of both wheel s.
Tur ni ng angl e:
Inwar d: 39 00' 2
Out war d (r ef er ence): 31 50'
2. If t he measur ement i s not wi t hi n t he speci f i cat i ons,
even up both si des of the ti e-rod t hr eaded sect i on
length whi l e adj ust i ng t he front t oe. If it i s cor r ect , but
t he t urni ng angl e i s not wi t hi n t he speci f i cat i ons,
check for bent or damaged suspensi on c omponent s.
18-7
Wheel Bearing End Play Inspection Wheel Runout Inspection
1. Rai se and suppor t t he vehi c l e (see page 1-13).
2. Remove t he wheel s.
3 . Inst al l sui t abl e flat was her s (A) and t he wheel nut s.
Ti ght en t he nut s to t he speci f i ed t or que to hol d t he
brake di sc sec ur el y agai nst t he hub.
Fr ont
108 N-m
(11.0 k g f m, 80 Ibf-ft)
Rear
108 N-m
(11.0 kgf- m, 80 Ibf-ft)
4. At t ach t he di al gauge. Pl ace t he di al gauge agai nst t he
hub f l ange.
5. Measur e t he bear i ng end pl ay whi l e movi ng t he brake
di sc i nwar d and out war d.
Wheel bear i ng end pl ay:
Fr ont /Rear : 00.05 mm (00.002 i n)
6. If t he beari ng end pl ay measur ement i s mor e t han t he
st andar d, r epl ace t he wheel bear i ng or t he hub
bear i ng uni t.
1. Rai se and suppor t t he vehi c l e (see page 1 -13).
2. Chec k f or a bent or def or med wheel .
3. Set up t he di al gauge as s hown, and measur e t he
axi al runout by t urni ng t he wheel .
Fr ont and r ear wheel axi al r unout :
St andar d:
St eel wheel : 01.0 mm (00.04 i n)
Al umi num wheel : 00.7 mm (00.03 i n)
Ser vi c e l i mi t : 2.0 mm (0.08 i n)
4. Reset t he di al gauge to t he posi t i on s hown, and
measur e t he radi al runout .
Fr ont and r ear wheel r adi al r unout :
St andar d:
St eel wheel : 01.0 mm (00.04 i n)
Al umi num wheel : 00.7 mm (00.03 i n)
5. If t he wheel runout i s not wi t hi n t he speci f i cat i on,
c hec k t he wheel bear i ng end pl ay (see page 18-8), and
make sur e t he mat i ng sur f ac es on t he brake di sc and
t he i nsi de of t he wheel ar e c l ean.
6. If t he bear i ng end play i s wi t hi n t he speci f i cat i on but
t he wheel runout i s mor e t han t he ser vi c e li mi t,
r epl ace t he wheel .
18-8
Wheel Bolt Replacement
B ai l Joi nt Remover , 28 mm 07MAC-SL0A202
1 NOTICE 1
Do not use a hammer or i mpact t ool s (pneumat i c or
el ect ri c) to r emove and i nst al l t he wheel bol t s.
Be caref ul not to damage t he t hr eads of t he wheel
bol t s.
Front
1. Remove t he front hub (see page 18-14).
2. Separ at e t he wheel bolt (A) f r om t he hub (B) usi ng a
hydr aul i c pr ess. Suppor t t he hub wi t h hydr aul i c pr ess
at t achment s (C) or equi val ent t ool s.
NOTE: Bef or e i nst al l i ng t he new wheel bolt, c l ean t he
mat i ng sur f ac es on t he bolt and t he hub.
P r e s s
3. Insert t he new wheel bolt into t he hub whi l e al i gni ng
t he spl i ned sur f ac es on t he hub hol e wi t h t he wheel
bolt.
NOTE:
Degr ease t he ar ea ar ound t he wheel bolt.
Make sur e t he wheel bolt i s i nst al l ed vert i cal l y i n
rel at i on to t he hub di sc sur f ac e.
4. Install t he wheel bolt usi ng a hydr aul i c pr ess unti l t he
wheel bolt shoul der i s f ul l y seat ed.
5. Install t he f ront hub (see page 18-14).
NOTE: If you cannot t i ght en t he wheel nut to t he
speci f i ed t or que when i nst al l i ng t he wheel , r epl ace
t he f ront hub as an assembl y.
Rear
2. Remove t he rear brake di sc (see page 19-34).
3. Separ at e t he wheel bolt (A) f r om t he hub (B) usi ng t he
ball j oi nt r emover (C), and keep t he j aw (D) of ball j oi nt
r emover vert i cal agai nst t he wheel bolt (see page
18-10).
NOTE:
If t he angl e of t he r emover agai nst t he wheel bolt i s
not squar e, r eadj ust t he ball j oi nt r emover by
t urni ng t he head (E) of t he adj ust i ng bolt (F).
Bef ore i nst al l i ng t he new wheel bolt, cl ean t he
mat i ng sur f ac es on t he bolt and t he hub.
(cont' d)
18-9
Wheel Bolt Replacement (cont'd) Ball Joint Removal
4. Insert t he new wheel bolt (A) i nto t he hub (B) whi l e
al i gni ng t he spl i ned sur f ac es (C) on t he hub hol e wi t h
t he wheel bolt. Adj ust t he measur ement (D) wi t h t he
was her s (P/N 94101-12800 or equi val ent ) (E), t hen
i nst al l a nut (P/N 90304-SC2-000 or equi val ent ) (F)
hand-t i ght .
NOTE:
Degr ease t he ar ea ar ound t he wheel bolt and t he
t hr eaded sect i on of t he nut.
Make sur e t he wheel bolt i s i nst al l ed ver t i cal l y in
rel at i on to t he hub di sc sur f ac e.
Do not i nst al l t he nut and t he was her s that have
been used as t ool s on a vehi c l e.
11 14 mm
( 0. 43- 0. 55 i n)
V
5. Ti ght en t he nut unti l t he wheel bolt i s dr awn f ul l y i nto
t he hub. Do not exc eed t he maxi mum t or que li mi t.
Make sur e t her e i s no gap (G) bet ween t he bolt and
t he hub.
Li mi t ed t or que:
108 N-m (11.0 kgf -m, 80 Ibf-ft) max.
6. Install t he rear brake di sc (see page 19-34).
NOTE:
If you cannot t i ght en t he wheel nut to t he speci f i ed
t or que when i nst al l i ng t he wheel , r epl ace t he r ear
hub bear i ng uni t as an assembl y.
Bef ore i nst al l i ng t he wheel , c l ean t he mat i ng
sur f ac es of t he brake di sc and t he i nsi de of t he
wheel .
Bal l Joi nt Thr ead Prot ect or, 12 mm 07AAF-SDAA100
Bal l Joi nt Thr ead Prot ect or, 10 mm 07AAF-SECA120
- Bal l Joi nt Remover , 32 mm 07MAC-SL0A102
NOTICE
Al ways use a ball j oi nt r emover to di sconnect a ball j oi nt .
Do not st ri ke t he housi ng or any ot her part of t he ball
j oi nt connect i on to di sconnect it.
1. Inst al l a hex nut (A) or t he ball j oi nt t hr ead prot ect or
ont o t he t hr eads of t he ball j oi nt (B).
NOTE: Usi ng a hex nut, make sur e t he nut is f l ush wi t h
t he ball j oi nt pi n end to prevent damage to t he
ui o u a u j v / n i i p u i c n ui v/ p i c v c i u <
t f - i f p oHor l o n r l r>f t h a K ol l i r >i nt n i r
07AAE-S J AA100,
07AAF-SDAA100, or
07AAF-SECA120
2. Appl y gr ease to t he ball j oi nt r emover on t he ar eas
shown (A). Thi s wi l l ease t he i nst al l at i on of t he t ool ,
and prevent damage to t he pr essur e bolt (B) t hr eads.
07MAC-SL 0A102 or 07MAC-SL 0A202
18-10
3. Loosen t he pr essur e bolt (A), and i nst al l t he ball j oi nt
r emover as shown. Insert the j aws car ef ul l y, maki ng
sur e not to damage t he ball j oi nt boot. Adj ust t he j aw
spac i ng by t urni ng t he adj ust i ng bolt (B).
NOTE: Fast en t he saf et y chai n (C) sec ur el y to a
suspensi on ar m or t he subf r ame (D). Do not f ast en it
to a brake li ne or wi r e har ness.
Q7 MAC- S L 0A102 or
07MAC-SL 0A202
4. After adj ust i ng t he adj ust i ng bolt, make sur e t he head
of t he adj ust i ng bolt is in t he posi t i on shown to al l ow
t he j aw (E) to pi vot.
5. Wi t h a wr enc h, t i ght en t he pr essur e bolt unti l t he ball
j oi nt pi n pops l oose f r om t he ball j oi nt connect i ng
hol e. If nec essar y, appl y penet rat i ng t ype l ubri cant to
l oosen t he ball j oi nt pi n.
NOTE: Do not use pneumat i c or el ect ri c t ool s on the
pr essur e bolt.
6. Remove t he ball j oi nt r emover , t hen r emove t he nut
or t he ball j oi nt t hr ead protector f r om t he end of t he
ball j oi nt pi n, and pull t he ball j oi nt out of t he ball j oi nt
connect i ng hol e. Inspect t he ball j oi nt boot , and
r epl ace it if damaged.
Bail Joint Boot
i nspect i on/Repl acement
Cl i p Gui de, 45 mm 070AG-SJA0300
. Cl i p Gui de, 41 mm 07974-SA50700
1. Chec k t he ball j oi nt boot f or weakness, damage,
c r ac ks, and gr ease l eaks.
NOTE:
If t he bal l j oi nt boot is damaged wi th gr ease l eaks,
r epl ace t he appropri at e part as an assembl y.
If t he ball j oi nt boot i s sof t and cr acked wi t hout
gr ease l eaks, go to st ep 2. Repl ace t he appropri at e
ball j oi nt boot.
2. Di sc onnec t t he appropri at e ball j oi nt c onnec t i on, and
r emove t he component i ncl udi ng t he ball j oi nt :
The f ront knuckle (see page 18-14)
The f ront upper ar m (see page 18-19)
The r ear upper ar m (see page 18-43)
3. Remove t he boot cl i p and t he boot.
4. Pack t he i nt eri or and lip (A) of a new boot wi t h gr ease.
Keep t he gr ease off of t he boot -t o-housi ng mat i ng
sur f ac es (B).
5. Pack f r esh gr ease into t he base (C). Do not let dirt or
ot her f orei gn mat er i al s get into t he boot.
6. Install t he boot on the ball j oi nt , t hen squeeze it gently
to f orce out any ai r, t hen wi pe t he gr ease off the
t aper ed porti on of t he ball j oi nt pi n (D).
(cont' d)
18-11
Ball Joint Boot Inspection/Replacement (cont'd)
7. The front knuckl e ball j oi nt or t he rear upper ar m ball
j oi nt : Adj ust t he dept h by t ur ni ng t he cl i p gui de unti l
its base i s j ust above t he gr oove ar ound (A) t he
bottom of t he boot. Then sl i de t he cl i p (B) over t he cl i p
gui de and into posi t i on on t he boot.
A
8. The front upper ar m ball j oi nt : Adj ust t he cl i p gui de
wi t h t he adj ust i ng bolt (A) unti l i ts base i s j ust above
t he gr oove ar ound (B) t he bot t om of t he boot. Then
sl i de t he cl i p (C) over t he cl i p gui de and into posi t i on
on t he boot.
9. Af t er i nst al l i ng a boot wi pe any gr ease off t he
exposed porti on of t he bal l j oi nt pi n.
10. Install all of t he r emoved par t s.
10** 12
Front Suspensi on
Knuckle/Hub/Wheel Bearing Replacement
Expl oded Vi ew
, K NUCK LE
Check for deformation and damage.
F RONT K NUCK LE
RING
Check for deformation
and damage.
BAL L J OI NT BOOT
Check for deterioration
and damage.
SPLASH GUARD
Check for corrosion,
deformation,
and damage.
Replace if rusted.
6x 1.0 mm
9.8 N m
(1.0 k g f m, 7.2 Ibf f t )
FRONT BRAK E DI SC
Check for wear, damage, and rust.
FL AT S CRE W
6 x 1.0 m m
9.8 N m
(1.0 k g f m,
7.2 Ibf f t )
FRONT HUB
Check for damage and cracks.
SPI NDL E NUT
26 x 1.5 m m
329 N m
(33.5 kgf -m, 242 Ibf ft)
Replace.
Apply a small amount
of engine oil to the seating
surface of the nut.
(cont'd)
18-13
Front Suspensi on
Knuckle/Hub/Wheel Bearing Replacement (cont' d)
- Ball Joi nt Thr ead Prot ect or, 14 mm 07AAE-SJ AA100
Bal l Joi nt Thr ead Prot ect or, 12 m m 07AAF-SDAA100
Ball Joi nt Thr ead Prot ect or, 10 m m 07AAF-SECA120
- Bal l Joi nt Remover , 28 mm 07MAC-SL0A202
Hub Di s/ Assy Tool 07GAF-SD4A100
At t achment , 72 x 75 mm 07746-0010600
. Dri ver Handl e, 15 x 135L 07749-0010000
. Oi l Seal Dr i ver At t achment , 96 mm 07ZAD-PNA0100
Suppor t Base 07965-SD90100
Knuc kl e/Hub Repl acement
2. Remove t he wh eel nut s and t he front wheel .
108 N-m
(11.0 k g f m,
80 Ibf-ft)
3. Remove t he brake hose bracket mount i ng bolt (A).
4. f l a,oGV c u i o Lakc uai l fj ci bracket mount i ng bolts (B),
t hen r emove t he cal i per assembl y (C) f r om t he
knuckl e. To pr event damage to t he cal i per assembl y
or t he brake hose, use a shor t pi ece of wi r e to hang
t he cal i per assembl y f r om t he under car r i age. Do not
t wi st t he brake hose exc essi vel y.
5. Remove t he wheel speed sensor har ness bracket (A)
and t he wheel speed sensor (B) f rom t he knuckl e. Do
not di sc onnec t t he wheel speed sensor connect or .
6 x 1.0 mm
9.8 N-m
(1.0 k g f m, 7.2 Ibf-ft)
18-14
6. Pry up t he st ake (A) on t he spi ndl e nut (B), t hen
r emove t he nut.
7. Remove t he front brake di sc (see page 19-21).
8. Chec k t he front hub f or damage and c r ac ks.
9. Remove t he cot t er pi n (A) f r om t he t i e-rod end ball
j oi nt , t hen r emove t he nut (B).
NOTE: Duri ng i nst al l at i on, i nst al l t he new cot t er pi n
after t i ght eni ng t he nut , and bend i ts end as s hown.
10. Di sconnect t he t i e-rod end ball j oi nt f rom t he knuckl e
usi ng t he bal l j oi nt t hread prot ect or and t he ball j oi nt
r emover (see page 18-10).
11. Remove t he cotter pi n (A) f r om t he knuckl e ball j oi nt ,
t hen r emove t he c ast l e nut (B).
NOTE: Duri ng i nst al l at i on, i nsert t he new cot t er pi n
i nto t he bal l j oi nt pi n hol e f r om t he front to t he r ear of
t he vehi c l e, and bend its end as s hown. Check t he bal l
j oi nt pi n hol e di rect i on bef ore connect i ng t he ball
j oi nt .
07AAE- S J AA100
B ^ A
14 x 1.5 mm Replace.
78- 88 N m
( 8. 0- 9. 0 k g f m,
5 8 - 6 5 Ibf-ft)
12. Di sconnect t he knuckl e ball j oi nt f r om t he l ower ar m
usi ng t he ball j oi nt t hr ead protector and t he ball j oi nt
NOTE:
Be caref ul not to damage t he ball j oi nt boot when
Do not f or ce or hammer on t he l ower ar m, or pry
(cont ' d)
18-15
Front Suspensi on
KnuckSe/Hub/Wheel Bearing Replacement (cont'd)
13, Remove t he cotter pi n (A) f rom t he upper ar m ball
j oi nt , t hen r emove t he cast l e nut (B).
NOTE: Dur i ng i nst al l at i on, i nsert t he new cotter pi n
i nto t he bal l j oi nt pi n hol e f rom t he f ront to t he r ear of
t he vehi c l e, and bend its end as s hown. Chec k t he ball
j oi nt .
14. Di sc onnec t t he upper ar m ball j oi nt f r om t he knuckl e
15. Pul l t he knuckl e (A) out war d, and separ at e t he
out boar d j oi nt (B) f r om t he front hub a pl ast i c hammer
out war d, t hen r emove t he knuckl e/hub.
NOTE:
Do not pull t he dr i veshaf t end out war d. The
dr i veshaf t i nboar d j oi nt may c ome apart .
Dur i ng i nst al l at i on, appl y gr ease to t he mat i ng
sur f ac es of t he wheel bear i ng and t he dr i veshaf t
out boar d j oi nt (see st ep 1 on page 16-19).
16. Inst al l t he knuckl e/hub i n t he r ever se or der of
Fi rst i nst al l all of t he c omponent s, and li ghtly
t i ght en t he bolts and t he nut s, t hen r ai se t he
suspensi on to l oad it wi t h t he vehi c l e' s wei ght
bef ore f ully t i ght eni ng to t he speci f i ed t or que. Do
not pl ace t he j ack agai nst t he ball j oi nt pi n of t he
knuckl e.
connect i ng t he knuckl e.
Bef ore connect i ng t he ball j oi nt , degr ease t he
t hr eaded sect i on and t he t aper ed porti on of t he ball
j oi nt pi n, t he ball j oi nt connect i ng hol e, and t he
t hr eaded sect i on and t he mat i ng sur f ac es of t he
cast l e nut.
Tor que t he cast l e nut t o t he l ower torque
speci f i cat i on, t hen t i ght en it onl y f ar enough to
al i gn t he sl ot wi t h t he ball j oi nt pi n hol e. Do not
al i gn t he cast l e nut by l ooseni ng it.
Us e a new spi ndl e nut on r eassembl y.
Bef ore i nst al l i ng t he spi ndl e nut, appl y a smal l
amount of engi ne oi l to t he seat i ng sur f ace of t he
nut. After t i ght eni ng, use a drift to st ake t he spi ndl e
nut shoul der agai nst t he dri veshaf t .
Bef ore i nst al l i ng t he brake di sc , cl ean t he mat i ng
sur f ac es of t he front hub and t he i nsi de of t he brake
di sc .
Bef ore i nst al l i ng t he wheel , cl ean t he mat i ng
wheel .
17. Check t he wheel al i gnment , and adj ust it if nec essar y
(see page 18-5).
18-16
Wheel Beari ng Repl acement
1. Remove t he knuckl e/hub.
2. Separ at e t he hub (A) f rom t he knuckl e (B) usi ng the
hub di s/ assy tool and a hydr aul i c pr ess. Hol d t he
knuckle wi t h t he at t achment (C) of t he hydr aul i c pr ess
or equi val ent t ool . Be caref ul not to damage or
def orm t he spl ash guar d (D). Hol d onto t he hub to
keep it f r om f al l i ng when pr essed cl ear .
07GAF -SD4A100
Press
3. Pr ess t he wheel beari ng i nner r ace (A) off of t he hub
(B) usi ng t he hub di s/ assy t ool , a c ommer c i al l y
avai l abl e bear i ng separ at or (C), and a pr ess.
Press
07GAF -SD4A100
4. Remove t he snap ri ng (A) and t he spl ash guar d (B)
f r om t he knuckl e (C).
A
Replace.
5. Pr ess t he wheel bear i ng (A) out of t he knuckl e (B)
usi ng t he at t achment , t he dr i ver handl e, and a pr ess.
Press
07749-0010000
07746-0010600
A"
Replace.
. Was h t he knuckl e and t he hub t hor oughl y in hi gh
f l ash poi nt sol vent bef ore r eassembl y.
(cont' d)
18-17
Front Suspensi on
Knyc kl e/Hyb/Wheel Bearing Replacement ( c ont ' d)
7. Pr ess a new wheel bear i ng (A) into t he knuckl e (B)
usi ng t he ol d bear i ng (CL a st eel plate (D), t he
at t ac hment t he suppor t base, and a pr ess. .
NOTE:
Install t he wheel bear i ng wi t h t he wheel speed
sensor magnet i c encoder (E) (brown col or ), t owar d
t he i nsi de of t he knuckl e.
Remove any oil, gr ease, dust , met al debr i s, and
ot her f orei gn mat eri al f r om t he magnet i c enc oder
sur f ace.
Keep any magnet i c t ool s away f r om t he magnet i c
encoder sur f ac e.
Be caref ul not to damage t he magnet i c enc oder
sur f ace when you i nser t t he wheel bear i ng.
07ZAD-PNA0100 07965-SD90100
8. Chec k t he front knuckl e ri ng (A) f or damage or
def or mat i on, and r epl ace it If nec essar y.
NOTE: When i nst al l i ng t he new front knuckl e r i ng,
posi t i on t he knuckl e ri ng notch porti on ( B ) t owar d cut
out (C) near t he ball j oi nt i n t he knuckl e, and al i gn t he
cent er of t he knuckl e ri ng l edge porti on ( D ) wi t h t he
cent er of t he wheel speed sensor hol e (E) on t he
knuckl e as s hown.
D
9. Inst al l t he new snap ri ng (A) sec ur el y i n t he knuckl e
( B) .
7.2 I b f f t )
10. Inst al l t he spl ash guar d (C), and t i ght en t he s c r ews ( D )
to t he speci f i ed t or que.
18-18
Upper Arm Replacement
11. Inst al l t he hub (A) ont o t he knuckl e (B) usi ng t he
at t ac hment t he dr i ver handl e, t he suppor t base, and a
hydr aul i c pr ess. Be caref ul not to damage t he spl ash
guar d (C).
Press
07749-0010000
07965-SD90100
12. Install t he knuckl e/hub.
. Bal l Joi nt Thr ead Prot ect or, 10 mm 07AAF-SECA120
2. Remove t he f ront wheel .
3. Remove t he f ront damper /spr i ng (see page 18-31).
4. Remove the cot t er pi n (A) f rom t he upper ar m ball
j oi nt , t hen r emove t he cast l e nut (B).
07AAF -SECA120
j r 07MAC-SL 0A202
10 x 1.25 mm
Replace.
5. Di sconnect t he upper ar m ball j oi nt f r om t he knuckl e
usi ng t he ball j oi nt t hr ead protector and t he ball j oi nt
6. Remove t he upper ar m mount i ng bol t s (A), t hen
r emove t he upper ar m (B).
10 x 1.25 mm
Replace.
(cont' d)
18-19
Front Suspensi on
Upper Arm Replacement (cont' d)
7. Install t he upper ar m (A), and li ghtly t i ght en t he new
upper ar m mount i ng bolts (B), t hen connect t he
knuckl e, and li ghtly t i ght en t he cast l e nut (C).
NOTE:
Be car ef ul not to damage t he bal l j oi nt boot when
t hr eaded sect i on and t he t aper ed port i on of t he ball
cast l e nut.
B
10 x 1.25 mm
31 N-m (3.2 k g f m, 23 Ibf f t )
Replace.
suspensi on unti l t he c l ear anc e bet ween t he top (D) of
t he upper ar m ball j oi nt and t he backsi de of t he f ender
cut out poi nt (E) i s 40 mm (1.6 i n), t hen t i ght en t he
upper ar m mount i ng bolts to t he spec i f i ed t or que.
NOTE: To measur e t he speci f i ed c l ear anc e,
t empor ar i l y r emove t he front i nner f ender (see page
20-290).
11. Pl ace t he f l oor j ack under t he l ower ar m, and r ai se t he
suspensi on to l oad it wi t h t he vehi c l e' s wei ght .
12. Ti ght en t he cast l e nut (A) on t he upper ar m ball j oi nt
t o t he speci f i ed t or que.
NOTE:
Tor que t he cast l e nut t o t he l ower t or que
Insert t he new cotter pi n (B) into t he ball j oi nt pi n
hol e f r om t he front to t he rear of t he vehi c l e, and
bend i ts end as shown. Chec k t he bal l j oi nt pi n hol e
di rect i on bef ore connect i ng t he ball j oi nt .
i nsi de of t he wheel , t hen i nst al l t he f ront wheel .
(see page 18-5).
9. Lower t he f l oor j ack.
10. Inst al l t he front damper /spr i ng (see page 18-32).
18-20
Lower Arm Removal/Installation
Bushi ng Dri ver 070AF-TA0A100
. Bushi ng Recei ver Set 070AF-TA0A220
2. Remove t he front wheel .
3. Remove the damper pi nch bolt (A) and t he damper
fork mount i ng nut (B) whi l e hol di ng t he mount i ng bolt
(C), t hen r emove t he damper fork (D) f r om t he damper
and t he l ower ar m.
NOTE:
Duri ng i nst al l at i on, i nsert t he al i gni ng t ab (E) on t he
damper uni t into t he sl ot (F) of t he damper fork.
Use t he new damper fork mount i ng bolt and t he
new mount i ng nut, and t or que t he nut whi l e
hol di ng t he bolt dur i ng r eassembl y.
64 N-m (6.5 kgf m, 47 Ibf-ft) Replace.
Replace.
4. Di sconnect t he st abi l i zer link f rom t he l ower ar m (see
page 18-24).
5. Remove t he cotter pi n (A) f r om t he knuckle ball j oi nt ,
t hen r emove t he cast l e nut (B).
NOTE: Duri ng i nst al l at i on, i nser t t he new cot t er pi n
i nto t he ball j oi nt pi n hol e f r om t he front to t he r ear of
t he vehi c l e, and bend its end as shown. Check t he ball
j oi nt .
mmw iM-m
(8.0- 9.0 kgf m,
58- 65 Ibf-ft)
6. Di sconnect t he knuckl e ball j oi nt f rom t he l ower ar m
NOTE:
Be caref ul not to damage t he ball j oi nt boot w h e n
Do not f orce or hammer on t he l ower ar m, or pry
(cont ' d)
Front Suspensi on
Lower Arm Removal/Installation (cont'd)
7. Remove t he l ower ar m mount i ng bol t s, and r emove
t he l ower ar m (A).
NOTE: Us e new l ower ar m mount i ng bol t s dur i ng
r eassembl y.
14x 1. 5 mm 64 N-m
88 N-m (6.5 k g f m, 47 Ibf f t )
(9.0 k g f m, 65 Ibf f t ) Replace.
Replace.
8. Install t he l ower ar m in t he r ever se or der of r emoval ,
and note t hese i t ems:
t i ght en t he bol t s and t he nut s, t hen r ai se t he
bef ore f ully t i ght eni ng it to t he speci f i ed t or que. Do
not pl ace t he j ack agai nst t he ball j oi nt pi n of t he
knuckl e.
t hr eaded sect i on and t he t aper ed porti on of t he bal l
cast l e nut.
Tor que t he cast l e nut to t he l ower t orque
s p f t r i f i r a t i o n ^ * hentightenIt c ~ ! y f c r cr . cî n
al i gn t he c ast l e nut by l ooseni ng it.
Bef ore i nst al l i ng t he wheel , c l ean t he mat i ng
wheel .
(see page 18-5).
18-22
Compl i ance Bushi ng Repl acement
1 . Remove t he l ower ar m.
2. Mark al i gnment mar ks (A) on t he bottom of t he l ower
ar m next to t he al i gni ng mar ks (B) on t he c ompl i anc e
bushi ng.
NOTE: The c ompl i anc e bushi ng has a speci f i c
i nst al l at i on posi t i on. Tur n t he l ower ar m so t hat its
bottom si de i s up. Posi t i on t he bushi ng i denti fyi ng
mark (C) f ace up and near t he t ab (D) on t he l ower
ar m. Then al i gn t he bushi ng al i gni ng mar ks on t he
bushi ng and t he l ower ar m.
If t he al i gnment mar ks ar e gone, al i gn t he angl e (E)
bet ween t he l ower ar m and t he bushi ng as shown.
Al i gni ng t he mar ki ng posi t i on
Al i gni ng t he angl e (ref erence)
F RONT
23 15' 3
3. Pr ess out t he c ompl i anc e bushi ng (A) wi t h t he
bushi ng dr i ver , t he bushi ng r ec ei ver set (at t achment
A), and a hydr aul i c pr ess, and r emove t he bushi ng
f r om t he l ower ar m (B).
NOTE: Be car ef ul not t o damage t he i nsi de of t he
bushi ng hol e on t he l ower ar m.
Press
070AF-TA0A100
070AF-TA0A220
(At t ac hment A)
(cont' d)
18-23
Front Suspensi on
Lower Arm Removal/Installation
(cont'd)
4. Cl ean t he mat i ng sur f ac es of t he new c ompl i anc e
bushi ng (A) and t he l ower ar m (B).
5. Make sur e of t he c ompl i anc e bushi ng i nst al l at i on
di r ect i on, al i gn t he bushi ng al i gni ng mar ks wi t h t he
l ower ar m, t hen pr ess in t he bushi ng i nto t he l ower
ar m usi ng t he bushi ng dr i ver , t he bushi ng r ecei ver set
(at t achment s A and B), and a hydr aul i c pr ess.
NOTE;
Pr ess In t he bushi ng f r om t he bot t om si de of t he
l ower ar m.
Af t er i nst al l at i on, check t he pr ot r usi on (C) of t he
bushi ng out er sl eeve (D) t hr ough t he l ower ar m
bushi ng hol e (E).
6. Inst al l t he l ower ar m.
Stabilizer Link Removal/installation
1. Rai se and suppor t t he vehi cl e (see page 1 -13).
3. Remove t he sel f -l ocki ng nut (A) and t he f l ange nut (B)
whi l e hol di ng t he r espect i ve j oi nt pi n (C) wi t h a hex
wr enc h (D), t hen r emove t he st abi l i zer link (E).
4. Inst al l t he st abi l i zer link on t he st abi l i zer bar (F) and *
t he l ower ar m (G) wi t h t he j oi nt pi ns set at t he cent er
of t hei r r ange of movement .
NOTE: The st abi l i zer link has a pai nt mark (H). The left
st abi l i zer link i s mar ked wi t h yel l ow pai nt , and t he
ri ght st abi l i zer link i s mar ked wi t h whi t e pai nt.
5. Inst al l t he new sel f -l ocki ng nut and t he new f l ange
nut , and t i ght en t hem to the speci f i ed t orque whi l e
hol di ng t he r espect i ve j oi nt pi n wi t h a hex wr enc h.
i nsi de of t he wheel , t hen i nst all t he f ront wheel .
8. Af t er 5 mi nut es of dr i vi ng, t i ght en t he sel f -l ocki ng nut
agai n to t he speci f i ed t or que.
18-24
Stabilizer Bar Replacement
Engi ne Suppor t Hanger, A and Reds AAR-T1256*
. Subf r ame Al i gnment Pi n 070AG-SJ AA10S
*: Avai l abl e t hrough the Honda Tool and Equi pment
Pr ogr am, 888-424-6857.
1. Note t hese i t ems dur i ng r epl acement :
Be sur e to r emove t he st eer i ng wheel bef ore
di sconnect i ng t he st eer i ng j oi nt . Damage to t he
cabl e reel can occur .
Lower t he front subf r ame f rom t he body, and
r epl ace t he front st abi l i zer bar t hr ough t he gap
cr eat ed by l oweri ng t he front subf r ame.
2. Remove t he hood suppor t r od, t hen use it as shown to
prop t he hood i n the wi de-open posi t i on.
3. Remove t he front gri lle cover :
page 22-91).
5. Rai se and support t he vehi cl e (see page 1-13).
7. Remove t he dr i ver ' s ai r bag and t he st eer i ng wheel
(see page 17-6).
8. Remove t he st eer i ng j oi nt c over (A).
28 N-m (2.9 k g f m, 21 Ibf-ft)
9. Loosen t he st eer i ng j oi nt upper bolt (B), and r emove
t he st eer i ng j oi nt l ower bolt (C). Di sconnect t he
st eer i ng j oi nt by sl i di ng t he st eer i ng j oi nt into the
c ol umn shaf t (D). Ti ght en t he st eer i ng j oi nt upper bolt
to hol d t he col umn shaf t .
NOTE:
Do not di sconnect t he st eer i ng j oi nt f r om t he
c ol umn shaf t .
If t he cent er gui de i s in pl ace and has not moved,
l eave it in pl ace.
If t he cent er gui de has moved or been r emoved,
di sc ar d it.
10. Di sc onnec t t he power st eer i ng pr essur e (PSP) swi t ch
connect or (A).
A
(cont' d)
18-25
Front Suspensi on
Stabilizer Bar Replacement (cont'd)
11. Remove t he power st eer i ng pump outlet hose
mount i ng bolt (A).
A
6 x 1.0 mm
12. Remove t he f ront st rut br ace (if equi pped) (see page
20-306).
t he t hr eaded hol e i n t he cyl i nder head.
at t ach t he hook to t he sl ot t ed hol e in t he engi ne
hanger adapt er. Ti ght en t he wi ng nut (A) by hand to
lift and suppor t t he engi ne/t r ansmi ssi on.
NOTE: Be car ef ul when wor ki ng ar ound t he
wi ndshi el d.
18-26
15. Remove t he engi ne mount bolt (A) f r om t he r ear
engi ne mount (B) and t he r ear engi ne mount bracket
( C) .
NOTE: Use a new engi ne mount bolt dur i ng
r eassembl y.
M/ T
B
16. Rai se t he vehi cl e on t he lift to full hei ght .
17. Remove t he front spl ash shi el d (see page 20-291).
18. Remove t he nut s (A) sec ur i ng of t he l ower
t r ansmi ssi on mount .
A
10 x 1.25 mm
44 N-m (4.5 k g f m, 33 Ibf-ft)
19. Remove t he exhaust pi pe A hanger (A) f r om t he front
subf r ame.
(cont' d)
18-27
Front Suspensi on
Stabilizer Bar Replacement (cont' d)
subf r ame, hang t he belt of t he subf r ame adapt er over
t he f ront of t he subf r ame, t hen sec ur e t he belt wi t h i ts
st op.
21. Rai se t he j ac k, li ne up t he sl ot s in t he f ront subf r ame
adapt er ar ms wi t h t he bolt hol es on t he j ac k base,
t hen sec ur el y at t ach t hem wi t h f our bol t s.
22. Remove t he f ront subf r ame mount i ng bol t s (A) on
both si des of t he mi ddl e mount .
NOTE: Us e new mount i ng bol t s dur i ng r eassembl y.
A
10 x 1.25 mm
49 N-m (5.0 kgf -m, 36 Ibf f t )
Replace.
23. Di sc onnec t both si des of t he st abi l i zer link f r om t he
st abi l i zer bar (see page 18-24).
24. Remove t he f l ange bolts (A) on both si des of t he front
subf r ame front st i f f ener (B).
25. Loosen t he front si de of t he subf r ame mount i ng bol t s
(C) t o obt ai n a 20 mm (0.79 i n) di st ance bet ween t he
bolt seat and t he mount i ng sur f ac e. Do not l oosen t he
mount i ng bol t s mor e t han nec essar y.
18-28
II
26. Remove t he f l ange bol t s (A) on both si des of t he front
subf r ame rear st i f f ener (B).
30 mm
(1.18 i n)
12 x 1.25 mm
Replace.
14 x 1.5 mm
Replace.
27. L oosen t he rear si de of t he subf r ame mount i ng bolts
(C) to obt ai n a 30 mm (1.18 i n) di st ance bet ween t he
bolt seat and t he mount i ng sur f ac e. Do not l oosen t he
mount i ng bol t s mor e t han nec essar y.
28. Lower t he t r ansmi ssi on j ack wi t h t he front subf r ame
adapt er sl owl y unti l t he front subf r ame (D) has
dr opped about 30 mm (1.18 i n).
NOTE: Do not l ower t he front subf r ame beyond t he
l oosened subf r ame mount i ng bolts c l ear anc e.
29. Remove t he f l ange bol t s (A) and t he bushi ng hol der s
(B), t hen r emove t he bushi ngs (C).
NOTE: Dur i ng i nst al l at i on, al i gn t he pai nt mar ks (D)
on t he st abi l i zer bar wi t h t he si de of t he bushi ngs.
A
10 x 1.25 mm
44 N m (4.5 kgf m, 33 Ibf-ft)
30. Move t he st abi l i zer bar t owar d t he passenger ' s si de,
and r emove t he st abi l i zer bar.
31. Install t he st abi l i zer bar.
NOTE:
Note t he ri ght and left di rect i on of t he st abi l i zer bar.
Note t he di rect i on of i nst al l at i on f or t he bushi ngs.
(cont' d)
18-29
Front Suspensi on
Stabilizer Bar Replacement (cont'd)
32. Al i gn t he front subf r ame usi ng t he subf r ame
al i gnment pi n. Ver t i cal l y i nst al l t he subf r ame
al i gnment pi n, and al i gn t he ri ght -rear cor ner of t he
front subf r ame and vehi cl e f r ame hol es, t hen l oosel y
t i ght en t he new subf r ame mount i ng bolt (A) unti l t he
front subf r ame cont act s t he body f r ame.
mm
Replace.
33. Loosel y t i ght en t he left-rear subf r ame mount i ng bolt
usi ng t he s ame pr ocedur e as t he ri ght -rear wi t h t he
subf r ame al i gnment pi n.
34. Loosel y i nst al l t he new 12 mm f l ange bolts (B) to t he
subf r ame r ear st i f f ener.
35. Tor que t he subf r ame mount i ng bol t s to t he speci f i ed
t or que st art i ng wi t h t he ri ght -rear bolt. Us e t he
subf r ame al i gnment pi n when t i ght eni ng t he rear si de
bolts (A).
NOTE:
Tor que t he bol t s in t he sequenc e s hown.
Bef ore t i ght eni ng t he new front si de subf r ame
mount i ng bolts (B), r ai se t he j ack and l oosel y i nst al l
t he 12 mm f l ange bol t s (C) t o al i gn t he subf r ame
front st i f f ener.
12 x 1.25 mm
93 N m (9.5 k g f m, 69 Ibf f t )
103 N-m 12 x 1.25 mm
(10.5 k g f m, 75.9 Ibf f t ) 54 N-m
Replace. (5.5 k g f m, 40 Ibf f t )
36. Check all of t he front subf r ame mount i ng bol t s, and
reti ghten if nec essar y.
18-30
37. Install all of t he r emoved part s In t he r ever se or der of
r emoval , and note t hese i t ems;
Ref er to st abi l i zer li nk r emoval /i nst al l at i on to
connect t he st abi l i zer bar to t he li nks (see page
18-24).
If t he cent er gui de i s in pl ace, use it to det er mi ne t he
st eer i ng j oi nt i nst al l at i on angl e.
If t he cent er gui de i s gone, check t he st eer i ng j oi nt
i nst al l at i on angl e (see st ep 3 on page 17-12).
Check t he st eer i ng wheel i nst al l at i on (see page
17-9).
When connect i ng t he rear engi ne mount to t he rear
engi ne mount bracket , f i rst li ghtly t i ght en t he
mount i ng bolt, t hen r emove t he engi ne suppor t
hanger , and t i ght en it t o the speci f i ed t or que.
sur f ac es of t he brake di sc and i nsi de of t he wheel .
page 22-91), t hen t ur n t he i gni ti on swi t ch to ON (ll)
and c hec k t hat t he S RS i ndi cat or shoul d c ome on f or
about 6 sec onds and t hen go off.
(see page 18-5).
Damper/Spring Remowal and
Installation
Removal
3. Remove t he wheel speed sensor har ness bracket
mount i ng bolt (A).
4. Remove t he damper pi nch bolt (A) and t he damper
fork mount i ng nut (B) whi l e hol di ng t he mount i ng bolt
(C), t hen r emove t he damper fork (D) f r om t he damper
and t he l ower ar m.
A
10 x 1.25 mm
Replace.
(cont' d)
18-31
Front Suspensi on
Damper/Spring Remowal and Installation (cont' d)
5. Remove t he f ront st rut br ace mount i ng nut s (A) (if
equi pped).
6. Remove t he damper mount i ng nut s (B) f r om t he t op
of t he damper . Do not let t he damper /spr i ng drop
down under i ts own wei ght .
7. Remove t he damper /spr i ng (A).
NOTE: Be car ef ul not to damage t he body.
A
i nst al l at i on
1. Posi t i on t he damper /spr i ng (A) in t he body wi t h t he
al i gni ng t ab (B) f aci ng i nsi de.
NOTE: Be caref ul not to damage t he body.
A
2. Loosel y i nst al l t he new damper mount i ng nut s (A) to
t he t op of t he damper .
3. Loosel y i nst al l t he f ront strut br ace mount i ng nut s (B)
(if equi pped).
18~32
4. Install t he damper fork (A) over t he dr i veshaf t and
ont o t he l ower ar m (B). Install t he al i gni ng t ab (C) on
t he damper uni t into t he sl ot (D) of t he damper fork.
12 x 1.25 mm Replace.
64 N-m (6.5 kgf m, 47 I bfft)
Replace.
5. Loosel y i nst all t he damper pi nch bolt (E) i nto t he
damper fork.
6. Connec t t he damper fork and t he l ower ar m wi t h t he
new damper fork mount i ng bolt (F), t hen li ghtly
t i ght en t he new mount i ng nut (G).
suspensi on to l oad it wi t h t he vehi c l e' s wei ght .
8. Ti ght en t he damper pi nch bolt and t he damper fork
mount i ng nut whi l e hol di ng t he mount i ng bolt to t he
9. Ti ght en t he damper mount i ng nut s and front strut
br ace mount i ng nut s (if equi pped) on t op of t he
damper to t he speci f i ed t orque val ues.
10. Inst al l t he wheel speed sensor har ness bracket (A).
7.2 I bfft)
i nsi de of t he wheel , t hen i nst al l t he f ront wheel .
(see page 18-5).
18~33
Front Suspensi on
Damper/Spring Di sassembl y, Inspection, and Reassembly
Expl oded View
Check for damage.
DUST COVER PLATE
DUST COVER END/SLEEVE
Check for deterioration and damage.
S EL F- L OCK I NG NUT
10x 1. 25 mm
29 N m (3.0 k g f m, 22 Ibf f t )
Replace.
DAMPER MOUNTING WAS HER
Check for deformation.
DAMPER MOUNTING BUS HI NG
Check for weakness
and damage.
DAMPER MOUNTING COL L AR
DAMPER MOUNTI NG B A S E
DAMPER MOUNTING BUSHI NG
Check for weakness
and damage.
S PRI NG MOUNTING CUS HI ON
and damage.
BUMP S TOP PL ATE
BUMP S TOP
Check for weakness,
oil contamination, and damage.
DUS T COVER L OWER MOUNT
and damage.
DAMPER UNIT
Check for oil leaks, gas leaks,
and smooth operation.
18-34
NOTE: When c ompr essi ng t he damper spr i ng, us e a
commer ci al l y avai l abl e strut spr i ng c ompr essor (Brani ck
MST-580A or Model 7200, or equi val ent ) accor di ng to
t he manuf act ur er ' s i nst r uct i ons.
Di sassembl y
1. Compr ess t he damper spr i ng, t hen r emove t he
sel f -l ocki ng nut (A) whi l e hol di ng t he damper shaf t
wi t h a hex wr enc h (B). Do not c ompr ess t he damper
spr i ng mor e t han nec essar y to r emove t he
sel f -l ocki ng nut.
2. Rel ease t he pr essur e f r om t he st rut spr i ng
c ompr essor , t hen di sassembl e t he damper as shown
in t he Expl oded Vi ew.
Inspect i on
1_ Reassembl e all t he par t s, except f or t he damper
spr i ng.
2. Compr ess t he damper assembl y by hand, and c hec k
f or smoot h operat i on t hr ough a full st r oke, both
c ompr essi on and ext ensi on. The damper shoul d
ext end smoot hl y and const ant l y when c ompr essi on i s
r el eased. If it does not, t he gas i s l eaki ng and t he
damper shoul d be r epl aced.
3. Check for oi l l eaks, abnor mal noi ses, and bi ndi ng
duri ng t hese t est s.
(cont' d)
18-35
Front Suspensi on
Damper/Spring Disassembly, Inspection, and Reassembly (cont 'd)
Reassembl y
1. Inst al l t he spr i ng mount i ng c ushi on (A) on t he damper
mount i ng base (B) by al i gni ng t he t ab (C) and not ch
(D).
2. Inst al l all t he par t s except t he damper mount i ng
was her and t he sel f -l ocki ng nut ont o t he damper uni t
by ref erri ng to t he Expl oded Vi ew.
3. Compr es s t he damper spr i ng usi ng a st rut spr i ng
c ompr essor . Do not c ompr ess t he spr i ng exc essi vel y.
4. Al i gn t he l ower end (A) of t he damper spr i ng wi t h t he
st epped part (B) of t he dust c over l ower mount and
t he l ower spr i ng seat on t he damper uni t.
A
5. Posi t i on t he t ab (A) on t he spr i ng mount i ng c ushi on
f aci ng f or war d but t owar d t he i nsi de of t he vehi c l e.
Lef t
FRONT
C
Ri ght
FRONT
C
6. Al i gn t he angl e of t he st ud (B) on t he damper
mount i ng base (C) wi t h t he al i gni ng t ab (D) on t he
bot t om of t he damper uni t as shown.
18-36
7. Install t he damper mount i ng washer (A) and t he new
sel f -l ocki ng nut (B).
B
10 x 1.25 mm
29 N-m (3.0 k g f m, 22 Ibf-ft)
Replace.
8. Hold t he damper shaf t wi t h a hex wenc h (C), and
t i ght en t he sel f -l ocki ng nut to t he speci f i ed t or que.
9. Remove t he damper /spr i ng f r om t he st rut spr i ng
c ompr essor .
Rear Suspensi on
Knuckle/Hub Bearing Unit Replacement
Expl oded Vi ew
F LAT SCREW
6 x 1.0 mm
9.8 N-m
(1.0 kgf-m, 7 2 Ibf ft)
18-38
. Bal l Joi nt Thr ead Prot ect or, 14 mm 07AAE-SJ AA100
Hub Beari ng Uni t Repl acement
2. Remove t he wheel nut s, and t he rear wheel .
80 Ibf-ft)
3. Rel ease t he parki ng brake l ever f ul l y.
4. Loosen t he parki ng brake c abl e adj ust i ng nut (see
page 19-8).
5. Remove t he f l ange bolt (A) f r om t he ar m (B). Then
di sconnect t he parki ng brake c abl e f r om t he l ever (C).
(2.2 k g f m,
16 Ibf-ft)
6 Remove t he brake hose mount i ng bolt (A).
7. Remove t he brake cal i per bracket mount i ng bolts (B),
t hen r emove t he cal i per assembl y (C) f rom t he
8. Remove t he t wo was her s (A).
NOTE: Duri ng i nst al l at i on, make sur e t he was her s ar e
i nst al l ed bet ween t he brake cal i per bracket and t he
knuckl e.
9. Remove t he r ear brake di sc (see page 19-34).
(cont ' d)
18-39
Rear Suspensi on
Knuckle/Hub Bearing Unit Replacement (cont' d)
10. Remove t he hub bear i ng uni t (A) and t he O-ri ng (B).
A
11. Chec k t he hub bear i ng uni t f or damage and c r ac ks,
12. i nst al l t he hub bear i ng uni t in t he r ever se or der of
Use a new O-ri ng on r eassembl y.
After i nst al l i ng t he brake cal i per , make sur e t he
c l ear anc e bet ween l ower ar m B and t he parki ng
brake cabl e i s mor e t han 5 mm (0.2 i n).
Bef ore i nst al l i ng t he brake di s c , cl ean t he mat i ng
sur f ac es of t he hub bear i ng uni t and t he brake di sc .
Bef ore i nst al l i ng the wheel , c l ean t he mat i ng
wheel .
(see page 18-5).
Knuckl e Repl acement
1. Remove t he hub beari ng uni t.
2. Remove t he spl ash guar d (A).
9.8 N-m
(1.0 kgf m, 7.2 Ibf-ft)
3. Remove t he lock pi n (A) f rom t he upper ar m ball j oi nt ,
NOTE: Duri ng i nst al l at i on, i nst al l t he lock pi n as
shown after t i ght eni ng t he new cast l e nut.
Replace.
4. Di sconnect t he upper ar m ball j oi nt f r om t he knuckl e
NOTE:
Duri ng i nst al l at i on, to connect t he ball j oi nt , r ai se
t he suspensi on wi t h a j ack (see st ep 9 on page
18-44).
18-40
5. Remove t he wheel speed sensor (A) f r om t he knuckl e.
Do not di sc onnec t t he wheel speed sensor connect or .
6. Remove t he f l ange nut (A) whi l e hol di ng t he j oi nt pi n
(B) wi t h a hex wr enc h (C), t hen di sconnect t he
st abi l i zer link (D) f r om t he knuckl e, and r emove t he
brake hose bracket (E).
NOTE: Us e t he new f l ange nut dur i ng r eassembl y.
7. Remove t he damper l ower mount i ng bolt (F).
NOTE: Us e t he new mount i ng bolt dur i ng
r eassembl y.
8. Remove t he cont rol ar m mount i ng sel f -l ocki ng nut (A)
and t he was her (B).
NOTE* Use a new sel f -l ocki ng nut dur i ng r eassembl y.
43 ibfft)
Replace.
(cont' d)
18-41
Rear Suspensi on
Knuckle/Hub Bearing Unit Replacement (cont'd)
9. Remove t he l ower ar m mount i ng bolt (A), and t he
l ower ar m B mount i ng bolt (B), t hen r emove t he
knuckl e (C).
12 x 1.25 mm
59 N-m (6.0 kgf-m, 43 I bfft)
Replace.
10. Install t he knuckl e i n t he r ever se or der of r emoval , and
note t hese i t ems:
bef ore f ul l y t i ght eni ng to t he speci f i ed t or que.
t hr eaded sect i on and t he t aper ed porti on of t he ball
j oi nt pi n, t he bal l j oi nt connect i ng hol e, and t he
cast l e nut.
Tor que t he cast l e nut t o t he l ower t orque
sur f ac es on t he brake di sc and t he i nsi de of t he
wheel .
(see page 18-5).
18-42
Upper Arm Replacement
Ball Joi nt Thr ead Prot ect or, 14 mm 07AAE-SJ AA100
* Ball Joi nt Remover , 32 mm 07MAC-SL0A102
2. Remove t he rear wheel .
3. Remove t he rear damper /spr i ng (see page 18-49).
4. Rel ease t he parki ng brake l ever fully.
5. Loosen t he parki ng brake cabl e adj ust i ng nut (see
page 19-8).
6. Remove t he f l ange bolt (A) f r om t he ar m (B). Then
di sc onnec t t he parki ng brake cabl e f r om t he l ever (C).
(2.2 k g f m,
16 Ibf f t )
7. Remove t he brake cal i per bracket mount i ng bolts (A),
t hen r emove t he cal i per assembl y (B) f r om t he
NOTE: Make sur e t he was her s (C) posi t i on on
r eassembl y, if t hey ar e r emoved (see st ep 8 on page
18-39).
C
(cont' d)
18-43
Rear Suspensi on
Upper Arm Replacement (cont' d)
8. Remove t he lock pi n (A) f r om t he upper ar m ball j oi nt ,
NOTE: Duri ng i nst al l at i on, i nst al l t he lock pi n as
shown after t i ght eni ng t he new cast l e nut.
07AAE-S J AA100
07MAC-SL0A102
B
14 x 1.5 mm
69- 78 N-m
(7.08.0 kgf -m
51- 58 Ibf-ft)
Replace.
9. Di sconnect t he upper ar m ball j oi nt f rom t he knuckl e
NOTE:
Duri ng i nst al l at i on, to connect t he ball j oi nt ,
posi t i on a f l oor j ack under t he connect i ng poi nt of
t he knuckl e and l ower ar m A, and r ai se t he
suspensi on wi t h t he j ack.
10. Remove t he wheel speed sensor har ness bracket (A).
8x 1. 25 mm
22 N-m
(2.2 kgf -m,
16 ibf-ft)
11. Remove t he upper ar m mount i ng bolts ( A) , t hen
r emove t he upper ar m (B).
NOTE: Use new mount i ng bol t s duri ng r eassembl y.
12 x 1.25 mm
59 N-m (6.0 kgf-m, 43 Ibf-ft)
Replace.
Lower Arm A Replacement
12. Install t he upper ar m in t he r ever se or der of r emoval ,
and not e t hese i t ems;
t i ght en t he bolts and t he nut s, t hen r ai se t he
bef ore fully t i ght eni ng to t he speci f i ed t or que.
Bef ore connect i ng t he bal l j oi nt , degr ease t he
t hr eaded sect i on and t he t apered port i on of the ball
j oi nt pi n, t he bal l j oi nt connect i ng hol e, and t he
cast l e nut ,
Tor que t he cast l e nut to t he l ower t or que
Af t er i nst al l i ng t he brake cal i per , make sur e t he
c l ear anc e bet ween l ower ar m B and t he parki ng
brake cabl e i s mor e t han 5 mm (0.2 i n).
wheel .
(see page 18-5).
1. Rai se and suppor t the vehi cl e (see page 1-13).
3. Remove t he parki ng brake cabl e mount i ng bolt (B).
Replace.
4. Remove t he l ower ar m A mount i ng bol t s, t hen
r emove l ower ar m A.
NOTE: Use new mount i ng bolts duri ng r eassembl y.
5. Inst al l l ower ar m A in t he r ever se order of r emoval ,
t i ght en t he bol t s, t hen r ai se the suspensi on to load
it wi t h t he vehi c l e' s wei ght before fully t i ght eni ng to
sur f ac es on t he brake di sc and the i nsi de of the
wheel .
(see page 18-5).
18-45
Rear Suspensi on
Control Arm Replacement
1. Rai se and suppor t t he vehi c l e {see page 1-13).
2. Remove the rear wheel .
3. Remove t he cont rol ar m mount i ng sel f -l ocki ng nut (A)
and t he washer (B) f r om t he knuckl e si de.
NOTE; Us e a new sel f -l ocki ng nut duri ng r eassembl y.
Replace.
4. Mark t he c am posi t i ons of t he adj ust i ng bolt (C) and
t he adj ust i ng c am plate (D) wi t h t he f r ame.
5. Remove t he sel f -l ocki ng nut (E) whi l e hol di ng t he
adj ust i ng bol t t hen r emove t he adj ust i ng c am pl at e,
t he adj ust i ng bolt, and t he cont rol ar m (F).
NOTE: Us e a new adj ust i ng bolt and a new
sel f -l ocki ng nut dur i ng r eassembl y.
6. Inst al l t he cont rol ar m i n t he r ever se or der of r emoval ,
bef ore fully t i ght eni ng to t he speci f i ed t or que.
Posi t i on t he ext ended sur f ac es of t he c am on t he
adj ust i ng bolt and t he adj ust i ng c am plate f aci ng
down.
Al i gn t he c am posi t i ons of t he adj ust i ng bolt and t he
adj ust i ng c am pl at e wi t h t he mar ked posi t i ons on
t he f r ame when t i ght eni ng t he sel f -l ocki ng nut.
Bef or e i nst al l i ng t he wheel , cl ean t he mat i ng
wheel .
(see page 18-5).
18-46
Lower Arm B Replacement Stabilizer Link Removal /Inst al l at i on
1 Rai se and suppor t t he vehi cl e (see page 1-13).
2. Remove t he r ear wheel .
3. Remove t he l ower ar m B mount i ng bol t s, t hen
r emove l ower ar m B.
59 N m (6.0 k g f m, 43 Ibf f t )
Replace.
4. Install l ower ar m B in t he r ever se or der of r emoval ,
t i ght en t he bol t s, t hen r ai se t he suspensi on t o l oad
it wi t h t he vehi c l e' s wei ght bef ore f ul l y t i ght eni ng to
Make sur e t he c l ear anc e bet ween l ower ar m B and
t he parki ng brake cabl e i s mor e t han 5 mm (0.2 i n).
wheel .
(see page 18-5).
3. Remove t he f l ange nut (A) and t he sel f -l ocki ng nut (B)
whi l e hol di ng t he r espect i ve j oi nt pi n (C) wi t h a hex
wr enc h (D), t hen r emove t he st abi l i zer link (E).
10 x 1.25 mm
38 N m (3.9 k g f m, 28 Ibf f t )
Replace.
4. Install t he st abi l i zer link on the st abi l i zer bar (F) and
t he knuckl e addi ng i n t he brake hose bracket (G) wi t h
t he j oi nt pi ns set at t he cent er of t hei r range of
movement .
NOTE:
The st abi l i zer link has a pai nt mark (H). The pai nt
mark i ndi cat es t he di f f erence bet ween t he left and
ri ght st abi l i zer l i nks.
Install t he end of t he st abi l i zer link wi t h t he pai nt
mar k in t he upper posi t i on.
(c ont ' d)
18-47
Rear Suspensi on
Stabilizer Link Removal/installation
(cont' d)
5. Install t he f l ange nut and t he new sel f -l ocki ng nut , and
t i ght en t hem to t he speci f i ed t orque whi l e hol di ng t he
r espect i ve j oi nt pi n wi t h a hex wr enc h.
6. Cl ean t he mat i ng sur f ac es of the brake di sc and t he
i nsi de of t he wheel , t hen i nst al l t he rear wheel .
8. Af t er 5 mi nut es of dr i vi ng, ti ghten t he sel f -l ocki ng nut
agai n to t he speci f i ed t or que.
St abi l i zer Bar Repl acement
2. Remove t he rear wheel s.
3. Di sc onnec t both st abi l i zer li nks f rom t he st abi l i zer bar
(see page 18-47).
4. Remove t he f l ange bol t s (A) and t he bushi ng hol der s
(B), t hen r emove t he bushi ngs (C) and t he st abi l i zer
bar (D).
NOTE: Duri ng i nst al l at i on, al i gn t he pai nt mar ks (E) on
t he st abi l i zer bar wi t h t he si de of t he bushi ngs.
5. Inst al l t he st abi l i zer bar in t he r ever se or der of
Note t he ri ght and left di rect i on of t he st abi l i zer bar.
Note t he di rect i on of i nst al l at i on for t he bushi ng.
Ref er to t he st abi l i zer link r emoval /i nst al l at i on to
connect t he st abi l i zer bar t o t he li nks (see page
18-47).
f> Bef or e i nst al l i ng t he wheel , cl ean t he mat i ng
wheel .
18-48
Damper/Spring Removal and Installation
Removal
3. Fol d down t he rear seat -back, t hen r emove t he li d (A).
NOTE: For 4-door, lift up t he t ab (B) i nsi de under neat h
t he lid f i rst usi ng a flat-ti pped sc r ewdr i ver , t hen
r el ease t he hooks.
4- d o o r
4. Remove t he damper mount i ng nut s (A) f r om t he top
of t he damper .
5. Remove t he f l ange nut (A) whi l e hol di ng t he j oi nt pi n
(B) wi t h a hex wr enc h (C), t hen di sc onnec t t he
st abi l i zer link (D) f r om t he knuckl e, and r emove the
brake hose bracket (E).
6. Remove t he damper l ower mount i ng bolt (F).
(cont' d)
18-49
Rear Suspensi on
Damper/Spring Removal and Installation (cont'd)
7. Remove t he damper /spr i ng (A) by l ower i ng t he r ear
suspensi on.
NOTE: Be caref ul not to damage t he body.
Installation
1. Lower t he r ear suspensi on, and posi t i on t he
damper /spr i ng (A) in t he body wi t h t he wel ded nut (B)
on t he bot t om of t he damper f aci ng f or war d.
NOTE:
Be car ef ul not to damage t he body.
Make sur e t he damper i s i nst al l ed i n t he cor r ect
di r ect i on.
A
2. Loosel y i nst al l t he new damper mount i ng nut s (A) to
t he t op of t he damper .
A
10 x 1.25 mm
18-50
3. Loosel y i nst al l t he new damper l ower mount i ng bolt
(A) on t he bottom of the damper . Connec t t he
st abi l i zer link (B) to t he brake hose bracket (C) to t he
knuckl e, and l oosel y i nstall t he new f l ange nut (D).
4. Pl ace a floor j ack under the connect i ng poi nt of t he
knuckle and l ower ar m A, and r ai se t he suspensi on to
l oad wi t h t he vehi c l e' s wei ght .
5. Ti ght en t he damper l ower mount i ng bolt and t he
f l ange nut whi l e hol di ng t he j oi nt pi n (E) wi t h t he hex
wr enc h (F) to t he speci f i ed t or que.
6. Ti ght en t he damper mount i ng nut s on top of t he
damper to t he speci f i ed t orque.
7. Inst al l t he lid (A), and set t he rear seat -back to t he
or i gi nal posi t i on.
4 door
i nsi de of t he wheel , t hen i nst al l t he rear wheel .
(see page 18-5).
18-51
Rear Suspensi on
Damper/Spring Di sassembl y, Inspection, and Reassembly
Expl oded Vi ew
DAMPER SPRING
Check for damage,
DUS T COVER PL ATE
DUS T COVER E ND/ S L E E VE
and damage.
DUS T COVER L OWER MOUNT
Check for deterioration and damage,
SELF -LOCK ING NUT
10 x 1.25 mm
29 N-m (3.0 kgf-m, 22 I bfft)
Replace.
DAMPER MOUNTI NG WAS HER
Check for weakness
and damage.
DAMPER MOUNTING COL L AR
DAMPER MOUNTING B A S E
and damage.
S PRI NG MOUNTING
CUS HI ON
and damage.
BUMP S TOP PL ATE
BUMP S TOP
Check for weakness,
oil contamination, and damage.
Check for oil leaks, gas leaks,
and smooth operation.
18-52
NOTE: When c ompr essi ng t he damper spr i ng, us e a
commer ci al l y avai l abl e st rut spr i ng c ompr essor (Brani ck
MST-580A or Model 7200, or equi val ent ) accor di ng to
t he manuf act ur er ' s i nst r uct i ons.
Di sassembl y
1. Compr ess t he damper spr i ng, t hen r emove t he
sel f -l ocki ng nut (A) whi l e hol di ng t he damper shaf t
wi t h a hex wr enc h (B). Do not c ompr ess t he damper
spr i ng mor e t han nec essar y to r emove t he
sel f -l ocki ng nut.
B
2. Rel ease t he pr essur e f r om t he st rut spr i ng
c ompr essor , t hen di sassembl e t he damper as shown
i n t he Expl oded Vi ew.
Inspect i on
1. Reassembl e all par t s, except f or t he damper spr i ng.
2. Compr ess t he damper assembl y by hand, and check
f or smoot h oper at i on t hrough a full st r oke, both
c ompr essi on and ext ensi on. The damper shoul d
ext end smoot hl y and const ant l y when c ompr essi on i s
r el eased. If it does not, t he gas i s l eaki ng and the
damper shoul d be r epl aced.
3. Check for oi l l eaks, abnor mal noi ses, and bi ndi ng
dur i ng t hese t est s.
(cont' d)
18-53
Rear Suspensi on
Damper /Spr i ng Di sassembl y, Inspect i on, and Reassembl y (cont'd)
Reassembl y
1. Inst al l t he spr i ng mount i ng c ushi on (A) on t he damper
mount i ng base (B) by al i gni ng t he t abs (C) and
not ches (D).
C
2. Inst al l all t he part s except t he damper mount i ng
was her and t he sel f -l ocki ng nut ont o t he damper uni t
by ref erri ng to t he Expl oded Vi ew.
3. Compr ess t he damper spr i ng usi ng a st rut spr i ng
c ompr essor . Do not c ompr ess t he spr i ng exc essi vel y.
4. Al i gn t he l ower end (A) of t he damper spr i ng wi t h t he
st epped part (B) of t he dust c over l ower mount and
t he l ower spr i ng seat on t he damper uni t .
5. Al i gn t he angl e of t he st ud (A) on t he damper
mount i ng base (B) wi t h t he wel ded nut (C) on t he
bottom of t he damper uni t as shown.
Lef t Ri ght
FRONT FRONT
B
6. Inst al l t he damper mount i ng washer ( A) , and l oosel y
i nst al l t he new sel f -l ocki ng nut (B).
10x 1.25 mm
29 Nm{ 3. 0 k g f m, 22 Ibf-ft)
Replace.
7. Hold t he damper shaf t wi t h a hex wr enc h (C), and
. t i ght en t he sel f -l ocki ng nut to t he speci f i ed t or que.
8. Remove t he damper /spr i ng f r om t he strut spr i ng
c ompr essor .
18-54
Suspension
1PMS
Component Location I ndex. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 8- 5 6
General Troubleshooting I nformation 18-57
Memorizing the Tire Pr es s ur e Sensor I D. .18-60
Tire Pressure Sensor Location 18-61
DTC Troubleshooting I ndex 18-62
S ymptom Troubleshooting Index 18-63
System Des cri pti on. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-64
Circuit Diagram 18-68
DTC Troubleshooting .18-70
S ymptom Troubl eshooti ng. 18-78
TP MS Control Unit Replacement. 18-83
Tire Pressure Sensor Replacement 18-84
TPMS
18-56
S f st em Indi cat or
The TPMS (tire pr essur e moni t ori ng syst em) has t he l ow
ti re pr essur e i ndi cat or and t he TPMS i ndi cat or.
Low Tire Pressure TPMS Indicator
Indicator
The L ow Ti r e Pr essur e Indi cat or
If t he syst em det ect s l ow pr essur e i n any of t he f our
t i r es, t he l ow ti re pr essur e i ndi cat or c omes on.
When t he i ndi cat or c omes on, i nflate t he t i r es and
t est -dr i ve t he vehi cl e at 28 mph (45 km/h) or mor e f or
at l east 1 mi nut e, and t he l ow ti re pr essur e i ndi cat or
wi l l go off.
If t he TPMS cont rol uni t det ect s a pr obl em in t he
syst em duri ng an i ndi cat i on of l ow t i re pr essur e, it
t ur ns off t he l ow ti re pr essur e i ndi cat or, st or es t he DTC
(s), and t ur ns on t he TPMS i ndi cat or.
The TPMS Indi cat or
If a pr obl em i s det ect ed in t he s y s t em, t he TPMS
i ndi cat or c omes on.
If l ow ti re pr essur e and a pr obl em i n t he syst em ar e
det ect ed, onl y the TPMS i ndi cat or c omes on.
If t he syst em i s OK, t he TPMS i ndi cat or and t he l ow ti re
pr essur e i ndi cat or shoul d c ome on when you t urn t he
i gni ti on swi t ch to ON (II), and t hen go off 2 sec onds later.
If t hey don' t , t here i s a pr obl em wi t h t he syst em.
DTC 11, 13, 15, 17
If t he syst em det ect s l ow pr essur e in any of t he f our t i r es,
t he l ow ti re pr essur e i ndi cat or c omes on, and t he TPMS
cont rol uni t set s one or mor e of t hese c odes: DTC 11, 13,
15,17. When t he ti re pr essur e ret urns to nor mal , and t he
TPMS cont rol uni t r ecei ves t he nor mal pr essur e si gnal
f rom t he ti re pr essur e sensor , t he TPMS cont rol uni t
t ur ns off t he i ndi cat or. However TPMS cont rol uni t sti ll
ret ai ns t he DTC(s).
NOTE: It i s nec essar y to t est -dr i ve t he vehi c l e at 28 mph
(45 km/h) or mor e for at l east 1 mi nut e so t hat t he ti re
pr essur e sensor t r ansmi t s t he si gnal .
Ti r e Pr essur e Changi ng by Temper at ur e
Ti r e pr essur es i ncr ease sl i ght l y as t he t emper at ur e in t he
t i res r i ses duri ng dr i vi ng. Pr essur es can al so i ncr ease or
dec r ease sl i ght l y wi t h c hanges in out si de ai r
t emper at ur e. A t emper at ur e c hange of about 18 F
(10 C) c hanges ti re pr essur e by about 10 kPa
(0.1 kgf /c m
2
,1.5 psi ). If t he t emper at ur e dr ops, ti re
pr essur e coul d dec r ease enough to turn on t he l ow ti re
pr essur e i ndi cat or, but l at er, t he ti re t emper at ur e coul d
i nc r ease enough to turn t he i ndi cat or off. To r esol ve a
compl ai nt of suc h i ntermi ttent i ndi cat i ons, conf i r m and
cl ear t he st or ed DTC(s) and c hec k t he ti re pr essur es.
Then expl ai n to t he c ust omer how t emper at ur e c hanges
can affect t he syst em.
fkgf/ cm
2
, kPa)
38
i
(2. 6,260)
i
35 I I ,
(2.4,240)
32 .. 1 ,
(2.2,220)
I i i
29
(2.0,200)
I : '
1
26
(1.8,180)
! I i
23
1
(1.6,160)
i i ]
20
1 !
(1.4,140)
1 J .
I \ 1
- 20 0 20 40 60 C
- 4 32 68 104 140 F
(cont' d)
18-57
TPiVIS
General Troubleshooting Information (cont' d)
Pr obl ems That Ar e Wot S f st em Faul t s
Ti r e Seal ant
Fl ui d seal ant used to repai r a punct ur ed ti re c an
damage t he t i re pr essur e sensor mount ed on eac h
wheel . It c an pr event t he syst em f r om det ect i ng t he
cor r ect ti re pr essur e, whi c h set s a DTC 11, 13, 15, or 17
even t hough t he syst em i s nor mal .
Col d Weat her
When t he weat her i s ext r emel y c ol d, about 40 F
(40 C) or c ol der , t he out put of t he li t hi um battery in
eac h ti re pr essur e sensor may drop f ar enough t hat
t he TPMS cont rol uni t set s a DTC f or l ow battery
vol t age (31, 33, 35, or 37) even t hough t he syst em i s
nor mal .
Non-TPMS t ype Wheel s (Incl udi ng Spar e Ti r e)
Vehi c l es equi pped wi t h TPMS must use wheel s made
f or t he syst em. Ever y TPMS t ype wheel has an
exc l usi ve mark; do not use any ot her t ype of wheel
(see page 18-66).
When a flat t i re i s r epl aced wi t h t he spar e t i re, t he
TPMS i ndi cat or c omes on (DTC 32, 34, 36, or 38)
bec ause t he syst em i s no l onger r ecei vi ng t he si gnal
f rom t he flat t i r e' s t ransmi t t er.
Thi s i s not a pr obl em wi t h t he spar e t i re.
How a Di agnost i c Tr oubl e Code (DTC) i s Set
When t he syst em det ect s a pr obl em, t he TPMS cont rol
uni t set s a c ode, but shi f t s to f ai l -saf e mode, and does
not alert t he dr i ver to l ow ti re pr essur es.
If t he TPMS cont rol uni t l oses power , or f ai l s, t he
TPMS i ndi cat or c omes on, but no DTC are set .
The memor y c an hol d all t he DTCs t hat coul d possi bl y
be set . However , when t he s ame DTCs ar e det ect ed
mor e t han onc e, t he most r ecent one over wr i t es t he
pr evi ous one, so onl y t he l at est DTC of each t ype i s
st or ed.
DTCs ar e i ndi cat ed in asc endi ng or der , not in t he or der
t hey oc c ur r ed.
Set DTCs ar e st or ed in t he EEPROM (nonvol at i l e
memor y), t hey cannot be c l ear ed by di sconnect i ng t he
battery. To c l ear a DTC, connect t he HDS (Honda
Di agnost i c Syst em) to t he dat a link connect or (DLC),
and f ol l ow t he sc r een pr ompt s.
How t o Tr oubl eshoot DTCs
DTC t r oubl eshoot i ng pr ocedur es as s ume t he c ause of
t he pr obl em i s sti ll pr esent and t he TPMS i ndi cat or i s sti ll
on. Do not use a t r oubl eshoot i ng pr ocedur e unl ess t he
syst em has set t he DTC li st ed f or it.
NOTE: For DTCs 11, 13, 15, and 17 (tire l ow pr essur e), t he
TPMS i ndi cat or c omes on onl y if t he DTCs are c aused by
a syst em pr obl em rat her t han l ow ti re pr essur e.
1. Ask t he c ust omer to descr i be t he condi t i ons when t he
i ndi cat or c ame on, and try to r epr oduce t he s ame
condi t i ons for t r oubl eshoot i ng. Fi nd out if t he
c ust omer c hec ked and/or adj ust ed ti re pr essur es
si nc e t he i ndi cat or c ame on.
2. If an i ndi cat or does not c ome on duri ng t he t est -dr i ve,
check f or l oose t er mi nal s, poor cont act due to
damaged t er mi nal s, et c. bef ore you st art
3. Af t er t r oubl eshoot i ng, repai r and cl ear t he DTCs , and
t est -dri ve t he vehi c l e. Make sur e no i ndi cat or s c ome
on.
4. Check for DTCs f r om ot her cont rol uni t s that ar e
connect ed vi a t he F-CAN. If t her e ar e DTCs that ar e
rel at ed to t he F-CAN, t he most li kely c ause was that
t he i gni ti on swi t ch was t urned to ON (II) wi t h t he
TPMS cont rol uni t connect or di sc onnec t ed. Cl ear t he
DTCs. Check f or PGM-FI and TPMS c odes, and
t r oubl eshoot t hose f i rst .
18-58
How to Ret r i eve DTCs
1. Wi t h t he i gni ti on swi t ch in L OCK (0), connect t he HDS
(Honda Di agnost i c Syst em) to t he dat a link connect or
(DLC) (A) l ocat ed under t he dr i ver ' s si de of t he
dashboar d.
A
and t he TPMS cont rol uni t. If it does not t r oubl eshoot
t he DL C ci rcui t (see page 11-181).
4. Fol l ow t he prompt s on t he HDS to di spl ay t he DTC(s)
on t he sc r een. After det er mi ni ng t he DTC, ref er to t he
DTC t r oubl eshoot i ng.
NOTE: S ee t he HDS Help menu f or speci f i c
i nst r uct i ons.
How t o Cl ear DTCs
1. Wi t h t he i gni t i on swi t c h i n L OCK (0), connect t he HDS
t o t he dat a link connect or (DLC) (A) l ocat ed under t he
and t he TPMS cont rol uni t. If it does not, t r oubl eshoot
4. Cl ear t he DTC(s) by f ol l owi ng t he sc r een pr ompt s on
t he HDS.
i nst r uct i ons.
18-59
TPMS
Memorizing the Tire Pressure Sensor ID
TPMS Tr i gger Tool ATEQ VT55*
Pr ogr am 888-424-6857
Al l f our ti re pr essur e sensor IDs must be memor i zed to
t he TPMS cont rol uni t whenever you do any of t hese
act i ons:
Repl ace t he TPMS cont rol uni t
Repl ace t he t i re pr essur e sensor .
Subst i t ut e a known-good wheel wi t h ti re pr essur e
sensor .
NOTE:
The TPMS tool i s nec essar y to do t hi s pr ocedur e.
Let t he vehi c l e si t f or at l east 5 mi nut es to al l ow t he ti re
pr essur e sensor s to swi t ch to sl eep mode.
To ensur e t he TPMS cont rol uni t memor i zes t he
cor r ect ID, t he vehi cl e wi t h t he new ti re pr essur e
sensor must be at l east 10f t (3 m) away f r om ot her
vehi c l es that have ti re pr essur e sensor s.
When doi ng a ti re rot at i on, memor i zi ng t he s ens or s in
not needed.
1. Wi t h t he i gni ti on swi t ch i n L OCK (0), connect t he HDS
t o t he dat a li nk connect or (DLC) (A) l ocat ed under t he
and t he TPMS cont rol uni t. If it does not, t r oubl eshoot
4. Sel ec t Sens or ID Lear ni ng f r om t he Mode Menu on
t he HDS.
5. Fol l ow HDS sc r een pr ompt s to t urn on t he TPMS t ool .
. Hol d t he TPMS t ool near t he val ve st em of one wheel ,
and memor i ze t he ti re pr essur e sensor ID by f ol l owi ng
t he sc r een pr ompt s on t he HDS.
NOTE:
S ee t he HDS Help menu f or speci f i c i nst r uct i ons.
If you turn t he i gni ti on swi t ch to L OCK (0) bef ore
memor i zi ng all f our sensor IDs, t he memor i zi ng ID
i s c anc el ed.
If mor e t han one sensor ID i s di spl ayed on t he HDS,
veri f y that t he vehi c l e has not been dr i ven f or 5
mi nut es, and t her e ar e no ot her vehi c l es or ti re
pr essur e s ens or s wi t hi n 10 ft (3 m).
ATEQVT55
7. Repeat st ep 6 f or eac h wheel unti l all f our sensor IDs
ar e memor i zed. When all f our IDs ar e memor i zed, t he
l ow ti re pr essur e i ndi cat or bl i nks.
9. Di sc onnec t t he HDS f r om t he DL C.
10. Test -dr i ve t he vehi c l e at 28 mph (45 km/h) or mor e f or
at l east 1 mi nut e.
11. Make sur e t he l ow ti re pr essur e i ndi cat or does not
bli nk.
12. Make sur e t he t i r es ar e i nflated to t he speci f i ed ti re
pr essur e l i st ed on t he door j amb st i cker.
18-60
Tire Pr essur e Sensor Location
TPMS Tr i gger Tool ATEQ VT55*
^ Avai l abl e t hrough t he Honda Tool and Equi pment
Pr ogr am 888-424-6857
NOTE:
The TPMS tool i s nec essar y to do t hi s pr ocedur e.
Let t he vehi c l e si t f or at l east 5 mi nut es to al l ow t he ti re
pr essur e sensor s to swi t c h to sl eep mode.
c Thi s pr ocedur e l ocat es wher e t he ti re pr essur e
sensor s 1, 2, 3, 4 ar e mount ed, when act i vat ed by t he
TPMS t ool .
Posi t i on t he vehi cl e at l east 10 ft (3 m) away f r om ot her
vehi c l es that have ti re pr essur e sensor s.
1. Wi t h t he i gni ti on swi t ch i n L OCK (0), c onnec t t he HDS
to t he dat a link connect or (DLC) (A) l ocat ed under t he
A
and t he TPMS cont rol uni t. If it does not , t r oubl eshoot
4. Usi ng t he HDS, bri ng up t he TPMS dat a l i st , scr ol l
down to t he bot t om, and l ocat e t he f our ti re pr essur e
sensor s ID number s. Thes e ar e t he ID number s
assi gned to each t i re l ocat i on.
5. Fol l ow HDS sc r een pr ompt s under sensor ID l ear n, to
t urn on t he TPMS t ool .
6. Hold t he TPMS t ool near t he val ve st em of one wheel ,
and act i vat e t he t i re pr essur e sensor .
NOTE:
See t he HDS Help menu under sensor ID l ear n f or
speci f i c i nst r uct i ons.
If t he ti re pr essur e sensor sti ll does not r espond,
t hen check f or DTC 32, 34, 36, and 38 wi t h t he HDS.
7. The TPMS tool wi l l di spl ay t he sensor dat a i ncl udi ng
t he sensor ID number .
8. Locat e t he t i re pr essur e sensor ID number s on t he
TPMS dat a l i st , and mat ch it to t he sensor number .
Note t he sensor l ocat i on.
18-61
TPMS
DTC . Detecti on Item Tr o ub l es h o o t i ng
11 Ti re 1 Low Ai r Pressure DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 18-70)
(see page 18-70)
(see page 18-70)
(see page 18-70)
21 Ti re 1 Pressure Sensor Abnormal l y High Temperat ure DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 18-71)
(see page 18-71)
(see page 18-71)
(see page 18-71)
31 Ti re 1 P r o o e i . r o C o n o c r Bs t t c r y Vcl t cge DTC Troubleshooti ng
(see page 18-72)
32 Ti re 1 Pressure Sensor Si gnal Fai lure DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 18-73)
33 Ti re 2 Pressure Sensor Low Battery Voltage DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 18-72)
(see page 18-73)
(see page 18-72)
(see page 18-73)
(see page 18-72)
(see page 18-73)
41 Abnormal Signal Reception Error DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 18-74)
51 Tire 1 Pressure Sensor Registration Error DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 18-74)
(see page 18-74)
(see page 18-74)
(see page 18-74)
81 TPMS Control Unit F ailure DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 18-75)
83 No VSP Signal DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 18-76)
85 F-CAN Communication F ailure DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 18-76)
91 Tire 1 Pressure Sensor Internal Error DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 18-77)
(see page 18-77)
(see page 18-77)
(see page 18-77)
18-62
Sy mpt om Di agnost i c pr ocedur e Al so c hec k for
HDS does not c ommuni c at e wi t h t he TPMS
cont rol uni t or t he vehi c l e
Tr oubl eshoot t he DL C ci rcui t (see page 11-181) Faul t y data link
cabl e
L ow ti re pr essur e i ndi cat or does not c ome
on, and no DTCs ar e st or ed
Sympt om Tr oubl eshoot i ng (see page 18-78)
L ow ti re pr essur e i ndi cat or does not go off,
and no DTCs are st or ed
TPMS i ndi cat or does not c ome on, and no
DTCs ar e st or ed
TPMS i ndi cat or does not go off, and no
DTCs ar e st or ed
18-63
TPMS
Syst em Descri pt i on
TPMS Cont r ol Uni t Input s and Out put s for 20P Connec t or
n i r
1
/
4 /
/\
7 8
/
10
Ter mi nal
number
Wi r e col or Ter mi nal si gn Si gnal
1 WHT CAN H { F-CAN
c ommuni c at i on
si gnal hi gh)
F-CAN
c ommuni c at i on
ci rcui t
Wi t h i gni ti on swi t ch ON (II): pul ses
4 BLK GND (Gr ound) Gr ound f or t he
TPMS cont rol uni t
7 L T BL U K-LINE (Data link
connect or )
Communi c at i ons
wi t h t he HDS
8 BRN IG1 (Igni ti on
swi t c h 1)
Power sour c e f or
act i vat i ng t he
syst em
Wi t h i gni ti on swi t ch ON (II): battery vol t age (about
12 V)
8 BRN IG1 (Igni ti on
swi t c h 1)
Power sour c e f or
act i vat i ng t he
syst em Wi t h i gni ti on swi t ch i n L OCK (0): l ess t han 0.1 V
10 WHT + B (Bat t ery
posi t i ve)
Power sour c e f or
t he TPMS cont rol
uni t
Bat t ery vol t age (about 12 V) at all t i mes
11 RED CAN L (F-CAN
c ommuni c at i on
si gnal l ow)
F-CAN
c ommuni c at i on
ci rcui t
Wi t h i gni ti on swi t ch ON (II): pul ses
18-64
S f st em St r uct ur e
Onc e t he vehi cl e speed exceeds 28 mph (45 km/h), t he TPMS cont rol uni t moni t ors all f our ti re pr essur e sensor s and t he
syst em f unct i on. If it det ect s l ow pr essur e i n a t i re, it alert s the dri ver by t urni ng on t he l ow ti re pr essur e i ndi cat or. If it
det ect s a pr obl em in t he syst em, it t ur ns on t he TPMS i ndi cator.
TPMS cont r ol uni t
Mount ed over t he accel erat or pedal modul e, t he TPMS control uni t r ecei ves wi r el ess ti re pr essur e sensor ID si gnal s
ever y t i me t he vehi c l e speeds exc eeds 28 mph (45 km/h). It al so r ecei ves wi r el ess si gnal s f r om t he t r ansmi t t er s f or t i re
pr essur e and t he sensor condi t i on, and it cont i nuousl y moni t ors and cont rol s t he syst em. The TPMS cont rol uni t cannot
di rect l y det er mi ne t he posi ti on (l ocat i on) of a t i re pr essur e sensor (s) on t he vehi cl e si nc e it i s a wi r el ess syst em. Ti r e
pr essur e sensor l ocat i ons wi l l c hange dur i ng schedul ed vehi cl e mai nt enance (tire rotati on).
NOTE: To det er mi ne t he actual l ocat i on of eac h ti re pr essur e sensor on t he vehi c l e, do t he t i re pr essur e sensor l ocat i on
pr ocedur e (see page 18-61). Onc e t he ti re pr essur e sensor l ocat i ons ar e i dent i f i ed, wr i t e t he sensor ID on t he si de wal l of
t he t i re wi t h a ti re cr ayon to el i mi nat e c onf usi on.
Indi cat or s
Two i ndi cat ors ar e in t he gauge cont rol modul e: The low ti re pr essur e i ndi cator c omes on when any ti re pr essur e i s l ow,
and t he TPMS i ndi cat or that c omes on onl y if t her e' s a probl em wi t h t he syst em.
The l ow ti re pr essur e i ndi cator al ert s t he dr i ver that a ti re(s) pr essur e i s l ow, but does not speci f y t he t i re(s) l ocat i on.
Tire Pr essur e Sens or
(Sensor -t r ansmi t t er
wi t h ac c el er at i on sensor )
Wheel
(TPMS t ype)
Ti r e Pr essur e Sens or
Wheel
(TPMS t ype)
Vehi c l e
Indi cat or s (LED)
Communi c at i on
vi a F-CAN
TPMS Cont r ol Uni t
(wi t h radi o
f r equency ant enna)
w
Ti r e Pr essur e S ens or
Wheel
(TPMS t ype)
Ti r e Pr essur e S ens or
Wheel
(TPMS t ype)
(cont' d)
18-65
TPMS
Ti r e pr essur e s ens or
Eac h sensor i s an i nt egrat ed uni t made up of t he ti re val ve st em, a t i re pr essur e sensor , and a t ransmi t t er. The uni t i s
at t ached to t he i nsi de of t he wheel , ar ound t he val ve st em. The sensor t r ansmi t s t he i nt ernal ti re i nf ormat i on to t he
TPMS cont rol uni t onc e ever y 60 sec onds when t he vehi c l e speed exc eeds 28 mph (45 km/h). When t he TPMS cont rol
uni t r ecei ves a t i re pr essur e si gnal that i s l ess t han: 168 kPa (1.7 kgf /c m
2
,24 psi ) wi t h 16 i nch wheel s, 175 kPa (1.8 kgf /c m
2
,
25 psi ) wi t h 17 i nch wheel s , t he TPMS cont rol uni t t hen t ur ns on t he l ow t i re pr essur e i ndi cat or. When that t i r e' s pr essur e
i s i nc r eased to mor e t han: 190 kPa (1.9 kgf /c m
2
, 28 psi ) wi t h 16 i nch wheel s , 200 kPa (2.0 kgf /c m
2
, 29 psi ) wi t h 17 i nch
wheel s, and t he vehi c l e i s dr i ven above 28 mph (45 km/h) t he t r ansmi t t er sends t he ti re pr essur e si gnal to t he TPMS
cont rol uni t , and t hen t he TPMS cont rol uni t t ur ns t he i ndi cat or off.
NOTE: Do not mi x t he ti re pr essur e sensor s or TPMS t ype wheel s wi t h ot her TPMS t ypes. Be sur e to use t he cor r ect t ype
sensor s and wheel s f or t hi s syst em.
Sens or ar e act i ve:
When t he wheel rot at es over 28 mph (45 km/h) t he s ens or det ect s t he moment um, and swi t c hes t he sensor to t he
nor mal f unct i on mode.
9 The L F (l ow f r equency) si gnal of t he TPMS t ool makes t he sensor act i ve even t hough t he vehi c l e i s st opped. The ti re
pr essur e sensor goes i nto sl eep mode when t he accel er at i on sensor det ect s t he wheel i s st at i onar y for 5 mi nut es or
mur e.
Wh eels
The TPMS wi l l not wor k unl ess TPMS t ype wheel s ar e i nst al l ed on t he vehi c l e. Ther e ar e si x di fferent t ypes of wheel s
used.
Al umi num wheel t ype: The ori gi nal equi pment wheel s have a ' TPMS " , " TA0" , or " TE 0" mar k (A) on t hem. The
wheel s al so have count er wei ght s (B) i ncor por at ed on t he opposi t e si de of t he ti re pr essur e sensor (C), to
count er bal ance t he wei ght of t he sensor .
St eel wheel t ype: The or i gi nal equi pment wheel s have a " TPMS " mark (A) on t hem, and a count er wei ght (B) bal anc es
t he wei ght of t he t i re pr essur e sensor (C) by a si ze di f f erence in t he wheel di sc hol es.
Al umi num w h e e l s
C C C
18-66
Sf s t emCommunicat ion
When t he vehi cl e i s t r avel i ng mor e t han 28 mph (45 km/h), an RF (radi o f r equency) band wav e si gnal i s t r ansmi t t ed
f rom each ti re pr essur e sensor to t he TPMS cont rol unit.
When t he wheel s rot at e, t he ti re pr essur e sensor s moment um i s det ect ed, swi t chi ng t hem f r om sl eep mode t o nor mal
f unct i on (awake) mode. Af t er t he vehi cl e i s st at i onary for 5 mi nut es, t he s ens or s swi t ch f r om nor mal f unct i on mode
back to sl eep mode to ext end t hei r battery li fe.
Eac h ti re pr essur e sensor has its own ID to pr event j ammi ng by si mi l ar syst ems on ot her vehi c l es. After memor i zi ng
all t he sensor IDs, t he TPMS cont rol uni t r ecogni zes only t hose speci f i c si gnal s.
An ID cannot be memor i zed aut omat i cal l y. The TPMS control uni t knows whi c h ID bel ongs to eac h ti re pr essur e
sensor . Thi s recurri ng ID conf i rmat i on pr event s any conf usi on i n t he syst em as a resul t of nor mal ti re rot at i on.
NOTE: Be caref ul not to bend t he bracket s oh t he TPMS cont rol uni t. Mi sal i gnment of the TPMS cont rol uni t c oul d
i nterfere wi t h sendi ng and r ecei vi ng si gnal s.
TPMS Cont r ol Uni t
(Wi t h an Internal Radi o Fr equenc y Ant enna)
Ti r e Pr essur e S ens o r
(Sensor -t r ansmi t t er wi t h ac c el er at i on sensor )
18-67
TPMS
Ci rcui t Di agram
IG1 HOT i n ON (II) and START (I
F19
DRIVER'S UNDER-DASH
FUSE/ RELAY BOX
No, 29
(7.5 A)
No. 5
GAUGE CONTROL MODULE
POWER CI RCUI T
L OW TI RE PRE S S URE
INDICATOR
TPMS I NDI CATOR
I NDI CATOR
DRI VER
CI RCUI T
DATA L I NK
CONNE CTOR (DL C)
- WHT -
- RE D -
L T B L U
- BL K -
CAN H
1 1
1
TPMS CONTROL UNI T
CAN
CONTROL L E R
VOL TA GE
RE GUL A TOR
TPMS
A NTE NNA
: 12V
: 5 V
GND
_L
G503
18-68
i |Uf
DRI VER' S UNDER-DASH
FUS E / RE L A Y BOX CONNECTOR N (16P)
DRI VER' S UNDER-DAS H
FUS E / RE L A Y BOX CONNECTOR P (20P)
1 2 7
/
9 10
/
12
/
14
/ /
3 4 5 6 7
i
8
n
9
10
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
11 12
Wire side of female terminals Wire side of female terminals
n r
1
2
r
i
/
/
6
/
8 9
i
10
/ /
r
13
i..
16
r
17 18 19
/
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
/
32
TPMS CONTROL UNIT 20P CONNECTOR
n n
/
4
/
7 8
/
10
1 3 4 5 6 7 9 10
11
/ /
15 16 17 18 19 20 21
22 2 3 24 25
X
26 27 28
29 30
/
32 34 35 36
/ / /
/
41 42 43 4 4 / 46
y A"
/
4 5 6 7
/ )
\ 9
/
12
/
14
V
16/
18-69
TPMS
DTC 11, 13, 15, 17: Ti r e Low Ai r Pr essur e
NOTE: If low tire pressure is detected, the TPMS control
unit sets one or more of these DTCs, and turns on the
l ow t i re pressure indicator. If t he l ow tire pressure
i ndi cat or comes on becauseof a l ow tire pressure, and
t he c ust omer cor r ect s it bef ore bri ngi ng t he vehi c l e i n,
t he DTCs wi l l be st or ed, but t he i ndi cat or t ur ns off.
2. Make sur e t he t i res ar e i nf l at ed to t he speci f i ed t i re
pr essur e l i st ed on t he door j amb st i cker.
Does the low tire pressure indicator go off?
YE S - Th e system i s OK at t hi s t i me. Chec k f or and
repai r t he c aus e of ai r l o s s . B
NO- Go to st ep 4.
5. Note t he t i re pr essur e sensor (s) number by t he
i ndi cat ed DTC.
DTC
C
J iii o
1
-1assure Sensor Number
11 No. 1
13 No. 2
15 No. 3
17 No. 4
6. Do t he ti re pr essur e sensor l ocat i on pr ocedur e to
det er mi ne t he affected ti re l ocat i on and relate it to t he
ti re pr essur e sensor number (see page 18-61).
7. Chec k t he TIRE 1, TIRE 2, TIRE 3, or TIRE 4 AIR
PRE S S URE in t he TPMS DATA L IST wi t h t he HDS, and
c ompar e it wi t h t he act ual measur ed ti re pr essur e.
Is the indicated tire pressure on the HDS within 40 kPa
(0,4 kgf/cnf, 6 psi) ofth* *ctn?J tire precc-jrc?
NO-Repl ac e t he appropri at e t i re pr essur e sensor (see
page1S-84). H
9. Test -dr i ve t he vehi cl e at 28 mph (45 km/h) or mor e f or
Is DTC 11,13,15, or 17 indicated?
18-83).B
NO-lf any ot her DTCs ar e i ndi cat ed, t r oubl eshoot t he
appr opr i at e DTC. If no DTCs ar e i ndi cat ed, t he syst em
i s OK at t hi s t i me.
18-70
DTC 21,22,23,24; Ti re Pr essur e Sensor
Abnor mal l y High Temperat ure
1. Tur n t he i gni ti on swi t ch to L OCK ( 0) .
2. Make sur e t he t i res have cool ed down,
NOTE: An abnor mal ri se in the i nt ernal t emper at ur e of
t he t i r es c an be c aused by:
Exc essi ve braki ng
Fai l ur e to r el ease t he parki ng brake (rear t i r es onl y)
Leavi ng t he vehi c l e runni ng whi l e parked (front
t i res onl y)
Impr oper assembl y of a wheel and ti re
3. Test -dr i ve t he vehi cl e at 28 mph (45 km/h) or mor e for
Does the TPMS indicator go off?
YE S - Th e syst em i s OK at t hi s t i me. Cl ear t he DTC wi t h
t he HD S . I
NO- Go to st ep 4.
5. Note t he ti re pr essur e sensor (s) number by t he
i ndi cat ed DTC.
DTC Ti r e Pr essur e S ens or Number
21 No. 1
22 No. 2
23 No. 3
24 No. 4
det er mi ne t he affected ti re l ocat i on and rel at e it to t he
TEMPERATURE in t he TPMS DATA L I ST wi t h t he
HDS.
Is 176 F (80 C) or more indicated?
YES - Repl ac e t he appropri at e ti re pr essur e sensor
(see page 18-84).11
NO- Go to st ep 8.
9. Test -dr i ve t he vehi cl e at 28 mph (45 km/h) or mor e for
10. Check for DTCs wi t h the HDS.
Is DTC 21, 22, 23, or 24 indicated?
YES - Ch ec k for l oose t er mi nal s and poor connect i ons
at t he TPMS cont rol uni t. If nec essar y, subst i t ut e a
known-good TPMS cont rol uni t (see page 18-83), and
r ec h ec k .
NO-l f any ot her DTCs ar e i ndi cat ed, t r oubl eshoot t he
appropri at e DTC. If no DTC ar e i ndi cat ed, t he syst em
i s OK at t hi s t i me. H
18-71
DTC 31, 33, 35, 37: Ti r e Pr essur e Sensor Low
Battery Vol t age
NOTE: Thi s pr obl em oc c ur s when t he t emper at ur e
ar ound t he sensor i s 40 F (40 C) or l ess. Note t hat
t he di agnosi s must be made in a pl ace wher e ambi ent
t emper at ur e i s 40 F (40 C) or mor e.
Does t he TPMS indicat or go off?
YE S - Th e syst em i s OK at t hi s t i me. Cl ear t he DTC wi t h
t he HDS.H
NO- Go t o st ep 2.
i ndi cat ed DTC.
DTC Ti r e Pr essur e S ens or Number
31 No. 1
33 No. 2
35 No. 3
37 No. 4
det er mi ne t he af f ect ed ti re l ocat i on and relate it to t he
Did each tire pressure sensor respond to the TPMS tool?
NO-Chec k t hat t he ti re pr essur e sensor i s properl y
mount ed. If nec essar y, r epl ace t he appropri at e ti re
pr essur e sensor (see page 18- 84) .
5. Chec k t he TIRE 1, TIRE 2, TIRE 3, or TIRE 4 PRES S URE
S ENS OR BATTERY S TATUS i n t he TPMS DATA L I S T
wi t h t he HDS.
Is LOW indicated?
Y E S - R e p l a c e t he appropri at e ti re pr essur e sensor
{ZZZ pyo 13-34/.iiB
NO-Chec k f or l oose t er mi nal s and poor c onnec t i ons
r ec hec k . B
DTC 32, 34, 36, 38: Ti r e Pr essur e Sensor Si gnal
F ailure
NOTE: Inspect for an af t ermarket el ect ri cal devi ce(s)
(such as an Invert er, battery char ger , CB r adi o, etc)
i nterferi ng wi t h t he RF si gnal f r om t he s ens or s when
dri vi ng t he vehi c l e.
2. Make sur e all f our wheel s ar e TPMS t ype wheel s wi t h
t he mount ed ti re pr essur e sensor .
Are TPMS type wheels with a tire pressure sensor
mounted on the vehicle?
NO-l nst al l a TPMS t ype wheel , and memor i ze t he
pr essur e sensor ID wi t h t he HDS (see page 18-60).H
4. Check f or DTCs wi t h t he HDS.
5. Note t he t i re pr essur e sensor (s) number by t he
i ndi cat ed DTC.
DTC Tire Pressure Sensor Number
32
No. 1
34 No. 2
36 No. 3
38 No. 4
det er mi ne t he af f ect ed t i re l ocat i on and relate it to t he
NO-Check f or an af t ermarket el ect ri cal devi ce
i nt erf eri ng wi t h t he RF si gnal s f r om t he sensor s. If
t her e ar e no el ect r i cal devi c es c ausi ng i nt er f er ence,
r epl ace t he appr opr i at e ti re pr essur e sensor (see page
18-84).B
7. Tur n t he i gni t i on swi t c h to L OCK (0), and wai t
5 mi nut es or mor e,
8. Test -dr i ve t he vehi c l e at 28 mph (45 km/h) or mor e for
9. Chec k if t he val ue of t he AIR PRES S URE and AIR
TEMPERATURE of t he af f ect ed sensor c hanges f rom
DEFAUL T to t he cor r ect ti re pr essur e on t he TPMS
Does the value of the AIR PRESSURE and AIR
TEMPERATURE change from DEFAULT to the correct
tire pressure?
YES - The syst em i s OK at t hi s t i me. Cl ear t he DTC wi t h
t he HDS . B
NO-Repl ac e t he appropri at e ti re pr essur e sensor (see
page 18-84).H
18-73
TPMS
DTC 41: Abnor mal Si gnal Recept i on Er r or
NOTE:
Inspect f or an af t ermarket el ect r i cal devi ce(s) (such as
an i nvert er, battery c har ger , CB r adi o, etc) i nt erf eri ng
wi t h t he RF si gnal f r om t he s ens or s when dr i vi ng t he
vehi c l e.
If DTC 32, 34, 36, or 38 i s al so set , t r oubl eshoot t hose
DTCs fi rst.
mount ed ti re pr essur e s ens or s .
Are TPMS type wheels with tire pressure sensors
pr essur e sensor ID wi t h t he HDS (see page 18- 60) . !
3. Memor i ze t he ti re pr essur e sensor IDs wi t h t he HDS
(see page 18-60).
YE S - Th e syst em i s OK at t hi s t i me, c l ear t he DTC wi t h
t he HDS . B
NO-Repl ac e t he TPMS cont rol uni t (see page
18-S3).B
DTC 51, 53, 55, 57: Ti r e Pr essur e Sensor
Regi st rat i on Er r or
NOTE:
The f ol l owi ng DTCs wi l l onl y set dur i ng i ni ti ali zati on
wi t h t he HDS.
Inspect f or an af t ermarket el ect ri cal devi ce(s) (such as
an i nvert er, bat t ery c har ger , CB r adi o, etc) i nterferi ng
wi t h t he RF si gnal f r om t he sensor s when dri vi ng t he
vehi c l e.
mount ed ti re pr essur e sensor s.
Are TPMS type wheels with a tire pressure sensor
pr essur e sensor ID wi t h t he HDS (see page 18-60). J
i ndi cat ed DTC.
DTC Ti r e Pr essur e Sens or Number
51 No. 1
53 No. 2
55 No. 3
57 No. 4
18-74
6. Do t he ti re pr essur e s ens or l ocat i on pr ocedur e to
det er mi ne t he affected t i re l ocat i on and rel at e it to t he
Did each t ire pressure sensor respond t o t he TPMS t ool?
NO-Chec k f or an af t ermarket el ect ri cal devi ce
i nterferi ng wi t h t he RF si gnal s f rom t he sensor s. If
t here are no el ect ri cal devi c es c ausi ng i nt er f er ence,
r epl ace t he appropri at e t i re pr essur e sensor (see page
18-84).B
5 mi nut es or mor e.
8. Test -dr i ve t he vehi c l e at 28 mph (45 km/h) or mor e for
Is DTC 51, 53, 55, or 57 indicat ed?
YES - Ch ec k for l oose t er mi nal s and poor connect i ons
r ec hec k.B
NO-The syst em i s OK at t hi s t i me. Cl ear t he DTC wi t h
t he HDS . B
DTC 81: TPMS Cont rol Uni t Fai l ure
NOTE: L ow bat t ery vol t age c an c ause t hi s DTC. Make
sur e t he battery i s f ul l y c har ged and i n good condi t i on
(see page 22-90).
3. Tur n t he i gni ti on swi t c h to LOCK (0), t hen t urn t he
i gni ti on swi t c h to ON (II) agai n.
Is DTC 81 indicat ed?
18~83).B
NO-The syst em i s OK at t hi s t i me. Chec k f or l oose
t er mi nal s and poor connect i ons at t he TPMS cont rol
uni t and G503. B
18-75
TPMS
DTC 83; No VSP Si gnal . . . . -
NOTE; If DTC 85 st or ed at t he s ame t i me as DTC 83,
t r oubl eshoot DTC 85 f i rst , t hen r echeck f or DTC 83.
3. Test -dr i ve t he vehi c l e at 7 mph (10 km/h) or mor e.
4. Chec k t he speedomet er .
Does t he speedomet er regist er speed?
NO-Updat e t he ECM/PCM if it does not have t he l at est
known-good ECM/ PCM (see page 11-7), t hen go t o
st ep 1 and r echeck. If t he ECM/PCM was updat ed and-
DTCs ar e not i ndi cat ed, t r oubl eshoot i ng i s c ompl et e.
If t he ECM/ PCM was subst i t ut ed and DTCs ar e not
i ndi cat ed, r epl ace t he ori gi nal ECM/ PCM (see page
1T-204).B
5. Chec k t he VEHI CL E S PEED i n t he TPMS DATA L I ST
wi t h t he HDS.
.. Is the vehicle speed indicated?
YE S - Th e syst em i s OK at t hi s t i me.
NO-Subst i t ut e a known-good TPMS cont rol uni t (see
page 18-83), and r ec hec k.B
DTC 85; F-CAN Communi cat i on Fai l ure
NOTE: Chec k f or f uel and emi ssi ons syst ems DTCs wi t h
t he HDS, and t r oubl eshoot t he ECM/ PCM and F-CAN
c ommuni c at i on er r or s f i rst (see page 11 -3).
2. Cl ear t he DTC wi t h t he HDS. -
3. Tur n t he i gni t i on swi t c h to L OCK (0),-:then t urn t he
i gni t i on swi t ch to ON (II) agai n.
4. Wai t about 5 sec onds.
Is DTC 85 indicated?
^ YE S - Go to st ep 6.
NO- The syst em i s OK at t hi s t i me. Chec k f or l oose
t er mi nal s and poor connect i ons at t he TPMS cont rol
uni t .B
Does the speedometer work?
NO- Go t o' st ep 7.
Does the speedometer work?
YE S - Ch ec k f or l oose t er mi nal s and poor c onnec t i ons
r ec hec k.B
NO-Tur n t he i gni ti on swi t ch to L OCK (0), and
r econnect al l c onnec t or s, t hen c hec k and
t r oubl eshoot t he f uel and emi ssi ons syst ems (see
page11-3).B
18-76
10. Tur n the i gni ti on swi t ch to L OCK (0).
11. Shor t t he S CS l i ne wi t h t he HDS.
14. Chec k f or cont i nui t y bet ween t he TPMS cont rol uni t
20P connect or t er mi nal s and t he ECM/ PCM connect or
A (49P) t er mi nal s accor di ng to t he t abl e.
Ter mi nal
Name
TPMS Cont r ol
Uni t 20P
Connec t or
Ter mi nal
ECM/ PCM
Connect or A
(49P) Ter mi nal
CAN L No. 11 No. 4
CA NH No. 1 No. 3
CAN H (WHT)
n n
4
/
V
7 8
/
10
AAA?
\7W
11
/ /
/ | 1 5 16 17|18 19 20 21
22 23 24 25
><
26 27 28
29 30
/
32L / 34 35]36
/
/
4 2 1 4 3 ^ 7 1 ^
ECM/ P CM CONNECTOR A (49P)
YE S - Ch ec k f or l oose t er mi nal s and poor c onnec t i ons
at t he TPMS cont rol uni t and G503. If nec essar y,
subst i t ut e a known-good TPMS cont rol uni t (see page
18-83), and recheck.ll
NO-Repai r an open i n t he wi r e bet ween t he TPMS
cont rol uni t and t he ECM/ PCM. H
DTC 91, 93, 95, 97: Ti r e Pr essur e Sensor
i nternal Error
3. Not e t he ti re pr essur e sensor (s) number by t he
i ndi cat ed DTC.
DTC Ti r e Pr essur e Sens or Number
91 No. 1
93 No. 2
95 No. 3
97 No. 4
4. Do t he ti re pr essur e sensor l ocat i on pr ocedur e t o
t i re pr essur e s ens or number (see page 18-61).
NO-Chec k t hat t he t i re pr essur e sensor i s properl y
mount ed. If nec essar y, r epl ace t he appropri at e t i re
pr essur e sensor (see page 18-84).B
Is DTC 91, 93, 95, or 97 indicated?
YES - Repl ac e t he appropri at e ti re pr essur e sensor
(see page 18-84) and r echeck. If DTCs are sti ll pr esent ,
18-83), and r ec hec k . B
NO-l f any ot her DTCs ar e i ndi cat ed, t r oubl eshoot t he
appropri at e DTC. If no DTCs ar e i ndi cat ed, t he syst em
i s OK at t hi s t i me. B
18-77
TPMS
Sympt om Troubleshooting
Loiw t i re pr essur e Indi cat or does not c ome on,
and no DTCs are st or ed
NOTE: Chec k f or gauge DTCs wi t h t he HDS (see page
22-3). If gauge DTCs ar e st or ed, t r oubl eshoot t hose DTCs
f i rst .
1. Tur n t he i gni t i on swi t ch to ON (ll).
2. Chec k t he l ow ti re pr essur e i ndi cat or f or sever al
sec onds when t he i gni ti on swi t c h i s t ur ned ON (II).
Did the indicator come on, and then go off?
NO-Do t he t r oubl eshoot i ng f or t he gauge cont rol
modul e (see page 22-332). If nec essar y, subst i t ut e a
known-good gauge cont rol modul e (see page 22-351),
and r ec hec k . B
4. St op t he vehi c l e, and l ower t he pr essur e in eac h ti re
unti l t he l ow ti re pr essur e i ndi cat or c omes on (see
t abl e).
NOTE:
Rei nf l at e t he ti re bef ore cont i nui ng to t he next t i re.
Af t er noti ng whet her t he l ow ti re pr essur e i ndi cat or
c ame on, make sur e it goes off when you rei nflate
t he ti re bef ore pr oceedi ng to t he next t i re.
If 5 mi nut es has passed si nc e f i ni shi ng t he l ast
t est -dr i ve, react i vat e t he appropri at e ti re pr essur e
sensor usi ng t he TPMS t ool (see page 18-61).
Model Spec i f i ed Ti r e Pr essur e L ower
Li mi t
16 i nch wheel s 168 kPa (1.7 kgf /cm
2
, 24 psi )
17 i nch wheel s 175 kPa (1.8 kgf /cm
2
, 25 psi )
Does the indicator come on when the pressure drops
below the specified tire pressure lower limit?
YE S - Th e syst em i s OK at t hi s t i me.B
NO- Go to st ep 5.
5. Do t he t i re pr essur e sensor l ocat i on pr ocedur e t o
NO-Chec k t hat t he ti re pr essur e sensor i s properl y
mount ed. If nec essar y, r epl ace t he appropri at e ti re
pr essur e sensor (see page 18-84).B
PRE S S URE in t he TPMS DATA L IST wi t h t he HDS, and
c ompar e wi t h t he act ual measur ed ti re pr essur e.
Is the indicated tire pressure on the HDS within 40 kPa
(0.4 kgf/cm
2
, 6 psi) of the actual tire pressure?
YE S - Go to step7,
NO-Repl ac e t he appropri at e ti re pr essur e sensor (see
page 1S-S4).U
18-78
9. Measur e t he vol t age bet ween TPMS cont rol uni t 20P
r - ~
GND (BLK)
It
1 |/VJ 4 \A/\ T 18 l/lTo
IG1 (BRN)
I s fftere battery voltage?
YES - Repai r a shor t to power in t he wi r e bet ween t he
TPMS cont rol uni t and t he No. 5 (7.5 A) f use i n t he
dr i ver ' s under -dash f use/r el ay box.i l
NO-Chec k f or l oose t er mi nal s and poor connect i ons
r ec hec k.B
L ow t i re pr essur e i ndi cat or does not go off,
and no DTCs ar e st or ed
4. Chec k t he l ow t i re pr essur e i ndi cat or f or sever al
sec onds when t he i gni ti on swi t c h i s t ur ned ON (II).
YES - Ch ec k f or l oose t er mi nal s and poor c onnec t i ons
r e c h e c k
NO-Do t he t r oubl eshoot i ng f or t he gauge cont rol
and r ec hec k.B
18-79
TPMS
Symptom Troubleshooting (cont'd)
TPMS i ndi cat or does not c ome on, and no
DTCs ar e st or ed
2. Di sconnect t he TPMS cont rol uni t 20P c onnec t or .
4. Chec k t he TPMS i ndi cat or f or sever al s ec onds when
t he i gni t i on swi t c h i s t ur ned ON (II).
Did the indicator come on?
YES - Ch ec k f or l oose t er mi nal s and poor c onnec t i ons
r ec hec k . B
NO-Do t he t r oubl eshoot i ng f or t he gauge cont r ol
and r ec hec k . B
TPMS i ndi cat or does not go off, and no DTCs
are st or ed
NOTE:
Chec k f or gauge DTCs wi t h t he HDS (see page 22-3). If
mul t i pl e DTCs ar e pr esent , i ncl udi ng U0029,
t r oubl eshoot t hose DTCs f i rst . If onl y DTC U0029 i s
pr esent , cont i nue wi t h t he f ol l owi ng t r oubl eshoot i ng.
If t he TPMS cont rol uni t was r epl ac ed, t he TPMS
i ndi cat or wi l l be on unti l all f our sensor ID c odes ar e
l ear ned.
2. Chec k t he TPMS i ndi cat or f or sever al sec onds when
t he i gni ti on swi t c h i s t ur ned to ON (II).
Did the indicator come on and then go off?
YE S - Th e syst em i s OK at t hi s t i me. B
NO- Go to st ep 3.
4. Chec k t he No. 29 (7.5 A) f use i n t he dr i ver ' s
Is the fuse blown?
NO-Rei nst al l t he c hec ked f use, t hen go to st ep 7.
18-80
6. Wi t h t he No. 29 (7.5 A) f use r emoved, check f or
cont i nui t y bet ween body gr ound and TPMS cont rol
uni t 20P connect or t er mi nal No. 10.
+B( WHT)
1 1/1/1
4
I/]/] 7 j 8 |/110
11
YES - Repai r a shor t to body gr ound i n t he wi r e
bet ween t he No. 29 (7.5 A) f use in t he dr i ver ' s
under -dash f use/r el ay box and t he TPMS cont rol
uni t . B
NO-l nst al l a new No. 29 (7.5 A) f use in t he dr i ver ' s
7. Chec k t he No. 5 (7.5 A) f use in t he dr i ver ' s under -dash
f use/r el ay box.
Is the fuse blown?
NO-Rei nst al l t he f use, t hen go to st ep 13.
9. Wi t h t he No. 5 (7.5 A) f use r emoved, check f or
cont i nui t y bet ween body gr ound and TPMS cont rol
uni t 20P connect or t er mi nal No. 8.
YES - Repai r a shor t to body gr ound in t he wi r e
bet ween t he No. 5 (7.5 A) f use in t he dr i ver ' s
under -dash f use/r el ay box and the TPMS cont rol
uni t . B
NO-l nst al l a new No. 5 (7.5 A) f use in t he dr i ver ' s
(cont' d)
18-81
TPMS
Symptom Troubl eshoot i ng (cont'd)
10. Reconnect t he TPMS cont rol uni t 20P connect or .
12. Chec k t he TPMS i ndi cat or f or sever al sec onds when
t he i gni ti on swi t ch i s t ur ned ON (II).
YES-Tr oubl eshoot i ng i s c o mpl et e. !
NO-Chec k for l oose t er mi nal s and poor connect i ons
r ec hec k . B
14. Measur e t he vol t age bet ween body gr ound and TPMS
cont rol uni t 20P connect or t er mi nal No. 10
Wire side of f ema l e terminals
cont rol uni t 20P connect or t er mi nal No. 8.
cont rol uni t and t he No. 5 (7.5 A) f use i n t he dr i ver ' s
under -dash f use/r el ay b o x . B
cont rol uni t and t he No. 29 (7.5 A) f use in t he dr i ver ' s
under -dash f use/r el ay box. H
1
o oo
TPMS Control Unit Replace
18. Reconnect t he TPMS cont rol unit 20P connect or .
cont rol uni t 20P c onnec t or t er mi nal No. 4.
GND (BLK)
1 l/ l/ Rl/ l/ l^lsMiQ
Is there 0.1 Vor more?
YES - Repai r an open or hi gh r esi st ance i n t he wi r e
bet ween t he TPMS cont rol uni t and body gr ound
(G503).H
IMO-Do t he t r oubl eshoot i ng f or t he gauge cont rol
modul e (see page 22-332). If t he gauge cont rol
modul e i s OK, check for l oose t er mi nal s and poor
connect i ons at t he TPMS cont rol uni t. If nec essar y,
18-83), and r ec hec k . B
NOTE: Make sur e t he TPMS cont rol uni t mount i ng
bracket i s not bent or t wi st ed as t hi s may affect i ts
c ommuni c at i on wi t h t he ti re pr essur e s ens or s .
2. Remove t he f l ange bolt (A), t hen r emove t he TPMS
cont rol uni t (B) wi t h t he bracket (C).
NOTE: The TPMS cont rol uni t i s l ocat ed over t he
accel er at or pedal modul e.
A
6x 1.0 mm
9.8 N-m (1.0 kgf m, 7.2 Ibf-ft)
C B
3. Di sconnect t he TPMS cont rol uni t connect or (D).
(cont' d)
1 S*83
WMS
TPIVIS Control Unit Replacement
(cont'd)
4. Remove t he TPMS cont rol uni t (A) f r om t he bracket
(B).
NOTE: To di sc onnec t t he TPMS cont rol uni t f r om its
bracket , i nser t a smal l f l at -t i pped sc r ewdr i ver (C)
bet ween t he TPMS cont rol uni t and t he bracket to
r el ease t he hook (D), t hen sl i de out t he TPMS cont rol
uni t.
D B
5. Install t he TPMS cont rol uni t in t he r ever se or der of
r emoval .
NOTE: Make sur e t he TPMS cont rol uni t i s properl y
i nst al l ed. You wi l l hear a cl i ck when t he TPMS cont rol
uni t i s sec ur el y mount ed on t he bracket .
6. Connec t t he HDS, and memor i ze t he ti re pr essur e
sensor IDs usi ng t he TPMS t ool (see page 18-60).
Tire Pressure Sensor Replacement
Removal
[ NOTICEl
Eac h t i re pr essur e sensor cont ai ns a li thi um anode
battery t hat i s not r emovabl e. The compl et e ti re pr essur e
sensor shoul d be di sposed of accor di ng to l ocal battery
di sposal gui del i nes or r equi r ement s. An i mpr oper l y
di sposed of battery can be harmf ul to t he envi r onment .
2. Remove t he wheel wi t h t he f ault y sensor .
3. Remove t he ti re val ve st em c ap and t he val ve st em
cor e to def l at e t he t i re.
4. Remove any bal ance wei ght s, and t hen break t he
bead l oose f rom t he wheel wi t h a c ommer c i al l y
avai l abl e t i re changer ( A ) .
[JgOTTOEzl '
Note t hese i t ems to avoi d damagi ng t he ti re pr essur e
sensor :
Do t he out si de of t he wheel fi rst.
Posi t i on t he wheel as shown so t he val ve st em (B) i s
90 degr ees f r om t he bead breaker (C) as shown.
Do not posi t i on t he bead breaker of t he ti re c hanger
t oo c l ose to t he r i m.
18-84
5. Posi t i on t he wheel so that t he ti re machi ne (A) and t he
t i re i ron (B) ar e next to t he val ve st em (C), and wi l l
move away f r om it when the machi ne st art s. Then
r emove t he ti re f r om t he wheel .
6. Remove t he val ve st em nut (A) and t he washer (B),
t hen r emove t he ti re pr essur e sensor wi t h t he val ve
st em (C) f r om t he wheel .
NOTE: Check t he nut and t he washer ; if t hey have
det eri orat i on or damage, r epl ace t hem wi t h new ones
duri ng r eassembl y.
7. Remove and di sc ar d t he val ve st em gr ommet (A)
f r om t he ti re pr essur e sensor (B).
NOTE:
The val ve st em gr ommet mi ght st ay i n t he wheel ;
make sur e you r emove it.
Al ways use a new val ve st em gr ommet whenever
t he t i re pr essur e sensor has been r emoved f r om t he
wheel , or when r epl aci ng t he t i re.
(c ont ' d)
18-85
TPMS
Ti re Pr essur e Sensor Repl acement (cont' d)
i nst al l at i on
NOTE:
Use onl y wheel s t hat have a " TPMS " , " TA0" , or " TEO"
st amp (A) on t he i nsi de of t he al umi num wheel s , and
t he out si de of t he st eel wheel s.
The vehi c l e may be equi pped wi t h one of t he si x t ypes
of wheel s.
Ty pe 1 (al umi num wheel ) Ty pe 2 (al umi num wheel )
Ty pe 3 (al umi num wheel ) Ty pe 4 (al umi num wheel )
Type 6 (st eel wheel )
1. Bef ore i nst al l i ng t he ti re pr essur e sensor , cl ean t he
mat i ng sur f ac es on t he sensor and t he wheel .
2. Inst al l t he ti re pr essur e sensor (A) and t he washer (B)
t o t he wheel (C), and ti ghten t he val ve st em nut (D)
f i nger ti ght. Make sur e t he pr essur e sensor i s rest i ng
on t he wheel .
NOTE: Install t he ti re pr essur e sensor so that t he
sensor housi ng sur f ace (E) shoul d not exc eed t he
pr ot r usi on (F) of t he wheel to prevent t he sensor
housi ng f r om bei ng caught on t he bead of t he ti re
when assembl i ng t he t i re. Be sur e to al ways mount
t he ti re pr essur e sensor wi t h t he feet (G) in t he
downwar d posi t i on t owar d t he wheel .
OUTS I DE
WHEEL Cf cNTER
D
4 N-m
(0.4 kgf-m, 3 I bfft)
3. Ti ght en t he val ve st em nut to t he speci f i ed t or que
whi l e hol di ng t he ti re pr essur e sensor .
NOTE:
Do not use ai r or el ect ri c i mpact t ool s to t i ght en a
val ve st em nut.
Do not t wi st t he ti re pr essur e sensor to adj ust its
posi t i on wi t h t he wheel , as t hi s wi l l damage or
def orm t he val ve st em gr ommet .
18-86
4. Lube t he ti re bead spar i ngl y wi t h a past e-t ype t i re
mount i ng l ubri cant , and posi t i on t he wheel so t hat t he
t i re machi ne (A) i s next to t he val ve st em (B) and wi l l
move away f r om it when t he mac hi ne st art s. Then
i nst al l t he ti re onto t he wheel .
5. Wi t h a dry ai r sour c e, i nflate t he ti re to 300 kPa
(3.1 kgf /c m
2
, 44 psi ) to seat t he ti re bead to t he r i m,
t hen adj ust t he ti re pr essur e (see page 18-5), and
i nst al l t he val ve st em c ap.
NOTE: Make sur e t he ti re bead i s seat ed on both si des
of t he ri m evenl y.
6. Chec k and adj ust t he wheel bal anc e, t hen i nst al l t he
wheel s on t he vehi c l e.
7. Lower t he vehi cl e. Tor que t he wheel nut s to
speci f i cat i ons (see st ep 2 on page 18-14).
8. Connec t t he HDS, and memor i ze t he pr essur e s ens or
IDs usi ng t he TPMS t ool (see page 18-60).
18-87
SUPPL EMENTAL RESTRAINT S YS TEM (SRS) (if br akes mai nt enance i s requi red)
The Ac c or d S RS i nc l udes a dr i ver ' s ai r bag in t he st eer i ng wheel hub, a passenger ' s ai r bag i n t he dashboar d
roof, and si de ai r bags i n t he front seat -bac ks. Inf ormat i on nec essar y to saf el y ser vi c e t he S RS i s i ncl uded in t hi s
To avoi d r ender i ng t he S RS i noper at i ve, whi c h c oul d l ead to per sonal i nj ury or deat h i n t he event of a sever e
Impr oper ser vi c e pr oc edur es, i ncl udi ng i ncor r ect r emoval and i nst al l at i on of t he S RS , c oul d l ead to per sonal
especi al l y when t he i gni t i on swi t c h i s i n ON (II), or f or at l east 3 mi nut es after t he i gni t i on swi t ch i s t ur ned to
L OCK (0); ot her wi se, t he syst em may f ai l i n a c ol l i si on, or t he ai r bags may depl oy.
S RS el ect r i cal c onnec t or s ar e i dent i f i ed by yel l ow col or c odi ng. Rel at ed c omponent s ar e l ocat ed in t he
i n t he f ront seat s, i n t he roof si de, and ar ound t he f l oor. Do not use el ect r i cal t est equi pment on t hese ci r cui t s.
Brakes
Convent i onal Brake Component s
VS A Syst em Component s
Brakes
Convent i onal Brake Components
S pec i al T o o l s . . . 19-2
Co mpo nent L oc at i on I ndex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19- 3
Brake System I nspection and Test. 19-4
S ymptom Troubl eshooti ng. 19-5
Brake Pedal and Brake Pedal Position Switch
Adjustment 19-6
Parking Brake Inspection and Adjustment 19-8
Brake System B leeding 19-9
Brake System Indicator Circuit Diagram 19-11
Parking Brake Switch Test .19-12
Brake Fl ui d Level Switch Test 19-12
F ront Brake Pad I nspection and Replacement. ...19-13
F ront Brake Disc I nspection 19-19
F ront Brake Disc Replacement .19-21
F ront Brake Caliper Overhaul 19-22
Master Cylinder Replacement 19-26
Master Cylinder I nspection 19-27
B rake B ooster Test 19-28
Brake B ooster Replacement 19-29
Rear Brake Pad I nspection and Replacement. . . . . . . . . 19-30
Rear Brake Disc Inspection 19-33
Rear Brake Disc Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-34
Rear Brake Caliper Overhaul 19-36
Brake Pedal Replacement 19-38
B rake Hose and Line I nspection 19-39
Brake Hose Replacement 19-40
Parking Brake Cable Replacement ..19-42
Speci al Tool s
Ref .No. Tool Number Descr i pt i on Of f
07AAE-SEPA101 Br ake Cal i per Pi st on Compr essor 1
19-2
MAS TER CYL I NDER
Brake System Bleeding, page 19-9
BRAK E BOOS TER
Test, page 19-28
BRAK E S YS TE M INDICATOR
Parking Brake Switch Test, page 19-12
Brake F luid Level Switch Test, page 19-12
BRAK E HOS E and L INE
Brake Hose
FRONT BRAK E
Pad Inspection and Replacement, page 19-13
Disc inspection, page 19-19
Disc Replacement, page 19-21
Caliper Overhaul, page 19-22
REAR BRAK E
Pad Inspection and
Disc inspection, page 19-33
Disc Replacement page 19-34
Caliper Overhaul, page 19-36
PARK ING BRAK E
Inspection and Adjustment, page 19-8
Cable Replacement, page 19-42
BRAK E PEDAL
Brake Pedal and Brake Pedal
Position Switch Adjustment, page 19-6
Conventi onal Brake Component s
Brake Syst em Inspect i on and Test
Inspect t he brake syst em c omponent s l i st ed. Repai r or r epl ace any part s t hat ar e l eaki ng or damaged.
Component Inspect i ons:
Component Pr oc edur e Al so c hec k f or
Mast er Cyl i nder Look f or damage or si gns of f l ui d l eakage at:
Reser voi r or r eser voi r gr ommet s.
Li ne j oi nt s.
Bet ween mast er cyl i nder and boost er .
Bul gi ng seal at r eser voi r c ap. Thi s i s a
si gn of f l ui d cont ami nat i on.
Br ake Hoses Look f or damage or si gns of f l ui d l eakage at:
Li ne j oi nt s and banj o bolt c onnec t i ons.
Hoses and l i nes, al so i nspect for t wi st i ng or
damage.
Bul gi ng, t wi st ed, or bent l i nes.
Cal i per Look f or damage or si gns of f l ui d l eakage at:
Pi st on seal .
Banj o bolt c onnec t i ons.
Bl eed sc r ew.
Sei zed or st i cki ng cal i per pi ns.
VS A Modul at or-
cont rol Uni t
Look f or damage or si gns of f l ui d l eakage at:
Li ne j oi nt s.
m o d u 1 at or-cont ro 1 uni t.
Br ake Syst em Test
Br ake pedal si nks/ f ades when br aki ng
1. Set t he parki ng br ake, and st art t he engi ne, t hen t urn off t he A/ C. Al l ow t he engi ne to war m up to nor mal operat i ng
t emper at ur e (radi ator f an c omes on t wi ce).
2. At t ach a 50 mm (2 in) pi ece of maski ng t ape al ong t he bot t om of t he st eer i ng wheel , and dr aw a hori zont al r ef er ence
mark ac r oss it.
3. Wi t h t he t r ansmi ssi on in neut ral (M/T) or P or N (A/T), pr ess and hol d t he brake pedal li ghtly (about t he s ame pr essur e
needed to keep an A/T-equi pped vehi c l e f r om cr eepi ng), t hen r el ease t he parki ng brake.
4. Whi l e sti ll hol di ng t he brake pedal , hook t he end of t he t ape measur e behi nd t he brake pedal , t hen pull t he t ape up to
t he st eer i ng wheel . Note t he measur ement bet ween t he brake pedal and t he r ef er ence mar k on t he st eer i ng wheel .
5. Appl y st eady pr essur e to t he brake pedal f or 3 mi nut es.
6. Wat c h t he t ape measur e.
If t he measur ement i nc r eases 10 mm (0.39 in) or l ess, t he mast er cyl i nder i s OK.
If t he measur ement i nc r eases mor e t han 10 mm (0.39 i n), r epl ace t he mast er cyl i nder .
19-4
Sympt om Troubl eshoot i ng
Rapid brake pad wear , vehi cl e vibration
(after a long dr i ve), or hi gh, hard brake pedal
NOTE: Make sur e t hat t he cal i per pi ns ar e i nst al l ed
cor r ect l y. Upper cal i per pin B and l ower cal i per pi n A are
di fferent. If t hese cal i per pi ns ar e i nst al l ed i n t he wr ong
l ocat i on, it wi l l c aus e vi br at i on, uneven or r api d brake
pad wear , and possi bl y uneven ti re wear . For pr oper
cal i per pi n l ocat i on: NISSIN t ype (see page 19-22),
AK EBONO t ype (see page 19-24).
1. Dri ve t he vehi cl e unti l t he br akes drag or unti l t he
pedal i s hi gh and har d. Thi s c an take 20 or mor e brake
pedal appl i cat i ons duri ng an ext ended t est -dr i ve.
2. Wi t h t he engi ne r unni ng, r ai se and suppor t t he
vehi cl e (see page 1-13), and spi n all f our wheel s by
hand.
Is there brake drag at any of the wheels?
NO-L ook f or ot her c aus es of pad wear , hi gh pedal , or
vehi cl e v i b r at i o n.
3. Tur n t he i gni ti on swi t ch to L OCK (0), pr ess t he brake
pedal sever al t i mes to depl et e t he vac uum in t he
brake boost er , and t hen spi n t he wheel s agai n to
check f or brake dr ag.
NO-Repl ac e t he brake boost er (see page 19-29).H
4. Wi t hout r emovi ng t he brake l i nes, unbol t and
separ at e t he mast er cyl i nder f r om t he brake boost er ,
t hen spi n t he wheel s to check f or brake dr ag.
NO-Chec k t he brake pedal posi t i on swi t ch adj ust ment
and pedal f ree pl ay (see page 19-6).B
5. Loosen t he hydr aul i c l i nes at t he mast er cyl i nder , t hen
spi n t he wheel s to c hec k f or brake dr ag.
NO-Chec k t he mast er cyl i nder r eser voi r f or
cont ami nat i on i n t he brake f l ui d. If you f i nd
cont ami nat i on, f l ush t he ent i re brake syst em of all
cont ami nat ed f l ui d, t hen r epl ace al l rubber part s in
t he brake syst em that wer e exposed t o cont ami nat ed
f l ui d. If t he brake f l ui d i s OK , r epl ace t he mast er
cyl i nder (see page 19- 26) . !
6. Loosen t he bl eed sc r ews at eac h cal i per , t hen spi n t he
wheel s to c hec k f or brake dr ag.
YES - Ch ec k t he mast er cyl i nder r eser voi r f or
cont ami nat i on in t he brake f l ui d. If you f i nd
cont ami nat i on, f l ush t he ent i re brake syst em of all
cont ami nat ed f l ui d, t hen r epl ace all rubber part s in
t he brake syst em that wer e exposed to cont ami nat ed
f l ui d. If t he brake f l ui d i s OK , di sassembl e and repai r
t he cal i per on t he wheel (s) wi t h brake dr ag. H
NO-L ook f or and r epl ace any damaged brake l i nes. If
all brake l i nes ar e OK, r epl ace t he VS A
modul at or -cont r ol unit (see page 19- 136) .
19-5
Ir ak Pedal and Brake Pedal Position Switch Adjustment
Pedal Hei ght
1. Tur n the brake pe da l posi ti on swi t ch 45
c ount er c l oc kwi se, and pull it back unti l it i s no l onger
t ouchi ng t he brake pedal .
2. Remove t he f oot rest (see st ep 4 on page 20-151), t hen
r emove t he st eer i ng j oi nt c over (see page 17-10).
3. Pull back t he car pet , and f i nd t he cut out (A) i n t he
i nsul at i on. Measur e t he pedal hei ght (B) f r om left si de
mi ddl e of t he brake pedal pad (C) to t he f l oor (D)
wi t hout t he i nsul at i on as shown.
St andar d pedal hei ght (wi t h car pet r emoved):
M/T: 156 mm (6.1 i n)
A/ T: 155 mm (6.1 i n)
M/ T
D
4. Loosen t he pushr od locknut (A), and sc r ew t he
pushr od (B) i n or out wi t h pl i er s unti l t he st andar d
pedal hei ght f r om t he f l oor i s r eac hed. After
adj ust ment , t i ght en t he l ocknut f i rml y. Do not adj ust
t he pedal hei ght wi t h t he pushr od pr essed.
19-6
Br ake Pedal Posi t i on S wi t c h Adj ust ment
5. Lift up on t he brake pedal by hand. Push i n t he brake
pedal posi t i on swi t ch unti l its pl unger i s f ul l y pr essed
(t hreaded end (A) t ouchi ng t he pad (B) on t he pedal
ar m). Tur n t he swi t ch 45 cl ockwi se to lock it. The gap
bet ween t he brake pedal posi t i on swi t ch and t he pad
i s aut omat i cal l y adj ust ed to 0.7 mm (0.028 i n) by
l ocki ng t he swi t c h. Make sur e t he brake li ght s go off
when t he pedal i s r el eased.
Co
Pedal Fr ee Pl ay
1. Wi t h t he i gni t i on swi t ch in L OCK (0), i nspect t he free
pl ay (A) at t he pedal pad (B) by pushi ng t he brake
pedal by hand. If t he brake pedal f ree pl ay i s out of
speci f i cat i on, adj ust t he brake pedal posi t i on swi t ch
(C). If t he brake pedal f ree pl ay i s i nsuf f i ci ent , it may
resul t i n brake dr ag.
Fr ee pl ay: 1 5 mm (0.040.20 i n)
Co\
I Id) kJr$Y
X
6. Install all r emoved part s i n t he r ever se or der of
r emoval .
7. Chec k t he brake pedal f r ee pl ay.
19-7
Parking Brake Inspection and Adjustment
Inspect i on
1. Pull t he parki ng brake l ever (A) wi t h 196 N
(20 kgf, 44 Ibf) of f or ce to f ul l y appl y t he parki ng brake.
The parki ng brake l ever shoul d be l ocked wi t hi n t he
speci f i ed number of cl i cks.
Lever l oc ked c l i c ks: 7 t o 9 c l i c ks
Pul l ed bac k wi t h
196 N
(20
44 Ibf)
2. If t he number of l ever cl i cks i s not as spec i f i ed, adj ust
t he parki ng brake.
Adj ust ment
2. Pull out t he cent er c onsol e rear t ri m (A) (see page
20-160).
3. Loosen t he parki ng brake adj ust i ng nut (B).
19-8
Brake Sf stem Bleeding
6. Make sur e t he l ever (A) on t he rear brake cal i per
cont act s t he ar m (B).
NOTE. The l ever wi l l cont act t he ar m when t he
parki ng brake adj ust i ng nut i s l oosened.
7. Cl ean t he mat i ng sur f ac es bet ween t he brake di sc and
t he i nsi de of t he wheel , t hen i nst al l t he rear wheel s.
8. Pull t he parki ng brake l ever 1 cl i ck.
9. Ti ght en t he parki ng brake adj ust i ng nut until t he
parki ng br akes dr ag sl i ght l y when t he rear wheel s are
t ur ned.
10. Rel ease t he parki ng brake l ever f ul l y, and check t hat
t he parki ng br akes do not drag when t he rear wheel s
ar e t ur ned. Readj ust if nec essar y.
11. Make sur e t he parki ng brake l ever i s wi t hi n t he
speci f i ed number of cl i cks (7 to 9 cl i cks).
12. Install t he cent er consol e rear t ri m (see page 20-160).
NOTE:
Do not r euse t he dr ai ned f l ui d. Us e onl y new Honda
DOT 3 Br ake Fl ui d f r om an unopened cont ai ner . Usi ng
a non-Honda brake f l ui d c an c ause c or r osi on and
shor t en t he life of t he syst em.
Make sur e no di rt or ot her f orei gn mat t er get s in t he
brake f l ui d.
t he pai nt . If brake f l ui d does cont act t he pai nt , was h it
off i mmedi at el y wi t h wat er .
The r eser voi r c onnec t ed to t he mast er cyl i nder must
be at t he MAX (upper) l evel mark at t he st art of t he
bl eedi ng pr ocedur e and checked after bl eedi ng each
wheel l ocat i on. Add f l ui d as r equi r ed.
1. Make sur e t he brake f l ui d l evel in t he r eser voi r (A) i s at
t he MAX (upper) l evel li ne (B).
2. Have someone sl owl y pump t he brake pedal sever al
t i mes, t hen appl y st eady pr essur e.
3. St art t he bl eedi ng at t he dr i ver ' s si de of t he front
brake syst em.
NOTE: Bl eed t he cal i per s in t he sequenc e shown.
BLEEDING SEQUENCE:
Fr ont Ri ght Rear Ri ght
(DFr ont Lef t Rear Left
(cont' d)
19-9
Brake Sf stem Bleeding (cont'd)
4. At t ach a length of cl ear drai n t ube (A) to t he bl eed
s c r ew ( B) , t hen l oosen t he bl eed s c r ew to al l ow ai r to
esc ape f r om t he s y s t em. Then t i ght en t he bl eed s c r ew
sec ur el y.
NOTE: The i l l ust rat i ons s how t he NISSIN t ype.
Fr ont
Rear
B
9 N-m (0.9 kgf m, 7 I bfft)
5. Ref i l l t he mast er cyl i nder r eser voi r to t he MAX (upper)
l evel l i ne.
6. Repeat t he pr ocedur e f or eac h brake ci r cui t unti l t her e
ar e no ai r bubbl es i n t he f l ui d.
19-10
Brake Sf stem Indicator Circuit Diagram
GAUGE C ONT R OL MODULE
INDICATOR DRIVER CI RCUI T
BRAK E S YS TE M INDICATOR
30
29
WHT
RED -
VS A MODUL ATOR-
CONTROL UNIT
(Br ake syst em i ndi cat or
dr i ve si gnal )
22
GRN
BRAK E FL UID
L EVEL SWI TCH
CL OS ED: Fl oat down
OPEN: Fl oat up
23
L T GRN
PARKING BRAK E SWITCH
CL OS ED: Par ki ng brake appl i ed
OPEN: Par ki ng brake r el eased
BLK
i
G302
Convent i onal Brake Co mpo nent s
Parking Brake Switch Test Brake fluid Level Switch Test
NOTE: if both t he ABS / VS A i ndi cat or and t he brake
syst em i ndi cat or c ome on at t he s ame t i me, c hec k t he
VS A syst em f or DTCs fi rst (see page 19-48).
2. Di sconnect t he parki ng brake swi t c h connect or (A)
f r om t he parki ng brake swi t ch (B).
3. Chec k f or cont i nui t y bet ween t he swi t c h t er mi nal (C)
and body gr ound.
Wi t h t he parki ng brake l ever pul l ed, t her e shoul d be
cont i nui t y.
Wi t h t he parki ng brake l ever r el eased, t her e shoul d
be no cont i nui t y.
NOTE: If t he parki ng brake swi t c h and t he brake f l ui d
l evel swi t ch ar e OK, but t he brake syst em i ndi cat or
does not f unct i on, do t he gauge cont rol modul e
sel f -di agnost i c f unct i on (see page 22-332).
4. Rec onnec t t he parki ng brake swi t ch connect or .
NOTE: If both t he ABS A/ S A i ndi cat or and t he brake
syst em i ndi cat or c ome on at t he s ame t i me, check t he
VS A syst em f or DTCs f i rst (see page 19-48).
1. Di sconnect t he brake f l ui d l evel swi t ch connect or .
2. Chec k f or cont i nui t y bet ween t he t er mi nal s (1) and (2)
wi t h t he float i n t he down posi t i on and i n t he up
posi t i on.
NOTE:
Remove t he brake f l ui d compl et el y f r om t he
r eser voi r . Wi t h t he float down, t her e shoul d be
cont i nui t y.
Fi ll t he r eser voi r wi t h brake f l ui d to t he MAX (upper)
l evel (A). Wi t h t he float up, t her e shoul d be no
cont i nui t y.
If t he parki ng brake swi t ch and brake f l ui d l evel
swi t ch ar e OK , but t he brake syst em i ndi cat or does
not f unct i on, do t he gauge cont rol modul e
3. Reconnect t he brake f l ui d l evel swi t ch connect or .
19-12
Front Brake Pad Inspection and Replacement
Brake Cal i per Pi st on Compr essor 07AAE-SEPA101
Fr equent i nhal at i on of brake pad dust , r egar dl ess of
mat eri al c omposi t i on, coul d be hazar dous to your
heal t h.
Avoi d br eat hi ng dust par t i cl es.
Never use an ai r hose or br ush t o c l ean brake
assembl i es. Us e an OSHA-appr oved vac uum
cl eaner .
Inspect i on - NISSIN Type
3. Remove t he brake hose mount i ng bolt (A).
C
4. Remove t he f l ange bolt (B) whi l e hol di ng t he cal i per
pi n (C) wi t h a wr enc h. Be car ef ul not to damage t he
pi n boot , and pi vot t he cal i per (D) up out of t he way.
Chec k t he hose and pi n boot s f or damage and
det eri orat i on.
5. Chec k t he t hi c kness (A) of t he i nner pad (B) and t he
out er pad (C). Do not i ncl ude t he t hi c kness of t he
backi ng pl at e.
Br ake pad t hi c kness:
St andar d: 10.5 - 1 1 . 2 mm (0.41 - 0.44 in)
B
6. If any part of t he brake pad t hi ckness i s l ess t han t he
ser vi c e li mi t , r epl ace t he f ront brake pads as a set .
7. Pi vot t he cal i per down i nto posi t i on. Install t he f l ange
bolt (A), and t i ght en it to t he speci f i ed t or que whi l e
hol di ng t he cal i per pi n (B) wi t h a wr enc h bei ng caref ul
not to damage t he pi n boot .
8. Inst al l t he brake hose mount i ng bolt (C).
9. Cl ean' t he mat i ng sur f ac es bet ween t he brake di sc and
t he i nsi de of t he wheel , t hen i nstall t he front wheel s.
(cont' d)
19-13
Front Brake Pad Inspection and Replacement (cont'd)
Repl acement - IMISSIN Type
1. Remove some brake f l ui d f r om t he mast er cyl i nder .
C
5. Remove t he f l ange bolt (B) whi l e hol di ng t he cal i per
pi n (C) wi t h a wr enc h. Be caref ul not to damage t he
pi n boot, and pi vot t he cal i per (D) up out of t he way.
Chec k t he hose and t he pi n boot s f or damage and
det eri orat i on.
7. Remove t he pad r et ai ner s (A).
8. Cl ean t he cal i per bracket (B) t hor oughl y; r emove any
r ust , and check f or gr ooves and c r ac ks. Veri f y that t he
cal i per pi ns (C) move i n and out smoot hl y. Cl ean and
l ube if needed.
9. Inspect t he brake di sc f or runout , t hi c kness,
par al l el i sm (see page 19-19), and check f or damage
and c r ac ks.
10. Appl y a t hi n coat of M-77 assembl y past e (P/N
08798-9010) to t he ret ai ner mat i ng sur f ac e of t he
cal i per bracket (i ndi cat ed by t he ar r ows).
11. Inst al l t he pad r et ai ner s. Wi pe ex c es s assembl y past e
off t he r et ai ner s. Keep t he assembl y past e off t he
di sc and t he brake pads.
19-14
12. Install t he brake cal i per pi st on c ompr essor tool (A) on
t he cal i per body (B).
13. Pr ess i n t he pi st on wi t h t he brake cal i per pi st on
c ompr essor tool so t he cal i per wi l l fit over t he brake
pads. Make sur e t he pi st on boot i s in posi t i on to
pr event damagi ng it when pi voti ng t he cal i per down.
NOTE: Be caref ul when pr essi ng in t he pi st on; brake
f l ui d mi ght overf l ow f r om t he mast er c yl i nder ' s
r eser voi r . If brake f l ui d get s on any pai nt ed sur f ac e,
was h it off i mmedi at el y wi t h wat er .
14. Remove t he brake cal i per pi st on c ompr essor t ool .
08798- 9010) to t he pad si de of the shi ms (A), t he back
of t he brake pads (B) and t he other ar eas i ndi cat ed by
t he ar r ows. Wi pe exc ess assembl y past e off t he pad
shi ms and t he brake pads fri cti on mat er i al . Keep
gr ease and assembl y past e off the brake di sc and the
brake pads. Cont ami nat ed brake di sc or brake pads
r educe st oppi ng abi li ty.
16. Install t he brake pads and t he pad shi ms correct l y.
Install t he brake pad wi t h the wear i ndi cat or (C) on t he
upper i nsi de. If you are r eusi ng t he brake pads,
al ways rei nst al l t he brake pads in t hei r ori gi nal
posi t i ons to prevent a t empor ar y l oss of braki ng
ef f i ci ency.
(cont' d)
19-15
17. Pi vot t he cal i per down i nto posi t i on. Inst al l t he f l ange
bolt (A), and t i ght en it t o t he speci f i ed t or que whi l e
hol di ng t he cal i per pi n (B) wi t h a wr enc h bei ng car ef ul
not to damage t he pi n boot .
18. Install t he brake hose mount i ng bolt (C).
t he i nsi de of t he wheel , t hen i nst al l t he f ront wheel s .
20. Pr ess t he br ake pedal sever al t i mes to make sur e t he
br akes wor k.
NOTE: Engagement may r equi r e a gr eat er pedal
st roke i mmedi at el y after t he brake pads have been
r epl aced as a set . Sever al appl i cat i ons of t he br ake
pedal wi l l r est or e t he nor mal pedal st r oke.
21. Add brake f l ui d as needed.
22. Af t er i nst al l at i on, check f or l eaks at hose and li ne
j oi nt s or c onnec t i ons, and ret i ght en if nec essar y.
Test -dr i ve t he vehi c l e, t hen r echeck f or l eaks (see
page 19-39).
Inspect i on - AK EBONO Type
3. Chec k t he t hi ckness (A) of t he i nner pad (B) and t he
out er pad (C). Do not i ncl ude t he t hi ckness of t he
backi ng pl at e.
St andar d: 10. 5- 10. 8 mm (0. 41-0. 43 i n)
Inner pad
4. If any part of t he brake pad t hi ckness i s l ess t han t he
ser vi c e li mi t, r epl ace t he front brake pads as a set .
t he i nsi de of t he wheel , t hen i nst al l t he f ront wheel s.
19-16
Repl acement - AK EBONO Type
1. Remove some brake f l ui d f r om t he mast er cyl i nder .
5. Remove the f l ange bolt (B), and pi vot t he cal i per (C)
up out of t he way. Chec k t he hose and t he pi n boot s
f or damage and det eri orat i on.
6. Remove t he pad shi ms (A) and t he brake pads (B).
r ust , and check f or gr ooves and c r ac ks. Veri f y t hat t he
l ube if needed.
par al l el i sm (see page 19-19), and c hec k for damage
and c r ac ks.
10. Appl y a thi n coat of M-77 assembl y past e (P/N
08798-9010) to t he ret ai ner mat i ng sur f ace of t he
11. Inst al l t he pad r et ai ner s. Wi pe ex c es s assembl y past e
brake di sc and t he brake pads.
(cont' d)
19-17
12. Install t he brake cal i per pi st on c ompr essor tool (A) on
t he cal i per body (B).
13. Pr ess in t he pi st on wi t h t he brake cal i per pi st on
c ompr essor t ool so t he cal i per wi l l fit over t he brake
pads. Make sur e t he pi st on boot i s i n posi t i on to
prevent damagi ng it when pi vot i ng t he cal i per down.
NOTE: Be car ef ul when pr essi ng i n t he pi st on; brake
f l ui d mi ght over f l ow f r om t he mast er c yl i nder ' s
r eser voi r . If brake f l ui d get s on any pai nt ed sur f ac e,
was h it off i mmedi at el y wi t h wat er .
14. Remove t he brake cal i per pi st on c ompr essor t ool .
08798- 9010) to t he pad si de of t he shi ms (A), t he back
of t he brake pads (B) and t he ot her ar eas i ndi cat ed by
t he ar r ows. Wi pe ex c es s assembl y past e off t he pad
shi ms and t he brake pads f ri ct i on mat er i al . Keep
gr ease and assembl y past e off t he brake di sc and t he
16. Inst al l t he brake pads and t he pad shi ms cor r ect l y.
Install t he brake pad wi t h t he wear i ndi cat or (C) on t he
upper i nsi de. If you ar e r eusi ng t he brake pads,
al ways rei nst al l t he brake pads i n t hei r ori gi nal
posi t i ons t o prevent a t empor ar y l oss of braki ng
ef f i ci ency.
19-18
Front Brake Disc Inspection
17. Pi vot t he cal i per down i nto posi t i on. Inst al l t he f l ange
bolt (A), and t i ght en it to t he speci f i ed t or que.
18. Install t he brake hose mount i ng bolt (B).
t he i nsi de of t he wheel , t hen i nst al l t he f ront wheel s.
20. Pr ess t he brake pedal sever al t i mes to make sur e t he
br akes wor k.
NOTE: Engagement may requi re a gr eat er pedal
stroke- i mmedi at el y after t he brake pads have been
r epl aced as a set . Sever al appl i cat i ons of t he brake
pedal wi l l r est or e t he nor mal pedal st r oke.
22. After i nst al l at i on, check f or l eaks at hose and li ne
j oi nt s or c onnec t i ons, and reti ghten if nec essar y.
page 19-39).
Runout
3. Remove t he brake pads: NISSIN t ype (see page
19-14), AK EBONO t ype (see page 1947).
4. Inspect t he brake di sc t o wheel sur f ace f or damage
and c r ac ks. Cl ean t he brake di sc t hor oughl y, and
r emove all r ust .
5. Inst al l sui t abl e f l at was her s (A) and t he wheel nut s (B),
and t i ght en t he wheel nut s to t he speci f i ed t or que to
hol d t he brake di sc sec ur el y agai nst t he hub.
12 x 1.5 mm
108 N-m (11.0 k g f m, 80 Ibf f t )
6. Set up t he di al gauge agai nst t he brake di sc as s hown,
and measur e t he runout at 10 mm (0.39 i n) f r om t he
out er edge of t he brake di sc .
Br ake di sc r unout :
(cont' d)
19-19
Front Brake Disc inspection (cont'd)
7. If t he brake di sc i s beyond t he ser vi c e li mi t , ref i ni sh
t he brake di sc wi t h a Honda-appr oved c ommer c i al l y
avai l abl e on-c ar brake l at he.
Max. refinishing l i mi t :
NISSIN t ype: 26.0 mm (1.02 i n)
AK EBONO t ype: 21.0 mm (0.83 i n)
NOTE:
If t he brake di sc i s beyond t he ser vi c e li mi t for
r ef i ni shi ng, r epl ace it (see page 19-21).
If t he brake di sc i s r epl aced wi t h a new one, c hec k
t he new di sc for runout . If t he new di sc i s out of
speci f i cat i on, ref i ni sh t he di sc .
8. Install t he brake pads: NISSIN t ype (see page 19-14),
9. Cl ean t he mat i ng sur f ac es bp*****"
f
h e brake di sc and
t he i nsi de of t he wheel , t hen i nst al l t he front wheel s.
Thi c kness and Par al l el i sm
3. Remove t he brake pads: NISSIN t ype (see page
19-14), AK EBONO t ype (see page 19-17).
4. Usi ng a mi cr omet er , measur e t he brake di sc
t hi c kness at ei ght poi nt s, about 45 apart and
10 mm (0.39 in) in f r om t he out er edge of t he brake
di sc . Repl ace t he brake di sc if t he smal l est
measur ement i s l ess t han t he max. r ef i ni shi ng li mi t.
Br ake di sc t hi c kness:
St andar d:
NISSIN t ype: 27. 9-28. 1 mm (1.10-1.11 i n)
AK EBONO t ype: 22. 9-23. 1 mm (0.90-0.91 i n)
Max. r ef i ni shi ng l i mi t :
NISSIN t ype: 26.0 mm (1.02 i n)
AK EBONO t ype: 21.0 mm (0.83 i n)
Br ake di sc par al l el i sm: 0.015 mm (0.0006 i n) max.
NOTE: Thi s i s t he maxi mum al l owabl e di f f erence
bet ween t he t hi ckness measur ement s.
5. If t he brake di sc i s beyond t he ser vi c e li mi t f or
par al l el i sm, ref i ni sh t he brake di sc wi t h a Honda-
appr oved c ommer c i al l y avai l abl e on-car brake l at he.
NOTE: If t he brake di sc i s beyond t he ser vi c e li mi t f or
6. Install t he brake pads: NISSIN t ype (see page 19-14),
t he i nsi de of t he wheel , t hen i nst al l t he front wheel s.
Front Brake Disc Replacement
NOTE: Keep any gr ease off t he brake di sc and the brake
pads.
t hen r emove t he cal i per assembl y (C) f r om t he
knuckl e. To prevent damage to t he cal i per assembl y
5. Remove t he brake di sc f l at head sc r ews (A).
6 x 1.0 mm
9.8 N m
(1.0 kgf m, 7.2 I bfft)
6. Remove t he brake di sc (B) f r om t he front hub.
NOTE: If t he brake di sc i s st uck to t he f ront hub, t hr ead
t wo 8x 1. 25 mm bol t s (C) into t he brake di sc to push it
away f r om t he front hub. Tur n eac h bolt 90 degr ees at
a t i me to prevent t he brake di sc f rom bi ndi ng.
7. Install t he brake di sc in t he r ever se or der of r emoval .
NOTE: Bef ore i nst al l i ng t he brake di sc , cl ean t he
mat i ng sur f ac es bet ween t he front hub and t he i nsi de
of t he brake di sc .
8. Inspect t he brake di sc runout (see page 19-19).
t he i nsi de of t he wheel , t hen i nst all t he f ront wheel .
19-21
:i\ayflJ(0)(M
Fr equent i nhal at i on of brake pad dust , r egar dl ess of mat er i al c omposi t i on, coul d be hazar dous t o your heal t h.
Avoi d breat hi ng dust par t i cl es.
Never use an ai r hose or br ush t o c l ean brake assembl i es. Use an OSHA-appr oved vac uum cl eaner .
NISSINT y p e
Remove, di sassembl e, i nspect , r eassembl e, and i nst al l t he cal i per , and not e t hese i t ems:
NOTE: Make sur e that t he cal i per pi ns are i nst al l ed cor r ect l y. Upper cal i per pi n B and l ower cal i per pi n A ar e di f f er ent If
t hese cal i per pi ns are i nst al l ed i n t he wr ong l ocat i on, it wi l l c aus e vi br at i on, uneven or rapi d brake pad wear , and
possi bl y uneven ti re wear .
Do not spi l l brake f l ui d on t he vehi c l e; it may damage t he pai nt . If brake f l ui d get s on t he pai nt , was h it off i mmedi at el y
wi t h wat er .
To prevent dri ppi ng brake f l ui d, c over di sc onnec t ed hose j oi nt s wi t h c l ean r ags or shop towels.
9 Cl ean all part s in brake f l ui d and ai r dry; bl ow out all passages wi t h c ompr essed ai r.
m Ro f r t r ** r o a e c o mh l i n i f ! r^hor-lr tho* all n.sr+e or**f r A A r%f ***** Ct h Of f Cf Cl g n pSfticlSS.
Repl ace part s wi t h new ones as speci f i ed i n t he i l l ust rat i on.
Make sur e no di rt or ot her f orei gn mat t er get s i n t he brake f l ui d.
Make sur e no gr ease or oi l get s on t he brake di sc s or t he pads.
When r eusi ng brake pads, al ways rei nst al l t hem i n t hei r ori gi nal posi t i ons t o pr event l oss of braki ng ef f i ci ency.
Do not r euse dr ai ned brake f l ui d. Us e onl y new Honda DOT 3 Brake Fl ui d f r om an unopened cont ai ner . Usi ng a
non-Honda brake f l ui d c an c aus e c or r osi on and shor t en t he life of t he syst em.
Coat t he pi st on, t he pi st on seal gr oove, and t he cal i per bor e wi t h c l ean brake f l ui d.
Use r ec ommended gr eases in t he f ront cal i per set .
Af t er i nst al l i ng t he cal i per , c hec k t he brake hose and li ne f or l eaks, i nt er f er ence, and t wi st i ng.
1 ^^""^dilia
G R E A S E ^ : Honda silicone grease (P/N 08C30-B0234M)
(c ont ' d)
19-23
Front Brake Caliper Overhaul (cont' d)
AKEBOMO Type
Remove, di sassembl e, i nspect , r eassembl e, and i nst al l t he cal i per , and note t hese i t ems:
NOTE: Make sur e t hat t he cal i per pi ns are i nst al l ed cor r ect l y. Upper cal i per pi n B and l ower cal i per pi n A ar e di fferent. If
t hese cal i per pi ns ar e i nst al l ed i n t he wr ong l ocat i on, it wi l l c aus e vi br at i on, uneven or rapi d brake pad wear , and
wi t h wat er .
To pr event dri ppi ng brake f l ui d, c over di sc onnec t ed hose j oi nt s wi t h cl ean r ags or shop t owel s.
Cl ean all part s in brake flui d and ai r dry; bl ow out all passages wi t h c ompr essed ai r.
Bef or e r eassembl i ng, check t hat all part s ar e f r ee of dirt and ot her f or ei gn par t i cl es.
Repl ac e part s wi t h new ones as speci f i ed in t he i l l ust rat i on.
Make sur e no di rt or ot her f orei gn matter get s i n t he brake f l ui d.
When r eusi ng brake pads, al ways rei nst al l t hem i n t hei r ori gi nal posi t i ons to pr event l oss of braki ng ef f i ci ency.
non-Honda brake flui d can c ause cor r osi on and shor t en t he life of t he syst em.
Coat t he pi st on, t he pi st on seal gr oove, and t he cal i per bor e wi t h cl ean brake f l ui d.
Use r ec ommended gr eases i n t he front cal i per set .
Af t er i nst al l i ng t he cal i per , check t he brake hose and li ne f or l eaks, i nt er f er ence, and t wi st i ng.
19-24
' G R E A S E M I ; Honda silicone grease (P/N 08C30-B0234M)
19-
Master Cyl i nder Replacement
MOTlCil
Do not spill brake fluid on t he vehi c l e; It may damage
the paint. If brake fluid gets on t he paint, wash It off
Immedi at el y with water.
Be car ef ul not to damage or bend the brake lines
dur i ng r emoval and i nst al l at i on.
After r emoval ; plug the ends of the hoses and the
j oi nt s to pr event spi l l i ng brake f l ui d.
1. Remove the under-hood f use/r el ay box mount nut (A)
and r el ease the cl i p (B), t hen move the under-hood
f use/r el ay box (C) asi de.
A
9.3 N-m
{1.0 k g f m, 7.2 Ibf f t )
2. Remove t he r eser voi r c ap and t he brake f l ui d f r om t he
mast er cyl i nder r eser voi r wi t h a syr i nge.
3. Di sc onnec t t he brake f l ui d l evel swi t ch connect or ( A) .
G
22 N m 15 N-m
(2.2 k g f m, (1.5 k g f m,
16 Ibf f t ) 11 Ibf f t )
4. Di sc onnec t t he brake l i nes (B) f r om t he mast er
cyl i nder (C). To prevent spi l l s, c over t he hose j oi nt s
wi t h c l ean r ags or shop t owel s.
5. Remove t he mast er cyl i nder mount i ng nut s (D) and
t he was her s (E).
6. Remove t he mast er cyl i nder f r om t he brake
boost er (F). Be caref ul not to bend or damage t he
brake l i nes when r emovi ng t he mast er cyl i nder .
7. Remove t he rod seal (G) f r om t he mast er cyl i nder .
NOTE: Duri ng i nst al l at i on, set a new rod seal ont o t he
mast er cyl i nder wi t h its gr ooved si de (H) t owar d t he
mast er cyl i nder .
1 J)""l2(5
Master Cyl i nder inspection
8. Install t he mast er cyl i nder i n t he r ever se or der of
Coat t he i nner bore lip and t he out er ci r cumf er ence
of t he new rod seal wi t h t he Shi n-Et su si l i cone
gr ease (P/N 08798-9013).
Make sur e not to get any si l i cone gr ease on t he
especi al l y if you have si l i c one gr ease on your hands
or gl oves.
Chec k t he brake pedal hei ght and f r ee pl ay after
i nst al l i ng t he mast er cyl i nder , and adj ust it if
nec essar y (see page 19-6).
9. Bl eed t he brake syst em (see page 19-9).
10. Spi n t he wheel s to check f or brake dr ag.
1. Remove t he mast er cyl i nder (see page 19-26).
2. Inspect and note t hese i t ems:
Bef ore r eassembl i ng, c hec k that all parts ar e f r ee of
di rt and ot her f orei gn par t i cl es.
Do not try to di sassembl e t he mast er cyl i nder
assembl y. Repl ac e t he mast er cyl i nder assembl y
wi t h a new part , if nec essar y.
Do not al l ow di rt or f orei gn mat t er to cont ami nat e
t he brake f l ui d.
RESERVOIR MASTER CY LINDER
Check for damage. Check for leaks,
rust, and damage.
3. Install t he mast er cyl i nder (see page 19-26).
19-27
Brake Booster Test
Funct i onal Test
1. Wi t h t he i gni t i on swi t ch in L OCK (0), pr ess t he brake
pedal sever al t i mes to depl et e t he vac uum r eser voi r ,
t hen pr ess t he brake pedal har d and hol d it f or
15 sec onds. If t he brake pedal si nks, ei ther t he mast er
cyl i nder i s bypassi ng i nt ernal l y or t he brake syst em i s
l eaki ng. Inspect t he brake hoses and l i nes (see page
19-39).
2. St art t he engi ne wi t h t he brake pedal pr essed. If t he
brake pedal si nks sl i ght l y, t he vac uum boost er i s
operat i ng nor mal l y. If t he brake pedal hei ght does not
var y, do t he brake syst em t est (see page 19-4).
Leak Test
1. Pr ess t he brake pedal wi t h t he engi ne r unni ng, t hen
t urn t he i gni ti on swi t ch to L OCK (0). The brake pedal
hei ght shoul d not var y whi l e pr essed f or 30 sec onds.
If t he pedal hei ght r i ses, go to st ep 6.
If it does not r i se, go to st ep 2.
2. St art t he engi ne and let it i dle f or 30 sec onds. Tur n t he
i gni ti on swi t ch to L OCK (0), and wai t 30 sec onds.
Pr ess t he brake pedal sever al t i mes usi ng nor mal
pr essur e. When t he pedal i s f i rst pr essed, it shoul d be
l ow. On c onsec ut i ve appl i cat i ons, t he pedal hei ght
shoul d gr adual l y r i se.
If it r i ses, t he boost er i s OK.
If it does not r i se, go to st ep 3.
3. Di sc onnec t t he brake boost er vac uum hose (A) at t he
boost er . The c hec k val ve (B) i s bui lt into t he hose.
NOTE: If t he check val ve i s f aul t y, r epl ace t he brake
boost er vac uum hose/c hec k val ve as an assembl y.
A
4. St ar t t he engi ne, and let it i dle. Ther e shoul d be
vac uum avai l abl e.
If no vac uum i s avai l abl e, t he check val ve i s not
wor ki ng properl y. Repl ace t he brake boost er
vac uum hose and t he check val ve, and ret est .
If vac uum i s f ound, go to st ep 5.
5. Wi t h t he i gni ti on swi t ch in L OCK (0), r econnect t he
vac uum hose to t he brake boost er .
6. St art t he engi ne, and t hen pi nch t he brake boost er
vac uum hose bet ween t he c hec k val ve and t he
boost er.
30 sec onds. Pr ess t he brake pedal sever al t i mes usi ng
nor mal pr essur e. When t he pedal i s fi rst pr essed, it
shoul d be l ow. On consecut i ve appl i cat i ons, t he pedal
hei ght shoul d gr adual l y r i se.
- If t he pedal posi t i on does not var y, i nspect t he seal
bet ween t he mast er cyl i nder and t he boost er. If t he
seal i s OK, r epl ace t he brake boost er.
If t he pedal posi t i on var i es, r epl ace t he brake
boost er vac uum hose/c hec k val ve as an assembl y.
19-28
Brake Booster Replacement
1. Remove t he c owl c over (see page 20-278).
20-306).
3. Remove t he mast er cyl i nder (see page 19-26).
4. Di sconnect t he brake boost er vac uum hose (A) f r om
t he brake boost er.
5. Remove t he under -hood f use/r el ay box bracket (A),
t hen r emove t he engi ne wi r e har ness c l amps (B).
6 x 1.0 mm
9.8 N-m (1.0 kgf-in, 7.2 Ibf-ft)
6 x 1.0 mm
9.8 N-m
(1.0 kgf-m, 7.2 ibf-ft)
6. Remove t he brake l i nes (A) f r om t he hose c l amp (B).
7 Remove t he lock pi n (A) and t he c l evi s pi n (B), t hen
di sc onnec t t he yoke f r om t he brake pedal .
C
8x 1.25 mm
12 N-m
(1.2 k g f m,
8.7 Ibf ft)
8. Remove t he brake boost er mount i ng nut s ( C) .
(cont' d)
19-29
Brake Booster Replacement
(cont'd)
9. Remove t he brake boost er (A) f r om t he engi ne
compar t ment .
NOTICE
Be caref ul not to damage t he brake boost er
mount i ng sur f ac es and t he t hr eads on t he boost er
st uds.
Be caref ul not to bend or damage t he brake l i nes.
NOTE: Use t he new brake boost er gasket (B) dur i ng
r eassembl y.
Replace.
10. Inst al l t he brake boost er i n t he r e v e r s e or der of
Install t he mast er cyl i nder after i nst al l i ng t he brake
boost er (see page 19-26).
Chec k t he brake pedal hei ght and f ree pl ay after
i nst al l i ng t he mast er cyl i nder , and adj ust it if
nec essar y (see page 19-6).
Bl eed t he brake syst em (see page 19-9).
Rear Brake Pad Inspect i on and
Replacement
^ CAUTION
Fr equent i nhal at i on of brake pad dust , r egar dl ess of
mat er i al c omposi t i on, coul d be hazar dous to your
heal t h.
Q Never use an ai r hose or br ush t o c l ean brake
assembl i es. Us e an OSHA-appr oved vac uum
cl eaner .
Inspect i on
3. Chec k t he t hi ckness (A) of t he i nner pad (B) and t he
out er pad (C). Do not i ncl ude t he t hi c kness of t he
backi ng pl at e.
St andar d: 8.39.0 mm (0.330.35 i n)
4. If any part of t he brake pad t hi c kness i s l ess t han t he
ser vi c e l i mi t , r epl ace t he rear brake pads as a set .
t he i nsi de of t he wheel , t hen i nst al l t he r ear wheel s.
19-30
Repl acement
1. Remove s ome brake f l ui d f rom t he mast er cyl i nder .
5. Remove t he f l ange bol t s (B) whi l e hol di ng r espect i ve
cal i per pi ns (C) wi t h a wr enc h. Be caref ul not t o
damage t he pi n boot, and r emove t he cal i per (D).
Check t he hose, t he pi n boot s, and t he parki ng brake
cabl e boot s f or damage and det eri orat i on.
NOTE: Do not t wi st t he brake hose and t he parki ng
brake cabl e to prevent damage.
6. Remove t he pad shi m (A) and t he brake pads (B).
A
r ust , and c hec k f or gr ooves and c r ac ks. Veri f y that t he
l ube if needed.
par al l el i sm (see page 19-33), and check f or damage
and c r ac ks.
08798-9010) to t he ret ai ner mat i ng sur f ace of the
11 Install t he pad r et ai ner s. Wi pe exc ess assembl y past e
brake di sc and t he brake pads.
(cont' d)
19-31
Rear Brake Pad Inspection and Replacement (cont'd)
08798-9010) t o t he pad si de of t he shi m (A), t he back
of t he brake pads (B), and t he ot her ar eas i ndi cat ed by
t he ar r ows. Wi pe exc ess assembl y past e off t he pad
shi m and t he brake pads f ri ct i on mat er i al . Keep
gr ease and assembl y past e off t he brake di sc and t he
13. Inst al l t he brake pads and pad shi m cor r ect l y. Inst al l
t he brake pad wi t h t he wear i ndi cat or (C) on t he
bottom i nsi de. If you ar e r eusi ng t he brake pads,
al ways rei nst al l t he brake pads in t hei r ori gi nal
posi t i ons t o pr event a t empor ar y l oss of braki ng
ef f i ci ency.
14. Rot at e t he cal i per pi st on (A) c l oc kwi se into t he
cyl i nder , t hen al i gn t he cutout (B) in t he pi st on wi t h
t he t ab (C) on t he i nner pad by t urni ng t he pi st on back.
Lubr i cat e t he boot wi t h rubber gr ease to avoi d
t wi st i ng t he pi st on boot. If t he pi st on boot i s t wi st ed,
back it out so it i s posi t i oned properl y.
NOTE: Be caref ul when movi ng t he pi st on back in t he
cal i per ; brake f l ui d mi ght over f l ow f r om t he mast er
c yl i nder ' s r eser voi r . If brake f l ui d get s on any pai nt ed
sur f ac e, was h it off i mmedi at el y wi t h wat er .
15. Inst al l t he cal i per . Install t he f l ange bol t s (D), and
t i ght en it to t he speci f i ed t orque whi l e hol di ng t he
r espect i ve cal i per pi ns wi t h a wr enc h bei ng car ef ul
not to damage t he pi n boot s and parki ng brake cabl e
, boot s.
16. Install t he brake hose mount i ng bolt (E).
t he i nsi de of t he wheel , t hen i nst al l t he r ear wheel s.
18. Pr ess t he brake pedal sever al t i mes to make sur e t he
br akes work. . - ' .
NOTE: Engagement may requi re a great er pedal
st roke i mmedi at el y after t he brake pads have been
r epl aced as a set . Sever al appl i cat i ons of t he brake
pedal wi l l rest ore t he nor mal pedal st roke.
20. After i nst al l at i on, check for l eaks at hose and li ne
j oi nt s or c onnec t i ons, and reti ghten if nec essar y.
page 19-39).
19-32
Rear Brake Disc Inspection
Runout
3. Remove t he brake pads (see page 19-31),
4. Inspect t he brake di sc to wheel sur f ace f or damage
and c r ac ks. Cl ean t he brake di sc t hor oughl y, and
r emove all rust .
5. Install sui t abl e flat was her s (A) and t he wheel nut s ( B) ,
and t i ght en t he wheel nut s to t he speci f i ed t or que t o
hol d t he brake di sc secur el y agai nst t he hub.
(11.0 k g f m, 80 Ibf-ft)
6. Set up t he di al gauge agai nst t he brake di sc as s hown,
and measur e t he runout at 10 mm (0.39 i n) f r om t he
out er edge of t he brake di sc .
Br ake di sc r unout :
7. If t he brake di sc i s beyond t he ser vi c e li mi t , r ef i ni sh
t he brake di sc wi t h a Honda-appr oved c ommer c i al l y
avai l abl e on-car brake lat he.
Max. r ef i ni shi ng l i mi t : 8.0 mm (0.31 i n)
NOTE:
If t he brake di sc i s beyond t he ser vi c e li mi t f or
If t he brake di sc i s r epl aced wi t h a new one, c hec k
t he new di sc f or runout . If t he new di sc i s out of
speci f i cat i on, r ef i ni sh t he di sc .
8. Inst al l t he brake pads (see page 19-31).
t he i nsi de of t he wheel , t hen i nst al l t he r ear wheel s .
Thi c kness and Par al l el i sm
3. Remove t he brake pads (see page 19-31).
4. Usi ng a mi cr omet er , measur e t he brake di sc
t hi c kness at ei ght poi nt s, about 45 apar t and
10 mm (0.39 in) i n f r om t he out er edge of t he brake
di sc . Repl ac e t he brake di sc if t he smal l est
measur ement i s l ess t han t he max. r ef i ni shi ng li mi t.
Br ake di sc t hi c kness:
St andar d: 8. 9-9. 1 mm (0. 35-0. 36 i n)
Max. r ef i ni shi ng l i mi t : 8.0 mm (0.31 i n)
Br ake di sc par al l el i sm:
0.015 mm (0.0006 i n) max.
NOTE: Thi s i s t he maxi mum al l owabl e di f f erence
bet ween t he t hi c kness measur ement s.
10 mm
(0.39 in)
5. If t he brake di sc i s beyond t he ser vi c e li mi t for
par al l el i sm, ref i ni sh t he brake di sc wi t h a Honda-
appr oved c ommer c i al l y avai l abl e on-car brake l at he.
NOTE: If t he brake di sc i s beyond t he ser vi c e li mi t f or
6. Inst al l t he brake pads (see page 19-31).
t he i nsi de of t he wheel , t hen i nst al l t he rear wheel s.
19-33
Rear Brake Disc Replacement
NOTE: Keep any gr ease off t he brake di sc and t he brake
pads.
4. L oosen t he parki ng brake c abl e adj ust i ng nut (see
page 19-8).
5. Remove t he f l ange bolt (A) f r om t he ar m (B).
22 N m
(2.2 k g f m,
16 Ibf f t )
6. Di sconnect t he parki ng brake c abl e f r om t he l ever (C).
A
8x 1.25 mm
22 N-m
(2.2 k gf m, 16 Ibf ft)
(11.0 k g f m,
80 Ibf f t )
and r emove t he cal i per assembl y (C) f r om t he
or brake hose, use a shor t pi ece of wi r e to hang t he
cal i per assembl y f r om t he under car r i age. Do not t wi st
t he brake hose and t he parki ng brake cabl e
exc essi vel y.
NOTE: Make sur e t he was her s (D) ar e in posi t i on on
r eassembl y, if t hey ar e r emoved (see st ep 8 on page
18-39).
19-34
9. Remove t he brake di sc f l at head sc r ews (A),
\
6 x 1.0 mm
9.8 N-m
(1.0 k g f m,
7.2 ibf-ft)
X
8 M 1.25 mm
10. Remove t he brake di sc (B) f rom t he hub beari ng uni t.
NOTE: If t he brake di sc i s st uck to t he hub bear i ng
uni t , t hr ead t wo 8 x 1.25 mm bolts (C) into t he brake
di sc to push it away f rom t he hub beari ng uni t. Tur n
each bolt 90 degr ees at a t i me to prevent t he brake
di sc f rom bi ndi ng.
11 . Install t he brake di sc i n the r ever se order of r emoval ,
Adj ust t he parki ng brake (see page 19-8).
Bef ore i nst al l i ng t he brake di sc , cl ean t he mat i ng
sur f ac es bet ween t he hub beari ng uni t and t he
i nsi de of t he brake di sc.
12. Inspect t he brake di sc runout (see page 19-33).
13. After i nst al l t he brake cal i per, make sur e t he c l ear anc e
bet ween t he l ower ar m B and t he parki ng brake cabl e
i s mor e t han 5 mm (0.20 i n).
14. Cl ean t he mat i ng sur f aces bet ween t he brake di sc and
t he i nsi de of t he wheel , t hen i nst al l t he rear wheel .
Fr equent i nhal at i on of brake pad dust , r egar dl ess of mat eri al c omposi t i on, coul d be hazar dous to your heal t h.
Never use an ai r hose or br ush to cl ean brake assembl i es. Use an OSHA-appr oved vac uum cl eaner .
Remove, di sassembl e, i nspect , r eassembl e, and i nst al l t he cal i per , and note t hese i t ems:
NOTE: Make sur e that t he cal i per pi ns are i nst al l ed correct l y. Upper cal i per pi n A and l ower cal i per pi n B ar e di fferent. If
t hese cal i per pi ns ar e i nst al l ed in t he wr ong l ocat i on, it wi l l c aus e vi br at i on, uneven or rapi d brake pad wear , and
wi t h wat er .
To pr event dri ppi ng brake f l ui d, cover di sc onnec t ed hose j oi nt s wi t h cl ean r ags or shop t owel s.
Cl ean all part s in brake f l ui d and ai r dry; bl ow out all passages wi t h c ompr essed ai r.
Bef ore r eassembl i ng, check that all part s ar e f r ee of dirt and ot her f orei gn par t i cl es,
e Repl ace part s wi t h new ones as speci f i ed i n t he i l l ust rat i on.
! Y! 2ke sur e no di rt or ot her f orei gn matter get s in t he brake f l ui d.
When r eusi ng brake pads, al ways rei nst al l t hem i n t hei r ori gi nal posi t i ons to prevent l oss of braki ng ef f i ci ency.
non-Honda brake f l ui d can c ause cor r osi on and shor t en t he life of the syst em.
Coat t he pi st on, t he pi st on seal gr oove, and t he cal i per bore wi t h cl ean brake f l ui d.
Use r ec ommended gr eases in t he rear cal i per set .
After i nst al l i ng t he cal i per , c hec k t he brake hose and li ne f or l eaks, i nt er f er ence, and t wi st i ng.
19-36
H I : Honda si l i cone gr ease (P/N 08C30-B0234M)
BLEED SCREW
9 N-m
BRAKE HOSE
12 M 1.25 mm
108 N-m
(11.0 kgf m,
7S.6 Ibfft)
23 N-m
( 2J kgf m,
17 Ibfft)
BANJO BOLT
35 Nm
(3.6 kgf m,
26 Ibfft)
SEALING WASHERS
Repl ace.
CALIPER PIN A
PISTON
PAD RETAINERS i-'
CALIPER PINB
PISTON BOOT
Replace.
OUTER PAD SHIM
CALIPER PIN PIN BOOT
Repl ac e^
J GRE AS E J
WEAR INDICATOR
Install i nner brake pad
with its wear indicator
downward.
BRAKE PADS
19-37
Brake Pedal Replacement
1. Di sc onnec t t he brake pedal posi t i on swi t c h
connect or ( A ) .
2. Remove t he lock pi n (B) and t he cl evi s pi n (C).
3. Remove t he brake pedal suppor t member (D).
4. Remove t he brake pedal bracket mount i ng bolt (E)
and nut s (F).
5. Remove t he brake pedal wi t h bracket (G).
6. Remove t he brake pedal posi t i on swi t ch (H) by
t urni ng it 45 c ount er c l oc kwi se.
7. Install i n t he r ever se or der of r emoval .
8. Adj ust t he brake pedal and t he brake pedal posi t i on
swi t ch (see page 19-8).
19-38
Brake Hose and Li ne i nspect i on
1. Inspect the brake hoses f or d a m a g e , det eri orat i on, l eaks, i nt er f er ence, and t wi st i ng.
2. Chec k t he brake l i nes f or damage, r ust i ng, and l eaks. Al so check f or bent brake l i nes.
3. Chec k for l eaks at hose and li ne j oi nt s and c onnec t i ons, and reti ghten if nec essar y.
4. Chec k t he mast er cyl i nder and t he VS A modul at or-cont rol uni t f or damage and l eaks.
Connection
Point
Component Connected to Specified Torque Value Note
A Front brake cal i per Brake hose 35 N m (3.6 k g f m, 26 Ibfft) Banj o bolt A Front brake cal i per
Bl eed sc r ew
(NISSIN t ype)
9 N m (0.9 k g f m, 7 Ibf f t )
A Front brake cal i per
Bl eed sc r ew
(AKEBONO t ype)
8 N m (0.8 k gf m, 6 Ibfft)
B Rear brake cal i per Brake hose 35 N m (3.6 k g f m, 26 Ibfft) Banj o bolt B Rear brake cal i per
Bl eed sc r ew 9 N-m (0.9 k gf m, 7 Ibfft)
C Brake hose Brake li ne 15 N m (1.5 k gf m, 11 Ibfft) Fl ar e nut
D Mast er cyl i nder Brake li ne 22 N m (2.2 k g f m, 16 Ibfft) Fl ar e nut
E VS A modul at or-cont rol uni t Brake l i ne
(12 mm nut)
22 N-m (2.2 k gf m, 16 Ibfft) Fl ar e nut E VS A modul at or-cont rol uni t
Brake li ne
(10 mm nut)
15 N-m (1.5 k gf m, 11 Ibfft)
Fl ar e nut
19-39
Brake Hose Replacement
NOTE;
Before reassembling, cheek that all parts are free of
di rt and ot her f orei gn par t i cl es.
Replace parts with new ones whenever specified to do
so.
t he pai nt . If brake f l ui d get s on t he pai nt , was h it off
i mmedi at el y wi t h wat er .
Af t er r emoval , plug t he ends of t he hoses and t he
j oi nt s to prevent spi l l i ng brake f l ui d.
Fr ont
3. Di sconnect t he brake li ne (A) f r om t he brake hose (B),
t hen r emove t he brake hose cl i p (C).
4. Remove t he banj o bolt (A), and di sc onnec t t he brake
hose (B) f r om t he cal i per .
5. Remove t he brake hose mount i ng bolt (C), t hen
r emove t he brake hose.
6. Install t he brake hose (A) wi t h t he mount i ng bolt (B).
7. Connec t t he brake hose to t he cal i per wi t h t he banj o
bolt (C) and new seal i ng was her s (D).
8. Inst al l t he new brake hose cl i p (A) t o t he brake
hose (B) on t he bracket , t hen connect t he brake
li ne (C). Do not t wi st t he brake hose.
C
A 10 x 1.0 mm
Replace. 15 N-m (1.5 kgf -m, 11 Ibf-ft)
9. Af t er i nst al l i ng t he brake hose, bl eed t he brake syst em
(see page 19-9).
10. Do t he f ol l owi ng c hec ks:
Chec k t he brake hose and li ne j oi nt f or l eaks, and
t i ght en if nec essar y.
Chec k t he brake hoses f or i nt erf erence and t wi st i ng.
t he i nsi de of t he wheel , t hen i nst al l t he f ront wheel .
19-40
Rear
1. Rai se and s u p p o r t t he ve hi c l e (see page 1-13).
2. R e mo v e t h e r ear wh e e l .
3. D i s c o n n e c t t h e br a ke l i ne (A) f r o m t he br a ke h o s e (B),
t h e n r e mo v e t h e br a ke h o s e c l i p (C).
5. Remove t he brake hose mount i ng bolt (C), t hen
r emove t he brake hose.
6. Inst al l t he brake hose (A) wi t h t he mount i ng bolt (B).
10x 1.0 mm
35 N- m
7. Connec t t he brake hose to t he cal i per wi t h t he banj o
bolt (C) and new seal i ng was her s (D).
8. Inst al l t he new brake hose cl i p (A) to t he brake
hose (B) on t he bracket , t hen connect t he brake
li ne (C). Do not t wi st t he brake hose.
9. After i nst al l i ng t he brake hoses, bl eed t he brake
syst em (see page 19-9).
10. Do the f ol l owi ng c hec ks:
Check t he brake hose and li ne j oi nt for l eaks, and
ti ghten if nec essar y.
Check t he brake hose for i nt erf erence and t wi st i ng.
11. Cl ean the mat i ng sur f ac es bet ween the brake di sc and
t he i nsi de of t he wheel , t hen i nst al l t he rear wheel .
19-41
Parking Brake Cable Replacement
Expl oded Vi ew
RIGHT PARK ING BRAK E CABLE
Check for faulty movement.
LINK WIRE SWITCH
Do not scratch the
wire while handling
and assembling.
19-42
NOTE:
The parki ng brake c abl es must not be bent or
di st ort ed. Thi s wi l l l ead to stiff operat i on and
pr emat ur e c abl e f ai l ure.
Ref er to t he Expl oded Vi ew as needed duri ng t hi s
pr ocedur e.
2. Loosen t he parki ng brake cabl e adj ust i ng nut (see
page 19-8).
3. Remove t he f l ange bolt (A) f r om t he ar m (B).
16 Ibf ft)
4. Di sconnect t he parki ng brake cabl e f r om t he l ever (C).
5. Remove t he parki ng brake c abl e mount i ng har dwar e,
t hen r emove t he cabl e.
6. Install t he parki ng brake cabl e i n t he r ever se or der of
Be car ef ul not to bend or di st ort t he cabl e and
boot (D).
Make sur e t he cl ear ance bet ween t he l ower ar m B
and parki ng brake cabl e i s mor e t han
5 m m (0.20 i n).
Adj ust t he parki ng brake (see page 19-8).
19- 43
Brakes
VSA Syst em Component s
Component L oc at i on Index 19-46
Gener al Tr oubl es hoot i ng Inf or mat i on 19-48
S y mpt o m Tr oubl es hoot i ng 19-128
* St eer i ng Angl e S ens o r Repl ac ement 19-132
Yaw Rat e-Lat er al Ac c el er at i on S ens o r Repl ac ement . 19-133
VS A S ens o r Neut r al Posi t i on Memor i zat i on 19-133
VS A Of f S wi t c h Tes t .19-134
VS A Modul at or -Cont r ol Uni t Updat e 19-135
VS A Modul at or -Cont r ol Uni t Remov al and
Wheel S peed S ens o r Repl ac ement 19-139
VSA S f st em Component s
Component Locat i on index
f VSA MODULATOR-CONTROL UNIT
Update, page 19-135
,HUB BEARING UNIT
(MAGNETIC ENCODER)
RIGHT-REAR WHEEL
S PE E D S E NS OR
WHEEL BEARING
(MAGNETIC ENCODER)
RIGHT-FRONT WHEEL
SPEED SENSOR
\
HUB BEARING UNIT
(MAGNETIC ENCODER)
LEFT-REAR WHEEL
SPEED SENSOR
WHEEL BEARING
(MAGNETIC ENCODER)
LEFT-FRONT WHEEL
SPEED SENSOR
19-46
YAW RATE-LATERAL
ACCELERATION SENSOR
19-47
Sf s t emIndicat or
Thi s syst em has f our i ndi cat or s;
ABS i ndi cat or (A)
Br ake syst em i ndi cat or (B)
VS A i ndi cat or (C)
VSA act i vat i on i ndi cat or (D)
When the system is OK, each indicator comes on for
about 2seconds after turning the ignition switch to
ON (II), then goes off.
When the system detects a problem, a DTC will set and,
depending upon the failure, the VSA modulator-control
unit determines which indicator(s) will turn on. If the
problem goes away (system returns to normal), the
indicator(s) will be controlled in the following way
depending upon the DTC that was set:
The indicator(s) will come on and stay on when the
ignition switch is ON (II).
The indicator(s) will automatically go off.
The indicator(s) will go off after the vehicle is driven.
ABS Indicat or
The ABS indicator comes on when the ABS function is
lost. The brakes still work like a conventional system.
Brake Sys t emIndicat or
The brake system indicator comes on when the EBD
function is lost, the parking brake is applied, and/or the
brake fluid level is low.
NOTE: If two or more wheel speed sensors fail, the brake
system indicator comes on.
VSA Indicat or
The VSA indicator comes on when the VSA function is
lost.
VSA Act ivat ion in<rU**^r
The VSA activation indicator blinks when the VSA
function is activating. The VSA activation indicator
comes on and stays on when the VSA is turned OFF by
using the VSA OFF switch, or when the VSA function is
lost.
19-48
Di agnost i c Troubl e Code (DTC)
How t o Tr oubl eshoot DTCs
The memor y can hol d all DTCs. However , when t he
same DTC i s det ect ed mor e t han onc e, t he mor e
recent DTC i s wri t t en over t he earl i er one. Ther ef or e,
when t he s ame pr obl em i s det ect ed r epeat edl y, it i s
memor i zed as a si ngl e DTC.
The DTCs ar e i ndi cat ed in asc endi ng number or der ,
not i n t he or der t hey occur .
The DTCs ar e memor i zed in an EEPROM i n t he VS A
modul at or-cont rol uni t. Ther ef or e, t he memor i zed
DTCs cannot be er ased by di sconnect i ng t he battery.
Do t he speci f i ed pr ocedur es to cl ear t he DTCs.
Sel f -di agnosi s
Sel f -di agnosi s can be c l assi f i ed into t wo cat egor i es:
- Initial di agnosi s: Done ri ght after t he i gni ti on swi t ch
i s t ur ned t o ON (II) and until t he ABS and VS A
i ndi cat ors go off.
- Regul ar di agnosi s: Done right after t he i ni ti al
di agnosi s unti l the i gni ti on swi t ch i s t ur ned to
L OCK (0).
When t he syst em det ect s a pr obl em, t he VS A
modul at or-cont rol unit shi fts to f ai l -saf e mode.
Ki ckback
The pump mot or oper at es when t he VS A modul at or-
cont rol uni t i s f unct i oni ng, and t he f l ui d in t he r eser voi r
i s f or ced out to t he mast er cyl i nder , c ausi ng ki ckback at
t he brake pedal .
Pump Mot or
The pump mot or oper at es when t he VS A modul at or-
cont rol uni t i s f unct i oni ng.
e The VS A modul at or-cont rol uni t c hec ks t he pump
mot or operat i on one t i me after compl et i ng i ni ti al
di agnosi s duri ng regul ar di agnosi s when t he vehi cl e i s
dri ven over 9 mph (15 km/h).
Brake Fl ui d Repl ac ement /Ai r Bl eedi ng
Brake f l ui d r epl acement and ai r bl eedi ng pr ocedur es are
i dent i cal to t he pr ocedur es used on vehi c l es wi t hout t he
VS A syst em (see page 19-9).
The t r oubl eshoot i ng pr ocedur es as s ume that t he c ause
of t he pr obl em i s sti ll pr esent and t he A B S and/or VS A
i ndi cat or i s sti ll on. Fol l owi ng a t r oubl eshoot i ng
pr ocedur e f or a c ode t hat has been cl ear ed but does not
reset c an resul t in i ncor r ect di agnosi s.
NOTE: Al ways t r oubl eshoot power t r ai n DTCs f i rst .
1. Quest i on t he c ust omer about t he condi t i ons when t he
pr obl em oc c ur r ed, and try to r epr oduce t he s ame
condi t i ons for t r oubl eshoot i ng. Fi nd out when t he
ABS and/or VS A i ndi cat or c ame on, suc h as dur i ng
act i vat i on, after act i vat i on, when t he vehi cl e was
t r avel i ng at a cert ai n speed, et c. If nec essar y, have t he
c ust omer demonst r at e t he c onc er n.
2. When t he ABS or VS A i ndi cat or does not c ome on
duri ng t he t est -dr i ve, check for l oose c onnec t or s, poor
cont act of t he t er mi nal s, et c. in t he ci rcui t i ndi cat ed by
t he DTC bef ore you st art t r oubl eshoot i ng.
3. After t r oubl eshoot i ng, or t he repai rs ar e done, cl ear
t he DTCs , and t est -dri ve t he vehi cl e under t he s ame
condi t i ons that ori gi nal l y set t he DTCs. Make sur e t he
ABS and VS A i ndi cat ors do not c ome on.
4. Check f or DTCs f r om ot her syst ems whi c h ar e
connect ed vi a F-CAN. If t her e ar e DTCs t hat ar e
rel at ed to F-CAN, one possi bl e c ause was that t he
i gni ti on swi t ch was t ur ned to ON (II) wi t h t he VS A
modul at or-cont rol uni t connect or di sc onnec t ed. Cl ear
t he DTCs. Check for power t r ai n DTCs f i rst .
Int ermi t t ent Fai l ur es
The t er m " i nt ermi t t ent f ai l ur e" means a syst em may
have had a f ai l ur e, but it c hec ks OK now. If you cannot
r epr oduce t he condi t i on, c hec k for l oose connect i ons
and t er mi nal s. Al so check f or gr ound and power
connect i ons rel at ed to t he ci rcui t that you ar e
(cont' d)
19-49
How t o Use t he HDS (Honda Di agnost i c
Syst em)
NOTE: Make sur e t he bat t ery i s i n good condi t i on and
f ul l y c har ged.
.1. If t he syst em i ndi cat or s st ay on, c onnec t t he HDS to
t he dat a link connect or (DLC) (A) l ocat ed under t he
and t he VS A modul at or -cont r ol uni t. If it doesn' t ,
4. Chec k t he di agnost i c t roubl e c ode (DTC) f or al l
s y s t ems , t r oubl eshoot t he power t r ai n DTCs f i rst and
not e it. Then refer to t he i ndi cat ed DTCs
t r oubl eshoot i ng, and do t he appr opr i at e
t r oubl eshoot i ng pr ocedur e.
NOTE:
The HDS c ommuni c at i on wi l l be st opped when t he
vehi c l e speed i s at 31 mph (50 km/h) or mor e.
The HDS r eads t he DTC, t he cur r ent dat a, and ot her
syst em dat a.
For speci f i c oper at i ons, refer to t he Hel p menu t hat
c ame wi t h t he HDS.
How t o Ret r i eve DTCs
1. Wi t h t he i gni t i on swi t c h i n L OCK (0), connect t he HDS
t o t he dat a link connect or (DLC) under t he dr i ver ' s
si de of t he dashboar d.
and t he VS A modul at or-cont rol uni t. If it doesn' t
4. Fol l ow t he pr ompt s on t he HDS to di spl ay t he DTC(s)
on t he sc r een. Af t er det er mi ni ng t he DTC, refer to t he
DTC t r oubl eshoot i ng. Do t he all syst ems DTC c hec k,
and t r oubl eshoot any powert rai n DTCs f i rst .
1. Wi t h t he i gni ti on swi t ch i n L OCK (0), connect t he HDS
t o t he dat a link connect or (DLC) under t he dr i ver ' s
and t he VS A modul at or -cont r ol uni t. If it doesn' t
4. Cl ear t he DTC(s) by f ol l owi ng t he sc r een pr ompt s on
t he HDS.
19-50
DTC Troubleshooting Index
DTC Detecti on Item ABS
Indicator
Brake
System
Indicator
VSA
Indicator
VSA
Activation
Indicator
Not e
11 -13 Right-front Wheel Speed Sensor Circuit
Malfuncti on
ON ON/OF F *
1
ON ON DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-71) ..
-14 Right-front Wheel Speed Sensor Power Source
Malfunction
ON OFF ON ON DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-75)
12' -11 Right-front Wheel Speed Sensor Electrical Noise
or Intermittent Interruption- . r .
ON ON/OF F
1
(see page 19-76)
-12. Right-front Wheel Speed Sensor Short to the
Other Sensor Circuit
ON ON/OF F *
1
ON ON . DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-77)
-21 Right-front Wheel Speed Sensor Installation Error ON ON/OF F "
1
(see page 19-78)
' -22" ' Right-front Wheel Speed Sensor Installation Error
(19 mph (30 km/h) or More)
ON ON/OF F *
1
(see page 19-79)
-23 ' Right-front Wheel Speed Sensor Installation Error
(0 to 9 mph (0 to 15 km/h))
ON ON/OF F *
1
.. (see,page 19-79)
13 -13 Left-front Wheel Speed Sensor Circuit
Malfunction
ON ON/OF F *
1
(see page 19-71)
-14 Left-front Wheel Speed Sensor Power Source
Malfunction
ON OFF ON ON DTC Trou bleshooti ng
(see page 19-75)
14 -11 ' Left-front Wheel Speed Sensor Electrical Noise or
Intermittent Interruption
ON ON/OF F *
1
(see page 19-76)
-12 Left-front Wheel Speed Sensor Short to the Other
Sensor Circuit
ON ON/OF F '
1
(see page 19-77)
-21 Left-front Wheel Speed Sensor Installation Error ON ON/OF F *
1
(see page 19-78)
-22 Left-front Wheel Speed Sensor Installation Error
ON ON/OF F "
1
(see page. 19-79)
. -23.'
!
Left-front Wheel Speed Sensor Installation Error
TO to 9 mph (0 to 15 km/h))
ON ON/OF F *
1
ON ON . DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-79)
15 ' --13-
;
Right-rear Wheel Speed Sensor Circuit
Malfunction
ON ON/OF F *
1
(see-page 19-71)
-14 Right-rear Wheel Speed Sensor Power Source
Malfunction
(see page 19-75)
16 ; - i i ' Right-rear Wheel Speed Sensor Electrical Noise
or Intermittent Interruption
ON ON/OF F *
1
(see page 19-76)
-12 Right-rear Wheel Speed Sensor Short to the
Other Sensor Circuit
ON ON/OF F *
1
(see page 19-77).
-21 Right-rear Wheel Speed Sensor Installation Error ON ON/OF F *
1
(see page 1.9-78)
"- 22/ Right-rear Wheel Speed Sensor Installation Error
ON ON/OF F *
1
(see page 19-79)
-23 Right-rear Wheel Speed Sensor Installation Error
(Oto 9 mph (Oto 15 km/h))
ON ON/OF F *
1
(see page 19-79)
17 -13 Left-rear Wheel Speed Sensor Circuit Malfunction ON ON/OF F "
1
(see page 19-71)
-14 Left-rear Wheel Speed Sensor Power Source
Malfunction
(see page 19-75)
18 -11 Left-rear Wheel Speed Sensor Electrical Noise or
Intermittent Interruption
ON ON/OF F *
1
(see page 19-76)
12 Left-rear Wheel Speed Sensor Short to the Other
Sensor Circuit
ON ON/OF F *
1
ON ON DTC Troubleshooting -
. (see page 19-77)
-21 Left-rear Wheel Speed Sensor Installation Error ON ON/OF F *
1
(see page 19-78)
-22 Left-rear Wheel Speed Sensor Installation Error
ON ON/OF F *
1
(see page 19-79)
-23 Left-rear Wheel Speed Sensor Installation Error
(0to9mph (Oto 15km/h))
ON ON/OF F *
1
(see page 19-79)
21 -11 Right-front Magnetic Encoder (Wheel Bearing)
Malfunction (Pulse Missing)
ON ON/OF F *
1
(see page 19-80)
22 -11 Left-front Magnetic Encoder (Wheel Bearing)
ON ON/OF F "
1
(see page 19-80)
* 1 : Brake system indicator turns ON when two or more wheels fail.
*2: A/T
(cont' d)
19-51
DTC Detection Item ABS
Indicator
Brake
System
Indicator
VSA
Indicator
VSA
Activation
Indicator
Note
23 -11 Right-rear Magnetic Encoder (Wheel Bearing)
ON ON/OFF*
1
(see page 19-80)
24 -11 Left-rear Magnetic Encoder (Wheel Bearing)
ON ON/OFF*
1
(see page 19-80)
25 -12 Yaw Rate Sensor Internal Circuit Malfunction
(Open, Short)
OFF OFF ON ON DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-81)
-13 Yaw Rate Sensor Internal Circuit Malfunction OFF OFF ON ON DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-81)
-17 Yaw Rate-Lateral Acceleration Sensor Power
Source Voltage Malfunction
OFF - OFF ON ON DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-81)
-18 Yaw Rate-Lateral Acceleration Sensor Internal
Circuit Malfunction
(see page 19-81)
-21 Y aw Rate Sensor Neutral Position Malfunction OFF OFF ON ON DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-82)
-22 Y aw Rate Sensor Stuck OFF OFF ON ON DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-82)
-23 Y aw Rate Sensor Circuit Intermittent Interruption OFF OFF ON ON DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-82)
-24 Y aw Rate Sensor Gain Low OFF OFF ON ON DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-83)
-25 Y aw Rate Sensor Gain High OFF OFF ON ON DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-83)
26 -12 Lateral Acceleration Sensor Internal Circuit
Malfunction (Open, Short)
(see page 19-81)
-13 Lateral Acceleration Sensor Internal Circuit
Malfunction
(see page 19-81)
-21 Lateral Acceleration Sensor Neutral Position
Malfunction
(see page 19-83)
-22 Lateral Acceleration Sensor Stuck OFF OFF ON ON DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-84)
-23 Lateral Acceleration Sensor Circuit Intermittent
Interruption
(see page 19-83)
-24 Lateral Acceleration Sensor Gain Low OFF OFF ON ON DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-83)
-25 Lateral Acceleration Sensor Gain High OFF OFF ON ON DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-83)
27 -11 Steering Angle Sensor DIAG Signal Error (Initial) OFF OFF ON ON DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-84)
-21 Steering Angle Sensor Stuck Neutral Position OFF OFF ON ON DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-86)
-22 Steering Angle Sensor Stuck Offset Position OFF OFF ON ON DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-86)
-23 Steering Angle Sensor Counter Malfunction OFF OFF ON ON DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-87)
-24 Steering Angle Sensor Exchange Malfunction OFF OFF ON ON DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-89)
-26 Steering Angle Sensor DIAG Signal Error (Main) OFF OFF ON ON DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-84)
^2: A/T
19-52
Indicator
Brake
System
indicator
VSA
Indicator
VSA
Activation
Indicator
Note
31 -01 ABS Right-front Inlet Solenoid Valve Malfunction
(Solenoid Initial Pulse)
ON ON ON ON DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-89)
-02 ABS Right-front Inlet Solenoid Valve Malfunction
(Initial F eedback Signal)
(see page 19-89)
(F eedback Signal)
(see page 19-89)
(Solenoid Pulse)
(see page 19-89)
(Solenoid Speculative)
(see page 19-89)
(Solenoid Stuck ON)
(see page 19-89)
(F eedback Signal/Solenoid Stuck ON)
(see page 19-89)
32 -01 ABS Right-front Outlet Solenoid Valve
Malfunction (Solenoid Initial Pulse)
(see page 19-89)
-21 ABS Right-front Outlet Solenoid Valve
Malfunction (Solenoid Pulse)
(see page 19-89)
Malfunction (Solenoid Speculative)
(see page 19-89)
Malfunction (Solenoid Stuck ON)
ON ON O N ON DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-89)
33 -01 ABS Left-front Inlet Solenoid Valve Malfunction
(see page 19-89)
-02 ABS Left-front Inlet Solenoid Valve Malfunction
(see page 19-89)
(F eedback Signal)
(see page 19-89)
(Solenoid Pulse)
(see page 19-89)
(see page 19-89)
(Solenoid Stuck ON)
(see page 19-89)
(see page 19-89)
34 -01 ABS Left-front Outlet Solenoid Valve Malfunction
(see page 19-89)
-21 ABS Left-front Outlet Solenoid Valve Malfunction
(Solenoid Pulse)
ON O N O N ON DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-89)
(see page 19-89)
(Solenoid Stuck ON)
(see page 19-89)
35 -01 ABS Right-rear Inlet Solenoid Valve Malfunction
(see page 19-89)
-02 ABS Right-rear Inlet Solenoid Valve Malfunction
(see page 19-89)
(F eedback Signal)
(see page 19-89)
(Solenoid Pulse)
(see page 19-89)
(see page 19-89)
(Solenoid Stuck ON)
(see page 19-89)
(see page 19-89)
*2: A/T
(c ont ' d)
19-53
Indicator
Brake
System
Indicator
VSA
Indicator
VSA
Activation
Indicator
Note
36 -01 ABS Right-rear Outlet Solenoid Valve
Malfunction (Solenoid Initial Pulse)
(see page 19-89)
-21 ABS Right-rear Outlet Solenoid Valve
Malfunction (Solenoid Pulse)
(see page 19-89)
Malfunction (Solenoid Speculative)
(see page 19-89)
Malfunction (Solenoid Stuck ON)
(see page 19-89)
37 -01 ABS Left-rear Inlet Solenoid Valve Malfunction
(see page 19-89)
-02 ABS Left-rear Inlet Solenoid Valve Malfunction
(see page 19-89)
(F eedback Signal)
(see page 19-89)
(Solenoid Pulse)
(see page 19-89)
(see page 19-bdj
- 23 ABS Left-rear Inlet Solenoid Valve Malfunction
(Solenoid Stuck ON)
(see page 19-89)
(see page 19-89)
38 -01 ABS Left-rear Outlet Solenoid Valve Malfunction
(see page 19-89)
-21 ABS Left-rear Outlet Solenoid Valve Malfunction
(Solenoid Pulse)
(see page 19-89)
(see page 19-89)
(Solenoid Stuck ON)
(see page 19-89)
41 -21 Right-front Wheel Lock ON ON/OF F *
1
(see page 19-90)
42 -21 Left-front Wheel Lock ON ON/OF F *
1
(see page 19-90)
43 -21 Right-rear Wheel Lock ON ON/OF F *
1
(see page 19-90)
44 -21 Left-rear Wheel Lock ON ON/OF F "
1
(see page 19-90)
51 -11 Motor Lock ON OFF ON ON DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-91)
-12 Motor Drive Circuit Malfunction ON OFF ON ON DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-92)
-13 Motor Drive Circuit Malfunction ON OFF ON ON DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-91)
52 -12 Motor Stuck OFF ON OFF ON ON DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-94)
53 -01 Motor Relay Stuck ON 1 ON OFF ON ON DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-95)
-12 Motor Relay Stuck ON 2 ON OFF ON ON DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-95)
54 -03 F ail-safe Relay 1 Stuck ON ON ON ON ON DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-96)
-04 F ail-safe Relay 1 Stuck OFF (Initial) ON ON ON ON DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-96)
-21 F ail-safe Relay 1 Stuck OFF (Main) ON ON ON . ON DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-96)
*2: A/T
19-54
. DTC Detection Item ABS
Indicator
Brake
System
Indicator
VSA
Indicator
VSA
Activation
Indicator
Note
56 -01 Initial VIG FET Stuck OFF (Initial) ON ON ON ON DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-98)
-02 Initial VIG FET Stuck ON ON ON ON ON DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-08)
-11 VIG FET Stuck OFF (Main) ON ON ON ON DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-98)
61 -01 VSA Modulator-control Unit Initial IG Low Voltage ON ON ON ON DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-98)
-21 VSA Modulator-control Unit Power Source Low
Voltage 1
(see page 19-98)
Voltage 2
(see page 19-98)
Voltage 3
(see page 19-98)
62 -21 VSA Modulator-control Unit IG High Voltage ON ON ON ON DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-99)
64 -11 Steering Angle Sensor Power Circuit Low Voltage ON OFF ON ON DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-100)
-12 Steering Angle Sensor Power Circuit High
Voltage
(see page 19-101)
65 -21 Brake F luid Level Stuck ON OFF OFF ON ON DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-102)
66 -11 Pressure Sensor (Inside of VSA Modulator-
control Unit) Malfunction
(see page 19-104)
-12 Pressure Sensor (Inside of VSA Modulator-
(see page 19-105)
(see page 19-104)
(see page 19-107)
(see page 19-104)
(see page 19-104)
(see page 19-104)
(see page 19-104)
68 -21 Brake Pedal Position Switch Stuck OFF OFF OFF ON ON DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-108)
-22 Brake Pedal Position Switch Stuck ON OFF OFF ON ON DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-111)
*2: A/T
(cont'd)
19-55
DTC Det ect i on Item ABS
Indicator
Brake
System
Indicator
VSA
Indicator
VSA
Activation
Indicator
Note
71 -21 Right-front or Left-rear Different Diameter Tire
Malfunction
ON ON ON ON DTC Troubl eshoot i ng
(see page 19-113)
-22 Left-front or Right-rear Different Diameter Tire
Malfunction
(see page 19-113)
-23 Right-front and Right-rear Different Diameter Tire
Malfunction
(see page 19-113)
-24 Left-front and Left-rear Different Diameter Tire
Malfunction
(see page 19-113)
-25 Right-front and Left-front Different Diameter Tire
Malfunction
(see page 19-113)
-26 Right-rear and Left-rear Different Diameter Tire
Malfunction
(see page 19-113)
-27 Right-front or Left-rear Different Diameter Tire
Malfunction
OFF OFF ON ON DTC Troubl eshoot i ng
(see page 19-113)
-28 Left-front or Right-rear Different Diameter Tire
Malfunction
(see page 19-113)
-29 Right-front and Right-rear Different Diameter Tire
Malfunction
(see page 19-113)
2A Left front and Left-rear Different Diameter Tire
Malfunction
(see page 19-113)
-2B Right-front and Left-front Different Diameter Tire
Malfunction
(see page 19-113)
-2C Right-rear and Left-rear Different Diameter Tire
Malfunction
(see page 19-113)
81 -01 Central Processing Unit (CPU) Internal Circuit
Malfunction
(see page 19-114)
-02 Central Processing Unit (CPU) Internal Circuit
Malfunction
(see page 19-114)
Malfunction
(see page 19-114)
Malfunction
(see page 19-114)
Malfunction
(see page 19-114)
Malfunction
(see page 19-114)
Malfunction
(see page 19-115)
Malfunction
(see page 19-114)
Malfunction
(see page 19-114)
Malfunction
(see page 19-114)
Malfunction
(see page 19-114)
Malfunction
(see page 19-114)
Malfunction
(seepage 19-114)
Malfunction
(see page 19-114)
Malfunction
(see page 19-114)
Malfunction
(see page 19-114)
Malfunction
(see page 19-114)
Malfunction
(see page 19-114)
*1: Brake system indicator turns ON when two or more wheels fail.
*2: A/T
19-56
Indicator
Brake
System
Indicator
VSA
Indicator
VSA
Activation
Indicator
Note
Malfunction
(see page 19-114)
Malfunction
(see page 19-114)
-3A Central Processing Unit (CPU) Internal Circuit
Malfunction
(see page 19-114)
-3C Central Processing Unit (CPU) Internal Circuit
Malfunction
(see page 19-114)
-3D Central Processing Unit (CPU) Internal Circuit
Malfunction
(see page 19-116)
-3E Central Processing Unit (CPU) Internal Circuit
Malfunction
(see page 19-116)
Malfunction
(see page 19-114)
Malfunction
(see page 19-116)
Malfunction
(see page 19-115)
Malfunction
(see page 19-116)
Malfunction
(see page 19-115)
Malfunction
(see page 19-116)
Malfunction
(see page 19-115)
Malfunction
(see page 19-116)
Malfunction
(see page 19-115)
Malfunction
(see page 19-116)
Malfunction
(see page 19-114)
Malfunction
(see page 19-114)
Malfunction
(see page 19-114)
83 -13 ECM/PCM Communication Error (Engine
Malfunction)
(see page 19-118)
- 14*
2
PCM Communication Error (A/T Malfunction) OFF OFF ON ON DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-118)
84 -21 VSA Sensor Neutral Position not Writing OFF OFF ON ON DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-119)
*2: A/T
(c ont ' d)
19-5
Indicator
Brake
System
Indicator
VSA
Indicator
VSA
Activation
Indicator
Note
86 -01 F-CAN Bus-off Malfunction OFF OFF ON ON DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-119)
-11 F-CAN Communication With ECM/PCM
Malfunction
(see page 19-121)
-21 F-CAN Communication With Engine Malfunction OFF OFF ON ON DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-121)
(see page 19-121)
(see page 19-121)
(see page 19-121)
(see page 19-121)
-31 F-CAN Communication With Gauge Control
Module Malfunction
(see page 19-122)
-41*
2
F CAN Communication With EAT Malfunction OFF OFF ON ON DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-121) "
- / I r-U AN Communication With Y aw Rate-Lateral
Acceleration Sensor Malfunction
(see page 19-124)
Malfunction
OFF OFF OFF ON DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-126)
108 -21 Steering Angle Sensor Malfunction OFF OFF OFF ON DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-126)
121 -01 VSA Solenoid Valve Malfunction ON ON ON ON DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-127)
-02 VSA Solenoid Valve Malfunction ON ON ON ON DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-127)
-11 VSA Solenoid Valve Malfunction ON - ON ON ON DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-127)
-21 ' VSA Solenoid Valve Malfunction ON ON ON ON DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-127)
(see page 19-127)
(see page 19-127)
(see page 19-127)
(see page 19-127)
(see page 19-127)
(see page 19-127)
(see page 19-127)
(see page 19-127)
(see page 19-127)
(see page 19-127)
(see page 19-127)
(see page 19-127)
(see page 19-127)
(see page 19-127)
*2: A/T
19-58
Sympt om Troubleshooting Index
When t he vehi cl e has one of t hese sympt oms, c hec k for VS A di agnost i c t roubl e c odes (DTCs) wi t h t he HDS. If t here ar e
no DTCs , do t he di agnost i c pr ocedur e for t he sympt om, i n t he sequenc e l i st ed, unti l you f i nd t he c ause.
Sympt om Di agnost i c pr ocedur e
HDS does not c ommuni c at e wi t h t he VS A modul at or-
cont rol uni t or t he vehi c l e
Tr oubl eshoot t he DL C ci rcui t (see page 11-181).
VS A act i vat i on i ndi cat or does not c ome on at st art -up
(bulb check)
1. Do t he gauge cont rol modul e t r oubl eshoot i ng (see page
22-332).
2. Updat e t he VS A modul at or -cont r ol uni t if it does not have
known-good VS A modul at or -cont r ol uni t (see page
19-136), t hen ret est . If it i s OK, t he VS A modul at or-cont rol
uni t was updat ed, t r oubl eshoot i ng i s compl et e. If t he VS A
modul at or-cont rol uni t was subst i t ut ed, r epl ace t he
ori gi nal VS A modul at or -cont r ol uni t (see page 19-136).
VS A act i vat i on i ndi cat or does not go off, and no DTCs
ar e st or ed
1. Sympt om t r oubl eshoot i ng (see page 19-128).
2. Updat e t he VS A modul at or -cont r ol uni t if it does not have
known-good VS A modul at or-cont rol uni t (see page
uni t was updat ed, t r oubl eshoot i ng i s compl et e. If t he
ori gi nal VS A modul at or -cont r ol uni t (see page 19-136).
A B S i ndi cat or, brake syst em i ndi cat or, and VS A
i ndi cat or do not c ome on
22-332).
2. Updat e t he VS A modul at or-cont rol uni t if it does not have
known-good VS A modul at or-cont rol uni t (see page
uni t was updat ed, t r oubl eshoot i ng i s compl et e. If t he VS A
ori gi nal VS A modul at or-cont rol uni t (see page 19-136).
A B S i ndi cat or, brake syst em i ndi cat or, and VS A
i ndi cat or do not go off
1. Check f or F-CAN DTCs , and t r oubl eshoot and repai r t hose
f i rst (see page 11-3).
2. Sympt om t r oubl eshoot i ng (see page 19-129).
22-3).
19-59
System Description
VS A Modul at or-Cont rol Uni t Input s and Out put s for 36P Connect or (Connect or Di sconnect ed)
1
/
3 4
/
6
/
8 9 10 11
12 13
14 / 7 / 18 19 / 21 / 23 7
12 13
14 / 7 / 18 19 / 21 / 23 7
35 36
25 26 27
/
30
/ / /
34
35 36
Wire side of female terminals.
nymbar
^ - ....
si gn
s i gnal
1 RED CAN-L F-CAN communi cat i on ci rcui t
3 L T BL U K -L INE Communi c at i on wi t h HDS
4 P U R RR-GND Det ect s ri ght -rear wheel speed
sensor si gnal
6 GRN FL -GND Det ect s left-front wheel speed
sensor si gnal
8 RED RL -GND Det ect s left-rear wheel speed
sensor si gnal
9 O R N S VCC Power sour c e f or t he st eer i ng
angl e sensor
Wi t h i gni ti on swi t ch ON (II): about 5.0 V
10 PUR FR-GND Det ect s ri ght-front wheel speed
sensor si gnal
11 GRN S TR-A Det ect s st eer i ng angl e sensor
si gnal
12 W H T FSR +B Power sour c e f or t he f ai l -saf e
rel ay
Bat t ery vol t age (about 12 V) at all t i mes
13 RED MR +B Power sour c e for t he mot or
rel ay
Battery vol t age (about 12 V) at all t i mes
14 WHT CAN- H F-CAN communi cat i on ci rcui t
18 P N K RR +B Det ect s ri ght -rear wheel speed
sensor si gnal
19 ORN F L +B Det ect s left-front wheel speed
sensor si gnal
19-60
Terminal
number
Wire color Terminal
si gn
Description Signal
21 BL U R L +B Det ect s left-rear wheel speed
sensor si gnal
23 L T GRN FR +B Det ect s ri ght-front wheel s peed
sensor si gnal
25 RED WEN Det ect s wri t e enabl e si gnal
26 BL U STR-D Det ect s st eer i ng angl e s ens or
si gnal
27 L TGRN S TR- B Det ect s st eer i ng angl e s ens or
si gnal
30 GRY IG1 Power sour c e f or act i vat i ng t he
syst em
Wi t h i gni t i on swi t c h ON (I I ): battery vol t age
(about 12 V)
34 BRN S GND Gr ound f or t he st eer i ng angl e
sensor
35 BL K GND Gr ound f or t he VS A modul at or -
cont rol uni t
Cont i nui t y to gr ound
36 BL K MR-GND Gr ound f or t he pump mot or Cont i nui t y t o gr ound
(cont' d)
19-61
S f st em Out l i ne
Thi s syst em i s c omposed of t he VS A modul at or -cont r ol uni t t he wheel speed s ens or s , t he st eer i ng angl e sensor , t he
y aw rat e-l at eral accel er at i on sensor , and t he syst em i ndi cat or s i n t he gauge cont rol modul e. The VS A modul at or-cont rol
uni t cont r ol s t he A B S , EBD, TCS , VS A, and brake assi st wi t h t he brake pr essur e of eac h wheel and r educes engi ne
t or que.
V S A
O F F
S W I T C H
P A R K I N G
B R A K E
S W I T C H
B R A K E
FLUID
L E V E L
S W I T C H
B R A K E
PEDAL
P O S I T I O N
S W I T C H
G A U G E C O N T R O L M O D U L E
* indicator dr ivesignal
Buzzer request signal
VSA OFF switchsignal
Par kin* hr~>*'~ J.^.tu,
Brake fl uid level switchsignal
TPMS indicator signal
Engine torque control request
Control mode si gnal
YAW RATE-LATERAL
ACCELERATION
SENSOR
Yaw rate signal
Lateral acceleration signal
STEERING ANGLE
SENSOR
,7 \
Steering angle signal
VSA control enable/disable
Throttle open angle signal
Engine revolution signal
Brake pedal position swi tch signal
Service check signal
Gear position signal
WHEEL SPEED SENSOR
Wheel rotation
pulse signal
TPMS
CONTROL
UNIT
TPMS
indicator
signal
V V
CONTROL UNIT
Solenoid control
Motor control
V
Brake pressure
signal
VSA MODULATOR-
CONTROL UNIT
MODULATOR UNIT
Communication vi a F-CAN
19-62
ABS (Anti -lock Br ake S f st em) Feat ur es
Ant i -l ock Cont r ol
Wi t hout ABS , when t he brake pedal i s pr essed whi l e dri vi ng, t he wheel s somet i mes lock bef ore t he vehi cl e c omes to a
st op. In suc h an event , t he maneuver abi l i t y of t he vehi cl e i s r educed if t he f ront wheel s are l ocked, and t he st abi l i t y of t he
vehi cl e i s r educed if t he rear wheel s are l ocked, creat i ng an ext r emel y unst abl e condi t i on. Wi t h A B S , t he syst em
pr eci sel y cont r ol s t he sl i p rate of t he wheel s to ensur e maxi mum gri p f or ce f r om t he t i r es, and it t her eby ensur es
maneuver abi l i t y and st abi li t y of the vehi c l e. The ABS cal cul at es t he sl i p rate of t he wheel s based on t he f our wheel
speeds, and t hen it cont r ol s t he brake flui d pr essur e to reach t he t arget sl i p rate.
Gr i p f or ce of t i r e and r oad sur f ace
COEFFI CI ENT OF
FRICTION
TARGET SL IP RATE
ROTATI ONAL
DIRECTION
SL IP RATE
Mai n Cont r ol
The cont rol uni t det ect s t he wheel speed based on t he wheel speed sensor si gnal s it r ec ei ves, t hen it cal cul at es t he
vehi cl e speed based on t he det ect ed wheel speed. The cont rol uni t det ect s t he vehi cl e speed dur i ng decel er at i on based
on t he wheel speeds.
The cont rol uni t cal cul at es t he sl i p rate of eac h wheel , and t r ansmi t s t he cont rol si gnal to t he modul at or uni t sol enoi d
val ve when t he sl i p rate i s hi gh.
The hydr aul i c cont rol has t hree modes: Pr essur e i nt ensi f yi ng, pr essur e r educi ng, and pr essur e ret ai ni ng.
RIGHT-REAR
WHEEL SPEED
SENSOR
LEFT-REAR
WHEEL SPEED
SENSOR
RIGHT-FRONT
WHEEL SPEED
SENSOR
LEFT-FRONT
WHEEL SPEED
SENSOR
j
Detect
Wheel Speed
Detect-'.
Vehicle Speed
Detect
Wheel Speed
4*
Detect
Wheel Speed
1
j
1
Detect
Wheel Speed
Select Low
Speed Wheel
Reference
Slip Rate
Detect
r-is^ l SlipRate
LEFT-REAR
ABS
Control
RIGHT-FRONT
Detect
Slip Rate
LEFT-FRONT
Detect
Slip Rate
CONTROL UNIT
Drive
Solenoid
ABS
Control
Drive
Solenoid
ABS
Control
Drive
Solenoid
RIGHT-REAR
SOLENOID
LEFT-REAR
SOLENOID
RIGHT-FRONT
SOLENOID
LEFT-FRONT
SOLENOID
(cont' d)
19-63
VS A S f st em Component s
S f stem Description (cont'd)
EBD {El ect r oni c Br ake Di st ri but i on) f eat ur es
The EBD f eat ure hel ps cont rol vehi c l e braki ng by adj ust i ng t he r ear brake f or ce i n ac c or danc e wi t h t he r ear wheel l oad
bef ore t he ABS oper at es. Based on t he wheel speed sensor si gnal s, t he cont rol uni t us es t he modul at or to cont rol t he
r ear br akes i ndi vi dual l y. When t he r ear wheel speed i s l ess t han t he f ront wheel speed, t he VS A modul at or-cont rol uni t
r et ai ns t he cur r ent rear brake f l ui d pr essur e by c l osi ng t he i nlet val ve i n t he modul at or . As t he rear wheel speed
i nc r eases and appr oac hes t he f ront wheel s peed, t he VS A modul at or -cont r ol uni t i nc r eases t he r ear brake f l ui d pr essur e
by moment ar i l y openi ng t he i nl et val ve. Thi s whol e pr oc ess i s r epeat ed ver y rapi dl y. Whi l e t hi s i s happeni ng, ki ckback
may be felt at t he brake pedal , you may al so hear a mut ed buzzi ng sound f r om t he VS A modul at or-cont rol uni t. Thi s i s
nomal .
REAR WHEEL
BRAK E PRESSURE
Wi th EBD under HEAVY LOAD
at REAR WHEELS
Wi th EBD under LIGHT LOAD
at REAR WHEELS
Without EBD
F RONT WHEEL BK AK E PRESSURE
;
TCS (Tract i on Cont r ol S f st em) Feat ur es
When a dr i ve wheel l oses t ract i on on a sl i pper y r oad sur f ace and st ar t s to spi n, t he VS A modul at or-cont rol uni t appl i es
brake pr essur e to t he spi nni ng wheel and sends an engi ne t or que cont rol r equest to t he ECM/ PCM to sl ow t he spi nni ng
wheel and keep t ract i on. .
ANTI-POWER of BRAK E F ORCE
TOTAL TRACTION
DRIVING POWER
TOTAL TRACTION
BRAK E FORCE
NORMAL ROAD SURF ACE S L I PPERY ROAD SURF ACE
19-64
VS A (Vehi cl e St abi l i t y Assi st ) S f st em Feat ures
Over st eer cont r ol
Appl i es t he br akes to t he front and rear out si de wheel s
wi t h VS A
The br ake makes t he y aw r at e opposi t e
t o t he t ur ni ng di r ect i on
U de i t eer cont r ol
Appl i es t he br akes to t he front and r ear i nsi de wheel s
Cont r ol s t he engi ne t orque when accel er at i ng
wi t hout
wi t h VS A
The br ake i nc r eases t he y aw r at e t owar d
t he t ur ni ng di r ect i on
The t hr ot t l e cont r ol ef f ect :
Reduc es vehi c l e speed
Inc r eases cor ner i ng f or ce
Syst em Description (cont'd)
Br ake Assi st Feat ur es
Brake assi st hel ps ensur e that any dr i ver c an ac hi eve t he f ul l braki ng potenti al of t he vehi c l e by i ncr easi ng brake syst em
pr essur e in a pani c si t uat i on, bri ngi ng the vehi c l e into a full A B S st op.
If dur i ng a pani c st op t he VS A modul at or -cont r ol uni t det er mi nes t hat t he brake syst em pr essur e i nc r eases above a
t hr eshol d in l ess t han a cert ai n amount of t i me, t he VS A modul at or -cont r ol uni t engages brake as s i s t
Bec ause t he brake syst em pr essur e c r ossed t he pr essur e t hr eshol d bef ore t he t i me t hr eshol d had expi r ed, t he VS A
modul at or-cont rol uni t goes into brake assi st mode.
BrakePedal
Effort Reduced:
Panic Stop wi th Brake Assi st
Pressure
Pressure
Threshold
Time
Threshold
Time
19-66
Modul at or Uni t
The modul at or uni t c onsi st s of t he i nlet sol enoi d val ve, t he outlet sol enoi d val ve, t he VS A NO (nor mal l y open) sol enoi d
val ve, t he VS A NC (nor mal l y c l osed) sol enoi d val ve, t he r eser voi r , t he pump, and t he pump mot or.
The hydr aul i c cont r ol has t hr ee modes of ABS act i on; pr essur e i nt ensi f yi ng, pr essur e r et ai ni ng, and pr essur e r educ i ng.
Pr essur e i nt ensi f yi ng mode (VSA) i s a combi nat i on of t he TCS , VS A, and brake assi st act i on.
The hydr aul i c c i r c ui t i s an i ndependent f our c hannel t ype, one c hannel f or eac h wheel .
IN: INLET SOLENOID VALVE (NORMALLY OPEN)
OUT: OUTLET SOLENOID VALVE (NORMALLY CLOSED)
Mode VS A NO
Val ve
VS A NC
Val ve
Inl et
Sol enoi d
Val ve
Out l et
Sol enoi d
Val ve
Br ake Fl ui d
Pr essur e
i nt ensi f yi ng
mode
open c l osed open c l osed Mast er cyl i nder f l ui d i s pumped out to
t he cal i per .
Pr essur e
ret ai ni ng
mode
open c l osed c l osed c l osed Cal i per f l ui d i s ret ai ned by t he i nlet and
outlet val ves.
Pr essur e
r educi ng
mode
open c l osed c l osed open Cal i per f l ui d f l ows t hrough t he outlet
val ve to t he r eser voi r .
The mot or pumps t he r eser voi r f l ui d
t hr ough t he dampi ng c hamber to t he
mast er cyl i nder*.
Pr essur e
i nt ensi f yi ng
mode (VSA)
c l osed open open c l osed Mast er cyl i nder f l ui d i s pumped out
by pump wi t h mot or t hr ough VS A
NC val ve to t he cal i per .
Cal i per flui d pr essur e exc eeds
mast er cyl i nder pr essur e.
The mot or wi l l keep r unni ng unti l t he oper at i on of t he ant i -l ock brake cont rol i s f i ni shed wi t h t he f i rst pr essur e
r educi ng mode.
19-67
Ci rcui t Di agram
No. 1 (100 A) No. 3 (50 A)
<T\JD c r \ _ D
No. 2 (40 A )
GA UGE CONTROL
MODUL E
B RA K E S YS T E M
I NDI CATOR

A B S
I NDI CATOR

A
DICAT(
iCTNfl
A TOR

VS A
I NDI CATOR
VS A ACTI VATI ON
INDICATOR
- WHT
I GNI TI ON S WI TCH
2 / 1G T \ 5
DRI VER' S
UNDE R- DA S H
No. 6 (7.5 A)
y
IG1 HOT i n ON (II) and S TA RT (III)
- WH T
- RE D -
- RE D -
1 z=x 2
t o o 4 L T GRN
B RA K E PE DA L POS I TI ON S WI TCH
Cl o s ed : Br ake pedal pr es s ed
VS A OF F S WI TCH
5 f ^> GRY ~^Tl
RE D -
BRN -
WHT
RE D -
RE D -
j - BRN -
r
- L T GRN
- GRN
B RA K E FL UI D
L E VE L S WI TCH
Cl o s ed : L o w f l ui d
PARK I NG 1
B RA K E S WI TCH A
Cl o s ed : Par ki ng \J
br ake appl i ed
DATA L INK
CONNE CTOR
( DL C)
6
BL K
G302
- W H T -
- RE D -
- RE D -
L T B L U
WH T
B L K
YA W RA TE - L A TE RA L
A CCE L E RA TI ON
S E NS OR
- WH T
- RED -
- BL K -
- WH T -
- RED -
<!
G502
19-68
LTGRN GRY
ECM/PCM
-WHT
RED -
F S R +B
1 3
MR+B
WHT -
, RED -
RED -
- LT GRN
- WHT
- RED
-RED
A42
A 3
A4
WHEEL SPEED
SENSOR
STEERING
ANGLE
SENSOR
2
GRN GRN
4
PUR
3
BLU BLU
5
1
ORN
BRN
-LTGRN
STR-A
27
WHT
RED
. RED
LT BLU
ORN
GRN
LTGRN
PUR
BLU
RED
PNK
. PUR
BLK
BLK
STR-B
26
STR-D
9
SVCC
3 4
CAN-H
1
CAN-L
2 5
WEN
3
K-LINE
FL+B
FL-GND
23
FR +B
10
FR-GND
21
RL+B
8
RL-GND
18
RR +B
4
RR-GND
MR-GND
3 5
GND
VSA MODULATOR-CONTROL UNIT
r
CONTROL UNIT
5V
REGULATOR
FAIL-SAFE RELAY
PUMP MOTOR RELAY
CAN
CONTROLLER
~m- : 12V
O :5V
vcc
MODULATOR
UNIT
PRESSURE
SENSOR
NO
rMr
NO
SOLENOIDS
LEFT-FRONT
RIGHT-FRONT
OUT
PUMP MOTOR
(cont d)
19-69
Circuit Diagram (cont'd)
DRIVER'S UNDER-DASH F USE/RELAY
BOX CONNECTOR P (20P)
BRAK E PEDAL POSITION
SWI TCH 4P CONNECTOR
3
j n
4
i
5 6 7
L
8
n
9
10
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 ? 0
11 12
1
C
M

I

3
> *
a J
1
2
r
/
7 /
6
I
/
8 9
i
10
/ /
, c
13
y 7
j _
16
n
17 18 19
/ /
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
/
32
VS A OFF SWI TCH
BP CONNECTOR
Y AW RATE- L ATERAL
ACCEL ERATI ON S E NS OR"
5P CONNECTOR
BRAK E FL UID
' LEVEL SWITCH
2P CONNECTOR'
n i I I
1
J
C
M
4 5
I 1
3 4 5
cni>
PARK ING BRAK E SWI TCH
1P CONNECTOR
S TEERI NG A NGL E S E NS OR
5P CONNECTOR
WHEEL S PE E D S E NS OR
2P CONNECTOR
c
1 2 3 4 5
VS A MODUL ATOR- CONTROL UNIT 36P CONNECTOR
1
/
3 4
/
6
/ I
8 9 10 11
12 13
1 4 / / _ / 18 1 9 / 2 1 / 2 3 /
12 13
1 4 / / _ / 18 1 9 / 2 1 / 2 3 /
35 36
25 26 27
/
30
/ /
34
35 36
ECM/ PCM CONNECTOR A (49P) DATA LINK CONNECTOR (DLC)
f n n
1
/
3 4 5 6 7
/
9 10
11
/ /
15 16 17 18 19 20: 21
22 23 24 25
X
26 27: 28
29 30
/
32, 34 35 36
/
/.
/
/
41 42 43 44 / 46
12 14 16)
19-70
DTC Troubleshooting
DTC 11-13: Ri ght-front Wheel Speed Sensor
Circuit Malfuncti on
DTC 13-13; Left-front Wheel Speed Sensor
DTC 15-13: Ri ght-rear Wheel Speed Sensor
DTC 17-13: Left-rear Wheel Speed. Sensor
3. Tur n t he i gni ti on swi t ch to L OCK (0), t hen t urn it to
ON (II) agai n.
4. Chec k for DTCs wi t h t he HDS.
Is DTC 11-13,13-13, 15-13, and/or 17-13 indicat ed?
Chec k for l oose t er mi nal s bet ween t he wheel speed
sensor 2P connect or and t he VS A modul at or -cont r ol
uni t 36P connect or . Ref er to i ntermi ttent f ai l ur es
t r oubl eshoot i ng (see page 19-49).H
connect or (see st ep 3 on page 19-137).
appropri at e wheel speed sensor +B and GND
t er mi nal s of t he VS A moduIat or-cont roI uni t 36P
connect or i ndi vi dual l y (see t abl e).
DTC Appr opr i at e Ter mi nal DTC
+ B GND
11-13
Ri ght-front
No. 23 No. 10
13-13
Left-front
No. 19 No. 6
15-13
Ri ght -rear
No. 18 No. 4
17-13
Left-rear
No. 21 No. 8
F L-GND (GRN) RL-GND (RED)
RR-GND (PUR)
RR +B (PNK)
F L+B (ORN)
NO- Go to st ep 10.
(cont' d)
19-71
8. Di sconnect t he appr opr i at e wheel speed sensor 2P
connect or (see page 19-139).
9. On t he s ens or si de, c hec k f or cont i nui t y bet ween body
gr ound and wheel speed sensor 2P connect or
t er mi nal s No. 1 and No. 2 i ndi vi dual l y.
WHEEL SPEED SENSOR 2P CONNECTOR
GND
T ermi ni zlde of mal o icitunica):
YES - Repl ac e t he wheel speed sensor (see page
19-139).H
NO-Repai r a shor t to body gr ound i n t he wi r e
bet ween t he VS A modul at or -cont r ol uni t and t he
wheel speed s ens o r . B
appr opr i at e wheel speed sensor +B and GND
t er mi nal s of t he VS A modul at or-cont rol uni t 36P
connect or i ndi vi dual l y (see t abl e).
+B GND
11-13
Ri ght-front
No. 23 No. 10
13-13
Left-front
No. 19 No. 6
15-13
Ri ght -rear
No. 18 No. 4
17-13
Lef t -rear
No. 21 No. 8
FL -GND (GRN) RL -GND (RED)
RR-GND (PUR)
FR-GND (PUR)
Is t here 0.1 V or more?
NO- Go to st ep 16.
19-72
13. Di sconnect t he appr opr i at e wheel speed sensor 2P
15. On t he sensor si de, measur e t he vol t age bet ween
body gr ound and wheel speed sensor 2P connect or
WHEEL S PEED S E NS OR 2P CONNECTOR
GND /^flPO^ +B
Is there 0.1 Vormore?
YES - Repl ac e t he wheel speed sensor (see page
19-139).H
NO-Repai r a shor t to power i n t he wi r e bet ween t he
VS A modul at or-cont rol uni t and t he appropri at e
wheel speed s ens or .H
17. Di sc onnec t t he appr opr i at e wheel speed s ens or 2P
18. Chec k f or cont i nui t y bet ween t he appropri at e VS A
modul at or-cont rol uni t 36P connect or wheel speed
sensor +B and GND t er mi nal s (see t abl e).
+ B GND
11-13
Ri ght-front
No. 23 No. 10
13-13
Left-front
No. 19 No. 6
15-13
Ri ght -rear
No. 18 No. 4
17-13
Lef t -rear
No. 21 No. 8
RR-GND (PUR) FR-GND (PUR)
| 25l 26| 27|4l4| 30|4lA^
RR +B (PNK)
12
35
13
36
F R +B ( L TGRN)
FL -f B (ORN) RL +B (BLU)
YES - Repai r a shor t in t he wi r es bet ween t he
appropri at e wheel speed sensor and t he VS A
modul at or-cont rol uni t . i l
NO- Go to st ep 19.
(cont' d)
19-73
19. Chec k for cont i nui t y bet ween t he appr opr i at e VS A
modul at or -cont r ol uni t 36P connect or t er mi nal and
t he wheel speed sensor 2P c onnec t or t er mi nal (see
t abl e).
DTC VSA Modulator- Appropriate Wheel
control Unit 3SP Speed Sensor 2P
Connector Connector
Terminal Terminal
11-13 No. 23 Ri ght-front
13-13 No. 19 Left-front
15-13 No. 18 Ri ght -rear
17-13 ' *' c 21 Lef t -rear
WHEEL SPEED S E NS OR 2P CONNECTOR
UEFT-_ RIGHT-
REAR
RIGHT-
FRONT
L EFT-
ncA r t
F L +B
(ORN)
JKZM flipa mm J t~IEL
<2 I 1 > { 2 j 1 > <2 1 > <2 I 1>
R R +B
(PNK)
F R +B
( L TGRN)
R L +B
(BLU)
1 2 5 1 2 6 1 2 7 1 4 1 4 ^
R R +B (PNK)
F L +B (ORN)
1 2
3 5
13
36
FR +B (LT GRN)
R L +B (BL U)
' VS A MODUL ATOR-CONTROL UNIT 36P CONNECTOR
NO-Repai r an open i n t he wi r e bet ween t he
modul at or-cont rol uni t .H
20. Chec k f or cont i nui t y bet ween t he appropri at e VS A
modul at or -cont r ol uni t 36P connect or t er mi nal and
t he wheel speed sensor 2P connect or t er mi nal (see
t abl e).
DTC VSA Modulator- Appropriate Wheel
control Unit 36P Speed Sensor 2P
Connector Connector
Terminal Terminal
11-13 No. 10 Ri ght-front
13-13 No. 6 Left-front
15-13 No. 4 Ri ght -rear
17-13 No. 8 Lef t -rear
WHEEL S PE E D S E NS OR 2P CONNECTOR
RIGHT-
REAR
LEF T-
mumi
L EFT-
K f c AK
RIGHT-
FRONT
RR-GND
(PUR)
FL -GND
(GRN)
F L-GND
(GRN)
j r ~i n MZM J i r pa j c p r i
j2 j 11 > <2 I 1 > {2 | 1> <2 | 1>
RR-GND (PUR)
RL -GND
(RED)
RL -GND
(RED)
FR-GND
(PUR)
FR-GND (PUR)
Ml/|3i4| / i e| / | 8| 9| l 0| l l |
12 13
H4 | / | / l / | l 8 h 9 | / l 2 l | / | 2 3 | / |
12 13
| 25| 26| 27| / M30| / l /I / l 34|
35 36
modul at or-cont rol uni t . B
19-74
21. Subst i t ut e a known-good wheel speed sensor (see
page 19-139).
25. Tur n t he i gni ti on swi t ch to LOCK (0), t hen t urn it to
ON (II) agai n.
Is DTC 11-13, 13-13, 15-13, and/or 17-13 indicat ed?
NO-Repl ac e t he ori gi nal wheel speed sensor (see
page 19-139).B
27. Updat e t he VS A modul at or-cont rol uni t if it does not
have t he latest sof t war e (see page 19-135). If t he uni t
al r eady has t he l at est sof t wear , subst i t ut e a known-
good VS A modul at or-cont rol uni t (see page 19-136).
ON (II) agai n.
Is DTC 11-13,13-13, 15-13, and/or 17-13 indicat ed?
YES - Ch ec k f or l oose t er mi nal s i n t he VS A modul at or-
cont rol uni t 36P connect or . If t he VS A modul at or-
cont rol uni t was updat ed, subst i t ut e a known-good
VS A modul at or-cont rol uni t (see page 19-136), t hen
ret est . If the VS A modul at or-cont rol uni t was
NO-l f t he VS A modul at or-cont rol uni t was updat ed,
t r oubl eshoot i ng i s compl et e. If t he VS A modul at or -
cont rol uni t was subst i t ut ed, r epl ace t he ori gi nal VS A
modul at or-cont rol uni t (see page 19-136). If any ot her
DTCs ar e i ndi cat ed, go t o the i ndi cat ed DTCs
Power Sour c e Malfuncti on
DTC 13-14: Left-front Wheel Speed Sensor
DTC 17-14: Left-rear Wheel Speed Sensor
ON (II) agai n.
Chec k f or l oose t er mi nal s bet ween t he wheel speed
sensor 2P connect or and t he VS A modul at or-cont rol
al r eady has t he latest sof t war e, subst i t ut e a known-
7 Chec k f or DTCs wi t h t he HDS.
YES - Ch ec k for l oose t er mi nal s in t he VS A modul at or-
ret est . If t he VS A modul at or-cont rol uni t was
t r oubl eshoot i ng i s compl et e. If t he VS A modul at or-
DTCs ar e i ndi cat ed, go to t he i ndi cat ed DTCs
t r oubl eshoot i ng.H
19-75
DTC 12-11: Right-front Wheel Speed Sensor
Electrical Noise or Intermittent Interruption
DTC 14-11: Left-front.Wheel Speed Sensor
DTC 16-11: Right-rear Wheel Speed Sensor
NOTE: These DTCs may be c aus ed by el ect r i cal
i nt erf erence. Chec k for af t ermarket devi c es i nst al l ed in
t he vehi cl e when t hese DTC ar e i ndi cat ed.
NOTE: Dri ve t he vehi cl e on t he r oad, not on a lift.
Is DTC 12-11,14-11, 16-11, and/or 18-11 indicated?
YE S - l f DTC 12-12,14-12,16-12, or 18-12 i s i ndi cat ed at
t he s ame t i me, do t he DTC 12-12,14-12,16-12, or
18- 12 t r oubl eshoot i ng f i rst (see page 19-77). If DTC
12-12,14-12,16-12, or 18-12 i s not i ndi cat ed, go to
st ep 5.
NO-l f any ot her DTCs ar e i ndi cat ed, go to t he
i ndi cat ed DTCs t r oubl eshoot i ng. If DTCs ar e not
i ndi cat ed, t her e i s an i ntermi ttent f ai l ur e, t he syst em
i s OK at t hi s t i me. Check f or l oose t er mi nal s bet ween
t he wheel speed sensor 2P connect or and t he VS A
modul at or -cont r ol uni t 36P connect or . Ref er to
i nt ermi t t ent f ai l ur es t r oubl eshoot i ng (see page
19- 49) . B
6. Check that t he appropri at e wheel speed sensor i s
properl y mount ed (see page 19-139).
DTC Appr opr i at e Wheel Speed Sens or
12-11 Ri ght-front
14-11 Left-front
16-11 Ri ght -rear
18-11 Lef t -rear
Is the wheel speed sensor installation OK ?
NO-Rei nst al l t he wheel speed sensor , and check t he
mount i ng posi t i on (see page 19- 139) .
have t he l at est sof t war e (see page 19-135). If t he uni t
al r eady has t he l at est sof t war e, subst i t ut e a known-
NOTE: Dri ve t he vehi c l e on t he r oad, not on a lift.
Is DTC 12-11, 14-11, 16-11, and/or 18-11 indicated?
YES - Ch ec k f or l oose t er mi nal s i n t he VS A modul at or -
cont rol uni t 36P connect or . If t he VS A modul at or -
DTCs are i ndi cat ed, go to t he i ndi cat ed DTCs
. t r oubl es hoot i ng.
19-76
DTC 12-12; Ri ght-front Wheel Speed Sensor
Short to t he Ot her Sensor Ci rcui t
DTC 14-12; Left-front Wheel Speed Sensor
DTC 16-12: Ri ght -rear Wheel Speed Sensor
DTC 18-12: Lef t -rear Wheel Speed Sensor
3. Test -dr i ve t he vehi c l e at 13 mph (20 km/h) or mor e,
and go a di st anc e of 328 ft (100 m) or mor e.
NOTE: Dr i ve t he vehi c l e on t he r oad, not on a lift.
Is DTC 12-12,14-12, 16-12, and/or 18-12 Indicat ed?
Check f or l oose t er mi nal s bet ween t he wheel speed
sensor 2P c onnec t or and t he VS A modul at or-cont rol
uni t 36P c onnec t or . Ref er to i ntermi ttent f ai l ur es
7. Check f or cont i nui t y bet ween t he appropri at e VS A
modul at or -cont r ol uni t 36P connect or wheel speed
sensor GND t er mi nal s (see t abl e).
DTC VS A Modul at or -cont r ol Uni t 36P
Connec t or Ter mi nal
DTC
Appr opr i at e
Ter mi nal
Ot her Ter mi nal s
12-12 No. 10 No. 6 No. 4 No. 8
14-12 No. 6 No. 10 No. 4 No. 8
16-12 No. 4 No. 10 No. 6 No. 8
18-12 No. 8 No. 10 No. 6 No. 4
DTC 12-12
RR-GND (PUR)
FL -GND
(GRN)
FR-GND (PUR)
14M>M1}119^
| ^ 2 6 | 2 7 | ^ 3 b | / T O 3 4
35
RL -GND (RED)
DTC 14-12
FL -GND (GRN)
RR-GND (PUR)
H8>-
F R-GND (PUR)
| 2 5 | 2 6 | 2 7 | / L / | 3 C
12
35
13
RL -GND (RED)
DTC 16-12
RR-GND (PUR)
FR-GND (PUR)
12 13
H4|/1XI/118|19|
AH
/\2Z\/\
12 13
|25|26|27|/VN
35 36
DTC 18-12
RL -GND (RED)
RR-GND (PUR)
FR-GND (PUR)
H l / | 3 i 4 | / i e | / | t
5|9|10|11|
12 13
| 14|/1/1/ | 18|19L
M21 / | 23| / |
12 13
| 2 5 | 2 6 | 2 7 | / | / | 3 (
1/|34|
35 36
FL -GND (GRN)
YES - Repai r a shor t i n t he wi r es bet ween t he
NO- Go to st ep 8.
(cont' d)
19-77
connect or .
9. Updat e t he VS A modul at or -cont r ol uni t if it does not
10. Test -dr i ve t he vehi cl e at 13 mph (20 km/h) or mor e,
and go a di st ance of 328 ft (100 m) or mor e.
Is DTC 12-12, 14-12, 16-12, and/or 18-12 indicated?
YE S - Ch ec k f or l oose t er mi nal s in t he VS A modul at or -
cont rol uni t was u n d a t e d c. hcti t. to
a
known-good
VS A modul at or -cont r ol uni t (see page 19-136), t hen
ret est . If t he VS A modul at or-cont rol unit was
cont rol uni t was subst i t ut ed, r epl ace t he or i gi nal VS A
modul at or -cont r ol uni t (see page 19-136). If any ot her
Installati on Error
Installati on Error
Installati on Error
Installati on Error
2. Check t he RIGHT FRONT, L EFT FRONT, RIGHT REAR,
L EFT BEAR WHEEL S PEED in the VS A U A ! A L i b i wi t h
t he HDS.
Are all four values the same?
NO- Go to st ep 3.
4. Check that t he appr opr i at e wheel speed sensor i s
12-21 Ri ght-front
14-21 Left-front
16-21 Ri ght -rear
18-21 Lef t -rear
YES - Repl ac e t he appropri at e wheel speed sensor
(s eepage 19-1S9).._
19-78
DTC 12-22; Right-front Wheel Speed Sensor
i nstallati on Error (19 mph (30 km/h) or More)
Installati on Error (13 mph (30 km/h) or More)
1. Test -dr i ve t he vehi cl e bet ween 19 mph (30 km/h) and
31 mph (50 km/h) for 70 sec onds or more.'
2. Chec k t he RIGHT FRONT, L EFT FRONT, RIGHT REAR,
L EFT REAR WHEEL S PEED in t he VS A DATA L I ST wi t h
t he HDS.
Chec k f or l oose t er mi nal s bet ween t he wheel speed
sensor 2P connect or and the VS A modul at or-cont rol
t r oubl eshoot i ng (see page 19- 49) . !
NO- Go to st ep 3.
4. Chec k t hat t he appropri at e wheel speed sensor i s
DTC Appr opr i at e Wheel Speed S ens or
12-22 Ri ght-front
14-22 Lef t -f ront
16-22 Ri ght -rear
18-22 Lef t -rear
(see page 19- 139) . !
mount i ng posi t i on (see page 19- 139) ,
Installati on Error (0 to 9 mph (0 to 15 km/h))
1. Test -dr i ve t he vehi cl e bet ween 1 mph (1 km/h) and
9 mph (15 km/h).
2. Check t he RIGHT FRONT, L EFT FRONT, RIGHT REAR,
L EFT REAR WHEEL S PEED in t he VS A DATA L I ST wi t h
t he HDS.
Check f or l oose t er mi nal s bet ween t he wheel speed
t r oubl eshoot i ng (see page 19-43).II
NO- Gq to st ep 3.
4. Check that t he appropri at e wheel speed sensor i s
12-23 Ri ght-front
14-23 Left-front
16-23 Ri ght -rear
18-23 /aft-rear
(see page 19-139).BI
mount i ng posi t i on (see page 19-139).
19-79
DTC 21-11: Ri ght-front Magnet i c Encoder
(Wheel Beari ng) Malfuncti on (Pul se Mi ssi ng)
DTC 22-11: Left-front Magnet i c Enc oder
DTC 23-11: Ri ght-rear Magnet i c Enc oder
DTC 24-11: Left-rear Magnet i c Enc oder
3. Test -dr i ve t he vehi cl e at 13 mph (20 km/h) or mor e,
or .J go z di ctor.co of 328 ft (100 m) or mor e.
Is DTC 21-11,22-11,23-11, and/or 24-11 indicat ed?
s ens or 2P connect or and t he VS A modul at or -cont r ol
uni t 36P connect or . Ref er to i nt ermi t t ent f ai l ur es
t r oubl eshoot i ng (see page 19-49)
6. Inspect t he appr opr i at e magnet i c enc oder f or
damage, debr i s, and cor r ect i nst al l at i on.
DTC Appr opr i at e
Magnet i c
Enc oder
Not e
21-11 Ri ght-front Remove t he
dr i veshaf t
out boar d j oi nt
f rom t he
appropri at e wheel
hub (see page
18-14).
22-11 Left-front
Remove t he
dr i veshaf t
out boar d j oi nt
f rom t he
appropri at e wheel
hub (see page
18-14).
23-11 Ri ght -rear Remove t he hub
bear i ng uni t (see
page 18-39).
24-11 Lef t -rear
Remove t he hub
bear i ng uni t (see
page 18-39).
Is t he magnet ic encoder surface OK?
YES - Remo v e t he debr i s f r om t he magnet i c enc oder ,
or r epl ace t he wheel bear i ng (front) or t he hub bear i ng
uni t (rear):
Front : Repl ace t he wheel bear i ng (see page
18-14).B
Rear : Repl ace t he hub bear i ng uni t (see page
18-39).B
NO-Cl ean dust or di rt f r om t he appropri at e magnet i c
enc oder sur f ace on t he wheel bear i ng or t he hub
bear i ng uni t , t hen go to st ep 1 and r echeck. If t he DTC
i s sti ll pr esent , r epl ace t he appropri at e wheel bear i ng
or hub bear i ng uni t.
19-80
DTC 25-12: Yaw Rate Sensor i nternal Ci rcui t
Malfuncti on (Open, Short )
DTC 25-13: Yaw Rate Sensor Internal Ci rcui t
Malfuncti on
DTC 25-18: Yaw Rat e-Lat eral Accel erat i on
Sensor Internal Ci rcui t Malfuncti on
DTC 26-12: Lateral Accel erat i on Sensor
Internal Ci rcui t Malfuncti on (Open, Short )
DTC 26-13: Lateral Accel erat i on Sensor
Internal Ci rcui t Malfuncti on
3. Tur n t he i gni ti on swi t c h to L OCK (0), t hen turn it to
ON (II) agai n.
4. Check for DTCs wi t h t he HDS.
Is DTC 25-12, 25-13, 25-18, 26-12, or 26-13 indicat ed?
YES - Repl ac e t he y aw rat e-l at eral accel er at i on sensor
(s eepage 19-133). B
t i me. B
DTC 25-17: Yaw Rat e-Lat eral Accel er at i on
Sensor Power Sour c e Vol t age Malfuncti on
3. Tur n t he i gni ti on swi t c h to L OCK (0), t hen t urn it to
ON (II) agai n.
Is DTC 25-17 indicat ed?
YE S - l f DTC 61-01,61-21, 61-22, 61-23, and/or 62-21 i s
i ndi cat ed at t he s ame t i me, check t he battery
per f or mance (see page 22-90), and do t he al t ernat or
and regul at or ci rcui t t r oubl eshoot i ng f i rst (see page
4-27). If DTC 61-01, 61-21, 61-22,61-23, and/or 62-21 i s
not i ndi cat ed at t he s ame t i me, r epl ace t he y aw
rat e-l at eral accel er at i on sensor (see page 19-133).H
t i me. B
19-81
DTC 25-21: Yaw Rat e Sensor Neutral Posi t i on
Malfuncti on
DTC 25-23: Yaw Rat e Sensor Ci rcui t
Intermittent Interrupti on
ON (II) agai n.
4. Wai t 60 sec onds or mor e.
Is DTC 25-21 or 25-23 indicat ed?
YES-Rf epi aoe me yaw rat e-l at erai accel er at i on sensor
(see page 19-133).B
t i me. G
DTC 25-22: Yaw Rate Sensor St uck
3. Test -dr i ve t he vehi cl e at 7 mph (10 km/h) or mor e.
i ndi cat ed, i ntermi ttent f ai l ur e, t he syst em i s OK at t hi s
t i me.B
5. Test -dr i ve t he vehi c l e. Chec k t he YAW RATE S i n t he
VS A DATA L IST wi t h t he HDS whi l e dri vi ng in c or ner s.
Does t he indicat ed value change?
t i me.B
NO-Repl ac e t he yaw rat e-l at eral accel er at i on sensor
(see page 19-133).B
VS A
DTC 25-24: Yaw Rate Sensor Gai n Low
DTC 25-25: Yaw Rate Sensor Gai n High
DTC 26-24: Lateral Accel erat i on Sensor Gai n
Low
DTC 26-25: Lateral Accel erat i on Sensor Gai n
High
Is DTC 25-24, 25-25, 26-24, or 26-25 indicated?
YES - Repl ac e t he y aw rat e-lat eral accel er at i on sensor
(see page 19- 133) .
NO-l nt er mi t t ent f ai l ur e, the syst em i s OK at t hi s
t i me. H
DTC 26-21: Lat eral Accel erat i on Sensor
Neutral Posi ti on Malfuncti on
DTC 26-23: Lat eral Accel er at i on Sensor Ci rcui t
Intermi ttent Interrupti on
NOTE: Whi l e doi ng t hi s t r oubl eshoot i ng, avoi d vi br at i on
or shaki ng of t he vehi c l e.
1. Park t he vehi c l e on a flat and l evel sur f ac e.
ON (II) agai n.
5. Wai t 60 sec onds or mor e.
Is DTC 26-21 or 26-23 indicated?
(see page 19- 133) . !
t i me. H
19-83
PTC 26-22: Lateral Accel erat i on Sensor St uck
Is DTC 26-22 indicated?
NO- lf any ot her DTCs are i ndi cat ed, go to t he
time.II
5. Test -dr i ve t he vehi c l e. Check t he L ATERAL
ACCEL ERATI ON S ENS OR in t he VS A DATA L IST wi t h
t he HDS whi l e dri vi ng ar ound c or ner s.
Does the indicated value change?
t i me. H
NO-Repl ac e t he y aw rat e-l at eral accel er at i on sensor
(see page 19- 133) .
DTC 27-11: St eer i ng Angl e Sensor DIAG
Si gnal Error (Initial)
DTC 27-26: St eeri ng Angl e Sensor DIAG
Si gnal Er r or (Mai n)
ON (II) agai n.
Mo_irtornnittont failure, the syst em is OK at t hi s t i me.
Check f or l oose t er mi nal s bet ween t he st eer i ng angl e
t r oubl eshoot i ng (see page 19-49).ll
6. Di sc onnec t t he st eer i ng angl e sensor 5P connect or
(see page 19-132).
7. Di sc onnec t t he VS A modul at or-cont rol uni t 36P
c onnec t or (see st ep 3 on page 19-137).
19-84
8. Check f or cont i nui t y bet ween body gr ound and
st eer i ng angl e sensor 5P connect or t er mi nal s No. 2,
No. 3, No. 4, and No. 5 i ndi vi dual l y.
STEERING ANGLE SENSOR BP CONNECTOR
1 2 3 4 5
STR-A (GRN)
STR-D(BLU)
SVCC (ORN)
STR-B
(PUR)
bet ween t he st eer i ng angl e sensor and t he VS A
modul at or-cont rol uni t .ll
NO- Go to st ep 9.
9. Check for cont i nui t y bet ween t he VS A modul at or-
cont rol unit 36P connect or t er mi nal and t he st eer i ng
angl e sensor 5P connect or t er mi nal i ndi vi dual l y (see
t abl e).
Si gn VSA Modulator- St eer i ng Angl e
control Unit 36P S ens o r 5P
Connector Connec t or
Terminal Ter mi nal
S VCC No. 9 No. 5
STR-A No. 11 No. 2
STR-D No. 26 No. 3
STR-B No. 27 No. 4
SGND No. 34 No
S TEERI NG ANGL E S ENS OR BP CONNECTOR
S GND (BRN)
S TR- A (GRN)
1
C
M
3 4 5
S TR-D (BLU)
S TR- B (PUR)
S VCC
(ORN)
S TR- B
( L TGRN)
S VCC
(ORN)
STR-A (GRN)
|25l26|27l>[/l30l>lXl>i34l
S TR-D (BLU)
12
35
S GND (BRIM)
NO-Repai r an open in t he wi r e bet ween t he st eer i ng
angl e sensor and t he VS A modul at or-cont rol uni t .B
(cont' d)
10. Subst i t ut e a known-good st eer i ng angl e sensor (see
page 19-132).
ON (II) agai n.
NO-Repl ac e t he ori gi nal st eer i ng angl e sensor (see
page 19- 132) .
ON (II) agai n.
ret est . If t he VS A modul at or -cont r ol uni t was
NO-l f t he VS A modul at or -cont r ol uni t was updat ed,
DTC 27-21: St eer i ng Angl e Sensor St uck
Neutral Posi ti on
DTC 27-22: St eer i ng Angl e Sensor St uck
Offset Posi ti on
2. Tur n t he st eer i ng wheel left and ri ght 90 degr ees or
mor e. Chec k t he S TEERI NG ANGL E i n t he VS A DATA
Is there +90 or more, and 90 or less?
Chec k f or l oose t er mi nal s bet ween t he st eer i ng angl e
uni t 36P c o n n e c t * * * * R w " * e r r r ! ! t t e r ! t f s l l u r c c
NO- Go to st ep 3.
(see page 19-132).
19-86
7. Measur e t he vol t age bet ween body gr ound and
st eer i ng angl e sensor 5P connect or t er mi nal s No. 2,
No. 3, and No. 4 i ndi vi dual l y.
STEERING ANGLE SENSOR 5P CONNECTOR
STR-A (GRN)
STR-D (BLU)
STR-B
(PUR)
Is t here 0.1 Vor more?
YES - Repai r a shor t to power i n t he wi r e bet ween t he
st eer i ng angl e sensor and t he VS A modul at or-cont rol
uni t .H
NO-Repl ac e t he st eer i ng angl e sensor (see page
19-132).H
DTC 27-23: St eeri ng Angl e Sensor Count er
Malfuncti on
t i mes.
uni t 36P connect or . Ref er t o i ntermi ttent f ai l ur es
(see page 19-132).
(cont' d)
19-87
10. Chec k f or cont i nui t y bet ween st eer i ng angl e s ens or
5P connect or t er mi nal s No. 2 and No. 4.
S TEERI NG A NGL E S E NS OR 5P CONNECTOR
1 | 2 3 4 5
S TR- A (GRN)
40?
S TR- B (PUR)
YE S P.cpclr a shor t ir. t he vVi.co L G ^V O O I ' . li.c olociIny
angl e sensor and t he VS A modul at or-cont rol uni t .B
NO- Go to st ep 11.
11. Chec k for cont i nui t y bet ween st eer i ng angl e sensor
5P connect or t er mi nal s No. 5 and No. 2, and No. 5 and
' S TEERI NG A NGL E S E NS OR 5P CONNECTOR
S TR- B (PUR)
S TR- A (GRN)
S VCC( ORN)
12. Chec k for cont i nui t y bet ween st eer i ng angl e sensor
5P connect or t er mi nal s No. 1 and No. 2, and No. 1 and
S TEERI NG ANGL E S ENS OR 5P CONNECTOR
S TR- A (GRN)
h
1 2 3 4 5
S GND
(BRN)
@H
S TR- B (PUR)
YES - Repai r a shor t i n t he wi r es bet ween t he st eer i ng
angl e sensor and t he VS A moduIat or-cont roI uni t .B
19-132).B
YES - Repai r a shor t i n t he wi r es bet ween t he st eer i ng
angl e sensor and t he VS A modul at or-cont rol uni t . i l
NO- Go to st ep 12.
19-88
DTC 27-24: St eeri ng Angl e Sensor Exchange
Malfuncti on
1. Tur n t he i gni ti on swi t ch to ON (II), and set t he front
wheel s to t he st rai ght ahead posi t i on.
2. Tur n t he st eeri ng wheel one t urn to t he left. Chec k t he
S TEERI NG ANGL E in t he VS A DATA L IST wi t h t he
HDS.
Is there about 288 degrees to 432 degrees positive?
t i me. B
19-132).B
DTC 31-xx*: ABS Ri ght-front Inlet Sol enoi d
Val ve Malfuncti on
DTC 32-xx*: ABS Ri ght-front Outlet Sol enoi d
Val ve Malfuncti on
DTC 33-xx*: ABS Left-front Inlet Sol enoi d
Val ve Malfuncti on
DTC 34-xx*: ABS Left-front Outlet Sol enoi d
Val ve Malfuncti on
DTC 35-xx*: ABS Ri ght-rear Inlet Sol enoi d
Val ve Malfuncti on
DTC 36-xx*: ABS Ri ght-rear Outlet Sol enoi d
Val ve Malfuncti on
DTC 37-xx*: ABS Left-rear Inlet Sol enoi d Val ve
Malfuncti on
DTC 38-xx*: ABS Left-rear Outlet Sol enoi d
Val ve Malfuncti on
Any t wo-char act er subc ode (see t abl e)
Subcode
Mal f unct i on Not e (DTC)
01 Sol enoi d Initial
Pul se
31-01,32-01,33-01,
34-01,35-01,36-01,
37-01,38-01
02 Initial Feedback
Si gnal
31-02, 33-02,35-02,
37-02
11 Feedback
Si gnal
31-11,33-11,35-11,
37-11
21 Sol enoi d Pul se 31-21,32-21,33-21,
34-21,35-21,36-21,
37-21,38-21
22 Sol enoi d
Spec ul at i ve
31-22,32-22,33-22,
34-22,35-22,36-22,
37-22, 38-22
23 Sol enoi d St uck
ON
31-23, 32-23,33-23,
34-23, 35-23,36-23,
37-23, 38-23
24 Feedback
Si gnal /Sol enoi d
St uck ON
31-24, 33-24,35-24,
37-24
(cont ' d)
19-89
1. Tur n t he i gni ti on swi t c h to ON (li ).
ON (II) agai n.
Is DTC 31-xx, 32-xx, 33-xx, 34-xx, 35-xx, 36-xx, 37-xx,
or 38-xx indicat ed?
t i m e . !
good VS A modul at or-cont roi uni t { see page 19-136).
6. Tur n t he i gni t i on swi t c h to L OCK (0), t hen t urn it to
ON (II) agai n.
Is DTC 37-xx, 32-xx, 33-xx, 34-xx, 35-xx, 36-xx, 37-xx,
or 38-xx indicat ed?
YE S - Ch ec k f or l oose t er mi nal s i n t he VS A modul at or -
cont r ol uni t was updat ed, subst i t ut e a known-good
cont r ol uni t was subst i t ut ed, r epl ace t he ori gi nal VS A
DTCs ar e i ndi cat ed, go t o t he i ndi cat ed DTCs
DTC 41-21: Ri ght-front Wheel Lock
DTC 42-21; Left-front Wheel Lock
DTC 43-21: Ri ght -rear Wheel Lock
DTC 44-21: Left-rear Wheel Lock
The DTCs may be i ndi cat ed under t hese condi t i ons:
The vehi c l e goes i nto a spi n.
The A B S or VS A cont i nues to oper at e f or a l ong t i me.
S now, di rt, or debr i s bui l d-up on t he wheel speed
sensor or magnet i c encoder .
Mi sadj ust ed brake pedal posi t i on swi t c h.
Cont ami nat ed brake f l ui d.
1. Dri ve t he vehi c l e unti l t he br akes dr ag or unti l t he
pedal i s hi gh and har d. Thi s c an t ake 20 or mor e brake
pedal appl i cat i ons dur i ng an ext ended t est -dr i ve.
2. Wi t h t he engi ne r unni ng, r ai se and suppor t t he
vehi c l e (see page 1-13), t hen spi n t he appropri at e
wheel by hand.
DTC Appr opr i at e Wheel
41-21 Ri ght-front
42-21 Left-front
43-21 Ri ght -rear
44-21 Lef t -rear
Is t here brake drag?
YES - Repai r t he brake dr ag (see page 19-5).B
NO- Go to st ep 3.
3. Chec k t hat t he appropri at e wheel speed sensor i s
Is t he wheel speed sensor inst allat ion OK?
19-90
6. Test -dr i ve t he vehi c l e at 7 mph (10 km/h) f or
20 sec onds or mor e.
Is DTC 41-21, 42-21, 43-21, and/or 44-21 Indicat ed?
t i me. Ref er to i ntermi ttent f ai l ur es t r oubl eshoot i ng
(see page 19-49).H
have t he latest sof t war e (see page 19-135). If the uni t
9. Test -dr i ve t he vehi cl e at 7 mph (10 km/h) f or
20 sec onds or mor e.
YE S - Ch ec k f or l oose t er mi nal s in t he VS A modul at or-
DTC 51-11: Motor Lock
DTC 51-13: Motor Dri ve Ci rcui t Malfuncti on
3. Tur n t he i gni t i on swi t ch to L OCK (0), t hen t urn it to
ON (II) agai n.
5. Operat e any one of t he f our sol enoi ds, as l i st ed, in t he
VS A FUNCTION TE S T f i ve t i mes wi t h t he HDS.
-L FT FT SOL ENOI D
-RT FT SOL ENOI D
-L FT REAR SOL ENOI D
-RT REAR SOL ENOI D
t i me . l
have t he l at est sof t war e (see page 19-135). Sf t he unit
ON (II) agai n.
(c ont ' d)
19-91
10. Oper at e any one of t he f our sol enoi ds, as l i st ed, in t he
- L FTFT SOL ENOI D
-RT FT SOL ENOI D
- L FT REAR SOL ENOI D
-RT REAR SOL ENOI D
11. Chec k for DTCs wi t h the HDS.
YE S - Ch ec k for l oose t er mi nal s in t he VS A modul at or -
w
O- ! f t he VS A n-.cdulMtG.-wi i uuS uni t was updat ed,
DTC 51-12: Motor Dri ve Ci rcui t Malfuncti on
ON (II) agai n.
Chec k f or l oose t er mi nal s at t he VS A modul at or-
cont rol uni t 36P connect or . Ref er to i ntermi ttent
f ai l ur es t r oubl eshoot i ng (see page 13-43).! !
6. Chec k t he No. 2 (30 A) f use i n t he under -hood f use/
rel ay box.
Is the fuse blown?
YE S - Go to s t ep7.
19-92
8. Chec k f or cont i nui t y bet ween VS A modul at or-cont rol
uni t 36P connect or t er mi nal No. 13 and body gr ound.
MR 4-B (RED)
i 1 i 1
H M 3 | 4 | / | 6 | / | 8 | 9 | 1 0 | 1 1 |
12 13
|14|/ M/ 118|19|/ 121|/ |23|/ |
12 13
| 25| 26| 27| ^/ | 30H / H 34|
35 36
J
bet ween t he No. 2 (30 A) f use in t he under -hood
f use/r el ay box and t he VS A modul at or-cont rol uni t .H
NO-l nst al l a new No. 2 (30 A) f use i n t he under -hood
connect or .
ON (II) agai n.
YES - Repl ac e t he VS A modul at or-cont rol uni t (see
page 19-136).H
NO-The t r oubl eshoot i ng i s compl et e
15. Measur e t he vol t age bet ween VS A modul at or -cont r ol
MR +B (RED)
f I 1 1 1
|1|/|3| 4| / | 6| / | 8| 9|10|11|
12 13
|14|/1/|/118|19|/121|/123|/|
12 13
|25|26|27|/|/|30|/|/l/l34|
35 36
J
NO-Repai r an open in t he wi r e bet ween t he No. 2
(30 A) f use i n t he under -hood f use/r el ay box and t he
VS A modul at or-cont rol uni t .H
(cont' d)
19-93
connect or .
good VS A modul at or -cont r ol uni t (see page 19-136).
18. Tur n t he i gni t i on swi t c h to L OCK (0), t hen t urn it t o
ON (II) agai n.
DTC 2-12: Motor St uck OFF
3. Tur n t he i gni t i on swi t ch to L OCK (0), t hen t ur n it to
ON (II) agai n.
4. Oper at e any one of t he f our sol enoi ds, as l i st ed, i n t he
- L FT FT SOL ENOI D
-RT FT SOL ENOI D
-RT REAR SOL ENOI D
Is DTC 52 12 / r MioaiW?
t i me. B
7. Tur n t he i gni t i on swi t ch t o L OCK (0), t hen t ur n it to
ON (II) agai n.
8. Oper at e any one of t he f our sol enoi ds, as l i st ed, i n t he
- L FT FT SOL ENOI D
-RT FT SOL ENOI D
-RT REAR SOL ENOI D
19-94
cont rol uni t 36P connect or. If t he VS A modul at or-
VS A modul at or-cont rol unit (see page 19-136), t hen
cont rol uni t was subst i t ut ed, repl ace t he ori gi nal VS A
modul at or-cont rol unit (see page 19-136) If any ot her
DTC 53-01: Motor Rel ay St uck ON 1
DTC 53-12: Motor Rel ay St uck ON 2
ON (II) agai n.
Chec k for l oose t er mi nal s at t he VS A modul at or-
f ai l ur es t r oubl eshoot i ng (see page 19-49).Hi
1. Chec k f or cont i nui t y bet ween VS A modul at or-cont rol
| 1 | / | 3 | 4 | / | 6 | / | 8 | 9 | 1 0 | 1 1 |
12 13
|14L4/|/118|19|/|21|/|23|/1
12 13
| 2 5 | 2 6 | 2 7 | / M 3 0 | / | / | / | 3 4 |
35 36
MR-GND (BLK)
NO-Repai r an open in t he wi r e bet ween the VS A
modul at or-cont rol uni t and body gr ound (G202).H
(cont' d)
19-95
8. Reconnect t he VS A modul at or-cont rol uni t 36P
connect or ,
ON (II) agai n.
r et est If M I O VGA modul at or-cont rol uni t was
ISiOIf t he VS A modul at or -cont r ol uni t was updat ed,
DTC 54-03: Fai l -saf e Rel ay 1 Stuck ON
DTC 54-04: Fai l -saf e Rel ay 1 Stuck OFF (Initial)
DTC 54-21: Fai l -saf e Rel ay 1 St uck OFF (Mai n)
ON (II) agai n.
Is DTC 54-03, 54-04, or 54-21 indicated?
NO-l nt er mi t t ent f ai l ure, t he syst em Is OK at t hi s
t i me. H
6. Chec k t he No. 2 (40 A) f use in t he under -hood f use/
rel ay box.
Is the fuse blown?
19-96
8. Check for cont i nui t y bet ween VS A modul at or -cont r ol
F S R+B (WHT)
1 1 1}
i H / l 3 | 4 M 6 | / | 8 | 9 | l O | l l |
12 13
| 1 4 | / M/ | 1 8 | 1 9 | / | 2 1 | / ] 23| / 1
12 13
| 2 5 | 2 6 | 2 7 | ^ / | 3 0 ^V ) / | 3 4 |
35
36
X
bet ween t he No. 2 (40 A) f use i n t he under -hood
f use/r el ay box and t he VS A modul at or -cont r ol uni t .H
9. Reconnect t he VS A modul at or -cont r ol uni t 36P
connect or .
12. Tur n t he i gni t i on swi t c h t o L OCK (0), t hen t ur n it t o
ON (II) agai n.
Is DTC 54-03, 54-04, or 54-21 indicat ed?
YES - Repl ac e t he VS A modul at or -cont r ol uni t (see
page 19-136).
NO-The t r oubl eshoot i ng i s c o mpl et e.
ON (II) agai n.
Is DTC 54-03, 54-04, or 54-21 indicat ed?
YES - Ch ec k f or l oose t er mi nal s in t he VS A modul at or -
19-97
DTC 56-01: Initial VIG FET St uck OFF (Initial)
DTC 56-02: Initial VIG FET St uck ON
DTC 56-11: VIG FET St uck OFF (Mai n)
ON (II) agai n.
III > I O . S
ON (II) agai n.
DTC 61-01: VS A Modulator-control Uni t Initial
IG Low Vol t age
DTC 61-21: VS A Modulator-control Uni t Power
Sour c e Low Vol t age 1
3. Tur n t he i gni ti on swi t ch to L OCK (0), t hen start t he
eng i ne.
f ai l ur es t r oubl eshoot i ng (see page 19-49).Hi
5. Chec k and note BATTERY vol t age in t he VS A DATA
6. Usi ng a vol t met er , measur e and note t he vol t age
ac r oss t he battery t er mi nal s.
NOTE: If t he vol t age i s bel ow 9.5 V, check t he battery
(see page 22-90), and t r oubl eshoot t he al t ernat or
regul at or ci rcui t (see page 4-27).
19-98
7. Compar e t he vol t age not ed i n st ep 5 to t he vol t age i n
st ep 6.
Is the difference between the two voltage readings less
then 3 V?
Chec k f or l oose t er mi nal s at t he VS A modul at or -
f ai l ur es t r oubl eshoot i ng (see page 19-49). If t he code
r eset s after c l ear i ng, go to st ep 8.
NO- Go to st ep 8.
9. Tur n t he i gni ti on swi t c h to L OCK (0), t hen st art t he
engi ne.
YE S - Ch ec k for l oose t er mi nal s i n t he VS A modul at or-
NO-lf t he VS A modul at or-cont rol uni t was updat ed,
DTC 62-21: VS A Modulat or-cont rol Uni t IG
High Vol t age
3. Tur n t he i gni t i on swi t c h to L OCK (0), t hen st art t he
engi ne.
t i me.i l
5. Chec k and note BATTERY vol t age in t he VS A DATA
6. Usi ng a vol t met er , measur e and note t he vol t age
ac c r oss t he battery t er mi nal s.
NOTE: If t he vol t age i s mor e t han 15.1 V, t r oubl eshoot
t he al t ernat or regul at or ci rcui t (see page 4-27).
7. Compar e t he vol t age not ed i n st ep 5 to t he vol t age i n
st ep 6.
Is the difference between the two voltage readings less
than 3 V?
f ai l ur es t r oubl eshoot i ng (see page 19-49). If t he c ode
r eset s after c l ear i ng, go to st ep 8.H
NO-Go to st ep 8.
(cont ' d)
19-99
9. Tur n t he i gni ti on swi t c h to L OCK (0), t hen st art t he
engi ne.
DTC 64-11: St eeri ng Angl e Sensor Power
3. Tur n t he i gni ti on swi t ch to L OCK (0), t hen t urn it t o
' ON (II) agai n.
t i me.B
6. Di sconnect t he st eer i ng angl e sensor 5P connect or
(see page 19-132).
8. Check f or cont i nui t y bet ween st eer i ng angl e sensor
S TEERI NG ANGL E S E NS OR 5P CONNECTOR
1 | 2
H
4 5
S VCC( ORN)
modul at or-cont rol uni t .B
NO-Go to st ep 9.
19-100
9. Reconnect all connectors.
have the latest software (see page 19-135). If the unit
already has the latest software, substitute a known-
11. Tur n t he i gni t i on swi t ch to L OCK (0), t hen t urn it t o
ON (II) agai n.
Is DTC 64-111ndicated?
YE S - Ch ec k for l oose t er mi nal s i n t he VS A modul at or -
DTC 64-12: Steering Angle Sensor Power
Circuit High Voltage
3. Tur n t he i gni ti on swi t ch to L OCK (0), t hen turn it t o
ON (II) agai n.
Is DTC 64-12 Indicated?
s ens or 5P connect or and t he VS A modul at or-cont rol
uni t 36P connect or . Ref er to i nt ermi t t ent f ai l ur es
(see page 19-132).
9. Measur e t he vol t age bet ween st eer i ng angl e sensor
STEERING ANGLE SENSOR 5PCONNECTOR -
1 2 3 4 5
SVCC (ORN)
uni t .H
NO-Go to st ep 10.
(cont' d)
19-101
DTC Troubl eshoot i ng {cont'd)
13. Tur n t he i gni ti on swi t c h t o L OCK (0), t hen t urn it t o
ON (II) agai n.
VS A modul at or -cont r ol unit(see page 19-136), t hen
DTC 65-21: Brake F luid Level Stuck ON
NOTE: Bl eedi ng t he brake syst em whi l e t he i gni ti on
swi t c h i s ON c an c aus e t hi s DTC.
1. Chec k t he brake f l ui d l evel in t he mast er cyl i nder
r eser voi r .
Is the brake fluid level OK ?
NO-Do t he brake pad i nspect i on: Front (see page
19-13), r ear (see page 19-30), check f or brake f l ui d
l eaks or r epl ace wor n brake pads, t hen go to st ep 2
and r echeck.
3. Clear the DTC wi t h t he HDS.
4. Tur n t he i gni ti on swi t ch to L OCK (0), t hen turn it to
ON (II) agai n.
t i m e . ll
6. Rel ease t he parki ng brake.
ON (II) agai n.
8. Chec k t he brake syst em i ndi cat or in t he gauge cont rol
modul e.
Does the indicator come on then go off?
NO- Go to st ep 9.
9. Chec k t he BRAK E FLUID L EVEL SWITCH in t he VS A
Does the HDS indicate the BRAK E FLUID LEVEL
SWITCH as OFF?
YES-Subs t i t ut e a known-good gauge cont rol modul e
(see page 22-351), t hen go to st ep 1 and r echeck. If no
DTCs are i ndi cat ed, r epl ace t he ori gi nal gauge cont rol
modul e (see page 22-351).
NO- Go to st ep 10.
19-102
10. Di sconnect t he brake f l ui d l evel swi t ch 2P connect or
(see st ep 3 on page 19-26), t hen check t he BRAK E
FLUID L EVEL SWITCH in t he VS A DATA L I ST.
Does t he HDS indicat e OFF?
YES - Repl ac e t he brake mast er cyl i nder (the brake
f l ui d l evel swi t ch i s i ncl uded) (see page 19-26).
NO- Go to st ep 11.
11. Di sconnect t he gauge cont rol modul e 32P connect or
(see page 22-347).
12. Chec k for cont i nui t y bet ween brake f l ui d l evel swi t ch
2P c onnec t or t er mi nal No. 2 and body gr ound.
BRAK E FLUID L E VE L SWI TCH 2P CONNECTOR
GRN
ON (II) agai n.
bet ween t he gauge cont rol modul e and t he brake f l ui d
l evel s wi t c h . B
(see page 22-351), t hen go to st ep 1 and r echeck. If no
DTCs are i ndi cat ed, r epl ace t he ori gi nal gauge cont rol
modul e (see page 22-351 ) .
19- 103
DTC 66-11: Pr essur e Sensor (i nsi de of VS A
Modulator-control Uni t) Malfuncti on
DTC -14; Pr essur e Sensor (Insi de of VS A
DTC -1: Pr essur e Sensor (Insi de of VS A '
DTC -17: Pr essur e Sensor (Insi de of VS A
DTC -18: Pr essur e Sensor (Insi de of VS A
DTC 66-19: Pr essur e Sensor (Insi de of VS A
i vi oaui ator-control Uni t) Malfuncti on
1. Tur n t he i gni ti on swi t c h to ON (Ii).
3. Tur n t he i gni t i on swi t c h to L OCK (0), t hen t urn it to
ON (II) agai n.
Is DTC 66-11, 66-14, 66-16, 66-17, 66-18, or 66-19
Indicat ed?
t i me.B
ON (II) agai n.
Is DTC 66-11, 66-14, 66-16, 66-17, 66-18, or 66-19
indicat ed?
NO- l f t he VS A modul at or-cont rol uni t was updat ed,
tr oubl es hooti ng.
19-104
Modulator-control Unit) Malfuncti on
ON (II) agai n.
NO-l nt er mi t t ent f ai l ure, t he syst em i s OK at t hi s
t i me. B
6. Di sconnect t he st eer i ng angl e sensor 5P connect or
(see page 19-132).
7 Di sconnect t he VS A modul at or-cont rol uni t 36P
8. Chec k f or cont i nui t y bet ween st eer i ng angl e sensor
S l EERI NG ANGLE SENSOR 5P CONNECTOR
1 2 3 4 5
SVCC( ORN)
YE S-Repai r a shor t to body gr ound in t he wi r e
NO- Go to st ep 9.
STEERI NG ANG LE SENSOR 5P CONNECTOR
f
1 j 2 3 4 | 5
SVCC (ORN)
Is there 0.1 Vormore?
YE S-Repai r a shor t to power in t he wi r e bet ween t he
uni t .H
(cont' d)
19-105
12. Chec k f or cont i nui t y bet ween VS A modul at or -cont r ol
uni t 36Pc onnec t or t er mi nal No. 9 and st eer i ng angl e
sensor 5P connect or t er mi nal No. 5.
1 2 4 5
S VCC( ORN)
f I 1 1 1 \
I H / | 3 | 4M6H 8| 9 | 1 0 | 1 1 |
12 13
I14H/ 1/ 118H91/ 1211/ 1231/ 1
12 13
|25|26|27L/|yl30lXIXL/|34|
35 36
J
VS A moduIat or-cont roI uni t (see page 19-136), t hen
NO-Repai r an open i n t he wi r e bet ween t he st eer i ng
angl e sensor and t he VS A modul at or -cont r ol uni t . B
ON (II) agai n.
19-106
Modulator-control Unit) Malfuncti on
NOTE: Brake flui d l eaks f r om brake syst em c an c ause
t hi s DTC. Check for brake f l ui d l eaks f i rst .
1 . Test -dr i ve t he vehi c l e.
NOTE: Dri ve the vehi cl e on t he road, not on a lift.
4. Tur n all f our wheel s by hand.
Is t here brake drag?
YES - Repai r t he brake dr ag (see page 19-5).B
NO- Go to st ep 5.
6. Check t he BRAK E PRE S S in t he VS A DATA L IST wi t h
t he HDS whi l e movi ng t he brake pedal .
Does t he indicat ed value change?
t i me. B
NO- Go to st ep 7.
have t he latest sof t war e (see page 19-135). If the uni t
ON (II) agai n.
19-107
DTC 68-21: Brake Pedal Posi ti on Swi t ch St uck
OFF
NOTE: Tr oubl eshoot any f uel and emi ssi ons DTCs f i r st .
2. Chec k t he BRAK E PRE S S in t he VS A DATA L I ST wi t h
t he HDS. Do not pr ess t he brake pedal .
Is there 10 MPa or less?
NO-Chec k f or brake dr ag (see page 19-5) or a
mi sadj ust ed brake pedal posi t i on swi t c h (see page
19-6). If t hey ar e nor mal , go to st ep 25.
3. Chec k t he BRAK E SWITCH in t he VS A DATA L I ST wi t h
Does it Indicate ON when the pedal is pressed, and OFF
when the pedal is released?
Chec k f or l oose t er mi nal s bet ween t he brake pedal
posi t i on swi t c h 4P connect or , ECM/ PCM connect or A
(49P), and t he VS A modul at or -cont r ol uni t 36P
connect or . Ref er to i ntermi ttent f ai l ur es
t r oubl eshoot i ng (see page 19-49)HI
NO- Go to st ep 4.
6. Connec t t he brake pedal posi t i on swi t ch 4P connect or
* BRAKE PEDAL POSITION SWITCH 4P CONNECTOR
JUMPER WIRE
RED
r - i '
1 2
3><
7 Tur n t he i gni t i on swi t ch to ON (II).
8. Chec k t he BRAK E SWITCH in t he VS A DATA L IST wi t h
t he HDS.
Does it indicate ON?
YE S - Ch ec k t he brake pedal posi t i on swi t ch
adj ust ment (see page 19-6). If it i s OK, r epl ace t he
brake pedal posi t i on swi t ch (see page 19-6).B
NO- Go to st ep 9.
9. Di sconnect t he j umper wi r e.
5. Di sc onnec t t he brake pedal posi t i on swi t ch 4P
19-108
11. Chec k t he No. 10 {20 A) f use i n t he under -hood f use/
rel ay box.
Is the fuse blown?
12. Chec k for cont i nui t y bet ween brake pedal posi t i on
swi t ch 4P connect or t er mi nal No. 1 and body gr ound.
BRAKE PEDAL POSITION SWITCH 4P CONNECTOR
RED
1
C
M

3 ^
Y E S - R e p a i r a shor t to body gr ound i n t he wi r e
bet ween t he No. 10 (20 A) f use i n t he under -hood f use/
rel ay box and t he brake pedal posi t i on swi t c h.
13. Shor t t he S CS li ne wi t h t he HDS.
14. Di sconnect ECM/ PCM connect or A (49P) (see page
11-204).
15. Chec k for cont i nui t y bet ween brake pedal posi t i on
BRAKE PEDAL POSITION SWITCH 4P CONNECTOR
LT GRN
1 2
H
I

>
Y E S - R e p a i r a shor t to body gr ound in t he wi r e
bet ween t he brake pedal posi t i on swi t ch and t he
ECM/ PCM H
f use/ rel ay box, t hen go to st ep 16.
(cont ' d)
19-109
r
S A S f st em Component s
YE S - Ch ec k f or l oose t er mi nal s in t he ECM/ PCM
connect or A (49P). If t he ECM/ PCM was updat ed,
t hen ret est . If t he ECM/ PCM was subst i t ut ed, go to
st ep 1.
NO- The t r oubl eshoot i ng i s c o mpl et e. !
21. Measur e t he vol t age bet ween brake pedal posi t i on
BRAK E PEDAL POSITION S WI TCH 4P CONNECTOR
I RED
1 2
3
X
; 4
NO-Repai r an open i n t he wi r e bet ween t he No. 10
(20 A) f use in t he under -hood f use/ r el ay box and t he
brake pedal posi t i on swi t ch
23. Di sc onnec t ECM/ PCM connect or A (49P) (see page
11-204).
24. Check f or cont i nui t y bet ween brake pedal posi t i on
swi t ch 4P connect or t er mi nal No. 2 and ECM/ PCM
connect or A (49P) t er mi nal No. 42.
1 1
LT GRN
1 2
7\ 7T7T
1 l/XLZj
st ep 1 and recheck. If DTCs ar e not i ndi cat ed,
If t he ECM/ PCM was subst i t ut ed, r epl ace t he ori gi nal
ECM/ PCM (see page 11 -204).
NO-Repai r an open in t he wi r e bet ween t he ECM/ PCM
and t he brake pedal posi t i on s w i t c h .
19-110
Is DTC 68-21 Indicat ed?
YES - Ch ec k for l oose t er mi nal s i n t he VS A modul at or-
modul at or-cont rol uni t (see page 19-136). If any other
DTC 68-22: Brake Pedal Posi ti on Swi t ch St uck
ON
1. St ar t the engi ne.
2. Chec k t he BRAK E PRE S S in t he VS A DATA L I ST wi t h
t he HDS. Do not pr ess t he brake pedal .
Is t here 10 MPa or more?
YES - Ch ec k t he brake pedal hei ght (see page 19-6). If
t he brake pedal hei ght i s OK, go to st ep 10.
NO- Go to st ep 3.
3. Chec k t he BRAK E SWITCH in t he VS A DATA L I ST wi t h
Does it indicat e ON when t he pedal is pressed, and OFF
when t he pedal is released?
YES-l nt er mi t t ent f ai l ur e, t he syst em is OK at t hi s
t i me. B
NO- Go to st ep 4.
4. Chec k t he BRAK E SWITCH i n t he VS A DATA L IST wi t h
t he HDS, and di sc onnec t t he brake pedal posi t i on
swi t ch 4P connect or (see page 19-6).
Does t he indicat or change from ON t o OFF?
YES - Repl ac e t he brake pedal posi t i on swi t ch (see
page 19-6).B
NO- Go to st ep 5.
(cont' d)
19-111
7. Di sconnect ECM/ PCM connect or A (49P) (see page
11-204).
9. Measur e t he vol t age bet ween brake pedal posi t i on
swi t c h 4P c onnec t or t er mi nal No. 2 and body gr ound.
L T GRN
h f v u i
I
Is t here 0.1 Vormore?
ECM/ PCM and t he br ake pedal posi t i on s w i t c h .
sof t war e (see page 11-203), or subst i t ut e a known-
good ECM/ PCM (see page 11-7), t hen go t o st ep 1 and
r echeck. If DTCs ar e not i ndi cat ed, ECM/ PCM was
updat ed, t r oubl eshoot i ng i s compl et e. If t he
ECM/ PCM (see page 11-204).
11. Tur n t he i gni t i on swi t c h to L OCK (0), t hen t urn it t o
ON (II) agai n.
t r oubl eshoot i ng H
19-112
DTC 71-21: Right-front or Left-rear Different
Di ameter Ti re Malfuncti on
DTC 71-22: Left-front or Ri ght-rear Different
DTC 71-23: Right-front and Ri ght-rear
Different Di ameter Ti re Malfuncti on
DTC 71-24: Left-front and Left-rear Different
DTC 71-25: Ri ght-front and Left-front Different
DTC 71-26: Ri ght-rear and Left-rear Different
DTC 71-27: Ri ght-front or Left-rear Different
DTC 71-28: Left-front or Ri ght-rear Different
Di amet er Ti re Malfuncti on
DTC 71-29: Ri ght-front and Ri ght-rear
Different Di amet er Ti re Malfuncti on
DTC 71-2A: Left-front and Left-rear Different
DTC 71-2B: Ri ght-front and Left-front Different
DTC 71-2C: Ri ght-rear and Left-rear Different
Di amet er Ti re Malfuncti on
NOTE: The DTC wi l l be i ndi cat ed when t he vehi c l e has a
di fferent di amet er t i re(s) c ompar ed to t he ot her t i r es.
1. Chec k t he t i r es for pr oper i nflati on and t he cor r ect si ze
(see page 18-5).
Is DTC 71-21, 71-22, 71-23, 71-24, 71-25, 71-26, 71-27,
71-28, 71-29, 71-2A, 71-2B, or 71-2C indicated?
YES - Repl ac e t i r es as needed unti l all t hei r di amet er s
mat ch (see page 18-5).H
t i me. H
19-113
DTC 81-xx*: Cent ral Pr ocessi ng Uni t (CPU)
*: Any t wo-char act er subc ode (Except t hese
combi nat i ons: DTC 81-07, 81-11, 81-3D, 81-3E,
81-51,81-52, 81-53, 81-54, 81-55, 81-56, 81-57,
81-58, and 81-59)
ON (II) agai n.
4. Chec k f or DTCs wi th t he HDS.
Is DTC 81-xx indicated?
YE S - l f DTC 81-07, 81-11, 81-3D, 81-3E, 81-51, 81-52,
81-53, 81-54, 81-55, 8
1
~56, A 57, 2". -53, or 81-58 i s
i ndi cat ed at t he s ame t i me, do t he appr opr i at e
t r oubl eshoot i ng f i rst . If DTC 81-07, 81-11,81-3D,
81-3E, 81-51,81-52, 81-53, 81-54, 81-55, 81-56, 81-57,
81-58, or 81-59 i s not i ndi cat ed, go to st ep 5.
time.11
ON (II) agai n.
Is DTC 81~xx indicated?
t r oubl eshoot i ng.IB
DTC 81-07: Cent ral Pr ocessi ng Uni t (CPU)
ON (II) agai n.
t i me. H
5. Tur n t he i gni ti on swi t ch to LOCK (0)..
(see page 19-132).
8. t ur n t he i gni ti on swi t c h to ON (II).
4 5
S VCC( ORN)
YES - Repai r a shor t to power in the wi r e bet ween t he
uni t .H
NO- Go to st ep 10.
19-114
have t he l at est sof t war e (see page 19-135). If the uni t
al r eady has t he l at est sof t ware, subst i t ut e a known-
13. Tur n t he i gni t i on swi t ch to LOCK (0), t hen t urn it to
ON (II) agai n.
YES - Ch ec k f or l oose t er mi nal s i n t he VS A modul at or-
cont rol uni t 36P connect or . If the VS A modul at or-
DTC 81-11: Central Processi ng Unit (CPU)
DTC 81-52: Cent ral Processing Uni t (CPU)
DTC 81-54: Cent ral Processi ng Uni t (CPU)
DTC 81-56: Cent ral Processi ng Uni t (CPU)
DTC 81-58: Cent ral Processing Uni t (CPU)
1. Turn t he i gni t i on swi t ch to ON (II).
NOTE: Dr i ve t he vehi cl e on the r oad, not on a lift.
NO-l nt er mi t t ent f ai l ure, the syst em i s OK at t hi s
t i me. B
have t he l at est sof t ware (see page 19-135). If t he uni t
al r eady has t he l at est sof t ware, subst i t ut e a known-
good VS A modul at or-cont rol unit (see page 19-136).
6. Test -dr i ve t he vehi cl e.
NOTE: Dri ve t he vehi cl e on the r oad, not on a lift.
cont rol uni t was subst i t ut ed, repl ace t he ori gi nal VS A
modul at or-cont rol unit (see page 19-136). If any ot her
19-115
DTC 81-3D: Central Processing Unit (CPU)
Internal Circuit Malfunction
DTC 81-3E: Central Processing Unit (CPU)
DTC 81-59: Cent r al Processing Unit (CPU)
t i mes.
Is DTC 81-3D, 81-3E, or 81-59 indicat ed?
t i me. B
t i mes.
Is DTC 81-3D, 81-3E, or 81-59 indicat ed?
t r oubl eshoot i ng.B
DTC 81-51: Central Processing Unit (CPU)
3. Test -dr i ve the vehi c l e.
Is DTC 81-51, 81-53, 81-55, or 81-57 indicat ed?
t i me. B
19-116
VS A
appropri at e VS A modul at or-cont rol uni t 36P
connect or t er mi nal s (see t abl e).
DTC VS A Modul at or -cont r ol Uni t
36P Connec t or Ter mi nal
81-51 No. 23
81-53 No. 19
81-55 No. 18
81-57 No. 21
l | yi 3| 4| / l 6L / | 8| 9| l Qh l i
Is there 0.1 V or more?
NO- Go t o st ep 9.
10. Reconnect the VS A modul at or -cont r ol uni t 36P
connect or .
Is DTC 81-51, 81-53, 81-55, or 81-57 Indicated?
19-117
VS A Sys t em Co mpo nent s
DTC 83-13: ECM/PCM Communi cat i on Error
(Engi ne Malfuncti on)
DTC 83-14: PCM Communi cat i on Error (A/T
Malfuncti on)
Is DTC 83-13 or 83-14 Indicat ed?
NO~Snt errni t t ent f ai l ur e, t he syst em i s O K at t hi s t i me.
Chec k for l oose t er mi nal s bet ween ECM/ PCM
connect or A (49P) and t he VS A modul at or -cont r ol uni t
36P connect or . Ref er to i ntermi ttent f ai l ur es
t r oubl eshoot i ng (see page 19- 49) . l
t he ori gi nal ECM/ PCM (see page 11-204).H
cont r ol uni t 36P connect or . If t he VS A modul at or-
cont r ol uni t was updat ed, subst i t ut e a known-good
19-118
DTC 84-21;VS A Sensor Neutral Posi t i on not
Wri ti ng
3. Do t he VS A sensor neut ral posi t i on memor i zat i on
(see page 19-133).
ON (II) agai n.
NO-The syst em i s OK at t hi s t i me H
(see page 19-133).
ON (II) agai n.
YES - Ch ec k for l oose t er mi nal s i n t he VS A modul at or-
DTC 86-01: F-CAN Bus-of f Malfuncti on
NOTE: Tr oubl eshoot t he f uel and emi ssi ons DTCs f i rst .
ON (II) agai n.
Chec k f or l oose t er mi nal s bet ween ECM/ PCM
connect or A (49P) and t he VS A modul at or-cont rol uni t
11-204).
(cont' d)
19-119
uni t 36P connect or t er mi nal and ECM/ PCM c onnec t or
A (49P) t er mi nal (see t abl e).
Si gn VSA Modulator-
control Unit 36P
Connector
Terminal
ECM/ PCM
Connec t or A
(49P) Ter mi nal
CAN-L No. 1 No. 4
CAN-H No. 14 No. 3
CAN-H
(WHT)
CAN-L (RED)
HI / | 3 | 4 | / | 6 | / | 8| 9 | 1 0 | 1 1 |
12 13
H1 4 | / | / | / | 1 8| 1 9 | / | 2 1 | / | 2 3 |/1
12 13
l 2 5 | 2 6 | 2 7 | / | / | 3 0 | / | / | / | 3 4 |
35 36
CAN-H (WHT)
222324
2930,
J 2 H
CAN-L (RED)
3 | 4 | 5 I 6 I 7 1/1 9 [lOi
[Idl6|l7|l8|19|20j 21
34|35|36
42l43|44|/l46
ON (II) agai n.
t ed, go to st ep 1.
NO-Repai r an open in t he wi r e bet ween t he ECM/ PCM
and t he VS A modul at or -cont r ol uni t . B
19-120
DTC 86-11: F-CAN Communi cat i on Wi th
ECM/PCM Malfuncti on
Engi ne Malfuncti on
DTC 86-24; F-CAN Communi cat i on Wi th
DTC 86-41: F-CAN Communi cat i on Wi t h
EAT Malfuncti on
NOTE: Tr oubl eshoot t he f uel and emi ssi ons DTCs f i rst .
is DTC 86-11, 86-21, 86-22, 86-23, 86-24, 86-25, and/or
86-41 indicat ed?
YE S - l f DTC 86-01 i s i ndi cat ed at t he s ame t i me, do t he
DTC 86-01 t r oubl eshoot i ng f i rst (see page 19-119). if
DTC 86-01 i s not i ndi cat ed, go to st ep 5.
t i me. Check f or l oose t er mi nal s bet ween ECM/ PCM
connect or A (49P) and t he VS A modul at or-cont rol uni t
11-204).
9. Chec k f or cont i nui t y bet ween t he VS A modul at or-
cont rol uni t 36P connect or t er mi nal and ECM/ PCM
connect or A (49P) t er mi nal (see t abl e).
control Unit 36P
Connector
Terminal
ECM/ PCM
Connec t or A
(49P) Ter mi nal
CAN-L No. 1 No. 4
CAN-H No. 14 No. 3
CAN-H
(WHT)
CAN-L (RED)
|"l | / l 3 i 4 | / i e | / l 8 | 9 | l 0| 1 1 |
J -i/il A A / l i f t h o l Ao-\\ A o o S A
12
"<
13
\ 1 4 | / \ / \ / 1 1 8 | 19 | / 1 2 1 1 / \Z6\/1
| 2 5 | 2 6 | 2 7 | / | / | 3 0 | / | / | / | 3 4 |
y
1
' -
1
3 5 36
CAN-H (WHT)
11 /
222324
2930
CAN-L (RED)
3 4 5 /TiTiol
5]16[1711819J 2Q|21
25 > < 26 27 28
^5J 3677vJ '
41 \42\4Z\AA\/\m\A/\/\
NO-Repai r an open in t he wi r e bet ween the ECM/ PCM
and t he VS A modul at or-cont rol uni t .H
(cont' d)
19-121
10. Rec onnec t all connect ors..'
known-good ECM/ PCM (see page 11 -7),
.. Is D T C 86~1t , 86-21 86-22,.86-23, 86-24, 86-25, and/or
86-41 Indicated? -
compl et e. If t he ECkVTCSVi o u u s i i u u e d , r epl ace
t he or i gi nal ECM/PCM' (see page 11- 204) . l
have t he l at est sof t war e (see page 19-135). If t he
NOTE: Dr i ve t he vehi cl e on t he r oad, not on a lift.
Is DTC 86-11, 86-21, 86-22, 86-23, 86-24, 86-25, and/or
86-41 indicated?
Gauge Cont rol Modul e Malfuncti on
NOTE: Tr oubl eshoot t he f uel and emi ssi ons DTCs f i rst ...
ON (II) agai n.
YE S - l f DTC 86-01 i s i ndi cat ed at t he s ame t i me, do t he
DTC 86-01 t r oubl eshoot i ng f i rst (see page 19-119). If
DTC 86-01 i s not i ndi cat ed, go to st ep 5,
NO-l f any ot her DTCs ar e i ndi cat ed, go t o t he
i ndi cat ed, i nt ermi t t ent f ai l ur e, t he syst em i s OK at t hi s
t i me. Chec k f or l oose t er mi nal s bet ween t he gauge
cont rol modul e 32P connect or and t he VS A
modul at or -cont r ol uni t 36P connect or . Ref er to
i nt ermi t t ent f ai l ur es t r oubl eshoot i ng (see page
19-49J.B
5. Tur n t he i gni t i on swi t ch to L OCK (0), t hen t ur n it t o
ON (II) agai n.
Does t he gauge indicat ors come on?
r
NO-Do t he gauge cont rol modul e t r oubl eshoot i ng
(see page 22-332).H
6. Tur n t he i gni t i on swi t c h t o' L OCK (0).
7. Di sconnect t he gauge cont rol modul e 32Pc onnec t or
(see page 22-351 i.
connect or (see st ep 3 on page 19-137)..
19-122
9. Check f or c o n t i n u i t y bet ween t he VS A mo d u l a t o r -
cont rol uni t 36P c o n n e c t o r t e r mi n a l and gauge c o n t r o l
modul e 32P c o n n e c t o r t e r mi n a l (see t abl e).
control Unit 3SP
Connector
Terminal
Gauge Cont r ol
Modul e 32P
Connec t or
Ter mi nal
CAN-L No. 1 No. 29
CAN-H No. 14 No. 30
CAN-L (RED)
H I / l 3 |4M6| / | 8 |9lionTll
12
*\
13
- | 1 4 [ / | / | / | 1 8 | 1 9 | / | 2 1 | / | 2 3 | / |
12
*\
13
| 2 5 | 2 6 | 2 7 | / | / | 3 0 | / | / | / | 3 4 |
35 36
j
CAN-H (WHT)
/ 18| 9 | 1 0
117| 18| 19| / j / | 22| 23| 24| 25| 26| 27| 28| 29| 30| / | 32
CAN-L (RED) CAN-H (WHT)
12. Tur n t he i gni ti on swi t c h to L OCK (0), t hen turn it to
ON (II) agai n.
YE S - Ch ec k f or l oose t er mi nal s i n t he VS A modul at or-
YES - Ch ec k f or l oose t er mi nal s in t he gauge cont rol
modul e 32P connect or . If nec essar y, subst i t ut e a
t hen go to st ep 1 and r echeck. If no DTCs ar e
i ndi cat ed, r epl ace t he ori gi nal gauge cont rol modul e
(see page 22-351). If DTC 86-31 r eset s, go to st ep 10.
NO-Repai r an open i n the wi r e bet ween t he gauge
cont rol modul e and t he VS A modul at or-cont rol
uni t .H
19-123
DTC 86-71: F-CAN Communi cat i on Wi th Yaw
Rat e-Lat eral Accel er at i on Sensor Malfuncti on
NOTE: Tr oubl eshoot t he f uel and emi ssi ons DTCs f i r st
ON (I!) agai n.
Is DTC 86-71 Indicated?
YE S - l f DTC 86-01 i s i ndi cat ed at t he same t i me, do t he
DTC 86-01 t r oubl eshoot i ng f i rst (see page 19-119). If
DTC 86-01 i s not i ndi cat ed, go to st ep 5.
NO- l f any other DTCs ar e i ndi cat ed, go to t he
t i me. Check for l oose t er mi nal s at t he y aw rat e-l at eral
accel er at i on sensor 5P c onnec t or and t he VS A
modul at or-cont rol uni t 36P connect or . Ref er to
i ntermi ttent f ai l ur es t r oubl eshoot i ng (see page
19-49).B
6. Di sconnect t he yaw rat e-l at eral accel er at i on sensor 5P
8. Chec k f or cont i nui t y bet ween t he VS A modul at or-
cont rol uni t 36P connect or t er mi nal and t he yaw
rat e-l at eral accel er at i on sensor 5P connect or t er mi nal
(see t abl e).
control Unit 36P
Connector
Terminal
Yaw Rat e-l at er al
Accel er at i on
S ens o r 5P
Connec t or
Ter mi nal
CAN-L No. 1 No. 4
CAN-H No. 14 No. 3
CAN L (RED)
f f 1 1 I
J 1 1 / |3|4|/ |6|/ |8|9|10|11|
-UA\ A \ A\VIIRha / l ooA
12 13
1 7 K V. K "J A \ 7K> * K ^n K *
|25|26|27|/ |/ l 30|/ |/ l / |34|
35 36
I c
T
CAN H (WHT)
CAN H (WHT)
i n
I CAN L (RED)
Y AW RATE-LATERAL ACCELERATION
SENSOR 5P CONNECTOR
NO-Repai r an open i n t he wi r e bet ween t he y aw
rat e-l at eral accel er at i on sensor and t he VS A
modul at or -cont r ol uni t .H
19-124
10. Measur e the vol t age bet ween ya wrat e-l at eral
accel er at i on sensor 5P c onnec t or t er mi nal No. 1 and
body gr ound.
YAW RATE-LATERAL ACCELERATION
SENSOR 5P CONNECTOR
YE S - Go t o s t ep 11.
(7.5 A) f use i n t he dr i ver ' s under -dash f use/r el ay box
and t he y aw rate-lateral accel er at i on s ens o r . H
12. Rec onnec t t he y aw rat e-l at eral accel er at i on s ens or 5P
connect or .
14. Measur e t he vol t age bet ween y aw rat e-l at eral
accel er at i on sensor 5P connect or t er mi nal No. 5 and
body gr ound.
YAW RATE-LATERAL ACCELERATION
SENSOR 5P CONNECTOR
Is t here 0.1 Vor less?
(see page 19- 133) . !
NO-Repai r an open in t he wi r e bet ween t he y aw rat e-
l at eral accel er at i on sensor and body gr ound (G503). B
19-125
DTC 107-22: Cent ral Pr ocessi ng Uni t (CPU)
1. Tur n t he i gni ti on swi t ch to L OCK (0) to cool t he VS A
modul at or -cont r ol uni t and wai t 1 hour or mor e.
ON (II) agai n.
NO- The syst em i s OK at t hi s t i me. H
ON (II) agai n.
DTC 108-21: St eer i ng Angl e Sensor
Malfuncti on
' NOTE: Dri ve t he vehi c l e on t he r oad, not on a lift.
t i me. H
6. Subst i t ut e a known-good st eer i ng angl e sensor (see
page 19-132).
NO-Repl ac e t he ori gi nal st eer i ng angl e sensor (see
page 19~132).H
19-126
have t he l at est sof t ware (see page 19-135). If t he unit
12. Test -dr i ve t he vehi cl e.
YE S - Ch ec k f or l oose t er mi nal s i n t he VS A modul at or-
modul at or-cont rol uni t (see page 19-136). If any other
DTC 121-xx*: VSA Sol enoi d Val ve Malfuncti on
DTC 122-xx*: VS A Sol enoi d Val ve Malfuncti on
DTC 123-xx*: VSA Sol enoi d Val ve Malfuncti on
DTC 124-xx*: VS A Sol enoi d Val ve Malfuncti on
Any t wo-char act er subc ode (see t abl e)
D T C Sec t i onal . Val ve
121 -01 Ri ght-front Regul at or
-02 and
-11
left-rear
-21
-24
122 -01 Suct i on
-21
-22
-23
123 -01 Left-front Regul at or
-02
and
-11
ri ght -rear
-21
-24
124 -01 Suct i on
-21
-22
-23
ON (II) agai n.
is DTC 121-xx, 122-xx, 123-xx, or 124-xx indicated?
t i me.Il
(cont' d)
19-127
6. Tur n t he i gni ti on swi t ch to L OCK (0), t hen t urn it t o
ON (II) agai n.
Is DTC 121-xx, 122-xx, 123-xx, or 124-xx indicat ed?
NO-l f t he VS A modui at or-cont rol uni t was updat ed,
DTCs ar e i ndi cat ed, go to the i ndi cat ed DTCs
VS A act i vat i on i ndi cat or does not go off, and
no DTCs ar e st or ed
NOTE: If t he VS A modul at or was r epl aced pri or to t he
act i vat i on i ndi cat or t urni ng on, do t he VS A sensor
neut ral posi t i on memor i zat i on (see page 19-133).
2. Chec k t he VS A act i vat i on i ndi cat or f or sever al
sec onds when t he i gni ti on swi t ch i s t ur ned to ON (II).
Does t he indicat or come on t hen go off?
YE S - Th e syst em i s OK at t hi s t i me. B
NO- Go to st ep 3.
4. Di sc onnec t t he VS A OFF swi t c h 5P connect or (see
page 19-134).
5. Chec k t he VS A OFF swi t c h (see page 19-134).
Is t he VSA OFF swit ch OK?
NO-Repl ac e t he VS A OFF swi t ch (see page 19-134).B
6. Di sc onnec t t he gauge cont rol modul e 32P connect or
(see page 22-351).
7. Chec k f or cont i nui t y bet ween VS A OFF swi t ch 5P
VS A OFF SWI TCH 5P CONNECTOR
bet ween t he gauge cont rol modul e and t he VS A OFF
swi t c h.B
(see page 22-351), t hen go to st ep 1 and r echeck. If it
i s OK , r epl ace t he ori gi nal gauge cont rol modul e (see
page 22-351 ).B
19-128
ABS i ndi cat or, brake syst em i ndi cat or, and
VS A i ndi cat or do not go off
2. Chec k t he No. 6 (7.5 A) f use i n t he dr i ver ' s under -dash
f use/r el ay box.
Is the fuse blown?
NO-Rei nst al l t he checked f use, t hen go to st ep 9.
4. Di sconnect t he yaw rate-lateral accel er at i on sensor 5P
5. Chec k for cont i nui t y bet ween VS A modul at or-cont rol
uni t 36P connect or t ermi nal No. 30 and body gr ound.
I H / 13| 4 |/ |6|/ |8|9|10|11|
12 13 12 13
|25|26|27|X1/130MX1/|34|
35 36
(GRY )
8. Chec k t he ABS i ndi cat or, t he brake syst em i ndi cat or
and t he VS A i ndi cat or f or sever al sec onds when t he
i gni t i on swi t ch i s t ur ned to ON (II).
Do the indicators come on then go off?
YE S - Th e t r oubl eshoot i ng i s c o mpl et e. i
NO-Repl ac e t he VS A modul at or-cont rol uni t (see
page 19-136).B
9. Do t he gauge cont rol modul e t r oubl eshoot i ng (see
page 22-332).
Is the gauge control module OK ?
NO-Subst i t ut e a known good gauge cont rol modul e
(see page 22-351). If it i s OK, r epl ace t he ori gi nal
gauge cont rol modul e (see page 22-351).
10. Di sconnect the VS A modul at or-cont rol uni t 36P
bet ween t he No. 6 (7.5 A) f use i n t he dr i ver ' s
under -dash f use/r el ay box and t he VS A modul at or -
cont rol uni t or t he y aw rat e-l at eral accel er at i on
s ens o r . H
NO-l nst al l a new No. 6 (7.5 A) f use i n t he dr i ver ' s
(cont ' d)
19-129
Sympt om Troubleshooting (cont'd)
12. Measur e t he vol t age bet ween VS A modul at or -cont r ol
J 1 1 1
h M 3 | 4 | / | 6 | / | 8 | 9 | l O | l l |
12 13
| 14| / M/ | 18! 19M21|/ |23M
12 13
| 25| 26| 27| / | / | 3 0 | / | / I / | 3 4 |
35 36
1G1 (GRY )
and t he VS A modul at or-cont rol uni t .H
15. Measur e t he vol t age bet ween VS A modul at or-cont rol
FS R +B (WHT)
| 1| / | 3| 4| / 16| / 18| 9| 10| 11|
12 13
|14|/1/L/ |18|19|/ |21|/|23M
12 13
35 36
J
(40 A) f use i n t he under -hood f use/r el ay box and t he
VS A modul at or -cont r ol uni t .H
f | i | / | 3i 4| / i e| / | e| 9| i o | i i |
12 13
|14|/L/1/|18|19|/121|/|23| / 1
12 13
|25|26|27|/|/l30|/l/|/|34|
35 36
GND (BLK)
NO-Repai r an open i n t he wi r e bet ween t he VS A
modul at or -cont r ol uni t and body gr ound (G202).I
19-130
16, Di sc onnec t t he gauge cont rol modul e 32P connect or
(see page 22-351).
17. Chec k f or cont i nui t y bet ween t he VS A modul at or -
cont r ol uni t 36P connect or t er mi nal and gauge cont rol
modul e 32P connect or t er mi nal (see t abl e).
control Unit 36P
Connector
Terminal
Gauge Cont r ol
Modul e 32P
Connec t or
Ter mi nal
CAN-L No. 1 No. 29
CAN-H No. 14 No. 30
CAN-L (RED)
Tt|/|3i4|/i6|/l8|9|l0|l l |
. I I A I /\ y\ / I i f i l i a l / I 01I / I O J I / \
12
" ' ' *
13
35 36
CAN-H (WHT)
fi T2\ A A A 6/ 1819 ho A A K \ A A \ $ \ \
I CEEE^ II5l ESSSS3535D5! ] S] l 5l S
J L
CAN-L (RED) CAN-H (WHT)
ON (II) agai n.
21. Chec k t he ABS i ndi cat or, t he brake syst em i ndi cat or
and t he VS A i ndi cat or f or sever al sec onds when t he
i gni t i on swi t c h i s t ur ned to ON (II).
Does t he indicat ors come on t hen go off?
YE S - l f t he VS A modul at or-cont rol uni t was updat ed,
modul at or -cont r ol uni t (see page 19-136).H
NO-Chec k f or l oose t er mi nal s in t he VS A modul at or -
I s t here cont inuit y?
NO-Repai r an open i n t he wi r e bet ween t he gauge
cont rol modul e and t he VS A modul at or-cont rol
unit._...
19-131
Steering Angle Sensor Replacement
S RS c omponent s ar e l ocat ed In t hi s ar ea. Revi ew t he S RS c omponent l ocat i ons: 4-door (see page 24-21), 2-door (see
page 24-23) and t he pr ecaut i ons and pr ocedur es (see page 24-25).
NOTE: Do not damage or dr op t he combi nat i on swi t c h as t he st eer i ng angl e sensor i s sensi t i ve to shoc k and vi br at i on.
1. Wi t h t he wheel s i n t he st r ai ght ahead posi t i on and t he st eer i ng wheel c ent er ed, r emove t he st eer i ng wheel (see page
17-6).
2. Remove t he st eer i ng c ol umn c over s (see page 20-181) and t he cabl e reel (see page 24-225).
3. Remove t he combi nat i on swi t c h assembl y (see st ep 7 on page 17-11).
4. Remove t he combi nat i on li ght swi t ch (A) and t he wi per /washer swi t ch (B) f r om t he combi nat i on swi t ch body
assembl y (C).
A
5. Inst al l t he combi nat i on swi t c h body assembl y i n t he r ever se or der of r emoval .
NOTE:
Do not r emove t he st eer i ng angl e sensor f r om t he combi nat i on swi t ch body.
When i nst al l i ng t he cabl e r eel , set t he t urn si gnal c anc el i ng sl eeve posi t i on so that t he ar r ow poi nt s st rai ght up (see
page 24-226).
Note that t he t i ght eni ng or der i s speci f i ed f or t he combi nat i on swi t ch mount i ng sc r ews (see page 17-12).
19-132
Yaw Rate-Lateral Acceleration
Sensor Replacement
NOTE:
Do not damage or drop t he sensor as It Is sensi t i ve.
Do not use power t ool s when r epl aci ng t he sensor .
3. Di sconnect t he y aw rat e-l at eral accel er at i on sensor
5P connect or (A), t hen r emove t he y aw rat e-l at eral
accel er at i on sensor (B).
6 x 1.0 mm
9.8 N-m
(1.0 k g f m,
7.2 Ibf f t )
8x 1 25 mm
22 N m
(2.2 kgf -m,
~~ Ibf f t )
4. Chec k f or def ormat i on i n t he bracket (C). If nec essar y
r epl ace it.
5. Install t he y aw rat e-lat eral accel er at i on s ens or i n t he
(see page 19-133).
WSA Sensor Neutral Position
Memorization
NOTE: Do not pr ess t he brake pedal duri ng t hi s
pr ocedur e.
1. Park t he vehi c l e on a flat and l evel sur f ac e, wi t h t he
st eer i ng wheel i n t he st rai ght ahead posi t i on.
2. Wi t h t he i gni t i on swi t ch i n L OCK (0), c onnec t t he HDS
t o t he dat a link connect or (DLC) (A) under t he dr i ver ' s
and t he VS A modul at or-cont rol uni t. If it doesn' t ,
5. Sel ec t VS A ADJ US TMENT wi t h t he HDS, and f ol l ow
t he sc r een pr ompt s.
i nst r uct i ons.
19-133
VS A Off Swi t c h Test
2. Remove t he dr i ver ' s dashboar d l ower c over { see page
20-166).
3. Push out t he VS A OFF swi t ch (A) f r om t he dr i ver ' s
dashboar d l ower cover .
4. Chec k for cont i nui t y bet ween t he VS A OFF swi t c h 5P
cont i nui t y when t he button i s pr essed, and no
cont i nui t y when t he button i s r el eased.
VSA OF F SWITCH 5P CONNECTOR
5. Chec k for cont i nui t y bet ween VS A OFF swi t ch 5P
cont i nui t y at all t i mes.
VSA OF F SWITCH 5P CONNECTOR
TT2| / | 4T 5
6. Install t he VS A OFF swi t ch i n t he r ever se or der of
r emoval .
i r 11
1
u
2 \ / \ A 5
u
19-134
VSA Modulator-Control Uni t Updat e
Honda di agnost i c syst em (HDS) tablet t est er
Honda i nt erf ace modul e (HIM) and an i N workst at i on
wi th the l at est HDS sof t ware ver si on
HDS pocket t est er
GNA-600 and an IN workst at i on wi th t he latest HDS
sof t ware ver si on
Any one of t he above updati ng t ools can be used.
NOTE:
Use t hi s pr ocedur e when you need to updat e t he
VS A modul at or-cont rol unit at anyt i me.
Make sur e t he HDS/i N workst at i on has t he l at est HDS
sof t ware ver si on.
Bef ore you updat e t he VS A modul at or-cont rol uni t ,
make sur e t he battery in the vehi cl e i s f ul l y c har ged,
and connect a j umper battery (not a battery char ger ) to
mai nt ai n syst em vol t age.
Never t urn t he i gni ti on swi t ch to LOCK (0) or ACC (I)
duri ng t he updat e. If t here i s a probl em wi t h t he
updat e, l eave t he i gni ti on swi t ch ON (II).
To prevent VS A modul at or-cont rol uni t damage, do
not operat e anyt hi ng el ect ri cal (headl i ght s, audi o
syst em, br akes, A/ C, power wi ndows, door l ocks, etc.)
duri ng t he updat e.
To ensur e t he latest program i s i nst al l ed, do a VS A
modul at or-cont rol uni t update whenever t he VS A
modul at or-cont rol uni t i s subst i t ut ed or r epl aced.
You cannot updat e a VS A modul at or-cont rol uni t wi t h
a pr ogr am it al r eady has. It wi l l onl y accept a new
pr ogr am.
Hi gh t emper at ur e i n t he engi ne compar t ment mi ght
c ause t he VS A modul at or-cont rol uni t to bec ome t oo
hot to run t he updat e. If t he engi ne has been r unni ng
bef ore t hi s pr ocedur e, open t he hood and cool t he
engi ne compar t ment .
If you need to di agnose t he Honda i nt erf ace modul e
(HIM) bec ause t he HIM' s red (#3) light c ame on or was
f l ashi ng dur i ng t he updat e, l eave t he i gni ti on swi t c h
ON (II) when you di sconnect the HIM f r om t he dat a link
connect or (DLC). Thi s wi l l prevent VS A modul at or-
cont rol uni t damage.
DTCs st or ed in memor y are cl ear ed when t he VS A
modul at or-cont rol uni t i s updat ed.
1. Tur n t he i gni t i on swi t ch to ON (II), but do not st art t he
engi ne.
and t he VS A modul at or-cont rol uni t. If it doesn' t ,
t r oubl eshoot i ng t he DL C ci rcui t (see page 11-181).
4. Sel ec t t he updat e mode, and f ol l ow t he sc r een
pr ompt s t o updat e t he VS A modul at or-cont rol uni t.
5. If t he sof t war e in t he VS A modul at or-cont rol uni t i s
t he l at est , di sc onnec t t he HDS/HIM/GNA600 f r om t he
DL C. If t he sof t war e in t he VS A modul at or-cont rol uni t
i s not t he l at est , f ol l ow t he i nst r uct i ons on t he sc r een.
19-135
WSA S f stem Components
WSA Modulator-Control Unit Rennowal and Installation
N O T E :
t he pai nt . If brake f l ui d get s on t he pai nt , was h it off
i mmedi at el y wi t h wat er .
Be car ef ul not to damage or def or m t he brake l i nes
dur i ng r emoval and i nst al l at i on.
Af t er r emoval , pl ug t he ends of t he hoses and j oi nt s t o
pr event spi l l i ng brake f l ui d.
Removal
2. Remove t he suct i on li ne mount i ng bolt (A) f r om t he
bracket .
9,8 N-m
(1.0 kgf m,
7.2 lbfft)
19-136
3. Di sconnect t he VS A modul at or-cont rol uni t 36P connect or (A) by pushi ng t he lock (B) and pul l i ng down t he l ever (C);
t he connect or di sc onnec t s i tself.
G
4. Di sconnect t he si x brake l i nes f r om t he VS A modul at or-cont rol uni t.
NOTE: Brake l i nes ar e connect ed to t he mast er cyl i nder (D) and to t he left-rear (E), t he ri ght-front (F), t he left-front (G),
and t he ri ght -rear (H) brake s y s t ems .
5. Remove t he 6 x 1 2 mm f l ange bol t s (I) and 6 x 1 6 mm f l ange bolt (J ), t hen r emove t he VS A modul at or-cont rol uni t (K)
wi t h t he bracket (L) f r om t he body.
6. Remove t he A/ C r ecei ver li ne (M) f r om t he bracket , t hen r emove t he cl i ps (N).
7. Remove t he VS A modul at or-cont rol uni t f r om t he bracket .
(cont' d)
19-137
VSA Modulator-Control Uni t Removal and Installation (cont'd)
Inst al l at i on
1. i nst al l t he VS A modul at or -cont r ol uni t ont o t he br ac ket
2. Install t he cl i ps to t he bracket , t hen i nst al l t he r ecei ver l i ne.
3. Inst al l t he bracket wi t h t he VS A modul at or -cont r ol uni t t o t he body.
4. Rec onnec t t he si x brake l i nes, t hen t i ght en t he f l are nut s to t he speci f i ed torque.
5. Al i gn t he connect i ng sur f ac e of t he VS A modul at or -cont r ol uni t 36P connect or to t he VS A modul at or-cont rol uni t
6. Pull up t he l ever of t he VS A modul at or -cont r ol uni t 36P connect or , t hen conf i r m t he connect or i s f ul l y seat ed.
7. Install t he suct i on l i ne mount bolt to t he br ac ket
8. Bl eed t he br ake s y s t em (see page 19-9).
9. Do t he VS A modul at or -cont r ol uni t updat e (see page 19-135).
10. Do t he VS A s ens or neut ral posi t i on memor i zat i on pr ocedur e (see page 19-133).
11. St art t he engi ne, and make sur e t he A B S and t he VS A i ndi cat or s go off.
12. Test -dr i ve t he vehi c l e, and make sur e t he A B S and t he VS A Indi cat ors do not c ome on.
NOTE: If t he brake pedal Is spongy, t her e may be ai r t r apped i n t he modul at or whi c h c oul d t hen be i nduced Into t he
nor mal brake syst em dur i ng modul at i on. Bl eed t he brake syst em agai n ( s eepage 19-9).
19-138
Wheel Speed Sensor Replacement
Front
2. Rel ease t he c l amp (A), t hen di sconnect t he wheel speed sensor connect or (B).
6 x 1.0 mm
9.8 N-m
(1.0 k g f m, 7.2 Ibf-ft)
1.0 m m
9.8 N-m
(1.0 kgf -m, 7.2 Ibf-ft)
3. Remove t he bolts and t he wheel speed s ens or (C).
4. Install t he wheel speed sensor i n t he r ever se order of r emoval , and note t hese i t ems:
Do not t wi st t he sensor wi r es.
If t he wheel speed sensor c omes i n cont act wi t h t he wheel bear i ng, it i s f aul t y,
Make sur e t her e i s no debr i s i n t he sensor mount i ng hol e.
5. St art t he engi ne, and make sur e t he A B S and t he VS A i ndi cat or s go off.
6. Test -dr i ve t he vehi c l e, and make sur e t he A B S and t he VS A i ndi cat ors do not c ome on.
(cont' d)
19-139
Wheel Speed Sensor Replacement (cont'd)
Rear
2. Rel ease t he c l amp (A), t hen di sc onnec t t he wheel speed s ens or c onnec t or (B).
3. Remove t he c l amps, t he bolt, and t he wheel speed sensor (C).
4. Install t he wheel speed sensor i n t he r ever se or der of r emoval , and not e t hese i t ems:
Do not t wi st t he sensor wi r es.
If t he wheel speed sensor c omes i n cont act wi t h t he hub bear i ng uni t , it i s f aul t y.
Make sur e t her e i s no debr i s i n t he sensor mount i ng hol e.
5. St ar t t he engi ne, and make sur e t he ABS and t he VS A i ndi cat or s go off.
6. Test -dr i ve t he vehi c l e, and make sur e t he ABS and t he VS A i ndi cat or s do not c ome on.
19-140
SUPPL EMENTAL RESTRAINT S YS TEM f SRS) (If bodf mai nt enance i s requi red)
The Ac c or d S RS i nc l udes a dr i ver ' s ai r bag i n t he st eer i ng wheel hub, a passenger ' s ai r bag i n t he dashboar d
roof, and si de ai r bags i n t he f ront seat -bac ks. Inf ormat i on nec essar y to saf el y ser vi c e t he S RS i s i ncl uded i n t hi s
To avoi d r ender i ng t he S RS i noper at i ve, whi c h c oul d l ead to per sonal i nj ury or deat h in t he event of a sever e
f ront al or si de c ol l i si on, all S RS ser vi c e work shoul d be done by an aut hor i zed Honda deal er .
Impr oper ser vi c e pr oc edur es, i ncl udi ng i ncorrect r emoval and i nst al l at i on of t he S RS , coul d l ead to per sonal
espec i al l y when t he i gni ti on swi t ch i s i n ON (II), or f or at l east 3 mi nut es after t he i gni ti on swi t ch i s t ur ned to
L OCK (0); ot her wi se, t he syst em may fai l in a c ol l i si on, or t he ai r bags may depl oy.
S RS el ect ri cal c onnec t or s ar e i dent i f i ed by yel l ow col or codi ng. Rel at ed c omponent s ar e l ocat ed in t he
i n t he front seat s, i n t he roof si de, and ar ound t he f l oor. Do not use el ect r i cal t est equi pment on t hese ci r cui t s.
Body
Body
S pec i al To o l s . . 20-2
Door s
Co mpo nent L oc at i on Index
Fr ont Door . . . . . . . . . . 20-3
Rear Door 20-9
Fr ont Door Panel Removal / Inst al l at i on . 20-12
Fr ont Door Out er Handl e Repl ac ement . 20-21
Fr ont Door L at c h Repl ac ement 20-26
Fr ont Door Gl as s and Regul at or
Rep l ac emen t . . . 20-30
Fr ont Door S as h Inner Tr i m
Repl ac ement 20-33
Fr ont Door S as h Out er Tr i m
Repl ac ement . 20-34
Fr ont Door Gl as s Out er Weat her st r i p
Repl ac ement . . 20-35
Fr ont Door Out er Mol di ng
Repl ac ement . . . . . . . 20-36
Fr ont Door Weat her s t r i p Repl ac ement . 20-37
Rear Door Panel Removal / Inst al l at i on . . 20-38
Rear Door Out er Handl e Repl ac ement . 20-42
Rear Door L at c h Repl ac ement 20-45
Rear Door Gl as s and Regul at or
Repl ac ement 20-47
Rear Door S as h Inner Tr i m
Rear Door S as h Out er Tr i m
Repl ac ement 20-52
Rear Door Gl as s Out er Weat her st r i p
Repl ac ement 20-53
Rear Door Out er Mol di ng
Repl ac ement 20-54
Rear Door Weat her s t r i p Repl ac ement . 20-55
Door Gl as s Adj us t ment 20-56
Door Posi t i on Ad j us t ment 20-58
Door St r i ker Ad j us t ment 20-60
Mi r r or s
Co mpo nent L oc at i on I nd ex . 20-61
Power Mi r r or Repl ac ement 20-62
Mi r r or Hol der Repl ac ement 20-63
Mi r r or Hous i ng Co v er Rep l ac emen t . . . 20-64
Rear v i ew Mi r r or Repl ac ement 20-65
Gl as s
Wi nds hi el d Repl ac ement 20-69
Rear v i ew Mi r r or Har nes s Co v er Bas e
Repl ac ement 20-74
Rear Wi nd o w Repl ac ement 20-75
Quar t er Gl as s Rep l ac emen t . . . 20-83
Moonroof
Gl as s Posi t i on Adj us t ment 20-91
Gl as s Repl ac ement 20-91
Gl as s Weat her s t r i p Repl ac ement 20-92
Wi nd Def l ec t or Repl ac ement 20-93
Dr ai n Ch annel Repl ac ement 20-94
S uns h ad e Repl ac ement . . 20-95
Mot or Repl ac ement 20-96
*
Fr ame and Dr ai n Tub e Rep l ac emen t . . . 20-97
Dr ai n Ch annel Sl i der and Cabl e
As s emb l y Repl ac ement 20-100
Cl os i ng For c e and Openi ng Dr ag
Chec k 20-102
Int eri or Tr i m
Co mpo nent L oc at i on Index . . . . . . . 20-103
Tr i m Removal / Inst al l at i on
Door Ar eas 20-105
* Pi l l ar A r e a s . . . 20-110
* Rear S i d e Ar ea 20-127
* Rear S hel f Ar ea 20-128
Tr unk Ar ea . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-132
Tr unk L i d . . . . 20-134
S unv i s o r Removal / Inst al l at i on 20-135
Gr ab Handl e Removal / Inst al l at i on 20-138
* Headl i ner Remo v al / I n s t al l at i o n . . . . . . . . 20-140
* Car pet Re p l ac e m e n t . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-150
Consol es
Cent er Co ns o l e Panel
Cent er Co ns o l e Remo v al / I ns t al l at i o n. . 20-158
Cent er Co ns o l e Rear Tr i m
Cent er Co ns o l e Ar mr es t Repl ac ement . 20-162
Ac c es s o r y Power S oc k et Tr i m
Dashboar d
Inst r ument Vi s or Remov al / I ns t al l at i on. 20-165
Dr i ver ' s Das hboar d L o wer Co v er
Dr i ver ' s Out er Das h b o ar d Tr i m
Removal / Inst al l at i on . . . . . . . . . . . 20-167
Dr i ver ' s Inner Das hboar d Tr i m
Cent er Poc ket Removal / Inst al l at i on . . . . 20-168
* Das hboar d Cent er L o wer Co v er
Cent er Di s pl ay Vi s or
Pas s eng er ' s Das hboar d Tr i m
Gl o v e Box L oc k Cy l i nder Repl ac ement . 20-173
* Gl o v e Box Removal / Inst al l at i on 20-174
* Gl o v e Box St r i ker Repl ac ement . . 20-176
Das hboar d S i d e Vent
Removal / Inst al l at i on . . . . . 20-177
Das hboar d Cent er Vent
S i d e Def ogger Vent Tr i m
Dr i ver ' s Out er Mi ddl e Pad
Dr i ver ' s Inner Mi ddl e Pad
* Pas s eng er ' s Mi ddl e Pad
Co l umn Co v er Removal / Inst al l at i on . . . 20-181
* Das hboar d/ S t eer i ng Hanger Beam
Removal / Inst al l at i on . . . . . . . . 20-183
Das hboar d/ St eer i ng Hanger Beam
Di s as s emb l y / Reas s emb l y .20-188
Seat s
Fr ont S eat Ac t i ve Head Rest r ai nt
Inspec t i on . 20-193
* Fr ont S eat Removal / Inst al l at i on 20-194
* Fr ont S eat Rec l i ne Mot or Repl ac ement . 20-200
* Fr ont S eat L umb ar Suppor t
* Fr ont S eat Sl i de Mot or Repl ac ement . . 20-204
Fr ont S eat Sl i de L ev er Rep l ac emen t . . . 20-206
Fr ont S eat Tor s i on Bar Rep l ac emen t . . . 20-206
Rear S eat A c c es s Cabl e Repl ac ement . . 20-207
* Fr ont S eat Fr ame Repl ac ement
Dr i ver ' s S eat 20-208
* Pas s eng er ' s S eat 20-211
* Fr ont Seat -bac k Co v er Rep l ac emen t . . . 20-213
* Fr ont S eat Cus h i o n Cov er
* Rear S eat Removal / Inst al l at i on 20-239
Rear Seat -bac k L at c h Repl ac ement 20-243
Rear Seat -bac k Rel eas e L ev er / Cabl e
Rear S eat Ar mr es t Repl ac ement . . 20-244
Tr unk Pas s -t hr ough L i d Loc k Cy l i nder
Tr unk Pas s -t hr ough L i d Repl ac ement . . 20-247
Rear S eat Ar mr es t Bev er age Hol der
Rear Seat -bac k Cov er Repl ac ement 20-249
Rear S eat S i d e Bol st er Cov er
Rear S eat Cus h i o n Co v er
Repl ac ement . . . . . . 20-253
Bumper s
Fr ont Bumper Removal / Inst al l at i on 20-255
Fr ont Bumper Fog Li ght Co v er
Fr ont Ai r Spoi l er Repl ac ement 20-259
Rear Bumper Removal / Inst al l at i on 20-260
Rear Bumper Fi ni s her Cov er
Repl ac ement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-263
Hood
Hood Adj us t ment 20-264
Hood S eal and Hood Mol di ng
R e p l a c e m e n t . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-265
Hood i nsul at or Repl ac ement 20-266
Tr unk Li d
Tr unk Li d Ad j us t ment . 20-267
Tr unk Li d To r s i o n Bar Rep l ac emen t . . . 20-268
Tr unk Li d Weat her st r i p Repl ac ement . . 20-269
Tr unk Li d Cus h i o n Repl ac ement 20-269
Tr unk Li d Dy nami c Damper
Fuel Fi ll Door
Fuel Fi l l Door Adj us t ment . 20-271
Fuel Cap Adapt er Repl ac ement . . . 20-272
Ext er i or Tr i m
Fr ont Gr i l l e Co v er Repl ac ement 20-274
Fr ont Gr i l l e Repl ac ement 20-275
Fr ont Fender Tr i m Re p l ac e m e n t . . . . . . . 20-277
Cowl Co v er Repl ac ement . 20-278
Roof Mol di ng Repl ac ement 20-280
S i d e Si l l Pr ot ec t i on Tape Repl ac ement . 20-284
Tr unk L o wer Tr i m Repl ac ement 20-286
Embl em/ S t i c k er Rep l ac emen t . . . . . 20-288
Fender wel l
Fr ont Inner Fender Repl ac ement 20-290
Fr ont S pl as h S hi el d Repl ac ement 20-291
Fr ont Fender Fai r i ng Re p l ac e me n t . . . . . 20-292
Mi ddl e Fl oor Under c ov er
Fuel Pi pe Pr ot ec t or Repl ac ement 20-294
Rear Inner Fender Re p l ac e m e n t . . . . . . . 20-294
Rear Ai r Out l et Repl ac ement 20-295
Opener s
Hood Opener Cabl e Repl ac ement 20-297
* Tr unk L i d Opener Cabl e/ Fuel Fi l l Door
Opener Cabl e Repl ac ement 20-298
Hood L at c h Repl ac ement 20-302
Hood Rel eas e Handl e Repl ac ement 20-303
Tr unk Li d Opener / Fuel Fi l l Door Opener
Tr unk L i d Lat c h Repl ac ement 20-305
Fr ame
Fr ame Br ac e Repl ac ement 20-306
Rear Wh eel h o us e Gus s et
Mi ddl e Cr o s s memb er Gus s et
S ub f r ame Repl ac ement 20-308
Fr ame Repai r Char t 20-312
Body
Speci al Tool s

(D
070AG-SJ AA10S
07AAF-SN AA100
Subf r ame Al i gnment Pi n
Tor si on Bar Assembl y Tool
1
l

20-2
Doors
Component Location Index - Front Door
2-door
POWER WI NDOW SWITCH
(c ont ' d)
20-3
Doors
Component Locat i on Index - Front Door (cont'd)
2-door (cont ' d)
20-4
GL A S S
IMMOBILIZER and
S ECURI TY LABEL
GL A S S RUN CHANNEL
OUTER HANDL E BASE
OUTER HANDLE HOL DER
FRONT L OWER CHANNEL
L OCK CYL I NDER
(Dr i ver ' s)
INNER HANDLE
S TRI K ER
Adj us t ment page 20-60
L ATCH
INNER HANDL E CAP
i2!0
<ai i
5^
Doors
Component Location index - Front Door (cont'd)
4-door
DOOR GL A S S INNER
WEATHERS TRI P
POWER WINDOW SWI TCH
20-6
DOOR S A S H INNER TRIM
(c ont ' d)
2Q-7
Poor s
Component Location Index - Front Door (cont'd)
4- d o o r (cont ' d)
GL A S S
IMMOBILIZER and
SECURITY LABEL
GL A S S RUN CHANNEL
CENTER L OWER CHANNEL
OUTER HANDL E COVER
, OUTER HANDL E COVER S E A L
OUTER HANDL E B A S E
OUTER HANDLE HOLDER
OUTER HANDL E REAR S E A L
FRONT L OWER CHANNEL
OUTER HANDL E B A S E
REGUL ATOR
L OCK CYL I NDER
(Driver's)
OUTER HANDL E
L ATCH PROTECTOR
L ATCH CABL E
S TRI K ER
INNER HANDL E
INNER HANDL E CAP
L ATCH
INNER HANDL E CA B L E
20-8
Component Location Index - Rear Door
4-door
DOOR GL A S S INNER
WEATHERS TRI P
POWER WINDOW S WI TCH
(cont' d)
20-9
Doors
Component Location Index - Rear Door (cont'd)
4-door (cont ' d)
DOOR WEATHERS TRI P
20-10
GL A S S
20-11
Doors
Front Door Panel Removal /Inst al l at i on
. K TC Tr i m Tool Set S OJ ATP2014*
-Tr i m Pad Remover Snap-on A 177A, c ommer c i al l y
avai l abl e
Pr ogr am; cal l 888-424-6857
2-door
NOTE:
9 Take c ar e not to scr at ch t he door or t he rel at ed par t s.
Us e t he appr opr i at e t ool f r om t he K TC t ri m t ool set to
1. Remove t he t weet er c over (see st ep 2 on page 20-62).
2. Rai se t he gl ass f ul l y.
3. Push on t he bot t om of t he i nner handl e c ap (A) whi l e
pushi ng on t he upper hook (B) wi t h t he appr opr i at e
t ri m t ool , t hen pull back t he c ap to r emove it.
4. Remove t he s c r ews (A, B) sec ur i ng t he i nner handl e
(C).
Fast ener L oc at i ons
A : S c r ew, 2 B : S c r ew, 1
5. Remove t he pull pocket c ap (A), and r emove t he
sc r ew.
Fast ener Loc at i on
: S c r ew, 1
2s ^^" 12!
6. Pry up t he not ch (A) of t he door panel cap (B), t hen
pull back t he c ap to r el ease the hooks (C
r
D), t hen
r emove t he c ap.
: S c r ew, 1
D
7. Remove t he sc r ew. Di sconnect t he power wi ndow
swi t ch connect or (E) and the power mi rror swi t ch
connect or (F).
8. Remove t he door panel (A) wi t h as little bendi ng as
possi bl e t o avoi d c r easi ng or br eaki ng it.
- 1. St ar t at t he bottom edge of t he door panel , det ach
t he cl i ps wi t h a c ommer c i al l y avai l abl e t ri m pad
r emover .
- 2. Det ach t he r emai ni ng cl i ps.
- 3. St ar t i ng at t he r ear , pull t he door panel upwar d.
NOTE: The i nner handl e cabl e (B) and t he latch
c abl e (C) ar e c onnec t ed to t he i nner handl e (D). Do
not pull t he door panel up too f ar , or t hese c abl es
wi l l be damaged.
Fast ener Loc at i ons
> : Cl i p, 10
(cont' d)
20-13
Doors
Front Door Panel Removal /Inst al l at i on (cont'd!
9. Whi l e hol di ng t he door panel (A) away f r om t he door ,
r emove t he i nner handl e (B) f r om t he door panel by
r el easi ng t he hooks (C).
10. Remove t he door panel (A) whi l e pul l i ng t he i nner
handl e (B) out t hrough t he hol e in t he door panel .
NOTE: If you ar e onl y r emovi ng t he door panel , go to
st ep 16. If you ar e doi ng f urt her di sassembl y of t he
door panel , cont i nue to st ep 11.
Inner handl e r emoval
11. Di sconnect t he i nner handl e cabl e (A) and t he latch
cabl e (B) f r om t he i nner handl e (C), t hen r emove t he
handl e.
-1. Rel ease t he i nner handl e cabl e f ast ener s (D, E), t hen
di sconnect t he i nner handl e cabl e.
- 2. Rel ease t he latch cabl e f ast ener (F), and r emove t he
latch cabl e f ast ener (G) f r om t he i nner handl e by
pi nchi ng its t abs out.
NOTE: If t he cabl e f ast ener s ar e damaged or
st r ess-whi t ened, r epl ace t hem wi t h new ones.
20-14
Or nament panel r emoval
12. Remove t he or nament panel (A).
-1. Remove t he sc r ews f r om back of t he door panel (B).
-2. Rel ease t he hooks (C) f r om back of t he door panel .
-3. Rel ease t he hooks (D) and t he cl i ps f r om t he gri p
base (E).
: S c r ew, 4 j >: Cl i p, 3
13. Remove t he s c r ews {A, B, C), t hen separ at e t he gri p
base (D) and t he upper gri p bracket (E) f r om t he door
panel (F).
A : S c r ew, 2 B : S c r ew, 3 C : S c r ew, 1
(cont d)
20-15
Doors
Front Door Panel Removal /Inst al l at i on (cont' d)
Ar mr est r emoval
14. Remove t he power wi ndow swi t c h panel (A) and t he
ar mr est (B) as an assembl y f r om t he door panel (C).
-1. Remove t he s c r ews f r om back of t he door panel .
-2. Pull out al ong t he edge of t he ar mr est to r el ease all
of t he hooks (D).
-3. Pull out al ong t he edge of t he power wi ndow swi t c h
panel to r el ease t he hooks ( E) and to det ach t he
cl i ps.
: S c r ew, 7 | > : Cl i p, 3
15. Remove t he s c r ews , and r el ease t he hook (A), t hen
separ at e t he power wi ndow swi t ch panel (B) f r om t he
ar mr est (C).
: S c r ew, 3
16. Inst al l t he door panel in t he r ever se or der of r emoval ,
If t he c l i ps ar e damaged or st r ess-whi t ened, r epl ace
t hem wi t h new ones.
Repl ac e any damaged cabl e f ast ener s wi t h new
ones.
The l at ch cabl e (A) shoul d be f i xed to t he cabl e
f ast ener (B) wi t h t he latch in t he unl ocked posi t i on
as s hown.
Make sur e eac h connect or i s pl ugged in pr oper l y,
and t he c abl es ar e connect ed sec ur el y.
Make sur e t he power wi ndow and power door lock
oper at e properl y.
When r ei nst al l i ng t he door panel , make sur e t he
pl ast i c c over on t he door i s i nst al l ed properl y .
Push t he cl i ps and t he hooks into pl ace sec ur el y.
47 mm (1.85 i n)
20-16
. K TCTr i m Too! Set SOJ ATP2014*
Tr i m Pad Remover Snap-on A 177A, c ommer c i al l y
avai l abl e
Pr ogr am; cal l 888-424-6857
4-door
NOTE:
Take car e not to scr at ch t he door or t he rel at ed par t s.
Use t he appropri at e t ool f rom t he K TC t ri m tool set to
When pryi ng wi t h a flat-ti p sc r ewdr i ver , wr ap it wi t h
prot ect i ve t ape to prevent damage.
1. Remove the t weet er c over (see st ep 2 on page 20-62).
2. Rai se t he gl ass fully.
3. Push on t he bottom of t he i nner handl e c ap (A) whi l e
pushi ng on t he upper hook (B) wi t h t he appropri at e
\
4. Remove t he sc r ews sec ur i ng t he i nner handl e (A).
: S c r ew, 2
\
5. Pry up t he not ch (A) of t he lid (B), and pull back t he l i d,
t hen r emove t he sc r ew.
: S c r ew, 1
(cont' d)
20-17
Doors
Front Door Panel Removal /Inst al l at i on (cont' d)
possi bl e to avoi d c r easi ng or breaki ng it.
- 1. St ar t at t he bot t om edge of t he door panel , det ach
r emover .
-2. Det ach t he r emai ni ng c l i ps.
-3. St ar t i ng at t he r ear , pull t he door panel upwar d.
NOTE: The i nner handl e cabl e (B) and t he lat ch
cabl e (C) ar e c onnec t ed to t he i nner handl e (D). Do
not pull t he door panel up t oo f ar , or t hese c abl es
wi l l be damaged.
F astener Locations
t>: Clip, 8
r emove t he i nner handl e (B) f rom t he door panel by
/
C B
handl e (B) out t hr ough t he hol e i n t he door panel .
Whi l e hol di ng t he door panel away f r om t he door ,
di sc onnec t t he power wi ndow swi t ch connect or (C),
t he power mi rror swi t ch connect or (D), and t he
cour t esy li ght bul b socket (E), and det ach t he har ness
c l i p (F).
B
20-18
9. Di sconnect t he.Inner handl e c abl e (A) and t he l at ch
c abl e (B) f r om t he i nner handl e (C), t hen r emove t he
handl e.
-1. Rel ease t he i nner handl e cabl e f ast ener s (D, E L t hen
di sconnect t he i nner handl e c abl e.
-2. Rel ease t he l at ch cabl e f ast ener ( F) , and r emove t he
latch cabl e f ast ener (G) f r om t he i nner handl e by
pi nchi ng i ts t abs out.
NOTE: If t he c abl e f ast ener s ar e damaged or
st r ess-whi t ened, r epl ace t hem wi t h new ones,
Power wi ndow s wi t c h panel r emoval
10. Remove t he power wi ndow swi t c h panel (A) f r om t he
door panel (B).
-1. Det ach t he cl i p.
-2. Pul l out al ong t he edge of t he panel to r el ease al l of
t he hooks (C).
-3. Pul l t he power wi ndow swi t ch panel r ear war d to
r el ease t he f ront hook (D).
> : Clip, 1
Armrest removal
11. Remove t he s c r ews (A), and l oosen t he s c r ews (B)
f r om back of t he door panel (C). Rel ease t he hook (D),
t hen r emove t he ar mr est (E).
Fastener Locations
A, B ^ Screw, 5
(cont ' d)
20-19
Doors
Front Door Panel Removal /Inst al l at i on
Ornament panel removal
12. Remove t he s c r ews f r om back of t he door panel (A),
and r el ease t he hooks (B, C, D), t hen r emove t he
or nament panel (E).
Fastener Locations
: Screw, 6
(cont' d)
13. Install the door panel in the reverse order of removal,
and note these items:
If the clips are damaged or stress-whitened, replace
them with new ones.
Replace any damaged cable fasteners with new
ones.
The latch cable (A) should be fixed to the cable
fastener (B) with the latch in the unlocked position
as shown.
Make sure each connector is plugged in properly,
and the cables are connected securely.
Make sure the power window and power door lock
operate properly.
When reinstalling the door panel, make sure the
plastic cover on the door is installed properly .
Pu s h the clips and t he hooks i nto place sec ur el y.
46.5 mm (1.83 in)
20-20
Front Door Out er Handle Repl acement
NOTE:
Put on gl oves to protect your hands.
Take c ar e not to scr at ch t he door .
1 . Remove t he door panel :
2. Di sc onnec t t he power door l ock act uat or connect or
(A), and det ach t he har ness c l i ps (B).
2-door
3. Remove t he r ear pl ug c ap (C), t hen r emove t he pl ast i c
c over (D) as needed.
NOTE: If t he pl ast i c cover i s damaged or t or n, r epl ace
it wi t h a new one.
4. Remove t he mai nt enanc e c ap (A) (2-door) or t he hol e
seal (B) (4-door).
2-door
(cont ' d)
20-21
Doors
Front Door Outer Handle Replacement (cont'd)
5. Driver's door: Pull both side flanges (A) of the retainer
(B) outward, and pull out the middle flange area(C) of
the outer casing cover (D), then disconnect the lock -
cylinder cable (E) from the latch. 4-door is shown;
2-door is similar.
6.2-door: Pull the glass run channel (A) away as needed,
and remove the bolt, then remove the center lower
channel (B) by pulling it downward.
: Bol t , 1
6 x 1.0 mm
8 N-m
(0.8 kgf m,
6 I bfft)
20-22
. While holding the outer handle cover (A), loosen the
bolt until it can be pulled out half-way by hand
(driver's door), or remove the bolt (passenger's door).
Release the hooks (B) of the outer handle cover, then
remove the outer handle cover.
Driver's door
: Bol t , 1
6 x 1.0 mm
9.8 N-m
(1.0 k g f m, 7.2 Ibf-ft)
Passenger ' s door
: Bol t , 1
6 x 1.0 mm
9.8 N-m
(1.0 k g f m, 7.2 Ibf-ft)
8. Release the hooks (A), then remove the lock cylinder
(B) (driver's door) or the outer handle holder (C)
(passenger's door) from the outer handle base (D).
Dr i ver ' s door
Passenger ' s door
(cont'd)
20-23
Doors
Front Door Outer Handle Replacement (cont'd)
9. Dr i ver ' s door: If t he ret ai ner (A) of t he lock cyl i nder 11. Rel ease t he hooks (A, B), t hen r emove t he out er
c abl e (B) i s damaged, r el ease t he hooks (C), t hen handl e f ront seal (C) and t he out er handl e r ear seal
r epl ace it wi t h a new one. (D).
10. Pull back t he out er handl e (A), and out as shown t o
r emove it f r om t he door.
20-24
12. Remove t he out er handl e base (A).
-1. Rel ease the rod f ast ener (B) f rom t he out er handl e
rod (C).
-2. Di sconnect t he out er handl e rod witha cl i p
r emover .
-3. Loosen t he nut.
-4. Rel ease t he hook (D), and sl i de t he out er handl e
base f or war d to r el ease t he speci al bolt (E) f r om t he
door.
Fast ener Locat i on
13. Remove t he rod f ast ener (A) f r om t he out er handl e
base (B), t hen r epl ace it wi t h a new one.
14. Inst al l t he out er handl e i n t he r ever se or der of
Rei nst al l t he lock cyl i nder (dr i ver ' s door ) or t he
out er handl e hol der (passenger ' s door) bef ore
i nst al l i ng t he out er handl e c over .
Make sur e that t he power door lock act uat or
connect or i s pl ugged i n pr oper l y, and t hat t he lock
cyl i nder cabl e and t he out er handl e rod ar e
c onnec t ed sec ur el y.
Make sur e t he door key cyl i nder /door l ocks operat e
properl y.
Make sur e t he door handl e wor ks properl y.
When rei nst al l i ng t he door panel , make sur e t he
pl ast i c cover on t he door i s i nst al l ed properl y .
Push t he cl i ps and t he hooks i nto pl ace secur el y.
20-25
Doors
Front Door Latch Replacement
NOTE: Put on gl oves to prot ect your hands.
1. Remove t he door panel and t he i nner handl e:
2-door ( s e e p a g e 20-12)
2. Remove t he pl ast i c c over , as needed (see st ep 3 on
page 20-21).
3. Rel ease t he rod f ast ener , and di sc onnec t t he out er
handl e rod f r om t he out er handl e base (see st ep 12 on
page 20-25).
4. Dr i ver ' s door: Di sc onnec t t he lock cyl i nder c abl e f r om
t he l at ch (see st ep 5 on page 20-22).
5. Pull t he gl ass run c hannel (A) away as needed, and
r emove t he bol t , t hen r emove t he cent er l ower
c hannel (B) by pul l i ng it downwar d,
2-door
. Bol t , 1
6 x 1.0 mm
8 N-m
(0.8 kgf -m, 6 Ibf-ft)
4-door
P : Bol t , 1
6 x 1.0 mm
8 N-m
(0.8 kgf -m, 6 Ibf-ft)
20-26
6. Det ach t he cabl e cl i ps (A). Remove t he sc r ews (B, C)
sec ur i ng t he latch (D), t hen r emove t he latch t hrough
t he hol e i n t he door. Take car e not t o bend t he out er
handl e rod (E), t he latch cabl e (F), or t he i nner handl e
cabl e (G).
2-door
B : S c r ew, 3 C : S c r ew, 1
6 x 1.0 mm
6 N-m
(0.6 k g f m, 4 Ibf-ft)
4-door
B : S c r ew, 3 C : S c r ew, 1
6 N-m
(0.6 k g f m, 4 Ibf-ft)
(cont ' d)
20-27
Doors
Front Door Latch Replacement (cont'd)
7. Remove t he out si de sponge seal (A), and r emove t he a Di sc onnec t t he latch c abl e (A) and t he i nner handl e
s c r ew, then remove the latch protector (B) by c abl e (B) f r om t he latch ( C ) , and r emove t he i nsi de
r el easi ng t he hook (C), and r emove t he i nsi de sponge sponge s eal s {D, E).
seal (D) f r om t he l at ch.
20-28
. Install t he latch in t he r ever se or der of r emoval , and
Bef ore rei nst al l i ng t he c abl es to t he l at ch (A), cl ean
t he latch sur f ace wher e t he sponge seal s (B, C) wi l l
be at t ached wi t h i sopr opyl al c ohol , and at t ach t he
sponge seal s to t he latch as shown.
After rei nst al l i ng t he latch cabl e (D) and t he i nner
handl e cabl e (E) to t he l at ch, at t ach t he sponge seal
(F) to t he cabl e connect i ng ar eas on t he latch as
shown.
Bef ore rei nst al l i ng t he latch prot ect or (G), r epl ace
t he i nsi de sponge seal (H) and t he out si de sponge
seal (I) wi t h new ones:
- Sc r ape off t he ol d sponge seal s f r om t he
prot ect or, and cl ean t he prot ect or sur f ac es wi t h
i sopr opyl al cohol .
- At t ach t he i nsi de sponge seal to t he i nsi de f ace of
t he prot ect or as shown.
- Af t er rei nst al l i ng t he latch prot ect or to t he l at ch,
at t ach t he out si de sponge seal to t he prot ect or
and t he lat ch as shown.
If t he cl i p i s damaged or st r ess-whi t ened, r epl ace it
wi t h a new one.
Make sur e that t he act uat or connect or i s pl ugged i n
pr oper l y, and that t he cyl i nder cabl e and t he out er
handl e rod ar e connect ed sec ur el y.
Make sur e t he door l ocks and opens properl y.
Push t he hooks and t he cl i p into pl ace sec ur el y.
B
Replace.
H
Replace.
Replace.
20-29
Doors
Front Door Glass and Regulator Replacement
NOTE: Put on gl oves to protect your hands.
1. Remove t he door panel :
4-door { see page 20-17)
2.2-door : Remove t he s c r ews , t hen r emove t he door
panel bracket (A).
Fastener Locations
^ : Screw, 2
\ f
3. Di sconnect t he power door lock act uat or connect or
(A), and det ach t he har ness cl i ps (B). Remove t he pl ug
c aps (C). 4-door : Di sconnect t he power mi rror
connect or (D).
2-door
4-door
4. Pass t he wi r e har ness (E) t hr ough t he sl i t (F) i n t he
pl ast i c c over (G), t hen r emove t he pl ast i c cover .
NOTE: If t he pl ast i c c over i s damaged or t or n, r epl ace
20-30
5.4-door : Remove t he bol t s, and r el ease t he hook (A),
t hen r emove t he door panel bracket (B).
F astener Locations
K : Bol t , 2
6 x 1 0 mm
9.8 N-m
(1.0 k g f m,
7.2 Ibf f t )
6. Lower t he gl ass (A) unti l you c an see t he bol t s, t hen
r emove t hem. Car ef ul l y pull t he gl ass out t hr ough t he
wi ndow sl ot . Take c ar e not to dr op t he gl ass i nsi de t he
door.
2-door
: Bol t , 2
6 x 1.0 mm
9.8 N m (1.0 k g f m, 7.2 Ibf f t )
4-door
: Bol t , 2
6 x 1.0 mm
9.8 N-m (1.0 k g f m, 7.2 Ibf f t )
(cont' d)
20- 31
Doors
F ront Door Glass and Regulator Replacement (cont'd)
7. Di sconnect t he connect or (A) f r om the regul at or ( B ) .
2-door
C ^ : Bol t , 5 D : Bol t , 1
(Bl ack) (Si l ver )
S.8 N-m (1.0 kgf -m, 7.2 Ibf-ft)
4-door
C : Bo l t 5 D : Bol t , 1
6x 1.0 mm
9.8 N-m (1.0 kgf-m, 7.2 Ibf-ft)
8. Remove t he bol t s (C), and l oosen the bol t s (D).
Rel ease t he hook ( E ) , t hen r emove the regul at or
t hr ough t he hol e in t he door.
9. Appl y mul t i pur pose gr ease to all t he sl i di ng sur f ac es
of t he regul at or (A) wher e shown. 4-door i s shown;
2-door i s si mi l ar .
\
A
10. Inst al l t he gl ass and t he regul at or i n t he r ever se or der
of r emoval , and note t hese i t ems:
If t he cl i ps ar e damaged or st r ess-whi t ened, r epl ace
Rol l t he gl ass up and down to make sur e it moves
f r eel y wi t hout bi ndi ng.
Make sur e t hat t her e i s no c l ear anc e bet ween t he
gl ass and t he gl ass run c hannel when t he gl ass i s
c l osed.
Make sur e t he connect or i s pl ugged i n properl y.
Adj ust t he posi t i on of t he gl ass as nec essar y, (see
page 20-56)
Do t he power wi ndow cont rol uni t r eset pr ocedur e
(see page 22-280).
Make sur e t he pl ast i c c over on t he door i s i nst al l ed
properl y and seal ed ar ound i ts out si de per i met er to
seal out wat er .
Check f or wat er l eaks, (see st ep 9 on page 20-57)
Make sur e t he power door l oc ks, t he wi ndows and
t he power mi r r or operat e properl y.
Test -dr i ve t he vehi c l e, and c hec k f or wi nd noi se and
rat t l es.
20*32
Front Door Sash Inner Trim Replacement
2-door
NOTE: Take c ar e not to sc r at c h t he door.
1. Remove t he door panel (see page 20-12).
2. Lower t he gl ass f ul l y.
3. Remove t he door s as h i nner tri m (A).
-1. Det ach t he cl i p f ast eni ng t he t r i m.
-2. Pull back al ong t he out si de edge of t he t ri m to
r el ease t he hook st ri p (B) f rom t he door gl ass
openi ng f l ange at t he A-pi l l ar ar ea and t he roof ar ea
of t he door s as h.
-3. Rel ease t he hook (C) f r om t he gl ass run channel (D)
at t he r ear cor ner ar ea of t he door s as h .
r el ease t he hook st ri p (E) f rom t he door gl ass
, openi ng f l ange at t he B-pi llar ar ea of t he door s as h.
-5. Rel ease t he rear hook (F) f r om t he door .
> : Cli p, 1
4. Inst al l t he t ri m in t he r ever se or der of r emoval , and
wi t h a new one.
Push t he cl i p, t he hooks, and t he hook st ri p into
pl ace sec ur el y.
4-door
NOTE: Take c ar e not to scr at ch t he door.
2. Lower t he gl ass f ul l y.
3. Remove t he door sash i nner tri m (A).
-1. Det ach t he cl i p f ast eni ng t he t r i m.
r el ease t he hooks or t he hook st ri ps (B) f r om t he
door gl ass openi ng f l ange at the A-pi l l ar ar ea and
t he roof ar ea of t he door s as h .
-3. Rel ease t he hook (C) f rom t he gl ass run c hannel (D)
at t he r ear cor ner ar ea of t he door s as h .
-4. Pull back al ong the out si de edge of t he t ri m to
r el ease t he hooks or t he hook st ri ps (E) f r om t he
door gl ass openi ng f l ange at t he B-pi llar ar ea of t he
door s as h .
-5. Rel ease t he r ear hook (F) f r om t he door.
Japan-pr oduc ed model s
t > : Cl i p, 1
F
(cont' d)
20-33
Doors
Front Door Sas h Inner Tri m
Repl acement (cont' d)
USA-pr oduc ed model s
Fastener Location
t >: Cl i p, 1
F
4. Install t he t r i m i n t he r ever se or der of r emoval , and
wi t h a new one.
Push t he cl i p, t he hooks, and t he hook st r i ps i nto
pl ace sec ur el y.
Front Door Sas h Outer Trim
Repl acement -
NOTE:
Take c ar e not to sc r at c h t he door.
4-door i s s hown; 2-door i s si mi l ar .
1. Remove t he door out er mol di ng (see page 20-36).
2. Pull up t he door s as h out er t ri m (A) t o r el ease t he
hooks (B) f r om t he door , and r el ease t he t ri m f r om
bet ween t he door gl ass out er weat her st r i p (C) and t he
door , t hen r emove t he t r i m. Take car e not to damage
t he door gl ass out er weat her st r i p.
3. Inst al l t he t ri m i n t he r ever se or der of r emoval .
20-34
Front Door Glass Outer Weatherstrip Replacement
NOTE:
Take car e not to scr at ch t he door.
1. Remove t h e s e It ems:
Door panel
- 2-door (see page 20-12)
Pl ast i c c over , as needed (see st ep 3 on page 20-21)
Power mi r r or (see page 20-62)
2. Remove t he s c r ews f r om t he front and rear edges of
t he door .
: S c r ew, 2
3. Fr om t he i nsi de of t he door , sl i de t he cl i ps (A) of t he
door gl ass out er weat her st r i p (B) to r el ease t he hooks
(C) f r om t he f l anges (D) of t he door.
. 2-door
(Engaged (Rel easee
posi t i on) ' posi t i on)
4-door
posi t i on) posi t i on)
(cont' d)
20-35
Doors
Front Door Gl ass Outer
Weat herst ri p Repl acement (cont' d)
4. Pull up t he door gl ass out er weat her st r i p (A), t hen
r emove it.
5. Bef ore i nst al l i ng t he door gl ass out er weat her st r i p,
sl i de t he cl i ps to t he r el eased posi t i on as i n st ep 3.
6. Install t he door gl ass out er weat her st r i p, and sl i de t he
cl i ps sec ur el y on to t he f l anges.
7. Rei nst al l all r emai ni ng r emoved part s and not e t hese
i t ems:
Make sur e t he pl ast i c cover on t he door i s i nst al l ed
seal out wat er .
Chec k f or wat er l eaks (see st ep 9 on page 20-57).
Front Door Out er Moldi ng
Repl acement
K TC Tr i m Tool Set S OJ ATP2014*
Pr ogr am; cal l 888-424-6857
NOTE:
If you r emove t he door out er mol di ng, r epl ace it wi t h a
new one bec ause it wi l l bend duri ng r emoval .
Take c ar e not to scr at ch t he door .
Us e t he appropri at e t ool f rom t he K TC t ri m tool set to
1. Remove t he power mi rror (see page 20-62).
2. Det ach t he cl i p wi t h a cl i p l emo v er , t hen pulf back t he
door weat her st r i p (A), and r emove t he s c r ew secur i ng
t he door out er mol di ng (B).
0 : Cl i p, 1 : S c r ew, 1
20-36
3. Pull out t he upper edge of t he door out er mol di ng (A)
f r om t he edge of t he s as h , and cut t he doubl e-si ded
adhesi ve t ape (B) wi t h a utility kni f e, t hen r emove t he
mol di ng f r om t he s as h , and r emove t he mol di ng f r om
door.
c
4. Sc r ape off r emai ni ng doubl e-si ded adhesi ve t ape
f r om t he s as h , t hen cl ean t he s as h sur f ace wi t h a shop
t owel dampened i n i sopr opyl al c ohol .
5. Inst al l t he door out er mol di ng i n t he r ever se or der of
Insert t he front edge of t he mol di ng bet ween t he
door gl ass out er weat her st r i p and t he door
properl y.
Push adhesi ve ar eas into pl ace sec ur el y.
Make sur e t he upper and l ower si des of t he mol di ng
ar e cat chi ng t he edges of t he s as h properl y.
Push t he cl i p into pl ace sec ur el y.
Front 12)? Wmfcvmp
Replacement
NOTE:
Put on gl oves t o prot ect your hands.
Take c ar e not to sc r at c h t he door .
Take c ar e not to damage t he f ront upper cor ner cl i p
(bl ack) (4-door) and t he rear upper cor ner cl i ps (bl ack)
bec ause t hey ar e not avai l abl e separ at el y.
Us e a cl i p r emover to r emove t he c l i ps.
1. Remove t he door c hec ker mount i ng bolt (A) at t he
A-pi l l ar .
2-door
8x 1.25 mm
29 N-m
(3.0 k g f m, 22 i bf f t )
(cont ' d)
20-37
Doors
Front Door Weatherstrip
Replacement (cont'd)
4-door
F astener Locations
A : Bol t , 1 B > : Cl i p, 16 C t> : Cl i p, 4
(Left; Orange) (Graf)
(Ri ght : Pur pl e)
8 x 1.25 mm
29 N-m
2. Det ach t he cl i ps (B, C, D, E, F), and r el ease t he door
weat her st r i p (G) f r om t he hol der (H) of t he door s as h ,
t hen r emove t he weat her st r i p.
3. Install t he weat her st r i p in t he r ever se or der of
r emoval , and not e t hese i t ems:
Push t he cl i ps into pl ace sec ur el y.
Make sur e t he door weat her st r i p i s i nst al l ed in t he
hol der sec ur el y.
Appl y medi um st rengt h l i qui d t hr ead lock to t he
door c hec ker mount i ng bolt bef ore i nst al l at i on.
Rear Door Panel
. K TC Tr i m Tool Set S OJ ATP2014*
Tr i m Pad Remover Snap-on A 177A, c ommer c i al l y
avai l abl e
Pr ogr am; cal l 888-424-6857
4-door
NOTE:
Take c ar e not to sc r at c h t he door or t he rel at ed par t s.
Us e t he appr opr i at e t ool f r om t he K TC t ri m tool set to
When pr yi ng wi t h a flat-ti p sc r ewdr i ver , wr ap it wi t h
prot ect i ve t ape to pr event damage.
1. Rai se t he gl ass f ul l y.
2. Push on t he bottom of t he i nner handl e c ap (A) whi l e
pushi ng on t he upper hook (B) wi t h t he appropri at e
20-38
3. Remove t he sc r ews sec ur i ng t he i nner handl e (A).
S c r ew, 2
4. Pry up t he not ch (A) of t he li d (B), and pull back t he l i d,
t h en r emove t he sc r ew.
S c r ew, 1
possi bl e to avoi d c r easi ng or breaki ng it.
- 1. St art at t he bottom edge of t he door panel , r el ease
r emover .
-2. Det ach t he r emai ni ng c l i ps.
- 3. St art i ng at t he r ear , pull t he door panel upwar d.
NOTE: The i nner handl e cabl e (B) and t he lat ch
cabl e (C) ar e connect ed t o t he i nner handl e (D). Do
not pull t he door panel up t oo f ar , or t hese c abl es
wi l l be damaged.
> : Cl i p, 8
(cont' d)
20-39
Doors
Rear Door Panel Removal /Inst al l at i on (cont'd)
r emove t he i nner handl e (B) f r om t he door panel by
c
handl e (B) out t hr ough t he hol e i n t he door panel .
Whi l e hol di ng t he door panel away f r om t he door ,
di sc onnec t t he power wi ndow swi t c h connect or (C).
8. Di sc onnec t t he i nner handl e cabl e (A) and t he lat ch
c abl e (B) f r om t he i nner handl e (C), t hen r emove t he
handl e.
-1. Rel ease t he i nner handl e cabl e f ast ener s (D, E) , t hen
di sc onnec t t he i nner handl e cabl e.
-2. Rel ease t he l at ch cabl e f ast ener (F), and r emove t he
l at ch c abl e f ast ener (G) f r om t he i nner handl e by
pi nchi ng i ts t abs out .
NOTE: If t he c abl e f ast ener s ar e damaged or
F
20-40
Power wi ndow swi t c h panel r emoval
9. Remove t he power wi ndow swi t ch panel (A) f r om t he
door panel (B).
-1. Det ach t he rear cl i p.
-2. Pull out al ong t he edge of t he panel to r el ease all of
t he hooks (C).
-3. Pull t he power wi ndow swi t ch panel r ear war d to
r el ease t he front hook (D).
Ar mr est r emoval
10. Remove t he sc r ews (A), and l oosen t he s c r ews (B)
f r om back of t he door panel (C). Rel ease t he hook (D),
t hen r emove t he ar mr est (E).
A, : S c r ew, 5
Or nament panel r emoval
11. Remove t he s c r ews f rom back of t he door panel (A),
and r el ease t he hooks (B, C, D), t hen r emove t he
or nament panel (E).
: S c r ew, S
C D
(cont' d)
20-41
DOTS
Rear Poor Panel
Removal /Inst al l at i on (cont'd)
12. Install t he door panel i n t he r ever se or der of r emoval ,
Repl ace any damaged cabl e f ast ener s wi t h new
ones.
The lat ch cabl e (A) shoul d be f i xed to t he c abl e
f ast ener (B) wi t h t he latch i n t he unl ocked posi t i on
as shown.
Make sur e t he connect or i s pl ugged in pr oper l y,
and t he c abl es ar e connect ed sec ur el y.
Make sur e t he power wi ndow and power door lock
operat e properl y.
pl ast i c c over on t he door i s i nst al l ed pr oper l y.
Push t he cl i ps and t he hooks i nto pl ace sec ur el y.
47 mm (1.85 in)
Rear Door Outer Handle
Replacement
4-door
NOTE:
Put on gl oves to prot ect your hands.
Take car e not to sc r at c h t he door .
(A), and det ach t he har ness cl i ps (B).
3. Remove t he r ear pl ug c ap (C), t hen r emove t he pl ast i c
c over (D) as needed.
4. Remove t he hol e seal (A).
20-42
5. Whi l e hol di ng t he out er handl e c over (A), r emove t he
bolt a n d r el ease t he hooks (B) of t he out er handl e
c over , t hen r emove t he cover .
6. Rel ease t he hooks (A), t hen r emove t he out er handl e
hol der (B) f r om t he out er handl e base (C).
C
7. Pull back t he out er handl e ( A) , and out as shown to
r emove it f r om t he door .
8. Rel ease t he hooks (A, B), t hen r emove t he out er
handl e front seal (C) and t he out er handl e rear seal
(D).
D B
(cont' d)
20-43
Boon
Rear Door Outer Handle Replacement (cont' d)
3. Remove t he out er handl e base (A).
-1. Rel ease t he rod f ast ener ( B ) .
-2. Di sc onnec t t he out er handl e rod (C) wi t h a cl i p
r emover ,
- 3. Loosen t he nut.
-4. Rel ease t he hook (D), and sl i de t he out er handl e
base f or war d to r el ease t he spec i al bolt ( E) f r om t he
d o o r .
jsvener Location
< i : Nut, 1
x 1.0 mm
N-m
.5 kgf -m,
ibfft)
10. Remove t he rod f ast ener (A) f rom t he out er handl e
base (B ) , t hen r epl ace it wi th a new one.
11. Inst al l t he handl e in t he r ever se or der of r emoval , and
Rei nst al l t he out er handl e hol der bef ore i nst al l i ng
t he out er handl e cover .
Make sur e that t he power door lock act uat or
connect or i s pl ugged in pr oper l y, and that t he out er
handl e rod i s connect ed sec ur el y.
Make sur e t he door l ocks operat e properl y.
Make sur e t he door handl e wor ks properl y.
Push t he hooks and the cli p into pl ace sec ur el y.
20-44
Rear Door Latch Replacement
4-door
1. Remove the door panel and t he i nner handl e (see
page 20-38).
2. Remove t he pl ast i c c over as needed (see st ep 3 on
page 20-42).
3. Det ach t he rod f ast ener , and di sconnect t he out er
handl e rod f r om t he out er handl e base (see st ep 9 on
page 20-44).
4. Det ach t he cabl e cl i p (A), and r emove t he s c r ews
(B, C) secur i ng t he lat ch (D), t hen r emove l at ch
t hr ough t he hol e in t he door. Take car e not to bend t he
out er handl e rod (E), t he latch cabl e (F), or t he i nner
handl e cabl e (G).
F astener Locations
B : S c r ew, 3 C : S c r ew, 1
6x 1.0 mm
6 N-m
(0.6 kgf -m,
4 Ibf-ft)
F A
x 1.0 mm
6 N-m
5. Remove t he out si de sponge seal (A), and r emove t he
sc r ew, t hen r emove t he latch prot ect or (B) by
r el easi ng t he hook (C), and r emove t he i nsi de sponge
seal (D) f rom t he l at ch.
: S c r ew, 1
A
Replace.
6. Di sconnect t he latch cabl e (A) and t he i nner handl e
cabl e (B) f r om t he latch (C), and r emove t he i nsi de
sponge seal s (D, E).
E
Replace.
Replace.
(cont' d)
20-45
Doors
Rear Door Latch Replacement (cont'd)
7. Install t he lat ch in t he r ever se or der of r emoval , and
note t hese i t ems;
wi t h a new one.
Bef ore rei nst al l i ng t he c abl es to t he l at ch (A), c l ean
t he latch sur f ace wher e t he sponge seal s (B, C) wi l l
be at t ached wi t h i sopr opyl al c ohol , and at t ach t he
sponge seal s to t he l at ch as s hown.
After rei nst al l i ng t he lat ch c abl e (D) and t he i nner
handl e cabl e (E) to t he l at ch, at t ach t he sponge seal
(F) to t he cabl e connect i ng ar eas on t he l at ch as
shown.
Bef ore r ei nst al l i ng t he lat ch prot ect or (G), r epl ace
t he i nsi de sponge seal (H) and t he out si de sponge
seal (I) wi t h new ones:
- Sc r ape off t he ol d sponge s eal s f r om t he
prot ect or, and c l ean t he prot ect or sur f ac es wi t h
- At t ach t he i nsi de sponge seal to t he i nsi de f ace of
t he prot ect or as s hown.
- Af t er rei nst al l i ng t he latch prot ect or to t he l at ch,
at t ach t he out si de sponge seal to t he prot ect or
and t he latch as shown.
Push t he cl i p and t he hook i nto pl ace sec ur el y.
Make sur e t he act uat or connect or i s pl ugged i n
pr oper l y, and t he out er handl e rod i s c onnec t ed
sec ur el y.
Make sur e t he door l ocks and opens pr oper l y.
pl ast i c cover on t he door i s i nst al l ed pr oper l y .
B F
Replace. Replace.
20-46
Rear Door Glass and Regulator Replacement
4-door
(A), and det ach t he har ness cl i ps (B). Remove t he plug
c aps (C).
3. Pass t he wi r e har ness (D) t hr ough t he hol e (E) i n t he
pl ast i c c over (F), t hen r emove t he pl ast i c c over .
4. Lower t he gl ass (A) unti l you c an see t he bol t s, t hen
r emove t hem. Rel ease t he gl ass f r om t he hol der (B),
t hen r emove t he gl ass f r om t he regul at or (C), and
car ef ul l y l ower t he gl ass. Take c ar e not t o dr op t he
gl ass i nsi de t he door .
F astener L oc at i ons
^ : Bol t , 2
6x 1.0 mm
9.8 N-m (1.0 k g f m , 7.2 I bf f t)
(cont ' d)
20-47
Poor s
Rear Door Glass and Regulator Replacement (cont'd)
5. Remove t he bolt (A) f r om t he r ear l ower c hannel (B).
Pull away t he door weat her st r i p (C) as needed, and
r emove t he sc r ew (D).
Fast ener Locations
A : Bolt, 1 D : Screw, 1
8N- i
(.8 kgf-m, S ibf-ft)
6. Pull away t he glass run channel (A) as needed. Pull t he
rear lower channel (B) forward f rom t he quarter glass
seal ( C) , then release t he upper hook (D) from t he
door. Remove the rear lower channel from the door
glass (E), then pull up the channel to remove it.
7. Remove the rear lower channel (A) from the glass run
channel (B).
20-48
8. Car ef ul l y r emove t he gl ass (A) out t hr ough t he
wi ndow sl ot . Take car e not to drop t he gl ass i nsi de t he
door,
9. Remove t he quart er gl ass (A). Take c ar e not to
damage t he door gl ass out er weat her st r i p (B).
10. Di sconnect t he c onnec t or (A) f rom t he regul at or (B).
C & : B ol t 4 D : B olt, 1
6x 1.0 mm
9.8 N-m
(1.0 kgf m,
7.2 I bfft)
6 x1.0 mm
9.8 N-m
(1.0 k g f m, 7.2 Ibf f t )
11. Remove t he bol t s (C), and l oosen t he bolt (D), t hen
r emove t he regul at or t hr ough t he hol e i n t he door.
(c ont ' d)
20
m
49
Doors
Rear Door Glass and Regulator Replacement (cont'd)
12. Appl y mul t i pur pose gr ease to all t he sl i di ng sur f ac es
of t he regul at or (A) wher e s hown.
13. Inst al l t he gl ass and t he regul at or in t he r ever se or der
of r emoval , and not e t hese i t ems:
Rol l t he gl ass up and down to make sur e it moves
f r eel y wi t hout bi ndi ng.
Make sur e t hat t her e i s no c l ear anc e bet ween t he
gl ass and t he gl ass run c hannel when t he gl ass i s
c l osed.
Adj ust t he posi t i on of t he gl ass as nec essar y (see
page 20-56).
Make sur e t he power door l ocks oper at e properl y.
pr oper l y and seal ed ar ound its out si de per i met er to
Push t he cl i ps and t he hook into pl ace sec ur el y.
Test -dr i ve t he vehi c l e, and check f or wi nd noi se and
rat t l es.
20-50
Rear Door Sash Inner Trim Replacement
4-door
NOTE: Take c ar e not to scr at ch t he door.
2. Lower t he gl ass fully.
3. Remove t he door s as h i nner t r i m (A).
-1. Pull back t he out si de edge of t he t ri m to r el ease t he
rear hook (B) f rom t he door.
r el ease t he hooks or t he hook st r i ps (C) f r om t he
door gl ass openi ng f l ange at t he quart er gl ass ar ea
and t he roof ar ea of t he door s as h .
-3. Rel ease t he hook (D) f r om t he gl ass run c hannel (E)
at t he front cor ner of t he door s as h .
r el ease t he hooks or hook st r i p (F) f r om t he door
gl ass openi ng f l ange at t he B-pi llar ar ea of t he door
s as h .
-5. Rel ease t he front hook (G) f r om t he door.
Japan-pr oduc ed model s
USA-pr oduc ed model s
E
push t he hooks or t he hook st r i ps into pl ace sec ur el y.
Doors
Rear Door Sash Outer Trim Replacement
4-door
NOTE: Take c ar e not to sc r at c h t he door.
1. Remove t he door out er mol di ng (see page 20-54).
2. Pull up t he door s as h out er t ri m (A) to r el ease t he t r i m
f r om t he c l i ps, and r el ease t he t ri m f r om bet ween t he
door gl ass out er weat her st r i p (B) and t he door , t hen
r emove t he t r i m. Take c ar e not to damage t he door
gl ass out er weat her st r i p.
F astener Locations
D>: Cl i p, 2
3. If t he ol d door s as h out er t ri m wi l l be r ei nst al l ed, and
t he cl i ps ar e damaged or st r ess-whi t ened, r epl ace
4. If t he door s as h out er t ri m (A) wi l l be r epl ac ed, or t he
cl i ps (B) ar e r emoved f r om t he door , i nser t t he t ri m
door , and i nst al l t he t ri m by pushi ng on t he cl i p ar eas
unti l t he cl i ps snap i nto pl ace.
5. If t he c l i ps (A) ar e not r emoved f r om t he door , i nst al l
t he door s as h out er t ri m (B) by i nsert i ng it to t he cl i ps
and bet ween t he door gl ass weat her st r i p (C) and t he
door.
6. Rei nst al l t he door out er mol di ng (see page 20-54).
20-52
Rear Door Glass Outer Weatherstrip Replacement
4-door
NOTE:
Take c ar e not to scr at ch t he door.
1. Remove t hese i t ems:
Door panel { see page 20-38)
Pl ast i c c over , as needed (see st ep 3 on page 20-42)
2. Remove t he s c r ews f r om t he front and r ear edges of
t he door .
Fastener Locations
. Screw, 2
3. Fr om t he Insi de of t he door , sl i de t he c l i ps (A) of t he
door gl ass out er weat her st r i p (B) t o r el ease t he hooks
(C) f r om t he f l anges (D) of t he door.
posi t i on) posi t i on)
4. Pul l up t he door gl ass out er weat her st r i p (A) whi l e
passi ng t he f ront and r ear edges of t he weat her st r i p
over t he door s as h out er t r i m (B) and t he door out er
mol di ng (C), t hen r emove t he weat her st r i p.
A
5. Bef or e i nst al l i ng t he door gl ass out er weat her st r i p,
sl i de t he cl i ps t o t he r el eased posi t i on as i n st ep 3.
6. Inst al l t he door gl ass out er weat her st r i p, and sl i de t he
c l i ps sec ur el y on t o t he f l anges.
7. Rei nst al l all r emai ni ng r emoved part s and note t hese
i t ems:
seal out wat er .
20-53
Doors
Rear Door Outer Molding Replacement
Pr ogr am; cal l 888-424-6857
4-door
N O T E :
If you r emove t he door out er mol di ng, r epl ace it wi t h a
new one bec ause it wi l l bend dur i ng r emoval .
Take c ar e not to sc r at c h t he door .
Use t he appropri at e t ool f r om t he K TC t ri m t ool set to
1. Det ach t he cl i ps (A) wi t h a cl i p r emover , t hen pull back
r o m n \ / o
th
(C, D).
F astener Locations
A p>: Clip, 3 C : Screw, 1 D : Screw, 2
2. Pul l out t he upper edge of t he door out er mol di ng (A)
f r om t he edge of t he s as h , and cut t he doubl e-si ded
adhesi ve t ape (B) wi t h a utility kni f e, t hen r emove t he
mol di ng f rom t he s as h , and r emove t he mol di ng f r om
door.
A
Replace.
A
Replace.
3. Sc r ape off r emai ni ng doubl e-si ded adhesi ve t ape
f r om t he s as h , t hen c l ean t he s as h sur f ace wi t h a shop
t owel dampened in i sopr opyl al c ohol .
4. Install t he door out er mol di ng in t he r ever se or der of
Insert t he rear edge of t he mol di ng bet ween t he
door gl ass out er weat her st r i p and t he door
properl y.
Push adhesi ve ar eas into pl ace sec ur el y.
Make sur e the upper and l ower si des of t he mol di ng
are cat chi ng t he edges of t he s as h properl y.
Push t he cl i ps i nto pl ace sec ur el y.
20-54
Rear Door Weatherstrip Replacement
4-door
NOTE;
Take c ar e not to scr at ch t he door.
Take c ar e not to damage t he front upper c or ner cl i p
(black) and t he r ear upper cor ner cl i ps (bl ack) bec ause
t hey ar e not .avai l abl e separ at el y.
Use a cl i p r emover to r emove t he c l i ps.
1 Remove t he door c hec ker mount i ng bolt (A) at t he
B-pi llar.
A : Bol t , 1 B > : Cl i p, 14 C > : C l i p , 4
(Lef t : Yel l ow) (Gr ay)
(Ri ght : Gr een)
D > : Cl i p, 3
(Bl ack)
8x 1 25 mm
29 N-m
(3.0 k g f m, 22 Ibf f t )
2. Det ach t he c l i ps (B, C, D), and r el ease t he door
weat her st r i p (E) f r om t he hol der (F) of t he door s as h ,
t hen r emove t he weat her st r i p.
3. Inst al l t he weat her st r i p i n t he r ever se or der of
e Push t he cl i ps i nto pl ace sec ur el y.
Make sur e t he door weat her st r i p i s i nst al l ed in t he
hol der sec ur el y.
o Appl y medi um st rengt h l i qui d t hr ead lock t o t he
door c hec ker mount i ng bolt bef ore i nst al l at i on.
20-55
Doors
Door Glass Adjustment
NOTE: Chec k t he door weat her st r i p and t he gl ass r un
c hannel f or damage or det er i or at i on, and r epl ace t hem if
nec essar y.
1. Pl ace t he vehi c l e on a f i r m, l evel sur f ac e when
adj ust i ng t he door gl ass.
Door panel :
- 4-door f ront door (see page 20-17)
- 4-door r ear door (see page 20-38)
Pl ast i c c over : .
- Fr ont door (see st ep 3 on page 20-21)
- Rear door (see st ep 3 on page 20-42)
3. Car ef ul l y l ower t he gl ass (A) unti l you c an s ee t he
nourtti ng bolts (B), t hen l oosen t hem.
2-door
B
6x 1.0 mm
9.8 N-m (1.0 kgi-m, 7 2 Ibf-ft)
4- d o o r f r o nt
B
6x 1.0 mm
9.8 N-m (1.0 kgf-m, 7.2 Ibf-ft)
4. Push t he gl ass agai nst t he gl ass run c hannel (C), t hen
t i ght en t he gl ass mount i ng bol t s.
5. Check that t he gl ass moves smoot hl y.
20-56
6. Rai se t he gl ass f ul l y, and check f or gaps. Al so make
sur e that t he gl ass (A) cont act s t he gl ass run c hannel
(B) evenl y.
B
7. At t ach t he pl ast i c cover maki ng sur e it i s seal ed
ar ound its out si de peri met er to seal out wat er .
8. Rei nst al l t he door panel :
2-door (see page 20-12).
4-door f ront door (see page 20-17).
4-door rear door (see page 20-38).
9. Chec k f or wat er l eaks. Run wat er over t he roof and on
t he seal i ng ar ea as s hown, and not e t hese i t ems:
Us e a 12 mm (1/2 i n) di amet er hose (A).
Adj ust t he rate of wat er f l ow as shown (B).
Do not use a nozzl e.
Hol d t he hose about 300 mm (12 i n) away f r om t he
door (C).
20-57
Doors
Door Position Adjustment
NOTE: Check f or a f l ush fit wi t h t he body, t hen c hec k f or
equal gaps bet ween t he f ront , r ear , and bot t om door
edges and t he body. Check that t he door and body edges
ar e par al l el .
1. Pl ace t he vehi c l e on a f i r m, l evel sur f ace when
adj ust i ng t he door s.
2. Adj ust at t he hi nges (A):
Pad a f l oor j ack (B) wi t h shop t owel s (C), t hen us e
t he j ack to suppor t t he door whi l e adj ust i ng it.
On t he f ront door : Remove t he front i nner f ender
(see page 20-290). Loosen t he hi nge mount i ng bol t s
(D) sl i ght l y, and move t he door backwar d or
f or war d, up or down as nec essar y to equal i ze t he
gaps.
On t he r ear door : Loosen t he hi nge mount i ng bol t s
(E) sl i ght l y, and move t he door backwar d or
f or war d, up or down as nec essar y to equal i ze t he
gaps.
2-door
8x 1.25 mm F
29 N-m 8 x 1.25 mm
(3.0 kgf -m, 29 N-m
22 Ibf f t ) (3 0 k g f m, 22 Ibf f t )
4-door f ront
8x 1. 25 mm F
29 N-m 8 x 1.25 mm
(3.0 k g f m, 29 N-m
22 Ibf f t ) (3.0 k g f m, 22 Ibf f t )
20-58
4-door r ear
8 x 1.25 mm
29 N-m (3.0 k g f m, 22 Ibf f t )
3. If nec essar y, r epl ace t he door mount i ng bol t s wi t h t he
adj ust i ng bol t s made speci f i cal l y f or door adj ust ment ,
t hen adj ust at t he door: Loosen t he door mount i ng
bol t s (F) sl i ght l y, and move t he door up or down as
nec essar y to equal i ze t he gaps, and move it in or out
unti l i s not f l ush wi t h t he body.
NOTE: Ref er to t he Part s Cat al og if you need use an
adj ust i ng bolt.
4. Chec k t hat t he door and t he body edges are par al l el . If
nec essar y, adj ust t he door c ushi ons (A) to make t he
r ear of t he door s f l ush wi t h t he body.
5. Appl y t ouch-up pai nt to t he hi nge mount i ng bol t s, and
ar ound t he hi nges.
6. Check f or wat er l eaks (see st ep 9 on page 20-57).
20-59
Doors
Door Striker Adjustment
Make sur e t he door l at ches sec ur el y wi t hout sl ammi ng
it. If nec essar y, adj ust t he st ri ker (A): The st ri ker nut s ar e
f i xed, but t he st ri ker can be adj ust ed sl i ght l y up or down,
and in or out .
1. Loosen t he s c r ews (B).
8 x 1.25 mm /
18 N-m (1.8 k g f m , 13 Ibf-ft)
2. Wr ap t he st ri ker wi t h a shop t owel , t hen adj ust t he
st ri ker by t appi ng it wi t h a pl ast i c hammer (C). Do not
t ap t he st ri ker t oo har d.
3. Li ght l y t i ght en t he s c r ews .
4. Hol d t he out er handl e out , and push t he door agai nst
t he body to be sur e t he st ri ker al l ows a f l ush fi t. If t he
door l at ches pr oper l y, t i ght en t he sc r ews to t he
speci f i ed t or que and r echeck.
A
20-60
Mi rrors
TWEETER COVER
Wi t hout aut omat i c di mmi ng mi r r or Wi t h aut omat i c di mmi ng mi r r or
REARVI EW MIRROR
20-61
Mi rrors
Power Mirror Replacement
NOTE: Take car e not t o sc r at c h t he door.
1. Lower t he door gl ass f ul l y.
2. Wi t h your hand, car ef ul l y pull out t he t op edge of t he
t weet er c over (A) to r el ease t he upper hooks (B) and
det ach t he cl i p. Remove t he c over by lifting it upwar d
to r el ease t he bot t om hooks (C). Di sc onnec t t he
t weet er connect or (D).
E>: Cl i p, 1
(Gr ay)
5. Whi l e hol di ng t he power mi rror (A), squeeze t he
ret ai ni ng t abs on t he connect or cl i p (B), t hen push out
to r emove t he power mi rror.
6. Inst al l t he mi rror in t he r ever se or der of r emoval , and
Make sur e t he connect or s ar e pl ugged i n properl y.
wi t h a new one.
Push t he cl i p and t he hooks on t he c over into pl ace
sec ur el y.
3. Di sc onnec t t he power mi r r or c onnec t or (A).
(f> : Nut , 3
4. Whi l e hol di ng t he power mi r r or , r emove t he nut s
sec ur i ng t he mi rror.
20-62
Mirror Holder Replacement
NOTE:
prot ect i ve t ape t o prevent damage.
1. Car ef ul l y push on t he t op edge of t he mi rror hol der (A)
by hand.
2. Put a shop t owel i n t he openi ng bet ween t he bottom
edge of t he mi rror hol der and t he mi rror housi ng (B)
t o pr event sc r at c hes, i nsert a flat-ti p sc r ewdr i ver to
t he gui de not ches (C) of t he mi rror hol der , and r el ease
t he bottom hooks (D).
3. Appl y heat wi t h a heat gun to t he gap bet ween t he
mi r r or hol der (A) and t he mi rror housi ng (B). Car ef ul l y
pull out t he bot t om edge of t he mi r r or hol der to
separ at e t he adhesi ve (C), and t hen r el ease the si de
hooks (D).
NOTE* Do not heat t he pl ast i c part s t oo much or you
may damage t hem.
4, Separ at e t he mi rror hol der f rom t he act uat or (E) by
r el easi ng t he hooks (F). if equi pped, di sconnect t he
mi r r or def ogger c onnec t or s (G).
(cont' d)
20-63
Mi rrors
Mirror Holder Replacement (cont'd)
5. Bef ore r ei nst al l i ng t he mi rror hol der to t he i nner
hol der act uat or (A) on t he act uat or, check t he act uat or
r ods (B) and t he act uat or boot s (C).
NOTE: Make sur e eac h act uat or rod i s i nser t ed i nto
t he act uat or sec ur el y, and eac h act uat or boot i s f ul l y
seat ed on t he act uat or.
6. If equi pped, r econnect t he mi rror def ogger
c onnec t or s.
7. Reat t ach t he hooks of t he mi rror hol der to t he
act uat or , t hen posi t i on t he mi rror hol der on t he
act uat or. Car ef ul l y push on t he si de hooks of t he
mi r r or hol der unti l t he mi rror hol der l ocks i nto pl ace.
8. Chec k t he act uat or oper at i on.
Mirror Housing Cover Repl acement
1. Remove t he mi r r or hol der (see page 20-63).
2. Fr om t he mi r r or hol der openi ng, r el ease t he hooks (A)
of t he mi r r or housi ng c over (B).
B
3. Rel ease t he hooks (A), t hen r emove t he mi rror
housi ng c over (B).
4. Install t he mi rror housi ng cover i n t he r ever se order of
r emoval , and push t he hooks into pl ace sec ur el y.
20-64
L.r\...L..
Rear vi ew Mirror Replacement
Wi t hout Aut omat i c Di mmi ng Mi rror
1. Tur n t he r ear vi ew mi rror base (A) 90 .
A
2. Sl i de t he r ear vi ew mi rror base (A) down t owar d t he
bottom of t he wi ndshi el d to det ach it f r om t he spr i ng
(B) in t he mount (C).
B
3. If nec essar y, r emove the spr i ng f r om t he mount .
4. Install t he r ear vi ew mi rror in t he r ever se or der of
r emoval .
Wi t h Aut omat i c Di mmi ng Mi rror
1. Pry out t he r ear vi ew mi rror har ness c over (A) to
r el ease t he hooks (B), t hen sl i de t he c over r ear war d,
and r emove t he c over by r el easi ng t he hooks (C) of
t he r ear vi ew mi r r or har ness c over base (D).
B
2. Di sconnect t he r ear vi ew mi rror connect or (A).
(cont' d)
2 0 -65
Mi rrors
Rearview Mirror Replacement (cont'd)
3. L oosen t he TORX s c r ew wi t h a TORX T20 bi t, t hen
sl i de t he r ear vi ew mi r r or (A) r ear war d and off t he
mount (B).
: TORX S c r ew, 1
A
4. i nst al l t he mi rror in t he r ever se or der of r emoval , and
Bef or e i nst al l i ng t he mi r r or , r emove t he TORX
sc r ew, and appl y medi um st rengt h l i qui d t hr ead
lock t o it.
Make sur e t he c onnec t or i s pl ugged i n pr oper l y.
Push t he hooks i nto pl ace sec ur el y.
20-66
Gl ass
Fr ont
WINDSHIEL D UPPER S E A L
WINDSHIEL D MOL DING
UPPER CLIP, 2
(Sel f -adhesi ve-t ype,
glass side)
REAR VI EW MIRROR
HARNES S COVER B A S E
(4-door wi t h Aut o
Di mmi ng Rear vi ew Mi rror)
RUBBER DAW A
WINDSHIEL D
RUBBER DAM B
2-door Rear
FAS TENER, 2
(Sel f -adhesi ve-t ype, gl ass si de)
(Requi r ed f or r epl ac ement or r ei nst al l at i on)
UPPER CL I P, 2
(Sel f -adhesi ve-t ype, gl ass si de)
UPPER RUBBER DAM
FAS TENER, 2
(Sel f -adhesi ve-t ype, body si de)
(Requi r ed f or r epl ac ement or
r ei nst al l at i on)
L OWER RUBBER DAM
S I DE RUBBER DAM, 2
REAR WINDOW
Replacement, page 20-75,
(c ont ' d)
20-67
Gl ass
4-door Rear
Replacement, page 20-75.
2- d o o r
( S ei f - ad h es i v e- t y p e, glass side) Replacement, page 20-288
20-68
Windshield Replacement
NOTE:
Wear eye prot ect i on whi l e cutti ng gl ass adhesi ve wi t h
a pi ano wi r e.
Us e seat c over s to avoi d damagi ng any sur f ac es.
Gl as s adhesi ve c an be effi ci ently cut wi t h a
c ommer c i al l y avai l abl e auto gl ass t ool . See t he t ool
manuf act ur er ' s i nst r uct i ons f or det ai l s.
Cowl c over s (see page 20-278)
Rear vi ew mi rror
- Wi t hout aut omat i c di mmi ng mi rror (see page
20-65)
- Wi t h aut omat i c di mmi ng mi rror (see page 20-65)
A-pi l l ar t r i m, both si des (see page 20-110)
Roof mol di ng, both si des (see page 20-280)
2. Remove t he wi ndshi el d mol di ng (A) f r om the upper
edge of t he wi ndshi el d (B). If nec essar y, cut t he
wi ndshi el d mol di ng wi t h a utility kni fe.
3. If t he ol d wi ndshi el d wi l l be r ei nst al l ed, make
al i gnment mar ks ac r oss t he gl ass and t he body wi t h a
gr ease penci l .
4. Pull down t he front ar ea of t he headl i ner (see page
20-140). Take car e not to bend t he headl i ner
exc essi vel y, or you may c r ease or break it.
5. Appl y prot ect i ve t ape al ong t he edge of t he
dashboar d and t he body. Make a hol e wi t h an awl
t hr ough t he r ubber dam and t he adhesi ve f r om i nsi de
t he vehi c l e at a cor ner of t he wi ndshi el d. Push a pi ece
of pi ano wi r e t hr ough t he hol e, and wr ap eac h end
ar ound a pi ece of wood.
6. Wi t h a hel per on t he out si de, pull t he pi ano wi r e (A)
back and forth i n a sawi ng mot i on. Hol d t he pi ano
wi r e as c l ose to t he wi ndshi el d (B) as possi bl e to
pr event damage to t he body and t he dashboar d.
Car ef ul l y cut t hr ough t he rubber dam and t he
adhesi ve (C) ar ound t he enti re wi ndshi el d.
Cut t i ng posi t i ons
7. Car ef ul l y r emove t he wi ndshi el d.
(cont ' d)
20-69
Gl ass
Windshield Replacement (cont'd)
8. Sc r ape smoot h t he ol d adhesi ve wi t h a kni fe unti l
t her e i s a t hi ckness of about 2 mm (0.08 in) on t he
bondi ng sur f ace ar ound t he ent i re wi ndshi el d
openi ng f l ange:
Do not sc r ape down to t he pai nt ed sur f ace of t he
body; damaged pai nt wi l l i nt erf ere wi t h proper
bondi ng.
Remove t he r ubber dams f r om t he body.
9. Cl ean t he body bondi ng sur f ace wi t h a shop t owel
dampened in i sopr opyl al cohol . Af t er c l eani ng, keep
oi l , gr ease, and wat er f r om getti ng on t he c l ean
sur f ac e.
10. If you ar e rei nst al l i ng t he ol d wi ndshi el d, use a putty
kni fe to sc r ape off ol d adhesi ve, upper c l i ps, and
r ubber dams f r om t he wi ndshi el d. Cl ean t he bondi ng
sur f ac es on t he i nsi de f ace and t he edge of t he
wi ndshi el d wi t h i sopr opyl al c ohol . Make sur e t he
bondi ng sur f ace i s kept f ree of wat er , oi l , and gr ease.
11. Wi t h aut omat i c di mmi ng r ear vi ew mi rror: If t he
wi ndshi el d wi l l be r epl aced wi t h a new one, at t ach t he
new r ear vi ew mi r r or har ness c over base to t he i nsi de
f ace of t he wi ndshi el d (see page 20-74).
12. Appl y gl ass pr i mer to t he upper cl i ps mount i ng ar eas
on t he wi ndshi el d (B), and let it dry. Remove t he
adhesi ve backi ng and at t ach t he rubber dam A and
t he upper cl i ps (C) to t he i nsi de of t he wi ndshi el d as
s hown:
Make sur e t he rubber dams and t he upper cl i ps li ne
up wi t h t he al i gnment mar ks (D).
Wi t h t he pri nt ed dot s (E) on t he wi ndshi el d as a
gui de, at t ach rubber dam A to both bottom c or ner s
of t he wi ndshi el d.
Be sur e t he i ndex t abs (F) of t he upper cl i ps f ace t he
ri ght si de.
Be caref ul not to t ouch t he wi ndshi el d wher e t he
adhesi ve wi l l be appl i ed.
13.5 mm D
20-70
13. At t ach rubber dam B wi t h adhesi ve t ape t o t he Insi de
sur f ace of t he wi ndshi el d (A) as s hown, usi ng t he
edge of t he bl ack c er ami c -c oat ed ar ea (C) as a gui de.
Be sur e t he rubber dam l i nes up wi t h t he al i gnment
mar ks (D).
Be car ef ul not to t ouch t he wi ndshi el d wher e t he
14. At t ach t he wi ndshi el d mol di ng (A) wi t h adhesi ve t ape
(B) to t he upper edge of t he wi ndshi el d (C). Be car ef ul
not to t ouch t he wi ndshi el d wher e t he adhesi ve wi l l
be appl i ed.
2- d o o r
(cont' d)
20-71
Gl ass
15. At t ach t he wi ndshi el d upper seal (A) wi t h adhesi ve
t ape to t he i nsi de sur f ac e of t he wi ndshi el d mol di ng
(B) as s hown.
16. If you ar e i nst al l i ng a new wi ndshi el d, set t he
wi ndshi el d in t he openi ng, and cent er it. Make
al i gnment mar ks (A) ac r oss t he wi ndshi el d and t he
body wi t h a gr ease penci l at t he f our poi nt s s hown.
Make sur e t he pi ns (B) of both upper c l i ps (C) cont act
wi t h t he edge of t he body hol es. Be car ef ul not to
t ouch t he wi ndshi el d wher e t he adhesi ve wi l l be
appl i ed.
17. Remove t he wi ndshi el d.
18. Appl y a li ght coat of gl ass pr i mer to t he wi ndshi el d (A)
al ong t he edge of t he wi ndshi el d mol di ng (B) and t he
r ubber dams (C) as s hown, t hen li ghtly wi pe it off wi t h
gauze or c heesec l ot h:
Appl y gl ass pr i mer to t he mol di ng.
Do not appl y body pr i mer t o t he wi ndshi el d, and do
- not mi x up t he body pr i mer appl i cat or s and t he
gl ass pr i mer appl i cat or s.
Never t ouch t he pr i med sur f ac es wi t h your hands. If
you do, adhesi ve may not bond to t he wi ndshi el d
pr oper l y, c ausi ng a leak after t he wi ndshi el d i s
i nst al l ed.
Keep wat er , dust , and abr asi ve mat er i al s away f r om
t he pr i med sur f ac es.
'////////, : Apply glass pr i mer her e.
20-72
19. Car ef ul l y appl y a li ght coat of body pr i mer to any
exposed pai nt or met al ar ound t he f l ange wher e new
adhesi ve wi l l be appl i ed. Let t he body pr i mer dry for
at l east 10 mi nut es:
Do not appl y body pri mer to any r emai ni ng ori gi nal
adhesi ve on t he f l ange.
Be car ef ul not to mi x up t he body and t he gl ass
pri mer sponge appl i cat or s.
Never t ouch t he pr i med sur f ac es wi t h your hands.
Cover on t he dashboar d bef ore appl yi ng t he
pri mer.
1
////////* Appl y body pr i mer t o exposed pai nt as s h o wn.
20 mm
20. Cut a " V" i n t he end of t he nozzle (A) on t he adhesi ve
cart ri dge as shown.
21. Put t he car t r i dge in a caul ki ng gun, and run a
cont i nuous bead of t he adhesi ve (A) ar ound t he
wi ndshi el d (B) al ong t he edge of t he wi ndshi el d
mol di ng (C) and t he rubber dams (D) as s hown. Appl y
adhesi ve wi t hi n 30 mi nut es after appl yi ng t he gl ass
pr i mer . Make a sl i ght l y t hi cker bead at eac h cor ner .
2 mm (0.08 i n)
13 mm TJ J ^ r '
A
(0.51 i n)
(cont' d)
20-73
Gl ass
22. Hol d t he wi ndshi el d wi t h suct i on c ups over t he
openi ng, al i gn it wi t h t he al i gnment mar ks made i n
st ep 16, and set it down on adhesi ve. Li ght l y push on
t he wi ndshi el d unti l its edges ar e f ul l y seat ed on
adhesi ve all t he way ar ound.
NOTE: Do not open or c l ose any of t he door s for about
an hour unti l adhesi ve i s dry.
23. Remove t he ex c es s adhesi ve wi t h a putty knife or a
shop t owel dampened wi t h i sopr opyl al cohol .
24. Wai t at l east an hour for t he adhesi ve to dr y, t hen
spr ay wat er over t he wi ndshi el d and c hec k f or l eaks.
Mark l eaki ng ar eas, and let t he wi ndshi el d dry, t hen
seal wi t h seal ant . Let t he vehi c l e st and f or at l east 4
hour s after wi ndshi el d i nst al l at i on. If t he vehi c l e has
to b * ? \*/:th!r! t he f i r c t * h c j r c , it r r / j c t be d r i v c r i
sl owl y.
25. Rei nst al l all r emai ni ng r emoved par t s.
NOTE: Advi se t he c ust omer not to do t he f ol l owi ng
t hi ngs f or 2 to 3 days:
Sl am t he door s wi t h all t he wi ndows rol l ed up.
Twi st t he body exc essi vel y (such as when goi ng i n
and out of dr i veways at an angl e or dr i vi ng over
r ough, uneven r oads).
Rearview Mirror Harness Cover
Base Replacement
4-door wi t h Aut omat i c Di mmi ng Rear vi ew
Mi rror
NOTE:
t Put on gl oves t o protect your hands.
Wear eye prot ect i on whi l e cut t i ng t he gl ass adhesi ve
wi t h pi ano wi r e.
Rear vi ew mi rror (see page 20-65)
Headl i ner (see page 20-140)
2. Car ef ul l y cut t hr ough adhesi ve t ape under t he
r ear vi ew mi r r or har ness c over base usi ng t he pi ano
wi r e, t hen r emove t he base.
3. Sc r ape off all of t he ol d adhesi ve t ape wi t h a putty
kni fe f r om t he wi ndshi el d. Clears t he bondi ng ci ;rfc;cc
on t he i nsi de f ace of t he wi ndshi el d wi t h i sopr opyl
al c ohol . Make sur e t he bondi ng sur f ace i s kept f r ee of
wat er , oi l and gr ease.
4. If you ar e r ei nst al l i ng t he ol d r ear vi ew mi rror har ness
c over base (A), sc r ape off all of ol d adhesi ve t ape f r om
t he base wi t h a putty kni fe. Cl ean t he base sur f ace
wi t h i sopr opyl al cohol . Appl y pr i mer to t he base as
s hown, and at t ach adhesi ve t ape (B) t o t he base.
Adhesi ve t ape: Thi c kness 0.8 mm (0.031 i n)
Wi dt h 7 mm (0.28 i n)
'///////// ' Appl y gl ass pr i mer her e.
(0.04 i n)
20-74
Rear Window Replacement
5. Bef ore i nst al l i ng t he r ear vi ew mi rror har ness cover
base, appl y gl ass pr i mer to t he ar ea wher e t he
har ness cover base wi l l be appl i ed to t he i nsi de f ace
of t he wi ndshi el d. Let t he pr i mer dry at l east
10 mi nut es, t hen attach t he mi rror to t he wi ndshi el d
wi t hi n 12 hour s.
/, : Appl y gl ass pr i mer her e.
6. At t ach t he r ear vi ew mi rror har ness c over base (A)
wi t h adhesi ve t ape (B) to t he i nsi de f ac e of t he
wi ndshi el d as s hown, t hen pr ess adhesi ve ar eas into
pl ace sec ur el y.
(0.24 i n)
NOTE:
Wear eye protecti on whi l e cutti ng t he gl ass adhesi ve
wi t h a pi ano wi r e.
Us e seat c over s to avoi d damagi ng any sur f ac es.
Do not damage the rear wi ndow def ogger gri d l i nes,
t he wi ndow ant enna gri d l i nes, or t he t er mi nal s.
Tr unk lid
Rear shel f (see page 20-128)
2. Di sc onnec t t he wi ndow ant enna connect or s (A) and
t he rear wi ndow def ogger c onnec t or s (B). 4-door i s
s hown; 2-door i s si mi l ar .
. If t he ol d rear wi ndow wi l l be r ei nst al l ed, make
al i gnment mar ks ac r oss t he gl ass and t he body wi th a
gr ease penci l .
(cont' d)
20-75
Gl ass
Rear Window Replacement (cont'd)
4. Pull down t he r ear ar ea of t he headl i ner (A) by
det achi ng t he c l i ps. Take c ar e not to bend t he
headl i ner exc essi vel y, or you may c r ease or break i t
F astener Locations
> : Clip, 2
5. Appl y prot ect i ve t ape al ong t he i nsi de and out si de
edges of t he body. Make a hol e wi t h an awl t hr ough
t he adhesi ve f r om i nsi de t he vehi c l e at a cor ner of t he
r ear wi ndow. Push a pi ece of pi ano wi r e t hr ough t he
hol e, and wr ap eac h end ar ound a pi ece of wood.
6. Remove t he l ower rubber dam (A) f r om t he l ower
edge of t he r ear wi ndow (B). If nec essar y, cut t he
r ubber dam wi t h a utility kni fe. 4-door i s s hown;
"A
Replace.
7. Wi t h a hel per on t he out si de, pull t he pi ano wi r e (A)
back and forth i n a sawi ng mot i on. Hold t he pi ano
wi r e as c l ose t o t he r ear wi ndow (B) as possi bl e to
pr event damage to t he body, and car ef ul l y cut
t hr ough t he adhesi ve (C) ar ound t he ent i r e r ear
wi ndow. 4-door i s s hown; 2-door i s si mi l ar .
Cut t i ng posi t i ons - 2-door
C
20-76
Cut t i ng posi t i ons - 4-door
8. Car ef ul l y r emove t he rear wi ndow.
9. Sc r ape smoot h t he ol d adhesi ve wi t h a knife unti l
t here i s a t hi ckness of about 2 mm (0.08 in) on t he
bondi ng sur f ace ar ound the ent i re rear wi ndow
openi ng f l ange:
body; damaged pai nt wi ll i nt erf ere wi t h proper
bondi ng.
Remove t he f ast ener s f rom the body.
dampened in i sopr opyl al cohol . After c l eani ng, keep
oi l , gr ease, and wat er f rom getti ng on t he sur f ac e.
11. If you are rei nst al l i ng t he old wi ndshi el d, sc r ape off all
of old adhesi ve, t he f ast ener s, and t he rubber dams
f r om t he rear wi ndow wi th a putty kni fe. Cl ean t he
bondi ng sur f ac es on t he i nsi de f ac e and t he edge of
t he rear wi ndow wi t h i sopropyl al cohol . Make sur e
t he bondi ng sur f ac e i s kept f ree of wat er , oi l , and
gr ease.
12. Appl y gl ass pr i mer to t he edge of the rear wi ndow (A)
wher e t he l ower rubber dam (B) wi l l be at t ached as
s hown. At t ach t he l ower r ubber dam wi t h adhesi ve
t ape (C) to t he l ower edge of t he rear wi ndow:
Af t er i nst al l i ng t he rubber dam, cut t he ends (D) of
t he r ubber dam as s hown.
Be car ef ul not to t ouch t he wi ndshi el d wher e t he
4-door i s shown; 2-door i s si mi l ar .
V///////,: Apply glass primer here.
Replace
(c ont ' d)
20-77
GSass
13. Appl y gl ass pr i mer to t he upper cl i p mount i ng ar eas
on t he wi ndshi el d, and let it dry. At t ach t he upper
r ubber dam (A), t he si de r ubber dams (B), t he upper
c l i ps (C), and t he f ast ener s (D) wi t h t he adhesi ve t ape
t o t he i nsi de f ace of t he r ear wi ndow (E) as shown.
Fi rst at t ach t he upper rubber dam, t hen at t ach t he
si de rubber dams ar ound t he edge of t he rear
wi ndow. Be sur e t he top of t he si de r ubber dam
cont act s wi t h t he bottom of t he upper rubber dam.
If nec essar y, cut t he ex c es s r ubber dams .
Be sur e t he upper r ubber dam, t he si de r ubber
dams , t he upper c l i ps, and t he f ast ener s l i ne up wi t h
t he al i gnment mar ks (F). If nec essar y, cut t he ex c es s
r ubber dams.
Be sur e t he i ndex t abs (G) of t he left and ri ght cl i ps
f ace t he right si de. Be sur e t he i ndex t abs (G) on t he
cl i ps f ac es t he ri ght si de,
Be caref ul not to t ouch t he r ear wi ndow wher e t he
2-door
F A
4-door
20-78
14. At t ach t he f ast ener s (A) wi t h t he adhesi ve t ape to t he
r ear wi ndow openi ng f l ange (B) of t he body on both
si des.
2-door
30 mm
(1.2 in)
15. Set t he rear wi ndow in t he openi ng, and cent er it.
Make al i gnment mar ks (A) ac r oss t he r ear wi ndow
and t he body wi t h a gr ease penci l at t he f our poi nt s
s hown. Make sur e t he pi ns (B) of both upper cl i ps (C)
cont act wi t h t he edge of t he body hol es. Be car ef ul not
to t ouch t he rear wi ndow wher e t he adhesi ve wi l l be
appl i ed. 4-door i s s hown; 2-door i s si mi l ar .
16. Remove t he r ear wi ndow.
(cont' d)
20-79
Gl ass
17. Appl y a light coat of gl ass pr i mer to t he rear wi ndow
(A) al ong t he edge of t he rubber dams (B) as s hown,
t hen li ghtly wi pe it off wi t h gauze or c heesec l ot h:
Appl y t he gl ass pr i mer to t he cor ner ar eas of t he
rear wi ndow usi ng t he pri nt ed dot s (C) on t he r ear
wi ndow as a gui de.
Do not appl y body pri mer to t he rear wi ndow, and
do not mi x up t he body pr i mer appl i cat or s and t he
gl ass pri mer appl i cat or s.
you do, t he adhesi ve may not bond to t he r ear
wi ndow pr oper l y, c ausi ng a leak after t he rear
wi ndow i s i nst al l ed.
2-door
'////////, : Apply glass primer here.
4-door
'///////// "Apply glass primer here.
20-80
18. Car ef ul l y appl y a li ght coat of body pri mer to any
exposed pai nt or met al ar ound t he f l ange wher e t he
new adhesi ve wi l l be appl i ed. Let t he body pr i mer dry
f or at l east 10 mi nut es:
Do not appl y body pr i mer to any r emai ni ng ori gi nal
Be caref ul not to mi x up t he body pri mer appl i cat or s
and t he gl ass pr i mer appl i cat or s.
Never t ouch t he pr i med sur f ac es wi t h your hands.
2-door
W///// -Appl y body pr i mer t o any exposed pai nt as
s h o wn.
4-door
'////////, " Appl y body pr i mer t o any exposed pai nt as
s h o wn.
19. Cut a " V" i n t he end of t he nozzle (A) on t he adhesi ve
cart ri dge as s hown.
(cont' d)
20-81
Gl ass
Rear Wi ndow Repl acement (cont' d)
20. Put t he car t r i dge on a caul ki ng gun, and run a
cont i nuous bead of t he adhesi ve (A) to t he rear
wi ndow (B) al ong t he edge of t he rubber dams (C) as
shown:
Use t he pri nt ed dot s (D) as a gui de when you appl y
t he adhesi ve to t he c or ner s of t he rear wi ndow.
Appl y t he adhesi ve wi t hi n 30 mi nut es after
appl yi ng t he gl ass pr i mer . Make a sl i ght l y t hi cker
bead at eac h cor ner .
2-door
2 mm (0.08 i n)
13 mm
(0.51 i n)
8 mm (0.31 to*
2 mm
3 mm
(0.12 in)
2 mm
(0.08 i n)
4-door
2 mm (0.08 i n)
3 mm ~ F |
1.51 i n) T I
8 mm (0.31 i n)
3 mm
(0.12 i n)
2 mm
(0.08 i n)
21. Hold t he rear wi ndow wi t h suct i on c ups over t he
openi ng, al i gn it wi t h the al i gnment mar ks you made
in st ep 15, and set it down on adhesi ve. Li ght l y push
on t he r ear wi ndow unti l its edges ar e fully seat ed on
adhesi ve all t he way ar ound.
20-82
Quarter Gl ass Repl acement
NOTE; Do not open or c l ose any of t he door s for about
22. Remove t he exc ess adhesi ve wi t h a putty knife or a
shop t owel dampened i n i sopr opyl al c ohol .
23. Wai t at l east an hour f or t he adhesi ve t o dr y, t hen
spr ay wat er over t he rear wi ndow and c hec k for l eaks.
Mark t he l eaki ng ar eas, let t he rear wi ndow dr y, t hen
seal wi t h seal ant . Let t he vehi c l e st and f or at l east 4
hour s after rear wi ndow i nst al l at i on. If t he vehi cl e has
to be used wi t hi n t he fi rst 4 hour s, it must be dr i ven
sl owl y.
S l am t he door s wi t h all t he wi ndows rol l ed up.
Twi st t he body exc essi vel y (such as when goi ng i n
and out of dr i veways at an angl e or dri vi ng over
2-door
NOTE:
Wear eye protecti on when r emovi ng t he gl ass wi t h
pi ano wi r e.
Us e seat c over s t o avoi d damagi ng any sur f ac es.
The quart er gl ass cl i ps and t he mol di ng c l i ps wi l l need
r epl acement bec ause t hey wi l l be damage dur i ng
gl ass r emoval .
Rear si de t ri m panel (see page 20-127)
B-pillar upper trim (see page 20-114)
2. Remove t he front seal (A) f r om t he f ront edge of t he
quart er gl ass (B). If nec essar y, cut t he seal wi t h a
utility kni fe.
(cont ' d)
20-83
Gl ass
Quart er Gl ass Repl acement (cont' d)
3. Apply protective tape along the Inside and out si de.
edges of the body. From pillar side the vehicle, to cut
the front clips (A) with a utility knife (B) of the quarter
glass molding (C).
B A
B
4 Make ahole, wi t h an awl through adhesive from Inside
the vehi c l e at a front corner areaof the-quarter glass.
Push a piece of piano wire through the hole, and wrap
' eac h end ar ound a-pi ece of wood. ;
5. Wi t h a hel per on t he out si de, pull thepi ano wire (A)
backand forth i n a sawi ng mot i on. Hol d the pi ano
wi r e as c l ose to t he quart er glass (B) as possi bl e to
pr event damage to thebody, and car ef ul l y cut
t hr ough theadhesi ve (C) In thest rai ght areas and the
f ront c or ner s, but not t he rear cor ner (D).
A
Cutting positions
C
\ A
20-84
6. Fr om i nsi de t he vehi c l e, cut t hr ough t he adhesi ve (A)
of quart er gl ass rear cor ner and t he rear cl i p (B) wi t h a
utility knife (C).
7. Sc r ape smoot h t he ol d adhesi ve wi t h a knife unti l
t her e i s a t hi c kness of about 2 mm (0.08 i n) on t he
bondi ng sur f ace ar ound t he ent i re quart er gl ass
openi ng f l ange:
body; damaged pai nt wi l l i nt erf ere wi t h proper
bondi ng.
Remove t he cl i ps f r om t he body.
dampened in i sopr opyl al cohol . After c l eani ng, keep
oi l , gr ease, and wat er f r om getti ng on t he sur f ace.
9. Remove t he quart er gl ass mol di ng f r om t he quart er
gl ass. If t he ol d quart er gl ass mol di ng i s to be
r ei nst al l ed, r epl ace t he mol di ng cl i ps wi t h new ones.
10. If you ar e rei nst al l i ng t he ol d wi ndshi el d, to sc r ape of f
al l of t he ol d adhesi ve wi t h a putty knife and t he
damaged cl i ps f r om t he quar t er gl ass. Cl ean t he
bondi ng sur f ac es on t he i nsi de f ace and t he edge of
t he quar t er gl ass wi t h i sopr opyl al cohol . Make sur e
t he bondi ng sur f ace i s kept f r ee of wat er , oi l , and
gr ease.
11. At t ach t he front seal (A), t he upper cl i p (B), t he l ower
cl i p (C), and t he r ear cl i p (D) wi t h adhesi ve t ape to t he
i nsi de f ace of t he quar t er gl ass (E) as shown. Bef ore
i nst al l i ng t he front s eal , appl y pr i mer t o t he i nsi de f ace
of t he quart er gl ass:
Be caref ul not to t ouch t he quar t er gl ass wher e t he
Be sur e t o i nst al l t he upper cl i p and rear cl i p wi t h
t hei r i ndex t abs (F) downwar d.
Be sur e to i nst al l t he l ower cl i p wi t h i ts i ndex t ab (G)
upwar d.
' ///////, : Appl y gl as s pr i mer her e.
(cont ' d)
20-85
Gl ass
Quarter Glass Replacement (cont'd)
12. Install the quarter glass molding (A).
-1. Hol d t he mol di ng up on t he gl ass, and fit t he hooks
(B) of t he mol di ng to t he edge of t he gl ass r ear
cor ner f i rst .
-2. Fr om t he rear cor ner to t he f ront , hook t he l ower
c l i ps (C) and t he upper cl i ps (D) of t he mol di ng to
al ong t he edges of t he gl ass.
-3. Push t he mol di ng into pl ace sec ur el y.
NOTE:
Take c ar e not to bend or damage t he mol di ng.
Be car ef ul not to t ouch t he gl ass wher e t he
Be sur e t he f ront seal cont act s t he upper and
l ower ends of t he mol di ng.
B
B
13. Appl y a light coat of gl ass pr i mer al ong t he edge of
t he quart er gl ass (A) and t he f ront seal (B) as s hown,
t hen li ghtly wi pe it off wi t h gauze or c heesec l ot h:
Appl y t he gl ass pri mer to t he rear cor ner , upper
cor ner and l ower cor ner port i ons of t he quart er
gl ass usi ng t he pri nted dot s (C) on t he quart er gl ass
as a gui de.
Do not appl y body pr i mer to t he quart er gl ass, and
do not mi x up t he body pr i mer appl i cat or s and t he
gl ass pr i mer appl i cat or s.
you do, adhesi ve may not bond to t he quart er gl ass
pr oper l y, c ausi ng a leak after t he quart er gl ass i s
i nst al l ed.
'////////, : A p p l y glass pr i mer h er e.
4.5 mm
A
20-86
-I
14. Car ef ul l y appl y a li ght coat of body pr i mer to any
exposed pai nt or met al ar ound t he f l ange wher e new
adhesi ve wi l l be appl i ed. Let t he body pr i mer dry for
at l east 10 mi nut es:
Do not appl y body pr i mer to any r emai ni ng ol d
Be caref ul not to mi x up t he body and t he gl ass
pr i mer sponge appl i cat or s.
- Never t ouch t he pr i med sur f ac es wi t h your hands.
'////////, : Appl y body pr i mer t o any exposed pai nt as
s hown.
10 m m
(0.39 i n)
15. Cut a " V" in t he end of t he nozzle (A) on t he adhesi ve
cart ri dge as shown.
16. Put t he cart ri dge i n a caul ki ng gun, and run a
cont i nuous bead of t he adhesi ve (A) ar ound t he edge
of t he quart er gl ass (B) and al ong t he f ront seal (C) as
shown. Wi t h t he pri nt ed dot s on t he quar t er gl ass as a
gui de, appl y adhesi ve t o t he rear c or ner , upper cor ner
and t he l ower cor ner ar eas of t he quar t er gl ass. Appl y
adhesi ve wi t hi n 30 mi nut es after appl yi ng t he gl ass
pri mer. Make a sl i ght l y t hi cker bead at eac h cor ner .
2 mm (0.08 i n)
A
13 mm T ^- ^"
(0 51 i n) i l l
8 mm (0.31 i n)
6 5 m m A
(cont' d)
20-87
Gl ass
Quarter Glass Replacement (cont'd)
17. Hold t he quar t er gl ass (A) wi t h suct i on c ups (B) over
t he openi ng, al i gn it wi t h t he cl i ps (C), and set it down
on t he adhesi ve. Li ght l y push on t he quar t er gl ass
unti l its edges ar e f ul l y seat ed on t he adhesi ve all t he
way a r o und / .
NOTE; Do not open or c l ose any of t he door s f or about
18. Remove t he ex c es s adhesi ve wi t h a putty kni fe or a
shop t owel dampened wi t h i sopr opyl al c ohol .
19. Wai t at l east an hour f or t he adhesi ve t o dr y, t hen
spr ay wat er over t he quar t er gl ass and c hec k f or
l eaks. Mark t he l eaki ng ar eas, let t he quart er gl ass dr y,
t hen seal wi t h seal ant . Let t he vehi c l e st and f or at l east
4 hour s after quart er gl ass i nst al l at i on. If t he vehi c l e
has to be used wi t hi n t he f i rst 4 hour s, it must be
dr i ven sl owl y.
20. Rei nst al l all r emai ni ng r emoved part s.
Sl am t he door s wi t h all t he wi ndows rol l ed up.
Twi st t he body exc essi vel y (such as when goi ng in
and out of dr i veways at an angl e or dr i vi ng over
C
20-88
Moonroof
GLASS WEATHERSTRIP
WIND DEFL ECTOR
DRAIN CHANNEL
GLASS
Position Adjustment page 20-91
Closing F orce and Opening Drag
Check, page 20-102
BRACK ET COVER
S UNS HADE
S UNS HADE REAR HOOK
REAR S UNS HADE B A S E SL I DER
S UNS HADE S L I DER S PACER
FRONTS UNS HADE
B A S E S L I DER
CABL E TUBE
REAR BRACK ET
CABL E A S S E MB L Y
MOTOR
DRAIN CHANNEL S L I DER
REAR DRAIN TUBE
ifl*^ # Replacement page 20-97
REAR DRAIN VAL VE
FRONT DRAIN TUB E
FRAME
MOONROOF S UBHARNE S S
20-89
Moonr oof
Wat er l eaks f r om moonr oof 1. Chec k f or a cl ogged or det ached dr ai n t ube.
2. Chec k t he gl ass posi t i on adj ust ment (see page 20-91).
3. Chec k f or a def ect i ve or an i mpr oper l y i nst al l ed gl ass weat her st r i p or dr ai n
c hannel .
4. Chec k f or a gap bet ween t he dr ai n c hannel seal and t he roof panel .
Wi nd noi se f r om moonr oof 1. Chec k f or exc essi ve c l ear anc e bet ween t he gl ass weat her st r i p and t he roof
panel .
Mot or noi se f r om moonr oof 1. Chec k f or a l oose mot or.
2. Chec k f or a wor n gear or bear i ng.
3. Chec k f or a def or med cabl e assembl y.
4. Chec k f or di rt or debr i s.
Moonr oof gl ass does not move, but
mot or t ur ns
1. Chec k f or f orei gn mat t er st uck bet ween t he gui de rai l and t he sl i der .
2. Make sur e t he c abl e assembl y i s at t ached properl y.
3. Chec k f or a l oose i nner cabl e.
4. Chec k f or a def ect i ve gear or i nner c abl e.
Moonr oof gl ass does not move and
mot or does not t ur n (gl ass c an be
moved wi t h 4 mm hex wr enc h)
1 r : hec kf nr a r u n d o w n b at t e r y .
2. Chec k f or a bl own f use.
3. Chec k f or a f aul t y moonr oof swi t c h.
4. Chec k f or a def ect i ve mot or cont rol uni t.
Moonr oof gl ass does not st op at
pr oper f l ush c l osed posi t i on
1. Reset t he moonr oof cont rol uni t (see page 22-371).
Moonr oof gl ass moves i n a j er ki ng
mot i on (moves 40 mm (1.57 i n),
st ops f or 0.4 s ec onds , and r epeat s)
Reset t he moonr oof cont rol uni t (see page 22-371).
Duri ng aut o c l ose oper at i on,
moonr oof gl ass r ever ses when no
obj ect i s t r apped
1. Chec k for dirt and debr i s in t he t rack.
Moonr oof gl ass mov es , but t her e i s
no AUTO f unct i on
20-90
Glass Position Adjustment Glass Replacement
The roof panel (A) shoul d be even wi t h t he gl ass
weat her st r i p (B), to wi t hi n 0+1/ 1 mm
(0+0.04/0.04 i n) all t he way ar ound. If not make t he
f ol l owi ng adj ust ment :
0+1/1mm B
1. Remove the bracket cover (see st ep 3 on page 20-91).
2. Adj ust t he gl ass (A).
-1. Sl i ght l y l oosen t he TORX bolts wi t h a TORX T25 bit.
-2. Move t he gl ass up or down.
-3. Ti ght en all bol t s secur el y.
: TORX Bol t , 4
3. If nec essar y, repeat on t he opposi t e si de.
1. Cl ose t he gl ass f ul l y.
2. Sl i de t he sunshade all t he way back.
3. Pry out t he lid (A), r emove t he sc r ew (B), and r el ease
t he hooks (C), t hen r emove t he bracket c over (D).
Repeat on t he opposi t e si de. Remove t he TORX bol t s
(E) wi t h a TORX T25 bi t f r om t he gl ass bracket s (F) on
both si des.
B : S c r ew, 2 E : TORX Bol t , 4
4. Remove t he gl ass (A) by lifting it up. Do not damage
t he roof panel .
5. Install t he gl ass in t he r ever se or der of r emoval , and
check t he gl ass posi t i on al i gnment pr ocedur e (see
page 20-91).
6. Chec k for wat er l eaks (see st ep 9 on page 20-57). Let
t he wat er run f reel y f rom a hose wi t hout a nozzl e. Do
not use hi gh-pr essur e wat er.
NOTE: It i s normal f or some wat er to seep past t he
moonr oof into t he moonr oof f r ame, and exi t t hrough
t he dr ai ns.
20-91
Moonroof
Glass Weatherstrip Replacement
1. Remove t he moonr oof gl ass (see pag e 20-91).
2. Pl ace a pi ece of maski ng t ape (A) on t he mi ddl e of t he
f ront edge of t he moonr oof gl ass (B). Make sur e t hat
t he t ape i s on t he gl ass onl y, and i s not t ouchi ng t he
weat her st r i p.
B
3. Pl ace a mar k (C) on t he maski ng t ape t hat al i gns wi t h
t he s eam (D) of t he weat her st r i p.
4. Push down on t he t op of t he ol d weat her st r i p wi t h
your t humb unti l a smal l sect i on separ at es f r om t he
moonr oof gl ass. Onc e a sect i on has st ar t ed t o
separ at e, gri p it and pull out war d, wor ki ng ar ound t he
moonr oof gl ass unti l t he weat her st r i p i s compl et el y
r emoved (note t he l ocat i ons of t he hol es i n t he
weat her st r i p).
5. Al i gn t he s eam (A) of t he new weat her st r i p (B) to t he
mark (C) on t he maski ng t ape (D). Make sur e t he hol es
ar e poi nt ed i n t he s ame di rect i on as not ed i n st ep 4.
B
6. Pr ess t he ri dge of t he new weat her st r i p i nto t he
gr oove on t he moonr oof gl ass st art i ng at t he s eam.
Wor k t owar d one cor ner ; t hen go back to t he mi ddl e
and wor k t owar d t he opposi t e cor ner . Be car ef ul not
to st ret ch t he weat her st r i p.
7. Cont i nue pr essi ng al ong one si de, f r om cor ner to
cor ner ; t hen pr ess al ong t he opposi t e si de, f r om
cor ner to cor ner .
8. At t he r ear of t he moonr oof gl as s , cont i nue pr essi ng
f r om one c or ner to t he mi ddl e; t hen pr ess f r om t he
opposi t e c or ner to t he mi ddl e unti l t he st ri p i s
compl et el y i nst al l ed.
9. Rei nst al l t he moonr oof gl ass (see page 20-91).
10. Chec k f or pr oper fit of t he new weat her st r i p by
openi ng and cl osi ng t he moonr oof .
20-92
Wind Deflector Replacement
NOTE: When pryi ng wi t h a flat-ti p sc r ewdr i ver , wr ap it
wi t h prot ect i ve t ape to pr event damage.
1. Open t he gl ass fully.
2. Remove t he def l ect or l i nks (A) f r om both si des.
3. Remove t he wi nd def l ect or (A).
A
j L/~\J '
4. Pry up on t he def l ect or ar m bases (A) wi t h a flat-ti p
sc r ewdr i ver , and r el ease t he hooks (B), t hen r emove
t he bases wi t h def l ect or ar m spr i ngs (C) f r om both
si des.
5. Install t he def l ect or i n t he r ever se order of r emoval .
20-93
Moonroof
Drain Channel Replacement
1. Remove t he moonr oof gl ass (see page 20-91).
2. On both s i des , sl i de t he gl ass bracket s (A) wi t h t he
moonr oof swi t c h to t he posi t i on wher e t he moonr oof
nor mal l y ti lts up and di sc onnec t t he dr ai n c hannel
rods (B).
3. Sl i de t he dr ai n c hannel (A) f or war d.
A
4. Pul l up t he r ear edge of t he dr ai n c hannel (A) whi l e
pushi ng both cl i ps (B), and r el ease t he c hannel f rom
both hooks (C) of t he dr ai n c hannel sl i der by pul l i ng it
r ear war d.
B
f A
5. Remove t he dr ai n c hannel .
6. Inst al l t he c hannel i n t he r ever se or der of r emoval ,
Push t he cl i p ar eas i nto pl ace sec ur el y.
Chec k t he gl ass posi t i on adj ust ment (see page
20-91).
7. Chec k f or wat er l eaks (see st ep 9 on page 20-57). Let
t he wat er run f r eel y f r om a hose wi t hout a nozzl e. Do
not use a hi gh-pr essur e spr ay.
20-94
Sunshade Replacement
1. Remove t he dr ai n c hannel (see page 20-94).
2. Sl i de t he sunshade (A) unti l you can see both
sunshade slider spac er s (B).
F astener Locations
: Screw, 4
3. Remove t he s c r ews , t hen r emove both sunshade
sl i der spac er s.
4. Whi l e lifting t he f ront ar ea of t he sunshade (A), move
t he sunshade f or war d unti l you can see both
sunshade rear hooks (B). Do not damage t he
sunshade or t he hooks.
F astener Locations
: Screw, 4
5. Remove t he s c r ews , t hen r emove both hooks.
6. Remove t he sunshade (A).
(cont ' d)
20-95
Moonroof
Sunshade Replacement (cont'd)
7. Remove both f ront sunshade base sl i der s (A) and
both rear sunshade base sl i der s (B).
8. Inst al l t he sunshade i n t he reverse order of removal,
and check t he gl ass posi t i on adj ust ment (see page
20-91).
9. Chec k f or wat er l eaks (see st ep 9 on page 20-57). Let
Motor Replacement
NOTE: Put on gl oves to protect your hands.
1. Remove t he headl i ner (see page 20-140).
2. Di sc onnec t t he connect or (A), and r emove t he s c r ews ,
t hen r emove t he mot or (B).
F astener Locations
^. Screw, 3
4 N-m
3. Inst al l t he mot or i n t he r ever se or der of r emoval , and
Make sur e t he mot or connect or i s pl ugged i n
pr oper l y.
Reset t he moonr oof cont rol uni t (see page 22- 371) .
Chec k t he mot or oper at i on.
20-96
Frame and Drai n Tube Replacement
S RS component l ocat i ons, 2-door (see page 24-23),
ser vi c e.
NOTE:
Take c ar e not t o scr at ch t he i nt eri or t ri m or t he body,
or t ear t he seat c over s.
1. Remove t he headl i ner . (see page 20-140)
2. Di sconnect t he front dr ai n t ubes (A) and t he r ear drai n
t ubes (B).
3. Wi t h an assi st ant hol di ng t he f r ame (A), r emove t he
bolts (B, C) st art i ng at t he r ear , and r el ease t he rear
hooks (D) by movi ng t he f r ame f or war d.
2-door
B : B olt, 8 C : Bol t , 1
4-door
B : Bol t , 9
4. Wi t h t he hel p of an assi st ant , caref ul l y r emove the
f r ame t hr ough t he front door openi ng.
(cont' d)
Moonroof
Frame and Drain Tube Replacement (cont'd)
Fr ont Drai n Tube
5. Remove t he kick panel .
2-door (see st ep 5 on page 20-106)
4-door (see st ep 5 on page 20-108) .
6. Passenger ' s si de: Remove t he st er eo ampl i f i er .
7. Det ach t he cl i p (A) sec ur i ng t he front dr ai n t ube (B).
Pull out t he front drai n val ve (C) of t he body hol e. Ti e a
st r i ng to t he top end of t he drai n t ube, t hen pull down
t he drai n t ube out of t he A-pi l l ar . Leave t he st r i ng i n
t he pi llar to use when rei nst al l i ng t he dr ai n t ube.
Rear Dr ai n Tube
8. Remove t hese i t ems f r om t he t runk c ompar t ment (see
page 20-132):
e Trunk f l oor
Tr unk rear t ri m panel
Tr unk rear si de t ri m panel
9.2-door : Det ach t he cl i p (A) sec ur i ng t he rear dr ai n t ube
(B). Pull out t he rear dr ai n val ve (C) of t he body hol e.
Ti e a st ri ng to t he t op end of t he r ear drai n t ube, t hen
pull down t he drai n t ube out of t he C-pi l l ar. Leave t he
st ri ng in t he pi llar to use when rei nst al l i ng t he drai n
t ube.
20-98
10.4-door : Pull out t he rear drai n val ve (A) of t he body
hol e. Ti e a st ri ng to t he top end of t he rear drai n t ube
(B), t hen pull down t he drai n t ube out of t he C-pi l l ar.
Leave t he st ri ng i n t he pi llar to use when rei nst al l i ng
t he drai n t ube.
11. Inst al l t he f r ame and t he drai n t ube in t he r ever se
or der of r emoval , and note t hese i t ems:
Bef or e i nst al l i ng t he f r ame, cl ear t he dr ai n t ubes
and t he dr ai n val ves usi ng c ompr essed ai r.
To i nst al l a new dr ai n t ube, ti e t he st r i ng that was
left in t he pi llar to t he top end of t he dr ai n t ube and
pull it up into t he roof.
Chec k t he f r ame seal s.
Cl ean t he sur f ac e of t he f r ame.
When i nst al l i ng t he f r ame, fi rst at t ach t he rear
hooks into t he body hol es.
Make sur e t he c onnec t or s are pl ugged in properl y.
When connect i ng t he drai n t ubes, sl i de t hem over
t he f r ame nozzl es at l east 10 mm (0.39 i n).
Install t he t ube cl i ps (A) on t he drai n t ubes (B) as
shown.
B
12. Chec k for wat er l eaks (see st ep 9 on page 20-57). Let
20-99
Moonroof
Drain Channel Slider and Cable Assembly Replacement
N O T E : Put on gl oves to prot ect your hands.
1. Remove t hese i t ems: .
Headl i ner (see page 20-140)
Moonr oof gl ass (see page 20-91)
2. Remove t he f r ame (see page 20-97).
3. Remove t hese part s f r om t he f r ame:
Suns hade (see page 20-95)
Moonr oof mot or (see page 20-96)
4. Remove t he al umi num t ape (A). 4-door: Det ach t he
cl i ps ( B ) sec ur i ng t he moonr oof subhar ness ( C ) .
4-door i s
:
s hown; 2-door i s si mi l ar . ...
A
5. Remove t he s c r ews (A, B ) sec ur i ng t he cabl e t ube rear
:
br acket s (C). Remove t he c abl e t ube si de bracket
mount i ng bol t s (D) and t he c abl e t ube mount i ng
s c r ews (E) f r om both si des of t he f r ame ( F) . 4-door i s
shown; 2-door i s si mi l ar .
F astener Locations
A ^ ; Screw, 2 B : Screw, 2 D : B olt, 2
6. Tur n both c abl e t ube si de br acket s ( A ) up to r el ease
t he hooks ( B ) f r om t he hol es in both si des of t he
f r ame.
7. Pi vot t he gl ass br acket s (C) down by sl i di ng t he link
li fters (D) back, t hen sl i de both gl ass br acket s back
wi t h t he link li fters.
8. Sl i de t he c abl e assembl y (E) hal f -way back.
9. Remove t he dr ai n channel sl i der s (A) f r om both si des.
20-100
10. Sl i de t he c abl e assembl y (A) and both gl ass br acket s
(B) back, r emove t he def l ect or sl i der s (C) f r om both
br acket s, t hen r emove t hem f r om t he f r ame (D).
11. Inst al l t he dr ai n c hannel sl i der and c abl e assembl y i n
t he r ever se or der of r emoval , and note t hese i t ems:
Damaged part s shoul d be r epl aced.
Appl y mul t i pur pose gr ease to t he gl ass br acket s (A)
and t he gui de rai l ar ea of t he f r ame (B) i ndi cat ed by
t he ar r ows.
Bef or e rei nst al l i ng t he mot or , make sur e both li nk
li fters are par al l el , and i n t he ti lt-up posi t i on.
Bef or e rei nst al l i ng t he mot or , i nst al l t he f r ame and
t he gl ass, t hen check t he openi ng dr ag (see page
20-102).
Af t er rei nst al l i ng t he mot or , r eset t he moonr oof
cont rol uni t (see page 22-371).
20-101
Moonroof
Closing Force and Opening Drag Check
2. Cl osi ng f or ce check:
Cover t he l eadi ng edge of t he gl ass (A) wi t h a shop
t owel ( B) , and at t ach a spr i ng sc al e (C) as shown.
Have an assi st ant hol d t he swi t ch to c l ose t he gl ass
whi l e you measur e t he f or ce r equi r ed to st op it.
Read t he f or ce as soon as t he gl ass st ops movi ng,
t hen i mmedi at el y r el ease t he swi t ch and a spr i ng
sc al e.
Cl osi ng force: 200- 290 N ( 20- 30 kgf, 4 4 - 6 6 ibf)
. If t he f or ce i n not wi t hi n speci f i cat i on, r emove t he
moonr oof mot or ( s ee page 20-96), and c hec k t he
f ol l owi ng i t ems:
Chec k t he gear t eet h and t he i nner cabl e f or
br eakage or damage. If t he gear t eet h-are br oken,
r epl ace t he mot or. If t he i nner cabl e i s damaged,
r emove t he f r ame (see page 20-97), and r epl ace t he
cabl e (see page 20-100).
Chec k t he moonr oof mot or (see page 22-373). If t he
mot or f ai l s to run or does not t urn smoot hl y,
r epl ace it wi t h a new one.
Chec k t he openi ng dr ag. Go to st ep 4.
4. Openi ng dr ag check: Cover t he l eadi ng edge of t he
gl ass wi t h a shop t owel (A). Measur e t he effort
r equi r ed t o open t he gl ass wi t h a spr i ng sc al e (B) as
shown.
5. If t he l oad i s over 40 N (4 kgf, 9 Ibf), check:
The si de c l ear anc e and gl ass posi t i on adj ust ment
(see page 20-91).
For broken or damaged sl i di ng part s. If any sl i di ng
part s ar e damaged, r epl ace t hem.
6. Reset t he moonr oof cont rol uni t (see page 22-371)
after r ei nst al l i ng t he moonr oof mot or.
20-102
Interior Trim
2-door
IC-PILLAR TRIM
j Removal/Installation, page 20-119
, REAR SHELF
f
Removal/Installation, page 20- 128
REAR SIDE TRIM PANEL
Removal/Installation, page 20- 127
GRAB HANDLE
DOOR OPENING S E A L
S UNVI S OR
A-PILLAR TRIM
HEADLINER
* FRONT CARPET
KICK PANEL
DOOR SI L L TRIM
B-PILLAR UPPER TRIM
REAR CARPET
' TRUNK FL OOR
v
TRUNK S I DE TRIM PANEL
v
S PARE TI RE PAN CARPET
v
TOOL BOX S PACER
1
REAR TRIM PANEL
N
TRUNK LID TRIM PANEL
20-103
Interior Tri m
Component Location Index (cont' d)
4-door
/ C-PI L L AR TRIM
/REAR SHELF
1
/REAR DOOR OPENI NG SEAL
' Removal/Installation, page 20-109
/ B-PI L L AR UPPER TRIM
r GRAB HANDLE
r FRONT DOOR OPENI NG S E A L
<S UNVI S OR
/ CARPE T (one-pi ece t y pe)/
FRONT CARPET (t wo-pi ec e t ype)
' HEADL I NER
' A-PIL L AR TRIM
> KICK PANEL
v
FRONT DOOR S I L L TRIM
* B-PILLAR L OWER TRIM
k
REAR CARPET (t wo-pi ec e t ype)
' REAR DOOR S I L L TRIM
' TRUNK FL OOR
v
S PARE TI RE PAN CARPET
k
TRUNK S I DE TRIM PANEL
^ TOOL BOX S PACER
s
REAR TRIM PANEL
1
TRUNK LID TRIM PANEL
20-104
Trim Removal/Installation - Door Ar eas
Pr ogr am; cal l 888-424-6857
Door Si l l Ar ea - 2-door
NOTE:
Take c ar e not to bend or scr at ch t he t ri m or t he panel s.
1. Dr i ver ' s si de: Remove t he front si de c ap f r om t he door
si l l t ri m (see st ep 1 on page 20-303).
2. Dr i ver ' s si de: Remove t he t runk li d/fuel fi ll door
opener lock cyl i nder , and l oosen t he opener
mount i ng bolt (see st ep 2 on page 20-303).
3. Dr i ver ' s si de: Remove t he sc r ew sec ur i ng t he door si l l
t ri m and t he trunk lid opener/f uel fi ll door opener (see
4. Rel ease t he hooks (A) and t he t abs (B) f r om t he kick
panel (C) and t he rear si de t ri m panel (D). Pull up t he
door si l l t ri m (E) by hand to det ach t he c l i ps, t hen
r emove t he t ri m.
Dr i ver ' s si de
> : Cl i p, 6
Passenger ' s si de
> : Cl i p , 6
(cont ' d)
20-105
Interior Tri m
Trim Removal/Inst al l at i on - Door Areas (cont' d)
5. Remove t he kick panel s (A).
- 1. Pull out t he door openi ng seal (B) as needed f r om
the kick panel hooks (C).
-2. Pull the kick panel back by hand to det ach t he c l i ps.
Dr i ver ' s si de
t >: Cl i p, 2
Passenger ' s si de
D>:Clip,2
B
6. Pul l out t he door openi ng seal (A) f r om t he t ri m hooks
(B) ar ound t he door openi ng f l ange, t hen r emove t he
s eal .
7. Inst al l all of t he r emoved part s i n t he r ever se or der of
Dr i ver ' s si de: Bef ore t i ght eni ng t he trunk li d/fuel fill
door opener mount i ng bolt, posi t i on t he door si l l
t r i m agai nst t he opener f i rml y by sc r ewi ng t he t r i m
ont o t he opener .
Push t he c l i ps, t he hooks, and t he t abs into pl ace
sec ur el y.
K TC Tr i m Tool S et S OJ ATP2014*
Pr ogr am; cal l 888-424-6857
Front Door Si l l Ar ea - 4-door
NOTE:
1. Dr i ver ' s si de: Remove t he front si de c ap f r om t he front
door si l l t ri m (see st ep 1 on page 20-303).
2. Dr i ver ' s si de: Remove t he trunk li d/fuel fill door
opener lock cyl i nder , and l oosen t he opener
mount i ng bolt (see st ep 2 on page 20-303).
3. Dr i ver ' s si de: Remove t he sc r ew sec ur i ng t he front
door si l l t ri m and trunk lid opener/f uel fi ll door opener
4. Rel ease t he hooks (A) and t he t abs (B) f r om t he kick
panel (C) and t he B-pi l l ar l ower t ri m (D). Pull up t he
f ront door si l l t ri m ( E) by hand to det ach t he c l i ps, t hen
r emove t he t r i m.
Dr i ver ' s si de
F astener Locations
t>: Clip, 4
(cont' d)
20-107
Interior Trim
Trim Removal /Inst al l at i on - Door Areas (cont' d)
Passenger ' s si de
F astener Locations
t>: Cl i p, 4
5. Remove t he kick panel s (A).
- 1. Pul l out t he door openi ng s e a l (B) as n e e d e d f r om
t he ki ck panel hooks (C).
-2. Pull back t he kick panel by hand to det ach t he c l i ps.
Dr i ver ' s si de
D>Cl i p, 2
Passenger ' s si de
P>: Cl i p, 2
20-108
6. Pul l out t he f ront door openi ng seal (A) f r om t he t ri m
hooks (B) ar ound t he front door openi ng f l ange, t hen
r emove t he seal .
7. Inst al l in t he r ever se or der of r emoval , and note t hese
i t ems:
Dr i ver ' s si de: Bef ore t i ght eni ng t he t runk li d/fuel fill
door opener mount i ng bolt, posi t i on t he front door
si l l t ri m agai nst t he opener f i rml y by sc r ewi ng t he
t r i m onto t he opener .
Push t he c l i ps, t he hooks, and t he t abs into pl ace
sec ur el y.
Rear Door Si l l Ar ea - 4-door
NOTE:
2. Rel ease t he hooks (A) and t he t ab (B) f r om t he B-pi llar
l ower t r i m (C). Pull up t he rear door si l l t ri m (D) by
hand t o det ach t he cl i ps ( E , F), t hen r emove t he t ri m
f r om t he rear door openi ng seal (G).
F astener Locations
E p>: Clip, 3
(Gray)
(cont' d)
20-109
Interior Tri m
Trim Removal /Inst al l at i on - Door
Areas (cont ' d)
3. Pull out t he rear door openi ng seal (A) f r om t he t r i m
hooks (B) ar ound t he r ear door openi ng f l ange, t hen
r emove t he seal .
Push t he c l i ps, t he hooks, and t he t ab into pl ace
sec ur el y.
Tr i m Removal /Inst al l at i on - Pillar
Ar eas
Pr ogr am; cal l 888-424-6857
A-Pi l l ar Tr i m
S RS c omponent l ocat i ons, 2-door (see page 24-23),
pr oc edur es (see page 24-25) bef ore doi ng r epai r s or
ser vi c e.
NOTE:
Fol l ow t he A-pi l l ar t ri m i nst al l at i on pr ocedur e
car ef ul l y; i mpr oper i nst al l at i on coul d c ause t he si de
cur t ai n ai r bags to depl oy i mpr oper l y and possi bl y
c ause i nj ury.
Us e t he appropri at e t ool f r om t he K TC t ri m tool set to
Take c ar e not to scr at ch t he t ri m or t he panel s.
The upper cl i p (A) in t he A-pi l l ar t ri m (B) c onsi st s of a
pl ast i c gr ommet (C) and a met al pi n (D). The gr ommet
expanded by t he pi n sec ur es it to t he body panel ( E) .
The pr oj ect i ons (F) on t he pi n break duri ng r emoval ,
s o t he upper cli p must be r epl aced wi t h a new one
when t he tri m i s r ei nst al l ed.
Replace.
20-110
1. Pull t he f ront door openi ng seal away f r om t he A-pi l l ar
as needed:
2. Hit t he upper cl i p (A) i n t he A-pi l l ar t ri m (B) wi t h a
r ubber mal l et . The cl i p i s l ocat ed under t he poi nt
wher e t he t ri angl e mar k (C) on t he edge of t he t ri m
i ndi cat es. Hitting t he cl i p br eaks t he pr oj ect i ons (D) on
t he pi n ( E ) and pushes it into t he gr ommet ( F) on t he
body (G).
NOTE: The upper cl i p must be r epl aced wi t h a new
one when t he A-pi l l ar t ri m i s r ei nst al l ed.
Replace.
3. Pull back t he t op of t he A-pi l l ar t ri m (A) by hand to
r emove t he upper cl i p (B) f r om t he body (C).
(cont ' d)
20-111
Interior Tri m
Trim Removal /Inst al l at i on - Pillar Areas (cont' d)
4. Pull out t he A-pi l l ar t ri m (A) by hand to det ach t he
c l i ps. Pull up t he t ri m f r om t he dashboar d (B), t hen
r emove t he t r i m.
F astener Locations
>: C l i p, 2
5. If t he si de cur t ai n ai r bag has been depl oyed, r epl ace
t he A-pi l l ar t ri m wi t h a new one (see page 24-208).
6. If t he si de cur t ai n ai r bag has not depl oyed, check t he
A-pi l l ar t ri m (A) and note t he f ol l owi ng i t ems:
To pr event t he si de curt ai n ai r bags f r om depl oyi ng
i mpr oper l y and possi bl y c ausi ng i nj ur y, i nspect t he
A-pi l l ar t ri m and r epl ace it wi t h a new one if it has
any of t he f ol l owi ng damage:
- Any c r ac ks, def or mat i ons, or st r ess-whi t ened
ar eas i n t he A-pi l l ar t ri m
- Any c r ac ks or st r ess-whi t eni ng in t he cl i p seat i ng
sur f ac es (B)
Repl ac e t he upper cl i p (C) wi t h a new one.
If t he cl i ps (D) ar e damaged or st r ess-whi t ened,
r epl ace t hem wi t h new ones.
20-112
7. Tempor ar i l y i nst al l t he A-pi l l ar t ri m (wi t hout t he
upper cl i p) to c hec k t he over l ap bet ween t he t ri m and
t he headl i ner (see page 24-210). Remove t he t r i m, and
if nec essar y, adj ust t he over l ap.
8. Caref ul l y i nst all t he new upper cl i p (A) to t he A-pi l l ar
t ri m (B). Be sur e t hat t he gr ommet (C) i s near est to t he
t op of t he pi n (D) as shown.
9. Rei nst al l t he A-pi l l ar t ri m (A).
- 1. Insert t he bot t om of t he t ri m into t he dashboar d (B).
-2. Pl ace t he t ri m over t he A-pi l l ar (C), and fit its upper
cl i p (D), t he l ower c l i ps, and t he pi n (E) i nto t he hol es
(F) i n t he A-pi l l ar , t hen li ghtly push t he t ri m i nto
pl ace.
NOTE:
Make sur e t he si de curt ai n ai r bag i s not t ucked
under t he c l i ps or t he t ri m r i bs.
Do not push t oo har d on t he A-pi l l ar t ri m. If you
push t oo har d, t he cl i p wi l l be damaged, and it
wi l l not hol d t he t ri m properl y.
Gent l y t ug on t he A-pi l l ar t ri m to veri f y that all
cl i ps ar e sec ur el y f ast ened.
F astener Locations
t >: Clip, 2
10. Rei nst al l t he door openi ng seal .
(cont' d)
20-113
Interior Tri m
Trim' Removal /Inst al l at i on - Pillar Areas (cont' d)
B-Pi llar U pper Tri m- 2-door
S RS component l ocat i ons (see page 24-23) and t he
pr ecaut i ons and pr oc edur es (see page 24-25) bef ore
doi ng r epai r s or ser vi c e.
NOTE:
Use t he appr opr i at e t ool f r om t he K TC t ri m t ool set to
Door si l l t ri m (see page 20-105)
Door openi ng s eal , as needed (see st ep 6 on page
20-106)
Dr i ver ' s si de: Fr ont seat belt l ower anc hor bolt (see
st ep 2 on page 24-5)
Passenger ' s si de: Front seat belt l ower anc hor pl at e
(see st ep 2 on page 24-5)
Rear si de t ri m panel , as needed (see page 20-127)
2. Lower t he coat hanger (A), t hen r emove t he sc r ew.
^: Screw, 1
3. Pul l down t he f ront edge of t he C-pi l l ar t ri m (A) f r om
t he B-pi l l ar upper t ri m (B) by r el easi ng t he hooks (C),
and pull down t he roof ar ea of t he C-pi l l ar t ri m by
det achi ng t he cl i ps and r el easi ng t he proj ect i on (D).
> : Cl i p , 2
20-114
4. Remove t he B-pi llar upper t ri m (A).
- 1. Rel ease t he l ower hooks (B) and det ach t he l ower
cl i p ( C) .
- 2. Pull back the bot t om of t he t ri m to r el ease t he upper
pi n (D) f rom t he hol e i n t he body.
- 3. Det ach the upper cl i p (E).
-4. Pull down the t ri m t o r el ease t he upper hook (F)
f rom t he hol e in t he body.
C > ; Cl i p, 1 E [ > : Cl i p, 1
(Gr een) (Gr ay)
B
5. Dr i ver ' s si de : Rel ease t he hooks (A), t hen r emove t he
cap (B) f r om t he B-pi llar upper t ri m (C).
6. Pass t he front seat belt l ower anchor (A) out t hr ough a
hol e i n t he B-pi llar upper t ri m (B), t hen r emove t he
t r i m.
(cont' d)
20-115
Interior Tri m
Trim Removal /i nst al l at i on - Pillar Areas (cont' d)
7. Inst al l t he t ri m i n t he reverse order of removal , and
If t he cl i ps (A) are damaged or stress- whi tened,
If t he si de curtai n ai rbag has depl oyed, repl ace the
B-pi llar upper t ri m and all cl i ps on t he t ri m wi t h new
part s (see page 24-208).
To prevent t he si de curt ai n ai r bags f r om depl oyi ng
i mpr oper l y and possi bl y c ausi ng i nj ury, i nspect t he
t ri m and r epl ace it wi t h a new one if it has any of t he
f ol l owi ng damage:
- Any c r ac ks or def or mat i ons in t he B-pi l l ar upper
tri m (B) or t he upper hook (C), or any
st r ess-whi t ened ar eas in t he upper part of t he
t ri m
- Any c r ac ks or st r ess-whi t ened ar eas in t he cl i ps
seat i ng sur f ac es (D)
Repl ace any damaged part s wi t h new ones .
Make sur e t he top of t he B-pi llar upper t ri m
over l aps wi t h t he headl i ner cor r ect l y (see page
24-210).
Make sur e t he pi n on t he B-pi llar upper t ri m i s
engaged to t he hol e in t he body when i nst al l i ng t he
t ri m.
Make sur e t he upper hook i s i nst al l ed i nto t he hol e
in t he body sec ur el y.
Push t he cl i ps and t he l ower hooks i nto pl ace
sec ur el y.
Bef ore i nst al l i ng t he l ower anc hor , make sur e t her e
ar e no t wi st s or ki nks in t he seat belt.
Tr i m i nspect i on
A
B-Pi llar Upper /Lower Tr i m - 4-door
S RS c omponent l ocat i ons (see page 24-21) and t he
pr ecaut i ons and pr ocedur es (see page 24-25) bef ore
NOTE:
Take c ar e not to bend or sc r at c h t he t ri m or t he panel s.
Us e t he appropri at e tool f r om t he K TC t ri m tool set to
Front door si ll t ri m (see page 20-107)
Rear door si l l t ri m (see page 20-109)
Front door openi ng s eal , as needed (see st ep 6 on
page 20-109)
Rear door openi ng s eal , as needed (see st ep 3 on
page 20-110)
2. Sl i de t he f ront seat f or war d f ul l y.
3. Remove t he front seat belt l ower anchor (see page
24-10).
4. Remove t he B-pi li ar l ower t r i m (A).
-1, Pull back t he upper ar ea of t he B-pi l l ar l ower t r i m to
r el ease t he upper hooks (B).
- 2. Det ach t he l ower cl i p by pul l i ng back t he bot t om of
t he t ri m by hand.
Fastener Location
> : Cl i p, 1
5. Remove t he B-pi l l ar upper t ri m (A).
-1. Pul l back t he bot t om of t he t ri m by hand to det ach
t he l ower hooks (B).
-2. Pul l back t he bottom of t he t ri m to r el ease t he upper
pi n ( C) f r om t he hol e i n t he body and t he sl i der ( D)
f r om t he pi n (E) on t he front seat belt shoul der
anc hor adj ust er .
- 3. Pul l back t he t ri m t o r el ease t he upper hooks (F)
f r om t he hol es i n t he body.
(cont ' d)
20-117
Interior Tri m
Trim Remowal/lnstallation - Pillar Ar eas (cont'd)
6. Pass t he front seat belt l ower anchor (A) out t hr ough a
hol e in t he sl i der (B), t hen r emove t he B-pi l l ar upper
t ri m (C).
7. Inst al l t he t ri m i n t he r ever se or der of r emoval , and
If t he cl i p (A) i s damaged or st r ess-whi t ened,
r epl ace it wi t h a new one.
If t he si de cur t ai n ai r bag has depl oyed, r epl ace t he
B-pi l l ar upper t r i m, t he B-pi l l ar l ower t r i m, and t he
cl i p on t he t ri m wi t h new part s (see page 24-208).
To pr event t he si de cur t ai n ai r bags f r om depl oyi ng
t ri m and r epl ace it wi t h a new one if it has any of t he
f ol l owi ng damage:
- Any c r ac ks or def or mat i ons i n t he B-pi l l ar upper
t r i m (B) or t he upper hooks (C), or any
st r ess-whi t ened ar eas in t he upper part of t he
t ri m
- Any c r ac ks or def or mat i ons in t he B-pi llar l ower
t ri m (D), or any br eakages i n t he part ( E) fi tted
wi t h t he B-pi llar upper t ri m
~ Any c r ac ks or st r ess-whi t ened ar eas i n t he cl i p
seat i ng sur f ace (F)
Repl ace any damaged part s wi t h new ones.
Make sur e t he top of t he t ri m over l aps wi t h t he
headl i ner cor r ect l y (see page 24-210).
Make sur e t he pi n (G) on t he front seat belt shoul der
anc hor adj ust er (H) and t he hol e (I) on t he back of
t he sl i der ar e engaged when i nst al l i ng t he B-pi llar
upper t r i m.
Make sur e t he upper hooks ar e i nst al l ed into t he
hol es in t he body sec ur el y.
Push t he cl i p and t he hooks into pl ace sec ur el y.
Bef or e i nst al l i ng t he anc hor bolt, make sur e t her e
20-118
Tr i m i nspect i on
Sl i der engagement wi t h shoul der anchor adj ust er
C-Pi l l ar Tr i m - 2-door
NOTE:
Fol l ow t he C-pi l l ar t ri m i nst al l at i on pr ocedur e
cur t ai n ai r bag to depl oy i mpr oper l y and possi bl y
c ause i nj ury.
Us e t he appropri at e tool f rom t he K TC t ri m tool set to
Take c ar e not to sc r at c h t he t ri m or t he panel s.
The r ear cl i p (A) i n t he C-pi l l ar t ri m (B) c onsi st s of a
expanded by t he pi n sec ur es it to t he body panel (E).
The pr oj ect i ons (F) on t he pi n break dur i ng r emoval ,
s o t he rear cl i p must be r epl aced wi t h a new one when
t he t ri m i s r ei nst al l ed.
A
Replace.
(cont ' d)
20-119
Interior Tri m
Tr i m RemovaE/i nst al l at i on - Pillar Areas (cont' d)
1. L ower t he coat hanger (A), t hen r emove t he sc r ew.
: S c r ew, 1
2. Pry out t he C-pi l l ar li d c ap (A) wi t h t he appr opr i at e
t ri m t ool , t hen r emove it.
3. Remove t he C-pi l l ar lid cl i p (A) by pi nchi ng its hooks
wi t h a pai r of pl i er s.
4. Hit t he sur f ace of t he C-pi l l ar t ri m (A) j ust upon t he
rear cl i p (B) wi t h a rubber mal l et . Hitting t he cl i p
br eaks t he proj ect i ons (C) on t he pi n (D) and pushes it
into t he gr ommet (E) on t he body (F).
NOTE: The rear cl i p must be r epl aced wi t h a new one
when t he C-pi l l ar t ri m i s r ei nst al l ed.
Replace
20-120
5. Pull down t he front edge of t he C-pi l l ar t ri m (A) f r om
t he B-pi llar upper t ri m (B) by det achi ng t he hooks (C),
and pull down t he roof ar ea of t he C-pi l l ar t ri m by
det achi ng t he cl i ps and r el easi ng t he proj ect i on (D).
F astener Locations
>: Clip, 2
6. Remove t he C-pi l l ar t ri m (A).
-1. Pull back t he t op of t he C-pi l l ar t ri m by hand to
r emove t he rear cl i p (B) f rom t he body (C).
-2. Pull out t he bottom of t he C-pi l l ar t ri m by hand to
det ach t he hooks (D) f r om t he rear si de t ri m panel
(E) and t he rear shel f (F).
-3. Rel ease t he rear hook (G) f rom t he r ear shel f by
pul l i ng t he C-pi l l ar t ri m f or war d.
7. If t he si de cur t ai n ai r bag has been depl oyed, r epl ace
t he C-pi l l ar t r i m, t he C-pi l l ar li d c ap, and t he t ri m cl i ps
wi t h new ones (see page 24-208).
8. If t he si de cur t ai n ai r bag has not depl oyed, c hec k t he
C-pi l l ar t ri m (A) and not e t he f ol l owi ng i t ems:
To prevent t he si de cur t ai n ai r bags f r om depl oyi ng
C-pi l l ar t ri m and r epl ace it wi t h a new one if it has
ar eas i n t he C-pi l l ar t r i m, t he C-pi l i ar lid (B), or t he
C-pi l l ar br acket s (C).
~ Any C-pi l l ar br acket s whi c h have c ome off t he
C-pi l l ar t ri m or t he C-pi l l ar l i d.
- Any c r ac ks or st r ess-whi t ened ar eas in t he cl i p
seat i ng sur f ac es (D).
- Any c r ac ks or st r ess-whi t ened ar eas in t he
C-pi l l ar li d c ap (E).
< Repl ace t he rear cl i p (F) wi t h a new one.
If t he c l i ps (G) ar e damaged or st r ess-whi t ened,
(cont' d)
Interior Tri m
Trim Removal /Inst al l at i on - Pillar Ar eas (cont'd)
9. Tempor ar i l y i nst al l t he C-pi l l ar t r i m (wi t hout t he upper
cl i p) t o check t he over l ap bet ween t he t ri m and t he
headl i ner (see page 24-210). Remove t he t r i m, and if
nec essar y, adj ust t he over l ap.
10. Car ef ul l y i nst al l t he new r ear cl i p (A) to t he C-pi l l ar
t r i m (B). Be sur e t hat t he gr ommet (C) i s near est t o t he
t op of t he pi n (D) as s hown.
12. Rei nst al l t he C-pi l l ar t ri m (A).
-1. Insert t he rear hook (B) and t he bottom hooks (C) of
t he t ri m i n t he rear shel f (D) and t he r ear si de t ri m
panel (E).
-2. Pl ace t he t ri m over t he C-pi l l ar (F), and fit t he r ear
cl i p (G) i nto t he hol e i n t he body. Al i gn t he C-pi l l ar
li d cl i p (H) wi t h t he hol es i n t he headl i ner (I) and t he
si de curt ai n ai r bag bracket (J), t hen li ghtly push t he
t r i m into pl ace.
-3. Inst al l t he C-pi l l ar lid c ap (K) f ully i nto t he cl i p.
NOTE:
Make sur e t he si de cur t ai n ai r bag i s not t ucked
under t he cl i ps or t he t ri m r i bs.
Do not push t oo har d on t he C-pi l l ar t r i m. If you
Gent l y t ug on t he C-pi l l ar t ri m to veri f y that all
A F I
20-122
13. Fi t t he proj ect i on (A) and t he cl i ps i nto t he hol es i n t he
body, t hen push t he roof ar ea of t he C-pi l l ar t ri m (B)
unti l its cl i ps snap into pl ace sec ur el y, and push the
front edge of t he t ri m until its hooks (C) snap into t he
B-pi llar upper t ri m (D) secur el y.
> : Cl i p, 2
14. Rei nst al l t he sc r ew under t he coat hanger (A).
C-Pi l l ar Tr i m - 4-dor
NOTE:
Fol l ow t he C-pi l l ar t ri m i nst al l at i on pr ocedur e
cur t ai n ai r bag to depl oy i mpr oper l y and possi bl y
c ause i nj ury.
Use t he appropri at e t ool f r om t he K TC tri m tool set to
Take c ar e not to scr at ch t he t ri m or t he panel s.
t The upper cl i p (A) in t he C-pi l l ar t ri m (B) c onsi st s of a
expanded by t he pi n sec ur es it to t he body panel ( E) .
The upper cl i p must be r epl aced wi t h a new one when
t he t ri m i s r ei nst al l ed.
A
Replace.
: S c r ew, 1
(cont ' d)
20-123
Interior Tri m
Trim Removal /Inst al l at i on - Pillar Areas (cont'd)
Rear seat c ushi on (see page 20-241)
Rear seat si de bol st er (see page 20-242)
Rear door openi ng s eal , as needed (see st ep 3 on
page 20-110)
2. Fol d down t he seat -back.
3. Hit t he upper cl i p (A) i n t he C-pi l l ar t ri m (B) wi t h a
r ubber mal l et . The cl i p i s l ocat ed under t he poi nt
wher e t he t ri angl e mar k (C) on t he edge of t he t ri m
i ndi cat es. Hitting t he cl i p br eaks t he pr oj ect i ons (D) on
t he pi n (E) and pushes it into t he gr ommet (F) on t he
body (G).
NOTE: The upper cl i p must be r epl aced wi t h a new
one when t he C-pi l l ar t ri m i s r ei nst al l ed.
C
4. Pull back t he t op of t he C-pi l l ar t ri m (A) by hand t o
r emove t he upper cl i p (B) f r om t he body (C).
20-124
5. Pull t he C-pi l l ar t ri m (A) by hand to det ach t he cl i ps
and to r el ease t he hooks (B), t hen pull out t he t ri m
f r om t he r ear shel f (C).
F astener Locations
> : Clip, 3
6. If t he si de curt ai n ai r bag has been depl oyed, r epl ace
t he C-pi l l ar tri m and all of its cl i ps wi t h new part s (see
page 24-208).
7. If t he si de curt ai n ai r bag has not been depl oyed, check
t he C-pi l l ar t ri m (A) and note t he f ol l owi ng:
C-pi l l ar tri m and r epl ace it wi t h a new one if it has
any of the f ol l owi ng damage:
ar eas in t he C-pi l l ar t ri m
- Any cr acks or st r ess-whi t ened ar eas in t he cl i p
seat i ng sur f ac es (B)
Repl ace t he upper cl i p (C) wi t h a new one.
If t he cl i ps (D) ar e damaged or st r ess-whi t ened,
(cont' d)
20-125
Interior Tri m
Trim Removal /Inst al l at i on - Pillar Ar eas (cont'd)
8. Tempor ar i l y i nst al l t he C-pi l l ar t r i m (wi t hout t he upper
cl i p) to c hec k t he over l ap bet ween t he t ri m and t he
headl i ner (see page 24-210). Remove t he t r i m, and if
nec essar y, adj ust t he over l ap.
9. Car ef ul l y i nst al l t he new upper cl i p (A) t o t he C-pi l l ar
t ri m (B). Be sur e t hat t he gr ommet (C) i s near est to t he
t op of t he pi n (D) as s hown.
10. Rei nst al l t he C-pi l l ar t ri m (A).
-1. Insert t he bottom hooks (B) of t he t ri m in t he rear
shel f (C).
- 2. Pl ace t he t ri m over t he C-pi l l ar (D), and fit t he upper
cl i p (E) and t he l ower cl i ps into t he hol es (F) i n t he
C-pi l l ar , t hen li ghtly push t he t ri m i nto pl ace.
NOTE:
Make sur e t he si de curt ai n ai r bag i s not t ucked
under t he cl i ps or t he t ri m r i bs.
Do not push too hard on t he C-pi l l ar t r i m. If you
Gent l y t ug on t he C-pi l l ar t ri m t o veri f y that all
11. Rei nst al l t he rear door openi ng seal (see st ep 3 on
page 20-110).
20 1 2 6
Trim Remowal/Installatlon - Rear Side Area
Pr ogr am; cal l 888-424-6857
2-door
S RS c omponent l ocat i ons {see page 24-23) and t he
NOTE:
C-pi l l ar t ri m (see page 20-123)
Rear seat -back (see page 20-239)
2. Lower t he rear seat pi vot bracket (A).
3. Remove t he rear si de t r i m panel (A).
-1. Det ach t he cl i p (B).
-2. Gent l y pull back t he rear shel f (C) to r el ease t he
pr oj ect i ons (D) and t he hook (E) f rom t he panel .
-3. Det ach t he c l i ps (F) by pul l i ng back t he panel .
-4. Rel ease t he hooks (G) and t he t abs (H) f r om t he
B-pi llar upper t ri m (I).
F astener Locations
B > : Clip, 1 F >: Clip, 6
C H
4. Inst al l t he panel in t he r ever se order of r emoval , and
Push t he c l i ps , t he hooks, and t he t abs i nto pl ace
sec ur el y.
20-127
Interior Tri m
Trim Removal /Inst al l at i on - Rear Shelf Area
Pr ogr am; cal l 888-424-6857
Rear Shel f
ser vi c e.
NOTE:
Take c ar e not to bend or scr at ch t he rear shel f or t he
t r i m.
e us e the appr opr i at e t ool f rom t he K TC t ri m t ool set to
1. Remove t he C-pi l l ar t r i m, both si des:
2. Fr om t he t runk compar t ment , t urn t he hi gh mount
brake li ght socket (A) 45 count er cl ockwi se to r emove
t he socket . 4-door i s shown; 2-door i s si mi l ar .
3. For s ome model s: Di sconnect t he Act i ve Noi se
Cancel l at i on (ANC) r ear mi cr ophone subhar ness
c onnec t or (A).
2- d o o r
\ A
20" 1128
4. Remove t he cl i ps sec ur i ng t he r ear shel f ( A) , and
r emove t he washer s (B) f r om bet ween t he r ear shel f
and t he body. 4-door i s shown; 2-door i s si mi l ar .
F astener Locations
B
5. Remove t he rear shel f (A). Be car ef ul not to damage
t he speaker s.
- 1. Pull up t he ent i re rear shel f to det ach t he cl i ps ,
- 2. Lift t he r ear shel f upwar d and f or war d to r el ease t he
r ear hook (B) f r om t he body, and r el ease eac h
anc hor rod (C) out t hr ough t he hol e i n t he r ear shel f .
- 3. Pul l both rear seat bel t s (D) (4-door ) and rear cent er
seat belt (E) out t hr ough t he sl i t s (F) i n t he rear shel f .
2-door
F astener Locations
|>: C l i p, 7
(cont' d)
20-129
Interior Tri m
Tr i m Removal /Inst al l at i on - Bear Shel f Ar ea (cont' d)
20-130
7. Install t he r ear shel f in t he r ever se or der of r emoval ,
and note t hese i t ems;
Remove any cl i ps left i n t he body wi t h a cl i p
r emover , and i nst al l t hem on t he rear shel f .
If t he cl i ps ar e damaged or st r ess-whi t ened, repl ace
Be car ef ul not to damage t he speaker s.
When i nst al l i ng t he rear shel f , sl i p t he rear seat belt
and t he rear cent er seat belt t hr ough t he sl i t s in the
r ear shel f properl y.
Make sur e t he hi gh mount brake li ght socket i s
connect ed sec ur el y, and t he Act i ve Noi se
Cancel l at i on (ANC) rear mi cr ophone subhar ness
connect or {for some model s) i s pl ugged i n
properl y.
Rear Par cel Shel f Dynami c Damper - 2-door
NOTE:
4 Put on gl oves t o prot ect your hands.
Take c ar e not to sc r at c h t he body.
1. Remove t he r ear shel f .
2. Remove t he bol t s (A), t hen r emove t he rear parcel
shel f dynami c damper (B). Take c ar e not to hit t he r ear
wi ndow when r emovi ng t he bol t s.
B
3. Inst al l t he damper i n t he r ever se or der of r emoval .
20-131
Interior Tri m
Trim Removal /Inst al l at i on - Trunk Area
Pr ogr am; cal l 888-424-6857
NOTE:
1. Fol d down t he rear seat -bac k.
2. Remove t he cl i p that sec ur es t he trunk f l oor (A) and
t he seat -back c over (B) to t he body. 2-door i s s hown;
F astener Location
> : Cl i p, 1
3. Remove t he trunk f l oor (A). 4-door i s shown; 2-door i s
si mi l ar .
4. Remove t he t runk lid weat her st r i p near t he t runk rear
t ri m panel .
5. Det ach t he cl i ps (A, B), and r el ease t he hooks (C) and
t he t abs (D) by pul l i ng up t he r ear t ri m panel ( E ) , t hen
l emove t he panel .
2-door
A O : Clip, 1 B O : Cl i p, 4
4-door
B | > : Cl i p , 4
D
20-132
6. Det ach t he cl i ps (A, B), and pull out t he t runk si de tri m
panel (C) f r om under t he rear shel f (D) and t he rear
seat -back (E), t hen remove t he panel . 4-door i s shown;
A >: Clip, 2 B >: C l i p, 3
7. Remove t he t ool box spac er (A). 4-door i s s hown;
8. Remove t he spar e t i re.
9. Det ach t he c l i ps, t hen r emove t he spar e ti re pan
car pet (A). 4-door i s s hown; 2-door i s si mi l ar .
> : Cl i p , 2
(cont' d)
20-133
Interior Tri m
Trim Removal /Inst al l at i on - Trunk
Ar ea (cont' d)
10. Det ach t he cl i ps (A) and t he har ness hol der s (B) f r om
t he st ud bol t s, t hen r emove t he rear wheel house
i nsul at or ( C) . 4-door i s shown; 2-door i s si mi l ar .
A [ > : Cl i p B P> : Har ness hol der
2-door , 3 2-door , 1
4-door , 2 4-door , 2
C
Tr i m Removal /Inst al l at i on - Trunk
Lid
K TC Tr i m Tool Set SOJ ATP2014*
Pr ogr am; cal l 888-424-6857
NOTE:
Put on gl oves to protect your hands. .
Take c ar e not to bend or scr at ch t he panel .
Us e t he appropri at e t ool f r om t he K TC t ri m t ool set to
1. Remove t he trunk li d t ri m panel (A).
-1. Remove t he cl i ps (B,C).
-2. Pass t he trunk lid hi nges (D) t hr ough t he sl i t s (E) on
both si des.
-3. Pass t he trunk lid handl e IF! t hr ough t he hol e (G).
2-door
B |>: Clip, 13
20-134
Sunvi sor Removal /Inst al l at i on
4-door
Fast ener Locations
B > : Cl i p, 11 C > : Cl i p, 1
2. Pi vot t he trunk li d handl e (A) down on t he f or war d
hooks (B) whi l e pryi ng t he r ear hook (C), t hen r emove
t he handl e.
3. Install t he panel in t he r ever se or der of r emoval , and
NOTE:
Take car e not to bend or sc r at c h t he headl i ner .
protecti ve t ape to pr event damage.
1. Insert a flat-tip sc r ewdr i ver t hr ough t he hol e in t he
front si de of t he bracket c over (A), and push t he hook
(B). Make sur e t he hook i s unl ocked .
( c ont' d)
20-135
Interior Tri m
Sui wl sor Removal /Inst al l at i on (cont' d)
2. Whi l e pushi ng i n t he hook (A) wi t h a flat-ti p
sc r ewdr i ver , r el ease t he sunvi sor (B) f r om t he hol der
(C), and rotate t he sunvi sor bac kwar d 45 . Make sur e
t he hook sl i des i nto t he bracket c over as you rotate
t he sunvi sor .
3. Pul l down t he sunvi sor (A) t o r el ease t he pi n (B) and
t he bracket (C) f r om t he hol es in t he body. Then pull
out t he vani t y mi r r or li ght connect or (D) and
di sc onnec t it.
NOTE: If t he sunvi sor cannot be pul l ed down, t he
hook has not rotated i nto t he bracket cover . Repeat
st ep 2 t o rotate t he hook.
4. Tur n t he hol der (A) 45 c ount er c l oc kwi se, and pull it
down t o r emove it f r om t he hol der gr ommet (B).
20-136
5. Pry out t he hol der gr ommet (A) f r om t he body by
pi nchi ng its hooks (B).
6. If t he si de curt ai n ai r bag has depl oyed, r epl ace t he
sunvi sor wi th a new one (see page 24-208).
7. If t he si de curt ai n ai r bag has not depl oyed, i nspect t he
sunvi sor for damage. A damaged sunvi sor may c ause
t he si de curt ai n ai r bags to depl oy i mpr oper l y,
possi bl y c ausi ng i nj ury. Repl ace t he sunvi sor if it has
Any cr acks in t he sunvi sor bracket (A)
Any cr acks in t he sunvi sor bracket c over (B)
Any bends or c r ac ks in t he sunvi sor st ay shaf t (C)
Any cr acks in t he sunvi sor base (D)
8. If t he hol der gr ommet i s damaged or st r ess-whi t ened,
r epl ace it wi th a new one.
9. Inst al l t he hol der (A) i nto t he hol der gr ommet (B) by
t urni ng it 45 c l oc kwi se, and i nst al l t hem i nto t he
body as an assembl y by pushi ng it unti l t he hooks (C)
snap into pl ace sec ur el y.
10. Connec t t he vani t y mi r r or li ght connect or (A), and
i nst al l t he sunvi sor (B) by i nsert i ng t he bracket (C) and
t he pi n (D) of t he bracket c over (E) into t he hol es i n t he
body.
A
D
i
(cont' d)
20-137
Interior Tri m
Sunvi sor Removal/Installation
(cont'd)
11. Whi l e hol di ng t he bracket c over (A), rotate t he
sunvi sor (B) f or war d unti l t he hook (C) snaps i nto
pl ace. Gent l y pull down on t he sunvi sor to make sur e
it i s pr oper l y sec ur ed in t he body. Rotate t he sunvi sor
i nto t he hol der (D).
Grab Handle Removal/Installation
Pr ogr am; cal l 888-424-6857
NOTE:
1. Lower t he gr ab handl e (A), t hen i nser t a smal l flat-ti p
sc r ewdr i ver i nto t he not ch.
2. Pull on t he smal l flat-ti p sc r ewdr i ver wi t h t he
appr opr i at e t ri m t ool (A), and r emove t he c ap (B).
20-138
3. Pi nch t he cl i ps (A) to r el ease t he hooks (B), t hen
r emove t he gr ab handl e (C).
4. Pi nch t he hooks on t he cl i ps (A) wi t h a pai r of pl i er s,
and pull out t he cl i ps of t he bracket .
5. If t he si de cur t ai n ai r bag has depl oyed, r epl ace t he
gr ab handl e wi t h a new one. (see page 24-208)
6. If t he si de cur t ai n ai r bag has not depl oyed,i nspect t he
gr ab handl e f or damage. A damaged gr ab handl e
may c ause t he si de cur t ai n ai r bags to depl oy
i mpr oper l y, possi bl y c ausi ng i nj ury. Repl ace t he gr ab
handl e if it has any of t he f ol l owi ng damage:
Any c r ac ks or damage i n t he gr ab handl e (A).
Any cr acks or st r ess-whi t eni ng i n t he c aps (B).
7. Inst al l t he cl i ps (A) on t he gr ab handl e (B), t hen i nser t
t he c aps (C) f ul l y into t he cl i ps.
(cont' d)
20-139
interior Tri m
Grab Handle Removal/Installation
(cont'd)
8. Posi t i on t he gr ab handl e (A) on t he mount i ng br acket
( B) , and push on t he gr ab handl e unti l t he c l i ps (C)
snap into pl ac e sec ur el y.
c
Headliner Removal/Installation
-Avai l abl e t hr ough t he Honda Tool and Equi pment
Pr ogr am; cal l 888-424-6857
ser vi c e.
NOTE:
Take c ar e not to bend or sc r at c h t he headl i ner .
Be car ef ul not to damage t he dashboar d or t he ot her
i nt eri or t r i m.
us e t he appr opr i at e t ool f r om t he K TC t ri m t ool set t o
1. Remove t he front seat belt l ower anchor f r om t he
dr i ver ' s seat , and r emove t he dr i ver ' s seat mount i ng
bol t s (see page 20-194).
page 22-91), t hen wai t at l east 3 mi nut es bef ore
begi nni ng wor k.
20-140
3. Remove t hese It ems:
2-door:
- Passenger ' s kick panel (see page 20-105)
- A-pi l l ar t r i m, both si des (see page 20-110)
- B-pi llar upper t ri m (see page 20-114)
- C-pi l l ar t ri m (see page 20-119)
- S un vi sor s and hol der s, both si des (see page
20-135)
- Gr ab handl es, t wo pl aces (see page 20-138)
- Dr i ver ' s dashboar d l ower c over (see page 20-166)
- Cei l i ng li ght (see page 22-259)
- Gl ove box (see page 20-174)
4-door:
- Passenger ' s kick panel (see page 20-107)
- A-pi l l ar t r i m, both si des (see page 20-110)
- B-pi llar upper /l ower t ri m, both si des (see page
20-116)
- C-pi l l ar t r i m, both si des (see page 20-123)
- Sunvi sor s and hol der s, both si des (see page
20-135)
- Gr ab handl es, four pl aces (see page 20-138)
- Dr i ver ' s dashboar d l ower c over (see page 20-166)
- Gl ove box (see page 20-174)
- Dr i ver ' s front seat (see page 20-194)
- Cei l i ng li ght (see page 22-259)
4. Remove t he roof c onsol e (A).
-1. Remove t he l enses (B).
-2. Remove t he s c r ews (C), t hen pull out t he front
i ndi vi dual map light (D).
-3. Di sc onnec t t he front i ndi vi dual map li ght connect or
(E). If equi pped, di sconnect t he moonr oof swi t ch
connect or (F).
-4. Remove t he s c r ews (G). Pull down t he front si de of
t he c onsol e, and r el ease t he r ear hooks (H).
-5. If equi pped, di sconnect t he navi gat i on mi cr ophone
connect or or t he Act i ve Noi se Cancel l at i on (ANC)
f ront mi cr ophone connect or (I).
F astener Locations
C : Screw, 2 G : Screw, 2
(Silver) (Black)
A
(cont' d)
20-141
Interior Tri m
Headliner Removal /Inst al l at i on (cont'd)
5. Wi t h aut omat i c di mmi ng mi rror: Remove t he
r ear vi ew mi rror har ness c over . Di sconnect t he
connect or f r om t he r ear vi ew mi rror, and r el ease t he
wi r e har ness f r om t he r ear vi ew mi rror har ness cover
base (see page 20-65).
6. If nec essar y, r emove t he roof c onsol e s c r ew gr ommet
(A) by pi nchi ng out t he hooks (B).
7. If nec essar y, det ach t he hooks (C) by pryi ng out t he
map li ght cl i p (D), t hen r emove t he cl i p.
8. Remove t he roof wi r e har ness (A) by det achi ng t he
har ness cl i ps (B) f r om t he dr i ver ' s si de A-pi l l ar (C).
20-142
10. Fr om under t he dr i ver ' s dash, r emove t he mount i ng
bolt, and r el ease t he hook (A), t hen move t he dr i ver ' s
under -dash f use/r el ay box (B).
. Bol t , 1
11. Fr om under t he dr i ver ' s das h, di sc onnec t t he roof
wi r e har ness connect or (s) (A), and det ach t he har ness
cl i p (B) and t he har ness hol der (C).
12. Fr om under t he passenger ' s dash, di sconnect and
det ach t he ant enna l ead connect or (A), and det ach t he
har ness cl i p (B).
B
13.2-door : Fr om t he right C-pi llar ar ea, di sconnect t he
ant enna l ead connect or (A) f rom t he ant enna modul e
uni t (B), and det ach t he har ness cl i p (C). Pass t he
har ness cl i p and t he connect or t hrough t he gap
bet ween t he proj ect i on (D) of the si de curt ai n ai r bag
bracket and t he gl ass ant enna connect or (E) by pulli ng
t he ant enna l ead (F) to the headl i ner si de.
C
(cont' d)
20-143
Interior Tri m
Headliner Removal /i nst al l at i on (cont'd)
14.4-door ; Fr om t he ri ght C-pi l l ar ar ea, di sc onnec t the
ant enna l ead connect or (A) f r om the antenna modul e
uni t (B), and det ach t he har ness cl i p (C).
15. For some model s: Fr om t he roof c onsol e openi ng,
di sconnect t he moonr oof subhar ness c onnec t or (A),
and det ach t he har ness cl i p (B).
16.2-door : Sl i de both front seat s all t he way back, and
recl i ne t hei r seat -bac ks f ul l y.
17.4-door : Sl i de t he passenger ' s f ront seat all t he way
back, and r ecl i ne t he seat back f ul l y.
18.2-door : Lower t he headl i ner (A).
-1. Remove t he door openi ng seal s (B) f r om eac h roof
ar ea.
-2. Fr om both C-pi l l ar ar eas, r el ease t he hooks (C) of
t he headl i ner br acket s (D) f r om t he hol es i n t he si de
curt ai n ai r bag br acket s.
-3. Wi t h t he hel p of an assi st ant , det ach t he r ear cl i ps
(E) by pul l i ng t he r ear ar ea of t he headl i ner down.
-4. Wi t h moonr oof : Det ach t he front cl i ps (F), t he
magnet (G), and t he Vel c r o f ast ener s (H) by
l ower i ng t he moonr oof openi ng edge of t he
headl i ner .
Without moonroof
C
20-144
Wi t h moonr oof
F astener Locations
E > : Cl i p, 2
(Gr een)
F [ > : Cl i p, 2
(Gr ay)
19.4-door : Lower t he headl i ner (A).
- 1. Remove t he front door openi ng seal s (B) and t he
r ear door openi ng seal s (C) f rom eac h roof ar ea.
- 2. Wi t h t he hel p of an assi st ant , det ach t he rear cl i ps
(D) by pul l i ng t he rear ar ea of the headl i ner down.
- 3. Wi t h moonroof : Det ach t he front cl i ps ( E) , t he
magnet s (F), and t he Vel cr o f ast ener s (G) by
l ower i ng t he moonr oof openi ng edge of t he
headl i ner .
Without moonroof
D > : Cl i p, 2
With moonroof
D , E > : Cl i p , 4
(cont' d)
20-145
Interior Tri m
Headliner Removal/Installation (cont'd)
20.2-door: Remove the headliner (A) from the vehicle.
-1. Lower the headliner.
-2. Move the headliner rearward.
- 3. Lower the front of the headliner below the steering
wheel.
-4. Rotate the headliner to point the right front corner
to the outside of the passenger's door opening and
the left rear corner to the outside of the driver's
door opening.
- 5 . Pull the headliner along with the roof wire harness
(B) and the antenna lead (C) out through the
passenger's door.
NOTE: Do not bend the headliner. Bending the
headliner will crease and damage it.
4 I
B
21. 4-door: Remove the headliner (A) from the vehicle.
- 1. Lower the headliner.
- 2. Move the headliner rearward.
- 3. Lower the front of the headliner below the steering
wheel.
-4. Rotate the headliner to point the right front corner
to the outside of the passenger's front door opening
and the left rear corner to the outside of the left rear
door opening.
- 5 . Pull the headliner along with the roof wire harness
(B) and the antenna lead (C) out through the left .
passenger's rear door.
NOTE: Do not bend the headliner. Bending the
headliner will crease and damage it.
2 0 - 1 4 6
22. If nec essar y, r emove t he c ushi on t ape (A, B, C>
fastening the roof wire harness (D) and the antenna
lead (E) to the headliner (F)
r
then remove them from
the headliner.
Cus h ion tape A: P/N 91902-S2X-003
100x50 mm (3.94 x 1.97 in)
Cus h ion tape B: P/N 91902-S3N-003
50x50 mm (1.97x1.97 in)
Cus h ion tape C: P/N 91903-SJA-000
50 x 21 mm (1.97 x 0.98 in)
Wit h out moonr oof - 2-door
A, B, C [ > : Cushi on t ape
Wit h moonroof - 2-door
A S C [ > : Cus hi on t ape
(cont'd)
20-147
Interior Trim
Headli ner Removal /Inst al l at i on (cont' d)
Wi t hout moonr oof - 4-door
A, B, C[ > : Cushi on t ape
D F
Wi t h moonr oof - 4-door
A, B, C >: Cushi on t ape
23. Inst al l t he headl i ner in t he r ever se or der of r emoval ,
If t he si de curt ai n ai r bag ha s depl oyed, r epl ace t he
headl i ner and r emoved t ri m pi eces wi t h new parts
(see page 24-208).
headl i ner and all r emoved t ri m. Repl ace any pi eces
wi t h t he f ol l owi ng damage:
- Any c r eases or t ear s in t he headl i ner (A)
- Any c r ac ks or br eakages in t he gr ab handl e (B)
- Any damages ar ound t he gr ab handl e hol es (C) or
t he sunvi sor hol es (D) in t he headl i ner
- Any c r ac ks in t he sunvi sor st ay base (E)
- Any c r ac ks i n t he sunvi sor bracket c over (F)
- Ai ry bends or ^ ^ k ^ \rt th*? cjTv/ l c c r ct2
% #
c hc f t (G)
- Any c r ac ks in t he sunvi sor base (H)
- Any c r ac ks or br eakages in t he vani t y mi rror base
(I)
- Any f ast ener bases (J), st i f f eners (K), magnet s (L),
or t he cl i p bases (M) whi c h have c ome off t he
headl i ner
- 2-door: Any headl i ner bracket s (N) whi c h have
c ome off t he headl i ner
When i nst al l i ng t he gr ab handl e, push on t he
handl e agai nst t he bracket (0) unti l t he cl i ps (P)
snap i nto pl ace sec ur el y.
Repl ace t he r emoved c ushi on t ape wi t h new pi ec es.
Chec k that both si des of t he headl i ner ar e sec ur el y
at t ached to t he body.
Make sur e t he headl i ner over l aps t he t ri m pi eces
cor r ect l y (see page 24-210).
Be caref ul not to c r ease or damage t he headl i ner
when rei nst al l i ng it t hr ough t he passenger ' s door
openi ng (2-door) or t he left rear door openi ng
(4-door). Al so be caref ul not to scr at ch t he body.
If t he map li ght cl i ps are r emoved, r epl ace t hem
wi t h new ones.
If t he roof c onsol e sc r ew gr ommet s ar e r emoved or
if t hey ar e damaged or st r ess-whi t ened, r epl ace
20-148
Push t he cl i ps and hooks i nto pl ace sec ur el y.
Rei nst al l t he roof c onsol e (Q) as f ol l owi ng
pr oc edur es:
- Install t he roof c onsol e s c r ew gr ommet s (R) on
t he c onsol e wi t h t he s c r ews (S).
- If equi pped, connect t he navi gat i on mi cr ophone
connect or or t he Act i ve Noi se Cancel l at i on (ANC)
front mi cr ophone connect or (T).
- Set t he r ear hooks (U), and fit t he gr ommet s i nto
t he hol es i n t he body, t hen push on t he c onsol e
unti l t he gr ommet s snap into pl ace sec ur el y.
Do t he battery t er mi nal r econnect i on pr ocedur e
(see page 22-91).
Chec k f or any DTCs that may have been set dur i ng
r epai r s, and cl ear t hem.
Headl i ner - 2-door
Headl i ner - 4-door
L
Gr ab handl e
(cont' d)
20-149
Int eri or Tr i m
Headliner Removal/Installation
(cont'd)
Sunvi sor
Roof cons!
T
Carpet Replacement
Pr ogr am; cal l 888-424-6857
One-pieceType Car pet (4-dor)/Two-pi ec e
Type Fr ont Car pet (2-door/4-door)
4-door (see page 24-21) and the pr ecaut i ons and
ser vi c e.
NOTE:
9 Put on gl oves to protect your hands.
Take c ar e not to damage, wr i nkl e, or t wi st t he car pet ,
Be caref ul not to damage t he dashboar d or t he ot her
i nt eri or t ri m.
Use t he appropri at e t ool f rom t he K TC t ri m t ool set t o
1. Remove t he front seat belt l ower anc hor s f r om t he
front seat s (except 2-door dr i ver ' s seat ), and r emove
t he seat mount i ng bolts (see page 20-194).
begi nni ng work.
Ki ck panel s, both si des:
4-door: B-pi llar l ower t ri m (see page 20-116)
Front seat s, both si des (see page 20-194)
Cent er c onsol e (see page 20-158)
Dashboar d cent er l ower c over , both si des (see page
20-170)
St eer i ng j oi nt c over (see page 17-10)
Parki ng brake l ever (see page 19-42)
20-150
4. Remove t he f oot rest (A) by pul l i ng it to det ach t he
cl i ps.
F astener Locations
> : Clip, 2
5. M/T: Remove t he bol t s, t hen move t he shi ft l ever
housi ng as needed (see page 13-65).
6. A/T: Remove t he bol t s sec ur i ng t he shi f t l ever
mount i ng bracket (see page 14-227).
7 Det ach t he har ness cl i p(s) (A) f ast eni ng t he
dashboar d wi r e har ness (B), and r emove t he gr ound
bolt (C) wi t h a TORX T30 bi t. Di sconnect t he y aw
rat e-l at eral accel er at i on sensor connect or (D).
NUT
(cont' d)
20-151
Interior Tri m
Car pet Replacement (cont 'd)
8. Det ach t he c l i p, and r emove t he ri ght r ear heat er j oi nt
duct ( A ) . Di sc onnec t t he f l oor wi r e har ness
c onnec t or s ( B ) , and det ach t he har ness cl i ps (C)
f ast eni ng t he f l oor wi r e har ness (D).
M/ T
t >: Cli p, 1
A / T
> : Cl i p, 1
C
9. Rel ease t he Vel c r o f ast ener (A), and r el ease t he car pet
(B) f r om t he hooks (C) of both rear heat er duct s. On
t he t wo-pi ece t ype car pet , r emove t he cl i ps (D).
Det ach t he cl i ps (E) f ast eni ng t he car pet to both door
si l l ar eas:
Repl ace t he cl i ps E wi t h new ones.
One-pi ec e t ype c ar pet (4-door)
E > : Cl i p, 5
Two-pi ec e t ype f ront c ar pet (2-door /4-door )
D> : Cl i p , 2 E [> : Cl i p, 3
20-152
10. Whi l e lifting up t he shi ft l ever ( A) , pull out t he car pet
(B) f r om under t he dashboar d, t hen r emove t he
car pet . On t he one-pi ece t ype car pet , pull t he seat
har nesses (C) out t hr ough t he hol es i n t he carpet .
C
11. If nec essar y, f r om back of t he car pet , r el ease t he
hooks (A) of t he base (B) wi t h a flat-ti p sc r ewdr i ver ,
and push up t he pr oj ect i ons of t he hol der f rom t he
base to r emove t he f l oor mat hol der (C).
12. If nec essar y, r emove t he st apl es (A) by pryi ng t hem
wi t h a flat-ti p sc r ewdr i ver , t hen r emove t he hook (B).
13. If t he hook (A) i s r emoved, rei nst al l t he hook to t he
car pet (B) wi t h new st apl es (C); fit t he proj ect i on (D) of
t he hook to t he not ch i n t he car pet , t hen st apl e t he
hook. Bend t he pr oj ect ed st apl e wi t h a flat-ti p
sc r ewdr i ver .
St apl e (for one-pi ec e t ype car pet ):
Hei ght 9 mm (0.35 i n)
Wi dt h 12 mm (0.47 i n)
Thi c kness 0.5 mm (0.02 i n)
St apl e (for t wo-pi ec e t ype f ront car pet ):
Hei ght 13 mm (0.51 i n)
Wi dt h 12 mm (0.47 i n)
On e - p i e c e t y p e c ar p et Two - pi ec e t y p e c ar p et
Repl ac e.
(cont' d)
20-153
Interior Tri m
Carpet Replacement (cont'd)
14. Inst al l t he car pet in t he r ever se or der of r emoval , and
Take c ar e not to damage, wr i nkl e, or t wi st t he
car pet .
One-pi ec e t ype car pet ; Make sur e t he seat
har nesses ar e rout ed c or r ec t l y.
One-pi ec e t ype car pet ; Sl i p t he hol es i n t he car pet
over t he r ear heat er duct s .
Two-pi ec e t ype car pet ; If t he c l i ps ar e damaged or
st r ess-whi t ened, r epl ace t hem wi t h new o nes .
Repl ac e t he cl i ps f ast eni ng t he car pet t o both door
si l l ar eas wi t h new ones.
Make sur e that eac h connect or i s pl ugged i n
properl y.
Push t he Vel c r o f ast ener , t he hooks and t he cl i ps
i nto pl ace sec ur el y.
(see page 22-91).
If nec essar y, adj ust t he parki ng brake c abl e (see
page 19-8).
Two-pi ec e Type Rear Car pet
ser vi c e.
NOTE:
Take c ar e not to damage, wr i nkl e, or t wi st t he car pet .
Be car ef ul not to damage t he dashboar d or t he ot her
i nt eri or t r i m.
Us e t he appr opr i at e tool f r om t he K TC t ri m t ool set to
1. Remove t he f ront seat belt l ower anc hor s f r om t he
f ront seat s (except 2-door dr i ver ' s seat ), and r emove
t he seat mount i ng bolts (see page 20-194).
begi nni ng wor k.
Front seat s, both si des (see page 20-194)
Rear s eat c ushi on (see page 20-241)
2-door: Door si l l t r i m, both si des (see page 20-105)
2-door: Dr i ver ' s f ront seat belt l ower anc hor (see
st ep 2 on page 24-5)
9 4-door: B-pi l l ar l ower t r i m, both si des (see page
20-116)
20-154
4. Remove t he rear car pet (A).
-1. Det ach t he cl i ps (B).
-2. On bottom of both rear si de t ri m panel s (C) (2-door)
or bottom of both B-pi l l ars (4-door), pull out t he
carpet to det ach t he cl i ps (D).
-3. 2-door: Pull out t he edge of t he carpet f r om under
both rear si de t ri m panel s.
-4. Pull out t he seat har nesses (E) t hrough t he hol es in
t he carpet .
-5. Remove t he gr ommet s ( F) f r om t he body.
NOTE: Repl ace t he cl i p D and t he gr ommet F as an
assembl y wi t h a new one.
2-door
B > : Cl i p, 2 D[ >: Cl i p, 2
4-door
B > : Cl i p, 2 D > : Cl i p, 2
(cont ' d)
20-155
Interior Tri m
Car pet Repl acement fcont'd)
5. If nec essar y, remove t he st apl es (A) by pr yi ng t hem
wi t h a flat-ti p sc r ewdr i ver , t hen r emove t he hook (B).
6. If t he hook (A) i s r emoved, rei nst al l t he hook t o t he
car pet (B) wi t h new st apl es (C); fit t he proj ect i on (D) of
t he hook to t he not ch i n t he car pet , t hen st apl e t he
hook. Fr om f ace of t he car pet , bend t he pr oj ect ed
st apl e wi t h a flat-ti p sc r ewdr i ver .
St apl e: Hei ght 13 mm (0.51 i n)
^ , Wi dt h 12 mm (0.47 i n)
7. Inst al l t he car pet i n t he r ever se or der of r emoval , and
Take c ar e not to damage, wr i nkl e, or t wi st t he
car pet .
Make sur e t he seat har nesses ar e rout ed cor r ect l y.
Sl i p t he hol es in t he car pet over t he r ear heat er
duct s.
2-door: Sl i p t he car pet under both r ear si de t ri m
panel s properl y.
Do t he bat t ery t er mi nal r econnect i on pr ocedur e
(see page 22-91).
20-156
Consol es
Center Console Panel Removal /Inst al l at i on
KTC Tr i m Tool Set SOJ ATP2014*
Pr ogr am; cal l 888-424-6857
NOTE;
Take car e not to scr at ch t he front seat , t he dashboar d,
or t he rel at ed part s.
Use t he appropri at e tool f rom t he K TC t ri m tool set to
1. M/T: Lower t he shi ft l ever boot (A) to r el ease the
hooks (B) f r om t he boot, t hen r emove t he shi ft knob
(C).
c
2. Remove the cent er c onsol e panel (A).
- 1. Open t he cent er pocket l i ds (B), and t he cent er
c onsol e ar mr est .
-2. Hold t he cent er pocket l i ds and gent l y pull t hem up
to det ach t he front cl i ps (C).
-3. Det ach t he cl i ps (D) and t he hook (E) al ong t he edge
of t he panel .
-4. Pry up on t he rear cor ner edges of t he consol e b o x
t ri m (F ) wi t h t he appr opr i at e t ri m tool to det ach t he
cl i ps (G), and pull up t he panel to det ach the cl i p (H).
-5. Di sconnect t he f ront ac c essor y power socket
connect or (I). Wi t h seat heat er (for some model s):
Di sconnect the dr i ver ' s seat heat er swi t ch
connect or (J) and t he front passenger ' s seat heat er
swi t ch connect or (K).
-6. M/T wi t h seat heat er: Det ach t he har ness cli p (L)
f ast eni ng t he f ront passenger ' s seat heat er swi t ch
har ness f r om t he boot plate (M).
F astener Locations
C > : Clip, 2 D >: Clip, 7 G, H[> : Clip, 3
(cont' d)
20-157
Consol es
Center Console Panel
Removal/Installation (cont'd)
3. Remove t he i nner cent er pocket (A) f r om t he cent er
c onsol e panel (B) by pul l i ng it up to r el ease t he hooks
(C). Remove t he s c r ews , t hen r emove t he bever age
hol der (D) and t he c onsol e box t ri m (E) f r om t he panel .
F astener Locations
: Screw
A/T, 9
M/T, 13
A
A
4. M/T: Remove t he s c r ews , t hen r emove t he shi f t l ever
boot (F).
5. Inst al l t he c onsol e panel in t he r ever se or der of
Make sur e each c onnec t or i s pl ugged i n properl y.
Push t he cl i ps and t he hook i nto pl ace sec ur el y.
Center Console
NOTE:
Take c ar e not t o sc r at c h t he front seat , t he dashboar d,
or t he rel at ed par t s.
1 . Remove t hese i t ems:
Cent er c onsol e panel (see page 20-157)
Cent er c onsol e rear tri m (see page 20-160)
2. If equi pped, det ach t he har ness cl i ps (A) f ast eni ng t he
f ront seat heat er swi t c h har nesses (B) f r om t he cent er
c onsol e. M/T wi t h seat heat er: Det ach t he har ness cl i p
f r om t he dr i ver ' s si de onl y.
20-158
3 . D i s c o n n e c t t h e c o n s o l e a c c e s s o r y power s o c k e t
connect or (A) and t he auxi l i ary j ack assembl y
connect or (B), and det ach t he har ness cl i p (C).
4. Remove t he sc r ews (A) and t he bolts (B) sec ur i ng the
cent er c onsol e (C).
A : S c r ew, 2 B : Bol t , 4
6 x 1.0 mm
9.8 N m
(1.0 k g f m, 7.2 Ibf f t )
5. Remove t he cent er c onsol e (A).
- 1. Det ach t he c l i ps by pul l i ng out t he front bottom
edges of t he cent er c onsol e f r om both s i des .
-2. Pull up t he c onsol e to r el ease t he hooks (B).
-3. Wi t h rear vent i l at i on: Pull t he c onsol e r ear war d to
di sc onnec t both t he si de duct s (C).
Wi t hout r ear vent i l at i on
> : Cl i p, 2
Wi t h r ear vent i l at i on
> : Cl i p , 2
(cont' d)
20-159
Consol es
Center Console
6. Wi t h rear vent i l at i on; If nec essar y, r el ease t he c l i ps
and det ach t he passenger ' s seat heat er swi t c h
har ness cl i p (A), t hen r emove t he dr i ver ' s r ear
vent i l at i on duct (B) and t he passenger ' s r ear
vent i l at i on duct (C) f r om t he cent er rear vent i l at i on
duct j oi nt (D).
F astener Locations
> : Clip, 4
7. Install t he c onsol e i n t he r ever se or der of r emoval ,
D Make sur e eac h c onnec t or i s pl ugged in pr oper l y.
If t he cl i ps ar e damaged, r epl ace t hem wi t h new
ones.
Center Console Rear Trim
Pr ogr am; cal l 888-424-6857
NOTE:
Take c ar e not to sc r at c h t he cent er c onsol e and t he
rel at ed par t s.
1. Gent l y pull out t he cent er c onsol e rear t ri m (A) to
det ach t he c l i ps, t hen r emove t he t r i m.
Wi t hout r ear vent i l at i on
F astener Locations
l > : Clip, 6
20-160
Wi t h r ear vent i l at i on
Fastener Locations
>: C l i p, 7
2. Wi t h rear vent i l at i on: Di sassembl e t he cent er c onsol e
rear tri m.
- 1. Remove the s c r ews (A,B), r el ease the hooks (C) and
the tabs (D), then r emove the upper tri m (E) and the
rear vent (F) as an assembl y f r om t he l ower t r i m (G).
- 2. Remove the s c r ews (H), t hen separ et e the upper
t ri m and the rear vent .
F astener Locations
A Screw, 4 B,H Screw, 8
3. Install t he t r i m i n t he r ever se or der of r emoval , and
Push t he c l i ps, t he hooks, and t he t abs i nto pl ace
secur el y.
20-161
Consol es
Center Console Armrest Replacement
Pr ogr am; cal l 888-424-6857
NOTE:
Take car e not to scr at ch t he c onsol e.
2. Remove t he sc r ews sec ur i ng t he dr i ver ' s si de panel
(A) and t he passenger ' s si de panel (B) f r om t he
c onsol e box (C), and sl i de t he dr i ver ' s si de panel and
t he passenger ' s si de panel f or war d to r el ease t he ri bs
(D) of t he panel s f r om t he hooks ( E l then remove the
side panel s.
3. For s ome model s: Open t he c onsol e ar mr est (F), and
r emove t he box t ray (G) by pul l i ng it up.
4. Wi t h r ear vent i l at i on: If nec essar y, r emove t he
s c r ews , t hen r emove t he c onsol e bracket (A) f rom
behi nd t he c onsol e box(B).
: S c r ew, 4
5. Wi t h r ear vent i l at i on: If nec essar y, r emove t he
s c r ews , t hen r emove t he left si de duct (A) and t he
ri ght si de duct (B) f r om t he c onsol e box (C).
: S c r ew, 8
20-162
6. Wi t h rear vent i l at i on: Cl ose t he c onsol e ar mr est .
Remove t he s c r ews , t hen r emove t he box t ri m (A)
f r om behi nd t he c onsol e box (B).
F astener Locations
; Screw, 4
7. Wi t h rear vent i l at i on: Open t he c onsol e ar mr est .
8. Remove t he s c r ews . Remove t he left box rai l (A) and
t he ri ght box rai l (B) by pulli ng t hem up f r om t he
c onsol e box (C).
F astener Locations
: Screw, 8
9. Remove the E-cl i ps (A) and t he hi nge pi n (B) f r om t he
c onsol e ar mr est (C) and t he c onsol e box (D).
10. Fr om both rear si des of t he c onsol e box (A), r el ease
t he openi ng spr i ngs (B) f rom t he bosses (C) of t he
box, and cl ose t he c onsol e ar mr est (D). Thi s rot at es
t he openi ng spr i ngs into t he not ches (E) on t he box.
(cont' d)
20-163
Consoles
Cent er Console Armrest
11. Open t he c onsol e ar mr est (A). Whi l e passi ng t he gear
ar eas (B) of both si des t hr ough t he not ches (C) i n t he
c onsol e box (D) and r el easi ng t he ends of t he openi ng
spr i ngs ( E) f r om t he not ches ( F) , sl i de t he ar mr est
r ear war d, t hen r emove it. Remove t he openi ng
spr i ngs f r om t he c onsol e box.
A
12. Install t he ar mr est in t he r ever se or der of r emoval ,
@ Repl ace t he E-cl i ps wi t h new ones.
Make sur e t he ri bs of t he dr i ver ' s si de panel and t he
passenger ' s si de panel ar e engaged to t he hooks of
t he c onsol e box sec ur el y.
Ac c essor y Power Socket Trim
Pr ogr am; cal l 888-424-6857
NOTE:
Take c ar e not to scr at ch t he c onsol e.
2. Open t he c onsol e ar mr est .
3. Remove t he s c r ews , t hen r emove t he ac c essor y
power socket t ri m (A) f r om t he c onsol e box (B) by
r el easi ng t he hook (C).
F astener Locations
: Screw, 4
4. Inst al l t he t ri m in t he r ever se or der of r emoval .
20-164
Dashboard
Inst rument Vi sor Removal /Inst al l at i on
K TC Tr i m Too! Set SOJ ATP2014*
*Avai l abl e t hr ough t he Honda Tool an d Equi pment
Pr ogr am; cal l 888-424-6857
NOTE:
Take c ar e not to scr at ch t he dashboar d or t he rel at ed
par t s.
Us e t he appropri at e t ool f rom t he K TC t ri m t ool set to
1. Adj ust t he st eer i ng c ol umn to t he f ul l tilt down
posi t i on.
2. Det ach t he cl i ps f ast eni ng t he c ol umn bl i nd c over (A)
f r om t he upper c ol umn cover (B) by hand.
F astener Locations
>: Clip, 2
A B
3. If nec essar y, r el ease t he hooks (A), t hen r emove t he
c ol umn bl i nd c over (B) f r om t he i nst r ument vi sor (C).
4. Gent l y pull out al ong t he edge of t he i nst r ument vi sor
(A) to det ach t he cl i ps (B, C) and r el ease t he hooks
(D, E) , and r el ease t he hooks (E) by pul l i ng out t he
vi sor , t hen r emove t he vi sor .
B > : Cl i p , 2 C > : C l i p , 4
5. Inst al l t he vi sor i n t he r ever se or der of r emoval , and
20-165
Dashboard
Driver's Dashboard Lower Cover Removal/Installation
Pr ogr am; cal l 888-424-6857
NOTE;
par t s.
Use t he appr opr i at e t ool f r om t he K TC t ri m tool set to
1. Adj ust t he st eer i ng c ol umn to t he full tilt up posi t i on.
2. Remove t he dr i ver ' s dashboar d l ower c over (A).
- 1. Pull out t he bot t om of t he c over to det ach t he cl i ps
(B).
-2. Pull out al ong t he edge of t he c over
ff% H
*?+?ch t he
cl i ps (C).
- 3. Rel ease t he bot t om hooks (D).
-4. Di sconnect t he VS A OFF swi t ch c onnec t or (E).
B , C > : C l i p , 8
3. If nec essar y, r emove t he s c r ews , and r el ease t he
hooks (A), t hen r emove t he pocket t ri m (B) f r om t he
dr i ver ' s dashboar d l ower cover (C).
: S c r ew, 3
B
4. Inst al l t he c over in t he r ever se or der of r emoval , and
If t he hooks ar e damaged or st r ess-whi t ened,
r epl ace t he dr i ver ' s dashboar d l ower c over wi t h a
new one.
Make sur e t he VS A OFF swi t ch connect or i s
pl ugged in properl y.
20-166
Power's Outer Dashboard Trim
Pr ogr am; cal l 888-424-6857
NOTE:
Take car e not to scr at ch t he dashboar d or t he related
par t s.
1. Remove t he dr i ver ' s out er dashboar d t ri m (A).
-1. Pry up on t he edge of t he t ri m wi t h t he appropri at e
t ri m tool at t he st eer i ng c ol umn si de.
-2. Det ach t he c l i ps.
> : Cl i p, 3
Dri ver' s Inner Dashboard Tri m
Pr ogr am; cal l 888-424-6857
NOTE:
Take c ar e not to sc r at c h t he dashboar d or t he rel at ed
part s.
1. Remove t he dr i ver ' s i nner dashboar d t ri m (A).
-1. Pry up on t he edge of t he t ri m at t he st eer i ng
c ol umn si de wi t h t he appropri at e t ri m t ool .
-3. Rel ease t he hook (B) f r om under t he cent er panel
(C).
> : Cl i p, 2
2. Install t he t ri m in t he r ever se or der of r emoval , and
Fi rst i nser t t he hook under the cent er panel , t hen
push t he cl i ps into pl ace secur el y.
20-167
Dashboard
Center Pocket Removal/I nstal l ation
Wi t hout Navi gat i on Sy s t em
NOTE;
Take c ar e not to sc r at c h t he dashboar d or t he r el at ed
par t s.
A/ T i s s hown; M/T i s si mi l ar .
2. A/T: Move t he shi ft l ever t o 1st.
M/T: Move t he shi ft l ever to R.
3. Appl y prot ect i ve t apes (A) to t he ent i re pocket lid f ace
and t he front ar ea of t he A/ T gear posi t i on i ndi cat or
panel (B) (A/T).
4. Open t he l i d, and r emove t he bol t s sec ur i ng t he cent er
pocket (A).
5. Pull out t he cent er pocket (A), t hen r emove it. Take
car e not to scr at ch t he shi ft l ever knob and t he A/ T
gear posi t i on i ndi cat or panel (B) (A/T).
20-168
Wi t h Navi gat i on Syst em
N O T E :
par t s.
A/ T i s s hown; M/T i s si mi l ar .
2. A/T: Move t he shi ft l ever t o 1st.
M/T: Move t he shi ft l ever to R.
3. Open t he l i d, and r emove t he bol t s sec ur i ng t he cent er
pocket (A).
F astener Locations
: B olt, 4
4. Pull out t he cent er pocket (A), t hen r emove it. Take
c ar e not to scr at ch t he shi f t l ever knob and t he A/ T
gear posi t i on i ndi cat or panel (B) (A/T ).
5. Inst al l t he cent er pocket in t he r ever se or der of
r emoval .
20-169
Dashboard
Dashboard Center Lower Cover Removal/Installation
Avai l abl e t hrough t he Honda Tool and Equi pment
Pr ogr am; cal l 888-424-6857
4-door (see page 24-21) and t he pr ec aut i ons and
ser vi c e.
NOTE:
par t s.
Us e t he appropri at e t ool f r om t he K TC t r i m t ool set to
When pryi ng a flat-ti p sc r ewdr i ver , wr ap it wi t h
2. Rel ease both f ront ar eas of t he cent er c onsol e (A)
f r om t he dashboar d.
-1. Remove t he s c r ews .
-2. Det ach t he cl i ps by pul l i ng out t he f ront bottom
edges of t he c onsol e f r om both s i des .
-3. Gent l y pull up both front ar eas of t he c onsol e t o
r el ease t he hooks (B) f r om t he dashboar d.
F astener Locations
^ ; Screw, 2 > : Clip, 2
3. Remove t he dr i ver ' s dashboar d cent er l ower c over
(A).
- 1. Det ach t he cl i p ( B) .
-2. Gent l y pull t he r ear upper edge of t he c over to
det ach t he cl i p ( C) .
- 3. Pul l up t he r ear ar ea of t he cover to r el ease t he hook
(D) f r om t he r ear heat er duct (E).
-4. Pull t he c over r ear war d to r el ease t he hook (F) f r om
t he heat er uni t (G).
B > : Cl i p, 1 C > : Cl i p, 1
20-170
Center Di splay Vi sor
4. Remove t he passenger ' s dashboar d cent er l ower
c over (A).
-1. Det ach t he cl i p (B).
-2. Gent l y pul l t he front upper edge of t he c over to
det ach t he cl i p (C).
-3. Pull up t he c over to r el ease t he hook (D) f r om t he
rear heat er duct (E).
F astener Locations
B |> : Clip, 1 C >: Clip, 1
5. Install t he c over in t he r ever se or der of r emoval , and
If t he cl i ps ar e damaged or st r ess-whi t ened, repl ace
Pr ogr am; cal l 888-424-6857
Wi t hout Navi gat i on Sy s t em
NOTE:
par t s.
Cent er pocket (see page 20-168)
Dr i ver ' s i nner dashboar d t ri m (see page 20-167)
Passenger ' s dashboar d t ri m (see page 20-173)
Audi o-HVAC modul e (see page 23-115)
2. Remove t he cent er di spl ay vi sor (A).
-1. Remove t he s c r ews .
-2. Pull out t he vi sor to det ach t he cl i ps.
F astener Locations
. Screw, 2 [> : Clip, 6
20171
Dashboard
Center Di spl ay Vi sor Removal/Installation (cont'd)
K TC Tr i m Tool Set S QJ ATP2014*
Pr ogr am; cal l 888-424-6857
Wi t h Navigation S f st em
NOTE:
Take car e not to sc r at c h t he dashboar d or t he rel at ed
par t s.
Us e t he appropri at e t ool f r om t he K TC t ri m t ool set t o
1. Remove t he dashboar d cent er vent (see page 20-178)
2. Remove t he cent er di spl ay vi sor (A).
-1. Remove t he sc r ews (B).
-2. Pif!! out t he upper edge of t he vi sor to det ach t he
upper cl i ps (C).
-3. Pull out t he vi sor to det ach t he si de cl i ps (D).
NOTE: If t he non-woven f abr i c (E) on t he upper cl i ps
ar e damaged, r epl ace t hem wi t h new ones.
F astener Locations
B : Screw, 2 C , D j > : Clip, 6
3. Inst al l t he c over i n t he r ever se or der of r emoval , and
ones.
If t he upper cl i p i s r epl aced, at t ach t he new
non-woven f abr i c (A) ar ound new cl i p (B) as t he
f ol l owi ng pr oc edur es.
- Af t er i nst al l i ng new cl i p to t he vi sor (C), c l ean t he
cl i p and t he vi sor sur f ac es wi t h a shop t owel
dampened i n i sopr opyl al cohol . Af t er c l eani ng,
keep oi l , gr ease, and wat er f r om getti ng on t he
sur f ac e.
- At t ach t he non-woven f abri c wi t h adhesi ve t ape
ar ound t he cl i p.
Non-woven f abr i c:
Thi c k nes s 0.5 mm (0.02 i n)
Wi dt h 20 mm (0.79 i n)
Lengt h 25 mm (0.98 i n)
Non-woven f abr i c adhesi ve t ape:
Thi c k nes s 0.16 mm (0.006 i n)
Wi dt h 20 mm (0.79 i n)
A
20-172
Passenger's Dashboard Trim
Removal/installation
Glove Box Lock Cyl i nder
Replacement
Pr ogr am; cal l 888-424-6857
NOTE:
Take c ar e not to scr at ch t he dashboar d or t he related
part s.
Use t he appropri at e t ool f rom t he K TC t ri m t ool set to
1. Remove t he passenger ' s dashboar d t ri m (A).
-1. Open t he gl ove box.
-2. Pull out on t he out si de bottom edge of t he t ri m by
hand.
-3. Det ach t he cl i ps al ong t he t ri m.
-4. Rel ease t he hook (B) f rom under t he cent er panel
(C).
F astener Locations
> : Clip, 3
2. Install t he t ri m i n t he r ever se or der of r emoval , and
If t he cl i ps are damaged or st r ess-whi t ened, r epl ace
Fi rst i nser t t he hook under t he cent er panel , t hen
push t he cl i ps into pl ace sec ur el y.
NOTE: Take c ar e not to sc r at c h t he gl ove box.
1. Remove t he gl ove box (see page 20-174).
2. Whi l e lifting t he gl ove box handl e (A), pull out one
end of t he ret ai ner (B) wi t h a hook-shaped tool of its
sl ot .
NOTE: Do not r emove t he ret ai ner ent i rel y. Leave one
end of t he ret ai ner in its ori gi nal posi t i on when
r emovi ng t he lock cyl i nder .
3. Remove t he gl ove box lock cyl i nder (A).
(cont' d)
20-173
Dashboard
Glove Box Lock Cylinder
Repl acement (cont'd)
4. Rei nst al l t he end of t he ret ai ner (A) i n i ts sl ot , t hen
rei nst al l t he gl ove box lock cyl i nder (B). Push t he
cyl i nder i nto pl ace sec ur el y unti l t he ret ai ner s naps
i nto pl ace.
Gl ove Box Removal /Inst al l at i on
*Avai l abl e t hr ough t he Honda Tool and Equi pment
Pr ogr am; cal l 888-424-6857
ser vi c e.
NOTE:
part s.
1. Open t he gl ove box.
2. Di sconnect t he gl ove box damper (A) f r om t he pi vot
(B) on t he gl ove box.
3. Cl ose t he gl ove box.
20-174
4. Remove t he bol t s.
^ : Bol t , 2
5. Whi l e hol di ng t he gl ove box (A), r el ease t he gl ove box
st op (B) on eac h si de f r om t he dashboar d by pushi ng
t hem i n, t hen r emove t he gl ove box.
NOTE: If you onl y r emovi ng t he gl ove box, go to
st ep 8. If you r emove t he gl ove box damper , cont i nue
to st ep 6.
Gl ove box damper r emoval
6. Open t he f ront door , and r emove t he pas s enger ' s
dashboar d si de panel (A).
- 1. Pul l out t he front door openi ng seal (B) as needed.
- 2. Gent l y pry t he r ear edge of t he panel wi t h t he
appr opr i at e t ri m t ool to det ach t he c l i ps and r el ease
t he hooks (C).
- 3. Rel ease t he hooks (D).
>: Clip, 3
C
(cont d)
20-175
Dashboard
Glove Box Removal/Installation
(cont' d)
7. Fr om t he dashboar d si de panel openi ng, det ach t he
cl i p (A), t hen r emove t he gl ove box damper ( B) .
A
8. Inst al l t he gl ove box i n t he r ever se or der of r emoval ,
and not e t hese i t ems:
If t he dashboar d si de panel cl i ps ar e damaged or
Glove Box Striker Replacement
S RS c omponent l ocat i ons, 2-door {see page 24-23),
ser vi c e.
NOTE: Take c ar e not to scr at ch t he dashboar d or t he
rel at ed part s.
1. Di sc onnec t t he gl ove box damper f r om t he pi vot on
t he gl ove box (see st ep 2 on page 20-174).
2. Whi l e hol di ng t he gl ove box, r el ease t he gl ove box
st op on eac h si de f rom t he dashboar d by pushi ng
t hem i nsi de (see st ep 5 on page 20-175).
3. Remove t he s c r ews , t hen r emove t he gl ove box
st ri ker (A).
F astener Locations
P>: Screw, 2
4. Inst al l t he st ri ker in t he r ever se or der of r emoval .
20-176
Dashboard Side Vent Removal/Installation
KTC Tr i m Tool Set SOJ ATP2014*
Pr ogr am; cal l 888-424-6857
NOTE;
part s.
Use t he appropri at e tool f rom t he K TC t ri m t ool set to
The dr i ver ' s si de vent i s shown; t he passenger ' s si de
vent i s si mi l ar .
Dr i ver ' s si de: Dr i ver ' s out er dashboar d t ri m (see
page 20-167)
Passenger ' s si de: Passenger ' s dashboar d t ri m (see
page 20-173)
Passenger ' s si de: Passenger ' s dashboar d si de
panel (see st ep 6 on page 20-175)
2. Dr i ver ' s si de: Open t he front door , and r emove t he
dr i ver ' s dashboar d si de panel (A).
- 1. Pull out t he front door openi ng seal (B) as needed.
-2. Gent l y pry t he rear edge of t he panel wi t h t he
appropri at e t ri m tool to det ach t he cl i ps and r el ease
t he hooks (C, D).
3. Remove t he sc r ew. Pull out t he dashboar d si de vent
(A) to det ach t he c l i ps, t hen r emove t he vent .
: S c r ew, 1 | > : Cl i p, 3
4. Inst al l t he si de vent i n t he r ever se or der of r emoval ,
ones.
20-177
Dashboard
Dashboard Center Vent Removal/Installation
Pr ogr am; cal l 888-424-6857
Wi t h Navi gat i on S f st em
NOTE:
Take c ar e not to scr at ch t he dashboar d or t he r el at ed
part s.
1. Appl y prot ect i ve t ape (A) to t he dashboar d mi ddl e
pad besi de both si de edges of t he dashboar d cent er
vent (B). Pry up on t he edge of t he cent er vent wi t h t he
appropri at e t ri m tool to det ach t he cl i ps (C, D).
C > : Clip, 2 D [>: Clip, 2
2. Pull out t he dashboar d cent er vent (A) by hand to
det ach l ower cl i ps and r el ease t he pr oj ect i ons (B)
f r om t he hol es i n t he cent er di spl ay vi sor (C), t hen
r emove t he cent er v ent .
j >: Cl i p, 4
B C
3. Di sconnect t he hazar d war ni ng swi t c h/passenger ' s
ai r bag cutoff i ndi cat or connect or (D) and t he
navi gat i on subdi spl ay connect or (E). Det ach t he
har ness cl i p (F), and r el ease t he wi r e har ness (G) f r om
t he har ness hol der (H).
4. Inst al l t he cent er vent i n t he r ever se or der of r emoval ,
Make sur e eac h connect or i s pl ugged i n properl y.
Push t he har ness cl i p and t he cl i ps i nto pl ace
sec ur el y.
20-178
LJa) i
Side Defogger Vent Trim
Removal/installation
KTC Tr i m Tool Set S OJ ATP2014*
Pr ogr am; cal l 888-424-6857
Dri ver' s Si de
NOTE:
part s.
1. Insert t he appropri at e t ri m t ool into a gap bet ween t he
si de def ogger vent t ri m (A) and t he dr i ver ' s out er
mi ddl e pad (B), and det ach t he l ower cl i ps (C).
F astener Locations
C , D>: C l i p, 3
2. Pull out t he si de def ogger vent t ri m to det ach t he
upper cl i p (D), t hen r emove t he t r i m.
3. Install t he vent tri m i n t he r ever se or der of r emoval ,
Dri ver' s Out er Mi ddle Pad
Pr ogr am; cal l 888-424-6857
NOTE:
part s. *
1. Remove t he dr i ver ' s dashboar d si de vent (see page
20-177).
2. Gent l y pull out al ong t he edge of t he dr i ver ' s out er
mi ddl e pad (A) to r el ease t he hooks (B), t hen r emove
t he pad.
3. Install t he pad in t he r ever se or der of r emoval , and
push t he hooks into pl ace sec ur el y.
20-179
dashboard
Dri ver' s inner Mi ddle Pad
* Avai l abl e t hr ough t he Honda Tool and Equi pment
Pr ogr am; cal l 888-424-6857
NOTE:
par t s.
Us e t he appr opr i at e tool f r om t he K TC t ri m t ool set to
Cent er pocket :
- Wi t hout navi gat i on syst em (see page 20-168)
- Wi t h navi gat i on syst em (see page 20-169)
Dashboar d cent er vent (wi th navi gat i on syst em)
(see page 20-178)
Audi o-HVAC modul e:
2. Gent l y pull out al ong t he edge of t he dr i ver ' s i nner
mi ddl e pad (A) to r el ease t he hooks (B)
r
t hen r emove
t he pad.
3. Inst al l t he pad in t he r ever se or der of r emoval , and
push t he hooks i nto pl ace sec ur el y.
Passenger ' s Mi ddle Pad
Pr ogr am; cal l 888-424-6857
ser vi c e.
NOTE:
par t s.
Us e t he appropri at e tool f r om t he K TC t ri m t ool set to
begi nni ng wor k.
Cent er pocket:
Dashboar d cent er vent (wi th navi gat i on syst em)
(see page 20-178)
Passenger ' s dashboar d si de vent (see page 20-177)
Passenger ' s ai rbag (see page 24-212)
20-180
Column Cover Removal/Installation
3. Gent l y pull out al ong t he edge of t he passenger ' s
mi ddl e pad (A) to r el ease t he hooks ( B) , t hen r emove
t he pad.
4. Inst al l t he pad i n t he r ever se or der of r emoval , and
Push t he hooks i nto pl ace secur el y.
c Do t he battery t er mi nal r econnect i on pr ocedur e
(see page 22-91).
Chec k f or any DTCs t hat may have been set dur i ng
NOTE:
Put on gl oves t o protect your hands.
Take c ar e not to sc r at c h or damage t he c ol umn c over s.
Do not pry t he c over sur f ace wi t h any t ool s.
1. Adj ust t he st eer i ng c ol umn to t he full tilt down
posi t i on, and to t he full t el esc opi c out posi t i on .
2. Remove t he c ol umn bl i nd c over by det achi ng t he
cl i ps f r om t he upper c ol umn c over (see st ep 2 on page
20-165).
3. Tur n t he st eer i ng wheel t o t he left, and r el ease t he left
t ab (A) of t he upper c ol umn c over (B) whi l e pushi ng
on t he l ower c ol umn c over (C) f r om t he f ront si de.
fioficil
Car ef ul l y r el ease t he t abs, and note t he hooks (D) may
break when t he upper c ol umn c over i s pul l ed up t oo
har d.
A
4. Tur n t he st eer i ng wheel t o t he ri ght, and r el ease t he
ri ght t ab of t he upper c ol umn cover t he s ame way as
in st ep 3.
(cont' d)
20-181
Dashboard
Column Cover Removal/Installation (cont'd)
5. Insert a sui t abl e si zed sc r ewdr i ver or equi val ent tool
(A) al ong t he gui de ri b (B) i nto t he l ever hol e (C) in t he
l ower c ol umn cover (D).
G
6. Rel ease t he hook (E) l ocat i ng on t he left si de of t he
upper c ol umn c over (F). The ri ght si de hook (G) of t he
upper c ol umn c over c an not be r el eased f r om t he
i nsi de.
7. Remove t he upper c ol umn c over (A) by li ghtly pul l i ng
it up whi l e r el easi ng t he ri ght si de hook (B, C) of t he
cover .
A
8. Remove t he s c r ews (A, B), t hen r emove t he l ower
c ol umn c over (C).
F astener Locations
A : Screw, 1 B : Screw, 2
9. Install t he upper and t he l ower c ol umn c over s i n t he
r ever se or der of r emoval , and push t he hooks i nto
pl ace sec ur el y.
20-182
Dashboard/Steering Hanger Beam Removal/installation
Pr ogr am; cal l 888-424-6857
S RS component s ar e l ocat ed i n t hi s ar ea. Revi ew t he
S RS component l ocat i ons, 2-door (see page 24-23),
pr ocedur es (see page 24-25) bef ore doi ng r epai r s or ..
ser vi c e.
NOTE:
Have an assi st ant hel p you when r emovi ng and
i nst al l i ng t he dash boa rd/st eeri ng hanger beam.
Take car e not to scr at ch t he dashboar d, t he body, or
t he rel at ed part s.
Take car e not to bend t he br acket s.
begi nni ng work.
Ki ck panel s, both si des:
A-pi l l ar t r i m, both si des (see page 20-110)
Dr i ver ' s dashboar d l ower c over (see page 20-166)
Dashboar d cent er l ower c over , both si des (see page
20-170)
Gl ove box (see page 20-174)
St eer i ng c ol umn (see page 17-10)
M/T: Shi f t l ever housi ng (see page 13-65)
A/T: Shi f t l ever (see page 14-222)
Dr i ver ' s si de
3. Fr om under t he das h, di sconnect the left engi ne
compar t ment wi r e har ness connect or s (A), t he
dr i ver ' s door wi r e har ness connect or (B), t he roof wi r e
har ness c onnec t or s (C), and the left si de wi r e har ness
connect or (D), and di sconnect the left engi ne
compar t ment wi r e har ness connect ors (E) and t he left
si de wi r e har ness connect or (F) f rom t he dr i ver ' s
under -dash f use/r el ay box (G).
4. Wi t h cl i mat e cont r ol : Fr om under t he dash,
di sconnect t he ai r hose (A), t hen r emove it.
(cont' d)
20-183
Dashboard
Dashboard/Steering Hanger Beam Removal /Inst al l at i on (cont'd)
Mi ddl e ar ea (shi ft l ever ar ea)
5. Remove t he cl i p, and r emove t he left rear heat er j oi nt
duct (B). Di sconnect t he f l oor wi r e har ness connect or
(C), t he S RS uni t connect or A , t he parki ng brake
swi t c h connect or (D), and t he y aw rat e-l at eral
accel er at i on sensor c onnec t or (E), and det ach t he
wi r e har ness cl i ps (F). Remove t he gr ound bolt (G)
wi t h a TORX T30 bit.
F astener Location
> : Cl i p, 1
Mi ddl e ar ea (passenger ' s si de)
6. Fr om under the das h, di sc onnec t t he A/ C wi r e har ness
connect or (A).
Passenger ' s si de
7. Fr om under t he das h, di sc onnec t t he passenger ' s
door wi r e har ness connect or (A), t he ri ght si de wi r e
har ness connect or s (B), t he ant enna l ead connect or
(C), and t he ri ght engi ne compar t ment wi r e har ness
c onnec t or s (D). Di sconnect t he dashboar d wi r e
har ness connect or s (E) and t he audi o wi r e har ness
connect or (F) f r om t he passenger ' s under -dash
f use/r el ay box (G). Det ach t he har ness cl i p (H).
A
8. Wi t h pr emi um sound syst em: Di sconnect t he st er eo
ampl i f i er connect or s (I).
9. Det ach all of t he har ness and t he connect or cl i ps.
20-184
10. Det ach t he har ness cl i p (A) and t he cl i p f ast eni ng t he
rel ay (B) f r om t he brake pedal suppor t member (C).
Remove t he bol t s (D, E ) , t hen r emove t he member ,
and di sc onnec t t he TPMS cont rol uni t connect or (F).
F astener Locations
D : Bol t , 1 E : Bo l t 1
22 I Mm
(2.2 k g f m, 16 Ibf-ft)
11 Remove t he cent er f r ame mount i ng bol t s (A) and t he
cent er j oi nt mount i ng bol t s (B), t hen r emove t he
cent er j oi nt bracket (C).
A : Bol t , 2 B : Bol t , 2
12. Remove t he spec i al bol t s (A) f r om out si de t he
passenger ' s door.
- 1. Remove t he c aps (B).
- 2. Loosen t he spec i al bol t s unti l t hey di sengage f r om
t he t hr eads on t he hanger beam si de bracket (C),
and engage t he i nsi de t hr eads of t he col l ar bol t s (D).
The t hr ead lock on t he spec i al bol t s makes t he
spec i al bolts and col l ar bol t s t urn t oget her.
- 3. Cont i nue l ooseni ng t he spec i al bol t s to t urn t he
col l ar bol t s i nto t he f i xed spac e adj ust er s (E) unti l
t he col l ar bol t s engage t he st opper s (F). Thi s c r eat es
a gap (G) bet ween t he col l ar bol t s and t he body.
- 4. Loosen t he spec i al bol t s to di sengage t hem f r om
t he col l ar bol t s, t hen r emove t hem.
(cont' d)
20-185
Dashboard
Dashboard/Steering Hanger Beam Removal/Installation (cont' d)
13. Chec k that t he col l ar bol t s (A) ar e seat ed in t he f i xed
spac e adj ust er (B).
- 1. Insert an 8 mm hex wr enc h i n t he col l ar bolt.
-2. Gent l y t urn t he wr enc h count er cl ockwi se.
-3. If t he wr enc h t ur ns easi l y, cont i nue t ur ni ng unti l t he
col l ar bolt seat s and engages t he st opper (C).
-4. If t he wr enc h does not t urn easi l y, t he col l ar bolt i s
seat ed.
NOTE: If ei t her col l ar bolt was not seat ed, r epl ace
t he speci al bol t s.
14. Fr om out si de t he dr i ver ' s door , r emove t he c aps (A),
t hen r emove t he dashboar d mount i ng bol t s (B).
B ^ : Bol t , 3 C : Bol t , 2
8x 1. 25 mm (2.2 k g f m, 16 Ibf-ft)
22 N-m
(2.2 kgf -m, 16 Ibf-ft)
15. Fr om under t he das h, r emove t he mount i ng bolts (C).
20-186
16. Lift up on t he dashboar d (A) to r el ease it f r om t he
gui de pi ns (B). Car ef ul l y r emove t he dashboar d
t hr ough t he front door openi ng. Take car e not to
scr at ch t he body wi t h t he col l ar nut s on t he
passenger ' s si de.
NOTE: Do not rest t he dashboar d on its l ower cent er
c over openi ng, or it may be damaged. Lay it on its
front or back.
A B
17. Inst al l t he dashboar d in t he r ever se or der of r emoval ,
Make sur e t he dashboar d fi ts onto t he gui de pi ns
cor r ect l y
Bef or e t i ght eni ng t he bol t s, make sur e t he wi r e
har nesses ar e not pi nched.
Make sur e t he connect or s ar e pl ugged in pr oper l y,
e Make sur e t he col l ar bolts (A) turn easi l y by hand in
t he f i xed spac e adj ust er s (B). Ti ght en t he col l ar
bol t s by hand unti l t hey engage t he st opper s (C)
bef ore rei nst al l i ng t he dashboar d.
Bef ore rei nst al l i ng the dashboar d, s c r ew t he spec i al
bol t s (D) into t he col l ar bol t s, and check that t hey
t urn t oget her. If t hey do not turn t oget her, r epl ace
t he spec i al bol t s.
After set t i ng t he dashboar d in t he body, rei nst al l all
of t he mount i ng bolts but do not t i ght en t hem. Fi rst
t i ght en t he dr i ver ' s si de bracket bolts to t he
speci f i ed t or que. Next, t i ght en t he spec i al bol t s to
t urn t he col l ar bolts out of t he spac e adj ust er s unti l
t he col l ar bol t s cont act t he body. Cont i nue
t i ght eni ng t he speci al bolts to t he speci f i ed t or que.
Ti ght en all r emai ni ng mount i ng bolts to t he
Appl y medi um st rengt h li qui d t hr ead lock to t he
bolts sec ur i ng t he cent er j oi nt bracket and t he
dashboar d bef ore rei nst al l at i on.
After t i ght eni ng t he dashboar d mount i ng bol t s,
t i ght en t he cent er j oi nt bracket mount i ng bol t s, and
t hen t i ght en t he cent er f r ame mount i ng bol t s.
Do t he battery t ermi nal r econnect i on pr ocedur e
(see page 22-91).
If nec essar y, adj ust t he shi ft cabl e (see page
14-232).
Chec k f or any DTCs that may have been set duri ng
(cont' d)
20-187
Dashboard
Dashboard/Steering Hanger Beam
Spec i al bol t t i ght eni ng on passenger ' s si de
i
D
A D
8x 1.25 mm
22 N-m
Dashboard/Steering Hanger Beam
Di sassembl y/Reassembl y
Pr ogr am; cal l 888-424-6857
NOTE:
Take c ar e not to sc r at c h t he dashboar d, t he body, or
t he rel at ed par t s.
Take c ar e not to bend t he br acket s.
Us e t he appr opr i at e t ool f r om t he K TC t ri m t ool set t o
1. Remove t he dash boa rd/st eeri ng hanger beam (see
page 20-183).
2. Remove t hese i t ems f r om t he dashboar d:
Inst r ument vi sor (see page 20-165)
Cent er pocket :
Dr i ver ' s out er dashboar d t ri m (see page 20-167)
Dashboar d si de vent , both si des (see page 20-177)
Dr i ver ' s si de def ogger vent t ri m (see page 20-179)
Passenger ' s dashboar d si de panel (see st ep 6 on
page 20-175)
Gauge cont rol modul e (see page 22-351)
mSunl i ght sensor , wi t h cl i mat e cont rol (see page
21-186)
In-car t emper at ur e sensor , wi t h cl i mat e cont rol (see
page 21-184)
Audi o di sk c hanger , wi t h navi gat i on syst em (see
page 23-118)
Fr ont passenger ' s ai r bag (see page 24-212)
20-188
3. Wi t h navi gat i on syst em: Remove t he bol t s, t hen
r emove t he cent er pocket f r ame (A) f r om t he
dashboar d.
F astener Locations
: B olt, 2
5 x 0.8 mm
5 N-m
4. Remove t hese i t ems f r om t he dashboar d:
Cent er di spl ay vi sor :
~ Wi t hout navi gat i on syst em (see page 20-171)
Audi o-HVAC di spl ay:
Dr i ver ' s si de
5. Det ach t he har ness cl i p (A) f r om t he dashboar d.
A
Cent er dashboar d
6. Det ach t he har ness cl i p (A) f r om t he dashboar d duct ,
and r el ease t he har ness hol der (B) f r om t he
dashboar d.
(cont' d)
Dashboard
Dashboard/Steering Hanger Beam Disassembly/Reassembly (cont'd)
Passenger ' s si de
7. Di sc onnec t t he gl ove box li ght bulb socket (A), and
det ach t he har ness cl i ps (B) f r om t he dashboar d duct .
Det ach t he har ness cl i p (C) f r om t he dashboar d.
8. Remove t he sc r ew and det ach t he c l i ps, t hen r emove
t he dashboar d cent er duct (A).
: S c r ew, 1 > : Cl i p, 2
9. Remove t he bolts (A) f r om t he front of t he dashboar d
(B), and r emove t he s c r ews (C) f r om t he back of t he
dashboar d, t hen separ at e t he dashboar d f r om t he
st eer i ng hanger beam (D).
A . Bol t , 10 c ^ : S c r ew, 3
D
10. As s embl e t he dashboar d and t he st eer i ng hanger
beam in t he r ever se or der of di sassembl y, and note
t hese i t ems:
Make sur e t he dashboar d wi r e har ness i s not
pi nc hed.
Make sur e t he gl ove box li ght bulb socket i s
connect ed properl y.
Push t he har ness cl i ps and t he har ness hol der into
pl ace sec ur el y.
20-190
Seat s
2-door
REAR S E A T
Seat-back Latch Replacement page 20-243
Seat -bac k Rel ease Lever /Cabl e
Seat -bac k Cover Repl ac ement , page 20-249
Seat Cushi on Cover Repl ac ement , page 20-253
FRONTS E A T
(Dr i ver ' s)
Act i ve Head Rest r ai nt Inspect i on, page 20-193
Recl i ne Mot or Repl ac ement , page 20-200
Lumber Suppor t Repl ac ement , page 20-201
Sl i de Mot or Repl ac ement , page 20-204
Sl i de Lever Repl ac ement , page 20-206
Tor si on Bar Repl ac ement , page 20-206
Seat Fr ame Repl ac ement , page 20-208
FRONTS E A T
(Passenger ' s)
Act i ve Head Rest r ai nt Inspect i on, page 20-193
Sl i de Lever Repl ac ement , page 20-206
Rear Seat Ac c es s Cabl e Repl ac ement , page 20-207
Seat Fr ame Repl ac ement , page 20-211
20-191
S 6df S
4-door
REAR S E A T
Seat-back Latch Replacement, page 20-243
Seat-back Release Lever/Cable
Armrest Replacement, page 20-244
Trunk Pass-through Lid Lock Cylinder
Trunk Pass-through Lid Replacement, page 20-247
Armrest Beverage Holder Replacement, page 20-248
Seat-back Cover Replacement page 20-251
Seat Side Bolster Cover Replacement, page 20-253
Seat Cushion Cover Replacement, page 20-253
FRONT S E A T
(Passenger ' s)
Active Head Restraint Inspection, page 20-193
Slide Lever Replacement, page 20-206
Seat F rame Replacement, page 20-212
Seat-back Cover Replacement, page 20-221
FRONTS E A T
(Dr i ver ' s)
Active Head Restraint Inspection, page 20-193
Recline Motor Replacement, page 20-200
Lumbar Support Replacement, page 20-202
Slide Motor Replacement, page 20-204
Slide Lever Replacement, page 20-206
Seat F rame Replacement, page 20-208
Seat-back Cover Replacement, page 20-221
20-192
Front Seat Active Head Restraint inspection
NOTE: If t he vehi c l e has been in a col l i si on, al ways
i nspect t he act i ve head rest rai nt , even if t hey appear
r eusabl e, by doi ng t he f ol l owi ng pr ocedur e.
1. Dr i ver ' s seat (manual hei ght adj ust abl e seat )
/ passenger ' s seat : Fol d t he seat -back f or war d, t hen
recl i ne t he seat -back to t he fi rst lock posi t i on, and
adj ust t he head rest rai nt to t he hi ghest posi t i on.
2. Dr i ver ' s seat (10-way power seat ): Move t he seat -back
to t he fully upri ght posi t i on. Rai se t he head rest rai nt
to t he hi ghest posi t i on.
3. Appl y maski ng t ape on t he top of t he head rest rai nt .
4. Make mar ks (A) on both si des at 255 mm (10.0 in)
upwar d f r om t he roots of t he head rest rai nt f r ame (B)
al ong t he back of t he head rest rai nt (C) sur f ac e. Use
t he cent er poi nt (D) bet ween t he t wo mar ks f or t he
measur ement s in st ep 5.
5. Push t he head rest rai nt (A) f or war d, and measur e t he
hori zontal head rest rai nt movement . The head
rest rai nt shoul d move mor e t han 50 mm (2.0 i n)
wi t hout r esi st ance. If it i s l ess t han 50 mm (2.0 i n), or
t he head rest rai nt does not move smoot hl y, r epl ace
the seat f r ame assembl y:
Dr i ver ' s seat (see page 20-208)
Passenger ' s seat :
Above 50 mm (2.0 in)
(Level)
20-193
Seat s
Front Seat Removal/Installation
Pr ogr am; cal l 888-424-6857
ser vi c e.
Do t he ODS uni t i ni t i al i zat i on (see page 24-40), after f ront
passenger ' s seat r epl acement .
NOTE:
Take c ar e not to sc r at c h t he body or t ear t he seat
1. Adj ust t he st eer i ng c ol umn to t he full tilt up posi t i on,
and to t he full t el esc opi c in posi t i on. Adj ust t he
seat -back r ecl i ne t o a mi ddl e posi t i on.
2.2-door passenger ' s seat : Car ef ul l y i nser t t he ti p of a
smal l sc r ewdr i ver (A) t hr ough t he hol e i n t he back of
t he front seat belt l ower anc hor c over (B), and i nto t he
hol e i n t he f ront seat belt l ower anc hor (C). Unl ock t he
l ower anc hor by pushi ng in on t he sc r ewdr i ver .
Remove t he sc r ewdr i ver , and t hen det ach t he f ront
seat belt anc hor pl at e (D) and t he anc hor c over f r om
t he l ower anc hor .
3.4-door : Sl i de t he f ront seat all t he way f or war d.
Car ef ul l y pry up on t he bottom of t he anc hor c over (A)
at t he pry poi nt (B) wi t h t he appropri at e t ri m t ool t o
r el ease t he hooks (C) and t he t ab (D), t hen r emove t he
c over by pul l i ng it upwar d.
Dr i ver ' s seat
C
Passenger ' s seat
20-194
4.4-door : Remove t he l ower anc hor bolt (A).
5. Remove t he seat t rack end c over s (A) f r om t he back of
both seat t r acks.
2-door dr i ver ' s seat (10-way power seat )
A
2-door dr i ver ' s s eat (manual hei ght adj ust abl e seat )
(cont' d)
20-195
Seat s
20-196
6. Remove t he seat mount i ng bolts f r om t he r ear si de of
t he front seat .
: Bo l t , 2
7. Sl i de t he f ront seat all t he way back, and r emove t he
seat mount i ng bol t s.
: Bol t , 2
r emovi ng t he seat .
9. Lift up t he front seat , t hen det ach t he har ness cl i ps (A).
Di sc onnec t t he f l oor wi r e har ness connect or (B)
(except dr i ver ' s seat (manual hei ght adj ust abl e seat )),
t he si de ai r bag c onnec t or ( C) , and t he seat belt buckl e
swi t ch connect or (D). Dr i ver ' s seat (manual hei ght
adj ust abl e seat ): Di sc onnec t t he seat posi t i on sensor
connect or ( E ) .
2-door dr i ver ' s s eat (10-way power seat )
D A E
C
(cont' d)
20-197
Seat s
Front Seat Removal /Inst al l at i on (cont'd)
2-door passenger ' s seat
4-door dr i ver ' s s eat (10-way power seat )
B
c
A D E
C
71 // /
4 door passenger ' s seat
B D
10. Remove t he head r est r ai nt
11. Wi t h t he hel p of an assi st ant , car ef ul l y r emove t he
f ront seat t hr ough t he front door openi ng.
20-198
12. Install t he f ront seat i n t he r ever se or der of r emoval ,
If t he cl i p ar e damaged or st r ess-whi t ened, r epl ace
Ti ght en t he bol t s by hand f i rst , t hen t i ght en t hem to
Ti ght en t he seat mount i ng bol t s to t he speci f i ed
t orque i n t he sequenc e shown. Sl i de t he seat all t he
way back and t i ght en and , t hen sl i de it f or war d
and t i ght en and . The dr i ver ' s seat i s s hown;
t he passenger ' s seat i s si mi l ar .
Make sur e each connect or i s pl ugged i n properl y.
(see page 22-91).
The t r i angl e mar ks (A) on t he anc hor plate (B) and
t he l ower anchor (C) must f ace t he s ame si de. Insert
t he anc hor plate i nto t he l ower anc hor , and make
sur e t hat it i s l ocked sec ur el y.
Seat mount i ng bol t s t i ght eni ng sequenc e
F astener Locations
^: B olt, 4
2-door passenger ' s f r ont seat bel t l ower anc hor
i nst al l at i on
20-199
Seat s
Front Seat Recline Motor Replacement
Dr i ver ' s Seat (10-way Power Seat )
ser vi c e.
NOTE:
4-door dr i ver ' s seat i s s hown; 2-door dr i ver ' s seat i s
si mi l ar .
1. Remove t he f ront seat (see page 20-194).
2. Remove t he seat -back c over /pad:
9 4-door (see page 20-221)
3. Di sc onnec t and det ach t he r ecl i ne mot or connect or
(A), and det ach t he har ness cl i p (B).
4. Rel ease t he push nut (A) f r om t he mot or si de end of
t he connect i ng rod (B), gent l y t ap on t he mot or si de of
t he connect i ng rod to r emove it f r om t he recl i ne
mot or (C) and both r ecl i ne adj ust er s (D).
A
Replace.
6. Remove t he mount i ng bolt, t hen r emove t he r ecl i ne
mot or (A).
F astener Location
: B olt, 1
9.8 N m
(1.0 kgf m, 7.2 I bfft)
7. Inst al l t he r ecl i ne mot or i n t he r ever se order of
Repl ac e t he push nut wi t h a new one. Make sur e t he
push nut i s i nst al l ed cor r ect l y.
Make sur e t he r ecl i ne mot or connect or i s pl ugged
i n pr oper l y, and push t he har ness cl i p i nto pl ace
sec ur el y.
mount i ng bolt bef ore rei nst al l at i on.
Chec k t he front seat recl i ne oper at i on.
5. Remove t he rod c over (E) and t he col l ar s (F).
20-200

Front Seat Lumbar Support Replacement
2-door Dri ver' s Seat
S RS c omponent s are l ocat ed In t hi s ar ea. Revi ew t he
NOTE:
Take c ar e not to kink t he c abl e.
Take c ar e not to t ear or damage t he seat c over s.
1. Remove t he front seat (see page 20-194).
2. Remove t he back c over /pad (see page 20-213).
3. Remove t he cabl e c l amp (A) f ast eni ng t he l umbar
suppor t cabl e (B).
4. Di sc onnec t t he l umbar suppor t mot or connect or (A),
and det ach t he har ness cl i p (B). Remove t he nut s,
t hen r emove t he l umbar suppor t mot or (C).
O : Nut , 2
5. Remove t he l umbar suppor t (A).
- 1. Whi l e pul l i ng t he l ower part of t he l umbar suppor t
to one si de of t he seat back f r ame, r el ease it f r om
t he l ower wi r e (B).
- 2. Rel ease an opposi t e si de of t he l umbar suppor t
f r om t he ot her l ower wi r e.
- 3. Rel ease t he upper part of t he l umbar suppor t f r om
both upper spr i ngs (C).
B
6. Remove t he upper spr i ngs.
(cont' d)
20-201
Seat s
Front Seat Lumbar Suppor t Repl acement (cont' d)
7. Rel ease t he l ower wi r e (A) f r om both act i ve head
rest rai nt li nks (B) of t he seat -back f r ame.
8. Inst al l t he l umbar suppor t in t he r ever se or der of
r emoval , and make sur e t he connect or i s pl ugged i n
properl y.
4-door Dri ver' s Seat (For Some Model s)
NOTE:
mTake c ar e not to kink t he c abl e.
2. Remove t he back panel (see st ep 3 on page 20-221).
3. Rel ease t he hook st r i ps as needed, t hen t urn over t he
seat -back c over (see st ep 5 on page 20-222).
4. Remove t he cabl e band (A) f ast eni ng t he l umbar
suppor t cabl e (B).
20-202
5. Rel ease t he upper wi r e (A) f r om both seat -back si de
f r ames (B) i nsi de t he seat -back.
6. Rel ease t he l ower wi r e (A) f r om both act i ve head
rest rai nt li nks (B) i nsi de t he seat -back.
7. Remove t he l umbar suppor t mot or c over (A).
-1. Tur n over t he seat -back c over (B) and t he pad (C) as
needed.
- 2. Rel ease t he c over f r om t he l ower hooks (D).
- 3. Pul l t he c over upwar d to r el ease it f rom t he upper
hook (E).
(cont' d)
20-203
Seat s
Front Seat Lumbar Support
8. Di sc onnec t t he l umbar suppor t mot or c onnec t or (A),
and det ach t he har ness cl i p (B). Remove t he bol t s, and
separ at e t he l umbar suppor t mo t o r i c ) f r om t he
f r ame, t hen r emove t he l umbar suppor t .
F astener Locations
:B ol t, 2
Front Seat Slide Motor
Replacement
ser vi c e.
Dr i ver ' s Seat (10-way Power Seat )
NOTE;
2. Remove t he f l ex cabl e (A) and t he cabl e housi ng (B).
-1. Rel ease t he housi ng f r om t he hooks (C).
-2. Di sconnect t he cabl e f r om t he wor m gear (D) i n t he
-3. Di sc onnec t t he cabl e f r om t he sl i de mot or (E).
NOTE: Take c ar e not to kink t he c abl e.
9. Install t he l umbar suppor t i n t he r ever se or der of
To pr event wr i nkl es when i nst al l i ng a seat -back
c over , make sur e t he mat eri al i s st r et ched evenl y
over t he pad bef ore sec ur i ng t he hook st r i ps.
20-204
3. Di sconnect t he sl i de mot or connect or (A), t hen
r emove t he sl i de mot or (B) f r om t he sl i de mot or
bracket (C) whi l e di sconnect i ng t he mot or f r om t he
shor t f lex cabl e (D).
C A
4. Pull out t he shor t f l ex cabl e (A) f r om t he wor m gear
(B) i n t he out er seat t rack.
5. Remove the motor end mounti ng (A) f r om t he sl i de
motor (B).
6. Inst al l t he sl i de mot or in t he r ever se or der of r emoval ,
and note t hese i t ems;
Appl y mul t i pur pose gr ease to t he wor m gear ar eas
in both seat t r acks.
Install t he shor t f lex cabl e to t he sl i de mot or bef ore
i nst al l i ng t he sl i de mot or to t he sl i de motor bracket .
Make sur e both seat t r acks ar e all t he way f or war d
bef ore i nst al l i ng t he sl i de mot or bracket on t he
t r acks. Inst al l t he shor t f l ex cabl e to t he sl i de mot or.
Make sur e t he shor t flex cabl e and t he flex cabl e ar e
connect ed properl y.
Make sur e t he sl i de mot or connect or i s pl ugged i n
properl y.
Chec k t he f ront seat sl i de oper at i on.
20-205
Seat s
Front Seat Sl i de Lever Repl acement
Driver's seat (manual hei ght adjustable
seat )/passenger ' s seat
NOTE:
Puton gloves to protect your hands.
Take care not to tear or damage the seat covers.
1. Remove the front seat {see page 20-194).
2. Lift up the front seat, and pull out the slide lever (A)
while prying up the spring (B) from the lever holders
(C) of both seat tracks, then remove the lever.
3. Install the slide lever by pushing on it into the lever
holders of both seat tracks until the springs snap the
slits in the lever.
4. Apply multipurpose grease to the pivot areas of the
slide locks.
Front Seat Torsi on Bar
Repl acement
2-door Dr i ver ' s seat (manual hei ght
adj ust abl e seat )
NOTE:
Put on gloves to protect your hands.
Take care not to tear or damage the seat covers.
When prying with a flat-tip screwdriver, wrap it with
protective tape to prevent damage.
1. Remove the front seat (see page 20-194).
2. Adjust the seat to its maximum height.
3. Release the hook strips from both sides and under of
the seat cushion frame, then loosen the seat cushion
cover (see step 24 on page 20-232).
4. Lever a hooked shaped end of the torsion bar (A)
down using a large flat-tip screwdriver.
20-206
5. Whi l e hol di ng t he t or si on bar (A) t wi st ed, pull out t he
end of t he t or si on bar of t he seat f r ame, t hen caref ul l y
l oosen t he t or si on bar.
6. Remove t he ot her si de end of t he t or si on bar f r om t he
hook (B), t hen r emove t he t or si on bar f r om t he seat
f r ame.
7. Install t he t or si on bar i n t he r ever se or der of r emoval .
Rear Seat Ac c ess Cabl e
Replacement
2-door Passenger ' s Seat
NOTE:
Take c ar e not to kink t he rear seat ac c es s c abl e.
The ri ght r ear seat ac c es s cabl e i s s hown; t he left r ear
seat ac c es s c abl e i s si mi l ar .
2. Remove t he seat c ushi on c over /pad (see page
20-226).
3. Note posi t i ons of t he r ear seat ac c es s cabl e (A), t hen
r emove t he c abl e.
(cont' d)
20-207
Seat s
Rear Seat Ac c ess Cabl e
Repl acement (cont'd)
4. Remove t he sc r ew, t hen r emove t he r ear seat ac c es s
c abl e (A).
F astener Location
^ : Screw, 1
5. Install the access cable in the reverse order of
removal, and note these items:
# Make sure t he access cable i s connected securely.
Install t he access cable i n the s ame positions noted
in step3. Check the rear seat access operation:
Make sure both of the seat tracks unlatches
simultaneously and the seat slides forward when
the seat-back is folded down.
Front Seat Frame Repl acement -
Driver's Seat
Pr ogr am; cal l 888-424-6857
S RS c omponent s are l ocat ed in t hi s ar ea. Revi ew t he
ser vi c e.
NOTE:
If t he si de ai r bag has depl oyed, r epl ace t he seat f r ame
>a,mA r o l >+ / >/ 4 ;+* " A nnf l l
- - |
Fr ont seat -back c over /pad:
Fr ont seat c ushi on c over /pad:
Seat belt buckl e:
Seat posi t i on sensor (see page 24-239)
Si de ai r bag (see page 24-215)
2 0 - 2 0 8
3. Detach the clips, then remove the outer cover (A).
10-way power s eat
Fastener Locations
j>: Clip, 4
Manual hei ght adj ust abl e s eat
F astener Location
>: Clip, 1
4. Detach the clip(s), then remove the inner cover (A).
10-way power seat
Fastener Location
>: Clip, 1
Manual hei ght adj ust abl e seat
F astener Location
>: Clip, 1
(cont'd)
20-209
Seat s
Front Seat Frame Replacement - Driver's Seat (cont'd)
5. Remove t he r ecl i ne i nner c over (A) and t he cent er
i nner c over (B) f r om t he seat f r ame ( C) .
10- way power seat
c
Manual hei ght adj ust abl e s eat
6.10-way power seat : Remove t he rear gear out er c over
(A) and t he r ear gear i nner c over (B).
7. Install t he seat f r ame in t he r ever se or der of r emoval ,
20-210
Front Seat Frame Replacement - Passenger's Seat
Pr ogr am; cal l 888-424-6857
2-door
Do t he front passenger ' s wei ght sensor i ni ti ali zati on (see
page 24-40), after f ront passenger ' s seat f r ame
r epl acement .
NOTE;
i Put on gl oves to prot ect your hands.
4 Use t he appropri at e t ool f rom t he K TC t ri m t ool set to
and rel at ed part s wi t h new ones (see page 24-208).
1 Remove t he f ront seat (see page 20-194).
Front seat -back cover /pad (see page 20-213)
& Front seat c ushi on cover /pad (see page 20-226)
Seat belt buckl e (see page 24-7)
9 ODS uni t (see page 24-237)
Si de ai rbag (see page 24-215)
3. Sl i de t he front seat f r ame r ear war d f ul l y.
4. Whi l e r el easi ng t he t abs (A), di sengage t he hooks (B)
f r om t he rear out er seat wei ght sensor c over (C), t hen
r emove t he f ront out er seat wei ght sensor c over (D).
5. Rel ease t he t abs (A), t hen r emove t he f ront i nner seat
wei ght sensor c over (B).
6. Sl i de t he f ront seat f r ame f or war d f ul l y, det ach t he
c l i ps, t hen r emove t he r ear out er seat wei ght sensor
c over (A) and the r ear i nner seat wei ght sensor c over
(B) f r om t he back of both seat t r acks.
> : Clip, 3
> : Cl i p , 3
(cont ' d)
20-211
Seat s
Front Seat Frame Replacement - Passenger ' s Seat fcont'd)
7. Remove t he recl i ne Inner c over (A) and t he cent er
Inner c over (B ) f r om t he seat f r ame (C).
o. i n d i c m me s e a i f r ame in i n e r ever se or der of r emoval ,
and not e t hese It ems:
ones.
Pr ogr am; cal l 888-424-6857
4-door
pr ecaut i ons and pr ocedur es (see page 24-25) before
Do t he front passenger ' s wei ght sensor i ni ti ali zati on (see
page 24-40), after front passenger ' s seat f r ame
r epl acement .
NOTE:
and rel at ed part s wi t h new ones (see page 24-208).
Front seat -back cover /pad (see page 20-221)
Front seat c ushi on cover /pad (see page 20-234)
Seat belt buckl e (see page 24-13)
ODS uni t (see page 24-237)
Si de ai r bag (see page 24-215)
3. Remove t he recl i ne i nner cover (A) and t he cent er
i nner c over (B) f r om t he seat f r ame (C).
4. Inst al l t he seat f r ame in t he r ever se or der of r emoval .
20-212
Front Seat-back Cover Replacement
. K TC Tr i m Tool Set SOJ ATP2014*
Tr i m Pad Remover , Snap-on A177A or equi val ent ,
Pr ogr am; cal l 888-424-6857
2-door
S RS component l ocat i ons {see page 24-23) and t he
pr ecaut i ons and pr ocedur es (see page 24-25) before
Do t he OPDS sensor i ni ti ali zati on (see page 24-40), after
f ront passenger ' s seat -back cover r epl acement .
NOTE:
Passenger ' s seat : Do not t ouch t he OPDS sensor in t he
seat -back c over /pad, and keep it away f r om oi l . Oi l c an
cor r ode t he sensor c ausi ng it to f ai l .
Dr i ver ' s seat i s s hown; passenger ' s seat i s si mi l ar .
1 Remove t he front seat (see page 20-194).
2. Dr i ver ' s seat (10-way power seat ): Remove t he r ear
seat ac c es s knob (A). Remove t he s c r ew, t hen r emove
t he r ear seat ac c es s t ri m (B).
F astener Location
: Screw, 1
3. Fr om under t he seat c ushi on, r el ease t he el ast i c st r ap
(A) f r om t he seat c ushi on f r ame spr i ngs (B), t hen pull
back t he under c over (C) of t he back cover .
(cont' d)
20-213
Seat s
Front Seat-back Cover Replacement (cont' d)
4. Fr om under t he seat c ushi on, di sconnect and/or
det ach t he connect or (s):
Dr i ver ' s seat (10-way power seat ):
- Si de ai r bag connect or (A)
- Recl i ne mot or har ness connect or (B)
- Seat -back heat er connect or (C)
Dr i ver ' s seat (manual hei ght adj ust abl e seat )/
Passenger ' s seat : Si de ai r bag connect or (D)
Dr i ver ' s s eat (10-way power seat )
Dr i ver ' s s eat (manual hei ght adj ust abl e seat )
Passenger ' s seat
5. Det ach t he har ness cl i p(s) (E), and r emove t he wi r e
t i e(s) (F). Dr i ver ' s seat (manual hei ght adj ust abl e
seat ): Pry up t he hooks (G) of t he har ness hol der (H),
t hen r el ease t he hol der f r om t he seat c ushi on f r ame
spr i ng (I).
6. Dr i ver ' s seat (10-way power seat ): Rel ease t he wi r e ti e
(J) of t he har ness cl i p f ast eni ng t he recl i ne mot or
har ness, t he seat -back heat er har ness, and t he seat
c ushi on heat er har ness t oget her.
20-214
7. Remove t he s c r ews , t hen gent l y pull down t he back
panel (A) to r el ease t he hooks (B) f r om t he seat -back
f r ame, and r emove t he panel .
F astener Locations
: Screw, 2
8. Dr i ver ' s seat (10-way power seat ): Pull out t he si de
ai r bag har ness (A), t he r ecl i ne mot or har ness (B) and
t he seat -back heat er har ness (C), t hr ough t he l oops
(D). Rel ease t he hook st ri p (E), t hen pull out t he
har nesses t hrough t he har ness hol es (F) in t he
seat -back c over (G).
9. Dr i ver ' s seat (manual hei ght adj ust abl e seat )
/ passenger ' s s eat : Pul l out t he si de ai r bag har nesses
(A) t hr ough t he l oop(s) (B). Rel ease t he Vel cr o
f ast ener s ( C) , t he hook st ri p (D), and pull back t he
seat -back c over (E), t hen pull out t he har ness(es)
t hr ough t he har ness hol e(s) (F) in t he seat -back c over .
Dr i ver ' s seat (manual hei ght adj ust abl e seat )
Passenger ' s seat
(cont ' d)
20-215
Seat s
Front Seat-back Cover Replacement (cont'd)
10. Rel ease t he hook st r i ps (A), t hen l oosen t he seat -back
c over (B).
NOTE: The f ront seat wi t h l eat her seat c over Is shown;
t he ot her t ypes of seat s ar e si mi l ar .
11. Remove t he nut , t hen r el ease t he bracket (A) of ai r bag
at t achment wi r e C f r om t he seat -back f r ame (B).
F astener Location
: Nut, 1
6x 1.0 mm
9.8 Mm
(1.0 kgf -m,
7.2 Ibf f t )
12. Rel ease ai r bag at t achment wi r e A and ai r bag
at t achment wi r e B f r om t he seat -back f r ame (C).
20-216
13. Dr i ver ' s seat wi t h l umber suppor t : Remove t he
l umbar suppor t mot or c over (A).
-1. Tur n over t he seat -back cover (B) and t he pad (C) as
needed.
- 2. Rel ease t he cover f r om t he l ower hooks (D).
-3. Pull t he cover upwar d to r el ease it f r om t he upper
hook (E).
14. Dr i ver ' s seat wi t h l umber support : Di sconnect t he
seat wi r e har ness connect or (F).
15. Passenger ' s seat : Remove t he ODS uni t c over (A).
- 1. Tur n over t he seat -back c over (B) and t he pad (C) as
needed.
-2. Rel ease t he c over f r om t he l ower hooks (D).
-3. Pull t he c over upwar d t o r el ease it f r om t he upper
hook (E).
16. Passenger ' s seat : Di sc onnec t t he seat wi r e har ness
connect or (F) and t he OPDS sensor connect or s (G).
(cont' d)
20-217
Seat s
17. Passenger ' s seat : Det ach t he har ness cl i ps (A) 18. Dr i ver ' s seat wi t h l umber suppor t /passenger ' s seat :
f ast eni ng t he OPDS s ens or har nesses (B), and r el ease Det ach t he har ness cl i p (A). Pull t he seat wi r e har ness
t he wi r e har ness f r om t he har ness hol der (C). (B) t hr ough a hol e i n t he seat f r ame, and pull it out
t hr ough t he har ness hol e (C) in t he seat -back c over
20-218
19. Pi nch t he t abs on t he ends of t he head rest rai nt gui des
(A), and r emove t hem f rom t he seat -back.
20. Remove t he seat -back cover /pad (A) f r om t he
seat -back f r ame (B).
21. Pull back t he edge of t he seat -back c over (A) all t he
way ar ound, and r el ease t he uphol st er y r i ngs (B), t hen
r emove t he cover .
NOTE: The l eat her seat cover i s s hown; t he ot her
t ypes of seat c over s are si mi l ar .
22. Remove ai r bag at t achment wi r e B f r om t he out si de
rei nf orci ng cl ot hs (D). Pull out ai r bag at t achment wi r e
A t hr ough the l oops (E) of the i nsi de rei nf orci ng cl ot hs
(F) and t hrough t he l oop (G) of ai r bag at t achment wi r e
C. Remove ai r bag at t achment wi r es A and C.
B
(cont ' d)
20-219
Seat s
23. Inst al l t he seat -back c over in t he r ever se or der of
If t he cl i p are damaged or st r ess-whi t ened, r epl ace
Us e onl y ori gi nal Honda r epl acement seat -back
c ov er s . .
Bef or e i nst al l i ng t he seat -back c over , make sur e
ai r bag at t achment wi r e A , B , and C ar e i nst al l ed i n
t he rei nf orci ng cl ot hs (D) cor r ect l y, and wi r e A and
t hat wi r e C ar e sec ur el y assembl ed.
Rei nst al l ai r bag at t achment wi r es A and B, and t he
bracket (E) of at t achment wi r e C, sec ur el y to t he
seat -bac k f r ame as s hown.
Make sur e t he si de ai r bag har ness and t he seat wi r e
har ness ar e rout ed pr oper l y.
- T G pr event wr i nkl es when i nst al l i ng t he seat -back
c over , make sur e t he mat er i al i s st r et ched evenl y
over t he pad bef ore sec ur i ng t he uphol st er y r i ngs,
t he hooks, and t he hook st r i ps.
Repl ac e all of t he uphol st er y r i ngs (F) f ast eni ng t he
seat -bac k cover (G) to t he pad wi r es (H) wi t h new
ones usi ng c ommer c i al l y avai l abl e uphol st er y ri ng
pl i er s (I).
20-220
. K TC Tr i m Tool Set SOJ ATP2014*
Tr i m Pad Remover , Snap-on A 177A or equi val ent ,
commer ci al l y avai l abl e
Pr ogr am; cal l 888-424-6857
4 - d o o r
Do t he OPDS sensor i ni ti ali zati on (see page 24-40), after
front passenger ' s seat -back cover r epl acement .
NOTE:
Take car e not to t ear or damage t he seat c over s.
Passenger ' s seat : Do not t ouch t he OPDS sensor i n t he
seat -back c over /pad, and keep it away f r om oi l . Oi l can
cor r ode t he sensor c ausi ng it to f ai l .
Use t he appropri at e tool f rom t he K TC t ri m t ool set to
2. Wi t h back panel : Fr om under t he seat c ushi on, r el ease
t he el ast i c st r ap (A) f rom t he seat c ushi on f r ame
spr i ngs (B), t hen pull back t he under cover (C) of t he
back cover .
3. Wi t h back panel : Insert a t ri m pad r emover bet ween
t he bottom of t he back panel (A) and t he seat f r ame
unti l it squar el y engages one of t he c l i ps. Gent l y pry
on t he cl i p unti l it det aches f r om t he seat f r ame.
Repeat for t he ot her cl i p. Gent l y pull back t he back
panel to r el ease t he hooks (B), t hen pull down t he
panel to r el ease t he hooks (C).
NOTE:
The cl i ps usual l y break duri ng r emoval . Al ways
r epl ace t he cl i ps wi t h new ones.
Det ach t he cl i ps and t he hooks in t he number ed
sequenc e as shown.
Take c ar not damage t he back panel or t he cl i p
mount i ng pads.
F astener Locations
t> : Clip, 2
(cont' d)
20-221
Seat s
4. Wi t hout back panel : Rel ease t he bottom hook ( A) , and
unzi p t he seat -back c over (B).
5. Rel ease t he Vel cr o.f ast ener s (A) and t he hook st r i ps
(B), t hen l oosen t he seat -back c over (C).
NOTE: The front seat wi t h l eat her seat c over and t he
back panel i s s hown; t he ot her t ypes of seat s ar e
si mi l ar .
6 Dr i ver ' s seat wi t h seat heat er: Di sconnect t he
seat -back heat er connect or ( A) , and det ach t he
har ness cl i p (B).
7. Remove t he nut , t hen r el ease t he bracket (A) of ai r bag
at t achment wi r e C f r om t he seat -back f r ame (B).
F astener Location
: Nut, 1
6 x 1.0 mm
9.8 N-m
(1.0 k g f m,
7.2 Ibf f t )
20-222
8. Rel ease ai r bag at t achment wi r e A and ai r bag
at t achment wi r e B f rom t he seat -back f r ame (C).
9. Passenger ' s seat : Remove t he ODS uni t c over (A).
needed.
- 2. Rel ease t he cover f rom t he l ower hooks (D).
- 3. Pull t he c over upwar d to r el ease it f r om t he upper
hook (E).
B
F
10. Passenger ' s seat : Di sconnect t he OPDS sensor
connect or s (F).
11. Passenger ' s seat : Det ach t he har ness cl i ps (A)
f ast eni ng t he OPDS sensor har nesses (B), and r el ease
t he wi r e har ness f r om t he har ness hol der (C).
A
12. Pi nch t he t abs on t he ends of t he head rest rai nt gui des
(A), and r emove t hem f rom t he seat -back.
20-223
eat s
13. Remove t he seat -back cover /pad (A) f r om t he
seat -back f r ame (B ).
A
14. Pull back t he edge of t he seat -back c over (A) all t he
way ar ound, and r el ease t he cl i ps (B), t hen r emove
t he cover .
NOTE: The l eat her seat c over i s s hown; t he ot her
t ypes of seat c over s ar e si mi l ar .
15. Remove ai r bag at t achment wi r e B f r om t he out si de
rei nf orci ng cl ot hs (D). Pull out ai r bag at t achment wi r e
A t hr ough t he l oops ( E) of t he i nsi de rei nf orci ng cl ot hs
(F) and t hr ough t he l oop (G) of ai r bag at t achment wi r e
C. Remove ai r bag at t achment wi r es A and C.
20-224
16. Inst al l t he seat -back c over i n t he r ever se or der of
Us e onl y ori gi nal Honda r epl acement seat -back
c over s.
Bef or e i nst al l i ng t he seat -back c over , make sur e
ai r bag at t achment wi r e A, B, and C are i nst al l ed i n
t he rei nf orci ng cl ot hs (D) cor r ect l y, and wi r e A and
t hat wi r e C ar e sec ur el y assembl ed.
Rei nst al l ai rbag at t achment wi r es A and B, and t he
bracket (E) of at t achment wi r e C, sec ur el y t o t he
seat -back f r ame as s hown.
Make sur e t he seat -back heat er har ness (if
equi pped), and OPDS sensor har ness (passenger ' s
seat ) ar e rout ed pr oper l y.
Repl ac e any cl i ps (F) you r emoved wi t h new ones.
To prevent wr i nkl es when i nst al l i ng t he seat -back
over t he pad bef ore sec ur i ng t he c l i ps, t he hooks,
and t he hook st r i ps.
Seat s
Front Seat Cushion Cover Replacement
Pr ogr am; cal l 888-424-6857
2-door
NOTE:
Take c ar e not t o t ear or damage t he seat c over s.
2. Dr i ver ' s seat (10-way power seat ): Remove t he sc r ew,
and r el ease t he hook (A), t he t abs (B), and t he pi n (C),
t hen r emove t he front c over (D).
: S c r ew, 1
B
C /
A
3. Dr i ver ' s seat (10-way power seat ): Remove t he r ecl i ne
c over (A).
-1. Remove t he sc r ew, and det ach t he cl i p.
-2. Rel ease t he t abs (B).
-3. Pull up t he c over , t hen r el ease t he hook (C).
-4. Di sconnect t he power seat adj ust ment swi t ch
connect or (D) and t he l umbar suppor t swi t ch
connect or (E).
-5. Remove t he wi r e har ness (F) f r om t he hooks (G).
: S c r ew, 1 > : Cl i p, 1
4. Dr i ver ' s seat (manual hei ght adj ust abl e seat ): Pull
back t he c ap (A) to r el ease t he hooks (B), and r emove
t he s c r ews , t hen r emove t he hei ght handl e (C).
: S c r ew, 2
20-226
5. Dr i ver ' s seat (manual hei ght adj ust abl e seat ); Remove
t he recl i ne c over (A).
- 1. Remove t he r ecl i ne knob (B) and t he sc r ew.
- 2. Gent l y pull out t he cover to det ach t he cl i p, and
r el ease t he hooks (C, D) and t he t abs (E).
^ : S c r ew, 1 | > : Cl i p, 1
6. Passenger ' s s eat ; Remove t he s c r ews , t hen r emove
t he rear seat ac c es s knob (A).
: S c r ew, 1
7. Passenger ' s seat : Remove t he r ecl i ne c over (A).
- 2. Gent l y pull out t he c over , t hen det ach t he c l i ps, and
r el ease t he hooks (C) of t he r ecl i ne i nner cover (D).
- 3. Rel ease t he r ear seat ac c es s l ever (E).
: S c r ew, 1 > : Cl i p, 4
B A
8. Dr i ver ' s seat (10-way power seat ): Remove t he cent er
c over (A).
-1. Remove t he sc r ew.
- 2. Rel ease t he t abs (B), t hen r emove t he cent er cover .
: S c r ew, 1
(cont' d)
20-227
Seat s
Front Seat Cushion Cover Replacement (cont'd)
9. Dr i ver ' s seat (manual hei ght adj ust abl e seat ): Gent l y
pull out t he cent er c over (A) to det ach t he c l i p, and
r el ease t he hooks (B) of t he cent er i nner c over (C),
r el ease t he hook (D), t hen r emove t he c over .
F astener Location
> : Cl i p, 1
11. Fr om under t he seat c ushi on, r el ease t he el ast i c st r ap
(A) f r om t he seat c ushi on f r ame spr i ngs (B), t hen pull
back t he under c over (C) of t he back cover .
10. Passenger ' s seat : Gent l y pull out t he cent er c over (A)
to det ach t he cl i p, and r el ease t he hooks (B) of t he
cent er i nner c over ( C) , t hen r emove t he c over .
F astener Location
> : Cl i p, 1
20-228
BIB% F g t a f l i i i i y P
12. Fr om under t he seat c ushi on, di sc onnec t and/or
det ach t he connect or (s):
Dr i ver ' s seat (10-way power seat ):
- Si de ai r bag connect or (A)
- Recl i ne mot or har ness connect or (B)
- Seat -back heat er connect or (C)
- Seat c ushi on heat er connect or (D)
Dr i ver ' s seat (manual hei ght adj ust abl e seat ): Si de
ai r bag connect or (E)
Passenger ' s seat :
- Si de ai r bag connect or (F)
- Seat c ushi on heat er connect or (G) (for s ome
model s)
Dr i ver ' s seat (10-way power seat )
Dr i ver ' s seat (manual hei ght adj ust abl e seat )
Passenger ' s s eat
13. Det ach t he har ness cl i p(s) (H) and r emove t he wi r e
t i e(s) (I). Dr i ver ' s seat (manual hei ght adj ust abl e seat ):
Pry up t he hooks (J) of t he har ness hol der (K), t hen
r el ease t he hol der f r om t he seat c ushi on f r ame spr i ng
( L ) .
14. Dr i ver ' s seat (10-way power seat ): Rel ease t he wi r e ti e
(M) of t he har ness cl i p f ast eni ng t he recl i ne mot or
har ness, t he seat -back heat er har ness, and t he seat
c ushi on heat er har ness t oget her.
(cont ' d)
20-229
Seat s
15. Dr i ver ' s seat (10-way power seat )/passenger ' s seat :
Remove t he s c r ews , t hen gent l y pull down t he back
panel (A) to r el ease t he hooks (B) f r om t he seat -back
f r ame, and r emove t he panel .
F astener Locations
: Screw, 2
Rel ease t he l ower and i nsi de hook st r i ps (A).
17. Dr i ver ' s seat (10-way power seat ): Remove t he
l umbar suppor t mot or cover (A).
-1. Tur n over t he seat -back cover (B) and t he pad (C) as
needed.
-2. Rel ease t he cover f r om t he l ower hooks (D).
-3. Pull t he c over upwar d to r el ease it f r om t he upper
hook (E).
18. Dr i ver ' s seat (10-way power seat ): Di sconnect t he seat
wi r e har ness connect or (F).
20-230
19. Passenger ' s seat : Remove t he ODS uni t cover (A).
needed.
-2. Rel ease t he cover f r om t he l ower hooks (D).
-3. Pull t he c over upwar d to r el ease it f r om t he upper
hook (E).
20. Passenger ' s seat : Di sconnect t he seat wi r e har ness
connect or (F).
Det ach t he har ness cl i p (A), t hen pull t he seat wi r e
har ness (B) i n t hr ough a hol e i n t he seat f r ame, and
pull it out t hr ough t he har ness hol e (C) i n t he
seat -back c over (D). The passenger ' s seat i s s hown;
t he dr i ver ' s seat i s si mi l ar .
22. Dr i ver ' s seat (10-way power seat ): Pull out t he si de
ai r bag har ness (A), t he recl i ne mot or har ness (B), t he
seat wi r e har ness (C), and t he seat -back heat er
har ness (D) t hr ough t he l oops (E).
(cont' d)
20-231
Seat s
23. Dr i ver ' s seat (manual hei ght adj ust abl e seat )/
passenger ' s seat : Pul l out t he si de ai r bag har ness (A)
and t he seat wi r e har ness (B) (passenger ' s seat ),
t hr ough t he l oop(s) (C).
Dr i ver ' s s eat (manual hei ght adj ust abl e seat )
Passenger ' s seat
C
24. Rel ease t he hook st r i ps (A) f r om both si des of t he seat
c ushi on f r ame.
Dr i ver ' s s eat
A
Passenger ' s s eat
A
A-
20-232
25. Rel ease t he hook st r i ps (A) f r om under t he seat
c ushi on. The dr i ver ' s manual hei ght adj ust abl e seat i s
s hown; t he ot her t ypes of seat s ar e si mi l ar .
26. Remove t he seat c ushi on cover /pad (A) f r om t he seat
f r ame (B).
27. Rel ease t he uphol st er y r i ngs (A) f rom under t he seat
c ushi on (B).
A
Replace.
28. Pul l back t he edge of t he seat cushi on cover (A) all t he
way ar ound, and r el ease t he uphol st ery ri ngs (B), t hen
r emove t he cover .
B
(cont' d)
20-233
Seat s
29. Inst al l t he c ushi on c over i n t he r ever se or der of
If t he cl i p ar e damaged or st r ess-whi t ened, r epl ace
To prevent wr i nkl es when i nst al l i ng t he seat
c ushi on c over , make sur e t he mat eri al i s st r et ched
evenl y over t he pad bef ore sec ur i ng t he uphol st er y
r i ngs and hook st r i ps.
Repl ace all of t he uphol st er y r i ngs (A) f ast eni ng t he
seat c ushi on c over (B) to t he pad wi r es (C) wi t h new
pl i er s (D).
Pr ogr am; cal l 888-424-6857
4-door
NOTE:
avoi d damage when r emovi ng c omponent s,
2. Dr i ver ' s seat (10-way power seat ): Remove t he s c r ew,
and r el ease t he hooks (A), t he t abs (B), and t he pi n (C),
t hen r emove t he f ront c over (D).
: S c r ew, 1
20*
m
234
3. Dr i ver ' s seat (10-way power seat ): Remove t he recl i ne
c over (A).
- 1. Remove t he s c r ew, and det ach t he cl i p.
- 2. Rel ease t he t abs (B).
- 3. Pull up t he c over , t hen r el ease t he hook (C) and t he
t ab (D).
-4. Remove t he upper recl i ne i nner cover (E).
- 5. Di sconnect t he power seat adj ust ment swi t ch
connect or (F) and t he l umbar suppor t swi t ch
connect or (G) (for some model s).
- 6. Remove t he wi r e har ness (H) f r om t he hooks (I).
: S c r ew, 1 | > : Cl i p, 1
4. Dr i ver ' s seat (manual hei ght adj ust abl e seat ): Pull
back t he c ap (A) to r el ease t he hooks (B), and r emove
t he s c r ews , t hen r emove t he hei ght adj ust er handl e
(C).
: S c r ew, 2
5. Dr i ver ' s seat (manual hei ght adj ust abl e seat ): Remove
t he r ecl i ne cover (A).
- 2. Gent l y pull out t he c over , t hen det ach t he cl i p, and
r el ease t he hooks (C, D) and t he t abs ( E) .
: S c r ew, 1 > : Cl i p, 1
6. Passenger ' s seat : Remove t he r ecl i ne c over (A).
- 2. Gent l y pull out t he c over , t hen det ach t he cl i p and
r el ease t he hooks (C) and t he t abs (D).
: S c r ew, 1 > : Cl i p, 1
(cont' d)
Seat s
7. Dr i ver ' s seat (10-way power seat ); Remove t he cent er
c over (A).
-1. Remove-t he sc r ew.
- 2. Rel ease t he t abs (B).
-3. Pull up t he c over , t hen r el ease t he t ab (C).
^: Screw, 1
8. Dr i ver ' s seat (manual hei ght adj ust abl e seat )/ '
passenger ' s seat : Gent l y pull out t he cent er c over (A)
to det ach t he cl i p, and r el ease t he t abs (B), t hen
r emove t he c over . The passenger ' s seat i s s hown; t he
manual hei ght adj ust abl e seat i s si mi l ar .
[ > : Cl i p, 1
9. Wi t h back panel : Fr om under t he seat c ushi on, r el ease
t he el ast i c st r ap (A) f r om t he seat c ushi on f r ame
spr i ngs (B), t hen pull back t he under cover (C) of t he
back c over .
10. Wi t h seat heat er ; Di sc onnec t t he seat c ushi on heat er
connect or (A) and det ach t he har ness cl i p (B). Pry up
t he hooks (C) of t he har ness hol der (D), t hen r el ease
t he hol der f r om t he seat c ushi on f r ame spr i ng (E).
A C
B
20-236
11. Rel ease t he Vel cr o f ast ener s (A), t hen pull back t he
har ness hol der cover s (B) f ast eni ng t he si de ai rbag
har ness (C) and t he seat wi r e har ness (D) (except
dr i ver ' s seat (manual hei ght adj ust abl e seat )).
13. Dr i ver ' s seat (10-way power seat ): Rel ease t he hook
st r i ps (A) f r om both si des of t he seat c ushi on f r ame.
A
14. Dr i ver ' s seat (manual hei ght adj ust abl e seat )/
passenger ' s seat : Det ach t he cl i p, and r el ease t he
hook st r i ps (A) f r om both si des of t he seat c ushi on
f r ame. The passenger ' s seat i s s hown; t he dr i ver ' s
manual hei ght adj ust abl e seat i s si mi l ar .
F astener Location
t > : Cl i p, 1
(cont' d)
20-237
Seat s
front Seat Cushion Cover Replacement (cont'd)
15. Rel ease t he hook st r i ps (A) f r om under t he seat
c ushi on.
A
Dr i ver ' s seat (manual hei ght adj ust abl e
s eat )/ pas s enger ' s s eat
16. Remove t he seat c ushi on cover /pad (A) f r om t he seat
f r ame ( B) .
17. Rel ease t he hooks (A) f r om under t he seat c ushi on (B).
20-238
Rear Seat Removal/lnstall&fto@Di]
18. Pull back t he edge of t he seat c ushi on c over (A) all t he Seat -bac k
way ar ound, and r el ease t he cl i ps (B), t hen r emove
t he c over . NOTE; Take c ar e not to sc r at c h t he body or t ear t he seat
c over s.
if t he cl i p ar e damaged or st r ess-whi t ened, r epl ace
To prevent wr i nkl es when i nst al l i ng t he seat
c ushi on c over , make sur e t he mat er i al i s st r et ched
evenl y over t he pad bef ore sec ur i ng t he c l i ps, t he
hooks, and t he hook st r i ps.
Repl ac e any cl i ps (A) you r emoved wi t h new ones.
(cont' d)
20-239
Seat s
Rear Seat Removal/Installation (cont' d)
3= Remove t he seat -back (A).
- 1. Pull out t he cent er seat belt (B) t hr ough t he sl i t (C) in
t he seat belt gui de (D).
- 2. 2-door ; Pul l out t he seat -back c over ( E) f r om
bet ween t he seat -back and t he t runk si de t ri m
panel s (F), t hen r emove t he bol t s.
-3.4-door : Rel ease t he Vel cr o f ast ener s (G), and pul l
back t he seat -back c over (H), t hen r emove t he bol t s.
-4. Rel ease t he hooks (!) of t he pi vot br acket s (J).
2- d o o r
F astener Locations
) : B ol t 2
4-door
F astener Locations
: B olt, 2
20-240
4.2-door : Remove t he r ear si de t ri m panel (see page
20-127).
5. Det ach t he har ness cl i p (A), and r emove t he bolt, t hen
r emove t he pi vot bracket (B). 4-door i s shown; 2-door
i s si mi l ar .
^ : Bol t , 1
A
6. I ns t al l t he seat -back in t he r ever se or der of r emoval ,
Gui de t he cent er seat belt over t he f ront of t he
seat -back as you i nst al l t he seat -back.
Make sur e t her e ar e no t wi st s or ki nks i n t he cent er
seat belt bef ore at t achi ng t he r ear seat -back.
Seat Cushi on
NOTE:
Take c ar e not to sc r at c h t he body or t ear t he seat
c over s.
1. Remove t he bolt bet ween t he seat -back (A) and t he
seat c ushi on (B).
: Bol t , 1
2. Pull up eac h f ront edge of the seat c ushi on (A) to
r el ease t he hooks (B), t hen pull back t he seat c ushi on,
and r emove it.
3. Install t he seat c ushi on in t he r ever se or der of
Make sur e t her e ar e no t wi st s or ki nks in t he seat
bel t s bef ore at t achi ng t he seat c ushi on.
Sl i p t he seat belt buckl es t hrough t he sl i t s in t he
seat c ushi on as you i nstall it.
(cont ' d)
20-241
Seat s
Rear Seat Removal/Installation (cont'd)
Seat Si de Bol st er - 4-door
NOTE; Take c ar e not to sc r at c h t he body or t ear t he seat
c over s.
1. Remove t he seat c ushi on.
2. Remove t he bolt sec ur i ng t he seat si de bol st er (A).
F astener Location
: Bolt, 1
4. Lift up t he seat si de bol st er (A) t o r el ease t he hooks
(B), t hen r emove t he si de bol st er.
5. Inst al l t he si de bol st er i n t he r ever se or der of r emoval ,
Gui de t he seat bel t s over t he front of t he seat si de
bol st er as you i nst al l t he bol st er.
Make sur e t her e ar e no t wi st s or ki nks i n t he seat
bel t s bef ore at t achi ng t he seat si de bol st er.
20-242
Rear Seat-back Latch Replacement
NOTE:
Take car e not t o bend or scr at ch t he i nteri or t r i m.
1. Remove t he r ear shel f (see page 20-128).
2. Di sconnect t he seat -back r el ease cabl e (A) f r om t he
seat -back lat ch ( B) , and r emove t he bol t s, t hen
r emove t he l at ch. Take car e not to damage t he cabl e
f ast ener ( C) .
F astener Locations
:B ot, 2
Rear Seat-back Release
Lever/Cable Removal/lmgtdiMo^
NOTE:
Take c ar e not to bend or sc r at c h t he i nteri or t ri m.
1. Remove t he rear shel f (see page 20-128).
2. Di sconnect t he seat -back r el ease c abl e (A) f rom t he
seat -back lat ch ( B) , and det ach t he cabl e cl i p (C)
(2-door) or t he cabl e cl i p (D) (4-door). Take car e not to
damage t he cabl e f ast ener (E).
C > : Cl i p, 1 D > : Cl i p, 1
(2-door) (4-door)
3. Open t he trunk li d.
3. Install t he seat -back latch in t he r ever se or der of
Make sur e t he r el ease c abl e i s connect ed sec ur el y.
Make sur e t he seat -back l ocks sec ur el y and unl ocks
properl y.
(cont' d)
20-243
Seat s
Rear Seat-back Release Lever/Cable
4. Fr om t he t runk c ompar t ment , push t he t ab (A) t o
r el ease t he hook (B), and sl i de t he seat -back r el ease
l ever (C) i nwar d to r el ease t he hook (D), t hen r emove
it by pul l i ng it out.
5. Install t he r el ease l ever /cabl e in t he r ever se or der of
wi t h a new one.
Make sur e t he r el ease c abl e i s connect ed sec ur el y.
Make sur e t he seat -back l ocks sec ur el y and unl ocks
properl y.
Rear Seat Ar mr est Repl acement
Pr ogr am; cal l 888-424-6857
4-door
NOTE:
Use t he appr opr i at e tool f r om the K TC t ri m tool set to
2. Remove t he t runk pass-t hr ough lid (see page 20-247).
3. Rel ease t he hook st ri p (A), t hen turn over t he
seat -back c over as nec essar y.
20-244
^
r ;
- > ^
4 Remove t he cl i p (A) f r om t he ar mr est pi vot shaf t (B).
A
5. Remove t he ar mr est cl i p (B) f r om t he sl i t in t he col l ar
A by pi nchi ng t he cl i p.
6. Sl i de t he ar mr est (A) t owar d t he dr i ver ' s si de, and
r emove t he pi vot shaf t (B) f r om t he col l ar (C).
7. Remove t he pi vot shaf t (A) f r om t he col l ar (B), t hen
r emove t he ar mr est (C).
(cont' d)
20-245
Seat s
Rear Seat Ar mr est Repl acement
(cont' d)
8. Remove t he col l ar s (A) f r om t he seat -back (B).
9. Install t he ar mr est in t he r ever se or der of r emoval ,
and pr event wr i nkl es when i nst al l i ng a seat -back
c over , make sur e t he mat er i al i s st r et ched evenl y over
t he pad bef ore sec ur i ng t he hook st r i ps.
Trunk Pass-through Lid Lock
Cf linder Replacement
Pr ogr am; cal l 888-424-6857
4-door
NOTE:
Take c ar e not to scr at ch t he t runk pass-t hr ough l i d.
1. Pry up t he handl e (A) wi t h t he appr opr i at e t ri m t ool at
both hook ar eas (B) on t he f or war d si de of t he t runk
pass-t hr ough lid (C). Then sl i de t he handl e hal f -way
up.
20-246
Trunk Pass-through Lid
Replacement
2. Remove t he handl e (A) f r om t he trunk pass-t hr ough
lid (B) by sl i di ng it up.
3. Remove t he ret ai ner cl i p (A), t hen r emove t he t runk
pass-t hr ough lid lock cyl i nder (B) f r om t he handl e (C).
B A
4. Install t he lock cyl i nder i n t he r ever se or der of
Install t he ret ai ner cl i p on t he handl e, t hen i nst al l
t he lock cyl i nder . Be sur e t he cl i p i s f ul l y seat ed i n
t he sl ot on t he lock cyl i nder .
Make sur e t he t runk pass-t hr ough lid opens
properl y and l ocks sec ur el y.
4-door
NOTE: Take c ar e not t o t ear or damage t he seat c over s.
1 _ Fol d down t he r ear seat -back.
2. Remove t he s c r ews , and r el ease t he hooks (A), t hen
r emove t he t runk pass-t hr ough l i d (B).
: S c r ew, 2
3. Inst al l t he t runk pass-t hr ough lid in t he r ever se or der
of r emoval .
20-247
Seat s
Rear Seat Ar mr est Beverage Holder Repl acement
Pr ogr am; cal l 888-424-6857
4-door
NOTE:
Take c ar e not t o t ear or damage t he seat c over s.
Us e t he appr opr i at e t ool f r om t he K TC t ri m t ool set t o
1. Push on t he r ear hooks (A) wi t h t he appr opr i at e t ri m
tool to pull up t he ar mr est bever age hol der (B), t hen
r el ease t he hooks f r om t he wi r e (C).
B
\
C A
2. Rel ease t he f ront hooks (A) f r om t he wi r e (B), t hen
r emove t he ar mr est bever age hol der (C).
C
3. Inst al l t he bever age hol der i n t he r ever se or der of
r emoval . Make sur e t he f ront hooks ar e i nst al l ed
sec ur el y to t he wi r e, t hen push down on t he bever age
hol der , and i nst al l t he rear hooks into t he wi r e
sec ur el y.
20-248
Rear Seat-back Cower Replacement
2-door
NOTE:
1. Remove t he seat -back (see page 20-239).
2. Remove all of t he head r est r ai nt s.
3. Remove t he sc r ew, t hen r emove t he cent er belt gui de
(A).
F astener Location
: Screw, 1
4. Rel ease t he l ower hook st r i ps (A) and t he si de hook
st r i ps (B).
(cont' d)
20-249
Seat s
Rear Seat-back Cover Replacement (cont' d)
6. Pull out t he seat -back f r ame (A) f r om t he seat -back
c over /pad (B), t hen r emove t he head rest rai nt gui des
(C) and t he cent er head rest rai nt gui des (D) whi l e
pi nchi ng t he end of t he gui des.
7. Remove t he seat -back c over /pad f r om t he seat -back
f r ame.
8. Pul l back t he edge of t he seat -back c over (A) al l t he
way ar ound, and r emove t he uphol st er y r i ngs (B).
Rel ease t he hooks (C) of t he lat eral wi r es (D) f r om t he
l ongi t udi nal wi r es (E) on t he pad, and r emove t he
r emai ni ng uphol st er y r i ngs, t hen r emove t he
seat -back c over .
NOTE: The seat -back cover except t he l eat her
seat -back c over i s shown; t he l eat her seat -back c over
i s si mi l ar .
D D
9. Inst al l t he seat -back cover i n t he r ever se or der of
To pr event wr i nkl es when i nst al l i ng t he seat -back
c over , make sur e t he mat eri al i s st r et ched evenl y
over t he pad bef ore sec ur i ng t he uphol st er y r i ngs
seat -back c over (B) to t he pad wi r es (C) wi t h new
pl i er s (D).
20-250
4-door
NOTE:
Take c ar e not to t ear or damage t he seat c over s..
1. Remove t he seat -back (see page 20-239).
o Al l of t he head rest rai nt s
Ar mr est (see page 20-244)
Tr unk pass-t hr ough lid (see page 20-247)
3. Remove t he sc r ew, t hen r emove t he cent er bel t gui de
(A).
: S c r ew, 1
4. Rel ease t he l ower Vel c r o f ast ener s (A) and t he si de
hook st r i ps (B).
A
5. Tur n over t he seat -back c over (A), t hen r el ease t he
hook st r i ps (B), and r emove t he c l i ps.
>: Clip, 8
(cont ' d)
20-251
Seat s
Rear Seat-back Cover Replacement (cont'd)
6. Pull out t he seat -back f r ame (A) f rom t he seat -bac k
cover /pad (B), t hen r emove t he head rest rai nt gui des
(C) and t he cent er head rest rai nt gui des (D) whi l e
pi nchi ng t he end of t he gui des.
7. Remove t he seat -back c over /pad f r om t he seat -back
f r ame.
8. Pull back t he edge of t he seat -back c over (A) al l t he
way ar ound, and r el ease t he hooks (B) of t he l at eral
wi r es (C) f r om t he l ongi t udi nal wi r es (D) on t he pad,
and r emove t he uphol st er y r i ngs ( E) , t hen r emove t he
seat -back c over .
NOTE: The l eat her seat -back c over i s s hown; t he ot her
t ypes of t he seat -back c over s ar e si mi l ar .
Replace.
i . Inst al l t he seat -bac k c over i n t he r ever se or der of
wi t h a new one.
Push t he c l i ps Into pl ace sec ur el y.
To pr event wr i nkl es when Inst al l i ng t he seat -back
over t he pad bef ore sec ur i ng t he uphol st er y r i ngs
seat -back c over (B) to t he pad wi r es (C) wi t h new
pl i er s (D). "
D
20-252
Rear Seat Si de Bolster Cover
Repl acement
4-door
NOTE: Take car e not to t ear or damage t he seat c over s.
1. Remove t he seat si de bol st er (see page 20-242).
2. Rel ease all t he hook st r i ps (A), f ol d back t he seat si de
bol st er c over ( B) , and r el ease t he cover f r om t he
ret ai ni ng hooks (C).
. Install t he bol st er c over in t he r ever se or der of
r emoval . To prevent wr i nkl es when i nst al l i ng a si de
bol st er c over , make sur e t he mat eri al i s st r et ched
evenl y over t he pad bef ore sec ur i ng t he hook st r i ps
and t he ret ai ni ng hooks.
Rear Seat Cushi on Cover
Repl acement
NOTE:
1. Remove t he seat c ushi on (see page 20-241).
2. Fr om t he back of t he seat -back, r el ease all t he
uphol st er y r i ngs (A), and f ol d back t he seat c ushi on
cover ( B) .
2-door
4-door
(cont' d)
20-253
Seat s
Rear Seat Cushion Cover Replacement (cont'd)
3. Pul l back t he edge of t he seat c ushi on c over (A) all t he
way ar ound, and r el ease t he uphol st er y r i ngs (B), and
r el ease the hooks (C) of t he lat eral wi r es (D) f r om t he
l ongi t udi nal wi r es (E) on t he pad, t hen r emove t he
seat c ushi on cover .
NOTE: The l eat her seat c ushi on c over i s s hown; t he
ot her t ypes of t he seat c ushi on c over ar e si mi l ar .
2- d o o r
To pr event wr i nkl es when i nst al l i ng t he seat
c ushi on c over , make sur e t he mat eri al i s st r et ched
evenl y over t he pad bef ore sec ur i ng t he uphol st er y
r i ngs.
Repl ac e all of t he uphol st er y ri ngs (A) f ast eni ng t he
seat c ushi on c over (B) to t he pad wi r es (C) wi t h new
pl i er s (D).
20-254
Bumpers "
Front Bumper Removal/Installation
NOTE:
i nst al l i ng t he front bumper .
Take c ar e not to sc r at c h t he f ront bumper or t he body.
9 2-door (see page 20-274)
2. Remove t he sc r ews (A) and t he cl i ps (B, C) sec ur i ng
t he front bumper (D).
NOTE: To r el ease t he c l i ps, pry up on t he cent er pi n at
t he not ch (E).
2-door
A : S c r ew, 2 B > Cl i p, 8 C > : Cl i p, 2
4-door
A . S c r ew, 2 B > : Cl i p, 8 C > : Cl i p, 2
3. Pull t he f ront bumper (A) at t he wheel ar c h ar eas to
r el ease it f r om t he hooks (B) on t he si de spac er s (C).
2-door
B
(cont' d)
20-255
Bumpers
Front Bumper Removal/Installation (cont' d)
4-door
B
4. 2-door: Wi t h t he hel p of an assi st ant , pull both si des of
t he f ront bumper (A) away f r om t he si de spac er s (B).
Then pull out t he f ront bumper to r el ease t he hooks
(C) f r om t he upper beams (D).
5.4-door : Wi t h t he hel p of an assi st ant , pull both si des of
t he f ront bumper (A) away f rom t he si de spac er s (B).
Then pull out t he bumper to r el ease t he hooks (C)
f r om t he upper beams (D), and r el ease t he bumper
f r om t he pi ns (E) on both headl i ght s.
NOTE: When r el easi ng t he l ast hook, r el ease it whi l e
hol di ng t he front bumper to prevent damagi ng t he
pi n.
20-256
6. Remove t he f ront bumper (A).
2-door.
7. If nec essar y, r emove t he bol t s, and r el ease t he hooks
( A) , t hen r emove t he front bumper absor ber (B) f r om
t he front bumper beam ( C) .
6x 1.0 mm
9.8 N-m
(1.0 k g f m, 7.2 Ibf f t )
(cont' d)
20-257
Bumpers
Front Bumper Removal /Inst al l at i on
(cont' d)
8.2-door : If nec essar y, r emove t he bol t s (A) and t he cl i p
(B) sec ur i ng t he f ront bumper cent er upper beam (C).
Det ach t he cl i p (D), and r el ease t he hook (E), t hen
r emove t he beam f r om t he body.
NOTE; To r el ease t he cl i p B, pry up on t he cent er pi n at
t he not ch (F).
F astener Locations
A ^ : B o l t , 2 B > : Cl i p, 1 D > : Cl i p, 1
6x 1.0 mm
9.8 N-m
|1.0 kgf-m, 7.2 I bfft)
9. Inst al l t he bumper i n t he r ever se or der of r emoval ,
Make sur e t he front bumper engages t he hooks (of
both upper beams and si de spac er s) and t he pi ns
(4-door ) (of both headl i ght s) on eac h si de sec ur el y.
Front Bumper Fog Light Cover
Replacement
2-door
NOTE; Take c ar e not to sc r at c h t he f ront bumper .
1. Remove t he front bumper (see page 20-255).
2. Remove t he sc r ews ( A, B), t hen r emove t he f ront
bumper f og li ght c over (C) f r om t he f ront bumper (D).
A : S c r ew, 2 B ; S c r ew, 1
D
3. Inst al l t he bumper f og light cover i n t he r ever se or der
of r emoval .
20-258
Front Air Spoiler Replacement
NOTE:
Take c ar e not to scr at ch t he front bumper ,
o Put on gl oves to prot ect your hands.
1. Remove t he cl i ps sec ur i ng t he front ai r spoi l er (A)
f r om under t he front bumper (B).
t he not ch (C).
2- d o o r
> : Cl i p, 4
4-door
> : Cl i p, 4
2. Pull out t he f ront ai r spoi l er to det ach t he hooks (D),
and r emove t he spoi l er .
3. Inst al l t he spoi l er i n t he r ever se or der of r emoval , and
Push t he hooks and t he cl i ps i nto pl ace sec ur el y.
20-259
Bumpers
Rear Bumper Removal/Installation
NOTE:
i nst al l i ng t he rear bumper .
Take c ar e not to scr at ch t he r ear bumper or t he body.
1. Remove t he c aps (A). Remove t he cl i ps ( B) , t he s c r ews
( C, D)
f
and t he bolts (E) sec ur i ng t he r ear bumper (F).
t he not ch (G).
2-door
F astener Locations
B > : Clip, 2 C ^ : Screw, 6 E ^ : B olt, 2
4- d o o r
F astener Locations
B [>: Clip, 2 C ; Screw, 4 D : Screw, 2
u mm
N-m
kgf-m,
7.2 Ibf-ft)
20-260
2. Pull out t he r ear bumper (A) at t he wheel ar ch ar eas to
r el ease it f r om t he hooks (B) o n t he si de spac er s ( C) .
2- d o o r
4-door
3. Wi t h t he hel p of an assi st ant , pull out one si de of t he
r ear bumper (A) to r el ease t he hooks (B) on t he si de
bracket (C) as s hown. Repeat t hi s st ep on t he opposi t e
si de.
2-door
4-door
(cont' d)
20-261
Bumpers
Rear Bumper Removal /Inst al l at i on (cont'd)
4. Wi t h t he hel p of an as s i s t ant pull out t he r ear bumper
(A) to r el ease t he hooks (B) on t he upper br acket s (C).
2-door : Di sc onnec t t he rear l i cense plate li ght
connect or (D).
2- d o o r
4-door
5. If nec essar y, r emove t he rear bumper absor ber (A)
f r om t he r ear bumper beam (B) by pul l i ng t he
absor ber to r el ease t he post s (C) on both si des.
2-door
A
6. Inst al l t he bumper in t he r ever se or der of r emoval ,
Make sur e t he rear bumper engages t he hooks (of
both t he si de bracket s and t he si de spac er s) on eac h
si de sec ur el y.
Push t he c l i ps, t he hooks, and t he post s i nto pl ace
sec ur el y.
20-262
Rear Bumper Finisher Cover Replacement
2-door
NOTE:
Put on gl oves to pr event damage.
Take c ar e not t o scr at ch t he r ear bumper or t he body.
1. Remove t he s c r ew and det ach t he c l i ps. Pull t he rear
bumper f i ni sher c over (A) f or war d to r el ease t he
hooks (B), t hen r emove t he c over f r om t he rear
bumper (C).
t he not ch <D).
F astener Locations
^ : Screw, 1 | >: CHp, 2
2. Install t he c over i n t he r ever se or der of r emoval , and
D D
A
A
20-263
Hood
Hood Adjustment
1. Remove t hese It ems:
Front gri lle cover :
Cowl c over s (see page 20-278)
Hood latch c over , 4-door (see st ep 2 on page 20-302)
2. Sl i ght l y l oosen t he hood hi nge mount i ng bol t s (A) and t he hood l at ch mount i ng bol t s (B).
6 x 1.0 mm
9.8 N m
(1.0 k g f m, 7.2 Ibf f t )
3. Adj ust t he hood (C) al i gnment in t he f ol l owi ng sequenc e:
Adj ust t he hood ri ght and left, as wel l as f or war d and r ear war d, by usi ng t he el ongat ed hol es i n t he hood hi nges (D).
Tur n t he hood edge c ushi ons (E), i n or out as nec essar y, to make t he hood fit f l ush wi t h t he body at t he front and
si de edges.
4. Adj ust t he hood lat ch (F) to obt ai n t he pr oper hei ght at t he f or war d edge, and move t he latch ri ght or left unti l t he
st ri ker (G) i s cent er ed i n t he l at ch.
5. Ti ght en eac h bolt to t he speci f i ed t or que.
20-264
6. Chec k t hat t he hood opens properl y and c l oses
sec ur el y.
7. Appl y t ouch-up pai nt to t he hi nge mount i ng bolts and
ar ound t he hi nges, and let t he pai nt dry.
8. Appl y mul t i pur pose gr ease to t he hood l at ch and t he
hood hi nges as i ndi cat ed by t he ar r ows.
9. Rei nst al l all of t he r emoved part s.
Hood Seal and Hood Molding
Replacement
NOTE: Take c ar e not to scr at ch t he hood.
1. Det ach t he c l i ps (A) wi t h a cl i p r emover , t hen r emove
t he hood seal ( B) . On Canada model s: Det ach t he cl i ps
( C) , t hen r emove t he hood mol di ng (D).
2-door - Exc ept Canada model s
A |>: Clip, B
2-door - Canada model s
C > : C l i p , 9
(cont' d)
20-265
Hood
Hood Seal and Hood Molding
4-door - Exc ept Canada model s
F astener Locations
A O : Clip, 9
4-door - Canada model s
F astener Locations
C > : Clip, 7
2. Install t he seal or t he mol di ng i n t he r ever se or der of
Hood Insulator Replacement
For Some Model s
NOTE; Take c ar e not t o scr at ch t he hood.
1. Det ach t he c l i ps wi t h a cl i p r emover . Remove t he
hood i nsul at or (A) by pul l i ng it away f r om t he hooks
. ( B) . '
F astener Locations
>: Clip, 9
2. Inst al l t he i nsul at or i n t he r ever se or der of r emoval ,
Push t he c l i ps and t he hooks into pl ace sec ur el y.
20-266
Trunk Lid
Trunk Lid Adjustment
2. Pry up t he not ches (A) to r el ease t he rear hooks (B), and pull up t he c ap (C) to r el ease t he si de hooks (D), t hen r emove
t he c ap.
6 x 1.0 mm
9.8 N-m
(1.0 k g f m, 7.2 Ibf-ft)
3. Sl i ght l y l oosen t he t runk lid hi nge bol t s (E) and t he st ri ker bolts (F).
4. Adj ust t he t runk lid (G) al i gnment i n t he f ol l owi ng sequenc e:
Adj ust t he trunk lid hi nges (H) ri ght and left, as wel l as f or war d and r ear war d, by usi ng t he el ongat ed hol es. Take
c ar e not to hit t he rear wi ndow when l ooseni ng t he bol t s.
Tur n t he t runk lid edge c ushi ons (I), i n or out as nec essar y, to make t he t runk li d fit f l ush wi t h t he body at t he rear
and si de edges.
Adj ust t he fit bet ween t he trunk lid and t he trunk lid openi ng by movi ng t he st ri ker (J).
5. Ti ght en eac h bolt to t he speci f i ed t orque.
6. Make sur e t he trunk lid opens properl y and l ocks sec ur el y.
7. Rei nst al l all r emoved part s.
20-267
Trunk Li d
Trunk Li d Torsi on Bar Repl acement
Torsion Bar Assembly Tool 07AAF-SNAA100
1. Remove the trunk lid torsion bars (A) from the torsion
bar center clip (B).
07AAF-SIM AA100
3. Remove t he t or si on bar cent er cl i p (A) f r om t he body.
i
4. Inst al l t he torsion bar s In t he r ever se or der of
removal, and note these Items:
The shapes of the right torsion bar (A) and the left
torsion bar (B) are shown. Install the torsion bars
properly.
Adj ust the torsion bars forward or rearward with
the torsion bar assembly tool.
The torsion bars were Installed at the f act ory in the
normal position as shown.
Make sure the trunk lid opens properly and locks
securely.
^ Hi gher tension
20- 268
'^1
Trunk Lid Weatherstrip
Replacement
NOTE: 4-door Is s hown; 2-door Is si mi l ar .
1. Remove the trunk lid weatherstrip (A) by pulling it off.
2. Locate the painted alignment mark (B or C) on the
trunk lid weatherstrip. Align the painted mark in the
center of the trunk lid opening, and install the
weatherstrip all the way around in the direction
shown. Make sure there are no wrinkles in the
weatherstrip.
3. Check for water leaks (see step 9 on page 20-57).
Trunk Lid Cushion Replacement
1. Remove the trunk lid cushion (A) by pulling it out to
detach the clips.
Fastener Locations
> : Clip, 3
2. Replace the trunk lid cushion with a new one.
3. Install the trunk lid cushion by pushing on the clip
areas until the clips snap into place.
20-269
Trunk Li d
Trunk Lid Dynamic Damper Replacement
2-door
NOTE: Take c ar e not to scr at ch t he trunk l i d.
1. Remove t he c over (A) by r el easi ng t he hooks (B).
Remove t he bol t s, and det ach t he c l i ps, t hen r emove
t he t runk li d dynami c damper bracket (C) wi t h t he
t runk li d dynami c damper .
F astener Locations
^ : B olt, 4 |> : Clip, 2
6 x 1.0 mm
9.8 N-m
(1.0 kg1<m,7 2lbf- f t )
2. Install t he damper i n t he r ever se or der of r emoval ,
4-door
NOTE: Take car e not to scr at ch t he trunk li d.
1. Remove t he cover (A) by r el easi ng t he hooks (B).
Remove t he bol t s (C), t hen r emove t he trunk lid
dynami c damper (D).
. c .
6 x 1.0 mm
9.8 N-m
(1.0 kgf m, 7.2 Ibf-ft)
2. Install t he damper in t he r ever se order of r emoval ,
and push t he hooks into pl ace sec ur el y.
20-270
Fuel Fill Door
Fuel Fill Door Adj ust ment
1. Slightly loosen the hinge mounting bolts (A).
A
x 1.0 m m
9.8 N m
(1.0 k g f - m,
7.2 ibf-f t )
2 . Adjust the fuel fill door (B) in or out until it is flush with
the body, and up or down as necessary to equalize the
gaps.
3. Tighten the hinge mounting bolts.
4. Check that the fuel fill door opens properly and locks
securely, and check that the rear of the door is flush
with the body.
5. Apply multipurpose grease to each location indicated
by the arrows.
6. Apply touch-up paint to the hinge mounting bolts and
around the hinges.
20-271
Fuel Fill Doer
Fuel Cap Adapter Replacement
NOTE:
Take c ar e not to scr at ch t he body.
1. Remove t he f uel pi pe prot ect or (see page 20-294).
2. Remove t he f uel c ap (A) by t urni ng it
c ount er c l oc kwi se, and r emove t he sc r ew.
: S c r ew, 1
3. Remove t he bol t s, and l ower t he f uel f i l l er pi pe (A),
t hen r emove it f r om t he f uel c ap adapt er (B).
^ : Bol t , 2
6 x 1.0 m m
9.8 N- m
(1.0 k g f m, 7.2 Ibf-ft)
4. Tur n t he f uel cap adapt er (A), t hen r emove it.
5. Install t he adapt er in t he r ever se order of r emoval ,
Make sur e the f uel c ap adapt er i s properl y i nst al l ed
on t he f uel fi ller pi pe. Take car e not to def orm t he
packi ng of the adapt er.
Appl y medi um st rengt h li qui d t hr ead lock to t he
f uel f i l l er pi pe mount i ng bolts before rei nst al l at i on.
Exteri or Tri m
F ront Grille Cower Replacement
2-door
NOTE:
Take c ar e not to scr at ch t he front gri lle or t he body.
1. Remove t he front gri l l e c over (A).
- 1. Det ach t he cl i ps (B, C).
- 2. Pass both hood edge c ushi ons (D) t hr ough t he
hol es in t he c over by pul l i ng up t he rear edge of t he
c over , and sl i de t he ent i re cover r ear war d to r el ease
t he f ront edge of it f r om under t he front gri l l e (E).
- 3. Pass t he hood l at ch handl e (F) t hr ough t he hol e i n
t he c over .
NOTE: To r el ease t he c l i ps, pry up on t he center pi n
at the notch (G).
B O : Cl i p, 11 C > : Cl i p, 2
2. Install t he c over in t he r ever se or der of r emoval , and
4-door
NOTE:
Take c ar e not to scr at ch t he front gri lle or t he body.
1. Remove t he front gri lle cover (A).
-1. Det ach t he cl i ps (B, C).
-2. Rel ease t he hooks (D) f rom both front f ender t r i ms
( E) .
- 3. Pass both hood edge c ushi ons (F) t hr ough t he hol es
in t he cover by pul l i ng up t he rear edge of t he c over ,
and sl i de t he ent i re c over r ear war d to r el ease it
f r om t he gr oove (G) of t he front gri lle (H).
-4. Pass t he hood latch handl e (I) through t he hol e in
t he cover .
B > : Cl i p, 6 C > : Cl i p, 2
2. Install t he cover in t he r ever se order of r emoval , and
20-274
Front Grille Replacement
Pr ogr am; cal l 888-424-6857
Gr i l l e Repl acement - 2-door
NOTE:
Take car e not to sc r at c h t he f ront bumper ,
1. Remove t he f ront bumper (see page 20-255).
2. Remove t he front gri l l e (A).
-2. Rel ease t he hooks (B) and t he ri bs (C) f r om t he front
bumper (D).
D C
3. Install t he gri lle in t he r ever se or der of r emoval , and
t hem wi th new ones.
Gri l l e Repl acement - 4-door
NOTE:
Take c ar e not to scr at ch t he f ront bumper or t he body.
1. Remove t he front gri l l e c over (see page 20-274).
2. Remove t he front gri l l e (A).
-2. Rel ease t he hooks (B) and t he r i bs (C) f r om t he front
bumper (D).
> : Cl i p, 4
B
3. Install t he gri lle i n t he r ever se or der of r emoval , and
. t hem wi t h new ones.
Push t he cl i ps and t he hooks i nto pl ace secur el y.
(cont' d)
20-275
Exteri or Tri m
Front Grille Replacement (cont' d)
Mol di ng Repl acement - 2-door .
NOTE;
Take c ar e not to scr at ch t he f ront gri l l e.
1. Remove t he f ront gri l l e.
2. Remove t he s c r ews , and r el ease t he t wo hooks (A)
wi t h a flat-ti p sc r ewdr i ver , t hen r emove t he f ront gri l l e
mol di ng (B) f r om t he front gri l l e base (C).
: S c r ew, 9
3. Install t he mol di ng in t he r ever se or der of r emoval ,
and push t he hooks into pl ace sec ur el y.
Mol di ng Repl acement - 4-door
NOTE:
Take c ar e not to sc r at c h t he front gri l l e.
1. Remove t he front gri l l e.
2. Remove t he sc r ew, and r el ease t he hooks (22 pl aces)
(A) wi t h a flat-ti p sc r ewdr i ver , t hen r emove t he front
gri l l e mol di ng (B) f r om t he front gri lle base (C).
: S c r ew, 1
A (22 pl ac es)
3. Inst al l t he mol di ng i n t he r ever se or der of r emoval ,
and push t he hooks i nto pl ace sec ur el y.
20-276
Front Fender Trim Replacement
2-door
NOTE:
Take car e not to scr at ch t he front gri lle c over or t he
body.
The left si de i s s hown; t he ri ght si de i s si mi l ar .
1. Remove t he f ront f ender t ri m (A).
- 1. Det ach t he cl i p (B) f r om t he front gri lle c over (C).
- 2. Det ach t he cl i ps (D) sec ur i ng t he t r i m.
- 3. Pull up t he t ri m to r el ease t he proj ect i ons (E) f rom
t he hol es i n t he body, and pull out t he t ri m f r om
under t he f ront gri lle cover .
NOTE: To r el ease t he cl i p B, pry up on t he cent er pi n
at t he not ch (F).
B t>: Cl i p, 1 D [>: Cl i p, 2
2. Install t he t ri m i n t he r ever se or der of r emoval , and
4-door
NOTE:
Take c ar e not to scr at ch t he f ront gri l l e c over or t he
body.
prot ect i ve t ape t o pr event damage.
The left si de i s s hown; t he ri ght si de i s si mi l ar .
1 Remove t he f ront f ender t ri m (A).
-1. Det ach t he c l i ps (B, C) f r om t he front gri lle c over (D).
- 2. Det ach t he c l i ps (E) sec ur i ng t he t r i m.
- 3. Pull up t he f ront gri l l e c over to r el ease t he hook (F)
f r om t he f ront f ender cover .
-4. Pull up t he t r i m t o r el ease t he pr oj ect i ons (G) f r om
t he hol es i n t he body.
B > : Cl i p, 1 C, E [ > : Cl i p , 3
Push t he cl i ps and t he hook into pl ace secur el y.
20-277
Exteri or Tri m
Cowl Cower Replacement
Pr ogr am; cal l 888-424-6857
Cowl Cover Repl acement
NOTE:
Use t he appr opr i at e tool f r om t he K TC t ri m t ool set to
* avoi d damage when r emovi ng c omponent s.
Take c ar e not to damage t he body.
1. Remove t he wi ndshi el d wi per ar ms (see page 22-321).
2. Re m o v e i n I i uuu I C Q I ocaS(A) by pi ; ! Ii r ,c; it out.
3. Remove t he dr i ver ' s cowl cover (A).
- 2. Det ach t he cl i ps (C) and r el ease t he hook (D) by
car ef ul l y pul l i ng up t he c over , and r el ease t he
hooks (E) f r om t he passenger ' s c owl c over (F) by
car ef ul l y pul l i ng up t he dr i ver ' s c owl cover .
-3. Rel ease t he edges of t he hood hi nge c over (G) f r om
t he front f ender (H), and r el ease t he hi nge c over
f rom t he roof mol di ng (I).
B > : Cl i p, 2 C | > : Cl i p, 2
(Bl ue)
E
20-278
4. Remove t he passenger ' s c owl c over (A).
- 2. Det ach t he cl i ps (C, D, E) by car ef ul l y pul l i ng up t he
cover .
- 3. Rel ease t he front hooks (F) f r om t he body.
-4. Rel ease t he edges of t he hood hi nge c over (G) f rom
t he front f ender (H), and r el ease t he hi nge c over
f r om t he roof mol di ng (I).
B > : Cl i p, 3 C > : Cl i p, 3 D > : Cl i p, 1
(Bl ue) (Li ght Bl ue)
5. Install t he c over s in t he r ever se or der of r emoval , and
If t he cl i ps are damaged or st r ess-whi t ened, r epl ace
Make sur e t he hood hi nge cover i s seat ed on t he
cowl c over sec ur el y.
Hood Hi nge Cover Repl acement
NOTE:
Take car e not to damage t he body.
1. Remove t he hood hi nge c over (A) by pul l i ng it out to
r el ease t he pr oj ect i ons (B) (11 pl aces) and t he
proj ect i on (C) (one pl ace) f r om t he c owl c over (D).
A
2. Rel ease t he edges of t he hi nge cover f r om t he front
f ender (E), and r el ease t he hi nge cover f r om t he roof
mol di ng (F).
3. i nst al l t he c over in t he r ever se order of r emoval , and
Push t he pr oj ect i ons i nto pl ace sec ur el y.
Make sur e t he hood hi nge cover i s seat ed on t he
c owl c over sec ur el y.
20-279
Exteri or Tri m
Roof Moldi ng Replacement
K TC Tr i m Tool S e t S OJ ATP2014*
Pr ogr am; cal l 888-424-6857
Mol di ng Repl acement
NOTE:
Take car e not to damage t he wi ndshi el d.
Do not use any met al l i c t ool s to r emove t he
wi ndshi el d ar ea of t he roof mol di ng, or you may chi p
or cr ack t he wi ndshi el d.
Take c ar e not to bend t he roof mol di ng.
1. Rel ease t he hood hi nge c over (A) f r om t he bottom
edge of t he roof mol di ng (B) and under t he f ront
f ender (C).
A
2. Remove t he wi ndshi el d ar ea of t he roof mol di ng (A).
- 1. Car ef ul l y i nser t t he l arge t ri m tool (B) and t he pl ast i c
spat ul a (C) (from t he K TC t ool set ) under t he
mol di ng next to t he l ower cl i p (D).
-2. Whi l e pul l i ng up t he clip ar ea of t he mol di ng by
hand, push eac h of t he si x smal l hooks (E) i n t he
number ed sequenc e shown t o r el ease t he cl i p f r om
t he ret ai ner (F) on t he A-pi l l ar .
Do not try to pry up t he cl i p if it i s har d to r el ease
f r om t he cl i p on t he A-pi l l ar .
-3. Gr adual l y wor k your way up to r el ease eac h of t he .
upper cl i ps (G, H, I).
2-door
F astener Locations
D [> : dm fMt !
G [>: Clip (Blue)
H {>: Clip (Purple)
I > : Clip (Gray)
~ I T 7 mm
L
1
(0.28 in)
ti4 1 mm
! (0.039 in)
E
20-280
4- d o o r
D j > : Cl i p (Whi t e)
G [ > : Cl i p (Or ange)
H > : Cl i p (Red)
I | >: Cl i p (Bl ue)
*~
1
rr 7 mi n
1 1
(.28 in)
j- 1 mi n
I (.39 in)
A
3. Pul l up t he roof ar ea of t he roof mol di ng (A) to r el ease
it f r om t he r et ai ner s ( B) .
F astener Locations
B J >: Retainer, 3
(White)
4. Pull up and r el ease t he r ear end of t he roof mol di ng
(A) f r om t he pi n (B) on t he body, t hen r emove t he roof
mol di ng.
A
5. Install t he mol di ng in t he r ever se order of r emoval ,
Make sur e t he roof mol di ng i s i nst al l ed sec ur el y.
(cont' d)
20-281
Exteri or Tri m
Roof Molding Replacement (cont'd)
Ret ai ner Repl acement {Wi ndshi el d Ar ea -
Adhesi ve Type)
1. Gr adual l y sc r ape off t he adhesi ve t ape (A) under t he
r et ai ner s (B) whi l e heat i ng it wi t h a heat gun t o about
212- 248 F ( 100- 120 C).
NOTE:
Do not over heat t he pai nt ed sur f ace ar ound t he
r et ai ner s.
To keep t he ext eri or pl ast i c part s near t he A-pi l l ar
f r om bei ng over heat ed by t he heat gun, wr ap t hem
wi t h al umi num f oi l .
2. Cl ean t he body bondi ng sur f ac e wi t h a shop t owel
dampened i n i sopr opyl al c ohol . Af t er c l eani ng, keep
oi l , gr ease, and wat er f r om get t i ng on t he sur f ac e.
3. Install t he upper r et ai ner s (A) and t he l ower ret ai ner
(B).
-1. Peel t he adhesi ve backi ng away f r om t he r et ai ner s.
-2. Li ne up t he r et ai ner s wi t h t he al i gnment mar ks (C)
on t he body, and at t ach t he ret ai ners wi t h adhesi ve
t ape (D).
- 3. Appl y t wo-part epoxy adhesi ve (E) ar ound t he edge
of t he ret ai ners as s hown.
20-282
Ret ai ner Repl acement (Wi ndshi el d Ar ea
Type)
Pi n
NOTE;
Take car e not to scr at ch t he body or damage t he
wi ndshi el d.
When pryi ng wi th a flat-tip sc r ewdr i ver , wr ap it wi t h
1. Pry out t he mi ddl e hooks (A) wi t h a flat-ti p
sc r ewdr i ver , and sl i de the upper r et ai ner s (B) and t he
l ower retai ner (C) upwar d to r el ease t hem f rom t he
pi ns (D) on t he A-pi l l ar.
2-door
4-door
C
(Red)
2. Install t he ret ai ners i n t he r ever se or der of r emoval ,
and make sur e t he r et ai ner s are sec ur el y f ast ened on
t he A-pi l l ar pi ns.
(cont ' d)
20-283
Exteri or Tri m
Roof Molding Replacement (cont'd)
Ret ai ner Repl acement {Roof Ar ea)
NOTE:
1. Pry up t he mi ddl e hooks (A) wi t h a flat-ti p sc r ewdr i ver ,
and sl i de t he ret ai ners (B) r ear war d t o r el ease t hem
f r om t he pi ns (C) on t he body.
2. Inst al l t he r et ai ner s i n t he r ever se or der of r emoval ,
and make sur e t he r et ai ner s ar e sec ur el y f ast ened on
t he body pi ns.
Side Sill Protection Tape
Replacement
2-door .
1. Sl owl y r emove t he ol d si de si l l prot ect i on t ape.
oi l , gr ease, and wat er f r om getti ng on t he sur f ac e.
3. Remove t he adhesi ve backi ng B f r om t he si de si l l
prot ect i on t ape (C).
NOTE: Do not r emove adhesi ve backi ng A
4r
4. Al i gn t he c or ner (B) of t he adhesi ve backi ng A wi t h t he
body l i ne (C). Then al i gn t he adhesi ve backi ng edge
(D) wi t h t he body li ne (E). Pr ess t he exposed adhesi ve
ar ea of t he si de si l l prot ect i on t ape (F) agai nst t he
body.
A
F
20-284
5. Remove t he adhesi ve backi ng A f r om t he si de si l l
prot ect i on t ape (B), and pr ess t he t ape into pl ace.
4-door
1. Sl owl y r emove t he ol d si de si l l prot ect i on t ape.
oi l , gr ease, and wat er f r om getti ng on t he sur f ac e.
3. Remove t he adhesi ve backi ng B f r om t he si de si l l
prot ect i on t ape (C).
NOTE: Do not r emove t he adhesi ve backi ng A.
A
4. Al i gn t he al i gnment mar ks (B) of t he adhesi ve backi ng
A wi t h t he body li ne (C). Then al i gn t he al i gnment
mar k (D) on t he adhesi ve backi ng wi t h t he round body
bul ge (E). Pr ess t he exposed adhesi ve ar ea of t he si de
si l l prot ect i on t ape (F) agai nst t he body.
c
(cont' d)
20-285
Exteri or Tri m
Side Sill Protection Tape
5. Remove t he adhesi ve backi ng A f r om t he si de si l l
prot ect i on t ape (B), and pr ess t he t ape i nto pl ace.
Trunk Lower Tri m Repl acement
4-door
NOTE:
Take c ar e not to scr at ch t he trunk li d.
1. Remove t he l i cense plate f r om t he t runk l i d.
2. Remove t he cl i ps f ast eni ng t he trunk l ower t ri m (A).
t > : Clip, 2
3. Remove t he bolts f rom i nsi de t he trunk l i d.
-.Bolt, 4
6 x 1.0 mm
9.8 N-m (1.0 kgf m, 7.2 Ibf-ft)
20-286
4. Whi l e gent l y pul l i ng out t he bottom edge of the trunk
l ower t ri m (A), cut the doubl e-si ded adhesi ve t ape (B)
i n t he bottom edge of t he t r i m. Take car e not to
scr at ch t he trunk li d.
F astener Locations
C > : Clip, 4 D [> : Clip, 1
5. Pull out t he t ri m to r el ease t he cl i ps (C, D), t hen
r emove t he t ri m f rom the trunk li d.
6. If t he cl i ps are damaged or st r ess-whi t ened, r epl ace
7. Remove the gr ommet s (E) f r om t he t runk l i d, t hen
i nsert t he gr ommet s into t he cl i ps on t he t runk l ower
t ri m.
8. Sc r ape off the r emai ni ng doubl e-si ded adhesi ve t ape
and t he bottom EPDM sponge (f oam rubber) f rom t he
t r i m. Al so sc r ape off t he r emai ni ng doubl e-si ded
adhesi ve t ape f rom t he trunk l i d. Cl ean t he t ri m and
t he t runk lid sur f ac es wi t h a shop t owel dampened in
9. At t ach t he new doubl e-si ded adhesi ve t ape (A) and
t he new bottom EPDM sponge (f oam rubber) (B) to
t he bottom of t he t ri m (C).
Doubl e-si ded adhesi ve t ape:
Wi dt h 15 mm (0.59 i n)
EPDM sponge: Thi c kness 3 mm (0.12 i n)
Wi dt h 4 mm (0.16 i n)
20 mm (0.79 in)
1 mm
(0.039 in)
10. Fol d t he edge of each adhesi ve backi ng f r om t he
doubl e-si ded adhesi ve t ape.
11. Hold up t he t r i m, and fit t he cl i ps into t he hol e in the
trunk l i d, t hen push on t he t ri m until t he cl i ps snap into
pl ace sec ur el y.
12. Rei nst al l t he bolts and t he c l i ps, and l oosel y t hr ead
t he bol t s.
NOTE: Appl y medi um st rengt h li qui d t hr ead lock to
t he bolts bef ore rei nst al l at i on.
13. Car ef ul l y pull away t he adhesi ve backi ng, and push
on t he doubl e-si ded adhesi ve t ape ar eas to make
adhesi ve sti ck secur el y.
14. Ti ght en t he bolts to t he speci f i ed t orque.
15. Rei nst al l t he rear l i cense plate.
20-287
Exteri or Tri m
Embl em/St i c ker Replacement
2-door
NOTE: When r emovi ng embl ems/st i c ker , take c ar e not to sc r at c h t he body.
1. To r emove t he front " H" embl em, r emove t he f ront bumper (see page 20-255).
2. Cl ean t he body sur f ac es wher e embl ems/st i c ker ar e appl i ed wi t h a shop t owel dampened in i sopr opyl al cohol . After
c l eani ng, keep oi l , gr ease, and wat er f r om get t i ng on t he sur f ac e.
3. Appl y t he embl ems/st i cker wher e s hown. When i nst al l i ng t he UL EV/ PZEV st i cker on t he i nsi de sur f ace of t he left
quart er gl ass, al i gn t he st i cker wi t h t he edge of t he bl ack c er ami c as s hown, and pr ess t he st i cker into pl ace, t hen
r emove t he appl i cat i on t ape.
FRONT"H
Uni t : mm (i n)
Adhesi ve t ape: Thi c k nes s 0.8 mm (0.03 i n)
UL E V/ PZE V S TI CK ER
REAR " H" EMBL EM
Ac c or d EMBL EM
FRONT"H
EMBL EM
FRONT GRI L L E
B A S E
PUS H NUTS
Replace.
ADHES I VE TAPE
CLIP
TRUNK LID
REAR " H" EMBL EM
Ac c or d E MBL E M ADHES I VE TAPE UL E V/ PZE V S TI CK ER
Edge of t he bl ack c er ami c
20-288
4-door
NOTE: When r emovi ng embl ems/st i cker , take c ar e not to scr at ch t he body.
1. To r emove t he f ront " H " embl em, r emove t he front gri lle (see page 20-275).
2. Cl ean t he body sur f ac es wher e embl ems/st i cker are appl i ed wi t h a shop t owel dampened i n i sopr opyl al c ohol . After
c l eani ng, keep oi l , gr ease, and wat er f r om getti ng on t he sur f ace.
3. Appl y t he embl ems/st i c ker wher e s hown. When i nst al l i ng t he UL EV/ PZEV st i cker on t he i nsi de sur f ace of t he left rear
door quart er gl ass, al i gn t he st i cker wi t h t he edge of t he gl ass mark and t he rear door quart er gl ass seal as s hown, and
pr ess t he st i cker i nto pl ac e, t hen r emove t he appl i cat i on t ape.
FRONT " H" EMBL EM
Uni t : mm (i n)
Adhesi ve t ape: Thi c k nes s 0.8 mm (0.03 i n)
REAR " H" EMBL EM
UL EV/P ZEV STICKER
Ac c or d EMBL EM
FRONT" H
EMBL EM
FRONT GRI L L E
B A S E
' PUS H NUTS
Replace.
ADHES I VE TAPE
REAR " H" EMBL EM
63.5
(2.5)
Edge of t he t r unk l ower t r i m GL A S S MARK
Ac c or d EMBL EM
IT?
30 \
(1.18) \
v ADHES I VE TAPE
Edge of t he t r unk l ower t r i m
60
(2.36)
UL E V/ PZE V S TI CK ER
Edge of t he r ear door
quar t er gl as s seal
20-289
Fenderwel l
Front Inner Fender Replacement
NOTE:
Take car e not to scr at ch t he body.
When pr yi ng wi t h a flat-ti p sc r ewdr i ver , wr ap it wi t h prot ect i ve t ape to pr event damage.
2. Remove t he front i nner f ender (A).
- 1. Canada model s: On t he back of t he wheel ar c h, r emove t he s c r ews (B) and t he cl i p (C), and r emove t he f ront spl ash
guar d (D).
- 2. Fr om under t he front bumper (E), det ach t he cl i p (F) sec ur i ng t he f ront bumper , t he spl ash shi el d (G), and t he f ront
i nner f ender , and det ach t he cl i ps (H) sec ur i ng t he f ront bumper and t he i nner f ender .
- 3. Fr om t he wheel ar c h, det ach t he cl i ps (I, J , K, L) t hat sec ur e t he f ront i nner f ender (and t he spl ash shi el d) to t he body.
-4. Fr om t he wheel ar c h, det ach t he cl i p (M) t hat sec ur e t he front i nner f ender to t he r esonat or c hamber (left si de) or t he
body (ri ght si de).
- 5. Rel ease t he hook (N) of t he spl ash shi el d, t hen r emove t he f ront i nner f ender .
NOTE: To r el ease t he cl i p C, F, H, I, K, M, pry up on t he cent er pi n at t he not ch ( 0) .
F astener L oc at i ons
B : S c r ew, 3 C, F > : Cl i p H, I, K, M >: Clip L > : C l i p , 9 J >: Cl i p, 3
Exc ept Canada model s, 1 Exc ept Canada model s, 5
Canada model s, 2 Canada model s, 4
O O O O
K
(except Canada model s onl y)
Canada model s
3. Inst al l t he i nner f ender in t he r ever se or der of r emoval , and note t hese i t ems:
If t he cl i ps ar e damaged or st r ess-whi t ened, r epl ace t hem wi t h new ones.
Push t he cl i ps and t he hook i nto pl ace sec ur el y.
20-290
Front Splash Shield Replacement
NOTE:
Take c ar e not to scr at ch t he body.
When pryi ng wi t h a flat-tip sc r ewdr i ver , wr ap it wi t h prot ect i ve t ape t o prevent damage.
4-door i s shown; 2-door i s si mi l ar .
2. Remove the front spl ash shi el d (A).
- 1. Det ach t he cl i p (B) that sec ur es t he front spl ash shi el d to t he body.
- 2. Det ach t he cl i ps (C) that sec ur e t he front i nner f ender (D) and t he f ront spl ash shi el d to t he body.
- 3. Fr om under t he front bumper (E), det ach t he cl i ps (F) that sec ur e t he front bumper , t he front i nner f ender , and t he
front spl ash shi el d to the body.
-4. Fr om under t he front bumper , det ach t he cl i ps (G) that sec ur e t he f ront bumper and t he front spl ash shi el d to t he
body.
- 5. Fr om under t he body, det ach t he cl i ps (H) that sec ur e the front spl ash shi el d to t he front subf r ame.
-6. Rel ease t he hooks (I) of t he front spl ash shi el d, t hen pull out t he spl ash shi el d.
NOTE: To r el ease t he c l i ps, pry up on t he cent er pin at t he notch (J).
F astener Locations
B, C, G, H |>: Clip, 14 F [>: Clip, 2
H
3, Install t he spl ash shi el d in t he r ever se order of r emoval , and note t hese i t ems:
If t he cl i ps ar e damaged or st r ess-whi t ened, r epl ace t hem wi t h new ones.
20-291
Fenderwel l
Front Fender Fairing Replacement
For Some Model s
NOTE;
Take c ar e not t o scr at ch t he body.
1. Remove t he front Inner f ender as needed (see page
20-290).
2. Fr om t he wheel ar c h, r el ease t he cl i ps f ast eni ng t he
front f ender f ai ri ng (A).
F astener Locations
>; Clip, 2
3. Open t he front door. Rel ease t he hooks (A) f ast eni ng
t he f ront f ender f ai ri ng (B).
4. Remove t he front f ender f ai ri ng (A).
5. Inst al l t he fender f ai ri ng in t he r ever se or der of
20-292
Middle Floor Undercover Replacement
Left Si de
NOTE:
Take car e not t o sc r at c h t he body.
1. Remove t he bol t s and r el ease t he hook (A), t hen
r emove the left mi ddl e f l oor under cover (B).
F astener Loc at i ons
".B olt 4
6 x 1.0 mm
9.8 N-m
(1.0 kgf m, 7.2 Ibf-ft)
2. Install t he under cover i n t he r ever se or der of r emoval ,
and f i rst at t ach t he hook, and set t he bol t s st art i ng at
t he rear.
Ri ght Si de
NOTE:
Take car e not to sc r at c h t he body.
1. Remove t he bol t s and t he nut , and r el ease t he hooks
(A) , t hen r emove t he ri ght mi ddl e f l oor under c over
(B) .
: Bol t , 4 : Nut , 1
6x 1.0 mm
9.8 N-m
(1.0 k g f m, 7.2 Ibf-ft)
2. Install t he under cover in t he r ever se or der of r emoval ,
and f i rst at t ach t he hooks, and set t he bolts st art i ng at
t he rear.
20-293
Fenderwel l
Fuel Pi pe Prot ect or Repl acement
NOTE:
1. Remove t he left r ear wheel (see page 18-39).
2. Det ach t he c l i ps, t hen r emove t he f uel pi pe prot ect or
(A).
Fastener Locations
> : CHp , 3
3. Inst al l t he prot ect or i n t he r ever se or der of r emoval ,
Rear Inner Fender Repl acement
NOTE: Take c ar e not to sc r at c h t he rear bumper or t he
body.
1. Remove t he s c r ews , t hen r emove t he r ear i nner
f ender (A) f r om t he r ear bumper (B) and t he body.
Fastener Locations
^ : Screw, 3
2. Install t he i nner f ender i n t he r ever se or der of
r emoval .
20-294
Rear Air Outlet Replacement
NOTE: Take c ar e not to scr at ch t he body.
1_ Remove t he rear bumper (see page 20-260).
2. Rel ease t he hooks (A), t hen r emove t he r ear ai r outlet
(B).
A
3. Inst al l t he ai r outlet by pushi ng on t he hook ar eas unti l
t he hooks snap into pl ace.
20-295
HOOD OPENER CABL E HOOD RE L E A S E HANDL E
Replacement, page 20-297 Replacement, page 20-303
20-296
Hood Opener Cabl e Repl acement
NOTE:
Take c ar e not to scr at ch t he body or t he rel at ed part s.
Take c ar e not to kink t he hood opener c abl e.
Front gri lle cover :
Front f ender t r i m, left si de:
Front i nner f ender , left si de as needed (see page
20-290)
Ki ck panel , dr i ver ' s si de:
2. Di sconnect t he hood opener c abl e (A) f r om t he hood
lat ch (B) (see page 20-302).
F astener Locations
>: C l i p, 6
3. Det ach t he cl i ps wi t h a cl i p r emover .
4. Di sc onnec t t he hood opener cabl e (A) f r om t he hood
r el ease handl e (B) (see page 20-303).
C
5. Remove t he gr ommet (C), t hen r emove t he hood
opener c abl e.
6. Inst al l t he cabl e i n t he r ever se or der of r emoval , and
When i nst al l i ng t he opener cabl e under t he
dashboar d, route t he cabl e under t he left engi ne
compar t ment wi r e har ness (D).
20-297
e n t e r s
p
unk Lid Opener Cable/Fuel Fill Do<
ser vi c e.
NOTE:
Take c ar e not to scr at ch t he body or t he rel at ed par t s.
Take c ar e not to kink t he trunk lid opener cabl e/f uel fi ll
door opener cabl e.
Rear seat si de bol st er, 4-door (see page 20-242)
Front door si l l t r i m, dr i ver ' s si de:
Rear door si ll t r i m, both si des, 4-door (see page
20-109)
o B-pi llar l ower t r i m, 4-door (see page 20-116)
Rear si de t ri m panel , 2-door (see page 20-127)
c Tr unk si de t ri m panel , left si de (see page 20-132)
Rear wheel house i nsul at or (see page 20-132)
Fuel c ap adapt er (see page 20-272)
2. Pull back t he car pet as needed.
Opener Cabl e Repl acement
3. Di sconnect t he trunk lid opener cabl e/f uel fi ll door
opener cabl e (A) f r om t he t runk lid opener /f uel fill
door opener (B) (see page 20-303).
2- d o o r
C | > : Cl i p, 1 D p>: Cushi on t ape, 1
4- door
C | > : Cl i p, 1
4. Rel ease t he opener cabl e f r om t he cl i p (C),
Remove t he c ushi on t ape (D).
i. 2-door:
5.2-door : Remove t he trunk li d opener cabl e/f uel fi ll
door opener cabl e (A) f rom t he trunk compar t ment
and t he trunk l i d.
-1. Det ach t he opener cabl e j unct i on box (B) f r om t he
body.
-2. Rel ease t he trunk lid opener cabl e/f uel fill door
opener cabl e f rom t he cl i p (C), and r emove t he
c ushi on t ape (D).
-3. Di sconnect t he trunk lid opener cabl e (E) f r om t he
trunk lid lat ch (F) (see page 20-305).
-4. Rel ease t he trunk lid opener cabl e f rom t he cl i ps
( G) .
C > : Cl i p, 1 D > : Cushi on t ape, 1 G > : Cl i p, 6
6.4-door : Remove t he t runk li d opener cabl e/f uel fill
door opener c abl e (A) f r om t he trunk compar t ment
and t he trunk li d.
- 1. Det ach t he cl i p (B) and t he opener cabl e j unct i on
box (C) f r om t he body, and r emove t he c ushi on t ape
(D).
-2. Di sconnect t he t runk lid opener cabl e (E) f rom t he
trunk lid lat ch (F) (see page 20-305).
- 3. Rel ease t he t runk lid opener cabl e f rom t he cl i ps
(G), and det ach t he cl i p (H).
B, H p>: Cl i p, 2 D > : Cushi on t ape, 1 G > : Cl i p, 5
(cont' d)
20-299
Openers
Trunk Lid Opener Cable/Fuel Fill Door Opener Cable Replacement (cont'd)
7. Whi l e pi nchi ng t he hooks (A) f r om i nsi de t he vehi c l e,
r emove t he gr ommet (B) by r el easi ng t he seal (C)
f r om t he body.
8. Rel ease t he hook (A), t hen r emove t he gr ommet (B)
f r om t he f uel fi ll door l at ch (C).
9. Remove t he f uel fi ll door opener cabl e f r om i nsi de t he
body.
10. Remove t he t runk l i d opener cabl e/f uel fi ll door
opener c abl e f r om t he vehi c l e.
11. Inst al l t he opener cabl e in t he r ever se or der of
Repl ace any damaged c l i ps, and r epl ace t he
c ushi on t ape.
Al i gn t he mar ks (A) on t he opener c abl e (B) wi t h t he
c abl e cl i ps (C) and t he c ushi on t ape (D) as shown.
4-door : Rout e t he opener cabl e besi de t he har ness
cl i ps (E) cor r ect l y.
4-door : Appl y t he c ushi on t ape (F) as shown.
Bef or e i nst al l i ng t he gr ommet , c l ean t he body
bondi ng sur f ac e wi t h i sopr opyl al cohol .
Install t he gr ommet by pushi ng on t he hook ar eas
unti l t he hooks snap into pl ace, and push t he seal
ar ea to make t he adhesi ve sti ck sec ur el y.
2-door
F ront
4-door
F ront
20-300
20-301
Openers
Hood Latch Replacement
NOTE:
Take c ar e not t o scr at ch t he body or t he rel at ed par t s.
2.4-door : Remove t he hood lat ch c over (A).
-1. Det ach t he cl i ps by pul l i ng back t he cover .
-2. Rel ease t he hook (B) by l ower i ng t he c over .
[> Clip, 2
3. Remove t he bol t s, t hen r emove t he hood lat ch (A)
f r om t he body, and di sc onnec t t he hood opener cabl e
(B) f r om t he hood l at ch.
4. Wi t h hood lat ch swi t c h: Di sc onnec t t he hood latch
swi t c h connect or (C).
5. Install t he lat ch in t he r ever se or der of r emoval , and
Appl y mul t i pur pose gr ease to eac h l ocat i on of t he
hood latch i ndi cat ed by t he ar r ows.
Make sur e t he hood opener cabl e i s connect ed
properl y and t he hood latch swi t ch connect or i s
pl ugged in properl y (for s ome model s).
Adj ust t he hood latch al i gnment (see st ep 4 on page
20-264).
Make sur e t he hood opens properl y and l ocks
sec ur el y.
4-door: If t he c over cl i ps are damaged or
st r ess-whi t ened, repl ace t hem wi t h new ones.
4-door: Push t he c over cl i ps into pl ace sec ur el y.
20-302
Hood Release Handle Replacement
NOTE:
Take c ar e not to kink t he hood opener c abl e.
1. Remove t he dr i ver ' s kick panel :
2. Remove t he bol t s, t hen r emove t he hood r el ease
handl e (A).
Fast ener Locations
^ : B olt, 2
(1.0 kgf m, 7.2 Ibf-ft)
3. Di sconnect t he hood opener cabl e (B) f r om t he hood
r el ease handl e.
4. Install t he hood r el ease handl e in t he r ever se order of
Make sur e t he hood opener cabl e i s connect ed
properl y.
Make sur e t he hood opens properl y.
Trunk Li d Opener /Fuel Fi ll Door
Opener Repl acement
Spec i al Toot s Requi r ed
Pr ogr am; cal l 888-424-6857
NOTE:
Take c ar e not to sc r at c h t he rear bumper .
Take c ar e not to kink t he t runk lid opener cabl e/f uel fill
door opener c abl e.
1. Pry out t he bottom edge of t he front si de c ap (A) at t he
not ch wi t h t he t ri m tool to r el ease t he hooks ( B) , and
r el ease t he hooks (C), t hen r emove t he c ap f rom t he
f ront door si l l t ri m (D).
F astener Location
: Bolt, 1
9.8 N-m
(1.0 kgf m, 7.2 Ibf-ft)
2. Remove t he opener lock cyl i nder (E), and l oosen the
bolt.
(cont' d)
20-303
Openers
Trunk Lid Opener /Fuel Fill Door Opener Repl acement (cont'd)
3. Remove t he s c r ew sec ur i ng t he f ront door s i l l t r i m (A)
and t he t runk lid opener /f uel fill door opener .
: S c r ew, 1
4. Remove t he f ront door si l l t r i m:
5. Remove t he bolt, t hen r emove t he t runk lid
opener /f uel fi ll door opener (A) f r om t he bolt (B).
: Bol t , 1
9.8 N-m
(1.0 k g f m, 7.2 Ibf-ft)
6. Di sc onnec t t he trunk lid opener/f uel fill door opener
cabl e (A), t hen r emove t he opener (B ).
A
7. Inst al l t he opener in t he r ever se or der of r emoval , and
Make sur e t he opener cabl e i s connect ed properl y.
Make sur e t he trunk lid and t he f uel fill door open
properl y and lock sec ur el y.
Fi x at t he or i gi nal posi t i on in t he out er end of t he
cabl e on t he t runk li d opener/f uel fi ll door opener
sec ur el y. And check t he trunk lid latch oper at i on:
Make sur e t he trunk lid latch and t he f uel fi ll door
latch unl ock when pul l i ng and pushi ng t he t runk lid
opener /f uel fi ll door opener . If nec essar y, adj ust t he
posi t i on of t he cabl e end.
Bef ore t i ght eni ng t he opener mount i ng rear bolt,
posi t i on t he front door si l l tri m agai nst t he opener
cer t ai nl y by sc r ewi ng t he t ri m onto t he opener .
20-304
Trunk Lid Latch Replacement
K TC Tr i m Too! S et SOJ ATP2014*
Pr ogr am; cal l 888-424-6857
NOTE:
Take car e not to scr at ch t he t runk l i d.
Use t he appropri at e tool f rom t he K TC t ri m tool set to
Take c ar e not to kink t he trunk lid opener cabl e.
1. Insert a t ri m t ool t hrough t he lat ch c over (A) openi ng,
and pry on t he cover to r el ease t he hooks (B). Pull out
t he c over , and r el ease t he t ab (C) f r om t he trunk lid
latch (D), t hen r emove the latch cover .
F astener Locations
: B olt, 2
6 x 1.0 mm
9.8 N-m
(1.0 kgf m, 7.2 I bfft)
2. Di sconnect t he trunk lid latch connect or (E), and
r emove t he bol t s, t hen r emove t he trunk lid l at ch.
3. Di sc onnec t t he t runk lid opener c abl e (A).
4. Inst al l t he latch i n t he r ever se or der of r emoval , and
Make sur e t he connect or i s pl ugged i n properl y and
t he opener cabl e i s connect ed pr oper l y.
Make sur e t he trunk lid opens properl y and l ocks
sec ur el y.
Fi x t he ori gi nal posi t i on of t he out er end of cabl e (A)
on t he trunk lid latch secur el y. And check t he trunk
li d latch oper at i on: Make sur e t he t runk lid latch
unl ock when pul l i ng t he trunk lid opener/f uel fill
door opener . If nec essar y, adj ust t he posi t i on of t he
cabl e end.
20-305
Frame
Frame Brace Replacement
St r ut Br ace Repl acement
1. Remove t he c owl cover (see page 20-278).
2. Di sconnect t he brake boost er vac uum hose (A) f r om
t he st rut br ace (B).
8 x 1.25 mm
22 N-m
(2.2 kgf-m, 16 Ibfft) 8x1.25 mm
3. Remove t he nut s f r om t he t op of t he damper , and
r emove t he st rut br ace.
4. i nst al l t he st rut br ace i n t he r ever se order of r emoval .
Rear Wheelhouse Gusset
Replacement
4-door
NOTE:
Take c ar e not to sc r at c h t he body or t he rel at ed part s.
Rear seat -back (see page 20-239)
Rear seat si de bol st er , 4-door (see page 20-242)
Tr unk si de t ri m panel (see page 20-132)
Rear wheel house i nsul at or , as needed (see page
20-132)
2. Det ach t he wi r e har ness cl i ps (A), and r emove t he
bol t s (B), t hen r emove t he r ear wheel house gusset
(C).
B
8 x 1.25 mm
22 Nm
B B
8 x 1.25 mm 8 x 1.25 mm
22 N-m 22 Nm
(2.2 kgf m, 16 Ibfft) (2.2 kgf m, 16 Ibfft)
3. Inst al l t he gusset i n t he r ever se or der of r emoval .
20-306
Middle Cr ossmember Gusset Replacement
2-door
NOTE: Take car e not to scr at ch t he body.
1. Remove t he rear si de t ri m panel (see page 20-127).
2. Pull back t he rear part of t he car pet as needed.
3. Remove t he bolts (A, B) , t hen r emove t he mi ddl e
c r oss-member gusset ( C) .
A
14 x 1.5 mm
A
14x 1.5 mm
4. Install t he gusset in t he r ever se or der of r emoval .
When i nst al l i ng t he mount i ng bolts f or t he mi ddl e
c r oss-member gusset (A), t i ght en t he mount i ng
har dwar e in t he sequenc e s hown. If t he mount i ng
bol t s ar e not t i ght ened in t hi s sequenc e, damage t o
t he quart er panel wi l l occur .

14 x 1.5 mm
64 N-m (6.5 k g f m, 47
x 1.5 mm
N-m
kgf -m,
Ibf f t )
14 x 1.5 mm
64 N-m
(6.5 k g f m, 47 Ibf f t )
20-307
Frame
Subframe Replacement
Front Subf r ame Tor que
After r emovi ng t he subf r ame mount i ng bol t s, t he front subf r ame mi ddl e rubber mount mount i ng bol t s, t he front
subf r ame r ear st i f f ener mount i ng bol t s, and t he rear engi ne mount i ng base bracket mount i ng bol t s, be sur e to r epl ace
FRONT S UB FRA ME
14 x 1.5 mm
64 N-m
(6.5 k g f m, 47 Ibf f t )
F RONT SUuFRAFvi t
MIDDL E RUBBER MOUNT
REAR ENGI NE MOUNTING
BASE BRACK ET
12x 1
44 N-m
(4.5 kgf
Replace
UPPER I NS UL ATOR
FRONT S UBFRAME
12 x 1.25 mm
54 N-m
(5.5 k g f m, 40 I bfft)
(A/ T model s)
Replace.
^ 12 x 1.25 mm
54 N-m
(5.5 kgf -m, 40 Ibf f t )
(A/ T model s)
10 x 1.25 mm
59 N m
(6.0 kgf -m, 43 Ibf f t )
S TEERI NG GEARBOX
S TI FFENER
REAR ENGI NE MOUNTING
UPPER B A S E BRACK ET
(A/ T model s)
12 x 1.25 mm
64 N-m (6.5 k g f m, 47l bf -f t )
Replace.
UPPER I NSUL ATOR
Bot t om v i ew
L OWER I NS UL ATOR
Bot t om v i ew
F RONT S UBFRAME
REAR STIF F ENER
12 x 1.25 mm
54 N-m
(5.5 k g f m, 40 Ibf f t )
Replace.
12 x 1.25 mm
93 N m
(9.5 kgf -m, 69 Ibf f t )
Replace.
14x 1.5 mm
103 N m
(10.5 k g f m, 76 Ibf f t )
Replace.
14 x 1.5 mm
103 N-m
(10.5 k g f m, 76 Ibf f t )
Replace.
20-308
Front Subf r ame Al i gnment
NOTE: Al i gn t he f ront subf r ame wi t h t he subf r ame al i gnment pi n.
1 Al i gn t he f ront subf r ame (A) i n t he f ol l owi ng sequenc e.
- 1. Lift t he f ront subf r ame up to t he body, and l oosel y i nst al l t he new subf r ame mount i ng bol t s (B), t he f ront st i f f ener
mount i ng bol t s (C), t he new rear st i f f ener mount i ng bol t s (D) and t he st i f f eners (E).
-2. Loosel y i nst al l t he new subf r ame mi ddl e mount i ng bol t s (F, G) sec ur i ng t he subf r ame mi ddl e mount s (H).
-3. Insert t he subf r ame al i gnment pi n (I) t hr ough t he posi t i oni ng sl ot (J) on t he ri ght rear st i f f ener, t hr ough t he
posi t i oni ng hol e (K) on t he subf r ame, and into t he posi t i oni ng hol e (L) on t he body, t hen l oosel y ti ghten t he
subf r ame ri ght r ear mount i ng bolt.
-4. Insert t he subf r ame al i gnment pi n t hr ough t he posi t i oni ng sl ot on t he left rear st i f f ener, t hr ough t he posi t i oni ng
hol e on t he subf r ame, and i nto t he posi t i oni ng hol e on t he body, t hen l oosel y t i ght en t he subf r ame left r ear
mount i ng bolt.
-5. Ti ght en t he subf r ame mount i ng bolts to t he speci f i ed t or que val ues st art i ng wi t h t he ri ght r ear subf r ame mount i ng
bolt. Us e t he subf r ame al i gnment pi n when t i ght eni ng t he rear si de subf r ame mount i ng bol t s.
-6. Chec k all of t he subf r ame mount i ng bol t s, and reti ghten if nec essar y.
NOTE: Ti ght en t he bol t s in t he sequenc e shown.
Fr ont
2. Ti ght en t he bol t s sec ur i ng t he subf r ame mi ddl e mount s t o t he speci f i ed t or que.
3. Af t er r ei nst al l i ng all r emoved par t s, check and adj ust t he f ront wheel al i gnment (see page 18-5).
(cont' d)
20-309
Frame
Subf r ame Repl acement (cont' d)
Rear Subf r ame Tor que
NOTE:
Install t he rear subf r ame by al i gni ng t he i nst al l at i on posi t i oni ng hol es and posi t i oni ng hol es wi t h t he subf r ame
al i gnment pi n.
Al ways r epl ace any r emoved subf r ame mount i ng bol t s wi t h new ones.
Posi t i oni ng hol e al i gnment
S UBFRAME
REAR S UB FRA ME
POSITIONING HOL E
\ (Body si de)
I NSTAL L ATI ON
POSITIONING HOL E
(Subf r ame si de)
070AG-S J AA10S
Bot t om view
8 x 1.25 mm
27 N-m
(2.75 k g f m,
20 Ibf-ft)
REAR S UB FRA ME
MOUNTI NG FRONT
S TA Y
I NSTAL L ATI ON
POSITIONING HOL ES
REAR
I NSUL ATOR
REAR S UBFRAME
MOUNTI NG WAS HER
14 x 1.5 mm
103 N-m
(10.5 k g f m, 76 Ibf-ft)
Replace.
20-310
20-311
Frame
Frame Repair Chart
Top Vi ew
Unit; mm (i n)
0: Inner di amet er
a1 For f r ont subf r ame mount 020 (0.79) f r ont
a2 For f r ont subf r ame mount 0I6 (0.63) r ear
bl Fr ont si de f r ame l ocat i ng hol e 025 (0.98) f r ont
b2 Fr ont si de f r ame l ocat i ng hol e 015 (0.59) r ear
b3 Fr ont si de f r ame r ear end l ocat i ng hol e 025 (0.98)
c1 For engi ne si de mount 013 (0.51) f r ont
c 2 For engi ne si de mount 013 (0.51) mi ddl e
c 3 For engi ne si de mount 013 (0.51) r ear
d1 For t r ans mi s s i on mount 011 (0.43) f r ont
e2
f l
f2
f3
14
gi
hi
d2 For t r ansmi ssi on mount 011 (0.43) mi ddl e
d3 For t r ansmi ssi on mount 011 (0.43) r ear
e1 For upper ar m mount 011 (0.43) f r ont
CENTER
L INE
For upper ar m mount 011 (0.43) r ear
Fr ont damper cent er hol e 050 (1.97)
For f r ont damper mount 011.5 (0.45) f r ont
For f r ont damper mount 011.5 (0.45) c ent er si de
For f r ont damper mount 011.5 (0.45) r ear
Fr ont f l oor l ocat i ng hol e 025 (0.98) f r ont
Fr ont f l oor t unnel f r ame l ocat i ng hol e 013 (0.51) f r ont
VERTI CAL
LINE
20-312
g2 Fr ont f l oor l ocat i ng hol e 025 (0.98) r ear
h2 Fr ont f l oor t unnel f r ame l ocat i ng hol e 013 (0.51) r ear
i Rear f r ame A l ocat i ng hol e 025 (0.98)
j Rear f l oor l ocat i ng hol e 025 (0.98)
k1 For r ear subf r ame mount 028.2 (1.03) f r ont
k2 For r ear subf r ame mount 026.2 (1 .3) r ear
I Rear damper c ent er hol e 052 (2.05)

4-door v; x
w

23 4 5 ( 92. 32) 2285 (89.96)
(D
2800(110.2) 2740 (107.9)
(D
2983(117.4) 2923 (115.1)
(4)
h
3lT^ (122.5) 3052 (120.2)
3350(131.9)
1
3290 (129.5)
(D,
4-door 2-door
CD 224 0 ( 88. 1S) 2180 (85.83)
d)
2 519 ( 99. 17) 2459 (96.81)

2986(117.6) 2926(115.2)
3260 (128.3) 3200(126.0)
m l Rear f l oor c r oss-member l ocat i ng hol e 015 (0.59) r i ght si de n
m2 Rear f l oor c r oss-member l ocat i ng hol e 015 (0.59) left si de o
Rear f r ame B l ocat i ng hol e 025 (0.98)
Spar e t i r e pan l ocat i ng hol e 0 2 5 (0.98)
(c ont ' d)
20-313
Frame
Fr ame Repai r Char t (cont'd)
Si de Vi ew
Uni t : mm (i n)
0: Inner di amet er
al F or f r ont subf r ame mount 02 (0.79) f r ont
a2 F or f r ont subf r ame mount 018 (0.S3) rear
b l Fr ont si de f r ame l ocat i ng hole 025 (0.98) f r ont
b2 Fr ont s i de f r ame l ocat i ng hol e 015 (0.59) r ear
b3 Fr ont s i de f r ame r ear end l ocat i ng hol e 025 (0.98)
c l For engi ne si de mount 013 (0.51) f r ont
c 2 For engi ne si de mount 013 (0.51) mi ddl e
c 3 For engi ne si de mount 013 (0.51) r ear
d l For t r ansmi ssi on mount 011 (0.43) f r ont
d2 For t r ansmi ssi on mount 011 (0.43) mi ddl e
d3 For t r ans mi s s i on mount 011 (0.43) r ear
el For upper ar m mount 011 (0.43) f r ont
e2 For upper ar m mount 011 (0.43) r ear
f 1 Fr ont damper c ent er hol e 050 (1.97)
f 2 For f r ont damper mount 011.5 (0.45) f r ont
f 3 For f r ont damper mount 011.5 (0.45) c ent er si de
f4 For f r ont damper mount 011.5 (0.45) r ear
g1 Fr ont f l oor l ocat i ng hol e 025 (0.98) f r ont
h i Fr ont f l oor t unnel f r ame l ocat i ng hol e 013 (0.51) f r ont
d
M12x1.25
For t o wer bar mount 010 (0.39)
129.1
0
[ Sec t i on AA]
55 (2.2)
55 (2.2)
256(10.1)
[ Sec t i on BB]
B A S E
LINE
a1
M14x1. 5
c3
d3
M10x1.25
VERTI CAL
LINE
M12x1.25
20-314
g2 Fr ont f l oor l ocat i ng hol e 025 (0.98) rear
h2 Fr ont f l oor t unnel f r ame l ocat i ng hol e 013 (0.51) r ear
I Rear f r ame A l ocat i ng hol e 025 (0.98)
j Rear f l oor l ocat i ng hol e 025 (0.98)
k l For r ear subf r ame mount 026.2 (1.03) f r ont
k2 For r ear subf r ame mount 026.2 (1.03) r ear
I Rear damper c ent er hol e 052 (2.05)
m l Rear f l oor c r oss-member l ocat i ng hol e 015 (0.59) ri ght si de
m2 Rear f l oor c r oss-member l ocat i ng hol e 015 (0.59) left si de
n Rear f r ame B l ocat i ng hol e 025 (0.98)
o Spar e t i r e pan l ocat i ng hol e 025 (0.98)
20-315
SUPPL EMENTAL RESTRAINT S YS TE M (SRS) (If HVAC mai nt enance i s requi red)
The Ac c or d S RS Incl udes a dr i ver ' s ai r bag In t he st eer i ng wheel hub, a passenger ' s ai r bag In t he dashboar d
above t he gl ove box, seat belt t ensi oner s In t he f ront seat belt r et r act or s, si de cur t ai n ai r bags In t he si des of t he
roof, and si de ai r bags in t he front seat -bac ks. Inf ormat i on nec essar y to saf el y ser vi c e t he S RS i s i ncl uded i n t hi s
To avoi d r ender i ng t he S RS i noper at i ve, whi c h c oul d l ead to per sonal i nj ury or deat h i n t he event of a sever e
f ront al or si de c ol l i si on, al l S RS ser vi c e wor k shoul d be done by an aut hor i zed Honda deal er .
Do not bump or i mpact t he S RS uni t, front i mpact s ens or s , si de i mpact s ens or s , or r ear saf i ng sensor ,
especi al l y when t he i gni t i on swi t ch i s in ON (II), or f or at l east 3 mi nut es after t he i gni ti on swi t c h i s t ur ned to
S RS el ect ri cal c onnec t or s ar e i dent i f i ed by yel l ow col or c odi ng. Rel at ed c omponent s ar e l ocat ed i n t he
i n t he f ront seat s, i n t he roof si de, and ar ound t he f l oor. Do not us e el ect ri cal t est equi pment on t hese ci r cui t s.
Heating, Ventilation, and Air Conditioning
Heat i ng/Ai r Condi t i oni ng
A/ C S er v i c e Ti ps and Pr e c au t i o n s . . . . . . 21-6
A / C Ref r i ger ant Oi l Repl ac ement 21-6
A/ C L i ne Repl ac ement 21-7
A / C S y s t em Inspec t i on . . . . . . . 21-8
Gener al Tr oubl es hoot i ng Inf or mat i on . 21- 9
S y s t em Desc r i pt i on . 21-14
Rec i r c ul at i on Cont r ol Mot or Ci r c ui t
Tr oubl es hoot i ng . . 21-44
HVAC Cont r ol Power and Gr o und
A/ C Co nd ens er Fan Ci r c ui t
Radi at or and A/ C Co nd ens er Fan
Co mmo n Ci r c ui t Tr oubl es hoot i ng . . . 21-47
Radi at or and A / C Co nd ens er Fan L o w
S peed Ci r c ui t Tr oubl es hoot i ng 21-48
A/ C Co nd ens er Fan Hi gh S peed Ci r c ui t
Tr oubl es hoot i ng . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-51
A/ C Co mpr es s o r Cl ut c h Ci r c ui t
A / C Pr es s ur e S wi t c h Ci r c ui t
A / C S i gnal Ci r c ui t Tr oubl es hoot i ng 21-56
Ev apor at or Temper at ur e S ens o r T e s t . . 21-58
Power Tr ans i s t o r Tes t . . 21-58
Ai r Mi x Cont r ol Mot or T e s t . . 21-59
Ai r Mi x Cont r ol Mot or Rep l ac emen t . . . 21-60
Mode Cont r ol Mot or Tes t 21-61
Mode Cont r ol Mot or Re p l ac e me n t . . . . . 21-62
Rec i r c ul at i on Cont r ol Mot or Tes t 21-63
Rec i r c ul at i on Cont r ol Mot or
HVAC Cont r ol Uni t
Bl ower Uni t Removal / Inst al l at i on . . 21-65
Bl ower Uni t Co mpo nent Repl ac ement . 21-67
Ev apor at or Cor e Re p l ac e m e n t . . . . . . . . 21-67
Ex pans i o n Val v e Repl ac ement 21-69
* Heat er Uni t / Cor e Repl ac ement 21-70
A / C Co mpr es s o r Repl ac ement 21-72
A/ C Co mpr es s o r Cl ut c h Ch ec k 21-73
A/ C Co mpr es s o r Cl ut c h Ov er h aul . 21-75
A / C Co mpr es s o r Rel i ef Val ve
R e p l a c e m e n t . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-77
A / C Co nd ens er R e p l a c e m e n t . . . . . . . . . . 21-77
Rec ei v er / Dr y er Des i c c ant
Repl ac ement . . . 21-79
Dust and Pol l en Fi l t er Repl ac ement 21-79
Ref r i ger ant Rec ov er y 21-80
S y s t em Ev ac uat i on 21-80
S y s t em Char gi ng 21-81
Ref r i ger ant L eak Ch ec k 21-82
A / C S y s t em Noi s e C h e c k . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-87
A / C S y s t em Tes t 21-89
Cl i mat e Cont r ol
Co mpo nent L oc at i on I n d ex . . . 21-96
Gener al Tr oubl es hoot i ng Inf or mat i on . 21-101
Ci r c ui t D i a g r a m . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-124
Cl i mat e Cont r ol Power and Gr o und
Navi gat i on Co mmuni c at i o n L i ne Ci r c ui t
T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-173
Aud i o Co mmuni c at i o n L i ne Ci r c ui t
Cl i mat e Cont r ol S wi t c h
Co mmuni c at i o n L i ne Ci r c ui t
Tr oubl es hoot i ng . . . 21-177
A / C Pr es s ur e S wi t c h Ci r c ui t
Tr oubl es hoot i ng . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-180
A / C Si gnal Ci r c ui t Tr oubl es hoot i ng 21-182
In-c ar Temper at ur e S ens o r T e s t . . . . . . . 21-184
In-c ar Temper at ur e S ens o r
Out s i de Ai r Temper at ur e S ens o r T e s t . . 21-185
Out s i de Ai r Temper at ur e S ens o r
Sunl i ght S ens o r T e s t . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-186
Sunl i ght S ens o r Re p l a c e m e n t . . . . . . . . . 21-186
Pas s eng er ' s Ai r Mi x Cont r ol Mot or
T e s t . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21- 187
Pas s eng er ' s Ai r Mi x Cont r ol Mot or
R e p l a c e m e n t . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-188
Mode Cont r ol Mot or Tes t 21-188
Rec i r c ul at i on Cont r ol Mot or Tes t 21-189
Cl i mat e Cont r ol Uni t
Cl i mat e Cont r ol S wi t c h
Heati ng/Ai r Condi ti oni ng
S E RVI CE VALVE
( L OW- PRES S URE SI DE)
A / C COMPRES S OR
Clutch Check, page 21-73
Clutch Overhaul, page 21-75
Relief Valve Replacement, page 21-77
21-2
(c ont ' d)
21-3
' 10 model
A / C PRE S S URE S E NS OR
21-4
. HEATER UNIT/CORE
' Replacement, page 21-70
EVAPORATOR CORE
(Located In the heater unit)
MODE CONTROL MOTOR
Test('08-10 models with M/T and '08-09 models 2-door with A / T ) , page 21-61
/Test ('08-09 models 4-door with A/T and '10 model with A / T ) , page 21-61
EXPANSION VALVE
DUS TAND
POL L EN FIL TER
BL OWER UNIT
Component Replacement, page 21-67
HVAC CONTROL UNIT
AIR MIX CONTROL MOTOR
Test, page 21-59
POWER TRANS I S TOR
Test, page 21-58
EVAPORATOR
TEMPERATURE S E NS OR
Test, page 21-58
RECI RCUL ATI ON
CONTROL MOTOR
Test ('08-10 models with M/T and '08-09 models 2-door with A/T), page 21-63
Test ('08-09 models 4-door with A/T and '10 model with A/T), page 21-63
21-5
A / C Ser vi ce Ti ps and Precaut i ons A / C Refri gerant Oi l Repl acement
14 WARN I
Compr essed ai r mi xed wi t h t he R-134a f or ms a
combust i bl e vapor .
The vapor c an burn or expl ode c ausi ng ser i ous
i nj ury.
Never use c ompr essed ai r to pr essur e t est R-134a
ser vi c e equi pment or vehi c l e ai r condi t i oni ng
s y s t ems .
Ai r condi t i oni ng ref ri gerant or l ubri cant vapor c an
i rri tate your ey es , nose, or t hroat .
Be caref ul when connect i ng ser vi c e equi pment .
Do not breat he ref ri gerant or vapor .
T h A ai r condi t i oni ng syst em us s s HFC-134a f R-134a)
ref ri gerant and pol yal kyl enegl ycol (PAG) ref ri gerant oi l ,
whi c h ar e not compat i bl e wi t h CFC-12 (R-12) ref ri gerant
or mi ner al oi l . Do not use R-12 ref ri gerant or mi ner al oi l
in t hi s s y s t em, and do not at t empt to use R-12 ser vi ci ng
equi pment ; damage to t he ai r condi t i oni ng syst em or
your ser vi c i ng equi pment wi l l r esul t .
Use onl y ser vi c e equi pment t hat i s U.L -l i st ed and i s
cert i f i ed to meet t he r equi r ement s of S AE J2210 to
r emove R-134a f rom t he ai r condi t i oni ng syst em.
If acci dent al syst em di sc har ge oc c ur s, vent i l at e t he wor k
ar ea bef ore r esumi ng ser vi c e.
R-134a ser vi c e equi pment or vehi c l e ai r condi t i oni ng
syst ems shoul d not be pr essur e t est ed or leak t est ed
wi t h c ompr essed ai r.
Addi t i onal heal t h and saf et y i nf ormat i on may be
obt ai ned f r om t he ref ri gerant and l ubri cant
manuf act ur er s.
Al ways di sconnect t he negat i ve cabl e f r om t he battery
whenever r epl aci ng ai r condi t i oni ng par t s.
Keep moi st ur e and dirt out of t he syst em. When
di sconnect i ng any l i nes, pl ug or c ap t he fi tti ngs
i mmedi at el y; don' t r emove t he c aps or pl ugs unti l j ust
bef ore you r econnect eac h l i ne.
Bef ore connect i ng any hose or l i ne, appl y a f ew dr ops
of ref ri gerant oi l to t he O-r i ng.
When t i ght eni ng or l ooseni ng a f i t t i ng, use a sec ond
wr enc h to suppor t t he mat chi ng fi tti ng.
When di schar gi ng t he s y s t em, use an R-134a
ref ri gerant r ecover y/r ecycl i ng/char gi ng st at i on; don' t
r el ease ref ri gerant into t he at mospher e.
Rec ommended PAG oi l : DENS O ND-OIL 8
P/N 38897-PR7-A01AH: 120 m l (4 fl-oz)
It i s i mport ant to have t he cor r ect amount of ref ri gerant
oi l in t he A/ C syst em to ensur e proper l ubri cat i on of t he
A/ C c ompr essor .
Too little oi l damages t he A/ C c ompr essor ; t oo much oi l
r educ es t he cool i ng capaci t y of t he s y s t em, and c an
pr oduce hi gh vent t emper at ur es.
To avoi d cont ami nat i on, do not return t he oi l to t he
cont ai ner onc e di spensed, and never mi x it wi t h ot her
ref ri gerant oi l s.
Immedi at el y after usi ng t he oi l , rei nst al l t he c ap on t he
cont ai ner , and seal it to avoi d moi st ur e absor pt i on.
Do not spi l l t he ref ri gerant oi l on t he vehi c l e; it may
r l a â r j o +h e p2Jnt ; if it gZtZ Cr , t l .o
H
amL, vvaoii i i off
i mmedi at el y.
Add t he r ec ommended ref ri gerant oi l i n t he amount
l i st ed if you r epl ace any of t he f ol l owi ng par t s.
A/ C c ondenser
(i ncl udi ng Dr yer
Desi c c ant ).. 35 mL (1 1/5 f l-oz)
Evapor at or 35 mL (1 1/5 fl-oz)
Li ne or hose 10 mL (1/3 fl-oz)
Leakage repai r 25 mL (5/6 fl-oz)
A/ C c ompr essor For A/ C c ompr essor r epl acement ,
subt r act t he vol ume of oi l dr ai ned
f r om t he r emoved A/ C c ompr essor
f r om 82 mL (2 7/9 fl-oz), and dr ai n
t he cal cul at ed vol ume of oi l f r om
t he new A/ C c ompr essor : 82 mL
(2 7/9 fl-oz) Vol ume of r emoved
A/ C c ompr essor = Vol ume to drai n
f r om new A/ C c ompr essor .
NOTE: Even if no oi l i s dr ai ned
f rom t he r emoved A/ C
c ompr essor , don' t dr ai n mor e
t han 50 mL (1 2/3 fl-oz) f r om t he
new A/ C c ompr essor .
REMOVED NEW
A / C COMPRES S OR . A / C COMPRES S OR
SAME LEVIs ~-
A: 82 mL (2 7/9 f l -oz)
DRAINING
VOL UME h
A
A/C COMPRESSOR
(D Di sc har ge hose to t he A / C compressor (6 x 1.0 mm): S.8 N-m (1.0 kgf -m, 7.2 Ibf-ft)
Di sc har ge hose to t he A / C condenser ( 6x 1. mm): 9.8 N-m f 1.0 kgf -m, 7.2 Ibf-ft)
Rec ei ver l i ne t o t he A / C c ondenser (6 x 1.0 mm): 9.8 N-m (1.0 kgf -m, 7.2 Ibf-ft)
A / C pr essur e swi t c h or A / C pr essur e sensor to the receiver line (11 x 1.0 mm): 10.8 N-m (1.1 kgf -m, 8.0 Ibf-ft)
(5) Rec ei ver l i ne to t he A / C l i ne (16 x 1.5 mm): 13.7 N-m (1.4 k g f m, 10.1 ibf-ft)
A / C l i nes t o t he evapor at or (6x 1.0 mm): 9.8 N-m (1.0 k g f m, 7.2 Ibf-ft)
A / C l i ne t o t he suc t i on hose (6x 1.0 mm): 9.8 N-m (1.0 kgf -m, 7.2 Ibf-ft)
Suc t i on hose t o t he A / C c ompr essor (6 x 1.0 mm): 9.8 N-m (1.0 kgf -m, 7.2 Ibf-ft)
A / C c ompr essor t o t he A / C c ompr essor br ac ket (8 x 1.25 mm): 22 N-m (2.2 k g f m, 16 Ibf-ft)
@ A / C c ompr essor br acket t o t he engi ne bl ock (1 x 1.25 mm): 44 N-m (4.5 k g f m, 32.5 Ibf-ft)
Heat i ng/Ai r Condi ti oni ng
A/C Sf stem inspection
Bef ore t r oubl eshoot i ng any pr obl em wi t h t he ai r
condi t i oni ng s y s t em, do t he f ol l owi ng:
1. Wi t h t he i gni ti on swi t c h in L OCK (0), i nspect t he A/ C
c omponent s, t he pr essur e l i nes and t he hos es f or
st ai ns t hat may i ndi cat e a ref ri gerant or a c ompr essor
oi l leak.
Check for stains.
2. Chec k t he A/ C c ondenser f or mat eri al cl oggi ng t he
f i ns or f or damage to t he f i ns:
Car ef ul l y cl ean any mat eri al f r om t he A/ C
c ondenser f i ns wi t h wat er and det ergent . If deeper
cl eani ng i s r equi r ed, cl ean t he f i ns wi t h Hondabr i t e
Mot or cycl e Cl eaner (P/N 08732-0032).
Be sur e to dry t he A/ C c ondenser (A) compl et el y.
- Ref er to t he ref ri gerant leak t est (see page 21-82) to
conf i r m l eaks if t her e i s vi si bl e damage to t he A/ C
c ondenser .
3. Inspect t he dri ve belt (see page 4-29).
4. Make sur e no mat eri al i s bl ocki ng t he ai r f l ow t o t he
A/ C c ondenser .
5. Chec k t he dust and pol l en fi lter, and r epl ace it if it i s
cl ogged (see page 21-79).
6. Chec k f or ki nks or shar p bends in t he A/ C l i nes and
hos es , whi c h c an great l y r educe syst em per f or mance.
Repl ace t he A/ C l i nes and hoses if t hey are ki nked or
damaged (see page 21-7).
7. St ar t t he engi ne, t urn t he ai r condi t i oni ng syst em on,
and al l ow it to run f or a f ew mi nut es and r each st abl e
oper at i on.
8. Chec k t hat t he A/ C oper at es at eac h posi t i on of t he
bl ower f an swi t c h (except OFF). If t he A/ C does not
oper at e, refer to t he sympt om t r oubl eshoot i ng.
9. Chec k that t he A/ C c ompr essor cl ut ch (A) i s engaged.
The pr essur e pl at e shoul d be rotati ng at t he s ame
c n ao r i c t
h
e pi i Hey. !f t h e prcecur plate does not
engage, refer to t he sympt om t r oubl eshoot i ng.
A B
10. Chec k that t he cool i ng f ans (B) operat e when t he A/ C
c ompr essor cl ut ch i s engaged. If ei t her f an f ai l s to
. oper at e when t he A/ C c ompr essor cl ut ch i s engaged,
refer to t he sympt om t r oubl eshoot i ng.
11. Chec k that t he engi ne i dl e speed i s cor r ect when t he
A/ C i s swi t c hed on and off, and when t he A/ C
c ompr essor cl ut ch i s engaged and di sengaged.
21 "6
n
General Troubleshooting information
How t o Use t he Sel f -di agnost i c Funct i on
The HVAC cont rol uni t has a sel f -di agnost i c f unct i on f or t he heat i ng, vent i l at i on, and ai r condi t i oni ng syst em. To run t he
sel f -di agnost i c f unct i on, do t he f ol l owi ng:
1. Tur n t he i gni ti on swi t ch to L OCK (0), and t hen to ON (li ).
2. Set t he FAN CONTROL di al to OFF, t he TEMPERATURE CONTROL di al on Max Cool , and sel ec t t he VENT mode.
3. Tur n t he i gni ti on swi t ch to L OCK (0), and t hen to ON (II).
4. Pr ess and hol d t he RECIRCUL ATION CONTROL but t on, t hen wi t hi n 10 sec onds pr ess and r el ease t he REAR WINDOW
DEFOGGER/ MIRROR DEFOGGER button f i ve t i mes. Rel ease t he RECIRCUL ATION CONTROL but t on; t he r eci r cul at i on
i ndi cat or bl i nks t wo t i mes, t hen t he sel f -di agnost i c begi ns.
NOTE:
The bl ower mot or wi l l run at var i ous speeds when in t he sel f -di agnost i c mode.
Onc e t he sel f -di agnost i c f unct i on i s f i ni shed, t he reci rcul at i on i ndi cat or bl i nks, and t he number of bl i nks i ndi cat es
t he Di agnost i c Tr oubl e Code (DTC) number . If t here ar e mul t i pl e DTCs , t he i ndi cat or bl i nks eac h DTC in sequenc e
f r om t he l owest DTC number to t he hi ghest .
The i ndi cat or pauses 3 sec onds, t hen r epeat s t he DTC bli nk sequenc e.
If no DTCs ar e f ound, t he i ndi cat or does not bli nk.
RECI RCUL ATI ON INDICATOR
1
, VE NT BUTTON
o
MAX
A/C
D a
m
a a
A/ C
a
mm
RECI RCUL ATI ON CONTROL BUTTON
F AN CONTROL DIAL
\ TEMPERATURE CONTROL DIAL
REAR WINDOW DE FOGGE R/
MIRROR DEFOGGER BUTTON
E x amp l e of DTC I nd i c at i o n Pat t er n (DTC 3)
0.3 s ec
Reci r cul at i on
i ndi cat or
c omes on
Reci r cul at i on
i ndi cat or
goes off
0.3 s ec
Rec i r c ul at i on or
A / C i ndi cat or
c o mes on
A / C i ndi c at or
goes off
0.3 s ec
3.0 s ec
0.3 s ec
3.0 s ec
Sel f -di agnosi s begi n Sel f -di agnosi s f i ni shed
(cont' d)
21 *9
General Troubl eshoot i ng Information (cont'd)
Exampl e of DTCs Indi cat i on Pat t er n { DTC 2 and 41
0.3 s ec
Rec i r c ul at i on
i ndi cat or
c omes on
Rec i r c ul at i on
i ndi cat or
goes off
0.3 s ec 0.3 s ec
A / C i ndi cat or
c omes on
A / C i ndi cat or
goes off
1.5
s ec
0.3 s ec
1.5
sec 3.0 s ec
Sel f -di agnosi s begi n Sel f -di agnosi s f i ni shed
DTC (Reci r cul at i on
Indi cat or Bl i nks)
Det ect i on It em
1 An open in t he ai r mi x cont rol mot or ci rcui t (see page 21-24)
2 A shor t in t he ai r mi x cont rol mot or ci rcui t (see page 21-25)
3 A pr obl em in t he ai r mi x cont rol l i nkage, door , or mot or ci rcui t (see page 21-26)
4*
1
An open in t he mode cont rol mot or ci rcui t (see page 21-27)
A shor t in t he mode cont rol mot or ci rcui t (see page 21-28)
6*
1
A pr obl em in t he mode cont rol l i nkage, door s, or mot or ci rcui t (see page 21-29)
7*
1
An open in t he reci rcul at i on cont rol mot or ci rcui t (see page 21-31)
8*
1
A shor t i n t he reci rcul at i on cont rol mot or ci rcui t (see page 21-32)
r i
A pr obl em in t he reci rcul at i on cont rol l i nkage, door , or mot or ci rcui t (see page
21-33)
10*
2
An open or shor t i n t he mode cont rol ci rcui t (see page 21-35)
i r
z
A pr obl em in t he mode cont rol l i nkage, door s, or mot or ci rcui t (see page 21-37)
12 A pr obl em in t he bl ower mot or ci rcui t (see page 21-38)
13 HVAC cont rol uni t i nt ernal error (see page 21 -41)
14 An open in t he evapor at or t emper at ur e sensor ci rcui t (see page 21-42)
15 A shor t in t he evapor at or t emper at ur e sensor ci rcui t (see page 21-43)
*1: ' 08-10 model s wi t h M/T and ' 08-09 model s 2-door wi t h A/T
*2: ' 08-09 model s 4-door wi t h A/ T and ' 10 model wi t h A/ T
Cl ear t he DTCs
When t he pr obl em i s r epai r ed, DTCs wi l l aut omat i cal l y cl ear .
Max Cool Posi t i on Funct i on
When t he mode cont rol button i s in t he MAX A/ C posi t i on, the HVAC cont rol uni t wi l l aut omat i cal l y sel ect t he
r eci r cul at i on mode and t urn t he A/ C on. If t he reci rcul at i on swi t ch i s pr essed when i n MAX A/ C mode, MAX A/ C t ur ns off.
If t he A/ C swi t ch i s pr essed when in MAX A/ C mode, t he A/ C t ur ns off.
21-10
S ymptom Diagnostic procedure Also check for
The blower and heater
controls and the A/C
system do not work
Probable cause: HVAC control unit malfunction
Do the HVAC control power and ground circuit
troubleshooting (see page 21-45)
HVAC DTCs (see page 21-9)
B lown fuse No. 16 (7.5 A) in the
driver's under-dash fuse/relay box
F aulty blower motor relay
Poor ground at G401 (see page
22-40)
Poor or loose connections at the
terminals
The A/C compressor
clutch and the A/C
condenser/radiator fans
are inoperative, but the
blower and heater
controls work ('08-09
models)
Probable cause: A/C pressure switch circuit
malfunction
A/C pressure switch circuit troubleshooting (see page
21-54)
Powertrain DTCs (see page 11-3)
Poor- or loose connections at the
terminals
The A/C compressor
clutch and the A/C
are inoperative, but the
blower and heater
controls work ('10 model)
Probable cause: A/C pressure sensor circuit
malfunction
Do the A/C pressure sensor troubleshooting: A/C
pressure sensor circuit low voltage (see page 11 -282),
A/C pressure sensor circuit high voltage (see page
11-284)
NOTE: The A/C pressure sensor can malfunction
without setting a DTC
o ::VAC DTCs (see page 21-9)
A/C signal circuit troubleshooting
(see page 21-56)
terminals
The A/C compressor
clutch does not engage,
but the A/C
operate, and the blower
and heater controls work
Probable cause: No power to the A/C compressor
clutch
Do the A/C compressor clutch circuit troubleshooting
(see page 21-52)
B lown fuse No. 20 (7.5 A) in the
under-hood fuse/relay box
A/C system pressure is normal (see
page 21-89)
terminals
The A/C condenser fan is
inoperative, but the
radiator fan runs with the
A/C on. The blower and
heater controls work
normally ('08-09 models)
Probable cause: A/C condenser fan circuit
malfunction
Do the A/C condenser fan circuit troubleshooting
(see page 21-46)
Engine overheating due to high ECT
Low idle speed
o ,-;VAC DTCs (see page 21-9)
B lown fuse No. 5 (20 A) in the
22-30)
terminals
The A/C condenser and
radiator fans are
inoperative with the A/C
on. The blower and heater
controls work normally
('08-09 models)
Probable cause: Radiator/A/C condenser fan common
circuit malfunction
Do the radiator and A/C condenser fan common
circuit troubleshooting (see page 21-47)
B lown fuses No. 5 (20 A) and No. 3-6
(MAIN F AN MTR) (30 A) in the
22-30)
terminals
The condenser/radiator
fans do not run at low
speed with the A/C on, but
the blower and heater
controls work normally
('10 model)
Probable cause: Condenser/radiator fan low speed
circuit malfunction
Do the radiator and A/C condenser fan low speed
circuit troubleshooting (see page 21-48)
malfunction
pressure sensor circuit low voltage (see page
11-282), A/C pressure sensor circuit high voltage
(see page 11-284)
B lown fuse No. 3-8 (MAIN F AN MTR)
(30A) in the under-hood fuse/relay
box
22-30)
terminals
(cont'd)
S ymptom Diagnostic procedure Also check for
The c ondenser /r adi at or
f ans do not run at hi gh
s peed, but do r un at l ow
speed ("10 model )
Probable cause: Malfunction in the fan(s) high
speed circuit
Do the following troubleshooting as needed: A/C
condenser fan high speed circuit troubleshooting
(see page 21-51)
Radiator fan high speed circuit troubleshooting
(see page 10-26)
malfunction
pressure sensor circuit low voltage (see page
11-282), A/C pressure sensor circuit high voltage
(see page 11-284)
HVAC DTCs {see page 21-9)
B lown fuses No. 3-8 (MAIN F AN
MTR) (30A) and No. 3-6 (SUB F AN .
MTR) (30A) in the under-hood
fuse/relay box
22-28) and G302 {see page 22-30)
terminals
The A/ C c ompr es s or
cl ut ch c yc l es r api dl y on
and off
Probable cause: A/C system is very low on
refrigerant, indicating a possible leak
Do the refrigerant leak check (see page 21-82), and
. repair any leaks. Replace the receiver/dryer {see page
21-79), t hen r echar ge the s y s t em to specifications
(see page 21-81)
If there is no leak and the refrigerant
l evel is normal, do the A/C
compressor clutch circuit
troubleshooting {see page 21-52),
and look for an intermittent problem
War m ai r c omes out of t he
vent s, and t he hi gh
pr essur e l i qui d l i ne i s ver y
hot
Probable causes: The A/C system is overcharged (too
much refrigerant), or the condenser is malfunctioning
Recover A/C refrigerant (see page 21-80), then check
the A/C condenser for restrictions or poor airflow.
Repair as needed. Recharge the system to
specifications (see page 21-81)
Incorrect tension or abnormal wear
on the drive belt. Replace the belt
and/or the belt tensioner as needed
Proper operation of the A/C
condenser/radiator fans. Repair as
needed
Signs of an overheated engine.
Repair as needed
vent s. The suc t i on l i ne i s
cool to war m, and t he
di sc har ge li ne i s war m to
hot
Probable cause: A/C system is low on refrigerant,
indicating a possible leak
repair any leaks. Recharge the system to
specifications (see page 21-81)
Add refrigerant oil depending on the
part you replaced (see page 21-6)
vent s. The suc t i on l i ne i s
cool to war m, t he
hot, and t her e.i s no f r ost
on t he.expansi on val ve
Probable cause: Excessive air and/or moisture in the
system, indicating a possible leak
repair any leaks. Replace the receiver/dryer (see page
21-79), then recharge the system to specifications
(see page 21-81)
Check the amount of refrigerant oil
in the system (see page 21-6)
vent s. The l i qui d l i ne or
t he c ondenser out l et i s
abnor mal l y c ool , or t her e
i s f rost or c ondensat i on on
t he r ecei ver /dr yer
Probable cause: A restriction in the high-pressure
side of the system
:
the liquid line, the receiver/dryer, and the condenser
for restrictions. Repair as needed. Recharge the
system to specifications (see page 21-81)
Ther e i s heavy f r ost or
c ondensat i on on t he
expansi on val ve, and f r ost
on t he suc t i on l i ne
Probable cause: A restriction in the low-pressure side
of the system
the suction line, and the expansion valve for
restrictions. Repair as needed. Recharge the system
to specifications (see page 21-81)
vent s, but A/ C c ommand i s
nor mal (A/C swi t ch- and
cl ut ch ar e on)
Probable cause: A/C compressor failure
Do the A/C system test {see page 21-89), and correct
any problems. If necessary, replace the A/C
compressor {see page 21-72)
Add refrigerant oil depending on the
part you replaced (see page 21-6).
Dr i ver ' s and pas s enger ' s
si de vent t emper at ur es
vary by more than 20 F
111 C)
Probable causes: The recirculation control door or the
air mix door is malfunctioning
Do the following troubleshooting:
Recirculation control motor circuit troubleshooting
(see page 21-44)
Air mix control motor test (see page 21-59)
c HVAC DTCs (see page 21-9)
terminals
2
1-1?
1 B &,
Symptom Di agnost i c procedure Al s o c hec k f or
Warm air comes out of the
vents, and there is frost on
the expansion valve
Probable cause: The expansion valve is stuck closed
Replace the expansion valve (see page 21-69}
Check the old expansion valve for
contamination. If contaminants are
found, replace the A/C system
component (see page 21-7) that
caused the contamination
The temperature of the
liquid line is the same on
both sides of the
expansion valve, and the
evaporator coil or suction
line has heavy
condensation
Probable cause: The expansion valve is stuck open
Replace the expansion valve (see page 21-69)
Check the old expansion valve for
contamination. If contaminants are
found, replace the A/C system
component (see page 21-7) that
caused the contamination
Insufficient heating 1. Check the coolant level (see page 10-6)
2. Check the radiator cap (see page 10-3)
3. Check the coolant temperature during normal
operation
4. Check the heater core inlet hose temperature:
If it is COLD, check for restrictions in the hose, a
damaged or leaking thermostat, or a damaged
or leaking water pump
If it is HOT, check for restrictions in the heater
core. Back flush or replace the heater core
5. Do the air mix control motor test (see page 21-59)
6. Check the blower motor unit for obstructions
7. Check for air leaks around the ducts and vents
Damaged cylinder head gasket
21-13
Sf stem Description
The ai r condi t i oni ng (A/C) syst em r emoves heat f r om t he passenger c ompar t ment by t r ansf er r i ng heat f r om t he ambi ent
ai r to t he evapor at or . The A/ C syst em ref ri gerant expands i n t he evapor at or , and t he evapor at or bec omes ver y col d and
absor bs t he heat f r om t he ambi ent ai r. The bl ower f an pushes ai r ac r oss t he evapor at or wher e t he heat i s absor bed, and
t hen it bl ows t he cool ai r into t he passenger compar t ment .
EXPANSI ON VA L VE
(Met er s t he r equi r ed amount of
r ef r i ger ant i nt o t he evapor at or )
BL OWER FAN
EVAPORATOR
(Absor pt i on of heat )
EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE S E NS OR
A / C PRE S S URE SWI TCH
(' 08-09 model s)
When the refrigerant is below
196 kPa (2.0 kgf/cm
2
, 28 psi"
or above 3,138 kPa (32 kgf/cm
2
,
455 psi), the ECM/PCM turns the
compressor relay off to protect
the A/ C compressor.
('10 model )
196 kPa (2.0 kgf/cm
2
, 28 psi*
2
,
the A/C compressor. When the
refrigerant i s above 1,470 kPa
(15.0 kgf/cm
2
, 213 psi), the A/C
pressure sensor switches the
radiator and A/C condenser
fans to high speed.
nz L z r VALVE:
(Rel i eves pr essur e at t he A / C c ompr essor
wh en t he pr essur e i s too hi gh)
A / C CONDENS ER
(Radi at i on of heat )
RECEI VER/ DRYER
DES I CCANT
(Tr aps debr i s, and
r emoves moi st ur e)
A / C COMPRES S OR
(Suc t i on and c ompr essi on)
HIGH PRE S S URE VAPOR
HIGH PRE S S URE LIQUID
L OW PRE S S URE LIQUID
L OW PRE S S URE VAPOR
Thi s vehi c l e us es HFC-134a (R-134a) ref ri gerant , whi c h does not cont ai n chl or of l uor ocar bons. Pay attenti on to t he
f ol l owi ng ser vi c e i t ems:
Do not mi x ref ri gerant s CFC-12 (R-12) and HFC-134a (R-134a). They ar e not compat i bl e.
Use onl y t he r ec ommended pol yal kyl enegl ycol (PAG) ref ri gerant oi l (DENSO ND-OIL 8) desi gned f or t he R-134a A/ C
c ompr essor . Int ermi xi ng t he r ec ommended (PAG) ref ri gerant oi l wi t h any ot her ref ri gerant oi l wi l l r esul t in A/ C
c ompr essor f ai l ure.
Al l A/ C syst em part s (A/C c ompr essor , di sc har ge l i ne, suct i on l i ne, evapor at or , A/ C c ondenser , r ecei ver /dr yer ,
expansi on val ve, O-r i ngs for j oi nt s) ar e desi gned f or ref ri gerant R-134a. Do not exc hange wi t h R-12 par t s.
Use a hal ogen gas leak det ect or desi gned for ref ri gerant R-134a.
R-12 and R-134a ref ri gerant ser vi c i ng equi pment ar e not i nt er changeabl e. Us e onl y a r ecover y/r ecycl i ng/char gi ng
st at i on t hat i s U.L.-l i st ed and i s cert i f i ed to meet t he r equi r ement s of S AE J2210 to ser vi c e t he R-134a ai r condi t i oni ng
syst ems.
Al ways r ec over ref ri gerant R-134a wi t h an appr oved r ecover y/r ecycl i ng/char gi ng st at i on bef ore di sconnect i ng any
A/ C fi tti ng.
21-14
A / C Pr essur e Sensor ('10 Model )
The A/C pressure sensor converts A/C pressure into electrical signals to the ECM/PCM,
A/C System Pressure Sensor Output
Voltage (V out)
System Operation
Abnormally low pressure: Below 196 kPa
(2.0 kgf/cm
2
, 28 psi)
Below 0.685 V The ECM/PCM disengages the A/C compressor clutch.
The radiator and A/C condenser fans operate based on
engine coolant temperature.
Normal operating pressure:
Above 196 kPa (2.0 kgf/cm
2
, 28 psi)
B elow 1,470 kPa (15.0 kgf/cm
2
, 213 psi)
0.686 V to 1.944 V The ECM/PCM cycles the A/C compressor clutch based
on cooling demand. The radiator and A/C condenser fans
operate at low speed unless the engine coolant
temperature exceeds 206 F (97 C)
High operating pressure:
Above 1,470 kPa (15.0 kgf/cm
2
, 213 psi)
B elow 3,138 kPa (32 kgf/cm
2
, 455 psi)
1.945 V to 4.575 V The ECM/PCM cycles the A/C compressor clutch based
on cooling demand. The radiator and A/C condenser fans
operate at high speed.
Abnormally high pressure: More than
3,138 kPa (32 kgf/cm
2
, 455 psi)
Above 4.575 V The ECM/PCM disengages the A/C compressor clutch.
The radiator and A/C condenser fans operate based on
engine coolant temperature.
The response of the A/C pressure sensor is shown in the graph.
NOTE: When the refrigerant is below 196 kPa (2.0 kgf/cm
2
, 28 psi) or above 3,138 kPa (32 kgf/cm
2
, 455 psi), the ECM/PCM turns the A/C
compressor relay off to protect the A/C compressor. When the refrigerant pressure is above 1,470 kPa (15.0 kgf/cm
2
, 213 psi), the
ECM/PCM switches the radiator and A/C condenser fans to high speed.
V
OUTPUT
VOLTAGE
(Vout)
. 6 84
. 4 25
0.2945
Vcc5V Vout GND
(cont 'd)
21-15
21-16
(cont'd)
HVAC Cont r ol Uni t Input s and Out put s
HVAC CONTROL UNIT 24P CONNECTOR
i r n
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 2 0 2 1 2 2 2 3 24
name
Description Signal
V
2
GRN MODE 4 Inputs mode motor signal With ignition switch ON (II): less than 0.5 V
or about 5.0 V (depending on mode control
motor position)
2*
2
BLU MODE 3 Inputs mode motor signal With ignition switch ON (II): less than 0.5 V
motor position)
3*2
PUR MODE 2 Inputs mode motor signal With ignition switch ON (II): less than 0.5 V
motor position)
4'
2
ORN MODE 1 Inputs mode motor signal With ignition switch ON (II): less than 0.5 V
motor position)
5 PNK AIR MI X
HOT
Drives air mix control motor HOT side With ignition switch ON (II) and air mix
control motor change to the max COOL
position: less than 0.5 V at several seconds
6 LT BLU AIR MI X
COOL
Drives air mix control motor COOL side With ignition switch ON (II) and air mix
control motor change to the max HOT
position: less than 0.5 V at several seconds
7 GRN M-DEF Outputs mode control motor DEF side With ignition switch ON (II) and mode
control motor change to the VENT position:
less than 0.5 V at several seconds
8 WH T M-VENT Outputs mode control motor VENT side With ignition switch ON (II) and mode
control motor change to the DEF position:
less than 0.5 V at several seconds
9 ORN M-REC Drives recirculation control motor
RECIRCULATE side
With ignition switch ON (II) and
recirculation control motor change to the
FRESH position: connected to ground at
several seconds
* 1 : '08-09 models 4-door with M/T, 2-door, and ' 10 model with M/T
*2: '08-09 models 4-door with A/T and '10 model with A/T
21-18
Cavi t y Wire color Ter mi nal
name
Descr i pt i on Si gnal
10 PUR M-FRS Dr i ves r eci r cul at i on cont rol mot or FRES H
si de
Wi t h i gni t i on swi t c h ON (II) and
r eci r cul at i on cont rol mot or c hange to t he
RECI RCU posi t i on: c onnec t ed to gr ound at
sever al s ec onds
11 L T GRN IG2 IG2 power sour c e Wi t h i gni t i on swi t c h ON (II): battery vol t age
12 GRY S MAL L Input s vol t age f or i l l umi nat i on Wi t h c ombi nat i on li ght swi t c h ON: bat t ery
vol t age
13 BL K S5V Out put s ens or 5 V Wi t h i gni t i on swi t c h ON (II): about 5.0 V
14 BRN Tev a Det ect s evapor at or t emper at ur e s ens or
si gnal
Wi t h i gni t i on swi t c h ON (II): about
1.04.0 V (dependi ng on evapor at or
t emper at ur e)
15 RED S ENS - COM S ens o r gr ound L es s t han 0.5 V at all t i mes
16
#1
L T GRN MDD-P Out put s mode cont rol mot or pot ent i omet er
si gnal
17 GRY AMD-P Out put s ai r mi x cont rol motor
pot ent i omet er si gnal
Wi t h i gni t i on swi t c h ON (II): about
0.54.5 V (dependi ng on ai r mi x mot or
posi t i on)
18 YE L BL W-G Out put s power t r ansi st or gat e vol t age Wi t h i gni t i on swi t ch ON (II) and f an cont r ol
swi t c h OFF: l ess t han 0.5 V
Wi t h i gni t i on swi t c h ON (II) and f an cont r ol
swi t c h ON: about 4.0 V battery vol t age
(dependi ng on bl ower mot or cont rol )
19 BL U BL W-V Feedbac k si gnal of power t r ansi st or dr ai n
vol t age
Wi t h i gni t i on swi t c h ON (II): about 0 V
bat t ery vol t age (dependi ng on bl ower
mot or speed)
2o*i
PNK RFD-P Out put s r eci r cul at i on cont rol mot or
21 L T BL U A CS Out put s A/ C on/of f si gnal Wi t h i gni t i on swi t c h ON (II), A/ C pr essur e
swi t c h ON, and A/ C c ompr essor cl ut ch ON:
l ess t han 0.5 V
Wi t h i gni t i on swi t ch ON (II), A/ C pr essur e
swi t c h ON, and A/ C c ompr essor cl ut ch OFF:
bat t ery vol t age
22 RED Rr DEF Ry Dr i ves rear wi ndow def ogger r el ay
2 3 BL K GND Gr ound f or HVAC cont r ol uni t (G401) L es s t han 0.5 V at al l t i mes
2 4 RED ILL - Det ect s i l l umi nat i on cont rol si gnal Wi t h i l l umi nat i on swi t c h ON: c hanged
vol t age (dependi ng on dash li ght
br i ght ness cont rol l er)
* 1: ' 08-09 model s 4-door wi t h M/T, 2-door , and ' 10 model wi t h M/T
* 2: ' 08-09 model s 4-door wi t h A/ T and ' 10 model wi t h A/ T
21- 19
Ci rcui t Di agram
'08-09 Models
No. 1
(MAIN) (100 A)
< r u >
No. 3-1
(IG MAIN) (50 A)
-CfXjO
No. 8 (40 A)
C T X J O
No. 20 (7.5 A)
O~XJ 0
IGNITION SWITCH
/BAT
I G2 /
IG2 HOT i n ON (II)
DRIVER'S UNDER-DASH
No. 16 (7.5 A)
c r \ _ o -
P18
LT GRN
L T GRN
No. 3-6
(MAIN FAN MTR) (30 A)
RELAY CIRCUIT BOARD
A/ C DI ODE A
<
RADIATOR
FAM RPI AV
A/C
COMPRESSOR
C3
B L U/ YE L
B7
YEL
BLOWER
MOTOR
r
J I N C , I C C D P\ RADIATOR
, CONDENSER ( y ) F A N
FAN NLg
7
MOTOR
% MOTOR T1
G302 G302
BLU/RED BLK
t I
R F D / W H T
WHT
A/C
COMPRESSOR
CLUTCH
F-CAN H
F-CAN L
A3 F25
WHT - - -
A4 F24
- - RED - - -
MI CU
A CS
B-CAN H
P6 F3
H PNK - -
P5 F4
DRIVER'S
J UNCTI ON
BOX1
h
E
l P N K .
E9
BLU
B-CAN H
B-CAN L
J 2 C1
J1 C2
DRI VE R' S UNDE R- DAS H
F US E / RE L A Y BOX
ENGI NE
| COOL A NT
TE MPE RA TURE
(ECT) SENSOR 2
CENTER
J UNCTI ON
BOX
F-CAN H
F- CAN L
GAUGE
CONTROL
MODULE
E CM/ PCM
21-20
L T GRN
No. 6 (7.5 A) F US E
(In t he pas s enger ' s
under - das h f us e/ r el ay box)
(In t he pas s eng er ' s (
DAS HL I GHTS
B RI GHTNE S S ^ \
CONTROL L E R \ J
(In t he gauge c ont r ol modul e)
RE D
REAR WI NDOW
DE F OGGE R RE L A Y
PUR ( Q- L T B L U
*1; 4-door wi t h M/T, 2-door
* 2: 4-door wi t h A/ T
bocJ
5 V
T
DRI VI NG
CI RCUI T
It
BRN
- BL K -
- GRY -
- PNK -
L T B L U
- ORN -
- WH T -
GRN -
RED -
PUR -
- YE L -
GRY
- ORN o- L T GRN -
PUR GRY
B L U L T BL U
GRN 9 WHT -
. : CAN l i ne
* 2
B L OWE R
MOTOR
POWE R GRN
TRA NS I S TOR \ ,
EVAPORATOR
TE MOE RA TURE
S E NS OR
S 5V S - COM
AMD-P AMD-P
AIR MIX
CONTROL .
M-HOT MOTOR
M- COOL
FRS
RE C
RECI RCUL ATI ON
CONTROL
MOTOR
M-VENT
M-DEF
" I
MODE 1 |
MODE 2 j
S COM
MODE 3 j
MODE 4 !
MODE
CONTROL
MOTOR
| S 5V MODE-P~!
. L T GRN RED
. RE D - WHT -
L T GRN
I
HVAC CONTROL UNI T
1
G401 G302
21-21
Heating/Air Conditioning
Ci rcui t Di agram (cont' d}
10 Model
B A TTE RY
0-
No. 1
(MAIN) (100 A)
Cf\jO
PGM-FI
S UB RE L A Y
No. 21
(7.5 A)
No. 3-1
(IG MAIN) (50 A)
Cf\ D
No. 8 (40 A)
CTVJ O
No. 20 (7.5 A)
c r \ x >
IGNITION S WI TCH
^ B A T
I G2 /
IG2 HOT i n ON (II)
No. 16(7. 5 A)
<rv_>- L T GRN
No. 3-8
-cr\j>
G302
J~i. F-CAN H
77T F-CAN L
5V~9~ VCC6
I
< ACPD
. F25 A3
WHT
A4 F24
- RE D
SG6
DRI VER' S
J UNCTI ON
BOX 1
P6 F3
- - - PNK
P5 F4
BL U
P16 J 2
WHT
P15 J1
RED
E10 19
, _ .P NK
E9 18
- B L U
C1 30
- - WHT - -
C2 29
- RED
B-CAN H
B-CAN L
F-CAN H
F-CAN L
DRI VER' S UNDE R- DAS H
A/ C
PRE S S URE
S E NS OR
CE NTE R
J UNCTI ON
B OX
GA UGE
CONTROL
MODUL E
A17
B L U
ENGI NE
COOL A NT
TE MPE RA TURE
( ECT) S E NS OR 2
A34 1 \ 2
YE L / RE D ^ V V W BL K
A10
1
21-22
No. 6 (7.5 A) FUSE r v.
(In t he pas s eng er ' s J > <
under -das h f use/ r el ay box) \ ^
DAS HL I GHTS
B RI GHTNE S S ^ - j
CONTROLLER \ J
RED
REAR WI NDOW
DE FOGGE R RE L A Y
* 1: M/T
* 2: A/T
5 V
DRIVING
CIRCUIT
T
7fk
i
T
4-
- BLK -
- GRY -
- PNK -
LT BLU
PUR -
ORN -
- WHT -
- GRN -
RED
PUR -
YEL
GRY
. ORN LT GRN
- PUR G R Y -
. BLU L T BLU
. GRN - 9 WHT -
: CAN l i ne
* 2
BLOWER
MOTOR
POWER GRN
TRANSISTOR
EVAPORATOR
TEMOERATURE
SENSOR
-^WVV WHT-
S 5V S-COM
AMD-P AMD-P
AIR MIX
CONTROL
M-HOT MOTOR
M-COOL
S - COM
FRS
RE C
RECIRCULATION
CONTROL
MOTOR
M-VENT
M-DEF
S - COM
M O D E 1
M O D E 2
M O D E 3 I M O D E
MODE 4 ! C O N T R O L
_ _ _ J M O T O R
f S 5V " M O D E - P
1
. _l
3 i
RED e WHT -
1
HVAC CONTROL UNIT
G302
21-23
DTC indicator 1: An Open in the Ai r Mi x
Control Motor Ci rcui t
1. Tur n t he i gni t i on swi t ch to L OCK (0), and t hen to
ON (II).
2. Do t he sel f -di agnost i c f unct i on wi t h t he HVAC cont rol
uni t (see page 21-9).
3. Chec k for DTCs.
Is DTC 1 indicated?
YE S-Go to st ep 4.
NO-l nt er mi t t ent f ai l ur e. Chec k f or l oose wi r es or poor
connect i ons on t he ai r mi x cont rol mot or c i r c ui t . ! !
5. Test t h e ai r mi x cont rol mot or (see page 21-59).
Is the air mix control motor OK ?
YE S-Go to st ep 6.
NO-Repl ac e t he ai r mi x cont rol mot or (see page
21-60).B
6. Di sconnect t he ai r mi x cont rol mot or 7P connect or .
7. Di sconnect t he HVAC cont rol uni t 24P connect or .
8. Check f or cont i nui t y bet ween t he f ol l owi ng t er mi nal s
of t he HVAC cont rol uni t 24P connect or and t he ai r
mi x cont rol mot or 7P connect or .
24P: 7P:
No. 13 No. 5
No. 15 No. 7
No. 17 No. 3
n i r
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
BL K RED
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
GRY
GRY BL K GRY C
r
BL K
1
C
M
3 5
/
7
WH T
AIR MIX CONTROL MOTOR 7P CONNECTOR
YE S-Check f or l oose wi r es or poor connect i ons at t he
HVAC cont rol uni t 24P connect or , and at t he ai r mi x
cont rol mot or 7P connect or . If t he connect i ons ar e
good, subst i t ut e a known-good HVAC cont rol uni t and
r echeck. If t he sympt om/i ndi cat i on goes away,
r epl ace t he ori gi nal HVAC cont rol uni t (see page
21-65).B
NO-Repai r an open i n t he wi r e(s) bet ween t he HVAC
cont rol uni t and t he ai r mi x cont rol mot or .H
21-24
DTC i ndi cat or 2; A Shor t In the Ai r Mi x Control
Motor Ci rcui t
1. Turn t he ignition swi t ch to LOCK (0), and then to
ON (II).
3. Chec k f or DTCs.
NO-l nt er mi t t ent f ai l ur e. Check for l oose wi r es or poor
c onnec t i ons on t he ai r mi x cont rol mot or c i r c ui t . !
5. Test t he ai r mi x cont rol mot or (see page 21-59).
Is t he air mix cont rol mot or OK?
21- 60) J i
6. Di sconnect t he ai r mi x cont rol mot or 7P connect or .
8. Chec k f or cont i nui t y bet ween body gr ound and HVAC
cont rol uni t 24P connect or t er mi nal s No. 13 and No.
17 i ndi vi dual l y.
l
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
BL K GRY
Y E S - R e p a i r a shor t to body gr ound i n t he wi r e(s)
bet ween t he HVAC cont rol unit and t he ai r mi x cont rol
mo t o r . !
NO- Go to st ep 9.
9. Chec k f or cont i nui t y bet ween HVAC cont rol uni t 24P
BL K
n n
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
GRY
Y E S - R e p a i r a shor t i n t he wi r es.
NO- Go to st ep 10.
10. Tur n t he i gni ti on swi t c h to ON (l l ), and check t he s ame
t er mi nal s f or vol t age bet ween each t er mi nal and
body gr ound.
i r
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 1 2
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
BL K GRY
Is t here any volt age?
Y E S - R e p a i r a shor t to power in t he wi r e(s) bet ween
t he HVAC cont rol uni t and t he ai r mi x cont rol mot or.
Thi s shor t may al so damage HVAC cont rol uni t.
Repai r a shor t to power bef ore repl aci ng t he HVAC
cont rol uni t .H
NO-Subst i t ut e a known-good HVAC cont rol uni t and
r echeck. If t he sympt om/i ndi cat i on goes away, and
t he ai r mi x cont rol mot or r uns, r epl ace t he ori gi nal
HVAC cont rol uni t (see page 21-65).H
21-25
DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd}
DTC Indicat or 3: A Probl em in the Ai r Mix
Cont rol Li nkage, Door, or Motor Ci rcui t
ON (II).
NO-l nt ermi t t ent f ai l ure. Check f or l oose wi r es or poor
c onnec t i ons on t he ai r mi x cont rol mot or c i r c ui t . !
5. Test t he ai r mix cont rol motor (see page 21-59).
Is t he air mix cont rol mot or OK?
21-60), or repai r t he ai r mi x cont rol l i nkage or door . H
6. Di sc onnec t t he ai r mi x cont rol mot or 7P connect or .
7. Di sc onnec t t he HVAC cont rol uni t 24P connect or .
8. Chec k f or cont i nui t y bet ween t he f ol l owi ng t er mi nal s
of t he HVAC cont rol uni t 24P connect or and t he ai r
mi x cont rol mot or 7P connect or .
24P: 7P:
No. 5 No. 1
No. 6 No. 2 ..
1
2 3
P NK L T BL U
8
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
10 11 12
<8>
PNK LT BL U
c.
1 2 3
/
5
/
7
AIR MIX CONTROL MOTOR 7P CONNECTOR
NO-Repai r an open in t he wi r e(s) bet ween t he HVAC
cont rol uni t and t he ai r mi x cont rol mot or .H
21-26
9. Check f or cont i nui t y bet ween body gr ound and HVAC
cont rol uni t 24P connect or t er mi nal s No. 5 and No. 6
i ndi vi dual l y.
PNK L T BL U
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
YES - Repai r a shor t to body gr ound i n t he wi r e(s)
bet ween t he HVAC cont rol uni t and t he ai r mi x cont rol
mo t o r . !
NO-Subst i t ut e a known-good HVAC cont rol uni t , and
21-65).B
DTC i ndi cat or 4: An Open in the Mode Control
Motor Ci rcui t
' 08-10 model s wi t h M/T and ' 08-09 model s
2-door wi t h A / T
ON (II).
3. Check f or DTCs .
connect i ons on t he mode cont rol mot or c i r c ui t . !
5. Test t he mode cont rol mot or (see page 21-61).
is t he mode cont rol mot or OK?
NO-Repl ac e t he mode cont rol mot or (see page
21-62).B
6. Di sconnect t he mode cont rol mot or 7P connect or .
7 Di sconnect t he HVAC cont rol uni t 24P connect or .
(cont' d)
21-27
8. Check for cont i nui t y bet ween t he f ol l owi ng t er mi nal s
of t he HVAC cont rol uni t 24P connect or and t he mode
cont rol mot or IP connect or .
24P: 7P:
No. 13 No. 5
No. 15 No. 7
No. 16 No. 3
l
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
BLK
R E D | c
p B L K
1 2 3 5
V
7
V
WHT
MODE CONTROL MOTOR 7P CONNECTOR
YES - Ch ec k f or l oose wi r es or poor c onnec t i ons at t he
HVAC cont rol uni t 24P c onnec t or , and at t he mode
cont rol mot or 7P connect or . If t he c onnec t i ons ar e
good, subst i t ut e a known-good HVAC cont rol uni t and
21-65).B
cont rol uni t and t he mode cont r ol j not or .i l
DTC i ndi cat or 5: A Short in the Mode Control
Motor Ci rcui t
2-door wi t h A / T
1. Tur n t he i gni ti on swi t ch to L OCK (0), and t hen to
ON (II).
NO-l nt er mi t t ent f ai l ure. Chec k f or l oose wi r es or poor
c onnec t i ons on t he mode cont rol mot or c i r c ui t .H
Is t he mode cont rol mot or OK?
21-62J.B
6. Di sc onnec t t he mode cont rol mot or 7P connect or .
[
3 4 5 6 7
H

9 10 11 12
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
BLK LTGRY
YES - Repai r a shor t to body gr ound in t he wi r e(s)
bet ween t he HVAC cont rol unit and t he mode cont rol
mo t o r .
NO- Go to st ep 9.
21-28
9. Check f or cont i nui t y bet ween HVAC cont rol uni t 24P
BLK
l
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
13 14 15 16 17 16 19 20 21 22 23 24
LTGRY
I s t here continuity?
YES - Repai r a shor t in t he w i r e s .
NO- Go to st ep 10.
10. Tur n t he i gni ti on swi t ch to ON (II), and check t he s ame
t er mi nal s f or vol t age bet ween eac h t er mi nal and
body gr ound.
JL
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
|13|14115 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
BLK LT GRY
YES - Repai r a shor t to power in t he wi r e(s) bet ween
t he HVAC cont rol uni t and t he mode cont rol mot or.
Thi s shor t may al so damage t he HVAC cont rol uni t.
Repai r a shor t to power bef ore r epl aci ng t he HVAC
cont rol uni t .H
r echeck. If t he sympt om/i ndi cat i on goes away and t he
mode cont rol mot or r uns, r epl ace t he ori gi nal HVAC
cont rol uni t (see page 21-65).B
DTC i ndi cat or 6: A Probl em in the Mode
Control Li nkage, Door, or Motor Ci rcui t
2-door wi t h A / T
1. T u r n t he i gni t i on swi t ch to L OCK (0), and t hen to
ON (II).
3. Chec k for DTCs .
connect i ons on t he mode cont r ol mot or c i r c ui t
NO-Repl ac e an the mode cont rol mot or (see page
21-62), or r epai r t he mode cont rol li nkage or d o o r . B
(cont' d)
21-29
8. Check forc o n t i n u i t y bet ween t he f ol l owi ng t er mi nal s
cont rol mo t o r 7P connect or .
24P: 7P:
No. 7 No. 1
No. 8 No. 2
GRN
1 6
WH T
8
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
9 10 11 12
GRY Y EL
c
1 2 3
A
5
A
cont rol uni t and t he mode cont rol mot or . B
i ndi vi dual l y.
GRN
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
WHT
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
bet ween t he HVAC cont rol uni t and t he mode cont rol
mo t o r . B
21-65).B
21-30
0
A
u
DTC i ndi cat or 7; An Open in the Reci rcul at i on
Control Motor Ci rcui t
'08-1 model s wi t h M/T and ' 08-09 model s
2-door wi t h A/ T
1. Tur n t he i gni ti on swi t ch to LOCK (0), and t hen to
ON (II).
3. Check f or DTCs.
Is DTC 7 indicated?
NO-l nt er mi t t ent f ai l ure. Check for l oose wi r es or poor
connect i ons on the reci rcul at i on cont rol mot or
c i r c ui t . !
5. Test t he reci rcul at i on cont rol mot or (see page 21-63).
Is the recirculation control motor OK ?
NO-Repl ac e t he reci rcul at i on cont rol mot or (see page
21-64J.B
6. Di sconnect t he reci rcul at i on cont rol mot or 7P
connect or .
of t he HVAC cont rol uni t 24P connect or and t he
r eci r cul at i on cont rol mot or 7P connect or .
24P: 7P:
No. 13 No. 7
No. 15 No. 5
No. 20 No. 3
I 1
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
BLK
RECI RCUL ATI ON CONTROL MOTOR 7P CONNECTOR
YES - Ch ec k f or l oose wi r es or poor connect i ons at t he
HVAC cont rol uni t 24P connect or , and at t he
reci rcul at i on cont rol mot or 7P connect or . If t he
c onnec t i ons are good, subst i t ut e a known-good
HVAC cont rol uni t and r echeck. If t he
sympt om/i ndi cat i on goes away, r epl ace t he ori gi nal
cont rol uni t and t he r eci r cul at i on cont rol mot or . B
21-31
DTC i ndi cat or 8: A Shor t in t he Reci rcul at i on
Cont rol Motor Ci rcui t
2-door wi t h A / T
1. Tur n t he i gni ti on swi t c h t o L OCK (0), and t hen to
ON (II).
2. Do t he sel f -di agnost i c f unct i on wi t h t he HVAC cont r ol
NO-l nt er mi t t ent f ai l ur e. Check f or l oose wi r es or poor
w " . i . ow H una \ J H i i i c i c ui i o ul at i o n cont rol mot or
c i r c ui t .H
5. Test t he r eci r cul at i on cont rol mot or (see page 21-63).
Is t he recirculat ion cont rol mot or OK?
NO-Repl ac e t he r eci r cul at i on cont rol mot or (see page
21-64).B
6. Di sc onnec t t he r eci r cul at i on cont rol mot or 7P
connect or .
cont r ol uni t 24P c onnec t or t er mi nal s No. 13 and No.
I t n
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
BLK PNK
bet ween t he HVAC cont rol uni t and t he r eci r cul at i on
cont rol mo t o r .
NO- Go to st ep 9.
BLK
I f
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
PNK
YES - Repai r a shor t i n t he wi r es.[ Z
NO- Go to st ep 10.
21 "32
10. Tur n t he i gni ti on swi t ch to ON (II), and check t he same
t er mi nal s for vol t age bet ween eac h t er mi nal and
body gr ound.
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
BLK PNK
Is there any voltage?
t he HVAC cont rol uni t and t he reci rcul at i on cont rol
mot or. Thi s shor t may al so damage t he HVAC cont rol
uni t, a Repai r shor t to power bef ore r epl aci ng t he
HVAC cont rol uni t .H
r echeck. If t he sympt om/i ndi cat i on goes away and t he
reci rcul at i on cont rol mot or r uns, r epl ace t he ori gi nal
HVAC cont rol uni t (see page 21~65).H
DTC i ndi cat or 9: A Probl em in t he
Reci rcul at i on Control Li nkage, Door, or Motor
Ci rcui t
' 08-10 modei s wi t h M/T and ' 08-09 model s
2-door wi t h A / T
ON (II).
Is DTC 9 indicated?
c onnec t i ons on t he reci rcul at i on cont rol mot or
c i r c ui t . !
NO-Repl ac e the reci rcul at i on cont rol mot or (see page
21-64), or repai r t he reci rcul at i on cont rol li nkage or
d o o r . i l
connect or .
(cont' d)
21-33
24P: 7P:
No. 9 No. 2
No. 10 No. 1
ORN
1 2 3
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
PUR
RED PUR
1 2 3
/
5
/
7
RECIRCULATION CONTROL MOTOR 7P CONNECTOR
YE S ~Go to st ep 9.
cont rol uni t and t he reci rcul at i on cont rol mot or . B
i ndi vi dual l y.
ORN
i
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
PUR
bet ween t he HVAC cont rol uni t and t he reci rcul at i on
cont rol mot or . B
r epl ace t he ori gi nal HVAC cont rol uni t {see page
21-65).B
21-34
DTC i ndi cat or 10: An Open or Shor t In t he
Mode Control Motor Ci rcui t
'OS-OS model s 4-door wi t h A/ T and 10 model
wi t h A/ T
1. Tur n t he i gni t i on swi t ch to LOCK (0), and t hen to
ON (II).
3. Check for DTCs .
connect i ons on t he mode cont rol mot or ci rcui t .
Is the mode control motor OK ?
21-62).B
6. Di sconnect t he mode cont rol mot or IP connect or .
8. Chec k for cont i nui t y bet ween t he f ol l owi ng t er mi nal s
cont rol mot or 7P connect or .
24P: 7P:
No. 1 No. 3
No. 2 No. 4
No. 3 No. 5
No. 4 No. 6
No. 15 No. 7
BL U PUR
GRN ORN
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
RED
WH T
L TGRN
L T BL U GRY
WHT
(cont' d)
21-35
9. Check f or cont i nui t y bet ween body gr ound and HVAC
cont rol uni t 24P c onnec t or t er mi nal s No. 1, 2, 3, and 4
i ndi vi dual l y.
BL U PUR
GRN
13
ORN
14 15 1F 17 18 19 20
10
21
11
22
12
23 24
mot or .H
NO- Go to st ep 10.
10. Check f or cont i nui t y bet ween t he HVAC cont rol uni t
24P connect or t er mi nal s as f ol l ows.
Fr om t er mi nal To t er mi nal s
1 2 , 3 , 4
2 3,4
3 *
Is there continuity between any of the terminals?
YES - Repai r a shor t in t he w i r e s .
NO- Go to st ep 11.
t er mi nal s f or vol t age bet ween each t er mi nal and
body gr ound.
BL U PUR
GRN ORN
8
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
9 10 11 12
YES - Repai r a shor t to power i n t he wi r e(s) bet ween
t he HVAC cont rol uni t and t he mode cont rol mot or.
Thi s shor t may al so damage t he HVAC cont rol uni t.
Repai r a shor t to power bef ore r epl aci ng t he HVAC
cont rol uni t .H
NO-Chec k for l oose wi r es or poor connect i ons at t he
HVAC cont rol uni t 24P connect or , and at t he mode
cont rol mot or 7P connect or . If t he connect i ons ar e
good, subst i t ut e a known-good HVAC cont rol uni t ,
and r echeck. If t he sympt om/i ndi cat i on goes away,
21-65).B
21-36
DTC i ndi cat or 11: A Probl em in t he Mode
Control Li nkage, Door s, or Motor Ci rcui t
'08-09 model s 4-door wi t h A/ T and "10 model
wi t h A/ T
ON (tl).
3. Check f or DTCs.
connect i ons on t he mode cont rol mot or c i r c ui t . !
Is the mode control motor OK ?
21-62), or repai r t he mode cont rol l i nkage or door s . H
cont rol mot or 7P connect or .
24P: 7P:
No. 7 No. 1
No. 8 No. 2
GRN
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
WH T
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
GRY Y EL
1 2 3
4
5 6 7
cont rol uni t and t he mode cont rol mot or .H
(cont' d)
21-37
i ndi vi dual l y.
GRN
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
WH T
I
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
mot or . B
21-65).B
DTC i ndi cat or 12: A Probl em in t he Bl ower
Motor Ci rcui t
1. Tur n t he i gni t i on swi t ch to L OCK (0), and t hen t o
ON (II).
3. Check for DTCs.
connect i ons on t he bl ower mot or c i r c ui t .B
5 Check t he No, 8 (40 A) f use i n t he under -hood
f use/r el ay box, and t he No. 16 (7.5 A) f use i n t he
Are t he fuses OK?
NO-Repl ac e t he f use(s), and r echeck. If t he f use(s)
bl ow agai n, c hec k f or a shor t i n t he No. 8 (40 A) f use
and t he No. 16 (7.5 A) f use c i r c ui t s . B
6. Di sconnect t he bl ower mot or 2P connect or .
8. Measur e t he vol t age bet ween bl ower mot or 2P
BLOWER MOTOR 2P CONNECTOR
WH T
NO- Go to st ep 28.
10. Reconnect t he bl ower mot or 2P connect or .
21 -38
11. Connect bl ower mot or 2P connect or t er mi nal No. 2 to
body ground wi th a j umper wi r e.
BL OWER MOTOR 2P CONNECTOR
G
GRN
J UMPER WI RE
Does the blower motor run?
NO-Repl ac e t he bl ower mot or (see page 21- 67) .
M
15. Di sconnect t he power t r ansi st or 4P connect or .
16. Chec k for cont i nui t y bet ween power t r ansi st or 4P
POWER TRANS I S TOR 4P CONNECTOR
NO-Chec k for an open in t he wi r e bet ween t he power
t r ansi st or and body gr ound. If t he wi r e i s OK, check for
poor gr ound at G302 (see page 22- 30) .
17. Connec t power t r ansi st or 4P connect or t er mi nal s No.
2 and No. 4 wi t h a j umper wi r e.
f
1
3 4
BLK
J UMPER WI RE
GRN
Does the blower motor run at high speed?
NO-Repai r an open in t he GRN wi r e bet ween t he
power t r ansi st or and t he bl ower mot or . B
22. Chec k for cont i nui t y bet ween body gr ound and HVAC
- f
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
YE L
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
BL U
YES - Repai r a shor t to body ground in t he wi r e(s)
bet ween t he HVAC cont rol uni t and t he power
t r ansi st or .i l
NO- Go to st ep 23.
(cont' d)
21-39
DTC Troubl eshoot i ng (cont 'd)
of t he HVAC cont rol uni t 24P connect or and t he power
t r ansi st or 4P connect or .
24P: 4P:
No. 18 No. 1
No. 19 No. 3
1 \
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
YE L
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
BL U
PUR
BL U
jr
1
2
3 4
POWER TRANSISTOR 4P CONNECTOR
cont rol uni t and t he power t r ansi st or .! !
25. Measur e t he vol t age bet ween body gr ound and HVAC
] J
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
YE L BL U
YES - Repai r a shor t to power in t he wi r es.I
NO- Go to st ep 26.
26. Rec onnec t t he HVAC cont rol uni t 24P connect or .
27. Test t he power t r ansi st or (see page 21-58).
Is the power transistor OK ?
YE S - Ch ec k f or l oose wi r es or poor connect i ons at t he
HVAC cont rol uni t 24P connect or , and at t he power
t r ansi st or 4P connect or . If t he connect i ons ar e good,
subst i t ut e a known-good HVAC cont rol uni t, and
21-65).U
NO-Repl ac e t he power t r ansi st or .i l
29. Di sc onnec t t he j umper wi r e.
30. Remove t he bl ower mot or rel ay f rom t he under -hood
Is the relay OK ?
NO-Repl ac e t he bl ower mot or r el ay .
31. Measur e t he vol t age bet ween bl ower mot or rel ay 4P
BL OWER MOTOR REL AY 4P S OCK E T
1 1
2
4 3
22- 85) . !
21-40
BLOWER MOTOR RELAY 4P SOCK ET
1
2
4 3
L TGRN
and t he bl ower mot or r el ay .
35. Chec k f or cont i nui t y bet ween bl ower mot or r el ay 4P
1
2
4 3
BL K
YES - Repai r an open i n t he WHT wi r e bet ween t he
bl ower mot or rel ay and t he bl ower mo t o r . !
NO-Chec k for an open i n t he wi r e bet ween t he bl ower
mot or rel ay and body gr ound. If t he wi r e i s OK, c hec k
f or poor gr ound at G301 (see page 22- 28) . !
DTC indicator 13: HVAC Cont rol Unit Internal
Error
NOTE: Chec k t he battery condi t i on (see page 22-90) and
t he c har gi ng syst em (see page 4-25).
1. Tur n t he i gni ti on swi t c h to L OCK (0), and t hen to
ON (II).
YE S - Th e HVAC cont rol uni t i s f aul t y, r epl ace t he
HVAC cont rol uni t (see page 21- 65) . !
NO-l nt er mi t t ent f ai l ur e, t he HVAC cont rol uni t i s OK at
t hi s t i me. Chec k f or poor connect i ons at t he HVAC
control unit and at G401 (see page 2 2 4 0 ) . !
21-41
DTC i ndi cat or 14: An Open in t he Evapor at or .
Temper at ur e Sensor Ci rcui t
ON (II).
c onnec t i ons on t he evapor at or t emper at ur e sensor
c i r c u i t !
5. Remove t he evapor at or t emper at ur e sensor (see
page 21-67) and t est it (see page 21-58).
Is the evaporator temperature sensor OK ?
NO-Repl ac e t he evapor at or t emper at ur e sensor (see
page 21- 67) . !
c onnec t or t er mi nal No. 14 and evapor at or
t emper at ur e sensor 2P connect or t er mi nal No. 2.
1
1 C
M
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
BRN
BRN
EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE S E NS OR 2P CONNECTOR
NO-Repai r an open in t he wi r e bet ween t he HVAC
cont rol uni t and t he evapor at or t emper at ur e
s e n s o r . !
connect or t er mi nal No. 15 and evapor at or
1
I \
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
RED
WHT
TTTTT
L r - ^ - r J
EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE S E NS OR 2P CONNECTOR
evapor at or t emper at ur e sensor 2P connect or . If t he
c onnec t i ons ar e good, subst i t ut e a known-good
HVAC cont rol uni t and r echeck. If t he
sympt om/i ndi cat i on goes a w a y , r epl ace t he ori gi nal
HVAC cont rol uni t (see page 21- 65) . !
s e n s o r . !
21-42
DTC i ndi cat or 15: A Shor t in t he Evaporat or
Temper at ur e Sensor Ci rcui t
1. Tur n t he i gni ti on swi t ch to L OCK (OL and t hen to
ON (II).
3. Chec k for DTCs.
NO-l nt er mi t t ent f ai l ur e. Chec k f or damaged wi r es or
c onnec t i ons i n t he evapor at or t emper at ur e sensor
c i r c ui t . !
page 21-67) and t est it (see page 21-58).
Is t he evaporat or t emperat ure sensor OK?
NO-Repl ac e t he evapor at or t emper at ur e sensor (see
page21-67).B
cont rol uni t 24P connect or t er mi nal No. 14.
n
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
BRN
bet ween t he HVAC cont rol uni t and t he evapor at or
t emper at ur e s ens or .H
NO- Go t o st ep 8.
c onnec t or t er mi nal No. 14and No. 15.
BRN
n r n
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
RED
YES - Repai r a shor t in t he wi r es bet ween t he HVAC
s ens or .H
21-65).B
21-43
Recirculation Control Motor Circuit Troubleshooting
9
08-09 model s 4-door wi t h A / T and ' 10 model
wi t h AT
under -dash f use/ r el ay box.
Is t he fuse OK ?
NO-Repl ac e t he f use, and r echeck. If t he f use bl ows
agai n, c hec k f or a shor t i n t he No. 16 (7, 5 A) f use
c i r c ui t . !
2. Di sconnect t he r eci r cul at i on cont rol mot or 7P
connect or .
4. Measur e t he vol t age bet ween r eci r cul at i on cont rol
mot or 7P connect or t er mi nal No. 1 and body gr ound.
RECI RCUL ATI ON CONTROL MOTOR I P CONNECTOR
5 / 7
RED
and t he r eci r cul at i on cont rol mot or . B
6. Test t he r eci r cul at i on cont rol mot or (see page 21-63).
NO-Repl ac e t he r eci r cul at i on cont rol mot or (see page
21-64), or repai r t he r eci r cul at i on cont rol l i nkage or
door . B
7. Di sconnect t he HVAC cont r ol uni t 24P connect or .
8. Chec k for cont i nui t y bet ween body gr ound and HVAC
cont rol uni t 24P connect or t er mi nal No. 9 and No. 10
i ndi vi dual l y.
13 14 15 16 17
ORN
5 6 7 8
18 19 20
PUR
10
21
11
22
12
23 24
bet ween t he HVAC cont rol uni t and t he reci rcul at i on
cont rol mot or .B
NO- Go to st ep 9.
9. Tur n t he i gni ti on swi t c h to ON (II), and check t he s ame
t er mi nal s f or vol t age bet ween eac h t er mi nal and
body gr ound.
ORN
6 8
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
PUR
9 10 11 12
t he HVAC cont rol uni t and t he reci rcul at i on cont rol
mot or. Thi s shor t may al so damage t he HVAC cont rol
uni t. Repai r a shor t to power bef ore r epl aci ng t he
HVAC cont rol uni t .B
NO- Go to st ep 10.
21-44
reci rcul at i on cont rol mot or 7P connect or .
24P: 7P:
No. 9 No. 7
No. 10 No. 5
n
OR!
T r 1
i PUR
n
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
RED PUR
c
J
PUR
1 / / 5 / 7
reci rcul at i on cont rol mot or 7P connect or . If t he
connect i ons ar e good, subst i t ut e a known-good
HVAC cont rol uni t, and r echeck. If t he
cont rol uni t and t he reci rcul at i on cont rol mo t o r . !
HVAC Cont rol Power &m 13;^ ^
Ci rcui t Troubl eshoot i ng
under -dash f use/ rel ay box.
Is t he fuse OK?
agai n, check f or a shor t i n t he No. 16 (7.5 A) f use
c i r c ui t .H
4. Measur e t he vol t age bet ween HVAC cont rol uni t 24P
p
l
_ _
r
L TGRN
, n
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
and t he HVAC cont rol uni t .H
(cont' d)
21-45
HVAC Cont rol Power and Gr ound
Ci rcui t Troubl eshoot i ng (cont' d)
6. Check for cont i nui t y bet ween HVAC cont r ol uni t 24P
1 [
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
BL K
HVAC cont rol uni t 24P connect or . If t he c onnec t i ons
ar e good, subst i t ut e a known-good HVAC cont rol uni t
(see page 21-65), and r ec hec k . B
NO-Chec k f or an open in t he wi r e bet ween t he HVAC
cont rol uni t and body gr ound. If t he wi r e i s OK, check
f or poor gr ound at G401 (see page 22- 40) .
A / C Condenser Fan Ci rcui t
Troubl eshoot i ng
NOTE:
Do not use t hi s t r oubl eshoot i ng pr ocedur e if t he
radi at or f an and/or t he A/ C c ompr essor i s i noper at i ve.
Ref er to t he sympt om t r oubl eshoot i ng i ndex.
Bef or e doi ng sympt om t r oubl eshoot i ng, check f or
power t r ai n DTCs (see page 11-3).
1. Chec k t he No. 5 (20 A) and No. 21 (7.5 A) f uses i n t he
Are the fuses OK ?
bl ow agai n, c hec k f or a shor t i n t he No. 5 (20 A) f use
and t he No. 21 (7.5 A) f use c i r c ui t s . i l
2. Test t he A/ C c ondenser f an rel ay (see page 22-94).
is the relay OK ?
NO-Repl ac e t he rel ay ci rcui t b o ar d .
3. Di sc onnec t t he A/ C c ondenser f an mot or 2P
connect or .
4. Di sc onnec t under -hood f use/r el ay box connect or C
(14P).
box c onnec t or C (5P) t er mi nal No. 3 and A/ C
c ondenser f an mot or 2P connect or t er mi nal No. 2.
UNDER-HOOD FUS E / RE L A Y BOX
CONNECTOR C (5P)
1
n
2
3 4 5
i B L U/ YE L
B L U/ YE L
3
A / C CONDENS ER FAN MOTOR 2P CONNECTOR
NO-Repai r an open in t he wi r e bet ween t he
under -hood f use/r el ay box and t he A/ C c ondenser f an
mo t o r . !
21-46
Radiator and A/C Condenser
Common Circuit TroubSeshootii
6. Chec k f or cont i nui t y bet ween A/ C c ondenser f an
YES - Repl ac e t he A/ C c ondenser f an mot or (see page
10-13).B
NO-Chec k f or an open in t he wi r e bet ween t he A/ C
c ondenser f an mot or and body gr ound. If t he wi r e i s
OK , c hec k f or poor gr ound at G302 (see page 22-30).B
NOTE:
Do not use t hi s t r oubl eshoot i ng pr ocedur e if onl y one
f an i s i noper at i ve, or if t he A/ C c ompr essor i s
i noper at i ve. Ref er to t he sympt om t r oubl eshoot i ng
i ndex.
Bef ore doi ng sympt om t r oubl eshoot i ng, check for
power t r ai n DTCs (see page 11-3).
1. Check t he No. 3 - 6 (MAIN FAN MTR) (30 A), No. 5
(20 A), and No. 21 (7.5 A) f uses i n t he under -hood
f use/r el ay box, and t he No. 16 (7.5 A) f use in t he
Are the fuses OK ?
NO-Repl ac e t he f use(s), and recheck.B
3. Measur e t he vol t age bet ween t he under -hood
f use/r el ay box connect or B (14P) t er mi nal No. 7 and
body gr ound.
UNDER-HOOD F USE/RELAY BOX
CONNECTOR B (14P)
n
1
2 3
F= l
4 5
n
6
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
T
Y EL
22-85).B
NOTE: Thi s st ep must be done to protect t he engi ne
cont rol modul e/power t r ai n cont rol modul e
(ECM/PCM) f rom damage.
(cont' d)
21-47
Radi at or and A / C Condenser Fan
Common Ci rcui t Troubl eshoot i ng (cont' d)
7. Connec t t he ECM/ PCM connect or A (49P) t er mi nal
Y EL
i f i l Z Z Z
fi . ,
A
I . PL
n ^
J
3
W\A 6 | 7 [ /
9 10
11
/ /
/\\*>
16
/ l i e
19 20 21
22 23 24 25
><
26 27 28
i
29 30
/
3 2 | / 34 3536
/
Y
/
i
41 42
1431441/1461
47 48
\A
J UMPER WIRE
Do t he A/C condenser and t he radiat or fans run?
YE S - Ch ec k for l oose wi r es or poor connect i ons at
ECM/ PCM connect or A (49P) t er mi nal No. 6. If t he
ECM/ PCM, and r echeck. If t he sympt om/i ndi cat i on
goes away, r epl ace t he ori gi nal ECM/ PCM (see page
11- 204J . H
under -hood f use/r el ay box and t he ECM/PCM.C5
Radi at or and A/C Condenser Fan
Low Speed Circuit Troubl eshoot i ng
NOTE:
Do not use t hi s t r oubl eshoot i ng pr ocedur e if t he A/ C
c ompr essor i s i noper at i ve. Ref er to t he sympt om
t r oubl eshoot i ng i ndex.
Bef ore perf ormi ng sympt om t r oubl eshoot i ng, check
f or powert rai n DTCs (see page 11-3).
1. Chec k t he No. 3 - 6 (SUB FAN MTR) (30 A) f use in t he
under -hood f use/r el ay, and t he No. 16 (7.5 A) f use in
Are you fuses OK?
bl ow agai n, check f or a shor t in t he No. 36 (30 A)
f use and t he No. 16 (7.5 A) f use c i r c ui t s .
4. Tur n on t he A/ C.
5. Check the FAN LOW CTRL in t he PGM-FI Dat a Li st wi t h
t he HDS.
Is t he FAN LOW CTRL on?
NO-Subst i t ut e a known-good ECM/ PCM (see page
11-3), and ret est . If the sympt om/i ndi cat i on goes away
wi t h a known-good ECM/ PCM, r epl ace t he ori gi nal
7. Remove t he rel ay ci rcui t boar d (see page 22-85) f r om
t he under -hood f use/r el ay box, and t est t he A/ C
c ondenser f an rel ay (see page 22-93).
Is t he relay OK?
9. Rei nst al l t he rel ay ci rcui t boar d.
engi ne cont rol modul e/power t r ai n cont rol modul e
(ECM/PCM) f r om damage.
21-48
13. Measur e t he vol t age bet ween ECM/ PCM c onnec t or A
GRN
}i r~
9 |10
11
/ /
/ | 1 5 16 17 18 19 20 21
22 23 24 25
X
26 27 28
29 30
/
3 21/ 34 3536
/ / /
| / ] 4 1
42143144 | / | 4 6
47
r~
4 8 /
' YE S - Go to st ep 14.
NO-Repai r an open i n t he wi r es bet ween t he
under -hood f use/r el ay box and t he ECM/ PCM, or
bet ween t he No. 16 (7.5 A) f use i n dr i ver ' s under -dash
f use/r el ay box and t he under -hood f use/r el ay box. If
wi r es ar e OK, r epl ace t he under -hood f use/r el ay box
(see page 22-75).H
15. Connec t ECM/ PCM connect or A (49P) t er mi nal No. 5
to body gr ound wi t h a j umper wi r e.
GRN
n ^
I
u /
3
4 I 5 I
3 7 / 9 10
11
/
/
/ | 1 5 16 17)18 19 20 21
22 23 24 25
><
26 27 28
i
29 30
/
3 2 / 34 35 36
/ / /
\A
41 42| 43| 44| / | 46| 47 48
l / l
J UMPER WIRE
Do t he A/C condenser and radiat or fans run on low?
YES - Ch ec k for l oose wi r es or poor c onnec t i ons at
ECM/ PCM connect or A (49P) t er mi nal No. 5. If the
connect i ons are good, subst i t ut e a known-good
ECM/ PCM, and r echeck. If t he sympt om/i ndi cat i on
goes away, r epl ace t he ori gi nal ECM/ PCM (see page
11-204).B
NO- Go to st ep 17.
20. Di sconnect t he radi at or f an mot or 2P connect or .
21. Tur n t he i gni ti on swi t c h to ON (II), t hen set t he A/ C
button and f an cont r ol button ON.
22. Measur e t he vol t age bet ween radi at or f an motor 2P
is t here bat t ery volt age?
under -hood f use/r el ay box and t he radi at or f an mot or.
If t he wi r e i s OK, r epl ace t he under -hood f use/r el ay
box (see page 22- 75) .
23. Set t he A/ C button and f an cont rol button OFF, t hen
t urn t he i gni ti on swi t c h to L OCK (0).
24. Reconnect t he radi at or f an mot or 2P connect or .
(cont' d)
21-49
Radi at or and A / C Condenser Fan Low Speed Ci rcui t Troubl eshoot i ng
(cont' d)
25. Connec t radi at or f an mot or 2P connect or t er mi nal No.
1 to body gr ound wi t h a j umper wi r e.
RADIATOK FAN MOTOR 2P CONNECTOR
03
PNK
J UMPER WIRE
,26. Tur n t he i gni ti on swi t c h to ON (II), t hen set t he A/ C
button and f an cont rol button ON,
Does the radiator fan run?
NO-Repl ac e t he radi at or f an mot or (see page
10-13).B
27. Set t he A/ C button and f an cont rol button OFF, t hen
t urn t he i gni ti on swi t ch to L OCK (0).
29. Remove t he rel ay ci rcui t board (see page 22-85) f r om
t he under -hood f use/r el ay box, and t est t he f an
cont rol rel ay (see page 22-93).
is the relay OK ?
30. Di sc onnec t t he under -hood f use/r el ay box connect or
C (5P).
31. Di sc onnec t t he radi at or f an mot or 2P connect or .
32. Check f or cont i nui t y bet ween under -hood f use/r el ay
box connect or C (5P) t er mi nal No. 3 and radi at or f an
mot or 2P connect or t er mi nal No. 1.
UNDER-HOOD F USE/RELAY BOX CONNECTOR C (5P)
1
n
2
3 4 5
PNK
PNK
E E
under -hood f use/r el ay box and t he radi at or f an
mot or .H
33. Di sconnect under -hood f use/r el ay box connect or B
(14P).
34. Di sconnect t he A/ C c ondenser f an mot or 2P
connect or .
21-50
n

35. Check f or cont i nui t y bet ween under -hood f use/r el ay
box connect or B (14P) t ermi nal No. 2 and A/ C
c ondenser f an mot or 2P connect or t er mi nal No. 2.
UNDER-HOOD F USE/RELAY BOX
CONNECTOR B (14P)
BLU/Y EL
1 2 3
F=1
4 5 6
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
BLU/Y EL
under -hood f use/r el ay box and t he A/ C c ondenser f an
mot or .B
36. Check f or cont i nui t y bet ween A/ C c ondenser f an
YES - Repl ac e t he A/ C c ondenser f an mot or (see page
10-13).B
NO-Chec k f or an open in t he wi r e bet ween t he A/ C
c ondenser f an mot or and body gr ound. If t he wi r e i s
OK, check for poor gr ound at G302 (see page 22-30).B
A / C Condenser Fan Hi gh Si
NOTE:
Do not use t hi s t r oubl eshoot i ng pr ocedur e if t he A/ C
c ompr essor i s i noper at i ve. Ref er to t he sympt om
t r oubl eshoot i ng i ndex.
Bef or e doi ng any sympt om t r oubl eshoot i ng, check f or
powert rai n DTCs (see page 11-3).
1. Chec k t he No. 3 - 6 (SUB FAN MTR) (30 A) and No. 21
(7.5 A) i n t he under -hood f use/r el ay box.
Are t he fuses OK?
NO-Repl ac e t he f use(s), and r echeck. If f use(s) bl ow
agai n, check f or a shor t i n t he No. 36 (SUB FAN_
MTR) (30 A) f use and No. 21 (7.5 A) f use ci rcui t s
NOTE: Thi s st ep must be done t o protect t he
engi ne cont rol modul e/power t r ai n cont rol modul e
5. Measur e t he vol t age bet ween ECM/ PCM connect or A
(49P) t er mi nal No. 6 and body gr ound.
Y EL
3 I 4 I 5 N 9 J101
1
11
/ /
/ | 1 5
16 17 18 19 20 21
i
i 1
22 23 24 25
X
26 27 28
i
i 1
29 30
/
3 2 / 34 3536
/ / /
i
i
1/141 421431441/| 46
47 4 8 / |
under -hood f use/r el ay box and t he ECM/ PCM. If t he
wi r e i s OK, r epl ace t he under -hood f use/r el ay box (see
page 22-75).H
(cont' d)
21-51
A/C Condenser Fan High Speed
Circuit Troubleshooting (cont'd)
7. Connec t ECM/ PCM connect or A (49P) t er mi nal s No. 5
and No. 6 to body gr ound wi t h a j umper wi r e.
J UMPER WIRE
GRN YE L
f
. = u =
Hi
J i | /
3 I 4 k ; | ( 9 | 10|
i
11
/ /
/ I
1 5 16 17 18 19 20 21
i
i
i
i
22 23 24 25
><
26 27 28
i
i
i
i
29 30
/
321/ 34 3536
/
A
/
i
i
i
k i 4 i
4214314446147
J UMPER WI RE
Does the A/C condenser fan and radiator fan run on
high?
YE S - Ch ec k for l oose wi r es or poor c onnec t i ons at
ECM/ PCM connect or A (49P) t er mi nal s No. 5 and No.
6. If t he connect i ons ar e good, subst i t ut e a
known-good ECM/ PCM, and r echeck. If t he
22-75).B
A/C Compr essor Clutch Circuit
Troubl eshoot i ng
NOTE:
It i s nor mal for t he A/ C c ompr essor to t urn off under
cert ai n condi t i ons, suc h as l ow i dl e, hi gh engi ne
cool ant t emper at ur e, har d accel er at i on, or hi gh/l ow
ref ri gerant pr essur e.
Do not use t hi s t r oubl eshoot i ng pr ocedur e if t he f ans
ar e al so i noper at i ve wi t h t he A/ C on. Ref er to t he
sympt om t r oubl eshoot i ng i ndex.
Bef ore doi ng any sympt om t r oubl eshoot i ng, check f or
power t r ai n DTCs (see page 11-3). Al so check f or
B-CAN c odes (see page 22-134).
1. Check t he No. 20 (7.5 A) f use in t he under -hood
f use/r el ay box, and t he No. 16 (7.5 A) f use in t he
Are the fuses OK ?
NO-Repl ac e t he f use(s) and r echeck. If t he f use(s)
bl ow agai n, check f or a shor t in t he No. 20 (7.5 A) f use
and t he No. 16 (7.5 A) f use c i r c ui t s . !
4. Tur n on t he A/ C.
5. Check t he A/ C swi t c h in t he PGM-FI dat a li st wi t h t he
HDS.
Is the A/C switch on?
NO-
' 08-09 model s: go to A/ C pr essur e swi t ch ci rcui t
t r oubl eshoot i ng (see page 21-54).B
'10 model : go to A/ C si gnal ci rcui t t r oubl eshoot i ng
(see page 21-56).IB
6. Usi ng t he HDS, conf i r m t he f ol l owi ng val ues i n t he
PGM-FI Dat a Li st at i dl e.
TP S ENS OR About 0.5 V
RPM A/ T 750- 850 RPM
M/T 730- 830
ECT S ENS OR 2 176- 212 F ( 80- 100 C)
A/ C SWITCH ON
A/ C CL UTCH ON
Are all the values within specifications?
NO-Tr oubl eshoot t he val ue that i s not wi t hi n t he
spec i f i c at i ons.H
21-52
8. Remove t he A/ C c ompr essor cl ut ch rel ay f r om t he
under -hood f use/r el ay box, and t est it (see page
22-93).
Is the relay OK ?
NO-Repl ac e t he A/ C c ompr essor cl ut ch r el ay . H
9. Measur e t he vol t age bet ween A/ C c ompr essor cl ut ch
rel ay 4P socket t er mi nal No. l and body gr ound.
A / C COMPRES S OR CL UTCH REL AY 4P S OCK E T
1 1
C
V
J

4 3
X
22-85).H
10. Connect A/ C c ompr essor cl ut ch rel ay 4P socket
t er mi nal No. 1 and No. 2wi t h a j umper wi r e.
1
J UMPER WI RE
1
J UMPER WI RE
? ?
BL U/ RED
4 3
Does the A/C compressor clutch click?
NO- Go to st ep 20.
13. Measur e t he vol t age bet ween A/ C c ompr essor cl ut ch
rel ay 4P socket t er mi nal No. 4 and body gr ound.
1
2
4 3
L T GRN
(^)
and t he A/ C c ompr essor cl ut ch r el ay .
15. Rei nst al l t he A/ C c ompr essor cl ut ch rel ay.
NOTE: Thi s st ep must be done to protect t he engi ne
cont rol modul e/power t r ai n cont rol modul e
n
Ji IX
,
3 | 4 M 6 | 7 J Z
9 ho i
1
11
/ /
>16 / 1 8 19 20 21
i
r: 1
22 23 24
>5
25
X
26 27 28
i
r: 1
29 30
/
32L/ '34 3536
/ / /
i
r:
1/141
42J 43M
J ~\., ,,.
M | / | 46147 481/|
PUR
J UMPER WIRE
(cont ' d)
21-53
A/C Compressor Clutch Circuit
Does the A/C compressor click?
YE S - Ch ec k f or l oose wi r es or poor c onnec t i ons at
ECM/ PCM connect or A (49P). If t he c onnec t i ons ar e
good, c hec k t he ECM/ PCM gr ounds. If t he gr ounds ar e
good, subst i t ut e a known-good ECM/ PCM, and
r epl ace t he ori gi nal ECM/ PCM (see page 11- 204) . !
NO-Repai r an open i n t he wi r e bet ween t he A/ C
c ompr essor cl ut ch rel ay and t he E CM/ PCM. B
21. Di sc onnec t t he A/ C c ompr essor cl ut ch 1P connect or .
22. Chec k f or cont i nui t y bet ween A/ C c ompr essor cl ut ch
rel ay 4P socket t er mi nal No. 2 and A/ C c ompr essor
cl ut ch 1P connect or t er mi nal No. 1.
B L U/ RE D
RED/ WHT
A / C COMPRES S OR CL UTCH 1P CONNECTOR
Wire side of female terminal
YE S - Ch ec k t he A/ C c ompr essor cl ut ch c l ear anc e, and
t he c ompr essor cl ut ch f i el d coi l (see page 21-73).
Repai r as n eed ed .
NO-Repai r an open in t he wi r e bet ween t he A/ C
c ompr essor cl ut ch rel ay and t he A/ C c ompr essor
c l u t c h .
A/C Pressure Switch Circuit
Troubleshooting
NOTE:
Do not use t hi s t r oubl eshoot i ng pr ocedur e if any of t he
f ol l owi ng i t ems ar e oper at i ve: The c ondenser f an, t he
radi at or f an, or t he A/ C c ompr essor , or if t he heat er i s
i ndex.
Chec k t he A/ C hi gh-si de pr essur e.
Bef or e doi ng any sympt om t r oubl eshoot i ng, check f or
power t r ai n DTCs (see page 11-3). Al so check f or
2. Chec k if t he bl ower mot or oper at es at all speeds.
Does t he blower mot or operat e at all speeds?
NO-Repai r t he pr obl em i n t he bl ower mot or ci rcui t
(see page 21-38)11
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
L T BL U
NO- Go to st ep 7.
8. Di sc onnec t t he A/ C pr essur e swi t ch 2P connect or .
21-54
UD
10. Measur e t he vol t age bet ween A/ C pr essur e swi t ch 2P
connect or No. 2 and body gr ound,
A / C PRE S S URE SWI TCH 2P CONNECTOR
PUR
pr essur e swi t ch and t he MICU. If t he wi r e i s OK,
subst i t ut e a known-good MICU and r echeck. If t he
sympt om goes away, r epl ace t he ori gi nal MI CU. H
11. Chec k f or cont i nui t y bet ween t er mi nal s No. 1 and
No. 2 of A/ C pr essur e swi t c h.
A / C PRE S S URE S WI TCH
NO-Repl ac e t he A/ C pr essur e swi tch.I
12. Connec t A/ C pr essur e swi t c h 2P c onnec t or t er mi nal
PUR
J UMPER WI RE
Do t he compressor and fans operat e?
NO-Chec k f or B-CAN c odes (see page 22-134).H
13. Check f or cont i nui t y bet ween HVAC cont rol uni t 24P
c onnec t or t er mi nal No. 21 and A/ C pr essur e swi t ch 2P
c onnec t or t er mi nal No. 1.
r
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
L T B L U
L T BL U
A / C PRE S S URE S WI TCH 2P CONNECTOR
HVAC cont rol uni t 24P connect or and at t he A/ C
pr essur e swi t ch 2P c onnec t or .H
NO-Repai r an open i n t he wi r e bet ween t he HVAC
cont rol uni t and A/ C pr essur e s wi t c h . B
(cont' d)
21-55
A/C Pr essur e Switch Circuit
15. Measur e t he evapor at or t emper at ur e sensor
r esi st ance bet ween HVAC cont rol uni t 24P connect or
t er mi nal No. 14 and No. 15.
n n
1 2 3 4 5
BRN
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
7 8 9 10 11 12
RED
Is resistance less than 24 kO?
HVAC cont rol uni t 24P connect or . If t he connect i ons
and r echeck. If t he sympt om goes away, r epl ace t he
ori gi nal HVAC cont rol uni t (see page 21- 65) .
NO-Tes t t he evapor at or t emper at ur e sensor (see
page21~58).B
Ak/C Si gnai Ci rcui t Troubl eshoot i ng
NOTE:
If t he bl ower mot or does not run at all speeds, t he A/ C
c ompr essor wi l l be i noper at i ve. Run t he
sel f -di agnost i c f unct i on, and check for DTC 12. Bef ore
per f or mi ng any ot her t r oubl eshoot i ng, repai r t he
c ause of t he i noperat i ve bl ower mot or.
f ol l owi ng i t ems ar e operat i ve: The c ondenser f an, t he
i ndex.
power t r ai n DTCs (see page 11-3).AIso check for
B-CAN c odes.
Does the blower motor operate at all speeds?
NO- Repai r t he pr obl em in t he bl ower mot or ci rcui t
(see page21-38). B
13 14 15 16 17
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
19 20 21 22 23 24
LT BLU
NO- Go to st ep 7.
ills 1
7. Measur e t he vol t age bet ween dr i ver ' s under-dash
body gr ound.
DRI VER' S UNDER-DAS H FUS E / RE L A Y
BOX CONNECTOR F (33P)
: PUR
I
ESSES EI]EJE2BB1^
], |15|16 |17 |18
19
!
33
YES - Repai r an open i n t he wi r e bet ween the HVAC
cont rol uni t and t he MI CU. H
NO-Chec k for l oose wi r e or poor connect i ons at
dr i ver ' s under -dash f use/r el ay box connect or F (33P)
t er mi nal No. 5. If t he c onnec t i ons ar e good, substi tute
a known-good MICU and r echeck. If t he sympt om
goes away, r epl ace t he or i gi nal Ml CU. i l
r esi st anc e bet ween HVAC cont rol uni t 24P connect or
BRN
J t
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
RED
Is resist ance less t han 24 kO?
HVAC cont rol uni t 24P connect or . If t he connect i ons
or i gi nal HVAC cont rol uni t .H
page21-58). B
21-57
Evaporat or Temperature Sensor
Test
NOTE: Bef or e t est i ng t he sensor , check f or HVAC DTCs
(see page 21- i ) .
page 21-67).
2. Di p t he sensor i n i ce wat er , and measur e t he
r esi st ance bet ween its t er mi nal s.
EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
3. Pour war m wat er on t he sensor , and c hec k f or a
c hange i n t he r esi st anc e.
4. Compar e t he r esi st anc e r eadi ngs wi t h t he
speci f i cat i ons shown i n t he gr aph; t he r esi st anc e
shoul d be wi t hi n t he speci f i cat i ons.
RESISTANCE
{km 30
14 32 50 68 86 104 F
10 0 10 20 30 40
C
C
TEMPERATURE
5. If t he r esi st anc e i s not as spec i f i ed, r epl ace t he
evapor at or t emper at ur e sensor (see page 21-67).
Power Tr ansi st or Test
1. Remove t he passenger ' s dashboar d under cover (see
page 20-170).
2. Di sconnect t he 4P connect or f r om t he power
t r ansi st or .
3. Measur e t he r esi st anc e bet ween t er mi nal s No. 3 and
No. 4 of t he power t r ansi st or . It shoul d be about 1.5
kO.
If t he r esi st anc e i s wi t hi n t he speci f i cat i ons, go to
st ep 4.
If t he r esi st anc e i s not wi t hi n t he speci f i cat i ons,
r epl ace t he power t r ansi st or .
NOTE: Al so check t he bl ower mot or. Power
t r ansi st or f ai l ure can be c aused by a def ect i ve
bl ower mot or.
POWER TRANS I S TOR
4. Car ef ul l y r el ease t he lock t ab on t er mi nal No. 1 (PUR)
(A) in t he 4P connect or , t hen r emove t he t er mi nal and
i nsul at e it f r om body gr ound.
(To 12 V Power sour c e on vehi cl e)
21 "*58
5. Reconnect t he 4P connect or to t he power t r ansi st or .
6. Make sur e t he PUR wi r e i s compl et el y i sol at ed, t hen
suppl y 12 V to cavi t y No. 1 wi t h a j umper wi r e.
7 Tur n t he i gni ti on swi t c h t o ON (II), and check that t he
bl ower motor r uns.
If t he bl ower mot or does not r un, r epl ace t he power
t r ansi st or .
NOTE: A f ault y bl ower mot or c an c ause t he power
t r ansi st or to f ai l . If t he power t r ansi st or i s r epl ac ed,
al so check t he bl ower mot or f or bi ndi ng, and
r epl ace it if nec essar y.
If t he bl ower mot or r uns, t he power t r ansi st or i s OK.
Air Mix Control Motor Test
NOTE: Bef or e t est i ng t he mot or, c hec k f or HVAC DTCs
(see page 21-9).
1. Di sc onnec t t he 7P connect or f r om t he ai r mi x cont rol
mot or .
[ NOTl CEl
Incor r ect l y appl yi ng power and gr ound to t he ai r mi x
cont r ol mot or wi l l damage it. Fol l ow t he i nst ruct i ons
car ef ul l y.
2. Connec t battery power to t er mi nal No. 1 of t he ai r mi x
cont r ol mot or, and gr ound t er mi nal No. 2; t he ai r mi x
cont r ol mot or shoul d r un, and st op at Max Hot. If it
doesn' t , r ever se t he c onnec t i ons; t he ai r mi x cont rol
mot or shoul d r un, and st op at Max Cool . When t he ai r
mi x cont rol mot or st ops r unni ng, di sc onnec t battery
power i mmedi at el y.
AIR MIX CONTROL MOTOR
3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
(cont ' d)
21-59
Air m i x Control Motor Test (cont'd)
3. If t he ai r mi x cont rol mot or di d not run i n st ep 2,
r emove it, t hen c hec k t he ai r mi x cont rol l i nkage and.
door f or smoot h movement .
If t he l i nkage and door move smoot hl y, r epl ace t he
ai r mi x cont rol mot or (see page 21-60).
If t he l i nkage or door st i cks or bi nds, repai r t hem as
needed.
If t he ai r mi x cont rol mot or r uns smoot hl y, go to
st ep 4.
No. 7. It shoul d be bet ween 4.2 to 7.8 kO.
5. Rec onnec t t he ai r mi x cont rol mot or 7P connect or ,
t hen t urn t he i gni ti on swi t c h to ON (II).
6. Usi ng t he backpr obe set , measur e t he vol t age
bet ween t er mi nal s No. 3 and No. 7 of t he 7P
connect or .
Max Cool ; About 0. 5 V . .
Max Hot ; A b o u t 4. 5 V
7. If ei t her t he r esi st anc e or t he vol t age r eadi ngs are not
as spec i f i ed, r epl ace t he ai r mi x cont rol mot or (see
page 21-60).
Air Mix Control Motor Replacement
1. Remove t he dr i ver ' s dashboar d under cover (see page
20-170).
2. Di sconnect t he 7P connect or (A) f r om t he ai r mi x
cont rol mot or (B). Remove t he sel f -t appi ng sc r ews
and t he ai r mi x cont rol mot or f r om t he heat er uni t.
3. Install t he mot or in t he r ever se or der of r emoval .
Make sur e t he pi n on t he mot or i s properl y engaged
wi t h t he l i nkage. After i nst al l at i on, make sur e t he
mot or r uns smoot hl y.
21-60
Mode Control Motor Test
' 08-09 model s wi t h A/ T and ' 10 model
wi t h A / T
NOTE; Bef or e t est i ng t he mot or , check f or HVAC DTCs
(see page 21-9).
1. Di sconnect t he 7P connect or f r om t he mode cont rol
mot or.
[NOTICE]
Incorrect l y appl yi ng power and gr ound to t he mode
cont rol mot or wi l l damage i t Fol l ow t he Inst r uct i ons
caref ul l y.
2. Connec t battery power to t er mi nal No. 1 of t he mode
cont rol mot or , and gr ound t er mi nal No. 2; t he mode
cont rol mot or shoul d r un smoot hl y, and st op at
Def rost . If it doesn' t , r ever se t he c onnec t i ons; t he
mode cont rol mot or shoul d run smoot hl y, and st op at
Vent . When t he mode cont rol mot or st ops r unni ng,
di sconnect battery power i mmedi at el y.
MODE CONTROL MOTOR
' 08-10 .'models wi t h M/T and ' 08-0S model s
2-door wi t h A / T
NOTE: Bef or e t est i ng t he mot or , c hec k f or HVAC DTCs
(see page 21-9).
1. Di sc onnec t t he 7P c onnec t or f r om t he mode cont rol
mot or.
NOTICE
Incorrect l y appl yi ng power ari d .ground to t he mode
cont rol mot or wi l l damage i t Fol l ow t he i nst r uct i ons
car ef ul l y.
. Connec t battery power to t er mi nal No. 1 of t he mode
cont rol mot or , and gr ound t er mi nal No. 2; t he mode
cont rol mot or shoul d r un, and st op at Def rost . If it
doesn' t , r ever se t he c onnec t i ons; t he mode cont rol
mot or shoul d r un, and st op at Vent . When t he mode
cont rol mot or st ops r unni ng, di sconnect battery
MODE CONTROL MOTOR
3. If t he mode cont rol mot or di d not run i n st ep 2,
r emove it, t hen check t he mode cont rol l i nkage and
door s f or smoot h movement .
If t he l i nkage and door s move smoot hl y, r epl ace t he
mode cont rol mot or (see page 21-62).
If t he l i nkage or door s st i ck or bi nd, repai r t hem as
needed.
If t he mode cont rol mot or r uns smoot hl y, go to
st ep 4.
4. Use a di gi tal mul t i met er wi t h an output of 1 mA or
l ess at t he 20 kQ r ange. Wi t h t he mode cont rol mot or
runni ng as i n st ep 2, check f or cont i nui t y bet ween
t er mi nal No. 7 and t er mi nal s No. 3, 4, 5, and No. 6
i ndi vi dual l y. Ther e shoul d be cont i nui t y f or a moment
at each t er mi nal as t he mot or moves t hr ough i ts
t r avel .
5. If t here i s no cont i nui t y f or a moment at eac h t er mi nal ,
repl ace t he mode cont rol mot or (see page 21-62).
(cont' d)
21-61
Mode Control Motor Test (cont'd)
3. If t he mode cont rol mot or di d not r un i n st ep 2,
r emove i t t hen check t he mode cont r ol l i nkage and
needed.
st ep 4.
No. 7s of t he mode cont rol mot or. It shoul d be
bet ween 4.2 and 7.8 k O.
5. Rec onnec t t he mode cont rol mot or 7P c onnec t or ,
t hen t ur n t he i gni ti on swi t ch t o ON (II).
bet ween t er mi nal No. 3 and No. 7 of t he 7P connect or .
Vent : About 0. 5 V
Def r ost : About 4. 5 V
7. If ei t her t he r esi st ance or t he vol t age r eadi ngs ar e not
as spec i f i ed, r epl ace t he mode cont r ol mot or (see
page 21-62).
Mode Control Motor Replacement
1. Remove t he bl ower uni t (see page 21-65).
2. Di sc onnec t t he 7P connect or (A) f r om t he mode
cont r ol mot or (B). Remove t he sel f -t appi ng s c r ews
and t he mode cont rol mot or f r om t he heat er uni t.
3. Inst al l t he mot or in t he r ever se or der of r emoval .
wi t h t he l i nkage. Af t er i nst al l at i on, make sur e t he
21-62
Recirculation Control Motor Test
' 08-09 model s 4-door wi t h A / T and "10 model
wi t h A / T
NOTE: Bef ore t est i ng t he mot or, check f or HVAC DTCs
(see page 21-9).
1. Di sconnect t he 7P connect or f r om t he reci rcul at i on
cont rol mot or.
[NOTICE]
Incorrect l y appl yi ng power and gr ound to t he
reci rcul at i on cont rol mot or wi l l damage it. Fol l ow t he
i nst r uct i ons caref ul l y.
2. Connec t battery power to t ermi nal No. 1 of t he
r eci r cul at i on cont rol mot or, and gr ound ei t her
t er mi nal No. 5 or No. 7; t he reci rcul at i on cont rol mot or
shoul d run smoot hl y. To avoi d damagi ng t he
r eci r cul at i on cont rol mot or, do not r ever se power and
gr ound i mmedi at el y when t he mot or st ops.
Di sconnect t er mi nal No. 5 or No. 7 f r om gr ound; t he
reci rcul at i on cont rol mot or shoul d st op at Fr esh
(when t er mi nal No. 7 i s di sconnect ed) or Reci r cul at e
(when t er mi nal No. 5 i s di sconnect ed). Do not l eave
t he mot or connect ed to power and gr ound f or l ong
per i ods of t i me.
RECI RCUL ATI ON CONTROL MOTOR
3. If the reci rcul at i on cont rol mot or di d not run in st ep 2,
r emove it, t hen check t he reci rcul at i on cont rol l i nkage
and door s f or smoot h movement .
If t he l i nkage and door s move smoot hl y, r epl ace t he
reci rcul at i on cont rol mot or (see page 21-64).
If t he l i nkage or door s sti ck or bi nd, repai r t hem as
needed.
2-door wi t h A / T
NOTE: Bef or e t est i ng t he mot or, check f or HVAC DTCs
(see page 21-9).
1. Di sconnect t he 7P connect or f rom t he reci rcul at i on
cont rol mot or.
" I NOTICE!
reci rcul at i on cont rol mot or wi l l damage it. Fol l ow t he
i nst r uct i ons caref ul l y.
2. Connec t battery power to t er mi nal No. 1 of t he
reci rcul at i on cont rol mot or, and gr ound t er mi nal No.
2; t he reci rcul at i on cont rol mot or shoul d r un, and st op
at Fr esh. If it doesn' t , r ever se t he c onnec t i ons; t he
reci rcul at i on cont rol mot or shoul d r un, and st op at
Reci r cul at e. When t he reci rcul at i on cont rol mot or
st ops r unni ng, di sconnect battery power
i mmedi at el y.
(cont' d)
21-63
(cont'd)
3. If t he reci rcul at i on cont rol mot or di d not run in st ep 2,
r emove i t t hen c hec k t he reci rcul at i on cont rol l i nkage
and door f or smoot h movement .
reci rcul at i on cont rol mot or (see page 21-64).
needed.
If t he reci rcul at i on cont rol mot or r uns smoot hl y, go
to st ep 4.
4. Measur e t he r esi st ance bet ween t er mi nal s No. 5 and
No. 7 of t he reci rcul at i on cont rol mot or. It shoul d be
bet ween 4.2 and 7.8 k O.
5. Rec onnec t t he r eci r cul at i on cont rol mot or 7P
connect or , t hen t urn t he i gni t i on swi t ch to ON (ll).
connect or .
Fr esh: About 1.0 V
Rec i r c ul at e: About 4.0 V
7. If ei t her t he r esi st ance or t he vol t age r eadi ngs are not
as spec i f i ed, r epl ace t he r eci r cul at i on cont rol mot or
(see page 21-64).
Recirculation Control Motor
Replacement
2. Di sc onnec t t he 7P c onnec t or (A) f r om t he
r eci r cul at i on cont rol mot or (B). Remove t he
sel f -t appi ng s c r ews and t he r eci r cul at i on cont rol
mot or f r om t he heat er uni t
3. Inst al l t he mot or i n t he r ever se or der of r emoval .
Make sur e t he pi n on t he mot or i s pr oper l y engaged
21-64
HVAC Cont rol Uni t
1. Remove t he audi o uni t (see page 23-115).'
2. Remove t he sel f -t appi ng sc r ews. If nec essar y, r epl ace
t he bul bs (A).
Blower Unit- Removal /l nsL
3. Whi l e hol di ng t he HVAC cont rol uni t (A), f i rml y pr ess
t he cent er of one of t he di al s (B) to r emove t he out er
di al . Repeat for t he ot her out er di al , t hen r emove t he
uni t.
4. Inst al l t he cont rol uni t in t he r ever se or der of r emoval .
Af t er i nst al l at i on, oper at e t he var i ous f unct i ons to
make sur e t hey wor k properl y.
5. Run t he sel f -di agnost i c f unct i on t o conf i r m t hat t her e
ar e no pr obl ems in t he syst em (see page 21-10).
2. Remove t he passenger ' s under c over (see page
20-170).
3. Remove t he ri ght ki ck panel (see page 20-107).
4. Remove t he dust and pol l en fi lter assembl y f r om the
bl ower uni t.
5. Remove t he bol t s (A) and t he wi r e har ness cl i p (B).
Then cut t he pl ast i c c r oss br ace (C) i n t he gl ove box
openi ng wi t h di agonal cut t er s in t he ar ea shown.
Ret ai n t he pl ast i c c r oss br ace to be r ei nst al l ed later.
Cut here.
6. Di sconnect t hese c onnec t or s (A): Passenger ' s
under -dash f use/r el ay box connect or D (28P), t he
st er eo ampl i f i er c onnec t or s (wi th pr emi um audi o
syst em), t he AM/FM ant enna l ead, and ri ght si de wi r e
har ness connect or C410 (20P). Remove t he wi r e
har ness cl i ps (B).
(c onf d)
21-65
Bl ower Uni t Removal /Inst al l at i on (cont' d)
7. Remove t he t wo s c r ews , t hen r emove t he c over (A).
8. Di sc onnec t t he connect or (B) f r om t he bl ower mot or
and t he wi r e har ness cl i p (C). Remove t he sel f -t appi ng
s c r ew and t he mount i ng nut.
9. Remove t he sel f -t appi ng s c r ews , and t he passenger ' s
heat er duct (A).
10. Di sconnect t he connect or (A) f r om t he reci rcul at i on
cont rol mot or. Remove t he mount i ng nut s.
9.8 N-m
(1.0 k g f m, 7.2 Ibf-ft)
11. Pull t he bl ower uni t (A) out whi l e rotati ng it c l oc kwi se
as s hown, so t hat t he gl ove box bracket (B) pas s es
t hr ough t he dust and pol l en fi lter ar ea.
12. Install t he uni t in t he r ever se or der of r emoval . Make
sur e that t her e i s no ai r l eakage.
21-66
Blower Unit Component
Replacement
Evaporat or Core Replacement
Note t hese i t ems when over haul i ng t he bl ower uni t:
The reci rcul at i on cont rol mot or (A), t he bl ower motor
(B), and t he dust and pol l en fi lter (C) can be r epl aced
wi t hout r emovi ng t he bl ower uni t.
Bef ore r eassembl y, make sur e t hat t he reci rcul at i on
cont rol l i nkage and door move smoot hl y wi t hout
bi ndi ng.
After r eassembl y, make sur e t he reci rcul at i on cont rol
mot or r uns smoot hl y (see page 21-64).
A
1. Recover t he ref ri gerant wi t h a
r ecover y/r ecycIi ng/char gi ng st at i on (see page 21-80).
2. Remove t he bolt f r om t he A/ C li ne c l amp (A).
A 6 x 1.0 mm
3. Remove t he bolt, t hen di sconnect t he A/ C li ne (A)
f rom t he evapor at or c or e.
A
6 x 1 0 mm
9.8 N-m
(1.0 kgf -m, 7.2 Ibf-ft)
4. Remove t he bl ower uni t (see page 21-65).
5. Remove t he passenger ' s consol e cover (see page
20-157).
(cont' d)
21-67
Evaporator Core Replacement (cont' d)
6, Di sconnect t hese c onnec t or s (A): The evapor at or
t emper at ur e sensor , t he power t r ansi st or , and t he
passenger ' s ai r mi x cont rol mot or (wi th cl i mat e
cont r ol ). Remove t he connect or cl i p (B) and t he
har ness cl i p (C). Remove t he sel f -t appi ng s c r ews , t he
expansi on val ve c over (D), and t he seal (E).
7. Car ef ul l y pull out t he evapor at or cor e (A) wi t hout
bendi ng t he l i nes.
8. Remove t he cl i ps (A) and t he evapor at or t emper at ur e
sensor (B ). .
NOTE; At t he f act ory, t he evapor at or t emper at ur e
sensor i s i nst al l ed at t he 13th' r ow of f i ns f r om t he
ri ght si de.
21 "88
Expansion Val ve Replacement
9. When t he evapor at or t emper at ur e sensor (A) i s
rei nst al l ed onto a new evapor at or c or e, set t he
evapor at or t emper at ur e sensor in t he 13th fi n f r om
t he right si de.
NOTE: If you ar e i nst al l i ng t he sensor onto t he ol d
evapor at or c or e, i nst all t he sensor onto t he 14th f i n,
bec ause t he 13th fi n may be def or med f r om t he
pr evi ous i nst al l at i on.
10. Install t he cor e in t he r ever se or der of r emoval , and
If you' r e i nst al l i ng a new evapor at or c or e, add
ref ri gerant oi l (DENSO ND-OIL 8) (see page 21-6).
Repl ace t he O-ri ngs wi t h new ones at eac h fi tti ng,
and appl y a thi n coat of ref ri gerant oi l bef ore
i nst al l i ng t hem. Be sur e to use t he cor r ect O-r i ngs
for HFC-134a (R-134a) t o avoi d l eakage.
Immedi at el y after usi ng t he oi l , rei nst al l t he c ap on
t he cont ai ner , and seal it to avoi d moi st ur e
absor pt i on.
damage t he pai nt; if t he ref ri gerant oi l cont act s t he
pai nt , was h it off i mmedi at el y.
Make sur e that t here i s no ai r l eakage.
Char ge t he syst em (see page 21-81).
1. Remove t he evapor at or c or e (see page 21-67).
2. Remove t he i nsul at or (A) and bol t s, t hen r emove t he
expansi on val ve (B) and O-r i ngs (C).
(0.3 k g f m,
2.2 Ibf f t )
3. Install t he expansi on val ve i n t he r ever se or der of
Repl ace t he O-r i ngs wi t h new ones at eac h fi tti ng,
and appl y a thi n coat of ref ri gerant oi l bef ore
f or HFC-134a (R-134a) to avoi d l eakage.
i mmedi at el y after usi ng t he oi l , rei nst al l t he cap on
absor pt i on.
damage t he pai nt ; if t he ref ri gerant oi l cont act s t he
Make sur e that t her e i s no ai r l eakage.
Char ge t he syst em (see page 21-81).
21-69
Heater Uni t /Cor e Repl acement
page 22-91).
2. Rec over t he ref ri gerant wi t h a r ec over y/r ec yc l i ng/
char gi ng st at i on (see page 21-80).
3. Di sc onnec t t he A/ C l i ne f r om t he evapor at or c or e (see
page 21-67).
4. When t he engi ne i s c ool , dr ai n t he engi ne cool ant
f r om t he r adi at or (see page 10-6).
5. Fr om under t he hood, r emove t he c l amp (A). Sl i de t he
hose c l amps (B) back. Di sc onnec t t he i nl et heat er
hose (C) and t he out l et heat er hose (D) f r om t he heat er
uni t. Not e t he l ayout of t he hos es .
Engi ne cool ant wi l l run out when t he hoses ar e
di sc onnec t ed; dr ai n it i nto a c l ean dri p pan. Be sur e
not to let cool ant spi l l on t he el ect r i cal part s or t he
pai nt ed sur f ac es. If any cool ant spi l l s, r i nse it off
i mmedi at el y.
D
6. Remove t he mount i ng nut f r om t he heat er uni t. Take
c ar e not to damage or bend t he f uel l i nes or br ake
l i nes, et c..
12.3 N-m
(1.3 k g f m, 9.0 Ibf-ft)
7. Remove t he dashboar d (see page 20-183).
8. Di sc onnec t t he connect or (A). Remove t he c l i ps (B),
duct s (C), and t he dr ai n hose (D). Then r emove t he
mount i ng bol t , t he mount i ng nut s, and t he
bl ower -heat er uni t (E).
21-70
9. Remove t he t wo s c r ews , t hen r emove t he c over (A).
10. Di sconnect t he connect or (B) f r om t he bl ower mot or.
Remove t he wi r e har ness cli p (C).
11. Di sconnect t hese connect or s (A): The mode cont r ol
mot or, t he power t r ansi st or , t he evapor at or
t emper at ur e sensor , t he passenger ' s ai r mi x cont rol
mot or (wi th cl i mat e cont r ol ), and t he r eci r cul at i on
cont rol mot or. Remove t he wi r e har ness cl i ps (B).
12. Di sc onnec t t he connect or (A) f r om t he ai r mi x cont rol
mot or . Remove t he wi r e har ness cl i ps (B), t he
c onnec t or cl i p (C), and t he wi r e har ness (D).
B
A
13. Remove t he sel f -t appi ng s c r ews and t he passenger ' s
heat er duct (A). Remove t he sel f -t appi ng s c r ews and
t he expansi on val ve c over (B). Remove t he
sel f -t appi ng s c r ew and t he heat er cor e cover (C).
Remove t he sel f -t appi ng s c r ews , t he heat er pi pe
bracket (D), and t he gr ommet (E), and caref ul l y pull
out t he heat er c or e (F).
A
(cont ' d)
21-71
Heater Uni t /Cor e Repl acement
(cont'd)
14. Install t he heat er cor e and t he evapor at or cor e i n t he
15. Install t he heat er uni t i n t he r ever se or der of r emoval ,
Do not i nt er change t he i nlet and outlet heat er
hoses, and i nst al l t he hose c l amps sec ur el y.
Refi ll t he cool i ng syst em wi t h engi ne cool ant (see
page 10-6).
Make sur e that t her e i s no cool ant l eakage.
Make sur e that t her e i s no ai r l eakage.
page 22-91).
A/C Compressor Replacement
NOTE: Do not i nst al l t he A/ C c ompr essor i nto a syst em
unl ess you ar e compl et el y sur e t hat t he syst em i s f ree of
cont ami nat i on. Inst al l i ng t he A/ C c ompr essor into a
cont ami nat ed syst em c an resul t in pr emat ur e A/ C
c ompr essor f ai l ur e.
1. If t he A/ C c ompr essor i s mar gi nal l y oper abl e, run t he
engi ne at i dle s peed, and let t he ai r condi t i oni ng wor k
f or a f ew mi nut es, t hen shut t he engi ne off.
2. Rec over t he ref ri gerant wi t h a
r ecover y/r ecycl i ng/char gi ng st at i on (see page 21-80).
4. Remove t he A/ C c ondenser f an shr oud (see page
10-13).
5. Di sc onnec t t he A/ C c ompr essor cl ut ch connect or (A).
Remove t he bol t s and t he nut , t hen di sc onnec t t he
suct i on hose (B) and t he di sc har ge hose (C) f r om t he
A/ C c ompr essor . Plug or c ap t he l i nes i mmedi at el y
after di sconnect i ng t hem to avoi d moi st ur e and dust
cont ami nat i on.
6 x 1.0 mm
9.8 N-m
9.8 N-m
(1.0 kgf m, 7.2 ibf-ft)
A/C Compressor Clutch Check
6. Remove t he mount i ng bol t s and t he A/ C c ompr essor
(A), Be caref ul not to damage t he radi at or f i ns when
r emovi ng t he c ompr essor .
A
8 K 1.25 mm
22 N-m
(2.2 kgf -m,
1S.2 I bfft)
7. Install t he A/ C c ompr essor in t he r ever se or der of
Inspect t he A/ C l i nes for any si gns of cont ami nat i on.
If you' r e i nst al l i ng a new A/ C c ompr essor , you must
cal cul at e t he amount of ref ri gerant oi l to be
r emoved f r om it (see page 21- 6) . A new A/ C
c ompr essor c omes wi th a full c har ge of oi l .
Repl ace t he O-ri ngs wi t h new ones at eac h fi tti ng,
and appl y a t hi n coat of ref ri gerant oi l bef ore
for HFC-134a (R-134a) to avoi d l eakage.
Use onl y PAG ref ri gerant oi l (DENSO ND-OIL 8) f or
HFC-134a A/ C syst ems.
To avoi d cont ami nat i on, do not return t he oi l to t he
cont ai ner onc e di spensed, and never mi x it wi t h
ot her ref ri gerant oi l s.
Immedi at el y after usi ng t he oi l , rei nst al l t he c ap on
absor pt i on.
Do not spi l l t he refri gerant oi l on t he vehi c l e; it may
damage t he pai nt; if the ref ri gerant oi l cont act s t he
Be caref ul not to damage t he radi at or f i ns when
i nst al l i ng t he A/ C c ompr essor and t he A/ C
c ondenser f an shr oud.
Char ge t he syst em (see page 21- 81) .
1. Chec k t he pr essur e plate for di scol or at i on, peel i ng, or
ot her damage. If t her e i s damage, r epl ace t he cl ut ch
set (see page 21- 75) .
2. Chec k t he pul l ey bear i ng play and dr ag by rotati ng t he
pul l ey by hand. Al so check f or gr ease l eakage f r om
t he bear i ng. Repl ac e t he cl ut ch set wi t h a new one if it
i s noi sy, has exc essi ve pl ay/dr ag, or has bear i ng
gr ease cont ami nat i on on t he cl ut ch f ac es (see page
21- 75) .
NOTE: The pul l ey and t he pr essur e plate wer e mat ed
at t he f act ory by a bur ni shi ng oper at i on. Al ways
r epl ace t he pul l ey and t he pr essur e plate as a set .
Repl aci ng onl y one part of t he cl ut ch set wi l l c ause
cl ut ch sl i ppage.
(cont ' d)
21-73
A/C Compressor Clutch Check (cont'd)
3, Measur e t he c l ear anc e bet ween t he pul l ey (A) and t he
pr essur e plate (B) wi t h a di al i ndi cat or. Zer o out t he
i ndi cat or, t hen appl y battery vol t age to t he A/ C
c ompr essor cl ut ch. Measur e t he movement of t he
pr essur e plate when t he vol t age i s appl i ed. If t he
c l ear anc e i s not wi t hi n t he speci f i ed l i mi t s, t he
pr essur e plate must be r eshi mmed (see page 21-75).
Cl ear anc e; 0. 35- 0. 60 mm (0. 014-0. 024 In)
NOTE; The shi ms are avai l abl e in t hr ee t hi c knesses:
0.1 mm, 0.3 mm, and 0.5 mm.
4. Remove t he pr essur e plate (see page 21-75), and
i nspect t he pr essur e plate and pul l ey f ri ct i on sur f ac es
for wear . If t her e i s exc essi ve wear , r oughness, or
sc or i ng, r epl ace t he cl ut ch set .
5. Inspect t he f ri ct i on sur f ac es and t he A/ C c ompr essor
shaf t hub f or exc ess o i l . If ex c es s oil i s pr esent , and it
i s not f r om t he engi ne or power st eer i ng s y s t em, t hen
t he A/ C c ompr essor shaf t seal i s l eaki ng. Repl ace t he
A/ C c ompr essor (see page 21-72).
6. Chec k r esi st anc e of t he f i el d coi l . If r esi st anc e i s not
wi t hi n spec i f i c at i ons, r epl ace t he f i el d coi l (see page
21-75).
Fi el d Coi l Resi st anc e: 3 . 9 - 4 . 3 O at 68 F (20 C)
21-74
A/C Compressor Clutch Overhaul
Spec i al Tools Required
A/ C Cl ut ch Hol der Robi nai r 10290 or Kent -Moor e
J37872, c ommer c i al l y avai l abl e
A/ C Cl ut ch Hol der Honda Tool and Equi pment
ACT499A, c ommer c i al l y avai l abl e
1. Remove t he cent er bolt whi l e hol di ng t he pr essur e
plate (A) wi t h a c ommer c i al l y avai l abl e A/ C cl ut ch
hol der (B).
NOTE:
Do not use a hammer to r emove t he snap r i ngs.
Usi ng a hammer damages t he A/ C c ompr essor .
Do not hammer or pry on t he pul l ey to r emove it. If
t he pul l ey i s di ffi cult to r emove, use a commer ci al l y
avai l abl e pul l ey r emovi ng t ool . Make sur e t he j aws
of t he pul l i ng tool engage t he back f ace of t he
pul l ey, not t he pul l ey gr ooves.
2. Remove t he pr essur e plate (A) and t he shi m(s) (B),
t aki ng c ar e not to l ose t he shi m(s). If t he cl ut ch needs
adj ust ment , i nc r ease or dec r ease t he number and
t hi c kness of shi ms as nec essar y, t hen rei nst al l t he
pr essur e pl at e, and r echeck i ts c l ear anc e (see page
21-73).
NOTE:
The shi ms are avai l abl e in t hree t hi c knesses:
0.1 mm, 0.3 mm, and 0.5 mm.
Do not pry t he on t he pr essur e plate wi t h
sc r ewdr i ver s or si mi l ar t ool s. Pryi ng damages t he
pr essur e plate and t he pul l ey.
When r epl aci ng t he cl ut ch set , pl ace a tri al st ack of
s hi ms , 1 mm total t hi c kness, on t he A/ C c ompr essor
shaf t . Install t he pr essur e pl at e, and check its
c l ear anc e (see page 21-73). If t he cl ear ance i s not
wi t h speci f i cat i on, add or subst r act shi ms as
needed.
B
Replace.
(cont' d)
21-75
A/C Compressor Clutch Overhaul (cont' d)
3. If you ar e r epl aci ng t he f i el d c oi l , r emove t he snap ri ng
(A) wi t h snap ri ng pl i er s, t hen r emove t he pul l ey (B).
Be car ef ul not to damage t he pul l ey or t he A/ C
c ompr essor .
NOTE:
Do not use a hammer to r emove t he snap r i ngs.
Usi ng a hammer damages t he A/ C c ompr essor .
Do not hammer or pry on t he pul l ey to r emove it. If
t he pul l ey i s di ffi cult to r emove, use a c ommer c i al l y
avai l abl e pul l ey r emovi ng tool. Make sur e t he j aws
of t he pul l i ng tool engage t he back f ace of t he
pul l ey, not t he pul l ey gr ooves.
4. Remove t he sc r ew, t he wi r e har ness cl i p (A), and t he
hol der (B). Remove t he snap ri ng (C) wi t h snap ri ng
pl i er s, t hen r emove t he f i el d coi l (D). Be caref ul not to
damage t he f i el d coi l or t he A/ C c ompr essor .
5. Reassembl e t he cl ut ch in t he r ever se or der of
di sassembl y, and note t hese i t ems:
When r epl aci ng t he f i el d c oi l , check that t he new
coi l has t he cor r ect r esi st ance {see st ep 8 on page
21-74).
Inst al l t he f i el d coi l wi t h t he wi r e si de f aci ng down,
and al i gn t he boss on t he f i el d coi l wi t h t he hol e in
t he A/ C c ompr essor .
Cl ean t he pul l ey and A/ C c ompr essor sl i di ng
sur f ac es wi t h cont act c l eaner or ot her
non-pet r ol eum sol vent .
Inst al l new snap r i ngs, note t he i nst al l at i on
di r ect i on, and make sur e t hey ar e f ully seat ed i n t he
gr ooves.
Make sur e that t he pul l ey t ur ns smoot hl y after i t ' s
r eassembl ed.
Rout e and c l amp t he wi r es pr oper l y, or t hey c an be
damaged by t he pul l ey.
6. Cyc l e t he A/ C cl ut ch appr oxi mat el y 20 t i mes by
r unni ng t he engi ne at 1,5002,000 rpm and set t i ng
t he A/ C syst em to MAX A/ C mode. Thi s pr ocedur e
seat s t he cl ut ch f ri ct i on sur f ac es and i nc r eases cl ut ch
t or que capaci t y.
21-76
A / C Compr essor Reli ef Val ve
Repl acement
A/ C Condenser Repl acement
1. Rec over t he ref ri gerant wi t h a
r ecover y/r ecycl i ng/char gi ng st at i on (see page 21-80).
3. Remove t he reli ef val ve (A) and t he O-ri ng (B). Pl ug
t he openi ng to keep f orei gn mat t er f r om ent eri ng t he
s y s t em, and t he A/ C c ompr essor oi l f r om runni ng out.
13.2 N m
(1.35 kgf m, 9.7 Ibf ft)
4. Cl ean t he mat i ng sur f ac es.
5. Repl ac e t he O-ri ng on t he reli ef val ve, and appl y a t hi n
coat of ref ri gerant oi l bef ore i nst al l i ng it.
6. Remove t he pl ug you i nst al l ed i n st ep 2, t hen i nst al l
and t i ght en t he rel i ef val ve.
7. Char ge t he syst em (see page 21-81).
1. Rec over t he ref ri gerant wi t h a r ecover y/r ecycl i ng
c har gi ng st at i on (see page 21-80).
2. Remove t he front gri l l e c over (see page 20-274).
3. Remove t he i ntake ai r duct and t he wat er separ at or
(see page 10-13).
4. Remove t he cl i ps (A) and t he duct (B). Remove t he
bol t s and t he radi at or upper mount br acket s (C).
6x 1.0 mm
9.8 N-m
5. Remove t he bolt, t hen di sc onnec t t he r ecei ver pi pe (A)
f r om t he A/ C c ondenser .
\juinu=====r-
(cont ' d)
21-77
A/C Condenser Replacement (cont'd)
6. Removet h ebolt , t h en dis connect t h e dis ch arge h os e
(A) fromt h eA/ C condens er.
9.8 N-m
(1.0 k g f m, 7.2 Ibf f t )
7. Removet h e coolant res ervoir (A).
9. Ins t all t h eA/ C condens er in t h e revers eorder of
removal, and not e t h es eit ems :
If you're ins t alling anew A/ C condens er, add
refrigerant oil (DE NSO ND-OIL 8) (s ee page21-6).
Replacet h e O-rings wit h new ones at each fit t ing,
and apply at h in coat of refrigerant oil before
ins t alling t h em. Be s uret o us et h e correct O-rings
for HFC-134a (R-134a) t o avoid leakage.
Immediat ely aft er us ing t h eoil, reins t all t h e cap on
t h e cont ainer, and s eal it t o avoid mois t ure
abs orpt ion.
Do not s pill t h e refrigerant oil on t h e veh icle; it may
damaget h e paint ; if t h e refrigerant oil cont act s t h e
paint , was h it off immediat ely.
Be careful not t o damaget h e radiat or or t h e A/ C
condens er fins wh en ins t alling t h eA/ C condens er.
Ch arget h e s ys t em(s ee page21-81).
B
A .
(1.0 k g f m, 7.2 Ibf f t )
8. Removet h e bolt s , t h en remove t h eA/ C condens er
upper mount bracket s (B). Removet h eA/ C condens er
(C) by lift ing it up. Be careful not t o damaget h e
radiat or or condens er fins wh en removing t h e A/ C
condens er.
21-78
Receiver/Drf er Desiccant
Replacement
NOTE: Install t he r ecei ver /dr yer as qui ckl y as possi bl e to
prevent t he syst em f r om absor bi ng moi st ur e f r om t he
ai r.
1. Remove t he A/ C c ondenser (see page 21 -77).
2. Remove t he bol t s f r om t he A/ C c ondenser , t hen
r emove t he r ecei ver /dr yer (A), t he bracket (B), and the
O-ri ngs (C).
6x 1.0 m m
9.8 N-m
(1.0 kgf -m, 7.2 I bf f t)
B
9.8 N- m
(1.0 k g f m , 7.2 Ibfft)
3. Install t he r ecei ver /dr yer in t he r ever se or der of
r emoval . Repl ac e t he O-ri ngs wi t h new ones, and
appl y a t hi n coat of refri gerant oil (DENSO ND-OIL 8)
before i nst al l i ng t hem. Be sur e to use t he cor r ect
O-ri ngs f or HFC-134a (R-134a) to avoi d l eakage.
Dust and Pollen Filter Replacement
1. Open the gl ove box. Remove t he gl ove box st op on
t he right si de, t hen let t he gl ove box hang down (see
page 20-174).
2. Remove the dust and pol l en fi lter assembl y (A) f r om
t he bl ower uni t.
3. Remove t he fi lter (A) f r om t he housi ng (B), and
repl ace t he fi lter.
4. Install t he fi lter in t he r ever se or der of r emoval . Make
sur e that t here i s no ai r l eaki ng out of the bl ower uni t.
21-79
Heat i ng/Ai r Condi t i oni ng
Refri gerant Recovery
- ^^ - - & ( ^^
Be car ef ul when connect i ng ser vi c e equi pment .
Do not br eat he ref ri gerant or vapor .
NOTE: .
If acci dent al syst em di sc har ge oc c ur s , vent i l at e t he
wor k ar ea bef ore r esumi ng ser vi c e.
Addi t i onal heal t h and saf et y Inf or mat i on may be
obt ai ned f r om t he ref ri gerant and l ubr i cant
manuf ac t ur er s.
1. Connec t an R-134aref ri gerant
r ecover y/r ecyel i ng/char gi ng st at i on (A) to t he
hi gh-pr essur e ser vi c e port (B) and t he l ow-pr essur e
ser vi c e port (C), as s hown, f ol l owi ng t he equi pment
manuf act ur er ' s i nst r uct i ons.
2. Measur e t he amount of ref ri gerant oi l r emoved f r om
t he A/ C syst em after t he r ecover y pr oc ess i s
c ompl et ed. Be sur e to put t he s ame amount of new
ref ri gerant oi l back i nto t he A/ C syst em bef ore
c har gi ng.
S f st em Evacuat i on
Ai r condi t i oni ng ref ri gerant or l ubri cant v a p o r c a n
NOTE;
If acci dent al syst em di sc har ge oc c ur s, vent i l at e t he
wor k ar ea before r esumi ng ser vi c e.
manuf ac t ur er s.
Do not al l ow moi st ur e to cont ami nat e t he A/ C syst em
oi l . Moi st ur e i n t he oi l i s di ffi cult to r emove, and it c an
. damage t he A/C c ompr essor .
T..When an A/G syst em has been opened to t he
at mospher e, suc h as duri ng i nst al l at i on or r epai r , it
must be evacuat ed usi ng an R-134a ref ri gerant
r ecover y/r ecycl i ng/char gi ng st at i on. If t he syst em has
been open f or sever al days, t he r ecei ver /dr yer shoul d
be r epl ac ed, ref ri gerant oi l shoul d be dr ai ned and
r epl aced wi t h new oi l , and t he syst em shoul d be
evac uat ed f or sever al hour s.
21-80
2. Co n n ec t a n R-134a ref ri gerant
r ecover y/r ecycl i ng/char gi ng st at i on (A) t o t he
hi gh-pr essur e ser vi c e port (B) and t he l ow-pr essur e
manuf act ur er ' s i nst r uct i ons. Rec over t he ref ri gerant ,
if any, f r om t he A/ C syst em (see page 21-80).
3. Evac uat e t he syst em. The vac uum pump shoul d run
for a mi ni mum of 45 mi nut es to el i mi nat e al l moi st ur e
f rom t he syst em. When t he suct i on gauge r eads
- 93. 3 kPa ( - 700 mmHg, - 27. 6 i nHg) f or at l east 45
mi nut es, c l ose all val ves, and turn off t he vac uum
pump.
4. If t he suct i on gauge does not r each appr oxi mat el y
- 9 3 . 3 kPa ( - 700 mmHg, - 27. 6 i nHg) i n 15 mi nut es,
t her e i s probabl y a leak i n t he syst em. Part i al l y c har ge
t he s y s t em, and check f or l eaks (see page 21-82).
Syst em Oi/mrp^g
Ai r condi t i oni ng ref ri gerant or l ubri cant vapor can
NOTE:
wor k ar ea bef ore r esumi ng ser vi c e.
manuf act ur er s.
1. Connec t an R-134a ref ri gerant
r ecover y/r ecycl i ng/char gi ng st at i on (A) to t he
hi gh-pr essur e ser vi ce port (B) and t he l ow-pr essur e
manuf act ur er ' s i nst r uct i ons.
(cont' d)
21-81
Sf stem Charging (cont'd)
2. Rec over t he ref ri gerant i n t he A/ C syst em (see page
21-80).
3. Evac uat e t he syst em unti l t he suct i on gauge r eads
appr oxi mat el y - 9 3 . 3 kPa ( - 700 mmHg, - 27. 6 i nHg).
Chec k that t he syst em hol ds a vac uum for 15 mi nut es.
If t he A/ C syst em hol d vac uum f or 15 mi nut es, t he
syst em does not have a leak. Fi ni sh t he syst em
evacuat i on (see page 21-80), t hen go to st ep 4.
If t he A/ C syst em does not hol d vac uum f or
15 mi nut es, t he A/ C syst em has a leak. Fi nd and
repai r t he leak (see page 21-82).
4. Add t he s ame amount of new ref ri gerant oi l to t he
syst em t hat was r emoved dur i ng r ecover y. Us e onl y
DENS O ND-OIL 8 ref ri gerant oi l .
5. Char ge t he syst em wi t h t he speci f i ed amount of
R-134a ref ri gerant . Do not over c har ge the s y s t em; t he
A/ C c ompr essor wi l l be damaged.
Sel ec t t he appr opr i at e uni t s of measur e f or your
ref ri gerant char gi ng st at i on.
Ref r i ger ant Capac i t y:
400 t o 450 g
0.40 t o 0.45 kg
0.9 t o 1.0 lbs
14.1 to 15 J oz
6. Chec k f or ref ri gerant l eaks (see page 21-82).
7. Chec k t he syst em per f or mance (see page 21-89).
Refrigerant Leak Check
. Leak Detector YGK -H-10PM*
Leak Det ect or HLD-100*
Leak Detector TI FZX-1*
OPTIMAX Jr . A/ C Leak Det ect i on Kit TRP124893*
Pr ogr am; cal l 888-424-6857
NOTE:
If an acci dent al syst em di sc har ge oc c ur s, vent i l at e t he
Addi t i onal health and saf et y i nf ormat i on may be
obt ai ned f rom t he ref ri gerant and l ubri cant
manuf act ur er s.
Chec k t he syst em f or l eaks usi ng an R-134a ref ri gerant
leak det ect or wi t h an ac c ur ac y of 14 g (0.5 oz) per year
or better.
/i\(C^îrli(QJIM.I
Be caref ul when connect i ng ser vi c e equi pment .
Do not operat e t he leak det ect or near f l ammabl e
vapor s. Its sensor oper at es at hi gh t emper at ur es,
and coul d i gni te t he vapor s, resul t i ng in per sonal
i nj ury and/or damage to t he equi pment .
21-82
Leak Det ect or Usage Ti ps (Refer t o t he
Oper at or ' s Manual for compl et e operat i ng
i nst r uct i ons)
Posi t i on t he vehi c l e i n a wi nd-f r ee wor k ar ea. Thi s wi l l
ai d i n det ect i ng smal l l eaks.
When usi ng t he leak det ect or f or t he f i rst t i me, al l ow it
to war m up f or 2 mi nut es wi t h t he pr obe i n a cl ean
at mospher e. Thi s lets t he t emper at ur e sensor in t he
det ect or st abi l i ze.
The cal i brat i on c hec k shoul d be done i n t he " Sear c h
2" mode. Onc e t hat i s done, t he ot her c hec k modes do
not need cal i br at i ng.
When leak checki ng t hrough t he HVAC modul e drai n
hose, avoi d dr awi ng wat er i nto t he pr obe. Wat er c an
damage t he i nt ernal pump and sensor .
Avoi d c r easi ng t he f l exi bl e probe ext ensi on. Cr eases
c an rest ri ct ai r f l ow and gi ve f al se r eadi ngs.
Bec ause t he det ect or r ecal i br at es i tself f or ambi ent
gas es , it may be nec essar y to move t he det ect or away
f r om t he leak t o cl ear t he sensor . Onc e t he sensor has
c l ear ed, r echeck t he suspec t ed leak.
When r emovi ng t he cl ear pr obe t i p, be car ef ul not to
l ose t he f l ow bal l .
R-134a i s heavi er t han ai r; al ways c hec k bel ow and to
t he si des of all potenti al leak sour c es.
Hal ogen leak det ect or s are sensi t i ve to c hemi c al s:
wi ndshi el d washi ng sol ut i ons, sol vent s/c l eaner s, and
some vehi cl e adhesi ves. Keep t hese c hemi c al s out of
t he ar ea when doi ng leak det ect i on.
Fl uor escent Dye Usage Ti ps
Us e onl y Tr ac er -St i c k si ngl e dose f l uor escent dye .
c apsul es f r om Tracerli ne. Ot her dyes cont ai n
sol vent s that may cont ami nat e t he ref ri gerant oi l ,
l eadi ng to c omponent f ai l ur e.
Addi ng exc essi ve amount s of dye c an damage t he
c ompr essor .
PAG oi l i s wat er sol ubl e, so c ondensat i on on the
evapor at or cor e or t he ref ri gerant l i nes may was h t he
PAG oi l and f l uor escent dye away f r om t he act ual leak.
Condensat i on may al so car r y dye t hr ough t he HVAC
modul e dr ai n.
Af t er checki ng and repai ri ng l eaks, t hor oughl y c l ean
any r esi dual dye f r om t he ar eas wher e l eaks wer e
f ound. Use GL O- AWAY dye c l eaner , f r om Tracerli ne,
and hot wat er to r emove t he dye (f ol l ow t he
i nst r uct i ons on t he bottle). Resi dual dye st ai ns c an
c aus e mi sdi agnosi s of any f ut ure A/ C syst em l eaks.
If any ref ri gerant dye cont act s an ext eri or pai nt
sur f ac e, r emove it by doi ng t hi s:
- Car ef ul l y was h t he af f ect ed sur f ac es to r emove any
di rt, and to prevent pai nt sc r at c hi ng.
- Mi x wat er and i sopr opyl al cohol i n a 50/50 mi xt ure.
Soak a soft 100 per cent cotton t owel wi t h t he
wat er /al cohol mi xt ur e, and pl ace t he cl ot h on t he
af f ect ed ar eas to r emove t he dye.
- Af t er r emovi ng t he dye wi t h t he
wat er /al cohol -soaked cl ot h, car ef ul l y wash the
af f ect ed ar eas, and check that t her e i s no r emai ni ng
dye.
(cont' d)
21-83
Refrigerant Leak Check (cont 'd)
1. Connect anR-134a refrigerant
recovery/recy cling/charging station (A) to the
high-pressure service port (B) and the low-pressure
service port ( C) , as shown, following the equipment
manufacturer's instructions.
2. Rec over ref ri gerant f r om t he A/C syst em (see page
21-80), and evac uat e t he syst em { see page 21-80). If
t he syst em ac hi eves a vac uum of appr oxi mat el y
- 9 3 . 3 kPa { - 70 0 mmHg, - 27. 6 i nHg) in 15 mi nut es,
and hol ds t he vac uum f or 15 mi nut es, t hen t he syst em
does not have a leak at t hi s t i me. If t he syst em cannot
ac hi eve or hol d a v ac uum, cont i nue t he ref ri gerant
leak check.
3. Open t he hi gh pr essur e val ve to c har ge t he syst em to
t he speci f i ed capaci t y. Sel ec t t he appr opr i at e uni t s of
measur e f or your ref ri gerant char gi ng st at i on.
Ref r i ger ant Capac i t y:
400 t o 450 g
0.40 t o 0.45 kg
0.9 t o 1.0 l bs
14.1 t o 15.9 oz
21 - 84
i
4. Wi t h t he engi ne OFF, use a hal ogen leak det ect or fi rst to det ect t he l eak sour c e. Fol l ow a cont i nuous path i n or der to
ensur e that you wi l l not mi ss any possi bl e l eaks. Test the f ol l owi ng ar eas of t he syst em f or l eaks:
Possi bl e Leak Ar ea Di agnost i c Pr ocedur e wi t h
t he Leak Det ect or
Not es
Ser vi c e Port s Check t he ser vi c e port s
wi th t he det ect or.
If t he det ect or " sni f f s" a
leak, use f l uor escent dye
to conf i r m it.
When cappi ng t he ser vi c e por t s, ensur e that t he seal s on
t he port c aps ar e i n pl ace, and t hat t he c aps ar e ti ght. The
c aps ar e used as t he f i nal seal s i n t he syst em.
A/ C Condenser If the det ect or " sni f f s" a
leak, use f l uor escent dye to
conf i r m it.
Check f or j oi nt s or c onnec t i ons coat ed wi t h oi ly dust .
Check f or damaged and cor r oded ar eas.
& Check al l f i t t i ngs, c oupl i ngs, br azed/wel ded ar eas and
ar eas ar ound at t achment poi nt s.
Move t he pr obe sl owl y (1 i nc h/sec ond or l ess), and keep
it wi t hi n 1/4 i nch of t he c omponent bei ng c hec ked. Thi s
maxi mi zes t he c hanc e of det ect i ng a leak.
If you det ect a leak, bl ow c ompr essed ai r over t he ar ea,
t hen r echeck for l eaks. For l arge l eaks, cl ear i ng t he ar ea
wi t h c ompr essed ai r may hel p you pi npoi nt t he leak
sour c e.
A/ C Li nes (Low
pr essur e si de)
Wi ggl e t he rubber hoses
when checki ng c r i mped
met al ends.
If t he det ect or " sni f f s" a
leak, use f l uor escent dye
to conf i r m it.
Check all f i t t i ngs, c oupl i ngs, pr essur e swi t c hes,
br azed/wel ded ar eas, and ar eas ar ound at t achment
poi nt s on A/ C l i nes and c omponent s.
Check f or damaged and cor r oded ar eas.
Move t he probe sl owl y (1 i nc h/sec ond or l ess), and keep
it wi t hi n 1/4 i nch of t he component bei ng c hec ked. Thi s
maxi mi zes t he c hanc e of det ect i ng a leak.
5. Cl ose t he qui ck coupl er val ves, t hen di sc onnec t t he qui ck c oupl er s f r om t he vehi c l e ser vi c e port s.
6. At t ach t he uni ver sal connect set , f r om t he Opt i max J r . Leak Det ect i on Ki t, to t he ser vi c e val ve fi tti ng. Cl ose t he cont rol
val ve (the bl ack knob on t he connect set ).
7. At t ach t he char gi ng st at i on l ow pr essur e hose qui ck coupl er to t he ser vi c e val ve fi tti ng, and open t he qui ck coupl er
val ve. Evac uat e t he connect set usi ng t he char gi ng st at i on vac uum pump, t hen c l ose t he qui ck coupl er val ve.
8. Det ach t he uni ver sal connect set , and i nst al l a Tracer-Sti ck dye c apsul e bet ween t he connect set and t he ser vi c e
val ve fitting (see t he manuf act ur er ' s i nst r uct i ons f or mor e det ai l ).
9. At t ach t he qui ck coupl er on t he uni ver sal c onnec t set to t he l ow pr essur e ser vi c e port on t he vehi cl e. Open t he
char gi ng st at i on l ow pr essur e hose qui ck coupl er val ve, but do not open t he cont rol val ve.
10. St art t he engi ne, and set t he A/ C syst em to maxi mum cool i ng. Open t he cont rol val ve to let ref ri gerant and t he dye
ent er the A/ C syst em t hrough t he l ow pr essur e ser vi c e port. Cl ose t he cont rol val ve when t he Tr acer -St i ck" dye
c apsul e i s empt y.
(cont' d)
21 5
Refrigerant Leak Check (cont' d)
11. Run t he engi ne and A/ C syst em for 15 mi nut es to t hor oughl y ci r cul at e t he dye. Then shut t he engi ne off, and i nspect
t he f ol l owi ng ar eas of t he syst em f or l eaks:
NOTE:
Check for l eaks in a dark wor k ar ea, and use t he UV li ght and t he spec i al gl asses f r om t he leak check kit. Ot her UV
li ghts may not wor k wel l wi t h t he Tr ac er -St i c k* dye.
Smal l l eaks may t ake up to 1 week of vehi c l e oper at i on (wi th nor mal A/ C use) to bec ome vi si bl e.
Possi bl e Leak Ar ea Di agnost i c Pr ocedur e wi t h Fl uor esc ent Dye
Ser vi c e Port s If a leak i s f ound, r epl ace t he sc hr ader val ve on t he ser vi c e port.
A/ C Li nes Use a per manent mar ker pen to ci r cl e t he leak ar ea.
If a leak i s f ound, r emove and r epl ace t he A/ C li ne (see page 21-7).
A/ C Condenser If a leak i s f ound, r emove t he A/ C c ondenser (see page 21-77).
Det er mi ne whet her leak i s in t he A/ C c ondenser or t he r ecei ver /dr yer .
Use a per manent mar ker pen to ci r cl e t he leak ar ea.
Repl ace ei t her t he r ecei ver /dr yer (see page 21-79), or t he A/ C c ondenser (see page
21-77), dependi ng upon whi c h i s l eaki ng.
A/ C Compr essor sck f or l eaks at all of t he A/ C c ompr essor j oi nt s t h o cent er , A/ C
G O n . f i i c ûr front housing bol t s, and t he scr ol l bolts on t he back of the A/ C
c ompr essor .
If a leak i s f ound, use a per manent marker pen to ci r cl e t he leak ar ea.
If t he A/ C c ompr essor reli ef val ve appear s to be l eaki ng, det er mi ne whet her t he leak
i s c omi ng f r om t he reli ef val ve, or t he j oi nt bet ween t he A/ C c ompr essor c asi ng and
t he val ve. If t he leak i s f rom t he rel i ef val ve, check the A/ C syst em pr essur es, and refer
t o t he pr essur e t est t abl e in t he A/ C syst em t est (see page 21-89). If t he leak i s f r om t he
c asi ng/val ve j oi nt , r epl ace t he A/ C c ompr essor reli ef val ve (see page 21-77).
If t he leak i s c omi ng f r om t he suct i on hose and/or di schar ge hose fi tti ngs on t he A/ C
c ompr essor , c l ean t he A/ C fi tti ngs and r epl ace t he suc t i on/di sc har ge fitting O-r i ngs.
For all ot her A/ C c ompr essor l eaks, r emove and r epl ace t he A/ C c ompr essor (see
page 21-72).
Evapor at or o S: ar t checki ng for evapor at or l eaks by i l l umi nat i ng t he evapor at or drai n t ube ar ea.
If a leak i s f ound, r emove t he evapor at or cor e (see page 21-67).
Det er mi ne whet her leak i s f r om evapor at or or expansi on val ve.
Use per manent mar ker pen to ci r cl e leak ar ea.
Repl ace t he expansi on val ve (see page 21-69), or t he evapor at or cor e (see page
21-67), dependi ng upon whi c h i s l eaki ng.
21-86
> Ai r condi t i oni ng refrigerant or lubri cant vapor can
i rri tate your eyes, nose, or throat.
* Be caref ul when connect i ng ser vi ce equi pment .
Do not breathe refri gerant or vapor.
The A/C system noise check wi l l hel p you determi ne the
sour ce of abnormal A/C s ys tem noi se.
NOTE:
If an acci dent al syst em di sc har ge oc c ur s, vent i l at e the
work ar ea before r esumi ng ser vi c e.
Addi t i onal health and saf et y i nf ormat i on may be
manuf act ur er s.
Identify t he condi t i ons when t he noi se oc c ur s. The
weat her , t he vehi cl e speed, t he vehi cl e bei ng in gear
or in neut r al , the engi ne t emper at ur e, or ot her
condi t i ons may be f act or s in det ermi ni ng t he noi se
sour c e.
Do an A/ C syst em i nspect i on (see page 21-8), and
cor r ect any pr obl ems f ound pri or to di agnosi ng
abnor mal noi ses.
@ Abnor mal A/ C noi ses can be mi sl eadi ng. For exampl e,
a sound si mi l ar to a f ai l ed beari ng may be c aused by
l oose f ast ener s, l oose mount i ng br acket s, or a faulty
A/ C c ompr essor cl ut ch assembl y.
1. Inspect t he ai r i nlet gri lle in t he cowl c over f or debr i s.
If debr i s i s pr esent , r emove it.
2. Si t i nsi de t he vehi c l e, c l ose t he door s and wi ndows,
and turn t he i gni ti on swi t ch to ON (II), but do not start
the engi ne. Cyc l e t he HVAC syst em t hrough all bl ower
speeds and all ai r di st ri but i on modes to det er mi ne
wher e and when t he noi se oc c ur s.
3. Operat e t he bl ower at eac h speed wi t h t he engi ne and
A/ C off, and check for unusual noi ses and exc essi ve
vi br at i on. If noi se and/or vi brat i on ar e pr esent , do t he
f ol l owi ng c hec ks:
-1. If t he noi se or vi brati on oc c ur s onl y in a speci f i c
mode or set t i ng, t hen check t hese i t ems:
o Operat i on of the mode cont rol mot or, door , and
l i nkage.
Operat i on of the ai r mi x cont rol mot or (s), door (s),
and l i nkage.
Operat i on of the reci rcul at i on cont rol mot or,
door , and li nkage.
-2. If t here i s a squeaki ng or chi rpi ng noi se, but no
unusual vi br at i on, r epl ace t he bl ower mot or (see
page 21-67).
-3. Remove t he bl ower uni t (see page 21-65), and check
f or f orei gn mat eri al (l eaves or t wi gs, f or exampl e)
on t he bl ower motor and f an. If f orei gn mat er i al i s
pr esent , r emove it, and recheck for noi se. If you
don' t fi nd any f orei gn mat er i al , r emove t he bl ower
mot or (see page 21-67), and check t hese i t ems:
Check if t he f an bl ades ar e cr acked or br oken.
Make sur e the fan ret ai ner i s ti ght.
Inspect t he fan al i gnment on t he bl ower mot or
shaf t .
Repl ace t he bl ower mot or if any pr obl ems ar e
pr esent .
4. Set up t he vehi cl e for t he runni ng A/ C c hec ks:
Sel ect a qui et area for t est i ng.
Appl y t he parki ng brake.
Shi ft t he vehi cl e in Po r N (A/T), or in Neut ral (M/T).
St art the engi ne.
Set t he t emperat ure cont rol di al to Max Cool .
Set t he mode cont rol swi t ch to Vent .
Set t he f an control di al to mi ni mum (but not OFF).
Tur n t he A/ C swi t ch ON.
Swi t ch t he A/ C c ompr essor on and off sever al t i mes to
cl earl y i denti fy the sound duri ng A/ C c ompr essor
operat i on. Li st en to t he noi se whi l e t he A/ C
c ompr essor cl ut ch i s engaged and di sengaged. Probe
t he A/ C syst em wi th a st et hoscope to pi npoi nt t he
noi se.
NOTE: If t he noi se does not change when t he A/ C
c ompr essor cl ut ch engages or di sengages, t he noi se
may be c aused by an engi ne-r el at ed component .
Probe t he engi ne area wi t h a st et hoscope to pi npoi nt
the noi se.
(cont' d)
21-87
Heating/ A ir Condi ti oni ng
A/C Sf stem Noise Check (cont' d)
5. Tur n t he Igni ti on swi t ch to L OCK (0), and check t he
dr i ve belt f or exc essi ve wear , oi l cont ami nat i on,
i mpr oper r out i ng, or a faulty belt t ensi oner (see page
4-30). Cor r ect any pr obl ems f ound. St art t he engi ne,
run t he A/ C s y s t em, and c hec k if t he noi se i s c omi ng
f r om t he dr i ve belt, t he belt t ensi oner or any of t he
pul l eys. Repai r or repl ace any f ault y c omponent s.
6. Li st en f or noi ses comi ng f r om t he A/ C l i nes, t he A/ C
hos es , t he A/ C c ondenser , t he evapor at or , t he
r ecei ver -dr i er , or t he expansi on val ve, and c hec k
t hese i t ems:
Noi ses c aused by A/ C c omponent s t ouchi ng ot her
c omponent s or t he body. Rer out e or i nsul at e t he
A/ C component (s) as needed, and r echeck f or noi se.
L oose, damaged or exc essi vel y wor n A/ C
c omponent s or mount i ng har dwar e. Repai r or
r epl ace t he f aul t y component (s) or har dwar e, and
r echeck f or noi se.
A moani ng noi se c omi ng f r om t he A/ C suct i on l i ne.
If t her e i s a moani ng noi se, check t he syst em
ref ri gerant c har ge (see page 21-81). If t he
ref ri gerant c har ge i s OK, r epl ace t he r ecei ver /dr yer .
7. Chec k t he oper at i on of t he A/ C c ompr essor cl ut ch:
Make sur e A/ C c ompr essor cl ut ch engages wi t hout
sl i ppi ng. If t he cl ut ch does not engage, t r oubl eshoot
t he A/ C c ompr essor cl ut ch ci rcui t (see page 21-52).
If t he A/ C c ompr essor cl ut ch sl i ps, r epl ace t he
compl et e cl ut ch assembl y (see page 21-75).
Make sur e t he A/ C c ompr essor cl ut ch di sengages. If
t he cl ut ch does not di sengage, do t he A/ C
c ompr essor cl ut ch check (see page 21-73). If t he A/ C
c ompr essor cl ut ch i s OK, r epl ace t he A/ C
c ompr essor (see page 21-72).
Make sur e t he A/ C c ompr essor cl ut ch c yc l es
nor mal l y. If t he A/ C c ompr essor cl ut ch i s cycl i ng
r api dl y, t he A/ C syst em i s pr obabl y l ow on
ref ri gerant due to a leak. Do t he ref ri gerant leak
check (see page 21-82). If t he ref ri gerant c har ge i s
OK , and t her e ar e no l eaks, t r oubl eshoot t he A/ C
c ompr essor cl ut ch ci rcui t .
8. Li st en wi t h a st et hoscope for noi ses c omi ng f r om t he
A/ C c ompr essor , and check t hese i t ems:
The noi se c hanges when t he A/ C c ompr essor cl ut ch
di sengages. If t he noi se does not c hange when t he
A/ C c ompr essor di sengages, t he noi se may be
c aused by an engi ne-r el at ed component . Pr obe t he
engi ne ar ea wi t h a st et hoscope to pi npoi nt t he
noi se.
The A/ C syst em operat i ng pr essur es ar e nor mal . If
t he syst em pr essur es are abnor mal , t r oubl eshoot
t he pr obl em usi ng t he pr essur e t est t abl e in t he A/ C
syst em t est (see page 21-89). Cor r ect t he
pr essur e-r el at ed pr obl em(s), and recheck f or noi se.
The A/ C c ompr essor hose c onnec t i ons, mount i ng
br acket s, and f ast ener s ar e in good condi t i on. If any
of t hese c omponent s ar e l oose, damaged, or
exc essi vel y wor n, repai r or r epl ace t he f aul t y
c omponent (s), and r echeck f or noi se. If t hese
c omponent s ar e in good condi t i on, and t he noi se i s
sti ll pr esent , r epl ace t he A/ C c ompr essor (see page
21-72).
2
V; (coco!
I -oo
A/C Sf stem Test
Performance Tes t
Ai r condi t i oni ng ref ri gerant or l ubri cant vapor can
i rri tate your ey es , nose, or throat.
Be caref ul when connect i ng ser vi ce equi pment .
The per f or mance t est wi l l hel p det er mi ne if t he A/ C
syst em i s operat i ng wi t hi n speci f i cat i ons.
NOTE:
manuf act ur er s.
1. Do t he A/ C syst em i nspect i on (see page 21-8), and
cor r ect any pr obl em f ound.
2. Connec t an R-134a ref ri gerant
r ecover y/r ecycl i ng/char gi ng st at i on to t he
hi gh-pr essur e ser vi c e port and t he l ow-pr essur e
ser vi c e port, f ol l owi ng t he equi pment manuf act ur er ' s
i nst r uct i ons.
3. Det er mi ne t he rel at i ve humi di t y and ai r t emper at ur e.
4. Open t he gl ove box. Remove t he damper and t he
gl ove box st op on eac h si de, t hen let t he gl ove box
hang down (see page 20-174).
5. Insert a t her momet er (A) in t he cent er vent .
6. Pl ace anot her t her momet er (B) near t he bl ower uni t ' s
reci rcul at i on i nlet duct .
7. Test condi t i ons:
Move t he vehi cl e out of di rect sunl i ght and let it cool
down to t he sur r oundi ng (ambi ent ) t emper at ur e. If
nec essar y, wash t he vehi c l e to cool it down mor e
qui ckl y.
The ambi ent t emper at ur e must be at l east 60 F
(16 C).
Open hood.
Open front door s.
Set t he t emper at ur e cont rol di al to Max Cool , t he
mode cont rol swi t ch to Vent , and t he reci rcul at i on
cont rol swi t ch to Reci r cul at e.
Tur n t he A/ C swi t ch ON and t he f an swi t ch to Max.
Run t he engi ne at 1,500 rpm.
No dri ver or passenger s in t he vehi c l e.
8. Inspect t he A/ C c omponent s for t he f ol l owi ng
condi t i ons:
A/ C c ompr essor cl ut ch not engaged.
Abnor mal f rost ar eas.
Unusual noi ses.
If you obser ve any of t hese condi t i ons, refer to t he
sympt om t r oubl eshoot i ng.
9. Af t er runni ng t he ai r condi t i oni ng for 10 mi nut es
under t he above t est condi t i ons, read t he del i ver y
t emper at ur e f rom t he t her momet er in t he cent er vent ,
t he i ntake t emper at ur e near t he bl ower uni t , and t he
hi gh and l ow syst em pr essur e f r om t he A/ C gauges.
cont ' d)
21-89
A/C Sf stem Test (cont' d)
10. To compl et e t he vent (del i ver y)/ambi ent ai r (i ntake) t emper at ur e chart :
Mark t he vent (del i very) t emper at ur e on t he vert i cal l i ne.
Mark t he ambi ent ai r (i ntake) t emper at ur e on the bot t om l i ne.
Dr aw a vert i cal li ne f rom t he ambi ent ai r (i ntake) t emper at ur e mark.
Dr aw a hori zont al li ne f r om t he vent (del i very) t emper at ur e mar k unti l it i nt er sect s t he ver t i cal l i ne.
NOTE: The vent t emper at ur e and t he ambi ent ai r t emper at ur e shoul d i nt ersect in t he shaded ar ea. Any
measur ement s out si de t he ar ea may i ndi cat e t he need f or f urt her i nspect i on.
Ambi ent Ai r (Int ake) Temper at ur e v s . Vent (Del i ver y) Temper at ur e
AMBI ENT AIR (INTAKE) TEMPERATURE
21-90
11. To compl et e t he hi gh si de (di schar ge) pr essur e/ambi ent ai r (i ntake) t emper at ur e char t :
Mark t he hi gh si de (di schar ge) pr essur e on t he vert i cal l i ne.
Mark t he ambi ent ai r (i ntake) t emper at ur e on t he bottom l i ne.
Dr aw a vert i cal l i ne f rom t he ambi ent ai r (i ntake) t emper at ur e mark.
Dr aw a hori zont al li ne f r om t he hi gh si de (di schar ge) pr essur e mar k until it i nt er sect s t he ver t i cal l i ne.
NOTE: The hi gh si de pr essur e and t he ambi ent ai r t emper at ur e shoul d i nt er sect in t he shaded ar ea. Any
Ambi ent Ai r (Int ake) Temper at ur e v s . Hi gh Si de (Di schar ge) Pr essur e
AMBI ENT AIR (INTAKE) TEMPERATURE
(cont ' d)
21-91
MC S\miem Test i%&ntfd}
12. To compl et e t he l ow si de (suct i on) pr essur e/ambi ent ai r (i ntake) t emper at ur e chart :
Mark t he l ow si de (suct i on) pr essur e al ong t he vert i cal l i ne.
Mark t he ambi ent ai r (i ntake) t emper at ur e al ong t he bottom l i ne.
Dr aw a vert i cal li ne f r om t he ambi ent ai r (i ntake) t emper at ur e mark.
Dr aw a hori zont al li ne f r om t he l ow si de (suct i on) pr essur e mark unti l it i nt er sect s t he ver t i cal line.
NOTE: The l ow si de pr essur e and t he ambi ent ai r t emper at ur e shoul d i nt er sect in the shaded area. Any
Ambi ent Ai r (Int ake) Temper at ur e v s . L o w Si de (Suc t i on) Pr essur e
L OW S I DE
(SUCTION)
PRE S S URE
p s i
(kPa)
55
(379)
5 0
(345)
45
(310)
4 0
(276)
35
(241)
3 0
(207)
25
(172)
20
(138)
15
(103)
10
(69)
HUMIDITY
LEVEL
80%
30%
65
(18)
70
(21)
75
24)
80
(27)
85
(29)
90
(32)
95
(35)
100
(38)
105 F
(41) (C)
AMBI ENT AI R (I NTAKE) TEMPERATURE
Pr essur e Test
Tes t r esul t s Rel at ed s y mpt oms Pr obabl e c aus e Remedy
Suc t i on and
di sc har ge
pr essur es ar e
nor mal
War m ai r f r om t he vent s. The A/ C s y s t em c ont ai ns t oo
muc h r ef r i ger ant oi l
The ai r mi x door i s not oper at i ng
pr oper l y
Rec over ref ri gerant (see
page 21-80), and evac uat e
t he s y s t em (see page
21-80). Adj ust t he amount
of oi l i n t he s y s t em, t hen
r ec har ge t he s y s t em (see
page21-81).
Chec k ai r mi x door
oper at i on (see page
21-59), and r epai r as
needed.
Suc t i on and
di sc har ge
pr essur es ar e
r oughl y equal and
st eady
The suc t i on and di sc har ge pr essur es
equal i ze when t he engi ne i s r evved.
The A/ C c ompr es s or cl ut ch or t he
dr i ve belt i s sl i ppi ng, or t he A/ C
c ompr es s or shaf t seal i s l eaki ng
Chec k whet her t he A/ C
c ompr es s or cl ut ch or t he
dr i ve belt i s sl i ppi ng.
If t he dr i ve belt i s sl i ppi ng,
r epl ace t he dr i ve belt (see
page 4-30).
If t he A/ C c ompr essor
cl ut ch i s sl i ppi ng, r epl ace it
(see page 21-75).
Chec k t he A/ C c ompr essor
shaf t seal . If i t ' s l eaki ng,
r epl ace t he A/ C
c ompr es s or (see page
21-72).
Suc t i on and
di sc har ge
pr essur es ar e
r oughl y equal but
f l uct uat e
Suc t i on and di sc har ge pr essur es
f l uct uat e whi l e r unni ng. Pr essur es
equal i ze as soon as t he A/ C
c ompr essor di sengages.
The A/ C c ompr es s or di sc har ge
val ve or t he A/ C c ompr es s or
gasket i s f aul t y
Repl ac e t he A/ C c ompr essor
(see page 21-72).
Suc t i on and
di sc har ge
pr essur es ar e
r oughl y equal and
abnor mal l y l ow
The suct i on and di sc har ge pr essur es
do not c hange dur i ng cont i nued
oper at i on.
The A/ C s y s t em i s under c har ged Rec over ref ri gerant (see
page 21-80), t hen do t he
ref ri gerant leak c hec k (see
page 21-82). Repai r any
l eaks, t hen r echar ge t he
s y s t em (see page 21-81).
Suc t i on and
di sc har ge
pr essur es ar e
abnor mal l y hi gh,
but nor mal i ze when
t he A/ C c ondenser
i s c ool ed
The suc t i on pr essur e dec r eases when
c ool wat er i s spr ayed on t he A/ C
c ondenser .
The A/ C s y s t em i s over c har ged Rec over ref ri gerant (see
page 21-80), evac uat e t he
syst em (see page 21-80), and
r echar ge t he syst em to
spec i f i c at i ons (see page
21-81).
Suc t i on and
di sc har ge
pr essur es ar e
and ref ri gerant l i ne
t emper at ur es ar e
abnor mal
The hi gh pr essur e vapor l i ne to t he
A/ C c ondenser i s t oo hot.
The l ow pr essur e l i qui d l i ne f r om
t he expansi on val ve i s not c ol d.
Ther e i s an abr upt t emper at ur e dr op
al ong a r ef r i ger ant l i ne, or i n t he A/ C
c ondenser or evapor at or .
The A/ C s y s t em ref ri gerant f l ow i s
r est r i ct ed
Repl ac e t he rest ri ct ed l i ne or
c omponent .
Suc t i on and
di sc har ge
pr essur es ar e
but dr op r api dl y
when t he A/ C
c ompr es s or
di sengages
Af t er st oppi ng t he A/ C c ompr essor ,
t he di sc har ge pr essur e qui ckl y
dr ops about 196 kPa (28 psi ), t hen
f al l s gr adual l y.
The i nput and out put t emper at ur es
at t he expansi on val ve ar e not
si mi l ar .
Ther e i s ex c es s ai r i n t he A/ C
s y s t em
Rec over ref ri gerant (see
page 21-80), evac uat e t he
syst em (see page 21-80), and
r ec har ge t he syst em (see
page 21-81).
Suc t i on and
di sc har ge
pr essur es ar e
and t her e i s li ttle or
no ai r f l ow t hr ough
t he A/ C c ondenser
The A/ C c ondenser and/or
radi at or f i ns ar e c l ogged
The A/ C c ondenser f i ns ar e
damaged
The A/ C c ondenser and/or
radi at or f ans ar e not wor ki ng
pr oper l y
Cl ean debr i s f r om t he A/ C
c ondenser and/or radi at or
f i ns.
Comb t he A/ C c ondenser
f i ns to repai r any damage.
Tr oubl eshoot t he A/ C
c ondenser f an and/or t he
r adi at or f an ci r cui t (s).
(cont ' d)
21-93
A/C System Test (cont'd)
Test results Related symptoms Probable cause Remedy
The suction
pressure is high
and the discharge
pressure is low,
Both pressures are
steady
The liquid line temperature is
similar on both sides of expansion
valve.
System pressures do not vary at a
steady engine speed.
The expansion valve is stuck open Replace the expansion valve
(see page 21-69).
The suction
pressure is low, the
discharge pressure
is high, and the
refrigerant
temperature
changes
abnormally
somewhere in the
system
The high pressure liquid line going
into the expansion valve is cold.
There is an abrupt temperature drop
in the line between the A/C
compressor and the A/C condenser,
or in the line between the A/C
condenser and the expansion valve.
The A/C system refrigerant flow is
restricted
Replace the restricted line or
component.
The suction
pressure is high,
the discharge
pressure is low, and
there are particle
contaminants in the
refrigerant lines
The expansion valve and/or the A/C
compressor discharge hose are
contaminated with metal flakes or.
desiccant particles.
The A/C compressor is
malfunctioning
Replace the A/C compressor
(see page 21-72). If the
system is contaminated with
desiccant, replace the
receiver/dryer (see page
21-79).
The suction
pressure is high,
the discharge
pressure is low, and
the pressures
quickly change
when the A/C
disengages
The discharge and suction pressures
equalize soon after the A/C
compressor stops.
The A/C compressor seal is faulty Replace the A/C compressor
(see page 21-72).
Suction and
discharge
pressures are both
low and none of the
refrigerant lines are
cold
There is no frost on the expansion
valve, and the low-pressure liquid line
is not cold.
The A/C system has a leak (very
low refrigerant charge)
Do the refrigerant leak check
(see page 21-82), repair any
leaks, and recharge the A/C
system (see page 21-81).
Suction and
discharge
pressures are both
low, and the
expansion valve or
the suction line is
abnormally cold
The temperature around the
expansion valve is too low
compared to the temperature
around the receiver/ dryer.
The low pressure (suction) hose/line
is cooler than the evaporator.
The discharge hose/line is
clogged or kinked, which is
restricting refrigerant flow
The suction hose/line is clogged
or kinked, which is restricting
refrigerant flow
Repair or replace the faulty
A/C line (see page 21-7).
Initially, the suction
and discharge
pressure are
normal, but both
become
abnormally low
during operation
During extended operation, t he air
fl ow from the vents decreases.
The evaporator is freezing up Run the fan with A/C
compressor off to warm the
evaporator, then test the
evaporator temperature
sensor (see page 21-58). If
necessary, replace the
evaporator temperature
sensor.
Suction and
discharge
pressures are both
low and there are
abnormal
temperature
changes at the
expansion valve
During extended operation, warm
air comes out of the vents, the
suction pressure decreases, and
heavy frost occurs on the low
pressure liquid line.
The low pressure liquid line is cold
at the expansion valve, but warm
after the valve.
There is frost on the expansion
valve.
The expansion valve is stuck
closed
Replace the expansion
valve (see page 21-69), and
the receiver/dryer (see
page 21-79).
Check the old expansion
valve for contamination. If
contaminants are found,
replace the component
that caused the
contamination.
The discharge
suction pressure is
extremely low, and
the expansion valve
outlet is abnormally
warm
valve outlet, and the liquid line
temperature changes significantly
across the expansion valve.
There is excessive moisture in the
A/C system
Recover refrigerant (see
page 21-80), then replace the
21-79). Evacuate the system
(see page 21-80), and
recharge the A/C system (see
page 21-81).
21-94
Test results Related symptoms Probable cause Remedy
The discharge
suction pressure is
extremely low, and
the suction line is
abnormally cold
There is frost on the line from the
evaporator to the A/C compressor.
The evaporator is internally
contaminated or plugged
evaporator. Evacuate the
system (see page 21-80). and
page 21-81).
The discharge
suction pressure is
extremely low, and
the refrigerant
temperature
doesn't change
going through the
expansion valve
valve, and the low pressure liquid
line is not cold.
The liquid line temperatures are
similar on both sides of expansion
valve.
The expansion valve is faulty Replace the expansion valve
(see page 21-69).
The discharge
suction pressure is
extremely low, and
the expansion valve
is abnormally cold
There is frost on the expansion valve. Excessive moisture in the system
is freezing the expansion valve
page 21-80), the replace the
receiver/dryer. Evacuate the
system (see page 21-80), and
page 21-81).
The discharge
suction pressure is
extremely low, and
the high pressure
liquid line is
abnormally cold
There is frost on the line from the
receiver/dryer to the expansion valve.
The receiver/dryer is clogged Recover refrigerant (see
21-79). Evacuate the system
(see page 21-80). and
page 21-81).
Discharge pressure
is so high that the
A/C compressor
relief valve has
opened. Suction
pressure is normal
or below normal
The temperature drop between the
A/C condenser inlet and outlet is less
than
30 F ( - 1 C) or more than 60 F (15 C)
The A/C condenser or
receiver/dryer is restricted
Replace the restricted
component, either the A/C
condenser (see page 21-77)
or the receiver/dryer (see
page 21-79).
Discharge pressure
is so high that the
A/C compressor
relief valve has
opened. Suction
pressure is also
above normal
No evidence of restricted refrigerant
flow.
The A/C compressor clutch stays
engaged with the A/C switch off.
The A/C compressor clutch circuit
is always on (energized), or the
A/C compressor clutch is
mechanically jammed.
Do the A/C compressor
clutch circuit
troubleshooting (see page
21-52), and repair the
problem with the circuit.
If the A/C compressor
clutch circuit is OK , do the
A/C compressor clutch
check (see page 21-73),
and repair as needed.
21-95
Cl i mat e Control
SERVICE VALVE
( L OW- PRES S URE SI DE)
A/C COMPRESSOR
Clutch Check, page 21-73
Clutch Overhaul, page 21-75
Relief Valve Replacement, page 21-77
2s 1 *"
(cont'd)
21-97
Cl i mat e Control
Component Location index (cont'd)
' 10 mo d el
. BLOWER MOTOR RELAY
, page 22-93
t A / C COMPRES S OR CL UTCH REL AY
Test, page 22-93
, A/C CONDENSER F AN RELAY
(Bui l t i nt o t he r el ay ci r cui t boar d)
Test, page 22-93
. RADI ATOR FAN REL AY
(Bui l t i nt o t he r el ay ci r cui t boar d)
Test, page 22-93
, UNDER-HOOD FUS E / RE L A Y BOX
FAN CONTROL REL AY
(Bui l t i nt o t he r el ay ci r cui t board)
Test, page 22-93
ECM/ PCM
RADIATOR FAN
OUTS I DE AIR TEMPERATURE S E NS OR
Test, page 21-185
21-98
Wi t h navi gat i on
, EVAPORATOR CORE
' (Located in the heater unit)
EXPANS I ON VAL VE
MODE CONTROL MOTOR
Test, page 21-188
RECI RCUL ATI ON
CONTROL MOTOR
Test, page 21-189
DUS T AND
POL L EN FIL TER
BL OWER UNIT
DRI VER' S AIR MIX
CONTROL MOTOR
Test, page 21-59
PAS S E NGE R' S CL I MATE
CONTROL SWI TCH
AUDIO-HVAC
S UBDI S PL AY UNIT
EVAPORATOR
TEMPERATURE
S ENS OR
Test, page 21-58
DRI VER' S CL IMATE
CONTROL SWITCH
Bulb Replacement, page 21-191
CL I MATE CONTROL UNIT
(c ont ' d)
21-99
Cl i mat e Control
Component Location index (cont' d)
Wi t hout navi gat i on
DRIVER'S AIR MIX
CONTROL MOTOR
Test page 21-59
EXPANSION VALVE
RECIRCULATION
CONTROL MOTOR
Test, page 21-189
/BLOWER UNIT
DUST AND
POLLEN FILTER
MODE CONTROL MOTOR
Test, page 21-188
AUDIO-HVAC
DISPLAY UNIT
PASSENGER'S AIR MI X
CONTROL MOTOR
Test, page 21-187
Replacement, page 21-188 CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT
IN-CAR
TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Test, page 21-184
EVAPORATOR
TEMPERATURE
SENSOR
Test, page 21-58
21-100
How to Chec k for DTCs wi t h t he HDS
Ther e ar e t hr ee met hods used to check f or DTCs . The r ec ommended met hod i s to use t he Honda Di agnost i c Syst em
(HDS) wi t h t he appropri at e sof t war e, pl ugged i nto t he data link connect or (DLC).
The sec ond met hod i s to run t he sel f -di agnost i c f unct i on bui lt into t he cl i mat e cont rol uni t.
The t hi rd met hod i s t o use t he B-CAN syst em di agnost i c t est mode A (see page 22-134).
1. Make sur e t he i gni ti on swi t ch t o L OCK (0).
2. Connect t he HDS to t he dat a link connect or (DLC) (A) l ocat ed under t he dr i ver ' s si de of t he dashboar d.
A
4. Make sur e t he HDS c ommuni c at es wi t h t he vehi c l e and t he cl i mat e cont rol uni t. If it doesn' t , t r oubl eshoot the DL C
ci rcui t (see page 11-181).
5. Sel ec t HVAC/CLIMATE CONTROL in t he BODY EL ECTRI CAL menu.
6. Sel ec t DTCs i n t he HVAC/ CL IMATE CONTROL menu.
7. Check for DTCs. If any DTCs ar e i ndi cat ed, wr i t e down t he DTCs , t hen go to t he i ndi cat ed DTC t r oubl eshoot i ng. If no
DTCs ar e i ndi cat ed, ref er to sympt om t r oubl eshoot i ng.
NOTE:
After t r oubl eshoot i ng, cl ear t he DTCs wi t h t he HDS.
For speci f i c oper at i ons, refer t o t he user ' s manual that c ame wi t h t he HDS.
(cont' d)
21-101
Cl i mat e Control
How to Use the Self-diagnostic Function wi t h the HDS
1. Make sur e t he i gni ti on swi t c h to L OCK (0).
2. Connec t t he HDS to t he dat a link connect or (DLC).
4. Make sur e t he HDS c ommuni c at es wi t h t he vehi c l e and t he cl i mat e cont rol uni t. If it doesn' t , t r oubl eshoot t he DL C
ci rcui t (see page 11-181).
5. Sel ec t HVAC/ CL IMATE CONTROL in t he BODY EL ECTRI CAL menu.
6. Sel ec t INSPECTION i n t he HVAC/ CL IMATE CONTROL menu.
7. Sel ec t CL IMATE CONTROL S E L F TE S T i n t he INSPECTION menu.
8. Chec k l or DTCs. If any DTCs ar e i ndi cat ed, wr i t e down t he DTCs , t hen go to t he i ndi cat ed DTC t r oubl eshoot i ng.
NOTE:
Af t er t r oubl eshoot i ng, c l ear t he DTCs wi t h t he HDS.
For speci f i c oper at i ons, refer to t he user ' s manual t hat c ame wi t h t he HDS.
21-102
How t o Use t he Sel f -di agnost i c Funct i on wi t hout t he HDS
The cl i mat e cont rol uni t has a sel f -di agnost i c f unct i on. To run t he sel f -di agnost i c f unct i on, do t he f ol l owi ng:
1, Turn t he i gni ti on swi t ch to L OCK (0), and t hen to ON (II).
2. Pr ess and hol d t he OFF but t on, t hen wi t hi n 10 sec onds pr ess and r el ease t he REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER/ MI RROR
DEFOGGER button f i ve t i mes. Rel ease t he OFF button; t hen t he sel f -di agnost i c begi ns.
NOTE:
The bl ower motor wi l l run at var i ous speeds r egar dl ess of what t he panel i s di spl ayi ng.
If t here i s a probl em wi t h t he syst em, t he t emper at ur e i ndi cat or f l ashes 88, and t he A/ C ON i ndi cat or or t he AUTO
i ndi cat or (or both) al so f l ashes. Segment s in t he t emper at ur e i ndi cat or t hen i ndi cat e whi c h DTCs ar e pr esent .
If t here i s mor e t han one DTC, t hey are di spl ayed one at a t i me in sequenc e f ol l owed by a pause (all t he di spl ay
i ndi cat or segment s i l l umi nat e) bet ween t he DTCs.
If t here ar e no pr obl ems det ect ed, t he segment s wi ll not i l l umi nat e, and t he syst em wi l l appear to be t ur ned off.
' 08-09 mo d e l s
AUDI O-HVAC S UBDI S PL AY (Wi t h navi gat i on)
^ AUTO INDICATOR
CL I MATE CONTROL UNIT
(Wi t hout navi gat i on)
(cont' d)
21-103
Cl i mat e Control
Genera!Troubl eshoot i ng Informati on (cont' d)
' 10 mode!
AUDI O-HVAC S UBDI S PL AY (Wi t h navi gat i on)
A/C ON OFF FULL tsSE^- . "*T '
TEMPERATURE INDICATOR
AUTO INDICATOR
TtMPERATURE INDICATOR
AUTO INDICATOR
A/C ON INDICATOR
DRIVER'S CLIMATE
CONTROL SWITCH
(Wi t h navi gat i on)
REAR WI NDOW DEF OGGER/
MIRROR DEF OGGER B UTTON
A / C
M O D E C ^J
1 A J
a a a ... <L _ 1a
a
A UT O
88
S Y N C
=ROMT
4- 4^
MODE
A / C
REAR
PA S S E NGE R' S
CL I MATE
CONTROL
SWI TCH
CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT
(Wi t hout navi gat i on)
Canc el i ng t he Sel f -di agnost i c Func t i on
3. Tur n t he i gni ti on swi t ch to L OCK (0) to c anc el t he sel f -di agnost i c f unct i on. Af t er compl et i ng repai r wor k, run t he
sel f -di agnost i c f unct i on agai n to make sur e that t her e ar e no ot her DTCs.
21-104
Checki ng for DTCs
The t emper at ur e di spl ay i ndi cat es si ngl e or mul t i pl e DTCs. If no DTCs ar e pr esent , t he i ndi cat or r emai ns bl ank.
NOTE: If i ndi cat or segment s A, C, D, E, G, K, and t he AUTO i ndi cat or or t he A/ C ON i ndi cat or, ar e on at t he s ame t i me,
t her e may be an open in t he cl i mat e cont rol uni t gr ound c i r c ui t
DRIVER'S TEMPERATURE INDICATOR AUTO INDICATOR A/ C ON INDICATOR
C E
j
nu-
l l D
L J
UTO A/C ON
H
DTC (Dri ver' s
Temper at ur e Indi cat or
Segment , AUTO, and
A / C Indi cat or)
Det ect i on It em
A and AUTO An open in t he i n-car t emper at ur e sensor ci rcui t (see page 21-141)
B and AUTO A shor t i n t he i n-car t emper at ur e sensor ci rcui t (see page 21-143)
C and AUTO An open in t he out si de ai r t emper at ur e sensor ci rcui t (see page 21-144)
D and AUTO A shor t in t he out si de ai r t emper at ur e sensor ci rcui t (see page 21-146)
E and AUTO An open in t he sunl i ght sensor ci rcui t (see page 21-147)
F and AUTO A shor t i n t he sunl i ght sensor ci rcui t (see page 21-149)
G and AUTO An open in t he evapor at or t emper at ur e sensor ci rcui t (see page 21-150)
H and AUTO A shor t in t he evapor at or t emper at ur e sensor ci rcui t (see page 21 -151)
A and A/ C ON An open in t he dr i ver ' s ai r mi x cont rol mot or ci rcui t (see page 21-152)
B and A/ C ON A shor t in t he dr i ver ' s ai r mi x cont rol mot or ci rcui t (see page 21-154)
C and A/ C ON A pr obl em i n t he dr i ver ' s ai r mi x cont rol l i nkage, door , or mot or ci rcui t (see page 21-157)
D and A/ C ON An open in t he passenger ' s ai r mi x cont rol mot or ci rcui t (see page 21-158)
E and A/ C ON A shor t i n t he passenger ' s ai r mi x cont rol mot or ci rcui t (see page 21-160)
F and A/ C ON A pr obl em in t he passenger ' s ai r mi x cont rol l i nkage, door , or mot or ci rcui t (see page
21-163)
G and A/ C ON An open in t he mode cont rol mot or ci rcui t (see page 21-134)
H and A/ C ON A shor t i n t he mode cont rol mot or ci rcui t (see page 21-135)
J and A/ C ON A pr obl em in t he mode cont rol l i nkage, door s, or mot or ci rcui t (see page 21-164)
K and A/ C ON An open in t he reci rcul at i on cont rol mot or ci rcui t (see page 21-171)
L and A/ C ON A shor t i n t he reci rcul at i on cont rol mot or ci rcui t (see page 21-138)
M and A/ C ON A pr obl em i n t he reci rcul at i on cont rol l i nkage, door , or mot or ci rcui t (see page 21-169)
N and A/ C ON A pr obl em i n t he bl ower mot or ci rcui t (see page 21-166)
(cont' d)
21-105
Cl i mat e Control
Gener al Troubl eshoot i ng Informati on (cont' d)
DTC (Dr i ver 's
Temper at ur e Indi cat or
Segment )
Det ect i on It em
A Cl i mat e cont rol uni t i nt ernal er r or (see page 21-132)
B Out put shaft (count ershaf t ) speed sensor si gnal error. Chec k f or DTCs in t he A/ T syst em
and go to t he i ndi cat ed DTCs t r oubl eshoot i ng. If no DTCs are f ound, r epl ace t he cl i mat e
cont rol unit (see page 21-190)
C Engi ne cool ant t emper at ur e (ECT) s ens or si gnal er r or . Chec k f or DTCs i n t he PGM-FI
syst em and go to t he i ndi cat ed DT Cs t r oubl eshoot i ng. If no DTCs ar e f ound, r epl ace t he
cl i mat e cont rol uni t (see page 21-190)
D Communi c at i on bus l i ne er r or (bus-off) (see page 22-148)
21-106
Di spl ayi ng Sensor Input s at t he Cl i mat e Cont rol Uni t
The cl i mat e cont rol uni t has a mode t hat di spl ays sensor i nput s it r ec ei ves. Thi s mode s hows you what t he cl i mat e
cont rol uni t i s r ecei vi ng f rom eac h of t he sensor s, one at a t i me, and it c an hel p you det er mi ne if a sensor i s faulty.
Chec k t hese i t ems before usi ng t he sensor i nput di spl ay mode
1 _ Tur n t he i gni ti on swi t ch to ON (II), and check the reci rcul at i on door f unct i on; pr ess t he reci rcul at i on button to swi t c h
f r om FRES H to RECI RC. The ai r vol ume and sound shoul d c hange sl i ght l y.
2. Set t he t emper at ur e usi ng t he dr i ver ' s cont rol swi t ch to t he desi r ed t est t emper at ur e:
Pr ess AUTO button on, t he L ED t ur ns on.
' 08-09 model s; Pr ess DUAL button off, t he L ED t ur ns off.
'10 model ; Pr ess S YNC button off, t he L ED t urns off.
When sel ect i ng t he t est t emper at ur e, note t hese i t ems:
" L o " t emper at ur e set t i ng wi l l def aul t to MAX COOL , VENT, and RECI RC.
" Hi " t emper at ur e set t i ng wi l l def aul t to MAX HOT, FL OOR, and FRES H.
58 t hr ough 86 F set t i ngs wi l l use t he aut omat i c cl i mat e cont rol l ogi c.
To run t he sensor i nput di spl ay mode, f ol l ow t hese st eps
2. Pr ess and hol d both t he AUTO and RECIRCUL ATION CONTROL but t ons, t hen st art t he engi ne.
3. Af t er t he engi ne st ar t s, r el ease both but t ons. The audi o-HVAC di spl ay wi l l f l ash t he sensor number , and t hen t he
val ue f or that sensor . Recor d t he val ue di spl ayed.
4. To advanc e to t he next sensor , pr ess t he REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER button.
NOTE:
The sensor val ues wi l l be di spl ayed i n degr ees Cel si us (C) or an al phanumer i c c ode. Use t he char t to conver t t he
val ue to degr ees Fahr enhei t (F).
If t he sensor val ue di spl ays " E r " t hi s i ndi cat es t her e i s an open or shor t in t he ci rcui t or sensor . Check for DTCs
usi ng t he HDS, or use t he cl i mat e cont rol sel f -di agnost i c f unct i on.
If nec essar y, c ompar e t he sensor i nput di spl ay to a known-good vehi c l e under t he s ame t est condi t i ons.
If t he sensor i s out of t he nor mal r ange, refer to t he sensor t est or subst i t ut e a known-good sensor , and recheck.
Sens or It em Di spl ayed Val ue
1 Mode Posi t i oni ng %
2 In-car Temper at ur e C
3 Out si de Ai r Temper at ur e C
4 Sol ar Radi at i on Sens or Val ue: Dark = 00, Fl ashl i ght = 04, Cl oudy = 10, Sunny = 65 10kc al /m
2
-h
5 Evapor at or Outlet Ai r Temper at ur e C
6 Dr i ver ' s Ai r Mi x Openi ng (Low val ue i ndi cat es cool er ai r di st ri but i on, hi gher
val ue i ndi cat es war mer ai r di st ri but i on)
% of openi ng
7 Passenger ' s Ai r Mi x Openi ng (Low val ue i ndi cat es c ool er ai r di st ri but i on, hi gher
val ue i ndi cat es war mer ai r di st ri but i on)
% of openi ng
8 Reci r cul at i on Cont rol Openi ng % of openi ng
9 Vehi c l e Speed (Vehi cl e must be dr i ven to di spl ay speed) 10 km/h
A Engi ne Cool ant Temper at ur e C
b Vent Temper at ur e Ai r Out (TAO) C
(cont ' d)
21-107
CSirrsate Control
Gener a! Troubl eshoot i ng Informati on (cont' d)
Cel si us t o Fahr enhei t Conver si on Tabl e
c
op
C
op
C F C
op
C F
0
32 10 50 20 68 30 86 40 104
1 34 11 52 21 70 31 88 41 106
2 36 12 54 22 72 32 90 42 108
3 37 1 3 55 23 73 33 91 43 109
4 39 1 4 57 24 75 34 93 44 111
5 41 15 59 25 77 35 95 45 113
6 43 16 61 26 79 36 97 46 115
7 45 17 63 27 81 37 99 47 117
8 46 18 64 28 82 38 100 48 118
9 4 8 1 9 66 29 84 39 102 49 120
C F C F C F C F C F
50 122 60 140 70 158 80 176 90 194
51 124 61 142 71 160 81 178 91 196
52 126 62 144 72 162 82 180 92 198
127 145 / o 163 83 181 93 199
54 128 64 147 74 165 84 183 94 201
55 131 65 149 75 167 85 185 95 203
56 133 66 151 76 169 86 187 96 205
57 135 67 152 77 170 87 188 97 207
58 136 68 154 78 172 88 190 98 208
59 139 69 158 79 174 89 192 99 210
Al phanumer i c Conver si on Tabl e
Di spl ay Readi ng
(Al phanumer i c)
C F %
A1 t hru A9 - 1 t hru - 9 30 t hru 16 - 1 t hru - 9
B0 t hru B9
--10 t hru - 1 9
14 t hru - 2 - 1 0 t hru - 1 9
CO t hru C9 - 2 0 t hru - 2 9 - 4 t hru - 2 0 - 2 0 t hru - 2 9
DO t hru D9 - 3 0 thru - 3 9 - 2 2 t hru - 3 8 - 3 0 t hru - 3 9
E0 t hru E9 40 t hru 49 - 4 0 t hru - 5 8 - 4 0 t hru - 4 9
F0 t hru F9 - 5 0 t hru - 5 9 - 5 8 t hru - 7 4 + 100 t hru +109
Al phanumer i c Conver si on Tabl e (Mode
Posi t i oni ng)
Di spl ay Readi ng
(Al phanumer i c)
Mode Posi t i on
0 VENT
20
HEATA/ENT-1
- 40
' HEATA/ENT-2
60 HEAT
80 HEAT/ DEF
FO DEF
5. To c anc el t he sensor i nput di spl ay mode, pr ess t he AUTO button or t urn t he i gni ti on swi t ch to L OCK (0).
21 108
Chec ki ng t he DTCs by HDS
DTC Det ect i on It em or Sympt om ECU DTC t ype Page .
U1280 Communi c at i on bus li ne er r or (bus-off) Cl i mat e cont rol
uni t
L os s of
c ommuni c at i on
(see page 22-148)'
U0155 Cl i mat e cont rol uni t l ost communi cat i on
wi t h gauge cont rol modul e
Cl i mat e cont rol
uni t
L os s of
c ommuni c at i on
(see page 21-132)
B121A An open in t he mode cont rol mot or
ci rcui t
Cl i mat e cont rol
uni t
Si gnal er r or DTC Tr oubl eshoot i ng
(see page 21-134)
B121B A shor t i n t he mode cont rol mot or ci rcui t Cl i mat e cont rol
uni t
Si gnal error DTC Tr oubl eshoot i ng
(see page 21-135)
B1220 A shor t i n t he reci rcul at i on cont rol
mot or ci rcui t
Cl i mat e cont rol
uni t
(see page 21-138)
B1225 An open i n t he i n-car t emper at ur e
sensor ci rcui t
Cl i mat e cont rol
uni t
(see page 21-141)
B1226 A shor t i n t he i n-car t emper at ur e sensor
ci rcui t
Cl i mat e cont rol
uni t
(see page 21-143)
B1227 An open i n t he out si de ai r t emper at ur e
sensor ci rcui t
Cl i mat e cont rol
uni t
(see page 21-144)
B1228 A shor t i n t he out si de ai r t emper at ur e
sensor ci rcui t
Cl i mat e cont rol
uni t
(see page 21-146)
B1229 An open i n t he sunl i ght sensor ci rcui t Cl i mat e cont rol
uni t
(see page 21-147)
B1230 A shor t i n t he sunl i ght sensor ci rcui t Cl i mat e cont rol
uni t
(see page 21-149)
B1231 An open i n t he evapor at or t emper at ur e
sensor ci rcui t
Cl i mat e cont rol
uni t
(see page 21-150)
B1232 A shor t i n t he evapor at or t emper at ur e
sensor ci rcui t
Cl i mat e cont rol
uni t
(see page 21-151)
B1233 An open i n t he dr i ver ' s ai r mi x cont rol
mot or ci rcui t
Cl i mat e cont rol
uni t
(see page 21-152)
B1234 A shor t i n t he dr i ver ' s ai r mi x cont rol
mot or ci rcui t
Cl i mat e cont rol
uni t
(see page 21-154)
B1235 A pr obl em i n t he dr i ver ' s ai r mi x cont rol
l i nkage, door , or mot or ci rcui t
Cl i mat e cont rol
uni t
(see page 21-157)
B1236 An open in t he passenger ' s ai r mi x
- cont r ol mot or ci r cui t '
Cl i mat e cont rol
uni t
(see page 21-158)
B1237 A shor t i n t he passenger ' s ai r mi x
cont rol mot or ci rcui t
Cl i mat e cont rol
uni t
(see page 21-160)
B1238 A pr obl em i n t he passenger ' s ai r mi x
cont rol l i nkage, door , or mot or ci rcui t
Cl i mat e cont rol
uni t
(see page 21-163)
B1240* A pr obl em i n t he mode cont rol l i nkage,
door , or mot or ci rcui t
Cl i mat e cont rol
uni t
(see page 21-164)
B1241 A pr obl em i n t he bl ower mot or ci rcui t Cl i mat e cont rol
uni t
(see page 21-166)
B2983 A pr obl em in t he r eci r cul at i on cont rol
l i nkage, door , or mot or ci rcui t
Cl i mat e cont rol
uni t
(see page 21-169)
B2986 An open in t he reci rcul at i on cont rol
mot or ci rcui t
Cl i mat e cont rol
uni t
(see page 21-171)
*: ' 10 model
21-109
Cl i mat e Cont r ol
ympt om Troubl eshoot i ng Index
The bl ower and heat er
cont r ol s and t he A/ C
syst em do not wor k
Pr obabl e c ause: Cl i mat e cont rol uni t
mal f unct i on
Do t he cl i mat e cont rol power and
gr ound ci rcui t t r oubl eshoot i ng (see
page 21-172)
Bl own f use No. 16 (7.5 A) in t he dr i ver ' s
Poor gr ound at G401 (see page 22-40)
Poor or l oose connect i ons at t he
t er mi nal s
The A/ C c ompr essor
cl ut ch and t he A/ C
condenser /r adi at or f ans
ar e Inoper at i ve, but t he
bl ower and heat er
cont r ol s wor k (' 08-09
model s)
Pr obabl e c ause: A/ C pr essur e swi t c h
ci rcui t mal f unct i on
A/ C pr essur e swi t c h ci rcui t
HVAC DTCs (see page 21 -101)
Power t r ai n DTCs (see page 11-3)
t er mi nal s
cl ut ch and t he A/ C
ar e i noper at i ve, but t he
bl ower and heat er
cont r ol s wor k ('10 model )
Probabl e c ause: A/ C pr essur e sensor
Do t he A/ C pr essur e sensor
t r oubl eshoot i ng: A/ C pr essur e sensor
ci rcui t l ow vol t age (see page 11-282),
A/ C pr essur e sensor ci rcui t hi gh
vol t age (see page 11 -284)
NOTE: The A/ C pr essur e sensor c an
mal f unct i on wi t hout set t i ng a DTC
9 A/ C si gnal ci rcui t t r oubl eshoot i ng (see
page 21-182)
~ Poc cr loose connect i ons at t he
t er mi nal s
The A/ C c ompr essor .
cl ut ch does not engage,
b u t t he A/ C
oper at e, and t he bl ower
and heat er cont r ol s wor k
Pr obabl e c ause: No power to t he A/ C
c ompr essor cl ut ch
Do t he A/ C c ompr essor cl ut ch ci rcui t
Bl own f use No. 20 (7.5 A) in t he
under -hood f use/r el ay box
A/ C syst em pr essur e i s nor mal (see
page 21-89)
t er mi nal s
The A/ C c ondenser f an i s
i noper at i ve, but t he
radi at or f an r uns wi t h t he
A/ C on. The bl ower and
heat er cont r ol s wor k
nor mal l y (' 08-09 model s)
Pr obabl e c ause: A/ C c ondenser f an
o Do t he A/ C c ondenser fan ci r cui t
Engi ne over heat i ng due to hi gh ECT
L ow i dle speed
HVAC DTCs (see page 21 -101)
Bl own f use No. 5 (20 A) in t he
t er mi nal s
~hs A/ C c ondenser and
r edi al or f ans ar e
i noper at i ve wi t h t he A/ C
on. The bl ower and
heat er cont r ol s wor k
nor mal l y (' 08-09 model s)
a Pr obabl e c ause: Radi at or /A/C
c ondenser f an c ommon ci rcui t
mal f unct i on
Do t he radi at or and A/ C c ondenser
f an c ommon ci rcui t t r oubl eshoot i ng
(see page 21-47)
Pr obabl e c ause: A/ C pr essur e sensor
t r oubl eshoot i ng: A/ C pr essur e
sensor ci rcui t l ow vol t age (see page
11-282), A/ C pr essur e sensor ci rcui t
hi gh vol t age (see page 11-284)
NOTE: The A/ C pr essur e sensor c an
mal f unct i on wi t hout set t i ng a DTC
Bl own f uses No. 5 (20 A) and No. 3-6
(MAIN FAN MTR) (30 A) in t he
t er mi nal s
Sy mpt om Di agnost i c procedure Al s o c hec k f or
T h e c o nd ens er / r ad i at o r
f a n s d o n o t r u n at l ow
speed wi t h t he A/ C on, but
t he bl ower and heat er
cont r ol s wor k nor mal l y
('10 model )
Pr obabl e c ause: Condenser /r adi at or
f an l ow speed ci rcui t mal f unct i on
Do t he radi at or and A/C c ondenser
f an l ow speed ci rcui t
Pr obabl e c ause: A/ C pr essur e sensor
t r oubl eshoot i ng: A/ C pr essur e
sensor ci rcui t l ow vol t age (see page
11 -282), A/ C pr essur e sensor ci rcui t
hi gh vol t age (see page 11-284)
NOTE: The A/ C pr essur e sensor can
mal f unct i on wi t hout setti ng a DTC
o HV ' .5 (see page 21-101)
Bl own f use No. 3-8 (MAIN FAN MTR)
(30A) in t he under -hood f use/r el ay box
Poor or l oose c onnec t i ons at t he
t er mi nal s
The condenser /r adi at or
f ans do not run at hi gh
speed, but do run at l ow
speed ('10 model )
Pr obabl e c ause: Malf unct i on in t he f an
(s) hi gh speed ci rcui t
Do t he f ol l owi ng t roubl eshoot i ng as
needed: A/ C c ondenser fan hi gh speed
ci rcui t t r oubl eshoot i ng (see page
21-51)
Radi at or f an hi gh speed ci rcui t
Bl own f uses No. 3-8 (MAIN FAN MTR)
(30A) and No. 3-6 (SUB FAN MTR)
(30A) in t he under -hood f use/r el ay box
and G302 (see page 22-30)
t er mi nal s
Voi c e c ommands do not
work
Pr obabl e c ause: Communi cat i on
pr obl em bet ween t he cl i mat e cont rol
uni t and t he navi gat i on syst em
Do t he navi gat i on communi cat i on li ne
ci rcui t t r oubl eshoot i ng (see page
21-173)
o HVAC DTCs (see page 21-101)
e Navi syst em link (see page 23-176)
Poor or l oose c onnec t i ons at t he
t er mi nal s
Bl ower f an r uns sl ower
t han expect ed i n col d
weat her (when in AUTO
mode)
Pr obabl e c ause: Engi ne cool ant
t emper at ur e (ECT) ci rcui t mal f unct i on
Tr oubl eshoot t he ECT sensor ci rcui t :
ECT sensor 2 ci rcui t l ow vol t age (see
page 11-155)
ECT sensor 2 ci rcui t hi gh vol t age
(see page 11-157)
Bl ower mot or operat i on
cl ut ch c yc l es rapi dl y on
and off
Pr obabl e c ause: The A/ C syst em i s ver y
l ow on ref ri gerant , i ndi cat i ng a
possi bl e leak
Do t he ref ri gerant leak check (see page
21-82) and repai r any l eaks. Repl ace
t he r ecei ver /dr yer (see page 21-79),
t hen r echar ge t he syst em to
speci f i cat i ons (see page 21-81)
# HVAC DTCs (see page 21-101)
If t here i s no leak and t he refri gerant
l evel i s nor mal , do t he A/ C c ompr essor
cl ut ch ci rcui t t r oubl eshoot i ng (see
page 21-52), and look f or an
i ntermi ttent pr obl em.
War m ai r c omes out of
t he vent s, and t he hi gh
pr essur e l i qui d li ne i s
ver y hot
Probabl e c ause: The A/ C syst em i s
over char ged (too much ref ri gerant ), or
t he A/ C c ondenser i s mal f unct i oni ng
Rec over A/ C ref ri gerant (see page
21 -80), t hen check t he c ondenser for
r est r i ct i ons or poor ai rf l ow. Repai r as
needed. Rec har ge t he syst em to
Incorrect t ensi on or abnor mal wear on
t he dr i ve belt. Repl ace t he belt and/or
t he belt t ensi oner as needed.
Pr oper operat i on of t he A/ C
condenser /r adi at or f ans. Repai r as
needed.
Si gns of an over heat ed engi ne. Repai r
as needed.
(cont' d)
21-111
Cl i mat e Control
t he vent s. The suct i on li ne
i s cool to war m, and t he
.hot
Probabl e c ause: The A/ C syst em i s l ow
on ref ri gerant , i ndi cat i ng a possi bl e
leak
Do t he ref ri gerant l eak c hec k (see page
21-82) and r epai r any l eaks. Rec har ge
t he syst em to speci f i cat i ons (see page
21-81)
m HVAC DTCs (see page 21-101)
Add ref ri gerant oi l dependi ng on t he
part you r epl aced (see page 21-6)
t he vent s. The suct i on li ne
i s cool to war m, t he
di sc har ge l i ne i s war m to
hot, and t her e i s no f rost
on t he expansi on val ve
Probabl e c ause: Ex c es s i v e ai r and/or
moi st ur e i n t he s y s t em, i ndi cat i ng a
possi bl e leak
Do t he ref ri gerant l eak check (see page
21-82) and repai r any l eaks. Repl ac e
t he r ecei ver /dr yer (see page 21-79),
t hen r echar ge t he s y s t em to
Chec k t he amount of ref ri gerant oi l i n
t he syst em (see page 21-6). Adj ust t he
oi l l evel as needed.
t he vent s. The l i qui d li ne
or t he c ondenser outlet i s
abnui ni di i y c ool , or t here
i s f rost or condensat i on
on t he r ecei ver /dr yer
Probabl e c ause: A rest ri ct i on i n t he
hi gh-pr essur e si de of t he syst em
21-80), t hen c hec k t he l i qui d l i ne, t he
r ecei ver /dr yer , and t he A/ C c ondenser
f or r est r i ct i ons. Repai r as needed.
Rechar ge t he syst em to speci f i cat i ons
(see page 21-81)
Ther e i s heavy f rost or
condensat i on on t he
expansi on val ve, and
f rost on t he suct i on li ne
Pr obabl e c ause: A rest ri ct i on i n t he
l ow-pr essur e si de of t he syst em
21-80), t hen c hec k t he suct i on li ne and
t he expansi on val ve f or r est r i ct i ons.
Repai r as needed. Rec har ge t he
syst em to speci f i cat i ons (see page
21-81)
t he vent s, but A/ C
c ommand i s nor mal (A/C
swi t ch and cl ut ch ar e on)
Pr obabl e c ause: A/ C c ompr essor
f ai l ure
Do t he A/ C syst em t est (see page
21-89), and cor r ect any pr obl ems. If
nec essar y, r epl ace t he A/ C c ompr essor
(see page 21-72)
Add ref ri gerant oi l dependi ng on t he
part you r epl aced (see page 21-6)
Dr i ver ' s and passenger ' s
si de vent t emper at ur es
var y by mor e t han 20 F
(11 C)
Pr obabl e c aus es : The r eci r cul at i on
cont rol door or t he ai r mi x door i s
mal f unct i oni ng
Do t he f ol l owi ng t r oubl eshoot i ng:
Reci r cul at i on cont rol mot or t est (see
page 21-189)
e Dr i ver ' s ai r mi x cont rol mot or t est
(see page 21-59)
Passenger ' s ai r mi x cont rol mot or
t est (see page 21-187)
t er mi nal s
t he vent s, and t her e i s
f rost on t he expansi on
val ve
Pr obabl e c ause: The expansi on val ve
i s st uck c l osed
Repl ace t he expansi on val ve (see page
21-69)
Chec k t he ol d expansi on val ve f or
cont ami nat i on. If cont ami nant s ar e
f ound, r epl ace t he A/ C syst em
c omponent (see page 21-7) t hat c aused
t he cont ami nat i on
S ympt o m Di agnost i c pr ocedur e Al so c hec k f or
The t emper at ur e of t he
li qui d li ne i s t he same on
both si des of t he
expansi on val ve, and t he
evapor at or coi l or suct i on
li ne has heavy
condensat i on
Probabl e c ause: The expansi on val ve
is st uck open
Repl ace t he expansi on val ve (see page
21-69)
Chec k t he ol d expansi on val ve f or
cont ami nat i on. If cont ami nant s are
f ound, r epl ace t he A/ C syst em
c omponent (see page 21-7) that c aused
t he cont ami nat i on.
HDS does not
c ommuni c at e wi t h t he
cl i mat e cont rol uni t or t he
vehi cl e
Tr oubl eshoot t he DL C ci rcui t (see page
11-181)
Insuf f i ci ent heat i ng 1. Check t he cool ant l evel (see page
10-6)
2. Check t he radi at or cap (see page
10-3)
3. Check t he cool ant t emper at ur e
duri ng nor mal operat i on
4. Check t he heat er cor e i nlet hose
t emper at ur e:
If it i s COL D, check for rest ri ct i ons
in t he hose, a damaged or l eaki ng
t her most at , or a damaged or
leaki ng wat er pump
If it i s HOT, c hec k for rest ri ct i ons
in the heat er cor e. Back f l ush or
repl ace t he heat er cor e
5. Do t he dr i ver ' s ai r mi x cont rol mot or
t est (see page 21-59) and
passenger ' s ai r mi x cont rol mot or
t est (see page 21-187)
6. Check t he bl ower mot or uni t f or
obst r uct i ons
7. Check for ai r l eaks ar ound t he duct s
and vent s
21-113
Cl i mat e Control
Sf stem Description
The ai r condi t i oni ng (A/C) syst em r emoves heat f r om t he passenger compar t ment by t ransf erri ng heat f r om t he ambi ent
ai r to t he evapor at or . The A/ C syst em ref ri gerant expands i n t he evapor at or , and t he evapor at or bec omes ver y col d and
absor bs t he heat f r om t he ambi ent ai r. The bl ower f an pushes ai r ac r oss t he evapor at or wher e t he heat i s absor bed, and
t hen it bl ows t he cool ai r into t he passenger compar t ment .
EXPANSION VALVE
(Met er s t he r equi r ed amount of
r ef r i ger ant i nt o t he evapor at or )
BL OWER FAN
EVAPORATOR
(Absor pt i on of heat )
EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
A / C PKZCGwnE 3VYi i
(' 08-09 model s)
196 kPa (2.0 kgf/cm
2
, 28 psi)
2
,
the A/C compressor.
A/C PRESSURE SENSOR
( 10 model )
196 kPa (2.0 kgf/cm
2
, 28 psi)
2
,
the A/C compressor. When the
refrigerant is above 1,470 kPa
(15.0 kgf/cm
2
, 213 psi), the A/C
pressure sensor switches the
radiator and A/C condenser
fans to high speed.
/ RELIEF VALVE
(Relieves pressure at the A/C compressor
when the pressure is too high)
A / C CONDENS ER
(Radi at i on of heat )
RECEI VER/ DRYER
DES I CCANT
(Tr aps debr i s, and
r emoves moi st ur e) L
A/ C COMPRES S OR
(Suction and compression)
HIGH PRESSURE VAPOR
HIGH PRESSURE LIQUID
LOW PRESSURE LIQUID
LOW PRESSURE VAPOR
Thi s vehi c l e us es HFC-134a (R-134a) ref ri gerant , whi c h does not cont ai n chl or of l uor ocar bons. Pay attenti on to t he
f ol l owi ng ser vi c e i t ems:
Do not mi x ref ri gerant s CFC-12 (R-12) and HFC-134a (R-134a). They ar e not compat i bl e.
Us e onl y t he r ec ommended pol yal kyl enegl ycol (PAG) ref ri gerant oi l (DENSO ND-01L8) desi gned for t he R-134a A/ C
c ompr essor . Int ermi xi ng t he r ec ommended (PAG) ref ri gerant oi l wi t h any ot her ref ri gerant oi l wi l l resul t in A/ C
c ompr essor f ai l ur e.
Al l A/ C syst em part s (A/C c ompr essor , di sc har ge l i ne, suct i on l i ne, evapor at or , A/ C c ondenser , r ecei ver /dr yer ,
expansi on val ve, O-r i ngs f or j oi nt s) ar e desi gned for ref ri gerant R-134a. Do not exc hange wi t h R-12 part s.
Use a hal ogen gas leak det ect or desi gned for ref ri gerant R-134a.
R-12 and R-134a ref ri gerant ser vi ci ng equi pment ar e not i nt er changeabl e. Use onl y a r ecover y/r ecycl i ng/char gi ng
st at i on that i s U.L.-l i st ed and i s cert i f i ed to meet t he r equi r ement s of S AE J2210 to ser vi c e the R-134a ai r condi t i oni ng
s y s t ems .
Al ways r ecover ref ri gerant R-134a wi t h an appr oved r ecover y/r ecycl i ng/char gi ng st at i on bef ore di sconnect i ng any
A/ C fi tti ng.
21-114
A/ C Pressure Sensor f 10 Model)
The A/ C pressure sensor converts A/ C pr essur e into electrical signals to the ECM/ PCM.
A/ C System Pr essur e S ens o r Out put
Vol t age (V out )
S y s t em Oper at i on
Abnor mal l y low pressure: Below 196 kPa
(2.0 kgf/cm
2
, 28 psi)
Bel ow 0.685 V The ECM/ PCM di sengages t he A/ C c ompr es s or c l ut c h.
The r adi at or and A/ C c ondenser f ans oper at e based on
engi ne cool ant t emper at ur e.
Nor mal operating pressure:
Above 196 kPa (2.0 kgf/cm
2
, 28 psi )
Bel ow 1,470 kPa (15.0 kgf /c m
2
, 213 psi )
0.686 V t o 1.944 V The ECM/ PCM c yc l es t he A/ C c ompr essor c l ut c h based
on c ool i ng demand. The r adi at or and A/ C c ondens er f ans
oper at e at l ow speed unl ess t he engi ne c ool ant
t emper at ur e exc eeds 206 F( 97 C)
Hi gh oper at i ng pr essur e:
Above 1,470 kPa (15.0 kgf /c m
2
, 213 psi )
Bel ow 3,138 kPa (32 kgf / c m
2
, 455 psi )
1.945 V t o 4.575 V The ECM/ PCM c yc l es t he A/ C c ompr essor cl ut ch based
on cool i ng demand. The r adi at or and A/ C c ondenser f ans
oper at e at hi gh s peed.
Abnor mal l y hi gh pr essur e: More t han
3,138 kPa (32 kgf / c m
2
, 455 psi )
Above 4.575 V The ECM/ PCM di sengages t he A/ C c ompr es s or c l ut c h.
The radi at or and A/ C c ondenser f ans oper at e based on
engi ne cool ant t emper at ur e.
The r esponse of t he A/ C pr essur e s ens or i s s hown i n t he gr aph.
NOTE: When t he r ef r i ger ant i s bel ow 196 kPa (2.0 kgf /c m
2
, 28 psi ) or above 3,138 kPa (32 kgf / c m
2
, 455 psi ), t he ECM/ PCM t ur ns t he A/ C
c ompr es s or r el ay off t o prot ect t he A/ C c ompr essor . When t he ref ri gerant pr essur e i s above 1,470 kPa (15.0 kgf /c m
2
, 213 psi ), t he
ECM/ PCM swi t c hes t he radi at or and A/ C c ondenser f ans t o hi gh speed.
OUTPUT
VOL TAGE
(Vout )
0.684 yf !
0.425 -V \ \
0.2945 f ! ; j
- 9 9 0 196 3,138 kPa
( - 1 ) (21 (32) (kgf /ci
[ - 14] L28] [455] [ psi ]
Vc c 5 V Vout GND
(cont' d)
21-115
Cl i mat e Control
Climate Control Door Positions
21-116
(cont'd)
21-117
Cl i mat e Control
Dual Ai r Mi x Cont r ol Sy s t em
Driver's side: HOT Dr i ver ' s si de: COOL
Passenger's side: COOL Passenger's side: HOT
DRIVER'S AIR MIX DOOR
21-118
s-Duai Zona Cl i mace Cont rol S f st em
Thi s syst em aut omat i cal l y cont r ol s t he t emper at ur e and t he vent mode of the air direction to the driver and passenger's side
dependi ng on t he angl e of the sun and t he di r ect i on of t he vehicle. It calculates information such as date, t i me, longitude, and latitude
f r om t he navi gat i on s y s t em, as wel l as t he radi ant st r engt h of t he sun from the sunlight sensor, to determine the appropriate mode
posi t i on and t emper at ur e to be di r ect ed to eac h si de.
RADIANT STRENGTH
V
i 3 l UNIT
DUAL AIR MIX CONTROL
DATE
L ONGI TUDE
L ATI TUDE
DIRECTION OF THE VEHI CL E
(cont'd)
2 1 -1 1 9
Cl i mat e Control
Cl i mat e Cont r ol Uni t Input s and Out put s
CL I MATE CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR A (28P)
p
1
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
/
11 12 13 14
/
16
/
18 19 20 21 23 24 25 26 28
Wire side of f emal e terminals
Cavi t y Wire color Ter mi nal
name
Description
1 L TGRN M-HOT A S Dr i ves pas s enger ' s ai r mi x cont r ol
motor HOT si de
Wi t h i gni t i on swi t c h ON (II) and pas s enger ' s ai r
mi x cont r ol mot or c hange to t he max COOL
posi t i on: l ess t han 0.5 V at sever al s ec onds
2 BRN
1
WH T
2
M-COOL
A S
Dr i ves pas s enger ' s ai r mi x cont r ol
mot or COOL si de
Wi t h i gni t i on swi t c h ON (II) and pas s enger ' s ai r
mi x cont r ol mot or c hange t o t he max HOT
posi t i on: l ess t han 0.5 V at sever al s ec onds
3 RED*
1
PUR*
2
M-FRS Dr i ves r eci r cul at i on cont r ol mot or
FRES H si de
Wi t h i gni t i on swi t c h ON (II) and r eci r cul at i on
cont r ol mot or c hange to t he RECI RCU posi t i on:
c onnec t ed t o gr ound at sever al s ec onds
4
L T BL U M-COOL
DR
Dr i ves dr i ver ' s ai r mi x cont r ol
mot or COOL si de
Wi t h i gni t i on swi t c h ON (II) and dr i ver ' s ai r mi x
cont r ol mot or c hange to t he max HOT posi t i on:
l ess t han 0.5 V at sever al s ec onds
5 PUR*
1
ORN
2
M-REC Dr i ves r eci r cul at i on cont r ol mot or
RECI RCUL ATE si de
Wi t h i gni t i on swi t c h ON (II) and r eci r cul at i on
cont r ol mot or c hange to t he FRES H posi t i on:
c onnec t ed to gr ound at sever al s ec onds
6 PNK M-HOT DR Dr i ves dr i ver ' s ai r mi x cont r ol
mot or HOT si de
Wi t h i gni t i on swi t c h ON (II) and dr i ver ' s air mi x
cont r ol mot or c hange to t he max COOL posi t i on:
l ess t han 0.5 V at sever al s ec onds
7 YE L *
1
WHT*
2
M-VENT Out put s mode cont r ol mot or VENT
si de
Wi t h i gni t i on swi t ch ON (II) and mode cont r ol
mot or c hange t o t he DEF posi t i on: l ess t han 0.5 V
at sever al s ec onds
8 GRY*
1
GRN*
2
M-DEF Out put s mode cont r ol mot or DEF
si de
Wi t h i gni t i on swi t c h ON (II) and mode cont r ol
mot or c hange to t he VENT posi t i on: l ess t han
0.5 V at sever al s ec onds
9 RED*
1
L T GRN*
2
IG2 IG2 power sour c e Wi t h i gni t i on swi t c h ON (II): bat t ery vol t age
11 RED*
1
L T GRN*
2
MDD-P Out put s mode cont r ol motor
12 BL U*
1
PNK*
2
RFD-P Out put s r eci r cul at i on cont r ol mot or
*1: Wi t h navi gat i on
*2: Wi t hout navi gat i on
21-120
Cl i mat e Cont r ol Uni t Input s and Out put s (cont' d)
rb- n
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
/
11 12 13 14
16
18 19
20 21 23
24
25 26
28!
Cavi t y Wi r e color Ter mi nal
name
Desc r i pt i on Si gnal
13 LT BLU*
1
Y EL*
2
AMD-P AS Outputs passenger's air mix
control motor potentiometer signal
(depending on passenger's air mix control
motor position)
14 GRY AMD-P DR Outputs driver's air mix control
motor potentiometer signal
With ignition switch ON {II): about 0.5-4.5 V
(depending on driver's air mix control motor
position)
16*
2
RED I LL-B ULB Detects illumination control signal With illumination switch ON: changed voltage
(depending on dash light brightness controller)
18*
2
GRY SMALL Inputs voltage for illumination With combination light switch ON: battery
voltage
19 LT BLU*
1
RED*
2
DISP CLK Communication signal from
subdisplay
20 BLU*
1
PUR*
2
DISP SI Communication signal to
subdisplay potentiometer signal
21 PUR*
1
LT B LU*
2
ACS Outputs A/C on/off signal With ignition switch ON (II), A/C pressure switch
ON, and A/C compressor clutch ON: less than
0.5 V
With ignition switch ON (II), A/C pressure switch
ON, and A/C compressor clutch OF F : battery
voltage
ON, and A/C compressor clutch ON: less than
0.5 V
ON, and A/C compressor clutch OF F : battery
voltage
23 BRN Teva Detects evaporator temperature
sensor signal
(depending on evaporator temperature)
24 LT GRN*
1
BLU
1
TAM Detects outside air temperature
sensor signal
(depending on outside air temperature)
25 Y EL*
1
PUR*
2
TSUN Detects sunlight sensor signal With ignition switch ON (II) and sensor out of
direct sunlight: 3.6-3.7 V or more
With ignition switch ON (II) and sensor in direct
sunlight: 3.3-3.5 V or less
26 BLK*
1
WHT*
2
TR Detects in-car temperature sensor
signal
(depending on in-car temperature)
28*
1
GRN BUS DATA Communication signal to driver's
climate control switch
*1: With navigation
Cl i mat e Control
Cl i mat e Cont r ol Uni t Input s and Out put s (cont' d)
CL I MATE CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR B (12P)
fl n
2 3
7 8 C
D

10 12
Wire col e
r
T a r m l n a l
n a m e
Signal
1 WHT*
1
PNK *
2
B CAN HI B-CAN communication signal With ignition switch ON (II): pulses
2 RED*
1
B LU*
2
B-CAN LO B-CAN communication signal With ignition switch ON (II): pulses
3 BLK GND Ground for climate control unit
(G401)
5 PUR*
1
Y EL*
2
BLW-G Outputs power transistor gate
voltage
With ignition switch ON (II) and fan control
button OF F : less than 0.5 V
With ignition switch ON (II) and fan control
button ON: about 4.0 V battery voltage
(depending on blower motor control)
6 BLU BLW-V F eedback signal of power
transistor drain voltage
With ignition switch ON (II): about 0 V battery
voltage (depending on blower motor speed)
7 * i
BRN NAVI SO Communication signal from
navigation
8*
1
LT GRN NAVI SI Communication signal to
navigation
g*i RED NAV1CLK Communication signal from
navigation
10 WHT*
1
RED*
2
SENS-COM Sensor ground Less than 0.5 V at all times
12 BLK S5V Outputs sensor 5 V With ignition switch ON (II): about 5.0 V
* 1 : With navigation
21-122
21-123
Cl i mat e Control
Circuit Diagram
' 08-09 Model s Wi t h Navi gat i on
UNDER-H OOD F USE/RELAY B OX
G302 G302
F -CAN H
F- CAN L
ECT2
A3 F 25
. - . WHT
A4 F 24
RE D
PUR
DRI VER' S
J UNCTI ON
BOX 1
F5
A CS
B-CAN H
U
B-CAN L
P6
PNK
P5
- - - B LU
Pl_6
P15
W H T -
RE D -
Hb
r -
i H7
i r
F3 i i E10
- r
F 4 i
. #.
E9
J 2 C1 J 2 C1
J 1 C2
PNK
B LU
18
B L U - -
WHT
RE D
B-CAN H
B-CAN L
F-CAN H
F-CAN L
- YE L / RE D
ENGI NE
\ COOL A NT
TE MPE RA TURE
( ECT) S E NS OR 2
CE NTE R
J UNCTI ON
BOX
GA UGE
CONTROL
MODUL E
21 "124
*1: Wi t h aut omat i c l i ght i ng
* 2: Wi t hout aut omat i c l i ght i ng
: CA N l i ne
L T GRN -
No. 6 (7,5 A) F US E
(In t he pas s eng er ' s
under -das h
f us e/ r el ay box)
Y
GRY
112
- WHT -
- RE D -
L T G R N
I 5
I L L +
IG2
AUDI O- HVAC
cue
S UB DI S PL A Y UNI T
ILL
SI
ho
RE D
<7
PUR B L U
DA S HL I GHTS B RI GHTNE S S CONTROL L E R
L T GRN
H
L T GRN
111
IG2
PR- DE F- L E D
S W IN-1
S W IN-2
PA S S E NGE R' S
S W I N
'
3
CL I MATE . . . . . . A
CONTROL
S W , N
"
4
S WI TCH S W 0 U T _ 3
S W OUT- 4
I L L +
I L L -
- RE D -
- Y E L -
- WH T -
L T B L U
- ORN -
- BRN -
L T GRN
- GRY -
- RE D <
IG2
PR- DE F- L E D
S W IN-1
S W IN-2
S W IN-3
S WI N- 4
S W OUT- 3
DRI VE R' S
CL I MATE
CONTROL
S WI TCH
S W OUT- 4
ILL+
I L L -
GND B US - DA TA
unY MfcU
A- $
I 14 113
BL K L T GRN
G401
GRN
PUR
No. 6 (7.5 A) F US E DAS HL I GHTS
(In t he pas s eng er ' s B RI GHTNE S S
under - das h CONTROL L E R
f us e/ r el ay box) (In t he gauge
c ont r ol modul e)
i / ^)J L T B L U
NAVI GATI ON UNI T
B1
. P N K - ~ - W H T - -
B2
B L U - - - RED - -
R ~D
L T GRN
k>cl
DRIVING
CI RCUI T
>S-
l
5 V
h
B-CAN H
B- CAN L
B5
BL U
PUR
- BL K
- GRY
- PNK
L T B L U
A13
L T B L U -
L T GRN
BRN -
BL U
RE D
PUR
RED
YE L
GRY
A24
B L U
B L OWE R /
MOTOR V
POWE R
G
?
N
TRA NS I S TOR 14
5
DRi VE R' S
S
"
C 0 M
AMD- P AI R MI X
M-HOT CONTROL
MOTOR
M- COOL
3 DRi VE R' S
S
"
C 0 M
AMD- P AI R MI X
M-HOT CONTROL
MOTOR
M- COOL
1
DRi VE R' S
S
"
C 0 M
AMD- P AI R MI X
M-HOT CONTROL
MOTOR
M- COOL
2
DRi VE R' S
S
"
C 0 M
AMD- P AI R MI X
M-HOT CONTROL
MOTOR
M- COOL
DRi VE R' S
S
"
C 0 M
AMD- P AI R MI X
M-HOT CONTROL
MOTOR
M- COOL
1
S 5V S - COM
AMD P PA S S E NGE R' S
AMD- P AI R MIX
M-HOT CONTROL
M- COOL
M 0 T 0 R
WHT
5
I
7
S 5V S - COM
FRD- P RE CI RCUL A TI ON
ppc CONTROL
MOTOR
RE C
3
S 5V S - COM
ppc CONTROL
MOTOR
RE C
1
S 5V S - COM
ppc CONTROL
MOTOR
RE C
2
S 5V S - COM
ppc CONTROL
MOTOR
RE C
S 5V S - COM
ppc CONTROL
MOTOR
RE C
5 5
S 5V S - COM
MODE- P MODE CONTROL
M- VENT MOTOR
M-DEF
3
S 5V S - COM
M- VENT MOTOR
M-DEF
2
S 5V S - COM
M- VENT MOTOR
M-DEF
1
S 5V S - COM
M- VENT MOTOR
M-DEF
S 5V S - COM
M- VENT MOTOR
M-DEF
EVAPORATOR
TE MPE RA TURE S E NS OR
WHT -
OUTS I DE AIR
RE D -
S UNL I GHT
4*
1
S E NS OR
RE D
A26
IN-CAR RED WHT
B L K
TE MPE RA TURE S E NS OR I
a W H T ~ ~ L T B L U -1^7^~~ R E D 4
- WHT -
B3
CL I MATE CONTROL UNI T
1
G401
BL K
i
21-125
Cl i mat e Control
Ci rcui t Di agram (cont'd)
' 10 Model Wi t h Navi gat i on
UNDE R- HOOD F US E / RE L A Y B OX
No. 1
(MAIN) (100 A)
PGM-F I
S UB RE L A Y
No. 21
(7.5 A)
No. 3-1
(IG MAIN) (50 A)
crxx>---~
IGNITION SWI TCH
<J AT
I G i
IG2 HOT i n ON (II)
ORN
No. 16 (7.5 A)
P18
F26
L T GRN
L T GRN
No. 8 (40 A)
" crxxi '
1
No. 20 (7.5 A)
C T V J O .
No. 3-8
DRI VER' S
J UNCTI ON B OX 1
r -
_H6
PNK -
i
i r
H7
B L U -
F3 i i
-,
E10
PNK -
19
F4 i
- <
E 9
B L U -
18
J 2 C1 30 J 2 C1
WHT -
30
J1 C2
RE D -
29
B- CAN H
B- CAN L
F- CAN H
F -CAN L
CE NTE R
J UNCTI ON
B OX
GAUGE
CONTROL
MODUL E
ENGI NE
COOL A NT
TE MPE RA TURE
( ECT) S E NS OR 2
A / C
PRE S S URE
S E NS OR
E CM/ PCM
21-126
* 1: Wi t h aut omat i c l i ght i ng
No. 6 (7.5 A) F US E
under -das h
f use/ r el ay box)
Y
GRY
112
ILL+ IG2
AUDI O- HVAC CL K
S UB DI S PL A Y UNI T
ILL SI
ho
RED
L T GRN
I 1
IG2
PR- DE F- L E D
S W IN-1
S W IN-2
PASSENGER'S
s wI N
"
3
CL I MATE _. A . . . . .
CONTROL
S W I N
-
4
S W , T C H
SWOUT-3
S W OUT- 4
I L L +
I L L -
DAS HL I GHTS B RI GHTNE S S CONTROL L E R
= RE D -
- Y E L -
- WHT -
L T B L U
- ORN -
- BRN -
L T GRN
- GRY -
- RE D -f
IG2
PR- DEF- L ED
S W IN-1
S W IN-2
S W IN-3
S W IN-4
S W OUT- 3
DRI VER' S
CL I MATE
CONTROL
S WI TCH
S W OUT- 4
I L L +
I L L -
GND B US - DA TA
A <7
I 14 113
BL K L T GRN
4
G401
GRN
No. 6 (7.5 A) F US E DA S HL I GHTS
(In t he pas s eng er ' s B RI GHTNE S S
under -das h CONTROL L E R
f us e/ r el ay box) (In t he gauge
c ont r ol modul e)
PUR L T B L U
, PNK - WHT - -
B2
BL U - RED - -
NAVI GATI ON UNIT
RED
B US - DA TA
5 V I
)S-|
B- CAN H
B-CAN L
S 5V S-COM S 5V
DRI VER' S
AMD-P AIR MIX
M-HOT
CONTROL
M-HOT
MOTOR
M- COOL
MOTOR
BL U
RE D -
PUR
RED
Y E L
GRY
I 7
S 5 V S - COM
AMD-P PA S S E NGE R' S
AMD-P A | R M | X
M-HOT CONTROL
M- COOL
M 0 T 0 R
3
S 5 V S - COM
AMD-P A | R M | X
M-HOT CONTROL
M- COOL
M 0 T 0 R
2
S 5 V S - COM
AMD-P A | R M | X
M-HOT CONTROL
M- COOL
M 0 T 0 R
1
S 5 V S - COM
AMD-P A | R M | X
M-HOT CONTROL
M- COOL
M 0 T 0 R
S 5 V S - COM
AMD-P A | R M | X
M-HOT CONTROL
M- COOL
M 0 T 0 R
BL K
L 7
S 5V S - COM
FRD-P RECI RCUL ATI ON
P R c CONTROL
m s
MOTOR
RE C
3
S 5V S - COM
P R c CONTROL
m s
MOTOR
RE C
1
S 5V S - COM
P R c CONTROL
m s
MOTOR
RE C
2
S 5V S - COM
P R c CONTROL
m s
MOTOR
RE C
S 5V S - COM
P R c CONTROL
m s
MOTOR
RE C
5
S 5V S - COM
MODE-P MODE CONTROL
M-VENT MOTOR
M-DEF
3
S 5V S - COM
MODE-P MODE CONTROL
M-VENT MOTOR
M-DEF
2
S 5V S - COM
MODE-P MODE CONTROL
M-VENT MOTOR
M-DEF
1
S 5V S - COM
MODE-P MODE CONTROL
M-VENT MOTOR
M-DEF
S 5V S - COM
MODE-P MODE CONTROL
M-VENT MOTOR
M-DEF
WHT
5
WHT
5
- L T GRN
EVAPORATOR
^ Wy )
1
- WHT -
OUTS I DE AIR
LfJ~^ RED -
A25
S UNL I GHT
4 *
1
S E NS OR
IN-CAR RED WHT
TE MPE RA TURE S E NS OR j
BL K WHT L T BL U ~^ Wv ^ RED -j
B3
1
G401
BL K
1
G302
21-127
Cl i mat e Control
Circuit Diagram fcont' d)
' 08-09 Model s Wi t hout Nav i g at i o n
B ATTERY
No. 1
(MAIN) (100 A)
_ c r \ x >
PGM-F I
SUB RELAY
No. 21
(7. 5 A)
RE L A Y
CI RCUI T
BOARD
A / C
DI ODE B
No. 3-1
(IG MAIN) (50 A)
cr\jy
No. 8 (40 A)
C T X J D
No. 20 (7.5 A)
C T X J O
^ B A T ,
I G2/
IG2 HOT i n ON (II)
No. 16( 7. 5 A )
CTXJ D- LTGRN
No. 3-6
(MAIN FAN MTR) (30 A) RE L A Y CI RCUI T BOARD
1 No. 5
(, (20 A )
CONDE NS E R
FAN RE L A Y
A/C
COMPRE S S OR
CL UTCH RE L A Y
C3
B L U/ YE L
Rl OWFR
| MOTOR
4 RE L A Y
B7
Y EL P U R
r \ S m t M c c D / \ R A D I A T O R
CM) C O N D E N S E R ( M) F AN
V J C A M V J M O T Q R
n n
G302 G302
BLU/RED BLK
t I
1AA/HT - G -
W H T
L_
RED/ WHT
A/C
COMPRESSOR
CL UTCH
A3 F 25
F-CAN H | WHT
A4 F24
F-CAN L | RED
DRI VER' S
J UNCTI ON
B O X 1
A CS
B-CAN H h~
U
B- CAN L - - -
P1_6
P 1 5
P N K
BL U
WHT -
RE D -
r -
H6
PNK
F3
i
i r
H7
E10
B L U
19 F3
i i
r
H7
E10
PNK
19
B-CAN H
F4 i E9
BL U
18
B-CAN L
J 2 C 1 30 J 2 C 1
W H T
30
F- CAN H
J1 C2
RED
29
F- CAN L
} . 1 ,
ENGI NE
\ COOL A NT
TE MPE RA TURE
( ECT) S E NS OR 2
CE NTE R
J UNCTI ON
B OX
GA UGE
CONTROL
MODUL E
21-128
GRN
W H T
L T GRN
* 1 : Wi t h aut omat i c l i ght i ng
L T GRN
CL K
AUDI O- HVAC
DI S PL AY UNI T
RED
) 10
RED
I 12
GRY
GRY
RE D
A18
A16
v A
DAS HL I GHTS
B RI GHTNE S S
CONTROL L E R
(In t he gauge
c ont r ol modul e)
No. 6 (7.5 A) F US E
und er - d as h
f us e/ r el ay box)
PUR fry L T B L U -
PNK
BL U
T
i
12 V
T
k>cl
ILL+
I L L -
DRIVING
CI RCUI T
4-
1"
j-4
5 V
B-CAN H
B- CAN L
B L OWE R /
MOTOR V
TRA NS I S TOR
3
Y EL

- BL K
~ GRY -
- PNK
L T B L U
5
S 5V n n n t r . n i e > S - COM
A . , DRI VER' S
AMD- P AIR MIX
M-HOT CONTROL
. M MOTOR
M- COOL
3
A . , DRI VER' S
AMD- P AIR MIX
M-HOT CONTROL
. M MOTOR
M- COOL
1
A . , DRI VER' S
AMD- P AIR MIX
M-HOT CONTROL
. M MOTOR
M- COOL
2
A . , DRI VER' S
AMD- P AIR MIX
M-HOT CONTROL
. M MOTOR
M- COOL
A . , DRI VER' S
AMD- P AIR MIX
M-HOT CONTROL
. M MOTOR
M- COOL
1
S 5V S - COM
AMD- P
PA S S E NGE R' S
AIR MIX
M-HOT CONTROL
M- COOL
MOTOR
W H T
5
A12
A3
A5
PNK
PUR
ORN
BL U
RE D
PUR
- WHT -
- GRN -
RE D
Y E L
GRY
I
7
S 5V S-COM
F RD-P RECIRCULATION
coc CONTROL
h K b
MOTOR
REC
3
S 5V S-COM
coc CONTROL
h K b
MOTOR
REC
1
S 5V S-COM
coc CONTROL
h K b
MOTOR
REC
2
S 5V S-COM
coc CONTROL
h K b
MOTOR
REC
S 5V S-COM
coc CONTROL
h K b
MOTOR
REC
5
S 5V S-COM
M-VENT MOTOR
M-DEF
3
S 5V S-COM
M-VENT MOTOR
M-DEF
2
S 5V S-COM
M-VENT MOTOR
M-DEF
1
S 5V S-COM
M-VENT MOTOR
M-DEF
S 5V S-COM
M-VENT MOTOR
M-DEF
E VAPORATOR
i6/ ^ XJ WH T -
OUTS I DE AIR
1^ RED -
S UNL I GHT
4*
1
S E NS OR
A26
- WHT - LT BLU
IN-CAR RED WHT
^ - W V ^ RED <>
RED
RE D
B3
1
G401 G302
21-129
Cl i mat e Control
Circuit Diagram (cont' d)
' 10 Model Wi t hout Navi gat i on
U N D E R - H O O D F U S E / R E L A Y BO X
No. 1
( M AI N) ( 1 00A)
O~\J>
PGM-FI
S UB RE L A Y
No. 3 - 1
(IG MAIN) (50 A)
, ( TNJ >
No. 8 (40 A)
- c r u '
No. 2 0 ( 7. 5 A)
- : r v c
I G NI T I O N S WI T C H
/ B A T \
. WHT f o CH ORN -
I G 2 H O T i n O N (I I )
DRI VER' S U N D E R - D A S H
F U S E / R E L A Y BO X
C 4
No. 16(7.5 A)
P18
F 2 6
- L T GRN
LTGRN
No. 3-
(MAIN FAN MTR) ( 3 0A)
<r \xi , ,
f
lA/' C
1UUNDENSER
I FAN RE L A Y
F A N
CONTROI
RE L A Y
B2
BL U / Y E L
C 5
BL K
i
1
BL K
G301
A / C
C O N D E N S E R
F A N
M O T O R
R E L A Y
C I R C U I T BOARD
RADI ATOR
r-Mi\i i t E L A Y
4#~
A/ C
D I O D E A
C 3 C 4
BL U / BL K
A R A D I A T O R
( M ) F A N
W M O T O R
A / C
| COMPRE S S OR
BL OWER
MOTOR
1
G 3 0 2
FAN L O
H
A CC L
H
BL U / R E D BL K
. t.... I
WHT
L_
A/ C
C O M P R E S S O R
C L U T C H
'X.
F A N H I
F - C A N H
F - C A N L
5 V ~Y ~VCC6
DR I VE R ' S
J U N C T I O N BO X1
- WHT - -
A 4 F 2 4
- RED
A CS
B-CAN H
H6
r "
i H7
i r
_ _
P6 F 3 i i E10
- - -
PNK _ _
i
- - P 5 F 4 i E 9
BL U - -
P 1 6 J 2 C1 P 1 6
WHT
J 2 C1
P15
R E D
J1 C2
P N K
BL U
P N K
BL U
WHT
RED
3 CAN H
B-CAN L
DR I VE R ' S UNDER-DASH
F U S E / R L L A Y BOX
C E N T E R
J U N C T I O N
BO X
F - C A N H
F - C A N L
GAUGE
C O N T R O L
M O D U L E
A17
BL U
E N G I N E
C O O L A N T
T E M P E R A T U R E
( E C T ) S E N S O R 2
A34 1 / \ 2
Y E L / R E D ~ f A- B L K
A 1 0 1
A/ C
PRE S S URE
S E N S O R
21-130
0
V
L T GRN
- WH T -
L T GRN
* 1: Wi t h aut omat i c l i ght i ng
Y E L PUR
V A
DAS HL I GHTS No. 6 (7.5 A) F US E
B RI GHTNE S S (In t he pas s eng er ' s
CONTROL L E R under -das h
(In t he g aug e f us e/ r el ay box)
c ont r ol modul e)
L T B L U
A21
PNK
B L U
B- CAN H
B- CAN L
B L OWE R /
MOTOR *
POWER
u
TRA NS I S TOR
3
AAA;>
' R
5
S 5V n n t x i r . n S - COM
DRI VER' S
AMD- P AIR MIX
M-HOT CONTROL
MOTOR
M- COOL
3
DRI VER' S
AMD- P AIR MIX
M-HOT CONTROL
MOTOR
M- COOL
1
DRI VER' S
AMD- P AIR MIX
M-HOT CONTROL
MOTOR
M- COOL
2
DRI VER' S
AMD- P AIR MIX
M-HOT CONTROL
MOTOR
M- COOL
DRI VER' S
AMD- P AIR MIX
M-HOT CONTROL
MOTOR
M- COOL
1
, Y E L L T B L U
L T GRN
S 5V S - COM
AMD P PA S S E NGE R' S
AMD- P AIR MIX
M-HOT CONTROL
M- COOL
M 0 T 0 R
B L U
RE D
PUR -
A11
L T GRN
- WHT -
- GRN
RE D
Y E L
GRY -
L
7
S 5V S - COM
P D C CONTROL
f -K5 MOTOR
RE C
3
S 5V S - COM
P D C CONTROL
f -K5 MOTOR
RE C
1
S 5V S - COM
P D C CONTROL
f -K5 MOTOR
RE C
2
S 5V S - COM
P D C CONTROL
f -K5 MOTOR
RE C
S 5V S - COM
P D C CONTROL
f -K5 MOTOR
RE C
5
S 5V S - COM
M-VENT MOTOR
M-DEF
3
S 5V S - COM
M-VENT MOTOR
M-DEF
2
S 5V S - COM
M-VENT MOTOR
M-DEF
1
S 5V S - COM
M-VENT MOTOR
M-DEF
S 5V S - COM
M-VENT MOTOR
M-DEF
WHT
5
WHT
5
B L U
EVAPORATOR
2
' * *
4 x
" - WHT -
OUTS I DE AIR
T^3 RED
A25
S UNL I GHT
4*
1
S E NS OR
IN-CAR RED WHT
TE MPE RA TURE S E NS OR |
i 2
- ^ A / V ^ RED 4
BL K
A
CL I MATE CONTROL UNI T G401
21-131
Cl i mat e Control
DTC Troubleshooting
DTC i ndi cat or A: Cl i mat e Cont rol Uni t Internal
Error
NOTE: Chec k t he battery condi t i on (see page 22-90) and
t he char gi ng syst em (see page 4-25).
ON (II).
2. Do t he sel f -di agnost i c f unct i on wi t h t he cl i mat e
Is DTC A indicat ed?
YE S - Th e cl i mat e cont rol uni t i s f aul t y; r epl ace t he
cl i mat e cont rol uni t (wi th navi gat i on) (see page
21- 190), (wi t hout navi gat i on) (see page 21-191).H
NO-l nt er mi t t ent f ai l ur e, t he cl i mat e cont r ol uni t i s OK
at t hi s t i me. Chec k f or poor c onnec t i ons at t he cl i mat e
cont rol uni t and at G401 (wi th navi gat i on) (see page
22- 40), (without navigation) (see page 22-42).l l
DTC U0155: Cl i mat e Control Uni t Lost
Communi cat i on wi t h Gauge Control Module
NOTE: If you ar e t r oubl eshoot i ng mul t i pl e DTCs , be sur e
to f ol l ow t he i nst r uct i ons i n B-CAN syst em di agnosi s t est
mode A (see page 22-134).
ON (II).
3. Do t he sel f -di agnost i c f unct i on wi t h t he HDS (see
page 21-102).
4. Check f or DTCs.
NO-The syst em i s OK at t hi s t i me. Chec k f or l oose
wi r es or poor connect i ons at t he gauge cont rol
modul e and t he cl i mat e cont rol uni t .H
5. Sel ec t UNIT INFORMATION in t he BODY EL ECTRI CAL
menu.
6. Sel ec t CONNECTED UNIT in t he UNIT INFORMATION
menu.
is t he gauge cont rol module det ect ed?
YES-Subs t i t ut e a known-good cl i mat e cont rol uni t ,
r epl ace t he ori gi nal cl i mat e cont rol uni t (wi th
navi gat i on) (see page 21-190), (wi thout navi gat i on)
(see page21-191).H
NO- Go to st ep 7.
7. Di sconnect dr i ver ' s under -dash f use/r el ay box
connect or P (20P).
9. Di sconnect cl i mat e cont rol uni t connect or B (12P).
21-132
A ! ]
of dr i ver ' s under -dash f use/r el ay box connect or P
(20P), t he gauge cont rol modul e 32P connect or , and
cl i mat e cont rol uni t connect or B (12P).
20P: 32P:
No. 5 No. 18
No. 6 No. 19
12P: 32P:
No. 1 No. 19
No. 2 No. 18
DRI VER' S UNDER-DASH FUS E / RE L A Y BOX
CONNECTOR P (20P)
112|/L/ 1/ 16
i n n r,
A 8 ; 9 j io!./!/-'|l3L4/|l6!
|17|18|19|20|2I|22|23|24|25|26|27|28|29|30|/]32
WH T
1
T
2 3
/
r
5 6
n
7 8 9 10
/
12
RED
YE S - Go to t he gauge cont rol modul e i nput t est (see
page 22-347).H
NO-Repai r an open i n t he wi r e bet ween t he MICU and
t he gauge cont rol modul e, or an open i n t he wi r e
bet ween t he cl i mat e cont rol uni t and t he gauge
cont rol modul e. H
21-133
Cli mate Control
DTC B121A or DTC i ndi cat or G and A / C ON;
An Open in the Mode Cont rol Motor Ci rcui t
ON (II).
page 21-102) or wi t h t he cl i mat e cont rol uni t (see page
21-103).
Is DTC B121A or G and A/C ON indicat ed?
c onnec t i ons on t he mode cont rol mot or c i r c ui t .i l
21-62).B
7 Di sc onnec t t he mode cont rol mot or 7P connect or .
8. Di sc onnec t cl i mat e cont rol uni t c onnec t or s A ('MP)
and B( 12P) .
of cl i mat e cont rol uni t c onnec t or s A (28P), B (12P), and
t he r eci r cul at i on cont rol mot or 7P connect or .
28P:
No. 11
7P.
No. 3
12P: 7P:
No. 10 No. 7
No. 12 No. 5
Wiresideof femaleterminals
f|
L T GRN*
2
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 11 12 13 14
RE D*
18 L/II8I19I20I2I | /I23i 24l 25l 26| /
/
| 28"
RED
|
1 2 3 5 7
* 1: Wi t h navi gat i on
* 2: Wi t hout navi gat i on
WHT*
RE D*
n
1
1
C
M
3
/
5 6
7 8 9 10
/
12
, BL K
BL K
WH T
21-134
YES - Ch ec k for l oose wi r es or poor connect i ons at
cl i mat e cont rol uni t connect or s A (28P), B (12P), and at
the mode cont rol mot or IP connect or . If t he
connect i ons ar e good, subst i t ut e a known-good
cl i mat e cont rol uni t and recheck. If t he
21-190), (wi thout navi gat i on) (see page 21-191).II
NO-Repai r an open in t he wi r e(s) bet ween t he cl i mat e
cont rol uni t and t he mode cont rol mot or
DTC B121B or DTC i ndi cat or H and A / C ON:
A Shor t in t he Mode Cont rol Motor Ci rcui t
ON (II).
21-103).
4. Check for DTCs.
Is DTC B121B or H and A/C ON indicat ed?
NO-l nt er mi t t ent f ai l ure. Check f or l oose wi r es or poor
c onnec t i ons on t he mode cont rol mot or c i r c ui t . !
Are t hese DTCs also present ; B1220 or L and A/C ON,
and/or B1234 or B and A/C ON, and/or B1237 or E and
A/C ON?
NO- Go to st ep 6.
21-62).n
9. Di sconnect cl i mat e cont rol uni t connect or s A (28P)
and B(12P).
(cont' d)
21-135
Cl i mat e Control
cl i mat e cont rol uni t connect or A (28P) t er mi nal No. 11.
n n
RE D*
1
L T GRN*
2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
711 12 13 14
/ 1 6 / 1 8 19 20 21 ^
2 3 2 4
25 2 6 ^ / 2 8
Wire side of female terminals 4r
bet ween t he cl i mat e cont rol uni t and t he mode
cont rol mot or .! !
NO- Go to st ep 11.
11. Check for cont i nui t y bet ween cl i mat e cont rol uni t
connect or A (28P) t er mi nal No. 11 and cl i mat e cont rol
uni t connect or B (12P) t er mi nal No. 12.
2 ITU"
5 6 7
16
8 9
RE D*
1
L T GRN*
11 12 13 14
18|l9|20|211 23124[ 25 [ 26 U^l 28
n
IT- -n
1 2 3
/
5 6
7 8 9 10
/
12
BL K
YES - Repai r a shor t i n t he wi r e s .
NO- Go to st ep 12.
vol t age bet ween cl i mat e cont rol uni t connect or A
1I 2 | 3 I 4 [ 5 1 6 1 7 1 8 I 9 11[ 12| 13[T4
X H 6 I X !
1
8 h 9120 j 211/12 31
24
125 | 26[ / [ 28
RE D*
1
L T GRN*
2
cl i mat e cont rol uni t and t he mode cont rol mot or. Thi s
shor t may al so damage t he cl i mat e cont rol uni t.
Repai r a shor t to power bef ore r epl aci ng t he cl i mat e
cont rol uni t .H
NO-Subst i t ut e a known-good cl i mat e cont rol uni t ,
r epl ace t he ori gi nal cl i mat e cont rol uni t (with
(see page21-191).H
13. Tur n t he i gni ti on swi t c h to L OCK (0), and di sconnect
14. Di sconnect t hese i t ems:
Dr i ver ' s ai r mi x cont rol mot or
Reci r cul at i on cont rol mot or
Mode cont rol mot or
21-136
15. Check f or cont i nui t y bet ween cl i mat e cont r ol uni t
connect or B (12P) t er mi nal No. 12 and body gr ound.
n- -n
1 2 3
/
5 6
7 8 9 10
/
12
BL K
YES - Repai r a short to body gr ound i n t he wi r e. H
NO-Go to st ep 16.
16. Tur n t he i gni ti on swi t ch to ON (II), and c hec k t he same
t er mi nal f or vol t age bet ween t he t er mi nal and body
gr ound.
n i r
n
1 2 3 5 6
7 8 9 10
/
12
BL K
YES - Repai r a short to power in t he wi r e. Thi s short
may have al so damaged t he cl i mat e cont rol uni t.
Repai r a shor t to power before r epl aci ng t he cl i mat e
cont rol uni t . B
NO-Go to st ep 17.
18. Reconnect cl i mat e cont rol uni t c onnec t or B (12P).
19. Tur n t he i gni t i on swi t ch to ON (II), and measur e t he
vol t age bet ween cl i mat e cont rol uni t connect or B
n- -n n
1 2 3
/
5 6
7 8 9 10
/
12
NO-Chec k for a l oose wi r e or poor connect i on at
cl i mat e cont rol uni t connect or B (12P). If t he
connect i on i s good, subst i t ut e a known-good cl i mat e
cont rol uni t and recheck. If t he sympt om/i ndi cat i on
goes away, r epl ace t he ori gi nal cl i mat e cont rol uni t
(with navi gat i on) (see page 21-190), (wi thout
navi gat i on) (see page 21- 191) .
(cont' d)
21-137
Climate Control
20. While checking the same terminal for voltage to
ground, reconnect these items individually and note
the voltage reading each time:
Driver's air mix control motor
Passenger's air mix control motor
Recirculation control motor
Mode control motor
CLI MATE CONTROL UNI T CONNECTOR B (12P)
n-
-fl
1 2 3
/
5 6
7 8 9 10
/
12
B LK
z
Does the voltage remain at about 5 V?
Y ES-Substitute a known-good climate control unit
and recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away,
replace the original climate control unit (with
navigation) (see page 21-190), (without navigation)
(see pag e 21-191 ) .
NO-Replace the component that caused the voltage
dr o p. !
DTC B1220 or DTC i ndi cat or L and A / C ON:
A Shor t in t he Reci rcul at i on Control Motor
Ci rcui t
1. Clear the DTC with the HDS.
2. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and then to
ON (II).
3. Do the self-diagnostic function with the HDS (see
page 21-102) or with the climate control unit (see page
21-103).
4. Check for DTCs.
Is DTC B1220 or L and A/C ON indicated?
Y ES-Go to step 5.
NO-lntermittent failure. Check for loose wires or poor
connections on the recirculation control motor
ci rcui t. !
5. Check for DTCs.
Are these DTCs also present; B121B or H and A/C ON,
and/or B1234 or B and A/C ON, and/or B1237 or E and
A/C ON?
Y ES-Go to step 13.
NO-Go to step 6.
6. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
. 7. Test the recirculation control motor (see page 21-189).
Y ES-Go to step 8.
NO-Replace the recirculation control motor (see page
21- 64). !
8. Disconnect the recirculation control motor 7P
connector.
9. Disconnect climate control unit connectors A (28P)
and B(12P).
21-138
CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR A (28P)
n n
BL U*
1
PNK*
2
1 2 3 4 6 7 8 9
~7\\ 12 13 14
2 J 6 2
1 8
19 20 21 2_
23 2 4 2 5
26 ^
2 8
*1: With navigation
bet ween t he cl i mat e cont rol uni t and t he reci rcul at i on
cont rol mo t o r . !
11. Chec k f or cont i nui t y bet ween cl i mat e cont rol uni t
n fi
PNK*
2
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 12 13 14
n- -n
1 2 3 / ' 5 6
7 8 9 10 / 12
BLK
CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR B (12P)
*1: With navigation
YES - Repai r a shor t i n t he w i r e s . !
12. Tur n t he i gni ti on swi t c h to ON (II), and measur e the
vol t age bet ween cl i mat e cont rol uni t c onnec t or A
1 I 2 | 3 | 4 I 5 j 6 I 7 | 8 I 9 [ ^ 1 l | l 2 | l 3 f l 4
BL U*
PNK*
/1l6lXllBll9l20l21 |/I 23|24|25l26|x[28
*1: With navigation
cl i mat e cont rol uni t and t he reci rcul at i on cont rol
mot or. Thi s shor t may al so damage t he cl i mat e
cont rol uni t. Repai r a shor t to power bef ore repl aci ng
t he cl i mat e cont rol u n i t !
NO-Subst i t ut e a known-good cl i mat e cont rol uni t,
(see page 21- 191) . !
13. Tur n t he i gni ti on swi t c h to L OCK (0), and di sconnect
14. Di sc onnec t t hese i t ems:
(cont' d)
21-139
Cl i mat e Control
rp
i r
n
1 2 3
/
5 6
7 8 9 10 1
I
o
i
l

BLK
YES - Repai r a shor t to body gr ound i n t he wi r e. B
NO- Go to st ep 16.
16. Tur n t he i gni ti on swi t ch to ON (ll), and check t he s ame
t er mi nal f or vol t age bet ween t he t er mi nal and body
gr ound.
n
V
- n
1
C
M
3
/
5 6
#
C
O
9 10
/
C
M

BLK
n
n-
-n
1
C
M

3
/
5 6
7 8 9 10
/
12
BLK
Is there about 5 V?
NO-Chec k f or a l oose wi r e or poor connect i on at
cont rol uni t and r echeck. If t he sympt om/i ndi cat i on
(wi th navi gat i on) (see page 21-190), (wi thout
navi gat i on) (see page 21-191).H
YES - Repai r a shor t to power in t he wi r e. Thi s shor t
Repai r a shor t to power bef ore r epl aci ng t he cl i mat e
cont rol unit
17. Tur n t he i gni ti on swi t ch to L O C K (0).
18. Reconnect cl i mat e cont rol uni t connect or B (12P).
20. Whi l e checking t he same terminal for voltage to
gr ound, r econnect t hese i t ems individually and note
t he voltage reading each t i me:
Dri ver's ai r mi x cont rol mot or
Passenger's ai r mi x control mot or
Recirculation control motor
1 fl n
p
1
2 3
/
5 6
10 12
BLK
Does t he volt age remain at about 5 ?
YES-Subs t i t ut e a known-good cl i mat e cont rol uni t
repl ace t he ori gi nal cl i mat e cont rol uni t (wi th
(see page 21-191)11
NO-Repl ac e t he component that c aused t he vol t age
dr op.H
DTC B122S or DTC Indicat or A and AUTO:
An Open in t he In-car Temper at ur e Sensor
Ci rcui t
ON (ll).
page 21-102) or wi t h the cl i mat e cont rol uni t (see page
21-103).
4. Chec k for DTCs.
Is DTC B1225 or A and AUTO indicated?
connect i ons on t he i n-car t emper at ur e sensor
c i r eui t .Il
6. Remove t he i n-car t emper at ur e sensor (see page
21-184), and t est it (see page 21-184).
Is the in-car temperature sensor OK ?
NO-Repl ac e t he i n-car t emper at ur e s ens or .H
and B(12P).
(cont' d)
Cl i mat e Control
connect or A (28P) t er mi nal No. 26 and i n-car
t emper at ur e sensor 2P connect or t ermi nal No. 1.
n n
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
/
11 12 13 14
/ ^ 16l / 1l 8l l 9l 20l 21 \/\22>\2A\25\2Q\/\28
BLK*
1
WHT*
LT BLU
IN-CAR TEMPERATURE SENSOR 2P CONNECTOR
NO-Repai r an open i n t he wi r e bet ween t he cl i mat e
cont rol uni t and t he i n-car t emper at ur e s ens o r . H
9. Chec k for cont i nui t y bet ween cl i mat e cont rol uni t
connect or B (12P) t er mi nal No. 10 and i n-car
t emper at ur e sensor 2P c onnec t or t er mi nal No. 2.
1
ft
2 3
/
r
5
6
. n
7 8 9 10
/
12
WH T*
RED*
2
RED
1 2
; TOR
cl i mat e cont rol uni t c onnec t or s A (28P), B (12P), and at
t he i n-car t emper at ur e sensor 2P connect or . If t he
cl i mat e cont rol uni t , and r echeck. If t he
21-190), (wi t hout navi gat i on) (see page 21-191).B
NO -Repai r an open i n t he wi r e bet ween t he cl i mat e
cont rol uni t and t he i n-car t emper at ur e s ens o r . H
21 -I42
3
DTC 8122 or DTC i ndi cat or B and AUTO:
A Short in the In-car Temperature Sensor
Circuit
2. Tur n t he i gni ti on swi t c h to L OCK (0), and t hen t o
ON (II).
' 21-103).
Is DTC B1226 or B and AUTO indicat ed?
NO-l nt er mi t t ent f ai l ur e. Check f or l oose wi r es or poor
c onnec t i ons on t he i n-car t emper at ur e sensor
c i r c ui t .H
Is t he in-car t emperat ure sensor OK?
NO-Repl ac e t he i n-car t emper at ur e s e n s o r . B
7. Di sconnect cl i mat e cont rol uni t c onnec t or s A (28P)
and B(12P ).
c onnec t or A (28P) t er mi nal No. 26 and body gr ound.
n n
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
/
11 12 13 14
Xll6[Xll8ll9l2
Q
l21 l Xl 23l 24|25|26ly
7
[28
B L K *
1
WHT*
YES-Repai r a shor t to body gr ound i n t he wi r e
bet ween t he cl i mat e cont rol uni t and t he i n-car
t emper at ur e s ens o r . B
NO- Go to st ep 9.
(cont' d)
21- 143
Cl imate Cont rol
TT2T3 RJs I 6 1 7 1 8 1 9 U^ 1l|l2|l3fl4i
16 L/|18| 19|20|21 l / l 23l 24l 25l 26Ul 28"
B L K *
1
WHT*
n
f
1 2 3
/
5 6
TTTI 9110I/I12
WHT*
RE D*
2
YES - Repai r a shor t in t he wi r es bet ween t he cl i mat e
cont rol uni t and t he i n-car t emper at ur e s ens o r . B
NO-Subst i t ut e a known-good cl i mat e cont r ol uni t ,
r epl ace t he or i gi nal cl i mat e cont rol uni t {wi th
navi gat i on) (see page 21-190), (wi t hout navi gat i on)
(see page 21- 191) .
DTC B1227 or DTC i ndi cat or C and AUTO:
An Open In t he Out si de Ai r Temper at ur e
Sensor Ci rcui t
ON (II).
21-103).
4. Check f or DTCs.
Is DTC B1227 or C and AUTO indicated?
<#%, ... _ J L. x ?i. /î . . 1 r 1
c onnec t i ons on t he out si de ai r t emper at ur e sensor
c i r c ui t . !
6. Remove t he out si de ai r t emper at ur e sensor (see page
Is the outside air temperature sensor OK ?
NO-Repl ac e t he out si de ai r t emper at ur e s ens o r . B
and B( 12P) .
21-144
connect or A (28P) t er mi nal No. 24 and out si de air
t emper at ur e sensor 2P c onnec t or t er mi nal No. 1.
n n
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
/
11 12 13 14
OUTSIDE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR 2P CONNECTOR
NO- Repai r an open i n t he wi r e bet ween t he cl i mat e
cont rol uni t and t he out si de ai r t emper at ur e s ens o r . l
connect or B (12P) t er mi nal No. 10 and out si de ai r
n n- -r
1 2 3
/
5 6
7 8 9 10
/
12
OUTSIDE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR 2P CONNECTOR
Y E S - C h e c k for l oose wi r es or poor connect i ons at
cl i mat e cont rol uni t connect or s A(28P), B (12P), and at
t he out si de ai r t emper at ur e sensor 2P connect or . If
t he c onnec t i ons ar e good, subst i t ut e a known-good
cl i mat e cont rol uni t , and recheck. If t he
21-190), (wi thout navi gat i on) (see page 21- 191) .
NO- Repai r an open in t he wi re bet ween t he cl i mat e
cont rol uni t and t he out si de ai r t emper at ur e s ens or . H
21-14!
Cl i mat e Control
DTC B1228 or DTC i ndi cat or D and AUTO:
A Shor t In the Out si de Ai r Temper at ur e
Sensor Ci rcui t
2. Tur n t he i gni ti on swi t ch to L OCK (0), and t hen t o
ON (II).
n n
ON (II).
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
/
11 12 13 14
ON (II).
/
16
/
18 19 20 21
A
23 24 25 26
/
28
21-103).
4. Chec k for DTCs.
Is DTC B1228 or D and A UTO indicat ed?
K C I r . t c r r r . i t t c r . t f c i i ur c . Check f or I CGGC - . v i r e s or poor
c onnec t i ons on t he out si de ai r t emper at ur e sensor
c i r c u i t !
6. Remove t he out si de ai r t emper at ur e sensor (see page
Is t he out side air t emperat ure sensor OK?
NO-Repl ac e t he out si de ai r t emper at ur e s ens or .H
7. Di sc onnec t cl i mat e cont rol uni t c onnec t or s A (28P)
and B( 12P) .
connect or A (28P) t er mi nal No. 24 and body gr ound.
L T GRN*
1
B L U*
2
YES - Repai r a short to body gr ound i n t he wi r e
bet ween t he cl i mat e cont rol uni t and t he out si de ai r
NO- Go to st ep 9.
21-146
16
1 I 2 j 3 I 4 I 5 j 8 | 7 j 8 I 9 [Xlllll2ll3ll4
18l l 9l 20l 2l | / l 23l 24l 25l 26[ / l 28
L T GRN*
B L U*
2
n
n- -n
1 2 3
/
5 6
7 8 9 10
/
12
WHT*
1
I
RE D*
2
YES - Repai r a shor t i n t he wi r es bet ween t he cl i mat e
cont rol uni t and t he out si de ai r t emper at ur e s ens or . B
(see page 21-191 ) .
DTC B122S or DTC Indi cat or E and AUTO:
An Open in t he Sunl i ght Sensor Ci rcui t
ON (II).
21-103).
4. Chec k for DTCs .
Is DTC B1229 or E and AUTO indicat ed?
connect i ons on t he sunl i ght sensor c i r c ui t . !
6. Di sconnect t he sunl i ght sensor 5P connect or (wi th
aut omat i c li ghti ng) or 2P connect or (wi thout
aut omat i c l i ght i ng).
andB( 12P) .
(cont ' d)
21-147
Cli mat e Cerstn
DTC Troubleshooting fcont'd)
connect or A (28P) t er mi nal No. 25 and sunl i ght sensor
5P c onnec t or t er mi nal No. 4 {wi th aut omat i c l i ght i ng),
or sunl i ght sensor 2P c onnec t or t er mi nal No. 1
(wi t hout aut omat i c l i ght i ng).
Wi t h aut omat i c l i ght i ng
n n
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
/
11 12 13 14
16 18 19 20 21 23 24 25 26 28
Y E L *
PUR*
PUR
1 2 3 4 5
S UNL I GHT S E NS OR 5P CONNECTOR
Wi t hout aut omat i c l i ght i ng
ri n
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
/
11 12 13 14
16 / 18 19 20 21 / 23 24 25 26 / 28
YE L *
PUR*
PUR
cont rol uni t and t he sunl i ght s ens o r . H
c onnec t or B (12P) t er mi nal No. 10 and sunl i ght sensor
5P connect or t er mi nal No. 2 (wi th aut omat i c l i ght i ng),
or sunl i ght sensor 2P connect or t er mi nal No. 2
(wi t hout aut omat i c li ght i ng).
n- -fl
1 2 3
A
5 6
7 8 9 10
/
12
I WHT*
1
RE D*
2
@
RED
C p
1 2 3 4 5
n
n- -n
1 2 3
A
5 6
7 8 9 10
/
12
WHT*
1
RE D*
2
K ED
21-148
10. Reconnect the sunl i ght sensor 5P connector (wi th
automati c l i ghti ng) or 2P connector (wi thout
automati c l i ghti ng).
11. Rec onnec t cl i mat e cont rol uni t connect or s A (28P)
and B( 12P) .
12. Test t he sunl i ght sensor (see page 21 -186).
Is t he sunlight sensor OK?
YES - Ch ec k f or l oose wi r es or poor c onnec t i ons at
cl i mat e cont rol uni t connect or and at t he sunl i ght
sensor 5P connect or (wi th aut omat i c l i ght i ng), or t he
sunl i ght sensor 2P connect or (wi t hout aut omat i c
li ght i ng). If t he connect i ons ar e good, subst i t ut e a
known-good cl i mat e cont rol uni t, and r echeck. If t he
21-190), (wi t hout navi gat i on) (see page 21-191)
n
NO-Repl ac e t he sunl i ght sensor (see page 21- 186) .
DTC B1230 or DTC i ndi cat or F and AUTO:
A Shor t in the Sunl i ght Sensor Ci rcui t
2. Tur n t he i gni t i on swi t c h to L OCK (0), and t hen to
ON (II).
21-103).
4. Chec k for DTCs.
Is DTC B1230 or F and AUTO indicat ed?
connect i ons on t he sunl i ght sensor c i r c ui t .! ]
6. Di sconnect t he sunl i ght sensor 5P connect or (wi th
and B( 12P) .
n_ _ n
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
/
11 12 13 14
16 18 19 20 21 23 24 25 26 28
YE L *
PUR*
* 1: Wi t h n av i g at i o n
* 2: Wi t h o u t n av i g at i o n
bet ween t he cl i mat e cont rol uni t and t he sunl i ght
s ens o r . B
NO- Go to st ep 9.
(cont' d)
21-149
Cl i mat e Control
n -fi
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
/
11 12 13 14
16 I x ^l 18 j 19120121 23124J 251261^12 8
YE L *
PUR*
n
n r
n
1
C
M

C
O

/
b t>
7 I 8 I Q Iml / 119
WHT*
RE D*
2
YES - Repai r a shor t in t he wi r es bet ween t he cl i mat e
NO- Go to st ep 10.
10. Rec onnec t t he sunl i ght sensor 5P connect or (wi th
11. Rec onnec t cl i mat e cont rol uni t connect or s A (28P)and
B(12P).
12. Test t he sunl i ght sensor (see page 21 -186).
Is t he sunlight sensor OK?
(see page 21- 191) .
NO-Repl ac e t he sunl i ght sensor (see page 21- 186) .
DTC B1231 or DTC i ndi cat or G and AUTO:
An Open in the Evaporat or Temper at ur e
Sensor Ci rcui t
ON (II).
21-10.3).
4. Check for DTCs.
Is DTC B1231 or G and AUTO indicat ed?
YE S - Go to st ep 5. .
connect i ons on t he evapor at or t emper at ur e sensor
c i r c u i t !
and B( 12P) .
connect or A (28P) t er mi nal No. 23 and evapor at or
n
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
/
11 12 13 14
16 18 19 20 21 / 2 3 24 25 26 28
BRN
EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE S E NS OR
2P CONNECTOR
s ens o r . H
21-150
8. Check f or cont i nui t y bet ween cl i mat e cont rol uni t
connect or B (12P) t er mi nal No. 10 and evapor at or
h -r
n
1 2 3
/
5 6
7 8 9 10
/
12
WHT*
1
RED*
2
WHT
EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE S ENS OR
2P CONNECTOR
s ens o r . H
page 21 -67), and t est it (see page 21 -58).
Is t he evaporat or t emperat ure sensor OK?
YES - Ch ec k for l oose wi r es or poor connect i ons at
t he evapor at or t emper at ur e sensor 2P connect or . If
t he connect i ons ar e good, subst i t ut e a known-good
cl i mat e cont rol uni t , and r echeck. If t he
NO-Replace t he evapor at or t emper at ur e s ens or .H
DTC B1232 or DTC i ndi cat or H and AUTO:
A Shor t in the Evaporat or Temper at ur e
Sensor Ci rcui t
ON (II).
21-103).
4. Check for DTCs.
Is DTC B1232 or H and AUTO indicat ed?
NO-l nt er mi t t ent f ai l ur e. Check for l oose wi r es or poor
connect i ons on t he evapor at or t emper at ur e sensor
c i r c ui t .H
andB( 12P) .
n
1 2 3 4 5
i
6
7 8
(
9
/
11 12 13 14
_n
/
16
/
18 19 20 21
/
23 24 25 26
/
28
BRN
bet ween t he cl i mat e cont rol uni t and t he evapor at or
NO- Go to st ep 8.
(cont' d)
21-151
Climate Control
n -fi
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
/
11 12 13 14
16 18l l 9l 20l 2l | y
/
l 23l 24l 25l 26l
/
/ | 28
BRN
1
n
2 3
/
i
5
6
I ?' \)l | 9 110| / | 1
2
WHT*
1
I
, RE D*
2
YES - Repai r a shor t i n t he wi r es bet ween t he cl i mat e
sensor.il
NO- Go to st ep 9.
page 21-67), and t est it (see page 21-58).
Is the evaporator temperature sensor OK ?
YES-Subs t i t ut e a known-good cl i mat e cont rol uni t ,
(see page 21- 191) .
NO-Repl ac e t he evapor at or t emper at ur e s ens o r . H
DTC B1233 or DTC i ndi cat or A and A / C ON:
An Open in the Dri ver' s Ai r Mix Control Motor
Ci rcui t
ON (II).
page 21 -102) or wi t h t he cl i mat e cont rol uni t (see page
21-103).
4. Chec k for DTCs.
' Is DTC B1233 or A and A/C ON indicated?
f JC !r.tcrr.*.;ttcr,t 1z\\i*Yv. CHOOK f ui l oose wi r es or poor
connect i ons on t he dr i ver ' s ai r mi x cont rol mot or
c i r c ui t .H
6. Test t he dr i ver ' s ai r mi x cont rol mot or (see page
21-59).
Is the driver's air mix control motor OK ?
NO-Repl ac e t he dr i ver ' s ai r mi x cont rol mot or (see
page 21- 60) .
7. Di sconnect t he dr i ver ' s ai r mi x cont rol mot or 7P
connect or .
8. Di sconnect cl i mat e cont rol uni t connect or A (28P) and
B(12P).
21-152
9, Chec k f or cont i nui t y bet ween t he f ol l owi ng t er mi nal s
of cl i mat e cont rol uni t connect or s A (28P), B (12P), and
t he dr i ver ' s ai r mi x cont rol mot or 7P connect or .
28P:
No. 14
7P:
No. 3
12P: 7P:
No. 10 No. 7
No. 12 No. 5
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 11 12 13 14
GRY
? 6l / l l 8l l 9| 20l 21 | /
/
| 23f 24l 25l 26l /
/
l 28
X
GRY
c 1
1 2 3
/
5
DRI VER' S AIR MIX CONTROL MOTOR 7P CONNECTOR
t he dr i ver ' s ai r mi x cont rol mot or 7P connect or . If t he
cl i mat e cont rol uni t and r echeck. If t he
NO-Repai r an open i n t he wi r e(s) bet ween t he cl i mat e
cont rol uni t and t he dr i ver ' s ai r mi x cont rol mot or .B
WHT*
1
RE D*
2
fl
1 2 3
/
5 6
7 8 9 1(
>/
12
BLK
c
i
BLK
1 2 a
A
5 7
WHT
DRI VE RS AIR MIX CONTROL MOTOR I P CONNECTOR
- Wire side of female terminals
Cl i mat e Control
DTC B1234 or DTC i ndi cat or B and A / C ON:
A Shor t in the Dr i ver ' s Ai r Mix Cont rol Motor
Ci rcui t
2. Tur n t he i gni ti on swi t ch to L OCK (OL and t hen to
ON (II).
21-103).
4. Chec k for DTCs.
Is DTC B1234 or B and A/C ON indicat ed?
NOInt er mi t t ent failure r ^horu J cccc "*:rcc cr ZZZT
c onnec t i ons on t he dr i ver ' s ai r mi x cont rol mot or
c i r c ui t . !
5. Chec k for DTCs.
Are t hese DTCs also present ; B121B or H and A/C ON,
and/or B1220 or L and A/C ON, and/or B1237 or E and
A/C ON?
NO- Go to st ep 6.
21-59).
Is t he driver's air mix cont rol mot or OK?
pag e21- 60).H
8. Di sc onnec t t he dr i ver ' s ai r mi x cont rol mot or IP
connect or .
9. Di sc onnec t cl i mat e cont rol uni t c onnec t or s A (28P)
and B (12P).
10. Chec k for cont i nui t y bet ween body gr ound and
n n
GRY
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
/
11 12 13 14
16 Ix^l 18119120 ] 211x123 j 24125j 26 28
bet ween t he cl i mat e cont rol uni t and t he dr i ver ' s ai r
mi x cont rol mot or . B
NO- Go to st ep 11.
7\T\ 3 I 4 I 5 j 6 j 7 I 8 I 9 JXl l l l l 2l l 3TT4
16Ml 8|l9| 20l 21 M23| 24| 25| 26| / | 28
GRY
n- -n ., n
1 2 3
/
5 6
7 8 9 10
/
12
BL K
YES - Repai r a shor t in t he wi r es . H
NO- Go to st ep 12.
21-154
[ } - (]
GRY
n
1 2 3 4 5
6 7 8 9 ,
7l1 12 13 14
716/ 18 19 20 21/ 23 24 25 2 6 /
28
X
cl i mat e cont rol uni t and t he dr i ver ' s ai r mi x cont rol
mot or. Thi s shor t may al so damage t he cl i mat e
cont rol uni t. Repai r a short to power bef ore repl aci ng
t he cl i mat e cont rol uni t .H
(see page 21-191 ) .
13. Tur n t he i gni ti on swi t ch to L OCK (0), and di sconnect
t he cl i mat e cont rol uni t connect or B (12P).
n
n-
-fl
n
1 2
C
O

/
5 6
7 8 9
10
/
12
BL K
YES - Repai r a shor t to body gr ound in t he wire.i l
NO- Go to st ep 16.
t er mi nal for vol t age bet ween t he t er mi nal and body
gr ound.
1
n
2
3
/
r
5
C
O

n
7 8 9
10
/
12
BL K
YES - Repai r a short to power in t he wi r e. Thi s shor t
Repai r a shor t to power bef ore repl aci ng t he cl i mat e
cont rol uni t .H
NO- Go to st ep 17.
(cont' d)
21-155
Cl i mat e Control
DTC Troubl eshoot i ng f cont ' d!
19. Tur n t he i gni ti on swi t c h to ON (ll), and measur e t he
T- -fi
1 2 3
/
5 6
7 8 9 10
/
1 2
BLK
Is there about 5 V?
cl i mat e cont rol uni t c onnec t or B (12P). If t he
(wi th navi gat i on) (see page 21-190), (wi t hout
navi gat i on) (see page 21- 191) .
20. Whi l e checki ng t he same t er mi nal f or vol t age to
gr ound, r econnect t hese i t ems i ndi vi dual l y and not e
t he vol t age r eadi ng eac h t i me:
-
1
2 3
/
5 6
7 8 9 10 12
BLK
Does the voltage remain at about 5 V?
(see page 21-191 ) .
dr op. H
1-15'
DTC B123S or DTC i ndi cat or C and A / C ON:
A Probl em in the Dri ver' s Ai r Mi x Control
Li nkage, Door, or Motor Ci rcui t
ON (II).
page 21-102) or wi t h t he cl i mat e cont rol unit (see page
21-103).
4. Check f or DTCs.
Is DTC B1235 or C and A/C ON indicat ed?
c onnec t i ons on t he dr i ver ' s ai r mi x cont rol motor
c i r c ui t . B
21-59).
Is t he driver's air mix cont rol mot or OK?
page 21-60), or repai r t he dr i ver ' s ai r mi x control
l i nkage or door . H
7. Di sc onnec t t he dr i ver ' s ai r mi x cont rol mot or 7P
connect or .
8. Di sc onnec t cl i mat e cont rol uni t connect or A (28P).
of cl i mat e cont rol uni t connect or A (28P) and t he
dr i ver ' s ai r mi x cont rol mot or 7P connect or .
28P:
No. 4
No. 6
7P:
No. 2
No. 1
LT BL U
n-
PNK
n
1 2 3 4 5 6
7 sTT 7l1 12|13|14~
7 18 19J20 21 7 23 24 25 26 / 28
PNK
L T BL U
1 2
DRI VER' S AIR MIX CONTROL MOTOR 7P CONNECTOR
cont rol uni t and t he dr i ver ' s ai r mi x cont rol mot or .H
(cont' d)
21-157
Cl i mat e Control
DTC Troubleshooting ( c o n t ' d)
10. C h e c k f o r c o n t i n u i t y b e t w e e n b o d y g r o u n d a n d
cl i mat e cont rol uni t connect or A (28P) t er mi nal s No. 4
and No. 6 i ndi vi dual l y.
PNK
LT BLU
1 I 2 j 3 j 4 | 5 | 6 I 7 j 8 | 9L / | l 11l2|l3fl4
18 19 20 21 / 23 24 25 2 6 / 28
is t h&lG L t i j t i ui i udyY
bet ween t he cl i mat e cont rol uni t and t he dr i ver ' s ai r
mi x cont rol mot or . B
(see page 21- 191) .
DTC B1236 or DTC i ndi cat or D and A / C ON:
An Open in t he Passenger ' s Ai r Mix Control
Motor Ci rcui t
ON (II).
21-103).
4. Check for DTCs.
Is DTC B1236 or D and A/C ON indicat ed?
NO-l nt er mi t t ent fai lure r h o ^ w i ^ ooo
w
j
r e s
e%f poor
connect i ons on t he passenger ' s ai r mi x cont rol mot or
c i r c ui t . !
6. Test t he passenger ' s ai r mi x cont rol mot or (see page
21-187).
Is t he passenger's air mix cont rol mot or OK?
NO-Repl ac e t he passenger ' s ai r mi x cont rol mot or
(see page21-188).H
7. Di sconnect t he passenger ' s ai r mi x cont rol mot or 7P
connect or .
and B(12P).
21-158
of cl i mat e cont rol uni t connect or s A (28P), B (12P), and
t he passenger ' s ai r mi x cont rol mot or 7P connect or .
28P: I P :
No. 13 No. 3
12P: 7P:
No. 10 No. 5
No. 12 No. 7
C L I MA T E C O N T R O L U N I T C O N N E C T O R A (28P )
n : fl
L T B L U *
1
Y EL*
2
1 2 3 4 5
L 6 7 8 9 l
y\\ 1 2 1 3 1 4
/ 1 6 / 18 1 9 2 0 21 / 23 2 4 2 5 2 6 / 2 8

L T B L U
c.
1
3 /
/ 5
\/
7
P A S S E NGE R ' S A I R M I X C O N T R O L MOTOR
7P C O N N E C T O R
YES - Ch ec k f or l oose wi r es or poor c onnec t i ons at
t he passenger ' s ai r mi x cont rol mot or 7P connect or . If
t he connect i ons ar e good, subst i t ut e a known-good
21-190), (wi thout navi gat i on) (see page 21-191 ) .
cont rol uni t and t he passenger ' s ai r mi x cont rol
motor
C L I MA T E C O N T R O L U N I T C O N N E C T O R B (12P )
n n- -T n
1 2 3
/
5 6
7 8 9 10
/
12
WH T*
RE D*
J TB LK
2>
W H T B L K
1
P A S S E N G E R S A I R M I X C O N T R O L M O T O R
7P C O N N E C T O R
21-159
Cl i mat e Control
DTC Troubleshooting fcont'd)
DTC B1237 or DTC Indi cat or E and A / C OM:
A Shor t in the Passenger ' s Ai r Mix Control-
Motor Ci rcui t
ON (II).
page 21 -102) or wi t h t he cl i mat e cont rol uni t (see page
21-103).
' Is DTCB1237 orE andA/C ON indicated?
YE S - Go . to st ep 5.
c onnec t i ons on t he passenger ' s ai r mi x cont rol mot or
c i r c ui t . B
AretheseDTCs alsopresent; B121B orH andA/C ON,
and/or B1220 orL andA/C ON, and/or B1234 orB and
A/C ON?
NO- Go to st ep 6.
7. Test t he passenger ' s ai r mi x cont rol mot or (see page
21-187).
Is thepassenger's air mixcontrol motor OK?
(see page21-188). B
8. Di sc onnec t t he passenger ' s ai r mi x cont rol mot or 7P
connect or .
' 9. Di sc onnec t cl i mat e cont rol uni t c onnec t or s A (28P)
and B (12P).
LT B LU*
1
r
Y E L *
2
C
M
3 4 5 6 7 8 9
/
11 12 13 14
16 / 18 19 20 21 / 23 24 25 26 / 28
* 2 : Wi t hout navi gat i on
bet ween t he cl i mat e cont rol uni t and t he passenger ' s
ai r mi x cont rol mot or . B
NO- Go to st ep 11.
connect or A (28P) t ermi nal No. 13 and cl i mat e cont rol
. L T B L U*
1
i > n
Y E L *
2
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
/
11 12 13 14
16\ / \ 18j 19J 20121 I y
/
| 23l 24[25l 26l / l 28
h
-r
1 2 3
/
5 6
7 8 9 10
/
C
M

BL K
YES - Repai r a shor t in t he wi r es . _
21-160
L T B L U*
1
Y E L *
2
16
4
18 19 20 21
8
23 24 25 26
11 12 13 14
28
t he cl i mat e cont rol uni t and t he passenger ' s air mi x
cont rol mot or. Thi s shor t may al so damage t he
cl i mat e cont rol uni t. Repai r a shor t to power bef ore
repl aci ng t he cl i mat e cont rol uni t .H
and recheck. If t he sympt om/i ndi cat i on goes away,
repl ace t he ori gi nal cl i mat e cont rol uni t (wi th
(see page 21- 191) .
13. Tur n t he i gni ti on swi t ch to L OCK (0), and di sconnect
t he cl i mat e cont rol uni t connect or B (12P).
9 Reci rcul at i on cont rol mot or
n n- -n n
1 2 3
/
5 6
I
7 8 9 10 12
BL K
YES - Repai r a shor t to body gr ound in t he wi re. H
NO- Go to st ep 16.
t er mi nal for vol t age bet ween t he t er mi nal and body
gr ound.
n- -n n
1 2 3
/
5 6
7 8 9 10
/
12
BL K
YES - Repai r a shor t to power in t he wi r e. Thi s short
may have al so damaged the cl i mat e cont rol uni t.
Repai r a short to power before repl aci ng t he cl i mat e
cont rol uni t .H
NO- Go to st ep 17.
(cont' d)
21-161
Cl i mat e Control
19. Tur n t he i gni ti on swi t c h to ON (II), and measur e t he
vol t age bet ween cl i mat e cont rol uni t c onnec t or B
n-
1 2 3
/
5 6
7 8 9 10
/
12
BL K
Is there about 5 ?
(wi th navi gat i on) (see page 21-190), (wi t hout
navi gat i on) (see page 21-191 ) .
20. Whi l e checki ng t he s ame t ermi nal f or vol t age to
gr ound, r econnect t hese i t ems i ndi vi dual l y and note
t he vol t age r eadi ng eac h t i me:
n n- -n
1 2 3
/
5 6
7 8 9 10 12
BLK
Does t he volt age remain at about 5 V?
(see page 21- 191) .
drop. I l
21-162
DTC B1238 or DTC i ndi cat or F and A / C ON:
A Problem in the Passenger ' s Ai r Mix Control
ON (II).
3. Do t he sel f -di agnost i c f unct i on wi th the HDS (see
21-103).
4. Check for DTCs.
Is DTC B1238 or F and A/C ON indicat ed?
NO-l nt er mi t t ent f ai l ur e. Chec k for l oose wi r es or poor
connect i ons on t he passenger ' s ai r mi x cont rol motor
c i r c ui t . !
6. Test t he passenger ' s ai r mi x cont rol motor (see page
21-187).
Is t he passenger's air mix cont rol mot or OK?
(see page 21-188), or repai r t he passenger ' s ai r mi x
cont rol l i nkage or door . i l
7. Di sconnect t he passenger ' s ai r mi x cont rol mot or IP
connect or .
8. Di sconnect cl i mat e cont rol uni t connect or A (28P).
passenger ' s ai r mi x cont rol mot or 7P connect or .
28P: 7P:
No. 1 No. 2
No. 2 No. 1
L TGRN
B RN*
WHT*
n
1
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
/
11 12 13 14
V'
6
/
18 19 20 21
/
23 24 25 26
/
28
BRN
1
L TGRN
PA S S E NGE R' S AIR MIX CONTROL MOTOR
7P CONNECTOR
cont rol uni t and t he passenger ' s ai r mi x cont rol
mot or .! !
(cont' d)
21-163
Cl i mat e Control
10. Check for cont i nui t y bet ween body gr ound and
B RN*
1
LT GRN
rui -
1
2 3
4
5 6 7 8 9
/
11 12 13 14
16
/
18 19 20 21
/
23 24 25 26
/
28
* o i i t\*t v-cOi tut tuny :
bet ween t he cl i mat e cont rol uni t and t he passenger ' s
ai r mi x cont rol mot or .H
(see page 21- 19DJ I
DTC B1240 or i ndi cat or J and A / C ON: A
Probl em in t he Mode Cont rol Li nkage, Door s,
or Motor Ci rcui t
ON (II).
2. Do t he sel f -di agnost i c f unct i on wi t h t he cl i mat e
3. Chec k for DTCs.
Is DTC B1240 or J and A/C ON indicat ed?
connect i ons on t he mode cont rol mot or c i r c ui t . i l
21-62), or repai r t he mode cont rol l i nkage or d o o r s .
21 164
8. Check f or cont i nui t y bet ween t he f ol l owi ng t er mi nal s
of cl i mat e cont rol uni t connect or A(28P) and t he
mode cont rol mot or 7P connect or .
28P:
No. 7
No. 8
7P:
No. 2
No. 1
Y E L *
1
WHT*
1 2 3 4 5
GRY*
GRN*
7 8 9 11 12 13 14
7[ l 61/118| 19f20|21 P123J 24125I261X128
YE L
1 2
3 /
/ 5
/
7
I GRY
Y E L *
1
WH T*
GRY*
GRN*
W
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
/
11 12 13 14
bet ween t he cl i mat e cont rol uni t and t he mode
cont rol mot or . i l
(see page 21-191 ) .
21-165
Cl i mat e Control
DTC B1241 or DTC i ndi cat or N and A / C ON;
A Probl em in the Bl ower Motor Ci rcui t
2. Tur n t he i gni t i on swi t ch t o LOCK (0), and t hen to
ON (II).
21-103).
4. Chec k for DTCs.
Is DTC B1241 or N and A/C ON Indicated?
NO-l nt er mi t t ent f ai l ure. Chec k for l oose wi r es or poor
c onnec t i ons on t he bl ower mot or c i r c ui t . !
6. Chec k t he No. 8 (40 A) f use in t he under -hood
f use/r el ay box, and t he No. 16 (7.5 A) f use i n t he
Are the fuses OK ?
NO-Repl ac e t he f us es , and r ec hec k . B
7. Di sc onnec t t he bl ower mot or 2P connect or .
9. Measur e t he vol t age bet ween bl ower mot or 2P
11. Di sc onnec t t he bl ower mot or 2P connect or .
12. Connec t bl ower mot or 2P connect or t er mi nal No. 2 to
G
iHll
GRN
J UMPER WIRE
Does the blower motor run?
NO-Repl ac e t he bl ower mot or (see page 21- 67) .
16. Di sc onnec t t he power t r ansi st or 4P connect or .
17. Chec k f or cont i nui t y bet ween power t r ansi st or 4P
connect or t er mi nal No. 2 and body gr ound. ;
1
,
2
3 4
BLK
NO-Chec k f or an open i n t he BL K wi r e bet ween t he
power t r ansi st or and body gr ound. If t he wi r e i s OK ,
check f or poor gr ound at G302 (see page 22- 30) .
21-166
18. Connec t power t r ansi st or 4P connect or t er mi nal No. 2
BLK
1
L,
2
3 4
GRN
J UMPER WI RE
Does t he blower mot or run at high speed?
NO-Repai r an open i n t he GRN wi r e bet ween t he
power t r ansi st or and t he bl ower mo t o r . !
cl i mat e cont rol uni t connect or B (12P) t er mi nal s No. 5
PUR*
1
Y E L *
2
BL U
n -fl
1
C
M
3
/
5 6
7 8 9 10
/
12
bet ween t he cl i mat e control uni t and t he power
t r ans i s t o r . !
NO- Go to st ep 24.
of t he cl i mat e cont rol uni t connect or B (12P) and t he
power t r ansi st or 4P connect or .
12P: 4P:
No. 5 No. 1
No. 6 No. 3
PUR*
YE L * ' BL U
n -fl
1 2 3
/
5 i
7 8 9 10
/
12
PUR
BL U
cont rol uni t and t he power t r ans i s t o r . !
(cont' d)
21-167
Cl i mat e Control
cl i mat e cont rol uni t connect or B (12P) t er mi nal s No. 5
PUR*
1
Y E L *
2
7 8 9 1 0 / 12
BL U
"i. Wisj navi gat i on
Is t here volt age?
YES - Repai r a shor t to power in t he w i r e( s ) . !
NO- Go to st ep 27.
29. Test t he power t r ansi st or (see page 21-58).
Is t he power t ransist or OK?
YE S - Ch ec k f or l oose wi r es or poor c onnec t i ons at t he
cl i mat e cont rol uni t c onnec t or B (12P) and at t he
power t r ansi st or 4P connect or . If t he c onnec t i ons ar e
good, subst i t ut e a known-good cl i mat e cont rol uni t ,
(see page 21-191).H
NO-Repl ac e t he power t r ansi st or .
32. Remove t he bl ower mot or rel ay f r om t he under -hood
Is t he relay OK?
NO-Repl ac e t he bl ower mot or r el ay . !
33. Chec k f or cont i nui t y bet ween bl ower mot or rel ay 4P
socket t er mi nal No. 2 and bl ower mot or 2P connect or
t er mi nal No. 1.
1
WHT
2
WHT
2
4 3
WHT
J
NO-Repai r an open in t he wi r e bet ween t he bl ower
mot or r el ay and bl ower mo t o r . !
1 1
2
4 3
22- 85) . !
21-168

socket t ermi nal No. 4 and body gr ound.
LTGRN
is t here bat t ery volt age?
YES - Ch ec k f or an open i n t he wi r e bet ween t he
bl ower mot or r el ay 4P socket t er mi nal No. 4 and body
gr ound. If t he wi r e i s OK , check f or poor gr ound at
G301 (see page 22-28).B
and bl ower mot or rel ay 4P soc ket . H
DTC B2983 or DTC i ndi cat or M and A / C ON:
A Probl em in the Reci rcul at i on Cont rol
ON (II).
21-103).
4. Chec k t he DTCs.
Is DTC B2983 or M and A/C ON indicat ed?
c onnec t i ons on t he r eci r cul at i on cont rol mot or
ci r cui t . 11
6. Test t he reci rcul at i on cont r ol mot or (see page 21-189).
21-64), or repai r t he reci rcul at i on cont rol l i nkage or
d o o r . B
connect or .
(cont' d)
21-169
Cl i mat e Control
28P:
No. 3
No. 5
7P:
No. 1
No. 2
RE D*
PUR*
PUR*
ORN*
n 1]
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
~7\\ 12 13 14
/ 1 6 / 1 8
19 20 21 2_
23
24 25 26^ / 28
RED
PUR
S
1 2 3
/
5
NO-Repai r an open i n t he wi r e(s) bet ween t he cl i mat e
cont rol uni t and t he r eci r cul at i on cont rol mo t o r . !
RE D*
PUR*
PUR*
ORN*
16
4
18 19 20 21
8 9
23 24 25 26
11 12 13 14
28
bet ween t he cl i mat e cont rol uni t and t he reci rcul at i on
cont rol mot or . B
NO-Subst i t ut e a known-good cl i mat e cont rol uni t,
(see page 21-191 ) .
21-170
DTC B2S8 or DTC i ndi cat or K and A / C ON:
An Open in t he Reci rcul at i on Control Motor
Ci rcui t
ON (II).
21-103).
4. Check for DTCs.
Is DTC B2986 or K and A/C ON indicat ed?
connect i ons on t he reci rcul at i on cont rol mot or
c i r c ui t . !
21-64).B
connect or .
andB( 12P) .
of cl i mat e cont rol uni t c onnec t or s A (28P), B (12P), and
t he r eci r cul at i on cont rol mot or 7P connect or .
28P: 7P:
No. 12 No. 3
12P: 7P:
No. 10 No. 5
No. 12 No. 7
n n
P NK *
2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 7 l 1 12 13 14
/ 1 6 / 18 19 20 21 ^
2 3
24 25 2 6 / 2 8
BL U
s
J
1 2 3
/
5
A
7
* 1 : Wi t h navi gat i on
n n- - fl
1 2 3
/
5 6
7 8 9 10
/
12
WHT*
RE D*
:
BL K
WH T BLK
(cont' d)
21-171
Cl i mat e Control
t he reci rcul at i on cont rol mot or 7P connect or . If t he
21-190), (wi t hout navi gat i on) (see page 21- 191) .
cont rol uni t and t he reci rcul at i on cont rol mo t o r . !
Cl i mat e Cont rol Power and Ground
1. Chec k t he No. 16 (7.5 A) f use in t he dr i ver ' s
under -dash f use/ rel ay box.
is the fuse OK ?
agai n, check f or a shor t i n t he No. 16 (7.5 A) f use
c i r c ui t . !
2. Di sc onnec t cl i mat e cont rol uni t connect or A (28P).
4. Measur e t he vol t age bet ween cl i mat e cont rol uni t
L T GRN <
16 18 19 20 21
7 I 8 | 9I/I11I12I13I14
23 24 25 26 28
(7.5 A) f use in t he dr i ver ' s under -dash f use/r el ay box
and t he cl i mat e cont rol u n i t !
21-172
6. Chec k f or cont i nui t y bet ween .-climate cont r ol uni t
n-
BL K
1 2 : 6
7 8 9 1 0 / 1 2
connect i ons are good, subst i t ut e a known-good
21-190), (wi t hout navi gat i on) (see page 21-191), and
r ec hec k . B
NO -Check f or an open i n t he wi r e bet ween t he cl i mat e
cont rol uni t and body gr ound. If t he wi r e i s OK , check
f or poor gr ound at G401 (see page 22-40).B
Nawigation Communication Line
Circuit Troubleshooting
1. Oper at e t he cl i mat e cont rol syst em i n sever al modes.
Is t he climate control syst em OK?
NO -Do t he sel f -di agnost i c f unct i on wi t h t he HDS (see
page 21-102) or cl i mat e cont rol uni t (see page
21-103K B
2. Do t he Navi syst em li nks (see page 23-176).
Is t he Air-Con or TALK/BACK icon red?
Y E S -
If Ai r -c on i con i s r ed, go t o st ep 3.
If TAL K / BACK i con i s r ed, go to " voi c e cont rol does
not wor k/r espond" in t he navi gat i on syst em
sympt om t r oubl eshoot i ng (see page 23-226).B
NO -Go t o st ep 9.
4. Di sc onnec t navi gat i on uni t connect or B (32P).
5. Di sc onnec t cl i mat e cont rol uni t connect or B (12P).
(cont' d)
21-173
Cl i mat e Control
Navi gati on Communication Line Circuit Troubleshooting (cont'd)
of cl i mat e cont rol uni t connect or B (12P) and
navi gat i on uni t connect or B (32P).
12P: 32P:
No. 7 No. 20
No. 8 No. 4
No. 9 No. 21
BRN
p n- -fl
1 2 3
/
5 6
7 8 9 10
/
12
L T GRN RED
1 12I 3T4 | 5 | / / | B | 9 | 1 0 AAA/\AX
| 1 7 | 1 8 | 1 9 | 2 0 | 2 1 | / | 2 3 | 2 4 | 2 5 | 2 6 | / 1/ 1/ | / 1/ | /
PUR BRN
NAVIGATION UNIT CONNECTOR B (32P)
cont rol uni t and t he navi gat i on u n i t . l
cl i mat e cont rol uni t connect or B (12P) t er mi nal s No. 7,
8, and No. 9 i ndi vi dual l y.
is t here continuity?
bet ween t he cl i mat e cont rol uni t and t he navi gat i on
u n i t . l
NO- Go to st ep 8.
8. Rec onnec t cl i mat e cont rol uni t connect or B (12P).
10. Connec t navi gat i on uni t connect or B (32P) t er mi nal s
No. 4, 20, and No. 21 wi t h j umper wi r es.
i
NAVI GATI ON UNIT CONNECTOR B (32P)
J UMPER WI RE
n n ORN n n r , n
1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5
/A *\*\nA A A A A A
117| 18| 19|20|21 |/123|24|25|26|/1/VV1/1/
PUR BRN
21-174
12. Pr ess and hol d t he AUTO but t on, t hen pr ess and hold
t he OFF button.
Is t he HEAT/VENT indicat or solid wit h t he remaining
icons blinking?
YE S - Do t he Uni t c hec k wi t h t he navi gat i on syst em
(see page 23- 182) . B
ori gi nal cl i mat e cont rol uni t (see page 2 1 - 1 9 0 ) .
Audio Communication Lf es ^::mm
Troubl eshoot i ng
t he audi o-HVAC subdi spl ay (wi th navi gat i on) or
audi o-HVAC di spl ay uni t (wi thout navi gat i on) 12P
connect or .
audi o-HVAC subdi spl ay or di spl ay uni t 12P connect or .
28P: 12P:
No. 19 No. 7
No. 20 No. 8
1 2 3 4 5
r
6
t
7 8 9
7 l 1 12 13 14
/ 1 6 / 1 8 19 2C )21 / 23 24 25 2 6 ^ 2 8
LT B L U *
1
RE D*
2
BL U *
1
PUR *
2
(Q)(Q)
n n
1
_

C
M

:

6
7 8 9 1 0 / 1 2
RED PUR
AUDI O-HVAC S UBDI S PL AY UNIT 12P CONNECTOR*!
AUDI O-HVAC DI SPL AY UNIT 12P CONNECTOR* 2
* 2: Wi t hout navi gat i on .
NO-Repai r an open in t he wi r e bet ween cl i mat e
cont rol uni t connect or A (28P) and t he audi o-HVAC
subdi spl ay or di spl ay uni t 12P c onnec t or . H
(cont' d)
21 "* 175
Cl i mat e Control
Audio Communication Line Circuit Troubleshooting (cont'd)
4, Chec k f or cont i nui t y bet ween body gr ound and
cl i mat e cont rol uni t connect or A (28P) t er mi nal s
No. 19 and No. 20 i ndi vi dual l y.
1_.
1 2 3 4 5
= J R
6
7 8 9
/
11 12 13 14
/
16
/
18 19 2C 121
/
23 24 25 26
/
28
L T B L U*
RE D*
2
B L U*
PUR*
bet ween cl i mat e cont rol uni t c onnec t or A (28P) and
t he audi o-HVAC cont rol uni t 12P c o nnec t o r .i l
NO- Go to st ep 5.
5. Rec onnec t cl i mat e cont rol uni t c onnec t or A (28P).
6. Connec t audi o-HVAC subdi spl ay or di spl ay uni t 12P
wi r e.
AUDI O-HVAC S UBDI S PL AY UNIT 12P CONNECTOR* 1
AUDI O-HVAC DI SPL AY UNIT 12P CONNECTOR*2
p n n
1 2 3
/
5 6
RED
10 12
PUR
J UMPER WI RE
- 1 : With navigation
8. Pr ess and hol d t he DEF button and OFF but t on.
Is t he DEF but t on LED blinking?
YES - Audi o- HVAC subdi spl ay uni t or di spl ay uni t i s
f aul t y, r epl ace t he audi o-HVAC subdi spl ay uni t (see
page 23-118) or audi o-HVAC di spl ay uni t (see page
23-119).B
NO-Cl i mat e cont rol uni t i s f aul t y, r epl ace t he cl i mat e
cont rol uni t (wi th navi gat i on) (see page 21-190),
(wi t hout navi gat i on) (see page 21- 191) .
21 -176
Climate Control Swi t c h Communication Line Circuit Troubleshooting
1. Oper at e t he cl i mat e cont rol syst em wi t h t he
passenger ' s cl i mat e cont rol swi t ch i n all modes.
Does t he climat e cont rol syst em operat e?
YES-l nt er mi t t ent f ai l ure. Check f or l oose wi r es or
poor connect i ons at t he dr i ver ' s and passenger ' s
cl i mat e cont rol swi t c hes, and at t he cl i mat e cont rol
uni t .H
NO- Go to st ep 2.
2. Oper at e t he cl i mat e cont rol syst em wi t h t he dr i ver ' s
cl i mat e cont rol swi t ch i n all modes.
Does t he climat e cont rol syst em operat e?
NO- Go to st ep 11.
4. Di sconnect t he passenger ' s cl i mat e cont rol swi t ch
12P connect or .
6. Measur e the vol t age bet ween body gr ound and
passenger ' s cl i mat e cont rol swi t c h 12P connect or
t er mi nal No. 1.
PA S S E NGE R' S CL I MATE CONTROL SWI TCH
12P CONNECTOR
L TGRN
n n- HI
1 2
/
4
/
6
7 8 9 10 11 12
NO-Repai r an open i n the L T GRN wi r e. H
8. Di sconnect t he dr i ver ' s cl i mat e cont rol swi t ch 16P
connect or .
of t he passenger ' s cl i mat e cont rol swi t ch 12P
connect or and t he dr i ver ' s cl i mat e cont rol swi t ch 16P
connect or .
12P: 16P:
No. 7 No. 4
No. 8 No. 3
No. 9 No. 2
No. 10 No. 1
No. 11 No. 5
No. 12 No. 6
PA S S E NGE RS CL I MATE CONTROL SWI TCH
12P CONNECTOR
n | n
1 2
/
4
/
6
7 8 9 10 -11 12
ORN
LT
BL U
BRN L T GRN
^ @ @
YE L
BRN
n
1 2
|
3
i
X 5 i
1
/
8
.n
9
/
11 13 14
/
16
L TGRN
ORN
DRI VE RS CLIMATE CONTROL SWITCH
16P CONNECTOR
NO-Repai r an open in t he wi r es bet ween t he dr i ver ' s
cl i mat e cont rol swi t ch and the passenger ' s cl i mat e
cont rol s w i t c h .
(cont' d)
21-177
Cl i mat e Control
Climate Control Switch Communication Line Circuit Trot
(cont'd)
passenger ' s cl i mat e cont rol swi t ch 12P c onnec t or
t er mi nal s No. 7, No. 8, No. 9, No. 10, No. 11, and
No. 12.
PA S S E NGE RS CL I MATE CONTROL S WI TCH
12P CONNECTOR
n
L TB L U
n
1 2 A
-*/
6
7 8 9 10 11 12
Y EL WH T ORN BRN LT GRN
\ A / i r o c i Ho *~\T f o mo l o tQfi n i nci l c
bet ween t he dr i ver ' s cl i mat e cont rol swi t c h and t he
* passenger ' s cl i mat e cont rol swi tch. B
NO-Subst i t ut e a known-good passenger ' s cl i mat e
cont rol swi t c h, and r echeck. If t he sympt om goes
away, r epl ace t he ori gi nal passenger ' s cl i mat e cont rol
swi t ch (see page 21 -191 ) .
11. Di sc onnec t t he dr i ver ' s cl i mat e cont rol swi t c h 16P
connect or .
dr i ver ' s cl i mat e cont rol swi t ch 16P connect or t er mi nal
No. 11.
DRIVER'S CL I MATE CONTROL SWITCH 16P CONNECTOR
n 1 i f
1 2 3 4 5 6
/
8
9
/
11 13 14 16
LT G R N
is t here battery voltage?
NO-Repai r an open i n t he wi r e bet ween t he dr i ver ' s
cl i mat e cont rol swi t ch and t he No. 16 (7.5 A) f use in
t he dr i ver ' s under -dash f use/r el ay box . H
dr i ver ' s cl i mat e cont rol swi t ch 16P connect or t er mi nal
No. 14.
DRI VER' S CL I MATE CONTROL SWITCH 16P CONNECTOR
n i r
1 2 3 4 5 6
/
8
9
/
11 13 14
/
16
BL K
NO-Chec k for an open in t he wi r e bet ween t he
dr i ver ' s cl i mat e cont rol swi t ch and body gr ound. If t he
wi r e i s OK, check for poor gr ound at G401 (see page
22-40J.B
21-178
17, Chec k f or cont i nui t y bet ween dr i ver ' s cl i mat e control
swi t ch 16Pc onnec t or t er mi nal No. 13 and cl i mat e
cont rol uni t connect or A (28P) t er mi nal No. 28.
DRI VER' S CL I MATE CONTROL S WI TCH 16P CONNECTOR
n i r
1 2 3 4 5 6
/
8
11 13 14 16
L TGRN
1 2 3 4 5
r -
6 7 8
- f l
9
7
11 12 13 14
n
/
16
/
18 19 20 21
/
23 24 25 26
/
28
GRN
NO-Repai r an open in t he wi r e(s) bet ween t he dr i ver ' s
cl i mat e cont rol swi t ch and t he cl i mat e cont rol uni t .H
18. Chec k f or cont i nui t y bet ween dr i ver ' s cl i mat e cont rol
swi t ch 16P connect or t er mi nal s No. 13 and No. 14.
DRI VE RS CL I MATE CONTROL S WI TCH 16P CONNECTOR
n [
1 2 3 4 5 6
9 / 1 1 / 1 3 1 4 / 1 6
L TGRN BLK
YES - Repai r a shor t to anot her wi r e. H
NO- Go to st ep 19.
19. Reconnect t he dr i ver ' s cl i mat e cont rol swi t ch 16P
connect or .
20. Reconnect cl i mat e cont rol uni t connect or A (28P).
21. Pr ess and hol d t he FAN UP swi t c h, t hen pr ess t he OFF
swi t c h.
Is the REC button LED blinking?
NO-Subst i t ut e a known-good dr i ver ' s cl i mat e cont r ol
swi t c h (see page 21-191), and r echeck t he f unct i on. If
t he sympt om i s sti ll pr esent , r epl ace t he cl i mat e
cont rol uni t (see page 21-190)J I
22. Chec k t he dr i ver ' s cl i mat e cont rol swi t ch L EDs .
Are the REC button and AUTO button LEDs blinking?
YES - Dr i v er ' s cl i mat e cont rol swi t c h i s f aul t y, r epl ace
t he dr i ver ' s cl i mat e cont rol swi t c h (see page
21- 19D. B
NO- Go to st ep 23.
23. Chec k t he dr i ver ' s cl i mat e cont rol swi t ch L EDs .
Are the REC button and DUAL button LEDs blinking?
YES-Subst i t ut e a known-good dr i ver ' s cl i mat e
cont rol swi t c h (see page 21-191), and r echeck t he
f unct i on. If t he sympt om i s sti ll pr esent , r epl ace t he
cl i mat e cont rol uni t (see page 21- 190) .
NO-Chec k f or l oose wi r es or poor connect i ons at
cl i mat e cont rol uni t connect or A (28P) and dr i ver ' s
cl i mat e cont rol swi t c h 16P connect or . If t he
connect i ons ar e good, r epl ace t he cl i mat e cont rol uni t
(see page21-190). B
21-179
Cl i mat e Control
A/C Pressure Switch Circuit Troubleshooting
NOTE:
if t he bl ower mot or does not run at all s peeds , t he A/ C
sel f -di agnost i c f unct i on, and c hec k f or DTC B1241.
Bef ore per f or mi ng any ot her t r oubl eshoot i ng, repai r
t he c ause of t he i noperat i ve bl ower mot or.
i ndex.
Chec k t he A/ C hi gh-si de pr essur e.
Bef ore doi ng sympt om t r oubl eshoot i ng, c hec k f or
power t r ai n DTCs (see page 11-3). Al so c hec k f or
Does the blower motor operate at all speeds?
NO-Repai r t he pr obl em i n t he bl ower mot or ci rcui t
(see page21-166). B
3. Do t he sensor i nput di spl ay mode (see page 21-107).
Is Sensor #5 (evaporative outlet air temperature) above
3C?
NO- Go to st ep 15.
5. Di sconnect cl i mat e cont rol uni t c onnec t or A (28P).
:fl_
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 11 12 13 14
16
/
18 19 20 21
/
23 24 25 26
/
PUR*
1
L T B L U *
2
YES - Repl ac e t he cl i mat e cont rol uni t (wi th
(see page 21-191 ) .
NO- Go to st ep 8.
9. Di sconnect t he A/ C pr essur e swi t ch 2P connect or .
11. Measur e t he vol t age bet ween A/ C pr essur e swi t ch 2P
PUR
pr essur e swi t ch and t he MICU. If t he wi r e i s OK,
subst i t ut e a known-good MICU and r echeck. If t he
sympt om goes away, r epl ace t he or i gi nal MICU.II
21-180
12. Chec k for cont i nui t y bet ween t er mi nal s No. 1 and
No. 2 of A/ C pr essur e swi t c h.
A/C PRESSURE SWITCH
NO- Repl ac e t he A/ C pr essur e s w i t c h .
13. Connec t A/ C pr essur e swi t ch 2P connect or t er mi nal
PUR
J UMPER WI RE
c onnec t or A (28P) t er mi nal No. 21 and A/ C pr essur e
swi t ch 2P connect or t er mi nal No. 1.
n n
3 4 5 6 7 8 9
/
11 12 13 14
16 [/118[ 19[ 2Q|211/I 23|24l25l26l/128
LT BL U
A / C PRE S S URE S WI TCH 2P CONNECTOR
cl i mat e cont rol uni t c onnec t or A (28P) and at t he A/ C
pr essur e swi t ch 2P c onnec t or .H
cont rol uni t and A/ C pr essur e swi t ch.
B(12P).
Do t he compressor and fans operat e?
NO-Chec k for B-CAN c odes (see page 22-109).H
(cont' d)
21-181
Cl i mat e Control
A/ C Pr essur e Swi t c h Ci rcui t
Troubl eshoot i ng (cont'd)
17. Measur e t he evapor at or t emper at ur e s ens or
r esi st anc e bet ween cl i mat e cont rol uni t c onnec t or A
(28P) t er mi nal No. 23 and connect or B (12P) t er mi nal
No. 10.
n n
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
/
11 12 13 14
16 18|l9l20l21 l / l 23l 24|25l26L/ | 28
BRN
n
r
n
p
1
2 3
/
5 6
i l l ) !
| f | 0 | b | I U | /
/ i . _
' j I Z
WH T*
RED*
2
Is the resistance less than 24kO?
YE S - Ch ec k f or l oose wi r es or poor c onnec t i ons at t he
cl i mat e cont rol uni t c onnec t or s. If t he c onnec t i ons ar e
good, subst i t ut e a known-good cl i mat e cont rol uni t
and r echeck. if t he sympt om goes away, r epl ace t he
ori gi nal cl i mat e cont rol uni t (wi th navi gat i on) (see
page 21-190), (wi t hout navi gat i on) (see page
21-191 ) .
NO-Tes t t he evapor at or t emper at ur e s ens or (see
page 21-58).H
A / C Si gnal Ci rcui t Troubl eshoot i ng
NOTE:
If t he bl ower mot or does not run at all s peeds , t he A/ C
sel f -di agnost i c f unct i on, and c hec k f or DTC B1241.
Bef ore per f or mi ng any ot her t r oubl eshoot i ng, repai r
t he c ause of t he i noperat i ve bl ower mot or.
i ndex.
powert rai n DTCs (see page 11-3).
Dccc the b!c\vor motor operate at all speeds?
NO-Repai r t he pr obl em in t he bl ower mot or ci rcui t
(see page21-166).H
3. Do t he sensor i nput di spl ay mode (see page 21-107).
Is Sensor #5 (evaporative outlet air temperature) above
3 C?.
NO- Go to st ep 9.
21-182
fl Hi
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
/
11 12 13 14
' / 1l 6L /1l8ll9l20|21 lXi23l24l25|26l/
7
[28
PUR*
1
LT B LU**
* 1 : With navigation
/ s tf?ere bat t ery volt age?
YES - Repl ac e t he cl i mat e cont rol uni t (with
(see page 21-191 ).DI
NO- Go to st ep 8.
8. Measur e t he vol t age bet ween dr i ver ' s under -dash
body gr ound.
DRIVER'S UNDER-DASH F USE/RELAY BOX
CONNECTOR F (33P)
PUR
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 | . 9 10I11 12 13 14
.|15J16|17|18
19
33 20 21 22 23 24 2526|2728 29J30 31 32
19
33
YES - Repai r an open in t he wi r e bet ween t he cl i mat e
cont rol uni t and t he MI CU. ill
NO-Chec k f or l oose wi r e or poor connect i ons at
dr i ver ' s under -dash f use/r el ay box connect or F (33P)
t er mi nal Mo. 5. if t he c onnec t i ons ar e good, subst i t ut e
a known-good MICU and r echeck. If t he sympt om
goes away, r epl ace t he ori gi nal MI CU. H
r esi st anc e bet ween cl i mat e cont rol uni t connect or A
(28P) t er mi nal No. 23 and connect or B (12P) t er mi nal
No. 10.
n n
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
/
11 12 13 14
/
1 6 / 18 19 20 21
/
23 24 25 26
/
28
BRN
n
f l
1 2 3 / 5 6
7 8 9 1 0 / 12
WHT*'
Is t he resist ance less t han 24 kO?
cl i mat e cont rol uni t connect or s. If t he connect i ons ar e
good, subst i t ut e a known-good cl i mat e cont rol uni t
and recheck. If t he sympt om goes away, r epl ace t he
ori gi nal cl i mat e cont rol uni t (wi th navi gat i on) (see
page 21-190), (wi t hout navi gat i on) (see page
21-19D. H
page 21- 58).
21-183
Cl i mat e Control
In-car Temper at ur e Sensor Test
NOTE: Bef or e t est i ng t he sensor , check f or HVAC DTCs
(see page 21-101).
21-184).
2. Test t he i n-car t emper at ur e sensor whi l e hol di ng it i n
front of t he dashboar d cent er vent .
Measur e t he r esi st anc e wi t h t he syst em set to Max
Cool .
Measur e t he r esi st ance wi t h t he syst em set to Max
Hot.
3. Compar e t he r esi st anc e r eadi ng bet ween t er mi nal s
No. 1 and No. 2 of t he i n-car t emper at ur e sensor wi t h
t he speci f i cat i ons shown i n t he gr aph; t he r esi st ance
shoul d be wi t hi n t he speci f i cat i ons f or what ever t he
ambi ent t emper at ur e i s.
IN-CAR TEMPERATURE S E NS OR
L
1
1
U
I
2
L
J
1
1
U
I
2
L
l n-car Temperat ure Sensor
Repl acement
1. Remove t he dr i ver ' s i nner dashboar d t ri m (see page
20-167).
2. Di sc onnec t t he connect or (A), and r emove t he i n-car
t emper at ur e sensor (B) f rom t he ai r hose (C).
3. Inst al l t he sensor in t he r ever se order of r emoval . Be
sur e to connect t he ai r hose sec ur el y.
14 32 50 68 86 104 F
-10 0 10 20 30 40 C
TEMPERATURE
4. If t he r esi st anc e i s not as spec i f i ed, r epl ace t he i n-car
t emper at ur e sensor (see page 21-184).
21-184
Outside Air Temperature Sensor
Test
NOTE: Bef or e t est i ng t he sensor , c hec k f or HVAC DTCs
(see page 21-101):.
1. Remove t he out si de ai r t emper at ur e s ens or (seepage'
21-185).
2. Di p t he s ens or i n i ce wat er , and measur e t he
r esi st anc e. Th en pour war m wat er on t he s ens or , and
c hec k f or a c hange in r esi st ance.
3. Compar e t he r esi st anc e readi ng bet ween t er mi nal s
No. 1 and No. 2 of t he out si de ai r t emper at ur e sensor
wi t h t he speci f i cat i ons shown" i n t he gr aph; t he
r esi st anc e shoul d be wi t hi n t he speci f i cat i ons.
OUTSIDE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
RESISTANCE
6
(kQ) 5
14 32 50 68 86 104 F
- 10 0 10 20 30 40 C
TEMPERATURE
4. If t he r esi st anc e i s not as spec i f i ed, r epl ace t he out si de
ai r t emper at ur e sensor (see page 21-185).
Outside Air Temperature Sensor
Replacement
1. Li ft t he t ab (A) to r el ease t he l ock, t hen r emove t he
out si de ai r t emper at ur e sensor (B) f r om t he f ront
bumper beam. Di sc onnec t t he 2P connect or (C) f r om
t he out si de ai r t emper at ur e sensor .
2. Inst al l t he sensor i n t he r ever se or der of r emoval .
21-185
Cl i mat e Control
Sunl i ght Sensor Test Sunl i ght Sensor Repl acement
N O T E ; Bef ore t est i ng the sensor , c hec k f or HVAC DTCs
(see page 21-101).
1. Remove t he sunl i ght sensor (see page 21 -186).
Wi t h aut omat i c l i ght i ng sensor
PUR
Wi t hout aut omat i c l i ght i ng sensor
1. Remove t he sunl i ght sensor (A) f r om t he dashboar d,
t hen di sc onnec t t he connect or (B). Be caref ul not to
damage t he sensor and t he dashboar d.
2. Install t he sensor i n t he r ever se or der of r emoval .
PUK RED
2. Tur n t he i gni ti on swi t c h to ON (II). Measur e t he
vol t age bet ween t he t er mi nal s wi t h t he ( +) probe on
t er mi nal No. 4 (wi th aut omat i c li ghti ng sensor ) or
No. 1 (wi thout aut omat i c li ghti ng sensor ) and t he ( )
probe on t er mi nal No. 2 wi t h t he connect or
connect ed.
NOTE: The vol t age r eadi ngs wi l l not c hange under t he
li ght of a f l ashl i ght or a f l uor escent l amp. Vol t age
shoul d be:
3.63.7 V or mor e wi t h t he sensor out of di rect
sunl i ght .
3.33.5 V or l ess wi t h t he sensor in di rect sunl i ght .
3. If t he vol t age i s not as spec i f i ed, r epl ace t he sunl i ght
sensor (see page 21-186).
21-186
Passenger's Air Mix Control Motor Test
NOTE: Bef ore t est i ng t he mot or, check f or HVAC DTCs
(see page 21-101).
1 Di sconnect t he 7P connect or f rom t he passenger ' s ai r
mi x cont rol motor.
f NQTl CEl
passenger ' s ai r mi x cont rol mot or wi l l damage it.
Fol l ow t he i nst ruct i ons caref ul l y.
2. Connec t battery power to t er mi nal No. 1 of t he
passenger ' s ai r mi x cont rol mot or, and gr ound
t er mi nal No. 2; t he passenger ' s ai r mi x cont rol mot or
shoul d r un, and st op at Max Cool . If it doesn' t , r ever se
t he connect i ons; t he passenger ' s ai r mi x cont rol
mot or shoul d r un, and st op at Max Hot. When t he
passenger ' s ai r mi x cont rol mot or st ops r unni ng,
di sc onnec t battery power i mmedi at el y.
No. 7. It shoul d be bet ween 4.2 to 7.8 kQ.
5. Rec onnec t t he passenger ' s ai r mi x cont rol mot or 7P
connect or , t hen t ur n t he i gni t i on swi t c h t o ON (II).
connect or .
Max Cool : about 1.5 V
Max Hot : about 4.5 V
7. If ei t her t he r esi st anc e or t he vol t age r eadi ngs ar e not
as spec i f i ed, r epl ace t he passenger ' s ai r mi x cont rol
mot or (see page 21 -188).
PAS S E NGE R' S AIR MIX CONTROL MOTOR
3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
3. If t he passenger ' s ai r mi x cont rol mot or di d not run i n
st ep 2, r emove it, t hen check t he passenger ' s ai r mi x
cont rol l i nkage and door f or smoot h movement .
passenger ' s ai r mi x cont rol mot or (see page
21-188).
needed.
If t he passenger ' s ai r mi x cont rol mot or r uns
smoot hl y, go to st ep 4.
21-187
Cl i mat e Control
Passenger's Air Mix Control Motor
Replacement
2, Di sc onnec t t he 4P connect or (A) f r om t he power
t r ansi st or (B), and t he 7P connect or (C) f r om t he
passenger ' s ai r mi x cont rol mot or (D). Remove t he
sel f -t appi ng s c r ews and t he passenger ' s ai r mi x
cont rol mot or f r om t he heat er uni t.
Mode Control Motor Test
NOTE: Bef or e t est i ng t he mot or, check f or HVAC DTCs
(see page 21-101).
1. Di sconnect t he 7P connect or f r om t he mode cont rol
mot or.
IMOTICE]
Incorrect l y appl yi ng power and gr ound to t he mode
cont rol mot or wi l l damage i t Fol l ow t he i nst r uct i ons
car ef ul l y.
2. Connec t battery power to t er mi nal No. 1 of t he mode
cont rol mot or, and gr ound t er mi nal No. 2* t he mode
cont rol mot or shoul d r un, and st op at Def rost . If it
doesn' t , r ever se t he c onnec t i ons; t he mode cont rol
mot or shoul d r un, and st op at Vent When t he mode
cont rol mot or st ops r unni ng, di sc onnec t battery
MODE CONTROL MOTOR
: .
D
3. I nstall t he mot or in t he r ever se or der of r emoval .
3. If t he mode cont rol mot or di d not run in st ep 2,
r emove it, t hen check t he mode cont rol l i nkage and
needed.
st ep 4.
21-188
Recirculation Control motor Test
No. 7 of t he mode cont rol mot or. It shoul d be bet ween
4.2 and 7.8 kO.
5. Reconnect t he mode cont rol mot or 7P connect or ,
t hen t urn t he i gni ti on swi t c h to ON (II).
connect or .
Vent : About 0.5 V
Def r ost : About 4.5 V
7. If ei t her t he r esi st anc e or t he vol t age r eadi ngs are not
as spec i f i ed, r epl ace t he mode cont rol mot or (see
page 21-62).
NOTE: Bef or e t est i ng t he mot or , c hec k f or HVAC DTCs
(see page 21-101).
1. Di sc onnec t t he 7P connect or f rom t he r eci r cul at i on
cont rol mot or .
i NOTl CEl
Incor r ect l y appl yi ng power and gr ound to t he
r eci r cul at i on cont r ol mot or wi l l damage it. Fol l ow t he
i nst r uct i ons car ef ul l y.
2. Connec t bat t ery power to t er mi nal No. 1 of t he
r eci r cul at i on cont r ol mot or, and gr ound t er mi nal No.
2; t he r eci r cul at i on cont rol mot or shoul d r un, and st op
at Fr esh. If it doesn' t , r ever se t he c onnec t i ons; t he
r eci r cul at i on cont rol mot or shoul d r un, and st op at
Reci r cul at e. When t he reci rcul at i on cont rol mot or
st ops r unni ng, di sc onnec t battery power
i mmedi at el y.
3. If t he r eci r cul at i on cont rol mot or di d not run in st ep 2,
r emove it, t hen check t he reci rcul at i on cont rol li nkage
and door f or smoot h movement .
If t he l i nkage and door move smoot hl y, repl ace t he
r eci r cul at i on cont rol mot or (see page 21-64).
needed.
If t he reci rcul at i on cont rol mot or r uns smoot hl y, go
to st ep 4.
(cont' d)
21-189
Cl i mat e Cont rol
(cont'd)
No. 7 of t he r eci r cul at i on cont rol mot or. It shoul d be
bet ween 4.2 and 7.8 kO.
5. Reconnect t he r eci r cul at i on cont rol mot or 7P
connect or , t hen t ur n t he i gni ti on swi t c h to ON (II).
connect or .
Fr es h: About 1.0 V
Rec i r c ul at e: About 4.0 V
7. If ei t her t he r esi st anc e or t he vol t age r eadi ngs ar e not
as spec i f i ed, r epl ace t he reci rcul at i on cont rol mot or
(see page 21-64).
Climate Control Unit
Remowal/instaiation
Wi t h Navi gat i on
1. Remove t he passenger ' s dashboar d under cover (see
page 20-170).
2. Di sconnect t he connect or s (A). Loosen t he bolt (B)
and r emove t he bol t s (C) f r om t he cl i mat e cont rol uni t
3. Inst al l t he cont rol uni t in t he r ever se or der of r emoval .
Af t er i nst al l at i on, operat e t he var i ous f unct i ons to
make sur e t hey wor k properl y.
4. Run t he sel f -di agnost i c f unct i on to conf i r m that t her e
ar e no pr obl ems in t he syst em (see page 21-102).
21-190
Climate Control Switch
Remowal/lnstalation
Wi t hout Navi gat i on
1. Remove t he audi o uni t (see page 23-115).
2. Remove t he sel f -t appi ng sc r ews and t he cl i mat e
cont rol uni t (A). If nec essar y, r epl ace t he bul bs (B).
3. Install t he cont rol uni t i n t he r ever se or der of r emoval .
4. Run t he sel f -di agnost i c f unct i on to conf i r m t hat t her e
ar e no pr obl ems i n t he syst em (see page 21-102).
1 Remove t he audi o uni t (see page 23-114).
2. Remove t he sel f -t appi ng sc r ews and t he cl i mat e
cont r ol swi t c hes (A). If nec essar y, r epl ace t he bul bs
( B) .
B
B
V A
3. Inst al l t he swi t c hes in t he r ever se or der of r emoval .
4. Run t he sel f -di agnost i c f unct i on to conf i r m that t her e
ar e no pr obl ems i n t he syst em (see page 21-102).
21-191
SUPPL EMENTAL RESTRAINT S YS TE M (SRS) (if el ect r i cal mai nt enance i s requi red)
The Ac c or d S RS i ncl udes a dr i ver ' s ai r bag in t he st eer i ng wheel hub, a passenger ' s ai r bag in t he dashboar d
above t he gl ove box, seat belt t ensi oner s i n t he f ront seat belt r et r act or s, si de curt ai n ai r bags in t he si des of t he
roof, and si de ai r bags in t he f ront seat -bac ks. Inf ormat i on nec essar y to saf el y ser vi c e t he S RS i s i ncl uded i n t hi s
f ront al or si de col l i si on, all S RS ser vi c e wor k shoul d be done by an aut hor i zed Honda deal er .
9 Do not bump or i mpact t he S RS uni t , f ront i mpact s ens or s , si de i mpact s ens or s , or rear saf i ng sensor ,
espec i al l y when t he i gni ti on swi t c h i s i n ON (11), or f or at l east 3 mi nut es after t he i gni ti on swi t ch i s t ur ned to
L OCK (0); ot her wi se, t he syst em may fai l i n a col l i si on, or t he ai r bags may depl oy.
S RS el ect r i cal connect or s ar e i dent i f i ed by yel l ow col or c odi ng. Rel at ed c omponent s ar e l ocat ed in t he
i n t he f ront seat s, in t he roof si de, and ar ound t he f l oor. Do not use el ect ri cal t est equi pment on t hese ci r cui t s.
Body Electrical
Body Electrical
Rel ay and Control Unit Locations
Engi ne Compar t ment . . . . 22-7
Das hboar d . . 22-8
Roof and Tr unk 22-12
S eat 22-13
Door 22-15
Connec t or s and Har nesses
Connec t or Index 22-16
Connec t or t o Har nes s Index 22-18
Fuse/ Rel ay Boxes
Connec t or t o Fus e/ Rel ay Box Index 22-75
Power Di st r i but i on
Fus e t o Co mpo nent s Index 22-78
Gr ound Di st r i but i on
Gr ound t o Co mpo nent s Index 22-84
Under -hood Fus e/ Rel ay Box
Remov al and Inst al l at i on . . . 22-85
Under -dash Fus e/ Rel ay Box
Dr i ver ' s Und er - d as h Fus e/ Rel ay Box
(MICU) Remo v al and Inst al l at i on 22-86
Pas s eng er ' s Under - das h Fus e/ Rel ay
Box (MICU) Remo v al and
Bat t er y
Bat t er y Tes t 22-90
Bat t er y Ter mi nal Di s c onnec t i on and
Rec onnec t i on . . . . . 22-91
Bat t er y Remo v al and Inst al l at i on 22-92
Rel ays
Power Rel ay Tes t 22-93
Igni ti on Swi t c h
* K ey Int er l ock S y s t em Ci r c ui t
* K ey Int er l ock S ol enoi d Tes t 22-105
Par k Pi n S wi t c h Tes t 22-105
* Igni t i on S wi t c h Tes t 22-106
* Igni t i on S wi t c h Repl ac ement 22-107
Mul t i pl ex Int egr at ed Cont r ol
Sy s t em
Gener al Tr oubl es hoot i ng Inf or mat i on . 22-109
Tr oubl es hoot i ng
B- CAN S y s t em Di agnos i s Tes t Mode
A 22- 134
B . . 22-135
C . 22-136
D 22-137
1 and Tes t Mode 2 (wi t hout t he
HDS ) . . . 22- 138
S l eep and Wak e- up Mode Tes t 22-140
MI CU i nput Tes t . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-151
K ey l es s / Power Door
L oc ks/ Sec ur i t y S y s t em
S y mpt o m Tr oubl es hoot i ng I n d e x . . . . . 22-172
S y mpt o m Tr oubl es hoot i ng 22-174
Cont r ol Uni t Input Tes t 22-176
Door L oc k Ac t uat or Tes t 22-189
Door L oc k K nob S wi t c h T e s t . . . . . . . . . . 22-190
Door K ey Cy l i nder S wi t c h T e s t . . . . . . . . 22-191
S ec ur i t y Hood S wi t c h Tes t 22-191
Tr unk Li d Rel eas e Ac t uat or T e s t . . . . . . . 22-192
Tr ans mi t t er Tes t 22-192
Tr i pped S ens o r Hi st or y 22-195
Hor ns
Hor n Tes t / Repl ac ement 22-198
Hor n S wi t c h Tes t 22-198
Ext er i or Li ght s
Bac k -up Li ght s 22-214
Br ake Li ght s 22-215
MI CU Input Tes t 22-226
Combi nat i on Li ght S wi t c h
Headl i ght Adj us t ment 22-233
Headl i ght R e p l a c e m e n t . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-235
Bul b Repl ac ement 22-236
Tai l l i ght Repl ac ement 22-239
L i c ens e Pl at e Li ght Repl ac ement 22-240
Hi gh Mount Br ake Li ght Repl ac ement . 22-241
Br ake Pedal Posi t i on S wi t c h Tes t 22-241
Tur n Si gnal / Hazar d War ni ng Li ght s
Co mpo nent L oc at i on i ndex 22-242
Hazar d War ni ng S wi t c h
Int eri or Li ght s
Fr ont Indi vi dual Map Li ght
Tes t / Repl ac ement . . . . . 22-258
Cei l i ng Li ght Tes t / Repl ac ement 22-259
Tr unk Li ght Tes t / Repl ac ement 22-259
Int er i or Li ght S wi t c h
Ambi ent L i ght Repl ac ement 22-260
Cour t es y Li ght Repl ac ement 22-261
Gl o v e Box Li ght Repl ac ement 22-261
Vani t y Mi r r or Li ght Tes t / Repl ac ement . 22-262
Tr unk Li d L at c h S wi t c h Tes t 22-262
Ent r y Li ght s Cont r ol S y s t em
Igni t i on K ey S wi t c h Tes t 22-274
Igni t i on K ey Li ght Tes t 22-274
Power Wi ndows
Co mpo nent L oc at i on I ndex . . . 22-275
Reset t i ng t he Po wer Wi nd o w Cont r ol
Uni t . 22-280
DTC Tr o ub l es h o o t i ng . . . 22-285
Power Wi nd o w Mas t er S wi t c h Input
Tes t 22-292
Fr ont Pas s eng er ' s Po wer Wi nd o w
S wi t c h Input Tes t 22-296
Dr i ver ' s Po wer Wi nd o w Mot or T e s t . . . . 22-299
Mot or Tes t 22-301
Rear Po wer Wi nd o w Mot or Tes t 22-304
Power Wi nd o w Mas t er S wi t c h
S wi t c h Repl ac ement 22-306
Rear Po wer Wi nd o w S wi t c h
Wi per s / Was her s
DTC Tr o ub l es h o o t i ng . . . . . . 22-312
Wi per A/Vasher S wi t c h
Te s t / Re p l ac e me n t . . . , . . . . . 22-319
Wi per Mot or T e s t . . . . . . . . . . 22-319
Was h er Mot or Tes t . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-320
Was h er Fl ui d L ev el S wi t c h T e s t . . . . . . . 22-321
Wi per Mot or Repl ac ement 22-321
Was h er Res er v oi r Re p l ac e m e n t . . . . . . . 22-324
Wi per Bl ade Repl ac ement 22-325
Wi per Ar m/ Noz z l e A d j u s t m e n t . . . . . . . . 22-327
Was h er Tub e R e p l a c e m e n t . . . . . . . . . . . 22-329
Gauges
Co mpo nent L oc at i on I n d e x . . . . . . . 22-330
Sel f -di agnos t i c Func t i on 22-332
Gaug e Cont r ol Modul e Input Tes t . 22-347
Rewr i t i ng t he ODO Dat a and
Tr ans f er r i ng t he Mai nt enanc e
Mi nder Dat a t o a New Gaug e Cont r ol
Modul e 22-350
Gaug e Cont r ol Modul e Repl ac ement . . 22-351
Out s i de Ai r Temper at ur e i ndi c at or
Cal i br at i on 22-352
Out s i de Ai r Temper at ur e S ens o r T e s t . . 22-353
Out s i de Ai r Temper at ur e S ens o r
Saf et y Indi cat or S y s t em
Co mpo nent L oc at i on Index . . . . . . . 22-354
Ci r c ui t Di agr am , 22-356
MI CU Input T e s t . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-358
Remi nder S y s t ems
Moonr oof
Reset t i ng t he Moonr oof Cont r ol Uni t . . 22-371
Moonr oof Cont r ol Uni t i nput T e s t . . . . . 22-373
Moonr oof S wi t c h Tes t / Repl ac ement . . . 22-376
Ac c essor y Power Soc ket s
Co mpo nent L oc at i on i ndex 22-377
Fr ont Ac c es s o r y Power Soc k et
Co ns o l e Ac c es s o r y Power S oc k et
Power Mi r r or s
Co mpo nent L oc at i on I nd ex . . . . . . . 22-382
Ci r c ui t Di agr am . . . . . . . . . 22-384
Func t i on Tes t 22-390
Power Wi nd o w Mast er S wi t c h Input
Tes t . . 22-391
S wi t c h i nput Tes t 22- 394
Power Mi r r or S wi t c h
Tes t / Repl ac ement . . 22- 396
Po wer Mi r r or Ac t uat or Tes t 22- 396
Power Mi r r or Ac t uat or Rep l ac emen t . . . 22- 397
Aut omat i c Di mmi ng Insi de Mi rror
Ci r c ui t Di agr am 22- 399
S y s t em Des c r i pt i o n. . 22- 400
Tes t / Repl ac ement . . 22- 400
Power Seat s
Power S eat Adj us t ment S wi t c h
Tes t / Repl ac ement 22- 403
Dr i ver ' s Power S eat Mot or Tes t 22- 404
Power Lumbar Suppor t
Co mpo nent L oc at i on Index . . . . 22- 406
S wi t c h Tes t / Repl ac ement 22- 408
Mot or Tes t 22- 408
Seat Heat er s
Co mpo nent L oc at i on Index 22- 409
S eat Heat er Tes t 22- 414
S wi t c h Tes t / Repl ac ement 22- 415
Rear Wi ndow Def ogger
Ci r c ui t Di agr am . . . 22- 418
Func t i on Tes t . . 22- 422
Def ogger Wi r e Repai r 22- 423
Immobi l i zer Sy s t em
S y s t em Desc r i pt i on 22- 425
DTC Tr oubl es hoot i ng 22- 427
Inf or mat i on 22- 429
S y mpt o m Tr oubl es hoot i ng I n d e x . . . . . 22-431
S y mpt o m Tr oubl es hoot i ng . . . 22- 432
S y s t em Ch ec k . . . 22- 434
St at us L og 22- 436
I mmobi l i z er -K ey l es s Cont r ol Uni t Input
Tes t 22- 437
Immobi l i zer K ey Regi st r at i on 22- 439
I mmobi l i z er -K ey l es s Cont r ol Uni t
Repl ac ement 22- 440
Body Electri cal
Speci al Tool s
07AAC-000A1A0 Rel ay Pul l er 1

07TAZ-001020A Back Pr obe Adapt er , 17 mm 2

07WAZ-001010A MPCS (MCIC) Ser vi c e Connect or 1
22-2
Ti ps and Pr ecaut i ons
Back Probe Adapt er , 17 mm 07TAZ-001020A
Bef or e Tr oubl eshoot i ng
1. Check appl i cabl e f uses in t he appropri at e f use/r el ay
box.
2. Chec k t he battery for damage, st at e of c har ge, and
cl ean and ti ght connect i ons.
[NOTICE]
Do not qui ck-char ge a battery unl ess t he battery
gr ound cabl e has been di sc onnec t ed, ot her wi se
you wi l l damage t he al t ernat or di odes.
Do not attempt to crank the engi ne wi t h t he battery
gr ound cabl e l oosel y connect ed or you wi l l sever el y
damage t he wi r i ng.
Handl i ng Connec t or s
Make sur e t he connect or s are c l ean and have no l oose
wi r e t er mi nal s.
Make sur e mul t i pl e cavi t y connect or s ar e packed wi t h
di el ect ri c gr ease (except wat ert i ght connect or s).
Al l connect or s have push-down r el ease t ype l ocks (A).
A
S o me connect or s have a cl i p on t hei r si de used to
at t ach t hem to a mount bracket on t he body or on
anot her component . Thi s cl i p has a pull t ype lock.
S ome mount ed c onnec t or s cannot be di sconnect ed
unl ess you fi rst r el ease t he lock and r emove t he
connect or f rom its mount bracket (A).
Never try to di sc onnec t c onnec t or s by pul l i ng on t hei r
wi r es; pull on t he connect or hal ves i nst ead.
Al ways rei nst al l pl ast i c c over s.
Bef ore connect i ng c onnec t or s, make sur e t he
t er mi nal s (A) ar e in pl ace and not bent .
(cont ' d)
22-3
Body Elect ri cal
Chec k f or l oose r et ai ner s (A) and r ubber seal s (B ).
The backs of s ome c onnec t or s ar e packed wi t h
di el ect r i c gr ease. Add gr ease if nec essar y. If t he
gr ease i s cont ami nat ed, r epl ace i t
Insert t he connect or all t he way and make sur e it i s
sec ur el y l ocked.
Posi t i on wi r es so t hat t he open end of t he c over f ac es
down.
Handl i ng Wi r es and Har nesses
Sec ur e wi r es and wi r e har nesses to t he f r ame wi t h
t hei r r espect i ve wi r e t i es at t he desi gnat ed l ocat i ons.
Remove cl i ps caref ul l y; don' t damage t hei r l ocks (A).
Af t er i nst al l i ng har ness c l i ps, make sur e t he har ness
doesn' t i nt erf ere wi t h any movi ng par t s.
Keep wi r e har nesses away f r om exhaust c omponent s
and ot her hot par t s, f r om shar p edges of bracket s and
hol es, and f rom exposed sc r ews and bol t s.
Seat gr ommet s in t hei r gr ooves properl y (A). Do not
l eave gr ommet s di st ort ed (B).
A B
22-4
Test i ng and Repai r s
Do not u s e wi r es or har nesses wi t h broken i nsul at i on.
Repl ace t hem or repai r t hem by wr appi ng t he break
wi t h el ect ri cal t ape or shr i nk t ubi ng.
Never at t empt to modi f y, splice, or repai r S RS wi r i ng.
If t here i s an open or damage i s S RS wi r i ng or
t er mi nal s, r epl ac e t he har ness.
0 After i nst al l i ng par t s, make sur e that no wi r es are
pi nched under them.
When usi ng el ect ri cal t est equi pment , f ol l ow t he
manuf act ur er ' s i nst ruct i ons and t hose desc r i bed in
t hi s manual .
If possi bl e, i nsert t he probe of t he t est er f r om t he wi r e
si de (except wat er pr oof connect or ).
Use back probe adapt er , 17 mm 07TAZ-001020A.
Fi ve-st ep Tr oubl eshoot i ng
1. Veri f y The Compl ai nt :
Tur n on all t he c omponent s in t he pr obl em ci rcui t to
veri f y t he c ust omer compl ai nt . Note t he sympt oms.
Do not begi n di sassembl y or t est i ng unti l you have
nar r owed down t he pr obl em ar ea.
2. Anal yze The Sc hemat i c :
Look up t he sc hemat i c f or t he pr obl em ci rcui t .
Det er mi ne how t he ci r cui t i s supposed to work by
t r aci ng t he cur r ent pat hs f rom t he power f eed t hrough
t he ci rcui t c omponent s to gr ound. If sever al ci r cui t s
fai l at t he same t i me, t he f use or a gr ound i s a li kely
c aus e.
Based on t he sympt oms and your under st andi ng of
t he ci rcui t oper at i on, i denti fy one or mor e possi bl e
c aus es of t he pr obl em.
3. Isol at e The Pr obl em By Test i ng The Ci rcui t :
Make ci rcui t t est s to c hec k t he di agnosi s you made in
st ep 2. Keep in mi nd t hat a l ogi cal , si mpl e pr ocedur e
i s t he key to effi ci ent t r oubl eshoot i ng. Test for t he
most li kely c ause of f ai l ure fi rst. Tr y to make t est s at
poi nt s that are easi l y ac c essi bl e.
4. Fi x The Pr obl em:
Onc e t he speci f i c pr obl em i s i dent i f i ed, make t he
repai r. Be sur e to use proper t ool s and saf e
pr ocedur es.
5. Make Sur e The Ci r cui t Wor ks:
Tur n on all c omponent s in t he repai red ci rcui t in all
modes to make sur e you' ve f i xed t he enti re pr obl em.
If t he pr obl em was a bl own f use, be sur e to t est all of
t he ci r cui t s on t he f use. Make sur e no new pr obl ems
t urn up and t he ori gi nal probl em does not recur.
Ref er to t he i nst ruct i ons in t he Honda Ter mi nal Kit f or
i denti fi cati on and r epl acement of connect or t er mi nal s.
(cont' d)
2 2 -5
Body Elect ri cal
Gener al Troubleshooting Informati on (cont' d)
Wi re Col or Codes
The following abbreviations are used to identify wire
col or s i n t he ci rcui t sc hemat i c s:
WHT........ Whi t e
YE L Yel l ow
BLK Bl ack
BLU Blue
GRN Green
RED. Red
ORN Orange
PNK Pi nk
BRN Br own
GRY Gray
PUR Purple
T A N. . . , Tan
L T BL U Li ght Bl ue
L I vj r t i M L i g h t Gr een
The wire insulation has one color or one color with
another color stripe. The second color is the stripe.
How t o Chec k f or DTCs wi t h t he Honda
Di agnost i c Sy s t em (HDS)
NOTE: F or specific operations, refer to the user's manual
that came with the Honda Diagnostic System (HDS).
Make sure the HDS is loaded with the latest software.
1. Connect the HDS to the data link connector (DLC) (A)
located under the driver's side of the dashboard.
3. Make sure the HDS communicates with the vehicle; if
it does not troubleshoot the DLC circuit (see page
11-181).
4. Enter the BODY ELECTRICAL then select the desired
MODE MENU.
5. Check for DTCs with the HDS.
NOTE: If the DTCs do not pertain to the selected
menu, select the All DTC Check icon to view all Body
Electrical DTCs.
6. If any DTCs are indicated, note them, and go to the
indicated DTC troubleshooting.
2
..;;%
Sea ^J?
Relay and Control Uni t Locati ons
Engi ne Compar t ment
22-7
Relay and Control Uni t Locat i ons
Dashboard
DRI VER' S GA UGE CONTROL MODUL E
22-8
( c ont' d)
22-9
Belay and Control Unit Locations
Dashboard (cont'd)
Wi t h Navi gat i on S f st em
NAVIGATION DISPLAY UNIT CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT
PASSENGER'S UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY BOX
PASSENGER'S MICU
(Bui l t i nt o t he passenger ' s
under -dash f use/ r el ay box)
22-10
Wi t hout Navigation S f s t em
22
Relay and Cont rol Uni t Locat i ons
Roof and Trunk
MOONROOF CONTROL UNIT/MOTOR
rLfcCTRICAL COMPASS UNIT
22-12
Seat
Driver's seat
- 4-door
DRI VER' S S E A T HEATER
RELAY (HIGH) (4P)
T Wire colors: LT GRN, ORN, 1
L WHT, and BLK J
RELAY (LOW) (5P)
Wire colors: BRN, LT GRN, BLK, 1
BLK , and RED J
2-door
RELAY (HIGH) (4P )
f* Wire colors: RED, ORN, 1
L WHT, and BLK J
RELAY (LOW) (5P)
r wi r e colors: BRN, RED, BLK, 1
L BLK, and RED J
(cont'd)
22-13
Rel ay and Cont rol Uni t Locat i ons
Seat (cont' d)
Fr ont passenger ' s s eat
4-cfoor
RELAY (HIGH) (4P) REL AY (LOW) (5P)
f" Wire colors: LT GRN, ORN, 1 F Wire colors: B RN, LT GRN, BLK ,
I Y EL, and BLK J L BLK, and GRN
2- d o o r
I" Wire colors: RED, ORN, 1 T Wire colors: B RN, RED, BLK,
L GRN/RED, and BLK J [ BLK, and BLU/Y EL
22-14
DOOR MULTIPLEX CONTROL UNIT
(Bui l t i nt o t he power wi nd o w mast er swi t c h)
22-15
Connect ors and Har nesses
Connector Index
Identification numbers have been assi gned to i n-li ne connect or s, j uncti on connect ors, and t ermi nal s. The number i s preceded by the letter " C"
for connect ors, " G" for ground t ermi nal s, or " T" for non-ground t ermi nal s.
Harness Locat i on Harness
Engi ne
Compar t ment
Dashboard Ot hers (Floor, Door,
Trunk, and Roof)
Not es
ANC rear mi crophone subhar ness C653 Connector to Harness:
4-door
(see page 22-46)
2-door
(see page 22-48)
A/C wi re har ness (cli mate control syst em
wi th navi gati on syst em)
C351,C409 Connector to Harness
(see page 22-71)
A/C wi r e har ness (cli mate control syst em
wi thout navi gati on syst em)
C351,C409 Connector to Harness
(see page 22-72)
A/ C wi re har ness (HVAC control syst em) C351,C409 Connector to Harness
(see page 22-73)
Audi o wi re har ness (with premi um audi o and
navi gati on syst em)
C401,C402,C403,
C404, C405, C406,
C407, C408, C409,
C410, C411
G401,G402
Connector to Harness
(see page 22-40)
Audi o wi re har ness (with premi um audi o
wi thout navi gati on syst em)
C401,C402, C403,
C405, C406, C407,
C408,C409,C410
G401,G402
(see page 22-42)
Audi o wi re harness (without premi um audi o
and navi gati on syst em)
C401,C403,C409,
C410
G401,G402
(see page 22-44)
Battery ground cabl e ( - )
G1
(see page 22-18)
Cabl e reel subhar ness Connector to Harness
(see page 22-74)
CKP sensor subhar ness C104 Connector to Harness
(see page 22-24)
Dashboard wi re har ness (vi ew of dri ver' s
si de)
C301,C302, C303,
C501,C502,C601,
C751
G501,G502
(see page 22-32)
Dashboard wi re har ness (vi ew of mi ddle to
passenger ' s si de)
C401,C402,C403,
C503
G503
C701
G504
(see page 22-36)
Dri ver' s door wi re har ness C751 Connector to Harness:
4-door
(see page 22-61)
2-door
(see page 22-62)
Dri ver' s seat posi ti on sensor har ness
(without power seat)
C702 Connector to Harness
(see page 22-68)
Dri ver' s seat wi re har ness (with power seat ) C702 Connector to Harness
(see page 22-67)
Engi ne ground cable T3
G2
(see page 22-18)
Engi ne wi re harness C101,C102, C103,
C104
G101,G102
Connector to Harness:
M/T
(see page 22-20)
A/T
(see page 22-22)
Front passenger ' s door wi re har ness (4-door) C761 Connector to Harness
(see page 22-63)
Front passenger ' s seat wi re har ness C703 Connector to har ness:
4-door
(see page 22-69)
2-door
(see page 22-70)
Left engi ne compartment wi re har ness C101,C151,C201
G301
C301,C302, C303,
C304, C351
G302
(see page 22-28)
Left rear door wi re har ness (4-door) C771 Connector to Harness
(see page 22-65)
22-16
Harness Location Harness
Engine
Compartment
Dashboard Ot hers (Floor, Door,
Trunk, and Roof)
Not es
Left side wire harness C304, C601 C771
G601,G602, G603
Connector to harness:
4-door
(see page 22-50)
2-door
(see page 22-52)
Moonroof subhar ness C551 Connector to Harness
(see page 22-58)
Passenger's door wi re har ness (2-door) C761 Connector to Harness
(see page 22-64)
Rear window defogger ground wi re G801 Connector to Harness:
4-door
(see page 22-50)
2-door
(see page 22-52)
Right engine compartment wi re harness C201
G202, G203
C202, C203
G201
(see page 22-26)
Right rear door wire harness (4-door) C781 Connector to Harness
(see page 22-66)
Right side wire harness C410, C411,C651 C652, C653, C781
G651
4-door
(see page 22-46)
2-door
(see page 22-48)
Roof wire harness C501,C502 C551 Connector to Harness:
With moonroof
(see page 22-58)
Without moonroof
(see page 22-60)
Shift solenoid wire harness (A/T) C105 Connector to Harness
(see page 22-24)
SRS floor wire harness C701,C702, C703
G701,G702
4-door
(see page 22-54)
2-door
(see page 22-56)
Starter subharness (+), T1, T2, T101,
T102, C102, C151
(see page 22-19)
Tr ansmi ssi on ground cable T4
G3
(see page 22-18)
Tr ansmi ssi on range swi tch subhar ness (A/T) C106 Connector to Harness
(see page 22-24)
22-17
Connect or t o Har ness Index
Battery Ground Cable
Connector or Termi nal Ref Cavi t i es Locati on Connect s to Notes
1 Left si de of engine compartment Battery negative terminal
Gt 4 Left si de of engine compartment Body ground, vi a battery
ground cable
Engi ne Ground Cable
T3 5 Right si de of engine compartment Engine
G2 6 Right si de of engine compartment Body ground, vi a engine
ground cable
Transmi ssi on Ground Cable
Connector or Termi nal Ref Cavi t i es Location Connect s to Notes
T4 2 Left si de of engine compartment Transmi ssi on housing
G3 3 Left si de of engine compartment Body ground, vi a transmi ssi on
ground cable
22-18
Starter Subharness
Connector or Terminal Ref Cavi ti es Locati on Connect s to Notes
A/C compressor 9 1 Right front of engine compartment
Alternator 10
4
Right front of engine compartment
Knock sensor 8 1 F ront of engine
Starter solenoid 2 1 Front of engine
C102 7 6 Front of engine Engine wire harness:
M/T
A/T
C151 5 1 Left side of engine compartment Left engine compartment wire
harness (engine compartment
branch)
T1 11 Right front of engine compartment Alternator 4-B terminal
T2 1 Front of engine Starter motor
T101 (Battery) 3 Left side of engine compartment Under-hood fuse/relay box
(see page 22-75)
T102 (Alternator) 4 Left side of engine compartment Under-hood fuse/relay box
(see page 22-75)
( +)
6
Left side of engine compartment Battery positive terminal
(cont'd)
22-19
Connect ors and Harnesses
Co n n ec t o r t o Har n es s I nd ex ( c ont ' d)
Engine Wire Harness (M/T)
Connector or Termi nal Ref Cavi ti es Location Connects to Notes
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 12 4 Middle of engine compartment
Back-up light switch 17 2 On the transmission housing
Camshaft position (CMP) sensor A 22 3 Middle of engine compartment
Camshaft position (CMP) sensor B 11 3 Middle of engine compartment
ECM connector B 19 49 Left side of engine compartment
ECM connector C 18 49 Left side of engine compartment
Engine coolant temperature (ECT) 20 2 Middle of engine compartment
sensor 1
Engine mount control solenoid 32 2 Middle of engine compartment
EVAP canister purge valve 16 2 Middle of engine compartment
Ignition coil No. 1 6 3 Middle of engine compartment
Ignition coil No. 2 * 7 3 Middle of engine compartment
Injector No. 1 31 2 Middle of engine compartment
Injector No. 3 28 2 Middle of engine c ompar t ment
Manifold absolute pressure (MAP) 25 3 Middle of engine compartment
sensor
Mass air flow (MAF) sensor/Intake air 15 5 Air cleaner housing cover
temperature (IAT) sensor
Oil pressure switch 2 1 Middle of engine compartment
Output shaft (countershaft) speed 21 3 Front of transmission housing
sensor
Rocker arm oil control solenoid 4 2 Middle of engine compartment
Rocker arm oil pressure switch 5 2 Middle of engine compartment
Secondary H02S 3 4 Middle of engine compartment
Throttle position sensor/Throttle 23 6 Middle of engine compartment
actuator
VTC oil control solenoid valve 1 2 Middle of engine compartment
C101 14 23 Left side of engine compartment Left engine compartment wire
branch)
C102 24 6 Front of engine compartment Starter subharness
C103 (junction connector) 10 24 Middle of engine compartment
C104 13 3 Middle of engine compartment CKP sensor subharness
G101 27 Middle of engine compartment Body ground, via engine wire
harness
G102 30 Middle of engine compartment Body ground, via engine wire
harness
2220
(cont ' d)
22-21
Connect or t o Har ness Index (cont' d)
Engine Wire Harness ( A / T )
Connector or Termi nal Ref ; Cavi ti es Locati on Connects to Notes
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 12 4 Exhaust manifold
A/T clutch pressure control solenoi d 22 2 Transmi ssi on housing
valve A
A/T clutch pressure control solenoid 26 2 Transmi ssi on housing
valve B
A/T clutch pressure control solenoid 25 2 Transmi ssi on housing
valve C
Camshaft position (CMP) sensor A 31 3 Middle of engine compartment
Camshaft position (CMP) sensor B 11 3 Middle of engine compartment
Engine coolant temperature (ECT) 28 2 Middle of engine compartment
sensor 1
Engine mount control solenoid 37 2 Middle of engine compartment
EVAP cani ster purge valve 19 2 Middle of engine compartment
Ignition coil No. 2
?
3 Middle of engine compartment
Ignition coil No. 3 ; ' 8. 3 Middle of engine compartment
Injector No. 1 36 Middle of engine compartment
Input shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor 15 3 Transmission housing
Manifold absolute pressure (MAP) 32 3 Middle of engine compartment
sensor
Mass air flow (MAF) sensor/Intake air 17 5 Middle of engine compartment
temperature (IAT) sensor
Oil pressure swi tch 1 1
Middle of engine compartment
Output shaft (countershaft) speed 14 3 Transmi ssi on housing
sensor
PCM connector B 21 49 Left si de of engine compartment
PCM connector C 20 49 Left side of engine compartment
Rocker arm oil control solenoid (EX) 4 2 Middle of engine compartment *2
Rocker arm oil control solenoid ' 2 2 Middle of engine compartment *1
Rocker arm oil control solenoid (IN) 3 2 Middle of engine compartment
Rocker arm oil pressure switch (EX) 6 2 Middle of engine compartment *2
Rocker arm oil pressure swi tch 3 2 Middle of engine compartment *1
Rocker arm oil pressure switch (IN) 2 2 Middle of engine compartment
Secondary H02S 38 4 Exhaust manifold
Throttle position sensor/Throttle 29 6 Middle of engine compartment
actuator
VTC oil control solenoid valve 39 2 Middle of engine compartment
Transmi ssi on fluid pressure switch A 23 1 Transmi ssi on housing
(2nd clutch)
Transmi ssi on fluid pressure switch B 24 1 Transmi ssi on housing
(3rd clutch)
C101 16 23 Left si de of engine compartment Left engine compartment wi re
branch)
C102 30 6 Front of engine compartment Starter subharness
C103 (junction connector) 10 24 Middle of engine compartment
C104 13 3 Middle of engine compartment CKP sensor subharness
CI 05 27 8 Transmi ssi on housing Shift solenoid wi re harness
C106 18 10 Transmi ssi on housing Transmi ssi on range switch Transmi ssi on housing
subharness.
G101 40 Middle of engine compartment Body ground, vi a engine wire
harness
G102 41 Middle of engine compartment Body ground, vi a engine wire
harness
*1: PZEV '
*2: Except PZEV
22-22
( c o nt ' d)
22 ""2 3
CKP Sensor Subharness
CKPsensor 1 3 Under the engine
C104 2 3 Middle of engine compartment Engine wire harness:
M/T
A/T
Shi ft Solenoi d Wire Harness (A/T)
Connector or Termi nal Ref Cavi ti es Locati on Connects to Notes
Shift solenoid valve A 8 1 In the transmi ssi on
Shift solenoid valve B 6 1 In the transmi ssi on
Shift solenoid valve C 5 1 In the transmi ssi on
Shift solenoid valve D (The ATF
temperature sensor is built into the shift
solenoid valve D connector)
9 1 In the transmi ssi on
Shift solenoid valve E 7 1 In the transmi ssi on
C105 10 8 Transmi ssi on housing Engine wi re harness
Transmi ssi on Range Swi t ch Subharness (A/T)
Connector or Termi nal Ref Cavi ti es Locati on
I ransmi ssi on range switch 4 10 Left si de of transmi ssi on
C106 3 8 Transmi ssi on housing Engine wire harness
22-24
(c ont ' d)
22-25
Connector t o Har ness Index (cont' d)
Right Engine Compartment Wire Harness
Connector or Terminal Ref Cavities Location Connects to Notes
A/C pressure switch 4 2 Right front of engine compartment
Optional connector (for fog light) 12 1 Right front of engine compartment
Passenger's under-dash fuse/relay box 17 18 Under right side of dash
connector E (see page 22-77)
Power steering pressure (PSP) switch 2 2 Right side of engine compartment
Right front impact sensor 6 2 Behind right side of front bumper
Right front wheel speed sensor 16 2 Right side of engine compartment
Right front parking/turn signal light 5 3 Behind right headlight
Right front side marker light 14 2 Behind right headlight
Right headlight (low) 11 2 Behind right headlight
Right headlight (high) 13 2 Behind right headlight
VSA modulator-control unit 15 22 Right side of engine compartment
Washer fluid level switch 10 2 Behind right side of front bumper
Windshield washer wiper motor 9 2 Behind right side of front bumper
C201 3 2 Right front of engine compartment Left engine compartment wire
branch)
C202 19 20 L' I , Jv,s . ivj iit ai de of dash Dashboard wire harness (view
of middle to passenger's side)
C203 18 4 Under right side of dash Dashboard wire harness (View Under right side of dash
G201 1 Under right side of dash Body ground, via right engine
compartment wire harness
G202 8 Behind right side of front bumper Body ground, via right engine
G203 7 Behind right side of front bumper Body ground, via right engine
Canada models
(cont' d)
22-27
Left Engine Compartment Wire Harness (Engine compartment branch)
A/C condenser fan motor 20 2 Front of engine compartment
A/C Pressure sensor 24 3 Right front of engine compartment '10
model
Brake fluid level switch 6 2 Left si de of engine compartment
ECM connector A 9 49 Left si de of engine compartment M/T
Engine coolant temperature (ECT) 18 2 Front of engine compartment
sensor 2
Horn (high) 23 1 Front of engine compartment
Horn (low) 19 1 Front of engine compartment
Left front impact sensor 14 2 Behind left si de of front bumper
Left front wheel speed sensor 8 2 Left side of engine compartment
Left front parking/turn signal light 16 3 Behind left headlight
Left front side marker light 10 2 Behind left headlight
Left headlight (low) 11 2 Behind left headlight
Left headlight (high) 15 2 Behind left headlight
Optional connector (for fog light) 12 1 Left front of engine compartment
Outside air temperature sensor 22 2 Front of engine compartment *2
PCM connector A 9 49 Left side of engine compartment A/T
Radiator fan motor 17 2 Front of engine compartment
Securi ty hood swi tch 21 2 Front of engine compartment *1
Under-hood fuse/relay box connector A 3 3 Left si de of engine compartment
(electrical load detector) (see page
22-75)
Under-hood fuse/relay box connector B 5 14 Left si de of engi ne compartment
(see page 22-75)
Under-hood fuse/relay box connector C 4 5 Left si de of engine compartment
(see page 22-75)
Wi ndshi eld wiper motor 7 5 Left side of engine compartment
C101 2 23 Left si de of engine compartment Engine wire harness:
M/T
A/T
C151 1 1 Left si de of engine compartment Starter subharness
C201 25 2 Right front of engine compartment Right engine compartment
wi re harness
G301 13 Behind left side of front bumper Body ground, vi a left engine
*1: With security
*2; With climate control
22-28
(c ont ' d)
22-29
Left Engine Compartment Wire Harness (Dash branch)
Accelerator pedal position sensor 11 6 Under left side of dash
Brake pedal position switch 12 4 Under left side of dash
Clutch pedal position switch (for cruise 14 3 Under left side of dash M/T
control)
Clutch interlock switch (for starter cut) 13 2 Under left side of dash M/T
Diode A 8 2 Under left side of dash A/T
Diode B 9 2 Under left side of dash A/T
Driver's under-dash fuse/relay box 7 33 Under left side of dash
connector F {see page 22-76)
connector G (see page 22-76)
C301 5 20 Under left side of dash Dashboard wire harness (view
of driver's side)
of driver's side).
C303 4 . 4 Under left side of dash Dashboard wire harness (view
of driver's side)
C304 2 8 Under left side of dash Left side wire harness:
4-door
2-door
C351 10 2 Under left side of dash A/C wire harness (climate
control system with
navigation)
A/C wire harness (climate
control system without
navigation)
A/C wire harness (HVAC
control system)
*1
*2
*3
G302 1 Under left side of dash Body ground, via left engine
*1: With climate control and navigation system
*2: With climate control without navigation system
*3: With HVAC control
22-30
L EFT ENGI NE COMPARTMENT WI RE HARNES S
(cont'd)
22-31
Connect or t o Harness Index (cont' d)
Dashboard Wire Harness (View of driver's side)
Data link connector (DLC) 32 16 Under left side of dash
Driver's crossover network unit 27 8 Under left side of dash *
Dri ver's under-dash fuse/relay box
connector B (see page 22-76)
31 2 Under left side of dash
Dri ver's under-dash fuse/relay box
connector C (see page 22-76)
Driver's under-dash fuse/relay box
connector M (see page 22-76)
connector N (see page 22-76)
connector P (see page 22-76)
connector Q (see page 22-76)
25 20 Under left side of dash Driver's MICU
connector R (see page 22-76)
23 24 Under left side of dash Driver's MICU
Driver's junction box 1 connector A 13 6 Under left side of dash
Driver's junction box 1 connector B 14 6 Under left side of dash
Driver's junction box 1 connector C 15 8 Under left side of dash
Driver's junction box 1 connector D 20 4 Under left side of dash
Driver's junction box 1 connector E 19 10 Under left side of dash
Driver's junction box 1 connector F 16 8 Under left side of dash
Driver's junction box 1 connector G 18 10 Under left side of dash
Driver's junction box 1 connector H 17 10 Under left side of dash
Driver's junction box 2 connector A 1 4 Under left side of dash
Driver's junction box 2 connector B 2 4 Under left side of dash
Driver's junction box 2 connector C 3 4 Under left side of dash
Driver's junction box 2 connector D 4 6 Under left side of dash
Driver's junction box 2 connector E 10 6 Under left side of dash
Driver's junction box 2 connector F 5 6 Under left side of dash
Driver's junction box 2 connector G 6 6 Under left side of dash
Driver's junction box 2 connector H 9 4 Under left side of dash
Driver's junction box 2 connector J 8 8 Under left side of dash
Driver's junction box 2 connector K 7 10 Under left side of dash
Gauge control module 21 32 Behind gauge
HandsFreeLink control unit 29 28 Under left side of dash
VSA OFF switch 30 5 Left side of dashboard
With premium audio system
22-32
(cont'd)
22-33
Dashboard Wi re Harness ( V i e w of dri ver' s si de) (cont'd)
Connector or Termi nal Ref Cavi t i es Locati on Connects to Notes
C301 33 20 Under left si de of dash Left engine compartment wire
harness (dash branch)
C302 34 2 Under left si de of dash Left engine compartment wire
C303 35 4 Under left si de of dash Left engine compartment wi re
C501 38 20 Under left si de of dash Roof wi re harness:
4-door
2-door
*1
C501 38 4 Under left si de of dash Roof wire harness:
4-door
2-door
*2
C502 37 4 Under left si de of dash Roof wire harness:
4-door
2-door
*1
C601 36 28 Under left si de of dash Left si de wire harness:
4-door
2-door
#3
C601 36 12 Under left si de of dash Left si de wire harness:
4-door
2-door
*4
C751 39 20 Under left si de of dash Dri ver's door wi re harness:
4-door
2-door
G501 11 Under left side of dash Body ground, via dashboard
wire harness
G502 12 Under left si de of dash Body ground, via dashboard
wire harness
*1: With moonroof
*2: Without moonroof
*3: Except LX, LX PZEV, LX-P, LX-P PZEV
*4: LX, LX PZEV, LX-P, LX-P PZEV
22-34
(cont'd)
22-35
Connect or to Har ness Index (cont' d)
Dashboard Wi re Harness (Vi ew of middle to passenger' s si de)
A/T gear position indicator panel
light/park-pin switch
26 6 Under center console A/T
A/T shift lock solenoid 28 2 Under center console A/T
Auxiliary jack assembly 30 5 Rear of center console
Cable reel connector A 4 20 In steering column Cable reel subharness vi a
cable reel
Center junction box connector A 40 4 Under middle of dash
Center junction box connector B 41 4 Under middle of dash
Center junction box connector C 42 4 Under middle of dash
Center junction box connector D 43 6 Under middle of dash
Center junction box connector E 39 6 Under middle of dash
Center junction box connector F 44 6 Under middle of dash
Center junction box connector G 45 6 Under middle of dash
Center junction box connector H 38 4 Under middle of dash
Center junction box connector J 37 8 Under middle of dash
Center junction box connector K 36 10 Under middle of dash
Combination light switch 3 12 In steering column
Console accessor/ pcv/cr ccc!:ct 31 2 Rear of center console
Console accessory power socket relay 9 4 Under left side of dash
Driver's airbag inflator 5 4 In steering column
Driver's seat heater switch 33 6 Under center console *1
Front accessory power socket 34 2 Under center console
Front passenger' s airbag inflator 16 4 Under right si de of dash
Front passenger' s seat heater switch 25 7 Under center console *1
Ignition switch 1 5 In steering column
Immobilizer-keyless control unit 7 7 In steering column
In-car temperature sensor 46 2 Under left si de of dash *2
Parking brake switch 32 1 Center console
Passenger' s under-dash fuse/relay box
connector A (see page 22-77)
21 38 Under right si de of dash
Passenger' s under-dash fuse/relay box
connector B (see page 22-77)
22 1 Under right si de of dash
SRS unit connector A 24 39 Under middle of dash
Steering angle sensor 2 5 In steering column
Steering lock assembly 8 6 In steering column
TPMS control unit 10 20 Under left side of dash
Yaw rate-lateral acceleration sensor 29 5 Under center console
Wi per/washer switch 6 8 In steering column
*1: With seat heater
*2: With climate control
22-36
(cont'd)
22-37
Dashboard Wire Harness (View of middle to passenger's side) (cont'd)
C202 19 20 Under right si de of dash Right engine compartment Under right si de of dash
wi re harness
C203 23 4 Under right si de of dash Right engine compartment
wi re harness
C401 14 24 Under middle of dash Audio wire harness (with
premium audio system and
navigation system)
Audio wire harness (with
premium audio system without
navigation system)
Audio wire harness
*1
*2
*3
C402 13 18 Under middle of dash Audio wi re harness (with
navigation system)
Audio wire harness
*1
*2
navigation system)
navigation system)
Audio wire harness (without
premium audio system)
*1
*2
*3
C503 (B-CAN junction connector) 12 12 Under right si de of dash *4
C651 20 16 Right kick panel Right si de wi re harness: *5 Right kick panel
4-door
2-door
C701 27 13 Under center console SRS floor wi re harness:
4-door
2-door
With
power
seat
C701 27 2 Under center console . SRS floor wi re harness:
4-door
2-door
Without
power
seat
C761 18 13 Under right si de of dash Front passenger' s door wire
harness
4-door
C761 18 13 Under right si de of dash Passenger' s door wi re harness 2-door
G503 11 Under middle of dash Body ground, vi a dashboard
wi re harness
G504 35 Under center console Body ground, via dashboard
wi re harness
G505 17 Under right si de of dash Body ground, vi a dashboard
wi re harness
*1: With premium audio syst em and navigation system
*2: With premium audio syst em without navigation syst em
*3: Without premium audio system
*4 With 6CD type
*5: With navigation syst em
22-38
(cont ' d)
22-39
Audio Wire Harness (With Premium Audio Syst em and Navigation Syst em)
Antenna lead connector 11 3 Under right si de of dash AM/FM antenna amplifier
Audio di sc changer 24 14 Under middle of dash
Audio-HVAC subdi splay unit 2 12 Middle of dash
Audio unit connector A 26 24 Under middle of dash
Audio unit connector B 28 20 Under middle of dash
Audio unit connector C 31 16 Under middle of dash
Audio unit connector D 25 8 Under middle of dash
Audio unit connector E 27 14 Under middle of dash
Audio unit connector F 29 3 Under middle of dash
Audio unit connector G 30 14 Under middle of dash
Automatic lighting/sunlight sensor 4 5 Middle of dash
Driver's climate control switch 32 16 Under middle of dash
#
Glove box light 15 2 Glove box
Hazard warning swi tch/Passenger' s 1 6 Middle of dash
airbag cutoff indicator
Interface dial 33 5 Middle of dash
Navigation di splay unit 3 28 Middle of dash
Passenger' s climate control swi tch 34 12 Under middle of dash
Passenger' s network unit 23 8 Under middle of dash
Passenger' s under-dash fuse/relay box 12 28 Under right si de of dash
connector D (see page 22-77)
Stereo amplifier connector A 10 24 Under right si de of dash
Stereo amplifier connector B 9 18 Under right si de of dash
C401 6 24 Middle of dash Dashboard wi re harness (view
of middle to passenger' s si de)
C402 5 18 Middle of dash Dashboard wire harness (view
C404(optional connector for rearview 8 6 Middle of dash
camera)
C405 (junction connector) 16 12 Under middle of dash
C409 22 20 Under middle of dash A/C wire harness (climate
control system with
navigation)
C410 14 20 Under right si de of dash Right si de wi re harness: Under right si de of dash
4-door
2-door
C411 13 20 Under right si de of dash Right side wire harness: Under right si de of dash
4-door
2-door
G401 20 Under middle of dash Body ground, vi a audio wi re
harness
G402 21 Under middle of dash Body ground, via audio wire
harness
'08-09 models
22-40
(cont' d)
22-41
Connect or t o Har ness i ndex (cont' d)
Audio Wire Harness (With Premium Audio System without Navigation System)
Connector or Terminal Ref Cavi ti es Location Connects to Notes
Audio unit connector A 22 24 Under middle of dash
Audio unit connector B 24 20 Under middle of dash
Audio unit connector C 26 16 Under middle of dash
Audio unit connector D 21 8 Under middle of dash
Audio unit connector E 24 14 Under middle of dash
Automatic lighting/sunlight sensor 3 5 Middle of dash *1
Audio-HVAC display unit 5 12 Middle of dash
Climate control unit connector A 4 28 Middle of dash *3
Climate control unit connector B 1 12 Middle of dash *3
Glove box light 14 2 Glove box *5
Hazard warning swi tch/Passenger' s 2 6 Middle of dash
HVAC control unit 4 24 Under middle of dash *4
Passenger' s network unit 20 8 Under middle of dash
Stereo amplifier connector A 10 24 Under right si de of dash
Stereo amplifier connector B 9 18 Under right si de of dash
Sunlight sensor 3 2 Middle of dash *2
C401
7
24 Middle of dash Dashboard wire harness (view
of middle to passenger' s side)
C409 19 20 Under middle of dash A/C wire harness (climate
control system without
navigation)
C410 13 20 Under right si de of dash Right si de wire harness: Under right si de of dash
4-door
2-door
G401 17 Under middle of dash Body ground, vi a audio wire
harness
G402 18 Under middle of dash Body ground, via audio wire
harness
*1: With automatic lighting
*2; Without automatic lighting
*3*. With climate control
*5: '08-09 models
22-42
(cont ' d)
22-43
Audio Wire Harness (Without Premium Audio System and Navigation System)
Connector or Termi nal Ref Cavi ti es Locati on Connect s to Notes
Audio unit connector A f6 24 Under middle of dash
Audio unit connector B 17 12 Under middle of dash *1
Audio unit connector B 17 20 Under middle of dash *2
Audio unit connector C 18 16 Under middle of dash *2
Audio-HVAC display unit 5 12 Middle of dash
Climate control unit connector A 3 28 Middle of dash *4
Climate control unit connector B 1 12 Middle of dash *4
Glove box light 11 2 Glove box *3
Hazard warni ng swi tch/Passenger' s 2 6 Middle of dash
HVAC control unit 3 24 Middle of dash
Sunlight sensor 4 2 Middle of dash *5
# 2
C409 14 20 Under middle of dash A/C wi re harness (HVAC
control system)
C410 10 2 Under right si de of dash Right si de wi re harness *6
harness
harness
*1: With 1 CD type
*2: With 6CD type
*3: '08-09 models
*4: With climate control
*6: 2-door with 6CD type
22-44
(cont'd)
22-45
Right Side Wire Harness (4-door)
Electrical compass unit 9 6 Under rear shelf *5
Front passenger' s door swi tch 12 1 Right B-pillar
Navigation servi ce check connector 7 2 Under rear shelf * 4
Navigation unit connector A 1 8 Under rear shelf #4
Navigation unit connector B 2 32 Under rear shelf * 4
Navigation unit connector C 3 16 Under rear shelf *4
Navigation unit connector D 4 5 Under rear shelf * 4
Passenger' s under-dash fuse/relay box 16 16 Under right si de of dash *1
connector H (see page 22-77)
Right rear door switch 18 1 Right C-pillar
Right rear speaker 8 2 Right si de of rear shelf
Right rear wheel speed sensor 20 2 Under right si de of floor
Subwoofer 5 2 Middle of rear shelf *3
Xfvl receiver 21 14 Right si de of trunk
*4
C410 14 20 Under right si de of dash Audio wire harness (with
pi-anriiurn audio system and
navigation system)
navigation system)
*4
*5
C411 13 20 Under right si de of dash Audio wi re harness (with. *4 Under right si de of dash
premium audio syst em and
navigation system)
C651 15 16 Right kick panel Dashboard wi re harness (view
* 4
C652 (junction connector) 19 12 . Under rear shelf #4
C653 10 2 Right si de of rear shelf ANC rear microphone *2 Right si de of rear shelf
subharness
C781 11 13 Right B-pillar Right rear door wi re harness
G651 17 Under front passenger' s seat Body ground, vi a right si de
wire harness . '
* 2 : Except LX, LX PZEV, LX-P, LX-P PZEV
*3: With premium audio syst em
*4: With navigation system
*5: With premium audio system without navigation system
ANC Rear Microphone Subharness (4-door) (Except LX, LX PZEV, LX-P, LX-P PZEV)
Rear active noise cancellation 6 3 Left si de of rear shelf
microphone
C653 10 2 Right si de of rear shelf Right si de wi re harness
22-48
(cont'd)
22-47
Right Side Wire Harness (2-door)
Electrical compass unit 9 6 Under rear shelf * 6
Navigation servi ce check connector 7 2 Under rear shelf *4
Navigation unit connector A 1 8 Under rear shelf *4
Navigation unit connector B 2 32 Under rear shelf *4
Navigation unit connector C 3 16 Under rear shelf *4
Navigation unit connector D 4 5 Under rear shelf *4
Passenger' s door swi tch 12 1 Right B-pillar
connector H (see page 22-77)
Right rear speaker 8 2 Right si de of rear shelf
Right rear wheel speed sensor 18 2 Under right si de of floor
Subwoofer 5 2 Middle of rear shelf *3
XM receiver 19 14 Right si de of trunk
C410 14 20 Under right side of dash Audio wire harness (with
navigation system)
navigation system)
*4
* 6
C410 14 2 Under right side of dash Audio wire harness (without
* 5
C411 13 20 Under right side of dash Audio wire harness (with
navigation system)
*3, *4
C651 15 16 Right kick panel Dashboard wire harness *4
C652 (junction connector) 10 12 Under rear shelf *4
C653 11 2 Right side of rear shelf A N C rear microphone
subharness
#2
G651 17 Under front passenger' s seat Body ground, vi a right si de
wire harness
*1: LX, LX PZEV
*2: Except LX, LX PZEV
* 3 : With premium audio system
*5: Without premium audio system
*6: With premium audio system without navigation system
ANC Rear Microphone Subharness (2-door) (Except LX, LX PZEV)
Active noise cancellation rear 6 3 Left si de of rear shelf
microphone
C653 11 2 Right side of rear shelf Right si de wire harness
22-48
(cont ' d)
22-49
Left Side Wire Harness (4-door)
Connector or Termi nal Ref Cavi ti es Locati on Connects to Note
Dri ver's door swi tch 5 1 Left B-pillar
Driver's under-dash fuse/rei ay box 4 16 Under left si de of dash
Driver's under-dash fuse/relay box 3 20 Under left si de of dash
connector E (see page 22-76)
EVAP cani ster vent shut valve 26 2 Under floor (Fuel tank)
Fuel tank pressure (FTP) sensor 27 3 Under floor (Fuel tank)
Fuel tank unit 8 4 Under rear seat cushi on
High mount brake light 13 2 Middle of rear shelf
Left back-up light 24 2 Left si de of trunk
Left li cense plate light 19 2 Trunk lid
Left rear door swi tch 7 1 Left C-pillar
Left rear speaker 10 2 Left si de of rear shelf
Left rear turn si gnal light 23 3 Left si de of trunk
Left rear wheel speed sensor 28 2 Under floor
Left taillight/brake light 25 4 Left si de of trunk
Optional connector (for trailer) 21 , 2 Left rear si de of trunk
Rear wi ndow defogger connector A (+) 9 1 Middle of rear shelf
Right back-up light 15 2 Right si de of trunk
Right li cense plate light 18 2 Trunk lid
Right rear turn si gnal light 16 3 Right si de of trunk
Right taillight/brake light 17 4 Right side of trunk
Trunk lid release actuator/trunk lid latch 20 3 Trunk lid
switch
Trunk light 14 2 Middle of rear shelf
C304 1 8 Under left side of dash Left engine compartment wire
C601 2 28 Under left si de of dash Dashboard wi re harness (view
of driver's si de)
*1
of driver's side)
*2
C771 6 13 Left B-pillar Left rear door wire harness
G601 30 Left si de of floor Body ground, via left si de wire
harness
G602 22 Left rear si de of trunk Body ground, via left side wire
harness
G603 29 Rear of floor Body ground, vi a left si de wire
harness
* 1: Except LX, LX PZEV, LX-P, LX-P PZEV
*2: LX, LX PZEV, LX-P LX-P PZEV
Rear Wi ndow Defogger Ground Wire (4-door)
Rear wi ndow defogger connector B {) 11 1 Right C-pillar
G801 12 Right C-pillar Body ground, via rear window
defogger ground wire
22-50
REAR WINDOW DE FOGGE R
GROUND WI RE
(cont'd)
22-51
Connect or to Har ness Index (cont' d)
Left Side Wire Harness (2-door)
Connector or Terminal Ref Cavi ti es Locati on Connects to Notes
Driver's door switch 4 1 Left B-pillar
EVAP canister vent shut valve 23 2 Under floor (fuel tank)
Fuel tank pressure (FTP) sensor 24 . 3 Under floor (fuel tank)
Fuel tank unit 5 4 Under rear seat cushion
High mount brake light 8 2 Middle of rear shelf
Left back-up light 22 2 Left side of trunk
Left rear speaker 7 2 Left side of rear shelf
Left rear turn signal light 19 3 Left side of trunk
Left rear wheel speed sensor 25 2 Under floor
Left taillight/brake light 20 4 Left side of trunk
Li cense plate light 16 2 Middle of rear bumper
Noise reduction condenser 21 2 Left side of trunk
Optional connector (for trailer) 18 2 Left side of trunk
Rear window defogger connector A (+) 6 1 Middle of rear shelf
Right back-up light 12 2 Right side of trunk
Right rear turn signal light 13 3 Right side of trunk
Right taillight/brake light 14 4 Right side of trunk
Trunk lid release actuator/trunk lid latch 15 3 Trunk lid
switch
Trunk light 9 2 Middle of rear shelf
C304 1 8 Under left side of dash Left engine compartment wire
of driver's side)
G601 27 Left side of floor Body ground, via left side wire
harness
G602 17 Left side of trunk Body ground, via left side wire
harness
G603 26 Rear of floor Body ground, via left side wire
harness
Rear Wi ndow Defogger Ground Wire (2-door)
Connector or Termi nal Ref Cavi ti es Locati on Connect s to Notes
Rear window defogger connector B ( ) 10 1 Right C-pillar
G801 11 Right C-pillar Body ground, via rear window
defogger ground wire
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER
GROUND WI RE
(cont'd)
22-53
SRS Floor Wi re Harness (4-door)
Driver's seat belt buckle switch 2 2 Under dri ver' s seat
Driver's seat belt tensioner 17 4 Left B-pillar
Driver's si de airbag inflator 19 2 Under dri ver' s seat
Front passenger' s seat belt buckle 5 2 Under front passenger' s seat
switch
Front passenger' s seat belt tensioner 9 4 Right B-piilar
Front passenger' s si de airbag inflator 7 2 Under front passenger' s seat
Left side curtain airbag inflator 14 2 Left C-pillar
Left side impact sensor (first) 16 2 Left B-pillar
Left side impact sensor (second) 15 2 Left C-pillar
Rear safing sensor 13 2 Under rear seat cushi on
Right side curtain airbag inflator 11 2 Right C-pillar
Right side impact sensor (first) 10 2 Right B-pillar
Right side impact sensor (second) 12 2 Right C-pillar
SRS unit Connector B 3 39 Under middle of dash
C701 4 13 Under center console Dashboard wire harness (view
of middle of passenger' s side)
*1
of middle of passenger' s si de)
*2
C702 1 18 Under dri ver' s seat Driver's seat wire harness *1
C702 1 2 Under driver's seat Driver's seat position sensor
harness
*2
C703 6 18 Under front passenger' s seat Front passenger' s seat wire
harness
*3
C703 6 4 Under front passenger' s seat Front passenger' s seat wire
harness
*4
G701 18 Under dri ver' s seat Body ground, via SRS floor
wire harness
G702 8 Under front passenger' s seat Body ground, via SRS floor
wire harness
*1: With power seat
*2: Without power seat
*4: Without seat heater
22-54
SRS F LOOR WIRE HARNESS
(c ont ' d)
22-55
SRS F loor Wire Harness (2-door)
Connector or Termi nal Ref Cavi ti es Location Co nect to Notes
Driver's seat belt buckle switch 2 2 Under driver's seat
Driver's seat belt tensioner 17 4 Left B-pillar
Driver's side airbag inflator 19 2 Under driver's seat
Front passenger's seat belt buckle 5 2 Under front passenger's seat
switch
Front passenger's seat belt tensioner 9 4 Right B-pillar
Front passenger's side airbag inflator 7 2 Under front passenger's seat
Left side curtain airbag inflator 14 2 Left C-pillar
Left side impact sensor (first) 16 2 Left B-pillar
Left side impact sensor (second) 15 2 Left C-pillar
Rear safing sensor 13 2 Under rear seat cushion
Right side curtain airbag inflator 11 2 Right C-pillar
Right side impact sensor (first) 10 2 Right B-pillar
Right side impact sensor (second) 12 4 Right C-pillar
SRS unit connector B 3 39 Under middle of dash
of middle of passenger's side)
*1
C7C1 4 2 Under center console Dashboard wire harness (view
of middle of passenger's side)
*2
C702 1 18 Under driver's seat Driver's seat wire harness *1
C702 1 2 Under driver's seat Driver's seat position sensor
harness
*2
C703 6 8 Under front passenger's seat F ront passenger's seat wire
harness
*3
C703 6 4 Under front passenger's seat F ront passenger's seat wire
harness
*4
G701 18 Under driver's seat Body ground, via SRS floor
wire harness
G702 8 Under front passenger's seat Body ground, via SRS floor
wire harness
*1: With power seat
*2: Without power seat
22-56
(cont' d)
22-57
Roof Wire Harness (With moonroof)
Connector or Terminal Ref Cavi ti es Locati on Connect s t o Notes
Automatic dimming inside mirror 2 7 Middle of roof
Driver's vanity mirror light. 7 2 Left front of roof
F ront active noise cancellation 3 7 Middle of roof *2
microphone
F ront HandsFreeLink-Navigation-Active 3 7 Middle of roof *1
noise cancellation microphone
Individual map light 4 3 Middle of roof
Moonroof switch 5 12 Middle of roof
Optional connector (for automatic 10 4 Middle of roof
dimming inside mirror)
Passenger's vanity mirror light 1 2 Right front of roof
C501. 11 20 Under left si de of dash Dashboard wi re harness (view
of dri ver' s si de)
of dri ver' s si de)
C551 6 13 Middle of roof Moonroof subharness
*1: With navigation syst em
*2 With HandsFreeLink control system
Moonroof Subharness
Ceiling light 8 3 Roof
Moonroof control unit/motor 9 14 Roof
C551 6 13 Middle of roof Roof wire harness (with
moonroof)
22-58
(cont'd)
22-59
Roof Wire Harness (Without moonroof)
Ceiling light 3 3 Middle of roof
Driver's vanity mirror light 4 2 Middle of roof
Individual map light 2 3 Middle of roof
Passenger's vanity mirror light 1 2 Middle of roof
of driver's side)
1 2 3
22-60
Driver's Door Wire Harness (4-door)
Connector or Terminal Ref Cavi ti es Locati on Connects to Notes
Driver's door courtesy light 8 2 Driver's door
Driver's door lock actuator/knob 9 10 Driver's door
switch/key cylinder switch
Driver's power window motor 7 6 Driver's door
Left front speaker 6 2 Driver's door
Left front tweeter 3 2 Driver's door
Left power mirror 4 8 Driver's door
Power mirror switch 2 13 Driver's door
Power window master switch (door 1 37 Driver's door
multiplex control unit)
of driver's side)
1 2 3 4
D R I V E R ' S D OOR WI R E H A R N E S S
(cont'd)
22-61
Driver's Door Wire Harness (2-door)
Driver's door lock actuator/knob
switch/key cylinder switch
8 10 Driver's door
Driver's power wi ndow motor 7 6 Driver's door
Left front speaker 6 2 Driver's door
Left front tweeter 3 2 Driver's door
Left power mirror 4 8 Driver's door
Power mirror swi tch 2 13 Driver's door
Power wi ndow master switch (door
multiplex control unit)
1 37 Driver's door
of driver's side)
1 2 3 4
DRI VER' S DOOR WI RE HARNES S
22-62
F ront Passenger's Door Wire Harness (4-door)
Connector or Terminal Ref Cavi ti es Location Connect s to No es
Front passenger' s door courtesy light 6 2 Front passenger's door
Front passenger' s door lock 5 10 Front passenger's door *1
actuator/knob switch
Front passenger' s door lock actuator 5 10 Front passenger's door *2
Front passenger' s power window motor 7 6 Front passenger's door *3
Front passenger' s power window motor 7 2 Front passenger's door *4
Front passenger' s power window 4 37 Front passenger's door
switch
Right front speaker 8 2 Front passenger's door
Right front tweeter 3 2 Front passenger's door
Right power mirror 2 8 Front passenger's door
C761 1 13 Under right side of dash Dashboard wire harness (view Under right side of dash
*1: With security
*2: Without security
*3: With AUTO UP/AUTO DOWN function
*4: Without AUTO UP/AUTO DOWN function
WIRE HARNESS
(cont'd)
22-63
Connect or t o Har ness i ndex (cont' d)
Passenger' s Door Wire Harness (2-door)
Passenger' s door lock actuator/knob 5 10
Passenger' s door
switch
Passenger' s power wi ndow motor 6 6 Passenger' s door
*1
Passenger' s power wi ndow motor 6 2 Passenger' s door *2
Passenger' s power wi ndow swi tch 4 37 Passenger' s door
Right front speaker 7 2 Passenger' s door
Right front tweeter 3 2 Passenger' s door
Right power mirror 2 8 Passenger' s door
C761 1 13 Under right si de of dash Dashboard wire harness (view Under right si de of dash
*1: With AUTO UP/AUTO DOWN function
*2: Without AUTO UP/AUTO DOWN function
2 3
PA S S E NGE R' S DOOR WIRE HARNESS
22
m>
64
Left Rear Door Wire Harness (4-door)
Left rear door lock actuator/knob switch 1 10 Left rear door 1
Left rear door lock actuator 1 10 Left rear door *2
Left rear power window motor 4 2 Left rear door
Left rear power window switch 2 14 Left rear door
C771 3 13 Left B-pillar Left side wire harness
*1: With security
*2: Without security
1 2
(cont'd)
22-65
Right Rear Door Wire Harness (4-door)
Right rear door lock actuator/knob 3 10 Right rear door *1
switch
Right rear door lock actuator 3 10 Right rear door *2
Right rear power wi ndow motor 4 2 Right rear door
Right rear power wi ndow switch 2 14 Right rear door
C781 1 13 Right B-pillar Right side wi re harness
*1: With security
* 2: Without security
2 3
22-66
Driver's Seat Wire Harness (With power seat)
Connector or Termi nal Ref Cavi ti es Location Connect s to Notes
Driver's power lumbar support switch 3 5 Left side of driver's seat *1
Driver's power lumbar support motor 13 2 Right side of seat-back *1
Driver's power seat adjustment switch 4 12 Left side of driver's seat
Driver's seat-back heater 12 2 Driver's seat *2
Driver's seat cushion heater 9 4 Driver's seat *2
Driver's seat heater relay (high) 8 4 Driver's seat *2
Driver's seat heater relay (low) 7 5 Driver's seat *2
Driver's seat front up-down motor 10 2 Driver's seat
Driver's seat position sensor 11 2 Driver's seat
Driver's seat rear up-down motor 2 2 Driver's seat
Driver's seat recline motor 1 2 Bottom of seat back
Driver's seat slide motor 5 2 Driver's seat
C702 6 18 Under driver's seat SRS floor wi re harness:
4-door
2-door
*1: With power lumbar support
DRI VER' S S E A T WI RE HARNES S
( c o nt ' d)
22-6
Dr i ver 's Seat Position Sensor Harness (Without power seat)
Co nnec t o r or Ter mi nal Ref Cavities Location Connects to Motes
Driver's seat position sensor 1 2 Driver's seat
C702 2 2 Under driver's seat SRS floor wire harness:
4-door
2-door
SENSOR HARNESS
22-68
F ront Passenger's Seat Wire Harness (4-door)
Front passenger' s seat cushion heater 2 3 Front passenger' s seat *1
Front passenger' s seat heater relay
(high)
4 4 Front passenger' s seat *1
(low)
Front passenger' s weight sensor (front
inner side)
5 3 Front passenger' s seat
Front passenger' s weight sensor (front
outer side)
Front passenger' s weight sensor (rear
inner side)
Front passenger' s weight sensor (rear
outer side)
O D S unit 1 18 Front passenger' s seat
C703 7 8 Under front passenger' s seat SRS floor wire harness *1
C703 7 4 Under front passenger' s seat SRS floor wire harness *2
9
FRONT PASSENGER'S 7 6
SEAT WIRE HARNESS
(cont ' d)
22-69
Connector to Harness Index (cont'd)
Front Passenger' s Seat Wire Harness (2-door)
Front passenger' s seat cushion heater 6 3 Front passenger' s seat *1
(high)
(low)
Front passenger' s weight sensor (inner
si de)
Front passenger' s weight sensor (outer
si de)
ODS unit 1 18 Front passenger' s seat
C703 5 8 Under front.passenger' s seat SRS' floor wire harness *1
C703 5 4 Under front passenger's seat SRS floor wire harness *2
* 2 : Without seat heater
FRONT PASSENGER'S SEAT
FRONT PASSENGER'S SEAT
WIRE HARNESS
22-70
A / C Wire Harness (Climate Control Syst em wi t h Navigation)
Blower motor 8 2 Under right side of dash
Climate control unit connector A 6 28 Under middle of dash
Climate control unit connector B 7 12 Under middle of dash
Driver's air mix control motor 1 7 Under middle of dash
Evaporator temperature sensor 3 2 Under middle of dash
Mode control motor 4 7 Under middle of dash
Passenger's air mix control motor 1 1 7 Under middle of dash
Power transistor 9 4 Under middle of dash
Recirculation control motor 5 7 Under middle of dash
C351 2 2 Under middle of dash Left engine compartment wire
navigation system)
11 10 9
(cont'd)
22-71
Connec t or s and Har nesses
Co n n ec t o r t o Har n es s I nd ex ( c ont ' d)
A/C Wire Harness (Climate Control System without Navigation)
Blower motor 6 2 Under right side of dash
Driver's air mix control motor 1 7 Under middle of dash
Passenger's air mix control motor 9 7 Under middle of dash
navigation system)
4 S
i 8 7 A/ C Wim HARNESS
22-72
s o w
A/C Wire Harness (HVAC Control System)
Ai r mix control motor 1 7 Under middle of dash
Blower motor 6 2 Under right si de of dash
C409 8 20 Under middle of dash Audio wire harness (without
8 7 A/ C WI RE HARNESS
(cont'd)
22-7
Connector to Harness Index (cont'd)
Cable Reel Subharness
Audio remote switch 1 12 Steering wheel
Cable reel connector C
4
20 Steering wheel
Cruise control set/resume/cancel switch 2 12 Steering wheel
HandsF reeLink/Navigation control 5 5 Steering wheel *1, *2
switch
Horn switch 3 2 Steering wheel
*1: With HandsFreeLink
22-74
Fuse/Rel ay Boxes
B O D Y i
Connect or t o Fuse/Rel ay Box i ndex
Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box
Socket Ref Terminal Connects to Notes
A (electrical load detector (ELD)) 11 3 Left engine compartment wire harness (engine
compartment branch) (see page 22-28)
A/ C compressor clutch relay 15 4
B 13 14 Left engine compartment wire harness (engine
Blower motor relay 1 4
C 12 5 Left engine compartment wire harness (engine
Electronic throttle control system (ETCS)
control relay
6 4
Horn relay 2 4
Ignition coil relay 5 4
PGM-FI main relay 1 3 4
PGM-FI subrelay 4 4
Radiator fan relay 7 4
*
Rear window defogger relay 8 4
Relay circuit board 14 Connector B (14P) and C (5P)
T101 9 Starter subharness (see page 22-19)
T102 10 Starter subharness (see page 22-19)
*: '08-09 models
Fuse/Rel ay Boxes
Connect or t o Fuse/Rel ay Box Index (cont' d)
Driver's Under-dash F use/Relay B O M
Socket Ref Terminal Connect s t o Not es
A 1 Not used
B 2 2 Dashboard wire harness (view of driver's side) (see page
22-32):
C 3 5 Dashboard wire harness: (see page 22-32):
D 11 16 Left side wire harness:
E 10 20 Left side wire harness
2-door (Not used)
F 9 33 Left engine compartment wire harness (dash branch) (see
page 22-30)
F ront accessory power socket relay 4 4
G 8 13 Left engine compartment wire harness (dash branch) (see
page 22-30)
H (optional connector) 7 12 Not used
K (MICU service check connector) 6 3
M 13 4 Dashboard wire harness (dash branch) (see page 22-32)
N 14 16 Dashboard wire harness (dash branch) (see page 22-32)
P 15 20 Dashboard wire harness (dash branch) (see page 22-32)
PGM-FI main relay 2 (FUEL PUMP) 12 4
Q 17 20 Dashboard wire harness (dash branch) (see page 22-32)
R 16 24 Dashboard wire harness (dash branch) (see page 22-32)
Starter cut relay 5 4
DRI VER' S UNDER-DAS H FUS E / RE L A Y BOX
Vi ew of f r ont si de Vi ew of back si de
22-76
Passenger ' s Under-dash Fuse/Rel ay Box
Socket Ref Terminal Connects to Notes
A 1 38 Dashboard wi re har ness (vi ew of mi ddle to passenger s
si de) (see page 22-36)
B 8 1 Dashboard wi re har ness (vi ew of mi ddle to passenger ' s
si de) (see page 22-36)
C 7 12 Not used
D 2 28 Audi o wi re har ness (with premi um audi o syst em and
navi gati on syst em) (see page 22-40)
Audi o wi re har ness (with premi um audi o syst em wi t hout
Audi o wi re har ness (wi thout premi um audi o syst em and
*3
*4
*5
E 6 18 Right engi ne compart ment wi re har ness (see page 22-26)
F 5 2 Not used
G 3 16 Right si de wi r e har ness
*1
H 4 38 Right si de wi r e har ness
*2
*3: With premi um audi o syst em and navi gati on syst em
*4: With premi um audi o syst em wi thout navi gati on syst em
* 5 : Without premi um audi o syst em
PA S S E NGE RS UNDER-DAS H FUS E / RE L A Y BOX
22-77
Power Di stri buti on
Fuse t o Component s Index
Under-hood Fuse/Rel ay Box
Fuse Number Amps Component (s) or Ci rcui t (s) Prot ect ed
1 1-1 MAIN 100 A Battery, Power supply 1
1-2 ASF /B 40 A Passenger's under-dash fuse/relay box
2 2-2 ABSA/SA 40 A VSA modulator-control unit (FSR) 2
2-3 VSA MTR 30 A VSA modulator-control unit (MTR)
2
2-4 AS F/B OP 40 A Passenger's under-dash fuse/relay box
3 3-1 IG MAIN 50 A Driver's under-dash fuse/relay box 3
3-2 DR F/B 40 A*
1
3
3-3 AS LT MAIN 30 A Passenger's under-dash fuse/relay box
3
3-4 DR F/B 60 A*
2
3
3-5 DR LT MAIN 30 A Driver's under-dash fuse/relay box
3
3-6 MAIN F AN
MTR
30 A Relay circuit board (in the under-hood fuse/relay box)
3
3-7 WIP MTR 30 A Relay circuit board (in the under-hood fuse/relay box)
4 40 A Rear window defogger relay, Rear window defogger
. 5 20 A Relay circuit board (in the under-hood fuse/relay box)
6 Not used
7 Not used
8 40 A Blower motor relay, Blower motor
9 15A Driver's MICU (HAZARD)
10 20 A Brake pedal position switch, Horn relay
11 Not used
12 Not used
13 15 A Ignition coil relay. Ignition coils
14 15A A/F sensor, ECM/PCM (SUBRLY ), PGM-FI subrelay
15 10A Driver's MICU (VBU), Gauge control module, HandsF reeLink control unit,
Immobilizer-keyless control unit, Passenger's MICU, Power window master switch
16 7.5 A Ceiling light, Ignition key light, Map lights, Trunk light
17 15A CKP sensor, CMP sensor, ECM/PCM (ETCSRLY), ECM/PCM (IGP), ECM/PCM (IMOFPR),
ECM/PCM (MRLY ), ETCS control relay, Injectors, MAF sensor, PGM-FI main relay 1,
PGM-FI main relay 2 (FUEL PUMP)
18 15A ECM/PCM (VBETCS), ETCS control relay
19 Not used
20 7.5 A A/C compressor clutch relay, A/C compressor clutch
21 7.5 A A/C condenser fan relay
* 1 : LX, LX PZEV, LX-P, LX-P PZEV
22-78
(cont'd)
22-79
Fuse t o Component s Index (cont' d)
Dri ver' s Under -dash Fuse/Rel ay Box
Fuse
Number
Amps Component(s ) or Ci rcui t(s ) Protected
1 Not used
2 Not used
3 15 A Washer motor relay circuit (in the passenger's under-dash fuse/relay box)
4 7.5 A Windshield wiper intermittent relay circuit, Windshield wiper motor high/low relay circuit, Windshield wiper
motor relay circuit (in the under-hood fuse/relay box)
5 7.5 A Automatic dimming inside mirror, Back-up lights, Driver's MICU, Electrical compass unit, Gauge control
module, Navigation unit, Passenger's MICU, Reverse relay circuit (in the driver's under-dash fuse/relay box),
Shift lock solenoid (A/T), TPMS control unit
6 7.5 A VSA modulator-control unit, Y aw rate-lateral acceleration sensor
7 15A Electrical load detector (ELD), EVAP canister purge valve, Secondary H02S,
8 Not used
9 20 A ECM/PCM (FUEL PUMP), Immobilizer-keyless control unit, PGM-FI main relay 2 (FUEL PUMP)
10 10 A ECM/PCM (VBSOL)
11 10 A SRS unit
12 7.5 A F ront passenger's airbag cutoff indicator, ODS unit, SRS unit
13 Not used
- Not used
15 7.5 A Driver's MICU (DAY LT)
16 7.5 A Audio-HVAC subdisplay unit, Climate control unit, Center information display, Driver's seat heater, F ront
passenger's seat heater, HVAC control unit, Rear window defogger relay, Recirculation control motor
17 7.5 A Driver's MICU (ACC KEY LOCK)
18 7.5 A Audio unit, Center information display, F ront accessory power socket relay, F ront HF L-navigation-ANC
microphone, HandsF reeLink control unit, Ignition key switch (A/T), Interface dial, Navigation display unit,
Navigation unit
19 20 A Driver's power seat slide motor, Driver's power seat front up-down motor
20 20 A Moonroof control unit/motor
21 20 A Driver's power seat recline motor, Driver's power seat rear up-down motor
22 20 A Driver's MICU, Left rear power window switch (4-door)
23 15A F ront accessory power socket relay, F ront accessory power socket
24 20 A Power window master switch
25 10 A Driver's door lock actuator, Left rear door lock actuator (4-door), Trunk lid release actuator
26 10A Left front fog light
27 10A Driver's MICU, Left front parking light, Left front side marker light, License plate light(s), Taillights
28 10A Driver's MICU (LEFT H/L HI)
29 7.5 A TPMS control unit
30 10A Driver's MICU (LEFT H/L LO)
31 Not used
22-80
DRIVER'S UNDER-DASH
(c ont ' d)
22 81
Fuse t o Component s Index (cont' d)
Passenger's Under-dash F use/Relay Box
Fuse
Number
Amps Component(s) or Circuit(s) Protected
1 10 A Passenger's MICU (RIGHT H/L HI)
2 10 A Passenger's MICU, Right front parking light, Right front side marker light
3 10 A Right front fog light
4 10 A Passenger's MICU (RIGHT H/L LO)
5 Not used
6 . 7.5 A Ambient light, A/T gear position indicator panel light, Climate control unit light, Driver's seat heater switch
light, F ront passenger's seat heater switch light, Glove box light, Hazard warning switch light, HVAC control
unit light, Moonroof switch light, Navigation display unit, Navigation unit, Steering wheel switches lights, VSA
OFF switch light
7 Not used
8 20 A F ront passenger's power seat recline motor
9 Not used
10 10 A F ront passenger's door lock actuator, Passenger's MICU, Right rear door lock actuator (4-door)
11 20 A Right rear power window switch (4-door)
12 15 A Console accessory power socket relay, Console accessory power socket
13 20 A F ront passenger's power window switch
14 ----- Not used
15*
1
20 A Stereo amplifier"
1
16 Not used
17 Not used
18 10 A Driver's lumbar support motor
19 15 A Driver's seat heater, F ront passenger's seat heater
20 Not used
21 Not used
22 Not used
* 1 : With premium audio system
22-82
o
ZL
PASSENGER'S UNDER-DASH
F USE/RELAY BOX
ZL
i9~i rw
r un rw
rfn DE
3H3
~ 1 2 ~1
J E
I D CUD
f >
f ^
22 21 20
v. >
~3" 1
o
22-83
Ground Di stri buti on
Gr ound to Component s Index
Ground Co mpo nent or c i r c ui t grounded
G1 Bat t er y
G2 Engi ne
G3 Tr ans mi s s i o n hous i ng
G101 A/ T c l ut c h pr es s ur e c ont r ol s o l eno i d v al v es A, B, C, CK P s ens o r , CMP s ens o r A, CMP s ens o r B, Dat a link c onnec t or ,
E CM/ PCM, I mmobi l i z er -k ey l es s c ont r ol uni t , Roc k er ar m oil c ont r ol s ol enoi d (M/T), Roc ker ar m oi l c ont r ol s ol enoi d
A (A/T), Roc ker ar m oi l c ont r ol s ol enoi d B (A/ T), Roc k er ar m oi l pr es s ur e swi t c h (M/T), Rocker ar m oil pr es s ur e
swi t c h A (A/ T), Roc ker ar m oi l pr es s ur e s wi t c h C (A/T), Tr ans mi s s i o n r ange s wi t c h (A/ T), VTC oi l c ont r ol s ol enoi d
v al v e,
Shi el di ng bet ween t he E CM/ PCM and t he s ec o nd ar y H 02S ( S ens o r 2),
Shi el di ng bet ween, t he E CM/ PCM and t he knoc k s ens o r
A/ T c l ut c h pr es s ur e c ont r ol s o l eno i d v al v es A, B, C, CK P s ens o r , CMP s ens o r A, CMP s ens o r B, Dat a link c onnec t or ,
E CM/ PCM, I mmobi l i z er -k ey l es s c ont r ol uni t , Roc k er ar m oil c ont r ol s ol enoi d (M/T), Roc ker ar m oi l c ont r ol s ol enoi d
A (A/T), Roc ker ar m oi l c ont r ol s ol enoi d B (A/ T), Roc k er ar m oi l pr es s ur e swi t c h (M/T), Rocker ar m oil pr es s ur e
swi t c h A (A/ T), Roc ker ar m oi l pr es s ur e s wi t c h C (A/T), Tr ans mi s s i o n r ange s wi t c h (A/ T), VTC oi l c ont r ol s ol enoi d
v al v e,
Shi el di ng bet ween t he E CM/ PCM and t he s ec o nd ar y H 02S ( S ens o r 2),
Shi el di ng bet ween, t he E CM/ PCM and t he knoc k s ens o r
G102 I gnition coils
G201 Pas s eng er ' s MI CU (PG), Pas s eng er ' s MI CU ( S G) , Power st eer i ng pr es s ur e (PSP) s wi t c h , Ri ght f r ont par ki ng l i ght ,
Ri ght f r ont s i de mar ker l i ght , Ri ght f r ont t ur n s i gnal l i ght , Ri ght headl i ght (high)*
2
, Ri ght headlight (l ow), Was h er
f l ui d l evel s wi t c h (Canada mo d el s ) , Wi nds hi el d washer motor
G202 VS A modul at or -c ont r ol uni t
G203*
1
Ri ght headl i ght (hi gh)
G301 Bl ower motor r el ay, Electrical l oad det ec t or (ELD), Wi nds hi el d wi per mot or , Under -hood f use/ r el ay box (Fan
c ont r ol relay circuit*
5
Windshield wi per r el ay c i r c ui t )
G302 A/ C c o nd ens er f an mot or , Br ake f l ui d l evel s wi t c h , Cl ut c h s wi t c h (M/T), Sec ur i t y hood s wi t c h (wi t h sec ur i t y), Lef t
f r ont par ki ng l i ght , Lef t f r ont s i de mar k er l i ght , Lef t f r ont t ur n si gnal l i ght , Lef t headl i ght (hi gh), Lef t headl i ght (l ow),
Power t r ansi st or , Radi at or f an mot or
G401 Audi o uni t *
3
, Aud i o - HVAC s ub d i s pl ay uni t , Aud i o - HVAC di spl ay uni t , Cl i mat e c ont r ol uni t , Dr i ver ' s c l i mat e c ont r ol
s wi t c h *
4
, Gl o v e box l i ght *
6
, HVAC c ont r ol uni t , Int er f ac e di al , Navi gat i on di spl ay uni t , Navi gat i on uni t , St er eo
ampl i f i er *
3
G402 Audi o uni t , S t er eo ampl i f i er *
3
G501 Aut omat i c di mmi ng i nsi de mi r r or , Cab l e r eel (st eer i ng wh eel s wi t c h es gr ound), Dr i ver ' s door l ock knob swi t c h/ key
c yl i nder s wi t c h , Dr i ver ' s MI CU (PG) (2 wires), Driver's power wi ndow motor, F ront H F L-navigation-ANC
microphone, Gauge control modul e, H andsF reeLink control unit, Left power mirror defogger, Map lights,
Moonroof switch, Optional connector (for automatic di mmi ng inside mirror), P ower mirror switch, P ower wi ndow
master switch (including driver's door lock switch), Vanity mirror lights, VSA OF F switch
G502 Data link connector, Driver's MI CU (PG) (2 wires), Gauge control modul e, MI CU service check connector, P ower
wi ndow master switch, Moonroof control unit/motor
G503 A/T gear position indicator panel light, Console accessory power socket, Console accessory power socket relay,
Driver's seat heater switch, F ront accessory power socket, F ront passenger's seat heater switch, I gnition key
switch, Park-pin switch, TP MS control unit, Y aw rate-lateral acceleration sensor
G504 SRS unit (2 wires)
G505 F ront passenger's door lock knob swi tch, F ront passenger's power wi ndow switch, Passenger's MI CU ( PG) *
6
,
Passenger's MI CU (SG), Right power mirror defogger
G601 Driver's under-dash fuse/relay box (door lock relay circuit), F ront accessory power socket relay, H igh mount brake
light, Left rear door lock knob switch (4-door), Left rear power wi ndow switch (4-door)
G602 Left back-up light, Left brake light/taillight, Left rear turn signal light, License plate light(s), Noise reduction
condenser (2-door), Right back-up light, Right brake light/taillight, Right rear turn signal light, Trunk lid latch switch
G603 F uel pump
G651 Electrical compass unit, Navigation display unit, Navigation unit, Passenger's under-dash fuse/relay box (door
lock relay circuit, Windshield washer motor relay circuit), Right rear door lock knob switch (4-door), Right rear
power wi ndow switch (4-door)
G701 Driver's lumbar support switch, Driver's power seat switch, Driver's seat-back heater, Driver's seat belt buckle
switch, Driver's seat heater relays, Driver's seat position sensor
G702 F ront passenger's seat belt buckle swi tch, F ront passenger's seat-cushion heater, ODS unit
G801 Rear wi ndow defogger
* 1 : EX-L, EX-L PZEV
*2: Except EX-L, EX-L PZEV
*3: With premi um audio system
*5: '10 model
*6: '08-09 model s
22-84
Under-hood Fuse/Rel ay Box
Removal and Installation
Rel ay Pul l er 07AAC-000A1A0
NOTE; The under -hood f use/r el ay box i s a part of t he left
engi ne compar t ment wi r e har ness, and it cannot be
r epl aced by i tself.
Removal
page 22-91).
2. Open t he c over (A), t hen r emove t he sc r ews (B) f or t he
al t ernat or and battery cabl e t er mi nal s.
3. Remove t he nut (C), and r el ease t he t ab (D) bottom
cover (E) f r om t he under -hood f use/r el ay box.
4. Di sconnect t he connect or s (F) f r om t he under -hood
f use/r el ay box.
5. Remove t he r el ay ci rcui t boar d (G) f r om t he
6. Car ef ul l y r emove t he r el ays by pryi ng under t he base
of t he rel ay usi ng t he rel ay pul l er (see page 22-93).
NOTE: Do not use pl i er s. Pl i er s wi l l damage t he r el ays,
whi c h coul d c ause t he engi ne to st al l or not st art .
Inst al l at i on
1. Inst al l t he r el ays and connect t he c onnec t or s to t he
under -hood f use/r el ay box, t hen i nst al l t he
under -hood f use/r el ay box i n t he r ever se or der of
r emoval .
2. Inst al l t he r emoved part s i n t he r ever se or der of
r emoval .
page 22-91).
4. Conf i r m that all syst ems wor k pr oper l y.
22-85
Under-dash Fuse/Rel ay BJC
Dri ver' s Under-dash Fuse/Rel ay Box (EVIICU) Removal and Installation
US A model s
NOTE; S RS c omponent s ar e l ocat ed in t hi s ar ea. Revi ew
t h e S RS c omponent l ocat i ons 4-door (see page 24- 21) ,
2-door (see page 24-23), and pr ecaut i ons and
ser vi c i ng.
Removal
page 22-91).
20-166), and t he dr i ver ' s kick panel :
3. Di sconnect t he c onnec t or s f r om t he f use si de of t he
dr i ver ' s under -dash f use/r el ay box (A).
4. Remove t he mount i ng bolt (B), r el ease t he t ab (C), and
pull t he dr i ver ' s under -dash f use/r el ay box away f rom
t he body.
5. Di sconnect t he c onnec t or s f r om t he back si de of t he
dr i ver ' s under -dash f use/r el ay box, t hen r emove t he
of t he r el ay usi ng t he rel ay pul l er (see page 22-93).
NOTE: Do not use pl i er s. Pl i er s wi l l damage t he r el ays,
Inst al l at i on
1. Install t he r el ays and connect t he connect or s to t he
dr i ver ' s under -dash f use/r el ay box, t hen i nstall t he
dr i ver ' s under -dash f use/r el ay box in t he r ever se
or der of r emoval .
2. Install t he r emoved part s i n t he r ever se order of
r emoval .
3. Do t he battery t er mi nal r econnect i on pr ocedur e st eps
1 to 4 (see page 22-91).
4. Regi st er t he i mmobi l i zer syst em wi t h t he HDS (see
page 22-439).
NOTE: The i moes uni t i s bui lt into t he dr i ver ' s MICU
whi c h i s part of t he dr i ver ' s under -dash f use/r el ay
box. Bec ause of t hi s const r uct i on, the i mo e
c m
" o t h
e
r egi st er ed, or t he vehi cl e wi l l not start.
5. Conf i r m t hat all syst ems wor k properl y.
22-86
Canada model s
NOTE; S RS c omponent s ar e l ocat ed In t hi s ar ea. Revi ew
t he S RS c omponent l ocat i ons 4-door (see page 24-21),
ser vi c i ng.
Removal
page 22-91).
2. Remove t he dr i ver ' s dashboar d l ower cover (see page
20-166), and t he dr i ver ' s kick panel :
3. Loosen t he bolts (A), t hen r emove t he bolt (B) f r om
t he bracket (C).
4. Remove t he bracket f r om t he dr i ver ' s under -dash
f use/r el ay box (D).
5. Di sc onnec t t he c onnec t or s f r om t he f use si de of t he
dr i ver ' s under -dash f use/r el ay box (A).
6. Remove t he s c r ews and cover (B) f r om t he dr i ver ' s
7. Remove t he mount i ng bolt (C), r el ease t he t ab(D), and
pull t he dr i ver ' s under -dash f use/r el ay box away f r om
t he body.
8. Di sconnect t he connect or s f r om t he back si de of t he
dr i ver ' s under -dash f use/r el ay box, t hen r emove t he
of t he rel ay usi ng t he rel ay pul l er (see page 22-93).
NOTE: Do not use pl i er s. Pl i ers wi l l damage t he r el ays,
(cont' d)
22-87
Under-dash Fuse/Rel ay Box
Dri ver' s Under-dash Fuse/Rel ay Box (MICU) Removal and Installation
(cont'd)
Inst al l at i on
1. Inst al l t he r el ays and connect t he c onnec t or s to t he
dr i ver ' s under -dash f use/r el ay box, t hen i nst al l t he
dr i ver ' s under -dash f use/r el ay box in t he r ever se
2. Inst al l t he r emoved part s in t he r ever se or der of
r emoval .
3. Do t he battery t er mi nal r econnect i on pr ocedur e st eps
1 to 4 (see page 22-91).
4. Regi st er t he i mmobi l i zer syst em wi t h t he HDS (see
page 22-439).
NOTE: The i moes uni t is bui lt into t he dr i ver ' s MICU
whi c h i s part of t he dr i ver ' s under -dash f use/r el ay
box. Bec ause of t hi s const r uct i on, t he i moes must be
r egi st er ed, or vJiic! vv!ii nul st art .
22-88
Passenger' s Under-dash F yse/lelay Box (MICU). Removal and Installation
NOTE: S RS component s ar e l ocat ed i n t hi s ar ea. Revi ew
t he S RS component l ocat i ons 4-door (see page 24-21),
2-door (see page 24-23), and precaut i ons, and
ser vi c i ng.
Removal
page 22-91).
2. Remove t he passenger ' s kick panel :
3. Di sconnect t he c onnec t or s f r om t he passenger ' s
under -dash f use/r el ay box (A).
4. Loose t he mount i ng bolt f r om t he l ower si de of
passenger ' s under -dash f use/r el ay box.
5. Remove t he mount i ng bolt f r om t he upper si de of
passenger ' s under -dash f use/r el ay box, and r emove
t he passenger ' s under -dash f use/r el ay box.
Inst al l at i on
1. Install t he r el ays and c onnec t t he c onnec t or s t o t he
passenger ' s under -dash f use/r el ay box, t hen i nst al l
t he passenger ' s under -dash f use/r el ay box in t he
2. Inst al l t he r emoved part s i n t he r ever se or der of
r emoval .
page 22-91).
22-89
A battery can expl ode if you do not folk: ' ' ;~s - c pa ;
pr ocedur e, c ausi ng sei i ous i nj ury to anyone near by.
Fol l ow all pr ocedur es car ef ul l y and keep spar ks and
open f l ames away f r om t he battery.
Requi r ed Tes t Equi pment
Honda El ect r i cal Syst em Anal yzer (ED-18 Bat t ery t est er ):
T/N INBED18LLH
Or der i ng Inf ormat i on
To or der t he El ect r i cal Syst em Anal yzer , go to t he Honda
Tool and Equi pment cat al og on t he i N, or cal l
888-424-6857.
Sof t war e Ver si on
ff.zliz F U M i i a vc i i i c i dl est sof t war e in t he ED-18. To
check t he ver si on, do t hi s:
Pr ess t he POWER button.
Sel ec t Repor t s, t hen pr ess ENTER.
Sel ec t i Ver si on, t hen pr ess ENTER.
If you do not have t he cor r ect ver si on, cal l t he Tool s
Hotli ne at 800-346-6327.
3. Here ar e t he f i ve possi bl e battery condi t i ons:
Good Bat t ery: The battery has at l east 60 percent of
its char ge and r equi r es no act i on.
Good-Rec har ge: The battery condi t i on appear s to
be good, but char gi ng i s r ec ommended and t hen
ret est . S ee your battery c har ger ' s i nst r uct i ons to
f ul l y char ge t he bat t ery, t hen r echeck. Do not
c har ge t he battery usi ng t he vehi c l e' s al t ernat or.
Char ge and Ret est : The battery condi t i on i s not
known bec ause its c har ge i s t oo l ow. Rec har ge t he
bat t ery, t hen ret est . S ee your bat t ery' s i nst ruct i ons
to f ully c har ge t he bat t ery, t hen r echeck. Do not
c har ge t he battery usi ng t he vehi c l e' s al t ernat or.
Repl ace Bat t ery: The battery condi t i on i s poor.
Repl ace it.
Bad Cel l : Ther e i s a pr obl em wi t h t he batterv.
nepi ac e it.
Usi ng t he ED-18 Bat t er y Test er
NOTE: For set up, cust omi zat i on, and ot her avai l abl e
f eat ur es, refer to t he ED-18 user ' s manual .
1. Connec t t he l eads to t he posi t i ve and negat i ve
t er mi nal of t he battery.
2. Use t he ar r ow keys to sel ect t he battery t est , t hen
pr ess ENTER, t hen f ol l ow t he pr ompt s.
NOTE: Make sur e to ent er t he cor r ect col d cr anki ng
amper e rati ng of t he battery. If t he number i s not
ent er ed cor r ect l y, t he resul t wi l l not be accur at e.
Battery Termi nal Di sconnecuui i mmw m^wmmûua
Di sconnect i on
NOTE: S o me syst ems st or e dat a i n memor y that i s lost
when t he battery i s di sc onnec t ed. Do t he f ol l owi ng
pr ocedur es bef ore di sconnect i ng t he battery,
1. Make sur e you have t he anti -theft code(s) f or t he
audi o and/or t he navi gat i on syst em (if equi pped).
2. If you ar e r epl aci ng t he audi o uni t , wr i t e down t he
audi o pr eset s (AM and FM), and t he XM audi o pr eset s
(if equi pped), bec ause t he audi o uni t does not retai n
t he pr eset s after t he battery i s di sc onnec t ed.
3. Make sur e t he i gni ti on swi t ch i s in L OCK (0).
4. Di sconnect and i sol at e t he negat i ve c abl e f r om t he
bat t ery.
NOTE: Al ways di sconnect t he negat i ve cabl e f rom t he
battery f i rst .
5. Di sconnect t he posi t i ve cabl e f r om t he battery.
Reconnect i on
NOTE: S ome syst ems st or e dat a in memor y t hat i s l ost
when t he battery i s di sc onnec t ed. Do t he f ol l owi ng
pr ocedur es to r est or e t he syst em back to nor mal
oper at i on.
1. Cl ean t he battery t er mi nal s.
3. Rec onnec t t he posi t i ve cabl e (A) to t he battery (B) f i rst ,
t hen r econnect t he negat i ve cabl e (C) to t he battery.
NOTE: Al ways connect t he posi t i ve cabl e to t he
battery f i rst .
2. 9- 5. 3 N-m
(0. 3- 0. 6 kgf-m, 2, 1- 4. 4 I bfft)
\
A
4. Appl y mul t i pur pose gr ease to the t er mi nal s to
pr event c or r osi on.
5. Ent er t he anti -theft code(s) f or t he audi o syst em
and/or t he navi gat i on syst em (if equi pped).
6. Ent er t he audi o pr eset s (if appl i cabl e), and ent er t he
XM audi o pr eset s (if equi pped).
7. Set t he cl ock (for vehi c l es wi t hout navi gat i on).
Battery
lattery Removal and Installation
NOTE: The battery t er mi nal di sc onnec t i on and
r econnect i on pr ocedur e (see page 22-91) must be done
bef ore and after doi ng t hi s pr ocedur e- S o me s y s t ems
st or e dat a i n memor y t hat i s l ost when t he battery i s
di sc onnec t ed.
Removal
page 22-91).
2. Remove t he t wo nut s (A) sec ur i ng t he bat t ery set t i ng
pl at e, t hen r emove t he battery set t i ng pl at e (B) and
t he bat t ery (C).
A
Inst al l at i on
1. Inst al l t he battery (A), t hen i nst al l t he battery set t i ng
plate (B).
C
2. Ti ght en t he t wo nut s (C) equal l y unti l t he battery i s
st abl e.
NOTE: Do not def or m t he battery set t i ng plate by
t i ght eni ng t he nut s t oo muc h.
page 22-91).
NOTE: Make sur e t he battery i s i nst al l ed cor r ect l y, and
t he posi t i ve t er mi nal and t he negat i ve t er mi nal ar e
not r ever sed.
22-92
Relays
Power Relay Test
Use t hi s chart to i denti fy t he t ype of r el ay, t hen do t he
t est li st ed for it.
Rel ay Tes t
A/ C c ompr essor cl ut ch rel ay Nor mal l y-
open f our-
t er mi nal s t ype
Bl ower mot or rel ay
Nor mal l y-
open f our-
t er mi nal s t ype
Consol e ac c essor y power socket
relay
Nor mal l y-
open f our-
t er mi nal s t ype
ETCS cont rol rel ay
Nor mal l y-
open f our-
t er mi nal s t ype
Front ac c essor y power socket
r el ay*
2
Nor mal l y-
open f our-
t er mi nal s t ype
Horn rel ay
Nor mal l y-
open f our-
t er mi nal s t ype
Ignition coi l rel ay
Nor mal l y-
open f our-
t er mi nal s t ype
PGM-FI mai n rel ay 1
Nor mal l y-
open f our-
t er mi nal s t ype
PGM-FI mai n rel ay 2
(FUEL PUMP)*
2
Nor mal l y-
open f our-
t er mi nal s t ype
PGM-FI subr el ay
Nor mal l y-
open f our-
t er mi nal s t ype
Radi at or f an r el ay*
1
Nor mal l y-
open f our-
t er mi nal s t ype
Rear wi ndow def ogger rel ay
Nor mal l y-
open f our-
t er mi nal s t ype
Seat heat er r el ays (hi gh)
Nor mal l y-
open f our-
t er mi nal s t ype
St art er cut rel ay (ST CUT)*
2
Nor mal l y-
open f our-
t er mi nal s t ype
Seat heat er rel ay (low) Fi ve-t er mi nal
t y pe
*1: ' 08-09 model s
*2: Caref ul l y r emove t he rel ay f r om t he dr i ver ' s
under -dash f use/r el ay box usi ng t he rel ay pul l er. Do
not use pl i er s. Pl i er s wi l l damage t he rel ay.
! J v. . ^
Normal l y-open Four -t er mi nal Type
Chec k f or cont i nui t y bet ween t he t er mi nal s:
Ther e shoul d be cont i nui t y bet ween t er mi nal s No. 1
and No. 2 when bat t ery power i s c onnec t ed to
t er mi nal No. 4, and body gr ound i s c onnec t ed to
t er mi nal No. 3.
Ther e shoul d be no cont i nui t y bet ween t er mi nal s
No. 1 and No. 2 when power i s di sc onnec t ed.
Resi st anc e t ype Di ode t ype

4 2 4 2
3 1 3 1
e e
07AAC-000A1A0
(cont ' d)
22-93
Rel ays
Power Bel ay Test fcont'd)
Fi ve-t er mi nal Type
Chec k f or cont i nui t y bet ween t he t er mi nal s:
and No. 2 when battery power i s connect ed to
t er mi nal No. 5, and body gr ound i s connect ed to
t er mi nal No. 3.
No. 1 and No. 4 when power i s di sc onnec t ed.
Diode type
4 2
Rel ay Ci r cui t Board Test ('OS-OS model s)
The rel ay ci rcui t board i s part of t he under -hood
f use/r el ay box, and it cont ai ns t hese r el ays:
A/ C c ondenser f an rel ay
Wi ndshi el d wi per motor rel ay
Wi ndshi el d wi per i ntermi ttent refay
Wi ndshi el d wi per hi gh/l ow rel ay
page 22-91).
2. Di sc onnec t under -hood f use/r el ay box c onnec t or s B
( 14P) andC( 5P) .
CONNECTOR C (5P)
1 2 3
F= l
4 5 6
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
1
n
2
3 4 5
22-94
3. Test each r el ay ci rcui t as s hown:
A/ C c ondenser f an rel ay:
Ther e shoul d be cont i nui t y bet ween t er mi nal s C1 and
C3 when bat t ery power i s c onnec t ed to t er mi nal B11,
and body gr ound i s c onnec t ed to t er mi nal B7 (or B8).
Ther e shoul d be no cont i nui t y bet ween t er mi nal s C1
and C3 when power i s di sc onnec t ed.
Wi ndshi el d wi per mot or rel ay:
' BIO, and t er mi nal s C4 and B12 when battery power i s
connect ed to t er mi nal B9, and body gr ound i s
connect ed to t er mi nal B3. Ther e shoul d be no
cont i nui t y bet ween t er mi nal s C4 and B10, and
t er mi nal s C4 and B12 when power i s di sc onnec t ed.
Wi ndshi el d wi per i nt ermi t t ent rel ay:
Ther e shoul d be battery vol t age bet ween t er mi nal C5
and body gr ound when bat t er / power i s connect ed to
t er mi nal s B9 and C4, and body gr ound i s connect ed to
t er mi nal s B3 and B 12. Ther e shoul d be no vol t age
bet ween t er mi nal C5 and body gr ound when t er mi nal
B12 i s di sc onnec t ed.
Wi ndshi el d wi per hi gh/l ow rel ay:
Ther e shoul d be cont i nui t y bet ween t er mi nal s B3 and
C2 when bat t ery power i s connect ed to t er mi nal s B9
and C4, and body gr ound i s connect ed to t er mi nal s B3
and B10.
Ther e shoul d be no cont i nui t y bet ween t er mi nal s B3
and C2, and t her e shoul d be cont i nui t y bet ween
t er mi nal s B3 and C5 when power i s di sc onnec t ed.
A /G c ondenser f an r el ay
Cl I A / C
N CONDE NS E R
g FA N RE L A Y
B7, B8
Wi ndshi el d wi per mot or r el ay, Wi ndshi el d wi per
i nt er mi t t ent r el ay, Wi ndshi el d wi per hi gh/ l ow r el ay
S I WI NDS HI EL D
J WI PER
; j MOTOR
VI RE L A Y
J
WI NDS HI EL D
WI FER
' 75 I NTERMI TTENT
N
I RE L A Y
f > WI NDS HI EL D
_K WI PER
To HI GH/ L OW
RE L A Y
B10
(cont' d)
22-95
Rel ays
Power Rel ay Test (cont' d)
4. If any r el ays f al l s t he t est , r epl ace t he r el ay ci r cui t
boar d.
page 22-91).
Rel ay Ci r cui t Boar d Test f 1G model )
The rel ay ci rcui t board i s part of t he under -hood
f use/r el ay box, and it cont ai ns t hese r el ays:
A/ C c ondenser f an rel ay
Radi at or f an r el ay
Fan cont rol rel ay
Wi ndshi el d wi per mot or rel ay
Wi ndshi el d wi per i ntermi ttent rel ay
Wi ndshi el d wi per hi gh/l ow rel ay
page 22-91).
2. Di sc onnec t under -hood f use/r el ay box connect or s B
(14P) and C( 5P) .
CONNECTOR B (14P) CONNECTOR C (5P)
1 2 3
F= l
4 5 6
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
22-96
3. Test eac h r el ay ci rcui t as shown:
A/ C c ondenser fan rel ay:
B2 when battery power i s connect ed to t er mi nal B10
(or B9), and battery gr ound i s connect ed to t er mi nal
B8.
and B2 when power i s di sc onnec t ed.
Radi at or f an rel ay:
- Ther e shoul d be conti nui ty bet ween t er mi nal s B1 and
C4 when battery power i s connect ed to t er mi nal B7,
and battery gr ound i s connect ed to t er mi nal B11.
and C4 when power i s di sc onnec t ed.
Fan cont rol rel ay:
C5 when battery power i s connect ed to t er mi nal B3,
and battery gr ound i s connect ed to t er mi nal B11.
B2 when power i s di sc onnec t ed.
Wi ndshi el d wi per motor rel ay:
Ther e shoul d be conti nui ty bet ween t er mi nal s C2 and
B6, when battery power i s connect ed to t er mi nal B12
and C2, and battery gr ound i s connect ed to t er mi nal
B4and B13.
and B6, when gr ound is di sconnect ed f r om t er mi nal
B4.
Wi ndshi el d wi per i ntermi ttent rel ay:
Ther e shoul d be battery vol t age bet ween t er mi nal s
B6 and body ground when battery power i s
connect ed to t er mi nal s B12 and C2, and battery
gr ound i s connect ed to t er mi nal B4 and B13.
Ther e shoul d be no vol t age bet ween t er mi nal s B6 and
body gr ound when t ermi nal B13 i s di sc onnec t ed.
Wi ndshi el d wi per hi gh/l ow rel ay:
Ther e shoul d be conti nui ty bet ween t er mi nal s B4 and
B5 when battery power i s connect ed to t er mi nal s B12
and C2, and battery gr ound i s connect ed to t er mi nal s
B4and B14.
and B5, and t her e shoul d be cont i nui t y bet ween
t er mi nal s B4 and B6 when power i s di sc onnec t ed.
Radi at or f an r el ay, Fan cont r ol r el ay, A / C c ondenser
f an r el ay
Wi ndshi el d wi per mot or r el ay. Wi ndshi el d wi per
i nt er mi t t ent r el ay, Wi ndshi el d wi per hi gh/ l ow r el ay
WI NDS HI EL D
WI PER
MOTOR
RE L A Y
WI NDS HI EL D
!' :? WI PER
I NTERMI TTENT
S RE L A Y
WI NDS HI EL D
Jo WI PER
" j o HI GH/ L OW
Q S RE L A Y
4. If any r el ays f ai l s t he test, r epl ace t he rel ay ci rcui t
boar d.
6. Do t he battery t ermi nal r econnect i on pr ocedur e (see
page 22-91).
22-97
Ignition Swi t c h
/DRIVER'S UNDER-DASH
F USE/RELAY BOX
IGNITION SWITCH
Test, page 22-106
STEERING LOCK ASSEMB LY
Key Interlock System Circuit Troubleshooting:
Produced in USA models, page 22-100
Produced in Saitama models, page 22-102
Key Interlock Solenoid Test, page 22-105
PARK PIN SWITCH
K ey Interlock System Circuit Troubleshooting:
Test:
22-98
Ci rcui t Di agram
* 1: Pr oduc ed i n US A mo d el s
* 2: Pr oduc ed i n S ai t ama mo d el s
IGNITION SWITCH
BATTERY
DRI VER' S
UNDER- DAS H
No. 1-1 (MAI N) (100 A) No. 3-1 (IG MAIN) (50 A)
- C T X J O ' <T\JD - W H T -
F16 C1
Y E L ORN B L U RE D
F USE/RELAY B OX
V <7
i No. 17
, (7.5 A)
DRI VE R' S MI CU
STARTER IG1
CUT RE L A Y F US E S
IG2
F US E S
No. 18
(7.5 A)
A CC K E Y
L OCK
K E Y S W
j F4
GRN
BL U/ BL K
| Q1 3
W H T
j Q18
W H T
j Q14
B L U
D4
DRI VER' S
J UNCTI ON
B OX1
C5
RA NGE S WI TCH
(Cl os ed:
10 In P posi t i on)
4-
G101
W H T
\ <
WHT/ BL K
PARK PIN
S WI TCH
(Cl os ed:
In P posi t i on)
GRN
BL K
1
L .
W H T
GRN
"~1
PARK PIN
S WI TCH
(Open:
In P posi t i on)
GRN

BL K
1
L .
IGNITION
K E Y
S WI TCH
(Cl os ed:
Key i nser t ed)
j P13
PUR
CE NTE R
J UNCTI ON
BOX
K E Y
INTER L OCK
S OL ENOI D
S TE E RI NG
L OCK
A S S E MB L Y
G503
22-99
Ignition Swi t c h
Kef Interlock Sf stem Circuit Troubleshooting
Pr oduced i n US A model s
NOTE: S RS c omponent s ar e l ocat ed i n t he ar ea. Revi ew
t he S RS c omponent l ocat i ons 4-door { see page 24-21),
ser vi c i ng.
1. Move t he shi ft l ever to P and set t he parki ng br ake.
2. Remove t he c ol umn c over (see page 20-181).
3. Tur n t he i gni t i on swi t c h to A CCE S S ORY (I).
4. Di sc onnec t t he st eer i ng lock assembl y BP connect or .
5. Chec k if t he i gni ti on swi t c h c an be t ur ned t o L OCK (0).
Can t he ignit ion swit ch be t urned t o LOCK (0)?
YESGo t o st ep 6.
NO-Repl ac e t he i gni t i on key cyl i nder /st eer i ng l ock
as s embl y (see page 17- 16) .
6 Make sur e t he i gni t i on swi t ch i s t ur ned t o L OCK (0).
7 Di sc onnec t c onnec t or Q (20P) f r om t he dr i ver ' s
8. Chec k f or cont i nui t y bet ween st eer i ng lock as s embl y
6P c onnec t or t er mi nal No. 3 and body gr ound.
S TE E RI NG L OCK A S S E MB L Y 6P CONNECTOR
1 2 3 4 5 6
KfcY S OL (BL U)
bet ween t he key i nt erl ock sol enoi d and t he dr i ver ' s
MICU. __
NO- Go t o st ep 9.
10. Di sc onnec t t he A/ T gear posi t i on i ndi cat or panel
l i ght /park-pi n swi t c h 6P connect or .
11. Chec k f or cont i nui t y bet ween A/ T gear posi t i on
i ndi cat or panel l i ght /park-pi n swi t c h 6P c onnec t or
A / T GEAR POSITION INDICATOR PANEL
L I GHT/ PARK -PI N SWI TCH 6P CONNECTOR
1 2 3
P-PIN S W (WHT)
YES - Repai r a shor t t o body gr ound i n t he wi r e
bet ween A/ T gear posi t i on i ndi cat or panel
l i ght /park-pi n swi t ch 6P connect or t er mi nal No. 1 and
t he dr i ver ' s Ml Ct J .H
12. Chec k f or cont i nui t y bet ween A/T gear posi t i on
i ndi cat or panel l i ght /park-pi n swi t c h 6P connect or
L I GHT/ PARK -PI N S WI TCH 6P CONNECTOR
1 2 3 4
/
GND (BLK)
YES - Repai r an open or hi gh r esi st anc e i n t he wi r e
bet ween AT gear posi t i on i ndi cat or panel
li ght /park-pi n swi t c h and body gr ound ( G503) .
M
22-100
mm !
13. Check for cont i nui t y bet ween A/T gear posi t i on
i ndi cat or panel li ght/park-pi n swi t ch 6P connect or
t er mi nal s No. 1 and No. 2. Do not push t he shi ft l ever
button.
A / T G E A R P O S I T I O N I NDI C A T O R P A N E L
L I G H T / P A R K - P I N S W I T C H 6P C O N N E C T O R
1 2 3 4
P - P I N G N D
Is there continuity when the shift lever is out of P, and
continuity when shifted into P?
NO-Repl ac e t he park pi n swi t ch (see page 14-258). !
connect or F (33P).
15. Check f or cont i nui t y bet ween dr i ver ' s under -dash
body gr ound.
D R I V E R S U N D E R - D A S H F U S E /
R E L A Y B O X C O N N E C T O K F (33P )
A T P P ( GR N)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 .115Il6117118
20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
YES - Repai r a shor t to gr ound in t he wi r e. B
NO- Go to st ep 16.
16. Remove t he t r ansmi ssi on r ange swi t ch cover (see
17. Di sconnect t he t r ansmi ssi on r ange swi t ch 10P
connect or .
18. Chec k f or cont i nui t y bet ween dr i ver ' s under -dash
f use/r el ay box c onnec t or F (33P) t er mi nal No. 4 and
t r ansmi ssi on r ange swi t c h 10P connect or t er mi nal
No. 6.
DR I V E R ' S U N D E R - D A S H F U S E /
R E L A Y B O X C O N N E C T O R F (33P )
A T P P ( G R N )
1 2 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
, | 1 5 | 1 6 | 1 7| 1 8
19
20 21 22 23 24
or
26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
A T P P ( B L K / B L U )
T R A N S M I S S I O N R A N G E S W I T C H 10P C O N N E C T O R
NO- Repai r an open or hi gh r esi st anc e in t he wi r e
bet ween t he dr i ver ' s under -dash f use/r el ay box and
(cont' d)
22-101
Ignition Swi t c h
Kef Interlock Sf stem Circuit Troubleshooting (cont'd)
19. At t he t r ansmi ssi on r ange swi t c h, check f or cont i nui t y
bet ween t er mi nal s No. 6 and No. 10.
NO-Chec k t he t r ansmi ssi on r ange swi t c h adj ust ment
and ret est . If sti ll no cont i nui t y, r epl ace t he
t r ansmi ssi on r ange swi t c h (see page 14- 240) .
20. Check for cont i nui t y bet ween t r ansmi ssi on r ange
swi t c h har ness t er mi nal No. 10 and body gr ound.
YES-Subs t i t ut e a known-good dr i ver ' s under -dash
f use/r el ay box and r et es t .
NO-Repai r an open or hi gh r esi st anc e i n t he wi r e
bet ween t he t r ansmi ssi on r ange swi t ch and body
gr ound (G101).B
Pr oduced i n Sai t ama model s
ser vi c i ng.
1. Move t he shi f t l ever t o P and set t he parki ng brake.
2. Remove t he c ol umn c over (see page 20-181).
3. Tur n t he i gni ti on swi t c h to A CCE S S ORY (I).
4. Di sc onnec t t he st eer i ng lock assembl y BP connect or .
5. Chec k if t he i gni t i on swi t ch c an be t ur ned t o L OCK (0).
Can t he ignit ion swit ch be t urned t o LOCK (0)?
NO-Repl ac e t he i gni t i on key cyl i nder /st eer i ng lock
assembl y (see page 17-1 B)M
6. Make sur e t he i gni t i on swi t ch i s t ur ned to L OCK (0).
7. Di sc onnec t c onnec t or Q (20P) f r om t he dr i ver ' s
8. Chec k f or cont i nui t y bet ween st eer i ng lock assembl y
BP connect or t er mi nal No. 3 and body gr ound.
S TE E RI NG L OCK A S S E MB L Y 6P CONNECTOR
K EY S OL (BLU)
bet ween t he key i nt erl ock sol enoi d and t he dr i ver ' s
MI CU. H
NO- Go to st ep 9.
10. Di sconnect t he A/ T gear posi t i on i ndi cat or panel
l i ght /park-pi n swi t c h BP connect or .
22-102
11. Check f or cont i nui t y bet ween A/ T gear posi t i on
i ndi cat or panel li ght /park-pi n swi t ch 6P connect or
L IGHT/ PARK -PIN SWI TCH SP CONNECTOR
P-PIN SW (WHT)
YES - Repai r a shor t t o body gr ound i n t he wi r e
bet ween A/ T gear posi t i on i ndi cat or panel
li ght/park-pi n swi t ch 6P c onnec t or t er mi nal No. 1 and
t he dr i ver ' s MI CU. H
NO- Go to st ep 12.
12. Check for cont i nui t y bet ween A/ T gear posi t i on
i ndi cat or panel li ght /park-pi n swi t c h 6P connect or
t ermi nal No. 2and body gr ound.
L IGHT/ PARK -PIN SWI TCH 6P CONNECTOR
1 2 3 4
/
GND (BLK)
NO-Go to st ep 13.
YES - Repai r an open or hi gh r esi st anc e i n t he wi r e
bet ween AT gear posi t i on i ndi cat or panel
li ght/park-pi n swi t ch and body gr ound (G503). B
13. Chec k f or cont i nui t y bet ween A/ T gear posi t i on
i ndi cat or panel l i ght /park-pi n swi t c h 6P c onnec t or
t er mi nal s No. 1 and No. 2. Do not push t he shi ft l ever
but t on.
A / T GE AR POSITION INDICATOR PANEL
L I GHT/ PARK -PI N S WI TCH 6P CONNECTOR
1 2 3 4
/
P-PIN GND
Is t here cont inuit y when t he shift lever is out of P, and no
cont inuit y when shift ed int o P?
NO-Repl ac e t he park pi n swi t ch (see page 14-258).H
connect or F (33P).
body gr ound.
DRIVERS UNDER-DASH F USE/
RELAY BOX CONNECTOR F (33P)
A T PP (GRN)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 0 1 1 1 2
1 3 1 4
, J 1 5 | 1 6 J 1 7 | 1 8
1 9
3 3 2 0 21 2 2 23 24 25 2 6 27 ?& 2 9 30 3 1 32
1 9
3 3
YES - Repai r a shor t to gr ound in t he wi r eJ H
NO- Go to st ep 16.
16. Remove t he t r ansmi ssi on r ange swi t ch c over (see
17. Di sconnect t he t r ansmi ssi on r ange swi t ch 10P
connect or .
(cont ' d)
22-103
Ignition Swi t ch
Kef Interlock Sf stem Circuit Troubleshooting (cont'd)
t r ansmi ssi on r ange swi t c h 10P connect or t er mi nal
No. 6.
DRI VE RS UNDER-DAS H F US E /
REL AY BOX CONNECTOR F (33P)
ATP P (GRN)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
, 11511611711S
19
33 20 21 Z 23 24 2 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
19
33
5 4 3 2 1
10 9 8 7 6
A T PP ( BL K / BL U)
TRANS MI S S I ON RANGE S WI TCH 10P CONNECTOR
10- Repai r an open or hi gh r esi st ance i n t he wi r e
19. At t he t r ansmi ssi on r ange swi t c h, check for cont i nui t y
NO-Chec k t he t r ansmi ssi on r ange swi t ch adj ust ment
(see st ep 8 on page 14-240) and ret est . If sti ll no
cont i nui t y, r epl ace t he t r ansmi ssi on r ange swi t c h (see
page 14- 240) . !
20. Check f or cont i nui t y bet ween t r ansmi ssi on r ange
swi t ch har ness t er mi nal No. 10 and body gr ound.
f use/r el ay box and r et es t .
NO-Repai r an open or hi gh r esi st ance i n t he wi r e
bet ween t he t r ansmi ssi on r ange swi t ch and body
gr ound ( G101) . l
22-104
Kef Interlock Solenoid Test Park Pin Switch Test
NOTE: S RS c omponent s ar e l ocat ed i n t hi s ar ea. Revi ew
t he S RS c omponent l ocat i ons f or 4-door (see page
24-21),for 2-door (see page 24-23), and t he pr ecaut i ons
and pr ocedur es (see page 24-25) bef ore doi ng repai rs or
ser vi c i ng.
1. Remove t he st eer i ng c ol umn c over (see page 20-181).
2. Di sconnect t he st eer i ng l ock assembl y 6P connect or .
3. Insert t he i gni ti on key i n t he key cyl i nder , t hen t urn t he
i gni ti on key t o A CCE S S ORY (I).
4. Connec t battery power t o st eer i ng lock assembl y
6P connect or t er mi nal No. 4, and gr ound t er mi nal
No. 3. Chec k t hat t he i gni t i on key cannot be t ur ned
t o L OCK (0). Di sc onnec t bat t ery power , and check
t hat t he key can be t ur ned t o t he L OCK (0) posi t i on
and r emoved f r om t he c yl i nder .
S TEERI NG L OCK A S S E MB L Y 6P CONNECTOR
1 2 3 4 5 6
e e
5. If t he key i nt erl ock sol enoi d wor ks i mpr oper l y, r epl ace
t he i gni t i on key cyl i nder /st eer i ng lock assembl y (see
page 17-16).
Pr oduced i n US A model s
li ght/park pi n swi t ch 6P connect or (A) f r om t he park
pi n swi t c h (B).
3. Check f or cont i nui t y bet ween connect or t er mi nal s No.
1 and No. 2.
Ther e shoul d be cont i nui t y.
Ther e shoul d be cont i nui t y when t he shi f t l ever i s
moved out of P.
moved t o P.
4. If cont i nui t y i s not as spec i f i ed, r epl ace t he park pi n
(cont' d)
22-105
Ignition Swi t ch
Park Pin Switch Test (cont'd) Ignition Switch Test
Pr oduced In Sai t ama model s .
l i ght /par k pi n swi t c h 6P connect or (A) f r om t he park
pi n swi t c h (B).
3. Chec k f or cont i nui t y bet ween connect or t er mi nal s No.
1 and No. 2.
Ther e shoul d be cont i nui t y when t he shi ft l ever i s
moved to P.
moved out of P... .
4. In cont i nui t y i s not as spec i f i ed, repl ace t he park pi n
swi t c h (see page 14-258).
ser vi c i ng.
page 22-91).
/ 20- 181) .
- 3. Di sconnect t he 5P connect or (A) f r om t he i gni t i on
swi t ch (B).
4. Chec k f or cont i nui t y bet ween t he t er mi nal s i n eac h
swi t c h posi t i on accor di ng to t he t abl e. . . . . . .
:
.-.
Terminal
Position \ ^
(ACC) (BAT)
s
(IG1)
3
(IG2)
(ST)
0 (LOCK)
1 (ACC) o
II (ON)
5Z
O
531 (START)
o
o
o
O
5. If t he cont i nui t y i s not as speci f i ed, r epl ace t he i gni ti on
page 22-91).
22-106
Ignition Switch Replacement
NOTE: S RS c omponent s ar e l ocat ed In t he ar ea. Revi ew
ser vi c i ng.
1 - Do t he battery t er mi nal di sconnect i on pr ocedur e (see
page 22-91).
20-181).
3. Di sconnect t he 5P connect or (A) f r om t he i gni ti on
swi t c h (B).
4. Remove t he t wo s c r ews and t he i gni ti on swi t c h.
page 22-91).
Multiplex Integrated Cont rol Syst em
/ GAUGE CONTROL MODULE
Input Test, page 22-347
IMMOBILIZER- KEY LESS CONTROL UNIT
(Has bui l t -i n r ecei ver )
Symptom Troubleshooting, page 22-431
Registration, page 22-439
DRIVER'S MICU
(Bui l t into the driver's under-dash fuse/relay box)
Replacement;
* USA models, page 22-86
Canada models, page 22-87
PASSENGER'S MICU
(Bui l t i nt o t he passenger ' s under -dash f use/ r el ay box)
DOOR MUL TI PL EX CONTROL UNIT
(Bui l t i nt o t he power wi nd o w mast er swi t c h)
Replacement:
4-door, page 22-305
2-door, page 22-306
22-108
Tr oubl eshoot i ng CAN Ci r cui t Rel at ed Pr obl ems
NOTE: If you are t r oubl eshoot i ng mul t i pl e DTCs , be sur e to f ol l ow t he i nst r uct i ons in B-Can Sy s t em Di agnosi s Test
Mode A (see page 22-134)..
Usi ng t he HDS (Preferred met hod)
Connec t t he HDS t o t he Data Li nk Connect or (DLC).
Ther e ar e t wo way s to r ead B-CAN c ode wi t h t he HDS:
Fi r st met hod; Go to B-CAN Sy s t em Di agnosi s Test Mode A to c hec k for DTCs (see page 22-134).
Sec ond met hod; Gr ound t he S CS ci rcui t wi t h t he HDS, t hen r eed t he DTCs di spl ayed i n t he odo/t ri p di spl ay in the
gauge assembl y, t hen go to B-CAN Syst em Di agnosi s Test Mode A (see page 22-134).
Usi ng t he B-CAN Syst em Di agnosi s Test Mode 1 (Use onl y if t he HDS i s unavai l abl e)
1. Chec k f or communi cat i on ci rcui t pr obl ems usi ng B-CAN Syst em Di agnost i c Test Mode 1 (see page 22-138).
2. Chec k for DTCs.
3. If mul t i pl e DTCs are st or ed, sor t t hem, and t hen t r oubl eshoot t he DTCs i n t hi s or der :
-1. Bat t ery vol t age DTCs
-2. Internal error DTCs
-3. L os s of communi cat i on DTCs
NOTE: If DTC U1280 i s st or ed, t r oubl eshoot DTC U1280 (see page 22-148) fi rst.
-4. Si gnal error DTCs
4. If no DTCs are r et r i eved, use B-CAN Syst em Di agnost i c Test Mode 2 to check all i nput s rel at ed to t he f ai l ure (see page
22-138).
(cont' d)
22-109
Multiplex Integrated Control Syst em
Gener al Troubl eshoot i ng i nformati on (cont' d)
How to di spl ay DTCs on t he gauge cont rol modul e
Ent er B-CAN Syst em Di agnosi s Test Mode 1 (see page 22-138). Whi l e i n Test Mode 1 when c ommuni c at i on bet ween t he
MICU and gauge cont rol modul e i s nor mal t he DTCs whi c h have been det ect ed and st or ed i ndi vi dual l y by var i ous
B-CAN (Body-cont r ol l er Ar ea Net work) uni t , wi l l be s hown one by one on t he L CD di s pl ay . To scr ol l t hr ough t he DTCs ,
pr ess t he S E L / RE S E T but t on.
4^ 0 *~*C
o r * ?
^ DTC det ec t ed (t he l ower f our di gi t s ar e
>
a dec i mal number r epr esent i ng t he DTC)
- No DTCs det ec t ed
- Al l DTCs have been di spl ayed
The cont rol uni t that has st or ed t he code c an be i dent i f i ed by t he number shown on t he odomet er di spl ay.
Cont r ol Uni t Cont r ol Uni t
I.D. Number
Dr i ver ' s MICU 13
Passenger ' s MICU 14
Door mul t i pl ex cont rol uni t 30
Gauge cont rol modul e 50
Cl i mat e cont rol uni t 51
HandsFr eeLi nk cont rol uni t 94
Immobi l i zer -keyl ess cont rol uni t 96
How t o ci ear t he DTC
Ent er B-CAN Syst em Di agnosi s Test Mode 1 (see page 22-138). Whi l e i n Test Mode 1, pr ess and hol d down t he
S E L / RE S E T button f or at l east 10 sec onds.
22" ! 10
L oss of Communi cat i on DTC cr oss-r ef er ence chart
When an ECU on t he CAN ci rcui t i s unabl e to communi cat e wi t h ot her ECUs on t he CAN ci r cui t , t he ot her cont rol uni t s
wi l l set l oss of communi cat i on DTCs. Us e t hi s char t to fi nd t he cont rol uni t t hat i s not c ommuni c at i ng wi t h t he ot her
cont rol uni t s on t he CAN ci rcui t .
1. Fi nd t he Tr ansmi t t i ng Cont rol Uni t that i s i n t he same row as all of t he l oss of c ommuni c at i on DTCs ret ri eved.
2. Do t he i nput t est f or t he t ransmi t t i ng cont rol uni t.
BUS OFF and Int er nal Er r or Codes
DTC t ype Rel at ed Uni t
Dr i ver ' s Passenger's Gauge Door Immobilizer* Cl i mat e HandsFreeLink
MICU MICU Cont r ol Mul t i pl ex K eyl ess Cont r ol Cont r ol
Modul e Cont r ol
Uni t
Cont r ol
Uni t
Uni t Uni t
BUS OFF U1280 U1280 U1280 U1280 U1280 U1280 U1280
ECU (EEPROM) Er r or B10A2 B11A2 B1152
L os s of Communi c at i on
Tr ansmi t t i ng Cont r ol
Uni t
Recei vi ng Uni t / L os s of Communi c at i on DTC Tr ansmi t t i ng Cont r ol
Uni t
Dr i ver ' s
MICU
Passenger ' s
MICU
Gauge
Cont r ol
Modul e
Door
Mul t i pl ex
Cont r ol Uni t
Immobi l i zer -
K eyl ess
Cont r ol Uni t
Cl i mat e
Cont r ol Uni t
Dr i ver ' s MICU TX U1282 U1282 U1282 U1282
Passenger ' s MICU U1283 TX U1283 U1283
Gauge Cont rol Modul e U0155 U0155 TX U0155 U0155 U0155
Door Mul t i pl ex Cont rol
Uni t
U0199 TX U0199
Cl i mat e Cont rol Uni t U01b4
ECM/ PCM U0100
S RS Uni t U0151
VS A Modul at or-Cont rol
Uni t
U0122
TPMS Cont rol Uni t U0127
TX: Tr ansmi t t i ng uni t does not set a l oss c ommuni c at i on DTC.
22-111
IViuBtipBex Integrated Control S f st em
DTC Troubleshooting index
NOTE: Recor d all DTCs , and sort t hem by DTC t ype usi ng t he DTC t r oubl eshoot i ng i ndex, t hen t r oubl eshoot t he DTC(s)
in t hi s order:
Bat t ery vol t age DTCs
Int ernal er r or DTCs
L os s of c ommuni c at i on DTCs
Si gnal er r or DTCs
Dr i ver ' s MICU
DTC Descr i pt i on Page
B10A2 Dr i ver ' s MICU (EEPROM) error Internal er r or DTC Tr oubl eshoot i ng
(see page 22-144)
B10CF Left dayt i me r unni ng li ghts ci rcui t mal f unct i on Si gnal error DTC Tr oubl eshoot i ng
(see page 22-216)
B1036 Dr i ver ' s MICU IG1 li ne i nput er r or Si gnal error DTC Tr oubl eshoot i ng
(see page 22-145)
B1077 Wi ndshi el d wi per (As) si gnal error Si gnal error m r Tr mi h i o eh o o t i ng
(see page 22-312)
B1275 Headl i ght swi t ch OFF posi t i on ci rcui t mal f unct i on Si gnal error DTC Tr oubl eshoot i ng
(see page 22-220)
B1276 Combi nat i on li ght swi t ch parki ng Li ght posi t i on
(see page 22-220)
B1277 Headl i ght swi t ch AUTO posi t i on ci rcui t mal f unct i on Si gnal error DTC Tr oubl eshoot i ng
(see page 22-220)
B1278 Headl i ght swi t ch ON posi t i on ci rcui t mal f unct i on Si gnal error DTC Tr oubl eshoot i ng
(see page 22-220)
B1279 Di mmer swi t ch ci rcui t mal f unct i on Si gnal error DTC Tr oubl eshoot i ng
(see page 22-222)
B1280 Tur n si gnal ci rcui t mal f unct i on Si gnal error DTC Tr oubl eshoot i ng
(see page 22-246)
B1281 Front wi per swi t c h MIST posi t i on ci rcui t mal f unct i on Si gnal error DTC Tr oubl eshoot i ng
(see page 22-313)
B1282 Front wi per swi t ch INT (AUTO) posi t i on ci rcui t
mal f unct i on
(see page 22-313)
B1283 Front wi per swi t ch L OW posi t i on ci rcui t mal f unct i on Si gnal error DTC Tr oubl eshoot i ng
(see page 22-313)
B1284 Front wi per swi t ch HIGH posi t i on ci rcui t mal f unct i on Si gnal error DTC Tr oubl eshoot i ng
(see page 22-313)
U0155 Dr i ver ' s MICU l ost c ommuni c at i on wi t h gauge
cont rol modul e
L os s of c ommuni c at i on DTC Tr oubl eshoot i ng
(see page 22-146)
U0199 Dr i ver ' s MICU l ost c ommuni c at i on wi t h door
mul t i pl ex cont rol uni t
(see page 22-147)
U1280 Communi c at i on bus li ne er r or (BUS-OFF) L oss of c ommuni c at i on DTC Tr oubl eshoot i ng
(see page 22-148)
U1283 Dr i ver ' s MICU l ost c ommuni c at i on wi t h passenger ' s
MICU
L oss of c ommuni c at i on DTC Tr oubl eshoot i ng
(see page 22-150)
Passenger ' s MICU
DTC Descr i pt i on DTC Type Page
B11A2 Passenger ' s MICU i nt ernal (EEPROM) error Internal error DTC Tr oubl eshoot i ng
(see page 22-144)
B11C7 Passenger ' s MICU IG1 li ne i nput er r or Si gnal er r or DTC Tr oubl eshoot i ng
(see page 22-145)
B11CF Ri ght dayt i me runni ng li ght s ci rcui t mal f unct i on Si gnal er r or DTC Tr oubl eshoot i ng
(see page 22-218)
B1575 Aut o li ghti ng sensor ci rcui t mal f unct i on Si gnal er r or DTC Tr oubl eshoot i ng
(see page 22-224)
U0155 Passenger ' s MICU l ost c ommuni c at i on wi t h gauge
cont rol modul e
(see page 22-147)
U1280 Communi c at i on bus li ne er r or (BUS-OFF) L os s of c ommuni c at i on DTC Tr oubl eshoot i ng
(see page 22-148)
U1282 Passenger ' s MICU l ost c ommuni c at i on wi t h dr i ver ' s
MICU
(see page 22-150)
Immobilizer-K eyles s Cont rol U nit
DTC Des cript ion DTC Type Page
U0155 Immobi l i zer -keyl ess cont rol uni t l ost communi cat i on
wi t h gauge cont rol modul e
Lo__ of c ommuni c at i on DTC Tr oubl eshoot i ng
(see page 22-427)
wi t h door mul t i pl ex cont rol uni t
(see page 22-427)
U1280 Communi c at i on bus li ne error (BUS-OFF) L os s of c ommuni c at i on DTC Tr oubl eshoot i ng
(see page 22-148)
wi t h dr i ver ' s MICU
(see page 22-428)
(cont ' d)
22-113
Door Mul t i pl ex Cont r ol Uni t
B1125 Dr i ver 's power wi ndow mot or A pul se mal f unct i on Si gnal er r or DTC Tr oubl eshoot i ng
(see page 22-285)
B1126 Dr i ver ' s power wi ndow mot or B pul se mal f unct i on Si gnal error DTC Tr oubl eshoot i ng
(see page 22-285)
B1127 Dr i ver ' s door key cyl i nder swi t ch mal f unct i on Si gnal error DTC Tr oubl eshoot i ng
(see page 22-169)
B1128 Dr i ver ' s door lock swi t c h mal f unct i on Si gnal er r or DTC Tr oubl eshoot i ng
(see page 22-170)
B1129 Dr i ver ' s door lock knob swi t ch mal f unct i on Si gnal er r or DTC Tr oubl eshoot i ng
(see page 22-171)
B1130 Front passenger ' s power wi ndow mot or A pul se
mal f unct i on
(see page 22-286)
B1131 Front passenger ' s power wi ndow mot or B pul se
mal f unct i on
(see page 22-286)
B1140 ' Dr i ver ' s power wi ndow posi t i on det ect ci rcui t
mal f unct i on
S i gnal er r or D I'C Tr oubl eshoot i ng
(see page 22-288)
B1142 Door mul t i pl ex cont rol uni t lost c ommuni c at i on wi t h
front passenger ' s power wi ndow swi t c h (UART l i ne
open)
(see page 22-288)
B1145 Front passenger ' s power wi ndow posi t i on det ect
(see page 22-289)
U0155 Door mul t i pl ex cont rol uni t l ost c ommuni c at i on wi t h
gauge cont rol modul e
(see page 22-290)
cl i mat e cont rol uni t
(see page 22-290)
U1280 Communi c at i on bus li ne error (BUS-OFF) L os s of c ommuni c at i on DTC Tr oubl eshoot i ng
(see page 22-148)
dr i ver ' s MICU
(see page 22-291)
passenger ' s MICU
(see page 22-291)
22-114
D T C Descr i pt i on DTC Type
B1152 Gauge cont rol modul e (EEPROM) error Internal er r or DTC Tr oubl eshoot i ng
(see page 22-340)
B1175 Fuel l evel sensor (Fuel gauge sendi ng uni t) ci rcui t
mal f unct i on
(see page 22-340)
B1176 Fuel level sensor (Fuel gauge sendi ng unit) ci rcui t
short
(see page 22-341)
U0029 F-CAN communi cat i on li ne er r or (BUS-OFF) L oss of c ommuni c at i on DTC Tr oubl eshoot i ng
(see page 22-342)
*U0100 Gauge cont rol modul e lost communi cat i on wi t h
ECM/PCM
(see page 22-343)
U0122 Gauge cont rol modul e lost communi cat i on wi t h VS A
modul at or-cont rol uni t (VSA message)
(see page 22-343)
U0127 Gauge cont rol modul e lost communi cat i on wi t h
TPMS cont rol uni t (TPMS message)
(see page 22-344)
U0151 Gauge cont rol modul e lost communi cat i on wi t h S RS
uni t
(see page 22-345)
U1280 Communi c at i on bus li ne error (BUS-OFF) L oss of c ommuni c at i on DTC Tr oubl eshoot i ng
(see page 22-148)
dr i ver ' s MICU
(see page 22-346)
passenger ' s MICU
L oss of communi cat i on DTC Tr oubl eshoot i ng
(see page 22-346)
HandsFr eeLi nk Cont r ol Uni t
B1775 Mi cr ophone i nput/output shor t to power /open Si gnal er r or DTC Tr oubl eshoot i ng
(see page 23-270)
B1776 Mi cr ophone i nput/output shor t to gr ound/open Si gnal error DTC Tr oubl eshoot '
(see page 23-S
1
B1779 HFL-voi ce cont rol swi t ch (HFL TAL K / HFL BACK
but t ons) ci rcui t open/shor t
(see page 23-272)
B1780 HFL-voi ce cont rol swi t ch (HFL TAL K / HFL BACK
but t ons) ci rcui t shor t
(see page 23-274)
B1792 HandsFr eeLi nk cont rol uni t i nt ernal error Si gnal error DTC Tr oubl eshoot i ng
(see page 23-275)
U1280 Communi c at i on bus li ne error (BUS-OFF) L oss of communi cat i on DTC Tr oubl eshoot i ng
(see page 22-148)
(cont' d)
115
Multiplex i ntegrated Control Syst em
Cl i mat e Cont r ol Uni t
DTC Descr i pt i on DTCTf p e Page
B121A An open in t he mode cont rol mot or ci rcui t Si gnal er r or DTC Tr oubl eshoot i ng
(see page 21-134)
B121B A shor t in t he mode cont rol mot or ci rcui t Si gnal er r or DTC Tr oubl eshoot i ng
(see page 21-135)
B1220 A shor t in t he r eci r cul at i on cont r ol mot or ci r cui t Si gnal er r or DTC Tr oubl eshoot i ng
(see page 21-138)
B1225 An open in t he i n-car t emper at ur e sensor ci rcui t Si gnal er r or DTC Tr oubl eshoot i ng
(see page 21-141)
B1226 A shor t in t he i n-car t emper at ur e sensor ci rcui t Si gnal er r or DTC Tr oubl eshoot i ng
(see page 21-143)
B1227 An open in t he out si de ai r t emper at ur e sensor ci rcui t Si gnal er r or DTC Tr oubl eshoot i ng
(see page 21-144)
B1228 A shor t in t he out si de ai r t emper at ur e sensor ci rcui t Si gnal er r or DTC Tr oubl eshoot i ng
(see page 21-146)
B1229 An open in the sunl i ght sensor ci rcui t Si gnal er r or DTC Tr oubl eshoot i ng
(see page 21-147)
B1230 A shor t in t he sunl i ght sensor ci rcui t Si gnal er r or DTC Tr oubl eshoot i ng
(see page 21-149)
B1231 An open in t he evapor at or t emper at ur e sensor ci rcui t Si gnal er r or DTC Tr oubl eshoot i ng
(see page 21-150)
B1232 A shor t in t he evapor at or t emper at ur e sensor ci rcui t Si gnal er r or DTC Tr oubl eshoot i ng
(see page 21-151)
B1233 An open in t he dr i ver ' s ai r mi x cont rol mot or ci rcui t Si gnal er r or DTC Tr oubl eshoot i ng
(see page 21-152)
B1234 A shor t in t he dr i ver ' s ai r mi x cont rol mot or ci rcui t Si gnal er r or DTC Tr oubl eshoot i ng
(see page 21-154)
B1235 A pr obl em in t he dr i ver ' s ai r mi x cont rol l i nkage,
door , or mot or
(see page 21-157)
B1236 An open in t he passenger ' s ai r mi x cont rol mot or
ci rcui t
(see page 21-158)
B 1237 A shor t in t he passenger ' s ai r mi x cont rol mot or
ci rcui t
(see page 21-160)
B1238 A pr obl em in t he passenger ' s ai r mi x cont rol l i nkage,
door , or mot or
(see page 21-163)
B1240* A pr obl em in t he mode cont rol l i nkage, door , or
mot or
(see page 21-164)
B1241 A pr obl em in t he bl ower mot or ci rcui t Si gnal er r or DTC Tr oubl eshoot i ng
(see page 21-166)
B2983 A pr obl em i n t he r eci r cul at i on cont rol l i nkage, door ,
or mot or
(see page 21-169)
B2986 An open in t he r eci r cul at i on cont rol mot or ci rcui t Si gnal er r or DTC Tr oubl eshoot i ng
(see page 21-171)
U0155 Cl i mat e cont rol uni t lost c ommuni c at i on wi t h gauge
cont rol modul e
(see page 21-132)
U1280 Communi c at i on bus li ne er r or (BUS-OFF) L oss of c ommuni c at i on DTC Tr oubl eshoot i ng
(see page 22-148)
*: '10 model
22-116
Body Cont rol l er Ar ea Net wor k (B-CAN) and Fast Cont r ol l er Ar ea Net wor k (F-CAN)
The body cont rol l er ar ea net work (B-CAN) and t he f ast cont rol l er ar ea net work (F-CAN) shar e i nf ormat i on bet ween
mul t i pl e el ect roni c cont rol uni t s (ECUs). B-CAN communi cat i on moves at a sl ower speed (125 kbps) for c onveni enc e
rel at ed i t ems and f or ot her f unct i ons. F-CAN i nf ormat i on moves at a f ast er speed (500 kbps) for " r eal t i me" f unct i ons
suc h as fuel and emi ssi ons dat a. To al l ow both syst ems to shar e i nf or mat i on, t he gauge cont rol modul e t r ansl at es and
r el ays the i nf ormat i on f rom B-CAN to F-CAN and f rom F-CAN to B-CAN. Thi s i s cal l ed t he Gat eway Funct i on.
B-CAN B- CAN
CANH CA NL HI L O
F-CAN (500 kbps)
VS A MODUL ATOR-
CONTROL UNIT
1 f
NAVI GATI ON UNI T*
TPMS
CONTROL UNIT
A CCE L E RA TI ON
S E NS OR
B-CAN (125 kbps)
DRI VER' S
MI CU
PA S S E NGE R' S
MI CU
CL I MATE
CONTROL UNI T
CONTROL UNI T
DOOR MUL TI PL EX
CONTROL UNIT
HANDS FRE E L I NK
CONTROL UNI T*
2
* 1: Wi t h navi gat i on s y s t em
* 2: Wi t h Hands Fr eeL i nk
*3; Wi t h pr emi um audi o s y s t em
(cont ' d)
22-117
MuBtipBex Integrated Cont rol S f st em
S f st em Descri pt i on (cont' d)
Gat eway Funct i on
The gauge cont rol modul e act s as a gat eway t o al l ow both s y s t ems to shar e i nf ormat i on. The gauge cont rol modul e
t r ansl at es and r el ays t he i nf ormat i on f r om B-CAN to F-CAN and f r om F-CAN t o B-CAN.
CPU (Has bui l t -i n CA N c ont r ol l er )
B-CAN
TRANSCEIVER
F-CAN
TRA NS CE I VE R
I\M
B-CAN
HI
B CA N
L O
F-CAN
Net wor k " L o s s of Communi c at i on" Er r or Chec ki ng Funct i on
The ECUs on t he CAN ci rcui t send mes s ages t o eac h ot her. If t her e ar e any c ommuni c at i on mal f unct i ons on t he net work,
t he L CD di spl ay on t he gauge cont rol modul e c an i ndi cat e t he er r or mes s ages by ent eri ng t he gauge cont rol modul e
22-118
BODY
Sel f -di agnost i c Funct i on (On-board di agnosi s)
By connect i ng t he HDS to t he dat a link connect or (DLC), t he HDS c an ret ri eve t he di agnost i c i nf ormat i on f r om t he
dr i ver ' s MICU vi a a di agnost i c li ne cal l ed t he K-LINE. The K-LINE i s a separ at e c ommuni c at i on l i ne f rom t he CAN l i nes,
and i s c onnec t ed to most of t he CAN related ECUs . The dr i ver ' s MICU i s a gat eway bet ween t he HDS and B-CAN rel at ed
E CUs , and sends B-CAN di agnost i c i nf ormat i on to t he HDS. When doi ng a f unct i on t est wi t h t he HDS, t he HDS s ends an
out put si gnal t hr ough t he K-LINE t o t he dr i ver ' s MICU. The dr i ver ' s MICU ei t her r el ays t he r equest to anot her E CU, or
c ommands t he f unct i on i tself.
B- CAN B-CAN
CANH CA NL HI L O
F-CAN (500 kbps)
E CM/ PCM
VS A MODUL ATOR-
CONTROL UNI T
I f
NAVI GATI ON UNI T*
TPMS
CONTROL UNI T
A CCE L E RA TI ON
S E NS OR
j f
B-CAN (125 kbps)
DRI VER' S
MI CU
PA S S E NGE R' S
MI CU
CL I MATE
CONTROL UNIT
CONTROL UNIT
DOOR MUL TI PL EX
CONTROL UNI T
HANDS FREEL I NK
CONTROL UNI T*
2
AUDI O UNI T*
3
DATA LINK
CONNE CTOR
* 1: Wi t h navi gat i on s y s t em
* 2: Wi t h Hands Fr eeL i nk
* 3: Wi t h pr emi um audi o s y s t em
(cont' d)
22"
>><
119
Wake-up and Sl eep Funct i on
The mul t i pl ex i nt egrat ed cont rol syst em has " wake-up" and " s l eep" f unct i ons to dec r ease par asi t i c dr aw on t he bat t ery
when t he i gni ti on swi t c h i s in L OCK (0).
In t he sl eep mode, t he mul t i pl ex i nt egrat ed cont r ol syst em st ops f unct i oni ng (communi cat i on and CPU cont rol ) when
it i s not nec essar y f or t he syst em to oper at e.
As soon as any oper at i on i s r equest ed (for exampl e, a door i s unl ocked), t he rel at ed cont rol uni t s in t he sl eep mode
i mmedi at el y wake up and begi n to f unct i on.
When t he i gni ti on swi t c h i s t ur ned to L OCK (0), and t he dr i ver ' s door i s opened, t hen c l osed, t her e i s a del ay of about
40 sec onds bef ore t he cont rol uni t goes f r om t he wake-up mode to t he sl eep mode.
The sl eep mode wi l l not f unct i on if any door or t he t runk li d i s open, or if a key i s i n t he i gni ti on swi t c h.
NOTE: Sl eep and Wake-up Mode Test (see page 22-140).
Fai l -saf e Funct i on
To pr event i mpr oper oper at i on, t he MICU has a f ai l -saf e f unct i on. In t he f ai l -saf e mode, t he output si gnal i s f i xed when
any part of t he syst em mal f unct i ons (for exampl e, a f aul t y cont rol uni t or c ommuni c at i on l i ne).
Eac h cont rol uni t has a har dwar e f ai l -saf e f unct i on that f i xes t he output si gnal when t her e i s a CPU mal f unct i on, and a
sof t war e f ai l -saf e f unct i on that i gnor es t he si gnal f r om a mal f unct i oni ng cont r ol uni t , whi c h al l ows t he syst em t o
operat e nor mal l y.
Har dwar e Fai i -saf e Cont r ol
Fai l - s af e f unct i on
When a CPU pr obl em or a abnor mal power suppl y vol t age i s det ect ed, t he MICUs move to t he har dwar e f ai l -saf e mode,
and eac h syst em output l oad i s set to t he pr e-pr ogr ammed f ai l -saf e val ue.
Sof t war e Fai l -saf e Cont r ol
When dat a f r om t he B-CAN ci rcui t cannot be r ecei ved wi t hi n a speci f i ed t i me, or if an unusual combi nat i on of dat a i s
r ecogni zed, t he MICU swi t c hes to i ts f ai l -saf e mode, whi c h us es a pr e-pr ogr ammed val ue.
22-120
Dri ver' s MICU
Power Suppl y Vol t age Moni t ori ng Funct i on
The driver's MICU monitors the power supply voltage (back-up voltage). If the voltage goes below 10 V, the driver's MICU will not store a DTC.
Input Out put
Driver's MICU Battery voltage (VBU)
B-CAN MICU (Under 10 V) message
Ent r y Li ght s Cont rol Syst em (Cei l i ng Li ght s, Map Li ght s, Igni ti on Key Li ght )*
The driver's MICU control of the ceiling light ON/OFF is based on input signals from each switch.
Input Out put
Driver's MICU IG1 power supply
Ignition key switch
Driver's door switch
Left rear door switch
Interior lights
Ignition key light
B-CAN Keyless LOCK/UNLOCK signal
Right rear door switch
Driver's door lock knob switch (LOCK)
F ront passenger's door switch
*: The security system can be customized in the odo/trip display to suit the customer's needs. For more information about keyless/security
system options, refer to the Owner's Manual.
Col l i si on Det ect i on Si gnal (CDS)
The driver's MICU control of the door lock actuators is based on IG1 and SRS (CDS) inputs.
Input Out put
Driver's MICU IG1 power supply Door lock actuators (UNLOCK)
B-CAN CDS signal Door lock actuators (UNLOCK)
Key Interlock (A/T)
The driver's MICU control of the key interlock solenoid is based on ignition switch ACCESSORY (I) position, the transmission range switch P
position, and the park-pin switch inputs.
Input Out put
Driver's MICU Ignition switch ACCESSORY (I)
Transmission range switch (P) position
Park-pin switch
Key interlock solenoid
Rear Wi ndow Defogger Ti mer Oper at i on (Wi th Cl i mat e Cont rol )
The driver's MICU control of the rear window defogger timer is based on ignition switch and rear window defogger switch inputs.
Input Out put
Driver's MICU Ignition switch (IG1) Rear window defogger relay
B-CAN Rear window defogger switch MICU (rear window defogger) message
Rear Wi ndow Defogger Ti mer Oper at i on (Wi th HVAC Cont rol )
The driver's MICU control of the rear window defogger timer is based on the ignition switch and rear window defogger switch inputs.
Input Out put
Driver's MICU Rear window defogger switch
Ignition switch (IG1)
Rear window defogger relay
B-CAN MICU (Rear window defogger) message
A / C Pr essur e Sensor
The driver's MICU sends A/C pressure sensor signal information when the ignition switch is in the IG1 position.
Input Output
Driver's MICU Ignition switch
A/C pressure sensor
B-CAN A/C pressure sensor signal
(cont'd)
22-121
Combi nat i on Li ght Swi t c h
The driver's MICU control of the lighting system is based on inputs from each combination light switch.
Input Out put
Driver's MICU Combination light switch (OFF)
Combination light switch (ON)
Combination light switch (PARKING)
Combination light switch (PASSING)
Combination light switch (DIMMER)
Parking light
Headlight (high beam, low beam passing)
Taillights
Headlight (Back-up) to passenger's MICU
B-CAN Parking light
Dayt i me Runni ng Li ght s
The driver's MICU control of the headlights as daytime running lights is based on inputs from each switch.
Input Out put
Driver's MICU IG2 power supply Headlight (high beam)
B-CAN Parking brake signal
Transmission range switch P signal (A/T)
IG1 meter signal
Headlight (high beam)
DRL message
Hlead li ght ^ L Ut o^ C^ FF Funct i on
The driver's MICU control of the lighting system is based on inputs from each switch.
i nput Out put
Ignition key switch
Parking light
Headlight (high beam, low beam)
Taillights
B-CAN Driver's door lock knob switch Parking light
Headlight (high beam, low beam)
Tur n Si gnal /Hazar d War ni ng Li ght s
The driver's MICU control of the turn signal/hazard warning lights is based on inputs from the turn signal switch and the hazard warning switch.
Input Out put
Turn signal switch (left)
Turn signal switch (right)
Hazard warning switch
Turn signal lights (left)
Turn signal lights (right)
B-CAN Turn signal switch (left)
Turn signal switch (right)
HAZARDSW message
TURNLRLY message
TURNRRLY message
TURNRSW message
TURNLSW message
Cour t esy Li ght (Dri ver' s si de)
The driver's MICU control of the driver's and left rear door courtesy lights is based on inputs from the driver's and left rear door switches.
Input Out put
Driver's MICU Driver's door switch
Driver's door courtesy light
22-122
Wi per
The driver's MICU control of the wiper is based on inputs from each switch.
Input Output
Brake pedal position switch
Transmission range switch P position (A/T)
Wiper switch (INT & LO)
Wiper switch (HI & LO)
Wiper switch (MIST)
Wiper switch (AS)
Wiper switch intermittent dwell time controller
Windshield wiper intermittent relay
Windshield wiper motor high relay
B-CAN Parking brake signal (A/T)
IG1 meter signal (A/T)
Washer signal
WIPSW messages
Power wi ndow relay
The driver's MICU control of the power windows is based on inputs from each switch.
Input Output
Power window relay (rear)
B-CAN Power window relay signal
Power window timer signal
Keyl ess Answer Back
The driver's MICU control of the lighting system and horns is based on keyless data sent by B-CAN.
Input Output
Driver's MICU IG1 power supply Parking light
Taillights
Horns
B-CAN KEYLESS DOOR LOCK signal
ANSWER BACK DISABLE signal
Parking light
Secur i t y Answer Bac k *
Input Output
Driver's MICU Parking light
Taillights
Horns
B-CAN KEYLESS DOOR LOCK signal
ANSWER BACK DISABLE signal
Parking light
Answer Back Response Oper at i on*
Input Output
Driver's MICU Parking light
Taillights
Horns
B-CAN ANSWER BACK signal Parking light
(cont'd)
22-123
Multi plex Integrated Control Syst em
Power Door L oc k s *
The driver's MICU control of the door lock actuators is based on inputs from each switch.
Input Out put
Ignition key switch
Trunk lid latch switch (2-door)
Driver's door lock actuator (UNLOCK)
Door lock actuators (LOCK)
Door lock actuators (UNLOCK)
Trunk lid release actuator
B-CAN Driver's door lock switch (LOCK/UNLOCK)
Driver's door key cylinder switch (LOCK/UNLOCK)
F ront passenger's door lock switch (LOCK/UNLOCK)
Door lock signal (LOCK)
Door lock signal (UNLOCK)
Door Lock Response Oper at i on*
The driver's MICU control of the door lock actuators LOCK, UNLOCK, DRIVER'S UNLOCK, TRUNK UNLOCK is based on B-CAN door lock switch
signals.
Input Out put
Driver's MICU Driver's door lock actuator (UNLOCK)
B-CAN Door lock switch signals
Keyl ess Ent r y S y s t em*
Input Out put
Ignition key switch
Trunk lid latch switch
Driver's door lock actuator (UNLOCK)
B-CAN F ront passenger's door switch
Driver's door lock switch (LOCK/UNLOCK)
Keyless LOCK/UNLOCK signal
Door lock signal (LOCK)
Door lock signal (UNLOCK)
Relock signal
Keyl ess PANIC Funct i on
The driver's MICU control of the keyless PANIC function is based on B-CAN data.
Input Out put
Driver's MICU Headlight (low beam)
Parking light
Taillights
Horns
B-CAN PANIC signals Headlight (low beam)
Parking light
22-124
Aut o Power Door Locks (LOCK oper at i on)*
Input Out put
Transmission range switch (P position)
Left rear door lock knob switch (LOCK)
F ront passenger's door lock knob switch (LOCK)
Right rear door lock knob switch (LOCK)
Vehicle speed pulse signal
Engine speed signal
Aut o Power Door Loc ks (UNLOCK oper at i on)*
Input Out put
Transmission range switch (P position) (A/T)
Brake pedal position switch
Left rear door lock knob switch (UNLOCK)
Driver's door lock actuators (UNLOCK)
Driver's door lock knob switch (UNLOCK)
F ront passenger's door lock knob switch (UNLOCK)
Right rear door lock knob switch (UNLOCK)
Secur i t y Al ar m S y s t em*
The driver's MICU control of the lighting system and horns is based on inputs from each switch and B-CAN data.
Input Output
Ignition key switch
Left rear door lock knob switch (UNLOCK)
Security hood switch
Headlights (low beam)
Parking light
Taillights
Horns
B-CAN Audio switch
Driver's door lock knob switch (UNLOCK)
F ront passenger's door lock knob switch (UNLOCK)
Right rear door lock knob switch (UNLOCK)
Keyless LOCK/UNLOCK signal
Driver's MICU (SET 1) message
Driver's MICU (SET 2) message
ALARM (ACTION) message
Headlight (low beam)
Parking light
(cont'd)
22-125
Multiplex Integrated Control S f st em
Passenger ' s MICU
Power Suppl y Vol t age Moni t ori ng Funct i on
The passenger's MICU monitors the power supply voltage (back-up voltage), If the voltage goes below 10 V, the passenger's MICU will not
store DTCs.
Input Out put
Passenger's
MICU
Battery voltage (VBU)
Cour t esy Li ght (Front passenger ' s si de)
The passenger's MICU control of the front passenger door courtesy light is based on inputs from the front passenger door switch.
Input Out put
Passenger's
MICU
F ront passenger's door courtesy light
Power Door Loc ks (L OCK )*
The passenger's MICU control of the front passenger's side door lock actuators is based on inputs from the driver's MICU.
Input Out put
Passenger's
MICU
B-CAN Door lock (LOCK) signal
Power Door Loc ks (UNL OCK )*
The passenger's MICU control of the front passenger's side door lock actuators is based on inputs from the driver's MICU.
Input Out put
Passenger's
MICU
B-CAN Door lock (UNLOCK) signal
Ext er i or L i ght s*
The passenger's MICU control of the front passenger's side headlight, and parking lights is based on inputs from the driver's MICU.
Input Out put
Passenger's
MICU
Parking light
B-CAN Position light signal
Headlight (high beam, low beam passing) signal
Aut omat i c Li ght i ng
The passenger's MICU control of the headlights and the parking lights is based on inputs from the automatic lighting sensor.
Input Out put
Passenger's
MICU
IG1 power supply
Automatic lighting sensor (SIO) signal
Headlight back-up signal
B-CAN MICU (ignition key switch) signal
MICU (IG1) signal
Lighting switch signal
Vehicle speed signal
AUTOLT signal
22-126
Washer Oper at i on
The passenger's MICU control of the washer motor is based on inputs from the wiper switch.
Input Out put
Passenger's
MICU
IG1 power supply Washer motor
B-CAN Wiper switch signal Washer signal
Power Wi ndow Rel ay Ci r cui t
The passenger's MICU control of the power window relay circuit in the passenger's under-dash fuse/relay box is based on inputs from the
power window switches.
Input Out put
Passenger's
MICU
IG1 power supply Power window relay circuit
B-CAN Power window signals
(cont'd)
22 1 27
Multiplex i nt egr at ed Control S y s t em
S f st em Descri pt i on (cont'd)
HDS Input s and Commands
Cer t ai n Input s happen so qui ckl y that t he HDS cannot updat e f ast enough. Hold t he swi t ch that i s bei ng t est ed whi l e
moni t or i ng t he Dat a Li st . Thi s shoul d gi ve t he HDS t i me to updat e t he si gnal on t he Data Li st .
Bec ause t he HDS sof t war e i s updat ed to suppor t t he r el ease of newer vehi c l es it i s not unc ommon to see syst em
f unct i on t est s t hat are not suppor t ed.
Make sur e that t he most current sof t war e i s l oaded.
Input :
S y s t em Menu Dat a L i st . Dat a Li st Indi cat i on
Gauges Vehi cl e Speed Input Si gnal OFF/ ON
Cr ui se Cont rol Mai n Swi t c h (ACC swi t ch) OFF/ON
Cr ui se Cont rol Set Swi t c h OFF/ ON
Cr ui se Cont rol Resume Swi t c h OFF/ ON
Washer Fl ui d Level Swi t c h OFF/ON
VS A/ TCS Off Swi t ch OFF/ON
Gauge Sel ec t /Reset Swi t c h OFF/ON
Parki ng Brake Swi t c h OFF/ON
Brake Fl ui d Level Swi t c h OFF/ ON
Fuel Sendi ng Uni t Input 1 y
Fuel Sendi ng Uni t Input 2 V
VSAyTCS Act i ve Indi cat or OFF/ ON
VS A/ TCS Indi cat or (War ni ng) OFF/ ON
ABS Indi cat or OFF/ ON
EBD Indi cat or (El ect r oni c Brake Di st ri but i on) OFF/ON
Cr ui se Cont rol Mai n Swi t c h Indi cat or OFF/ "
MIL Indi cat or OFF/ON
Washer Fl ui d Level Indi cat or (Canada) OFF/ON
DRL Indi cat or OFF/
Low Oi l Pr essur e Indi cat or OFF/ON
Char gi ng Syst em Indi cat or OFF/ON
Cr ui se Mai n Swi t c h Lamp OFF/ON
Mai nt enance Requi r ed Indi cat or OFF/
Mai nt enance Mi nder Indi cat or OFF/
Hi gh Beam Indi cat or OFF/ Qy
Parki ng Li ght ON Indi cat or OFF/ON
Low Fuel War ni ng Indi cat or OFF/ON
Secur i t y Indi cat or OFF/ON
Fog Li ght Indi cat or OFF/ ON
Aut o-l i ght Tr oubl e Lamp OFF/ON
Seat bel t Indi cat or OFF/ ON
Low Ti r e Pr essur e Indi cat or OFF/ ON
TPMS Indi cat or OFF/ ON
Speed Indi cat or (km/h) Command km/h
Speed Indi cat or (mph) Command mi l e/h
Dr i ver ' s Seat Belt Buckl e Swi t c h OFF/ ON
A/T Gear Posi t i on Swi t c h (R) OFF/ON
A/T Gear Posi t i on Swi t c h (P) OFF/ON
2
0 1 00
Input ;
S y s t em Menu Dat a L i st Dat a Li st Indi cat i on
Li ght i ng Passi ng Input Si gnal OFF/ON
Headl i ght ON Input Si gnal OFF/ON
Dr i ver ' s Door Swi t c h OFF/ON
Hazard Swi t ch OFF/ ON
Headl i ght Swi t ch (OFF) OFF/ ON
Headl i ght Swi t ch (PARKING) OFF/ ON
Headl i ght Swi t ch (HEADLIGHT) OFF/ON
Headl i ght Swi t ch (AUTO) OFF/ON
Headl i ght Swi t ch (Hi gh Beam) OFF/ ON
Headl i ght Swi t ch (PASSING) OFF/ ON
Tur n Si gnal Swi t c h (LEFT) OFF/ON
Tur n Si gnal Swi t c h (RIGHT) OFF/ ON
Fog Li ght Swi t ch OFF/ ON
Interi or Li ght Command OFF/ON
Left Tur n Si gnal Command OFF/ ON
Ri ght Tur n Si gnal Command OFF/ ON
DR Cour t esy Li ght Out put OFF/ ON
Headl i ght Command OFF/ ON
Headl i ght High Beam Command OFF/ON
Parki ng Li ght Command OFF/ON
DRL Command OFF/ON
Aut ol i ght Sensor Input Vol t age V
Aut ol i ght Sensor Mal f unct i on Det ect i on
Vol t age Max
V
Aut ol i ght Sensor Mal f unct i on Det ect i on
Vol t age Mi n
V
Aut ol i ght Smal l Command OFF/ON
Aut ol i ght Headl i ght Command OFF/ON
Aut ol i ght War ni ng Command OFF/ ON
Aut ol i ght Headl i ght Backup Li ne Command OFF/ ON
A S Cour t esy Li ght Out put OFF/ON
(cont' d)
22-129
Multiplex I ntegrated Control Syst em
Input:
S y s t em Menu Dat a Li st Dat a Li st Indi cat i on
Door Dr i ver ' s Door Key Cyl i nder Swi t c h (LOCK) OFF/ ON
Dr i ver ' s Door Key Cyl i nder Swi t c h (UNLOCK) OFF/ ON
Dr i ver ' s Door Lock Swi t c h (LOCK) OFF/ ON
Dr i ver ' s Door Lock Swi t c h (UNLOCK) OFF/ ON
Dr i ver ' s Door Lock Knob Swi t c h (LOCK) OFF/ ON
Dr i ver ' s Door Lock Knob Swi t c h (UNLOCK ) OFF/ ON
Dr i ver ' s Door Swi t c h OFF/ ON
Dr i ver ' s Rear Door Swi t c h OFF/ ON
Dr i ver ' s Rear Door Lock Knob Swi t c h
(UNLOCK)
OFF/ ON
Door L OCK Command OFF/ ON
Door UNL OCK Command OFF/ ON
Dr i ver ' s Door UNL OCK Command OFF/ON
Front Passenger ' s Door Swi t c h OFF/ ON
Passenger ' s Rear Door Swi t c h OFF/ ON
Passenger ' s Rear Door Lock Knob S w.
(UNLOCK)
OFF/ ON
K eyl ess Dr i ver ' s Door Key Cyl i nder Swi t c h (LOCK) OFF/ ON
Tr ansmi t t er Dr i ver ' s Door Key Cyl i nder Swi t c h (UNLOCK) OFF/ ON
Dr i ver ' s Door Lock Swi t c h (UNLOCK) OFF/ON
Tr unk Li d/Tai l gat e Swi t c h OFF/ ON
(UNLOCK )
OFF/ ON
Door L OCK Command OF F /ON
Door UNL OCK Command OFF/ ON
Dr i ver ' s Door UNL OCK Command OFF/ ON
Tr unk Li d Rel ease Command OFF/ ON
(UNLOCK)
OFF/ ON
22-130
BODY |
! I i
Input : (cont ' d)
S f st em Menu Dat a Li st Dat aLi st Indicat ion
Power wi ndows P/W Main Switch . OF F /ON Power wi ndows
PA/V Master Switch (Driver's Window AUTO) OF F /ON
Power wi ndows
P/W Master Switch (Driver's Window UP) OF F /ON
Power wi ndows
P/W Master Switch (Driver's Window DOWN) OF F /ON
Power wi ndows
P/W Master Sw. (F ront Passenger's Window
UP)
OF F /ON
Power wi ndows
P/W Master Sw. (F ront Passenger's Window
DOWN)
OF F /ON
Power wi ndows
P/W Master Switch (Left Rear Window UP) OF F /ON
Power wi ndows
P/W Master Switch (Left Rear Window DOWN) OF F /ON
Power wi ndows
P/W Master Sw. (Right Rear Window UP) OF F /ON
Power wi ndows
P/W Master Sw. (Right Rear Window DOWN) OF F /ON
Power wi ndows
P/W Master Sw. (Passenger's Window AUTO) OF F /ON
Power wi ndows
Driver's P/W Motor Pulse A NOT EXIST/EXIST
Power wi ndows
Driver's P/W Motor Pul s e 3 NOT EXIST/EXIST
Power wi ndows
Driver's P/W Motor Command OFFUP/DOW^ ;
Power wi ndows
Driver's Door Switch OF F /ON
Power wi ndows
Power Window Timer Output OF F /ON
Power wi ndows
F ront Passenger's Door Switch OF F /ON
Power wi ndows
Power Window Timer Output OF F /ON
Wipers Brake Pedal Position Switch OF F /ON Wipers
Windshield Wiper Switch (LOW) OF F /ON
Wipers
Windshield Wiper Switch (HIGH) OF F /ON
Wipers
Windshield Wiper Switch (MIST) OF F /ON
Wipers
Windshield Wiper Switch (INT) OF F /ON
Wipers
Windshield Washer Switch OF F /ON
Wipers
Windshield Wiper Motor PARK Switch OF F /ON
Wipers
Intermittent Wiper Dwell Timer 0. 0- 1. 0 kO/OPEN
Wipers
Windshield Wiper Motor HI Command OF F /ON
Wipers
Windshield Wiper Motor LO Command OF F /ON
Wipers
Windshield Washer Motor Command OF F /ON
(cont'd)
22-131
Mul t i pl ex Int egr at ed Cont r ol S y s t em
Input : (cont ' d)
S y s t em Menu Dat a Li st Dat a Li st Indi cat i on
Security Dr i ver ' s Door Key Cyl i nder Swi t c h (LOCK) OFF/ ON Security
Dr i ver ' s Door K e y Cyl i nder Switch (UNLOCK)
OFF/ ON
Dr i ver ' s Door Lock Swi t c h (UNL OCK ) OFF/ ON
Igni ti on Key Cyl i nder Swi t c h OFF/ ON
Tr unk Li d/Tai l gat e Swi t c h OFF/ ON
(UNLOCK )
OFF/ ON
Radi o Swi t c h OFF/ ON
Hazard Swi t c h OFF/ ON
Sec ur i t y hood Swi t c h OFF/ ON
Door L OCK Command OFF/ ON
Door UNL OCK Command OFF/ON
Dr i ver ' s Door UNL OCK Command OFF/ ON
Tr unk Li d Rel ease Command OFF/ ON
Headl i ght Command OFF/ ON
Headl i ght Hi gh Beam Command OFF/ ON
Parki ng Li ght Command OFF/ ON
Horn Command OFF/ ON
(UNLOCK )
OFF/ ON
A/ C A/ C Pr essur e Swi t c h/Ther mal Prot ect or OFF/ ON
Rear Wi ndow Def ogger Input Swi t c h OFF/ ON
Rear Wi ndow Def ogger Out put OFF/ ON
2 2 - 1 3 2
Func t o r T^ st:
S y s t em Wen is HDS Description Note
A/ C Rear Def rost er RL Y Out put s for 60 sec onds A/ C
Rear Def ogger Oper at es t he rear wi ndow def ogger rel ay f or
60 sec onds
Door L OCK Al l Door s Out put s L OCK si gnal 1 t i me (0.6 sec ) to all door Door
UNL OCK Al l Door s Out put s UNL OCK si gnal 1 t i me (0.6 sec ) to all
door
Door
UNL OCK Dr i ver ' s Si de Door Out put s UNL OCK si gnal 1 t i me (0.6 sec ) to
dri ver si de door
Keyl ess
Tr ansmi t t er
Tr unk Li d/Tai l gat e Rel ease Command Unl ock trunk
Li ght i ng Interi or Li ght Command Il l umi nat es f or 30 sec onds Li ght i ng
Hazard Fl asher (Turn left and right) Bl i nks turn si gnal (left and ri ght) f or 15 sec onds
Li ght i ng
L EFT Turn Si gnal Command Bl i nks f or 5 sec onds
Li ght i ng
RIGHT Tur n Si gnal Command Bl i nks f or 5 sec onds
Li ght i ng
Headli ght Command Oper at es headl i ght (l ow) for 15 sec onds
Li ght i ng
Headli ght HIGH Beam Command Oper at es headl i ght (hi gh) f or 15 sec onds
Li ght i ng
Headli ght (hi gh) ON for Dayt i me Runni ng Li ght Tur ns on dayt i me r unni ng li ght (KA/KC)
Li ght i ng
Cour t esy Li ght (DR) Il l umi nat es f or 30 sec onds
Li ght i ng
Parki ng Li ght Oper at es parki ng li ghts for 15 sec onds
Li ght i ng
Rear Fog Li ght Il l umi nat es f or 30 sec onds
Li ght i ng
Headli ght Backup Out put s for 15 mi l l i seconds
Li ght i ng
Cour t esy Li ght (AS) Il l umi nat es f or 30 sec onds
Li ght i ng
Parki ng Li ght Command Oper at es f or 15 sec onds
Li ght i ng
Dayt i me Runni ng Li ght s Si gnal Oper at es for 15 sec onds
Li ght i ng
Trunk Li ght Il l umi nat es f or 30 sec onds
P/W Power Wi ndow RL Y Rr Out put s f or 30 sec onds P/W
Dr i ver ' s Wi ndow Up Dr i ves f or 3 sec onds
P/W
Dr i ver ' s Wi ndow Down Dr i ves for 3 sec onds
P/W
F ront Passenger ' s Wi ndow Up Dr i ves for 3 sec onds
P/W
Front Passenger ' s Wi ndow Down Dr i ves for 3 sec onds
P/W
Left Rear Wi ndow Up Dr i ves for 3 sec onds
P/W
Left Rear Wi ndow Down Dr i ves for 3 sec onds
P/W
Ri ght Rear Wi ndow Up Dr i ves for 3 sec onds
P/W
Ri ght Rear Wi ndow Down Dr i ves for 3 sec onds
Secur i t y H orn Command Oper at es horn f or 1 sec ond
W i per Wi ndshi el d Wi per Motor LOW Command Oper at es wi ndshi el d wi per f or 5 sec onds (l ow
speed) .
W i per
Wi ndshi el d Wi per Motor HIGH Command Oper at es wi ndshi el d wi per f or 5 sec onds (hi gh
speed)
W i per
Wi ndshi el d Washer Command Oper at es wi ndshi el d washer f or 5 sec onds
W i per
Wi ndshi el d Wi per Motor LOW Command Oper at es wi ndshi el d wi per for 5 sec onds (l ow
speed)
W i per
Wi ndshi el d Wi per Motor HIGH Command Oper at es wi ndshi el d wi per f or 5 sec onds (hi gh
speed)
W i per
Wi ndshi el d Washer Command Oper at es wi ndshi el d washer f or 5 sec onds
22- 133
Multiplex Integrated Control S f st em
Troubl eshoot i ng - B-CAN S f stem Di agnosi s Test Mode A
Chec k t he ECM/ PCM f or DTCs and t r oubl eshoot .
ECM/ PCM (see page 11-3) or F-CAN l oss of
c ommuni c at i on er r or s f i rst , t hen do t hi s di agnosi s if t he
sympt om i s rel at ed to t he B-CAN s y s t em.
1. Compar e t he sympt om wi t h t hi s li st of B-CAN rel at ed
syst ems:
Ext er i or l i ght s
Tur n si gnal s
Ent r y li ght cont rol
Interi or li ght s
Saf et y i ndi cat or s
Hor ns (securi t y and pani c)
Chi mes (key-i n, seat belt, l i ght s-on, and parki ng
brake)
Power wi ndow/moon roof t i mer
Wi per /washer
Secur i t y
K eyl ess ent ry
Power door l ocks
Key i nt erlock
Dashl i ght br i ght ness
Immobi l i zer
Is t he sympt om relat ed t o t he B-CAN syst em?
NO- Go to t he syst em t r oubl eshoot i ng f or t he syst em
wi t h t he s y mp t o m.
2. Connec t t he HDS to t he dat a link c onnec t or (A), t hen
t ur n t he i gni ti on swi t ch to ON (II).
3. Fr om t he BODY EL ECTRI CAL menu, sel ect UNIT
INFORMATION, and t hen sel ec t CONNECTED UNIT
l i st ed to see if t he f ol l owi ng cont rol uni t s are
c ommuni c at i ng wi t h t he HDS.
Dr i ver ' s MICU
Passenger ' s MICU
Door mul t i pl ex cont rol uni t (HDS name: Power
wi ndow uni t)
Immobi l i zer -keyl ess cont rol uni t
Cl i mat e/HVAC cont rol uni t
HandsFr eeLi nk uni t
Audi o uni t (wi th pr emi um audi o syst em)
NOTE:
If a unit is communicating wi th the HDS , DETECT
wi l l be di spl ayed.
If a uni t i s not c ommuni c at i ng or t he vehi cl e i s not
equi pped, " NOT AVAI L ABL E" wi l l be di spl ayed.
The HDS onl y c hec ks t he connect ed uni t st at us one
t i me when BODY EL ECTRI CAL i s sel ec t ed. To
r echeck t he st at us after r epai r , reboot t he HDS and
repeat st ep 3.
Are all cont rol unit s communicat ing wit h t he HDS?
Y E S
7
Go to st ep 4.
NO- l f any of t he cont rol uni t s ar e not c ommuni c at i ng,
go to B-CAN Syst em Di agnosi s Test Mode B (see
page 22-135). If all uni t s ar e not c ommuni c at i ng or
onl y t he dr i ver ' s MICU i s c ommuni c at i ng, go to DTC
U1280 t r oubl eshoot i ng (see page 22-148).H
22 134
Troubleshooting - B-CAN 8*
Diagnosis Test IVlode B
4. Sel ec t t he syst em that has t he pr obl em f r om t he
BODY ELECTRICAL.menu, t hen sel ect DTCs.
Are any DTCs indicated?
NO-l f t he pr obl em i s rel at ed to one of t he f ol l owi ng
i t ems and t he syst em that i s mal f unct i oni ng does not
st op or t urn off, go to B-CAN Syst em Di agnosi s Test
Mode C (see page 22-136). If t he pr obl em Is rel at ed to
one of t he f ol l owi ng i t ems and t he syst em t hat i s
mal f unct i oni ng does not wor k or t urn on, go t o B-CAN
Syst em Di agnosi s Test Mode D (see page 22-137).
< Ext er i or l i ght s
Tur n si gnal s
Ent ry li ght s
Interi or l i ght s
Hor ns (secur i t y and pani c)
Wi per /washer
If t he pr obl em i s rel at ed to one of t he f ol l owi ng i t ems,
go to t he t r oubl eshoot i ng f or that i ndi vi dual
s y s t e m .
Saf et y i ndi cat or s
Chi mes (key-i n, seat bel t , l i ght s-on, and parki ng
brake)
Secur i t y
Keyl ess ent ry
Key i nterlock
Dashl i ght br i ght ness
Audi o syst em
Navi gat i on (if equi pped)
5. Recor d all DTCs , and sort t hem by DTC t ype i nto t hese
cat egor i es:
Battery vol t age DTCs.
Internal er r or DTCs.
L oss of communi cat i on DTCs .
6. Tr oubl eshoot t he DTC(s) i n t he or der l i st ed above.
Do t hi s di agnosi s if any of t he cont rol uni t s ar e not
c ommuni c at i ng (Not Avai l abl e i s di spl ayed in t he HDS)
as f ound by t he B-CAN Syst em Di agnosi s Test Mode A
(see page 22-134).
1. Usi ng t he HDS, sel ec t t he syst em that has t he
sympt om f r om t he BODY EL ECTRI CAL menu.
2. Sel ec t DTCs , and t hen check f or l oss of
c ommuni c at i on DTCs.
Are any loss of communication DTCs indicated?
NO-Faul t y dr i ver ' s MICU; r epl ace t he dr i ver ' s
under -dash f use/r el ay box, US A model s (see page
22-86), Canada model s (see page 22- 87) .
3. Do t he power , gr ound, and communi cat i on part of t he
i nput t est f or t he uni t (s) not communi cat i ng wi t h t he
HDS.
UijniSt not communicating
Dr i ver ' s MICU (see page 22-151)
Gauge cont rol modul e (see page 22-347)
Immobi l i zer -keyl ess cont rol uni t (see page
22-437)
Passenger ' s MICU (see page 22-154)
Door mul t i pl ex cont rol uni t (see page 22-292)
Cl i mat e cont rol uni t (see page 21-172)
Audi o uni t (see page 23-14)
22-135
Multiplex integrated Control S f stem
Troubleshooting - B-CAN Sf stem Diagnosis Test Mode C
Do t hi s di agnosi s if a component that i s cont r ol l ed by t he
B-CAN syst em does not st op or t urn off.
NOTE:
If t he c omponent does not t urn on, go to B-CAN
Sy s t em Di agnosi s Test Mode D {see page 22-137).
S ee t he B-CAN syst em uni t i nput/output i ndex f or a li st
of i nput and out put devi c es and t he cont rol uni t s t hat
moni t or t he i nput and cont rol t he output devi c es (see
page 22-128).
1. Chec k for DTCs by sel ect i ng t he MODE MENU f r om
t he HDS.
6. Test t he swi t c h, t hen check f or a shor t in t he wi r e
bet ween t he swi t c h and t he cont rol uni t that moni t or s
t he swi t c h.
Are the switch and wire harness OK ?
Y E S - R e p l a c e t he cont rol uni t t hat moni t or s t he
s wi t ch.
NO-Repl ac e t he swi t c h or r epai r /r epl ace t he wi r e
h ar n e s s . !
Y E S - G o to B-CAN Syst em Di agnosi s Test Mode A
(see page 22-134).
NO-Go to st ep 2.
2. Tur n off t he swi t c h that cont r ol s t he mal f unct i oni ng
c omponent .
3. Sel ec t DATA L I ST f r om t he MODE MENU, and c hec k
t he i nput of t he swi t c h t hat cont r ol s t he c omponent .
Does the HDS indicate the switch is OFF?
NO-Go to st ep 6.
4. In t he DATA L I ST, check t he output si gnal of t he
mal f unct i oni ng component .
Is the output signal OFF?
NO-Repl ac e t he cont rol uni t t hat cont r ol s t he devi ce
t hat wi l l not t urn OFF. H
5. Test t he r el ay t hat does not st op or turn of f ,. If t he
rel ay t est OK , t hen check f or a shor t in t he wi r e
bet ween t he r el ay and t he c omponent , t he rel ay and
cont rol uni t , or t he c omponent and cont rol uni t.
Are the relay and the wire harness OK ?
Y E S - R e p l a c e t he cont rol uni t that cont r ol s t he
c omponent t hat wi l l not st op or t urn OFF.B
NO-Repl ac e t he rel ay or r epai r /r epl ace t he wi r e
h ar n e s s . !
22-136
Troubleshooting - B-CAN Sf stem Diagnosis Test Mode D
Do t hi s di agnosi s if a c omponent that i s cont r ol l ed by t he
B-CAN syst em does not wor k or c ome on.
NOTE:
If t he c omponent does not t urn off or st op, go to
B-CAN Sy s t em Di agnosi s Test Mode C (see page
22-136).
S ee t he B-CAN syst em uni t i nput/output i ndex f or a list
of i nput and out put devi c es and t he cont rol uni t s that
moni t or t he i nput and cont rol t he output devi c es (see
page 22-128).
1. Chec k t he f use of t he mal f unct i oni ng out put devi ce.
Is t he fuse OK?
NO-Repl ac e t he f use and r ec hec k.B
2. Chec k f or DTCs by sel ect i ng t he MODE MENU f rom
t he HDS.
Are any DTCs indicat ed ?
YE S - Go to B-CAN Sy s t em Di agnosi s Test Mode A
(see page 22-134).B
NO- Go to st ep 3.
3. Tur n ON t he swi t ch t hat cont r ol s t he mal f unct i oni ng
component .
4. Sel ec t DATA L IST f r om t he MODE MENU, and check
out put si gnal f or t he mal f unct i oni ng component .
Is t here an out put signal?
NO- Go to st ep 9.
5. Test t he rel ay and gr ound that cont r ol s t he devi ce that
does not wor k, if appl i cabl e. If t he rel ay and gr ound
t est OK, t hen check for an open or a shor t i n t he ci rcui t
f or t he mal f unct i oni ng component .
Are t he relay and circuit OK?
7. Wi t h t he mal f unct i oni ng out put devi ce c onnec t ed,
connect a vol t met er bet ween t he mal f unct i oni ng
output devi ce and body gr ound wi r e that t he cont rol
uni t uses t o cont rol t he out put devi c e ci rcui t .
8. Sel ec t MISC. TE S T f r om t he MODE MENU, and do t he
f or ced oper at i on t est of t he mal f unct i oni ng
component .
Is t here a change in volt age (12 Vt oOVorO Vt o 12 V)?
YES - l ns pec t t he gr ound f or t he component . If OK,
r epl ace t he c omponent .i l
NO-Repl ac e t he cont rol uni t that cont r ol s t he
mal f unct i oni ng c omponent .B
9. Sel ec t DATA L IST f r om t he MODE MENU, and make
sur e t he swi t ch si gnal i nput f or t he mal f unct i oni ng
syst em i ndi cat es a c hange when oper at ed.
Does t he swit ch input indicat e ON when t he swit ch is
ON?
YES - Repl ac e t he cont rol uni t t hat cont r ol s t he
mal f unct i oni ng c omponent .B
NO- Go to st ep 10.
10. Test t he swi t ch and its gr ound (if appl i cabl e), t hen
c hec k f or an open or a shor t in t he wi r e bet ween t he
swi t ch and t he cont rol uni t t hat moni t or s it.
Are t he swit ch and t he wire harness OK?
YES - Repl ac e t he cont rol uni t t hat moni t or s t he
swi t c h.B
NO-Repl ac e t he swi t ch or r epai r /r epl ace t he wi r e
har nes s . B
NO-Repl ac e t he rel ay or repai r t he wi r e c i r c ui t . B
6. Do t he f unct i on t est f or t he mal f unct i oni ng
component .
Does t he out put device pass t he funct ion t est ?
NO-Repl ac e t he c omponent M
22-137
Troubleshooting - B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode 1 and Test Mode 2
(without the HDS)
MFCS (MCIC) Ser vi c e Connec t or 07WAZ-00101 OA
Test Mode 1
Chec k t he ECM/ PCM f or DTCs and t r oubl eshoot
ECM/PCM (see pa g e 11-3) or F-CAN l oss o f
c ommuni c at i on er r or s f i r st , t hen do t hi s di agnosi s if t he
HDS i s not avai l abl e.
1. Chec k t he No. 15 (10 A) f use i n t he under -hood
Are the fuses OK ?
NO-Fi nd and repai r t he c aus e of t he bl own f u s e . B
20-166).
3. Tur n t he i gni ti on swi t c h t o ON (II), and move t he
cei l i ng li ght swi t ch to t he mi ddl e (door) posi t i on. .
4. Connec t t he MPCS ser vi c e c onnec t or (A) to t he MICU
ser vi c e check connect or socket (B) i n t he dr i ver ' s
5. Wai t 5 s ec onds , and wat c h t he cei l i ng li ght. When t he
cei l i ng li ght f l ashes qui ckl y onc e and t hen goes off,
t he syst em i s i n Test Mode 1.
6. Chec k f or B-CAN DTCs i ndi cat ed by t he gauge cont rol
modul e odo/t ri p di spl ay whi l e sti ll i n Test Mode 1.
Pr ess t he S E L / RE S E T button to di spl ay t he next c ode.
After you get to t he l ast c ode, t he di spl ay s hows END.
If no DTCs ar e st or ed, t he di spl ay wi l l r ead NO (see
page 22-109).
NOTE: If t he t est t i mes out , r emove t he MPCS ser vi c e
connect or , t ur n t he i gni t i on swi t ch to L OCK (0), and
repeat st eps 3 and 4.
NO- Go to st ep 10.
7. Rec or d all DTCs and t r oubl eshoot t hem in t hi s order:
Bat t ery vol t age DTCs
Internal er r or DTCs
L os s of c ommuni c at i on DTCs
8. Cl ear t he DTCs by pr essi ng and hol di ng t he
S E L / RE S E T button f or at l east 10 sec onds.
9. You wi l l hear a beep to conf i r m t he c odes have been
c l ear ed. Oper at e t he devi c es that f ai l ed, and r echeck
f or c odes.
Test Mode 2
10. Remove t he MPCS ser vi c e connect or f r om t he
dr i ver ' s under -dash f use/r el ay box MICU ser vi c e
check connect or socket f or 510 s ec onds , t hen
r e-i nser t it to ent er Mode 2. When t he syst em ent er s
Mode 2, t he cei l i ng li ght f l ashes t wo t i mes qui ckl y and
t hen goes off.
NOTE: If t he MPCS ser vi c e connect or i s di sc onnec t ed
f or t oo shor t or too l ong of a t i me, or t he i gni ti on
swi t ch i s t ur ned to L OCK (0), t he syst em r et ur ns to
Test Mode 1.
22-138
1 1 . The f ol l owi ng t abl es list t he ci r cui t s t hat c an be
c hec ked in Test Mode 2. Operat e t he swi t ch that i s
most c l osel y rel at ed to t he pr obl em. If t he ci rcui t i s
OK, t he cei l i ng light wi l l bli nk onc e. If t he ci rcui t i s
f aul t y, t here wi l l be no i ndi cat i on.
Dr i v er s MICU
It em
Brake pedal posi t i on swi t ch (ON)
Dr i ver ' s door swi t ch
Left rear door swi t ch (4-door)
Tr unk lid latch swi t ch
Left rear door lock knob swi t ch (UNLOCK)
(4-door )
Wi per swi t ch (HI/LO) _
Wi per swi t ch (INT/LO)
Wi per swi t ch (MIST)
Washer swi t ch
Wi per i ntermi ttent dwel l t i me cont rol l er
Tur n si gnal swi t ch (LEFT)
Tur n si gnal swi t ch (RIGHT)
Hazard war ni ng swi t ch (ON)
Headl i ght swi t ch (ON)
Headl i ght swi t ch (OFF)
Li ght i ng swi t ch (ON)
Di mmer swi t ch (ON)
Passi ng swi t ch (ON)
A / C pr essur e swi t ch
Tr ansmi ssi on range swi t ch (P) (A/T)
Igni ti on key swi t ch
Secur i t y hood swi t ch
Back-up light swi t ch
Wi ndshi el d wi per mot or park posi t i on (Auto
st op)
Rear wi ndow def ogger swi t ch (HVAC onl y)
Passenger ' s MICU
It em
Front passenger ' s door swi t ch
Ri ght rear door swi t ch (4-door)
Ri ght rear door lock knob swi t ch (UNLOCK)
(4-door) _
Do o r Mul t i pl ex Cont r ol Uni t
It em
Dr i ver ' s door lock swi t c h (UNLOCK)
Dr i ver ' s door lock swi t c h (LOCK)
Dr i ver ' s door lock knob swi t ch (UNLOCK)
Dr i ver ' s door lock knob swi t ch (LOCK)
Dr i ver ' s door lock key cyl i nder swi t ch
(UNL OCK )*
Dr i ver ' s door lock key cyl i nder swi t ch (LOCK)"
* A sec ond key i s nec essar y to check t he key
cyl i nder i nput s. Be sur e to rotate t he key cyl i nder
swi t c h t wo t i mes to eac h posi t i on (lock and lock,
unl ock and unlock) t o ensur e the door lock knob
swi t ch i s in t he appr opr i at e posi t i on.
Fr ont Passenger ' s Power Wi ndow S wi t c h
It em
Front passenger ' s door lock swi t ch (UNLOCK )
Front passenger ' s door lock swi t ch (LOCK)
Front passenger ' s door lock knob swi t ch
(UNLOCK ) _
Does t he ceiling light work properly in all swit ch
posit ions?
YE S - Go to f unct i on and i nput t est for t he syst em
rel at ed to t he f ai l ure. !!
NO- Repai r t he open, shor t , or repl ace t he f aul t y
swi t c h.
22 139
Multi plex i ntegrated Control S f st em
Sl eep and Wake-up Mode Test
1. Shi f t t o t he sl eep mode:
Cl ose all door s. Tur n t he i gni ti on swi t c h to L OCK (0), and r emove t he key, t hen open and c l ose t he dr i ver ' s door. If t he
MICU r ec ei ves no f urt her i nput s l i st ed bel ow, it wi l l go i nto sl eep mode i n l ess t han 40 sec onds.
Tr unk lid lat ch swi t c h (Trunk li d c l osed) (OFF)
Hazar d war ni ng swi t c h (OFF)
2. Conf i r m t he sl eep mode:
NOTE: Chec k any offi ci al Honda ser vi c e websi t e f or mor e i nf ormat i on about par asi t i c dr aw at t he battery.
Measur e t he vol t age on t he B-CAN c ommuni c at i on l i ne (PNK and BL U wi r es); t her e shoul d be battery vol t age i n t he
sl eep mode. Chec k t he par asi t i c dr aw at t he bat t ery whi l e shi f t i ng i nto t he sl eep mode; amper age shoul d c hange f r om
about 200 mA t o l ess t han 35 mA i n l ess t han 40 s ec onds .
3. Shi f t to t he wake up mode:
When t he i gni t i on swi t c h i s t ur ned to ON (II), t he dr i ver ' s MICU, passenger ' s MICU, gauge cont rol modul e,
i mmobi l i zer -keyl ess cont rol uni t , and ECM/ PCM wake up at t he s ame t i me wi t hout " t al ki ng" to eac h ot her t hr ough t he
c ommuni c at i on l i nes. When any swi t c h i n t he mul t i pl ex i nt egrat ed cont rol syst em i s t ur ned on, it wakes up i ts rel at ed
cont rol uni t whi c h, i n t ur n, wakes up t he ot her uni t s. Af t er conf i r mi ng t he sl eep mode, look i n t he f ol l owi ng t abl e f or
t he swi t c h most rel at ed to t he pr obl em. Oper at e t hat swi t c h and see if i ts cont rol uni t wakes up.
NOTE: If any cont r ol uni t i s faulty and wi l l not wake up, sever al ci r cui t s in t he syst em wi l l mal f unct i on at t he s ame
t i me. In t he t abl e bel ow, t he cont rol uni t i s f ol l owed by a li st of t he swi t c hes and i nput si gnal s t hat c an wake it up.
Dr i ver ' s door swi t c h (door open)
Left r ear door swi t c h (door open) (4-door)
Tr unk li d lat ch swi t c h (Trunk lid open)
Left r ear door lock knob swi t ch (4-door)
Sec ur i t y hood swi t c h (hood open)
Hazar d war ni ng swi t c h (ON)
Combi nat i on li ght swi t c h (Parki ng, Headl i ght , Di mmer , Passi ng ON)
Igni ti on key swi t c h (key i nsert ed)
22-140
22-141
Ci rcui t Di agram
BATTERY
C P
UNDER-HOOD FUSE/ RELAY BOX
DRI VER' S
UNDER-DASH
FU SE/ RELAY BOX
No. 1-1 (MAIN) (100 A) No. 3-1 (IG MAIN) (50 A)
No. 15( 10 A)
F16 C1
soy
IG1 HOT i n ON (II)
and S TA RT (III)
DRI VER' S
UNDE R- DAS H F US E / RE L A Y B OX
DRI VER' S
J UNCTI ON B OX 2
DRI VER' S MI CU
B-CAN B-CAN
HI L O
I P6 l P5
WH T -
DRI VE R' S J UNCTI ON B OX 1
WHT
15
I
I
I
I
I
I
PNK
i
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
18
I C3
I
I
I
I
I
I
B L U
No. 9 (20 A)
F US E
( DRI VER' S
UNDE R- DA S H
F US E / RE L A Y
BOX)
Y
8
" ~l *"
I
E8
1 1
E 5 | E10 | E 9
17
Y E L WHT PNK B L U
I I
I I
i
i i
i i
i i
i i
i i
I i
1
1
4 3
VB U B- CAN B- CAN
HI L O
HA NDS FRE E L I NK
CONTROL UNI T*
1
GND
BRN WHT PNK B L U
IG1 VB U B- CAN B-CAN
HI L O
CONTROL UNI T
LG
3 2 16
1
19
1
18
IG1 VB U B-CAN B-CAN
HI L O
GA UGE CONTROL
MODUL E
B3
A1
DRI VER' S
J UNCTI ON
B OX1
G501
I
B RN/ YE L
I
G101 G501
_0_
G502
I
I
I
I
I
I
WHT PNK B L U
3 35 33
VB U B- CAN B-CAN
HI L O
DOOR MUL TI PL E X
CONTROL UNI T
GND GND
32 37
-9r
G501 G502
22-142
* 1 : With HandsFreeLink
* 2 : With navigation system
* 3 : Without navigation system
- - : B-CAN line
- - : Other communication line
DRI VER' S
UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX
DRIVER'S MICU
MULTIPLEX
CONTROL
INSPECTION
CONNECTOR
SG SG PG PG
DRIVER'S JUNCTION BOX 1
I
I
I
I
I
I
WHT BRN PNK BLU
N12 j 02 j R2 JQ1 j R5
BLK BRN BRN BLK BLK
X L -Q_ X L X L X L
G502 G501 G501 G502 G502
4--
i
- - PNK
- - BLU - -
I
- r -
i i
PNK BLU
A35 1A11 J A29
BLU
VBU IG1 B-CAN B-CAN
HI L 0
PASSENGER' S MICU
SG SG PG PG |
BLK BLK BLK BLK
G505 G201 G505 G201
('08-09 models)
PASSENGER' S
UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY
BOX
PNK
I
4 6
i i
WHT*
2
RED*
PNK*
3
BL U*
:
SG SG PG
BLK BLK BLK
G505 G201 G201
{'10 model)
B-CAN B-CAN
HI LO
CLIMATE CONTROL
UNIT
B3
X L
G401
Q16
LT BLU
B3
; E4
LT BLU
: 7
CENTER
JUNCTION
BOX
K-LINE
DATA LINK
CONNECTOR
J 5
BRN
BRN/YEL
1
I
BLU
B-CAN B-CAN
HI LO
X L
G402
22*1 43
Multiplex i ntegrated Cont rol S f st em
DTC B10A2: Dri ver's MICU (EEPROM) Er r or
to f ol l ow t he i nst r uct i ons in B-CAN Sy s t em Di agnosi s
Test Mode A (see page 22-134).
1. Cl ear t he DTCs wi t h t he HDS.
2. Tur n t he i gni t i on swi t ch to L OCK (0) and t hen back to
ON (II).
3. Wai t f or at l east 6 sec onds.
Is DTC B10A2 Indicat ed?
YES - Faul t y dr i ver ' s MICU; r epl ace t he dr i ver ' s
22-86), Canada model s (see page 22-87111
t i me.Hi
DTC B11A2: Passenger ' s MICU Internal
(EEPROM) Er r or
t o f ol l ow t he i nst r uct i ons i n B-CAN Syst em Di agnosi s
ON (II).
Is DTC B11A2 indicat ed?
YES - Faul t y passenger ' s MICU; r epl ace t he
passenger's under- dash f use/r el ay box (see page
22-89).B
t i me. H
22-144
DTC B1036: Dri ver' s MICU IG1 .Li ne Input Error
NOTE;
Bef ore t r oubl eshoot i ng check t he No. 5 (7.5 A) f use in
If you ar e t r oubl eshoot i ng mul t i pl e DTCs , be sur e to
f ol l ow t he i nst ruct i ons in B-CAN Syst em Di agnosi s
2. Tur n t he i gni ti on swi t ch to L OCK (0) and t hen back to
ON (II).
Is DTC B1036 indicat ed?
Chec k f or l oose or poor c onnec t i ons at t he dr i ver ' s
under -dash f use/r el ay box connect or C (5P). If t he
connect i ons ar e good, c hec k t he battery condi t i on
(see page 22-90) and t he char gi ng s y s t em.B
5. Measur e t he vol t age bet ween gauge cont rol modul e
GAUGE CONTROL M O D UL E 32P CONNECTOR
1 | 2 | / 1 / | / | 6 / 1 8 | 9| 1 0
Il7|l8|l9|/l/l22|23|24|25|26|27|28i29|30|/
/
l32
IG1
( BRN)
YES - Faul t y dr i ver ' s MICU; subst i t ut e a known-good
dr i ver ' s under -dash f use/r el ay box and r ec hec k . B
gauge cont rol modul e.B
DTC B11C7: Passenger ' s MICU IG1 Li ne Input
Error
NOTE:
Bef ore t r oubl eshoot i ng c hec k t he No. 5 (7.5 A) f use in
f ol l ow t he i nst r uct i ons i n B-CAN Syst em Di agnosi s
ON (II).
Is DTC B11C7 indicat ed?
Check f or l oose or poor c onnec t i ons. If t he
connect i ons ar e good, c hec k t he battery condi t i on
(see page 22-90) and t he char gi ng s y s t em.B
5. Check t he DTCs wi t h t he HDS.
Is DTC B11C7 indicat ed wit h DTC U1282?
YE S - Go to DTC U1282 t r oubl eshoot i ng (see page
22-291 ).B
NO- Go to st ep 6.
7. Di sconnect passenger ' s under -dash f use/r el ay box
connect or A (38P).
(cont' d)
22-145
9. Measur e t he vol t age bet ween passenger ' s
under -dash f use/r el ay box c onnec t or A (38P) t er mi nal
P A S S E N G E R ' S U N D E R - D A S H FUSE/RELAY
BOX CONNECTOR A (38P)
/ / / / / /
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 1 7 18 19 20
/
/
y /
/
/
27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 3 5 36 37 38
IG1
^ ( B R N)
S)
YES - Faul t y passenger ' s MICU; subst i t ut e a
known-good passenger ' s under -dash f use/r el ay box
and r ec hec k . B
bet ween t he passenger ' s under -dash f use/r el ay box
and dr i ver ' s under -dash f use/r el ay box . H
DTC U0155: Dr i ver ' s MICU Lost
Communi cat i on Wi th Gauge Cont rol Modul e
to f ol l ow t he i nst r uct i ons i n B-CAN Sy s t em Di agnosi s
ON (II).
Is DTC U0155 Indicat ed?
YE S - Go to t he gauge cont rol modul e i nput t es t and
do ail power, gr ound, and c ommuni c at i on i nput t est s
(see page 22-347). If t he t est s pr ove OK , r epl ace t he
gauge cont rol modul e (see page 22-351 ) .
Chec k f or l oose or poor c onnec t i ons at t he gauge
cont rol modul e (32P) and t he rel at ed u n i t s . !
22-146
DTC U0155: Passenger ' s MICU Lost
Communi cat i on Wi th Gauge Control Module
to f ol l ow t he i nst r uct i ons in B-CAN Syst em Di agnosi s
2. Tur n t he i gni ti on swi t c h to L OCK (0) and t hen back to
ON (II).
YE S - Go to t he gauge cont rol modul e i nput t est , and
do all power , gr ound, and communi cat i on i nput t est s
(see page 22-347). If t he t est s prove OK, r epl ace t he
Chec k for l oose or poor connect i ons at t he gauge
cont rol modul e (32P) and t he rel at ed u n i t s .
DTC U0199: Dr i ver ' s MICU Lost
Communi cat i on Wi th Door Multi plex Control
Uni t
to f ol l ow t he i nst r uct i ons i n B-CAN Syst em Di agnosi s
ON (II).
3. Wai t f or at l east 6 s ec onds .
4. Chec k f or DTCs wi t h t he HDS,
is DTC U0199 indicat ed?
YE S - Go to t he door mul t i pl ex cont rol uni t i nput t est ,
and do all power , gr ound, and communi cat i on i nput
t est (see page 22-151 )s. If t he t est s pr ove OK, r epl ace
t he power wi ndow mast er swi t c h, 4-door (see page
22-305), 2-door (see page 22-306)
Chec k f or l oose or poor connect i ons at t he door
mul t i pl ex cont rol uni t 37P connect or and t he rel at ed
u n i t s .
22-147
DTC U1280: Communi cat i on Bus Li ne Er r or
(BUS-OFF)
ON (II).
Check f or l oose or poor c onnec t i ons, or wor n/shor t ed
wi r es. If t he c onnec t i ons ar e good, check t he battery
condi t i on (see page 22-90) and t he char gi ng
syst em.
6. Di sconnect t he appr opr i at e connect or at eac h cont rol
uni t i n t he t abl e one at a t i me. Cl ear t he DTC, t hen
r echeck f or DTCs after eac h uni t i s di sc onnec t ed.
Cont r ol Uni t Connec t or
Passenger ' s MICU Passenger ' s
under -dash f use/r el ay
box connect or A (38P)
Door mul t i pl ex
cont rol uni t
37 P connect or
Gauge cont rol
modul e
32P connect or
Immobi l i zer -keyl ess
cont rol uni t
7P connect or
Audi o uni t *
1
Connect or B (20P)
Cl i mat e cont rol uni t *
2
Connect or B (12P)
HandsFr eeLi nk
cont rol uni t *
3
28P connect or
*1: Wi t h pr emi um audi o syst em
*2: Wi t h cl i mat e cont rol syst em
*3: Wi t h HandsFr eeLi nk
is DTC U1280 indicat ed wit h each individual unit
disconnect ed?
YE S - L eav e t he c onnec t or s di sc onnec t ed, and go to
st ep 7.
NO- Go to t he i nput t est for t he cont rol uni t that was
di sc onnec t ed when DTC U1280 di d not r eset and do
all power and gr ound i nput t est s. If t he t est s prove OK,
r epl ace that uni t . H
Passenger ' s MICU i nput t est (see page 22-154).
Gauge cont rol modul e i nput t est (see page 22-347).
Door mul t i pl ex cont rol uni t i nput t est (see page
22- 292).
Cl i mat e cont rol uni t i nput t est (see page 21-172).
Immobi l i zer -keyl ess cont rol unit i nput t est (see
page 22-437).
HandsFr eeLi nk cont rol uni t input t est (see page
23- 266).
8. Di sconnect eac h cont rol uni t connect or in t he t abl e.
Cont r ol Uni t Connec t or
Passenger ' s MICU Passenger ' s
under -dash f use/r el ay
Door mul t i pl ex
cont rol uni t
37P connect or
Gauge cont rol
modul e
32 P connect or
cont rol uni t
7P connect or
Audi o uni t *
1
Connect or B (20P)
Cl i mat e cont rol uni t *
2
Connect or B (12P)
HandsFr eeLi nk
cont rol uni t *
3
28P connect or
*2: Wi t h cl i mat e cont rol syst em
connect or P (20P).
22-148
f use/r el ay box connect or P (20P) t er mi nal s No. 5 and
No. 6.
DRIVER'S UNDER-DASH F USE/RELAY
B-CAN LO (BLU)
n
B-CAN HI (PNK)
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 ?0
11 1z
YES - Repai r a shor t bet ween t he B-CAN w i r e s .
NO- Go to st ep 11.
dr i ver ' s under -dash f use/r el ay box connect or P (20P)
DRI VER'S UNDER-DASH FUSE/ RELAY
B-CAN LO (BLU) B-CAN HI (PNK)
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 70
11 12
YES - Repai r a shor t to gr ound i n t he wi r e.!
NO- Go to st ep 12.
dr i ver ' s under -dash f use/r el ay box connect or P (20P)
DRI VERS UNDER- DASH FUSE/ RELAY
B-CAN LO ( BLU) B-CAN HI (PNK)
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
11 12
Is t here volt age?
YES - Repai r a shor t to power in t he wi r e. H
NO-Faul t y dr i ver ' s MICU, r epl ace t he dr i ver ' s
22-86), Canada model s (see page 22-87).B
22-149
Multi plex Integrated Control S f st em
DTC U1282: Passenger ' s MICU Lost
Communi cat i on Wi th Dr i ver ' s MICU
ON (II).
YE S - Go to t he dr i ver ' s MICU i nput t est , and do all
power , gr ound, and c ommuni c at i on i nput t est s (see
page 22-151). If t he t est s pr ove OK , r epl ace t he
dr i ver ' s under -dash f use/r el ay box, US A model s (see
page 22-86), Canada model s (see page 22- 87) .
Chec k f or l oose or poor c onnec t i ons at dr i ver ' s
under -dash f use/r el ay box connect or P (20P) and t he
rel at ed u n i t s .
DTC U1283: Dri ver' s MICU Lost
Communi cat i on Wi th Passenger ' s MICU
ON (II).
YE S - Go to t he passenger ' s MICU i nput t est , and do all
power , gr ound, and communi cat i on i nput t est s (see
page 22-154). If t he t est s prove OK, r epl ace t he
Chec k f or l oose or poor connect i ons at dr i ver ' s
22-150
MICU Input Test
NOTE: Bef ore t est i ng, t r oubl eshoot t he mul t i pl ex i ntegrated cont rol uni t f i rst , usi ng B-CAN Sy s t em Di agnosi s Test Mode
A (see page 22-134).
Dr i ver ' s MICU
1. Tur n t he i gni ti on swi t ch to L OCK (0), and r emove t he dr i ver ' s dashboar d l ower cover (see page 20-166).
2. Di sconnect dr i ver ' s under -dash f use/r el ay box connect or s N, P, Q, and R.
NOTE: Al l connect or vi ews ar e wi r e si de of f emal e t er mi nal s.
CONNECTOR N (16P) CONNECTOR Q (20P)
BL K BRN
1 2
9 10
3Z0
14
BL K
r o L .
1 2
J T L
3
8
/
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 20
/
L T BL U
CONNECTOR P (20P)
BL U PNK WHT BRN
CONNECTOR R (24P)
BL K
1 2
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
11 12
1 2
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
11 12
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
7
10
/ 7
13 14 15 16 17 18
/
/
21 22
/
/
\
BRIM
3. Inspect t he connect or and socket t er mi nal s to be sur e t hey ar e all maki ng good cont act .
If t he t er mi nal s ar e bent , l oose or c or r oded, repai r t hem as nec essar y and r echeck t he syst em.
If t he t er mi nal s look OK , go to st ep 4.
(cont' d)
22-151
MICU Input Test (cont'd)
4. Wi t h t he c onnec t or s sti ll di sc onnec t ed, do t hese i nput t est s at the f ol l owi ng c onnec t or s.
If any t est i ndi cat es a pr obl em, f i nd and cor r ect t he c aus e, t hen r echeck t he syst em.
If all t he i nput t est s pr ove OK, go to st ep 5.
Cavi t y Wi r e Tes t condi t i on Test : Desi r ed r esul t Possi bl e c ause if
desi r ed r esul t i s not
obt ai ned
P5 BL U Immobi l i zer -keyl ess
cont rol uni t 7P .
connect or
di sconnect ed
Chec k f or cont i nui t y bet ween t er mi nal P5
and i mmobi l i zer -keyl ess cont rol uni t 7P
c onnec t or t er mi nal No. 3:
An open or hi gh
r esi st ance in t he wi r e
P6 PNK
cont rol uni t 7P .
connect or
di sconnect ed
and i mmobi l i zer -keyl ess cont rol uni t 7P
connect or t er mi nal No. 4: Ther e shoul d be
cont i nui t y.
An open or hi gh
P5 BL U Gauge cont rol
modul e 32P
connect or
di sc onnec t ed
and gauge cont rol modul e 32P connect or
t er mi nal No. 18:
An open or hi gh
r esi st anc e in t he wi r e
P6 PNK
Gauge cont rol
modul e 32P
connect or
di sc onnec t ed
and gauge cont rol modul e 32P connect or
t er mi nal No. 19:
An open or hi gh
r esi st ance i n t he wi r e
P5 BL U Door mul t i pl ex
cont rol uni t 37P
connect or
di sc onnec t ed
and door mul t i pl ex cont rol uni t 37P
connect or t er mi nal No. 33:
An open or hi gh
P6 PNK
Door mul t i pl ex
cont rol uni t 37P
connect or
di sc onnec t ed
Chec k f or cont i nui t y bet ween t he t er mi nal
P6 and t he door mul t i pl ex cont rol uni t 37P
An open or hi gh
r esi st anc e i n t he wi r e
P5 BL U Passenger ' s
under -dash
f use/r el ay box
connect or A (38P)
di sc onnec t ed
and passenger ' s under -dash f use/r el ay box
connect or A (38P) t er mi nal No. 29:
An open or hi gh
P6 PNK
Passenger ' s
under -dash
f use/r el ay box
connect or A (38P)
di sc onnec t ed Check for cont i nui t y bet ween t er mi nal P6
and passenger ' s under -dash f use/r el ay box
An open or hi gh
P5 BL U Cl i mat e cont rol uni t
connect or B (12P)
di sc onnec t ed
Check f or cont i nui t y bet ween t er mi nal P5
and cl i mat e cont rol uni t connect or B (12P)
t er mi nal No. 2:
An open or hi gh
P6 PNK
Cl i mat e cont rol uni t
connect or B (12P)
di sc onnec t ed
and cl i mat e cont rol uni t connect or B (12P)
t er mi nal No. 1:
An open or hi gh
P5 BL U Audi o uni t connect or
B (20P)
M
di sc onnec t ed
and audi o uni t connect or B (20P) t er mi nal
No. 8:
An open or hi gh
P6 PNK
Audi o uni t connect or
B (20P)
M
di sc onnec t ed
and audi o uni t connect or B (20P) t er mi nal
No. 18:
An open or hi gh
22-152
Cavi t y Wi r e Tes t condi t i on Test Desi r ed r esul t Possi bl e c aus e if
desi r ed r esul t i s not
obt ai ned
P5 BL U HandsFr eeLi nk
cont rol uni t 28P
connect or *
2
di sconnect ed
Check for conti nui ty bet ween t ermi nal P5
and HandsFr eeLi nk cont rol uni t 28P
An open or hi gh
P6 PNK
HandsFr eeLi nk
cont rol uni t 28P
connect or *
2
di sconnect ed
Chec k for conti nui ty bet ween t ermi nal P6
and HandsFr eeLi nk cont rol uni t 28P
An open or hi gh
Q16 LT
BL U
Under all condi t i ons Chec k for conti nui ty bet ween t ermi nal Q16
and data link connect or 16P connect or
t er mi nal No. 7:
An open or hi gh
* 2: Wi t h HandsFr eeLi nk
5. Rec onnec t t he connect or s to t he dr i ver ' s under -dash f use/r el ay box, turn the i gni ti on swi t ch to ON (II), and do t hese
i nput t est s at t he f ol l owi ng connect or s.
If any t est i ndi cat es a pr obl em, f i nd and cor r ect t he c ause, t hen r echeck t he syst em.
If all t he i nput t est s prove OK, go to st ep 6.
NOTE: These ar e power and gr ound t est s f or t he mul t i pl ex i nt egrat ed cont rol uni t.
Cavi t y Wi r e Tes t condi t i on Test : Desi r ed r esul t Possi bl e c aus e if desi r ed r esul t i s
not obt ai ned
N12 BLK In all i gni ti on swi t ch
posi t i ons
Measur e t he vol t age to gr ound:
Ther e shoul d be l ess t han 0.2 V.
Poor gr ound (G502) or an open
in t he gr ound wi r e
An open or hi gh r esi st ance in
t he wi r e
Q1 BLK In all i gni ti on swi t ch
posi t i ons
t he wi r e
02 BRN In all i gni ti on swi t ch
posi t i ons
t he wi r e
R2 BRN In all i gni ti on swi t ch
posi t i ons
t he wi r e
R5 BLK In all i gni ti on swi t ch
posi t i ons
o ^cor gr ound (G502) or an ope;?
t he wi r e
P9 WHT Under all condi t i ons Measur e t he vol t age to gr ound:
Ther e shoul d be battery vol t age.
Bl own No. 15 (10 A) f use in t he
Faul t y dr i ver ' s under -dash
f use/r el ay box
t he wi r e
P20 BRN Igni ti on swi t ch ON (II) Measur e t he vol t age to gr ound:
Bl own No. 5 (7.5 A) f use in t he
dr i ver ' s under- dash f use/r el ay
box
f use/r el ay box
t he wi r e
(cont d)
22-153
SViultipiex Integrated Control S f st em
IVI1CU Input Test (cont ' d!
Passenger ' s MICU .
6. Tur n t he i gni ti on swi t c h to L OCK (0), and r emove t he passenger ' s kick panel .
4-door (see page 20- 107)
7. Di sc onnec t passenger ' s under -dash f use/r el ay box c onnec t or s A and E.
CONNECTOR A (38P)
WH T
p
11 12 13 U 15 16 17 18 19 20 .
| 2 8 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38
J
| 2 8
4 J V.
38
J
BRN BLK* BLK
CONNECTOR E (18P)
/
2
/ >
5 8
-i
7
8
10
/
12 13 15 16
/
BLK
BLK
*: "08-09 models
If t he t er mi nal s look OK, go to st ep 9.
22-154
9. Reconnect t he c onnec t or s to t he passenger ' s under -dash f use/r el ay box, t urn t he Igni ti on swi t ch t o ON (II), and do
t hese i nput t est s at t he f ol l owi ng c onnec t or s.
If all the i nput t est s prove OK, go to st ep 10.
Cavi t y Wi r e Tes t condi t i on Test : Desi r ed r esul t Possi bl e c aus e if desi r ed r esul t i s not
obt ai ned
A14 WHT Under all
condi t i ons
Bl own No. 15 (10 A) f use i n t he
Faul t y dr i ver ' s under -dash f use/r el ay
box
An open or hi gh r esi st anc e i n t he wi r e
box
A35 BRN Igni ti on swi t ch
ON (II)
Bl own No. 5 (7.5 A) f use i n t he dr i ver ' s
box
Bl own No. 5 (7.5 A) f use i n t he dr i ver ' s
box
A36* BLK In ai l i gni ti on
swi t ch
posi t i ons
Poor gr ound (G505) or an open in t he
gr ound wi r e
A37 BL K In all i gni ti on
swi t ch
posi t i ons
gr ound wi r e
E15 BLK In all i gni ti on
swi t ch
posi t i ons
gr ound wi r e
E16 BL K In all i gni ti on
swi t ch
posi t i ons
gr ound wi r e
o An open or hi gh r esi st ance i n t he wi r e
*: ' 08-09 model s
10. If mul t i pl e f ai l ur es ar e f ound on mor e t han one cont rol uni t, r epl ace t he dr i ver ' s under -dash f use/r el ay box (i ncl udes
t he dr i ver ' s MICU).
US A model s (see page 22-86)
Canada model s (see page 22-87)
If i nput f ai l ur es ar e rel at ed to a part i cul ar cont rol uni t, repl ace t he cont rol uni t.
22 155
K ef l ess/Power Door Loc ks/Sec ur i t f S f st em
4-door
I GNI TI O N K E Y L O CK BU T T O N
- TRU NK BU T T O N
U NL O CK BU T T O N
PANI C BU T T O N
TRANS MI TTER
Test page 22-192
I MMOBI L I ZER- K EYL ES S CONTROL
UNIT (Has bui l t -i n r ecei ver )
S ECURI TY HOOD S WI TCH
Test, page 22-191
HORNS
Test/Replacement, page 22-198
* : Wi t h sec ur i t y
GA UGE CONTROL
MODUL E
NAVIGATION UNIT or
AUDIO UNIT
DRI VER' S MICU
(Bui l t i nt o t he dr i ver ' s
Replacement:
USA models, page 22-86
' PA S S E NGE RS MICU
HEADL I GHTS Replacement, page 22-89
Adjustment page 22-233
Bulb Replacement page 22-236
22-156
4-door
TRUNK LID RE L E A S E
ACTUATOR/ L ATCH SWI TCH
Actuator Test page 22-192
Latch Switch Test page 22-262
F RONT PASSENGER'S POWER
WI NDOW SWITCH
(Has bui l t -i n cont r ol uni t and
front passenger's door lock
swi t c h)
FRONT PA S S E NGE RS DOOR L OCK
ACTUATOR/ K NOB SWITCH
Actuator Test, page 22-189
K nob Switch Test, page 22-190
RIGHT REAR DOOR SWI TCH
FRONT PA S S E NGE R' S DOOR SWI TCH
*: Wi t h sec ur i t y
RIGHT REAR DOOR L OCK ACTUATOR/ K NOB S WI TCH*
K nob Switch Test, page 22-190
(cont'd)
22-157
K ef l ess/Power Door Locks/Secur i t y Syst em
TAILLGiHT
B ulb Replacement, page 22-236
22-158
2-door
IGNITION K EY L OCK BUTTON
TRUNK BUTTON
PANIC B UTTON
UNL OCK BUTTON TRANSMITTER
Test, page 22-192
IMMOBILIZER-K EY LESS CONTROL
UNIT (Has built-in receiver)
S ECURI TY HOOD SWI TCH
Test, page 22-191
HORNS
*: Wi t h sec ur i t y
GA UGE CONTROL
MODUL E
NAVIGATION UNIT or
AUDI O UNIT
DRI VE RS MICU
(Bui l t i nt o t he dr i ver ' s
Replacement:
9
PA S S E NGE R' S MICU
(Bui lt i nt o t he passenger ' s under -dash f use/ r el ay box)
HEADL I GHTS
(cont'd)
22-159
Keyl ess/Power Door Locks/Secur i t y Syst em
F RONT PASSENGER'S DOOR SWITCH
* : Wi t h sec ur i t y
22-160
2-door
TAILLIGHT
22-161
i s/Power Door Locks/Secur i t y Syst em
System Descri pt i on
Sec ur i t y Al ar m
The secur i t y al ar m syst em i s ar med aut omat i cal l y after
t he door s, hood, and trunk li d ar e c l osed and l ocked. For
t he syst em to ar m, t he i gni ti on swi t c h must be i n t he
L OCK (0) posi t i on wi t h t he key r emoved f r om t he
i gni ti on swi t c h, and t he dr i ver ' s and passenger ' s MICUs
must r ecei ve si gnal s that t he door s, hood, and t runk lid
ar e c l osed and l ocked. The al ar m c an be di sar med at any
t i me by unl ocki ng t he dr i ver ' s door wi t h t he key or
pr essi ng t he UNL OCK button on t he t r ansmi t t er .
When ever yt hi ng i s c l osed and l ocked, t he onl y i nput s
t hat ar e gr ounded, and have 0 V, ar e t he dr i ver ' s door
lock knob swi t c h (LOCK posi t i on) and t he audi o uni t or
navi gat i on uni t (if equi pped) secur i t y i nput . In ot her
wor ds, all of t he ot her swi t c hes ar e open, and have
about 10 to 12 V, i ncl udi ng t he key cyl i nder swi t c hes.
The secur i t y i ndi cat or in t he gauge cont rol modul e
begi ns to f l ash i mmedi at el y after t he vehi c l e i s
compl et el y c l osed and l ocked, and 15 sec onds later, t he
secur i t y syst em ar ms. If t he secur i t y i ndi cat or does not
f l ash after t he door s are l ocked, t he syst em i s not
ar mi ng. A beep sounds and t he parki ng l i ght s f l ash to
conf i r m t he secur i t y al ar m syst em i s ar med if t he L OCK
button i s pr essed a sec ond t i me wi t hi n 5 sec onds.
If one of t he swi t c hes i s mi sadj ust ed or shor t ed
i nt ernal l y, or t her e i s a short in t he ci r cui t , t he secur i t y
syst em wi l l not ar m. As l ong as t he cont rol uni t
cont i nues to r ecei ve a gr ound si gnal (0 V), it s ens es t hat
t he vehi c l e i s not c l osed and l ocked, and t he syst em wi l l
not ar m. A swi t ch t hat i s sl i ght l y mi sadj ust ed c an c ause
t he al ar m to sound f or no appar ent r eason. In t hi s c as e, a
si gni f i cant c hange in out si de ai r t emper at ur e, t he
vi br at i on of a passi ng t ruck, or someone bumpi ng into
t he vehi c l e coul d c ause t he al ar m t o sound.
NOTE: Ther e i s no gl ass br eakage or mot i on det ect i on
f eat ure.
If anyt hi ng i s opened or i mpr oper l y unl ocked after t he
syst em i s ar med, t he cont rol uni t r ec ei ves a gr ound
si gnal f r om t hat swi t c h, and t he 10 to 12 V r ef er ence
dr ops to 0 V. If t he audi o uni t or navi gat i on uni t (if
equi pped) i s di sc onnec t ed, t he i nput l oses i ts gr ound,
and t he i nput vol t age goes to 10 to 12 V. The syst em
sounds t he al ar m when any of t hese oc c ur :
A door or t he trunk lid i s f or ced open.
@ A door i s unl ocked wi t hout usi ng t he key or t he
t r ansmi t t er .
The hood i s opened.
@ The audi o uni t or navi gat i on uni t (if equi pped) i s
di sc onnec t ed.
The t r ansmi t t er PANIC button i s pr essed.
When t he syst em sounds t he al ar m, t he horn sounds
and t he ext eri or li ght s f l ash f or 2 mi nut es. The al ar m can
be st opped at any t i me by unl ocki ng t he dr i ver ' s door
wi t h t he key or by pr essi ng any button on t he
t ransmi t t er.
NOTE: The secur i t y syst em c an be cust omi zed in t he
odo/t ri p di spl ay to sui t t he c ust omer ' s needs. For mor e
i nf ormat i on about keyl ess/secur i t y syst em opt i ons, refer
to t he Owner ' s manual .
Keyl ess Ent r y Syst em
The keyl ess ent ry syst em i s i nt egrat ed wi t h t he mul t i pl ex
i nt egrat ed cont rol syst em. The mul t i pl ex i nt egrat ed
cont rol uni t (MICU) r ec ei ves L OCK , UNL OCK , and PANIC
si gnal s f r om t he i mmobi l i zer -keyl ess cont rol uni t
(keyl ess r ecei ver ).
The keyl ess ent ry syst em al l ows you to lock and unl ock
t he vehi c l e wi t h t he t ransmi t t er. When you pr ess t he
L OCK but t on, all door s lock. When you pr ess t he
UNL OCK button onc e, onl y t he dr i ver ' s door unl ocks.
The ot her door s wi l l unl ock when you pr ess t he button a
sec ond t i me (Dependi ng on t he set t i ngs in t he odo/tri p
di spl ay, all t he door s may unl ock when you pr ess t he
button t he f i rst t i me.). The door s wi l l not lock wi t h t he
t r ansmi t t er if a door i s not f ul l y c l osed, or if t he key i s in
t he i gni ti on swi t c h.
When t he swi t c h for t he cei l i ng li ght i s i n t he cent er
(DOOR) posi t i on, it wi l l c ome on when t he UNL OCK
button i s pr essed. If a door i s not opened, t he li ght wi l l
go off and t he door s wi l l rel ock i n about 30 sec onds. If
t he door s ar e l ocked wi t h t he t r ansmi t t er wi t hi n 30
sec onds, t he li ght wi l l go off i mmedi at el y.
Pani c Mode
The pani c mode sounds t he al ar m in or der to attract
at t ent i on. When t he PANIC button on t he t r ansmi t t er i s
pr essed and hel d for 2 s ec onds , t he horn sounds and t he
ext eri or l i ght s f l ash for about 20 sec onds.
The pani c mode c an be c anc el l ed at anyt i me by pr essi ng
any button on t he t r ansmi t t er or by t urni ng t he i gni ti on
swi t ch to ON (II). The pani c mode wi l l not f unct i on if t he
i gni ti on swi t c h i s in ON (II).
2
*% m
I r-* - H
I I mm I
22-163
Ci rcui t Di agram
BATTERY
(+
0-
No. 1 -1 (MAIN) (100 A) No. 3-1 (IG MAIN) (50 A)
No. 1-2
(AS F/B STD) (40 A)
crx-o
No. 15 (10 A)
-CTN-O
No. 3-2 (DR F/B) (40 A)*
2
/
No. 3-4 (DR F/B) (60 A)*
3
C T X J D
WHT -
RED -
WHT -
YEL -
DRIVER'S
UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY BOX IGNITION SWITCH
i
BLU
DRIVER'S UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY BOX
F16 C1
IG1 HOT in ON (II)
and START (III)
IG2 HOT in ON (II)
DRIVER'S UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX
No. 5 (7.5 A)
1
CT\jO
No. 16 (7.5 A)
- K T U )
No. 24 (20 A)
CTXJD
No. 25 (10 A)
. UNLOCK I I UNLOCK
<V/6 ^ O, P (DR)
UNLOCK
WHT LT GRN
PASSENGER' S " r Z T T
UNDER-DASH EPP5,
FUSE/RELAY MULTIPLEX
BOX CONTROL UNIT
DRIVER'S MICU
SG SG PG PG
D2
BLK ORN
DRIVER'S
DOOR LOCK
ACTUATOR
YEL | GRN/BLK
BLU
1
LEFT REAR
DOOR LOCK
ACTUATOR
_J
(4-door)
- C L
G601
Q2 R2 Q1 R5 Q18
BRN BRN BLK BLK WHT
TRUNK LID
RELEASE
ACTUATOR
T
. SECURITY
I HOOD
1 SWITCH
(Closed:
BLK Hood open)
1
STEERING
LOCK
1 ASSEMBLY
G302 |
(With security)
G602 G501 G501 G502 G502 G503
22-164
BODY
*1: L X, L X PZEV, LX- P , and L X- P PZEV
* 2: Ex c ept L X, L X PZEV, LX- P , and L X- P PZEV
* 3: Wi t h aut omat i c l i ght i ng s y s t em
- BRN
- WHT -
No. 10 (20 A)
F US E
( UNDER- HOOD
F US E / RE L A Y BOX)
DRI VER' S J UNCTI ON BOX 1
: B-
F7 H8
F8 H9
T
| B4 E5 G6
BRN -
- WHT -
(TRANS MI TTE R)
V
WHT
16
GA UGE
CONTROL MODUL E
K E YL E S S RE CE I VE R UNI T
(Bui l t i nt o t he i mmobi l i zer -
k ey l es s c ont r ol uni t
B-CAN B-CAN
HI L O
VBU
T
X. S E CURI TY
( V ) INDICATOR
B-CAN B-CAN
Y (L ED)
HI L O
Y (L ED)
DOOR MUL TI PL E X
CONTROL UNI T
No. 3-5
(DR L T MAIN)
(30 A) F US E
( UNDER- HOOD
L E FT FRONT
PARK I NG L I GHT
L E FT FRONT
S I DE MARK ER L I GHT
TAI L L I GHTS
L I CE NS E PL ATE
L I GHT (S)
(Wi t h sec ur i t y) (4-door )
(cont'd)
22-165
ley l ess/Power Door Locks/Secur i t y Syst em
-
No. 1-2 (AS F/B STD)
( 4 0 A) FUSE
(UNDER-HOOD
FU SE/ RELAY BOX)
V
DRI VER' S MI CU
PASSENGER' S UNDER-DASH FU SE/ RELAY BOX I A11 | A29
No. 13 1 No. 10
(20 A) C, (10 A)
VBU IG1 B -CAN B-CAN
HI LO
PASSENGER' S MI CU
SG SG PG PG SG PG |
G 8 -
2
H7-
J
G1*
2
H27*
GRN
FRONT
PASSENGER' S
POWER
WI NDOW
SWITCH FRONT
PASSENGER' S
DOOR LOCK
ACTUATOR
RED
BLU
3
LTGRN
0
RIGHT
REAR
DOOR
LOCK
ACTUATOR
A37 E15
LTGRN BLK BLK BLK BLK BLK BLK BLK
(4-door)
G 6 5 1 G505 G201 G505 G201 I
( ' 08 - 09 models)
G505 G201 G201 I
('10 model)
22-166
* 1: LX, LX PZEV, LX-P, and LX-P PZEV
*2: Except LX, LX PZEV, LX-P, and LX-P PZEV
* 3 : With automatic lighting system
*4: Wi t hout aut omat i c l i ght i ng s y s t em
- : B- CAN l i ne
No. 3-3
( AS L T MAIN)
(30 A) F US E
( UNDER- HOOD
V
PA S S E NGE R' S UNDER- DAS H F US E / RE L A Y B OX
GRN
-IT
NAVI GATI ON
DI S PL AY UNI T
Y E L
I A4
AUDI O UNI T
| A12
BRN
G402
DOOR
L OCK
K NOB
n
H22
GRY
UN
L O C K 6,
RI GHT REAR
DOOR L OCK
8 A CTUA TOR
RI GHT
yr j REAR
^ D O O R
X L OCK
V
K NOB
S WI TCH
10
G15*
H3*
2
GRN
FRONT
PA S S E NGE R' S
DOOR
S WI TCH
(Cl os ed:
Door open)
L .
G651
(Wi t h navi gat i on s y s t em) (Wi t hout navi gat i on s y s t em)
.J
(Wi t h sec ur i t y)
RI GHT FRONT
PARK I NG L I GHT
RI GHT FRONT
S I DE MARK E R
L I GHT
(cont' d)
22-167
: B-CAN line
: Other communi cati on line
No. 24( 20 A) No. 16 (7.5 A)
No. 15 (10 A) F USE F USE
F USE (DRIVER'S (DRIVER'S
(UNDER-H OOD UNDER-DASH UNDER-DASH
F USE/RELAY F USE/RELAY F USE/RELAY
B OX) B OX) B OX)
V
DRIVER'S MI CU
V
J 8
H1
CENTER
J UNCTI ON
B OX
POWER WI NDOW
MA S TE R S WI TCH
VUi
I
B LU
35
I
I
I
33
L OCK UNL OCK VB U
DOOR MUL TI PL E X CONTROL UNI T
S I L S I L
DR UL DR L OCK
K C K C
DR UL DR L OCK
B- CAN B- CAN
Hi L O
UA RT
DOOR
L OCK
K NOB
BL K BL K WHT YE L
E L n
KJ K E Y
Y
<=a
BRN ORN B L U
UN
DRI VE R' S LOCK A <v
DOOR ^
L OCK
K NOB
S WI TCH
L O C K :
DRI VER' S
DOOR L OCK
9 A CTUA TOR
A DRI VE R' S
DOOR K E Y
CYL I NDER
S WI TCH
G501 G502
5
BL K
BRN
G501
No. 13 (20 A)
F US E
( PA S S E NGE R' S
UNDE R- DAS H
F US E / RE L A Y
BOX)
FRONT PA S S E NGE R' S
POWE R WI NDOW S WI TCH
\ L I GHT
/ ( L E D )
V MP A S L OCK UNL OCK
CONTROL UNI T
P G
r- -
S I L
1
UA RT I
A S U L ;
B L U
F5
CE NTE R
J UNCTI ON
B OX
DOOR
L OCK
K NOB
0
WHT
UN
FRONT
PA S S E NGE R' S
DOOR L OCK
8 A CTUA TOR
0 I
LOCK A F RONT
b ^ 9 v . p PA S S E NGE R' S
DOOR L OCK
K NOB
S WI TCH
10
G505
BL K
G505
(Wi t h sec ur i t y)
22-168
DTC B1127: Dri ver' s Door Key Cyl i nder Swi t ch
Malfuncti on
ON (II).
3. Insert t he i gni ti on key into t he dr i ver ' s door key
cyl i nder swi t c h, and turn t he key t o t he L OCK and
UNL OCK posi t i ons 10 t i mes.
NO-l nt er mi t t ent f ai l ur e, t he dr i ver ' s door key cyl i nder
swi t c h syst em i s OK at t hi s t i me.B
5. Wi t h t he dr i ver ' s door key cyl i nder i n t he neut ral
posi t i on, sel ec t K E YL E S S TRANSMI TTER wi t h t he
HDS, and ent er DATA LIST.
6. Chec k t he ON/ OFF i nf ormat i on of t he DRIVER' S DOOR
K EY CYL INDER SWITCH (LOCK) and DRIVER' S DOOR
K EY CYL INDER SWITCH (UNLOCK) i n t he DATA LIST.
Are bot h informat ion indicat ors OFF?
NO- Go to st ep 7.
7 Di sconnect t he dr i ver ' s door lock act uat or 10P
connect or .
8 Chec k t he ON/ OFF i nf ormat i on of t he DRIVER' S DOOR
K EY CYL INDER SWITCH (LOCK) and DRIVER' S DOOR
K EY CYL INDER SWITCH (UNLOCK ) i n t he DATA L IST.
YES - Faul t y dr i ver ' s door key cyl i nder swi t c h; r epl ace
t he dr i ver ' s door lock ac t uat o r . !
NO- Go to st ep 9.
10. Di sconnect t he door mul t i pl ex cont rol uni t 37P
connect or .
11. Chec k f or cont i nui t y bet ween door mul t i pl ex cont rol
uni t 37P connect or t er mi nal s No. 28, No. 29 and body
gr ound i ndi vi dual l y.
DOOR MUL TI PL EX CONTROL UNIT 37P CONNECTOR
I
zf
12
\\\Ai\AAAAA*\*An\
|26l27l28|29|30|3lT32|33f34|35|36|
24
YES - Repai r a shor t to gr ound in t he L OCK or UNL OCK
wi r e. B
NO-Repl ac e t he power wi ndow mast er swi t c h, 4-door
(see page 22-305), 2-door (see page 22-306).H
13. Di sc onnec t t he dr i ver ' s door lock act uat or 10P
connect or .
14. Di sc onnec t t he door mul t i pl ex cont rol uni t 37P
connect or .
(cont ' d)
22-169
K ef l ess/Power Poor Loeks/Secur st f S f st em
uni t 37P c onnec t or t er mi nal s No. 28 and No. 29.
DOORMULTIPLEXCONTROL UNIT37P CONNECTOR
| 1 | / | 3 | / L / | / | / | / | 9 | 1 0 | 1 1 |
12
|13|14|/1/1/M/|20|21|22|23|
24
25 |26|27|28|29|30|31|32|33|34|35|36| 37
LOCK (ORN) UNLOCK (BRN)
YES - Repai r a shor t bet ween t he L OCK and UNL OCK
w i r e s .
IMO-Subst i t ut e a known-good power wi ndow mast er
swi t c h. If t he sympt om goes away, r epl ace t he
or i gi nal power wi ndow mast er swi t c h, 4-door (see
page 22-305), 2-door (see page 22-306). If not , r epl ace
t he dr i ver ' s door lock act uat or (front door l at ch)
(see page. 20-26).
DTC B1128: Dri ver' s Door Lock Swi t ch Si gnal
Malfuncti on
NOTE: If you ar e t r oubl eshoot i ng mul t i pl e DTCs, be sur e
2. Lock and unl ock t he dr i ver ' s door wi t h t he dr i ver ' s
door lock swi t c h.
Is DTC B1128 indicated?
Chec k f or l oose or poor c o nnec t i o n. !
4. Wi t h t he dr i ver ' s door lock swi t ch in t he neut ral
posi t i on, sel ec t DOOR L OCK f r om t he BODY
EL ECTRI CAL syst em sel ect menu, and ent er DATA
L IST.
5. Chec k t he ON/ OFF i nf ormat i on of t he DRI VER' S DOOR
L OCK SWITCH (LOCK) and DRIVER' S DOOR L OCK
SWITCH (UNLOCK).
Are both information indicators OFF?
NO-Repl ac e t he power wi ndow mast er s w i t c h .
6. Oper at e t he dr i ver ' s door lock swi t ch in t he L OCK and
UNL OCK posi t i on, and check t he ON/ OFF i nf ormat i on
of t he DRI VER' S DOOR L OCK SWITCH (LOCK) and
DRI VER' S DOOR L OCK SWITCH (UNLOCK).
Are both DRIVER'S DOOR LOCK SWITCH (LOCK ) and
DRIVER'S DOOR LOCK SWITCH (UNLOCK ) information
indicators ON at the same time when the door lock ~
switch is in the LOCK or UNLOCK position?
YES - Repl ac e t he power wi ndow mast er s w i t c h .
Chec k f or l oose or poor c o nnec t i o ns . !
22-170
DTC B1129: Dri ver' s Door Lock Knob Swi t ch
Malfuncti on
2. Tur n t he i gni ti on swi t ch t o LOCK (0) and t hen back to
ON (II).
3. Operat e t he dr i ver ' s door lock knob swi t c h sever al
t i mes.
NO-l nt er mi t t ent f ai l ur e, t he dr i ver ' s door lock knob
swi t ch syst em i s OK at t hi s t i me. Chec k f or l oose or
poor c o nnec t i o ns . !
5. Sel ec t K E YL E S S TRANSMITTER f r om t he BODY
EL ECTRI CAL menu, and enter t he DATA L IST.
6. Check t he ON/ OFF i nf ormat i on of t he DRI VER' S DOOR
L OCK KNOB SWITCH (LOCK) and t he DRI VER' S
DOOR L OCK KNOB SWITCH (UNLOCK).
Is t he DRIVER'S DOOR LOCK KNOB SWITCH (LOCK)
informat ion indicat or ON and t he DRIVER'S DOOR
LOCK KNOB SWITCH (UNLOCK) informat ion indicat or
OFF wit h t he driver's door lock knob swit ch in LOCK
posit ion, and is t he DRIVER'S DOOR LOCK KNOB
SWITCH (LOCK) informat ion indicat or OFF and t he
DRIVER'S DOOR LOCK KNOB SWITCH (UNLOCK)
informat ion indicat or ON wit h t he driver's door lock knob
swit ch in UNLOCK posit ion?
YES - Repl ac e t he power wi ndow mast er swi t c h (see
page 22- 305) . H
NO- Go to st ep 7.
7. Di sconnect t he dr i ver ' s door lock act uat or 10P
connect or .
8. Check t he ON/ OFF i nf ormat i on of t he DRI VER' S DOOR
L OCK KNOB SWITCH (LOCK) and DRIVER' S DOOR
L OCK KNOB SWITCH (UNLOCK) i n t he DATA L IST.
NO- Go to st ep 9.
connect or .
uni t 37P connect or t er mi nal s No. 30, No. 31 and body
gr ound i ndi vi dual l y.
12
25
| 1 3 1 1 4 1 ^^^
I 2 6 l 2 7 l 2 8 | 29| 3^| 3^^| 35| 36|
24
37
UNL OCK (WHT)
m
YES - Repai r a shor t to gr ound in t he L OCK or UNL OCK
w i r e . !
NO-Repl ac e t he power wi ndow mast er swi t ch (see
page 22- 305) . !
uni t 37P connect or t er mi nal s No. 30 and No. 31.
12
25
11l / l a \AA/ \ / \ 7\ ~^^\
|26|27|28|29|30|31|32|33|34|35|36|
L OCK (YEL )
24
37
UNL OCK (WHT)
YES - Repai r a shor t bet ween t he L OCK and UNL OCK
w i r e s . !
NO-Chec k f or an open or hi gh r esi st ance i n t he
dr i ver ' s door lock swi t ch (LOCK) wi r e or t he dr i ver ' s
door lock knob swi t ch (UNLOCK) wi r e bet ween t he
door mul t i pl ex cont rol uni t and t he dr i ver ' s door lock
knob swi t c h. If OK, repl ace t he dr i ver ' s door lock
ac t uat o r . !
22-171
Kef l ess/Power Door Loc ks/Sec ur i t f S f st em
Symptom Troubl eshoot i ng Index
Power Door L oc k s / K ef l ess
1. Chec k f or B-CAN DTCs . If any B-CAN DTCs ar e Indi cat ed, ref er to t he B-CAN Sy s t em Di agnosi s Test Mode A (see page
22-134) and r esol ve t hem f i rst .
2. If t he door lock syst em and t he keyl ess operat i on do not wor k, t r oubl eshoot t he door l ocks fi rst.
NOTE: The syst em does not f unct i on when t he i gni ti on swi t c h i s ON (II).
Sy mpt om Chec k It ems Al so c hec k f or
The secur i t y syst em sounds
r andoml y whi l e t he door s ar e
l ocked.
Tr i pped sensor hi st or y (see page 22-195)
Al l t he door s wi l l not lock or
unl ock.*
Poor gr ound (G501, G502, G505, G601, G651)
o Dr i ver ' s door key cyl i nder swi t c h t est (see
page 22-191).
Door swi t ch t est (check t he door swi t ch
ON/ OFF i nf ormat i on wi t h t he HDS)
Door lock swi t c h t est (check t he door swi t ch
ui wot -f i nf ormat i on wi t h HDS)
Chec k f or UART l i ne bet ween door mul t i pl ex
cont rol uni t 37P connect or t er mi nal No. 27
and f ront passenger ' s power wi ndow swi t ch
37P connect or t er mi nal No. 29:
- An open or hi gh r esi st ance i n t he wi r e.
- A short to gr ound i n t he wi r e.
- A shor t to power i n t he wi r e.
Dr i ver ' s and left rear (4-door)
door s wi l l not lock or unl ock.
Poor gr ound (G501, G502, G505, G601)
Dr i ver ' s MICU i nput t est (see page 22-151).
Door mul t i pl ex cont rol uni t i nput t est (see
page 22-184).
Front passenger ' s and ri ght rear
(4-door) door s wi l l not lock or
unl ock.
Poor gr ound (G501, G502, G505, G601)
Bl own No. 1-2 (AS F/B STD) (40 A) f use i n t he
Bl own No. 10 (10 A) f use in t he passenger ' s
Bl own No. 13 (20 A) f use in t he passenger ' s
Passenger ' s MICU i nput t est (see page
22-154).
Door mul t i pl ex cont rol uni t i nput t est (see
page 22-184).
K eyl ess operat i on does not wor k
(LOCK, UNL OCK , PANIC).
Sympt om t r oubl eshoot i ng (see page 22-175). Cust omi zed set t i ngs i n t he
odo/t ri p di spl ay; see
Owner ' s Manual f or
det ai l s.
Door s wi l l not unl ock wi t h t he
t r ansmi t t er , but wi l l unl ock wi t h
t he door lock swi t ch and t he door
key cyl i nder swi t c h.
Sympt om t r oubl eshoot i ng (see page 22-175).
Door lock swi t c h t est (check t he door swi t ch
*: If onl y one door i s not wor ki ng pr oper l y, check t hat door ' s lock act uat or f i rst , t hen c hec k t he ot her i t ems l i st ed in
t hi s t abl e.
2 2 -1 7 2
Sy mpt om Chec k It ems Al so c hec k f or
Door s wi l l not lock wi t h t he
t r ansmi t t er , but wi l l lock wi t h t he
door lock swi t c h and t he door key
cyl i nder swi t c h.
Sympt om t roubl eshoot i ng (see page 22-175).
Door lock swi t ch t est (check t he door swi t ch
Door s aut omat i cal l y rel ock 30
sec onds after bei ng unl ocked wi t h
t he t r ansmi t t er even t hough a
door has been opened.
Sympt om t roubl eshoot i ng (see page 22-174).
Onl y dr i ver ' s door wi l l unl ock or
door l ocks relock i mmedi at el y
after unl ocki ng wi t h t he r emot e.
Dr i ver ' s door lock knob swi t ch t est (see page
22-190).
The hor n does not sound when
PANIC button on t he t r ansmi t t er
pr essed.
Sympt om t r oubl eshoot i ng (see page 22-174). Cust omi zed set t i ngs in t he
odo/t ri p di spl ay; see
Owner ' s Manual for
det ai l s.
K eyl ess oper at i on wi l l wor k even
t hough t he i gni ti on key i s i n t he
i gni ti on swi t c h.
Igni ti on key swi t ch t est (see page 22-274).
*: If onl y one door i s not wor ki ng pr oper l y, check that door ' s lock act uat or f i rst , t hen check t he ot her i t ems li st ed in
t hi s t abl e.
22-173
K ef l ess/Power Door Loc ks/Sec ur i f f S f stem
The horn does not sound and/or the
headl i ght s do not f l ash when the PANIC
but t on on the t r ansmi t t er i s pressed
NOTE: Bef ore t r oubl eshoot i ng, check t he B-CAN DTCs . If
any DTCs ar e i ndi cat ed, and t r oubl eshoot t he i ndi cat ed
DTCs fi rst.
1. Pr ess t he PANIC but t on.
Do the horns sound?
NO- Go to st ep 2.
2. Pr ess t he horn button.
Do the horns sound?
Y E S - G o i o s t ep 3.
NO-Do t he hor n swi t c h t est (see page 22-198).B
3. T urn t he headl i ght swi t ch to ON (II).
Do the headlights come on?
NO-Chec k t he li ght i ng c i r c ui t . ! !
4. Do t he t r ansmi t t er t est (see page 22-192).
Is the transmitter OK?
YES-Subs t i t ut e a known-good i mmobi l i zer -keyl ess
cont rol uni t and r echeck. If t her e i s sti ll a pr obl em,
subst i t ut e a known-good dr i ver ' s MICU and r echeck.
If t he pr obl em goes away, r epl ace t he or i gi nal
i mmobi l i zer -keyl ess cont rol uni t or MICU.Hi
NO-Repl ac e t he t r ans mi t t er . !
Door s aut omat i cal l y rel ock 30 sec onds after
bei ng unl ocked wi t h t he t r ansmi t t er even
t hough a door has been opened
NOTE:
Bef ore t r oubl eshoot i ng, check t he B-CAN DTCs. If any
DTCs ar e i ndi cat ed, and t r oubl eshoot t he i ndi cat ed
DTCs fi rst.
The dr i ver ' s door swi t ch and t he left rear door swi t c h
ar e connect ed to t he dr i ver ' s MICU, and t he f ront
passenger ' s door swi t ch and t he ri ght rear door swi t c h
ar e connect ed to t he passenger ' s MICU.
1. Pl ace t he cei l i ng li ght swi t ch in t he DOOR posi t i on.
3. Wat ch t he c e i l i ng l i ght and the door mHi ootor* *hc
gauge cont rol modul e.
Do the ceiling light and door indicators come on when
each door is opened, and go off when each door is
closed?
YES-Subs t i t ut e a known-good dr i ver ' s (or
passenger ' s) MICU and r echeck. If t he sympt om goes
away, r epl ace t he ori gi nal MI CU. H
NO-Repai r an open or hi gh r esi st ance in t he wi r e
bet ween t he dr i ver ' s (or passenger ' s) MICU and eac h
door swi t c h. If t he wi r e i s OK, r epl ace t he door
s wi t c h . i l
22-174
K ef l ess operat i on does not wor k (LOCK,
UNL OCK , PANIC)
NOTE:
If t he L OCK and UNL OCK buttons wor k OK, but t he
PANIC button does not, see t he t r oubl eshoot i ng for
t he hor n does not sound and/or t he headl i ght s do not
f l ash when t he PANIC button on t he t r ansmi t t er i s
pr essed (see page 22-174).
Bef ore t r oubl eshoot i ng, check t he B-CAN DTCs. If any
DTC(s) fi rst.
1. Insert t he key i nto t he i gni ti on swi t c h, but l eave t he
swi t ch in L OCK (0).
2. Open t he dr i ver ' s door , and li sten for t he key-i n
r emi nder beeper.
Does t he beeper sound?
IMO-Test t he i gni ti on key-i n r emi nder ci r cui t , and
r echeck.
4. Tr y to st art t he engi ne.
Does t he engine st art ?
YE S - Th e i mmobi l i zer syst em i s OK, go to st ep 5.
NO- Go to t he i mmobi l i zer sympt om t r oubl eshoot i ng
(see page 22-431 ) .
Door s wi l l not unl ock (or l ock) wi t h t he
t r ansmi t t er , but wi l l unl ock (lock) wi t h t he
door swi t c h
NOTE:
Bef ore t r oubl eshoot i ng, check t he B-CAN DTCs . If any
DTC(s) f i rst .
NOTE: The secur i t y syst em can be cust omi zed in t he
odo/t ri p di spl ay to sui t t he c ust omer ' s needs. For
mor e i nf ormat i on about keyl ess/secur i t y syst em
opt i ons, refer to t he Owner ' s manual .
2. Remove t he i gni ti on key f r om t he i gni ti on swi t c h.
3. Cl ose and lock t he door s.
4. Tr y to l ock/unl ock t he door s wi t h the keyl ess
t ransmi t t er.
Do t he door lock act uat ors work normally?
t i me.H
NO- Go to st ep 5.
5. Open t he dr i ver ' s door.
Does t he key-in reminder chime sound?
YES - Faul t y i gni ti on key swi t c h, or shor t to gr ound on
t he i gni ti on swi t ch wi r e. Repai r as nec es s ar y . H
NO- Go to st ep 6.
6. Do t he t r ansmi t t er t est (see page 22-192).
6. Test t he t r ansmi t t er (see page 22-192).
Is t he t ransmit t er OK?
YES - Repl ac e t he i mmobi l i zer -keyl ess cont rol unt t l l
NO-Repl ac e t he t r ansmi t t er -^
Is t he t ransmit t er OK?
f use/r el ay box and r echeck. If t here i s sti ll a pr obl em,
subst i t ut e a known-good i mmobi l i zer -keyl ess cont rol
uni t and r echeck. If t he pr obl em goes away, r epl ace
t he ori gi nal i mmobi l i zer -keyl ess cont rol uni t .H
NO-Repl ac e t he t r ansmi t t er .H
22-175
Keyl ess/Power Door Loc ks/Sec ur i t f S f st em
Cont rol Uni t Input Test
NOTE: Bef or e t est i ng, t r oubl eshoot t he mul t i pl ex i nt egr at ed cont rol uni t f i r st , usi ng B-CAN Sy s t em Di agnosi s Test Mode
A (see page 22-134), and make sur e t he li ght i ng syst em wor ks properl y.
Dr i v er s MICU
1. Tur n t he i gni t i on swi t c h to L OCK (0), and r emove t he dr i ver ' s dashboar d l ower c over (see page 20-166).
2. Di sc onnec t dr i ver ' s under -dash f use/r el ay box c onnec t or s D, F, G, N, Q, and R.
NOTE: Al l connect or v i ews ar e wi r e si de of f emal e t er mi nal s.
CONNECTOR D (16P)
Y E L * L T GRN * WHT BL K
10
11 12 13 14 15
16
/ / / \
ORN* BRN GRY ORN
CONNECTOR N (16P)
CONNECTOR F (33P)
r
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
13 14
[
20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
31 32
15 16 17 18
19
33
7
GRN/ YE L
CONNECTOR Q(20P)
BL K BRN
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
\
WH T
CONNECTOR G( 13P)
GRN/ B L K
12
CONNECTOR R (24P)
BRN BL K
13 14 15 16 17 18
10
22
*: 4-door
3. Inspect t he connect or and socket t er mi nal s t o be sur e t hey ar e all maki ng good cont act .
If t he t er mi nal s ar e bent , l oose or c or r oded, repai r t hem as nec essar y and r echeck t he s y s t em.
If t he t er mi nal s look OK , go t o st ep 4.
22-176
4. Reconnect connect or F, and do t hese i nput t est s at t he f ol l owi ng c onnec t or s.
If any t est i ndi cat es a pr obl em, f i nd and cor r ect t he c ause, t hen r echeck t he s y s t em.
If ai l t he i nput t est s prove OK, go to st ep 5.
NOTE: Bef ore t est i ng, make sur e t he No. 15 (10 A) f use in t he under -hood f use/r el ay box i s OK.
Cavi t y Wi r e Tes t condi t i on Test : Desi r ed r esul t Possi bl e c aus e if desi r ed
r esul t i s not obt ai ned
D2
(4-door)
YE L Connec t t er mi nal
F11 to t er mi nal D2
(or D9), and
t er mi nal D9 (or D2)
to body gr ound.
Check act uat or oper at i on:
The left rear door lock
act uat or shoul d UNL OCK (or
LOCK).
Faul t y left r ear door lock
act uat or
An open or hi gh r esi st anc e
i n t he wi r e
D9
(4-door)
ORN
Connec t t er mi nal
(or D9), and
t er mi nal D9 (or D2)
to body gr ound.
The left rear door lock
LOCK).
Faul t y left r ear door lock
act uat or
i n t he wi r e
D16 ORN Connec t t er mi nal
moment ar i l y
The trunk li d r el ease act uat or
shoul d wor k.
o Poor gr ound (G602) or an
open in t he gr ound wi r e
Faul t y t runk li d r el ease
act uat or
i n t he wi r e
F23 GRN/ YEL Under all
condi t i ons
Connect to gr ound wi t h a
j umper wi r e:
The hor ns shoul d sound.
Bl own No. 10 (20 A) f use i n
t he under -hood f use/r el ay
box
Faul t y horn r el ay
Faul t y horn
Faul t y hor n gr ound
i n t he wi r e
N1 YE L Connec t t er mi nal
F11 to t er mi nal N1
(or N2), and
t er mi nal N2 (or N1)
to body gr ound.
The dr i ver ' s door lock
L OCK ).
Faul t y dr i ver ' s door lock
act uat or
i n t he wi r e
N2 ORN
Connec t t er mi nal
F11 to t er mi nal N1
(or N2), and
t er mi nal N2 (or N1)
to body gr ound.
The dr i ver ' s door lock
L OCK ).
Faul t y dr i ver ' s door lock
act uat or
i n t he wi r e
(c ont d)
22-177
K ef l ess/Power Door L oc ks/ S
Cont rol Uni t Input Test (cont' d)
5. Rec onnec t t he r emai ni ng c onnec t or s to t he dr i ver ' s under -dash f use/r el ay box, and do t hese i nput t est s at t he
f ol l owi ng c onnec t or s.
If all t he i nput t est s pr ove OK, go t o st ep 6.
Cavi t y Wi r e Test condi t i on Test : Desi r ed r esul t Possi bl e c aus e if desi r ed r esul t
i s not obt ai ned
D8 BLK In all i gni t i on swi t c h
posi t i ons
Measur e t he vol t age t o gr ound:
Poor gr ound (G601) or an
open i n t he gr ound wi r e
t he wi r e
Q1 BLK In all i gni ti on swi t c h
posi t i ons
t he wi r e
Q2 BHN In all i gni ti on swi t c h
posi t i ons
An open or hi gh r esi st ance i n
t he wi r e
R2 BRN In all i gni t i on swi t c h
posi t i ons
t he wi r e
R5 BL K In all i gni t i on swi t c h
posi t i ons
t he wi r e
D4
(4-door)
L T
GRN
Left r ear door open Measur e t he vol t age t o gr ound:
o Faul t y left rear door swi t ch
Faul t y li ght near door swi t ch
gr ound
t he wi r e
D4
(4-door)
L T
GRN
Left r ear door c l osed Measur e t he vol t age to gr ound:
Ther e shoul d be about 5 V.
u A short to gr ound in t he wi r e
D5 WHT Tr unk li d open Measur e t he vol t age to gr ound:
^
r
-culty trunk lid latch swi t ch
t he wi r e
D5 WHT
Tr unk lid c l osed Measur e t he vol t age to gr ound:
o Faul t y trunk lid latch swi t ch
short to gr ound in t he wi r e
D12 BRN Dr i ver ' s door open Measur e t he vol t age to gr ound:
o Faul t y dr i ver ' s door swi t ch
Faul t y dr i ver ' s door swi t ch
gr ound
t he wi r e
D12 BRN
Dr i ver ' s door c l osed Measur e t he vol t age to gr ound:
A shor t to gr ound i n t he wi r e
D15 GRY Left r ear door lock
knob swi t ch i n
UNL OCK
o Faul t y left rear door lock knob
swi t ch
t he wi r e
D15 GRY
Left rear door lock
knob swi t ch in L OCK
Faul t y left rear door lock knob
swi t ch
22-178
Cavi t y W i re Test condi ti on Test : Desi r ed r esul t Possi bl e c aus e if desi r ed r esul t
i s not obt ai ned
G3 GRN/
B LK
Hood open Measur e t he vol t age to gr ound:
Faul t y secur i t y hood swi t ch
t he wi r e
Hood c l osed Measur e t he vol t age to gr ound:
Ther e shoul d be about 5 V .
Faul t y secur i t y hood swi t ch
A shor t to gr ound in t he wi r e
Q i a W H T Igni ti on key i nser t ed
into t he i gni ti on
swi t ch
Faul t y i gni ti on key swi t ch
t he wi r e
Igni ti on swi t ch L OCK
(0), and t he i gni ti on
key r emoved f r om
t he i gni ti on swi t ch
Ther e shoul d be about 5 V .
A short to gr ound i n t he wi r e
(cont' d)
22-179
K ey i es s / Po wer Door Locks/Secur i t y Syst em
Cont rol Uni t i nput Test (cont' d)
Passenger ' s MICU
6. Tur n t he i gni ti on swi t ch to L OCK (0), and r emove t he passenger ' s kick panel .
7. Di sconnect passenger ' s under -dash f use/r el ay box c onnec t or s A, D, E, and G*
1
(or I T
* 1: L X, L X PZEV, L X- P, LX-P PZEV
* 2: Except L X, L X PZEV, L X-P, LX-P PZEV
CONNECTOR A (33P)
RED WHT L TGRN
I
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
l
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38
BRN BL K *
2
BL K RED
PA S S E NGE RS UNDER-DASH F US E / PE L A Y
BOX CONNECTOR D (28P)
/
5
_n
6 / /
9
/
7
12
/
/ /
20 21 22
/ / /
27
15
/
GRN
16
CONNECTOR G (16P)
(L X, L X PZEV, L X- P, L X-P PZEV)
RED*
1
BL K
1
C
M

3 4 5 6 7 8
9
/
11 12 13 14 15
16
L TGRN*
7 \ -
L TGRN*
1
GRN
CONNECTOR E (18P)
/
2
/
/
5 6 7 8 9
10
/
12 13
/
15 16
/ /
BLK BLK
* 1 : 4-door
* 2 : ' 08-09 model s
CONNECTOR H (38P) (Exc ept L X, LX PZEV, L X-P, L X-P PZEV)
L TGRN*
1
GRN
/
BL K
/
r
1
2 3 4 5 6 7
l
L
21
22 23 24 25
26 27
J
/
GRY" ' L T GRN"
/ / /
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
/
/
29
/
31 37
/ / /
RED*
22-180
9. Wi t h t he connect or s sti ll di sc onnec t ed, do t hese i nput t est s at t he f ol l owi ng c onnec t or s.
NOTE: Bef ore t est i ng, make sur e t he No. 15 (10 A) f use in t he under -hood f use/r el ay box i s OK .
Cavi t y Wi r e Tes t condi t i on Test : Desi r ed r esul t Possi bl e c aus e i desi r ed
A20 L TGRN Connect
t ermi nal A14
to t ermi nal
A20 (or A38),
and t er mi nal
A38 (or A20) t o
body gr ound.
Chec k act uat or oper at i on:
The front passenger ' s door lock
L OCK ).
mFaul t y f ront passenger ' s
door lock act uat or
i n t he wi r e
A38 RED
Connect
t ermi nal A14
to t ermi nal
A20 (or A38),
and t er mi nal
A38 (or A20) t o
body gr ound.
The front passenger ' s door lock
L OCK ).
mFaul t y f ront passenger ' s
door lock act uat or
i n t he wi r e
G T
1
(4-door)
RED Connect
t ermi nal A14
to t ermi nal G1
(or G9), and
t ermi nal G9 (or
G1) to body
gr ound.
The ri ght rear door lock act uat or
shoul d L OCK (or UNL OCK ).
Faul t y ri ght rear door lock
act uat or
i n t he wi r e
G9*
1
(4-door)
L TGRN
Connect
t ermi nal A14
to t ermi nal G1
(or G9), and
t ermi nal G9 (or
G1) to body
gr ound.
The ri ght rear door lock act uat or
Faul t y ri ght rear door lock
act uat or
i n t he wi r e
H27*
2
(4-door)
RED Connect
t ermi nal A14
to t er mi nal
H27 (or H1),
and t er mi nal
H1 (or H27) to
body gr ound.
The ri ght r ear door lock act uat or
Faul t y ri ght r ear door l ock
act uat or
i n t he wi r e
HV
2
(4-door)
L TGRN
Connect
t ermi nal A14
to t er mi nal
H27 (or H1),
and t er mi nal
H1 (or H27) to
body gr ound.
The ri ght r ear door lock act uat or
Faul t y ri ght r ear door l ock
act uat or
i n t he wi r e
*1: L X, L X PZEV, L X-P, L X-P PZEV
*2: Except L X, L X PZEV, L X-P, LX-P PZEV
(cont' d)
22-181
10. Rec onnec t t he c onnec t or s to t he passenger ' s under -dash f use/r el ay box, and do t hese i nput t est s at t he f ol l owi ng
c onnec t or s.
Cavi t y Wi r e Tes t condi t i on Test : Desi r ed r esul t Possi bl e c ause if desi r ed
r esul t is not obt ai ned
A9 RED Under all
condi t i ons
Bl own No. 1-2 (AS F/B STD)
(40 A) f use i n t he
f use/r el ay box
in t he wi r e
A14 WHT Under all
condi t i ons
box
fi! se/r el ay box
in t he wi r e
A35 BRN Igni ti on swi t ch
ON (II)
Bl own No. 5 (7.5 A) f use in
t he dr i ver ' s under -dash
f use/r el ay box
f use/r el ay box
An open or hi gh r esi st ance
in t he wi r e
A37 BL K In all i gni ti on
swi t ch
posi t i ons
Ther e shoul d be l ess t han 0.2 V
Poor gr ound(G505) or an
in t he wi r e
A36*
1
BL K In all i gni ti on
swi t ch
posi t i ons
in t he wi r e
E15 BL K In all i gni ti on
swi t ch
posi t i ons
Poor gr ound(G201)or an
in t he wi r e
swi t ch
posi t i ons
in t he wi r e
D22 GRN Under all
condi t i ons
M
Faul t y navi gat i on di spl ay
uni t *
3
and/or audi o uni t
i n t he wi r e
G8*
1
BL K Under all
condi t i ons
in t he wi r e
H7*
2
BL K Under all
condi t i ons
in t he wi r e
* 2: Exc ept L X, L X PZEV, L X-P, LX-P PZEV
* 3: Wi t h navi gat i on syst em
*4: If t he f act or y-i nst al l ed audi o uni t or audi o-navi gat i on uni t i s r emoved f r om t he vehi c l e, t hi s vol t age wi l l be
bet ween 10-12 V.
22-182
Cavi t y Wi r e Test condi t i on Test : Desi r ed r esul t Possi bl e c aus e if desi r ed
G14*
1
(4-door)
L TGRN Ri ght r ear door
open
Faul t y ri ght r ear door swi t ch
9 Faul t y ri ght r ear door swi t ch
gr ound
9 An open or hi gh r esi st anc e
in t he wi r e
H25*
2
(4-door)
L TGRN
Ri ght rear door
c l osed
Measur e the vol t age to gr ound:
9 Faul t y ri ght r ear door swi t ch
A shor t to gr ound i n t he
wi r e
G15*
1
GRN Front
passenger ' s
door open
Faul t y front passenger ' s
door swi t ch
door swi t ch gr ound
in t he wi r e
H3*
2
GRN
Front
passenger ' s
door c l osed
o Faul t y front passenger ' s
door swi t ch
wi r e
H22
(4-door)
GRY Ri ght rear door
lock knob
swi t ch i n
UNL OCK
o ?oor gr ound (G651) or an
Faul t y left rear door lock
knob swi t ch
in t he wi r e
H22
(4-door)
GRY
Ri ght rear door
lock knob
swi t ch i n
Faul t y left rear door lock
knob swi t ch
in t he wi r e
* 1: L X, L X PZEV, L X-P, LX-P PZEV
* 2: Exc ept L X, LX PZEV, LX-P, LX-P PZEV
* 3: Wi t h navi gat i on syst em
*4: If t he f act or y-i nst al l ed audi o uni t or audi o-navi gat i on uni t i s r emoved f r om t he vehi c l e, t hi s vol t age wi l l be
bet ween 10-12 V.
(cont' d)
22-183
Control Unit Input Test (cont'd)
11. Tur n t he i gni ti on swi t c h to L OCK (0), and open and c l ose t he dr i ver ' s door , t hen r emove t he power wi ndow mast er
swi t c h.
m4-door (see page 22-305)
12. Di sconnect t he 37P connect or f r om t he door mul t i pl ex cont rol uni t.
WH T L T GRN
BRN
|ZDlZ/ |Z 5|Z^|s 5ypi pzp51541551361
/ ORN / YE L \ BL K \ PNK \
N BRN WHT BL U BL K BRN WHT BL U
If t he t er mi nal s ar e bent , l oose or c or r oded, repai r t hem as nec essar y and r echeck t he s y s t em.
If t he t er mi nal s look OK, go t o st ep 14.
22-184
14. Wi t h t he connect or sti ll di sc onnec t ed, do t hese i nput t est s at t he f ol l owi ng connect or .
If any t est i ndi cat es a pr obl em, f i nd and cor r ect t he c aus e, t hen r echeck t he s y s t em.
If t he i nput t est pr oves OK, go to st ep 15.
Cavi t y Wi r e Tes t condi t i on Test : Desi r ed r esul t Possi bl e c aus e I desi r ed
27 BL U Di sconnect
front
passenger ' s
power wi ndow
swi t ch 37P
connect or
Chec k f or cont i nui t y bet ween door
mul t i pl ex cont rol uni t 37P
c onnec t or t er mi nal No. 27 and
f ront passenger ' s power wi ndow
swi t c h 37P c onnec t or t er mi nal
No. 29:
An open or hi gh r esi st anc e in
t he wi r e
27 BL U Di sconnect
front
passenger ' s
power wi ndow
swi t ch 37P
connect or
Chec k f or cont i nui t y to gr ound:
Ther e shoul d be no cont i nui t y.
A shor t i n t he wi r e
33 BL U Di sconnect
dr i ver ' s
under -dash
f use/r el ay box
connect or P
(20P)
dr i ver ' s under -dash f use/r el ay box
c onnec t or P (20P) t er mi nal No. 5:
. An open or hi gh r esi st ance in
t he wi r e
33 BL U Di sconnect
dr i ver ' s
under -dash
f use/r el ay box
connect or P
(20P)
35 PNK Di sconnect
dr i ver ' s
under -dash
f use/r el ay box
connect or P
(20P)
dr i ver ' s under -dash f use/r el ay box
c onnec t or P (20P) t er mi nal No. 6:
t he wi r e
35 PNK Di sconnect
dr i ver ' s
under -dash
f use/r el ay box
connect or P
(20P)
(cont' d)
22-185
15. Rec onnec t t he 37P connect or t o t he door mul t i pl ex cont r ol uni t , and do t hese i nput t est s at t he f ol l owi ng connect or .
If all t he i nput t est s pr ove OK , go to st ep 16.
Cavi t y Wi r e Tes t condi t i on Test : Desi r ed r esul t Possi bl e c ause if desi r ed resul i Lb
not obt ai ned
32 BL K In all i gni t i on swi t c h
posi t i ons
t he wi r e
3/ BL K In all i gni t i on swi t ch
posi t i ons
e Poor gr ound (G502) or an open
t he wi r e
13 WHT Under ai l condi t i ons Measur e t he vol t age t o gr ound:
f use/r el ay box
A n open or hi gh r esi st ance in
t he wi r e
14 L T
GRN
Igni ti on swi t c h ON (II) Measur e t he vol t age t o gr ound:
Bl own No. 16 (7.5 A) f use i n t he
dr i ver ' s under -dash f use/r el ay
box
f use/r el ay box
t he wi r e
25 BRN Under al l condi t i ons Measur e t he vol t age t o gr ound:
Ther e shoul d be bat t ery vol t age.
box
f use/r el ay box
t he wi r e
28 ORN Dr i ver ' s door key
cyl i nder swi t c h i n
L OCK
i n t he gr ound wi r e
Faul t y dr i ver ' s key cyl i nder
swi t ch
t he wi r e
Dr i ver ' s door key
cyl i nder swi t ch i n
UNL OCK
Faul t y dr i ver ' s key cyl i nder
swi t ch
29 BRN Dr i ver ' s door key
UNL OCK
< Faul t y dr i ver ' s door key cyl i nder
swi t ch
t he wi r e
Dr i ver ' s door key
neut ral or L OCK
Faul t y dr i ver ' s door key cyl i nder
swi t c h
A shor t t o gr ound i n t he wi r e
22-186
not obt ai ned
30 YE L Dr i ver ' s door lock
knob swi t ch in L OCK
9 Poor gr ound (G501) or an open
Faul t y dr i ver ' s door lock knob
swi t ch
t he wi r e
Dr i ver ' s door lock
knob swi t ch i n
neut ral or UNL OCK
swi t ch
e A shor t to gr ound i n t he wi r e
31 WHT Dr i ver ' s door lock
knob swi t ch in
UNL OCK
swi t ch
t he wi r e
knob swi t ch in
neut ral or L OCK
swi t ch
9 A shor t to gr ound i n t he wi r e
(cont' d)
22-187
Kef l ess/Power Door Locks/Secur i t y Syst em
Fr ont Passenger ' s Power Wi ndow S wi t c h
16. Tur n t he i gni ti on swi t c h t o L OCK (0), and r emove t he f ront passenger ' s power wi ndow swi t c h.
17. Di sc onnec t t he 37P connect or f r om t he front passenger ' s power wi ndow swi t c h.
FRONT PA S S E NGE RS POWER WINDOW SWI TCH 37P CONNECTOR
1
/
' 3 4 5
1
12
25
24
37
12
25
26| 27|28| 29l /
/
U
/
|/Vl34[ / ' | 36|
24
37
GRN WH T
BLK
19. Rec onnec t t he 37P connect or to t he f ront passenger ' s power wi ndow swi t c h, and do t hese i nput t est s at t he f ol l owi ng
connect or .
37 BLK In all i gni ti on
swi t c h posi t i ons
Poor gr ound ( G505) or an
in t he wi r e
25 GRN Under all
condi t i ons
t he passenger ' s under -dash
f use/r el ay box
in t he wi r e
34 W H T Front passenger ' s
door lock knob
swi t c h i n UNL OCK
Faul t y f ront passenger ' s
door lock knob swi t ch
in t he wi r e
Fr ont passenger ' s
door lock knob
swi t c h in neut ral or
L OCK
Faul t y f ront passenger ' s
door lock knob swi t c h
wi r e
20. If mul t i pl e f ai l ur es ar e f ound on mor e t han one cont rol uni t , r epl ace t he dr i ver ' s under -dash f use/r el ay box (i ncl udes
If i nput f ai l ur es ar e rel at ed to a part i cul ar cont rol uni t , r epl ace t he cont rol uni t.
22-188
Door Lock Act uat or Test
Dri ver' s Door and Lef t Rear Door (4-door)
1 Remove t he door panel .
Front (see page 20-17)
Rear (see page 20-38)
2. Di sc onnec t t he 10P connect or (A) f r om t he act uat or
( B) .
NOTE: The i l l ust rat i on s hows t he dr i ver ' s door.
3. Chec k t he act uat or operat i on by connect i ng power
and gr ound accor di ng to t he t abl e. To pr event
damage to t he act uat or, appl y battery vol t age onl y
moment ar i l y.
Ter mi nal
Posi t i on \ ^
1 2
L OCK
e e
UNL OCK
e e
4. If t he act uat or does not operat e as spec i f i ed, r epl ace
it.
Fr ont Passenger ' s Door and Ri ght Rear Door
(4-door)
1. Remove t he door panel .
2. Di sconnect t he 10P connect or (A) f r om t he act uat or
(B ).
NOTE: The i l l ust rat i on s hows t he f ront passenger ' s
door.
3. Check t he act uat or operat i on by connect i ng power
and gr ound accor di ng to t he t abl e. To pr event
damage to t he act uat or, appl y battery vol t age onl y
moment ar i l y.
Ter mi nal
Posi t i on \ ^
3 4
L OCK
0
UNL OCK
e
4. If t he act uat or does not operat e as speci f i ed, r epl ace

it.
22-189
Door Lock Knob Swi t c h Test
Dri ver' s Door
1. Remove t he dr i ver ' s door panel (see page 20-17).
2. Di sc onnec t t he 10P connect or (A) f r om t he door lock
act uat or (B).
S I 6 | 7
8 | 9 | /
3. Chec k f or cont i nui t y bet ween t he t er mi nal s.
and No. 5 when t he door lock knob swi t c h i s in t he
L OCK posi t i on and no cont i nui t y when t he swi t ch i s
i n t he UNL OCK posi t i on.
and No. 5 when t he door lock knob swi t ch i s i n t he
UNL OCK posi t i on and no cont i nui t y when t he
swi t c h i s i n t he L OCK posi t i on.
4. If t he cont i nui t y i s not as spec i f i ed, r epl ace t he door
lock act uat or.
Passenger Door s (Wi th Secur i t y) '
1. Remove t he passenger ' s door panel .
2. Di sc onnec t t he 10P connect or (A) f r om t he door lock
act uat or (B).
door , Ri ght
r ear door
Lef t r ear door
[No. 7] and No. 10 [ No. 5] when t he door lock
knob swi t c h i n t he UNL OCK posi t i on and no
cont i nui t y when t he swi t ch i s i n t he L OCK posi t i on.
[ ] : Left rear door
4. If t he cont i nui t y i s not spec i f i ed, r epl ace t he door lock
act uat or.
22-190
Door Kef Cyli nder Switch Test Security Hood Switch Test
2. Di sconnect t he 10P connect or (A) f r om t he door lock
act uat or (key cyl i nder swi t ch) (B).
and No. 5 when t he door key cyl i nder swi t ch i s i n
L OCK posi t i on. (With secur i t y)
No. 9 and No. 5 when t he door key cyl i nder swi t ch i s
in t he neut ral or UNL OCK posi t i on. (Wi th secur i t y)
and No. 5 when t he door key cyl i nder swi t ch i s in
UNL OCK posi t i on.
No. 8 and No. 5 when t he door key cyl i nder swi t ch i s
in t he neut ral or L OCK posi t i on.
4. If t he cont i nui t y i s not as speci f i ed, r epl ace t he door
l at ch/act uat or assembl y (see page 20-26).
1. Open t he hood.
2. Di sconnect t he 2P c onnec t or f r om t he secur i t y hood
swi t ch.
3. Check for cont i nui t y bet ween t he t er mi nal s.
and No. 2 when t he hood i s opened (latch r el eased).
No. 1 and No. 2 when t he hood i s c l osed (latch
pushed down).
4. If t he cont i nui t y i s not as spec i f i ed, r epl ace t he hood
latch assembl y (see page 20-302).
22-191
Kef l ess/Power Door Loc ks/Sec ur i t f S f st em
Trunk Li d R e l e a s e Act uat or T e s t
Wi t h Keyl ess Ent r y
1. Open the trunk lid.
2. Disconnect 3P connector from the trunk lid latch
switch/trunk release actuator.
3. Check actuator operation by connecting power to
terminal No. 3 and ground to terminal No. 2
momentarily. The actuator should work.
4. If the actuator does not work, replace the trunk lid
latch switch/release actuator assembly (see page
20-303).
Tr ansmi t t er Test
NOTE:
If the doors unlock or lock with the transmitter, but the
LED on the transmitter does not come on, the LED is
faulty; replace the transmitter.
If any door is open, you cannot lock the doors with the
transmitter. Opening the trunk does not cancel this
function; only an open door signal cancels the
automatic relock.
If you unlocked the doors with the transmitter, but do
not open any of the doors within 30 seconds, the
doors relock automatically.
The doors do not lock or unlock with the transmitter if
the ignition key is inserted in the ignition switch.
Wi t h HDS
1 Pro?? t h e transmitter Sock u . unl o c k button atl eas t 1
times to reset the transmitter.
If the locks work, the transmitter is OK.
If any of the transmitter buttons do not work,
replace the transmitter, then register the new
transmitter (see page 22-439).
If the locks don't work, go to step 2.
2. Connect the HDS to the data link connector.
3. Select KEY LESS TRANSMITTER from the BODY
ELECTRICAL menu, next select inspection then select
INSPECTION, then KEY LESS CHECK.
4. F ollow the screen prompts to check each button's
operation.
NOTE: The door lock actuators may or may not cycle
when receiving input from the transmitter.
If KEY LESS ENTRY TRANSMITTER CODE
RECEIVED is indicated, the transmitter is OK.
If DIF F ERENT KEY LESS ENTRY TRANSMITTER
CODE IS RECEIVED is indicated, the transmitter is
working but not registered to the vehicle. If
necessary, register the transmitter (see page
22-439).
If KEY LESS ENTRY TRANSMITTER CODE IS NOT
RECEIVED is indicated, go to step 5.
22-192
5. Open t he t r ansmi t t er , and c hec k f or wat er damage.
If you fi nd any wat er damage, r epl ace t he
t ransmi t t er, t hen regi st er t he new t ransmi t t er (see
page 22-439).
If t her e i s no wat er damage; go to st ep 6.
7. Us e a di fferent known-good keyl ess t ransmi t t er
assembl y and repeat st eps 3 and 4.
NOTE: The keyl ess t ransmi t t er does not need to be
pr ogr ammed to t he vehi cl e for t hi s t est .
If DIFFERENT K E YL E S S ENTRY TRANSMITTER
CODE WAS RECEI VED i s i ndi cat ed, r epl ace t he
keyl ess t ransmi t t er and do t he i mmobi l i zer syst em
regi st rat i on (see page 22-439).
If K E YL E S S ENTRY TRANSMITTER CODE WAS
NOT RECEIVED i s i ndi cat ed, t he
i mmobi l i zer -keyl ess cont rol uni t i s f aul t y, repl ace it
and do t he i mmobi l i zer syst em regi st rat i on (see
page 22-439).
NOTE: The keyl ess t ransmi t t er i s c ombi ned wi t h t he
i mmobi l i zer t r ansponder , so when t he t r ansponder i s
regi st ered by t he HDS, t he keyl ess t ransmi t t er
pr ogr ammi ng i s compl et ed aut omat i cal l y.
6. Repl ace t he t r ansmi t t er battery (A) wi t h a new one,
and pr ess t he lock or unl ock button and check t he
r esponse on t he sc r een of t he HDS.
If K E YL E S S ENTRY TRANSMITTER CODE IS
RECEI VED i s i ndi cat ed, t he t ransmi t t er i s OK.
If K E YL E S S ENTRY TRANSMITTER CODE IS NOT
RECEI VED i s i ndi cat ed, go to st ep 7.
(cont' d)
22-193
Key l ess/Power Door Loc ks/Sec ur i t y S y s t em
Tr ansmi t t er Test (cont'd)
Wi t hout HDS
If t he engi ne does not st art , go to t he i mmobi l i zer
syst em t r oubl eshoot i ng (see page 22-431).
If t he engi ne st ar t s, go to st ep 2.
2. Pr ess t he t r ansmi t t er lock or unl ock button f i ve or si x
t i mes to r eset t he t ransmi t t er.
If t he l ocks wor k, t he t r ansmi t t er is OK.
If t he l ocks don' t wor k, go to st ep 3.
3. Open t he t r ansmi t t er , and check f or wat er damage.
If you f i nd any wat er damage, r epl ace t he
t r ansmi t t er and regi st er t he new t ransmi t t er.
mIf t here i s no wat er damage, go to st ep 4.
4. Repl ace t he t r ansmi t t er battery (A) wi t h a new one
(CR1616), and try to lock and unl ock t he door s wi t h t he
t r ansmi t t er by pr essi ng t he lock or unl ock button f i ve
or si x t i mes.
If t he door s lock and unl ock, t he t ransmi t t er i s OK.
If t he door s don' t lock and unl ock, go to st ep 5.
5. Repr ogr am and regi st er t he t r ansmi t t er (see page
22-439), t hen try to lock and unl ock t he door s.
If t he door s lock and unl ock, t he t r ansmi t t er i s OK.
If t he door s don' t lock and unl ock, subst i t ut e a
known-good t r ansmi t t er , regi st er it and r echeck
(see page 22-439). If sti ll not oper at i ng, r epl ace t he
i mmobi l i zer -keyl ess cont rol uni t.
22-194
Tri pped Sensor Hi story
The secur i t y s ys tem stores i nf ormat i on on the last
t ri pped sensor if the secur i t y s ys tem has been act uat ed.
The i nf ormat i on can be ret ri eved usi ng the HDS.
To ret ri eve the last t ri pped sensor data, do thi s;
1. Sel ec t HISTORY DATA f r om the secur i t y syst em
MODE menu.
2 . Scr ol l t hr ough t he data list.
Sens or s that were act uat ed wi l l i ndi cat e ON.
Sens or s that were not act uat ed wi l l i ndi cat e NONE.
3. Inspect the ON ci rcui t for these pr obl ems:
Mi sadj ust ed or damaged swi t c h.
Loose or cor r oded connect i ons.
Intermi ttent shor t to gr ound.
NOTE: If PANIC Fr ame Recept i on i s i ndi cat ed ON,
i nf orm t he c ust omer that it coul d have been set by
somet hi ng pr essi ng t he pani c button of one of t he
regi st ered r emot es (in a pocket or pur se, under a st ack
of paper s, et c.).
Horns
22-196
1 L.
Circuit Diagram
UNDER-HOOD F US E / RE L A Y BOX
0-
No. 10(20 A)
crxx>
HORN
RE L A Y
F23
DRIVER'S
MICU
[ 1
f
Q12
DRIVER'S
UNDER-DASH
F US E / RE L A Y
B OX
ORN
BLU/RED BLU/RED
u x HORN f\j\ HORN
H
> (Hi gh) V H J ' (Low)
22- 197
Horns
Horn Test /Repl ac ement
1. Remove the grille cover;
2. Di sc onnec t t he 1P connect or (A) f r om eac h horn (B).
3. Test t he horn by moment ar i l y connect i ng L _.tte.\
power to t he t er mi nal (A) and gr oundi ng t he bracket
(B). The horn shoul d sound.
A
4. If it f ai l s to s ound, r epl ace it.
Ho r n S w i t c h Test
NOTE: Chec k f or a bl own No. 10 (20 A) f use in t he
under -hood f use/r el ay box. If it i s bl own, check f or a
f aul t y horn rel ay.
1. Tur n t he st eer i ng wheel 180 degr ees f r om t he cent er
posi t i on and r emove t he c over (A).
2. Di sconnect t he horn swi t ch 2P connect or (B).
3. Connec t hor n swi t ch 2P connect or t er mi nal s No. 1
and No. 2 wi t h a j umper wi r e. The hor ns shoul d
sound.
If t he hor ns sound, check or adj ust t he i nst al l at i on
of t he dr i ver ' s ai r bag assembl y and t he horn swi t ch
plate.
If t he hor ns don' t sound, go to st ep 4.
4. Remove t he j umper wi r e f r om t he horn swi t ch 2P
connect or .
20-181).
6. Remove t he dr i ver ' s ai r bag assembl y (see page
24-211).
22-198
7. Di sconnect cabl e reel subhar ness 2 0 P c onnec t or (A).
8. Connect cable reel subharness 20P connector (A)
t er mi nal s No. 11 and No. 12 wi th a j umper wi r e. The
hor ns shoul d sound.
If t he hor ns sound, r epl ace t he cabl e reel
subhar ness.
If t he hor ns don' t sound, go to st ep 9.
9. Di sconnect t he dashboar d wi r e har ness 20P
connect or (A).
10. Connec t dashboar d wi r e har ness 20P connect or
t er mi nal s No. 1 and No. 2 wi t h a j umper wi r e. The
hor ns shoul d sound.
If t he hor ns sound, r epl ace t he cabl e r eel .
If t he hor ns don' t sound, repai r an open i n t ermi nal
No. 2 or No. 1 wi r e, or a faulty dr i ver ' s MICU.
Exteri or Li ght s
4-door
PARK ING BRAK E SWITCH
TRANSMISSION RANGE SWITCH (A/T) High B eam, page 22-236
Test, page 14-238 Low B eam, page 22-236
Replacement, page 14-240 FRONT PARK ING LIGHT
F RONT SIDE MARK ER LIGHT
F RONT TURN SIGNAL LIGHT
* Bulb Replacement, page 22-237
22-200
4 - d o o r
TAILLIGHT and BRAKE LIGHT
REAR TURN SIGNAL LIGHT
B ulb Replacement, page 22-238
BACK -UP LIGHT
( c o nt ' d)
22- 201
Exteri or Li ght s
DRL INDICATOR
HI GH B EAM INDICATOR
LIGHTS-ON INDICATOR
DRIVER' S MI CU
(Bui l t i nt o t he driver's under -dash fuse/relay box)
Replacement:
PASSENGER' S MICU
22-202
2-door
PA RK I NG BRAK E SWI TCH
A U T O MA T I C L I GHTI NG SE NSO R/
SU NL I GHT SE NSO R
T RA NSMI SSI O N RA NGE SWI T CH (A/ T)
Test page 14-238
BACK - U P L I GHT SWI TCH (M/T)
Test page 13-6
HEADLIGHT
Bulb Replacement:
High Beam, page 22-236
9
Low Beam, page 22-236
F RONT PARK ING LIGHT
- F RONT SI DE MA RK E R LIGHT
F RONT T U RN SI GNA L L I GHT
( c o nt ' d)
22-20
Exteri or Li ght s
Component Locat i on i ndex (cont'd)
B ulb Replacement page 22-238
REAR TURN SIGNAL LIGHT
BACK -UP LIGHT
22-204
I BODY
2-door
DRL INDICATOR
HIGH BEAM INDICATOR
L I GHTS-ON INDICATOR
DRI VE RS MICU
(Bui l t i nt o t he dr i ver ' s under -dash f use/ r el ay box)
Replacement:
PA S S E NGE R' S MI CU
22-205
Exteri or Li ght s
S f st em Descri pt i on
Headlights S f stem Description
The headl i ght syst em Is c omposed of t he dr i ver ' s MI CU, t he passenger ' s MICU, t he headl i ght and di mmer /f l ash-t o-pass
swi t c hes (Insi de t he combi nat i on li ght swi t c h), t he left and ri ght headl i ght s, and t he hi gh beam Indi cat or.
Eac h MICU cont r ol s eac h si de of t he headl i ght s wi t h a bui l t -in l ow beam cont rol ci rcui t and a bui l t -in hi gh beam cont rol
ci rcui t based upon t he posi t i on of t he headl i ght and di mmer /f l ash-t o-pass combi nat i on li ght swi t c hes. The t ai l l i ght s and
l i c ense plate l i ght s ar e cont r ol l ed by t he dr i ver ' s MICU onl y.
L o w Beams .
When you move t he headl i ght swi t c h to t he ON posi t i on and t he di mmer /f l ash-t o-pass swi t ch to t he l ow posi t i on, a
gr ound si gnal Is suppl i ed to t er mi nal No. 8 of dr i ver ' s under -dash f use/r el ay box connect or R (24P). The dr i ver ' s MICU
t hen ener gi zes t he l ow beam cont rol ci rcui t , suppl yi ng battery vol t age to t he l ow beam of t he left headl i ght , t ur ni ng it on.
Al so t he dr i ver ' s MICU sends t he mes s age to t he passenger ' s MICU vi a t he B-CAN c ommuni c at i on l i nes. The
passenger ' s MICU t hen ener gi zes t he l ow beam-cont r ol ci r cui t , suppl yi ng battery vol t age to t he l ow beam of t he ri ght
headl i ght , t ur ni ng it on.
Hi gh Beams
When you move t he headl i ght swi t c h to t he ON posi t i on and t he di mmer /f l ash-t or pass swi t ch to t he hi gh posi t i on,
gr ound si gnal s ar e suppl i ed to t er mi nal s No. 8 and No. 22 of dr i ver ' s under -dash f use/r el ay box (dr i ver ' s MICU)
connect or R (24P). The dr i ver ' s and passenger ' s MICUs t hen ener gi ze t he eac h si de of t he hi gh beam headl i ght cont rol
ci r cui t s, suppl yi ng battery vol t age t o t he hi gh beam headl i ght s, t ur ni ng t hem on.
Fl ash-t o-Pass
When you pull t he di mmer /f l ash-t o-pass swi t c h to t he passi ng posi t i on, a gr ound si gnal i s suppl i ed to t er mi nal No. 21 of
t he dr i ver ' s under -dash f use/r el ay box (MICU) connect or R (24P). The dr i ver ' s and passenger ' s MICUs t hen ener gi ze t he
hi gh beam cont rol ci r cui t s f or as l ong as t he swi t c h i s hel d, suppl yi ng battery vol t age to t he hi gh beam headl i ght s,
t ur ni ng t hem on.
Dayt i me Runni ng Li ght s Sy s t em Descr i pt i on
The dayt i me r unni ng l i ght s syst em i ncl udes t he dr i ver and passenger ' s MICUs, t he left and ri ght hi gh beam headl i ght s,
t he parki ng brake swi t c h, and t he DRL i ndi cat or. The dayt i me r unni ng li ght s oper at e wi t h t he i gni t i on swi t ch ON (II), t he
headl i ght s off (headl i ght swi t ch OFF or i n t he parki ng posi t i on), and t he parki ng brake r el eased.
When t he dayt i me r unni ng li ght s ar e on, t he MICU t ur ns t he hi gh beam headl i ght cont rol ci rcui t on and off (duty c yc l e),
whi c h pr ovi des a r educed vol t age (appr oxi mat el y 68 vol t s) to t he hi gh beam headl i ght s (vi a t he No. 1 and No. 28 f uses
i n t he dr i ver ' s under -dash f use/r el ay box and No. 1 f use i n t he passenger ' s under -dash f use/r el ay box); t he hi gh beam
headl i ght s c ome on wi t h r educed br i ght ness. The gauge cont rol modul e cont r ol s t he DRL i ndi cat or to t urn it on.
NOTE:
The dayt i me r unni ng li ghts ar e di sabl ed when t he i gni t i on swi t ch i s t ur ned to L OCK (0). To keep t he dayt i me r unni ng
l i ght s f r om c omi ng on, appl y t he parki ng brake swi t c h whi l e t he i gni t i on swi t ch i s i n L OCK (0) posi t i on. When you t hen
t urn t he i gni ti on swi t c h back to ON (II), t he dayt i me r unni ng l i ght s wi l l not c ome on unti l t he parki ng brake i s r el eased.
The headl i ght s revert to nor mal oper at i on when you t urn t hem on wi t h t he headl i ght swi t c h.
22-206
Exteri or Li ghts
Ci rcui t Di agram
cr\x> f CTNwO-
No. 15 (10 A)
No. 3-5 (DR L T MAIN) (30 A)
i crxjo
No. 3-3 ( AS L T MAIN) (30 A)
CT\J Q.
- B L K / RE D
B L U
B L U
Univcno uiMUcn-uMon ruoc/r
( PA S S E NGE R' S UNDE R- DA S H
FU SC/ RE L AY BO X)
DRI VER' S MI CU
IGNITION S WI TCH
IG1 HOT in ON (
and S TA RT (III)
pg IG2 HOT in ON (II)
WHT
i No. 15 ) No. 5
, (7.5 A) C (7.5 A)
S G S G PG PG
B A CK - UP
H/L
B-CAN B-CAN
HI L O
Q1 R5 R6
BRN BRN BL K BL K WHT L T B L U GRN RE D GRY BRN BL K
H -
(-000!
- P A S S I N G OFF
AUTOI
( v)
COMBI NATI ON L I GHT S WI TCH
_ L L - L sx JX
G501 G501 G502 G502
Q8
I
N PNK
DRI VER' S
1
J UNCTI ON
1
D2 BOX 1 * F3
P5
I
B L U
( PA S S E NGE R' S
UNDER- DAS H
A 4v
BRN
\- .
I
I E10
I
PNK
' 19
] E 9
B L U
18
GA UGE
CONTROL MODUL E
PA S S E NGE R' S
MI CU
( PA S S E NGE R' S
UNDE R- DAS H
F US E / RE L A Y
BOX)
_ l _
B-CAN B- CAN
HI L O
B-CAN
TRANCE I VE R
3 Z E
i I I
MAIN
CI RCUI T
L T GRN
1
PARK I NG
BRAK E
S WI TCH
(Cl os ed:
L ev er pul l ed)
DRI VER' S
DOOR
S WI TCH
(Cl os ed:
Door open)
22-208
BODY
DRIVER'S
JUNCTION
B0X1
F 7 H8
F6 H9
* 1 : HIGH BEAM INDICATOR (LED)
*2: LIGHTS-ON INDICATOR (LED)
*3: DRL INDICATOR (LED)
* 4: DRL-Circuit with headlights OFF
and parking brake released
*5: 4-door
*6: 2-door
[ ] : 2-door
- - : B-CAN line
PASSENGER' S
UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY BOX
' No 30
, (10 A)
No. 28
, (10 A)
No. 27
, (10 A)
DRIVER'S
MICU
RED
d )
\ LOW
'(51 W)
[55 W]
1 LEFT
HEADLIGHT
M60W )
J
LEFT
FRONT
PARKING
LIGHT
(5W)
[2.2 CP]
RED
1*
. 2 *
(D
LEFT
FRONT
SIDE
MARKER
LIGHT
(3 CP)
15 W ]
2*5
J *6
LICENSE
PLATE
LIGHT (S)
(5Wx2)
15 W]
TAILLIGHTS
(5Wx2)
G302
-0.
G302 G302
X L
G302
BLK
G602
X L
G602
(cont'd)
22-209
xteri or Lights
Circuit Diagram (cont'd)
* : DRL -Ci r c ui t with headlights OFF
and parking brake released
[ ]: 2-door
- - : B- CAN line
DRI VER' S MI CU
(DRIVER'S
UNDER-DASH
FUSE/ RELAY
BOX)
No. 15 (10 A)
FUSE
(UNDER-HOOD
FUSE/ RELAY
BOX)
No. 5 (7.5 A)
FUSE
(DRIVER'S
UNDER-DASH
FUSE/ RELAY
B O X )
W V
A UTOMA TI C
LIGHTING/
SUNLIGHT
SENSOR
SIP SIO SIG
No. 3-3
( AS L T MAIN)
(30 A) F US E
( UNDER- HOOD
F US E / RE L A Y B OX)
V
WHT RED BRN
PA S S E NGE R' S UNDE R- DA S H F US E / RE L A Y B OX
BACK - UP
H/L
[ ~ PG S G S G PG |
SI P S I O S I G
B-CAN B- CAN
HI L O
1 1
I No. 1
b 0 0 A)
No. 2
, (10 A)
PA S S E NGE R' S
MI CU
B L K BL K BL K BL K
X L X L X L X L
G505 G505 G201 G201
BRN ORN
A A
DRI VER' S MI CU
GA UGE
CONTROL MODUL E
(' 08-09 model s )
[ " " S G
Z l
Xl_
G201
XL
G201
\ L O W
/(51 W)
[55 W]
A ^ HIGH
7 J (60 W)
1 RI GHT
HEADL I GHT
-9r
G201
X L
G203
2
RI GHT
FRONT
PARK I NG
L I GHT
(5W)
[ 2.2 CP]
BL K
XL
G201
2
RI GHT
FRONT
S I DE
MARK ER
L I GHT
(3 CP)
[5 W]
XL
G201
(' 10 model )
2-210
<rvx> f ' cr\j o
No. 15 (10 A)
-a~\j>
No. 3-5 (DR L T MAIN) (30 A)
' CT\JD
No. 3-3 ( AS L T MAIN) (30 A)
crxjo
F16
- BL K / RED
B L U
B L U
DRI VER' S UNDE R- DAS H F US E / RE L A Y BOX
PA S S E NGE R' S
UNDER- DAS H
DRI VER' S MI CU
HIGH B E A M I NDI CATOR (LED)
L I GHTS - ON I NDI CATOR (L ED)
DRL I NDI CATOR (L ED)
B-CAN l i ne
IG1 HOT i n ON (II)
and S TA RT (III)
pg IG2 HOT i n ON (II)
WHT
ORN B L U
No. 15 J No. 5
(7.5 A) C (7.5 A)
S G S G PG PG
Q18
BRN BRN BL K BL K WHT L T BL U GRN
B- CAN B-CAN
HI L O
RE D GRY BRN BL K
HI v
DI MMER <
' PA S S I NG '
(iO)
S TE E RI NG
L OCK
1 A S S E MB L Y
XL XL X_ XL _
G501 G501 G502 G502 G503
PARK I NG
BRAK E
S WI TCH
(Cl os ed:
L ev er pul l ed)
(cont'd)
22-211
Exteri or Li ght s
DRIVER'S
J UNCTI ON
B 0 X 1
-
F 7 H8
F 6 H9
' NO.
(10A)
' No. 28
, (10A)
DRIVER'S
MICU
REP
l VJ{51 W)
[55 W)
a 1 HIGH
W(60W)
LEF T
HEADLIGHT
RED

RED RED
LEFT
FRONT
PARKING
LIGHT
(5W)
[2.2 CP]
LEFT
FRONT
SIDE
MARKER
LIGHT
(3 CP)
[5 W]
2*2
1*
3
LICENSE
PLATE
LIGHT (S)
(5Wx2)
15 W]
TAILLIGHTS
(5Wx2)
4
G201 G201
4
G302
4
G302
4
G602
4
G602
22-212
I mm
*1: DRL -Ci r c ui t wi t h headl i ght s OFF
and par ki ng br ake r el eased
* 2:
* 3:
[ ]
DRI VER' S MI CU
(DRI VER' S
UNDER- DAS H
KB/
4-door
2-door
2-door
B- CAN l i ne
No. 3-3
( AS L T MAIN)
(30 A) F US E
( UNDER- HOOD
WHT
PA S S E NGE R' S UNDE R- DA S H FUS E / RE L A Y BOX
) No. 4
( 15A)
i No. 1
, (10 A)
> No. 2
, (10 A)
BACK - UP
H/L
[ ~ PG S G S G PG " |
B-CAN B-CAN
HI LO
PA S S E NGE R' S |
MI CU
BL K BL K BL K BL K
_L L J J _ X L _L L
G505 G505 G201 G201
ORN GRY
A A
DRI VER' S MI CU
GA UGE
CONTROL MODUL E
^ (' 08-09 model s)
f ~ S G S G ~ PG |
G201 G201 ;
(' 10 model )
\ L OW
M51 W)
[55 W]
GD
H,GH
1 RI GHT
HEADL I GHT
(60 W)
J
2
RI GHT
FRONT
PARK I NG
L I GHT
<5W)
[2.2 CP]
G201 G201 G201
2
RI GHT
FRONT
S I DE
MARK ER
L I GHT
(3 CP)
[5 W]
4-
G201
(cont'd)
22-213
Ci rcui t Di agram - Back-up Li ght s
U N D E R - H O O D F U S E / R E L A Y B O X
&
CTXJ O ^ < r xx>
DRI VE R' S
UNDE R- DA S H
IGNITION S WI TCH
F16 C1
IG1 HOT in ON (II)
and S TA RT (III)
: Wi t h navi gat i on s y s t em
DRI VER' S
UNDER- DAS H
( A/ T )
No. 5
(7.5 A)
3
F27
GRY
D6
L T B L U
TRANS MI S S I ON
RA NGE S WI TCH
(Bac k-up l i ght swi t c h)
1 0 (Cl os ed: In R posi t i on)
. . J
XL
G101
AUTOMATI C
DIMMING
INSIDE MI RROR
NAVI GATI ON
UN IP-
DRI VE R' S
UNDE R- DA S H
L T BL U
2
L E FT
BACK - UP
L I GHT
(21 W)
(M/T)
No. 5
(7.5 A)
D6 F27 F28
I I
L T B L U L T B L U BRN
GRN/ WHT Y E L
BACK - UP
L I GHT S WI TCH
(On t he t r ans mi s s i o n
housi ng)
(Cl os ed:
In r ev er s e posi t i on)
RI GHT
BACK - UP
L I GHT
\ (21 W)
22-214
Ci rcui t Di agram - Brake Li ght s
UNDER- HOOD
F US E / B E L A Y B OX
No. 10(20 A)
BRAK E PEDAL
POSITION SWITCH
(Closed: Pedal pressed)
LTGRN LTGRN
LEF T BRAK E HK
\ 9J L I GHT(21 W) [^J
HIGH MOUNT
BRAK E LIGHT
(21 W) #
RI GHT BRAK E
L I GHT (21 W)
(*)
G602
G601
X L
G602
Exteri or Li ght s
DTC B10CF: Left Dayt i me Runni ng Li ght s
NOTE:
Make sur e t he No. 15 (7.5 A) f use i n t he dr i ver ' s
under -dash f use/r el ay box i s OK.
f ol l ow t he i nst r uct i ons in B-CAN Sy s t em Di agnosi s
3. Rel ease t he parki ng brake l ever.
4. Tur n t he headl i ght swi t c h OFF.
Is DTC B10CF indicat ed?
Chec k f or l oose or poor c onnec t i ons.H
6. Tur n t he headl i ght hi gh beam ON.
Does t he left headlight (high beam) come on?
NO- Go to st ep 9.
8. Measur e vol t age bet ween body gr ound and dr i ver ' s
under -dash f use/r el ay box connect or Q (20P)
t er mi nal s No.l and No. 2, and bet ween body gr ound
and dr i ver ' s under -dash f use/r el ay box connect or R
(24P) t er mi nal s No. 2 and No. 5 i ndi vi dual l y.
CONNECTOR Q ( 20P)
PG (BLK) S G (BRN)
1 2 3 8
/
11 13 14 15 16 17 18 20
wi r e si ae or Temai e t er mi n al s
CONNECTOR R ( 20P)
S G (BRN) PG (BLK)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
/
10
/ /
13 14 15 16 17 18
/ /
21 22
/ /
Is t here less t han 0.2V?
22-86), Canada model s (see page 22-87).H
NO-Repai r an open or hi gh r esi st ance i n t he wi r e or
poor gr ound (G501, G502).H
10. Tur n t he headl i ght swi t ch OFF.
11. Chec k t he No. 28 (10 A) f use in t he dr i ver ' s under -dash
f use/r el ay box.
Is t he fuse OK?
NO-Repl ac e t he f use, and r echeck. If t he f use i s bl own
agai n, repai r a short in t he wi r e. B
22-216
12. Chec k t he left headl i ght bul b.
Is t he bulb OK?
NO-Repl ac e t he bul b and r echeck M
connect or F (33P).
14. Di sconnect t he left headl i ght (hi gh beam) 2P
connect or .
15. Chec k for conti nui ty bet ween dr i ver ' s under -dash
left headl i ght (hi gh beam) 2P connect or t er mi nal
No. 2.
LEFT HEADLI GHT (HI GH BEAM) 2 P CONNECTOR
nj2)
V n l n J H/ L HI GH ( WHT/ RED)
H/ L HI GH ( WHT/ RED)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
,115 J16117118
19
33 20 21 ?2 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
19
33
DRI VER'S UNDER-DASH FUSE/ RELAY BOX
CONNECTOR F (33P)
NO-Repai r an open or hi gh r esi st anc e i n t he wi r e.I
16. Chec k f or cont i nui t y bet ween left headl i ght (hi gh
beam) 2P connect or t er mi nal No. 1 and body gr ound.
LEFT HEADLI GHT ( HI GH BEAM) 2 P CONNECTOR
(tTt)
G ND (BLK)
NO-Repai r an open or hi gh r esi st ance in t he wi r e or
poor gr ound (G302).B
22-217
Exteri or Li ght s
DTC Troubleshootsng (cont' d)
DTC B11CF: Ri ght Dayt i me Runni ng Li ght s
Circuit Malfunction
NOTE: If you are t r oubl eshoot i ng mul t i pl e DTCs , be sur e
3. Rel ease t he parki ng brake l ever.
Is DTC B11CF indicated?
Chec k f or l oose or poor c onnec t i ons H
6. Tur n t he headl i ght hi gh beam ON.
Does the right headlight come on?
NO- Go to st ep 9.
8. Measur e vol t age bet ween body gr ound and
passenger ' s under -dash f use/r el ay box connect or A
(38P) t er mi nal s No. 36 and No. 37, and bet ween body
gr ound and connect or E (18P ) t er mi nal s No. 15 and
PASSENGER'S UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY
BOX CONNECTOR A (38P)
SG (BLK)
PASSENGERS UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY
BOX CONNECTOR E (18P)
/
2
/
5 6 7 8
9
10
12 13
/
15 16
/
/
SG (BLK) PG( BLK)
Is there less than 0.2V?
Y E S - F a u l t y passenger ' s M I C U ; r epl ace t he
passenger ' s under -dash f use/r el ay box (see page
22-89).B
NO-Repai r an open or hi gh r esi st anc e i n t he wi r e or
poor gr ound (G201, G505) . H
11. Chec k t he No. 1(10 A) f use i n t he passenger ' s
Is the fuse OK ?
NO-Repl ac e t he f use, and r echeck. If t he f use i s bl own
agai n, repai r a shor t in t he wi r e. H
12. Chec k t he ri ght headl i ght bulb.
Is t he bulb OK?
NO-Repl ac e t he bul b and r ec hec k . B
13. Di sc onnec t passenger ' s under -dash f use/r el ay box
connect or E (18P).
14. Di sconnect t he ri ght headl i ght (hi gh beam) 2P
connect or .
15. Chec k for cont i nui t y bet ween passenger ' s under -dash
f use/r el ay box connect or E (18P) t er mi nal No. 2 and
ri ght headl i ght (hi gh beam) 2P c onnec t or t er mi nal
No. 2.
R I GH T H E A DL I G H T ( H I GH B E A M) 2P C O N N E C T O R
G E )
H / L H I G H ( OR N)
H / L H I G H ( OR N)
/
2
/
5 6 7 8
g
10
12 13
/
15 16
/ /
P A S S E NGE R ' S U N DE R - DA S H F U S E / R E L A Y
B O X C O N N E C T O R E (18P )
NO-Repai r an open i n t he w i r e . H
16. Chec k f or cont i nui t y bet ween ri ght headl i ght (hi gh
beam) 2P connect or t er mi nal No. 1 and body gr ound.
R I G H T H E A DL I G H T ( H I G H B E A M ) 2P C O N N E C T O R
G N D (B L K )
YES - Faul t y passenger ' s MICU; r epl ace t he
22-89).B
NO-Repai r an open or hi gh r esi st anc e i n t he wi r e or
poor gr ound (G203).B
22-219
Exterior Lights
DTC B1275: Headlight Switch OFF Position
Circuit Malfunction
DTC B127S: Combi nat i on Li ght Headli ght
Switch Parking Light Position Circuit
Malfunction
DTC B1277: Headlight Switch AUTO Position
Circuit Malfunction
DTC B1278; Headli ght Swi t ch ON Posi t i on
Circuit Malfunction
1. Ci ear trie u i c s wi t h t he HDS.
2. Tur n t he i gni t i on swi t c h to L OCK (0) and t hen back to
ON (II).
3. Tur n t he combi nat i on li ght swi t ch t o t he PARKING
(SMAL L ), AUTO, and ON (l ow beam) posi t i ons, and
t hen t o t he OFF posi t i on.
4. Wai t f or 6 sec onds or mor e.
Are DTCs B1275, B1276, B1277, and/or B1278
indicat ed?
Chec k f or l oose or poor c o nnec t i o ns .
6. Sel ec t LIGHTING f r om t he BODY EL ECTRI CAL syst em
sel ect menu, and ent er t he DATA LIST.
7. Chec k eac h combi nat i on li ght swi t ch posi t i on val ue
wi t h t he DATA L IST menu.
When t he c ombi nat i on l i ght s wi t c h i s t ur ned OFF
Dat a Li st Val ue
Headl i ght Swi t c h (OFF) ON
Headl i ght Swi t c h (PARKING) OFF
Headl i ght Swi t c h (AUTO) OFF
Headl i ght Swi t c h (HEADLIGHT) OFF
When t he c ombi nat i on l i ght swi t c h i s t ur ned t o
PARKING LIGHT
Dat a Li st Val ue
Headl i ght Swi t c h (OFF) OFF
Headl i ght Swi t c h (PARKING! uN
Headl i ght Swi t c h (AUTO) OFF
When t he c ombi nat i on l i ght swi t c h i s t ur ned t o
AUTO
Dat a L i s t Val ue
Headl i ght Swi t c h (AUTO) ON
When t he c ombi nat i on l i ght swi t c h i s t ur ned ON
(HEADLIGHT)
Dat a Li st Val ue
Headl i ght Swi t c h (PARKING) ON
Headl i ght Swi t c h (AUTO) O F F
Headl i ght Swi t c h (HEADLIGHT) ON
Are all dat a list values correct ?
22-86), Canada model s (see page 22-87).f l
NO- Go to st ep 8.
22-220
9. Di sconnect t he combi nat i on light swi t ch 12P
connect or .
11. Sel ec t LIGHTING f r om t he BODY EL ECTRI CAL syst em
sel ect menu, and ent er t he DATA LIST.
12. Check eac h combi nat i on light swi t ch posi t i on val ue
Dat a Li st Val ue
Headl i ght Swi t ch (AUTO) OFF
17. Do t he combi nat i on light swi t ch t est (see page
22-232).
Is the combination light switch OK?
NO-Repl ac e t he combi nat i on li ght s w i t c h .
connect or R (24P).
f use/r el ay box connect or R (24P) t er mi nal s and
combi nat i on li ght swi t ch 12P connect or t er mi nal s as
shown:
Are all data list values indicated OFF?
NO- Go to st ep 13.
connect or R (24P).
dr i ver ' s under -dash f use/r el ay box connect or R (24P)
t er mi nal s No. 6, No. 7, and No. 8 i ndi vi dual l y.
CONNECTOR R (20P)
S MAL L L T SW (GRY)
HL OFF SW (RED)
H/L ON S W (BRN)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 10
/
13 14 15 16 17 18
/
21 22
YES - Repai r a shor t to ground in t he wi r e. B
NO-Faul t y dr i ver ' s MICU; r epl ace the dr i ver ' s
Dr i ver ' s under -dash Combi nat i on l i ght
f use/r el ay box s wi t c h 12P c onnec t or
c onnec t or R (24P)
6 (RED) 9 (RED)
8 (BRN) 10 (BRN)
7 (GRY) 11 (GRY)
3 (BLK) 12 (BLK)
COMBINATION LIGHT SWI TCH 12P CONNECTOR
1
C
M
4
/
6
8 9 10 11 12
H/L
OFF S W
(RED)
H/L
ON S W
(BRN)
COMBI
GND
(BLK)
S MAL L
L T S W
(GRY)
COMBI
GND
(BLK)
H/L
OFF S W
(RED)
H/L
ON S W
(BRN)
S MAL L
L T S W
(GRY)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
/
10
/
13 14 15 16 17 18
/ /
21 22
CONNECTOR R (24P)
NO-Repai r an open or hi gh r esi st ance in t he wi r e.I
(cont' d)
22-221
Exteri or Li ght s
f use/r el ay box connect or R (24P) t er mi nal s as shown:
Fr om t er mi nal To t er mi nal
6 (RED) 7 (GRY)
8 (BRN)
21 (GRN)
22 (LT BL U)
7 (GRY) 8 (BRN)
21 (GRN)
22 (LT BLU)
YES - Repai r a shor t bet ween t he wi r es . B
22-86), Canada model s (see page 22- 87) . l
DTC B1279: Di mmer Swi t ch Ci rcui t
Malfuncti on
ON (II).
3. Tur n t he combi nat i on li ght (headl i ght ) swi t c h ON.
4. Change t he di mmer swi t ch f r om l ow beam to hi gh
beam.
5. Tur n t he combi nat i on li ght swi t c h OFF, and t hen to
t he passi ng posi t i on, and wai t f or at l east 6 s ec onds .
Check for l oose or poor c o nnec t i o ns .
7. Sel ec t LIGHTING f rom t he BODY EL ECTRI CAL syst em
sel ec t menu, t hen ent er t he DATA L IST.
8. Chec k eac h combi nat i on li ght swi t c h posi t i on val ue
wi t h t he DATA L I ST menu.
When t he passi ng swi t c h i s oper at ed
Dat a Li st Val ue
Headl i ght Swi t c h (PASSING) ON
Headl i ght Swi t c h (Hi gh beam) OFF
When t he headl i ght s wi t c h i s t ur ned ON, and t he
di mmer s wi t c h c hanged f r om l ow beam t o hi gh
beam
Dat a Li st Val ue
Headl i ght Swi t c h (PASSING) OFF
Headl i ght Swi t c h (Hi gh beam) ON
Headl i ght Swi t c h (HEADLIGHT) ON
NO- Go to st ep 9.
22-222
10. Di sconnect t he combi nat i on light swi t ch 12P
connect or .
12. Sel ec t LIGHTING f rom t he BODY EL ECTRI CAL syst em
sel ect menu, t hen ent er t he DATA LIST.
13. Check eac h combi nat i on li ght swi t ch posi t i on val ue
When t he combi nat i on l i ght swi t c h i s t ur ned OFF
Dat a Li st VaSue
Headl i ght Swi t ch (PASSING) OFF
Headl i ght Swi t ch (Hi gh beam) OFF
Headl i ght Swi t ch (HEADLIGHT) OFF
Are all data list values indicated OFF?
Y E S - Go to st ep 17.
NO- Go to st ep 14.
15. Di sconnect under -dash f use/r el ay box connect or R
(24P).
CONNECTOR R (20P)
H/L ON S W (BRN)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
/
10
13 14 15 16 17 18
/
/
21 22
/
PAS S I NG S W
(GRN)
DIMMER S W
(LT BL U)
YES - Repai r a shor t to gr ound in t he wi r e. B
under -dash f use/r el ay box, US A model s (see page .
18. Do t he combi nat i on light swi t ch t est (see page
22-232).
Is the combination light switch OK ?
NO-Repl ac e t he combi nat i on light swi t ch (see page
22-232).B
connect or R (24P).
20. Check for cont i nui t y bet ween dr i ver ' s under -dash
f use/r el ay box connect or R (24P) t er mi nal s and t he
combi nat i on light swi t ch 12P connect or t er mi nal s as
shown:
Dr i ver ' s under -dash Combi nat i on l i ght
f use/r el ay box swi t c h 12P c onnec t or
c onnec t or R (24P)
3( BL K ) 12 (BLK)
8 (BRN) 10 (BRN)
21 (GRN) 6 (GRN)
22 (LT BLU) 4 (LT BLU)
CONNECTOR R (24P)
COMBI GND (BLK) H/L ON SW (BRN)
1 2
/
4
/
6
/
8 9 10 11 12
COMBI GND (BLK)
H/L ON S W (BRN)
COMBINATION LIGHT SWI TCH 12P CONNECTOR
(cont' d)
22-223
Exteri or Li ght s
f use/r el ay box connect or R (24P) t er mi nal s as shown:
F r o m t er mi nal To t er mi nal
21 (GRN) 6 (RED)
7 (GRY)
8 (BRN)
22 ( L TBL U)
22 (LT BL U) 6 (RED)
7 (GRY)
8 (BRN)
YES - Repai r a shor t bet ween t he w i r e s . !
DTC B1575: Aut o Li ght Sensor Ci rcui t
Malfuncti on
ON (II).
3. Wai t for one sec ond.
is DTC B1575 indicat ed?
Check f or l oose or poor c onnec t i ons.H
6. Di sconnect t he aut omat i c l i ght i ng/sunl i ght sensor 5P
connect or .
aut omat i c l i ght i ng/sunl i ght sensor 5P connect or
t er mi nal No. 1.
AUTOMATI C L I GHTI NG/ SUNL I GHT
S E NS OR 5P CONNECTOR
1 j 2 I 3 l 4 I 5
SIP (WHT)
Is t here about 5V?
YES - Repl ac e t he aut omat i c l i ght i ng/sunl i ght sensor
(see page21-186).B
NO- Go to st ep 9.
10. Di sc onnec t passenger ' s under -dash f use/r el ay box
connect or D (28P).
22-224
11 Chec k for cont i nui t y bet ween passenger ' s under -dash
f use/r el ay box connect or D (28P) No. 9 t er mi nal and
aut omat i c l i ght i ng/sunl i ght sensor 5P connect or
t er mi nal No. 1.
AUTOMATI C L I GHTI NG/ S UNL I GHI
S ENS OR 5P CONNECTOR
J
1 2 3 4 5
SI P (WHT)
SIP (WHT)
/ /
5
n
6 /
/
9
/
J T T L ,
12
/ /
/
/
/
20 21 22
/
/
/
27 ?8
15 16
PAS S E NGE R' S UNDER-DASH FUS E / RE L A Y
BOX CONNECTOR D (28P)
YES - Faul t y passenger ' s MICU. Subst i t ut e a
known-good passenger ' s under -dash f use/r el ay box
and r ec hec k . B
Exteri or Li ght s
IVIICU Input Test
NOTE:
Bef ore t est i ng, t r oubl eshoot t he mul t i pl ex i nt egrat ed cont rol uni t f i r st , usi ng B-CAN Syst em Di agnosi s Test Mode A
{ see page 22-134).
Bef ore t est i ng, make sur e t he No. 15 (7.5 A) f use In t he dr i ver ' s under -dash f use/r el ay box i s OK.
Dr i ver ' s MICU
1. Tur n t he i gni ti on swi t ch to L OCK (0), and r emove t he dr i ver ' s dashboar d l ower cover .
2. Di sconnect dr i ver ' s under -dash f use/r el ay box c onnec t or s B, D. F Q. and R.
CONNECTOR B (2P)
BLU
CONNECTOR D (16P)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8
9 10
11 12 13 14 15
16
RED BRN
CONNECTOR F (33P)
RED WHT WHT/ RED BL U B L K / RE D
r
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 |10 11 12
1314
C
2 0 21 22 2324 252627 28)29 30
31 32
3
115116
17 Jl8
19
33
BL K
CONNECTOR Q (20P)
BRN GRN
1 2
rtj
/ / / /
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 20
WHT
CONNECTOR R (24P)
BRN BL K BL K RED GRY BRN
\ \ \ / / /
1 2 3
-J QU
4 5 6 7 8
pjou
10
/
13 14 15 16 17 18
/
21 22
/
GRN L TB L U
RE D/ YE L
4. Wi t h t he c onnec t or s sti ll di sc onnec t ed, do t hese i nput t est s at t he f ol l owi ng c onnec t or s.
If any t est i ndi cat es a pr obl em, f i nd and cor r ect the c ause, t hen r echeck t he syst em.
Cavi t y Wi r e Tes t condi t i on Test : Desi r ed r esul t Possi bl e c aus e if r esul t i s not
obt ai ned
D11 RED Under all
condi t i ons
Connec t t ermi nal F19 and
t er mi nal D11 wi th a j umper wi r e:
The t ai l l i ght s and t he l i cense plate
l i ght s shoul d c ome on.
Bl own bulb
Poor gr ound (G602) or an open in
t he gr ound wi r e
An open or hi gh r esi st ance i n t he
wi r e
F10 RED Under all
condi t i ons
t er mi nal F10 wi t h a j umper wi r e:
The left front parki ng li ght and t he
left f ront si de marker li ght shoul d
c ome on.
Bl own bul b
Poor gr ound (G302) or an open i n
the gr ound wi r e
wi r e
F13 WHT/
RED
Under all
condi t i ons
t er mi nal F13 wi t h a j umper wi r e:
The left headl i ght (hi gh beam)
shoul d c ome on.
Bl own bulb
t he gr ound wi r e
. An open or hi gh r esi st ance i n t he
wi r e
F21 RED/
YE L
Under all
condi t i ons
t er mi nal F21 wi th a j umper wi r e:
The left headl i ght (l ow beam)
shoul d c ome on.
Bl own bulb
t he gr ound wi r e
An open in t he wi r e
08 GRN Passenger ' s
under -dash
f use/r el ay box
connect or A (38P)
di sconnect ed
Chec k f or conti nui ty bet ween
t er mi nal 08 and passenger ' s
An open or hi gh r esi st ance in t he wi r e 08 GRN Passenger ' s
under -dash
f use/r el ay box
connect or A (38P)
di sconnect ed
Chec k f or conti nui ty to gr ound:
A short in t he wi r e
(cont' d)
22-227
Exteri or Li ght s
MICU Input Test (cont' d)
5. Rec onnec t t he c onnec t or s to t he dr i ver ' s under -dash f use/r el ay box, and do t hese i nput t est s at t he f ol l owi ng
connect or .
obt ai ned
Q1 BLK In all i gni ti on
t he gr ound wi r e
wi r e
02 BRN In all i gni ti on
t he gr ound wi r e
wi r e
R2 BRN In all i gni ti on
t he gr ound wi r e
wi r e
R5 BLK In ai l i gni ti on
t he gr ound wi r e
wi r e
B1 BL U Under all
condi t i ons
Bl own No. 3-3 (AS L T MAIN) (30 A)
f use in t he under -hood f use/r el ay
box
f use/r el ay box
wi r e
Faul t y dr i ver ' s door swi t c h
wi r e
D12 BRN
Dr i ver ' s door
c l osed
Faul t y dr i ver ' s door swi t c h gr ound
F11 WHT Under all
condi t i ons
wi r e
F17 BL U Under all
condi t i ons
mBl own No. 3-3 (AS LT MAIN) (30 A)
box
o An open or hi gh r esi st ance i n t he
wi r e
F19 BL K /
RED
Under all
condi t i ons
mBl own No. 3-5 (DR L T MAIN) (30 A)
box
9 An open or hi gh r esi st ance i n t he
wi r e
Q18 WHT Igni ti on key
i nser t ed i nto t he
i gni t i on swi t c h
Faul t y i gni ti on key swi t c h
wi r e
t he gr ound wi r e
Q18 WHT
Igni ti on key
r emoved f r om t he
i gni t i on swi t c h
22-228
Cavi t y Wi r e Test condi t i on Test : Desi r ed r esul t Possi bl e c ause if r esul t i s not
obt ai ned
R6
R3
RED
BLK
Combi nat i on li ght
swi t ch OFF
Measur e t he vol t age bet ween
t er mi nal s R6 and R3:
Faul t y combi nat i on li ght swi t ch
o An open or hi gh r esi st anc e i n t he
wi r e
R6
R3
RED
BLK
Combi nat i on light
swi t ch in any ot her
posi t i on t han OFF
R7
R3
GRY
BLK
Combi nat i on light
swi t ch (Parki ng
Li ght posi t i on) ON
Measur e the vol t age bet ween
o Faul t y combi nat i on li ght swi t ch
An open or hi gh r esi st anc e in t he
wi r e
R7
R3
GRY
BLK
swi t ch OFF
R8
R3
BRN
BLK
swi t ch (headli ght)
ON
o aul t y combi nat i on li ght swi t ch
o An open or hi gh r esi st anc e in t he
wi r e
R8
R3
BRN
BLK
swi t ch OFF
Measur e the vol t age bet ween
R21
R3
GRN
BLK
swi t ch l ever pul l ed
(Passi ng)
An open or hi gh r esi st anc e i n t he
wi r e
R21
R3
GRN
BLK
swi t ch l ever
r el eased (OFF)
R22
R3
L T
BL U
BLK
swi t ch (Di mmer) in
hi gh beam
posi t i on
mFaul t y combi nat i on li ght swi t ch
* An open or hi gh r esi st ance in t he
wi r e
R22
R3
L T
BL U
BLK
swi t ch (Di mmer) i n
l ow beam posi t i on
(cont' d)
22-229
Exteri or Li ght s
Passenger ' s MICU
6. Tur n t he i gni t i on swi t c h to L OCK (0), and r emove t he passenger ' s ki ck panel .
7. Di sc onnec t passenger ' s under -dash f use/r el ay box c onnec t or s A and E.
JZt
CONNECTOR A (38P)
BL U GRN
8 9
I
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
20
I
28
29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38
J
I
BL K * BL K
CONNECTOR E (18P)
ORN
/
2
/
5 6 7 8
9
10
/
12 13
/
15 16
/ /
BRN BL K
*: '08-09 models
8. Wi t h t he c onnec t or s sti ll di sc onnec t ed, do t hese i nput t est s at t he f ol l owi ng c onnec t or s.
obt ai ned
A8 BL U Under all
condi t i ons
Bl own No. 3-3 (AS L T MAIN) (30 A)
box
f use/r el ay box
An open or hi gh r esi st ance in t he
wi r e
A17 GRN Under all
condi t i ons
Chec k f or cont i nui t y bet ween A17
t er mi nal and dr i ver ' s under -dash
f use/r el ay box connect or Q (20P)
t er mi nal No. 8:
E2 ORN Under all
condi t i ons
Connec t t er mi nal s A8 and E2 wi t h
a j umper wi r e:
The ri ght headl i ght (hi gh beam)
shoul d c ome on.
Bl own bul b
Poor gr ound (G203
# 1
or G203*
2
) or
an open i n t he gr ound wi r e
wi r e
E10 BRN Under all
condi t i ons
Connec t t er mi nal s A8 and E10
wi t h a j umper wi r e:
The ri ght headl i ght (l ow beam)
shoul d c ome on.
Bl own bul b
t he gr ound wi r e
wi r e
E12 GRY Under all
condi t i ons
Connec t t er mi nal s A8 and E12
The ri ght f ront parki ng li ght and
t he ri ght f ront si de mar ker li ght '
shoul d c ome on.
< Bl own bul b
t he gr ound wi r e
wi r e
*1: Wi t h aut omat i c li ghti ng
*2: Wi t hout aut omat i c li ghti ng
22-230
9. Reconnect the c onnec t or s to t he passenger ' s under -dash f use/r el ay box, and do t hese i nput t est s at t he f ol l owi ng
connect or .
If any t est i ndi cat es pr obl em, f i nd and cor r ect t he c aus e, t hen r echeck t he syst em.
If all i nput t est s pr ove OK, go to st ep 10.
Cavi t y W i re Tes t condi t i on Test : Desi r ed r esul t Possi bl e c aus e if r esul t i s not
obt ai ned
A14 WHT Igni ti on swi t ch ON
(II)
under -good f use/r el ay box
f use/r el ay box
A35 BRN Igni ti on swi t ch ON
(II)
under -good f use/r el ay box
f use/r el ay box
wi r e
t he gr ound wi r e
wi r e
t he gr ound wi r e
9 An open or hi gh r esi st ance in t he
wi r e
A36* BLK In al l i gni ti on
t he gr ound wi r e
9 An open or hi gh r esi st anc e in t he
wi r e
t he gr ound wi r e
wi r e '
* : ' 08-09 model s
If i nput f ai l ur es ar e rel at ed to a part i cul ar cont rol uni t , r epl ace t he cont rol uni t.
22-231
Exteri or Li ght s
Combi nat i on Li ght Swi t c h Test /Repl ac ement
1. Remove t he dr i ver ' s dashboar d l ower c over (see page 20-166).
2. Remove t he st eer i ng c ol umn c over s (see page 17-10).
3. Di sconnect t he 12P connect or (A) f r om t he combi nat i on li ght swi t ch (B).
1
u
9
4
~~L
6
/
/
9 10 11 12
4. Remove t he t wo s c r ews , t hen sl i de out t he combi nat i on li ght swi t c h.
5. Inspect t he connect or t er mi nal s to be sur e t hey ar e all maki ng good cont act .
If t he t er mi nal s ar e bent , l oose or c or r oded, repai r t hem as nec essar y, and r echeck t he syst em.
If t he t er mi nal s look OK , check f or cont i nui t y bet ween t he t er mi nal s i n eac h swi t ch posi t i on accor di ng to t he t abl es.
Li ght s wi t c h
Ter mi nal
Posi t i on
10
11
12
Headl i ght
switch
OFF o
-:oo:
o-
sD
LOW
o - O
HIGH
O
=0"
= Q L
Passi ng
s wi t c h
OFF
ON
o
Turn si gnal s wi t c h
Terminal
Posi t i on
L EFT
Neut r al
RIGHT
o-
12
o
6. If t he cont i nui t y i s not as spec i f i ed, r epl ace t he swi t c h.
22-232
Headli ght Adj ust ment
Headl i ght s bec ome ver y hot dur i ng use; do not t ouch
t hem or any at t achi ng har dwar e i mmedi at el y after
t hey have been t ur ned off.
Bef ore adj ust i ng t he headl i ght s:
Park t he vehi c l e on a l evel sur f ac e.
e Make sur e t he ti re pr essur es ar e cor r ect .
The dr i ver or someone who wei ghs t he s ame shoul d
si t i n t he dr i ver ' s seat (or an equi val ent amont of
wei ght ).
1. Cl ean t he out er l ens s o that you c an see t he cent er (A)
of t he headl i ght s.
2. Park t he vehi c l e in front of a wal l or a sc r een (A).
J J B ft ( 7 Mm)
3. Tur n t he l ow beams on.
4. Det er mi ne if t he headl i ght s ar e ai med properl y.
Ver t i cal adj ust ment :
Measur e t he hei ght of t he headl i ght s (A).
Adj ust t he upper edge of t he cut li ne (B) to t he
headl i ght s' hei ght .
(cont' d)
22-233
Exteri or Li ght s
Headli ght Adj ust ment (cont' d)
5. If nec essar y, open t he hood and adj ust t he headl i ght s
by t ur ni ng t he ver t i cal adj ust er (A).
NOTE: The Ft and L adj ust er s ar e not appl i cabl e f or
US A model s. The headl i ght s c an onl y be adj ust ed up
and down.
4 -door:
2-door:
22-234
Headli ght Repl acement
4-door
1. Remove t he par t s shown.
Upper f ender t ri m (see page 20-277)
Front bumper (see page 20-255)
Front bumper absor ber (see page 20-255)
2. Remove t he t hr ee bol t s, and pull t he headl i ght (A) out
sl i ght l y.
3. Remove t he har ness cl i p (B) f r om t he headl i ght
housi ng, and di sc onnec t t he connect or s (C) f r om t he
bul b soc ket s.
4. Remove t he headl i ght wi t h t he cor ner upper beam
(D).
NOTE: Be car ef ul not t o scr at ch t he headl i ght l ens and
t he f ender .
5. Remove t he t wo bolts (E) and t he cor ner upper beam
f r om t he headl i ght
6. Install t he headl i ght in t he r ever se or der of r emoval .
7. After r epl acement , adj ust t he headl i ght (see page
22-233).
2-door
1. Remove t he part s shown.
Upper f ender tri m (see page 20-277)
9 Front bumper (see page 20-255)
Front bumper absor ber (see page 20-255)
2. Remove t he t hr ee bol t s, and pull t he headl i ght (A) out
sl i ght l y.
3. Remove t he har ness cl i p (B) f r om t he headl i ght
housi ng, and di sconnect t he connect or s (C) f r om t he
bul b socket s.
4. Remove t he headl i ght wi t h t he cor ner upper beam
(D).
NOTE: Be car ef ul not to scr at ch t he headl i ght l ens and
t he f ender .
5. Remove t he t wo bolts (E) and t he cor ner upper beam
f r om t he headl i ght
6. Inst al l t he headl i ght in t he r ever se or der of r emoval .
7. After r epl acement , adj ust t he headl i ght (see page
22-233).
22-235
Exteri or Li ght s
Bulb Repl acement
Headl i ght (Hi gh' Beam)
1. Di sconnect t he 2P connect or (A) f r om t he headl i ght
Headl i ght ( Hi gh Beam): 60 W
2. Tur n t he bul b socket 45 count er cl ockwi se to r emove
t he bul b.
3. Install a new bul b i n t he r ever se or der of r emoval .
Headl i ght (Low Beam)
1. Remove t he i nner f ender (see page 20-290).
2. Di sc onnec t t he 2P connect or (A) f r om t he headl i ght .
Headl i ght (L ow Beam):
51 W (4-door)
55 W (2-door)
t he bul b.
4. Inst al l a new bul b i n t he r ever se or der of r emoval .
22-236
Front Tur n Si gnal /Par ki ng Li ght s
1. Di sconnect t he 3P connect or (A) f r om t he front turn
si gnal /par ki ng l i ght s.
Fr ont Tur n Si gnal /Par ki ng Li ght s:
21/ 5 W (4-door)
24/2.2 CP (2-door)
NOTE: The i l l ust rat i on s hows 4-door.
t he bul b.
3. Install a new bul b i n t he r ever se or der of r emoval .
Fr ont Si de Marker Li ght
1. Remove t he i nner f ender (see page 20-290).
2. Di sconnect t he 2P c onnec t or (A) f r om t he front si de
mar ker li ght.
Fr ont Si de Mar ker Li ght : 3 CP
3. Tur n t he bulb socket 45 count er cl ockwi se to r emove
t he bul b.
4. Inst al l a new bul b in t he r ever se or der of r emoval .
(cont ' d)
22-237
Ex t er i or L i ght s
Bulb Repl acement (cont' d)
Tai l l i ght s (4-door )
1. Open t he t runk l i d, and r emove t he t runk si de t ri m
panel (see page 20-132).
2. Di sc onnec t t he c onnec t or s f r om t he l i ght s.
Br ake L i g h t s / Tai I I i g h t s : 21/ 5 W
Rear Tur n Si gnal Li ght ; 21 W
Bac k-up l i ght : 21 W
t he bul b.
4. Install new bul b(s) in t he r ever se or der of r emoval .
Tai l l i ght s (2-door)
1. Open t he t runk l i d, and r emove t he t runk si de t ri m
2. Di sc onnec t t he c onnec t or s f r om t he l i ght s.
Br ake Li ght s/Tai l l i ght s: 21/5 W
Rear Tur n Si gnal Li ght : 21 W
Bac k-up Li ght : 21 W
i i
t he bul b.
4. Install new bul b(s) i n t he r ever se or der of r emoval .
Tai lli ght Replacement
4-door
1 Remove t he r ear bumper (see page 20-260).
2. Remove t he t runk si de tri m panel (see page 20-132).
3. Di sconnect t he connect or s (A) f r om t he t ai l l i ght s (B).
4. Tur n t he bul b socket s 45 count er cl ockwi se to
r emove t he bul b socket s (C).
5. Remove t he mount i ng nuts and bol t s, t hen r emove
t he tai lli ght.
6. Remove t he s c r ew and separ at e t he tai lli ght and
bracket (D).
7. Inspect t he gasket (E); r epl ace it if it i s di st ort ed or
st ays c ompr essed.
8. Inst al l t he t ai l l i ght in t he r ever se or der of r emoval , and
t i ght en t he nut s to 5 N-m (0.5 k gf m, 4 Ibf-ft).
2-door
1. Remove t he rear bumper (see page 20-260).
2. Remove t he t runk si de t ri m panel (see page 20-132).
3. Di sc onnec t t he connect or s (A) f r om t he t ai l l i ght s (B).
4. Tur n t he bul b socket s 45 count er cl ockwi se to
r emove t he bul b socket s (C).
5. Remove t he mount i ng nut s and bol t s, t hen r emove
t he t ai lli ght .
6. Remove t he s c r ew and separ at e t he tai lli ght and
bracket (D).
7. Inspect t he gasket (E); r epl ace it if it i s di st ort ed or
st ays c ompr essed.
8. Inst al l t he tai lli ght i n t he r ever se or der of r emoval , and
t i ght en t he nut s to 5 N-m (0.5 kgf -m, 4 Ibf-ft).
Exteri or Li ght s
Li cense Plate Li ght Repl acement
4-door
1. Pol l t he l i cense pl at e li ght as s embl y out , and
di sc onnec t t he 2P c onnec t or (A) f r om t he l i c ense pl at e
li ght.
L i c ense Pl at e Li ght : I f
2. Separ at e t he l ens (B) and housi ng (C), t hen r emove
t he bul b.
3. Inst al l t he li ght i n t he r ever se or der of r emov al
2-door
1. Remove t he l i cense plate li ght (A), and di sc onnec t t he
2P connect or (B) f r om t he l i cense plate li ght.
L i c ense Pl at e Li ght : 5 W
2. Separ at e t he l ens (C) and housi ng (D), t hen r emove
t he bul b.
3. Inst al l t he li ght in t he r ever se or der of r emoval .
22240
High Mount Brake Light
Replacement
1. Open t he trunk l i d.
2. Di sconnect t he 2P connect or (A) f r om t he hi gh mount
brake li ght.
Hi gh Mount Br ake Li ght : 21 W
Brake Pedal Position Switch T<
3. Tur n t he bul b socket (B) 45 count er cl ockwi se to
r emove t he bul b (C).
5. Remove t he hi gh mount brake li ght (A).
A
6. Install t he li ght i n t he r ever se or der of r emoval .
1. Di sconnect t he 4P connect or (A) f r om t he brake pedal
posi t i on swi t c h (B).
2. Chec k for cont i nui t y bet ween t er mi nal s No. 1 and No.
2.
Ther e shoul d be cont i nui t y when t he brake pedal i s
pr essed.
Ther e shoul d be no cont i nui t y when t he brake pedal
i s r el eased.
3. Chec k f or cont i nui t y bet ween t er mi nal s No. 3 and No.
4.
Ther e shoul d be no cont i nui t y when t he brake pedal
i s pr essed.
Ther e shoul d be cont i nui t y when t he brake pedal i s
r el eased.
4. If t he t est r esul t ar e not as spec i f i ed, adj ust or r epl ace
t he swi t c h, or adj ust t he pedal hei ght (see page 19-6).
If t he r esul t s ar e sti ll not as spec i f i ed, r epl ace t he
swi t c h.
22-241
Turn Si gnal /Hazard Warni ng Li ght s
TURN SIGNAL SWITCH
(Bui l t i nt o t he c ombi nat i on l i ght swi t c h)
DRIVER'S MICU
Replacement:
Canada models, .page 22-87
22-242
r"---US
I - -r i
j BODY I
22-243
Turn Si gnal /Hazar d Warni ng Li ght s
Ci rcui t Di agram
D R I V E R ' S
U N D E R - D A S H
B A T T E R Y
0-
No. 1-1 (MAIN) ( 1 0 0 A) No. 3-1 (IG MAIN) ( 5 0 A)
F16 C 1
I G N I T I O N S W I T C H
/ B A T A
- W H T K ) CH B L U
I G1 H O T i n O N (II)
and S T A R T (III)
F 6 F 2
E 6 E 1 H 1 0
D R I V E R ' S
J U N C T I O N
B O X 1
G R N G R N G R N G R N
@
T U R N S I G N A L
I N D I C A T O R
L E F T R E A R
T U R N S I G N A L
L I G H T
( 21 W)
@
O P T I O N
C O N N E C T O R
(f or t r ai l er )
L E F T F R O N T
T U R N S I G N A L
L I G H T
( 21 W)
[ 2 4 C P ]
R I G H T F R O N T
T U R N S I G N A L
L I G H T
( 21 W )
[ 2 4 C P ]
R I G H T R E A R
T U R N S I G N A L
L I G H T
( 21 W )
J L L
G602 G 3 0 2 G 2 0 1 G 6 0 2
22-244
eomrj
[ ] : 2-door
DRI VE R' S UNDE R- DAS H F US E / RE L A Y B OX
DRI VER' S MI CU
PG PG S G S G
Q1 R5 02 R2
B L K BL K BRN BRN
j Q- -L -LL X L
G502 G502 G501 G501
R13 R14
- WH T
No. 6 (7.5 A) F US E
( PA S S E NGE R' S
UNDE R- DA S H
GRN
BL K L T GRN BRN
L E FT 1 RI GHT
TURN
S I GNA L
S WI TCH
DAS HL I GHTS
B RI GHTNE S S
CONTROL L E R
(In t he g aug e
c ont r ol modul e)
22-245
DTC B1280: Tur n Si gnal Swi t ch Ci rcui t
Malfuncti on
ON (II).
3. Oper at e t he t urn si gnal swi t c h in left and ri ght
posi t i ons, and wai t f or at l east 6 sec onds.
YE S - Go to step 5,
5. Sel ec t LIGHTING f r omt he BODY EL ECTRI CAL syst em
sel ect menu, t hen ent er t he DATA L IST.
6. Chec k eac h t urn si gnal swi t ch posi t i on val ue wi t h t he
DATA L IST menu.
When t he t ur n si gnal s wi t c h i s i n left posi t i on
Dat a Li st Val ue
Tur n Si gnal Swi t c h (LEFT) ON
Tur n Si gnal Swi t c h (RIGHT) OFF
When t he t ur n si gnal s wi t c h i s i n ri ght posi t i on
Dat a Li st Val ue
Tur n Si gnal Swi t c h (LEFT) OFF
Tur n Si gnal Swi t c h (RIGHT) ON
Are ail dat a list values correct ?
NO- Go to st ep 7.
8. Di sc onnec t t he combi nat i on li ght swi t ch 12P
connect or .
connect or R (24P).
DR I V E R ' S U N D E R - D A S H F U S E / R E L A Y B O X
C O N N E C T O R R (24P )
LEF T
( L T G R N
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
A
10
/
13 14 15 16 17 18
/ /
21 22
R I G H T ( B R N)
YES - Repai r a shor t to gr ound in t he wi r e. i l
NO- Go to st ep 11.
f use/r el ay box connect or R (24P) t er mi nal s No. 13 and
No. 14.
DR I V E R ' S U N D E R - D A S H F U S E / R E L A Y B O X
C O N N E C T O R R (24P )
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
/
10
/ /
13 14 15 16 17 18
/ /
21 22
/ /
L E F T
( L T G R N )
R I G H T ( B R N )
YES - Repai r a shor t bet ween t he w i r e s . !
NO-Repl ac e t he combi nat i on li ght swi t c h (see page
22-232).H
22-246
MICU Input Test
NOTE:
Bef ore t est i ng, t r oubl eshoot t he mul t i pl ex i nt egrat ed cont rol uni t f i r st , usi ng B-CAN Syst em Di agnosi s Test Mode A
(see page 22-134).
Bef ore t est i ng, make sur e t he No. 5 (7.5 A) f use i n t he dr i ver ' s under -dash f use/r el ay box i s OK.
Dr i ver ' s MSCU
1. Tur n t he i gni t i on swi t ch to LOCK (0), and r emove t he dr i ver ' s dashboar d l ower c over (see page 20-166).
2. Di sc onnec t dr i ver ' s under -dash f use/r el ay box connect or s D, F, N, P, Q, and R.
CONNECTOR D (1SP)
G I N
1 2
3 4 5 6 7
8
9 10
11 12 13 14 15
16
\
BL U
BL U
CONNECTOR F (33P)
WHT
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
31 32
15 16 17 18
19
33
mm
CONNECTOR N (16P)
WH T
1 2
i.
7
/
9 10
/
12
/
14
/
CONNECTOR P (20P)
GRN
3 4
J
5
6 7
L
8 9 10
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
11
BL U
CONNECTOR Q (20P)
BL K BRN
=1
CONNECTOR R (24P)
BRN BL K BL K
13 14 15 16 17 18
\
L TGRN BRN
10
22
12
(cont' d)
22-247
4. Wi t h t he connect or s sti ll di sc onnec t ed, do t hese i nput t est s at t he appropri at e f ol l owi ng connect or .
If any t est i ndi cat es a pr obl em, f i nd and cor r ect t he c aus e, t hen r echeck t he syst em,
Cavity
Wi r e Tes t condi t i on Test : Desi r ed r esul t Possi bl e c ause if desi r ed r esul t i s not
obt ai ned
F11 WHT Under all
condi t i ons
wi r e
F32 WHT Under all
condi t i ons
wi r e
D7 GRN Under all
condi t i ons
Connec t t er mi nal s F32 and D7
The ri ght r ear t urn si gnal li ght
shoul d c ome on.
Poor gr ound (G602) or an open i n '
t he gr ound wi r e
Bl own bulb
wi r e
D13 BL U Under all
condi t i ons
Connec t t er mi nal s F32 and D13
The left rear t urn si gnal li ght
shoul d c ome on.
t he gr ound wi r e
Bl own bul b
9 An open or hi gh r esi st anc e i n t he
wi r e
F1 BL U Under all
condi t i ons
Connec t t er mi nal s F32 and Fl
The left front t urn si gnal li ght
shoul d c ome on.
t he gr ound wi r e
Bl own bulb
wi r e
P3 GRN Under all
condi t i ons
Connec t t er mi nal s F32 and P3
The ri ght f ront t urn si gnal li ght
and t he ri ght t urn si gnal
i ndi cat or shoul d c ome on.
e Poor gr ound (G201) or an open i n
t he gr ound wi r e
Bl own bul b
Faul t y i ndi cat or
o An open or hi gh r esi st anc e i n t he
wi r e
P14 BL U Under all
condi t i ons
Connec t t er mi nal s F32 and P14
The left t urn si gnal i ndi cat or
shoul d c ome on.
Faul t y i ndi cat or
9 An open or hi gh r esi st anc e in t he
wi r e
t he gr ound wi r e
5. Rec onnec t t he c onnec t or s to t he dr i ver ' s under -dash f use/r el ay box, and make t hese i nput t est s at t he c onnec t or s.
22-248
If all t he i nput t est s pr ove OK, t he dr i ver ' s MICU must be f aul t y; r epl ace t he dr i ver ' s under -dash f use/r el ay box:
- US A model s (see page 22-86)
- Canada model s (see page 22-87)
Cavi t y
Wi r e Tes t condi t i on Test : Desi r ed r esul t Possi bl e c aus e if desi r ed r esul t i s not
obt ai ned
Q1 BLK In all i gni ti on
swi t ch posi t i ons
t he gr ound wi r e
wi r e
0 2 BRN In all i gni ti on
t he gr ound wi r e
wi r e
t he gr ound wi r e
wi r e
t he gr ound wi r e
wi r e
N7 WHT Under all
condi t i ons
f use/r el ay box
A shor t t o gr ound i n t he wi r e
Q17 GRN Hazard war ni ng
swi t ch pr essed
Faul t y hazar d war ni ng swi t ch
wi r e
R13
R3
LT
GRN
BLK
Igni ti on swi t ch ON
(II), t urn si gnal
swi t ch in left
posi t i on
wi r e
R13
R3
LT
GRN
BLK
(II), turn si gnal
swi t ch in ri ght or
neut ral posi t i on
R14
R3
BRN
BLK
(II), turn si gnal
swi t ch in ri ght
posi t i on
o ~eulty combi nat i on li ght swi t ch
wi r e
R14
R3
BRN
BLK
(II), turn si gnal
swi t ch in left or
neut ral posi t i on
22-249
Hazard Warni ng Swi t c h Test /Repl ac ement
Cent er vent f or with navi gat i on syst em (see page
20-178)
Audi o uni t f or wi t hout navi gat i on syst em (see page
23- 115)
2. Remove t he hazar d war ni ng swi t ch (A).
3. Chec k for cont i nui t y bet ween t he t er mi nal s in eac h
swi t c h posi t i on accor di ng to t he t abl e.
NOTE: Make sur e t he cor r ect t est l ead (+ or ) i s
pl aced on t he t er mi nal .
\ y Terminal
Position \ s
1 - 2 4 3
OF F
-
- e
ON
o - - O -
4. If t he cont i nui t y i s not as spec i f i ed, r epl ace t he hazar d
war ni ng swi t c h.
Interior Li ghts
4-door
INDIVIDUAL MAP L I GHTS (Wi t h moonr oof )
INDIVIDUAL MAP L I GHTS (Wi t hout moonr oof )
INTERIOR LIGHT S WI TCH (Bui l t i nt o t he moonr oof swi t c h)
AMBI ENT L IGHT (Wi t h moonr oof )
> CEI L I NG L IGHT (Wi t hout moonr oof )
FRONT PA S S E NGE R' S DOOR SWI TCH
r CEI L I NG L IGHT (Wi t h moonr oof )
RIGHT REAR DOOR SWI TCH
DRI VER' S DOOR SWITCH
DRI VER' S DOOR COURTE S Y L IGHT
TRUNK LID
L ATCH SWI TCH
Test, page 22-262
DOOR COURTE S Y L IGHT
L E FT REAR DOOR S WI TCH
TRUNK LIGHT
(cont'd)
22-251
Interior Li ght s
DRI VER' S VANI TY
MIRROR L I GHTS
PA S S E NGE R' S VANI TY
MIRROR L I GHTS
DRI VER' S MICU
Replacement:
(Built into the passenger's
under-dash f use/ r el ay box)
22-252
^ mm
2-door
INDIVIDUAL MAP L I GHTS (Wi t h moonr oof )
INDIVIDUAL MAP L I GHTS (Wi t hout moonr oof )
Test/Replacement page 22-258
INTERIOR LIGHT SWI TCH (Bui l t i nt o t he moonr oof swi t c h)
AMBI ENT LIGHT (Wi t h moonr oof )
CEIL ING LIGHT (Wi t hout moonr oof )
CEI L I NG LIGHT (Wi t h moonr oof )
TRUNK LIGHT
TRUNK LID
L ATCH SWI TCH
Test, page 22-262
DRI VER' S DOOR SWI TCH
PAS S E NGE R' S DOOR SWI TCH
(c ont ' d)
22-253
Interior Lights
, DRIVER'S VANITY
MIRROR LIGHTS
DRIVER'S MICU
(Bui l t i nt o t he dr i ver 's under-dash f use/ r el ay box)
Replacement:
PASSENGER'S MICU
(Built into the passenger's
under -dash fuse/relay box)
22-254
22-255
Interior Li ght s
Circuit Diagram
B A TTE RY
No. 1-1 (MAIN) ( 1 0 0 A) No. 16(7.5 A)
No. 15 (10 A)
- GRN
- W H T -
DRIVER'S
UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY BOX
F 29 D3
F 11 P 9
P19
- GRN -
- WHT -
GRN , N D | v i D U A L
1 MAP LIGHTS
o
No. 6 (7.5 A) F USE
(PASSENGER'S
UNDER-DASH
F USE/RELAY B OX)
Y
GRY
f
1
ORN
J 7
B 2
AMB I E NT
LIGHT
(LED)
DRIVER'S
JUNCTION
BOX 2
UHN
<7
DASHLIGHTS
BRIGHTNESS
CONTROLLER
(In the gauge
| control module)
GRN
INDIVIDUAL
1 MAP LIGHTS
GRN
9
J
OFF
f DOOR
INTERIOR 17
LIGHT P N K
SWITCH ,
(In the L_
moonroof
switch)
BLK
BRN
1
G501
CENTER
JUNCTIC N
BOX
.J
PNK
DRIVER'S MICU
(DRIVER'S
UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY BOX)
G R N
OPEN
CLOSE
G R N
B1
G R N
2 D R I V E R ' S
V A N I T Y MI R R O R
L I G H T
(1. 1 Wx 2 )
| \ O P E N \y
C L O S E I G N I T I O N
K E Y L I G H T
2 P A S S E N G E R ' S
V A N I T Y MI R R O R
L I G H T
(1.1 W x 2 )
-Q-
G 5 0 1
No. 6 ( 7. 5 A) FUSE
(PASSENGER' S
UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY B O X )
( ' 0 8 - 0 9 models)
22-256
WHT
F8
DRIVER'S
JUNCTION
B0X1
G6
WHT
CEILING
LIGHT
DRIVER'S I
UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY BOX P4
DRIVER'S MICU
D12
1 DRIVER'S
h DOOR
V SWITCH
(Closed:
Door open)
WHT
2
DRIVER'S
DOOR
1 COURTESY
LIGHT
PNK (2 CP)
H4
CENTER
JUNCTION
BOX
B4
PNK
D4
H6 | H7
F3
P6
*1: Wi t h moonr oof
*2: Wi t hout moonr oof
* 3: L X, L X PZEV, L X- P, and L X- P PZEV
* 4: Ex c ept L X, L X PZEV, L X- P, and L X- P PZEV
- - : B-CAN l i ne
GRN
BLU
I P5
WHT
B-CAN B-CAN
HI LO
D5
WHT
PASSENGER' S
UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY BOX
PASSENGER' S MICU
B-CAN B-CAN
HI L O
f_
G1 5 *
3
G14*
H3*
4
H 25*'
1 TRUNK LID
h LATCH
$y SWITCH
2 (Closed:
Trunk lid open)
BLK
i
G602
1 FRONT
h PA S S E NGE R' S
V DOOR
S WI TCH
(Cl osed:
Door open)
WHT
2
FRONT
PA S S E NGE R' S
DOOR
COURTE S Y
L I GHT
( 2 CP)
YE L
A33
1 RI GHT REAR
h DOOR
V S WI TCH
(Cl os ed:
Door open)
(4-door) (4-door )
22-257
interior Li ghts
Front Indi vi dual Map Li ght Test/Repl ac ement
Wi t h moonroof
1. Tur n the map light switch OF F .
2. Car ef ul l y pry t he l ens ( A ) off wi t h a smal l sc r ewdr i ver .
Individual Map Light: 8 Wx 2
3. Remove the screws, then remove the individual map
lights (B).
4. Disconnect the connectors (C) from the map lights.
5. Check for continuity between the terminals in each
switch position according to the table.
V
Terminal
Position
RIGHT
LEFT
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
O
o
o
o
-@-
o
-o
6. If the continuity is not as specified, check the bulb(s). If
the bulb(s) are OK , replace the map light.
7. Install the light in the reverse order of removal.
Wi t hout moonroof
1. Turn the map light switch OF F .
2. Carefully pry the lens (A) off with a small screwdriver.
Individual Map Light: 8 Wx 2
3. Remove the screws, then remove the individual map
lights (B).
4. Disconnect the connector (C) from the map lights.
5. Check for continuity between the terminals.
There should be continuity between terminals No. 1
and No. 2 with the switch in the ON position.
There should be no continuity between terminals
No. 1 and No. 2 with the switch in the OFF position.
6. If the continuity is not as specified, check the bulb. If
the bulb is OK , replace the map light.
7. Install the light in the reverse order of removal.
22-258
Cei li ng Li ght Test /Repl acement
1. Tur n t he cel l i ng li ght swi t ch OFF.
2. Car ef ul l y pry t he l ens (A) off wi t h asmal l scr ewdr i ver .
Cel l i ng L i g h t 8 W
3. Remove t he s c r ews , t hen r emove t he cei l i ng li ght (B).
4. Di sconnect t he 3P connect or (C) f r om t he cei l i ng li ght.
and No. 2 wi t h t he swi t ch i n t he MIDDLE posi t i on.
and No. 3 (body gr ound) wi t h t he swi t ch in t he ON
posi t i on.
No. 1 and No. 2, and bet ween t er mi nal s No. 2 and
No. 3 (body gr ound) wi t h t he swi t c h i n t he OFF
posi t i on.
6. If t he cont i nui t y i s not as spec i f i ed, check t he bul b. If
t he bul b i s OK, r epl ace t he cei l i ng li ght.
Trunk Li ght Test /Repl ac ement
1. Open t he t runk l i d.
2. Car ef ul l y pry out t he trunk li ght (A).
Tr unk Li ght : 5 W
(+) (-)
3. Di sc onnec t t he 2P connect or (B) f r om t he trunk li ght.
4. Chec k for cont i nui t y bet ween t er mi nal s No. 1 ( +) and
No. 2 (). Ther e shoul d be cont i nui t y. If t here i s no
cont i nui t y, c hec k t he bul b. If t he bul b i s OK, r epl ace
t he t runk li ght assembl y.
7. Install t he li ght in t he r ever se or der of r emoval .
22-259
Interior Li ght s
Interior Light Switch
Test/Replacement
Wi t h moonroof
NOTE: The Int eri or li ght swi t c h is built into t he moonroof
swi t c h, and it swi t c hes t he front i ndi vi dual map li ght OFF
and DOOR posi t i ons.
1. Remove t he f ront i ndi vi dual map l i ght s (see page
22-258).
2. Di sc onnec t t he moonr oof swi t ch 12P connect or (A)
and t he map li ght 3P connect or (B).
3. Remove the moonroof switch (C) from the map light
housi ng.
4. At the moonroof switch 12P connector, check for
continuity between terminals No. 9 and No. 7.
Ther e shoul d be cont i nui t y when t he i nt eri or li ght
swi t c h i s i n t he DOOR posi t i on.
Ther e shoul d be no cont i nui t y when t he i nt eri or
li ght swi t c h i s in t he OFF posi t i on.
5. If t he cont i nui t y i s not as spec i f i ed, r epl ace t he
moonr oof swi t c h assembl y.
Ambient Light Replacement
Wi t h moonroof
NOTE: The ambi ent li ght i s bui lt into t he moonr oof
swi t c h.
1. Remove t he front i ndi vi dual map l i ght s (see page
22-258).
2. Di sc onnec t t he moonr oof swi t ch 12P connect or (A)
and t he map light 3P connect or (B).
n
1 2 | 3 | 4 | 5
\7 ] S T 9 |10|Tl|T2
3. Remove t he moonr oof swi t ch (C) f r om t he map li ght
housi ng.
4. At t he moonr oof swi t ch 12P connect or , check t he li ght
by connect i ng battery power to t er mi nal No. 3 and
gr ound to t ermi nal No. 1. The ambi ent li ght shoul d
c ome on. If t he light does not c ome on, r epl ace t he
moonr oof swi t ch assembl y.
2 2 - 2 6 0
Court esy Li ght Repl acement Glow BOM Li ght Repl acement
1 Caref ul l y pry off t he l ens (A) wi t h a smal l sc r ewdr i ver .
Cour t esy Li ght : 2 CP
2. Remove t he bul b (B) f rom t he socket .
"08-09 model s
1. Remove t he gl ove box st ops and damper (see page
20-174).
2. Tur n t he bul b socket (A) 45 c ount er c l oc kwi se to
r emove it.
Gl ove Box Li ght : 2 CP
3. Remove t he bul b (B) f r om t he socket .
4. Inst al l t he li ght i n t he r ever se or der of r emoval .
22- 261
interior Li ghts
Vanity Mirror Li ght
Test /Repl acement
1. Remove t he sunvi sor (see page 20-135).
2. Di sconnect t he 2P connect or (A) f r om t he sunvi sor (B).
Vani t y Mi r r or Li ght : 1.1 W x 2
3. Check f or cont i nui t y bet ween t er mi nal s No. 1 and No.
2.
Wi t h t he vani t y mi rror c over (C) opened, t here
shoul d be cont i nui t y.
Wi t h t he vani t y mi r r or c over c l osed, t her e shoul d be
no cont i nui t y.
4. If t he cont i nui t y i s not as spec i f i ed, check t he bul bs
(D). If t he bul bs ar e OK t he vani t y mi rror li ght i s f aul t y;
r epl ace t he sunvi sor (see page 20-135).
Trunk Lid Latch Switch Test
1. Open t he trunk l i d.
2. Di sc onnec t t he 3P connect or (A) f rom t he t runk lid
l at ch assembl y (B).
3. Chec k f or cont i nui t y bet ween t er mi nal s No. 1 and No.
2.
Ther e shoul d be cont i nui t y wi t h t he trunk lid open.
Ther e shoul d be no cont i nui t y wi t h t he trunk lid
c l osed.
4. If t he cont i nui t y i s not as spec i f i ed, r epl ace t he trunk
li d latch assembl y.
22- 262
Entry Li ght s Control Syst em
4- d o o r wi t h moonr oof
r DRI VE R' S M I CU
(Built Into the dr i ver ' s
under-dash fuse/relay box)
Replacement
INDIVIDUAL MAP L I GHTS
INTERIOR LIGHT SWI TCH
(Bui l t Int o t he moonr oof swi t c h)
(Bui l t Int o t he passenger ' s
Input Test page 22-270
CEIL ING LIGHT
DOOR SWI TCH
DO O R MU L TI PL E X
CONTROL UNIT
(Bui l t into the power wi ndow
master switch)
I GNI TI O N K E Y SWI TCH
Test, page 22-274
I GNI TI O N K E Y L I GHT
Test, page 22-274
RIGHT REAR
DOOR SWI TCH
DRI VE R' S DO O R L O CK K NO B SWI TCH
Test, page 22-190
L E FT RE AR DO O R SWI TCH
4-door wi t hout moonr oof
. DRI VER' S MICU
Input Test , page 22-268
ÛSA^notJ eis paqe 22-86 CEI L I NG LIGHT
Canada model s, page 22-87 Test /Repl ac ement , page 22-259
Repl acement ,, page 22-89
DOOR MUL TI PL EX
CONTROL UNIT
(Bui l t i nt o t he power wi nd o w
mast er swi t c h)
DOOR SWI TCH
RIGHT REAR
DOOR SWI TCH
IGNITION K E Y SWI TCH
Test , page 22-274
IGNITION K EY LIGHT
Test , page 22-274
DRI VER' S DOOR L OCK K NOB SWI TCH
Test , page 22-190
L EFT REAR DOOR SWI TCH
Ent ry Li ght s Control Syst em
2-door wi t h moonr oof
DRI VER' S MICU
[ {Bui l t i nt o t he dr i ver 's
Input Test page 22-268
Replacement:
(Bui l t i nt o t he power wi ndow
mast er swi t c h)
IGNITION K E Y S WI TCH
Tes t page 22-274
IGNITION K EY LIGHT
Tes t page 22-274
2-door wi t hout moonr oof
DRI VER' S DOOR L OOK K NOB S WI TCH
Test , page 22-190
INDIVIDUAL WAP L I GHTS
INTERIOR L IGHT SWI TCH
(Bui l t i nt o t he
moonr oof swi t c h)
CEI L I NG L IGHT
PA S S E NGE R' S DOOR SWI TCH
, DRI VER' S MICU
Replacement
CEIL ING LIGHT
PA S S E NGE R' S DOOR S WI TCH
(Bui l t i nt o t he power wi ndow
mast er swi t c h)
IGNITION K E Y S WI TCH
Test, page 22-274
IGNITION K E Y L IGHT
Test, page 22-274
DRI VE RS DOOR L OOK K NOB SWI TCH
Test, page 22-190
22-264
22-265
Entry Li ghts Control S y s t em
Ci rcui t Di agram
B A T T E R Y
C T V J P " f ' Cf\ J >
/ B A T \
W H T 4o o f BLU
IG1 H O T i n O N ( I I )
and S T A R T ( I I I )
D R I V E R ' S U N D E R - D A S H
No. 5 (7.5 A)
_ c r \ j o
I NTERI OR
L I GHT P N K
S WI TCH
(In t he
moonr oof
s wi t c h)
DRI VE R' S UNDE R- DA S H F US E / RE L A Y B OX
VB U IG1
DRI VER' S MI CU
B- CAN B- CAN
HI L O
I P6 D12
BRN
V V
CONTROL UNI T
DOOR MUL TI PL E X
CONTROL UNI T
1 DRI VE R' S
h DOOR
V S WI TCH
( Cl os ed:
Door open)
D4
L T GRN
1 L E FT REAR
h DOOR
V S WI TCH
(Cl os ed:
Door open)
(4-door)
S G S G PG PG
0 2 R2 Q1 R5
P20
Q18
BRN BRN BL K BL K WHT
- L L _ Q. _ L - Q_
G501 G501 G502 G502 G503
22*266
DRI VER' S J UNCTI ON B OX1
*1: L X, L X PZEV, L X- P, and L X- P PZEV
- : B-CAN l i ne
- WHT -
WHT <TRANSMFTTE R)
V
VB U
K E Y L E S S RE CE I VE R UNIT
(Bui l t i nt o t he i mmobi l i zer -
k ey i es s c ont r ol uni t )
B-CAN B CAN
HI L O
PNK
I
13
I
I
I
1
i B2
DRI VER' S
MI CU
V V
PNK B L U
5 F3 I F4
I
L l_
I
DRI VER' S
J UNCTI ON
B OX1
WHT
I
I
PNK
POWER WI NDOW
MA S TE R S WI TCH
i
I
B L U
I
i
3 3
1
N /
I
I
I
I
B L U
I
A29
VB U B-CAN B- CAN
HI L O
DOOR MUL TI PL EX CONTROL UNI T
S I L S I L
DRUNL OCK D RL OCK
B L K BL K
31
WHT
A14
PA S S E NGE R' S
UNDER- DAS H
F USE/RELAY B OX
B-CAN B-CAN
HI L O
VB U IG1
S G PG PG
Y E L
DOOR
L OCK K NOB
oiil M
1
7
V
6
DRI VER' S 1 (
DOOR L OCK ' A- A
L OCK X
K NOB |
S WI TCH
L OCK !
1
1
DRI VER' S
DOOR L OCK
A CTUA TOR
ZL
BL K BL K BL K BL K
i l l !
G505 G201 G505 G201
y\ (' 08-09 model s )
G15*
H3
GRN
| S G S G
_ -LL
G501 G502 G501
A37
BL K BL K
PG~ |
E16
BL K
1 i 1
G505 G201 G201
(' 10 model )
FRONT
PA S S E NGE R' S
DOOR
S WI TCH
(Cl os ed:
Door open)
G14*
H25*
;
L T GRN
RI GHT REAR
DOOR
S WI TCH
(Cl osed:
Door open)
J
(4-door )
22-2
Cont rol Uni t Input Test
NOTE: Before testing, troubleshoot the multiplex integrated control unit first, using B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode
A (see page 22-134),
Dr i ver 's MICU
1. Turn t he ignition switch to LOCK (0), and remove t he driver's dashboard lower cover (see page 20-166).
2. Disconnect driver's under-dash fuse/relay box connectors D, P, Q, and R.
NOTE: Al l connector views are shown from wire side of female terminals.
C O N N E C T O R D ( 16P)
L T G R N *
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
9 10
11 12 13 14 15
16
V
B R N
C O N N E C T O R P ( 20P)
PNK
C O N N E C T O R Q ( 20P)
B L K BRN
11
/
R E D
B R N
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 20
WH T
C O N N E C T O R R ( 24P)
B L K
1
3
-TVL
4 5 6 7 8
n
9
10
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
11 12
1 2 3 4
h *
5 6 7
- i
8
-By.
10
/ 7
13 14 15 16 17 18
/
21 22
/
* : 4- d o o r
3. Inspect the connector and socket terminals to be sure they are all making good contact.
If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary and recheck the system.
If the terminals look OK, go to step 4.
22-268
4. Rec onnec t t he connect or s to t he dr i ver ' s under -dash f use/r el ay box, and do t hese i nput t est s at t he f ol l owi ng
c onnec t or s.
I f all t he i nput t est s prove OK, go to st ep 5.
not obt ai ned
Q1 BLK Under all condi t i ons Measur e t he vol t age to gr ound:
An open on hi gh r esi st anc e in
t he wi r e
Q2 BRN Under all condi t i ons Measur e t he vol t age to gr ound:
t he wi r e
R2 BRN Under all condi t i ons Measur e t he vol t age to gr ound:
t he wi r e
R5 BLK Under all condi t i ons Measur e t he vol t age to gr ound:
An open on hi gh r esi st ance in
t he wi r e
D4
(4-door)
LT
GRN
Left rear door open Measur e t he vol t age to gr ound:
Faul t y left rear door swi t ch
t he wi r e
D4
(4-door)
LT
GRN
Left rear door c l osed Measur e t he vol t age to gr ound:
o A shor t to gr ound in t he wi r e
o Faul t y dr i ver ' s door swi t c h
t he wi r e
D12 BRN
o A shor t to gr ound in t he wi r e
P4 PNK Cei l i ng li ght swi t ch in
t he mi ddl e posi t i on,
Interi or li ght swi t ch in
t he DOOR posi t i on,
Map li ghts in t he
DOOR posi t i on
Connec t to gr ound wi t h a
j umper wi r e:
The cei l i ng li ght and i ndi vi dual
map light* shoul d c ome on.
Faul t y cei l i ng li ght
Faul t y i ndi vi dual map light*
Faul t y i nteri or light swi t ch*
Bl own bul b
t he wi r e
Q11 RED Under all condi t i ons Connect to gr ound wi t h a
j umper wi r e:
The i gni ti on key light shoul d
c ome on.
Faul t y i gni ti on key li ght
t he wi r e
Q18 WHT Igni ti on key i nser t ed
into t he i gni ti on
swi t ch
t he wi r e
Q18 WHT
Igni ti on key r emoved
f r om t he i gni ti on
swi t ch
A short to gr ound in t he wi r e
*: Wi t h moonr oof
(cont' d)
22-269
Cont rol Uni t i nput Test (c ont ' d)
Passenger's MICU
5. Tur n t he i gni t i on swi t ch to L OCK (0), and r emove t he passenger ' s kick panel
6. Di sc onnec t passenger ' s under -dash f use/r el ay box c onnec t or s A, E, and G
# 1
(or H*
2
).
*1: LX, L X PZEV, L X-P, L X-P PZEV
*2: Except L X, L X PZEV, L X-P, L X-P PZEV
CONNECTOR A (38 P)
10 11 1 2 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
l
2 8 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38
/ / \
BRN BLK*
2
BLK
CONNECTOR E (18P)
7 IP / /
5 6 7 8 9
10
/
12 1 3
/
1 5 1 6
/
/ \
BLK BLK
CONNECTOR G (16P) (LX, LX PZEV, LX-P. LX-P PZEV)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
9
/
11
12
13
14
15 16
/ \
LTGRN*
1
GRN
CONNECTOR H (38P) (Except LX, LX PZEV, LX-P, LX-P PZEV)
GRN
[
-71
2 3 4 5 6 7
1
/
/
11 12 13 14 15 1 6 17 18
I [
21 22 23 24 25 26 27
J
c. 1
/
29
/
31
/
/ / /
37
/
I
LTGRN*
1
*1:4-door
*2: '08-09 models
7. Inspect t he connect or and socket t er mi nal s to be sur e t hey ar e al l maki ng good cont act .
If t he t er mi nal s ar e bent , l oose or c or r oded, r epai r t hem as nec essar y and r echeck t he syst em.
8. R e c o n n e c t t h e c o n n e c t o r s to t h e p a s s e n g e r ' s u n d e r - d a s h f u s e / r e l a y b o x , and d o t h e s e i nput tests at t h e f o l l o w i n g
c o n n e c t o r s .
If any t e s t i n d i c a t e s a p r o b l e m , f i n d and c o r r e c t t h e c a u s e , t h e n r e c h e c k t h e s y s t e m .
If al l t h e i n p u t t e s t s p r o v e OK, g o t o s t e p 9.
Cavi t y W i re Tes t condi t i on Test : Desi r ed r esul t Possi bl e c ause if desi r ed r esul t i s
not obt ai ned
A36*
1
BL K In all i gni ti on swi t ch
posi t i on
@ An open or hi gh r esi st ance in
t he wi r e
A37 BL K In all i gni ti on swi t ch
posi t i on
t he wi r e
E15 BLK In all i gni ti on swi t ch
posi t i on
o An open or hi gh r esi st ance in
t he wi r e
E16 BLK In all i gni ti on swi t c h
posi t i on
Poor ground (G201) or an open
t he wi r e
A14 WHT Under all condi t i ons Measur e t he vol t age to gr ound:
Ther e shoul d be battery
vol t age.
o Bl own No. 15 (10 A) f use in the
f use/r el ay box
t he wi r e
A35 BRN Igni ti on swi t ch ON (II) Measur e t he vol t age to gr ound:
vol t age.
box
f use/r el ay box
t he wi r e
G14*
2
or
H25*
3
(4-door)
L T
GRN
Ri ght rear door open Measur e t he vol t age to gr ound:
o F aulty right rear door swi t ch
Faul t y right rear door swi t ch
gr ound
e An open or hi gh r esi st ance in
t he wi r e
G14*
2
or
H25*
3
(4-door)
L T
GRN
Ri ght rear door
c l osed
Faul t y right rear door swi t ch
G15*
2
or
H 3*
3
GRN Front passenger ' s
door open
F aulty front passenger ' s door
swi t ch
Faul t y front passenger ' s door
swi t ch gr ound
t he wi r e
G15*
2
or
H 3*
3
GRN
Front passenger ' s
door c l osed
Ther e shoul d be about 5 V,
swi t ch
*1: ' 08-09 model s
* 2: L X, L X PZEV, L X-P, LX-P PZEV
*3: Except L X, L X PZEV, L X-P, LX-P PZEV
(cont'd)
22-271
9. Tur n t he i gni t i on swi t c h to L OCK (0), and r emove t he power wi ndow mast er swi t ch (see page 22-305).
10. Di sconnect t he 37P connect or f r om t he door mul t i pl ex cont rol uni t.
DOOR MULTIPLEX CONTROL UNIT 37P CONNECTOR
W H T
Z7"~
1
/
3 9 10 11
12
25
24
37
12
25
13 1 4 / / / / / 2 0 21 22 23
24
37
12
25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
24
37
YEL WHT BLK
BLK
If t he t er mi nal s ar e bent , l oose or c or r oded, repai r t hem as nec essar y and recheck t he syst em.
22-272
mbm u L i a
12. Reconnect t he 37P connect or t o t he door mul t i pl ex control uni t and do t hese i nput t est s at t he f ol l owi ng connect or .
If all t he i nput t est s prove OK , go to st ep 13.
not obt ai ned
32 BLK In all i gni ti on swi t ch
posi t i on
t he wi r e
posi t i on
t he wi r e
13 WHT Under all condi t i ons Measur e t he vol t age to gr ound:
vol t age.
f use/r el ay box
t he wi r e
30 YE L Dr i ver ' s door lock
knob swi t c h i n L OCK
swi t ch
t he wi r e
knob swi t c h i n
neut ral or UNL OCK
vol t age.
swi t ch
31 WHT Dr i ver ' s door lock
knob swi t c h i n
UNL OCK
swi t ch
t he wi r e
knob swi t c h in
neut ral or L OCK
vol t age.
swi t ch
13. If multi ple f ai l ur es ar e f ound on mor e t han one cont rol uni t , r epl ace t he dr i ver ' s under -dash f use/r el ay box (i ncl udes
If i nput f ai l ur es are rel at ed to a part i cul ar cont rol uni t, r epl ace t he cont rol uni t.
22-273
Entry Li ghts Control Syst em
Ignition Key Swi t c h Test Igni ti on Key Li ght Test
1. Remove t he st eer i ng c ol umn upper and l ower c over s
(see page 20-181).
2. Di sconnect t he 6P connect or (A).
1 2 3 4 5 6
2.
Ther e shoul d be cont i nui t y wi t h t he key i n t he
i gni ti on swi t c h.
Ther e shoul d be no cont i nui t y wi t h t he key
r emoved.
4. If t he cont i nui t y i s not as spec i f i ed, t he i gni ti on key
swi t ch i s f aul t y; r epl ace t he st eer i ng lock assembl y
(see page 17-16).
1. Remove t he st eer i ng c ol umn upper and l ower c over s
(see page 20-181).
2. Di sc onnec t t he 6P connect or (A).
1 2 3 4 5 6 5| 6|
n
(-) (+)
3. The L ED shoul d c ome on when power i s connect ed to
t er mi nal No. 6 and gr ound i s connect ed to t er mi nal
No. 5.
4. If t he L ED does not c ome o n , t he i gni ti on key swi t ch i s
f aul t y; r epl ace t he st eer i ng lock assembl y (see page
17-16).
22-274
Power Wi ndows
(cont'd)
1 2 - 2 7 5
Power Wi ndows
RIGHT REAR
POWER WINDOW MOTOR
Test page 22-304
POWER WINDOW MOTOR
Test page 22-301
PA S S E NGE R' S
UNDER-DASH
FUS E / RE L A Y BOX
22-276
(cont'd)
Power Wi ndows
(Bui l t Int o t he passenger ' s under -dash f use/ r el ay box)
22-278
Aut o Rever se Power Wi ndow O perat ion
The syst em i s c omposed of t he dr i ver ' s MICU, passenger ' s MICU, door mul t i pl ex cont rol uni t {bui lt into t he power
wi ndow mast er swi t c h), f ront passenger ' s power wi ndow cont rol uni t (bui lt into t he f ront passenger ' s power wi ndow
swi t c h)*, and power wi ndow mot or s.
*: Except L X, L X PZEV, L X-P, LX-P PZEV
The dr i ver ' s and f ront passenger ' s power wi ndow mot or s i ncor por at e a Hall IC uni t (pul ser) whi c h gener at es pul ses
duri ng t he mot or ' s oper at i on and sends pul ses to t he dr i ver ' s and passenger ' s power wi ndow cont rol uni t s. As soon as
t he power wi ndow cont rol uni t s detect a change in t he pul se f r equency f r om t he Hall IC uni t (pul ser ), t he power wi ndow
cont rol uni t s make t he power wi ndow mot or st op and r ever se. Thi s pr event s pi nchi ng your hand or f i nger s duri ng
aut o-up oper at i on. The aut o r ever se f unct i on dose not wor k when t he power wi ndow mast er swi t ch i s hel d in t he c l ose
posi t i on.
Posi t i on wh en t he wi ndow
* c o n t a c t s somet hi ng
per i od of n n r ~ ~ i r ~
pul ses
Thr eshol d val ue f or
j udgment of aut o r ever se
Key Cyl i nder Oper at i on
Wi t h t he key i nser t ed in t he dr i ver ' s door key cyl i nder , t urn t he key a sec ond t i me wi t hi n 15 sec onds and hol d it to
oper at e t he wi ndows and moonr oof (cl ockwi se to open, count er cl ockwi se to c l ose). The wi ndows and moonr oof st op
movi ng when t he key i s r el eased. The aut o r ever se operat i on i s not act i ve when cl osi ng the wi ndows and moonr oof
wi t h t he key cyl i nder .
K eyl ess Oper at i on
By pr essi ng and hol di ng t he UNL OCK button of t he keyl ess t r ansmi t t er a sec ond t i me wi t hi n 15 sec onds, t he wi ndows
and moonr oof open. The wi ndows and moonr oof st op movi ng when t he UNL OCK button i s r el eased. The wi ndows do
not c l ose wi t h t he L OCK button.
22-279
Power Wi ndows
Resetting the Power Window Control Unit
Resetti ng the power wi ndows are requi red when any of
the f ol l owi ng have occurred:
Power wi ndow regul at or r epl acement ,
removal /i nstal l ati on, or repai r
P ower wi ndo w motor repl acement,
removal /i nstal l ati on, or repai r
Wi ndow run c hannel r epl acement or
removal /i nstal l ati on
F ront passenger's power wi ndo w swi tch repl acement
or r emoval /i nst al l at i on*
Door gl ass r epl acement , r emoval /i nst al l at i on, or
repai r
Power i s r emoved f r om t he dr i ver ' s power wi ndow
mast er swi t c h or front passenger ' s power wi ndow
swi t ch whi l e t he power wi ndow t i mer i s ON.
*: Wi t h f ront passenger ' s power wi ndow AUTO
UP/ AUTO DOWN f unct i on
NOTE: If t he f ront passenger ' s power wi ndow has lost
power when t he key off t i mer i s ON, it cannot be
oper at ed f r om t he dr i ver ' s swi t ch and must be r eset
f r om t he front passenger ' s power wi ndow swi t c h.
Usi ng t he HDS
1. Connec t t he HDS to t he dat a link connect or .
2. Tur n t he i gni ti on swi t c h to ON (II), t hen ent er t he
vehi c l e' s VIN and mi l eage at t he pr ompt s.
3. Sel ec t BODY EL ECTRI CAL f r om t he S YS TE M S E L E CT
menu.
4. Fr om t he BODY EL ECTRI CAL S YS TE M S E L E CT menu,
sel ect POWER WINDOWS.
5. Fr om t he MODE MENU, sel ec t ADJ US TMENTS .
6. Fr om t he ADJ US TMENT menu, sel ec t WINDOW
RE S E T f or dr i ver ' s si de (passenger ' s si de) wi ndow.
7. Fol l ow t he pr ompt s on t he sc r een.
8. Conf i r m that t he power wi ndow cont rol uni t i s reset
by usi ng t he power wi ndow AUTO UP and AUTO
DOWN f unct i on.
Wi t hout t he HDS
NOTE: To st art t he r eset pr ocedur e, f i rst do dr i ver ' s
power wi ndow mast er swi t ch (st eps 1-8), and t hen f ront
passenger ' s power wi ndow swi t ch (st eps 9-11), if
equi pped.
Dr i ver ' s Power Wi ndow
2. Move t he power wi ndow all t he way down by usi ng
t he power wi ndow DOWN swi t c h.
3. Open t he dr i ver ' s door.
4. Do t he f ol l owi ng f our t i mes bef ore goi ng to st ep 5:
NOTE: Do eac h bullet st ep wi t hi n 5 sec onds of eac h
other.
Tur n t he i gni ti on swi t ch to L OCK (0).
Push and hol d t he dr i ver ' s power wi ndow DOWN
swi t c h.
Tur n t he i gni ti on swi t ch to ON (II).
Rel ease t he dr i ver ' s power wi ndow DOWN swi t c h.
5. Conf i r m that AUTO UP no l onger wor ks. If AUTO UP
sti ll wor ks, go back to st ep 1.
6. Move t he power wi ndow all t he way down usi ng t he
power wi ndow DOWN swi t c h.
7. Pull up and hol d t he power wi ndow UP swi t ch unti l
t he power wi ndow i s all t he way up, t hen cont i nue to
hol d t he swi t ch for sever al sec onds.
8. Conf i r m that t he power wi ndow cont rol uni t i s r eset
by usi ng t he power wi ndow AUTO UP and AUTO
DOWN f unct i on.
If t he power wi ndow sti ll does not wor k in AUTO,
repeat t he pr ocedur e sever al t i mes, payi ng c l ose
attenti on to t he 5 sec ond t i me li mi t bet ween st eps.
If it sti ll does not wor k, go to B-CAN Syst em
Di agnosi s Test Mode A (see page 22-134).
22-280
Fr ont Passenger s Power Wi ndow (if equi pped!
9. Move t he front passenger ' s power wi ndow ai l t he way
down usi ng t he f ront passenger ' s power wi ndow
DOWN swi t c h.
10. Pull up and hol d t he front passenger ' s power wi ndow
UP swi t ch unti l t he front passenger ' s power wi ndow
i s all t he way up, t hen cont i nue to hol d t he swi t c h for
sever al sec onds.
11. Conf i r m that t he power wi ndow cont rol uni t i s r eset
by usi ng t he f ront passenger ' s power wi ndow AUTO
UP and DOWN f unct i ons.
Power Wi ndows
Ci rcui t Di agram
DRIVER'S
UNDER-DASH
F USE/RELAY B OX IGNITION SWITCH
DRIVER'S UNDER-DASH F USE/RELAY B O X
-
No. 1-1 (MAI N) (100 A) No. 3-1 (IG MAI N) (50 A)
No. 1-2
(AS F/B STD) (40 A)
<T- \ _ J O
No. 15 (10 A)
crvj o
No. 3-2 (DR F/B) (40 A)*
1
/
No. 3-4 (DR F/B) (60 A) *
?
,, crvjo
F 16 C1
/ I GK >V B LU
- W H T - f o B AT )
\ I G2C >/ - ORN -
IG1 H OT in ON (II)
and START (III)
IG2 H OT in ON (II)
No. 5 (7.5 A)
<rxx>-
No. 16(7.5 A)
No. 24 (20 A)
P9
W H T
N9
W H T
J 8 F8
CENTER
J UNCTI ON
B OX
H1 G6
DRIVER'S
J UNCTI ON
B OX1
POWER W I NDOW MASTER SWITCH
LT _ R.
14
W H T
13
LIGHTS
(LED x 5)
MAI N DR AS
T T T
- M-
DOWN UP AUTO
DOOR MULTI P LEX CONTROL UNI T
GND GND U P DO W N SVCC PLSA PLSB
RR L SUB
S W DOW N
RR LS UB
S W UP
(4-door)
22-282
DRIVER'S UNDER-DASH F USE/RELAY B OX
(4-door)
I No. 22 (20 A)
LEF T REAR
POWER W I NDOW
RELAY CIRCUIT
D1
PUR
Y EL
LEF T REAR
POWER W I NDOW
SWITCH
VB U IG1
DRIVER'S MI CU
J -CAN B-CAN
HI LO
* 1 : LX, LX PZEV, LX-P, and LX-P PZEV
: B-CAN line
- - : Otner communi cati on line
S P6
I 1
B LU
I
I
I
POWER W I NDOW MASTER SWI TCH
F RONT
PASSENGER'S
LEF T
REAR
RIGHT
REAR
MAI N
k SWITCH
DOWN
(AUTO)
UP
(AUTO)*
ON OF F
(LOCK ) (UNLOCK )
RR R SUB RR~R~SUB
SW DOWN S W UP
DOW N UP AUTO
34
LT GRN
G4
21
LTB LU
G3
H3
LTGRN LTB LU
DRIVER'S
J UNCTI ON
B OX1
V V V
RIGHT REAR' ^
POWER W I NDOW SWITCH
DOOR MULTIPLEX CONTROL UNI T
UART
B CAN B-CAN
HI LO
_,
B LU
: H2
; K1
BLU
; K i
CENTER
J UNCTI ON
BOX
CENTER
J UNCTI ON
BOX
I J 3
B LU
V
MOONROOF
CONTROL
UNIT/MOTOR
K B LU
G9 i G10
PNK BL
I F 3
I
I
I
B LU
I
I
I
DRIVER'S
J UNCTI ON
BOX 1
F RONT
PASSENGER'S
POWER W I NDOW
SWI TCH
PASSENGER'S
MI CU
I
(4-door)
(cont'd)
22-283
Power Wi ndows
DOOR MUL TI PL E X
CONTROL UNI T I
DOOR MUL TI PL E X
CONTROL UNI T
WW
I I
DRI VER' S
J UNCTI ON
B OX1
PA S S E NGE R' S
UNDE R- DAS H F US E / RE L A Y B OX
(A) BRN -
( B > - WH T -
RED
H8 n n K i A35
BRN
H9 A14
WHT
PNK B L U
I I
I I
I RI GHT RE A R
POWER WI NDOW
No. 11 (20 A) RE L A Y CI RCUI T
_ J _
IG1 B- CAN B- CAN
HI L O
PA S S E NGE R' S
MI CU
L T GRN L T B L U PNK
A34 A12 A32
* 1: L X, L X PZEV, L X- P,
and L X- P PZEV
*2: Ex c ept L X, L X PZEV, L X- P,
and L X- P PZEV
* 3: Wi t h f r ont pas s eng er ' s
power wi nd o w
A UTO UP/ AUTO DOWN
f unc t i on
- - : B-CAN l i ne
- - : Ot her c ommuni c at i on l i ne
DOWN UP A UTO
CONTROL UNI T * 3
PG U P DOWN j S VCC PL S A PL S B S G ~] UA RT
i
37 12 24 1 26 27 28 36 J ; 29
BL K B L U RED
2*
1
4*2
PUR PNK ORN BL K BL U
A
DOOR
MUL TI PL E X
CONTROL
UNI T
FRONT
PA S S E NGE R' S
POWER WI NDOW MOTOR
G505
[ ft
L I GHT
(L ED)
RI GHT
RE A R POWER
WI NDOW
S WI TCH
RI GHT RE AR POWE R
WI NDOW MOTOR
G651
(4-door )
22-284
DTC B112S; Dri ver' s Power Wi ndow Motor A
Pul se Malfuncti on
DTC B1126: Dri ver' s Power Wi ndow Motor B
Pul se Malfuncti on
NOTE: If you ar e t r oubl eshoot i ng mul t i pl e DTCs, be sur e
to f ol l ow t he i nst ruct i ons in B-CAN Sy s t em Di agnosi s
ON (II).
3. Open and c l ose t he dr i ver ' s power wi ndow by usi ng
t he power wi ndow mast er swi t ch manual l y.
Does the window motor operate?
NO-Tes t t he dr i ver ' s power wi ndow mot or (see page
22-299). If t he motor t est s OK, go to st ep 4.
Are DTCs B1125 and/or B1126 indicated?
Chec k f or l oose or poor c onnec t i ons.H
5. Sel ec t t he POWER WINDOWS f r om t he BODY
EL ECTRI CAL syst em sel ect menu, and ent er t he DATA
LIST.
6. Chec k t he DETECT/ NONE i nf ormat i on of the dr i ver ' s
wi ndow mot or A-phase and B-phase si gnal in t he
DATA LIST.
Does the information indicator display DETECT while the
window is moving, and display NONE when the window
is stopped?
YES - Repl ac e t he power wi ndow mast er swi t c h,
4-door (see page 22-305), 2-door (see page 22-306)._
NO- Go to st ep 7.
8. Di sconnect t he door mul t i pl ex cont rol uni t 37P
connect or .
9. Di sconnect t he dr i ver ' s power wi ndow mot or 6P
connect or .
10. Check f or cont i nui t y bet ween t he door mul t i pl ex
cont rol uni t 37P connect or t er mi nal s and dr i ver ' s
power wi ndow mot or 6P connect or t er mi nal s as
shown:
Door mul t i pl ex Dr i ver ' s power wi ndow
cont r ol uni t 37P mot or 6P c onnec t or
connect or
3 (PUR) 5 (PUR)
20 (ORN) 3 (ORN)
22 (PNK) 6 (PNK)
DOOR MULTIPLEX CONTROL UNIT 37P CONNECTOR
S VCC (PUR)
X
12
113| 141/I/1/1/1/120121122|23|
1261271281291301311321 fe 31341 51361
PL SA (PNK)
PL SA (PNK)
DRIVER' S POWER WINDOW MOTOR 6P CONNECTOR
bet ween t he door mul t i pl ex cont rol uni t and t he
dr i ver ' s power wi ndow mot or .H
(cont' d)
22-285
Fewer Wi ndows
11. Check f or cont i nui t y bet ween dr i ver ' s power wi ndow
mot or 6P connect or t er mi nal s No. 3, No. 5, and No. 6
and body gr ound i ndi vi dual l y.
DRI VER' S POWER WINDOW MOTOR
6P CONNECTOR -
PL S B (ORN)
YES - Repai r a shor t t o gr ound in t he w i r e . !
12. Test t he dr i ver ' s power wi ndow mot or (see page
22-299).
Is t he mot or OK?
YES - Repl ac e t he power wi ndow mast er swi t c h,
4-door (see page 22-305), 2-door (see page 22-306).l
NO-Repl ac e t he dr i ver ' s power wi ndow mot or .H
DTC B1130: Front Passenger ' s Power Wi ndow
Motor A Pul se Malfuncti on
Motor B Pul se Malfuncti on
ON (II).
3. Open and c l ose t he f ront passenger ' s power wi ndow
by usi ng t he front passenger ' s power wi ndow swi t ch
manual l y.
Does t he window mot or operat e?
NO-Tes t t he front passenger ' s power wi ndow mot or
(see page 22-301). If t he mot or t est s OK, go to st ep 4.
4. Chec k f or DTCs wi th t he HDS.
Are DTCs B1130 and/or B1131 indicat ed?
5. Sel ec t t he POWER WINDOWS f r om t he BODY
EL ECTRI CAL syst em sel ect menu, and ent er t he DATA
L IST.
6. Chec k t he DETECT/ NONE i nf ormat i on of t he f ront
passenger ' s wi ndow mot or A-phase and B-phase
si gnal in t he DATA LIST.
Does t he informat ion indicat or display DETECT while t he
windows is moving, and display NONE when t he window
is st opped?
YES - Repl ac e t he front passenger ' s power wi ndow
swi t c h, 4-door (see page 22-306), 2-door (see page
22- 307) . !
NO- Go to st ep 7.
8. Di sc onnec t t he front passenger ' s power wi ndow
swi t ch 37P connect or .
mot or 6P connect or .
22-2116
10= Chec k for cont i nui t y bet ween t he front passenger ' s
power wi ndow swi t ch 37P connect or t er mi nal s and
front passenger ' s power wi ndow motor 6P connect or
t er mi nal s as shown:
power wi ndow 37P
c onnec t or
power wi ndow mot or
6P connect or
26 (PUR) 5 (PUR)
27 (PNK) 6 (PNK)
28 (ORN) 3 (ORN)
FRONT PA S S E NGE RS POWER WINDOW SWI TCH
37P CONNECTOR
. rm
| 1M3| 4 | 5H / 1/ J 7I 717I (,
12
\ / VVVV\ / VV\ / \ / V\
24
25 |26|27 28| 29| / L / | / | / | 34| . / | 36| 37
l
- - n
S VCC
(PUR) CI
PL S B (ORN)
PL S A (PNK)
FRONT PA S S E NGE R' S POWER WINDOW MOTOR
6P CONNECTOR
NO-Repai r an open in t he wi r e bet ween t he front
passenger ' s power wi ndow swi t ch and t he f ront
passenger ' s power wi ndow mo t o r . !
11. Chec k f or cont i nui t y bet ween f ront passenger ' s
power wi ndow mot or 6P connect or t er mi nal s No. 3,
No. 5, and No.6 and body gr ound i ndi vi dual l y.
6P CONNECTOR
PL S B( ORN)
YES - Repai r a shor t to gr ound i n t he wi r e. H
NO- Go to st ep 12.
12. Test t he front passenger ' s power wi ndow mot or (see
page 22-301).
Is the motor OK ?
YES - Repl ac e t he front passenger ' s power wi ndow
swi t c h, 4-door (see page 22-306), 2-door (see page
22-307).B
NO-Repl ac e t he front passenger ' s power wi ndow
mot or . B
22-287
Power Wi ndows
DTC B1140: Dr i ver ' s Power Wi ndow Posi t i on
Detect Ci rcui t Malf unct i on
2. Tur n t he i gni t i on swi t c h to L OCK (0), and t hen back to
ON (II).
t he dr i ver ' s swi t c h manual l y.
Are DTCs B1125 or B1126 indicated?
- YES-Tr oubl es hoot t he DTC B1125 o r B 1126 (see page
22-285).B
NO- Go to st ep 5.
5. Reset t he power wi ndow cont rol uni t (see page
22-280).
6. Chec k f or DTCs agai n wi t h t he HDS.
NO-The syst em i s r ecover ed at t hi s ti me. l l
7. Subst i t ut e a known-good power wi ndow mast er
swi t c h.
t he dr i ver ' s swi t c h manual l y.
YES - Faul t y dr i ver ' s power wi ndow mot or; r epl ace
i t. B
NO~Faul t y door mul t i pl ex cont rol uni t; r epl ace t he
power wi ndow mast er swi t c h, 4-door (see page
22-305), 2-door (see page 22-306).H
DTC B1142: Door Multi plex Control Uni t Lost
Communi cat i on Wi th Front Passenger ' s
Power Wi ndow Swi t ch (UART Li ne Open)
to f ol l ow t he i nst ruct i ons in B-CAN Syst em Di agnosi s
ON (II).
3. Open and c l ose t he dr i ver ' s and front passenger ' s
wi ndows by operat i ng t he power wi ndow mast er
swi t c h.
t i me. H
connect or .
1 \A 3 \A/\7l7mm^\ ~X
1 2
2 5
| 2 6 | 2 7 i 2 8 j 2 9 j 3 0 | 3 1 | 3 2 | 3 3 | 3 4 | 3 5 | 3 6 J 137
UART (BLU)
@
YES - Repai r a shor t to gr ound in t he wire.iiiii
NO- Go to st ep 9.
22- 288
uni t 37P c onnec t or t er mi nal No. 27 and front
passenger ' s power wi ndow swi t ch 37P connect or
t er mi nal No. 29.
) , h l / l * v w w \ * \ v \ " \
R 3l l 4M^/ l / |20l 21122|23|
126127128129130131132|33|34|35|36|
UART (BUL)
\^\A*\*\*\AAAAAA C
l26|27|28|29|/|y|y^34|yl36l
J UART (BUL)
FRONT PA S S E NGE RS POWER WINDOW SWI TCH
37P CONNECTOR
NO-Repai r an open or hi gh r esi st ance i n t he wi r e. i l
11 Measur e t he vol t age bet ween door mul t i pl ex cont rol
uni t 37P c onnec t or t er mi nal No. 27 and body gr ound.
Is there less than 0.2 V?
YE S - Go to t he passenger ' s power wi ndow swi t ch
i nput t est , and do all t he power and gr ound i nput t est s
(see page 22-296). If t he t est s prove OK, subst i t ut e a
known good passenger ' s power wi ndow swi t c h. If t he
DTC goes away, repl ace t he ori gi nal passenger ' s
power wi ndow swi t ch. If the DTC i s sti ll pr esent ,
r epl ace t he power wi ndow mast er swi t c h, for 4-door
(see page 22-305), f or 2-door (see page 22-306).B
NO-Repai r a short to power in t he wi r e.Hi
Posi ti on Detect Ci rcui t Er r or
2. Tur n t he i gni t i on swi t ch to L OCK (0), and t hen back to
ON (II).
3. Open and c l ose t he f ront passenger ' s power wi ndow
by usi ng t he front passenger ' s swi t ch manual l y.
Are DTCs B1130 or B1131 indicated?
YES-Tr oubl es hoot t he DTC B1130 or B1131 (see page
22-286).B
NO- Go to st ep 5.
5. Reset t he power wi ndow cont rol uni t and t he front
passenger ' s power wi ndow cont rol uni t (see page
22-280).
6. Chec k f or DTCs agai n wi t h t he HDS.
NO-The syst em i s r ecover ed at t hi s t i me.B
7. Subst i t ut e a known-good passenger ' s power wi ndow
swi t c h.
8. Open and c l ose t he front passenger ' s power wi ndow
by usi ng t he front passenger ' s swi t ch manual l y.
YES - Faul t y front passenger ' s wi ndow mot or; r epl ace
i t .B
NO-Faul t y front passenger ' s power wi ndow swi t c h;
r epl ace t he front passenger ' s power wi ndow swi t c h,
4-door (see page 22-306), 2-door (see page 22-307).B
22-289
Power Wi ndows
DTC U0155: Door Multi plex Cont rol Uni t Lost
Communi cat i on Wi th Gauge Cont rol Modul e
ON (li ).
do all power , gr ound and c ommuni c at i on i nput t est s
gauge cont rol mo d ul e.
Chec k f or l oose or poor c onnec t i ons at t he gauge
cont rol modul e and t he rel at ed u n i t s .
DTC U0164: Door Multi plex Control Uni t Lost
Communi cat i on Wi th Cl i mat e Cont rol Uni t
NOTE: If you ar e t r oubl eshoot i ng rhulti ple DTCs , be sur e
2. Tur n t he i gni ti on swi t ch to L pCK (0) and t hen back to
ON (II).
YE S - Go to t he door mul t i pl ex cont rol uni t i nput t est
and c hec k t he power and gr ounds. If OK, r epl ace t he
dr i ver ' s power wi ndow mast er s w i t c h .
Chec k f or l oose or poor connect i ons bet ween t he
door mul t i pl ex cont rol uni t and cl i mat e cont rol unit.fH
22-290
DTC U1282: Door Multi plex Cont rol Uni t Lost
Communi cat i on Wi th Dri ver' s MICU
ON (II).
YE S - Go to t he dr i ver ' s MICU i nput t est , and do all
power , gr ound and c ommuni c at i on i nput t est s (see
page 22-151). If t he t est s prove OK , r epl ace t he
Chec k f or l oose or poor connect i ons at dr i ver ' s
under -dash f use/r el ay box connect or P (20P) and the
DTC U1283: Door Multi plex Control Uni t Lost
to f ol l ow t he i nst ruct i ons i n B-CAN Syst em Di agnosi s
1. Cl ear t he DTCs wi th t he HDS.
ON (II).
YE S - Go to t he passenger ' s MICU i nput t est , and do all
power , gr ound and c ommuni c at i on i nput t est s (see
page 22-154). If t he t est s pr ove OK, r epl ace t he
22-89).
Check f or l oose or poor c onnec t i ons at passenger ' s
under -dash f use/r el ay box connect or A (38P) and t he
22-291
mm^Jf 1
Power Wi ndows
Power Wi ndow Mast er Swi t c h Input Test
NOTE: Bef ore t est i ng, t r oubl eshoot t he mul t i pl ex i nt egrat ed cont rol uni t f i rst , usi ng B-CAN Syst em Di agnosi s Test Mode
1. Tur n t he i gni ti on swi t c h to L OCK (0), open and c l ose t he dr i ver ' s door , t hen r emove t he power wi ndow mast er swi t c h.
2. Di sc onnec t t he 37P connect or (A) f r om t he door power wi ndow mast er swi t ch (B).
*: 4-door
Y EL WH T PNK* BLU
BLU
BLK LT GRN* LT BLU* BLK
Wire side of
female terminals
The illustration shows 4-door.
22-292
4. Reconnect t he connect or to t he power wi ndow mast er swi t c h, t urn t he i gni ti on swi t c h to ON (II), and do t hese i nput
t est s at t he f ol l owi ng connect or .
If any t est i ndi cat es a pr obl em, fi nd and cor r ect t he c ause, t hen r echeck t he syst em.
posi t i ons
Measur e t he vol t age to
gr ound:
Ther e shoul d be l ess t han
0.2 V.
An open or hi gh
posi t i ons
gr ound:
Ther e shoul d be l ess t han
0.2 V.
An open or hi gh
13 WHT Under all condi t i ons Measur e t he vol t age to
gr ound:
vol t age.
o '3!own No. 15(10 A) f us ei n
box
f use/r el ay box
An open or hi gh
14 L TGRN Igni ti on swi t ch ON (II) Measur e t he vol t age to
gr ound:
vol t age.
Bl own No. 16 (7.5 A) f use
in t he dr i ver ' s under -dash
f use/r el ay box
f use/r el ay box
o An open or hi gh
25 WHT Under all condi t i ons Measur e t he vol t age to
gr ound:
vol t age.
Bl own No. 24 (20 A) f use in
f use/r el ay box
f use/r el ay box
An open or hi gh
3 PUR Igni ti on swi t ch ON (II) Measur e t he vol t age to
gr ound:
vol t age.
Faul t y power wi ndow
mast er swi t ch
A shor t to gr ound in t he
wi r e
20 ORN Igni ti on swi t ch ON (II), and
dr i ver ' s power wi ndow
movi ng up or down
Measur e t he vol t age
bet ween t er mi nal s No. 20
and No. 37:
An anal og vol t met er shoul d
al t ernat e bet ween 0 V and
about 5 V( a di gi tal vol t met er
shoul d read about 2.5 V
whi l e t he wi ndow moves).
mast er swi t ch
Faul t y dr i ver ' s power
wi ndow mot or
An open or hi gh
wi r e
. 22 PNK Igni ti on swi t ch ON (II), and
dr i ver ' s power wi ndow
movi ng up or down
Measur e t he vol t age
bet ween t er mi nal s No. 22
and No. 37:
al t ernat e bet ween 0 V and
about 5 V (a di gi tal vol t met er
shoul d r ead about 2.5 V
whi l e t he wi ndow moves).
mast er swi t ch
Faul t y dr i ver ' s power
wi ndow mot or
An open or hi gh
wi r e
(cont' d)
22-293
Power Wi ndows
Power Window Master Switch Input Test (cont'd)
5. Tur n t he i gni t i on swi t ch to L OCK (0), open and c l ose t he dr i ver ' s door , t hen di sc onnec t t he 37P connect or f r om t he
power wi ndow mast er swi t ch agai n.
6. Wi t h t he connect or sti i i di sc onnec t ed, do t hese i nput t est s at t he f ol l owi ng connect or .
If all t he i nput t est s prove OK, t he door mul t i pl ex cont rol uni t must be f aul t y, r epl ace t he power wi ndow mast er
swi t c h.
NOTE: After r epl aci ng t he power wi ndow mast er swi t c h, reset t he power wi ndow cont rol uni t (see page 22-280).
12 YE L Igni ti on swi t c h ON (II),
connect t er mi nal s No. 25
and No. 24 (or No. 12), and
t er mi nal s No. 12 (or No. 24)
and No. 37 wi t h j umper
wi r es.
Chec k dr i ver ' s power
wi ndow mot or oper at i on:
The dr i ver ' s power wi ndow
shoul d open (or c l ose).
c Faul t y dr i ver ' s power
wi ndow mot or
An open or hi gh
24 GRN
Igni ti on swi t c h ON (II),
wi r es.
Chec k dr i ver ' s power
The dr i ver ' s power wi ndow
c Faul t y dr i ver ' s power
wi ndow mot or
An open or hi gh
23
(4-door)
GRN Igni ti on swi t c h ON (II),
wi r es.
Chec k left r ear power
The left rear power wi ndow
Faul t y left rear power
wi ndow swi t ch
wi ndow mot or
An open or hi gh
36
(4-door)
L TB L U
wi r es.
Chec k left r ear power
The left rear power wi ndow
wi ndow swi t ch
wi ndow mot or
An open or hi gh
21
(4-door)
L TB L U Igni ti on swi t c h ON (II),
wi r es.
Chec k ri ght r ear power
The ri ght r ear power
wi ndow shoul d open (or
c l ose).
Faul t y passenger ' s
Faul t y ri ght rear power
wi ndow swi t ch
wi ndow mot or
An open or hi gh
34
( 4-door)
L T GRN
wi r es.
Chec k ri ght r ear power
The ri ght r ear power
wi ndow shoul d open (or
c l ose).
wi ndow swi t ch
wi ndow mot or
An open or hi gh
26
(4-door)
PNK Igni ti on swi t c h ON (II),
and No. 26 wi t h a j umper
wi r e.
Chec k left and ri ght r ear
power wi ndow swi t c h l i ght s:
The left and ri ght rear power
wi ndow swi t ch l i ght s shoul d
c ome on.
Faul t y L ED
Poor gr ound (G601, G651)
or an open in t he gr ound
wi r e
Faul t y left or ri ght rear
power wi ndow swi t ch
An open in t he wi r e
22-294
27 BL U Di sconnect t he front
passenger ' s power wi ndow
Chec k for cont i nui t y
bet ween t er mi nal No. 27 and
f ront passenger ' s power
wi ndow swi t ch 37P
in t he wi r e
27 BL U Di sconnect t he front
passenger ' s power wi ndow
Chec k f or cont i nui t y to
gr ound:
Ther e shoul d be no
cont i nui t y.
33 BL U Di sconnect dr i ver ' s
connect or P (20P)
Chec k f or cont i nui t y
dr i ver ' s under -dash
f use/r el ay box connect or P
(20P) t er mi nal No. 5:
in t he wi r e
33 BL U Di sconnect dr i ver ' s
connect or P (20P)
gr ound:
cont i nui t y.
35 PNK Di sconnect dr i ver ' s
connect or P (20P)
Chec k for cont i nui t y
dr i ver ' s under -dash
f use/r el ay box c onnec t or P
(20P) t er mi nal No. 6:
in t he wi r e
35 PNK Di sconnect dr i ver ' s
connect or P (20P)
gr ound:
cont i nui t y.
22-295
Power Wi ndows
Front Passenger's Power Window Switch Input Test
1. Tur n t he i gni t i on swi t ch t o L OCK (0), open and c l ose t he dr i ver ' s door , t hen r emove t he f ront passenger ' s power
wi ndow swi t c h.
2. Di sconnect t he 37P connect or (A) f rom t he f ront passenger ' s power wi ndow swi t ch (B ).
Wire side of
female terminals
GRN PUR' PNK* ORN* BL U BLK* BL K
*: Wi t h f ront passenger ' s power wi nd o w AUTO UP/ AUTO DOWN f unc t i on
22-296
4. Reconnect t he connect or t o t he front passenger ' s power wi ndow swi t c h, t urn t he i gni t i on swi t ch to ON (II), and do
t hese i nput t est s at t he f ol l owi ng connect or .
If all t he i nput t est s prove OK, go t o st ep 5.
Cavi t y Wi r e '
:
Test condi t i on Test : Desi r ed r esul t Possi bl e c aus e i f desi r ed r esul t
i s not obt ai ned
37 BLK In all i gni ti on swi t c h
posi t i ons
t he wi r e
25 GRN Under all condi t i ons Measur e the vol t age to gr ound:
passenger ' s under -dash
f use/r el ay box
f use/r el ay box
An open or hi gh r esi st anc e i n
t he wi r e
26* PUR Igni ti on swi t ch ON (II) Measur e t he vol t age to gr ound:
power wi ndow swi t c h
27* PNK Igni ti on swi t ch ON
(II), and front
passenger ' s power
wi ndow swi t ch
movi ng up or down
t er mi nal s No. 27 and No. 37:
al t ernat e bet ween 0 V and about
5 V (a di gi tal vol t met er shoul d
r ead about 2.5 V whi l e t he
wi ndow moves).
power wi ndow swi t c h
t he wi r e
28* ORN Igni ti on swi t ch ON
(II), and front
passenger ' s power
wi ndow swi t ch
movi ng up or down
t er mi nal s No. 28 and No. 37:
al t ernat e to bet ween 0 V and
about 5 V (a di gi tal vol t met er
shoul d r ead about 2.5 V whi l e
t he wi ndow moves).
power wi ndow swi t ch
t he wi r e
36* BLK Under all condi t i ons,
di sconnect t he f ront
passenger ' s power
wi ndow mot or 6P
connect or .
t he wi r e
*: Front passenger ' s power wi ndow AUTO UP/ AUTO DOWN f unct i on
(cont' d)
22-297
Power Wi ndows
Front Passenger's Power Window Switch input Test (cont'd)
5. Tur n t he i gni ti on swi t ch to L OCK (0), open and c l ose t he dr i ver ' s door , t hen di sc onnec t t he 37P connect or f r om t he
f ront passenger ' s power wi ndow swi t c h agai n.
6, Wi t h t he connect or sti ll di sc onnec t ed, do t hese i nput t est s at t he f ol l owi ng connect or .
If all t he i nput t est s prove OK , r epl ace t he f ront passenger ' s power wi ndow swi t c h, t hen go to st ep 7.
Cavi t y Wi r e Tes t condi t i on Test : Desi r ed r esul t Possi bl e c aus e if desi r ed r esul t
i s not obt ai ned
12 B L U Under all condi t i ons,
connect t er mi nal s
No. 25 and No. 24 (or
No. 12), and
t er mi nal s No. 12 (or
No. 24) and No. 37
wi t h j umper wi r es,
Chec k f ront passenger ' s power
The front passenger ' s power
wi ndow shoul d open (or c l ose).
A n open or hi gh r esi st ance i n
t he wi r e
24 RED
Under all condi t i ons,
No. 12), and
t er mi nal s No. 12 (or
No. 24) and No. 37
wi t h j umper wi r es,
Chec k f ront passenger ' s power
The front passenger ' s power
wi ndow shoul d open (or c l ose).
A n open or hi gh r esi st ance i n
t he wi r e
29 BL U Under all c ondi t i ons,
d i s c o nnec t t he powei
wi ndow mast er
swi t ch 37P
connect or .
Chec k for cont i nui t y bet ween
t ermi nal No. 29 and power
wi ndow mast er swi t ch 37P
t he wi r e
7. Wi t h t he front passenger ' s power wi ndow AUTO UP/ AUTO DOWN f unct i on, r eset t he power wi ndow cont rol uni t (see
page 22-280).
Dri ver' s Power Wi ndow Motor Test
Mot or Tes t
1. Remove t he power wi ndow mast er swi t c h.
2. Test t he mot or i n eac h di rect i on by connect i ng battery
power and gr ound to t he power wi ndow mast er
swi t ch 37P connect or (A) accor di ng to t he t abl e.
\ Terminal
Direction \
12 24
UP 0
DOWN
e

4-door

> H i ^ I
r l i i Z L 3J^^
12
|13|14|/1/L/J/1/120|21|22|23|
25 |26|27|28|29|30| 31132|33|34|35|36| 3?
2-door
hl ^3M/ ! / l / l / ] 9 | i ohi | I
12
|13| 14I /|/|/W120|21|22|23|
24
37 25 |26|27|28|29|30|31|32|33|34|35|36|
24
37
3. If t he mot or does not run or f ai l s to run smoot hl y, go
to st ep 4, if t he mot or r uns smoot hl y, go t o st ep 8.
4. For 4-door: Remove t he door panel (see page 20-17).
5. Di sconnect t he 6P connect or (A) f rom t he dr i ver ' s
power wi ndow mot or (B).
(cont' d)
22-299
Power Wi ndows
Dri ver' s Power Wi ndow Motor Test (cont' d)
6. Chec k for cont i nui t y bet ween t he door mul t i pl ex
cont rol uni t 37P connect or t er mi nal s and dr i ver ' s
power wi ndow mot or 6P connect or t er mi nal s as
s hown. Ther e shoul d be cont i nui t y.
Door mul t i pl ex cont r ol
uni t 37P c onnec t or
Dr i ver ' s power wi nd o w
mot or 6P c onnec t or
12 (YEL) 4 (YEL)
24 (GRN) 1 (GRN)
DRI VER' S POWER WINDOW MOTOR 6P CONNECTOR
DOWN+(GRN)
UP'
(YEL )
UP -f( YEL )
12
25
| 11/|3 1 / I / I / I / I / | 9| 10| 11|
l26l27l28l2Q|30l3l|32|33|34|35|36|
DOWN 4-
(GRN)
24
37
7. If t her e i s no cont i nui t y, repai r an open or hi gh
r esi st ance i n t he wi r e(s). If the wi r e har ness i s OK ,
r epl ace t he dr i ver ' s power wi ndow mot or.
Hal l C uni t (Pul .e.) Te: t
8. Chec k f or cont i nui t y bet ween dr i ver ' s power wi ndow
If t her e i s no cont i nui t y, check for an open or hi gh
r esi st anc e in t he BL K wi r e or poor gr ound (G501).
DRI VER' S POWER WINDOW MOTOR 6P CONNECTOR
2 3
5 6
9. Do t he power wi ndow mast er swi t ch i nput t est
t er mi nal s No. 3, No. 20, and No. 22 (see page 22-292).
22-300
Front Passenger's Power Window Motor Test
Wi t h AUTO UP/ AUTO DOWN f unct i on
Mot or Tes t
1. Remove t he front passenger ' s power wi ndow swi t c h:
power and gr ound to t he front passenger ' s power
wi ndow swi t ch 37P connect or (A) accor di ng to t he
t abl e.
\ Terminal
Direction \
12 24
UP

DOWN
4-door
%
\AAAAAAA/\AAA ?t
25j )26J27)28|29|XlA^ M34l7|36l 137
2-door
h l / | 3 | 4 | 5 H / M/ V V 1
1
12
\AAAAAAAAAAA
24
25
| 26| 27| 28| 29| 7l / l / V| 34| / l 36|
37
t o st ep 4, if t he mot or r uns smoot hl y, go to st ep 8.
4. For 4-door: r emove t he door panel (see page 20-17).
5. Di sconnect t he 6P connect or (A) f r om t he front
passenger ' s power wi ndow mot or (B).
(cont' d)
22-301
Power Wi ndows
Front Passenger ' s Power Wi ndow Motor Test (cont' d)
6. Chec k f or cont i nui t y bet ween t he f ront passenger ' s
power wi ndow swi t ch 37P connect or t er mi nal s and
f ront passenger ' s power wi ndow mot or 6P connect or
t er mi nal s as s hown. Ther e shoul d be cont i nui t y.
Fr ont passenger ' s power
wi ndow s wi t c h 37P
c onnec t or
Fr ont passenger ' s power
wi ndow mot or SP
c onnec t or
12( BL U) 4 (BLU)
24 (RED) 1 (RED)
6P CONNECTOR
DOWN+(RED) UP -H B LU)
(BLU)
12
25
DOWN+
(RED)
24
37
Hal l IC uni t (Pul ser ) Tes t
S o Do t he f ront passenger ' s power wi ndow swi t c h i nput
t est at t er mi nal s No. 26, No. 27, and No. 28 (see page
22-296).
FRONT PA S S E NGE R' S POWER WINDOW SWI TCH
37P CONNECTOR
7. If t here i s no cont i nui t y, repai r an open or hi gh
r esi st ance in t he wi r e(s). If t he wi r e har ness i s OK,
r epl ace t he f ront passenger ' s power wi ndow mot or.
I mm
Wi t hout AUTO UP/ AUTO DOWN f unct i on
1. Remove t he f ront passenger ' s power wi ndow swi t ch.
power and gr ound to t he front passenger ' s power
wi ndow swi t ch 37P connect or (A) accor di ng to t he
t abl e.
\ Terminal
Direction \
12 24
UP

DOWN

4-door
u
|,L / | 3| 4| 5|/ bVl / l / M
s
12
\AAAAAAAAAAA
2 4
25 |28|27l28l29|/|/Vl/l34|7l36| 37
2-door
to st ep 4.
4. For 4-door: r emove t he door panel (see page 20-17).
5. Di sconnect t he 2P connect or (A) f r om t he front
passenger ' s power wi ndow mot or (B).
(cont' d)
22-303
Power Wi ndows
Front Passenger ' s Power Wi ndow
Motor Test (cont' d)
6. Ch e c k f or cont i nui t y bet ween t h e front passenger ' s
power wi ndow swi t c h 37P connect or t er mi nal s and
f ront passenger ' s power wi ndow mot or 2P c onnec t or
t er mi nal s as s hown. Ther e shoul d be cont i nui t y.
Front passenger' s power
wi ndow swi tch 37P
connector
Front passenger's power
wi ndow motor 2P
connector
12(BL U) 2 (BLU)
24 (RED) 1 (RED)
2P CONNECTOR
DOWN+
(RED)
12
25
l 2 6 [ 2 7 l 2 8 | 2 9 ( X ^
24
37
FRONT PA S S E NGE R' S POWER WINDOW S WI TCH
37P CONNECTOR
7. If t he wi r e har ness i s OK , r epl ace t he f ront
passenger ' s power wi ndow mot or.
Rear Power Wi ndow Motor Test
1. Remove t he r ear power wi ndow swi t ch (see page
22-307).
power and gr ound to t he r ear power wi ndow swi t c h
14P connect or (A) accor di ng to t he t abl e.
\ Ter mi nal
Di r ect i on \
1 7
UP
0
DOWN
e e
to st ep 4.
5. Di sconnect t he 2P connect or (A) f r om t he rear power
wi ndow mot or (B).
22-304
6. Check f or cont i nui t y bet ween t he rear power wi ndow
swi t ch 14P connect or t er mi nal s and r ear power
wi ndow mot or 2P connect or t er mi nal s as shown: .
Rear power wi ndow
s wi t c h 14P c onnec t or
Rear power wi ndow
1 (BRN) 1 (BRN)
7 (RED) 2 (RED)
REAR POWER WINDOW MOTOR 2P CONNECTOR
DOWN+
(BRN)
UP+
(RED)
REAR POWER WINDOW SWITCH 14P CONNECTOR
7. If t he wi r e har ness i s OK , r epl ace t he r ear power
wi ndow mot or.
Power Wi ndow Mast er Swi t c h
Repl acement
4-door
1. Car ef ul l y r emove t he power wi ndow mast er swi t c h
(A).
2. Di sc onnec t t he 37P connect or (B) f r om t he power
wi ndow mast er swi t c h, and t he 13P connect or (C)
f r om t he power mi rror swi t c h (D).
3. Remove t he f our s c r ews and t he power wi ndow
mast er swi t ch (A).
4. Inst al l t he swi t ch in t he r ever se or der of r emoval .
22-280).
22-305
Power Wi ndows
Power Window Master Switch
2-door
2. Di sc onnec t t he 37P connect or (A) f r om t he power
wi ndow mast er swi t c h (B) and t he 13P c onnec t or f r om
t he power mi r r or swi t c h.
3. Remove t he swi t c h panel and ar mr est f r om t he door
4. Remove t he f our s c r ews and t he power wi ndow
mast er swi t ch (A).
f
5. Install t he swi t c h i n t he r ever se or der of r emoval .
22-280).
F ront Passenger's Power Window
Switch Replacement
4-door .
1. Car ef ul l y r emove t he f ront passenger ' s power
wi ndow swi t ch (A).
2. Di sconnect t he 37P connect or (B) f r om t he front
passenger ' s power wi ndow swi t c h.
3. Remove t he f our s c r ews and t he f ront passenger ' s
power wi ndow swi t c h (A).
?
4. Inst al l t he swi t c h i n t he r ever se or der of r emoval .
5. Wi t h AUTO UP/ AUTO DOWN f unct i on; Reset t he
power wi ndow cont rol uni t (see page 22-280).
22-306
1. Remove t he passenger ' s door panel (see page 20-12).
2. Di sconnect t he 37P connect or (A) f r om t he
passenger ' s power wi ndow swi t ch (B).
A
3. Remove t he swi t ch panel and ar mr est f rom the door
4. Remove t he f our sc r ews and t he passenger ' s power
wi ndow swi t ch (A).
?
6. Wi t h AUTO UP/ AUTO DOWN f unct i on: Reset t he
power wi ndow cont rol uni t (see page 22-280).
Rear Power Wi ndow Swi Mn
Test /Repl ac ement
1. Car ef ul l y r emove t he rear power wi ndow swi t ch (A).
B
A
2. Di sc onnec t t he 14P connect or (B) f r om t he rear power
wi ndow swi t c h.
3. Remove t he t hree s c r ews and t he r ear power wi ndow
swi t c h (A).
4. S wap t he rear power wi ndow swi t ch wi t h anot her
known-good rear power wi ndow swi t ch and t est . If
t he ori gi nal power wi ndow swi t ch i s faulty; r epl ace it.
22-307
Wi per s/Washer s
input Test, page 22-317
WIPER B L A DE S
WI PER/ WAS HER SWI TCH
WIPER ARMS
and L I NK AGE
Adjustment:
4-door, page 22-327
2-door, page 22-328
DRI VER' S MICU
(Bui l t i nt o t he dr i v er s
Test, page 22-315
Replacement:
WIPER CONTROL CI RCUI T
(Bui l t i nt o t he under -hood f use/ r el ay box)
Test:
'08-09 models, page 22-94
'10 model, page 22-96
WINDSHIELD WIPER MOTOR
Test:
4-door, page 22-319
2-door, page 22-320
22-308
Replacement, page 22-321 WINDSHIELD WASHER MOTOR
Test, page 22-320
22-
Wi per s/Washer s
Ci rcui t Di agram
' ' "<r \ j D ' f -" > crxj D
F11
B 9 *
6
B 12*
7
F30
PUR
B 10*
6
B 14*
7
F8
YE L / B L U
- W H T
IGNITION S WI TCH
B AT
IG'I
DRIVER'S
UNDE R- DA S H F US E / RE L A Y BOX
B LU
IG1 HOT i n ON (II)
and START (III)
No. 3 (15 A)
e r a )
No. 5 (7.5 A)
No. 4 (7.5 A)
DRIVER'S MICU
BLK Y EL B LU W H T
ORN WHT
L O
411]
WI NDS HI EL D
WI PER MOTOR
2 [4]
1
WIPER/WASHER SWITCH
G301
XL
G301
22"* 310
DRI VER' S
UNDER- DAS H F US E / RE L A Y B OX
DRI VER' S MI CU
B-CAN B-CAN
HI L O
S TOP S W
! A T P P
L .
PG PG SG SG
Q1 R5 02 R2
BL K BL K BRN BRN
PNK
BRN
PNK
BL U
BRAK E PEDAL
POSITION S WI TCH
y
! GRN
X L X L _Q_ _0_
G502 G502 G501 G501
D
RA NGE S WI TCH
( Cl os ed:
1 0
In P posi t i on)
X L
| G101
* 1: Wi nds hi el d wi per mot or r el ay c i r c ui t
* 2: Wi nds hi el d wi per i nt er mi t t ent r el ay c i r c ui t
* 3: Wi nd s h i el d HI GH/ L OW r el ay c i r c ui t
*4: LX, L X PZEV, L X- P, and L X- P PZE V
* 6: ' 08- 09 mo d el s
* 7: ' 10 model
[ ] : 2-door
- - : B- CAN l i ne
(A/T)
DRI VE R' S
J UNCTI ON
B 0 X 1
B L U PNK BRN PNK
PA S S E NGE R' S
UNDE R- DAS H
B-CAN B-CAN IG1
HI L O
A37
BL K BL K BL K BL K
G505 G201 G505 G201 |
z (' 08-09 mo d el s )
5 t
(M)
S G SG PG |
WI NDS HI EL D
WA S HE R
MOTOR
BL K BL K
L
G 5 0 5
SL
G201 G201 |
(' 10 model )
J L L
G201
X L
G651
GA UGE
CONTROL
MODUL E
V
BL U
(9
WA S HE R FL UI D
L E VE L S WI TCH
(Cl os ed:
Fl oat down)
XL
G201 J
( Canada model s )
22-311
Wi per s/Washer s
DTC B1077: Wi ndshi el d Wi per Aut o-st op (AS)
Si gnal Ci rcui t Malfuncti on
2. Tur n t he i gni ti on swi t ch to L OCK (0), and t he wi per
swi t c h ON.
3. Tur n t he wi per swi t c h to L OW or HIGH f or at l east 15
. s ec onds , t hen t urn t he swi t ch OFF.
NOTE: If t he wi ndshi el d wi per mot or does not r un, go
to st ep 7.
Does t he wiper arms st op at t he AUTO STOP (park)
posit ion?
NO- Go to st ep 5.
YE S - Ch ec k f or l oose or poor connect i ons at t he
dr i ver ' s MICU and t he wi ndshi el d wi per mot or. If t he
c onnec t i ons ar e OK, subst i t ut e a known-good dr i ver ' s
MICU(dr i ver ' s under -dash f use/r el ay box), and
r echeck. If t he DTC does not r eappear , r epl ace t he
Chec k for l oose or poor c o nnec t i o ns .
6. Chec k t he No. 3-7 (WIP MTR) (30 A) f use i n t he
Is t he fuse OK?
NO-Repl ac e t he f use, and r echeck t he syst em. ._
7. Do t he wi per mot or t est (see page 22-320).
Is t he windshield wiper mot or OK?
NO-Repl ac e t he wi ndshi el d wi per mot or and
r ec hec k . B
8. Rec onnec t t he wi per mot or 5P connect or .
wi ndshi el d wi per mot or 5P connect or t er mi nal No. 3
wi t h t he wi per swi t ch ON (Low), and measur e t he
vol t age bet ween body gr ound and wi ndshi el d wi per
mot or 5P connect or t er mi nal No. 5 wi t h t he wi per
swi t ch ON (Hi gh) i ndi vi dual l y.
WINDSHIEL D WIPER MOTOR 5P CONNECTOR
4-door 2-door
WIP L O
(BLU)
WIP HI
(YEL )
WIP HI
(YEL )
WIP L O
UL U)
NO-Tes t t he wi ndshi el d wi per rel ay ci rcui t (see page
22-93). If t he rel ay ci rcui t i s OK, check t er mi nal s F7 and
F8 of dr i ver ' s under -dash f use/r el ay box connect or F
(33P) usi ng t he i nput t est (see page 22-315). If t he
i nput t est s pr ove OK , r epl ace t he dr i ver ' s under -dash
f use/r el ay box (see page 22-86). If t he r el ay ci rcui t i s
f aul t y, r epl ace t he left engi ne compar t ment wi r e
har ness, US A model s (see page 22-86), Canada
model s (see page 22- 87) .
22-312
wi ndshi el d wi per mot or 5P c onnec t or t er mi nal No. 2
[ No. 4] .
[ ] : 2-door
WINDSHIELD WIPER MOTOR 5P CONNECTOR
4-door 2-door
2 3
\ 4 5 /
GND
(BLK)
\4T57
GND
(BLK)
YES - Repai r an open or hi gh r esi st ance i n t he BL U
(low) or YE L (hi gh) wi r e. H
NO-Repai r an open or hi gh r esi st ance in t he BL K wi r e
or poor gr ound (G301 ) .
DTC B1281: Front Wi per Swi t ch MIST Posi ti on
DTC B1282: Front Wi per Swi t ch INT Posi ti on
DTC B1283: Front Wi per Swi t ch LOW Posi ti on
DTC B1284: Front Wi per Swi t ch HIGH Posi ti on
ON (II).
3. Tur n t he wi per swi t ch to t he MIST, INT, L OW, HIGH,
and OFF posi t i ons, and wai t f or at l east 6 sec onds.
Are DTCs B1281, B1282, B1283, and/or B1284
indicated?
NO-l nt er mi t t ent f ai l ur e, t he wi ndshi el d wi per syst em
i s OK at t hi s t i me. Check for l oose or poor
c o nnec t i o ns .
5. Sel ec t WIPER f r om t he BODY EL ECTRI CAL menu, and
ent er t he DATA L IST.
6. Chec k eac h wi per swi t ch posi t i on val ue wi t h t he
DATA L IST menu.
When t he wi per swi t c h i s t ur ned OFF
Dat a Li st Val ue
Wi per swi t ch (LOW) OFF
Wi per swi t ch (HIGH) OFF
Wi per swi t ch (MIST) OFF
Wi per swi t ch (INT) OFF
Are all data list values correct?
NO- Go to st ep 10.
(cont' d)
22-313
Wi per s/Washer s
connect or R (24P).
f use/r el ay box c onnec t or R (24P) t er mi nal s as s hown:
15 (ORN) 1( BL U)
16 (WHT)
17 (GRN)
17 (GRN) 1 (BLU)
16 (WHT)
YES - Repai r a shor t bet ween t he wi r es .B
22-86), Canada model s (see page 22- 87) . !
11. Di sconnect t he 8P c onnec t or f r om t he wi per swi t c h.
13. Check eac h wi per swi t c h posi t i on val ue wi t h t he
DATA L I ST menu.
Dat a Li st Val ue
Wi per swi t c h (LOW) OFF
Wi per swi t c h (HIGH) OFF
Wi per swi t c h (MIST) OFF
Wi per swi t c h (INT) OFF
YES - Repl ac e t he wi per /washer s w i t c h . !
NO- Go to st ep 14.
connect or R (24P).
CONNE CTORR (24P)
n m
j = !
n n
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
/
10
/ /
13 14 15 16 17 18
/ /
21 22
WIP I NT& L O
S W (ORN)
WIP HI & L O
S W (WHT)
WIP MIST
S W (GRN)
YES - Repai r a shor t to gr ound i n t he wi r e. B
f use/r el ay box connect or R (24P) t er mi nal No. 4 and
CONNECTOR R (24P)
COMBI GND (BLK)
14 15
WIP
I NT& L O
S W (ORN)
16 17 18
WIP MI ST
S W (GRN)
WIP HI & L O
SW (WHT) \/Vire side of female terminals
YES - Repai r a shor t bet ween t he wi r e.B
MICU Input Test
NOTE; Before t est i ng, troubleshoot the multiplex integrated control unit fi rst, usi ng B-CAN System Di agnosi s Test Mode A (see page 22-134).
Dr i v er s MICU
1. Turn the ignition swi t ch to LOCK (0), and remove the dri ver' s dashboard lower cover (see page 20-166).
2. Di sconnect dri ver' s under-dash f use/rel ay box connectors F, Q, and R.
NOTE; AH connector vi ews are wi re si de of female t ermi nal s.
GRN* ORN /
CONNECTOR F (33P)
YE L / B L U
WHT
,WHT
J l 2
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 J10 11 12
13 14
[
20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28(29 30
31 32
T
15 16 17 18
19
33
L TGRN PUR
CONNECTOR Q (20P)
BL K BRN
1 2 3
/ A
/ /
8
7
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 20
CONNECTOR R (24P)
BRN BL K BL K
*: A / T
1 2 3
3J 0L -
4 5 6 7 8 7 10
/
J I
/
13 14 15 16 17 18
/ /
21 22
/ /
ST]
ORN WHT \
YE L
GRN
3. Inspect the connector and socket terminals to be sure they are all making good contact.
If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary and recheck the system.
If the terminals look OK, go to step 4.
4. With the connectors still disconnected, do these input tests at the following connectors.
If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system.
If all the input tests prove OK, go to step 5.
Cavi ty Wi re Test condi ti on Test : Desi red resul t Possi bl e cause if desi red result i s not
obtai ned
F7
F30
ORN
PUR
Under all conditions Connect terminals F l 1, F30, and the terminal
F7 to body ground:
The wiper motor should run at high speed.
Blown No. 3-7 (WIP MTR) (30 A) fuse in the
F aulty under-hood fuse/relay box
F aulty relay circuit board
F aulty windshield wiper motor
Poor ground (G301) or an open in the
ground wire
An open or high resistance in the wire
F8 YEL/
BLU
Run the wiper motor by
connecting terminals F 11,
F30, and terminal F7 to
body ground.
Connect terminal F8 to body ground:
The wiper motor speed should change from
high speed to low speed.
F aulty under-hood fuse/relay box
F aulty relay circuit board
F9 WHT Run the wiper motor by
connecting terminals F 11,
F30, and terminal F7 to
body ground.
Check for continuity to ground:
The needle of the ohmmeter should pulse.
NOTE: Use an ohmmeter.
(cont'd)
22315
Wi per s/Washer s
5. Reconnect the connectors to the dri ver' s under-dash f use/rel ay box, turn the ignition swi tch to ON ( I I ) , and do t hese input tests at the
followi ng connect ors.
If any test i ndi cates a probl em, find and correct the c ause, then recheck the syst em.
If all the input tests prove OK, got o st ep 6.
Cavi t y Wi re Test condi t i on Test : Desi red resul t Possi bl e cause if desi red result i s not
obtai ned
Q1 BLK In all ignition swi t ch
posi ti ons
Measure the voltage to ground: Ther e
shoul d be l ess than 0.2 V
cr ground (G502) or an open in the
ground wi re
o An open or high resi st ance in the wi re
Q2 BRN In all ignition swi t ch
posi ti ons
Measure the voltage to ground:
There shoul d be l ess than 0.2 V.
ground wi re
c Ar. open or high resi st ance in the wi re
R2 BRN In all ignition swi t ch
posi ti ons
c
p
c o r ground (G501) or an open in the
ground wi re
An open or high resi st ance in the wi re
R5 BLK In all ignition swi t ch
posi ti ons
Measure the voltage to ground: There
shoul d be l ess than 0.2 V
ground wi re
1
open or high resi st ance in the wi re
F11 WHT Under all condi ti ons Measure the voltage to ground: .
There shoul d be battery voltage.
o Blown No. 15 (10 A) fuse in the
under-hood f use/relay box
Dpen or high resi st ance in the wi re
F4
(A/T)
GRN Tr ansmi ssi on range
swi tch in P
^
p
r ground (G101) or an open in the
ground wi re
Faulty or i mproperly adj usted
t ransmi ssi on range swi tch
F4
(A/T)
GRN
Tr ansmi ssi on range
swi tch in any other
position than P
There shoul d be about 5 V.
Blown No. 10 (20 A) fuse in the
A short to power in the wi re
F20 LT
GRN
Brake pedal pr essed Measure the voltage to ground:
Faulty brake pedal position swi tch
F20 LT
GRN
Brake pedal rel eased Measure the voltage to ground:
There shoul d be no voltage.
Faulty brake pedal posi ti on swi tch
A short to power in the wi re
R15
R4
ORN
BLK .
Wi per swi t ch (INT or LO)
ON
Measure the voltage between termi nals R15
and R4:
e Faulty wi per/washer swi tch
R15
R4
ORN
BLK .
Wi per swi t ch OFF Measure the voltage between t ermi nal s R15
and R4:
Faulty wi per/washer swi tch
A short to ground in the wi re
R16
R4
WHT
BLK
Wi per swi t ch (LO or HI)
ON
Measure the voltage between termi nals R16
and R4:
9 Faulty wi per/washer swi tch
R16
R4
WHT
BLK
and R4:
9 Faulty wi per/washer swi tch
9 A short to ground in the wi re
R17
R4
GRN
BLK
Wi per swi t ch (MIST) ON Measure the voltage between t ermi nal s R17
and R4:
R17
R4
GRN
BLK
and R4:
R18
R4
YEL
BLK
Washer swi t ch ON Measure the voltage between t ermi nal s R18
and R4:
9 An open or high resi st ance in the wi re
R18
R4
YEL
BLK
Washer swi t ch OFF Measure the voltage between termi nals R18
and R4:
9 A short to ground in the wi re
22-316
Passenger's MICU
6. Turn the ignition swi tch to LOCK (0), and remove the passenger ' s kick panel.
7. Di sconnect passenger ' s under-dash f use/relay box connectors A, E, G
# 1
and H*
2
.
*2: Except LX, LX PZEV, L X-P, LX-P PZEV
NOTE: AH connector vi ews are wi re si de of female t ermi nal s.
CONNECTOR A (33P)
CONNECTOR G(16P)
(LX, LX PZEV, LX-P, LX-P PZEV)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
9
/
11 12 13 14 15 16
PNK BRN BLK* BL K
CONNECTOR E (18P)
GRN
BL K
CONNECTOR H (38P)
(Exc ept L X, L X PZEV, LX-P)
/
2
/
/
5 6 7 8 9
10
/
12 13
/
15 16
7 T
BL K BL K
r
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
l
2 1 22 23 24 25 26 27
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
/
29
/
31
/
V
/ /
37
*: ' 08-09 model s
BL K
8. With the connectors still di sconnect ed, make t hese input tests at the connect ors.
If any test i ndi cates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the syst em.
If all the input t est s prove OK, go to step 9.
Cavi ty Wi re Test condi ti on Test : Desi red result Possi bl e cause if desi red resul t i s not
obtai ned
A31 PNK Ignition swi tch ON (II) Measure the voltage to ground: There
shoul d be battery voltage.
Blown No.5 (7.5 A) fuse in the dri ver' s
under-dash fuse/relay box
Faulty dri ver' s under-dash f use/relay box
E9 GRN Ignition swi tch ON (II) Connect termi nals A31 and the E9 wi th a
j umper wi re:
The washer motor shoul d run.
ground wi re
Faulty washer motor
( c o nt ' d)
22- 317
Wi per s/Washer s
MICU Input Test (cont'd)
9. Reconnect the connectors to the passenger's under-dash fuse/relay box, and do these input tests at the following connectors.
If all the input tests prove OK, Go to step 10.
Cav i t y Wire Test condition Tes t : Des i r ed r es ul t Po s s i b l e c au s e i f d es i r ed r es ul t i s no t
o b t ai ned
A37 BLK In all ignition switch
positions
There should be less than 0.2 V
ground wire
A36
M
BLK In all ignition switch
positions
ground wire
E15 BLK In all ignition switch
positions
ground wire
E16 BLK In all ignition switch
positions
ground wire
E15 BLK Under all conditions Measure the voltage to ground:
There should be less than 0.5 V.
ground wire
G16*
2
BLK Under all conditions Measure the voltage to ground:
There should be less than 0. 5 V.
ground wire
H 2T
3
BLK Under all conditions Measure the voltage to ground:
ground wire
A31 PNK Ignition switch ON (II) Measure the voltage to ground:
There should be battery voltage.
Blown No. 3 (15 A) fuse in the driver's
F aulty driver's under-dash fuse/relay box
A35 BRN Ignition switch ON (II) Measure the voltage to ground:
Blown No. 5 (7.5 A) fuse in the driver's
F aulty driver's under-dash fuse/relay box
* 1: '08-09 models
10. If multiple failures are found on more than one control unit, replace the driver's under-dash fuse/relay box (includes the driver's MICU).
USA models (see page 22-86)
Canada models (see page 22-87)
If input failures are related to a particular control unit, replace the control unit.
22- 318
L
Bom
Wi per /Washer Swi t c h
Test /Repl acement
1. Remove t he st eer i ng c ol umn c over s {see page
20-181).
2. Di sconnect t he dashboar d wi r e har ness 8P connect or
(A) f r om t he wi per /washer swi t ch (B).
1 3 4
5 6 7
3. Remove t he t wo s c r ews , t hen sl i de out t he
wi per /washer swi t c h.
4. Inspect t he connect or t er mi nal s to be sur e t hey ar e all
maki ng good cont act .
If t he t er mi nal s ar e bent , l oose or c or r oded, repai r
t hem as nec essar y, and r echeck t he syst em.
5. Chec k f or cont i nui t y bet ween t he t er mi nal s in eac h
\ ^ Terminal
Position
N
\
1 2 3 4 s 8
OF F
INT
r\
INT
\J \J
LO
o O
o
HI
a
o
Mist ON
o
o
Washer ON
C\ C\
Washer ON
\J
I ntermittent dwell
timer turned
o o
Wi per Mo t o r Test
4-door
1. Remove t he dr i ver ' s si de wi per ar m (see page
22-321).
2. Remove t he left si de c owl c over (see page 22-321).
3. Di sconnect 5P connect or (A) f rom t he wi ndshi el d
wi per mot or (B).
t er mi nal No. 3 and gr ound to t er mi nal No. 2 of t he
wi per mot or connect or 5P connect or . The mot or
shoul d run at l ow speed.
t er mi nal No. 5 and gr ound to t ermi nal No. 2 of t he
wi per mot or 5P connect or . The mot or shoul d run at
hi gh speed.
6. Connec t an anal og ohmmet er t o t er mi nal s No. 4 and
No. 2, and run t he mot or at l ow or hi gh speed. The
needl e of t he ohmmet er shoul d pul se.
7. If t he mot or does not run or f ai l s to run smoot hl y, or
t here i s no pul se, r epl ace t he mot or.
22-319
Wi pers/Washers
Wiper Motor Test (cont'd)
2-door
1. Remove the driver's side wiper arm (see page
22-321).
2. Remove the left side cowl cover (see page 22-321).
3. Disconnect 5P connector (A) from the windshield
wiper motor (B).
4. Test the motor by connecting battery power to
terminal No. 3 and ground to terminal No. 4 of the
wiper motor 5P connector. The motor should run at
low speed.
wiper motor 5P connector. The motor should run at
high speed.
6. Connect an analog ohmmeter to terminals No. 1 and
No. 4, and run the motor at low or high speed. The
needle of the ohmmeter should pulse.
7. If the motor does not run or fails to run smoothly, or
there is no pulse, replace the motor.
Washer Motor Test
1. Remove the right inner fender (see page 20-290).
2. Disconnect the 2P connector (A) from the windshield
washer motor (B).
USA models
A
washer motor. The motor should run.
If the motor does not run or fails to run smoothly,
replace it.
If the motor runs smoothly, but little or no washer
fluid is pumped, check for a disconnected or
blocked washer hose, or a clogged washer motor
outlet.
22-320
Washer Flui d Level Swi t c h Test Wi per Motor Repl acement
Canada model s
1. Remove t he ri ght i nner f ender (see page 20-290).
2. Di sconnect t he 2P connect or (A) f r om t he washer f l ui d
l evel swi t ch (B).
3. Remove t he washer f l ui d l evel swi t ch f r om t he
washer r eser voi r .
NOTE: Fl ui d may f l ow out of t he openi ng.
2 in eac h f l oat posi t i on.
Ther e shoul d be cont i nui t y when t he f l oat i s down.
9 Ther e shoul d be no cont i nui t y when t he f l oat i s up.
Removal
1. Open t he hood. Remove t he c aps (A) and nut s (B).
2. Cl ose t he hood, t hen spr ead prot ect i ve cl ot hs (A) on
t he hood to avoi d scr at chi ng t he hood edge.
NOTE: The i l l ust rat i on shows 4-door.
B
3. Rai se t he wi per ar ms (B) off t he wi ndshi el d, t hen
r emove t he wi per ar ms.
(cont' d)
22-321
Wipers/Washers
Wi per Motor Repl acement (cont' d}
4. Remove t he hood seal and cowl c over s (A).
NOTE: The i l l ust rat i on s hows 4-door .
5. Di sconnect t he har ness cl i p and 5 P connect or (A)
f r om t he wi ndshi el d wi per mot or (B).
4- d o o r
6. Remove t he f our bolts and wi per l i nkage assembl y
(C).
7. Separate the linkage (A) from the link (B).
4-door
D
31.5 N-m
(3.2 kgf-m, 23.2 ibf-ft)
2-door
D
18 N-m
8. Note the position (C), then remove the nut (D) and the
link f r om t he wi ndshi el d wi per mot or (E).
9. Remove the three bolts, and separate the windshield
wi per mot or f rom t he li nkage (F).
Inst al l at i on
1 Bef ore i nst al l i ng t he mot or , c onnec t t he 5P connect or
to t he wi ndshi el d wi per mot or , and t urn t he
wi per /washer swi t c h ON to (LO) or (HI) posi t i on, t hen
OF F to ret urn t he mot or shaf t t o t he park posi t i on.
NOTE:
Do not use t he wi per /washer swi t c h (INT) posi t i on
i n t hi s st ep.
If nec essar y, r epl ace any damaged c l i ps.
Appl y mul t i pur pose gr ease to t he movi ng par t s.
2. Install t he wi per mot or to t he wi ndshi el d wi per
l i nkage assembl y i n t he r ever se or der of r emoval .
3. Install t he link to t he wi ndshi el d wi per mot or shaf t ,
t hen al i gn t he mark (A) of t he link and t he mark (B) of
t he wi per l i nkage assembl y (4-door ), or al i gn t he link
(A) and t he mar k (B) of t he wi per l i nkage assembl y
(2-door).
4-door
2-door
B
4. Af t er i nst al l at i on, adj ust t he wi per ar ms (see page
22-327).
22-323
Wi per s/Washer s
W a s h e r R e s e r v o i r R e p l a c e m e n t
1. Remove t he ri ght i nner f ender (see page 20-290).
2. Di sc onnec t t he 2P connect or (s) (A) f r om t he was her
mot or (B) and t he washer f l ui d l evel swi t ch (Canada
model s).
Was her Reser voi r Capac i t y:
2.5 L (2.64 US qt ): US A model s
4. 5 L (4.75 US qt ): Canada model s
US A model s
Canada model s
3. Di sc onnec t t he washer t ube (C), t hen if nec essar y,
r emove t he was her mot or and t he was her f l ui d l evel
swi t c h (D) (Canada model s).
NOTE: Fl ui d may f l ow out of t he openi ng.
4. Remove t he cl i p (A) and t hr ee bolts f r om t he was her
r eser voi r (B).
9.8 N m
(1.0 kgf -m, 7.2 Ibf f t )
5. Install t he was her r eser voi r i n t he r ever se or der of
r emoval . Chec k t he washer mot or oper at i on.
22-324
Wi per Blade Repl acement
Removal
1. Lift the wiper arms off the windshield.
2. Pull up and hold the tab (A), and slide the wiper blade
assembl y (B) t owar d t he t abs unti l it r el eases f rom t he
wi per ar m (C).
NOTE: The i llustrati on shows 4-door .
3. Pull back t he end of t he bl ade and sl i de out t he ol d
bl ade (A).
NOTE: The i llustrati on shows 4-door .
installation
1. Al i gn t he gr oove (A) of t he eac h rai l (B) and a new
bl ade ( C ) .
4-door
B C
2. Inst al l t he new bl ade wi t h t he rai l s into t he bl ade
hol der i n t he r ever se or der of r emoval .
(cont d)
22-325
Wi per s/Washer s
Wi per Bl ade Repl acement (cont' d)
3. I ns tal l t h e wi p e r b l a d e a s s e mb l i e s o n t o t h e wi p e r
a r ms i n t h e r e ve r s e o r d e r o f r e mo v a l .
4. Test t h e wi p e r s b y t u r n i n g t h e wi p e r s wi t c h o n , I f t h e
bl a de s sl i p, t u r n t h e wi p e r s wi t c h off a n d s e a t t h e
wi p e r bl a de s e c ur e l y.
22-326
Wi per Ar m/Nozzl e Adj ust ment
4-door
1. Tur n t he wi per swi t ch ON, and t hen back OFF.
2. W h e n t h e w i p e r a r m s s t o p at t h e p a r k p o s i t i o n , c o n f i r m t h at t h e y a r e at t h e s t a n d a r d posi t i on.
a: Posi t i on at about 1.4 i n (35.5 mm) f r om t he t op of cowl c over (A),
b: Posi t i on at about 1.4 i n (35.5 mm) f r om t he t op of cowl c over (A).
C
3. When you t urn on t he washer (s), conf i r m 50 % or mor e of t he washer f l ui d l ands wi t hi n t he spr ay ar ea. If t he spr ay
ar ea i s not wi t hi n t he st andar d posi t i ons, adj ust t he nozzl e(s).
d: Posi t i on at about 6.6 i n (167.6 mm) f r om t he top of t he bl ack c er ami c ar ea (B) at t he l ower wi ndshi el d,
e: Posi t i on at about 6.6 i n (167.6 mm) f r om t he top of t he bl ack c er ami c ar ea (B) at t he l ower wi ndshi el d,
f: Posi t i on at about 9.8 i n (250 mm) f r om t he wi ndshi el d cent er li ne (C).
2
0 0 7
Wi per s/Washer s
Wi per Ar m/Nozzl e Adj ust ment (cont' d)
2-door
1. Tur n t he wi per swi t ch ON, and t hen back OFF.
2. When t he wi per ar ms st op at t he park posi t i on, conf i r m t hat t hey ar e at t he st andar d posi t i on.
a: Posi t i on at about 1.3 in (32.2 mm) f r om t he t op of c owl c over (A),
b: Posi t i on at about 1.4 in (34.5 mm) f r om t he t op of c owl c over (A).
c
3. When you t urn on t he washer (s), conf i r m 50 % or mor e of t he washer f l ui d l ands wi t hi n t he spr ay ar ea. If t he spr ay
ar ea i s not wi t hi n t he st andar d posi t i ons, adj ust t he nozzl e(s).
d: Posi t i on at about 5.9 in (149 mm) f r om t he t op of t he bl ack c er ami c ar ea (B) at t he l ower wi ndshi el d,
e: Posi t i on at about 5.9 in (149 mm) f r om t he t op of t he bl ack c er ami c ar ea (B) at t he l ower wi ndshi el d,
f: Posi t i on at about 9.8 in (250 mm) f r om t he wi ndshi el d cent er li ne (C).
g: Posi t i on at about 14.6 in (370 mm) f r om t he wi ndshi el d cent er li ne (C).
Washer Tube Repl acement
1. Remove t he ri ght f ront i nner f ender (see page 20-290).
2. Remove t he wi ndshi el d washer nozzl es and c l i ps, t hen r emove t he t ubes.
*1:USA models
*2: Canada models
3. Install i n t he r ever se order of r emoval . Take car e not to pi nch t he washer t ubes. Check t he washer oper at i on.
22-329
Gauges
WithHVAC control
Test, page 22-353
22*330
32P CONNECTOR
ENGINE COOLANT - ODO/TRIP DISPLAY F UEL GAUGE
TEMPERATURE GAUGE . OUTSIDE AIR TEMPERATURE DISPLAY
22-3
Gauges
Sel f -di agnost i c Funct i on
NOTE: Bef ore t est i ng, t r oubl eshoot t he mul t i pl ex i nt egrat ed cont rol uni t f i rst , usi ng B-CAN Syst em Di agnosi s Test Mode
The gauge cont rol modul e has a sel f -di agnost i c f unct i on whi c h c onsi st s of t he f ol l owi ng c hec ks:
The beeper dr i ve ci rcui t check.
The i ndi cat or dri ve ci rcui t check.
The swi t ch i nput t est .
The LCD segment s check.
The gauges dr i ve ci rcui t check (Tachomet er , Fuel gauge, Speedomet er , Engi ne cool ant t emper at ur e gauge.
The c ommuni c at i on li ne check (of t he body-cont r ol l er ar ea net work (B-CAN) c ommuni c at i on li ne and t he
f ast -cont r ol l er ar ea net work (F-CAN) c ommuni c at i on li ne bet ween t he gauges).
NOTE:
Indi cat ors ar e al so cont rol l ed vi a t he c ommuni c at i on l i nes.
Ent er i ng t he sel f -di agnost i c f unct i on wi t h t he HDS
Usi ng t he HDS, sel ect Body El ect r i cal , Gauges , t hen Funct i on Test and do t he sel f -di agnost i c f unct i on.
Ent er i ng thsel f dJ ^sncctSs fzizidlczt {^srsus! smithed)
Bef or e doi ng t he sel f -di agnost i c f unct i on, make sur e t he No. 5 (7.5 A) f use i n t he dr i ver ' s under -dash f use/r el ay box and
t he No. 15 (10 A) f use in t he under -hood f use/r el ay box ar e OK.
1. Push and hol d t he S E L / RE S E T button.
2. Tur n t he combi nat i on li ght swi t ch (-003 ON.
4. Wi t hi n 5 s e c , t urn t he combi nat i on li ght swi t c h Q)03 OFF, t hen ON and OFF agai n.
5. Wi t hi n 5 s e c , r el ease t he S E L / RE S E T but t on, and t hen push and r el ease t he burton t hr ee t i mes r epeat edl y.
NOTE:
Whi l e i n t he sel f -di agnost i c mode, t he dashl i ght s br i ght ness cont rol l er oper at es nor mal l y.
Whi l e i n t he sel f -di agnost i c mode, t he S E L / RE S E T swi t ch i s used to st art t he Beeper Dri ve Ci rcui t Test and t he Gauge
Dri ve Ci r cui t Check.
If t he vehi c l e speed exc eeds 1.2 mph (2 km/h) or t he i gni ti on swi t c h i s t ur ned to L OCK (0), t he sel f -di agnost i c mode
ends.
Igni t i on
Swi t c h
Combi nat i on
Li ght
S wi t c h GOOz) OFF
ON (II)
L OCK (0)
ON
S E L / Rt S t T
S wi t c h
ON
OFF
J u J u

-^m-
I T

-^m-
j - Move t o sel f -di agnost i c mode.
5 s ec . 5 s ec .
22-332
The Indi cat or Dri ve Ci rcui t Check
When ent eri ng t he sel f -di agnost i c mo d e, t he f ol l owi ng i ndi cat ors (if equi pped) bli nk:
A/ T gear posi t i on i ndi cat or, ABS i ndi cat or, brake syst em i ndi cat or, c har gi ng syst em i ndi cat or, c r ui se cont rol i ndi cat or,
cr ui se mai n i ndi cat or, door i ndi cat or, DRL i ndi cat or, hi gh beam i ndi cat or , i mmobi l i zer i ndi cat or, l i ght s-on i ndi cat or, l ow
oi l pr essur e i ndi cat or , l ow fuel i ndi cat or, l ow ti re pr essur e i ndi cat or, mal f unct i on i ndi cat or l amp (MIL), mai nt enance
requi red i ndi cat or, seat belt i ndi cat or, secur i t y i ndi cat or, si de ai r bag cutoff i ndi cat or, S RS i ndi cat or, TPMS i ndi cat or,
trunk i ndi cat or, VS A act i vat i on i ndi cat or, VS A i ndi cat or, and was her f l ui d l evel i ndi cat or (Canada model s).
Swi t c h Input Chec k
At t he i ni ti al st age of t he sel f -di agnost i c f unct i on, t he beeper sounds i nt ermi t t ent l y. The beeper sounds cont i nuousl y
when any of t he f ol l owi ng swi t ch i nput s are swi t c hed f rom OFF to ON:
Cr ui se cont rol mai n, S ET/ DECEL , RES UME/ ACCEL , CANCEL swi t c hes, S E L / RE S E T swi t c h, parki ng brake swi t c h, and
VS A OFF swi t c h.
The Beeper Dri ve Ci rcui t Chec k
When ent eri ng t he sel f -di agnost i c mode, t he beeper sounds f i ve t i mes.
The LCD Segment Check
When ent eri ng t he sel f -di agnost i c mode, all t he segment s bli nk f i ve t i mes.
The Gauge Dri ve Ci rcui t Check
When ent eri ng t he sel f -di agnost i c mode, t he speedomet er , t he t achomet er , t he f uel gauge, and t he engi ne cool ant
t emper at ur e gauge needl es sweep f r om t he mi ni mum posi t i on t o maxi mum posi t i on, t hen return to t he mi ni mum
posi t i on.
NOTE:
After t he beeper st ops soundi ng and t he gauge needl es return to t he mi ni mum posi t i on, pushi ng t he S E L / RE S E T button
st art s t he Beeper Dri ve Ci rcui t Chec k (one beep) and t he Gauge Dri ve Ci rcui t Chec k agai n.
The check cannot be st art ed agai n unti l t he gauge needl es ret urn to t he mi ni mum posi t i on.
^ The needles sweep from the
5 sec. minimum position to the
maximum position, then return
to the minimum position.
If t he needl es fai l to sweep, or t he beeper does not sound, r epl ace t he gauge cont rol modul e.
(cont' d)
22-333
Gauges
Self-diagnostic Function (cont'd)
The Communi cat i on Li ne Chec k
Whi l e in t he sel f -di agnost i c mode, t he Communi c at i on Li ne Chec k st ar t s after t he L CD Segment s Chec k.
If all segment s c ome on, t he c ommuni c at i on l i ne i s OK. If f aul t y, t he wor d Er r or wi l l be i ndi cat ed on t he odomet er di spl ay
f ol l owed by a number (s).
Er r or Code Li st
Er r or c ode T f pe of c ommuni c at i on i i ne(s) er r or
Er r or 1 F-CAN c ommuni c at i on
Er r or 2 B-CAN c ommuni c at i on
Er r or 12 M and B-CAN c ommuni c at i on
Exampl e Indi cat i on
If Er r or 1 i s i ndi cat ed, t her e i s a mal f unct i on i n t he c ommuni c at i on li ne bet ween t he F-CAN and t he gauge cont rol
modul e. The B-CAN i s OK at t hi s t i me. Chec k f or DTCs i n t he F-CAN c onnec t ed uni t s and t r oubl eshoot any DTCs f ound.
If no DTCs ar e f ound, go to B-CAN Syst em Di agnosi s Test Mode A (see page 22-134).
If Er r or 2 i s i ndi cat ed, t her e i s a mal f unct i on i n t he c ommuni c at i on li ne bet ween t he B-CAN and t he gauge cont rol
modul e. The F-CAN li ne i s OK at t hi s t i me. Go to B-CAN Sy s t em Di agnosi s Test Mode A (see page 22-134).
If Er r or 12 i s i ndi cat ed, t her e i s a mal f unct i on in t he c ommuni c at i on l i ne bet ween t he gauge cont rol modul e, t he
F-CAN, and t he B-CAN. Chec k t he DTCs i n t he F-CAN c onnec t ed uni t s and t r oubl eshoot any DTCs f ound. If no DTCs
ar e f ound, go to B-CAN Sy s t em Di agnosi s Test Mode A (see page 22-134).
Endi ng t he sel f -di agnost i c f unct i on
Tur n t he i gni ti on swi t ch to L OCK (0).
NOTE: If t he vehi c l e speed exc eeds 1.2 mph (2 km/h), t he sel f -di agnost i c f unct i on ends.
Nor mal (all s egment s c ome on.): Faul t y (Er r or 1):
-5J
22-334
22^335
Gauges
Ci rcui t Di agram
No. 1-1
(MAIN) (100 A)
cr\x)
No. 3-1
(IG MAIN) (50 A)
- CTVX3
No. 15 (10 A)
CTXJ O
DRIVER'S
UNDER-DASH
F U S E / R E L A Y B OX I GNI TI ON S WI TCH
/ B A T \
WHT -f-O O f - B L U
IG1 HOT i n ON (II)
and S T A RT (III)
DRI VE R' S
UNDE R- DA S H
F16 C1
WHT BRN
16 32
COOL A NT
TEMPERATUMb
TA CHOME TE R S PE E DOME TE R F UE L GA UGE GA UGE
POWE R S UPPL Y CI RCUI T/
CONTROL L E R A RE A NE TWORK CONTROL L E R
F-CAN TRA NS CE I VE R
CA NL CANH
B-CAN TRA NS CE I VE R
B-CAN B-CAN
HI L O
4 *
2.6 kO
1
_ J _
T
I NDI CATOR ( v ) IN
(L ED) ^ (LI
lun BCMi V
NDI CATOR
.ED)
5 V
CONTROL
CI RCUI T
BL I NK I NG DI MMI NG
CI RCUI T CI RCUI T
ON/ OFF
5 V
S 29
t
RE D
I
I
I 30
i
i
WHT
I
I
PNK
I
I 18
I
BL U
I
I I
E CM/ PCM
S RS UNI T
VS A MODUL A TOR-
CONTROL UNI T
DATA L INK CONNE CTOR
TPMS CONTROL UNI T
A CCE L E RA TI ON S E NS OR
NAVI GATI ON UNI T
i i
V V
DRI VER' S MI CU
CONTROL UNI T
DOOR MUL TI PL E X CONTROL UNI T
AUDI O UNI T
E2 E3
G2 G8
DRI VER' S
J UNCTI ON
BOX 1
F UE L
TANK
UNI T
FUE L
GA UGE
S ENDI NG
UNIT
22-336
CAN line
IMMOBILIZER
) INDICATOR
(LED)
ILLUMINATION
CONTROL &
DIMMING CIRCUIT
FOR POINTER (RED)
ILLUMINATION
CONTROL &
DIMMING CIRCUIT
FOR DIAL (WHITE)
ILLUMINATION
CONTROL &
DIMMING CIRCUIT
FOR LCD (WHITE)
10V
STABILIZING
CIRCUIT
I (LED)
) (LED) ) (LED)
POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT/
CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK CONTROLLER
i|,
1
,,
I M
,^l
M
,i|TRIP/
ILLUMI ILLUMI
(-)
TRIP/
RESET
SWITCH
ILLUMINATION Ii t
CONTROL *-
ILLUMINATION
CONTROL
A/T GEAR
POSITION
INDICATOR
DIMMING
CIRCUIT
Hz
A/T GEAR
POSITION
INDICATOR
INDICATOR
DIMMING
CIRCUIT
INDICATORS ,
(A/T)
17
BL K
AMBIENT LIGHT
SEAT HEATER
SWITCH LIGHTS
HAZARD WARNING
SWITCH/
PASSENGER' S
AIRBAG CUTOFF
INDICATOR LIGHT
AUDIO UNIT
STEERING SWITCHES LIGHT
VSA OFF SWITCH LIGHT
HVAC CONTROL UNIT
MOONROOF SWITCH LIGHT
AUDIO-HVAC
SUBDISPLAY UNIT
DRIVER'S CLIMATE
CONTROL SWITCH LIGHT
PASSENGER' S CLIMATE
CONTROL SWITCH LIGHT
A/T GEAR POSITION
INDICATOR PANEL LIGHT
G502
( c o n t d )
22-337
Gauges
COMP ULSORY
TURNI NG- ON
CIRCUIT
i COMPUL S ORYl
I U K I MI N G - U h h I
CI RCUI T
FAI L - S AFE
CI RCUI T
/ MA L F UNCTI ON
L AMP (MIL)
(L ED)
MI _ / I V^ /-\ i u n
(L ED)
SRS
l UMi u m I I M U I C A T GR
(L ED) (L ED)
MAI NTENANCE
REQUIRED
I NDI CATOR
(LED)
S I DE AI RBAG !
C U T O F F
I NDI CATOR |
(L ED)
WA S HE R '
FRUI D L E VE L I
I NDI CATOR( L ED) '
(Canada model s )
I NDI CATOR DRI VE CI RCUI T
CONTROL L E R A RE A NE TWORK CONTROL L E R
ON/ OFF 5 V
"1 l i
;
- i ' A / T nPA R
A/ T GE A R
POS I TI ON
' I NDI CATOR
DRI VE
CI RCUI T
1 I NDI CA TOR-
DI MMI NG
CI RCUI T
(A/T)
CRUI S E
CONTROL
I NDI CATOR
(L ED)
CRUI S E
MAIN
I NDI CATOR
(L ED)
L I GHTS - ON
I NDI CATOR
(L ED)
B L U Y E L L T GRN GRY
V V A A
WA S HE R FL UI D
L E VE L S WI TCH
(Cl os ed: Fl oat down)
G 201
VS A OF F
S WI TCH
CRUI S E CONTROL
COMBI NATI ON
S WI TCH
_l
( Canada mo d el s )
DRI VER' S MICU
(TURN/SIGNAL/
HAZARD WARNI NG
L I GHTS CI RCUI T)
BLU
10
GRN
9
GA UGE
CONTROL
MODULE
DRL
INDICATOR
(LED)
VSA
ACTIVATION
INDICATOR
(LED)
LOW
FUEL
INDICATOR
(LED)
TPMS
INDICATOR
(LED)
LOW TIRE
PRESSURE
INDICATOR
(LED)
LOW OIL
PRESSURE
INDICATOR
(LED)
CHARGING
SYSTEM
INDICATOR
(LED)
SEAT BELT
REMINDER
INDICATOR
(LED)
\BRAKE
I SYSTEM
INDICATOR
(LED)
INDICATOR DRIVE CIRCUIT
I POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT/
CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK CONTROLLER
-AAAr
WV-
LEFT
TURN
SIGNAL
INDICATOR
(LED)
RIGHT
TURN
SIGNAL
INDICATOR
(LED)
TURN SIGNAL/
HAZARD RELAY
BRN GRN LTGRN
DRIVER'S
JUNCTION
BOX1
GRN
2
BRAKE FLUID
LEVEL SWITCH
(Closed: Float down)
G501
BLK
G302
. PARKING
' BRAKE SWITCH
(Closed: Lever pulled)
Gauges
DTC 81152: Gauge Control Module (EEPROM)
Error
ON (II).
Y E S - R e p l a c e t he gauge cont rol modul e (see page
22-351 ) .
NO- l nt er mi t t ent f ai l ur e, t he syst em i s OK at t hi s
t i me. B
DTC B1175: F uel Level Sensor (F uel Gauge
Sending Unit) Circuit Malfunction
ON (II).
NO- l nt er mi t t ent f ai l ur e, t he f uel l evel sensor ci rcui t i s
r w at t h i o Chec k f c r \zzzz zv p ^ ,
c o nnec t i o ns .
4. Test t he f uel gauge sendi ng uni t (see page 11-328).
Is t he fuel gauge sending unit OK?
N O - R e p l a c e t he f uel tank uni t .H
6. Wi t hout di sconnect i ng t he c onnec t or s, measur e t he
vol t age bet ween t er mi nal s No. 27 and No. 28 of t he
gauge cont rol modul e 32P connect or and t er mi nal s
No. 1 and No. 3 of t he fuel tank uni t 4P connect or .
Is t here less t han 0.2 V?
Y E S - R e p l a c e t he gauge cont rol modul e (see page
22-351 ) .
N O - R e p a i r t he l oose connect i on or open or hi gh
r esi st anc e in t he PUR or ORN wi r e bet ween t he gauge
cont rol modul e and t he f uel tank uni t . B
22-340
DTC B1176: Fuel Level Sensor (Fuel Gauge
Sendi ng Unit) Ci rcui t Short
NOTE: If you are t r oubl eshoot i ng mul t i pl e DTCs, be sur e
2. Tur n t he i gni ti on swi t ch to LOCK (0) and t hen back to
ON (II).
NO-l nt er mi t t ent f ai l ur e, t he fuel l evel sensor ci rcui t i s
OK at t hi s t i me. Check f or wor n/mi ssi ng i nsul at i on or
an i nt ernal short in the wi r e. H
6. Di sconnect t he f uel t ank uni t 4P connect or .
NO-Repl ac e the f uel gauge sendi ng uni t (see page
11- 324) *
11. Di sconnect t he gauge cont rol modul e 3 2 P connect or .
12. Check for cont i nui t y bet ween gauge cont rol modul e
\\2\A/\Ae
T- " "f
/ I 8 | 9 |10
/ Ml 3 l 4 /Tl6f
I17I18I19I/1/I22I23I24I25I26I27I28I29I30I/132
F UEL UNIT
(PUR) I
YES - Repai r a shor t in t he wi r e bet ween t he gauge
cont rol modul e and t he f uel tank uni t .H
NO- Repl ac e t he gauge cont rol modul e (see page
22-351 ) .
Gauges
DTC U0029: F-CAN Communi cat i on Li ne Er r or
(BUS-OFF)
NOTE:
Make sur e t he HDS c ommuni c at es wi t h t he ECM/ PCM
and ot her vehi c l e syst ems. If it does not , go to DL C
Ci r cui t Tr oubl eshoot i ng (see page 11-181).
f ol l ow t he i nst r uct i ons in B-CAN Sy s t em Di agnosi s
ON (II).
is DTC U0029 Indicated?
NO-l nt er mi t t ent f ai l ur e, t he F-CAN c ommuni c at i on
li ne i s OK at t hi s t i me. Check f or DTCs in t he ECM/ PCM
wi t h t he HDS. If F-CAN DTCs ar e pr esent , check f or
l oose or poor connect i ons at t he gauge cont rol
modul e and t he ECM/ PCM. If t he c onnec t i ons ar e
good, check t he battery condi t i on and t he char gi ng
s y s t em, t hen cl ear all DTCs . H
5. Chec k f or DTCs in t he ECM/ PCM wi t h t he HDS.
YE S - Go to t he i ndi cat ed ECM/ PCM DTCs
NO- Go to st ep 6.
6. Do t he gauge cont rol modul e i nput t est (see page
22-347).
Are ail inputs OK ?
NO-Repai r t he f ault y i nput , t hen r echeck t he DTCs . H
7. Subst i t ut e a known-good gauge cont rol modul e.
ON (II).
10. St ar t and run t he engi ne f or at l east 5 sec onds, t hen
t urn t he engi ne off.
NO-The ori gi nal gauge cont rol modul e i s f ault y;
r epl ace i t l l
ecf twcrc !: cc
P
y c 11-203), o r subst i t ut e a
13. Chec k f or Tempor ar y DTCs or DTCs wi t h t he HDS.
t he gauge cont rol modul e and t he ECM/ PCM. If t he
t he or i gi nal ECM/ PCM (see page 11-204).
DTC Ui l i O: Gauge Control Modul e Lost
Communi cat i on Wi th ECM/PCM
to f ol l ow t he i nst ruct i ons i n B-CAN Sy s t em Di agnosi s
ON (II).
3. St ar t and run t he engi ne for at l east 5 s ec onds , then
t urn t he engi ne off.
NO-l nt er mi t t ent f ai l ur e, t he F-CAN communi cat i on
li ne i s OK at t hi s t i me. Check for DTCs in t he ECM/PCM
wi t h t he HDS. If F-CAN DTCs are pr esent , check for
l oose or poor connect i ons at t he gauge cont rol
modul e and t he ECM/ PCM. If t he c onnec t i ons are
good, check t he battery condi t i on and t he char gi ng
s y s t em, t hen cl ear all DTCs . H
5. Chec k for DTCs in t he ECM/ PCM wi t h t he HDS.
Are any DTCs indicat ed?
YE S - Go to t he ECM/ PCM i ndi cat ed DTCs
NO- Go to st ep 6.
22-347).
Are all input s OK?
NO-Repai r t he faulty i nput, t hen r echeck t he DTCs . H
ON (II).
10. St ar t and run t he engi ne for at l east 5 sec onds, t hen
t ur n t he engi ne off.
YES - Repl ac e t he ECM/ PCM (see page 11-204).
NO-The ori gi nal gauge cont rol modul e i s faulty;
r epl ace it (see page 22-351 ) .
DTC U0122: Gauge Control Module Lost
Communi cat i on Wi th VS A Modulator-Control
Unit (VSA message)
ON (II).
3. Wai t for at l east 6 sec onds.
NO-l nt er mi t t ent f ai l ure, t he F-CAN c ommuni c at i on
li ne i s OK at t hi s t i me. Check for DTCs in t he ECM/ PCM
and t he VS A modul at or-cont rol uni t wi t h t he HDS. If
F-CAN DTCs are pr esent , check f or a l oose VS A
gr ound or poor connect i ons at t he VS A modul at or-
cont rol uni t or gauge cont rol modul e. If t he
connect i ons are good, check t he battery condi t i on
and t he char gi ng syst em, t hen cl ear all DTCs.11
5. Check for DTCs in t he ECM/ PCM or VS A wi t h t he HDS.
Are any DTCs indicat ed?
YE S - Go to t he ECM/ PCM or VS A i ndi cat ed DTCs ,
t r oubl eshoot i ng.B
NO- Go to st ep 6.
22-347).
Are all input s OK?
NO-Repai r t he faulty i nput , t hen r echeck t he DTCs.Si
ON (II).
YES - Rec h ec k ECM/PCM for DTCs, t hen recheck t he
VS A modul at or-cont rol uni t for DTCs . B
NO-The ori gi nal gauge control modul e i s f ault y;
r epl ace it (see page 22-351 ) .
22~343
Gauges
DTC U0127: Gauge Control Modul e Lost
Communi cat i on Wi th TPMS Control Uni t
(TPMS message)
NOTE: If you ar e t r oubl eshoot i ng mul t i pl e D T Cs , be sur e
ON (II).
YE S - Go to step 5.
Chec k for l oose or poor c onnec t i ons . B
5. Chec k f or TPMS DTCs wi t h t he HDS.
Are DTCs indicated?
YE S - Go to t he i ndi cat ed DTCs t r oubl eshoot i ng, t hen
r echeck.
NO- Go to st ep 6.
9. Check for cont i nui t y bet ween gauge cont rol modul e
32P connect or t er mi nal s No. 29 and No. 30 and TPMS
r espect i vel y.
T f
/ I 8 j 9 |10
|l 7i l 8|l 9|/|/|22|23|24|25|26|27|28|29|30|/l 32
CANL
(RED)
CANH
(WHT)
4
|(WHT)
i M /
n n
41/IZL7
8 | /| 10|
hil/M/1717l7l7l/17
L | CANL (RE D)
YES-Subs t i t ut e a known-good TPMS cont rol uni t , and
r echeck. If t he i ndi cat i on goes away, r epl ace t he
ori gi nal TPMS cont rol uni t. If t he DTC i s sti ll pr esent ,
r epl ace t he gauge cont rol modul e (see page
22-351 ).B
NO-Repai r an open or hi gh r esi st ance in t he wi r e.B
22-344
Communi cat i on Wi th S RS Uni t (SRS
message)
to f ol l ow t he i nst ruct i ons i n B-CAN Sy s t em Di agnosi s
Test Mode A (see page 22- 134).
ON (11).
YES-Go to st ep 5.
Chec k for l oose or poor connect i ons bet ween t he
gauge cont rol modul e and t he S RS uni t .H
5. Chec k f or S RS DTCs wi t h t he HDS.
Are DTCs indicat ed?
YE S - Go to t he i ndi cat ed DTCs t r oubl eshoot i ng, t hen
r echeck.
NO- Go to st ep 6.
8. Di sconnect S RS uni t connect or A (39P).
9. Chec k f or cont i nui t y bet ween gauge cont rol modul e
32P connect or t er mi nal s No. 29 and No. 30 and S RS
uni t c onnec t or A (39P) t er mi nal s No. 16 and No. 17
r espect i vel y.
17l l 8[l9M/ l 22[ 23l 24| 25l 26l 27l 28l 29l 30L / l 32
S RS UNIT CONNECTOR A (39P)
*: B L U , BRN, or GRN wi r e may be us ed at t he S RS uni t .
YES-Subs t i t ut e a known-good S RS uni t , and r echeck.
If t he i ndi cat i on goes away, r epl ace t he ori gi nal S RS
uni t. If t he DTC i s sti ll pr esent , r epl ace t he gauge
cont rol modul e (see page 22-351 ) .
NO-Repai r an open or hi gh r esi st anc e i n t he wi r e. B
22-345
Gauges
Communi cat i on Wi th Dr i ver ' s MICU
NOTE; If you ar e t r oubl eshoot i ng mul t i pl e DTCs , be sur e
ON (ll).
3. Wai t for at l east 6 sec onds.
YE S - Go t o t he gauge cont rol modul e i nput t est , and
do all power , gr ound, and c ommuni c at i on i nput t est s
(see page 22-347). If t he t est s pr ove OK, r epl ace t he
DTC U1283: Gauge Cont rol Module Lost
ON (II).
dc z\\ power , gr ound, and c ommuni c at i on i nput t est s
NO-l nt er mi t t ent f ai l ure, t he syst em i s OK at t hi s t i me.
Chec k f or l oose or poor connect i ons at passenger ' s
under -dash f use/r el ay box connect or A (38P) and t he
2234
,
IE i
I
Gauge Cont rol Module Input Test
NOTE: Bef ore t est i ng, do t he gauge cont rol modul e sel f -di agnosi s f unct i on (see page 22-332), and make sur e t he B-CAN
c ommuni c at i on l i nes ar e OK.
2. Remove t he gauge cont rol modul e (see page 22-351), and di sconnect t he 32P connect or (A) f r om it
RED ORN
t 5
GRN
BLU* \ BLU
\
y \ BLU BRN WH T
raj*
1 2
7 7 /
6
/
8 9 10
V /
13
7
1 jr
16
r
17 18 19
/ /
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
/
32
Wire side of
female terminals
/
BLK / PNK GRN LTGRN
BLU
*: Canada models
If t he t er mi nal s ar e OK, go to st ep 4.
(cont' d)
22-347
Gauges
Gauge Control Module Input Test (cont'd)
Cavi t y Wi r e Tes t condi t i on Test : Desi r ed r esul t Possi bl e c aus e if desi r ed r esu > r
not obt ai ned
1 RED Combi nat i on li ght
swi t ch ON
Connec t to gr ound wi t h a j umper
wi r e:
The dashl i ght s, audi o uni t li ght,
audi o-navi gat i on uni t li ght,
st eer i ng swi t c hes li ght, VS A off
swi t ch li ght, HVAC subdi spl ay uni t
li ght, cl i mat e cont r ol uni t li ght, A/ T
gear posi t i on i ndi cat or panel li ght,
and moonr oof swi t ch li ght shoul d
c ome on full bri ght .
Faul t y bul bs
t he wi r e
2 ORN Combi nat i on li ght
swi t ch ON
Connec t to gr ound wi t h a j umper
wi r e:
The ambi ent li ght and seat heat er
swi t c h li ght s shoul d c ome on full
bri ght.
Faul t y L EDs
thd VAfl j'fk
9 GRN Igni ti on swi t ch ON
(II), t urn si gnal
swi t ch in RIGHT
Ther e shoul d be battery vol t age
when t he l i ght s ar e f l ashi ng.
o Faul t y dr i ver ' s MICU
Faul t y combi nat i on li ght swi t c h
t he wi r e
10 BL U Igni ti on swi t ch ON
(II), t urn si gnal
swi t ch in L EFT
Ther e shoul d be battery vol t age
when t he l i ght s ar e f l ashi ng.
Faul t y dr i ver ' s MICU
t he wi r e
18 BL U Di sconnect t he
dr i ver ' s under -
dash f use/r el ay
box connect or P
(20P)
Chec k f or cont i nui t y bet ween
t er mi nal No. 18 and dr i ver ' s
connect or P (20P) t er mi nal No. 5:
An open in t he B-CAN wi r e 18 BL U Di sconnect t he
dash f use/r el ay
box connect or P
(20P)
A shor t in t he B-CAN wi r e
19 PNK Di sconnect t he
dash f use/r el ay
box connect or P
(20P)
t er mi nal No. 19 and dr i ver ' s
connect or P (20P) t er mi nal No. 6:
An open in t he B-CAN wi r e 19 PNK Di sconnect t he
dash f use/r el ay
box connect or P
(20P)
A shor t in t he B-CAN wi r e
5. Rec onnec t t he 32P connect or to t he gauge cont rol modul e, and do t hese i nput t est s at t he f ol l owi ng connect or .
22-348
If any t est Indi cat es a pr obl em, f i nd and cor r ect the c ause, t hen r echeck t he s y s t em.
If t he i nput t est pr oves OK, t he gauge cont rol modul e must be f aul t y; r epl ace it (see page 22-351).
Cavi t y Wi r e Tes t condi t i on Test : Desi r ed r esul t Possi bl e c ause if desi r ed r esul t i s
not obt ai ned
t he wi r e
in the gr ound wi r e
t he wi r e
16 WHT Under all
condi t i ons
m Bl own No. 15 (10 A) f use in t he
t he wi r e
32 BRN Igni ti on swi t ch ON
(ID
t he wi r e
8* BL U Igni ti on swi t ch ON
(II), washer f l ui d i s
half or mor e in t he
washer r eser voi r
Faul t y washer f l ui d l evel swi t ch
8* BL U
(II), washer f l ui d i s
empt y in t he
washer r eser voi r
o oor gr ound ( G201) or an open
Faul t y washer f l ui d l evel swi t ch
t he wi r e
22 GRN Igni ti on swi t ch ON
(II), brake flui d i s
full l evel in t he
r eser voi r
Faul t y brake f l ui d l evel swi t ch
22 GRN
(II), brake f l ui d i s
l ower l evel i n t he
r eser voi r
in t he ground wi r e
Faul t y brake f l ui d l evel swi t ch
t he wi r e
23 LT
GRN
(II), parki ng brake
l ever pul l ed
Faul t y parki ng brake swi t ch
9 An open or hi gh r esi st ance in
t he wi r e
23 LT
GRN
(II), parki ng brake
l ever r el eased
Faul t y parki ng brake swi t ch
*: Canada model s
22-349
Gauges
Rewriting the 000 Data and Transferring the maintenance Minder Data to a
New Gauge Control Module
NOTE:
Obt ai n a new gauge cont rol modul e bef ore st art i ng
t he rewri t i ng pr oc ess. Onl y new gauges c an be
rewri t t en.
Rewr i t i ng i s not possi bl e on a gauge cont rol modul e
t hat wi l l not c ommuni c at e wi t h t he HDS.
Make sur e t hat t he HDS s hows t he cor r ect VI N f or t he
vehi c l e you ar e wor ki ng on.
Onc e you have st art ed t hi s pr ocedur e, you must
compl et e it bef ore r emovi ng t he HDS f r om t he DL C.
Connec t a j umper battery (do not c onnec t a battery
char ger ) to i nsur e that cor r ect battery vol t age wi l l be
mai nt ai ned.
1. Bef or e r epl aci ng t he gauge cont rol modul e, connect
t he HDS.
2. Sel ec t GA UGE S f r om t h R O n v PI FPTRI CAL - / e t c -
sel ec t menu wi t h t he HDS.
3. Sel ec t Gauge Cont rol Modul e Repl ac ement (ODO
Rewri t e) f r om t he ADJ US TMENT menu, and sel ect
READ OUT DATA, and save ODO val ue and smar t
mai nt enanc e dat a into t he HDS.
4. Repl ac e t he gauge cont rol modul e.
5. Sel ec t WRITE DATA and f ol l ow t he i nst r uct i ons on t he
HDS di spl ay, and i nst al l t he ODO val ue and smar t
mai nt enanc e dat a into t he r epl acement gauge cont rol
modul e. If t he dat a t r ansf er f ai l s, refer t o t he
i nst r uct i ons bel ow t o r el ease t he l ocked ODO val ue.
How t o r el ease l ocked odomet er mi l eage t o
the ori gi nal gauge cont rol modul e.
If, after you at t empt to t r ansf er mi l eage to a new gauge
assembl y, t he odomet er di spl ay has dashes ( ), i s
gar bl ed, or s hows an i ncorrect val ue, t he ori gi nal gauge
cont rol modul e c an be unl ocked and r est or ed to its
ori gi nal st at e In t hi s way, it c an be used agai n f or
addi t i onal at t empt s to t r ansf er t he mi l eage:
1. Conf i r m t hat you have t he l at est HDS ver si on of
sof t war e.
2. Make sur e t hat t he HDS s hows t he cor r ect VIN f or t he
vehi c l e you ar e wor ki ng on.
3. Wi t h t he i gni t i on swi t ch in L OCK (0), r econnect t he
ori gi nal gauge cont rol modul e.
4. Compl et el y re-boot t he HDS.
5. Cl ear any st or ed DTCs.
6. Navi gat e to BODY EL ECTRI C/ GAUGES / GAUGE
CONTROL MODUL E REPL ACEMENT (ODO REWRI TE,
et c.).
7. Sel ec t 3. REL EAS I NG L OCK ED ODO VAL UE.
8. Fol l ow t he pr ompt s and t he odomet er mi l eage wi l l be
r est or ed.
9. St ar t over and make sur e t he sc r een pr ompt s ar e
f ol l owed.
22-350
Gauge Cont rol Module Repl acement
NOTE: Bef ore r epl aci ng t he gauge cont rol modul e, rewri ti ng t he ODO dat a and t r ansf er r i ng t he mai nt enance mi nder
dat a to a new gauge cont rol modul e (see page 22-350).
1. Remove t he i nst r ument vi sor (see page 20-165).
2. Remove t he t hr ee sc r ews f rom t he gauge cont rol modul e (A).
3. Di sconnect t he 32P connect or (B) f r om t he gauge cont rol modul e.
4. Install t he gauge cont rol modul e i n t he r ever se order of r emoval .
5. Rewri t i ng t he ODO dat a and t r ansf er t he mai nt enance mi nder dat a to a new gauge cont rol modul e (see page 22-350).
22-351
Gauges
Outside Mr Temperature Indicator Calibration
NOTE: To t est t he out si de ai r t emper at ur e sensor (see
page 21-185).
Descr i pt i on
The out si de ai r t emper at ur e sensor i s l ocat ed behi nd t he
cent er of t he front bumper . The gauge cont rol modul e
uses measur ement s f r om t hi s sensor al ong wi t h data
pr ovi ded by t he cl i mat e cont rol uni t vi a t he B-CAN
c ommuni c at i on li ne to di spl ay t he out si de ai r
t emper at ur e.
Bec ause of t he l ocat i on of t he sensor , it may be affected
by heat ref l ect i on f r om t he r oad, engi ne and radi at or
heat , or hot exhaust f r om sur r oundi ng traffi c.
These condi t i ons c an heat soak t he out si de ai r
t emper at ur e sensor and c ause i naccur at e r eadi ngs.
Logi c has been wri t t en i nto t he gauge cont rol modul e to
hel p pr event abnor mal or f l uct uat i ng out si de ai r
t emper at ur e i ndi cat or r eadi ngs.
Out si de Ai r Temper at ur e Indi cat or Logi c
If t he engi ne cool ant t emper at ur e i s 140 F (60 C) or
hi gher when t he i gni ti on swi t ch i s t ur ned to ON (II), t he
out si de ai r t emper at ur e i ndi cat ed the last t i me t he key
was t ur ned off wi l l be di spl ayed r egar dl ess of t he current
t emper at ur e measur ed by t he out si de ai r t emper at ur e
sensor .
If t he engi ne cool ant t emper at ur e i s 139 F (59 C) or
l ower when t he i gni ti on swi t ch i s t ur ned to ON (II), t he
cur r ent t emper at ur e measur ed by t he out si de ai r
t emper at ur e sensor wi l l be i ndi cat ed.
Updat e to t he out si de ai r t emper at ur e
i ndi cat or whi l e dri vi ng
If t he t emper at ur e measur ed by t he out si de ai r
t emper at ur e sensor is gr eat er t han t he t emper at ur e on
t he out si de ai r t emper at ur e i ndi cat or, t he out si de
t emper at ur e i ndi cat or wi l l i ncr ease by 1 F (1 C) per
mi nut e after t he vehi cl e speed i s great er t han 19 mph
(30 km/h) f or mor e t han 1 mi nut e and 30 sec onds. It wi l l
cont i nue to i nc r ease unti l t he cur r ent out si de ai r
t emper at ur e i s i ndi cat ed. S o , t he f i rst c hange to t he
out si de ai r t emper at ur e i ndi cat or i s 1 mi nut e and
30 sec onds after t he vehi cl e speed i s great er t han
19 mph (30 km/h). If t he vehi c l e speed dr ops bel ow
19 mph (30 km/h), t he i ndi cat or wi l l not updat e agai n
unti l t he vehi c l e speed i s i nc r eased to 19 mph (30 km/h)
or mor e f or mor e t han 1 mi nut e and 30 sec onds agai n.
If the out si de ai r t emper at ur e i s l ess t han 140 F (60 C),
t he t emper at ur e i nc r eases 1 F (1 C) ever y 2 sec onds
unti l t he cur r ent out si de ai r t emper at ur e i s di spl ayed.
If t he out si de ai r t emper at ur e i s l ess t han t he i ndi cat ed
t emper at ur e, t he t emper at ur e wi l l dec r ease 1 F (1 C)
ever y 2 sec onds unti l t he cur r ent out si de ai r t emper at ur e
i s i ndi cat ed r egar dl ess of vehi c l e speed.
Tr oubl eshoot i ng
If t he i ndi cat or di spl ays " " for mor e t han
2 sec onds after sel ect i ng t he out si de ai r t emper at ur e
di spl ay mode, check for and r esol ve all B-CAN rel at ed
DTCs , t hen check t he cl i mat e cont rol syst em or
mul t i pl ex i nt egrat ed cont rol syst em for DTCs (see
B-CAN Syst em Di agnosi s Test Mode A) (see page
22-134).
Cal i brat i on
The out si de ai r t emper at ur e i ndi cat or ' s di spl ayed
t emper at ur e c an be recal i brat ed 5 F or 3 C to meet
t he c ust omer ' s expect at i ons.
22-352
Out si de Ai r Temperat ure Sensor
Test
1 Remove t he out si de ai r t emper at ur e sensor (see page
22-353).
2. Di p t he sensor in i ce wat er , and measur e t he
r esi st ance. Then pour war m wat er on t he sensor , and
check f or a c hange in r esi st ance.
3. Compar e t he r esi st ance readi ng bet ween t er mi nal s
No, 1 and No. 2 of t he out si de ai r t emper at ur e sensor
wi t h t he speci f i cat i ons shown i n t he gr aph; t he
r esi st ance shoul d be wi t hi n t he speci f i cat i ons.
OUTS I DE AIR TEMPERATURE S E NS OR
RES I S TANCE 6
(t m 5
14 32 50 68 86 104 F
- 10 0 10 20 30 40 C
TEMPERATURE
4. If t he r esi st anc e i s not as spec i f i ed, r epl ace t he out si de
ai r t emper at ur e sensor (see page 22-353).
Out si de Ai r Temperat ure Sensor
Repl acement
1 Di sconnect t he 2P connect or (A) f rom t he out si de ai r
t emper at ur e sensor (B).
2. Lift t he t ab (C) to r el ease the lock, t hen r emove t he
out si de ai r t emper at ur e sensor f rom t he f ront
bumper .
3. Install t he sensor i n t he r ever se order of r emoval .
22-353
Saf et y Indi cator Syst em
- 4-door
SAF ETY INDICATOR
PASSENGER'S MICU
(Built into the passenger's under-dash
fuse/relay box)
input Test page 22-360
22~354
2-door
Ci rcui t Di agram
DRIVER'S
UNDER-DASH
F USE/RELAY B OX
-c r vx>-
No. 15 (10 A)
c r u )
WHT-
F16 C 1
IGNITION SWITCH
/ B A T \
VHT -fo Of - BLL
IG1 HOT i n ON (II)
and START (III)
DRIVER'S
UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY BOX
: B-CAN l i ne
- WHT -
DRIVER'S UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY B OX
DRIVER'S MICU ^ ; |
VBU IG1
SG SG PG PG
B- CAN B- CAN
HI L O
Q2 R2 Q1 R5
BRN BRN BL K BL K
- L _ C L - Q - J Q_
G501 G501 G502 G502
1 DRI VE R' S
\ DOOR
/ S WI TCH
(Cl os ed:
Door open)
L T GRN
1 L E F T REAR
t) DOOR
I' S WI TCH
( Cl os ed:
Door open)
(4-door )
TRUNK
L I GHT
Y
PNK B L U
V V
GA UGE CONTROL
MODUL E
PA S S E NGE R' S
MI CU
1
1
TRUNK LID
) L A T CH
T ' S WI TCH
1
2
(Cl os ed:
BL K Tr unk l i d open)
1
22-356
DRIVER'S
JUNCTION BOX 1
*1: LX, LX PZEV, LX-P, and LX-P PZEV
- : B-CAN line
CD-
DRIVER'S
MICU
1T~W
i
PNK
I F3
BLU
I F4
I
j E10
I
PNK
i
E 9
I
BLU
H6 H7
DRIVER'S
JUNCTION
BOX 1
18
-M-
(4-door)
B-CAN
HI
B-CAN
TRANSCEIVER
B - C AN
LO
DRIVER'S
DOOR
INDICATOR
(LED)
FRONT
PASSENGER' S I
DOOR I
INDICATOR
(LED)
I 1
[ A11 J A29
A14
PASSENGER' S
UNDER-DASH
A35 FUSE/RELAY BOX
1 1
i i
B-CAN B-CAN
HI LO
PASSEr
f s G SG PG PG | -
VBU IG1
sIGER'S MICU
- I
| j J
I
A37 E15 A36 E16[ G15*
1
H3*
2
!
G14*
1
|
H25*
2
J
BLK BLK BLK BLK
1111
[G505 G201 G505 G201
(~08-oiTmodels)
GRN
f s G SG PG |
G501
A37 E15 E16
BLK BLK BLK
1 1 1
[G505 G201 G201
pTo'model)
FRONT
PASSENGER' S
DOOR
SWITCH
(Closed:
Door open)
RIGHT REAR
DOOR
SWITCH
(Closed:
Door open)
(4-door)
22-357
Saf et y Indicator S f st em
IVIICU Input Test
NOTE:
# Bef ore t e s t i n g , t r o u b l e s h o o t t he mu l t i p l e x i n t e g r a t e d cont rol uni t f i r st , usi ng B-CAN Syst em Di a g n o s i s Test Mode A
(see page 22-134).
Bef ore t e s t i n g , do t he gauge c o n t r o l modul e s e l f - di agnos i s f u n c t i o n (see page 22-332), and make sur e t he s a f e t y
i ndi c a t o r L EDs and B-CAN c o mmu n i c a t i o n l i ne ar e OK.
Dr i ver ' s MICU
1. Tur n t he i gni t i on swi t c h to L OCK (0), and r emove t he dr i ver ' s d a s h b o a r d l ower c over (see page 20-166).
2. D i s c o n n e c t dr i ver ' s under -dash f use/r el ay box c o n n e c t o r s D, Q, and R.
NOTE: Al l c o n n e c t o r v i e ws ar e wi r e si de of f e ma l e t e r mi n a l s .
CONNECTOR D(16P)
L T GRN* WHT
1 2
9 10 11 12
BRN
13 14 15 16
CONNECTOR Q (20P)
BL K BRN
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 20
BRN
CONNECTOR R (24P)
BL K
14 15 16 17 18 21 22
1 0 /
*: 4-door
22-358
4. Rec onnec t t he c onnec t or s to t he dr i ver ' s under -dash f use/r el ay box, and do t hese i nput t est s at t he f ol l owi ng
connect or .
If any t est i ndi cat es a pr obl em, f i nd and cor r ect t he c aus e, t hen r echeck t he s y s t em.
If al l t he i nput t est s prove OK go to st ep 5.
Cavi t y Wi r e Test condi t i on Test : Desi r ed r esul t Possi bl e c aus e if r esul t is not
obt ai ned
Q1 BLK In all i gni ti on swi t ch
posi t i ons
t he wi r e
02 BRN In all i gni ti on swi t ch
posi t i ons
t he wi r e
R2 BRN In all i gni ti on swi t ch
posi t i ons
t he wi r e
R5 BLK In al l i gni ti on swi t ch
posi t i ons
t he wi r e
D4
(4-door)
L T
GRN
Left rear door open Measur e t he vol t age to gr ound:
Faul t y left r ear door swi t ch
gr ound
t he wi r e
D4
(4-door)
L T
GRN
Left rear door c l osed Measur e t he vol t age t o gr ound:
^ ^ short to gr ound in t he wi r e
D5 WHT Tr unk lid open
(Remove t he t runk
li ght bulb)
- " aul t y t runk lid lat ch swi t ch
t he wi r e
D5 WHT
Tr unk lid c l osed
(Remove t he trunk
li ght bulb)
o Faul t y t runk lid lat ch swi t ch
gr ound
t he wi r e
D12 BRN
(cont' d)
22- 359
Saf et y Indicator S f st em
Passenger ' s MICU
5. Tur n t he i gni ti on swi t ch to L OCK (0), and r emove t he passenger ' s kick panel .
6. Di sc onnec t passenger ' s under -dash f use/r el ay box c onnec t or s A, E, and G
# 1
(or H*
2
).
* 2: Exc ept L X, LX PZEV, L X-P, LX-P PZEV
CONNECTOR A (38P) CONNECTOR G (16P)
(L X, L X PZEV, L X- P, L X-P PZEV)
0^
IZIZf
k M
WH T
/ / \
BRN BL K *
2
BL K
CONNECTOR E (18P)
/
2
/ /
5 6 7 8 9
10
/
12 13
/
15 16
/
* 1: 4-door
* 2: ' 08-09 model s BL K BL K
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
9
/
11 12 13 14 15 16
GRN
/ \
L T GRN*
1
GRN
CONNECTOR H (38P)
(Exc ept L X, L X PZEV, L X-P, L X-P PZEV)
L T GRN"
If t he t er mi nal s ar e bent , l oose or c or r oded, r epai r t hem as nec essar y and r echeck t he syst em.
22-360
8. Rec onnec t t he connect or s t o t he passenger ' s under -dash f use/r el ay box, and d o t hese i nput t est s at t he f ol l owi ng
c onnec t or s.
obt ai ned
A36*
1
BLK In all i gni ti on swi t ch
posi t i ons
t he wi r e
A37 BLK In all i gni ti on swi t ch
posi t i ons
t he wi r e
E15 BLK In all i gni t i on swi t ch
posi t i ons
o A ~ open i n t he wi r e
E16 BLK In all i gni ti on swi t c h
posi t i ons
t he wi r e
A14 WHT Under all condi t i ons Measur e t he vol t age to gr ound:
)wn No. 15 (10 A) f use in t he
Faul t y under -dash f use/r el ay
box
t he wi r e
A35 BRN Igni ti on swi t c h ON (II) Measur e t he vol t age to gr ound:
o Bl own No. 5 (7.5 A) f use in t he
box
box
o Bl own No. 5 (7.5 A) f use in t he
box
box
t he wi r e
G14*
2
(4-door)
H25*
3
(4-door)
L T
GRN
Ri ght r ear door open Measur e t he vol t age to gr ound:
Faul t y ri ght rear door swi t ch
Faul t y ri ght rear door swi t ch
gr ound
t he wi r e
Ri ght r ear door
c l osed
o " aul t y ri ght rear door swi t ch
G15*
2
or
H3*
3
GRN Front passenger ' s
door open
swi t ch
e Faul t y front passenger ' s door
swi t ch gr ound
the wi r e
Front passenger ' s
door c l osed
o Faul t y front passenger ' s door
swi t ch
*1: ' 08-09 model s
*3: Exc ept L X, L X PZEV, L X-P, L X-P PZEV
(cont ' d)
22-361
If i nput f ai l ur es ar e rel at ed to a part i cul ar cont rol uni t , r epl ace t he cont rol uni t
22-362
worn
Remi nder Syst ems
22-363
Remi nder Syst ems
Ci rcui t Di agram
D R I V E R ' S
U N D E R - D A S H
No. 1-1 (MAIN) (100 A) No. 3-1 (IG MA I N ) (50 A)
No. 1 5 0 0 A )
1 16 C1
IGNITION S WI TCH
IG1>
DRI VER' S
UNDE R- DAS H
IG1 HOT i n ON (II)
and S TA RT (III)
- WHT
DRI VER' S UNDE R- DAS H F US E / RE L A Y B OX
DRI VER' S MI CU
S G S G PG PG
Q2 R2 Q1 R 5
BRN BRN B L K BL K RED GRY BRN BL K
(KX)i)
(=D)
COMBI NATI ON
L I GHT S WI TCH
S TE E RI NG
L OCK
1 A S S E MB L Y
J X _ L SL _Q_
G501 G501 G502 G502 G503
B- CAN B-CAN
HI L O
' P5
i F3
~1
DRI VER' S
J UNCTI ON
B OX1
DRI VER' S
DOOR
S WI TCH
(Cl os ed:
Door open)
22-364
DRI VER' S
J UNCTI ON
B OX1
: With colors may be substituted
for S RS circuit
: CA N l i ne
F 7 E8
F 8 E5
B E E PE R
PARK I NG B RA K E REMI NDER
S E A T B E L T REMI NDER
K EY- I N REMI NDER
L I GHTS - ON REMI NDER
B- CAN TRA NS CE I VE R
B- CAN B-CAN
HI L O
F-CAN TRA NS CE I VE R
CAN L CAN H
L I GHTS - ON I NDI CATOR
DI MMI NG CI RCUI T
, L I GHTS - ON / \ S E A T B E L T / \ B RA K E
i I NDI CATOR QZJ REMI NDER I YJ S YS T E M
(L ED) J I NDI CATOR
V
^ I NDI CATOR
(L ED) (L ED)
CONTROL L E R A RE A NETWORK CONTROL L E R
i 2. 6 kO i
RE D * WHT* L T GRN
A16 ; A17
S RS UNI T
B19 B21
PNK *
DRI VER' S
S E A T B E L T
B UCK L E S WI TCH
(Cl os ed: unbuc kl ed)
S E A T B E L T
B UCK L E S WI TCH
(Cl os ed: unbuc kl ed)
G701 G702
, PARK I NG
) B RA K E
S WI TCH
(Cl os ed:
L ev er pul l ed)
G501
22-365
Remi nder Syst ems
Cont rol Uni t i nput Test
NOTE: Bef or e t est i ng, t r oubl eshoot t he mul t i pl ex i nt egrat ed cont rol uni t f i r st , usi ng B-CAN Syst em Di agnosi s Test Mode
Dr i ver ' s MICU
1. Tur n t he i gni t i on swi t ch to L OCK (0), and r emove t he dr i ver ' s dashboar d l ower c over (see page 20-166).
2. Di sc onnec t dr i ver ' s under -dash f use/r el ay box c onnec t or s D, Q, and R.
CONNECTOR D (16P)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15
16
BRN
CONNECTOR Q (20P)
BLK BRN
1l l l 2l l 3|14|15|16 [l 7 l l 8 [ 7^ 0
WH T
CONNECTOR R (24P)
BLK BLK RED GRY BRN
6 7 | 8 / 10
1 8 l / V^| 2g[/ 17
14 15 16 17
If t he t er mi nal s ar e bent , l oose or c or r oded, r epai r t hem as nec essar y, and r echeck t he syst em.
If t he t er mi nal s ar e OK, go to st ep 4.
22-366
4. Reconnect t he c onnec t or s, t urn t he Igni ti on swi t c h to ON (II), and do t hese i nput t est s at t he f ol l owi ng c onnec t or s.
Cavi t y Wi r e Test condi t i on Test : Desi r ed r esul t Possi bl e c aus e if r esul t i s not
obt ai ned
swi t ch posi t i on
t he gr ound wi r e
wi r e
t he gr ound wi r e
wi r e
t he gr ound wi r e
wi r e
R5 BLK In al l i gni ti on
Poor ground-(G502) or an open in
t he gr ound wi r e .
wi r e
Faul t y dr i ver ' s door swi t ch gr ound
wi r e '
D12 BRN
Dr i ver ' s door
c l osed
Q18 WHT
:
- Igni ti on key
i nsert ed into t he
i gni ti on swi t ch
t he gr ound wi r e
wi r e
Q18 WHT
Igni ti on key
r emoved f r om t he
i gni ti on swi t ch
R6
R3
RED
BL K
swi t ch OFF
wi r e
R6
R3
RED
BL K
swi t ch in any ot her
posi t i on t han OFF
R7
R3
GRY
BL K
swi t ch (PARKING
posi t i on) ON
wi r e
R7
R3
GRY
BL K
swi t ch OFF
# Faul t y combi nat i on li ght swi t ch
R8
R3
BRN
BLK
swi t ch (Headli ght
posi t i on) ON
wi r e
R8
R3
BRN
BLK
swi t ch OFF
(cont' d)
22-367
Reminder Systems
5. Tur n the ignition swi t ch to LOCK (0).
6. Remove the gauge control modul e (see page 22-351), and di sconnect the 32P connector from it,
BRN WHT
IT2l7T7^ 8 | 8 | i o j /1/^
171181191/1X12212312412512612712812913QM32
/ \
L T GRN
BRN
7. Inspect the connect or and socket t ermi nals to be sur e they are all maki ng good contact
If the t ermi nal s are bent, l oose or corroded, repai r t hem as necessar y, and recheck the syst em.
If the t ermi nal s are OK, go to step 8.
8. Reconnect the connect or to the gauge control modul e, turn the ignition swi t ch to ON (II), and do t hese input tests at all
followi ng connect or.
If any test i ndi cates a probl em, find and correct the c ause, then recheck the syst em.
If the input t est s prove OK, go to step 9.
Cavi t y Wi re Test condi ti on Test : Desi red resul t Possi bl e cause if desi red resul t i s not
obtai ned
13 BRN In all ignition swi t ch
posi ti ons
ground wi re
16 WHT Under all
condi ti ons
Measure t he voltage to ground:
Blown No. 15 (10 A) f use i n the
Faulty dri ver' s under-dash f use/rel ay
box
Blown No. 15 (10 A) f use i n the
box
32 BRN Ignition swi t ch ON
(11)
Blown No. 5 (7.5 A) f use in the
dri ver' s under-dash f use/rel ay box
box
Blown No. 5 (7.5 A) f use in the
dri ver' s under-dash f use/rel ay box
box
23 LT
GRN
Parking brake
swi t ch ON (Level
pulled)
Faulty parking brake swi t ch
Parki ng brake
swi t ch OFF (Lever
rel eased)
Faulty parking brake swi t ch
9. Do the Gauge Control Module Sel f -di agnost i c Functi on (see page 22-332), and check the beeper and the seat belt remi nder
i ndi cator.
If the beeper sounds and t he seat belt remi nder i ndi cator f l ashes, go to step 10.
If the beeper does not sound or the seat belt remi nder i ndi cator does not f l ash, replace the gauge control module (see
page 22-351).
10. Substi tute a known-good gauge control modul e, and recheck the syst em.
If the sympt om i s gone, the gauge control module i s faulty; replace it.
If the sympt om i s sti ll present , the dri ver' s MICU i s faulty; replace the dri ver' s under-dash f use/rel ay box.
- USA model s (see page 22-86)
- Canada model s (see page 22-87)
22-368
Moonroof
mm
DOOR MULTIPLEX CONTROL UNIT
(Bui l t i nt o t he power wi ndow mast er swi t c h)
Replacement:
4-door, page 22-305
2-door, page 22-306
22-369
Moonroof
Wat er l eaks f r om moonr oof 1. Chec k for a cl ogged or det ached drai n t ube.
2. Chec k t he gl ass posi t i on adj ust ment (see page 20-91)
3. Chec k f or a def ect i ve or an i mpr oper l y i nst al l ed t he gl ass weat her st r i p or
t he drai n c hannel .
4. Chec k f or a gap bet ween t he drai n channel seal and t he roof panel .
Wi nd noi se f r om moonr oof 1. Chec k f or exc essi ve c l ear anc e bet ween t he gl ass weat her st r i p and t he roof
panel .
Mot or noi se f r om moonr oof 1. Chec k f or a l oose mot or.
2. Chec k for a wor n gear or bear i ng.
3. Chec k f or a def or med cabl e assembl y.
4. Chec k for di rt or debr i s.
Moonr oof gl ass does not move, but
mot or t ur ns
1. Chec k for f or ei gn mat t er st uck bet ween t he gui de rai l and t he sl i der .
2. Make sur e t he cabl e assembl y i s at t ached properl y.
3. Chec k f or a l oose i nner c abl e.
4. Chec k f or a def ect i ve gear or i nner cabl e.
Moonr oof gl ass does not move and
mot or does not t urn (gl ass c an be
moved wi t h 4 mm hex wr enc h)
1. Chec k f or a run down battery.
2. Chec k f or a bl own f use.
3. Chec k f or a f aul t y moonr oof swi t c h.
4. Chec k f or a def ect i ve mot or cont rol uni t /mot or.
Moonr oof gl ass does not st op at
pr oper f l ush c l osed posi t i on
Moonr oof gl ass moves in a j erki ng
mot i on (moves 40 mm (1.57 i n),
st ops f or 0.4 s ec onds , and r epeat s)
Duri ng aut o c l ose oper at i on,
moonr oof gl ass r ever ses when no
obj ect i s t r apped
1. Chec k f or di rt and debr i s i n t he t rack.
Moonr oof gl ass moves, but t her e i s
no AUTO f unct i on
22-370
Resetting the Moonroof Control Unit
Reset t i ng t he moonr oof i s requi red when any of t he f ol l owi ng have occur r ed:
The moonr oof was moved manual l y whi l e t he battery was dead or di sc onnec t ed.
The moonr oof mot or was r epl aced wi t h a new one.
Any c omponent s rel at ed t o t he moonr oof wer e repl aced or r emoved and r ei nst al l ed.
- Wi nd def l ect or
- Moonroof gl ass
- Moonroof seal
- Moonroof gl ass bracket
- Moonroof c abl es, et c.
To reset t he moonr oof cont rol uni t, do t hese st eps:
1. Cl ose t he dr i ver ' s door , and l eave it c l osed unti l t he pr ocedur e i s compl et e.
2. Tur n t he i gni ti on swi t ch t o LOCK (0).
3. Pr ess and hol d the tilt swi t c h, and t urn t he i gni ti on swi t ch to ON (II).
4. Rel ease t he tilt swi t c h, and turn t he i gni ti on swi t ch to L OCK (0).
5. Repeat st eps 3 and 4 f our t i mes.
6. Chec k if t he AUTO OPEN and AUTO CL OS E f unct i ons sti ll wor k. If t hey sti ll wor k, t he AUTO f unct i ons have not been
c l ear ed, go back to st ep 1. If the AUTO f unct i ons have been c l ear ed, go to st ep 7.
7. Pr ess and hol d t he moonr oof open swi t ch f or at l east 3 addi t i onal sec onds after t he moonr oof i s fully opened.
8. Pr ess and hol d t he moonr oof c l ose swi t ch f or at l east 3 addi t i onal sec onds after t he moonr oof i s fully c l osed (ti lted).
9. Conf i r m t hat t he moonr oof cont rol uni t i s r eset by usi ng t he moonr oof AUTO OPEN and AUTO CL OS E f unct i on.
22-371
Moonroof
Ci rcui t Di agram
: B- C A N line
: Ot her c ommuni c at i on l i ne
D R I VE R ' S
U N D E R - D A S H
F U S E / R E L A Y BO X I G N I T I O N S WI T C H
/ B A T \
- W H T -fo O f - BL U
IG1 H O T i n O N (II)
and S T A R T (III)
DRI VE R' S UNDE R- DA S H F US E / RE L A Y B OX
F16 C 1 C 5
No. 5 (7.5 A)
No. 20 (20 A)
MOONROOF CONTROL UNI T/ MOTOR
N10
GRN
7
r u
HAL L S E NS OR
V RE L A Y Ri L A Y V
v CI RCUI T CI RCUI T Q
3 No. 6 (7.5 A) F US E
( PA S S E NGE R' S
UNDER- DAS H
V
PUR L T BL U GRY
10 6 8
A UTO ^
(OPEN)
MOONROOF
S WI TCH
L T GRN GRY
4 3
f\ L I GHT
\ y) (0.84 W)
( CL OS E )
5
BL K
2
RE D
J 4
K 6
RE D
K 6
- L L
G502
C3
RED
<7
G501
DAS HL I GHTS
B RI GHTNE S S
CONTROL L E R
(In t he g aug e
c ont r ol modul e)
J 3
IG1
DRI VE R' S MI CU
B-CAN B- CAN
HI L O
i P6
i
PNK
I P5
BL U
1
G9 ' G10
DRI VER' S
J UNCTI ON
B 0 X 1
PNK
3 5
B- CAN B- CAN
H I L O
DOOR
MUL TI PL EX
CONTROL UNI T
; K1
B L U
K1
DRI VE R' S
J UNCTI ON
B OX 2
'. 27
B L U
* H2
F5
B L U
V
FRONT
PA S S E NGE R' S
POWER WI NDOW
S WI TCH
CE NTE R
J UNCTI ON
BOX
22-372
mm
Moonroof Cont rol Uni t Input Test
NOTE; If t he moonr oof wor ks OK manual l y, but wi l l not wor k in AUTO, or r ever ses f r equent l y (obst acl e det ect i on), r eset
t he moonr oof (see page 22-371) before pr oceedi ng wi th t he i nput t es t
3. Di sconnect t he 14P connect or (A) f r om t he moonroof cont rol uni t /mot or (B).
LTGRN
Wire side of
female terminals
If t he t er mi nal s ar e bent, l oose or cor r oded, repai r t hem as nec essar y, and r echeck t he syst em.
(cont ' d)
22-373
Moonroof
Moonroof Cont rol Uni t Input Test (cont' d)
5. Wi t h t he connect or sti ll di sc onnec t ed/ do t hese i nput t est s at t he f ol l owi ng connect or .
If all t he i nput t est s pr ove O K , go to st ep 6.
Cavi t y Wi r e Tes t condi t i on Test : Desi r ed r esul t Possi bl e c aus e if desi r ed r esul t
i s not obt ai ned
11 BL U Under all
condi t i ons
moonr oof swi t ch 14P connect or
t er mi nal No. 11 and power
t he wi r e
moonr oof swi t c h 14P connect or
t er mi nal No. 11 and body gr ound:
22-374
BODY
6. Reconnect t he connect or to t he cont rol uni t and do t hese i nput t est s at t he f ol l owi ng connect or .
If any t est i ndi cat es a pr obl em, f i nd and cor r ect t he c ause, t hen recheck t he s y s t em.
Cavi t y Wi r e Tes t condi t i on Test : Desi r ed r esul t Possi bl e c aus e if desi r ed r esul t i s not
obt ai ned
7 GRN Under all
condi t i ons
gr ound:
vol t age.
An open or hi gh r esi st ance i n t he wi r e
8 BLK In all i gni t i on
gr ound:
Ther e shoul d be l ess
t han 0.2 V.
gr ound wi r e
An open or hi gh r esi st ance in t he wi r e
2 GRY Igni ti on swi t c h to
ON (II),
moonr oof swi t ch
i n CL OS E
posi t i on
gr ound:
t han 0.2 V.
Faul t y moonr oof swi t ch
gr ound wi r e
2 GRY
Igni ti on swi t ch to
ON (II),
moonr oof swi t ch
r el eased
gr ound:
vol t age.
Bl own No. 2 (20 A) f use i n t he dr i ver ' s
Faul t y dr i ver ' s under -dash f use/r el ay box
3 L TGRN Igni ti on swi t ch to
ON (II),
moonr oof swi t ch
in TILT posi t i on
gr ound:
t han 0.2 V.
9 Poor gr ound (G501) or an open in t he
ground wi r e
3 L TGRN
ON (II),
moonr oof swi t ch
r el eased
gr ound:
vol t age.
4 L TB L U Igni ti on swi t ch to
ON (II),
moonr oof swi t ch
i n OPEN posi t i on
gr ound:
t han 0.2 V.
gr ound wi r e
4 L TB L U
ON (II),
moonr oof swi t ch
r el eased
gr ound:
vol t age.
9 PUR Igni ti on swi t ch to
ON (II),
moonr oof swi t ch
in AUTO OPEN
or AUTO CL OS E
posi t i on
gr ound:
t han 0.2 V.
gr ound wi r e
9 PUR
ON (II),
moonr oof swi t ch
r el eased
gr ound:
vol t age.
9 Bl own No. 2 (20 A) f use in t he dr i ver ' s
9 A short to gr ound in t he wi r e
7. If all t he i nput t est s ar e OK and mul t i pl e f ai l ur es ar e f ound, r epl ace t he moonr oof cont rol uni t /mot or assembl y (see
page 20-96). If t he pr obl em i s rel at ed to t he key-off oper at i on, go to t he dr i ver ' s MICU i nput t est (see page 22-176), and
passenger ' s MICU i nput t est (see page 22-180).
22-375
Moonroof
Moonroof Swi t c h Test /Repl ac ement
1. Remove t he f ront Indi vi dual map li ght s (see page
22-258).
2. Di sconnect t he moonr oof swi t ch 12P connect or (A)
and map li ght 3P connect or (B).
3. Remove t he moonr oof swi t ch (C) f rom t he map li ght
housi ng (D).
\ Terminal
Position \
5 4 6 8 10 2 3
OPEN
a o
a
--
o
CLOSE r\
a
--
o
CLOSE
xJ KJ
a
--
o
TILT
o
o
a
--
o
CLOSE-)-AUTO
o o o
a
--
o
OP EN+AUTO
o- o o
a
--
o
i l l umi nat i on bul b (E) or t he swi t c h.
6. Inst al l t he swi t ch and li ght i n t he r ever se or der of
r emoval .
22-376
Accessor y Power Socket s
!iD>
22-377
Accessor y Power Socket s
Ci rcui t Di agram
DRIVER'S
UNDER-DASH
F USE/RELAY B OX
* 1: LX, LX PZEV, LX-P, and LX-P PZEV
B ATTERY
ffi
No. 1-2 (AS F/B STD) (40 A)
cr^j D
No. 1-1 (MAIN) (100 A)
^ CT\_JO
No. 3-1 (IG MAIN) (50 A)
c rv o^
No. 3-2 (DR F/B) (40 A ) *
1
/
No. 3-4 (DR F/B) (60 A ) *
2
F 15 B2
F 16 CI
1
Y EL
No. 23
(15 A)
F RONT
ACCESSORY
POWER SOCK ET
RELAY
PASSENGER'S
UNDER-DASH
F USE/RELAY
B OX
CONSOLE
ACCESSORY
POWER SOCK ET
RELAY
B LK
F RONT
ACCESSORY
POWER
SOCK ET
XL
G503
J J L
G601
(A)
CONSOLE
ACCESSORY
POWER
SOCK ET
X L
G503
X L
G503
22~378
Front Accessorf Power Socket Test/Replacement
NOTE: If all of the f ront and c onsol e ac c essor y power
soc ket s do not wor k, check t he No. 18 (7.5: A>f use i n t he
dr i ver ' s under -dash f use/r el ay box and gr ound (G503)
f i rst .
2. Di sc onnec t t he 2P connect or (A) f r om t he front
ac c essor y power socket (B).
:
WH T BLK
3. Inspect the connector terminals to be sure they are all
maki ng good c ont ac t .'
If the terminals ar e bent , loose, or corroded, repair
them as' nec essar y and recheck the system.'
If the terminals look OK, goto step 4.
4. Tur n t he ignition switch to A CCE S S ORY (I).
5. Measure t he vol t age bet ween driver's under-dash
f use/r el ay box c onnec t or D (16P) t er mi nal No. 14 and
body gr ound. Ther e shoul d be l ess t han 0.2 V.
If t her e i s l ess t han 0.2 V, go to st ep 6. ':
If there i s mor e t han 0.2 V, check for:
- An open or high resistance i n t he wi r e bet ween
dr i ver ' s under -dash f use/r el ay box connect or D
(16P) t er mi nal No.'14and gr ound (G601).
- Po o r ground. (G601).
6. Measur e t he vol t age bet ween f ront ac c essor y power
socket 2P connector t er mi nal No. 1 and body gr ound.
Ther e shoul d be bat t ery vol t age.
If t her e i s battery vol t age, go to st ep 7.
If t her e i s no vol t age, c hec k for:
- A blown No. 23 (15 A) f use i n t he dr i ver ' s
- A f aul t y front ac c essor y power socket rel ay
- An open or hi gh r esi st anc e in t he wi r e bet ween
dr i ver ' s under -dash f use/r el ay box connect or P
(20P) t er mi nal No. 1 and cigarette li ghter 2P
7. Chec k f or continuity between t he f ront ac c essor y
power socket t er mi nal . No. 2 and body gr ound. Ther e
If t her e i s cont i nui t y, r epl ace t he power socket ; go t o
st ep 8.
If t her e i s no cont i nui t y, check for:
- Poor ground (G503).
- An open or hi gh resistance in t he wire between
f ront ac c essor y power socket 2P connect or
t er mi nal No. 2 and body gr ound (G503).
(cont' d)
22-379
Ac c es s or y Power Socket s
Front Accessorf Power Socket
Test/Replacement (cont'd)
8. Remove the socket (A).
9. Remove the housing (A) from the panel.
10. Install the power socket in the reverse order of
Console Accessorf Power Socket
Test/Replacement
NOTE: If all of the front and console accessory power
sockets do not work, check the No. 1 8 (7.5 A) fuse in the
driver's under-dash fuse/relay box and ground (G503)
first.
1. Remove the center console panel (see page 20-157).
2. Disconnect the 2P connector (A) from the console
accessory power socket (B).
A
PNK BL K
3. Inspect the connector terminals to be sure they are all
making good contact.
If the terminals are bent, loose, or corroded, repair
them as necessary and recheck the system.
If the terminals look OK , go to step 4.
4. Turn the ignition switch to ACCESSORY (I).
22- 380
5. Measure the voltage between console accessory
power socket relay terminal No. 3 and body ground.
There should be less than 0. 2 V.
If there is less than 0.2 V, go to step 6.
If t her e i s mor e t han 0.2 V, c hec k for:
- An open or hi gh r esi st ance i n t he wi r e bet ween
c onsol e ac c essor y power socket rel ay t er mi nal
No. 3 and body gr ound (G503).
- Poor gr ound (G503).
6. Measur e t he vol t age bet ween c onsol e ac c essor y
power socket 2P connect or t er mi nal No. 1 and body
gr ound. Ther e shoul d be battery vol t age.
If t her e i s no vol t age, check for:
- A bl own No. 12 (20 A) f use i n t he passenger ' s
- A f aul t y c onsol e ac c essor y power socket r el ay
c onsol e ac c essor y power socket rel ay t er mi nal
No. 1 and c onsol e ac c essor y power socket 2P
7. Chec k f or cont i nui t y bet ween t he c onsol e ac c essor y
power socket t er mi nal No. 2 and body gr ound. Ther e
If t her e i s cont i nui t y, r epl ace t he power socket ; go to
st ep 8.
If t her e i s no cont i nui t y, c hec k for:
c onsol e ac c essor y power socket 2P connect or
t er mi nal No. 2 and body gr ound (G503).
8. Remove t he socket (A).
9. Remove t he housi ng (A) f r om t he panel .
10. Inst al l t he power socket in t he r ever se order of
r emoval .
22- 381
Power Mirrors
Wi t h navigation system
REAR WINDOW DEF OGGER SWITCH /
MIRROR DEF OGGER SWITCH
PASSENGER'S CLIMATE
CONTROL SWI TCH
('08-09 model s)
F RONT PASSENGER'S
POWER WI NDOW SWITCH
(Has built-in control unit)
input Test, page 22-394
Replacement:
4-door, page 22-306
2-door, page 22-307
POWER MI RRORS / POWER
MRROR DEF OGGERS
F unction Test, page 22-390
Actuator T o o t porj o ?2-396
Actuator Replacement, page 22-397.
POWER WI NDOW MASTER SWITCH
(Has built-in c ont r ol unit)
Replacement:
4-door, page 22-305
2-door, page 22-306
POWER MIRROR SWI TCH
DRI VER' S MICU
Replacement:
22-382
Wi t hout navi gat i on s y s t em
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER S WI TCH/
MIRROR DEFOGGER SWI TCH
H V A C C ONT R OL UNI T /
C L I MAT E C ONT R OL UNI T
FRONT PA S S E NGE R' S POWER WINDOW SWI TCH
(Has bui l t -i n cont r ol uni t )
Replacement:
* 4-door, page 22-306
2-door, page 22-307
POWER MI RRORS / POWER
MIRROR DE FOGGE RS
F unction Test, page 22-390
Actuator Replacement, page 22-397
POWER WINDOW MAS TER SWI TCH
(Has built-in cont r ol uni t )
Replacement:
4-door, page 22-305
2-door, page 22-306
POWER MIRROR SWI TCH
DRI VER' S MICU
(Bui l t i nt o t he driver' s under -dash f use/ r el ay box)
Replacement:
22-383
Power Mi rrors
Circuit Diagram
With navigation system
B A TTE RY
DRIVER'S
UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY BOX
0-
No. 1-1 (MAIN) (100 A)
C T X J O
No. 3-1 (IG MAIN) (50 A)
No. 1-2 ( AS F/B S TD) (40 A)
- - <r\j o *
F16 C1
IGNITION S WI TCH
Zl S o V ORN
l/HT - f o B A T )
\ I GJ O7*- B L U
IG1 HOT in ON (II)
and S TA RT (III)
I G2 HOT in ON (II)
DRI VER' S
UNDE R- DAS H
CE NTE R
J UNCTI ON
B OX
RE D
RE A R WI NDOW
DE F OGGE R
RE L A Y
Y
BRN
F6
DRI VE R' S
J UNCTI ON BOX 1
I -
I
l
I
PNK
I
I
G10
1
F4
1
1
1 G9
1
1
, 1
F3
B L U
I H6
DOOR MUL TI PL E X
CONTROL UNI T
I
PNK
I
I
I H7
I
_ _|
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1
B L U
B- CAN L O
B- CAN HI
No. 16(7. 5 A)
c r v D
No. 5 (7.5 A)
B A CK - UP
L I GHTS
( RE VE RS E )
S I GNA L
V7
DRI VER' S MI CU
J 8 H1
G3
L T GRN
CL I MATE
CONTROL UNI T
PA S S E NGE R' S
UNDE R- DAS H
F US E / RE L A Y
BOX
No. 16(7. 5 A)
F US E
( DRI VER' S
UNDE R- DA S H
F US E / RE L A Y
BOX)
B2
B- CAN B- CAN
HI L O
r
RED
J_A9
. 1 un
L T GRN
I n
IG2
CL I MATE
CONTROL
UNI T
GND
B US -
DATA
(UART)
IG2
DRI VE R' S
CL I MATE
CONTROL
S WI TCH
B US -
DATA
( UART) GND
J B3
BL K
G401
; A28
GRN
; 13 J 14
L T G R N B L K
G401
['fo"model)
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
PNK
I
I
I
I
I
No. 16(7. 5 A)
F US E
( DRI VER' S
UNDE R- DAS H
F US E / RE L A Y
BOX)
B L U
I
I
I
I
I
B-CAN B- CAN
HI L O
RE D
J_A9
L T GRN
I 11
L T GRN
Ii
IG2
CL I MATE
CONTROL
UNI T
B US -
DATA
GND ( UART)
IG2
PR- DE F-
L E D
S W IN-1
S W IN-2
DRI VER' S
CL I MATE S W IN-3
CONTROL
S WI TCH S W | N _ 4
S WI N-
OUT- 3
BUS- gjy/N-
DATA
0 U T
-
4
(UART)
GND
RED
- Y E L
- WHT
2 9
L T BL U - H S W IN-3
- ORN
- BRN
12
L T B L U
PR- DEF-
L ED
S W IN-1
S W IN-2
IG2
REAR
WI NDOW
DE FOGGE R
S WI TCH
INDICATOR
S W IN-4
S W IN-
OUT- 3
S WI N-
OUT- 4
PA S S E NGE R' S
CL I MATE CONTROL
S WI TCH
(Rear wi nd o w
def ogger s wi t c h
and def ogger
t i mer c i r c ui t
bui l t i nt o t he
c l i mat e c ont r ol
uni t .)
J B3
BL K
G401
; A28
GRN
13 14
L T GRN B L K
G401
(' 08-09 model s )
22-384
B-CAN line
Other communication line
LTGRN
LTGRN
POWER MIRROR SWITCH
RIGHT
LTGRN
5
GRY
10 11
WHT
GRY
11
12 13
RED PNK
. LIGHT
' (LED)
BLK
BLK
GRY PUR YEL
IG2 UD MIR SW MIR SW
AS COM AS LR
P/W CONT
ILL+
DOOR MULTIPLEX CONTROL UNIT UART
MIR ACT
DR HEAT
B-CAN B-CAN
HI LO SG PG
j1
] 35 [ 33 I 32
J37
ORN
1 1 I
PNK BLU BLK
BLK

NI_
<M)
T L
RIGHT

LEFT
MIRROR ACTUATOR
LEFT POWER MIRROR
POWER
MIRROR
DEFOGGER
DRIVER^ MICU
CLIMATE
CONTROL UNIT
1
G501
- L L
G501
V
FRONT
PASSENGER' S
POWER WINDOW
SWITCH
G502
- L L
G501
(cont' d)
22-385
Power Mi rrors
Ci rcui t Di agram (cont ' d)
- - - : Ot her c ommuni c at i on l i ne
No. 1-2
( AS F/ B S TD)
(40 A) F US E
V
DOOR MUL TI PL E X
CONTROL UNI T
B L U
* H2
F5
CE NTE R
J UNCTI ON
BOX
A9
} No. 13
(20 A)
A28
PA S S E NGE R' S
UNDER- DAS H
GRN
25
FRONT PA S S E NGE R' S POWER WI NDOW S WI TCH
MIR A CT MIR A CT MIR A CT
A S UD A S COM A S LR
MIR A CT
A S HE AT PG
UP

DOWN
PNK
7
ORN

RI GHT

L E F T
MI RROR A CTUA TOR
RI GHT POWE R MI RROR
POWER
MI RROR
DE FOGGE R
X L
G505
J CL
G505
22-386
Wi t hout navigation system
DRIVER'S
UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY BOX
0-
No. 1-2 (AS F/B STD) (40 A)
F16 C1
-WHT
IGNITION SWITCH
ORN
BLU
IG1 HOT in ON (II)
and START (III)
IG2 HOT in ON (II)
DRIVER'S
UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY BOX
CENTER
JUNCTION
BOX
REAR WINDOW
DEFOGGER
RELAY
Y
BRN
Iw
DRIVER'S
JUNCTION BOX 1
I
I
PNK
I
I
I
I
I
I
BLU
V V
DOOR MULTIPLEX
CONTROL UNIT
I H6
I
.4.
F4 P5
- - BLU
F3 P6
PNK
No. 16 (7.5 A)
No. 5 (7.5 A)
BACK-UP
LIGHTS
(REVERSE)
SIGNAL
V
B-CAN LO J
DRIVER'S MICU
B-CAN HI
No. 16 (7.5 A)
FUSE
(DRIVER'S
UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY
BOX)
B-CAN
HI
B-CAN
LO
REAR
WINDOW
DEFOGGER/
POWER
MIRROR
DEFOGGER*
SWITCH
CLIMATE
CONTROL
UNIT
j B3
BLK
G401
(With climate control without navigation)
J8 HI
G3
LT GRN <g)
L l unN
CLIMATE
CONTROL UNIT
D p n HVAC
H I
T
U
CONTROL UNIT
PASSENGER' S
UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY
BOX
No. 16 (7.5 A)
FUSE
(DRIVER'S
UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY
BOX)
LTGRN
REAR
WI NDOW
DEFOGGER/
POWER
MIRROR
DEFOGGER*
SWITCH
HVAC
CONTROL
UNIT
J23
BLK
G401
( Wi th HV^controiT
(cont'd)
22-387
Power Mi rrors
*: W i th mi rror defogger
- : B- C A N line
- : Ot her c ommuni c at i on line
L T G R N
G R Y P U R Y E L
I G 2 U D M I R S W M I R S W
A S C O M A S L R
P / W C O N T
I L L +
D O O R M U L T I P L E X C O N T R O L U N I T U A R T
I M I R A C T
DR H E A T
' B - C A N B - C A N
! H I L O S G P G
j | 1
I 135 j3 3 1 3 2
I
37
I O R N
, 1 1 1
< P N K B L U B L K
1
B L K
UP

DOWN
R I G H T
k
J L E F T
M I R R O R A C T U A T O R
L E F T P O W E R M I R R O R
P O W E R
M I R R O R
D E F O G G E R
1
A A
D WVE R M 1 C U
C L I M A T E
G 5 0 1
B L U
F R O N T
P O W E R W I N D O W
S W I T C H
G 5 0 2 G 5 0 1
22-388
No. 1-2
( AS F/B S TD)
(40 A) F US E
DOOR MUL TI PL E X
CONTROL UNI T
B L U
* H2
B L U
CE NTE R
J UNCTI ON
BOX
A9
) No. 13
(20 A)
A28
PA S S E NGE R' S
UNDE R- DA S H
GRN
I.
FRONT PA S S E NGE R' S POWER WI NDOW S WI TCH
MIR A CT MIR A CT MIR A CT
A S U D A S COM A S LR
MIR A CT
A S HEAT
L T B L U PNK
8
DOWN

M i
5
RE D
6
n
RI GHT

L E FT
MI RROR A CTUA TOR
RI GHT POWER MI RROR
POWE R
MI RROR
DE F OGGE R
BL K
G505
PG
J 37
BL K
- 0.
G505
Power Mirrors
F unction Test
NOTE: The ri ght power mi r r or i s cont rol l ed by t he f ront
passenger's power wi ndo w s wi tch. W hen the power
mi rror s wi tch is operated, the door mul ti pl ex control uni t
recei ves the si gnal s f r om the power mi rror swi tch and
sends the si gnal s to the f ront passenger's power
wi ndow swi t c h. If t here i s mal f unct i on of t he ri ght power
mi rror act uat or oper at i on, do t he door mul t i pl ex cont rol
uni t i nput t est (see page 22-391) and front passenger ' s
power wi ndow swi t ch i nput t est (see page 22-394).
Lef t Power Mi rror Funct i on Tes t
2. Di sconnect t he 13P connect or (A) f r om t he power
mi rror swi t ch (B) and 37P connect or (C) f r om t he
power wi ndow mast er swi t ch' (D).
BLK PNK PUR WH T Y EL RED
t er mi nal No. 2 of t he power mi rror swi t ch 13P
c onnec t or wi t h t he i gni ti on swi t ch ON (II). Ther e
shoul d be battery vol t age.
If t her e i s no battery vol t age, check for:
- Bl own No. 16 (7.5 A) f use in t he dr i ver ' s
- An open in t he L T GRN wi r e.
5. Chec k f or cont i nui t y bet ween t er mi nal No. 6 and body
gr ound. Ther e shoul d be cont i nui t y.
If t her e i s no cont i nui t y, check for:
- An open in the BLK wi r e.
6. Connec t t er mi nal s No. 2 and No. 10, and t er mi nal s
No. 5 (or No. 12) and No. 6 wi t h j umper wi r es. The left
mi r r or shoul d tilt down (or swi ng left) wi t h t he i gni ti on
swi t ch in ON (II).
If t he left mi rror does not tilt down (or does not
swi ng left), check f or an open in t he GRY (or YEL )
wi r e bet ween t he left mi rror and t he 13P connect or .
If t he wi r e i s OK, check t he left mi rror act uat or.
If t he mi r r or nei t her ti lts down nor swi ngs left,
repai r t he PUR wi r e.
If t he mi r r or wor ks pr oper l y, check t he mi rror
swi t c h.
Power Wi ndow Mast er Swi t c h Input Test
NOTE: Bef ore t est i ng, t r oubl eshoot t he mul t i pl ex Int egrat ed cont rol uni t f i r st , usi ng B-CAN Sy s t em Di agnosi s Test Mode
1. Tur n t he i gni t i on swi t c h t o LOCK (0), open and c l ose t he dr i ver ' s door , t hen r emove t he power wi ndow mast er swi t c h.
2. Di sc onnec t t he 37P c onnec t or (A) f r om t he power wi ndow mast er swi t c h (B).
Wire side of
female terminals
1 /
3
/ / / /
9|10|11|
12
25
13 14 / / / / / 2 0 21 22 23
24
37
12
25 26^7 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
24
37
\
PNK L TGRN BLK BLK
* : Wi t h mi r r or def ogger
(cont' d)
22-391
Power Mirrors
Power Wi ndow Mast er Swi t c h Input Test (cont' d)
4. Rec onnec t t he connect or to t he power wi ndow mast er swi t c h, t urn t he i gni t i on swi t c h to ON (II), and do t hese i nput
t est s at t he f ol l owi ng connect or .
If all t he i nput t est s prove OK, go t o st ep 5.
posi t i ons
gr ound:
Ther e shoul d be l ess t han 0.2
V.
o An open or hi gh r esi st anc e
in t he wi r e
posi t i ons
gr ound:
Ther e shoul d be l ess t han 0.2
V.
* An open or hi gh resistance
in t he wi r e
14 L TGRN Igni ti on swi t c h ON (II) Measur e t he vol t age t o
gr ound:
Ther e shoul d be bat t ery
Bl own No. 16 (7.5 A) f use i n
f use/r el ay box
A n openor h i g h resistance
in t he wi r e
22-392
BODY
5. T u r n t h e i g n i t i o n s w i t c h t o L OCK (0), o p e n a n d c l o s e t h e d r i v e r ' s d o o r , t h e n d i s c o n n e c t t h e 37P c o n n e c t o r f r o m t h e
power wi ndow mast er swi t ch agai n.
If any t est i ndi cat es a pr obl em, f i nd and cor r ect t he c ause, t hen recheck t he syst em.
If all t he i nput t est s prove OK, t he power wi ndow mast er swi t ch must be f aul t y, r epl ace it.
NOTE: After r epl aci ng t he power wi ndow mast er swi t ch, r eset t he power wi ndow cont rol uni t (see page 22-280).
9 WHT Igni ti on swi t c h ON (II),
power mi rror swi t ch i n
RIGHT mi rror posi t i on
gr ound:
vol t age when the power
mi rror swi t ch L EFT or DOWN
i s pr essed.
f use/r el ay box
Faul t y power mi rror swi t ch
in t he wi r e
10 RED Igni ti on swi t c h ON (II),
RIGHT mi r r or posi t i on
gr ound:
mi rror swi t ch RIGHT i s
pr essed.
- own No. 16 (7.5 A) f use in
f use/r el ay box
Faul t y power mi rror swi t c h
in t he wi r e
11 GRY Igni ti on swi t c h ON (II),
RIGHT mi rror posi t i on
gr ound:
mi rror swi t c h UP i s pr essed.
f use/r el ay box
Faul t y power mi rror swi t c h
in t he wi r e
r ORN Igni ti on swi t c h ON (II),
wi r e
Check t he left power mi rror
def ogger operat i on:
The left power mi rror
def ogger shoul d work (the
i nsi de l ower edge bec omes
war m).
Faul t y left power mi rror
def ogger
in t he wi r e
26 PNK Igni ti on swi t ch ON (II),
wi r e
Check t he power mi rror swi t ch
light oper at i on:
The power mi rror swi t ch li ght
shoul d c ome on.
Faul t y L ED
Faul t y power mi rror swi t ch
in t he wi r e
*: Wi t h mi rror def ogger
22 ""393
Po wer Mi rro rs
Front Passenger's Power Window Switch Input Test
1. Tu r n t he i gni ti on swi t c h to L OCK (0), open and c l ose t he dr i ver ' s door , t hen r emove t he f ront passenger ' s
(passenger ' s) power wi ndow swi t c h.
2. Di sconnect t he 37P c onnec t or (A) f r om t he f ront passenger ' s (passenger ' s) power wi ndow swi t c h (B).
A
li nals
GRN BLU BLK
*: Wi t h mi r r or def ogger
If t he t er mi nal s ar e bent , l oose, or c or r oded, r epai r t hem as nec essar y, and r echeck t he syst em.
22-394
4. Reconnect t he connect or to t he front passenger ' s power wi ndow swi t c h/t ur n t he i gni ti on swi t c h to ON (11), and do
t hese i nput t est s at t he f ol l owi ng connect or .
If any t est i ndi cat es a pr obl em, f i nd and correct t he c aus e, t hen r echeck t he syst em.
posi t i ons
in t he wi r e
25 GRN Under all condi t i ons Measur e t he vol t age to gr ound:
Bl own No. 13 (20 A) f use in
t he passenger ' s under -dash
f use/r el ay box
f use/r el ay box
in t he wi r e
5. Tur n t he i gni t i on swi t ch to L OCK (0), open and cl ose t he dr i ver ' s door , t hen di sconnect t he 37P connect or f r om t he
f ront passenger ' s power wi ndow swi t ch agai n.
If any t est i ndi cat es a pr obl em, f i nd and correct t he c aus e, t hen r echeck t he syst em.
If all t he i nput t est s pr ove OK , r epl ace t he front passenger ' s power wi ndow swi t c h, and go to st ep 7.
3
4
LT
BL U
PNK
Igni ti on swi t ch ON (II),
No. 4), and t er mi nal s
No. 4 (or No. 3) and
No. 37 wi t h j umper
wi r es.
Check t he ri ght power mi rror
operat i on:
The right power mi rror shoul d UP
(or DOWN).
Faul t y ri ght power mi rror
in t he wi r e
4
5
PNK
RED
Igni ti on swi t ch ON (II),
No. 5), and t er mi nal s
No. 5 (or No. 4) and
No. 37 wi t h j umper
wi r es.
operat i on:
The right power mi rror shoul d
L EFT (or RIGHT).
in t he wi r e
r
ORN Connec t t er mi nal s
No. 25 and No. 1 wi t h a
j umper wi r e
def ogger oper at i on:
The ri ght power mi rror def ogger
shoul d wor k (the i nsi de l ower
edge bec omes war m).
def ogger
open in t he ground wi r e
in t he wi r e
29 BL U Under all condi t i ons,
di sc onnec t t he power
wi ndow mast er swi t ch
37 P connect or
t er mi nal No. 29 and power
t he wi r e
*: Wi t h mi rror def ogger
7. Wi t h t he front passenger ' s power wi ndow AUTO UP/ AUTO DOWN f unct i on, r eset t he power wi ndow cont rol uni t (see
page 22-280).
22-395
Power Mi rrors
Power Mi rror Swi t c h
Test /Repl ac ement
2. Di sc onnec t t he 13P connect or f r om t he power mi r r or
swi t c h (A).
swi t c h posi t i on ac c or di ng t o t he t abl e.
\ ^ Ter mi nal
Posi t i on \ ^
2 5 6 10 11 12 13
L
UP
CH
- o
CH
- O
L
DOWN
O
o
-o
- o
L
' L EFT o-
f -o
Ok
L
' L EFT o-
\ j KJ
L
RIGHT
o
CH o
- o
R
UP
CH - o
o - o
R
DOWN
C H
o-l -o
- o
R
LEF T
o - ~ o
R
LEF T
o -
\ J
KJ
R
RIGHT
On
-o
4. If t he cont i nui t y i s not as spec i f i ed, r emove t he s c r ews
and r epl ace t he power mi r r or swi t c h.
Power Mi rror Act uat or Test
1. Remove t he mi rror mount c over (see page 20-62).
2. Di sc onnec t t he 8P connect or (A) f r om t he power
mi r r or act uat or (B).
1
/
3
/
/
6 7 8
Terminal sideof
maleterminals
3. Chec k t he act uat or operat i on by connect i ng battery
power and gr ound accor di ng to t he t abl e.
\ Ter mi nal
6 7 8
Posi t i on \
6 7 8
TIL T UP
0

TIL T DOWN
e
S WI NG L EFT
e
S WI NG RIGHT
e
0
4. If t he mi r r or f ai l s to wor k pr oper l y, c hec k f or an open
or hi gh r esi st anc e i n t he wi r e bet ween t he connect or
and t he mi rror hol der . If t he wi r e i s OK, r epl ace t he
mi rror act uat or.
Def ogger Tes t
5. Measur e t he r esi st ance bet ween t er mi nal s No. 1 and
No. 3 of t he 8P connect or . Ther e shoul d be about 7 0 .
6. If t he r esi st anc e i s not as spec i f i ed, check f or an open
or hi gh r esi st anc e i n t he wi r e bet ween t he connect or
and t he mi rror hol der. If t he wi r e i s OK , r epl ace t he
mi rror hol der .
22-396
Power Mirror Actuator Replacement
Removal
1. Remove t he mi r r or hol der (see page 20-63).
2. Remove t he power mi rror (see page 20-62), and
di sc onnec t t he power mi rror 8P connect or f r om t he
door wi r e har ness.
3. Remove t he gasket (A).
B
4 Remove t he sc r ews f r om t he power mi rror 8P
connect or (B).
5. Rec or d t he power mi r r or 8P connect or t er mi nal
l ocat i ons and wi r e col or s.
6. Di sassembl e t he power mi rror 8P connect or (A), and
r emove all t er mi nal s f r om it.
A
7. Remove t he c over (A).
8. Remove t he t hr ee s c r ews , and separ at e t he mi rror
housi ng (B) f r om t he bracket (C).
9. Remove t he s c r ews and t he act uat or (A).
(cont ' d)
22-397
Power Mi rrors
Power M i r r o r Actuator Replacement (cont'd)
Inst al l at i on
1. Rout e t he wi r e har ness (A) of a new act uat or t hr ough
t he hol e i n t he bracket (B).
2. Inst al l t he part s in t he r ever se or der of r emoval .
3. Insert t he new act uat or t er mi nal s into t he connect or i n
t he ori gi nal ar r angement .
Left Ri ght
B L K BLK B L K BLK
1
/
3
/
/
6 7 8
u J k I P
n t F = l f n
1
/
3
/
/
6 7 8
TXT T f t
'BLK \ Y EL/WH T B LU/B LK \ Y I
B LU/B LK \ Y EL/WHT
B LU/QRN
Y EL/BLK \ Y EL/WH T
Y EL/RED
4. Appl y E P T seal er to t he i nt er sect i on of t he wi r e
har ness and t he 8P connect or , t hen i nst al l t he 8P
connect or in t he r ever se or der of r emoval .
5. Inst al l t he gasket in t he r ever se or der of r emoval .
6. Reassembl e i n t he r ever se or der of di sassembl y.
NOTE: Be caref ul not to break t he mi r r or when
r ei nst al l i ng it to t he act uat or.
7. Rei nst al l t he mi rror assembl y on t he door .
8. Oper at e t he power mi r r or to ensur e smoot h
oper at i on.
22-398
Aut omat i c Di mmi ng Insi de Mirror
Bom
Ci rcui t Di agram
U N D E R - H O O D F US E / RE L A Y B OX
CTXJ O C T \ J D
D R I V E R ' S
U N D E R - D A S H
F U S E / R E L A Y BOX
F 1 6 C I
- W H T
' B A T
IG1 H O T i n O N ( I I )
and S T A R T (i ll)
B L U
B L U
D R I V E R ' S
U N D E R - D A S H
F U S E / R E L A Y BOX C5
No. 5
(7.5 A)
F27 D6
G R Y L T B L U
V
B A C K - U P
L I G H T S
DI ODE B
{Am
BLU
P20
PCM
7
TRA NS MI S S I ON
RA NGE S WI TCH
r (Bac k-up l i ght s wi t c h)
1 0 (Cl os ed: In R posi t i on)
X L
G101
BRN
L T BL U BRN
DRI VER' S
J UNCTI ON
BOX 2
J 8
L T B L U
DRI VER' S
J UNCTI ON
B OX1
G5
BRN
GRY
l a
AUTOMATI C DI MMI NG
I NSI DE MI RROR
(Has bui l t -i n c ont r ol uni t )
BL K
I
BRN
i
22-399
Aut omat i c Di mmi ng Insi de Mirror
EX-L, EX-L PZEV model s
The aut omat i c di mmi ng Insi de mi r r or has a f ront -f aci ng
lux l evel sensor (A), rear-f aci ng l ux l evel s ens or s (B), and
a cont rol uni t. The cont rol uni t r ec ei ves si gnal s f r om
eac h sensor . Based on t he di f f erence bet ween t he t wo
lux l evel s (the li ght out si de t he vehi c l e and t he li ght f r om
t he headl i ght s of t he ot her vehi c l e, et c.), t he cont r ol uni t
cont r ol s t he el ect r o-chr omi c gel to r educe gl ar e. Thi s
di mmi ng f unct i on i s c anc el ed when t he t r ansmi ssi on i s
i n r ever se, or when t he aut omat i c di mmi ng off but t on (C)
Is t ur ned OFF.
Test /Repl acement
EX-L, EX-L PZEV models
1. Remove the cover (A), then disconnect BP connector
(B ).
B
3. Measur e t he vol t age bet ween t er mi nal No. 2 and
body gr ound.
If t her e i s l ess t han 0.2 V, go to st ep 4.
If t her e i s mor e t han 0.2 V, check for:
- An open or hi gh r esi st ance in t he wi r e.
body gr ound.
if t here i s battery vol t age, go to st ep 5.
If t here i s no vol t age, check for:
- Bl own No. 5 (7.5 A) f use in t he dr i ver ' s
body gr ound wi t h t he t r ansmi ssi on r ange swi t ch in R
posi t i on.
If t here i s battery vol t age, r epl ace t he mi rror
assembl y.
- Faul t y dr i ver ' s under -dash f use/r el ay box.
- Faul t y t r ansmi ssi on range swi t c h.
22-400
Power Seat s
22-401
Power Seat s
Circuit Diagram
No. 1-1 (MAIN) (100 A) No. 3-4 (DR F/B) (60 A)
c r v x > c r v j o
* 1 : 4-door
* 2: 2-door
F18
) No. 19
(20 A) (
j No. 21
(20 A)
P12 P 1 1
DRI VER' S
UNDER- DAS H
F US E / RE L A Y
BOX
i DLU riMr\
} I
DRI VER' S
P O W E R S E A T A DJ US TME NT S WI TCH
L T B L U *
1
R E D / W H T * '
PNK *
1
GRN/ YE L *
:
> p 6 p O p y
UP ^ B A CK WA RD / } FORWA RD X DOWN
6 p
BL K *
1
WHT"
1
WHT / B L U*
2
L T B L U *
ORN B L U RE D GRY
FRONT UP- DOWN MOTOR S L I DE MOTOR RE AR UP- DOWN MOTOR RECL I NE MOTOR
BL K
G701 G701
22-402
Power Seat Adj ust ment Swi t c h Test /Repl acement
1. Remove t he dr i ver ' s seat (see page 20-194).
2. Remove t he power seat adj ust ment swi t c h knobs (A) and t he recl i ne c over f r om t he dr i ver ' s seat .
1 2 3 4 5
6 7 8 9 10 11 12
3. Remove t he t wo s c r ews and t he power seat adj ust ment swi t ch (B).
4. Di sconnect t he 12P connect or f r om t he power seat adj ust ment swi t c h.
5. Rei nst al l t he adj ust ment swi t ch knobs to t he swi t c h.
6. Check f or cont i nui t y bet ween t he t er mi nal s in each swi t ch posi t i on accor di ng to t he t abl e.
\
Terminal
Position
SLIDE
SWI TCH
For war d
Bac kwar d
8
1>
-o
10 11
12
"O
RECL I NE
SWITCH
For war d
B ackward o-
FRONT
UP-DOWN
SWITCH
UP
O-
DOWN
REAR
UP-DOWN
SWITCH
UP
DOWN
-o
*:There is continuity without operating a swi tch.
7. If t he cont i nui t y i s not as speci f i ed, r epl ace t he swi t c h.
22-403
Power Seat s
Dri ver' s Power Seat Motor Test
1. Remove t he dri ver's seat (see page 20-194).
2. Remove the power seat adj ust ment swi t c h knobs and
the recl i ne c over f r om the seat .
3. Di sconnect the 12P connect or (A) f rom the power seat
adj ust ment swi t ch (B).
Wire side of
female terminals
1 2 3 4 5
6 7 8 9 10 11 12
4. At t he 12P connect or of t he dr i ver ' s seat wi r e har ness
si de, t est t he mot or by appl yi ng battery power and
gr ound to t he t er mi nal s accor di ng to t he t abl e.
Sl i de mot or
\ ^ Ter mi nal
Posi t i on \
7 11
For war d
0
Bac k war d
0
Recl i ne mo t o r
\ Ter mi nal
Posi t i on \
6 12
For war d
0
Bac k war d

Fr ont up-down mot or
\ Ter mi nal
Posi t i on \
3 9
UP

DOWN

Rear up-down mot or
\ ^ Ter mi nal
Posi t i on \ ^
1 5
UP

DOWN
0
to st ep 6.
22-404
6. Di sconnect t he 2P connect or f rom each motor.
NOTE;
For t he r ecl i ne mot or, r emove t he seat back panel .
Al l connect or vi ews are wi r e si de of f emal e
t er mi nal s.
UP-DOWN
MOTOR
RECLINE MOTOR
7. Chec k f or cont i nui t y bet ween eac h mot or 2P
connect or and t he dr i ver ' s seat wi r e har ness 12P
connect or . If t her e i s cont i nui t y, r epl ace t he
appropri at e mot or:
Recl i ne mot or (see page 20-200)
Sl i de mot or (see page 20-204)
NOTE: The front and rear up-down mot or s ar e part of
t he up-down adj ust er .
Sl i de mot or 2P
c onnec t or t er mi nal
Dr i ver ' s seat wi r e
har ness 12P c onnec t or
No. 1 No. 7
No. 2 No. 11
Rec l i ne mot or 2P
c onnec t or t er mi nal
No. 1 No. 6
No. 2 No. 12
Fr ont up-down
t er mi nal
No. 1 No. 9
No. 2 No. 3
Rear up-down mot or
2P c onnec t or
t er mi nal
har ness 12P connect or
No. 1 No. 1
No. 2 No. 5
22-405
Power Lumbar Support
22-406
Ci rcui t Di agram
*1: 4-door
*2: 2-door
UNDER-H OOD
B ATTERY
-
No. 2-4 (AS F/B OP) (40 A)
B1
PASSENGER'S
j No. 18 UNDER-DASH
C ( 10A)
F USE/RELAY
B OX
A7
DRI VER' S L UMB A R
S UPPORT S WI TCH
B RN*
GRN*
f
B A CK WA RD

FORWA RD
B L K *
1
B L K *
1
WHT*
2
WHT*
:
DRIVER'S LUMB AR
SUPPORT MOTOR
- 9r
G701
22-407
Power l umbar Support
Swi t c h Test /Repl ac ement
1. Separ at e t he l umbar suppor t swi t ch c over (A) f r om
t he swi t ch (B).
A \ \
2. Di sconnect t he 5P connect or (C) f r om t he swi t c h.
swi t ch posi t i on accor di ng to t he t abl e.
\ Ter mi nal
Posi t i on \
1 2 3 4 5
F orward
o - - o
o - - o
Bac k war d
f~\
Bac k war d \J
Or-
- o
KJ
Motor Test
1. Remove t he front seat back panel , and seat -back
c over /pad.
2. Di sc onnec t t he 2P connect or (A) f r om t he l umbar
suppor t mot or (B).
3. Test t he mot or by appl yi ng battery power and body
gr ound to t he t er mi nal s.
\ Ter mi nal
Position \
1 2
For war d
e
Bac kwar d
e
4. If t he mot or does not run or f ai l s to run smoot hl y,
r epl ace it.
22-408
Seat Heaters
DRIVER'S SEAT HEATER RELAY (L OW (5P)
Test, page 22-93
(cont'd)
22-409
Seat Heaters
22-410
22-411
Seat Heaters
Ci rcui t Di agram
DRIVER'S DRIVER'S
UNDER-DASH UNDER-DASH
F US E / RE L A Y B OX IGNITION SWI TCH F US E / RE L A Y BOX
/ B A T \ C4 '
. W H T - f o O f - ORN
F 16 CI
No. 16(7.5 A)
<rxx>
IG1 HOT i n ON (II)
L T GRN
J 8
B1 No. 19 (15 A) A 2 7
GRN c r v i D L T GRN
TH: THE RMOS TA T
B R: B RE A K E R
[ ON: 84-102 F (29-39 C))
[ OFF: 100-118 F (38-48 C)]
[ ON: 77- 95 F (25-35 Q]
[ OFF: 113-131 F (45-55 C)]
PA S S E NGE R' S
UNDE R- DA S H
CE NTE R
J UNCTI ON
BOX
L T GRN
L T GRN
L T GRN
K 9
F2
DRI VER' S
J UNCTI ON
B OX 2
WHT RE D L T GRN
V-
i
5 1
S E A T
HE ATE R
RE L A Y
(L OW)
i
S E A T
HEATER
RE L A Y
(HIGH)
DRI VE R' S
S E A T
HEATER
RE L A Y
BOX
i
L OW
9
No. 6 (7.5 A) F US E
( PA S S E NGE R' S
UNDE R- DAS H
y
DRI VER' S
/* D v SEAT
G R Y
HE ATE R
2 S WI TCH
x HIGH
Q
\ I NDI CATORS
/ (L ED x 2)
DAS HL I GHTS
B RI GHTNE S S
CONTROL L E R
(In t he gauge
c ont r ol modul e)
22-412
1 BOD\

*1: 4- d o o r
* 2: 2-door
L T GRN
No. 6 (7.5 A) F US E
( PA S S E NGE R' S
UNDER- DAS H
V
F R O N T
PA S S E NGE R' S '
S E A T HEATER
G R Y
S WI TCH 3
L OW
o
HIGH
GRN
GRN *
1
L T G R N *
1
B L U/ Y E L *
2
R E D *
2
i
\ L I GHT
/ ( L E D)
I NDI CATORS
(L ED x 2)
ORN
^7
DAS HL I GHTS
BRI GHTNE S S
CONTROL L ER
(In t he gauge
c ont r ol modul e) G503
Y E L *
1
L T G R N *
GRN/ RE D*
2
R E D *
2
S E A T
HEATER
RE L A Y
(L OW)
i 1
G702 G702
S E A T
HEATER
RE L A Y
(HIGH)
FRONT
PA S S E NGE R' S
S E A T
HEATER
RE L A Y
BOX
1X1
2 S E A T HEATER
UL|
1
BL K
G702
22-413
Seat Heaters
Seat Heater Test
Dri ver's Seat
1. Remove t he dr i ver ' s seat (see page 20-194).
2. Remove t he seat back panel .
3. Di sc onnec t t he connect or A (4P) and connect or B (2P)
f r om t he seat heat er s.
4. Chec k f or cont i nui t y bet ween seat heat er connect or B
(2P) t er mi nal s No. 1 and No. 2. Ther e shoul d be
cont i nui t y.
seat -back heat er.
6. Rec onnec t seat heat er connect or B (2P) to t he
seat -back heat er.
7. Chec k f or cont i nui t y bet ween seat heat er connect or A
(4P) t er mi nal s No. 2 and No. 3, and t er mi nal s No. 3
and No. 4. Ther e shoul d be cont i nui t y.
8. If t he cont i nui t y i s not as spec i f i ed, r epl ace t he seat
c ushi on heat er.
CONNECTOR B (2P)
22-414
Swi t c h Test /Repl ac ement
Front Pas s enger's Seat
1. Remove t he front passenger ' s seat (see page 20-194).
2. Di sc onnec t t he 3P connect or (A) f r om t he seat heat er.
Wire side of
female terminals
3. Chec k f or cont i nui t y bet ween seat heat er 3P
connect or t er mi nal s No. 1 and No. 3 and t er mi nal s
No. 2 and No. 3. Ther e shoul d be cont i nui t y.
4. If the cont i nui t y i s not as spec i f i ed, r epl ace t he seat
heat er.
2. Di sconnect t he 6P (or 7P*) connect or f r om t he seat
heat er swi t c h, t hen r emove t he swi t c h.
*: Front passenger ' s seat heat er swi t c h
Driver's seat
heater switch
F ront passenger's
seat heater switch
3. Check for cont i nui t y bet ween t he t er mi nal s i n eac h
swi t ch posi t i on accor di ng to t he t abl e.
NOTE: Make sur e t he cor r ect t est l ead ( +or ) i s
pl aced on t he t er mi nal .
[ ] : Front passenger's seat heater swi tch
22-415
Rear Wi ndow Defogger
Wi t h navi gat i on s y s t em
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER S WI TCH/
MIRROR DEFOGGER SWI TCH
22-416
22-417
Hear Wi ndow Defogger
Ci rcui t Di agram
' 10 model wi th navi gat i on s y s t em
: B- CAN l i ne
B A TTE RY
DRI VER' S
UNDE R- DA S H
IGNITION S WI TCH
No . 4
(40 A)
F26
NOI S E
REDUCTI ON
CONDE NS E R I
A ( +
RE A R
WI NDOW
DE FOGGE R
B ( - )
G602
(2-door )
C I
IG1 HOT i n ON (II)
and S TA RT (III) ORN
IG2 HOT i n ON (II) I
BL U
C5
No. 16 i No. 5
(7.5 A) f (7.5 A)
DRI VER' S MI CU
B- CAN B-CAN
HI L O
I P6
I
| F 3
~l
P18
DRI VER' S
J UNCTI ON
B OX1
J 8
G3
CE NTE R
J UNCTI ON
BOX
PNK
1
B L U
1
1
*
1
1
*
1
I
WHT
1
8
RE D
1
! B I
B-CAN B-CAN
HI L O
- L T GRN
A9
L T GRN
11
CL I MATE
CONTROL UNI T
GND
B US - DA TA
( UART)
J B3
BL K
G401
; A28
GRN
IG2
(Rear wi nd o w def ogger T.
s wi t c h and def ogger ,
t i mer c i r c ui t bui l t i nt o Q
t he c l i mat e c ont r ol uni t .) j
DRI VER' S CL I MATE
CONTROL S WI TCH
(W\ REAR WI NDOW
DE FOGGE R
X S WI TCH
S I NDI CATOR
B US - DA TA
J
-
(UART) GND
:
1 3
I
1 4
L T GRN BL K
G401
22-418
' 08-09 model s wi t h navi gat i on s y s t em
: B- CAN l i ne
BATTERY
UNDER-HOOD FUSE/RELAY B OX
DRI VE R' S
UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY B OX
IGNITION S WI TCH
- CTXJD-
No . 4
v (40 A)
REAR
WI NDOW
DE FOGGE R
RE L A Y
F16
NOI S E
REDUCTI ON
CONDE NS E R
G602
A(+)
REAR
WI NDOW
DE F OGGE R
B ( - )
~9r
G801
IG1 HOT i n ON (II)
and S TA RT (III) ORN B L U
IG2 HOT i n ON (II) _ . ^ r
C4 ( Co
No. 16
c
(7.5 A) I
No. 5
(7.5 A)
DRI VER' S MI CU
B-CAN B-CAN
HI L O
i r
I P6
PNK
| F 3
I P5
B L U
PI 8
L T GRN
I H6
PNK
DRI VER' S
J UNCTI ON
B OX1
I H7
BL U
J 8
G3
CE NTE R
J UNCTI ON
BOX
L T GRN
RED
I A9
L T GRN
In
L T GRN
I 1
B- CAN B- CAN
HI L O
CL I MATE
CONTROL
UNI T
B US -
DATA
(UART)
DRI VER' S
CL I MATE
CONTROL
S WI TCH
B US -
DATA
(UART)
PR- DEF-
L ED
S W IN-1
S W IN-2
S W IN-3
S W IN-4
S WI N-
OUT- 3
S WI N-
OUT- 4
GND
4
- RED
7
- YE L
8
- W H T -
9
L T B L U
10
" ORN "
- BRN -
L T B L U
PR- DEF-
L ED
S W IN-1
S W IN-2
IG2
T REAR
Ol WI NDOW
11 DE FOGGE R
g I S WI TCH
X I NDI CATOR
PA S S E NGE R' S
oX A / m n CL I MATE CONTROL
bW I N- d S W ) T C H
C \ A / I M A ' f (Rear wi nd o w
def ogger swi t c h
) and def ogger
t i mer c i r c ui t
bui l t i nt o t he
c l i mat e c ont r ol
uni t .)
S WI N-
OUT- 3
S WI N-
OUT- 4
jB3
BL K
G401
; A28
GRN
:
1 3
L T GRN
| 14
BL K
G401
(2-door )
22-419
Rear Wi ndow Defogger
Without navigation syst em wi th climate control system
B A TTE RY
DRIVER'S
UNDER-DASH
F US E / RE L A Y B OX IGNITION S WI TCH
0 -
No. 1-1 (MAIN) (100 A)
' C T V J O
No. 3-1 (IG MAIN) (50 A)
No. 4
(40 A)
- WHT -
L T G R N
C1
IG1 HOT i n ON (II)
and S TA RT (III) ORN
I G2 HOT i n ON (II) I M
I C4
DRI VER' S " MICU
IG1
B-CAN B- CAN
HI L O
PNK B L U
JP18
L l CRN
NOI S E
RE DUCTI ON
CONDE NS E R
_ L
G602
1
! F3
i
i
i F4 J 8
i i
i i
i i
DRI VE R' S
J UNCTI ON
B OX1
| H6
i
| H7
i
G3
CE NTE R
J UNCTI ON
BOX
PNK B L U
1
B2
A ( +
REAR
WI NDOW
DE F OGGE R
B ( - )
B- CAN B- CAN
HI L O
(Rear wi nd o w def ogger I
s wi t c h and def ogger
t i mer c i r c ui t bui l t i nt o
t he c l i mat e c ont r ol uni t .)
i RE AR WI NDOW
1
DE F OGGE R
S WI TCH
I NDI CATOR
B3
" (2-door)
1
G801
X L
G401
22-420
Wi t h HVAC cont r ol syst em
UNDER-HOOD FUSE/ REL AY BOX
DRIVER' S
UNDER-DASH
F US E / RE L A Y BOX IGNITION SWITCH
NOISE
REDUCTION
CONDENSER
A(+)
REAR
WINDOW
DEFOGGER
(Rear wi nd o w def ogger T
s wi t c h and def ogger
t i mer ci r cui t bui l t i nt o n
t he HVAC c ont r ol uni t .) T
| HVAC CONTROL UNIT ^
W \ REAR WINDOW
DEFOGGER
X SWITCH
1 INDICATOR
23
BL K
G401
(2-door )
Bear Wi ndow Defogger
Funct i on Test
NOTE;
Wi t h cl i mat e cont rol : Bef ore t est i ng, t r oubl eshoot t he
B-CAN Sy s t em Di agnosi s Test Mode A (see page
22-134).
Bef ore t est i ng, check t he No. 4 (40 A) f use i n t he
under -hood f use/r el ay box and t he No. 16 (7.5 A) f use
in t he dr i ver ' s under -dash f use/r el ay box.
Be car ef ul not to scr at ch or damage t he def ogger
wi r es wi t h t he t est er pr obe.
1. Tur n t he i gni ti on swi t ch to ON (II), t hen t urn t he r ear
wi ndow def ogger swi t ch ON.
2. Measur e t he vol t age bet ween t he posi t i ve t er mi nal
(A) and body gr ound. Ther e shoul d be bat t ery
vol t age.
- ppl iltv/ roar wi nr l r i m/ rhafr\ nc*cxr rolow
- Faul t y cl i mat e cont rol uni t , dr i ver ' s cl i mat e
cont rol swi t ch ('10 model ), passenger ' s cl i mat e
cont rol swi t ch (' 08-09 model s), or HVAC cont rol
uni t.
- An open or hi gh r esi st ance in t he GRN wi r e to t he
posi t i ve t er mi nal .
If t her e i s vol t age, go to st ep 3.
About 2.0 V ; About 6 V \ About 11 V
About 4.2 V About 8.5 V
3. Measur e t he vol t age bet ween t he negat i ve t er mi nal
(B) and body gr ound. Ther e shoul d be l ess t han 0.2 V.
If t here i s gr eat er t han 0.2 V, check f or an open i n t he
BLK wi r e or poor gr ound (G801). If t her e i s 0.2 V or
l ess, go to st ep 4.
4. Touc h t he vol t met er posi t i ve probe al ong eac h
def ogger wi r e, and t he negat i ve pr obe to t he negat i ve
t er mi nal .
If t he vol t age i s as spec i f i ed, t he def ogger wi r e up to
t hat poi nt i s OK.
If t he vol t age i s not as spec i f i ed, repai r t he def ogger
wi r e.
- If vol t age i s mor e t han speci f i ed at one of t he
poi nt s, t her e i s a break i n t he negat i ve hal f of t he
wi r e.
- If vol t age i s l ess t han speci f i ed at one of t he
poi nt s, t her e i s a break i n t he posi t i ve hal f of t he
wi r e.
22~422
Defogger Wi re Repai r
NOTE: To make an ef f ect i ve repai r, t he broken sect i on
must be no l onger t han 1.0 in (25 mm).
1. Li ght l y rub t he ar ea ar ound t he broken sec t i on (A)
wi t h f i ne st eel wool , t hen cl ean it wi t h i sopr opyl
al cohol .
C
2. Car ef ul l y mask above and bel ow t he broken porti on of
t he def ogger wi r e (B) wi t h cel l ophane t ape (C).
3. Usi ng a smal l br ush, appl y a heavy coat of si l ver
conduct i ve pai nt (commer ci al l y avai l abl e) (A)
ext endi ng about 1/8" onboth si des of t he break. Al l ow
25 mi nut es to dry.
4. Do t he f unct i on t est to conf i r m that t he wi r e i s
r epai r ed.
5. Appl y a sec ond coat of pai nt i n t he s ame way. Let it
dry 3 hour s bef ore r emovi ng t he t ape.
Immobi li zer S f st em
IMMOBILIZER INDICATOR
DRI VER' S UNDER-DAS H
F USE/RELAY BOX
I MMOBI L I ZER- K EYL ES S CONTROL UNIT (Has bui l t -i n r ecei ver )
Sy mpt om Tr oubl eshoot i ng, page 22-431
Regi st r at i on, page 22-439
I MOES UNIT (Bui l t i nt o t he dr i v er s MICU)
Repl ac ement :
US A model s, page 22-86
Canada model s, page 22-87
VA L E T K EY
IGNITION K EY
TRANS PONDER
(Bui l t i nt o t he t r ansmi t t er )
ECM/ PCM
Subst i t ut e known-good f or t est i ng, page 11-7
22-424
S f st em Descri pti on
The vehi c l e i s equi pped wi t h a Type Vl l (GEN 5) i mmobi l i zer syst em t hat wi l l di sabl e t he vehi c l e unl ess a pr ogr ammed
i gni t i on key i s used.
Thi s syst em c onsi st s of a t r ansponder c ombi ned wi t h a keyl ess t r ansmi t t er , an i mmobi l i zer -keyl ess cont rol uni t (Has
bui lt-i n r ecei ver ), t he dr i ver ' s MICU (has bui lt-i n i moes uni t ), an i mmobi l i zer i ndi cat or, and t he ECM/ PCM.
When t he i mmobi l i zer key (pr ogr ammed by t he HDS) i s i nser t ed into t he i gni t i on swi t c h and t ur ned to ON (II), t he
i mmobi l i zer -keyl ess cont rol uni t sends power to t he t r ansponder . The t r ansponder t hen sends a coded si gnal back to
t he i mmobi l i zer -keyl ess cont rol uni t whi c h t hen sends a coded si gnal to t he ECM/ PCM and t he dr i ver ' s MICU (i moes
uni t ).
The ECM/ PCM and dr i ver ' s MICU (i moes uni t) i denti fy t hi s coded si gnal , t hen vol t age i s suppl i ed to t he f uel pump.
Immobi l i zer -keyl ess E CM/ PCM
c ont r ol uni t
(Wi t h bui l t -i n r ecei ver )
If t he wr ong key has been used or t he c ode was not r ecei ved or r ecogni zed s , t he i ndi cat or wi l l f l ash onc e, t hen it wi l l
bli nk unti l t he i gni ti on swi t c h i s t ur ned to L OCK (0). When t he i gni ti on swi t c h i s t ur ned to t he L OCK (0) posi t i on, t he
i ndi cat or wi l l blink t en t i mes to si gnal t hat uni t has r eset cor r ect l y, t hen t he i ndi cat or wi l l go off.
22-425
Ci rcui t Di agram
. : CAN line
: Other communi cati on line
No. 1-1 No. 3-1
(MAIN) (100 A) (IG MAIN) (50 A)
~crxxi " c r v o
No. 15 (10 A)
CTXJ O
DRI VER' S
UNDE R- DA S H
F16 C1
IGNITION S WI TCH
B A T
3
IG1 HOT i n ON (II)
and S TA RT (III)
C101
(J unc t i on
c onnec t or )
B-CAN B-CAN
HI L O
I MMOB I L I ZE R- K E YL E S S CONTROL UNI T
(Has bui l t -i n r ec ei ver )
I MOCD
L G ( S - NET) K -L INE
B L K / YE L
C10
GA UGE
CONTROL
MODUL E
RE D WHT
L T GRN
B3 B5
A6
A1 D3
L T B L U
, ' A3
DRI VER' S
J UNCTI ON
BOX 1
CE NTE R
J UNCTI ON
B OX
L T GRN
A46
; E 4
L T B L U
\ IG1 CANL CANH I MOCD
( S - NET)
/
ECM/ PCM
* PG1 PG1 PG1 L G2 L G2
B1 B10 C2 C44 C48
Q15
I MOCD
( S - NET)
I MOES
CI RCUI T
DATA L INK
CONNECTOR
DRI VER' S
MI CU
BL K B RN/ YE L BRN/ YE L B RN/ YE L
22-426
DTC U0155: Immobi l i zer-keyl ess Control Uni t
Lost Communi cat i on Wi th Gauge Control
Module
2. Tur n t he i gni t i on swi t ch to L OCK (0) and t hen back t o
ON (II).
YE S - Do t he gauge cont rol modul e i nput t est , and do
all power , gr ound, and communi cat i on i nput t est s
Chec k f or l oose or poor connect i ons at t he gauge
cont rol modul e and t he rel at ed uni t s . l l
DTC U0199: Immobi l i zer -keyl ess Control Uni t
Lost Communi cat i on Wi th Door Multi plex
Control Uni t
ON (II).
YE S - Do t he door mul t i pl ex cont rol uni t i nput t est , and
do all power , gr ound, and c ommuni c at i on i nput t est s
power wi ndow mast er swi t c h, 4-door (see page
22-305), 2-door (see page 22-306).B
Chec k f or l oose or poor connect i ons at t he door
mul t i pl ex cont rol uni t and t he rel at ed u n i t s . !
22-427
Immobi li zer Syst em
DTC U1282: i mmobi l i zer -keyl ess Cont rol Uni t
Lost Communi cat i on Wi t h Dr i ver ' s MICU
2. Tur n t he i gni ti on swi t ch t o L OCK (0) and t hen back to
ON (II).
is DTC U1282 indicated?
YE S - Do t he dr i ver ' s MICU i nput t est , and do all
power , gr ound, and c ommuni c at i on i nput t est s (see
page z 2-i 51). if t he t est s pr ove OK , r epl ace t he
under -dash f use/r el ay box c onnec t or P (20P) and t he
Sympt om Troubl eshoot i ng Informati on
Gener al Chec k Bef ore Tr oubl eshoot i ng
Bef ore t r oubl eshoot i ng t he i mmobi l i zer s y s t em, check t he f ol l owi ng gener al i t ems and sol ve any if appl i cabl e:
The battery i s l ow; char ge t he battery f ul l y, t hen t r oubl eshoot t he i mmobi l i zer syst em.
The i gni ti on key i s not a genui ne Honda part; use a Honda-appr oved key bl ank, regi st er t he key, t hen t r oubl eshoot t he
i mmobi l i zer syst em.
A key r i ng, keys, or a key c as e i s used; r emove t he key f r om it, and t r oubl eshoot t he i mmobi l i zer syst em wi t h a key
onl y.
An af t ermarket el ect ri cal part i s at t ached; r emove it, t hen t r oubl eshoot t he i mmobi l i zer syst em.
Sympt om Tr oubl eshoot i ng Usi ng t he Immobi l i zer Indi cat or Li ght i ng Pat t ern
The pattern of t he i mmobi l i zer i ndi cat or c an hel p t r oubl eshoot t he condi t i on of t he i mmobi l i zer syst em. Here ar e
descr i pt i ons of t he f our possi bl e pat t erns:
Nor mal oper at i on
If t he i mmobi l i zer code i s i dent i f i ed, t he i mmobi l i zer i ndi cat or qui ckl y f l ashes onc e when t he i gni ti on swi t ch i s t ur ned to
ON (II).
The i mmobi l i zer i ndi cat or does not c ome on when t he i gni ti on swi t c h i s t ur ned to L OCK (0).
Immobi l i zer c ode i s not i dent i f i ed
If t he i mmobi l i zer code i s not i dent i f i ed, t he i mmobi l i zer i ndi cat or wi l l qui ckl y f l ash onc e, t hen wi l l bli nk unti l t he i gni t i on
swi t ch i s t ur ned to L OCK (0). When t he i gni ti on swi t ch i s t ur ned to L OCK (0), t he i ndi cat or wi l l bli nk t en t i mes, t hen go
OFF to show t he syst em has cor r ect l y r eset .
The st at e of t he i mmobi l i zer key regi st rat i on and t he IMOCD (S-NET) li ne c an be c hec ked by doi ng a S YS TE M CHECK
(see page 22-434) and S TATUS L OG CHECK (see page 22-436) wi t h t he HDS.
Immobi l i zer i ndi cat or does not c ome on
If t he i mmobi l i zer i ndi cat or does not c ome on after t urni ng t he i gni ti on swi t ch to ON (II), t here i s an open or shor t i n t he
F-CAN l i nes bet ween t he ECM/ PCM and t he gauge cont rol modul e. Wat ch t he mal f unct i on i ndi cat or l amp (MIL). If t he
MIL st ays on, go to t he PGM-FI syst em t r oubl eshoot i ng (see page 11-65).
Immobi l i zer i ndi cat or does not go off
If t he i mmobi l i zer i ndi cat or does not go off after t urni ng t he i gni ti on swi t ch to ON (II), do t he gauge cont rol modul e
sel f -di agnost i c f unct i on (see page 22-332). If t he i ndi cat or dr i ve ci rcui t i s OK, do t he S YS TE M CHECK and S TATUS L OG
CHECK wi t h t he HDS.
(cont ' d)
22-429
'^mpt &m Troasicilesfoooting Informati on (cont' d)
Sympt om IVot sbl eshoot i ng Usi ng Mal f unct i oni ng Ci r cui t Funct i ons
If a mal f unct i on o c c ur s i n t he i mmobi l i zer ci r cui t , use t he t abl e to c r oss-r ef er enc e t he mal f unct i on cri t eri a to t he l i ne(s)
that shoul d be checked t abl e:
X
\ _
Li ne Erroi
Termi nal
No.
(Wire Color)
Func t i on
Caus e of
Malfunction
Immobi l i zer
Indi cat or
Engi ne St ar t
K ey
Regi st r at i on
Test er
Communi c at i on
K ey l es s Oper at i on
(WHT)
VB U l i ne open
t sl i or c
Comes on,
t hen goes off.
Possi bl e Impossi bl e Possi bl e Impossi bl e
2
(Y EL)
1 ^*3 l i ne open
O! S h 0 i i
Bl i nki ng Impossi bl e Impossi bl e Impossi bl e Possi bl e
3
(BLU)
B~CAiM l i ne
open or short
Comes on,
t hen goes off.
Possi bl e Impossi bl e
Immobi l i zer :
Possi bl e
K eyl ess:
Impossi bl e
4
(PNK)
B-Cf-M lina
open or short
Comes on,
t hen goes off.
Possi bl e i mpossi bl e
Immobi l i zer :
Possible
K eyless:
Impossible
Impossi bl e
5
(LT BL U)
K LI NE l i ne
open or short
Comes on,
t hen goes off.
Possi bl e Impossi bl e Impossi bl e Possi bl e
6
(LT GRH)
IlVtOCD 'S-NET)
Sine o p e n or short
Bl i nki ng Impossi bl e Impossi bl e Impossi bl e Possi bl e
7
(BRN)
GND (LG) l i ne
open
Bl i nki ng Impossi bl e Impossi bl e Impossi bl e Impossi bl e
M> "T-hêih: ^n4 -^ at us Log
NOTE: The HDS c an be used to:
c Check t he st at e of t he i mmobi l i zer key regi st rat i on and t he IMOCD (S-NET) li ne by doi ng a S YS TE M CHECK .
o Check t he number of t i mes t he i mmobi l i zer cont rol uni t -r ecei ver doesn' t permi t t he engi ne t o run by checki ng t he
S TATUS L OG.
1. Connec t t he HDS to t he dat a link connect or , t hen turn t he i gni ti on swi t ch to ON (II) and f ol l ow t he pr ompt s t o t he MAIM
MENU.
NOTE: If t he HDS does not c ommuni c at e wi t h t he vehi c l e, go to t he DL C ci rcui t t r oubl eshoot i ng (see page 11 -181).
2. At MAIN MENU, ent er IMMOBI, t hen sel ec t IMMOBILIZER S ETUP.
3. Do t he S YS TE M CHECK . If t her e i s a syst em check number , do t he t r oubl eshoot i ng f or t he i t em i ndi cat ed
(see page 2 2 - 4 3 4 ) .
4. Chec k t he S TATUS L OG usi ng t he HDS. Tr oubl eshoot t he li ne wi t h t he hi ghest count s f i rst (see page 22-436). If all t he
l i nes ar e 0 (zero), t he pr obl em may not be c aused by t he i mmobi l i zer s y s t em; check f or i gni ti on or f uel pr obl ems.
Ref er to PGM-FI Syst em Sympt om Tr oubl eshoot i ng (see page 11-14).
NOTE: Onc e r epai r ed, cl ear t he st at us log by r emovi ng t he No. 15 (10 A) f use in t he under -hood f use/r el ay box or
di sconnect i ng t he battery.
22 0
i
Sympt om Troubl eshoot i ng i ndex
1. Tr oubl eshoot t he Immobi l i zer syst em in t he order shown:
Or der of
Pri ori t y
S ympt o m Possi bl e c aus e
1 Immobi l i zer i ndi cat or bl i nks after t he
i gni ti on swi t ch i s t ur ned to L OCK ( 0).
2 Engi ne does not st art wi t h t he
i mmobi l i zer key.
3 Immobi l i zer i ndi cat or does not c ome
on.
Chec k t he MIL i ndi cat i on.
If t he MIL c omes on, go to t he PGM-FI Sy s t em MIL ci rcui t
4 Immobi l i zer i ndi cat or does not go off. Sympt om t r oubl eshoot i ng (see page 22-433).
22*431
Immobi l i zer Indi cat or bl i nks
NOTE; Bef or e t r oubl eshoot i ng, check t he It ems l i st ed In
" Gener al Chec k bef ore Tr oubl eshoot i ng" .
2. Connec t t he HDS, t hen t urn t he i gni ti on swi t ch to ON
(i l).
3. Fr om t he mai n menu, ent er IMMOBI, sel ect t he
IMMOBILIZER S ETUP, t hen sel ect Syst em c hec k,
Number of keys, and St at us Log.
4. Sel ec t t he S YS TE M CHECK .
Is t he SYSTEM CHECK indicat ed?
YES-Tr oubl es hoot t he i mmobi l i zer syst em accor di ng
to t he resul t of t he S YS TE M CHECK (see page
22- 4S 4/ . 5
NO- Go t o st ep 5.
6. Ent er t he vehi c l e, and r emove t he i gni t i on key f r om
t he i gni t i on swi t c h, t hen c l ose t he all door s.
7. Oper at e t he keyl ess t r ansmi t t er L OCK and UNL OCK
sever al t i mes i n t he vehi c l e.
Do t he door lock act uat ors work normally?
NO-Chec k f or a poor gr ound and/or an open in t he
wi r e bet ween i mmobi l i zer -keyl ess cont rol uni t 7P
connect or t er mi nal No. 7 and body gr ound (G101) EH
9. Back-pr obe and measur e t he vol t age bet ween
i mmobi l i zer -keyl ess cont rol uni t 7P connect or
I MMOBI L I ZER- K EYL ES S CONTROL UNIT 7P CONNECTOR
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
IG1 (YEL )
NO-Chec k f or a bl own No. 9 (20 A) f use i n t he dr i ver ' s
open in t he YE L wi r e bet ween t he dr i ver ' s under -dash
f use/r el ay box and t he i mmobi l i zer -keyl ess cont rol
uni t .H
10. Back-pr obe and measur e t he vol t age bet ween
i mmobi l i zer -keyl ess cont rol uni t 7P connect or
I MMOBI L I ZER- K EYL ES S CONTROL UNIT 7P CONNECTOR
1 2
. , J
3 4
t . , _
5
6 7
! L G (BRN)
YES - Repai r poor connect i on or an open or hi gh
r esi st anc e bet ween i mmobi l i zer -keyl ess cont rol uni t
7P connect or t er mi nal No. 7 and G101 .
NO-Repl ac e t he i mmobi l i zer -keyl ess cont rol uni t (see
page 22-440).H
22-432
Engi ne does not start wi t h t he i mmobi l i zer
key
NOTE: Bef ore t r oubl eshoot i ng, check t he i t ems li st ed in
" Gener al Chec k bef ore Tr oubl eshoot i ng" (see page
22-429).
1 Tr y to st art t he engi ne.
YES-l nt er mi t t ent f ai l ur e, t he vehi cl e i s OK at t hi s t i me.
Chec k st at us log (see page 22-436) and c hec k t he line
i ndi cat ed i n t he t abl e. i l
NO- Go to st ep 2.
2. Tur n t he i gni ti on swi t ch to L OCK (0). '
3. Tur n t he i gni ti on swi t ch to ON (II), and c hec k t he
i mmobi l i zer i ndi cat or.
Does t he indicat or blink once, t hen st ay off?
NO- Go to t he i mmobi l i zer i ndi cat or bl i nks
4. Tur n t he i gni ti on swi t ch to S TART (III).
Does t he st art er mot or run?
NO- Go to St art i ng Sy s t em, and c hec k t he st art er
mot or (see page 4-10)M
5. Tr y to st art t he engi ne wi t h t he i mmobi l i zer key.
NO- Go to t he PGM-FI Syst em Sympt om
Tr oubl eshoot i ng (see page 11-14)J I
6. Wai t f or a f ew mi nut es wi t h t he engi ne r unni ng.
Does t he engine st op?
YE S - Go to t he PGM-FI Syst em Sympt om
Tr oubl eshoot i ng (see page 11-14).H
NO-The syst em i s OK at t hi s t i m e . !
Immobi l i zer i ndi cat or does not go off
2. Connec t t he HDS t o t he dat a link connect or .
4. Fr om t he mai n menu, ent er IMMOBI, t hen sel ec t
IMMOBILIZER S E T UP, t hen sel ec t Sy s t em Chec k,
Number of K eys, and St at us Log.
5. Do t he S YS TE M CHECK wi t h t he HDS.
lsN-1 OK indicat ed?
22-351 ) .
NO-Subst i t ut e a known-good i mmobi l i zer -keyl ess
cont rol uni t , t hen r egi st er it and r echeck. If t he
sympt om goes away, r epl ace t he or i gi nal
i mmobi l i zer -keyl ess cont rol uni t s (see page 22-440).B
22-433
S f st em Check
1. Connec t t he HDS t o t he dat a link connect or .
3. Moni t or t he S YS TE M CHECK i n t he IMMOBILIZER INFO wi t h the HDS.
4. If t he HDS di spl ays NORMAL N-1,t he i mmobi l i zer syst em i s OK at t hi s t i me, refer to t he S TATUS L OG. If t he HDS
di spl ays any ot her mes s ages , c hec k as f ol l ows:
S y s t em
Chec k No.
St at us l og.
Indi cat i on
S y s t em Chec k Possi bl e Caus e
A- 1 Possi bl e The key i s not
r egi st er ed
Thi s key i s not r egi st er ed i n t he i mmobi l i zer -keyl ess
cont rol uni t. Tr y to r egi st er keys usi ng t he HDS.
No c ommuni c at i on bet ween t he ant enna and t he
i mmobi l i zer key bec ause of i nt erf erence f r om met al suc h
as key c hai ns/key r i ngs/ot her keys.
Low battery vol t age.
A - 2 Possi bl e Communi c at i on error
bet ween t he key and
i mmobi l i zer -keyl ess
cont rol uni t
Intermi ttent i nt errupt i on bet ween t r ansponder and
The i mmobi l i zer key t ype i s di fferent. It i s not for t hi s
v eh i c l e but f or anot her one or for ano t h er c ompany' s
one.
Key f ai l ure (t r ansponder f ai l ure)
Intermi ttent i nt errupt i on bet ween t r ansponder and
The i mmobi l i zer key t ype i s di fferent. It i s not for t hi s
v eh i c l e but f or anot her one or for ano t h er c ompany' s
one.
A - 3 Possi bl e No c ommuni c at i on
bet ween t he key and
cont rol uni t
The i gni ti on swi t c h was t ur ned ON (II) wi t h a
non-i mmobi l i zer key.
The i mmobi l i zer key t ype i s di fferent. It i s not f or t hi s
vehi cl e but f or anot her one or for anot her c ompany' s
one.
Immobi l i zer -keyl ess cont rol uni t f ai l ure
The i gni ti on swi t c h was t ur ned ON (II) wi t h a
non-i mmobi l i zer key.
The i mmobi l i zer key t ype i s di fferent. It i s not f or t hi s
vehi cl e but f or anot her one or for anot her c ompany' s
one.
B 1 Possi bl e The ECM/ PCM i s not
r egi st er ed
o The ECM/ PCM was not r egi st er ed. Tr y to regi st er t he
ECM/ PCM usi ng t he HDS.
No c ommuni c at i on bet ween t he ECM/ PCM and t he
i mmobi l i zer -keyl ess cont rol uni t bec ause of l ow battery
vol t age.
e No communi cat i on bet ween t he i mmobi l i zer -keyl ess
cont rol uni t and t he ECM/ PCM bec ause of i nt erf erence.
Open in t he IG1 li ne
B-2 Possi bl e Er r or of
c ommuni c at i on
f or mat i n ECM/ PCM
The ECM/ PCM was not r egi st er ed. Tr y to regi st er t he
ECM/ PCM usi ng t he HDS.
No communi cat i on bet ween t he ECM/ PCM and t he
vol t age.
No communi cat i on bet ween t he i mmobi l i zer -keyl ess
C-1 Possi bl e No regi st rat i on of
i moes uni t
Imoes unit was not r egi st er ed.
No communi cat i on bet ween t he i moes uni t and t he
vol t age.
@ No c ommuni c at i on bet ween t he i moes uni t and t he
i mmobi l i zer -keyl ess cont rol uni t bec ause of i nt erf erence.
22-434
S y s t em
Chec k No.
St at us l og.
Indi cat i on
S f st em Chec k Possi bl e Cause
C-2 Possi bl e Er r or of
communi cat i on
f ormat i n i moes uni t
Imoes uni t was not r egi st er ed.
No c ommuni c at i on bet ween t he i moes uni t and t he
i mmobi l i zer -keyl ess cont rol unit bec ause of l ow bat t ery
vol t age.
No c ommuni c at i on bet ween t he i moes uni t and t he
i mmobi l i zer -keyl ess cont rol unit bec ause of i nt er f er ence.
D-1 Possi bl e S - NET li ne shor t o Har n es s shor t f r om t he ECM/PCM to t he
i mmobi l i zer -keyl ess cont rol uni t. (IMOCD (S-NET) li ne
short )
No c ommuni c at i on bet ween the ECM/ PCM and t he
i mmobi l i zer -keyl ess cont rol unit bec ause of l ow bat t ery
vol t age.
o No c ommuni c at i on bet ween the i mmobi l i zer -keyl ess
Immobi l i zer -keyl ess cont rol unit f ai l ure
ECM/ PCM f ai l ure
D-2 Possi bl e No c ommuni c at i on
bet ween i moes uni t
and
cont rol uni t
m Bl own f use
Har ness open f r om t he i moes unit to t he
i mmobi l i zer -keyl ess cont rol uni t. (IMOCD (S-NET) li ne
open)
No c ommuni c at i on bet ween the i moes uni t and t he
i mmobi l i zer -keyl ess cont rol unit bec ause of l ow battery
vol t age.
No c ommuni c at i on bet ween the i moes uni t and t he
i mmobi l i zer -keyl ess cont rol unit bec ause of i nt erf erence.
Imoes uni t f ai l ure
D-3 Possi bl e No c ommuni c at i on
bet ween ECM/ PCM
and
cont rol uni t
Bl own f use
Har ness open f r om t he ECM/PCM to t he
No c ommuni c at i on bet ween t he ECM/ PCM and t he
vol t age.
No c ommuni c at i on bet ween t he i mmobi l i zer -keyl ess
ECM/ PCM f ai l ure
E-1
E-2
E-3
E-4
E-5'
Initial regi st rat i on of
cont rol uni t i s not
compl et ed
The i mmobi l i zer -keyl ess cont rol uni t i s not r egi st er ed. Tr y
to regi st er t he i mmobi l i zer -keyl ess cont rol unit usi ng t he
HDS.
F-1
F-2
F-3
F-4
F-5
Spec i al Mode Tur n t he i gni ti on swi t ch to ON (II) and to L OCK (0) wi t h t he
regi st ered key.
22*435
St at us Log
If you suspec t t her e i s a i mmobi l i zer syst em pr obl em, c hec k t he st at us l og.
1. Connec t t he HDS to t he data link connect or .
3. On t he HDS s c r een, at MAIN MENU, ent er IMMOBI, t hen sel ec t IMMOBILIZER S E T UP, sel ect S YS TE M CHECK ,
Number of Keys and St at us L og, t hen sel ect S TATUS L OG.
4. Chec k t he S TATUS L OG count . Tr oubl eshoot t he st at us wi t h t he hi ghest count f i rst . If no count s ar e l i st ed, t he
i mmobi l i zer syst em i s OK. Cont i nue wi t h nor mal sympt om t r oubl eshoot i ng.
St at us Log No. Det ect ed It em Pr obabl e Caus e
A-1 K EY CODE MISMATCH
(Code f ormat nor mal , but
c ode dat a i s mi smat ch)
The key was not regi st ered
Int erf erence f r om met al suc h as key c hai ns
L ow battery vol t age
A-2 K EY CODE MISMATCH
(Code f ormat f ai l ure)
Igni ti on swi t c h was t ur ned to ON (II) wi t h anot her t ype of
i mmobi l i zer key or af t ermarket key
L ow bat t ery vol t age
A-3 K EY CODE MISMATCH (No
key code or
non-i mmobi l i zer key)
Igni ti on swi t c h was t ur ned to ON (II) wi t h anot her t ype of
i mmobi l i zer key or aftermarket key
Key f ai l ure
B-1 ECM/ PCM CODE
MISMATCH (Code f or mat
nor mal , but code dat a i s
mi smat ch)
ECM/ PCM was not r egi st er ed cor r ect l y
L ow bat t ery vol t age
Poor or l oose t er mi nal connect i ons at t he i mmobi l i zer -keyl ess
cont rol uni t
Communi c at i on li ne el ect ri cal noi se
B-2 ECM/ PCM MISMATCH
ECM/ PCM was not regi st ered cor r ect l y
Poor or l oose t er mi nal c onnec t i ons at t he i mmobi l i zer -keyl ess
cont rol uni t
C-1 IMOES UNIT mi smat c h
(Code f ormat nor mal , but
dat a i s mi smat c h)
" o es uni t was not r egi st er ed
The c ommuni c at i on was not good bet ween i moes uni t and
i mmobi l i zer -keyl ess cont rol uni t by battery vol t age l ow
i mmobi l i zer -keyl ess cont rol uni t by i nf l uence of some noi se
C-2 IMOES UNIT mi smat c h
c i moes uni t was not r egi st er ed cor r ect l y
D-1 IMOCD (S-NET) LINE
PROBL EM (Short to gr ound)
Low battery vol t age
Poor or l oose t er mi nal c onnec t i ons at t he i mmobi l i zer -keyl ess
cont rol uni t and t he ECM/ PCM
PROBL EM (No
communi cat i on)
Bl own f use
@ Har ness open f r om i moes uni t to i mmobi l i zer -keyl ess cont rol uni t
Imoes uni t f ai l ure
PROBL EM (Open li ne or
ECM/ PCM f ai l ure)
Open or shor t i n t he har ness f rom t he ECM/ PCM to t he
i mmobi l i zer -keyl ess cont rol uni t
@ Poor or l oose t er mi nal connect i ons at t he i mmobi l i zer -keyl ess
cont rol uni t and t he ECM/ PCM
22-436
Immobi l i zer-Keyl ess Cont rol Uni t Input Test
NOTE: Bef ore t est i ng, t r oubl eshoot t he mul t i pl ex i ntegrated cont rol uni t f i r st , usi ng B-CAN Sy s t em Di agnosi s Test Mode
2. Remove t he st eer i ng c ol umn c over s (see page 20-181).
3. Di sconnect t he 7P connect or (A) f rom t he i mmobi l i zer -keyl ess cont rol uni t (B ).
SGI B-CAN LO B-CAN HB IMOCD (S-NET)
(Y EL) (BLU) (PNK) (LTGRN)
o If t he t er mi nal s are bent , l oose or c or r oded, repai r t hem as nec essar y, and r echeck t he syst em.
(cont' d)
22-437
Immobi l i zer-Keyl ess Cont rol Uni t Input Test (cont' d)
5. With the connector still disconnected, do these Input tests at the following connector.
If all the input tests prove OK, go to step 6.
Cavity Wi re Termi nal
name
Test condi t i on Test : Desi red resul t Possi bl e c ause if desi red resul t
i s not obt ai ned
3 BLU B-CAN LO Disconnect the gauge control
module 32P connector and the
driver's under-dash fuse/relay
box connector P (20P)
Check for continuity between the
terminal and gauge control
module 32P connector terminal
No. 18:
There should be continuity.
An open or high resistance in
the wire
Disconnect the gauge control
driver' s under-dash fuse/relay
terminal and driver's under-dash
fuse/relay box connector P (20P)
terminal No. 5:
the wire
4 PNK B-CAN HI Disconnect the gauge control
terminal and gauge control
module 32P connector terminal
No. 19:
the wire
Disconnect the gauge control
module 32P connect or and t he
t ermi nal and driver' s under-dash
fuse/relay box connector P (20P)
terminal No. 6:
the wire
6 LT
GRN
IMOCD
(S-NET)
Disconnect ECM/PCM
connector A (49P) (see page
11-3)
There should be about 5 V.
A short to ground in the wire
the wire
Disconnect the battery negative
terminal
Measure the resistance between
the terminal and body ground:
There should be more than 50 kQ.
F aulty imoes unit
F aulty driver's under-dash
fuse/relay box
the wire
Disconnect ECM/PCM
connector A (49P) (see page
11-3)
terminal and ECM/PCM connector
A (49P) terminal No. 46:
the wire
6. Reconnect the connector to the immobilizer-keyless control unit, and do these input tests at the following connector.
If all the input tests prove OK, replace the immobilizer-keyless control unit (see page 22-440).
NOTE: If you replace the immobilizer-keyless control unit, do the immobilizer registration (see page 22-439).
Cavity Wi re Termi nal
name
Test condi t i on Test : Desi red resul t Possi bl e c ause if desi red resul t
i s not obt ai ned
1 WHT VBU Under all conditions Measure the voltage to ground:
Blown No. 15 (10 A) fuse in
the under-hood fuse/relay
box
the wire
2 YEL IG1 Ignition switch ON (II) Measure the voltage to ground:
driver's under-dash
fuse/relay box
the wire
7 BRN LG In all ignition switch positions Measure the voltage to ground:
Poor ground(G101) or an
open in the ground wire
the wire
5 LT
BLU
K-LINE Under all conditions Measure the voltage to ground:
There should be 9- 12 V.
F aulty control unit on the
K-line
Short to ground in the wire
22*438
Immobilizer Kef Registration
NOTE:
The HDS i s requi red f or regi st rat i on of t he i mmobi l i zer
keys.
Pr ogr ammi ng t he i mmobi l i zer al so pr ogr ams the
keyl ess t ransmi t t er.
Chec k for af t ermarket el ect ri cal equi pment that can
c ause pr obl ems wi t h t r ansponder oper at i on.
The i mmobi l i zer -keyl ess cont rol uni t c an st or e up to
si x i mmobi l i zer keys.
Add one new key/ K eyl ess t r ansmi t t er
1. Have a regi st ered key, a new i mmobi l i zer key, and t he
f i rst passwor d f r om t he iN syst em.
2. Connect t he HDS to t he dat a link connect or .
4. Sel ec t IMMOBI f r om t he mai n menu, t hen sel ect
IMMOBILIZER S ETUP.
5. Sel ec t Add and Del et e keys, t hen Add 1 key.
6. Do t he regi st rat i on accor di ng to t he i nst r uct i ons on
t he HDS sc r een.
7. Check if the engi ne c an be st art ed by t he newl y
r egi st er ed key. Chec k t hat t he door l ocks operat e
usi ng t he i mmobi l i zer key t ransmi t t er.
Add and Del et e keys/ K eyl ess t r ansmi t t er s,
Then sel ect Del et e or Add keys
1. Have all regi st ered keys, all new keys, and t he fi rst
passwor d f r om t he i N syst em.
2. Connect t he HDS to t he dat a link connect or .
4. Sel ec t IMMOBI f r om t he mai n menu, t hen sel ect
IMMOBILIZER S ETUP.
5. Sel ec t Add and Del et e K ey s , or Del et e or Add Multi ple
Keys.
t he HDS sc r een.
7. Check if t he engi ne c an be st art ed by all t he r egi st er ed
keys. Check that t he door l ocks operat e usi ng t he
i mmobi l i zer key t ransmi t t er.
Al l keys are l ost
1. Pr epar e all new keys and have t he i mmobi l i zer PCM
c ode.
4. Sel ec t IMMOBI f rom t he mai n menu, t hen sel ec t
IMMOBILIZER S ETUP.
5. Sel ec t Add and Del et e keys, t hen AL L K E YS L OS T.
t he HDS sc r een.
7. Chec k if t he engi ne c an be st art ed by all t he r egi st er ed
keys. Check that t he door l ocks operat e usi ng t he
i mmobi l i zer key t ransmi t t er.
Pr ogr ammi ng i mmobi l i zer -keyl ess cont r ol
uni t
1. Have all r egi st er ed keys and t he ECM/ PCM c ode.
4. Sel ec t IMMOBI f r om t he mai n menu, t hen sel ec t
IMMOBILIZER S ETUP.
5. Sel ec t REPL ACE I MMOBI L I ZER/ K EYL ESS CONTROL
UNIT REPL ACE.
t he HDS sc r een.
7. Chec k that t he engi ne c an be st art ed wi t h all
r egi st er ed keys. Check t hat t he door l ocks oper at e
usi ng t he i mmobi l i zer key t ransmi t t er.
22- 439
Immobi li zer Sf st em
Immobilizer-Keyl ess Cont rol Uni t Repl acement
1 . Remove t he dr i ver ' s dashboar d l ower c over (see page
20- 166) .
20-181).
3. Di sconnect t he 7P connect or (A) f rom t he
i mmobi l i zer -keyl ess cont rol uni t (B).
4. Remove t he t wo s c r ews and t he i mmobi l i zer -keyl ess
cont rol uni t.
5. Install t he i mmobi l i zer -keyl ess cont rol uni t in t he
6. After r epl ac ement r egi st er t he i mmobi l i zer -keyl ess
cont rol uni t (see page 22-439), and make sur e t he
i mmobi l i zer syst em wor ks pr oper l y.
7. Pr ogr am all of t he c ust omer ' s keys/keyl ess
t r ansmi t t er s (see page 22-439).
22-440
SUPPL EMENTAL RESTRAINT S YS TE M (SRS) (If Audi o, Navi gat i on, and Tel emat i c s
mai nt enance requi red)
The Accord SRS includes a driver's airbag inthe steering wheel hub, apassenger's airbag in the dashboard
above the glove box, seat belt tensioners in the front seat belt retractors, side curtain airbags in the sides of the
roof, and side airbags in the front seat-backs. Information necessary to safely service the SRS is included in this
Service Manual. Items marked with an asterisk (*) on the contents page include or are located near SRS
components. Servicing, disassembling, or replacing these items requires special precautions and tools, and
should be done by an authorized Honda dealer.
To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could lead to personal injury or death in the event of a severe
frontal or side collision, all SRS service work should be done by an authorized Honda dealer.
. Improper service procedures, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, could lead to personal
injury caused by unintentional deployment of the airbags, side airbags, and/or side curtain airbags.
Do not bump or impact the SRS unit, front impact sensors, side impact sensors, or rear safing sensor,
especially when the ignition switch is in ON (II), or for at least 3 minutes after thz i ^. nuui i switch is turned to
LOCK (0); otherwi se, the system may fail in acollision, or the airbags may deploy.
. SRS electrical connectors are identified by yellow color coding. Related components are located in the
steering column, center console, dashboard, dashboard lower cover, in the dashboard above the glove box,
in the front seats, in the roof side, and around the floor. Do not use electrical test equipment on these circuits.
Audi o, Navi gat i on, and Tel emat i c s
Audio, Navigation, and
Tel emati cs
Speci al Tool s 23-2
Audi o S f s tem
Component Locati on Index... . 23-3
General Troubl eshoot i ng
Information 23-5
Sympt om Troubleshooti ng Index. 23-6
Syst em Descr i pt i on. . 23-8
Ci rcui t Di agram . 23-44
Sel f -di agnost i c Functi on 23-54
Error Codes 23-65
Sympt om Troubleshooti ng 23-66
Sound Quali ty Di agnosi s 23-110
#
Audi o Uni t Removal /Inst al l at i on... 23-114
Audi o Swi t ch Panel
Removal/Installati on 23-117
Audi o Di sc Changer
Audi o-HVAC Subdi spl ay Uni t
Audi o-HVAC Di splay Uni t
Removal/Installati on . 23-119
St ereo Ampli fi er
Removal /Inst al l at i on... 23-119
XM Recei ver Removal /Inst al l at i on. 23-120
Acti ve Noi se Cancellati on
Mi crophone
Cr ossover Network Control Uni t
Speaker Test /Repl acement 23-122
Audi o Remote Swi t ch Test 23-125
AM/FM Ant enna Ampli fi er
Repl acement 23-125
AM/FM Ant enna Repai r 23-126
XM Antenna Repl acement 23-126
Auxi li ary Jack Assembl y
Repl acement 23-127
NavigationSys tem
Component Locati on Index.. 23-128
General Troubl eshoot i ng
Information 23-130
DTC Troubl eshoot i ng Index 23-140
Sympt om Troubl eshoot i ng Index. 23-142
Syst em Descri pti on 23-146
Ci rcui t Di agram 23-172
Syst em Di agnosti c Mode 23-176
DTC Troubleshoot i ng 23-196
Sympt om Tr oubl es hoot i ng. . . . . . . . 23-217
Forced Starti ng of Di splay 23-237
DVD-ROM Repl ac ement . . . . . . . . . . . 23-237
Navi gati on Unit
Navi gati on Di splay Unit
Interface Dial
Front HFL-Navi gati on-ANC
Mi crophone
GPS Ant enna
Voi ce Control Swi t ch Test 23-241
Voi ce Control Swi t ch
Repl acement 23-241
Electrical Compas s
Component Locati on Index 23-242
Ci rcui t Di agram 23-246
El ect ri cal Compass Zone Sel ect i on
and Cal i b r at i o n. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-247
Electri cal Compass Unit Input
Test 23-250
H andsF reeLi nk S ys tem
Component Locati on I nd ex . . . . . . . . 23-251
General Troubleshooti ng
Information 23-252
DTC Troubleshooti ng I nd ex . . . . . . . 23-264
HFL Syst em Troubleshooti ng 23-267
Ci rcui t Di ag r am. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-268
DTC Troubleshooti ng 23-270
Sympt om Troubleshooti ng 23-275
HFL Swi t ch Test 23-279 b^j tw
Front HFL-ANC Mi crophone
r
j o
HFL Swi t ch Removal /Inst al l at i on.. 23-280
Control Unit Input
Test /Repl acement 23-281
Audi o, Navi gati on, and Tel emat i cs
Special Tools
Ref.No. Tool Number Descr i pt i on Qty
07AAZ-SDBA100 Di agnost i c CD 1
07AAZ-SDBA200 Ski p Test CD 1
07AAZ-SDBA300 Ski p Test CD 1
07PAZ-0010100 S CS Ser vi c e Connec t or 1
23-2
Audi o S f st em
ECM/PCM
(Engine Speed Pulse and
Vehicle Speed Pulse)
AUDIO-HVAC SUBDISPLAY UNIT ( Wi t h navigation)
Connector Inputs and Outputs, page 23-41
AUDIO-HVAC DISPLAY UNIT (Without navigation)
f AUDIO UNIT ( Wi t h navigation)
AUDIO UNIT (Without navigation)
Connect or Input s and Out put s, page 23-20
' AM/FM ANTENNA SUBLEAD
- AM/FM ANTENNA
CONNECTOR (3P)
AM/FM ANTENNA LEAD
XM ANTENNA
> AM/FM ANTENNA
Repai r , page 23-126
AM/FM ANTENNA
AMPLIFIER
- XM ANTENNA LEAD
(With XM)
- XM RECEIVER
Connec t or Input s
and Out put s, page 23-34
Removal /
DRIVER'S DOOR
SPEAKER CROSSOVER
NETWORK
CONTROL UNIT
Connec t or Input s
and Out put s, page 23-40
AUDIO REMOTE
SWITCH
Test , page 23-125
FRONT PASSENGERS
DOOR SPEAKER CROSSOVER
NETWORK CONTROL UNIT
Connec t or Input s and Out put s, page 23-40
AUXILIARY JACK ASSEMBLY
INTERFACE DIAL
( c ont' d)
23-3
Audi o S f st em
Component Locat i on i ndex (cont'd)
LEF T REAR SPEAKER
DRI VER' S DOOR TWEETER
DRIVER'S DOOR SPEAKER
F RONT ACTIVE NOISE
CANCELLATION MICROPHONE
Connector Inputs and
Outputs, page 23-37
AUDIO SWITCH PANEL
F RONT PASSENGER'S
DOOR TWEETER
S TE RE O AMPLIFIER
Outputs, page 23-31
REAR ACTI VE NOI S E
CANCEL L ATI ON MI CROPHONE
Outputs, page 23-37
FRONT PA S S E NGE RS
DOOR S PE AK E R
AUDIO DI SC CHANGER (Wi t h navi gat i on)
RIGHT REAR S PEAK ER
EL ECTRI CAL COMPAS S UNIT
23-4
Gener al Troubl eshoot i ng Informati on
Lever -Locked Connect or
Di sc onnec t i ng
To di sconnect t he connect or , pull t he l ever (A) whi l e
pushi ng t he lock t ab (B) down, t hen pull t he connect or
(C).
Connec t i ng
To connect t he connect or , push t he connect or into t he
connect or sl eeve (A). As t he connect or i s pr essed i n, t he
l ever (B) moves to t he l ocked posi t i on.
B
2
Q K
Audi o S y s t em
Symptom Di agnost i c procedure A l s o ch eck f or
Poor AM or FM radi o recept i on or
i nt erf erence
Sympt om Tr oubl eshoot i ng
(see page 23-66)
Ant enna l ead shor t or open in
t he wi r e
Af t ermarket wi ndow ti nti ng
Audi o uni t power swi t ch wi l l not t urn on (No
i nf ormat i on di spl ay and no sound)
(see page 23-69)
Audi o uni t power swi t ch wi l l not t urn off Sympt om Tr oubl eshoot i ng
(see page 23-70)
No sound i s hear d f r om t he speaker (s)
(di spl ay i s nor mal ) (wi th pr emi um audi o)
(see page 23-70)
No sound i s hear d f r om t he speaker (s)
(di spl ay is nor mal ) (wi t hout pr emi um audi o)
(see page 23-75)
Auxi l i ar y i nput sound i s l ow or cannot be
hear d
(see page 23-77)
Audi o syst em sound i s weak or di st ort ed
(di spl ay i s nor mal )
(see page 23-80)
Radi o pr eset memory i s l ost Sympt om Tr oubl eshoot i ng
(see page 23-80)
Battery condi t i on
~ Lot t ery c abl s c o nd i t i o n
Vol ume does not c hange Sympt om Tr oubl eshoot i ng
(see page 23-81)
Vol ume does not i nc r ease wi t h speed Sympt om Tr oubl eshoot i ng
(see page 23-81)
Vol ume i s t oo hi gh or t oo l ow when dri vi ng at
f r eeway speeds
(see page 23-82)
Radi o t uner does not c hange st at i ons Sympt om Tr oubl eshoot i ng
(see page 23-83)
Audi o syst em i nf ormat i on does not di spl ay
on t he audi o-HVAC (sub) di spl ay uni t
(see page 23-83)
B-CAN DTCs; r esol ve bef ore
Secur i t y i ndi cat or does not wor k properl y Sympt om Tr oubl eshoot i ng
(see page 23-86)
Audi o uni t button i l l umi nat i on does not work
(1 CD t ype)
(see page 23-86)
Audi o uni t button i l l umi nat i on does not wor k
(Except 1 CD t ype)
(see page 23-88)
Audi o r emot e swi t c h does not wor k properl y Sympt om Tr oubl eshoot i ng
(see page 23-88)
Audi o di sc does not l oad Sympt om Tr oubl eshoot i ng
(see page 23-90)
Audi o di sc does not ej ect Sympt om Tr oubl eshoot i ng
(see page 23-90)
Audi o di sc c hanger does not l oad all si x di sc s Sympt om Tr oubl eshoot i ng
(see page 23-91)
Ti r e pr essur e (over-i nf l at ed), di sc
smudged, di rty, or sc r at c hed
Audi o di sc c hanger does not move bet ween
di sc s
(see page 23-91)
Audi o di sc does not pl ay Sympt om Tr oubl eshoot i ng
(see page 23-92)
For ei gn obj ect s suc h c oi ns or
paper i nser t ed into t he audi o di sc
c hanger /CD pl ayer
Audi o di sc ski ps Sympt om Tr oubl eshoot i ng
(see page 23-92)
Ti r e pr essur e (over-i nf l at ed), di sc
smudged, di rty, or sc r at c hed
Audi o uni t button does not wor k Sympt om Tr oubl eshoot i ng
(see page 23-93)
Audi o uni t di sc i ndi cat or does not wor k Sympt om Tr oubl eshoot i ng
(see page 23-94)
23 6
Sympt om Di agnost i c pr ocedur e Al so c hec k f or
Boomi ng sound whi l e dri vi ng wi t h audi o uni t
on or off
(see page 23-94)
Er r or code: X M N O S I GNAL i s di spl ayed Sympt om Tr oubl eshoot i ng
(see page 23-104)
Er r or code: XM ANTENNA i s di spl ayed Sympt om Tr oubl eshoot i ng
(see page 23-105)
XM radi o di spl ay i s blank and no st at i on
i nf ormat i on i s di spl ayed
(see page 23-106)
Al so refer to Audi o syst em
i nf ormat i on does not di spl ay on
t he audi o-HVAC (sub) di spl ay uni t
(see page 23-83)
XM radi o pr eset memor y i s l ost Sympt om Tr oubl eshoot i ng
(see page 23-108)
Poor or no sound wi t h XM radi o (Audi o uni t
does di spl ay XM c hannel s)
(see page 23-109)
23- 7
Audi Sf stem
S f st em Description
Overview
The audi o uni t act s as t he pr oc essor f or all audi o f unct i ons. You c an sel ect t he audi o f unct i ons f r om t he front panel , t he
audi o remot e (on t he st eer i ng wheel ), or by usi ng t he navi gat i on voi c e cont rol s y s t em. The audi o di spl ay pr ovi des t he
cur r ent f ront and rear audi o st at us. For vehi c l es wi t h navi gat i on, addi t i onal audi o i nf or mat i on i s avai l abl e by t ouchi ng
t he audi o button. (See t he owner ' s manual f or mor e det ai l s.)
The XM r ecei ver and audi o di sc c hanger pass t hei r si gnal s i s to t he audi o uni t. In addi t i on, t hey c ommuni c at e wi t h t he
audi o uni t vi a t he GA-Net bus. Any open c onnec t i ons or shor t in t he wi r i ng in t he GA-Net bus ci rcui t wi l l c ause audi o
(i ncl udi ng t he audi o ac c essor i es) and navi gat i on f unct i ons to appear i noper at i ve.
Wi t h t he pr emi um sound s y s t em, an audi o ampl i f i er uni t power s t he speaker s, ot her wi se t he speaker s ar e power ed
di rect l y by t he audi o uni t.
The audi o uni t has a bui lt-i n EEPROM (el ect ri cal l y er asabl e pr ogr ammabl e r ead-onl y memor y). Thi s memor y hol ds t he
audi o pr eset dat a (AM/FM radi o f r equency, sound set t i ngs) even when t he battery power i s r emoved.
A c t i v e Noi se Canc el l at i on (ANC) s y s t em
The audi o syst em i s equi pped wi t h t he ANC ci r cui t in t he audi o uni t.
The ANC syst em wor ks to c anc el engi ne boomi ng sound up to about 2,000 r pm. The audi o uni t r ecei ves t he engi ne
speed pul se (NEP) f r om t he ECM/ PCM and out put s a si ne-wave-sound t hr ough t he audi o speaker s to c anc el
l ow-f r equency noi se f r om t he engi ne. The ANC syst em al so uses t wo mi c r ophones to det ect and moni t or l ow f r equency
noi se i n t he passenger compar t ment . The mi c r ophones f eed i nf ormat i on back to t he audi o uni t whi c h adj ust s t he
speaker output to r educe t he noi se. The ANC al so r ec ei ves i nput f r om t he door open/c l ose (INTR LT) si gnal f rom t he
MICU. Anyt i me a door i s opened, t he ANC syst em t empor ar i l y st ops wor ki ng.
S OUND
WA VE
TISV1E
L OW- FREQUENCY
NOISE
S OUND
WAVE
SINE-WAVE
S OUND
CA NCE L S LOW-FREQUENCY NOISE
TIME
Speed-sensi t i ve Vol ume Compensat i on (SVC)
The audi o syst em i s equi pped wi t h speed-sensi t i ve vol ume compensat i on (SVC). The audi o uni t r ec ei ves t he vehi cl e
speed pul se (VSP) f r om t he ECl M/PCM. The syst em pr oc esses t he speed i nput and i nc r eases t he audi o syst em vol ume
l evel as t he vehi c l e speed i nc r eases to c ompensat e for t he var i ous i nt eri or noi ses t hat oc c ur at hi gher speeds. When t he
vehi c l e sl ows down, t he vol ume ret urns to i ts nor mal l evel . The S VC has f our set t i ngs: S VC OFF, L OW, MID and HIGH
that c an be adj ust ed usi ng t he audi o uni t. The S VC c omes f rom t he f act ory wi t h MID set as t he def aul t (see t he owner ' s
manual for mor e i nf ormat i on).
2
U Q
TJ emat i c s Mut i ng Logi c
The navi gat i on syst em al l ows voi c e cont rol f or t he audi o, t he XM, and t he CD pl ayer . The navi gat i on syst em uses t he
GA-Net bus to c ommuni c at e t he voi ce cont rol c ommands to t he audi o uni t When usi ng t he navi gat i on TAL K / BACK
but t on, t he audi o i s mut ed on all speaker s and you hear navi gat i on sound on t he f ront c hannel s. When usi ng t he
navi gat i on or route gui dance (RG), t he front speaker s pr ovi des t he navi gat i on sound and t he r ear speaker s cont i nue to
play t he audi o. For mor e i nf ormat i on, see t he navi gat i on and HFL sec t i ons. The out l i ne of t he mut i ng l ogi c i s shown in
t hi s t abl e.
Cont ent s Audi o out put Cont ent s
Lef t f ront CH Ri ght f ront CH Ri ght r ear CH Lef t rear CH Subwoof er CH
Navi gat i on
TAL K / BACK
But t ons
Navi gat i on voi c e
output
Navi gat i on voi ce
output
Mut ed Muted Mut ed
Rout e Gui danc e Navi gat i on voi c e
output
Navi gat i on voi ce
output
Audi o Audi o Audi o
HFL Tel ephone
sound
Tel ephone
sound
MUTE MUTE MUTE
HFL and Rout e
Gui danc e or talk
back
Navi gat i on
sound
Tel ephone
sound
MUTE MUTE MUTh
(cont' d)
23-9
Audi o S f st em
S f st em Descri pt i on (c ont ' d)
S f s t em Diagram
WithXM
r
(GA-NET)
NAVIGATION
DISPLAY UNIT
; (GA-NET)
1 NAVIGATION
| UNO"
AUDIO-HVAC
SUBDI!
UNIT
DASH LIGHTS
BRIGHTNESS
CONTROLLER
AUDIO DISC
CHANGER
With premium audio system
ELECTRICAL
COMPASS UNIT
STEREO
AMPLIFIER
CROSSOVER
NETWORK
CONTROL UNIT
CLIMATE
CONTROL
UNIT
Without premium audio system
AM/FM
ANTENNA
AMPLIFIER
AM/FM ANTENNA
AUDIO UNIT
Except 1 CD type
B-CAN H
GAUGE
CONTROL MODULE
With HandsFreeLink system
1
HANDSFREELINK
CONTROL UNIT
FRONT HFL-
NAVIGATWN-
ANC MICROPHONE
FRONT ACTIVE NOISE
CANCELLATION
MICROPHONE
REAR ACTIVE NOISE
CANCELLATION
MICROPHONE
ECM/PCM
(Engine speed pulses)
(NEP)
Except 1 CD type
AUDIO
REMOTE SWITCH
AUXILIARY
JACK ASSEMBLY
CUMATE
CONTROL
UNIT
AUDIO-HVAC
DISPLAY UNrr
DASHLIGHTS
BRIGHTNESS
CONTROLLER
ECM/PCM
(Vehicles speed pulses)
(VSP)
1 CD type
23-10
NOTE; Al l i t e m s m a y n o t a p p l y to t h i s v e h i c l e . S e e t h e o w n e r ' s m a n u a l f o r m o r e i n f o r m a t i o n .
Audi o Gl ossar y
It em Def i ni t i on
Act i ve noi se cancel l at i on The act i ve noi se cancel l at i on syst em c anc el s some of t he vehi c l e noi se. Thi s
oc c ur s i n t he 1,5002,400 rpm r ange. Mi cr ophones det ect t he l ow f r equency
sound, and t he syst em outputs a cancel i ng sound f rom t he audi o speaker .
Act i ve sound cont rol The next generat i on of sound cont rol that el i mi nat ed unwant ed sound i n t he
passenger compar t ment .
AM (Ampl i t ude Modul at i on) The t ype of t r ansmi ssi on used in t he st andar d radi o br oadcast band f r om 530 to
1710 kHz.
Ampl i f i er A devi ce that i ncr eases t he l evel of a si gnal by i ncr easi ng t he cur r ent or vol t age.
Ant enna A devi ce used to send or r ecei ve el ect r omagnet i c wav es t hr ough t he ai r.
ATA (PC car d) A t ype of car d that has been t est ed for use i n pl ayi ng WMA and MP3 musi c f i l es
i n t he PC car d sl ot . Si zes of up to 1 GB have been t est ed.
Audi o remot e swi t ch The swi t c hes on the st eeri ng wheel that cont rol t he audi o syst em.
Auxi l i ar y j ack Al l ows t he cust omer to use a port abl e audi o devi ce to i nput audi o r ecor di ngs.
Bal ance A cont rol that c hanges t he relat i ve vol ume of t he left and ri ght c hannel s.
Band A r ange of f r equenci es bet ween t wo def i ni t e l i mi t s. Bands ar e assi gned by t he
Feder al Communi c at i ons Commi ssi on f or speci f i c us es .
Bas s An adj ust ment for the l ow f r equency sounds of ar ound 160 Hz and bel ow.
Byte A uni t of st or age for comput er f i l es and memor y. A CD hol ds appr oxi mat el y 700
mi l l i on byt es.
Casset t e Audi o or vi deo magnet i c t ape cont ai ner havi ng t wo r eel s. Cust omer s c an i nser t
it f or pl ay back
Compac t f l ash A st andar d for smal l -si ze ( 3x 4 c m), memor y c ar ds used i n mobi l e c omput er s,
PDAs, and di gi tal c amer as. Compact f l ash memor y c ar ds ar e avai l abl e i n si ze of
32 MB up to 4 GB or mor e and c an be pl ayed in t he audi o PC sl ot . Si zes above
1 GB have not been t est ed.
CD (Compact Di sc) A 4.5-i nch pl ast i c di sc cont ai ni ng di gi tal audi o r ecor di ng that i s pl ayed opt i cal l y
on a l aser equi pped pl ayer. Never use di sc s wi t h a paper l abel . In a hot vehi c l e,
l abel s c an curl up and j am t he uni t.
CD (audi o di sc) c hanger CD pl ayer that c an st ore and play mor e t han one CD. Two t ypes ar e avai l abl e.
S ome uni t s accept CDs f ed into t he c hanger one at a t i me, and ot her s ac c ept a
magazi ne (wi th CDs st acked in a cont ai ner ).
CD pl ayer A c omponent desi gned to play compact di sc r ecor di ngs usi ng a l aser opt i cal
pi ckup. The si gnal f rom a CD pl ayer usual l y r equi r es ampl i f i cat i on.
Deci bel s (dB) A met hod of measur i ng sound or radi o si gnal st rengt h r ecei ved by t he audi o uni t
ant enna.
Di storti on Inexact reproduct i on of an audi o si gnal c aused by pl ayi ng musi c at l evel s t he
audi o syst em cannot handl e. You wi l l t ypi cal l y hear t hi s as st at i c, pops, or
c r ac kl es.
D u l b y (noi se reduct i on) A pr oc essi ng syst em devel oped by Dol by Labor at or i es that r educ es t he
backgr ound noi se on recordi ng medi a. The resul t i s a c l eaner pl ayback f r om t he
audi o syst em.
DUET A ser i al dat a communi cat i on li ne used f or sub di spl ay.
DVD (Di gi tal Ver sat i l e Di sc) A 4.5-i nch CD-l i ke f ormat used for st ori ng movi es wi t h di gi tal audi o and vi deo
f eat ur es. The DVD-A f ormat i s a DVD f ormat desi gned f or DVD audi o s y s t ems .
S ome vehi c l es can pl ay DVD and DVD-A f or mat s.
Equal i zer A devi ce that c hanges t he relati ve vol ume of i ndi vi dual f r equency bands to sui t
per sonal t ast es of t he l i st ener.
Fader The cont rol that adj ust s t he relati ve vol ume l evel s of front and rear speaker s in a
f our -speaker syst em.
Format To pr epar e a PC car d to recei ve f i l es t hi s f unct i on i s done on a PC. Al ways c hoose
ei t her FAT or FAT32, as t he NTFS f ormat i s not accept ed by t he syst em. Pi ck t he
def aul t sec t or s f or t he f ormat met hod sel ect ed.
(cont' d)
23-11
Audi o System
Audi o Gl ossar y (cont ' d)
It em Def i ni t i on
FM (Fr equency Modul at i on) The f or m of modul at i on used f or radi o and t el evi si on sound t r ansmi ssi on i n
most of t he wor l d. L es s pr one to i nt erf erence t han AM. The FM br oadcast band
in North Amer i c a c over s r oughl y 87.7 to 107.9 MHz.
GA-Net The GA-Net al l ows t he audi o uni t to c ommuni c at e wi t h all t he audi o and
navi gat i on c omponent s in a vehi c l e. If t here i s an open in t he GA-Net or
c omponent s t he ent i re audi o and navi gat i on syst em may appear i noper at i ve.
GB (Gi gabyt e)
A J ::t of memor y or di sc st or age equal to one bi lli on byt es (1000 mi l l i on byt es).
HDD Abbr evi at i on f or har d di sc dr i ve. They ar e sensi t i ve to heat and it i s not
r ec ommended that t hey be used in t he PC car d sl ot for pl ayi ng audi o f i l es.
Hertz (Hz) The uni t of f r equency equal to one c yc l e per sec ond (cps). One ki lohertz (kHz)
equal s 1,000 c ps ; one megaher t z (MHz) equal s 1 mi l l i on c ps.
Int egrat ed ampl i f i er A c omponent t hat c ombi nes a pre amp and a power amp into a si ngl e uni t A
r ecei ver c ombi nes an i nt egrat ed amp and a t uner into a si ngl e uni t.
J ewel c ase The hard pl ast i c c ase t hat cont ai ns a compact di sc or DVD. Al ways use a j ewel
c as e to prevent sc r at c hes on t he under si de of a CD or DVD.
i r n (i i n n J H r n / o t a i ni epi cy)
A t ype c f d l g i t w ! c i ^ l a y lltai c h a n g e s r ef l ect ance or t r ansmi t t ance when an
el ect ri cal f i el d i s appl i ed to it.
Memor y Ci rcui t ry or devi c es t hat hol d i nf ormat i on in el ect ri cal or magnet i c f or m, suc h as
t he AM/FM radi o pr eset s.
MB (Megabyt e) One mi l l i on byt es. Wri t t en as 1 MB. Megabyt es ar e used as a measur e of di gi tal
st or age spac e. For exampl e, a CD c an hol d 650 MB.
Mi c An abbr evi at i on f or mi c r ophone. For vehi c l es wi t h navi gat i on, t he mi cr ophone
ac c ept s navi gat i on voi c e c ommands to cont rol audi o and navi gat i on f unct i ons.
MPS musi c f i l es MPS i s an audi o codi ng f ormat . MPS i s a popul ar audi o c ompr essi on f or mat on
t he i nt ernet and c omput er s. CDs and PC c ar ds wi t h t hese f i l es can be pl ayed on
some vehi c l e' s audi o syst em.
Mut e When t he navi gat i on gi ves gui danc e, t he front speaker s ar e mut ed (no musi c ).
When you use t he voi c e cont rol s y s t em, all of t he speaker s ar e mut ed.
Noi se Unwant ed r andom sounds like buzzi ng, hi ss, pops, st at i c, whi ne, et c.
PC car d The sl ot used f or pl ayi ng MPS and WMA musi c f i l es. The PC car d i s usual l y a
combi nat i on of a smal l f l ash car d in a PCMCIA adapt or that sl i des into t he sl ot .
The ATA, S D, and c ompac t f l ash t ypes of c ar ds have been t est ed up to 1 GB.
PCMCIA A comput er st andar d f or t he sl ot that t he PC car d sl i des i nto. Anot her t er m f or
t he PC car d sl ot .
Pr oc essor The part of an audi o devi ce t hat per f or ms t asks/cal cul at i ons. In t he audi o uni t ,
t he pr oc essor handl es mut i ng to al l ow t he navi gat i on syst em to speak its voi c e
c ommands, and t he decodi ng/pl ayback of t he sound f i l es, et c.
Radi o A head uni t that c ombi nes a t uner , a pr eampl i f i er , and often a power -ampl i f i er .
Rout e gui dance (RG) Spoken voi c e used for t urn-by-t urn navi gat i on f r om t he audi o speaker s.
CS F (Col d St ar t Fi x) sc r eens Thes e sc r eens ar e di spl ayed if t he syst em r equi r es a GPS i ni ti ali zati on. The
vehi c l e shoul d be moved out si de into an open ar ea away f rom bui l di ngs/power
l i nes.
St er eo A recordi ng of at l east t wo c hannel s wher e you c an hear sound or musi c f r om
the left or ri ght si de.
S D (Sec ur e Di gi tal) c ar d Thi s c ompac t t ype of memor y car d al l ows f or f ast dat a t r ansf er and has bui lt-i n
secur i t y f unct i ons. S D c ar ds have a smal l wri t e-prot ect i on swi t ch on t he si de.
Shi el d A met al l i c foi l or br ai ded wi r e l ayer sur r oundi ng conduct or s whi c h ar e desi gned
to prevent el ect rost at i c or el ect r omagnet i c i nt erf erence (noi se) f rom ext er nal
sour c es whi c h you hear as buzzi ng or poppi ng sounds whi c h you hear on t he
speaker s.
Speaker (Loudspeaker ) A devi ce that conver t s el ect ri cal ener gy into acoust i cal ener gy (sound).
Speed-sensi t i ve vol ume
c ompensat i on (SVC)
The S VC i nc r eases t he audi o vol ume to c ompensat e for i nc r eased i nt eri or noi se
when t he vehi cl e dr i ver s at f r eeway speeds.
Subwoof er A l oudspeaker made to r epr oduce t he l owest audi o f r equenc i es, f rom about
25 Hz to 125 Hz.
Tr ack A sound r ecor di ng on a CD, t ape, or PC c ar d.
Audi o Gl ossar y (cont ' d)
I tem Def i ni t i on
Tr ebl e An adj ust ment to cont rol t he vol ume of t he hi gh f r equency sounds.
Tuner A component (or part of a component ) that r ec ei ves radi o si gnal s and sel ect s
one br oadcast f r om many.
Tweet er A speaker desi gned to r epr oduce t he hi gher f r equenc i es (treble) onl y.
US B Uni ver sal Ser i al Bus . The US B i s used for pl ayi ng audi o f i l es (MP S, WMA, and
AAC) on t he ext er nal devi ce t hr ough t he audi o uni t.
US B jack Al l ows t he cl i ent s t o pl ay dat a suc h as i nput audi o r ecor di ng f rom port abl e audi o
devi c es (such as i -Pod) or data f rom US B f l ash memor y.
Voi c e coi l A coi l of wi r e wr apped ar ound a t ube and t hen at t ached to t he speaker c one or
di aphr agm. When an audi o si gnal i s appl i ed, t he coi l bec omes an el ect r omagnet
and i nt eract s wi t h t he per manent magnet c ausi ng t he cone or di aphr agm to
vi br at e. We i nt erpret t hese vi br at i ons as sound.
V ol ume control Al l ows you to cont rol t he l oudness of t he musi c .
WMA musi c fi le Wi ndows Medi a Audi o Fi l e. Thi s i s an accept ed f or mat for musi c f i l es to be
pl ayed on ei t her a CD-R, a CD-RW, or a PC c ar d.
Woof er A speaker that i s desi gned to r epr oduce l ow (bass) f r equenci es onl y.
XM radi o Sat el l i t e based radi o t r ansmi ssi on, whi c h also uses a gr ound based repeat er
net work to ensur e s eaml es s r ecept i on. The c hannel s ori gi nat e f rom XM' s
br oadcast cent er , i n Washi ngt on DC, and upli nk to t wo sat el l i t es. These sat el l i t es
t r ansmi t t he si gnal ac r oss t he enti re cont i nent al Uni t ed St at es.
XM r ecei ver The ext ernal c omponent that r ecei ves and pr oc esses t he XM si gnal s f r om the
XM sat el l i t es, and t errest ri al (land) st at i ons. The audi o uni t c ommuni c at es to the
XM r ecei ver over t he GA-Net bus.
(cont 'd)
^23" 3
Audi o Sf s t em
S f st em Descri pti on (cont' d)
Audio Unit Connector for Inputs and Outputs
Pr emi um Audi o S f st em wi t h navi gat i on
AUDIO UNIT
CONNECTOR C(16P)
A U DI O U NI T
CONNECTOR G (14P)
1 I 2
1
3 | 4 | 5 ^
M
|9|10|11|12|13|14|15|/
AUDIO UNIT
CONNECTOR D (8P)
n r
1
8
2 3 | 4- | S | 6
/
14
1
8
|9L/|11|12|13
/
14
AUDIO UNIT
CONNECTOR F (3P)
23-14
AUDIO UNIT CONNECTOR A (24P)
5 6 8 9 1011
n\y 16 17|18|19|20 21 [22 23
12
24
Terminal sideof maleterminals
Audi o Uni t Connec t or A (24P)
Cavi t y Wi r e Connec t s t o
A3 L T BL U Data link connect or (DLC) (K-LINE)
A4 YE L Navi gat i on di spl ay uni t (SCTY)
A5 BRN Audi o remot e swi t c h gr ound (REMOTE GND)
A6 RED St er eo ampl i f i er (RR PRE )
A7 GRN St er eo ampl i f i er (RR PRE +)
A8 GRY* St er eo ampl i f i er (SH RR GND)
A9 GRY* St er eo ampl i f i er (SH RL GND)
A10 RED St er eo ampl i f i er (RL P R E - )
A11 GRN St er eo ampl i f i er (RL PR1 + )
A12 BRN Gr ound (G402) (MAIN GND)
A14 PUR Audi o power suppl y (ACC)
A16 PNK Audi o remot e swi t c h (REMOTE)
A17 WHT St er eo ampl i f i er (SWD +B)
A18 RED St er eo ampl i f i er (FR P R E - )
A19 GRN St er eo ampl i f i er (FR PRE 4-)
A20 GRY* St er eo ampl i f i er (SH FR GND)
A21 GRY* St er eo ampl i f i er (Sf-' F l GND)
A22 RED St er eo ampl i f i er (FL PRE )
A23 GRN St er eo ampl i f i er (FL P R E +)
A24 WHT Const ant power ( +B)
The shi el ded wi r es have a heat -shr i nk t ube i nsul at i ng t he out si de of t he wi r e. The col or of t he i nsul at i ng
t ube, t ypi cal l y bl ack or dark gr ay, may not mat ch t he col or of t he wi r e shown on t he ci rcui t di agr am.
(cont ' d)
Audi o Syst em
AUDIO UNIT CONNECTOR B (20P)
n n
1
C
M
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
11
/
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Audi o Uni t Connec t or B (20P)
B1 GRN Navi gat i on uni t (NAVI GND)
B2 GRY* Navi gat i on uni t (NAVI SH GND)
B3 BL K Auxi l i ar y j ack assembl y (AUX S I G GND)
B4 GRY* Auxi l i ar y j ack assembl y (AUX S H GND)
B5 YE L Auxi l i ar y j ack assembl y (AUX GND)
B6 RED Audi o-HVAC subdi spl ay uni t (DUET TX (UART))
B7 GRN Audi o-HVAC subdi spl ay uni t (DUET RX (UART))
B8 BL U B-CAN bus c ommuni c at i on (B-CAN L)
B9 RED HandsFr eeLi nk cont r ol uni t (TELM SI G )
B10 GRY* HandsFr eeLi nk cont rol uni t (TELM SIG SH)
B11 RED Navi gat i on uni t (NAVI L CH)
B13 RED Auxi l i ar y j ack as s embl y (AUX L SH)
B14 WHT Auxi l i ar y j ack as s embl y (AUX R SH)
B15 GRY Auxi l i ar y j ack assembl y (AUX DET)
B16 BLK* Audi o-HVAC subdi spl ay uni t (SH DUET GND)
B17 BL U Audi o-HVAC subdi spl ay uni t (DUET CONT)
B18 PNK B-CAN bus c ommuni c at i on (B-CAN H)
B19 GRN HandsFr eeLi nk cont rol uni t (TELM S I G+)
B20 L TGRN HandsFr eeLi nk cont r ol uni t , Front HFL-navi gat i on-ANC mi cr ophone (HFL MUTE)
The shi el ded wi r es have a heat -shri nk t ube i nsul at i ng t he out si de of t he wi r e. The col or of t he i nsul at i ng
23-16
AUDIO UNIT CONNECTOR C (I SP)
1 [ 2 | 3 I 4 I 5 IXlXlXl
i
9]lofl1112113[ 14J15[Z
Audi o Uni t Connec t or C (ISP)
C1 GRN St er eo ampl i f i er (ANC R - )
C2 BL K St er eo ampl i f i er (ANC R+)
C3 GRY* St er eo ampl i f i er (SH ANC GND)
C4 WHT Front act i ve noi se cancel l at i on mi cr ophone (ANC F MIC 8 V)
C5 BL U Rear act i ve noi se cancel l at i on mi cr ophone (ANC R MIC 8 V )
C9 WHT St er eo ampl i f i er (ANC F)
C10 RED St er eo ampl i f i er (ANC F+)
C11 BLK* Front act i ve noi se cancel l at i on mi cr ophone (SH ANCM F GND)
C12 BLK* Rear act i ve noi se cancel l at i on mi cr ophone (SH ANCM R GND)
C13 BRN Not used
C14 L TB L U Not u s e d
C15 YE L ECM/ PCM (ENGINE S PEED PUL S E) (NEP)
t ube, t ypi cal l y bl ack or dark gr ay, may not mat ch the col or of t he wi r e shown on t he ci rcui t di agr am.
(cont' d)
23-17
Audi o S f st em
AUDI O UNIT CONNECTOR D (BP)
Audi o Uni t Connec t or D (8P)
Cavi t y Wi r e Connec t s to
D5 L TGRN St er eo ampl i f i er (AMP MUTE)
D6 RED St er eo ampl i f i er ( S UBW P R E - )
D7 BLK* St er eo ampl i f i er (SH S UB W GND)
no
St er eo ampl i f i er { S UBW PRE +)
AUDI O UNIT CONNECTOR E (14P)
1 2 3 4 5 6
/ /
9 10 11
/
13 14
Audi o Uni t Connec t or E (14P)
E1 WHT XM r ecei ver (-f B)
E2 L TB L U XM r ecei ver ( S YS ON)
E3 GRY* XM r ecei ver (GA-NET BUS SH)
E4 GRY XM r ecei ver (AUDIO SH)
E5 GRN XM r ecei ver (AUDIO R+)
E6 BLK XM r ecei ver (AUDIO L +)
E9 RED XM r ecei ver (GA-NET BUS +)
E10 GRN XM r ecei ver (GA-NET B U S - )
E11 BLK XM r ecei ver (GND)
E13 WHT XM r ecei ver (AUDIO R - )
E14 RED XM r ecei ver (AUDIO L - )
23-18
AUDIO UNIT CONNECTOR F (3P)
3 1
2
Audi o Uni t Connec t or F (3P)
Cavi t y Wi r e Connec t s to
F1 AM/FM ant enna ampl i f i er (RF IN)
F2 AM/FM ant enna ampl i f i er (RF SH)
F3 AM/FM ant enna ampl i f i er (ANT +B)
AUDIO UNIT CONNECTOR G (14P)
1
8
1 I
(
14
1
8
2 3 4 5 6
(
14
1
8
9
/
11 12 13
(
14
Audi o Uni t Connec t or G (14P)
G1 WHT Audi o di sc c hanger (6CD I L L - )
G2 RED Audi o di sc c hanger (6 CD GA-NET B U S - )
G3 GRY* Audi o di sc c hanger (6 CD GA-NET BUS SH)
G4 WHT Audi o di sc c hanger (6 CD AUDIO L - )
G5 GRN Audi o di sc c hanger (6 CD AUDIO R - )
G6 GRY" Audi o di sc c hanger (6 CD AUDIO SH)
G7 BLK Audi o di sc c hanger (6 CD GND)
G8 BLU Audi o di sc c hanger (6CD.ILL+)
G9 GRN Audi o di sc c hanger (6 CD GA-NET BUS +)
G11 RED Audi o di sc c hanger (6 CD AUDIO L +)
G12 BLK Audi o di sc c hanger (6 CD AUDIO R +)
G13 L TB L U Audi o di sc c hanger (6 CD S YS ON)
G14 ORN Audi o di sc c hanger (6 CD +B)
(cont' d)
23-19
Audi o S f st em
Audi o Uni t Connect or for Input s and Out put s
Pr emi um Audi o S f s t em wi t hout Navi gat i on
A UDI O UNI T
C ONNE C T OR B (20P)
A U DI O UNI T
CONNECTOR C(16P)
h -
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
n
1
n
1 2 3 4 5 /
/
9 10 11 12 13 14 15
AUDIO UNIT
CONNECTOR F (3P)
1 2 3 4 5 6
/ A
9 10 11
/
13 14
AUDIO UNI T
CONNECTOR E (14P)
AUDIO UNIT
CONNECTOR A (24P)
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
1 4 / 1 1 6 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
23-20
n n
/
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
12
24
1 4 / 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
12
24
Audi o Uni t Connec t or A (24P)
A3 L TB L U Data link connect or (DLC) (K-LINE)
A4 GRN Passenger ' s MICU (SCTY)
A5 BRN Audi o r emot e swi t ch gr ound (REMOTE GND)
A6 RED St er eo ampl i f i er (RR P R E - )
A7 GRN St er eo ampl i f i er (RR PRE +) .-
AS GRY* St er eo ampl i f i er (SH RR GND)
A9 GRY* St er eo ampl i f i er (SH RL GND)
A10 RED St er eo ampl i f i er (RL P R E - )
A11 GRN
St er eo ampl i f i er (RL PRE4-)
A16 PNK Audi o r emot e swi t ch (REMOTE)
A17 WHT St er eo ampl i f i er (SWD +B)
A18 RED St er eo ampl i f i er (FR PRE)
A19 GRN St er eo ampl i f i er (FR PRE4- )
A20 GRY* St er eo ampl i f i er (SH FR GND)
A21 GRY* St er eo ampl i f i er (SH FL GND)
A22 RED St er eo ampl i f i er (FR P R E - )
A23 GRN St er eo ampl i f i er (FR PRE4- )
(cont' d)
23-21
Audi o Syst em
AUDI O UNITC O N N E C T O R B (20P)
n i r
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Audi o Uni t Connec t or B (20P)
Cavi t y Wire Connec t s t o
B1 RED El ect r i cal c ompas s uni t (COMPASS TX)
B2 ORN El ect r i cal c ompas s uni t (COMPASS TX- f )
B3 BLK Auxi l i ar y j ack as s embl y (AUX S I G GND!
Gn Y
:
Au x i l i ar y j ack assembl y (AUX SH GND)
B5 YE L Auxi l i ar y j ack as s embl y (AUX GND)
B6 RED Audi o-HVAC di spl ay uni t (DUET TX (UART))
B7 GRN Audi o-HVAC di spl ay uni t (DUET RX (UART))
B8 BL U B-CAN bus c ommuni c at i on (B-CAK L)
B9*
2
RED HandsFr eeLi nk cont rol uni t (TELM S I G - )
B1CT
2
GRY*
1
HandsFr eeLi nk cont rol uni t (TELM SI G SH)
B11 PNK
El ect r i cal c ompas s uni t (COMPASS RX-)
B12 , L T BL U El ect r i cal c ompas s uni t (COMPASS RX+)
B13 RED Auxi l i ar y j ack as s embl y (AUX L CH)
B14
WHT
Auxi l i ar y j ack as s embl y (AUX R CH)
B15 GRY Auxi l i ar y j ack assembl y (AUX DET)
B16 BL K *
1
Audi o-HVAC di spl ay uni t (SH DUET GND)
B17 BL U Audi o-HVAC di spl ay uni t (DUET CONT)
B19*
2
GRN HandsFr eeLi nk cont rol uni t (TELM SIGH-;
B2CT
2
L TGRN HandsFr eeLi nk cont rol uni t, Front HFL-ANC mi cr ophone (HFL MUTE)
*1: The shi el ded wi r es have a heat -shr i nk t ube i nsul at i ng t he out si de of t he wi r e. The col or of t he i nsul at i ng
* 2: Wi t h HandsFr eeLi nk syst em
23-22
AUDIO UNIT CONNECTOR C (1SP)
1 12 13 14 1 5 ^ X 1 X 1 .
9| 10|V [V2| l 3l l 4[ l 5] X
Audi o Uni t Connec t or C (ISP)
C1 GRN St er eo ampl i f i er (ANC R)
C2 BLK St er eo ampl i f i er (ANC R- f )
C3 GRY* St er eo ampl i f i er (SH ANC GND)
C4 WHT Front act i ve noi se cancel l at i on mi c r ophone (ANC F MIC 8 V)
C5 BL U Rear act i ve noi se cancel l at i on mi cr ophone (ANC R MIC 8 V)
C9 WHT St er eo ampl i f i er (ANC F)
C10 RED St er eo ampl i f i er (ANC F+)
C11 BLK* Front act i ve noi se cancel l at i on mi c r ophone (SH ANCM F GND)
C12 BLK* Rear act i ve noi se cancel l at i on mi cr ophone (SH ANCM R GND)
C13 BRN Not used
C14 L TB L U Not used
C15 YE L ECM/ PCM (ENGINE S PEED PUL S E) (NE )
AUDIO UNIT CONNECTOR D (8P)
Audi o Uni t Connec t or D (8P)
D5 L T GRN St er eo ampl i f i er (AMP MUTE)
D6 RED St er eo ampl i f i er (S UBW P R E - )
D7 BLK* St er eo ampl i f i er (SH S UBW GND)
D8 GRN St er eo ampl i f i er (SUBW PRE +)
t ube, t ypi cal l y black or dark gr ay, may not mat ch t he col or of t he wi r e shown on t he ci rcui t di agr am.
(cont' d)
23-23
Audi Syst em
AUDIO UNIT CONNECTOR E (14P)
1 2 3 4 5 6
/
9 10 11
/
13 14
Audi o Uni t Connec t or E (14P)
E1 WHT XM r ecei ver (4-B)
E2 L TB L U XM r ecei ver ( S YS ON)
E3 GRY* XM r ecei ver (GA-NET BUS SH)
L:HH GnY XM r ecei ver (AUDIO SH)
E5 GRN XM r ecei ver (AUDIO R +)
E6 BLK XM r ecei ver ( AUDK 3L +)
E3 RED XM r ecei ver (GA-NET BUS +)
E10 GRN XM r ecei ver (GA-NET BUS - )
E11 BLK XM r ecei ver (GND)
E13 WHT XM r ecei ver (AUDIO R - )
E14 RED XM r ecei ver (AUDIO L - )
t ube, t ypi cal l y bl ack or dark gr ay, may not mat ch t he c ol or of t he wi r e s hown on t he ci rcui t di agr am.
3 1
*2
F 1 AM/FM ant enna ampl i f i er (RF IN)
F 2 AM/FM ant enna ampl i f i er (RF SH)
F3 AM/FM ant enna ampl i f i er (ANT 4-B)
2
0.04,
Audi o Uni t Connect or for Input s and Out put s
Wi t hout Pr emi um Audi o S f st em
1CD t ype
AUDIO UNIT
CONNECTOR A (24P) AUDIO UNIT
Audi o Syst em
AUDI O UNIT CONNECTOR A (24P) (1 CD Type)
1
13
f
3 4 5 6 7
/ /
10 11
14 15 16 1819 22 23
12
24
Audi o Uni t Connec t or A (24P) (1 CD Type)
A1 RED Dashl i ght s br i ght ness cont r ol l er (IL L BUL B)
A3 L TB L U Dat a link c onnec t or (DLC) (K-LINE)
Audi o remoteswi t c h gr ound { REi vi uTE GI MD)
A6 ORN
Ri ght r ear speaker (RR SP-)
A7 BL U Ri ght r ear speaker (RR S P+)
A10 BRN Left rear speaker (RL S P)
A11 YE L Left rear speaker (RL S P+)
A13 GRY Li ght s-on si gnal (I L L -f )
A15 BL U ECM/ PCM (Vehi cl e speed si gnal ) (VSP)
A18 RED Front passenger ' s door speaker ( ), Front passenger ' s door t weet er ( ) (FR S P)
A19 GRY Front passenger ' s door speaker ( +), Front passenger ' s door t weet er ( +) (FR S P+)
A22 PNK Dr i ver ' s door speaker ( ) , Dr i ver ' s door t weet er () (FL S P)
A23 L TGRN Dr i ver ' s door speaker ( +), Dr i ver ' s door t weet er ( +) (FL S P+)
23-26
AUDIO UNIT CONNECTOR B (12P) (1 CD Type)
1 2 3 4 5 6
7 8 11 12
Audi o Uni t Connec t or B (12P) (1 CD Type)
B1 BLK Auxi l i ar y j ack assembl y (AUX SI G GND)
B2 GRY* Auxi l i ar y j ack assembl y (AUX S H GND)
B3 YE L Auxi l i ar y j ack assembl y (AUX GND;
B 4 GRY Auxi l i ar y j ack assembl y (AUX DET)
B5 BLK* Audi o-HVAC di spl ay uni t (SH DUET GND)
B6 RED Audi o-HVAC di spl ay unit ( DUETTX (UART))
B7 RED Auxi l i ar y j ack assembl y (AUX L CH)
B8 WHT Auxi l i ar y j ack assembl y (AUX R CH)
B11 BL U Audi o-HVAC di spl ay uni t (DUET COISiT)
B12 GRN Audi o-HVAC di spl ay uni t (DUET RX (UART)
4
tube, t ypi cal l y bl ack or dark gray, may not mat ch the col or of t he wi r e shown on t he ci rcui t di agr am.
(cont' d)
23-27
Audi o Syst em
AUDIO UNIT CONNECTOR A (24P) (6 CD Type)
r ~ - f
3 4 5 6 7
/ /
10 11
16 18 19
22 23
12
24
Audi o Uni t Connec t or A (24P) (S CD Type)
A3 L TB L U Dat a link connect or (DLC) (K-LINE)
A5 BRN Audi o remot e swi t c h gr ound (REMOTE GND)
AC
Willi Ri ght rear speaker (RR S P)
A7 BL U Ri ght rear speaker (RR S P+)
A10 BRN Left rear speaker (RL S P)
A11 YE L Left rear speaker (RL S P+)
A18 RED* Front passenger ' s door speaker ( ), Front passenger ' s door t weet er ( ) (FR S P)
A19 GRY Front passenger ' s door speaker ( +) , Front passenger ' s door t weet er ( +) (FR S P+)
A22 PNK Dr i ver ' s door speaker ( ), Dr i ver ' s door t weet er ( ) (FL S P)
A23 L TGRN
Dr i ver ' s door speaker ( +), Dr i ver ' s door t weet er ( +) (FL S P - h )
A24 WHT Const ant power (4-B)
23-28
AUDIO UNIT CONNECTOR B (20P) (6 CD Type)
3 4 5 6 7 8
13 14 15 16 17 18
Audi o Uni t Connec t or B (20P) (6 CD Type)
B3 BLK Auxi l i ar y j ack assembl y (AUX SI G GND)
B4 GRY* Auxi l i ar y j ack assembl y (AUX SH GND)
B5 YE L Auxi l i ar y j ack assembl y (AUX GND)
B6 RED Audi o-HVAC di spl ay uni t ( DUETTX (UART))
B7 GRN Audi o-HVAC di spl ay uni t (DUET RX (UART))
B8 BL U B-CAN bus c ommuni c at i on ( B - CA^}.)
B13 RED Auxi l i ar y j ack assembl y (AUX L CH)
B14 WHT Auxi l i ar y j ack assembl y (AUX R CH)
B15 GRY Auxi l i ar y j ack assembl y (AUX DciT)
B16 BLK* Audi o-HVAC di spl ay uni t (SH DUET GND)
B17 BL U Audi o-HVAC di spl ay uni t (DUET CONT)
tube, t ypi cal l y bl ack or dark gr ay, may not mat ch t he col or of t he wi r e shown on the ci rcui t di agr am.
(cont' d)
23-29
Audi o S f st em
AUDIO UNIT CONNECTOR C (16P) (S CD Type)
1 2 3 4 5
9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Audi o Uni t Connec t or C (16P) (6 CD Type)
C4 WH T Front act i ve noi se cancel l at i on mi cr ophone (ANC F MIC 8 V)
C5 BL U Rear act i ve noi se cancel l at i on mi cr ophone (ANC R MIC 8 V) .
C11 BLK* Front act i ve noi se cancel l at i on mi cr ophone (SH ANCM F GND)
EL K * Rear ac t i v e noi se cancel l at i on mi cr ophone (SH ANCM R GND)
C13 BRN Not used
C14 L TB L U Not used
C15 YE L ECM/ PCM (ENGINE S PE E D PUL S E) (NE ? !
*: The shi el ded wi r es have a heat -shri nk t ube i nsul at i ng t he out si de of t he wi r e. The col or of t he i nsul at i ng
3 1
F 1 AM/FM ant enna ampl i f i er (RF IN)
F 2 AM/FM ant enna ampl i f i er (RF SH)
F3 AM/FM ant enna ampl i f i er (ANT +B)
23-30
St er eo Ampl i f i er Connect or for Input s and Out put s (Wi th Pr emi um Audi o S f st em)
STEREO AMPLIF IER
CONNECTOR A (24P)
STEREO AMPLIFIER
CONNECTOR B (18P)
n n
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
/
11 12
13114|15118117118 |T9T20y
7
|22l23l24
1
10
n n
9
18
1
10
/
3 4 / 6 7
9
18
1
10
/
12 13
/
15 16
/
9
18
(cont'd)
23-31
Audi o Syst em
S TE RE O AMPLIFIER CONNECTOR A (24P)
n n
1 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
/
11
C
\
!

13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
/
22 23 24
St er eo Ampl i f i er Connec t or A (24P)
A1 BRN Gr ound (G402) (GND)
A2 RED Audi o uni t (FL P R E - )
A3 GRY* Audi o uni t (SH FL GND)
t u Audi o uni t (RL PRE )
A5 RED Audi o uni t (FR P R E - )
A6 GRY* Audi o uni t (SH FR GND)
A7 RED Audi o uni t (RR P R E - )
A8 RED Audi o uni t (SUBW P R E - )
A9 BLK* Audi o uni t (SH S UBW GND)
A11 WHT Audi o uni t (ANC F - )
A12 GRN Audi o uni t (ANC R )
A13 L TGRN Audi o uni t (AMP MUTE)
A14 GRN Audi o uni t (FL PRE +)
A15 GRY* Audi o uni t (SH RL GND)
A16 GRN Audi o uni t ( RL PRE +)
A17 GRN Audi o uni t (FR PRE +)
A18 GRY* Audi o uni t (SH RR GND)
A19 GRN Audi o uni t (RR PRE +)
A20 GRN Audi o uni t (SUBW PRE +)
A22 RED Audi o uni t ( A NCF+)
A23 BLK Audi o uni t (ANC R-f )
A24 WHT Audi o uni t (SWD +B)
23-32
S TE RE O AMPLIFIER CONNECTOR B (18P)
1
10
4
12 1 3 / 1 5 1 6
St er eo Ampl i f i er Connec t or B (1SP)
B1 L TB L U Subwoof er (SUBW S P - )
B3 ORN Ri ght r ear speaker (RR S P)
B4 BRN Left r ear speaker (RL S P)
B6 WHT Front passenger ' s door speaker c r ossover net work cont rol uni t (AMP)
B7 PUR Dr i ver ' s door speaker c r ossover net work cont rol uni t (AMP)
B9 BLK Gr ound (G401) (GND)
B10 GRY Subwoof er ( S UB WS P+)
B12 BL U Ri ght r ear speaker (RR S P+)
B13 YE L Left r ear speaker (RL S P+)
B15 PNK Front passenger ' s door speaker c r ossover net work cont rol uni t (AMP+)
B16 GRN Dr i ver ' s door speaker c r ossover net work cont rol uni t (AMP+)
B18 WHT Const ant power ( +B)
(cont ' d)
23-33
Audi o S f st em
XM Recei ver Connect or for Input s and Out put s (Wi th Pr emi um Audi o S f st em)
4-Door
XM RECEI VER
CONNECTOR B (2P)
1 2 3 4 5 6
/ /
9 10 11
/
13 14
XM RECEI VER
CONNECTOR A (14P)
2-Door
XM RECEI VER
CONNECTOR B (2P)

1 2 3 4 5 6
/ /
9 10 11
/
13 14
XM RECEI VER
CONNECTOR A (14P)
23-34
K M RECEI VER CONNECTOR A (14PJ
1 2
X T
3 4 5 6
/ /
9 10 11
/
13 14
XM Rec ei ver Connec t or A (14P)
A1 WHT Audi o uni t ( + 8)
A2 L TB L U Audi o uni t ( S YS ON)
A3 BRN*
2
Audi o uni t , Navi gat i on di spl ay uni t *
1
(GA-NET BUS SH)
A4 G R Y *
2
Audi o uni t (AUDIO SH)
A5 GRN Audi o uni t (AUDIO R +)
A6 BLK Audi o uni t (AUDIO L +)
A9 RED Audi o uni t Navi gat i on di spl ay uni t *
1
(GA-NET B US +)
A10 GRN Audi o uni t Navi gat i on di spl ay uni t
1
(GA-NET BUS )
A11 BLK Audi o uni t (GND)
A13 WHT Audi o uni t (AUDIO R - )
A14 RED Audi o uni t (AUDIO L)
* 2: The shi el ded wi r es have a heat -shri nk t ube i nsul at i ng t he out si de of t he wi r e. The col or of t he i nsul at i ng
t u b e , t ypi cal l y bl ack or dark gr ay, may not mat ch t he col or of t he wi r e s hown on t he ci rcui t di agr am.
XM RECEI VER CONNECTOR B (2P)
XM Rec ei ver Connec t or B (2P)
B1 XM ant enna (TER-SAT)
B2 XM ant enna (SH-GND)
(cont' d)
23-35
Audi Syst em
Auxi l i ar y J ac k Assembly Connector for Input s and Out put s
AUXILIARY J ACK ASSEMB LY
5P CONNECTOR
c }
1 2 3 4 5
Auxi l i ar y J ac k A s s e m b l y 5P Connec t or
1 GRY Audi o uni t (AUX DET)
2 YE L Audi o uni t (AUX GND)
3 BLK Audi o uni t (AUX SI G GND)
4 RED Audi o uni t (AUX LCH)
5 WHT Audi o uni t (AUX RCH)
23-36
Active Noi se Cancel l at i on Mi crophone Connect or f or i nput s and Out put s
Fr ont HF L-Navigation-ANC Mi c r ophone (Wi t h Navi gat i on) Fr ont Ac t i ve Noi se Canc el l at i on Mi c r ophone
(Wi t hout Navi gat i on 6 CD Type)
1
1 2 3 4 5 6
n
7
Rear Ac t i ve Noi se Canc el l at i on Mi c r ophone
Audi o System
Fr ont HFL-navl gat i on-ANC Mi cr ophone 7P Connec t or (wi t h navi gat i on)
1 BLK Gr ound (G501)
2 GRY HandsFr eeLi nk cont r ol uni t (MIC )
3 BRN HandsFr eeLi nk cont rol uni t (MIC4-)
4 WHT Audi o uni t (ANC F MIC 8 V)
5 L TGRN HandsFr eeLi nk cont rol uni t (MIC-f ), audi o uni t (HFL MUTE)
6 PUR HFL-navi gat i on-ANC mi c r ophone power suppl y (ACC)
7 WHT Const ant power ( +B)
Fr ont Ac t i ve Noi se Canc el l at i on Mi cr ophone 3P Connec t or (wi t hout navi gat i on CD t ype)
1 BLK* Audi o uni t (SH ANCM F GND)
3 WHT Audi o uni t (ANC F MIC 8 V)
*: The shi el ded wi r es have a heat -shri nk t ube i nsul at i ng t he out si de of t he wi r e. The col or of t he i nsul at i ng t ube,
t ypi cal l y bl ack or dark gr ay, may not mat ch t he col or of t he wi r e shown on t he ci rcui t di agr am.
Rear Ac t i ve Noi se Canc el l at i on Mi cr ophone 3P Connec t or
1 GRY* Audi o uni t (SH ANCM R GND)
3 WHT Audi o unit (ANC R MIC 8 V)
The shi el ded wi r es have a heat -shri nk t ube i nsul at i ng t he out si de of t he wi r e. The col or of t he i nsul at i ng t ube,
23-38
Audi o Di sc Changer Connect or for Input s and Out put s (Wi th Navi gat i on)
E l
L i
AUDIO DISC CHANGER
14P CONNECTOR
1 2 3 4 5 6
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
Audi o Di sc Changer 14P Connec t or
Cavi ty W i re Connec t s to
1 ORN Audi o uni t (6 CD +B)
2 L TB L U Audi o uni t (6 CD S YS ON)
3 GRY* . Audi o uni t (6 CD GA-NET BUS SH)
4 GRY* Audi o uni t (6 CD AUDIO SH)
5 BLK Audi o uni t (6 CD AUDIO R +)
6 RED Audi o uni t (6 CD AUDIO L +)
8 BL U Audi o uni t (6 CDI L L +)
9 GRN Audi o uni t (6 CD GA-NET B US +)
10 RED Audi o uni t (6 CD GA-NET B U S - )
11 BLK Audi o uni t (6 CD GND)
12 WHT Audi o uni t (6 CD I L L - )
13 GRN Audi o uni t (6 CD AUDIO R - )
14 WHT Audi o uni t (6 CD AUDIO 1-)
*: The shi el ded wi r es have a heat -shr i nk t ube i nsul at i ng t he out si de of t he wi r e. The col or of t he i nsul at i ng t ube,
(cont' d)
23-39
Audi S f st em
Speaker Cr ossover Wetwork Cont r ol Uni t Connect or for Input s and Out put s (Wi th Pr emi um
Audi o S f st em)
S PEAK ER CROS S OVE R NETWORK
CONTROL UNIT 8P CONNECTOR
{/
Y
L I J
2
3
/ r 6
r
8
Dri ver's Door Speaker Cr ossover Net wor k Cont r ol Uni t 8P Connec t or
2 GRN St er eo ampl i f i er (AMP-f-)
3 PUR St er eo ampl i f i er (AMP)
5 RED Dr i ver ' s door t weet er ( TWEETER4-)
6 GRN Dr i ver ' s door t weet er (TWEETER )
7 L TGRN Dr i ver ' s door speaker (SPKR +)
8 PNK Dr i ver ' s door speaker (SPK R)
Fr ont Passenger ' s Door Speaker Cr ossover Net wor k Cont r ol Uni t 8P Connec t or
2 PNK St er eo ampl i f i er (AMP-h)
3 WHT St er eo ampl i f i er (AMP)
5 BRN Front passenger ' s door t weet er ( TWE E TE R+)
6 W H T Front passenger ' s door t weet er (TWEETER )
7 GRY Front passenger ' s door speaker (SPKR +)
8 RED Fr ont passenger ' s door speaker (SPK R)
23-40
Audi o-HVAC Subdi spl ay Uni t Connect or for i nput s and Out put s (Wi th Navi gat i on)
AUDIO-HVAC SUBDISPLAY UNIT
12P CONNECTOR
n
1
1
2
V
4
i
5 6
.n
7 8 9
10k*
12
Audi o-HVAC Subdi spl ay Uni t 12P Connec t or
1 GRN Audi o uni t (DUET RX (UART))
2 RED Audi o uni t (DUET TX (UART))
4 BL U Audi o uni t (DUET CONT)
5 L TGRN Audi o-HVAC subdi spl ay uni t power suppl y (IG2)
6 WHT Const ant power ( +B)
7 RED Cl i mat e cont rol uni t (AC-CLK )
8 PUR Cl i mat e cont rol uni t (AC-SQ)
9 BLK Gr ound (G401)(GND)
10 RED Dashl i ght s br i ght ness cont rol l er (IL - ]
12 GRY Li ght s-on si gnal (I t ~
(cont' d)
2 3 " 41
Audio S f st em
Audi o-HVAC Di spl ay Uni t Connect or for Input s and Out put s (Wi t hout Navi gat i on)
AUDIO-HVAC DISPLAY UNIT
12P CONNECTOR
n
1
1
2
/
4
i
5 6
n
7
8
9 10
A
12
Audi o-HVAC Di spl ay Uni t 12P Connec t or
Cavi ty Wi r e Connec t s t o
1 GRN Audi o uni t (DUET RX (UART))
2 RED Audi o uni t ( DUETTX (UART))
4 BL U Audi o uni t (DUET CONT)
5 L TGRN Audi o-HVAC di spl ay uni t power suppl y (IG2)
6 W H T Const ant power ( +B)
T RED Cl i mat e cont rol uni t (AC-CLK)
8* PUR Cl i mat e cont rol uni t (AC-SO)
9 BLK Gr ound (G401)
10 RED Dashl i ght s br i ght ness cont rol l er (ILL)
12 GRY Li ght s-on si gnal (ILLH-)
Wi t h cl i mat e cont rol
23-42
23-43
Audi o S f st em
Ci rcui t Di agram
Pr emi um Audi o S y s t em wi t h navi gat i on
F USE/RELAY B OX
No. 16 (7.5 A)
F US E
( DRI VER' S
UNDER- DAS H
F US E / RE L A Y
BOX)
No. 1 (MAIN)
(100 A)
CT XJ D
No. 3-1 (IG MAIN) (50 A)
CTXJ D
No. 15 (10 A)
_<rxj3
No. 2-4 f+B AS F/B OP) (40 A)
CTXJ D
P ASSENGER'S
GRN
V
UNDE R- DA S H
F US E / RE L A YB OX
A14
A15
B1
No. 15(20 A)
D15
D16 D21
IG2
AUDI O- HVAC S UB DI S PL A Y UNI T
DUE T DUE T IG2
A C- A C- DUE T TX RX
GND CLK S O I L L - IL L + CONT ( UART) (UART) +B
WHT
S TE RE O
AMPL I FI ER
12 7
r \ DAS HL I GHTS B RI GHTNE S S
RE D CONTROL L E R
U- ^ (In t he gauge c ont r ol modul e)
23-44
*: The shielded wires have a heat-shrink tube
insulating the outside of the wire.
The color of the insulating tube,
typically black or dark gray,
may not match the color of the wire
shown on the circuit diagram.
- : CAN line
: Other communication line
- : Shielding
AM/FM ANTENNA
AM/FM ANTENNA
AMPLIFIER
ANT+B RFSH RF IN
HANDSFREELINK
CONTROL UNIT
DATA LINK FRONT HFL-
CONNECTOR NAVIGATION-
(DLC) ANC MICROPHONE ECM/PCM
V
LTBLU
y y
LTGRN
HFL MUTE
6CD 6CD 6CD
GA-NET GA-NET GA-NET
BUS SH BUS+ BUS -
C15
HANDSFREELINK
CONTROL UNIT
XM ANTENNA
TER-SAT SH-GND
V V
AM/FM ANTENNA LEAD
1
1
f- lA
-1 GRY*
iGRN RED
AM/FM ANTENNA SUBLEAD
!
-4
F3 F2
GRY* i
B10
AUXILIARY JACK ASSEMBLY
AUX
AUX AUX AUX AUX SIG
DET GND LCH RCH GND
1 2 4 5 3
i
XM ANTENNA LEAD
GRY YEL : RED WHT BLK
B14
GRY*
B3 B4
NEP ANT+B RF SH RF IN TELM TELM
SIG SH SIG+
TELM
SI G-
AUDIO UNIT
AUX AUX AUX AUX AUX AUX
DET GND LCH RCH SIG SH
GND GND
6CD 6CD 6CD 6CD 6CD 6CD
6CD 6CD SYS AUDIO AUDIO AUDIO AUDIO AUDIO 6CD 6CD
+l\ GND ON SH R+ L+ R- L- ILL+ ILL- B-CAN L B-CAN H
| G3 * G9 G2 G14 G7 G13 | G6 G12 G11 G5 G4 G8 G1 | B8 J B18
T_it
: :
?1
G R Y - r :
L4
1
1
1
GRN RED
GRY*
I.
ORN BLK L TBL U
GRY* - .
u
1
BLK RED GRN WHT BLU WHT
6CD 6CD 6CD 6CD 6CD 6CD 6CD 6CD 6CD 6CD 6CD 6CD 6CD
GA-NET GA-NET GA-NET +B GND SYS AUDIO AUDIO AUDIO AUDIO AUDIO ILL+ ILL-
BUS SH BUS+ BUS - ON SH R+ L+ R- L-
AUDIO DISC CHANGER
V V
DRIVER'S MICU
(B-CAN)
PASSENGER' S MICU
(B-CAN)
HANDSFREELINK
CONTROL UNIT
GAUGE CONTROL
MODULE
TER-SAT SH-GND
XM RECEIVER
(cont'd)
23-45
Audi o S f st em
Pr emi um Audi o S f s t em wi t h navi gat i on
D R I V E R ' S
D O O R
S P E A K E R
D R I V E R ' S
D O O R
T W E E T E R
F R O N T
D O O R
S P E A K E R
F R O N T
D O O R
T W E E T E R
I I
L T G R N P N K
17 18
j 1 | 2
R E D G R N
I S 16
| 2
G R Y
7
S P K R S P K R T W E E T E R T W E E T E R
+ - + -
D R I V E R ' S D O O R S P E A K E R
C R O S S O V E R N E T W O R K
I
R E D
18
j 1
B R N
j 2
W H T
S P K R S P K R T W E E T E R T W E E T E R
+ - +
F R O N T P A S S E N G E R ' S
D O O R S P E A K E R
C R O S S O V E R N E T W O R K
A M P + A M P -
NO. 1 5 { 2 0 A ) F U S E
( P A S S E N G E R ' S
U N D E R - D A S H
F U S E / R E L A Y B O X )
r
G R N
I
3
P U R
I
2
P N K
I
3
W H T
B 1 6 I B 7
I
B 1 5 B6 B 1 8
A M P + A M P A M P + A M P - +B
S T E R E O A MP L I F I E R
S W D F L F L S H F L F R F R S H F R R L R L S H R L R R R R S H R R A N C A N C A N C A N C
+B P R E + P R E - G N D P R E + P R E - G N D P R E + P R E - G N D P R E + P R E - G N D F + F - R + R -
A 2 4 A 1 4 A 2 | A 3 A 1 7 A 5 | A 6 A 1 6 A 4 | A 1 5 A 1 9 A 7 I A 1 8 A 2 2 A 1 1 A 2 3 A 1 2
f-'t.
~ > G R Y *
h i
G R Y * G R Y * ^ " G R Y * R
I u
!
_ l 4 I !
i
J !
G R N R E D G R N R E D G R N R E D G R N R E D R E D W H T
n :
^ G R Y *
1 """"
n i
^ G R Y * v.
I ~~
H I
^ G R Y * >.
i
n !
^ G R Y * - ^
n
_ - G R Y *
I
A 1 7 A 2 3
A 2 2 1A21
A 1 9 A 1 8 | A 2 0 A11 A 1 0 | A 9 A 7 A 6 | A 8 C10 C9 C 2 C 1 | C 3
S W D F L F L
+B P R E + P R E -
S H F L F R F R S H F R R L R L S H R L R R R R S H R R
G N D P R E + P R E - G N D P R E + P R E - G N D P R E + P R E - G N D
A N C
F +
A N C
F -
A N C
R +
A N C S H A N C \
R - G N D
A U D I O U N I T
A N C F S H A N C M
MI C 8 V F G N D +B
S Y S A U D I O A U D I O A U D I O A U D I O A U D I O
O N L + L - R + R - S H
A N C R S H A N C M
MI C 8 V R G N D
C 4 C 1 1
W H T B L K L T B L U
E 1 3 j E 4
G R Y *
| C 1 2
B L K *
B L K R E D G R N W H T
L
_ - - -
i n
G R Y *
A 1 A 1 1 A 2 A6 A14 A 5 A 1 3 | A 4
D 2 8
B L . K *
D 2 7
| |
H 1 7

GF
H 1 6
=JY*
U N D E R - D A S H
1
F U S E / R E L A Y
B O X
+B G N D S Y S A U D I O A U D I O A U D I O A U D I O A U D I O
O N L + L - R + R - S H
X M R E C E I V E R
i B L U i
, t ,
, W H T ,
F R O N T H F L - N A V I G A T I O N - A N C
M I C R O P H O N E
1
B R N
A
G R Y *
I3
R E A R A C T I V E N O I S E
C A N C E L L A T I O N
M I C R O P H O N E
G 5 0 1
23-46
* : Th e s hi el ded wi r es hav e a heat -shr i nk t ube
i nsul at i ng t he out si de of t he wi r e.
Th e c ol or of t he i nsul at i ng t ube,
t ypi c al l y bl ac k or dar k gr ay ,
may not mat c h t he c ol or of t he wi r e
s h o wn on t he c i r c ui t d i ag r am.
- : S hi el di ng
L E FT RE AR RI GHT REAR
S PE A K E R S PE A K E R S UB WOOF E R
1 I
Y E L BRN B L U ORN GRY L T B L U
B13 B4
PA S S E NGE R' S
MI CU
GRN
No. 15 (10 A)
F US E
( UNDER- HOOD
F US E / RE L A Y
BOX)
No. 6 (7.5 A)
F US E
( PA S S E NGE R' S
UNDER- DAS H
F US E / RE L A Y
BOX)
GRY
B1
RL
S P+
GND
RL
S P -
RR
S P+
RR S UB W S UB W
S P - S P+ S P -
S T E RE O AMPL I FI ER
S H
S UB W S UB W S UB W AMP
PRE+ PRE - GND MUTE
A20 A8 | A 9
B L K *
NAVI GATI ON UNI T
GRN RE D
D8
B L K *
D6 D7 D5
u
1
(
n
GRY *
B2
S E CURI TY+
NAVI GATI ON DI S PL AY UNI T
S E CURI TY-
GA - NE T GA - NE T GA - NE T
B US + B U S - B US S H GND
GRN
B1
Y E L
B11
S UB W S UB W S H AMP NAVI NAVI
PRE+ P R E - S UB W MUTE S H GND GND
GND
AUDI O UNI T
B US S H B US + B U S -
NAVI
L CH
S CT Y
E 3 : E 9 : EI O
ri-1
! E D GRN
J * RE D GRN
GRY *
GRY *
| A 3 A9 A10
XM RE CE I VE R
B US S H B US + B U S -
4- A
G402 G401
G401
23-47
Audi o S f st em
Pr emi um Audi o S f st em wi t hout navi gat i on
No. 16 (7.5 A)
F US E
(DRIVER'S
UNDER-uMon
FUSE/RELAY
B OX)
Y
No. 1 (MAIN)
(100 A) No. 3-1 (IG MAIN) (50 A)
-<rxj3 t < r \ j 3
No. 15 (10 A)
_crxjo
No. 2-4 (+B AS F/B OP) (40 A)
crxjo
WHT
IG2
TAC-
AUDIO-HVAC DISPLAY UNIT
DUET DUET
IG2
TAC- ~ " A C- " DUET TX RX
GND ' CLK SO | ILL- ILL+ CONT (UART) (UART) +B
|10
RE D
A
DAS HL I GHTS
B RI GHTNE S S
CONTROL L E R
(In t he gauge
No. 6 (7.5 A)
F US E
( PA S S E NGE R' S
UNDE R- DAS H
G401 (Wi t h c l i mat e c ont r ol )
c ont r ol modul e) F US E / RE L A Y
BOX)
RE D GRN
RN f|
B6 B16
MAIN
GND
DUE T
CONT
RE MOTE
DUE T DUE T S H
TX RX DUE T
( UART) ( UART) GND
+B
RE MOTE
GND
A CC
I A16
; PNK
No. 6 (7.5 A)
F US E
( PA S S E NGE R' S
r
UNDE R- DA S H 8
F US E / RE L A Y
B 0 X )
( O } CA B L E
v I RE E L
GRN / RE D -
V
i RN/R
GRN/ RE D PNK
16 l 1
\ /
| 5
PNK
f
, CA B L E
) R E E L
AUDI O RE MOTE S WI TCH
$
1 0 0 0
1 0 k Q % ^
1 270 Q 470 Q 1.2 kQ 3.9 kQ
h
I G H
J Q I VOL. Qj VOL. QI CH QI CH QI
S-J (LED)
~9-
G402
(Wi t h Hands Fr eeL i nk s y s t em)
i | DOWN I UP i | ( - ) i (+) MODE
i \ DA
H > co
(In
DAS HL I GHTS B RI GHTNE S S
CONTROL L E R
t he gauge c ont r ol modul e)
HFL S WI TCH
V
BRN
23-48
* : Th e s hi el ded wi r es h av e a heat -shr i nk t ube
i nsul at i ng t he out s i de of t he wi r e.
t ypi c al l y bl ac k or dar k g r ay ,
s h o wn on t he c i r c ui t di agr am.
: CA N l i ne
: Shi el di ng
AM/ FM A NTE NNA
cb
AM/ FM A NTE NNA
AMPL I FI ER
A NT+B RF S H RF IN
(Wi t h
Hands Fr eeL i nk
s y s t em)
f HANDS FRE E L I NK
CONTROL UNI T
HF L
MI CROPHONE
L T GRN
HFL
MUTE
DATA L I NK
CONNE CTOR
(DL C) E CM/ PCM
L T B L U YE L
XM A NTE NNA
TE R- S A T S H- GND
; 1
AM/ FM A NTE NNA L E A D
AM/ FM A NTE NNA S UB L E A D
-4
A UXI L I A RY J A CK A S S E MB L Y
A UX
A UX A UX A UX A UX S I G
DE T GND L CH RCH GND
F3 F2
XM ANTENNA L E A D
GRY Y E L RE D WHT BL K
GRY*
B4
A NT+B RF S H RF IN
AUDI O UNI T
A UX A U X A UX A UX A UX A UX
DE T GND L CH RCH S I G S H
GND GND
COMPA S S COMPA S S COMPA S S COMPA S S
RX+ R X - TX+ T X -
No. 5 (7.5 A)
F US E
( DRI VER' S
UNDER- DAS H
F US E / RE L A Y
BOX)
V
BRN
; 3
IG1 DI S P DI S P DI S P DI S P
RX+ R X - TX+ T X -
E L E CTRI CA L COMPA S S UNI T
GND
I
2
BL K
I
G651
B-CAN B-CAN
L H
~[ii | BI 8
I i
i i
i i
BLU PNK
> i
I I
V V
DRI VE R' S MI CU
(B-CAN)
(B-CAN)
HANDS FREEL I NK
CONTROL UNI T
GA UGE CONTROL
MODUL E
> B1 B2
TE R- S A T S H- GND
XM RE CE I VE R
(cont ' d)
23-49
Audi o S f st em
Pr emi um Audi o S f s t em wi t hout navi gat i on
DRIVER'S
DOOR
SPEAK ER
I j
L T GRN PNK
DRIVER'S
DOOR
TWEETER
r Z J YZZ7
RE D GRN
FRONT
PASSENGER'S
DOOR
SPEAK ER
GRY RED
FRONT
PA S S E NGE R' S
DOOR
TWE E TE R
3
BRN WHT
S PK R S PK R TWE E TE R TWE E TE R
+ - +
DRI VE R' S DOOR S PE A K E R
CROSSOVER NE TWORK
CONTROL UNI T
AMP+ _ AMP -
I 3
I
2
GRN
S PK R S PK R TWE E TE R TWE E TE R
FRONT PA S S E NGE R' S DOOR
SPEAK ER CROS S OVE R NE TWORK
CONTROL UNI T
_ AMP+ _ ^ _ AMP-
I
3
W H T
B6
No. 15(20 A) F US E
( PA S S E NGE R' S
UNDER- DAS H
V
WHT
AMP+ A MP-
S T E RE O AMPL I FI ER
S WD
+B
F L
PRE+
F L
P RE -
S H FL FR
GND PRE+
FR S H FR RL
P RE - GND PRE+
RL S H RL
P RE - GND
R R
PRE+
RR
PRE -
+B
S H R R
GND
ANC
F+
A NC
F -
A NC
R +
ANC
R-
WHT
A2 j A3
" - GRY * ,
GRN RE D
A5 j A6
GRY * ,
GRN RE D
A4 A15
> , GRY * s
GRN RE D
i -J
A7 j A18
GRY* r :
GRN RED RED WHT BL K
n :
GRY * ^
I "**"
^ G R Y *
1
n :
GRY * - _
i
n
GRY *
1
A17 A23 A22 j A21 A19 A18 | A20 A11 A10 | A 9 A7 A6 | A 8 C10 C9 C2 C1 | C 3
S WD F L F L
+B PRE+ P RE -
S H FL FR
GND PRE+
F R
F RE-
SH FR RL
GND PRE+
RL S H RL
P RE - GND
R R
PRE+
RR S H RR A NC
P RE - GND F +
A NC
F -
A NC
R +
A NC S H A NC
R - GND
S Y S
ON
AUDI O
L+
AUDI O
L -
AUDI O AUDI O AUDI O
R + R - S H
GA - NE T GA- NE T
B US S H B US +
GA - NE T
B U S -
E1 E11 E2 E6 E14 E5 E13 | E 4 J E3 ; E 9 ; E10
G R Y *
G R Y *
U i i !
WHT BL K L T B L U B L K R E D G R N WHT
RED
A1 A11 A2 A6 A14 A5
w
A13
1
GRY *
| A4
r
GRY*
| A 3
:
A9 A10
\ B GND S Y S AUDI O AUDI O AUDI O AUDI O AUDI O GA - NE T GA- NET GA - NE T
/
ON L + L - ' R+ R- S H B US S H B US+ B U S -
t XM RE CE I VE R
23-50
t ypi c al l y bl ac k or dar k gr ay,
- : Shi el di ng
L E FT REAR RI GHT RE AR
S PE A K E R S PE A K E R S UB WOOFE R
1 X
YE L BRN BL U ORN GRY L T B L U
RL
S P+
RL
S P -
RR
S P+
RR
S P -
S UB W S UB W
S P+ S P -
S TE RE O AMPL I FI ER
S H
GND
S UB W S UB W S UB W AMP
PRE+ PRE - GND MUTE
I A1
BRN BL K
i I
G402 G401
A20 A8 j A9 A13
1
B L K *
GRN RED ; L T GRN
MI CU
PA S S E NGE R' S
UNDER- DAS H
D22
D8
B L K *
D6 D7 D5
S UB W S UB W S H AMP
PRE+ P RE - S UB W MUTE
GND
AUDI O UNIT
S CT Y
ANC F
MIC 8 V
S H ANCM !
F GND <
A NC R
MIC 8 V
S H ANCM
R GND
A NC F S H ANCM
MIC 8 V F GND
TE L M TE L M TE L M
S I G+ S I G - S I G S H
C11
B L K *
f 1
B L K *
FRONT ACTI VE NOI S E
CANCE L L ATI ON
MI CROPHONE
C5
#_
: BL U
1
J C12
B L K *
B L K *
-B?-
7
-, PA S S E NGE R' S
UNDER- DAS H
C11
H17 H16
GRY *
f '
B L U ,
t ;
WHT
1
F US E / RE L A Y
BOX
L
GRY*
I 1
REAR ACTI VE NOI S E
CA NCE L L A TI ON
MI CROPHONE
B19 I B 9
GRY *
| f
GRY* L.
AAA
HANDS FREEL I NK
CONTROL UNI T
FRONT HFL - ANC
MI CROPHONE
f BL K
BRN
J
(Wi t hout Hands Fr eeL i nk s y s t em)
A
_G501 _
23-51
Audi o S f st em
Wi t hout Pr emi um Audi o S f s t em
DRIVER'S UNDER-DASH
F USE/RELAY B OX
B ATTERY
No. 1 (MAIN)
(100 A)
<rvi D
No. 3-1 (IG MAIN) (50 A)
crxjD '
No. 15(10 A)
C T \ J O
No. 16 (7.5 A)
F USE
(DRIVER'S
UNDER-DASH
F USE/RELAY
BOX)
Y
(Wi t h c l i mat e c ont r ol )
A V
j RE D PUR j
., , 7
8 ,
IG2
GND
| A C-
' CL K
AUDI O- HVAC DI S PL A Y UNI T
I L L - I L L +
AC-
S O J
DUET
CONT
DUET
TX
( UART)
DUET
RX
( UART) +B
D16
WHT
No. 6 (7.5 A)
F US E
( PA S S E NGE R' S
UNDE R- DA S H
F US E / RE L A Y
E CM/ PCM B OX)
Y Y
VS P IL L +
i AUDI O UNI T
DUE T
CONT
DUE T
TX
( UART)
DUE T
RX
( UART)
S H
DUE T
GND
+B A CC
I L L -
B UL B
1 MAIN
1 GND S CT Y RE MOTE
RE MOTE
GND
BL K
G401
JlO
RE D
I
12
GRY
<7 A
DA S HL I GHTS No. 6 (7.5 A)
B RI GHTNE S S F US E
CONTROL L E R ( PA S S E NGE R' S
(In t he gauge UNDE R- DA S H
c ont r ol modul e) F US E / RE L A Y
BOX)
RE D GRN
LI] B11
( DB 1 7
AUDI O- HVAC
DI S PL AY
UNI T
' PA S S E NGE R' S
UNDE R- DA S H
F US E / RE L A Y
B OX
B L K *
SJ B12
B 7
CDB5
[ 2] B16
No. 6 (7.5 A)
F US E
( PA S S E NGE R' S
UNDE R- DAS H
F US E / RE L A Y
BOX)
PNK
RE D GRN
V
DA S HL I GHTS
B RI GHTNE S S
CONTROL L E R
(In t he g aug e
c ont r ol modul e)
MI CU
PA S S E NGE R' S
UNDE R- DAS H
G402
, CA B L E
3 RE E L
AUDI O RE MOTE S WI TCH
100 Q
270 Q 470 Q 1.2 kQ 3.9 kQ
V O L 0 j V O L Q j CH Q j CH
11 DOWN i UP i (- )
1
(+) 11 MODE
f m f(A) f j-l f
RED
DA S HL I GHTS B RI GHTNE S S
CONTROL L E R
23-52
*: Th e s hi el ded wi r es hav e a heat -shr i nk t ube
l i j 1 CD t ype
[ 2J 6CD t ype
- - : CAN l i ne
- ~: Shi el di ng
AM/ FM A NTE NNA
AM/ FM ANTENNA
AMPL I FI ER
A NT+B RF S H RF IN
DATA LINK
CONNECTOR
DL C)
V
m
AM/ FM ANTENNA L E A D
AM/ FM ANTENNA S UB L E A D
I
AUXI L I ARY J A CK A S S E MB L Y
A UX
A UX A UX A UX A UX S I G
DET GND L CH RCH GND
F3
GRY YE L
B B 4
B15 [ 2] B 5
5J B 7
[ 2 } B 1 3
h ] B 8
GO
6 1 4
00
8 1
[ 2) B 3
GRY*
| i T) B 2
B 4
GA UGE
CONTROL
MODUL E
DRI VER' S
MI CU
(B-CAN)
PA S S E NGE R' S
MI CU
(B-CAN)
A A
l i
BL U P N K
I
I
I
I
B8 B18
A NT+B RF S H RF IN
A NC F
MIC
8 V
S H A NC R S H
ANCM MI C ANCM
F GND 8 V R GND
A UX
DET
FL
S P+
A UX
GND
A UX
L CH
A UX
RCH
AUDI O UNI T
A UX
S I G
GND
A UX
S H
GND
FL
S P -
FR
S P+
FR
S P -
R L
S P+
R L
S P -
RR
S P+
B-CAN B-CAN
R R
S P -
C4
j C11
B L K *
C5
: B L U ;
L T GRN PNK
1
_ B L
D 2 8
K *
D 2 7
1
i
H 1 7 H 1 6
W*
U N D E R - D A S H
-I F U S E / R E L A Y
I
B L K *
, B L U i
: :
! WHT ,
FRONT ACTI VE NOI S E
CA NCE L L A TI ON
MI CROPHONE
GRY*
_ J J _
RE AR ACTI VE NOI S E
CA NCE L L A TI ON
MI CROPHONE
RE D
BRN B L U
D 2 4
O R N
G11
m
H23
D23
PA S S E NGE R' S
UNDER- DAS H
F US E / RE L A Y
B OX
LtD
G12
\M
H24
DRI VER' S DRI VER' S
DOOR DOOR
S PE A K E R TWE E TE R
FRONT FRONT L E FT RI GHT
PA S S E NGE R' S PA S S E NGE R' S REAR REAR
DOOR DOOR S PE A K E R S PE A K E R
S PE A K E R TWE E TE R
23-5
Audi o S f st em
The audi o syst em has a sel f -di agnost i c f unct i on.
NOTE:
Not all sel f -di agnost i c f unct i ons appear on all model s.
Ther e may be ot her sel f -di agnost i c f unct i ons t hat ar e f or f act ory use onl y.
How t o Use t he Audi o Sy s t em Sel f -di agnost i c Funct i on
1. Tur n t he i gni ti on swi t c h to ON (II). Tur n t he audi o uni t off.
2. Push and hol d t he No. 1 and No. 6 but t ons. Whi l e hol di ng t he but t ons, push t he VOL PUSH PWR knob to on. Rel ease
t he but t ons and t he sel f -di agnost i c f unct i on begi ns.
Wi t h navi gat i on Wi t hout navi gat i on 6 CD t ype
Audi o-HVAC Subdi spl ay Audi o-HVAC Di spl ay
Wi t hout navi gat i on 1 CD t ype
Audi o-HVAC Di spl ay
23-54
3. B y pr essi ng a pr eset but t on, t he i nput st art s t he di agnost i c mode t hat i s assi gned t o t hat pr eset swi t c h.
No. 2 but t on
Audi o but t on, knob, and remot e swi t c h det ect i on: Al l ows i ndi vi dual manual sel ect i on of all audi o panel knobs,
but t ons, and remot e swi t c hes to ver i f y if t hey ar e f unct i onal . When pr oper l y det ect ed, t he appl i ed knob but t on, or
remot e swi t ch name and/or val ue i s di spl ayed. To exi t t hi s mode, go to st ep 4.
No. 3 but t on
Ent i r e LCD li ghti ng/li ght-out mode: Tur ns on/off t he ent i re L CD to s how t he pr esenc e or absenc e of an L CD f ai l ur e.
No. 4 but t on
Il l umi nat i on l evel i ndi cat i on mode: Indi cat es t he duty c yc l e f or t he i l l umi nat i on di mmer cont rol of t he gauge
assembl y.
Gauge di mmer cont rol val ues:
Headl i ght s off: OFF
Headl i ght s on: 01 (max low) t hr ough 22 (max hi gh)
No. 5 but t on
Vehi cl e speed pul se i ndi cat i on mode: Indi cat es t he Vehi c l e speed pul se.
AM/ FM or FM but t on (Push and hol d 5 sec .)
Recept i on l evel check mode: Indi cat es t he recept i on l evel . When ent eri ng t he r ecept i on l evel c hec k mode, t he AM/FM
button or FM button i s used to c hange t he mai n/sub ant enna.
How t o Obt ai n t he Audi o Uni t Ser i al Number
NOTE: Thi s pr ocedur e c an onl y be done after t he power has been di sconnect ed onc e and r econnect ed to t he audi o uni t ,
and t he audi o-HVAC di spl ay di spl ays CODE. Wi t h t he audi o uni t swi t c hed off, push and hol d t he pr eset button No. 1,
No. 6 and t he VOL PUSH PWR knob, t hen r el ease. The audi o uni t di spl ays t he ei ght di gi t ser i al number (exampl e
12345678). Us e t he ei ght digit ser i al number when usi ng t he i nt eract i ve net work (i N) to get t he 5 di gi t anti -theft c odes.
Ser i al Number
Wi t h navi gat i on Wi t hout navi gat i on (Pr emi um, 6 CD, 1 CD)
S/N IS3H5E1B
S/N IS3H5B1B
(cont d)
23-55
Audi o S f st em
Sel f -di agnost i c Funct i on (cont' d)
4. The sel f -di agnost i c f unct i on ends when you t urn t he audi o uni t off or t urn t he i gni ti on swi t c h to L OCK (0).
NOTE: Any ot her di agnost i c sc r eens s hown ar e f or f act ory use onl y.
Di spl ay Spec i f i c at i ons
Ent r y L CD l i ght i ng mode (pr ess No. 3 but t on)
This diagnostic screen checks for segments that may be dead (off).
I he entire display must appear. If there are dead segments, replace the applicable display unit.
f^ SJ^ l H3ED
8
l!i DI SCST FOLDER A. SELTRACK SCANGEDGEDG33 r^t?'j2L~ZZ\ AUTO Hr^ ST
[ss] mBmmmsMmm8\aSm
v
&%nmm
" CLOCK ztO-OOl Q^ i udanHZDTEXT NEWS TATPIMHST.^
U U ' U U .: rr.rz!&'.!\M^{DFnfc:t t i&^
SB *fcHeS*p OSSl
Ent r y L CD l i ght s-out s mode (pr ess No. 3 but t on)
This diagnostic screen checks for segments that may be stuck on.
The entire display must black. If t he segment s ar e st uck on, r epl ace t he appl i cabl e di spl ay unit.
C O " )
i l l umi nat i on l evel (for t he gauge i l l umi nat i on) i ndi cat i on (pr ess No. 4 button)
This diagnostic screen checks the gauge illumination. If the headlights are off, the display reads OF F .
If the headlight are on, you should see a values between 01 (max low) and 22 max high.
When you dim and brighten the gauge, you should see this value change accordingly.
If it doesn't, check for B-CAN DTCs.
Off M IBBBB
p
L 0 C K
O O L f l
U - O 1 1
OFF
Vehi c l e s peed pul se i ndi cat i on (pr ess No. but t on)
This diagnostic screen checks that the audio unit is receiving the VSP indication.
When you drive the vehicle, the VSP indicates the vehicle speed in km/h.
Wi t h navi gat i on Wi t hout navi gat i on (Pr emi um, CD, 1 CD)
/SP B M IBBBB
23-50
Recept i on l evel i ndi cat i on mode
Thi s di agnost i c sc r een checks t he audi o uni t ' s recept i on l evel . Thi s l evel t hen can be used in t he di agnosi s of audi o uni t
recept i on qual i t y. The recept i on l evel i s di spl ayed in deci bel s (dB).
Pr epar at i on:
Park t he vehi c l e out door s in an appropri at e l ocat i on for good radi o r ecept i on.
Tune to a powerf ul l ocal FM radi o st at i on t hen wri t e down t he radi o st at i on number .
Tune to a powerf ul l ocal AM radi o st at i on t hen wri t e down t he radi o st at i on number .
1. Ent er t he recept i on l evel i ndi cat i on mode in t he sel f -di agnost i c f unct i on.
2. Tune to t he FM radi o st at i on you wr ot e down i n Preperat i on usi ng t he TUNING knob, and note t he deci bel l evel of that
st at i on when you r el ease t he but t on.
Rec ept i on l evel i ndi cat i on (Push and hol d 5 s ec AM/ FM or FM but t on.)
This diagnostic screen checks the audio units reception level that can used in
diagnosis check the audio reception quality.
0, BUI M IBBBB
I nZ'Zi I
0. 8U5
3. Pr ess and r el ease t he A. S EL button to t urn t he AM/FM ant enna ampl i f i er off.
4. Note t he deci bel l evel of that st at i on when you r el ease t he button.
5. Pr ess and r el ease t he A. S EL button to t urn t he AM/FM ant enna ampl i f i er back on.
6. Pr ess and hol d t he AM button for mor e t han 5 sec onds to ent er t he AM recept i on mode.
7. Tune to t he AM radi o st at i on you wr ot e down in preperat i on usi ng t he TUNING knob, and note t he deci bel l evel of
that st at i on.
8. Pr ess and r el ease t he A. S EL button to t urn t he ant enna ampl i f i er off.
9. Note t he deci bel l evel of that st at i on when you r el ease t he but t on.
10. Pr ess and r el ease t he A. S EL button to t urn t he AM/FM ant enna ampl i f i er back on.
11. Tur n t he i gni ti on swi t ch to L OCK (0) or audi o uni t off to exi t t he t est mode.
12. Compar e your r esul t s to a known-good, (make sur e it i s t he s ame year and t ri m l evel ) in t he s ame locat i on and
di r ect i on, and under t he s ame envi r onment al condi t i ons.
(cont ' d)
23-57
Audi o S f st em
Sel f -di agnost i c Funct i on (cont' d)
Speaker Chec k Mode
NOTE;
Ther e may be ot her sel f -di agnost i c f unct i ons t hat ar e f or f act ory use onl y.
1. Tur n t he i gni ti on swi t c h to ON (II). Tur n t he audi o uni t off.
t he but t ons and t he speaker check mode begi ns. A t one t est shoul d sound f r om one speaker .
NOTE: Make sur e t he vol ume i s set to a nor mal or sl i ght l y hi gher t han nor mal vol ume and set t he bal ance and f ader to
t he cent er posi t i on.
3. Eac h t i me you pr ess t he SKIP but t on, t he t est moves t o t he next speaker in t he or der l i st ed.
Wi t hout navi gst i on 1 CD t ype
Audi o-HVAC Di spl ay
No. 3 but t on SKIP but t on
23-58
Di spl ay Spec i f i c at i ons
Wi t h Pr emi um Audi o S y s t em
(M) i s pr essed: ^ ->(D--^
i s pr essed: - > - - >
Wi t hout Pr emi um Audi o S y s t em
( N) i s pr essed: -<D-*-*--
i s pr essed: - *
Speaker Di spl ayed Segment s Remar ks

Dr i ver ' s door speaker and t weet er SPK FR-L You shoul d hear a l ow f r equency
t one

Front Passenger ' s door speaker
and t weet er
SPK FR-R You shoul d hear a l ow f r equency
t one

Ri ght rear speaker SPK RR-R You shoul d hear a l ow f r equency
t one

Subwoof er * SPKSUBW You shoul d hear a l ow f r equency
t one

Left rear speaker SPK RR-L You shoul d hear a l ow f r equency
t one

AH speaker s SPK ALL o You shoul d hear a l ow
f r equency t one
The subwoof er does not sound
a t one
*: Wi t h Pr emi um Audi o Syst em
4. The speaker check mode ends when you t urn t he audi o uni t off or t urn t he i gni t i on switch t o LOCK (0).
NOTE: Any ot her di agnost i c sc r eens ar e s hown f or f act ory use onl y.
(cont' d)
23-59
Audi o Sf s t em
elf-diagnostic Funct i on (cont' d)
Active Woise Cancel l at i on (ANC) S f st em Chec k Mode
NOTE :
Not all self-di agnosti c f unct i ons appear on all model s.
There may be ot her self-di agnosti c f unct i ons that are f or f act ory use only.
Only perform this test when you are gui ded f r om a t r oubl eshoot i ng pr ocedur e.
The ANC f unct i on is not suppor t ed for 1CD type.
To restart the ANC check mode, turn the i gni t i on swi t ch to L OCK (0), then enter the check mode.
NOTE: Make sure the audio system is t ur ned off.
2. Push and hol d t he No. 1and No. 6 but t ons. Whi l e hol di ng t he but t ons, push t he VOL PUSH PWR knob to ON.
No. 1 but t on No. 6 but t on VOL PUS H PWR knob
3. Pr ess t he No. 1but t on, t he act i ve noi se cancel l at i on (ANC) syst em check mode begi ns.
How t o ch eck t h e act ivenoi se cancellat ion s ys t emin t h is ch eck mode
Whi l e i n t hi s syst em c hec k mode, pr ess t he No. 1button to move to t he next t est i t em.
o Y o u must r emember how many t i mes you pr essed t he No. 1button. The syst em wi l l not s how whi c h t est i tem you ar e
doi ng.
o For t est i t ems 1 t hru 10, t he speaker wi l l make a l ow-f r equency hum (50 Hz) when t he syst em i s nor mal f or mor e t han 5
sec onds up to 1 mi nut e.
When t her e i s a f ai l ure i n t he s y s t em, t he speaker wi l l not make a l ow-f r equency hum (50 Hz) or t he hum wi l l st op
wi t hi n 5 sec onds f or t est i t ems 1 t hru 10.
The c hec k mode wi l l be aut omat i cal l y c anc el l ed when t he t i me r eac hes 1mi nut e after t he st art i ng eac h t est i t ems,
e When you once r each to t est i tem 11th, t he t est wi l l loop ON and OFF i n t he 11th t est .
Thi s c hec k mode ends when you st art t he engi ne (i gni ti on swi t ch in st art (III) or t urn t he i gni ti on swi t ch to L OCK (0)),
bec ause t he power t o t he audi o syst em wi l l be cut off.
If you need to check t est i tem 2nd, 7th and/or 11t h, st art t he check mode wi t h t he engi ne i dl i ng. Ot her t est i t ems ar e
avai l abl e wi t h t he engi ne i dli ng or st opped.
23-6
Test
Item
N o .
Test Item Button
Operation
Number
of
Times
Display
ON/OFF
Sound from Speakers
when System i s
Normal
Test Available
Condition
Sel f -Di agnost i c
mode ent er
Tur n t he audi o
uni t off, pr ess
and hol d
pr eset but t ons
No. 1 and
No. 6, t hen
t urn t he audi o
uni t on
None
1st Mi cr ophone i nput ,
speaker out put
No. 1 1 ON None Any condi t i ons 1st Mi cr ophone i nput ,
speaker out put
No. 1 2 OFF 50 Hz hum f or 1 mi nut e
Any condi t i ons
2nd NEP i nput , door/t runk
swi t ch i nput
No. 1 3 ON None Engi ne i dl i ng
Al l doors/t runk
c l osed
2nd NEP i nput , door/t runk
swi t ch i nput No. 1 4 OFF 50 Hz hum f or 1 mi nut e
Engi ne i dl i ng
Al l doors/t runk
c l osed
3rd Front speaker out put No. 1 5 ON None Any condi t i ons 3rd Front speaker out put
Any condi t i ons
4th Rear speaker output No. 1 7 ON None Any condi t i ons 4th Rear speaker output
No. 1 8 OFF 50 Hz hum for 1 mi nut e
Any condi t i ons
5th ANC front
mi cr ophone i nput
No. 1 9 ON None Any condi t i ons 5th ANC front
mi cr ophone i nput No. 1 10 OFF 50 Hz hum for 1 mi nut e
Any condi t i ons
6th ANC rear
mi cr ophone i nput
No. 1 11 ON None Any condi t i ons 6th ANC rear
mi cr ophone i nput
Any condi t i ons
7th NEP (engi ne speed
si gnal ) i nput
No. 1 13 ON None Engi ne i dl i ng 7th NEP (engi ne speed
si gnal ) i nput No. 1 14 OFF 50 Hz hum f or 1 mi nut e
Engi ne i dl i ng
8th Door/trunk swi t ch
i nput
No. 1 15 ON None Al l doors/t runk
c l osed
8th Door/trunk swi t ch
i nput No. 1 16 OFF 50 Hz hum f or 1 mi nut e
Al l doors/t runk
c l osed
9th No. 1 17 ON None 9th
No. 1 18 OFF None
10th No. 1 19 ON None 10th
No. 1 20 OFF None
11th ANC operat i on
ON/OFF
No. 1 21 ON None Engi ne speed
about 2,500 rpm
(A/T in P or N,
M/T i n neut ral )
Repeat edl y
pr essi ng t he
No. 1 button
swi t c hes t he
ANC on and off
11th ANC operat i on
ON/OFF No. 1 22 OFF Engi ne noi se r educed
Engi ne speed
about 2,500 rpm
(A/T in P or N,
M/T i n neut ral )
Repeat edl y
pr essi ng t he
No. 1 button
swi t c hes t he
ANC on and off
(cont' d)
23-61
Audio Sf stem
Self-diagnostic Function (cont'd)
Active Noise Cancellation ON
Wi t h navi gat i on
NP I / ON W IBBBB
Active Noise Cancellation OF F
Wi th navigation
NP I I OFF IB IBBBB
Wi t hout navi gat i on 6 C D t ype
SP I S ON
Wi t hout navi gat i on i i C D t ype
BP is OFF
4. The sel f -di agnost i c f unct i on ends when t he audi o syst em i s t ur ned off, or t he i gni t i on swi t c h i s t ur ned to L OCK (0).
23-62
Communicat ion Connect ion Ch eck Mode
NOTE;
There may be other self-diagnostic functions that are for factory use only.
1. Turn t he i gni ti on swi t c h to ON (II). Tur n t he audi o uni t off.
t he but t ons.
3. Pr ess t he No. 6 but t on, and t he communi cat i on connect i on check mode begi ns.
With navigation Without navigation 6 CD type
Audio-HVAC Subdisplay Audio-HVAC Display
No. 1 button No. 6 button VOL PUSH PWR knob
Without navigation 1 CD type
Audio-HVAC Display
/
VOL PUSH PWR knob
(cont' d)
23-63
Audi o S f st em
Sel f -diagnostic Funct i on (cont 'd)
4. Each t i me you pr ess t he No. 6 but t on, t he c ommuni c at i on connect i on st at e i s di spl ayed in t he f ol l owi ng or der .
NOTE: If the audi o-HVAC subdi spl ay or t he audi o-HVAC di spl ay i s bl ank i n all headl i ght posi t i ons, or bl ank onl y when
t he headl i ght s are t ur ned on, check for B-CAN DTCs .
Di spl ay Spec i f i c at i ons (Wi t h navi gat i on)
Di spl ayed Segment s St at e Remar ks
D S P OK The audi o-HVAC subdi spl ay uni t or t he
audi o-HVAC di spl ay uni t i s c onnec t ed.
DSP NG The audi o-HVAC subdi spl ay uni t or t he
audi o-HVAC di spl ay uni t i s not c onnec t ed.
A C OK The cl i mat e cont rol uni t i s c onnec t ed.
AC NG The cl i mat e cont rol uni t i s not c onnec t ed.
A M P OK 00 The st er eo ampl i f i er i s c onnec t ed. Appl i cabl e to t he pr emi um audi o
syst em
A M P OK 04 The st er eo ampl i f i er i s c onnec t ed (Er r or has
occur r ed f our t i mes i n t he past ).
Appl i cabl e to t he pr emi um audi o
syst em
AMP NG The st er eo ampl i f i er i s not c onnec t ed. A n n i i r s i h i a tr% thg premium audi o
syst em
Di spl ay Spec i f i c at i ons (Wi t hout navi gat i on (Pr emi um, 6 CD, 1 CD))
Di spl ayed Segment s St at e Remar ks
01 119 The X M r ecei ver uni t i s not c onnec t ed. Appl i cabl e to t he pr emi um audi o
syst em.
02 183 The navi gat i on uni t i s not c onnec t ed.
ANT The ant enna ampl i f i er i s c onnec t ed.
ANT CHK The ant enna ampl i f i er i s not c onnec t ed.
A M P The st er eo ampl i f i er i s c onnec t ed. Appl i cabl e to t he pr emi um audi o
syst em.
A M P CHK The st er eo ampl i f i er i s not c onnec t ed. Appl i cabl e to t he pr emi um audi o
syst em.
A M P 0100 The st er eo ampl i f i er i s c onnec t ed. Appl i cabl e to t he pr emi um audi o
syst em.
A M P NG 04 The st er eo ampl i f i er i s not connect ed (error has
occur r ed f our t i mes i n t he past ).
Appl i cabl e to t he pr emi um audi o
syst em.
AC OK The cl i mat e cont rol uni t i s c onnec t ed.
A C NG The cl i mat e cont rol uni t i s not c onnec t ed.
C M P OK The el ect ri cal c ompas s uni t i s c onnec t ed. Appl i cabl e to t he pr emi um audi o
syst em.
C M P NG The el ect ri cal c ompas s uni t i s not c onnec t ed. Appl i cabl e to t he pr emi um audi o
syst em.
L CD 0100 The audi o-HVAC di spl ay uni t i s c onnec t ed.
L CD NG The audi o-HVAC di spl ay uni t i s not connect ed.
NOTE: Any ot her di agnost i c sc r eens ar e s hown f or t he manuf act ur er ' s pur pose onl y.
5. The sel f -di agnost i c f unct i on ends when you t urn t he audi o uni t off or t urn t he i gni ti on swi t ch to L OCK (0).
2 3 - 6 4
Error Codes
The audi o syst em c an di spl ay error c odes when a pr obl em i s det ect ed wi t h t he audi o di sc c hanger , t he audi o di sc , t he
XM r adi o, or t he anti -theft code.
CD Error Codes
Er r or Code
Di spl ayed
Possi bl e Caus e Sol ut i on
HEAT ERROR Di sc pl ayer i s hot. Thi s c an happen if t he
vehi cl e i s parked out in t he hot sun all
day.
Park t he vehi cl e in a cool er pl ace f or a whi l e and
try t he di sc pl ayer agai n. If t he error c ode i s sti ll
pr esent , try anot her di sc . Sf t he error c ode i s sti ll
pr esent , r epl ace t he audi o uni t.
UNSUPPORTED Tr ack/Fi l e f ormat not suppor t ed. Cur r ent t rack i s ski pped. The next suppor t ed
t rack of fi le pl ays aut omat i cal l y.
Veri f y that CD, CD-R, or CD-RW fi le names end
in CD-DA or WAV.
Veri f y that CD, CD-R, or CD-RW wi t h
c ompr essed musi c f or mat s end in MP3 or
WMA.
Ot her fi le f or mat s like i -Tunes or Ogg ar e not
r ecogni zed.
9 WMA f i l es may have (DRM) copy prot ect i on
and cannot be r ead.
BAD DI S C/ PL EAS E
CHECK / OWNERS
MANUAL / PUSH
E J E CT
CD label j ammed i n t he mec hani sm.
CD ej ect mec hani sm or mot or i s
i noperat i ve.
CD spi ndl e mot or won' t spi n up t he
CD.
Pr ess t he E J E CT button and hold it for 5 sec onds.
If t he CD does not ej ect , try agai n. If t he CD sti ll
won' t ej ect , repl ace t he uni t.
XM Er r or Codes
Er r or Code
Di spl ayed
LOADING XM radi o i s acqui r i ng audi o or pr ogr am
i nf ormat i on.
Wai t unti l t he radi o r ec ei ves t he i nf ormat i on.
OFF AIR XM channel not i n ser vi c e. Tr y anot her XM c hannel .
NO SI GNAL L oss of si gnal . Both t errest ri al and sat el l i t e ant ennas have lost
si gnal . Park t he vehi cl e out si de wi t h a c l ear vi ew
of t he sout her n hori zon.
UPDATING XM radi o i s r ecei vi ng i nf ormat i on updat e
f r om t he net work.
Thi s message di sappear s once t he updat e
f i ni shes.
CHECK ANTENNA XM ant enna error. Repai r an open or a shor t in t he sat el l i t e ant enna.
Subst i t ut e t he XM ant enna wi t h a known-good
one, and r echeck. If t he error i s gone, r epl ace t he
ori gi nal XM ant enna. If t he error i s sti ll pr esent ,
r epl ace t he ant enna l ead.
ANTENNA ERROR
XM ant enna error. Repai r an open or a shor t in t he sat el l i t e ant enna.
Subst i t ut e t he XM ant enna wi t h a known-good
one, and r echeck. If t he error i s gone, r epl ace t he
ori gi nal XM ant enna. If t he error i s sti ll pr esent ,
r epl ace t he ant enna l ead.
No si gnal f r om XM. Check a known-good vehi c l e wi t h XM r adi o. If t he
known-good vehi cl e has t he same sympt oms,
cont act XM Sat el l i t e Radi o at 800- 852- 9696.
Audi o Uni t Er r or Codes
Er r or Code
Di spl ayed
CODE ERROR 1 Anti -theft code mi smat c h (1
s t
t ry). Ent er t he cor r ect anti -theft code.
CODE E RRORE Anti -theft code mi smat c h (10
t h
t r y). Remove t he No. 15 (10 A) f use in t he under -hood
f use/r el ay box, t hen rei nsert it. You wi l l have
10 mor e t r i es to ent er t he correct anti -theft c ode.
Audi S f st em
Poor ASH or FM radio reception or interference
NOTE:
Chec k t he vehi c l e battery condi t i on f i rst (see page
22-90).
Chec k t he c onnec t or s for poor connect i ons or l oose
t er mi nal s.
Chec k f or af t ermarket ac c essor i es i ncl udi ng cel l
phones and c har ger s pl ugged into t he vehi c l e
ac c essor y power soc ket s.
9 Chec k t he radi o recept i on i n an open ar ea. Poor
r ecept i on/i nt er f er ence c an be c aused by any of t hese
condi t i ons:
- The radi o st at i on i s f ar away.
- At mospher i c condi t i ons ar e unf avor abl e.
- Af t ermarket met al l i c wi ndow tint.
- A tall bui l di ng, mount ai ns, or hi gh-vol t age power
l i nes ar e near by.
2. Do t he Seek St op Test (see page 23-114), and t he
recept i on l evel i ndi cat i on i n t he Sel f -di agnost i c
Funct i on (see page 23-57).
Is the test vehicle within 10 % of the known-good
vehicle?
YES-Mul t i pat h i nt erf erence or weak st at i on.
Oper at i on i s no r mal .
NO- Go to st ep 3.
3. Chec k t he r ecept i on/i nt er f er ence i s t he s ame i n
sever al l ocat i ons.
Is the reception/interference the same?
NO- Mu l t i p at h i nt erf erence or weak st at i on. Oper at i on
i s nor mal . H
4. Chec k t he r ecept i on/i nt er f er ence whi l e t he engi ne i s
r unni ng.
Is there noise (static or whine) only with the engine
running?
YE S - Ch ec k t he ant enna and radi o gr ounds. If OK,
c hec k t he char gi ng syst em and t he i gni ti on s y s t e m .
6. Remove t he ri ght C-pi l l ar t ri m (see page 20-110).
7. Chec k t he connect i ons f r om t he AM/FM ant enna
ampl i f i er to t he wi ndow ant enna.
Are there any loose or damaged connections?
YES - Repai r t he c onnec t i ons, or subst i t ut e a
known-good AM/FM ant enna ampl i f i er (see page
23-125), and ret est . If t he sympt om/condi t i on goes
away, r epl ace t he ori gi nal AM/ FM ant enna
ampl i f i er .l l
8. Wi t h t he hel p of an assi st ant i nsi de t he vehi c l e, have
t he assi st ant shi ne a st r ong f l ashl i ght (A) al ong eac h
ant enna wi r e (B). Chec k f r om t he out si de of t he
vehi c l e f or any br eaks or openi ngs i n t he ant enna
wi r es (the li ght shi nes t hr ough any br eaks or cut s).
NOTE: It i s easi er to see t he br eaks if you do t hi s t est i n
a dark or shaded ar ea.
Are there any breaks or cuts in the antenna?
YES - Repai r t he wi ndow ant enna. Go to AM/FM
ant enna repai r (see page 23-126), or r epl ace t he rear
wi ndow (see page 20-75) if t he damaged sect i on i s t oo
l ong. i l
23-66
9. Di sconnect t he AM/FM ant enna ampl i f i er 3P
11 Measur e t he vol t age bet ween t he AM/FM ant enna
ampl i f i er 3P connect or t er mi nal No. 3 and body
gr ound.
AM/ FM ANTENNA AMPLIFIER 3P CONNECTOR
QT
A N T +B
(No. 3)
13. Remove t he audi o uni t.
Wi t h navi gat i on (see page 23-114)
Wi t hout navi gat i on (see page 23-115)
14. Di sconnect audi o uni t connect or F (3P).
15. Chec k f or cont i nui t y bet ween audi o uni t connect or F
(3P) t er mi nal No. 3 and t he AM/FM ant enna ampl i f i er
3P connect or t er mi nal No. 3.
A N T +B
(No. 3)
A N T +B
(No. 3)
A M/ FM ANTENNA AMPL IFIER 3P CONNECTOR
NO-Repai r an open i n t he wi r e bet ween t he audi o uni t
and t he AM/FM ant enna ampl i f i er. Al so check t he
AM/FM ant enna l ead/subl ead c onnec t or .il
A N T +B
(No. 3)
bet ween t he audi o uni t and AM/FM ant enna
ampl i f i er . !
NO-Repl ac e t he audi o uni t .H
18. Di sc onnec t audi o uni t connect or F (3P).
(cont' d)
23- 67
Audio S f st em
Sympt om Troubl eshoot i ng (cont' d)
1 9 . Chec k f or cont i nui t y bet ween audi o uni t c onnec t or F
3P c onnec t or t er mi nal No. 1 .
AUDI O UNIT CONNECTOR F ( 3P)
Terminal sideof femaleterminals
T_j
[5
R
w
RF IN (No. 1)
\
RFIN (No. 1)
AM/ FM ANTENNA AMPL IFIER 3P CONNECTOR
NO-Repl ac e t he AM/FM ant enna l ead and/or
s ubl ead. H
AUDI O UNIT CONNECTOR F ( 3P)
d
ED
RF IN (No. 1)
YES - Repl ac e t he AM/FM ant enna l ead and/or
subl ead.H
NO- Go to st ep 21.
RF S H (No. 2)
RF S H (No. 2)
AM/ FM ANTENNA AMPL IFIER 3P CONNECTOR
NO-Repl ac e t he AM/FM ant enna l ead and/or
subl ead.H
(3P) t er mi nal s No. 1 and No. 2.
RF IN
RF S H (No. 2)
(No. 1)
YES - Repl ac e t he AM/FM ant enna l ead and/or
subl ead.H
NO-Repl ac e t he AM/FM ant enna ampl i f i er (see page
23-125) and r echeck. If t he recept i on sti ll poor , r epl ace
t he audi o uni t .H
23-68
Audi o uni t power swi t c h wi l l not t ur n on (No
i nf ormat i on di spl ay and- no sound)
NOTE:
Check t he vehi cl e battery condi t i on f i rst (see page
22- 90).
Check t he connect or s f or poor c onnec t i ons or l oose
t er mi nal s.
2. Push t he power swi t ch ON to see if audi o uni t t ur ns
ON.
Does the audio unit display operate properly, and does
the audio unit sound normal?
time.B
NO- Go to st ep 3.
4. Check t he No. 15 (10 A) f use in t he under -hood f use/
rel ay box and t he No. 18 (7.5 A) f use in t he dr i ver ' s
Are the fuses OK ?
NO-Repl ac e the f use, and r ec hec k . B
5. Remove t he audi o uni t wi t h navi gat i on (see page
23- 114), wi t hout navi gat i on (see page 23-115). Chec k
that t he audi o uni t connect or s ar e properl y
connect ed.
Are they connected properly?
NO-Repai r poor connect i ons and r econnect t he
c onnec t or s, and r echeck t he f unc t i o n.
7. Measur e t he vol t age bet ween body gr ound and audi o
uni t connect or A (24P) t er mi nal s No. 14 and No. 24
i ndi vi dual l y.
AUDIO UNIT CONNECTOR A (24P )
J h z = d L
8 9 10 11
~T3| | i 4l l 5| l 6| l 7l l 8| l 9l 2Ql 2l l 22l 23[ 24
12
A C C (PUR) -f B (WHT)
NO-Repai r an open i n t he wi r e(s) bet ween t he No, 15
(10 A) f use in t he under -hood f use/r el ay box, t he
No. 18 (7.5 A) f use in t he dr i ver ' s under -dash
f use/r el ay box and t he audi o uni t .H
8. Measur e t he vol t age bet ween audi o uni t connect or A
+ B(WHT)
13
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
12
24
(2
YES - Repl ac e the audi o u n i t . l
NO-Repai r an open or hi gh r esi st ance i n the wi r e
bet ween t he audi o uni t connect or A (24P) t er mi nal
No. 12 and body gr ound (G402) (see page 22- 40) .
23-69
Audio S y s t em
SymptomTroubl eshoot i ng (cont' d)
Audi o uni t power swi t c h wi l l not t ur n off
NOTE:
Chec k t he vehi c l e bat t ery condi t i on f i rst (see page
22- 90) .
Chec k t he c o n n e c t o r s f o r p o o r c o n n e c t i o n s o r l oose
t er mi nal s.
Check f or af t ermarket ac c essor i es pl ugged i nto t he
vehi c l e' s ac c essor y power soc ket s.
2. Push t he power swi t c h off or t urn t he i gni ti on swi t c h
to L OCK (0) to s ee if t he audi o uni t t ur ns off.
Does t he audio unit t urn off?
NO-Repl ac e t he audi o u n i t . l
3. Tur n t he i gni ti on swi t c h to ON (II), push t he power
swi t ch on, t hen t urn t he i gni ti on swi t c h to L OCK (0).
Does t he audio unit t urn off?
YES-Oper at i on i s nor mal H
NO- Go to st ep 4.
23- 114), wi t hout navi gat i on (see page 23-115).
5. Measur e t he vol t age bet ween audi o uni t connect or A
n n
8 9 10 11
"l 3| |14|15116|17113|19120|21122|23|2^ "
12
ACC (PUR)
No sound i s hear d f rom t he speaker (s)
(di spl ay i s normal ) (wi t h pr emi um audi o)
NOTE:
Chec k t he vehi cl e battery condi t i on f i rst (see page
22-90).
Chec k t he c onnec t or s f or poor connect i ons or l oose
t er mi nal s.
Set t he f ader and bal ance posi t i ons to t he cent er.
Bef or e doi ng t he t r oubl eshoot i ng, do t he Audi o uni t
power swi t ch wi l l not t urn on t r oubl eshoot i ng (see
page 23-69).
2. Tur n on t he audi o uni t , and make sur e t he vol ume
but t on i s not set to t he MIN l evel .
Is it at t he MIN level?
YE S - Rai s e t he vol ume l evel , and r echeck t he
f unc t i o n. !
NO- Go to st ep 3.
3. On t he st eer i ng wheel , check t he navi gat i on talk
c ommand, and/or t he HandsFr eeLi nk talk c ommand
f unct i on.
Are t he navigat ion t alk command and/or t he HFL t alk
command funct ion set ?
YES - Canc el t he navi gat i on talk c ommand by pr essi ng
t he navi gat i on BACK but t on, and/or HFL talk
c ommand, pr ess t he HFL BACK but t on, t hen r echeck
t he f unc t i o n.
NO- Go to st ep 4.
4. Do t he speaker check mode wi t h t he Sel f -di agnost i c
Do all speakers produce a t one?
YE S - S y s t em i s OK at t hi s t i me. Check for poor
c onnec t i ons at t he audi o uni t , speaker s and st er eo
ampl i f i er . !
NO- Go to st ep 5.
YE S - Ch ec k f or a shor t to power on t he PUR wi r e. B
NO-Repl ac e t he audi o uni t. B
23-70
6. Chec k t he No. 15 (20 A) f use i n t he passenger ' s
under -dash f use/r el ay box, t he No. 15 (10 A) f use in
t he under -hood f use/r el ay box, and t he No. 18 (7.5 A)
f use i n t he dr i ver ' s under -dash f use/r el ay box.
Are t he fuses OK?
NO-Repl ac e t he f use(s), and r ec hec k.B
7. Chec k t he speaker (s) wi t h no sound f or any damage.
Is t here any damage?
YES - Repl ac e t he speaker (see page 23-122) and
r ec hec k.B
. NO- Go to st ep 8.
8. Remove t he speaker (s) wi t h no sound (see page
23-122), and di sconnect its connect or .
9. Check t he speaker 2P connect or f or a l oose or poor
connect i on.
Reconnect t he speaker connect or, and recheck t he
sympt om; is t he condit ion st ill present ?
NO-l nt er mi t t ent f ai l ure. Oper at i on i s no r mal .
10. Test t he speaker (s) (see page 23-122).
Is t he speaker OK?
NO-Repl ac e t he speaker (s) (see page 23-122).
11 . Reconnect t he speaker connect or (s).
12. Di sconnect st er eo ampl i f i er connect or B (18P) and t he
door speaker c r ossover net work cont rol uni t 8P
connect or s.
13. Check for conti nui ty bet ween body gr ound and st er eo
ampl i f i er connect or B (18P) and bet ween body
gr ound and the door speaker c r ossover net work
cont rol uni t 8P connect or accor di ng to t he t abl e.
Speaker St er eo
ampl i f i er
c onnec t or
Wi r e
col or
Dr i ver ' s door
speaker , Dr i ver ' s
door t weet er
B16( +) GRN Dr i ver ' s door
speaker , Dr i ver ' s
door t weet er
B 7. (- ) PUR
Front passenger ' s
door speaker , Front
passenger ' s door
t weet er
B 15( + ) PNK Front passenger ' s
door speaker , Front
passenger ' s door
t weet er
B 6( - ) WHT
Ri ght rear speaker B12 ( +) BL U Ri ght rear speaker
B 3( - ) ORN
Subwoof er B10( +) GRY Subwoof er
B 1 ( - ) L TB L U
Left rear speaker B13( +) YE L Left rear speaker
B 4 ( - ) BRN
Speaker Dr i ver ' s Front Wi r e
door
speaker
passenger's
door
col or
c r ossover speaker
net wor k crossover
cont r ol network
uni t control uni t
connect or connector
Dri ver' s 7( +) LT
door GRN
speaker
8( ~ ) PNK
Dr i ver ' s 51+) RED
door t weet er
6( - ) GRN
Front 7( +) GRY
passenger ' s
door
8( - ) RED
speaker
Front 5( +) BRN
passenger ' s
door t weet er
6 ( - ) WHT
(cont' d)
23~7 1
Audi o S y s t em
Sympt om Troubleshooting (cont' d)
STEREO AMPLIF IER CONNECTOR B (18P)
n ,n
1
10
3 4
/
6 7
/
/
12 13
A
15 16
9
SPE AK E R CRO SSO VE R NE T WO RK
CO NTRO L U NI T CO NNE CTO R (SP)
2 3)
A
5 6 7 8
bet ween t he st er eo ampl i f i er and t he door speaker
c r ossover net work cont rol uni t , or t he door speaker
c r ossover net work cont rol uni t and t he s peak er (s ). u
NO- Go to st ep 14.
14. Measur e t he r esi st ance bet ween each pai r of speaker
t er mi nal s at st er eo ampl i f i er connect or A (18P) and
t he speaker c r ossover net work cont rol uni t accor di ng
to t he t abl e.
Speaker Dr i ver ' s
door
speaker
c r ossover
net wor k
. cont r ol
uni t
c onnec t or
Wi r e
col or
Resistance
Dr i ver ' s door
speaker
7 L TGRN About 4
0
Dr i ver ' s door
speaker
8 P NK
About 4
0
Dr i ver ' s door
t weet er
5 RED About
3.3 0
Dr i ver ' s door
t weet er
6 GRN
About
3.3 0
Speaker F ront
passenger' s
door
speaker
crossover
network
control unit
connector
Wi r e
col or
Resistance
Front
passenger ' s
door speaker
7 GRY About 4
0
Front
passenger ' s
door speaker 8 RED
About 4
0
Front
passen-
ger r ' s door
t weet er
5 BRN About
.. 3.3 n
Front
passen-
ger r ' s door
t weet er
6 WHT
About
.. 3.3 n
Speaker St er eo
ampl i f i er
c onnec t or
Wi r e
col or
Resistance
Ri ght rear
speaker
B12 BL U About 4
0
Ri ght rear
speaker
B3 ORN
About 4
0
Subwoof er B10 GRY /RED About 2
0
B1 L TB L U
About 2
0
Left rear
speaker
B13 YE L About 4
0
Left rear
speaker
B4 BRN
About 4
0
2372
10
3 4
A
6 7
/
/
12 13
A
15 16
18
S PEAK ER CROS S OVE R NETWORK
CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR (8P)
2 3
1
A
5 6 7 8
is the resistance OK?
NO-Repai r an open or a shor t i n t he wi r e bet ween t he
st er eo ampl i f i er and t he s peak er . H
15. Di sconnect audi o uni t connect or A (24P), st er eo
ampl i f i er connect or A (24P), and audi o uni t connect or
D (8P).
NOTE: Ej ect all t he CDs bef ore di sconnect i ng t he
audi o uni t and CD changer to pr event damagi ng t he
CD pl ayer ' s l oad mec hani sm.
16. Chec k f or cont i nui t y bet ween audi o uni t c onnec t or A
(24P), connect or D (8P) and st er eo ampl i f i er connect or
A (24P) accor di ng to t he t abl e.
Audi o uni t St er eo Wi r e c ol or
c onnec t or ampl i f i er
c onnec t or
A6 A7 RED
A7 A19 GRN
A8 A18 GRY
A9 A15 GRY
A10 A4 RED
A11 A16 GRN
A18 A5 RED
A19 A17 GRN
A20 A6 GRY
A21 A3 GRY
A22 A2 RED
A23 A14 GRN
D6 A8 RED
D7 A9 BLK
D8 A20 GRN
J] . zJL
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
14 / 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
12
24
AUDIO UNIT CONNECTOR D ( SP )
/ / V
5 6 7 8
STEREO AMPLIF IER CONNECTOR A (24P)
J L _a
1 2 3 5 6 7 8 9
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 / 22 23 24
11 12
(cont'd)
23-73
Audi o S f st em
S f mpt om Troubl eshoot i ng (cont' d)
NO-Repai r a n open i n t he appl i cabl e wi r e(s) bet ween
t he audi o uni t a n d st er eo ampl i f i er (r epl ace t he
af f ect ed shi el ded h ar n e s s ) . !
17. Chec k f or cont i nui t y bet ween st er eo ampl i f i er
connect or A (24P) and body gr ound accor di ng t o t he
t abl e.
St er eo ampl i f i er c onnec t or Wi r e col or
A2 RED
A4 RED
A5 RED
A7 RED
A8 RED
A ' L 4 GRN
A16 GRN
A17 GRN
A19 GRN
A20 GRN
STEREO AMHJ F IfcR CONNECTOR A (24P)
n r
2 3 4 5 6 7 8
9 /
11
C
M

13l l 4l l 5l l 6[ l 7l l 8l l 9l 20l yl 22l 23l 24
bet ween t he audi o uni t and st er eo ampl i f i er (r epl ace
t he af f ect ed shi el ded h ar n e s s ) . !
NO- Go to st ep 18.
18. Rec onnec t st er eo ampl i f i er c onnec t or A (24P) and B
(18P).
19. Measur e t he vol t age bet ween st er eo ampl i f i er
c onnec t or B (18P) t er mi nal No. 18 and body gr ound.
NO-Repai r an open in t he wi r e bet ween t he No. 15 (20
A) f use in t he passenger ' s under -dash f use/r el ay box
and st er eo ampl i f i er connect or B (18P) t er mi nal
No. 18 .
c onnec t or A (24P) t er mi nal No. 24 and body gr ound.
STEREO AMPLIF IER CONNECTOR A (24P)
fl fl
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
/
11 12
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
/
22 23 24
SWD + B (WHT)
NO-Repai r an open i n t he wi r e bet ween st er eo
ampl i f i er connect or A (24P) t er mi nal No. 24 and audi o
uni t connect or A (24P) t er mi nal No. 17.11
23-74
connect or A (24P) t er mi nal No. 1 and body gr ound,
and bet ween st er eo ampl i f i er connect or B (18P)
GND (BRN) r j _ r
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 11 12
S TE RE O AMPLIFIER CONNECTOR B (18P)
GND (BLIC)J -
1
10
/
3 4
/
6 7
/
/
12 13
/
15 16
/
18
bet ween st er eo ampl i f i er connect or A (24P) t er mi nal
No. 1, connect or B (18P) t er mi nal No. 9 and body
gr ound (G401, G402) (see page 22-40).H
23. Subst i t ut e a known-good door speaker c r ossover
net work cont rol uni t (see page 23-121), and r echeck.
Is t he sympt om st ill present ?
YES-Subst i t ut e a known-good audi o uni t wi t h
navi gat i on (see page 23-114), wi t hout navi gat i on (see
page 23-115), and r echeck. If t he sympt om/ i ndi cat i on
goes away, r epl ace t he ori gi nal audi o uni t. If t he
sympt oms sti ll pr esent , subst i t ut e a known-good
st er eo ampl i f i er (see page 23-119), and r echeck. If t he
st er eo ampl i f i er .H
NO-Repl ac e t he ori gi nal door speaker c r ossover
net work cont rol unit (see page 23- 121) .
No Sound i s hear d f rom t he speaker (s)
(di spl ay i s nor mal ) (wi t hout pr emi um audi o)
NOTE:
22-90).
Chec k t he c onnec t or s for poor c onnec t i ons or l oose
t er mi nal s.
Set t he f ader and bal anc e posi t i ons to t he cent er .
Bef ore doi ng sympt om t r oubl eshoot i ng, do t he audi o
uni t power swi t c h wi l l not t urn on t r oubl eshoot i ng
(see page 23-69).
2. Tur n on t he audi o uni t and make sur e t he vol ume
button i s not set to t he MIN l evel .
Is it at t he MIN level?
YE S - Rai s e t he vol ume l evel , and r echeck t he
f unc t i o n. !
NO- Go to st ep 3.
3. Go to t he speaker c hec k mode in t he audi o syst em
Sel f -di agnost i c Funct i on (see page 23-58).
Do all speakers produce a t one?
YES-l nt er mi t t ent f ai l ur e; t he syst em i s OK at t hi s t i me.
Check f or poor c onnec t i ons at t he audi o uni t and
speaker s.
NO- Go to st ep 4.
5. Check t he speaker (s) wi t h no sound f or any damage.
Is t here any damage?
YES-Subst i t ut e t he speaker (see page 23-122) and
r ec hec k . B
NO- Go to st ep 6.
6. Check t he speaker 2P connect or f or a l oose or poor
connect i on.
Reconnect t he speaker connect or, and recheck t he
sympt om; is t he condit ion st ill present ?
NO-l nt er mi t t ent f ai l ure. Oper at i on i s no r mal .
(cont ' d)
23-75
Audi o S f st em
Symptom Troubl eshoot i ng (cont' d)
7. Test t he speaker (s) (see page 23-122).
Is the speaker OK ?
NO- Repl ac e t he speaker (s) (see page 23- 122) . !
8. Reconnect t he speaker connect or (s).
3. Di sconnect audi o uni t connect or A (24P).
NOTE; Ej ect all t he CDs bef ore r emovi ng t he' audi o
uni t and CD c hanger to pr event damagi ng t he CD
pl ayer ' s l oad mec hani sm.
10. Chec k f or cont i nui t y bet ween audi o uni t connect or A
(24P) and body gr ound accor di ng to t he t abl e.
Audi o uni t c onnec t or Wi r e col or
A7 BL U
A10 BRN
A11 YE L
A18 RED
A19 GRY
A22 PNK
A23 L TGRN
13
/
3 4 5 6 7 10 11
14 15 16 18 19
/ /
22 23
12
24
bet ween t he audi o uni t and t he s peak er ( s ) . !
NO- Go to st ep 11.
11. Di sconnect t he t weet er 2P c onnec t or s.
12. Measur e t he r esi st anc e bet ween eac h pai r of speaker
t er mi nal s at audi o uni t connect or A (24P) accor di ng to
t he t abl e. =
Speaker Audi o uni t
c onnec t or
Wi r e
col or
Resi st ance
Dr i ver ' s door
speaker
A23 L TGRN About 4
0
Dr i ver ' s door
speaker
A22 PNK
About 4
0
Front
passenger ' s
door speaker
A19 GRY About 4
0
Front
passenger ' s
door speaker A18 RED
About 4
0
Left r ear
speaker
A11 YE L About 4
0
Left r ear
speaker
A10 BRN
About 4
0
Ri ght r ear
speaker
A7 BL U About 4
0
Ri ght r ear
speaker
A6 ORN
About 4
0
13
fl - 4
3 4 5 6 7
14 15 16 / 18 19
10 11
22 23
12
24
Is the resistance OK ?
NO- Repai r an open or a shor t i n t he wi r e bet ween t he
audi o uni t and t he s peak er ( s ) . !
13. Di sconnect t he door speaker 2P connect or s.
14. Connec t audi o uni t connect or A (24P) t er mi nal s wi t h a
j umper wi r e as s hown.
6
14 15 16 / 18 19
10 11
22 23
12
24
FR S P - FR S P + F LS P +
(RED) I I (GRY) j j (LT GRN)
J UMPER WI RE ( PNK ) ~ ^ } R |
E R
23*76
15. Chec k f or cont i nui t y bet ween t he t weet er 2P
connect or accor di ng t o t he t abl e.
Speaker Ter mi nal Wi r e
col or
Dr i ver ' s door t weet er 1 L TGRN
2 PNK
door
t weet er
1 GRY/RED Fr ont passenger ' s
door
t weet er 2 RED
DRI VER' S DOOR TWEETER 2P CONNECTOR
FRONT PASSENGERES DOOR
TWEETER 2P CONNECTOR
1 2
YES - Repl ac e t he audi o uni t (see page 23-115).H
NO-Repai r an open i n t he wi r e bet ween t he audi o uni t
and t he t weet er .
Auxi l i al ry i nput sound i s l ow or cannot be
hear d
NOTE:
e Chec k t he vehi c l e battery condi t i on f i rst (see page
22-90).
t er mi nal s.
Us e auxi l i ar y st er eo c abl es wi t h 3.5 mm ends onl y.
Auxi l i ar y ac c essor i es may be pl ayed on t he audi o uni t
usi ng t he auxi l i ar y i nput . -
2. Tur n t he audi o uni t and c onnec t an auxi l i ary
ac c essor y to t he auxi l i ar y i nput j ack.
3. Chec k t he vol ume oper at i on.
Is t he sound normal?
YES-Oper at i on i s nor mal at t hi s time.Z.
NO- Go to st ep 4.
4. Make sur e auxi l i ar y ac c essor y vol ume i s set t o hi gh.
Is t he volume set t o high?
NO-Rai s e t he auxi l i ar y ac c essor y vol ume to hi gh.
Make sur e t he audi o uni t vol ume i s t ur ned down
bef ore r et est i ng.H
5. Subst i t ut e a known-good auxi l i ar y audi o ac c essor y
and/or auxi l i ar y st er eo c abl e, and r echeck.
Does t he auxiliary audio accessory operat e properly?
YES-Or i gi nal auxi l i ar y audi o ac c essor y or auxi l i ar y
st er eo cabl e i s f aul t y .
NO- Go to st ep 6.
7. Remove t he auxi l i ary j ack assembl y (see page 23-127)
and check t hat t he auxi l i ary j ack assembl y i s properl y
c onnec t ed.
Is t he auxiliary jack assembly connect ed properly?
Y E S -
Except 1 CD t ype: go to st ep 8.
1 CD t ype: go to st ep 13.
NO-Rec onnec t t he connect or , and r echeck t he
f unc t i o n.
(cont ' d)
23-77
Audi o S f st em
Sympt om Troubl eshoot i ng (cont'd)
8. Di sconnect t he auxi l i ar y j ack as s embl y 5P connect or .
9. Di sconnect audi o uni t connect or B (20P).
10. Chec k f or cont i nui t y bet ween body gr ound and audi o
uni t connect or B (20P) accor di ng to t he t abl e.
Audi o uni t c onnec t or Wi r e col or
B3 BLK
B13 RED
B14 WHT
B15 GRY
PI n - - r n
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
1111 / l 4 Q l i / i h j d i l i T h o l i Q l o n
YES - Th er e i s a shor t to body gr ound in t he wi r e(s)
bet ween t he audi o uni t and t he auxi l i ar y j ack
assembl y. Repl ace t he affected shi el ded h ar n e s s . !
NO- Go to st ep 11.
11. Chec k for cont i nui t y bet ween audi o uni t connect or B
(20P) accor di ng to t he t abl e.
B3(BL K ) B4 (GRY), B13 (RED),
B14(WHT)
B4 (GRY) B13 (RED), 814 (WHT)
B13 (RED) 314 (WHT)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
11
/
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
12. Chec k for cont i nui t y bet ween audi o uni t connect or B
(20P) and t he auxi l i ar y j ack assembl y 5P connect or
accor di ng to t he t abl e.
Audi o uni t Auxi l i ar y j ac k Wi r e col or
c onnec t or assembl y
c onnec t or
B3 3 BLK
B5 2 YE L
B13 4 RED
B14 5 W H T
B15 1 GRY
1 I 2 I3 4 I 5 I 6 I 7 8 I 9 I l 0 l
11 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
AUXI L I ARY J A CK A S S E MB L Y 5P CONNECTOR
s
1 2 3 4 5
YES-Subs t i t ut e a known-good auxi l i ar y j ack
assembl y (see page 23-127), and r echeck. If t he
auxi l i ar y j ack assembl y. If t he sympt om/i ndi cat i on i s
sti ll pr esent , r epl ace t he audi o uni t wi t h navi gat i on
(see page 23-114), wi t hout navi gat i on (see page
23-115).B
NO-Ther e i s an open in t he wi r e(s) bet ween t he audi o
uni t and t he auxi l i ar y j ack assembl y. Repl ace t he
af f ect ed shi el ded h ar n es s .
YES - Th er e i s a shor t i n t he wi r e(s) bet ween t he audi o
af f ect ed shi el ded h ar n es s .
NO- Go to st ep 12.
13. Di sconnect t he auxi l i ar y j ack assembl y 5P connect or .
14. Di sconnect audi o uni t connect or B (12P).
uni t connect or B (12P) accor di ng to t he t abl e.
Audi uni t c onnec t or Wi r e col or
B1 BLK
B4 GRY
B7 RED
B8 WHT
nu
1
2 3 4 5 6
7 8
/
11 12
YE S - Th e re i s a shor t t o body gr ound i n t he wi r e(s)
bet ween t he audi o uni t and t he auxi l i ar y j ack
assembl y. Repl ace t he af f ect ed shi el ded h ar n e s s . !
NO- Go to st ep 16.
16. Check f or cont i nui t y bet ween audi o uni t connect or B
(12P) accor di ng to t he t abl e.
B1(BL K ) Bz (GRY), B7 (RED),
B8 (WHT)
B2 (GRY) B7 (RED), B8 (WHT)
B7 (RED) B8 (WHT)
n- f n
1 2 3 4 5 6
7 8
/ /
11 12
YE S - Th e re i s a shor t i n t he wi r e(s) bet ween t he audi o
af f ect ed shi el ded h ar n e s s . !
17. Check f or cont i nui t y bet ween audi o uni t connect or B
(12P) and auxi l i ar y j ack assembl y 5P c onnec t or
Audi o uni t Auxi l i ar y j ac k Wi r e col or
c onnec t or as s embl y
c onnec t or
B1 3 BLK
B3 2 YE L
B4 GRY
B7 RED
B8 5 WHT
AUDI O UNIT CONNECTOR B (12P)
n h i l
1 2 3 4 5 6
7 8
/ /
11 12
AUXI L I ARY J A CK A S S E MB L Y SP CONNECTOR
1 2 3 4 5
YES-Subs t i t ut e a known-good auxi l i ary j ack
assembl y (see page 23-127), and r echeck. If t he
auxi l i ary j ack assembl y. If t he sympt om/i ndi cat i on i s
sti ll pr esent , r epl ace t he audi o uni t wi t h navi gat i on
(see page 23-114), wi t hout navi gat i on (see page
23- 115) . !
NO-Ther e i s an open in t he wi r e(s) bet ween t he audi o
uni t and t he auxi l i ary j ack assembl y. Repl ace t he
affected shi el ded h ar n e s s . !
2 2 - 7 9
Audi o S f st em
Audi o s f st em sound i s weak or di st or t ed
(di spl ay i s nor mal )
NOTE;
22-90).
Chec k t he c onnec t or s f or poor c onnec t i ons or l oose
t er mi nal s.
2. Tur n on t he audi o uni t , and c hec k f or sound In eac h
mode (AM, FM, XM, and CD).
Is t here sound from t he speakers, and Is t he sound
qualit y normal in each mode?
YES-l nt er mi t t ent f ai l ur e. The syst em i s OK at t hi s
t i me. Check f or l oose c onnec t i ons at t he audi o uni t ,
t he ampl i f i er , and eac h s p eak er . !
NO-Speak er s all wor k, sound qual i t y i s p o o r . !
If sound qual i t y i s poor onl y wi t h t he XM r adi o, or
t he XM radi o does not f unct i on, go to Poor or no
sound wi t h XM radi o (see page 23-109).
If t he sound qual i t y i s poor onl y wi t h AM or FM, go
to Poor AM or FM radi o recept i on or i nt erf erence
(see page 23-66).
If t he sound i s poor i n all modes, go to Sound
Qual i t y Di agnosi s (see page 23-110).
Radi o pr eset memor y i s l ost
NOTE: If onl y XM st at i ons ar e l ost , go t o XM radi o pr eset
memor y i s l ost (see page 23-108).
2. Tur n on t he audi o uni t and set eac h of t he radi o
st at i on pr eset but t ons.
Do each of t he but t ons set properly?
NO-Repl ac e t he audi o u n i t !
3. Tur n t he i gni t i on swi t c h to L OCK (0) f or 1 mi nut e, t hen
w
n it back to ON (II).
4. Test t he pr eset but t ons f or pr oper r ecal l oper at i on.
Do t he preset but t ons recall t he set radio st at ions?
YE S - S y s t em i s nor mal at t hi s t i me. Chec k
c onnec t i ons at t he audi o u n i t !
NO-Subst i t ut e a known-good audi o uni t wi t h
page 23-115), and r echeck. If t he sympt om/i ndi cat i on
goes away, r epl ace t he ori gi nal audi o u n i t . !
23-80
Vol ume does not change
NOTE:
Check t he vehi c l e battery condi t i on fi rst (see page
22-90).
Check t he connect or s f or poor connect i ons or l oose
t er mi nal s.
Set t he f ader and t he bal ance posi t i ons to t he cent er.
2. Tur n on t he audi o uni t , and check for sound in each
mode (AM, FM, XM, and CD).
Is t he sound normal?
NO- Go to Sound Qual i t y Di agnosi s (see page 23-110)
or No sound i s hear d f rom t he speaker (s) wi t h
pr emi um audi o syst em (see page 23-70), wi t hout
pr emi um audi o syst em (see page 23- 75) .
3. Operat e t he vol ume knob to see if t he vol ume
c hanges.
Does t he volume change?
YES-Oper at i on i s n o r mal . M
goes away, r epl ace t he ori gi nal audi o uni t .H
Vol ume does not i ncr ease w i t h speed
NOTE:
Check t he vehi c l e battery condi t i on f i rst (see page
. 22-90).
Check t he c onnec t or s f or poor c onnec t i ons or l oose
t er mi nal s.
1. Test -dr i ve t he vehi c l e at hi ghway s peeds , and
moni t or if t he vol ume i nc r eases.
Does t he volume increase?
t i me. H
NO- Go to st ep 2.
2. Veri f y S VC mode set t i ng in audi o uni t sound
adj ust ment set -up.
Is t he SVC set t o off?
YES - Ch ang e set t i ng to MID, and r et est .H
NO- Go to st ep 3.
3. Do t he Sel f -di agnost i c Funct i on for t he vehi cl e speed
pul se i ndi cat i on (see page 23-54).
Does self-diagnost ic funct ion indicat e a VSP signal?
YES-Subs t i t ut e a known-good audi o uni t wi t h
page 23-115), and ret est . If the sympt om/i ndi cat i on
NO
1 CD t ype: Go to st ep 4.
Exc ept 1 CD t ype: Check for B-CAN DTCs
(communi cat i on BUS Li ne Er r or ) wi t h t he HDS and
go to t he i ndi cat ed DTCs t r oubl eshoot i ng. If no
B-CAN DTCs or communi cat i on bus li ne er r or s ar e
f ound, subst i t ut e a known-good audi o uni t wi t h
navi gat i on (see page 23-114), wi t hout navi gat i on
(see page 23-115), and recheck. If t he sympt om
goes away, r epl ace t he ori gi nal audi o uni t .I]
23-114), wi t hout navi gat i on (see page 23-115), and
di sconnect audi o uni t connect or A (24P).
NOTE: Ej ect all t he CDs before r emovi ng t he audi o
uni t and CD c hanger to prevent damagi ng t he CD
pl ayer ' s load mec hani sm.
(cont' d)
23-81
Audi o S f st em
. Test -dr i ve t he vehi c l e and have an assi st ant measur e
t he vol t age at audi o uni t connect or A (24P) t er mi nal
No. 15.
NOTE: S o me vol t met er s may s how an aver age of
2.5 V, and ot her s may s how a const ant vol t age,
dependi ng on t he met er ' s measur ement s peed.
AUDI O UNIT CONNECTOR A (24P)
n i i
3 4 5 6 7 10 11
13 I l l 4 l l ^ 6 | X h ^1 9 M / l 2 2 | 2 3 24
VSP (BLU)
12
9
Is t here a 05 Vpulse?
goes away, r epl ace t he ori gi nal audi o uni t .B
NO-Repai r opens or shor t s i n t he wi r e bet ween t he
audi o uni t c onnec t or A (24P) t er mi nal No. 15 and t he
ECM/ PCM c onnec t or A (49P) t er mi nal No. 30. If no
opens ar e f ound, updat e t he ECM/ PCM (see page
11-203), if it does not have t he l at est sof t war e or
subst i t ut e a known-good ECM/ PCM (see page
11-204).B
Vol ume i s t oo hi gh or t oo l ow when dri vi ng at
f r eeway speeds
NOTE:
22-90).
t er mi nal s.
1. Test -dr i ve t he vehi c l e at hi ghway s peeds , and
moni t or vol ume l evel .
Is t he volume level t oo high, or t oo low?
t i me.B
2. Change S VC mode set t i ng i n sound adj ust ment
set -up to Mi d, and ret est .
Is t he volume level st ill t oo high or t oo low?
goes away, r epl ace t he ori gi nal audi o uni t . B
NO-l mpr oper S VC set t i ng f or c ust omer ' s sound
t ast e.
23-82
Radi o t uner does not change st at i ons
NOTE:
22- 90).
Check the connect or s f or poor connect i ons or l oose
t er mi nal s.
2. Tur n on t he audi o uni t , and note t he audi o
i nf ormat i on on t he di spl ay panel .
Does t he audio informat ion display properly?
NO- Go to Audi o syst em i nf ormat i on does not di spl ay
on t he audi o-HVAC (sub) di spl ay uni t (see page
23- 83).H
3. Operat e t he t uni ng knob to see if t he radi o st at i on
c hanges.
Does t he radio st at ion change?
YES-l nt er mi t t ent f ai l ur e, t he t uni ng knob i s OK at t hi s
t i me.H
NO- Go to st ep 4.
4. Go to t he audi o but t on, knob, and remot e swi t c h
det ect i on mode in t he audi o syst em Sel f -di agnost i c
Is t he rot at ing port ion of t he select or knob (t une (sound)
knob ICD) det ect ed when operat ed in bot h direct ions?
YES-Subst i t ut e a known-good audi o uni t wi t h
NO-Subst i t ut e a known-good audi o swi t ch panel , and
recheck. If t he sympt om/i ndi cat i on goes away,
repl ace t he ori gi nal audi o swi t ch panel (see page
23-117). If t he syst em i s sti ll pr esent , subst i t ut e a
known-good audi o uni t wi t h navi gat i on (see page
23-114), wi t hout navi gat i on (see page 23-115) and
r epl ace t he ori gi nal audi o uni t .H
Audi o syst em i nf ormat i on does not di spl ay
on t he audi o-HVAC (sub) di spl ay uni t
NOTE:
22- 90).
Chec k t he connect or s for poor c onnec t i ons or l oose
t er mi nal s.
1. Remove t he audi o-HVAC di spl ay uni t (see page
23- 119).
2. Chec k t he connect i ons at t he audi o-HVAC (sub)
di spl ay uni t 12P connect or and audi o uni t connect or B
(20P).
Are t he connect ors and t erminals connect ed properly?
NO-Repai r t he connect i on, and r ec h ec k . ^
4. Measur e t he vol t age bet ween audi o-HVAC (sub)
di spl ay uni t 12P connect or t er mi nal No. 6 and body
gr ound.
AUDIO-HVAC (SUB) DI SPL AY UNIT 12P CONNECTOR
7 8 9 1 0 / 12
+ B(WHT)
NO-Repai r an open in t he wi r e bet ween t he No. 15 (10
A) f use in t he under -hood f use/r el ay box and
audi o-HVAC (sub) di spl ay uni t 12P connect or t er mi nal
No. 6.H
(cont' d)
23-83
Audi o S f st em
6. Measur e t he vol t age bet ween t he audi o-HVAC (sub)
di spl ay uni t 12P c onnec t or t er mi nal No. i and body
gr ound.
AUDI O-HVAC (SUB) DISPLAY UNIT 12P CONNECTOR
n
It- -n
n
1 2
/
4 5 6
7 8 9 10
/
12
GND (BLK)
NO-Repai r an open or hi gh r esi st ance i n t he wi r e
bet ween audi o-HVAC (sub) di spl ay 12P c onnec t or
t er mi nal No. 9 and body gr ound (G402) (see page
22-40).B
7. Di sconnect audi o uni t c onnec t or B (20P) and t he
audi o-HVAC (sub) di spl ay uni t 12P connect or .
8. Chec k f or cont i nui t y bet ween audi o uni t connect or B
(20P) (except 1 CD t ype) or B (12P) (1 CD t ype) and t he
audi o-HVAC (sub) di spl ay uni t 12P connect or
Audi o uni t Audi o-HVAC Wi r e col or
c onnec t or (sub) di spl ay
uni t c onnec t or
B6 2 RED
B7*
1
B12*
2
1 GRN
B 17*
1
B I T
2
4 BL U
*1: Except 1 CD t ype
*2: 1 CD t ype
Exc ept 1CD t ype
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8
9 10
11
/
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
1 CD t ype
n
1-
r n
1 2 3 4 5 6
7 8
/ /
11 12
AUDI O-HVAC (SUB) DISPLAY UNIT 12P CONNECTOR
n -r n
1 2
/
4 5 6
7 8 9 10
/
12
NO-Repai r an open i n t he wi r e(s) bet ween t he audi o
uni t and t he audi o-HVAC (sub) di spl ay uni t (r epl ace
t he af f ect ed shi el ded h ar n es s ) .
23-84
9. Check f or cont i nui t y bet ween t he t er mi nal s of t he
audi o-HVAC (sub) di spl ay uni t 12P connect or and
body gr ound accor di ng to t he t abl e.
Audi o-HVAC (sub) di spl ay
uni t c onnec t or
Wi r e col or
1 GRN
2 RED
4 BL U
AUDIO-HVAC (SUB) DISPLAY UNIT 12P CONNECTOR
"1
1 2
/
4 5 6
7 8 9 10
/
12
bet ween t he audi o uni t and t he audi o-HVAC (sub)
di spl ay uni t (repl ace t he affected shi el ded har ness).!
10. Check f or cont i nui t y bet ween t he t er mi nal s of audi o
uni t c onnec t or B (20P) (except 1 CD t ype) or B (12P) (1
CD t ype) accor di ng to t he t abl e.
B16*
1
B5*
2
(BLK) B 7
* i B12*
2
(GRN), B 6 (RED)
*1: Exc ept 1 CD t ype
*2: 1 CD t ype
Except 1 CD type
t I n
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
1 1 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
1 CD type
t i
1 2 3
4
5
/ 8
A
/
1i
1|12
YES - Repai r a shor t i n t he wi r e(s) bet ween t he audi o
uni t and t he audi o-HVAC (sub) di spl ay uni t (repl ace
t he af f ect ed shi el ded h ar n es s ) .
NO-Subst i t ut e a known-good audi o-HVAC (sub)
di spl ay uni t (see page 23-119), and r echeck. If the
audi o-HVAC (sub) di spl ay uni t. If t he sympt om i s still
pr esent , subst i t ut e a known-good audi o uni t wi th
page 23-115), and r echeck. if the sympt om/i ndi cat i on
goes away, r epl ace t he ori gi nal audi o uni t . 8
Audi o S f st em
Sec ur i t y i ndi cat or does not wor k properl y
NOTE:
The syst em oper at es wi t hout t he 5-di gi t secur i t y
(anti -theft) code.
Bef ore t r oubl eshoot i ng, make sur e you have t he
anti -theft code..
1. Tur n off t he audi o syst em.
Is the security indicator (LED) on (blink)?
YE S - Go to St ep 2.
goes away, r epl ace t he ori gi nal audi o uni t . If t he
sympt om i s sti ll pr esent , subst i t ut e a known-good
audi o swi t ch panel (see page 23-117), and r echeck. if
t he sympt om/i ndi cat i on goes away, r epl ace t he
or i gi nal audi o swi t c h p an el .
2. Tur n on t he audi o syst em.
Is the security indicator (LED) out?
YE S - Th e audi o uni t i s OK at t hi s t i me. Chec k f or l oose
or poor c onnec t i ons at t he audi o uni t and t he audi o
p an e l .
page 23-115), and r echeck. If t he sympt om/i ndi c at ed
audi o swi t ch panel (see page 23-117), and r echeck. If
t he sympt om/i ndi c at ed goes away, r epl ace t he
ori gi nal audi o swi t c h p an e l .
Audi o uni t but t on i l l umi nat i on does not wor k
(1 CD t ype) '
NOTE:
22-90).
Chec k t he connect or s f or poor connect i ons or l oose
t er mi nal s.
2. Tur n t he combi nat i on li ghti ng swi t ch to t he parki ng
li ght posi t i on.
3. Chec k t he i l l umi nat i on of t he audi o uni t but t ons.
Are the buttons illuminated?
YES-l nt er mi t t ent pr obl em; t he audi o uni t i s OK at t hi s
u . Check f or l oose or poor connect i ons at audi o
uni t connect or A (24P).H
NO- Go to st ep 4.
4. Check t he i l l umi nat i on of sever al ot her but t ons not
rel at ed to t he audi o syst em.
NO-Tr oubl eshoot t he i nteri or l i ght s. St art by checki ng
t he No. 6 (7.5 A) f use in t he passenger ' s under -dash
f use/r el ay box. If t he f use i s OK, check for an open in
t he wi r e bet ween t he passenger ' s under -dash
f use/r el ay box and audi o unit
6. Di sconnect audi o uni t connect or A (24P).
NOTE: Ej ect all t he CDs bef ore r emovi ng t he audi o
uni t and CD c hanger to prevent damagi ng t he CD
pl ayer ' s l oad mec hani sm.
7. Di sconnect t he gauge cont rol modul e 32P connect or
(see page 22-351).
23-86
8. Check f or cont i nui t y bet ween audi o uni t connect or A
(24P) t er mi nal No. 1 and gauge cont rol modul e 32P
I L L - BUL B AUDIO UNIT CONNECTOR A (24P)
(RED) Wire side of female terminals
13
T- - i l
3 4 5 6 7
/ /
10 11
14 15 16 18 19 22 23
12
24
I L L - BUL B
(RED)
n n
2
/ / /
6
/
8 | 9 10
/
13
/
16
17| l8 | l 9l X]/^22l23|24l25|26[27l28[29[30|/l32
NO-Repai r an open i n t he wi r e bet ween t he gauge
cont rol modul e and t he audi o uni t .H
10. Wi t h t he headl i ght swi t c h sti ll on, measur e t he
vol t age bet ween audi o uni t connect or A (24P)
13
14 15 16 18 19
10 11
22 23 24
12
I LL+ (GRY )
YES - Ch ec k t he connect i ons at t he audi o uni t
connect or A (24P). If all connect i ons ar e OK , subst i t ut e
a known-good audi o uni t wi t h navi gat i on (see page
23-114), wi t hout navi gat i on (see page 23-115), and
r epl ace the or i gi nal audi o uni t. If t he sympt om i s sti ll
pr esent , subst i t ut e a known-good audi o swi t ch panel
(see page 23-117), and r echeck. If t he
audi o swi t ch p an e l .
passenger ' s under -dash f use/r el ay box and t he audi o
uni t .H
23-87
Audi o S f st em
Sympt om Troybl eshoot i ng (cont' d)
Audi o uni t but t on i l l umi nat i on does not wor k
(Except 1 CD t ype!
NOTE;
22-90).
e Check t he connect or s f or poor connect i ons or l oose
t er mi nal s.
2. Tur n t he combi nat i on li ghti ng swi t ch to t he parki ng
li ght posi t i on.
3. Chec k t he i l l umi nat i on of t he audi o uni t but t ons.
YES-l nt er mi t t ent pr obl em; t he audi o uni t i s OK at t hi s
t i me. u
NO- Go to st ep 4.
4. Check t he i l l umi nat i on of sever al ot her but t ons not
rel at ed to t he audi o syst em.
YE S - Ch ec k f or B-CAN DTCs (communi cat i on BUS
Li ne Er r or ) wi t h t he HDS and go to t he i ndi cat ed DTS ' s
t r oubl eshoot i ng. If no DTCs or communi cat i on bus
li ne er r or s ar e f ound, subst i t ut e a known-good audi o
uni t wi t h navi gat i on (see page 23-114), wi t hout
navi gat i on (see page 23-115), and r echeck. If t he
audi o uni t .H
NO-Tr oubl eshoot t he i nt eri or l i ght s. St ar t by checki ng
t he No. 6 (7.5 A) f use in t he passenger ' s under -dash
f use/r el ay box. If t he f use i s OK, c hec k f or an open i n
t he wi r e bet ween t he passenger ' s under -dash
f use/r el ay box and t he audi o uni t .H
Audi o r emot e swi t c h does not wor k properl y
NOTE:
22-90).
e Chec k t he connect or s f or poor connect i ons or l oose
t er mi nal s.
2. Tur n on t he audi o uni t and check t he audi o uni t
operat i on (vol ume up, vol ume down, CH (UP), CH
(DOWN), MODE).
Is the audio unit operation OK ?
YES-Oper at i on i s n o r mal .
NO- Go to st ep 3.
3. Go to t he audi o but t on, knob, and remot e swi t ch
det ect i on mode in t he audi o syst em Sel f -di agnost i c
Are the remote switch functions detected and
functioning properly?
page 23-115), and check. If t he sympt om/i ndi cat i on
NO- Go to st ep 5.
5. Test t he audi o remot e swi t c h (see page 23-125).
Is the audio remote switch OK ?
NO-Repl ac e t he audi o r emot e swi t ch (see page
17-7) . B
7. Di sc onnec t audi o uni t connect or A (24P).
NOTE: Ej ect all t he CDs bef ore di sconnect i ng t he
audi o uni t and CD c hanger to prevent damagi ng t he
CD pl ayer ' s l oad mec hani sm.
23-8
8. Reconnect t he audi o remot e swi t c h, and measur e t he
r esi st ance bet ween t he audi o uni t connect or A (24P)
t er mi nal s No. 5 and No. 16 as speci f i ed in t he t abl e.
n
REMOTE GND (BRN)
1
n
II
12
24
1
/ 3 4 5 6 7 / / 10 11 J
12
24
1
1415 ie
> / 18 19 7 / 2 2 23
12
24
REMOTE (PNK)
AUDIO REMOTE SWI TCH TABL E
Button held
down
VOL
DOWN
VOL UP
C H H
CH(+) MODE (No button
pressed)
Resistance about
100 0
about
357 0
about
775 Q
about
1.7 kQ
about
3.7 kQ
about
10 kQ
Is the resistance OK ?
NO-Repai r a shor t or hi gh r esi st ance i n t he ci rcui t
bet ween t he audi o uni t and t he audi o remot e swi t c h.
If t he wi r es ar e OK, r epl ace t he cabl e reel (see page
24-225).H
uni t connect or A (24P) t er mi nal s No. 5 and No. 16
i ndi vi dual l y.
REMOTE GJMD (BRN)
13
3 4 5 6 7
14 15 1 6 / 1 8 19
10 11
22 23
12
24
REMOTE (PNK)
YES - Repai r a shor t to body gr ound in t he ci rcui t
bet ween t he audi o uni t and t he audi o remot e swi t c h.
If t he wi r es are OK , r epl ace t he c abl e reel (see page
24-225).H
o Wi t hout navi gat i on (see page 23-115)
23-89
Audi o S f st em
Audi o di sc does not l oad
NOTE:
22-90).
t er mi nal s.
Di sc l abel s shoul d not be used in t he audi o uni t. They
may j am and damage t he pl ayer mec hani s m.
Make sur e t he audi o di sc i s compat i bl e wi t h t he
syst em (see t he owner ' s manual f or mor e
i nf or mat i on).
2. Tur n on t he audi o uni t and i nsert a known-good di sc
t o s ee if t he sympt om c an be dupl i cat ed.
Does the disc load?
YES-Oper at i on i s nor mal . If t he di sc l oads nor mal l y,
but wi l l not pl ay, go to Audi o di sc does not pl ay (see
page 23-92).H
NO- Go to st ep 3.
3. Insert anot her di sc .
Does t he disc load?
YE S - Th e ori gi nal di sc i s f aul t y.H
NO-
Wi t h navi gat i on: Subst i t ut e a known-good audi o
di sc c hanger (see page 23-118), and r echeck. If t he
audi o di sc c hanger . H
Wi t hout navi gat i on: Subst i t ut e a known-good audi o
uni t (see page 23-115), and r echeck. If t he
audi o uni t .B
Audi o di sc does not ej ect
NOTE:
22-90).
may j am and damage t he pl ayer mec hani sm.
t er mi nal s.
2. Tur n on t he audi o uni t.
Does t he syst em t urn on?
NO- Go to Audi o uni t power swi t ch wi l l not t urn on
(see page 23- 69) .
3. Check to see if t he di sc ej ect s correct l y wi t h no
bi ndi ng when you push t he E J E CT but t on.
Does t he disc eject properly?
YES-Oper at i on i s no r mal .
NO-
di sc c hanger (see page 23-118), and r echeck. If t he
audi o di sc c h ang er .
audi o uni t .B
23-90
Audi o di sc changer does not load ai l si x di scs
NOTE;
Check the vehi cl e battery condi t i on fi rst (see page
22-90).
t er mi nal s.
Di sc l abel s shoul d not be used in the audi o uni t. They
2. Tur n on t he audi o uni t, and try l oadi ng si x di sc s into
t he audi o uni t (i n-dash di sc changer ).
Does t he audio unit accept aii six discs?
YES-l nt er mi t t ent f ai l ure, t he audi o unit i s OK at t hi s
t i me.H
NO - Go to st ep 3.
3. Tr y l oadi ng t he di sc pl ayer wi t h si x known-good di sc s.
Does t he audio unit (in-dash disc changer) accept aii six
discs?
YE S - A t l east one of t he ori gi nal di sc s i s f aul t y.! !
NO -
i i Wi th navi gat i on: Subst i t ut e known-good audi o di sc
changer (see page 23-118), and recheck. If the
sympt om/i ndi cat i on goes away, repl ace t he ori gi nal
audi o di sc c h ang er . ^
Wi t hout navi gat i on; Subst i t ut e known-good audi o
unit (i n-dash di sc changer ) (see page 23-115), and
recheck. If t he sympt om/i ndi cat i on goes away,
repl ace t he ori gi nal audi o uni t (i n-dash di sc
c hanger ).H
Audi o di sc changer does not move bet ween
di sc s
NOTE:
22-90).
Chec k t he connect or s for poor c onnec t i ons or l oose
t er mi nal s.
2. Insert si x di sc s i nto t he audi o uni t (i n-dash di sc
c hanger ), and see if t he c hanger moves bet ween
di sc s.
Does t he changer operat e normally?
YES-l nt er mi t t ent f ai l ur e, t he di sc c hanger i s OK at t hi s
t i me. H
NO- Go to st ep 3.
3. Insert si x known-good di sc s i nto t he audi o uni t.
Does t he changer operat e normally?
YE S - A t l east one of the ori gi nal di sc s i s f aul t y .
NO-
Wi t h navi gat i on: Subst i t ut e known-good audi o di sc
c hanger (see page 23-118), and r echeck. If t he
audi o di sc c hanger .H
Wi t hout navi gat i on: Subst i t ut e known-good audi o
uni t (i n-dash di sc changer ) (see page 23-115), and
r epl ace t he ori gi nal audi o uni t (i n-dash di sc
c h ang er ) .
Audi o S f st em
Di agnost i c CD 07AAZ-SDBA100
Audi o di sc does not pl ay
NOTE:
Chec k t he vehi c l e battery condi t i on fi rst (see page
22- 90).
t er mi nal s.
2. Tur n on t he audi o uni t , and try l oadi ng a di sc .
Does t he disc load?
NO- Go to Audi o di sc does not l oad (see page
23- 90).H
3. Insert anot her di sc to see if t he sympt om c an be
dupl i cat ed.
Does t he disc play?
NO- Go to st ep 4.
4. Insert audi o di agnost i c CD (T/N 07AAZ-SDBA100) in
t he audi o uni t.
Does t he disc piay?
YE S - Th e ori gi nal di sc i s f aul t y or has an unr eadabl e
f or mat ! ! .
N O -
di sc c hanger (see page 23-118), and r echeck. If t he.
audi o di sc c h ang er . B
audi o uni t .H
Sk i p Test CD 07AAZ-SDBA200
Ski p Test CD 07AAZ-SDBA300
Audi o di sc ski ps
NOTE:
22-90).
t er mi nal s.
1. Conf i r m t he vehi c l es t i res ar e properl y i nf l at ed.
2. Cneck trie c ust omer ' s di sc f or sc r at c hes and
f i ngerpri nt s.
NOTE: The f ol l owi ng t est shoul d be done wi t h t he
audi o uni t bass and t rebl e set to t he c ust omer ' s
l i st eni ng set t i ngs. When c ompar i ng to known-good
vehi c l es, do t he c ompar i son on t he s ame model and
t ri m l evel .
3. Test -dr i ve t he vehi c l e to i denti fy when t he c ust omer ' s
di sc ski ps. The audi o di agnost i c CD (T/N 07AAZ-
SDBA100) c an be used if t he c ust omer ' s CD i s not
avai l abl e; use t racks 1012.
Does t he disc skip?
NO-Oper at i on i s n o r mal .
4. Compar e t he c ust omer ' s CD t hat ski ps to a
known-good vehi cl e under t he s ame condi t i ons.
Does t he disc skip in t he known-good vehicle under t he
same condit ions?
YE S - Th e di sc pl ayer operat i on i s nor mal , t he pr obl em
i s wi t h t he c ust omer ' s d i s c . B
NO- Go to st ep 5.
NOTE: Do t he f ol l owi ng t est wi t h vehi c l e parked and
t he engi ne r unni ng.
23-92
5. Insert t he di agnost i c ski p t est CD (T/N 07AAZ-
SDBA300). Pl ay t r acks 211, and note on whi c h track
number (s) wher e t he di sc st ar t s ski ppi ng. Do t he
s ame t est on a known-good vehi c l e.
Does the disc skip on the same track(s) as the
known-good vehicle?
YES-Oper at i on i s nor mal .
NO- Go to st ep 6.
6. Insert t he di agnost i c ski p t est CD (T/N 07AAZ-
SDBA200). Pl ay t r acks 7- 11 and t r acks 13- 15an d
note on whi c h t rack number (s) t he di sc st art s
ski ppi ng. Do t he s ame t est on a known-good vehi cl e.
Does t he disc skip on t he same t rack number(s) as t he
known-good vehicle?
YES-Oper at i on i s nor mal .
NO-
di sc changer (see page 23-118), and r echeck. If t he
audi o di sc c h an g er . !
audi o uni t . B
Audi o uni t but t on does not wor k
NOTE:
o Chec k t he vehi cl e battery condi t i on f i rst (see page
22- 90).
In or der to t r oubl eshoot t he mai n power swi t c h, go to
Audi o uni t power swi t ch wi l l not t urn on (see page
23- 69).
1. Go to t he audi o but t on, knob, and r emot e swi t ch
det ect i on mode i n t he audi o Sel f -di agnost i c Funct i on
(see page 23-54). Oper at e all i t ems i n t he appropri at e
swi t c h li st.
S wi t c h l i st
Wi t h navi gat i on:
Wi t h pr emi um
audi o syst em:
Wi t hout pr emi um
audi o syst em:
TI TL E, XM, FM/AM, PWR/VOL ,
S OUND, CD, AUX, 1-6,
CATEGORY, TUNE, SK I P,
SCAN/ A. S E L , MAP/ GUIDE,
CANCEL , MENU, AUDIO, -of >
INFO, S ETUP
1-6, L OAD, E J E CT, FM, AM, XM,
CD/ AUX, TI TL E, CL OCK , S CAN,
CATEGORY, PWR, SK IP, A. S EL ,
RETURN, ENTER, MENU
1-6, E J E CT, FM, AM, CD,
TUNE/ S OUND/ CD, AUX, TI TL E,
CL OCK , S CAN, FOL DER,
RDT/RDM, A. S EL , SK IP,
PWRA/OL
Are all t he it ems in t he appropriat e swit ch list det ect ed?
audi o swi t c h panel (see page 23-117), and r echeck. If
t he sympt om/i ndi cat i on goes away, r epl ace t he
ori gi nal audi o swi t ch p an el .
23-93
Audi o S f st em
Sympt om Troubl eshoot i ng fcont' d)
Audi o uni t di sc i ndi cat or does not wor k
NOTE:
. 22-90).
Di sc s wi t h l abel s shoul d not be used in t he audi o uni t.
They may j am and damage t he pl ayer mec hani sm.
1. Tur n on t he audi o syst em.
2. Insert a known-good di sc or pr ess t he E J E CT but t on.
Is t he DISC indicat or (LED) indicat ed?
YE S - Th e audi o uni t i s OK at t hi s t i me. Check f or l oose
or poor c onnec t i ons at audi o uni t and audi o p an e l .
N O -
Wi t h navi gat i on: Subst i t ut e a k n
r t
A / n
- c;ood audi o
di sc c hanger (see page 23- 118) , and r echeck. If t he
audi o di sc ehanger . i l
audi o uni t. If t he sympt om i s sti ll pr esent , subst i t ut e
a known-good audi o swi t ch panel (see page
23-117), and r echeck. If t he sympt om/i ndi cat i on
goes away, r epl ace t he ori gi nal audi o swi t ch
p an e l .
Boomi ng sound whi l e dri vi ng wi t h audi o uni t
on or off
NOTE:
Chec k for all syst em' s DTCs f i rst wi t h t he HDS. If t her e
ar e any DTCs st or ed, go to t he i ndi cat ed DTCs
22-90).
Chec k t he c onnec t or s for poor connect i ons or l oose
t er mi nal s.
2. Oper at e t he audi o uni t, and c hec k t he f unct i on of t he
speaker s.
Is a booming sound or a low-frequency hum heard from
t he speakers?
NO- Go to sympt om t r oubl eshoot i ng No sound i s
hear d f r om speaker (s).H
Wi t h pr emi um audi o syst em (see page 23-70).
Wi t hout pr emi um audi o syst em (see page 23-75).
3. Tur n t he audi o syst em off.
4. Make sur e all door s, hood, and t he trunk ar e c l osed.
5. St art the engi ne, and let it i dle.
6. Do t he act i ve noi se cancel l at i on (ANC) Sel f -di agnost i c
23-94
7. Check for t est It ems on t est s 1 t hr ough 8.
NOTE; Move on to t he next t est i t em wi t hi n 50
sec onds, or t he sel f -di agnost i c t est ends.
Does low-frequency hum sound heard from speakers for
more t han 5 second for all t est It ems?
NO- Go to t he appropri at e st ep l i st ed.
If t he all t est s f ai l ed:
Wi t h pr emi um audi o syst em, go to st ep 15.
Wi t hout pr emi um audi o s y s t em, r epl ace t he audi o
If t he 3rd t est f ai l ed:
Wi t h pr emi um audi o syst em, go to st ep 29.
Wi t hout pr emi um audi o s y s t em, r epl ace t he audi o
If t he 4th t est f ai l ed,
- Wi t h pr emi um audi o s y s t em, go to st ep 34.
- Wi t hout pr emi um audi o s y s t em, r epl ace t he
audi o uni t (see page 23-115).
If t he 5th t est f ai l ed,
- Wi t h navi gat i on: Go to st ep 39.
- Wi t hout navi gat i on: Go to st ep 48.
If t he 6th t est f ai l ed, go to st ep 59.
9. Di sconnect t he HDS f rom t he DL C.
10. St art t he engi ne, and let it i dle.
11 Do t he act i ve noi se cancel l at i on (ANC) Sel f -di agnost i c
12. Do t he 10th t est by pr essi ng t he No. 1 button.
13. Set t he parki ng brake, and hol d t he engi ne speed at
2,500 rpm (A/T i n P or N, M/T in neut r al ), and move on
to t he 11th t est by pr essi ng the No. 1 button.
14. Pr ess t he No. 1 button sever al t i mes to turn t he ANC
on and off.
Do you hear t he low-frequency hum sound t urn on and
off while pressing t he No. 1 but t on?
Chec k f or poor connect i ons or l oose t er mi nal s
bet ween t he audi o uni t , t he ECM/ PCM, and t he under
dash f use box. Then, go to st ep 1 and r echeck.
NO-Repl ac e t he audi o uni t . i l
16. Connec t a vol t met er bet ween st er eo ampl i f i er
connect or A (24P) t er mi nal s No. 11 and No. 22.
NOTE: Use t he vol t met er in AC r ange.
S TE RE O AMPL IFIER CONNECTOR A (24P)
ANC F (WHT)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 11 12
13l l 4l l 5l l 6l l 7l l 8| l 9 l 2 Ql x [22l 23l 24l ( g
ANC F +(RED)
18. Pr epar e to do t he act i ve noi se cancel l at i on (ANC)
19. Measur e t he vol t age dur i ng t he 1st t est wi t h t he
di spl ay i ndi cat i ng OFF (pr ess t he No. 1 button to
swi t ch f r om ON to OFF).
NOTE: Measur e vol t age wi t hi n 50 sec onds after you
st art ed t he 1 st t est .
YES - Repl ac e t he st er eo ampl i f i er (see page
23-119).B
NO- Go to st ep 20.
(cont' d)
23-95
Audi S f st em
21. Connec t a vol t met er bet ween st ereo ampl i f i er
connect or A (24P) t er mi nal s No. 12 and No. 23.
NOTE: Us e t he vol t met er in A C r ange.
ANC R - (GRN)
L J 3J
1 1 2 1 3 1 4 j 5 1 8 1 7 1 8 j 9 11 ] 12
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 2 0 / 22 23 24 ( V
ANC R +(BLK)
23. Pr epar e to do t he act i ve noi se cancel l at i on (ANC)
24. Measur e t he vol t age dur i ng t he 1st t est wi t h t he
di spl ay i ndi cat i ng OFF (pr ess t he No. 1 button to
swi t ch f rom ON to OFF).
NOTE: Measur e vol t age wi t hi n 50 sec onds after you
st ar t ed t he 1 st t est , or t he sel f -di agnost i c t est ends.
YES - Repl ac e t he st er eo ampl i f i er (see page
23-119).H
NO- Go to st ep 25.
26. Di sconnect audi o uni t connect or C (16P) and st er eo
ampl i f i er connect or A (24P).
27. Chec k f or cont i nui t y bet ween audi o uni t connect or C
(16P) and st er eo ampl i f i er connect or A (24P)
Audi o uni t St er eo Wi r e col or
c onnec t or ampl i f i er
c onnec t or
C1 A12 GRN
C2 A23 BLK
C9 A11 WHT
C10 A22 RED
AUDIO UNIT CONNECTOR C (16P)
1 2 3 4 5
9 10 11 12 13 14 15
n ,
1
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
/
11 12
n
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
/
22 23 24
NO-Repai r an open in t he wi r e bet ween audi o uni t
connect or C (16P) and st er eo ampl i f i er connect or A
(24P).B
23-96
28. Check f or cont i nui t y bet ween body gr ound and audi o
uni t connect or C (16P) accor di ng to t he t abl e.
Audi o uni t connect or Wi r e col or
C1 GRN
C2 BLK
C9 WHT
C10 RED
AUDI O UNIT CONNECTOR C (16P)
ft _ o
1 \ 2\ 3\ 4\ 5 \
/
/
\ /
/
\ /
/
'
9>|1Q 11 T| 1211311411S l^x^
bet ween audi o uni t connect or C (16P) and st er eo
ampl i f i er connect or A (24P).H
30. Di sconnect audi o uni t connect or C (16P) and st er eo
ampl i f i er connect or A (24P).
Audi o uni t
connect or
St er eo
ampl i f i er
c onnec t or
Wi r e col or
C9 A11 WHT
C10 A22 RED
AUDIO UNIT CONNECTOR C (ISP)
p
1
2 3 4 5
/ / /
r
9 10 11 12 13 14 15
f l I
1
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
/
11 12
_n
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
/
22 23 24
(24P).B
(cont' d)
23-97
Audi o S f st em
uni t c onnec t or C (16P) t er mi nal s No. 9 and No. 10
i ndi vi dual l y.
A N C F -
(WHT)
ampl i f i er connect or A (24P).B
NO- Go to st ep 33.
2 3 4
ANC F -
(WHT)
10 11 12 13 14 15
ANC F-f (RED)
Audi o uni t
c onnec t or
St er eo
ampl i f i er
c onnec t or
Wi r e col or
C1 A12 GRN
C2 A23 BLK
J t = Q
1 2 3 4 5
9 pioh 1 h^ l l 3 | T 4| l S L ^
OTTeoiciit&nTiinais
i r
2 3 4 b 6 7 8 9
/
11 12
13| l 4| l 5| l 6| l 7l l 8| l 9| 2b| / ^^| 23| 24
(24P).B
YES - Repai r a shor t i n t he wi r e bet ween audi o uni t
(24P).B
NO-Repl ac e t he audi o uni t . B
35. Di sc onnec t audi o uni t connect or C (16P) and st er eo
ampl i f i er c onnec t or A (24P).
23-98
uni t connect or C (16P) t er mi nal s No. 1 and No. 2
i ndi vi dual l y.
ANC R - (GRN) ANC R +(BLK)
10 11 12 13 14 15
YES - Repai r a shor t to body ground i n t he wi r e
ampl i f i er connect or A (24P).H
NO- Go to st ep 38.
ANC R
(GRN)
YES - Repai r a shor t in t he wi r e bet ween audi o uni t
(24P).B
NO-Repl ac e t he audi o uni t .
40. Connec t a vol t met er bet ween audi o uni t connect or C
(16P) t er mi nal No. 4 and No. 11.
NOTE: Us e t he vol t met er in AC r ange.
1 2 3 4 5
ANC F MIC 8V (WHT)
9 10 11 12 13 14 15
SH ANCM F GND
(BLK)
41. Tur n t he i gni ti on swi t ch to A CCE S S ORY (I).
42. Make a l oud noi se in front of t he front
HFL-navi gat i on-ANC mi cr ophone.
Does the voltage change when making a loud noise in
front of the microphone?
YES - Repl ac e t he audi o uni t .H
NO- Go to st ep 43.
44. Di sconnect audi o uni t connect or C (16P) and t he front
HFL-navi gat i on-ANC mi cr ophone 7P connect or .
(cont' d)
23-99
Audi o S f st em
(16P) t er mi nal No. 4 and t he f ront
HFL-navi gat i on-ANC mi cr ophone 7P c onnec t or
t er mi nal No. 4.
AUDI O UNIT CONNECTOR C (1SP)
3 4
ANC F MIC 8V (WHT)
9 10 11 12 13 14 15
ANC F MIC 8V (WHT)
1 2 3 4 5 6
,n
7
S-KONT HFL -NAVIGATION-ANC
MICROPHONE 7P CONNECTOR
NO-Ther e i s an open i n t he wi r e bet ween audi o uni t
connect or C (16P) and t he front HFL-navi gat i on-ANC
mi cr ophone 7P connect or . Repl ac e t he af f ect ed
shi el ded h ar n e s s . !
_ ANC F MIC 8V (WHT)
n-\fl
1 2 3 4 5
9 10 11 12 13 14 15
YE S - Th er e i s a shor t to body gr ound i n t he wi r e
bet ween audi o uni t connect or C (16P) and t he front
HFL-navi gat i on-ANC mi c r ophone 7P connect or .
Repl ace t he af f ect ed shi el ded h ar n e s s . !
NO- Go to st ep 47.
47. Chec k f or cont i nui t y bet ween front
HFL-navi gat i on-ANC mi cr ophone 7P connect or
FRONT HFL -NAVIGATION-ANC
p
lr
n
l
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
GND (BLK)
YES - Repl ac e t he f ront HFL-navi gat i on-ANC
mi cr ophone (see page 23-24U).SI
NO-Repai r an open in t he wi r e bet ween front
HFL-navi gat i on-ANC mi cr ophone and body gr ound
(G501)(see page 22- 34) . !
NOTE: Us e t he vol t met er i n A C r ange.
1 2 3 4 5
ANC F MIC 8V (WHT)
9 1Q|11 12 13 14 1 5 /
S H ANCM F GND
(BLK)
50. Tur n t he i gni t i on swi t ch to A CCE S S ORY (I).
51. Make a l oud noi se i n front of t he r ear act i ve noi se
cancel l at i on mi cr ophone.
Does the voltage change when making a loud noise in
front of the microphone?
YES - Repl ac e t he audi o uni t (see page 23- 114) . !
NO- Go to st ep 52.
23-100
53. Di sconnect audi o uni t connect or C (16P) and t he front
act i ve noi se cancel l at i on mi cr ophone 3P connect or .
54. Connec t front act i ve noi se cancel l at i on mi cr ophone
3P connect or t er mi nal s No. 1 and No. 3 wi t h a j umper
wi r e.
F RONT ACTIVE NOISE CANCELLATION
iJh==fl
SH ANCM
F GND (BLK)
1 \/\ 3
ANC F MIC 8V
(WHT)
J UMPER WIRE
55. Check for cont i nui t y bet ween audi o uni t connect or C
1
ANC F MIC 8V (WHT)
1
3 4
9 10 11 12 13 14 15
SH ANCM F GND
(BLK)
NO-The re i s an open i n t he wi r e bet ween audi o uni t
connect or C (16P) and t he front act i ve noi se
cancel l at i on mi cr ophone 3P connect or . Repl ace t he
affected shi el ded h ar nes s . i l
56. Remove t he j umper wi r e.
57. Check for conti nui ty bet ween audi o uni t connect or C
1 2 3 4 5
ANC F MIC 8V (WHT)
9 10 11 12 13 14 15
SH ANCM F GND
(BLK)
YES - Th er e i s a short in t he wi r e bet ween audi o uni t
connect or C (16P) and t he front act i ve noi se
affected shi el ded h ar nes s . H
NO-Go to st ep 58.
58. Check for conti nui ty bet ween audi o uni t connect or C
(16P) t ermi nal No. 4 and body gr ound.
, ANC F MIC 8V (WHT)
3=i
3 4 5
9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Ml
YES - Th er e i s a short to body gr ound in t he wi r e
bet ween audi o unit connect or C (16P) and t he front
Repl ace the affected shi el ded h ar n es s .
NO-Repl ac e t he front act i ve noi se cancel l at i on
mi cr ophone (see page 23- 120) .
59. Tur n the i gni ti on swi t ch to LOCK (0).
(cont' d)
23-101
Audi S f st em
NOTE: Use t he vol t met er in AC r ange.
9 10
4 5
ANC R MIC 8V (BLU)
12 13 14 15
SH ANCM R GND
(BLK)
61. Tur n t he i gni ti on swi t ch to A CCE S S ORY (I).
62. Make a l oud noi se i n front of t he rear act i ve noi se
cancel l at i on mi c r ophone.
Does t he volt age change when making a loud noise in
front of t he microphone?
64. Di sc onnec t audi o uni t connect or C (16P) and t he rear
65. Connec t rear act i ve noi se cancel l at i on mi cr ophone 3P
wi r e.
REAR ACTI VE NOI S E CANCEL L ATI ON
rJ l i L i
1
S H ANCM
R GND (GRY)
ANC R MIC 8V
(WHT)
J UMPER WI RE
66. Chec k for cont i nui t y bet ween audi o uni t connect or C
10 11
ANC R MIC 8V (BLU)
12 13 14 15
S H ANCM R GND
(BLK)
NO-Ther e i s an open in t he wi r e bet ween audi o uni t
connect or C (16P) and t he rear act i ve noi se
wi r e har ness or t he under -dash f use/r el ay box (see
page 22- 86) .
67. Remove the j umper wi r e.
10 11
ANC R MIC 8V (BLU)
12 14 15
S H ANCM R GND
(BLK)
YES - Th er e i s a shor t in t he wi r e bet ween audi o uni t
connect or C (16P) and t he rear act i ve noi se
wi r e har ness or t he under -dash f use/r el ay box (see
page 22-86J.H
NO- Go to st ep 69.
23-102
ANC R MIC 8V (BLU)
1
PL
10 11 12 13 14 15
YES - Th er e is a shor t to body gr ound in t he wi r e
bet ween audi o uni t connect or C (16P) and the rear
Repl ace t he wi r e har ness or t he under -dash f use/r el ay
box (see page 22-86) . H
NO-Repl ac e t he rear act i ve noi se cancel l at i on
mi cr ophone (see page 23- 120) .
72. Measur e vol t age bet ween audi o uni t connect or C
n 1 r n
1 2 3 4 5
/ /
9 10 11 12 13 14 15
NEP (YEL )
75. Di sc onnec t audi o uni t connect or C (16P) and
ECM/ PCM connect or A (49P).
NEP
(BLU)
J l l /
3 | 4 | / | 6 | 7 | / 9 110
1
11
/ /
/ 1 5 16
l / b e
19 20 21
1
22 23 24
X
25
><
26 27 28
1
29 30
/
34 3536
/ /
VIC\i
42
jr -
431441/| 46
A
A/
# J UMPER WI RE
77. Chec k cont i nui t y bet ween audi o uni t connect or C
1 2
10 11 12 13 14 15
NEP (YEL )
NO-Repai r an open i n t he wi r e bet ween audi o uni t
connect or C(16P) and ECM/ PCM connect or A (49P).I
78. Remove t he j umper wi r e.
Is there about 5 V (pulses)?
NO- Go to st ep 73.
(cont' d)
23-103
Audi Syst em
73. Check cont i nui t y bet ween audi o uni t connect or C
10 11 12 13 14 15
NEP (Y EL)
bet ween audi o uni t connect or C (16P) and ECM/ PCM
connect or A (49P).H
NO-Updat e t he ECM/ PCM (see page 11-203) if it does
not have t he l at est sof t war e or subst i t ut e a
known-good ECM/ PCM (see page 11-204). _
81. Do t he MICU i nput t est (see st ep 1 on page 22-151).
is t he B-CAN line bet ween t he audio unit and t he MICU
OK ?
YES - Repl ac e t he audi o uni t . B
NO- Repai r an open i n t he wi r e bet ween audi o uni t
connect or B (20P) and MI C U c onnec t or P (20P).B
Error code: XM NO SIGNAL i s di spl ayed
NOTE:
<_ Chec k t he vehi cl e battery condi t i on f i rst (see page
22-90).
Chec k t he connect or s for poor connect i ons or l oose
t er mi nal s.
1. Park vehi c l e out si de wi t h a cl ear vi ew of t he sout her n
hor i zon.
3. Tur n on t he audi o uni t , and sel ect XM radi o.
Does t he XM radio receive a signal?
YES-Rec ept i on i nt erf erence operat i on i s n o r mal .
!V?0 Gc t c c ;tep4.
5. Chec k t he connect i on at XM ant enna 2P connect or
and XM r ecei ver connect or B (2P).
Are t he connect ors connect ed?
NO-Rec onnec t t he connect or s and r echeck XM radi o
oper at i on. If t he si gnal i s r est or ed, t he syst em i s OK. If
t he si gnal i s not r est or ed go to st ep 6.
7. Measur e t he vol t age bet ween XM r ecei ver connect or
A (14P) t er mi nal No. 1 and body gr ound.
XM RECEI VER CONNECTOR A (14P)
l +B ( WHT)
1 2 3 4 5 6
/ /
9 10 11
/
13 14
connect or E (14P) t er mi nal No. 1 and XM r ecei ver
connect or A (14P) t er mi nal No. 1.11
23-104
XM RECEI VER CONNECTOR A f 14P)
1 2 3 4 5 6
/ /
9 10 11 13 14
GND (BLK)
X
NO- Repai r an open or hi gh r esi st ance in t he wi r e
bet ween audi o uni t connect or E (14P) t er mi nal No. 11
and XM r ecei ver connect or A (14P) t er mi nal No. 11.
9. Subst i t ut e a known-good XM ant enna (see page
23- 126) .
Does the XM radio receive a signal?
YES - Repl ac e t he XM ant enna (see page 2 3 - 1 2 6 ) .
NO-Subst i t ut e a known-good XM ant enna l ead. If t he
XM r ecei ver r ec ei ves si gnal , r epl ace t he ori gi nal XM
ant enna l ead. If t he XM r ecei ver does not r ecei ve
si gnal , subst i t ut e a known-good XM r ecei ver (see
page 23- 120) , and r echeck. If t he sympt om/i ndi cat i on
goes away, r epl ace t he ori gi nal XM r ec ei ver .H
Error code: XM ANTENNA Is di spl ayed
NOTE:
22- 90) .
t er mi nal s.
Check XM radi o recept i on in an open ar ea. Poor
r ecept i on/i nt er f er ence c an be c aused by tall bui l di ngs,
mount ai ns, or hi gh-vol t age power l i nes.
1. Chec k t he connect or at t he XM r ecei ver .
Is the connector connected?
NO-Rec onnec t t he connect or . If t he er r or message
does not go away, go to st ep 2.
2. Check t he connect or at t he XM ant enna.
Is the connector connected?
NO-Rec onnec t t he connect or . If t he error message
3. Check t he pi n l ocat i ons i n t he XM r ecei ver connect or
and t he XM ant enna connect or .
Are the pins in the correct locations?
NO-Cor r ec t t he pi n l ocat i ons. If t he error message
4. Subst i t ut e a known-good XM ant enna (see page
23- 126) .
Is the error message gone?
YES - Repl ac e t he XM ant enna (see page 2 3 - 1 2 6 )
NO- Go to st ep 5.
5. Subst i t ut e a known-good XM r ecei ver (see page
23-120).
Is the error message gone?
YES - Repl ac e t he ori gi nal XM recei ve!
NO-Repl ac e t he XM ant enna lead.11
23-105
Audi o S f st em
XM radi o di spl ay i s blank and no st at i on
i nf ormat i on i s di spl ayed
NOTE:
22-90).
Chec k t he connect or s f or poor c onnec t i ons or l oose
t er mi nal s.
| +B (WHT)
1 2 3 4 5 6
/ /
9 10 11
/
13 14
NO-Repai r an open in t he wi r e bet ween XM r ecei ver
connect or A (14P) t er mi nal No. 1 and audi o uni t
connect or E (14P) t er mi nal No. 1. H
XM RECEI VER CONNECTOR A (i 4P)
1 2 3 4 5 6
/
/
9 10 11
/
13 14
GND (BLK)
Is t here less t han 0,2 V?
bet ween XM r ecei ver connect or A (14P) t er mi nal No.
11 and audi o uni t connect or E (14P) t er mi nal No. 11. 1
S YS ON (LT BL U)
1 2 3 4 5 6
/ /
9 10 11
/
13 14
Is t here 10 Vor more present ?
NO-Subst i t ut e a known-good XM r ecei ver (see page
23-120), and r echeck. If 10 Vo r mor e i s sti ll not
pr esent r epl ace t he ori gi nal XM r ec ei v er . B
23-106
7. Measur e t he vol t age bet ween audi o uni t connect or E
(14P) t er mi nal No. 2.and body gr ound.
XM RECEIVER CONNECTOR A (14P)
SY S ON (LT BLU)
1 2 3 4 5 6
/ /
9 10 11 13 14
is t here less t han 2.0 V?
NO-Subst i t ut e a known-good audi o uni t (see page
23-114), and r echeck. If 2.0 V or mor e ar e pr esent ,
r epl ace t he ori gi nal audi o uni t .B
8. Tur n t he i gni ti on swi t ch t o LOCK (0).
9. Di sconnect audi o unit connect or E (14P) and XM
r ecei ver connect or A (14P).
10. Check for cont i nui t y bet ween audi o uni t connect or E
(14P) and XM r ecei ver connect or A (14P) as shown.
AUDIO UNIT CONNECTOR E (14P)
GA-NET BUS SH (GRY )
GA-NET BUS + (RED)
1 2 3 4 5 6
/ /
9 10 11
/
13 14
GA-NET BUS (GRN)
GA-NET BUS SH (GRY ) I
GA-NET
B US + (RED)
1 2 3 4 5 6
/ /
9 10 11 13 14
GA-NET B U S - (GRN)
NO-Ther e i s an open i n t he wi r e(s) bet ween the audi o
uni t and t he XM r ecei ver . Repl ace t he affected
shi el ded har ness.
11. Chec k f or cont i nui t y bet ween body gr ound and XM
r ecei ver connect or A (14P) t er mi nal s No. 9 and No. 10
i ndi vi dual l y.
1 2 3 4 5 6
/ /
9 10 11
/
13 14
GA-NET B US + (RED) GA-NET B U S - (GRN)
^ X
YES - Th er e i s a shor t t o body gr ound in t he wi r e(s)
bet ween t he audi o uni t and t he XM r ecei ver . Repl ace
t he af f ect ed shi el ded h ar n e s s .
NO- Go to st ep 12.
12. Chec k f or cont i nui t y bet ween t he t er mi nal s of XM
r ecei ver connect or A (14P) accor di ng to t he t abl e.
A3 (GRY) A9 (RED), A10 (GRN)
A9 (RED) A10 (GRN)
1 2 3 4 5 6
/ /
9 10 11
/
13 14
Is t here cont inuit y bet ween any of t he t erminals?
YES - Th er e i s a shor t i n t he wi r e(s) bet ween t he audi o
uni t and t he XM r ecei ver . Repl ace t he af f ect ed
shi el ded h ar n es s .
NO-Subst i t ut e a known-good audi o uni t (see page
23-114), and recheck. If t he sympt om/i ndi cat i on goes
away, r epl ace t he ori gi nal audi o uni t. If t he sympt om
i s sti ll pr esent , subst i t ut e a known-good XM r ecei ver
(see page 23-120), and r echeck. If t he
sympt om/i ndi cat i on goes away, repl ace t he ori gi nal
XM r ec ei v er .
23-107
Audi
XM radi o pr eset memor y Is l ost
NOTE:
Check t he vehi cl e bat t ery condi t i on f i rst (see page
22-90).
Check t he connect or s f or poor c onnec t i ons or l oose
t er mi nal s.
2. Tur n on t he audi o uni t , and set eac h of t he XM radi o
c hannel pr eset but t ons.
Does each of t he XM radio channel preset but t ons set
properly?
NO-Subst i t ut e a known-good XM Rec ei ver (see page
23 120), c r .d recheck. "f the cyi T . ptG. M/ J . i ^ I ^ MM, , y u o o
away, r epl ace t he or i gi nal XM r ec ei v er . B
3. Tur n t he i gni ti on swi t c h to L OCK (0) f or 1 mi nut e, t hen
turn it back to ON (II).
4. Test all of t he XM radi o c hannel pr eset but t ons f or
proper recal l oper at i on.
Do t he preset but t ons recall t he XM radio st at ions?
YE S - S y s t em i s nor mal at t hi s t i me. Chec k
connect i ons at t he audi o uni t .H
NO- Go to st ep 5.
1 2 3 4 5 6
/ /
9 10 11
/
13 14
GND (BLK)
YES-Subs t i t ut e a known-good audi o uni t (see page
23-120), and r echeck. If t he sympt om/i ndi cat i on goes
away, r epl ace t he audi o uni t .H
NO- Repai r an open or hi gh r esi st ance in t he wi r e
bet ween audi o uni t connect or E (14P) t er mi nal No. 11
and XM r ecei ver connect or A (14P) t er mi nal No. 11 . H
|+B (W H T )
1 2 3 4 5 6
V
/
9 10 11
/
13 14
connect or E (14P) t er mi nal No. 1 and XM r ecei ver
connect or A (14P) t er mi nal No. 1. H
23-108
Poor or no sound wi t h KM radi o (Audi o uni t
does di spl ay XM channel s)
NOTE:
22-90).
Chec k t he connect or s f or poor c onnec t i ons or l oose
t er mi nal s.
Chec k t he radi o recept i on in an open ar ea. Compar e it
to a known-good vehi c l e whenever possi bl e. Poor
r ecept i on/i nt er f er ence can be c aused by tall bui l di ngs,
mount ai ns, or hi gh-vol t age power l i nes t hat ar e
near by.
If you c an onl y t une to channel 000, 001, 174, and 247,
make sur e that t he audi o uni t i s set to t he c hannel
mode (see owner ' s manual ), if it i s set t o t he c hannel
mode, cal l XM Sat el l i t e Radi o c ust omer suppor t and
check t he account act i vat i on st at us.
L Tu r n t he i gni ti on swi t c h to ON (II).
2. Tur n on t he audi o uni t , and sel ect XM r adi o.
3. Chec k f or an er r or message on t he di spl ay.
Are t here any messages displayed?
YE S - Go to error c ode li st (see page 23- 65) . H
NO- Go to st ep 4.
5. Di sconnect audi o uni t connect or E (14P) and XM
r ecei ver connect or A (14P).
6. Chec k f or cont i nui t y bet ween XM r ecei ver connect or
A (14P) and body gr ound ac c or di ng to t he t abl e. Then
check f or cont i nui t y bet ween t he s ame t er mi nal s
l i st ed i n t he t abl e and audi o uni t c onnec t or E (14P)
t er mi nal No. 4 (the har ness shi el d).
XM r ecei ver c onnec t or Wi r e col or
A6 BLK
A5 GRN
A13 WHT
A14 RED
1 2
i?asan
3 4 5 6
/ /
9 10 11
/
13 14
YE S - Th er e i s a shor t i n t he wi r e bet ween t he audi o
uni t and t he XM r ecei ver . Repl ace t he af f ect ed
shi el ded h ar n e s s .
NO- Go to st ep 7.
(cont' d)
23-109
Audi o S f st em
7. Chec k f or cont i nui t y bet ween XM r ecei ver connect or
A (14P) and audi o uni t connect or E (14P) accor di ng t o
t he t abl e.
XM r ec ei ver Audi o uni t Wi r e col or
c onnec t or c onnec t or
A5 E5 GRN
A6 E6 BLK
A13 E13 WHT
A14 E14 RED
1 2 3 4 5 6
/
9 10 11
/
13 14
YES-Subs t i t ut e a known-good XM r ecei ver (see page
23-120), and r echeck. If t he sympt om/i ndi cat i on goes
away, r epl ace t he or i gi nal XM r ecei ver . If
sympt om/i ndi cat i on i s sti ll pr esent , r epl ace t he audi o
uni t (see page 23- 114) .
NO-Ther e i s an open i n t he wi r e bet ween t he audi o
uni t and t he XM r ecei ver . Repl ace t he affected
shi el ded h ar n e s s . !
Sound Qual i t y Di agnosi s
Use t he f ol l owi ng t est s to check sound qual i t y.
NOTE: Bef or e begi nni ng t he f ol l owi ng t est s, wri t e down
t he c ust omer ' s bas s , t r ebl e, f ader and bal ance set t i ngs,
t hen set t hem to t hei r cent er posi t i ons f or t he t est i ng.
Lef t /Ri ght Channel ID
Do t hi s t est to conf i r m proper channel rout i ng.
1. Insert t he audi o di agnost i c CD (T/N 07AAZ-SDBA100)
i nto t he audi o uni t.
2. Pl ay t rack No. 1 (left, bot h, ri ght c hannel ID) at a
nor mal , or sl i ght l y hi gher t han nor mal , vol ume l evel .
3. The vo'*****eh n. i i i r i ho sjc!ib!c onl y f ~cm t he c hannel o r
c hannel s when i ndi cat ed.
If t he c hannel ID i s cor r ect for each si de, go to phase
t est .
If t he c hannel ID i s not cor r ect , check f or
- Shor t ed speaker wi r e
- Faul t y st er eo ampl i f i er
- Faul t y audi o uni t
23-110
Phase Test
Do t hi s t est to conf i r m proper speaker phasi ng.
into t he audi o uni t.
2. Pl ay t rack No. 2 (phase) at a nor mal , or sl i ght l y hi gher
t han nor mal , vol ume l evel .
3. The voi ce shoul d sound cent er ed and f ocused when it
i s i n-phase.
4. The voi ce shoul d sound di f f used, and have l ess bass
when it i s out of phase.
If t he voi ce c hanges f rom i n-phase to out of phase
as i ndi cat ed by t he prompt , t he phasi ng i s cor r ect .
Go to el ect ri cal noi se t est .
If t he voi ce al ways sounds out of phase, phasi ng i s
not cor r ect . Chec k for:
- Cr ossed speaker wi r e
El ect r i cal Noi se Test
Do t hi s t est to check for el ect ri cal noi se bei ng i nduced
into t he audi o syst em.
NOTE: El ect r i cal noi se may be c aused by out si de
sour c es that cannot be handl ed by t he audi o syst em.
Make sur e you r emove any cell phones and/or t urn off
any af t ermarket devi ces before begi nni ng t hi s t est .
2. Pl ay track No. 4 (digital zero) at a nor mal , or sl i ght l y
hi gher t han nor mal , vol ume l evel .
3. Oper at e any el ect ri cal devi ce that may cr eat e
el ect ri cal noi se in t he audi o s y s t em, i ncl udi ng st art i ng
t he engi ne.
4. Pl ay t rack No. 5 (near di gi tal zero) at a nor mal , or
sl i ght l y hi gher t han nor mal , vol ume l evel .
5. Oper at e any el ect ri cal devi ce that may cr eat e
el ect ri cal noi se in t he audi o syst em, i ncl udi ng st art i ng
t he engi ne.
6. Pl ay track No. 6 (SNR) at a nor mal , or sl i ght l y hi gher
t han nor mal , vol ume l evel .
7. Oper at e any el ect ri cal devi ce t hat may cr eat e
el ect ri cal noi se in t he audi o s y s t em, i ncl udi ng st art i ng
t he engi ne.
If no abnor mal noi se i s hear d, go to t he i ndi vi dual
speaker t est .
If t he noi se i s present onl y duri ng t he SNR t rack,
r epl ace t he audi o uni t.
If t he noi se i s hear d duri ng t he di gi tal zero or near
di gi tal zero t rack, check for:
- Poor gr ound at t he audi o uni t , ampl i f i er, engi ne,
or battery cabl e
~ Pi nched or shor t ed speaker or ampl i f i er wi r e
- Faul t y st ereo ampl i f i er
- Faul t y audi o unit
- Ot her faulty component s c ausi ng exc essi ve
el ect ri cal noi se (i gni ti on c oi l s, al t ernat or, door
lock act uat or s, et c.). Di sconnect any suspec t
c omponent s, and t hen repl ay t he t racks t hat wer e
ori gi nal l y noi sy. If t he noi se i s gone, check t he
component ' s ci rcui t and t he component .
(cont' d)
23-111
Audi o Syst em
Sound Qual i t y Di agnosi s (cont' d)
Indi vi dual Speaker Test
Do t hi s t est to i denti fy a f aul t y speaker .
2. Pl ay t rack No. 30 (st eady 300 Hz t one) at a nor mal , or
sl i ght l y hi gher t han nor mal , vol ume l evel .
3. Li st en t o eac h speaker f or poor sound c ompar ed t o
t he ot her c hannel s. Us e t he audi o uni t ' s f ader and
bal ance set t i ngs to hel p i sol at e t he c hannel wi t h t he
pr obl em.
If t he sound qual i t y pr oduced by a spec i f i c speaker
i s poor , subst i t ut e it wi t h a known-good speaker . If
t he poor sound qual i t y c ont i nues, go to t he sound
bal ance t est .
If t he sound qual i t y i s OK , go to t he sound bal ance
t est .
Sound Bal ance Test
Do t hi s t est t o i denti fy a f aul t y c hannel or speaker .
i nto t he audi o uni t .
2. Conf i r m t he bass and t r ebl e ar e set t o t he cent er
posi t i ons.
3. Pl ay t rack No. 3 (pi nk noi se) at a nor mal , or sl i ght l y
hi gher t han nor mal , vol ume l evel .
4. A st at i c t ype sound shoul d be hear d t hr ough al l
speaker s.
i nto t he audi o uni t of a known-good vehi c l e.
6. Set t he bass and t r ebl e t o t he cent er posi t i ons.
7. Pl ay t rack No. 3 (pi nk noi se) al l t he s ame l evel as was
pl ayed i n st ep 3.
8. Compar e t he sounds made by t he t wo vehi c l es.
If t he sound does not have as muc h bas s , check t he
subwoof er and ci rcui t .
If t he sound does not have enough hi s s , check t he
t weet er s and t hei r ci r cui t s.
23-112
Fr equency S weep
Do t hi s t est to f i nd rattles or r ever ber at i ons t hat may
c ause a percept i on of poor sound quali t y.
2. Pl ay t rack No. 13 (sweep f r om 500 Hz to 35 Hz) at a
3. Li st en to eac h speaker f or poor sound qual i t y or
r ever ber at i ons c aused by speci f i c f r equenc i es. Us e
t he voi c e-over to est i mat e t he f r equency that c aus es
t he vi br at i on. Us e t he audi o uni t ' s f ader and bal ance
set t i ngs to hel p i sol at e t he channel wi t h t he pr obl em.
If vi br at i ons or poor sound quali ty ar e hear d, go to
st ep 4.
If no vi br at i ons or poor sound qual i t y ar e hear d, go
to sound j udgi ng.
4. Choose t he appropri at e t rack f rom No. 14 to 25 (smal l
r ange f r equency sweep) or 26 to 53 (si ngl e
f r equenci es) to recreat e t he f r equency that c aused t he
poor sound qual i t y or vi brat i on wi t nessed i n st ep 3;
t hi s ai ds in di agnosi s of t he c ause.
NOTE: When you get to t he t rack that r ecr eat es t he
pr obl em, sel ect t he repeat f unct i on on t he audi o uni t,
t hi s wi l l hel p you i sol at e t he c ause.
5. Repl ace or i nsul at e t he sour c e of t he vi brat i on or , if
t he speaker i s t he sour c e of t he poor sound qual i t y,
r epl ace it.
Sound Judgi ng
Do t hi s t est to c ompar e over al l sound qual i t y, i magi ng,
and dynami c s bet ween t he c ust omer ' s vehi cl e and a
known-good vehi c l e. Onl y use a vehi c l e of t he s ame
model and t ri m l evel f or t hi s t est .
1. In t he c ust omer ' s vehi c l e, set t he bas s , t r ebl e, f ader ,
and bal ance set t i ngs to t he c ust omer ' s nor mal
set t i ngs t hat wer e wri t t en down bef ore begi nni ng t he
t est .
3. Pl ay t r acks No. 7 to 12 (sound qual i t y, mi dl and,
dynami c s, and i magi ng demonst r at i on t racks) at a
Wri t e down t he vol ume set t i ng bei ng used.
4. Li st en to ar eas of t he t rack that st and out as bei ng
ei t her ver y c l ear or poor er t han ot her ar eas of t he
t rack.
5. In a known-good vehi c l e, i nsert t he audi o di agnost i c
CD (T/N 07AAZ-SDBA100) into t he audi o uni t.
6. Pl ay t he t r acks at t he same vol ume l evel and t he s ame
bas s , t r ebl e, bal anc e, and f ader set t i ngs as used in
st ep 3 in t he c ust omer ' s vehi c l e.
7. Li st en to t he s ame ar ea of t he t rack that st ood out as
bei ng ei t her ver y cl ear or poor er t han ot her ar eas of
t he track.
8. Compar e t he c ust omer ' s vehi c l e' s sound qual i t y
r esul t s t he known-good vehi c l e' s r esul t s.
If t he sound qual i t y in t he c ust omer ' s vehi cl e i s
c ompar abl e to t he sound qual i t y in t he known-good
vehi c l e, t hen t he c ust omer ' s vehi c l e i s operat i ng as
desi gned.
If t he sound qual i t y i s not c ompar abl e, check t hese
i t ems in or der .
- Loose or i mpr oper l y i nst al l ed speaker s or ot her
har dwar e t hat may creat e i nt erf erence f rom t he
vi br at i ons gener at ed by t he speaker s
- Poor power or gr ound to t he st er eo ampl i f i er
- Damaged speaker (s)
(cont ' d)
23-113
Audi o Syst em
Sound Qual i t y Di agnosi s (cont' d)
Seek St op Test
Do t hi s t est to c hec k t he per f or mance of t he audi o uni t ' s
AM and FM r ecept i on. Ref er to sympt om
t r oubl eshoot i ng: audi o sound weak or di st or t ed, or no
sound i s hear d f r om speaker (s) (di spl ay i s nor mal ) (see
page 23-70) bef ore cont i nui ng wi t h t hi s t est .
NOTE:
* Wi ndow ti nt, af t ermarket theftVrecovery devi c es and
ot her af t ermarket devi c es may affect r ecept i on.
Changes i n c l oud c over and ot her at mospher i c
condi t i ons wi l l affect t he abi li ty of t he audi o uni t to
r ecei ve radi o si gnal s.
1. Park t he c ust omer ' s vehi c l e i n an open ar ea away
f r om bui l di ngs or ot her obst r uct i ons.
2. Park a known-good vehi cl e (same year , model , and
t ri m l evel ) next to t he c ust omer ' s vehi c l e, f aci ng t he
s ame di r ect i on.
3. St ar t t he engi ne i n t he c ust omer ' s vehi c l e, and t ur n on
t he r adi o.
4. Set t he FM r ecei ver to 87.7 MHz.
5. Pr ess t he Seek + but t on, and r ecor d t he f i rst st at i on
t hat t he audi o uni t l ocks ont o.
6. Pr ess t he Seek 4- button r epeat edl y, and wr i t e down
eac h st at i on t hat t he audi o uni t l ocks ont o unti l t he
st at i on r ecor ded i n st ep 5 i s r eac hed agai n.
7. Set t he AM r ecei ver to 530 kHz.
8. Pr ess t he Seek + but t on, and r ecor d t he f i rst st at i on
t hat t he audi o uni t l ocks ont o.
9. Pr ess t he Seek 4- button r epeat edl y, and wr i t e down
eac h st at i on t hat t he audi o uni t l ocks ont o unti l t he
st at i on r ecor ded i n st ep 8 i s r eac hed agai n.
11. St ar t t he engi ne i n t he known-good vehi c l e, and t hen
do st eps 4 t hru 10 on t he known-good vehi c l e.
12. Compar e t he number of st at i ons r ecei ved i n st eps 6
and 9 i n t he c ust omer ' s vehi cl e wi t h t he number of
st at i ons r ecei ved i n t he known-good vehi c l e.
If t he number of st at i ons r ecei ved i s t he s ame, or
wi t hi n 10 %, t he audi o uni t ' s t uner per f or mance i s
OK. The pr obl em may be at mospher i c condi t i ons,
mult i -pat h i nt er f er ence, or ot her obst r uct i ons to t he
radi o si gnal .
If t he c ust omer ' s vehi c l e r ec ei ves f ewer st at i ons by
at l east 10 %, go t o st ep 2 of poor AM or FM radi o
recept i on or i nt er f er ence (see page 23-66).
Audi o Uni t Removal /Inst al l at i on
S RS c omponent l ocat i ons (see page 24-23), and t he
NOTE:
Take c ar e not to scr at ch t he dashboar d and rel at ed
par t s.
Lay a wor kshop t owel under t he par t s when wor ki ng
on t hem to prot ect t he f ace panel f r om sc r at c hes or
ot her damage.
Ej ec t all t he di sc s bef ore r emovi ng t he audi o uni t to
pr event damagi ng t he CD pl ayer ' s l oad mec hani sm.
If you ar e r epl aci ng t he audi o uni t , wr i t e down t he
audi o pr eset s (if possi bl e), t hen ent er t hem i nto t he
new audi o uni t.
1. Make sur e you have anti -theft c odes f or t he audi o
syst em and t he navi gat i on syst em.
2. Remove t he cent er c onsol e panel (see page 20-157)
and t he cent er pocket (see page 20-168).
3. Remove t he audi o di sc c hanger (see page 23-118).
4. Remove t he cent er pocket f r ame (see page 20-188).
20-167), and passenger ' s dashboar d t r i m (see page
20-173).
6. Remove t he dashboar d cent er vent (see page 20-178).
23-114
7. Remove t he sel f -t appi ng s c r ews and bolts (A), t hen
pull out t he audi o uni t (B).
5 x 0.8 mm 4.4 N-m {0.45 kgf m, 3.2 Ibf-ft)
8. Di sconnect t he connect or s ( C)
f
t hen r emove t he audi o
uni t.
9. Remove t he i nt erf ace di al (see page 23-239).
10 Remove t he audi o swi t ch panel (see page 23-117).
11 Install t he audi o uni t in t he r ever se or der of r emoval .
Make sur e all t he connect or s and t he ant enna l ead
ar e sec ur e.
Ent er t he anti -theft c odes f or t he audi o syst em and
t he navi gat i on syst em.
Gi ve t he new anti -theft c odes to t he c ust omer if you
ar e r epl aci ng t he navi gat i on uni t.
Wi t hout Navi gat i on ' - -
S RS c omponent l ocat i ons (see page 24- 23) , and t he
NOTE:
Take c ar e not to scr at ch t he dashboar d and rel at ed
par t s.
Lay a shop t owel under t he part s when wor ki ng on
t hem to protect t he f ace panel f r om sc r at c hes or ot her
damage.
Ej ect all t he di sc s bef ore r emove t he audi o uni t to
pr event damagi ng t he CD pl ayer ' s l oad mec hani sm.
If you ar e r epl aci ng t he audi o uni t, wr i t e down t he
audi o pr eset s (if possi bl e), t hen ent er t hem into t he
new audi o uni t.
1. Make sur e you have anti -theft c odes f or t he audi o
syst em.
and t he dashboar d cent er pocket (see page 20-168).
20-167), and passenger ' s dashboar d t ri m (see page
20-173).
(cont' d)
23-115
Audi o S f st em
Audi o Uni t Removal /Inst al l at i on (cont' d)
4. Remove t he sel f -t appi ng s c r ews and bol t s (A), t hen
pul l out t he audi o uni t (B).
5 x 0.8 mm
4.4 N m (0.45 kgf m, 3.2 I bfft)
5. Di sc onnec t t he c onnec t or s (C), t hen r emove t he audi o
uni t.
6. Remove t he cl i mat e cont rol uni t (see page 21-191).
7. Remove t he mount i ng s c r ews and bol t s (A) f r om t he
audi o uni t (B), t hen r emove t he audi o uni t f r om t he
audi o swi t ch panel (C).
3.7 N m
8. Inst al l t he audi o uni t i n t he r ever se or der of r emoval ,
Make sur e all t he c onnec t or s and t he ant enna l ead
ar e sec ur e.
Ent er t he anti -theft c odes f or t he audi o syst em.
Set t he cl ock.
Gi ve t he new anti -theft c odes to t he c ust omer if you
ar e r epl aci ng t he audi o uni t.
23-116
Audi o Swi t c h Panel Removal /Inst al l at i on
NOTE:
Put on gl oves t o protect your hands.
Take car e not to scr at ch t he dashboar d and r el at ed
par t s.
Lay a wor kshop t owel under t he part s when wor ki ng
on t hem to prot ect t he f ace panel f r om sc r at c hes or
ot her damage.
Do not wor k i n a dust y or di rty pl ace.
Di schar ge st at i c el ect ri ci t y f r om your body bef ore and
dur i ng t he wor k.
Do not t ouch t he ci rcui t board wi t h your bare hands.
Do not wor k wi t h di rty hands.
Be caref ul not no f ol d t he flat plate cabl e.
Do not t ouch t he t er mi nal connect or of t he flat pl at e
cabl e wi t h your bare hands. (If you have t ouched it,
wi pe it off t hor oughl y.)
1. Remove t he audi o uni t (see page 23-114).
2. Remove t he i nt erf ace di al (see page 23-239).
3. Remove t he mount i ng sc r ews and bolts (A) f r om t he
audi o uni t (B), t hen r emove t he audi o uni t ' f rom t he
audi o swi t ch panel (C).
(0.38 kgf m,
2.7 I bfft)
4. Install t he audi o swi t ch panel i n t he r ever se or der of
r emoval .
NOTE:
Take c ar e not to sc r at c h t he dashboar d and rel at ed
par t s.
L ay a shop t owel under t he part s when wor ki ng on
t hem t o protect t he f ace panel f r om sc r at c hes or ot her
damage.
Do not wor k i n a dust y or di rty pl ac e.
Di sc har ge st at i c el ect ri ci t y f r om your body bef ore and
dur i ng t he wor k.
Do not t ouch t he ci rcui t board wi t h your bare hands.
Do not wor k wi t h di rty hands.
Be car ef ul not no f ol d t he flat pl at e cabl e.
Do not t ouch t he t er mi nal connect or of t he flat plate
c abl e wi t h your bar e hands. (If you have t ouched it,
wi pe it off t hor oughl y.)
1. Remove t he audi o uni t (see page 23-115), and t he
cl i mat e cont rol uni t (see page 21-191).
2. Remove t he mount i ng sc r ews and t he audi o uni t (A)
f r om t he audi o swi t c h panel (B).
?
3. Inst al l t he audi o swi t ch panel in t he r ever se or der of
r emoval .
23-117
Audi o S f st em
Audi o Di sc Changer
l emowai /i nst ai i at i on
NOTE:
Take c ar e not to sc r at c h t he dashboar d and r el at ed
par t s.
Lay a shop t owel under t he part s when wor ki ng on
t hem to prot ect t he f ac e panel f r om sc r at c hes or ot her
damage.
Ej ect all t he di sc s bef ore r emove t he audi o di sc
c hanger uni t t o pr event damagi ng t he audi o di sc
c hanger l oad mec hani sm.
and t he dashboar d cent er pocket (see page 20-168).
2. Remove t he bol t s (A), t hen pull out t he audi o di sc
c hanger (6).
A
5 x 0.8 mm
4.4 N m (0.45 kgf-m, 3.2 I bfft)
3. Di sconnect t he connect or (C), t hen r emove t he audi o
di sc c hanger .
4. Inst al l t he audi o di sc c hanger i n t he r ever se or der of
r emoval .
Audi o-HVAC Subdi spl ay Uni t
NOTE:
Take c ar e not to sc r at c h t he dashboar d.
1. Remove t he dashboar d cent er vent (see page 20-178).
2. Remove t he s c r ews , t hen pull out t he audi o-HVAC
subdi spl ay uni t (A).
3. Di sconnect t he connect or (B), and r emove t he
audi o-HVAC subdi spl ay uni t.
4. Inst al l t he audi o-HVAC subdi spl ay uni t in the r ever se
23-118
Audio-HWAC Display Unit
NOTE;
Take car e not to scr at ch t he dashboar d.
1. Remove t he audi o uni t (see page 23-114) and t he
cent er di spl ay vi sor (see page 20-171).
2. Remove t he sc r ews and bol t s (A), t hen pull out t he
audi o-HVAC di spl ay uni t (B).
5 x 0.8 mm
4.4 N-m (0.45 kgf m, 3.2 Ibf-ft)
3. Di sconnect t he connect or (C), and r emove t he
audi o-HVAC di spl ay uni t.
4. Install t he audi o-HVAC di spl ay uni t i n t he r ever se
order of r emoval .
Stereo Amplifier
Remowal/lnstaiation
Wi t h Pr emi um Audi o Sy s t em
2. Di sconnect t he c onnec t or s (A).
3. Remove t he bolt (B) and l oosen t he bol t s (C) sec ur i ng
t he st er eo ampl i f i er (D).
4. Lower t he st er eo ampl i f i er t hr ough t he f oot wel l ar ea.
5. Install t he st er eo ampl i f i er i n t he r ever se or der of
r emoval .
23-119
Audi o Syst em
XM Recei ver Removal /i nst al l at i on
1. Open t he t runk l i d, and r emove t h e ri ght trunk si de
t r i m panel {see page 20- 132) .
2. Di sconnect t he connect or s (A) f r om t he XM r ecei ver
(B ).
4- Do o r
6x 1.0 mm
9.4 N-m (0.95 kgf m, 6.9 I bfft)
3. Remove t he mount i ng bolt (C) and l oosen t he
mount i ng bolts (D), t hen r emove t he XM r ecei ver .
4. Install t he XM r ecei ver i n t he r ever se or der of
r emoval .
Act i ve Noi se Cancel l at i on
Mi crophone Removal /i nst al l at i on
Fr ont
1. Remove t he roof c onsol e (see page 20-140), and
di sc onnec t t he connect or (A) f r om t he front act i ve
noi se cancel l at i on mi cr ophone (B).
2. Remove t he sc r ews and t he f ront act i ve noi se
cancel l at i on mi cr ophone.
3. Inst al l t he mi cr ophone in t he r ever se or der of
r emoval .
Rear
2. Di sconnect t he connect or (A), t hen r emove t he sc r ews
and t he rear act i ve noi se cancel l at i on mi cr ophone (B).
3. Inst al l t he mi cr ophone in t he r ever se or der of
r emoval .
23-120
Cr ossover SMetwork Cont rol Uni t Removal /Inst al l at i on
Driver's Door Speaker Cros s over Net work
Cont rol U ni t
20-166).
2. Di sconnect t he connect or (A), t hen r emove t he
dr i ver ' s door speaker c r ossover net work cont rol unit
(B).
3. i nst al l t he dr i ver ' s door speaker c r ossover network
cont rol uni t in t he r ever se order of r emoval .
Front Passenger ' s Door Speaker Cr ossover
Net work Cont r ol Uni t
1. Remove t he cent er c onsol e panel (see page 20-157),
t hen r emove t he audi o pocket (see page 20-168).
2. Di sconnect t he connect or (A), t hen r emove t he
passenger ' s door speaker c r ossover net work cont rol
unit (B).
3. Install t he passenger ' s door speaker c r ossover
network cont rol uni t i n t he r ever se order of r emoval .
23121
Audi o Syst em
Speaker Test /Repl acement
Front Door Speaker
1. Remove the door panel.
2. Remove the bolt (A). Then lift the speaker straight up
to release the lower clips (B).
NOTICE
If you pull the speaker out too far from the door, you
will damage the lower clips.
A
5 x 0.8 i
4.4 N-m (0.45 k g f m, 3.2 Ibf ft)
I mm
3. Disconnect the 2P connector (C), and remove the
speaker.
4. Measure the resistance between the terminals No. 1
and No. 2. There should be about 4 O.
5. I fthe resistance is not as specified, replace the door
speaker.
Fr ont Door Tweet er (Wi th Pr emi um Audi o
Syst em)
1. Detach the clip (A) and remove the front door tweeter -
cover (B). Then disconnect the connector (C).
2. Measure the resistance between the front door
tweeter 2 P connector terminals No. 1 and No. 2. There
should be about 3.3 O.
3. If the resistance is not as specified, replace the front
door tweeter. Remove the front door tweeter (A) from
front door tweeter cover (B).
Front Door Tweet er (Wi t hout Pr emi um Audi o
Syst em)
1. Det ach t he cl i p (A) and r emove t he front door t weet er
cover (B). Then di sconnect t he connect or ( C) .
2. Remove t he front door t weet er (A) f r om t he f ront
t weet er cover (B).
4. Measur e t he r esi st anc e bet ween t he f ront door
t weet er (A) t er mi nal No. 2 and t he out si de t er mi nal of
t he capaci t or . Ther e shoul d be about 4 0.
5. If t he r esi st ance i s not as spec i f i ed, r epl ace t he f ront
door t weet er.
3. Chec k t he capaci t or condi t i on. If any mal f unct i on i s
f ound, r epl ace t he front door t weet er .
(cont ' d)
23-123
Audi Sf s t em
Speaker Test /Repl ac ement (cont' d)
Rear Speaker
1. Remove the rear shel f (see page 20-128).
2. Remove the mount i ng bolt (A), t hen tilt t he speaker
f or war d to r el ease t he front cl i ps (B).
w o T i c i l
If you pull t he speaker out too f ar f r om t he rear
bul khead, you wi l l damage t he l ower c l i ps.
3. Di sconnect t he 2P connect or (C), and r emove t he rear
speaker .
4. Measur e t he r esi st ance bet ween t he t er mi nal s No. 1
and No. 2. Ther e shoul d be about 4 O.
Subwoofer
2. Remove t he f our mount i ng bol t s (A) f r om t he
subwoof er (B).
B
3. Di sconnect t he 2P connect or (C), and r emove t he
subwoof er .
4. Measur e t he r esi st anc e bet ween t he t er mi nal s No. 1
and No. 2. Ther e shoul d be about 2 O.
5. If t he r esi st anc e i s not as spec i f i ed, r epl ace t he
subwoof er .
5. If t he r esi st anc e i s not as spec i f i ed, r epl ace t he rear
speaker .
23-124
Audi o Remot e Swi t c h Test
1. Remove t he st eer i ng wheel (see page 17-6).
2. Remove t he audi o r emot e swi t ch (see page 17-7).
1 2 3 4 5 6
7
8 9
10 11 12
3. Measur e t he r esi st ance bet ween t he t er mi nal s No. 1
and No. 8 i n eac h swi t ch posi t i on accor di ng to t he
t abl e.
But t on hel d Resi st anc e
down
No button About 10 kQ
pr essed
MODE About 3.7 kQ
CH( +) About 1.7 kQ
CH( -) About 775 Q

About 357Q
( VOL UP)

About 100Q
(VOL DOWN)
4. If t he r esi st anc e i s not as spec i f i ed, r epl ace t he audi o
r emot e swi t c h.
ASVI/FIVS Ant enna Ampli f i er
Repl acement
1. Remove t he C-pi l l ar t r i m.
e 2-door (see page 20-110)
2. Di sconnect t he c onnec t or s (A) f r om t he AM/FM
ant enna ampl i f i er (B).
4-Door
C
6 x 1.0 mm
3.9 N-m
(0.40 kgf m,
2.9 Ibf-ft)
2-Door
C
6 x 1.0 mm
3.9 N-m
(0.40 kgf-m,
2.9 Ibf-ft)
3. Remove the bolt (C) and t he AM/FM ant enna
ampl i f i er.
4. Install t he AM/FM ant enna ampl i f i er in t he r ever se
order of r emoval .
23-125
Audio Sf stem
AM/FM Antenna Repair
NOTE: To make an effective repair, the broken section
must be no longer than one Inch.
1. Li ght l y rub t he ar ea ar ound t he broken sect i on (A)
wi t h f i ne st eel wool , t hen c l ean it wi t h i sopr opyl
al cohol .
C
2. Car ef ul l y mask above and bel ow t he broken porti on of
t he wi ndow ant enna wi r e (B) wi t h cel l ophane t ape (C).
3. Usi ng a c ommer c i al l y avai l abl e rear wi ndow
def ogger repai r kit, appl y a heavy coat of pai nt (A)
ext endi ng about 1/8" on both si des of t he break. Al l ow
30 mi nut es to dry.
4. Chec k for cont i nui t y in t he r epai r ed wi r e.
5. Appl y a sec ond coat of pai nt i n t he s ame way. Let it
dry 3 hour s bef ore r emovi ng t he t ape.
XM Antenna Replacement
2. Remove t he nut (A) f r om t he XM ant enna (B).
B
4.4 N-m
(0.44 kgf m, 3.2 Ibfft)
3. Di sc onnec t t he connect or (C) and r emove t he XM
ant enna.
4. Install t he XM ant enna i n t he r ever se or der of
r emoval .
2 3 - 1 2 6
Auxiliary Jac k Assembly Repl acement
1. Remove t he center c onsol e (see page 20-158).
2. Disconnect the 5P connector (A), and carefully pull out
the auxiliary jack assembly (B) from the center
console box.
3. Install the auxiliary jack assembly in the reverse order
of removal.
Navi gat i on S y s t em
f NAVI GATI ON DISPLAY UNIT
Outputs, page 23-169
E CM/ PCM
(Vehi c l e S peed Pul se)
F RONT HFL -NAVIGATION-ANC
MICROPHONE
(Built in the roof console)
AUDIO UNIT
(Wi t h Navi gat i on)
Outputs, page 23-14
AUDIO SWI TCH PANEL
I NTERFACE DIAL
NAVIGATION UNIT
Removal/
NAVIGATION S E RVI CE CHECK
CONNECTOR
F orced starting
of the display, page 23-237
NAVIGATION VOI CE CONTROL SWI TCH
Test, page 23-241
AUDI O-HVAC S UBDI S PL AY UNIT
Outputs, page 23-41
GPS ANTENNA
23-128
DRIVER'S DOOR SPEAKER CROSSOVER NETWORK CONTROL UNIT
CROSSOVER NETWORK CONTROL UNIT Connector Inputs and Outputs, page 23-40
Connector Inputs and Outputs, page 23-40 Removal/Installation, page 23-121
SUBWOOFER XM RECEIVER
23-129
iMavI gafion Syst em
Gener al Operat i on
Ref er to t he navi gat i on syst em manual f or t he
navi gat i on syst em oper at i ng pr oc edur es.
Ant i -t hef t Feat ur e
The navi gat i on syst em and audi o uni t have a c oded theft
prot ect i on c i r c ui t Make sur e you have t he anti -theft
secur i t y c ode bef ore;
Di sconnect i ng t he battery.
9 Di sconnect i ng t he navi gat i on uni t connect or A (8P).
Removi ng t he No. 15 (10 A) f use f r om t he under -hood
f use/r el ay box.
After ser vi c e, r econnect power to t he navi gat i on uni t ,
and t ur n t he i gni ti on swi t ch to ON (II). Ent er t he 4-di gi t
anti -theft secur i t y c ode, t hen sel ec t Done.
If t he c ode cannot be f ound, use t he i nt eract i ve Net work
(iN) to look it up. You c an vi ew t he ser i al number in one
of t he E CU Info di agnost i c sc r eens (see page 23-176).
Al t er nat i vel y, you c an f i nd t he ser i al number on t he
under si de l abel whi c h i s l ocat ed on t he navi gat i on uni t
i n t he t runk.
When r epl aci ng t he navi gat i on uni t , be sur e to gi ve t he
c ust omer t he new anti -theft secur i t y c ode.
Sympt om Di agnosi s
Cer t ai n c i r c umst anc es and syst em l i mi t at i ons wi l l r esul t
i n oc c asi onal vehi c l e posi t i oni ng er r or s. S o me
c ust omer ' s may thi nk t hi s i ndi cat es a pr obl em wi t h t he
navi gat i on syst em when, in f act , t he syst em i s nor mal .
Keep t he f ol l owi ng i t ems in mi nd when i nt er vi ewi ng
c ust omer ' s about sympt oms of t he navi gat i on syst em.
Sel f -l nert i al Navi gat i on Li mi t at i ons
The l i mi t at i ons of t he sel f -i nert i al porti on of t he
navi gat i on syst em (the y aw rate sensor and t he vehi c l e
speed si gnal ) c an c ause di sc r epanc i es bet ween t he
vehi c l e' s act ual posi t i on and t he i ndi cat ed vehi c l e' s
posi t i on (GPS vehi c l e posi t i on).
The f ol l owi ng c i r c umst anc es may c ause vehi c l e
posi t i oni ng er r or s:
Movi ng t he vehi c l e wi t h t he engi ne st opped and t he
vehi c l e st opped, suc h as by f erry or t ow t ruck, or if t he
vehi c l e i s spun on a t urn t abl e.
Ti r e sl i ppage, c hanges i n t i re rol l i ng di amet er s, and
s ome dr i vi ng si t uat i ons may c ause di sc r epanc i es i n
t r avel di st anc es. Exampl es of t hi s i ncl ude:
- Cont i nuous ti re sl i ppage on a sl i pper y sur f ace
- Dri vi ng wi t h snow c hai ns mount ed
- Abnor mal ti re pr essur e
- Incorrect ti re si ze
- Fr equent l ane c hanges ac r oss a wi de hi ghway
- Cont i nuous dri vi ng on a st rai ght or gent l y cur vi ng
hi ghway
- Ver y bumpy r oads
Tol er anc es i n t he syst em and map i nac c ur ac i es
somet i mes li mi t how pr eci sel y t he vehi c l e' s posi t i on i s
i ndi cat ed. Exampl es of t hi s i ncl ude:
- Dri vi ng on r oads not shown on t he map (map
mat chi ng i s not possi bl e)
- Dri vi ng on a road t hat wi nds i n one di r ect i on, suc h
as a l oop bri dge, an i nt er change, or a spi r al parki ng
gar age
- Dri vi ng on a road wi t h a ser i es of shar p hai r-pi n
t ur ns
- Dri vi ng near a gr adual hi ghway exi t or t ransi t i on
- Dri vi ng on one of t wo c l ose paral l el r oads
- Maki ng many 90 degr ee t ur ns
Gl obal Posi t i oni ng Sy s t em (GPS) Li mi t at i ons
The GPS cannot det ect t he vehi c l e' s posi t i on or
el evat i on dur i ng t he f ol l owi ng i nst anc es:
For t he f i rst 5 to 10 mi nut es after r econnect i ng t he
battery (thi s pr oc ess c an t ake as l ong as 45 mi nut es).
When t he sat el l i t e si gnal s ar e bl ocked by tall
bui l di ngs, mount ai ns, t unnel s, l arge t r ees, i nsi de
parki ng st r uct ur es or l arge t r ucks.
When t he GPS ant enna i s bl ocked by met al l i c wi ndow
t i nt i ng or by an obj ect pl aced above it in t he vehi c l e.
The GPS ant enna r equi r es a cl ear unobst r uct ed vi ew
of t he sky.
When t her e i s no sat el l i t e si gnal output (si gnal output
i s somet i mes st opped f or sat el l i t e ser vi ci ng).
When t he sat el l i t e si gnal s ar e bl ocked by t he
operat i on of some el ect r oni c af t ermarket ac c essor i es
i ncl udi ng, but not l i mi t ed to non-OEM i n-dash
ent er t ai nment uni t s (radi o, CD pl ayer s/c hanger s,
r adar det ect or s and theft r ecover y syst ems) and cel l
phones pl aced near t he navi gat i on syst em.
23-130
The ac c ur ac y of t he GPS i s r educed duri ng t hese
i nst ances;
Met al l i c wi ndow ti nti ng above t he GPS ant enna.
When onl y t hree or l ess sat elli t e si gnal s ar e r ecei ved
(Four sat el l i t e si gnal s are requi red f or accur at e
posi t i oni ng).
When dri vi ng near hi gh t ensi on power l i nes.
o When t he sat elli t e control cent er s ar e exper i enci ng
pr obl ems.
Muti ng Logi c
Whenever t he navi gat i on syst em i s gi vi ng gui danc e, t he
front speaker s are mut ed. When t he navi gat i on voi c e
cont rol syst em i s bei ng used, all of t he speaker s ar e
mut ed. If t he HandsFr eeLi nk i s i n use, t he voi c e cont rol
syst em i s unavai l abl e and a message appear s onsc r een.
LCD Di spl ay Uni t Li mi t at i ons
NOTE: The sc r een i s not t ouch sensi t i ve. Us e t he
i nterface di al and buttons to sel ect i t ems on t he sc r een.
In col d t emper at ur es, t he di spl ay may st ay dark f or t he
fi rst 2 or 3 mi nut es until it war ms up.
When t he di spl ay i s too hot bec ause of di rect summer
sunl i ght , it wi l l r emai n dark unti l t he t emper at ur e
dr ops (you may see an error message di spl ayed
stati ng t hi s f act ).
When t he humi di t y i s hi gh and t he i nteri or
t emper at ur e i s l ow, the di spl ay may appear cl oudy.
The di spl ay wi l l cl ear up after s ome use.
Fi ngerpri nt s on t he scr een may be not i ceabl e. Cl ean
t he sc r een wi t h a soft, damp cl ot h. You may use a mi l d
cl eaner i nt ended for eye gl asses or comput er sc r eens.
To avoi d scr at chi ng t he panel , do not rub t oo har d or
use abr asi ve cl eaner s or shop t owel s.
Sympt om Dupl i cat i on
When t he sympt om c an be dupl i cat ed, veri f y t hat it i s
not a char act er i st i c of t he syst em. Revi ew t he
navi gat i on syst em manual and c ompar e it to a
known-good vehi c l e (wi th t he s ame sof t war e and
dat abase), under t he same condi t i ons. If t he sympt om
i s not t he s ame as t he known-good vehi c l e, f ol l ow t he
sel f -di agnost i c pr ocedur es and t he appr opr i at e
t r oubl eshoot i ng pr ocedur es.
When t he sympt om does not r eappear or onl y
r eappear s i nt ermi t t ent l y, ask t he c ust omer about t he
condi t i ons when t he sympt om oc c ur r ed.
- Al ways ask t he c ust omer to demonst r at e t he
pr obl em.
- Tr y to est abl i sh possi bl e user er r or or
mi sunder st andi ng of t he syst em.
- Tr y to est abl i sh if out si de i nt erf erence may have
been t he c ause.
- Tr y to dupl i cat i on t he sympt om under t he s ame .
condi t i ons t he cust omer exper i enc ed.
- Vi br at i on, t emper at ur e ext r emes, and moi st ur e
(dew, humi di t y) ar e f act ors that ar e di ffi cult to
dupl i cat e.
- Inspect t he vehi c l e for af t er-market el ect r oni c
devi c es (vehi cl e l ocat or s, amps , r adar det ect or s,
etc.) that may be hi dden.
[ NOTICE!
When t r oubl eshoot i ng navi gat i on syst em pr obl ems,
ensur e that t he known-good vehi c l e i s t he s ame
sof t war e ver si on year and model as t he vehi cl e bei ng
ser vi c ed. Mi xi ng i ncompat i bl e navi gat i on DVDs or ot her
syst em c omponent s can del ay t he t r oubl eshoot i ng
pr oc ess by cr eat i ng sympt oms or i ssues c ausi ng effects
unr el at ed to t he ori gi nal pr obl em.
(cont' d)
23- 131
Navi gati on Syst em
General Troubleshooting information
Ser vi c e Pr ecaut i ons
If you need to r epl ace t he navi gat i on uni t , you c an
back-up t he navi gat i on dat a and t r ansf er it to a new
navi gat i on uni t S ee S av e user s memor y (see page
23-186).
When t he battery i s di sc onnec t ed, t he i nt ernal GPS
cl ock r eset s i s r eset to 0:00. The cl ock r eset s to t he
cor r ect t i me after t he syst em f i ni shes GPS
i ni t i al i zat i on.
Bef ore di sconnect i ng t he bat t ery, make sur e you have
t he anti -theft c odes f or t he audi o syst em and t he
navi gat i on syst em. Al so obt ai n any PGM-FI or
t r ansmi ssi on DTCs and f reeze f r ame dat e (whi ch ar e
l ost when t he ECM/ PCM l oses power ).
After r econnect i ng t he bat t ery, you have to wai t to get
t he i ni ti al si gnal f r om t h e sat el l i t e. It wi l l t ak e f r o m 10
to 45 mi nut es.
Adj ust t he set up cl ock set t i ngs (ti me zone and dayl i ght
savi ngs) i n t he navi gat i on syst em.
Bef or e ret urni ng t he vehi c l e to t he c ust omer , ent er t he
anti -theft c odes f or t he audi o syst em and t he
navi gat i on syst em.
S f st em Ini t i al i zat i on
If t he navi gat i on syst em l oses power (like t he bat t ery
was di sc onnec t ed), t he navi gat i on syst em r equi r es
i ni t i al i zat i on. Onc e c ompl et ed, your syst em i s r eady to
use.
Thi s i ni ti ali zati on r equi r es t he following:
Ent er i ng t he 4-di gi t anti -theft secur i t y c ode to unl ock
t he syst em
GPS i ni ti ali zati on (may not be needed dependi ng of
t he l engt h of t i me t he syst em was wi t hout power )
Map mat chi ng to al i gn t he GPS to a l ocat i on on t he
map
{cont'd)
Ent er i ng t he Sec ur i t y Code
Any t i me t he navi gat i on syst em l oses power , you need
to ent er t he 4-di gi t anti -theft code on t he navi gat i on
syst em di spl ay. Thi s 4-di gi t code i s l ocat ed on a smal l
c ode car d t hat was gi ven to t he c ust omer . Ent er t he
4-di gi t c ode.
If t he navi gat i on syst em anti -theft code i s mi ssi ng use
t he i nt eract i ve Net work (iN) to look it up. You need t he
ser i al number f or t he navi gat i on uni t to do t hi s.
You c an vi ew t he ser i al number by ent eri ng t he
di agnost i c mode. Sel ec t Uni t Chec k f r om t he mai n
menu, t hen t he ECU info di agnost i c sc r een. Thi s gi ves
you t he ser i al number wi t hout r emovi ng t he navi gat i on
uni t.
The iN may di spl ay mor e t han one c ode f or a gi ven ser i al
number . Thi s i s bec ause ser i al number s ar e not uni que.
You may have to try mor e t han one 4-di gi t c ode.
If no code i s s hown, or i f t he code(s) gi ven do not wor k i n
t he navi gat i on uni t , cont act t he Aut omobi l e War r ant y
depar t ment . If t he c ode 0000 wor ks, r epl ace t he
navi gat i on uni t.
When r epl aci ng t he navi gat i on uni t or audi o uni t , make
sur e you gi ve t he c ust omer t he new anti -theft secur i t y
c ode.
GPS Ini t i al i zat i on
NOTE: You must park t he vehi c l e out si de wi t h a c l ear
vi ew of t he sout her n sky.
Dependi ng on t he lengt h of t i me t he battery was
di sc onnec t ed, your syst em may requi re GPS
i ni t i al i zat i on. If it does, t he f ol l owi ng sc r een appear s:
The navi gat i on s y s t em lost power and is acqui r i ng i t s
l ocat i on f r om t he GPS sat el l i t es. Thi s usual l y t ak es
l es s t han 10 mi nut es.
* St ar t t he engi ne.
* Par k t he vehi c l e In an open ar ea away f r om t r ees ,
power l i nes, and t al l bui l di ngs.
* Remove l oose ar t i c l es, cel l phones, or el ect r i cal
ac c es s or i es l oc at ed near t he GPS ant enna.
* I f t hi s s c r een i s di spl ayed r epeat edl y wh en st ar t i ng
t he vehi c l e, s ee your deal er .
23-132
If t hi s pr ocedur e i s not nec essar y, t he syst em pr oc eeds
di rect l y to t he Di scl ai mer sc r een. Duri ng i ni t i al i zat i on,
t he syst em sear c hes for all avai l abl e GPS sat el l i t es, and
obt ai ns t hei r orbi tal i nf ormat i on. Duri ng t hi s pr ocedur e
t he vehi cl e shoul d be out i n t he open wi t h a cl ear vi ew of
t he sky.
If t he navi gat i on syst em f i nds t he sat el l i t es pr oper l y, t hi s
box c l ear s, and c hanges to t he Di scl ai mer sc r een. If
wi t hi n 10 mi nut es t he syst em f ai l s to l ocat e a suf f i ci ent
number of sat el l i t es to l ocat e your posi t i on, t he
f ol l owi ng sc r een appear s.
It t hi s sc r een appear s, t urn off t he engi ne, t hen rest art
t he vehi cl e and move it to a di fferent l ocat i on. If t he
di scl ai mer sc r een appear s, t he GPS i ni ti ali zati on i s
compl et e.
NOTE:
The aver age acqui r i ng t i me i s l ess t han 10 mi nut es,
but it c an t ake as long as 45 mi nut es.
if t he syst em i s sti ll unabl e to acqui r e a si gnal , f ol l ow
t he i nst ruct i ons on t he sc r een. If t hi s sc r een appear s
agai n, go to t r oubl eshoot i ng f or t he GPS i con i s whi t e
or not shown {see page 23-225).
Ski p to a CS F sc r een by pushi ng t he MENU and t he
INFO but t ons at t he s ame t i me and you c an move to a
Syst em Li nks sc r een.
Map Mat chi ng
Thi s part of t he i ni ti ali zati on mat c hes t he GPS
coor di nat es wi t h a road on t he map sc r een. To do t hi s
part of t he pr ocedur e, make sur e that t he navi gat i on
syst em di spl ays a map, and dri ve t he vehi c l e on a
mapped road shown on t he map sc r een. Do not ent er a
dest i nat i on at t hi s t i me. When t he name of t he cur r ent
road you ar e dri vi ng on, appear s at t he bot t om of t he
sc r een, t he ent i re pr ocedur e i s compl et e. Your syst em i s
now ready to use.
Obt ai ni ng A Navi gat i on DVD
If t he navi gat i on DVD i s lost or damaged, or you need a
year l y updat ed navi gat i on DVD, you have t wo way s to
pur chase one. You c an ei t her cal l 888-549-3798, or or der
on-l i ne at www.hondanavi .c om.
Both met hods requi re a credi t c ar d. The DVD f or t hi s
model has a whi t e l abel , and cannot be or der ed t hr ough
t he part s syst em. The f ol l owi ng DVDs wi l l not wor k in
t hi s navi gat i on syst em:
Ear l i er model navi gat i on DVDs (bl ack, or ange, li ght
bl ue l abel and t he ol der ver si ons wi t h a whi t e l abel )
Map sof t war e pr ogr ams manuf act ur ed by ot her
c ompani es
DVD movi es, or DVDs cont ai ni ng audi o r ecor di ngs
Updat e DVDs ar e avai l abl e f or pur c hase usual l y in t he
fall of each year . They may cont ai n t he f ol l owi ng:
Enhanc ed maps and poi nt s of i nt erest (POI) c over age
Fi xes f or mi nor sof t war e bugs
Addi t i onal f eat ur es
NOTE:
Map mat chi ng must be done any t i me the DVD i s
r emoved or r epl aced.
Al ways or der navi gat i on DVDs on an as-needed basi s.
Duri ng a t ypi cal model year , eac h col or DVD may
under go a half a dozen sof t war e onl y ver si on
upgr ades to fi x mi nor i ssues on some or all model s
t he DVD suppor t s. Thi s i s nor mal . Usual l y onl y t he
letter at t he end of t he ver si on number c hanges, whi l e
t he dat abase (maps and POIs) r emai n unc hanged.
Never pr omi se your c ust omer f ut ure f ree updat es.
Ther e ar e no f ree pr ogr ams for updat i ng t he
navi gat i on DVD. Updat e DVDs ar e gener al l y avai l abl e
f or pur c hase each f al l . The onl i ne DVD or der si t e
pr ovi des i nf ormat i on when an updat e for a part i cul ar
col or DVD i s avai l abl e.
Damaged di sc s are not c over ed by war r ant y unl ess
t hey have been damaged by t he navi gat i on syst em.
Somet hi ng i s i nt erf eri ng wi t h t he s y s t em' s abi l i t y t o
acqui r e i t s l ocat i on. Chec k t he f ol l owi ng:
* The vehi c l e must be i n an open ar ea wi t h a c l ear
v i ew of t he sky.
* Remove sour c es of GPS i nt er f er ence l i ke met al l i c
wi ndow t i nt above ant enna, or el ect r i cal i t ems
near ant enna(see owner ' s manual f or det ai l s).
* Chec k GPS ant enna c abl e c onnec t i on.
* Rest ar t t he engi ne and r epeat t he GPS ac qui r e
pr ocedur e. If t he pr obl em per si st s, s ee your deal er .
(cont' d)
23-133
Lever -Loc ked Connect or
Disconnecting
To di sc onnec t t he connect or , pull t he l ever (A) whi l e
pushi ng t he lock t ab (B) down, t hen pul l t he connect or
(C).
(c ont 'd)
Connec t i ng
To c onnec t t he connect or , push t he connect or into t he
c onnec t or sl eeve (A). As t he connect or i s pr essed i n, t he
B
23-134
DVD Handl i ng and Cl eani ng
To avoi d damagi ng or l eavi ng f i ngerpri nt s on t he DVD,
al ways handl e it by t he edges and pl ace it i n a j ewel c ase
whenever it i s out si de t he navi gat i on uni t. Deep
sc r at c hes or f i ngerpri nt s on t he back of t he DVD c an
c ause i nt ermi t t ent reboot i ng or ot her syst em er r or s.
Smudges and f i ngerpri nt s c an be caref ul l y r emoved
usi ng a mi l d c l eaner and t i ssues desi gned to c l ean
eyegl asses. To cl ean a DVD, use a cl ean soft cl ot h. Ver y
gent l y wi pe ac r oss t he DVD f r om t he cent er to t he
out si de edge, never i n a ci r cul ar mot i on.
Ear l i est DVD Ver si on Appl i cat i on for Eac h
Model
Eac h navi gat i on DVD cont ai ns a map/POl (poi nt of
i nt erest ) dat abase and t he navi gat i on syst em sof t war e
f or eac h model that it suppor t s. Insert i ng anol der DVD
c an c ause pr obl ems si nc e it l acks t he sof t war e to
pr ovi de t he speci f i c f eat ur es needed for that model .
Unf ort unat el y, t he navi gat i on sof t war e does not det ect
or war n you that t he ver si on i s out dat ed, and it may even
appear to operat e.
NOTE: Repl aci ng a DVD j ust bec ause t he ver si on
number i s hi gher i s not al ways war r ant ed. A hi gher
sof t war e ver si on does not nec essar i l y mean it cont ai ns
newer sof t war e for your model . The DVD cont ai ns
sof t war e f or all model s that use t he same col or DVD, and
a r evi sed number may or may not have sof t ware f i xes or
upgr ades f or t he model i n quest i on.
Typi c al war ni ng sympt oms that an out dat ed DVD i s
bei ng used i ncl ude:
The Honda model navi gat i on sc r een di spl ays a Ac ur a
l ogo whi l e boot i ng up.
A newl y i nt roduced model f eat ure or current
ac c essor y may not di spl ay pr oper l y, and Ext ensi on
di spl ays i nst ead.
NOTE: Ext ensi on may be di spl ayed when usi ng Musi c
Li nk, but shoul d never be di spl ayed when XM i s
sel ec t ed.
The current st reet (the st reet bei ng dr i ven on) does not
appear properl y at t he bottom of t he map sc r een
di spl ay when t he vehi cl e i s dr i ven on a mai n r oad.
NOTE: If nec essar y, c ompar e t he operat i on to t he
navi gat i on syst em of t he s ame model and year vehi cl e
t hat has a cur r ent DVD.
(cont' d)
23-135
Nawi gat i on S y s t em
General Troubleshootinginformation(cont'd)
How to Identi fy Navi gat i on DVD Ver si ons,
and Mow t o Inspect A DVD for Damage
To det er mi ne t he navi gat i on ver si on on a part i cul ar
model , st art t he engi ne, t hen l ocat e t he navi gat i on uni t.
Open t he DVD door , and push t he ej ect button to ej ect
t he DVD. Hold t he DVD by t he edges, and check f or t hese
i t ems;
Chec k any offi ci al Honda ser vi c e websi t e for mor e
ser vi c e i nf ormat i on about t he navi gat i on DVDs.
The DVD l abel col or .
Read t he DVD ver si on on t he l abel , and note it on t he
repai r or der . The ver si on number i s near t he bottom of
t he l abel text (for exampl e, ver : 4.23A). You wi l l need
t hi s ver si on number :
- To veri f y that t he DVD ver si on i s appropri at e f or t he
vehi c l e. Chec k any offi ci al Honda ser vi c e websi t e f or
mor e ser vi c e i nf ormat i on.
- Any t i me you cal l Tec h Li ne regardi ng a navi gat i on
syst em i ssue.
- To answer c ust omer i nqui r es concer ni ng updat e or
c over age i ssue.
NOTE: Cust omer s may obt ai n DVDs f r om sour c es
out si de t he nor mal or der i ng pr oc ess. If you
det er mi ne t hi s i s t he c as e, r ec ommend that your
c ust omer pur c hase t he appropri at e DVD f r om t he
Honda Di sc Ful f i l l ment Cent er (see ORDERING A
DVD).
- Chec k t he under si de of t he DVD f or si gns of
mi shandl i ng. Deep sc r at c hes, or r andom sc r at c hes,
li ght swi r l mar ks, or f i ngerpri nt s c an c ause r andom
l ock-ups, r eboot s, errat i c voi c e r esponse, errat i c
posi t i oni ng er r or s, and DVD read or f ormat er r or s.
NOTE: A damaged DVD i s not c over ed under
war r ant y unl ess t he di sc i s damaged by t he
navi gat i on uni t. Damage by t he navi gat i on uni t
t ypi cal l y appear s as ci r cul ar sc r at c hes c aused by
somet hi ng rubbi ng agai nst t he DVD as it spi ns. The
damage may appear as ar c s or compl et e c i r c l es on
t he DVD r eadi ng sur f ac e.
- Veri f y that t he under si de of t he DVD i s si l ver , and
not a copy wi t h a bl ue col or . Copi es wi l l not wor k
properl y and c an c ause ot her sympt oms that mi mi c
har dwar e pr obl ems.
Incorrect l y col or ed DVDs bei ng put into navi gat i on
vehi c l es. Thi s c aus es t he syst em to ei t her di spl ay error
mes s ages , or c aus es syst em mal f unct i ons that mi mi c
a har dwar e pr obl em. Thi s r esul t s i n t he c ust omer
l eavi ng wi t h a mal f unct i oni ng navi gat i on syst em.
The DVD ver si on pr ovi ded to t he c ust omer i s out -of
dat e or i ncompat i bl e wi t h a part i cul ar model . Thi s
i nc onveni enc es your c ust omer by del ayi ng t he r epai r ,
or by c ausi ng addi t i onal (and unnec essar y) r et ur ns to
your deal er shi p.
The c ust omer exper i enc es bugs or ot her i ssues that
have al r eady been r esol ved in later ver si ons current l y
avai l abl e at t he f ul f i l l ment desk.
If t he DVD i s def ect i ve, or has any of t he i ssues
ment i oned above, ret urn t he vehi c l e to your c ust omer
and r ec ommend t hat t hey or der t he proper DVD f r om
t he Honda Di sc Ful f i l l ment Cent er .
NOTE: If it i s det er mi ned that t he navi gat i on uni t i s
def ect i ve (through t he appropri at e ser vi c e manual
t r oubl eshoot i ng pr ocedur es) and t he DVD wi l l not ej ect ,
or der a r epl acement navi gat i on uni t , and al so or der a
DVD f r om t he Honda Di sc Ful f i l l ment Cent er .
Navi gat i on DVDs do not c ome wi t h r epl acement
navi gat i on uni t s. If you ar e r epl aci ng a navi gat i on uni t *
bec ause it i s def ect i ve (f ol l owi ng appropri at e ser vi c e
manual t r oubl eshoot i ng), and t he DVD does not ej ect ,
or der a DVD f rom t he Di sc Ful f i l l ment Cent er .
23 136
How t o Answer Cust omer Quest i ons About
Navi gat i on Cover age
Some c ust omer s may ask quest i ons r egar di ng a ci t y,
addr ess, or POI (poi nt of i nt erest ) c over ed by t he
navi gat i on syst em. It i s better to veri f y a c over age
quest i on on an act ual vehi c l e t han to di sappoi nt your
cust omer by pr omi si ng c over age that may be
i ncompl et e or mi ssi ng in t hei r ar ea. The f ol l owi ng
suggest i ons c an be used to answer c over age i nqui r i es
f rom your c ust omer .
Is my addr ess c over ed by t he navi gat i on s y s t em?
Usi ng a cur r ent product i on vehi cl e (of t he s ame model ),
try and ent er t he c ust omer ' s addr ess (street fi rst) to see
if t hei r ar ea i s c over ed. Al ways ent er t he st r eet f i rst ,
because somet i mes t hei r ci ty may be i ncl uded in a
nei ghbori ng t ownshi p, or under some l arger
met ropol i t an ci ty name. If t he addr ess i s shown i n a
vehi c l e, you mi ght r ec ommend t hat your c ust omer
pur chase an updat e.
I s my ci t y c over ed by t he navi gat i on s y s t em?
For gener al quest i ons about whet her a ci t y i s c over ed,
vi ew t he map c over age link on t he DVD or der si t e. On
t he si t e, sel ec t a year , and sel ect a model , t hen cl i ck on
t he Cover age link. You t hen sel ect a st at e or pr ovi nce,
and t he ci t i es ar e l i st ed. Thi s does not guar ant ee t hat t he
c ust omer ' s road or addr ess i s in t he syst em. Veri f yi ng
on an act ual product i on vehi cl e i s al ways t he best
guarant ee t hat your i nf ormat i on i s accur at e.
The gas st at i on on my cor ner i s now a r est aur ant . Why
i s i t s t i l l i ncor r ect i n t he navi gat i on s y s t em?
For POI-rel at ed c ust omer quest i ons, expl ai n t hat
busi nesses ar e const ant l y movi ng, and t her e c an be a
consi der abl e lag in updat i ng t he mi l l i ons of POIs i n t he
syst em. The dat abase i s updat ed annual l y, and t he best
way to the veri f y whet her t he POI i s accur at e i s veri f y t he
i nqui ry on a cur r ent product i on vehi c l e.
Answer s to t hese and ot her quest i ons r egar di ng
cover age c an be f ound in t hese l ocat i ons:
In t he Fr equent l y Asked Quest i ons sect i on of t he
navi gat i on syst em manual .
At t he onl i ne DVD order si t e, by cl i cki ng on t he FAQs
link.
How do S f i nd t he l ocal addr ess of a busi ness
t hat i s part of a nat i onal chai n (for exampl e,
St ar buc ks)?
Ther e ar e t hr ee way s to f i nd t he l ocal addr ess to
busi nesses:
If you know t he phone number of t he busi ness, sel ect
Phone Number and ent er t he 10 di gi t phone number
(area c ode pl us seven di gi t number ).
Sel ec t Cat egor y, t hen Rest aur ant . Ent er t he keywor d
St ar . The r esul t i ng li st i ncl udes all r est aur ant s that
have t he l et t ers St ar anywher e i n t he name.
Sel ec t Name and ent er St ar buc ks. For mor e c ommon
busi ness names , like Mc Donal ds, you may have to
sear c h t hr ough a li st that i ncl udes ot her busi nesses
l i k e Mc Donal ds Wel di ng, Mc Donal ds Aut omot i ve, et c.
Why are some f eat ur es di fferent or mi ssi ng
compar ed t o my pr evi ous Ac ur a vehi cl e?
Har dwar e and sof t war e cont i nual l y go t hr ough updat es
and i mpr ovement s. Feat ur es may c hange or di sappear
over t i me based on t he navi gat i on syst em devel opment .
Precaut i on on Cust omer Navi gat i on DVD
" Sneak Pr evi ews"
Your c ust omer mi ght r equest a look (or sneak pr evi ew)
at f eat ur es in t he l at est navi gat i on sof t war e. You shoul d
never pr evi ew a navi gat i on DVD in a c ust omer ' s vehi cl e.
Insert i ng a newer DVD i nst al l s t he l at est sof t war e f rom
t he DVD into t he memor y of t he c ust omer ' s navi gat i on
syst em. When t he ori gi nal DVD i s r ei nst al l ed, t he newer
sof t war e r emai ns in memor y and i s often i ncompat i bl e
wi t h t he c ust omer ' s ori gi nal DVD Map and POI dat abase,
or sof t war e.
If your c ust omer wi shes to see t he latest navi gat i on
cover age or sof t war e f eat ur es, demonst r at e it on an
i n-st ock vehi c l e t hat al r eady has t he latest DVD ver si on.
If, a newer ver si on i s l oaded ei t her by t he deal er or t he
c ust omer , t he onl y r emedy i s to ent er t he navi gat i on
di agnost i c mode' s Ver si on sc r een and do a f or ced
downl oad. Chec k any offi ci al Honda ser vi c e websi t e f or
mor e i nf ormat i on about what pat ches may need
rei nst al l i ng.
(cont' d)
23-137
Navi gati on S f st em
How to Check Error History (Navigation
DTCs)-
NOTE: The navi gat i on DTCs cannot be ret ri eved wi t h t he
HDS.
The Er r or Hi story f eat ure i s to r ecor d i ntermi ttent
navi gat i on i ssues t hat oc c ur whi l e usi ng t he syst em by
set t i ng navi gat i on DTCs . Somet i mes t he c ust omer
compl ai nt cannot be dupl i cat ed. The er r or hi st ory may
r ecor d t he i nf ormat i on needed to di agnose t he pr obl em.
To check t he er r or hi st ory:
2. Pr ess and hol d t he MAP/ GUIDE, MENU, and CANCEL
but t ons for 3 s ec onds , or connect t he S CS ser vi c e
connect or to t he navi gat i on ser vi c e connect or l ocat ed
i n t he trunk (c c c p^ gc 23-237).
3. When t he Sel ec t Di agnosi s It ems menu i s di spl ayed,
sel ect Sel f -Di agnosi s Mode.
Sel ec t Di agnosi s It ems Return
Sel f - Di agnosi s Mode
(Nav i wi l l c h ec k i nt er nal f unc t i o n, c o nnec t i o ns , et c .
Per f o r m t h i s t es t wi t h v eh i c l e s t o p p ed and eng i ne r unni ng. )
Det ai l Inf or mat i on & Set t i ng
(I ndi vi dual Di ag no s t i c s c r een s t o c o nf i r m
a s pec i f i c d i ag no s t i c s c r een. )
4. When t he navi gat i on uni t has har d er r or c odes, t he
Er r or Hi st ory i con appear s yel l ow when t he Sel f
Di agnosi s mode (Syst em l i nks) sc r een i s di spl ayed.
When no har d er r or s ar e st or ed, t he i con appear s
gr ay. To vi ew t he er r or s wi t h t hei r DTC c odes, sel ect
t he error hi st ory i c on.
I System Links [ | Help | [ Exit Diag | | Return |
HE
Di s pl ay z | Navi.ECU~]
Rad i o
n
Met er
~T T ~
Er r o r
Hi s t o r y
Yaw
S e n s o r
Pr es s any i c o n if y o u w an t t o s ee d et ai l s .
5. Sel ec t Hard Er r or .
NOTE: Sof t er r or s are f or f act ory use onl y.
Er r or Hi st or y Return
Har d Er r or
Sof t Error
Har dwar e Er r or Hi st or y
8. The Har d Er r or sc r een di spl ays t he f ol l owi ng
i nf ormat i on f or eac h error:
The DTC t roubl e c ode f or t he er r or
A bri ef descr i pt i on of t he DTC code
The dat e and t i me when t he error occur r ed.
NOTE:
To s ee addi t i onal er r or s, use t he i nt erf ace di al to
sel ec t UP or DOWN.
Sel ec t Cl ear to del et e t he er r or hi st ory. The S av e
f eat ur e i s f or f act ory use onl y.
7. Us e t he DTC Sympt om Tr oubl eshoot i ng t abl e to
t r oubl eshoot t he error.
Har d Er r or | Return"
1. [ 2705] [HF L Di ag]
[2004:12:31 -19: 15: 55 ]
2. [ 2707] [ Mi c Di ag]
[2004:12:31 -19: 15: 50 ]
2. [ 2707 ] [ GPS Di ag: Ant enna ]
[2004:12:31 -19: 15: 12 ]
Cl ear S av e o/o m m
8. Cl ear t he DTCs.
9. Sel ec t Ret urn to exi t t he error hi st ory.
Sof t war e Er r or (Sof t error) Hi st or y
Sof t war e er r or s ar e not avai l abl e. They are f or f act ory
use onl y.
23-138
How to Cl ear Error Hi st ory
1. Do t he st eps in How to check Er r or Hi st ory.
2. Sel ec t Cl ear in t he er r or menu.
NOTE:
By sel ect i ng Cl ear , all sof t war e and har dwar e er r or s
st or ed in hi st ory ar e er ased at t he s ame t i me.
Sav e i s for f act ory use onl y.
Hard error hi st or y i s di spl ayed
Har d Er r or [ Ret ur n
1. [ 2705] [ HFL Di ag]
[2004:12:31 -19: 15: 55 ]
2. [ 2707] [ Mi c Di ag]
[2004:12:31 -19: 15: 50]
2. [ 2707 ] [ GPS Di ag: Ant enna]
[2004:12:31 -19: 15: 12]
Cl ear S av e
Sof t error hi st or y i s di spl ayed { Sof t war e er r or s ar e f or
f act or y use onl y)
Sof t Er r or | Return ~|
1. [ APPLI] [ 31000001] (2004:12:31 -19: 15: 08)
00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
2. [APPLD [ 31000001] (2007:03:01 -10: 53: 54)
00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
3. [APPLD [ 12004100] (2004:12:31 -19: 15: 12)
00000001 00000105 ffffff2c 00000000
I Cl ear || Sav~e~| 0/0 | A ll V I
3. After sel ect i ng Cl ear t hen sel ect i ng Yes , both Hard
Er r or hi st or y and Sof t Er r or hi st ory ar e c l ear ed at t he
s ame t i me.
Hard er r or hi st or y c l ear
Har d Er r or Return
Cl ear Er r or Hi st or y?
Yes No
Ue ar n bave 1 U 7 U r T T T vH
Sof t er r or hi st or y c l ear (Sof t war e er r or s ar e f or
f act or y use onl y)
Sof t Er r or
| Return |
Cl ear Er r or Hi st or y?
Yes No
Ue ar jf baVe j 07D 1 ZA 11 vH
4. Pr ess ret urn to exi t.
23-139
DTC Descr i pt i on Ci r cui t Fai l ur e Det ect i on Page Al so Chec k f or
1001 FROM syst em
Info Er r or
Flash ROM
management
Navi gat i on uni t i nt ernal
dat a error.
DTC
Tr oubl eshoot i ng
(see page 23-196)
L ow or weak
battery vol t age.
1101 Medi a Bus
Send Er r or
Medi a
condi t i on
moni t ori ng
medi a er r or .
DTC
Tr oubl eshoot i ng
(see page 23-196)
Low or weak
battery vol t age.
1201 DVD Hi gh
Temp
DVD dr i ve Navi gat i on uni t
t emper at ur e above t he
upper li mi t. Fai l ur e in
navi gat i on uni t f an ci rcui t .
DTC
Tr oubl eshoot i ng
(see page 23-197)
Low or weak
battery vol t age.
Hi gh t emper at ur e
ar ound t he
1202 DVD Low Temp DVD dri ve Navi gat i on uni t
t emper at ur e bel ow t he
l ower li mi t.
DTC
Tr oubl eshoot i ng
(see page 23-197)
Low or weak
battery vol t age.
Low t emper at ur e
ar ound t he
1301 GPS A n t en n a
Er r or
GPS
Ant enna
GPS Ant enna ci rcui t
mal f unct i on.
DTC
Tr oubl eshoot i ng
(see page 23-198)
Low or weak
battery vol t age.
1302 . GPS Rec ei ver
Er r or 1
GPS -
Rec ei ver
GPS ant enna ci rcui t
mal f unct i on.
GPS r ecei ver mal f unct i on.
DTC
Tr oubl eshoot i ng
(see page 23-199)
Low or weak
battery vol t age.
1303 GPS Rec ei ver
Er r or 2
GPS
Rec ei ver
GPS r ecei ver mal f unct i on.
DTC
Tr oubl eshoot i ng
(see page 23-200)
Low or weak
battery vol t age.
1304 Gyr o Er r or 1 Gyr o Navi gat i on uni t i nt ernal
gyr o mal f unct i on.
DTC
Tr oubl eshoot i ng
(see page 23-200)
Low or weak
battery vol t age.
1305 Gyr o Er r or 2:
ECU Temp
XX C
Gyr o Navi gat i on uni t i nt ernal
gyr o mal f unct i on.
DTC
Tr oubl eshoot i ng
(see page 23-201)
Low or weak
battery vol t age.
Exc essi vel y hi gh
or l ow trunk
t emper at ur e
l ocked navi gat i on
uni t cool i ng f an
1306 Vehi cl e Speed
Pul se
Vehi cl e
Speed Pul se
VS P ci rcui t mal f unct i on. DTC
Tr oubl eshoot i ng
(see page 23-201)
Check for F-CAN
DTCs.
1307 DVD Read
Er r or
DVD di sc Scr at ched/Di r t y DVD or
DVD ROM dri ve.
DTC
Tr oubl eshoot i ng
(see page 23-202)
Low or weak
battery vol t age.
1402 Audi o Er r or 2 CD Mechani cal mal f unct i on in
t he CD Changer .
DTC
Tr oubl eshoot i ng
(see page 23-202)
Low or weak
battery vol t age.
1403 Audi o Er r or 3 Di spl ay Mec hani c al mal f unct i on
wi t h navi gat i on di spl ay
uni t
DTC
Tr oubl eshoot i ng
(see page 23-203)
Low or weak
battery vol t age.
1409 Audi o Er r or 9 XM XM ant enna/ci r cui t
mal f unct i on.
DTC
Tr oubl eshoot i ng
(see page 23-203)
Low or weak
battery vol t age.
1501 Ai r con Er r or Ai r con Communi c at i on error
bet ween cl i mat e cont rol
uni t and navi gat i on uni t
(open/shor t ).
DTC
Tr oubl eshoot i ng
(see page 23-204)
Low or weak
battery vol t age.
23140
DTC Descr i pt i on Circuit Failure Detection Page Also Check for
2601 Di spl ay Di ag:
Connect
Di spl ay GA-NET Bus ci rcui t
mal f unct i on (open/shor t ).
ECU Bus ci rcui t mal f unct i on
(open/shor t ).
DTC
Tr oubl eshoot i ng
(see page 23-206)
ROM
Di spl ay Navi gat i on di spl ay uni t
i nt ernal mal f unct i on.
DTC
Tr oubl eshoot i ng
(see page 23-208)
RAM
Di spl ay Navi gat i on di spl ay uni t
DTC
Tr oubl eshoot i ng
(see page 23-208)
2605 H/U Di ag:
Connect
H/U GA-NET Bus ci rcui t
DTC
Tr oubl eshoot i ng
(see page 23-209)
2607 XM Di ag XM GA-NET Bus ci rcui t
XM ant enna ci rcui t
mal f unct i on.
DTC
Tr oubl eshoot i ng
(see page 23-210)
2609 VRAM Di ag ECU VRAM Navi gat i on uni t i nt ernal
VRAM mal f unct i on.
DTC
Tr oubl eshoot i ng
(see page 23-211)
2610 DRAM Di ag ECU DRAM Navi gat i on uni t i nt ernal
DRAM mal f unct i on.
DTC
Tr oubl eshoot i ng
(s eepage 23-211)
2701 GPS Di ag:
Ant enna
GPS GPS ant enna mal f unct i on. DTC
Tr oubl eshoot i ng
(see page 23-212)
2702 GPS Di ag:
Recei ver in
Navi ECU
GPS GPS ant enna mal f unct i on. DTC
Tr oubl eshoot i ng
(see page 23-212)
2703 Ai r con Di ag Ai r c on Communi c at i on error
bet ween cl i mat e cont rol
uni t and navi gat i on uni t
(open/shor t ).
DTC
Tr oubl eshoot i ng
(see page 23-204)
Check f or F-CAN
DTCs .
DTC set s if
Sel f -Di agnosi s
Mode i s run wi t h
t he i gni ti on
swi t ch i n
A CCE S S ORY (I).
2705 HFL Di ag HFL HandsFr eeLi nk cont rol uni t
DTC
Tr oubl eshoot i ng
(see page 23-213)
Chec k f or F-CAN
DTCs .
2706 Gyr o Di ag: ECU
Temp XX C
Gyr o Navi gat i on uni t i nt ernal
mal f unct i on.
DTC
Tr oubl eshoot i ng
(see page 23-215)
Exc essi vel y hi gh
or l ow t runk
t emper at ur e
Bl ocked
navi gat i on uni t
cool i ng f an
2707 Mi c Di ag Mi c Mi c ci r cui t mal f unct i on
(open/shor t ).
DTC
Tr oubl eshoot i ng
(see page 23-215)
23-141
S y m p t o m Di agnost i c pr ocedur e Al so c h e c k f or
Navi gat i on syst em st ays on t he G P S
i ni ti ali zati on sc r een
Sy s t em Ini ti ali zati on (see page
23-132)
Navi gat i on uni t
Internal def ect in GPS ant enna
GPS ant enna/cabl e i s
di sconnect ed or damaged
The wr ong col or DVD or ver si on i s
i nst al l ed
The DVD i s damaged or di rty
H a mess/ f u ses/swi t c h es
Vehi c l e posi t i on i con const ant l y
l eaves r oad, moves er r at i cal l y, or i s
di spl ayed ver y f ar f rom act ual
vehi c l e posi t i on
Sympt om Tr oubl eshoot i ng (see
page 23-218)
Navi gat i on uni t
Internal def ect in GPS ant enna
GPS ant enna/cabl e
ECM/ PCM (speed pul se)
Har ness/f uses/swi t c hes
Syst em al ways c omes up in i n-l i ne
di agnost i c mode
Fact or y di agnost i c sc r een in Li ne
Di ag (see page 23-180)
Navi gat i on syst em does not accept
secur i t y c ode
page 23-232)
Anti -theft code not mat chi ng
Navi gat i on f requent l y asks f or
anti -theft c ode and/or needs GPS
i ni ti ali zati on
page 23-234)
L oss of vol t age or poor gr ound
(G651)
Navi gat i on uni t
Sof t war e not up to dat e
- ar ness/f uses/swi t c hes
GPS i con i s whi t e or not shown Sympt om Tr oubl eshoot i ng (see
page 23-225)
Navi gat i on uni t
Internal def ect i n GPS ant enna
Af t ermarket ac c essor i es
connect ed to t he syst em
GPS ant enna/cabl e
o ar ness/f uses/swi t c hes
Vehi c l e i con wander s ac r oss t he
map when dr i vi ng (does not f ol l ow a
di spl ayed road) or map or vehi c l e
ICON spi ns
page 23-231)
Navi gat i on uni t
GPS ant enna/cabl e
ECM/ PCM (speed pul se)
o i nternal def ect in GPS ant enna
No pi ct ure i s di spl ayed Sympt om Tr oubl eshoot i ng (see
page 23-217)
i nst al l ed
Navi gat i on uni t
Navi gat i on di spl ay uni t
' -' em ess/f uses/swi t c h es
Pi ct ure has l i nes or rol l s Sympt om Tr oubl eshoot i ng (see
page 23-221)
Navi gat i on uni t
Pi ct ure i s mi ssi ng a col or or t one or
i s an odd col or
page 23-219)
i nst al l ed
Navi gat i on uni t
23-142
Di spl ay day/ni ght mode does not
wor k or does not wor k properl y
page 23-230)
Navi gat i on uni t
The gauge br i ght ness level i s set
to Hi gh in day or ni ght mode
o Navi gat i on di spl ay uni t
Gauge cont rol modul e (CAN)
o The navi gat i on di spl ay br i ght ness
i s not set to aut o mode
o ; } cr ness/ f uses/ swi t c hes
Syst em l ocks up or f r eezes
const ant l y
page 23-230)
Navi gat i on uni t
o The wr ong col or DVD or ver si on i s
i nst al l ed
Voi c e gui dance cannot be hear d, Is
broken up, or t her e i s st at i c
page 23-225)
Vol ume or voi ce f eedback set t i ng
(see Owner ' s manual )
Navi gat i on uni t
Audi o uni t /ampl i f i er
Q Har ness/f uses/swi t c hes
Voi c e cont rol does not wor k/r espond Sympt om Tr oubl eshoot i ng (see
page 23-226)
Navi gat i on uni t
Mi cr ophone
HandsFr eeLi nk cont rol unit
o Audi o uni t (ANC ci rcui t )
Navi gat i on cannot cont rol HVAC by
voi c e c ommand
page 23-229)
i nst al l ed
The DVD i s damaged or dirty
o Har ness/f uses/swi t c hes
o Wr ong navi gat i on uni t (model
code)
o DTCs
Navi gat i on cannot cont rol XM radi o Sympt om Tr oubl eshoot i ng (see
page 23-234)
i nst al l ed
Audi o uni t
o X M r ecei ver
Har ness
Navi gat i on cannot cont rol audi o
syst em
page 23-233)
Audi o uni t
Har ness
i nst al l ed
e DVD i s damaged or dirty
Int erf ace di al but t ons do not wor k Sympt om Tr oubl eshoot i ng (see
page 23-223)
Navi gat i on uni t
i nst al l ed
Int erf ace di al
Today' s Dest i nat i ons button i s di m
and not sel ect abl e i n t he Ent er
dest i nat i on by sc r een (grayed-out )
The c ust omer has not ent er ed a
group of l ocat i ons for Today' s
Dest i nat i ons. Thi s i s nor mal . The
button i s onl y sel ect abl e i f t he
c ust omer i s usi ng t hi s f unct i on.
S ee Owner ' s Manual
(cont' d)
23-143
Pr evi ous Dest i nat i ons button i s di m
and not sel ect abl e in t he Ent er
dest i nat i on by sc r een (grayed-out )
The vehi c l e or t he navi gat i on uni t
may be new, or t he c ust omer
del et ed t he dest i nat i on. Wi t hout a
st or ed pr evi ous dest i nat i on, t he
syst em can' t rout e to a pr evi ous
dest i nat i on. Ent er a dest i nat i on, and
al l ow t he syst em to rout e to it. Af t er
t he t ri p, t he Pr evi ous Dest i nat i ons
button wi l l be sel ec t abl e.
Addr ess cannot be f ound or syst em
gi ves poor routi ng
Veri f y pr oper oper at i on and
syst em l i mi t at i ons usi ng t he
navi gat i on syst em manual .
9 S ee Answer i ng c ust omer quest i on
about Navi gat i on c over age i n
gener al t r oubl eshoot i ng.
Dat abase l i mi t at i ons (addr ess not
i n dat abase)
Wr ong col or DVD i nst al l ed
Ol der dat abase
The map wi l l not di spl ay t he
Sout her n porti on of t he U.S. or t he
Nort hern part s of Canada
North Amer i c an c over age i s
di fferent f or U.S./Canada mar ket s.
S ee t he ver si on di agnost i c sc r een f or
det ai l s on c over age di f f er ences (see
page 23-192)
The wr ong col or ed DVD or market
DVD i s i nst al l ed
Navi gat i on di spl ay st ays on wi t h
i gni ti on swi t ch in L OCK (0)
page 23-233)
DVD r ead error mes s ages Sympt om Tr oubl eshoot i ng (see
page 23-229)
Navi gat i on uni t
The wr ong col or DVD or ver si on
i nst al l ed
Er r or mes s ages ar e di spl ayed S ee Er r or Message t abl e (see page
23-195)
Navi gat i on syst em wi l l not go
beyond t he di sc l ai mer sc r een and
di spl ays t he OK button
Al so see Int erf ace Di al but t ons do
not wor k
The wr ong col or DVD or ver si on
i nst al l ed
Navi gat i on uni t
The navi gat i on anti -theft c ode c ar d i s
lost or mi ssi ng
S ee anti -theft f eat ur e (see page
23-130)
The vehi c l e i con l ags behi nd when
t he vehi c l e t ur ns
S ee sel f -i nert i al navi gat i on
l i mi t at i ons (see page 23-130)
GPS ant enna/cabl e
Navi gat i on sc r een i s darker t han
nor mal or t akes t i me to bri ght en
when it i s col d
S ee L CD uni t l i mi t at i ons (see page
23-131)
Compar e to a known-good vehi c l e
The navi gat i on cl ock i s off by 1 to 3
hour s after r epl aci ng t he navi gat i on
uni t
S ee ser vi c e pr ecaut i ons (see page
23-132)
Do map mat chi ng (see page
23-133)
GPS ant enna/cabl e
Check and adj ust t he cl ock set t i ngs
A new navi gat i on DVD i s needed S ee obt ai ni ng a navi gat i on DVD (see
page 23-133)
Ti me i s not cor r ect Reset Ti me Adj ust ment in set -up
S ee ser vi c e pr ecaut i ons (see page
23-132)
i nst al l ed
Reset Ti me Adj ust ment in set -up
A def ect i ve GPS r ecei ver in t he
navi gat i on uni t
The DVD i s sc r at c hed or di rty S ee DVD Handl i ng and Cl eani ng (see
page 23-135)
Navi gat i on uni t
23 144
Sympt om Di agnost i c pr ocedur e Al so c hec k f or
The wr ong DVD was i nst al l ed and
now t he syst em does not f unct i on
properl y
S ee Precaut i on c ust omer Sneak
Pr evi ews (see page 23-137)
Install t he correct ver si on DVD
Chec k any offi ci al Honda ser vi ce
websi t e for
A POI cannot be f ound S ee how to answer c ust omer
quest i ons about navi gat i on
c over age (see page 23-137)
The dat abase may be out of dat e.
Conf i r m t he POI exi st s in a cur r ent
product i on vehi c l e
A specific ci ty cannot be f ound S ee how to answer c ust omer
quest i ons about navi gat i on
c over age (see page 23-137)
9 The dat abase may be out of dat e.
Conf i r m t he addr ess exi st s i n a
. cur r ent product i on vehi c l e
An In Li ne Di agnosi s sc r een appear s
ever y t i me vehi cl e i s st ar t ed
S ee f act ory di agnost i c sc r een In Li ne
Di ag (see page 23-180)
The Ac ur a Gl obe Sc r een (not t he
Honda Gl obe Sc r een) appear s ever y
t i me t he vehi c l e i s st art ed
Sympt om t r oubl eshoot i ng (see page
23-235)
Al so see t he sympt om t he wr ong
DVD was i nst al l ed and now t he
syst em does not f unct i on properl y
Navi gat i on uni t wi l l not ej ect or
accept t he navi gat i on DVD
Sympt om t r oubl eshoot i ng (see page
23-236)
23-145
The navi gat i on syst em i s a hi ghl y-sophi st i cat ed, hybr i d l ocat i ng syst em t hat us es sat el l i t es and a map dat abase to s how
you wher e you ar e and to hel p gui de you to a desi r ed dest i nat i on.
The navi gat i on syst em r ec ei ves si gnal s f r om t he gl obal posi t i oni ng syst em (GPS), a net work of 24 sat el l i t es i n orbi t
ar ound t he ear t h. By r ecei vi ng si gnal s f r om sever al of t hese sat el l i t es, t he navi gat i on syst em c an det er mi ne t he l at i t ude,
l ongi t ude, and el evat i on of t he vehi c l e. In addi t i on, si gnal s f r om t he s y s t em' s y aw rate sensor and t he ECM/ PCM (vehi cl e
speed pul se) enabl e t he syst em to keep t rack of t he vehi c l e' s di rect i on and speed of t r avel .
Thi s hybr i d syst em has advant ages over a syst em t hat i s ei t her ent i rel y sel f -cont ai ned or one that r el i es t ot al l y on t he
GPS . For exampl e, t he sel f -cont ai ned port i on of t he syst em c an keep t rack of vehi c l e posi t i on even when sat el l i t e si gnal s
c annot be r ec ei ved. When t he navi gat i on syst em i s on, t he GPS c an keep t rack of t he vehi c l e posi t i on even when t he
vehi c l e i s t r anspor t ed by ferry-
The navi gat i on syst em appl i es all l ocat i on, di r ect i on, and speed i nf ormat i on to maps and c al c ul at es a rout e t o t he
dest i nat i on ent er ed. As you dr i ve to t hat dest i nat i on, t he syst em pr ovi des both vi sual and audi o gui dance.
Thi s navi gat i on syst em al so has voi c e r ecogni t i on t hat al l ows voi c e cont r ol of most of t he navi gat i on f unct i ons. The
Navi gat i on TAL K and BACK but t ons on t he st eer i ng wheel act i vat e t he voi c e cont r ol . The voi c e cont rol al so al l ows
cont rol of t he audi o and cl i mat e f unct i ons. The max br i ght ness si gnal i s pas s ed to t he navi gat i on uni t t hr ough t he F-CAN
bus.
The i l l umi nat i on si gnal (headl i ght s ON) i s used by t he navi gat i on uni t to aut omat i cal l y swi t c h t he di spl ay bet ween Ni ght
and Day br i ght ness modes. When t he gauge cont rol modul e br i ght ness cont r ol i s set to max br i ght ness, t he navi gat i on
syst em st ays i n t he day mode, even wi t h t he headl i ght s on.
The GA- NET II c ommuni c at i on bus pas s es i nf ormat i on back and forth bet ween t he navi gat i on di spl ay uni t , t he
navi gat i on uni t and t he audi o syst em. The i nf ormat i on passed on t hi s bus i s audi o set t i ngs di r ect ed by t he navi gat i on
uni t.
The Co mm. Bus c onnec t s t he HFL , and navi gat i on uni t s. Thi s bus suppor t s t hese f unct i ons:
The navi gat i on uni t s ends a POI phone number (on t he Cal cul at e rout e to sc r een) to t he HandsFr eeLi nk cont rol uni t f or
di al i ng.
The navi gat i on syst em coul d downl oad t he cel l ul ar phone book and cal l phone number s i n t he book.
The navi gat i on uni t c an s ens e t he st at us of a phone t hat i s pai r ed to t he HFL.
23-146
S f st em Di agr am
FRONT SPEAKER
(NAVIGATION
VOI CE OUTPUT)
CLIMATE
CONTROL UNIT
HVACand
TEMPERATURE
SI GNAL
AUDIO-HVAC
SUBDI SPLAY
UNIT
CROSSO
NETWO&
CONTRO
VER
! K
L UNI TS
BACKUP
CAMERA
(option)
NAVI GATI ON
DISPLAY UNIT
7^
PI CTURE/ COLOR SI GNAL
( RGBcolor signals)
REVERSE RELAY
( REVERSE SI GNAL)
ILLUMINATON
SI GNAL
XM ANTENNA
(SATELLITE AND
TERRESTRAIL)
STEREO
AMPLIFIER
GA-NET
BUS
APPROVED
BLUETOOTH
ENABLED
CELL PHONE
XM RECEIVER
JGA-N
HFL TAIL/BACK
SWITCH
AUDIO UNIT
GA-NET
BUS
GA-NET
BUS
AUDIO DISC
CHANGER
HFL VOICE&MUTE
NAVI
VOICE OUT
and
MUTE SIGNAL
HANDSFREELINK
CONTROL UNIT
G3
MICROPHONE
FORVR
HFL-NAVIGATION-ANC
MICROPHONE
(Buit into the roof console)
COMMUNICATION
SIGNAL (B-CAN HI)
NAVIGATION UNIT
YAW RATE
SENSOR
GPS
RECEIVER
SUNLIGHT CLIMATE
SENSOR CONTROL UNIT
INTERFACE DIAL
(KNOB AND BUTTONS)
CAN
COMMUNICATION
SIGNAL (F-CAN)
I COMMUNICATION
SIGNAL (B-CAN LO)
GAUGE CONTROL
MODULE
ECM/PCM
ECM/PCM (VEHICLE
SPEED SIGNAL)
GPS ANTENNA
NAVIGATION
TALK/BACK BUTTONS
(cont' d)
23-147
Navi gat i on Funct i on
The navi gat i on syst em i s c omposed of t he navi gat i on uni t , t he ECM/ PCM (vehi cl e speed pul se), t he GPS ant enna,
mi c r ophone, t he voi c e cont rol swi t c h, audi o uni t , and t he audi o-HVAC subdi spl ay uni t.
Func t i on Di agr am
Reception of radio
wave from satellite
Reception of radio
wave from satellite
ECM/PCM
(VEHICLE SPEED PULSE)
Detection of
travel distance
Receive
information
NAVIGATION UNIT
GPS RECEIVER
Detection of
vehicle position
NAVI VOICE
CONTROL SWITCH MICROPHONE
HandsFreeLink
CONTROL UNIT
HFL
SWITCH
Voice Detect
recognition cell phone
GPS tuning
YAW RATE SENSOR
Detection of
direction change
Perception of
vehicle position
AUDIO UNIT
AUDIO-HVAC
SUBDISPLAY UNIT
Audio
guidance
VOICE
PROMPTS
Data process concerning n
and vehicle position
Correction of
map matching
Map scroll
change of reduced
scale of map
DVD-ROM
Reverse
signal
NAVIGATION DISPLAY UNIT
1
Guide
processing
Destination
Backup
camera
Interface dial
switch
BACKUP
CAMERA
(option)
GA-Net Bus Conf i gur at i on
The GA-Net bus pas s es audi o and navi gat i on c ommands t hr oughout t he navi gat i on and audi o c omponent s. Thes e
c ommands i ncl ude navi gat i on audi o/XM sel ec t i ons by voi c e, and XM st at i on and musi c ti tle names. Bec ause t he ent i re
bus i s i nt er connect ed bet ween c omponent s, an open or shor t i n t he GA-Net bus har ness may c aus e any or all of t hese
f unct i ons to bec ome i noper at i ve.
Audio Unit
Navigation Display Unit
XM Receiver
Audio Disc Changer
23-148
Vehi c l e Speed Pul se
The vehi c l e speed pul se i s sent by t he ECM/ PCM. The ECM/ PCM r ec ei ves a si gnal f r om t he out put shaf t (count ershaf t )
speed sensor , t hen pr oc esses t he si gnal and t r ansmi t s it to t he gauge cont rol modul e and ot her s y s t ems .
ECM/PCM
NAVIGATION UNIT
- Sensor power
DI S TANCE
DETECTI ON
CIRCUIT
Yaw Rat e-Lat er al Ac c el er at i on Sens or
The y aw rat e-l at eral accel er at i on sensor (l ocat ed i n t he navi gat i on uni t) det ect s t he di rect i on c hange (angul ar speed) of
t he vehi c l e. The sensor i s an osci l l at i on gyr o bui lt into t he navi gat i on uni t.
Sens or El ement St r uc t ur e
The sensor el ement i s shaped like a t uni ng f ork, and it c onsi st s of t he pi ezoel ect ri c par t s, t he met al bl ock, and t he
suppor t pi n. Ther e ar e f our pi ezoel ect ri c part s: one to dri ve t he osc i l l at or s, one to moni t or and mai nt ai n t he osci l l at i on at
a regul ar f r equency, and t wo to det ect angul ar vel oci t y. The t wo osci l l at or s, whi c h have a 90-degr ee t wi st in t he cent er ,
ar e connect ed at t he bottom by t he met al block and suppor t ed by t he suppor t pi n. A det ect i on pi ezoel ect ri c part i s
at t ached to t he t op of each osci l l at or . The dr i vi ng pi ezoel ect ri c part i s at t ached to t he bottom of one osci l l at or , and t he
moni t ori ng pi ezoel ect ri c part i s at t ached to t he bottom of t he ot her osci l l at or .
Osci l l at i on Gyr o Pr i nci pl es
The pi ezoel ect ri c part s have el ect r i c/mechani cal t r ansf er char act er i st i cs. They bend ver t i cal l y when vol t age is appl i ed to
both si des of t he par t s, and vol t age i s gener at ed bet ween both si des of t he pi ezoel ect ri c part s when t hey are bent by an
ext ernal f or ce. The osci l l at i on gyr o f unct i ons by uti li zi ng t hi s char act er i st i c of t he pi ezoel ect ri c part s and Cor i ol i s f or ce.
(Cori ol i s f or ce def l ect s movi ng obj ect s as a r esul t of t he ear t h' s rotati on.) In t he osci l l at i on gyr o, t hi s f orce moves t he
sensor el ement when angul ar vel oci t y i s appl i ed.
(cont'd)
3-149
Oper at i on
1. The dri vi ng pi ezoel ect r i c part osci l l at es t he osci l l at or by repeat edl y bendi ng and ret urni ng when an AC vol t age of
6 kHz i s appl i ed t o t he part. The moni t or i ng-si de osci l l at or r esonat es bec ause it i s connect ed to t he dr i vi ng-si de
osci l l at or by t he met al block.
2. The moni t ori ng pi ezoel ect r i c part bends in proport i on to t he osci l l at i on and out put s vol t age (the moni t or si gnal ). The
navi gat i on uni t cont rol ci rcui t cont r ol s t he dr i ve si gnal to st abi l i ze t he moni t or si gnal .
3. When t he vehi c l e i s st opped, t he det ect i ng pi ezoel ect r i c part s osci l l at e ri ght and left wi t h t he osci l l at or s, but no si gnal
i s output bec ause t he part s ar e not bent (no angul ar f or ce).
4. When t he vehi c l e t ur ns t o t he ri ght , t he sensor el ement moves i n a ci r cul ar mot i on wi t h t he ri ght osci l l at or bendi ng
f or war d and t he left osci l l at or bendi ng r ear war d. The amount of f or war d/r ear war d bend var i es accor di ng to t he
angul ar vel oci t y of t he vehi c l e.
5. The det ect i ng pi ezoel ect r i c part s out put vol t age (the y aw rate si gnal ) accor di ng to t he amount of bend. The amount of
vehi c l e di rect i on c hange i s det er mi ned by measur i ng t hi s vol t age.
Gl obal Posi t i oni ng S y s t em (GPS)
The gl obal posi t i oni ng syst em (GPS) enabl es t he navi gati on syst em to det er mi ne t he current posi ti on of t he vehi cl e by
usi ng t he si gnal s t r ansmi t t ed f rom t he sat el l i t es in orbi t ar ound t he ear t h. The sat el l i t es t r ansmi t t he sat el l i t e
i dent i f i cat i on si gnal , orbi t i nf or mat i on, t r ansmi ssi on t i me si gnal , and ot her i nf ormat i on. When the GPS r ecei ver r ecei ves
a si gnal f rom f our or mor e sat el l i t es si mul t aneousl y, it cal cul at es t he cur r ent posi t i on of t he vehi cl e based on t he
di st ance to each sat el l i t e and t he sat el l i t e' s posi t i on in its r espect i ve orbi t.
Posi t i on det ect i on Image wi t h GPS sat el l i t e
Pr ec i si on of GPS
The pr eci si on of t he GPS var i es accor di ng to t he number of sat el l i t es f r om whi c h si gnal s are r ecei ved and t he vi ew of t he
sky. The acur acy i s i ndi cat ed by t he col or of t he GPS i con shown on t he di spl ay.
GPS ICON
COL OR
NUMBER OF
S ATEL L I TES
CONDITION -DESCRIPTION
No GPS i con None Faul t y recept i on The GPS can' t be uti li zed due to a faulty
GPS r ecei ver , open in t he wi r e, or other
f aul t or i nt erf erence.
No GPS i con
2 or l ess Impossi bl e to detect vehi c l e
posi t i on
GPS f unct i on i s nor mal . The sat el l i t e
si gnal s r ecei ved by the GPS ar e t oo f ew to
det ect t he vehi cl e posi t i on.
Whi t e GPS i con 3 Vehi cl e posi t i on det ect abl e in
2 di mensi ons
The l ongi t ude and lati tude of t he vehi cl e
posi t i on can be det ect ed. (Less pr eci se t han
det ect i on in t hree di mensi ons)
Gr een GPS i con 4 or mor e Vehi cl e posi t i on det ect abl e in
3 di mensi ons (el evat i on
di spl ayed)
The l ongi t ude, lati tude and t he alti tude of
t he vehi c l e posi t i on can be det ect ed. (More
pr ec i se t han det ect i on in t wo di mensi ons)
GPS Ant enna
The GPS ant enna ampl i f i es and t r ansmi t s t he si gnal s r ecei ved f r om t he sat el l i t es to t he GPS recei ver.
GPS Rec ei ver and Cl oc k
The GPS r ecei ver i s bui lt into t he navi gat i on uni t. It cal cul at es t he vehi c l e posi t i on by recei vi ng t he si gnal f rom t he GPS
ant enna. The current t i me, vehi c l e posi t i on and si gnal recept i on condi t i on i s t r ansmi t t ed f rom the GPS r ecei ver to t he
navi gat i on uni t to adj ust vehi cl e posi t i on.
Navi gat i on Uni t
The navi gat i on uni t cal cul at es t he vehi c l e posi t i on and gui des you to t he dest i nat i on. The uni t perf orms map mat chi ng
cor r ect i on, GPS cor r ect i on, and di st ance t uni ng. It al so cont r ol s t he menu f unct i ons and t he DVD-ROM dr i ve, and
i nt erpret s voi ce c ommands. Wi t h cont rol of all t hese i t ems, t he navi gat i on uni t makes t he navi gat i on pi cture si gnal , t hen
it t r ansmi t s t he si gnal to t he navi gat i on di spl ay unit and audi o dri vi ng i nst r uct i ons to t he audi o uni t.
(cont' d)
23-151
Cal c ul at i on of Vehi c l e Posi t i on
The navi gat i on uni t cal cul at es t he vehi c l e posi t i on (the dr i vi ng di rect i on and t he cur r ent posi t i on) by r ecei vi ng t he
di r ect i onal c hange si gnal s f r om t he y aw rate sensor and t he t ravel di st ance si gnal s f r om vehi c l e speed pul se (VSP)
si gnal of t he ECM/ PCM.
Hap Wat chi ng Tuni ng
The map mat chi ng t uni ng i s ac c ompl i shed by i ndi cat i ng t he vehi c l e posi t i on on t he r oads on t he map. The map dat a
t r ansmi t t ed f r om t he DVD-ROM i s c hec ked agai nst t he vehi c l e posi t i on dat a, and t he vehi c l e posi t i on i s i ndi cat ed on t he
near est r oad. Map mat chi ng t uni ng does not oc c ur when t he vehi c l e t r avel s on a road not shown on t he map, or when
t he vehi c l e posi t i on i s f ar away f rom a road on t he map.
GPS Tuni ng
The GPS t uni ng i s ac c ompl i shed by i ndi cat i ng t he vehi c l e posi t i on as t he GPS ' s vehi cl e posi t i on. The navi gat i on uni t
c ompar es its cal cul at ed vehi cl e posi t i on dat a wi t h t he GPS vehi cl e posi t i on dat a. If t her e i s l arge di f f erence bet ween t he
t wo, t he i ndi cat ed vehi c l e posi t i on i s adj ust ed to t he GPS vehi c l e posi t i on.
Di st anc e Tuni ng
The dieter
1
?** *
r o r 5
^
f h
d i f f e r e n t h ^t w A A n t h A t r a wi di st ance si gnal f rom t he VS P and t he di st ance dat a on t he
map. The navi gat i on uni t c ompar es i ts cal cul at ed vehi c l e posi t i on dat a wi t h t he GPS vehi c l e posi t i on dat a. The
navi gat i on uni t t hen dec r eases t he t uni ng val ue when t he vehi c l e posi t i on i s al ways ahead of t he GPS vehi cl e posi t i on,
and it i nc r eases t he t uni ng val ue when t he vehi c l e posi t i on i s al ways behi nd t he GPS vehi c l e posi t i on.
Rout e Gui danc e . '
The navi gat i on uni t can cal cul at e di fferent rout es to a sel ec t ed dest i nat i on. You have f i ve opt i ons:
Di rect Rout e Cal cul at e a route t hat i s t he most di rect .
Eas y Rout eCal cul at e a route t hat mi ni mi zes t he number of t ur ns needed.
Mi ni mi ze Fr eeways Cal cul at e a rout e t hat avoi ds f r eeway t r avel . If that i s not possi bl e, keep t he amount of f r eeway
t r avel to a mi ni mum. Thi s i s not sel ect abl e (button gr ayed out) for t ri ps great er t han 100 mi l es.
Mi ni mi ze Tol l Roads Cal cul at e a rout e that avoi ds, or mi ni mi zes t ravel on toll r oads. Thi s i s not sel ect abl e (button
gr ayed out) for t ri ps great er t han 100 mi l es.
Maxi mi ze Fr eeways Ca leu I ate a rout e that us es f r eeways as muc h as possi bl e.
Audi o Gui danc e
The navi gat i on uni t t r ansmi t s audi o dr i vi ng i nst r uct i ons bef ore ent eri ng an i nt ersect i on or passi ng a j unct i on. The audi o
i nst r uct i ons c ome t hr ough t he audi o uni t to t he f ront speaker s.
NOTE: The front speaker s ar e mut ed whenever t he navi gat i on syst em i s gi vi ng gui dance c ommands, and all of t he
speaker s when t he voi ce cont rol syst em i s bei ng used.
Mut i ng Si gnal Logi c '
The audi o mut i ng l ogi c i s or chest r at ed by t he audi o uni t. The audi o uni t det er mi nes what audi o sour c e has pri ori ty to
use t he speaker s.
The pri ori ty of t he audi o sour c es i s as f ol l ows:
HFL has t he hi ghest pri ori t y, f ol l owed by navi gat i on, and f i nal l y t he r adi o/CD-DVD pl ayer . The pri ori ty i s passed by HFL
to t he audi o uni t by dedi cat ed mut e wi r es. The navi gat i on mut e si gnal i s passed to t he st er eo ampl i f i er.
The navi gat i on uni t t empor ar i l y di sabl es t he voi c e cont rol but t ons, but al l ows gui dance to be hear d. In addi t i on, t he
audi o uni t suppr esses t he output f rom t he audi o uni t , XM r ecei ver , di sc pl ayer , or ot her audi o ac c essor i es.
When t he navi gat i on syst em sends out a voi c e route gui dance c ommand, t he audi o f ront speaker i s mut ed, and t he
navi gat i on voi ce i s hear d in t he front speaker s.
When t he navi gat i on voi ce cont rol syst em i s in use, all of t he speaker s ar e mut ed, and t he navi gat i on voi c e pr ompt s are
hear d f r om t he front speaker s.
Sol ar Angl e
The cl i mat e cont rol uni t uses t he sun' s angl e, al ong wi t h t he sunl i ght sensor to cont rol t he dr i ver /passenger A/ C ai r f l ow.
Off l o ad Tr ac ki ng (br ead-cr umbs)
Off road t racki ng dot s that c an be f ol l owed on t he map ret race your rout e back to a mapped (di gi ti zed) r oad.
Cl ock and Ti me Zone
The cl ock set up al l ows you to set dayl i ght savi ngs t i me, aut o t i me zone and t i me adj ust ment .
DVD- ROM
The navi gat i on DVD i ncl udes:
Map Dat a
Poi nt of i nt erest (POI)
Navi gat i on sof t war e
Audi o Uni t
The audi o uni t r ec ei ves t he voi c e gui dance i nst r uct i ons f r om t he navi gat i on uni t and t r ansmi t s t he i nst ruct i ons t hrough
t he front speaker even when t he audi o syst em i s in use. The audi o uni t al so uses t he HFL-navi gat i on-ANC mi cr ophone
si gnal to check t he ANC out put .
NOTE: If t he navi gat i on vol ume and/or voi c e f eed back i s t ur ned off, t hi s f eat ur e i s di sabl ed.
(cont' d)
23-153
Di spl ay Uni t
The di spl ay uni t us es a li qui d cr yst al di spl ay (LCD). The L CD i s a 8-i nch-di agonal , t hi n f i l m t r ansi st or (TFT), st ri p t ype wi t h
336,960 pi ct ure el ement s. The col or f i l m and f l uor escent li ght ar e lai d out on t he back of t he l i qui d cr yst al f i l m.
DISPLAY UNIT
23-154
Mi cr ophone (Mi c)
Rec ei ves voi ce c ommands and t r ansmi t s t hem to t he navi gat i on uni t or HandsFr eeLi nk cont rol uni t or act i ve noi se
cancel l at i on (ANC) for i nt erpret at i on.
These syst ems shar e the same mi cr ophone.
NAVIGATION TAL K But t on
Act i vat es t he voi c e cont rol syst em i n t he navi gat i on uni t to accept voi c e c ommands.
NAVIGATION BACK But t on
Ret ur ns t he di spl ay to t he pr evi ous sc r een (si mi l ar f unct i on as t he CANCEL button).
NAVI GATI ON/ VOI CE CONTROL HFL TAL K BUTTON
DI SPL AY MODE BUTTON
(DAY/ NI GHT/ OFF)
(cont ' d)
23-155
Glossary
The following is a glossary of terms pertaining to the Voice Recognition Navigation System.
I tem Definition
Address Book The HF L system can import a copy of the phone book from and approved HF L compatible
phone and can display the imported phone book on the navigation screen as the address
book. See the Owner's Manual for more information.
B-CAN Body CAN Bus (see CAN)
B readcrumbs (White dots) Off road tracking dots that can be followed on the map to retrace your route back to a mapped
(digitized) road. This function can be turned on/off in Setup screen 1.
CAN Controller Area Network. This communication network allows processors in the vehicle to
send/receive information. The fuel pulses used by the MID trip computer are received from
the ECM/PCM using the F -CAN (F ast Controller Area Network) bus.
CPU Central Processing Unit. The main device within the navigation unit that coordinates the rest
of the electronic functions.
CSS Output shaft (Countershaft) Speed Signal. This sensor reads the output shaft speed at the
transmission and provides a speed pulse to the ECM/PCM.
Database This consists of the Map data, and the POI (Points Of Interest) data stored on the DVC
DB W Drive By Wire. Allows electrical control of the throttle without the need of a mechanical
linkage.
DCA Detailed Coverage Area. Main metropolitan areas in the Lower 48 states, and Canada are
mapped to this level. See the Navigation system manual for a list of these areas.
DTC Diagnostic Trouble Codes. Use the HDS tablet to obtain, and troubleshoot the cause of these
codes.
Dead Reckoning The use of the speed signal, and yaw rate sensor to position the vehicle on the map even
when tall buildings, or driving in a tunnel obscures the GPS signal.
Digitized Road A road that appears on the navigation screen. The road name will appear at the bottom of the
navigation screen. If the user drives off-road the navigation system displays Not on a digitized
road, and after 1/2 mile, the breadcrumbs appear.
Disclaimer Screen Screen containing cautionary information. It is meant to be read carefully, and acknowledged
by the customer when using the navigation system.
DVD or
DVD-ROM
Digital Versatile Disk. The navigation program and database resides on this disc. See the
Navigation System Manual for information on how to order a replacement or an update
navigation DVD.
ECM Engine Control Module. Typically referred to as the ECM.
F AQ F requency Asked Questions. See the Navigation System Manual for a list of the customer
F AQs, and troubleshooting information.
F -CAN F ast CAN Bus (see CAN)
GA-Net The GA-Net allows the audio unit to communicate with all the audio and navigation
components in a vehicle. If there is an open in the GA-Net, components or the entire audio and
navigation system may appear inoperative.
GPS Global Positioning System. A network of 24 satellites in orbit around the earth. The navigation
system can simultaneously receive signals from up to 12 satellites to accurately position the
vehicle on the map.
23-156
I tem Definition
HDS Honda Diagnostic System. A hand held tablet PC used for in diagnosing vehicle problems.
This device can be used to obtain DTC codes for diagnosis of the navigation system and CAN
related problems.
HF L HandsF reeLink uses Bluetooth technology as a wireless link between it and an approved
Bluetooth compatible cell phone. See the vehicle Owner's Manual or Quick Start Guide for
more information.
H/U Head Unit. The navigation system display assembly in the dash.
Initialization This refers to the period needed to re-acquire the GPS satellite orbital information whenever
the navigation system power has been disconnected. This can take from 10 to 45 minutes.
LCD Liquid Crystal Display (the navigation screen)
Map Matching The received GPS information allows the navigation system to position the vehicle on the
map. Map matching has occurred if the map screen displays the current street name in the
bottom-shaded area.
Mic Abbreviation for the microphone used for receiving voice commands. It is located near the
map light in the ceiling. The active noise cancellation unit may also use it to check its turning.
MID Multi-Information Display
MP3 Music F iles MP3 is an audio coding format. MP3 is a popular audio compression format on the internet
and computers. CDs and PC cards with these files can be played on some vehicle audio
systems.
MW Maneuver Window. While on-route to a destination, this wi ndow displays information about
the next maneuver.
Navi Abbreviation for the Navigation System.
Off-Road Tracking See B readcrumbs
Off Route This occurs when the user leaves mapped roads. Off-road tracking dots (breadcrumbs) are
displayed ifthe option is enabled in the setup menu. The user can use them to return to a
mapped road. The bottom of the navigation screen displays Not on a digitized road
Outlying Areas These are rural areas that typically have only their main roads mapped. All other roads are
shown in light brown for reference only since they have not been verified.
Paired Linking your cell phone to the HF L
PC Card Slot The PC card (PCMCIA, type II) slot is for factory use only. Make sure that the sliding door is
closed at all items, if opened, an error message is displayed on the screen.
PCM Powertrain Control Module. This unit supplies the navigation system speed signal, and
charge signal via the F -CAN network. Also refered to as ECM.
PCMCIA A computer industry defined term referring to the PC Card slot standard.
(cont'd)
23-157
I tem Definition
PIN Personal Identification Number, a random 4 digit number created by the customer to protect
personal information.
POI Point Of Interest. These are the businesses, schools, etc. found under the Places option on the
main menu.
Polygon Colored areas on the map screen denoting parks, schools, etc. See the Navigation System
Manual, Driving to Y our Destination, for a list of the assigned colors.
QWERTY K eyboard layout resembling the typewriter keys. The keyboard layout can be changed to an
alphabetical layout in the Setup mode.
SCS service connector The service check signal 2-pin connector used to put the navigation system into the diagnostic
mode.
Security Code Code needed to activate the navigation system. Y ou can get the security code from the
interactive network (iN) by entering the navigation unit serial number. Y ou can find the serial
number on the diagnostic screens (Unit Check, Navi ECU) or on the underside of the
navigation unit.
Touch Screen Buttons or Touch
Sensor
Navigation display panel has 2 layers of clear film on the screen panel. If you touch the screen
panel, the film layers engage and the display unit detects the touch point.
Tuning A continual update of internal navigation system scaling factors. See the individual sensor
tuning discussions under either System Description, or System Diagnostic Mode.
Unverified Streets These streets have not been verified for turn restrictions, one-way, etc. They appear light
brown on the map. Y ou can enter address destinations in these areas, but depending on your
Unverified Routing choice in setup, voice guidance may end at the last verified street closest
to your destination.
USB J ack Allows the customers to play data such as input audio recording from portable audio devices
(such as i-Pod) or data from USB flash memory.
Verified Streets These streets consist of the detailed metropolitan coverage areas, and all other inter-town
connection roads. These roads are shown in black on the map.
VP Vehicle Position. When in map mode, this circular icon shows the vehicle position on the map.
Touch this icon to show the latitude, longitude, and elevation of your current position.
VR Voice Recognition. This allows voice control of many of the navigation functions. The
hardware consists of the microphone, voice control switch (navigation Talk/navigation Back
buttons), and the front speakers. See the overview for more information.
VSP Vehicle Speed Pulse. This pulse signal coming from the ECM/PCM (via the CSS) is used to
update the Vehicle position on the map. These pulses do not indicate direction (forward or
backward). When in reverse, the navigation receives a signal and directs the VP to move
backwards on the map.
XM This device receives information from the XM satellites and passes XM audio information to
the audio unit. In addition, traffic information is sent to the navigation unit (see AcuraLink).
Y aw Sensor This device is located in the navigation unit and senses the side-to-side twisting force
generated when the vehicle turns. See a detailed description of how this sensor works.
23-158
Di agnost i c S f st em Di agr am
Thi s di agr am bel ow s hows all of t he navi gat i on di agnost i c f eat ur es avai l abl e f or syst em t r oubl eshoot i ng. The di agr am
st art s at t he cent er , and wor ks out war d i n l ayer s.
Ac c es s to t he di agnost i c f eat ur es begi ns by st art i ng t he vehi c l e. Thi s i s nec essar y so t he syst em c an check t he ot her
syst ems connect ed by var i ous busses. After st art i ng t he vehi c l e you c an ent er t he di agnost i c mode ei t her by pr essi ng
and hol di ng MENU, MAP/GUIDE, and CANCEL , or by connect i ng t he 2-PIN S CS ser vi c e connect or .
The mai n menu sc r een al l ows 2 checki ng modes - one aut omat i c, and one manual :
@ The aut omat i c di agnost i c check st ar t s when you sel ect " S E L F DIAGNOSTIC MODE" . The syst em r uns f or sever al
sec onds, and report s any i ssues wi t h Red i c ons. Rotate t he i nt erf ace di al and sel ect t he i con you wi sh obt ai n t he
pr obl em det ai l s.
The manual di agnost i c check i s sel ect ed f r om t he mai n menu by sel ect i ng " DETAI L INFORMATION AND S ETTI NG" .
The t radi t i onal di agnost i c menu i s di spl ayed. Thi s al l ows you to obt ai n addi t i onal det ai l s as i nst ruct ed in t he
t r oubl eshoot i ng pr oc edur es.
NOTE: Do not cl ear or c hange set t i ngs unl ess speci f i ed by ei t her t he Ser vi c e Manual t r oubl eshoot i ng pr ocedur es or by
t he f act ory. Ot her wi se, you may acci dent al l y del et e c ust omer i nf ormat i on, or r emove t he l at est f l ash sof t war e ver si on
i nst al l ed by t he f act ory.
(cont' d)
23-159
S f st em Descri pt i on f cont ' d)
Navi gat i on uni t c onnec t or s
NAVIGATION UNIT
CONNECTOR E (2P)
NAVIGATION UNIT
CONNECTOR A (SP)
NAVIGATION UNIT
CONNECTOR D (5P)
LING FAN
NAVIGATION UNIT
CONNECTOR B (32P)
NAVIGATION UNIT
CONNECTOR C (16P)
NAVIGATION UNIT
CONNECTOR A (8P)
NAVI GATI ON UNIT
CONNECTOR B (32P)
p
r
1 n
1 2
/
4
5 6 7 8
NAVIGATION UNIT
CONNECTOR C (16P)
I L JL
/1/1/1l2ll3ll4ll5fi6
NAVIGATION UNIT
CONNECTOR D (5P)
"fin
1 2 3 4 5
NAVIGATION UNIT
CONNECTOR E (2P)
1 2
All connectors show wire side of female terminals
Fr ont HFL-navi gat i on-ANC mi c r ophone 7P c onnec t or
MI CROPHONE 7P CONNECTOR
FRONT HFL -NAVIGATION-ANC MICROPHONE 7P CONNECTOR
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
wire side of female terminals
23-160
Navi gat i on d i s pl ay uni t 28P c onnec t or
28P CONNECTOR
NAVIGATION DISPLAY UNIT 28P CONNECTOR
i nt er f ace di al 5P c onnec t or
1 2 3 4 5 6 / 8 9 10 11 12 13
I NTERFACE DIAL 5P CONNECTOR
I NTERFACE DIAL SP CONNECTOR
c p
1 2 3 4
Navi gat i on Uni t Input s and Out put s f or Connec t or A (8P)
r '
I .I
1 n
1 2
/
4
5 6 7 8
Navi gat i on Uni t Connect or A (8P)
Terminal
Number
Wire
Color
Terminal Name Description Voltage (about) Symptom
1 WHT +B ( +B Power
source)
Continuous power
source
Battery voltage If open: Display picture goes out (display back
light still on).
NOTE: System will reboot to enter code screen.
If short to ground: Blows fuse No. 15 (10 A) in the
under-hood fuse/relay box.
2 PUR ACC
(Accessory)
Power source for
accessories
Battery voltage
at ACCESSORY
(I)
If open: Display picture goes out (display back
light still on).
If short to ground: Blows fuse No. 18 (7.5 A) in the
driver's under-dash fuse/relay box.
4 BLK GND (Ground)
(G651)
Ground for
navigation unit
OV If open: No effect on system.
If short to ground: No effect on system.
5 LTBLU BACK LT (Back
light or reverse
signal)
Reverse signal of
select lever from
Multiplex Integrated
Control Unit (A/T) or
backup light switch
(M/T)
In reverse,
battery voltage:
Otherwise 0 V
If open: Navigation never sees reverse.
Diagnostic screen Car Status, Back=0.
6 BLU VSP OUT
(Vehicle speed
pulse)
Vehicle speed pulse
signal from
ECM/PCM
05 V pulses
average 2.5 V
(Depending on
bus traffic)
If open: No vehicle speed pulses.
Diagnostic screen Car Status, VSP Navi=0.
If short to ground: No vehicle speed pulses.
Diagnostic screen Car Status, VSP Navi=0.
7 RED DIAG +
(Diagnostic
positive)
Service check signal
for navigation
system
5- 6 V If open: No effect on system.
If short to ground: System goes into diagnostic
mode at key ON (I) and (II).
8 YEL DIAG
(Diagnostic
negative)
Ground for service
check signal
0 V If open: The system will not go into diagnostic
mode when using the SCS service connector.
If short to ground: No effect on system.
23-162
Navi gat i on Uni t Input s and Out put s for Connect or B (32P)
17|18|19120[21 |/|23l24[25|26
Navi gati on Uni t Connect or B (32P)
Termi nal
Number
Wi re
Color
Termi nal Name Descri pt i on Vol t age (about) Sympt om
1 WHT R SIG 1 (Red
signal)
Red color signal 0.7 V AC
average
If open: Red color missing (see RGB Color
diagnostic).
If short to ground: Red color missing (see RGB
Color diagnostic).
2 RED G SIG 1 (Green
signal)
Green color signal 0.7 V AC
average in RGB
color diagnostic
mode
If open: Green color missing (see RGB Color
diagnostic).
If short to ground: Green color missing (see RGB
Color diagnostic).
3 GRY" SH SIG 1
(Shield signal)
Shield for terminal
No. 1,2, 17, 18,19
OV If open: No change to display.
If short to ground: No change to display.
4 ORN AC-SI (Air
conditioner
serial in)
Communication
signal for climate
control unit
If open/short: HVAC will not respond to
navigation commands.
5 GRY ILL+
(Illumination
positive)
Parking light on
signal
Lights on:
battery voltage,
Lights off: 0 V
If open: When brightness =Auto, night mode for
the display is inoperative when lights on.
If short to ground: Blows No. 6 (7.5 A) fuse in
passenger's under-dash fuse/relay box.
8 WHT F-CAN H (CAN
high)
F-CAN bus
communication
Pulses 2. 5- 6 V
average 2.5 V
(depends on
F-CAN
communication
traffic)
If open:
1) System Links Meter shown as red.
2) F-CAN System Link=NG.
3) Car status (ILL CANCEL) =0.
If short: Same diagnostic conditions as when
open, and also sets the U0029 (F -CAN BUS OFF).
9 GRY* SH ECU BUS
(Shield display
bus)
Shield for display
bus No. 10, 20
terminal
0 V If open: No change to display.
10 GRN ECU B US+
(Display bus
positive)
Data bus +GA-NET 0 5 V pulses
average 2.5 V
(depends on
bus traffic)
If open: Navigation buttons do not work.
If short to ground: Navigation buttons do not
work.
The shielded wires have a heat-shrink tube insulating the outside of the wire.
The color of the insulating tube, typically black or dark gray, may not match the color of the wire shown on the circuit diagram.
(cont'd)
23-163
Navigation Uni t Connect or i (32P)
Ter mi nal
Number
Wi re
Col or
Ter mi nal Name Description Voltage (about) Symptom
17 Y EL B SIG 1 (Blue
signal)
Blue color signal 0.2 VAC
average in RGB
color diagnostic
mode
If open: Blue color missing (see RGB Color
diagnostic).
If short to ground: Blue color missing (see RGB
Color diagnostic).
18 BLK CSIG 1
(Composite
signal)
Composite video
(vertical/horizontal)
Synchronizing
signal
0.2 V AC
average in RGB
color diagnostic
mode
If open: Picture rolls horizontally, colors still
visible.
If short to ground: Picture rolls horizontally,
colors still visible.
19 GRN GND SIG 1
(Ground signal)
Ground for color
signal
20 PUR AC-SO 1
(Air conditioner
serial out)
Communication
signal for climate
control unit
21 BRN AC-CLK 1
(Air conditioner
clock)
Check signal for
climate control unit
23 BLU
" RE D" "
J OG (Interface
dial J og)
Interface dial
operation signal
05 V pulses If open: Y ou cannot operate navigation system
If short to ground: Y ou cannot operate
navi gati on syst em
24
BLU
" RE D" " F-CAN L (CAN
low)
F-CAN bus
communication
Pulses 2. 5- 6 V
2.5 V average
(depends on
bus traffic)
If open:
1) System Links Meter shown as red.
2) F-CAN System Link =NG.
3) Car status (ILL CANCEL) =0.
If short: Same diagnostic conditions as when
open, and also sets the U0029 (F-CAN BUS OFF).
25 GRY ' SH J OG
(Interface dial
Shield jog)
Shield for terminal
No.23
26 RED ECU B US -
(Display bus
negative)
Data bus 05 V pulses
2.5 V average
(depends on
bus traffic)
If short to ground: Hard buttons work OK.
23-164
Navi gat i on Uni t Input s and Out put s for Connect or C (16P)
Navigation Uni t Connector C (16P)
Terminal
Number
Wi re
Color
Ter mi nal Name Descri pt i on Vol t age (about) Symptom
7 BLK RG L + (Route
gui dance voi ce
left posi ti ve)
Left audi o si gnal of
voice guidance, and
Voi ce Recogni ti on
(VR) prompts
Audio signal
0.004-0.04 V
If open: If voice activated, radio speakers buzz; if
voice off, no effect.
If short to ground: If voice activated, radio
speakers buzz; if voice off, no effect.
8 GRN MICSIG + (HFL
mi c si gnal
posi ti ve)
Mi crophone output
si gnal posi ti ve
4- 5 V
(navigation
TALK button
pressed)
If open: microphone signal shown as red in
diagnostic screens: System Links and F unctional
Setup Mic Level.
If short to ground: microphone signal shown as
red in diagnostic screens: System Links and
F unctional Setup Mic Level.
12 BRN STRG SW
(Navi gati on
remote
swi t ches)
St eeri ng swi tch
output
4- 5 V
(navigation
TALK button
pressed)
2. 5- 3 V
(navigation
BACK button
pressed)
If open: Steering wheel navigation TALK and
navi gati on BACK buttons do not work.
If short to ground: Steering wheel navigation
TALK, and navigation BACK buttons do not work.
13 GRY* RG L SH (Route
gui dance
shi el d)
Shi el d for No. 7, 14
t ermi nal s
0 V If open: No effect on voice output.
If short to ground: No effect on voice output.
14 WHT RG L GND
(Route
gui dance
ground)
Ground for voi ce
gui dance, and Voi ce
Recogni ti on (VR)
prompts
0 V If open: No effect on voice output.
If short to ground: No effect on voice output.
15 SH MIC (HFL
mi c si gnal
shi el d)
Shi el d for No, 8,16
t ermi nal s
0 V If open: No effect on voice control.
If short to ground: No effect on voice control.
16 RED MIC S I G - (HFL
mi c si gnal
negati ve)
Ground for
mi crophone si gnal
0 V If open: microphone signal shown as red in
diagnostics: System Links and F unctional Setup
Mic Level.
If short to ground: No effect on voice recognition.
(cont'd)
23-165
Navi gat i on Uni t Input s and Out put s f or Connect or D (5P)
Hln
1 2 3 4 5
Navi gat i on Uni t Connect or D (SP)
Ter mi nal
Number
Wire
Col or
Terminal Name Descri pt i on Vol t age (about) Sympt om
1 RED HFL COMM3
(HFL
communication
3)
Communication
signal for HFL
Solid red HFL icon in Navi System Link
2 WHT HFL COMM4
(HFL
communication
4)
Communication
signal for HFL
Solid red HFL icon in Navi System Link
3 BLK HFL COMM1
(HFL
communication
1)
Communication
signal for HFL
HFL icon in Navi System Link changes between
red and green
4 GRN HFL COMM2
(HFL
communication
2)
Communication
signal for HFL
HFL icon in Navi System Link changes between
red and green
5 GRY" HFL COMMSH
(shield HFL)
Shield for terminals
No.1, 2, 3, 4
23-166
1_J (_/
Navi gat i on Uni t Input s and Out put s f or Connect or E (2P)
Navigation Uni t Connect or E (2P)
Ter mi nal
Number
Wi re
Color
1 SIG (GPS) GPS signal 5V If open: GPS icon on screen is not shown, system
links screen GPS Ant. shown as red.
If short to body ground: Same as open.
2 SH (GPS) Ground for GPS
signal
OV If open: GPS icon on screen is not shown, system
links screen GPS Ant. shown as red.
If short to body ground: No effect on system.
(cont'd)
23-167
FRONT HFL-Navi gat i on-ANC Mi cr ophone Input s and Out put s for 7P Connect or
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
F ront HF L-Navigation-ANC Microphone I P Connector
Terminal
Number
Wi re
Col or
Ter mi nal Name Descri pt i on Vol t age (about) Sympt om
1 BLK GND (Ground)
(G501)
Ground for HFL-
navigation-ANC
microphone
OV If open: Y ou can not operate voice recognition.
2 GRY MI C - ( HFL mic
signal negative)
Ground for
microphone signal
ov If open: microphone signal shown as red in
Mic Level.
3 BRN MI C+ (HFL mic
signal positive)
Microphone output
signal positive
8V If open: microphone signal shown as red in
Mic Level.
If short to ground: Microphone signal shown as
red in diagnostic screens: System Links and
F unctional Setup Mic Level.
5 LTGRN HFL MUTE HFL MUTE signal 0- 5V If open: Y ou can not operate HFL sound.
If short to ground: Y ou can not operate audio
sound.
6 PUR ACC
(Accessory)
Power source for
accessory
Battery voltage
at ACCESSORY
(I)
If open: Y ou can not operate voice control.
If short to ground: Blows fuse No. 18 (7.5 A) inthe
7 WHT +B ( +B Power
source)
Continuous power
source
Battery voltage If open: Y ou can not operate HFL and voice
control.
23-168
Navi gat i on Di spl ay Uni t Input s and Out put s for 28P Connect or
1 2 3 4
5 6 8 9 10 11 12 13
V
JTI
15
/
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
/
26 27 28
Navi gati on Di splay Uni t 28P Connect or
Termi nal
Number
Wi re
Color
1 WHT +B ( +B power
source)
Continuous power
source
Battery voltage If open: Screen completely off (no backlight
visible).
2 KJ R ACC
(Accessory)
Power source for
accessory
Battery voltage
at ACCESSORY
(I)
If open: Display and buttons do not work.
3 RED GA-NET BUS +
(GA-NET bus
positive)
Data bus-f GA-Net 05 V pulses
average 2.5 V
depends on bus
traffic
work.
4 GRY* GA-NET BUS
SH (GA-NET)
Shield for No. 3, 17
terminals
5 GRN ECU BUS +
(GA-NET)
(Display bus
positive)
Data bus+ GA-Net 05 V pulses
average 2.5 V
depends on bus
traffic
work.
6 GRN SECURITY + Security signal to
rear screen
OV If open: The security system will set, and will not
trip when display is removed.
If short to ground: The security system will set,
and will not trip when display is removed.
8 WHT R SIG 1 (Red
signal)
Red color signal 0.7 V AC If open: Red color missing (see RGB Color
diagnostic).
If short to ground: Red color missing (see RGB
Color diagnostic).
9 RED G SIG 1 (Green
signal)
Green color signal 0.7 V AC If open: Green color missing (see RGB Color
diagnostic).
If short to ground: Green color missing (see RGB
Color diagnostic).
10 BLK GND (Ground)
(G651)
Ground for display
unit
(cont'd)
Navi gati on Di spl ay Uni t 28P Connect or
Termi nal
Number
Wire
Color
Terminal Name Descri pt i on Vol t age (about) Sympt om
i r
1
GRY *
2
CAMERA SH
(Shield camera)
Shield for No. 12,
13, 26, 27 terminals
OV If open: No change to rearview camera image.
If short to ground: No change to rearview camera
image.
12*
1
BLK CAMERA GND
(Ground
camera)
Ground for camera
signal
0 V If open: No change to rearview camera image.
image.
13*
1
WHT CAMERA V
(VCC supply)
Power source for
rearview camera
8V If open: When put into reverse, the navigation
screen goes black (backlight still operation)
If short to ground: When put into reverse, the
navigation screen goes black (backlight still
operative).
15 GRY ILL+
(lllumination
positive)
Parking light on
signal from dash
and console lights
Battery voltage
if lights on:
otherwise 0 V
If open: When brightness=Auto, night mode for
the display is inoperative when lights on.
passenger's under-dash fuse/relay box.
17 GRN GA-NET B US -
(GA-NET bus
negative)
Data bus - GA-Net 05 V pulses
average 2.5 V
depends on bus
traffic
If short to ground: Hard buttons work OK.
18 GRY *
2
SH ECU BUS
(Shield ECU
bus)
Shield for display
bus terminal No. 5,
19
19 RED ECU B US -
(Dispiay bus
negative)
Data bus - GA-Net 05 V pulses
average 2.5 V
depends on bus
traffic
If short to ground: Hard and touch buttons work
OK.
20 YEL SECURITY - Security signal to
audio unit
OV If open: The security system will set, and will not
trip when display is removed.
If short to ground: The security system will set,
and will not trip when display is removed.
21 BLU GNDSIG 1
(Ground signal)
Ground for color
signal
22 YEL B SIG 1 (Blue
signal)
Blue color signal 0- 1 VAC If open: Blue color missing (see RGB Color
diagnostic).
If short to ground: Blue color missing (see RGB
Color diagnostic).
23 BRN CSIG 1
(Composite
signal)
Composite video
(vertical/horizontal)
synchronizing
signal
0.3 V AC If open: Picture rolls horizontally, colors still
visible.
If short to ground: Picture rolls horizontally,
colors still visible.
24 BLK*
2
SH SIG 1
(Shield signal)
Shield for No. 8, 9,
21, 22, 23 terminals
0 V If open: No change to display.
26
#1
GRN RC VCC (Video
camera)
Video signal for
rearview camera
0.3 V If open: No change to rearview camera image.
image.
27
#1
RED RC GND
(Ground
camera)
Ground for rearview
camera signal
image.
28
#1
BRN CAMERA ADPT
(Adaptive
camera)
Control signal for
rearview camera
image.
* 1 : With optional rearview camera
*2: The shielded wires have a heat-shrink tube insulating the outside of the wire.
23-170
Interface Di al Input s and Out put s for 5P Connect or
1 2 3 4
Interface Dial BP Connector
Terminal
Number
Wire
Color
Ter mi nal Name Descri pti on Vol t age (about) Sympt om
1 WHT J OG (jog) Interface dial
operation signal
05 V pulses If open: Y ou can not operate navigation system.
If short to ground: Y ou can not operate
navigation system.
2 BLK' SH J OG (Shield
jog)
Shield for terminal
No. 1
3 BLK GND (Ground)
(G401)
Ground for interface
dial
OV If open: Y ou can not operate navigation system.
If short to ground: Y ou can not operate
navigation system.
4 PUR ACC
(Accessory)
Power source for
interface dial
Battery voltage
at ACCESSORY
(I)
If open: Y ou can not operate navigation system.
23-171
Ci rcui t Di agram
BATTERY
Oh
No. 1 (MAIN)
(100 A)
C T X J O
No. 3-1 (IG MAIN) (BOA)
CT VJ O
No. 15 (10 A)
CT \ J > -
F16 C1
DRIVER'S UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY BOX
C3
ACCHOTi n
ACC (I) and ON (II)
No. 18 (7.5 A)
O ~ X J 0
P18
P9
WHT WHT PUR
No. 6 (7.5 A)
FUSE
(PASSENGER' S
UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY
BOX)
GPS
ANTENNA
[)
I
Y h
L i
GRY
NAVIGATION
SERVICE CHECK
CONNECTOR ^
| 2 [ l
AC-SI AC-S01 AC-CLK1
A7 A8
ORN
B4
: B7
BRN
PUR
B20
PASSENGER' S
UNDER-DASH
F US E / RE L A Y
BOX
1/
FRONT HFL-
NAVIGATION-
ANC
MICROPHONE
A14
FRONT HFL-
NAVIGATION-
ANC
MI CROPHONE
A15
H37 D16 H15 D21
WHT WHT PUR PUR
BRN
B21
NAVIGATION
DISPLAY
UNIT
NAVIGATION
DISPLAY
UNIT
INTERFACE
DIAL
ILL+ SH SIG
(GPS) (GPS)
DIAG+ DIAG- AC-SI AC-S01 AC-CLK1
NAVIGATION UNIT
RG L RG L
GND GND RGL+ SH
T~B23 ^
t '1GR
BLU *
1
^HT t " l
SH
JOG
BLK
C7
- 1
TC13
WHT BLK

GRN RED
DRIVER'S
DOOR
SPEAKER
DRIVER'S
DOOR
TWEETER
_ J GRY*
B1 B11 |B2
NAVI NAVI NAVI
GND L CH SH GND
AUDIO UNIT
FL FL SH FL
PRE+ PRE- GND
A23 A22 |A21
r >i GRY*
*
LTGRN PNK
l 7 . I.
I
1
RED
k
No. 18(7.5 A)
FUSE
(DRIVER'S
UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY BOX)
^ D>
GRN
k _ J
6
SPKR SPKR TWEETER TWEETER
DRIVER'S DOOR SPEAKER CROSSOVER
NETWORK CONTROL UNIT
AMP-
V
PUR
[ 4
B25
GRY*
WHT
BLK*
G651
GRN RED
GRN
GRY*
B16
PUR
B7
FL FL SH FL AMP+ AMP-
PRE+ PRE- GND
STEREO AMPLIFIER
ACC JOG SH
JOG
INTERFACE DIAL
GND
l
3
BLK
A
G401
23-172
i isiJ
*' Th e s h i el d ed wi r es hav e a heat -shr i nk t ube
s h o wn o n t he c i r c ui t di agr am.
: Ot her c o mmuni c at i o n l i ne
- : S hi el di ng
NAVI GATI ON DI S PL AY UNIT j
CA ME RA RC RC CA ME RA CA ME RA CA ME RA j
A DPT GND VCC V GND S H \
28 27 26 13 12 J l l
r
1 GRY*
RE D GRN WHT BL K
RE A RVI E W CA ME RA (Opt i onal )
NAVI GATI ON UNI T
S TRG
S W
No. 6 (7.5 A)
F US E
( UNDER- DAS H
F US E / RE L A Y
BOX)
CA B L E
RE E L
VOI CE CONTROL S WI TCH
10 kO > I
I I
HFL
S WI TCHE S
3
r \ DAS HL I GHTS B RI GHTNE S S
8 RE D H " > CONTROL L E R
CA B L E
RE E L
r
PNK
I 1
A U D I O R E M O T E S W I T C H
i 270 fi 470 Q 1.2 kO 3.9 kO
q V O L Q V O L . Q C H q C H Q
I D O W N i U P i (-) i (+) i
M O D E
B R N
(cont'd)
2
*% m " j o
w " " 1 # O
No. 15(10 A)
F US E
( UNDER- HOOD
F US E / RE L A Y
BOX)
No. 6 (7.5 A)
F US E
( PA S S E NGE R' S
UNDE R- DA S H
F US E / RE L A Y
BOX)
PA S S E NGE R' S
MI CU
S CT Y GA - NE T GA - NE T GA - NE T
B US B US + B U S -
S H
AUDI O UNI T
RE MOTE MAIN
RE MOTE GND GND
B US B US + B U S -
S H
XM RE CE I VE R
A16
(A) PNK
- BRN
| A5
BRN
CA B L E
RE E L
jA12
BRN
G402
23-174
t ypi c al l y bl ack or dar k gr ay ,
s h o wn on t he c i r c ui t d i ag r am.
- : CAN l i ne
- : Ot her c ommuni c at i on l i ne
- : Shi el di ng
BACK - UP L I GHT
S WI TCH (M/T)
A/ T RE VE RS E
RE L A Y (A/T)
A5
B A CK L T
NAVI GATI ON UNI T (4-door ) (2-door )
VS P HFL HFL HFL HFL HFL MI C MI C ] S H j ! S H ~l
OUT F- CAN H F-CAN L COMM1 COMM2 COMM3 COMM4 COMM S H S I G+ S I G - | MIC I , MIC \
BL
A6 j B8 j B24 ^ D3 '.DA D1 >D2 | D5
I 1
r
~-r\T
:
* _ > ' GRY* ^
I I i BL K GRN RE D WHT i ( GF
. U WHT RE D i ; ; ; ; f 1 i
! J - 20 -21 ' -7 . 6 | 8
C8
\H RE
27
C16' | C15 I I | C15 I
j J 3L K * | | GRY * I
i . "t j I !
ED ,
V
'
j GRY *
28
NAVI NAVI NAVI NAVI NAVI HFL -NAVI HFL -NAVI
COMM1 COMM2 COMM3 COMM4 COMM S H MIC+ MI C-
HANDS FRE E L I NK CONTROL UNI T
MIC+ MI C- MI CS H HFL MUTE
WHT RE D
A30
I
I
WHT
I
I
I
VS P F- CAN H F-CAN L
OUT
E CM/ PCM
30
- 1
I
I
I
I
I
RE D
i
I
I
F-CAN H F-CAN L
BRN BL K
-Q- GND
No. 18(7. 5 A)
No. 15 (10 A) F US E
F US E ( DRI VER' S
( UNDER- HOOD UNDE R- DA S H
F US E / RE L A Y F US E / RE L A Y
BOX) BOX)
V V
WHT PUR
| 7 | 6
G501
Y E L
BRN
BRN
GRY
L T GRN
I s
+B A CC MIC+ MI C-
FRONT HFL - NAVI GATI ON- ANC MI CROPHONE
T
AUDI O
UNI T
23-175
Navi gati on Syst ei
S f st em Di agnost i c IViode
St ar t -up pr ocedur e and Di agnost i c I Vi eny
Ther e ar e t wo way s to enter t he di agnost i c mode:
Met hod 1:
St ar t t he vehi c l e. When t he gl obe sc r een appear s,
connect t he S CS ser vi c e connect or (see page 23-237) to
t he navi gat i on ser vi c e connect or l ocat ed behi nd t he
navi gat i on uni t in the trunk. The sc r een c hanges to t he
Syst em Li nks sc r een and aut omat i cal l y begi ns r unni ng
the sel f di agnost i c. S ee t he Syst em Li nks sect i on f or
mor e i nf or mat i on.
NOTE: When f i ni shed t r oubl eshoot i ng, make sur e to
r emove t he S CS ser vi c e connect or .
[ System Links | Help Exit Diag I Return
HZ
Di s pl ay ~ ISlavi.ECU
Er r o r
Hi s t or y
Y a w
S e n s o r
Pr es s any i c o n i f y o u w an t t o s ee d et ai l s .
Met hod 2:
St art t he vehi c l e, and at t he di sc l ai mer sc r een use t he
navi gat i on di spl ay har d but t ons as desc r i bed bel ow:
Make sur e t he battery i s i n good condi t i on t hen pr ess
and hol d t he t hr ee but t ons MAP/GUIDE, MENU, and
CANCEL , f or about 3 sec onds. The di spl ay sc r een goes
di rect l y to t he Sel ec t Di agnosi s It ems menu s hown
bel ow.
Sel f -Di agnosi s Mode (r uns t he aut omat i c di agnosi s of
t he navi gat i on syst em)
Detai l Inf ormat i on & Set t i ng (al l ows you to manual l y
di agnose t he navi gat i on syst em)
Sel ec t Di agnosi s It ems Return
Sel f - Di agnosi s Mode
(Nav i wi l l c h ec k i nt er nal f unc t i o n, c o nnec t i o ns , et c .
Per f o r m t h i s t es t wi t h v eh i c l e s t o pped an d eng i ne r unni ng. )
(i ndi v i dual Di ag no s t i c s c r een s t o c o nf i r m
a s pec i f i c d i ag no s t i c s c r een. )
Sy s t em Li nks
1. Ent er t hi s sc r een by connect i ng t he S CS ser vi c e
c onnec t or or by sel ect i ng Sel f Di agnosi s Mode f r om
t he navi gat i on sc r een mai n menu. The message at t he
bottom of t he sc r een f l ashes i ndi cat i ng t he di agnosi s
i s r unni ng. Make sur e you ent er t he audi o anti -theft
c ode.
NOTE:
The syst em cannot compl et e a full di agnosi s unl ess
t he engi ne i s r unni ng.
DTC 1501 and/or 2703 c an be st or ed when t he
i gni ti on swi t ch i s at A CCE S S ORY (I). Wi t h t he
i gni ti on swi t c h i s i n A CCE S S ORY (I), t he cl i mat e
cont rol uni t i s t ur ned off and t he navi gat i on uni t
l oses c ommuni c at i on and st or es DTCs. Ther ef or e,
t her e i s a possi bi l i t y that t he syst em i s nor mal even
t hough 2703 i s st or ed. Check syst em li nks wi t h t he
engi ne r unni ng, and if it appear s nor mal , t he
syst em i s OK at t hi s t i me.
j System Li nks] | Help | | Exit Diag | | Return
Di s pl ay
II
R- Came r a
GP S Ant.
Er r o r
Hi s t or y
Har d K ey
Y aw
S e n s o r
Pr es s any i c o n if y o u w an t t o s ee d et ai l s .
23-176
2. Rotate t he Interface di al to sel ect t he Icon you want to
di agnose. Push In t he sel ect or to see t he det ai l s of that
di agnost i c f unct i on.
The Syst em Li nks f unct i on r uns aut omat i cal l y and
di spl ays a f l ashi ng message at t he bottom of t he
sc r een r emi ndi ng you t o have t he engi ne r unni ng f or
t he t es t The di agnost i c t est s t he f ol l owi ng:
Most of t he wi r es connect i ng t he navi gat i on
c omponent s shown i n t he block di agr am.
The r esul t s f r om t he var i ous c omponent s shown i n
t he bl ock di agr am.
The mi cr ophone i s t est ed by l i st eni ng to t he bong
sound pr oduced by t he navi gat i on uni t f r om t he
speaker s when t he di agnosi s i s st ar t ed. Thi s
r equi r es that t he audi o syst em be oper at i ng
nor mal l y.
When t he di agnosi s f i ni shes, t he i c ons t urn di fferent
col or s based on t hei r t est st at us. The col or def i ni t i ons
ar e shown bel ow and c an al so be seen by sel ect i ng
Help on t he Syst em Li nks sc r een.
The i ndi cat i on on t he sc r een may not c hange unti l you
exi t and reent er t he Sel f -Di agnosi s mode. In s ome
c as es , you may have to rest art t he engi ne f or t he
i ndi cat i on to c hange. Af t er you repai r t he af f ect ed
component or har ness, repeat t hi s di agnosi s.
Eac h i con col or i s expl ai ned i n t he t abl e.
Icon Col or s Descr i pt i on
Gr een The syst em run a di agnosi s and
t he r esul t s ar e OK.
Red Er r or s that r equi r e r epl acement
of har dwar e or har ness.
Exampl es ar e connect i on er r or
or memor y di agnosi s er r or s.
Tr oubl eshoot f or DTCs.
Yel l ow Er r or s that does not requi re
har dwar e r epl acement , suc h as
an open di spl ay c over , an
i ncor r ect DVD, l eavi ng t he
i gni ti on swi t c h i n A CCE S S ORY
(1), or bec ause of a mi ssi ng
ac c essor y, li ke t he r ear vi ew
c amer a.
Whi t e The di agnosi s i s r unni ng. The
sc r een f unct i ons ar e l ocked out
whi l e t he di agnosi s r uns.
Gr ay The syst em cannot
aut omat i cal l y check t hi s
f unct i on. You have to sel ec t t he
di agnosi s i t em and manual l y do
addi t i onal t est i ng, like checki ng
t he navi gat i on but t ons i n t he
Hard Key t est . When you
compl et e t he Hard Key t est and
ret urn to t he Syst em Li nks
menu, t he gr ay i con t ur ns gr een.
NOTE: By sel ect i ng t he HEL P i c on, you c an see a
descr i pt i on f or eac h col or .
(cont' d)
23-177
Syst em Di agnost i c Mode (cont' d)
Scon Col or Inf ormat i on
Icon Icon Col or Icon
GRE E N YEL L OW WHITE GRAY
Di spl ay Resul t of
Connect i on
under t he
Di spl ay
di agnosi s menu
is OK.
Resul t of
Connect i on
under t he
Di spl ay
di agnosi s menu
i s NG.
Execut i ng (Not
compl et ed)
Radi o Resul t of
Connect i on
under t he Radi o
di agnosi s menu
is OK.
Resul t of
Connect i on
under t he Radi o
di agnosi s menu
i s NG.
Execut i ng (Not
compl et ed)
XM Res ul t of
Connect i on
under t he XM
di agnosi s me n u
is OK.
Resul t of
Connect i on
under t he XM
d i ag no s i s m e n u
i s NG. ,
Execut i ng (Not
compl et ed)
GPS Ant . Al l r esul t of
Ant enna and
Rec ei ver in NAVI
ECU i s OK.
Any resul t of
Ant enna and
Rec ei ver i n NAVI
ECU i s OK.
Execut i ng (Not
compl et ed)
R-Camer a Resul t of
Connect i on
under t he
R-Camer a
di agnosi s menu
i s OK. (YOP)
Resul t of
Connect i on
under t he
R-Camer a
di agnosi s menu
i s NG. (YOP)
Resul t of t he
Connect i on
under t he
R-Camer a
di agnosi s menu
i s NG. (YOP)
Execut i ng (Not
compl et ed)
A/ C* Resul t of
Connect i on
under t he Ai r con
di agnosi s menu
i s OK whi l e
Igni ti on i s ON.
Resul t of
Connect i on
under t he Ai r con
di agnosi s menu
i s NG whi l e
Igni ti on i s ON.
Whi l e Igni ti on i s
OFF.
Execut i ng (Not
compl et ed)
Met er (F-CAN) Al l r esul t of
F-CAN rel at ed
uni t s ar e OK.
Any resul t of
F-CAN rel at ed
uni t s ar e NG.
Execut i ng (Not
compl et ed)
HFL Resul t of
Connect i on
under t he HFL
di agnosi s menu
i s OK.
Resul t of
Connect i on
under t he HFL
di agnosi s menu
i s NG.
Execut i ng (Not
compl et ed)
*: DTC 2703 c an be st or ed when t he i gni ti on swi t ch i s in A CCE S S ORY (I). Wi t h t he i gni ti on swi t ch in A CCE S S ORY
(I), t he cl i mat e cont rol uni t i s t ur ned off and t he navi gat i on uni t l oses c ommuni c at i on and st or es DTCs. It i s
possi bl e that t he syst em i s nor mal wi t h DTC 2703 st or ed. Chec k t he syst em li nks wi t h t he engi ne r unni ng, and
if it s hows nor mal , t he syst em i s OK at t hi s t i me.
23-178
i con Scon Col or i con
GREEN RED YEL L OW WHITE
Mi c The mi cr ophone
det ect s t he
sound
" Pi -Pi -Pon" at
t he syst em link
menu.
The mi cr ophone
coul d not det ect s
t he sound
" Pi -Pi -Pon" at
t he syst em link
menu.
Exec ut i ng (Not
compl et ed)
t CU Info. Bot h V-RAM or
D-RAM i s OK,
and all Pr ogr am
Fl as h, Ser i al No.,
Model i s
avai l abl e, and
t he DVD lid i s
c l osed.
Ei t her t he V-RAM
or D-RAM i s NG, '
or any of t he
Pr ogr am Fl ash,
Ser i al No.,
Model i s
unavai l abl e.
DVD lid i s
opened
Exec ut i ng (Not
compl et ed)
Hard Key Al l but t ons ar e
pr essed and are
det ect ed under
Hard key menu.
Al l buttons ar e
not pr essed or
pr essed but not
det ect ed under
Hard key menu,
or exi t f rom Hard
key menu
wi t hout t he
button not
det ect ed.
Unt i l changi ng to
Hard key menu.
Er r or Hi st ory Hard Er r or or
Sof t Er r or i s
det ect ed under
Er r or Hi st ory
menu.
Execut i ng (Not
compl et ed)
Hard Er r or or
Sof t Er r or i s not
det ect ed under
Er r or Hi st ory
menu.
DVD BVD mec hani sm
i s nor mal and t he
proper DVD i s
i nst al l ed.
Impr oper DVD i s
i nst al l ed, or DVD
i s not i nst al l ed,
or c an not
i denti fy sof t war e
ver si on f r om t he
DVD or i nt ernal
mec hani sm
f ai l ure.
Execut i ng (Not
compl et ed)
Yaw Sens or Resul t of t he Yaw
Sensor
di agnosi s menu
i s OK.
Resul t of t he Yaw
Sensor
di agnosi s menu
i s NG.
Resul t of t he
Zer o Poi nt
Out put under t he
Yaw Sens or
di agnosi s menu
i s NO CHECK .
Execut i ng (Not
compl et ed)
Car St at us Chec k t hese
syst ems
manual l y.
(cont' d)
23"
11
179
ISSawigatlort S f st em
S f st em Di agnost i c IVIode (cont' d}
Fact or y di agnost i c sc r een In Lin Di ag
NOTE: If t he vehi c l e left t he f act ory i n t he f act or y
di agnost i c mode, you wi l l see t hi s sc r een ever y t i me you
t urn on t he i gni t i on. You may al so see t hi s sc r een if you
recent l y r epl aced t he navi gat i on uni t.
When a navi gat i on uni t i s power ed up f or t he f i rst t i me at
t he f act or y, t he f act ory di agnosi s sc r een (In Li ne Di ag)
appear s. Nor mal l y t he f act ory does t he st eps nec essar y
to veri f y pr oper operat i on and t er mi nat e t he f act or y
di agnosi s.
Unti l t he pr oper conf i r mat i on sequenc e i s done, t he
sc r een appear s ever y t i me t he vehi c l e i s st ar t ed.
In Line Diag Start Diag
Nawi ECU
\jro antenna
Di splay
-L
A / C
Radi o
F - C A N
-j Rear Camer a
-j XM
Exit Diag
XXXXCor r ec t PIN
4' BACK
ODDDDODDDD
K A
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
Delete 0 Done
Fol l ow t he st eps bel ow to pr event t he sc r een f r om
showi ng up in t he f ut ure:
Pr ess and hol d t he but t ons MENU, MAP/ GUIDE, and
CANCEL f or about 3 s ec onds . The Sel ec t Di agnosi s
i t ems sc r een appear s.
Pr ess and hol d t he MAP/GUIDE button f or
5 10 sec onds. A sc r een wi t h a Compl et e but t on,
appear s.
Pr ess compl et e, t hen Ret ur n, and t hen shut t he key off
for 5 sec onds. Do not di sc onnec t t he battery dur i ng
t hi s per i od as t he uni t i s savi ng t he set t i ng t o t he
S RAM memor y. The In Li ne Di ag shoul d not appear
agai n.
Rest ar t t he vehi c l e, and conf i r m nor mal oper at i on by
compl et i ng t he TQI of t he Navi gat i on Sy s t em Ser vi c e
Bul l et i n.
Det ai l ed Inf or mat i on & Set t i ngs
These sec t i ons al l ows you to run a speci f i c di agnosi s
and al l ows addi t i onal set t i ng c hoi c es f or some sc r eens
t hat ar e not shown when sel ect i ng an i con f r om t he
Syst em Li nks sc r een.
When you sel ec t t he menu i tem Detai l Inf ormat i on &
Set t i ng menu, t he mai n di agnosi s menu i s di spl ayed.
Select Di agnosi s It ems Return
Sel f - Di agnosi s SVIode
(ISSavi wi l l c h ec k i nt er nal f unc t i o n, c o nnec t i o ns , et c .
Per f o r m t h i s t es t wi t h v eh i c l e s t o pped and eng i ne r unni ng. )
(I ndi v i dual Di ag no s t i c s c r een s t o c o nf i r m
a s pec i f i c d i aq no s t i c s c r een. )
Moni t or Chec k
Over vi ew of navi gat i on di spl ay uni t
The navi gat i on di spl ay uni t c ommuni c at es wi t h t he
navi gat i on uni t over its own GA-Net bus. Inf ormat i on
sent by t he navi gat i on uni t to t he navi gat i on di spl ay
uni t i ncl udes c ommands to cont rol t he LCD back li ght.
The secur i t y syst em prot ect s t he navi gat i on di spl ay
uni t by dai sy-c hai ni ng t he secur i t y si gnal t hr ough it,
and t hen passi ng t he si gnal to t he audi o uni t.
The i l l umi nat i on i nput f r om t he gauge br i ght ness
cont rol pr ovi des back li ghti ng f or t he but t ons
sur r oundi ng t he sc r een.
These sc r eens al l ow you to t r oubl eshoot t he navi gat i on
di spl ay uni t. Sel ec t t he i tem you want to t r oubl eshoot ,
and f ol l ow t he di agnost i c i nst r uct i ons.
Moni t or Chec k Return ]
RGB Col or Color Pattern
Gr ay Tone Whi t e Rast er
Bl ack Rast er Moni t or Adj ust ment I
23-180
RGB Col or
Thi s sc r een ver i f i es that t he navi gat i on di spl ay uni t i s
r ecei vi ng t he vi deo (R, G, B and Composi t e sync ) si gnal s
properl y. The t hree pr i mar y col or s shoul d all appear
wi t hout di st ort i on. The combi nat i on of all t hree shoul d
pr oduce a cent ral whi t e sect i on. If any of t he col or s are
mi ssi ng, t r oubl eshoot for t he col or si gnal (see page
23-219). If t he pi ct ure has l i nes in it or scr ol l s
hori zont al l y, or ver t i cal l y, t r oubl eshoot f or a Composi t e
sync pr obl em (see page 23-221).
Gr ay Tone
Thi s sc r een di agnoses pr obl ems wi t h cont r ast . You
shoul d be abl e to see the c hanges f r om bar to bar ac r oss
t he sc al e. It i s nor mal for t he t wo bar s on ei ther si de to
appear t he s ame. If you can' t see c hanges f rom bar to
bar , r epl ace t he navi gat i on di spl ay uni t.
Gr ay To ne
Return
Bl ack Rast er
Thi s di agnost i c sc r een c hec ks for pi xel s that may be
st uck on. The enti re di spl ay must be bl ack. If pi xel s ar e
st uck on, repl ace t he navi gat i on di spl ay uni t.
Ret... :
Col or Pat t er n
The chart bel ow shows t he col or s bei ng used for the
map and menu sc r eens. Thi s i s for f act ory use onl y. To
check the col or si gnal , use the RGB Col or di agnost i c
f ound under the Moni tor Check.
Color Pattern Return
(cont' d)
231 IEI1
S f st em Di agnost i c Mode (cont' d)
Whi t e Rast er
Thi s di agnost i c sc r een c hec ks f or pi xel s t hat may be
dead (off). The ent i re di spl ay must be whi t e. If t her e ar e
dead pi xel s, r epl ace t he navi gat i on di spl ay uni t
C
White Ras t er
Return
Moni t or Adj ust ment
Thi s al l ows you to cent er t he navi gat i on d^ p! y. Us t he
i nt erf ace di al t o move t he pi ct ure up/down or left/ri ght. It
i s unl i kel y that you wi l l ever need to adj ust t he moni t or
posi t i on. The Def aul t button wi l l r eset t he di spl ay
posi t i on to f act ory speci f i cat i ons.
[ Monitor Adjustment
Settin j |0,0)
Defauft (0,0)
Return
Default Tuning
Uni t Chec k (Qui ck Check)
S o me of t he t est s and sc r eens t hat are di spl ayed under
t he Uni t Chec k ar e di fferent f r om t he mor e det ai l ed
c hec ks l i st ed i n ot her ar eas.
To st art t he t est , sel ect t he i t em you want to check.
Di spl ay
Radi o
GPS ,
E CU Info.
Rear Camer a
PC Car d Info.
Hard Key
Yaw Sens or
DVD
~ Ai r c on
HFL
XM
Sel ec t Chec k Units Return
1 Di spl ay ||
Har d K ey |
I Radi o || Y aw S ens or |
1 GPS ||
DVD |
1 E CU Info. II
Ai r c on |
1 Rear Camer a ||
HF L I
1 PC Car d Info ||
XM I
23-182
Di spl ay
Thi s di agnosi s does addi t i onal c hec ks on t he
c ommuni c at i on bus bet ween t he navi gat i on uni t and t he
navi gat i on di spl ay uni t. In addi t i on, t hi s t est c hec ks t he
i nt ernal el ect r oni c f unct i ons.
When t he connect i on i s NG, f i rst check f or l oose
t er mi nal s at t he navi gat i on uni t and t he navi gat i on
di spl ay uni t c onnec t i ons. Next check f or an open or
shor t i n t he ECU Bus li ne bet ween t he navi gat i on uni t
and t he navi gat i on di spl ay uni t. If t he li ne has an open
or shor t , r epl ace t he af f ect ed shi el ded har ness.
If t he ROM or RAM i s NG, r epl ace t he navi gat i on
di spl ay uni t.
The ver si on r epr esent s t he sof t war e ver si on i n t he
di spl ay.
Di spl ay | Return ~|
Connec t i on
ROM
RAM
Ver si on
OK
OK
OK
099100
GPS
If GPS i ndi cat es NG (ANT), t hen c hec k t he ent i re GPS
ant enna wi r e f rom t he navi gat i on uni t to t he GPS
ant enna. If t he wi r e i s c r ushed or damaged, try a
known-good GPS ant enna. If t he di agnosi s t hen r eads
OK , r epl ace t he ori gi nal GPS ant enna. If t he di agnosi s
sti ll r eads NG (ANT), r epl ace t he navi gat i on uni t.
Sel ec t i nf ormat i on to see t he GPS sat el l i t e det ai l s.
GPS Return |
Ant enna
Receiver in Navi ECU
OK
OK
Information
Radio
If NG i s i ndi cat ed, check for l oose audi o uni t connect or s.
NOTE: If t he XM link appear s r ed, but t he radi o link
appear s gr een i n t he navi gat i on syst em li nk, refer to
audi o syst em sympt om t r oubl eshoot i ng.
(cont ' d)
23-183
Navi gati on Sf s t em
Sf stem Diagnostic Mode (cont'd)
ECU i nf o.
Thi s sc r een l ooks f or pr obl ems i n t he navi gat i on uni t
When you i ni ti ate t hi s di agnosi s, t he navi gat i on uni t
may f r eeze or del ay up to a mi nut e whi l e t he di agnosi s
r uns.
NOTE; Do not try to end t hi s di agnosi s by pr essi ng OK or
Mem c l ear bef ore it f i ni shes, ot her wi se t he syst em may
reboot .
If V-RAM or D-RAM i s NG, r epl ace t he navi gat i on uni t
DVD lid di spl ays t he st at e of DVD Li d of navi gat i on
unit.
Pr ogr am Fl ash; Di spl ays t he ver si on of t he navi
sof t war e in memor y.
Pr ogr am on DVD: If di spl ayed, t hi s val ue r epr esent s
t he ver si on of t he navi gat i on sof t war e on t he
navi gat i on DVD.
DVD ver si on r epr esent s t he dat abase ver si on on t he
DVD. Y ou can find this information in either the Setup
Screen Version, or in the Diagnostic Screen Version.
Serial No. should be the same as the serial number
found on the underside of the navigation unit. Y ou
need this number to obtain the security code from the
. Interactive Network (iN) system.
The Mem Clear is for factory use and should not be
used unless instructed by the factory.
Selecting this will clear the customer's settings,
personal information, GPS orbital data, and anything
else stored in memory.
E CU Info. Ret ur n
V - RAM OK
DVD Li d Cl os e
Pr ogr am Fl as h 1.64.00
Pr ogr am on DVD 1.64.0000
DVD Ver s i on 4.62
Ser i al No. xxxxxxxxxx
Model TA0A
D- RAM OK
(2007.08.31 15:31:28)
Mem Cl ear
D - RAM Ch ec k
Rear Camera(Opt ional)
If the optional rearview camera is connected, it will be
displayed as OK.
It displays OFF when the optional rearview camera is
not connected.
Rear Camer a Ret ur n
Connec t i on NG
PC Card info.
There is no PC Card in the PC slot, and the screen should
display, PC Card is not inserted.
NOTE: Do not insert any card or object into the slot.
PC Car d Inf ormat i on Ret ur n
PC Car d i s not i nser t ed.
If the factory provides a PC card and instructs you to
insert it, the screen displays the Manufacturer, and
Product Name as shown in the following screen.
PC Car d Inf or mat i on Ret ur n
Manuf act ur er
xxxxxx
Pr oduct Name
xxxxxx
I Fi l es
23-184
Hard K ef
This diagnostic tests the interface dial and the buttons
that sur r ound it. For t hi s model , t he i nt erf ace di al and
but t ons do not use t he GA-Net bus f or c ommuni c at i ons.
To compl et e t he t est , t ouch each button on t he vehi c l e' s
audi o swi t ch panel , and move t he i nt erf ace di al to eac h
i ndi cat ed posi t i on. As eac h f unct i on i s t est ed, t he
cor r espondi ng button on t he di spl ay shoul d hi ghl i ght .
To exi t , push in and hol d t he sel ect or knob.
NOTE: You cannot use t he onsc r een ret urn button to exi t
t hi s f unct i on
Har d Key | Ret ur n
Keep Pus h i ng t o Ret ur n.

m
Yaw Sens or
Thi s sc r een gi ves a qui ck t est of t he y aw sensor
f unct i onal i t y based on t he t wo vol t ages Sens or and
Offset. For mor e i nf ormat i on see t he Yaw Rat e
di agnosi s.
DVD
Thi s di agnosi s t est s t he navi gat i on DVD reader.
NOTE: If t hi s t est f ai l s, r emove t he navi gat i on DVD, cl ean
it, and ret est bef ore or der i ng a new DVD.
DVD
[~Reiyrn*~
Er r or Det ai l
Ver si on 20050404
Maker ID 0x01
Navi Pl at f or m 0x01
Aircon
Thi s di agnost i c t est s t he cl i mat e bus connect i on (AC-SI
and AC- S O) bet ween t he navi gat i on uni t and cl i mat e
cont rol uni t. Make sur e t he engi ne i s runni ng for t hi s
t est .
NOTE: If t hi s t est i s run wi t h t he i gni ti on swi t ch i s in
A CCE S S ORY (I), t he r esul t wi l l be NG.
Ai r c on Return
Connec t i on
i gni t i on
OK
OK
Yaw S ens or Return
Zer o Poi nt Out put OK
Out put Val ue x.xxxV
Cur r ent Of f set x.xxxV
Temper at ur e i n E CU xxC
(cont' d)
23-185
ISSavigafioo Sf stem
HF L
This checks the 4 wire communication bus between the
HandsFreeLink control unit and the navigation unit.
This checks the GA-NET Bus line to the XM receiver.
When connection is shown with NG, check the
connection between XM receiver and audio unit.
X M
Ret ur n
Connection OK
Funct i onal Set up
Select the item you want to check.
Save Users Memory
Demo Mode
Mic Level
Functional Setup
Ret ur n
SaveUs ers Memory]f MicLevel
Demo Mode
S av e User s Memor y
When replacing the navigation unit, this function allows
the dealer to transfer the customer's personal data to the
new navigation unit. The transferred information
includes their Setup settings, and personal addresses.
The dealer inserts a PC card to the navigation unit, and
then selects the Save Users Memory function. The two
functions in this diagnostic screen are EXPORT and
IMPORT. EXPORT saves the customer's data to the PC
card, and IMPORT moves the PC card files to the new
navigation unit.
SaveUs ers Memory
Ret ur n
EXPORT IMPORT
Before starting this function, see the PC Card FAQs for
information regarding PC cards, and how to use this
function.
1. Select the EXPORT button to move the customer's
data from the original navigation unit to the PC card.
Select YES on the Export User Data Confirmation
screen. The process takes only a couple of seconds.
The system stores two files on the card.
NOTE: ifthe EXPORT button is grayed out, check the
PC card's edge connector, and the pins inside the
navigation unit (with a flashlight) for damage.
SaveUs ers Memory
Ret ur n
2. After installing the customer's original DVD in the
new navigation unit, allow the system to boot up.
Insert the PC card in the new navigation unit and enter
the Save Users Memory in the navigation system
diagnostic mode..
2
Q 1 Q C
3. Sel ec t t he IMPORT button to move t he t wo f i l es st or ed
by t he Expor t pr oc ess f r om t he PC car d to t he new
navi gat i on uni t. Sel ec t YE S on t he Import User Data
Conf i r mat i on sc r een. When t he t r ansf er i s f i ni shed (a
f ew sec onds) t he syst em aut omat i cal l y r eboot s. After
t he syst em r eboot s, r emove t he PC car d f r om t he PC
car d s l ot
NOTE: If t he IMPORT button i s gr ayed out , check if t he
Model and t he Pr ogr am Fl ash shown on t he Ver si on
sc r een ar e t he same f or t he t wo navi gat i on uni t s.
S av e Us er s Memor y Ret ur n
a
3
Impor t User Dat a?
Yes No
Demo Mode
Thi s sc r een i s f or f act ory use onl y, and shoul d al ways be
set to OFF. Oc c asi onal l y t he DEMO set t i ng i s t ur ned ON
when vehi c l es are bei ng used at Aut o S hows or si mi l ar
event s. Tur ni ng t hi s f eat ure on, al l ows t he navi gat i on
syst em to aut omat i cal l y f ol l ow a rout e to a dest i nat i on
when t he vehi c l e i s st at i onary. The Speed Rat e c hanges
t he speed of t he demo mode.
Demo Mode Return |
Demo
Speed Rat e
OFF I ON I j OFF
15ms [XlJ [7\T
Mm Level
Thi s di agnost i c al l ows you to i ndependent l y t est t he
mi c r ophone and t he navi gat i on TAL K and BACK
but t ons. They ar e used to act i vat e t he voi c e cont rol
syst em. The mi cr ophone i s l ocat ed near t he map li ght i n
t he roof c onsol e. The mi cr ophone c an now i sol at e t he
dr i ver ' s voi c e even when t her e i s noi se or ot her
c onver sat i ons i n t he vehi c l e. To properl y check t he
mi c r ophones, make sur e you ar e si t t i ng in t he dr i ver ' s
seat .
Pr ess t he navi gat i on TAL K button on t he st eer i ng
wheel , wai t uni t you hear a beep, and in a nor mal
voi c e say " t est i ng" . The TAL K i ndi cat or on t he sc r een
shoul d moment ar i l y t urn gr een, and t he text Now
Recor di ng... shoul d appear i n yel l ow. If t he talk
i ndi cat or shown on t he sc r een does not bri efly t urn
gr een, check t he wi r i ng f r om t he st eer i ng wheel
navi gat i on TAL K button to t he navi gat i on uni t. If t her e
i s no Mi c Level movement when you speak, t hen you
shoul d check t he wi r es r unni ng f r om t he mi cr ophone
i n t he roof c onsol e to t he HandsFr eeLi nk cont rol uni t
and t he navi gat i on uni t. If t he wi r es ar e OK, t he
mi cr ophone must be f aul t y; r epl ace t he mi cr ophone
l ocat ed i n roof c onsol e (see page 23-240).
Pr ess t he navi gat i on BACK button on t he st eer i ng
wheel . Thi s shoul d c ause t he Canc el i ndi cat or on t he
sc r een to moment ar i l y t urn gr een. If it does not bri ef ly
t urn gr een, check t he wi r i ng f r om t he st eer i ng wheel
navi gat i on BACK button to t he navi gat i on uni t.
L
Mi c Level Ret ur n
Mi c Level
r n
St eer i ng S wi t c h
[ fr ] ( BACK
(cont ' d)
23- 187
Navigation S f st em
F-CAN Sy s t em L ink
F-CAN (Fast Cont r ol l er Ar ea Net work) pas s es
i nformati on between processors on the network. T he
F -CAN network uses a communi cati on protocol that
trans mi ts data at 500 K bps.
I f the di agnosti c screen bel ow reads NG wi th the
i gni ti on swi tch is in ON (II), then di agnosti c troubl e
codes (DTCs) for the F -CAN can be retri eved wi th the
H DS (H onda Di agnosti c S ystem). The data di spl ayed
in the ID boxes is i rrel evant.
@ F or more detai l s on troubl es hooti ng the F - CAN, refer
to the mul ti pl ex i ntegrated control s ys tem and the
P GM- F I s ys tem.
F- CAN S y s t em Li nk
Return ]
F- CAN ERROR ACTI VE
ID ID ID ID UNIT
ENG
METER [2941 | W ] [WF\ [ W
324
Must have engi ne r unni ng f or t hi s t est .
GPS Inf ormat i on
Thi s screen s hows the current status of GP S recepti on.
The ci rcul ar di agram s hows the current l ocati on of the
GP S satellites (yel l ow numbers ) as they woul d appear in
the sky. The outer circle represents the hori zon (0
degrees el evati on). The mi ddl e and i nner circles
represents 30 and 60 degrees respecti vel y. T he very
center of the di agram (90 degrees el evati on) is di rectl y
overhead. Nearby obstructi ons, like tall bui l di ngs wi l l
bl ock satellites in that di recti on. That is why it is
necessary to be in an open area to effectively
troubl es hoot GP S recepti on issues. The satellite
numbers s hown on the di agram corres pond to the P RN
number in the GP S Details screen. There are al ways at
least 24 active GP S satellites in orbi t. B ecause satellites
fai l , and have to be removed f r om servi ce, spares are
alv.ayG pcrk^c* i n orL i l , i a u y t u acti vated. Thi s is w h y
the P RN (satellite ID number) can be greater than 24.
NOTE : W hen you use thi s screen for troubl es hooti ng,
park the vehi cl e outsi de, away f r om bui l di ngs, tall trees,
and hi gh- tensi on wi res for at least 10 mi nutes wi th the
engi ne runni ng.
The Number of Satellites box s hows the number of -
acqui red satellites ( maxi mum of 12). It s houl d contai n
three or more i cons, if not, troubl es hoot for GP S i con
is whi te or not s hown (see page 23-225).
T he Current P osi ti on s hows l ati tude, l ongi tude, and
el evati on (in feet). If there are less than four satellites,
the el evati on can be grossl y i naccurate.
The Date/Ti me fi el d s hows the current date, and also a
ti me that i ncl udes dayl i ght savi ngs and other offsets
entered by the cus tomer in S etup screen 2 Adj us t
T i me Zone/Cl ock.
GPS Inf or mat i on I Return
Number of Sat el l i t es
Cur r ent Posi t i on
Lat i t ude N xxxx' xx"
Longi t ude Exxxxx' xx"
El evat i on xx f eet
xxxx.xx.xx xx: xx: xx
O in Us e
O S ear c h
NOTE : P ressing the map/ gui de button di spl ays the
satellite number on each circle.
23-188
GPS Det ai l
By pr essi ng and hol di ng t he MENU button f or 2 s ec onds ,
a GPS Detai l sc r een appear s. Thi s sc r een di spl ays real
t i me i ncomi ng sat el l i t e posi t i onal data when t he vehi c l e
i s out si de i n t he open. The i nf ormat i on shown on t hi s
sc r een i s f or f act ory use.
NOTE: The dat e shown i n an exampl e onl y.
GPS Detail
Return
TS:xx
AS:xx
HDop:xx.x
VDop:xx.x
Speed:x.xKm/h
Direction: x
Date:xxxx.xx.xx
Time:xx:xx:xx
mm ST AZI EL C/N ACC
xx xx xxx x x xxx xx
XX XX XXX XX XXX XX
XX XX XXX XX XXX XX
XX XX XXX XX XXX XX
XX XX XXX XX XXX XX
XX XX XXX XX XXX XX
s
1/2
H
The box TS / AS and H Dop/V Dop i s for f act ory use.
The Speed and Di rect i on i nf ormat i on i s updat ed i n
real t i me when dr i vi ng.
The Dat e/Ti me Inf ormat i on i s t he same as in Set up
sc r een 2 Adj ust Ti me Zone/Cl ock.
If t he 3D i con i s shown above t he yel l ow dot s, t hi s
i mpl i es t hat at l east f our sat el l i t es ar e avai l abl e f or
map posi t i oni ng, and t he GPS i ndi cat or on t he map
sc r een wi l l be gr een. See t he Gl obal Posi t i oni ng
Syst em det ai l ed expl anat i on in t he Syst em
Descr i pt i on.
If the r ow of dat a in t he t abl e bel ow begi ns wi t h a
yel l ow dot , t he AZI and EL f i el ds can be used to l ocat e
each sat el l i t e on t he ci r cul ar GPS di agr am (see pri or
sc r een).
NOTE: The t abl e of val ues def i ne t he t er ms at t he t op of
t he c ol umns in t he GPS Detai l sc r een.
Column Des cript ion Problemindicat ion
3D Act i ve sat el l i t es
(Yel l ow Dot)
If 3D or 2D i s
mi ssi ng when t he
vehi c l e i s parked
out si de, f ol l ow
GPS i con i s whi t e
or not shown
(see page 23-225).
PRN The sat el l i t e ID
number
S T The st at us:
If alio, t hen, do
0 = cannot vi ew or
sear c hi ng,
2 = acqui r i ng
GPS i con i s whi t e
or not shown
(see page 23-225).
AZI Azi mut h, t he angl e
(0360) cl ockwi se
f r om north
EL El evat i on f rom t he
hori zon (90 deg i s
over head)
C/N Rec ei ver sensi t i vi t y Nor mal si gnal i s
49-52, no si gnal :
27-33
ACC Sat el l i t e ac c ur ac y
A S hows vi ew of all
1/2 sat el l i t es in t wo
or sc r een vi ews 1/2 or
2/2 2/2
v
(cont' d)
23-189
Syst em Di agnost i c Mode (cont' d)
Y aw Rate
Thi s di agnosi s c hec ks t he y aw rate sensor i n t he
navi gat i on uni t. Thi s devi c e det ect s when t he vehi c l e
t ur ns, and r eposi t i ons t he vehi c l e posi t i on i con on t he
map sc r een. For mor e det ai l ed i nf or mat i on, s ee t he y aw
rate sensor t heor y of oper at i on under Sy s t em
Descr i pt i on { see page 23-150).
Sensor i ndi cat es t he vol t age output f r om t he y aw rate
sensor . It shoul d i ndi cat e about 2.500 V when t he
vehi cl e i s st opped.
Offset i s t he r ef er ence vol t age or st andar d wi t hi n t he
y aw rate sensor . It al so shoul d i ndi cat e about 2.500 V
when t he vehi c l e i s st opped.
A sensor output vol t age L OWER t han t he Of f set
vol t age i ndi cat es that t he vehi c l e i s t ur ni ng to t he
r i ght
A sensor output vol t age HIGHER t han t he Of f set
vol t age i ndi cat es that t he vehi c l e i s t urni ng to t he left.
The y aw rate offset, and sensor shoul d both i ndi cat e
about 2.500 V when t he vehi c l e i s st opped. If ei t her
r eads zer o, or 5.000 V, r epl ace t he navi gat i on uni t.
The y aw rate offset and sensor shoul d be wi t hi n
+/0.01 V of eac h ot her when t he vehi c l e i s st opped.
The sensor val ue shoul d c hange rel at i ve to t he offset
as t he vehi c l e t ur ns whi l e dr i vi ng. If not , r epl ace t he
E xample: Veh icle s t opped
Nor mal
Of f set 2.526 V
Sens or 2. 516-2. 536 V
E xample: Veh iclet urning
Normal
Offset 2.526 V
Sens or 2.678 V
(left t urn)
2.478 V
(ri ght t urn)
Abnormal
Of f set 2.526 V
Sens or 2.623 V
Abnormal
Of f set 2.526 V
Sens or 2.623 V
(no c hange on
t ur ns)
Sensi t i vi t y st udy r epr esent s t he st at us of t he i nt ernal
t uni ng f unct i on. At i ni t i al i zat i on, t hi s val ue st ar t s at 6
and i nc r eases to 10 as t he i nt ernal cor r ect i on val ues
bec ome mor e accur at e.
The set t i ngs CCW Cal Fact or , CW Cat Fact or , and Set
ar e for f act ory use onl y. THIS S HOUL D NEVER BE
ADJ US TED.
For det ai l ed anal ysi s of t he y aw rate sel ect t uni ng.
Yaw Rat e Return
S ens or
Of f set
CCW Fac t or
CW Fac t or
x.xxxV
x.xxxV
x.x%
x.x%
Tuni ng I
23-190
Yaw Rat e Tuning
This diagnosis allows you to graphically display
pr obl ems wi t h the y aw rate sensor .
The ANG-Di sp value accumulates any differences
between the offset and sensor voltages (see Yaw Rate
di agnosi s). When t he sensor f unct i ons properl y, t he
r andom c hanges in t hese t wo vol t ages gener al l y
c anc el s out, so t he val ue is 0. However if one vol t age i s
consi st ent l y hi gher t han t he ot her, t hen t he ANG-Di sp
val ue ac c umul at es t he const ant c hange.
The Reset button t empor ar i l y c l ear s t he angul ar
accumul at i on (ANG-Di sp), and c l ear s t he di spl ay dot s.
Do not t ouch t he CCW, CW, or Set but t ons. These are
used for f act ory set up onl y.
Two t est s ar e expl ai ned. For l arge pr obl ems wi t h t he
sensor val ues, t he st at i onary t est usual l y conf i r ms
whet her t he sensor i s def ect i ve. For y aw rate i ssues
rel at ed to dr i vi ng, do t he road t est .
1. St at i onar y t est : If the VP i con spi ns in pl ace and t he
ANG-Di sp val ue sl owl y i nc r eases or dec r eases i n
val ue, t he yaw rate sensor i s def ect i ve. Repl ace t he
2. Road t est : Dri ve t he vehi c l e on a ver y st rai ght r oad.
Ent er t he di agnost i c mode, sel ect Yaw rat e, and t ouch
t he Tuni ng button. Whi l e dri vi ng down a st rai ght
r oad, t he whi t e dot s shoul d t r ace a st rai ght li ne ac r oss
t he sc r een. However , if you ar e dri vi ng on a st rai ght
r oad, and you noti ce t he dot s const ant l y droppi ng
down or headi ng up as you dr i ve, t he navi gat i on
uni t ' s y aw sensor i s def ect i ve. You c an t ouch Reset to
cl ear ANG-Di sp, and dotted l i nes.
I f ei t her t est above f ai l s, pl ease ent er Yaw rate sensor
def ect i ve for t he pr obl em descr i pt i on, on t he
Navi gat i on cor e ret urn f or m.
NOTE: The CCW, CW and Set but t ons ar e di sabl ed
and cannot be act i vat ed.
Tuni ng
0.0%
A V l Return
Car St at us
Us e t hi s sc r een to conf i r m t hat t he navi gat i on uni t i s
properl y r ecei vi ng i nput si gnal s. Si gnal s equal to (0) are
OFF, and si gnal s equal to (1) are ON. If t he val ue on t he
di spl ay does not mat ch t he act ual vehi cl e st at us, t hen
check t he wi r e car r yi ng t he si gnal .
VSP-Vehi c l e Speed Pul se f r om ECM/ PCM
(Connect or A (8P) t er mi nal No.6)
a) OFF (0) when vehi c l e i s not movi ng
b) ON (1) when vehi c l e i s movi ng
The VS P c omes f r om t he ECM/ PCM as a dedi cat ed
si gnal . Int ernal l y, t he navi gat i on uni t c ompar es t he
act ual VP on t he map agai nst st reet dat a to adj ust t he
pul se to speed sc al i ng f act or. As t hi s sc al i ng f act or
bec omes mor e ac c ur at e, t he Level gr adual l y i nc r eases
f rom 0 to 10 (see t he Ti r e Cal i br at e di agnost i c sc r een).
BACK -Rever se i ndi cat i on f r om tai lli ght r el ay
(Connect or A (8P) t er mi nal No.5)
a) OFF (0) when t he shi ft l ever i s i n any posi t i on ot her
t han r ever se
b) ON (1) when t he shi ft l ever i s in r ever se
The Back si gnal i s used by t he navi gat i on uni t to al l ow
t he map sc r een to s how t he VP movi ng bac kwar ds when
in r ever se. Thi s si gnal i s needed bec ause t he Speed
Pul se has no di rect i on i ndi cat i on.
Car St at us Return |
VS P . [0] ILL [0j
BACK [0] ILL CANCEL [o]
IGNITION [ 0|
ANG- Di sp
0
Reset CCW CW S et
(cont' d)
23-191
Nawigation S f st em
Sf stem Diagnostic Mode {cont'd)
IGNITION-Ignition Switch Position Indication
{Connector A (8P) terminals No. 1 and 2)
Detects ifthe engine is running is running using
information provided over the F-CAN bus.
a) OFF ( 0) when the ignition switch position is in
ACCESSORY (I)
b) ON (1) when the ignition switch position is in ON (II)
ILL-lilumination Indication (Connector B (32P) terminal
No. 5)
a) OFF ( 0) when parking lights, or headlights are off
b) ON (1) when parking lights, or headlights are on
The navigation uses the signal to determine whether to
put the navigation screen into the Day or Night
brightness mode. (Setup screen 1)
ILL CANCEL
This item detects whether the illumination cancel
function is in use.
a) OFF ( 0) if illumination cancel is not selected
b) ON (1) if illumination cancel is activated
The illumination cancel function is activated by
increasing the dash brightness to MAX. The F-CAN bus
passes this information from the gauge control module
to the navigation unit.
NOTE: This setting is unaffected by the display mode
hard button located below and to the left of the interface
dial.
Ver si on
This screen displays the current version information for
the navigation system software. In addition, this screen
allows the loading of updated software if requested by
the factory, or instructed by a Service Bulletin, Software
may be loaded from a CD or a PC card.
Program F lash: Displays the version of the navigation
software in memory.
Program Disc: If displayed, this value represents the
version of the navigation software on the navigation
DVD.
NOTE: The last two letters of the Program F lash or
DVD fields indicate which DVD is installed i n the uni t
The letters KA imply that a United States DVD is
installed. I fthe letters are KC, then a Canada DVD is
installed. (See coverage di scussi on bel ow.)
IPL, APL, DBOOT, and System uCom, are all for factory
use.
Model: F or this model, the field should begin with
TAO.
Download: Do not touch, unless instructed by the
factory.
Check any official Honda service website for more
service information about navigation DVDs.
Version Return
Program F lash
Program Disc
I PL
APL
DBOOT
System uCom
Model
x.xx.xxK A
x.x.xxx
x.xxx.
TAOA DownLoad
There are two navigation DVDs produced for this model.
The white DVD labeled United States is for the US
market and contains maps for the contiguous 48 US
states, and some southern portions of Canada.
Customers wanting additional northern coverage in
Canada, can purchase a Canada DVD by contacting
the DVD fulfillment desk.
The gray DVD labeled Canada, is for the Canada
market, and contains maps for all of Canada, plus
some of the northern US states. If customers with this
DVD require full US coverage {including states like
F lorida and Texas), they may purchase a United States
DVD by contacting the DVD fulfillment desk.
PC Car d FAQs
Quest i on Ans wer
W here do we buy the f l ash memor y or
adaptors, and what do we ask for?
You need a PCMCIA t ype II adapt or and a f l ash memor y chi p. You c an
pur c hased t hem at a comput er , or offi ce suppl y st or e. The c ar d i s t he
s ame si ze and shape as t he PC c ar d i n t he HDS. Adapt or s t hat accept
mul t i pl e f l ash t ypes ar e not r ec ommended.
What memor y f l ash c hi ps wi l l wor k
wi t h what adapt or s?
The f l ash memor y devi c es t hat have been t est ed i ncl ude Compac t Fl ash
(CF), and ATA st yl e (like t he c ar d in t he HDS). Ot her car d t ypes and f l ash
memor y c hi ps may wor k, but have not been t est ed.
What capaci t y car d do 1 need f or t hi s
f unct i on?
A memor y chi p wi t h capaci t y of 64 MB to 2 GB wi l l work. The t wo f i l es
moved to t he PC c ar d dur i ng expor t ar e l ess t han a Megabyt e in si ze.
Shoul d t he dealer have a dedi cat ed PC
car d for t he Expor t and Import
navi gat i on f unct i on?
Yes , t reat t he PC c ar d as a dedi cat ed spec i al t ool that you c an use any t i me
you need to t r ansf er t he navi gat i on per sonal f i l es to a new navi gat i on uni t
on ' 08 or later vehi c l es.
What devi ce can 1 use to mai nt ai n t he
PC c ar d, and del et e f i l es
Any comput er st or e sel l s US B st yl e car d r eader s that accept t he PC c ar d,
and a al l ow you to do fi le mai nt enance on your PC c ar d. Most l apt ops wi l l
al so accept t he PC c ar d.
Can we move t he c ust omer ' s dat a to
di fferent model s?
No, t he f i l es ar e model speci f i c and wi l l onl y l oad into a navi gat i on uni t
wi t h t he same part number .
Can we move t he c ust omer ' s dat a to
t he s ame vehi cl e wi t h a di fferent
sof t war e ver si on? (Li ke movi ng
ver si on 4.41 to ver si on 4.51)
The c ust omer ' s f i l es can onl y be t r ansf er r ed to a new navi gat i on uni t if the
Model and t he Pr ogr am Fl ash shown on t he Ver si on sc r een ar e t he same.
Fi l es cannot be t r ansf er r ed to t he di fferent model and di fferent ver si ons.
Wi l l ot her f i l es on t he PC car d like
i mages or musi c f i l es prevent t he
Export /Import f unct i on f rom wor ki ng?
No, t he syst em si mpl y adds t wo smal l f i l es t hat ar e recogni zed by t he new
navi gat i on uni t when perf ormi ng t he i mport f unct i on. However , it t he PC
car d i s f ul l , t he Expor t f unct i on won' t wor k cor r ect l y.
Do I have to del et e t he f i l es on t he PC
c ar d after each t r ansf er of the per sonal
dat a?
After t he t r ansf er of per sonal dat a to t he new navi gat i on uni t, t he f i l es
r emai n on t he PC c ar d. Si nc e t hi s i s conf i dent i al i nf ormat i on, we
r ec ommend that you del et e t hese f i l es after eac h use. Pl ease note that
each t i me you export navi gat i on f i l es of t he s ame model and ver si on, t he
f i l es ar e over wr i t t en. Over t i me t he PC car d ac c umul at es t wo f i l es f or each
ver si on of t he 8 or so Honda navi gat i on PC model s.
If t he memor y car d f ormat t i ng what
f or mat shoul d I use?
If t he PC car d needs to be f or mat t ed, use t he FAT (file al l ocat i on t abl e) fi le
syst em.
I can' t ent er t he navi gat i on di agnost i c
mode to do t he Export /Import f unct i on.
How c an I t ransf er t he per sonal dat a?
Some i nt ernal navi gat i on uni t E CU f ai l ur es may make it i mpossi bl e to use
t he Export /Import f unct i on.
(cont' d)
Navi gat i on Syst em
System Diagnostic Mode (cont'd)
Quest i on Ans wer
Why wont t he Expor t or Import
f unct i ons wor k? What do 1 check as
part of t r oubl eshoot i ng?
The c ar d may not be f ul l y i nser t ed into t he sl ot . Ej ect t he PC c ar d, and
i nspect f or war pi ng or damage to t he edge connect or . Never use
exc essi ve f or ce to i nser t a PC c ar d. Thi s c an damage t he pi ns in t he r ear
of t he sl ot .
The PC c ar d may not cont ai n f i l es that ar e recogni zed by t he new
navi gat i on uni t. Navi gat i on dat a can onl y be t r ansf er r ed bet ween
navi gat i on uni t s wi t h t he s ame Model c ode, and wi t h t he s ame navi
Pr ogr am f l ash ver si on.
The f l ash memor y chi p t ype may not be accept ed by t he syst em. Onl y
Compac t Fl ash and ATA c ar ds have been t est ed.
The c ar d' s PCMCIA adapt or may prevent a known-good PC car d f rom
bei ng r ecogni zed. Avoi d mul t i -sl ot t ype PCMCIA adapt or s that accept
sever al di fferent f l ash memor y t ypes.
The c ar d may be full and as a resul t t he f i l es ar e st or ed, but wi t hout any
dat a. Expor t and i mport appear to f unct i on, but move not hi ng. Del et e
unused f i l es f r om t he PC c ar d.
Ther e may not be any f i l es on t he PC c ar d. If t he PC car d has a wri t e
prot ect i on swi t c h, make sur e it i s turned off h H ^
r o
Me
'!?2t h o exper t
f unct i on.
Al t hough f l ash memor y c hi ps ar e r el i abl e, occasi onal l y t hey devel op
bad sec t or s or ot her f ormat t i ng er r or s t hat pr event s t hem f r om
accept i ng f i l es. The PC car d shoul d be ref ormat t ed usi ng t he FAT
f ormat .
m The PC c ar d may have been f ormat t ed usi ng t he f ormat NTFS. Onl y t he
FAT f or mat i s accept ed by t he syst em.
Hard Di sc Dri ve (HDD) c ar ds may not wor k properl y in t he syst em and
c an over heat or qui t f unct i oni ng, part i cul arl y in a hot vehi c l e. They ar e
not r ec ommended.
Bef ore per f or mi ng t he Import f unct i on, ensur e that t he ori gi nal
navi gat i on DVD i s l oaded into t he new navi gat i on uni t and wor ki ng
properl y.
23-194
Error Message Tabl e
S c r e e n Er r or M e s s a g e Solut ion
Navi gat i on syst em i s unabl e to acqui r e a
proper GPS si gnal .
Make sur e t here i s not hi ng on t he dashboar d bl ocki ng t he GPS
ant enna.
If not, move t he vehi c l e to an open spac e away f r om tall bui l di ngs,
t r ees, et c.
Af t ermarket met al l i c wi ndow ti nti ng and ot her af t ermarket devi c es
c an affect t he GPS r ecept i on.
Navi gat i on uni t door i s open or No DVD
di sc i s i nst al l ed. Pl ease check syst em.
Make sur e t he navi gat i on DVD i s t he cor r ect col or and i s not sc r at c hed
or damaged. Make sur e it i s i nst al l ed wi th t he l abel si de up and t he
navi gat i on uni t door i s snapped f ul l y c l osed.
No DVD di sc , pl ease check syst em. Check that t he cor r ect col or and ver si on navi gat i on DVD i s i nst al l ed
wi t h t he label si de up.
Di spl ay t emp i s too hi gh. Syst em wi l l shut
down unti l di spl ay c ool s down.
Thi s message appear s bri efly when t he di spl ay t emper at ur e i s too
hi gh, and t hen t he di spl ay t ur ns off until t he t emper at ur e c ool s down.
The syst em t ur ns back on when t he di spl ay c ool s down.
Out si de t emper at ur e i s l ow, syst em wi l l
take awhi l e t o st art up.
The t emper at ur e i s bel ow 22 F( 30 C) and t he navi gat i on uni t has
di ffi culti es r eadi ng t he navi gat i on DVD. The syst em wi l l st art up when
t he t emper at ur e war ms up.
DVD di sc r eadi ng error (unf ormat t ed),
pl ease consul t your deal er .
Check t he navi gat i on DVD for t he correct col or and sof t war e ver si on.
Al so check f or deep sc r at c hes or ot her damage. Make sur e you are
usi ng an offi ci al Honda navi gat i on DVD (whi t e in col or ). The syst em
cannot read ot her mappi ng dat abases or vi deo DVDs. Chec k any
offi ci al Honda ser vi c e websi t e f or mor e ser vi c e i nf ormat i on about the
navi gat i on syst em and sof t war e updat es.
Rout e has not been compl et ed. Pl ease try
agai n f r om a di fferent l ocat i on.
Rout i ng to or f r om a pl ace (new ar ea) that i s not in t he dat abase. Tr y
pl anni ng a di fferent route to or f r om a di fferent l ocat i on t hat i s cl ear l y
di spl ayed on t he map (map mat ched).
No al t ernat e route f ound. Ori gi nal route
wi l l be f ol l owed.
No al t ernat e route met hod was f ound. The ori gi nal route met hod wi l l
be used.
Thi s dest i nat i on cannot be f ound i n
dat abase.
The dest i nat i on was not f ound in t he dat abase. Tr y anot her
dest i nat i on near by, or sel ect t he dest i nat i on wi t h t he i nt erf ace di al .
23-195
DTC 1001: FROM Syst em info Error
NOTE:
22- 9 0 ) .
Bef or e you t r oubl eshoot , make sur e to f ol l ow t he
Gener al Tr oubl eshoot i ng Inf ormat i on (see page
23- 130).
1. Tur n t he i gni ti on swi t ch to L OCK (0) and t hen back t o
ON (II).
2. Chec k f or t he har d error c ode (see page 23-138).
is DTC 1001 indicated?
YES - Repl ac e t he navi gat i on uni t (see page 23-238),
bec ause t her e i s an i nt ernal pr obl em wi t h t he
F l as h - ROM
If t he vehi c l e r epeat edl y c omes back wi t h t he DTC,
r epl ace t he navi gat i on uni t (see page 23-238).
DTC 1101: Medi a Bus Send Er r or
NOTE:
22- 9 0 ) .
Bef ore you t r oubl eshoot , make sur e to f ol l ow t he
23- 130).
1. Cl ear har d error c ode (see page 23-139).
2. Tur n t he i gni ti on swi t ch to L OCK (0) and t hen back t o
ON (II).
3. Check for t he har d er r or c ode (see page 23-138).
is DTC 1101 indicated?
YES - Repl ac e t he navi gat i on uni t (see page 23- 238). !
r epl ace t he navi gat i on uni t (see page 23- 238).
23-196
DTC 1201: DVD High Temp DTC 1202: DVD Low Temp
NOTE:
22- 90).
23- 130).
Thi s code set s when t he i nt ernal t emper at ur e of t he
navi gat i on uni t ECU r i ses above 158 F (70 C). The
navi gat i on uni t i s desi gned to shut down to prot ect t he
navi gat i on uni t E CU. Thi s coul d be c aused by an
i noperat i ve navi gat i on uni t ECU f an or if t he trunk
t emper at ur e exc eeds t he maxi mum. Do t he
t r oubl eshoot i ng when t he uni t i s wi t hi n t he al l owabl e
t emper at ur e r ange.
1. Check that t he t emper at ur e i s bel ow 158 F (70 C) in
t he trunk.
2. Cl ear t he har d error code (see page 23-139).
ON (II).
4. Check for t he hard error c ode (see page 23-138).
YES - Repl ac e t he navi gat i on unit (see page 23-238).
If t he vehi c l e repeat edl y c omes back wi t h t he DTC,
r epl ace t he navi gat i on uni t (see page 23- 238) .
NOTE:
22- 90).
23- 130).
Thi s c ode set s when t he i nt ernal t emper at ur e of t he
navi gat i on uni t ECU f al l s bel ow - 4 F (-20 C). The
navi gat i on uni t i s desi gned to shut down to protect t he
navi gat i on uni t E CU. Thi s i s usual l y c aused by ver y
col d ext eri or t emper at ur es. Do t he t r oubl eshoot i ng
when t he uni t i s wi t hi n t he al l owabl e t emper at ur e
range.
1. Check that t he t emper at ur e i s above 4F( 20 C)i n
t he trunk.
2. Cl ear t he har d error c ode (see page 23-139).
ON (II).
4. Chec k for t he hard error code (see page 23-138).
NO -lntermi ttent f ai l ure, t he syst em i s OK at t hi s t i me.
DTC 1301: GPS Ant enna Error
NOTE:
Chec k the vehicle battery conditionf i rst (see page
22- 90) .
23- 130).
Make sur e t he vehi c l e i s parked out si de, away f r om
bui l di ngs.
Af t er mar ket el ect r oni c devi c es l ocat ed near t he
navi gat i on uni t or GPS ant enna c an pot ent i al l y
i nt erf ere wi t h t he operat i on of t he navi gat i on s y s t em.
1. Cl ear t he har d er r or c ode (see page 23-139).
2. Tur n t he i gni t i on swi t c h to L OCK (0) and t hen back t o
ON (ft).
3. Chec k f or t he har d er r or c ode (see page 23-138).
t i me.B
5. Chec k f or poor c onnec t i ons or l oose t er mi nal s at t he
navi gat i on uni t connect or E (2P).
6. Cl ear t he har d er r or code
ON (II).
8. Chec k f or t he har d error code.
t i me.B
10. Repl ac e a known-good GPS ant enna (see page
23-240).
12. Cl ear t he har d error c ode.
ON (II).
14. Chec k f or t he hard error code.
YES - Repl ac e t he ori gi nal GPS antenna.11
NO- l nt er mi t t ent f ai l ur e, t he syst em i s OK at t hi s t i me.
If t h o w
e
u;
c
|
c
r epeat ed l y c o m e s b ac k wi t h t he DTC,
r epl ace t he navi gat i on uni t (see page 23-238). B
23-198
% i
DTC 1302: GPS Recei ver Error 1
NOTE :
Check the vehi cl e battery condi ti on first (see page
22- 90).
B efore you tr oubl es hoot make sure to f ol l ow the
General T roubl es hooti ng I nformati on (see page
23- 130).
Make sure the vehi cl e is parked outsi de, away f r om
bui l di ngs.
Aftermarket el ectroni c devi ces l ocated near the
navi gati on uni t or GP S antenna can potenti al l y
interfere wi th the operati on of the navi gati on s ys tem.
1. Clear the hard error code (see page 23-139).
2. T urn the i gni ti on swi tch to LOCK (0) and then back to
ON (II).
3. Check for the hard error code (see page 23-138).
YES-Go to step 4.
NO -lntermittent fai l ure, the s ys tem is OK at thi s
ti me. H
4. T urn the i gni ti on swi tch to LOCK (0).
5. Check for poor connecti ons or l oose termi nal s at the
navi gati on uni t connector E (2P).
6. Clear the hard error code.
ON (II).
8. Check for the hard error code.
YE S-Go to step 9.
NO -lntermittent fai l ure, the s ys tem is OK at thi s
ti me. H
10. Replace a known- good GP S antenna (see page
23-240).
11. T urn the i gni ti on s wi tch to ON (II).
ON (II).
YE S-Replace the ori gi nal GP S a nt e nna .
NO -lntermittent fai l ure, the s ys tem is OK at thi s ti me.
If the vehi cl e repeatedl y comes back wi th the DTC,
repl ace the navi gati on uni t (see page 23- 238) .
23-199
P T C 1303: GPS Recei ver Error 2
NOTE:
22- 90).
23- 130).
Make sur e t he vehi cl e i s parked out si de, away f r om
bui l di ngs.
Af t ermarket el ect r oni c devi c es l ocat ed near t he
i nterfere wi t h t he operat i on of t he navi gat i on syst em.
1. Cl ear t he hard error c ode (see page 23-139).
ON fi ll.
3. Check f or t he hard er r or c ode (see page 23-138).
YES - Repl ac e t he navi gat i on uni t (see page 23-238).H
DTC 1304: Gyr o Error 1
NOTE:
22- 90).
23- 130).
Make sur e t he vehi c l e i s par ked out si de, away f r om
bui l di ngs.
1. Cl ear har d er r or c ode (see page 23-139).
ON (II).
3. Chec k f or t he har d error code (see page 23-138).
YE S-Replace t he navi gat i on uni t (see page 23- 238) .
23
m
200
DTC 1305: Gyr o Error 2:ECU Temp XX C
NOTE:
Check t he vehi c l e battery condi t i on fi rst ( s ee page
22- 90).
23- 130).
navi gat i on uni t or GPS ant enna c an potenti ally
1. Chec k that t he t runk t emper at ur e i s bet ween 4F {
20 C) and 158 F (70 C).
2. Cl ear hard er r or code (see page 23-139).
ON (II).
4. Check for t he har d error code (see page 23-138).
NO -lntermi ttent f ai l ur e, t he syst em i s OK at t hi s t i me.
If t he vehi cl e r epeat edl y c omes back wi t h t he DTC,
DTC 1306: Vehi cl e Speed Pul se
NOTE:
22- 90).
23- 130).
2. Tur n t he i gni ti on swi t ch to L OCK (0), and t hen st art t he
engi ne.
YE S-Go to st ep 4.
NO -lntermi ttent f ai l ur e, t he syst em i s OK at t hi s
t i me. B
4. Dri ve t he vehi c l e and wat c h t he VS P si gnal .
Does t he VSP signal change from [0] t o [1] as you
drive?
NO -Do t he sympt om t r oubl eshoot i ng f or Vehi cl e
posi t i on i con const ant l y l eaves r oad, moves
errat i cal l y or i s ver y f ar f rom act ual posi t i on (see page
23-21 B)M
23-201
DTC 137: DVD Read Er r or
NOTE:
22- 90).
Chec k any offi ci al Honda ser vi c e websi t e f or mor e
i nf ormat i on about t he navi gat i on syst em and sof t war e
updat es.
Bef ore you t r oubl eshoot make sur e to f ol l ow t he
23- 130).
Inspect t he navi gat i on DVD f or sc r at c hes or damage.
1. Chec k t he navi gat i on DVD.
Is t he navigat ion DVD t he correct color and version for
t he vehicle? Is it scrat ch free?
NO -Repl ace t he navi gat i on DVD and ret est .
Is t here a DVD error message?
YE S - Go to DVD sc r een er r or mes s ages (see page
23- 229) . !
NO -Go to st ep 3. -
ON (ll).
5. Chec k f or t he har d er r or c ode (see page 23-138).
YES - Repl ac e t he navi gat i on uni t (see page 23-238).H
NO -lntermi ttent f ai l ur e, t he syst em i s OK at t hi s t i me.
DTC142: Audi o Error 2
NOTE:
22- 90).
23- 130).
ON (II).
YE S - Ch ec k if t he audi o uni t f unct i ons are wor ki ng
properl y. If any pr obl ems ar e f ound, go to af f ect ed
t r oubl eshoot i ng i n audi o s ec t i o n .
t i me. H
23-202
DTC 1403; Audi o Error 3
NOTE :
Ch eck t h e veh icle bat t ery condit ion firs t (s ee page
22- 90).
Beforeyou t roubles h oot , make s uret o follow t h e
General Troubles h oot ing Informat ion (s ee page
23- 130).
1. Clear t h e h ard error code (s ee page23-139).
2. Turn t h eignit ion s wit ch t o L OCK (0) and t h en back t o
ON (II).
3. Ch eck for t h e h ard error code (s ee page23-138).
YE S-Replacet h e navigat ion unit (s ee page23-238).H
NO-lnt ermit t ent failure, t h e s ys t em is OK at t h is
t i rne.H
DTC 1409: Audi o Error 9
NOTE :
22- 90).
23- 130).
ON (II).
YE S-Ch eck t h eXM error codes (s ee page23-65). If
any codes are det ect ed, go t o affect ed
t roubles h oot ing in audi o (XM) s ect i on.!
t i me . !
23-203
Navigation Syst em
DTC Troubl eshoot i ng f e o n t
B
d )
PTC 1501: Ai r con Er r or
PTC 2703: Ai r con Di ag
N O T E :
22- 90).
Check f or B-CAN DTCs and r esol ve t hem bef ore
Bef ore you t r oubl eshoot make sur e to f ol l ow t he
23- 130).
DTC 1501 and/or 2703 c an be st or ed when t he i gni ti on
swi t ch i s at A CCE S S ORY (I). Wi t h t he i gni ti on swi t ch i s
i n A CCE S S ORY (I), t he cl i mat e cont rol uni t i s t ur ned
off and the navi gat i on uni t l oses c ommuni c at i on and
st or es DTCs . Ther ef or e, t her e i s a possi bi l i t y t hat t he
syst em i s nor mal even DTC 1501 and/or 2703 i s st or ed.
Chec k Sy s t em Li nks (see page 23-176) wi t h t he engi ne
r unni ng, and if it s hows nor mal , t he syst em i s OK at
t hi s t i me. If not, do t hi s t r oubl eshoot i ng.
ON (II).
3. Go into t he Di agnost i c Menu, and sel ect t he
Sel f -Di agnosi s Mode i n t he Sel ec t Di agnosi s It ems
menu (see page 23-176).
4. Chec k t he Sy s t em Li nks.
Is the A/C icon red?
t i me . B
7. Connec t navi gat i on uni t connect or B (32P) t er mi nal s
No. 4, No. 20, and No. 21 wi t h a j umper wi r e.
AC SI AC SI
(ORN) (ORN)
[1 fl
1| 2 34 | 5| / A 8 19 |10
1171181191201211/1231241251261/l/l/l/l/t/
A C S 01 AC CLK1
(PUR) (BRN)
J UMPER WI RE J UMPER WI RE
8, T urn the i gni ti on swi tch to ON (111.
9. Do t he cl i mat e cont rol Sel f -Di agnost i c Mode (see
page 21-101).
Are both HE A T/VENT indicators solid with the remaining
icons blinking?
NO- Go to st ep 10.
10. Tur n t he i gni ti on swi t ch to L OCK (0), t hen di sc onnec t
t he j umper wi r e.
11. Di sc onnec t cl i mat e cont rol uni t connect er B (12P).
12. Connec t cl i mat e cont rol uni t connect or B (12P)
t er mi nal s No. 7, No. 8, and No. 9 wi t h a j umper wi r e.
1 P Ft
1 2 3
/
5 6
7 8 9 10
/
C
M

A C SI
( L TGRN)
AC CLK1
(RED)
J UMPER WI RE AC S 01 J UMPER WI RE
(BRN)
23-204
13. Check f o r cont i nui t y bet ween navi gat i on uni t
connect or B (32P) t er mi nal s No. 4, No. 20, and
A C Sf
(ORN)
A C S 01
(PUR)
1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 | 7 / | 8 | 9 |10
AAAAAA
|17 18|19|20 21 \ / 23|24|25|26 / \ /
AAAA
AC CLK1
5) (BRN)
NO-Repai r an open i n the wi r e(s) bet ween t he
navi gat i on cont rol uni t and t he cl i mat e cont rol uni t .Li
navi gat i on uni t connect or B (32P) t er mi nal s No. 4,
A C SI
1 | 2| 3| 4 | 5 \ /
/ | 8 | 9 | 1 0 AAAAAA
|l 7|l 8|l 9|20|2l |/l 23|24|25|26|/ VV1/ ^/ 1/
A C S 01
(PUR)
AC CLK1
(BRN)
bet ween t he navi gat i on cont rol uni t and the cl i mat e
cont rol uni t .H
NO -Go to st ep 16.
16. Chec k f or cont i nui t y bet ween t he t er mi nal of
navi gat i on uni t connect or B (32P) accor di ng t o t he
t abl e.
Fromt erminal To t erminals
B4 (ORN) B20 (PUR), B21 (BRN)
B20 (PUR) B21 (BRN)
YES - Repai r a shor t in t he wi r e(s) bet ween t he
navi gat i on uni t and cl i mat e cont rol uni t .H
NO -Go to st ep 17.
navi gat i on uni t connect or B (32P) t er mi nal s No. 4,
A C SI
(ORN)
1 f 2 I 3~| 4 | 5 \ / / I 8 | 9 |10
A\A\/V\A\A |17|18|19|20|21L/|23|24|25|26|/|/|/|/|//|/
/
AC S 01
(PUR)
AC CLK1
(BRN)
Is t here more t han 0.2 V?
t he navi gat i on uni t and t he cl i mat e cont rol uni t .H
NO -Repl ace t he cl i mat e cont rol uni t (see page
21-190).H
23-205
DTC 2601: D i s p l ay Di ag : Connect
NOTE:
Chec k the vehi c l e battery condi t i on first (see page
22- 90).
Chec k for B-CAN DTCs and r esol ve t hem bef ore
23- 130).
ON (II).
3. Go into t he Di agnost i c Menu, and sel ect t he
Sel f -Di agnosi s Mode in t he Sel ec t Di agnosi s It ems
Is the Display icon red?
YE S-Go to st ep 5.
ti me. I l
5. Chec k f or poor c onnec t i ons or l oose t er mi nal s at
navi gat i on uni t connect or B (32P), audi o uni t
connect or E (14P), and XM r ecei ver connect or A (14P).
Are the connections OK ?
YE S-Go to st ep 6.
NO -Repai r poor c onnec t i ons or l oose t er mi nal s, and
r echeck t he Sel f -Di agnosi s Mode (see page 23- 176) .
7. Di sc onnec t navi gat i on uni t connect or B (32P) and t he
navi gat i on di spl ay uni t 28P connect or .
8. Connec t t he navi gat i on uni t connect or B (32P)
E CU B US +
(GRN)
J UMPER Wl K b
1 | 2 j 3 j 4 ] 5 l/lXl .8 | 9 j 1 o\ AAA AAA
17ll8ll9l20l2ll/l23l24l25l26l/l/X7l/1/1X
E CU B U S -
(RED)
9. Check f or cont i nui t y bet ween navi gat i on di spl ay uni t
28P connect or t er mi nal s No. 5 and No. 19.
NAVIGATION DI SPL AY UNIT 28P CONNECTOR
E CU BUS +
(GRN)
I : n
1 2 3 4 5 6 z
7
8 9 10 1112 137
1 5 / 1 7 18 1<5 20 21 22 23 2 4 ^ 2 6 27 28
E CU B U S -
x
(RED)
YE S-Go to st ep 10.
NO -There i s an open in t he wi r e bet ween t he
navi gat i on uni t and t he navi gat i on di spl ay uni t.
Repl ace t he af f ect ed shi el ded h ar n es s .
11. Di sconnect audi o uni t connect or E (14P) and XM
r ecei ver A (14P) connect or .
23-206
12. Check for cont i nui t y bet ween navi gat i on di spl ay uni t
28P connect or t er mi nal s No. 5 and No. 19, and
GA- NET B U S + E CU BUS +
(RED) (GRN)
"H3>
1 | 2 j 3 I 4 | 5 I 6 [ / j 8 I 9 |10|11 I l 2| l 3
15 / 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 / 26 27 28
GA- NET E CU B U S -
B US - ( GRN) (RED)
YES - Th er e i s a shor t in t he wi r e(s) bet ween GA-NET
( +) and () wi r e. Repl ace t he affected shi el ded
h ar n es s .
NO- Go to st ep 13.
navi gat i on di spl ay uni t 28P connect or t er mi nal s No. 5
E C U B U S +
(GRN)
n- n
15
1 I 2 l 3 I 4 l 5 \6[/\ 8 I 9 i l 0l l l [ l 2l l 3[ 7'
17l l 8l l 9l 20l 2l l 22l 23l 24l / l 26| 27| 28
E CU B U S -
(RED)
YES - Th er e i s a shor t to body gr ound i n t he wi r e(s)
bet ween t he navi gat i on di spl ay uni t and t he
navi gat i on uni t. Repl ace t he affected shi el ded
h ar n e s s . !
NO -Got o st ep 14.
14. Rec onnec t t he all c onnec t or s, t hen t urn t he i gni ti on
swi t c h to ON (II).
15. Go into t he Di agnost i c Menu, and sel ec t t he
16. Chec k t he Syst em Li nks.
t i me . i l
18. Di sconnect audi o uni t connect or E (14P), and t hen
t urn i gni ti on swi t ch to ON (II).
19. Go into t he Di agnost i c Menu, and Sel ec t t he
NO -lnternal shor t ci rcui t in t he audi o uni t .H
22. Connec t audi o uni t connect or E (14P).
23. Di sconnect XM r ecei ver connect or A (14P), and t hen
t urn t he i gni ti on swi t ch to ON (II).
24. Go into t he Di agnost i c Menu, and Sel ect t he
25. Check t he Syst em Li nks.
YES - Repl ac e t he navi gat i on di spl ay uni t (see page
23-239).B
NO -Repl ace t he XM r ecei ver (see page 23- 120) .
23-207
DTC 2602: Di spl ay Di ag: ROM
NOTE :
22- 90).
Ch eck for B-CAN DTCs and res olvet h embefore
t roubles h oot ing.
23- 130).
ON (II).
3. Go int o t h e Diagnos t ic Menu, and s elect t h e
Self-Diagnos is Modein t h e Select Diagnos is It ems
menu (s ee page23-176).
4. Select t h e Dis play.
Is the ROM NG?
YE S-Replacet h e navigat ion dis play unit (s ee page
23-239). B
t ime.
DTC 2603: Di spl ay Di ag: RAM
NOTE :
22- 90).
Ch eck for B-CAN DTCs and res olvet h embefore
t roubles h oot ing.
23- 130).
ON (II).
Menu (s ee page23-176).
4. Select t h e Dis play.
Is the RAM NG?
YE S-Replacet h e navigat ion dis play unit (s ee page
23-239).B
NO-lnt ermit t ent failure, t h e s ys t emis OK at t h is
t ime.B
23-208
DTC 2605: H/U .Di ag: Connect ' .
NOTE :
Ch eck t he vehi c l e battery condi t i on firs t (see page
22- 90).
Ch eck f or B-CAN DTCs and r esol ve t h embef ore
General Tr oubl eshoot i ng Inf or mat i on (see page
23- 130).
ON (II).
3. Ch eck t h e E rror His t ory (s ee page23-138).
Is DTC 2601 Indicated?
YE S-Do t h eDTC 2601 t roubles h oot ing.
NO- Gc r t os t ep4. .
5. Ch eck t h e Sys t emL inks .
Is the Radio icon red?
YE S-Go t o s t ep 6.
t i me.B
6. Turn t h eignit ion s wit ch t o L OCK (0).
7. Ch eck for poor connect ions or loos et erminals at
audi o uni t connect or E (14P), XM r ec ei ver connect or A
(14P), and navi gat i on di spl ay unit 28P connect or .
Are there connections OK ?
NO-Repair poor connect ions or loos et erminals , and
rech eck t h e Self-Diagnos is Mode (s ee page23-176).B
8. Dis connect audio unit connect or E (14P), XM receiver
connect or A (14P), and navigat ion dis play unit 28P
connect or.
9. Connect audio unit .connect or E (14P) t er mi nal s No." 9
and No. 10 wit h a jumper wire.
1 2 3 4 5 6
/ /
9 10 11
/
13 14
GA- NET BUS f
(RED)
GA- NET
(GRN)
B U S -
J UMPER WI RE
10. Ch eck for cont inuit y bet ween t h e navigat ion dis play
unit 28P connect or t erminals No. 3 and No. 17.
GA-NET B US +
(RED)
n n
1 2 3 4 5 6
/
'8 9 1C ) 11 12 131/
u
17 18 ' 19: 20; 21 22 23: 24,
/
26 27 28
1 1
(GRN)
NO-Th ere is an open in t h e wire(s ) bet ween t h e audio
unit and t h e navigat ion dis play unit . Replacet h e
affect ed s h ielded h arnes s .B
11. Subs t it ut e aknown-good audio unit (s ee page
23-114).
12. Turn t h eignit ion s wit ch t o ON (II).
13. Clear t h e h ard error code.
ON (II).
15. Ch eck for t h e h ard error code(s ee page23-138).
YE S-Replacet h eoriginal audio unit .B
NO-Replacet h e navigat ion dis play unit (s ee page
23-239).B
23-209
DTC 2607; XM Di ag
Ch eck t h evehi c l e bat t ery condit ion firs t (see page
22- 90).
NOTE : Beforeyou t roubles h oot , make s uret o follow
t h e General Troubles h oot ing Informat ion (s ee page
23- 130).
1. Clear t h e h ard error code(s ee page23-139).
ON (II).
3. Ch eck t h e E rror His t ory (s ee page23-138).
YE S-Do t h e DTC 2601 t roubles h oot ing.
NO-Got o s t ep4.
Is the XM icon red?
t ime.H
7,. Ch eck for poor connect ions or loos et erminals at t h e
XM receiver connect or, t h e s at ellit e s ignal ant enna
connect or, and t h e navigat ion dis play unit 28P
connect or.
NO-Repair poor connect ions or loos et ermi nals .!
8. Dis connect XM receiver connect or A (14P), t h e
navigat ion dis play unit 28P connect or, and audio unit
connect or E (14P).
9. Connect XM receiver connect or A (14P) t erminals
No. 9 and No. 10 wit h ajumper wire.
1 2 3 4 5 6
/ /
9 10 11
/
13 14
GA- NET B US +
(RED)
GA- NET B US -
(GRN)
J UMPER WI RE
10. Ch eck for cont inuit y bet ween navigat ion dis play unit
28P connect or t erminals No. 3 and No. 17.
NAVIGATION DI S PL AY UNIT 28P CONNECTOR
GA- NET B U S +
(RED)
0
1 1 2 j 31 4 j 5 j 6 | / 1 81 9 1101111121131/1
151x^17118119120121 l22l23|24L Xl2Ql27l28
. GA- NET B U S -
{Oj
1
(GRN)
YE S-Ch eck t h eXM error codes (s ee page23-65). If
any codes are det ect ed, go t o t h e applicable
t roubles h oot ingin audio (XM) s ec t i o n .
NO-Repair an open in t h ewire bet ween navigat ion
dis play unit and XM r ec ei v er . !
23-210
DTC 2609: VRAM Di ag
o Ch eck t h e veh icle bat t ery condit ion firs t (s ee page
22- 90).
NOTE: Bef ore you t r oubl eshoot , make sur e to f ol l ow
t he Gener al Tr oubl eshoot i ng Inf ormat i on (see page
23- 130).
ON (II).
4. Select t h e Sys t emL inks , t h en s elect t h e E CU Info.
Is V-RAM OK indicated?
YE S-lnt ermit t ent failure, t h e s ys t emis OK at t h is t ime.
If t h e veh icle repeat edly comes back wit h t h e DTC,
replacet h e navigat ion unit (s ee page23-238).
NO-Replacet h e navigat ion unit (s ee page23-238).
DTC 2S10: DRAM Di ag
NOTE :
22- 90).
23- 130).
ON (II).
4. Select t h e E CU Info in t h e Sys t emL inks .
Is D-RAM OK indicated?
23-211
Navi gati on, S f st em
DTC 2701; GPS Di ag: Ant enna
NOTE:
22- 90).
Beforeyou t roubles h oot make s uret o follow t h e
23- 130).
Make s uret h e veh icle is parked out s ide, and away
frombuildings .
Ch eck for elect ronic aft ermarket acces s ories (pos s ibly
h idden) mount ed near t h e GPS ant ennaor t h e
navigat ion unit .
ON (II).
4. Select t h e GPSAnt . in t h e Sys t emL inks .
Is Antenna OK indicated?
YE S-lnt ermit t ent failure, t h e s ys t em is OK at t h is
t i me.B
NO-Go t o s t ep 5.
6. Ch eck for poor connect ions at navigat ion unit
connect or E (2P).
Is the connection OK ?
YE S-Replacet h e GPS ant enna (s ee page23-240).B
NO-Repair t h e poor connect ion(s ).B
DTC 2702: GPS Di ag: Recei ver in Navi ECU
NOTE :
22- 90).
23- 130).
Make s uret h e veh icle is parked out s ide, away from
buildings .
Ch eck for elect ronic aft ermarket acces s ories (pos s ibly
h idden) mount ed near t h e GPS ant ennaor t h e
navigat ion unit .
ON (II).
4. Select t h e GPSAnt . in t h e Sys t emL inks .
Is Receiver in Navi ECU OK indicated?
Ift h e veh icle repeat edly comes back wit h t h e DTC,
replacet h e navigat ion unit (s ee page23-238).B
NO-Replacet h e navigat ion unit (s ee page23-238).B
23-212
DTC 2705: HFL Di ag
NOTE : B efore you tr oubl es hoot make sur e to f ol l ow t he
General T roubl es hooti ng i nformati on (see page 23-130).
1. Clear t he hard error c ode (see page 23-139).
2. T urn t he i gni ti on s wi tch to LOCK (0) and then back t o
ON (II).
3. Go i nto the Di agnosti c Menu, and select t he
S el f- Di agnosi s Mode i n t he Select Di agnosi s I tems
4. Select the S ys tem Links.
is the HFL icon red?
NO- l ntermi ttent fai l ure, t he s ys tem i s OK at thi s
ti me. H
6. Connect t he H DS to t he DLC (see page 23-252).
7. Clear t he DTCs wi th t he H DS .
8. T urn t he i gni ti on s wi tch to LOCK (0) and then back t o
ON (II).
9. Check for DTCs wi th the H DS .
Are there any HFL DTCs indicated?
YE S-Do the H F L DTC troubl es hooti ng. H
NO -Go to step 10.
11. Di sconnect navi gati on uni t connector D (5P).
12. Di sconnect the H andsF reeLi nk control uni t 28P
connector.
13. Connect H andsF reeLi nk control uni t 28P connector
termi nal s No. 6 and No. 7 wi th a j umper wi re, then
connect the termi nal s No. 20 and No. 21wi th a j umper
wi re.
HANDSFREELINK CONTROL UNIT 28P CONNECTOR
NAVI
COMM4 (WHT)
JUMPER WIRE
Ii NAVI
COMM3 (RED)
1 | 2 | 3 | / | / 6 | 7 | 8 (/ 1/ I
1 1
I
1
2| 13| 14|
|15|16|17|18|/
/
|20|21L/
/
|/
/
|/
/
|25|26|27|28
NAVI
COMM1 (BLK)
NAVI
COMM2 (GRN)
JUMPER WIRE
14. Check for conti nui ty between navi gati on uni t
connector D (5P) termi nal s No. 1 and No. 2 then check
f or conti nui ty between termi nal s No. 3 and No, 4,
NAVIGATION UNIT CONNECTOR D ( SP )
NAVI
COMM3
(RED)
r {u h NAVI
COMM4
(WHT)
1
NAVI
COMM1
(BLK)
L
NAVI
COMM2
(GRN)
YE S-Go to step 15.
NO -There is an open in the wi re between the
navi gati on uni t and the H andsF reeLi nk control unit.
Replace the affected shi el ded harness.Hi
15. Di sconnect the j umper wi re.
(cont'd)
16. Chec k f or cont i nui t y bet ween t he t er mi nal s of
navi gat i on uni t connect or D (5P) accor di ng to t he
t abl e.
D1 (RE D)
D2 (WHT), D3 (BL K ), D4
(GRN)
D2 (WHT) D3 (BL K ), D4 (GRN)
D3 (BL K ) D4 (GRN)
NAVIGATION UNIT CONNECTOR D (SP)
" fin
1
C
M
3 4 5
YE S-Th ereis as h ort in t h e wires bet ween t h e
navigat ion unit and t h e Hands FreeL ink cont rol unit .
Replacet h e affect ed s h ielded h arnes s .
-
NO-Got o s t ep 17.
17. Ch eck for cont inuit y bet ween navigat ion unit
connect or D (5P) and body ground according t o t h e
t able.
Navigat ion unit
connect or
Wire color
D1 RE D
D2 WHT
D3 BL K
D4 GRN
NAVIGATION UNIT CONNECTOR D (SP)
" fi n
1 2 3 4 5
YE S-Th ereis as h ort t o body ground in t h e wires
bet ween t h e navigat ion unit and t h e Hands FreeL ink
cont rol unit . Replacet h e affect ed s h ielded h arnes s .!
NO-Replacet h e Hands FreeL ink cont rol unit (s ee page
23-281).!
23-214
DTC 2706: Gyr o Di ag: ECU Temp XX C
NOTE :Before you t roubles h oot make s uret o follow t h e
General Troubles h oot ing Informat ion (s ee page23-130).
1. Ch eck t h at t h et runk t emperat ure is bet ween 4F(
20 C)and 158 F (70 C).
ON (II).
YE S-Replacet h e navigat ion unit (s ee page23-238).
NO-lnt ermit t ent failure, t h e s ys t em is OK at t h is t ime.
DTC 2707: MIC Di ag
NOTE : Beforeyou t roubles h oot , make s uret o follow t h e
General Troubles h oot ing Informat ion (s ee page23-130).
ON (II).
Is the Mic icon red?
NO-Go t o s t ep 11.
6. Ch eck for poor connect ions or loos et erminals at
Hands FreeL ink cont rol unit 28P connect or,
HFL -navigat ion-ANC microph one 7P connect or, and
navigat ion unit connect or D (5P).
NO-Repair poor connect ions or loos et erminals S
7. Connect t h e HDS t o t h e DL C (s ee page23-252).
8. Clear t h e DTCs wit h t h e HDS.
ON (II).
10. Ch eck for DTCs wit h t h e HDS.
Is DTC B1775 or B1776 indicated?
YE S-Troubles h oot ing t h e indicat ed DTC.H
11. Select t h eMic in t h e Sys t emL inks .
12. Pres s t h e navigat ion Talk s wit ch on t h e s t eering wh eel
s wit ch , t h en ch eck t h eMic L evel (s ee page23-187).
Is the microphone level OK ?
YE S-lnt ermit t ent failure, t h e s ys t em is OK at t h is
t ime.H
NO-Replacet h efront HFL -navigat ion-ANC
microph one (s ee page23-240).
(cont 'd)
23-215
14. Di sconnect t he front HFL-navi gat i on-ANC
mi cr ophone 7P connect or .
16. Measur e t he vol t age bet ween t he body gr ound and
front HFL-navi gat i on-ANC mi c r ophone 7P connect or
n
n-
n
1
C
M
3 4 5 6 7
+B (WH I )
NO-Repair an open in t h ewi r e(s ). H
18. Reconnect t h e front HFL -navigat ion-ANC microph one
7P connect or.
19. Turn t h eignit ion .s wit ch t o ON (II).
20. Meas uret h e volt age bet ween t h e
HFL -navigat ion-ANC microph one 7P connect or
t erminal No. 1 and body ground.
n
n-
11
n
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
GND (BLK)
YE S-Replacet h e front HFL -navigat ion-ANC
microph one (s ee page23-240).
NO-Repair an open or h igh res is t ancein t h e wire
bet ween front HFL -navigat ion-ANC microph one 7P
connect or and body ground (G501 ) .
23216
No pi ct ure Is di spl ayed
Di agnost i c Test : Sel f -Di agnosi s Mod
NOTE:
22-90).
Check if 3 button has been pr essed, and t ur ned off
t he di spl ay (see owner ' s manual f or mor e
i nf ormat i on).
t er mi nal s.
Bef ore t r oubl eshoot i ng, make sur e you have t he
anti -theft code f or t he navi gat i on syst em.
Make sur e that t he correct DVD col or and ver si on ar e
i nst al l ed.
Inspect t he DVD for di rt or damage.
Check any offi ci al Honda ser vi c e websi t e f or mor e
ser vi c e i nf ormat i on about t he navi gat i on syst em.
1. Check t he No. 15 (10 A) f use in t he under -hood
under -dash f use/r el ay box, and rei nst al l t he f uses if
t hey ar e OK.
Are the fuses OK ?
NO-Repl ac e t he f use(s), and r ec hec k . B
2. Do t he For ced St art i ng of Di spl ay (see page 23-237).
Is the diagnosis menu of the picture diagnosis
displayed?
YE S - Go into Sel f -Di agnosi s Mode (see page 23-176)
to check t he l i nk s .
NO- Go to st ep 3.
3. Shi el d t he navi gat i on di spl ay uni t f rom t he sun wi t h
your hand, and check that t he di spl ay i s back lit (only
back li ght i s ON.)
- Can you see the back light?
YES-Subst i t ut e a known-good navi gat i on uni t (see
page 23-238), and ret est . If t he pr obl em goes away,
r epl ace t he ori gi nal navi gat i on uni t. If t he pr obl em i s
sti ll pr esent , repl ace t he navi gat i on di spl ay uni t (see
page 23- 239) .
NO- Go to st ep 4.
navi gat i on uni t connect or A (8P) t er mi nal s No. 1 and
NAVIGATION UNIT CONNETCOR A (8P)
+ B (WH T) ACC (PUR)
If - I I n
1 2
/
4
5 6 7 8
is there battery voltage?
NO-l f t he +B wi r e does not have vol t age, repai r an
open in t he wi r e bet ween t he under -hood f use rel ay
box and t he navi gat i on uni t. If t he ACC wi r e does not
have vol t age, repai r an open i n t he wi r e bet ween t he
under -dash f use/r el ay box and t he navi gat i on uni t. H
6. Measur e t he vol t age bet ween navi gat i on uni t
connect or A (8P) t ermi nal No. 4 and body gr ound.
GND (BLK)
P r
1
C
M

LL
4
5
C
O
7 8
is there less than 0.2 V?
NO-Repai r an open or hi gh r esi st ance in t he wi r e ,
bet ween t he navi gat i on uni t and body gr ound (G651)
4-door (see page 22-46), 2-door (see page 22- 48) .
(cont' d)
tlJ P &a I
navi gat i on di spl ay uni t 28P connect or t er mi nal s No. 1
NAVIGATION DI SPL AY UNIT 28P CONNETCOR
+ B(WHT)
A CC (PUR)
n I n r
1 2 3 4 5 6
/
8 9 10 11 12 13
/
15
/
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
/
26 27 28
NO-lf t he +B wi r e does not have vol t age, repai r an
open i n t he wi r e bet ween t he under -hood f use/r el ay
box and t he navi gat i on di spl ay uni t 28P connect or . If
t he ACC wi r e does not have vol t age, repai r an open in
t he wi r e bet ween t he under -dash f use/r el ay box and
t he navi gat i on di spl ay uni t 28P c onnec t or . ! !
8. Measur e t he vol t age bet ween t he navi gat i on di spl ay
NAVIGATION DI SPL AY UNIT 28P CONNETCOR
GND (BLK)
p
1
2 3 4 5 6
/
8 9 10 11 12 13
/
I
15
/
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
/
26 27 28
YES-Subs t i t ut e a known-good navi gat i on uni t (see
page 23-238) and ret est . If t he pr obl em goes away,
r epl ace t he or i gi nal navi gat i on uni t. If t he pr obl em i s
sti ll pr esent , r epl ace t he navi gat i on di spl ay uni t .H
bet ween t he navi gat i on di spl ay uni t and body gr ound
(G401) (see page 22- 40). H
Vehi cl e posi t i on i con const ant l y l eaves r oad,
moves errat i cal l y, or i s di spl ayed ver y far
f rom act ual vehi cl e posi t i on
NOTE:
Chec k t he vehi cl e bat t ery condi t i on f i rst (see page
22-90).
Check t hat t he GPS ant enna is pl ugged i n.
Thi s i s not t he s ame condi t i on as when dri vi ng
off-road (or on a fi re or l oggi ng road). Thi s condi t i on i s
c aused by a l oss of map mat chi ng f rom a bad sensor
i nput. Chec k for after market wi ndow ti nti ng or ot her
obj ect s that can block t he GPS si gnal . Al ways do t he
Map mat chi ng (see page 23-133) bef ore pr oceedi ng
wi t h t he t r oubl eshoot i ng.
Make sur e that t he cor r ect DVD col or and ver si on ar e
i nst al l ed.
Inspect t he DVD for dirt or damage.
Check any offi ci al Honda ser vi c e websi t e f or mor e
Check t he GPS si gnal recept i on in an open ar ea.
1. Check t he GPS i con on t he navi gat i on sc r een.
Is the GPS icon white?
YE S - Do t he t r oubl eshoot i ng f or GPS i con i s whi t e or
not shown (see page 23-225).H
NO -Go to st ep 2.
2. Go into t he Sel f -Di agnosi s Mode, and use t he Yaw
Rate t est (see page 23-190) to check t he y aw rate
sensor .
3. Go into t he Sel f -Di agnosi s Mode, and use t he Car
St at us t est (see page 23-191) to check the vehi cl e
speed pul se.
Are the yaw rate sensor and vehicle speed pulse OK ?
YE S - Th e condi t i on may be nor mal . Check to see if t he
condi t i on oc c ur s in t he same pl ace in a known-good
vehi cl e. If it does, t he pr obl em coul d be in t he
dat abase. Go to st ep 4.
NO-lf t he pr obl em i s t he y aw rate sensor , r epl ace t he
navi gat i on unit (see page 23-238). If t he pr obl em i s t he
vehi cl e speed pul se, check for an open in t he wi r e
bet ween t he navi gat i on uni t and the ECM/ PCM (VSP
si gnal ). If t he wi r e i s OK, subst i t ut e a known-good
navi gat i on uni t and ret est . If t he pr obl em goes away,
r epl ace t he ori gi nal navi gat i on uni t. If t he pr obl em i s
sti ll pr esent , updat e t he ECM/ PCM (see page 11-203) if
it does not have t he l at est sof t war e or subst i t ut e a
known-good ECM/ PCM (see page 11- 204) .
23-218
4, Subst i t ut e a known-good navi gat i on uni t , and check
to see i f t he problemoc c ur s i n t he same place.
Does the problem occur in the same place?
YE S-Th eproblemis in t h e dat abas e. Report t h e
problemaccording t o t h e Navigat ion Sys t emManual
under Report ing E rrors .
NO-Repl ac e t h e original navigat ion unit (s ee page
23-238).H
Pi ct ure i s mi ssi ng a col or or t one or i s an odd
col or
NOTE :
22-90).
Ch eck t h e connect ors for poor connect ions or loos e
t erminals .
Make s uret h at t h e correct DVD color and vers ion are
ins t alled.
Ins pect t h eDVD for dirt or damage.
Ch eck any official Honda s ervice webs it efor more
s erviceinformat ion about t h e navigat ion s ys t em.
Ch eck t h e navigat ion s creen s et t ings for brigh t nes s ,
cont ras t , and black level, and ch eck t h e color s creen
for map color and menu color.
Beforet roubles h oot ing, make s ureyou h aveant i-t h eft
codes for t h e audio s ys t emand t h e navigat ion s ys t em.
Aft er t roubles h oot ing, ent er t h e ant i-t h eft codes for
t h e audio s ys t emand t h e navigat ion s ys t em.
Ch eck for aft ermarket acces s ories t h at may int erfere
wit h t h e navigat ion s ys t em.
1. Go int o t h e Det ail Informat ion & Set t ings s elect
Monit or Ch eck, and us e RGB Color t es t under Monit or
Ch eck (s ee page23-180).
Are the red, green, and blue colored circles shown?
YE S-Th e s ys t emis OK at t h is t ime.B
NO-Go t o s t ep 2.
3. Dis connect navigat ion unit connect or B (32P) and t h e
navigat ion dis play unit 28P connect or.
4. Ch eck for loos et erminals at navigat ion unit connect or
B (32P) and t h e navigat ion dis play unit 28P connect or.
Are there loose terminals?
YE S-Repair t h e t ermi nal.
NO-Go t o s t ep 5.
(cont 'd)
23 "21SI
igatiorc S f st em
5. Chec k f or cont i nui t y bet ween t he t er mi nal s of
navi gat i on uni t connect or B (32P) and t he navi gat i on
di spl ay uni t 28P connect or accor di ng to the t abl e.
Navi gat i on
uni t
connect or
Navi gat i on
di spl ay uni t
connect or
Navi gat i on
uni t
connect or
Navi gat i on
di spl ay uni t
connect or
B 3 (GRY ) 24 (BLK) B1 (W H T) 8 (WHT) B 3 (GRY ) 24 (BLK)
B2 (RED) 9 (RED)
B 3 (GRY ) 24 (BLK)
B 17 (Y EL) 22 (YEL)
B 3 (GRY ) 24 (BLK)
B 19 (GRN) 21(B L U)
1 2 3 4
A
8 | 9 10
AAA A 'A
j i/ |-|j 19J20|2l|/
/
2c1 2 4 25 21
A\ A,
/
A
1 n
1 2 3 4 5 6
/
8 9 10 11 12 13
A
15
/
17 18 19 20 2 1 2 2 23 24
A
26 27 28
Y E S - T here is a short i n the wi re(s) between the
navi gati on uni t and the navi gati on di spl ay uni t.
Replace the affected shi el ded ha r ne s s .
NO- Go to step 6.
6. Check for conti nui ty between the appropri ate
termi nal s of navi gati on uni t connector B (32P) and the
navi gati on di spl ay uni t 28P connector based on the
mi s s i ng coior(s).
Mi ssi ng Wawigation Navigat ion W i re
color
uni t
dis play unit
col or
connector
connect or
Bl ue B 17 . 22 Y EL
Green B 2 9 RED
Red B 1 8 W H T
Wi r e si de of female t er mi nal s
1 . ..
1 2 3 4 5 6
/I 8 | 9 |10
11 12 13
/
15
/
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
/
26 27 28
Y E S - Go to step 7.
NO- T here is an open in the wi re(s) between the
navi gati on di spl ay uni t and the navi gati on uni t. Check
for poor connecti ons or l oose termi nal s at the
navi gati on di spl ay uni t and the navi gati on uni t. If a
poor connecti on or l oose termi nal is f ound, replace
the affected shi el ded ha r ne s s .
23-220
7. Chec k f or cont i nui t y bet ween t he appropri at e
t er mi nal s of navi gat i on uni t connect or B (32P) and t he
navi gat i on di spl ay uni t 28P connect or based on t he
mi ssi ng color(s).
Mis s ing Navigat ion Navigat ion
color
uni t c onnec t or di spl ay uni t
B (32P).
28P connect or
Bl ue B17 10,24
Gr een B2 10,24
Red B l
10, 24
17 18 19 20 21
/
23 24 25 26
/ / / / /
1 2 3 4 5
r
6 /
8
I
9 10 11 12 13
/
15
/
17 18(19 20 21 22 23 24
/
26 27 28
YE S-Th ereis as h ort t o body ground in t h ecircuit
bet ween t h e navigat ion dis play unit and t h e
navigat ion unit . Replacet h e affect ed s h ielded
h ar nes s . ! !
NO-Replacet h e navigat ion unit (s ee page23-238). If
t h e problemis s t ill unres olved, replacet h e navigat ion
dis play unit (s ee page23-239).
Pi ct ure has l i nes or rol l s
Diagnos t ic Tes t : Monit or Ch eck
NOTE :
22-90).
Always comparet h e s creen imaget o aknown-good
veh icle. If t h e s creen looks t h e s ame, informt h e
cus t omer t h at it is ach aract eris t ic of t h e s ys t em.
t erminals .
ins t alled.
Ch eck any official Honda s ervicewebs it e for more
Ch eck t h e navigat ion s creen s et t ings for brigh t nes s ,
cont ras t , and black level, and ch eck t h e color s creen
for map color and menu color.
1. Ch eck for elect ronic aft ermarket acces s ories (pos s ibly
h idden) mount ed near t h e navigat ion dis play unit or
t h e navigat ion unit .
Are there any electronic accessories?
YE S-Dis ablet h e acces s ories , and rech eck.B
NO-Go t o s t ep 2.
2. Turn t h eignit ion s wit ch t o ON (II), and s t art up t h e
navigat ion s creen and ch eck it .
Is the picture scrolling horizontally (left to right or right to
left)?
YE S-
If t h e color is normal: go t o s t ep 3.
If t h e pict ure is s crolling wit h mis s ing color: go t o
s t ep 9.
4. Dis connect navigat ion unit connect or B (32P).
5. Dis connect navigat ion dis play unit 28P connect or.
(cont 'd)
23-221
connect or B (32P) t erminal No. 18 and body ground.
1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 / / \ 8 | 9 |10
AAAA/A
| 17| 18| 19| 20| 21| / | 23| 24| 25| 26| / V ^ ! / I / X / | /
CS I G
(GRN)
YE S-Th ere is as h ort t o body ground in t h e wire(s )
bet ween t h e navigat ion unit and t h e navigat ion
dis play unit . Replacet h e affect ed s h ielded h arnes s .l
NO-Go t o s t ep 7.
connect or B (32P) t erminals No. 18 and No. 3, and
bet ween t erminals No. 18 and No. 19 individually.
S H SIG1
(GRY)
1 I 2 | 3 [ 4 I 5 ] /
1
A
, , f
/ \ 8 j 9 |10
AAAAAA
f
|17|18|19|20|21|/|23|24|25|26|/1XI /M/I /
CS I G1
(BLK)
H0HK 3
GND SIG1
(GRN)
connect or B (32P) t erminal No. 18 and navigat ion
dis play unit 28P connect or t erminal No. 23.
1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5| / / | 8 | 9| 1 0
AAAAAA'
|17|18|19|20|21 \A23\24\25\2e\AAAAAA
C S I G
(GRN)
1 I 2 I 3 I 4 I 5 8 1/1 8 1 9 10|11|12|13|/|
|l5|/ll7|l8|l9|20|2l!22|23|24|/ l26|27|2a
CS I G
^
1
(BRN)
YE S-Subs t it ut e aknown-good navigat ion unit (s ee
page23-238), and ret es t . If t h e problem goes away,
replacet h eoriginal navigat ion unit . If t h e problems t ill
pres ent , replacet h e navigat ion dis play unit (s ee page
. . 23-239).B
NO-Th ere is an open in t h e wire(s ) bet ween t h e
navigat ion unit and t h e navigat ion dis play unit .
Replacet h e affect ed s h ielded h arnes s .l
10. Dis connect navigat ion unit connect or B (32P).
11. Dis connect navigat ion dis play unit 28P connect or.
YE S-Th ere is as h ort in t h e wires bet ween t h e
NO-Go t o s t ep 8.
23-222
12. Ch eck for cont inuit y bet ween t h e t erminals of
navigat ion unit connect or B (32P) according t o t h e
t able.
Fromt erminal To t erminals
B18 (GRN) B1 (WHT), B2 (RE D), B17
(YEL)
YE S-Th ereis as h ort in t h e wires bet ween t h e
NO-Subs t it ut e aknown-good navigat ion unit (s ee
page23-238), and ret es t . If t h e problem goes away,
replacet h eoriginal navigat ion unit . Ift h e problems t ill
pres ent , replacet h e navigat ion dis play unit (s ee page
23-239).B
13. Go int o t h e Det ail Informat ion & Set t ings , s elect
Monit or Ch eck, and us e RGB Color diagnos is under
Monit or Ch eck (s ee page23-180).
Is t he pict ure missing a red, green, or blue color?
YE S-Do t roubles h oot ing for t h e Pict ure is mis s ing a
color or t one or is an odd color (s ee page23-219).
NO-Operat ion is normal at t h is t ime. Ch eck for loos e
connect ions .
Interface di al but t ons do not wor k
NOTE :
22-90).
t erminals .
ins t alled. Th e wrong navigat ion DVD or s oft ware
vers ion can caus eah ardware malfunct ion.
1. St art t h e veh icle.
2. Go int o t h e Det ail Informat ion & Set t ings s elect Unit
Ch eck, and us e Hard K ey t es t under Unit Ch eck (s ee
page23-182).
Do t he int erface dial but t ons work properly?
YE S-Th e s ys t emis OK at t h is t ime.B
NO-Go t o s t ep 3.
4. Removet h e audio s wit ch panel (s ee page23-117).
6. Meas uret h e volt agebet ween t h e int erface dial 5P
connect ort erminal No. 4 and body ground.
I NTERFACE DIAL 5P CONNECTOR
j
1
C
M
3 4
ACC (PUR)
NO-Repair an open in t h ewire bet ween t h e driver's
under-das h fus e/ relay box and t h e int erface dial.B
(cont 'd)
23-223
ast er n
Sympt om Troubl eshoot i ng (cont'd!)
7. Measur e t he vol t age bet ween i nt erf ace di al 5P
INTERF ACE DIAL SP CONNECTOR
1 2 3
4
GND (BLK)
bet ween t he i nt erf ace di al and body gr ound (G401)
(see page 22-40).H
9. Di sc onnec t t he i nt erf ace di al 5P connect or and
navi gat i on uni t connect or B (32P).
10. Check f or cont i nui t y bet ween navi gat i on uni t
connect or B (32P) t er mi nal No. 23 and i nt erf ace di al
J j 2 | 3j4j_5_j/ l / | 8 | 9 | l 0 | / 1 / M/ | / | / |
r
I17II8I19I20I21I/I23I24I25I26I/I/I/I/I/I/
^ [J OG (BLU)
;0)
J OG (WHT)
I 1 2
10
INTERF ACE DIAL 5P CONNECTOR
NO-Ther e i s an open i n t he wi r e bet ween t he i nt erf ace
di al and t he navi g^ i on uni t. Repl ace t he af f ect ed
shi el ded har ness.
11. Chec k f or cont i nui t y bet ween navi gat i on uni t
connect or B (32P) t er mi nal s No. 23 and No. 25.
NAVIGATION UNIT CONNENCTOR B (32P)
i r n
2 3 4
5| /
/
8 9 10
/ /
/V
/ /
J OG (BLU) SH J OG (GRY )
Wire side of femaie terminals
YE S - S h o r t in t he wi r es. Repl ace t he af f ect ed shi el ded
har ness.
NO- Go to st ep 12.
12. Subst i t ut e a known-good i nt erf ace di al (see page
23-239), and r echeck.
is the system OK ?
YES - Repl ac e t he ori gi nal i nt erf ace di al (see page
23-239) . B
NO-Repl ac e t he navi gat i on uni t (see page 23- 238) .
GPS i con i s whi t e or not shown
Di agnost i c Tes t ; Sel f -Di agnosi s Mode
NOTE:
Chec k the vehi c l e battery condi t i on fi rst (see page
22-90).
Wi t h good recepti on, t he i con i s normal l y gr een.
Make sur e t he GPS ant enna i s pl ugged i n.
Check for any af t ermarket accessories or metal l i c
wi ndow t i nt i ng that may be i nterferi ng wi t h t he GPS
si gnal .
Make sur e t he vehi cl e i s parked out si de, away f rom
bui l di ngs.
Refer to GPS I nformati on (see page 23-188) for
real ti me sat el l i t e recepti on di spl ay.
1. Chec k f or aftermarket metal l i c wi ndow tint on t he rear
wi ndow and el ectroni c aftermarket ac c essor i es
(possi bl y hi dden) mounted near t he GPS ant enna or
t he navi gati on uni t
Is there aftermarket metallic window tint or electronic
accessories?
Y E S - R emove tint or t he accessories and recheck. B
NO- Go to st ep 2.
2. T urn the i gni ti on swi tch to ON (II).
3. Go i nto the S el f- Di agnosi s Mode, and use the S ys tem
^ Links di agnosi s (see page 23-176) to check the GP S
antenna.
Is the GPS Ant icon red?
Y ES- Ch ec k for a ki nked, crus hed, or di sconnected
GP S antenna wi re. If the i con is still red, replace the
GP S antenna (see page 23-240).B
NO- Ch ec k that nothi ng is bl ocki ng the GP S antenna
l ocated under the package shelf and recheck.
S ubsti tute a known- good GP S antenna (see page
23- 240), and recheck. If the s ymptom is gone, repl ace
the GP S antenna. If the s ymptom is still present,
substi tute a known- good navi gati on uni t (see page
23-238) and recheck. If the s ymptom is gone, repl ace
the ori gi nal navi gati on unit. H
Voi c e gui dance cannot be hear d, i s broken up,
or t her e i s st at i c
Diagnos t ic Tes t : Self-Diagnos is Mode
NOTE :
Check the vehi cl e battery condi ti on fi rst (see page
22-90).
Check the navi gati on vol ume level (see Owner's
Manual ).
Check the connectors for poor connecti ons or l oose
termi nal s .
If the H ard Error Code stored, check the H ard E rror
Code troubl es hooti ng first.
Make sure that the correct DVD col or and versi on are
i nst al l ed.
I nspect the DVD for di rt or damage.
B efore troubl es hooti ng, make sure you have anti- theft
codes for the audi o s ys tem and the navi gati on s ys tem.
After troubl es hooti ng, enter the anti- theft codes for
the audi o s ys tem and the navi gati on s ys tem.
1. Tur n the i gni ti on s wi tch to ON (II).
2. P ress the SET- UP button.
3. Check the vol ume and voi ce feedback setti ng for the
navi gati on s ys tem in setup.
is either set to OFF?
Y E S - S et the voi ce feedback to ON, and sel ect an
audi bl e level for the v o l u me .
NO- Go to step 4.
4. Check the audi o s ys tem operati on.
Can you hear the audio?
Y E S - Go to step 5,
NO- T roubl es hoot the audi o s y s t e m.
5. Select the S el f- Di agnosi s mode.
7. T urn the i gni ti on swi tch to LOCK (0), and then back to
ON (II).
is there a Hard Error Code stored?
Y E S - Refer to the H ard Error Code troubl es hooti ng. ; ]
NO- Go to step 9.
(cont'd)
9. Subs t it ut e and aknown-good audio unit (s ee page
23-114), and rech eck.
Is the system OK ?
YE S-Replacet h e audio unit (s ee page23-114).
Voi c e cont rol does not wor k/r espond
Di agnost i c Test : Mi c Level *
NOTE :
22-90).
t erminals .
ins t alled.
Before as s uming t h at avoice complaint is h ardware
relat ed, ens uret h at t h e voicecont rol s ys t emis being
operat ed correct ly.
- Make s ureyou are on t h e correct s creen wh en t rying
t o is s ueavoice command. For ins t ance, t h e
command " Find t h e neares t It alian Res t aurant " only
works on Map s creen. (See t h e Navigat ion Sys t em
manual for acomplet e lis t of allowed voice
commands for t h einformat ion being dis played).
- Clos et h e windows and moonroof.
- Set t h e fan s peed t o low (1 or 2).
- Adjus t t h eairflow fromt h e air condit ioning vent s s o
t h at t h ey do not blow agains t t h e microph one on t h e
ceiling.
- Paus eaft er pres s ing t h e navigat ion TAL K but t on,
t h en give avoice command clearly in anat ural
s peaking voice.
If t h e s ys t emcannot recognizeyour command,
s peak louder.
- If you s peak acommand wit h s omet h ing in your
mout h , or your voice is t oo h us ky, or h igh pit ch ed,
t h e s ys t emmay mis unders t and your command.
Ch eck for a loos eroof cons olemicroph one; if it 's
loos e, t igh t en it .
Det ermine ift h e problemonly h appens t o one pers on,
or everyonewh o us es t h e s ys t em.
Ift h e s ys t emonly h as aproblemwit h one pers on's
voice, t h is s h ould be cons idered a s ys t emlimit at ion.
23-226
2. Go int o t h e Self-Diagnos is Mode s elect , Mic Icon
Menu, and us et h eMic L evel t es t under Funct ional
Set up (s ee page 23-187) t o ch eck t h e operat ion of t h e
Talk and Back but t ons .
Are the navigation TALK and BACK buttons operational?
NO-Ch eck for an open or s h ort t o ground on
navigat ion unit connect or C (16P) t erminal No. 12.
3. Us e t h eMic L evel diagnos t ic under Funct ional Set up
(s ee page 23-187) t o ch eck t h e operat ion of t h e
microph one.
Is the microphone operational?
YE S-Ch eck t h e operat ion of t h e voicecont rol s ys t em
(s eet h e Navigat ion Sys t emManual).
NO-Go t o s t ep 4.
4. Clear t h e h ard error code.
5. Turn t h eignit ion s wit ch t o L OCK (0), and t h en back t o
ON (II).
6. Ch eck for t h e h ard error code.
YE S-Do t h e 2707 t roubles h oot ing^
NO-Go t o s t ep 7.
7. Meas uret h e volt agebet ween t h efront
t erminals No. 6 and No. 7 individually.
C
M
3 4 5 6 7
+ B(WHT)
NO-lf t h e +B wire does not h avevolt age, repair an
open in t h ewire bet ween t h e under-h ood fus e/ relay
box and t h efront HFL -navigat ion-ANC microph one
7P connect or. If t h e ACC wire does not h avevolt age,
repair an open in t h ewire bet ween t h e under-das h
fus e/ relay box and t h efront HFL -navigat ion-ANC
microph one 7P connect or.il
8. Meas uret h e volt agebet ween front
t erminal No. 1 and body ground.
1
H

3 4 5 6 7
GND (BLK)
NO-Repair an open or h igh res is t ancein t h ewire
bet ween t h efront HFL -navigat ion-ANC microph one
and body ground (G501) (s ee page22-34).
(cont 'd)
23-227
Sympt om Troubl eshoot i ng fcont' d)
10. Di sconnect t he HandsFr eeLi nk cont rol uni t 28P
connect or.
11. Dis connect t h e navigat ion unit connect or C (16P).
12. Ch eck for cont inuit y bet ween body ground and
navigat ion unit connect or C (16P) t erminal No. 8 and
No. 16 individually.
NAVIGATION UNIT CONNECTOR C (16P)
MIC S I G+
(GRN)
YE S-Th ereis as h ort t o body ground in t h e wire(s )
bet ween t h e navigat ion unit and t h efront
HFL -navigat ion-ANC microph one. Replacet h e
affect ed s h ielded h arnes s .
NO-Got o s t ep 13.
connect or C (16P) t erminals No. 8 and No. 16.
MIC S I G +
(GRN)
connect or C t erminal No. 8 t o No 15 and No. 16,
individually.
MIC S I G+
(GRN)
MIC S I G -
(RED)
YE S-Th ereis as h ort in t h e wire(s ) bet ween t h e
navigat ion unit and t h efront HFL -navigat ion-ANC
microph one. Replacet h e affect ed s h ielded h arnes s .B
NO-Subs t it ut e known-good component s in t h is order
unt il t h e problem goes away:ll
Front HFL -navigat ion-ANC microph one (s ee page
23-240).
Hands FreeL ink cont rol unit (s ee page23-281).
Navigat ion unit (s ee page23-238).
navigat ion unit and t h efront HFL -navigat ion-ANC
microph one. Replacet h e affect ed s h ielded h arnes s .
23-228
DVD read error messages
NOTE:
22-90).
Make sur e t hat t he cor r ect DVD col or and ver si on ar e
i nst al l ed.
Conf i r m t he cor r ect DVD col or and ver si on i s i nst al l ed
i n t he navi gat i on uni t (see page 23-135).
Ref er to Gener al Tr oubl eshoot i ng for a li st of c ommon
DVD sc r een error, messages and t he pr obabl e c auses
. (see page 23-195).
Chec k any offi ci al Honda ser vi ce websi t e f or mor e
Go into t he Di agnost i c mode and use t he ECU Info
di agnost i c (see page 23-182) to check t he st at us of t he
DVD c over ,
Inspect t he navi gat i on DVD for sc r at c hes or damage.
The f ol l owi ng t r oubl eshoot i ng i s for t he er r or
message s hown on t he error messages t abl e (see
page 23495).
1. Check t he DVD readi ng sur f ace for sc r at c hes and
f i nger pr i nt s.
Are t here any scrat ches or fingerprint s on t he DVD-ROM
reading surface?
YE S-Cleanor r epl ace t he DVD (see page 23-237).H
NO-lf t he pr obl em oc c ur s occasi onal l y when t he
syst em i s c ol d, t hi s i s nor mal . If t he pr obl em oc c ur s
f requent l y when dr i vi ng, r epl ace t he navi gat i on uni t
(see page 23-238).H
Navi gat i on cannot cont r ol HVAC by voi c e
c ommand
NOTE:
22-90).
Ch eck t h econnect or s for poor connect ions .-or loos e
t er mi nal s. -
Ch eck for and res olveall CAN DTCs bef ore
t roubles h oot ing t h enavi gat i on s ys t em. -
If t h e Hard E rror Codes t ored, ch eck t h e Hard E rror
Codet roubles h oot ing firs t .
Beforet roubles h oot ing, make s ureyou h avet h e
. anti -theft codes for t h e audio s ys t emand t h e
navigat ion s ys t em.
Verify t h at t h e correct navigat ion unit is ins t alled for
t h is model. Go int o t h e Diagnos t ic modeand us e
Ver si on (see page 23-192).
ins t alled.
s ervicei nf ormat i on about t h e navi gat i on s ys t em,
1. Connect t h e HDS t o t h e DL C (see page 21-101). .
2. Ch eck for B-CAN or F-CAN DTCs in t h e dat alis t .
Are t here any DTCs in t he B-CAN or F-CAN syst ems?
YE S-Troubles h oot and repair all CAN relat ed DTCs ,
and t h en ret es t .
NO-Go t o s t ep 3.
4. Select t h e Self-Diagnos is Mode.
5. Ch eck for error codein t h e E rror His t ory.
Are t here any Hard Error Code st ored?
YE S~Refer t o t h e Hard E rror Codet roubles h oot ing.
NO-Go t o s t ep 6.
6. Subs t it ut eaknown-good climat e cont rol unit (s ee
page21-190), and reconnect all connect ors , and
ret es t .
Does t he sympt om go away?
YE S-Replacet h e original climat e cont rol unit (s ee
page21-190).B
23-229
Di spl ay day/ni ght mode does not wor k or
does not wor k properl y
NOTE:
Tur n t he headl i ght , on and c hec k t hat t he dash
brigh t nes s s et t ing is not s et t o h igh .
t erminals .
Always ch eck for and res olveall CAN DTCs before
t roubles h oot ing t h e navigat ion s ys t em.
t h is model. Go int o t h e Self-Diagnos t ic Mode, and us e
Vers ion (s ee page23-192).
ins t alled.
Ch eck any offi ci al Honda ser vi c e webs it efor mor e
1. Turn t h e h eadligh t s on, and adjus t t h e das h
brigh t nes s up and down, t h en t o t h e middle range.
Does the display change to day and night modes when
turning the headlights on and off?
YE S-Th e s ys t emis OK at t h is t ime.HJ
NO-Go t o s t ep 2.
2. Cover t h e s unligh t s ens or on t h e das h , t h en t urn t h e
h eadligh t s on and off.
Does the navigation display dim and brighten normally?
YE S-Th e s ys t emis OK at t h is t ime.
NO-Ch eck t h e1L L +circuit for an open or s h ort t o
ground bet ween t h e navigat ion dis play unit t o t h e
gaugecont rol module. If OK , s ubs t it ut e known-good
unit s in t h is order, and rech eck t h e s ys t em:
Navigat ion unit (s ee page 23-238)
Climat econt rol unit (s ee page 21-190)
Gaugecont rol module (s ee page 22-351)
Sy s t em l ocks up or f r eezes const ant l y
NOTE :
9 Ch eck t h e veh icle bat t ery condit ion firs t (s ee page
22- 90).
Ch eck for connect ors for poor connect ions or loos e
t erminals .
ins t alled.
Ch eck t h eDVD for damageor s crat ch es .
2. Removet h eDVD, and ch eck t h eDVD reading s urface
for s crat ch es and finger print s .
Are there any scratches or fingerprints on the DVD-ROM
reading surface?
YE S-Clean or replacet h eDVD-ROM (s ee page
23- 237) and r ec hec k.B
NO-Go t o s t ep 3.
3. Turn t h eignit ion s wit ch t o L OCK (0), and t h en back t o
ON (II).
Does the system reboot, lock up, or freeze?
NO-Th e s ys t emis OK at t h is t ime. Go int o t h e
Self-Diagnos t ic Mode, and us e t h eUnit Ch eck
diagnos is (s ee page 23-182) t o ch eck t h e navigat ion
unit and navigat ion dis play unit s t at us . Ift h e s t at us is
NG, replacet h e affect ed unit s .fl
23-230
Vehi cl e i con wander s ac r oss t he map when
dri vi ng {does not f ol l ow a di spl ayed road) or
map or vehi cl e ICON spi ns
NOTE:
22-90).
t erminals .
Th is is not t h e s amecondit ion as wh en driving
off-road (or on afire or logging road).
Th is condit ion is caus ed by a los s of map mat ch ing
fromabad s ens or input . Ch eck for aft ermarket or
ot h er object s t h at can block t h e GPS s ignal. Always
performMap Mat ch ing (s ee page 23-133) before
proceeding wit h t h e t roubles h oot ing.
ins t alled.
Ch eck for aft ermarket met allic window t int ing.
ant i-t h eft codes for t h e audio s ys t emand t h e
Ch eck t h eDVD for damageor s crat ch es .
1. Ch eck t h e GPS icon on t h e navigat ion s creen.
Is the GPS icon white or missing?
3. Go int o t h e Self-Diagnos t ic Mode, and us e t h e Car
St at us diagnos is (s ee page23-191) t o ch eck t h e
veh icle s peed puls e(VSP) and t h e BACK s ignals .
Are the vehicle speed pulse and the BACK signals OK ?
YE S-Th eproblemmay be ach aract eris t ic of t h e
s ys t em. Ch eck t o s ee if t h e problem occurs in t h e
s ame placein aknown-good veh icle. If it does , t h e
problemcould bein t h e dat abas e. Go t o s t ep 4.
NO-
If t h e problemis t h e veh icle s peed puls e,
t roubles h oot t h e veh icle s peed s ignal circuit . L T
BL U wire for an open or as h ort . If OK , s wap a
known-good E CM/ PCM. If t h e problemor s ympt om
goes away, updat et h e E CM/ PCM (s ee page 11-203)
if it does not h avet h e lat es t s oft ware or s ubs t it ut e a
known-good E CM/ PCM (s ee page11 -204).
If t h e BACK s ignal is indicat ed ON (1), wh en in any
s h ift lever pos it ion ot h er t h an revers e, t roubles h oot
t h e back-up ligh t s wit ch circuit (M/ T) or MICU
(mm
4. Subs t it ut eaknown-good navigat ion unit (s ee page
23-238), and ch eck t o s ee if t h e problem occurs in t h e
s ameplace.
Does the problem occur in the same place?
YE S-Th eproblemis in t h e dat abas eand s h ould be
cons idered ach aract eris t ic of t h e s ys t em. Report t h e .
problemaccording t o t h e Navigat ion Sys t emOwner's
Manual under Report ing E rrors and look for
improvement s in fut ure dat abas es .
YE S-Do t h e t roubles h oot ing for GPS icon is wh it e or
not s h own (s ee page23-225).
NO-Go t o s t ep 2.
2. Go int o t h e Self-Diagnos t ic Mode, and us e t h e Yaw
Rat e diagnos is (s ee page 23-190) t o ch eck t h e yaw
rat e s ens or.
Is the yaw rate sensor OK ?
23-231
algatiri S f st em
Sympt om TroubSeshooti ng (cont' d)
Navi gat i on syst em does not accept secur i t y
code
NOTE;
Chec k t he vehi c l e battery condit ion firs t (s ee page
22- 90).
Th e s ys t emwill not operat ewit h out t h e 4-digit
s ecurit y (ant i-t h eft ) code. Follow t h e t h is procedure.
(Aft er 10 cons ecut ivet ries , you mus t cycle t h e key t o
cont inuet rying)
Th e Navigat ion Sys t emDiagnos is and CoreRet urn
Formis availableonISIS, under Job aids , and can be
print ed out for recording t h is informat ion. Th is
informat ion will h elp t h e reman facilit y det ermine
wh at caus ed t h e failure.
Ch eck connect ors for pp,or connect ions or loos e
t erminals .
ins t alled.
1. Go int o t h e Self-Diagnos t ic Mode, and us e t h e E CU
Info under t h eUnit Ch eck diagnos is (s ee page
23- 182). A brief diagnos is runs for 20 s econds , and t h e
s erial number is dis played.
Is the serial number displayed?
NO-Go t o s t ep 2.
2. Removet h e navigat ion unit (s ee page23-238).
3. Ch eck t h e s erial number on t h e label on t h e unders ide
of t h e navigat ion unit .
Is the serial number confirmed on the underside of the
navigation unit?
4. Us ing t h e s erial number, look up t h e navigat ion
s ecurit y codein t h e Int eract ive Net work (iN). (click:
Service, Veh icleInformat ion, Ant i-Th eft codeInquiry,
and t h en s elect Navigat ion fromt h e product
dropdown box). E nt er t h e s erial number.
, Is a 4-digit code displayed on the screen?
NO-Call t h eWarrant y Depart ment t o obt ain t h e code
(t h e t eleph one number is in t h ePDI s ervicebullet in).
Th en go t o s t ep 5.
5. Ch eck t h at t h e obt ained codeworks t o bypas s t h e
code s creen in t h e navigat ion s ys t em.
Does the code work?
YE S-Th e s ys t emis OK at t h is t ime. Ret urn t h e veh icle
t o t h e cus t omer and givet h emt h eant i-t h eft code.HI
NO-Go t o s t ep 6.
6. Try ent ering four zeros (0000) as t h e code.
Do the four zeros work to bypass the code screen?
YE S-Replacet h e navigat ion unit (s ee page23-238),
and ent er Securit y codeis 0000 in t h e problem
des cript ion field of t h e coreret urn fo rm.ll
NO-Replace t h e navigat ion unit (s ee page23-238),
and ent er Won't t akes ecurit y code, in t h e problem
des cript ion field of t h e coreret urn form; (as proof,
enclos et h e s t icker t h at cont ains t h e s erial number
and t h e code).H
Navi gat i on di spl ay st ays on wi t h i gni ti on -
swi t c h i n L OCK (0)
NOTE :
Ch eck for aft ermarket acces s ories that may int erfere
wit h t h e navigat ion s ys t em.
Ch eck t he connect ors f or poor connect ions or l oose
t erminals .
Beforet roubles h oot ing, make sur e you have anti -theft
codes f or t he audio syst em and t he navigat ionsyst em.
Aft er t roubles h oot ing, ent er t he anti -theft codes f or
t he audio syst em and t he navigat ionsyst em.
The veh iclemay have been used f or a show event .
Ch eck f or a s h ort jumper h arnes s i n-l i ne wi t h t he
navigat ion unit connect or A (8P). If a jumper h arnes s is
pres ent , removeit , and ret urn it t o Tech L ine.
1. Removet h e key fromt h eignit ion.
Does the navigation screen stay on?
NO-Th e s ys t emis OK at t h is t ime.H
2. Meas uret h e volt agebet ween body ground and
navigat ion unit connect or A (8P) t erminal No. 2.
A CC (PUR)
p
1
- I 1
I n
1 2
/
4
5 6 7 8
X
YE S-Repair as h ort t o power in t h ewire bet ween t h e
driver's under-das h fus e/ relay box and navigat ion
unit connect or A (8P).H
Navi gat i on cannot cont rol audi o syst em
Diagnos t ic Tes t : Sys t emL inks
NOTE :
22- 90).
Ch eck for and res olveall CAN DTCs before
t erminals .
Beforet roubles h oot ing, make s ureyou t h e h ave
ins t alled.
2. Make s uret h e ant i-t h eft codefor t h e audio s ys t emis
ent ered.
3. Go int o t h e Self-Diagnos t ic Mode, and us e t h e
Self-Diagnos is Mode (s ee page23-176).
4. Ch eck t h e s ys t emL inks .
Is the Radio icon red?
YE S-Do t h e t roubles h oot ing for t h e Voice guidance
cannot be h eard, is broken up, or t h ere is s t at ic (s ee
page 23-225).H
NO-Go t o s t ep 5.
5. Subs t it ut e aknown-good navigat ion unit (s ee page
23- 238), and rech eck.
Can the navigation system control audio/disc?
YE S-Replacet h e original navigat ion unit (s ee page
23-238).B
NO-Do t h e audio s ys t emt roubles h oot ing.H
\9 mm&%9
Sympt om Troubl eshoot i ng (cont'd)
Navi gat i on cannot cont r ol KM radi o
NOTE :
22- 90).
ins t alled.
1. St art t h e veh icle.
2. Make s uret h e ant i-t h eft codefor t h e audio s ys t em is
ent ered.
3. Go int o t h e Self-Diagnos t ic Mode, and us et h e
Self-Diagnos is Mode (s ee page23-176).
4. Ch eck t h e s ys t emL inks .
Is the XM icon red?
YE S-Do t h e t roubles h oot ing for t h e Voice guidance
cannot be h eard, is broken up, or t h ere is s t at ic (s ee
page 23-225).H
NO-Go t o s t ep 5.
5. Subs t it ut e aknown-good navigat ion unit (s ee page
23- 238).
Can the navigation system control XM radio?
YE S-Replacet h e original navigat ion unit (s ee page
23-238J.B
NO-Replace t h eXM receiver (s ee page23-120).B
Navi gat i on f requent l y asks for ant i -t hef t code
and/or needs GPS i ni t i al i zat i on
NOTE :
22-90).
Th is is oft en caus ed by a los s of bat t ery power or a
poor ground.
ins t alled.
2. Meas uret h e volt agebet ween navigat ion unit
connect or A (8P) t erminal No. 4 and body ground.
GND (BLK)
P
r
1 2
7
1 L
4
5 6 7 8
NO-Repair an open or h igh res is t ancein t h ewire
bet ween t h e navigat ion unit and body ground (G651)
4-door (s ee page22-46), 2-door (s ee page 22-4S).B
23-234
navi gat i on uni t connect or A (8P) t er mi nal s No. 1 and
No. 2 individually.
+B (WHT) ACC (PUR)
pi r 1 n
1 2
/
4
5 6 7 8
Y ES- Repl ac e t he navi gat i on uni t (see page 23-238)." !]
under-h ood fus erelay box and t h e navigat ion unit . If
t h e ACC wire does not h avevolt age, repair an open in
t h ewire bet ween t h e under-das h fus e/ relay box and
t h e navigat ion unit .H
The Ac ur a Gl obe Sc r een (not t he Honda
Gl obe Sc r een) appear s ever y t i me t he vehi cl e
i s st ar t ed
NOTE : Th e navigat ion DVD and t h e navigat ion unit are
correct for t h e veh icle, but earlier and pos s ibly lat er
vers ions of t h e navigat ion s oft ware may h ave been
ins t alled. Wh en t h is h appens , t h e s oft ware may not be
recognized by t h e navigat ion unit , and could caus et h e
navigat ion unit t o revert t o aan Acuramodel profile.
1. Removet h e navigat ion unit (s ee page 23-238) and
verify t h at t h e part number print ed on t h e navigat ion
unit label is t h e correct onefor t h e year/ model veh icle
you areworking on.
Is t he correct navigat ion unit inst alled based on t he part
number?
NO-Replacet h e navigat ion unit wit h t h e correct unit
for t h e year/ model veh icle you areworking onM
2. Reins t all t h e navigat ion unit .
3. Removet h e navigat ion DVD.
4. Not e t h e s oft ware vers ion marked on t h eDVD label
and verify if it is t h e correct vers ion for t h e veh icle
. year/ model you areworking on by ch ecking any
official Honda s ervicewebs it e, and s earch ing for any
relat ed s erviceinformat ion about t h e navigat ion
s ys t emand navigat ion s oft ware.
Is t he soft ware version marked on t he DVD label t he
correct one for t he vehicle year/model you are working
on?
NO-Go t o s t ep 5.
5. Obt ain t h e correct vers ion DVD (s ee page 23-133) and
ins t all it .
Does t he navigat ion syst em boot -up wit h t he Honda
Globe Screen?
YE S-Th eproblemis res olved, t roubles h oot ing is
complet e.!
NO-Th e s ys t ems t ill s h ows Honda Globe Screen.
Replacet h e navigat ion unit (s ee page23-238)'
23-235
Sympt om TroubSeshooti ng (cont' d)
Navi gat i on uni t wi l l not ej ect or accept t he
navi gat i on DVD
1. Ch eck t h e No. 15 (10 A) fus ein t h e under-h ood
fus e/ relay box and t h e No. 18 (7.5 A) fus ein t h e
driver's under-das h fus e/ relay box.
Are the fuses OK ?
NO-Replacet h eblown fus e(s ), and rech eck.B
3. E ject t h e navigat ion DVD fromt h e navigat ion unit (s ee
page23-237).
Does the navigation DVD eject?
NO-Go t o s t ep 5.
4. Reins ert t h e navigat ion DVD int o t h e navigat ion unit .
Does the navigation unit accept the navigation DVD?
YE S-No problems at t h is t ime, t h e s ys t emis normal.
Ins pect for loos eor poor connect ions at navigat ion
unit connect or A (SP) t erminals No. 1, No. 2, and
No. 4.11
NO-Replacet h e navigat ion unit (s ee page23-238)
5. Meas uret h e volt agebet ween navigat ion unit
connect or A (8P) t erminal No. 4 and body ground.
6. Meas uret h e volt agebet ween body ground and
navigat ion unit connect or A (8P) t erminal No. 1 and
No. 2 individually.
+B( WHT) ACC (PUR)
nir i i i ,
1 2
/
4
5 6 7 8
YE S-Replacet h e navigat ion unit (s ee page23-238).B
NO-Repair an open in t h ewire bet ween body ground
and navigat ion unit connect or A (8P) t erminal No. 1
and t h e No. 15 (10 A) fus ein t h e under-h ood
fus e/ relay box or navigat ion unit connect or A (8P)
t erminal No. 2 and t h e No. 18 (7.5 A) fus ein t h e
driver's under-das h fus e/ relay box.B
GND (BL K )
p
r l l n
1
C
M

/
4
5
C
D
7 8
NO-Repair an open or h igh res is t ancein t h e BL K wire
bet ween navigat ion unit connect or A (8P) and body
ground (G651) 4-door (s ee page22-46),
2-door (s ee page22-48).
23^236
Forced St art i ng of Di spl ay DVD-ROM Repl acement
SCS ServiceConnect or 07PAZ -0010100
2. Connect t h e SCS s erviceconnect or (A) t o t h e
navigat ion s erviceconnect or (B) locat ed beh ind t h e
navigat ion unit .
07PAZ-0010100
4. Ch eck t h at t h e diagnos is menu for t h e pict ure
diagnos is s t art s up, and t h en ch anges t o t h e Sys t em
L inks menu.
NOTE : If t h e dis play fails t o dis play t h e Sys t emL inks
s creen, refer t o no pict ure is dis played (s ee page
23-217).
NOTE :
s erviceinformat ion about t h e navigat ion s ys t emand
s oft ware updat es .
Do not replacet h eDVD t o give acus t omer apreview
of an updat eDVD.
2. Pus h t h e open but t on (A) of t h e navigat ion unit
locat ed on t h eleft s ideof t h et runk.
3. Pres s t h e E JE CT but t on (B).
4. Removet h eDVD
5. Ins ert t h e new DVD wit h t h e label facing up.
6. Clos et h efront cover. Do not t urn t h eignit ion s wit ch
t o L OCK (0); wat ch t h e navigat ion s creen unt il t h e dat a
is downloaded t o t h e navigat ion unit .
7. Do t h e Map Mat ch ing (s ee page23-133).
NOTE : Aft er s ervicing, t h efront cover and PC card s lot
door mus t be clos ed. If you s t art up t h e navigat ion
s ys t emwit h t h efront cover or PC card s lot door open,
t h e dis play will indicat e an error mes s age.
23*237
Navi gati on Unit Removal/Installation
NOTE :
Beforeyou replacet h e navigat ion unit , back-up t h e
cus t omer dat aus ing s ys t emdiagnos t ic mode Save
Us ers Memory under t h e Funct ional Set up (s ee page
23-186).
Ift h e navigat ion unit is replaced or dis connect ed, a
Map Mat ch ing mus t be done(s ee page23-133).
2. E ject t h eDVD fromt h e original navigat ion unit (s ee
page23-237). To avoid s crat ch ing or damaging t h e
DVD, t emporarily placet h eDVD in ajewel cas e.
NOTE : If t h eDVD does not eject , refer t o s ympt om
t roubles h oot ing Navigat ion unit does not eject or
accept t h e navigat ion DVD.
4. Removet h e four bolt s (A) fromt h e navigat ion unit (B).
7. Turn t h eignit ion s wit ch t o ON (II), t h en reins t all t h e
cus t omer's original navigat ion DVD, verifying t h at t h e
DVD is freeof s crat ch es or s mudges .
8. Ch eck any official Honda s ervicewebs it e for more
s erviceinformat ion about pat ch es for t h e navigat ion
s ys t em. Apply any pres cribed pat ch es t o t h e new
navigat ion unit .
NOTE : Simply t rans ferring t h e navigat ion DVD from
t h eoriginal navigat ion unit t o t h e new navigat ion unit
does not as s uret h e correct s oft ware for t h e veh icle
will be loaded int o t h e new navigat ion unit . Doing t h e
navigat ion DVD t rans fer wit h out doing s oft ware
pat ch es may caus et h e new navigat ion unit t o appear
t o be malfunct ioning.
9. E nt er t h e new navigat ion ant i-t h eft code.
10. Park t h e veh icle out s ide, and do t h e GPS init ializat ion
(s ee page23-132).
11. Give t h e new navigat ion ant i-t h eft codet o t h e
cus t omer.
23-238
Nawigation Display Unit
1 Removet h e audio unit (s ee page23-114), t h en
remove t h e cent er dis play vis or (s ee page20-171).
2. Removet h e s crews and bolt s (A), t h en pull out t h e
navigat ion dis play unit (B).
A
5 x 0.8 mm
4.4 N m (0.45 kgf m, 3.2 I bfft)
3. Ins t all t h eunit in t h e revers eorder of removal. Be
careful not t o drop t h eforward s crew beh ind t h e
das h board.
interface Dial Remowai/lnsÊitetttooi]
1. Removet h e audio unit (s ee page23-114).
2. Removet h e s crew and h arnes s cover (A).
3. Dis connect t h e int erfacedial connect or (A). Remove
t h e s crews and int erfacedial (B).
NOTE : If t h e h ard but t ons do not work, but t h e jog dial
does , rech eck t h e int erfacedial connect or connect ion.
4. Ins t all t h edial in t h e revers eorder of removal.
23-239
F ront HF L-Navigation-ANC
Microphone Removal/Installation
NOTE:
Take c ar e not to sc r at c h t he dashboar d and rel at ed
par t s.
on t hem t o prot ect t he f ac e panel f r om sc r at c hes or
ot her damage.
1. Remove t he roof c onsol e (see page 20-140), and
di sc onnec t t he c onnec t or (A) f r om t he f ront
HFL-navi gat i on-ANC mi c r ophone (B).
GPS Antenna Removal/Installation
2. Di sc onnec t t he GPS ant enna connect or (A), and
r emove t he bolt (B).
3. Det ach t he har ness c l i ps, and r emove t he GPS
ant enna (C).
4. Inst al l t he ant enna i n t he r ever se or der of r emoval .
2. Remove t he s c r ews and t he f ront
HFL-navi gat i on-ANC mi c r ophone.
3. Install t he mi c r ophone i n t he r ever se or der of
r emoval .
23-240
Voi ce Cont rol Swi t c h Test
1. Removet h e voicecont rol s wit ch (s ee page17-7).
1 | 2 3 4 ( 5 |
2. Meas uret h e res is t ancebet ween t erminals No. 2 and
No. 4 in each s wit ch pos it ion according t o t h e t able.
Pos it ion Res is t ance
No but t on pres s ed About 10 kO
Navigat ion TAL K
but t on pres s ed
About 2.2 kO
Navigat ion BACK
but t on pres s ed
About 700 Q
3. If t h e res is t ance is not as s pecified, replacet h e voice
cont rol s wit ch (s ee page23-241).
Voi ce Cont rol Swi t c h Repl acement
1. Removet h e s t eering wh eel (s ee page17-6).
2. Removet h e voicecont rol s wit ch (s ee page17-7).
3. Ins t all t h e voicecont rol s wit ch in t h e revers eorder of
removal.
23-241
El ect ri cal Compass
23-242
Sympt om Diagnos t ic procedure Als o ch eck for
Azimut h (direct ion) informat ion is
not s h own on t h e dis play
Do t h einput t es t (s ee page 23-250) Ch eck t h at t h e elect rical compas s
unit is properly connect ed.
No pict ure is s h own on t h e dis play Do t h e audio s ys t em
t roubles h oot ing (s ee page 23-83)
Th e dis play brigh t nes s s et t ing.
Compas s s h ows wrong direct ion Do t h e compas s zone s elect ion and
calibrat ion (s ee page 23-247)
Ch eck ift h e zones et t ing is correct for
t h e veh icle geograph ical locat ion.
Compas s does not calibrat e Do t h einput t es t (s ee page 23-250) Ch eck t h at t h e elect rical compas s
unit is properly connect ed.
23-243
Over vi ew
The el ect ri cal c ompas s s hows t he azi mut h i nf ormat i on i n 8-di rect i ons (N, NE , E, SE , S , S W, W, NW) to t he audi o-HVAC
di spl ay uni t vi a t he audi o uni t.
AUDIO-HVAC DI S PL AY UNIT
BVSBMSBBTEXT NE W S T A T P S T 6 ^ aaui
8888888888888888
ft ^^^^^MÔ^^^^^^Ô^^^^^^X^Ô^m^^^^ TP
00VOV0O0W00000V
iseJ
>
AZI MUTH (direct ion) INFORMATION
St ar t i ng Oper at i on
When t he i gni ti on swi t c h i s t ur ned to A CCE S S ORY (1), t he el ect r i cal c ompas s uni t begi ns to c ommuni c at e wi t h t he audi o
uni t. Then turn t he i gni t i on swi t ch to ON (II), t he sel f -t est mode begi ns aut omat i cal l y.
The sel f -t est f unct i on c hec ks f or t he cur r ent vol t age, non-vol at i l e memor y (NVM), and ROM st at us in t he el ect r i cal
c ompas s uni t. If t he uni t det ect s a mal f unct i on whi l e i n t he sel f -t est , it i ndi cat es a mal f unct i on by f l ashi ng c ompas s
i nf ormat i on segment s (CAL and NW) i n t he audi o-HVAC di spl ay uni t
The el ect r i cal c ompas s uni t send t he azi mut h (di rect i on) i nf ormat i on to t he audi o uni t The el ect ri cal c ompas s uni t
r ecei ve t he VS P si gnal f r om t he gauge cont rol modul e vi a t he audi o uni t The azi mut h i nf ormat i on i s f i xed whi l e par ked.
Sel f -Cal i br at i on
The el ect r i cal c ompas s uni t has a sel f -cal i br at i on f unct i on. It det ect s and c ompensat es f or magnet i c anomal i es c aused
by br i dges, s ubway s and l arge st eel st r uct ur es. When t he vehi c l e l eaves an ar ea wi t h a st r ong magnet i c i nt erf erence
f i el d (2,400 mGor mor e), t he el ect r i cal c ompas s uni t aut omat i cal l y begi ns cal i br at i ng. If needed, you c an manual l y
cal i br at e t he c ompas s .
Zone Sel ec t i on
Zone sel ect i on i s r equi r ed to c ompensat e f or t he di f f erence bet ween magnet i c North and geogr aphi c Nort h. Thi s
devi at i on i s ref erred to as decl i nat i on, t he c ompas s c ompensat es for decl i nat i on when you sel ect t he zone wher e t he
vehi c l e i s l ocat ed.
S f st em Di agr am
AUDIO-HVACDI SPLAYUNIT
( Azi mut h i nf or ma t i on i s d i s p l a y e d )
ELECTRICALCOMPASSUNIT
UART
AUDIOUNIT
23-244
El ect r i cal Compass Uni t Connect or Input s and Out put s
El ect r i cal Compas s Uni t SP Connec t or
Cavi t y Wi r e Col or Connec t s t o Nor mal If Circuit i s Open If Ci r cui t i s Shor t ed
1
BRN
No. 5 (7.5 A) f use in
t h e driver's
under-das h fus e/ relay
box (IG1)
Bat t ery volt age
wit h ignit ion
s wit ch in ON (II)
OV OV
2
BLK Body gr ound to G651
(GND)
0.2 V or les s 0.2 V or les s 0.2 V or les s
3
L TBL U Audio unit (DISP RX
+)
4 - 5 V
4- 5V OV
4 PNK Audio unit (DISP RX
- )
4V 4V OV
5
ORN
Audio unit (DISP TX
+)
4- 5V 4- 5V OV
6 RED Audio unit (DISP TX
- )
4V 4V OV
23-245
Ci rcui t Di agram
*: The shielded wires have a heat -shr i nk tube
i nsul at i ng t he out si de of the wi r e.
t ypi c al l y bl ac k or dar k gr ay ,
s h o wn o n t he c i r c ui t di agr am.
- : Shi el di ng
B A TTE RY
-
No. 1 (MAIN)
No. 3-1 (IG MAI N) (50 A)
H- ~~- - - - - - c r \ j p- '
No. 15 (10 A)
DRI VER' S UNDER- DAS H
A35 A14 A15
MI CU
H6 D22 D16 D21
PA S S E NGE R' S
UNDER- DAS H
F US E / RE L A Y
B OX
E L E CTRI CA L COMPA S S UNI T
GND
DI SP
RX+
DI S P
RX -
DI S P
TX+
DI S P
TX-
'.3 U J 5
i
6
L T B L U PNK ORN RE D
B 12 B11 B 2 B1
AUDI O- HVAC
DI S PL AY
UNI T WHT
COMPA S S COMPA S S COMPA S S COMPA S S S CT Y +B A CC
RX+ RX- TX+ T X -
AUDI O UNI T
MAIN DUE T D UE T T X DUE T RX S H DUE T
GND CONT (UART) ( UART) GND
G651
No. 6 (7.5 A)
F US E No. 15 (10 A)
( PA S S E NGE R' S F US E
UNDE R- DA S H ( UNDER- HOOD CL I MATE CONTROL
F US E / RE L A Y F US E / RE L A Y UNI T
BOX) BOX) . ,
V V V A
B LK *
GRY WHT PUR RE D -
112 | 6 8 7 | 4 '2 1
ILL+ +B A C-
S O
A C- DUE T D UE T T X
CL K CONT (UART)
D UE T RX
(UART)
AUDI O- HVAC DI S PL AY UNI T
I L L - GND
I
10
I
9
RE D BL K
^7
G402
DAS HL I GHTS
B RI GHTNE S S
CONTROL L E R
(In t he gauge
c ont r ol modul e) G401
23-246
Electrical Compass Zone Selection and Calibration
NOTE :
You s h ould do t h is procedureany t ime t h e elect rical
compas s unit is replaced.
You s h ould do t h is procedurein an open areaaway
frombuildings , power lines , and ot h er veh icles .
If you s ee " " and t h eCAL indicat or is s h own in t h e
audio-HVAC dis play, t h e elect rical compas s unit is
s elf-calibrat ing.
Th e elect rical compas s unit may need t o bemanually
calibrat ed aft er expos uret o as t rong magnet ic field. If
t h e elect rical compas s unit s eems t o be cont inually
s h owing t h e wrong direct ion, and is not
s elf-calibrat ing, do t h efollowing.
1. Ch eck t h e No. 15 (10 A) fus ein t h e under-h ood fus e/
relay box and t h e No. 5 (7.5 A) and t h e No. 18 (7.5 A)
fus es in t h e driver's under-das h fus e/ relay box.
2. Turn t h eignit ion s wit ch t o ON (II), t h en pres s and h old
t h eME NU but t on (A) unt il it beeps (about 2 s econds ).
AUTO OFF ~0ÂT <* " S? ESODE A(C CSS* y
1
t :i:i :i=
_ V~ 1 - 1 " -> CCWUX| TI TLE | CLOCKj ^
\ \ - . | | . . . . |
3. Turn t h e s elect or knob (A) t o s elect Z ONE .
MENU
CDMPR3S '
_Z0NE_
CRLI BRRT I ON
MW
(cont 'd)
23- 247
Electrical Compass
Electrical Compass Zone Selection and Calibration (cont'd)
4. P ress the sel ector knob (A) to enter your sel ecti on.
The di spl ay s hows the currentl y selected zone
number.
NOTE: If necessary, press the RETURN button (B) to
return to the previ ous di spl ay. P ressing the MENU
button (C) cancel s the electrical compas s setti ng
mode.
B A c
5. F i nd the zone for your area on the map. If the correct
zone is not s hown, turn the sel ector knob to cycl e the
zone list up or down.
6. Once the correct zone is displayed, press the selector
knob. The display then returns to normal .
7. T urn the selector knob to select CALIBRATION.
COMPRSS
ZONE
iRiimmmn \
WW
CL OCK f ^. - f l
MENU
COMPRSB
23-248
8. Press the selector knob to enter your selection. The
display shows PUSH CAL START.
9. Press the selector knob, the compass display will
blink and t h e CAL indicat or is s h own.
10. Wh en t h ecalibrat ion is s ucces s fully complet ed, t h e
CAL indicat or goes off and t h e compas s dis play will
s t op blinking and s h ow an act ual h eading.
NOTE :
Wh ile s et t ing, pres s ing t h e RE TURN but t on ret urns
t o t h e previous dis play. Pres s ing t h eME NU but t on
(A) cancels t h e compas s s et t ing mode.
Th e audio s ys t emis not relat ed t o t h e compas s
s ys t em. E ven if t h e compas s s ys t emis calibrat ing,
t h e dis play ret urns t o t h enormal dis play wh ich you
s elect ed las t .
Do t h is procedurein an open area, away from
buildings , power lines , and ot h er veh icles .
Electri cal Compass
El ect ri cal Compass Uni t Input Test
2. Loosen t he bol t s (A), t hen pull out t he el ect ri cal c ompas s uni t bracket (B).
Wire side of
female terminals
3. Di sconnect t he 6P connect or (C) and r emove t he mount i ng bolt ( D) , t hen pull out t he el ect ri cal c ompas s uni t (E ).
4. Inspect t he connect or and socket t er mi nal s to make sur e t hey ar e all maki ng good cont act .
If t he t er mi nal s ar e bent , l oose, or c or r oded, repai r t hem as nec essar y, and r echeck t he syst em.
5. Rec onnec t t he el ect r i cal c ompas s uni t BP connect or . Tur n t he i gni t i on swi t ch to ON (ll), and do t he f ol l owi ng i nput
t est s at t he c onnec t or s.
If any t est i ndi cat es a pr obl em, f i nd and cor r ect t he c aus e, t hen recheck the s ys tem.
If all i nput tests prove OK , the electrical c ompas s uni t i s f aul t y; r epl ace it, and do t he c ompas s cal i brat i on (see page
23-247).
Cavit y Wi r e Tes t Condi t i on Tes t : Des ired res ult Pos s ible caus eif res ult is not
obt ained
1
BRN
Ignit ion s wit ch
ON (II)
Meas uret h e volt aget o ground:
Th ere s h ould be bat t ery volt age.
Blown No. 5 (7.5 A) fus ein t h e
driver's under-das h fus e/ relay
box
An open in t h ewire
Blown No. 5 (7.5 A) fus ein t h e
driver's under-das h fus e/ relay
box
2
BL K
Under all
condit ions
Th ere s h ould be les s t h an 0.5 V.
Poor ground (G651)
3
L TBL U
Under all
condit ions
Th ere s h ould be about 4 V.
Fault y audio unit
e An open in t h ewire
A s h ort t o ground in t h e wire
4 PNK
Under all
condit ions
* Fault y audio unit
An open in t h e wire
5 ORN Under all
condit ions
Fault y audio unit
9 An open in t h ewire
9 A s h ort t o ground in t h ewire
6 RED Under all
condit ions
Fault y audio unit
An open in t h e wire
23-250
HandsFreeLi nk Sf s t em
, DRIVER'S DOOR TWEETER
(Telephone sound out put )
F RONT HF L-NAVIGATION-ANC MICROPHONE
F RONT HF L-ANC MICROPHONE
('10 model wi thout navigation)
(With navigation)
HF L VOLUME
(Using audio unit volume knob)
F RONT PASSENGER'S DOOR SPEAKER
CROSSOVER NETWORK CONTROL UNIT
HANDSF REELINK
CONTROL UNIT
Self-diagnostic F unction, page 23-261
AUDIO UNIT
Outputs, page 23-14
DRIVER'S DOOR SPEAKER
(Telephone sound output)
F RONT PASSENGER'S
DOOR SPEAKER
(Tel ephone sound out put )
F RONT PASSENGERS TWEETER
(Telephone sound output)
NAVIGATION UNIT
(Wi t h navi gat i on) (i n t r unk)
23-251
HandsFreeLi nk S f st em
Mow t o Chec k for DTCs wi t h t he HDS
NOTE: Chec k t he vehi c l e battery condi t i on f i rst { see page 22-90).
1. Make sur e t he i gni ti on swi t c h i s t ur ned to L OCK (0).
2. Connec t t he HDS to t he dat a link connect or (DLC) (A) l ocat ed under t he dr i ver ' s si de of t he dashboar d.
4. Make sur e t he HDS c ommuni c at es wi t h t he vehi c l e and t he HandsFr eeLi nk cont rol uni t. If it doesn' t , t r oubl eshoot t he
DL C ci rcui t (see page 11-181).
5. Select HF LI NK /TEL in t h e BODY E L E CTRICAL menu.
6. Select DTCs in t h eHF L INK / TE L menu.
7. Ch eck for DTCs . If any DTCs areindicat ed, writ edown t h e DTCs , t h en go t o t h e indicat ed DTC t roubles h oot ing. If no
DTCs areindicat ed, refer t o s ympt omt roubles h oot ing.
NOTE :
Aft er t roubles h oot ing, clear t h e DTCs wit h t h e HDS.
For s pecific operat ions , refer t o t h eHDS us er's manual.
Lever -Locked Connect or
Connec t i ng
Disconnecting
To di sc onnec t t he connect or , pull t he l ever (A) whi l e
pushi ng t he lock t ab (B) down, t hen pull t he connect or
( C) .
To c onnec t t he connect or , push t he connect or Into t he
connect or sl eeve (A). As t he connect or i s pr essed i n, t he
(cont' d)
23-253
i nt roduct i on
Th eHFL s ys t emworks only wit h Hondaapproved
Bluet oot h -enabled cell phones with ahands-free
profile. If you arenot s ureif apart icular cell ph one is
compat iblewit h t h eHFL s ys t em, Hondah as adedicat ed
call cent er at 888-528-7876 and webs it e h ands freelink.
h onda.comt o ans wer your ques t ions .
Th eHFL s ys t emallows you t o make and receive
h ands -free calls . It cannot cont rol t h e ph one's
performance(call qualit y and s ignal s t rengt h ). For more
informat ion about performance and performance
problems , refer t o Dropped Calls .
Mos t HFL complaint s are duet o pairing, configurat ion,
or compat ibilit y is s ues . Cont act t h e Hondacall cent er
aft er verifying t h eproblem, or before replacing t h e
Hands FreeL ink cont rol unit .
Checki ng Cel l Phone Compat i bi l i t y
Th e mos t import ant s t ep in t roubles h oot ing HFL is s ues
is t o ident ify t h e cus t omer's ph one model, s oft ware
vers ion, and t h e cellular carrier t h at experiences t h e HFL
problem. Not all ph ones wit h t h e Bluet oot h feat ure and a
h ands -free profile are compat iblewit h t h e HondaHFL
s ys t em.
Go t o h ands freelink.h onda.com, and ch eck if t h e
cus t omer's ph one is approved t o work wit h t h e Honda
HFL s ys t em.
NOTE :
Th elists of approved, arch ived, and current ly t es t ing
ph one model lis t s ch ange, s o make s ureyou view
t h emfrequent ly.
Ph ones are added as t h ey are approved.
Ph ones can be removed from t h e approved list if a
s oft ware bug is dis covered t h at makes t h e ph one
incompat ible. Th es eph ones can be added back t o t h e
approved lis t if t h e ph one manufact urer correct s t h e
bug.
If t h e s oft ware bug is correct ed, anew s oft ware
vers ion is creat ed and may be lis t ed in t h e Support ed
Feat ures s ect ion of t h e ph one.
Th e Hondaweb s it enow includes t h e s oft ware
vers ions t h at are t es t ed and approved. Wh en s oft ware
vers ions arelis t ed, you need t o know wh ich vers ion is
loaded on t h e ph onet o h elp you t roubles h oot t h e
cus t omer's complaint . If you cannot acces s t h e Honda
webs it e, call t h eHFL call cent er at 888-528-7876 for
furt h er as s is t ance. Th ecall cent er is open Monday
t h ru Friday from 6:00 a.m. t o 6:00 p.m. CST; Sat urday
from 7:00 a.m. t o 6:00 p.m. CST; and Sunday from 8:00
a.m. t o 6:00 p.m. CST.
Voi c e Cont r ol Ti ps and Improvi ng Voi c e
Recogni t i on
To give avoice command t o t h eHFL s ys t em, pres s and
releas et h e HFL TAL K but t on. Always wait for t h e beep,
t h en giveyour command in aclear, nat ural voice. Th e
HFL microph one is on t h eceiling by t h e map ligh t s .
'08-09 models : If t h e HFL s ys t emdoes n't recognize your
voice command, you'll h ear " Pardon." If your command
is n't recognized a s econd t ime, you'll h ear " Pleas e
repeat / ' If your command is n't recognized at h ird t ime,
t h e HFL s ys t em s ends you t o it s Help menu.
'10 model: If t h e HFL s ys t emdoes n't recognizeyour
voice command, you'll h ear " Pardon? Pres s t h e TAL K
but t on and s ay acommand. For alis t of commands , s ay
h ands freeh elp.'" If your command is n't recognized a
s econd t ime, you'll h ear " Bluet oot h h ands freelink main
menu. Availablecalling opt ions arecall, dial, redial, and
t rans fer. Available s et up opt ions are ph one s et up,
ph one book, and s ys t ems et up. For more det ailed h elp,
s ay h ands freeh elp." If your command is n't recognized a
t h ird t ime, t h e HFL s ys t em s ends you t o it s Help menu.
To h ear alis t of available opt ions at any t ime, pres s t h e
HFL TAL K but t on and s ay " Hands -free h elp."
Th eHFL s ys t emmay h ave problems recognizing s ome
voices . To improve voicerecognit ion:
Clos et h e windows and t h e moonroof.
Set t h e fan s peed t o low (1 or 2) or off.
Adjus t t h e airflow from t h e cent er vent s down, s o t h at
it 's not blowing agains t t h e microph oneon t h e ceiling.
Speak in aclear and nat ural voice. If t h e s ys t emcannot
recognizeyour command, t ry s peaking louder, in a
deeper t one.
If t h e background nois e is t oo loud, you may need t o
s peak louder.
If you s peak wit h s omet h ing in your mout h , or your
voice is t oo h igh , t h e s ys t emmay not int erpret your
command correct ly.
Find out if t h e problemis wit h one pers on or wit h
everyonewh o us es t h e s ys t em. If t h e s ys t emh as a
problemwit h only one pers on's voice, t h is is as ys t em
limit at ion.
23- 254
Many is s ues res ult from t h e cus t omer not us ing t h e
s ys t emproperly. Make s uret h e cus t omer is us ing t h e
HFL but t ons and not t h e navigat ion TAL K / navigat ion
BACK but t ons . Wh en t h e HFL TAL K but t on is pres s ed,
t h e cus t omer h ears one audible t one. Wh en t h e HFL
BACK but t on is pres s ed, t h e cus t omer h ears t wo audible
t ones . Make s uret o pres s t h e HFL BACK but t on t o exit
t h e HFL main menu aft er complet ing acall and before
giving any navigat ion commands .
Th e HFL s ys t emmay experience anumber recognit ion
is s ue, s uch as wh en acus t omer s ays as et of numbers in
agroup unrecognized by t h e s ys t em. Th e HFL s ys t em
unders t ands ph one numbers in s pecific blocks of 1,3,4,
7, and 10 numbers . For example, t h e s ys t em
unders t ands :
1234567890
123-456-7890
1-2-3-4-5-6-7-8-9-0
Th e s ys t emmay becomeconfus ed if numbers are s t at ed
in ot h er blocks , as t h efollowing:
1234-567-890
12-34-56-78-90
12345-67890
123-4567-890
Navi gat i on Thr ough Menus
To s kip avoiceprompt , pres s and releas et h e HFL TAL K
but t on wh ile t h e HFL s ys t emis s peaking. Th e s ys t em
beings lis t ening for your next voice command.
To go back a s t ep in avoice command s equence, pres s
and releas et h e HFL BACK but t on, or pres s t h e HFL TAL K
but t on and s ay " Go back." If you don't s ay anyt h ing
wh ile t h e HFL s ys t emis lis t ening for your voice
command, it t imes out and s t ops voicerecognit ion. Th e
next t ime you pres s and releas et h e HFL TAL K but t on,
t h e HFL s ys t embegins lis t ening from t h epoint it t imed
out .
If you'vefinis h ed or want t o s t op avoice command
s equenceat any t ime, pres s and releas et h e HFL BACK
but t on, or pres s and releas et h e HFL TAL K but t on, wait
for t h e beep, and s ay " Cancel." Th e next t ime you pres s
and releas et h e HFL TAL K but t on, t h e HFL s ys t embegins
from it s main menu. To avoid keeping t h e audio s ys t em
mut ed, pres s and releas et h e HFL BACK but t on wh en
you arefinis h ed.
NOTE : You can s ay mult iple commands in one
s equence, like " Ph one s et up-pair" aft er pres s ing t h e HFL
TAL K but t on.
(cont 'd)
23-255
Pai ri ng a Cel l Phone ('08-09 model s)
You must pai r an appr oved Bl uet oot h-compat i bl e phone
to t he HFL syst em bef ore you c an make and r ecei ve
c al l s. For a current li st of appr oved phones and speci f i c
phone pai ri ng i nst r uct i ons f or eac h phone, see Chec ki ng
Cel l Phone Compat i bi l i t y, go to handsf r eel i nk.honda.
c om, or cal l 888-528-7876.
The f ol l owi ng pr ocedur e wor ks f or most phones. If you
cannot pai r a phone to t he HFL syst em wi t h t hi s
pr ocedur e, refer to t he phone' s oper at i ng manual , vi si t
handsf r eel i nk.honda.com, or cal l 888-528-7876.
NOTE;
You cannot pai r a phone whi l e t he vehi c l e i s movi ng.
Your phone must be in. Di sc over y Mode.
A maxi mum of si x Bl uet oot h-compat i bl e phones c an
be pai red to t he syst em.
1. Wi t h t he phone on and t he i gni t i on swi t c h i n
A CCE S S ORY (I) or ON (ll), pr ess and r el ease t he HFL
TAL K but t on. Af t er t he beep, say " Phone set up." The
HFL r esponds, " Phone set up opt i ons ar e st at us, pai r,
edi t , del et e, and l i st ."
2. Pr ess and r el ease t he HFL TAL K but t on. After t he
beep, s ay " Pai r ." The HFL r esponds, " The pai ri ng
pr oc ess r equi r es oper at i on of your mobi l e phone. For
saf et y, onl y perf orm t hi s f unct i on whi l e t he vehi cl e i s
st opped. St at e a f our-di gi t c ode f or pai r i ng. Note t hi s
c ode. It wi l l be r equest ed by t he phone."
3. Pr ess and r el ease t he HFL TAL K button. Af t er t he
beep, s ay t he f our-di gi t c ode you want to use. Thi s c an
be any f our-di gi t number you want For exampl e, say
" 1, 2, 3, 4. " The HFL r esponds, " 1, 2, 3,4. i s t hi s
c or r ec t ?"
4. Pr ess and r el ease t he HFL TAL K button. After t he
beep, s ay " Yes . " The HFL r esponds, " HFL i s now
sear c hi ng f or a Bl uet oot h phone. Make sur e t he
phone you ar e t ryi ng to pai r i s in Di scover y mode." If
t hese st eps do not wor k on t he phone you ar e pai r i ng,
ref er to t he phone' s oper at i ng manual .
5. Fol l ow t he pr ompt s on your phone to get it into its
Di sc over y mode. The phone wi l l sear c h f or t he HFL.
When it c omes up, sel ect HandsFr eeLi nk f r om t he li st
of opt i ons di spl ayed on your phone.
6. When asked by t he phone, ent er t he f our-di gi t code
f r om st ep 3 into your phone. The HFL r esponds, " A
new phone has been f ound. What woul d you like to
name t hi s phone?"
7. Pr ess and r el ease t he HFL TAL K button. After t he
beep, s ay t he name you want to use. For exampl e, say
" Tom' s phone." The HFL r esponds, " Tom' s phone
has been suc c essf ul l y pai r ed. Ret urni ng to t he mai n
menu. "
23-256
Pai ri ng a Cel l Phone (
f
10 model ) Pairing Tr oubl eshoot i ng
You must pai r an approved Bluet oot h -compat iblephone
to t he HFL syst em bef ore you c an make and r ec ei ve
c al l s. For acurrent li st of approved ph ones and s pecific
phone pai ri ng ins t ruct ions f or eac h phone, see Ch ecking
Cel l Phone Compat ibilit y, go to h ands freelink.h onda.
com, or call 888-528-7876..
The following procedurewor ks f or most ph ones . If you
cannot pai r aphone to t he HFL syst em wi t h t hi s
procedure, refer t o t h e phone' s operat ingmanual , vi si t
h ands freelink.honda.com, or cal l 888-528-7876.
NOTE;
Youcannot pai r aphone whi l e t he veh icle is ;moving.
Your ph one, mus t bein Dis covery Mode.
A maxi mum of si x Bluet oot h -compat ible ph ones c an
be paired t o t h e-s ys t em.
1. Wi t h t he phone onand t he i gni ti on s wit ch in
ACCE SSORY (1) or ON (11), pr ess and r el ease t he HFL
TAL K but t on. After t he beep, say " Phone set up." The
HFL res ponds , " Phone set up opt ions ar e pai r, edi t ,
del et e, l i st , st at us, next phone, set pairingcode."
beep, s ay " Pai r ." The HFL res ponds ,'" The pairing
proces s requires operat ion of your mobi l e phone. For
s afet y, onl y performt hi s funct ion whi l e t he veh icleIs
s t opped. For proper syst em funct iona compat ible
bluet oot h phone Is required. Pl ease vi si t
h ands freelink.h onda.comfor alis t of approved
ph ones and ot h er s ys t eminformat ion. Hands freelink
is wait ing t o pair wit h abluet oot h ph one. Fromyour
ph one, s earch for bluet oot h devices , and s elect
h ands freelink. Wh en prompt ed by your mobile ph one
ent er t h e pairing code 0000."
3. Wh en prompt ed by your mobile ph one, ent er t h e
pairingc ode 0000. Refer t o your cell phone us er guide
for mor e informat ion about s earch ing for aBluet oot h
device.
4. Once t h e ph one is recognized by t h e HFL s ys t em, it
res ponds , " Hands freelink h as connect ed t o anew
ph one. A nameis needed t o ident ify t h is ph one. Pres s
t he talk button and s ay aname. For example, Joh n's
ph one."
5. Pres s and releas et h e HFL TAL K but t on. Aft er t h e
beep, s ay t h e nameyou want t o us e. For example, s ay
" Tom's ph one." Th e HFL res ponds , " Tom's ph one
h as been s ucces s fully paired. Ret urning t o t h e main
menu."
Many pai r i ng is s ues are res olved by alt ering t h e
cus t omer's phone set t i ngs.
Bluet oot h feat ure s et t ings mus t bet urned on. Ph one
manufact urers s et t h e default t o dis ableBluet oot h
feat ures t o cons ervebat t ery life. Cell ph ones may
provide procedures t o Temporary Power On Bluet oot h ,
or Power On Bluet oot h . Turn t h e Bluet oot h feat ure on,
pair t h e ph onet o t h e veh icle, and conf i r m t h e ph one is
linked. Do t h is by t urning t h e ph one off and back on.
Make or receive acall t o confirmt h at t h ecell ph one is .
s ucces s fully paired.
Wh en t h e ph one's Bluet oot h feat ure is on, ot h er
h ands free acces s ories s uch as earpieces or h eads et s
may aut omat ically reconnect t o t h e ph onewh en you
t urn on t h e acces s ory or move it wit h in rangeof t h ecell
ph one. Th is res ult s in t he ph onenot connect ing t o t h e
HFL syst em wh en t h e cus t omer ent ers t h e veh icle. You
mus t unlink t h e h ands -free acces s ory fromt h e ph one
before t h e HFL s ys t emcan reconnect .
Some ph ones h avean Aut o Ans wer s et t ing t h at
funct ions wit h a h eads et . Th is s et t ing mus t bet urned off
or t h e HFL s ys t emcannot accept any incoming calls .
Wh en t h is s et t ing is on, it blocks t h e HFL s ys t emfrom
ans wering t h ecall, and t h e call goes t o voicemail. Th is
can caus et h e cus t omer t o t h ink t h at t h ecell ph one is not
paired properly.
If t h e HFL s ys t emh as s ix ph ones paired, it will not t ell
you t h at it h as reach ed it s maximum, and will not allow
you t o pair anew ph one. To ch eck h ow many ph ones are
paired, pres s and releas et h e HFL TAL K but t on. Aft er t h e
beep, s ay " Ph one s et up lis t ." Th e HFL s ys t emlis t s every
as s igned ph one namepaired wit h it , t h en finis h es by
s aying " Th e ent irelis t h as been read. Ret urning t o t h e
main menu." Count t h e number of ph ones lis t ed. If t h ere
are s ix, you mus t delet eone ph one before adding anew
one.
(cont 'd)
23-257
HandsFreeLi nk Syst em
Gener al Troubleshooting Informati on (cont ' d!
Pai ri ng Chec ks
For moreinformat ion about pairing, refer t o t h ecell
ph one owner's manual, or go t o h ands freelink.h onda.
com.
1. Is t h ecell ph one compat iblewit h t h e HFL ?
2. Is t h eBluet oot h feat uret urned on?
3. Is t h e cus t omer us ing t h e HFL but t ons , not t h e
navigat ion TAL K / navigat ion BACK but t ons , wh en
pairing?
4. Is t h ecell ph one bat t ery fully ch arged, and is t h ere
good s ignal s t rengt h wh en pairing?
5. Do as oft res et on t h ecell ph one.
6. If t h e cus t omer is t rying t o pair aBlackberryor Palm
T r e o device, make s uret h e cus t omer us es t h es h ift
key wh en ent ering t h e pas s code. If t h es h ift key is not
pres s ed, t h e cus t omer may beent ering let t ers . Th e
HFL does not recognize let t ers .
Dropped Cal l s
Cus t omers may perceive dropped calls as being an HFL
s ys t emfault , but mos t dropped calls arefromcell ph one
and cell ph one carrier is s ues . Th e HFL s ys t em does not
direct ly h andle t h ecell ph one s ignal. It allows t h ecell
ph onet o t rans mit t h ecell ph one audio over t h e veh icle's
audio s ys t em.
Before t roubles h oot ing for dropped calls , confirm t h e
cell ph one s et t ings :
Dis ableAudio Ans wer. If Aut o Ans wer is enabled,
incoming calls arerout ed t o voicemail.
Dis able Always As k/ Trus t , Aut h orize Device, or s imilar
s et t ing, If t h es es et t ings are enabled, each t ime t h e
HFL s ys t emat t empt s t o link t o t h e ph one, t h e ph one
will as k if you want t o connect . If you do not allow t h e
connecti on, t he HFL
n o t
^ r ^
o r a t o
The phone must
be s et t o Never As k, Aut h orize Device, et c. (bas ed on
t h e ph one manufact urer and carrier) for permis s ion.
Refer t o t h ecell ph one owner's manual for more
informat ion.
Dis ableFlip Open t o Ans wer. If t h is s et t ing is enabled,
t h e ph one mus t remain open in t h e veh icle. If it is
clos ed, t h eincoming calls arerout ed t o voicemail.
Always confirmwit h t h e cus t omer if t h e number of
dropped calls is h igh er wh ile us ing t h e HFL s ys t em as
oppos ed t o us ing t h ecell ph oneonly. Cus t omers oft en
confus e problems wit h t h eir ph one or carrier as a
problemwit h t h e HFL s ys t em. Th e HFL s ys t emcannot
cont rol or det ermine:
Cellular connect ion qualit y.
Signal s t rengt h .
Cellular coverage.
Ambient weat h er condit ions t h at affect cellular
s ignals .
Wh en acus t omer complains about dropped calls , as k
ques t ions about wh en or wh ere t h e calls are dropped,
s uch as :
Do you drive t h e s amerout eon aregular bas is ?
Does t h ecall drop in t h e s amelocat ion?
Wh ere do you keep your cell ph one?
Haveyou compared t h e number of dropped calls
us ing t h e HFL vers us making calls from t h e h ands et ?
Does your ph one h ave an ant ennat h at needs t o be
ext ended?
Many reas ons for adropped call arenot relat ed t o t h e
HFL s ys t em. Here are s ome caus es for dropped calls :
Ift h e quant it y of dropped calls is about t h e s amewh en
t h e cus t omer us es t h e HFL s ys t emvers us t h e h ands et ,
t h e is s ueis likely duet o t h e cellular ph one or carrier.
Ift h e ph one is equipped wit h aret ract able ant enna, it
needs t o be ext ended t o maximize s ignal s t rengt h .
If acus t omer als o not ices t h at t h e calls t end t o drop in
t h e s ame areas , t h e HFL s ys t emmay be operat ing
normally, but s omet h ing about t h e areadiminis h es
cellular coveraget o apoint wh ere t h ecall drops .
Hills or mount ains can block or int erferewit h cellular
s ignals .
High -ris e buildings , bridges , or ot h er large s t ruct ures
may block or int erferewit h cellular s ignals .
Placing t h ecell ph onein apurs e, in amet al briefcas e,
under t h e s eat , in t h e glove box, or in t h et runk can all
affect s ignal recept ion.
Th ere are coverage gaps in t h e cellular s ervice. Wh en
driving, acall is t ypically pas s ed from onet ower t o
anot h er. Ift h e cus t omer drives t h rough an areawh ere
t h ere is a coveragegap bet ween t owers , t h ecall
drops .
E lect rical s t orms , h eavy rain, or overcas t condit ions
int erferewit h s ignal s t rengt h .
Th ecell ph one bat t ery's s t at eof ch angecan affect
s ignal recept ion. A low bat t ery may reduce t h e
ph one's abilit y t o boos t t h e ant enna's power and
funct ion properly, es pecially in low s ignal s t rengt h
areas . Someph one manufact urers t rade off s ignal
t rans mis s ion and recept ion s t rengt h for bat t ery life.
As t h e bat t ery weakens , t h e s ignal s t rengt h may als o
weaken. Somecell ph ones may operat e more
effect ively t h an ot h ers in low s ignal s t rengt h areas ,
es pecially wit h apart ially ch arged bat t ery, and
depending on wh et h er or not t h e ret ract able ant enna
is fully ext ended (if applicable). On t h es emodels ,
make s uret h e ant ennais always ext ended t o
maximize s ignal s t rengt h and ext end bat t ery life.
Phone Will Not Automatically Connect the
HFL
If acus t omer complains t h at t h eir cell ph one is not
aut omat ically connect ing t o t h e HFL s ys t emwh en t h ey
ent er t h e veh icle, do t h is :
1. Make s uret h e Bluet oot h feat ure is t urned on in t h e
cell ph one.
2. Make s uret h ecell ph one is properly paired t o t h e HFL
s ys t em.
3. Do as oft res et t o t h ecell ph one.
4. Ch eck ift h e ph one h as an Aut h orized Connect ion or
Trus t ed opt ion.
5. Ch eck t h e bat t ery and s ignal s t rengt h on t h ecell
ph one. Pairing aph one requires opt imal s ignal
s t rengt h and anearly full bat t ery.
Incoming Calls
If acus t omer complains t h at t h ey cannot receive
incoming calls t h rough t h e HFL s ys t em, s ee ift h e call is
rout ing t o t h ecell ph one ins t ead of t h e HFL s ys t em. An
eas y way t o know if t h ecall is rout ed t o t h ecell ph one is
wh en t h e cus t omer s ays , " \ can't h ear t h e caller, but t h ey
can h ear me/ '
1. Make s uret h e Bluet oot h feat ure is t urned on in t h e
cell ph one.
2. Make s uret h ecell ph one is paired t o t h e HFL s ys t em
and linked.
3. Make s uret h e ans wer s et t ings in t h ecell ph one are
s et t o mult i-key or any-key ans wer. Ift h e ph one is s et
t o flip open t o ans wer, recommend ch anging t h e
s et t ing t o Any K ey or leaving t h e ph oneflipped open
wh en us ing t h e HFL s ys t em.
4. Make s uret h eAut o Ans wer feat ure is t urned off in t h e
cell ph one.
5. Do as oft res et t o t h e ph one.
6. Make s uret h e bat t ery is fully ch arged and t h ere is
adequat es ignal s t rengt h .
7. As k t h e cus t omer if t h ey h ave s et s pecific ring t ones
or ringer IDs t o s pecific cont act s . If t h ey h ave,
recommend us ing one s t andard ring t one for all calls .
8. Make s uret h e cus t omer is pres s ing t h e HFL TAL K
but t on and not t h e HFL BACK but t on or t h e navigat ion
TAL K / navigat ion BACK but t ons .
(cont 'd)
23^259
Out goi ng Cal l s
If a c ust omer s ay s that t hey cannot pl ace a cal l usi ng t he
HFL s y s t em, ask if t he cal l was i ni ti ated t hr ough t he HFL
syst em or t he cel l phone i tself.
If t he cal l i s pl aced by t he HFL syst em;
1. Make sur e t he Bl uet oot h f eat ure i s t ur ned on in t he
cel l phone.
2. Make sur e t he cel l phone i s pai red to t he HFL syst em
and l i nked.
3. Make sur e t he c ust omer i s pr essi ng t he HFL TAL K
button bef ore eac h c ommand and goi ng t hr ough t he
cal l i ng pr oc ess cor r ect l y.
4. Make sur e t he c ust omer i s pr essi ng t he HFL TAL K
button and not t he HFL BACK button or t he nav^ gGtiGn
TALK/navi gat i on BACK but t ons.
5. Chec k if t he cel l phone has an Aut hor i zed
Connec t i ons or Tr ust ed opt i on.
6. Do a soft r eset to t he cel l phone.
If t he cal l i s pl aced by t he cel l phone;
The cal l wi l l r emai n on t he handset unti l you t r ansf er it
over to t he HFL syst em. To cont i nue t he cal l on t he HFL
s y s t em, you must use t he Tr ansf er c ommand by
pr essi ng and r el easi ng t he HFL TAL K button dur i ng an
act i ve cal l and sayi ng " Tr ansf er ." The c ust omer c an now
cont i nue t he cal l usi ng t he HFL syst em.
Cl ear i ng t he HFL S f st em ('08-09 model s)
NOTE:
Thi s oper at i on c l ear s t he HFL syst em of all
passc ode(s), any pai r ed phones, and all names i n t he
HFL phonebook.
Cl ear i ng t he HFL syst em i s r ec ommend bef ore sel l i ng
t he vehi c l e.
If t he syst em i s l ocked and t he pass code i s l ost or
f orgot t en, see t he sympt om t r oubl eshoot i ng.
1. Pr ess and r el ease t he HFL TAL K but t on. Af t er t he
beep, s ay " Sy s t em c l ear " and t he HFL syst em
r esponds, " Thi s pr oc ess wi l l c l ear all pai r ed phones,
c l ear al l ent r i es in t he phonebook, cl ear t he secur i t y
passc ode and r est or e all def aul t s i n t he syst em set up.
Is t hi s what you woul d like to d o ? "
2. Pr ess and r el ease t he HFL TAL K but t on. Af t er t he
beep, s ay " Yes " and t he HFL syst em r esponds,
" Pr epar i ng to c l ear all pai red phone, all phonebook
ent r i es, t he passc ode. Thi s may t ake up t o 2 mi nut es
to c ompl et e."
beep, s ay " OK " to pr oc eed, or s ay " Go bac k" or
" Canc el . "
4. If you sai d " OK " , after a shor t per i od of t i me, t he HFL
syst em r esponds, " S y s t em has been c l ear ed.
Ret urni ng to t he mai n menu, t he Cl ear i ng HFL syst em
pr ocedur e i s now c ompl et e." ~
23-260
Cl ear i ng t he HFL Syst em f10 model)
NOTE :
Th is operat ion clears t h e HFL s ys t emof all
pas s code(s ), any paired ph ones , and all names in t h e
HFL ph onebook.
Clearing t h e HFL s ys t emi s recommend befores elling
t h e veh icle.
Ift h e s ys t emi s locked and t h e pas s codei s los t or
forgot t en, see t h e s ympt omt roubles h oot ing.
beep, s ay " Sys t emclear" and t h e HFL s ys t em
res ponds , " Th is proces s wi l l clear all paired ph ones ,
clear all ent ries in t h e ph onebook, clear t h e s ecurit y
pas s codeand res t oreall default s in t h e s ys t ems et up.
Is t h is wh at you would like t o do?"
beep, s ay " Yes " and t h e HFL s ys t emres ponds ,
" Preparing t o clear t h e s ys t em, wh ich may t akeup t o
2 minut es t o complet e."
beep, s ay " Cont inue" t o proceed, or s ay " Go back" or
" Cancel."
4. If you s aid " cont inue," t h e HFL res ponds , Pleas ewait
unt il t h e s ys t emis cleared." Aft er as h ort period of
t ime(up t o t wo minut es ) t h e HFL res ponds , " Th e
s ys t em h as been cleared."
NOTE : Th is procedure s h ould be us ed only if HDS is
unavailable.
To run t h e s elf-diagnos t ic funct ion, do t h e following:
1. Turn t h e ignit ion s wit ch t o ON (II).
2. Pres s and h old t h e HFL BACK but t on for moret h an 5
s econds .
3. Wh en t h e Hands FreeL ink s ys t ement ers t h e
s elf-diagnos t ic funct ion, t h e followingwill occur.
Ift h e s ys t em h as not complet ed t es t ing for DTCs ,
t h e Hands FreeL ink s ys t em s ays " Th e h ands free
s ys t emt es t is in progres s " .
If t h ere is no DTC, t h e Hands FreeL ink s ys t em s ays
" Th e h ands free s ys t em is OK " .
If t h ere is any DTC, t h e Hands FreeL ink s ys t em s ays
" Th e h ands free s ys t em needs t o be s erviced" .
NOTE :
Th e s elf-diagnos t ic funct ion can only beinit iat ed wh ile
t h e HFL is in it s idle s t at e.
Th e s elf-diagnos t ic funct ion s t art s aft er you pres s and
h old t h e HFL BACK but t on for 5 s econds , and ends if
t h e Hands FreeL ink cont rol unit ret urns t o it s idle s t at e.
(cont 'd)
23-261
HandsFreeLi nk S y s t em
Gener al Troubl eshoot i ng Informati on (cont'd)
Gl ossar y of Ter ms
Aut o Ans wer
Thi s cel l phone set t i ng f or c es i ncomi ng c al l s to
aut omat i cal l y be answer ed by t he handset . Di sabl e t hi s
f eat ur e on t he phone when usi ng t he HFL s y s t em, as it
may i nt erf ere wi t h t he HFL syst em answer i ng i nc omi ng
c al l s. Set t he phone set t i ng to:
S end Onl y
Any K ey
Mul t i -Key answer
Ans wer Opt i ons
Thes e cel l phone set t i ngs al l ow you to sel ec t how you
woul d like to ans wer ani ncomi ng cal l on t he hands et
The answer opt i on i n t he phone c an affect i nbound c al l s
on t he HFL syst em.
Aut hor i zed Connec t i on
Thi s cel l phone set t i ng al l ows t he phone to c onnec t
aut omat ically wit h t h e HFL s ys t emwit h out prompt ing
t h e cus t omer for permis s ion t o connect . In s ome
ins t ances , it can affect t h eabilit y of t h e ph onet o
properly rout e s ound t o t h e HFL s ys t em.
Bl uet oot h Power
Th is cell ph onefunct ion enables or dis ables t h e
Bluet oot h applicat ion. Wh en us ing a h ands -free device
s uch as HFL , t h e Bluet oot h applicat ion needs t o be
enabled.
Di sc over y Mode
You need t o h avet h e cell ph onein Dis covery Mode t o
allow ot h er devices wit h Bluet oot h capabilit ies (s uch as
t h e HFL s ys t em) t o find t h e ph oneduring t h e pairing
proces s .
Downl oaded Ri ngt ones
A cus t omer get s t h es eringt ones froman out s ide s ource,
s uch as t h e int ernet or amobile ph one s t ore.
HFL But t ons
HFL TAL K but t on (A): Us e t h is but t on on t h e s t eering
wh eel t o give commands . Pres s t h e but t on beforea
voice command is given.
HFL BACK but t on (B): Us e t h is but t on on t h e s t eering
wh eel t o end acall or ret urn t o a previous prompt in
t h e HFL menu. Pres s ing t h e but t on t wice or h olding it
down ret urns you t o t h e HFL main menu.
Hard Reset
Hard res et s clear t h e s aved s et t ings in t h e cell ph oneand
res t ores it t o t h e fact ory default s . A h ard res et s h ould be
doneonly as a las t res ort (s ee t h e cell ph one owner's
manual for moreinformat ion).
23-262
Li nki ng
Th is is wh en your paired ph one is act ively ready t o us e
t h e HFL s ys t em. You can pair up t o s ix ph ones t o t h e HFL
s ys t em, but only one ph one can belinked at at ime. If
t wo paired ph ones arein t h e veh icle, only t h e ph one t h at
is linked can us e t h e HFL s ys t emand funct ions . Th e
s econd ph one mus t be us ed as anormal h ands et .
Pai ri ng
A des cript ion for linking t wo Bluet oot h devices t oget h er.
In t h is cas e, you arelinking acell ph onewit h t h e HFL
s ys t em. Aft er t h e pairing proces s is complet e, t h e
devices are ablet o recognize each ot h er and
communicat e wireles s ly viaBluet oot h .
Sof t Reset (Cel l ul ar phone)
Th is h elps t o res t oret h e bas ic funct ions of t h e ph one. To
do as oft res et , t urn t h e ph one power off, remove and
reins ert t h e cell ph one bat t ery, t h en t urn t h e ph one back
on.
Sof t war e Ver si on
Th is refers t o t h e s oft ware vers ion loaded in t h e cell
ph one. Th e s oft ware vers ion t h at was t es t ed and
det ermined t o be compat iblewit h t h e HFL s ys t emmay
be lis t ed on t h e HFL webs it e. Not all s oft ware vers ions
are compat iblewit h t h e HFL s ys t em.
St andar d Ri ngt one
Th es eringt ones comefact ory-ins t alled on t h e cell
ph one.
D T C Tr o ub l es h o o t i ng I nd ex
Hands FreeL ink Cont rol U nit
DTC Des cript ion DTC t ype Page
B1775 Microph oneinput / out put s h ort t o power/ open Signal error DTC Troubles h oot ing
(s ee page 23-270)
B1776 Microph oneinput / out put s h ort t o ground/ open Signal error DTC Troubles h oot ing
(s ee page 23-271)
B1779 HFL s wit ch {HFL TAL K / HFL BACK but t ons ) circuit
open/ s h ort t o power
Signal error DTC Troubles h oot ing
(s ee page 23-272)
B1780 HFL s wit ch (HFL TAL K / HFL BACK but t ons ) circuit s h ort Signal error DTC Troubles h oot ing
(s ee page 23-274)
B1792 Hands FreeL ink cont rol unit int ernal error Int ernal error DTC Troubles h oot ing
(s ee page 23-275)
U1280 Communicat ion bus line error L os s of communicat ion DTC Troubles h oot ing
(s ee page 22-148)
23
h>>
2 64
Sympt om Diagnos t ic procedure Al so ch eck for
Th e HFL digit s do not go away
fromt h e audio-HVAC s ubdis play
or t h e audio-HVAC dis play aft er
pres s ing t h e HFL BACK but t on
Sympt omTroubles h oot ing (s ee page
23-275)
Ch eck and repair all CAN relat ed
DTCs
Th e Bluet oot h icon in t h e
audio-HVAC s ubdis play is not
dis played (wit h navigat ion)
Th ere is no HFL -compat ible ph one paired
t o t h e veh icle. Pair an approved
HFL -compat ible ph one t o t h e veh icle
Th e ph one mus t be on t h elis t of
approved Bluet oot h ph ones and
configured correct ly. For a
current lis t of approved ph ones ,
go t o www.h ands freelink.
h onda.com, or call 888-528-7876
for furt h er as s is t ance.
Ch eck t h e Diagnos t ic Menu and
us et h e Navi Sys t emL ink
Th e Hondaapproved Bluet oot h
ph one is h aving problems pairing
t o t h e veh icle
Self-diagnos t ic Funct ion (s ee page
23-261) or HFL Sys t emTroubles h oot ing
(s ee page 23-267)
Th e ph one mus t beon t h elis t of
configured correct ly. For acurrent
lis t of approved ph ones , go t o
www.h ands freelink.h onda.com,
or call 888-528-7876 for furt h er
as s is t ance.
ph one cannot us eall it s funct ions
(s ee page 23-267)
as s is t ance.
ph one does not placeor receive
calls us ing t h e HFL s ys t em
(s ee page 23-267)
as s is t ance.
Th e cus t omer want s t h e HFL
s ys t emres et (all ph ones and
addres s informat ion cleared from
t h e HFL s ys t em)
Clearing t h e s ys t em:
'08-09 models (s ee page 23-260)
'10 model (s ee page 23-261)
Seet h e owner's manual for
addit ional informat ion.
Th e HFL s ys t em is locked and t h e
pas s code h as been los t or
forgot t en
23-276)
Th e HFL s ys t em does not
recognizeall voice prompt s
23-276)
Als o s eeVoicecont rol t ips (s ee
page23-254).
Th e HFL s ys t em s peaks in French Seet h e HFL s ect ion in t h e owner's
manual for Ch anging L anguage
Th e addres s book does not
t rans fer fromHondaapproved
Bluet oot h ph onet o HFL s ys t em
Th ere is no HFL compat ible ph one paired
t o t h e veh icle or t h e approved ph one does
not s upport t h efunct ion. Pair an
approved HFL compat ible ph onet o t h e
veh icle.
Th e ph one mus t beon t h elist of
configured correct ly. For ali st of
approved ph ones , go t o www.
h ands freelink.h onda.com, or call
t h e HFL s upport des k at
888-528-7876.
Th e HFL mes s ages cannot be
h eard or are weak
23-277)
E xces s iveint erior nois e(open
windows , vent s blowing on
microph one, et c.).
23-265
Syst em Descri pt i on
HandsFr eeLi nk Cont r ol Uni t Input s and Out put s
r r \
i , \
ZZ1
HANDSFRE E L I NK CO NTRO L U NI T
28P CONNECTOR
1 | 2 | 3 | / V
617 | 8 \ / /|11|12|13|14|
|15|16|17|18|/|20|21|/1/V125|26|27|28
HandsFr eeLi nk Cont r ol Uni t 28P Connec t or
Cavi t y Wire . Connec t s t o
1
B R N
Ground (G402) (GND)
2 L TBL U . HFL s wit ch (HFL STRG SW)
3
L TGRN
Audio unit , front HFL -navigat ion-ANC microph one*
2
, front HFL -ANC microph one*
3
(HFL
MUTE )
6*
2
WHT Navigat ion unit (NAVI COMM4)
T
2
RE D Navigat ion unit (NAVI COMM3)
8*
2
GRY*
1
Navigat ion unit (NAVI COMM SH)
11 GRN Audio unit (TE L M SIG-!-)
12 GRY*
1
Sh ielding (MIC SH)
13 YE L Front HFL -navigat ion-ANC microph one*
2
3
(MIC+)
14 BRN .-:c~t HFL -navigat ion-ANC microph one"
2
3
(M.C!
15 WHT Cons t ant power ( +B)
16 PUR HFL power s upply (ACC)
17 BL U B-CAN (B-CAN L )
18 PNK 3-CAN (B-CAN H)
2(T
2
BL K Navigat ion unit (NAVI COMM1)
2V
2
GRN Navigat ion unit (NAVI COMM2;
25 RE D Audio unit (TE L M SI G-)
26
G R Y * 1
Audio unit (TE L M SIG SH)
IT
2
GRN Navigat ion unit (HFL -NAVI MIC+)
28
s 2
RE D Navigat ion unit (HFL -NAVI MI C-)
*l:Th e s h ielded wires h aveah eat -s h rink t ubeins ulat ing t h e out s ideof t h ewire. Th e color of t h e ins ulat ing t ube,
t ypically black or dark gray may not mat ch t h e color of t h ewire s h own on t h ecircuit diagram.
*2:Wit h navigat ion
*3:Wit h out navigat ion
23-266
HFL S f st em Troubl eshoot i ng
NOTE :
Beforedoing t h is t roubles h oot ing, refer t o General Troubles h oot ing Informat ion (s ee page 23-254) t o make s uret h e
ph one is compat ible and configured correct ly.
You mus t be ablet o duplicat e t h e cus t omer's concern t o s ucces s fully diagnos et h e problem.
Always us e t h e cus t omer's ph one.
Make s uret h e ph one is approved and configured correct ly. Online, go t o www.h ands freelink.h onda.com, or call t h e
HFL s upport des k at 888-528-7876.
1. Connect t h e HDS t o t h e DL C.
3. Ch eck for DTCs .
YES-Repair t h e indicat ed DTCs and rech eck.B
NO-Go t o s t ep 4.
4. Try t o duplicat e t h e problem.
Can you duplicate the problem?
YES-Go t o s t ep 5.
NO-Th e s ys t emis OK at t h is t ime.B
5. Pair t h e ph one t o aknown-good veh icle (s amemodel, year, and t rim), and t ry duplicat e t h e problem.
Does the phone have the same problem on the known-good vehicle?
YES-Call t h eHFL s upport des k at 888-528-7876 t o make s uret h e ph one is configured correct ly and h as t h e correct
s oft ware. Ift h e ph one is configured correct ly, it is eit h er ach aract eris t ic of t h e HFL s ys t em, or a ch aract eris t ic of t h e
part icular approved ph one being us ed. E xplain t o your cus t omer t h at t h is is a s ys t emch aract eris t ic. Anot h er ph one
fromt h e approved ph one lis t may givemore favorable res ult s .B
NO-Subs t it ut e aknown-good Hands FreeL ink cont rol unit and rech eck. Ift h e problem goes away, replacet h eoriginal
Hands FreeL ink cont rol unit (s ee page23-281).B
23-267
Ci rcui t Di agram
DRIVER'S UNDER-DASH
F USE/RELAY B OX IGNITION SWI TCH
(+>
No. 1 (MAIN)
( 1
0 A | ^ O No. 3-1 (IG M^ l Nj J 50 A)
No. 15 (10 A )
F 16 C1 C 1 / B A T \
, W H T f-O C H - R E D - ,
V A C C /
ACC H OT i n
A C C (I) and O N (II)
N A V I G A T I O N U N I T
No. 18
(7.5 A )
V V
GRN RE D
H F L - N A V I H F L - N A V I
MI C + MI C -
I
W H T
D R I V E R ' S
U N D E R - D A S H
F U S E / R E L A Y
B O X
| P 1 3
P U R
W H T
F R O N T
H F L - N A V I G A T I O N - A N C
M I C R O P H O N E
P U R
J _
F R O N T
H F L - N A V I G A T I O N - A N C
M I C R O P H O N E
W H T P U R
J i e
G N D B - C A N L B - C A N H
rw
+B
H A N D S F R E E L I N K
H F L
S T R G
S W
L T B L U
A U D I O R E M O T E
S W I T C H
G A U G E C O N T R O L
M O D U L E
A U D I O UNI T
G 4 0 2
D A S H L I G H T S B R I G H T N E S S
C O N T R O L L E R
(In the gauge c ont r ol modul e)
23-268
* 1 : The shielded wires have a heat-shrink tube
insulating the outside of the wi re,
The color of the insulating tube,
typically black or dark gray,
may not match the color of the wi re
shown on the circuit diagram.
*2: W i th navigation
- : CAN line
- : Other communi cati on line
- : Shielding
NAVI GATI ON UNI T AUDI O UNI T
V V A A
B L K GRN RE D W H T
GRY*
1
A A
GRN RE D
NAVI
C0MM1
NAVI NAVI NAVI
COMM2 C0 MM3 C0 MM4
NAVI
COMM
S H
HANDS FREEL I NK
CONTROL UNI T
TE L M
S I G S H
TE L M
S I G+
HFL MUTE
TE L M
S I G -
MI C-
No. 15 (10 A)
F US E
( UNDER- HOOD
Y
WHT
l 7
No. 18 (7.5 A)
F US E
( DRI VER' S
UNDE R- DA S H
j12
GRY *
1
13
"7YE L
!
I BRN
BRN
t
GRY
L T GRN
+B A CC MIC+
un MI I T P FRONT HFL - NAVI GATI ON- ANC MI CROPHONE
H -L MU t ( F R o N T HFL - ANC MI CROPHONE)
GND
L T CRN BL K
AUDI O
UNI T
G501
23-269
HandsFreeLink Sys t em
DTC B1775: Mi crophone i nput/Output Shor t to
Power /Open
NOTE : If you are t roubles h oot ing mult iple DTCs , be s ure
t o follow t h e ins t ruct ions in B-CAN s ys t emdiagnos is t es t
modeA (s ee page22-134).
ON (II).
Is DTC B1775 Indicat ed?
t ime.B
6. Dis connect t h efront HFL -ANC microph one 7P
connect or.
7. Dis connect t h e Hands FreeL ink cont rol unit 28P
connect or.
9. Meas uret h e volt agebet ween Hands FreeL ink cont rol
unit 28P connect or t erminal No. 13 and body ground.
11. Ch eck for cont inuit y bet ween Hands FreeL ink cont rol
unit 28P connect ort erminal No. 13 and front HFL -ANC
microph one 7P connect or t erminal No. 3.
M1C+(YEL)
l | 2| 3| / i / 6 | 7 | 8 | / / | 11| 12J 13| 14|
|15116|17|18|/120|21|/I/|/|25126I27|28
MIC+JBRN)
p " f l
1
1
2 3 4 5
6
7
FRONT HFL-ANC MICROPHONE 7P CONNECTOR
YE S-Subs t it ut eaknown-good Hands FreeL ink cont rol
unit (s ee page23-281), t h en rech eck. If t h e s ympt om
goes away, replacet h eoriginal Hands FreeL ink
cont rol unit . If t h e s ympt oms t ill pres ent , replacet h e
HFL microph one (s ee page23-280).
NO-Th ere is an open in t h ewire bet ween t h e
Hands FreeL ink cont rol unit and t h efront HFL -ANC
microph one. Replacet h e affect ed s h ielded h arnes s .!
MIC+(YEL)
n -n
1
2 3
/ /
6 7
/
11 12 13 14
15
16 17 18 20 21 25 26 27 28
Is t here volt age?
YE S-Th ereis as h ort t o power in t h ewire t h e
microph one. Replacet h e affect ed s h ielded h arnes s .
NO-Got o s t ep 10.
23-270
DTC B177S: Mi crophone Input/Output Short to
Gr ound/Open
NOTE ; If you are t roubles h oot ing mult iple DTCs , be s ure
1_ Connect t h e HDS t o t h e DL C.
ON (II).
t ime.B
6. Dis connect t h e front HFL -ANC microph one 7P
connect or.
7 Dis connect t h e Hands FreeL ink cont rol unit 28P
connect or.
8. Ch eck for cont inuit y bet ween body ground and t h e
Hands FreeL ink cont rol unit 28P connect or t erminals
No. 13 and No. 14 individually, t h en bet ween
t erminals No. 12 and No. 13.
HANDSFREELINK CONTROL UNIT28P CONNECTOR
MICSH r
(GRY)
MIC+
(Q)n(YEL)
1 2 3
/ /
6 7 8
/ /
11 12 1; 5 14
|J r
15 16 17 18
/
20 21
/ / /
25 26 27 28
MICIN-
(BRN)
YE S-Th ere is as h ort in t h e wire(s ) bet ween t h e
microph one. Replacet h e affect ed s h ielded h arnes s .I
NO-Go t o s t ep 9.
9. Ch eck for cont inuit y bet ween t h e t erminals s h own of
t h e Hands FreeL ink cont rol unit 28P connect or and t h e
front HFL -ANC microph one 7P connect or.
MIC+
1 | 2 | 3 | / V 6 | 7 | 8 | / 7|11|12|13|14|
|15|16|17|18|/|20|21|/|/|/|25|26|27|28
MIC-(BRN)
MIC- MIC+
rn.
1
2 3 4 5 6
_ n
7
FRONTHFL-ANC MICROPHONE7P CONNECTOR
microph one. Replacet h e affect ed s h ielded h arnes s .!
10. Dis connect navigat ion unit connect or C (16P).
Hands FreeL ink cont rol unit 28P connect or t erminals
No. 27 and No. 28 individually.
n - n
2 3
/ /
6 7 8
/
11 12 13 14
15 16 17 18 20 21 25 26
NAVI
MIC-
(RED)
NAVI MIC+
(GRN)
YE S-Th ere is as h ort t o body ground in t h e wire(s )
bet ween t h e Hands FreeL ink cont rol unit and t h e
navigat ion unit . Replacet h e affect ed s h ielded
h arnes s .B
(cont 'd)
23-271
12. Ch eck for cont inuit y bet ween t h e t erminals s h own of
t h e Hands FreeL ink cont rol unit 28P connect or and
navigat ion unit connect or C (16P ).
n n
1 1l \ z\ 7\ y\ S 1 7 1 8 | ^/ I l l l l 2l l 3l l 4
MI C+
(GRN)
HFL-NAVI
MI C+ (GRN)
15|161171181/120121 [/ V^25l 26l 27J 28
M I C -
(RED)
K r-'L-NAVI
mt- (RED)
YE S-Subs t it ut e aknown-good Hands FreeL ink cont rol
unit (s ee page23- 281), t h en rech eck. If t h e s ympt om
goes away, replacet h e original Hands FreeL ink
cont rol unit . If t h e s ympt om does not go away,
replacet h e navigat ion unit (s ee page23-238).B
Hands FreeL ink cont rol unit and t h e navigat ion
unit . Replacet h e affect ed s h ielded h arnes s .!
DTC B1779: HFL Swi t ch or Voi ce Control
Swi t ch (HFL TALK/HFL BACK Buttons) Ci rcui t
Open/Shor t to power
NOTE : If you are t roubles h oot ing mult iple DTCs , be s ure
3. Turn t h e ignit ion s wit ch t o L OCK (0), t h en s t art t h e
veh icle, and t urn t h e s t eering wh eel back and fort h
s everal t imes .
t i me.B
6. Do t h e HFL Swit ch Tes t (s ee page23-279).
Is t he swit ch OK?
NO-Replacet h e HFL -voicecont rol s wit ch (s ee page
17-7).B
7 Dis connect Hands FreeL ink cont rol unit 28P
connect or.
8. Dis connect HFL -voicecont rol s wit ch SP connect or.
23-272
10.- Meas uret he vol t age bet ween HFL-voi c e cont rol
swi t c h 5P connect or t er mi nal No, 3 and body gr ound.
:
H F L- VOI CE C ONT R OL S W I T C H SP C ONNE C T OR
P
1 2 3 4 5
HF L STRG $W (BL U)
Is them voltage?
YE S-Repair ashor t to power i n t he BL U wi r e.H
12. Chec k f or cont i nui t y bet ween HandsFr eeLi nk cont rol
uni t 28P connect or t er mi nal No. 2 and HFL-voi ce
cont rol swi t c h 5P connect or t er mi nal No. 3.
HFTSTRG SW
1 | ? | 3 | / l /
6 | 7 | 8 ^ /|11|12|13|14|
|15|18|17|181/]20|21 | /l /l /l 25| 26| 27| 28
c
1 2 3 4 5
HFL STRG SW (BLU)
HFL-VOICE CONTROL SWITCH 5P CONNECTOR
NO-Rep ai r an open in t h e BL U wire bet ween t h e
s wit ch , t h e cablereel, and t h e Hands FreeL ink cont rol
unit .H
14. Meas ur e t he vol t age bet ween HandsFr eeLi nk cont r ol
HFL STRG S W
(LTBLU) -
1 2 3
15 117 1 8 / 2 0 21
6 7 8 11 12 13 14
25 26 27;28
Is there voltage?
YES - Repai r a s h ort t o power in t h ewi r e bet ween t he
HandsFr eeLi nk cont rol unit and t h eHFL-voi c e cont rol
s wit ch .
N O - Go t o s t ep 15.
15. Turn t h e ignit ion s wit ch t o L OCK (0).
16. Ch eck for cont inuit y bet weenHFL-voi c e cont rol
s wit ch 5P connect or t erminal No. 4 and body ground.
HFL-VOICE CONTROL SWITCH 5P CONNECTOR
c J
1 2 3 4 5
REMOTE GND (BRN)
YE S-Replacet h e Hands FreeL ink cont rol unit (s ee
page. 23-281 ) .
NO- Rep ai r an open in t h e wire bet ween t h e HFL -voice
cont rol s wit ch , cablereel, and t h e audio unit .H
23-273
DTC B1780: HFL Swi t ch (HFL TALK /HFL BACK
Buttons) Ci rcui t Shor t
3. Turn t h e ignit ion s wit ch t o L OCK (0), t h en s t art t h e
veh icle, and t urn t h e s t eering wh eel back and fort h
s everal t imes .
t i m e . B
6. Do t h e HFL Swit ch Tes t (s ee page23-279).
Is the switch OK ?
NO-Replacet h e cablereel s ubh arnes s (s ee page
17-7).B
connect or.
8. Dis connect t h e HFL -voicecont rol s wit ch 5P
connect or.
unit 28P connect or t erminal No. 2 and body ground.
HANDS FREEL I NK CONTROL UNIT 28P CONNECTOR
HFL S TRG
(LT BL U)
S W
fl fl
1 2 3 ~7/ 6 7 8 /
711 12 13 14
15
16 17 18^20 21 ZZZ
2 5 2 6 2 7 2 8
u
YE S-Repair a s h ort in t h e wire.G
NO-Replacet h e Hands FreeL ink cont rol unit (s ee page
23-281 ) .
23-274
S f mpt om Troubl eshoot i ng
DTC B17S2: HandsFr eeLi nk Cont rol Uni t
Internal Error
1. Connec t t he HDS t o t he DL C.
3. Turn t h e ignit ion s wit ch t o L OCK (0) and t h en back t o
ON (II).
YE S-Replacet h e Hands FreeL ink cont rol unit (s ee
page23-281 ) .
t i me. _
The HFL di gi t s do not go away f rom t he
audi o-HVAC subdi spl ay or t he audi o HVAC
di spl ay after pr essi ng t he HFL BACK but t on
3. Turn t h e ignit ion s wit ch t o L OCK (0) and t h en back t o
ON (II).
Are t here any DTCs indicat ed?
YE S-Repair t h e indicat ed DTCs S
NO-Go t o s t ep 5.
5. Turn t h e ignit ion t o L OCK (0).
6. Subs t it ut ea known-good Hands FreeL ink cont rol unit
(s ee page23-281).
7. Turn t h e ignit ion s wit ch t o ON (II), and rech eck t h e
audio-HVAC s ubdis playor t h e audio-HVAC dis play.
Are t he messages cleared?
YE S-Replacet h e original Hands FreeL ink cont rol unit
(s ee page23-281 ) .
NO-Replacet h e gaugecont rol module(s ee page
22-351 ) .
23-275
The HFL syst em does not r ecogni ze al l voi ce
pr ompt s
1. Connect t he HDS t o t he DL C (see page 23-252).
3. Tur n t he i gni ti on swi t c h to L OCK (0) and t hen back t o
ON (II).
Are t here any DTCs indicat ed?
YE S-Repair t h e indicat ed DTCs .H
NO-Go t o s t ep 5.
5. Ch eck t o s ee if you can duplicat e t h e cus t omer
complaint .
Can you duplicat e t he complaint ?
NO-Th e s ys t emis OK at t h is t ime. As k t h e cus t omer
t o demons t rat et h epr o b l em.
6. Ch eck if t h e navigat ion s ys t emcan recognizevoice
prompt s .
Can t he voice prompt s be recognized?
NO-Refer t o t h e navigat ion s ys t emt roubles h oot ing
(s ee page23-217)M
7. Pair t h e cus t omer's ph one t o aknown-good veh icle,
and t ry t o duplicat e t h e problem.
Can you duplicat e t he problem?
YE S-Call t h e HFL s upport des k at 888-528-7876, and
* inquireif t h ere are any known is s ues for t h e problem.
If t h ere are no known is s ues , explain t o t h e
cus t omer's t h is is a s ys t emch aract eris t ic and cannot
be improved at t h is t ime.B
NO-Subs t it ut e aknown-good front HFL -ANC
microph one (s ee page23-280). If t h e problems s t ill
pres ent , replacet h e Hands FreeL ink cont rol unit (s ee
page23-281). If t h e problem goes away, replacet h e
original front HFL -ANC microph one.
The HFL syst em i s l ocked and t he pass code
has been l ost or f orgot t en
3. Fromt h e Body E lect rical menu, s elect HF L INK / TE L .
4. Select Mis cellaneous Tes t s , t h en s elect Pas s code
res et .
5. Follow t h e HDS prompt s t o res et t h e pas s code.
23-276
The HFL messages cannot be hear d or ar e
weak
2. Ch eck t h at t h e audio s ys t emis operat ing normally
and t h e s peaker s ound levels fromdifferent audio
s ources (AM/ FM, XM, CD, navigat ion, et c.).
Does the audio system work normally and is the audio
output from the speaker normal when playing various
audio sources?
SMO-Refer t o t h e audio s ys t emSympt om
Troubles h oot ing.
ON (II).
6 . Ch eck for DTCs wit h t h e HDS.
Are there any DTCs indicated?
YE S-Repair t h e indicat ed DTCs .ll
NO-Go t o s t ep 7 .
7 . Pres s t h eHFL t alk but t on.
Does the audio system mute when HFL messages are
being played?
9. Dis connect audio unit connect or B (20P) and t h e
Hands FreeL ink cont rol unit 28P connect or.
unit 28P connect or t erminals No. 11 and No. 25 and
audio unit connect or B (20P) t erminals No. 19 and
No. 9 res pect ively.
HANDSF REELINK CONTROL UNIT 28P CONNECTOR
TELM S I G+ (GRN)
n f i
1 2 3
1 5 1 6 1 7 1 8
6 7 8
2 0 21
11 1 2 1 3 14
2 5 2 6 2 7 2 8
TELMS I G- ( RED) " p
TELM S I G - (RED)
11
1 3 1 4 1 5 1 6 1 7 1 8 1 9 20
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
10
TELM S I G+ (GRN)
AUDIO UNIT CONNECTOR B (20F )
Hands FreeL ink cont rol unit and t h e audio uni t.
Replacet h e affect ed s h ielded har nes s . El
11. Ch eck for cont inuit y bet ween body ground and audio
unit connect or B (20P) t erminals No. 19 and No. 9
individually.
TELM S I G- (RED)
n i - r
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
O
D
!

11
/
13 14 15 16 17 11
9 J10 j _
20
TELMS I G+ (GFiMj
Wire side of female t er mi nal s
YE S-Th ereis as h ort t o body ground in t h e wire(s )
audio unit . Replacet h e affect ed s h ielded h arnes s .
(cont 'd)
^-' 277
12. Ch eck for cont inuit y bet ween t h e t erminals of audio
unit connect or B (20P) according t o t h e t able.
f r om t er mi nal To t er mi nal
B19 B9, BIO
B9 B10
n
1
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
n
11 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Hands FreeL ink cont rol unit and t h e audio unit .
NO-Subs t it ut e aknown-good Hands FreeL ink cont rol
unit (s ee page23-281), and rech eck. If t h e s ympt om
* goes away, replacet h eoriginal Hands FreeL ink
cont rol unit . If t h e s ympt om does not go away,
replacet h e audio unit (s ee page23-114).
13. Pres s t h e HFL t alk but t on.
Does the audio-HVAC subdisplay the HFL menu and the
subdisplay show HandsFreeLink when pressing the HFL
talk button?
connect or and audio unit connect or B (20P).
unit 28P connect or t erminal No. 3 and audio unit
connect or B (20P) t erminal No. 20.
HF L MUTE (LTGRN)
1 2 3
/ /
6 7
8| / /
11 12 13 14
15 16 17 18 2 0 | 2 1 | / /
A/
25 26 27 28
f r f l
1 2 3 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 8 9 10
| 1 1 | / 13 14 15|16|17|18 19 20
HFL M1JTF M T rspsvn I
YE S-Go t o s t ep 16. .
NO-Repair an open in t h ewire bet ween t h e
Hands FreeL ink cont rol unit and t h e audio unit .H
Hands FreeL ink cont rol unit 28P connect or t erminal
No. 3.
HF L JV1 UTE (LT GRN)
i r , n
' 1 | 2 | 3 | / | / 6 | 7 | 8 \ / / ^ 1 l l l 2 | l 3 | ^
| 15| 16| 17| 18| / ' | 20| 21|/
/
|/
/
1/
/
| 25| 26| 27| 28
YE S-Repair as h ort t o body ground in t h ewire
audio unit .H
NO-Subs t it ut e aknown-good Hands FreeL ink cont rol
unit (s ee page23-281), and rech eck. If s ympt om goes
away, replacet h eoriginal Hands FreeL ink cont rol unit .
If t h e s ympt om does not go away, replacet h e audio
unit (s ee page23-114).
23-278
HFL Swi t c h Test
19. Di sconnect t h e HandsFr eeLi nk cont rol uni t 28P
connect or a n d t h e HFL - v o i c e cont rol swi t c h 5P
connect or .
20. Check for cont i nui t y bet ween HandsFr eeLi nk cont rol
u n i t 28P connect or t er mi nal No. 2 a n d HF L - v o i c e
cont rol swi t c h 5P c onnec t or t er mi nal No. 3.
HANDS FREEL I NK CONTROL UNIT 28P CONNECTOR
HFT STRG SW
6 | 7 | 8 | X
/ | 1 1 | 1 2 | 1 3 | 1 4 |
|15|16|17|18|/120|21L/|/|/125|26|27|28
c 0
1 2 3 4 5
HFL STRG SW (BLU)
HFL-VOI CE CONTROL SWI TCH 5P CONNECTOR
YE S-Do t h e HFL Swit ch Tes t (s ee page23-279). j
NO-Repair an open in t h e wire bet ween t h e
Hands FreeL ink cont rol unit and t h e HFL -voicecont rol
s wit ch .B
1. Removet h e driver's airbag (s ee page 24-211)
1 2 3 4 | 5
3. Meas uret h e res is t ancebet ween t erminals No. 3 and
No. 4 in each s wit ch pos it ion according t o t h e t able.
HFL-Voi c e Cont r ol S wi t c h
Posi t i on Resi st anc e
No but t ons pres s ed About 1 kQ
HFL TAL K but t on pres s ed About 185 Q
HFL BACK but t on pres s ed About 47 0
4. If t h e res is t ance is not as s pecified, replacet h e s wit ch
(s ee page17-7).
23-279
Front HFL-AIMG Mi crophone
Removal /i nst al l at i on
NOTE:
Take c ar e not t o scr at ch t he dashboar d and rel at ed
part s.
on t h emt o prot ect t h e facepanel from s crat ch es or
ot h er damage.
1. Removet h e roof cons ole (s ee page20-140), and
dis connect t h e connect or (A) fromt h e front HFL -ANC
microph one (B).
HFL Swi t c h Removal /Inst al l at i on
2. Removet h e HFL s wit ch (s ee page17-7).
3. Ins t all t h e HFL s wit ch in t h e revers eorder of removal.
2. Removet h e s crews and t h e front HFL -ANC
microph one.
3. Ins t all t h e microph one in t h e revers eorder of
removal.
23-280
Cont rol Uni t Input Test /Repl acement
2. Removet h e s crews , t h en dis connect t h e28P connect or (A) fromt h e Hands FreeL ink cont rol unit (B).
Wire side of
female terminals
3. Ins pect t h e connect or and s ocket t erminals for a good pinfit t o be s uret h ey areall making good cont act .
If t h e t erminals are bent , loos eor corroded, repair t h emas neces s ary, and rech eck t h e s ys t em.
If t h e t erminals look OK , go t o s t ep 4.
4. Reconnect t h e connect or, and make t h es einput t es t s at t h e connect or.
If any t es t indicat es aproblem, find and correct t h e caus e, t h en rech eck t h e s ys t em.
If all t h einput t es t s prove OK , go t o s t ep 5.
Cavi t y Wi r e Test condi t i on Test : Desi r ed r esul t Possi bl e c ause if res ult is
not obt ai ned
1 BL K Under all condit ions
Meas uret h e volt age t o body ground:
Th ere s h ould be les s t h an 0.5 V.
o Poor ground (G401)
o An open in t h e wire
15 WHT Under all condit ions
c 3<own No. 15 (10 A) fus e
in t h e under-h ood
fus e/ relay box
16 PUR
Ignit ion s wit ch in
ACCE SSORY (I) or ON
(ID
Blown No. 18 (7.5 A) fus e
in t h e driver's under-das h
fus e/ relay box
(cont 'd)
Control Uni t Input Test/Repl acement (cont'd)
5. Dis connect t h e 28P connect or again, and maket h is input t es t at t h e connect or.
If t h e t es t indicat es aproblem, find and correct t h e caus e, t h en rech eck t h e s ys t em.
If t h e input t es t proves OK , t h e Hands FreeL ink cont rol unit is fault y, replaceit .
Cavi t y Wire Tes t condit ion Test : Desi r ed r esul t Possi bl e c aus e if r esul t i s
not obt ai ned
17 BL U Under all condit ions
Ch eck for cont inuit y bet ween
t erminal No. 17 and t h e pas s enger's
under-das h fus e/ relay box connect or
A (38P) t erminal No. 29: Th ere s h ould
becont inuit y.
Pas s enger's
b o x connect or A (38P)
dis connect ed
Ch eck for cont inuit y t o body ground:
Th ere s h ould be no cont inuit y.
Sh ort t o body ground
18 PNK Under all condit ions
Ch eck for cont inuit y bet ween
t erminal No. 18 and t h e pas s enger's
under-das h fus e/ relay box connect or
A (38P) t e r m i n a l M ~ 11: Th ereG h C u i J
becont inuit y.
Pas s enger's
dis connect ed
Ch eck for cont inuit y t o body ground:
Th ere s h ould beno cont inuit y.
Sh ort t o body ground
23-282
Restraints
R es tr ai nts
S pec i al Tool s -24-2
S eat B ei ts
* Fr ont S eat Bel t Replacement, .. 24-5
Rear Seat Belt Replacement 24- 16
i ns pec t i o n. 24-18
S RS (Suppl ement al Rest rai nt Syst em)
Component Location I ndex. . . . . 24- 21
P recautions and P rocedures 24-25
General Troubleshooting I nformation 24-36
SRS Unit Update .24-39
ODS Unit Initialization 24-40
ODS Unit Operation Check 24-41
F ront Passenger's Wei ght Sensor Output Check After
a Vehicle Collision . . 24- 42
Driver's Seat P osition Sensor Operation Check 24-43
DTC Troubleshooting I ndex 24- 44
S ymptom Troubleshooting I ndex. 24-51
System Description . 24-52
Ci r c ui t Diagram 24-59
DTC Troubl eshooti ng. 24- 65
S ymptom Troubleshooting 24-205
Component Replacement/I nspection After
Depl oyment. 24-208
Driver's Airbag Replacement 24-211
F ront Passenger's Airbag Replacement .24-212
Side Airbag Replacement. 24-215
Side Curtain Airbag Replacement 24-216
Airbag and Tensioner Disposal 24-222
Cable Reel Replacement 24-225
SRS Unit Replacement .24-228
Side I mpact Sensor (F irst) Replacement 24-230
S i d e I mpact Sensor (Second) Replacement 24-232
Rear Safing Sensor Replacement .24-234
F ront Passenger's Wei ght Sensor Repl acement. . . . . . 24-235
ODS Unit Replacement 24-237
F ront I mpact Sensor Replacement 24-238
Driver's Seat Position Sensor Replacement 24-239
Passenger's Airbag Cutoff Indicator Replacement. .. .24-241
Rest rai nt s
Speci al Tool s
Ref.No. To o l Number Des cript ion Qt y
070AZ -SAA0100 SRS Sh ort Canceller 1
070AZ -SNAA100 SRS Simulat or L ead J 1
070AZ -SNAA200 SRS Simulat or L ead K 1
070AZ -SNAA300 SRS Simulat or L ead L 1
07HAZ -SG00500 Deployment Tool 1
07SAZ -TB4011A SRSInflat or Simulat or 1
07TAZ -001020A Back Probe Adapt er, 17 mm 1

24-2
Seat Bei t s
2-door
F RONT SEAT BELT BUCK LES
Replacement , page24- 7
24-3
Seat Bei t s
4-door
SHOULDER ANCHOR ADJ USTER
FRONT SEAT BELT BUCKLES
24-4
Front Seat Belt Repl acement
Front Seat Bel t - 2-door
NOTE:
If r epl aci ng t he front seat bel t s after depl oyment , refer
to Component Repl acement /Inspect i on After
Depl oyment (see page 24-208) f or a compl et e l i st of
ot her part s t hat must al so be r epl aced.
Chec k t he f ront seat bel t s f or damage (see page 24-18),
and r epl ace t hem if nec essar y.
The dr i ver ' s seat i s s hown; t he passenger ' s seat i s
si mi l ar .
1. Sl i de t he f ront seat f or war d f ul l y.
2. Dr i ver ' s seat belt: Remove t he l ower anc hor c ap (A),
and r emove t he l ower anchor bolt (B).
3. Passenger ' s seat belt: Car ef ul l y i nser t t he ti p of a
smal l sc r ewdr i ver (A) t hr ough t he hol e i n t he back of
t he f ront seat belt l ower anc hor c over (B), and into t he
hol e i n t he f ront seat belt l ower anc hor (C). Unl ock t he
l ower anc hor by pushi ng i n on t he sc r ewdr i ver .
Remove t he sc r ewdr i ver , and t hen det ach t he front
seat bel t anc hor pl at e (D) and t he anc hor c over f r om
t he l ower anc hor .
c
begi nni ng wor k.
Rear si de t ri m panel (see page 20-127)
6. Remove t he bolts (A), t hen r emove t he seat belt gui de
(B).
9.8 N-m
(1.0 k g f m, 7.2 Ibf ft)
(cont ' d)
24-5
Seat Bel t s
Front Seat Belt Repl acement { c o n t ' d )
7. Remove t he upper anc hor bolt (A).
A
7/16-20 UNF
32 N-m
(3.3 kgf -m, 24 Ibfft )
8. Di sconnect t he seat belt t ensi oner connect or (A).
Remove t he upper ret ract or mount i ng bolt (B) and t he
l ower ret ract or bolt (C), t hen r emove t he f ront seat
belt (D) and t he ret ract or (E ).
B
6 x 1.0 mm
S.8 N-m
(1.0 kgf m,
7.2 I bfft)
7/16-2 UNF
32 N-m
9. Ins t all t h e s eat belt in t h e revers eorder of removal,
and not e t h es eit ems :
Apply mediums t rengt h liquid t h read lock t o t h e
upper anch or bolt s beforereins t allat ion.
Tigh t en t h e bolt s by h and firs t , t h en t igh t en t o t h e
s pecified t orque.
Ch eck t h at t h e ret ract or locking mech anis m
funct ions (s ee page24-18).
As s emblet h e was h ers , t h e collars , and t h e
bus h ings on t h e upper and lower anch or bolt s as
s h own.
Beforeins t alling t h e anch or bolt s , make s uret h ere
are no t wis t s or kinks in t h e s eat belt .
Make s uret h e s eat belt t ens ioner connect or is
plugged in properly.
Pas s enger's s eat belt : Triangle marks (A) on t h e
anchor plate (B) and on t he l ower anch or (C) mus t
facet h e s ames ide.
Pas s enger's s eat belt : Ins ert t h e h ook on t h e anch or
plat eint o t h e lower anch or, and be s uret h at t h e
lower anch or is locked s ecurely.
Do t h e bat t ery t erminal reconnect ion procedure
(s ee page22-91).
Upper anc hor bolt installation
UPPER ANCHOR
BUSHING \ COLLAR
UPPER ANCHOR
BOLT
Apply thread Sock.
Lower anchor bolt installation
WAVE WASHER
TOOTHED
LOCK WASHER
SPRING WASHER
BUSHING
COLLAR / COLLAR
LOWER ANCHOR
BOLT
WASHER
LOWER ANCHOR
TOOTHED
LOCK WASHER
24-6
i nst al l at i on
Front Seat Bel t Buckl e - 2-door
NOTE:
begi nni ng wor k.
3. Lift up t he f ront seat , t hen det ach t he seat belt buckl e
swi t ch connect er cl i p (A), and det ach t he har ness cl i ps
( B) .
Dr i ver ' s s eat (10-way power seat )
(cont ' d)
24-7
Seat Bel t s
Front Seat Belt Repl acement (cont' d)
24-8
Passenger ' s seat
B
A
7/16-20 UNF
32 N-m
(3.3 k g f m,
24 Ibf-ft)
5. Pas s enger's s eat : Releas et h e h ook s t rip (D), and pull
back t h e s eat cus h ion cover.
6. Pull out t h e s eat belt buckles wit ch h arnes s (E )
t h rough t h e s pacebet ween t h e s eat cus h ion and t h e
s eat t rack (driver's s eat ), or t h rough t h e h olein t h e
s eat t rack (pas s enger's s eat ).
7. Ins t all t h e bucklein t h e revers eorder of removal, and
not e t h es eit ems :
As s emblet h e was h ers and t h e collar on t h e cent er
anch or bolt as s h own.
cent er anch or bolt beforereins t allat ion.
s pecified t orque.
Make s uret h e s eat belt buckles wit ch connect or is
(s ee page22-91).
Cent er anc hor bol t i nst al l at i on
L OCATI ON PLATE
WA VE WAS HER
SPRI NG
WAS HER
CENTER ANCHOR
*
O L
J + u . CENTER ANCHOR
Apply thread lock.
TOOTHED
L OCK WAS HER
(cont 'd)
24-9
Seat Belts
Front Seat ielt Replacement (cont'd)
Passenger ' s Seat Bel t Lower Anchor - 2-door
NOTE:
1. Remove t he door si l l t ri m (see page 20-105).
2. Det ach t he f ront passenger ' s seat belt anc hor pl at e
and t he anc hor c over f r om t he t ower anc hor .
3. Remove t he l ower anc hor bolt (A), t hen r emove t he
l ower anc hor (B).
A
7/16-20 UNF
32 N- m
4. Inst al l t he l ower anc hor in t he r ever se or der of
As s embl e t he was her s , t he c ol l ar s, and t he bushi ng
on t he l ower anc hor bolt as s hown.
l ower anc hor bolt bef ore r ei nst al l at i on.
L ower anc hor bol t i nst al l at i on
TOOTHED BUSHING
LOWER ANCHOR Apply t h read lock.
Fr ont Seat Bel t - 4-door -
SRS c omponent l ocat i ons (see page 24-21) and t he
NOTE:
If r epl aci ng t he f ront seat bel t s after depl oyment , ref er
to Component Repl acement /Inspect i on After
Depl oyment (see page 24-208)for a compl et e li st of
ot her part s that must al so be r epl ac ed.
Chec k t he front seat bel t s f or damage (see page 24-18),
and r epl ace t hem if nec essar y.
The drivci'o la s h own; t h epassenger ' s seat i s
si mi l ar .
24-10
1. Sl i de t he f ront seat all t he way f or war d. Car ef ul l y pry
up on t h ebot t omof t h e anch or cover (A) at t h e pry
point (B) wit h t h e appropriat et rimt ool t o releas et h e
h ooks (C) and t h e t ab (D), t h en removet h e cover by
pulling it upward.
Driver's s eat
C
Pas s enger's s eat
A C
2. Removet h e lower anch or bolt (A).
7/16-20 UNF
32 Nm(3.3 kgf-m, 24 I bfft)
3. Do t h e bat t ery t erminal dis connect ion procedure (s ee
page22-91), t h en wait at leas t 3 minut es before
beginning work.
4. Removet h e B-pillar upper/ lower t rim (s ee page
20-116).
5. Removet h e upper anch or bolt (A).
(cont 'd)
24-11
Seat Bel t s
Front Seat Bei t Repl acement (cont' d)
6. Di sconnect the seat belt tens i oner connector (A).
R emove the upper retractor mounti ng bol t (B ) a n d the
l ower retractor bol t (C), then remove the front seat
bel t (D) and the retractor (E).
Dr i ver ' s si de
E
7/16-20 UNF
32 N m (3.3 k g f m, 24 Ibf f t )
Passenger ' s si de
7/16-20 UNF
32 N m
(3 3 k g f m, 24 Ibf f t )
7. R emove the s houl der anchor adj uster (A).
24-12
8. Install t he seat belt in t he r ever se or der of r emoval ,
upper anch or bolt s beforereins t allat ion.
s pecified t orque.
Ch eck t h at t h e ret ract or locking mech anis m
funct ions (s ee page24-18).
As s emblet h e was h er, t h e collars , and t h e bus h ing
on t h e upper anch or bolt and t h e lower ret ract or
bolt as s h own.
Beforeins t alling t h e anch or bolt s , make s uret h ere
are no t wis t s or kinks in t h e s eat belt .
Make s uret h e s eat belt t ens ioner connect or is
(s ee page22-91).
Upper anchor bol t i nst al l at i on
BUSHI NG UPPER ANCHOR COL L AR
Apply thread lock.
L 0 C K
WAS HER
L ower r et r act or bol t i nst al l at i on
L OWER RETRACTOR 1QOTHED
BOL T L OCK WAS HER
Front Seat Bel t Buckl e - 4-door
SRS component s are locat ed in t h is area. Review t h e
SRS component locat ions (s ee page 24-21) and t h e
precaut ions and procedures (s ee page 24-25) before
doing repairs or s ervice.
NOTE :
Put on gloves t o prot ect your h ands .
Take carenot t o t ear or damaget h e s eat covers .
1. Do t h e bat t ery t erminal dis connect ion procedure (s ee
page22-91), t h en wait at leas t 3 minut es before
beginning work.
2. Removet h e front s eat (s ee page20-194).
3. L ift up t h e front s eat , t h en det ach t h e s eat belt buckle
s wit ch connect er clip (A), and det ach t h e h arnes s
clips (B) and t h e h arnes s h older (C) (pas s enger's s eat ).
A
B
(cont 'd)
24-13
Seat Bei t s
Front Seat Belt Repl acement (cont' d)
Driver's seat (manual hei ght adj ust abl e seat )
B
Passenger ' s s e at
4. Remove t he cent er anc hor bolt (A), and det ach t he
h arnes s clips (B), t h en removet h e s eat belt buckle(C).
24-14
Passenger ' s s eat .
A
7/16-20 UNF
32 N-m
(3.3 k g f m,
... 24 Ibf f t )
5. Pul l out t he seat bel t buckl e swi t c h har ness (D)
t hr ough t he spac e bet ween t he seat c ushi on and t he
seat t rack.
6. Inst al l t he buckl e in t he r ever se order of removal, and
not e t hese i t ems;
As s embl e t he was her s and t he col l ar on t he cent er
anc hor bolt as s hown.
Appl y medi um s t rengt h -liquid t h read lock t o t h e
cent er anc hor bolt bef ore r ei nst al l at i on.
Ti ght en t he bol t s by hand f i rst , t h en t i ght en t o t h e
Make sur e t he seat belt buckl e swi t c h connect or i s
pl ugged in properl y.
(s ee page22-91).
Center .anchor bolt'installation (driver's seat)
CENTER ANCHOR
WA VE WAS HER
S PRI NG
WAS HER
CENTER ANCHOR
BOL T
Apply thread lock.
TOOTHED
L OCK WAS HER
COL L AR
Cent er anch or bolt ins t allat ion (pas s enger's s eat )
S PRI NG WAS HER
WAVE WAS HER
CENTER ANCHOR
BOL T
Apply thread lock.
TOOTHED
L OCK WAS HER
CENTER ANCHOR
24-15
Seat Bel t s
Rear Seat Belt Replacement
Rear Seat Bei t
NOTE :
Put on gloves t o prot ect your h ands .
Take carenot t o t ear or damaget h e s eat covers .
Ch eck t h e rear s eat belt s for damage (s ee page24-18),
and replacet h emif neces s ary.
1. Removet h e rear s eat cus h ion (s ee page20-241).
2. Removet h e lower anch or bolt (A).
3. Remove t h es eit ems :
2-door:
- Rear s eat -back (s ee page20-239)
- C-pillar t ri m, bot h s ides (s ee page20-119)
- Rear s h elf (s ee page20-128)
- Rear s idet rim panel (s ee page20-127)
4 door:
- Rear s eat s idebols t ers , bot h s ides (s ee page
20-242)
- C-pillar t ri m, bot h s ides (s ee page20-123)
- Rear s h elf (s ee page20-128)
4.2-door: Removet h e s idecurt ain airbag mount ing
bolt s (A) and det ach t h e clips (B), t h en carefully move
t h e s idecurt ain airbag (C) as idet o gain acces s t o t h e
ret ract or bolt (D).
F astener Locations
A : Bolt , 2 B >: Clip, 2
24-16
5. Remove t he retractor mount i ng bolt (A) and t he
ret ract or bolt (B), t hen r emove t he rear seat belt (C)
and t he ret ract or (D). 4-door i s s hown; 2-door i s
si mi l ar .
B
7/16-20 UNF
32 N-m
A'
6x 1. 0 mm
9.8 N-m (1.0 kgf -m, 7.2 Ibf-ft)
6. Install t he seat belt and t he ret ract or in t he r ever se
l ower anchor bolt bef ore r ei nst al l at i on.
2-door: Repl ace t he r emoved si de cur t ai n ai r bag
mount i ng bolts wi t h new ones.
Check that t he retractor l ocki ng mec hani sm
f unct i ons (see page 24-18).
Bef ore i nst al l i ng t he anc hor bolt, make sur e t her e
Cent er Seat Bel t and Seat Bel t Buc kl es
NOTE:
Check t he cent er seat bel t s f or damage (see page
24-18), and r epl ace t hem if nec essar y.
2. Remove t he cent er anc hor bol t s (A), t hen r emove t he
ri ght seat belt buckl e (B), t he cent er seat belt buckl e
(C), and t he left seat belt buckl e (D).
A
7/16-20 UNF
32 N-m (3.3 kgf -m, 24 Ibf-ft)
3. Fol d down t he rear seat -back.
4. Pull out t he cent er seat belt t hr ough t he sl i t i n t he seat
belt gui de.
2-door: Rear shel f (see page 20-128)
4-door:
- Rear seat si de bol st er s, both si des (see page
20-242)
- C-pi l l ar t r i m, both si des (see page 20-123)
- Rear shel f (see page 20-128)
(cont ' d)
24-17
Seat Bel t s
Rear Seat Bel t Repl acement
(cont' d)
6. Remove t he ret ract or mount i ng t appi ng s c r ew (A) and
t he ret ract or bolt (B), t hen r emove t he cent er seat belt
(C) and t he ret ract or (D). 4-door i s s hown; 2-door i s
si mi l ar .
B
7/16-20 UNF
32 N-m
(3
Inspect i on
A
4 N-m
(0.4 k g f m, 3 Ibf f t )
7. Install t he seat belt and t he buckl es in t he r ever se
Appl y medi um st r engt h l i qui d t hr ead lock t o t he
cent er anc hor bol t s bef ore r ei nst al l at i on.
Ti ght en t he bol t s by hand f i rst , t hen t i ght en to t he
Chec k t hat t he ret ract or l ocki ng mec hani sm
f unct i ons (see page 24-18).
Assembl e t he washer on t he cent er anc hor bolt as
shown.
Bef ore i nst al l i ng t he cent er anc hor bolt, make sur e
t here are no t wi st s or ki nks i n t he seat belt.
Cent er anc hor bol t i nst al l at i on
CENTER ANCHOR
(CENTER S E A T BE L T or
CENTER S E A T BEL T
BUCK L E)
CENTER ANCHOR
BOL T
Apply t h read lock.
CENTER ANCHOR
(RIGHT S E A T BE L T
BUCK L E or L EFT S E A T
BE L T BUCK L E)
TOOTHED L OCK
WAS HER
Out of Vehi c l e
For f ront seat belt ret ract ors wi t h seat belt t ensi oner s,
r evi ew t he SRS c omponent l ocat i ons, 2-door (see page
24-23), 4-door (see page 24-21) and t he pr ecaut i ons and
ser vi c e.
Ret r act or
1. Bef or e i nst al l i ng t he ret ract or, check that t he seat belt
c an be pul l ed out f r eel y.
2. Make sur e t hat t he seat belt does not lock when t he
ret ract or (A) i s l eaned sl owl y up to 15 f r om t he
mount ed posi t i on. The seat belt shoul d lock when t he
ret ract or i s l eaned over 40 . Do not attempt to
di sassembl e t he ret ract or.
2-door driver's side
Insi de
2-door passenger's si de
Fr ont
Insi de Fr ont
24-18
4-door drawer's s ide
Ins ide Front
4-door passenger ' s si de
Ins ide Front
Rear
3. Repl ac e t he seat belt wi t h a new assembl y if t here i s
any abnor mal i t y. Do not di sassembl e any part of t he
seat bel t f or any r eason.
(cont 'd)
24-19
Seat Bei t s
Inspect i on (cont'd)
In-vehi cl e
1. Chec k t hat t he seat belt Is not t wi st ed or caught on
anyt h ing.
2. Af t er Inst al l i ng t he anc hor s, c hec k f or f r ee movement
on t he anc hor bol t s. If nec essar y, r emove t he anc hor
bol t s, and c hec k that t he was her s and ot her part s ar e
not damaged or improperly ins t alled.
3. Chec k t he seat belts for damage or di scol or at i on.
Cl ean wi t h a shop t owel If nec essar y. Us e onl y soap
and wat er to c l ean t he seat bel t s.
NOTE : Dirt build-up in t h e loops of t h e upper anch ors
can caus et h e s eat belt s t o ret ract s lowly. Wipe t h e
ins ideof t h e loops wit h as h op t owel dampened in
is opropyl alcoh ol.
4 Chec k t hat t he seat belt does not lock wh en pulled out
s lowly. Th e s eat belt is des igned t o lock only during a
s udden s t op or impact .
5. Make s uret h at t h e s eat belt will ret ract aut omat ically
wh en releas ed.
6. For each pas s enger's s eat belt , ch eck t h e s eat belt
ret ract or locking aut omat ic locking ret ract or (AL R)
mech anis m. Th is funct ion is for s ecuring ch ild s eat s .
-1. Pull t h e s eat belt all t h e way out t o engaget h e AL R.
Th e s eat belt s h ould ret ract wit h arat ch et ing s ound,
but not ext end. Th is is normal.
-2. To dis engaget h e AL R, releas et h e s eat belt and
allow it t o fully ret ract , t h en pull t h e s eat belt out
part -way. Th e s eat belt s h ould ret ract and ext end
normally.
7. Replacet h e s eat belt wit h anew as s embly if t h ere is
any abnormalit y. Do not dis as s embleany part of t h e
s eat belt for any reas on. .
24-20
S RS (Supplemental Restrai nt Sf st em)
4-Door
, DRI VER' S AI RBAG
Disposal, page 24-222
S I DE AI RBAG CUTOFF INDICATOR
Tr oubl eshoot i ng, page 24-206 p INDICATOR
Tr oubl eshoot i ng, page 24-205/
(
US A Canada>
model s model s
A
H
G
/M
t
PA S S E NGE R' S AI RBAG
CUTOFF INDICATOR
' US A CanadaV
model s model s \
PASSENGER / @f- 1
AIRBAG / ^2 I
I O F F I / ( OFF) J
. FRONT PA S S E NGE R' S
AI RBAG
Di sposal , page 24-222
, ODS UNIT
Ini t i al i zat i on, page 24-40
Oper at i on Chec k, page 24-41
CABL E RE E L
, OPDS S E NS OR/
S EAT- BACK
COVER/ PAD
. FRONT PA S S E NGE RS
S I DE AI RBAG
S E A T B E L T TENS I ONER
Repl acement , page 24-10
RIGHT S I DE
IMPACT S E NS OR (FIRST)
WEIGHT S E NS ORS
Oper at i on Chec k, page 24-42
S RS UNIT
DATA LINK
CONNECTOR (DLC)
DRI VER' S S E A T POSITION S E NS OR
Oper at i on, page 24-43
DRI VER' S S E A T BEL T TENS I ONER
DRI VER' S S I DE AI RBAG \ Disposal, page 24-222
Repl ac ement , page 24-215 L EFT S I DE IMPACT S ENS OR
Di sposal , page 24-222 (FIRST)
(cont 'd)
24-21
S RS (Supplemental Rest rai nt Syst em)
Component LocationIndex{cont'd}
4-Door
24-22
2-Door
S I DE AI RBAG CUTOFF INDICATOR
Troubleshooting, page 24-206 SRS INDICATOR
Troubleshooting, page 24-205 /
r
USA Canad a*
models models
SIDE / $ *
AI RBAG /
O F F / ' O *
CABL E RE E L
, DRI VE RS AI RBAG
PA S S E NGE R' S AI RBAG
CUTOFF INDICATOR
USA CanadaX
models models \
PASSENGER / f|- 1
A I R B A G / ^2 I
> FRONT PA S S E NGE R' S AI RBAG
ODS UNIT
Initialization, page 24-40
Operation Check, page 24-41
OPDS S E NS OR/
S EAT- BACK
COVER/PAD
S I DE AI RBAG
S E A T BEL T TENS I ONER
RIGHT SI DE
IMPACT S ENS OR
(FIRST)
FRONT PAS S E NGE R' S
WEI GHT S E NS ORS
Operation Check, page 24-42
DRI VER' S S E A T POSITION S E NS OR
Operation, page 24-43
S RS UNIT
Update, page 24-39
DRI VER' S S I DE AI RBAG
DATA LINK
CONNECTOR (DLC)
L EFT S I DE DRI VER' S S E A T BEL T TENS I ONER
IMPACT S E NS OR Replacement, page 24-5
(FIRST) Disposal, page 24-222
(cont 'd)
24-23
S RS (Supplemental Rest rai nt S f st em)
2-Door
RE AR SAF ING SE NSOR
24-24
Precautions and Procedures
Gener al Pr ecaut i ons
NOTE: Some syst ems st or e dat a i n memor y t hat i s lost
when t he battery i s di sc onnec t ed. Bef or e di sconnect i ng
t he bat t ery, refer to Bat t ery Ter mi nal Di sconnect i on and
Reconnect i on (see page 22-91)<
Pl ease read t he f ol l owi ng pr ecaut i ons car ef ul l y bef ore
ser vi ci ng t he ai r bag syst em. Obser ve t he i nst r uct i ons
desc r i bed in t hi s manual , or t he ai r bags coul d
acci dent al l y depl oy and c ause damage or i nj ur i es.
Exc ept when doi ng el ect ri cal i nspect i ons t hat r equi r es
battery power , al ways t urn t he i gni t i on swi t c h t o L OCK
(0), di sconnect t he negat i ve cabl e f r om t he bat t ery,
t hen wai t at l east 3 mi nut es bef ore st art i ng wor k.
NOTE: The S RS memor y i s not er ased even if t he
i gni ti on swi t ch i s t ur ned to L OCK (0) or t he battery
c abl es are di sconnect ed f rom t he bat t ery.
Us e r epl acement part s whi c h ar e manuf act ur ed to t he
s ame st andar ds and qual i t y as t he ori gi nal par t s. Do
not i nst al l used S RS part s. Us e onl y new part s when
maki ng S RS r epai r s.
Car ef ul l y i nspect any S RS part bef ore you i nst al l it.
Do not i nst al l any part that s hows si gns of bei ng
dr opped or i mpr oper l y handl ed, suc h as dent s, c r ac ks
or def or mat i on.
St eer i ng-Rel at ed Pr ecaut i ons
Cable Reel Alignment
Mi sal i gnment of t he c abl e reel coul d c aus e an open i n
t he wi r i ng, maki ng t he S RS s y s t em, r emot e st eer i ng
wheel cont r ol s, or t he horn i noper at i ve. Cent er t he
cabl e reel whenever you do t he f ol l owi ng (see st ep 6
on page 24-227).
- Inst al l at i on of t he st eer i ng wheel
- Inst al l at i on of t he c abl e reel
- Inst al l at i on of t he st eer i ng c ol umn
- Ot her st eer i ng-r el at ed adj ust ment or i nst al l at i on
Do not di sassembl e t he cabl e r eel .
Do not appl y gr ease to t he c abl e r eel .
If t he c abl e reel s hows any si gns of damage, r epl ace it
wi t h a new one. For exampl e, if t he c abl e reel does not
rotate smoot hl y, r epl ace it.
Bef ore di sconnect i ng t he S RS uni t c onnec t or s, al ways
di sc onnec t t he appr opr i at e S RS part s c onnec t or s.
Us e onl y a di gi tal mul t i met er to c hec k t he syst em. If it
i s not a Honda mul t i met er, make sur e i ts out put i s
10 mA (0.01 A) or l ess when swi t c hed to t he l owest
val ue in t he ohmmet er r ange. A t est er wi t h a hi gher
output coul d c ause acci dent al depl oyment and
possi bl e i nj ury.
Do not put obj ect s on t he front passenger ' s ai r bag.
(cont ' d)
24-25
Precautions and Procedures (cont'd)
Ai r bag Handl i ng and St or age
Do not disassemble an airbag. It has no serviceable
parts. Once an airbag has been deployed, it cannot be
repaired or reused.
For temporary storage of an airbag during servi ce,
observe the following precautions.
Store the removed airbag with the pad surface up.
Never put anything on the airbag.
To prevent damage to the airbag, keep it away from
any oi l, grease, detergent, or water.
Store the removed airbag on a secure, flat surface
away from any high heat source (exceeding 200 F/
93 C).
Never do electrical tests on the airbags, such as
measuring resistance.
Do not position yourself in front of the airbag during
removal, inspection, or replacement.
For proper disposal of a damaged airbag, refer to
airbag disposal (see page 24-222).
The side curtain airbag module assembly is a long,
jointed part containing an inflator (A), a flexible bag
(B), and brackets (C). When removing or installing the
side curtain airbag assembly, never:
- Handle the flexible bag.
- Drop the airbag assembly.
- Cut, tear, or unwrap the tape strips.
4-Door
2-Door
24-26
SRS' Uni t , Fr ont and Si de i mpact Sensor s,
Rear Saf i ng Sensor , Dri ver' s Seat Posi t i on
Sensor , and Front Passenger ' s Wei ght
Sensor s
NOTE: Some syst ems st or e dat a in memor y that i s lost
when t he battery i s di sc onnec t ed. Bef or e di sconnect i ng
t he battery, refer t o Battery Ter mi nal Di sconnect i on and
Reconnect i on (see page 22-91).
Tur n t he i gni ti on swi t c h to L OCK (0), di sconnect t he
negat i ve cabl e f r om t he battery, t hen wai t at l east 3
mi nut es bef ore st art i ng i nst al l at i on or r epl acement of
t he S RS uni t or di sconnect i ng t he connect or s f r om t he
S RS uni t.
Be caref ul not to bump or i mpact t he S RS uni t, t he
front i mpact s ens or s , t he si de i mpact s ens or s , or t he
rear saf i ng sensor when t he i gni ti on swi t ch i s in ON
(II), or for at l east 3 mi nut es after t he i gni ti on swi t ch i s
t ur ned to L OCK (0).
Duri ng i nst al l at i on or r epl acement , be caref ul not to
bump (by i mpact wr enc h, hammer , etc.) t he ar ea
ar ound t he S RS uni t , t he front i mpact s ens or s , t he si de
i mpact s ens or s , or t he rear saf i ng sensor . The ai r bags
coul d acci dent al l y depl oy and c ause damage or i nj ury.
After a col l i si on wher e t he f ront ai r bags, t he si de
ai r bags, t he si de cur t ai n ai r bags, or t he seat belt
t ensi oner s depl oy, go t o Component
Repl acement /Inspect i on after Depl oyment (see page
24-208). Af t er a col l i si on wher e t he ai r bags or t he si de
ai r bags do not depl oy, i nspect f or any damage or any
def or mat i on on t he S RS uni t , t he f ront i mpact s ens or s ,
t he r ear saf i ng s ens or , and t he si de i mpact s ens or s .
Al s o, do t he f ront seat act i ve head rest rai nt i nspect i on
(see page 20-193). Repl ac e all damaged part s.
Do not di sassembl e t he S RS uni t , t he f ront i mpact
s ens or s , t he si de i mpact sensor s, t he rear saf i ng
sensor , t he dr i ver ' s seat posi t i on sensor , or t he front
passenger ' s wei ght s ens or s .
Al way i nst al l t he S RS uni t , t he dr i ver ' s seat posi t i on
sensor , all i mpact s ens or s , and t he r ear saf i ng sensor
sec ur el y wi t h new TORX bol t s t or qued to 9.8 N-m (1.0
k gf m, 7.2 Ibf-ft).
Do not spi l l wat er or oi l on t he S RS uni t or any of t he
s ens or s .
(cont' d)
24-27
S I S (Supplemental Restraint Sf stem)
Precaut i ons and Procedures (cont' d)
Wi ri ng Precaut ions
S o me of t he S RS wi r i ng c an be i dent i f i ed by a spec i al
yel l ow out er c over i ng and t he S RS c onnec t or s c an be
i dent i f i ed by t hei r yel l ow col or . Obser ve t he f ol l owi ng
i nst r uct i ons,
Never at t empt to modi f y, spl i c e, or r epai r S RS wi r i ng.
If t her e i s an open or damage t o t he S RS wi r i ng,
r epl ace t he har ness.
Be sur e to i nst al l t he har ness wi r es s o t hey do not get
pi nched or i nt erf ere wi t h ot her par t s.
Make sur e all S RS gr ound l ocat i ons ar e c l ean, and t he
gr ounds ar e sec ur el y f ast ened f or opt i mum
met al -t o-met al cont act . Poor gr ounds c an c ause
i nt ermi t t ent pr obl ems that ar e di ffi cult to di agnose.
Do not use any si l i c one based c l eaner s or l ubr i cant s
on any S RS c onnec t or s or t er mi nal s.
Precaut ions for E lect rical Ins pect ions
Back Probe Adapt er , 17 mm 07TAZ-001020A
Make sur e t he battery i s f ully c har ged when doi ng
el ect ri cal t est . If t he battery i s not f ul l y c har ged, t h e
r esul t s of t he t est s may not be accur at e.
When usi ng el ect ri cal t est equi pment , i nser t t he probe
of t he t est er into t he wi r e si de of t he connect or {except
wat er proof connect or ). Do not i nsert t he probe of t he
t est er i nto t he t er mi nal si de of t he connect or , and do
not t amper wi t h t he connect or .
Use t he back pr obe adapt or , 17 mm (07TAZ-001020A).
Do not i nser t t he probe f orci bl y.
Us e speci f i ed ser vi c e connect or s i n t r oubl eshoot i ng.
Usi ng i mpr oper t ool s coul d c ause a di agnost i c error
due to poor met al -t o-met al cont act .
24-28
S RS Uni t Connect or s
Wh en diagnos ing or t roubles h oot ing at an SRS unit
connect or (A), us e t h et erminal t es t port below t h e
t erminal you need t o ch eck. Gent ly ins ert t h epin probes
of t h e t es t er or jumper wire at t h et erminal t es t port from
t h et erminal s ide.
S RS
shor t c anc el l er
t er mi nal por t
Ter mi nal -Do
not pr obe.
Ter mi nal
t es t por t
NOTE :
Do not ins ert t h epin probes of t h e t es t er or ajumper
wire at t h et erminal port or t h e SRS s h ort canceller
t erminal port .
To prevent damaget o t h e connect or t erminals , do not
ins ert t h e t es t equipment probes , paper clips , or ot h er
s ubs t it ut es as t h ey can damaget h e t erminals .
Damaged t erminals caus eapoor connect ion and an
incorrect meas urement .
Wat er Proof S RS Connect or s
Wh en diagnos is / t roubles h oot ing is doneat wat er proof
connect or (A), us e t h et erminal t es t port abovet h e
t erminal you need t o ch eck. Gent ly cont act t h epin probe
of t h e t es t er or jumper wire at t h et erminal t es t port from
t h et erminal s ide.
Ter mi nal
t es t por t
Ter mi nai -Do
not pr obe.
NOTE :
Do not ins ert t h epin probes of t h e t es t er or ajumper
wireint o t h et erminal port .
To prevent damaget o t h e connect or t erminals , do not
ins ert t h e t es t equipment probes , paper clips , or ot h er
s ubs t it ut es as t h ey can damaget h e t erminals .
Damaged t erminals can caus eapoor connect ion and
an incorrect meas urement .
(cont 'd)
24-29
SRS (Supplemental Rest rai nt S f st em)
Lever -Looked Connector
The SRS unit connectors have a lever lock.
SRSUni t Connectors
Di sc onnec t i ng
To release the lock, pull the lever (A) whi l e pushing the
lock (B) on t h e out s ideof t h e connect or, t h en pull out t h e
connect or (C).
Connecting
To reconnect t h e connect or, pus h in on t h e connect or
(A). As t h e connect or is pres s ed in, t h e lever (B) moves t o
t h e locked pos it ion.
24- 30
Spring-loaded Lock Connector
S o me S RS connectors have a spring-loaded lock.
Fr ont Ai r bag Connec t or s
Di sc onnec t i ng
To release t he lock, pull t he spring-loaded sl eeve (A)
toward the stop (B) while holding the opposite half of the
connector, then pull t he connector halves apart. Be sur e
to pull on t he sleeve and not on t he connector.
Connec t i ng
To r econnect , hol d t he pawl -si de connect or , and pr ess
on t he back of t he sl eeve-si de connect or i n t he di rect i on
s h own. As t h e t wo connect or h alves are pres s ed
t oget h er, t h e s leeve(A) is pus h ed back by t h e pawl (B).
Do not t ouch t h e s leeve.
Si de Ai r bag Connec t or
Di sc onnec t i ng
To releas et h e lock, pull t h e s pring-loaded s leeve(A)
t oward t h e s t op (B) wh ile h olding t h e oppos it eh alf of t h e
connect or, t h en pull t h e connect or h alves apart . Be s ure
t o pull on t h e s leeveand not on t h e connect or h alf.
Connec t i ng
Hold bot h connect or h alves , and pres s t h emfirmly
t oget h er unt il t h e project ion (A) of t h e s leeve-s ide
connect or clicks .
(cont 'd)
24-31
S RS (Suppl ement al Rest r ai nt Sy s t em)
Opening the S RS Unit Shorting Connectors
for Diagnosis
SRS Sh ort Canceller 070AZ -SAA0100
NOTE :
To prevent damaget o t h e connect or cavit y, ins ert an
SRS s h ort canceller s t raigh t int o t h e cavit y fromt h e
t erminal s ide.
Beforeins t alling an SRS s h ort canceller, was h it wit h
elect rical cont act cleaner, t h en dry it wit h compres s ed
air.
Do not us e an SRS s h ort canceller if it is damaged.
Make s uret o removean SRS s h ort canceller before
reconnect ing t h e SRS unit connect or.
S ome syst ems st or e dat a in memory t h at is los t wh en
t h e bat t ery is dis connect ed. Beforedis connect ing t h e
bat t ery, refer t o Bat t ery Terminal Dis connect ion and
Reconnect ion (s ee page22-91).
Wh en SRS unit connect or A (39P) or B (39P) is
dis connect ed, as h ort circuit is aut omat ically creat ed in
t h e connect or t o prevent accident al deployment of an
airbag or t ens ioner. Th e circuit may need t o be opened
s omet imes wh en diagnos ing t h e s ys t em. Ins ert an SRS
s h ort canceller (070AZ - SAA0100) in t h e s pecified
cavit ies wh en neces s ary t o keep t h ecircuit open for
diagnos is .
S RS UNIT
Terminal side of
female terminals
S RS Shor t Can c e l l e r
(070AZ-SAA0100)
Terminal numbers are s h own fromt h ewire s ideof t h e
femalet erminals . Ins ert t h e SRS s h ort canceller(s ) int o
t h e cavit ies on t h e t erminal s ideof t h e connect or.
SRS UNIT CONNECTOR A (39P)
u
i ,
u
/ /
3 10
/
/ / / /
16
V
/ / /
26 27 28 29
/
3 \ 36 37 38 39
u . \ \ / I
Insert short canceller(s) here.
SRS UNIT CONNECTOR B (39P)
Insert short canceller(s) here.
24-32
Seat s wi t h Si de Ai r bags
Seat s wi t h si de ai r bags have a "SIDE AI RB AG" label on
t he seat -back.
Clean the seats with a damp cloth. Do not soak the
seats with liquid. Do not spray steam on the seats.
Do not repair a torn or frayed seat-back cover/pad.
Replace the seat-back cover/pad if it is damaged.
After a collision where the side airbag was deployed,
-replace the side airbag and the seat frame with new
parts. I fthe seat-back cushion is split, it must be
replaced. Refer to Component
Replacement/Inspection After Deployment {see page
24-208).
Never put aftermarket accessories on the seats
(covers, pads, seat heaters, lights, etc.).
Di sconnect i ng S f st em Connec t or s
1.. Turn the ignition switch to L OCK (0). Do the battery
terminal disconnection procedure (see page 22-91),
then wait at least 3 minutes before starting work.
Dr i ver 's Ai r bag
2. Remove the access panel (A) from the steering wheel,
then disconnect the driver's airbag 4P connector (B)
from the cable reel 4P connector.
(cont'd)
24- 33
SRS (Sup p l ement al Res t rai nt Sf s t em)
Precautions and Procedures (cont'd)
Fr ont Passenger ' s Ai r bag
3. Open t he gl ove box. Remove t he gl ove box st op on
t he ri ght si de, t hen let t he gl ove box hang down (see
page 20-174).
4. Det ach t he connect or c l i p, t hen di sc onnec t t he
dashboar d wi r e har ness 4P connect or (A) f r om front
passenger ' s ai r bag 4P connect or .
Si de Ai r bag
5. Di sc onnec t t he S RS f l oor wi r e har ness 2P connect or s
(A) f r om t he dr i ver ' s and t he front passenger ' s si de
ai r bag 2P c onnec t or s.
24-34
S i d e Curtain Airbag
6. Removet h e C-pillar t rim:
4-door { s e e page 20-123)
2-door ( s ee page 20-119)
7. Dis connect bot h SRSfloor wire h arnes s 2P
connect ors (A) fromt h e s idecurt ain airbag 2P
connect ors .
4-Door
2-Door
Seat Belt Tens ioner
8.4-door: Removet h e B-pillar lower t rim (s ee page
20-110).
9.2-door: Removet h e rear s idet rim panel (s ee page
20-127).
10. Dis connect bot h SRSfloor wire h arnes s 4P
connect ors (A) fromt h e s eat belt t ens ioner 4P
connect ors .
(cont 'd)
24-35
S RS (Supplement al Rest rai nt S f st em)
Precautions and Procedures
(cont'd)
S RS Uni t
11. Removet h e driver's and pas s enger's das h board
cent er lower cover (s ee page20-170).
12. Removet h e audio dis c ch anger (wit h navigat ion
s ys t em) (s ee page 23-118) or cent er pocket (wit h out
navigat ion s ys t em) (s ee page20-168).
13. Dis connect SRSunit connect ors A (39P) and B (39P)
fromt h e SRSunit .
General Troubleshooting
Information
DTC (Di agnost i c Tr oubl e Codes)
Th e s elf-diagnos t ic funct ion of t h e SRSunit allows it t o
locat et h e caus es of s ys t emproblems and s t oret h is
informat ion in memory. For eas ier t roubles h oot ing, t h is
dat acan beret rieved wit h t h e HDS viat h e dat alink
circuit .
Wh en you t urn t h eignit ion s wit ch t o ON (II), t h e SRS
indicat or s h ould comeon. If it goes off aft er 6 s econds ,
t h e s ys t em is normal, and is not current ly det ect ing
any problems .
If t h ere is aproblem, t h e s ys t emlocat es and defines
t h e problem, s t ores t h is informat ion in memory, and
t urns on t h e SRSindicat or. Th e dat aremains in
memory even ift h eignit ion s wit ch is t urned t o L OCK
(0) or t h e bat t ery is dis connect ed.
Th e dat a is s t ored in memory as adiagnos t ic t rouble
code(DTC).
DTCs are eit h er lat ch ing or res et t ing depending on t h e
malfunct ion. Wit h res et t ing DTCs , t h e SRSindicat or
goes off t h e next t ime t h eignit ion s wit ch is t urned t o
ON (II) and t h e s ys t em is normal, but t h e DTC is s t ill
s t ored. Wit h lat ch ing DTCs , t h e SRSindicat or does not
t urn OFF unt il t h e malfunct ion is repaired and t h e DTC
is cleared.
Wh en you connect t h e HDS t o t h e dat alink connect or
(DL C), you can ret rieve amoredet ailed DTC in t h e
HDS " SRS" menu.
NOTE : Only read DTCs fromt h e SRSmenu, not from
SWS menus unles s ins t ruct ed t o ch eck SWS DTCs .
SWS (ODSunit ) DTCs are s ubcodes of SRSunit DTCs .
Only t roubles h oot t h e corres ponding SRS DTCs .
Aft er reading and recording t h e DTC, go t o t h e
t roubles h oot ing procedurefor t h at code.
24-36
Pr ec aut i ons
Make s uret h e bat t ery is fully ch arged. If t h e bat t ery is
dead or low, elect rical meas urement s values may not
be correct .
Us eonly adigit al mult imet er t o ch eck t h e s ys t em.
Make s ureit s out put is 10 mA (0.01 A) or les s wh en
s wit ch ed t o t h e s malles t valuein t h e oh mmet er range.
A t es t er wit h ah igh er out put could damaget h e airbag
circuit or caus eaccident al airbag deployment and
pos s ibleinjury.
Wh enever t h eignit ion s wit ch is in ON (II), or h as been
t urned t o L OCK (0) for les s t h an 3 minut es , be careful
not t o bump t h e SRS unit ; t h e airbags could
accident ally deploy and caus e damageor injuries .
Beforeremoving t h e das h board wire h arnes s or SRS
floor wire h arnes s , dis connect t h e driver's airbag
connect or, t h efront pas s enger's airbag connect or,
bot h s ideairbag connect ors , bot h s idecurt ain airbag
connect ors , and bot h s eat belt t ens ioner connect ors .
Do not t ouch a t es t er probet o t h e t erminals in t h e SRS
unit or h arnes s connect ors , and do not connect t h e
SRS unit t erminals or t h e s ens or t erminals wit h a
jumper wire. Us eonly t h e backprobes et and t h e
mult imet er. Backprobes pring-loaded lock t ype
connect ors correct ly.
How t o Ret r i eve DTCs
NOTE : Make s uret h e bat t ery is fully ch arged before you
begin.
1. Make s uret h eignit ion s wit ch is in L OCK (0).
2. Connect t h e HDS t o t h e dat alink connect or (DL C) (A).
4. Make s uret h e HDS communicat es wit h t h e veh icle
and t h e SRS unit . If it does not communicat e,
t roubles h oot t h e DL C circuit (s ee page11-181).
5. Us e t h e HDS t o ch eck for SRS DTCs .
6. Read and record t h e DTC.
NOTE : Only read DTCs fromt h e SRS menu, not from
SWS menus unles s ins t ruct ed t o ch eck SWS DTCs .
SWS (ODSunit ) DTCs are s ubcodes of SRS unit DTCs .
Only t roubles h oot t h e corres ponding SRS DTCs .
7 Turn t h eignit ion s wit ch t o L OCK (0), t h en wait for
10 s econds .
8. Dis connect t h e HDSfromt h e DL C.
9. Do t h e t roubles h oot ing procedure for t h e DTC.
(cont 'd)
24-37
S RS (Supplement al Restraint Syst em)
Gener al Troubl eshoot i ng Informati on (cont 'd)
How to Cl ear DTCs
NOTE : Make s uret h e bat t ery is fully ch arged before you
begin.
1 . Make s uret h e ignit ion s wit ch is in L OCK (0).
and t h e SRS unit . If it does not communicat e,
5. In t h e SRS ME NU of t h e HDS, s elect SRS, t h en DTC t o
clear DTCs .
6. Turn t h eignit ion s wit ch t o L OCK (0), and wait for
10 s econds .
Tr oubl eshoot i ng Int ermi t t ent Fai l ur es
If t h ere was amalfunct ion t h at s et s aDTC, but it does not
recur, aDTC will be s t ored in t h e memory, and t h e SRS
indicat or may comeon t h emalfunct ion det ect ed.
NOTE :
Ch eck t h e condit ion of t h e bat t ery (s ee page22-90),
and t h e ch arging s ys t em(s ee page4-27). L ow bat t ery
volt age may caus e s omeint ermit t ent failures .
A fault y cablereel can caus eint ermit t ent connect ions
relat ed t o t h e driver's airbag inflat or DTCs .
Aft er ch ecking t h eDTC, t roubles h oot as follows :
1. Ch eck for DTCs wit h t h e HDS (s ee How t o Ret rieve
DTCs ).
2. Clear t h e DTCs wit h t h e HDS (s ee How t o Clear DTCs ).
3. Set t h e parking brake, t h en s t art t h e engine, and let it
idle.
4. Th e SRS indicat or comes on for about 6 s econds and
t h en goes off.
5. Sh aket h e relat ed wire h arnes s es and t h e connect ors ,
and look for loos econnect ions , poor pinfit s , and poor
grounds .
6. Takeat es t -drive(quick accelerat ion, quick braking,
and cornering), t urn t h e s t eering wh eel fully left and
righ t , and h old it t h ere for 5 t o 10 s econds . If t h e
problemrecurs , t h e SRS indicat or will comeon.
7. If you cannot duplicat et h e concern, as k t h e cus t omer
about t h e condit ions wh en it occurred, or as k t h e
cus t omer t o demons t rat et h e concern.
8. If you cannot duplicat et h e int ermit t ent failure, t h e
s ys t emis OK at t h is t ime.
24-38
SRS Unit Update
Honda Di agnost i c Syst em (HDS) t ablet t est er
Honda Int erf ace Modul e (HIM) and an iN wor kst at i on
HDS pocket t est er
GNA600 and an iN workst at i on wi t h t he l at est HDS
Any one of t he above updat i ng t ool s c an be used.
2-Door
NOTE;
Make sur e t he HDS/ iN wor kst at i on has l at est HDS
sof t ware ver si on.
Bef ore you updat e t he S RS uni t, make sur e t he battery
in t he vehi c l e i s f ully c har ged.
Never t ur n t he i gni ti on swi t ch to L OCK (0) or ACC (1)
duri ng t he updat e. If t her e i s a pr obl em wi t h t he
updat e, leavet h e ignit ion s wit ch in ON (II).
& To prevent SRSunit damage, do not operat eanyt h ing
elect rical (h eadligh t s , audio s ys t em, brakes , A/ C,
power windows , moonroof (if equipped), door locks ,
et c.) during t h e updat e.
To ens uret h e lat es t program is ins t alled, do an SRS
unit updat ewh enever t h e SRSunit is replaced.
You cannot updat ean SRSunit wit h aprogramit
already h as . It will only accept anew program.
If you need t o diagnos et h e HIM becaus et h e HIM's red
(#3) ligh t cameon or was flas h ing during t h e updat e,
leavet h e ignit ion s wit ch in ON (II) wh en you
dis connect t h e HIM fromt h e dat alink connect or
(DL C). Th is will prevent SRSunit damage.
A
3. Turn t h eignit ion s wit ch t o ON (II), but do not s t art t h e
engine.
and t h e SRSunit . If it does not communicat e,
5. Select t h e updat eprogram, and follow t h e s creen
prompt s t o updat et h e SRSunit .
6. Ift h e s oft warein t h e SRSunit is t h e lat es t , dis connect
t h e HDS/ HIM fromt h eDL C, and go back t o t h e
proceduret h at you were doing. If t h e s oft warein t h e
SRSunit is not t h e lat es t , follow t h e ins t ruct ions on
t h e s creen.
NOTE : If you run int o aproblemduring t h e updat e
procedure (programming t akes over 15 minut es ,
s t at us bar goes over 100%, D or immobilizer ligh t
flas h es , HDS t ablet freezes , et c.), follow t h es e s t eps t o
minimizet h e ch anceof damaging t h e SRSunit :
L eavet h e ignit ion s wit ch in ON (II) pos it ion.
Connect ajumper bat t ery (do not connect abat t ery
ch arger).
Sh ut down t h e HDS.
Dis connect t h e HDSfromt h e DL C.
Reboot t h e HDS.
Reconnect t h e HDS t o t h e DL C, and t ry t h e updat e
procedure again.
24~33
ODS Unit Initialization
NOTE :
Aft er SRSunit or ODS unit is replaced, do t h is
proceduret o init ializet h eODS unit .
ODS unit init ializat ion will init ializebot h OPDS s ens or
and front pas s enger's weigh t s ens or.
OPDS Sensor Ini t i al i zat i on
Aft er a s eat -back cover/ pad, s eat -back cus h ion, and/ or
ODS unit is replaced, do t h is proceduret o init ializet h e
OPDS s ens or wit h t h e HDS.
NOTE :
A new (uninit ialized) ODS unit ins t alled wit h afault y
OPDS s ens or can caus eDTC 85-71 and DTC 85-78.
Beforeinit ializing t h eODS unit , make s uret h e bat t ery
is fully ch arged.
1. Clear t h eDTC wit h t h eHDS (s ee page24-38).
2. Make s uret h efront pas s enger's s eat is dry. Set t h e
s eat -back in anormal pos it ion, and make s uret h ere is
not h ing on t h e s eat .
4. Connect t h eHDS t o t h e dat alink connect or (DL C) (A).
A
5. Turn t h eignit ion s wit ch t o ON (11).
6. Make s uret h eHDS communicat es wit h t h e veh icle
t roubles h oot t h eDL C circuit (s ee page11-181).
7. Fromt h eHDS Main Menu, s elect SRS, t h en
INITIAL IZ ATION. In t h eINITIAL IZ ATION Menu, s elect
OPDSInit ializat ion. Follow t h e prompt s unt il t h e
OPDS s ens or init ializat ion h as been complet ed.
9. Dis connect t h eHDS fromt h e DL C.
NOTE : Ift h eODS unit fails t o init ialize aft er s everal
at t empt s , replacet h e s eat -back cover/ pad wit h
equipped OPDS s ens or, 4-door (s ee page20-221),
2-door (s eepage 20-213) and ret ry. If t he ODS unit
cont inues t o fail t o init ialize, replacet h eODS unit (s ee
page24-237).
Front Passenger ' s Wei ght Sensor
Ini t i al i zat i on
Wh en you replacet h e SRSunit , t h efront pas s enger's
weigh t s ens or, t h efront pas s enger's s eat as s embly, or
t h eODS unit , init ializet h efront pas s enger's weigh t
s ens or wit h t h eHDS unit .
Wh ile doing t h eODS unit , obs erve t h es eprecaut ions :
Make s ureall component s of t h efront pas s enger's
s eat are correct ly ins t alled.
Make s urenot h ing is on t h efront pas s enger's s eat .
Make s uret h ere is not h ing in t h efront pas s enger's
s eat -back pocket .
K eep t h e windows and t h e moonroof clos ed.
Do all calibrat ion procedures , except t es t -driving, in
t h e s ervicebay.
Make s uret h e veh icle is on level ground.
K eep t h eA/ C and t h e h eat er off.
t Do not t ouch t h efront pas s enger's s eat during
init ializat ion, unt il you are prompt ed t o or wh en you
h avecomplet ed t h e init ializat ion.
Do not expos et h efront pas s enger's s eat t o s udden
t emperat ure ch anges .
24-40
ODS Uni t Operat i on Check
1. P o s i t i o n t h efront pas s enger's s eat all t h e way
rearward, and adjus t t h e s eat -back t o t h e forward
mos t pos it ion. Do not movet h e s eat fromt h is
pos it ion.
A
6. Drive t h e veh icle, and accelerat et o 20 mph (36 km/ h ),
t h en s t op on level ground.
7. Fromt h e HDS Main Menu, s elect SRS, t h en
INITIAL IZ ATION. In t h eINITIAL IZ ATION Menu, s elect
SWS Init ializat ion. Follow t h e prompt s unt il t h e front
pas s enger's weigh t s ens or init ializat ion h as been
complet ed.
Ch eck t h e ODS operat ion aft er any of t h es eact ions :
Replacement of front pas s enger's s eat component (s )
(except ODSunit and/ or weigh t s ens ors )
Aft er aveh icle collis ion
SRSunit replacement
Pre-operat i on Chec k Set-up
Make s ureall t h e component s of t h efront pas s enger's
s eat are correct ly ins t alled.
Pos it ion t h e front pas s enger's s eat t o t h e rearmos t
pos it ion. Adjus t t h e s eat -back t o t h e forward mos t
pos it ion. Do not movet h e s eat fromt h is pos it ion.
Make s urenot h ing is on t h efront pas s enger's s eat .
Make s uret h ere is not h ingin t h efront pas s enger's
s eat -back pocket .
K eep t h e windows and t h e moonroof clos ed.
Do all calibrat ion procedures , except t es t -driving, in
t h e s ervicebay.
Make s uret h e veh icle is on level ground.
Turn t h e h eat er and t h e A/ C off. .
Do not t ouch t h e pas s enger's s eat during t h e
operat ion ch eck.
Do not expos et h efront pas s enger's s eat t o s udden
t emperat ure ch anges .
Make s ureall aft ermarket devices s uch as amplifiers ,
fluores cent ligh t , air purifiers , CB or HAM radios , et c.
are t urned off.
9. Dis connect t h e HDS fromt h e DL C.
(cont 'd)
24-41
S RS (Supplement al Rest rai nt Syst em)
ODS Uni t Operat i on Check (cont' d)
Af t er Repl aci ng Front Passenger ' s Seat
Component (s)
1. Make s uret h e ignit ion s wit ch is in L OCK (0).
5. Drive t h e veh icle, accelerat et o 20 mph (36 km/ h ), t h en
s t op on level ground.
Ins pect ion. In t h e Ins pect ion Menu, s elect SE AT
OUTPUT CHE CK . Follow t h e prompt s unt il t h e ODS
unit operat ion ch eck h as been complet ed.
Front Pas s enger's Weight Sens or
Output CheckAfter a VehicleCollis ion
1. Pos it ion t h e front pas s enger's s eat t o t h e rear mos t
pos it ion, and adjus t t h e s eat -back t o t h e forward mos t
pos it ion. Do not movet h e s eat fromt h is pos it ion.
2. Drive t h e veh icle, accelerat et o 20 mph (36 km/ h ), t h en
s t op on level ground.
A
Ins pect ion. In t h e Ins pect ion Menu, s elect SE AT
OUTPUT CHE CK . Follow t h e prompt s unt il t h e front
pas s enger's weigh t s ens or out put ch eck h as been
complet ed.
24-42
L T L
Dower's Seat Position Sensor Operation Check
Check t he dr i ver ' s seat posi t i on sensor after dr i ver ' s seat
posi t i on s ens or r epl acement .
1 . Make sur e t he dr i ver ' s seat i s al l t he way f or war d
posi t i on. v
2. Make sur e t he i gni ti on swi t ch i s i n L OCK (0).
3. Connect t he HDS to t he dat a link connect or (DLC) (A).
and t he S RS uni t. If it does not c ommuni c at e,
6. Fr om t he HDS Mai n Menu, sel ec t S RS , t hen
PARAMETER INFORMATION. In t he PARAMETER
INFORMATION Menu, sel ect Buckl e Swi t c h, Seat
Posi t i on Sensor .
7. Using apiece of tape (A), mar k t he l ocat i on on t he
seat ' s out er c over (B) wher e t he f ront r i ser c over
meet s t he seat r i ser (C). The dr i ver ' s seat posi ti on-
sensor shoul d r ead NEAR.
8. Move t he seat back in smal l i nc r ement s (about
5mm, 0.2 i n) unti l t he dr i ver ' s seat posi t i on sensor
r eads NOT NEAR. The seat shoul d be about
25 mm (1 in) f r om t he front.
NOTE: It t akes a f ew sec onds f or t he HDS to di spl ay
c hanges, so wai t f or about 5 sec onds bet ween eac h
" movement .
if t he dr i ver ' s seat posi t i on s ens or dat a does not wor k
as desc r i bed above, check t he dr i ver ' s seat posi t i on
sensor f or damage, and r epl ace part s as needed.
10. Di sconnect t he HDS f rom t he DL C.
24-43
S RS
Uni t
DTC
Det ec t i on It em Not es
11-1x* Open i n t he dr i ver ' s ai r bag fi rst i nf l at or DTC Troubles h oot ing
(s ee page 24-65)
11-11 Shor t to anot her ai r bag i nflator i n t he dr i ver ' s ai r bag f i rst i nflator (4-door) DTC Troubles h oot ing
(s ee page 24-67)
11-3x Shor t to anot her wi r e or dec r eased r esi st anc e i n t he dr i ver ' s ai r bag f i rst
inflat or
DTC Troubles h oot ing
(s ee page 24-70)
11-8x Shor t to power i n t he dr i ver ' s ai r bag f i rst i nflator DTC Troubles h oot ing
(s ee page 24-72)
11-9x Shor t to gr ound in t he dr i ver ' s ai r bag f i rst i nflator DTC Troubles h oot ing
(s ee page 24-74)
11-4x* Open i n t he dr i ver ' s ai r bag sec ond i nf l at or DTC Troubles h oot ing
(s ee page 24-65)
11-41 Shor t to anot her ai r bag i nflator i n t he dr i ver ' s ai r bag sec ond i nflator (4-door) DTC Troubles h oot ing
(s ee page 24-69)
11 -ex Shor t to anot her wi r e or dec r eased r esi st anc e i n t he dr i ver ' s ai r bag sec ond
i nf lat or
(s ee page 24-70)
11-Ax Sh ort t o power i n t he dr i ver ' s ai r bag sec ond i nflator DTC Troubles h oot ing
(s ee page 24-72)
11-Bx Sh ort t o ground in t h e driver's airbag s econd inflat or DTC Troubles h oot ing
(s ee page 24-74)
12-1x* Open in t h efront pas s enger's airbag firs t inflat or DTC Troubles h oot ing
(s ee page 24-76)
12-11 Sh ort t o anot h er airbag inflat or in t h efront pas s enger's airbag firs t inflat or
(4-door)
(s ee page 24-77)
12-3x ' Sh ort t o anot h er wireor decreas ed res is t ancein t h efront pas s enger's airbag
firs t inflat or
(s ee page 24-80)
12-8x Sh ort t o power in t h efront pas s enger's airbag firs t inflat or DTC Troubles h oot ing
(s ee page 24-82)
12-9x Sh ort t o ground in t h efront pas s enger's airbag firs t inflat or DTC Troubles h oot ing
(s ee page 24-83)
12-4x* Open in t h efront pas s enger's airbag s econd inflat or DTC Troubles h oot ing
(s ee page 24-76)
12-41 Sh ort t o anot h er airbag inflat or in t h efront pas s enger's airbag s econd inflat or
(4-door)
(s ee page 24-78)
12-6x Sh ort t o anot h er wireor decreas ed res is t ancein t h efront pas s enger's airbag
s econd inflat or
(s ee page 24-80)
12-Ax Sh ort t o power in t h efront pas s enger's airbag s econd inflat or DTC Troubles h oot ing
(s ee page 24-82)
12-Bx Sh ort t o ground in t h efront pas s enger's airbag s econd inflat or DTC Troubles h oot ing
(s ee page 24-83)
24-44
SRS
Unit
DTC
Det ect ion It em Wet es
21-1x* Open in t h e driver's s eat belt t ens ioner DTC Troubles h oot ing
( s e e page 24-85)
21-11 Sh ort t o anot h er wirein t h e driver's s eat belt t ens ioner (4-door) DTC Troubles h oot ing
( s e e page 24-86)
21-3x Sh ort t o anot h er wire or decreas ed res is t ancein t h e driver's s eat belt
t ens ioner
(see p a c e 24-87)
21-8x Sh ort t o power in t h e driver's s eat belt t ens ioner DTC Troubles h oot ing
( s e e page 24-89)
21-9x Sh ort t o ground in t h e driver's s eat belt t ens ioner DTC Troubles h oot ing
(see page 24-90)
22-1 x' Open in t h efront pas s enger's s eat belt t ens ioner DTC T T ubles h oot ing
(see page 24-92)
22-11
Sh ort t o anot h er wirein t h efront pas s enger's s eat belt t ens ioner (4-door) DTC Troubles h oot ing
(see page 24-93)
22-3x Sh ort t o anot h er wireor decreas ed res is t ancein t h e front pas s enger's s eat belt
t ens ioner
(see page 24-94)
22-8x Sh ort t o power in t h e front pas s enger's s eat belt t ens ioner DTC Troubles h oot ing
(see page 24-96)
22-9x Sh ort t o ground in t h e front pas s enger's s eat belt t ens ioner DTC Troubles h oot ing
(see page 24-97)
31-1x* Open in t h e driver's s ideairbag inflat or DTC Troubles h oot ing
(see page 24-99)
31-11 Sh ort t o anot h er wirein t h e driver's s ideairbag inflat or (4-door) DTC Troubles h oot ing
(see page 24-100)
31-3x Sh ort t o anot h er wire or decreas ed res is t ancein t h e driver's s ideairbag
inflat or
(see page 24-101)
31-8x Sh ort t o power in t h e driver's s ideairbag inflat or DTC Troubles h oot ing
(see page 24-103)
31-9x Sh ort t o ground in t h e driver's s ideairbag inflat or DTC Troubles h oot ing
(see page 24-104)
32-1 x* Open in t h efront pas s enger's s ideairbag inflat or DTC Troubles h oot ing
(see page 24-106)
32-11 Sh ort t o anot h er wirein t h efront pas s enger's s ideairbag inflat or (4-door) DTC Trcub'es h oot ing
(see page 24-107)
32-3x Sh ort t o anot h er wire or decreas ed res is t ancein t h e front pas s enger's s ide
airbag inflat or
(see page 24-108)
32-8x Sh ort t o power in t h e front pas s enger's s ideairbag inflat or DTC Troubles h oot ing
(see page 24-110)
32-9x Sh ort t o ground in t h e front pas s enger's s ideairbag inflat or DTC Troubles h oot ing
(see page 24- ' ;
33-1 x* Open in t h eleft s idecurt ain airbag inflat or DTC Troubles h oot ing
(see page 24-113)
33-11 Sh ort t o anot h er wirein t h eleft s idecurt ain airbag inflat or (4-door) DTC Troubles h oot ing
(see page 24-114)
33-3x Sh ort t o anot h er wire or decreas ed res is t ancein t h eleft s idecurt ain airbag
inflat or
(see page 24-116)
33-8x Sh ort t o power in t h eleft s idecurt ain airbag inflat or DTC Troubles h oot ing
(see page 24-117)
33-9x Sh ort t o ground in t h eleft s idecurt ain airbag inflat or DTC Troubles h oot ing
(see page 24-118)
NOTE : Th e " x" at t h e end of each DTC denot es anumeric ch aract er (0 t h ru 9), or it ems wit h an as t eris k (*) (0, 2 t h ru 9),
or an alph ach aract er (A t h ru F ) t h at you will s eeon t h e HDS dis play. Th e ch aract er is unrelat ed t o your
t roubles h oot ing; it des ignat es t h e SRSunit manufact urer and ot h er det ail us ed for product analys is .
(cont 'd)
24-45
SRS (Suppl ement al Restraint Syst em)
DTC Troubleshooting Index (cont'd)
Uni t
DTC
Det ect ion It em Not es
34-1 x* Open in t h erigh t s idecurt ain airbag inflat or DTC Troubles h oot ing
(s ee page 24-120)
34-11 Sh ort t o anot h er wirein t h erigh t s idecurt ain airbag inflat or (4-door) DTC Troubles h oot ing
(s ee page 24-121)
34-3x Sh ort t o anot h er wire or decreas ed res is t ancein t h erigh t s idecurt ain airbag
inflat or
(s ee page 24-122)
34-8x Sh ort t o power in t h erigh t s idecurt ain airbag inflat or DTC Troubles h oot ing
(s ee page 24-124)
34-9x Sh ort t o ground in t h erigh t s idecurt ain airbag inflat or DTC Troubles h oot ing
(s ee page 24-125)
41-1x No s ignal fromt h eleft front impact s ens or DTC Troubles h oot ing
(s ee page 24-127)
41 -2K
41-3x
41-8x
41-9x
41-Ax
41- B x
Int ernal failure of t h eleft front impact s ens or DTC Troubles h oot ing
(s ee page 24-132)
42-1 x No s ignal fromt h erigh t front impact s ens or DTC Troubles h oot ing
(s ee page 24-129)
42-2x
42-3x
42-8x
42-9x
42-Ax
42-Bx
Int ernal failure of t h erigh t front impact s ens or DTC Troubles h oot ing
(s ee page 24-132)
43-1 x No s ignal fromt h eleft s ideimpact s ens or (firs t ) (4-door) DTC Troubles h oot ing
(s ee page 24-133)
43-1 x
No s ignal fromt h eleft s ideimpact s ens or (firs t ) (2-door) DTC Troubles h oot ing
(s ee page 24-138)
43-2x
43-3x
43-8x
43-9x
43-Ax
43-Bx
Int ernal failure of t h eleft s ideimpact s ens or (firs t ) DTC Troubles h oot ing
(s ee page 24-143)
44-1 x No s ignal fromt h erigh t s ideimpact s ens or (firs t ) (4-door) DTC Troubles h oot ing
(s ee page 24-135)
44-1 x
No s ignal fromt h erigh t s ideimpact s ens or (firs t ) (2-door) DTC Troubles h oot ing
(s ee page 24-140)
44-2x
44-3x
44-8x
44-9x
44-Ax
44-Bx
Int ernal failure of t h erigh t s ideimpact s ens or (firs t ) DTC Troubles h oot ing
(s ee page 24-143)
SRS
U nit
DTC
45-1 x No s ignal fromt h eleft s ideimpact s ens or (s econd) (4-door) DTC Troubles h oot ing
(s ee page 24-144)
45-1 x
No s ignal fromt h eleft s ideimpact s ens or (s econd) (2-door) DTC Troubles h oot ing
(s ee page 24-149)
45-2x
45-3x
45-8x
45-9x
45-Ax
45-Bx
Int ernal failure of t h eleft s ideimpact s ens or (s econd) DTC Troubles h oot ing
(s ee page 24-153)
46-1 x No s ignal fromt h erigh t s ideimpact s ens or (s econd) (4-door) DTC Troubles h oot ing
(s ee page 24-146)
46-1 x
No s ignal fromt h erigh t s ideimpact s ens or (s econd) (2-door) DTC Troubles h oot ing
(s ee page 24-151)
46-2x
46-3x
46-8x
46-9x
46-Ax
46-Bx
Int ernal failure of t h erigh t s ideimpact s ens or (s econd) DTC Troubles h oot ing
(s ee page 24-153)
51- xx
52- xx
53- xx
54- xx
55- xx
57- xx
58- xx
Int ernal failure of t h e SRSunit DTC Troubles h oot ing
(s ee page 24-154)
53-FF SRSunit programming error DTC Troubles h oot ing
(s ee page 24-154)
56-25 L os t communicat ion wit h t h e gaugecont rol module DTC Troubles h oot ing
(s ee page 24-156)
56-31 L os t communicat ion wit h t h e E CM/ PCM (PGM-FI s ys t em) DTC Troubles h oot ing
(s ee page 24-155)
56-32
56-33
Undefined dat areceived fromt h e E CM/ PCM (PGM-FI s ys t em)
(s ee page 24-155)
61-1x Open in t h e driver's s eat belt buckle s wit ch DTC Troubles h oot ing
(s ee page 24-157)
61-2x Sh ort in t h e driver's s eat belt buckle s wit ch DTC Troubles h oot ing
(s ee page 24-158)
62-1 x Open in t h efront pas s enger's s eat belt buckle s wit ch DTC Troubles h oot ing
(s ee page 24-159)
62-2x Sh ort in t h efront pas s enger's s eat belt buckle s wit ch DTC Troubles h oot ing
(s ee page 24-161)
NOTE : Th e " x" at t h e end of each DTC denot es anumeric ch aract er (0 t h ru 9) or an alph ach aract er (A t h ru F) t h at you
will s eeon t h e HDS dis play. Th e ch aract er is unrelat ed t o your t roubles h oot ing; it des ignat es t h e SRSunit
manufact urer and ot h er det ail us ed for product analys is .
(cont 'd)
24-47
SI S
yni t
DTC
71-1x Open in t h e driver's s eat pos it ion s ens or DTC Troubles h oot ing
(s ee page 24-162)
71-2x Sh ort in t h e driver's s eat pos it ion s ens or DTC Troubles h oot ing
(s ee page 24-163)
81-4x
81 -5x
81-63
81-64
Int ernal t h e failure of t h e ODSunit DTC Troubles h oot ing
(s ee page 24-165)
81-61 No s ignal fromt h e ODSunit DTC Troubles h oot ing
(s ee page 24-165)
81-62 Incorrect dat afromt h e ODSunit
(s ee page 24-165)
81-71
81-78
ODSunit not calibrat ed DTC Troubles h oot ing
(s ee page 24-168)
81-79 Front pas s enger's weigh t s ens ors init ial ch eck failure DTC Troubles h oot ing
(s ee page 24-169)
82-1 x No s ignal fromt h einner s idefront pas s enger's weigh t s ens or (2-door) DTC Troubles h oot ing
(s ee page 24-169)
83-2x No s ignal fromt h e out er s idefront pas s enger's weigh t s ens or (2-door) DTC Troubles h oot ing
(s ee page 24-170)
82-14 No s ignal fromt h efront pas s enger's weigh t s ens or (front inner s ide) (4-door) DTC Troubles h oot ing
(s ee page 24-170)
82-16 No s ignal fromt h efront pas s enger's weigh t s ens or (rear inner s ide) (4-door) DTC Troubles h oot ing
(s ee page 24-174)
83-24 No s ignal fromt h efront pas s enger's weigh t s ens or (front out er s ide) (4-door) DTC Troubles h oot ing
(s ee page 24-177)
83-26 No s ignal fromt h efront pas s enger's weigh t s ens or (rear out er s ide) (4-door) DTC Troubles h oot ing
(s ee page 24-181)
82-15 Int ernal failure of t h efront pas s enger's weigh t s ens or (front inner s ide)
(4-door)
(s ee page 24-184)
82-17 Int ernal failureof t h efront pas s enger's weigh t s ens or (rear inner s ide) (4-door)
(s ee page 24-184)
83-25 Int ernal failure of t h efront pas s enger's weigh t s ens or (front out er s ide)
(4-door)
(s ee page 24-184)
83-27 Int ernal failureof t h efront pas s enger's weigh t s ens or (rear out er s ide) (4-door)
(s ee page 24-184)
85-4x
85-5x
85-63
85-64
Int ernal failure of t h e ODSunit DTC Troubles h oot ing
(s ee page 24-185)
85-61 No s ignal fromt h e ODSunit DTC Troubles h oot ing
(s ee page 24-185)
85-62 Incorrect dat afromt h e ODSunit
(s ee page 24-185)
85-71
85-78
ODSunit not init ialized DTC Troubles h oot ing
(s ee page 24-188)
85-79 OPDS s ens or init ial ch eck failure DTC Troubles h oot ing
(s ee page 24-189)
86-1 x Fault y OPDS s eat -back s ens or DTC Troubles h oot ing
(s ee page 24-189)
86-2x Fault y OPDS s eat s upport s ens or
(s ee page 24-189)
24-48
S RS
Uni t
DTC
92-1 x Sh ort t o power in t h e pas s enger's airbag cut off indicat or DTC Troubles h oot ing
(s ee page 24-190)
92-2x Open or s h ort t o ground in t h e pas s enger's airbag cut off indicat or DTC Troubles h oot ing
(s ee page 24-191)
A1-1x Fault y power s upply (VA line) DTC Troubles h oot ing
(s ee page 24-193)
A2-1x Fault y power s upply (VB line) DTC Troubles h oot ing
(s ee page 24-194)
A3-1x SRSconnect or A not properly ins t alled DTC Troubles h oot ing
(s ee page 24-195)
A4-1x SRSconnect or B not properly ins t alled DTC Troubles h oot ing
(s ee page 24-195)
B2-1x No s ignal fromt h e rear s afing s ens or (4-door) DTC Troubles h oot ing
(s ee page 24-196)
B2-1x
No s ignal fromt h e rear s afing s ens or (2-door) DTC Troubles h oot ing
(s ee page 24-198)
B2-2x
B2-3x
B2-8x
B2-9x
B2-Ax
B2-Bx
Int ernal failure of t h e rear s afing s ens or DTC Troubles h oot ing
(s ee page 24-200)
E x-11 Cont rol operat ion recorded DTC Troubles h oot ing
(s ee page 24-200)
Fx-11 Airbags and/ or t ens ioners deployment recorded DTC Troubles h oot ing
(s ee page 24-201)
NOTE : Th e " x" at t h e end of each DTC denot es anumeric ch aract er (0 t h ru 9), or it ems wit h an as t eris k (*) (0,2 t h ru 9),
or an alph ach aract er (A t h ru F) t h at you will s eeon t h e HDS dis play. Th e ch aract er is unrelat ed t o your
t roubles h oot ing; it des ignat es t h e SRSunit manufact urer and ot h er det ail us ed for product analys is .
(cont 'd)
24-49
S RS (Supplemental Rest rai nt S f st em}
DTC Troubl eshoot i ng i ndex f c onf dl
Only r ead DTCs f rom t he S RS menu, not f r om S WS menus unl ess Inst ruct ed to check S WS DTCs. S WS (ODS uni t) DTCs
ar e subc odes of S RS uni t DTCs . Onl y t r oubl eshoot t he c or r espondi ng S RS DTCs .
SWS DTC Index
S RS Uni t DTC SWS DTC Det ect ion It em Not es
81-4x 41- xx
42- xx
43- xx
Int ernal failure of t h e ODSunit DTC Troubles h oot ing
(s ee page 24-201)
8 2 - 1 4 14-11 Sh ort t o power in t h efront pas s enger's weigh t
s ens or (front inner s ide) power circuit
(s ee page 24-202)
8 2 - 1 4
14-12 Sh ort t o ground in t h efront pas s enger's weigh t
s ens or (front inner s ide) power circuit
(s ee page 24-202)
8 2 - 1 4
14-13 Open in t h efront pas s enger's weigh t s ens or (front
inner s ide) out put circuit
(s ee page 24-202)
8 2 - 1 4
s ens or (front inner s ide) out put circuit
(s ee page 24-202)
8 2 - 1 5 15-3x Int ernal failure of t h efront pas s enger's weigh t
s ens or (front inner si de)
^c.ge 2 4- 2 0 4)
8 2 - 1 6 16-11 Sh ort t o power in t h efront pas s enger's weigh t
s ens or (rear inner s ide) power circuit
(s ee page 24-203)
8 2 - 1 6
s ens or (rear inner s ide) power circuit
(s ee page 24-203)
8 2 - 1 6
16-13 Open in t h efront pas s enger's weigh t s ens or (rear
inner s ide) out put circuit
(s ee page 24-203)
8 2 - 1 6
s ens or (rear inner s ide) out put circuit
(s ee page 24-203)
82-17 17-3x Int ernal failure of t h efront pas s enger's weigh t
s ens or (rear inner s ide)
(s ee page 24-204)
83-24 24-11 Sh ort t o power in t h efront pas s enger's weigh t
s ens or (front out er s ide) power circuit
(s ee page 24-203)
83-24
s ens or (front out er s ide) power circuit
(s ee page 24-203)
83-24
24-13 Open in t h efront pas s enger's weigh t s ens or (front
out er s ide) out put circuit
(s ee page 24-203)
83-24
s ens or (front out er s ide) out put circuit
(s ee page 24-203)
s ens or (front out er s ide)
(s ee page 24-204)
83-26 26-11 Sh ort t o power in t h efront pas s enger's weigh t
s ens or (rear out er s ide) power circuit
(s ee page 24-204)
83-26
s ens or (rear out er s ide) power circuit
(s ee page 24-204)
83-26
26-13 Open in t h efront pas s enger's weigh t s ens or (rear
out er si de) out put circuit
(s ee page 24-204)
83-26
s ens or (rear out er s ide) out put circuit
(s ee page 24-204)
s ens or (rear out er s ide)
(s ee page 24-204)
81-71 71-xx ODSunit not calibrat ed DTC Troubles h oot ing
(s ee page 24-202)
NOTE : Th e "x" at t h e end of each DTC denot es anumeric ch aract er (0 t h ru 9) or an alph ach aract er (A t h ru F) t h at you
will s eeon t h e HDS dis play. Th e ch aract er is unrelat ed t o your t roubles h oot ing; it des ignat es t h e SRSunit
manufact urer and ot h er det ail us ed for product analys is .
24-50
Sympt om Diagnos t ic procedure Als o ch eck for
SRS i ndi cat or does not c ome on Sympt omTroubles h oot ing (s ee page24-205) Communicat ion wit h t h e
HDS
SRS i ndi cat or st ays on, but no DTCs
are st or ed, or cannot be r ead
Sympt omTroubles h oot ing (s ee page24-205) Ch arging s ys t emfor
under or overch arging
Communicat ion wit h t h e
HDS
Sideairbag cut off indicat or flas h es Ch eck for DTCs . If any DTC is indicat ed, go t o
t h eDTC t roubles h oot ing
HDS
:, ODS unit init ializat ion
Sideairbag cut off indicat or s t ays on Sympt omTroubles h oot ing (s ee page24-206) Communicat ion wit h t h e
HDS
Sideairbag cut off indicat or does not
come on
Sympt omTroubles h oot ing (s ee page24-206) Communicat ion wit h t h e
HDS
ODSunit init ializat ion
Pas s enger's airbag cut off indicat or
flas h es
Ch eck for DTCs . If any DTC is indicat ed, go t o
HDS
c ODS unit init ializat ion
s t ays on or comes on s uddenly
Sympt omTroubles h oot ing (s ee page24-207) Communicat ion wit h t h e
HDS
)Sunit init ializat ion
does not comeon
Ch eck for DTCs . If any DTC is indicat ed, go t o
HDS
HDS does not communicat ewit h t h e
SRSunit or t h e veh icle
Troubles h oot t h e DL C circuit (s ee page
11-181)
HDS
24-51
S RS Component s .
A i r b ag s
The S RS i s a saf et y devi ce whi c h, when used wi t h t he seat bel t , i s desi gned to hel p prot ect t he dri ver and front
passenger in a frontal i mpact exceedi ng a cert ai n set li mi t. The syst em c onsi st s of t he S RS uni t, i ncl udi ng saf i ng sensor
and i mpact sensor (A), t he cabl e reel (B), t he dr i ver ' s ai r bag (C), t he front passenger ' s ai r bag (D), si de ai r bags (E), si de
cur t ai n ai r bags (F), seat belt t ensi oner s (G), si de i mpact s ens or s (fi rst) (H), front i mpact sensor s (I), rear saf i ng sensor (J),
and si de i mpact s ens or s (second) (K ).
Si nc e t he dr i ver ' s and f ront passenger ' s ai r bags use t he s ame s ens or s , both nor mal l y i nflate at t he s ame t i me. However ,
it i s possi bl e f or onl y one ai r bag to i nflate. Thi s c an oc c ur when col l i si on sever i t y i s near t he t hr eshol d for ai r bag
deployment . In s uch cas e, t h e SRS s ys t emwill only deploy airbags wh en t h e prot ect ion provided by t h e s eat belt is
ins ufficient .
Front Pas s enger's Weigh t Sens ors
Th e front pas s enger's weigh t s ens ors (L ) are part of front pas s enger's s eat . Th e front pas s enger's weigh t s ens ors det ect
t h e weigh t on t h e s eat , and s end t h e informat ion t o t h e ODS unit (M). If t h e t ot al weigh t is about 65 lbs (30 kg) or les s , t h e
ODSunit s ends a s ignal t o t h e SRSunit t o prevent t h e pas s enger's airbag fromdeploying. Wh en t h e pas s enger's airbag
is dis abled, t h e pas s enger airbag cut off indicat or (N) on t h e cent er panel comes on t o alert t h e driver t h at t h e front
pas s enger's airbagwill not deploy in afront -end collis ion.
NOTE : Th e s ens ors only det ect t h e weigh t on t h e s eat . Th e s ens ors do not det ect t h e weigh t of t h e pas s enger's legs or
arms t h at may be res t ing on t h e floor or armres t s .
Driver's Seat Pos it ion Sens or
Th e driver's s eat pos it ion s ens or (0) is under t h e driver's s eat on t h e left s ide. Wh en t h e driver's s eat is moved t o
forward mos t pos it ion, t h e deployment of t h e driver's airbag is moderat ed t o decreas eit s forceof impact during a
front -end collis ion.
H G
4-door s hown; 2-door i s si mi l ar .
24-52
Rear Saf i ng Sens or
Th e rear s afing s ens or is locat ed under t h e rear s eat cus h ion. Th e rear s afing s ens or performs t h e s ame bas ic funct ion
as t h e s afing s ens or in t h e SRS unit . It meas ures s ideways G force, s uch as t h e forcet h e veh iclewould receivein a s ide
collis ion in t h e rear, and s ends t h at informat ion t o t h e SRSunit . Th e SRSunit us es t h at informat ion, and t h e informat ion
fromt h e s econd s ideimpact s ens ors t o det erminet h e s idet h at is impact ed and t h e force. Ift h e t h res h old is met , t h e
SRS unit deploys t h e s ideairbag, t h e s idecurt ain airbag and t h e s eat belt t ens ioner on t h at s ide.
Si de Ai r bag Cutoff Indi cat or /OPDS Operat i on
Th eindicat or comes on wh en t h e front pas s enger's s eat is occupied by as mall adult or ch ild wh o is leaning int o t h e
deployment pat h , or wh en an object (grocery bag, briefcas e, purs e, et c.) is in t h e s eat . Th is indicat es t h e pas s enger's
s ideairbag is off and will not deploy; t h ere is no problemwit h t h e s ideairbag. Ift h e pas s enger s it s uprigh t or moves t o
anot h er s eat , or you removet h e object fromt h e s eat , t h e ligh t s h ould go off. Th erewill be s omedelay bet ween t h e
occupant 's repos it ioning, and wh en t h e indicat or will t urn on or off.
Passenger ' s Ai r bag Cutoff Indi cat or /Fr ont Passenger ' s Wei ght Sensor Oper at i on
Th eindicat or comes on ift h e weigh t on t h e front pas s enger s eat is about 65 lbs (30 kg) or les s . Th is indicat es t h e
pas s enger's front airbag is off and will not deploy. Th e front airbag is s h ut off t o reducet h e ch ance of airbag-caus ed
injuries .
S RS Operat i on
Th emain circuit in t h e SRS unit s ens es and analyzes t h e force of impact and, if neces s ary, ignit es t h e inflat or ch arges . If
bat t ery volt age is t oo low or power is dis connect ed duet o t h e impact , t h e volt age regulat or and t h e back-up power
circuit will keep volt age at acons t ant level.
For t he S RS t o oper at e:
S eat Bel t Tensi oner s
(1) A front impact s ens or, s ideimpact s ens or, or t h e rear s afing s ens or mus t act ivat e and s end elect ric s ignals t o t h e
microproces s or.
(2) Th e microproces s or mus t comput et h e s ignals and t rigger t h e t ens ioners .
(3) Th e ch arges mus t ignit e and deploy t h e t ens ioners .
Dr i ver ' s and Fr ont Passenger ' s Ai r bag(s)
(1) A front impact s ens or mus t act ivat e and s end elect ric s ignals t o t h e microproces s or.
(2) Th e microproces s or mus t comput et h e s ignals , and t rigger t h e airbag inflat ors .
(3) Th e t riggered inflat ors t h at received s ignals mus t ignit e and deploy t h e airbags .
Si de Ai r bag(s)
(1) A s ideimpact s ens or mus t act ivat e and s end elect ric s ignals t o t h e microproces s or.
(2) Th e microproces s or mus t comput et h e s ignals and t rigger t h e s ideairbag inflat ors . However, t h e microproces s or
does not t rigger t h e front pas s enger's s ideairbag ift h e SRS unit det ermines t h at t h e front pas s enger's h ead is in t h e
deployment pat h of t h e s ideairbag.
(3) Th e t riggered inflat ors t h e s ignal mus t ignit e and deploy t h e s ideairbags .
Si de Cur t ai n Ai r bag(s)
(1) A s ideimpact s ens or or t h e rear s afing s ens or mus t act ivat e and s end elect rical s ignals t o t h e microproces s or.
(2) Th e microproces s or mus t comput et h e s ignals and t rigger t h e s idecurt ain airbag and s ideairbag inflat ors .
(3) Th e t riggered inflat ors t h at mus t ignit e and deploy t h e s idecurt ain airbag and s ideairbag at t h e s amet ime.
(cont 'd)
24-53
4-Door
F RONT
PASSENGER'S SEAT
DRIVER'S
SEAT
POSITION
SENSOR
PASSENGER'S
AI RB AG
CUTOF F
INDICATOR
OPDS
SENSOR
F RONT
PASSENGER'S
WEI GH T
SENSORS
DRIVER'S UNDER-DASH
F USE/RELAY B OX
(IMPACT) [
POWER
SUPPLY
CIRCUIT
F RONT
IMPACT
SENSOR
SIDE
I MP ACT
SENSOR
LEF T
SIDE I MP ACT
SENSOR
(F IRST)
LEF T
SIDE I MP ACT
SENSOR
(SECOND)
LEF T
F RONT
I MP ACT
SENSOR
RIGHT
F RONT
I MP ACT
SENSOR
7- TZ
RIGHT
SIDE I MP ACT
SENSOR
(F IRST)
DRIVER'S DRIVER'S
AI RB AG AI RB AG
F IRST SECOND
INF LATOR INF LATOR
F RONT
PASSENGER'S
AI RB AG
SECOND
INF LATOR
RIGHT
SIDE I MP ACT
SENSOR
(SECOND)
REAR
SAF ING
SENSOR
MICROPROCESSOR and DI AGNOSTI C CIRCUIT
MEMORY
CIRCUIT
DATA
LINK
CIRCUIT
CABLE
REEL
F RONT
PASSENGER'S
AI RB AG
F IRST
INF LATOR
TRIGGER CIRCUIT
SIDE
AI RB AG
CUTOF F
INDICATOR
SRS
INDICATOR
LEF TSIDE RIGHT SIDE DRIVER'S F RONT DRIVER'S F RONT
CURTAI N CURTAI N SEAT BELT PASSENGER'S SIDE AI RB AG P ASSENGER'S
AI RB AG AI RB AG TENSIONER SEAT BELT INF LATOR SIDE AI RB AG
INF LATOR INF LATOR TENSIONER INF LATOR
Self-diagnos t ic Sys t em
A s elf-diagnos t ic circuit is built int o t h e SRSunit ; wh en t h eignit ion s wit ch is t urned t o ON (II), t h e SRSindicat or comes
on and goes off aft er about 6 s econds if t h e s ys t emis operat ing normally. If t h e indicat or does not comeon, or does not
go off aft er 6 s econds , or comes on wh ile driving, it indicat es a problemin t h e s ys t em. Th e s ys t emmus t be ins pect ed
and repaired as s oon as pos s ible.
For bet t er s erviceabilit y, t h e SRSunit memory s t ores aDTCs relat ed t o t h e caus eof t h e malfunct ion. Th e SRSunit is
connect ed t o t h e dat alink connect or (DL C). Th is informat ion can be read wit h t h e HDS wh en it is connect ed t o t h e DL C
(s ee page24-36).
NOTE : Beforeyou dis connect t h e negat ive cablefromt h e bat t ery for t roubles h oot ing, refer t o Bat t ery Terminal
Dis connect ion and Reconnect ion (s ee page22-91).
24-54
2-Door
FRONT
PASSENGER'S SEAT F RONT
PASSENGER'S
AI RB AG
S E COND
I NFL ATOR
(IMPACT) l ^>
SIDE
AI RB AG SRS
CUTOF F I NDI CATOR
INDICATOR
LEF TSI DE RIGHT SIDE DRIVER'S F RONT
CURTAI N CURTAI N SEAT BELT PASSENGER'S
AI RB AG AI RB AG TENSIONER SEAT BELT
INF LATOR INF LATOR TENSIONER
(c ont ' d)
24-55
S y s t e m Des c r i pt i o n (c ont ' d)
S RS Uni t Input s and Out put s at Connect or A (39P)
Terminal
Number
Wire Color Terminal Name Des cript ion
3
BRN*
L A 1 -
Ground for t h e driver's airbag firs t inflat or
4 L T BL U*
LA1 +
Power s ourcefor t h e driver's airbag firs t inflat or
5 BL U*
RA1- Ground for t h efront pas s enger's airbag firs t inflat or
6 YEL *
RA1 + Power s ourcefor t h efront pas s enger's airbag firs t inflat or
7
PUR*
L A 2 -
Ground for t h e driver's airbag s econd inflat or
8
GRN* L A2 + Power s ourcefor t h e driver's airbag s econd inflat or
9 L T BL U* RA2- Ground for t h efront pas s enger's airbag s econd inflat or
10
L T GRN* RA2 + Power s ourcefor t h efront pas s enger's airbag s econd inflat or
16
RED*
F-CAN L
Sends and receives communicat ion s ignal fromt h e gauge
cont rol module
17 WHT* F-CAN H
Sends and receives communicat ion s ignal fromt h e gauge
cont rol module
18 L T BL U* K -L INE Sends and receives s can t ool s ignal (s erial dat a)
20
BL U* PTT
Pas s enger's airbag cut off indicat or out put line
26 YEL *
VA SRS s ys t ems ub power (common wit h ODS)
27 RED*
VB SRSdedicat ed power (dedicat ed boos t er circuit )
28 BLK*
SRSGND1 Ground circuit for t h e SRSunit (G504)
29 BLK*
SRSGND2 Ground circuit for t h e SRSunit (G504)
31 RED* WEN
Dat alink connect or
36
BRN*
L F S -
Ground for t h eleft front impact s ens or
37
RE D*
L FS-h
Power s ourcefor t h eleft front impact s ens or
38
L T BL U* RFS Ground for t h erigh t front impact s ens or
39
GRN* RFS+ Power s ourcefor t h erigh t front impact s ens or
*: Wire colors may be s ubs t it ut ed in t h is t able.
24-56
S RS Uni t Input s and Out put s at Connect or B ( 33P)
4 Door
Terminal
Number
1 ORN* ODS Sends and receives communicat ion s ignal wit h t h e ODSunit
6 L T BL U* L SA Ground for t h e driver's s ideairbag inflat or
7 YEL *
L SA+ Power s ourcefor t h e driver's s ideairbag inflat or
8 GRN*
RSA Ground for t h efront pas s enger's s ideairbag inflat or
9 PUR* RSA+ Power s ourcefor t h efront pas s enger's s ideairbag inflat or
10
BL U* L CA1 - Ground for t h e left s idecurt ain airbag inflat or
11 BRN* LCA1 +
Power s ourcefor t h e left s idecurt ain airbag inflat or
12
WHT* L RP Ground for t h e driver's s eat belt t ens ioner
13
BL U* L RP+ Power s ourcefor t h e driver's s eat belt t ens ioner
14
GRY* RRP Ground for t h e front pas s enger's s eat belt t ens ioner
15
PNK * RRP-f Power s ourcefor t h e front pas s enger's s eat belt t ens ioner
19
PNK * FL BC Driver's s eat belt buckle s wit ch
21
WHT FRBC Front pas s enger's s eat belt buckle s wit ch
23 PNK*
SS + Driver's s eat pos it ion s ens or
24 RED*
RCA1- Ground for t h erigh t s idecurt ain airbag inflat or
25
GRN' RCA1 + Power s ourcefor righ t s idecurt ain airbag inflat or
26
BRN*
S S S -
Ground for t h e rear s afing s ens or
27
RE D* SSS + Power s ourcefor t h e rear s afing s ens or
32
ORN* L SI2- Ground for t h e left s ideimpact s ens or (s econd)
33
RE D* L SI2 + Power s ourcefor t h e left s ideimpact s ens or (s econd)
34
PUR* RSI2- Ground for t h erigh t s ideimpact s ens or (s econd)
35 L T GRN* RSI2 + Power s ourcefor t h e righ t s ideimpact s ens or (s econd)
36 BRN* L BS1 - Ground for t h e left s ideimpact s ens or (firs t )
37
GRY* L BS1 + Power s ourcefor t h e left s ideimpact s ens or (firs t )
38
ORN* RBS1- Ground for t h erigh t s ideimpact s ens or (firs t )
39 BL U* RBS1 + Power s ourcefor t h e righ t s ideimpact s ens or (firs t )
(cont 'd)
24-57
S f st em Descri pt i on (cont 'd)
S RS Uni t Input s and Out put s at Connec t or B (39P)
2-Door
Ter mi nal
Number
1 ORN* ODS Sends and receives communicat ion s ignal wit h t h e ODSunit
6
L T BL U* L SA Ground for t h e driver's s ideairbag inflat or
7 YE L * L SA+ Power s ourcefor t h e driver's s ideairbag inflat or
8
GRN* RSA- Ground for t h e front pas s enger's s ideairbag inflat or
9
PUR*
RS A +
Power s ourcefor t h efront pas s enger's s ideairbag inflat or
10
BL U* L CA1- Ground for t h e left s idecurt ain airbag inflat or
11
BRN* L CA1 + Power s ourcefor t h e left s idecurt ain airbag inflat or
12
WHT*
L RP
Ground for t h e driver's s eat belt t ens ioner
13
BL U* L RP+ Power s ourcefor t h e driver's s eat belt t ens ioner
14 GRY* RRP Ground for t h e front pas s enger's s eat belt t ens ioner
15
PNK * RRP-f Power s ourcefor t h efront pas s enger's s eat belt t ens ioner
19 PNK * FL BC Driver's s eat belt buckle s wit ch
21 WHT* FRBC Front pas s enger's s eat belt buckle s wit ch
23 PNK *
S S +
Driver's s eat pos it ion s ens or
24 RE D* RCA1- Ground for t h erigh t s idecurt ain airbag inflat or
25 GRN*
RCA1 +
Power s ourcefor t h erigh t s idecurt ain airbag inflat or
36 BRN* L BS1-
Ground for t h e left s ideimpact s ens or (firs t ), left s ideimpact
s ens or (s econd)
37 GRY*
LBS1 + Power s ourcefor t h e left s ideimpact s ens or (firs t ), left s ide
impact s ens or (s econd)
38 ORN* RBS1-
Ground for t h erigh t s ideimpact s ens or (firs t ), rear s at ing s ens or,
righ t s ideimpact s ens or (s econd)
39 BL U*
RBS1 + Power s ourcefor t h erigh t s ideimpact s ens or (firs t ), rear s at ing
s ens or, righ t s ideimpact s ens or (s econd)
24-58
Ci r cui t Di agram
4-Door
*1: Wire colors may be substituted
for SRS circuits
*2: With seat heaters *4: With driver's power seat
*3: Without seat heaters *5: Without driver's power seat
:CAN line
S h i el d i ng
UNDER-HOOD
FUSE/RELAY BOX
IGNITION SWITCH
IG1 HOT in ON (II) and START (III)
DASHBOARD
WIRE
HARNESS
I
4
L J
1No, 12
5 A)
No. 5
(7.5 A)
No. 11
(10 A)
CENTER JUNCTION BOX
C401 LZ^L
22
No. 6 (7.5 A) FUSE
(PASSENGER' S
UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY BOX)
AUDIO
WIRE
HARNESS
r
20 S
BRN
F 7. x . .
DRIVER'S
J UNCTION
BOX1
"B RN
32P
3
? - I -
YEL PASSENGER' S
G
fi AIRBAG CUTOFF d
INDICATOR *
C701 L
11*
SRS
UNIT
SRS
FLOOR
WIRE C
HARNESS ^
4*:
C703
ODS UNIT
HARNESS
AAAr
41
AUDIO
WIRE
HARNESS
5T - 3T
BLU ORN
f
AIRBAG ( V) S EAT BELTf V
CUTOFF ^ RE MI NDE R
INDICATOR INDICATOR
SRS
INDICATOR
SYSTEM
CHECK
COMPULSORY
TURNING-ON
CIRCUIT
DRIVE CIRCUIT
1
JO \ FAIL-SAFE CIRCUIT ]
MAIN CIRCUIT
F-CAN TRANSCEIVER
f -WV-f
DASHBOARD
WIRE
HARNESS
YEL *
1
RED-
1
CENTER
J UNCTION
BOX
DASHBOARD
WIRE
HARNESS
CENTER J UNCTION BOX
C, , D
" 2
DASHLIGHTS
1
BRIGHTNESS L. WH T .
CONTROLLER
v v n
'
(GAUGE CONTROL MODULE)
_ 2 r|
1
w
1
BL U*
1
, 20
WHT RED
A 3| 4|
WHT*
1
RFC"
I
I
16 |
12*
1*
3
I 13*
:
| 2*
3
PTT F-CAN H F-CAN L
SRSGND2 SRSGND1
1
BLU GRN
L .
7
F T
RN Y EL
BLK
17 I
DASHBOARD
WIRE
HARNESS
ODS UNIT
ODS UNIT
HARNESS
8| 13 3| 9 14| 4 10 J 151 5J 1 1 1 1 6 1 6 |
I I I
LTGRN
1 1 1 1 1 1
BRN BLK RED
ill
BLU BLK
>1| 2 3I
BLU GRY BRN GRN WHT RED
Vo GND Vs
FRONT
PASSENGER' S
WEIGHT
SENSOR
(FRONT
INNER
SIDE)
Vo GND Vs
FRONT
PASSENGER' S
WEIGHT
SENSOR
(REAR
INNER
SIDE)
Vo GND Vs
FRONT
PASSENGER' S
WEIGHT
SENSOR
(FRONT
OUTER
SIDE)
Vo GND Vs
FRONT
PASSENGER' S
WEIGHT
SENSOR
(REAR
OUTER
SIDE)
G702
(cont'd)
S I S (Supplement al Rest rai nt Syst em)
4-Door
FRONT FRONT
PASSENGER'S PASSENGER'S
AIRBAG AIRBAG
LEFT
FRONT
IMPACT
SENSOR
RIGHT
FRONT
IMPACT
SENSOR
FIRST
INFLATOR
SECOND
INFLATOR
DRIVER'S DRIVER'S
AIRBAG AIRBAG
FIRST SECOND
INFLATOR INFLATOR
2P
I
2P
1
RIGHT ENGINE
2 1
. , . . . . I COMPARTMENT I
WIRE HARNESS BRN*
1
RED*
1
WIRE LTBLU*
1
GRN*
HARNESS
ODS UNIT
SRS
FLOOR
WIRE ORN*
HARNESS
DASHBOARD
WIRE BRN
HARNESS I
A 36]
CABLE
REEL
LT BLU*
1
GRN*
1
YEL*
1
BLU*
1
LT GRN*
1
LT BLU*
1
LT BLU*
1
BRN*
1
GRN*
1
PUR*
ODS
K-LINE WEN
LFS- LFS+ RFS- RFS+ RA1+ RA1- RA2+ Fl
SRSUNiT FLBC
LA1+ LAI- LA2+
FRBC
M
18;
DASHBOARD ',
WIRE
HARNESS I
LT BLU*
SRS FLOOR
WIRE
HARNESS
c
4 ; 1
LTBLU RED
23 J
PNK*
"it
DRIVER'S
SEAT
CENTER . P O S T O N
J UNCTION r.^SOH
YEL
1|
r
BLK
BOX
I HARNESS
DRIVER'S
SEAT
POSITION
SENSOR
DATA LINK
CONNECTOR
(DLC)
DRIVER'S
SEAT
WIRE
HARNESS
}T_ 13]
BLK
2|
YEL
1|
DRIVER'S
SEAT
POSITION
SENSOR
19|
PNK*
1
21 j
WHT*
HALL
IC
PC
DRIVER'S
SEAT BELT
BUCKLE
SWITCH
HALL
IC
FRONT
PASSENGER'S
SEAT BELT
BUCKLE
SWITCH
G701 G701
-9-
G702
24-60
* 1: Wi r e c ol or s may be subst i t ut ed
f or S R S c i r c ui t s
* 2: Wi t h dr i ver ' s power s eat
* 3: Wi t hout dr i ver ' s power s eat
L E FT S I DE
I MPACT
S E NS OR
( S ECOND)
L E F T S I DE
I MPACT
S E NS OR
(FI RST)
REAR
S AFI NG
S E NS OR
RI GHT S I DE
I MPACT
S E NS OR
( S ECOND)
RI GHT S I DE
I MPACT
S E NS OR
(FI RST)
2 P2 2P1 2 P 2 2 P 2 2P1
ORN*
1
RE D *
1
G R Y *
1
B RN*
1
B RN*
1
RE D *
1
PUR*
1
L T GRN *
1
B L U *
1
ORN*
S RS
FL OOR
WI RE
HA RNE S S
B
3
2
33 37 36 26 27 34 35 39 38
L S I 2- L SI2+ L BS 1+ L B S 1 - S S S - S S S + RS I 2- RSI2+ RBS 1+ RB S 1 -
L RP+ L RP- RRP+ RRP- L S A+ L S A - RS A + R S A - L CA1+ L CA 1 - RCA1+ RCA 1 -
B
1 3
S RS
FL OOR
WI RE
HA RNE S S
12 15 14 7 6 9 8 11 10 25 24
B L U *
1
WHT*
1
PNK *
1
GRY* Y E L *
1
L T B L U *
1
PUR*
1
GRN* GRN *
1
RE D*
DRI VER' S
S E A T B E L T
TE NS I ONE R
FRONT
PA S S E NGE R' S
S E A T B E L T
TENS I ONER
DRI VER' S
S I DE AI RBAG
I NFL ATOR
- ^ ^ J L ^ J
FRONT L E F TS I DE RI GHT S I DE
PA S S E NGE R' S CURTAI N AI RBAG CURTAI N AI RBAG
S I DE AI RBAG I NFL ATOR I NFL ATOR
I NFL ATOR
(cont 'd)
24-61
S RS (Supplemental Rest rai nt S f st em)
2-Door
UNDER-H OOD
F USE/RELAY B OX
IGNITION SWI TCH
IG1 H OT in ON (II) and START (III)
DRIVER'S UNDER-DASH F USE/RELAY B OX
DASH B OARD
WIRE
HARNESS
SRS
F LOOR
WIRE
G504
24-62
*1: Wire colors may be substituted
for SRS circuits
*2: With seat heaters
*3: Without seat heaters
*4: With driver's power seat
*5: Without driver's power seat
- : CAN line
- ; Other communication line
- : Shielding
LEFT
FRONT
IMPACT
SENSOR
RIGHT
FRONT
IMPACT
SENSOR
FRONT FRONT
PASSENGER'S PASSENGER'S
AIRBAG AIRBAG
FIRST SECOND
INFLATOR INFLATOR
DRIVER'S
AIRBAG
FIRST
DRIVER'S
AIRBAG
SECOND
INFLATOR INFLATOR
1
2 P
2i rr
2P
-
LEFT ENGINE RIGHT ENGINE '
COMPARTMENT I I COMPARTMENT I I
WIRE HARNESS BRN*
1
RED*
1
WIRE LT BLU*
1
GRN*
HARNESS
C303
r
SRS
FLOOR
WIRE
0 R N
*
HARNESS
C203 L
DASHBOARD
WIRE BRN*
1
RED*
HARNESS I I
A36 I 37 I
CABLE
REEL
LTBLU*
1
GRN*
1
YEL*
1
BLU*
1
LT GRN*
1
LT BLU*
1
LTBLU*
1
BRN*
1
GRN*' PUR*
ODS
K-LINE WEN
RFS- RFS+ RA1+ RA1- RA2+ RA2-
SRS UNIT FLBC
LA1+ LA1-
FRBC
DASHBOARD
WIRE 1
HARNESS I
LT BLU*
SRS FLOOR BnTl
WIRE t f ' .
HARNESS
P N K
CENTER
JUNCTION
BOX
1
DRIVER-S
SEAT
POSITION
SENSOR
HARNESS
RED
11
r
BLK
-
2
JU DRIVER'S
SEAT
POSITION
SENSOR
c
4,* 1|
LT BLU RED
DATA LINK
CONNECTOR
(DLC)
C702
DRIVER'S RED
11
12] "131
SEAT
WIRE
HARNESS
2Pr
BLK
DRIVER'S
SEAT
POSITION
SENSOR
19 J
PNK*
21 J
WHT*
HALL
IC
DRIVER'S
SEAT BELT
BUCKLE
SWITCH
HALL
FRONT
PASSENGER'S
SEAT BELT
BUCKLE
SWITCH
BLK
G701 G701
BLK
G702
(cont 'd)
2-Door
*: Wire colors may be substituted
for SRS circuits
RIGHT SIDE
I MP ACT
I qpiv.ic.nF? I
I (SECOND)
2 P T |
SRS
F LOOR
WIRE RED* B RN*
H ARNESS
4 P 4
LEF T SIDE
I MP ACT SENSOR
(F IRST)
LEF TSIDE
I MP ACT
SENSOR
(SECOND)
RIGHT SIDE
I MP ACT SENSOR
(F IRST)
REAR
SAF ING
SENSOR
4P 2
SRS
F LOOR C
WIRE
H ARNESS
2 P 2
4 p 2
SRS
F LOOR B L U* OR N*
WIRE
H ARNESS
4 P 3
P UR* L T GR N*
LBS1 + L B S 1-
LRP+ LRP - RRP+ RRP -
RB S1+ R B S 1-
SRS UNI T
LSA+ LS A- RSA+ RS A- LCA1+ L C A1- RCA1+ R CA1-
B
13
SRS
F LOOR
WIRE
H ARNESS
B L U* W H T * P NK * GRY * Y EL* LT B LU* P UR* GRN*
DRIVER'S
SEAT BELT
TENSIONER
F RONT
PASSENGER'S
SEAT BELT
TENSIONER
DRIVER'S
SIDE AI RB AG
INF LATOR
F RONT
PASSENGER'S
SIDE AI RB AG
INF LATOR
LEF T SIDE RIGHT SIDE
CURTAIN AI RB AG CURTAIN AI RB AG
INF LATOR INF LATOR
24-64
DTC Ti ~Gubi!eshoot i ng
PTC 11 -1x { " K " can be 0, 2 t hr u 3 or A t hr u F):
Open io the Dri ver' s Ai rbag Fi rst Inflator
DTC 11<4x (" x" can be 0, 2 t hr u 9 or A t hr u F):
Open in t he Dri ver' s Ai rbag Sec ond Inflator
. SRSInflat or Simulat or 07SAZ -TB4011A
. SRSSimulat or L ead J 070AZ -SNAA100
NOTE :
Before doing t h is t roubles h oot ing procedure, review
SRSPrecaut ions and Procedures (s ee page24-25),
24-36), and Bat t ery Terminal Dis connect ion and
2-door: Before replacing t h e SRSunit , ch eck t h e SRS
unit s oft ware vers ion wit h t h e HDS. If t h e s oft ware
vers ion is not t h e lat es t , updat et h e SRSunit s oft ware
(s ee page24-39), and ret es t .
1. Clear t h e DTC wit h t h e HDS (s ee page24-38).
2. Turn t h eignit ion s wit ch t o ON (II), t h en wait for 10
sec onds.
3. Ch eck for DTCs wit h t h e HDS (s ee page24-37).
Is DTC 11-1x or 11-4x indicated?
Go t o Troubles h oot ing Int ermit t ent Failures (s ee page
24-38). If anot h er DTC is indicat ed, t roubles h oot t h e
DTC. 11
5. Dis connect t h e negat ive cablefromt h e bat t ery, t h en
wait at leas t 3 minut es .
6. Dis connect t h e driver's airbag 4P connect or (A) from
t h e cablereel 4P connect or.
07SAZ-TB4011A
7. Connect t h e SRSinflat or s imulat or (2 Q connect ors )
and s imulat or lead J t o t h e cablereel.
8. Reconnect t h e negat ive cablet o t h e bat t ery.
NO~Open in t h e driver's airbag firs t or s econd inflat or;
replacet h e driver's airbag (s ee page24-211), t h en
clear t h e DTC.B
(cont 'd)
24-65
13. Removet h e column cover (s ee page20-181), t h en
dis connect t h e das h board wire h arnes s 4P connect or
(A) fromt h e cablereel 4P connect or.
14. Connect t h e SRSinflat or s imulat or (2 O connect ors )
and t h e s imulat or lead J t o t h e das h board wire
h arnes s .
NO-Open in t h e cablereel; replacet h e cablereel (s ee
page24-225), t h en clear t h e DTC.H
20. Dis connect SRSunit connect or A (39P) fromt h e SRS
unit (s ee s t ep 11 on page24-36).
21. Dis connect t h e SRSinflat or s imulat or fromt h e SRS
s imulat or lead. Do not dis connect t h e s imulat or lead
fromt h e das h board wire h arnes s 4P connect or.
22. Meas uret h e res is t ancebet ween t h e t erminals of bot h
SRSs imulat or leads . Th ere s h ould be les s t h an 1.0 O.
DASHBOARD WIRE HARNES S
4P CONNECTOR
Is the resistance as specified?
YE S-Fault y SRSunit or poor connect ion at SRSunit
connect or A (39P) and t h e SRSunit . Ch eck t h e
connect ion bet ween t h e connect or and t h e SRSunit .
If t h e connect ion is OK , replacet h e SRSunit (s ee page
24-228).H
NO-Open in t h e das h board wire h arnes s ; replacet h e
das h board wire h arnes s , t h en clear t h e DTC.H
24-66
DTC 11-11: Short to Anot her Ai rbag Inflator in
the Dri ver' s Ai rbag Fi rst Inflator (4-door)
NOTE: Bef or e doi ng t h is t roubles h oot ingpr oc edur e,
r evi ew S RS Precaut ions and Procedures (see page
24-25), Gener al Troubles h oot ing Informat ion (see page
24-36), and Bat t ery Ter mi nal Di sconnect i on and
1. Cl ear t he DTC wi t h t he HDS (see page 24-38).
2. Turn t h e ignit ion s wit ch t o ON (II), t h en wait for 10
s econds .
NO-l nt er mi t t ent failure, t h e s ys t emis OK at t h is t ime.
DTC.B
Is DTC 12-11 or 12-41 indicated with DTC 11-11?
NO-Go t o s t ep 9.
7. Dis connect SRS unit connect or A (39P) fromt h e SRS
8. Ch eck for cont inuit y bet ween t h e t erminals of SRS
unit connect or A (39P) according t o t h e t able. Th ere
s h ould be no cont inuit y.
DTC Fromt erminal To t erminal
12-11 No. 3 No. 5 12-11
No. 4 No. 6
12-41 No. 3 No. 9 12-41
No. 4 No. 10
u
I
u
/ /
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
/
I
A
/ / /
16 17 18 20
/ /
I
26
j
27 28 29
/
31
/
36 37 38 39
I
YE S-Sh ort t o anot h er wirein t h e das h board wire
h arnes s ; replacet h e das h board wire h arnes s , t h en
cl ear t he DTC. B
NO-Fault y SRS unit ; replacet h e SRS unit (s ee page
24-228).B
(cont 'd)
24-67
12. Ch eck for cont inuit y bet ween SRS unit connect or A
(39P) t erminals No. 3 and No. 7, and No. 4 and No. 8,
res pect ively. Th ere s h ould be no cont inuit y.
24-228).H
13. Dis connect t h e driver's airbag 4P connect or fromt h e
cablereel 4P connect or (s ee s t ep 2 on page24-33).
f "
26 27 28 29
4 5 6 7 8 9
17
31
20
10
36 37 38 39
15. Removet h e column cover (s ee page20-181), t h en
r-<2>-
pr
26 27 28 29
4 5 6 7 8 9
17
31
10
37 38 39
clear t h e DTC.H
NO-Sh ort in t h e cablereel; replacet h e cablereel (s ee
NO-Fault y driver's airbag; replacet h e driver's airbag
(s ee page24-211), t h en clear t h e DTC.H
24-68
DTC 11-41: Shor t to Anot her Ai r bag Inflator in
t he Dri ver' s Ai rbag Sec ond Inflator (4-door)
NOTE : Before doing t h is t roubles h oot ing procedure,
review SRSPrecaut ions and Procedures (s ee page
24-25), General Troubles h oot ing Informat ion (s ee page
s econds .
DTC.B
NO-Sh ort t o anot h er wirein t h e das h board wire
clear t h e DTC.B
s h ould beno cont inuit y.
12-11 No. 7 No. 5 12-11
No. 8 No. 6
12-41 No. 7 No. 9 12-41
No. 8 No. 10
ll ll
/ /
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
/
/
/ / /
16 17 18 20
/ / /
26
J
27 28 29
/
31
/
36 37 38 39
clear t h e DTC.B
NO-Fault y SRSunit ; replacet h e SRSunit (s ee page
24-228).B
24-69
RS (Syppi emei i t al Rest rai nt Syst em)
DTC 11-3x {"x" can be i t hru 9 or A t hr u F):
Shor t to Anot her Wi re or Decr eased
Resi st ance in t he Dri ver' s Ai rbag Fi rst Inflator
DTC 11-6x ("x" can be 0 t hru 9 or A t hr u F):
Resi st ance in t he Dri ver' s Ai rbag Sec ond
Inflator
* SRSInflat or Simulat or 07SAZ -TB4011A
SRSSimulat or L ead J 070AZ -SNAA100
. SRSSh ort Canceller 070AZ -SAA0100
NOTE :
#Before doing t h is t roubles h oot ing procedure, review
Reconnect ion (s ee page22-91),
unit s oft ware vers ion wit h t h e HDS. Ift h e s oft ware
s econds .
Is DTC 11-3x or 11 -6x indicated?
DTC.B
07SAZ-TB4011A
NO-Sh ort t o anot h er wirein t h e driver's airbag firs t or
s econd inflat or; replacet h e driver's airbag (s ee page
24-211), t h en clear t h e DTC.B
24-70
12. Di sconnect t he negat i ve cabl e f r om t he bat t ery, t hen
wai t at l east 3 mi nut es.
13. Remove t he c ol umn c over (see page 20-181), t hen
di sconnect dashboar d wi r e har ness 4P connect or (A)
f rom t he cabl e reel 4P connect or .
14. Connect t h e SRS inflat or s imulat or (2 O connect ors )
h arnes s .
NO-Sh ort t o anot h er wirein t h e cablereel; replacet h e
cablereel (s ee page24-225), t h en clear t h eDTC.H
uni t (s ee s t ep 11 on page24-36).
21. Dis connect t h e SRS inflat or s imulat or fromt h e SRS
22. Connect t h e SRS s h ort cancellers (070AZ -SAA0100)
t o SRS unit connect or A (39P) t erminals No. 3 and No.
4, and t o t erminals No. 7 and No. 8 (s ee page24-32).
SRS s imulat or leads . Th ereshoul d be an open circuit
or at leas t 1 MQ.
DASHBOARD WIRE HARNESS
4P CONNECTOR
YE S-Fault y SRS unit or poor connect ion at SRS unit
connect or A (39P) and t h eSRS unit . Ch eck t h e
connect ion bet ween t h e connect or and t h eSRS unit .
If t h e connect ion is OK , replacet h e SRS unit (s ee page
24-228).^
ISSO-Sh ort t o anot h er wirein t h e das h board wire
clear t h e DTCS
24-71
DTC 11-8x (" x" can be t h r u S or A t hr u F):
Shor t to Power In t he Dri ver' s Ai r bag Fi rst
Inflator
DTC 11-Ax (" x" c an be 0 t h r u 9 r A t h r u F):
Shor t to Power In t he Dri ver' s Ai r bag Sec ond
Inflator
NOTE :
Beforedoing t h is t roubles h oot ing procedure, review
24-36), and Bat t erv Terminal Dis connect ion and
2-door: Beforereplacing t h e SRSunit , ch eck t h e SRS
s econds .
Is DTC 11-8x or 11-Ax indicated?
DTC.B
07SAZ-TB4011A
Is DTC 11-Sx or 11-Ax indicated?
NO-Sh ort t o power in t h e driver's airbag firs t or
24-72
12. Di sc onnec t t he negat i ve c abl e f rom t he bat t ery, t hen
13. Remove t he c ol umn c over (see page 20-181), t hen
h arnes s .
15. Reconrect t h e negat ive cablet o t h e bat t ery.
17. Ch eck 1or DTCs wit h t h e HDS (s ee page24-37).
is DTC 11-8x or 11-Ax indicated?
NO -Short t o power in t h e cablereel; replacet h e cable
reel (s ee page24-225), t h en clear t h e DTC.H
24. Meas uret h e volt age bet ween each t erminal of t h e
SRS s imulat or lead and body ground. Th ere s h ould
be les s t h an 0.2 V.
DAS HBOARD WI RE HARNES S
4P CONNECTOR
Is the voltage as specified?
connect or A (39P) and t h e SRS unit . Ch eck t h e
connect ion bet ween t h e connect or and t h e SRS unit .
24-228).H
NO-Sh ort t o power in t h e das h board wire h arnes s ;
replacet h e das h board wire h arnes s , t h en clear t h e
DTC.H
24-73
S I S (Supplemental Rest rai nt Syst em)
DTC 11-9x (" x" can be t hr u 9 or A t hr u F):
Short to Gr ound in the Dri ver' s Ai r bag Fi rst
Inflator
DTC 11-Bx (" x" can be 0 t hr u 9 or A t hr u F):
Shor t to Gr ound in the Dri ver' s Ai rbag Sec ond
Inflator
SRSInflat or Simulat or 07SAZ -TB4011A
NOTE :
. vers ion is not t h e lat es t , updat et h e SRSunit s oft ware
s econds .
Is DTC 11-9x or 11-Bx indicated?
DTC.B
07SAZ-TB4011A
7 Connect t h e SRSinflat or s imulat or (2 O connect ors )
8. Reconnect t h e negat ive cablefromt h e bat t ery.
9. Clear t h eDTC wit h t h e HDS (s ee page24-38).
NO-Sh ort t o ground in t h e driver's airbag firs t or
24-74
12. Di sconnect t he negat i ve cabl e f r om t he battery, t hen
13. Remove t he col umn c over (see page 20-181 )r t hen
di sconnect t he dashboar d wi r e har ness 4P connect or
(A) f r om t he cabl e r eel 4P connect or .
070AZ-SNAA100
19. Di sc onnec t t he negat i ve cabl e f r om t he bat t ery, t hen
20. Di sc onnec t S RS uni t connect or A (39P) fromt h e SRS
22. Meas uret h e res is t ancebet ween each t erminal of t h e
SRS s imulat or lead and body ground. Th eres h ould
be an open circuit or at leas t 1 MO.
4P CONNECTOR
07SAZ-TB4011A
h arnes s .
NO-Sh ort t o ground in t h e cablereel; replacet h e
cablereel (s ee page24-225), t h en clear t h eDTC.H
If t h econnect ion is OK , replacet h e SRS unit (s ee page
24-228).H
NO-Sh ort t o ground in t h e das h board wire h arnes s :
DTC. IS
24-75
DTC 12-1x (" x" can be 0, 2 t hr u 9 or A t hr u F):
Open in the Front Passenger ' s Ai r bag Fi rst
Inflator
DTC 12-4x (" x" can be 0
#
2 t hr u 9 or A t hr u F):
Open in the Front Passenger ' s Ai r bag Sec ond
Inflator
NOTE :
Recorifiect ion (s ee page22-91).
2-door: Before replacingt h e SRSunit , ch eck t h e SRS
unit s oft ware vers ion wit h t h eHDS. If t h e s oft ware
s econds .
Is DTC 12-1x or 12-4x Indicated?
DTC.H
6. Open t h e glove box. Removet h e glove box s t op on
t h e righ t s ide, t h en let t h e glove box h ang down (s ee
page20-174).
7. Det ach t h e connect or clip, t h en dis connect t h e
das h board wire h arnes s 4P connect or (A) fromfront
pas s enger's airbag 4P connect or.
and s imulat or lead J t o t h e das h board wire h arnes s .
Is DTC 12-1x or 12~4x indicated?
NO-Open in t h e front pas s enger's airbag firs t or
s econd inflat or; replacet h e front pas s enger's airbag
(s ee page24-212), t h en clear t h e DTC.H
24-76
SRSs imulat or leads . Th ere s h ould be les s t h an 1.0 O.
DASHBOARD WI RE HARNES S
4P CONNECTOR
is the resistance as specified?
connect or A (39P). Ch eck t h e connect ion; ift h e
connect ion is OK , replacet h e SRSunit (s ee page
24-228).B
NO-Open in t h e das h board wire h arnes s ; replacet h e
das h board wire h arnes s , t h en clear t h e DTC.IH
the Front Passenger ' s Ai rbag Fi rst Inflator
(4-door)
NOTE : Beforedoing t h is t roubles h oot ing procedure,
s econds .
DTC.B
is DTC 11-11 or 11-41 indicated with DTC 12-11?
clear t h e DTC.B
(cont 'd)
24-77
SMS (Suppl ement al Rest rai nt Syst em)
11-11
No. 5 No. 3
11-11
No. 6 No. 4
11-41 No. 5 No. 7 11-41
No. 6 No. 8
ll ll
/
,3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
/
/ / / /
16 17 18
/
20
/ / / /
26 27 28 29
i /
31
"TI
V
r 7
V
i /
36137 38|39
y
1 1 v
L
v v v v 1 1 1 1
id
clear t h e DTC.H
24-228).B
the Front Passenger ' s Ai rbag Sec ond Inflator
(4-door)
review SRS Precaut ions and Procedures (s ee page
s econds .
YE S-Go t o s t ep 4. . . ' .
NO-lnt ermit t ent failure, t h e s ys t emis OK at t h is t ime.
DTC.H
NO-Go t o s t ep 9.
n
Wm:P ^ J IM
8. Check for conti nui ty between t h e termi nal s of SRS
unit connector A (39P) accordi ng t o t h e t able. Th ere
s houl d be no conti nui ty.
PTC Fromt erminal To t erminal
11-11
No. 9 No. 3
11-11
No. 10 No. 4
11-41 No. 9 No. 7 11-41
No. 10 Vo. 8
clear t h e DTC.B
24-228).B
H8 >-
24-228).B
13. Dis connect t h e das h board wire h arnes s 4P connect or
fromt h e front pas s enger's airbag (s ee s t ep 3 on page
24-34).
(cont 'd)
24-79
14. Ch eck for cont inuit y bet weenS RS uni t connect or A
(39P) No. 5and No. 9, and No. 6 and No. 10f
Wire c i Jo v>T (" cinaie terminals
clear t h e DTC.B
NO-Fault y front pas s enger's airbag; replacet h efront
pas s enger's airbag (s ee page24-212), t h en clear t h e
DTC.B
DTC 12-3x (" x" can be 0 t hr u 9 or A t hr u F):
Resi st ance in the Front Passenger ' s Ai r bag
Fi rst Inflator
DTC 12-Sx c an be 0 t hr u 9 or A t hr u F): .
Resi st ance in the Front Passenger ' s Ai r bag
Sec ond Inflator
NOTE :
m2-door: Before replacing t h e SRSunit , ch eck t h e SRS
s econds .
DTC.B
24-80
page 20-174).
NO -Short t o anot h er wirein t h efront pas s enger's
airbag firs t or s econd inflat or; replacet h efront
pas s enger's airbag (s ee page24-212), t h en clear t h e
DTC.B
16. Connect t h e SRS s h ort cancellers (070AZ -SAA0100)
t o SRS unit connect or A (39P) t erminals No. 5 and
No. 6, and t o t erminals No. 9 and No. 10 (s ee page
24-32).
SRS s imulat or leads . Th ere s h ould be an open circuit
or at leas t 1 MO.
DASHBOARD WIRE HARNES S
4P CONNECTOR
24-228J.B
clear t h e DTC.B
24-81
DTC 12-8x (" x" c an be t hr u 9 or A t hr u F):
Shor t to Power In the Front Passenger ' s
Ai rbag Fi rst i nflator
DTC 12-Ax (" x" mm be 0 t hr u 9 or A t hr u F):
Shor t to Power in the Front Passenger ' s
Ai rbag Sec ond Inflator
. SRS Inflat or Simulat or 07SAZ -TB4011A
. SRS Simulat or L ead J 070AZ -SNAA100
NOTE :
@Beforedoing t h is t roubles h oot ing procedure, review
SRS Precaut ions and Procedures (s ee page24-25),
neconnect ion (s ee page22-91).
vers ion is not t h e lat es t , updat e t h e SRSunit s oft ware
s econds .
DTC.B
6. Open t h e glove box. Remove t h e glove box s t op on
t h erigh t s ide, t h en let t h e glove box h ang down (s ee
page20-174).
NO-Sh ort t o power in t h efront pas s enger's airbag
firs t or s econd inflat or; replacet h efront pas s enger's
airbag (s ee page24-212), t h en clear t h e DTC.B
12. Turn t he i gni ti on swi t ch t o L OCK (0). /
14. Di sconnect SRS- uni t connect or A (39P) f r om t he S RS
uni t (see st ep 11on page 24-36).
15. Di sconnect t he S RS i nflator si mul at or f r om t he S RS
:
si mul at or l ead. Do not di sconnect t he si mul at or l ead
' fromt h e das h board wire h arnes s 4P connect or.
16. Rec onnec t t he negat i ve cabl e to t he battery. '
17. Tur n t he Igni ti on swi t c h t o ON (II). ..
18. Measur e t he vol t age between, eac h t er mi nal of t he
S RS si mul at or l ead and body gr ound. Ther e shoul d
be l ess t han 0.2 V.
DASHBOARD WI RE HARNES S
4P CONNECTOR
Is t he volt age as specified?
connect or A (39P) and t h e SRSunit . Check t he
connect ion bet ween t h e connect or and t h eS RS uni t.
If t h e connect ion is OK , replacet h e SRSunit (s ee page
24-228J.B
NO-Sh ort t o power in t h e das h board wire h arnes s ;
DTC.B
DTC 12-Sx can- be t hr u S or A t hr u F):
Shor t t o.Ground i n t he Front Passenger ' s
Ai rbag Fi rst Inflator
DTC 12-Bx ("M" mm be 0 t hr u S or; A t hr u F):
Shor t to Gr ound in t he Front Passenger ' s
Ai rbag Sec ond Inflator
NOTE :
Reconnect !on (s ee page22-91).
' 2-door: Beforereplacing t h e SRSunit , ch eck t h e SRS
vers ion is not t h el at est , updat e t h e SRSunit s oft ware
(s ee page24-39), and ret est .
1. Clear t h e DTC wit h t he HDS (s eepage 24-38).
s econds .
is DTC 12-9x or 12-Bx indicat ed?
YE S-Go t o step. 4.
Go t o Troubles h oot ingIntermi ttent Failures (s ee page
DTC.B
(cont 'd)
24-83
S RS (Supplemental Restrai nt Syst em)
5. Di sconnect t he negat ive cablef r om t he bat t ery, t hen
wai t at l east 3 minut es .
6. Open t h e glove box. Removet h e glove box s t op on
t h e righ t s ide, t h en let t h e glove box h ang down (s ee
page20-174).
NO-Sh ort t o ground in t h e front pas s enger's airbag
firs t or s econd inflat or; replacet h e front pas s enger's
airbag (s ee page24-212), t h en clear t h e DTC.il
SRS s imulat or lead and body ground. Th ere s h ould
be an open circuit or at leas t 1 MQ.
4P CONNECTOR
Ift h e connect ion is OK , replacet h e SRS unit (s ee page
24-228).B
NO-Sh ort t o ground in t h e das h board wire h arnes s ;
DTC.B
24-84
DTC 21-1x (" x" c an be O
r
2 t hr u 3 or A t hr u F):
Open in t he Dri ver' s Seat Belt Tensi oner
. S RS Si mul at or Lead K 070AZ -SNAA200
S RS Shor t Canc el l er 070AZ -SAA0100
NOTE :
o Beforedoing t h is t roubles h oot ing procedure, review
s econds .
Is DTC 21-1x Indicated?
DTC.B
6.4-door: Removet h e left s ideB-pillar lower t rim (s ee
page20-110).
7.2-door: Removet h e rear left s idet rim panel (s ee page
20-132).
8. Dis connect t h e SRSfloor wire h arnes s 4P connect or
(A) fromt h e driver's s eat belt t ens ioner 4P connect or.
070AZ-SNAA200
and s imulat or lead K t o t h e SRSfloor wire h arnes s .
Is DTC 21-1x indicated?
NO-Open in t h e driver's s eat belt t ens ioner; replace
t h e driver's s eat belt , 4-door (s ee page24-10), 2-door
(s ee page24-5),t h en clear t h e DTC.B
(cont 'd)
24-85
SfrtS {Suppl ement al Rest rai nt S f st em)
DTC Troubl eshoot i ng fcont'd)
15. Di sconnect S RS uni t connect or B (39P) f r om t he SRS
16. Connect an SRS s h ort canceller (070AZ -SAA0100) t o
SRS unit connect or B (39P) t erminals No. 12 and
No. 13 (s ee page24-32).
17. Meas uret h e res is t ancebet ween SRS unit connect or
B (39P) t erminals No. 12 and No. 13. Th ere s h ould be
2.0-3.0 O.
u
1 6 7 8 9 10 11
u
12 13 14 15
/
/
19
/
21
/
23 24 25
:>6)(27
>/ /
/
(32) (33) (34) (35)
36 37 38 39
J
a
?
u
connect or B (39P) and t h e SRS unit . Ch eck t h e
connect ion; if t h e connect ion is OK , replacet h e SRS
unit (s ee page24-228).B
IMO-Open in t h e SRS floor wire h arnes s ; replacet h e
SRS floor wire h arnes s , t h en clear t h e DTC.B
DTC 21-11: Short to Anot her Wi r e in the
Dri ver' s Seat Belt Tensi oner (4-door)
review S RS Precaut ions and Procedures (s ee page
s econds .
NO-l nt er mi t t ent f ai l ur e, t h e s ys t emis OK at t h is t i me.
DTC.B
Is DTC 22-11, 31-11, 32-11, 33-11, or 34-11 indicated
with DTC 21-11?
NO-Sh ort t o anot h er wirein t h e SRS floor wire
h arnes s ; replacet h e SRS floor wire h arnes s , t h en
clear t h e DTC.B
7. Dis connect SRS unit connect or B (39P) fromt h e SRS
24-86
8. Check f or continuity between the terminals of S RS
unit connector B (39P) according to the table. There
should be no continuity.
DTC Fr om t er mi nal To terminal
22-11 No. 12 No. 14 22-11
No. 13 No. 15
31-11 No. 12 No. 6 31-11
No. 13 No. 7
32-11 No. 12 No. 8 32-11
No. 13 No. 9
33-11 No. 12 No 10 33-11
No. 13 No. 11
34-11 No. 12 No 24 34-11
No. 13 No. 25
S RS UNIT CONNECTOR B (39P)
t f
1
/ / /
V
6 7 8 9 10 11
12 13 14 15 19
/
21
/
23 24 25
26 27
/
32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39
L
I 0
YE S-Sh ort t o anot h er wirein t h e SRSfloor wire
h arnes s ; replacet h e SRSfloor wire h arnes s , t h en
clear t h e DTC.B
24-228).B
Resi st ance in the Dr i ver ' s Seat Belt Tensi oner
- SRSInflat or Simulat or 07SAZ -TB4011A
. SRSSimulat or L ead K 070AZ -SNAA200
SRSSh ort Canceller 070AZ -SAA0100
NOTE :
s econds .
Is DTC 21-3x indicat ed?
NO-lnt ermi t t ent failure, t h e s ys t em is OK at t h is t ime.
DTC.B
(cont 'd)
24-87
SRS (Supplemental Restraint System)
5.. Dis connect t h e negat ive cablefrom t h e bat t ery, t h en
6.4-door: Removet h e left s ideB-pillar lower t rim (s ee
page20-110).
20-132).
(A) from t h e driver's s eat belt t ens ioner 4P connect or.
NO-Sh ort t o anot h er wirein t h e driver's s eat belt
t ens ioner; replacet h e driver's s eat belt , 4-door (s ee
page24-10), 2-door (s ee page24-5), t h en clear t h e
DTC.B
14. Dis connect t h e negat ive cablefrom t h e bat t ery, t h en
15. Dis connect SRSunit connect or B (39P) from t h e SRS
16. Dis connect t h e s imulat or lead fromt h e SRSfloor wire
h arnes s .
17. Connect an SRSs h ort canceller (070AZ -SAA0100) t o
SRSunit connect or B (39P) t erminals No. 12 and
No. 13 (s ee page24-32).
18. Meas uret h e res is t ancebet ween SRSunit connect or
an open circuit or at leas t 1 MQ.
U
1
/ / / /
6 7 8 9 10 11
U
12 13 14 15
/ / /
19
/
21
/
23 24 25
,!6)(27
/
(32) (33) (34) (35)
36 37 38 39
J
d
y
connect or B (39P) and t h e SRSunit . Ch eck t h e
connect ion; ift h e connect ion is OK , replacet h e SRS
unit (s ee page24-228).fl
NO-Sh ort t o anot h er wirein t h e SRSfloor wire
clear t h e DTC.B
24 88
Short to Power In the Dri ver's Seat Belt
Tensi oner
. S RS Simulat or Lead K 070AZ -SNAA200
NOTE :
s econds .
DTC.B
5. Dis connect t h e negat ive cablefrom t h ebat t ery, t h en
6.4-door: Removet h eleft s ideB-pillar lower t rim (s ee
page20-110).
20-132).
(A) from t h e driver's s eat belt t ens ioner 4P connect or.
9. Connect t h e SRSinflat or s imulat or (2O connect ors )
NO-Sh ort t o power in t h e driver's s eat belt t ens ioner;
replacet h e driver's s eat belt , 4-door (s ee page24-10),
2-door (s ee page24-5), t h en clear t h e DTC.B
(cont 'd)
24-89
h arnes s .
19. Meas uret h e volt age bet ween body ground and SRS
unit connect or B (39P) t erminals No. 12 and No. 13,
individually. Th ere s h ould be les s t h an 0.2 V.
S R S UNIT C n WN F r.TOR R (VI P I
unit (s ee page24-228).H
NO-Sh ort t o power in t h e SRS floor wire h arnes s ;
replacet h e SRS floor wire h arnes s , t h en clear t h e
DTC.B
DTC 21-9x (" x" can be 0 thru 9 or A thru F):
Short to Ground in the Driver's Seat Belt
Tensioner
SRS Inflat or Simulat or 07SAZ -TB4011A
. SRS Simulat or L ead K 070AZ -SNAA200
NOTE :
2-door: Before replacing t h e SRS unit , ch eck t h e SRS
vers ion is not t h e lat es t , updat et h e SRS unit s oft ware
s econds .
DTC.B
24-90
4. Turnt he i gni ti on swi t ch to L OCK (0).
5. Di sconnect the negat i ve cabl e from the battery, then-
wait at l east 3 mi nut es.
6.4-door: Remove the left si de B-pillar l ower trim(see
page 20-110).
7.2-door: Remove t he rear left si de trimpanel (see page
20-132).
8. Di sconnect the S RS f l oor wi r e har ness 4P connect or
(A) f r om the dr i ver ' s seat belt t ensi oner 4P connect or .
0 7 0 AZ- S NA A 200
9. Connect t h eSRS inflat or s imulat or (2 0 connect ors )
and s imulat or lead K t o t h eSRS floor wire h arnes s .
11. Clear t h eDTC wit h t h eHDS (s ee page24-38).
12. Ch eck for DTCs wit h t h eHDS (s ee page24-37).
NO-Sh ort t o ground in t h e driver's s eat belt t ens ioner;
replacet h e driver's s eat belt , 4-door (s ee page24-10),
2-door (s ee page24-5), t h en clear t h e DTC.H
16. Dis connect t h e s imulat or lead fromt h eSRS floor wire
h arnes s .
17. Meas uret h e res is t ancebet ween body ground and
No. 13, individually. Th ere s h ould bean open circuit
or at leas t 1 MQ.
S RS UNI TCONNECTOR B (39P)
12
13
(26)(27)
14 19
(32)(33)(34)(35)36
21
10
23
37
11
24
38
25
39
Is t he resist ance as specified?
connect or B (39P) and t h eSRS unit . Ch eck t h e
NO-Sh ort t o ground in t h eSRS floor wire h arnes s ;
replacet h eSRS floor wire h arnes s , t h en clear t h e
DTC.H
24-91
SRS (Supplemental Restraint Sf stem)
DTC 22-1x (" x" o n be 0.2 thru 9 or A thru F):
Open in t he Front Passenger ' s Seat Belt
Tensi oner
Spec i al Tool s Required
. S RS Si mul at or Lead K 070AZ -SNAA200
S RS Shor t Canc el l er 070AZ -SAA0100
NOTE :
vers ion is not t h e lat es t , updat e t h e SRSunit s oft ware
s econds .
Is DTC 22-1 x Indicat ed?
DTC. B
4 Turn t h eignit ion s wit ch t o L OCK (0).
6.4-door: Remove t h erigh t s ideB-pillar lower t rim (s ee
page20-110).
7.2-door: Remove t h e rear righ t s idet rim panel (s ee
page20-132).
(A) fromt h efront pas s enger's s eat belt t ens ioner 4P
connect or.
11_ Clear t h e DTC wit h t h e HDS (s ee page24-38).
Is DTC 22-1 x indicat ed?
NO-Open in t h efront pas s enger's s eat belt t ensi oner ;
replacet h efront pas s enger's s eat belt , 4-door (s ee
page24-10), 2-door (s ee page24-5), t h en clear t h e
DTC.B
24-92
14 Di sconnect t he negat i ve cabl e f r om t he bat t ery, t hen
16. Connect an SRS s h ort canceller (070AZ -SAA0100) t o
No. 15 (s ee page24-32).
2.0-3.0 O.
SRS UNI T CONNECTOR B (39P)
U
1
/ /
/
6 7 8 9 10 11
U
12 13 14 15
/
/
19
/
21
/
23 24 25
(26#27)
/ v
/
(32) (33) (34) (35)
36 37 38 39
J
f
u
unit (s ee page 24-228).B
NO-Open in t h e SRS floor wire h arnes s ; replacet h e
SRS floor wire h arnes s , t h en clear t h e DTC. B
DTC 22-11: Shor t to Anot her Wi re in t he Front
Passenger ' s Seat Belt Tensi oner (4-door)
s econds .
24-38). I f anot h er DTC is indicat ed, t roubles h oot t h e
DTC.B
Is DTC 21-11, 31-11, 32-11, 33-11, or 34-11 indicat ed
wit h DTC 22-11?
clear t h e DTC.B
(cont 'd)
24- 93
SRS- (Supplemental Res t rai nt Sf s t em)
unit connect or B (39P) according t o t h e t able. Th ere
21-11 No. 14 No. 12 21-11
No. 15 No. 13
31-11 No. 14 No ? 31-11
No. 15 No. 7
32-11 No. 14 No S 32-11
No. 15 No. 9
33-11 No. 14 No. 10 33-11
No. 15 No. 11
34-11 No. 14 No. 24 34-11
No. 15 No. 25
SRS U N I T C O N N E C T O R B (39P)
LT
1 6 7 8 9 10 11
LT
12 13 14 15 19
/
21
/
23 24 25
26 27
/
32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39
J
u
clear t h e DTC.H
NO-Fault y SRSunit ; replacet h e SRSunit {s ee page
24-228).H
Resi st ance in t he Front Passenger ' s Seat Belt
Tensi oner
NOTE :
s econds .
DTC.H
24- 94
19 1
5. Disconnect the negative cable fromthe battery, then
wait at least 3 minutes.
6.4-door; Remove the right side B-pillar lower trim (see
page20-110).
7.2-door: Remove t h e rear righ t s idet rim panel (s ee
page20-132).
connect or.
11 Clear t h e DTC wit h t h e HDS (s ee page24-38).
NO-Sh ort t o anot h er wirein t h efront pas s enger's
s eat belt t ens ioner; replacet h efront pas s enger's s eat
belt , 4-door (s ee page24-10), 2-door (s ee page24-5),
t h en clear t h e DTC.B
15. Dis connect SRSunit connect or B (39P) fromt h e SRS
h arnes s .
No. 15 (s ee page24-32).
an open circuit or at leas t 1 MO.
U
1 6 7 8 9 10 11
U
12 13 14 15
/
19
/
21
/
23 24 25
( 26) ( 27) ( 32) ( 33) ( 34) ( 35)
36 37 38 39
J ,
d
?
u
clear t h e DTC.B
S RS (Suppl ement al Rest rai nt Sf st em)
DTC Tr oybi eshoot i i i g ( c o n t ' d )
DTC 22-8x {"x
,r
can be 0 t hr u 9 or A t hr u F):
Shor t to Power in the Front Passenger ' s Seat
Belt Tensi oner
NOTE :
( i c i o p a y e t - r o c ; ) , a n d i "66S t.
s econds .
DTC.H
6.4-door: Removet h e righ t s ideB-pillar lower t rim (s ee
page20-110).
7.2-door: Removet h e rear righ t s idet rim panel (s ee
page20-132).
connect or.
NO-Sh ort t o power in t h e front pas s enger's s eat belt
t ens ioner; replacet h e front pas s enger's s eat belt ,
4-door (s ee page24-10), 2-door (s ee page24-5), t h en
clear t h e DTC.B
24-96
14. Dis connect t he negat ivecabl e f r om t he bat t ery, t hen
15. Dis connect SRSuni t connect or B(39P) f r om t he SRS
uni t (see st ep 11 on page 24-36).
16. Dis connect t he s imulat or lead f r om t he SRSf l oor wi r e
h arnes s .
17. Reconnect t he negat ivecabl e to t he bat t ery.
individually. Th ere s h ould be les s t h an 0.2 V.
y
1
/
/
/ / /
6 7 8 9 10 11
y
12 13 14 1 5
/
19
/
21
/
23 24 25
(26) (27)
/
' /
(32) (33) (34) ( 35)
36 37 38 39
J L
NO-Sh ort t o power in t h e SRSfloor wire h arnes s ;
replacet h e SRSfloor wire h arnes s , t h en clear t h e
DTC.B
DTC 22-Sx (" x" c an be 0 t hr u 9 or A t hr u F):
Shor t to Gr ound in t he Front Passenger ' s Seat
Belt Tensi oner
NOTE :
s econds .
DTC.B
(cont 'd)
24-97
S RS (Suppl ement al Rest rai nt S f st em)
4. Tur n the i gni ti on s wi tch to LOCK ( 0).
5. Di sconnect t h enegati ve cabl e fromthe battery, t h en
wai t at leas t 3 minut es .
6.4-door: Removet h erigh t s ideB-pillar lower t rim (s ee
page20-110).
7.2-door. Removet h e rear righ t s idet rim panel (s ee
page20-132).
8. Dis connect t h e SRS floor wire h arnes s 4P connect or
connect or.
070AZ-SNAA200
9. Connect t h e SRS inflat or s imulat or (2 0 connect ors )
and s imulat or lead K t o t h e SRS floor wire h arnes s .
NO-Sh ort t o ground in t h efront pas s enger's s eat belt
t ens ioner; replacet h efront pas s enger's s eat belt ,
4-door (s ee page24-10), 2-door (s ee page24-5), t h en
clear t h e DTC.H
16. Dis connect t h e s imulat or lead fromt h e SRS floor wire
h arnes s .
No. 15, individually. Th ere s h ould be an open circuit
or at leas t 1 MO.
1 ) . . _
u
1
/
/
/ /
6 7 8 9 10 11
u
12 13 14 1 5
/
19
/
21 23 24 25
(26) (27)
/
/
(32) (33) (34) (35)
36 37 38 39
u U
NO-Sh ort t o ground in t h e SRS floor wire h arnes s ;
DTC.B
24-98
12
29
DTC 31-l x (" x" can be % 2 t hr u 9 or A t hr u F):
Open in t he Dri ver' s Si de Ai r bag Inflator
. SRSInflat or Simulat or 07SAZ -TB40T1A
SRSSimulat or L ead L 070AZ -SNAA300
NOTE :
Bef or e doi ng t hi s t r oubl eshoot i ng pr ocedur e, r evi ew
S RS Pr ecaut i ons and Pr ocedur es (see page 24-25),
Gener al Tr oubl eshoot i ng/Inf or mat i on (see page
2-door: Bef ore repl aci ng t he S RS uni t , check t he S RS
uni t sof t war e ver si on wi t h t he HDS. If t he sof t war e
ver si on i s not t he l at est , updat e t he S RS uni t sof t war e
s econds .
DTC.B
(A) fromt h e driver's s ideairbag 2P connect or (B).
and s imulat or lead L t o t h e SRSfloor wire h arnes s .
NO-Open in t h e driver's s ideairbag inflat or; replace
t h e driver's s ideairbag (s ee page24-215), t h en clear
t h e DTC.B
(cont 'd)
24-99
S RS (Suppl ement al Res t r ai nt S f s t em)
DTC Troubl eshoot i ng (c ont 'd)
14. Dis connect t h e SRS inflat or s imulat or from SRS
fromt h e SRS floor wire h arnes s 2P connect or.
15. Meas uret h e res is t ancebet ween t h e t erminals of t h e
black SRS s imulat or lead (A). Th ere s h ould be les s
t h an 1.0 0.
S RS FL OOR WIRE HARNES S
2P CONNECTOR
unit (s ee page 24-228J.B
NO-Open t h e SRS floor wire h arnes s ; replacet h e SRS
floor wire h arnes s , t h en clear t h e DTC.B
DTC 31-11: Shor t to Anot her Wi re in the
Dr i ver ' s Si de Ai r bag Inflator (4-door)
s econds .
Y E S - G o t o s t ep 4.
DTC.B
with DTC 31-11?
clear t h e DTC.B
24-100
PTC Fromt erminal To t erminal
21-11 No. 6 No. 12 21-11
No. 7 No. 13
22-11 No. 6 No. 14 22-11
No. 7 No. 15
32-11 No. 6 No. 8 32-11
No. 7 No. 9
33-11 No. 6 No. 10 33-11
No. 7 No. 11
34-11 No. 6 No. 24 34-11
No. 7 No. 25
y
LT
y
1
/ / / /
6 7 8 9 10 11
LT
y y
12 13 14 15
/
19
/
21
/
23 24 25
y
26 27
/ /
32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39
l
clear t h e DTC.B
24-228).fl
DTC 31-3x (" x" c an be 0 t hr u 9 or A t hr u F):
Resi st ance in the Dr i ver ' s Si de Ai rbag Inflator
. SRSSimulat or L ead L 070AZ -SNAA300
NOTE :
s econds .
is DTC 31-3x indicat ed?
DTC.B
(cont 'd)
24-101
4. Tur n t he i gni t i o n s wi t c h to LOCK (0).
5. D i s c o n n e c t t he n e g a t i ve c a bl e f r om t he ba t t e r y, t hen
wa i t at l eas t 3 mi n u t e s .
6. D i s c o n n e c t t he f l o o r wi r e h a r n e s s 2P c o n n e c t o r (A)
f r o m t h e dr i ve r ' s s i de a i r b a g 2P c o n n e c t o r (B).
7. Connect t he S RS inflat or s imulat or (2 Q connect ors )
and s imulat or l ead L to t he S RS f l oor wi r e h arnes s .
8. Reconnect t he negat i ve cableto t he bat t ery.
9. Cl ear t he DTC wi t h t he HDS (s eepage 24-38).
NO-Sh ort t o anot h er wirein t h e driver's s ideairbag
inflat or; replacet h e driver's s ideairbag (s ee page
fromt h e SRSfloor wire h arnes s 2P connect or.
SRSunit connect or B (39P) t erminals No. 6 and No. 7
(s ee page24-32).
black SRSs imulat or lead (A). Th ere s h ould bean
open circuit or at leas t 1 MO.
S RS FL OOR WI RE HARNES S
2P CONNECTOR
clear t h e DTC.B
24-102
DTC 31-8x (" x" c a n b e t hr u 9 or A t hr u F);
Short to Power in the Dri ver' s Si de Ai r bag
Inflator
S p ec i al Tool s R e q u i r e d
. SRS Simulat or L ead L 070AZ -SNAA300
NOTE :
s econds .
Is DTC 31-Sx indicat ed?
DTC.B
Is DTC 31-Sx indicat ed?
NO-Sh ort t o power in t h e driver's s ideairbag inflat or;
replacet h e driver's s ideairbag (s ee page24-215),
t h en clear t h e DTC.B
(cont 'd)
24-103
black SRS s imulat or lead (A) and body ground. Th ere
s h ould be les s t h an 0.2 V.
2P CONNECTOR
Short to Gr ound in the Dri ver' s Si de Ai rbag
Inflator
SRS Simulat or L ead L 070AZ -SNAA300
NOTE :
2-door: Beforereplacing t h e SRS unit , ch eck t h e SRS
s econds .
DTC.B
DTC.B
24-104
NO-Sh ort t o ground in t h e driver's s ideairbag
inflat or; replacet h e driver's s ideairbag (s ee page
black SRSs imulat or lead (A) and body ground. Th ere
s h ould bean open circuit or at leas t 1 MO.
2P CONNECTOR
NO-Sh ort t o ground in t h e SRSfloor wire h arnes s ;
DTC.B
24-105
DTC 32-1 J C { ' V can be 0, 2 t hr u 9 or A t hr u F):
Open in t he Front Passenger ' s Si de Ai r bag
Inflator
NOTE :
ver si on i s not t he latent u n Hat o t he SRSupt c o f t w / ar a
s econds .
Is DTC 32-1 x Indicat ed?
DTC.B
(A) fromt h e front pas s enger's s ideairbag 2P
connect or (B).
NO-Open in t h e front pas s enger's s ideairbag inflat or;
replacet h e front pas s enger's s ideairbag (s ee page
24-106
13. Di sconnect S RS uni t connect or B (39P) f r om t he S RS
14. Di sconnect t he S RS i nflator si mul at or f r om t he S RS
si mul at or l ead. Do not di sc onnec t t he si mul at or l ead
f rom t he S RS f l oor wi r e har ness 2P connect or .
15. Measur e t he r esi st ance bet ween t he t er mi nal s of t he
black S RS si mul at or l ead (A). Ther e shoul d be l ess
t han 1.0 O.
2P C ONNE C T OR
SRS floor wire h arnes s , t h en clear t h e DTC.B
DTC 32-11: Shor t to Anot her Wi re in Front
Passenger ' s Si de Ai rbag Inflator (4-door)
review S RS Precaut ions and Procedures (s ee page
s econds .
DTC.B
Is DTC 21-11, 22-11, 31-11, 33-11, or 34-11 indicat ed
wit h DTC 32-11?
clear t h e DTC.B
(cont 'd)
24-107
21-11
No. 8 No. 12
21-11
No. 9 No. 13
22-11 No. 8 No. 14 22-11
No. 9 No. 15
31-11 No. 8 No. 6 31-11
No. 9 Wo. 7
33-11 No. 8 No. 10 33-11
No. 9 No. 11
34-11 No. 8 No. 24 34-11
No. 9 No. 25
if
1
/
/ / /
6 7 8 9 10 11
if
12 13 14 15
/
19 21
/
23 24 25
26 27
/ i
/
32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39
J u
clear t h e DTC.B
24-228).B
Resi st ance in the Front Passenger ' s Si de
Ai r bag Inflator
SRSSimulat or L ead L 070AZ -SNAA300
- SRSSh ort Canceller 070AZ -SAA0100
NOTE :
s econds .
DTC.B
24-108
(A) fromt h efront pas s enger's s ideairbag 2P
connect or (B).
NO-Sh ort t o anot h er wirein t h efront pas s enger's
s ideairbag inflat or; replacet h e front pas s enger's s ide
SRSunit connect or B (39P) t erminals No. 8 and No. 9
(s ee page24-32).
black SRSs imulat or lead (A). Th ere s h ould bean
2P CONNECTOR
unit (s ee page 24-228).B
clear t h e DTC. 11
24-109
S I S (Suppl ement al Rest rai nt Sy s t em)
Short to Power in the Front Passenger ' s Si de
Ai rbag Inflator
NOTE :
s econds .
Is DTC 32-8x Indicat ed?
DTC.H
(A) fromt h e front pas s enger's s ideairbag 2P
connect or (B).
NO-Sh ort t o power in t h e front pas s enger's s ide
airbag inflat or; replacet h e front pas s enger's s ide
24-110
7 > i
A\ i
^7 T % !
SRS FLOOR WIRE HARNESS
2P CONNECTOR
Shor t to Gr ound in t he Front Passenger ' s Si de
Ai rbag Inflator
. SRS Simulat or L ead L 070AZ -SNAA300
NOTE :
s econds .
DTC.B
DTC.B
(cont 'd)
24-111
S RS {Suppl ement al Rest rai nt Syst em)
6. Dis connect t h eS RS floor wire h arnes s 2P connect or
(A) fromt h e front pas s enger's s ide airbag 2P
connect or (B).
7. Connect t he S RS inflat or s imulat or (2 Q connect ors )
and s imulat or l ead L to t he SRSf l oor wi r e har ness.
8. Reconnect t h e negat ive cablet o t he bat t ery.
NO-Sh ort t o ground in t h e front pas s enger's s ide
airbag inflat or; replacet h e front pas s enger's s ide
airbag (s ee page24-215), t h en clear t h e DTC.H
s h ould bean open circuit or at leas t 1 MD.
2P CONNECTOR
DTC.H
24-112
DTC 33-1x (" x" c an be 0, 2 t hr u i or A t hru F):
Open inthe Left Si de Curt ai n.Ai rbag Inflator
. SRSinflat or Simulat or 07SAZ -TB4011A
- SRSSimulat or L ead L 070AZ -SNAA300
NOTE :
s econds .
Is DTC 33-1 x indicated?
DTC.H
6. Removet h e left s ideC-pillar t rim, 4-door (s ee page
20-123), 2-door (s ee page20-119), t h en dis connect
t h e SRSfloor wire h arnes s 2P connect or (A) from t h e
left s idecurt ain airbag2P connect or (B).
NO-Open in t h e left s idecurt ain airbag; replacet h e
left s idecurt ain airbag (s ee page24-216), t h en clear
t h e DTC.B
(cont 'd)
24-113
11. Turn t h ei gni ti on swi t ch t o L OCK (0).
13. Di sconnect SRS unit connect or B (39P) fromt he SRS
black SRS s imulat or lead (A). Th ere s h ould be les s
t h an 1.0 Q.
2P CONNECTOR
YE S-Fault y SRS unit or poor connect ion at t h e SRS
unit connect or B (39P) and t h e SRS unit . Ch eck t h e
SRS floor wire h arnes s , t h en clear t h eDTC.H
DTC 33-11: Shor t to Anot her Wi re in the Left
Si de Curt ai n Ai r bag Inflator (4-door)
s econds .
Got o Troubles h oot ing Int ermit t ent Failures (s ee page
DTC.D
with DTC 33-11?
cl ear t he DTC.B
24-114
8. Chec k f or cont i nui t y bet ween t he t er mi nal s of S RS
uni t connect or B (39P) accor di ng to t he t abl e. Ther e
shoul d be no conti nui ty..
21-11
No. 10 No. 12
21-11
No. 11 No. 13
22-11
No. 10 Mo 14
22-11
No. 11 No. 15
31-11 No. 10
No.o
31-11
No. 11 No. 7
32-11
No. 10 No 8
32-11
No. 11 No 9
34-11
No. 10 No. 24
34-11
No. 11 No. 25
clear t h e DTC.H
24-228).B
DTC 33-3x (" x" c an be 0 t hr u 9 or A t hru F):
Resi st ance in t he Left Si de Curt ai n Ai rbag
Inflator
NOTE :
s econds .
DTC.B
(cont 'd)
24-115
4. Turn t he i gni ti on swi t ch to L OCK (0).
wait at l east 3 mi nut es.
t h e SRSfloor wire h arnes s 2P connect or (A) fromt h e
left s idecurt ain airbag 2P connect or (B).
NO-Sh ort t o anot h er wirein t h e left s idecurt ain
airbag inflat or; replacet h e left s idecurt ain airbag (s ee
No. 11 (s ee page24-32).
black SRSs imulat or lead (A). Th ere s h ould be an
2P CONNECTOR
clear t h e DTC.B
24-116
Shor t to Power in the Left Si de Curtai n Ai rbag
Inflator
NOTE :
s econds .
DTC.B
5. Dis connect t h e negat ive cablefrom t h ebat t ery, t h en
left s idecurt ain airbag2P connect or (B).
NO-Sh ort t o power in t h eleft s idecurt ain airbag
inflat or; replacet h e left s idecurt ain airbag (s ee page
24-216), t h en clear t h e DTC.H
(cont 'd)
24-117
DTC Troubl eshoot i ng (cont' d )
12. Dis connect t he negat ivecabl e f r om t he bat t ery, t hen
13. Dis connect SRSuni t connect or B (39P) f r om t he SRS
14. Dis connect t he SRSinflat or s imulat or f r om t he SRS
s imulat or l ead. Do not dis connect t he s imulat or l ead
f r om t he SRSf l oor wi r e h arnes s 2P connect or.
15. Reconnect t he negat ive cableto t he bat t ery.
2P CONNECTOR
unit (s ee page24-22S).H
DTC. B
DTC 33-SJ C ( " X " can be 0 t hr u 9 or A t hr u F) : .
Shor t to Gr ound in t he Left Si de Curt ai n
Ai rbag Inflator
NOTE :
s econds .
DTC.B
24-118
5. Di sconnect t he negat i ve cabl e f rom t he bat t ery, t hen
6. Remove t he left si de C-pi l l ar t r i m, 4-door (see page
20-123), 2-door (see page 20-119), t hen di sc onnec t
t he S RS f l oor wi r e har ness 2P connect or (A) f r om the
left si de curt ai n ai r bag 2P connect or (B).
, 7. Connect t he S RS inflat or s imulat or (2 O connect ors )
and s imulat or l ead L to t he SRS f l oor wi r e h arnes s .
8. Reconnect t he negat ivecabl e to t he bat t ery.
10. Check f or DTCs wi t h t he HDS(see page 24-37).
NO-Sh ort t o ground in t he left s idecurt ain airbag
inflat or; replacet he left s idecurt ain airbag(see page
24-216), t h en clear t he DTC.B
unit (s ee s t ep 11 o n page24-36).
s h ould be an open circuit or at leas t 1 MO.
2P CONNECTOR
DTC.B
24-119
DTC 34-1x (" x" c an be 0, 2 t hr y 9 or A t hr u F):
Open in the Ri ght Si de Curt ai n Ai rbag Inflator
SRSInflator Si mul at or 07SAZ -TB4011A
NOTE :
Bef or e doi ng t hi s t r oubl eshoot i ng pr ocedur e, r evi ew
SRSPr ecaut i ons and Pr oc edur es (see page 24-25),
e 2-door: Before replacingt h e SRSunit , ch eck t h e SRS
1. Clear t h e DTC wit h t h eHDS (s ee page24-38).
s econds .
Is DTC 34-1 x Indicated?
DTC.i l
6. Removet h e righ t s ideC-pillar t rim, 4-door (s ee page
righ t s idecurt ain airbag 2P connect or (B).
NO-Open in t h e righ t s idecurt ain airbag inflat or,
replacet h e righ t s idecurt ain airbag (s ee page24-216),
t h en clear t h e DTC.H
24-120
black SRSs imulat or lead (A). Th ere s h ould be les s
t h an 1.0 0.
2P CONNECTOR
NO-Open in t h e SRSfloor wire h arnes s ; replacet h e
SRSfloor wire h arnes s , t h en clear t h e DTC.B
DTC 34-11: Shor t to Anot her Wi re in the Ri ght
Si de Curtai n Ai rbag Inflator (4-door)
s econds .
DTC.B
with DTC 34-11?
clear t h e DTC.B
(cont 'd)
24-121
S I S (Suppl ement al Rest rai nt Syst em)
8. Chec k for cont i nui t y bet ween t he t er mi nal s of S RS
uni t c onnec t or B (39P) accor di ng to t he t abl e. Ther e
shoul d be no cont i nui t y.
21-11 No. 24 No. 12 21-11
No. 25 No. 13
22-11 No. 24 No. 14 22-11
No. 25 No. 15
31-11 No. 24 No. 6 31-11
No. 25 No. 7
32-11 No. 24 No. 8 32-11
No. 25 No. 9
33-11 No. 24 No. 10 33-11
No. 25 No. 11
l _. ~JCZ
U
1 6 7 8 9 10 11
U
12 13 14 15
/ /
19
/
21
/
23 24 25
26 27
/
32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39
b U
clear t h e DTC.B
24-228).B
Resi st ance in the Ri ght Si de Curt ai n Ai rbag
Inflator
SRSSh ort Canceller 070AZ -SAA0100
NOTE :
2-door: Bef ore r epl aci ng t ne bH b unit , ch eck t h e SRS
s econds .
DTC.B
24-122
5. Di sconnect t he negat i ve cabl e f rom t he bat t ery, t hen
6. Remove t he ri ght si de C-pi l l ar t r i m, 4-door { see page
20-123), 2-door (see page 20-119), t hen di sc onnec t
t he S RS f l oor wi r e har ness 2P connect or (A) f r om t he
ri ght si de curt ai n ai r bag 2P connect or (B).
7. Connect t he S RS i nflator si mul at or (2 O connect or s)
and si mul at or l ead L to t he S RS f loor wi r e har ness.
8. Reconnect t he negat i ve cabl e to t he battery.
10. Check for DTCs wi t h t he HDS (see page 24-37).
NO -Shor t to anot her wi r e in t he ri ght si de cur t ai n
ai rbag i nflator; repl ace t he ri ght si de curt ai n ai r bag
(see page 24-216), t hen cl ear t he DTC. B
No. 25 (s ee page24-32).
black SRSs imulat or lead (A). Th ere s h ould be an
2P CONNECTOR
I s t he resist ance as specified?
clear t h e DTC.B
DTC Troubl eshoot i ng (c ont ' d)
Shor t to Power in t he Ri ght Si de Curt ai n
Ai rbag Inflator
NOTE :
s econds .
DTC.B
NO-Sh ort t o power in t h erigh t s idecurt ain airbag
inflat or; replacet h e righ t s idecurt ain airbag (s ee page
24-124
11 . Turn t h eignit ion s wit ch t o L OCK (0).
S RS FL OOR WIRE HARNES S
2P CONNECTOR
Shor t to Gr ound in t he Ri ght Si de Curt ai n
Ai rbag Inflator
NOTE :
s econds .
DTC.B
connect ion; if t h e connect ionis OK , replacet h e SRS
DTC.B
(cont 'd)
24-125
t h e SRSfloor wire h arnes s 2P connect or (A) fromt h e
7. Connect t h e SRSinflat or s imulat or (2 0 connect ors )
NO-Sh ort t o ground in t h e righ t s idecurt ain airbag
inflat or; replacet h e righ t s idecurt ain airbag (s ee page
s h ould be an open circuit or at leas t 1 MO.
2P CONNECTOR
DTC.B
24-126
I x
DTC 41-1x (" x" can be 0 t hru 9 or A t hr u F): No
Si gnal From the Left Front Impact Sensor
- SRS Inflat or Simulat or 07SAZ -TB4011A
NOTE :
s econds .
DTC.B
6. Ch eck t h e connect ions bet ween SRS unit connect or A
(39P) and t h e SRS unit , bet ween t h eleft engine
compart ment wire h arnes s 2P connect or and t h eleft
front impact s ens or (s ee page24-238), and at
connect or C303 (s ee page22-18).
Are t he connect ions OK?
NO-Repair t h e poor connect ions , t h en clear t h e
DTC.B
8. Dis connect t h eleft engine compart ment wire h arnes s
2P connect or fromt h eleft front impact s ens or (s ee
page24-238).
A (39P) t erminals No. 36 and No. 37. Th ere s h ould be
/ /

3
-#
4
5 6 7 8 9 10
/
/ / / /
16 17 18 20
/ / / /
/
26
J
27 28 29
/
31 36 37 38 39
NO-Sh ort t o anot h er wirein t h eleft engine
compart ment wire h arnes s or t h e das h board wire
h arnes s ; replacet h efault y h arnes s , t h en clear t h e
DTC.B
(cont 'd)
24-127
B al i i l m SlBi B
10. Measur e t he r esi st ance bet ween body gr ound and
S RS uni t connect or A (39P) t er mi nal s No. 36 and
No. 37, individually. Th eres h ould be an open circuit
or at l east 1 MO.
u u
/
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
/
16 17 18
/
20
/ / /
26
J
27 28 29
/
31
/ /
36 37 38 39
NO-Sh ort t o ground in t h e left enginecompart ment
wire h arnes s or t h e das h board wire h arnes s ; replace
t h e fault y h arnes s , t h en clear t h e DTC.B
unit connect or A (39P) t erminals No. 36 and No. 37,
individually. Th eres h ould be les s t h an 0.2 V.
NO-Sh ort t o power in t h e left enginecompart ment
24-128
15. Connect t h e SRS inflat or s imulat or (jumper
connect or ) and t h e black l ead (A) of si mul at or l ead L
to t he left engi ne compar t ment wi r e har ness 2P
connect or (B).
les s t h an 1.0 Q.
u u c 9 -O u
/ /
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
/
16 17 18
/
20
/ / /
26 27 28 29
/
31
/ /
36 37 38 39
u
I.
YE S-Fault y left front impact s ens or or SRS unit -
replacet h eleft front impact s ens or (s ee page24-238),
t h en clear t h e DTC. If t h e DTC is s t ill pres ent , replace
t h e SRS unit (s ee page24-228).B
NO~Open in t h eleft engine compart ment wire
h arnes s or t h e das h board wire h arnes s ; replacet h e
fault y h arnes s , t h en clear t h e DTC.B
DTC 42-1x (" x" can be 0 t hr u 9 or A t hr u F): No
Si gnal From the Right Front Impact Sensor
NOTE :
2-door: Beforereplacing t h e SRS unit , ch eck t h e SRS
s econds .
Is DTC 42- 1x indicated?
DTC.B
6. Ch eck t h e connect ions bet ween SRS unit connect or A
(39P) and t h e SRS unit , bet ween t h erigh t engine
compart ment wire h arnes s 2P connect or and t h erigh t
front impact s ens or (s ee page24-238), and at
connect or C203 (s ee page22-18).
DTC.B
(cont 'd)
24-129
S RS (Suppl ement al Rest rai nt Syst em!
7. Di sconnect S RS uni t connect or A (39P) f r om t he S RS
uni t {see st ep 11 on page 24-36).
8. Di sconnect t he ri ght engi ne compar t ment wi r e
har ness 2P c onnec t or f r om t he ri ght front i mpact
sensor (see page 24-238).
9. Measur e t he r esi st anc e bet ween S RS uni t connect or
A (39P) t er mi nal s No. 38 and No. 39. Ther e shoul d be
an open ci r cui t or at l east 1 MO.
/
/
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
W
26|27
r
A/
28J29
16
V
1 7 | l 8M 2 0l / / A / /
W
26|27
r
A/
28J29
16
V
31 36 37 38 39
. 1
NO-Sh ort t o anot h er wirein t h erigh t engine
compart ment wire h arnes s or t h e das h board wire
h arnes s ; replacet h e fault y h arnes s , t h en clear t h e
DTC.H
SRS unit connect or A (39P) t erminals No. 38 and
or at leas t 1 MO.
NO-Sh ort t o ground in t h erigh t enginecompart ment
t h e fault y h arnes s , t h en clear t h e DTC.H
24-130
11. Reconnect t h enegative cable t o t h ebattery.
13. Measure the voltage between body ground and SRS
unit connector A (39P) terminals No. 38 and No. 39,
individually. There should be less than 0.2 V.
NO-Sh ort t o power in t h e righ t engine compart ment
15. Connect t h e SRS inflat or s imulat or (jumper
connect or) and t h e black lead (A) of s imulat or lead L
t o t h e righ t engine compart ment wire h arnes s 2P
connect or (B).
RIGHT FRONT
w IMPACT
S ENS OR
07SAZ-TB4011A
070AZ-SNAA300
les s t h an 1.0 O.
YE S-Fault y righ t front impact s ens or or SRS unit ;
replacet h e left front impact s ens or (s ee page24-238),
t h en clear t h e DTC. If t h e DTC is s t ill pres ent , replace
t h e SRS unit (s ee page24-228).B
NO-Open in t h e righ t engine compart ment wire
h arnes s or t h e das h board wire h arnes s ; replacet h e
fault y h arnes s , t h en clear t h e DTC.B
24-131
S RS .(Supplemental Rest rai nt Syst em)
DTC 41-2x, 41-3x, 41-8x, 41-9x, 41-Ax, 41-Bx
(" x" c an be 0 t hr u S or A t hr u F); Int ernal .
Fai l ure of t he Left Front Impact Sensor
24-25) and General Troubles h oot ing Informat ion (s ee
page24-36).
s econds .
Is DTC41-2X, 41-3x, 41-8x, 41-9x, 41-Ax, or41-Bx
indicated?
YE S-Fault y left front Impact s ens or or SRSunit ;
replacet h e left front impact s ens or (s ee page24-238),
t h en clear t h e DTC. Ift h e DTC is s t ill pres ent , replace
t h e SRSunit (s ee page24-228).
DTC.B
DTC 42-2x
#
42-3x
#
42-Sx, 42-Sx. 42-Ax. 42-Bx
(" x" can be 0 t hr u 9 or A t hr u F): Internal
Fai l ure of t he Ri ght Front Impact Sensor
page24-36).
s econds .
Is DTC42-2X, 42-3x, 42-8x, 42-9x, 42-Ax, or 42-Bx
indicated?
YE S-Fault y righ t front impact s ens or or SRSunit ;
replacet h e righ t front impact s ens or (s ee page
24-238), t h en clear t h e DTC. Ift h e DTC is s t ill pres ent ,
replacet h e SRSunit (s ee page 24-228).B
DTC.B
24- 132
DTC 43-1 x (" x" can be t hr u S or A t hr u F): No
Si gnal From t he Left Si de Impact Sensor (first)
(4-door)
. SRSinflat or Simulat or 07SAZ -TB4011A
NOTE : Before doing t h is t roubles h oot ing procedure,
s econds .
DTC.H
6. Ch eck t h e connect ions bet ween SRSunit connect or B
(39P) and t h e SRSunit , and bet ween t h e SRSfloor
wire h arnes s 2P connect or and t h eleft s ideimpact
s ens or (firs t ) (s ee page24-230).
DTC.B
fromt h eleft s ideimpact s ens or (firs t ) (s ee page
24-230).
U
1 6 7 8 9 10 11
12 13 14 15
/ /
19
/
21
/
23 24 25
26 27
/ / /
32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39
J
u
clear t h e DTC.B
(cont 'd)
24-133
S RS uni t connect or B (39P) t er mi nal s No. 36 and
No. 37, i ndi vi dual l y. Ther e shoul d be an open ci rcui t
or at l east 1 MO.
LT
1
/ A/V
6 7 8 9 10 11
12 13 14 15
/ /
19
/
21 23 24 25
26 27
/ /
/
32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39
J I 0
NO -Short to gr ound in t he S RS f l oor wi r e har ness;
r epl ace t he S RS f l oor wi r e har ness, t hen cl ear t he
DTC, 11
11. Reconnect t he negat i ve cabl e to t he battery.
12. Tur n t he i gni ti on swi t ch to ON (ll).
13. Measur e t he vol t age bet ween body gr ound and S RS
uni t connect or B (39P) t er mi nal s No, 36 and No. 37,
i ndi vi dual l y. Ther e shoul d be l ess t han 0.2 V.
if
1 6 7 8 9 10 11
if
12 13 14 15
/
19 21
/
23 24 25
26 27 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39
is the voltage as specified?
NO-Shor t to power in t he S RS f l oor wi r e har ness;
r epl ace t he S RS f l oor wi r e har ness, t hen cl ear t he
D T C S
15. Connec t t he S RS i nflator si mul at or (j umper
connect or ) and t he bl ack l ead (A) of si mul at or l ead L
to t he f l oor wi r e har ness 2P connect or (B).
LEF T SIDE
IMPACT
SENSOR
(F IRST)
07SAZ-TB4011A
070AZ-SNAA300
16. Measur e t he r esi st ance bet ween S RS uni t connect or
B (39P) t er mi nal s No. 36 and No. 37. Ther e shoul d be
l ess t han 1.0 Q.
LT
1
/
A A /
6 7 8 9 10 11
LT
12 13 14 15
A A A
19
/
21
/
23 24 25
26 27 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39
y
YES - Faul t y left si de i mpact sensor (first) or S RS unit-
r epl ace t he left si de i mpact sensor (first) (see page
24-230), t hen cl ear t he DTC. If t he DTC i s sti ll pr esent ,
repl ace t he S RS uni t (see page 24-228).B
NO-Open i n t he SRS floor wi r e har ness; r epl ace the
SRS f l oor wi r e har ness, t hen cl ear t he DTC. H
DTC 44-1x (" x" c an be 0 t hr u 9 or A t hr u F): No
Si gnal From the Ri ght Si de Impact Sensor
(first) (4-door)
. S RS i nflator Si mul at or 07SAZ -TB4011A
. SRS Si mul at or Lead L 070AZ -SNAA300
NOTE: Bef ore doi ng t hi s t r oubl eshoot i ng pr ocedur e,
r evi ew S RS Pr ecaut i ons and Pr oc edur es (see page
24-25), Gener al Tr oubl eshoot i ng Inf ormat i on (see page
24-36), and Battery Ter mi nal Di sconnect i on and
1. Cl ear t he DTC wi t h t he H DS (see page 24-38).
2. Tur n t he i gni ti on swi t c h to ON (ll), t hen wai t for 10
sec onds.
3. Chec k f or DTCs wi t h t he HDS (see page 24-37).
is DTC 44-1 x indicated?
Go to Tr oubl eshoot i ng Intermi ttent Fai l ur es (see page
24-38). If anot her DTC i s i ndi cat ed, t r oubl eshoot t he
DTC. H
6. Check t he c onnec t i ons bet ween S RS uni t connect or B
(39P) and t he S RS uni t , bet ween t he S RS floor wi r e
har ness 2P connect or and t he ri ght si de i mpact
sensor (first) (see page 24-230).
YE S-Go to st ep 7.
NO -Repai r t he poor c onnec t i ons, t hen cl ear t he
DTC. H
(cont' d)
94- 1
fromt h erigh t s ideimpact s ens or (firs t ) (s ee page
24-230).
IT
1
/ / / /
6 7 8 9 10 11
12IT314J15
/ / /
24 25
26 27
/ / /
32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39
J
clear t h e DTC.B
No. 39, individually. Th ere s h ould bean open circuit
or at leas t 1 MO.
U
1
/ /
/ /
6 7 8 9 10 11
U
12 13 14 15
/
19 21
A
23 24 25
26 27
/ /
32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39
II
DTC.B
24-136
11_ Reconnect t he negat i ve cabl e to t he bat t ery.
U
1
/ / / /
6 7 8 9 10 11
U
12 13 14 15 19
/
21
/
23 24 25
26 27
/
32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39
DTC.B
15. Connect t h e SRSinflat or s imulat or (jumper
connect or) and t h e black lead (A) of s imulat or lead L
t o t h e SRSfloor wire h arnes s 2P connect or (B).
070AZ-SNAA300
RIGHT S I DE
IMPACT
S E NS OR
(FIRST)
07SAZ-TB4011A
B (39P) t erminals No. 38 and No. 39. Th eres h ould be
les s t h an 1.0 0.
U
1 6 7 8 9 10 11
U
12 13 14 15 19 21
/
23 24 25
26 27
/
32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39
J I u
YE S-Fault y righ t s ideimpact s ens or (firs t ) or SRS
unit ; replacet h erigh t s ideimpact s ens or (firs t ) (s ee
page24-230), t h en clear t h e DTC. Ift h e DTC is s t ill
pres ent , replacet h e SRSunit (s ee page24-228).B
NO-Open in t h e SRSfloor wire h arnes s ; replacet h e
SRSfloor wire h arnes s , t h en clear t h e DTC.B
24-137
DTC 43-1x (" x" can be 0 t h r u S or A t hr u F): No
Si gnal From the Left Si de Impact Sensor (first)
(2-door)
NOTE :
Before replacing t h e SRSunit , ch eck t h e SRSunit
s oft ware vers ion wit h t h e HDS. If t h e s oft ware vers ion
is not t h e lat es t , updat et h e SRSunit s oft ware (s ee
page24-39), and ret es t .
s econds .
Is DTC 43-1 x Indicated?
YE S-
If DTC 43-11 is indicat ed, go t o s t ep 4.
If DTC 43-1x except 43-11 is indicat ed alone, or DTC
43-11 and 45-11 is indicat ed, fault y left s ideimpact
s ens or (firs t ); replacet h eleft s ideimpact s ens or
(firs t ) (s ee page24-231), t h en clear t h e DTC.H
DTC.B
24-231).
#
clear t h e DTC.B
24-138
9. Measur e t he r esi st ance bet ween body ground and
or at leas t 1 MO.
L f
1
/
6 7 8 9 10 11
L f
12 13 14 15
/ / /
19 / 21 / 23 24 25
/ /
36 37 38 39
u
I I L
DTC.B
if
1
V V/
6 7 8 9 10 11
if

12 13 14 15
/ A
19
/
21 23 24 25
/ /
36 37 38 39
J
i
DTC.B
(cont 'd)
24-139
13. T urn the i gni ti on s wi tch to LOCK (0).
14. Connect the SRS i nfl ator s i mul ator (j umper
connector) and the black lead (A) of s i mul ator l ead L
to the SRS fl oor wi re harness 4P connector (B ).
L EFT S I DE
IMPACT
S E NS OR
(FIRST)
07SAZ-TB4011A
7AZ-SNAA3i
15. Meas ure the resistance between SRS uni t connector
B (39P) termi nal s No. 36 and No. 37. There s houl d be
less than 1.0 O.
SJ
1 6 7 8 y 10 11
12 13 14 15
/ /
19 21
/
23 24 25
/ /
/ / / / / /
36 37 38 39
u u
Y E S - F aul ty left si de i mpact sensor (first) or SRS uni t;
repl ace the left si de i mpact sensor (first) (see page
24-231), then clear the DTC. If the DTC is still present,
repl ace the SRS uni t (see page 24-228).B
NO- Open in the SRS fl oor wi re harness; repl ace the
SRS fl oor wi re harness, then clear the DTC. B
DTC 44-1x (" x" can be 0 t hr u 9 or A t hru F): No
Si gnal From the Ri ght Si de I mpac t Sensor
(first) (2-door)
S peci al T ool s Requi red
. SRS I nfl ator S i mul ator 07S AZ- TB 4011A
SRS S i mul ator Lead L 070AZ- S NAA300
NOTE :
B efore doi ng thi s troubl es hooti ng procedure, revi ew
SRS P recauti ons and P rocedures (see page 24-25),
24-36), and B attery T ermi nal Di sconnecti on and
Reconnecti on (see page 22-91).
B efore repl aci ng the SRS uni t, check the SRS uni t
software versi on wi th the H DS . If the software versi on
is not the latest, upd at e the S R S uni t s o f t war e ( s ee
page 24-39), and retest.
1. Clear the DTC wi th the H DS (see page 24-38).
2. T urn the i gni ti on swi tch to ON (II), then wai t for 10
seconds.
3. Check for DTCs wi th the H DS (see page 24-37).
Y E S -
If DTC 44-11 is i ndi cated, go to step 4.
If DTC 44-1 x except 44-11 is i ndi cated al one or DTC
44-11 and 46-11 are i ndi cated, faul ty left side i mpact
sensor (first); repl ace the left side i mpact sensor
(first) (see page 24-231), then clear the DT C . B
If DTC 44-12 and B 2-11 are i ndi cated, troubl es hoot
DTC B 2-1x (see page 24-198).
NO- l ntermi ttent fai l ure, the s ys tem is OK at thi s ti me.
Go to T roubl es hooti ng I ntermi ttent F ailures (see page
24-38). If another DTC is i ndi cated, troubl es hoot the
DTC.B
24-140
5. Di sconnect the negati ve cable f r om the battery, then
wai t at least 3 mi nutes .
6. Di sconnect the SRS fl oor wi re harness 4P connector
f r om the ri ght side i mpact sensor (first) (see page
24-231).
7. Di sconnect SRS uni t connector B (39P) f r om the SRS
uni t (see step 11 on page 24-36).
an open ci rcui t or at least 1 MQ.
LT
1
/
A/
6 7 8 9 10 11
LT
12 13 14 15 19 21 23 24 25
/ / / / /
36 37 38 39
y
NO -Short to another wi re in the SRS fl oor wi re
harness; replace the SRS fl oor wi re harness, then
clear the DTC.B
9. Meas ure the resi stance between body ground and
S RS uni t connector B (39P) termi nal s No. 38 and
No. 39, i ndi vi dual l y. There s houl d be mor e than 1 MQ.
" If
1
/ /
6 7 8 9 10 11
" If
12 13 14 15
/
A
/
19
/
21 23 24 25
36 37 38 39
J y
NO -Short to ground in the SRS fl oor wi re harness;
repl ace the SRS fl oor wi re harness, then clear the
DTC.B
(cont'd)
24-141
[Supplemental Restrai nt Syst em)
10. Rec onnec t t he negat i ve cabl e to the bat t ery.
12. Meas ure the vol tage between body gr ound and SRS
uni t connector B (39P ) termi nal s No. 38 and No. 39,
i ndi vi dual l y. There s houl d be less than 0.2 V.
NO- S hor t to power in the SRS fl oor wi re harness;
DT C . H
connector) and the black lead (A) of si mul ator lead L
to the fl oor wi re harness 4P connector (B ).
RIGHT S I DE
IMPACT
S ENS OR
(FIRST)
07SAZ-TB4011A
070AZ-SNAAGCC
less than 1.0 O.
LT
1
/ / / /
6 7 8 9 10 11
LT
12 13 14 15 19 21 23 24 25
/ / / /
36 37 38 39
u y
Y E S - F aul ty ri ght si de i mpact sensor (first) or SRS
uni t; repl ace the ri ght si de i mpact sensor (first) (see
page 24- 231), then clear the DTC. If the DTC is still
present, repl ace the SRS uni t (see page 24- 228) .
NO- Open in the SRS fl oor wi re harness; replace the
SRS fl oor wi re harness, then clear the DT C . H
24-142
DTC 43-2x, 43-3x, 43-8x, 43-9x, 43-Ax, 43-Bx
(" x" can be t hr u S or A t hr u F): Interna!
Fai lure of the Left Si de i mpact Sensor (first)
NOTE; Bef ore doi ng t hi s t r oubl eshoot i ng pr ocedur e,
r evi ew S RS Pr ecaut i ons and Pr ocedur es (see page
24-25) and Gener al Tr oubl eshoot i ng Inf ormat i on (see
page 24-36).
2. Tur n t he i gni ti on swi t ch to ON (II), t hen wai t f or 10
sec onds.
' Is DTC43-2X, 43-3x, 43-8x, 43-9x, 43-Ax, or 43-Bx
indicat ed?
Y E S - F aul ty left si de i mpact sensor (first) or SRS uni t;
replace the left si de i mpact sensor (first),
4- door (see page 24-230), 2- door (see page 24-231),
then clear the DTC. If the DTC is still present, replace
the SRS uni t (see page 24- 228) .
DTC.B
DTC 44-2x, 44-3x, 44-8x, 44~9x, 44-Ax, 44-Bx
(" x" can be 0 t hr u 9 or A t hr u Fl : Internal
Fai l ure of the Ri ght Si de Impact Sensor (first)
NOTE : B efore doi ng thi s troubl es hooti ng procedure,
revi ew SRS P recauti ons and P rocedures (see page
24-25) and General T roubl es hooti ng I nformati on (see
page 24-36).
seconds.
Is DTC 44-2x, 44-3x, 44-Sx, 44-9x, 44-Ax, or 44-Bx
indicat ed?
Y E S - F aul ty ri ght si de i mpact sensor (first) or SRS
uni t; replace the ri ght si de i mpact sensor (first),
the SRS uni t (see page 24-228).B
DTC.B
24-143
DTC 45-1 x (" x" can be 0 t hru 9 or A t hr u F): No
Si gnal Fr om t he Left Si de Impact Sensor
(second) (4-door)
. SRS I nfl ator S i mul ator 07S AZ- TB 4011A
. SRS S i mul ator Lead L 070AZ- S NAA300
revi ew S RS P recauti ons and P rocedures (see page
24-25), General T roubl es hooti ng I nformati on (see page
seconds.
3. Check f or DTCs wi th the H DS (see page 24-37).
YE S-Go to step 4.
DTC.H
5. Di sconnect the negati ve cabl e f r om the battery, then
6. Check the connecti ons between SRS uni t connector B
(39P) and the SRS uni t, between the S RS fl oor wi re
harness 2P connector and the left si de i mpact sensor
(second) (see page 24-232).
YE S-Go to step 7.
7. Di sconnect S RS uni t connector B (39P) f r om the SRS
f r om the left si de i mpact sensor (second) (see page
24-232).
an open ci rcui t or at least 1 MO.
If
1
/
/
/
/
6 7 8 9 10 11
If
4 A /
19
/
21 23 24 25
26 27
/ /
32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39
u 0
NO- S hort to another wi re in the SRS fl oor wi re
harness; repl ace the SRS fl oor wi re harness, then
clear the DTC.B
NO- Repai r the poor connecti ons, then cl ear the
DTC.B
24- 144
10. Measure the resistance between body ground and
SRS uni t connector B (39P) termi nal s No. 32 and
No. 33, i ndi vi dual l y. There s houl d be an open circuit
or at least 1 MO.
U
1 6 7 8 9 10 11
U
12 13 14 15
/ / /
19 21
/
23 24 25
26 27
/ / / /
32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39
J L
NO- S hort to ground i n the SRS fl oor wi re harness;
replace the SRS fl oor wi re harness, then clear the
DTC. B
11. Reconnect the negati ve cabl e to the battery.
13. Meas ure the vol tage between body gr ound and S RS
uni t connector B (39P ) termi nal s No. 32 and No. 33,
U
1 6 7 8 9 10 11
U
12 13 14 15
A
/ /
19
/
21
/
23 24 25
26 27 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39
u I
repl ace the SRS f l oor wi re harness, then clear the
DTC.B
(cont'd)
24-145
entai Rest rai nt Syst em)
14, T urn the i gni t i on s wi t c h to LOCK (0).
LEF TSIDE
IMPACT
SENSOR
(SECOND)
07SAZ-TB4011A
07OAZ-SNAA3OO
less than 1.0 O.
U
1 6 7 8 9 10 11
U
12 13 14 15
/ /
19
/
21
/
23 24 25
26 27
/
i /
32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39
u u u

Y E S - F aul ty left si de i mpact sensor (second) or SRS
uni t; replace the left si de i mpact sensor (second) (see
page 24-232), then clear the DTC. If the DTC is still
present, replace the SRS uni t (see page 24- 228) .
SRS fl oor wi re harness, then clear the DTC.H
DTC 46-1x (" x" can be 0 t hr u 9 or A t hru F): No
Si gnal From t he Ri ght Si de Impact Sensor
(second) (4-door)
S RS I nfl ator S i mul ator 07S AZ- TB 4011A
. S RS S i mul ator Lead L 070AZ- S NAA300
seconds.
DTC.H
wai t at least 3 mi nutes.
(39P) and the SRS uni t, and between the SRS fl oor
wi re harness 2P connector and the ri ght si de i mpact
sensor (second) (see page 24-232).
NO- R epai r the poor connecti ons, then clear the
DTC.H
24-146
7. Di sconnect SRS uni t connect or B (39P) f r om t he SRS
8. Di sconnect t he S RS f l oor wi r e har ness 2P connect or
f r om t he ri ght si de i mpact sensor (second) (see page
24-232).
9. Measur e t he r esi st anc e bet ween SRS uni t connect or
B (39P) t er mi nal s No. 34 and No. 35. Ther e shoul d be
an open ci rcui t or at l east 1 MO.
U
1 6 7 8 9 10 11
U
12 13 14 15
/ / /
19
/
21 23 24 25
26 27
/ / / /
32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39
I
NO- S hort to another wi re in the SRS fl oor wi re
harness; repl ace the SRS fl oor wi re harness, then
clear the DTC. i l
10. Meas ure the resi stance between body gr ound and
No. 35, i ndi vi dual l y. There s houl d be an open ci rcui t
or at least 1 MO.
NO- S hor t to ground in the SRS fl oor wi r e harness;
DTC. B
(cont'd)
24-147
13. Meas ure the vol tage between body ground and SRS
uni t connector B (39P) termi nal s No. 34 and No. 35,
i ndi vi dual l y. T here s houl d be less than 0.2 V.
LT
1 6 7 8 9 10 11
LT
12 13 14 15
/ /
19
/
21
/
22 24 25
26 27
?
/ /
32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39
J u
V A A
T
NO- S hor t to power in the S RS fl oor wi re harness;
repl ace the S RS fl oor wi re harness, then cl ear the
DT C . B
15. Connect the SRS i nfl ator si mul ator (j umper
connector) and the bl ack lead (A) of si mul ator lead L
RIGHT S I DE
IMPACT
S E NS OR
(SECOND)
70AZ~SMAAS
07SAZ-TB4011A
16. Meas ure the resi stance between SRS uni t connector
less than 1.0 O.
u
If
u
1
/ / / /
6 7 8 9 10 11
If
u
12 13 14 15 19
/
21 23 24 25
u
26 27
/
32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39
l
Y E S - F aul ty ri ght si de i mpact sensor (second) or SRS
uni t; repl ace the ri ght si de i mpact sensor (second)
(see page 24-232), then clear the DTC. If the DTC is still
present, repl ace the SRS uni t (see page 24- 228) .
S RS fl oor wi re harness, then clear the DT C . B
24 148
DTC 45- l x 1"K" can be 0 t hr u 3 or A t hr u F): No
Si gnal From t he Left Si de Impact Sensor
(second) (2-door)
. S RS Si mul at or Lead L 070AZ -SNAA300
NOTE ;
Before replacing t h e SRS unit , ch eck t h e SRS unit
s oft ware vers ion wit h t h e HDS. If t h e s oft ware vers ion
is not t h e lat es t , updat et h e SRS unit s oft ware (s ee
page24-39), and ret es t .
s econds .
YE S-
If DTC 45-11 is indicat ed, go t o s t ep 4.
If DTC 45-1 x except 45-11 is indicat ed alone, fault y
left s ideimpact s ens or (s econd); replacet h eleft
s ideimpact s ens or (s econd) (s ee page24-233).
DTC.B
24-231).
fromt h eleft s ideimpact s ens or (s econd) (s ee page
24-233).
8. Meas uret h e res is t ancebet ween SRS floor wire
h arnes s 2P connect or t erminals No. 1 and No. 2.
Th ere s h ould be an open circuit or at leas t 1 MQ.
S RS FL OOR WIRE HARNES S 2P CONNECTOR
clear t h eDTCJ B
SRS floor wire h arnes s 2P connect or t erminals No. 1
and No. 2, individually. Th ere s h ould be an open
circuit or at leas t 1 MQ.
S RS FL OOR WIRE HARNES S 2P CONNECTOR "
X
1 2
x

DTC.B
(cont 'd)
24-149
S RS {Supplement al Rest rai nt Syst em)
DTC Troubleshootingfcont' d )
fl oor wi re harness 2P connector termi nal s No. 1 and
No. 2, i ndi vi dual l y. There s houl d be less than 0.2 V.
S RS FL OOR WI RE HARNES S 2P CONNECTOR
X
1 2
h
n
^
X X
Wi r e si de of f emal e t er mi nal s -
DTC.H
connector) and the black lead (A) of s i mul ator lead L
L EFT S I DE
IMPACT
S E NS OR
(FIRST)
0 7S A Z - T B 4011A
070AZ-SNAA300
15. Meas ure the resistance between S RS fl oor wi re
harness 2P connector termi nal s No. 1 and No. 2.
There s houl d be less than 1.0 O.
Wire c i H o r>f ^r^sSc t er mi nal s
Y E S - F aul ty left si de i mpact sensor (second) or SRS
uni t; replace the left si de i mpact sensor (second) (see
page 24-233), then clear the DTC. If the DTC is still
present, replace the SRS uni t (see page 24- 228).H
S RS fl oor wi re harness, then clear the DTC. H
24-150
DTC 46-1x {"x" can be 0 t hr u 9 or A t hr u F): No
Si gnal From the Ri ght Si de Impact Sensor
(second) (2-door)
. SRS I nflator S i mul ator 07S AZ- TB 4011A
NOTE :
B efore repl aci ng the SRS uni t, check the S RS uni t
software versi on wi th the H DS . I f the s oftware versi on
is not the latest, update the SRS uni t s oftware (see
2. T urn the i gni ti on s wi tch to ON (II), then wai t for 10
seconds.
Y E S -
If DTC 46-11 is i ndi cated al one or DTC 46-11 and
B 2-12 is i ndi cated, go to step 4.
If DTC 46-1 x except 46-11 is i ndi cated al one, faul ty
left si de i mpact sensor (second); repl ace the left
si de i mpact sensor (second) (see page 24-233), then
clear the DTC. B
If DTC 44-11 and 46-11 are i ndi cated, faul ty left si de
i mpact sensor (first); replace the left si de i mpact
sensor (first) (see page 24-231), then clear the
DTC. B -
If DTC 46-11 and B 2-11 are i ndi cated, faul ty rear
safi ng sensor; repl ace the rear safi ng sensor (see
page 24-234), then clear the DTC. B
DTC. B
f r om the ri ght si de i mpact sensor (second) (see page
24-233).
f r om the rear safi ng sensor (see page 24-234).
8. Meas ure the resistance between SRS fl oor wi re
There s houl d be an open ci rcui t or at least 1 MO.
S RS FL OOR WIRE HARNES S 2P CONNECTOR
X
1 2
X

d
NO- S hort to another wi re i n the SRS fl oor wi re
harness; replace the SRS fl oor wi re harness, then
clear the DTC. B
9. Meas ure the resistance between body ground and
S RS fl oor wi re harness 2P connector termi nal s No. 1
and No. 2, i ndi vi dual l y. There s houl d be an open
ci rcui t or at least 1 MO.
NO- S hor t to ground in the SRS fl oor wi re harness;
DTC. B
(cont'd)
24-151
PTC Troubleshooting (cont 'd)
10. Reconnect the neg at i v e cable to the battery.
12. Meas ure the vol tage between body ground and S RS
fl oor wi re harness 2P connector termi nal s No. 1 and
No. 2, i ndi vi dual l y. There s houl d be less than 0.2 V.
SRS FLOOR WIRE HARNESS 2P CONNECTOR
X
1 2

r
1
DTC.B
14. Connect the S RS i nfl ator s i mul ator (j umper
REAR SAFING
SENSOR
07SAZ-TB4011A
070AZ-SNAA300
15. Meas ure the resi stance between SRS fl oor wi re
There s houl d be less than 1.0 D.
Y E S - F aul ty ri ght si de i mpact sensor (second) or SRS
uni t; replace the ri ght si de i mpact sensor (second)
(see page 24-233), then clear the DTC. If the DTC is still
present, repl ace the SRS uni t (see page 24-228).fl
SRS fl oor wi re harness, then clear the DT C . f l
24*" 152
DTC 4-2x# 45-3X, 4-8xf 4S-3xf 4-Axf 4-Bx
(" x" can be t h ru S or A t h ru F): i nternal
Fai lure of t he Left.Si de Impact Sensor
(second)
page 24-36).
seconds.
Is DTC 45-2x, 45-3x, 45-8x, 45-9x, 45-Ax, or 45-Bx
indicat ed?
YE S - F aul ty left si de i mpact sensor (second) or SRS
uni t; repl ace the left si de i mpact sensor (second),
the SRS uni t (see page 24- 228) .
NO- lntermittent fai l ure, the s ys tem is OK at thi s ti me.
DTC.B
mm sm
DTC 46-2x, 46-3x, 46-8x, 46-9x, 46-Ax, 46-Bx
(" x" c an be 0 t hr u 9 or A t hr u F): Internal
F ailure of the Right Side Impact Sensor
(second)
page 24-36).
seconds.
Is DTC 46-2x, 46-3x, 46-8x, 46-9x, 46-Ax, or 46-Bx
indicat ed?
YE S - F aulty ri ght si de i mpact sensor (second) or SRS
uni t; repl ace the ri ght si de i mpact sensor (second),
the SRS uni t (see page 24-228).!
NO- lntermittent fai l ure, the s ys tem is OK at thi s ti me.
24-38). I f another DTC is i ndi cated, troubl es hoot the
DTC.B
24- 153
SRS (Sup p l ement al Res t rai nt Sf s t em)
DTC 51-xx, 52-xx, 53-xx, 54-xx, 55-xx, 57-xx,
58-xx I"K" can be 0 t hr u S or A t hr u F): Internal
Failure of the S RS Uni t
NOTE :
B efore troubl es hooti ng any of these DTCs, check the
battery/system vol tage and battery cabl e connecti ons .
If the vol tage is l ow, repai r the chargi ng s ys tem, test
and charge the battery, or repl ace the battery before
troubl es hooti ng the SRS. Ifthebattery/system vol tage
is now OK , ask the cus tomer if the battery ever went
dead or i f the engi ne was started and run wi th the
battery in a l ow state of charge. A dead battery may
tri gger one or more of these DTCs.
SRS P recauti ons and P rocedures (see page 24-25) and
24-36).
2-door: B efore repl aci ng the SRS uni t, check the S RS
uni t software versi on wi th the H DS . I f the s oftware
vers i on is not the latest, update the S RS uni t s oftware
(see page 24-39), and retest.
2. T urn the i gni ti on s wi tch to ON (II), and check that the
SRS i ndi cator comes on for about 6 seconds and then
goes off.
Does the SRS indicator goes off?
Y E S - l ntermi ttent fai l ure, the s ys tem is OK at thi s ti me.
D T C . B
NO-Replace the SRS uni t (see page 24-228).B
DTC 53-FF: S RS Uni t Pr ogr ammi ng Error
NOTE :
Thi s DTC is i ndi cated when a SRS uni t update is not
compl eted properl y.
Do not turn the i gni ti on s wi tch to AC C (I) or LOCK (0)
whi l e updati ng the SRS uni t. If you turn the i gni ti on
swi tch to AC C (I) or LOCK (0) before you compl ete the
S RS uni t update procedure, the S RS uni t can be
damaged.
S RS P recauti ons and P rocedures (see page 24-25) and
24-36).
1. Do the SRS uni t update procedure (see page 24-39).
seconds.
Is DTC 53-FF indicated?
Y E S - Repl ace the ori gi nal S RS uni t (see page
24-228).B
NO- Update is c ompl ete. B
24-154
IS*
DTC 56-31: Lost Communi cat i on Wi th t he
ECM/PCM (PGM-FI syst em)
DTC 56-32,56-33: Undef i ned Data Recei ved
From the ECM/PCM (PGM-FI syst em)
NOTE:
SRS P recauti ons and P rocedures (see page 24- 25),
2-door: B efore repl aci ng the SRS uni t, check the SRS
uni t software versi on wi th the H DS . If the s oftware
versi on is not the latest, update the SRS uni t software
1. Check for any F -CAN and B -CAN communi cati on
DTCs wi th the H DS .
Are there any communication DTCs?
Y E S - Go to the appropri ate DTC troubl es hooti ng.
N O - G o to step 2.
seconds.
DT C . B
5. T urn the i gni ti on swi tch to ON (II), and see if the
mal functi on i ndi cator l amp (MI L) comes on.
Does the MIL stay on longer than 30 seconds?
Y E S - Go to the MI L Circuit T roubl es hooti ng (see page
11-180) . B
NO- Go to step 6.
8. Di sconnect S RS uni t connector A (39P) f r om the SRS
9. J ump the SCS line wi th the H DS (see page 11-3).
10. Di sconnect E CM/P CM connector A (49P) f r om the
E CM/ P CM.
11. Check for conti nui ty between SRS uni t connector A
(39P) termi nal No. 16 and E CM/P CM connector A (49P)
termi nal No. 4, and between SRS uni t connector A
(39P) termi nal No. 17 and E CM/P CM connector A (49P)
termi nal No. 3.
_ 3 | 4 M 6 l
?
l /
1
11
/ /
/J 1 5 16
A
1 9 2 0 21
1
1
1
1
2 2 2 3 2 4 2 5 2 6 2 7 2 8
1
1
1
1
2 9 3 0
/
3 2 1/
3 4 3 5 3 6
/ / /
1
1
1
I/I"
4 2 14 3 14 4 ^ ^ 4 6 14 7
4 8 M
YE S - F aul ty SRS uni t or poor connecti on at SRS uni t
connector A (39P) and the SRS unit. Check the
connecti on between the connector and the SRS unit.
If the connecti on is OK , replace the SRS uni t (see page
24- 228) . B
NO- Open in the left engi ne compartment wi re
harness or the dashboard wi re harness; replace the
faul ty harness, then clear the DTC.B
24-155
DTC 56-25: Lost Communi cat i on wi th t he
Gauge Cont rol Modul e
NOTE:
Bef or e doi ng t hi s troubl es hooti ng pr ocedur e, r evi ew
S RS Pr ecaut i ons and Pr ocedur es (see page 24- 25),
2-door : Bef or e r epl aci ng t he S RS uni t , check t he S RS
uni t s oftware vers i on wi th the H DS . If the s oftware
vers i on is not the latest, update the SRS uni t s of tware
(see page 24- 39), and retest.
1. Check for any F -CAN and B - CAN communi cati on
DTCs wi th the H DS .
Are t here any communicat ion DTCs?
Y E S - Go to the appropri ate DTC troubl es hooti ng.
NO- Go to step 2.
2. Release the parki ng brake, turn the i gni ti on s wi tch to
ON (II), and see if the brake s ys tem l i ght comes on f or
2 seconds and then goes off.
Does t he brake syst em light come on?
NO- F aul ty gauge control modul e. Do the gauge
control modul e sel f- di agnosti c functi on (see page
22-332). If the gauge control modul e fai l s the
sel fdi agnosti c, repl ace the gauge control modul e (see
page 22- 351), then clear the DTC. If the DTC is still
present, repl ace the S RS uni t (see page 24- 228) .
seconds.
. DTC.B
8. Di sconnect SRS uni t connector A (39P) f r om the SRS
9. Di sconnect gauge control modul e 32P connector f r om
the gauge control modul e (see page 22-351).
10. Check for conti nui ty between SRS uni t connector A
(39P) termi nal No. 16 and gauge control modul e 32P
connector termi nal No. 29, and between SRS uni t
connector A (39P) termi nal No. 17 and gauge control
modul e 32P connector termi nal No. 30.
w w
/ /
3 4 5 | 67 | 8 9 10
/
/ / / /
1611
r
18 /
/
20
/ / /
2627 28 29 3
/ / /
3637 38 39
u
^
L
1I2 I/I/Me / | 8 | 9 | 1 0 / 1/!13L/ | / I l 6i
|17|18|19|20|21|22|23|24|25|26|27|28|29|30|/|32
F-CAN L F-CAN H
(RED) (WHT)
YE S - F aul ty SRS uni t or poor connecti on at SRS uni t
connector A (39P) and the SRS unit. Check the
connecti on between the connector and the SRS uni t.
If the connecti on is OK , repl ace the SRS uni t (see page
24-228).H
NO- Open between SRS uni t connector A (39P)
termi nal No. 16 and gauge control modul e 32P
connector termi nal No. 29, or between SRS uni t
connector A (39P) termi nal No. 17 and termi nal No. 30
; replace the faul ty ha r nes s .
24-156
DTC 61-l x (" x" can be thru i or A thru F):
Open in the Dr i ver ' s Seat Belt Buckl e Swi t ch
NOTE :
o B efore doi ng thi s troubl es hooti ng procedure, revi ew
SRS Precautions and Procedures (see page 24-25) and
24-36).
2- door: B efore repl aci ng the SRS uni t, check the SRS
uni t software vers i on wi th the H DS . If the software
vers i on is not the latest, update the S RS uni t software
2. T urn the i gni ti on s wi tch to LOCK (0), then wai t for 10
seconds.
3. T urn the i gni ti on s wi tch to ON (II), then buckl e and
unbuckl e the dri ver's seat belt several ti mes .
N O - l n t e r mi t t e n t fai l ure, the s ys tem is OK at thi s ti me.
DTC.B
6. I nstall a j umper wi re between body gr ound and SRS
uni t connector B (39P) termi nal No. 19.
S RS UNI T CONNECTOR B (39P) -
LT
1
/
A A A
6 7 8 9 10 11
LT
12 13 14 15
A A A
19
/
21
/
23 24 25
(26) (27)
/
A A A
(32) (3 (34) (35) 36 37 38 39
J . y
J UMPER WI RE
N O - F a u l t y S RS uni t or poor connecti on at S RS uni t
connector B (39P) and the SRS unit. Check the
connecti on between the connector and the SRS uni t.
I fthe connecti on is OK , repl ace the SRS uni t (see page
24-228).B
10. R emove the j umper wi re.
11. Di sconnect the SRS f l oor wi re harness 2P connector
(A) f r om the dri ver's seat bel t buckl e s wi tch 2P
connector.
(cont'd)
24- 157
S RS {Supplement al Rest rai nt Syst em)
f l oor wi r e har ness 2P connect or t er mi nal No. 2. Ther e
s houl d be more than 10 V.
S RS F LOOR WI RE HARNESS 2P CONNECTOR
P N K
SRS fl oor wi re harness, then cl ear the DTC. B
SRS fl oor wi re harness 2P connector termi nal No. 1.
SRS FLOOR WI RE HARNESS 2P CONNECTOR
Shor t in t he Dr i ver ' s Seat Belt Buckl e Swi t ch
page 24-36).
2. T urn the i gni ti on s wi tch to LOCK (0), then wai t for 10
seconds.
3. T urn the i gni ti on s wi tch to ON (II), then buckl e and
unbuckl e the dri ver's seat belt several ti mes .
24-38). I f another DTC is i ndi cated, troubl es hoot the
DT C . B
(A) f r om the dri ver's seat belt buckl e swi tch 2P
connector.
Is resistance as specified?
Y E S - F aul ty dri ver's seat belt buckl e s wi tch; replace
the dri ver's seat belt buckl e as s embl y, 4- door (see
page 24-13), 2- door (see page 24-7), then clear the
DTC.B
NO- Open in the SRS fl oor wi re harness; check for a
poor gr ound at G701 (see page 22-18). If the ground is
OK , repl ace the SRS fl oor wi re harness, then clear the
DTC.B
24-158
8. Chec k f o r DTCs wi t h t he H DS (see page 24-37).
Is DTC 61-2K indicat ed?
YES - S h o r t t o gr ound i n t he SRS f l oor wi r e har ness;
r epl ace t he SRS f l oor wi r e har ness, t hen cl ear the
DTC. B
NO -Faul t y dr i ver ' s seat belt buckl e swi t c h; repl ace t he
dr i ver 's seat belt buckl e assembl y, 4-door (see page
24-13), 2-door (see page 24-7), t hen c l ear t he DTC. B
DTC 2-1J C (" x" can be 0 thro 9 or A t hr u F):
Open in the Front Passenger ' s Seat Belt
Buckl e Swi t ch
NOTE :
B efore doi ng thi s troubl eshooti ng procedure, revi ew
General Troubl eshooti ng I nformati on (see page
24-36).
uni t software versi on wi th the H DS. I f the software
vers i on is not the latest, update the SRS uni t software
2. T urn the i gni ti on swi tch to LOCK ( 0), then wai t for 10
seconds.
3. T urn the i gni ti on swi tch to ON (II), then buckl e and
unbuckl e the front passenger's seat belt several
ti mes .
NO- l ntermi ttent fai l ure, the system is OK at thi s ti me.
Go to Troubl eshooti ng I ntermi ttent F ailures (see page
DTC.B
6. I nstall a j umper wi re between body ground and SRS
uni t connector B (39P) termi nal No. 21.
IT
1
/ / / /
6 7 8 9 10 11
IT
12 13 14 15 19
/
21
/
23 24 25
( 26) (27)
/ /
(32) ( 33) (34) (35) 36 37 38 39
J I
J UMPER WIRE
(cont'd)
24-159
S RS (Suppl ement al Rest rai nt Sy s t em)
7. T urn the i gni ti on swi tch to ON (11).
NO- F aul ty SRS uni t or poor connecti on at SRS uni t
connector B (39P) and the SRS uni t. Check the
connecti on between the connector and the S RS uni t.
If the connecti on is OK , repl ace the SRS uni t (see page
24-228).B
10. R emove the j umper wi re.
(A) f r om the front passenger's seat belt buckl e s wi tch
2P connector.
fl oor wi re harness 2P connector termi nal No. 2. T here
s houl d be mor e than 10 V.
WHT
NO- Open in the S RS fl oor wi re harness; replace the
SRS fl oor wi re harness, then clear the DTC. B
15. Meas ure the resi stance between body ground and
SRS fl oor wi re harness 2P connector termi nal No. 1.
is resist ance as specified?
Y E S - F aul ty front passenger's seat belt buckl e s wi tch;
replace the front passenger's seat belt buckl e
as s embl y, 4- door (see page 24-13), 2- door (see page
24-7), then clear the DTC.B
NO- Open in the S RS fl oor wi re harness; check for a
poor gr ound at G702 (see page 22-18). If the ground is
OK , repl ace the S RS fl oor wi re harness, then clear the
DTC.B
24-160
DTC 62-2x (" x" can be 0 t hr u 9 or A t hr u F);
Short In the Front Passenger ' s Seat Belt
Buckle Swi t ch
page 24-36).
2. Turn the i gni ti on swi tch to LOCK (0), then wai t for 10
seconds.
3. Turn the i gni ti on swi tch to ON (II), then buckl e and
unbuckl e the front passenger's seat belt several
ti mes.
D T C . B
5. Turn the i gni ti on swi tch to LOCK (0).
(A) f r om the front passenger's seat belt buckl e swi tch
2 P connector.
Y E S - S hort to gr ound in the S RS fl oor wi re harness;
repl ace the SRS f l oor wi re harness, then clear the
DTC. B
NO- F aul ty front passenger's seat bel t buckl e s wi tch;
repl ace the front passenger's seat bel t buckl e
as s embl y, 4- door (see page 24- 13), 2- door (see page
24-161
DTC 71-1x ("x
s
' c an be 0 t hr u S or A t hr u F):
Open In t he Dr i ver ' s Seat Posi t i on Sensor
NOTE:
24-36), and B attery Termi nal Di sconnecti on and
2- door: B efore repl aci ng the S RS uni t, check the SRS
uni t s oftware vers i on wi th the H DS . I f the s oftware
vers i on is not the latest, update the S RS uni t s oftware
2. T urn the i gni ti on swi tch to ON (II), and wai t for 10
seconds.
DTC.i l
4. Check the connecti on between the dri ver's seat wi re
harness (dri ver's power seat) or dri ver's seat posi ti on
sensor harness (dri ver's manual seat) 2P connector
and the dri ver's seat posi ti on sensor (see page
24-239), and ground connecti on at G701 (see page
22-84).
DTC.B
7. T urn the i gni ti on swi tch to LOCK (0), then wai t for 10
seconds.
8. Di sconnect the dri ver's seat wi re harness (dri ver's
power seat) or dri ver's seat posi ti on sensor harness
(dri ver's manual seat) 2P connector (A) f r om the
dri ver's seat posi ti on sensor (see page 24-239).
Dr i ver ' s power seat
Dr i ver ' s manual seat
24-162
3. Install a j umper wi r e bet ween dr i ver ' s seat wi r e
har ness {dr i ver ' s power seat ) or dr i ver ' s seat posi t i on
sensor har ness (dri ver' s manual seat ) 2P connect or
DRIVER'S SEAT WIRE HARNESS OR
DRIVER'S SEAT POSITION SENSOR HARNESS
2P CONNECTOR
J UMPER WIRE
11 Di sconnect SRS uni t connector B (39P) f r om the SRS
SRS uni t connector B (39P) termi nal No. 23. There
s houl d be less than 1.0 0.
Shor t in the Dr i ver ' s Seat Posi ti on Sensor
NOTE :
2- door: B efore repl aci ng the S RS uni t, check the S RS
uni t s oftware vers i on wi th the H DS . If the s oftware
vers i on is not the latest, update the SRS uni t s oftware
seconds.
DTC.H
4. T urn the i gni ti on swi tch to LOCK (0), then wai t f or 10
seconds.
II
1
/ A / /
6 7 8 9 10 11
II
12 13 14 15
/ /
19
/
21
/
23 24 25
(26) (27)
/ / /
(32) (33) (34) (35) 36 37 38 39
J , Li
Y E S - F aul ty dri ver's seat posi ti on sensor or SRS uni t;
replace the dri ver's seat posi ti on sensor (see page
repl ace the SRS uni t (see page 24-228).! !
NO- Open in the SRS fl oor wi re harness, dri ver's seat
wi re harness (dri ver's power seat), or dri ver's seat
posi ti on sensor harness (dri ver's manual seat);
repl ace the faul ty harness, then clear the DTC.H
(cont'd)
24-163
5. Di sconnect t he dri ver' s seat wi r e har ness (dr i ver ' s
power seat ) or dri ver's seat posi t i on sensor har ness
(dri ver's manual seat) 2P connector (A) f r om the
dr i ver ' s seat posi ti on sensor (see page 24-239).
Dri ver's power seat
Dr i ver ' s manual seat
G o t o T roubl es hooti ng I ntermi ttent F ailures (see page
DTC.B
10. Di sconnect S RS uni t connector B (39P) f r om the S RS
SRS uni t connector B (39P) termi nal No. 23. There
s houl d be an open ci rcui t or at least 1 MO .
U
1 6 7 8 9 10 11
U
12 13 14 15 19
/
21
/
23 24 25
( 26) ( 27)
/
( 32) ( 33) ( 34) ( 35) 36 3 7 38 39
u
Y E S - F aul ty dri ver's seat posi ti on sensor or S RS uni t;
repl ace the dri ver's seat posi ti on sensor (see page
24-239), then clear the DTC. I f the DTC is still present,
repl ace the SRS uni t (see page 24-228).B
NO- S hort to gr ound in the SRS fl oor wi re harness,
dri ver's seat wi re harness (dri ver's power seat), or
dri ver's seat posi ti on sensor harness (dri ver's manual
seat); replace the faul ty harness, then clear the DTC.B
24-164
DTC 81-4M, 81-5X 1"K" c an be t hr u S or A t hru
F), 81-63,81-64: Internal the Fai l ure of the ODS
Uni t
page 24-36).
seconds.
Is DTC 81-4x, 81-5x, 87-63, or 81-64 indicat ed?
DTC.H
5. Do the ODS uni t initialization (see page 24-40).
6. T urn the i gni ti on swi tch to ON (II), and check that the
goes off.
Does t he SRS indicat or go off?
Y E S - T he s ys tem is OK at thi s ti me
NO- Go to step 7.
7 Replace the ODS uni t (see page 24- 237), then clear the
DTC.
goes off.
Y E S - T he s ys tem is OK at thi s ti me. B
NO- Replace the SRS uni t (see page 24-228).H
DTC 81-61: No Si gnal From t he ODS Uni t
DTC 81-62: Incorrect Data From the ODS Uni t
NOTE :
Reconnect!on (see page 22-91).
uni t software versi on wi th the H DS . If the software
2. T urn the i gni ti on swi tch to ON (II), and wai t for 10
seconds.
DTC.H
5. Check the connecti on between the ODS uni t harness
18P connector (A) and the ODS unit.
Is t he connect ion OK?
NO- R epai r the poor connecti on, then cl earthe DTC. If
DTC 81-61 or 81-62 is still present, go to step 6.
(cont'd)
24-165
7. Check the No. 12 (7.5A) fuse in the dri ver's under- dash
fuse/rel ay box.
Is t he fuse OK?
NO- R epl ace the fuse, then turn the i gni ti on s wi tch to
ON (II). If the fuse bl ows agai n, check f or a s hort in the
No. 12 (7.5 A) fuse ci rcui t (das hboard wi re harness,
SRS fl oor wi re harness, or ODS uni t harness).
8. Di sconnect the ODS uni t harness 18P connector (A)
f r om the ODS uni t.
A
10. Meas ure the vol tage between body ground and ODS
uni t harness 18P connectortermi nal No. 1. There
s houl d be battery vol tage.
ODS UNIT HARNES S 18P CONNECTOR
GRN
1
/
3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11
12 13 14 15 16 17
/
1
NO- Open in the das hboard wi re harness, the SRS
fl oor wi re harness, or the ODS uni t harness; replace
the faul ty harness, then cl ear the DT C . l l
ODS uni t harness 18P connector termi nal No. 12.
1
/
3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11
12 13 14 15 16 17
/
YE L
NO- Open i n the SRS fl oor wi re harness, the ODS uni t
harness, poor connecti on at the gr ound (G702) (see
page 22-54) or poor connection at the ODS unit
harness 18P connector, and the ODS uni t. Check the
connectors ; if the connecti on is OK , repl ace the faul ty
harness, then clear the DTC.B
24-166
14. Di sconnect S RS uni t connect or B (39P) f r om t he S RS
15. Measur e t he r esi st anc e bet ween body gr ound and
S RS uni t connect or B (39P) t ermi nal No. 1. Ther e
shoul d be an open ci rcui t or at l east 1 MQ.
If
1 6 7 8 9 10 11
If
12 13 14 15
/ /
19
/
21 23 24 25
(26) (27) (32) (33) (34) (35) 36 37 38 39
NO- S hor t to another wi re in the SRS fl oor wi re
harness or the ODS uni t harness; repl ace the faul ty
harness, then clear the DTC. H
uni t connector B (39P) termi nal No. 1. There s houl d be
less than 0.2 V.
NO- S hor t to power in the SRS fl oor wi re harness or
the ODS uni t harness; repl ace the faul ty harness, then
clear the DTC. H
(cont'd)
24-167
SRS (Supplemental Restraint Sfstemj
B (39P) termi nal No. 1 and ODS uni t harness 18P
connectortermi nal No. 7. There s houl d be less than
1.0 n.
BL U f
1
/
3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11
12 13 14 15 16 17
/
I , - i
J
ri;;;::;:;;;:::^"
1
u
J
1
/
/
/V
6 | 7 8 9 10 11
u
J
12 13 14 15 1 9 / 21
/
23 24 25
J
(26)(27)
/
/ ( 3 2 )
(33)(34) (35) 36 37 38 39
I
Y E S - F aul ty ODS uni t or SRS unit; repl ace the ODS
uni t (see page 24-237), then clear the DTC. I f the DTC
is still pr e s e nt , repl ace the SRS uni t (see page
24-228).B
NO- Open in the SRS fl oor wi re harness or the ODS
uni t harness; replace the faul ty harness, then clear the
DTC.B
DTC 81-71,81-78: ODS Uni t Not Cal i brat ed
page 24-36).
seconds.
DTC.B
5. Do the front passenger's wei ght sensor initialization
(see page 24-40).
seconds.
seconds.
DTC.B
9. Replace the ODS uni t (see page 24- 237), then cl earthe
DTC.
SRS i ndi cator comes on f or about 6 seconds and then
goes off.
Y E S - T he s ys tem is OK . B
NO- Replace the SRS uni t (see page 24-228).B
24-168
DTC 81-79: Front Passenger ' s Wei ght Sensor s
initial Check Fai l ure
page 24-36).
2. Turn the i gni ti on swi tch to ON (II), then wai t for 10
seconds.
YE S-Go to step 4.
DTC.B
5. Make sure nothi ng is on the front passenger's seat.
goes off.
Does the SRS indicator go off?
YE S-lntermittent fai l ure, the s ys tem is OK at thi s ti me.
Go t o T roubl es hooti ng I ntermi ttent F ailures (see page
DTC.B
NO- Loosen the front passenger's seat mounti ng bol ts
(see step 12 on page 20-199), and shake the seat in all
di recti ons. Ti ghten the seat mounti ng bol ts to the
specified torque. Do the front passenger's wei ght
sensor initialization (see page 24-40). If the DTC is still
present, replace the front passenger's wei ght sensor
assembl y, 4- door (see page 24-235), 2- door (see page
replace the ODS uni t (see page 24-237), then clear the
DTC.B
DTC 82-1x (" K" c an be t hr u 9 or A t hr u F):
No Si gnal From the Inner Si de Front
Passenger ' s Wei ght Sensor (2-door)
page 24-36).
1. Check the front passenger's wei ght sensor
connectors for l oose or poor connecti ons.
3. T urn the i gni ti on swi tch to ON (II), then wai t f or 10
seconds.
YE S-F aulty i nner si de front passenger's wei ght
sensor; replace the front passenger's wei ght sensor
assembl y (see page 24-236), then clear the DTC.B
DTC.B
24-169
No Si gnal From t he Out er Si de Front
Passenger ' s Wei ght Sensor (2-door)
page 24-36).
1. Check the front passenger's wei ght sensor
connectors for l oose or poor connecti ons.
seconds.
Y E S - F aul ty outer si de front passenger's wei ght
sensor; repl ace the front passenger's wei ght sensor
as s embl y (see page 24-236), then clear the DTC. B .
DTC.B
DTC 82-14: No Si gnal From the Front
Passenger ' s Wei ght Sensor (front i nner si de)
(4-door)
page 24-36).
seconds.
24-38).B
4. F rom the S RS I NSP ECTI ON menu on the H DS , select
S W S DTC CH ECK .
Is an SWS DTC also indicated?
Y E S -
;
DTC 14- 11: S hort to power in the front passenger's
wei ght sensor (front i nner side) power ci rcui t;
repl ace the ODS uni t harness, then clear the DTC.B
DTC 14-12: S hort to ground in the front passenger's
wei ght sensor (front i nner side) power circuit. Go to
step 5.
DTC 14-13: Open in the front passenger's wei ght
sensor (front i nner side) output circuit. Go to
step 12.
wei ght sensor (front i nner side) output circuit. Go to
step 20.
24-38).B
24-170
5. T urn t he i gni ti on swi t c h to LOCK (0).
6= Di sconnect t he ODS uni t har ness 3P c onnec t or (A)
f r om t he front passenger ' s wei ght sensor (front i nner
si de).
7. Check for DTCs wi t h t he HDS (see page 24-37).
NO-Faulty front passenger' s wei ght sensor (front
i nner si de); replace t he front passenger' s seat f r ame
i ncl udi ng all f our f ront passenger' s wei ght sensors
(see page 24-235), t hen clear t he DTC. B
ODS uni t harness 18P connector termi nal No. 3. There
s houl d be an open ci rcui t or at least 1 MO.
RED
1
/
3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11
12 13 14 15 16 17
/
NO- S hort to gr ound in the ODS uni t harness;.repl ace
the ODS uni t harness, then clear the DTC.B
11. Meas ure the resistance between ODS uni t harness
18P connector termi nal s No. 3 and No. 13. There
s houl d be an open circuit or at least 1 MO.
RED
1
/
7 ^~
4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11
12 13 14 15 16 17
/
BLK
Y E S - F aul ty ODS uni t; replace the ODS uni t (see page
NO- S hort to another wi re in the ODS uni t harness;
replace the ODS uni t harness, then clear the DT C . B
( c o nt ' d)
24-171
DTC Troubl eshoot i ng ( c ont ' d)
13. S wap the connecti ons between the front i nner si de
front passenger's wei ght sensor and the rear i nner
si de sensor.
NO- F aul ty front passenger's wei ght sensor (front
i nner si de); repl ace the f ront passenger's seat f r ame
i ncl udi ng all f our f ront passenger's wei ght sensors
(see page 24-235), then clear the DTC. B
f r o m the front passenger's wei ght sensor (front i nner
si de), and di sconnect the ODS uni t harness 3P
connector (B) f r om the f ront passenger's wei ght
sensor (rear i nner si de).
A
19. Meas ure the vol tage between body ground and ODS
uni t harness 18P connectortermi nal No. 8. There
s houl d be less than 0.2 V.
1
/
3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11
12 13 14 15
i
16 17
/
BRN
24- 237), then clear the DTC.B
NO- S hor t to power in the ODS uni t harness; replace
the ODS uni t harness, then clear the DT C . B
f r om the front passenger's wei ght sensor (front i nner
side).
i nner si de); replace the seat f rame i ncl udi ng all four
f ront passenger's wei ght sensors (see page 24-235),
then clear the DTC.B
24-172
24. Di sconnect t he ODS uni t har ness 18P connect or (A)
f r om t he ODS uni t
25. Measur e t he r esi st anc e bet ween body gr ound and
ODS uni t harness 18P connector termi nal No. 8. There
26. Meas ure the resi stance between ODS uni t harness
BRN
1
/
' 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11
12
1:
I 14 15 16 17
/
BL K
24- 237), then clear the DT C . B
NO- S hor t to another wi re in the ODS uni t harness;
1
/
3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11
12 13 14 15 16 17
/
BRN
NO- S hort to gr ound i n the ODS uni t harness; repl ace
24-173
PTC 82-16: No Si gnal From t he Front
Passenger's Wei ght Sensor (rear i nner si de)
(4-door)
revi ew SRS Pr ecaut i ons and P rocedures (see page
24-25) and Gener al T roubl es hooti ng Inf ormat i on (see
page 24-36).
1. Cl ear t he DTC wi t h t he H DS (see page 24-38).
seconds.
' 24-38).B
4. F rom the SRS I NSP ECTI ON menu on the H DS , select
S W S DTC CH ECK .
Is an SWS DTC also indicat ed?
Y E S -
DTC 16- 11: S hort to power in the front passenger's
wei ght sensor (rear i nner side) power ci rcui t;
wei ght sensor (rear i nner side) power circuit. Go to
step 5.
sensor (rear i nner side) output circuit. G o t o step 12.
wei ght sensor (rear i nner side) output circuit. Go to
step 20.
24-38).B
f r om the front passenger's wei ght sensor (rear i nner
side).
A
NO- F aul ty front passenger's wei ght sensor (rear
i nner si de); replace the front passenger's seat f rame
i ncl udi ng all four front passenger's wei ght sensors
(see page 24-235), then clear the DTC.B
f r om the ODS unit.
A
24-174
ODS uni t har ness 18P c onnec t or t er mi nal No. 4. Ther e
shoul d be an open ci rcui t or at l east 1 MO.
ODS UNIT HARNE SS 18P CONNECTOR
BLK _
1
/
3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11
12 13 14 15
i
16 17
/
NO- S hort to gr ound in the ODS uni t harness; replace
the ODS uni t harness, then clear the DTC. B
11. Measure the resistance between ODS uni t harness
BL K
1
/
3 4 5 6 7
8 9" 10 11
12 13 1 4 15
i
16 17
/
L TGRN
NO- S hort to another wi re in the ODS uni t harness;
replace the ODS uni t harness, then clear the DT C . B
13. S wap the connecti ons between the rear i nner si de
front passenger's wei ght sensor and the f ront i nner
si de sensor.
i nner side); repl ace the front passenger's seat f rame
i ncl udi ng all f our f ront passenger's wei ght sensors
(see page 24-235), then clear the DTC. B
f r om the front passenger's wei ght sensor (front i nner
connector (B) f r om the front passenger's wei ght
sensor (rear i nner si de).
(cont'd)
24-175
19. Meas ure the vol tage between body gr ound and ODS
uni t harness 18P connector termi nal No. 9. There
1
/
3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11
12 13 14 15 16 17
/
Y E S - F aul ty ODS uni t; repl ace the ODS uni t (see page
24-237), then clear the DTC. B
NO- S hor t to power in the ODS uni t harness; repl ace
the ODS uni t harness, then clear i he DTC H
f r om the f ront passenger's wei ght sensor (rear i nner
side).
A
i nner si de); replace the f ront passenger's seat f rame
(see page 24- 235), then clear the DTC. B
A
ODS uni t harness 18P connectortermi nal No. 9. There
1
/
3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11
12 13 14 15 16 17
/
NO- S hor t to ground in the ODS uni t harness; repl ace
24-176
26. Measur e.t he r esi st ance bet ween ODS unit har ness
18P connect or t er mi nal s No. 9 and No. 14. Ther e
ODS UNIT HARNESS 18P CONNECTOR
BLU
1
/
3 4 5 6 7
/ 8 9 1011
12 13 1 4 15 16 17
/
L TGRN
YES-Fault y ODSunit ; replacet h e ODS unit (s ee page
NO-Shor t t o anot h er wirein t h eODS uni t har ness;
replacet h e ODS unit h arnes s , t h encl ear t h e DTC B
DTC 83-24: No Si gnal Fr om t he Front
Passenger ' s Wei ght Sensor (front outer si de)
(4-door)
. review SRSPrecaut ions and Procedures (s ee page
page24-36).
s econds .
Go t o Tr oubl eshoot i ng Intermi ttent Failures (s eepage
. 24-38).
4. FromINSPE CTION menu on t h e HDS, s elect SWS
DTC CHE CK .
Is anot her DTC also indicat ed?
Y E S - "
- DTC 24-11: Sh ort t o power in f ront passenger ' s
weigh t s ens or (front out er s ide) power circuit ;
replacet h e ODS unit h arnes s , t h en clear t h e DTC.B
DTC 24-12: Sh ort t o ground in t h e front passenger ' s
weigh t s ens or (front out er s ide) power circuit . Go t o
s t ep 5.
DTC 24-13: Openi n t h e front pas s enger's weigh t
s ens or (front out er s ide) out put circuit . Got o
s t ep 12.
DTC 24-14: Sh ort t o ground in t h e front pas s enger's
weigh t s ens or (front out er s ide) out put circuit . Go t o
s t ep 20.
NO-lnt ermit t ent failure, t h e s ys t emi s OK at t h is t ime.
. 24-38).fl
(cont 'd)
24-177
6. Di sc onnec t t he ODS uni t har ness 3P connect or (A)
f r om t he f ront passenger ' s wei ght sensor (front out er
si de).
NO-Faul t y f ront passenger ' s wei ght sensor (front
out er si de); r epl ace t he front passenger ' s seat f r ame
i ncl udi ng all f our f ront passenger ' s wei ght s ens or s
(see page 24-235), t hen cl ear t he DTC.H
9. Di sc onnec t t he ODS uni t har ness 18P connect or (A)
f r om t he ODS uni t.
ODS uni t har ness 18P connect or t er mi nal No. 5. Ther e
BRN
1
/
3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11
12 13 14 15
i
16 17
/
NO-Shor t to gr ound in t he ODS uni t har ness; r epl ace
t he ODS uni t har ness, t hen cl ear t he DTC.H
11. Measur e t he r esi st ance bet ween ODS uni t har ness
18P connect or t er mi nal s No. 5 and No. 15. Ther e
BRN
GRY
1
/
3 4 5 6 7
8 9 , 10 11
12 13 14 15 16 17
/
YES - Faul t y ODS uni t; r epl ace t he ODS uni t (see page
24-237), t hen cl ear t he DTC.H
NO-Shor t to anot her wi r e i n t he ODS uni t har ness;
r epl ace t he ODS uni t har ness, t hen cl ear t he DTC.H
24-178
13. S wap the connecti ons between the front outer side
front passenger' s wei ght sensor and the rear outer
si de sensor.
NO -F aulty front passenger' s wei ght sensor (front
outer si de); replace the front passenger' s seat f rame
i ncl udi ng all front passenger' s wei ght sensors (see
page 24-235), then clear the DTC. B
f r om the front passenger's wei ght sensor (front outer
sensor (rear outer side).
18. T urn the i gni ti on s wi tch to ON (ll).
19. Meas ure the vol tage between body gr ound and ODS
1
/
3 4 5 3 '
8 9 1<3 11
12 13 14 15
t"
16 1 7 | /
NO- S hor t to power in the ODS uni t harness; replace
side).
outer si de); replace the front passenger's seat f rame
(see page 24-235), then clear the DTC. 13
(cont'd)
24-179
24. Di sconnect t he ODS uni t harness 18P c onnec t or (A)
f r om t he ODS uni t.
ODS uni t har ness 18P connect or t er mi nal No. 10.
Ther e shoul d be an open ci r cui t or at l east 1 MO.
26. Measur e t he r esi st ance bet ween ODS uni t har ness
1
/
3 4 5 I 6 7
8 9 1( ) 11
12 13 14 15 16 17
/
GRY BLU
Is t he resist ance as specifmd?
replace the ODS uni t harness, then clear the DTC. H
1
/
3 4 5 6 7
8 9 1( 3 11
12 13 14 15
t
16 17
/
NO- S hor t to ground in the ODS uni t harness; repl ace
the ODS uni t harness, then clear the DTC. H
24-180
DTC 83-2S: No Si gnal From t he Front
Passenger ' s Wei ght Sensor (rear outer si de)
(4-door)
page 24-36).
seconds.
24-38).B
4. F rom I NSP ECTI ON menu on the H DS , select S W S
DTC CH ECK .
Is anot her DTC also indicat ed?
Y E S -
DTC 26- 11: S hort to power in front passenger's
wei ght sensor (rear outer side) power circuit;
wei ght sensor (rear outer side) power circuit. Go to
step 5.
sensor (rear outer side) output circuit. Go to step 12.
wei ght sensor (rear outer side) output circuit. Go to
step 20.
24-38).B
f r om the front passenger's wei ght sensor (rear outer
side).
outer si de); replace the front passenger's seat f rame
(cont'd)
24-181
10. Meas ure t he r esi st ance between body gr ound and
ODS uni t har ness 18P connector t er mi nal No. 6. Ther e
s houl d be an open ci rcui t or at least 1 MQ.
RED
1
/
3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11
12 13 14 15 16 17
/
NO- S hor t to gr ound in the ODS uni t harness; repl ace
the ODS uni t harness, then clear the DTC. B
11. Meas ure the resi stance between ODS uni t harness
RED
1
/
3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11
12 13 14 15 1 6 17
/
WHT
13. S wap the connecti ons between the rear outer si de
f ront passenger's wei ght sensor and the front outer
si de sensor.
is DTC 26-13 indicated?
outer si de); repl ace the front passenger's seat f rame
16. Di sconnect the ODS uni t harness 3P connect or (A)
sensor (rear outer si de).
A
#
24-182
19. Measur e t he vol t age bet ween body gr ound and ODS
1
/
3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 r
12 13 14 15
i
18 17
/
GRN
NO- S hort to power in the ODS uni t harness; replace
f r om the f ront passenger's wei ght sensor (rear outer
side).
There s houl d be an open ci rcui t or at least 1 MO.
1
/
3
A
5 6 7
8 9 10 r
12 13 14 15 16 17,
/
G R N
NO- S hort to ground in the ODS uni t harness; repl ace
the ODS uni t harness, then clear t h e D T C H
outer side); repl ace the front passenger's seat f rame
(cont'd)
24-183
DTC Troubl eshoot i ng (c ont 'd)
26. Measur e t he r esi st anc e bet ween ODS uni t har ness
WH T
1
/
3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 V
12 13 14 15 16 17
/
GRN
4SH
24- 237), then clear the DTC. B
repl ace the ODS uni t harness, then clear the DTC. B
DTC 82-15: i nternal Fai l ure of t he Front
(4-door)
DTC 82-17: Internal Fai l ure of t he Front
Passenger ' s Wei ght Sensor (rear i nner si de)
(4-door)
DTC 83-25: Internal Fai l ure of the Front
(4-door)
DTC 83-27: Internal Fai l ure of t he Front
(4-door)
page 24-36).
2. T urn the i gni ti on s wi tch to ON (II), then wai t f or 10
seconds.
Is DTC82-15, 82-17, 83-25, or 83-27 indicat ed?
Y E S - F aul ty front passenger's wei ght sensor; repl ace
the front passenger's seat f rame i ncl udi ng all f our
front passenger's wei ght sensors (see page 24-235),
then clear the DTC.B
24-38).B
24-184
DTC 85-4x, 85-Sx (" x" can be 0 t hr u S or A t hru
FL 85-63,85-64: Internal Fai l ure of ODS Uni t
page 24-36).
seconds.
Is DTC 85-4x, 85-5x, 85-63, or 85-64 indicated?
24-38).B
goes off.
NO- Go to step 7.
7. Replace the ODS uni t (see page 24- 237), then clear the
DTC.
goes off.
NO- R epl ace the SRS uni t (see page 24-228).B
DTC 85-61: No Si gnal Fr om the ODS Uni t
DTC 85-62: Incorrect Data From the ODS Uni t
seconds.
r\
is DTC85-61 or 85-62 indicated?
DTC.B
5. Check the No. 12 (7.5 A) fuse i n the dri ver's
under- dash fuse/rel ay box.
Is the fuse OK ?
NO- R epl ace the fuse, then turn the i gni ti on swi tch to
ON (II). If the fuse bl ows agai n, check for a short in the
No. 12 (7.5 A) fuse ci rcui t (dashboard wi re harness,
SRS fl oor wi re harness, or ODS uni t harness).
24-185
9. Measur e t he vol t age bet ween body gr ound and ODS
uni t har ness 18P connect or t er mi nal No. 1. Ther e
shoul d be battery vol t age.
GRN
1
/
3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11
12 13 14 15 16 17
/
NO- Open between the No. 12 (7.5 A) fuse in the
dri ver's under- dash fuse/rel ay box and the ODS uni t
18P connector termi nal No. 1 (dashboard wi re
harness, SRS fl oor wi r e harness, or ODS uni t
harness); repl ace the faul ty harness, then clear the
DTC.B
1
/
3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11
12 13 14 15 16 17
/
YE L
Is resistance as specified?
NO- Open i n the SRS fl oor wi re harness, the ODS uni t
harness, poor connecti on at the gr ound (G702) (see
page 22-64) or poor connection at the ODS unit
harness 18P connector, and the ODS uni t. Check the
connectors; if the connecti on is OK , repl ace the faul ty
harness, then cl ear the DTC. B
24-186
12. ' Di sc onnec t t he negat i ve cabl e f r om t he battery, t hen
13. Di sconnect SRS uni t connect or B (39P) f r om t he SRS
SRS uni t connect or B (39P) t ermi nal No. 1. Ther e
NO- S hor t to ground between SRS uni t connector B
(39P) termi nal No. 1 and ODS uni t 18P connector
termi nal No. 7 (dashboard wi re harness, SRS fl oor
wi re harness, or ODS uni t harness); replace the faul ty
harness, then clear the DTC. B
B (39P) termi nal No. 1 and ODS uni t harness 18P
connectortermi nal No. 7. There s houl d be less than
1.0 0.
BLU I
1
/
3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11
12 13 14 15 16 17
/
12 13
(26)(27)
14
8 9 10 11
19
(32) (33) (34) (35) 36
21 23 24 25
37 38 39
NO- Open between SRS uni t connector B (39P)
termi nal No. 1 and ODS uni t 18P connectortermi nal
No. 7 (dashboard wi re harness, SRS fl oor wi re
harness, or ODS uni t harness); replace the faul ty
harness, then clear the DTC.B
(cont'd)
24-187
uni t connector B (39P) termi nal No. 1. There s houl d be
less than 0.2 V.
czzz U
1 6 7 8 9 10 11
U
12 13 14 15
A A
19 21
/
23 24 25
(26) (27)
/
/
A
(32) (33) (34) (35) 36 37 38 39
J U
X
NO- S hort to power between S RS uni t connector B
(39P) termi nal No. 1 and ODS uni t 18P connector
termi nal No. 7 (das hboard wi re harness, SRS fl oor
wi re harness, or ODS uni t harness); repl ace the faul ty
harness, then clear the DTC. B
19. Replace the ODS uni t (see page 24-237), then clear the
DTC.
Y E S - Repl ace the SRS uni t (see page 24-228).B
NO- This s ys tem is OK . B
DTC 85-71,85-78: ODS Uni t Not Initialized
page 24-36).
seconds.
Go to T roubl es hooti ng Intermi ttent Fai l ur es (see page
DTC.B
seconds.
seconds.
is DTC 85-71 or 85-78 indicated?
DTC.B
9. Replace the ODS uni t (see page 24-237), then cl earthe
DTC.
goes off.
Y E S - T he s ys tem is OK .B
NO- Replace the SRS uni t (see page 24- 228) . ! !
24-188
DTC 85-79: OPDS Sensor Initial Check Fai lure
N O T E : B efore doi ng thi s troubl es hooti ng procedure,
page 24-36).
seconds.
Is DTC 85-79 Indicat ed?
24-38).B
goes off.
Y E S - l ntermi ttent fai l ure, the s ys tem is OK at thi s ti me.
D T C . B
NO- Go to step 8.
goes off.
NO- Replace the ODS uni t (see page 24-237), then
clear the DTC. If the DTC is still present, repl ace the
seat-back cover/pad wi th equi pped OP DS sensor,
then clear the DTC. If the DTC is still present, repl ace
the SRS uni t (see page 24-228).B
DTC 86-1x (" x" c an be t hru 9 or A t hru F):
Faulty OPDS Seat -Back Sensor
DTC 8S-2x (" x" c an be 0 t hro 9 or A t hry F):
Faulty OPDS Seat Support Sensor
NOTE : B efore doi ng thi s troubl eshooti ng procedure,
24-25) and General Troubl es hooti ng I nformati on (see
page 24-36).
seconds.
is DTC 86-1 x or 86-2x indicat ed?
NO- l ntermi ttent fai l ure, the system is OK at this ti me.
24-38). If another DTC is i ndi cated, troubl eshoot the
DTC.B
(cont'd)
24-189
I S (Supplemental Rest rai nt Syst em)
DTC Troubl eshoot i ng (cont
8
d)
5. Chec k the connect i on between t he ODS uni t har ness
18P connectors (A), the OP DS sensor connectors (B ),
and ODS uni t.
B
NO -Repair t he poor connecti ons, and clear the
DTC.H
6. Replace the seat- back cover/pad wi th equi pped OP DS
sensor, then clear the DTC:
4- door (see page 20-221)
Is DTC 86-1 x or 86-2x indicated?
Y E S - Repl ace the ODS uni t (see page 24-237), then
clear the DTC. If the DTC is still present, repl ace the
SRS uni t (see page 24-228).H
NO- T he s ys tem is O K . H
DTC 2-1 J C (" x" can be 0 t hr u 9 or A t hr u F):
Shor t to power in the Passenger ' s Ai r bag
Cutoff Indi cator
NOTE :
uni t software versi on wi th the H DS . If the software
seconds.
DTC. B
6. Di sconnect the passenger's ai rbag cutoff i ndi cator 6P
connector (see page 24-241).
24-190
10. Measure the vol tage between body ground and SRS
uni t connector A (39P) termi nal No. 20. There s houl d
be less than 0.2 V.
/ /
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
/
/ A /
16 17 18 20
/ / /
26 27 28 29
A
31 36 37 38 39
J t
Y E S - F aul ty SRS uni t or passenger's ai rbag cutoff
i ndi cator; replace the passenger's ai rbag cutoff
i ndi cator (see page 24-241), then clear the DTC. I f the
DTC is still pres ent replace the SRS uni t (see page
24-228).B
NO- S hort to power in the das hboard wi re harness;
replace the das hboard wi re harness, then clear the
DTC.B
DTC 92-2x (" x" c an be 0 t hr u 9 or A t hru F):
Open or Short to Gr ound in t he Passenger ' s
Ai r bag Cutoff Indi cator
NOTE :
S RS P recauti ons and P rocedures (see page 24-25),
1. Clear the DTC wi th the H DS (see page 24-38),
seconds.
DT C . B
5. Di sconnect the negati ve cable f r om the battery, then
6. Di sconnect the passenger's ai rbag cutoff i ndi cator 6P
connector (see page 24-241).
(cont'd)
DTC Troubl eshoot i ng fcont'd)
8. Measur e t he r esi st ance bet ween SRS uni t connect or
A (39P) t er mi nal No. 20 and passenger ' s ai r bag cutoff
i ndi cat or 6P connect or t er mi nal No. 5. Ther e shoul d
be l ess t han 1.0 O.
u u
A A
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
/
A A A
/
16 17 18
/
20
26
I
27 28 29
/
31
/ / /
36 37 38 39
BL U
fl l 2 | 3 l 4 | 5 T 6 |
PA S S E NGE RS AI RBAG CUTOFF
INDICATOR 6P CONNECTOR
NO- Open in the das hboard wi re harness; repl ace the
das hboard wi re harness, then clear the DTC. B
S RS uni t connector A (39P) termi nal No. 20. There
s houl d be an open circuit or at least 1 MO.
u u
/
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
/ / / /
16 17 18 20
26
U
27 28 29
/
31
/
/
/
36 37 38 39
Y E S - F aul ty SRS uni t or passenger's ai rbag cutoff
i ndi cator; replace the passenger's ai rbag cutoff
i ndi cator (see page 24-241), then clear the DTC. If the
DTC is still present, replace the SRS uni t (see page
24-228).B
NO- S hort to ground in the das hboard wi re harness;
replace the das hboard wi re harness, then clear the
DTC. B
24-192
/ A
DI G A1-1x (" x" can be i t hr u S or A t hr u F):
Faulty Power Suppl y (VA line)
NOTE:
Bef ore doi ng t hi s t r oubl eshoot i ng pr ocedur e, r evi ew
S RS Pr ecaut i ons and Pr oc edur es (see page 24-25),
24-36), and Battery Ter mi nal Di sconnect i on and
9 2-door: Bef ore r epl aci ng t he S RS uni t , check t he S RS
uni t sof t war e ver si on wi t h t he HDS. If t he sof t war e
ver si on i s not t he latest,, updat e t he S RS uni t sof t war e
' (see page 24-39), and ret est .
seconds.
Is DTC A1-1x indicat ed?
D T C S
5. Check the No. 12 (7.5 A) fuse in the dri ver's
under- dash fuse/rel ay box.
Is t he fuse OK?
ON (II). I f the fuse bl ows agai n, check for a short in the
No. 12 (7.5 A) fuse ci rcui t (dashboard wi re harness,
SRS fl oor wi re harness, or ODS uni t harness); replace
the f ault y harness, then clear the DTC. I f the DTC is
still present, replace the dri ver's under- dash
fuse/rel ay box, then clear the DTC. B
8. Di sconnect SRS uni t connector A (39P) f r om the S RS
be battery vol tage.
u u
/ /
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
/
/ / / /
16 17 18
/
20
26
J I
27 28 29
/
31 36 37 38 39
i
X
Y E S - F aul ty SRS uni t or poor connecti on at SRS uni t
connector A (39P) and the SRS uni t; check the
connecti on. I f the connecti on is OK , repl ace the SRS
uni t (see page 24-228).B
NO- Open i n the das hboard wi re harness; repl ace the
das hboard wi re harness, then clear the DTC.B
24-193
DTC Troubl eshoot i ng fcont' d)
DTC A2-1x (" x" can be 0 t hru 9 or A t hru F):
Faulty Power Suppl y (VB line)
NOTE :
SRS P recauti ons and P rocedures {see page 24-25),
uni t software vers i on wi th the H DS . I f the software
seconds.
Is DTC A2-1x indicated?
D T C S
5. Check the No. 11 (10 A) fuse in the dri ver's under- dash
fuse/rel ay box.
Is the fuse OK ?
ON (II). If the fuse bl ows agai n, check for a S hort to
ground in the das hboard wi re harness or in the
dri ver's under- dash fuse/rel ay box No. 11 (10 A) fuse
circuit; repl ace the das hboard wi re harness, then clear
the DT C I fthe DTC is still present, repl ace the dri ver's
under- dash fuse/rel ay box, then clear the DTC. H
be battery vol tage.
u u
/
/
3 4 5 | 6 7 8 9 10
/ / /
16 17 18 20
/
/
/
26 27 28 29
/
31
/
36 37 38 39
- ._ ..... - _ L
X
Y E S - F aul ty SRS uni t or poor connecti on at SRS uni t
connector A (39P) and the SRS uni t; check the
connecti on. I f the connecti on is OK , replace the SRS
uni t (see page 24-228).B
NO- Open in the das hboard wi re harness; replace the
das hboard wi re harness, then clear the DT C . H
24-194
DTC' A3-1x (" x" can be t hr u S or A t hr u F):
S RS Connect or A Not Properly Installed
NOTE :
B efore doi ng t hi s troubl es hooti ng procedure, r evi ew
24-36), and Bat t ery T ermi nal Di sconnecti on and
Reconnecti on (see page 22-91 ) . '
2-door: Bef or e repl aci ng t he S RS uni t , c hec k t he S RS
uni t s oftware versi on wi t h t he HDS, If t he software
vers i on i s not t he l at est , update t he S RS uni t software
(see page 24- 39), and retest.'
2. T urn t he i gni t i on swi tch to ON (II), t hen wai t f or 10
sec onds.
Is DTC A3-1x indicat ed?;.-'
NO- l ntermi ttent f ai l ur e, t he syst em is OK at t hi s t i me.
DTC. B
5. Di sconnect the negati ve cabl e f r om the battery, t hen
wai t at l east 3 mi nutes.
6. Chec k the connecti on between SRS uni t connector A
(39P) and the SRS uni t.
NO- Repai r t he poor connect i on, t hen cl ear t he DTC.B
uni t (see st ep 1 To n page 24-36).
8. Chec k for bent or damaged termi nal s on the SRS uni t.
Are any t erminals bend or damaged?
Y E S - Repl ace the SRS uni t (see page 24-228).B
NO- R epl ace the das hboard wi re harness, then clear
the DTC.B
DTC A4-1x P' x" mm be 0 thru. S or A t hr u -F):
:
S RS Connect or B Not Properl y Inst al l ed
NOTE :
B efore doi ng thi s t r oubl eshoot i ng pr ocedur e, revi ew
S RS P recauti ons and P rocedures'(see page 24-25), -
General Tr oubl eshoot i ng I nformati on (see page
24-36), and Bat t ery T ermi nal Di sconnect i on and
- Reconnecti on (see page 22-91).
2-door: Bef or e repl aci ng the SRS uni t, check the SRS
uni t s oftware versi on wi th the H DS . If the s oftware
(see page 24-39); and retest.
seconds. .
3. Chec k f or DTCs wi t h t he HDS (see page 24-37).'
Is DTC A4-1x indicat ed?
Y E S - Go to step 4. .
NO-l nt er mi t t ent failure, .t h e s ys tem is OK at thi s ti me.
Go to Tr oubl eshoot i ng Intermi ttent Fai l ur es (see page
. DTC. B ..
wai t at least 3 mi nutes . .
6. Check the connecti on bet ween SRS uni t connect or B
(39P) and t he S RS uni t.
NO- R epai r the poor connecti on, then clear the DTC.B
7. Di sconnect SRS uni t connector B (39P) f r om the SRS
8. Check for bent or damaged termi nal s on the SRS uni t.
Are any t erminals bend or damaged?
Y E S - Repl ace the SRS uni t (see page 24- 228). B
NO- R epl ace the das hboard wi re harness, then clear
. the DT C . B
24195
DTC B2-1x f x " c an be 0 t hr u 9 or A t hr u F): No
Si gnal From the Rear Saf i ng Sensor (4-door)
S peci al T ool s Requi red
SRS I nfl ator S i mul ator 07S AZ- TB 4011A
seconds.
Is DTC B2-1x indicat ed?
DT C . B
(39P) and the SRS uni t, and between the SRS fl oor
wi re harness 2P connector and the rear safi ng sensor
(see page 24-234).
NO- Repai r the poor connecti ons , then clear the
DTC.B
7. Di sconnect SRS uni t connector B (39P) f r om the S RS
f r om the rear safi ng sensor (see page 24-234).
an open ci rcui t or at least 1 MO.
0
If
0
1
/ / /
/
6 7 8 9 10 11
If
0 0
12 13 14 15 19 21 23 24 25
0
26 27
/
32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39
L
NO- S hor t another wi re in the S RS fl oor wi re harness;
DTC.B
10. Meas ure the resistance between body gr ound and
No. 27, i ndi vi dual l y. There s houl d be an open ci rcui t
or at least 1 MO.
J
If
J
1 6 7 8 9 10 11
If
J J
12 13 14 15
/ / /
19
/
21
/
23 24 25
J
26 27 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39
1
NO- S hort to gr ound in the SRS fl oor wi re harness;
DTC.B
24-196
12. T urn the i gni ti on swi tch to ON (Ii).
uni t connector B (39P) termi nal s No. 26 and No. 27,
12 13
26 27
14 15
6 7 8 9
32
19
33 34
21
10 11
23
35 36 37 38 39
24 25
NO- S hort to power in the SRS fl oor wi re harness;
DTC.B
REAR S AFI NG
S ENS OR
07SAZ-TB4011A
070AZ-SNAA300
16. Meas ure the resistance between S RS uni t connector
less than 1.0 Q.
if
1
/ / /
/
6 7 8 9 10 11
if
12 13 14 15
/ / /
19 21
/
23 24 25
26 27 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39
y U
Y E S - F aul ty rear safi ng sensor or S RS uni t; repl ace the
rear safi ng sensor (see page 24-234), then clear the
DTC. I f the DTC is still present, repl ace the SRS uni t
(see page 24-228).B
SRS fl oor wi re harness, then clear the DTC.B
24-197
SRS (Supplemental Rest rai nt Syst em)
DTC Troubl eshoot i ng | G@r t t
B
c i I
DTC B2-1x | " x " c a n be 0 t hr u 9or A t hr u F): No
Si gnal From t he Rear Saf i ng Sensor (2-door)
S peci al Tool s Requi red
. SRS I nflator S i mul ator 07S AZ- TB 4011A
NOTE :
e B efore doi ng thi s troubl es hooti ng procedure, revi ew
24-36).
B efore repl aci ng the SRS uni t, check the SRS uni t
software vers i on wi th the H DS . If the software vers i on
is not the latest, update the SRS uni t software (see
1. Cl ear t he DTC wi t h the HDS {see page 24-38).
2. T urn the i gni ti on swi tch to ON (IS), then wai t for 10
seconds.
Is B2-11 indicated?
NO- Go to step 5.
Is DTC 46-11 also indicated?
Y E S - F aul ty rear safi ng sensor; replace the rear safi ng
sensor (see page 24-234), then clear the DT C . B
NO- Go to step 7.
Is DTC B2-1x also indicated?
DTC.B
Is DTC 46-11 also indicated?
Y E S - T roubl es hoot DTC 46-1 x (see page 24-151).ffl
NO- F aul ty rear safi ng sensor; repl ace the rear safi ng
sensor (see page 24-234), then clear the DTC.B
f r om the ri ght si de i mpact sensor (first) (see page
24-231).
9. Di sconnect the S RS fl oor wi re harness 4P connector
(Rear safi ng sensor) f r om the rear safi ng sensor (see
page 24-234).
10. Meas ure the resistance between SRS fl oor wi re
harness 4P connector (Rear safi ng sensor) termi nal s
No. 2 and No. 3. There s houl d be an open ci rcui t or at
least 1 MQ.
SRS F LOOR WIRE HARNESS 4P CONNECTOR
(Rear safing sensor)
1 2 3 4

NO- S hort another wi re in the SRS fl oor wi re harness;
DTC.B
24-1S
-ft
11. Measure the resi stance between body gr ound and
SRS fl oor wi re harness 4P connector (Rear safi ng
sensor) termi nal s No. 2 and No. 3, i ndi vi dual l y. There
(Rear saf i ng s ens or )
1 2 3 4
D

NO- S hort to gr ound i n the SRS fl oor wi r e harness;
replace the SRS*floor wi re harness, then clear the
DTC.B
fl oor wi re harness 4P connector (Rear safi ng sensor)
termi nal s No. 2 and No. 3, i ndi vi dual l y. There s houl d
be less than 0.2 V.
(Rear saf i ng sensor )
1 2 3 4
1
D
j i
repl ace the S RS fl oor wi re harness, then clear the
DTC.B
14. Turn the i gni ti on swi tch to LOCK (0).
connector) and the bl ack lead (A) of s i mul ator lead L
\ \ RIGHT S I DE IMPACT
\ \ S E NS OR (FIRST)
07SAZ-TB4011A
070AZ-SNAA300
16. Measure the resi stance between S RS fl oor wi re
harness 4P connector (Rear safi ng sensor) termi nal s
No. 2 and No. 3. There s houl d be less than 1.0 Q.
(Rear saf i ng sensor )
1 2 3 4
D

d
}
Y E S - F aul ty rear safi ng sensor or SRS uni t; replace the
rear safi ng sensor (see page 24-234), then clear the
DTC. I f the DTC is still present, repl ace the SRS uni t
(see page 24-228).B
SRS fl oor wi re harness, then clear the DT C . B
24-199
S i S (Supplement al Restrai nt Syst em)
DTC B2-2x, B2-3x, B2-8x, B2-9x, B2-Ax, B2-Bx
(" x" c an be 0 t hr u 9 or A t hr u F); Internal
Fai l ure of the Rear Saf i ng Sensor
page 24-36).
1 . Cl ear the DTC wi th the H DS (see page 24-38).
seconds.
Is DTC B2-2x, B2-3x, B2-8x, B2-9x, B2-Ax, or B2-Bx
indicat ed?
YES - Faul t y r ear saf i ng sensor or S RS uni t; replace t he
rear safi ng sensor (see page 24- 234), then clear the
DTC. If the DTC is still present, replace the SRS uni t
(see page 24-228).B
DTC.B
DTC Ex-11 (" x" can be 0 t hr u 9 or A t hr u F):
Cont rol Operat i on Recorded
NOTE :
24-36).
(see page 24- 39), and retest.
seconds.
3. Chec k for DTCs wi t h the HDS (see page 24-37).
Is DTC Ex-11 indicat ed?
Y E S - F aul ty S RS uni t; replace the SRS uni t (see page
24- 228). B
DTC. B
24-200
DTC FJC-1 1 (" x" can be t hr u 9 or A t hr u F) :
Ai r bags and/or Tensi oner s Depl oyment
Recorded
NOTE :
24-36).
Refer to the DTCs s hown:
- DTC F 1-11* Dri ver's ai rbag and/or dri ver's seat belt
tensi oner depl oyed.
- DTC F 2-11: F ront passenger's ai rbag and/or front
passenger's seat belt tensi oner depl oyed.
- DTC F 3- 11: Dri ver's si de ai rbag, left si de curtai n
ai rbag, and/or dri ver's seat belt tensi oner depl oyed.
- DTC F4-11: F ront passenger's side ai rbag, ri ght si de
curtai n ai rbag, and/or front seat belt tensi oner
depl oyed.
- DTC F 5- 11: B oth or onl y one si de curtai n ai rbag and
seat bel t tensi oner depl oyed.
- DTC F 6- 11: Left si de curtai n ai rbag or ri ght si de
curtai n ai rbag depl oyed.
W hen any ai rbags or tensi oners have depl oyed, go to
C omponent Repl acement/I nspecti on After Depl oyment
(see page 24-208).B
DTC 41-xx
r
42-xx, 43-xx (" x" can be 0 t hr u 9 or
A t hru F): Internal Fai lure of the ODS Uni t
NOTE : Onl y read DTCs f r om the SRS menu, not f r om
S W S menus unl ess i nstructed to check S W S DTCs. S W S
(ODS uni t) DTCs are subcodes of SRS uni t DTCs. Onl y
troubl es hoot the corres pondi ng SRS DTCs.
Do the troubl es hooti ng for SRS uni t DTC 81 -4x (see page
24-165).
24-201
DTC Troubl eshoot i ng (c ont ' d)
DTC 71-xx (" x" can be 0 t hr u 9 or A t hr u F):
ODS Uni t Not Cal i brat ed
NOTE: Onl y r ead DTCs f r om t he S RS menu, not f r om
S WS menus unl ess Inst r uct ed to check S W S DTCs . S WS
(ODS uni t) DTCs ar e subc odes of S RS uni t DTCs. Onl y
Do the troubl es hooti ng for SRS uni t DTC 81 -71 (see page
24-168).
DTC 14-11: Shor t to Power in the Front
Power Ci rcui t
DTC 14-12: Shor t to Gr ound in t he Front
Power Ci rcui t
DTC 14-13: Shor t to Power inthe Front
Output Ci rcui t
DTC 14-14: Shor t to Gr ound in the Front
Output Ci rcui t
NOTE : Onl y read DTCs f r om the S RS menu, not f r om
(ODS unit) DTCs are subcodes of SRS uni t DTCs. Onl y
Do the troubl es hooti ng for SRS uni t DTC 82-14 (see page
24-170).
24-202
DTC 16-11: Short to Power in the Front
Power Ci rcui t
DTC 16-12: Short to Ground in the Front
Power Ci rcui t
DTC 16-13: Short to Power in the Front
Output Ci rcui t
DTC 16-14: Short to Ground in the Front
Output Ci rcui t
S W S menus unless i nstructed to check S W S DTCs. S W S
Do the troubl es hooti ng for SRS uni t DTC 82-16 (see page
24-174).
DTC 24-11: Shor t to Power in t he Front
Power Ci rcui t
Power Ci rcui t
DTC 24-13: Open in the Front Passenger ' s
Wei ght Sensor (front outer si de) Output
Ci rcui t
Output Ci rcui t
(ODS uni t) DTCs are s ubcodes of SRS uni t DTCs. Onl y
Do the troubl es hooti ng for SRS uni t DTC 83- 24 (see page
24-177).
24-203
DTC 26-11: Shor t to Power in the Front
Power Ci rcui t
Power Ci rcui t
DTC 26-13: Open in the Front Passenger ' s
Wei ght Sensor (rear out er si de) Output Ci rcui t
Output Ci rcui t
S WS mer.i:c ur.lccz I nctrj cted t o ch eck S WS DTCs. S WS
(ODS unit) DTCs are s ubcodes of SRS uni t DTCs. Onl y
Do the troubl es hooti ng for S RS uni t DTC 83-26 (see page
24-181).
DTC 15-3x: Internal Fai l ure of the Front
DTC 25-3x: Internal fai lure of the Front
S W S menus unl ess i nstructed to check S WS DTCs. S WS
troubl es hoot the corres pondi ng S RS DTCs.
Do t h etroubl es hooti ng for SRS uni t DTC 82-1S5 82-17,
83-25, and 83-27 (see page 24-184).
24-204
S RS i ndi cat or does not c ome on
NOTE : 2-door: B efore repl aci ng the SRS uni t, check the
SRS uni t software vers i on wi th the H DS . I f the software
1. T urn the i gni ti on swi tch to LOCK (0), and wai t for
10 seconds.
goes off.
Does t he SRS indicat or come on?
Y E S - l ntermi ttent fai l ure, the s ys tem is OK at thi s
ti me. B
NO- Go to step 3.
3. Connect the H DS to the data link connector (DLC) (see
page 24-38).
4. Make sure the H DS communi cates wi th the vehi cl e
and the SRS uni t. If it does not communi cate,
troubl es hoot the DLC ci rcui t (see page 11-181).
5. Do the gauge control modul e sel f- di agnosti c functi on
(see page 22-332).
Y E S - F aul ty SRS uni t; replace the SRS uni t (see page
24-228).B
NO- F aul ty gauge control modul e; replace the gauge
control modul e (see page 22-351 ). B
S RS i ndi cat or st ays on, but no DTCs are
st or ed, or cannot be read
make sure the battery is ful l y charged. I f the battery
vol tage is l ow, SRS i ndi cator may stay on.
1. Start the engi ne, and see i f the mal functi on i ndi cator
l amp (MI L) al so stays on.
Does t he MIL st ay on longer t han 30 second?
Y E S - Go to the MI L Circuit T roubl es hooti ng (see page
11- 180). B
NO- Go to step 2.
page 24-38).
and the SRS unit. If it does not communi cate,
troubl es hoot the DLC circuit (see page 11-181).
Are any SRS DTCs indicat ed?
Y E S - Do the SRS DTC troubl es hooti ng.
NO- Go to step 5.
5. Select B ody Electrical status wi th the H DS .
6. Check for DTCs in the Gauge .Menu wi th the H DS .
Y E S - T roubl es hoot DTC U0151 (see page 22-345).B
NO- Go to step 7.
(see page 22-332).
24-228).B
control modul e (see page 22-351 ).B
24-205
I S (Supplemental Rest rai nt Syst em)
Si de ai rbag cutoff i ndi cat or st ays on
2. Make s u r e the seat- back is dry.
3. T urn the i gni ti on swi tch to ON (II), and see if the SRS
i ndi cator comes on.
Does the SRS indicator come on and stay on?
Y E S - Go to the S ymptom T roubl es hooti ng "S R S
i ndi cator stay on, but no DTCs are stored, or cannot
be read".
NO- Go to step 4.
page 24-38).
and the SRS unit. If it does not communi cate,
troubl es hoot the DLC ci rcui t (see page 11-181).
6. Select B ody Electrical status wi th the H DS .
7. Check for DTCs in the Gauge Menu wi th the H DS .
is DTC U0151 indicated?
Y E S - T roubl es hoot DTC U0151 (see page 22-345) . B
NO- Go to step 8.
(see page 22-332).
Does the side airbag cutoff indicator flash?
Y E S - Do the ODS uni t initialization (see page 24-40). If
probl em is still present, replace the seat- back wi th
equi pped OP DS sensor, 4- door (see page 20- 213),
2- door (see page 20-221). If the probl em is still
present, replace the SRS uni t (see page 24- 228) .
control modul e (see page 22-351 ) .
Si de ai rbag cutoff i ndi cat or does not c ome on
NOTE :
If the SRS i ndi cator also stays on, go to SRS i ndi cator
stays on, but no DTCs are stored (see page 24-205).
uni t s oftware versi on wi th the H DS . If the software
1. T urn the i gni ti on to LOCK (0), and wai t for 10 seconds.
si de ai rbag cutoff i ndi cator comes on for about 6
seconds.
Does the side airbag cutoff indicator come on?
Y E S - l ntermi ttent fai l ure, the s ys tem is OK at thi s
t i maf i
NO- Go to step 3.
page 24-38).
and the S RS uni t. If it does not communi cate,
(see page 22-332).
Does the side airbag cutoff indicator come on?
24-228).B
NO- F aul ty gauge control modul e; repl ace the gauge
control modul e (see page 22-351 ) .
24-206
Passenger ' s ai rbag cutoff i ndi cat or st ays on
or c omes on suddenl y
NOTE : Under the f ol l owi ng condi ti ons, the passenger's
ai rbag cutoff i ndi cator stays on or comes on suddenl y:
W hen one is si tti ng on the f ront passenger's seat, but
there is an obj ect on the seat mor e than 11 lbs (5 kg).
The seat belt is buckl ed, but no one is si tti ng on the
front passenger's seat.
S omeone who is less than about 65 lbs (30 kg) is
si tti ng on the front passenger's seat.
2- door: B efore repl aci ng the S RS uni t, check the SRS
uni t software versi on wi th the H DS . I f the software
1. Check for these i tems, then recheck the passenger's
ai rbag cutoff i ndi cator.
The front passenger's seat is i nstal l ed correctl y.
Nothi ng i s/was on the front passenger's seat.
Nothi ng i s/was under the front passenger's seat.
Nothi ng i s/was in the front passenger's seat-back
pocket.
W hoever was si tti ng on the front passenger's seat
was si tti ng in the proper si tti ng posi ti on.
The seat wei ght sensors may not meas ure the
correct wei ght of the front passenger's. I f the
passenger's is more than 65 lbs (30 kg) but is
s upporti ng s ome of thei r body wei ght wi th thei r
feet on the fl oor, or wi th thei r hands and arms on an
arm rest, the actual wei ght of the passenger is not
meas ured.
Does t he passenger's airbag cut off indicat or st ay on?
page 24-38).
. and the SRS uni t. If it does not communi cate,
5. Select the I NSP E CTI ON menu on the H DS , then select
AF TER REP LACI NG F RONT P AS S E NGE R'S S E AT
COMP ONE NT(S ), and fol l ows the probl ems .
NO- T roubl es hooti ng is c o mpl e t e .
6. Select the I NSP E CTI ON menu on the H DS , then select
AF TER A VEH I CLE COLLI S I ON, and f ol l ow the
prompts .
24-228). i f the probl em is still present, replace the ODS
uni t (see page 24- 237), and then i f the probl em is still
present, repl ace the front passenger's wei ght sensor
assembl y, 4- door (see page 24-235), 2- door (see page
24-236).B
NO- T roubl es hooti ng is c ompl ete. !!
NO- T roubl es hooti ng is compl ete.
24-207
S RS (Supplement al Restrai nt Syst em)
Component Replacement/Inspection After Depl oyment
NOTE:
Bef ore doi ng any S RS r epai r s, c hec k t he DTCs (see
page 24-36) f or t he l ess obvi ous depl oyed
components (seat belt tensi oners, f ront i mpact
s ens or s , si de ai r bag s ens or s , et c.)
Do not repl ace t he ODS uni t unl ess it i s physi cal l y
damaged or a speci fi c fault was f ound duri ng DTC
troubl es hooti ng.
Af t er a vehi cl e col l i si on, do t he ODS uni t operati on
check (see page 24-41).
Af t er a vehi cl e col l i si on, i nspect t he front seat acti ve
head restrai nts (see page 20-193).
Af t er a col l i si on wher e t he seat belt tensi oners depl oyed,
repl ace t hese i t ems:
S RS uni t
Seat belt tensi oners
Front i mpact sensor s
After a col l i si on where the front ai rbag(s) depl oyed,
repl ace these i tems:
SRS uni t
Depl oyed ai rbag(s)
Seat belt tensi oners
F ront i mpact sensors
After a col l i si on where the si de ai rbag(s) depl oyed,
repl ace these i tems:
SRS uni t
S i de i mpact sensor(s) (first)
S i de i mpact sensor(s) (second)
F ront seat as s embl y (I mpact side)
After a col l i si on where a si de curtai n ai rbag has
depl oyed, replace the i tems for the side(s) that depl oyed:
SRS uni t
Depl oyed si de curtai n airbag(s)
Seat bel t tensi oner(s)
S i de i mpact sensor(s) (first)
S i de i mpact sensor(s) (second)
Rear safi ng sensor
Roof tri m
A- pi l l ar tri m
B -pillar upper tri m (4- door)
C-pillar tri m
F ront grab handl e
Rear grab handl e (4- door)
Al l rel ated tri m cl i ps
S unvi s or
After a moderate to severe si de or rear col l i si on, i nspect
for any damage on the si de curtai n ai rbag or other
rel ated components . Replace the components as
needed.
4-Door A-Pillar Trim
2-Door model is same as shown.
B-Pillar Trim
24-208
C-Pi l l ar T ri m
Always replace.
2- Door B-Pi l l ar Upper T ri m
C-P illar T ri m
Always replace.
Duri ng the repai r process, i nspect these areas:
I nspect all the SRS wi re harnesses. Replace, do not
repair, any damaged harnesses.
I nspect the cabl e reel for heat damage. If there is any
damage, repl ace the cabl e reel.
After the vehi cl e is compl etel y repai red, turn the i gni ti on
swi tch to ON (II). If the SRS i ndi cator comes on for about
6 seconds and then goes off, the SRS is OK . If the
i ndi cator does not functi on properl y, use the H DS to
read the DTC (see page 24-37). If you cannot retrieve a
code, do the SRS S ymptom Troubl eshooti ng.
(cont'd)
24-209
Component Replacement/Inspection
Checki ng and Adj ust i ng t he Headl i ner /Pi l l ar
Tr i m Over l ap
To prevent the si de curt ai n ai r bag f r om depl oyi ng and
damagi ng the pillar t r i m, t he over l ap bet ween t he
headl i ner and pillar tr i m mus t be less then 8 mm (0.3 in).
T o check the overl ap, do thi s:
1. I nstall the headl i ner (A) and the pi l l ar tri m (B ).
This illustration shows the A-pillar.
After Depl oyment (cont' d)
3. R emove the pillar tr i m, and meas ure the headl i ner
overl ap.
If the overl ap is less than 8 mm (0.3 in), remove the
tape, and install the pillar tri m.
I f the overl ap is mor e than 8 mm (0.3 i n), go to step
4.
4. Careful l y tri m the headl i ner wi th a uti l i ty kni fe,
reduci ng the overl ap to less than 8 mm (0.3 in).
5. R emove the tape, and install the pillar tri m.
24-210
Dri ver' s Ai rbag Repl acement
NOTE : If r epl aci ng t he dr i ver ' s ai r bag after depl oyment ,
refer to Component Repl acement /Inspect i on After
Deployment (s ee page 24-208) for a complet elis t of.
ot her par t s t hat must al so be r epl aced.
Removal
st art i ng wor k.
2. Remove t he ac c es s panel (A) f r om t he st eer i ng wheel ,
t hen di sc onnec t t he dr i ver ' s ai r bag 4P connect or (B )
f rom t he cabl e reel 4P connect or .
3. Remove t he t wo TORX bol t s (A) Usi ng a TORX T30 bi t
A
4. Removet he dr i ver ' s ai r bag (B ).
Inst al l at i on
NOTE : If you ar e r epl aci ng a depl oyed ai r bag, i nspect t he
cabl e reel f or heat damage. If t her e i s any damage,
r epl ace t he c abl e r eel .
1. Pl ace t he dr i ver ' s ai r bag (A) i n t he st eer i ng wheel , and
sec ur e it wi t h new TORX bolts (B ), usi ng a TORX T30
bi t.
NOTE : Make sur e t he c l ear anc e (C) bet ween t he
st eer i ng wheel and hor n pad i s t he spec i f i ed val ue.
B
9.8 N-m (1.0 kgf m, 7.2 ibf-ft)
Replace.
(cont' d)
24-211
S RS (Suppl ement al Restrai nt Syst em)
Driver's Airbag Replacement
(cont'd)
2. Connect the dri ver's ai rbag 4P connector (A) to the
cabl e reel 4P connector, then install the access panel
(B) on the steeri ng wheel .
3. Do ui o battery termi nal reconnecti on procedure (see
page 22-91).
4. Clear any DTCs wi th the H DS (see page 24-38).
5. After i nstal l i ng the ai rbag, conf i rm proper s ys tem
operati on:
T urn the i gni ti on swi tch to ON (II); the SRS i ndi cator
s houl d come on for about 6 seconds and then go
off.
Make sure the horn wor k properl y.
Front Passenger ' s Ai rbag
Repl acement
NOTE : If repl aci ng the front passenger's ai rbag after
depl oyment, refer to C omponent Repl acement/
I nspecti on After Depl oyment (see page 24-208) for a
compl ete list of other parts that mus t also be repl aced.
Removal
1. Do the battery termi nal di sconnecti on procedure (see
page 22-91), then wai t at least 3 mi nutes before
starti ng work.
2. Open the gl ove box. R emove the gl ove box stop on
the ri ght si de, then let the gl ove box hang down (see
page 20-174).
3. Detach the connector cl i p, then di sconnect the
das hboard wi re harness 4P connector (A) f r om front
passenger's ai rbag 4P connector. R emove the nuts
(B ).
4. R emove the das hboard si de lid (see step 6 on page
20-175).
24-212
5. Pl ace the car dboar d (A) bet ween t he cent er di spl ay
vi sor and the passenger's ai rbag. Usi ng onl y your
hands, fi rst lift the ri ght si de, then lift the left side, and
remove the front passenger's ai rbag and lid assembl y
(B ) f r om the das hboard.
NOTE : The ai rbag lid has pawl s (C) on each si de
where it attaches to the das hboard.
6. Cut the f our parts of the lid as s hown (A), and detach V
the f ront passenger's ai rbag.
NOTE :
Al ways repl ace the uppec das hboard panel
whenever you remove the ai rbag f r om the panel .
Replace the ai rbag if the ai rbag mounti ng hooks or
its hous i ng is damaged.
7. I nsert the hooks (A) of the front passenger's ai rbag
hous i ng i nto the new upper das hboard panel , then
i nsert the other hooks (B ) i nto the panel .
NOTE :
Make sure there are no obj ects between the ai rbag
and the upper panel .
Make sure the ai rbag is ful l y seated, and make sure
the upper panel is not def ormed or damaged after
the ai rbag is i n place.
Do not use tool s when detachi ng the front
passenger's ai rbag in order to protect it.
Make sure the hooks are set properl y.
(cont'd)
24-213
Front Passenger's Airbag Replacement (cont' d)
Inst al l at i on
1. Pl ace t he f ront passenger ' s ai r bag and lid as s embl y
(A) i nto t he dashboar d. Tor que t he f ront passenger ' s
ai r bag new mount i ng nyt s (B).
2. Connec t t he dashboar d wi r e har ness 4P connect or (A)
to t he front passenger ' s ai r bag 4P connect or , t hen
i nst al l t he connect or cl i p. Rei nst al l t he gl ove box (see
page 20-174).
3. Rei nst al l t he dashboar d si de lid (see st ep 6 on page
20-175).
4. Do t he battery t ermi nal r econnect i on pr ocedur e (see
page 22-91).
5. Cl ear any DTCs wi t h t he HDS (see page 24-38).
6. Af t er i nst al l i ng t he ai r bag, conf i r m pr oper syst em
oper at i on: Tur n t he i gni ti on swi t ch to ON (ll); t he SRS
i ndi cat or shoul d c ome on f or about 6 sec onds and
t hen go off.
24-214
Si de Ai rbag Repl acement
NOTE: If r epl aci ng t he si de ai rbag after depl oyment ,
refer to Component Repl acement /Inspect i on Af t er
Depl oyment (see page 24-208) f or a compl et e li st of
ot her part s t hat must al so be r epl aced.
Removal
st art i ng wor k.
3. Remove t he seat -back c over /pad:
4. Det ach t he har ness cl i p (A) f r om t he seat -back f r ame.
Remove t he t wo mount i ng nut s (B ) and t he si de
ai rbag (C).
Inst al l at i on
NOTE:
If t he si de ai r bag l i d is sec ur ed wi t h t ape, r emove t he
t ape,
Do not open t he li d on t he si de ai r bag c over .
Use new mounti ng nuts ti ghtened to the speci fi ed
torque.
Make sure that the seat-back cover is i nstal l ed
properl y. I mproper i nstal l ati on may prevent proper
depl oyment.
B e sure to install the harness wi res so that it is not
pi nched or i nterferi ng wi th other parts.
1. T orque the si de ai rbag (A) on the seat- back f rame.
I nstall the t wo si de ai rbag new mounti ng nuts (B ),
then install the harness clip (C).
2. I nstall the seat- back cover/pad in the reverse order of
removal :
3. I nstall the front seat (see page 20-194).
4. Do the battery termi nal reconnecti on procedure (see
page 22-91).
5. Move the front seat and the seat- back through thei r
ful l ranges of movement, maki ng sure the harness
wi res are not pi nched or i nterferi ng wi th other parts.
7. After i nstal l i ng the si de ai rbag, conf i rm proper s ys tem
operati on: T urn the i gni ti on swi tch to ON (II); the SRS
i ndi cator s houl d come on for about 6 seconds and
then go off.
24-215
Si de Curt ai n Ai rbag Repl acement
Removal
NOTE :
If r epl aci ng t he si de cur t ai n ai r bag after depl oyment , ref er to Component Repl acement /Inspect i on Af t er Depl oyment
(see page 24-208) f or a compl et e li st of ot her part s that must al so be r epl ac ed.
R evi ew the i nteri or tri m repl acement procedure before doi ng repai r or servi ce, 4- door (see page 20-104), 2- door (see
page 20-103).
R emoval of the si de curtai n ai rbag mus t be done accordi ng to P recauti on and P rocedures (see page 24-25).
1. Do the battery termi nal di s connecti on procedure (see page 22-91), then wai t at least 3 mi nutes before starti ng work.
2. R emove the headl i ner (see page 20-140).
3. Di sconnect the S RS fl oor wi re harness 2P connector (A) f r om the si de curtai n ai rbag 2P connector.
4-Door
L eft side shown; right side is similar.
2-Door
Left side shown; right side is similar.
24-216
4. R emove the mounti ng bol ts (A) and mounti ng bol ts (B) f r om the bracket. Detach the cl i ps (C), then r emove the si de
curtai n ai rbag (D).
4-Door
(cont'd)
24-217
Side Curtain Airbag Replacement (cont'd)
2-Door
24-218
Inst al l at i on
NOTE :
If r epl aci ng t he si de curt ai n ai r bag after depl oyment refer to Component Repl acement /Inspect i on After Depl oyment
(see page 24-208) for a compl ete list of other parts that mus t al so be repl aced.
I nstal l ati on of the si de curtai n ai rbag mus t be done accordi ng to precauti ons and procedures (see page 24-25).
If the ai rbag is frayed, or has any other vi si bl e damage, replace it. Do not attempt to repai r an ai rbag.
W hen you install the ai rbag, make sure it is not twi s ted, and that it is not caught between the i nfl ator bracket by the
bracket bol ts.
Make sure that the si de curtai n ai rbag i nfl ator retai ner is i nstal l ed properl y. Otherwi se the ai rbag coul d i ncorrectl y
depl oy and cause damage or i njuri es.
If there is any damage to the si de curtai n ai rbag, do not try to repai r it. Replace any damaged si de curtai n ai rbag.
1. P lace the si de curtai n ai rbag as s embl y on the si de of the roof, and fit its cl i ps (A) i nto the hol es i n the body. Ti ghten the
si de curtai n ai rbag mounti ng bol ts (B) and new mounti ng bol ts (C) to the speci fi ed torque, and the cl i p is pushed until
s toppi ng.
4- Door
(cont'd)
24-219
Side Curtain Airbag Replacement (cont'd)
2-Door
24-220
2. Connect the SRS fl oor wi re harness 2P connector (A) to the si de curtai n ai rbag 2P connector.
4-Door
2-1
3. Do the battery termi nal reconnecti on procedure (see page 22-91).
5. After i nstal l i ng the si de curtai n ai rbag, conf i rm proper s ys tem operati on: T urn the i gni ti on s wi tch to ON (II); the SRS
i ndi cator s houl d come on for about 6 seconds and then go off.
6. I nstall all removed parts in reverse order of removal , If any cl i ps are stress- whi tened, replace them wi th new ones.
7. C onf i rm proper headl i ner/pi l l ar tri m overl ap (see page 24-210).
24-221
Ai rbag and Tensi oner Di sposal
Depl oyment Tool 07HAZ-SG00500
Bef or e sc r appi ng any ai r bags, si de ai r bags, si de cur t ai n
ai r bags, seat belt t ensi oner s, (i ncl udi ng t hose i n a whol e
vehi c l e to be sc r apped), t he part (s) must be depl oyed. If
t he vehi c l e i s sti ll wi t hi n t he war r ant y per i od, t he Honda
Di st ri ct Par t s and Ser vi c e Manager must gi ve appr oval
and/or spec i al i nst r uct i on bef ore depl oyi ng t he part (s).
Onl y after t he part (s) have been depl oyed (as t he r esul t
of vehi c l e c ol l i si on, f or exampl e), c an t hey be sc r apped.
If t he par t s appear i ntact (not depl oyed), t reat t hem wi t h
ext r eme caut i on. Fol l ow t hi s pr ocedur e.
Depl oyi ng Ai r bags i n t he Vehi c l e
If an S RS equi pped vehi c l e i s to be ent i rel y sc r apped, its
ai r bags, si de ai r bags, si de cur t ai n ai r bags, and seat belt
tensi oners s houl d be depl oyed whi l e sti i i i n t he vehi c l e.
These part s shoul d not be c onsi der ed as sal vageabl e
part s and shoul d never be i nst al l ed i n anot her vehi c l e.
1. Tur n t he i gni t i on swi t c h to L OCK (0). Do t he bat t ery
t er mi nal di sconnect i on pr ocedur e (see page 22-91),
t hen wai t at l east 3 mi nut es bef ore st art i ng wor k.
2. Conf i r m that eac h ai r bag, si de ai r bag, si de cur t ai n
ai r bag, or seat belt t ensi oner i s sec ur el y mount ed.
3. Conf i r m t hat t he depl oyment t ool i s f unct i oni ng
pr oper l y by f ol l owi ng t he c hec k pr ocedur e on t he t ool
l abel .
Driver's Airbag
4. Remove t he ac c es s panel (A) f r om t he st eer i ng wheel ,
t hen di sc onnec t t he dr i ver ' s ai r bag 4P connect or (B)
f r om t he c abl e reel 4P connect or .
Front Passenger's Airbag
page 20-174).
6. Det ach t he connect or cl i p, t hen di sconnect t he
dashboar d wi r e har ness 4P connect or (A) f r om front
passenger ' s ai r bag 4P connect or .
A
Si de Airbag
7. Di sconnect t he S RS f l oor wi r e har ness 2P c onnec t or s
(A) f r om t he dr i ver ' s and t he f ront passenger ' s si de
ai r bag 2P c onnec t or s.
A
24-222
Si de Cur t ai n-Ai r bag
;
.
8. Remove t he C-pi l l ar t r i m:
4- door (see page 20- 110)
2-door (s eepage 20-110)
9. Di sc onnec t t he S RS f l oor wi r e har ness 2P connect or
(A) f r om t he si de curt ai n ai r bag 2P connect or .
4- Door
Seat Bel t Tensi oner
10.4-door : Remove t he B-pi l l ar l ower t ri m (see page
20-110).
11.2-door : Remove t he r ear si de t ri m panel (see page
20-127).
12. Di sconnect t he S RS f l oor wi r e har ness 4P connect or
(A) f r om t he seat belt t ensi oner 4P connect or . Pull t he
seat belt out all t he way and cut it.
13. Cut off eac h c onnec t or , and st r i p t he ends of t he wi r es.
Twi st eac h pair; of unl i ke c ol or ed wi r es t oget her , and
cl i p an al l i gat or cl i p (A) f r om t he depl oyment t ool to
eac h pai r.
NOTE:
'" '. Pl ace t he depl oyment t ool at l east 30 ft (10 m) away
f r om t he vehi c l e.
The dr i ver ' s and front passenger ' s ai r bags have
dual inflators'. Twi st eac h pai r of unli ke col or ed
wi r es t oget her , and cl i p an al l i gat or cl i p to eac h
pai r.
(cont' d)
24-223
S RS (Supplemental Restrai nt Syst em)
Ai rbag and Tensi oner Di sposal (cont' d)
14. Connec t a 12 V battery to t he t ool .
I f the green l i ght on the tool comes on, the i gni ter
ci rcui t is defecti ve and cannot depl oy the
component. Go to Di sposal of Damaged
C omponents .
If the red l i ght on the tool comes on, the component
is ready to be depl oyed.
15. P ush the tool 's depl oyment s wi tch. T he ai rbags and
tensi oners s houl d depl oy (depl oyment is both hi ghl y
audi bl e and vi si bl e: A l oud noi se and rapi d i nfl ati on of
the bag, f ol l owed by s l ow defl ati on).
I fthe components depl oy and the green l i ght on the
tool comes on, conti nue wi th this procedure.
If a component does not depl oy, and the green l i ght
comes ON, its i gni ter is defecti ve. Go to Di sposal of
Damaged C omponents .
Duri ng depl oyment, t he ai r bags can become hot
enough to burn you. W ai t for 30 mi nutes after
depl oyment before touchi ng the ai rbags.
16. Di spose of the compl ete ai rbag. No part of it can be
reused. P lace it in a sturdy plastic bag (A), and seal it
securel y. Di spose of the depl oyed ai rbag accordi ng to
your local regul ati ons.
Depl oyi ng Component s Out of t he Vehi cl e
If an intact ai rbag or tensi oner has been removed f r om a
scrapped vehi cl e, or has been f ound defecti ve or
damaged duri ng transi t, storage, or servi ce, it s houl d be
depl oyed as f ol l ows :
1. C onf i rm that the depl oyment tool is functi oni ng
properl y by f ol l owi ng the check procedure Depl oyi ng
Ai rbags in the Vehi cl e on the tool label.
2. P osi ti on the ai rbag face up, outdoors , on flat ground,
at least 30 ft (10 m) f r om any obstacl es or peopl e.
3. F ol l ow steps 13 through 16 of the i n- vehi cl e
depl oyment procedure.
NOTE : T he dri ver's and front passenger's ai rbags
have dual i nfl ators. T wi s t each pair of unl i ke col ored
wi res together, and cl i p an al l i gator clip to each pair.
24-224
Cable Reel Replacement
Di sposal of Damaged Component s
1. If i nst al l ed in a vehi c l e, f ol l ow t he r emoval procedure
for the dr i ver ' s ai r bag (see page 24-211), front
passenger ' s ai rbag (see page 24-212), si de ai rbag (see
page 24-215), si de curtai n ai rbag (see page 24-216),
and seat belt tensi oner, 4- door (see page 24-10),
2- door (see page 24-5).
2. In all cases, make a short ci rcui t by cutti ng, stri ppi ng,
and twi s ti ng together the two i nfl ator wi res.
NOTE : The dri ver's and front passenger's ai rbags
have dual i nfl ators. The like col or wi res go to the
i ndi vi dual inflators. Twi s t the like col ored wi res
together.
3. P ackage the component in exactl y the s ame
packagi ng that the new repl acement part came i n.
4. Mark the outsi de of the box DAMAGE D AI R B AG NOT
DEP LOY ED, DAMAGE D SI DE AI RB AG NOT
DEP LOY ED, DAMAGE D SI DE CURTAI N AI R B AG NOT
DEP LOY ED, or DAMAGE D S E AT B ELT TE NS I ONE R
NOT DEP LOY ED so it does not get confus ed wi th your
parts stock.
5. Contact your H onda District P arts and S ervi ce
Manager for i nstructi ons on how and where to return
it for di sposal .
Depl oyment Tool Check
1. Connect the yel l ow clips to both swi tch protector
handl es on the tool .
2. T hen connect the red lead to the posi ti ve battery post
and the black lead to the negati ve battery post.
3. P ush the operati on swi tch: The green l i ght s houl d
come on, i ndi cati ng that the tool is operati ng properl y
and is ready for use. If the red l i ght stays on, the tool is
faul ty, and another one mus t be used for the
procedure.
4. Di sconnect the tool clips and connectors f r om the
protector handl es and the battery.
Removal
1. Make sure the front wheel s are al i gned strai ght
ahead.
page 22-91), then wai t at least 3 mi nutes .
3. R emove the dri ver's ai rbag (see page 24-211).
4. Di sconnect the cabl e reel subharness 20P connector
(A) f r om the cabl e reel , then remove the steeri ng
wheel bol t (B ).
5. C onf i rm that the front wheel s poi nt strai ght ahead,
then remove the steeri ng wheel wi th a steeri ng wheel
pul l er (see page 17-6). Do not tap on the steeri ng
wheel or steeri ng col umn shaft when removi ng the
steeri ng wheel .
(cont'd)
24-225
Cabl e Reel Repl acement (cont' d)
6. Remove t he upper and l ower c ol umn c over s (see
page 20-181).
7. Di sc onnec t t he dashboar d wi r e har ness 4P c onnec t or
(A) f r om t he c abl e reel 4P connect or (B), t hen
di sc onnec t t he dashboar d wi r e har ness 20P
connect or (C) f r om t he c abl e reel (D).
8. Rel ease t he lock t ab (A) under t he c abl e reel c onnec t or
wi t h a 90 hook shaped t ool (B). Sl i de t he t ool bel ow
t he c abl e reel connect or j ust above t he lock t ab.
Rel ease t he l ower lock t ab (C), and sl i de t he c abl e reel
off t he c ol umn.
B
Inst al l at i on
1. Bef or e i nst al l i ng t he st eer i ng wheel , make sur e front
wheel s ar e al i gned st rai ght ahead.
2. If not al r eady done, di sc onnec t t he negat i ve cabl e
f r om t he bat t ery, t hen wai t at l east 3 mi nut es.
3. Set t he t urn si gnal c anc el i ng sl eeve (A) s o that t he
pr oj ect i ons (B) ar e al i gned ver t i cal l y.
t
A
4. Car ef ul l y i nst al l t he cabl e reel (A) on t he st eer i ng
c ol umn shaf t . Then connect t he di sconnect t he
dashboar d wi r e har ness 20P connect or (B) to t he
cabl e r eel , and connect t he c abl e reel 4P connect or (C)
t o t he dashboar d wi r e har ness 4P connect or (D).
5. Inst al l t he upper and l ower c ol umn c over s (see page
20-181).
24-226
6. Bef or e Inst al l i ng t he st eer i ng wheel , make sur e t he
f ront wheel s ar e poi nt i ng ahead, t hen cent er t he cabl e
reel (A). Do thi s by f i rst rotati ng t he c abl e reel
c l oc kwi se unti l it st ops. Then rotate i t "
countercl ockwi se ^(iabout three t ur ns) unti l t he ar r ow
mar k (B ) on t he c abl e reel label poi nt s st r ai ght up.
7. Posi t i on t he t wo t abs (A) of t he t ur n si gnal cancel i ng
sleeve-(B ) as s hown, and i nst all the. st eer i ng wheel on
t o t he st eer i ng c ol umn shaf t , maki ng sur e t he st eer i ng
wheel hub '(C) engages t he pi ns (D) of t he cabl e reel
and t abs of t he t ur n si gnal c anc el i ng sl eeve. Do not'
t ap on t he st eer i ng wheel or st eer i ng c ol umn shaf t
, when i nst al l i ng t he st eer i ng wheel .
B
8. Inst al l t he st eer i ng wheel bolt (A), and t i ght en it to t he
speci f i ed t or que, t hen c onnec t t he c abl e reel
s ubhar nes s 20P c onnec t or (B ). .
9. I nstall the dri ver's ai rbag (see page 24-211).
page 22-91).
11 Clear any DTCs wi th the H DS (see page 24-38).
12. After i nstal l i ng the cabl e reel , conf i rm proper s ys tem
operati on:
T urn the i gni ti on swi t c h to ON (II); the S RS i ndi cator
s houl d come on f or about .6 sec onds and then go
off. "
After the SRS i ndi cator has turned off, turn the
steeri ng wheel ful l y left and ri ght to conf i rm the *
S RS i ndi cator does not come on.
Make sure the horn and turn si gnal swi tches work
properl y.
Make sure the steeri ng wheel swi tches wor k
properl y.
24-227
S RS Uni t Repl acement
Removal
1. Do the battery termi nal di s connecti on procedure (see
page 22- 91), then wai t at least 3 mi nutes before
starti ng work.
2. R emove the dri ver's and passenger's das hboard
center l ower cover (see page 20-170).
3. R emove the T OR X bol t (A) usi ng a T OR X T30 bit.
4. R emove the audi o disc changer (wi th navi gati on
system) (see page 23-118) or center pocket (wi thout
navi gati on system) (see page 20-168).
5. Di sconnect S RS uni t connectors A (39P) and B (39P)
f r om the SRS uni t (C).
NOTE : T he S RS uni t connectors have lever locks.
Release the locks before di sconnecti ng the
connectors (see page 24-30).
6. R emove the T OR X bol ts (D) usi ng a T OR X T30 bit,
then pul l out the SRS uni t.
24-228
Inst al l at i on
1. I nstall the S RS uni t (A) wi th a new T OR X bol t (B ), using
a TOR X T30 bit.
NOTE : B e sure the SRS uni t is si tti ng squarel y agai nst
it's bracket before torqui ng the T OR X bolt.
A
2. I nstall the new TORX bolts (A) usi ng a TORX T30 bi t
then connect the connectors (B ) to the SRS uni t (C);
push them i nto posi ti on unti l they click (see page
24-30).
page 22-91).
4. Make sure the SRS uni t has the latest software. If it
does not have the latest, update the software in the
SRS uni t (see page 24-39).
6. Check the operati on of the ODS uni t wi th the H DS (see
page 24-41).
7. C onfi rm proper SRS operati on: T urn the i gni ti on
swi tch to ON (II); the SRS i ndi cator s houl d come on
for about 6 seconds and then go off.
8. Reinstall all removed parts.
24-229
Si de i mpact Sensor (Fi rst) Repl acement
4-Door
Removal
starti ng work.
2. R emove the B -pillar l ower tr i m (see page 20-110).
3. Di sconnect the SRS fl oor wi r e harness 2P connector
(A) f r om the si de i mpact sensor (first) (B ).
4. R emove the TORX bol t (C) usi ng a T OR X T30 bit, then
remove the si de i mpact sensor (first).
Inst al l at i on
1. I nstall the si de i mpact sensor (first) (A) wi th a new
T OR X bol t (B ), usi ng a T OR X T30 bit. Connect the S RS
fl oor wi r e harness 2P connector (C) to the si de i mpact
sensor (first).
Replace.
page 22-91).
4. C onf i rm proper SRS operati on: T urn the i gni ti on
s wi tch to ON (II); the SRS i ndi cator s houl d come on
f or about 6 seconds and then go off.
24-230
2-Door
Removal
1. Do t h ebattery t er mi nal di sconnect i on pr ocedur e (see
page 22-91), t hen wai t at l east 3 mi nut es before,
st art i ng wor k.
2. Removet he door si l l t ri m (see page 20-105).
. 4-door (s ee page 20-107) '
3. Tur n over t he rear port ion of t h ecar pet as needed.
4. Di sconnect t he S RS f l oor wi r e h arnes s 4P connect or
(A), fromt h e s ideimpact s ens or (firs t ) (B).
5. Remove t he TORX bolt (C) usi ng a TORX T30 bi t, t hen
r emove t he si de Impact sensor (fi rst).
Inst al l at i on
1. Inst al l t he si de i mpact sensor (fi rst) (A) wit h anew
TORX bolt (B), us ing a TORX T30 bit . Connect t h e SRS
f l oor wi r e h arnes s 4P connect or (C) t o the si de impact
s ens or (firs t ).
2. Do t h e bat t ery t erminal reconnect ion procedure (s ee
page22-91).
3. Clear any DTCs wit h t h e HDS (s eepage 24-38).
4. Confirmproper SRSoperat ion: Turn t h e ignit ion
s wit ch t o ON (II); t h e SRSindicat or s h ould comeon
for about 6 s ec onds and t hen go off.
5. Reins t all all removed part s .
24-231
Side Impact Sensor (Second) Repl acement
4-Door
Removal
starti ng work.
2. R emove the seat si de bol ster (see page 20-242).
3. Di sconnect the S RS fl oor wi re harness 2P connector
(A) f r om the side i mpact sensor (second) (B ).
4. R emove the T OR X bol t (C) usi ng a T OR X T30 bit, then
remove the si de i mpact sensor (second).
Inst al l at i on
1. I nstall the si de i mpact sensor (second) (A) wi th a new
T OR X bol t (B ), usi ng a T OR X T30 bit. Connect the S RS
fl oor wi re harness 2P connector (C) to the si de i mpact
sensor (second).
(1.0 kgf m, 7.2 Ibf-ft)
Replace.
page 22-91).
24-232
2-Door
Removal
page 22-91) , then wai t at least 3 mi nutes before
starti ng work.
2. R emove the rear si de tri m panel (see page 20-127).
(A) f r om the si de i mpact sensor, (second) (B ).
C
remove the si de i mpact sensor (second).
Inst al l at i on
1. I nstall the si de i mpact sensor (second) (A) wi th a new
T OR X bol t (B ), us i ng a T OR X T30 bit. Connect the SRS
fl oor wi re harness 2P connector (C) to the si de i mpact
sensor (second).
C
page 22-91).
s wi tch to ON (II); the S RS i ndi cator s houl d come on
24-233
Rear Safing Sensor Replacement
Removal
1. Do t he bat t ery termi nal di sconnect i on procedure (see
page 22-91) , then wai t at l east 3 mi nut es before
st art i ng work.
2. R emove the rear seat cus hi on (see page 20-241).
3. Di sconnect the SRS fl oor wi re harness 2P (4- door) or
4P (2- door) connector (A) f r om the rear safi ng sensor
(B ).
C
4. R emove the T OR X bol t (C) us i ng a T OR X T30 bi t then
remove the rear safi ng sensor.
Inst al l at i on
1. I nstall the rear safi ng sensor (A) wi th a new T OR X bol t
(B ), usi ng a T OR X T30 bit. Connect the SRS fl oor wi re
harness 2P (4- door) or 4P (2- door) connector (C) to the
rear safi ng sensor.
(1.0 kgf m, 7.2 I bfft)
Replace.
page 22-91).
swi tch to ON (II); the SRS i ndi cator s houl d c ome on
24-234
Front Passenger's Weight Sensor Replacement
4-Door
Removal
NOTE;
R emoval of t he front passenger' s wei ght sensor s must
be done accordi ng to P recauti ons and P rocedures (see
page 24-25).
The front passenger' s wei ght sensor s ar e part of t he
seat f r ame and must be repl aced t he front passenger' s
seat f r ame assembl y.
page 22-91), t hen wai t at l east 3 mi nutes before
starti ng work.
2. R emove the front passenger's seat frame/front
passenger's wei ght sensor as the front passenger's
seat f rame as s embl y (see page 20-208).
Inst al l at i on
NOTE :
B e sure to install the harness wi res so they are not
pi nched or i nterferi ng wi th other parts.
The front passenger's wei ght sensor are part of the
seat f rame and mus t be repl aced as the front
passenger's seat f rame assembl y.
1. I nstall the removed parts to the new seat f rame/ front
passenger's wei ght sensor as the front passenger's
seat f rame as s embl y.
page 22-91).
4. Do the front passenger's wei ght sensor initialization
(see page 24-40).
5. C onf i rm proper S RS operati on: T urn the i gni ti on
s wi tch to ON (II); the SRS i ndi cator s houl d come on
24-235
F ront Passenger's Weight Sensor Replacement (cont'd)
2-Door
Removal
NOTE:
Removal of t he f ront passenger ' s wei ght s ens or s must
be done accor di ng t o Pr ecaut i ons and Pr oc edur es (see
page 24-25).
The f ront passenger ' s wei ght sensor ar e part of t he
seat rai l and must be r epl aced as t he f ront passenger ' s
seat f r ame assembl y.
st art i ng wor k.
2. Remove t he f ront passenger ' s seat (see page 20-194).
3. R emove the upper rail outer cover and upper rail
i nner c over (see page 20-211).
4. Di sc onnec t t he f ront passenger ' s wei ght sensor
c onnec t or s (A) f r om t he ODS uni t har ness. Remove
t he mount i ng TORX bol t s (B) f r om f ront passenger ' s
wei ght s ens or s (C), t hen r emove it.
Inst al l at i on
NOTE:
Be sur e to i nst al l t he har ness wi r es so t hey ar e not
pi nched or i nt erf ere wi t h ot her par t s.
Make sur e both of t he hooks (A) on t he seat t rack ar e
properl y sec ur ed to t he f ront bracket (B). If t he hooks
ar e not pr oper l y sec ur ed, t he f ront passenger ' s wei ght
sensor s wi l l not perf orm properl y.
1. Inst al l and t or que t he f ront passenger ' s wei ght
s ens or s wi t h new mount i ng TORX bol t s (C) under t he
seat c ushi on.
2. Connec t t he f ront passenger ' s wei ght sensor
c onnec t or s (D) to t he ODS uni t har ness.
3. Install t he upper rai l out er c over and upper rai l i nner
c over (see page 20-211).
4. Install t he f ront passenger ' s seat (see page 20-194).
page 22-91).
6. Cl ear any DTCs wi t h t he HDS (see page 24-38).
7. Do t he f ront passenger ' s wei ght sensor i ni ti ali zati on
(see page 24-40).
8. Conf i r m pr oper S RS oper at i on: Tur n t he i gni ti on
swi t ch t o ON (II); t he S RS i ndi cat or shoul d c ome on
f or about 6 sec onds and t hen go off.
24-236
ODS Uni t Repl acement
Removal
starti ng work.
2. R emove the front passenger's seat (see page 20-194).
3. T urn over the seat-back cover/pad as needed:
4. R emove the cover (A), then di sconnect the ODS uni t
18P connector (B) and OP DS sensor connectors (C)
f r om the ODS uni t (D).
E
5. R emove the two washers, nuts (E), and the ODS unit.
Inst al l at i on
1. P lace the ODS uni t (A) on the seat- back f rame. I nstall
the two was hers and nuts, and torque the two nuts
( B ) , then connect the ODS uni t harness 18P connector
(C) and OP DS sensor connectors (D) to the ODS uni t.
Reinstall the cover (E).
B
2. I nstall the seat- back cover cover/pad in the reverse
order of removal :
3. I nstall the front passenger's seat (see page 20-200).
page 22-91).
6. Set the seat- back in the normal posi ti on, and make
sure there is nothi ng on the front passenger's seat.
7 Do the ODS uni t initialization (see page 24-40).
8. C onf i rm proper SRS operati on: Turn the i gni ti on
swi tch to ON (II); the SRS i ndi cator shoul d come on
24-237
Front Impact Sensor Repl acement
Removal
page 22- 91) , then wai t at least 3 mi nutes before
starti ng work.
2. R emove the front bumper (see page 20-255).
3. Left si de: remove the i ntake air resonator (see page
11-333).
4. Di sconnect the left or ri ght engi ne compar tment wi re
harness 2P connector (A) f r om the f ront i mpact sensor
(B ).
remove the front i mpact sensor.
Inst al l at i on
1. I nstall the front i mpact sensor (A) wi th new T OR X
bolts (B ), usi ng a T OR X T30 bit. Connect the left or
ri ght engi ne compartment wi re harness 2P connector
(C) to the front i mpact sensor.
A
page 22-91).
24-238
Dri ver's Seat Position Sensor Replacement
Removal (Power seat )
NOTE : Do not turn the i gni ti on swi tch to ON (II), and do
not connect the battery cabl e whi l e removi ng the
dri ver's seat posi ti on sensor.
1. Raise the seat all the way up.
starti ng work.
3. R emove the front dri ver's seat (see page 20-194).
4. Di sconnect the dri ver's seat wi re harness 2P
connector (A) f r om the dri ver's seat posi ti on sensor
(B ).
5. R emove the nut (C), then remove the dri ver's seat
posi ti on sensor.
Inst al l at i on (Power seat )
NOTE :
B e sure to install the harness so it does not pi nched or
i nterfere wi th other parts.
Do not turn the i gni ti on swi tch to ON (II), and do not
connect the battery cable whi l e i nstal l i ng the dri ver's
seat posi ti on sensor.
1. I nstall the dri ver's seat posi ti on sensor (A) wi th a nut
(B ), then connect the dri ver's seat wi re harness 2P
connector (C) to the dri ver's seat posi ti on sensor.
2. Reinstall the front dri ver's seat (see page 20-194).
page 22-91).
5. Check the operati on of the dri ver's seat posi ti on
sensor wi th the H DS (see page 24-43).
(cont'd)
24-239
Dri ver' s Seat Posi t i on Sensor Repl acement (cont' d)
Removal (Manual seat )
NOTE : Do not turn the i gni ti on s wi tch to ON (II), and do
not connect the battery cabl e whi l e removi ng the
dri ver's seat posi ti on sensor.
1. Raise the seat all the way up.
starti ng work.
3. R emove the front dri ver's seat (see page 20- 194).
4. R emove the recl i ne cover (see page 20-208).
5. Di sconnect the dri ver's seat posi ti on sensor harness
2P connector (A) f r om the dri ver's seat posi ti on
sensor (B ).
C
remove the dri ver's seat posi ti on sensor.
Inst al l at i on (Manual seat )
NOTE :
B e sure to install the harness so it does not pi nched or
i nterfere wi th other parts.
Do not turn the i gni ti on swi tch to ON (II), and do not
connect the battery cabl e whi l e i nstal l i ng the dri ver's
seat posi ti on sensor.
1. I nstall the dri ver's seat posi ti on sensor (A) wi th a new
T OR X bol t (B ), usi ng a T OR X T30 bit. Connect the
dri ver's seat posi ti on sensor harness 2P connector (C)
to the dri ver's seat posi ti on sensor.
/ B
/ 9.8 N-m
2. I nstall the recline cover (see page 20-208).
3. I nstall the front dri ver's seat (see page 20-194).
page 22-91).
6. Check the operati on of the dri ver's seat posi ti on
sensor wi th the H DS (see page 24-43).
swi tch to ON (II); the S RS i ndi cator s houl d come on
24-240
Passenger's Airbag Cutoff Indicator Replacement
1. Wi t h navi gat i on: Remove t he dashboar d cent er vent
(see page 20-178).
2. Wi t hout navi gat i on: Remove t he audi o uni t (see page
23-114).
3. Di sconnect t he 6P connect or (A) f r om t he passenger ' s
ai r bag cutoff Indi cat or/hazard war ni ng swi t c h (B).
C
4. Push out t he passenger ' s ai r bag cutoff
i ndi cat or/hazard war ni ng swi t ch f r om behi nd t he
dashboar d cent er vent /audi o uni t (C).
5. Rei nst al l t he part s i n t he r ever se or der of r emoval .
24-241
N OT E S
N OT E S
N OT E S
N OT E S
N O T E S
" Portions of materials contained herein have been reprinted under
license from America Honda Motor Co., I nc. License Agreement AH220 ."

08-10 Honda Accord SM

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

08-10 Honda Accord SM

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

INTRODUCTION

- How to Use Thi s Manual

196 kPa (2.0 kgf/c-^

Engine oil Capacity ('08-09 models)

Oil pump Inner rotor-to-outer rotor radial

Gearbox Angle of rack guide screw loosened

07749-0010000 Dr i ver Handl e, 15x 135L 1

07AAB-RWCA120 Camshaf t Lock Pi n Set 1

UNDER-HOOD FUS E / RE L A Y BOX CONNECTOR B (14P)

Wire side of female terminals

Wire side of female terminals

8. Tur n t he i gni ti on swi t ch to ON (II).

07AAE-SJ AA100 Bal l Joi nt Thr ead Prot ect or, 14 mm 1

07406-0010001 P/S Pr essur e Gauge 1

07406-001000A or 07406-001A101 P/S Pr essur e Gauge 1

07746-0030300 Bear i ng Dr i ver At t achment , 30 mm 1

07AAF-SDAA100 Bal l Joi nt Thr ead Prot ect or, 12 mm 1

4. If t he act uat or does not operat e as speci f i ed, r epl ace

You might also like